{"WKU":"RE0286710","Title":"Hydrophone damper assembly","App_Date":"1974-08-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James W. Widenhofer","Assignee":"Sparton Corporation","ICL_Class":"B63B 2152;B63B 5102","References":"2790186;3329015;3377615;3543228;3543228;3711821;3720909;3803540","Claims":"I claim:1. A hydrophone damper assembly comprising, in combination, an elongatedtube of flexible material having first and second ends, a check valveattached to each tube end and sealing the associated end, said checkvalves permitting water to enter the tube and preventing water egress, andattachment means associated with said tube for attaching hydrophonestructure thereto.2. In a hydrophone damper assembly as in claim 1 wherein said attachmentmeans is mounted upon at least one of said check valves.3. In a hydrophone damper assembly as in claim 1 wherein said tube isformed of a synthetic plastic film.4. In a hydrophone damper assembly as in claim 1, a disk attached to saidtube, said disk having a generally flat planar configuration andtransversely related to the length of said tube and having a diametergreater than the diameter of said tube.5. In a hydrophone damper assembly as in claim 4 wherein said disk isaffixed to said tube adjacent one of said ends.6. In a hydrophone damper assembly as in claim 5 wherein a disk is attachedto each end of said tube.7. In a hydrophone damper assembly as in claim 5 wherein said check valvesinclude tube and disk mounting means, said valve at said one tube endattaching said disk to said tube.8. A hydrophone damper assembly comprising, in combination, an elongatedtube of flexible material having first and second ends, a check valveaffixed to each tube end and closing the associated end permitting waterto enter the tube and preventing water egress therefrom, a substantiallyflat disk member affixed to said tube adjacent each end whereby thegeneral plane of said disks is transversely disposed to the tube length,and attachment means mounted upon said tube adjacent said ends forattaching hydrophone structure thereto.9. In a hydrophone assembly as in claim 8 wherein said tube and disks areformed of a synthetic plastic film, each of said disks including adeformable resilient ring forming and maintaining the disk periphery.10. In a hydrophone damper assembly as in claim 9 wherein said check valvesinclude film retaining means, said film retaining means interconnectingand maintaining the assembly of the associated tube end, disk and checkvalve.11. In a hydrophone damper assembly as in claim 8, disk orientation meansinterposed between said disks and said tube obliquely angularly orientingthe plane of said disks to the length of said tube.12. In a hydrophone damper assembly as in claim 11 wherein said tube is ofa curved configuration relative to its length. .Iadd. 13. A hydrophonedamper comprising, in combination, an envelope of flexible material, acheck valve defined in said envelope directly communicating with theenvironment surrounding said envelope, said check valve permitting waterto directly enter the envelope whereby said envelope confines the watertherein and preventing said water from leaving said envelope, andattachment means associated with said envelope for attaching hydrophonestructure thereto. .Iaddend. .Iadd. 14. In a hydrophone damper assembly asin claim 13 wherein said envelope comprises a tube having first and secondends, and said check valve is located in one of said ends. .Iaddend..Iadd. 15. In a hydrophone damper assembly as in claim 13 wherein saidenvelope comprises a tube having first and second ends, a disk attached tosaid tube adjacent at least one of said ends, said disk having a generallyflat planar configuration and transversely related to the length of saidtube and having a diameter greater than the diameter of said tube..Iaddend. .Iadd. 16. In a hydrophone damper assembly as in claim 15wherein said disk is formed of a flexible synthetic plastic film and has agenerally circular periphery, an annular resilient spring element withinsaid disk engaging the periphery thereof and having a normal expandedcircular configuration, said element capable of being twisted and foldedinto a plurality of loops of a dimension less than said elements  normalexpanded configuration and expanding into its normal configuration whenunrestrained. .Iaddend. .Iadd. 17. In a hydrophone damper as in claim 13,said envelope having an elongated tubular configuration and an inflatedcylindrical transverse cross-sectional configuration, said check valvehaving a flat configuration having a circular diameter substantiallycorresponding to the inflated diameter of said envelope. .Iaddend. .Iadd.18. A hydrophone damper comprising, in combination, an envelope offlexible material having first and second ends, a check valve defined inone of said envelope ends directly communicating with the environmentsurrounding said envelope, said check valve permitting water to directlyenter the envelope whereby said envelope confines the water therein andpreventing water from leaving said envelope, and attachment meansassociated with said envelope for attaching hydrophone structure thereto..Iaddend."}
{"WKU":"RE0286729","Title":"Pliable tape structure","App_Date":"1975-02-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Alfred W. Wakeman","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"E05D  700","References":"1843170;2611659;3279473;3442415;3851353","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A flexible tape for joining mating edges of adjacent members,said tape having an X-like configuration in cross section and providing alongitudinally continuous structure adapted to extend along and be securedto the edges of the members to be joined so that the axis of said X-likeconfiguration coincides generally with the juncture formed by the membersto be joined, said tape comprisingcarrier strip means comprising pliable, longitudinally continuous, marginalweb portions at the extremities of the legs of the X; andflexible, spaced, connector means running crosswise of and .[.beingsecured.]. .Iadd.bonded .Iaddend.to and interconnecting pairs of webportions, at least some of said connector means intersecting and crossingother connector means to form said X-like configuration .[...]. .Iadd.,said flexible connector means in crossing between said web portions beingfree to shift relative to each other within the limits defined by theirpoints of connection to the respective longitudinal web portions..Iaddend.2. A flexible tape as defined in claim 1, wherein at least some of saidconnector means join pairs of transversely opposite web portions.3. A flexible tape as defined in claim 2, wherein said carrier strip meansextends continuously between adjacent legs in each of two oppositequadrants of the X-like configuration.4. A flexible tape as defined in claim .[.3.]. .Iadd.23, .Iaddend.whereinsaid adhesive is of the pressure-sensitive type and is confined to theouter margins of confronting faces of said carrier strip means, said tapefurther including temporary protective release strips covering saidadhesive but peelable therefrom to expose said adhesive when said tape isapplied to the members to be joined.5. A flexible tape as defined in claim 4, wherein the protective releasestrips overlap the inner margins of the adhesive to provide free tabsalong such margins.6. A flexible tape as defined in claim 1, wherein said connector means arebiased longitudinally of the tape axis.7. A flexible tape as defined in claim 1, wherein said connector meanscomprise alternately crossing flexible strands.8. A flexible tape as defined in claim 1, wherein said connector meanscomprise alternately crossing groups of strands.9. A flexible, continuous tape hinge for application along adjacent edgesof members to be hingedly joined, said hinge have an X-like configurationin cross section and said hinge comprisingcarrier strip means of pliable sheet material running lengthwise of thehinge on transversely opposite sides of its axis; andflexible strands running crosswise of said axis and carrier strip means,each strand having its cross-axis ends secured to faces of opposed carrierstrip portions, at least some of said strands intersecting and crossingover other of said strands to form the hinge axis at their intersection.10. A tape hinge as defined in claim 9, wherein the carrier strip portionsare disposed in transversely opposed quadrants of the X-likeconfiguration.11. A tape hinge as defined in claim 9, wherein the carrier strip portionsin each quadrant are integrally joined along the hinge axis.12. A tape hinge as defined in claim 10, which further includespressure-sensitive adhesive on the confronting faces of the legs of theX-like configuration in transversely related quadrants.13. A tape hinge as defined in claim 12, wherein said adhesive coating islocated on confronting faces of said carrier strips.14. A tape hinge as defined in claim 12, which further includes flexiblerelease strips covering said adhesive coating but peelable therefrom toexpose said adhesive upon application of the hinge to members to behingedly joined.15. A tape hinge as defined in claim 9, wherein each of said flexiblestrands running crosswise of said axis and carrier strip means has itscross-axis ends secured to faces of said carrier strip means over asubstantial portion of the width thereof.16. A tape hinge as defined in claim 15, which further includespressure-sensitive adhesive coating on at elast one tape face on each sideof the hinge axis.17. A tape hinge as defined in claim 16, wherein said pressure-sensitiveadhesive coating is disposed on confronting faces of the legs of theX-like configuration in transversely related quadrants, said tape furtherincluding flexible release strips covering said adhesive coating butpeelable therefrom to expose said adhesive upon application of the hingeto members to be hingedly joined.18. A tape hinge as defined in claim 9, wherein the carrier strip portionsare disposed in diametrically opposed quadrants of the X-likeconfiguration and the strip portions in each quadrant are integrallyjoined along the hinge axis.19. A flexible tape for joining mating edges of adjacent members,said tape having an X-like configuration in crosssection and providing alongitudinally continuous structure adapted to extend along and be securedto the edges of members to be joined so that the axis of said X-likeconfiguration coincides generally with the juncture formed by the membersto be joined, said tape comprisingpliable longitudinally continuous carrier .[.strips.]. .Iadd.means.Iaddend.forming the extremities of the legs of the X .[.in transverselyopposite quadrants of the X.].; andflexible, spaced, connector means running crosswise of and interconnecting.[.marginal portions of.]. opposite carrier .[.strips.]. .Iadd.means, allof .Iaddend.said connector means intersecting and crossing .[.eachother.]. alternately to .Iadd.join diagonally opposite carrier means and.Iaddend.form said X-like configuration.20. A flexible tape as defined in claim 19, wherein said carrier.[.strips.]. .Iadd.means .Iaddend.are formed of stretchable sheetmaterial.21. A flexible tape as defined in claim 20 wherein said carrier.[.strips.]. .Iadd.means .Iaddend.are formed of crepe paper.22. A flexible tape as defined in claim 1, wherein said carrier strip meansare formed of stretchable sheet material.23. A flexible tape as defined in claim 1, which further includes adhesivedisposed on confronting faces of said web portions in transversely opposedquadrants of the X, for securing said faces to edges of the members to bejoined. .[.24. A flexible tape as defined in claim 1, wherein saidflexible connector means, in crossing between said web portions to whichthey are connected to form said X-like configuration, are free to shiftrelative to each other within the limits defined by their points ofconnection to the respective longitudinal web portions..]..Iadd. 25. Aflexible tape for joining mating edges of adjacent members,said tape having an X-like configuration in cross-section and providing alongitudinally continuous structure adapted to extend along and be securedto the edges of members to be joined so that the axis of said X-likeconfiguration coincides generally with the juncture formed by the membersto be joined, said tape comprisingcarrier strip means comprising pliable, longitudinally continuous, marginalweb portions at the extremities of the legs of the X;flexible, spaced, connector means running crosswise of and being secured toand interconnecting pairs of web portions, at least some of said connectormeans intersecting and crossing other connector means to form said X-likeconfiguration; andadhesive means disposed on confronting faces of said web portions intransversely opposite quadrants of the X for securing said faces to edgesof the members to be joined..Iaddend. .Iadd. 26. A flexible tape forjoining mating edges of adjacent members,said tape having an X-like configuration in cross-section and providing alongitudinally continuous structure adapted to extend along and be securedto the edges of the members to be joined so that the axis of said X-likeconfiguration coincides generally with the juncture formed by the membersto be joined, said tape comprisingpliable, longitudinally continuous, film forming the extremities of thelegs of the X; andflexible, spaced, connector means running cross-wise of and being joined tosaid film on both sides of the X axis, said connector means intersectingand crossing each other alternately to form said X-likeconfiguration..Iaddend."}
{"WKU":"RE0286737","Title":"Method of preserving perishable products","App_Date":"1975-02-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Joseph J. Esty","Assignee":"U. C. San Diego Foundation","ICL_Class":"B65B 3104","References":"2242686;2814382;3313084","Claims":"Having described my invention, I now claim:1. Those steps in the method of preserving a perishable product in acontainer .[.formed of impermeable material.]. having a product opening,an inlet tube for conveying a purging fluid to the container, and anoutlet tube for withdrawing air from the container, the steps in themethod comprising:(A) inserting the product into the container through the product opening;(B) thereafter permanently sealing the product opening;(C) thereafter purging the interior of the container by forcing an inertfluid into the container through said inlet tube and forcing air from thecontainer through said outlet tube;(D) placing the container in a carton having more stability than thecontainer;(E) extending the tubes to the exterior of the carton;(F) thereafter, and while the container is still pressurized with inertfluid, permanently sealing the tubes closed.2. The steps in the method as defined in claim 1, characterized in that thetubes are formed of plastic that, when cut with a hot scissor, is sealedclosed; and further characterized in that the step of sealing the tubesclosed is by severing the tubes with a hot scissor."}
{"WKU":"RE0286745","Title":"Catamenial device","App_Date":"1973-10-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Linda S. Guyette","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A61f 1320","References":"1222825;1401358;1887526;3085574","Claims":"I claim:1. A rolled cylindrical tampon .Iadd.having means for conducting body fluidto the interior thereof, said tampon .Iaddend.comprising a first sheet ofabsorbent material, .Iadd.and .Iaddend.a second sheet of.[.non-absorbtive.]. .Iadd.relatively non-absorbent wick-like.Iaddend.synthetic woven material superimposed on one face of said firstsheet and extending beyond at least one edge of said first sheet.Iadd.,said first and second sheets being rolled into a cylinder having its outercylindrical surface formed by a portion of said first sheet and having thenon-extending portion of said second sheet disposed entirely within saidouter surface, .Iaddend. .[.whereby.]. .Iadd.so that .Iaddend.upon rollingsaid .[.sheet.]. .Iadd.sheets .Iaddend.into a cylinder said second sheet.[.will act as.]. .Iadd.forms .Iaddend.a spiral wick to the interior ofsaid cylinder. .Iadd. 2. In an intravaginal tampon, the combination offirst means for absorbing menstrual fluid and having an outer body ofmaterial absorbent to such fluid and with top and bottom ends, and secondmeans for transporting menstrual fluid from said top end of said tamponbody directly into the interior of said body, said second means comprisinga relatively non-absorptive wick element disposed within and in contactwith the interior of said outer body and extending from said top endthereof. .Iaddend..Iadd. 3. In a tampon as defined in claim 2, the furtherimprovement wherein said wick element is constructed of a materialsubstantially nonabsorbent to such menstrual fluid. .Iaddend..Iadd. 4. Ina tampon as defined in claim 3, the further improvement wherein said wickelement is structured to pass menstrual fluid therethrough by capillaryaction. .Iaddend..Iadd. 5. In a tampon as defined in claim 4, the furtherimprovement in which said wick element is a woven synthetic materialhaving interstices which form capillary avenues for transportation of suchmenstrual fluid. .Iaddend. .Iadd. 6. In a tampon as defined in claim 2,the further improvement wherein said wick element protrudes beyond saidbody of absorbent material at said top end thereof. .Iaddend..Iadd. 7. Ina tampon as defined in claim 6, the further improvement wherein said wickelement is constructed of a material substantially nonabsorbent to suchmenstrual fluid. .Iaddend..Iadd. 8. In a tampon as defined in claim 7, thefurther improvement wherein said wick element is structured to passmenstrual fluid therethrough by capillary action. .Iaddend..Iadd. 9. In atampon as defined in claim 8, the further improvement in which said wickelement is a woven synthetic material having interstices which formcapillary avenues for transportation of such menstrual fluid..Iaddend..Iadd. 10. In a tampon as defined in claim 2, the furtherimprovement wherein said wick element extends within the interior of saidbody from the top end thereof in the direction toward, but only part ofthe distance to, the bottom end thereof. .Iaddend. .Iadd. 11. Anintravaginal catamenial tampon comprisingA. an outer member including a body of material absorbent to menstrualfluids, and having opposed top and bottom ends and outside surfacestherebetween, andB. an inner member including a relatively nonabsorbent fluid-transportingelement for carrying menstrual fluids to the interior of said body fromsaid top end thereof, said transporting element being in contact with saidbody and disposed within the interior of said body from said outsidesurfaces and extending from only the top end thereof. .Iaddend..Iadd. 12.A tampon as defined in claim 11 further characterized in that saidtransporting element is of a material substantially nonabsorbent to suchmenstrual fluids and is structured for transporting such fluidtherethrough by capillary action. .Iaddend..Iadd. 13. A tampon accordingto claim 12 further characterized in that said transporting element iswoven of synthetic material and has interstices which form capillarymenstrual fluid-transporting avenues. .Iaddend. .Iadd. 14. A tamponaccording to claim 11 further characterized in that said transportingelement protrudes beyond said body of absorbent material at said top endthereof. .Iaddend..Iadd. 15. A tampon as defined in claim 14, furthercharacterized in that said transporting element is of a materialsubstantially nonabsorbent to such menstrual fluids and is structured fortransporting such fluid therethrough by capillary action. .Iaddend..Iadd.16. A tampon according to claim 15 further characterized in that saidtransporting element is woven of synthetic material and has intersticeswhich form capillary menstrual fluid-transporting avenues. .Iaddend..Iadd.17. A tampon according to claim 11 further characterized in that saidtransporting element extends within the interior of said body from the topend thereof in the direction toward, but only part of the distance to, thebottom thereof. .Iaddend."}
{"WKU":"RE0286753","Title":"Removable vehicle chassis sub-frame with engine","App_Date":"1974-07-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Dean Hobbensiefken","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B60k  500","References":"696397;725394;781990;783599;810379;1727721;1770279;2013599;2047336;2383611;3062309","Claims":"I claim:1. In a motor vehicle:a frame having frame side elements and cross elements, including at leastone fixed intermediate cross element, connecting the side elements;a cab mounted to the frame;a fifth wheel mounted to the frame rearwardly of the cab for connection toa trailer that overhangs the frame rearwardly of the cab;a front axle having steerable ground wheels thereon;front suspension air bag means for the front axle interposed between thefront axle and the side elements;a power unit comprising a power unit sub-frame including a transverseforward rod and side rods fixed to and extending rearwardly of the forwardrod below the side elements, the side rods having rearward distal ends;a single hitch means, located rearwardly of the front axle, releasablyconnecting the center of the forward rod to the center of the intermediatecross element;a rear axle assembly, having ground wheels and having a differentialassembly, secured to the distal ends of the side rods;rear suspension means interposed between the side rods and the sideelements proximate to the rear axle assembly;means securing the rear suspension means to the side rods and the sideelements including releasable securing means securing the rear suspensionmeans to at least one of the side rods and the side elements;engine mounting means extending between the side rods between the hitchmeans and the rear axle assembly; andan engine assembly, including an engine, secured on said mounting means andlocated between the hitch means and the rear axle assembly.2. The invention of claim 1, wherein:the rear suspension means comprises a series of air bags.3. The invention of claim 1, and:a stabilizer rod releasably secured between the differential assembly andthe frame.4. The invention of claim 1, and:a stabilizer rod secured between the frame and the front suspension means.5. In a vehicle:a frame having side elements;a front axle, having steerable ground wheels thereon, secured to forwardlyprojecting frame pivot arms, the frame pivot arms being pivotally securedat their front ends to the frame side elements;yieldable suspension means mounted between the pivot arms and the frameside elements;hitch means spanning the frame side elements rearwardly of the front axle;a power unit, including a sub-frame having hitch connection means,releasably engaged with and extending rearwardly of the hitch means;a rear axle, having ground wheels, secured to the sub-frame rearwardly ofthe hitch means;yieldable suspension means releasably interposed between the sub-frame andthe main frame; andan engine assembly mounted to the sub-frame between the hitch means and therear axle.6. The invention of claim 5, wherein:the yieldable suspension means comprise air bags.7. The invention of claim 5, and:a power train assembly operatively mounted on the sub-frame.8. The invention of claim 5, and:a longitudinally movable fifth wheel assembly on the main frame. .Iadd. 9.In a motor vehicle:a frame having side frame elements and cross elements connecting the sideelements;a cab mounted to the frame;a fifth wheel mounted to the frame rearwardly of the cab for connection toa trailer that overhangs the frame rearwardly of the cab;a front axle having steerable ground wheels thereon;yieldable front suspension means for the front axle disposed between thefront axle and the side elements;a rear axle assembly, having ground wheels thereon and having adifferential assembly;hitch means located between the front and rear axles;a power unit comprising a power unit sub-frame including side rodsextending rearwardly of the hitch means below the side elements, the siderods having forward ends and rearward distal ends, and the rear axleassembly being secured to the distal ends of the side rods;the side rods being releasably connected by the hitch means with the sideframe elements;rear suspension means disposed between the side rods and the side elementsproximate to the rear axle assembly;means securing the rear suspension means to the side rods and the sideelements including releasable securing means securing the rear suspensionmeans to at least one of the side rods and the side elements;engine mounting means extending between the side rods between the hitchmeans and the rear axle assembly; andan engine assembly, including an engine, secured to the engine mountingmeans and located between the hitch means and the rear axle assembly..Iaddend..Iadd. 10.  In a vehicle:a frame having side elements;a front axle, having steerable ground wheels thereon, secured to forwardlyprojecting frame pivot arms, the frame pivot arms being pivotally securedat their front ends to the frame side elements;yieldable suspension means mounted between the pivot arms and the frameside elements;a rear axle having ground wheels thereon;hitch means on the frame side elements located between the front and rearaxles;a power unit, including a sub-frame having hitch connection means,releasably engaged with and extending rearwardly of the hitch means, therear axle being secured to the sub-frame rearwardly of the hitch means;yieldable suspension means releasably disposed between the sub-frame andthe main frame; andan engine assembly mounted to the sub-frame between the hitch means and therear axle. .Iaddend."}
{"WKU":"039302717","Title":"Golf glove","App_Date":"1974-12-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"He Chung Kahng","Assignee":"Hi-Kahng Trading Co.","ICL_Class":"A41D 1900","References":"2379430;2782422","Claims":"What I claim is:1. A golf glove comprising at least an index finger receptacle, a middlefinger receptacle and a back surface extending from said receptacles inthe direction of the wrist, and further comprising another fingerreceptacle disposed adjacent said index finger receptacle and said middlefinger receptacle and overlapping a portion of said back section.2. A golf glove in accordance with claim 1 wherein said other fingerreceptacle is attached along its periphery to said index fingerreceptacle, said middle finger receptacle and said back surface.3. A glove comprising an index finger receptacle, a middle fingerreceptacle, a back surface extending in the direction of the wrist, afinger restraining strap extending between said receptacles, and a fingerrestraining strap attached to said back surface adjacent said index fingerreceptacle and said middle finger receptacle and aligned in a directionsubstantially parallel to said finger restraining strap extending betweensaid finger receptacles.4. A golf glove adapted for use on one hand of a golf player comprising atleast an index finger receptacle and further comprising a fingerreceptacle attached to the side of said index finger receptacle mostnearly adjacent to the thumb and adapted to receive a finger of the golfplayer s other hand."}
{"WKU":"039302725","Title":"Crib leg lock","App_Date":"1974-09-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert J. Boudreau","Assignee":"Hedstrom Co.","ICL_Class":"A47D  701","References":"933921;1549144;1609246;1667080;1834468;2545289;2560109;2574559;2711301;2734200;3670344","Claims":"I claim:1. In combination with a height adjustable crib or the like of the typehaving a corner post and an extensible leg slidably connected to thecorner post and having a series of holes along its length, a lockcomprisingA. a rigid bracket extending around the extensible leg and having sideslying flush against opposite sides of the corner post;B. means for pivotally connecting the bracket sides to the corner post sothat the bracket can be swung toward and away from the leg;C. a rigid nose projecting from the bracket and extending toward the leg,said nose being arranged to engage in one of the leg holes when thebracket is swung against the leg so as to lock the leg at a selectedposition of lengthwise adjustment relative to the corner post, andD. means mounted on the corner post and cooperating with the bracket forremovably retaining the bracket with its nose in said hole said retainingmeans comprising1. a latch pivotally connected to the corner post adjacent to the bracket,and a slot formed in a side of the bracket, the sides of the slot beingengaged by the latch when the bracket is positioned with its nose in saidhole.2. The lock defined in claim 1 wherein the bracket comprises a single rigidmetal stamping.3. The lock defined in claim 1 wherein the pivotal connection of the latchto the corner post is off center so that the force of gravity tends tomaintain the latch in the slot when the bracket is positioned with itsnose in said hole."}
{"WKU":"039302733","Title":"Bed safety side rail arrangement","App_Date":"1975-01-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert C. Stern","Assignee":"Affiliated Hospital Products, Inc.","ICL_Class":"A47D  702;A47C 2100","References":"1240201;2817855;3093839;3125769;3175453;3233930;3419922;3585659","Claims":"I claim:1. A bed arrangement comprisinga bed frame,a side rail assembly for said bed frame, said side rail assembly comprising"}
{"WKU":"039302741","Title":"Assembly for use in recreational activities","App_Date":"1974-10-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Harold A. Syfritt","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B63B  708","References":"2546396;3064370;3601076","Claims":"Having thus set forth and disclosed the nature of this invention, what isclaimed is:1. An assembly for use in recreational activities comprising:a. a collapsible, elongated container having a longitudinal axis andopposite end surfaces transverse to the longitudinal axis,b. said container having a structure effective to receive both liquid andgas mediums therein and including valve means for introducing andexhausting both liquid and gas mediums,c. an elongated frame structure having a plurality of parallel linearsupport members wherein each support member is laterally spaced withrespect to any other lateral support member and a separate end frameportion connected at each end of said support members to form an openstructural configuration for receiving the collapsible container, andd. fastening means for attaching the elongated container to the framestructure with said longitudinal axis disposed substantially parallel tothe linear support members and each said end surface being crossed by anadjacent end frame portion to support the container within the framestructure during use,e. the container being attached to the frame structure with one of saidlinear support members extending longitudinally along one side of thecontainer with the side opposing said one side of the container being freeof a support member whereby the assembly may be used as a pontoon when thecontainer is inflated with a gas fluid medium and is employable in otheruses when the container is not inflated or holds a liquid fluid medium.2. An assembly as defined in claim 1 whereinthe collapsible container includes first and second valve means disposed atdifferent locations on the surface of said container,said first valve means being effective to introduce a fluid medium whilethe second valve means is effective to exhaust a fluid medium.3. An assembly as defined in claim 1 whereinthe collapsible container includes valve means for introducing andexhausting a liquid medium and valve means for introducing and exhaustinga gas medium.4. An assembly as defined in claim 1 whereinthe collapsible container includes a first valve means for introducing andexhausting a fluid medium disposed on one side of the container and asecond valve means for introducing and exhausting fluid medium on anopposing side of said container.5. An assembly as defined in claim 4 whereinone of the valve means is disposed on the side of the container having alinear support means,said valve means includes a scoop means disposed around the valve openingfor directing flow of a liquid medium.6. An assembly as defined in claim 1 whereinthe frame structure includes means for attaching the assembly to a shroudline that is connected to the mast of a sailboat.7. An assembly as defined in claim 1 whereinthe collapsible container includes a flexible support means located insidethe container so that the shape of the container will be maintained in adesired configuration when filled with a fluid medium."}
{"WKU":"039302750","Title":"Method of fabricating a slipper","App_Date":"1975-03-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard Bailin","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A43D  900","References":"914377;2971278;3311937","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method of manufacturing slippers each having a flat sole member and anarc-shaped vamp disposed over the sole member to retain the slipper on thefoot of a user, comprising the steps:a. providing a continuous sole web of sufficient lateral extent to enableplural sole members to be made therefrom,b. locating plural vamp sections over the sole web at predeterminedlocations,c. attaching the plural vamps in their final arc-shape to the sole web atthe predetermined locations,d. positioning the sole web with preattached vamps under a sealing andcutting die, ande. heat-sealing the preattached vamps at opposite sealing zones to the soleweb by the sealing die and substantially simultaneously die-cutting entireslippers with heat-sealed vamps from the sole web.2. The method of claim 1 wherein the heat-sealing of step (e) is carriedout with moderate die pressure, and the die-cutting is carried out withincreased die pressure.3. The method of claim 1 wherein the sole web is composed of pluralmaterial layers.4. The method of claim 1 wherein the vamp is supplied in the form of acontinuous strip, and adjacent sections of the vamp strip are tacked tothe sole web while a curved vamp-forming die is temporarily positionedbetween the vamp strip and sole web at the predetermined locations.5. The method of claim 1 wherein plural vamp sections are pre-formed beforethe attaching step, and temporarily suspended over the predeterminedlocations of the sole web before the attaching step is executed.6. The method of claim 1 wherein the attaching and sealing-cutting stepsare carried out at preceding and subsequent stations, and the sole web isconveyed between the stations while temporarily affixed to a locating trayprovided with means for locating same with respect to the attaching andsealing-cutting dies.7. The method of claim 1 wherein the attaching step is executed by means ofa spot-sealing die having pin sealers.8. The method of claim 1 wherein the sealing-cutting die forms a continuousannulus.9. The method of claim 1 wherein the sole and vamp comprise electronicallyheat-sealable materials."}
{"WKU":"039302768","Title":"Wheel spinning and vehicle conveying apparatus for automatic wheel","App_Date":"1972-08-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Russell A. Van Brakel","Assignee":"Haverberg Auto Laundry Equipment Co.","ICL_Class":"B60S  304","References":"3037223;3554132","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property orprivilege is claimed are defined as follows:1. In a vehicle wheel washing device for wheels of a given minimum treadwidth, a frame, opposed projecting sets of parallel horizontal rollersjournal-mounted in said frame and having their projecting ends spacedapart to define a slot between said sets for the travel of a wheel pushingarm on an endless conveyor, said slot being narrower than said minimumtread width, drive means in the frame for rotating the rollers in one ofsaid sets in a common direction, guide means in the frame beneath saidsets of rollers for guiding the endless conveyor.2. In a vehicle washing device, a passageway for a vehicle wheel having aslot therealong, an endless conveyor beneath the passageway having apusher arm adapted to project upwardly through said slot and engage avehicle wheel occupying the passageway to roll it along the passagewayresponsive to operation of the conveyor, transverse rollers in thepassageway on opposite sides of said slot, means for rotating some of saidrollers such that a vehicle wheel pushed by said arm will be rotatedfaster by such rollers than the rolling speed induced by the pusher arm,wheel scrubbing means on one side of said passageway arranged and adaptedto engage the respective side of a wheel while it is rotated by therollers.3. In a vehicle wheel washing device for use with an endless vehicleconveyor of the type having an upper forwardly moving conveying run and alower return run and having spaced pusher arms arranged and adapted toproject upwardly, while in the upper run, through a slot extending along awheel passageway located above the upper run for engaging the back ofvehicle wheels occupying the passageway to forwardly propel such wheels, asupport frame, two opposed projecting sets of parallel horizontal rollersjournal mounted on said frame and having their projecting ends spacedapart to define a travel path between said sets for passage of such pusherarms, drive means on the frame for rotating the rollers in one of saidsets in a given rotational direction opposite to that of a wheel whenpushed over the rollers by such a pusher arm, guide means in the framebeneath said sets of rollers for guiding such an endless conveyor andwheel scrubbing means on the frame arranged and adapted to engage the sideof a wheel moving over said sets of rollers.4. In a vehicle washing device, a travel path for the wheels on one side ofa wheeled vehicle, said path being partly defined by wheel-spinning meansand having a slot along its length including the portion thereof definedby said wheel-spinning means, endless conveyor means beneath said travelpath having an upper conveying run and including wheel pushing meanshaving an active position projecting upwardly through said slot whilemoving along said upper run, and wheel scrubbing means in the region ofsaid wheel-spinning means movable into and out of wheel scrubbingposition.5. In a device according to claim 4, a deflecting means beneath said wheelspinning means for deflecting said upper run downwardly in the region ofsaid wheel spinning means.6. A device according to claim 4 in which said travel path has guide railsdefining the portions of said slot endwise of said wheel-spinning means,first guide roller means on said wheel pushing means always engaging theunderside of said guide rails while the wheel pushing means travelsthrough said portions of the slot, and deflecting guide means in theregion of said wheel-spinning means deflecting said upper run downwardlyin said region by engagement therewith by said first guide roller means.7. A device according to claim 6 in which said wheel pushing means hassecond roller means arranged to engage the back of the vehicle wheels whenthe wheel pushing means is active while traveling said upper run.8. A device according to claim 4 in which said wheel pushing means hasoptimal active and inactive positions while in said upper run, said wheelpushing means being entirely located beneath said slot while in inactiveposition moving along said upper run.9. A device according to claim 4 in which deflecting means in the region ofsaid wheel-spinning means constantly downwardly deflects said upper run.10. A device according to claim 4 in which said wheel pushing means hasrollers arranged to engage the vehicle wheel when in active position andto engage said deflecting means when in inactive position.11. A device according to claim 4 in which said wheel pushing means hasfirst rollers adjoining the conveyor arranged to engage said deflectingmeans and be downwardly deflected when said wheel pushing means is ineither active or inactive position and has second rollers arranged toengage the vehicle wheel when in active position and arranged to engagesaid deflecting means and be downwardly deflected when said wheel pushingmeans is in inactive position.12. A vehicle wheel washing device comprising,means forming a passageway along which wheels of one side of a car may berolled, a slot located in said passageway, conveyor means beneath thepassageway having a pusher means adapted to project upwardly through saidslot and engage a vehicle wheel occupying the passageway to roll it alongsaid passageway responsive to operation of the conveyor, wheel spinningmeans located in the passageway on opposite sides of said slot adapted toengage and rotate said vehicle wheel so that said wheel is moved faster bysaid spinning means than by said conveyor means, wheel scrubbing means onone side of said passageway arranged and adapted to engage the respectiveside of said wheel when it is rotated by the wheel spinning means."}
{"WKU":"039302776","Title":"Mobile floor sweeper","App_Date":"1974-08-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard F. Wulff","Assignee":"Advance Machine Company","ICL_Class":"E01F  104","References":"1042860;1537003;2913744","Claims":"I claim:1. In a floor sweeper having a rotatable cylindrical brush mounted on amobile chassis, a receiver for receiving debris delivered from said brush,means for raising and lowering said brush, a plate adjacent said brush forthe direction of debris, the improvement in said plate said improvementincludinga. plate means carried by said sweeper and adjacent said brush, andb. means for moving said plate means relative to said brush as said brushis moved relative to said chassis whereby the plate means maintains thesame position relative to the brush,said means for moving said plate means including link means connected tosaid plate means and said means for raising and lowering said brushwhereby the plate means automatically moves relative to the brush when thebrush is raised and lowered.2. The device of claim 1 in which said plate means includes a flat plate.3. The device of claim 2 in which said plate is pivotally mounted on theedge on the chassis.4. In a floor sweeper having a rotatable cylindrical brush mounted on amobile chassis comprising in combination:a. means for raising and lowering said brush relative to the chassis,b. plate means,c. means pivotally mounting said plate means on said chassis, adjacent saidbrush,d. lever means connecting said plate means with said means for raising andlowering said brush whereby the plate means follows the brush as it israised and lowered, andf. means for adjustably positioning one end of said brush relative to thechassis.5. The device of claim 4 in which said plate means includes a single flatplate.6. In a floor sweeper having a rotatable cylindrical brush mounted on amobile chassis, lever and rod means for raising and lowering said brush,means associated with said lever and rod means for adjustably moving oneend portion of said brush relative to the other end, the improvement insaid associated means, said improvement includinga. said means associated with said lever and rod means including first andsecond rod members in axial alignment and carried by said mobile chassis,b. a second arm rigidly secured to said second rod means at the inner end,c. said second rod rigidly secured at the outer end tod. a second bar connected to said brush,e. a first arm rigidly secured to said first rod means at the inner end,f. said first rod rigidly secured at the outer end to,g. a first bar connected to said brush,h. means for changing the relative positions of said second and first armsto cause the end portion of said brush connected to said first bar to moverelative to the chassis.7. The device of claim 6 in which said means for changing the relativepositions of said second and first arms includesa. a screw member mounted on said first arm in engagement withb. an extension bar on said second arm."}
{"WKU":"039302784","Title":"Paintbrush and guard attachment for edging","App_Date":"1974-04-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard A. Nasca","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A46B 1700;B44D  322","References":"922074;1915893;2078193;2116406;2807041;2820237;3401418;3824647","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A device in combination with a paintbrush having a flat handle with anenlarged bristle engaging portion to assist in forming straight uniformedges at the interface of intersecting surfaces and allow application ofpaint to the intended surface while preventing unintended smearing ofpaint on the other surface said device comprising,a flat sheet of material having an elongated central portion with anenlarged coplanar foot portion depending from one end thereof,said foot portion having a straight bottom edge disposed at an acute anglewith respect to the longitudinal axis of said central portion,and a pair of bendable positionable resilient tab members extendingtransversely from the opposite sides of said central portion at a locationspaced from said foot portion and spaced from the opposite end of thecentral portion,said tab members being bendable to a parallel configuration normal to thecentral portion to engage opposite sides of the enlarged bristle engagingportion of the handle and maintain the central portion and foot disposedalong the edge of the bristles to act as an edge guide and a shieldagainst unintended smearing while maintaining both faces of the bristlesunobstructed, and with the extension of the central portion acting as anextension arm to pivot the foot out of contact with the bristles to allowfor dipping into paint.2. The invention as defined in claim 1 wherein said foot portion has a toeat one end thereof extending at an angle with respect to the bottom edgethereof.3. The invention as defined in claim 1 wherein said bottom edge surface ofthe foot portion intersects the longitudinal axis of the central portion.4. The invention as defined in claim 3 wherein the angle of intersection isapproximately 55.degree..5. The invention as defined in claim 1 wherein the sheet material is sheetmetal."}
{"WKU":"039302792","Title":"Rubber windshield wiper blades having increased flexibility at clamping","App_Date":"1974-07-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Dario Arman","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B60S  138","References":"2140453;3084372;3097389","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A resilient blade for use in a windshield wiper assembly, said assemblyincluding a rocker arm carrying spaced apart clamps for gripping the bladeat longitudinally spaced points on the blade, said blade comprising:a. a back portion adapted to be accommodated within the clamps,b. an edge portion adapted to contact a windshield,c. a narrow intermediate portion between said back and edge portionsdefining a hinge along which said edge portion can pivot with respect tosaid back portion,d. a portion of generally triangular cross-sectional shape between saidedge portion and said intermediate portion which thickens from said edgeportion toward said intermediate portion, ande. cavities in said triangular portion only at points laterally alignedwith the points at which the clamps grip said back portion, saidtriangular portion being of full thickness in the longitudinal regionsbetween said cavities.2. A resilient blade as defined in claim 1 wherein said cavities arelocated on both longitudinal sides of said triangular portion."}
{"WKU":"039302806","Title":"Bottle insert for product container","App_Date":"1974-06-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Martin M. Vasas","Assignee":"The Bridgeport Metal Goods Manufacturing Company","ICL_Class":"A47L 1356;A45D 4418","References":"2627619;3084374;3372424;3763870","Claims":"What I claim is:1. An insert for sealing between a reservoir assembly and an applicator ofa product container and for wiping over the applicator therein, saidinsert being fabricated of elastic material and comprising:a tubular having a longitudinal axis;a wiping diaphragm disposed across said tubular frame between thelongitudinal ends thereof, said diaphragm having an aperture disposedtherethrough concentrically about said longitudinal axis; anda sealing rim disposed on the external periphery of said tubular frame andat one longitudinal end thereof, said sealing rim having a flat end walldisposed in a radial plane and facing away from said insert and a taperedinner wall disposed longitudinally inwardly of said end wall, whereby saidrim is of varying thickness along said longitudinal axis, said varyingthickness being of increasing magnitude in a radial direction away fromsaid longitudinal axis, said sealing rim being compressible across saidvarying thickness within the product container and being distorted thereinradially away from said longitudinal axis.2. An insert for use within a product container to wipe comb typeapplicators and to assure proper alignment therein of such applicators,said insert being fabricated of elastic material and comprising:a tubular frame having a longitudinal axis;a wiping diaphragm disposed across said tubular frame between thelongitudinal ends thereof, said diaphragm having an aperture and radialslits disposed therethrough, said aperture being concentric about saidlongitudinal axis with said radial slits extending from the periphery ofsaid aperture; andat least one buttress disposed within said tubular frame to one side ofsaid diaphragm, each said buttress extending from one end of said tubularframe to said diaphragm and having an increasing incline in the directionof said diaphragm, each said buttress being disposed between adjacentradial slits on said diaphragm and precluding passage of the applicatorthrough said insert when the combs thereon are misaligned with said radialslits.3. The insert of claim 2 wherein each said buttress includes a centralridge along said incline with tapered surfaces extending on each side ofsaid central ridge to said tubular frame, said central ridge and saidtapered surfaces cooperating to align the combs of the applicator withsaid radial slits.4. The insert of claim 2 wherein buttresses are disposed on both sides ofsaid diaphragm.5. The insert of claim 4 wherein each said buttress includes a centralridge along said incline with tapered surfaces extending on each side ofsaid central ridge to said tubular frame, said central ridges and saidtapered surfaces cooperating to align the combs of the applicator withsaid radial slits.6. An insert for use within a product container to provide a wiping actionover cylindrically wiped applicators and noncylindrically wiped comb typeapplicators, said insert being fabricated of elastic material andcomprising:a tubular frame having a longitudinal axis;a wiping diaphragm disposed across said tubular frame between thelongitudinal ends thereof, said diaphragm having an aperture disposedtherethrough and indentations disposed therein, said aperture beingconcentric about said longitudinal axis with said indentations extendingradially from the periphery of said aperture, said diaphragm beingflexible to expand said aperture in exerting radial forces of equalmagnitude concentrically about said longitudinal axis with saidindentations concentrating the flexure stresses therein to the point offracture at which slits develop through said diaphragm along saidindentations.7. The insert of claim 6 wherein said indentations are triangularly shaped,each said indentation having an apex disposed on the periphery of saidaperture and one side disposed perpendicularly across a radial linepassing through said apex from said longitudinal axis at a distancetherefrom equal to at least the maximum comb height of the comb typeapplicators.8. The insert of claim 6 wherein at least one buttress is disposed withinthe said tubular frame to one side of said diaphragm, each said buttressextending from one end of said tubular frame to said diaphragm and havingan increasing incline in the direction of said diaphragm, each saidbuttress being disposed between adjacent indentations on said diaphragmand precluding passage of comb type applicators through said insert whenthe combs thereon are misaligned with said indentations.9. The insert of claim 8 wherein each said buttress includes a centralridge along said incline with tapered surfaces extending on each side ofsaid central ridge to said tubular frame, said central ridge and saidtapered surfaces cooperating to align combs on comb type applicators withsaid indentations.10. The insert of claim 8 wherein buttresses are disposed on both sides ofsaid diaphragm.11. The insert of claim 10 wherein each said buttress includes a centralridge along said incline with tapered surfaces extending on each side ofsaid central ridge to said tubular frame, said central ridges and saidtapered surfaces cooperating to align combs on comb type applicators withsaid indentations.12. The insert of claim 8 wherein a sealing rim is disposed on the externalperiphery of said tubular frame and at one longitudinal end thereof, saidsealing rim being of varying thickness along said longitudinal axis, saidvarying thickness being of increasing magnitude in a radial direction awayfrom said longitudinal axis, said sealing rim being compressible acrosssaid varying thickness within the product container and being distortedtherein radially away from said longitudinal axis.13. The insert of claim 12 wherein said sealing rim includes a tapered sideextending from said tubular frame.14. The insert of claim 12 wherein each said buttress includes a centralridge along said incline with tapered surfaces extending on each side ofsaid central ridge to said tubular frame, said central ridge and saidtapered surfaces cooperating to align combs on comb type applicators withsaid indentations.15. An insert for sealing between a reservoir assembly and an applicator ofa product container and for providing a wiping action over cylindricallywiped applicators and noncylindrically wiped comb type applicators, saidinsert being fabricated of elastic material and comprising:a tubular frame having a longitudinal axis;a wiping diaphragm disposed across said tubular frame between thelongitudinal ends thereof, said diaphragm having an aperture disposedtherethrough and indentations disposed therein, said aperture beingconcentric about said longitudinal axis with said indentations extendingradially from the periphery of said aperture, said diaphragm beingflexible to expand said aperture in exerting radial forces of equalmagnitude concentrically about said longitudinal axis with saidindentations concentrating the flexure stresses therein to the point offracture at which slits develop through said diaphragm along saidindentations;buttresses disposed within said tubular frame on both sides of saiddiaphragm, each said buttress extending from one end of said tubular frameto said diaphragm and having an increasing incline in the direction ofsaid diaphragm, each said indentation being disposed between adjacentbuttresses on said diaphragm, each said buttress including a central ridgealong said incline with tapered surfaces extending on each side of saidcentral ridge to said tubular frame, said central ridges and said taperedsurfaces cooperating to align combs on comb type applicators with saidindentations."}
{"WKU":"039302814","Title":"Floor cleaning machine","App_Date":"1974-07-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Rene Principe;Karl Kaser","Assignee":"A. Sutter AG","ICL_Class":"A47L  700","References":"2233167;3165774;3177635;3290865;3550181;3552100","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A floor cleaning machine constructed as a carriage equipped with a guidepole, at least one motor-driven cleaning tool for wet cleaning the floorand rotating about a substantially vertical axis, a regulatable quantityof fresh water admixed with a cleaning agent being delivered per unit oftime from a fresh water supply to the region of the cleaning tool, thecleaning tool processing the delivered fresh water admixed with thecleaning agent at the floor and the resultant soiled water being sucked-upfrom the floor and collected in a separate soiled water container, theimprovement comprising: a machine housing, a suction blower mounted onsaid housing, a fresh water container formed by part of the machinehousing, the soiled water container comprising a loose portable containerwhich is enclosed in the floor cleaning machine when it assumes a workingposition within the floor cleaning machine, a suction compartment havingan air entrance aperture, the soiled water container being connected via aseal with said suction compartment, said seal comprising a marginal edgeformed on said soiled water container, the edge of said suctioncompartment aperture, and a detachable intermediate element engaging bothsaid suction chamber aperture edge and said marginal edge, anautomatically-operating level limiting device for preventing the soiledwater container from over filling, a downwardly inclined collar extendingwithin said suction chamber, the incoming air and soiled water sucked-upfrom the floor by said suction blower being directed against said inclinedcollar, the soiled water flowing downwardly on the surface of said collarand into the said soiled water container, and a plurality of flowdirection changing members mounted above said suction compartment forchanging the direction of travel of the air and entrained water particlestherein to thereby prevent said entrained water particles from enteringsaid suction blower.2. The floor cleaning machine as defined in claim 1, wherein saidintermediate element supports at least one component of the level limitingdevice which prevents the soiled water container from over filling.3. The floor cleaning machine as defined in claim 1, wherein the levellimiting device comprises a float elevationally movably guided andsupported by the intermediate element and at the region of the maximumpermissible level of the soiled water said float comes into contact withand displaces a valve body which closes a suction opening in the suctioncompartment and thus suppresses the inflow of further mixture of air andsoiled water into the said housing.4. The floor cleaning machine as defined in claim 3, wherein the ascendingfloat cooperates with a valve body to shift the same out of a restposition, and wherein after a starting displacement of the valve body outof the rest position the remaining path of the stroke of the valve bodyuntil completely closing a valve opening is undertaken by the action ofthe suction air current independently of the float.5. The floor cleaning machine as defined in claim 1, wherein theintermediate element is constructed such that when the intermediateelement is not installed on the floor cleaning machine there is formed anauxiliary flow branch of a size sufficient to prevent the suction blowerfrom further sucking-up soiled water from the floor.6. The floor cleaning machine as defined in claim 1, wherein the machinehousing includes a compartment in which there is accommodated the soiledwater container when it assumes its work position, a cover for selectivelyclosing and exposing said machine housing compartment, means for mountingsaid cover to be pivotable towards the outside of said housing about asubstantially horizontal axis, said pivotable cover in its pivoted-outposition forming a platform which is located at least approximately at theheight of the floor of the machine housing compartment, the soiled watercontainer being removable from the machine housing compartment via thesaid platform and again being introducable into the machine housingcompartment through the agency of said platform.7. The floor cleaning machine as defined in claim 6, wherein the pivotablecover comprises a floor support for the said soiled water container whichis located in a recessed position at the outer surface of the machinehousing when the machine is ready for use.8. The floor cleaning machine as defined in claim 1 further including meansfor urging the marginal edge of the portable soiled water container intocontact against the seal at the intermediate element and sealinglyenclosing the suction compartment opening when the housing cover whichcloses the machine housing compartment containing the soiled watercontainer is closed, and wherein when the housing cover is open the sealis relieved of the contact pressure and the soiled water container in thecompartment can be removed from therein.9. The floor cleaning machine as defined in claim 8, wherein upon closingof the pivotable cover of the soiled water compartment the compartmentfloor which supports the soiled water container together with thecontainer are raised and thereby compresses the seal, and upon opening thepivotable cover the compartment floor is sufficiently lowered to permitremoval of the container from within the housing.10. The floor cleaning machine as defined in claim 1, further including afloor suction nozzle means for sucking up the water from on the surface ofthe floor and suction conduit extending from said floor suction nozzlemeans, said suction conduit opening at least approximately horizontally ata lateral location into the suction compartment which spans over thesoiled water container, said collar being annular and having a drip edgewhich extends downwardly from the ceiling of the suction compartmentspanning the soiled water container.11. The floor cleaning machine as defined in claim 10, wherein said collarwidens in its inner dimension from the top towards the bottom and with itslower drip edge extending in spaced relationship with respect to saidouter wall, and wherein any splashing water from the soiled watercontainer impacts against an inner surface of the collar and again fallsback via the collar drip edge into the soiled water container.12. The floor cleaning machine as defined in claim 1, wherein said collarsub-divides the soiled water stream flowing into the suction compartmentinto partial streams which collectively flush the entire periphery of anannular compartment between the collar and the outer wall of the suctioncompartment, so that such soiled water stream is distributed over theentire periphery and drops along the outer wall into the soiled watercontainer.13. The floor cleaning machine as defined in claim 1, said flow directionchanging members comprising a number of sealingly stacked body members.14. The floor cleaning machine as defined in claim 1, further including alarge surface filter body mounted in the air flow path through the flowdirection changing members and serving to separate out residual portionsof water particles from the suction air.15. The floor cleaning machine as defined in claim 1, further including aflexible hose leading from the suction compartment of the suction blowerto a floor suction nozzle arrangement, said flexible hose being detachablefrom the floor suction nozzle arrangement and being connectable to asuction conduit immersible in the fresh water container, so that the freshwater container can be emptied with the same suction blower and whereinthe water removed from the fresh water container flows into the soiledwater container and can be carried together therewith to a drain."}
{"WKU":"039302822","Title":"Machine for processing the backs of poultry","App_Date":"1974-09-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Eugene G. Martin;Dale M. Risser","Assignee":"Victor F. Weaver, Inc.","ICL_Class":"A22C 2100","References":"3406425;3451097;3480991;3714682;3731344;3744087;3769656;3837045","Claims":"We claim:1. A machine for processing the back carcass members of poultry andcomprising a frame structure to support processing stations within saidmachine for removing the tails and skin from the backs of a progressiveseries of poultry back carcass members while making a single pass throughsaid machine comprising in combination, a feed rail member upon whichunprocessed poultry back carcass members are tandemly positioned by manualmeans with the tail foremost and the uppermost interior of the cavitysection of said carcass members slidably positioned upon said rail member,conveyor means engageable with the upper surfaces of said carcass membersto move the same along said rail member to a transport station, aninverting endless flexible conveyor and rail section supported by saidframe, a pair of circular sprockets supporting said conveyor for movementof a span thereof substantially horizontally and parallel to said railsection, means to transfer said back carcass members to said rail sectionfrom said feed rail member, a tail flipping means at a flipping stationintermediately of the ends of said rail section and engageable with thetail uppermost on each carcass and operable to mechanically force saidtail from an essentially horizontal position to a substantially upstandingerected position, means to invert said carcass members while supported andmoved by said conveyor to bring the erected tails of said carcass membersinto depending position relative to said carcass, a set of coarseoppositely and inwardly rotating helical gear members positioned andoperable to engage said tails and mechanically macerate and snatch thesame from said back carcass members, a set of less coarse oppositely andinwardly rotating helical gear members operable to engage the skin on saidback carcass member and mechanically macerate and remove the same fromsaid carcass member, and means to discharge said carcass members from saidmachine.2. A poultry back processing machine in accordance with claim 1, whereinthe poultry back carcass members when positioned upon said rail member areengaged upon the uppermost surface of the exterior surface of the backmembers by said endless flexible conveyor mechanism and said conveyormechanism having impaling means thereon which positively engage andslidably propel said carcass members along said rail member.3. A poultry back processing machine in accordance with claim 1, whereinthe means to invert said carcass members is comprised of a set of curvedguide rail sections laterally spaced a discrete distance from each otherand against which said carcass members are conveyed slidably while heldthereagainst the interior surfaces of said curved guide rail members froma horizontal configuration in which the backs are uppermost to ahorizontal position in which said backs are inverted.4. A poultry back processing machine in accordance with claim 3 in whichsaid endless flexible conveyor propels said back carcass members slidablyalong said curved guide rail members and said endless flexible conveyorhaving impaling means thereon positioned to positively engage theinnermost interior portions of said back sections and thereby slidablypropel said carcass members around the interior curvature of said curvedrail sections.5. A poultry back processing machine in accordance with claim 1 furtherincluding a kidney membrane slicing station positioned along said feedrail member and including angularly positioned blade means operable tosever the interior carcass cavity kidney retaining membranes at eitherinterior side of said carcass member, and vacuum means operable to removesaid kidneys from said carcass member automatically incident to movingsaid carcass member along said feed rail member.6. A poultry back processing machine in accordance with claim 1, whereinsaid helical gears to remove said back skin are rotatable in oppositeinward directions to cause the uppermost surfaces thereof to move towardeach other and the spiral helical ribs thereon intermeshing with eachother and engage and remove said back skin from said carcass members andmacerate said skin.7. A poultry back processing machine in accordance with claim 1 in whichsaid means to flip the tail of said back carcasses is adjacent the leadingend of said carcass inverting means and comprises an angularly dependingrod pivotally supported by said frame and arranged to engage and forcesaid tails of said carcass members to an essentially vertical erectposition relative to the longitudinal axis of said back carcass and saidmeans to invert said carcasses comprising curved guide means operable tohold said tail sections in said erect position while said carcass membersare slidably advanced to said tail engaging gear members which snatch saidtails from said carcasses.8. A poultry back processing machine in accordance with claim 7, whereinsaid spiral gear means to remove tails comprise spiral rib means extendingfrom the leading end thereof and axially ahead of the leading end of skinengaging spiral gear means and having wider spaces between the spiral ribsthereof than between the ribs of said skin engagement spiral gears toaccommodate the bulk of said tails incident to snatching the same fromsaid carcasses as said carcass members are conveyed over said spiral ribmeans in inverted position thereon."}
{"WKU":"039302830","Title":"Machine for removing skin from pieces of poultry","App_Date":"1974-10-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Eugene G. Martin","Assignee":"Victor F. Weaver, Inc.","ICL_Class":"A22C 2100","References":"2630599;3119144;3159872;3172148;3406425;3480991;3579714;3629902;3714682;3805328","Claims":"I claim:1. A poultry processing machine having inlet means adjacent one end and anoutlet end adjacent the other end and adapted to remove the skin fromparts and pieces of poultry, said machine comprising in combination, apair of substantially horizontal rolls having spiral configurationsthereon extending in opposite directions and positioned adjacent eachother in non-contacting relationship and the upper surfaces of said rollsforming a conveying channel to receive adjacent the inlet end of themachine parts and pieces of poultry having skin thereon which is to beremoved, means to drive said rolls in opposite rotary directions andoperable to move said parts and pieces of poultry along said rolls in asingle direction toward the exit end of the machine, and means operable toposition said parts and pieces of poultry upon said rolls for engagementof the skin thereon by said spiral configurations on said rolls to effectseparation and removal of said skin from said parts and pieces while thesame move toward the discharge end of said machine, the peripheries ofsaid configurations being spaced from each other adjacent the inlet end ofthe machine a distance less than the width of said parts and pieces ofpoultry to be engaged thereby and at the discharge end being substantiallyin rolling contact with each other, the space between the configurationson said rolls decreasing substantially uniformly between the inlet anddischarge ends of the machine and said space permitting the skin separatedfrom said parts and pieces to pass therethrough in intact condition andthe parts and pieces from which the skin has been removed being moved tothe discharge end of said machine by said spiral configurations.2. The machine according to claim 1 further including a slitting knifemeans positioned in said machine above said channel and operable to slitthe skin on poultry necks substantially axially to permit the spiralconfigurations on said rolls to engage and separate the slit skins fromsaid necks in intact condition and move the skins through said spacebetween said rolls for discharge from the machine.3. The machine according to claim 2 in which said means operable toposition said parts and pieces comprises rotary means nearer the inlet ofsaid machine than said knife means and comprising a plurality ofsubstantially radially extending blades driven about a horizontal axisextending transversely across said channel.4. The machine according to claim 3 in which the outer ends of the radicalblades of said rotary means cooperate with the upper portions of said pairof horizontal rolls to define a space shaped to allow passage of saidpoultry necks passing therebetween.5. The machine according to claim 3 in which the ends of said blades ofsaid rotary means are provided with slots extending perpendicularly to theaxis of said rotary means and positioned to permit passage of said slotsin said rotary means past said slitting knife means therethrough duringoperation of the machine.6. The machine according to claim 5 in which one roll of each pair of rollsis substantially uniform in diameter throughout the length thereof and theother roll is slightly tapered from the inlet end toward the outlet end,the smaller diameter of said roll being adjacent the inlet end of themachine and the axes of said rolls being substantially parallel, wherebythe difference in diameters of the opposite ends of said other rollprovides said uniformly decreasing space between the spiral configurationson said rolls.7. The machine according to claim 5 in which one of said rolls is providedwith a cylindrical collar at the exit end thereof formed from syntheticresin, said collar being of substantially the same diameter as the exitend of said roll, and means supporting said exit ends of said rolls inbearings positioned to permit said cylindrical collar of said one roll tohave rolling contact with said other roll to thereby maintain the exitends of said rolls out of contact with each other.8. The machine according to claim 1 in which said means to positionincludes a rotary blade unit adapted to orient poultry necks introduced tothe machine at the inlet end thereof and received in said channel, arotary disc skin-slitting knife positioned rearwardly of said rotary bladeunit relative to the direction of feed in said machine, power meansmounted above said rolls and interconnected to said knife to rotate thesame within a substantially vertical plane, and a transmission assemblyconnected to said power means and also interconnected to said neckorienting rotary blade unit and said rolls by said transmission assembly,said assembly including endless flexible drive means extending aroundrotatably mounted driven members respectively connected to said neckorienting rotary blade unit and knife and the rolls which form saidchannel, said transmission assembly being mounted adjacent the exit end ofsaid machine.9. The machine according to claim 8 in which two pairs of saidchannel-forming rolls are provided to form a pair of parallel similarchannels, a pair of said rotary disc skin-slitting knives supported upon acommon shaft and respectively intersecting the channels of said pairs ofrolls to slit the skin of poultry necks passing along said channels, abelt between said power means and said rotary blade operable to drive thesame by said power means, a bevel gear drive unit connected to said shaftfor said pair of slitting knives, a longitudinally extending shaftconnected to said bevel gear drive and extending toward the exit end ofsaid machine, and means interconnecting the end of said longitudinallyextending shaft to said transmission assembly to effect driving of saidshaft to rotate said knives in a predetermined desired direction.10. The machine according to claim 1 in which said means to position saidparts and pieces of poultry upon said rolls comprise longitudinal meansextending axially along said rolls above said channel formed thereby, saidlongitudinal means being engageable with the upper surfaces of said partsand pieces of poultry arranged in said channel to insure positiveengagement of said skin by the spiral configurations on said rolls as saidparts and pieces of poultry are moved along said channel.11. The machine according to claim 10 in which said longitudinal meanscomprises endless flexible means arranged to move along said channellongitudinally in engagement with the upper surfaces of said parts andpieces of poultry as the same are moved toward the discharge end of themachine by the operation of said rolls.12. The machine according to claim 11 in which said endless flexible meanscomprises a chain having projections extending outwardly and adapted toimpinge the flesh of said poultry parts and pieces to effect positiveengagement of the skin thereon by said spiral configuration on said rolls,said machine also including means to drive said chain at a speedcommensurate with the speed at which the poultry parts and pieces areadvanced by said spiral configurations on said rolls.13. The machine according to claim 12 further including guide means forsaid chain supported fixedly by said machine and having longitudinallyextending surfaces along which courses of said chain move slidably forguidance.14. The machine according to claim 11 further including drive means forsaid endless flexible means and said drive means also being interconnectedto said rolls to revolve the same in opposite directions.15. The machine according to claim 14 wherein said drive means furtherincludes transmission means comprising pulleys and belts adjacent thedischarge end of said machine, and an electric motor connected to saidtransmission means to operate the same."}
{"WKU":"039302849","Title":"Hide pulling method and apparatus","App_Date":"1972-11-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Frank M. Cook","Assignee":"The Cincinnati Butchers  Supply Company","ICL_Class":"A22B  516","References":"3461482;3599277","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. The method of removing the hide from a meat carcass including a headhaving the hide slitted lengthwise along the belly, the hide beingpartially detached from the carcass to provide side flaps disposed alongopposite sides of the carcass, including flap portions resulting frompeeling the hide from the forelegs, said method comprising the steps of:suspending the carcass from the hind legs with the unskinned head and theskinned forelegs lowermost; gripping the side flaps at opposite sides ofthe carcass near the forelegs, and forcibly pulling the hide over and offthe head while restraining the forelegs against movement in the directionof the hide pulling force.2. The method as defined by claim 1, wherein the hide pulling force isapplied first laterally then longitudinally of the spine of the carcass.3. The method as defined by claim 1, wherein restraint of the forelegs isaccompanied by a pulling force applied in a direction substantiallyopposite to the direction of the hide pulling force first mentioned.4. The method as defined by claim 1, wherein the hide pulling force isapplied first laterally then longitudinally of the spine of the carcass,and wherein the forelegs are pulled in a direction substantially oppositeto the direction of said lateral force.5. The method as defined by claim 1, wherein the forelegs are pulled andadvanced in a direction counter to the direction of pulling of the hideover the head.6. The method of removing the hide from a meat carcass having the hideslitted lengthwise along the belly, the hide being partially detached fromthe carcass to provide side flaps disposed along opposite sides of thecarcass, including flap portions resulting from peeling the hide from theforelegs, said method comprising the steps of: suspending the carcass withthe head and the previously skinned forelegs lowermost; gripping theforeleg flaps at opposite sides of the carcass and forcibly pulling theforeleg flaps in a common direction toward and beyond the spine of thecarcass, while at the same time pulling the skinned forelegs in asubstantially opposite direction, thereby to curve the spine in adirection tending to shorten the spine and oppose stretching thereoflengthwise during the hide removal procedure.7. The method of removing the hide from a meat carcass having the hideslitted lengthwise and detached partially from the carcass to provide sideflaps disposed along opposite sides of the carcass, said method comprisingthe steps of gripping the side flaps and pulling said flaps in a commondirection toward and beyond the spine of the carcass, while at the sametime pulling the forelegs in a substantially opposite direction."}
{"WKU":"039302857","Title":"Apparatus and method for forming staple fibers and feeding the same to a","App_Date":"1973-10-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William D. Wornall","Assignee":"Alfred Proctor Aldrich, Jr.;Aldrich Machine Works;Lummus Industries, Inc.","ICL_Class":"D01G  104;D01G  916","References":"1709646;1814129;1875356;2057641;2155598;2186135;2822582;3017684;3087203;3157440;3503100","Claims":"That which is claimed is:1. Apparatus for processing preformed continuous filament tow positioned ina container comprising a tow cutter for receiving the continuous filamenttow from the container and for severing the same into fibrous material ofpredetermined staple length, and means positioned ahead of said tow cutterfor guiding the preformed continuous filament tow from the container tosaid tow cutter and for aiding in the removal of any folds orentanglements present in the tow upon its removal from the container, apicker having a hopper for receiving the fibrous material from said towcutter and also having evening means for obtaining a substantially uniformweight of delivery of the fibrous material processed therethrough, meansoperatively connected to said tow cutter and to the hopper of said pickerfor feeding the fibrous material from said tow cutter to said picker, andwherein said hopper is provided with means for stopping operation of saidtow cutter in response to a predetermined high level of fibrous materialbeing present in said hopper to thereby avoid overfilling said hopper.2. Apparatus according to claim 1 wherein said picker is provided with lapforming means at its delivery end for forming laps for subsequently beingprocessed through cards.3. Apparatus according to claim 1, wherein a bank of cards is operativelyconnected to said picker with each card having transitory storage meansfor receiving the fibrous material from said picker and for directing thesame into the card, and means are provided for receiving the fibrousmaterial at the delivery end of the picker and for feeding the same to therespective transitory storage means of said bank of cards.4. Apparatus according to claim 1, wherein said hopper is provided withmeans for stopping operation of said picker in response to the fibrousmaterial being substantially exhausted from said hopper to thereby avoidobtaining nonuniform delivery of fibrous material from said picker.5. Apparatus according to claim 1, wherein said picker is provided with asecond hopper positioned adjacent said first recited hopper for receivingthe fibrous material therefrom, and wherein said first recited hopperincludes means for feeding the fibrous material from the first recitedhopper to said second hopper.6. Apparatus according to claim 5, additionally including means forstopping the feeding of fibrous material from the first hopper to saidsecond hopper of said picker in response to a predetermined high level offibrous material being present in said second hopper to thereby facilitateobtaining a more uniform weight of delivery of fibrous material from saidpicker.7. Apparatus according to claim 6 wherein said first hopper of said pickeris provided with means for stopping operation of said picker in responseto the fibrous material being substantially exhausted from said firsthopper to thereby avoid obtaining nonuniform delivery of fibrous materialfrom said picker.8. Apparatus according to claim 1, additionally comprising a second pickerpositioned adjacent said first recited picker, said second picker alsohaving a hopper for receiving the fibrous material from said tow cutterand having evening means for obtaining a substantially uniform weight ofdelivery of fibrous material processed therethrough, and wherein saidmeans for feeding the fibrous material from said tow cutter to said firstrecited picker is operatively connected to the hopper of said secondpicker for also feeding the fibrous material to said second picker.9. Apparatus according to claim 1 wherein said means for feeding thefibrous material from said tow cutter to said picker includes pneumaticconveyor means.10. Appparatus for processing continuous filament tow comprising a towcutter for receiving continuous filament tow and for serving the same intofibrous material of predetermined staple length, a picker associated withsaid tow cutter and including first and second hoppers for receiving thefibrous material from said tow cutter, means operatively connected to saidtow cutter and to the first hopper of said picker for feeding the fibrousmaterial from said tow cutter to said picker, said first hopper of saidpicker including means for stopping operation of the tow cutter inresponse to a predetermined high level of fibrous material being presentin said first hopper and also including means for feeding the fibrousmaterial forwardly therefrom, said second hopper being positionedforwardly of said first hopper for receiving the fibrous material fromsaid first hopper and including means for stopping the feeding of fibrousmaterial from said first hopper to said second hopper in response to apredetermined high level of fibrous material being present in said secondhopper to facilitate obtaining a more uniform weight of delivery offibrous material from said picker, a bank of cards operatively connectedto said picker with each card having transitory storage means forreceiving the fibrous material from said picker and for directing the sameinto the card, and means for receiving the fibrous material at thedelivery end of the picker and for feeding the same to the respectivetransitory storage means of said bank of cards.11. Apparatus according to claim 10 wherein said first hopper of saidpicker is also provided with means for stopping operation of said pickerand said bank of cards in response to the fibrous material beingsubstantially exhausted from said first hopper to thereby avoid obtainingnonuniform delivery of fibrous material from said picker and bank ofcards.12. Apparatus for processing preformed continuous filament tow positionedin a container comprising a tow cutter for receiving the continuousfilament tow from the container and for severing the same into fibrousmaterial of predetermined staple length, and means positioned ahead ofsaid tow cutter for guiding the preformed continuous filament tow from thecontainer to said tow cutter and for aiding in the removal of any folds orentanglements present in the tow upon its removal from the container, aplurality of pickers associated with said tow cutter with each of saidpickers having a hopper for receiving the fibrous material from said towcutter and having evening means for obtaining a substantially uniformweight of delivery of fibrous material processed therethrough, and witheach of said pickers also being provided with lap forming means at thedelivery end thereof for forming the fibrous material into laps for beingsubsequently processed through cards, means operatively connected to saidtow cutter and to the respective hoppers of each of said pickers forfeeding the fibrous material from said tow cutter to each of said pickersand wherein the respective hoppers of the pickers are provided with meansfor stopping operation of said tow cutter in response to a predeterminedhigh level of fibrous material being present in said hoppers to therebyavoid overfilling the hoppers.13. Apparatus for processing continuous filament tow comprising a towcutter for receiving continuous filament tow and for severing the sameinto fibrous material of predetermined staple length, a plurality ofpickers associated with said tow cutter with each of said pickers having ahopper for receiving the fibrous material from said tow cutter and havingevening means for obtaining a substantially uniform weight of delivery offibrous material processed therethrough, means operatively connected tosaid tow cutter and to the respective hoppers of each of said pickers forfeeding the fibrous material from said tow cutter to each of said pickers,a bank of cards operatively connected to said pickers with each cardhaving transitory storage means for receiving the fibrous material fromsaid pickers and for directing the same into the card, and means forreceiving the fibrous material at the delivery end of said pickers and forfeeding the same to the respective transitory storage means of said bankof cards.14. Apparatus according to claim 13 wherein each of said pickers isprovided with a second hopper positioned adjacent said first recitedhopper for receiving the fibrous material therefrom, and wherein saidfirst recited hopper includes means for feeding the fibrous material fromthe first recited hopper to said second hopper.15. Apparatus according to claim 14 additionally including means associatedwith each of said pickers for stopping the feeding of fibrous materialfrom the first hopper to said second hopper of the picker in response to apredetermined high level of fibrous material being present in said secondhopper to facilitate obtaining a more uniform weight of delivery offibrous material from said pickers.16. A method of processing preformed continuous filament tow comprisingguiding the preformed tow from a supply container through a predeterminedpath of travel to a tow cutter while removing any folds or entanglementspresent in the tow and while severing the tow into fibrous material ofpredetermined staple length and while feeding the fibrous material as itis delivered from the tow cutter to a hopper of a picker and through thepicker to obtain a substantially uniform weight of fibrous materialtherefrom, and stopping operation of the tow cutter in response to apredetermined high level of fibrous material being present in the hopper.17. A method according to claim 16 comprising forming the fibrous materialinto laps at the delivery end of the picker for being subsequentlyprocessed through cards.18. A method according to claim 16 comprising feeding the fibrous materialas a stream of loose fibers from the delivery end of the picker to a bankof cards for forming carded stock therefrom.19. A method according to claim 16 including stopping operation of thepicker in response to the fibrous material being substantially exhaustedfrom the hopper of the picker.20. A method according to claim 16 comprising pneumatically collecting thefibrous material as it is delivered from the picker and pneumaticallyfeeding the fibrous material in loose fibrous form to a bank of cards forforming carded stock therefrom.21. A method according to claim 16 wherein the continuous filament tow fedto the tow cutter comprises a plurality of tows and wherein at least oneof the tows is formed of continuous filaments of a differentcharacteristic from the continuous filaments of another one of the tows tothereby facilitate obtaining a blend of fibrous material from differenttypes of tow."}
{"WKU":"039302865","Title":"Flexible container having valve with puncturing plunger","App_Date":"1974-12-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Inez Madeleine McGowen","Assignee":"United Vintners, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B67B  726;B67B  728","References":"2379327;2574989;3206075;3239104;3339721;3349965;3521807;3696969","Claims":"I claim:1. A beverage container-dispenser comprising:a. a flexible bag having a sealable opening for filling the bag,b. a valve attached to a wall of the bag, said valve having an operatingmember capable of movement to a closing position in which it closes thevalve and which also during such closing movement serves to puncture thebag, said operating member being also movable to a dispensing positionwherein it opens the valve to allow dispensing of beverage from the bag,c. a support structure having opposed side walls joined at the top anddiverging from top to bottom and having a flat bottom joining the loweredges of the side walls and acting as a base to support the structure andbag in upright display and dispensing position andd. said valve projecting through a wall of the support structure.2. The container-dispenser of claim 1 wherein the wall of the supportstructure through which the valve projects has an area surrounding thevalve which is weakened so as to be readily removable while remainingattached to the valve.3. Beverage dispensing construction comprising the structure of claim 2 incombination with a rigid, self-supporting housing having an open end, saidarea of the support structure, when separated, fitting within such openend."}
{"WKU":"039302873","Title":"Adjustable strap","App_Date":"1974-11-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Frederick G. J. Grise;Walter C. Lovell;Ray E. Heck;Kalman Prescott","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B65D 6300","References":"1278779;1804725;2466742;3156922;3842688","Claims":"We claim:1. An adjustable strap comprising a pair of elongated elastomeric strips,interengaging means on said strips at corresponding ends providing forlongitudinal adjustment of said strips relative to each other andpreventing separation of the strips in a direction normal to the lengthsof the strips,elongated series of slanting teeth on each strip, said teeth beingcomplementary to each other and slanting in opposite directions forengagement thereof preventing separation of the strips in a longitudinaldirection, the teeth being located on the strips extending inwardly fromthe ends thereof that have the interengaging means,the means holding the strips from separation in a direction normal theretobeing manually removable to allow adjustment and separation of saidstrips,wherein the slanting teeth of one strip extend outwardly from a sidesurface thereof, the other strip including a longitudinal recess, theslanting teeth of the second strip being located in the bottom of saidrecess, the projecting slanting teeth being engageable with the teeth inthe recess when the two strips are in flat contacting relation.2. The strap of claim 1 wherein the slanting teeth on one strip projectfrom the surface of said strip.3. The strap of claim 1 wherein the slanting teeth on one strip are insetin a longitudinal recess.4. The strap of claim 1 wherein said interengaging means comprises meansforming a slot in one strip through which the other strip extends.5. The strap of claim 4 including overhanging means at the side edges ofone strip to removably embrace the side edges of the other strip at apoint remote from the slot.6. The strap of claim 1 wherein the slanting teeth of one strip extendoutwardly from a side surface thereof, the other strip including alongitudinal recess, the slanting teeth of the second strip being locatedin the bottom of said recess, the projecting slanting teeth beingengageable with the teeth in the recess when the two strips are in flatcontacting relation."}
{"WKU":"039302881","Title":"Toggle for use with rope","App_Date":"1974-06-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Allan Black;Ralph Somerville","Assignee":"Poli-Twine Corporation Limited","ICL_Class":"F16G 1114","References":"329071;551836;987407;1407406;1583343;1896705;2547469;3160979","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property orprivilege is claimed are defined and claimed as follows:1. A toggle for use in association with rope or twine for the handling ofbundled articles or logs, said toggle comprising an elongate body member,said body member being substantially symmetrical about a transverse lineof symmetry through the centre thereof, said body member having a firstsubstantially circular hole disposed symmetrically about said line ofsymmetry and a second hole elongated in shape, also disposed symmetricallyabout said line of symmetry, the body member further including a pair ofouter holes disposed adjacent the ends of the body the ends of said bodybeing terminated by a T-shaped portion.2. A toggle as in claim 1 wherein each portion of said elongate body memberdisposed on one side of said line of symmetry includes a web portion.3. A toggle as in claim 2 wherein each web portion includes a lighteninghole.4. A toggle as in claim 1, wherein the axes of said circular, elongated andouter holes are substantially parallel.5. A toggle according to claims 1, wherein each of said circular elongatedand outer holes are provided with chamfers or radii to inhibit wear on arope received therein.6. A toggle according to claims 1, further comprising associated rope, theweight of the toggle being less than the net upward buoyancy thrust of theassociated rope.7. An elongated toggle substantially symmetrical about a transverse axisfor use in association with a rope for handling of bundled articles suchas logs, comprising:a first substantially circular hole anda second hole elongated in shape;both said holes disposed symmetrically about the central axis through thewidth therof;a pair of outer holes disposed adjacent the ends of said toggle;the said ends terminated by T-shaped portions;the axes of the said circular and the said elongated holes beingsubstantially parallel to each other;the axes of said outer holes being parallel to each other;all said holes having diameters permitting easy threading of ropestherethrough.8. An elongated toggle as claimed in claim 7, further comprising:associated ropes operatively attached to the toggle andmeans to make said toggle buoyant to prevent its sinking beneath thesurface of the water."}
{"WKU":"039302890","Title":"Coupling device","App_Date":"1974-10-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John W. Singular","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A44B 1700;A44B 1900","References":"1459674;2016827;2784475;3793858","Claims":"What I claim as my invention is:1. A coupling device comprising a housing to which a first member isconnectible, opposed resilient closure members mounted in the housing withadjacent end portions of said closure members being urged by the inherentresiliency of the closure members towards a closed condition in which asecond member is connectible thereto, and an actuating member mounted onthe housing and movable between a first position in which the actuatingmember permits said adjacent end portions of the closure members to attainsaid closed condition under the influence of said inherent resiliency ofthe closure members, and a second position in which the actuating memberextends between and is in contact with the closure members to maintainsaid adjacent end portions thereof in an open condition against theinfluence of said inherent resiliency of the closure members, theactuating member having opposed cam faces for urging the closure membersagainst said inherent resiliency of the closure members from said closedcondition to said open condition of said adjacent end portions of theclosure members on said movement of the actuating member from said firstposition to said second position thereof.2. A coupling device according to claim 1, wherein the housing is providedwith an aperture through which the actuating member is disposed for manualmovement thereof from said first position to said second position thereof,the actuating member having a shoulder which is in abutting contact withthe portion of the housing adjacent to said aperture when the actuatingmember is in said first position thereof to prevent movement of theactuating member from said first position in a direction away from saidsecond position.3. A coupling device according to claim 1, wherein the opposed closuremembers are reflexly directed at said adjacent end portions thereof, forurging of said adjacent end portions to said open condition thereof by aforce applied thereto in a direction towards the actuating member whensaid adjacent end portions are in said closed condition thereof.4. A coupling device according to claim 1, wherein the housing is providedwith a slot having an open end and within which said adjacent end portionsof the closure members are disposed when in said closed condition.5. A coupling device according to claim 1 wherein the ends of the opposedclosure members remote from said adjacent end portions thereof areintegrally interconnected, the closure members being mounted in thehousing by securement of said remote ends of the closure members to thehousing."}
{"WKU":"039302903","Title":"Snap-shackle","App_Date":"1974-11-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Theodore F. Mangels","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F16G 1508;B64D 1738;A44B 1300","References":"462721;674462;1303033;1576352;1621604;1711440;3493260;3850468","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A snap-shackle for interconnecting the rigging components of sailingcraft comprising:a body member having a curved projection extending therefrom, said bodymember having an aperture therethrough, an interior cavity which isperipheral to and opens into said aperture and a passage which extendsbetween said interior cavity and the outer surface of said body;a trigger latch having one end thereof pivotally attached to said bodywithin said cavity and the other end thereof positioned within saidpassage, the central portion of said trigger latch extending across aportion of said aperture and being exposed therein, said trigger latchbeing adapted to be pivoted by inserting an object into said aperture andengaging said central portion of said trigger latch, said other end ofsaid trigger latch having a rounded surface with a notch therein;a curved rotatable arm having one end thereof rotatably joined to theoutermost extremity of said curved projection, the other end of saidcurved rotatable arm having a rounded surface with a notch therein, saidrounded surface of said other end being adapted to enter said passage andengage and slide along said rounded surface of said trigger latch untilsaid notch of said trigger latch engages said notch of said curvedrotatable arm whereby said curved rotatable arm is locked in a fixedposition by said trigger latch to form an opening between said curvedrotatable arm and said body member, said opening being adapted to receiveand couple to rigging components of sailing craft, said trigger latchbeing pivoted by inserting an object in said aperture to disengage saidtrigger latch from said rotatable arm and to release said riggingcomponents coupled in said opening; andcoupling means attached to said body and oppositely disposed from thejuncture of said curved projection and said curved rotatable arm forreceiving and coupling to rigging components of sailing craft.2. The snap-shackle described in claim 1 wherein said juncture of saidcurved projection and said curved rotatable arm is located at a point mostdistant from said coupling means to accept and bear the forces transmittedby rigging components of a sailing craft coupled therein therebyminimizing the forces on said curved rotatable arm and reducing the forcerequired to disengage said trigger latch from said curved rotatable arm.3. The snap-shackle described in claim 2 further including a bias springlocated in said cavity between said body and said trigger latch to biassaid trigger latch into the position which locks said curved rotatable armin said fixed position.4. The snap-shackle described in claim 3 wherein said other end of saidcurved rotatable arm further has a first arcuate surface and a firstradial surface which respectively mate with and engage a portion of saidbody member when said curved rotatable arm is locked in said fixedposition and wherein said notch of said curved rotatable arm has a secondradial surface substantially oppositely disposed from said first radialsurface and which mates with and is engaged by said notch of said triggerlatch when said curved rotatable arm is in said fixed position, said firstarcuate surface and said first and second radial surfaces engaged by saidbody member and said trigger latch, respectively, double lock said curvedrotatable arm to prevent said curved rotatable arm from moving radially orangularly in any direction.5. The snap-shackle described in claim 4 wherein said trigger latch isC-shaped, having one end pivotally attached to said body within saidcavity and the other end in slidable engagement with an interior surfaceof said cavity in said body."}
{"WKU":"039302911","Title":"Combination tension and slub catching device","App_Date":"1974-05-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Samuel L. Abbott","Assignee":"Abbott Machine Co., Inc.","ICL_Class":"D02J  114;D02J  700","References":"750850;913416;1734590;2572837;2657450;3254388;3304016;3461520;3501820;3543357;3769668","Claims":"I claim:1. Slub catching and tension for processing yarn comprising means forunwinding yarn from a control apparatus package and rewinding it to form apackage and means for guiding a portion of the yarn as it travels from onepackage to the other comprising blocks supported at opposite sides of thepath of yarn travel, means yieldably supported by the block at one side,providing a surface extending lengthwise of the path of yarn travel, aneccentric mounted on the block at the other side, an elongate bar mountedon the eccentric for pivotal movement about an axis parallel to thesurface of said means at said one side and for adjustment relative theretoto adjust the width of the yarn passage, a lever mounted at the upper endof the bar and extending laterally therefrom relative to said pivot axisfor biasing the bar on said axis and means mounting the lever for movementto either side of said axis.2. Apparatus according to claim 1, wherein said lever is weighted.3. Slub catching and tension control apparatus for processing yarncomprising means for unwinding yarn from a package and rewinding it toform a package, and means for guiding a portion of the yarn as it travelsfrom one package to the other, comprising supports at opposite sides ofthe path of yarn travel, means yieldably mounted on the support at oneside providing a surface extending lengthwise of and parallel to the pathof yarn travel, an eccentric rotatably mounted on the support at the otherside with its axis of rotation at right angles to the path of travel ofthe yarn and parallel to said surface provided by the yieldably supportedmeans, means mounted on the eccentric providing a surface spaced from andparallel to said surface provided by the yieldably supported means andforming in conjunction therewith a narrow yarn passage, said eccentricpivotally supporting said latter means for pivotal movement about saidaxis and for movement by rotation of the eccentric relative to saidsurface to adjust the width of the yarn passage, a lever mounted on saidlatter means above said axis and extending laterally therefrom relative tosaid axis for biasing said latter means on said axis and means mountingthe lever for movement to either side of said axis.4. Apparatus according to claim 3 comprising, means for rotating theeccentric."}
{"WKU":"039302920","Title":"Devices for threading filaments on rollers","App_Date":"1975-02-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Heinz Schippers;Erich Lenk","Assignee":"Barmag Barmer Maschinenfabrik Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"D02J  122","References":"3172187;3323191","Claims":"The invention is hereby claimed as follows:1. In a filament processing apparatus, the combination of a rotatableroller or a series of at least two rotatable rollers for conveying afilament or filaments looped at least partially around the respectiveroller surfaces, and a tubular roller-threading device embodying a tubethrough which a filament may be conveyed by a fluid stream flowing in saidtube, having at least a curvate portion adjacent said roller(s) andextending over an angle extending substantially approximate to the angleof looping of the filament(s) on the roller(s), said curvate portion lyingin a plane substantially perpendicular to the axis of its continguousroller, and said curvate portion having a longitudinal slot through whicha fluid-conveyed filament may be drawn out of said tube when the filamentis placed in tension.2. A combination as claimed in claim 1 wherein the end of the filament tobe fed into said tube is attached to a plug member designed to be driventhrough said tube by the fluid stream.3. A combination as claimed in claim 2, said plug having peripheral groovesinclined in the same direction towards the generatrices of the plug.4. A combination as claimed in claim 2, and comprising a looping-type towstretching apparatus, wherein the tube is curved at the end of thelooping-type stretching arrangement and, in the vicinity of the curve,comprises a filament cutter which is actuated by a detector for the plug.5. A combination as claimed in claim 4, wherein, in the vicinity of thecurve, the tube has an outlet which terminates in front of atow-entraining means, and air jet means by which the beginning of the cuttow is blown into said outlet.6. A combination as claimed in claim 4, wherein the distance between saiddetector and said filament cutter is equal to the length of the filamentor tow path through said stretching apparatus.7. A combination as claimed in claim 1 wherein said longitudinal slot isopposite to and faces said roller or rollers.8. A combination as claimed in claim 1 wherein said longitudinal slot faceslaterally toward the working zone of the filament(s) looped around saidroller or rollers.9. A combination as claimed in claim 8 embodying said roller or rollersaround which several filaments are completely or partly looped, whereinthe longitudinal slot is offset from the plane of curvature of the tubetowards the working zone of the filaments on the roller through an angleof 30.degree. to 150.degree..10. A combination as claimed in claim 1, wherein the longitudinal slot hasa funnel-like widening at the inlet end of the tube, the edges of thelongitudinal slot beginning on the generatrices which each face towardsthe outermost working zone of a filament on the roller.11. A combination as claimed in claim 1, embodying a roller around whichseveral filaments are completely or partly looped, and means for shiftingthe tube parallel to the axis of the roller.12. A combination as claimed in claim 1, wherein the ends of the tube liein the planes tangential to the roller coinciding with the filament path.13. A combination as claimed in claim 1, and further embodying a series ofrollers around which one or more filaments are looped alternately andsuccessively clockwise and counterclockwise, wherein the tube extends overthe entire length of the filament path between the rollers, is curved inthe direction of filament travel around each particular roller and,between two rollers, has a lateral slot which is situated in the commontangential plane of the successive rollers coinciding with the filamentpath and which joins together the two opposite longitudinal slots in thetube.14. A combination as claimed in claim 1 wherein said roller or rollers arerotatably supported at both ends thereof on substantially uninterruptedside walls of a processing chamber.15. A combination as claimed in claim 1, and further comprising alooping-type stretching apparatus for tows, wherein the rollers aremounted at both ends in a substantially uninterrupted side wall of achamber, and wherein the tubes are fixedly connected to the frame of thelooping-type stretching arrangement in a plane extending perpendicularlyof the rollers.16. A combination as claimed in claim 15 wherein the chamber issubstantially uninterrupted on all sides with only an inlet slot and anoutlet slot for the tows before which the inlet and outlet ends of thetube system open and end, respectively.17. A combination as claimed in claim 1, wherein a curtain of air isproduced adjacent the longitudinal slot by the provision along thelongitudinal slot of air nozzles whose orifices are directed in theperipheral direction and/or towards the center of the tube and areoptionally inclined in the direction of travel of the filament in thetube.18. A combination as claimed in claim 1, the feed end of the filamenthaving a knot forming a plug for urging the filament to be moved throughthe tube by said fluid stream.19. A combination as claimed in claim 1 wherein the end of the filament tobe fed into said tube is attached to a plug member designed to be driventhrough said tube by the fluid stream, an arm member projecting laterallyfrom said plug member through said slot, and means on said arm member forreleasably attaching said end of said filament to said arm member, wherebysaid filament is drawn by said plug member outside said tube.20. A combination as claimed in claim 1, and further embodying a series ofrollers around which one or more filaments are looped alternately andsuccessively clockwise and counter-clockwise, wherein the tube extendsover the entire length of the filament path between the rollers, is curvedin the direction of the filament travel around each particular roller, andconsists of a series of tube sections, each of which having ends which arelying in the plane coinciding with the filament path and common tangentialplane of the successive rollers."}
{"WKU":"039302938","Title":"Method of replacing the transfer cores of yarn packages with resilient","App_Date":"1974-06-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Herbert A. Girard","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"D01H  900","References":"1652992;2736184;3374959;3425110;3618184;3681007","Claims":"I claim:1. A method for transferring a package of yarn supported by a rigidimperforate transfer core to a foraminous, resilient dye core ofpredetermined diameter comprising, in sequence, the steps of:a. compressing the resilient core to reduce its size;b. inserting the resilient core into the transfer core;c. anchoring the resilient core against axial displacement; andd. axially removing the transfer core relative to both the package of yarnand the resilient core.2. The invention in accordance with claim 1 wherein the compression of theresilient core is released to facilitate its interengagement with thepackage of yarn following removal of the transfer core.3. The invention in accordance with claim 2 wherein the transfer core isgripped and thereafter pulled axially in removing it from between the yarnpackage and the resilient core.4. The invention in accordance with claim 3 wherein the package of yarn isheld stationary during the withdrawal of the transfer core.5. A method for transferring a package of yarn supported by a transfer coreto a replacement core comprising, in sequence, the steps of:a. inserting the replacement core into the transfer core;b. anchoring the replacement core against axial displacement;c. compressing the package of yarn;d. gripping and thereafter pulling the transfer core axially in removing itfrom between the yarn package and the replacement core; ande. holding the package of yarn stationary during the withdrawal of thetransfer core.6. The invention is accordance with claim 5 wherein the transfer core isejected and removed to another location after removal from the yarnpackage.7. A method for transferring a package of yarn supported by a transfer coreto a replacement core comprising, in sequence, the steps of:a. inserting the replacement core into the transfer core;b. gripping and thereafter pulling the transfer core axially in removing itfrom between the yarn package and replacement core;c. holding the package of yarn stationary during the withdrawal of thetransfer core; andd. permitting the yarn and the replacement core to interengage incompleting the transfer of the yarn onto the replacement core.8. The invention in accordance with claim 7 wherein the replacement core isanchored against axial displacement during the removal of the transfercore.9. The invention in accordance with claim 7 wherein the replacement core isa foraminous dye penetrating core.10. The invention in accordance with claim 9 wherein the foraminous dyepenetrating core is a perforated plastic tube."}
{"WKU":"039302946","Title":"Cylindrical surface finishing device","App_Date":"1975-01-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Stuart E. Kalen","Assignee":"Cogsdill Tool Products, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B24B 3900","References":"2874452;3626560;3656333;3736633;3751781","Claims":"I claim:1. In a burnishing tool, a support, a housing on said support, a spindle,bearing means supporting said spindle within said housing for rotation,drive means for rotating said spindle, a burnishing head on the forwardend of said spindle having a mandrel and a slotted cage with truncatedrollers within the slots, a cylinder, a piston in said cylinder forrelatively moving said mandrel and cage to move the rollers intoengagement with the surface of a workpiece for applying a predeterminedpressure irrespective of variations of diameter of the workpiece, andmeans for retracting the rollers from engagement with the workpiece.2. In a burnishing tool as recited in claim 1, wherein means is providedfor limiting the amount of retractive movement produced to the rollers.3. In a burnishing tool as recited in claim 2, wherein said limiting meansis adjustable for regulating the amount of retractive movement provided tothe rollers.4. In a burnishing tool as recited in claim 2, wherein the drive meansembodies a flat pulley on said spindle, a motor on said support, a flatpulley on said motor, and a flat belt between said pulleys.5. In a burnishing tool as recited in claim 4, wherein a side face of thespindle pulley is recessed for receiving the adjacent portion of thehousing and bearing means in overhanging relation therewith.6. In a burnishing tool as recited in claim 5, wherein said pulley surfacehas laterally disposed slots forming teeth-like protuberance therebetween,and wherein the inner face of the belt has teeth thereon to provide apositive drive therebetween.7. In a burnishing tool as recited in claim 1, therein said support hasvertically adjustable elements thereon, and a trough supported on saidadjustable elements which extends beyond said burnishing head forsupporting a workpiece.8. In a burnishing tool as recited in claim 1, wherein said spindle ishollow, and wherein said rollers are adjusted inwardly to operate on theouter surface of a workpiece which may be passed entirely through saidspindle.9. In a burnishing tool as recited in claim 8, wherein said support hasvertically adjustable elements each side thereof, and troughs supported bysaid adjustable elements beneath the forward and rear portions of saidspindle in position to support the workpiece either side thereof.10. In a burnishing tool as recited in claim 7, wherein replaceable bearingelements are provided on the inside of the trough for engagement with theworkpiece."}
{"WKU":"039302954","Title":"Tool for fabricating diode array","App_Date":"1974-03-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ralph E. Rose","Assignee":"Signetics Corporation;Watkins Johnson","ICL_Class":"B23P 1904","References":"3667103;3704504;3737998;3755048","Claims":"I claim:1. In an alignment tool for positioning discrete diodes of the type havingdiode bond pads so they can be bonded into an array, a semiconductor bodyhaving substantially parallel top and bottom planar surfaces, said topsurface of the body having a plurality of spaced top recesses formedtherein having walls forming alignment surfaces extending from the topsurface into the body, wherein said alignment surfaces and said diode bodyin combination mutually co-act to position said diodes, said recessesbeing adapted to receive the diode body and having a predefined depth sothat the diode bond pads protrude above the top surface of the body, saidbottom surface of the body having a plurality of spaced bottom recessesformed therein underlying the top recesses and having walls extending fromthe bottom surface into the body and intersecting the walls of the toprecesses.2. An alignment tool as in claim 1 wherein the semiconductor body is asilicon body, the outer peripheries of the top recesses in the top surfaceare spaced a distance of 1 mil or greater, and where the intersection ofthe top and bottom recesses defines a subsurface plane substantiallyparallel to said top and bottom surfaces, and wherein the walls of thebottom recesses intersect the subsurface plane entirely within theintersection of the walls of the top recesses and the subsurface tothereby form a shoulder within the body.3. An alignment tool as in claim 2 wherein said top recesses arerectangular in shape in the top surface and have downward inwardlytapering walls, said bottom recesses are rectangular in shape in thebottom surface and have upward inwardly tapering walls, and wherein saidtool has a relatively thin passivating layer formed as an oxide of thebody on the alignment surfaces of said recesses and on the exposedsurfaces of the body.4. In an alignment tool for positioning discrete diodes of the type havediode bond pads so they can be bonded into an array, a semiconductor bodyhaving substantially parallel top and bottom planar surfaces, said topsurface of the body having a plurality of spaced top recesses formedtherein having walls extending from the top surface into the body andadapted to receive the diode body with the diode bond pads protrudingabove the top surface of the body, said bottom surface of the body havinga plurality of spaced bottom recesses formed therein underlying the toprecesses and having walls extending from the bottom surface into the bodyand intersecting the walls of the top recesses, said walls of the toprecesses defining a smaller area within said body than the area defined bysaid walls of the top recesses at said top surfaces."}
{"WKU":"039302962","Title":"Method and machine for loading and assembling film cartridges","App_Date":"1974-07-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James E. Hoover","Assignee":"GAF Corporation","ICL_Class":"B21D 3903","References":"3138081;3226816;3325889;3364552;3457627;3708860;3742586;3748715;3768133;3787954","Claims":"I claim:1. A method of assembling and loading a film cartridge having a bottomportion and a cover for assembly theretogether with a take-up spool andscroll formed of unattached film interleaved with backing paper comprisingthe steps of:supplying a web of sensitized film and a web of backing paper in overlyingrelation to a scrolling station;severing said webs of film and paper to desired finite lengths;winding said film and backing paper into a scroll in which the ends of saidfilm and paper are unattached to each other;attaching a free end of scrolled paper to a take-up spool;inserting said scroll and take-up spool simultaneously into a scrollchamber and spool chamber of said bottom portion by movement of saidscroll and spool axially thereinto;assemblying said bottom portion with said cover to form the cartridgeassembly enclosing said spool and scroll within said chambers; andsealing said cover to said bottom portion in a light tight manner.2. The method according to claim 1 further comprising the step of detectingthe position of said webs with respect to said scrolling station forinitiating said severing operation.3. The method according to claim 1 further comprising the step ofsupporting said webs of film and paper on a guide track and advancing saidwebs therealong to said scrolling station.4. The method according to claim 1 further comprising the step of forming aloop in said web of paper for relieving tension therein, and detecting thesize of said loop.5. The method according to claim 1 wherein said winding of said scrollcomprises the steps of inserting one end of said paper web into a slot ona winding spindle, rotating said spindle at high speed to wind said websthereabout, and withdrawing said spindle from the wound scroll so as todeposit said scroll in a scroll receiving socket of a first transportcarrier.6. The method according to claim 5 further comprising the steps of feedinga take-up spool into a further socket in said first transport carrier,indexing said first transport carrier to an operating station forattaching said free end of said scroll to said spool.7. The method according to claim 6 further comprising the steps of feedinga cartridge bottom into a second transport carrier, indexing said secondtransport carrier to a loading station, transferring said spool and scrollfrom said first transport carrier, indexing said second transport carrierto an assembly station for assembly with said cover, advancing said secondtransport carrier to a welding station for sealing said cover to saidbottom portion, and ejecting said cartridge from said second carrier.8. The method according to claim 6 wherein said free end of said scroll isattached to said take-up spool by ultrasonic means.9. The method according to claim 7 wherein said cover is sealed to saidbottom portion by ultrasonic welding.10. The method according to claim 5 further comprising the steps ofrotating said spindle at slow speed prior to insertion of said web in saidslot, detecting the orientation of said slot, and stopping said slow speedrotation when said slot is properly oriented for receiving said webs fromsaid guide track.11. The method according to claim 10 further comprising the steps ofpivoting a portion of said guide track so as to aim said webs at saidslot.12. A machine for assemblying a film cartridge having a double chamberedbottom portion and a cover and for loading a scroll formed by a length offilm interleaved with a length of backing paper, said film and backingpaper being unattached to each other, and a take-up spool into saidchambers comprising:a housing;a supply of sensitized film and a supply of backing paper;a single guide track supported on said housing for receiving andtransporting therein a web of film with a web of backing paper to ascrolling means;means for guiding a web of film from the supply thereof into said guidetrack, and means for guiding a web of backing paper from the supplythereof into said guide track;means supported on said housing for engaging said web of film and means forengaging said web of paper to advance said webs along said guide track;means for severing said film and paper webs to desired finite lengths;means for determining relative locations of said webs to actuate saidsevering means;scrolling means carried on said housing at one end of said guide track forwinding said severed webs into a scroll, said webs being unattached toeach other,means for attaching a free end of said scroll to a take-up spool;means for axially displacing said spool and scroll for simultaneouslyinserting said spool and scroll into a spool chamber and a scroll chamberrespectively in said bottom portion of said cartridge;transport means for carrying said loaded bottom portion to an assemblystation for assembly with said cover; andmeans for sealing said cover to said bottom portion to form a completedcartridge.13. The machine according to claim 12 wherein said means for guiding saidfilm web to said guide track comprises a plurality of rollers mounted forrotation in fixed position on said housing, and a spring loaded floatingroller for maintaining desired tension in said film web.14. The machine according to claim 13 further comprising means connected tosaid floating roller for detecting the position thereof as an indicationof film tension, and means connected to said detecting means and actuatedthereby for correcting said tension.15. The machine according to claim 12 wherein said means for guiding saidbacking paper to said guide track comprises means to form a loop in saidweb between said supply and said guide track, and means mounted on saidhousing for detecting the size of said loop.16. The machine according to claim 15 wherein said means for detecting thesize of said loop comprises a light emitting element directing a beam oflight in the path of said loop and a light detecting element for receivingsaid beam when said loop is too short, and further comprising means foradvancing said paper web from said supply to said loop in response to asignal from said light detecting element in order to adjust the size ofsaid loop.17. The machine according to claim 13 wherein said means for advancing adesired length of film web along said guide track comprises a sprocketwheel rotatably carried on a sprocket shaft, and a rotatably driven rubbercovered pinch roller in surface engagement with said sprocket wheelforming a nip therebetween for drawing said film web therethrough whensaid pinch roller is driven, so that when said sprocket wheel is caused tomake a single revolution the desired length of film will have been meteredinto said guide track.18. The machine according to claim 17 wherein the means for determining thelocation of said film web to actuate the means for severing said film webcomprises cam means carried on said sprocket shaft, and switch meansactuated by said cam means so as to indicate that the desired length offilm has been metered into said track.19. The machine according to claim 12 wherein said means for determiningthe location of said paper web to actuate the means for severing saidpaper web comprises a light emitting and detecting element mounted on thehousing and directing a beam of light onto a light reflecting surfaceportion of said guide track, so that when a portion of said paper passessaid element a signal will be produced to actuate said severing means.20. The machine according to claim 12 wherein said scrolling meanscomprises a quill housing carried on said machine housing, a quilljournalled for rotation in said quill housing, a winding spindle carriedwithin said quill for axial movement therethrough between an inactiveposition and a scrolling position, means for keying said spindle to saidquill so that said spindle will rotate upon rotation of said quill, meanscoupled with said spindle for causing axial movement thereof, meanscoupled with said quill for causing rotation thereof when said spindle isin the scrolling position, a diametric slot in said spindle for receivingan end of said web of paper to form the center of said scroll, and meansfor actuating said means causing axial movement of the spindle.21. The machine according to claim 20 wherein said means for causing axialmovement of said spindle is an air cylinder, and wherein said means forcausing rotation of said quill is an electric motor, further comprisingswitch means for initiating operation of said motor for rotating saidscroll and spindle, and actuator means carried by said air cylinder fortripping said switch means.22. The machine according to claim 21 further comprising a spindle platecarried for rotation with said quill, means carried by said spindle platefor indicating its angular orientation and the orientation of saiddiametric slot in said spindle, means for detecting the position of saidindicating means for stopping operation of said motor so that said slotwill be oriented in a position to receive said end of said paper web.23. The machine according to claim 22 wherein said indicating means carriedon said plate comprises a pair of diametrically opposed slots, and saiddetecting means comprises a light emitting and detecting element mountedfor directing a beam of light transverse to the plane of said plate so asto be aligned with and detect the position of said slots.24. The machine according to claim 12 wherein said free end of said paperis attached to said spool by ultrasonic means.25. The machine according to claim 12 wherein said means for sealing saidcover to said bottom portion of said cartridge is an ultrasonic weldingdevice.26. The machine according to claim 12 further comprising a first transportcarrier having at least one set of sockets including a scroll socket and aspool socket for supporting therein a take-up spool, said scroll beingwound within said scroll socket, said transport means comprising a secondtransport carrier having a plurality of cartridge sockets for supportingtherein said bottom portion of said cartridge, means connected to saidfirst and second transport carriers for synchronously indexing saidsockets to a loading position, said inserting means comprising a transfermechanism movably carried on said housing for transferring said spool andscroll in a direction parallel to the longitudinal axes of said spool andscroll simultaneously from their respective sockets in said firsttransport carrier into their respective chambers in said bottom portion ofsaid cartridge supported in said second transport carrier, and means forindexing said second transport carrier to said assembly station.27. The machine, according to claim 26 wherein each of said transportcarriers comprises a turret journalled for rotational indexing in saidhousing, said sockets being located on a circumferential path of saidturrets, said first and second turrets being axially offset andoverlapping so that said spool and scroll sockets of said first turretwill register with a cartridge socket of said second turret when saidsockets are located at the loading position, said means for indexing saidturrets comprising a Furgeson drive unit for each turret, said drive unitsbeing mechanically tied for synchronous indexing.28. The machine according to claim 27 further comprising a series of camswitch elements for actuating said scrolling operation, said insertingoperation, said paper to spool attaching operation and said cover tobottom sealing operation in response29. The machine according to claim 28 wherein said transfer mechanismcomprises a lever pivotally mounted on said housing, a pair of transferpistons carried on one end of said lever for engaging an end of said spooland scroll carried in their respective sockets of said first turret andaxially displacing said spool and scroll from their respective sockets soas to transfer them to said cartridge bottom, drive means connected to theother end of said lever so as to cause pivoting movement thereof fordriving said pistons into engagement with the ends of said scroll andspool when said drive means is actuated in response to indexing of saidturrets.30. The machine according to claim 27 wherein said scrolling meanscomprises a winding spindle mounted for axial movement between an inactiveposition and a scrolling position in which said spindle extends into saidscroll socket of said first turret for winding said webs of paper and filminto a scroll, means connected to said spindle for causing, rotationthereof to wind said scroll, means coupled to said spindle for axiallymoving said spindle into said socket to the scrolling position and forwithdrawing said spindle from said scroll socket to the inactive position,means for retaining the wound scroll within said scroll socket when saidspindle is withdrawn therefrom.31. The machine according to claim 30 further comprising a guide tracksection mounted on said housing for pivotal movement about a pivot point,said guide track section communicating at one end thereof with said singleguide track for receiving and transporting therethrough said web of filmand web of backing paper, said scrolling means being located at the otherend of said guide track section, and means carried on said housingconnected to said guide track section for causing pivotal movement thereofso that said web of film and web of backing paper will be directed at saidspindle for scrolling.32. The machine according to claim 31 wherein said means for causingpivotal movement of said guide track section is an air cylinder.33. In a machine for winding a length of film with a length of backingpaper so as to form a scroll with the ends of said film and paper beingunattached to each other, and loading said scroll with a take-up spoolinto a film cartridge, the combination comprising a first rotatablysupported transport carrier, a scroll receiving socket and a spoolreceiving socket in said first transport carrier, a winding spindlemounted for axial movement between an inactive position and a scrollingposition in which said spindle extends into said scroll receiving socketfor winding a scroll therein, means coupled to said spindle for causingaxial movement thereof, a diametric slot in said spindle for receivingsaid web of paper, means for supplying and feeding desired lengths of filmand backing paper in overlying relation to said spindle, means connectedto said spindle for causing rotation thereof to wind said film and paperinto a scroll within said scroll receiving socket, an annular flange forretaining said scroll within said scroll receiving socket when saidspindle is moved from the scrolling position to the inactive position, asecond transport carrier arranged for rotation in a plane spaced from theplane of rotation of said first transport carrier and about an axis ofrotation parallel to the axis of rotation of said first transport carrierso that a portion of said first and second transport carriers overlap,said second transport carrier arranged for supporting therein an opencartridge bottom, indexing means connected to said first and secondtransport carriers for synchronously moving said carriers so that saidscroll and spool receiving sockets in said first carrier register withsaid cartridge bottom carried in the second carrier, and a transfermechanism having means for engaging one end of said spool and scroll anddisplacing said spool and scroll in an axial direction for transferringthem from their respective sockets to said open cartridge.34. In a machine according to claim 33 further comprising a pivotallymounted guide track for guiding said film and backing paper into saidscroll receiving socket, and means connected to said guide track forcausing pivotal movement thereof so as to aim said paper into said slot ofsaid spindle when said spindle is in the scrolling position.35. In a machine according to claim 33 further comprising switch meansactuated when said spindle is in said scrolling position to preventindexing movement of said carriers.36. In a machine according to claim 33 further comprising ultrasonic meansfor attaching a free end of said paper when wound with said film into ascroll to said spool.37. In a machine according to claim 33 further comprising an ultrasonicwelding mechanism for sealing a cover to said open cartridge bottom.38. In a machine according to claim 33 further comprising means fordetecting the orientation of said spindle slot so that said slot will bein the proper orientation for receiving said paper when said spindle is insaid scrolling position.39. In a machine according to claim 38 wherein said means for detecting theorientation of said spindle slot comprises a spindle plate carried forrotation with said spindle, a pair of diametrically opposed slots in saidplates, a light emitting and detecting element mounted for directing abeam of light transverse to the plane of said plate so as to be alignedwith and detect the position of said slots, and means connected to saidelement for deactuating the means for rotating said spindle so that saidslots will be in the desired orientation.40. In a machine according to claim 33 further comprising means forsupplying said film and backing paper in web form, and means for severingsaid webs of film and backing paper into the desired lengths forscrolling.41. In a machine according to claim 33 wherein said transfer mechanismcomprises a pivotally mounted lever, a pair of transfer pistons carried onone end of said lever for engaging the ends of said spool and scrollcarried in their respective sockets of said first transport carrier andfor axially displacing said spool and scroll to effect transfer thereof tosaid cartridge bottom, drive means connected to the other end of saidlever so as to cause pivotal movement thereof and for driving said pistonsinto engagement with said scroll and spool when said drive means isactuated in response to indexing of said first and second transportcarriers."}
{"WKU":"039302970","Title":"Fastener feed apparatus and method","App_Date":"1973-11-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Frank R. Potucek;Allen R. Obergfell","Assignee":"Duo-Fast Corporation","ICL_Class":"B25B 2304;B65D 8524;B21D 3903","References":"2009580;3374934;3543987;3550831;3554246","Claims":"What is claimed and desired to be secured by Letters Patent of the UnitedStates is:1. In combination with a power screwdriver having a main housing portionand a handle defining an included angle in a plane and having a rotatablebit generally in line with the main housing portion; a fastener feedapparatus comprising:a strip of fasteners including a coil, each fastener being arrangedgenerally perpendicular to the principal axis of the adjacent segment ofthe strip;a magazine enclosing said coil with the coil lying generally in the planeof said angle and within said included angle;a feed mechanism mounted on said main housing portion and including meansfor sequentially presenting individual fasteners of the strip to a driveposition in line with said bit; anda segment of said strip extending along a curved path between said magazineand said feed mechanism being twisted through a substantial angle.2. The feed apparatus of claim 1, said strip comprising a flexible carrierstrip having a continuous web portion and opposed pairs of fastenerholding tabs carried by said web portion.3. The feed apparatus of claim 1, said angle comprising approximatelyninety degrees.4. A fastener feed assembly for supplying fasteners to the drive member ofa fastener driving tool, said assembly comprising:a flexible carrier strip including a web portion;a plurality of tabs extending from said web portions for holding saidfasteners;nose means adapted to be carried by said tool and defining a carrier stripfeed path for presenting said fasteners to a drive position;means defining a drive path through said nose means for movement of saiddrive member in a drive stroke transverse to the feed path andintersecting the feed path at said drive position, said tabs beingindividually deformable from a first position to a second position duringsaid drive stroke;means for sequentially advancing said carrier strip in increments toposition successive fasteners in said drive position;and a stop surface adjacent said feed path facing in the direction of feedof said carrier strip and disposed adjacent said drive position forengagement with said tabs in said second position.5. A method of automatically feeding screws from a strip to a position inline with the bit of a power screwdriver having a nose assembly, saidmethod comprising the steps of:supporting one screw of the strip in the nose assembly in line with thebit;pushing the screwdriver toward a workpiece in order to engage the bit withsaid one screw and rotating the bit to drive the screw from the noseassembly into the workpiece;retracting a pawl along the strip to a cocked position during said pushingstep;deforming aa spring between the pawl and the nose assembly during saidpushing step;withdrawing said screwdriver away from the workpiece; andreleasing the spring to apply the force of said spring to said pawl toadvance said pawl to a home position during said withdrawing step in orderto move an adjacent screw into line with the bit.6. The method of claim 5, said deforming step being carried out by applyingto said spring a force developed by said pushing.7. The method of claim 5, said method further comprising delaying saidretracting step until after engagement of said bit with the screw.8. The method of claim 5, said method further comprising holding said pawlin the cocked position during the initial part of said withdrawing step.9. The method of claim 5, said method further comprising deflecting aportion of said strip into alignment with a stop during driving of saidscrew to prevent reverse movement of the strip.10. In combination with a fastener driving tool for driving fasteners inthe direction of their major axis into a workpiece, a feed assemblycomprising:a carrier strip including a series of the fasteners each supportedgenerally perpendicular to the major axis of the adjacent portion of saidstrip;a magazine supported on said tool and containing a supply of said strip;a nose assembly mounted on said tool for reciprocal movement relative tothe tool during a fastener drive operation;means defining a feed path through said nose assembly for said stripwherein a fastener of the strip is located in a drive position;strip advancing means for moving said strip in increments along said feedpath; anda segment of said strip disposed between said magazine and said noseassembly twisted around its major axis through a substantial angle.11. The feed assembly of claim 10 wherein said substantial angle is inexcess of forty-five degrees.12. The feed assembly of claim 10 wherein said substantial angle isapproximately ninety degrees.13. Fastener feed apparatus for a tool including a rotatable drive memberfor driving rotary entry fasteners into a workpiece, said feed apparatuscomprising a base adapted to be mounted on the tool, a workpiece engagingnose assembly mounted for reciprocal movement toward the base as the toolis pressed toward the workpiece in a fastener driving operation, a returnspring compressed between the base and the nose assembly for moving thenose assembly away from the base as the tool is withdrawn from theworkpiece, a fastener strip including an elongated carrier membersupporting fasteners in spaced positions therealong, said nose assemblydefining a drive path for movement of the drive member through the noseassembly in a drive stroke toward the workpiece and defining a feed pathintersecting the drive path for supporting the fastener strip in the noseassembly with a fastener aligned with the drive member, said fastener feedassembly being characterized by a series of pawl engagement structureslocated along the fastener strip carrier member, pawl means engageablewith the pawl engagement structures and mounted on the nose assembly formovement along the feed path between a cocked position and a home positionwherein a fastener is in alignment with the drive member, a pawl springbiasing the pawl means toward the home position, abutment means on saidnose assembly engageable by the pawl means and defining the home position,and linkage means for moving said pawl means to the cocked position inresponse to movement of the nose assembly toward the base assembly and forfreeing the pawl means during movement of the nose assembly away from thebase for permitting the pawl spring to return the pawl means to the homeposition.14. Fastener feed apparatus as claimed in claim 13, said linkage meansincluding locking means for retaining the pawl means in the cockedposition, and means for releasing said locking means to free the pawlmeans during movement of said nose assembly away from said base.15. Fastener feed apparatus as claimed in claim 13, further comprising amagazine adapted to be supported by said tool for containing a supply ofthe fastener strip, the fasteners of the strip being each supportedgenerally perpendicular to the major axis of the adjacent portion of thestrip, and a segment of the strip disposed between the magazine and thenose assembly being twisted around its major axis through a substantialangle.16. Fastener feed apparatus as claimed in claim 13 further comprising astop surface in the nose assembly adjacent the feed path, tab means on thecarrier member for holding the fasteners, said tab means being deformableto an inclined position by the drive member in a drive stroke, the tabmeans in the inclined position overlying the stop surface to preventreverse movement of the fastener strip along the feed path.17. Fastener feed apparatus as claimed in claim 13, each said pawlengagement structure comprising an opening in the fastener strip carriermember.18. Fastener feed apparatus as claimed in claim 17, the carrier membercomprising an elongated web having spaced tabs extending from the web forholding fasteners.19. Fastener feed apparatus as claimed in claim 13, said linkage meansincluding lost motion means for delaying movement of the pawl means awayfrom the home position in a drive stroke until after secure engagement ofthe drive member with a fastener.20. Fastener feed apparatus as claimed in claim 14, said linkage meansbeing effective to release said locking means only after withdrawal of thedrive member from the feed path.21. Fastener feed apparatus as claimed in claim 17, said pawl meanscomprising a lever pivotally and somewhat loosely mounted on said noseassembly, a pawl on said lever, and said pawl spring biasing said pawlagainst said carrier member.22. Fastener feed apparatus as claimed in claim 21, said linkage meanscomprising a drive link pivoted to said lever and slidably and pivotallycoupled to said base.23. Fastener feed apparatus as claimed in claim 13, further comprisingadjustment means between the base and the nose assembly for adjusting thelength of the drive stroke."}
{"WKU":"039302989","Title":"Method of forming a tube fitting assembly","App_Date":"1975-03-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ralph G. Ridenour","Assignee":"Universal Refrigeration, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B21D 3900;B23P 1102","References":"528167;1817854;1971117;2477676;2779279;3092404;3428338;3497946;3534988;3687495;3778090","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method of forming an assembly of a tubing and a fitting wherein thefitting has a first orifice through a portion of the fitting and a secondorifice through a portion of the first orifice with one of the orificesdefining an inside surface of the fitting at the end thereof, the fittinghaving an outside surface surrounding the second orifice comprising, thesteps of:holding the fitting;holding the tubing;inserting the tubing into the first orifice of the fitting;abutting an end of the tubing against the inside surface of the fitting;relatively moving the held tubing axially toward the held fitting toradially expand the tubing wall into engagement with one of the orificesand to radially expand the tubing wall to extend outwardly from thefitting in proximity to the outside surface of the fitting;and forcing the tubing extended outwardly from the fitting to engage theoutside surface of the fitting surrounding the second orifice.2. A method of forming an assembly of a tubing and a fitting wherein thefitting has an aperture and a first bore concentric with the aperture andthrough a portion of the fitting with the first bore defining an insidesurface of the fitting at the end of the first bore, a second boreconcentric with the aperture and through a portion of the first bore andthe fitting having an outside surface surrounding the second bore andwherein the tubing is substantially equal in diameter to the first bore,comprising, the steps of:holding the fitting;holding the tubing at a distance from the tubing end which is greater thanthe length of the first bore;inserting the tubing into the first bore;abutting the inserted end of the tubing against the inside surface of thefitting;relatively moving the held tubing axially toward the held fitting toradially expand the tubing wall to engage the second bore and to radiallyexpand the tubing wall to extend outwardly from the fitting;and forcing the tubing extended outwardly from the fitting to engage theoutside surface of the fitting.3. A method as set forth in claim 2 wherein the step of relatively movingthe tubing radially expands the tubing wall to engage substantially all ofthe first and second bores.4. A method as set forth in claim 2 wherein the step of forcing the tubingextended outwardly includes swaging the tubing extended outwardly with atool.5. A method of forming an assembly of a tubing and a fitting wherein thefitting has a first orifice through a portion of the fitting with thefirst orifice defining an inside surface of the fitting at the end of thefirst orifice, a second orifice concentric with and through a portion ofthe first orifice and the fitting having an outside surface surroundingthe second orifice comprising, the steps of:holding the fitting;holding the tubing;inserting the tubing into the first orifice;abutting the inserted end of the tubing against the inside surface of thefitting;relatively moving the held tubing axially toward the held fitting toradially expand the tubing wall forming a bead which engages the wall ofthe second orifice and extends outside of the fitting;and forcing the tubing bead extending outside of the fitting to engage theoutside surface of the fitting.6. A method as set forth in claim 5, wherein the step of forcing the tubingbead includes flattening at least a portion of the bead extending outsideof the fitting against the outside surface of the fitting.7. A method of forming an assembly of a tubing and a fitting wherein thefitting has first and second walls defining first and second concentricorifices, the fitting having an inside surface defining an end of thefirst orifice and an outside surface adjacent an end of the second orificewith the second orifice extending through only a portion of the firstorifice, and with the second wall having a greater periphery than thefirst wall, and a junction wall defining a junction between said firstorifice and the inner end of said second orifice, comprising the steps of:holding the fitting with a fitting holder;holding the tubing with a tubing holder at a distance from the tubing endwhich is greater than the distance from the inside surface to the outsidesurface of the fitting;inserting the tubing into the first orifice;abutting the inserted end of the tubing against the inside surface of thefitting;axially contracting the tubing length between the tubing end and tubingholder by relative movement between the tubing holder and the fittingholder and forming a bead from material of the contracted tubing lengthwithin the second orifice;and radially expanding the bead through continued contraction of the tubinglength to engage the expanded bead with the wall of the second orifice toseal the tubing to the fitting at one of the junction wall and secondwall.8. A method of forming an assembly of a tubing and a fitting wherein thetubing has an internal diameter and an external diameter and wherein thefitting has an aperture having an aperture diameter commensurate with theinternal diameter of the tubing and extending through the fitting, a firstwall defining a first orifice through a portion of the fitting and havinga first orifice diameter commensurate with the external diameter of thetubing with an inside surface of the fitting defining an end of the firstorifice, and a second wall defining a second orifice concentric with andthrough a portion of the first orifice and having a second orificediameter which is greater than the first orifice diameter and an outsidesurface of the fitting adjacent an end of the second orifice, comprisingthe steps of:holding the fitting with a fitting holder;holding the tubing with a tubing holder at a distance from the tubing endwhich is greater than the distance from the inside surface to the outsidesurface of the fitting;inserting the tubing into the first orifice;abutting the inserted end of the tubing against the inside surface of thefitting;axially contracting the tubing length between the tubing end and tubingholder by axial relative movement between the tubing holder and thefitting holder forming a bead from the contracted tubing length within thesecond orifice;and radially expanding the bead through additional contraction of thetubing length by continued relative movement between the tubing holder andthe fitting holder to substantially fill and to engage the expanded beadwith the wall of the second orifice to seal the tubing to the fitting."}
{"WKU":"039302997","Title":"Methods of and/or apparatus for joining timber members","App_Date":"1973-11-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Lee Charles Farrington;Edgar Edward Dagley","Assignee":"Automated Building Components, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B25C  700","References":"3207406;3716179","Claims":"We claim:1. A method of joining timber members conprising the steps of temporarilyplacing a pair of spiked timber connector plates and holding the connectorplates on a pair of spaced, substantially parallel platens, moving aplurality of timber members to desired positions between the platens forjoining, rotating the platens to a position where the connector plates arelocated to span the required joint between the timber members eitherbefore or after moving said timber members, pressing said platens towardseach other so that the spikes of said connector plates are embedded inopposite faces of said timber members to join together, and retractingsaid platens leaving said connector plates embedded in said timbermembers.2. Apparatus for use in joining timber members using spiked timberconnector plates, said apparatus comprising a frame, a pair of spaced,substantially parallel platens in said frame adapted to be moved towardseach other with appropriate force, connector plate supply means adapted tosupply at least one connector plate onto an appropriate surface of eachplaten, and moving and positioning means adapted to move and position saidconnector plates in a position where said connector plates span the jointbetween the timber members to be connected, the construction andarrangement being such that in use one plate delivered to each of saidplatens is moved and positioned so that the connector plate spans thejoint to be made and the platens are then moved to press the spike of eachconnector plate into the timber so as to make a joint between the timbermembers appropriately positioned in the apparatus, said moving meanscomprising rotation means adapted to rotate at least one said platen, theaxis of rotation of said one platen being substantially perpendicular tosaid appropriate surface, said positioning means including stop meansadapted to restrain said one platen from rotating when said connectorplate is in a desired position, so as to span the joint between the timbermembers to be connected.3. Apparatus as claimed in claim 2 wherein each connector plate is held onsaid appropriate surface of at least one platen by magnetic means, saidconnector plate supply means comprising cassettes adapted to contain asupply of connector plates, said cassettes being counterbalanced so thatin use an outer connector plate in each cassette is maintained insubstantially the same position regardless of the quantity of connectorplates remaining in the cassette, connector plate release means beingprovided so that in use said connector plate release means may be operatedby movement of said platen to release a single connector plate at a timefrom a supply thereof, said connector plate release means comprising abody pivotally attached to said cassette said body including a tonguearranged so that said body may pivot to project said tongue into the mouthof said cassette, spring means to hold said tongue normally projectinginto the mouth of said cassette and a projecting actuation member adaptedto pivot said body in order to withdraw said tongue from the mouth of saidcassette when said actuation member is contacted and moved by the approachof said platen to the mouth of said cassette so that a connector plate maybe released from the mouth of said cassette into the surface of saidplaten.4. Apparatus for use in joining timber members using spiked timberconnector plates, said apparatus comprising a frame, a pair of platens insaid frame adapted to be moved towards each other with appropriate force,connector plate supply means adapted to supply at least one connectorplate onto an appropriate surface of each platen, and moving andpositioning means adapted to move and position said connector plates in aposition where said connector plates span the joint between the timbermembers to be connected, the construction and arrangement being such thatin use the connector plates delivered to each of said platens are movedand positioned so that the connector plates span the joint to be made andthe platens are then moved to press the spike of each connector plate intothe timber so as to make a joint between at least two timber membersappropriately positioned in the apparatus, said moving means comprisingrotation means adapted to rotate one said platen, the axis of rotation ofsaid one platen being substantially perpendicular to said appropriatesurface, said positioning means including stop means adapted to restrainsaid one platen from rotating when said connector plate is in a desiredposition, so as to span the joint between the timber members to beconnected, said rotation means comprising a motor pivotally mounted tosaid frame and adapted to drive said one platen by way of a friction drivewheel bearing a surface of said one platen, said motor being actuated by aswitch in conjunction with said pivotal mounting so that as said oneplaten moves away from said drive wheel said mounting will pivot toactuate said motor by way of said switch whereupon said one platenreturning to its original position will be contracted by the now rotatingfriction drive wheel to rotate said platen until a projection on saidplaten actuates a further stationary position.5. Apparatus for use in joining timber members using spiked timberconnector plates, said apparatus comprising a frame, a pair of platens insaid frame adapted to be moved towards each other with appropriate force,connector plate supply means adapted to supply at least one connectorplate onto an appropriate surface of each platen, and moving andpositioning means adapted to move and position said connector plates in aposition where said connector plates span the joint between the timbermembers to be connected, the construction and arrangement being such thatthe connector plates delivered to said platens are moved and positioned sothat the connector plates span the joint to be made and the platens arethen moved to press a spike of each connector plate into the timber so asto make a joint between at least two timber members appropriatelypositioned in the apparatus, said frame including locating means to locatea first timber member in a desired position, first timber fixing means tohold said first timber member in said desired position and second timberfixing means to hold at least a second timber member in position to abutsaid first timber member so that the joint between at least two adjacenttimber members will in use be spanned by said connector plates when inposition, said locating means comprising a spring loaded detent adapted tobe depressed by a timber member passing through said frame in onedirection in order to allow the passage of said timber member in thatdirection and also adapted to resist depression by a timber member passingthrough said frame in the opposite direction so that in use a timbermember may be longitudinally passed through said frame until the trailingend of the timber member has cleared said detent whereupon the movement ofsaid timber member may be reversed until said end abuts said detent solocating said end of said timber member relative to said frame, said firsttimber fixing means comprising a support member arranged longitudinallywith reference to said first timber member in use and a holding memberactuable to wedge said first timber member between said support member andsaid holding member, said second timber fixing means comprising a supportmember arranged longitudinally with reference to said second timber memberin use and a securing member actuable to wedge said second timber memberbetween said support members and said securing member including at leastone eccentric knob pivoted to said securing member by a pivot in such amanner that in use when said securing member is actuated to wedge saidsecond timber member between said support member and said securing memberssaid eccentric knob engages with said second timber member at a pointoffset from said pivot so tending to rotate said eccentric knob about saidpivot providing a longitudinal force on said second timber member toensure that said second timber member is abutted against said first timbermember."}
{"WKU":"039303004","Title":"Junction field effect transistor","App_Date":"1973-04-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hugh Crawford Nicolay","Assignee":"Harris Corporation","ICL_Class":"B01J 1700;H01L 2900","References":"2744970;2939057;3171762;3450960;3457125;3600651;3607468;3796612","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for fabricating a junction field effect transistor whichcomprises:a. forming a planar surface layer having a [100] crystal orientation of oneconductivity type on a substrate of opposite conductivity type, saidsubstrate constituting a first gate;b. forming a V-shaped moat concave to said planar surface layer by etchingsaid [100] planar surface, layer andc. forming a V-shaped second gate in said planar surface layer contouringsaid moat of said opposite conductivity type for dividing said planarsurface layer into a planar source and a planar drain region connectedbelow said second gate by a channel region.2. A process as in claim 1 including forming a planar region of saidopposite conductivity type adjacent said planar surface layer andextending to said substrate for isolating said planar surface layer of oneconductivity type and providing a first gate contact at said planarsurface layer.3. A process as in claim 1 wherein said substrate is single crystal siliconand said planar surface layer of one conductivity type is formed byepitaxial growth.4. A process as in claim 1 including forming source and drain contactregions in said planar surface layer before forming said moat.5. A process for fabricating a junction field effect transistor whichcomprises:a. forming a planar surface layer of one conductivity type on a substrateof opposite conductivity type, said substrate constituting a first gate;b. etching said planar surface layer to form a wedged shaped regiondividing said planar surface layer into a planar source and a planar drainregion connected below said wedged shaped region by a channel region; andc. forming a wedged shaped surface region in said planar surface layercontouring said wedge shape region of said opposite conductivity typeconstituting a second gate.6. A process as in claim 5 including forming a planar region of saidopposite conductivity type adjacent said planar surface layer andextending to said substrate and providing a first gate contact at saidplanar surface layer.7. A process as in claim 5 wherein said planar surface layer is a singlecrystal silicon having a [100] crystal plane orientation.8. A process as in claim 5 wherein forming said second gate includesdiffusing said opposite conductivity determining type impurities into saidetched wedge shaped region to form said second gate having its surfaceconcave to said planar surface layer."}
{"WKU":"039303012","Title":"Heavy machine tool and device for depositing and placing a tool head in","App_Date":"1973-03-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hans O. Wagner","Assignee":"Schiess Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"B23Q  3157","References":"3249997;3650018;3709623;3757637","Claims":"What I claim is:1. A heavy machine tool, especially boring and milling machine, which isadapted to selectively receive one of a plurality of tool heads havingmachining tool means mounted thereon, said machine tool including: a standhorizontally movable along a bed, a headstock vertically displaceablymounted on said stand, a supporting sleeve slidable in said headstock, arotary boring spindle drive means having an axis of rotation arranged insaid supporting sleeve, a pull rod operable chucking device arranged insaid supporting sleeve for respectively driving and chucking a heavy toolhead therein, said tool head comprising a housing adapted to be supportedby said supporting sleeve and containing tool drive elements engageablewith said spindle drive means, the outer peripheral surface of saidhousing being provided intermediate its ends with a circumferentialcircular groove located all around in a plane substantially perpendicularto the axis of rotation of said boring spindle, at least one device forthe deposit of a tool head in readiness for use, said last mentioneddevice including a vertically standing holding plate means having an upperedge corresponding in contour to the said circular arc-shaped annulargroove of said tool head and having a thickness corresponding to the widthof said groove, said plate being adapted to receive and support said toolhead by means of said groove, said device being located within the rangeof movement of the respective stand and tool head whereby the slide bymovement with respect to said plate may deposit a tool head directly onsaid plate or engage a tool head while it is supported by said plate.2. A machine tool according to claim 1, in which the region of movement ofthe tool head is determined by the displacement of at least one of saidhead stock, said supporting sleeve, and said stand.3. A machine tool according to claim 1, which includes means for holdingsaid deposit plate resiliently displaceably in its plane within a limitedrange.4. A machine tool according to claim 1, which includes a turntable bearingpin, a horizontal bearing pivot eccentrically connected to said bearingpin and supporting said deposit plate, spring means, and lever meansconnected to said bearing pin and acted upon by said spring means, themagnitude of the force exerted by said spring means corresponding to theweight of a tool head to be supported by said deposit plate.5. A machine tool according to claim 4, which includes abutment means, andin which said lever means includes a lever pivotable in downward andupward direction, the pivotal downward movement of said lever beinglimited by said abutment means, and the pivotal upward movement beingyieldably opposed by said spring means.6. A machine tool according to claim 4, which includes: a stand platehaving said bearing pin journalled therein, a bracket plate extendingalong a plane substantially parallel to said deposit plate and beingeccentrically arranged with regard to and supported by said bearing pinwhile being substantially parallel to said stand plate, said deposit platebeing connected to said bracket plate so as to be displaceable transversethereto and to be arrestable, and bolt means extending with play throughsaid stand plate and guiding said bracket plate parallel to said standplate.7. A machine tool according to claim 4, which includes a base plate and ahorizontal ground plate supporting said stand plate and displaceable onsaid base plate in a direction transverse to the plane of said depositplane and adapted to be aligned with the axis of the boring spindle inconformity with the tool head.8. A machine tool according to claim 7, which includes spring meansassociated with said ground plate for displacing said ground plate in theoutward moving direction of said supporting sleeve and in oppositedirection perpendicular to the plane of the deposit plate and relative tosaid base plate.9. A machine tool according to claim 1, which includes a turntable, and aplurality of devices for depositing tools and placing the same inreadiness for use.10. A machine tool according to claim 9, which additionally includes a toolmagazine.11. A machine tool according to claim 10, which includes a lifting devicehaving a pivotable supporting arm for transferring tools to said devicesfor depositing tools and for placing same in readiness for use and viceversa.12. A machine according to claim 1, wherein said tool head includes a driveshaft for a milling head, a follower flange non-rotatably butlongitudinally displaceably mounted on said drive shaft, said drive shaftbeing adapted to be coupled to said boring spindle by means of saidfollower flange and to be chucked by said chucking device, and clampingbolt means supported by said housing and operable at the same time atwhich said drive shaft is being coupled to said boring spindle to engagesaid supporting sleeve and to be chucked thereto.13. A machine according to claim 12, in which said supporting sleeve has afree end provided with an annular flange, and which includes: a clampingring engaging said annular flange at the side of said head stock, saidclamping bolt means being provided with heads and said annular flangebeing provided with passages associated with said heads while saidclamping ring has slots arranged in alignment with said passages and ofsuch a shape that by turning said clamping ring after said heads extendthrough said slots a lock of the type of a bayonet joint is obtained.14. A machine according to claim 12, which includes spring meansrespectively surrounding said clamping bolt means and urging the same inthe direction away from said head stock, pivotable lever means engagingthat end of said clamping bolt means which is remote from the headthereof, said follower flange being longitudinally displaceable by saidboring spindle on said drive shaft to thereby bring about a tilting ofsaid lever means so as to cause the latter to move the pertaining clampingbolt means against the thrust of said spring means slightly in thedirection toward said head stock.15. A machine according to claim 13, which includes spring means urgingsaid clamping ring into interlocking position with said clamping boltmeans."}
{"WKU":"039303020","Title":"Machine tool with guard cover apparatus","App_Date":"1975-01-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Yoshiki Ochiai;Akira Tsuboi;Yoji Kamiya","Assignee":"Toyoda Machine Works, Ltd.","ICL_Class":"B23Q  3157;B23Q 1108","References":"3355799;3821844","Claims":"What is claimed as new and desired to be secured by Letters Patent of theUnited States is:1. A machine tool comprising:a tool storage magazine for storing a plurality of radially arranged toolsin a horizontal plane and provided with a tool change position;a spindle for receiving a tool from said magazine to perform a machiningoperation;a tool change arm for changing respective tools between the tool changeposition on said magazine and said spindle;a pair of guard covers arranged between said tool change position and saidspindle and capable of being pivoted in a horizontal plane; and drivemeans operatively connected with one end of each of said guard covers fornormally maintaining said guard covers closed to receive a tool which mayaccidentally fall from said magazine and for opening said guard covers topermit a tool change operation between said tool change position and saidspindle.2. A machine tool according to claim 1, wherein each of said guard coversis provided with a notch such that a tool change operation may beperformed without said tool change arm interfering with said guard covers.3. A machine tool according to claim 1, wherein the other end of one ofsaid guard covers is superposed with the other end of the other of saidguard covers when said guard covers are closed."}
{"WKU":"039303039","Title":"Method for manufacturing compact thermoelectric modules","App_Date":"1975-01-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Michel Alais;Andre Stahl","Assignee":"Compagnie Industrielle des Telecommunications Cit-Alcatel","ICL_Class":"B01J 1700","References":"2289152;3279036;3626583;3851381","Claims":"We claim:1. In a method for manufacturing thermoelectric modules including: thesteps of stacking very thin plates of P type and very thin plates of Ntype alternately, and connecting each plate of one type to the neighboringplates which are of the other type by connection bridges arranged on theedge of said plates, the improvement comprising the steps of:taking a block of P type and a block of N type, these blocks having aparallelepipedical shape and the same dimensions;cutting up these blocks parallel to one of their faces into plates of Ptype and into plates of N type;forming a stack by assembling alternately the same number of plates of Ptype and of N type while inserting between the adjacent faces, insulatingsheets which are very thin and have the same dimensions as the plates withthe said sheets being arranged so as to be alternately recessed withrespect to the plates on one face of the stack and to extend slightlybeyond the other face; andimmersing in brazing material the two opposite faces of the stack beyondwhich the insulating sheets extend."}
{"WKU":"039303047","Title":"Method and apparatus for selective burnout trimming of integrated","App_Date":"1973-11-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Helmut Keller;Hartmut Seiler","Assignee":"Robert Bosch G.m.b.H.","ICL_Class":"B01J 1700","References":"2926418;3500148;3742592","Claims":"We claim:1. A method of burning out a selected conductive connection of anintegrated circuit unit having a metallic connection pattern, comprisingthe step of:applying a plurality of individual pulses of electrical energy in rapidsuccession to a selected portion of said metallic connection patternconstituting a selected conductive connection to be burned out, in such away as to deliver to said selected connection amounts of energy per unitof time that increase with time until said connection is burned out.2. A method according to claim 1, in which the step of applying pulses ofelectrical energy is carried out by applying successive series of severalindividual pulses of constant pulse duration and frequency and ofamplitude such that the pulse amplitude is increased after the terminationof each series of several individual pulses.3. A method according to claim 1, in which the step of applying pulses ofelectrical energy is carried out by applying a series of electrical pulsesof constant pulse duration and frequency but of pulse amplitude increasingfrom pulse to pulse.4. A method according to claim 1, in which the step of applying pulses ofelectrical energy is carried out by applying successive series of severalindividual pulses of constant pulse amplitude and frequency, with thepulse duration such that the pulse duration is increased after thetermination of each series of several individual pulses.5. A method according to claim 1, in which the step of applying pulses ofelectrical energy is carried out by applying a series of electrical pulsesof constant pulse amplitude and frequency but of pulse duration increasingfrom pulse to pulse.6. A method according to claim 1, in which the step of applying pulses ofelectrical energy is carried out by applying a series of severalindividual pulses of constant pulse amplitude and duration, but ofincreasing pulse frequency.7. A method according to claim 1, in which the step of applying pulses ofelectrical energy is carried out by applying a series of pulses in whichat least two of the characteristics of pulse amplitude, pulse duration andpulse frequency are increased with the progress of time.8. A method according to claim 1, in which the step of applying pulses ofelectrical energy is carried out while superimposing a constant directcurrent (I.sub.1) upon the applied pulses of electrical energy.9. A method according to claim 1, in which the step of applying pulses ofelectrical energy is continued for the application of severalsupplementary pulses after said connection is interrupted by burnout.10. A method according to claim 1, operated repeatedly for burning out asuccession of selected conductive connections of an integrated circuit, inwhich the step of applying pulses of electrical energy is in each casecarried out by applying a succession of pulses of which the first has anenergy content of a predetermined value selected to be not greater thanthe energy content barely capable of burning out the most easily burnedout one of the selected conductive connections to be burned out.11. A method according to claim 1, operated repeatedly for burning out asuccession of selected conductive connections of an integrated circuit, inwhich the step of applying pulses of electrical energy is in each casecarried out by applying a succession of pulses of which the first has anenergy content of a predetermined value selected to be less than theenergy content necessary to burn out at once the most easily burned outconnection of said selected conductive connections to be burned out.12. A method of providing an electrical resistance of a magnitude within apredetermined resistance range in an integrated circuit unit, comprisingthe steps of:providing in said integrated circuit a plurality of parallel resistancepaths connected together by metallic connection paths which are part ofthe metallic connection path pattern of the integrated circuit unit;burning out a portion of one of said metallic connection paths so as todisconnect at least one of said parallel resistances by applying to saidmetallic path portion a plurality of individual pulses of electricalenergy in rapid succession in such a way as to deliver increasing amountsof energy per units of time until said path is interrupted by burn-out;measuring the effective resistance of said remaining parallel resistancepaths after disconnection as aforesaid, and repeating the burnoutdisconnecting step and the measuring step until the effective resistanceof the remaining parallel resistance paths is within said predeterminedrange.13. A method according to claim 12, in which the step of applying pulses ofelectrical energy to a connection path is carried out with thesimultaneous application of a superimposed direct current to saidconnection path and in which such superimposed direct current (I.sub.1) isutilized for measuring the effective resistance of the remaining parallelcombination of resistances.14. A method according to claim 12, in which each step of applying pulsesof electric energy as aforesaid is followed by the application of at leastone further pulse of electric energy of the same succession of pulsesafter the path to which the pulses were being applied has been interruptedby burnout."}
{"WKU":"039303055","Title":"Method for manufacturing integrated circuits","App_Date":"1973-06-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jacques Lacour;Michel Montier;Jean-Pierre Suat","Assignee":"Commissariat a l Energie Atomique","ICL_Class":"B01J 1700","References":"3341753;3495324;3602981;3641661;3667005;3700508","Claims":"We claim:1. A method for manufacturing integrated circuits, said method comprisingthe steps of:providing a first set of electrically conductive areas on each of thoseportions of an integrated circuit substrate having doped zones on whichelectrical contacts are to be made,providing a selective insulating layer by gaseous deposition, so that theupper portions of said conductive areas be flush with the surface of saidselective insulating layer, andproviding thereabove a second set of conductive areas adapted to constituteconnections between said upper portions,wherein said selective insulating layer is obtained by depositing, on theupper faces of the conductive areas of said first set, a material capableof preventing said insulating layer from adhering to the conductiveportions, wherein said conductive areas are made of molybdenum and saidselective insulating layer is obtained by submitting said substrate to agaseous stream containing silane (SiH.sub.4) oxygen and hydrochloric gaswith sublimation of a small part of the molybdenum preventing formation ofsilica on the molybdenum areas.2. A method for manufacturing integrated circuits, said method comprisingthe steps of:providing a first set of electrically conductive areas on each of thoseportions of an integrated circuit substrate having doped zones on whichelectrical contacts are to be made,providing a selective insulating layer by gaseous deposition, so that theupper portions of said conductive areas be flush with the surface of saidselective insulating layer, andproviding thereabove a second set of conductive areas adapted to constituteconnections between said upper portions,wherein said selective insulating layer is obtained by first depositing aninsulating layer of substantially even thickness, and then etching saidinsulating layer forming protrusions and holes in such a manner that saidprotrusions corresponding to the first set of conductive areas are etchedfar more quickly than said holes of said insulating layer, wherein saidconductive areas are made of molybdenum and comprising the steps of:depositing doped silica on said conductive areas,depositing an even layer of silica, in a gaseous state and in an oxidizingmedium, on said substrate, whereby molybdenum is caused to swell and abreak is formed in the silica layer portion covering said molybdenum, andremoving said portion by means of a solvent."}
{"WKU":"039303063","Title":"Process for attaching a lead member to a semiconductor device","App_Date":"1974-04-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Monroe B. Goldberg;William B. Voorhis","Assignee":"General Instrument Corporation","ICL_Class":"B01J 1700","References":"3378914;3844029","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for attaching a lead member to a semiconductor devicecomprising the steps ofA. providing a lead member formed substantially of a thermally andelectrically conductive metal and terminating at one end in a joiningsurface; and a semiconductor device comprising a semiconductor body and acontact member formed of a refractory metal extending outwardly from saidbody and terminating in a joining surface of said refractory metal spacedfrom said body;B. placing said joining surfaces of said members in contact with a brazingalloy comprising on a weight basis about 80-89 percent copper, about 5-15percent silver, and about 4-6 percent phosphorus;C. heating the brazing alloy at least to its wetting point for a period oftime sufficient to melt the brazing alloy; andD. allowing the molten brazing alloy to cool and solidify in contact withsaid joining surfaces of said members, thereby to join said contact memberand said lead member into a unitary structure.2. The process of claim 1 including the additional step of subsequentlyapplying and fusing a passivating layer of a passivating material aboutsaid body and about said contact member between said joining surfacethereof and said body.3. The process of claim 1 wherein the refractory metal is selected from thegroup consisting of tungsten, molybdenum, tantalum, and alloys thereof.4. The process of claim 3 wherein said refractory metal is molybdenum.5. The process of claim 1 wherein the conductive metal is selected from thegroup consisting of silver and copper and alloys thereof.6. The process of claim 5 wherein said conductive metal is copper.7. The process of claim 2 wherein the passivating material is selected fromthe group consisting of glass and plastic.8. The process of claim 7 wherein the passivating material is glass.9. The process of claim 1 wherein said semiconductor body is formedsubstantially of silicon.10. The process of claim 2 wherein said refractory metal is molybdenum,said conductive metal is copper, said passivating material is glass, andsaid semiconductor body is formed substantially of silicon.11. The process of claim 1 wherein the heating of step (C) is performed inan inert atmosphere.12. The process of claim 1 wherein said joining surfaces of said membersare of substantially the same configuration and size, and wherein thebrazing alloy is provided as a preform with joining surfaces ofsubstantially similar configuration and size abutting said joiningsurfaces of said members.13. The process according to claim 2 wherein said refractory metal isselected from the group consisting of tungsten, molybdenum, tantalum, andalloys thereof; said thermally and electrically conductive metal isselected from the group consisting of silver, copper and alloys thereof;said brazing alloy comprises on a weight basis about 80 percent copper,about 15 percent silver and about 5 percent phosphorus; and saidpassivating material is selected from the group consisting of glass andplastic.14. A process for attaching a lead member to a semiconductor body comprisesthe steps ofA. providing (i) a semiconductor body having a joining surface; (ii) acontact member formed substantially of a refractory metal and having ajoining surface of said refractory metal at each end thereof; (iii) a leadmember formed substantially of a thermally and electrically conductivemetal and having at one end a joining surface; and (iv) a brazing preformformed substantially of a brazing alloy comprising on a weight basis about80-89 percent copper, about 5-15 percent silver, and about 4-6 percentphosphorus, and having a joining surface at each end thereof.B. forming an assembly by simultaneously contacting (i) said joiningsurface of said semiconductor body to one of said refractory metal joiningsurfaces of said contact member; (ii) the other of said refractory metaljoining surfaces of said contact member to one of said brazing alloyjoining surfaces of said preform; and (iii) the other of said brazingalloy joining surfaces of said preform to said conductive metal joiningsurface of said lead member;C. heating said assembly in an inert atmosphere at least to the alloywetting point to cause brazing of contacting joining surfaces; andD. allowing said assembly to cool, thereby to join said semiconductor body,said contact member, said preform, and said lead member into a unitarystructure.15. The process of claim 14 wherein said refractory metal is selected fromthe group consisting of molybdenum, tungsten, tantalum and alloys thereof.16. The process of claim 15 wherein said refractory metal is molybdenum.17. The process of claim 14 wherein said conductive metal is selected fromthe group consisting of copper and silver and alloys thereof.18. The process of claim 17 wherein said conductive metal is copper.19. The process of claim 14 wherein said semiconductor body is formedsubstantially of silicon and has an electrically conductive layer of metalselected from the group consisting of aluminum and gold disposed thereonto define said joining surface thereof.20. The process of claim 14 wherein said refractory metal is molybdenum,said conductive metal is copper, and said semiconductor body is formedsubstantially of silicon with a layer of aluminum disposed thereon todefine said joining surface thereof.21. The process of claim 14 including the additional step of subsequentlyapplying and fusing a passivating layer of a passivating material aboutsaid semiconductor body and about said contact member between saidrefractory metal joining surfaces.22. The process of claim 21 wherein said passivating material is selectedfrom the group consisting of glass and plastic.23. The process of claim 22 wherein said passivating material is glass.24. The process of claim 21 wherein said refractory material is molybdenum,said conductive metal is copper, said passivating material is glass, andsaid semiconductor body is formed substantially of silicon and has anelectrically conductive layer of aluminum disposed thereon to define saidjoining surface thereof.25. The process according to claim 14 wherein said semiconductor body isformed substantially of silicon and has an electrically conductive layerof a metal selected from the group consisting of aluminum and golddisposed thereon to define said joining surface thereof; said refractorymetal is selected from the group consisting of molybdenum, tungsten,tantalum, and alloys thereof; said thermally and electrically conductivemetal is selected from the group consisting of copper, silver and alloysthereof; and said brazing alloy comprises on a weight basis about 80percent copper, about 15 percent silver, and about 5 percent phosphorus.26. The process of claim 25 including the additional step of subsequentlyapplying and fusing a passivating layer of a passivating material selectedfrom the group consisting of glass and plastic about said semiconductorbody and about said contact member between said refractory joiningsurfaces.27. The process of claim 14 wherein said assembly is heated in an inertatmosphere at substantially atmospheric pressure."}
{"WKU":"039303071","Title":"Assembly of wiring harness","App_Date":"1974-07-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jerome W. Schotthoefer;Donald J. Lewis","Assignee":"Allied Chemical Corporation","ICL_Class":"H01R 4300","References":"2768428;2805471;3259968;3705347;3706134;3842496","Claims":"We claim:1. A method for assembly of components comprising:collecting the components to be assembled on one of the plurality ofnon-synchronous independently moving pallets;moving each pallet from one work station to another work station along anassembly line independently of other pallets;assembling the components on the pallets at work stations along theassembly line;electrically testing the partially assembled components at intermediatestages of assembly prior to completion of assembly; andpassing the partially assembled components on the pallets to the next stageof assembly only when the testing has been completed and the componentshave been shown to be correctly assembled.2. The method for assembly of electrical components according to claim 1wherein said testing of partially assembled components at intermediatestages of assembly includes testing said electrical components forelectrical open conditions, electrical shorted conditions, and incorrectlyassembled components.3. The method for assembly of electrical components according to claim 1and further comprising:passing any partially assembled components which have been found to bedefective as a result of said testing to a repair stage wherein saidpartially assembled components are correctly assembled.4. Apparatus for the assembly of components comprising:a plurality of non-synchronous pallets on which the components areassembled;an assembly line along which said pallets move, said assembly line having aplurality of work stations, said pallets moving from one work station toanother work station independently of other pallets as the components areassembled on the pallets; andelectrical testing means for testing assembled components on said palletsbefore completion of assembly of the components to determine the presenceof electrical shorted conditions, electrical open conditions andincorrectly assembled components, said pallets moving from one workstation to the next work station only when said testing by said testingmeans has been completed and all components have been shown to becorrectly assembled at the respective work station.5. Apparatus for the assembly of components according to claim 4 whereinsaid plurality of pallets are independently powered to move along saidassembly line.6. Apparatus for the assembly of components according to claim 4 whereinsaid assembly line is powered to move said plurality of palletsindependently of one another.7. Apparatus for the assembly of components according to claim 4 whereinthe components to be assembled are parts of a wiring harness.8. Apparatus for the assembly of components according to claim 4 andfurther comprising: a projector means disposed above selected workstations of said assembly line, said projector means being adapted toproject indications for the assembly of electrical components.9. Apparatus for the assembly of electrical components according to claim 8wherein said projector means projects instructions and diagrams on saidpallet, thereby providing an operator with precise instructions anddiagrams needed for the assembly of electrical components.10. Apparatus for the assembly of electrical components according to claim4 wherein said pallet includes a plurality of mounting bases upon whichsaid components are supported, said mounting bases supporting saidelectrical components to be assembled above the surface of said pallet.11. Apparatus for the assembly of electrical components according to claim4 wherein said pallet is a substantially flat, rectangular structure.12. Apparatus for the assembly of electrical components according to claim4 wherein said assembly line further comprises a plurality of repairstations, said pallet being adapted to move from a work station to arepair station prior to completion of assembly of the electricalcomponents in event that a defect is discovered in assembly of theelectrical components at said work station.13. Apparatus for the assembly of electrical components according to claim4 wherein said assembly line further comprises a plurality of waitingstations, wherein said pallet may wait before proceeding any further onthe assembly line."}
{"WKU":"039303080","Title":"Substrate connectors","App_Date":"1974-09-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Geoffrey Hector James Munro","Assignee":"AMP Incorporated","ICL_Class":"H01R  900","References":"2874363;2980874;3173732;3444503;3638163;3795884;3818414","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method of manufacturing an electrical connector comprising the stepsof providing an elongate spring body having a generally uniformcross-section which is resiliently deformable transversely of the bodylength, locating a former body beside the spring body whereby the formerbody extends longitudinally of and projects laterally from the springbody, winding a single layer coil of conductor wire around the spring bodyand the former body to extend longitudinally in closely spaced turns,bonding the turns to the spring body, cutting the coil longitudinally atturn portions around the former body and spaced from the spring body toseparate adjacent turns thereby defining discrete conductive pathsdisposed in insulating spaced relationship around the spring body andintegral lead conductors extending from the turns on the spring body tothe cut portion on the former body, and removing the former body from thespring body.2. A method as set forth in claim 1 further comprising the step elasticallydeforming the spring body in the same sense as the lead of the coil priorto winding the coil, and holding the spring body in the elasticallydeformed condition until after the coil cutting operation when thedeformation is relaxed and the coil turns thereby flattened.3. A method as set forth in claim 1 further comprising the step of locatinga second spring body beside the former body and opposite to the firstspring body, and winding the coil around both spring bodies and formerbody.4. A method as set forth in claim 1 further comprising the step of cleaningportions of the coil turns exposed externally of the spring body to exposebare metal portions in a row extending longitudinally of the spring body,and spot plating the bare metal portions to define contact points."}
{"WKU":"039303098","Title":"Ring lock knife","App_Date":"1974-05-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Walter W. Collins","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B26B  104","References":"459056;592426;684016;727724;1182043;2559993;3061927","Claims":"I claim:1. A knife comprising a handle defining a blade slot extending along itslength and through an end portion thereof, a pivot pin aperture extendingthrough the slotted end portion of said handle, a blade including anapertured tang, said apertured tang positioned in the blade slot of saidhandle with its aperture in alignment with said pivot pin aperture, apivot pin extending through the aperture of said tang and the pivot pinaperture of said handle, said pivot pin being movable along its length androtatable about its longitudinal axis in the pivot pin aperture of saidhandle, a slotted ring lock rotatably mounted on and extending about theslotted end of said handle over the ends of said pivot pin, whereby thering lock confines the pivot pin in the handle and the blade is pivotableabout the pivot pin between a closed position where an edge portionthereof is located in the slot of the handle and an open position where itis coextensive with the handle.2. The knife as set forth in claim 1 and wherein said slotted ring lock isrotatable about the handle only when the blade is open and coextensivewith the handle whereby the slot of the bolster is movable out ofalignment with the slot of the handle to lock the blade open with respectto the handle.3. The knife as set forth in claim 1 and wherein the tang of said bladedefines a pair of indentations therein on opposite sides of the apertureof the tang, and wherein the handle includes a movable protrusion andspring means biasing said protrusion toward engagement with the path ofthe indentations as the blade is pivoted in the handle, whereby theprotrusion becomes biased in one of the indentations to releasably holdthe blade in a fixed position with respect to the handle.4. The knife of claim 1 and wherein said tang defines a rounded peripheralportion and hemispherical indentations are formed on opposite sides of theaperture of the tang in its rounded peripheral portion, and wherein saidhandle includes a bore at its slotted end portion, a spring seated in saidbore, and a ball seated on said spring and biased by said spring intoengagement with the rounded peripheral portion of said tang, whereby theball registers with the indentations of the tang when the blade is pivotedwith respect to the handle.5. A knife comprising a handle defining a blade-receiving slot extendingalong its length and through one end portion thereof, a blade including atang pivotally mounted in the blade slot of the slotted end portion ofsaid handle and said blade being movable between a closed position with anedge in said blade slot and an opened position where it is coextensivewith said handle, said tang being rounded about its end away from thedistal end of the blade, and a sleeve-shaped ring lock rotatably mountedabout the slotted end portion of said handle, said ring lock defining anopen slot alignable with the blade slot of said handle and including anundercut arcuate section exetnding from its slot and the front edge of thering lock about a portion of its inner surface, and an inwardly extendingarcuate protrusion adjacent the undercut section at the rear edge of thering lock, whereby when the blade is opened from the handle where it iscoextensive with the handle, the ring lock is rotatable about the slottedend portion of the handle with its undercut arcuate section movable overthe tang of the blade and the inwardly extending arcuate protrusionmovable over the rounded end portion of the tang, and when the blade isclosed into the blade slot of the handle, the ring lock is not rotatableabout the slotted end portion of the handle since the inwardly extendingarcuate protrusion cannot move over the tang of the blade.6. A knife comprising a handle defining a blade receiving a slot extendingalong its length and through an end portion thereof, a blade including atang inserted into the slotted end portion of said handle, the slotted endportion of said handle and the tang of said blade each defining alignedopenings, and a pivot pin positioned in said aligned openings, said pivotpin being movable along its longitudinal axis with respect to said handle,a ring lock rotatably mounted on the slotted end portion of said handleabout the ends of said pivot pin and confining said pivot pin in saidaligned openings, said ring lock defining a slot therein rotatable intoand out of alignment with the blade-receiving slot of said handle, andmeans for limiting the rotation of said ring lock with respect to saidhandle whereby the slot of the ring lock does not move into alignment withsaid pivot pin.7. In a knife structure comprising a handle and a blade foldably connectedto one end portion of the handle, the improvement therein of said handleincluding a unitary inner handle with side walls and a back wall extendingalong its length and defining a blade receiving slot and an approximatelycylindrical head portion at one end, said slot extending through said headportion at a depth less than the depth at which it is formed between saidside walls, a blade pivot pin supported at its ends in said head portionand extending through said slot and movable along its longitudinal axisthrough said head portion, said head portion defining a spring boretherein, a coil compression spring mounted in said spring bore and a ballmember positined between said spring and said blade and biased by thespring into engagement with said blade to yieldably restrain the movementof the blade with respect to the handle, and a ring lock defining a slottherein rotatably mounted on and extending about said approximatelycylindrical head portion of said handle and about the ends of said pivotpin and about said coil compression spring, said ring lock being rotatablyabout said handle to register its slot with the blade receiving slot ofsaid handle to permit the blade to fold through its slot or to move itsslot out of registration with the blade receiving slot of said handle tolock the blade with respect to said handle, and means for limiting therotation of said ring lock with respect to said handle whereby the slot ofthe ring lock does not move into alignment with said pivot pin."}
{"WKU":"039303101","Title":"Stable power ring tool","App_Date":"1974-02-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ermanno Santilli","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B27B  514","References":"3221783;3438410","Claims":"I claim:1. In a manual annular ring tool power saw having a housing for supportingthe annular ring tool and a power unit mounted on the housing, an improvedring tool stablization means comprising:a two-piece ring tool housing interconnected by a pivot means forpermitting the two pieces of said housing to pivot toward and away fromeach other and preload means for urging said two pieces toward each other;an annular ring tool detachably retained in said housing;a power unit mounted on one piece of said housing, said power unit having adrive shaft terminated in a drive roller thereon adapted to engage oneside of the ring tool to rotate the ring tool about its virtual axis, saiddrive roller being located relative to said pivot such that workpieceresistance forces produce a torque about said pivot for moving saidhousing pieces toward each other; anda ring tool support means mounted on said other housing piece adapted toengage the opposite side of the ring tool, said support means incombination with the drive roller forming the driving pressure applied bythe drive roller to the ring tool, said support means being responsive toincreases and decreases in workpiece resistance forces for causing saidhousing pieces to pivot toward and away from each other for increasing anddecreasing the driving pressure of the drive roller on the ring tool.2. The power tool of claim 1 wherein said pivot means is substantiallyparallel to the ring tool plane and substantially perpendicular to thedrive shaft axis.3. The power tool of claim 2 wherein said pivot means is disposed on theside of the ring tool opposite that of the drive roller and is disposed agreater radial distance than is the drive roller-ring tool interfacemidpoint.4. The power tool of claim 2 wherein said pivot means is disposed on thesame side of the ring tool as the drive roller and is disposed a greaterradial distance than is the drive roller-ring tool interface mid-point.5. The power tool of claim 2 further including preload means for applyingminimum pressure between the drive roller and the ring tool.6. The power tool of claim 1 wherein said pivot means is substantiallyparallel to the ring tool plane and substantially parallel to the driveshaft axis.7. The power tool of claim 6 wherein said pivot means is disposed on theside of the ring tool opposite that of the drive roller and the projectionof said pivot means on the ring tool plane is disposed between the driveroller-ring tool interface and the non-working side of the ring tool.8. The power tool of claim 6 further including preload spring means forapplying minimum pressure between the drive roller and the ring tool.9. The power tool of claim 1 which includes in addition said drive shaftextending at an angle to the plane of the ring tool such that the driveshaft axis intersects an infinite working quadrant of the ring tool plane,said infinite working quadrant being defined as the domain containedbetween two lines having their mutual starting points at the mid-point ofthe drive roller-ring tool interface, one line extending perpendicular tothe radius of said mid-point of the ring tool and having infinite lengthtoward the working side of the ring tool, the other line extending alongthe radius of said mid-point of the ring tool and having infinite lengthtoward the center of the ring tool.10. The power tool of claim 1 wherein the said power ring drive shaft hascam means incorporated therein to automatically extend and retract thedrive roller on the drive shaft thereby varying the pressure the driveroller applies to the ring tool in relation to the load applied to thering tool.11. The power tool of claim 1 wherein the housing is mounted on the powerunit by pivot means which is disposed substantially perpendicular to thering tool plane, said pivot means permitting angular displacement of thedrive shaft axis relative to the position of drive shaft axis intersectionof the ring tool virtual axis within limits when viewed in plan from abovein direct relationship to the resultant reaction force applied to the ringtool at the workpiece interface during power tool operation.12. The power tool of claim 11 wherein said limits are opposing pairs ofshoulders provided on said power unit and said ring tool housing, one pairestablishing minimum drive shaft axis angular displacement and the otherpair establishing maximum drive shaft axis angular displacement."}
{"WKU":"039303110","Title":"Reinforced orthodontic bracket","App_Date":"1973-12-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Lawrence F. Andrews","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A61C  700","References":"3250003;3469314;3504438;3765091","Claims":"The invention claimed is:1. An orthodontic bracket comprising a non-metallic bracket having a frontface and a back side and tie wings;said back side being adapted to be directly secured to the front face of atooth by means of an adhesive; andsaid front side having a groove recessed therein for the reception of anarch wire;and the improvement which comprises:a stiffening core embedded in the material of said bracket, said stiffeningcore being constructed of a more rigid metallic material than saidnon-metallic bracket and being embedded in said non-metallic bracket sothat at least one edge of said core is exposed and is not covered bynon-metallic bracket material and defines at least one portion of thesurface of said arch wire groove."}
{"WKU":"039303128","Title":"Dental articulator","App_Date":"1974-01-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hans Daub","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A61C 1100","References":"683640;2029003;2697279;2731723;2786272","Claims":"Having described my invention, I claim:1. A dental articulator for properly positioning upper and lower artificialdentures relative to each other and relative to an intermediate occlusalplane which is the bite plane when artificial dentures are mounted on thearticulator, comprising an upper bracket and a lower bracket for thedetachable securement thereto of said upper and lower dentures,respectively, a support on which said upper bracket is pivotally mountedfor swinging movement about an axis parallel to said occlusal plane, meansadjustably interconnecting said support and said lower bracket formovement of said support and said lower bracket relative to each other ina direction perpendicular to said axis and parallel to said occlusalplane, a plate carried by and extending forwardly from said support anddisposed between said upper and lower bracket, said plate having onesurface thereof confronting one of said brackets and disposed in saidocclusal plane, and means mounting said plate so that when said plate isdisposed in one position on said articulator the upper surface of saidplate lies in said occlusal plane and when said plate is inverted anddisposed in an inverted position in said articulator the undersurface ofsaid plate is disposed in said occlusal plane whereby said occlusal planemay be established relative to an upper set of artificial dentures in saidone position of said plate and said occlusal plane may be establishedrelative to a lower set of artificial dentures in said inverted positionof said plate.2. A dental articulator as claimed in claim 1, said mounting meanscomprising bifurcated members carried by said plate and releasablyreceived in lateral guide grooves of said support."}
{"WKU":"039303136","Title":"Drawing apparatus","App_Date":"1974-08-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Lucien Emile Sautereau","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B43L 1302","References":"747522;1441939;1482606;3074173;3120060;3343267","Claims":"I claim:1. Drawing apparatus in combination with a drawing board having upper andlower longitudinal edges, left and right lateral edges, and front and rearsurfaces, said drawing apparatus comprising a carriage including runnermeans for traveling on the upper edge of the drawing board, a rail securedto said carriage and extending over said front face of the drawing boardparallel to the lateral edges of the drawing board with the runner meanson said upper edge, a drafting head with means movably mounting the sameon said rail, and a linkage assembly constituted by two interconnectedarticulated parallelogram linkages, one of said parallelogram linkageshaving a short arm with means attaching the short arm to the rear surfaceof the drawing board, the other of the parallelogram linkages having ashort arm with means attaching the same to said carriage, each saidparallelogram linkage having a second short arm, the second arms of thetwo linkages being constituted by a common member.2. Drawing apparatus as claimed in claim 1, in which said short arms of thelinkages are arranged with respect to said carriage so as to be parallelto the upper edge of the drawing board when the carriage is mountedthereon.3. Apparatus as claimed in claim 2, in which said short arm of said oneparallelogram linkage is secured to the rear surface of the drawing boardin the median zone of the upper edge of the drawing board.4. Apparatus as claimed in claim 3, in which the upper edge of the drawingboard is outwardly curved.5. Apparatus as claimed in claim 1, wherein said linkage assembly furthercomprisies two common spindles connecting said common arm to twoparallelogram linkages and means rotationally interconnecting said twoparallelogram linkages about said spindles for rendering the rotarymovement thereof interdependent on one another.6. Apparatus as claimed in claim 5, in which said means interconnectingsaid parallelogram linkages comprises a first pulley rotatable about onespindle and solidly connected to one of the parallelogram linkages and asecond pulley rotatable about the second spindle and solidly connected tothe other parallelogram linkage, and a transmission means interconnectingsaid pulleys so that they are rotated in opposite directions.7. Apparatus according to claim 6, in which said transmission meanscomprises a crossed cord.8. Apparatus as claimed in claim 7, in which said short arm common to thetwo parallelograms is constituted by two parallel flat elements said twospindles interconnecting said elements at each of the ends thereof, saidparallelogram linkages each having long arms pivotably mounted onrespective spindles, said pulleys being mounted on respective spindles andfixedly secured with the long arms of respective parallelogram linkages."}
{"WKU":"039303144","Title":"Drafting machine","App_Date":"1973-09-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Andrzej Tomasz Iwanicki","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B43L 1302","References":"1436673;2089757;2713723;2909843","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A drafting machine comprising in combination a main ruler, guiding railsadapted for being stationarily mounted and engaging the ends of said mainruler for guiding same on a drawing board in parallelism with itself, anauxiliary instrument slidably guided on said main ruler in thelongitudinal direction thereof, a detachable working edge interchangeablein shape on said main ruler having graduations thereon, an endlessgraduated band carried by said main ruler in parallel to said workingedge, said auxiliary instrument having a first part guided in a groove onsaid main ruler and a second part, means for pivotally mounting saidsecond part on said first part for pivotal movement from a locked positionabout a first longitudinal axis parallel to said drawing board and about asecond axis perpendicular to said drawing board so that said second partcan be pivoted about its longitudinal axis and then rotated to a positionon the other side of the main ruler, either for drawing purposes or toexpose the entire length of said working edge, a third part of saidauxiliary instrument being rotatable on said second part in a planeparallel to the drawing board over which said main ruler is moveable.2. A drafting machine in combination according to claim 1 in which theauxiliary instrument comprises adjustable template means carried therebyand means for drawing arcs, the second part of said auxiliary instrumentbeing locked to said first part against rotational movement in a planeparallel to said drawing board by means of pointers which will adequatelyhold the second part in position when the instrument is displaced in thegroove on said main ruler.3. A drafting machine comprising a main ruler, guiding rails adapted forbeing stationarily mounted and engaging the ends of said main ruler forguiding same on a drawing board in parallelism with itself, an auxiliaryinstrument slidably guided on said main ruler in the longitudinaldirection thereof, a detachable working edge on said main ruler havinggraduations thereon, an endless graduated band carried by said main rulerin parallel to said working edge having at least two different scalesthereon, which are coordinated with the graduations on said working edgeso that point 0 for each scale on the endless band can be set in anarbitrary position to bring the graduations on each scale of the band intoa desired position relative to the graduations on said working edgethereby enabling measurement or read out from point 0 directly on thegraduations of said working edge, said guiding rails engaging the ends ofsaid ruler being adapted to be mounted in spaced parallel relation on adrawing board with the ruler extending perpendicularly thereto, each railincluding means being displaceable in said rail and provided forreleasably engaging the margin of a drawing sheet placed on said board.4. A drafting machine comprising a main ruler, guiding rails adapted forbeing mounted on a drawing board at their ends to provide a gap betweenthe surface of the drawing board and the bottom side of the guiding rails,said guiding rails engaging the end of said main ruler for guiding same onsaid drawing board in parallelism with itself, an auxiliary instrumentslidably guided on said main ruler in the longitudinal direction thereof,a detachable working edge on said main ruler being adapted to the specificdrawing purpose and having graduations thereon, an endless graduated bandcarried by said main ruler in parallel to said working edge and beingadjustable by means of an adjusting device mounted in said main ruler forunobstructed rotational movement of said endless band having at least twodifferent scales thereon, which are coordinated with the graduations onsaid working edge, said auxiliary instrument having a first part guided ina groove on said main ruler and a second part, means for pivotallymounting said second part on said first part for pivotal movement about afirst longitudinal axis parallel to said drawing board and about a secondaxis perpendicular to said drawing board so that said second part can bepivoted about its longitudinal axis and then rotated to a position on theother side of the main ruler either for drawing purposes or to expose theentire length of said working edge, a third part of said auxiliaryinstrument being rotatable on said second part in a plane parallel to thedrawing board over which the main ruler is movable.5. A drafting machine according to claim 4, in which said guiding railsengaging the ends of said ruler are mounted in spaced parallel relation onthe drawing board with the ruler extending perpendicular thereto, eachrail including means being displaceable in said rail and pivoted forreleasably engaging the margin of a drawing sheet placed on said board.6. A drafting machine comprising a main ruler, guiding rails adapted forbeing mounted on a drawing board, said guiding rails engaging the end ofsaid main ruler for guiding same on said drawing board in parallelism withitself, an auxiliary instrument slidably guided on said main ruler in thelongitudinal direction thereof, a detachable working edge on said mainruler and having graduations thereon, an endless graduated band carried bysaid main ruler in parallel to said working edge having at least twodifferent scales thereon, which are coordinated with the graduations onsaid working edge, said auxiliary instrument having a first part guided ina groove on said main ruler and a second part, means for pivotallymounting said second part on said first part for pivotal movement from alocked position about a first longitudinal axis parallel to said drawingboard and about a second axis perpendicular to said drawing board so thatsaid second part can be pivoted about its longitudinal axis and thenrotated to a position on the other side of the main ruler either fordrawing purposes or to expose the entire length of said working edge, athird part of said auxiliary instrument being rotatable on said secondpart in a plane parallel to the drawing board over which the main ruler ismovable."}
{"WKU":"039303152","Title":"Apparatus for sizing a door to fit a selected doorway","App_Date":"1974-07-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John L. Baskett","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"E04F 2100;B43L 1302","References":"1595164;1664076;2567771;3121958;3126644","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Apparatus for sizing a door to fit a selected doorway having a framewith side door jambs and a head door jamb comprising in combination:a single support member adapted to extend vertically approximately alongthe center line of a doorway,information receiving material on said support member extendingsubstantially the entire height of the doorway,tracing means including a pair of follower arms operably connected to saidsupport member for vertical movement therealong substantially the entireheight of said doorway, said follower arms being biased away laterally inopposite directions from the support member so as to operatively engagethe side door jambs, recording means on said tracing means operablyconnected to each follower arm for conjoint vertical movement therewith,such that vertical movement of said follower arms will trace the contourof said doorway end conjoint movement of said recording means willcontinuously record said contour on said information receiving material sothat said recorded information can be used to cut the sides of a door tofit the doorway opening.2. The apparatus of claim 1 further including centering means operablyconnected to the support means and being adapted to center the supportmeans on the center line of the doorway between the side door jambs.3. The apparatus of claim 2 wherein said centering means includes a pair ofequal length positioning arms pivotally connected to the support means soas to be movable into engagement with the side door jambs.4. The apparatus of claim 3 wherein said centering means further includesleveling means slidably connected to each of said arms such that when theleveling means is horizontally disposed and the positioning arms areengaged with the side door jambs, the connection location of thepositioning arms to the support means is centered between said side doorjambs.5. The apparatus of claim 4 wherein said positioning arms include frictionmeans for engaging the side door jambs and wherein said centering meansfurther include holding means for retaining said positioning arms infrictional engagement with the side door jambs such that the positioningarms can pivotally suspend the support means to allow the support means tobe vertically suspended.6. The apparatus of claim 5 wherein the center of gravity of the supportmeans is below its pivotal connection to the positioning arms so that thesupport means will automatically seek a vertical orientation whensuspended by the positioning arms.7. The appartus of claim 5 wherein said holding means comprises springbiasing means operably interconnecting said positioning arms to bias thearms in opposite directions and into engagement with the side door jambs.8. The apparatus of claim 5 further including calibrated adjustable meansat the ends of said positioning arms adapted to be advanced upwardly intoengagement with the associated end of the head jamb to thereby indicateany difference in elevation of the opposite ends of the head jamb.9. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said tracing means includes resilientmeans for biasing said follower arms into engagement with the side doorjambs.10. The apparatus of claim 9 wherein said tracing means is removablymounted on said support means.11. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said information receivable materialconsists of a strip of sheet material supported at opposite ends onrotatable spools, said spools being mounted upon said support member sothat the paper strip can be advanced along said support member from spoolto spool."}
{"WKU":"039303160","Title":"Sighting means of a firearm","App_Date":"1974-05-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Paul E. Tellie","Assignee":"Etat Francais","ICL_Class":"F41G  108;F41G 1100","References":"727073;971287;1012427;1540772","Claims":"I claim:1. A firearm comprising a rear sight having a peephole device and a frontsight, said peephole device comprising a hollow tube and two peepholes,the two ends of said hollow tube being closed by said peepholes, each ofsaid peepholes having a central circular orifice therein, the orifice onthe peephole on the rear side being of a larger diameter than the orificeon the peephole on the front sight side, at least one of the two peepholesis removable, at least one of the two peepholes is pivotally mounted withrespect to said peephole device, and an elastic means for selectivelyholding said pivotally mounted peephole in either a tube-closing or atube-opening position.2. A firearm as claimed in claim 1, wherein the inside of said tunnel iscircular in cross-section and the inside diameter of the tunnel is between5 and 15 mm.3. A firearm as claimed in claim 2, wherein the length of the tube isapproximately equal to its inside diameter.4. A firearm as in claim 1, wherein the inside of said tube is circular andthe tunnel has an inside diameter which is greater than the diameter ofthe pupil of the human eye at its maximum aperture.5. A firearm comprising a rear sight having a peephole device and a frontsight, said peephole device comprising a hollow tube and two peepholes,the ends of said hollow tube being closed by said peepholes, each of saidpeepholes having a central circular orifice therein, the orifice on thepeephole on the rear side being of a larger diameter than the orifice onthe peephole on the front sight side, the diameter of the central orificeof each peephole on the side of the inner face of the peephole (tube side)is less than its diameter on the side of the outer face of the peephole(side opposite the tube), and the central orifice of each peephole has amedian shoulder.6. A firearm as in claim 5, wherein each peephole has a boss which fits inthe tube.7. A firearm comprising a rear sight having a peephole device and a frontsight, said peephole device comprising a hollow tube and four peepholemembers, each end of said hollow tube being respectively closed by twoaligned separate peephole members of said four peephole members, each ofsaid peephole members having a central circular orifice therein, theorifice on one of the peephole members on the rear side being of a largerdiameter than the orifice on one of the peephole members on the frontsight side.8. A firearm as in claim 7, wherein the two peephole members at each end ofthe tube individually close on adjustable mounting means for positioningeach peephole member in either a tube closing or tube opening position.9. A firearm as in claim 7 wherein the outer of said two peephole membersat each end of the tube mounted is on adjustable mountings means forpositioning said outer peephole members onto the other peephole member forclosing the end of the tube or in a tube opening position.10. A firearm as claimed in claim 9, wherein the one of the two peepholemembers at each end of the tube that is furthest to the outside has anorifice of smaller diameter than the orifice of the other peephole memberthat is furthest to the inside."}
{"WKU":"039303179","Title":"Electronic azimuth transfer method and system","App_Date":"1974-05-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James V. Johnston","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Army","ICL_Class":"G01C 1902","References":"3253472;3731543","Claims":"I claim:1. An electronic azimuth transfer device for equipment, including aninertial navigator having means providing horizontal and verticalreference outputs; a remote head including a housing, a directional gyroin said housing, means connecting said reference outputs to said remotehead, means in said housing connected to said means connecting and to saiddirectional gyro for aligning said directional gyro in accordance withsaid reference output; means in said housing for determining and providingremote head outputs indicative of the alignment of said directional gyrowith respect to said housing; means for displaying; and means forselectively connecting either said reference outputs or said remote headoutputs to said means for displaying.2. The device as set forth in claim 1 wherein said means connectingincludes a switch whereby said means connecting may be opened.3. The device as set forth in claim 2 wherein said equipment includes amounting bracket for said remote head."}
{"WKU":"039303187","Title":"Ultraviolet curing machine","App_Date":"1973-04-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ronald B. Stelter;Raymond Kulka;Paul J. Kmetty","Assignee":"Continental Can Company, Inc.","ICL_Class":"F26B  328","References":"1802407;1985563;2438365;2640277;2664282;2680304;2861354;3114822;3234475;3240915;3321197;3364594;3504614;3510664;3637983;3643342;3718983;3730633;3733709;3745307;3792260","Claims":"We claim:1. A curing machine for ultraviolet setting of printing on metal sheetscomprising a housing defining curing and setting chamber, conveyor meansfor transporting sheets in sequence through said chamber a plurality ofultraviolet radiation assemblies within said chamber side-by-side spacedrelation transversely of said conveyor means and opposing said conveyormeans for emanating ultraviolet radiation along a predetermined path ontometal sheets carried by said conveyor, and shutter means associated witheach assembly for selectively blocking at least a portion of ultravioletradiation from being directed towards said conveyor, said shutter meansincluding a shutter, and mounting means mounting said shutter for swingingmovement between a blocking position between the respective assembly andsaid conveyor and an inoperative position along the respective assembly,each shutter having a passageway extending from one end of said shutter tothe other for the passage of a cooling fluid for said shutter, and meansfor directing a cooling fluid through said passageway.2. The curing machine of claim 1, wherein said assembly housing enclosessaid reflector and forms therewith a separate fluid passage, and coolingmeans connected to said assembly housing for circulating a cooling fluidthrough said separate fluid passage to cool said reflector.3. The curing machine of claim 1, wherein each shutter is of a tubularconstruction defining said passageway.4. A curing machine for ultraviolet setting of printing on metal comprisinga housing defining curing and setting chamber, conveyor means fortransporting sheets in sequence through said chamber a plurality ofultraviolet radiation assemblies within said chamber side-by-side spacedrelation transversely of said conveyor means and opposing said conveyormeans for emanating ultraviolet radiation along a predetermined path ontosheets carried by said conveyor, and shutter means associated with eachassembly for selectively blocking at least a portion of ultravioletradiation from being directed towards said conveyor, said shutter meansincluding a shutter, and mounting means mounting said shutter for swingingmovement between a blocking position between the respective assembly andsaid conveyor and an inoperative position along the respective assembly,said mounting means including a fulcrum at each end of each ultravioletradiation assembly, an arm pivotally mounted on each fulcrum, said armsbeing arranged in pairs and including first ends between which arespective shutter extends and to which said respective shutter is securedfor swinging about said fulcrums, and at least one arm of each pair ofarms being connected to a bar, and means mounting said bar for reciprocalmovement for effecting swinging and positioning of said shutter.5. The curing machine of claim 4, wherein said bar is connected to one armof each of said plurality of shutters for moving and positioning all ofsaid shutters in unison.6. The curing machine of claim 4 wherein a remote actuator is connected tosaid bar for effecting selected reciprocation thereof.7. The curing machine of claim 4 wherein each ultraviolet radiationassembly includes a housing, a reflector supported from said housing, andsaid fulcrums are carried by said assembly housings.8. A curing machine for ultraviolet setting of printing on metal comprisinga housing defining curing and setting chamber, conveyor means fortransporting sheets in sequence through said chamber a plurality ofultraviolet radiation assemblies within said chamber side-by-side spacedrelation transversely of said conveyor means and opposing said conveyormeans for emanating ultraviolet radiation along a predetermined path ontosheets carried by said conveyor, and shutter means associated with eachassembly for selectively blocking at least a portion of ultravioletradiation from being directed towards said conveyor, said shutter meansincluding a shutter, and mounting means mounting said shutter for swingingmovement between a blocking position between the respective assembly andsaid conveyor and an inoperative position along the respective assembly,each ultraviolet radiation assembly including a housing, a reflectorsupported from said housing, and said mounting means being carried by saidassembly housing and mounting said shutter on said assembly housingindependently of said reflector, the ultraviolet radiation assemblyincluding an ultraviolet radiation source, said reflector having anopening through which ultraviolet radiation emanates, said shutter beingof a length greater than said ultraviolet radiation source and of aconfiguration to at least partially cover said opening in said reflectorwhen said shutter is in its closed position, said mounting means includingat least a pair of fulcrums mounted at opposed ends of each of saidassembly housings; at least a first and a second arm each having a firstend and a second end; each said arm being pivoted on a fulcrum; a firstdrive bar; a second drive bar; means connecting said first end of saidfirst arm to said first drive bar; means connecting said second end ofsaid first arm to said shutter; means connecting said first end of saidsecond arm to said second drive bar; and means connecting said second endof said second arm to said shutter whereby reciprocation of said first andsecond bars causes said shutter to move from open to shut position andvisa versa.9. A curing machine for ultraviolet setting of printing on metal as setforth in claim 8, in which said mounting means further comprises:a first short arm having a first end and a second end;a second short arm having a first end and a second end;a drive shaft mounted in said chamber and extending across the conveyor andhaving a first end and a second end;means connecting said first end of said first short arm to said first endof said drive shaft;means connecting said first end of said second short arm to said second endof said drive shaft;means connecting said second end of said first short arm to said firstdrive bar; andmeans connecting said second end of said second short arm to said seconddrive bar whereby movement of said first drive bar causes movement of saidsecond drive bar and visa versa.10. A curing machine for ultraviolet setting of printing on metalcomprising a housing defining curing and setting chamber, conveyor meansfor transporting sheets in sequence through said chamber a plurality ofultraviolet radiation assemblies within said chamber side-by-side spacedrelation transversely of said conveyor means and opposing said conveyormeans for emanating ultraviolet radiation along a predetermined path ontosheets carried by said conveyor, and shutter means associated with eachassembly for selectively blocking at least a portion of ultravioletradiation from being directed towards said conveyor, said shutter meansincluding a shutter, and mounting means mounting said shutter for swingingmovement between a blocking position between the respective assembly andsaid conveyor and an inoperative position along the respective assembly,each shutter having a passageway extending longitudinally therethrough forallowing cooling fluid to flow through said shutter and each passagewayhaving a first end and a second end, a first fluid conduit means forconducting fluid from a fluid source to a first end of said passageway ina first shutter; a second fluid conduit means for conducting fluid fromsaid second end of said passageway in said first shutter to a first end ofa passageway in a second shutter; and a third fluid conduit means forconducting fluid from a second end of a passageway in a second shutter toa discharge point."}
{"WKU":"039303195","Title":"Drying apparatus","App_Date":"1974-12-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John Douglas Coleman","Assignee":"Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research Organization","ICL_Class":"F26B 1308","References":"3003177;3052991;3176412;3263341","Claims":"We claim:1. Apparatus for drying a travelling web, comprising a web supportstructure having a surface on which to support a travelling web and a hotair delivery structure mounted adjacent the web support structure todirect hot air against the supported web, wherein at least part of the hotair delivery structure is movable transversely of said surface and the hotair delivery structure is formed to direct air against the supported webso as to produce a surface effect which holds that structure away fromengagement with the web.2. Apparatus as claimed in claim 1, wherein the hot air delivery structureis capable of flexing transversely of said surface and in use of theapparatus the surface effect maintains clearance between it and the web bysuch flexure.3. Apparatus as claimed in claim 2, wherein the hot air delivery structuretends to engage said surface by flexure under the influence of its ownweight.4. Apparatus as claimed in claim 2, wherein there is biasing means actingon the hot air delivery structure so as to tend to cause it to engage thesaid surface by flexure of that structure.5. Apparatus as claimed in claim 1, wherein said web support structure is arotary cylinder and said surface is the peripheral surface of thecylinder.6. Apparatus as claimed in claim 5, wherein the hot air delivery structuredefines a hot air chamber bounded on one side by a curved wall whichextends around the peripheral wall of the cylinder and is perforated toform jets of hot air directed toward said surface thereby to produce saidsurface effect.7. Apparatus as claimed in claim 6, wherein the hot air delivery structuretends to mould itself against the cylinder under the influence of theinternal pressure generated when hot air is delivered through it.8. Apparatus as claimed in claim 1, wherein the hot air delivery structureincludes air collection means to collect air which has been directedagainst the supported web to produce said surface effect.9. Apparatus as claimed in claim 8, wherein the air collection meanscomprises a channel with an open mouth facing the surface of the websupport structure.10. Apparatus as claimed in claim 1, wherein the hot air delivery structureis comprised of an arm cantilever supported at one end to extend adjacentsaid surface of the web support structure and enclosing an air chamber andan air supply duct connected to the chamber within the arm; said chamberhaving a wall facing said surface of the web support structure andperforated by holes to form jets of air directed against the supported weband being capable of flexing transversely of said surface such that in useof the apparatus the surface effect maintains clearance between the weband the arm by such flexure.11. Apparatus as claimed in claim 10, wherein the said arm furthercomprises a longitudinally extending channel with an open mouth facing thesurface of the web support structure to collect air from said jets.12. Apparatus as claimed in claim 11, wherein said channel extends alongone side of the arm and the perforated wall of the chamber extends alongthe other side of the arm.13. Apparatus as claimed in claim 10, wherein the air supply duct isdefined by a rigid header structure and the arm is cantilever supportedfrom that header structure.14. Apparatus as claimed in claim 13, wherein said arm is one of aplurality of similar arms each cantilever supported from said headerstructure and each having an interior connected to said air supply duct.15. Apparatus as claimed in claim 10, wherein said web support structure isa rotary cylinder and said surface is the peripheral surface of thecylinder.16. Apparatus as claimed in claim 15, wherein the hot air deliverystructure is one of a plurality of similar structures spacedcircumferentially of the cylinder.17. Apparatus as claimed in claim 15, wherein said cylinder is one of aplurality of cylinders around which to wrap a web in serpentine manner andthe hot air delivery structure is one of a plurality of such structuresfitted one to each of the cylinders and wherein the hot air deliverystructures are provided with holes additional to those in the walls of thearms which face the peripheral walls of the cylinders to form auxiliaryjets of hot air directed into spaces between the cylinders."}
{"WKU":"039303209","Title":"Nail polish dryer","App_Date":"1974-12-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Burnis Marie Henderson","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F26B 2500","References":"2184858;2260687;3258853;3378009","Claims":"What I claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent is:1. A nail polish dryer comprising:a. a base having a forward portion and a rearward portion and walls thereindefining an air passage therethrough, said base having a top wall and aplurality of spaced apertures in said top wall adjacent side and rearperipheral portions thereof defining an exit for the air passage;b. an air blower within said forward portion of the base for moving airthrough the exit of the air passage;c. a heater within the rear portion of said base for heating the air movingthrough the exit of the air passage;d. a hood having a wall mounted on said base at the sides and rear thereofand extending therefrom in covering relation with said base and the exitfor the air passage, said hood wall having an opening at the forwardportion of a heighth and width for entrance of at least one hand of auser, said hood wall at the sides and rear being positioned in closeproximity with said apertures in said top wall;e. an air directing member on sides and rear of the hood wall above theapertures in said top wall and extending inwardly therefrom to adjacentnails of fingers of a hand in drying position, said air directing memberbeing continuous with a concave lower surface to direct heated air ontopolish on nails of a hand of a user positioned within said hood; andf. a control switch mounted in said base and having an actuator extendingabove a forward portion of said top wall of said base and operative toenergize said air blower and said heater in response to engagement by thehands of a user.2. A nail polish dryer as set forth in claim 1 wherein:a. said air directing member has a peripheral edge thereof spaced from saidhood wall and generally above nails on a hand of a user positioned in thehood;b. said air directing member has a portion of said concaved lower surfacethereof adjacent the peripheral edge thereof inclined downwardly towardsaid nails on a hand of a user positioned on said top wall of said base;andc. the concaved lower surface of said air directing member extends in acontinuous curve from said peripheral edge to merging relation to the hoodwall whereby heated air flows upwardly from said plurality of apertures insaid top wall and is directed downwardly by said concaved lower surfacetoward nails of a hand positioned on said top wall.3. A nail polish dryer comprising:a. a base member having top, bottom, side, front and rear walls connectedtogether and defining a chamber therein, said base member having itsgreatest width adjacent the front and rearward side wall portions inconverging relation for a lesser width at the rear;b. said top wall having a plurality of apertures therein adjacent theperiphery thereof along the rear and converging side wall portions, saidapertures communicating with the base chamber thereunder;c. a generally oval shaped hood mounted on said base in substantialcovering relation, said hood having a wall substantially coextensive withthe side and rear periphery of the base and extending upwardly andinwardly therefrom, said hood cooperating with the base to provide an openfront of a size for insertion of the fingers and a substantial portion ofa user s hand for positioning in overlying relation to the top wall of thebase with the finger nails near said apertures;d. said base member having air inlet openings and an air passagecommunicating with said apertures;e. blower means in the base and operative to move air from the air inletopenings, through said air passage and discharge same through saidapertures into the hood enclosure;f. heater means operative to heat the air moved by the blower means;g. air directing means on the hood wall above the apertures and curvingdownwardly from said hood wall to direct air flow onto nails of the handof a user in drying position.4. A nail polish dryer as set forth in claim 3 wherein:a. said base member has walls therein cooperating with the side and rearwalls to define a heating chamber in a rear portion thereof adjacent toand communicating with said air discharge apertures;b. said heating means comprises electrical heating elements located in saidheating chamber; andc. said blower means is in a forward portion of said base member and has anair discharge communicating with said heating chamber to discharge airtherethrough.5. A nail polish dryer as set forth in claim 4 and including:a. an electric circuit connected to said heating means and to blower meansto energize same;b. a switch in said circuit for controlling said circuit; andc. a switch actuator above a forward portion of the base top wall andoperable in response to engagement by the hand of a user when thefingernails thereof are in drying position.6. A nail polish dryer as set forth in claim 5 and including:a. walls in said base member defining a heating chamber below the aperturesin the top wall, and in communication therewith, said heating chamberhaving an inlet passage;b. said heating means is electrical heating elements and located in saidheating chamber;c. said blower means being motor driven and having an air dischargecommunicating with said inlet passage to discharge air therethrough; andd. a second switch in said circuit and operable to interrupt the circuit tothe heater and motor in response to a predetermined tilt of the base."}
{"WKU":"039303217","Title":"Question and answer game","App_Date":"1975-02-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Adolph E. Goldfarb;Erwin Benkoe","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"G09B  306;A63F  300","References":"2889634;2970385;3061313;3177595;3729198;3747229;3797830","Claims":"Having thus described our invention, what we desire to claim and secure byletters patent is:1. A toy playing game of educational and entertainment value comprising:a. a playing board,b. said playing board having a plurality of apertures formed therein,c. certain of said apertures having a first type of pin projecting therein,d. the remaining apertures having a second type of pin projecting therein,e. a substrate disposable over said playing board and having a plurality ofsubstrate apertures and each of which is alignable with some of theapertures in the playing board,f. indicia on one portion of said substrate requiring selection of one ormore of the apertures on said substrate to conform to the indicia,g. a probe provided with said game board and capable of being insertedthrough the apertures in said substrate and into the associated andaligned apertures in said game board, andh. mechanically shiftable means operatively located within said probeshiftable only upon engagement with said second type of pin to providevisual indication of selection of a proper aperture on said substrate whensaid probe is inserted into an aperture on said substrate correspondingwith an aperture in said game board having said second type of pinprojecting therein.2. The toy playing game of claim 1 further characterized in that theindicia on said substrate are questions, and that answering indicia isassociated with each of the apertures on said substrate.3. The toy playing game of claim 1 further characterized in that aplurality of substrates are provided with the playing board, and each ofthe substrates have different indicia thereon.4. The toy playing game of claim 1 further characterized in that aplurality of substrates are proprovided with the playing board, and eachof the substrates have different indicia thereon, and a locating means isprovided on said game board with cooperating locating means on each ofsaid substrates so that said substrates can be located in only oneposition on said game board.5. The toy playing game of claim 4 further characterized in that saidlocating means on said game board is a recess and the cooperating locatingmeans on said substrate is a tab on at least one end margin of saidsubstrate and capable of fitting into said recess.6. The toy playing game of claim 4 further characterized in that some ofsaid substrates can be located in different positions on said game boardthan other of said substrates such that each of said substrates can belocated on said game board in a proper position with each of saidsubstrates having at least one aperture therein alignable with an aperturein said game board to provide visual indication of a proper aperture insaid game board having a second type of pin projecting therein.7. The toy playing game of claim 1 further characterized in that saidsecond pins have a different size than said first pins to actuate saidprobe.8. The toy playing game of claim 7 further characterized in that said probehas a shiftable member therein which will move only when said probe isinserted in an aperture on said game board having a second type of pintherein.9. The toy playing game of claim 1 further characterized in that saidindicia are questions and individual answers are associated with each ofthe apertures on said substrate.10. The toy playing game of claim 1 further characterized in that each ofsaid first and second types of pins have upper surfaces which are locatedin the same plane and below the plane of the playing board, each of saidfirst and second types of pins also having a width relative to the widthof the apertures so that a line of sight of a viewer is effectivelyprevented from determining the lengths of the pins.11. A toy playing game of educational and entertainment value comprising:a. a playing board,b. said playing board having a plurality of apertures formed therein,c. certain of said apertures having a first type of pin projecting therein,d. the remaining apertures having a second type of pin projecting therein,e. each of said first and second types of pins having an upper surfacelocated in the same plane and below the plane at the playing board, eachof said first and second types of pins also having a width relative to thewidths of said apertures so that a line of sight of a viewer iseffectively prohibited to determine the lengths of the pins,f. a substrate disposable over said playing board and having a plurality ofsubstrate apertures and each of which is alignable with some of theapertures in the playing board,g. the number of first and second apertures in said playing board in totalbeing at least twice the number of apertures in any substrate,h. indicia on one portion of said substrate requiring selection of one ormore of the apertures on said substrate to conform to the indicia,i. a probe provided with said game board and capable of being insertedthrough the apertures in said substrate and into the associated andaligned aperture in said game board, andj. mechanically shiftable means operatively located within said probe toprovide visual indication of selection of a proper aperture on saidsubstrate when said probe is inserted into an aperture on said substratecorresponding with an aperture in said game board having said game boardhaving said second type of pin projecting therein."}
{"WKU":"039303225","Title":"Clog","App_Date":"1975-04-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ichitaro Endo;Kenichi Tamano;Tadashi Sato","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A43B  312","References":"2395767;2932097;3290802;3336683","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a clog comprising a body provided adjacent to one end with a firstpair of holes positioned on the opposite sides of the longitudinal axis ofsaid body in proximity to the latter and adjacent to the other end with asecond pair of holes positioned on the opposite sides of said longitudinalaxis at an angle thereto in proximity to the opposite side edges of saidbody; and a pair of synthetic resin thongs with the opposite ends of eachof said thongs passing through each one of said first and second pairs ofholes, respectively, characterized by that each of said synthetic resinthongs has a wider middle section of substantially uniform width and thenarrower opposite ends of uniform width passing through each one of saidfirst and second pairs of holes, respectively and the adjacent ends ofsaid pair of thongs passing through said first pair of holes are fusedtogether on the under surface of said clog body to form a lump having abluk larger than the dimensions of the associated holes while the ends ofsaid pair of thongs passing through said second pair of holes are fusedindividually on the under surface of said clog body to form separate lumpslarger than the associated holes, said pair of thongs each having asmoothly varying ecliptical configuration in cross-section and astream-lined configuration in side elevation with the center of saidmiddle section having a maximum thickness from where the thickness reducessmoothly toward the opposite ends of the associated thong."}
{"WKU":"039303233","Title":"Chain tensioning mechanism for scraper elevator device","App_Date":"1974-11-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Frank C. Marold;James J. Cinadr","Assignee":"General Motors Corporation","ICL_Class":"B60P  136;B65G 2344","References":"372157;3129605;3161280;3807549","Claims":"We claim:1. In combination with a self-loading scraper having a tractor connected bya pull yoke to a trailing scraper bowl, said scraper bowl having an openend defined by a pair of laterally spaced side walls and a transversecutting blade extending between the side walls, an elevator device locatedbetween and carried by the side walls of said scraper bowl, said elevatordevice comprising a frame, a drive sprocket wheel rotatably supported atthe upper end of said frame, an idler sprocket wheel rotatably supportedat the lower end of said frame, an endless chain having a plurality oftransverse flight members connected thereto and being entrained about saiddrive sprocket wheel and idler sprocket wheel, a mechanism carried by saidframe for tensioning said chain and having a pair of guide rollersengaging said endless chain, said mechanism being located between saiddrive sprocket and idler sprocket wheel and including a pair of armspivotally interconnected in a scissors fashion, each of said arms havingan inner end adjacent said frame and an outer end adjacent said chain,said pair of guide rollers being rotatably supported by the outer ends ofsaid pair of arms, means pivotally connecting the inner end of one of saidpair of arms to said frame, means supporting the inner end of the other ofsaid pair of arms on said frame for sliding movement, and adjusting meansextending between and interconnecting said arms for moving said guiderollers towards each other so as to increase the tension of said chain.2. In combination with a self-loading scraper having a tractor connected bya pull yoke to a trailing scraper bowl, said scraper bowl having an openend defined by a pair of laterally spaced side walls and a transversecutting blade extending between the side walls, an elevator device locatedbetween and carried by the side walls of said scraper bowl, said elevatordevice comprising a frame, a drive sprocket wheel rotatably supported atthe upper end of said frame, an idler sprocket wheel rotatably supportedat the lower end of said frame, an endless chain having a plurality oftransverse flight members connected thereto and being entrained about saiddrive sprocket wheel and idler sprocket wheel, a mechanism carried by saidframe for tensioning said chain and having a pair of guide rollersengaging said endless chain, said mechanism being located midway betweensaid drive sprocket and idler sprocket wheel and including a pair of armspivotally interconnected in a scissors fashion, each of said arms havingan inner end adjacent said frame and an outer end adjacent said chain,said pair of guide rollers being rotatably supported by the outer ends ofsaid pair of arms so as to position the centers of said pair of guiderollers along a line that is substantially parallel to a line passingthrough the centers of said drive sprocket wheel and idler sprocket wheel,means pivotally connecting the inner end of one of said pair of arms tosaid frame, a guideway supporting the inner end of the other of said pairof arms on said frame for sliding movement along an axis parallel to thelongitudinal axis of said frame, and a manually adjustable link in theform of a threaded rod extending between and interconnecting the outerends of said arms for moving said guide rollers towards each other so asto increase the tension of said chain."}
{"WKU":"039303241","Title":"Mechanical excavating machines including rotary cutter and suction tube","App_Date":"1974-05-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"David Douglas Wightman;Edward Anthony Ward;Timothy John Eastham Miller","Assignee":"British Gas Corporation","ICL_Class":"E02F  388","References":"1388650;1762441;2131291;2308437;2561152;2801479;2807777;3253357;3474549;3706142;3763424","Claims":"We claim:1. A mechanical excavating machine comprising a rotary cutting tool whichis capable of cutting through compacted soil, hard core and likematerials, a suction tube having an inlet opening adjacent to the cuttingtool, a suction device for applying suction to the tube remote from theinlet opening to cause material cut away by the cutting tool to be suckedinwards through the inlet opening, and a driving mechanism for rotatingthe tool, the cutting tool and part at least of the suction tube beingcarried on a mounting which is adapted for movement in horizontal andvertical directions, the inlet opening of the suction tube beingnonrotatable, the rotary cutter being mounted for rotation about saidinlet opening, and the axes of the cutter and suction tube beingcoincident and vertical, said cutter being provided with a sensor meansfor providing a signal for signifying the approach of the cutter to aburied metallic object, said sensor means comprising an electro-magneticmetal detector which includes at least three coils mounted on said cutter,at least one of which said coils is an exciter coil and at least one ofwhich said coils is a receiver coil, means for supplying alternatingcurrent to said exciter coil and a detector for detecting any change inthe net signal induced in the receiver coil.2. A mechanical excavating machine according to claim 1, wherein the coilsare arranged so that normally a direct signal is induced in a receivercoil by an exciter coil which is substantially zero and hence normallythere is a null output from a receiver coil.3. A mechanical excavating machine according to claim 1, including a phaseshifting attenuator arranged to produce a zero resultant when a non-zerosignal is directly induced in a receiver coil.4. A mechanical excavating machine according to claim 1, wherein the cuttercomprises a circular hub with teeth which project radially and axiallydownwards, from its periphery.5. A mechanical excavating machine according to claim 1, wherein thesuction device comprises a power driven fan.6. A mechanical excavating machine according to claim 1, wherein thesuction device is connected to the suction tube through an enlargedsettling chamber, and wherein the chamber is partially evacuated by thesuction device in use and the spoil drawn into the chamber through thetube precipitates to the bottom of the chamber as it enters.7. A mechanical excavating machine according to claim 1, wherein themounting which carries the cutting tool and the suction tube is supportedby transporter means.8. A mechanical excavating machine according to claim 7, wherein themounting is supported by the transporter means through mutually connectedmoveable means operatively controlled by mechanisms for moving themounting.9. A mechanical excavating machine according to claim 8, wherein theposition of the cutter relative to the vehicle can be remotely controlledfrom a control panel.10. A mechanical excavating machine according to claim 7, wherein themounting is supported by the transporter means for lateral movementrelative to the transporter means through further moveable meansoperatively controlled by further mechanisms for moving the mounting."}
{"WKU":"039303250","Title":"Steam iron soleplate construction","App_Date":"1974-07-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert L. Schaeffer;Kaj Toft","Assignee":"General Electric Company","ICL_Class":"D06F 7506;D06F 7518","References":"3134182;3165844;3735507;3811208","Claims":"We claim:1. A steam iron soleplate, steam generator, and distributor subassemblycomprising,a relatively thin soleplate,a coverplate spaced from and supported on said soleplate by spaced ribmeans defining steam distributing passage means therebetween,"}
{"WKU":"039303268","Title":"Desk calendar","App_Date":"1974-06-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Anthony G. Rosa","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"G09D  306","References":"1330407;2078781;2110668;3333356","Claims":"I claim:1. A desk calendar comprising:a. a frame means;b. a shaft supporting means disposed within said frame means;c. a first shaft rotatably supported by said supporting means;d. a first sleeve in operable communication with said first shaft;e. a first drum fixed to said first sleeve and bearing discrete day of theweek indicia on its periphery;f. a second drum in operable communication with said first shaft andbearing discrete integers in seriatim on its periphery;g. a second shaft rotatably supported by said shaft supporting means, inaxial alignment with said first shaft;h. a second sleeve in operable communication with said second shaft;i. a third drum fixed to said second shaft and bearing discrete integers inseriatim on its periphery;j. a fourth drum in operable communication with said second sleeve andbearing discrete month of the year indicia on its periphery;k. a plurality of windows in said frame means for denoting the day, date,and month each of said drums being in alignment with a separate one ofsaid plurality of windows;l. a pair of dialing members attached to said frame means and limited torotational movement therein, one of said dialing members in communicationwith said first shaft and the other of said dialing members incommunication with said second shaft for independently operating saidfirst and second shafts, respectively; andm. a pair of actuating means limited to rotational motion, one of saidactuating means in communication with said first shaft to permit therotation of said first drum when said dialing member is rotated in onedirection with said second drum remaining stationary and causing therotation of said second drum when said dialing member is rotated in theopposite direction with said first drum remaining stationary, said otheractuating means in communication with said second shaft to permit therotation of said third drum when said dialing member is rotated in onedirection with said fourth drum remaining stationary and causing therotation of said fourth drum when said dialing member is rotated in theopposite direction with said third drum remaining stationary.2. A desk calendar in accordance with claim 1 wherein said actuating meanscomprises:a. a first actuating member fixedly mounted to said shaft provided with atleast one lateral protuberance extending toward said first drum;b. a second actuating member fixedly mounted to said first sleeve providedwith at least one lateral protuberance extending away from said firstdrum;c. A first coupling member disposed on the first shaft intermediate saidfirst and second actuating members being connected to one of said dialingmembers and adapted to releasably engage said lateral protuberance fromsaid first actuating member when said dialing member is turned in onedirection without engaging said lateral protuberance from said secondactuating member so that said first drum will rotate while said seconddrum remains stationary, and to releasably engage said lateralprotuberance from said second actuating member when said dialing member isturned in the opposite direction without engaging said lateralprotuberance from said first actuating member so that said second drumwill rotate while said first drum remains stationary;d. a third actuating member fixedly mounted to said second shaft providedwith at least one lateral protuberance extending toward said first drum;e. a fourth actuating member fixedly mounted to said second sleeve providedwith at least one lateral protuberance extending away from said thirddrum; andf. a second coupling member disposed on said second shaft intermediate saidthird and fourth actuating members being connected to said dialing memberand adapted to releasably engage said lateral protuberance from said thirdactuating member when said second dialing member is turned in onedirection, without engaging said lateral protuberance from said fourthactuating member so that said third drum will rotate while said fourthdrum remains stationary, and to releasably engage said lateralprotuberance from said fourth actuating member when said dialing member isturned in the opposite direction so that said fourth drum will rotatewhile said third drum remains stationary.3. A desk calendar in accordance with claim 2 wherein said first couplingmember comprises a cylindrical wall attached to said first dialing member,a bottom wall integrally formed with said cylindrical wall, said bottomwall being provided with an aperture to allow said first shaft to passthrough said bottom wall and a plurality of horseshoe-shaped holes, eachof said holes having a rounded portion and a straight portion, each ofsaid holes facing in opposite directions on said bottom wall, so that whensaid dialing member is rotated in one direction said protuberance fromsaid first actuating member will mate with said straight edge of saidhorseshoe-shaped hole to rotate said first shaft, while said protuberancefrom said second actuating member will pass over said rounded portion ofsaid holes and said second drum will remain motionless, and when saiddialing member is rotated in the opposite direction, said protuberancefrom said second actuating member will mate with said straight edge ofsaid oppositely facing horseshoe-shaped holes to rotate said second drum,while said protuberance from said first actuating member will pass oversaid rounded portion of said holes and said first drum will remainmotionless, and said second coupling member comprises a cylindrical wallattached to said second dialing member, a bottom wall integrally formedwith said cylindrical wall, said bottom wall being provided with anaperture to allow said second shaft to pass through said bottom wall, anda plurality of horseshoe-shaped holes, each of said holes having a roundedportion and a straight portion, each of said holes facing in oppositedirections on said bottom wall, so that when said dialing member isrotated in one direction said protuberance from said third actuatingmember will mate with said straight edge of said horseshoe-shaped hole torotate said second shaft, while said protuberance from said fourthactuating member will pass over said rounded portion of said holes andsaid fourth drum will remain motionless, and when said dialing member isrotated in the opposite direction, said protuberance from said fourthactuating member will mate with said straight edge of said oppositelyfacing horseshoe-shaped holes to rotate said fourth drum, while saidprotuberance from said third actuating member will pass over said roundedportion of said holes and said third drum will remain motionless."}
{"WKU":"039303276","Title":"Signboard assembly","App_Date":"1974-11-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Stanley Friedman","Assignee":"Banner Board Company","ICL_Class":"G09F  708","References":"3154870;3173220;3230652;3235989;3458945;3720012;3722120;3778915","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A signboard assembly comprising in combination:a rectangular frame including top, bottom, and a pair of end frame members,each of said frame members including an inner portion provided with afirst channel of relatively large width and a second channel disposed inthe first channel, the second channel having a relatively small width; anda plurality of juxtapositioned free floating horizontally extendingsignboard members confined within and supported by said rectangular frame,without mechanical locking means each of said signboard members including"}
{"WKU":"039303284","Title":"Anchor and adjustable tie-line for floatable decoys","App_Date":"1973-07-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Eugene W. Knuth","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A01M 3106","References":"1887491;2630093;2636237;2704961;2747315;3149433","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A floatable decoy and anchor therefor, the combination comprising:a weight;a tie-line having one loop disposed over said weight;an elastic band tautly overlying said weight and said tie-line loop;said tie-line having two ends, both ends of which extend outwardly fromsaid band;the first end of said tie-line terminating in a knot; andthe second end of said tie-line being attached to said decoy.2. The combination of claim 1 wherein a second band member is fashioned asa loop and attached to said weight-elastic band assemblage at a point.3. The combination set forth in claim 1 wherein the weight-elastic bandassemblage has a plurality of integral offstanding projections thereon.4. The combination set forth in claim 2 wherein the weight-elastic bandassemblage has a plurality of integral offstanding projections thereon."}
{"WKU":"039303292","Title":"Bait molding device","App_Date":"1974-08-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John B. Burkhardt","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A01K 9700","References":"1259141;2263340;2643418;3171132;3289246","Claims":"I claim:1. A bait molding device for forming and securing moldable bait materialsuch as bread dough about a fishhook comprising:a hollow mold formed of two cup shaped mold sections, each havingcomplementary thin mold engaging edges;means for supporting the mold sections for movement between open and closedpositions; anda groove in one of the mold engaging edges adapted to accommodate a fishingline whereby the mold sections may be forcibly closed upon a fishhooksurrounded by moldable bait material placed between the mold sections tocompress and secure the bait upon the hook.2. The bait molding device of claim 1 wherein each mold section is of anelongate configuration to accommodate an entire fishhook between the moldsections.3. The bait molding device of claim 2 wherein the groove in the moldengaging edge is in alignment with the long axis of the mold.4. The bait molding device of claim 1 wherein the means for supporting themold sections are pliers like devices including pivoted handles and jawsand wherein the mold sections are secured between the jaws."}
{"WKU":"039303306","Title":"Outrigger fishing line release clip","App_Date":"1975-01-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Albert David Black","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A01K 9712","References":"2170594;2749648;3026646;3077048;3816954","Claims":"What I claim is:1. A fishing line release clip which is attachable to an outrigger linecomprising:a body portion, said body having a channel longitudinally disposed adjacentone side edge with the center of gravity of said body being disposed awayfrom the axial line of said channel, said body including on the oppositeside edge a bifurcated pair of arms and a lateral side groove, saidbifurcated arms and groove lying in the same plane being the plane of thebody itself;an outrigger attaching wire connected through said body channel;a fishing line releasing arm pivotally connected at one end within saidlateral groove portion of said body with the opposite end being removeablyengageable between said bifurcated arms; andtensioning means coupled between said bifurcated arms for providingadjustable tension force between said arms.2. A release line clip, as in claim 1, including:audio alarm means connected to said attaching wire and engageable with saidpivotal release arm when said release arm is moved to an open position."}
{"WKU":"039303314","Title":"Toy for knot tying","App_Date":"1974-02-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Janet A. Simeone","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A63H 3300","References":"1336898;1549035;2180653;2628452","Claims":"I claim:1. An educational doll toy for encouraging practice in knot-tying,comprising:a long open loop of highly flexible material, held together in the generalform of a thick rope, said loop having a bend in the middle so as toprovide legs of substantially equal lengths, anda soft cushion body through which the legs of said rope loop pass and towhich said rope loop legs are fastened in such a way that the closed endof the loop forms a short handle of the same material as the legs andintegral therewith and the greater part of the legs of the loop danglefrom the edge of the cushion body opposite to the edge from which thehandle protrudes, the dangling portion of the length being of sufficientlength, and being sufficiently limp, for the tying of a full bow knottherewith;said cushion body having a countour composed of a substantially straightportion from which the loop legs dangle and an arcuate portion from themiddle part of which the handle-forming closed loop end protrudes, whichcontour provides said body with a roughly half-moon cushion shape.2. An educational doll toy as defined in claim 1 in which said cushion bodyhas a pocket on one side open to the top, the top being defined by theposition of said handle, said pocket being of a size sufficient forinsertion of a substantial length on the tips of said dangling legs.3. An educational doll toy as defined in claim 2 in which the outside covermaterial of said cushion and also the material forming said pocket is atextile material.4. An educational toy as defined in claim 3 in which at least one side ofsaid cushion body is decorated to represent features of a fanciful face.5. An educational toy as defined in claim 3 in which patches of a materialdesigned to produce adhesion by dry engagement with another particularmaterial are provided on at least one side of said cushion body anddisposed for attachment by dry adhesion of textile patches representingfeatures of a face.6. An educational toy as defined in claim 2 in which one side of saidcushion body is formed of a material providing a plurality of smallfilament loops suitable for engagement with decorative patches provided ontheir undersides with a material providing a multiplicity of small hooks.7. An educational toy as defined in claim 2 in which said rope loopcomprises a tubular textile covering and a filling, said filling beingprovided at least in the portions of said loop outside of said cushionbody and being of a material selected from the group consisting of naturaland synthetic textile fibers and flexible synthetic resin foam.8. An educational doll toy as defined in claim 2 in which said cushion bodyhas a filling of the material selected from the group consisting ofnatural and synthetic textile fibers and flexible synthetic resin foam."}
{"WKU":"039303322","Title":"Airfoil rotor for a toy helicopter","App_Date":"1974-02-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Uwe C. Seefluth","Assignee":"Markes & Co. KG.","ICL_Class":"A63H 2712","References":"3669566","Claims":"I claim:1. A rotating wing assembly for free flying toy helicopters comprising:upper and lower rotor hub members,at least two rotor blades, each of said blades having a rear portionadapted to be releasably insertible into said lower rotor hub member, saidrear portion being provided with at least one projection extendinglaterally therefrom.said lower rotor hub member being provided with grooves adapted to receivesaid at least one projection,said upper rotor hub member being provided with connecting members adaptedto releasably engage said lower rotor hub member so as to lock said upperand lower rotor hub members together and thereby lock said blades withinsaid wing assembly when said upper rotor hub member is twisted withrespect to said lower rotor hub member so as to cause said connectingmembers to engage said lower rotor hub member.2. A rotating wing assembly as claimed in claim 1 wherein each of saidblades is provided with two pairs of projections, each projection in eachsaid pair being oppositely opposed.3. A rotating wing assembly as claimed in claim 2 wherein said projectionsextend substantially perpendicularly to the longitudinal axis of saidblade.4. A rotating wing assembly as claimed in claim 3 wherein the lower rotorhub member has a top and bottom surface and the rear portion of said bladewhen inserted into said lower rotor hub member is flush with the topsurface of said lower rotor hub member.5. A rotating wing assembly as claimed in claim 1 wherein the rear portionof said blade is provided with an additional projection, said additionalprojection depending from and extending rearwardly of said rear portion,and wherein said lower rotor hub member is provided with a socket adaptedto receive said rearwardly extending projection.6. A rotating wing assembly as claimed in claim 5 wherein at least aportion of said socket overlies said rearwardly extending projection.7. A rotating wing assembly as claimed in claim 1 wherein said lower rotorhub member is provided with an opening extending along the vertical axisthereof, said assembly further including a rotor shaft extending throughsaid opening, said rotor shaft being provided with a head and wherein saidupper rotor hub member includes a downwardly extending projection adaptedto engage the head of said rotor shaft when said upper and lower rotor hubmembers are locked together.8. A rotating wing assembly as claimed in claim 1 wherein the portions ofsaid upper and lower rotor hub members which are in contact when saidmembers are locked together are level.9. A rotating wing assembly as claimed in claim 8 wherein said assemblyfurther includes a rotor shaft located within said lower rotor hub memberand wherein said upper rotor hub member is provided with a downwardlyextending projection adapted to engage said rotor shaft when said upperand lower rotor hub members are locked together so as to prevent axialshifting of said rotor shaft.10. Rotor according to claim 7, wherein the lower rotor hub body is fixedfrictionally or positively to the rotor shaft, whilst the upper rotor hubbody is releasably secured to the lower body.11. A rotating wing assembly for free flying toy helicopters comprising:a blade having a shaped rear portion,upper and lower rotor hubs,said lower rotor hub being adapted to receive the shaped rear portion ofsaid blade,said upper rotor hub having connecting members adapted to releasably engagesaid lower rotor hub when said upper rotor hub is placed in contact withsaid lower rotor hub and rotated with respect to said lower rotor hubabout the axis thereof so as to lock said upper and lower rotor hubstogether and said blades within said assembly."}
{"WKU":"039303330","Title":"Coupling member for a toy vehicle drive system","App_Date":"1974-12-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Nicholas De Anda","Assignee":"Mattel, Inc.","ICL_Class":"A63H 1110","References":"2224799;3241263;3473805;3514108;3545757;3548534;3552322;3874302","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In combination with a toy vehicle, a device for coupling said toyvehicle to an external drive system comprising:coupling means attached to said toy vehicle, said coupling means having anexaggerated triangularly-shaped portion for retaining a part of saidexternal drive system to facilitate driving of said toy vehicle uponactuation of said external drive system, said exaggeratedtriangularly-shaped portion being located on the underside of saidcoupling means and comprising:"}
{"WKU":"039303349","Title":"Hanging apparatus for falls and hanging plant","App_Date":"1974-05-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ervin F. Johnston","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A01G  902;A47G  702;B05B 1708;F21P  700","References":"101918;511720;1525899;2526546;3071326;3174688;3455509;3568927;3709373;3772827;3841023","Claims":"I claim:1. A hanging waterfall and plant apparatus comprising: a pair of waterreceptacles; flexible means supporting and hanging the water receptaclesin respective top and bottom positions with the top water receptaclehanging substantially directly above the bottom water receptacle; the topwater receptacle having a plurality of openings therein for releasingwater vertically downward in a free fall into the bottom water receptacle,the bottom water receptacle correspondingly shaped to the free fall of thewater to provide an area for catching free falling water from the topwater receptacle so as to enable a multiple waterfall effect; and flexiblesupport means of the hanging apparatus located clear of the space wherethe water will fall so that the water will fall freely from the top waterreceptacle to the bottom water receptacle; at least one plant receptaclewhich is capable of supporting a hanging type plant; said flexible meansalso supporting and hanging the plant receptacle centrally above andsuperjacent with respect to the top water receptacle; the plant receptaclehaving an outermost lateral periphery which is larger than the outermostlateral periphery of the top water receptacle so that a hanging plant canextend over said periphery of the plant receptacle and drape in spacewhich is outward from the periphery of the top water receptacle; and fluidtransfer means for fluid communication between said bottom and top waterreceptacles only, including pump means; the plant receptacle not in fluidcommunication with said water receptacles, whereby upon pumping water fromthe bottom water receptacle to the top water receptacle a waterfall and ahanging plant can be displayed in combination without interfering with oneanother.2. A hanging apparatus as claimed in claim 1 including:said flexible support means comprising flexible ropes extending between thetop water and bottom water receptacles; the fluid transfer meanscomprisinga submersible pump of the type having an inlet and an outlet located withinthe bottom water receptacle; anda tube connected to the pump outlet and extending along at least one of theflexible ropes and into the top water receptacle.3. A hanging apparatus as claimed in claim 1 including:the outermost lateral periphery of the bottom water receptacle being largerthan the outermost lateral periphery of the top water receptacle.4. A hanging apparatus as claimed in claim 1 including:the plant receptacle and the top water receptacle each being a pot with anopen top.5. A hanging apparatus as claimed in claim 1 including:a bottom plant receptacle which is supported by said flexible supportingmeans in a location which is below the first mentioned plant receptacle;andthe bottom water receptacle having an outermost lateral periphery which issmaller than the outermost lateral periphery of the bottom plantreceptacle and being located entirely within the outermost lateralperiphery of the bottom plant receptacle.6. A hanging apparatus as claimed in claim 5 including:each of the top and bottom plant receptacles having a top edge which issubstantially circular, and the diameters across the edges of thesereceptacles being substantially equal.7. A hanging apparatus as claimed in claim 5 including:the bottom plant receptacle being annular with a center hole which has aninside top annular edge for receiving a bottom portion of the bottom waterreceptacle; anda bottom portion of the bottom water receptacle engaging the inside topannular edge of the bottom plant receptacle and being supported thereby.8. A hanging apparatus as claimed in claim 7 including:the top water receptacle having a series of apertures which serve asorifices for the water to drop to the bottom water receptacle; andthe apertures being arranged in a circular row.9. A hanging apparatus as claimed in claim 5 including:each of the receptacles having a top edge which is circular;the top plant receptacle having a rounded bottom;the top edge of the top water receptacle engaging the rounded bottom of thetop plant receptacle;the top water receptacle having a series of apertures for allowing thewater to exit therefrom and drop to the bottom water receptacle.10. A hanging apparatus as claimed in claim 9 including:the bottom water receptacle mounted within the interior of the bottom plantreceptacle and having a top edge which is slightly below the top edge ofthe bottom plant receptacle,whereby the falls effect is water coming from the top plant receptacle andfalling to the bottom plant receptacle when in reality the water isdropping from the top water receptacle to the bottom water receptacle.11. A hanging apparatus as claimed in claim 1 including:the plant receptacle and the top water receptacle each having a top edgewhich is circular;the plant receptacle having a rounded bottom; andthe top edge of the top water receptacle engaging the rounded bottom of theplant receptacle.12. A hanging apparatus as claimed in claim 11 including:the plant receptacle and the bottom water receptacle each being a pot withan open top.13. A hanging apparatus as claimed in claim 12 including:the outermost lateral periphery of the bottom water receptacle beingsubstantially equal in size to the outermost lateral periphery of theplant receptacle.14. A hanging apparatus as claimed in claim 13 including:said support means comprising flexible ropes which extend substantiallyvertically between the lateral peripheries of the plant receptacle and thebottom water receptacle; the fluid transfer means comprising a submersiblepump of the type having an inlet and an outlet located within the bottomwater receptacle; anda tube connected to the pump outlet and extending along at least one of theflexible ropes and into the top water receptacle."}
{"WKU":"039303357","Title":"Plant growth system","App_Date":"1974-09-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Don F. Widmayer","Assignee":"Controlled Environment Systems, Inc.","ICL_Class":"A01G  700","References":"","Claims":"I claim:1. A method of growing higher order plant life under controlled conditionscomprising using an active electronic source to pulse on and off first andsecond groups of lamps each comprising a plurality of gas discharge lampsoperating in the arc discharge region, so as to provide the plant lifebeing grown with controlled bursts of radiant energy within the spectralranges required for photosynthesis, said first group of lamps being drivenso as to produce a spectral energy distribution only in the blue energyband of the photosynthetic absorption curve for the plant life being grownand said second group of lamps being driven so as to provide a spectralenergy distribution only in the red energy band of the photosyntheticabsorption curve for the plant life being grown, said method furthercomprising controlling the duration of the blue energy band and red energyband pulses and the time delay between said pulses so that separation ofthe effects of the said pulses on the photosynthetic process of the plantlife being grown is provided, at least one pulse of one band beinginterspersed with pulses of the other band."}
{"WKU":"039303365","Title":"Window construction","App_Date":"1974-10-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Nicola Ruggieri, Jr.","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"E05D 1522","References":"1414595;2659943","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A window construction comprising upper and lower sashes slidably mountedin a surrounding jamb, each sash comprising a pair of spaced side stilesand upper and lower stiles extending therebetween, said lower sasy beingpivotally mounted for tilting movement to an open position, latch meansmounted on the top surface of the upper stile of said lower sash, andbail-like retaining means mounted on the lower stile of said upper sash,means pivotally mounting said latch means for movement between a firstinoperative position and a second position wherein said latch meansinterengage said retaining means to lock said sashes against verticalsliding movement, and means for limiting the tilting movement of saidlower sash, said limiting means comprising a strap member having one endpivotally mounted on the top surface of the upper stile of said lower sashby the same aforesaid means that pivotally mount said latch means thereon,whereby said strap member may be selectively pivotally moved between aninoperative position wherein it extends longitudinally along said upperstile, to an operative position wherein it extends perpendicularly fromsaid upper stile, said strap member being of flexible metallicconstruction and having a hook-like extremity adapted to releasablyinterengage with said bail-like retaining member when the strap is in itsoperative position to limit tilting movement of said lower sash, and meanson said upper stile for limiting pivoting movement of said strap member toa position approximately perpendicular to said upper stile whereby tofacilitate and expedite alignment of said strap member with said retainingmeans."}
{"WKU":"039303373","Title":"Window regulators for motor vehicles","App_Date":"1975-03-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Marcel Quesnel;Bernard Julou","Assignee":"Regie Nationale des Usines Renault;Automobiles Peugeot","ICL_Class":"E05F 1152","References":"2298515;2998246;3020040;3062528","Claims":"What is claimed as new is:1. In a window regulator or winder for motor vehicles, of the typecomprising a curved window, a glass-supporting bottom channel, a pair ofmovable parallel links incorporated in a parallel motion system and havingone end pivotally fixed to said glass-supporting bottom channel, a frontrun channel and a rear run channel in which said window is movable bymeans of a pinion-crank and gear mechanism, the front run channel beingrigid with a guide rail having a radius of curvature in a vertical planematching that of said window and having upper and lower end portionsinclined to the vertical with unequal angles, the upper end portion beinginclined upwards and the lower end portion being inclined downwards, saidend portions being interconnected by a curved portion having said radiusof curvature in said vertical plane, said rail reproducing the combinedlongitudinal and transverse movements of said glass-supporting bottomchannel, and a rolling member carried by said glass-supporting bottomchannel engaging said guide rail rigid with said front run channel, one ofsaid links having one end pivoted to a fixed point of saidglass-supporting bottom channel and the other end pivoted to a pivot pinof a fixed plate supporting the control mechanism, the other link beingrigid with a rotary member operatively connected to the control mechanismand pivoted on one side through a rolling member to the glass-supportingbottom channel and on the other side to a pin rigid with said plate.2. Window regulator as set forth in claim 1, wherein said guide rail hascurved end portions inclined to the vertical with unequal angles, saidinclined portions being interconnected by a curved portion constituting astraight portion when seen in vertical projection.3. Window regulator as set forth in claim 1, wherein said rolling memberconsists of part-spherical rollers.4. Window regulator as set forth in claim 1, wherein said front run channelreceives the lower front portion of the window, and said rear run channelis engaged by the upper rear portion of the window.5. A window regulator as set forth in claim 4, wherein the run channels andguide rails are jointly secured to the window structure by means ofadjustment wedges."}
{"WKU":"039303381","Title":"Access door","App_Date":"1974-02-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ronald A. Rood","Assignee":"Arelco, Incorporated","ICL_Class":"E05C 2102;E04F 1908","References":"590332;1632431;1921051;2766856;3064550;3187389;3363384;3491486","Claims":"What is claimed and desired to be secured by Letters Patent of the UnitedStates is:1. A removable access door assembly for covering an opening in a wallpanel, said access door assembly comprising in combination:a first member mounted on a first side of said opening and a second membermounted on a second side of said opening, said second side being oppositesaid first side, and said members not being connected;each member including flange means for securing said member to the wallpanel surface;a cover plate mounting means supported on each of said members;a cover plate dimensioned larger than said opening and adapted completelyto overlie said opening and said flange means of said members; anda pair of cover plate fastening means extending from the inner surface ofsaid cover plate and engageable with said mounting means forinterconnecting said door member and said members.2. A removable access door assembly as defined by claim 1 wherein eachmounting member further includes a protrusion for frictionally engagingthe wall panel near the opening.3. A removable access door assembly as defined by claim 1 which furtherincludes means for securing the cover plate fastening means to the coverplate.4. A removable access door assembly as defined by claim 3 wherein the meansfor securing the cover plate fastening means to the cover plate comprisesa sheet of rigid material secured to an inside face of the cover plate.5. A removable access door assembly as defined by claim 4 wherein the coverplate fastening means is a V-shaped spring-clip.6. A removable access door assembly as defined by claim 5 wherein theV-shaped spring-clip is secured to a cover plate backing member.7. A removable access door assembly as defined by claim 6 wherein eachcover plate mounting means comprises a locking plate member supported bythe inner flange means of said mounting member and extending toward thecenter of the opening, said plate member including slot means forreceiving said spring-clip."}
{"WKU":"039303390","Title":"Window regulator, especially for automobiles, with a threaded cable","App_Date":"1974-06-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Horst Jander","Assignee":"Rockwell-Golde, GmbH","ICL_Class":"E05F 1148","References":"3640022","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a window regulator, especially for automobiles, in which the windowis connected to a drive by a cable capable of moving axially in a tubularguide, a portion of which guide extends parallel to the window path and inan arc adjoining thereto, whereby the path of a catch secured to the cableand serving for connecting to the window is not restricted to the sectionof the tubular guide which is oriented parallel to the window path, butextends at least partially over the region of the arc, and wherein theconnection between the catch and the window comprises a bracket having aslide-guide extending transversely to the window path, the improvementincluding a slide-block slidably and non-rotatably disposed in theslide-guide, a cylindrical passage through the slide-block, a cylindricalbolt disposed in the passage, the bolt being fixedly and non-rotationallysecured to the catch, and the bolt having an annular shoulder for limitingaxial displacement between the slide-block and bolt.2. A window regulator according to claim 1, wherein the slide-block issubstantially rectangular, and the diameter of the cylindrical passage andthe correspondingly selected diameter of the cylindrical bolt are onlyslightly smaller than the external dimension of the slide-block.3. A window regulator according to claim 1, wherein the slide-block hasgrooved sliding surfaces, and the slide quide is defined by guiding edgeswhich slidably engage the grooved sliding surfaces.4. A window regulator according to claim 1, wherein the portion of thetubular guide extending parallel to the window path is securely connectedto a central guide bar extending parallel thereto and mounted in thewindow shaft, a slider element being adapted to slide on the guide bar,the slider element being connected to the window, the catch being inengagement with the slider element, and the slide-guide being mounted inthe slider element."}
{"WKU":"039303403","Title":"Shot control valves","App_Date":"1974-08-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Alsan Williams","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B24C  700","References":"1443762;2365948;3521407;3629976;3675374","Claims":"1.  In an abrasive blasting machine in which a magnetically attractableabrasive material is fed from a supply to a blasting member through a feedpassage, a valve member mounted in cooperation with the feed passage formovement between closed position across the feed passage and open positionout of the path of the feed passage, said valve member comprising a plateformed of magnetized material having a cross-section generallycorresponding to the cross-section of the feed passage but having across-sectional area less than that of the feed passage to provide aspaced relation about the valve member when in closed position, but whichbecomes filled to close the passage by abrasive material which isattracted to the valve plate to close the passage, and means for movementof the valve member between open and closed positions.2. A machine as claimed in claim 1 in which the plate of magnetic materialis sandwiched between a pair of disc plates each of which is larger incross-sectional area than the magnetized plate but less than the innercross-sectional area of the passage, with the disc plate in the upstreamdirection being smaller in cross-sectional area than the disc plate on theopposite side of the magnetic plate whereby the space about the valvemember is substantially of conical shape when in closed position.3. A machine as claimed in claim 2 in which the disc plate facing in theupstream direction is formed with a lip portion about the periphery whichextends in the upstream direction to define a recess in the body portionof the plate which becomes covered with abrasive material.4. A machine as claimed in claim 1 which includes an enclosure that extendsto one side of the passage and in which the valve member is mounted forrocking movement between closed position, in the path of the passage, andopen position to one side of the passage.5. A machine as claimed in claim 4 in which the valve member extendshorizontally into the path of the passage in closed position andvertically to one side of the passage in open position."}
{"WKU":"039303411","Title":"Universal vertical grinding machine","App_Date":"1974-02-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Marcel Neuman","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B24B  506;B24B 1700","References":"2332421;2723499;2807916;2826876;3269063","Claims":"What is claimed as new is as follows:1. Universal vertical truing apparatus, comprising, in combination:a horizontal base supporting at least one workpiece carrier device;a vertical column centered on the base;at least one collar rotatably mounted with reference to the column andprovided with at least one head comprising a grinder-carrier spindlesupporting a grinder adjacent the workpiece carrier device;means for effecting axial sliding of the collar along the column in areciprocating manner;means separate from the means for effecting for rotating the collar aboutthe column; andmeans for controlling the movements of the collar.2. Truing apparatus as in claim 1, characterized in that the base isprovided with a plurality of workpiece holder devices distributed equallyabout the column.3. Truing device as in claim 2, characterized in that the collar comprisesa number of grinder-carrier heads corresponding to the number of workpiececarrier devices.4. Truing device as in claim 3, characterized in that the column isfurnished with two collars that rotate independently in oppositedirections, each of the collars being provided with a number ofgrinder-carrier heads that corresponds to the number of workpiece carrierdevices.5. Truing apparatus as in claim 4, characterized in that the two collarsare mounted in application one above the other by means of suitablebearings disposed between them, the lower collar being connected to meansfor making it axially slidable.6. Truing apparatus as in claim 4, characterized in that the two collarsare slidably mounted on the column independently of each other, beingmoved by the far effecting axial sliding means.7. Truing apparatus as in claim 2, characterized in that the workpiececarrier devices that are distributed equally about the column severallycomprise a horizontal plate turning by means of suitable drives.8. Truing apparatus as in claim 4, characterized in that athe trajectoriesof movement of the geometric axis of each grinder carrier spindle passthrough a center of rotation of the workpiece carrier devices.9. Truing device as in claim 5, characterized in that at least the lowercollar rests by means of an appropriate stop on the arms of a disk whosecenter, coinciding with that of the column, is arranged so as toconstitute a piston cooperating with a fixed cylinder suitably connectedto a source of pressurized fluid, to allow the vertical reciprocatingmotion of the collar in question along the above mentioned column.10. Truing device as in claim 9, characterized in that there is arranged oneach collar a toothed sector that engages with an endless screw driven bya suitable mechanism at variable speed, each endless screw being mountedin rotation in bearings rigidly connected with a sleeve engaged about afixed vertical shaft that is rigidly connected to the base, the lower partof the said sleeve resting by means of a wheel on an arm rigidly connectedwith the lower collar or with each collar.11. Truing apparatus as in claim 10, characterized in that there is placedon the base and between the workpiece carrier devices as many regrinderorgans as there are grinder carrier heads.12. Truing apparatus as in claim 11, characterized in that the means forcontrol of the movements of each collar comprises a reader of the movementof the sleeve in the vertical direction, and a system for controlling theangular movement of each collar.13. Truing apparatus as in claim 1, characterized in that two collars arerotatably mounted with reference to the column, each of the collars beingprovided with at least one head comprising a grinder-carrier spindlesupporting a grinder adjacent the workpiece carrier device, the collarsrotating independently in opposite directions, the workpiece carrierdevice being mounted for rotation, and the trajectories of movement ofgeometric axes of the grinder-carrier spindles passing through a center ofrotation of the workpiece carrier device."}
{"WKU":"039303420","Title":"Sharpener for twist drills","App_Date":"1974-04-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert Gordon Moores, Jr.;Richard Eugene Walton, II","Assignee":"The Black and Decker Manufacturing Company","ICL_Class":"B24B  328","References":"641107;1195248;1674224;2109308;2245858;2429057;2536823;2866302;3040480;3107461;3209493","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An apparatus for grinding twist drills or the like comprising:a rotary abrasive member;means to fixedly hold the twist drill or the like with a leading end of thetwist drill in contact with the surface of the rotary abrasive member; andmeans to guide the holding means for spiral motion about an axis generallyparallel to said surface of the rotary abrasive member;said spiral motion including oscillation about and straight linereciprocation along said axis.2. The apparatus for grinding twist drills or the like set forth in claim 1wherein said guiding means include a pivot rod, said holding means beingsupported on said pivot rod, and means permitting spiral motion of saidpivot rod.3. The apparatus for grinding twist drills or the like set forth in claim 2wherein said means to impart spiral motion to said pivot rod is a gearfixedly secured to said pivot rod, said gear having outwardly extendingspiral teeth, and a sleeve member adapted to be held in fixed orientationrelative to said rotary abrasive member, said sleeve member havinginternal teeth which cooperate with the teeth on said gear.4. An apparatus for grinding twist drills or the like comprising:a frame;grinding wheel means carried by said frame;means to hold a twist drill or the like with the leading end of the twistdrill or the like to contact with the surface of said grinding wheelmeans; andinterconnecting means operable to interconnect said holding means with saidframe in such a manner that spiral motion is imparted to the holding meanswhile the leading end of the twist drill or the like is maintained incontact with said surface of said grinding wheel means, saidinterconnecting means including a pivot rod, means journaling said pivotrod on said frame for oscillating movement about the axis of the pivotrod, said axis being generally parallel to the suface of said grindingwheel means, a cam, and a cam follower, one of said cam and cam followerbeing mounted on said pivot rod and the other of said cam and cam followerbeing interconnected with said frame, the cam and cam follower impartingspiral motion to said pivot rod when it is oscillated about its axis, saidspiral motion including oscillation about and straight line reciprocationalong said axis.5. The apparatus for grinding twist drills or the like set forth in claim 4wherein said cam is a gear having outwardly extending spiral teeth, saidgear being mounted on said pivot rod, and wherein said cam follower is amember mounted on said frame, said member having a sleeve portion withspiral teeth cooperable with the spiral teeth on said gear.6. The apparatus for grinding twist drills or the like set forth in claim 4further characterized by the provision of rotary means operable to rotatesaid cam or cam follower interconnected with the frame relative to theframe whereby linear motion may be imparted to said pivot rod duringrotation of said cam or cam follower.7. The apparatus for grinding twist drills or the like set forth in claim 6further characterized by the provision of second cam follower meansmounted on said pivot rod, and linearly extending cam track meansengagable by said second cam follower means, the parts being so arrangedand constructed that when the second cam follower means engages the linearextending cam track linear motion will be imparted to said pivot rodduring rotation of the rotary means.8. An apparatus for grinding twist drills or the like, said apparatuscomprising;a frame;grinding wheel means supported for rotational movement about its axis onsaid frame;means operable to hold twist drills or the like or tools for dressing thegrinding wheel means with the leading end of the twist drill or the likeor the dressing tool being disposable in a position in contact with thesurface of said grinding wheel means;a pivot rod;means operable to mount said holding means on said pivot rod; andmeans mounting said pivot rod on said frame for oscillating movement ofsaid pivot rod about the axis of the pivot rod and for swinging motion ofsaid pivot rod about a swinging axis generally perpendicular to andintersecting the axis of the pivot rod and generally parallel to thesurface of the grinding wheel means which is contacted by the leading endof the twist drills or the like whereby said holding means can be movedtoward and away from the surface of said grinding wheel means so that theleading end of the twist drills or the like can be advantageously groundas the grinding wheel means is reduced due to wear and dressing of thegrinding wheel means.9. The apparatus for grinding twist drills or the like set forth in claim 8wherein the means for mounting the pivot rod on the frame includes firstbearing block means supported for swinging movement about said swingingaxis and second bearing block means mounted for movement toward and awayfrom the surface of the grinding wheel means, said pivot rod being engagedby said first and second bearing block means at spaced apart locations.10. The apparatus for grinding twist drills or the like set forth in claim8 further characterized by the provision of a twist drill locator, saidlocator being mounted on said holding means and projecting toward saidgrinding wheel means, the leading end of said locator engaging the side ofone of the flutes of the twist drill or the like and being adapted to bedisposed a predetermined distance away from the surface of the grindingwheel means when the twist drill or the like has been properly ground.11. The apparatus for grinding twist drills or the like set forth in claim8 further characterized by the provision of means to impart longitudinallinear motion to said pivot rod.12. The apparatus for grinding twist drills or the like set forth in claim11 wherein the means for imparting longitudinal motion to said pivot rodincludes a sleeve member journaled for rotational movement about its axis,said sleeve member being provided with internal spirally disposed teeth,and wherein corresponding spirally disposed teeth are carried by saidpivot rod in engagement with said teeth on said sleeve member.13. The apparatus for grinding twist drills or the like set forth in claim12 wherein means are provided to hold said sleeve member from rotationalmovement with respect to said frame, said pivot rod being rotatable withinsaid sleeve member when said sleeve member is being so held to cause saidholding means supported by said pivot rod to be guided in a spiral path.14. An apparatus for grinding twist drills or the like, said apparatuscomprising:a housing;a grinding wheel disposed adjacent one end of said housing;drive means mounted within said housing and operable to rotate saidgrinding wheel about its axis;a pivot rod;means mounting a portion of the pivot rod within said housing foroscillating motion about its axis and constructed to cause longitudinalshifting motion of said rod along its axis automatically in response tosaid oscillating motion, the axis of said pivot rod lying in a plane whichpasses through the axis of the grinding wheel, and one end of said pivotrod extending outside of one end of said housing;means to hold the twist drill or the like; andmeans mounting said holding means on said one end of said pivot rod.15. The apparatus for grinding twist drills or the like set forth in claim14 wherein said means for mounting a portion of the pivot rod within thehousing for oscillating and longitudinal shifting motion includes a sleevemember mounted for rotational movement about its axis relative to saidhousing and operable upon rotation relative to said pivot rod to impartlongitudinal shifting motion to said pivot rod, said sleeve member havinga handle portion which projects outwardly of said housing to the other endof said housing.16. The apparatus for grinding twist drills or the like set forth in claim15 further characterized by the provision of engaging means shiftablebetween two positions, the engaging means being operable to hold saidsleeve member from rotation relative to said housing when in a firstposition and being operable to permit said sleeve to rotate when in asecond position, and also further characterized by the provision of a modeselector having a manually engagable portion disposed above an uppersurface of the housing between said ends, said mode selector beingconnected with said engaging means and operable to shift the engagingmeans between its first and second positions.17. An apparatus for grinding twist drills or the like comprising:a clam-shell housing including two housing portions having mating edges;an electric motor mounting within said housing, said electric motor drivingan output shaft which projects outwardly of one end of said housing;a grinding wheel mounted upon said output shaft and spaced adjacent saidone end of said clam-shell housing;a pivot rod;first and second bearing block means mounted within said clam-shell housingand operable to support spaced apart portions of said pivot rod, one endof said pivot rod projecting outwardly of said one end of said clam-shellhousing;rotatable sleeve means interconnectable with said pivot rod to impartautomatic longitudinal motion to said pivot rod in response to rotation ofsaid sleeve member, said sleeve member having a handle portion projectingoutwardly of the other end of said clam-shell housing;a chuck adapted to hold twist drills or the like of varying diameters; andmeans operable to mount said chuck on said one end of said pivot rodwhereby twist drills or the like carried by said chuck may be brought intocontact with the generally cylindrical outer periphery of said grindingwheel.18. The apparatus for grinding twist drills or the like set forth in claim17 wherein moving means are provided for moving the second of said bearingblock means towards and away from the axis of rotation of said grindingwheel, and moving means including a manually engagable portion disposedoutside of said housing between said ends of said housing.19. An apparatus for grinding twist drills or the like comprising:a clam-shell housing including two housing portions having mating edges;an electric motor mounted within said housing, said electric motor drivingan output shaft which projects outwardly of one end of said housing;a grinding wheel mounted upon said output shaft and spaced adjacent saidone end of said clam-shell housing;a pivot rod;first and second bearing block means mounted within said clam-shell housingand operable to support spaced apart portions of said pivot rod, saidfirst bearing block being supported by opposed portions of the two housingportions, one end of said pivot rod projecting outwardly of said one endof said clam-shell housing;rotatable sleeve means interconnectable with said pivot rod to impartlongitudinal motion to said pivot rod upon rotation of said sleeve member,said sleeve member having a handle portion projecting outwardly of theother end of said clam-shell housings;a chuck adapted to hold twist drills or the like of varying diameters;means operable to mount said chuck on said one end of said pivot rodwhereby twist drills or the like carried by said chuck may be brought intocontact with the generally cylindrical outer periphery of said grindingwheel;said first bearing block being journaled for swinging motion about an axisgenerally perpendicular to the plane defined by the opposed portions ofthe clam-shell housing, each of the two portions of the clam-shell housingcarrying trunnion means which supports and first bearing block means forsaid swinging motion.20. The apparatus for grinding twist drills or the like set forth in claim19 further characterized by the provision of eye shield means mounted onone of the housing portions adjacent said one end thereof, said electricmotor drives the periphery of said grinding wheel adjacent said eye shieldaway from said eye shield.21. The apparatus for grinding twist drills or the like set forth in claim20 further characterized by the provision of a switch for said electricmotor said switch having a manually engagable portion engagable fromoutside of said one of the housing portions.22. An apparatus for grinding twist drills or the like comprising:a clam-shell housing including two housing portions having mating edges;an electric motor mounted within said housing, said electric motor drivingan output shaft which projects outwardly of one end of said housing;a grinding wheel mounted upon said output shaft and spaced adjacent saidone end of said clam-shell housing;a pivot rod;first and second bearing block means mounted within said clam-shell housingand operable to support spaced apart portions of said pivot rod, one endof said pivot rod projecting outwardly of said one end of said clam-shellhousing;rotatable sleeve means interconnectable with said pivot rod to impartlongitudinal motion to said pivot rod in response to rotation of saidsleeve member, said sleeve member having a handle portion projectingoutwardly of the other end of said clam-shell housing, said sleeve membercarrying a flange portion journaled in said first bearing block means, andfurther characterized by the provision of means to lock said flangeportion from rotation within said bearing block, said locking meansincluding manually engageable means projecting outwardly of said housingbetween the ends of said housing;a chuck adapted to hold twist drills or the like of varying diameters; andmeans operable to mount said chuck on said one end of said pivot rodwhereby twist drills or the like carried by said chuck may be brought intocontact with the generally cylindrical outer periphery of said grindingwheel.23. In combination with a generally cylindrical grinding wheel, anapparatus for grinding the leading ends of twist drills or the like, saidapparatus including:a chuck;supporting means operable to support said chuck for the indexing of saidchuck 180.degree. about an axis between two operable positions, said chuckbeing operable to hold drills of differing diameters with the axis of saiddrills being concentric with the axis about which the chuck may beindexed;means engageable with said supporting means to position the chuck with oneend spaced away from the outer periphery of said grinding wheel;a locator carried by said one end of said chuck, said locator including aleading edge engaging with line contact the side of a flute of a twistdrill adjacent the cutting lip of said twist drill, said leading edgelying at an angle to the axis of the grinding wheel when said chuck is inone of its two operable positions, and means resiliently supporting andbiasing the leading edge of said locator in such a manner that when thechuck is in said one position said leading edge will always lie at thesame angle to the axis of the grinding wheel means even though it isengaging twist drills of differing diameters and web thicknesses, wherebysaid locator leading edge establishes line contact along parallel lineswith the side wall of each flute of twist drills of different diametersand web thicknesses.24. An apparatus for grinding twist drills or the like comprising:a rotary abrasive member;means to hold twist drills or the like with the leading end of the twistdrill in contact with the surface of the rotary abrasive member;a pivot rod upon which said holding means is mounted;means mounting said pivot rod at the first location remote from the rotaryabrasive member for enabling oscillating motion about the axis of saidpivot rod;means mounting said pivot rod at a second location enabling swingingmovement of said pivot rod toward and away from the rotary abrasive memberabout an axis perpendicular to and intersecting the axis of said pivotrod.25. The apparatus for grinding twist drills or the like set forth in claim24 in which said holding means includes a chuck adapted to receive twistdrills of varying diameters concentrically within said chuck, and meansproviding for the indexing of said chuck 180 drgrees about the axis ofsaid twist drills.26. An apparatus for grinding the leading edges of two-fluted twist drillsto provide two cutting edges on the opposite sides of the center pointthereof comprising:a rotary abrasive member;means to hold the twist with a portion of the lead end of the twist drillin contact with a surface of the rotary abrasive member;means to locate said twist drill within said holding means;means to guide said holding means for spiral motion about an axis generallyparallel to said surface of said rotary abrasive member, said spiralmotion including oscillation about and straight line reciprocating alongsaid axis, whereby to traverse one of said cutting edges across saidabrasive member for sharpening; andmeans for indexing said twist drill 180.degree. within said holding meansto enable the other cutting edge of said twist drill to be traversed bysaid guiding means along the same path as said one cutting edge.27. A low-cost, compact drill bit sharpener for accurate grinding ofcutting edges shaped for maximum drilling rates on the leading edges ofmultiple-fluted twist drills comprising:a housing including a front housing portion and a rear housing portion;a rotary abrasive member partially exposed at one end of said housing;drive means for said member enclosed within said housing;holding means for supporting twist drills with one of the cutting edgesthereof presented to said member;pivot rod means supported in said housing, said holding means being mountedon said pivot rod;means for guiding said pivot rod and said holding means for oscillationabout the axis of said pivot rod to successively present incrementalportions of said cutting edge to said rotary abrasive member forsharpening thereof;means for successively indexing said twist drill within said holding meansto present successive cutting edges to said member;the axis of rotation of said abrasive member and the axis of said pivot rodbeing generally coplanar;said grinding means comprising means for longitudinally shifting said pivotrod along its axis to move said cutting edge transversely across acircumferential surface of said member.28. A low-cost, compact drill bit sharpener for accurate grinding ofcutting edges shaped for maximum drilling rates on the leading edges ofmultiple-fluted twist drills comprising:a housing including a front housing portion and a rear housing portion;a rotary abrasive member partially exposed at one end of said housing;drive means for said member enclosed within said housing;holding means for supporting twist drills with one of the cutting edgesthereof presented to said member;pivot rod means supported in said housing, said holding means being mountedon said pivot rod;means for guiding said pivot rod and said holding means for oscillationabout the axis of said pivot rod to successively present incrementalportions of said cutting edge to said rotary abrasive member forsharpening thereof;means fur successively indexing and twist drill within said holding meansto present successive cutting edges to said member;means interconnected with said pivot rod for swinging said pivot rod aboutan axis perpendicular to and intersecting the axis of said pivot rod tofeed said twist drill into said member; andmeans interconnected with said pivot rod causing simple linear motion ofsaid pivot rod along its axis to enable alongment of the surface of saidrotary abrasive member with said pivot rod axis.29. A low-cost, compact drill bit sharpener intended for commercial usage,comprising a housing, a motor in said housing, a grinding wheel driven bythe motor, chucking means mounted on the housing and adapted to retain adrill bit being sharpened, means for moving the chucking means relative tothe grinding wheel to provide the desired relief on the cutting face ofthe flute of the drill bit being sharpened, means for adjusting thechucking means substantially 180.degree. about its axis of rotation foralternate application of the respective cutting faces of the drill bitbeing sharpened without removal of the drill bit from the chucking means,and locating means carried by the chucking means, said locating meansincluding a leading edge resiliently supported and biased to establishline contact with the sidewall of each flute of the drill bit beingsharpened, the lines of contact for drill bits of different diameters andweb thicknesses being parallel.30. An apparatus for grinding twist drills or the like, said apparatuscomprising:a frame;grinding wheel means supported on said frame;holding means operable to hold twist drills or the like with the leadingend of the twist drill or the like being disposable in a position incontact with the surface of said grinding wheel means;locator means mounted on said holding means, said locator means having aleading edge maintained in engagement with the sidewall of one of theflutes of said twist drill or the like adjacent the leading end thereofduring the grinding of said twist drill or the like, said leading edgebeing resiliently supported and biased to establish line contact with thesidewall of each flute of the drill bits, the lines of contact for drillbits of different diameters and web thicknesses being parallel; andmeans mounting said holding means on said frame for movement toward andaway from said surface, the leading edge of said locator being adapted tobe disposed a predetermined distance away from the surface of the grindingwheel means when the twist drill or the like has been properly ground."}
{"WKU":"039303438","Title":"Device for mounting specimens","App_Date":"1974-03-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Detlef Welsch;Horst Waschull","Assignee":"VEB Rathenower Optische Werke","ICL_Class":"B24B 3704","References":"2708837;2839877;2842906;3570188;3699722","Claims":"We claim:1. A device for mounting specimens for the purpose of lapping, grinding andpolishing metallographic specimens for microscopic analyses, comprising: ahousing; a rotatable polishing wheel therein; a driving roller disposedcentrally with respect to said wheel; at least one specimen holderdisposed above said wheel, for receiving specimens therein to be groundand polished by a surface of said wheel; at least one supporting roller,associated with said housing, for said specimen holder; said drivingroller and said supporting roller having wedge grooves therein, engaged bya peripheral edge portion of said specimen holder at spaced-apartlocations; said wedge grooves and said edge portions constituting membersof a frictional drive, for rotating said specimen holder; and at least oneadjustable pressing member in the latter for exerting pressure on theassociated specimen, and also for maintaining proper contact between saidmembers of the frictional drive; wherein said at least one pressing memberincludes a slidable portion, means for immobilizing said slidable portionin various operative positions, a pressing bolt within said slidableportion in contact with the specimen, for exerting pressure thereon, andmeans for biasing said bolt toward the specimen, and also the associatedspecimen holder toward said wedge grooves of the respective rollers, bythe intermediary of said pressing member.2. The device as defined in claim 1, further comprising means for rotatingsaid wheel and said specimen holder at a ratio of between 1 to 0.34 and 1to 0.44.3. The device as defined in claim 1, wherein said specimen holder hastherein three of said pressing members.4. The device as defined in claim 1, further comprising a specimen cagehaving the same number of bores therein as said pressing members in saidspecimen holder, and a driver pin for interconnecting said cage with saidspecimen holder.5. The device as defined in claim 1, further comprising a partition withinsaid specimen holder, below said slidable portion, for guiding saidpressing bolt into substantially central contact with the specimen.6. A device for mounting specimens for the purpose of lapping, grinding andpolishing metallographic specimens for microscopic analyses, comprising: ahousing; a rotatable polishing wheel therein; a driving roller disposedcentrally with respect to said wheel; at least three specimen holdersdisposed above said wheel, for receiving specimens therein to be groundand polished by a surface of said wheel; at least one supporting roller,associated with said housing, for each of said specimen holders; saiddriving roller and said supporting rollers having wedge grooves therein,engaged by peripheral edge portions of said specimen holders atspaced-apart locations; said wedge grooves and said edge portionsconstituting members of a frictional drive, for rotating said specimenholders; and at least three adjustable pressing members in the latter forexerting pressure on the associated specimens, and also for maintainingproper contact between said members of the frictional drive; wherein saidpressing members include a slidable portion, means for immobilizing saidslidable portion in various operative positions, a pressing bolt withinsaid slidable portion in contact with one of the specimens, for exertingpressure thereon, and means for biasing said bolt toward the specimen, andalso the associated one of said specimen holders toward said wedge groovesof the respective rollers, by the intermediary of said pressing member.7. The device as defined in claim 6, further comprising a partition withineach of said specimen holders, below said slidable portions, for guidingsaid pressing bolt into substantially central contact with the onespecimen."}
{"WKU":"039303446","Title":"Plastic covered building structures","App_Date":"1973-12-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Charles C. Gahler","Assignee":"X. S. Smith, Inc.","ICL_Class":"E04B  1315","References":"3791076","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A plastic covered building structure comprising a plurality of raftermembers positioned in spaced apart relationship, a rail secured to saidrafter members and extending the length of the building structure, saidrail having outer, inner and side surfaces, two concave portions integralwith and oppositively disposed on either side of said rail, two clampingrods, each of said rods received in one of said concave portions andextending the length thereof, means provided and operative at any pointalong the length of said rail for clamping said rods into said concaveportions, two superimposed plastic sheets secured along one of theirmargins between one of the concave portions of the rail and thecomplementary rod, means for securing the opposite margins of thesuperimposed plastic sheets to each other and to the structure, thecentral portion of said superimposed plastic sheets being inflated tothereby space them apart.2. The plastic covered building structure as defined in claim 1 wherein themeans for clamping the rods into the concave portions of the ridge railcomprises a longitudinally extending channel in said rail, longitudinallyextending channel in said rail, longitudinally extending grooves in theopposing interior vertical walls of said channel, the grooves in theopposing walls being in staggered relationship, at least one bolt having athread with an identical pitch as the grooves in said channel, and atleast one clamp secured to said rail by said bolt and clamping said rodsin the concave portions of the rail, whereby said clamp may be secured tosaid rail to clamp said rods at any position along the length of saidrail.3. The plastic covered building structure as defined in claim 1 wherein themeans for securing the end margins of the superimposed plastic sheets toeach other and to the structure comprises a gable rail secured to theupper portion of each end rafter member, said gable rail having anupwardly concave portion integral with and disposed on a side of saidgable rail, a clamping rod received in the concave portion of said gablerail, and means for clamping said rod into said concave portion, thesuperimposed sheets of plastic being secured along their end marginbetween the concave portion of the gable rail and the complementary rod.4. The plastic covered building structure as defined in claim 3 whichfurther comprises a sheet of plastic draped to cover the end of thebuilding structure, and means on said gable rail for securing the topmargin of said plastic sheet to said building structure.5. A plastic covered building structure comprising a plurality of raftermembers positioned in spaced apart relationship, a rail secured to saidrafter members and extending the length of the building structure, saidrail having outer, inner and side surfaces, two concave portions integralwith and oppositely disposed on either side of said rail, two clampingrods, each of said rods received in one of said concave portions andextending the length thereof, means provided and operative at any pointalong the length of said rail for clamping said rods into said concaveportions, two superimposed plastic sheets secured along one of theirmargins between one of the concave portions of the ridge rail and thecomplementary rod, means for securing the opposite margins of thesuperimposed plastic sheets to each other and to the structure, thecentral portion of said superimposed plastic sheets being inflated tothereby space them apart, said rail being secured to the rafter members byat least one bolt passing through a longitudinally extending slot in saidrail, the head of the bolt engaging the rail, said bolt being secured to arafter member.6. The plastic covered building structure as defined in claim 5 wherein theconcave portions of the rail are formed in flanges protruding from theside surfaces of said rail.7. The plastic covered building structure as defined in claim 6 whereinsaid rail is extruded.8. A plastic covered building structure comprising a plurality of raftermembers positioned in spaced apart relationship, a rail secured to saidrafter members and extending the length of the building structure, aconcave portion integral with said rail, a clamping rod received in saidconcave portion and extending the length thereof, means provided andoperative at any point along the length of said rail for clamping said rodinto said concave portion, two superimposed plastic sheets secured alongone of their margins between said concave portion of said ridge rail andsaid clamping rod, means for securing the opposite margins of thesuperimposed plastic sheets to each other and to the structure, thecentral portion of said superimposed plastic sheets being inflated tothereby space them apart."}
{"WKU":"039303454","Title":"Mobile home resilient frost heave compensators","App_Date":"1975-01-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard H. Kurzenberger","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B61D 4500;E02D 2750;F16F  144;F16F  308","References":"99320;315223;777441;1194417;2212153;3054151;3335531;3402925;3744192","Claims":"I claim:1. A frost heave compensator for mobile homes and the like generallyemploying longitudinally spaced tiedowns disposed transversely across thetop thereof and extending vertically downwardly on opposite sides thereof,said frost heave compensator comprising:a. a tubular vertically disposed outer shell closed at its upper end andcentrally apertured at its lower end whereby to freely accommodate atension rod through said lower end,b. a transverse inverted U-shaped bracket secured to the upper end portionof said outer shell whereby to admit of securement of the upper end of afrost heave compensator to the lower end of a conventional tiedown,c. the upper end of said tension rod having a combined circular guide andstop washer of a diameter somewhat less than the inner diameter of saidtubular shell securely fixed on the upper end of said tension rod,d. a plurality of longitudinally oppositely ended resilient compressiblefrusto-conical compression elements telescoped freely on said tension rodwith suitable washers disposed between adjacent ends thereof, and with theinner periphery of each said compression elements disposed in spacedrelationship with respect to the outer periphery of said tension rod, andwith the outer periphery of each said compression element disposed inspaced relationship with respect to the inner periphery of the tubularouter shell,e. the lower end of the said outer shell being provided with a combinedcentral sleeve and annular seat positioned centrally in the lower end ofthe tubular shell, the inner periphery of said combined central sleeve andannular seat being such as to permit free telescoping of the tension rodtherethrough, andf. the lower end of the said tension rod being threaded and of sufficientlength to be adjustably secured by a suitable conventional connector meansto the upper end of a conventional ground anchor.2. A frost heave compensator as claimed in claim 1 wherein:a portion of the lower threaded end of the tension rod is preferablyhexagonally formed to provide for wrench turning of said tension rod whenconnected by suitable means to said ground anchor.3. A frost heave compensator as claimed in claim 1 wherein:a. the frusto-conical compression elements, having a central aperturetherethrough of sufficient size to telescope freely longitudinally on saidtension rod, are each provided with a plurality of longitudinal flutestherein spaced equally therearound.4. A frost heave compensator as claimed in claim 1 wherein:a. the lower portion of the tubular shell is transversely cut off and theremaining lower end of said tubular shell is externally threaded toaccommodate an internally threaded cap element thereon,b. the said cap element is centrally apertured to receive therethrough thelower depending threaded end of a combined central depending sleeve andannular seat, andc. a nut is threaded on the depending end of said central depending sleevewhereby to secure said annular seat element of the combined centraldepending sleeve and annular seat firmly on the inner surface of said caparound the central aperture therein."}
{"WKU":"039303462","Title":"Swimming pool","App_Date":"1974-10-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Stanley Richard Blakeway","Assignee":"Eunice Joesphine Blakeway","ICL_Class":"F04H  316","References":"2501980;3511002","Claims":"What I claim is:1. An in-ground swimming pool including a pair of rigid substantiallyplanar end members; an inner and an outer arcuate flange projecting fromeach said end member and defining a channel between them having the shapeof the bottom and sides of the pool; a sheet of flexible springy materialcapable of transportation in rolled form, each lateral edge of said sheetbeing engaged in one said channel, said edge having a clearance from saidend member, thereby to form the sides and bottom of the pool; and aresilient sealing gasket inserted in highly compressed condition betweeneach lateral edge of said sheet and the adjacent inner flange, said gasketbeing the sole sealing means between said edge and the channel.2. A swimming pool as claimed in claim 1, in which each said outer flangeis wider than said inner flange and projects beyond it.3. A swimming pool as claimed in claim 1, including at least one aperturein each said outer flange communicating with said channel between saidgasket and said end member.4. A swimming pool as claimed in claim 1, including a spacer between saidsheet and said inner flange at a curved portion of said channel, saidspacer being of material less compressible than that of said gasket andbeing of less radial width than said highly-compressed gasket.5. A swimming pool as claimed in claim 1, in which said sheet is formed ofa plurality of longitudinally-extending sections; contiguous flanges onadjacent edges of said sections; a longitudinal fastener having a body, alongitudinal bore in said body and a longitudinal slot through said bodyleading to said bore, said contiguous flanges being engaged in said slot.6. A swimming pool as claimed in claim 5, including slots in each saidouter flange through which slot said fastener projects.7. An in-ground swimming pool comprising:a. a pair of substantially planar end members spaced so as to define thelength of said pool, each of said ends including inner and outer spacedparallel flanges defining a channel between them having a predeterminedshape of the bottom and side walls of said pool,b. a sheet of flexible springy material capable of being transported inroll form, the lateral edges of said sheet being engaged in said channelswhen said sheet is rolled out thereby to form the sides and bottom of saidpool, clearances being provided between the edges of said sheet and saidend members thereby permitting lateral movement of said sheet relative tosaid end members in response to hydrostatic pressure on said sheet,temperature changes or earth movements andc. a resilient sealing gasket inserted in highly compressed conditionbetween each lateral edge of said sheet and the corresponding innerflange, said gasket being the sole sealing means between said edge andsaid channel."}
{"WKU":"039303470","Title":"Structural unit body having a pipe incorporated therein","App_Date":"1973-11-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Naomitsu Megumi","Assignee":"Naomitsu Megumi;Tokyo Plywood Kabushiki Kaisha","ICL_Class":"E04B  548;E04B  176;E04C  139","References":"1879319;2089045;2178097;2262899;2351856;2559198;3676973;3707165","Claims":"I claim:1. A structural unit body comprising a frame having an inner flange and anouter flange, said frame including a frame plate from which said outerflange extends outwardly and from which said inner flange extendsinwardly, said frame having an opening circumscribed by said inner flange,a stuffing box, a noncombustible material in said stuffing box, meanssecuring said stuffing box to said inner flange to thereby close saidopening in said frame, cement mortar disposed on at least portions of saidstuffing box and said frame, and heat transfer conduit means disposedwithin said stuffing box for conducting a heat transfer fluid therein,whereby said heat transfer conduit means effects a heat transferrelationship with the ambient air about said stuffing box to provide forheating or cooling of a building or the like which is constructed withsaid structural unit bodies.2. A structural unit body according to claim 1 wherein said stuffing box isin the form of a box made of dampproof material, and a metal net-likematerial covering said dampproof material, said noncombustible materialbeing a fibrous material.3. A structural unit body according to claim 2 wherein said mortar cementis disposed over and fixed to said metal net-like material and said innerflange, said mortar cement also being disposed on and fixed to a portionof said frame plate which is most closely adjacent to said inner flange,said mortar cement extending to form an edge disposed between said innerflange and said outer flange.4. A structural unit body according to claim 1 wherein said stuffing boxhas a rear side which is disposed adjacent to said inner flange and anopposite front side which is adapted to be disposed on the inside of abuilding or the like which is constructed with said structural unitbodies, said conduit means being disposed within said non-combustiblematerial intermediate said front and rear sides of said stuffing box, saidnon-combustible material being arranged in said stuffing box such thatgreater heat transfer is effected from the conduit means through to thefront side of the stuffing box than through to the rear side of thestuffing box.5. A structural unit body according to claim 4 wherein said non-combustiblematerial is thicker between said rear side of said stuffing box and saidconduit means relative to the thickness between said front side of saidstuffing box and said conduit means.6. A structural unit body according to claim 4 wherein said non-combustiblematerial comprises an asbestos non-woven fabric between said rear side ofsaid stuffing box and said conduit means, said non-combustible materialbetween said front side of said stuffing box and said conduit meanscomprising a fibrous material.7. A structural unit body comprising a frame having an inner flange and anouter flange, said frame including a frame plate from which said outerflange extends outwardly and from which said inner flange extendsinwardly, said outr flange being U-shaped and having a box-likeconfiguration, a buffer material disposed within said box-likeconfiguration, said frame plate being provided with means defining aplurality of spaced openings, said frame being an assembled, metalbox-like structure and having an opening circumscribed by said innerflange, a stuffing box, a noncombustible material in said stuffing box,means securing said stuffing box to said frame to thereby close saidopening in said frame, cement mortar disposed on at least portions of saidstuffing box and said frame, and conduit means disposed within saidstuffing box for conducting a fluid."}
{"WKU":"039303489","Title":"Reinforced concrete construction","App_Date":"1973-09-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Harry H. Wise","Assignee":"Johns-Manville Corporation","ICL_Class":"E04B  552","References":"1150044;2037465;2125516;3763613","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A concrete panel suitable for incorporation into a composite concretetwo-way slab system, which comprises:a generally planar relatively thin sub-slab having a generally flat uppersurface;a series of reinforcing bars embedded within said sub-slab and extendingtransversely substantially entirely thereacross and in a generallyparallel alignment with each other;each of said bars having two end portions and an intermediate portiontherebetween;the intermediate portion of each of said bars being wholly embedded in saidsub-slab and lying generally parallel and adjacent to said lower surface;each of said end portions being bent upward in a continuous curve throughan angle of at least 180.degree. with the center point of the bend beingabove the upper surface of said sub-slab and the lower portion of saidcontinuous curve being embedded in said sub-slab;the length of the free portion of each of said end portions being equal toat least six times the diameter of the bar; andthe height of said bend being sufficient to provide a confined bearing loadto concrete filled within the bend in a composite system lower than theallowable confined bearing load of the concrete fill.2. The panel of claim 1 further comprising a series of reinforcing trussesaligned substantially parallel to each other and generally perpendicularto said reinforcing bars, and with the lower chord of each of said trussesembedded in said sub-slab."}
{"WKU":"039303497","Title":"Braced girder of triangular section","App_Date":"1974-06-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hartmut Wellershaus","Assignee":"Rheinische Filigranbau GmbH & Co. KG","ICL_Class":"E04C  506","References":"","Claims":"I claim:1. A braced girder for steel-reinforced concrete construction having atriangular cross section between a top chord and two relatively spacedbottom chords, the top chord being connected to both bottom chords by onecontinuous lacing forming a repeating pattern of braces which are at leastroughly perpendicular to the top chord and of diagonal braces, wherein twobraces in the continuous lacing which are perpendicular to the top chordfollow each other consecutively.2. A braced girder according to claim 1, wherein each brace perpendicularlyconnecting one bottom chord to the top chord is adjoined by another braceperpendicularly connecting the top chord to the other bottom chord, saidother brace being adjoined by two consecutive diagonal braces.3. A braced girder according to claim 1, characterised in that the braces(16c, 16 c) extending perpendicularly to the top chord (12) form directlyadjacent pairs between the top chord and the same bottom chord.4. A braced girder for steel-reinforced concrete construction, comprising atop chord (12) connected to each of two bottom chords (14, 14 ) bysubstantially straight braces forming parts of one continuous lacingcontained in each of two panel planes meeting at least approximately inthe axis of the top chord, said continuous lacing comprising a repeatingpattern consisting of braces (16c, 16 c) which are at least approximatelyperpendicular to the top chord (12) and which follow each otherconsecutively, and of diagonal braces, and where the two panel planes (18,18 ) meet, the lacing forms a radius (r) which is at least 0.4 times thediameter (d) of the top chord (12)."}
{"WKU":"039303500","Title":"Packaging assembly and process","App_Date":"1974-11-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Philip L. Reid","Assignee":"W. R. Grace & Co.","ICL_Class":"B65B 3102","References":"2565444;3736721","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A packaging assembly comprisinga. a body having walls defining an elongate open channel for supporting atrough-shaped web having a product disposed within the web;b. a cover cooperable with the body and the web to form a substantiallyair-tight chamber, said cover including means for maintaining at least aportion of the web in trough-shaped configuration within the chamber, atleast one of said body and said cover having a hole therethrough adaptedfor flow communication of the chamber with vacuumizing means;c. means for moving at least one of the body and the cover into and out ofchamber forming relation of the body with the cover; andd. means operable within the chamber for sealing the web to form a sealedweb package containing the product.2. The assembly of claim 1 wherein said cover is adapted to directly engagean upper longitudinal portion of at least one of said body walls to formtherewith a substantially air-tight seal.3. The assembly of claim 1 wherein said cover includes (I) spaced apartdepending arms adapted to substantially hermetically seal longitudinallyopposite portions of the chamber with portions of the web engaged betweenthe arms and the channel and (II) a bridge connecting said arms andadapted to directly engage the body to substantially hermetically seal anupper portion of the channel.4. The assembly of claim 3 wherein said channel and said arms are generallyV-shaped in transverse section.5. The assembly of claim 3 wherein transversely opposed sides of said armsinclude resilient sealing means.6. The assembly of claim 3 wherein said bridge includes undersurfaceportions extending transversely outwardly from upper portions of the armsand extending longitudinally from one of said arms to another of saidarms, said body includes upper surfaces extending outwardly from thechannel defining surfaces, and said bridge undersurfaces sealingly engagethe body upper surfaces.7. The assembly of claim 3 wherein a transversely facing side of one ofsaid arms is adapted to directly sealingly engage the channel.8. The assembly of claim 1 wherein said sealing means includes means forsealing a first transverse portion of the web to a second transverseportion of the web and means for sealing an upper longitudinal margin of afirst portion of the web to an upper longitudinal margin of a secondportion of the web.9. The assembly of claim 8 wherein the means for transversely sealing andthe means for longitudinally sealing are provided by a heated sealing barnormally disposed in a recess provided in one of said channel-definingwall surfaces, said bar having a generally straight elongate portion, anend leg portion depending from an end of said elongate portion, and N legportions depending from serially spaced apart regions of said elongateportion where N is zero or an integer, the free ends of one or more ofsaid leg portions being pivotally mounted adjacent the bottom of thechannel.10. The assembly of claim 1 wherein the longitudinal extent of the channelis about twice as long as the longitudinal chamber-forming extent of thecover, thereby providing a loading station adjacent the chamber-formingportion of the channel.11. The assembly of claim 10 further including means for heating thechannel surfaces at the loading station.12. Packaging apparatus comprising the assembly of claim 1 in combinationwith means for moving the assembly while the body and cover are not inchamber-forming relation toward a supply roll of the web material, meansfor securing a sealed portion of the web during movement of the assemblytoward the roll to preclude carry back of the web toward the supply roll,said moving means being reversibly operable with the cover and body inchamber-forming relation for advancing web material to a loading stationand for advancing loaded web material toward the securing means.13. The packaging apparatus of claim 12 further including means disposedoperatively in advance of the assembly for forming longitudinally spacedapart lines of weakness transverse the web.14. A process for forming a vacuum package which comprisesa. forming a web into trough-shaped configuration,b. inserting a product into the formed web,c. registering members to provide a substantially air-tight chamber withthe product-containing portion of the web within the chamber, withportions of the web spaced longitudinally from the product sealinglyengaged between the members, with at least a portion of one longitudinalmargin of the web disposed within the chamber and substantially free ofrestraint against transverse movement into contact with an oppositeportion of the web,d. maintaining at least a portion of the web in trough-shaped configurationwithin the chamber;e. vacuumizing to reduce the pressure interiorly of the chamber about theproduct;f. while the chamber pressure is reduced, moving spaced apart transverselyopposed portions of the web into interfacial engagement outwardly of theproduct, said transversely opposed web portions including at least aportion of said web margin;g. sealing interengaged portions of the web to form a vacuum packagecontaining the product; andh. moving the members apart to open the chamber to permit recovery of thepackage.15. The process of claim 14, which further includes prior to saidvacuumizing step, substantially hermetically sealing a transverse portionof the web with an opposed transverse portion of the web to provide a webtrough having a closed end, and wherein the chamber is formed with theclosed end sealingly engaged between the members.16. The process of claim 15 wherein the process is successively carried outusing longitudinally spaced transversely joined web segments and thehermetically sealing step prior to vacuumizing a later vacuumized segmentis performed by the sealing of a prior vacuumized segment.17. The process of claim 14 wherein the formed web is generally V-shaped intransverse section.18. The process of claim 14 wherein the web is supplied from a web supplyand further including after step (c) and prior to step (h) moving theregistered members with portions of the web engaged therebetween toadvance the web from the web supply, and thereafter while the members areapart securing the web to substantially preclude carry back thereof towardthe web supply, while the members are apart and the web is secured movingthe members longitudinally of the web toward the web supply, andthereafter repeating steps (c) to (h) inclusive.19. The process of claim 14 wherein the members include a body having wallsdefining an elongate upwardly open channel for supporting saidtrough-shaped web and a cover cooperable with the body and the web to formsaid substantially air-tight chamber, said cover including means formaintaining at least a portion of the web in trough-shaped configurationwithin the chamber, said cover having a hole therethrough adapted for flowcommunication of the chamber with vacuumizing means.20. The process of claim 17 wherein said registering step includes directlyengaging the cover with an upper longitudinal portion of at least one ofsaid body walls to form therewith a substantially air-tight seal.21. The process of claim 19 wherein said cover includes (I) spaced apartdepending arms adapted to substantially hermetically seal longitudinallyopposite portions of the chamber with portions of the web engaged betweenthe arms and the channel and (II) a bridge connecting said arms andadapted to directly engage the body to substantially hermetically seal anupper portion of the channel.22. The process of claim 19 wherein said channel, said arms, and saidformed web are generally V-shaped in transverse section.23. The process of claim 14 wherein the web is a plastic film.24. The process of claim 23 wherein the film is of polyethylene coated witha ethylene vinyl acetate interpolymer.25. The process of claim 23 wherein the film is a laminate.26. The process of claim 25 wherein the laminate includes a lamina ofpoly(vinylidene chloride) or a copolymer including from about 50 to about85 weight percent thereof.27. The process of claim 14 wherein two or more product units are insertedin serially spaced apart relationship longitudinally of the formed web,the chamber is formed with two or more of said product units disposedtherein, and while the chamber pressure is reduced opposed portions of theweb are moved into interfacial engagement and sealed about each productunit to form contiguous vacuum packages each containing a product unit.28. The apparatus of claim 3 wherein said bridge includes transverselyopposed sides adapted to engage the body to substantially hermeticallyseal an upper portion of the channel.29. The apparatus of claim 28 wherein said bridge further includes anundersurface portion extending longitudinally from one of said arms toanother of said arms for forming an upper surface of the chamber."}
{"WKU":"039303519","Title":"Method and apparatus for transferring yarn packages doffed from a","App_Date":"1974-07-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Shozo Ueda;Toshinori Taniguchi","Assignee":"Kabushiki Kaisha Toyoda Jidoshokki Seisakusho;Daiwa Boseki Kabushiki Kaisha","ICL_Class":"B65B  510","References":"2506661;2668626;3683582","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method for transferring yarn packages doffed from a textile machineprovided with a conveyer belt disposed along a longitudinal directionthereof to a container, comprising the steps of carrying the yarn packagesdoffed from said textile machine along a path having a horizontalcomponent of direction to an end of the conveyer, and then ejecting theyarn packages from the end of the conveyer at a velocity sufficient tocause the yarn package to fall along a parabolic path due to thehorizontal momentum imparted to the packages by the conveyer, on to areceiving surface, and maintaining the receiving surface at asubstantially constant vertical distance from the upper surface of saidconveyer, said distance being from one to two times the width L of a yarnpackage.2. Method according to claim 1 characterized in that the passage taken bythe falling yarn package when it drops into the container is positivelyregulated.3. Apparatus for transferring yarn packages doffed from a textile machine,comprising a conveyer belt disposed along longitudinal direction whereinyarn packages doffed from said textile machine are carried to an end ofthe conveyer along a path that has a horizontal component of motion andthen ejected by the conveyer along a parabolic path, a containerpositioned at a receiving position adjacently below and horizontallyspaced from the end of the conveyer, a disc displaceably disposed in thecontainer, a helical spring disposed at a position below the disc and incontact with the disc, the disc being positioned within a range of betweenL and 2L from the carrying surface of the conveyer wherein L defines theaxial width of the package, the spring constant being sufficient to permitdeformation by the length L when a yarn package is placed on the disc.4. Apparatus according to claim 3 further comprising a guide plate disposedat the end portion of the conveyer.5. Apparatus according to claim 4 further comprising a door disposed at theend of conveyer and a swinging mechanism for advancing and retiring theguide plate in response to the movement of the door.6. Apparatus according to claim 5, wherein said swinging mechanismcomprises a parallelogram pivoted on said guide plate, and a first pulleyon which said parallelogram is further pivoted, and wherein said door isprovided with a second pulley, and a belt connecting said first and secondpulleys."}
{"WKU":"039303527","Title":"Packaging machine","App_Date":"1974-04-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Roy W. Carnes","Assignee":"AMF Incorporated","ICL_Class":"B65B  500;B65B 4326;B65B 5704","References":"2608331;3391519;3440801;3478490;3504784;3527337;3556316;3590553;3618292;3750721","Claims":"I claim:1. A packaging apparatus for successively receiving and packing a supply ofmaterial, such as baked goods, into individual bags taken from a stack ofbags dispensed from a bag supply means, including: conveyor means forconveying said material into a packaging station; means for causing eachof said bags to become partially opened; engaging means for entering andengaging each of said bags for receiving said material to be packaged;advancing means for advancing said material into the interior of said bagsfor sealing; means sensing the successive utilization of bags from saidstack for replenishing bags being used; support means for holding saidbags to be dispensed, as required; restraining means disposed in proximitywith respect to said bags, for holding said bags in horizontal alignmentwith respect to said supply of material being inserted therein; drivemeans for positioning said support means to allow for the withdrawal ofsaid bags from said stack; cam means for advancing said support means intohorizontal alignment with product flow after a product inserted bag hasbeen removed from said stack; and means for advancing a fresh stack ofpackaging material into said packaging station as the last of said bags isutilized.2. A packaging apparatus for receiving and packing a supply of material,such as baked goods into individual bags taken from a stack of bagsdispensed from a bag supply means including: conveying means for conveyingsaid material into a packaging station; means for causing said bag topartially open; engaging means for entering and engaging said bags forreceiving said material to be packaged, being defined by a pair ofcooperatively acting guide means having elongated body portions forentering into partially opened bags to form a passage area for material tobe advanced therethrough and into the package interior; said body portionsemploying upper and lower elements enabling said engaging means to begenerally moved both vertically and horizontally; linkage means forpivotally advancing said elongated body portions to initially converge andsubsequently diverge; toggle linkage means connecting said upper and lowerelements for defining a line of motion by said elements; biasing meansconnected to each of said body portions for maintaining such portionbiased towards the expanded state as said material is caused to enter andfill said package; advancing means for advancing said material throughsaid engaging means into the interior of said bags for sealing; meanssensing the successive utilization of bags from said stack to therebyadvance fresh packaging material as said bags are being used; and drivemeans for advancing a fresh stack of packaging material into saidpackaging station as the last of said bags is used."}
{"WKU":"039303535","Title":"Apparatus for closing and sealing containers with a lid","App_Date":"1974-04-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hans Beckers","Assignee":"Robert Bosch G.m.b.H.","ICL_Class":"B65B  728","References":"891511;1860954;3060652;3511025;3752387","Claims":"I claim:1. In an apparatus for closing and sealing filled containers with lidswhich apparatus includes a sealing die having suction means for producingat least a partial vacuum within the sealing die and an underside surfaceagainst which a lid is temporarily held by the suction and finally joinedto a container under the influence of heat and pressure, means forpositioning an individual lid beneath the sealing die adjacent theunderside surface and into the effective range of the suction therebyproducing a displacement of the lid toward the underside surface, theimprovement comprising a plurality of protuberances mounted to theunderside surface of the sealing die for jointly, stationarily positioninga lid on said underside surface prior to sealing and during thedisplacement of the lid toward the underside surface due to the suction,each of said protuberances having an oblique surface, and each obliquesurface having a point lying nearest a sealing surface defining an area ofsaid underside surface, which area is substantially equal to that of alid, whereby edges of a lid may contact the oblique surfaces and becomecorrectly positioned on a respective container and become fused therewith.2. An arrangement as defined in claim 1, wherein each of said protuberanceshas a substantially conical form.3. An arrangement as defined in claim 2, wherein each of said protuberancesis formed respectively by a threaded stud screwed into said sealing die.4. An arrangement as defined in claim 1, wherein each of said protuberanceshas a frusto-conical form.5. An arrangement as defined in claim 4, wherein each of said protuberancesis formed respectively by a threaded stud screwed into said sealing die.6. An arrangement as defined in claim 1, wherein each of said protuberanceshas a substantially conical form.7. An arrangement as defined in claim 6, wherein each of said protuberancesis formed respectively by a threaded stud screwed into said sealing die.8. An arrangement as defined in claim 1, wherein each of said protuberanceshas a frusto-conical form.9. An arrangement as defined in claim 8, wherein each of said protuberancesis formed respectively by a threaded stud screwed into said sealing die."}
{"WKU":"039303543","Title":"Harvesting device in particular for an ensilaging machine","App_Date":"1974-02-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Antoine Borderie","Assignee":"Societe Rivierre-Casalis","ICL_Class":"A01D 4502","References":"322459;1239685;2009784;3075339;3654752","Claims":"Having now described my invention what I claim as new and desire to secureby Letters Patent is:1. In a harvesting device, particularly for use with a corn ensilagingmachine, said device including a treating apparatus; at least one gathererdevice formed by a pair of spaced dividers providing therebetween apassageway; a cutting mechanism for severing planted stalks in saidpassageway; and a pair of advancing devices, one in each of said dividers,for transferring severed stalks to said treating apparatus; theimprovement wherein:each said advancing device comprising a first rear shaft and a second frontshaft, said front shaft being forwardly and upwardly inclined relative tothe direction of movement of said harvesting device, the front shafts ofsaid pair of advancing devices being parallel, a sprocket wheel mounted oneach said front and rear shaft, and an endless chain extending around thesprocket wheels on said front and rear shafts;said cutting mechanism comprising a pair of rotary cutters, one each fixedto the lower end of one of said front shafts, said pair of rotary cuttersbeing contained in the same plane and being rotatable in oppositedirections;said improvement further comprising:"}
{"WKU":"039303551","Title":"Melon harvester","App_Date":"1974-11-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Herbert C. Bonham","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A01D 5100","References":"3292806;3331197;3698169","Claims":"I claim as my invention:1. In an apparatus for picking up melons lying on the ground, thecombination of:a. a frame;b. wheeled means for supporting said frame;c. an upwardly and rearwardly sloping ramp carried by said frame and upwhich melons are adapted to be rolled, the front end of said ramp beingsubstantially at ground level;d. means for rolling the melons up said ramp, comprising laterally spaced,coaxial tires mounted on said frame above said ramp for rotation about atransverse horizontal axis, the lowermost portions of said tires beingspaced above said ramp and being above ground level and being engageablewith the melons on the ground;e. drive means on said frame for driving said tires in a direction to causethem to roll the melons toward the front end of and up said ramp; andf. melon receiving means at the rear end of said ramp.2. An apparatus according to claim 1 wherein said ramp is curvedsubstantially about the axis of rotation of said tires in the fore-and-aftdirection.3. An apparatus according to claim 2 including laterally spaced, forwardlyand outwardly extending guides projecting forwardly from said ramp forguiding the melons to the front end of said ramp.4. An apparatus as defined in claim 2 wherein said tires project forwardlyof the front end of said ramp so as to engage the melons on the ground,and start them rolling rearwardly, before such melons engage the front endof said ramp.5. An apparatus as set forth in claim 4 wherein the front end of said rampis approximately directly below the axis of rotation of said tires.6. An apparatus as set forth in claim 2 wherein said melon receiving meanscomprises a transverse conveyor onto which the melons are rolled from therear end of said ramp by said tires."}
{"WKU":"039303560","Title":"Method and apparatus for influencing the ambient conditions during","App_Date":"1971-12-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ernst Nagel","Assignee":"Luwa AG","ICL_Class":"D01H  112;D01H 1328","References":"2352206;2733001;3149819;3457716;3557542;3604194","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method for influencing the ambient conditions prevailing at thespinning location during open-end spinning, comprising the steps ofdelivering fibers by means of a conveying air stream to a spinning rotor,spinning the fibers into a yarn at such rotor, cooling the rotor bysimultaneously delivering to the spinning rotor a flowing cooling airstream which is separate from the conveying air stream for the fibers, andproviding separate and independent flow paths at least at the region ofthe rotor for the conveying air stream and cooling air streamrespectively, in order to control the climatic conditions at whichspinning of the fibers occurs, to thereby minimize rupture of the spunyarn.2. The method as defined in claim 1, further including the step of usingartificially conditioned air to form the conveying air stream for thefibers.3. The method as defined in claim 1, including the step of removing heatproduced by friction from the spinning rotor by the cooling thereof.4. An apparatus for influencing the ambient conditions of open-end spinningequipment, comprising a spinning rotor for spinning fibers deliveredthereto by means of a conveying air stream, means for delivering fibers bymeans of a conveying air stream to one side of the spinning rotor, meansproviding at least one outlet opening at the spinning rotor for theconveying air stream, means providing a compartment for the side of saidspinning rotor which is not impinged by the conveying air stream for thefibers, said compartment being provided with at least one inflow openingand at least one outflow opening for cooling air for cooling of saidspinning rotor, an air conveying mechanism, said inflow opening for thecooling air being different than said outlet opening for the conveying airstream, and means for connecting said outflow opening with said airconveying mechanism.5. The apparatus as defined in claim 4, wherein said air conveyingmechanism constitutes a component of an air-conditioning unit, saidair-conditioning unit having a suction side, and said connecting meanscomprising a conduit for connecting said suction side of saidair-conditioning unit with said compartment.6. The apparatus as defined in claim 5, further including bearing means forsaid spinning rotor, said compartment housing said bearing means of saidspinning rotor.7. The apparatus as defined in claim 5, further including a separationmechanism provided for said spinning rotor, and means operativelyconnecting the suction side of said airconditioning unit with saidseparation mechanism.8. The apparatus as defined in claim 7, further including blower airconduit means for connecting said air-conditioning unit with saidseparation mechanism for delivering artificially conditioned air to thelatter.9. An apparatus for influencing the ambient conditions of open-end spinningequipment, comprising a spinning rotor for spinning fibers deliveredthereto by means of a conveying air stream, means for delivering fibers bymeans of a conveying air stream to one side of the spinning rotor, meansproviding a compartment for the side of said spinning rotor which is notimpinged by the conveying air stream for the fibers, said compartmentbeing provided with at least one inflow opening and at least one outflowopening for cooling air for cooling of said spinning rotor, an airconveying mechanism, means for connecting said outflow opening with saidair conveying mechanism, said air conveying mechanism constitutes acomponent of an air-conditioning unit, said air-conditioning unit having asuction side, said connecting means comprising a conduit for connectingsaid suction side of said air-conditioning unit with said compartment,means defining an additional compartment communicating with the interiorof said spinning rotor, and means for connecting said additionalcompartment with said conduit which connects said compartment for thenon-impinged side of said spinning rotor with said air conveyingmechanism.10. A method for influencing the ambient conditions prevailing at thespinning location during open-end spinning comprises the steps ofdelivering fibers by means of an artificially conditioned conveying airstream to a spinning rotor, spinning the fibers into a yarn at such rotor,cooling the rotor by simultaneously delivering to the spinning rotor aflowing cooling air stream which is separate from the conveying air streamfor the fibers.11. A method for influencing the ambient conditions prevailing at thespinning location during open-end spinning, comprising the steps ofdelivering fibers by means of a conveying air stream to a spinning rotor,spinning the fibers into a yarn at such rotor, cooling the rotor bysimultaneously delivering to the spinning rotor a flowing cooling airstream which is separate from the conveying air stream for the fibers.12. In an apparatus for open-end spinning, comprising: a housing; aspinning chamber defined within the housing; a power driven rotor withinthe chamber; a feeder channel for feeding discrete fibers to the interiorof the rotor by means of a current of air; a fiber receiving groove in theinterior of the rotor; a thread evacuation channel for conducting twistedthread from the fiber groove out of the spinning chamber; and at least oneair passage in the rotor connecting the interior of the rotor with anadjoining area of the spinning chamber; the chamber having at least oneair outlet opening, the improvement wherein the at least one air outletopening, through which air flowing into the interior of the rotor leavesthe spinning chamber, is connected to an air suction device by at leastone air channel, and wherein the wall of the spinning chamber defined bythe housing is provided with at least one bypass inlet opening."}
{"WKU":"039303578","Title":"Recovery of filling yarns in a fabric woven on a double pick needle loom","App_Date":"1975-01-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kirkland H. Gibson","Assignee":"H. G. P. Corporation","ICL_Class":"D04B 1900;D02G  300","References":"3263410;3605225","Claims":"I claim:1. The method of removing and packaging the filling yarn from a fabricwoven on a double pick needle loom and said filling having a change offlow rate as drawn from the fabric comprising, taking up the filling yarnon a bobbin, rotating the bobbin, interposing between the fabric and thebobbin takeup, a ring and traveler through which traveler the yarn extendsto the bobbin, guiding the yarn to the traveler and traversing the yarn onthe bobbin whereby the traveler serves as a compensator for the change inflow rate of the filling yarn as drawn from the fabric.2. The method of claim 1 wherein the yarn moves between the point ofremoval from the fabric and the bobbin takeup free from being gripped andrestrained.3. The method of claim 1 wherein the bobbin is rotating faster than thewinding rate of the yarn therein.4. The method of claim 1 wherein the bobbin is rotating faster than thewinding rate of the yarn thereon and the revolutions beyond the windingrate results in twist of the yarn.5. The method of claim 1 wherein the yarn balloons between the traveler andthe guide of the yarn thereto."}
{"WKU":"039303586","Title":"Alarm clock timer","App_Date":"1974-06-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert L. Boyles","Assignee":"General Electric Company","ICL_Class":"G04C 2116","References":"2977433;3100961;3708973","Claims":"What I claim is:1. An alarm clock mechanism comprising:a. a timing mechanism;b. a supporting structure;c. an audible alarm vibrator mounted on said supporting structure foroperation by said timing mechanism;d. a switch mounted on said supporting structure for operation by saidtiming mechanism;e. an alarm vibrator control lever mounted on said supporting structure andmovable into engagement with said audible alarm vibrator for shutting offthe alarm;f. a switch control lever mounted on said supporting structure;g. a manually operable selector cam mounted on said supporting structureand movable into engagement with said alarm vibrator control lever andsaid switch control lever for selectively controlling operation of saidaudible alarm vibrator and said switch, said selector cam including anintegrally formed longitudinally variable cam surface movable intoengagement with said switch control lever for moving said switch controllever for holding the switch in an open position and said selector camincluding a second integrally formed radially variable cam surface movableinto engagement with said alarm vibrator control lever for holding theaudible alarm vibrator in an off position, said selector cam being movableto any one of a plurality of positions for controlling the operation ofsaid audible alarm vibrator and said switch, said selector cam memberbeing movable into one position wherein its integrally formed cam surfacesfor controlling operation of the alarm vibrator control lever and theswitch control lever holds both of these levers in an off position toprevent actuation of the audible alarm vibrator and to hold the switchcontrol lever in an off position to prevent actuation of the switch, saidselector cam being rotatable to another position wherein its integrallyformed cam surface which is movable into engagement with the switchcontrol lever is removed from the switch control lever to enable theswitch to be automatically operated by the timing mechanism at an alarmtime but wherein the integrally formed cam which is movable intoengagement with the alarm control lever is retained in engagement with thealarm control lever for preventing automatic operation of the alarmvibrator by the timing mechanism at the alarm time.2. An alarmm clock timer mechanism as defined in claim 1 wherein thelongitudinally variable cam for controlling said switch control lever isintegrally formed on said selector cam for moving the switch control leverrearwardly to prevent operation of the said switch and wherein theradially variable cam which is integrally formed on said selector cam foroperating the alarm control lever is positioned for engagement with saidalarm control lever to move said alarm control lever toward one side ofthe timer to prevent actuation of said audible alarm vibrator.3. An alarm clock mechanism as defined in claim 1 wherein said alarmcontrol lever is formed as an elongated lever having a central portion andtwo end portions and said alarm control mechanism also includes:a. spring means connected to said elongated alarm control lever for urgingthe lever to a first alarm position;b. a latch integrally formed on said alarm control lever for holding saidalarm control lever in the other alarm position;c. said alarm control lever being mounted for longitudinal movement to movesaid alarm vibrator member to an alarm sounding position or an alarm offposition, said alarm control lever being mounted for tilting movement andsaid alarm control lever being mounted for transverse movement;d. a first cam means driven by said timing mechanism in selectiveengagement with an end portion of said alarm control lever for moving saidlever transversely at a preset time to disengage said latch to permit saidelongated alarm control lever to move longitudinally under the force ofsaid spring means to move said member to said first alarm position at apreset time; ande. a second cam means driven by said timing mechanism in selectiveengagement with the central portion of said alarm control lever forpermitting said alarm control lever to be tilted into engagement with saidfirst cam means a short time prior to said preset time.4. An alarm clock switch timer mechanism comprising:a. a timing mechanism;b. a supporting structure;c. an audible alarm vibrator mounted on said supporting structure foroperation by said timing mechanism;d. a switch mounted on said supporting structure for operation by saidtiming mechanism;e. an alarm vibrator control lever mounted on said supporting structure andmovable into engagement with said audible alarm vibrator for shutting offthe alarm;f. a switch control lever mounted on said supporting structure;g. a first cam means driven by said timing mechanism in selectiveengagement with said alarm vibrator control lever for moving said alarmvibrator control lever to permit the vibrator to sound at a predeterminedalarm vibrator time;h. a second cam means driven by said timing mechanism in selectiveengagement with the alarm vibrator control lever for permitting the alarmvibrator control lever to be moved into engagement with said first cammeans a short time prior to said predetermined alarm vibrator time, saidsecond cam means being in engagement with said switch control lever formoving said switch to a closed position when said second cam means movesthe vibrator control lever into engagement with the first cam means tothereby close the switch at the commencement of the actuating movement ofthe alarm vibrator control lever by said first cam means; andi. a manually operable selector cam positioned adjacent to said vibratorcontrol lever and said switch control lever for actuating the switchcontrol lever and the alarm control lever to shut off the alarm and openthe switch, for actuating the vibrator control and switch control leversto be closed at some predetermined time and to permit the vibrator tosound a short predetermined time thereafter, and for actuating thevibrator control and switch control levers to permit the switch to beclosed at some predetermined time and to prevent the vibrator fromsounding.5. An alarm clock switch timer mechanism as defined in claim 4 wherein themanually operable selector cam includes a forwardly extending cam surfacefor moving said vibrator control lever radially away from the axis of saidselector cam to shut off the audible alarm vibrator, and said selector camincludes an arcuate cam surface for moving the switch control leverrearwardly to open the switch."}
{"WKU":"039303594","Title":"Digital cooking timer means having concentric time indicator disc and","App_Date":"1973-08-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Paul T. Flumm;Vernon B. Harris","Assignee":"Robertshaw Controls Company","ICL_Class":"G04F  304;H01H 4304","References":"2633696;3566599;3610753;3857234","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a range timer having a cooking hours timer means for providing anautomatic cooking operation of a cooking apparatus for a time periodselected by setting setting means of said timer means at a selected periodof cooking time of said timer means, the improvement wherein said cookinghours timer means has digital reading means for indicating the set periodof time thereof, said reading means comprising two concentrically disposeddifferent sized discs having time indicating indicia on the outerperipheries thereof, the smaller of said discs having said time indicatingindicia thereof providing hours and the larger of said discs having saidtime indicating indicia providing minutes, said range timer having awindow for exposing adjacent parts of said outer peripheries of said discswhereby the exposed indicia at said window provides said selected periodof cooking time, one of said discs having a part thereof indicating a manual  setting of said timer means, said part that indicates said manual  setting being viewable at said window when said timer means isset in said  manual  position thereof.2. In a range timer as set forth in claim 1, said part indicating said manual  setting of said timer means completely filling said window whensaid timer means is set in said  manual  position thereof.3. In a range timer as set forth in claim 2, said part indicating said manual  setting of said timer means being carried by the smaller of saiddiscs."}
{"WKU":"039303608","Title":"Alarm clock timer","App_Date":"1974-06-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert L. Boyles","Assignee":"General Electric Company","ICL_Class":"G04B 1300","References":"3004380;3308617;3382665;3387452","Claims":"What I claim is:1. A repeat alarm clock mechanism comprising:a. a timing mechanism;b. a supporting structure;c. an alarm vibrator member for sounding an alarm connected to saidsupporting structure;d. a vibrator shutoff lever having an alarm on position out of engagementwith said vibrator member and an alarm off position in engagement withsaid vibrator member;e. a pivot tab integrally formed with said vibrator shutoff lever formounting said vibrator shutoff lever for pivotal and longitudinal movementon said supporting structure;f. spring means connected to said vibrator shutoff lever for urging saidlever to an alarm on position;g. a latch integrally formed on said vibrator shutoff lever for holding thevibrator shutoff lever in the alarm off position;h. means driven by the timing mechanism in selective engagement with aportion of the vibrator shutoff lever for moving the lever to disengagesaid latch to permit the vibrator shutoff lever to move longitudinallyunder the force of said spring means to permit the alarm to sound; andi. a repeat alarm lever mounted on said supporting structure, said repeatalarm lever being manually movable into engagement with said pivot tab formoving the vibrator shutoff lever against the force of said spring meansto reset said latch to thereby hold the alarm shutoff lever in the alarmoff position for a predetermined short time interval.2. A repeat alarm clock mechanism comprising:a. a timing mechanism;b. a supporting structure;c. a member for sounding an alarm connected to said supporting structureand movable to an alarm on position or an alarm off position;d. an alarm control lever mounted on said supporting structure and movableinto engagement with said member for shutting off the alarm;e. a pivot tab integrally formed with said alarm control lever for mountingsaid alarm control lever for movement on said supporting structure;f. means driven by the timing mechanism in engagement with a portion of thealarm control lever for moving the lever to permit the alarm to sound;g. a repeat alarm lever pivotally mounted on said supporting structure,said repeat alarm lever being movable into engagement with said pivot tabfor moving the alarm control lever to the alarm off position; andh. said means driven by said timing mechanism being positioned for movingthe alarm control lever to an alarm sounding position after it has beenmoved to the alarm off position by said repeat alarm lever.3. An alarm clock mechanism comprising:a. a timing mechanism;b. a supporting structure;c. a member for sounding an alarm connected to said supporting structureand movable to an alarm on and an alarm off position;d. an elongated alarm control lever mounted on said supporting structureand movable into engagement with said member for shutting off the alarm,said elongated alarm control lever having a central portion and two endportions;e. spring means connected to said elongated alarm control lever for urgingsaid lever to a first alarm position;f. a latch integrally formed on said alarm control lever for holding saidalarm control lever in the other alarm position;g. said alarm control lever being mounted for longitudinal movement to movesaid member to an alarm sounding position or an alarm off position, saidalarm control lever being mounted for tilting movement, and said alarmcontrol lever being mounted for transverse movement;h. a first cam means driven by said timing mechanism in selectiveengagement with an end portion of said alarm control lever for moving saidlever transversely at a preset time to disengage said latch to permit saidelongated alarm control lever to move longitudinally under the force ofsaid spring means to move said member to said first alarm position at apreset time;i. a second cam means driven by said timing mechanism in selectiveengagement with the central portion of said alarm control lever fortilting said alarm control lever into engagement with said first cam meansa short time prior to said preset time; andj. a rearwardly extending pivot tab integrally formed with said elongatedalarm control lever, said tab extending through a slot which is formed ina base plate of said supporting structure and said tab being positionedfor engagement with a repeat alarm lever for moving the elongated alarmcontrol lever longitudinally to reset the latch to thereby prevent thealarm from sounding for a short time interval.4. A repeat alarm clock mechanism comprising:a. a timing mechanism;b. a supporting structure;c. a member for sounding an alarm connected to said supporting structureand movable to an alarm on position or an alarm off position;d. an alarm control lever mounted on said supporting structure and movableinto engagement with said member for shutting off the alarm;e. a pivot tab integrally formed with said alarm control lever for mountingsaid alarm control lever for movement on said supporting structure;f. means driven by the timing mechanism in engagement with a portion of thealarm control lever for moving the lever to permit the alarm to sound;g. a repeat alarm lever pivotally mounted on said supporting structure,said repeat alarm lever being manually movable into engagement with saidpivot tab for moving the alarm control lever to the alarm off position;andh. spring means connected to said repeat alarm lever for moving said repeatalarm lever out of engagement with said pivot tab for permitting saidmeans driven by said timing mechanism to move the alarm control lever toan alarm sounding position."}
{"WKU":"039303616","Title":"Slip wheel structure of a watch movement","App_Date":"1974-10-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Mituo Saito;Goro Ishikawa;Hidetaka Tutiya","Assignee":"Citizen Watch Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"G04B 2700;G04B 1302","References":"","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property orprivelege is claimed are as follows:1. A timepiece provided with a slip arrangement, comprising an arbor formedwith a tapered portion, a pinion, a tubular portion having an elastic boreportion and integral with the pinion and at least an inwardly projectingprojection on said tubular portion, said arbor being inserted into saidtubular portion, said tapered portion and said projection being inresilient engagement with each other, so that said arbor and said tubularportion are thereby maintained in frictionally rotatable relationship witheach other, the elastic bore portion of said tubular portion having adiameter larger than the largest diameter measured at a forward part ofthe arbor from said tapered portion, said inward projection beingpositioned within the area of said elastic bore portion.2. The timepiece as claimed in claim 1 in which said tapered portion isdefined by a double-tapered portion."}
{"WKU":"039303624","Title":"Means for developing friction in clock setting shaft","App_Date":"1975-03-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Edward F. Cielaszyk","Assignee":"General Time Corporation","ICL_Class":"G04B 2700;F16D  702","References":"2814188;3443375;3487633;3548587","Claims":"What I claim is:1. In a clock having minute and hour hands with interposed gear reduction,the combination comprising a timed driving train having a centerwheel andsource of driving torque, a minute hand shaft telescoped through thecenterwheel, said centerwheel being formed of molded plastic and having ahub providing an extensive cylindrical inner surface in contact with theshaft, the diameter of the inner surface, prior to telescoping, beingslightly less than the diameter of the shaft so that friction torque isdeveloped between the shaft and the wheel for normal driving of the shaftbut with the shaft being forcibly rotatable to overcome the frictiontorque for setting of the hands, the shaft having an annular grooveextending over a minor portion of the length of the hub and into which theplastic relaxes and flows after the centerwheel is located in a desiredaxial position thereby to maintain the centerwheel in such axial position.2. The combination as claimed in claim 1 in which the centerwheel and hubare molded integrally so that when the shaft is telescoped into thecenterwheel an inwardly directed restoring force is created in thecenterwheel, the groove in the shaft being in substantial planar alinementwith the centerwheel so that the restoring force tends to crowd some ofthe plastic of the hub into the groove.3. In a clock having minute and hour hands with interposed gear reduction,the combination comprising a timed driving train having a centerwheel andsource of driving torque, a minute hand shaft telescoped through thecenterwheel, said centerwheel being formed of molded plastic and having ahub providing an extensive cylindrical inner surface in contact with theshaft, the diameter of the inner surface, prior to telescoping, beingslightly less than the diameter of the shaft so that friction torque isdeveloped between the shaft and the wheel for normal driving of the shaftbut with the shaft being forcibly rotatable to overcome the frictiontorque for setting of the hands, an annular shoulder surrounding theshaft, the shaft having a narrow annular groove spaced a short distancefrom the shoulder and generally alined with the centerwheel when thecenterwheel is telescoped into operating position against the shoulder, inwhich position the plastic adjacent the groove, forced inwardly by therestoring force of the plastic in the wheel, flows into the groove to forman internal ridge registering with the groove thereby to maintain thecenterwheel in its operating position adjacent the shoulder.4. The combination as claimed in claim 3 in which the shoulder is in theform of a pinion tightly telescoped over the shaft in fixed position, thepinion forming an element of the gear reduction between the minute andhour hands.5. In a clock having minute and hour hands, the combination comprising apair of spaced frame plates, a minute hand shaft journaled in the frameplates, the minute hand shaft carrying the minute hand at one end andhaving a manually accessible setting knob at the other end, a timeddriving train having a centerwheel and source of driving torque, thecenterwheel being telescoped over the minute hand shaft into a workingposition between the frame plates, said centerwheel being formed of moldedplastic and having an integral hub providing an extensive cylindricalinner surface in contact with the shaft, the minimum diameter of the innersurface, prior to telescoping, being slightly less than the diameter ofthe shaft so that friction torque is developed between the shaft and thewheel for normal driving of the shaft, but with the shaft being forciblyrotatable by the setting knob to overcome the friction torque for settingof the hands, the shaft having an annular groove extending over a minorportion of the length of the hub and into which the plastic relaxes andflows after the centerwheel is located in its desired axial workingposition thereby to maintain the centerwheel in such axial position duringthe life of the clock, and means for blocking the minute hand shaftagainst axial movement in either direction with respect to the frameplates, thereby precluding dislodgement of the centerwheel by shearing ofthe plastic in the groove upon either pulling or pushing upon the settingknob.6. The combination as claimed in claim 5 in which the means for blockingthe minute hand shaft against axial movement is in the form of outwardlyfacing shoulders on the shaft.7. In a clock having minute and hour hands with interposed gear reduction,the combination comprising a timed driving train having a centerwheel andsource of driving torque, a minute hand shaft telescoped through thecenterwheel, said centerwheel being formed of molded plastic and having anintegral hub providing a cylindrical inner surface in contact with theshaft, the diameter of the inner surface, prior to telescoping, beingslightly less than the maximum diameter of the shaft so that frictiontorque is developed between the shaft and the wheel for normal driving ofthe shaft but with the shaft being forcibly rotatable to overcome thefriction torque for setting of the hands, means defining an annularshoulder surrounding the shaft, the shaft being formed to define with thecenterwheel, as a result of flow of the plastic of the centerwheel, anarrow annular ridge-and-groove engagement spaced a short distance fromthe shoulder and generally alined with the centerwheel when thecenterwheel is telescoped into operating position against the shoulder,the ridge-and-groove engagement serving to key the parts against relativeaxial movement as the shaft is forcibly rotated for setting purposesthereby to maintain the centerwheel in its operating position adjacent theshoulder.8. The combination as claimed in claim 7 in which the shaft has a shallowannular bead forming a ridge thereon and in which the mating groove isformed by the flow of the plastic in the plastic centerwheel inaccommodation of the bead.9. In a clock having minute and hour hands with interposed gear reductionthe combination comprising a pair of spaced frame plates, a minute handshaft journaled in the frame plates, the minute hand shaft carrying theminute hand at one end and having a manually accessible setting knob atthe other end, a timed driving train having a centerwheel and source ofdriving torque, the centerwheel being telescoped over the minute handshaft into a working position between the frame plates, said centerwheelbeing formed of molded plastic and having an integral hub providing aninner surface in contact with the shaft, the diameter of the innersurface, prior to telescoping, being slightly less than the maximumdiameter of the shaft so that friction troque is developed between theshaft and the wheel for normal driving of the shaft but with the shaftbeing forcibly rotatable by the setting knob to overcome the frictiontorque for setting of the hands, the shaft having a shoulder which abutsthe centerwheel and against which the wheel is bottomed incident toassembly to define the working position of the centerwheel, the shaftfurther having an annular locating means cooperating with the hub forinhibiting axial movement of the centerwheel away from its workingposition, and means for blocking the minute hand shaft against axialmovement in either direction with respect to the frame plates, therebyprecluding dislodgement of the centerwheel with respect to the shaft uponeither pulling or pushing upon the setting knob."}
{"WKU":"039303632","Title":"Parking meter","App_Date":"1974-07-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Burrell R. Rubenstein","Assignee":"Burrell R. Rubenstein","ICL_Class":"G04C  130;G08G  114","References":"3166732;3183411;3300771;3535870;3616644","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A parking meter comprising:counting means comprising;"}
{"WKU":"039303640","Title":"Bracelet primarily for a watch","App_Date":"1974-07-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kwong Wong","Assignee":"Universal Manufacturing Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"F16G 1514","References":"2480015;3195301;3425214;3609963","Claims":"I claim:1. A bracelet link having at each end thereof a pair of aligned sockets forreceiving hinge projections which sockets face opposite side edges of thelink, slots opening to the sockets of one pair at the side thereof, arelease member pivotally mounted on said link, which release member ismovable into a first position in which portions of the member close offsaid slots and into a second position in which said portions are disposedaway from the slots.2. A bracelet link as claimed in claim 1, wherein said release member ismovable into and out of said first position with a snap action.3. A bracelet link as claimed in claim 1, further comprising a pivotelement connected thereto and adapted to connect the link pivotally to asimilar link, said element having at one end thereof a pair of projectionsengaging in the sockets of the other pair and having at its other end apair of projections adapted for engagement in the slotted sockets of asimilar link.4. a bracelet link as claimed in claim 3, wherein the sockets of each pairface towards each other.5. a bracelet link as claimed in claim 4, wherein the link is of sandwichconstruction comprising a shell having a face portion and, at each end ofthe face portion, a pair of tabs which are spaced from each other, and aninner plate member about which the pairs of tabs are folded and each endedge of which has a central notch wider than the distance between the tabswhereby the sockets are formed between the tabs and the outer side of theshell, the notch at one end of the plate member having a greater depththan the notch at the other end and the tabs engaging said one end of theplate member having said slots formed in their edges nearest each otherwhich slots are spaced away from the end of the link, and said releasemember being arranged so that said portions thereof are movable throughthe slots in the tabs to block, in the first position of the releasemember, movement of the projections of a pivot element out of the socketsand through the slots in the tabs.6. A bracelet link as claimed in claim 5, wherein said release member ismade from sheet metal, the metal being curved back on itself at one end ofthe release member and having projections formed at said one end thereof,whereby the projections have curved faces, the slots in the tabs havingedges which are engaged by the curved faces of the projections to providea snap action of the release member into and out of said first position.7. A bracelet link as claimed in claim 5, wherein the deeper notch in theplate member extends beyond the slotted tabs and the release member has apair of aligned pivot projections which are engaged in the deeper notchbeyond the slotted tabs and which are retained therein by the other tabsand by free end portions of the slotted tabs which are deformed upon thedeeper notch.8. A bracelet comprising a plurality of links, and pivot elements hingingthe links together, each pivot element extending between adjoining ends oftwo links and having at each end two hinge projections extending coaxiallywith each other towards opposite side edges of the bracelet and each ofthe two links joined by the pivot element having at its end adjacent theother link respective sockets into which the two hinge projections at theadjoining end of the element project, at least one of the links in thebracelet having slots which open to the sockets at one end thereof at theside of the sockets and a release member pivotally mounted on said onelink and movable into a first position in which poritions of the memberare engaged in the slots and close off said sockets and into a secondposition in which said portions are disposed away from the slots enablingthe projections to be disengaged from the sockets.9. A bracelet as claimed in claim 8, wherein said one link has its socketsof each pair facing towards each other.10. a bracelet as claimed in claim 9, wherein said one link is of sandwichconstruction comprising a shell having a face portion and, at each end ofthe face portion, a pair of tabs which are spaced from each other, and aninner plate member about which the pairs of tabs are folded and each endedge of which has a central notch wider than the distance between the tabswhereby the sockets are formed between the tabs and the outer side of theshell, the central notch at one end of the plate member having a greaterdepth than the notch at the other end and the tabs engaging said one endof the plate member having said slots formed in their edges nearest eachother which slots are spaced away from the end of the link, and saidrelease member being arranged so that said portions thereof are movablethrough the slots in the tabs to block, in the first position of therelease member, movement of the projections of a pivot element out of thesockets and through the slots in the tabs.11. A bracelet as claimed in claim 10, wherein said release member is madefrom sheet metal, the metal being curved back on itself at one end of therelease member and having projections formed at said one end thereof,whereby the projections have curved faces, the slots in the tabs havingedges which are engaged by the curved faces of the projections to providea snap action of the release member into and out of said first position.12. A bracelet as claimed in claim 10, wherein the deeper notch in theplate member extends beyond the slotted tabs and the release member has apair of aligned pivot projections which are engaged in the deeper notchbeyond the slotted tabs and which are retained therein by the other tabsand by free end portions of the slotted tabs which are deformed upon thedeeper notch."}
{"WKU":"039303659","Title":"Fuel control system for gas turbine engine","App_Date":"1974-07-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Trevor Stanley Smith","Assignee":"Joseph Lucas (Industries) Limited","ICL_Class":"F02C  726","References":"3173468;3427804;3514947;3530666;3557552;3768249","Claims":"I claim:1. A fuel control system for a gas turbine engine, comprising a variablemetering arrangement including a flow control element which is movable inresponse to engine operating parameters to control fuel flow to theengine, a stop co-acting with said control element to limit movementthereof in a direction to reduce fuel flow, said stop being movablebetween first and second limiting positions, and a manually operableselector device for moving said stop to said first position for normalrunning of the engine and to said second position for engine starting,said second position corresponding to a smaller minimum flow through saidmetering arrangement than said first position.2. A system as claimed in claim 1 in which said selector device comprises acam co-acting with said stop and movable to urge the latter to said firstand second positions.3. A system as claimed in claim 1 in which said control element comprises asleeve movable in response to an increase in the delivery pressure of acompressor of the engine to increase fuel flow.4. A system as claimed in claim 1 which includes a shut-off valvedownstream of said metering arrangement, said selector device beingoperable in one of its positions to shut said shut-off valve, and in twoothers of its positions to move said stop to its first and secondpositions respectively."}
{"WKU":"039303667","Title":"Helicopter power plant control","App_Date":"1974-07-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert E. Nelson","Assignee":"General Motors Corporation","ICL_Class":"F02C  908","References":"3159000;3174284;3533236","Claims":"I claim:1. A control system for a power plant including a plural number of gasturbine engines connected to drive a common variable load comprising, incombination,main power control means including a condition control settable by anoperator providing a power output level command signal, a load controlproviding a power output required signal, a fuel control for each engineoperative to control fuel flow to the respective engine, and meansgenerating a weighted sum of the said signals effective to varyconcurrently the power setting of the fuel controls;load sharing means including means responsive to a condition indicative ofthe power output of each engine generating an engine power signal,comparing means effective to determine the maximum one of the said powersignals, means operative to determine a power error signal for each enginerepresenting the difference between the maximum power signal and the powersignal of the said engine, power trim means coupled to each fuel controleffective to modify the power setting of the fuel control, and meansresponsive to the power error signal of each engine coupled to the powertrim means of the respective engine so as to increase the power output ofeach engine other than that generating the maximum power signal toeliminate the power error signal;and governing means including means providing a load speed command signal,means responsive to load speed, means operative to provide a load speederror signal, and means responsive to the load speed error signal coupledto the power trim means of all engines so as to reset all the fuelcontrols in the direction to eliminate the load speed error signal.2. A control system for a power plant including a plural number of gasturbine engines connected to drive a common variable load comprising, incombination,main power control means including a condition control settable by anoperator providing a power output level command signal, a load controlproviding a power output required signal, a fuel control for each engineoperative to control fuel flow to the respective engine, and meansgenerating a weighted sum of the said signals effective to varyconcurrently the power setting of the fuel controls;load sharing means including means responsive to a condition indicative ofthe power output of each engine generating an engine power signal,comparing means effective to determine the maximum one of the said powersignals, means operative to determine a power error signal for each enginerepresenting the difference between the maximum power signal and the powersignal of the said engine, power trim means coupled to each fuel controleffective to modify the power setting of the fuel control, meansresponsive to the power error signal of each engine coupled to the powertrim means of the respective engine so as to increase the power output ofeach engine other than that generating the maximum power signal toeliminate the power error signal, and means effective to disable the loadsharing means below a predetermined engine speed level,and governing means including means providing a load speed command signal,means responsive to load speed, and means operative to provide a loadspeed error signal, means responsive to the load speed error signalcoupled to the power trim means of all engines so as to reset all the fuelcontrols in the direction to eliminate the load speed error signal, andmeans effective to disable the governing means below a predetermined valueof load speed.3. A control system for a power plant including a plural number of gasturbine engines connected to drive a common variable load comprising, incombination,main power control means including a condition control settable by anoperator providing a power output level command signal, a load controlproviding a power output required signal, a fuel control for each engineoperative to control fuel flow to the respective engine, and meansgenerating a weighted sum of the said signals effective to varyconcurrently the power setting of the fuel controls;load sharing means including means responsive to a condition indicative ofthe power output of each engine generating an engine power signal,comparing means effective to determine the maximum one of the said powersignals, means operative to determine a power error signal for each enginerepresenting the difference between the maximum power signal and the powersignal of the said engine, power trim means coupled to each fuel controleffective to modify the power setting of the fuel control, meansresponsive to the power error signal of each engine coupled to the powertrim means of the respective engine so as to increase the power output ofeach engine other than that generating the maximum power signal toeliminate the power error signal, and optionally operable means effectiveto disable the load sharing means;governing means including means providing a load speed command signal,means responsive to load speed, and means operative to provide a loadspeed error signal, means responsive to the load speed error signalcoupled to the power trim means of all engines so as to reset all the fuelcontrols in the direction to eliminate the load speed error signal, andoptionally operable means effective to disable the governing means;and optionally operable means for each engine effective to disable thepower trim means of the engine.4. A control system for a power plant including a plural number of gasturbine engines connected to drive a common variable load comprising, incombination,main power control means including a condition control settable by anoperator providing a power output level command signal, a load controlproviding a power output required signal, a fuel control for each engineoperative to control fuel to the respective engine, and means generating aweighted sum of the said signals effective to vary concurrently the powersetting of the fuel controls;load sharing means including means responsive to a condition indicative ofthe power output of each engine generating an engine power signal,comparing means effective to determine the maximum one of the said powersignals, means operative to determine a power error signal for each enginerepresenting the difference between the maximum power signal and the powersignal of the said engine, power trim means coupled to each fuel controleffective to modify the power setting of the fuel control, meansresponsive to the power error signal of each engine coupled to the powertrim means of the respective engine so as to increase the power output ofeach engine other than that generating the maximum power signal toeliminate the power error signal, means effective to disable the loadsharing means below a predetermined engine speed level, and optionallyoperable means effective to disable the load sharing means;governing means including means providing a load speed command signal,means responsive to load speed, and means operative to provide a loadspeed error signal, means responsive to the load speed error signalcoupled to the power trim means of all engines so as to reset all the fuelcontrols in the direction to eliminate the load speed error signal, meanseffective to disable the governing means below a predetermined value ofload speed, and optionally operable means effective to disable thegoverning means;an optionally operable means for each engine effective to disable the powertrim means of the engine.5. A control system for a power plant including a plural number ofgas-coupled gas turbine engines synchronously connected to drive a commonvariable load comprising, in combination,main power control means including a condition lever settable by anoperator providing a power output level command signal, a load controllever settable by an operator providing a power output required signal, agas generator governor for each engine operative to control fuel flow tothe respective engine, and means generating a weighted sum of the saidsignals effective to vary concurrently the speed setting of the governors;load sharing means including means responsive to a condition indicative ofthe power output of each engine generating an engine power signal,comparing means effective to determine the maximum one of the said powersignals, means operative to determine a power error signal for each enginerepresenting the difference between the maximum power signal and the powersignal of the said engine, governor trim means coupled to each governoreffective to modify the speed setting of the governor, means responsive tothe power error signal of each engine coupled to the governor trim meansof the respective engine so as to reset the governor of each engine otherthan that generating the maximum power signal in the direction toeliminate the power error signal, and optionally operable means effectiveto disable the load sharing means;governing means including means providing a load speed command signal,means responsive to load speed, and means operative to provide a loadspeed error signal, means responsive to the load speed error signalcoupled to the governor trim means of all engines so as to reset all thegovernors in the direction to eliminate the load speed error signal, andoptionally operable means effective to disable the governing means;and optionally operable means for each engine effective to disable thegovernor trim means of the engine.6. A control system for a power plant including a plural number ofgas-coupled gas turbine engines synchronously connected to drive a commonvariable load comprising, in combination,main power control means including a condition lever settable by anoperator providing a power output level command signal, a load controllever settable by an operator providing a power output required signal, agas generator governor for each engine operative to control fuel flow tothe respective engine, and means generating a weighted sum of the saidsignals effective to vary concurrently the speed setting of the governors;load sharing means including means responsive to a condition indicative ofthe power output of each engine generating an engine power signal,comparing means effective to determine the maximum one of the said powersignals, means operative to determine a power error signal for each enginerepresenting the difference between the maximum power signal and the powersignal of the said engine, governor trim means coupled to each governoreffective to modify the speed setting of the governor, means responsive tothe power error signal of each engine coupled to the governor trim meansof the respective engine so as to reset governor of each engine other thanthat generating the maximum power signal in the direction to eliminate thepower error signal, means effective to disable the load sharing meansbelow a predetermined engine speed level, and optionally operable meanseffective to disable the load sharing means;governing means including means providing a load speed command signal,means responsive to load speed, and means operative to provide a loadspeed error signal, means responsive to the load speed error signalcoupled to the governor trim means of all engines so as to reset all thegovernors in the direction to eliminate the load speed error signal, meanseffective to disable the governing means below a predetermined value ofload speed, and optionally operable means effective to disable thegoverning means;and optionally operable means for each engine effective to disable thegovernor trim means of the engine.7. A control system for a power plant including a plural number of gasturbine engines synchronously connected to a variable pitch lifting rotorto drive the rotor comprising, in combination,main power control means including a condition lever settable by anoperator providing a power output level command signal, a collective pitchcontrol providing a rotor collective pitch signal, a fuel control for eachengine operative to control fuel flow to the respective engine, and meansgenerating a weighted sum of the said signals effective to varyconcurrently the power setting of the fuel controls;load sharing means including means responsive to a condition indicative ofthe power output of each engine generating an engine power signal,comparing means effective to determine the maximum one of the said powersignals, means operative to determine a power error signal for each enginerepresenting the difference between the maximum power signal and the powersignal of the said engine, power trim means coupled to each fuel controleffective to modify the power setting of the fuel control, and meansresponsive to the power error signal of each engine coupled to the powertrim means of the respective engine so as to increase the power output ofeach engine other than that generating the maximum power signal in thedirection to eliminate the power error signal;and isochronous governing means including means providing a rotor speedcommand signal, means responsive to rotor speed, and means responsive tointegrated rotor speed error operative to provide a rotor speed errorsignal, means responsive to the rotor speed error signal coupled to thepower trim means of all engines so as to reset all the fuel controls inthe direction to eliminate the rotor speed error signal.8. A control system for a power plant including a plural number of gasturbine engines synchronously connected to a variable pitch lifting rotorto drive the rotor comprising, in combination,main power control means including a condition lever settable by anoperator providing a power output level command signal, a collective pitchcontrol providing a rotor collective pitch signal, a fuel control for eachengine operative to control fuel flow to the respective engine, and meansgenerating a weighted sum of the said signals effective to varyconcurrently the power setting of the fuel controls;load sharing means including means responsive to a condition indicative ofthe power output of each engine generating an engine power signal,comparing means effective to determine the maximum one of the said powersignals, means operative to determine a power error signal for each enginerepresenting the difference between the maximum power signal and the powersignal of the said engine, power trim means coupled to each fuel controleffective to modify the power setting of the fuel control, meansresponsive to the power error signal of each engine coupled to the powertrim means of the respective engine so as to increase the power output ofeach engine other than that generating the maximum power signal in thedirection to eliminate the power error signal, means effective to disablethe load sharing means below a predetermined engine speed level, andoptionally operable means effective to disable the load sharing means;isochronous governing means including means providing a rotor speed commandsignal, means responsive to rotor speed, and means responsive tointegrated rotor speed error operative to provide a rotor speed errorsignal, means responsive to the rotor speed error signal coupled to thepower trim means of all engines so as to reset all the fuel controls inthe direction to eliminate the rotor speed error signal, means effectiveto disable the isochronous governing means below a predetermined value ofrotor speed, and optionally operable means effective to disable theisochronous governing means;and optionally operable means for each engine effective to disable thepower trim means of the engine.9. A control system for a helicopter power plant including at least one gasturbine engine connected to drive a variable pitch lifting rotorcomprising, in combination,main power control means including a condition control for each enginesettable by an operator providing an engine power output level commandsignal, a rotor collective pitch control settable by an operator providinga rotor power input required signal, a governor for each engine operativeto control fuel flow to the respective engine, and means generating aweighted sum of the said signals effective to vary concurrently the speedsetting of each governor;governor trim means coupled to each governor effective to modify the speedsetting of the governor,rotor speed governing means including means providing a rotor speed commandsignal, means responsive to rotor speed, and means responsive to rotorspeed error operative to provide a rotor speed error signal, meansresponsive to the rotor speed error signal coupled to each governor trimmeans so as to reset the governor in the direction to eliminate the rotorspeed error signal,rotor acceleration control means including means effective to generate arotor speed command limit signal rising progressively as a predeterminedfunction of time; and select low gate means effective to transmit thelower one of the rotor speed command and rotor speed command limit signalsto the rotor speed error responsive means during acceleration of the rotorfrom a predetermined speed.10. A control system for a helicopter power plant including at least onegas turbine engine connected to drive a variable pitch lifting rotorcomprising, in combination,main power control means including a condition control for each enginesettable by an operator providing an engine power output level commandsignal, a rotor collective pitch control settable by an operator providinga rotor power input required signal, a governor for each engine operativeto control fuel flow to the respective engine, and means generating aweighted sum of the said signals effective to vary concurrently the speedsetting of each governor;governor trim means coupled to each governor effective to modify the speedsetting of the governor,rotor speed governing means including means providing a rotor speed commandsignal, means responsive to rotor speed, means responsive to rotor speederror operative to provide a rotor speed error signal, and meansresponsive to the rotor speed error signal coupled to each governor trimmeans so as to reset the governor in the direction to eliminate the rotorspeed error signal,rotor acceleration control means including means effective to disable eachgovernor trim means below a predetermined value of rotor speed, meansenergized in response to acceleration of rotor speed to the saidpredetermined value effective to generate a rotor speed command limitsignal rising progressively from zero as a predetermined function of time;and select low gate means effective to transmit the lower one of the rotorspeed command and rotor speed command limit signals to the rotor speederror responsive means."}
{"WKU":"039303675","Title":"Fluid flow control system","App_Date":"1974-10-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert E. Gasparoli","Assignee":"General Electric Company","ICL_Class":"F01K 2310","References":"3837167","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Apparatus for controlling the rate of fuel flow for auxiliary firing ofa steam turbine power generating system comprising:a. auxiliary firing means for receiving combustible fuel at a metered ratefor heating a steam boiler of said turbine;b. means for metering the rate of fuel flow to said auxiliary firing meansin response to a metering signal provided thereto;c. load control means for receiving power signals representative of theamount of power being provided to said load, said load control meansincluding means for providing a variable set point signal indicative ofthe amount of power to be provided to said load and generating an outputdemand signal representative of the difference between said power and setpoint signals and further being indicative of a desired rate of fuel flow;d. comparison means responsive to said demand signal and to said meteringsignal to provide an output signal when a difference exists therebetween;e. control signal generating means for generating said metering signal andfor varying the value thereof in response to said comparison means outputsignal, said control signal generating means further responsive to a rateof change signal supplied thereto to control the rate at which saidmetering signal changes; andf. means for providing said rate of change signal to said control signalgenerating means.2. The invention as recited in claim 1 wherein said metering signal is ananalog signal and varies in accordance with changes in said demand signalto control desired increased and decreased fluid flow rate limits.3. The invention as recited in claim 1 wherein said control signalgenerating means includes means for limiting the value of said meteringsignal when the difference between said demand signal and said meteringsignal is of a specified value.4. The invention as recited in claim 1 wherein said means for providingsaid rate of change signal includes means for selectively changing thevalue of said rate of change signal to change the rate of change of saidmetering signal.5. The invention as recited in claim 4 wherein said means for selectivelychanging the value of said rate of change signal comprises a variablefrequency oscillator responsive to signals from said steam turbinerepresentative of operating parameters therein to program said oscillatorto operate at predetermined frequencies.6. An apparatus for automatically controlling the rate of change of ametering signal for controlling the rate of fuel flow for a boiler servingto generate steam for powering a steam turbine generator providingelectrical power to a load comprising:a. auxiliary heating means for providing heat to said boiler, said meansincluding means in communication therewith for metering the rate of fuelflow thereto in response to said metering signal;b. means for generating said metering signal including;"}
{"WKU":"039303683","Title":"Combustion liner air valve","App_Date":"1974-12-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert D. Anderson;Daniel W. Hyden","Assignee":"General Motors Corporation","ICL_Class":"F02C  914","References":"2164954;2508288;2684573;2756040;2861419;3577878;3765171;3859787","Claims":"We claim:1. Means for controlling flow of hot gas comprising, in combination, asubstantially cylindrical body defined by a wall with ports through thewall adapted for flow of hot gas from one surface of the wall through theports to the other surface of the wall and slide valve means movablerelative to the body to vary the area of the said ports, wherein theimprovement comprises slide valve means including a movable actuating ringextending around the body overlying the surface which is upstream in thedirection of flow through the ports; a circumferential row ofpart-cylindrical valve plates disposed between the actuating ring and thebody configured to slide on the surface of the body to throttle the saidports variably; means coupling the valve plates to the actuating ring forconcurrent movement; and spring means mounted between the actuating ringand the valve plates reacting against the ring and the plates to press theplates against the body.2. Means for controlling flow of hot gas comprising, in combination, asubstantially cylindrical body defined by a wall with ports through thewall adapted for flow of hot gas from one surface of the wall through theports to the other surface of the wall and slide valve means movableaxially of the body to vary the area of the said ports, wherein theimprovement comprises slide valve means including a movable actuating ringextending around the body overlying the surface which is upstream in thedirection of flow through the ports; a circumferential row ofpart-cylindrical valve plates disposed between the actuating ring and thebody configured to slide axially on the surface of the body to throttlethe said ports variably; means coupling the valve plates to the actuatingring for concurrent movement; and leaf spring means mounted between theactuating ring and the valve plates reacting against the ring and theplates to press the plates against the body.3. Means for controlling flow of hot gas comprising, in combination, asubstantially cylindrical body defined by a wall with ports through thewall adapted for flow of hot gas from the outer surface of the wallthrough the ports to the inner surface of the wall and slide valve meansmovable axially of the body to vary the area of the said ports, whereinthe improvement comprises slide valve means including a movable actuatingring extending around the body overlying the surface which is upstream inthe direction of flow through the ports; a circumferential row ofpart-cylindrical valve plates disposed between the actuating ring and thebody configured to slide axially on the surface of the body to throttlethe said ports variably; means coupling the valve plates to the actuatingring for concurrent movement; and leaf spring means mounted between theactuating ring and the valve plates reacting against the ring and theplates to press the plates against the body.4. Means for controlling flow of hot gas comprising, in combination, asubstantially cylindrical body defined by a wall with ports through thewall adapted for flow of hot gas from one surface of the wall through theports to the other surface of the wall and slide valve means movableaxially of the body to vary the area of the said ports, wherein theimprovement comprises slide valve means including a movable actuating ringextending around the body overlying the surface which is upstream in thedirection of flow through the ports; a circumferential row ofpart-cylindrical valve plates disposed between the actuating ring and thebody configured to slide on the surface of the body to throttle the saidports variably; tabs extending from the valve plates past the edges of theactuating ring coupling the valve plates to the actuating ring forconcurrent movement; and leaf spring means mounted between the actuatingring and the valve plates reacting against the ring and the plates topress the plates against the body; the tab means having holes forreceiving a wire or the like to hold the parts assembled prior todisposition of slide valve means on the body.5. Means for controlling flow of hot gas comprising, in combination, asubstantially cylindrical flame tube body defined by a wall with two setsof ports through the wall adapted for flow of hot air from the outersurface of the wall through the ports to the inner surface of the wall andslide valve means movable axially of the body to vary reversely the areaof the said sets of ports, wherein the improvement comprises slide valvemeans for each set of ports, each including a movable actuating ringextending around the body overlying the outer surface of the body; acircumferential row of part-cylindrical valve plates disposed between theactuating ring and the body configured to slide on the surface of the bodyto throttle the said ports variably; means coupling the valve plates tothe actuating ring for concurrent movement; spring means mounted betweenthe actuating ring and the valve plates reacting against the ring and theplates to press the plates against the body; and means coupling the twoactuating rings together for concurrent movement."}
{"WKU":"039303691","Title":"Lean prechamber outflow combustor with two sets of primary air entrances","App_Date":"1974-02-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Albert J. Verdouw","Assignee":"General Motors Corporation","ICL_Class":"F02C  722;F02G  300","References":"1777411;2249489;2756040;3067582;3119234;3577878;3691762;3703259","Claims":"I claim:1. A combustion apparatus adapted for use in a gas turbine enginecharacterized by substantially complete combustion of liquid hydrocarbonfuel and by a low output of nitrogen oxides, the apparatus comprising acombustion liner having a discharge outlet for combustion products at thedownstream end of the liner; the liner having an upstream end and linerwall means extending from the upstream end to the downstream end, the wallmeans enclosing, in sequence from the upstream end to the downstream end,a prechamber for providing a homogeneous mixture of vaporized fuel andair, a reaction zone for combustion of the fuel flowing from theprechamber in the air flowing from the prechamber, and a dilution zone formixing the combustion products from the reaction zone with additional air;the prechamber being of significantly smaller cross-sectional area thanthe reaction zone and being joined to the reaction zone by an abruptlydiverging wall portion; the prechamber including first air entrance meansdefined by swirler means at its upstream end effective to directcombustion air with a substantial circumferential velocity componentdownstream over the inner surface of the prechamber wall means so as toscour the wall means, liquid fuel introduction means downstream of theswirler means disposed to lay a film of liquid fuel on the said innersurface for evaporation by and mixture with the said combustion air, andsecond air entrance means defined by a circumferential ring of portsthrough the prechamber wall near the downstream end of the prechamberadapted to introduce air flowing radially inward to mix with and dilutethe fuel-air mixture prior to combustion; the reaction zone having animperforate wall and providing turbulent recirculating flow of burningfuel-air mixture and combustion products resulting from the swirl of theentering mixture and the abrupt divergence of the wall means; and thedilution zone including dilution air entrance means located so as to admitair for mixture with recirculating gas in the reaction zone and fordilution of the combustion products flowing from the reaction zone to thedischarge outlet.2. A combustion apparatus adapted for use in a gas turbine enginecharacterized by substantially complete combustion of liquid hydrocarbonfuel and by a low output of nitrogen oxides, the apparatus comprising acombustion liner having a discharge outlet for combustion products at thedownstream end of the liner; the liner having an upstream end and linerwall means extending from the upstream end to the downstream end, the wallmeans enclosing, in sequence from the upstream end to the downstream end,a prechamber for providing a homogeneous mixture of vaporized fuel andair, a reaction zone for combustion of the fuel flowing from theprechamber in the air flowing from the prechamber, and a dilution zone formixing the combustion products from the reaction zone with additional air;the prechamber being of approximately one-quarter the cross-sectional areaof the reaction zone and being joined to the reaction zone by an abruptlydiverging wall portion; the prechamber including first air entrance meansdefined by swirler means at its upstream end effective to directcombustion air with a substantial circumferential velocity componentdownstream over the inner surface of the prechamber wall means so as toscour the wall means, liquid fuel introduction means downstream of theswirler means disposed to lay a film of liquid fuel on the said innersurface for evaporation by and mixture with the said combustion air, andsecond air entrance means defined by a circumferential ring of portsthrough the prechamber wall near the downstream end of the prechamberadapted to introduce air flowing radially inward to mix with and dilutethe fuel-air mixture prior to combustion; the reaction zone having animperforate wall and providing turbulent recirculating flow of burningfuel-air mixture and combustion products resulting from the swirl of theentering mixture and the abrupt divergence of the wall means; the dilutionzone including dilution air entrance means located so as to admit air formixture with recirculating gas in the reaction zone and for dilution ofthe combustion products flowing from the reaction zone to the dischargeoutlet; and the relation of the entrance means being such as to provide anequivalence ratio of about 0.25 to 0.5 in the fuel-air mixture flowingfrom the prechamber into the reaction zone."}
{"WKU":"039303705","Title":"Turbofan engine with augmented combustion chamber using vorbix principle","App_Date":"1974-06-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Stanley J. Markowski;Richard S. Reilly","Assignee":"United Technologies Corporation","ICL_Class":"F02K  304;F02K  308","References":"3048376;3540216;3792582;3800527","Claims":"We claim:1. A mixed flow turbofan engine having an inlet and an outlet and having:A. a core engine enveloped within an engine case having an inlet and anoutlet and being of circular cross section and concentric about the engineaxis and mounted to define a first passage through which core engineexhaust gases are passed,B. a fan section enveloped within a fan case having an inlet and an outletand being of circular cross section and which envelops and is concentricwith said engine case to define a first annular passage therebetweenthrough which fan air is passed and which extends downstream of the enginecase to define an augmentation burner therewithin,C. a pilot zone case having an inlet and an outlet and being of circularcross section and concentric about the engine axis and supported withinthe engine case with its inlet located at an axial station upstream of theengine case outlet so that the fan case, the engine case and the pilotzone case cooperate to define an annular pilot combustion zone between thefan and pilot cases and downstream of the engine case, and which pilotzone case defines a second annular passage with the engine case in theform of an annular pilot zone having an open upstream end to receivetherein exhaust gases from the core engine,D. means to introduce fuel into said pilot zone for mixing therein with theexhaust gases of the core engine and for discharge therefrom at the enginecase outlet for mixing and combustion with the fan air, andE. a plurality of vortex generators positioned within the first annularpassage and located circumferentially thereabout to cause the fan air tobe discharged from said first annular passage and into the pilotcombustion zone as a plurality of vortices to thereby accelerate mixingand combustion with said fuel from said pilot combustion chamber.2. A turbofan engine according to claim 1 and including trigger mechanismlocated circumferentially about the outlet of said engine case and shapedto generate forced radial currents of hot autoignitable vaporized mixturefrom the pilot zone to accelerate mixing and burning between the vaporizedmixture and the fan air in the pilot combustion zone.3. A turbofan engine according to claim 1 wherein said vortex generatorsare shaped so that adjacent generators generate fan air vortices rotatingin opposite directions and including trigger mechanisms locatedcircumferentially about the outlet of said engine case and positionedbetween adjacent vortex generators and shaped to generate a forced radialcurrent of hot autoignitable vaporized mixture from the pilot zone toaccelerate mixing and burning between the vaporized mixture and the fanair in the pilot combustion zone.4. A turbofan engine according to claim 3 wherein said trigger mechanismconsists of radially outwardly extending convolutions in said engine caseand terminating in a maximum radial amplitude station at the engine caseoutlet.5. A turbofan engine according to claim 4 wherein said vortex generatorscomprise:A. a first circumferentially extending row of vortex generators formed asvortex generator pairs which are shaped to generate vortices in oppositedirections, andB. a second row of vortex generators positioned radially outwardly thereofand shaped to generate vortices rotating in the same direction and eachpositioned to be radially outwardly of one of the trigger mechanismconvolutions or a vortex generator pair from the first row and whereinsaid convolutions are canted circumferentially.6. A turbofan engine according to claim 1 and including air scoop meanspositioned circumferentially about said engine case at a station axiallydownstream of said fuel introducing means and shaped to communicate withthe pilot zone and to extend into said first annular passage to interceptselected quantities of fan air and direct them into the pilot zone.7. A turbofan engine according to claim 6 and including means to introducefuel into said pilot zone at a station downstream of said air scoop means.8. A turbofan engine according to claim 7 wherein said fuel injection meansis positioned a sufficient distance from the engine case outlet so thatfuel injected therethrough is either fully vaporized or fully burnedbefore being discharged into said pilot combustion zone.9. A turbofan engine according to claim 6 wherein said scoop members areretractable.10. A turbofan engine according to claim 1 wherein said vortex generatorsare retractable.11. A turbofan engine according to claim 1 wherein said vortex generatorsare of half-delta shape.12. A turbofan engine according to claim 1 wherein said pilot burner caseinlet is located a sufficient distance axially upstream of the engine caseoutlet and wherein the fuel introducing means is located a sufficientdistance axially upstream of the engine case outlet that the fuelintroduced to the pilot combustion chamber is mixed therein with theexhaust gases of the core engine and fully vaporized before dischargetherefrom so as to autoignite upon contact with the fan air in the pilotcombustion zone.13. A turbofan engine according to claim 1 wherein the outlet of the enginecase is positioned a selected distance axially forward of the outlet ofthe pilot case so that complete combustion occurs in the pilot combustionzone before mixing and dilution with the core engine exhaust gases passingthrough the pilot case outlet.14. An engine according to claim 1 wherein said vortex generators are ofswept wing shape.15. An engine according to claim 1 wherein said vortex generators are ofdelta wing shape.16. An engine according to claim 2 wherein said vortex generators are ofswept wing shape.17. An engine according to claim 2 wherein said vortex generators are ofdelta wing shape.18. A mixed flow turbofan engine having an inlet and an outlet and having:A. a core engine enveloped within an engine case having an inlet and anoutlet and being of circular cross section and concentric about the engineaxis and mounted to define a first passage through which core engineexhaust gases are passed,B. a fan section enveloped within a fan case having an inlet and an outletand being of circular cross section and which envelops and is concentricwith said engine case to define a first annular passage therebetweenthrough which fan air is passed and which extends downstream of the enginecase to define an augmentation burner therewithin,c. an annular pilot zone chamber having an inlet communicating with thefirst passage and an outlet communicating with the augmentation burner sothat the inlet of said annular pilot zone chamber receives engine exhaustgases from said first passage and having:"}
{"WKU":"039303713","Title":"Nuclear power plant","App_Date":"1973-09-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hans-Peter Schabert","Assignee":"Siemens Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"F01k  722","References":"1745964;1780226;3105357","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A nuclear power plant including a steam generator supplied via an inputinlet connecting with a source of feed water under pressure, with feedwater which in the generator is heated by reactor coolant until it boilsto steam, and a steam engine having a low pressure stage supplied withsaid steam and exhausting the steam through a reheater to a low pressurestage; wherein the improvement comprises means for conducting said feedwater from within said generator to and through said reheater.2. The plant of claim 1 in which said portion is conducted from the feedwater in the generator at a location where the feed water is not boiling.3. The plant of claim 1 in which said generator contains a horizontal tubesheet mounting an upstanding inverted U-shaped nest of tubes for thereactor coolant and surrounding by a casing, the input feed water beingfed to the upper surface of the tube sheet and said means conducting thefeed water from an area adjacent to said upper surface.4. The plant of claim 1 including means for conducting said portion aroundthe reheater and through cooling and pressure increasing means, to saidgenerator s feed water supply inlet.5. The plant of claim 1 in which said steam generator includes a feed waterseparator above said tube nest and which collects the feed water separatorfrom the generated steam, said means conducting the feed water from thatcollected by this water separator.6. The plant of claim 1 in which said means returns the feed water fromsaid reheater to said heat exchanger s feed water inlet and includes meansfor forcing the feed water to circulate.7. The plant of claim 6 in which said steam generator includes a feed waterpreheater for the feed water supplied via said feed water inlet."}
{"WKU":"039303721","Title":"Method and arrangement for controlling the position of an underground","App_Date":"1973-11-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Stanley William Norman","Assignee":"Johns-Manville Corporation","ICL_Class":"E02D 2912;E02D 2700","References":"261649;311299;782383;1639495;3172377;3345826;3530677;3672103;3759280","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In an underground manhole assembly including an underground base, a lidreadily accessible from ground level and underground wall means whichtogether cooperate to define a manhole, the improvement comprising:a. an arrangement at least partially positioned between the base of saidmanhole assembly and soil beneath said base, said arrangement includingair under pressure between said base and said soil.2. In an assembly according to claim 1 wherein said arrangement includesfluid conveyance means for aiding in providing said air under pressureafter said arrangement is in said position.3. In an assembly according to claim 1 wherein said arrangement includes apan-like member having a closed top, side wall means formed around theperiphery of said top and an opened bottom, said pan-like member beingpositioned under and against said base so that its opened bottom facestowards the soil beneath said base.4. In an assembly according to claim 3 including means for preventing saidpan-like member from moving in a transverse direction relative to saidbase.5. In an assembly according to claim 1 wherein said underground wall meansis comprised of a plurality of circumferential sections which arepositioned in an aligned vertical stack, said improvement including atleast one circumferential skirt extending around one of said sections andhaving a circumferential portion depending from the lower end of said onesection, said depending portion extending around on the upper portion ofan adjacent lower section.6. In an assembly according to claim 5 wherein said skirt is connected,with one of said last-mentioned sections.7. In an underground manhole assembly including an underground base, a lidreadily accessible from ground level and underground wall means whichtogether cooperate to define a manhole, the improvement comprising:a. a first means defining a chamber between the base of said manholeassembly and the soil beneath said base;b. fluid under pressure provided within said chamber for preventing saidsoil and any liquids in said soil from substantially completely fillingsaid chamber; andc. second means for conveying said fluid into said chamber.8. In an assembly according to claim 7 whereina. said fluid is air,b. said first means includes a pan-like member positioned against and belowsaid base and having a closed top side, side wall means formed around saidtop side and an opened bottom, said opened bottom facing said soil so thatsaid member defines said chamber between said soil and the top side ofsaid member, andc. said second means includes an air conduit means positioned through saidbase and said top side and means for closing the passage through saidconduit.9. In an assembly according to claim 8 including coarse aggregate matterlocated within said chamber for preventing said pan-like member fromshifting relative to said base, said matter being of sizes and shapes toprovide pockets therebetween for the presence of said air under pressure.10. In an underground manhole assembly including an underground base, a lidreadily accessible from ground level and underground wall means whichtogether cooperate to define a manhole, a method of preventing the soilbeneath the base of said assembly from forcing the base upwards inresponse to the moisture in said soil freezing and expanding, said methodcomprising:a. providing a chamber between said base and the soil beneath said base;andb. applying fluid under pressure to said chamber so as to define apressurized fluid barrier between said base and soil, said barrier beingof sufficient depth to prevent said soil, when in an unfrozen state, fromcontacting said base and to prevent said soil from applying anyappreciable force on said base due to a freeze in any moisture in thesoil.11. A method according to claim 10 wherein said fluid under pressure isdirected into said chamber with sufficient pressure to maintain saidbarrier so long as the moisture in said soil is in an unfrozen state.12. A method according to claim 11 wherein said fluid is periodicallydirected into said chamber so as to maintain said sufficient pressure.13. A method according to claim 12 wherein said fluid is air.14. In an assembly according to claim 2 wherein said conveyance means islocated within said manhole.15. In an underground manhole assembly including an underground base, a lidreadily accessible from ground level and underground wall means whichtogether cooperate to define a manhole, the improvement comprising:a. an arrangement at least partially positioned between the base of saidmanhole assembly and soil beneath said base, said arrangement includingair under pressure between said base and said soil beneath said base forpreventing said soil, when in an unfrozen state, from contacting said baseand for preventing said soil from applying any appreciable force to saidbase due to a freeze in any moisture in said soil."}
{"WKU":"039303730","Title":"Reinforced concrete pile and a method of manufacturing such a pile","App_Date":"1975-03-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Lorentz Wahman","Assignee":"Roy Asserback","ICL_Class":"E02D  530;E04B  148","References":"3248888;3382680","Claims":"What I claim is:1. A method of manufacturing reinforced concrete piles, each pile at leastat one of its ends being provided with a collar, in whichlongitudinally running reinforcing bars are cut to exact lengths and arethreaded at least at one of their ends,a collar provided with threaded bores corresponding in number to thedesired number of axial reinforcing bars and having a bigger diameter thansaid bars is fitted to at least one end of the bars,an externally threaded connector having an internally threaded bore isfitted in each bore in the collar to attach the reinforcing bars thereto,andthe reinforcing unit thus produced is placed in a mould which thereafter isfilled with concrete."}
{"WKU":"039303748","Title":"Dynamic ballast and stabilization system","App_Date":"1975-03-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Charles W. Hoppe","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"E02D 2100;E02B 1700","References":"1879812;3553968;3588796;3733834","Claims":"What is claimed is as follows:1. A dynamic ballast and stabilization system for use in combination with aplatform structure anchored at an off-shore location in a body of water,the structure being normally subjected to lateral and upward displacementunder the influence of periodically occurring wave forces, said structureincluding an equipment holding deck, a rigid framework having the upperends supportably connected to the equipment holding deck with the lowerends thereof fixedly embedded in the floor of said body of water, saidsystem being carried by said framework below the surface of the body ofwater and comprising:a support member carried by said framework;an impellor rotatably carried by said support member, said impellor drivingwater upwardly to generate a counter-acting force on said support member;means carried by said support member movable independently of said impellorfor controlling direction at which said water is driven; andpower generating means carried by said support member and driven by saidwater, the power generating means being utilized to aid in driving saidimpellor.2. The dynamic ballast and stabilization system defined in claim 1 whereinsaid impellor is driven by an electric motor.3. The dynamic ballast and stabilization system defined in claim 2 whereinsaid power generating means comprises a water wheel mounted for rotationabout a vertical axis said water wheel being driven by said body of water;transmission means connecting said water wheel to said generator such thatsaid rotating water wheel drives said generator;batteries carried by said platform structure and charged by said generatormeans; andsaid batteries providing a partial source of the electrical energy neededto drive said electrical motor.4. The dynamic ballast and stabilization system defined in claim 1 whereinsaid means carried by said support member for controlling the direction atwhich water is driven by said impellor comprises a shroud having firstmember which encircles said impellor and is rotatable about an axisparallel to the axis of rotation of said impellor, and a second membercarried by said first member said second member being mounted for pivotalmovement about an axis perpendicular to said axis of rotation of saidimpellor, and means for inclining said second member with respect to itspivotable axis; andmeans for rotating said first member about the axis of rotation of saidimpellor.5. The dynamic ballast and stabilization system defined in claim 4comprising a second shroud positionable over a portion of said water wheelto protect said water wheel, said second shroud being carried by saidrotating first member and automatically positionable over said water wheelwhen said first member is rotated to position the direction at which fluidis ejected from said impellor.6. The dynamic ballast and stabilization system defined in claim 4 furthercomprising a vane element disposed in said second member in the path ofsaid ejected water to aid said second member in controlling the directionof movement of said water as it is exhausted from said rotating impellor.7. The dynamic ballast and stabilization system defined in claim 1 furthercomprising ballast tanks carried by said structure above the water levelof said body of water and adapted to be filled with said water to provideadditional ballast for holding said structure down.8. The dynamic ballast and stabilization system defined in claim 1 furthercomprising cable means extending from said structure at a substantialdistance therefrom and having anchor means disposed the end of said cablesfor firmly anchoring said cables into the floor of said body of water toaid said system in maintaining said structure in a secure position."}
{"WKU":"039303756","Title":"Storage vessel for liquefied gas","App_Date":"1973-11-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Albert Hofmann","Assignee":"Linde Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"F17C  100","References":"2999366;3007596;3018016;3118194;3166511;3256000;3304729;3559835;3698200;3699696","Claims":"I claim:1. A storage vessel for a liquid adapted to be maintained normally at atemperature below about 30.degree.K, said vessel comprising:an inner shell defining a chamber receiving said liquid;a radiation shield specedly surrounding said inner shell and defining aninner compartment therewith;an outer shell spacedly surrounding said radiation shield and defining anouter compartment with said radiation shield;a mass consisting of pulverulent insulating material free from metalparticles filling said inner compartment;a mixture of pulverulent insulating material and metal powder filling saidouter compartment, the proportion of metal powder in said mixture beingsubstantially 15 to 30 percent by weight, said insulating material beingperlite and said metal powder being aluminum or copper;means for cooling said radiation shield and including tubes lying in saidouter compartment and extending along and in heat-exchanging relationshipwith said radiation shield, and means for passing a deep-cooled fluidthrough said tubes, the distance between said outer shell and saidradiation shield and the distance between said radiation shield and saidinner shell being in a ratio of about 2:1;means for evacuating said inner compartment; andmeans for exacuating said outer compartment.2. The storage vessel defined in claim 1 wherein said proportion is 18 to25 percent by weight.3. The storage vessel defined in claim 1 wherein said means for passing adeep-cooled fluid through said tubes includes means for supplying nitrogenat a temperature of 50.degree.K to 150.degree.K to said tubes."}
{"WKU":"039303764","Title":"Ice cube tray","App_Date":"1975-01-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Anton J. Schwartz","Assignee":"White-Westinghouse Corporation","ICL_Class":"F25C  124;F25C  518","References":"2433211;2463947;2481525;2496331;2799998;3033008;3170308;3386698;3844525","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A unitarily molded flexible plastic ice cube tray comprising a generallyrectangular member having a peripheral framing flange encircling aplurality of pockets for receiving water to be formed into individual icecubes when frozen, each of said pockets having a generally cubicalconfiguration with upwardly outwardly diverging side walls and wherein theimprovement comprises:means projecting inwardly from opposite areas of said side walls forestablishing areas of stress concentration in said ice cube when said trayis deformed to release the ice cubes from said pockets, said projectionsthereby causing a splintering and cracking of said ice cube to the extentthat the cube is prevented from reseating itself within the tray in theas-molded relationship whereby manually gripping each individual cube forremoval from said pocket is facilitated.2. Structure according to claim 1 wherein said inwardly projecting meansare disposed in a pair of diagonally opposed corners of said side walls.3. Structure according to claim 2 wherein said tray includes depressedareas in the common uppermost juncture of adjacent pockets to provide flowcommunications from a pocket that has been filled to this level to theadjacent pocket, said inwardly projection means disposed below saiddepressed areas and generally above the center of said pocket.4. Structure according to claim 2 wherein said inwardly projecting meansare unitarily molded with and form a part of the walls of said pockets andextend into the pocket with sufficient rigidity to prevent outward passageof the ice cube formed in said pocket without first fracturing the cube."}
{"WKU":"039303772","Title":"Ice transport system","App_Date":"1973-09-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert P. Utter","Assignee":"King-Seeley Thermos Co.","ICL_Class":"F25C  518","References":"599267;1284064;1413727;2834059;2953806;3125116;3248071;3305192;3525482;3769809;R23091","Claims":"I claim:1. In combination in an ice making machine,means for producing a quantity of ice,an ice storage container located remote from said ice producing means, anda conduit system for communicating ice from said ice producing means tosaid storage container,said conduit system comprising at least one conduit structure and at leastone coupling assembly for operatively connecting one end of said structureto an associated conduit element,said coupling assembly comprising first and second parts each having aportion of predetermined axial length adapted for engagement with saidstructure,said conduit structure being of a one-piece uniform cross-sectionconstruction and including an intermediate section and first and secondopposite end sections which are of a relatively linear configuration,said first and second end sections being defined by first and secondimaginary axis arranged at right angles to one another and saidintermediate section being defined by a third imaginary axis arranged at a45.degree. angle to both said first and second axis,said conduit structure further including first and second relativelyarcuate sections interposed one between said first end section and saidintermediate section and the other between said intermediate section andsaid second end section, whereby said conduit structure can be used in anunsevered condition to provide a 90.degree. change in direction for icebeing communicated therethrough and can be severed within saidintermediate section thereof to provide two separate conduit parts eachhaving a non-linear intermediate section and relatively linear opposed endsections and each adapted to provide a 45.degree. change in direction forice being communicated therethrough,each of said arcuate sections being spaced axially from the terminal endsof said structure a distance at least equal to said predetermined lengthand being spaced from each other a distance at least as great as twicesaid predetermined length,said coupling assembly including a collar member adapted to be sleeved overthe outer periphery of one of said end sections, said collar member havingan axial bore adapted to telescopically receive said end sectiontherewithin, with the axial length of said bore not being greater than thelength of said end section."}
{"WKU":"039303780","Title":"Axially-displaceable and angularly-movable universal coupling","App_Date":"1974-09-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Leopold F. Schmid","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F16D  302","References":"1582997;2926510;3029617;3310959;3613396;3757534;3802221","Claims":"I claim:1. An axially displaceable and angularly movable, evenly-running universalcoupling comprising, in combination, an inner coupling member with aradial bore; three rolling elements equi-angularly distributed andconnected rotatably and radially movable to said inner coupling member fortransmitting torque; an outer coupling member having straight-linedgrooves parallel to the axis of said outer coupling member, said rollingelements protruding into said grooves; spring means for applying a radialforce pushing said rolling elements outward to displace said rollingelements during an angular movement for even-running of said universalcoupling, said rolling elements having a cylindrical pin rotatable andradially movable in said radial bore, said spring means applying a forceon the inner end of said cylindrical pin for pushing said rolling elementsradially outward.2. The universal coupling as defined in claim 1 including a central andaxially directed bore in said inner coupling member for holding saidspring means.3. The universal coupling as defined in claim 2 including an intermediatemember between the inner end of said cylindrical pin and said spring meanssaid spring means applying a radially directed force to said cylindricalpin through said intermediate member.4. The universal coupling as defined in claim 3 wherein said intermediatemember has a conical-shape surface, said inner end of said cylindrical pinbeing rounded.5. The universal coupling as defined in claim 3 wherein said intermediatemember is spherical-shaped, said inner end of said cylindrical pin havinga conical-shaped surface.6. The universal coupling as defined in claim 2 wherein said spring meanscomprises three force applying members equiangularly distributed anddirected radially outward.7. The universal coupling as defined in claim 6 wherein said spring meanscomprises of elastic deformable material of substantially high strength.8. The universal coupling as defined in claim 7 wherein said spring meanscomprises a main member within a bore of said inner coupling member, saidmain member having three pressure applying bosses for abutting the innerends of said cylindrical pin of said three rolling elements.9. The universal coupling as defined in claim 1 wherein said cylindricalpin of said rolling elements have a spherical surface on the outer end,the spherical center of said spherical surface being at the center of thesphere conforming to the outer surface of said rolling element.10. The universal coupling as defined in claim 9 wherein said sphericalsurface on the outer end of said cylindrical pin abuts said rollingelements against said grooves of said outer coupling member.11. The universal coupling as defined in claim 4 wherein said spring meanscomprises elastic deformable material of substantially high strength andhaving a main member within a bore of said inner coupling member, saidmain member having 3 pressure applying bosses for abutting the inner endsof said cylindrical pin of said 3 rolling elements, said cylindrical pinas said rolling elements having a spherical surface on the outer end, thespherical center of said spherical surface being at the center of thesphere conforming to the outer surface of said rolling element, saidspherical surface on the outer end of said cylindrical pin abutting saidrolling elements against said grooves of said outer coupling member."}
{"WKU":"039303799","Title":"Compensating and equalizing coupling for transmission of large torques,","App_Date":"1974-05-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Heinz M. Hiersig;Wilhelm Koster","Assignee":"Mannesmann-Meer Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"F16D  317","References":"1896968;2126705","Claims":"We claim:1. Compensating and equalizing coupling for transmission of large torques,such as between a ship s drive transmission gear and a propellor shaft,comprising:a hollow shaft;means (a) includingi. a first, cylindrical structure having larger diameter than the shaft andreceiving one end of the shaft in axially overlapping relation;ii. a second, cylindrical structure having smaller diamater than the shaftand being received by the shaft at the one end in axially overlappingrelation;iii. means for interconnecting the first and second structuresindependently from the hollow shaft and connecting the interconnectedstructures to serve as primary input part of the coupling; andiv. a first plurality of resilient elements interposed radially between andconnected to the shaft and said first and second structures to provide forradially extending resilient interconnection between the shaft and saidstructures; andmeans (b) including:i. a third cylindrical structure having larger diameter than the shaft andreceiving the other end of the shaft in axially overlapping relation, butaxially spaced apart from the first structure;ii. a fourth cylindrical structure having smaller diameter than the hollowshaft and being received by the shaft at the other end in axiallyoverlapping relation, but axially spaced apart from the first structure;iii. means for interconnecting the third and fourth structures andconnecting these interconnected structures to serve as secondary, outputpart of the coupling; andiv. a second plurality of resilient elements interposed radially betweenand connected to the shaft and said third and fourth structures to providefor radially extending resilient interconnection between the shaft andsaid third and fourth structures;so that said hollow shaft floats between the elements of the first tofourth pluralities and remains disconnected from said gear and said shaftexcept through the means (a) and the means (b) which in turn areinterconnected only by said hollow shaft.2. Coupling as in claim 1, the two means for interconnecting includingrespectively first and second flanges to which the first and secondstructures and the third and fourth structures are respectively connected,the first flange connected to a drive shaft, the second flange connectedto a driven shaft.3. Coupling as in claim 1, wherein the structures each being comprised of aplurality of individual elements which when interconnected establish therespective cylindrical structures, whereby an element of the firststructure is radially aligned with an element of the second structure, andan element of the third structure is radially aligned with an element ofthe fourth structure.4. Coupling structure as in claim 3, the elements of the first and secondstructures being connected to a first flange, the elements of third andfourth structures being connected to a second flange, the first and secondflanges respectively included in the two means for interconnecting.5. Coupling structure as in claim 4, wherein the two means forinterconnecting further including four annuli respectively forinterconnecting the elements of the first through fourth structures.6. Coupling as in claim 3, wherein a separate resilient element of theplurality is disposed between each element of the plurality and the hollowshaft.7. Coupling as in claim 6 wherein each resilient element is bonded to therespective holding element.8. Coupling as in claim 6, wherein each resilient element is bonded to aplate at an interface therewith, the respective plates being fastened tothe hollow shaft.9. Coupling as in claim 8, wherein the plates have larger extension inaxial direction than the respective axial extension of the resilientelements.10. Coupling as in claim 9, wherein each plate where extending beyond theinterface with the respective resilient element is bolted to the hollowshaft.11. Coupling as in claim 3, wherein two holding elements on the pluralityand two resilient elements of the plurality establish a sub-assemblyconnected to the hollow shaft, there being aligned bores in the elementsof the subassembly for insertion of tightening bolts.12. Coupling as in claim 1, wherein the radial distance between first andthird structures on one hand and the second and fourth structures on theother hand is about 6 to 10% of the diameter of the first and thirdstructures.13. Coupling as in claim 1, wherein the means for interconnecting providefor radial tension bias of the resilient elements.14. Coupling as in claim 1, wherein the resilient elements have radiallysmaller dimensions than their respective dimensions in axial and inazimuthal direction."}
{"WKU":"039303802","Title":"Ice dispenser container coupling","App_Date":"1974-08-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Thomas H. Fogt","Assignee":"General Motors Corporation","ICL_Class":"F12D  352","References":"1621428;2254566;2420462;2616274;2680383;3038322;3529440","Claims":"I claim:1. A flexible coupling unit for readily coupling and decoupling the drivenshaft of an appliance, removably located on a support structure, and amotor driving shaft mounted on said support structure comprising, adriving tubular sleeve closed at one end by a base providing inner andouter faces, means for fixedly attaching said sleeve outer face on the endof said driving shaft, a disc fixed on the end of said appliance drivenshaft in axially spaced opposed relation to said tubular sleeve innerface, an open helical coiled wire spring having one end fixed on saiddisc, said coiled spring having its end turns formed square with thelongitudinal axis of said spring, said spring free end being telescopedwithin said tubular sleeve and compressed such that said free end turn isseated flush with said sleeve inner face upon said appliance being movedinto its operative position on said structure, means for retaining theappliance in its operative position on said structure, said sleeve innerface having a plurality of axially extending, radially arranged drivinglugs fixed thereon; said coil spring free end turn terminating in aninwardly directed radial tang, and said radial tang being located so as toengage one of the plurality of driving lugs in hook-like fashion uponrotation of said driving shaft in a first direction, whereby said helicalcoiled spring tends to tighten in said first direction causing said diskand driven shaft to be rotated in said first direction and operate saidappliance.2. A flexible readily detachable coupling unit for coupling the drivenshaft of an ice piece dispensing container, removably located in acompartment of a domestic refrigerator, and a motor driving shaft mountedin said compartment comprising, a driving tubular sleeve closed at one endby a base providing  inner and outer faces, means for fixedly attachingsaid sleeve outer face on the end of said driving shaft, a disc fixed onthe end of said container driven shaft in axially spaced opposed relationto said tubular sleeve inner face, an open helical coiled wire springhaving one end fixed on said disc, said coiled spring having its end turnsformed square with the longitudinal axis of said spring, said spring freeend being telescoped within said tubular sleeve and compressed such thatsaid free end turn is seated flush with said sleeve inner face upon saidcontainer being moved into its ice dispensing operative position in therefrigerator compartment, means for retaining the container in itsoperative position, said sleeve inner face having a plurality of axiallyextending, arcuately spaced driving lugs fixed thereon; said coil springfree end turn terminating in an inwardly directed radial tang, and saidradial tang being located so as to engage one of the plurality of drivinglugs in hook-like fashion upon rotation of said driving shaft in a firstdirection, whereby said helical coiled spring tends to tighten in saidfirst direction causing said disc and driven shaft to be rotated in saidfirst direction in unison with said driving tubular sleeve and drivenshaft operating said ice dispensing container.3. A flexible self-aligning coupling unit for readily coupling anddecoupling the driven shaft of an ice piece dispensing container,removably located in a freezer compartment of a domestic refrigerator, anda motor driving shaft mounted in said freezer compartment comprising, adriving housing closed at one end by a base providing inner and outerfaces, the open end of said housing having a generally cylindricalinternal peripheral surface, means for fixedly attaching said sleeve outerface on the end of said driving shaft, a disc fixed on the end of saidcontainer driven  shaft in axially spaced opposed relation to said tubularsleeve inner face, an open helical coiled wire spring having one end fixedon said disc, said coiled spring having its end turns formed square withthe longitudinal axis of said spring, a member defining a longitudinalopen-ended guide slot located adjacent the rearward end of saidcompartment, a longitudinal rib on said container positioned to bereceived in said open-ended slot during the final rearward travel of saidcontainer, whereby said spring free end will be horizontally aligned withsaid housing open end for telescopic reception therein, said spring freeend being telescoped within said tubular sleeve and compressed such thatsaid free end turn is seated flush with said sleeve inner face upon saidcontainer being moved into its ice dispensing operative position in therefrigerator compartment, means for retaining the container in itsoperative position, said sleeve inner face having a plurality of axiallyextending, radially arranged and arcuately spaced driving lugs fixedthereon; and said coil spring free end turn terminating in an inwardlydirected radial tang, said radial tang being located so as to engage oneof the plurality of driving lugs in hook-like fashion upon rotation ofsaid driving shaft in a first direction, whereby said helical coiledspring tends to tighten in said first direction causing said disc anddriven shaft to be rotated in said first direction in unison with saiddriving housing and driving shaft operating said ice dispensing container.4. A flexible self-aligning coupling unit for readily coupling anddecoupling the driven shaft of an ice piece dispensing container removablylocated in a freezer compartment of a domestic refrigerator and a motordriving shaft mounted in said freezer compartment comprising, a drivinghousing closed at one end by a base providing inner and outer faces, theopen end of said housing  having a generally cylindrical internalperipheral surface, means for fixedly attaching said sleeve outer face onthe end of said driving shaft, a radially flanged disc fixed on the end ofsaid container driven shaft in axially spaced opposed relation to saidtubular sleeve inner face, an open helical coiled wire spring having oneend fixed on said disc, said coiled spring having its end turn portionsformed square with the longitudinal axis of said spring to provide acircumferential length of at least 270.degree., said coil spring end turnportions terminating in inwardly directed radial tangs, said one end turnportion of said spring adapted to be slipped onto said disc for seatingagainst said disc flange, radial slot means in said disc for reception ofthe radial tang of said one end turn portion, a friction detent formed onthe cylindrical periphery of said disc diametrically opposite from saidslot whereby said one end turn portion is snapped over said detent forretention thereby, an L-shaped bifurcated member defining a longitudinalopen-ended slot located adjacent the rearward end of said compartment,longitudinal rib means on said container positioned to be received in saidopen-ended slot during the final rearward travel of said container,whereby said spring free end will be horizontally aligned with saidhousing open end cylindrical surface for telescopic reception therein,said spring free end being telescoped within said tubular sleeve andcompressed such that said free end turn is seated flush with said sleeveinner face upon said container being moved into its ice dispensingoperative position in the refrigerator compartment, means for retainingthe container in its operative position, said sleeve inner face having twopairs of diametrically opposed ninety degree spaced, axially extendingdriving lugs integrally formed thereon; said coil spring free end turnradial tang being located  so as to engage one of the plurality of drivinglugs in hook-like fashion upon rotation of said driving shaft in a firstdirection, whereby said helical coiled spring tends to tighten in saidfirst direction causing said disc and driven shaft to be rotated in saidfirst direction and operate said ice dispensing container."}
{"WKU":"039303810","Title":"Universal joint","App_Date":"1974-01-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John T. Hall;Alexander R. Alves","Assignee":"Alves Precision Engineered Products, Inc.","ICL_Class":"F16D  326","References":"1121144;1918613;2037281;2575602","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a universal joint for effecting rotational coupling between a pair ofshafts, said joint comprising a pair of yoke members each having a hubportion for connection to the end of a shaft and a pair of opposed armsintegral with and extending axially from said hub, said yoke members beingpositioned with their paired arms telescoped into axially overlapped butcircumferentially spaced relation, means pivotally interconnecting thearms of said yoke members including a coupling block interposed betweensaid arms and having parallel axially opposite end faces and quadrantiallyoriented lateral faces between said end faces, said block being splitalong the bisecting plane parallel to said end faces and retaining meansfor releasably holding said block together, and a stub shaft disposedcentrally of each lateral face of said block and projecting outwardlytherefrom in said bisecting plane; the improvement which comprises meansfor fixedly securing said stub shafts in said block against escapeoutwardly thereof, each of said yoke arms having an aperture and a sleevebearing removably retained in said aperture, said projecting stud shaftsbeing pivotally received in said sleeve bearings in free rotation therein.2. A universal joint as defined in claim 1, wherein said sleeve bearingsare press fitted into said yoke arms to removably retain them therein.3. A universal joint as defined in claim 2, wherein said stub shafts areclamped between the halves of said block, said securing means comprisingan enlarged head portion at the inner end of each of said stub shafts andsaid coupling block being recessed interiorly to provide a shoulderedrecess for each of said enlarged head portions to prevent laterallyoutward movement of said shafts relative to the lateral faces of saidblock.4. A universal joint as defined in claim 3, wherein said coupling block isformed to provide a hollow center to provide said shouldered recess inwhich said enlarged head portions of said stub shafts are received.5. A universal joint as defined in claim 4, wherein each of said stubshafts is formed with lubricating passages communicating the surface ofeach shaft within its respective sleeve bearing with the hollow interiorof said coupling block.6. A universal joint as defined in claim 5, wherein said lubricatingpassages of at least one of said stub shafts opens onto the outer free endof such shaft."}
{"WKU":"039303829","Title":"Torque limiting coupling","App_Date":"1973-12-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Karlheinz Timtner","Assignee":"Ringspann Albrecht Maurer KG","ICL_Class":"F16D  706","References":"1518634;1840682;3018866;3277670","Claims":"Having thus described my invention as required by the Patent Laws, what isdesired protected by Letters Patent is set forth in the following claims:1. A safety coupling which provides positive torque transfer and whichdisengages above a disengagement torque comprising first (1) and second(6) coupling halves which are engaged to restrict axial movement, saidfirst coupling half having a disc shaped flange (8) defining at leastthree radial recesses (9), at least a pair of cylindrical rollers (2, 3)within the recesses in the first coupling half (1) such that they movewith the first coupling half and are free to roll on axes generally radialto the coupling axis, said second coupling half (6) comprising first andsecond stop faces (5, 7) arranged on opposite sides of the disc shapedflange (8) of the first coupling half, said first stop face definingrecesses (4) for receiving part of an adjacent roller and said second stopface (7) being planar and adjacent one of said remaining rollers, meansintegral with said first stop face for biasing it toward the second stopface, said biasing means being axially compressible and peripherallyrigid, whereby said biasing means urges rollers held by said radialrecesses (9) into the said stop face recesses (4) for transmitting torquebetween the coupling halves (1, 6) and permitting disengagement of thecoupling halves by axial movement of the axially movable stop face.2. A safety coupling according to claim 1 wherein said first coupling halfcomprises a hub, and said second coupling half comprises a sleeve coaxialwith said hub thereby defining a housing.3. A safety coupling according to claim 1 wherein the said biasing means(6 ) consists of a number of spaced annular discs (10) which are inalignment with one another and are connected to one another only bysectors.4. A safety coupling according to claim 3 wherein the biasing meansconsists of a circular cylindrical tube having slits thereinto in theradial direction alternately from one side and then the other.5. A safety coupling according to claim 1 wherein between the biasing meansand its associated coupling half (6) supplemental springs (11) areprovided which serve to increase the pressing force of the springmechanism (6 ).6. A safety coupling according to claim 1 wherein the movement produced bythe compression of the biasing means is transmitted out of the coupling toa sensing device (13, 14) held under spring pressure (12) and which mayact upon a limit switch or an electronic proximity switch (15) shuttingoff the means to apply torque to the coupling.7. A safety coupling according to claim 6 wherein a pin (16) secured to onecoupling half engages a recess (17) of greater dimension than the othercoupling half so that only limited rotational movement of the two couplinghalves relative to one another is permitted.8. A safety coupling according to claim 1 wherein the second coupling half(6) defines a housing surrounding the first coupling half (1) and may befilled with grease or other viscous oil for dampening purposes.9. A safety coupling according to claim 1 wherein rollers restrained byrecesses in disc shaped flange (8) are separated from one another by aloose disc ring on both of whose opposed side faces the rollers may ride.10. A safety coupling according to claim 1 wherein on the outer cylindricalconvex surface of one coupling half, rollers are rotatably mounted aboutradially running axes, the said rollers alternately striking against thetwo end faces of the second coupling half, i.e. against its fixed end faceand its biasing stop face."}
{"WKU":"039303837","Title":"Circular knitting machine","App_Date":"1972-08-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Otto Nuber","Assignee":"Firma Fouquet-Werk Frauz & Planck","ICL_Class":"D04B  906;D04B  936;D04B 1568","References":"2025462;2025463;2025464;2913887;3262285;3283540;3646779;3678710;3742733;3747371","Claims":"I claim:1. Circular knitting machine having a needle bed (1);needles (2, 21) located in the needle bed;guide slots (4) guiding the needles for sliding movement in the needle bed;a camming system (15, 16, 17; 34, 35, 36) having a first cam race tocontrol protection of needles to a first projection position and a misscam race to control needles to remain in miss position;movable needle jacks (6, 22) slidable in said needle guide slots and beingadditionally pivotable about axes transverse to the sliding direction inthe guide slots, the needle jacks being in engagement with the needles andthe camming system, and having butts (2.sup.1, 6.sup.2, 6.sup.3 ; 23)selectively engageable in the first cam race or in the miss cam race, theneedle jacks associated with at least one of the cylinder or dial needlesbeing located in the guide slots for rocking movement essentially in aplane of the guide slots;jack control means (10, 32, 27, 30) controlling pivoting, rocking movementof the needle jacks to control selective engagement with a selected camtrack;means (7) locking the needle jacks in selected, rocked position ascontrolled by said jack control means,an second cam race formed in the camming system to control projection ofthe needles to a second projected position;the locking means (7) having three selected locked positions for placementof the movable needle jacks in a selected one of said three pivotedpositions, the butts being engageable with the additional cam race uponlocking of the pivotable needle jacks to the second rocked, or pivotedposition under command of said jack control means;and wherein the locking means securing the needle jacks in selectedposition comprisesa projecting end (6.sup.1, 24) formed on the needle jack, said end beinglaterally, resiliently deflectable;at least three groves formed in the machine adjacent said projecting endand located to be resiliently, selectively engaged by said projecting endto locate the same and permit longitudinal sliding movement of the jackwhile securing the jack against transverse shift while rocking.2. Machine according to claim 1 wherein some of the needle jacks (6) haveselector butts (6.sup.2, 6.sup.3) located approximately equidistantly froma pivot point,and the first and second cam races (16, 17) are located opposite said pivotpoint for selective engagement by one of said selector butts to controlprojection of the jack, and hence the needle, in accordance with the camtrack pattern of the cam race engaged by the selected butt.3. Machine according to claim 1 wherein the needle jacks have a projectingselector butt (23) located on said jack at one side from a pivot point;and the first and second cam races (31, 32) are of different depths andlocated to be engageable by said selector butt, selectively, in dependenceon the extent of pivoting, and hence of projection of the butt to controlprojection of the jack, and hence the needle, in accordance with thepattern of the cam track of the cam race engaged by the butt.4. Machine according to claim 1 wherein the first cam race controls theneedle jack to project the needle to knitting position and the second camrace controls the needle jack to project the needle to tuck position.5. Machine according to claim 1 wherein the first cam race controls theneedle jack to project the needle to knitting position and the second camrace controls the needle jack to likewise project the needle to knittingposition.6. Machine according to claim 1 wherein the first and second cam races havecamming elements which are selectively adjustable (18, 19) to provide achoice of cam track paths.7. Machine according to claim 1 further comprising selector jacks (10)having high and low selector butts (10.sup.1, 10.sup.2) and pattern means(32) selectively engaging said high and low butts.8. Machine according to claim 2 wherein the needle jacks (22) are formedwith an extending portion (24);the jack control means comprises selector jacks (27) which are locatedbeneath said extending portions;and pattern means (30, 27.sup.3) are provided selectively engaging saidselector jacks to move the selector jacks into selective engagement withthe needle jacks and thus rock the needle jacks from below.9. Machine according to claim 1 wherein the jack control means comprisesselector jacks mounted for rocking movement, andthe needle jacks (6) comprise a multi-component element (5, 6), onecomponent (5) being coupled to the needle (2) to push the needle intoselected position and the other component (6) being coupled to theassociated selector jack (10) and movable by rocking about a planesubstantially transverse to the sliding movement of the jack, and theneedle, respectively in the machine.10. Machine according to claim 1 comprisinga connection arrangement between a respective needle jack (22) and a needle(21) and formed, respectively, on the respective needles and the jacksincludinga projecting component (22.sup.2) having essentially, circular outline anda recessed component (21.sup.2) of essentially circular outline into whichthe projecting component fits to permit both rocking movement of therespective needle jack and sliding movement longitudinally thereof and toform a fulcrum for pivoting, or rocking of the needle jack (24).11. Machine according to claim 1, comprising a connection arrangementbetween a respective needle jack and a needle including an intermediateelement (5) in engagement with the needle (2) to move the needle insliding motion, the intermediate element (5) having one of the componentsof the connection arrangement formed thereon, to isolate rocking movementof the jack from the needle (25).12. Machine according to claim 1, wherein elements beneath the needles (2,)are formed with shank ends (5,) facing the needle jacks (6,), the needleshanks and the element jacks at their facing end portions being formedwith releasable, interengaging locking means to lock the needle shank endsand the element jacks in relatively locked alignment.13. Machine according to claim 12, wherein the interengaging locking meanscomprises projection and recess means."}
{"WKU":"039303845","Title":"Compound needle for circular knitting machine","App_Date":"1974-04-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Alfred Schindele","Assignee":"C. Terrot Sohne","ICL_Class":"D04B 1578","References":"1673634;1877503;3771327","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a pattern-controlled Jacquard-type circular knitting machine, aknitting arrangement including first and second cooperable cam tracks, acompound needle including a hook portion vertically movable between anuppermost and a lowermost position and a latch cooperable with the hookportion and normally situated in a first position, the latch having afirst butt engageable in the first cam track, means for effectingengagement of the hook portion and the latch when the hook portion israised through a predetermined vertical distance from its lowermostposition so that further upward movement of the hook portion isaccompanied by an upward movement of the latch from its first position,and a jack member articulated to the hook member and responsive to thepattern control means of the circular knitting machine for selectivelyoperating the hook member, the jack member having a second butt in contactwith the second cam track for effecting a prescribed movement of the firstbutt of the latch in the first cam track, the second cam track havingascending and descending cam surfaces, the first cam track having a firstupper abutment surface coextensive with a portion of the descending camsurface of the second cam track for effecting a lowering of the latch intoits first position.2. The improved knitting machine as set forth in claim 1, wherein said hookpart has well portions defining a recess, and said latch is slidablymounted in said recess, and the engagement effecting means comprises anupwardly facing abutment on the hook portion and a cooperating downwardlyfacing abutment on the latch, the cooperating abutments being separated bythe predetermined distance when the hook portion is in its lowermostposition.3. The improved knitting arrangement as set forth in claim 1, wherein saidfirst cam track further comprises a second substantially horizontal upperabutment surface which is coextensive with a first portion of saidascending cam surface that has a vertical component equal to thepredetermined distance, a third upper abutment surface contiguous to saidsecond abutment surface and parallel to said ascending cam surface andcoextensively terminating therewith and a fourth substantially horizontalupper abutment surface interposed between said third abutment surface andsaid first abutment surface.4. The improved knitting arrangement as set forth in claim 1, wherein saidfirst abutment surface and said descending cam surface are rigidlyconnected to each other and are adjustable in the longitudinal directionof the compound needle."}
{"WKU":"039303853","Title":"Self balancing table","App_Date":"1975-01-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John C. Greczin","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"D04B 2710","References":"3651629;3789594;3848433","Claims":"I claim:1. A self-balancing table in a circular knitting machine of the typeincluding a rotating bobbin mounting table, the combination ofA. groove means provided in the table to form a path adapted to retainmovable weight means therewithin,"}
{"WKU":"039303861","Title":"Plating feeders","App_Date":"1973-09-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Frederick Keel","Assignee":"The Bentley Engineering Company, Limited","ICL_Class":"D04B 1560;D04B  934","References":"507929;1893808;2139790;2192625;2470803;2796752;2988907;3157035","Claims":"What I claim is:1. Plating feeder comprising: a mounting shank for securing the platingfeeder during use to a circular knitting machine; a first feeder part inthe form of an elongate body, a first mouth defined at the extremity ofthe first feeder part for feeding a first yarn, and means rigidly securingthe first feeder part to the mounting shank; and a second feeder parthaving a portion encircling a portion of said first feeder part andslidable lengthwise with respect to said elongate body, a second mouthdefined at the extremity of the second feeder part for feeding a secondyarn, and means mounting the second feeder part for movement with respectto the mounting shank to enable the first and second mouths to be heldseparated from one another during plating or brought into close proximityto one another during cutting and trapping or initial feeding of theyarns.2. Plating feeder as claimed in claim 1 including resilient means forbiasing the first and second mouths into close proximity, and a camfollower mounted on the second feeder part for overriding the bias of theresilient means.3. Plating feeder as claimed in claim 1 wherein the first mouth is definedby a narrow aperture in the first feeder part to provide a single feedposition for a facing yarn and the second mouth has upwardly and inwardlyinclined portions on either side of the first mouth to providealternative, interconnected yarn feeder positions on either side of thefirst mouth.4. Plating feeder as claimed in claim 1 wherein said means rigidly securingthe first feeder part comprises means releasably securing the first feederpart to the mounting in a plurality of positions to vary the distancebetween the first mouth and the mounting shank.5. A circular knitting machine comprising at least one needle cylinder; atleast one knitting station; a plurality of interchangeable feeders forsupplying yarn to said knitting station, at least one of said feedersbeing a plating feeder comprising a mounting for securing the platingfeeder to the knitting machine; a first feeder part in the form of anelongate body, a first mouth defined at the extremity of the first feederpart for feeding a first yarn, and means rigidly securing the first feederpart to the mounting; a second feeder part having a portion encircling aportion of said first feeder part and slidable lengthwise with respect tosaid elongate body, a second mouth defined at the extremity of the secondfeeder part for feeding a second yarn, means mounting the second feederpart for movement with respect to the mounting, and means for moving thesecond feeder part to enable the first and second mouths to be heldseparated from one another during plating or brought into close proximityto one another during cutting and trapping or initial feeding the yarns.6. A circular knitting machine as claimed in claim 5 including resilientmeans for biasing the first and second mouths into close proximity, and acam follower mounted on the second feeder part for overriding the bias ofthe resilient means.7. A circular knitting machine as claimed in claim 5 wherein the firstmouth is defined by a narrow aperture in the first feeder part to providea single feed position for a facing yarn and the second mouth has upwardlyand inwardly inclined portions on either side of the first mouth toprovide alternative, interconnected yarn feed positions on either side ofthe first mouth.8. A circular knitting machine as claimed in claim 5 wherein said meansrigidly securing the first feeder part comprises means releasably securingthe first feeder part to the mounting in a plurality of positions to varythe distance between the first mouth and the mounting.9. A circular knitting machine according to claim 5 in which the platingfeeder is mounted in a bracket and is slidable bodily in said bracket in adirection tangential with respect to the knitting machine.10. A circular knitting machine as claimed in claim 9 in which the meansfor moving the second feeder part comprises a cam acting on the secondfeeder part to separate the first and second mouths during plating.11. A circular knitting machine as claimed in claim 9 in which the meansfor moving the second feeder comprises a cam acting on the second feederpart to separate the first and second mouths during plating and means foradjusting the cam to enable the extent of separation during plating to bevaried.12. A circular knitting machine including at least one needle cylinder; atleast one knitting station; a plurality of interchangeable, alternativelyoperable feeders for supplying yarn to said knitting station; a firstfeeder part defined by each of the feeders and comprising an elongate bodydirected toward said cylinder; a second feeder part defined by each of thefeeders and comprising a second elongate body which extends substantiallytangentially of said cylinder; means mounting the plurality of feeders andengaging the second feeder part of each of the feeders so as to permitbodily sliding movement of the feeders substantially tangentially of saidcylinder; a plurality of trappers for trapping yarn from inoperativefeeders and wherein at least one of said feeders, being a plating feederincludes said first feeder part on which a first mouth is defined at itsextremity for feeding a first yarn; a third feeder part, a second mouthdefined at the extremity of said third feeder part for feeding a secondyarn, the third feeder part being mounted slidably on the first feederpart so as to permit the third feeder part to slide along the first feederpart; and means in part fixed with respect to the trappers and the feedermounting means and in part on the third feeder part for camming the thirdfeeder part along the first feeder part on tangential bodily movement ofthe plating feeder whereby said first and second mouths can be heldseparated in an operative position during plating or brought into closeproximity during cutting and trapping on one side of the operativeposition and initially feeding the yarns from an inoperative position onthe other side of the operative position.13. A circular knitting machine as claimed in claim 12; wherein the thirdfeeder part has at least a portion which completely surrounds a portion ofthe first feeder part.14. A circular knitting machine as claimed in claim 12; wherein the meansfor camming the third feeder part includes resilient means to bias thefirst and second mouths into close proximity, a cam follower mounted onthe third feeder part, and a cam fixed with respect to the trappers andfeeder mounting means for overriding the bias of the resilient means.15. A circular knitting machine as claimed in claim 12; wherein the firstmouth is defined by a narrow aperture in the first feeder part to providea single feed position for a facing yearn, and the second mouth comprisesupwardly and inwardly inclined flanges on either side of the first mouthto provide alternative, interconnected yarn feed positions on either sideof the first mouth.16. A circular knitting machine as claimed in claim 12; in whch the firstfeeder part is releasably secured to the second feeder part and rigidlysecurable thereto in a plurality of positions to vary the distance betweenthe first mouth and the cylinder.17. A circular knitting machine as claimed in claim 12; wherein the meansfor camming the third feeder part includes resilient means to bias thefirst and second mouths into close proximity, a cam follower mounted onthe third feeder part, and a cam fixed with respect to the trappers andfeeder mounting means for overriding the bias of the resilient means andwherein the cam acting on the cam follower on the third feeder part isreleasably securable whereby the extent of separation of the first andsecond mouths in the operative position can be varied."}
{"WKU":"039303870","Title":"Knitted fabric with a laid in metal chain","App_Date":"1973-10-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Koji Imamura","Assignee":"Tokyo Sun Co., Ltd.;The Kanon Co., Inc.","ICL_Class":"D04B  714;A41D  104","References":"1247404;1598582;1672640;1856053;1915792;2159425;2329994;2365268;2432898;2440393;2492097;2653463;3259151;3347297","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A knitted fabric comprising courses formed of a plurality of loops, someof said courses including alternatively arranged front and back loops, andat least one metal chain which extends along the course and is interlaidbetween said front and back loops, said alternatively arranged front andback loops constituting rib stitches and the other loops constitutingplain stitches, the two loops of the rib stitches that are disposed at thejunction between the rib stitches and the plain stitches being linked to aloop of the plain stitches on the adjacent course.2. A knitted fabric according to claim 1, wherein said plain stitches arearranged with the rib stitches to form a predetermined pattern.3. A knitted fabric comprising courses formed of a plurality of loops, someof said courses including alternatively arranged front and back loops, andat least one metal chain which extends along the course and is interlaidbetween said front and back loops, said front and back loops constituting1 .times. 1 rib stitches."}
{"WKU":"039303888","Title":"Locking apparatus for a gasoline filler pipe","App_Date":"1974-08-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Paul E. Barras","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B65D 5514;B65D 4316","References":"1538295;1824352;1902456;1944535","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A locking apparatus comprising:a housing having an internal chamber, a first opening and a second openingformed within said housing providing access into said chamber;a cover mounted by hinge means to said housing and movable between a closedposition and an open position, said cover capable of closing said firstopening when said cover is in said closed position, said open positionproviding access into said chamber, a latching catch attached to saidcover;a split band adapted to surround a gas filler pipe, said band beingadjustable to different diameters, said band including tightening means;a connecting flange attached to said band, said connecting flangeattachable by fastening means to said housing about said second opening;a latching pawl pivotally mounted within said housing and movable between alatch position and an unlatch position, first biasing means attached tosaid latching pawl exerting a continuous bias tending to locate said pawlin said latched position, with said pawl in said latched position saidpawl connects with said latching catch; anda key actuated lock mounted within said housing, said lock includingstructure capable of moving said pawl to said unlatched position.2. Apparatus as defined in claim 1 wherein:a second biasing means mounted adjacent said hinge means of said cover,said second biasing means exerting a continuous bias tending to move saidcover to said open position.3. Apparatus as defined in claim 1 wherein:said cover including a depending flange, said depending flange exteriorlycovering said hinge means.4. Apparatus as defined in claim 1 wherein:said connecting flange including a plurality of openings formed therein.5. Apparatus as defined in claim 4 wherein:said flange being formed of a plurality of separate spaced apart segments,said openings comprising said spaces between said segments.6. Apparatus as defined in claim 1 wherein:said latching pawl being mounted by a pivot pin within recesses formedwithin said housing and located in an established position, the locationof said lock being such to prevent withdrawal of said latching pawl fromsaid established position.7. In combination with a fuel tank, said fuel tank having a filler pipe,the open end of said filler pipe being closeable by a cap, a lockingapparatus to connect with said filler pipe and prevent unauthorized accessto said cap, said locking apparatus comprising:a housing having an internal chamber, a first opening and a second openingformed within said housing providing access into said chamber;a cover mounted by hinge means to said housing movable between a closedposition and an open position, said cover capable of closing said firstopening when said cover is in said closed position, said open positionproviding access into said chamber, a latching catch attached to saidcover;a split band adapted to surround a gas filler pipe, said band bingadjustable to different diameters, said band including tightening means;a connecting flange attached to said band, said connecting flangeattachable by fastening means to said housing about said second opening;a latching pawl pivotally mounted within said housing and movable between alatched position and an unlatched position, first biasing means attachedto said latching pawl exerting a continuous bias tending to locate saidpawl in said latched position, with said pawl in said latched positionsaid pawl connects with said latching catch; anda key actuated lock mounted within said housing, said lock includingstructure capable of moving said pawl to said unlatched position.8. The combination as defined in claim 7 wherein:a second biasing means mounted adjacent said hinge means of said cover,said second biasing means exerting a continuous bias tending to move saidcover to said open position.9. The combination as defined in claim 7 wherein:said cover including a depending flange, said depending flange exteriorlycovering said hinge means.10. The combination as defined in claim 7 wherein:said connecting flange including a plurality of openings formed therein.11. The combination as defined in claim 10 wherein:said flange being formed of a plurality of separate spaced apart segments,said openings comprising said spaces between said segments.12. The combination as defined in claim 7 wherein:said latching pawl being mounted by a pivot pin within recesses formedwithin said housing and located in an established position, the locationof said lock being such to prevent withdrawal of said latching pawl fromsaid established position.13. A locking apparatus comprising:a housing having an internal chamber, a first opening and a second openingformed within said housing providing access into said chamber;a cover mounted by hinge means to said housing and movable between a closedposition and an open position, said cover capable of closing said firstopening when said cover is in said closed position, said open positionproviding access into said chamber, a latching catch attached to saidcover;locking means mounted on said housing which includes a movable pawl toconnect with said latching catch of said cover when in the closed positionupon said housing, actuating means for moving said movable pawl; andattaching means connected to said housing for connecting said housing to agasoline filler pipe, said attaching means including means adjustable toaccommodate different diameters of gasoline filler pipes.14. A locking apparatus as defined in claim 13 wherein:said attaching means comprising at least one movable member, said movablemember being slidable upon an inclined surface formed on a portion of saidhousing, fastening means interconnecting said movable member and saidhousing portion, whereby as said fastening means is tightened said movablemember is moved toward an engagement with said filler pipe, whereby assaid fastening means is loosened said movable member is moved away fromsaid filler pipe.15. The locking apparatus as defined in claim 14 wherein:there being a plurality of said movable members slidable on inclinedsurfaces of housing portions located in a spaced apart manner and aplurality of fastening means, each one of said movable members beinginterconnected to one of said housing portions by one of said fasteningmeans for separate movement of said members toward an engagement with saidfiller pipe.16. A locking apparatus as defined in claim 15 wherein each of said movablemembers has a sharp pipe engaging portion positioned closest to saidfiller pipe, said portion tightly engaging said filler pipe upontightening of the interconnecting fastening means.17. A locking apparatus as defined in claim 14 wherein said fastening meanscomprises a threaded fastener member passing through said housing portionand threaded into said movable member, said attaching means comprisingslot means transversed by said fastener member and permitting relativemovement between said movable member and said inclined surface uponrotation of said fastener member.18. A locking apparatus as defined in claim 13 wherein said actuating meanscomprises a key-actuated lock mounted within said housing for selectivelyengaging said latching catch to lock said cover in the closed position.19. A locking apparatus comprising:a housing having an internal chamber, a first opening and a second openingformed within said housing providing access into said chamber;a cover mounted by hinge means to said housing and movable between a closedposition and an open position, said cover capable of closing said firstopening when said cover is in said closed position, said open positionproviding access into said chamber, a latching catch attached to saidcover;locking means mounted on said housing which includes a movable pawl toconnect with said latching catch of said cover when in the closed positionupon said housing, actuating means for moving said movable pawl;attaching means connected to said housing for connecting said housing to agasoline filler pipe, said attaching means including means adjustable toaccommodate different diameters of gasoline filler pipes; andsaid attaching means comprises a wedge assembly, said wedge assemblyincluding at least one wedge member movable upon an incline surface formedupon said housing, threaded fastening means interconnecting said wedgemember and said housing, whereby as said threaded fastening means istightened said wedge member is moved toward an engagement with the fillerpipe, whereby as said threaded fastening means is loosened said wedgemember is moved away from said filler pipe.20. A locking apparatus comprising:a housing having an internal chamber, a first opening and a second openingformed within said housing providing access into said chamber;a cover mounted by hinge means to said housing and movable between a closedposition and an open position, said cover capable of closing said firstopening when said cover is in said closed position, said open positionproviding access into said chamber, a latching catch attached to saidcover;locking means mounted on said housing which includes a movable pawl toconnect with said latching catch of said cover when in the closed positionupon said housing, actuating means for moving said movable pawl;attaching means connected to said housing for connecting said housing to agasoline filler pipe, said attaching means including means adjustable toaccommodate different diameters of gasoline filler pipes;said attaching means comprises a wedge assembly, said wedge assemblyincluding at least one wedge member movable upon an incline surface formedupon said housing, threaded fastening means interconnecting said wedgemember and said housing, whereby as said threaded fastening means istightened said wedge member is moved toward an engagement with the fillerpipe, whereby as said threaded fastening means is loosened said wedgemember is moved away from said filler pipe; andthere being four in number of said wedge members with a said fasteningmeans being individually connected to each said wedge member."}
{"WKU":"039303896","Title":"Lock and support device for fuel tank","App_Date":"1975-02-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert Buikus","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B65D 5514;E05B 7300","References":"1313687;2077997","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A lock and support device for a fuel tank means that includes a fueltank with a generally fixed valve having an outlet comprising:a capping and securing means connectable to the outlet,a lock connecting means attached to said capping and securing means,a moveable bar connected to said lock connecting means for movement betweena first position engaging the fuel tank means to lock said capping andsecuring means on the outlet and a second position allowing movement ofsaid capping and securing means to disengage said lock and support devicefrom the outlet,said lock connecting means includes a securing portion that may be utilizedto secure said bar in said first position.2. A lock and support device as set forth in claim 1 wherein;said capping and securing means is rotatably connected to the valve outlet.3. A lock and support device as set forth in claim 2 wherein;said bar is ring-shaped for movement over the valve to prevent removal ofsaid capping and securing means.4. A lock and support device as set forth in claim 3 including;a connecting means attachable to said securing portion to prevent movementof the moveable bar from the first position,said connecting means attachable to a fixed object to hold said tank in anupright position and to prevent theft.5. A lock and support device as set forth in claim 4 wherein;said bar is a handle when placed in a generally vertical position.6. A lock and support device as set forth in claim 5 including;a valve keyway in said lock connecting means and a wrench connected to saidlock connecting means."}
{"WKU":"039303900","Title":"Espagnolette lock","App_Date":"1974-08-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ernst Keller","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"E05B  908","References":"619202;1026209;1561254;2079583;2307106;3733865;3745795;3863471","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Espagnolette lock for the latching of doors and the like, comprising alock box; a lock box cover; an actuating nut rotatably supported on thewall of said lock box and in said lock box cover, said actuating nutincluding a rectangular through-aperture for receiving a rectangulararbor, and a slot formed in one side of said nut for receiving the key bitof a cipher key; and a sleeve adapted to be mounted in a circular apertureformed in the door, said sleeve including guide grooves and projectionsfor receiving and securing of varied actuating elements for said lock andguide and cover sleeves associated therewith.2. A lock as claimed in claim 1, said sleeve including plasticallydeformable spreader lugs for securing said sleeve in said door aperture.3. A lock as claimed in claim 1, comprising a reducing sleeve having awedge-like projection being insertable into said first sleeve; andwedge-like projection extending into one said groove of said first sleeve,and a groove being formed in said reducing sleeve for receiving a lockingbolt of an olive having a safety cylinder.4. A lock as claimed in claim 1, comprising a rosette adapted to bepositioned in said sleeve, said rosette having two projections extendinginto said guide grooves, and a safety cylinder being mountable in saidrosette, said safety cylinder having recesses for receiving theprojections of said sleeve.5. A lock as claimed in claim 4, comprising radially extending lockingscrew means in said nut for securing said rectangular arbor to said nut.6. A lock as claimed in claim 1, comprising a key shield having a shaftbeing inserted into said sleeve; and a plate being located at the rear endof said shaft, said plate having aperture in conformance with the bitconfiguration of a cipher key.7. A lock as claimed in claim 6, said key shield shaft being mounted insaid sleeve in gripping engagement therewith."}
{"WKU":"039303918","Title":"Lock cylinder cover with key engagement release","App_Date":"1975-03-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hans J. Borlinghaus","Assignee":"General Motors Corporation","ICL_Class":"E05B 1718","References":"2213814;2343605;2400229;2454925;2602319","Claims":"I claim:1. For use with a vehicle body trunk lid including a lock cylinder mountedthereon with an outwardly facing key opening for receiving a key to permitrotation thereof through an unlocking operation of said lock cylinder, acover arrangement comprising an escutcheon secured to said trunk lid andhaving a central opening formed therein axially aligned with said lockcylinder, a cover member pivotally mounted on said escutcheon for movementbetween a closed position covering said opening and an open positionpermitting access through said opening to said key opening, resilientmeans operatively connected between said cover member and said escutcheonfor urging said cover member toward said closed position, and a springdetent secured to the underside of said escutcheon and including aresilient arm having a stopping surface and an adjacent camming surfaceformed thereon and extending outwardly through said opening in saidescutcheon, said stopping surface serving to normally abut against an edgeof said cover member to retain said cover member in said open position,and said camming surface adapted to being deflected toward said lockcylinder by said key upon rotation thereof through said unlockingoperation to, thereby, withdraw said stopping surface from said covermember, permitting said resilient means to move said cover member back toits closed position upon removal of said key from said lock cylinder.2. For use with a vehicle body trunk lid including a lock cylinder mountedthereon with an outwardly facing key inlet opening for receiving a key topermit rotation thereof through an unlocking operation of said lockcylinder, a cover arrangement comprising an escutcheon secured to saidtrunk lid and having a central opening formed therein axially aligned withsaid lock cylinder, a cover member pivotally mounted on said escutcheonfor movement between a closed position covering said central opening andan open position permitting access through said central opening to saidkey inlet opening, resilient means operatively connected between saidcover member and said escutcheon for urging said cover member toward saidclosed position, and a spring detent including a support arm secured tothe underside of said escutcheon, a spring arm extending from one end ofsaid support arm, and an operating arm extending from the free end of saidspring arm, a stop surface and an adjacent cam surface formed on saidoperating arm and extending outwardly through said opening in saidescutcheon, said stop surface serving to normally abut against an edge ofsaid cover member to retain said cover member in said open position, andsaid cam surface adapted to being deflected toward said lock cylinder byan edge of the exposed head of said key upon being manually rotatedthrough said unlocking operation to, thereby, release said stop surfacefrom said edge of said cover member, permitting said resilient means tomove said cover member back to its closed position upon removal of saidkey from said lock cylinder.3. For use with a vehicle body trunk lid including a lock cylinder mountedthereon with an outwardly facing key inlet opening for receiving a key topermit rotation thereof through an unlocking operation of said lockcylinder, a cover arrangement comprising an escutcheon secured to saidtrunk lid and having a central opening formed therein axially aligned withsaid lock cylinder, a cover member pivotally mounted on said escutcheonfor movement between a closed position covering said central opening andan open position permitting access through said central opening to saidkey inlet opening, resilient means operatively connected between saidcover member and said escutcheon for urging said cover member toward saidclosed position, and a spring detent including a support arm secured tothe underside of said escutcheon, a spring arm extending from one end ofsaid support arm, and an operating arm extending from the free end of saidspring arm, a bent-end-portion formed on the free end of said operatingarm and providing a stop surface, and a bowed extension formed on an edgeof said operating arm intermediate said bent end-portion and said springarm and providing a cam surface, said stop surface and said cam surfaceextending outwardly through said opening in said escutcheon, said stopsurface serving to normally abut against an edge of said cover member toretain said cover member in said open position, and said cam surfaceadapted to being deflected toward said lock cylinder by an arcuate-shapededge of the head of said key upon manual rotation thereof through saidunlocking operation to, thereby, release said stop surface from said edgeof said cover member and thus permit said resilient means to move saidcover member back to its closed position upon removal of said key fromsaid lock cylinder."}
{"WKU":"039303926","Title":"Straightening machine","App_Date":"1975-03-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ronald J. Matej","Assignee":"Prutton Corporation","ICL_Class":"B21D  302","References":"1109662;2550842;2860686","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A straightening machine for a flanged stem workpiece, comprising incombination:a base,an arcuate first die fixed on said base,a rotary second die journalled on said base on a first axis,feed means to feed workpieces to an entrance end of said first die forrotary passage of the stems of such workpieces between said first andsecond dies in accordance with rotation of said second die,the flange of the workpiece being larger than the stem thereof to have acontact portion of the flange continually overlapping said rotary seconddie to lie nominally in a first path of a circular arc on a radius fromsaid first axis,a straightening member journalled for rotation on said base,a straightening roller connected for orbiting movement in accordance withrotation of said straightening member and with a contact area on theperiphery of said roller,and movement means including rotation of said straightening member toestablish movement of said roller contact area in a second pathintersecting said first path during rotary passage of such workpiece stembetween said dies to engage said flange and bend said workpiece cyclicallywith the amount of bending increasing and then decreasing thereaftertoward the exit end of said first die to effect a straightening of suchflange.2. A straightening machine as set forth in claim 1, wherein said movementmeans includes drive means to establish a predeterminable rotational speedof said straightening member relative to said rotary second die.3. A straightening machine as set forth in claim 1 wherein saidstraightening roller is positioned closely adjacent said rotary second dieto engage the side of the workpiece flange facing said rotary second die.4. A straightening machine as set forth in claim 1, including meansjournalling said straightening roller on said straightening member on anaxis at an acute angle to said axis of rotation of said straighteningmember.5. A straightening machine as set forth in claim 1, including opposingcylindrical die surfaces on said first and second dies with said diesurfaces being offset in an axial direction with respect to each other toengage the stem of a workpiece therebetween for deflecting andstraightening such stem during rotary passage between said dies.6. A straightening machine as set forth in claim 1 wherein said movementmeans includes a gearing means interconnecting said rotary second die andsaid straightening member to establish a prescribed driven rotationalspeed of said straightening member.7. A straightening machine as set forth in claim 6 including gearing saidstraightening member to have a speed one-half that of said rotary seconddie, said rotary passage of the stem of the workpiece being a planetarymovement at slightly less than half the peripheral speed of said rotarysecond die to cause said straightening roller to gradually move past saidflange.8. A straightening machine as set forth in claim 7 including journallingsaid straightening member for rotation on said first axis.9. A straightening machine as set forth in claim 1 including journallingsaid straightening member on said frame on a second axis closer to saidfirst die than said first axis of said rotary second die to establish saidsecond path on a smaller circular arc than said first path.10. A straightening machine as set forth in claim 9 including journallingsaid straightening member on said second axis at a location to have saidsecond path intersect said first path at two points.11. A straightening machine as set forth in claim 9 including meansestablishing said second axis close to and parallel to said first axis andintersecting a line which substantially bisects said first die and alsointersects said first axis.12. A straightening machine as set forth in claim 1 wherein said movementmeans includes means to gradually change the phase position of saidstraightening roller relative to the contact portion of the workpieceflange.13. A straightening machine as set forth in claim 1 wherein said movementmeans includes cam means to move said straightening roller relative to theworkpiece.14. A straightening machine as set forth in claim 13 including cam followermeans cooperating with said cam means and connected to move saidstraightening roller.15. A straightening machine as set forth in claim 14 wherein said cam meansis stationary and said cam follower means is slidably journalled on saidstraightening member.16. A straightening machine as set forth in claim 1 including twostraightening rollers journalled closely together and each with a contactarea to engage the same workpiece at spaced points.17. A straightening machine as set forth in claim 16 wherein saidstraightening rollers are journalled on said straightening member.18. A straightening machine as set forth in claim 16 wherein saidstraightening rollers are journalled on said rotary second die."}
{"WKU":"039303934","Title":"Die assembly","App_Date":"1975-03-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Daniel Eppler","Assignee":"Thomas & Betts Corporation","ICL_Class":"H01R  510","References":"3434511;3636612;3667102","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property orprivilege is claimed are defined as follows:1. A die assembly for joining articles comprising: an elongate housinghaving a first end and second end; a first die member slidable in saidhousing along a first axis towards and away from said housing first end; asecond die member slidable in said housing along a second axis towards andaway from said housing first end; said second axis being selectivelydisposed at an oblique angle to said first axis and intersecting saidfirst axis generally adjacent said first end of said housing; said firstdie member having a nest portion for receiving a terminal therein formovement towards said first end of said housing; said second die memberhaving a forming portion generally facing said first die member nestportion and arranged to selectively progressively approach said first diemember nest portion upon movement of said first and said second diemembers towards said housing first end, wherein upon the insertion of adeformable terminal within said first die member nest portion and themovement of said first and said second die members towards said housingfirst end, said second die member forming portion is caused toprogressively approach said first die member nest portion andprogressively wedgingly deform such terminal about such articles locatedtherewithin.2. A die assembly as defined in claim 1 wherein said second die memberforming portion comprises elongate grooved portions arranged in juxtaposedrelationship.3. A die assembly as defined in claim 1 wherein said housing comprises keymeans cooperative with said first die member to maintain said first diemember in a given orientation with respect to said second die member.4. A die assembly as defined in claim 1 wherein said housing comprisesguide means cooperative with said second die member to maintain saidsecond die member in a given orientation with respect to said first diemember.5. A die assembly as defined in claim 1 wherein said housing has atransverse opening communicating with said first die member nest portionto provide access thereto.6. A die assembly as defined in claim 1 wherein said second die memberfurther comprises adjustable means cooperative with said housing forselectively controlling the stroke of said second die member.7. A die assembly as defined in claim 6 wherein said adjustable meanscomprises a threaded member attached to said second die member forselective contacting engagement with said housing.8. A die assembly as defined in claim 1 wherein said first die memberfurther comprises means engageable with an external driving member forforcibly advancing said first die member towards said housing first end.9. A die assembly as defined in claim 8 wherein said means comprises anextension affixed to said first die member remote from said first diemember nest portion and protruding beyond said housing second end.10. A die assembly as defined in claim 1 wherein said housing has atransverse opening communicating with said first die member nest portionand said second die member forming portion is displaceable towards andaway from said transverse opening as said second die member is positionedremote from said housing first end.11. A die assembly as defined in claim 10 wherein said second die memberforming portion is pivotingly displaceable towards and away from saidtransverse opening.12. A die assembly as defined in claim 1 wherein said first die member nestportion is positionable forwardly of said housing first end.13. A die assembly as defined in claim 1 wherein said first axis extendsgenerally parallel to the longitudinal axis of said housing.14. A die assembly as defined in claim 13 wherein said second axis extendsgenerally oblique to the longitudinal axis of said housing.15. A die assembly as defined in claim 1 wherein said housing has agenerally tubular configuration, there being an elongate opening extendinglongitudinally from said housing first end towards said housing secondend, said second die member further comprising a stepped portion slidablewithin said housing elongate opening.16. A die assembly as defined in claim 15 further comprising means on saidhousing for limiting the movement of said second slide member where saidsecond slide member is moved towards said housing second end."}
{"WKU":"039303942","Title":"Mill for plugging tubes and taking them off plug","App_Date":"1974-07-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Pavel Ivanovich Orro;Nikolai Grigorievich Kovalevsky;Alexandr Ivanovich Lobanov;Andrei Mikhailovich Arkhangelsky;Valentin Anatolievich Makarov;Jury Georgievich Goreslavets;Nikolai Konstantinovich Erokhov;Georgy Iosifovich Khaustov;Ivan Mikhailovich Obukh-Shvets;Alexandr Davydovich Vereschagin","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B21B 1710","References":"1100696;1778181;2074271;2428474;2560058;2597500;3392565;3590622;3593553;3712104;3733871","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A mill for plugging tubes and taking them off a plug after drawing, saidmill comprising: a roll table onto which a tube with a plug is deliveredfrom a drawing mill; a plug head for plugging the tubes placed over theplug to provide a clearance between the tube and plug for extracting theplug from the tube, the plug head being formed as a plurality of standsdisposed one after another, in which stands bearings are utilized asplugging members, the plug head being installed downstream of said rolltable, as viewed in the direction of movement of the tube being plugged,and wherein the tube is delivered from said roll table; a conveying devicebeing disposed downstream of said plug head as viewed in the direction ofmovement of the tube being plugged, said pulling device comprising twoframes arranged parallel to each other and fitted with guides along whichtwo endless conveying chains are transferred by a pair of drive sprocketwheels, said chains carrying articulated clamps for gripping one end ofthe plug to draw the tube with the plug through said plug head and toextract the plug from the tube on completion of the plugging operation,said conveying device being provided with elements for moving said clampsapart before they have gripped the tube and when the tube is released fromsaid clamps; and apparatus for separating the tubes from the plug set upon said pulling device in its rear portion adjacent to said plug head andcomprising power cylinders secured on said pulling device at an acuteangle to a plane passing through said guides of said pulling device sothat the cylinders do not interfere with the guides located in said planeand with the pulling chains moving along the guides; said power cylindershaving rods which carry jaws fastened to them and adapted for gripping andholding the tube being plugged in place to enable the extraction of theplug from the tube with the help of said clamps.2. A mill of claim 1, wherein to prevent impact loads on the tube whengripped, misalignment of said jaws with respect to said plugging axis andto return said jaws to their initial position in case of emergencypressure drop in said power cylinders, a gear for taking the tubes off theplug is furnished with auxiliary cylinders located in parallel with saidpower cylinders in the same plane, said auxiliary cylinders havingspring-biased rods connected to said jaws.3. A mill of claim 1, wherein to prevent damage on the surface of the tubewhen gripped with said jaws of the gear for taking the tubes off the plug,said jaws are fitted with resilient elements which contact directly thesurface of the tube being gripped."}
{"WKU":"039303950","Title":"Rolling mill","App_Date":"1975-04-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Erich Bretschneider;Hermann Leitner;Friedhlem Bohmer","Assignee":"Schloemann-Siemag Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"B21B  118;B21B 4108","References":"407177;3383896;3533260;3561105","Claims":"The invention having been thus described, what is claimed as new anddesired to secure by Letters Patent is:1. Rolling mill for high capacity and for producing large bundle weights,having a furnace followed by a roughing line and a separate intermediateand finish rolling line for each line of product,characterized by the fact that the roughing line consists of a shapingstand (4) located next to the furnace, a free outlet, permitting outletroll runout (5) of the rolled stock from the shaping stand (4), with adistribution device (6.sup.1, 6.sup.2) designed as transverse transportand arranged thereafter a planetary diagonal rolling mill (1.sup.3 and2.sup.3) for each roll line (1, 2).2. Rolling mill as recited in claim 1,characterized by the fact that the shaping stand (4) is equipped with auniversal roller set for octagonal rolling.3. Rolling mill as recited in claim 1,characterized by the fact that a hot flaming machine is associated with thebillet distribution device (6.sup.1, 6.sup.2).4. Rolling mill as recited in claim 1, wherein the shaping stand consistsof a single rolling stand receiving square cross-section billets on thecorner and converting them to octagonal cross section."}
{"WKU":"039303969","Title":"Die system for can body press","App_Date":"1974-09-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Everly Martinez","Assignee":"Reynolds Metals Company","ICL_Class":"B21D 2220","References":"3577753;3685337;3774426","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A press for ironing the side wall of a metal can body, comprising apunch, an ironing ring, means supporting the ironing ring to iron a sidewall of a can body carried by the punch as it moves in one directionrelative to the ironing ring, means to move the punch relative to theironing ring, and means to direct cooling and lubricating liquid towardthe position where the can body side wall is initially ironed in the ring,said ironing ring having a conical lead-in surface where the can bodyfirst enters the ironing ring, a cylindrical land surface adapted to ironand thereby thin and lengthen the can body side wall, and an intermediateconical surface therebetween, the semicone angle of said intermediateconical surface being between 20 and 80 percent of the semicone angle ofthe conical lead-in surface.2. Apparatus, according to claim 1, in which the semicone angle of theintermediate conical surface is about half that of the conical lead-insurface.3. Apparatus, according to claim 2, in which the semicone angle of theconical lead-in surface is about 15.degree..4. Apparatus, according to claim 3, in which the semicone angle of theconical intermediate surface is between 2.degree. and 10.degree..5. Apparatus, according to claim 1, in which the semicone angle of theconical lead-in surface is between 6.degree. and 20.degree..6. Apparatus, according to claim 1, in which the intermediate surface is0.0002 to 0.005 inch radially inward of the intersection of projections ofthe conical lead-in surface and the cylindrical land surface.7. Apparatus, according to claim 6, in which the said radial inwarddimension is about 0.001 to 0.002 inch.8. A method of finishing the surfaces of an ironing ring for making drawnand ironed metal can bodies, comprising the steps of holding the ringstationary while successively grinding a cylindrical land surface on it,grinding a first conical surface on it which intersects the land surface,and grinding a second conical surface between the first two surfaces, saidsecond conical surface having a semicone angle about 20 to 80% of thesemicone angle of the said first conical surface, said intermediatesurface being ground to a depth of 0.0002 to 0.005 inch from the originalintersection of the cylindrical and first conical surfaces.9. The method of claim 8, in which the semicone angle of the second conicalsurface is about half that of the first conical surface.10. A method of ironing the side wall of an aluminum alloy can body,comprising mounting the can body side wall around a punch, and moving thepunch through an ironing ring while passing cooling and lubricating fluidtoward the place where the can body side wall is initially ironed in thering, said ironing ring having a conical lead-in surface where the canbody first enters the ironing ring, a cylindrical land surface which thinsand lengthens the can body side wall, and a conical intermediate surfacebetween said lead-in surface and said land surface, the semicone angle ofsaid concial intermediate surface being between 20 and 80 percent of thesemicone angle on the conical lead-in surface.11. An improved ironing ring for use in a press adapted to make drawn andironed can bodies, the ironing ring having a cylindrical land surface anda conical lead-in surface, wherein the improvement comprises anintermediate conical surface between the cylindrical land surface and theconical lead-in surface, the semicone angle of the intermediate conicalsurface being in the range of about 20 to 80 percent of the semicone angleof the conical lead-in surface.12. The article of claim 11 wherein the semicone angle of the intermediateconical surface is about half of the semicone angle of the conical lead-insurface.13. The article of claim 12 wherein the semicone angle of the conicallead-in surface is about 15.degree.."}
{"WKU":"039303977","Title":"Combustion testing apparatus","App_Date":"1974-08-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Shigeru Suga","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"G01N 2500","References":"2636388;3148531;3665750","Claims":"I claim:1. A device for testing combustion properties of a testpiece, said devicecomprising:a test chamber having an air inlet port and an exhaust port therein;a test piece support positioned to support a test piece within said testchamber;a burner means movable between a first position adjacent said test piecewithin said test chamber and a second position remote from said test piecewithin said test chamber;a lateral tube coupled to said burner means;a gas bomb;means coupling said lateral tube to said gas bomb for selectively supplyinggas to said lateral tube;a flame timer for controlling the time during which a test piece is exposedto flame from the burner means during a cycle;a down-time timer for controlling the time during which the flame isremoved from the test piece during a cycle;a burner moving means operatively controlled by said flame timer and saiddown-time timer and coupled to said lateral tube for moving said lateraltube and said burner means between said first and second positions atpredetermined intervals determined by the time settings of said flametimer and said down-time timer;a first microswitch positioned to contact said burner means when saidburner means is in said first position;a second microswitch positioned to contact said burner means when saidburner means is in said second position;a counter means coupled to said coupling means and said second microswitchfor halting gas flow upon detection of predetermined number of contactsbetween said second microswitch and said burner means;a residual flame timer coupled to and operable by said counter means forproviding an indication of time lapse beginning with said halting of saidgas flow;a heat shield; andmeans operatively positioned for moving said heat shield between a positionintermediate said test piece and said first position of said burner meansand a position remote therefrom, said moving means being coupled to saidheat shield and to said first microswitch,whereby said test piece is shielded from flame until said burner means isadjacent thereto, said test piece being subjected to a predeterminednumber of periodic exposures to flame, the length of the periodicexposures and the hiatus therebetween being precisely controlled.2. A device as claimed in claim 1, wherein said burner means comprises aburner head and a first conduit connected at a first end thereof to saidburner head and at a second end thereof to said lateral tube.3. A device as claimed in claim 2, wherein said coupling means comprises asecond conduit coupled to said lateral conduit by a hose port, and aneedle valve and an electro magnetic valve operatively disposed along saidsecond conduit."}
{"WKU":"039303985","Title":"Device for continuous temperature measurement of dew point of flue gases","App_Date":"1972-07-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Tatyana Abramovna Levina;Mikhail Borisovich Serkh;Ivan Georgievich Guzynin","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"G01N 2502;G01N 2568","References":"2720107;3050982;3319457;3552186;3623356","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A device for continuous temperature measurement of the dew point of fluegases comprising in combination, a dew point temperature transmitterhaving a condensation surface; means for heating said transmitter, saidheating means being located under said condensation surface; means forcooling said transmitter and applied to said condensation surface; ssensitive unit of said transmitter located on said condensation surfacethereof; electrodes of said sensitive unit; a thermo-electric element ofsaid sensitive unit; a unit for controlling the temperature of saidcondensation surface and comprising a heating regulator connectedelectrically to said electrodes and said heating means, and a coolingregulator connected electrically to said electrodes and said coolingmeans, a signal from said electrodes carrying information about theformation of a condensate film of flue gas on said condensation surfacebeing applied simultaneously to said heating and cooling regulators, asignal from the output of said heating regulator being directlyproportional to the thickness of the condensate film, and a signal fromthe output of said cooling regulator being inversely proportional to thethickness of said condensate film; and a register electrically connectedto said thermo-electric element and adapted to register the condensatesurface temperature that is maintained equal to the dew point temperatureby said heating and cooling regulators simultaneously."}
{"WKU":"039303993","Title":"Viscosity detection apparatus and method","App_Date":"1974-07-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Miner N. Munk","Assignee":"Varian Associates","ICL_Class":"G01N 1100","References":"3535918;3589170;3592043;3753369","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Apparatus for measuring the viscosity of effluent from the column of aliquid chromatograph, said apparatus comprising:a. a flow resistance element having an elongated flow path therethrough,said flow path having an entrance and an exit connectable to carry a flowof effluent from the column through said flow path, said flow pathcontaining packing material;b. a reference sensor disposed outside said flow resistance element tosense the temperature of the effluent entering said flow resistanceelement; andc. a detection sensor disposed outside said flow resistance element tosense the temperature of the effluent exiting from the flow resistanceelement.2. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein:said reference sensor comprises a thermistor disposed proximate to saidentrance.3. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein:said detection sensor comprises a thermistor disposed proximate to saidexit.4. The apparatus of claim 1, further comprising:a comparator connected to each of said reference and said detection sensorsfor producing a differential signal which is a function of the differencebetween the temperatures sensed by said reference and detection sensors.5. The apparatus of claim 4, wherein:said comparator comprises an electrical bridge circuit.6. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein:said flow path has a tubular configuration.7. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein:said packing material is particulate.8. The apparatus of claim 7, wherein:said packing material comprises spherical glass beads.9. The apparatus of claim 7, further comprising:a screen interposed across each of said entrance and exit of said flow pathfor retaining said packing material within said flow path.10. The apparatus of claim 1, further comprising:a housing enclosing said flow resistance element, and each of saidreference and said detection sensors.11. The apparatus of claim 10, further comprising:thermal insulation disposed within said housing to insulate said flowresistance element and said sensors from thermal exchange with theenvironment external to said housing.12. The apparatus of claim 11, wherein:said flow resistance element comprises a first disc mounted within saidhousing and having an aperture through its center, said aperturecomprising said flow path.13. The apparatus of claim 12, further comprising:a. a retainer disc mounted within said housing adjacent one side of saidfirst disc and disposed for supporting said reference sensor, andb. another retainer disc mounted within said housing adjacent the otherside of said first disc and disposed for supporting said detection sensor.14. A method for measuring the viscosity of effluent from the column of aliquid chromatograph utilizing known properties of said effluent and knownoperating parameters of said chromatograph, said method comprising thesteps of:a. forcing the effluent through an elongated flow path having an entranceand exit;b. sensing the temperature of the effluent entering said flow path;c. sensing the temperature of the effluent exiting from the flow path;d. comparing the sensed entrance and exit temperatures, ande. deriving an indication of the viscosity of said effluent from thecomparison of said sensed entrance and exit temperatures and from saidknown properties of said effluent and said known operating parameters ofsaid chromatograph.15. The method of claim 14, further comprising the step of:rendering said flow path tortuous to the passage of liquid therethrough.16. The method of claim 14, further comprising the step of:retarding heat exchange between the region of said flow path and theenvironment external to said flow path.17. A method for identifying components of a liquid sample, said methodcomprising the steps of:a. passing the sample through a column of a liquid chromatograph havingknown operating parameters, andb. detecting the viscosity of the effluent of the column utilizing knownproperties of said effluent and the known operating parameters of saidchromatograph by"}
{"WKU":"039304000","Title":"Self-operating machine for dry test of hollow bodies of the heat","App_Date":"1974-04-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Alain Edouard Plegat","Assignee":"Societe Anonyme des Usines Chausson","ICL_Class":"G01M  304","References":"1873602;1900918;2962655;3176503","Claims":"I claim:1. A machine for detecting leaks in hollow bodies, by testing each hollowbody by comparison with an identical reference hollow body, hollow bodiesof different kinds being tested simultaneously and each hollow body havingat least two apertures, comprising:a plurality of units, each having a support and carrier means for areference hollow body and for the hollow body to be tested;a first set of caps for closing all apertures but one of each of the hollowbodies whereby one aperture remains free for each of the hollow bodies;a further first set of caps for connecting said free apertures of each ofsaid reference hollow bodies to a common distributing test compressedgaseous fluid supply;a further second set of caps associated with said carrier means forconnecting said free aperture of each of said hollow bodies to be testedand carried by said carrier means to said common distributing testcompressed gas fluid supply;a differential manometer having two inputs each respectively connected toone of said further first and further second sets of caps;a rotatable table supporting said plurality of units, said units beingpositioned in spaced relationship along the periphery of said rotatabletable;arcuate controlling means operatively coupled with said table;means for rotating said table at a substantially constant speed;means engaging said arcuate controlling means for simultaneously couplingsaid reference hollow bodies and hollow bodies to be tested with saidcompressed test gas fluid supply and for then simultaneously isolatingsaid reference hollow bodies and hollow bodies to be tested from said testcompressed gas fluid supply and simultaneously coupling said referencehollow bodies and hollow bodies to be tested respectively to the twoinputs of said differential manometer;means operatively coupled to said differential manometer for reading saiddifferential manometer and operated from said differential manometer inresponse to a leak detected thereby, said reading means operating saidcarrier means for releasing thereof thus causing dropping of said testedhollow body in which a leak is detected in a first position; andoperating means angularly spaced with respect to said means for readingsaid differential manometer for releasing said carrier means carryingtested hollow bodies which are determined to be leak-proof so as to dropsaid latter leak-proof hollow bodies in a second position.2. Machine according to claim 1, wherein said carrier means comprises atleast one gripper to hold a hollow body; a first air cylinder controllingsaid gripper; and a switch for operating said first cylinder; said capclosing the aperture of said hollow body under test and applying voltageto said switch.3. Machine according to claim 2 wherein said cap for closing said apertureof each of said hollow bodies comprises a distortable packing maintainedbetween two sliding bearing washers, said machine including a second aircylinder controlled in time relation with said first air cylinderoperatively coupled to said cap to cause deformation of said packingwithin said aperture.4. Machine according to claim 3 comprising a pipe in which is inserted insaid distortable packing of said cap, and wherein said gripper surroundssaid pipe which is connected to the aperture of the hollow body and whichis inserted in the distortable packing of the cap, said cap being crossedthrough by a tube on which are mounted said bearing washers, said tubebeing connected, on one hand, to a duct connected to the test compressedgas fluid supply for feeding the test compressed gaseous fluid to thehollow body, and on the other hand, to said second air cylinder, saidsecond air cylinder being slidably mounted and connected to a third aircylinder connected to the cap for operation thereof and for removing saidcap following operation of said second air cylinder in a direction to stopdeforming of said packing.5. Machine according to claim 4, wherein said switch is controlled byplacing the hollow body on a carrier means, and further comprising a firstelectro-valve controlled by said switch for controlling operation of saidfirst air cylinder for controlling said grippers and said caps, wherebysaid unit will only operate if said unit is provided with a hollow body tobe tested.6. Machine according to claim 5, comprising a second electro-valve forcontrolling the operation of said second air cylinder and of said thirdair cylinder which respectively control the distortable packing of the capand the removing of said cap, said second electro-valve being connected tothe output of said first electro-valve operated by said switch controlledby placing the hollow body, said second electro-valve being coupled to andcontrolled by said arcuate controlling means.7. Machine according to claim 6, wherein said arcuate controlling meansincludes a plurality of rings coupled to said table.8. Machine according to claim 7, comprising two serially mounteddistributing electro-valves for controlling the test compressed gas fluidbeing supplied and evacuated from the hollow body to be tested as well asfrom the reference hollow body, said two serially mounted distributingelectro-valves being simultaneously controlled to supply the testcompressed gaseous fluid by means of a drive electro-valve fed inoperating air through the second electro-valve controlling both saidsecond air cylinder and said third air cylinder, said drive electro-valvebeing itself controlled through one ring of said arcuate controlling meansand said two serially mounted distributing electro-valves being controlledto evacuate the hollow body under test and the reference hollow bodythrough a second ring of said arcuate controlling means, said first andsecond rings being angularly spaced from each other by an angular distancecorresponding to a rotation angle of the table for which said twodistributing electro-valves maintain the hollow body under test and thereference hollow body isolated from said test compressed gas fluid supplyand connected with the two inputs of the differential manometer.9. Machine according to claim 8, wherein the air used for operating saidair cylinders and said electro-valves is an air charged with lubricant,and the test compressed gaseous fluid supplied to said two seriallymounted distributing electro-valves and to the reference hollow body andthe hollow body to be tested is a dry and filtered air said dry andfiltered air as well as said air charged with lubricant being supplied tothe different units by rotary manifolds placed above the rotary table andfed by ducts placed in a hollow shaft constituting a rotation spindle forthe table, said hollow shaft being provided with a rotating connection forsupplying said ducts leading to the manifolds.10. Machine according to claim 2, comprising a pushing plate against whicha pipe connected to the aperture of the hollow body abuts when closed bythe cap, said switch causing operation of the first cylinder beingoperated by said pushing plate.11. Machine according to claim 2, wherein the switch of each of the unitsis electrically supplied from said arcuate controlling means.12. Machine according to claim 2, comprising a memory for storing thereading of said differential manometer, which reading indicatesrespectively the leaking and the leak-proof states of the heat exchangerunder test, said memory having two parallel circuits coupled in serieswith said switch operating said first air cylinder, each of said twocircuits comprising a first contact means forming a flip-flop circuit anda second contact operatively coupled with each of said units, each of saidsecond contacts being controlled from a contactor driven by the rotatabletable and activated by fixedly positioned cams whereby said gripperholding the hollow body is controlled to drop said hollow body at one ofsaid two contactors depending on the initial state of said memory.13. Machine according to claim 12, wherein the first contact forming aflip-flop circuit is normally closed on one of the two parallel circuitswhich corresponds to the leaking state of the hollow-body under test.14. Machine according to claim 12, comprising a cam controlling thecontactor corresponding to the leaking state of the hollow body under testwhich is first operated during rotation of the rotatable table.15. Machine according to claim 2, comprising a marking device, and whereinsaid gripper of each unit is provided with means for operating saidmarking device for those of the hollow bodies which are considered by saidreading means as being leak-proof, said marking device being coupledbetween the said first and second positions in which the hollow bodies aredropped depending on the leaking and respectively leak-proof state,whereby said marking device is not operated when said gripper has beenreleased to drop a leaking hollow body since said gripper will move uponreleasing thereof the means for operating the marking device.16. Machine according to claim 1, wherein said first set of caps forclosing all apertures but one of the hollow body is operated insynchronism with the cap through which the test compressed gas fluid issupplied to said hollow bodies.17. Machine according to claim 1, wherein said arcuate controlling meansincludes a plurality of rings coupled to said table.18. Machine according to claim 17, wherein said means for reading saiddifferential manometer comprises a photo-electric cell having an ouput; anamplifier coupled to said output of said photo-electric cell saidamplifier receiving power supply voltage from one ring of said arcuatecontrolling means; a memory, the reading being transmitted by a secondring of said arcuate controlling means to said memory and indicatingrespective leaking and leak-proof states of the tested hollow body justbefore evacuation of the two hollow bodies from the test gaseous fluid,said memory controlling said operating means for releasing of said carriercarrying the tested hollow bodies and dropping said tested hollow bodiesin said first or second positions.19. Machine according to claim 18, wherein the amplifier is suppliedthrough a first switch controlled by a second switch, said second switchbeing operated by a pressure controlling component connected to thereference hollow body.20. Machine as set forth in claim 18, comprising at least one partialcounter of the respective leaking and leak-proof hollow bodies is mountedon each working unit and is coupled to and controlled by said memory.21. Machine according to claim 1, comprising conveyors mounted along theperiphery of said rotatable table below said first and second droppingpositions of the hollow bodies.22. Machine according to claim 1, comprising at least one device sensitiveto the pressure of the compressed gaseous fluid circuits leading to saidreference hollow body and to the hollow body to be tested and controllingthe electric supply of the machine and also the power supply of said meansfor rotating said rotatable table.23. Machine according to claim 1, wherein each working unit is providedwith a bracket for supporting at least one hollow body waiting to betested, whereby said waiting hollow body is held on the machine for a timecorresponding to at least one revolution of said rotary table to enableits temperature to be equalized with that of the reference hollow body.24. Machine according to claim 1, comprising at least one countercontrolled by a circuit receiving in series, on one hand, firstinformation from said carrier means supporting the hollow bodies and, onthe other hand, second information from a contactor rotating with saidtable of the machine, said counter being operated only when said first andsecond information is supplied simultaneously, whereby counting takesplace only upon placing of a hollow body to be tested on said carriermeans and when said hollow body is undergoing a testing cycle."}
{"WKU":"039304019","Title":"Container and leak-testing system therefor","App_Date":"1973-04-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Harry H. Filler","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"G01M  302","References":"2020535;2130637;2177019;3595065;3762213","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a method of testing opening-equipped containers for leakage duringthe relatively long time period intermediate fabrication of such containerby the manufacturer therefor and filling the same by the user with theproduct intended therefor, comprising the steps of: establishing apressure differential between the interior and exterior of such container;seating a closure member against such container, in covering relation withthe opening thereof to sealingly relate the closure member and containerusing such pressure differential to maintain the sealing relationshiptherebetween, such that the closure member engages only the container; andthereafter testing the tightness of the closure member against thecontainer as an index of any loss of such pressure differential.2. The method of claim 1 in which the step of seating the closure memberand maintaining the same in sealing relationship with the container iseffected entirely by the pressure differential between the interior andexterior of the container.3. The method of claim 1 in which the step of establishing a pressuredifferential between the interior and exterior of such container includesdeveloping a subatmospheric pressure therewith.4. The method of claim 3 in which air within the container is pumpedtherefrom to evacuate the same and develop a subatmospheric presence asaforesaid.5. The method of claim 1 in which the step of testing the closure memberfor tightness includes attempting to remove the closure member byapplication of a limited force thereto.6. The method of claim 5 in which the container is inverted to orient theclosure member downwardly, whereby the limited force applied thereagainstis gravitionally derived.7. The method of claim 1 including the further step of providing a closuremember dimensioned to fit loosely within the container opening and overliethe external marginal edge portions thereof, in which said closure memberis seated within the opening, and in which the step of establishing apressure differential between the interior and exterior of such containerincludes reducing the pressure within the container to a subatmosphericvalue.8. The method of claim 7 in which the step of seating the closure memberand maintaining the same in sealing relationship with the container iseffected entirely by the pressure differential between the interior andexterior of the container.9. The method of claim 8 in which air within the container is pumpedtherefrom to evacuate the same as aforesaid, and in which the step oftesting the closure member for tightness includes attempting to remove theclosure member by application of a limited force thereto.10. The method of claim 9 including the further step of transporting thesealed container from its place of sealing to its place of use prior totesting the tightness of the closure member.11. The method of claim 1 including the further step of transporting thesealed container from its place of sealing to its place of use prior totesting the tightness of the closure member.12. In a method of testing opening-equipped containers for leakage duringthe relatively long time period intermediate fabrication of such containerby the manufacturer thereof and filling the same by the user with theproduct intended therefor, the steps of: establishing a pressuredifferential between the interior and exterior of such container at itsplace of manufacture; closing such opening with a closure member tomaintain the pressure differential; transporting the sealed containerincluding said closure member from its place of manufacture to its placeof use with such pressure differential being maintained; and thereaftertesting the container at its place of use for any loss of such pressuredifferential.13. In a method of reducing the pressure within a container having anopening in a lip-equipped wall thereof and of sealingly seating a closuremember against such container in covering relation with the openingtherein to maintain thereafter the reduced interior container pressurecomprising the steps of: placing the cover member in overlying relationwith the opening such that the uppermost portion of such cover member liesbelow the uppermost part of the lip; closing the space bounded by such lipand the wall which communicates through said opening with the interior ofthe container; reducing the pressure within such space and containerinterior to a subatmospheric value; seating such closure member againstthe container in overlying relation with the opening; and increasing thepressure within such space relatively rapidly to establish a pressuredifferential across the closure member effective to sealingly seat thesame against the container."}
{"WKU":"039304027","Title":"Viscosimeter","App_Date":"1974-02-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Dirk Adrianus Detmar;Jan Van der Sluis;Izak Johannes Stolk;Marius Hendrik Johan Zuidweg","Assignee":"Gist-Brocades N.V.","ICL_Class":"G01N 1104","References":"3327522;3548638;3610026;3802265;3808877","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A viscosimeter for testing liquids comprising: a flow system for liquidto be tested, having a capillary; zones for determining the pressure ofthe liquid to be tested located before and after the capillary, said zonesfor determining the pressure of the liquid to be tested being surroundedby tubes of a thin-walled material adapted to transfer the pressure of theliquid within the tubes to pressure transduction liquids outside each ofthe tubes; a pressure difference recording means having two chambers, eachof said pressure transduction liquids being in contact with one of saidtwo pressure chambers of said pressure difference recording means in sucha manner that the pressure of the liquid to be tested at both sides of thecapillary are transferred to said pressure chambers.2. Viscosimeter according to claim 1, wherein the tubes of thin-walledmaterial are flexible, thin-walled rubber tubes.3. Viscosimeter according to claim 2, wherein the capillary is providedwith a jacket through which a thermostatted liquid may be passed.4. Viscosimeter according to claim 1, wherein the ends of the capillary arefunnel-shaped and wherein the zones for determining the pressure of theliquid to be tested are located in line with the capillary.5. Viscosimeter according to claim 1, wherein the tubes of thin-walledmaterial are within chambers containing the pressure transduction liquid,said chambers being connected to connecting tubes, each of them leading toone of the two pressure chambers of the pressure difference recordingmeans.6. A viscosimeter comprising:a housing;a capillary tube positioned axially within said housing through which testfluid to be analyzed flows;means for measuring the pressure drop of said test fluid flowing throughsaid capillary tube comprising first and second spaced apart pressuresensing zones positioned in said housing, one zone being attached to eachend of said capillary tube, each pressure sensing zone having a containerhousing defining a chamber therein and a thin walled tube surrounding saidpressure sensing zone so that test fluid flowing in said capillary tubeflows through said pressure sensing zone and exerts pressure on said thinwalled tube;means for sensing pressure in said pressure sensing zones comprising adifferential pressure transducer;pressure transduction tubes connecting said differential pressuretransducer to each of said pressure sensing zones and pressuretransduction liquid which completely fills said transduction tubes andsaid pressure sensing zones and is separated from said test fluid flowingby said thin-walled tubes, said thin walled tubes transferring pressurefrom said pressure sensing zones to said differential pressure transducervia said pressure transduction liquid; andmeans for recording the differential pressure sensed by said differentialpressure transducer.7. A measuring circuit for determining liquid pressure comprising:a viscosimeter comprising:a housing;a capillary tube positioned axially within said housing through which testfluid to be analyzed flows;means for measuring the pressure drop of said test fluid flowing throughsaid capillary tube comprising first and second spaced apart pressuresensing zones positioned in said housing, one zone being attached to eachend of said capillary tube, each pressure sensing zone having a containerhousing defining a chamber therein and a thin walled tube surrounding saidpressure sensing zone so that test fluid flowing in said capillary tubeflows through said pressure sensing zone and exerts pressure on said thinwalled tube;means for sensing pressure in said pressure sensing zones comprising adifferential pressure transducer, pressure transduction tubes connectingsaid differential pressure transducer to each of said pressure sensingzones, and pressure transduction liquid which completely fills saidtransduction tubes and said pressure sensing zones and is separated fromsaid test fluid flowing by said thin walled tubes, said thin walled tubestransferring pressure from said pressure sensing zones to saiddifferential pressure transducer via said pressure transduction liquid;means for recording the differential pressure sensed by said differentialpressure transducer; anda supply of liquid to be tested.8. Measuring circuit according to claim 7, wherein the supply for theliquid to be tested consists of a zone in which the temperature ofsubstrate may be brought to a desired level, a zone adapted to receive areagent in a predetermined amount, and a zone in which the thus obtainedliquid to be tested is supplied to the viscosimeter.9. Viscosimeter comprising a flow system for the liquid to be tested,having a narrow zone, zones for determining the pressure of the liquid tobe tested located before and after the said narrow zone, said zones fordetermining the pressure of the liquid to be tested being surrounded bytubes of a thinwalled material adapted to transfer the pressure of theliquid within the tubes to pressure transduction liquids outside each ofthe tubes, said tubes being within chambers containing the pressuretransduction liquid, said chambers being connected to connecting tubes, athree way valve which may be brought in such a position that theconnecting tubes are in mutual contact prior to filling the device withthe pressure transduction liquid, said valve also allowing to form aconnection with a supply vessel for the pressure transduction liquid, eachof said pressure transduction liquids being in contact with one of twopressure chambers of a pressure difference recording means in such amanner that the pressures of the liquid to be tested at both sides of thenarrow zone are transferred to said pressure chambers."}
{"WKU":"039304035","Title":"Piston assembly","App_Date":"1974-07-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William Telford Cross;Stephen Alexander Gaydon;Andrew Gilchrist;Ernest Raymond Ellis","Assignee":"Imperial Chemical Industries Limited","ICL_Class":"G01N 1104","References":"2597138;2960860;3263494","Claims":"We claim:1. A high pressure viscometer comprising: a transfer compressor fortransmitting pressure from one fluid to another, said transfer compressorincluding a cylinder, a piston slidable within the cylinder, a spacewithin the cylinder at each end of the piston, means for admitting fluidto each of the spaces, a tell-tale rod mounted on one end of the pistonpassing slidably and sealingly through an end of the cylinder, one end ofthe piston presenting a different area to the fluid in contact with itfrom the area presented by the other end of the piston to the fluid incontact with said other end, whereby the pressure exerted on the fluid atone end of the piston may be different from the pressure existing in thefluid at the other end of the piston; and a capillary tube having oppositeends connected to the spaces at the ends of the cylinder whereby apressure difference generated between opposite ends of the piston by theapplication of pressure to the fluid contained in the end spaces of thecylinder causes the fluid to flow through the capillary at a rate whichmay be determined by the movement of the tell-tale rod.2. A high pressure viscometer as in claim 1 in which the dimensions of thecapillary, the piston and the tell-tale rod are such as to give a pressuredifference across the capillary of less than 100 kg/cm.sup.2.3. A high pressure viscometer as in claim 1 in which the capillary tube issurrounded by a constant temperature vessel."}
{"WKU":"039304043","Title":"Inside diameter, outside diameter and wall tube gage","App_Date":"1973-06-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Joseph Ryden, Jr.","Assignee":"Exxon Nuclear Company Inc.","ICL_Class":"G01N 2900;G01B 1702","References":"3554014;3599478;3636778;3732726;3828609","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An ultrasonic system for simultaneously determining the inside andoutside diameters and wall thickness of tubular objects, comprising incombination, first means containing a couplant medium capable oftransferring ultrasonic energy for use in obtaining date for themeasurement of said inside and outside diameters and wall thickness ofsaid tubular objects disposed in said couplant medium in said first means,transducer means fixedly mounted externally of said tubular objects insaid first means and immersed in said couplant medium for producingultrasonic energy upon activation thereof, said transducer meanscomprising first and second transducers mounted diametrically oppositeeach other relative to said tubular objects in said first means forobtaining data for use in measuring said inside and outside diameters andwall thickness, electronic circuit means operably connected to said firstand second transducers for producing electronic signals corresponding tothe energy reflected back to and received by said transducers respectivelyfrom the tubular objects and processing said signals to provide outputsignals representative of the inside diameter, outside diameter and wallthickness of the tubular object being measured, and reference transducermeans fixedly mounted externally of said tubular objects in said firstmeans relative to a fixed surface and immersed in said couplant medium,said reference transducer means operably connected to said electroniccircuit means for being activated simultaneously with said first andnsecond transducers for producing a reference signal, and said electroniccircuit means processing said reference signal with said electronicsignals so as to automatically compensate said system for temperaturevariations in said couplant medium2. The system of claim 1 wherein said circuit means comprises pulse meansfor simultaneously activating said first and second transducers and saidreference transducer, amplifier means for receiving signals from each ofsaid transducers and amplifying said signals to levels sufficient tooperate timer circuit means for generating electrical pulses proportionalto time intervals between predetermined ones of the amplified signals,conversion circuit means for converting said time signals to voltagesignals, and sequential timing circuit means for sequentially processingsaid signals in a predetermined manner to provide output voltage signalsproportional to the outside diameter, inside diameter, and wall thicknessof said tubular objects respectively.3. The system of claim 2 including drive circuit means operably connectedwith said sequential timing circuit means and recorder means for receivingsaid output voltage signals and processing said signals to a levelsufficient to drive said recorder means.4. The system of claim 3 wherein each of said inside and outside diameterand wall thickness is displayed separately on said recorder means, wherebyovality of the tubular objects readily may be ascertained.5. The system of claim 1 wherein said couplant medium comprises water.6. The system of claim 1 wherein said couplant medium comprises oil.7. The system of claim 1 including means for translating the tubularobjects past said transducer means so that the diameters and wallthickness are measured on a helical path of travel of said objects.8. The system of claim 1 wherein each transducer comprises a piezoelectriccrystal for transmitting and receiving ultrasonic energy.9. The system of claim 1 wherein said first and second transducers arearranged relative to the tubular object being measured such that saidultrasonic energy impinges normal to the outer surface thereof.10. The system of claim 1 wherein said electronic circuit means includespulse means for simultaneously activating said first and secondtransducers and said reference transducer, said reference transducer uponbeing activated by said pulse means transmitting an ultrasonic signal atsaid fixed surface and receiving an ultrasonic signal reflected back fromsaid fixed surface before said first and second transducers receive thereflected signals from the tubular object being measured, said electroniccircuit means including gating means for permitting the output signalreceived from said reference transducer to pass therethrough for actuatingdisplacement timer means, said displacement timer means producing outputpulses which are terminated upon arrival at said timer means of first onesof said electronic signals produced by said first and second transducerswhereby the time duration of said output pulses of said displacement timermeans is proportional to the displacement between said first and secondtransducers and the tubular object being measured, wall timer means alsoactuated by said first electronic signals for producing output pulseswhich are terminated upon arrival at said wall timer means of second onesof said electronic signals from said first and second transducers wherebythe duration of said output pulses are proportional to the thickness ofthe tubular object being measured, conversion means for converting saidoutput pulses to voltage level signals, peak reading means for reading themaximum level of said voltage level signals, and first summation circuitmeans for summing the output readings of said peak reading means forproviding an output voltage which is proportional to the outside diameterof the tubular object being measured and second summation circuit meansfor providing an output voltage which is proportional to the insidediameter of the tubular object being measured.11. The system of claim 10 wherein said electronic circuit means includesreset circuit means for resetting said conversion means prior to theoccurrence of the next transmit pulse by said pulse means.12. The system of claim 10 wherein said first and second transducer meanseach receives first ultrasonic signals reflected from the outer surface ofthe tubular object being measured and second ultrasonic signals reflectedback from the interior surface of the tubular object being measured andfor producing electronic signals respectively corresponding thereto, saidfirst ones of said electronic signals corresponding to said firstultrasonic signals and said second ones of said electronic signalscorresponding to said second ultrasonic signals.13. A method for the simultaneous determination of the inside and outsidediameters and wall thickness of a tubular member, comprising the steps of:a. providing an energy coupling medium capable of transferring ultrasonicenergy;b. passing said tubular member having a void interior in a helical path ofmovement through said medium;c. impinging ultrasonic energy througn said medium in a normal direction onthe exterior and interior surfaces of said tubular member from fixedenergy producing means located externally of and on diametrically oppositesides thereof, whereby said energy is reflected back from said surfaces tosaid energy producing means;d. converting the reflected energy into electrical signals; ande. electronically processing said electrical signals into output signalsproportional to the outside diameter, inside diameter and wall thicknessof said tubular member.14. The method of claim 13 including the step of impinging ultrasonicenergy through said medium on a fixed surface from fixed energy producingreference means whereby said energy is reflected back from said fixedsurface to said energy producing reference means, converting the reflectedenergy to an electrical reference signal, and electronically processingsaid electrical signals with reference to said electrical reference signalto automatically compensate for temperature variations in said couplingmedium.15. The method of claim 13 wherein first ultrasonic energy signals arereflected back from the outer surface of said tubular member and secondultrasonic energy signals are reflected back from the inner surface ofsaid tubular member comprising the steps of:f. converting the first and second reflected ultrasonic energy signals intofirst and second voltage signals;g. electronically processing said first and second voltage signals intooutput signals proportional to said outside diameter and inside diameterand wall thickness of said tubular member including adding said firstvoltage signals, obtaining a voltage signal corresponding to the durationof time between the first and second reflected ultrasonic energy signals,and subtracting from the summation of said first voltage signals a voltagesignal corresponding to the time delay between said first and secondvoltage signals reflected back.16. An ultrasonic system for the simultaneous determination of the insideand outside diameters and wall thickness of a tubular member having innerand outer surfaces, comprising in combination, container means forcontaining a couplant medium capable of transferring ultrasonic energy foruse in obtaining data for the measurement of said diameters and thicknessof said tubular member, said tubular member being void and disposed insaid couplant medium in said container means, first and second transducermeans fixedly mounted externally of said tubular member in said couplantmedium for producing ultrasonic signals upon activation thereof andmounted diametrically opposite each other relative to said tubular memberfor directing said ultrasonic signals normal to said tubular member, andreference transducer means fixedly mounted externally of said tubularmember in said couplant medium relative to a fixed surface, said first andsecond transducer means and said reference transducer means operablyconnected with electronic circuit means including clock means forproviding timing pulses at a predetermined frequency for simultaneousapplication to voltage pulse generator means and reference gate generatormeans, said voltage pulse generator means producing output pulses whichare coupled to said first and second transducer means and said referencetransducer means, said first and second transducer means converting saidoutput pulses to ultrasonic signals for transmission through said couplantmedium inaa normal direction relative to said tubular member in saidcouplant medium, at least a portion of said ultrasonic signals beingreflected back from said outer surface of said tubular member to saidfirst and second transducer means and the remainder of said ultrasonicsignals being reflected back from the inner surface of said tubular memberto said first and second transducer means, said first and secondtransducer means converting the reflected back signals to outer and innertube surface electrical signals, said reference transducer means producingan ultrasonic signal and directing it to said fixed surface whereupon itis reflected back to said reference transducer means for conversion to anelectrical reference signal, said electronic circuit means processing saidsurface electrical signals with reference to said electrical referencesignal for automatically compensating said system for temperaturevariations in said couplant, amplifier means for amplifying saidelectrical reference signal and surface electrical signals from each ofsaid transducers, displacement timer means receiving said electricalreference signal and producing output pulses, said outer tube surfaceelectrical signals also being applied to said displacement timer means forterminating said output pulses therefrom whereby the time duration of saidoutput pulses is proportional to the displacement between said first andsecond transducer means and said tubular member, said wall timer meansalso receiving said outer tube surface signals and producing outputpulses, said inner tube surface signals also being applied to said walltimer means for terminating said output pulses therefrom whereby theduration of said output pulses is proportional to the thickness of saidtubular member, conversion means comprising voltage ramp generators forconverting the timing pulses produced by said wall timer means and saiddisplacement timer means to voltage levels, peak reading circuit meansoperably connected with said voltage ramp generator means, and summationcircuit means connected with said peak reading circuit means for producinganalog voltages corresponding to the wall thickness, the inside diameterof and the outside diameter of said tubular member, whereby the outsideand inside diameters and said wall thickness are substantially independentof temperature variations in said couplant medium.17. Ths system of claim 16 including triggering inhibiting means forpreventing false triggereing of said wall timer means, said signalinhibiting means being activated when said displacement timer means isturned off and terminating operation when said outer tube surfaceelectrical signals have returned to substantially zero voltage level.18. The system of claim 16 including ramp reset generator means forreceiving said timing pulses and generating pulses for resetting saidvoltage ramp generators prior to the next succeeding timing pulse.19. An ultrasonic system for simultaneously determining the inside andoutside diameters and wall thickness of tubular objects, comprising incombination, first means containing a couplant medium for transferringultrasonic energy signals for use in obtaining data for the measurement ofsaid inside and outside diameters and said wall thickness of each of saidtubular objects disposed in said couplant medium in said first means,transducer means fixedly mounted externally of said tubular object in saidfirst means and immersed in said couplant medium for producing initialultrasonic energy signals upon activation thereof and impinging saidenergy signals on said tubular object being measured, said transducersmeans comprising first and second transducers mounted diametricallyopposite each other relative to said tubular object in said couplantmedium for obtaining data for use in measuring said inside and outsidediameters and said wall thickness, said first and second transducersreceiving first and second ultrasonic energy signals reflected back fromthe outer and inner surfaces of said tubular object being measuredrespectively, said first ultrasonic energy signal comprising a portion ofsaid initial energy signal impinged on said tubular object being measuredand being reflected from said outer surface thereof, and said secondultrasonic energy signal comprising the remainder of said initial energysignal which passes through the wall of said tubular object being measuredand is reflected from said inner surface thereof, said first and secondtransducers converting said first and second ultrasonic energy signals tofirst and second electrical signals respectively, electronic circuit meansoperably connected to said first and second transducers for receiving saidfirst and second electrical signals and producing further correspondingelectrical signals and processing said further electrical signals withrespect to a reference electrical signal to provide output signalsrepresentative of said inside diameter and outside diameter and said wallthickness of said tubular object being measured, and reference transducermeans fixedly mounted externally of said tubular object in said firstmeans relative to a fixed surface and immersed in said couplant medium,said reference transducer means operably connected to said electroniccircuit means for being activated substantially simultaneously with saidfirst and second transducers to produce said reference signal, and saidelectronic circuit means constructed and arranged for processing saidelectrical signals with respect to said reference signal such that saidsystem automatically is compensated for temperature variations in saidcouplant medium whereby said output signals are independent of temperaturevariations in said couplant medium and the measurements of said inside andoutside diameters and said wall thickness are highly accurate.20. The system of claim 19 wherein said electronic circuit means sums saidfirst ultrasonic energy signals from each of said first and secondtransducers respectively for determining said outside diameter of saidtubular object."}
{"WKU":"039304051","Title":"Method and means for measuring acoustic emissions","App_Date":"1974-09-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Claus J. Renken, Jr.","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the United States Energy","ICL_Class":"G01D  700;G01N  918","References":"2788516;3604251;3716782;3824459","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property orprivilege is claimed are defined as follows:1. A device for monitoring acoustic emissions from an object, comprising:a capacitive transducer having two electrodes and a thin dielectric of micabetween 2 and 5 mils thick disposed therebetween, one of said electrodesbeing mechanically coupled to the object, a pulsed voltage source coupledto and capable of charging said capacitive transducer to an initialvoltage V.sub.i between said electrodes such that the E field impressedupon said dielectric is at least 0.5 volt/mil, a load coupled across saidcapacitive transducer for discharging said capacitive transducer to avoltage less than V.sub.i, said source being responsive to the voltagebetween said electrodes being 0.2 V.sub.i to recharge said capacitivetransducer to V.sub.i, with said capacitive transducer discharging acrosssaid load the rate of change in the voltage across said load beingproportional to the normally exponential rate of discharge of saidcapacitive transducer, an AGC amplifier coupled to said load, and beingresponsive to the voltage across said load to develop an output signalbeing the amplification of the voltage across said load with a magnitudeof amplification inversely proportional to the value of the voltage acrosssaid load, and monitoring means coupled to said AGC amplifier andresponsive to the output voltage thereof to detect modulations in saidoutput signal from that which said output signal would be due to saidnormally exponential rate of change of the voltage across said load, thetime constant of said AGC amplifier being shorter than the time constantof said normally exponential rate of discharge and longer than the timeconstant of said modulations, said modulations indicating the presence ofacoustic emissions from the object.2. The device of claim 1 wherein the E field impressed upon said dielectricis between 2 and 5 volt/mil."}
{"WKU":"039304060","Title":"Cigarette ends firmness detector","App_Date":"1974-09-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Giovanni Pezzi","Assignee":"AMF Incorporated","ICL_Class":"G01N  340","References":"3116478;3527347;3703235","Claims":"I claim:1. A device for detecting the degree of firmness of cigarette ends,comprisinga rotating pneumatic drum sequentially moving cigarettes laterally oneafter another to a position to be tested,yieldable feeler means sensitive to the degree of firmness of cigaretteends and having positionable means indicating the degree of firmness of acigarette being tested,circular cam means engaging one end of said feeler means and urging theother end of said feeler means against the end of a cigarette positionedto be tested, andtransducer means disposed adjacent a cigarette being tested and operativelyassociated with said feeler means for selectively providing a signalrepresenting the position of said positionable means indicating the degreeof firmness of the end of a cigarette being tested,said drum being provided with a plurality of axially aligned pairs ofcradles disposed in an equally spaced series adjacent one end of the drum,said feeler means being a plurality of axially movable feelers supported bysaid drum each being axially aligned with a different axially aligned pairof cradles, andsaid cam means being provided with a fixed circular cam face having anarcuate portion disposed closer to the adjacent end of said drum than theremainder of said cam face urging a feeler into contact with the end of acigarette supported by an axially aligned pair of cradles when thecigarette is in a position to be tested.2. The device in accordance with claim 1, and each of said feelerscomprisinga body defining a chamber therein and having a longitudinal slot throughthe wall thereof,a stem connected at one end to one end of said body and extending axiallytherefrom into engagement with said cam face at the other end thereof,a plunger axially movable in said chamber and having a feeler pin extendingaxially through the end of said body opposite from said stem to engage thetobacco in the end of a cigarette to be tested,spring means within said chamber biasing said plunger and said feeler pinin a direction away from said stem, andsaid indicating means being connected to said plunger and extendinglaterally therefrom through said slot.3. The device in accordance with claim 2, whereinsaid transducer means comprising a light source and a photo sensitiveelement providing an electric signal in response to light, andsaid indicator means being a pin positioned by said plunger and having anend surface for directing light from said source to said photo sensitiveelement when in a predetermined position.4. The device in accordance with claim 3, and said transducer means furthercomprisingmeans for adjusting the transducer means relative to said feelers indirections parallel to and radially toward and away from the axis ofrotation of said drum.5. The device in accordance with claim 4, andsaid photo sensitive element providing electrical analog signals,circuit means for receiving analog signals from said photo sensitiveelement and providing a delayed pulse type signal when the analog signalindicates that the tip of a cigarette being tested is unacceptable, andmeans responsive to pulse type signals from said circuit means forrejecting cigarettes with unacceptable tips after a predetermined timedelay from the time such cigarettes are tested.6. The device in accordance with claim 5, andpneumatic inspecting means for testing for integrity of the wrapper ofcigarettes supported by said axially aligned pairs of cradles when suchcigarettes are in a position arcuately off-set from the position in whichthe tips of cigarettes are tested by said feelers.7. The device in accordance with claim 5, andsaid pneumatic inspection means including a transducer providing an analogsignal to said circuit means when a cigarette being tested by saidinspection means is unacceptable.8. The device in accordance with claim 7, andsaid pneumatic inspection means introducing pressure air into the end of acigarette being tested opposite from the end of the cigarette tested bysaid feeler means.9. The device in accordance with claim 7, andsaid pneumatic inspection means introducing pressure air through saidfeeler means, andsuch pressure air providing the spring means for each of said feelers forbiasing the plunger thereof in a direction away from said stems."}
{"WKU":"039304078","Title":"Water-washable inspection penetrant employing mineral solvent and a","App_Date":"1974-01-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James R. Alburger","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"G01N 1908;G01N 3122;G01N 3100;C09K 1100;C09K  300","References":"2478951;2636127;2676487;2806959;2871697;3311479;3415112;3636759;3647705","Claims":"I claim:1. In a water-washable inspection penetrant process in which awater-dispersible dyed liquid penetrant is applied to test parts, surfacepenetrant is removed by washing said test parts with water, and said partsare inspected for residual entrapments of penetrant liquid in surfaceflaws, the improvement wherein said water-washable penetrant consistsessentially of the following formulation, stated in weight percentages:"}
{"WKU":"039304086","Title":"Maximum mileage indicator for vehicle","App_Date":"1975-04-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Masahiro Kadota","Assignee":"Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha","ICL_Class":"G01F  900","References":"2593628;3014366;3347092","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A maximum mileage indicator comprising a pressure sensing mechanismresponsive to the vacuum in an intake manifold to drive an indicatormeans;a rotatable means having at least one maximum mileage curve printed thereonwith the vacuum scale taken in the radial direction and the vehicle speedscale in the circumferential direction;a speed sensing mechanism responsive to the vehicle speed to rotate saidrotatable means by an angle proportional to the vehicle speed; andsaid indicator means so arranged as to move substantially along the radialline of said rotatable means.2. A maximum mileage indicator as defined in claim 1 wherein said rotatablemeans is a disc board having at least one maximum mileage curve printed onits surface.3. A maximum mileage indicator as defined in claim 2 wherein said maximummileage curves are distinctly colored from each other.4. A maximum mileage indicator as defined in claim 1 wherein said rotatablemeans is a disc board having the vehicle speed scale as well as themaximum mileage curve printed on its surface.5. A maximum mileage indicator as defined in claim 1 wherein said rotatablemeans is a cam board having a contour similar to the figure of saidmaximum mileage curve.6. A maximum mileage indicator as defined in claim 5 wherein said cam boardhas the vehicle speed scale on its surface.7. A maximum mileage indicator as defined in claim 6 wherein said indicatorfurther comprises a maximum mileage indicator rod having its one end madecontact with the contour surface of said cam board so that it will travelalong the locus of said indicator means.8. A maximum mileage indicator as defined in claim 5 wherein said indicatorfurther comprises a maximum mileage indicator rod having its one end madecontact with the contour surface of said cam board so that it will travelalong the locus of said indicator means.9. A maximum mileage indicator as defined in claim 1 wherein said indicatormeans is so constructed as to rotate on its axis.10. A maximum mileage indicator as defined in claim 1 wherein saidindicator means is so constructed as to travel along a straight line."}
{"WKU":"039304094","Title":"Horsepower computing network for chassis dynamometers","App_Date":"1974-01-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert F. Ostrander;James W. Houck","Assignee":"Ostradyne, Inc.","ICL_Class":"G01L  513","References":"2188588;2653472;3289471","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In combination with a vehicle dynamometer for measuring the horsepowerat the drive wheels thereof where the vehicle includes an engine, drivetrain to the drive wheels thereof and fuel for the engine, where theindicated horsepower of the engine may be affected by the rollingresistance of the vehicle and one or more of temperature, barometricpressure and vehicle fuel specific gravity, the dynamometer includes meansfor deriving a signal proportional to drive wheel speed and torque as thevehicle is powered on the dynamometer to give a signal indicative of drivewheel horsepower, and circuit means including an indicating deviceresponsive to said signal for indicating horsepower; the improvementcomprising first and second resistance means in circuit with saidindicating device, the first of said resistance means calibrated in termsof vehicle rolling resistance, the second of said resistance meanscalibrated in terms of one of barometric pressure, vehicle fuel specificgravity and ambient temperature, each of said resistances being variableindependent of the other whereby the indicated horsepower signal may beselectively modified in accordance with vehicle rolling resistance and oneof temperature, barometric pressure and fuel specific gravity.2. The invention of claim 1 wherein said first resistance is calibrated asa function of vehicle rolling resistance and vehicle speed.3. The invention of claim 1 wherein said first resistance is calibrated asa function of vehicle rolling resistance and vehicle drive lineefficiency.4. The invention of claim 1 further including third resistance means insaid circuit calibrated in terms of percentage of rated horsepower, saidthird resistance being variable to select a desired percent horsepower.5. The invention of claim 4 further including switching means whereby saidfirst, second, and third resistances are selectively insertable in circuitwith said indicating device.6. The invention of claim 1 further including switching means whereby saidfirst and said first and second resistances are selectively insertable incircuit with said indicating device.7. In combination with a vehicle dynamometer for measuring the horsepowerat the drive wheels thereof where the vehicle includes an engine, drivetrain to the drive wheels where the effective horsepower of the engine maybe affected by vehicle rolling resistance, the dynamometer includes meansfor deriving a signal proportional to drive wheel speed and torque as thevehicle is powered on the dynamometer to give a signal indicative of drivewheel horsepower and circuit means including an indicating deviceresponsive to said signal for indicating horsepower; the improvementcomprising first variable resistance means calibrated in terms of vehiclerolling resistance, second variable resistance means calibrated in termsof percent of rated horsepower and switching means for selectively placingeither of said resistance means in circuit with said indicating device.8. The invention of claim 7 further including third variable resistancemeans calibrated in terms of one of barometric pressure, temperature andvehicle fuel specific gravity, and second switching means for selectivelyplacing said third resistance means in circuit with said first resistancemeans.9. In combination with a vehicle dynamometer for measuring the horsepowerat the drive wheels thereof where the vehicle includes an engine, drivetrain to the drive wheels thereof and fuel for the engine, where theeffective horsepower of the engine may be affected by one or more ofbarometric pressure, temperature, and vehicle fuel specific gravity, thedynamometer includes means for deriving a signal proportional to drivewheel speed and torque as the vehicle is powered on the dynamometer togive a signal indicative of drive wheel horsepower and circuit meansincluding an indicating device responsive to said signal for indicatinghorsepower, the improvement comprising first and second resistance meansin circuit with said indicating device, said resistances being calibratedin terms of two of barometric pressure, temperature and fuel specificgravity, said resistances being variable independent of the other wherebythe indicated horsepower signal may be modified in accordance with one ortwo of barometric pressure, temperature, and fuel specific gravity.10. The invention of claim 9 further including third variable resistancemeans calibrated in terms of vehicle rolling resistance insertable incircuit with said first and second resistance means.11. The invention of claim 9 further including third resistance meanscalibrated in terms of percentage of rated horsepower, said thirdresistance means being variable to select a desired percent horsepower.12. The invention of claim 11 further including switching means forselectively placing said first and second resistance means, or said thirdresistance means in circuit with said indicating device."}
{"WKU":"039304108","Title":"Wind tunnel model engine plume simulator with internal mass flow","App_Date":"1975-02-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard K. Ellison","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Army","ICL_Class":"G01M  900","References":"3455155","Claims":"I claim:1. For use in a wind tunnel test program a solid body missile structurehaving a missile outer configuration,A solid body engine plume simulator fixed to the rear of said solid bodymissile, said engine plume simulator having an outer configuration similarto a rocket engine plume,An annular air passageway in said engine plume simulator surrounding thelongitudinal axis of said missile and said plume simulator providingcommunication between the zone of juncture between said solid body missilestructure and said solid body engine plume simulator and the rear of saidsolid body engine plume simulator."}
{"WKU":"039304116","Title":"Fluid measuring device","App_Date":"1974-08-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Christoph Beeker;Wolfgang Melzer;Rudiger Romer;Gerhard Schieferstein","Assignee":"Linde Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"G01F  338","References":"2625933;3000207;3216251;3423998;3744314","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An apparatus for measuring the quantity of flow of a low-boiling fluidfrom fluid storage means, said storage means comprising a stored fluid,fluid discharge conduit means, and fluid inlet conduit means; a capacitorat least partially immersed within said stored fluid and comprising aninner chamber at least partially filled with said fluid, drain valve meanscommunicating with said chamber and said discharge conduit means,refilling valve means communicating with said chamber and said storedfluid, and recording means for registering the capacitance of saidcapacitor.2. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said drain valve means is two stagecommunicating with either said chamber or said stored fluid.3. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said recording means is coupled withtimer means which controls both said drain and refilling valve means.4. The apparatus of claim 3 wherein said recording means is adapted torecord the variation of the capacitance with respect to time.5. The apparatus of claim 4, wherein said variation of capacitance is astep function and wherein said timer is activated and deactivated by saidvariation in capacitance.6. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein at least two horizontally disposed,disc-shaped displacement members are superimposed vertically in said fluidin said chamber, and wherein a narrow gap is present between the outer rimof said displacement members and surfaces of the outer walls of saidcapacitor.7. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said capacitor is cylindrical having aninner concentric core, and said chamber is an annular space between theouter capacitor shell and said inner concentric core.8. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said refilling valve means and saiddrain valve means are disposed in said stored fluid of said storage means.9. The apparatus of claim 1 comprising sensing means for maintaining thelevel of said fluid in said storage means and said capacitor.10. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein said low-boiling fluid is a liquifiedgas."}
{"WKU":"039304124","Title":"Electrically scanned pressure transducer configurations","App_Date":"1975-01-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Joseph R. Mallon;Anthony D. Kurtz;John C. Kicks","Assignee":"Kulite Semiconductor Products, Inc.","ICL_Class":"G01L  906","References":"2551526;2807167;2882731;3641812;3683698","Claims":"We claim:1. A multiple pressure port transducer apparatus, comprising:a. a hollow housing including mounted therein, a plurality of pressuretransducers, each of said transducers including a silicon diaphragm havingat least one pressure sensitive piezoresistor element diffused thereon andlocated within a central region, said diaphragm mounted on an annularglass member with the aperture of said member defining an activedeflection area for said diaphragm, said plurality of transducers beingencased within said hollow of said housing and located relatively aboutthe periphery thereof, said housing including a top surface having aplurality of tubular cylindrical pressure ports coupled to said aperturesin said surface, each one of which being aligned with one selected one ofsaid transducers, in said housing, whereby each transducer is associatedwith one tubular pressure port, a slot in said housing for accommodating aplurality of leads and means for coupling selected ones of said leads toselected ones of said transducers, whereby each transducer has at leastone lead associated therewith for monitoring any change in said pressuresensitive element caused by a force applied to any one of said ports andtherefore to said aligned diaphragms, and means coupled to said selectedleads for selectively scanning said transducers to monitor each separateone.2. The pressure transducer apparatus according to claim 1 wherein saidhousing is relatively rectangular in shape.3. The pressure transducer assembly according to claim 1 wherein saidtubular cylindrical pressure ports are braized within said apertures.4. The pressure transducer assembly according to claim 1 wherein eachdiaphragm includes a piezoresistive bridge configuration mounted thereon.5. A multiple output pressure transducer, comprising:a. a first framelike member including a plurality of terminals extendingfrom the periphery thereof,b. a cover member having a plurality of apertures on a surface thereof anddimensioned to cover said frame like member with said apertures beingsurrounded by said frame like member when the two are placed incongruency,c. a plurality of tubular, pressure ports each one located in one of saidapertures on surface of said cover member,d. a plurality of pressure transducers having an active diaphragm areawhich deflects upon application of a force thereto, each positioned withinsaid frame member with said active area in close proximity to one of saidpressure ports, whereby a force exerted at said port will cause saiddiaphragm to deflect,e. means for coupling each of said pressure transducers to a different oneof said terminals extending from said frame like member for monitoringsaid force as applied to said diaphragm, andf. a scanner coupled to said terminals for providing a plurality of timeslots, each time slot associated with one of said transducer terminals toselect any desired one in a designated time sequence.6. The transducer according to claim 5 wherein said frame like member isrectangular in shape and is a flat-pack integrated circuit header.7. The transducer according to claim 5 wherein said frame like member isbonded to said cover member about the periphery of said frame.8. The transducer according to claim 5 wherein said pressure transducersinclude piezo-electric bridge configurations, each mounted on a silicondiaphragm.9. The transducer according to claim 5 wherein said cover member isfabricated from Kovar.10. The transducer according to claim 5 wherein said diaphragms of saidpressure transducers are fabricated from silicon and a glass ringassociated with and coupled to each diaphragm to define said active area."}
{"WKU":"039304132","Title":"Quick release gauge fitting","App_Date":"1973-08-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard P. Laird;William M. Sills","Assignee":"Caterpillar Tractor Co.","ICL_Class":"G01N  110","References":"2400955;2710623;3238784;3438397;3477438","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Apparatus for allowing introduction of a testing probe into a closedfluid system, meanwhile maintaining such system in its closed condition,comprising: a tubular member communicating with the fluid within thesystem; a resilient member disposed within the tubular member and havingone side exposed to the fluid within the system and the other side exposedto outside the system, said resilient member defining a passage from saidone side to said other side thereof; means for holding the resilientmember within the tubular member in continuous substantially sealingrelation therewith; means for compressing said resilient member to closesaid passage and hold said passage closed to maintain the system in aclosed state; said probe means being introducible from the other side ofthe resilient member into and through said passage in sealing engagementwith the resilient member, opening said passage thereby, and into thefluid system, the removal of the probe means allowing said passage toclose, whereby the system is continuously maintained in a closedcondition, wherein the means for holding the resilient member and tubularmember in continuous substantially sealing relation therewith comprise aclamp member threadably associated with the tubular member and defining anannular surface positioned to bear on the resilient member on said otherside thereof about the edge thereof, and an annular step defined by thetubular member and positioned to bear on the resilient member on said oneside thereof about the edge thereof, wherein the means for compressingsaid resilient member to close said passage and hold said passage closedcomprise said annular surface defined by the clamp member and said annularstep portion defined by the tubular member, angled together outwardly ofthe resilient member and positioned about portions of the resilient memberto compress the resilient member inwardly to close said passage and tohold said passage closed.2. Apparatus according to claim 1 wherein the resilient member defines anannular surface portion on the one side thereof exposed to the fluidwithin the system and angled toward the passage defined thereby inwardlyof the fluid system, whereby the fluid within the system acts on suchresilient member annular surface portion to aid in closing such passageand maintaining said passage in a closed state.3. Apparatus for allowing introduction of a testing probe into a closedfluid system including a fluid carrying body, meanwhile maintaining saidfluid system in a closed condition, comprising: a resilient memberdisposed within an aperture defined through the fluid carrying body andhaving one side exposed to the fluid within the system and the other sideexposed to outside the system, said resilient member defining a passagefrom said one side to said other side thereof; means for holding theresilient member within the aperture in continuous substantially sealingrelation with the fluid carrying body; means for compressing saidresilient member to close said passage and hold said passage closed tomaintain the system in a closed state; said probe means being introduciblefrom the other side of the resilient member into and through such passagein sealing engagement with the resilient member, opening said passagethereby, and into the fluid system, the removal of the probe meansallowing said passage to close, whereby the system is continuouslymaintained in a closed condition, wherein the means for holding theresilient member within the aperture in continuous substantially sealingrelation therewith comprise an adapter member threadably associated withthe fluid carrying body and defining an annular surface portion to bear onthe resilient member on the other side thereof about the edge thereof, andan annular step defined by the fluid carrying body and positioned to bearon the resilient member on the other side thereof about the edge thereof,wherein the means for compressing the resilient member to close saidpassage and hold said passage closed comprise an annular surface definedby the fluid carrying body within the aperture, angled downwardly inwardlyof the aperture toward the fluid within the system, and in continuousannular contact with the resilient member."}
{"WKU":"039304140","Title":"Method and apparatus for obtaining a representative sample of fluid","App_Date":"1973-10-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jolly T. Russell","Assignee":"Panhandle Eastern Pipe Line Co.","ICL_Class":"G01N  114","References":"2245679;3794909","Claims":"The invention having been described, what is claimed is:1. A method of obtaining a representative sample of fluid flowing through apipeline comprising the steps of connecting a sample bottle to thepipeline through a flow restriction through which fluid can flow from thepipeline into the sample bottle, measuring the pressure drop across arestriction in the pipeline, measuring the pressure drop across a flowrestriction through which the fluid flows to the sample bottle andmaintaining the pressure drop across the flow restriction through whichthe fluid flows to the sample bottle a proportional amount of the pressuredrop across the flow restriction in the pipeline to cause the fluid toflow into the sample bottle at a rate proportional to the rate of flow offluid in the pipeline.2. Apparatus for obtaining a representative sample of a fluid flowingthrough a conduit comprising means restricting the flow of fluid throughthe conduit to provide a pressure drop proportional to the rate of flow offluid through the conduit, a sample bottle, a sample conduit connectingthe sample bottle to the fluid conduit, means restricting the flow offluid through the sample conduit to the sample bottle to provide apressure drop across the flow restriction proportional to the rate of flowof fluid to the sample bottle and means for maintaining the rate of flowof fluid to the sample bottle proportional to the rate of flow of fluidthrough the fluid conduit to obtain a continuous flow of fluid into thesample bottle at a rate proportional to the rate of flow of fluid in theconduit said means for maintaining the rate of flow to the sample bottleincluding means for measuring the pressure drop across the flowrestricting means in the fluid conduit, means for measuring the pressuredrop across the flow restricting means in the sample conduit, and meansresponsive to the pressure drops to control the flow of fluid through thesample conduit to maintain the rate the fluid flows into the sample bottleproportional to the rate of flow of fluid in the fluid conduit.3. Apparatus for obtaining a representative sample of a fluid flowingthrough a conduit during a preselected period of time comprising a bottlefor collecting the sample, a conduit connecting the sample bottle to thefluid conduit, a flow restriction in the fluid conduit, a flow restrictionin the sample conduit to restrict the flow of fluid through the sampleconduit sufficiently to keep the pressure downstream of the flowrestriction from reaching the pressure of the fluid in the fluid conduit,means for measuring the pressure drop across each flow restriction andmeans responsive to the two pressure drops to maintain the pressure dropacross the restriction in the sample conduit a proportional amount of thepressure drop across the flow restriction in the fluid conduit to causethe fluid to flow into the sample bottle at a rate proportional to therate of flow of fluid in the fluid conduit.4. The apparatus of claim 3 in which the means responsive to the twopressure drops includes a second flow restriction in the sample conduitdownstream of the first mentioned flow restriction in the sample conduitand means to vary the second flow restriction to maintain the pressuredrop across the upstream sample conduit flow restriction proportional tothe pressure drop across the flow restriction in the fluid conduit."}
{"WKU":"039304159","Title":"Motion converter","App_Date":"1975-01-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Eugene Hoganson","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F16H 2704","References":"1159463;3769946","Claims":"What I claim is:1. A motion converting device including:a. a housing defining a gear receiving cavity therein;b. a first shaft member arranged for rotation and extending into saidcavity;c. a first pair of gear members arranged on said first shaft within saidcavity for rotation with said first shaft, said gear member being arrangedfor rotation on said shaft;d. at least one second shaft extending into said cavity and being arrangedfor rotation therein;e. a second pair of gear members arranged on said second shaft within saidcavity for rotation with said second shaft, said gear members beingarranged for engaging said first pair of gear members;f. said second shaft having a splined driving section and beinglongitudinally shiftable with respect to one of said second pair of gearmembers; and,g. said second shaft having a threaded section and the other of said secondpair of gear members threadably arranged thereon.2. The structure set forth in claim 1 and said first pair of gear membersincluding elliptical gears being eccentrically arranged on said firstshaft.3. The structure set forth in claim 1 and said first pair of said gearmembers being mounted on said first shaft in 180.degree. opposed relation.4. The structure set forth in claim 1 and said splined section of saidsecond shaft including externally formed splines on said shaft, internallyformed splines on said engaging gear and ball members arranged in matingrelation therebetween to permit relative longitudinal motion between saidshaft and said gear while maintaining the rotational motion thereof.5. The structure set forth in claim 1 and said threaded section of saidsecond shaft including a ball nut member surrounding the same andconnected to said gear arranged therearound to provide longitudinal motionof said second shaft upon rotation of said gear and providing rotation ofsaid gear upon longitudinal motion of said second shaft.6. The structure set forth in claim 1 and at least a pair of said secondshafts, each such shaft having pairs of second gears thereon.7. The structure set forth in claim 6 and said gears on said second shaftsincluding elliptical gears, each of said gears being in constant mesh withsaid gears on said first shaft.8. The structure set forth in claim 1 and means for imparting and receivinglinear motion of said second shafts.9. The structure set forth in claim 8 and said means for imparting andreceiving linear motion of said second shafts including a piston memberarranged on said shafts, a cylinder surrounding said piston for actuationtherein and fluid control means directing and receiving fluid to and fromsaid cylinder on opposite sides of said piston.10. The structure set forth in claim 1 and a plurality of second shaftsarcuately spaced about said first shaft and each of said second shaftshaving pairs of second gear members thereon which second gear members arein constant mesh with said first pair of gear members.11. The structure set forth in claim 1 and said first pair of gear membersincluding oval gears being concentrically arranged on said first shaft.12. The structure set forth in claim 1 and said first pair of gear membersincluding circular gears being eccentrically arranged on said first shaft."}
{"WKU":"039304167","Title":"Laminated drive arms for speed reducer","App_Date":"1974-09-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Arvid Dahlstrom","Assignee":"Dahltron Corporation","ICL_Class":"F16H 2710","References":"1658224;3256758;3557631;3772926","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A speed reducer mechanism for drivably connecting a rotating power shaftto a driven shaft comprising:motion inducing means coupled to said power shaft;at least one arm means having a pair of opposed planar side surfaces and apair of opposed edge surfaces disposed therebetween;said at least one arm means including a first end section engaging saidmotion inducing means at one of said edges and a second end sectionadapted to be operatively coupled to the driven shaft;at least one separator element being removably positioned adjacent one ofsaid sides of said second end section;said separator element having two opposed flat faces one of which is incontiguous contact with one of said sides;said at least one separator element and arm means having correspondingtransversely extending aperture means; andclutch means carried in said aperture means lying in confrontingrelationship to each other and in concentric relationship to thelongitudinal axis of said driven shaft.2. The speed reducer mechanism of claim 1 wherein said aperture meansincludes generally rectangular shaped channel means having an open sidemeans and a load bearing side means.3. The speed reducer mechanism of claim 2 wherein said load bearing sidemeans includes a sleeve of a material having a greater modulus ofelasticity than said arm means and separator element.4. The speed reducer mechanism of claim 1 wherein: said arm means includesa series of unitary laminated members, and each of said arm means isoperatively coupled to said motion inducing means for effectingintermittent rocking movement of said arm means upon rotation of saidpower shaft.5. The speed reducer mechanism of claim 1 wherein said motion inducingmeans is an eccentric means.6. The speed reducer mechanism of claim 5 wherein said eccentric meansincudes a non-rotatable sleeve, an internal eccentrically mountedrotatable element and journalled ball bearing means mounted therebetween.7. The speed reducer mechanism of claim 1 wherein: said first end means ofsaid arm means includes a sound reducing means adjacent said motionreducing means during engagement.8. The speed reducer mechanism of claim 1 wherein: said at least one armmeans includes a plurality of arm means.9. The speed reducer mechanism of claim 8 wherein: said at least oneseparator element is situated in contiguous contact between a pair of saidplurality of arm means.10. The speed reducer mechanism of claim 9 wherein said separator meansincludes a series of laminated plates.11. The speed reducer mechanism of claim 10 wherein each said arm meansincludes a series of laminated members.12. The speed reducer mechanism of claim 9 further including at least oneouter separator element positioned in contiguous contact on opposite sidesof said arm means than between said adjacent pairs.13. The speed reducer mechanism of claim 12 further including securementmeans maintaining said plurality of arms, said at least one separatorelement and said at least one outer separator element in laminatedposition relative to the output shaft."}
{"WKU":"039304175","Title":"Endless power transmission belt structure and method of making same","App_Date":"1974-07-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"David G. Ballou","Assignee":"Dayco Corporation","ICL_Class":"F16G  100;F16G  126","References":"2684315;2739090;3667308;3863515;3863516","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An endless power transmission belt structure made of a plurality ofthermoplastic elastomeric layers, each of said layers having propertieswhich are different from properties of an adjoining layer with each layerbeing particularly suited to the location and arrangement thereof in saidstructure, said layers having heat fused interfaces which provide the solemeans bonding said layers together as a unitary structure.2. A belt structure as set forth in claim 1 and having an outside and aninside surface and said layers are arranged parallel thereto.3. A belt structure as set forth in claim 2 in which said layers are madeof a thermoplastic polyester elastomer.4. A belt structure as set forth in claim 3 in which said layers comprise atension section layer, a load-carrying section layer, and a compressionsection layer.5. A belt structure as set forth in claim 4 in which each of said layersextends the full width of said belt and has an unoriented crystallinestructure.6. A belt structure as set forth in claim 3 having a substantiallytrapezoidal cross-sectional outline, said layers are arranged parallel tothe parallel sides of said trapezoidal outline, said layers comprising atension section layer, a load-carrying section layer, and a compressionsection layer, and each of said layers being a continuous layer having auniform character throughout free of a heat fused area.7. A belt structure as set forth in claim 1 and having a trapezoidalcross-sectional outline and each of said layers has a trapezoidalcross-sectional outline including opposed parallel sides, said parallelsides of each layer being disposed parallel to the parallel sides of saidtrapezoidal outline.8. A belt structure as set forth in claim 1 in which each of said layers isa continuous layer having a uniform character throughout free of a heatfused area.9. A belt structure as set forth in claim 1 in which each of said layershas a heat fused area at a location along its endless path which hasphysical properties which are substantially equal to the physicalproperties of the remainder of said belt structure.10. A belt structure as set forth in claim 9 in which each of said layershas a common heat fused area.11. A belt structure as set forth in claim 1 in which each of said layersof said belt structure has an unoriented crystalline structure."}
{"WKU":"039304183","Title":"Power transmission belt, reinforcement and process","App_Date":"1975-01-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Roger W. Dutton","Assignee":"The Gates Rubber Company","ICL_Class":"F16G  500;B29H  722","References":"3855870;3863516","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a power transmission belt of the type having a spirally wound tensilemember interpositioned between layers of a heat curable, predominatelypolymeric body, the improvement comprising:at least one cord bundle of twisted staple fibers having a negativecoefficient of expansion, a plurality of which are adhesively bonded toportions of each other, a plurality of portions of the fibers between theadhesively bonded portions arranged to generally unslackened positions,andwherein the cord bundle defines the tensile member.2. A belt as set forth in claim 1 comprising an adhesive encapsulating apredominant portion of the staple fibers.3. A belt as set forth in claim 1 wherein the staple fibers are polyester.4. A cord bundle adaptable for use with a power transmission beltcomprising:a plurality of generally longitudinally oriented staple fibers of polyesterhaving a negative coefficient of expansion, a plurality of which aretwisted and bonded with an adhesive to portions of each other, a pluralityof portions of the fibers between the adhesively bonded portions arrangedto generally unslackened positions.5. A method for making power transmission belts having steps of fabricatinga first layer of predominately elastomeric, heat curable material,spirally winding at least one cord bundle over the first layer forming atensile member fabricating a second layer of predominately elastomericmaterial over the tensile member, and simultaneously curing and moldingthe elastomeric material, wherein the improvement comprises the steps of:treating a cord bundle of twisted staple fibers having a negativecoefficient of expansion with an aquaphobic solution;successively treating the cord bundle with a water soluble adhesive andthereby bonding portions of the fibers to portions of each other;simultaneously shrinking and unslackening a plurality of portions of thefibers between the adhesively bonded portions while curing the elastomericmaterial."}
{"WKU":"039304191","Title":"Casing for shafts and cables","App_Date":"1973-07-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Morton Kramer","Assignee":"General Electric Company","ICL_Class":"F16C  110","References":"2143960;2465319;2728356;2850915;2898941;2999497;3177901;3294122;3302479;3349805;3354742","Claims":"I claim:1. A casing for shafts and cables, said casing comprising a kink-resistantflexible tubular member having over at least a portion of its length aplurality of convolutions provided with axially-spaced internalcircumferential supports capable of slidably supporting a shaft or cableat spaced intervals along the length thereof, thereby permitting bendingand longitudinal compression and extension without substantial reductionin the internal diameter of said supports, said casing being made from ahigh molecular weight engineering thermoplastic.2. A casing as defined in claim 1 wherein the tubular member consists of aconvoluted portion and at least one cylindrical end portion.3. A casing as defined in claim 1 wherein the convolutions are arcuateridges and hollows.4. A casing as defined in claim 1 wherein the convolutions are abuttingconvolutions.5. A casing as defined in claim 1 wherein the convolutions havesubstantially constant wall thickness.6. A casing as defined in claim 1 wherein each convolution has asemi-circular cross-section in an axial plane.7. A casing as defined in claim 1 wherein the thermoplastic is selectedfrom acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene terpolymers, acetal resins, acrylicresins, cellulosic resins, fluoroplastics, ionomers, methylpentene resins,nylons, polyester resins, polyphenylene ethers, pollyallomers,polycarbonates, polyethylene, polyimides, polypropylene, modifiedpolystyrenes, polysulfones, or a polyvinyl chloride.8. A casing for shafts and cables, said casing comprising a unitary, stiff,flexible and kink-resistant tubular member having over a portion of itslength a plurality of convolutions provided with axially-spaced internalcircumferential supports capable of rotatably and slidably supporting ashaft or cable at spaced intervals along the length thereof, therebypermitting bending and longitudinal compression and extension without asubstantial reduction in the internal diameter of said supports, saidcasing being made from a high molecular weight thermoplasticpoly(1,4-butylene terephthalate).9. In a flexible casing assembly of a metallic core element movable withina tubular casing member and extending beyond the ends thereof, theimprovement comprising a tubular casing member that is unitary, stiff,flexible and kink-resistant and having over a portion of its length aplurality of convolutions provided with axially-spaced internalcircumferential supports capable of rotatably and slidably supporting saidcore element at spaced intervals along the length thereof, therebypermitting bending and longitudinal compression and extension without asubstantial reduction in the internal diameter of said supports, saidcasing member being made from a high molecular weight friction-freeengineering thermoplastic."}
{"WKU":"039304205","Title":"Steering wheel assembly","App_Date":"1974-10-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ryouhei Kizu;Masahiro Harada;Teruo Kobayasi","Assignee":"Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha;Toyoda Gosei Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"B62D  104","References":"3364785;3528314","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A steering wheel construction, comprising in combination:a hub mounted at one end of a steering shaft;a rim;a plural number of spokes connecting said hub to said rim; andcover means having a base layer and a coated surface layer of a resilientmaterial and mounted over said spokes;said cover means being provided with a bent portion having a free enddisposed in the proximity of an outer edge portion of said hub.2. A steering wheel construction as defined in claim 1, wherein said spokesare three in number and are arranged generally in T-shape.3. A steering wheel construction as defined in claim 1, wherein said spokesare three in number and are arranged generally in Y-shape.4. A steering wheel construction as defined in claim 1, wherein said spokesare four in number and are arranged generally in H-shape.5. A steering wheel construction as defined in claim 1, wherein said hub,rim and spokes are formed into an integral structure by means of asynthetic resin material reinforced by iron cores which are connected toeach other.6. A steering wheel construction as defined in claim 1, wherein said covermeans comprises a base layer formed of metal; and a coated surface layerof a resilient material including soft foams.7. A steering wheel construction as defined in claim 1, wherein said covermeans is generally in L-shape including a portion extending in parallel tosaid rim and a bent portion.8. A steering wheel construction as defined in claim 7, wherein saidparallel portion of said cover means has the end thereof fixed betweencore members by means of a screw.9. A steering wheel construction as defined in claim 7, wherein said bentportion of said cover means terminates in a free end and said base layerin said bent portion is spaced by a predetermined distance from said outeredge portion of said hub at said free end.10. A steering wheel construction as defined in claim 9, wherein said baselayer is extended into said coated surface layer at an angle with respectto the base layer in said bent portion."}
{"WKU":"039304213","Title":"Differential housing cover","App_Date":"1975-01-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John J. Geis, Jr.","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F16H 5702","References":"1973905;3270583","Claims":"The invention claimed is:1. A differential housing cover comprising:a cover member;first and second threaded bores in said cover member;first and second compression bolts threadably engaged with said first andsecond threaded bores, respectively, said first and second threaded boresand said first and second compression bolts having a spatial geometry forplacing first and second terminations of said compression bolts inabutment with conventional carrier caps in a standard differentialtransmission system when said cover member is coupled thereto.2. The differential housing cover of claim 1 wherein:said first and second terminations of said first and second compressionbolts consist of first and second swivel caps, respectively.3. The differential housing cover of claim 1 and further including:first and second lock nuts in threadable engagement with said first andsecond compression bolts, respectively.4. The differential housing cover of claim 1 wherein:said cover member includes a plurality of reinforcement ribs converging onsaid first and second compression bolts."}
{"WKU":"039304221","Title":"Power transmission apparatus","App_Date":"1974-07-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Yoshihiro Morimatsu","Assignee":"Fuji Electric Company Ltd.","ICL_Class":"F16D  706","References":"2683362;2772578;3515250;3722644;3873069","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a power transmission apparatus having both manual and power inputs,means for selecting between the inputs comprising a first worm gearrotatably mounted in an outer housing coupled to a power source; a secondworm gear engaging said first worm gear and rotatably mounted about anoutput shaft, said second worm gear having a plurality of conicalintentations therein; a holder slidingly engaging the upper side of saidsecond worm gear and fixedly attached to the output shaft, said holderhaving at least one cylindrical aperture and a plurality of recessestherein; a disc mounted on said output shaft so as to be rotatably andaxially movable with respect thereto, said disc having a plurality ofconical indentations and recesses therein; spring means biasing said discinto engagement with said holder; a plurality of balls slidingly retainedin each of said apertures in said holder, the sum of the diameter of theballs being greater than the thickness of said holder; a handle rotatablymounted in said outer housing above the disc said handle havingprojections on its lower portion so as to pass through the recesses in thedisc and to be inserted into the recesses in said holder intermediate thesides thereof.2. A power transmission apparatus as defined in claim 1 wherein means areprovided for detecting axial movement of said disc."}
{"WKU":"039304230","Title":"Constant oil level control for transmission sump","App_Date":"1974-11-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James T. Craig","Assignee":"General Motors Corporation","ICL_Class":"F16H 4700;E03B  506;E03C  100;F16K 3118","References":"2568506;2570451;3107553;3144056;3363466;3412610;3500687;3524523;3789865","Claims":"It is claimed:1. In a transmission; a transmission housing having a sump; an input; andoutput; drive means in said housing receiving fluid under pressure duringoperation providing a drive between said input and output; a suctionintake centrally located in the bottom of said sump; source meansincluding a pump connected to said intake and delivering a regulatedpressure to said drive means; a fluid reservoir elevated above said sump;level control valve means having a bore and level valve element means inthe bore mounted for movement from a central closed position in onedirection to a fill position and in the opposite direction to a dumpposition; a fill and dump passage connecting said reservoir to said bore;a fill passage connecting said bore to said sump for full gravity flowfilling; supply passage means having a flow passage connecting said sourcemeans to said large bore portion for dumping control means for said levelvalve means, having a chamber and low flow restricted passage meansconnected to said chamber, control passage means having a low flow controlrestriction connecting said chamber to said sump and a relay valve elementmovable for closing said control passage means at said restriction by avery low force and biased to open position by fluid pressure in said largechamber and level sensor means operative in high fluid level condition tocause opening of said relay valve element to reduce pressure in saidchamber and said control means to move said level valve element to saiddump position connecting said supply passage to said fill and emptypassage and closing said fill passage to pump fluid from said sump andsupply passage to said reservoir and in a low fluid level condition tomove said relay valve element to closed position to close said controlpassage means so pressure in said chamber moves said level valve elementto fill position closing said supply passage and connecting said fill andempty passage to said fill passage to fill said sump from said reservoir.2. The invention defined in claim 1 and said level sensor means being aminiature float operative to control said very low force relay valveelement.3. The invention defined in claim 1 and said level sensor being a solenoidoperative to control said very low force relay valve element andthermistor means operative to control said solenoid.4. In a transmission; a transmission housing having a sump; an input; anoutput; drive means in said housing receiving fluid under pressure duringoperation providing a drive between said input and output; a suctionintake centrally located in the bottom of said sump; source meansincluding a pump connected to said intake and delivering a regulatedpressure to said drive means; a fluid reservoir elevated above said sump;level control valve means having a stepped bore having a large portion anda small portion with an intermediate step and closed at both ends, a levelvalve element having a large land in the large bore portion and a smallland in the small bore portion with a recess therebetween at the stepslidably mounted in said stepped bore for movement from a central closedposition in one direction to a fill position and in the opposite directionto a dump position, a small area chamber provided between the closed smallbore end and said small land, a large area chamber provided between theclosed large bore end and said large land and spring means in each chamberseated on an end wall and biasing said valve element to said centralclosed position; a fill and dump passage connecting said reservoir to saidbore at said step for connection to said recess in all valve elementpositions; a large fill passage connecting said small bore portion to saidsump for full gravity flow filling; supply passage means having arestricted flow passage connecting said source means to said large boreportion for restricted pressure flow dumping at about the same volume rateof flow as said full gravity flow, a first very low flow restrictedpassage connecting said source means to said small chamber and a secondvery low flow restricted passage having substantially the same flowrestriction as said first restricted passage connected to said largechamber; control passage means having a very low flow control restrictionand connecting said large chamber to said sump, a miniature relay valveelement movable for closing said control passage means at said controlrestriction and biased to open position by fluid pressure in said largechamber; a miniature float guided for floating on the fluid in said sumpoperative in high fluid level position to permit pressure in said largechamber to open said relay valve element to reduce pressure in said largechamber so pressure in said small chamber moves said level valve elementto said dump position connecting said supply passage to said fill andempty passage and closing said fill passage to pump fluid from said sumpto said reservoir and in a low fluid level position to move said relayvalve element to closed position to close said control passage means sofull pressure in said large chamber moves said level valve element to fillposition closing said supply passage and connecting said fill and emptypassage to said fill passage to fill said sump from said reservoir.5. The invention defined in claim 4 and said source means having a mainline at main line regulated pressure connected to said drive means andsaid supply passage means.6. The invention defined in claim 4 and said source means having a mainline at main line regulated pressure connected to said drive means and anoverage line at a lower regulated pressure connected to said supplypassage means to provide priority for drive means operation."}
{"WKU":"039304248","Title":"Multi-shell limited slip differential","App_Date":"1974-10-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Albert F. Myers, Sr.","Assignee":"Aspro, Inc.","ICL_Class":"F16H  144","References":"1481889;2463091;3327564","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A limited slip differential for driving a pair of axially aligned drivenshafts by a driving shaft, includinga. a casing containing a chamber having a spherical wall surface, saidcasing also including a pair of aligned bores communicating with saidchamber for receiving the driven shafts, respectively;b. ring gear means adapted to be driven by the driving shaft for rotatingsaid casing about the axis of said aligned bores;c. differential gearing means for connecting said casing with the drivenshafts, respectively, said differential gearing means including"}
{"WKU":"039304256","Title":"Method for manufacturing contoured thread rolling dies","App_Date":"1975-01-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Roger W. Orlomoski","Assignee":"Litton Industrial Products, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B21K  520","References":"2197732","Claims":"What I claim is:1. The method of manufacturing a die for rolling a threaded fastener havinga tapered end portion, said die having a working face defined by a firstand a second generally planar surface, said first and second planarsurfaces intersecting along a line disposed at an included angle withrespect to the direction of movement when the die is used substantiallyequal to the helix angle of the screw to be formed with such die whichcomprises: angle of the screw to be formed with such die which comprises:holding the die, andtraversing a single tool having multiple ridges thereon relative to theface of the die with the line of contact between the tool and the diebeing disposed with respect to the direction of movement when the die isused at an angle equal to ninety degrees minus the helix angle of thescrew to be rolled with the die to simultaneously cut a plurality ofparallel thread forming ridges in said first and second planar surfaces.2. The method as described in claim 1, wherein the tool comprises agrinding wheel having a crush ground contour complimentary to said workingface.3. The method as described in claim 1, wherein the tool comprises amultipoint cutting tool having a contour complimentary to said workingface.4. The method of manufacturing a die for rolling a threaded fastener havinga tapered end portion, said die having a working face defined by a firstand a second generally planar surface, said first and second planarsurfaces intersecting along a line disposed at an included angle withrespect to the direction of movement when the die is used substantiallyequal to the helix angle of the screw to be formed with such die whichcomprises:holding the die, andtraversing a single tool having multiple ridges thereon relative to theface of the die, the line of contact between the tool and the die beingdisposed at an angle of ninety degrees with respect to the line defined bythe intersection of the first and second generally planar surfaces tosimultaneously cut a plurality of parallel thread forming ridges in saidfirst and second planar surfaces.5. The method as described in claim 4, wherein the tool comprises agrinding wheel having a crush ground contour complimentary to said workingface.6. The method as described in claim 4, wherein the tool comprises amultipoint cutting tool having a contour complimentary to said workingface."}
{"WKU":"039304264","Title":"Method of making a saw blade","App_Date":"1975-03-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Bo Erik Gunnar Berggren;Nils Torsten Strandberg","Assignee":"Stora Kopparbergs Bergslags Aktiebolag","ICL_Class":"B23D 6300","References":"2683923;3593600;3674083;3766808;3800633","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method of making a saw blade consisting essentially of a steel toothstrip joined to a steel back strip, the quality of the steel of the toothstrip being different from that of the back strip, comprising maintainingtwo plates of back strip steel in spaced parallel relation to one another,supplying molten tooth strip steel to the space between said plates forsolidification thereof to form a billet consisting of three parallellayers, working said billet to form a composite strip having the desiredthickness of the saw blade, said composite strip consisting of two edgeportions of back strip steel and a central portion of tooth strip steel,dividing said composite strip along the middle of the central portion, andcutting saw teeth in the tooth strip steel edge thus formed.2. The method defined in claim 1 in which (1) the two parallel plates ofthe steel intended for the back strip are in the vertical position and thespace between two parallel plates is closed at the bottom and at the ends;(2) the cutting tool steel intended for the tooth strip is formed as amelt in the space between the plates which, upon solidifying to a casting,unifies the plates and forms the billet; and (3) hot and cold working thebillet in a direction parallel to the joints between the three parts to aband with the desired thickness and a width at least twice the width ofthe desired saw blade.3. The method according to claim 2, characterized in that the melt in thespace is formed by supplying drops of a molten steel with a composition,which after mixing with a controlled amount of the steel of the planeparallel plates melted by the heat introduced into the space, gives theintended cutting tool steel.4. The method according to claim 3, characterized in that the amount ofmolten steel from the plane parallel plates mixed into the melt is 20-40%,preferably 30%, of the amount of steel introduced by the drops.5. The method according to claim 2, characterized in that the drops ofmolten steel are formed by electric melting of electrodes, that areintroduced into the space between the plane parallel plates.6. The method according to claim 5, characterized in that the melt, themolten drops, and the tips of the electrodes are shielded against air.7. The method according to claim 6, characterized in that admission of airis prevented by introducing an inert gas in the space.8. The method according to claim 6, characterized in that a refining slagis added to the molten steel.9. The method according to claim 5, characterized in that admission of airis prevented by a molten slag.10. The method according to claim 2, characterized in that the spacebetween the plane parallel plates is closed at the ends by water-cooledjackets, which are removed when the melt is solidified.11. The method according to claim 2, characterized in that the spacebetween the two plane parallel plates is closed at the bottom and the endsby metallic material which is bond to the melt when it solidifies andwhich is removed before the hot working of the billet."}
{"WKU":"039304272","Title":"Apparatus for screwing and unscrewing the bottoms of watch casings","App_Date":"1974-09-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Rene Addor","Assignee":"Montres Rolex S.A.","ICL_Class":"G04D  110","References":"2993394;3359839;3625093","Claims":"What I claim is:1. In apparatus for tightening and untightening screw-type bottoms of watchcasings wherein the threads by which the bottom is attached to its casinghave a predetermined pitch, said apparatus including a stand forsupporting a watch casing and a spindle rotatable about an axis, togetherwith a tool on said spindle for rotating the bottom of said watch casing,the improvement comprising in combination therewith,screw-thread means for mounting said spindle on said stand for axialmovement relative thereto, the threads of said screw-thread means havingthe same pitch as the threads of the watch-case bottom to be rotated, suchthat during tightening or untightening of said bottom said tool isdisplaced axially by an amount equal to the axial displacement of thewatch-case bottom whereby said tool follows said bottom.2. The improvement defined in claim 1, wherein said screw-thread meanscomprises a sleeve to which said spindle is threaded,said sleeve being also threaded to said stand by means of threads having arapid pitch in order to provide rapid axial adjustment of said tool intoand out of engagement with the bottom of the watch casing."}
{"WKU":"039304280","Title":"Theft resistant combination lug nut apparatus","App_Date":"1975-01-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Arthur Duane Hale","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B25B 1306;F16B 3700","References":"1447564;3364806;3874258","Claims":"I claim:1. A theft resistant combination lug nut apparatus for receipt on athreaded lug projecting coaxially through an oversize wheel bore andcooperating therewith to form an annulus and comprising:a nut including an internally threaded cylindrical sleeve projectingcoaxially into said annulus, said nut projecting axially from said annulusto form an increased-in-diameter axially projecting cylindrical bearingring, said ring being formed with a radially projecting annular shoulderfacing axially toward said sleeve, said nut projecting axially outwardlybeyond said ring to form a conically shaped axially elongated centeringdome having its peripheral surface tapering axially outwardly and radiallyinwardly from said ring;a plurality of diametrically unopposed radially outwardly facing chordalindex facets extending axially along the periphery of said ring parallelto the axis thereof and spaced about said bearing ring to form atlocations opposite all said respective facets rounded slip surfaces;a key device formed with an open ended shell defining a cylindrical socketfor closely overfitting said slip surfaces of said ring and formed on itsinterior with a plurality of key surfaces for complementally mating withsaid index facets on said ring; andwrench-receiving means on said key device whereby said nut may betelescoped loosely onto said centering dome to align said key deviceaxially with said bearing ring and said key device rotated while centeredon said dome to register said key surfaces with the complemental indexfacets on said ring and said key device then slipped axially onto saidring for positive engagement between said key device and ring and a wrenchengaged on said wrench-receiving means and rotated to tighten said nut.2. A theft resistant combination lug nut apparatus as set forth in claim 1wherein:said centering dome tapers at an angle of substantially 10 degrees to theaxis thereof.3. A theft resistant combination lug nut apparatus as set forth in claim 1wherein:said ring is formed with three chordal index facets; andsaid socket is formed with three flat key surfaces for complementallyengaging said respective index facets.4. A theft resistant combination lug nut apparatus as set forth in claim 1wherein:said facets project axially outwardly from said ring onto said dome to formrespective feeler facets for leading said index surfaces thereonto.5. A theft resistant combination lug nut apparatus for receipt on athreaded lug projecting coaxially through an oversize wheel bore andcooperating therewith to form an annulus and comprising:a nut including an internally threaded cylindrical sleeve projectingcoaxially into said annulus, said nut projecting axially from said annulusto form an increased-in-diameter axially projecting cylindrical bearingring, said ring being formed with a radially projecting annular shoulderfacing axially toward said sleeve, said nut projecting axially outwardlybeyond said ring to form a conically shaped axially elongated centeringdome;a plurality of diametrically unopposed radially outwardly facing chordalindex facets extending axially along the periphery of said ring parallelto the axis thereof and spaced about said bearing ring to form atlocations opposite all said respective facets rounded slip surfaces, saidindex facets projecting axially outwardly from said ring onto said dome todefine respective feeler facets;a key device formed with an open ended shell defining a cylindrical socketfor closely overfitting said slip surfaces of said ring and formed on itsinterior with a plurality of key surfaces for complementally mating withsaid index facets on said ring; andwrench-receiving means on said key device whereby said nut may betelescoped loosely onto said centering dome to align said key deviceaxially with said bearing ring and said key device rotated while centeredon said dome to register said key surfaces with the complemental indexfacets on said ring and said key device then slipped axially onto saidring for positive engagement between said key device and ring and a wrenchengaged on said wrench-receiving means and rotated to tighten said nut.6. A theft resistant combination lug nut apparatus as set forth in claim 5wherein:said ring is formed with three chordal index facets; andsaid socket is formed with three flat key surfaces for complementallyengaging said respective index facets."}
{"WKU":"039304299","Title":"Digital music synthesizer","App_Date":"1974-04-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jeremy R. Hill","Assignee":"ARP Instruments, Inc.","ICL_Class":"G10H  100","References":"3610805;3708603;3844379","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An electronic musical system having a keyboard and comprising:means coupled to said keyboard and responsive to operation of at least onekey of said keyboard for providing a signal of frequency corresponding tothe key played,means responsive to the playing of at least one key for providing a controlsignal,an analog signal generator including resistance-capacitance time-constantelements for controlling the shape of an audio waveform and responsive tosaid frequency signal and said control signal for generating saidwaveform,and digital code storage means coupled to both said frequency signalproviding means and said control signal providing means for controllingtheir signals.2. The system of claim 1 wherein said frequency signal providing meansincludes a pulse waveform generator and a sawtooth waveform generator.3. The system of claim 2 including means for combining said pulse andsawtooth waveforms.4. The system of claim 2 including pulse width selection logic response tosaid code storage means for providing different possible pulse widths forsaid pulse waveform.5. The system of claim 1 wherein said code storage means controls thefrequency of said frequency signal.6. The system of claim 5 wherein said control changes said frequency by anoctave.7. The system of claim 1 wherein said frequency signal and control signalproviding means are coupled from said keyboard by way of keyboardcircuitry.8. The system of claim 7 wherein said keyboard circuitry includes meansresponsive to said played key for generating a binary code correspondingthereto.9. The system of claim 8 wherein said keyboard circuitry includes means forsequentially interrogating said keys to determine if one has been played,and for storing the binary code corresponding to the played key.10. The system of claim 1 wherein said control signal providing meansincludes at least one envelope generator having attack circuit means andrelease circuit means.11. The system of claim 10 including a pair of envelope generators.12. The system of claim 11 wherein said code storage means controls saidattack circuit means and release circuit means.13. The system of claim 1 wherein said code storage means is coupled toread only memories in said frequency signal providing means and saidcontrol signal providing means.14. The system of claim 1 wherein said means for generating includesvoltage controlled filter means and voltage control amplifier means.15. The system of claim 14 including resonator means for receiving a pulsewaveform and coupled to filter means.16. The system of claim 15 wherein said code storage means controls thefilter means of said resonator means."}
{"WKU":"039304302","Title":"Photo-electric organ with chiff","App_Date":"1974-04-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Edward M. Jones;William C. Wayne, Jr.","Assignee":"D. H. Baldwin Company","ICL_Class":"G10h  102;G10h  306","References":"2486208;2989886;2989887;3037413;3180919;3247306;3333042;3391240;3445578;3562400;3617603;3660587;3735014;3855893","Claims":"The invention claimed is:1. In an electronic musical instrument, a source of direct-currentpotential, a first keying circuit, a key switch connected between thesource and the first keying circuit, a first tone signal sourcecorresponding to the chiff component of a desired tone, a second keyingcircuit connected between the first keying circuit and the first tonesignal source, a second tone signal source corresponding to the maincomponent of a desired tone and a third keying circuit connected betweenthe first keying circuit and the second tone signal source.2. The combination according to claim 1, wherein said keying circuits eachcomprise a series resistor-capacitor combination with an emitter-followerconnected to each resistor-capacitor junction.3. The combination according to claim 1, wherein the first tone signalsource comprises a direct-current-actuable noise source.4. In an electronic musical instrument, a first tone signal source having acontrol terminal and producing an output modulated in amplitude by theamplitude of a potential impressed upon the control terminal thereof, asource of electrical pulses having a rising leading edge and decayingtrailing edge connected to the control terminal of the first tone signalsource, a transistor having a base, an emitter and a collector, acapacitor electrically connected between the control terminal of the firsttone signal source and the base of the transistor, a source ofdirect-current potential having a first and a second terminal, a firstresistor electrically connected between the first terminal of the sourceof direct-current potential and the emitter of the transistor, a secondresistor electrically connected between the first terminal of thepotential source and the base of the transistor, and a second tone signalsource having a control terminal connected to the collector of thetransistor, said second tone signal source producing an output modulatedin amplitude by the amplitude of the potential impressed upon the controlterminal and the pitch of the second tone-signal source being differentfrom the pitch of the first tone-signal source.5. The combination according to claim 4, wherein the source of electricalpulses comprises, in series, a key switch, a third resistor and a secondcapacitor electrically connected between the first and second terminals ofthe source of direct-current potential, and an emitter followerelectrically connected between the junction of the third resistor and thesecond capacitor and the control electrode of the first tone signalsource.6. In an electronic organ having a source of direct-current potentialhaving a first terminal and a second terminal, a key switch having a firstterminal connected to the first terminal of the source and a secondterminal, a first resistor and a first capacitor connected in seriesbetween the second terminal of the key switch and the second terminal ofthe source, the combination comprising a first direct-current-actuabletone signal source, a first emitter follower having a first transistorhaving a base, an emitter and a collector, the base of the firsttransistor being connected to the junction between the first resistor andthe first capacitor, a second emitter follower having a second transistorhaving a base, emitter and collector, a second resistor connected betweenthe emitter of the first transistor and the base of the second transistor,a second capacitor connected between the base of the second transistor andthe second terminal of the source, and the first tone signal source beingconnected to the emitter of the second transistor.7. In an electronic organ having a source of direct-current potentialhaving a first terminal and a second terminal, a key switch having a firstterminal connected to the first terminal of the source and a secondterminal, a first resistor and a first capacitor connected in seriesbetween the second terminal of the key switch and the second terminal ofsaid source, the combination comprising a first emitter follower having afirst transistor having a base, an emitter and a collector, the base ofthe first transistor being connected to the junction between the firstresistor and the first capacitor, a second emitter follower having asecond transistor having a base, an emitter and a collector, a secondresistor connected between the emitter of the first transistor and thebase of the second transistor, a second capacitor connected between thebase of the second transistor and the, second terminal of the source, afirst direct-current-actuable tone signal source connected to the emitterof the second transistor, a third emitter follower having a thirdtransistor having a base, an emitter and a collector, a third capacitorconnected between the emitter of the second transistor and the base of thethird transistor, and a second direct-current-actuable tone signal sourceconnected to the emitter of the third transistor.8. An electrical musical instrument having a plurality of keys comprising aplurality of tone signal sources, each of the tone signal sources having apair of control electrode terminals and producing a modulated outputresponsive to the magnitude of a potential impressed upon said controlelectrode terminals, an electrical key switch coupled to one of the keysof the musical instrument, said key switch being actuable in response toactuation of said key, a direct current source of potential, and aplurality of electrical envelope shapers, each having a pair of inputterminals and a pair of output terminals and passive wave forming elementsconnected between the input and output terminals, said envelope shapersbeing connected in cascade with the input terminals of the first of saidshapers connected in a series electrical circuit with the direct currentsource and the key switch, the output terminals of the last envelopeshaper of said cascade being electrically connected to the controlelectrode terminals of one of the tone signal sources, whereby closing ofthe electrical switch impresses a potential on the one tone signal sourcemodified by the cumulative effect of the waveform elements of the envelopeshapers, and the pair of output terminals of the first of said envelopeshapers being connected to the control electrode terminals of a differenttone signal source, whereby closing of the electrical switch impresses apotential on said different tone signal source modified only by thewaveforming elements of the first of said envelope shapers.9. An electrical musical instrument comprising the combination of claim 8in combination with additional tone signal sources, each of saidadditional tone signal sources having a pair of control electrodeterminals electrically connected to the output terminals of envelopeshapers in said cascade other than the first or last envelope shaper ofsaid cascade, whereby closing of the electrical switch impresses apotential on said additional tone signal sources shaped by the passivewaveform circuits between each said signal source and the direct currentsource.10. An electrical musical instrument comprising the combination of claim 8in combination with a pulse generator having a pair of input terminalselectrically connected to the pair of output terminals of the first ofsaid envelope shapers and a pair of output terminals, said pulse generatorproducing a single pulse responsive to each decay in output of the firstenvelope shaper, the pair of output terminals of the pulse generator beingelectrically connected to the control electrode terminals of an additionaltone signal source wherein said additional tone signal source has afrequency different from said different tone signal source, wherebyclosing of the key switch results in actuation of the different tonesignal source at a first frequency and opening of the key switch resultsin a decay tone signal from said additional tone signal source at a secondfrequency.11. An electrical musical instrument comprising the combination of claim 8wherein each of the tone signal sources comprises a pair of photoresistorcells connected in series, the junction between the cells being one of thecontrol electrodes of the tone signal source, a push-pull electricalamplifier connected across the pair of photoresistor cells, and anelectroacoustic transducer electrically connected to the output of theelectrical amplifier.12. An electrical musical instrument comprising the combination of claim 8in combination with an additional electrical wave shaper having a pair ofinput terminals electrically connected to the output terminals of thefirst electrical envelope shaper and a pair of output terminals, anemitter follower having a pair of input terminals electrically connectedto the output terminals of the additional wave shaper, and a chiff tonesignal source having a pair of control electrodes electrically connectedto the output terminals of the emitter follower, said chiff tone signalsource producing an output responsive in magnitude to the potentialimpressed on the control electrode thereof."}
{"WKU":"039304310","Title":"Mechanism for operating a bass drum","App_Date":"1974-11-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Peter C. Magadini","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"G10D 1300","References":"1042919;3030847;3426640;3797356","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a mechanism for operating a bass drum comprising a base, a verticalsupport affixed to the forward edge of the base, said vertical supportcomprising a flat plate, two vertical posts at opposite ends of said plateand a shaft connecting said posts at their upper ends, said flat plateadapted to be clamped to a rim of a bass drum; a beater ball affixed tothe upper end of a beater rod, said beater rod affixed to said shaft, afoot pedal, a connector means connecting said foot pedal to said supportand adjustably connecting said foot pedal to said base, the improvementcomprising said vertical support containing a flat plate having aconvex-shaped outer rim to which the leading edge of said base isadjustably affixed so that the position of the base and therefore saidfoot pedal with respect to said bass drum may be arcuately adjusted byadjusting the point of affixation of said base on said rim of said plate.2. A mechanism for operating a bass drum comprising:a base with a track therein;a vertical support arcuately and adjustably affixed to the forward edge ofthe base, said support comprising a flat plate having a rounded outeredge, two vertical posts at opposite ends of said plate and a shaftjournaled in said posts at their upper ends, said flat plate adapted to beclamped to a rim of a bass drum, said base adapted to be arcuately andadjustably affixed to said rounded outer edge of said flat plate;a beater ball affixed to the upper end of a beater rod, said beater rodadjustably secured to said shaft;a foot pedal comprising a heel plate and a depressible foot portion;first connector means adjustably connecting said foot pedal to said supportand adjustably connecting said foot pedal to said base;whereby the position, height and angle of the depressible foot portion ofsaid foot pedal with respect to said bass drum may be adjusted byadjusting said connector means and the position of said foot portion maybe laterally adjusted by adjusting the point of affixation of said base tosaid support.3. A mechanism for operating a bass drum as claimed in claim 2 wherein saidfirst connector means comprises:a rod telescopically mounted in a tube and the rearward end of said tube isslidably seated in said track;a cable affixed to the forward end of said rod;a wheel rotatably affixed to said shaft, said cable being wound around saidwheel and affixed to said wheel;first attachment means slidably attaching said foot pedal to said rod;second attachment means adjustably attaching said heel plate to said base;wherein said rod telescopes into said tube as the point of seating of thetube is advanced in said track towards the support whereby the position ofthe foot pedal may be adjusted by adjusting the point of seating of saidtube in said track alone or in concert with adjusting the position of thepoint of attachment of the second attachment means and said base.4. A mechanism for operating a bass drum as claimed in claim 3 wherein saidwheel comprises:first half wheel and second half wheel, said first half wheel beingpermanently affixed to said shaft, said cable being affixed to said secondhalf wheel, said second half wheel being rotatable about said shaft andadjustably affixed to said first half wheel, whereby the length of thecable may be increased or decreased by rotating said second half wheelwhile said first half wheel is stationary thereby raising or lowering theheight of the foot portion of said foot pedal above the ground.5. A mechanism for operating a bass drum as claimed in claim 2 wherein saidvertical support includes:returning means affixed to one of said supporting posts to effect a returnmovement of said shaft to a resting position after said foot pedal hasbeen depressed and released.6. A mechanism for operating a bass drum comprising a base having atrack therein,a vertical support adjustably affixed to the leading edge of said base,said support comprising:a flat plate adapted to be clamped to a rim on a bass drum and adjustablyaffixed to the leading edge of said base;two horizontally aligned vertical support posts at opposite ends of saidplate;a shaft journaled in said posts at the uppermost inner surfaces;returning means affixed to one of said support posts adapted to effect areturn movement of said shaft to a resting position;a beater ball affixed to the upper end of a beater rod, said beater rodbeing adjustable secured to said shaft, a foot pedal comprising:a heel plate;a depressible foot portion; first connector means adjustably affixed tosaid foot pedal and adjustably affixed to said support comprising:a rod telescopically mounted in a tube and said tube being slidably seatedin said track;a cable pivotally affixed to the tip of said rod;a wheel rotatably affixed to said shaft comprising:first half wheel;second half wheel, said first half wheel being permanently affixed to saidshaft, said cable being affixed to said second half wheel, said secondhalf wheel being rotatable about said shaft and adjustably affixed to saidfirst half wheel;first attachment means slidably attaching said foot pedal to said rod;second attachment means adjustably attaching said heel plate to said base;whereby the position of the depressible foot pedal may be adjustedindependently of adjusting the position of the whole mechanism.7. A mechanism for operating a bass drum as claimed in claim 2 wherein saidfirst connector means comprises:a rod whose rearward end is seated in said track;a cable affixed to the forward end of said rod;a wheel rotatably affixed to said shaft, said cable being wound around saidwheel and affixed to said wheel;first attachment means slidably attaching said foot pedal to said rod;second attachment means adjustably attaching said heel plate to said base;wherein the position of the foot pedal may be adjusted by adjusting theposition of the point of attachment of the second attachment means andsaid base thereby adjusting the point of attachment of said firstattachment means on said rod."}
{"WKU":"039304329","Title":"Fastening assembly","App_Date":"1973-07-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"David Peter William Puchy","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A47G 0300","References":"465289;1805937;1936624;2214030;2334104;3027795;3654671","Claims":"I claim:1. In a fastening assembly comprising an apertured locking elementengageable by an extraneous fastening member passed therethrough, such asa screw, bolt and the like, for attachment of said locking element to asub-stratum; a cap element larger than said locking element forsuperposition on the latter least one of said elements being formed ofresilent material; and cooperative interengaging means providedrespectively on outer and inner portions of said locking and said capelements to facilitate detachable snap engagement between said elementswith an interference fit, said cooperative means including on said lockingelement an annular ring-shaped flange, the improvement comprising: saidring-shaped flange having a convexly-curved circumferential surface in theplane of the longitudinal central axis of said fastening assembly, saidcap element being hollow and having a concave portion in which the radiusof curvature is greater than the radius of curvature of theconvexly-curved circumferential surface of said ring-shaped flange in theplane of said longitudinal axis so as to form an interior cavity having amajor diameter, with the space within the interior surface portion of saidconcave portion having a minor diameter less than that of the outsidediameter of said ring-shaped flange of the locking element, theconvexly-curved annular surface of said flange having a maximum diametergreater than said major diameter so as to provide said interference fit,said flange portion annularly engaging said cap element within said cavitybut being displaced from said minor diameter thereof so as to provide anannular sealing line extending between said ring-shaped flange and saidinterior cavity at said major diameter through radial forces beingproduced by said interference fit; and said cap element having an annulardepending skirt portion encompassing said locking element in spacedrelationship therewith, said skirt portion being of a length so as toallow a gap between the bottom thereof and the sub-stratum when said capelement is superposed on said locking element.2. The improvement in a fastening assembly as defined in claim 1, whereinsaid cap element has a concave-convex portion in which the radius ofcurvature of the concave portion is greater than the radius of curvatureof the convex portion, so as to form at least one other adjoining portionof the cap element.3. The improvement in a fastening assembly as defined in claim 1, whereinsaid locking and said cap elements are resilient while the extraneousfastening member is substantially rigid, being passed through the apertureof said locking element, and wherein said skirt portion of the cap elementand peripheral portions of said locking element, below said ring-shapedflange thereof, define a gap sufficient to allow expansion of saidresilient locking element toward and into the interference fit with saidcap element, when the fastening member is tightened against thesub-stratum through said aperture in said locking element.4. In a fastening assembly comprising an apertured locking elementengageable by an extraneous fastening member passed therethrough, such asa screw, bolt and the like, for attachment of said locking element to asub-stratum; a cap element larger than said locking element forsuperposition on the latter least one of said elements being formed ofresilent material; and cooperative interengaging means providedrespectively on outer and inner portions of said locking and said capelements to facilitate detachable snap engagement between said elementswith an interference fit, the improvement comprising: said cooperativemeans including on said locking element an annular ring-shaped flangehaving an essentially cylindrical surface extending in parallel with andconcentricaly about the longitudinal central axis of said fasteningassembly; said cap element being hollow and having a concave portion of apredetermined radius of curvature in the plane of said longitudinal axisso as to form an interior cavity having a major diameter, with the spacewithin the interior surface portion of said concave portion having a minordiameter less than that of the outer diameter of said ring-shaped flangeof the locking element, said flange having the cylindrical outer diameterthereof dimensioned so as to annularly engage said cap element in saidinterference fit within said cavity along two axially spacedcircumferential edges of said cylindrical surface but being displaced fromsaid minor diameter thereof so as to provide two axially spaced annularsealing lines extending between the edges of said cylindrical surface ofsaid flange and said cavity through radial forces being produced by saidinterference fit; and said cap element having an annular depending skirtportion encompassing said locking element in spaced relationshiptherewith, said skirt portion being of a length so as to allow a gapbetween the bottom thereof and the sub-stratum when said cap element issuperposed on said locking element."}
{"WKU":"039304337","Title":"Automatic firearms with bolt assisted by an additional mass","App_Date":"1974-05-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jean-Claude Marie Minaire","Assignee":"Etat Francais","ICL_Class":"F41D  502","References":"830511;1985493;2459141;2503575","Claims":"I claim:1. An automatic firearm comprising:a bolt which recoils upon each shot against the action of return means,an amplifying lever pivotally mounted on said bolt, said lever having aresting surface adapted to come into contact with a fixed stop surface atthe start of the recoil stroke of the bolt,an additional mass connected to said bolt by said amplifying lever,a firing pin slidably mounted in said bolt,a pivoting striking hammer the retraction stroke of which is controlled bythe recoil of the bolt and the striking stroke of which is controlled byelastic return means,means for retaining said striking hammer in retracted position when in anactive position, said retaining means being urged towards the activeposition by an elastic return device and being held in a position of rest,at least during the end of the closing stroke of the bolt, by saidamplifying lever as long as said amplifying lever maintains the connectionbetween the bolt and the additional mass, the breaking and said amplifyinglever, causing said anplifying lever to float at an angle, permits saidretaining means to come, under the action of the elastic return device,into the active position for retaining the striking hammer in retractedposition, thus automatically assuring an interruption of firing.2. A firearm as claimed in claim 1, wherein:said striking hammer is pivotable about a swing pin, andsaid retaining means comprises:"}
{"WKU":"039304345","Title":"Hydraulic controller","App_Date":"1973-10-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Edwin J. Hunter","Assignee":"The Toro Company","ICL_Class":"F15B 2102","References":"1238670;2228700;2322611;2516149;2579598;3033000;3045601;3379099;3422847;3428085;3444896;3454784","Claims":"I claim:1. A hydraulic controller for controlling the operation of a plurality ofhydraulically operated devices in a predetermined sequence of individuallyadjustable timed intervals of operation for each device, said controllerbeing supplied from a source of hydraulic fluid under a  substantiallyconstant pressure and comprising:distributor means for distributing the flow of hydraulic fluid from saidsource individually to said operated devices in a predetermined manner inresponse to operation of said distributor means through a sequence ofindividual positions of adjustment thereof;hydraulically operated drive means for operating said distributor meansthrough the sequence of positions, said drive means being operable in anindexing mode to index said distributor means between positions ofadjustment and in a timing mode between indexing modes to maintain saiddistributor means in a dwell at individual positions of adjustment;means for supplying hydraulic fluid from said sources to said drive means;andmeans for independently adjustably controlling the time of operation ofsaid drive means in its timing mode for each individual position ofadjustment of said distributor means relative to another position ofadjustment of said distributor means, whereby each of said operateddevices may be individually operated for an individually adjustable timedinterval of operation.2. The hydraulic controller of claim 1 wherein said means for independentlyadjustably controlling the time of operation of said drive means includesmeans for modifying the flow of said fluid relative to said drive meansduring said timing modes of operation thereof and a plurality ofindividually adjustable members, each corresponding to one of thepositions of adjustment of said distributor means, for individually andadjustably operating said modifying means as said distributor means movesthrough its sequence of positions of adjustment.3. The hydraulic controller of claim 2 wherein:said drive means for operating said distributor means comprises first andsecond opposed hydraulically operated pistons in first and secondassociated cylinders, respectively, said first piston having an effectiveworking diameter greater than that of said second piston, whereby saidfirst piston normally overrides said second piston in said indexing mode;andsaid means for modifying the supply of hydraulic fluid relative to saiddrive means comprises means for selectively controlling the release offluid from said first cylinder to reverse the movement of said pistonsand, by adjusting the rate of release of fluid from said first cylinder,control the speed of return of said pistons in the timing mode thereof.4. The hydraulic controller of claim 1 wherein said distributor meanscomprises:a plurality of fluid flow distributing valves, each having inlet means forconnection to said source, outlet means for connection to one of saidoperated devices and a moveable valve member for selectivelyinterconnecting said inlet and outlet means; andcam means associated with each of said fluid flow distributing valves foroperating the associated valve member in a predetermined sequence of valvepositions upon advancement of said cam means relative thereto by saiddrive means.5. The hydraulic controller of claim 4 wherein:said hydraulically operated drive means includes a timing mode drive pistonand cylinder, an indexing mode drive piston and cylinder, forcetranslating means associated with said cam means for translatingreciprocal motion of said pistons into advancement motion for said cammeans and piston mounting means for mounting said pistons in opposeddriving relation to said force translating means;said hydraulic fluid flow system means includes fluid flow line means forconnecting both said cylinders to said source of hydraulic fluid; andsaid indexing piston is provided with a larger effective diameter ofsurface exposed to said hydraulic fluid than that of said timing piston,whereby said indexing piston overrides said timing piston when hydraulicfluid is equally supplied to said drive means cylinders from said sourceduring said indexing mode.6. The hydraulic controller of claim 5 wherein said force translating meanscomprises:a ratchet wheel associated with said cam means, a pivotable ratchet mountedon a pivoted lever arm driven by said pistons in a reciprocal arcuatemovement to drive said wheel in a one direction advancement and manuallyadjustable means for holding said ratchet in an inactive position out ofengagement with said wheel.7. The hydraulic controller of claim 5 wherein said hydraulic fluid flowsystem means comprises:reversing valve means associated with said fluid flow line means and anoutlet line for alternately connecting said indexing mode cylinder to saidsource of hydraulic fluid or to said outlet line;means associated with said reversing valve means and pistons for operatingsaid reversing valve to connect said indexing mode cylinder to said outletline at the end of an indexing mode drive of said indexing piston, saidtiming piston then overriding said indexing piston in a timing mode driveof said timing piston, and for connecting said indexing mode cylinder tosaid source of hydraulic fluid at the end of said timing mode drive ofsaid timing piston.8. The hydraulic controller of claim 5 wherein said hydraulic fluid flowsystem means comprises:adjustable fluid flow restricting means associated with said outlet linefor adjustably restricting the flow of hydraulic fluid from said indexingmode cylinder to thereby regulate the speed of said timing piston in itstiming mode drive and thus determine the time of the interval for theoperation of the devices operated by the associated fluid flowdistributing valves.9. The hydraulic controller of claim 8 wherein said adjustable fluid flowrestricting means includes a valve orifice, an orifice restrictor memberand means for mounting said restrictor member for adjustable movementrelative to the valve orifice.10. The hydraulic controller of claim 9 wherein said means for mountingsaid restrictor member comprise:a mounting shaft and means for biasing said shaft to a valve open positionwherein said restrictor member is withdrawn relative to said orifice;connecting means between said shaft and said cam means for rotating saidshaft in response to advancement of said cam means;a shaft cam extending laterally of said shaft; anda plurality of adjustable timing control members mounted to said controllerin an array about said shaft in adjustable interfering contact with saidshaft cam as it passes thereby to move said restrictor member toward saidorifice, restricting fluid flow therethrough, due to deflection of saidshaft against its bias as said shaft cam passes a given timer controlmember and in an amount adjustable by the adjustment of said controlmember.11. A hydraulic controller for controlling the operation of a plurality ofhydraulically operated devices in a determinable sequence of adjustabletimed intervals of operation of each such device, said controller beingsupplied with a source of hydraulic fluid under a substantially constantpressure and comprising:a plurality of fluid flow distributing valves, each having inlet means forconnection to said source, outlet means for connection to one of saidoperated devices and a movable valve member for selectivelyinterconnecting said inlet and outlet means;cam means associated with each of said fluid flow distributing valves foroperating the associated valve member in a predetermined sequence of valvepositions upon advancement of said cam means relative thereto; andhydraulic drive means for advancing said cam means relative to said valvesto index them between said sequence of positions and maintain them intimed dwell intervals, said drive means comprising:venting means for selectively venting hydraulic fluid from said drive meansto modify the drive of said drive means during a dwell mode;fluid flow restrictor means for adjustably restricting the flow of fluidthrough said venting means to control the speed of operation of said drivemeans and thereby provide an adjustable interval of dwell of said cammeans andmeans for selectively adjusting said fluid flow restrictor means forvarying the time of each of a plurality of said fluid flow distributingvalves independently of each other in said positions thereof.12. The hydraulic controller of claim 11 wherein said cam means comprises aplurality of cam discs mounted on a cam shaft, each said disc including alaterally extending non-circular peripheral lip, and wherein said moveablevalve member of each of said distributing valves includes a lip entrainingmeans for entraining the associated cam lip and thereby cause movement ofsaid valve member upon rotation of said cam shaft in a mannerpredetermined by the configuration of said non-circular lip.13. The hydraulic controller of claim 11 wherein said fluid flow restrictormeans includes a valve orifice, an orifice restrictor member and means formounting said restrictor member for adjustable movement relative to thevalve orifice.14. The hydraulic controller of claim 13 wherein said means for mountingsaid restrictor member comprise:a mounting shaft and means for biasing said shaft to a valve open positionwherein said restrictor member is withdrawn relative to said orifice;connecting means between said shaft and said drive means for rotating saidshaft in response to advancement of said drive means;a shaft mounted cam extending laterally of said shaft; anda plurality of adjustable timing control members mounted to said controllerin an array about said shaft in adjustable interfering contact with saidshaft mounted cam to thereby move said restrictor member toward saidorifice, restricting fluid flow therethrough, due to deflection of saidshaft against its bias as said shaft cam passes a given timing controlmember.15. A hydraulic controller for controlling the operation of a plurality ofhydraulically operated devices comprising:fluid distributor means having a plurality of dwell positions fordistributing hydraulic fluid from a source thereof to each of a pluralityof said operated devices in a predetermined sequence corresponding to asequence of positions of dwell of said distributor means;hydraulically operated drive means for operating said distributor meansthrough its sequence of positions to operate said devices in correspondingsequence;means for supplying hydraulic fluid from said source to said drive meansfor operating said drive means in an indexing mode wherein saiddistributor means is indexed between its positions; andmeans for providing a selected dwell of said distributor means at each ofsaid individual positions independently of each other including means formodifying the flow of said fluid for said drive means between saidindexing modes whereby an associated controlled device is operated for theperiod of said dwell.16. The hydraulic controller of claim 15 wherein said drive means foroperating said distributor means comprises:first and second opposed hydraulically operated pistons in first and secondassociated cylinders, respectively, said first piston having an effectiveworking diameter greater than that of said second piston, whereby saidfirst piston normally overrides said second piston in said indexing mode.17. The hydraulic controller of claim 16 wherein said means for modifyingthe supply of hydraulic fluid to said drive means comprises:means for selectively controlling the release of fluid from said firstcylinder to reverse the movement of said pistons and, by adjusting therate of release of fluid from said first cylinder, control the speed ofreturn of said pistons in a timing mode thereof.18. The hydraulic controller of claim 15 wherein said fluid distributormeans comprises:a plurality of fluid flow distributing valves, each having inlet means forconnection to said source, outlet means for connection to one of saidoperated devices and a moveable valve member for selectivelyinterconnecting said inlet and outlet means; andcam means associated with each of said fluid flow distributing valves foroperating the associated valve member in a predetermined sequence of valvepositions upon advancement of said cam means relative thereto by saiddrive means.19. The hydraulic controller of claim 18 wherein:said hydraulically operated drive means includes a timing mode drive pistonand cylinder, an indexing mode drive piston and cylinder, forcetranslating means associated with said cam means for translatingreciprocal motion of said pistons into advancement motion for said cammeans and piston mounting means for mounting said pistons in opposeddriving relation to said force translating means;said hydraulic fluid flow system means includes fluid flow line means forconnecting both said cylinders to said source of hydraulic fluid; andsaid indexing piston is provided with a larger effective diameter ofsurface exposed to said hydraulic fluid than that of said timing piston,whereby said indexing piston overrides said timing piston when hydraulicfluid is equally supplied to said drive means cylinders from said sourceduring said indexing mode.20. The hydraulic controller of claim 19 wherein said force translatingmeans comprises:a ratchet wheel associated with said cam means, a pivotable ratchet mountedon a pivoted lever arm driven by said pistons in a reciprocal arcuatemovement to drive said wheel in a one direction advancement and manuallyadjustable means for holding said ratchet in an inactive position out ofengagement with said wheel.21. The hydraulic controller of claim 19 wherein said hydraulic fluid flowsystem means comprises:reversing valve means associated with said fluid flow line means and anoutlet line for alternately connecting said indexing mode cylinder to saidsource of hydraulic fluid or to said outlet line;means associated with said reversing valve means and pistons for operatingsaid reversing valve to connect said indexing mode cylinder to said outletline at the end of and indexing mode drive of said indexing piston, saidtiming piston then overriding said indexing piston in a timing mode driveof said timing piston, and for connecting said indexing mode cylinder tosaid source of hydraulic fluid at the end of said timing mode drive ofsaid timing piston.22. The hydraulic controller of claim 19 wherein said hydraulic fluid flowsystem means comprises:adjustable fluid flow restricting means associated with said outlet linefor adjustably restricting the flow of hydraulic fluid from said indexingmode cylinder to thereby regulate the speed of said timing piston in itstiming mode drive and thus determine the time of the interval for theoperation of the devices operated by the associated fluid flowdistributing valves.23. The hydraulic controller of claim 22 wherein said adjustable fluid flowrestricting means includes a valve orifice, an orifice restrictor memberand means for mounting said restrictor member for adjustable movementrelative to the valve orifice.24. The hydraulic controller of claim 23 wherein said means for mountingsaid restrictor member comprise:a mounting shaft and means for biasing said shaft to a valve open positionwherein said restrictor member is withdrawn relative to said orifice;connecting means between said shaft and said cam means for rotating saidshaft in response to advancement of said cam means;a shaft cam extending laterally of said shaft; anda plurality of adjustable timing control members mounted to said controllerin an array about said shaft in adjustable interfering contact with saidshaft cam as it passes thereby to move said restrictor member toward saidorifice, restricting fluid flow therethtrough, due to deflection of saidshaft against its bias as said shaft cam passes a given timer controlmember and in an amount adjustable by the adjustment of said controlmember."}
{"WKU":"039304353","Title":"Hydraulically powered actuator","App_Date":"1973-05-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William C. Cooley;Franklin L. Beck","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F01B 1502;F15B 2102","References":"526342;2831464;3456744;3732784","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A hydraulically powered actuator for producing a reciprocating output,comprising in combination:a a housing member including an upper and lower portion with a head plateextending transversely across an open extremity of said upper portion andan end plate extending transversely across an open extremity of said lowerportion;b a cylinder displaceably mounted within said housing member, said cylinderbeing open ended at one extremity and closed by a transverse end plate atthe other extremity;c a piston assembly slidably mounted through said housing member forreciprocal movement within said cylinder, said piston assembly including apiston and a piston rod, said piston rod being slidably mounted throughthe end plate of said housing member to extend outwardly therefrom tothereby serve as the reciprocating output;d first means effecting movement of said cylinder in a first directionrelative to said housing member and said piston assembly;e second means effecting movement of said piston assembly in a seconddirection relative to said cylinder and said housing member;f third means effecting movement of said cylinder and said piston assemblyrelative to each other and to said housing member so that said cylindermoves in the second direction and said piston assembly moves in the firstdirection; andg control means for sequentially controlling the respective operation ofsaid first, second and third means for effecting the reciprocating output,wherein said cylinder end plate, said head plate and said upper portiondefine a first working chamber, and said housing member end plate, saidlower portion and said cylinder define a fluid working chamber.2. The hydraulically powered actuator as defined in claim 1, wherein saidupper and lower portions are separate members, and wherein said actuatorfurther comprises connecting means for connecting said separate upper andlower portions to form said housing member with open extremities which areclosed by said head plate and said lower portion end plate.3. The hydraulically powered actuator as defined in claim 1, wherein saidupper portion is cylindrical and said lower portion is frusto-conical.4. The hydraulically powered actuator as defined in claim 1, wherein saidhead plate is provided with first and second connecting means, with saidfirst connecting means connecting said first means to said first workingchamber, and said second connecting means connecting said third means tosaid first working chamber.5. The hydraulically powered actuator as defined in claim 1, wherein saidlower portion is provided with third connecting means connecting saidthird means to said fluid sump.6. The hydraulically powered actuator as defined in claim 1, wherein saidcylinder, said cylinder end plate and said piston define a second workingchamber, and wherein said piston, said piston rod, said cylinder and saidlower portion end plate define a third working chamber.7. The hydraulically powered actuator as defined in claim 6, wherein saidpiston assembly includes means through which said second chamber ischarged.8. The hydraulically powered actuator as defined in claim 6, wherein saidlower portion end plate is provided with a through bore, a face seal andfourth connecting means, and wherein said piston rod extends through saidthrough bore and outwardly from said lower portion, said open endedextremity of said cylinder is engageable with said face seal, and saidfourth connecting means connects said second means to said third workingchamber.9. The hydraulically powered actuator as defined in claim 8, wherein saidopen ended extremity of said cylinder and said face seal define a variableopening passage between said fluid sump and said third working chamber."}
{"WKU":"039304361","Title":"Servo device particularly for steering gears","App_Date":"1973-12-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Gunnar Hedenberg","Assignee":"Volvo Flygmotor Aktiebolag","ICL_Class":"F01B 1502;F15B  910","References":"2317383;2432502;2867233;2977985;3045651;3113590;3799202","Claims":"What I claim is:1. A servo device, comprising:first and second cylinders connected for movement in essentially fixedrelation to each other by a support body;first and second pistons connected to each other and located within saidcylinders, said pistons and cylinders defining first and second workingchambers;first means for pressurizing said working chambers with high pressurefluid;second and third means respectively connected to each working chamber andnormally closed for preventing flow of said high pressure fluid from eachsaid working chamber;fourth means for transmitting force to said support body to translate saidcylinders relative to said pistons;fifth means connected to said second and third means, for selectivelyopening said second or said third means to permit said high pressure fluidto exhaust from one of said first or said second working chambers when theforce transmitted by said fourth means exceeds a predetermined value toproduce pressure differential between said two cylinders which adds to theforce transmitted by said fourth means to said support body; andfirst and second damping members mounted respectively for axial movement ineach of said hydraulic cylinders, each of said damping members having arestricted venting port therethrough for controlling depressurization ofits respective working chamber.2. The servo device of claim 1 wherein said damping members each comprise afreely slidable piston in each said working chamber, said slidable pistonhaving a through bore which forms said restricted venting port.3. The servo device of claim 1 wherein said damping members each comprisean axially resilient diaphragm secured to an end wall of said cylinder andhaving an axial bore therein which forms said restricted venting port.4. The servo device of claim 1, wherein said pistons are fixed.5. The servo device of claim 1, wherein said fourth means comprises firstand second spring-biased pistons mounted for movement relative to saidsupport body;a first member movable in response to said force, said first member havingat least one lever element located to contact at least one of saidspring-biased pistons upon movement of said first member, whereby force istransmitted from said first member, via said at least one spring-biasedpiston, to said support body.6. The servo device of claim 5, wherein said fifth means comprises secondand third members extending respectively from each of said spring-biasedpistons for forcing said second and third means open in response tomovement of said spring-biased pistons.7. The servo device of claim 1, wherein said pressurizing means comprises apassage into said working chambers through each of said pistons."}
{"WKU":"039304370","Title":"Piston structure, particularly for hydraulic machines","App_Date":"1974-03-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Karl Guntert","Assignee":"Von Roll AG","ICL_Class":"F16J  108;F16J  122","References":"1216218;2066802;2077688;2141935;2974636;3073254;3172340;3173376;3183786;3343460;3474710","Claims":"I claim:1. Hydraulic piston construction comprisinga piston head (1) havinga face end portion (3) which has a diameter fitting in the cylinder inwhich the piston is to operate;an inner end portion (5) of reduced diameter, the junction of said portionsforming an abutment shoulder (4), the inner end face of said inner portion(5) being formed as a bearing cup (6);a piston sleeve (2) having an inner surface closely fitting around theouter surface of the inner end portion (5), seating against said abutmentshoulder (4) and having an outer diameter equal to that of the face endportion (3) of the piston head (1) fitting in the cylinder in which thepiston is to operate, the piston sleeve being internally hollow andsurrounding the inner end portion (5) of reduced diameter of the pistonhead a plurality of transversely extending grooves formed in the outersurface of said inner end portion, a plurality of transversely extendinggrooves formed in the inner surface of said piston sleeve with each grooveextending at, at least one end thereof, to the outer surface of saidsleeve, said grooves of said inner end portion and said piston sleevebeing aligned with one another;and solid connecting pins (7, 8) engaged in said aligned grooves andextending transversely to the axis (10) of the piston connecting thepiston head (1) to the piston sleeve, the pins being located such that theaxes thereof are tangential to the circumference of the inner end portion(5) of the piston head.2. Piston construction according to claim 1, including adhesive meansconnecting the piston head (1) and the piston sleeve (2).3. Piston construction according to claim 1, further comprising a radialbore (9) formed only in the piston head (1) and extending from thecircumference of the face end portion (3) radially inwardly;and an axial bore (12) extending from the bearing cup (6) to said radialbore (9).4. Piston construction according to claim 1, further comprising a fluidcommunication groove (18) formed in the interface between the outersurface of the inner end portion of the piston head (1) and the innersurface of the sleeve (2) and extending from the abutment shoulder (4) tothe bearing cup (6) to provide for drainage of fluid compressed by thepiston and leaking past the face end portion of the piston into the regionof the junction of the abutment shoulder, and the end of the piston sleevebearing thereagainst.5. Piston construction according to claim 1 including, a piston rod (17)having an at least partly spherical head bearing against said bearing cup(6).6. Piston construction according to claim 3 including, a piston rod (17)having an at least partly spherical head bearing against said bearing cup(6)."}
{"WKU":"039304388","Title":"Method for combining partition and box blank and for making a double","App_Date":"1974-05-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Howard T. Hackman;Ray Brown;William H. Friend;Stuart L. Natof;Eugene A. Reiter;David W. Rudman","Assignee":"Union Camp Corporation","ICL_Class":"B31B 1102","References":"2273470;2296896;2615378;2706935;3104596;3302538;3381593;3813999","Claims":"Having described the invention, what is claimed is:1. A method for combining a divided partition having end portions foradhesive engagement with inner opposite wall surfaces of a box blank, theblank having a plurality of panels and adapted to be folded into a tubecomprising:feeding a partition onto a continuously rotating turning drum;gripping said partition by gripping means on the said drum to hold saidpartition in a predetermined position during rotation of the drum;feeding a box blank onto a movable blank conveyor;holding the box blank on the conveyor in a predetermined transverseposition;2. A method for combining a dividing partition having one end portion foradhesive engagement with a wall surface of a box blank, the blank having aplurality of panels and adapted to be folded into a tube comprising:applying adhesive to the upper surface of the blank in a predeterminedpattern to engage opposite end portions of the partition to the inneropposite walls of the box blank;advancing the blank on the conveyor beneath said turning drum;continuously rotating said drum while holding said partition andsimultaneously advancing said blank and said conveyor to thereby placesaid partition on the blank in registration on a certain panel of saidblank while said blank is so positioned on said conveyor; and,while in said registration, folding the panels of the box blank over thepartition to complete the formation of a tube around the partition.feeding a partition onto a continuously rotating turning drum;gripping said partition by gripping means on the said drum to hold saidpartition in a predetermined portion during rotation of the drum;feeding a box blank onto a movable blank conveyor;holding the box blank on the conveyor in a predetermined transverseposition;applying adhesive lines to the upper surface of the blank in apredetermined pattern to engage said end portion of the partition to aninner wall of the box blank;advancing the blank on the conveyor beneath said turning drum;continuously rotating said drum while holding said partition andsimultaneously advancing said blank and said conveyor to thereby placesaid partition on the drum in registration on a certain panel of the blankwhile said blank is so positioned in said registration on the conveyor;and,while in said registration, folding the panels of the box blank over thepartition to complete the formation of a tube around the partition."}
{"WKU":"039304396","Title":"Device for wrapping sheets around food","App_Date":"1974-03-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Nobuyoshi Ohkawa","Assignee":"Daieigiken, Inc.","ICL_Class":"5 3;A21C 1100","References":"2627822;3164937","Claims":"What I claim is:1. A device for wrapping dough sheets around a mixture of mincedvegetables, meat and the like, to make rolled food, comprising: astationary comb-shaped first cradle having the shape of a shallow dish anda concavity therein for receiving the dough sheets having the mixturethereon, and at least one cut-out therein; a slide plate movablesubstantially parallel with said first cradle; means for performing areciprocating movement of said slide plate in two perpendicular planes,one being substantially parallel to that of said first cradle; at leastone lateral pressing bar, partly above said first cradle, and movableabout an arcshaped path, for holding down the sheets to the surface ofsaid first cradle; an auxiliary cradle underneath said first cradle,movable at least partly into said cut-out, and having a serrated upperengaging surface; and at least one belt, secured with one end to saidfirst cradle and with the other to said slide plate.2. The device as defined in claim 1, wherein a pair of said pressing barsare provided flanking said first cradle.3. The device as defined in claim 2, further comprising means for impartinga combined arcuate and rectilinear movement to said pair of pressing bars."}
{"WKU":"039304400","Title":"Device for conveying rolled food","App_Date":"1974-03-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Nobuyoshi Ohkawa","Assignee":"Daieigiken, Inc.","ICL_Class":"A21C  906;A21C 1100","References":"3633517;3770107","Claims":"What I claim is:1. A device for conveying rolled food, such as consisting of a mixture ofminced vegetables, meat and the like, wrapped in a sheet of dough,prepared by at least two of consecutively disposed mechanisms, performingone of the plural steps of cutting up continuous dough sheets intopredetermined sizes, supplying the mixture to the cut dough sheets,doubling the filled dough sheets, bending the filled and doubled doughsheets, and wrapping the latter around the mixture, the device comprising:at least two stationary cradles, each associated with one of themechanisms; at least two movable cradles; said cradles being all uniformlyspaced apart and comb-shaped, with respectively interleaved teeth thatclear each other at all times during the movements of said movablecradles; means for reciprocating said movable cradles vertically withrespect to said fixed cradles, up and to a level above them in a firstphase, and down again to a level below them in a third phase, the lattermovement with respect to a subsequent one of said fixed cradles; means forreciprocating said movable cradles longitudinally with respect to at leasttwo subsequent ones of said fixed cradles, in one direction above them ina second phase, and in the opposite direction below them in a fourthphase; and a control mechanism for cyclically correlating the movements ofsaid movable cradles with those of the mechanisms.2. The device as defined in claim 1, further comprising at least one slideframe movable with respect to stationary portions of the device forcarrying said movable cradles during the longitudinal and verticalmovements thereof; said stationary cradles being supported by therespective mechanisms on one ends thereof, while said movable cradles arecarried by said slide frame at other ends thereof that are opposite tosaid one ends of the fixed cradles.3. The device as defined in claim 2, wherein said means for longitudinalreciprocation of the movable cradles includes a bell-crank mechanismcontrolled by a cam mechanism; and a travelling rod linking saidbell-crank mechanism to said slide frame.4. The device as defined in claim 2, wherein said means for verticalreciprocation of the movable cradles includes a second bell-crankmechanism controlled by a second cam mechanism; and a guide mechanismlinking said second bell-crank mechanism to said slide frame.5. The device as defined in claim 4, wherein said guide mechanism includesat least one guide rod fixed to said slide frame; brackets freely slidableon said rods; and at least one crank mechanism controlled by said secondbell-crank mechanism."}
{"WKU":"039304418","Title":"Device for processing dough","App_Date":"1974-03-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Nobuyoshi Ohkawa","Assignee":"Daieigiken, Inc.","ICL_Class":"A21C  906;A21C 1100","References":"3112528;3565014;3669007","Claims":"What I claim is:1. A device for processing dough, for the preparation of rolled foodconsisting of a mixture of minced vegetables, meat and the like, wrappedin a sheet of dough of predetermined size, the device comprising a heated,rotatable drum having a substantially smooth outer circular surface; aflat nozzle adjacent said drum surface, to which dough is supplied andwhich deposits the dough through an outlet orifice of said nozzle ontosaid drum surface during the rotation of said drum, which orifice definesa controllable clearance with the periphery of said drum surface; areleasing plate having a stripping edge for removing individual sheets ofdough as they are formed on said drum; and means for intermittentlyreciprocating said nozzle in at least one direction, selectivelysubstantially parallel with said periphery of the drum surface, and towardand away therefrom.2. The device as defined in claim 1, further comprising a pair of shaftstubs flanking said nozzle; a pair of eccentric rollers supported at asmall distance from said stubs; and a pair of cylindrical members securedabout said rollers, the outer surfaces of portions of the latter beingpivotable in said members; and wherein said means for intermittentlyreciprocating the nozzle includes cam means and a connecting mechanism,for producing the reciprocation of said nozzle with said shaft stubsbetween said cylindrical members substantially parallel with saidperiphery of the drum surface.3. The device as defined in claim 1, further comprising a supporting armhaving one end fixed to said nozzle; and wherein said means forintermittently reciprocating the nozzle includes a connecting mechanismhaving therein a first rod connected with one end to the other end of saidarm for free rotation; a second rod connected with one end to the otherend of said first rod; means to bias said second rod into a predeterminedposition; and said reciprocating means also includes cam means forintermittently rotating said second rod by a certain angle, against theforce of said biasing means, for producing the reciprocation of saidnozzle toward and away from said periphery of the drum surface."}
{"WKU":"039304426","Title":"Machine for the tying of packages or the like","App_Date":"1973-06-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hans Hugo Buttner","Assignee":"Firma Buttner Kommanditgesellschaft Maschinenfabrik","ICL_Class":"B65B 1310","References":"2361742;2797634;2977872;3114308;3179037;3239994;3521550","Claims":"I claim:1. A machine for tying packages comprising:means defining a feed path for a package;rails extending transversely to said feed path and extending over itswidth;a carriage displaceable on said rails across said feed path;a tying arm mounted on said carriage for placing an elongated tying elementaround said package by forming a bulge in said element freely stretchingtransversely to said feed path for engagement by the package upon thefeeding thereof along said path, said arm thereafter displacing saidelement around the remainder of the package; anda fastening device for tying said element after it has been passed aroundsaid package by said arm.2. The machine defined in claim 1, further comprising a supply drum on saidcarriage for delivering said element to said arm.3. The machine defined in claim 2 wherein said arm is swingable on saidcarriage about an axis and said drum has an axis of swing centered on theaxis of said arm.4. The machine defined in claim 2, further comprising vertical columnssupporting said rails and said fastening device for adjustment in avertical direction.5. The machine defined in claim 2, further comprising means for rotatingsaid drum in a sense to enable withdrawal of said element therefrom, andmeans for braking the rotation of said drum in said sense.6. The machine defined in claim 2, further comprising vertical columnscarrying said rails and said fastening device, said columns defining withsaid rails a gate through which said package is passed.7. The machine defined in claim 2 wherein said arm has a swing adapted toextend over the rear corners of said package."}
{"WKU":"039304434","Title":"Method for application of data to a workpiece and apparatus for the","App_Date":"1973-10-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Erhard Konersmann","Assignee":"Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik Oerlikon-Buhrle AG","ICL_Class":"C23F  100;B44B  500;B41J  300","References":"2904934;2947120","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Apparatus for etching data on the metallic surfaces of a workpiececomprising, a housing, printing wheels having printing type securedthereon and mounted within said housing, an etching agent containerdisposed adjacent to said housing for containing an etching liquid, anabsorbent block extending partially into the etching liquid through anopening in said container, said absorbent block having a surface extendingout of the etching liquid, a wetting block mounted between said housingand said container for movement into first and second positions, saidwetting block having a contact surface, a first portion of which engagesthe surface of said absorbent block extending out of the etching liquidwhen said wetting block is moved into said first position and a secondportion of which engages said printing type when said wetting block ismoved into said second position, the size of said absorbent block surfacewhich engages the first portion of the contact surface of said wettingblock being chosen so as to prevent excessive wetting of the wetting blockwith said etching liquid.2. Apparatus according to claim 1 wherein said printing wheels are mountedin a printing wheel compartment within said housing on shafts disposed insaid housing, and including an electrically adjustable switching wheelassociated with each printing wheel and mounted on the shaft of itsrespective printing wheel, said switching wheels being sealingly separatedfrom said printing wheel compartment whereby said switching wheels areprotected from the vapors of the etching liquid in said printing wheelcompartment."}
{"WKU":"039304442","Title":"Printing device for imprinting selected characters on a movable record","App_Date":"1974-02-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Dieter Belge","Assignee":"Carl Valentin GmbH","ICL_Class":"B41J  108","References":"1909550;2542658;3218966;3420165;3669016;3690250;3824922","Claims":"It is claimed:1. In a printing apparatus of the type including a plurality of rotatabletype wheels (18), typesetting means (52, 50, 46) for rotating each of saidtype wheels, a cyclically-operable common drive means (58), resilientcoupling means (67) releasably connecting said typesetting means with saidcommon drive means, and locking means (78) for locking said type wheels indesired printing positions, thereby to decouple the typesetting meansassociated with the locked type wheels from said common drive means,thereby allowing the common drive means to complete its cycle, theimprovement whereina. said typesetting means includes a plurality of parallel longitudinallydisplaceable racks (52) associated with said type wheels, respectively;b. wherein said drive means comprises a pick-up rod (58) arranged normal tosaid racks adjacent and spaced from one end thereof, said pick-up rodbeing alternately laterally displaceable in a direction longitudinally ofsaid rod toward and away from said rack; andc. further wherein said resilient coupling means comprises spring members(67) connected at one end with said racks, respectively, said springmembers having at their other ends projection means (68) for extending incoupling engagement behind said rod, said other ends of said springmembers being laterally deflectable for decoupling an associated rack fromsaid rod when said locking means is actuated.2. Apparatus as defined in claim 1, wherein each of said spring memberscomprises a wire spring member having a first portion (70) extendinglongitudinally of and connected at one end with the rack member with whichit is associated, said spring member including a stop projection portion(68) arranged at the other end of said first portion, said stop projectionportion terminating in an angularly arranged ramp portion (77) whichcauses said stop projection portion to be laterally deflected when saidpick-up rod is displaced toward said wire spring member and said rack.3. Apparatus as defined in claim 2, and further wherein said wire springmember includes a second portion (74) connecting said first spring portionwith said rack, said second portion extending around a lateral abutment(72) on said rack and being secured at its free end to said rack.4. Apparatus as defined in claim 3, and further including rack guide means(54, 56) guiding said racks for longitudinal movement relative to eachother.5. Apparatus as defined in claim 3, and further including rod guide means(60) guiding the ends of said pick-up rod to assure lateral movement ofsaid pick-up rod longitudinally of said racks."}
{"WKU":"039304450","Title":"Squeegee assembly for use on a screen printing machine","App_Date":"1974-03-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"David Jaffa","Assignee":"Precision Screen Machines, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B41F 1542;B41F 1546","References":"2274166;2928340;3029779;3110919;3735730;3795188","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A squeegee assembly for use on a screen printing machine comprisingmeans for holding a squeegee,a squeegee blade supported on said squeegee holding means,means for maintaining a hydraulic pressure on said squeegee blade,means for adjusting the hydraulic pressure created on said squeegee blade,said means for maintaining hydraulic pressure including a flexible tubesealed at one end,a supply of liquid contained within said tube,a reversibly positionable contour bar interposed between said squeegeeblade and said tube,said contour bar having an inclined bottom surface terminating in a sharpbearing edge for engaging the free end of said squeegee blade, andsaid contour bar having a plurality of spaced apart slots formed therein,said slots opening toward the bearing edge of said contour bar so as toequalize the pressure applied through said contour bar on said squeegeeblade,whereby the flaccidity of said squeegee blade can be adjusted by anend-for-end reversing of said contour bar.2.  A squeegee assembly for use on a screen printing machine comprising:means for holding a squeegee having opposed side wall portions defining achannelway therethrough,a squeegee blade connected to said holding means,said squeegee blade having its free end extending under said channelway,a flexible tubular member disposed in said channelway,said tubular member being sealed at one end,a cylinder assembly,a conduit connecting said cylinder assembly in communication with saidtubular member,a piston disposed within said cylinder assembly,means for adjusting said piston relative to said cylinder assembly,a liquid supply confined to said tubular member, cylinder assembly andconnecting conduit whereby the adjustment of said piston varies thepressure of said liquid supply acting on said tubular member, anda reversibly positionable contour bar interposed between said tubularmember and said squeegee blade whereby the liquid pressure within saidtubular member is transmitted through said contour bar to said squeegeeblade,said contour bar having a tapering end portion to define a sharp edgeforming a line contact with said squeegee blade whereby the distance ofsaid line contact from the edge of the free end of the squeegee blade canbe varied by end-for-end reversing of said contour bar to thereby adjustthe flaccidity of said squeegee blade.3. The invention as defined in claim 2, wherein said contour bar has aplurality of spaced slots formed therein, andsaid slots opening to the squeegee engaging edge portion."}
{"WKU":"039304469","Title":"Duplicator with web master","App_Date":"1974-08-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert J. Crissy","Assignee":"Edmund W. Nulton","ICL_Class":"B41L  900","References":"492893;1282131;1349807;2026434;2057360;2172414;2340819;3241484;3373684;3548747","Claims":"I claim:1. An apparatus for producing individual sheets containing variableinformation from a master web and repeat information comprising a commonimpression cylinder for carrying a copy web through at least two printingimpressions, a printing cylinder for printing the repeat information onthe copy web while the latter is carried on the common impressioncylinder, means for separating the copy web at spaced lengths intoindividual sheets containing printed information from the master web andrepeat printed information, positive feed means for feeding the master webtoward the copy web while the latter is carried on said common impressioncylinder and for feeding the master web at a speed slightly faster thanthe copy web on said common impression cylinder, a pressure roll forpressing the master web against the copy web while the latter is incontact with the common impression cylinder to transfer information fromthe master web to the copy web without relative movement between the webs,thereby developing slack in the master web between the pressure roll andthe positive feed means, and means automatically relieving the pressurebetween the common impression cylinder and the pressure roll after eachimpression to remove the slack developed in the master web.2. An apparatus as set forth in claim 1 in which the master web is aplurality of individual cards connected by fold lines and having feedholes provided therein and in which the positive feed means includes a pincarrying chain, the pins engaging the holes to provide a positive feed forthe master web, and including means for driving the pin carrying chain toachieve proper synchronism between the impression received by the copy webfrom the master web, the impression received by the copy web from theprinting cylinder and the separation of the copy web at spaced intervals.3. An apparatus as set forth in claim 2 in which the master web has feedholes provided along the edges thereof and including a pair of pincarrying chains and means for adjusting the spacing between the pincarrying chains to accommodate different widths of master webs.4. An apparatus as set forth in claim 1 in which the means automaticallyrelieving the pressure between the common impression cylinder and thepressure roll is a longitudinally extending recess in the outer surface ofthe impression cylinder to relieve the pressure between the impressioncylinder and the pressure roll intermediate the transfer of impressionsfrom the master web to the copy web.5. An apparatus as set forth in claim 1, including a pair of rollers forsupporting the copy web and maintaining it in a taut condition after thecopy web has left the common impression cylinder and before its advance tothe separating means.6. A method of producing individual sheets containing variable informationfrom a master web and repeat information from a rotating printing cylindercomprising the steps of feeding a copy web onto a common impressioncylinder which carries the copy web through at least two printingimpressions, printing the repeat information on the copy web while thelatter is carried on the common impression cylinder, separating the copyweb at spaced lengths into individual sheets containing printedinformation from the master web and repeat printed information from theprinting cylinder, positively feeding the master web toward the copy webwhile the latter is carried on said common impression cylinder and at aspeed slightly faster than the copy web on said common impressioncylinder, bringing the master web in pressure contact with the copy webwhile the latter is in contact with the common impression cylinder totransfer information from the master web to the copy web without relativemovement between the webs, thereby developing slack in the master webbetween the pressure applying and positive feeding steps, andautomatically relieving the pressure between the common impressioncylinder and the pressure roll after each printing impression to removethe slack developed in the master web.7. A method as set forth in claim 6, including the step of supporting thecopy web and maintaining it in taut condition after it has left the commonimpression cylinder and before it is separated.8. A method as set forth in claim 6 in which the master is positively fedby means of moving pins which engage holes in the master web, and drivingthe pin carrying chain to achieve proper synchronism between theimpression received by the copy web from the master web, the impressionreceived by the copy web from the printing cylinder and the separation ofthe copy web at spaced intervals.9. A method as set forth in claim 6 in which the pressure is automaticallyrelieved by a longitudinal recess formed in the impression cylinder."}
{"WKU":"039304477","Title":"Dual purpose display for printing presses","App_Date":"1974-07-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James E. Murray","Assignee":"Harris Corporation","ICL_Class":"B41F 3104","References":"2968988;2969016;3057294;3185088;3343030;3376426;3474438;3487308;3567923;3588696;3702587;3707123;3746957;3792659;3835777","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Display apparatus for a printing press having a plurality of ink ratecontrol devices distributed laterally across the press and havingequipment for producing indicating signals having values in accordancewith the settings of respectively associated said ink control devices andhaving at least one ink density measurement system for making ameasurement of printed ink density as established by at least some of saiddevices comprising display means including means responsive to saidindicating signals for displaying visual representations as to the valuesof respectively associated said signals in a linear array of visualdisplays of the settings in the order in which the ink control devices arelaterally distributed across the press, reference means operable forsetting an ink density reference level, comparator means responsive tosaid ink density measurement and said ink density reference level forproducing a density deviation signal in accordance with the differencebetween them, and said display means including means for displaying avisual representation of said deviation signal in geometrical alignmentwith and for visual association with those ones of said array of displaysof ink control device settings by which said ink density is established.2. Display apparatus for a printing press as defined in claim 1 and whereinsaid means for displaying said settings of said ink control device andsaid deviation display means comprise cathode ray tube display means, andsaid visual displays of settings are arrayed horizontally, and saiddeviation signals are displayed in vertical alignment with the display ofthe device settings that are associated therewith.3. Display apparatus for a printing press as defined in claim 1 and whereinsaid press comprises a plurality of said ink density measurement systems,and comprises a like plurality of said reference means and of saidcomparator means, and wherein said deviation display means comprises meansfor displaying a plurality of deviation signals each correspondingrespectively to one of said density measurement systems, each of saiddeviation signal display being in geometrical alignment for visualassociation with those ones of said array of displays of ink controldevice settings by which the respective ink density is established.4. Display apparatus for a printing press as defined in claim 1 and whereinsaid printing press has a plurality of printing units and wherein said inkdensity measurement system is provided for use by a plurality of theprinting units, and further comprising switching means for selectivelyconnecting said means for displaying settings and said deviation displaymeans for use by one at a time of said printing units.5. Display apparatus for a printing press as defined in claim 1 and whereinsaid means for displaying each of said visual displays of ink controldevice settings comprises means for displaying indicators at equallyspaced positions extending in a vertical column from a predeterminedstarting point, whose last indicator position of said column isproportional to said setting except when said setting corresponds to avertical postion intermediate said equally spaced positions, and furthercomprises means for producing an interpolation indicator as the lastindicator in said column to indicate said setting when said settingcorresponds to a vertical postion intermediate said equally spacedpositions.6. Display apparatus for a printing press having a plurality of ink ratecontrol devices distributed laterally across the press and havingequipment for producing indicating signals having values in accordancewith the settings of respectively associated said ink control devices andhaving at least one ink density measurement system for making ameasurement of printed ink density as established by at least some of saiddevices comprising display means including means responsive to saidindicating signals for displaying visual representations as to the valuesof associated said indicating signals in a linear array of visual displaysof the settings in the order in which the ink control devices arelaterally distributed across the press, said display means including meansfor displaying said plurality of visual representations as a plurality ofvertical columns of equally spaced apart indicators with each said columnbeing associated with one of said ink control devices, said indicators ofeach column extending from a horizontal base line and extending in a firstdirection therefrom with the number of said indicators in a given columnbeing dependent on the value of the indicator signals for the ink settingof an associated said ink control device, reference means operable forsetting an ink density reference level, comparator means responsive tosaid ink density measurement and said ink density reference level forproducing a density deviation signal in accordance with the differencebetween them, and said display means including means for displaying avisual representation of said density deviation signal in geometricalalignment with and for visual association with those ones of said array ofdisplays of ink control device settings by which said ink density isestablished.7. Display apparatus for a printing press having a plurality of ink controldevices distributed laterally across the press and having means forproducing a like plurality of indicating signals having values inaccordance with settings of respectively associated said ink controldevices and having a plurality of ink density measurement systems each formaking a measurement of printed ink density as established by at leastsome of said devices comprising display means including means responsiveto said indicating signals for displaying visual representations as to thevalues of associated said indicating signals and including means fordisplaying said plurality of visual representations as a plurality ofvertical columns of equally spaced apart indicators with each said columnbeing associated with one of said ink control devices, said indicators ofeach column extending from a horizontal base line and extending in a firstdirection therefrom with the number of said indicators in a given columnbeing dependent on the value of the indicator signal for the ink settingof an associated said ink control device so that the last indicator ofsaid column is spaced from said base line by a distance proportional tothe setting of the associated ink control device except when the settingthereof corresponds to a vertical position intermediate said equalspacings, means for producing an interpolation indicator as to the lastindicator in a said column to indicate said setting when said settingcorresponds to a vertical position intermediate said equal spacings,reference means for setting an ink density reference level, comparatormeans responsive to said ink density measurement and said ink densityreference level for producing a density deviation signal in accordancewith the difference between them, and said display means including meansfor displaying a visual representation of said density deviation signal ingeometric alignment with and for visual association with those ones ofsaid array of displays of ink control device settings by which said inkdensity is established."}
{"WKU":"039304485","Title":"Rocket-deployed balloon for position marker","App_Date":"1974-08-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William H. Barber;Werner F. Beckert;Ottmar H. Dengel","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy","ICL_Class":"F42B 1342","References":"79963;2778332;3118638;3132626;3156185;3381655;3395877;3612857","Claims":"What is claimed as new and desired to be secured by Letters Patent of theUnited States is:1. A portable, rocket-deployed, tethered position marker system comprising:an inflatable marker assembly including an inflatable balloon, and a sourceof gas for inflating said balloon;a rocket for launching said marker assembly to a predetermined altitude;a separable casing attached to said rocket for containing said markerassembly;a portable, hand-held launch tube for containing and for launching saidrocket and said attached casing; anda tether line stored within said casing for attaching said balloon to saidlaunch tube,whereupon actuation said rocket is launched from said launch tube, saidtether line is removed from said casing, said casing separates from saidrocket at a predetermined altitude, and said balloon is permitted to beinflated and to remain tethered to said launch tube.2. The position marker system of claim 1 wherein said separable casing is acylinder split to form half shell segments when separated.3. The position marker system of claim 2 wherein said separable casing issecured together and attached to said rocket by a removable pin tied tosaid tether cord at a selected length from the end secured to said launchtube,whereby deployment of said length of cord removes said pin permitting saidcasing to separate.4. The position marker system of claim 3 wherein said rocket is of thetractor type having:solid fuel grains;a plurality of propulsion nozzles canted to provide spin stability duringflight; anda percussion-activated fuel ignition means.5. The position marker system of claim 4 further comprising amanually-operable rocket propellant ignition control means positioned onsaid launch tube for actuating said rocket.6. The position marker system of claim 5 wherein said ignition controlmeans comprises a displaceable slide release and a spring-loaded strikerheld in the cocked position by said slide release, whereby displacement ofsaid slide release permits said striker to impact on saidpercussion-activated fuel ignition means on said rocket.7. The position marker system of claim 6 wherein said source of gas is asolid fuel hydrogen generator.8. The position marker system of claim 7 wherein said hydrogen generatorincludes a percussion-activated primer to initiate the hydrogen-generationchemical reaction in said solid fuel.9. The position marker system of claim 8 wherein said hydrogen generatorprimer is spring-loaded and is released by separation of said separablecasing from said rocket.10. The position marker system of claim 8 further comprising means forreleasing said hydrogen generator after inflation of said balloon.11. The position marker system of claim 10 further comprising separableprotective sheaths enclosing said balloon.12. The position marker system of claim 11 wherein said protective sheathscomprise a pair of separable half shells discarded after ballooninflation.13. The position marker system of claim 12 further comprising a removableclosure cap threadably positioned on said launch tube."}
{"WKU":"039304493","Title":"Time delay initiator","App_Date":"1974-05-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Reuben J. Buchele","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Army","ICL_Class":"F42C 1100","References":"2998776;3088409;3420176;3570404;3875863","Claims":"I claim:1. A time delay initiator comprising: a timing circuit having a triggerinput, plural power inputs, and plural outputs for coupling to loadcircuitry; said timing circuit comprises a spring wound timer having arotatable shaft and disposed for activation by said trigger input, andplural switches coupled between said power inputs and outputs for couplingpower therebetween, said switches being disposed adjacent the shaft ofsaid timer for activation during shaft rotation; a first thermal batteryhaving an input and having an output coupled to a first of said pluralpower inputs; and means coupled to said battery input for activating saidbattery.2. A time delay initiator as set forth in claim 1 wherein said timingcircuit further comprises actuator means coupled between said triggerinput and said timer for activating said timer in response to anelectrical trigger input.3. A time delay initiator as set forth in claim 2 wherein said thermalbattery further comprises an electric match coupled across said inputterminals for initiating battery charging in response to a momentaryelectrical impulse.4. A time delay initiator as set forth in claim 3 and further comprising asecond thermal battery having the input thereof in parallel with the firstbattery input and having the output coupled to a second of said timingcircuit power inputs.5. A time delay initiator as set forth in claim 4 wherein said loadcircuitry includes first and second squib initiators for activating arocket motor, and said plural switches are first and second singlepoledouble-throw switches having normally closed contacts coupled across saidsquib initiators for maintaining a short-circuit thereacross prior toactivation of said switches, said switches being coupled to said batteriesfor individually placing the output of said batteries across respectivesquibs when said switches are activated."}
{"WKU":"039304507","Title":"Boat ride for amusement park","App_Date":"1974-06-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert W. Symons","Assignee":"Sid & Marty Krofft Productions, Inc.","ICL_Class":"A63G  300;B63H 1904;B65G 5330;E02B  506","References":"326198;382267;536357;1249455;3404635;3807806","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property orprivilege is claimed are defined as follows:1. A vehicle system comprising:walls forming a vehicle pathway including an elongated channel with a wallthereof which has an open slot narrower than the channel and extendingalong the top of the channel;a vehicle having a body lying above said slot, at least one support membercoupled to said body and extending through said slot into said channel,and paddle means lying in said channel and attached to said support forreceiving forces from water moving along the channel; andmeans positioned along said channel for pumping and directing the flow ofthe water along the channel.2. The system described in claim 1 wherein:said vehicle, including said paddle thereof, moves down and up inaccordance with the load in said body respectively increasing anddecreasing; andsaid pumping means moves water at a greater velocity near the bottom of thechannel than near the top thereof, whereby to increase the propulsionforce as the vehicle is increasingly loaded.3. The apparatus described in claim 1 including:load compensating means responsive to the load in said body for increasingor decreasing the drive capacity of said paddle means as the loadrespectively increases and decreases.4. The system described in claim 1, wherein:said pathway and channel include a curved portion; andsaid pumping means comprises means for moving water faster around theoutside of said curved channel portion than along the inside thereof,including a water outlet positioned along said curved portion of saidchannel near the outside of the turn.5. The system described in claim 1, including:deflector means coupled to said paddle means to move with it, for coveringportions of said slot near said paddle means, whereby to minimize the flowof water out of said channel through said slot as the vehicle moves by.6. The system described in claim 1, wherein:said walls form a main channel lying above said first named channel, saidmain channel containing water, and said body of said vehicle comprising ahull floating in the water of said main channel.7. The system described in claim 1, wherein:said vehicle includes wheels lying above the level of said channel androllably supporting said body.8. A boat ride apparatus comprising:walls forming an elongated main channel for holding water to carry a boat,said walls also forming an auxiliary water-holding channel extendingparallel to said main channel and substantially isolated from it exceptalong a slot that connects said channels, said slot being narrower thansaid auxiliary channel to minimize the interaction of waters in the twochannels; and means for directing the flow and moving the water so thatthe water moves at least along the bottom of said auxiliary channel whileallowing water to move at a slower speed along said main channel, wherebyto enable propulsion of a boat along said main channel by a paddle or thelike that extend from the boat into the auxiliary channel.9. The apparatus described in claim 8 including:a boat having a hull floating in said main channel, paddle means wider thansaid slot and lying in said auxiliary channel, and a support extendingthrough said slot and connecting said hull to said paddle means.10. The apparatus described in claim 9, wherein:said paddle means includes forward and rearward paddles with the forwardpaddle positioned forward of the rearward paddle, said rearward paddlehaving a smaller effective area then said forward paddle.11. The apparatus described in claim 9, wherein:said paddle means includes a bucket-shaped member with a substantiallyvertical base wall and with substantially rearwardly extending side wallsextending all around said base wall.12. A compact amusement ride comprising:a boatway including a portion curved at a small radius of curvature, saidboatway including a shallow main channel and an auxiliary channel lyingbeneath the main channel and including a separating wall at the top ofsaid auxiliary channel separating said channels, said separating wallincluding a slot;a boat having a hull floating in said main channel, two members havingupper ends coupled to the hull and extending through said slot, saidmembers spaced from one another along the length of said guideway and eachmember having bearing means thereon for engaging the walls of said slot,and at least one paddle means coupled to one of said members and lying insaid auxiliary channel; and means positioned along said auxiliary channelfor moving water generally along the length direction of said auxiliarychannel.13. The ride described in claim 12, wherein:said water moving means moves water at a greater velocity along the outsidethan the inside of the auxiliary channel of said curved boatway portion.14. Boat ride apparatus comprising:means defining a bottom wall and side walls for holding water, and definingan auxiliary channel extending under said bottom wall, said bottom wallhaving a slot extending over said auxiliary channel in a direction alongthe length of the channel;water completely filling said auxiliary channel and lying over said bottomwall at a depth less than the height of said side walls;a boat having a hull floating in the water above said bottom wall, a pairof members spaced from one another along the length of said slot andhaving upper ends mounted on said hull and lower portions extendingthrough said slot into said auxiliary channel, and at least one paddlemeans lying in said auxiliary channel and mounted on one of said members;andpump means for moving water generally along the length direction of saidauxiliary channel.15. The apparatus described in claim 14, wherein:the upper end of each of said members is pivotally connected to said hullto permit pivoting about a substantially horizontally and longitudinallyextending axis, whereby the members and paddle means are able to resisttilting when the boat rocks.16. The apparatus described in claim 14, wherein:said pump means includes outlets near the bottom of said auxiliary channelfor moving water near the bottom of the auxiliary channel faster thanwater near the top of the auxiliary channel."}
{"WKU":"039304515","Title":"Roadway for high performance rapid transit railways","App_Date":"1973-08-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Werner Huebner;Michael Simon;Peter Wagner","Assignee":"Michael Simon","ICL_Class":"B61B 1308","References":"3090326;3233559;3616763;3738280;3774542;3776141","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a railroad track for a high performance rapid transit railwayemploying overhang and underhang suspension vehicles of the typecomprising a support structure including supporting means and guidedevices, whereby said support structure is either formed as a solidgirder, or as a framework or truss work, the improvement wherein thesupport structure further comprises two longitudinally extending maingirders arranged opposite each other, and at least one reaction railrigidly mounted with respect to said main girders and positioned forreceiving an electro-magnetic effect, said reaction rail being mounted toconstitute a supporting element of the supporting structure, wherein saidtwo main girders have open cross sections, and wherein said supportingmeans comprise supporting columns as well as cross struts interconnectingsaid main girders and arranged adjacent the bottoms of the main girders inthe area of said supporting columns.2. The railroad track of claim 1, wherein said main girders have hollowbox-shaped open cross sections.3. The railroad track of claim 1, wherein said reaction rail is made ofsteel.4. The railroad track of claim 1, wherein said reaction rail is made of anon-ferrous metal.5. The railroad track according to claim 1, wherein the reaction rail is acurrent conductor.6. The railroad track according to claim 1 for use with a vehicle carryingthe moving portion of a linear motor, wherein said reaction railconstitutes the stator of said linear motor.7. The railroad track according to claim 1, wherein said support structureis positioned to rest on said supporting columns.8. The railroad track according to claim 1, wherein said support structurefurther comprises conduit piping as a supporting means.9. The railroad track according to claim 8, wherein the conduit pipes servefor the transport of containers.10. The railroad track of claim 8, wherein at least some of the conduitpipes serve for containing electrical long distance super conductors.11. A railroad track for a high performance rapid transit railway forsupporting a vehicle of the type carrying the moving portion of a linearmotor, comprising a pair of horizontally, spaced apart structural steelbeams, first reaction rail means rigidly affixed to at least one of saidbeams to form a load bearing element of the respective beam, whereby saidbeams and first rail means together constitute the support structure ofsaid tracks, said reaction rail means being positioned to receiveelectromagnetic effects from a linear motor of a vehicle on said track,and further comprising second U-shaped armature reaction rail means alsorigidly secured to at least one of said beams for electro-magneticsuspension and guiding of said vehicle, whereby both of said reaction railmeans constitute load bearing components of the track.12. The railroad track of claim 11, wherein said beams have substantiallyflat tops, said first reaction rail means being affixed to the top of atleast one of said beams.13. The railroad track of claim 12, wherein said first reaction rail meanscomprises an aluminum plate secured in a flat position to said one beam,whereby said first reaction rail means becomes part of said one beam.14. The railroad track of claim 12, wherein said reaction rail comprises asteel plate lying flat on said one beam, and an aluminum plate lying flaton said steel plate."}
{"WKU":"039304523","Title":"Impact resistant panels","App_Date":"1973-09-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert Van Laethem;Pol Baudin;Marcel De Boel","Assignee":"Glaverbel-Mecaniver S.A.","ICL_Class":"F41H  504","References":"2991209;3135645;3324768;3380406;3671370;3702593","Claims":"We claim:1. In an impact resistant panel composed of a group of at least threesheets of vitreous material bonded together via intervening layers ofplastic material, the improvement wherein said group of vitreous sheetscomprises a set of consecutive vitreous sheets of at least three differentthicknesses which are arranged in order of thickness, and at least thefirst sheet of said set, taken in the direction from the highest sheetthickness end of said set, is tempered, and at least two of saidintervening layers of plastic material are of respectively differentthicknesses and are arranged so that the thinner of said layers is nearerto said first sheet than is any other one of said layers.2. A panel as defined in claim 1 wherein at least one said interveninglayer of plastic material comprises at least one self-sustaining membraneof plastic material.3. A panel as defined in claim 1 wherein there are at least four of saidvitreous sheets and said intervening layers of plastic material adherentto said sheets are of at least three different thicknesses arranged inorder of thickness, with a layer of least thickness being adherent to saidfirst sheet.4. A panel as defined in claim 1 wherein there are four of said vitreoussheets each having a respectively different thickness.5. A panel as defined in claim 1 wherein the thinnest sheet of said set hasa thickness of less than 6 mm.6. A panel as defined in claim 5 wherein said thinnest sheet has athickness of between 1.5 and 3.2 mm.7. A panel as defined in claim 1 wherein at least said first sheet of theset is chemically tempered.8. A panel as defined in claim 7 wherein each said sheet is chemicallytempered.9. A panel as defined in claim 1 wherein a said sheet having the leastthickness forms an exterior face of said panel.10. A panel as defined in claim 1 wherein said first sheet of said setforms an exterior face of the panel.11. A panel as defined in claim 1 further comprising a glazing element heldin spaced relation from the last sheet of said set taken in the directionfrom the highest sheet thickness end thereof and constituting an exteriorface of said panel.12. A panel as defined in claim 11 where said glazing element is alaminated structure comprising at least one vitreous sheet.13. A panel as defined in claim 11 wherein said glazing element is spacedfrom said last sheet of the set of vitreous sheets by a distance of atleast 10 mm.14. A panel as defined in claim 1 wherein at least one exterior face of thepanel is formed by a vitreous sheet which is chemically tempered.15. A panel as defined in claim 1 wherein the thickness of each saidintervening layer of plastic material lies between 0.2 and 5.0 mm.16. A panel as defined in claim 1 and installed so that said sheet ofgreatest thickness is located on that side of said set against whichimpact is most likely to be directed.17. A panel as defined in claim 16 forming part of a wall of a tellerenclosure.18. A panel as defined in claim 16 constituted as a vehicle window."}
{"WKU":"039304531","Title":"Means for producing piping openings in blanks of garments","App_Date":"1974-05-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Peter Hintzen;Erich Willenbacher","Assignee":"Pfaff Industriemaschinen GmbH","ICL_Class":"D05B  310","References":"2529072;2573359;2889790","Claims":"We claim:1. Arrangement for producing piped openings in cut blanks of garments,comprising a displaceable supporting plate and a folding device includinga folding slide for piping strips defined by movable folding tools and aworking blank clamp displaceable relative to the needles of a doubleneedle sewing machine having a separating cutter working centrally betweenthe needles and adapted to be lowered upon the cut blank, two folding andclamping rails defining a folding shaft between them supported forvertical movement and pivotally supported at their upper ends for rockingmovement toward and away from one another and relative to said foldingslide for clamping a piping strip disposed around said folding slide,means for raising and lowering said folding and clamping rails together byan adjustable distance relative to a cut blank in said folding shaftwhereby outwardly directed bulges of the tightened parts of the pipingstrip are formed on both sides of said folding slide.2. Arrangement in accordance with claim 1, comprising standing boltssecured in the working blank clamp on supports displaceably supportingfolding and clamping rails.3. Arrangement in accordance with claim 2, where the folding and clampingrails are connected with one another by way of pivot bearings providedwith a tooth segment journalled above the supports.4. Arrangement in accordance with claim 3, where for producing the verticalmovements of the folding and clamping rails a knee joint is provided thatis movable out of its collapsed position through a stretched position intoa further collapsed position between the working blank clamp and thesupports of the folding and clamping rails, and where one line of the kneejoint is telescopically formed and equipped with an intermediate springmember.5. Arrangement in accordance with claim 4, comprising an adjustableabutment for limiting the upwardly directed displacement movement of thefolding and clamping rails by a standing bolt.6. Arrangement in accordance with claim 5 comprising a passage slot for aneedle in the folding and clamping rails.7. Arrangement in accordance with claim 6, comprising supporting members onthe work blank clamp that are displaceable relative to one another fordefining the folding shaft, which are driven by way of standing boltsfastened in a frame displaceably mounted on the work blank clamp, saidbolts extending through slotted guides in the supporting plates directedobliquely to the displacement direction of the frame.8. Arrangement in accordance with claim 1, comprising a supporting platefor the piping strip that is provided with abutments movable out of ahorizontally inclinded initial position about a horizontal axis andbetween the folding and clamping rails and the supporting plates disposedbetween the work blank clamp and has a recess permitting a relativemovement between itself and the folding slide in two planes perpendicularto one another and can be returned to the starting position while thefolding slide is in its lower position on the cut blank.9. Arrangement in accordance with claim 1, including abutments in the rangeof movement of the parts of the supporting plate disposed at a distancefrom the bearing axis for determining the angular settings of thesupporting plate relative to the horizontal.10. Arrangement in accordance with claim 1, where the folding slide isprovided with a compressed air channel which leads on both sides of thefolding edge to laterally directed compressed air outlet nozzles.11. Arrangement in accordance with claim 1 including bolts secured to theworking blank clamp for guiding the folding and clamping rails, said railsbeing pivotally mounted for movement about the bolt and means permittingdisplacement of the bolts and means for pivotally moving the folding andclamping rails in opposite directions."}
{"WKU":"039304540","Title":"Small cloth vise for a sewing machine","App_Date":"1974-07-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Silvano Perlino","Assignee":"Necchi, Societa per Azioni","ICL_Class":"D05B 2100","References":"2453623;3093275;3483834;3517630;3552336","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A device for holding the folded edge of a pocket against a garmentduring the sewing of two parallel seams along each of the folded edges ofthe pocket comprising a bottom plate for supporting the garment, apivotable top assembly for pressing the pocket material on the garmentduring the sewing operation, said assembly consisting of a pivotal centralplate taking the shape of the pocket and having slots therein, two movableside plates and a movable bottom plate positioned below the central plateand attached thereto, through said slots, said movable plates beingcapable of movement beyond and within the edges of the central plate, andmeans to move said movable plates, said means comprising a pneumatic motorpositioned on said central plate, a movable platelet positioned above saidcentral plate and attached to said bottom plate through one of said slotsand to said motor, and pivotal levers each attached at one end to saidplatelet and at the other end to said side plates whereby said movableplates are moved inwardly toward said central plate after sewing the firstseam and before securing the parallel second seam."}
{"WKU":"039304558","Title":"Boat hull construction","App_Date":"1974-09-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Harry Bremer","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B63B  120","References":"2938490;3077851;3191572;3226739;3259092;3600733","Claims":"I claim:1. A modified deep V boat hull construction, comprising a bottom having acentral surface extending longitudinally from the stern toward the bow,said central surface being generally flat in a cross sectional direction,said bottom having longitudinally extending side surfaces spaced laterallyon either side of said central surface, said side surfaces being generallyflat in a cross sectional direction, at any cross sectional plane throughthe hull the line of intersection of each of said side surfaces and saidplane being horizontal and the line of intersection of said centralsurface and said plane being horizontal and at a lower level than saidfirst named lines of intersection, and said hull having longitudinallyextending upwardly arched curved channels connecting said central surfacewith each side surface, said channels having a substantially uniformlateral width from the stern of the hull toward the bow.2. The boat hull construction of claim 1, wherein the central surface has asubstantially uniform lateral width from the stern to a location adjacentthe bow and said side surfaces each have a substantially uniform lateralwidth from the stern to a location adjacent the bow.3. The boat hull construction of claim 1, wherein the portion of thecentral surface disposed adjacent the stern has a slightly concaveconfiguration in a stern-to-bow direction and the side surfaces have aslightly convex configuration in a stern-to-bow direction.4. The boat hull construction of claim 1, wherein the central surface has agreater lateral width than the side surfaces.5. A modified deep V boat hull construction comprising a bottom having acentral longitudinally extending generally V-shaped keel with the bottomof the keel terminating in a laterally flat central surface, said bottomhaving longitudinally downwardly extending generally V-shaped side ridgesspaced laterally on both sides of the central keel, said side edgesterminating in laterally flat side surfaces, at any vertical crosssectional plane through the hull said side surfaces being generallyparallel to each other and generally parallel to said central surface andsaid central surface being at a lower level than said side surfaces, andsaid hull having longitudinally extending upwardly arched continuouslycurved channels connecting said keel with said side ridges, each of saidchannels having a greater lateral width than said central surface andhaving a greater lateral width than the individual side surfaces.6. The boat hull construction of claim 5, wherein said central surface hasa substantially uniform width in a lateral direction and said sidesurfaces each having a substantially uniform width in a lateral direction,said central surface having a greater width than said side surfaces."}
{"WKU":"039304566","Title":"Ship s afterbody, especially for a full-form ship fitted with more than","App_Date":"1973-10-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Lennart Ludvigsson","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B63B  108","References":"2729182;3092061;3416480","Claims":"What I claim is:1. In a full form ship including a hull having sides, an after body, amiddle part, and a transom stern, at least two propellers at the stern, aboss for each propeller and a rudder, a horizontal bottom portion of themiddle part being inclined upwardly and extending to a level correspondingto propeller clearance providing a substantially horizontal hull surfaceabove the rudder and propellers, the hull surface at the stern having awidth greater than the distance between the bosses for the propellers,said after body having an underwater part, the underwater part beingdivided into an upper full body portion and a lower narrow body portion,and a transition portion between the upper full body portion and the lowernarrow body portion comprising substantially horizontal hull surfaceswhich successively change over into the sides of the middle part.2. The hull as claimed in claim 1 in which the upper full body portionterminates in a transom stern, said stern having a lower edge, said loweredge being located substantially at the level of the transition portion.3. The hull as claimed in claim 2 in which the upper full body portion isprovided with a lower surface located above the rudder and propeller, thelower surface extending to the lower edge of the transom stern."}
{"WKU":"039304574","Title":"Conduit-mounted valve-vent interlock especially for tank ships","App_Date":"1974-09-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Wendell W. Dedman;Heinz F. Weyer;Duncan D. Wimperis","Assignee":"Texaco Inc.","ICL_Class":"B63B 2508;B63J  208","References":"1099127;2049987","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In combination with a tank ship having a common conduit for supplying aninert gas to a plurality of tanks, each of said tanks having a branchconduit from said common conduit, and each of said branch conduits havingvalve means for isolating that tank from said common conduit, thecombination comprisinga hatch on said branch conduit located between the tank and said valvemeans, andinterlock means cooperating with said valve means and said hatch formaintaining said hatch open unless said valve means is fully open.2. In combination with a tank ship in accordance with claim 1, thecombination further comprisinga hinged cover on said hatch, andsaid interlock means including means integrally attached to said hingedcover.3. In combination with a tank ship in accordance with claim 2, whereinsaid means integrally attached to said hinged cover comprises an armextending radially from said hinged cover.4. In combination with a tank ship in accordance with claim 3, whereinsaid interlock means also comprises means actuated by said valve means forcooperating with said arm to maintain said hatch open unless said valvemeans is fully open.5. In combination with a tank ship in accordance with claim 4, whereinsaid valve means is a butterfly type having a shaft and said valve-actuatedmeans comprises radial means fixed on an extension of said shaft.6. In combination with a tank ship in accordance with claim 5, whereinsaid radial means comprises a solid disc having a notch for receiving saidarm.7. In combination with a tank ship having a common conduit for supplying aninert gas to a plurality of cargo tanks, each of said tanks having abranch conduit from said common conduit, and each of said branch conduitshaving a butterfly valve mounted therein for isolating that tank from saidcommon conduit, said butterfly valve having a closure member actuated byan operating shaft extending outside of said branch conduit, thecombination comprisinga hatch on said branch conduit located between said tank and said butterflyvalve for venting said tank to prevent excess pressure therein,a cover for said hatch having a hinge at the edge away from said butterflyvalve,an arm extending radially from said cover and fixed rigidly thereto forhinging movement therewith,a solid disc fixedly attached to said operating shaft and having aperipherally located notch sized to fit said arm therein,the relative locations of said hatch and said valve, and the dimensions ofsaid arm being such that said cover cannot be closed unless said arm is insaid notch,said notch being substantially located in the plane of the closure memberof said valve.8. In combination, a tank ship having a plurality of cargo tanks and acommon conduit for supplying an inert gas to said tanks,a plurality of branch conduits for connecting said common conduit to saidtanks,each of said branch conduits having a hatch with a hinged cover for ventingthe tank when said cover is open,valve means adjacent to said hatch, andmeans for interlocking said hinged cover and said valve means forpreventing said cover from being closed unless said valve means is fullyopen.9. In a combination according to claim 8, whereinsaid valve means is located between said hatch and said common conduit, andsaid interlocking means comprises an integrally attached arm extendingradially from said hinged hatch cover.10. In a combination according to claim 9, whereinsaid valve means comprises a butterfly-type valve including a valve discwith diametrically disposed shaft extending radially outside of saidbranch conduit, and means fixed to said valve shaft outside of said branchconduit for rotation with said valve disc, andsaid interlocking means further comprises means associated with said armand said fixed means for preventing said cover from being closed unlesssaid valve disc  is in the fully open position.11. In a combination according to claim 10, whereinsaid fixed means comprises a solid disc, andsaid associated means comprises a radial notch in said disc,said arm engaging said notch when said valve disc is fully open to permitsaid hatch to be closed but contacting said solid disc when said valvedisc is not fully open to prevent closing said hatch.12. In combination, a tank ship having a plurality of cargo tanks and acommon conduit for supplying an inert gas to said tanks,a plurality of branch conduits for connecting said common conduit to saidtanks,each of said branch conduits having a hatch with a hinged cover for ventingthe tank when the cover is open,said hinge being located on the side toward said tank,a butterfly valve adjacent to said hatch and located in said branch conduiton the side of said hatch toward said common conduit,said valve having a valve disc mounted on a diametrically disposed shaft,said shaft extending outside of said branch conduit,a solid disc fixed to said shaft near the end that extends outside of theconduit,a radial notch peripherally located in said solid disc and substantially inthe plane of said valve disc,an integrally attached arm extending radially from said hinged cover on theother side from said hinge and being sized to fit into said notch,said arm and said solid disc having relative dimensions such that said armwill contact the disc and prevent the hatch cover from being closed unlesssaid notch is aligned with the arm."}
{"WKU":"039304582","Title":"Propeller support for amphibious vehicle","App_Date":"1972-10-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Franz Krautkremer","Assignee":"Schottel-Werft Josef Becker KG","ICL_Class":"B63H  512","References":"2336906;2458813;2536894;2902967;3072090;3385255;3487802","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property orprivilege is claimed are defined as follows:1. In an amphibious vehicle having an engine and drivable ground engagingand supporting means and first drive means connected between said engineand said ground engaging and supporting means for effecting a drivingmovement of said ground engaging and supporting means and, consequently,of said vehicle relative to the ground and drivable propeller means andsecond drive means therefor for effecting a movement of said vehiclethrough the water, the improvement comprising wherein said drivablepropeller means comprises an upper support means pivotally secured to saidvehicle for movement about a substantially horizontal axis and lowersupport means mounted on said upper support means for movement 360.degree.about a substantially vertical axis thereby defining a steering axis, saidlower support means having a propeller rotatably secured thereto forrotation about a substantially horizontal axis, said second drive meansincluding a fluid driven drive motor mounted on said upper support meansand coupling means for drivingly coupling the output of said fluid drivendrive motor to said propeller, a second drive motor mounted on said uppersupport means for effecting a selective rotation of said lower supportmeans about said substantially vertical axis through 360.degree. relativeto said upper support means, third drive means for driving said uppersupport means for movement about said substantially horizontal axis toeffect a movement of said steering axis between positions of verticalalignment and a raised position, and selective control means comprisingblower means for venting the interior of said vehicle and fluid drivendrive means therefor, a fluid pump driven by said engine and supplyingfluid to said fluid driven drive means and two position valve means fordirecting fluid from said fluid pump either to said fluid driven drivemeans or to said fluid driven drive motor.2. The improved amphibious vehicle according to claim 1, wherein said uppersupport means comprises an upper support member having flange meansthereon having means defining a first hole therethrough, and bearing blockmeans mounted on said vehicle and having means defining a second openingtherethrough aligned with said axially aligned first opening in saidflange means and bolt means received in said first and second openingsthereby defining said pivot axis.3. The improved amphibious vehicle according to claim 2, wherein the axisof said first and second holes extends transversely of the longitudinalaxis of said vehicle.4. The improved amphibious vehicle according to claim 2, wherein the axisof said first and second holes extends parallel to the longitudinal axisof said vehicle.5. The improved amphibious vehicle according to claim 1, wherein said thirddrive means comprises cable means connected to said upper support meansand includes drum means mounted on said vehicle connected to said cablemeans for winding and unwinding said cable means thereonto to effect amovement of said upper support means about said substantially horizontalaxis.6. The improved amphibious vehicle according to claim 5, wherein said drummeans is manually driven to wind and unwind said cable means therefrom andincludes a rachet and pawl mechanism.7. The improved amphibious vehicle according to claim 1, wherein saidvehicle is a tracked vehicle.8. The improved amphibious vehicle according to claim 1, wherein said firstmotor means is a fluid driven motor.9. The improved amphibious vehicle according to claim 1, wherein saidsecond motor means is a fluid driven motor.10. The improved amphibious vehicle according to claim 1, including firstlocking means for locking said upper support means to said vehicle so thatsaid steering axis is in said vertical alignment and second locking meansfor locking said upper means so that said steering axis is in said raisedposition.11. The improved amphibious vehicle according to claim 10, wherein saidfirst locking means includes a movable latch pivotally secured to saidvehicle and a catch mounted on said upper support means releasablyengaging said latch.12. The improved amphibious vehicle according to claim 10, wherein saidfirst locking means includes a further movable latch pivotally secured tosaid vehicle and a further catch mounted on said upper support meansreleasably engaging said latch."}
{"WKU":"039304590","Title":"Indicator instrument assemblies","App_Date":"1973-10-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John Harry Howard Barrow","Assignee":"General Motors Corporation","ICL_Class":"G01P  108","References":"2496488;3022130;3446178;3513805","Claims":"I claim:1. A combined speedometer and tachograph instrument assembly for indicatinga plurality of conditions, comprising: a generally cup-shaped housing witha light opening at one end formed by a surrounding rim portion of thehousing; a translucent plate supported by said housing at a peripheraledge portion and in a plane substantially normal to the line of sightthrough said opening by an external observer; a first set of indicia forat least one condition, including speed, to be indicated; means includingsaid translucent plate supporting said first set of indicia in a planeparallel to said translucent plate and to one side of said translucentplate nearest said housing rim portion; another plate supported at itsperipheral edge by said housing in a plane substantially parallel to theplane of said translucent plate and located to the side of saidtranslucent plate furthest from said housing rim; a second set of indiciafor indicating a condition, such as maximum speed supported by said otherplate; said light opening in the housing providing a substantiallyunobstructed view from an external position of said first set of indiciaby the illumination thereof by natural light striking said first indicia;a first light source located in said housing between said housing rim andsaid translucent plate characterized by the emission of light toward saidone side of said translucent plate at an acute angle with respect to theplane of said translucent plate; a second light source located in saidhousing at a location permitting light to strike said second set ofindicia and also said other side of said translucent plate; a speedometerspindle extending through an opening in said translucent plate androtatable therein; speed-indicating means attached to said speedometerspindle for movement generally parallel to the plane of said translucentplate and with respect to said first indicia to indicate speed; atachograph indicator member located on the other side of said translucentplate and movable relative to said second set of indicia to indicate theother of said conditions; a speedometer and tachograph drive cableextending through said housing and adapted to be connected to a drivemechanism of a motor vehicle, the speed and other conditions of which areto be indicated, by movement of said speedometer spindle and needle andsaid tachograph indicator member in response to changes in said condition,whereby the light from said first light source and natural illuminationpassing through the light opening permits viewing of the speedometerindicia by the reflection of said light from said first set of indicia andthe light from said second light source permits viewing of said tachographindicator indicia by the transmission of light through said translucentplate in a direction extending from said other side to said one side.2. A combined speedometer and tachograph instrument assembly according toclaim 1, in which said translucent plate is of tinted transparent sheetmaterial.3. A combined speedometer and tachograph instrument assembly according toclaim 1, in which said translucent plate is of transparent sheet materialand on which is deposited a film vapor coating of metal so that said plateis substantially reflective of light incident thereof from said one sidefrom which the plate is viewed from an external direction but appears tobe substantially transparent to an external viewer when the plate isilluminated from said other side.4. A combined speedometer and tachograph instrument assembly according toclaim 1, in which said second set of indicia are arranged on a tachographrecord card supported on said other plate which extends across saidhousing to the other side of said translucent plate and through which saidspeedometer spindle and tachograph indicator members extend; saidtachograph indicator member including at least one stylus for recording onsaid tachograph record card a condition indicated."}
{"WKU":"039304604","Title":"Water ski tow rope","App_Date":"1974-10-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Thomas J. Beck","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B63B 2156","References":"3196825;3537418;3582457;3695210;3714316","Claims":"The principles of this invention having now been fully explained inconnection with the foregoing description, I hereby claim as my invention:1. In a water ski tow rope having a handle that is gripped by the skier andat least one tow line attached to the handle and extending therefrom forsecurement to the boat which is towing the skier, said tow line beingformed of a braided material that is one continuous braided tubular wallhaving a central hollow core and one end of the tow line is passed intothe hollow core of the braided two line to form a loop on the end of thetow line for attachment to said handle; an elastic sleeve gripping saidline directly adjacent to said handle and extending therefrom a distancealong said rope to protect the skiers hands from chafing and meansoverlapping said sleeve and said line to secure said elastic sleeve tosaid line against displacement by water pressures developed during skiing.2. A water ski tow rope according to claim 1 wherein said securing means isa length of heat shrinkable tubing that is shrunk onto said elastic sleeveand the rope in overlapping relationship.3. A water ski tow rope according to claim 2 including a heat sensitiveadhesive coated on the interior surface of said heat shrinkable tubing sothat it is activated by the heat that is applied to said tubing to shrinkit to thereby create a strong bond between said heat shrinkable tubing andthe elastic sleeve and rope with which it is in contact.4. A water ski rope according to claim 1 wherein said securing means is aplastic tubing that encompasses the end of said elastic sleeve and aportion of the tow line adjacent to it so that said plastic tubingoverlaps said elastic sleeve and a portion of the tow line; and includingan adhesive between said plastic tubing and the elastic sleeve and the towline with which it is in contact to form a tight bond therebetween.5. A water ski tow rope according to claim 1 wherein said tow line passesthrough a transverse hole in the handle and then about the periphery ofthe handle with an extending end of the tow line passing back through thetransverse hole in the handle and through the hollow core of the braidedtow line so that the braided wall of the tow line encompasses theextending end of the same tow line whereby as increasing longitudinaltension is applied to the tow line the braided wall of the tow linecontracts diametrically to increasingly tighten about the extending end ofthe line within said braided wall to prevent the escape of the extendingend; said elastic sleeve gripping said braided tow line directly adjacentto the handle to prevent excess relaxation of the braided tow line andthereby prevent inadvertent displacement of said extending end from theinterior of the braided tow line, said elastic sleeve also protecting thehands of the skier from chafing due to contact with the tow line.6. A water ski tow rope according to claim 5 wherein said securing means isa length of heat shrinkable tubing that is shrunk onto said elastic sleeveand onto the rope in overlapping relationship.7. A water ski tow rope according to claim 6 including a heat sensitiveadhesive coated on the interior surface of said heat shrinkable tubing sothat it is activated by the heat that is applied to said tubing to shrinkit and thereby creates a strong bond between said heat shrinkable tubingand the elastic sleeve and rope with which it is in contact.8. A water ski rope according to claim 5 wherein said securing means is aplastic tubing that encompasses the end of said elastic sleeve and aportion of the line extending from said sleeve so that said plastic tubingoverlaps said elastic sleeve and a portion of the tow line; and includingan adhesive between said plastic tubing and the elastic sleeve and the towline with which it is in contact to form a tight bond therebetween."}
{"WKU":"039304612","Title":"Apparatus for pivotally mounting an outboard fishing motor","App_Date":"1975-03-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John O. Brock;Marmion Dean Davis;James Robert Wray","Assignee":"Interstate Industries, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B63H 2126","References":"3750617;3865335;3874318","Claims":"That which is claimed is:1. An apparatus for pivotally mounting an outboard motor, such as ashaft-mounted submersible electric motor, on a fishing boat or the likeand such that the motor may be selectively pivoted between a verticallydisposed operative position in the water and a horizontally disposedraised position removed from the water, said apparatus comprising,a mounting frame adapted to be fixedly attached to a boat so as to extendin a generally horizontal direction,a bracket having one end thereof pivotally connected to said frame forrotation about a pivotal horizontal axis, and a remote free end, saidbracket being pivotable between a forward position wherein said brackethorizontally overlies said outer end of said frame and a retractedposition, and said bracket being of a length such that said remote freeend extends beyond said outer end of said frame when said bracket ispositioned in said forward position,means carried at said remote free end of said bracket for attaching theshaft of an outboard motor thereto,an arcuately curved guide member fixedly carried by said frame immediatelyadjacent said bracket and defining a segment of a circle having its centerlocated along said pivotal horizontal axis, said segment having an arcuatelength which at least corresponds to the arc defined by the pivotalmovement of said bracket between said forward and retracted positions,a follower fixedly carried by said bracket intermediate the ends thereofand being positioned to contact said guide member during the pivotalmovement of said bracket, andpower means for selectively translating said follower in either directionalong said guide member to thereby pivot said bracket between said forwardposition and said retracted position.2. The apparatus as defined in claim 1 wherein said power means comprisesa reversible electric motor,a cable operatively connected to said electric motor,means for guiding said cable for movement along said curved guide member,andmeans for interconnecting said cable and follower, whereby the force actingupon said follower extends in a direction perpendicular to said bracketthrough full movement of said bracket between said forward and retractedpositions to thereby minimize the power requirement of said electricmotor.3. The apparatus as defined in claim 2 wherein said retracted position ofsaid bracket is disposed about 180.degree. from said forward position, andwherein said guide member is curved through an arc of about 180 degrees.4. The apparatus as defined in claim 3 wherein said shaft attaching meanscomprises a releasable clamp, and said apparatus further comprises meansfor automatically pivoting said shaft attaching means through about90.degree. during movement of said bracket between said forward andretracted positions.5. An apparatus for pivotally mounting an outboard motor, such as ashaft-mounted submersible electric motor, on a fishing boat or the likeand such that the motor may be selectively and remotely pivoted between avertically disposed operative position in the water and a horizontallydisposed raised position removed from the water, said apparatuscomprising,a mounting frame adapted to be fixedly attached to a boat so as to extendin a generally horizontal direction, and defining an inner end and anouter end,a bracket having one end thereof pivotally connected to said frame forrotation about a pivotal horizontal axis positioned at a pointintermediate the ends of said frame, and a remote free end, said bracketbeing pivotable between a forward position wherein said brackethorizontally overlies said outer end of said frame and a retractedposition disposed about 180.degree. from said forward position and whereinsaid bracket overlies said inner end of said frame, and said bracket beingof a length such that said remote free end extends beyond said outer endof said frame when said bracket is positioned in said forward position,means carried at said remote free end of said bracket for attaching theshaft of an outboard motor thereto,an arcuately curved guide member fixedly carried by said frame immediatelyadjacent said bracket and defining a semi-circle having its center locatedalong said horizontal bracket pivot,a follower fixedly carried by said bracket intermediate the ends thereofand being positioned to contact said guide member during the pivotalmovement of said bracket,power means for selectively and positively pivoting said bracket in eitherdirection between said forward and retracted positions, and including"}
{"WKU":"039304620","Title":"Slurry dip tank","App_Date":"1975-05-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Edward G. Day","Assignee":"United Technologies Corporation","ICL_Class":"B05C  304","References":"1861142;1988955;2127413;2222630;2819188;3196038;3671298;3892197","Claims":"Having thus described a typical embodiment of my invention, that which Iclaim as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the United Statesis:1. A tank assembly for maintaining a slurry used in the formation of ashell mold over a pattern comprising:a tank;a removable, resilient liner which conforms to the general internal contourof the tank and fits into the tank;pump means which extend into the tank for circulating slurry contained bythe liner; andsaid liner including a wing type airfoil member extending across the liner,at an intermediate vertical position thereof and spaced from the bottom,whereby to enhance said circulation.2. The invention according to claim 1 wherein the tank is in the shape of atrough comprising a first and a second flat vertical side and a curvedmember which extends between the sides along its entire length from thefront to the back of the trough.3. The invention according to claim 2 including further a cover which fitsacross the top of the trough.4. The invention according to claim 2 wherein the side profile of thecurved member is an arc of constant radius.5. The invention according to claim 1 including further means for coolingthe trough.6. The invention according to claim 5 including further means for injectingwater into the slurry.7. The invention according to claim 6 including further means for sensingthe temperature of slurry in the trough and providing a slurry temperaturesignal.8. The invention according to claim 6 including further means for sensingthe density of the slurry in the trough and providing a slurry densitysignal.9. The invention according to claim 6 including further means for sensingthe viscosity of the slurry in the trough and providing a slurry viscositysignal.10. The invention according to claim 6 including further means for sensingthe level of the slurry in the trough and providing a slurry level signal.11. The invention according to claim 1 including further a data responseand control unit adapted to receive at least one signal from temperature,density, viscosity and level sensing means associated with said tank andslurry, to compare said at least one signal with a preselected range ofvalues and, responsive to a signal of said comparater, to actuate acontrol means for maintaining said slurry control signals."}
{"WKU":"039304639","Title":"Vapor deposition apparatus including a three-compartment evaporator","App_Date":"1973-07-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert Lewis Bickerdike;Garyth Hughes;William Norman Mair","Assignee":"The Secretary of State for Defense in Her Britannic Majesty s Government","ICL_Class":"C23C 1312","References":"1552555;2127087;2664852;2665226;2665227;3364296;3467058;3640762","Claims":"What I claim is:1. An apparatus for evaporating metal and depositing the evaporated metalon a surface which comprises a housing enclosing a container for moltenmetal and a space above the container, means for evacuating the saidspace, said container being divided into three compartments which arelaterally associated in series, a first said compartment associated withheating means for melting metal and a second said compartment for mixingmolten metal and a third said compartment associated with means forheating metal to evaporate it, a constricted opening in the common wallbetween said first and second compartments for flow of molten metal fromthe first compartment to the second compartment which is adapted tominimize back flow from the second to the first compartment, and anopening limited to the base of the common wall between said second andthird compartments whereby flow of metal from the second compartment tothe third compartment occurs only under the surface of molten metal in thethird compartment, and a substrate means for condensing evaporated metaldisposed above the third compartment in said space.2. A heated source as claimed in claim 1 wherein the heating means iselectron beam heating.3. A heated source as claimed in claim 1 wherein a plurality of evaporationcompartments is served by single melting and mixing compartments.4. A heated source as claimed in claim 1 wherein a single evaporationcompartment is served by a plurality of melting and mixing compartments.5. A heated source as claimed in claim 1 wherein the compartments of theheated source are composed of ceramic resistant to the molten metal andthe whole source means is enclosed in a cooling jacket."}
{"WKU":"039304647","Title":"Apparatus for applying a coating composition onto a web","App_Date":"1974-02-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hans Ivar Wallsten","Assignee":"AB Inventing","ICL_Class":"B05C  502;B05C 1104","References":"836336;1309858;1676363;1826697;2338195;2914419;3405006;3448666;3575134;3675621","Claims":"I claim:1. Apparatus for applying a coating composition to a paper web comprising:means for guiding the web to move in an upward direction through thecoating apparatus which includes:a first pair of rigid, elongated, upwardly converging opposed memberspositioned on opposite sides of the upwardly moving web, and each havingstationary contact surfaces;means connected to said first pair of members for adjusting the coatingcontact surfaces of each of said first pair of members in adjustablyspaced fashion, said first members converging upwardly and inwardly fromsaid adjusting means towards said web whereby their contact surfaces formpredetermined gaps each being defined by the surfaces of said web and theadjacent contact surfaces of said members, said gaps, once adjusted, beingmaintained in substantially constant alignment throughout a coatingoperation;coating dispensing means positioned adjacent to said gaps and being spacedfrom the web for continuously directing a quantity of the coatingcomposition in liquid form toward the surfaces of said web as the webmoves upwardly and before the web leaves the gap region between thecontact surfaces of said first members;the width of said gaps being selected to uniformly spread an excess amountof the coating composition upon the surface of the web, said memberscooperating with the coating composition, as the web passes between saidmembers, to substantially reduce lateral movement of and thereby stabilizethe web during the smoothing operation; andupwardly converging flexible means positioned adjacent and above saidopposed members and forming a nip engaging the opposite surfaces of theweb for removing the excess coating composition from said web anduniformly regulating the final thickness of the coating.2. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said flexible means comprises a pair ofupwardly converging flexible members having their adjacent edges arrangedto form a nip through which said web passes;means for urging said flexible members toward one another to control theamount of excess coating composition to be removed from said web by thesecondary smoothing means.3. The apparatus of claim 2 wherein the spacing between said gaps and saidnip are adjusted to control the amount of coating composition whichimpregnates the web.4. The apparatus of claim 2 wherein said flexible members are flexibleblades arranged in upwardly converging alignment by pivotally mountedholders and having substantially straight free edges opposing one anotherto form said nip.5. The apparatus of claim 4 further comprising means for moving thepivotally mounted holders in unison to effect simultaneous adjustment ofthe positioning of said free edges.6. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said coating dispensing means comprisesmeans for spraying the coating composition upon said web as the web ispassing said members.7. The apparatus of claim 6 wherein said spraying means is positionedbetween said pair of members and immediately below said gaps.8. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said primary members are rigid and thegaps formed between the members and the web are adjusted to provide anexcess of the coating composition uniformly distributed over the web so asto provide a rinsing effect upon the flexible means whereby the coatingcomposition is carried upwardly with the web and excess coating removed insaid nip is moved downwardly along the surface of the flexible means whichengages the side of the web being coated to rinse and hence cleanse theflexible means of any solid matter contained in the coating composition.9. The apparatus of claim 8 further comprising collection means positionedbeneath said members and said flexible means for collecting excess coatingcomposition removed from said web;said flexible means including means for directing the excess coatingcomposition removed by said flexible means toward said collection means.10. The apparatus of claim 9 further comprising means for supplying freshcoating composition to said coating dispensing means;means for directing excess coating composition collected by said collectionmeans into said supply means.11. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said coating dispensing meanscomprises first and second coating depositing means positioned on oppositesides of said web for directing different coating compositions on opposingsides of said web.12. The apparatus of claim 11 wherein said first and second coatingdepositing means each comprises means for preventing the coatingcomposition from being deposited along the marginal edges of the web.13. The apparatus of claim 1 further comprising means for pivotallymounting said first pair of members;means for moving said first pair of members in unison about their pivots toadjust said gaps.14. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein at least one of said rigid members isprovided with an internal supply means coupled to said coating dispensingmeans, said coating dispensing means including a slot positioned adjacentto one of said gaps for directing coating composition upon said web as itenters said one gap.15. Apparatus for applying a coating composition to a paper web comprising:means for guiding the web to move in an upward direction through thecoating apparatus which includes:a first pair of rigid elongated upwardly converging opposed memberspositioned on opposite sides of the upwardly moving web and each having astationary contact surface;means for adjusting the coating contact surfaces of said first pair ofmembers, which extend upwardly and inwardly from said adjusting means, inadjustably spaced fashion to form predetermined gaps each being defined bythe surfaces of said web and the adjacent contact surfaces of saidmembers, said gaps, once adjusted, being maintained in substantiallyconstant alignment throughout a coating operation;coating dispensing means for continuously directing a controlled quantityof the coating composition in liquid form toward the surfaces of said webas the web enters the gap region between said members and before the webleaves the region between the contact surfaces;the width of each gap being selected to uniformly spread an excess amountof the coating composition upon the surfaces of the web to create adynamic liquid pressure of the coating composition in order tosubstantially reduce lateral movement of the web and thereby stabilize theweb to prevent fluttering during the coating operation; andsecondary coating means comprising a pair of upwardly converging thinflexible members having their adjacent edges arranged to form a nipthrough which said web passes for removing the excess coating compositionfrom said web and thereby uniformly regulating the final thickness of thecoating."}
{"WKU":"039304655","Title":"Apparatus for applying a film of liquid to a web of material","App_Date":"1975-01-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Manfred Schuierer","Assignee":"Bruckner Apparatebau GmbH","ICL_Class":"B05C  500","References":"2060897;2673763;2933061;3345972;3605689;3694142;3717121","Claims":"I claim:1. Apparatus for applying a thin liquid film to a continuously moving webof large width, comprising a liquid supply chamber in the form of aslightly inclined shallow container which is adapted to be fed with aliquid at its higher end and is defined at its lower end by a damming wallover which the liquid is discharged, a plurality of barrier means forcalming the liquid, disposed in the shallow container in the path ofliquid flowing from the higher end to the lower end, and a flexible foilof thin, resilient metal which is adjustably clamped along one edge andhas its opposite edge arranged to receive liquid flowing over said dammingwall and to discharge a film of the liquid onto the moving web.2. Apparatus according to claim 1, wherein a plurality of perforatedbarriers in series are provided extending across the container, and thesize of the perforations in the barriers decreases in the direction offlow of the liquid.3. Apparatus according to claim 1 comprising at least one barrier whichdips into the liquid and is spaced from the bottom of the container.4. Apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the shallow container ispreceded by a liquid entrance chamber which is defined on the side towardsuch container by an overflow weir having a plurality of triangularcut-outs over the width of its overflow edge.5. Apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the shallow container is mountedon a solid support beam by means of screws for leveling the container.6. Apparatus according to claim 5, wherein the shallow container issuspended from the support beam.7. Apparatus according to claim 6, wherein at least one member forsuspending the shallow container from the support beam is secured to thebottom of the container, and at least one barrier for calming the liquidextends across the container between such member and the damming wallwhich defines the container at its lower end.8. Apparatus according to claim 4, wherein the entrance chamber has aliquid inlet and contains a partition that shields the overflow weir fromthe region surrounding such inlet.9. Apparatus according to claim 4, wherein the entrance chamber is providedwith an opening for removing liquid foam."}
{"WKU":"039304663","Title":"Segmented gate developer flow controller","App_Date":"1974-04-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Raymond W. Stover","Assignee":"Xerox Corporation","ICL_Class":"G03G 1508","References":"3648656;3712266;3717122;3724422;3753420","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a development system: a surface capable of having a developable imagethereon; a developer sump; said sump having ferromagnetic developertherein; magnetic means for presenting said developer to said surface; adeveloper outlet at the lowermost portion of said sump; said developerflowing through said outlet to said means for presenting said developer tosaid surface; magnetic gate means comprising at least two gates, eachhaving a permanent magnet; means for selectively moving each said magneticgate independently of each other into a closed position adjacent saidoutlet to block the flow of developer through a portion of said outletcorresponding to the gate thereadjacent and for selectively moving eachsaid magnetic gate independently of each other away from said outlet to anopen position to allow flow of developer through said portion of saidoutlet corresponding to a respective said gate.2. The structure as recited in claim 1 further comprising means mountingeach of said magnetic gates for pivotal movement between said open andclosed positions.3. The structure as recited in claim 2 wherein said surface is aphotoconductive surface and said developer comprises toner particles andferromagnetic carrier particles.4. The structure as recited in claim 3 wherein said magnetic means forpresenting developer comprises rotatable rollers of non-magnetic material,each surrounding a magnetic member.5. The structure as recited in claim 1 wherein remote control means areoperatively connected to said means for selectively moving each saidmagnetic gate independently of each other."}
{"WKU":"039304671","Title":"Poultry Coop","App_Date":"1974-03-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Edward J. Fier, Jr.","Assignee":"Norwesco, Inc.","ICL_Class":"A01K 3118","References":"3330434;3407961;3687330;3696966;3754676","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A stackable poultry coop which comprises:complimentary upper and lower sections having an upper and lower wall,respectively, and marginal side walls extending generally at right anglesfrom the periphery of each of said upper and lower walls and terminatingat means for attaching their termini to each other, said upper wall havinga central opening;a plurality of reinforcing flanges extending upwardly from said upper wall,each of said flanges being spaced from the others of said flanges andforming a closed figure with itself or the edges of said upper wall withsaid flange formed closed figures generally surrounding said centralopening thereby distributing the force imposed on said upper wall duringstacking, said flange formed closed figures having open centers andlattice means within said open centers for preventing poultry egress whileproviding ventilation and cleaning access with at least some of theflanges, including some of the flanges forming closed figures with theedge of said upper wall, having reduced height portions adjacent saidedge;a plurality of rib means extending downwardly from said lower wall, each ofsaid rib means being spaced from the others of said rib means and forminga closed figure with itself or the edges of said lower wall for nestingengagement with a flange formed closed figure of said upper wall when instacking relation thereto, said lower wall being formed of a flexiblematerial of generally uniform cross-section having a plurality of gridforming apertures and said rib means closed figures being positionedaround the periphery of said lower wall to allow at least its centralportion to flex;said upper and lower section marginal walls being formed by a plurality ofspaced pillars, said upper and lower walls being generally polygonal withone of said pillars being positioned generally at each corner of saidupper and lower walls and the interstices between said corner pillars andthe immediately adjacent pillars being closed;means for providing positive closure of said upper wall central openingincluding door means hingedly connected to said upper wall by boss meansmolded into said upper wall; andmeans overlying said reduced height flange portions and said edge forprotecting said edge during securement of said poultry coop.2. The poultry coop of claim 1 wherein said flange formed closed figuresgenerally surround said central opening thereby distributing the forceimposed on said upper wall during stacking.3. The poultry coop of claim 1 wherein the closed figures on the lower wallare spaced sufficiently from each other for engaging a supportingstructure within said spaces and preventing horizontal movement betweenthe supporting structure and the poultry coop."}
{"WKU":"039304680","Title":"Exhaust gas cleaning means for a rotary piston type engine","App_Date":"1973-08-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Yoshio Uchiyama","Assignee":"Toyo Kogyo Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"F02B 5300","References":"3426525;3519373;3795228","Claims":"I claim:1. In a rotary piston type internal combustion engine including a casingwhich comprises a rotor housing having a trochoidal inner peripheral walland a pair of side housings secured to the opposite sides of the rotorhousing, said rotor housing being provided with exhaust port means, apolygonal rotor disposed in the rotor housing with apices sealinglycontacting with the inner peripheral wall of the rotor housing so as todefine working chambers which are variable in volume as the rotor rotatesto effect intake, compression, combustion, expansion and exhaust strokesof the engine, and exhaust gas cleaning means for introducing secondaryair into the working chamber which is in the exhaust stroke, characterizedby the fact that said exhaust gas cleaning means comprises: a cutoutportion provided on the trochoidal inner peripheral wall of the rotorhousing extending from said exhaust port means in the directionsubstantially opposite to the direction of rotation of said rotor anddirectly communicating the exhaust port means with the working chamberduring the final part of the expansion stroke when the apex seal at theleading edge of the working chamber during the final stage of theexpansion stroke intersects said cutout portion and before said apex sealis aligned with the leading edge of said exhaust port means to expose saidexhaust port to said working chamber, and a secondary air supply passagefor introducing secondary air into said working chamber having a secondaryair discharge port defined by the intersection of said supply passage andsaid cutout portion so that a portion of the gas in the working chamberwhich is in the final stage of the expansion stroke can flow directly intosaid exhaust port means through said cutout portion and past saidsecondary air discharge port from said working chamber to prevent anymaterial from adhering to said discharge port and to create a suctionpressure at that port for facilitating the supply of secondary air to saidworking chamber in the vicinity of said exhaust port.2. A rotary piston engine in accordance with claim 1 in which said cutoutportion is provided with a single secondary air port.3. A rotary piston engine in accordance with claim 1 in which said cutoutportion is provided with a plurality of secondary air ports.4. A rotary piston engine in accordance with claim 1 in which said exhaustgas cleaning means includes a plurality of cutout portions each of whichhas a secondary air port."}
{"WKU":"039304698","Title":"Carbureted prechamber rotary combustion engine","App_Date":"1974-06-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Rodney J. Tabaczynski","Assignee":"General Motors Corporation","ICL_Class":"F02B 5304","References":"3785352","Claims":"I claim:1. A rotary combustion engine comprising a main chamber section and aprechamber section, each said section having a rotatably supported rotorwith a plurality of chambers thereabout that expand and contract whilemoving with said rotor as said rotor rotates, each said section alsohaving an intake port that opens to the chambers in this section as theyexpand during an intake phase, each said section also having an exhaustport that opens to the chambers in this section as they contract during anexhaust phase, the chambers in said prechamber section being substantiallysmaller than the chambers in said main chamber section, means drivinglyconnecting said rotors so that the chambers in said sections are phased inpairs that simultaneously expand and contract, a gas transfer port thatconnects the phased pairs of the chambers in said sections only as theycontract and then expand in a compression phase and a power phaserespectively, lean air-fuel supply means for supplying a lean air-fuelmixture to the intake port of said main chamber section, rich air-fuelsupply means for supplying a rich air-fuel mixture to the intake port ofsaid prechamber section, and spark ignition means in said prechambersection for first igniting the rich air-fuel mixture in the chambers insaid prechamber section whereby ignition originates in the chambers insaid prechamber section and there is effected a pressure differentialcausing hot combustion gases in the chambers in said prechamber section toflow through said gas transfer port and ignite the lean air-fuel mixturein the associated chambers in said main chamber section.2. A rotary combustion engine comprising a main chamber section and aprechamber section, each said section having a multi-lobe internalperipheral wall and a rotatably supported multi-lobe rotor with aplurality of chambers thereabout that expand and contract while movingwith said rotor as said rotor rotates, each said section also having anintake port that opens to the chambers in this section as they expandduring an intake phase, each said section also having an exhaust port thatopens to the chambers in this section as they contract during an exhaustphase, the chambers in said prechamber section being substantially smallerin volume than the chambers in said main chamber section, means drivinglyconnecting said rotors so that the chambers in said sections are phased inpairs that simultaneously expand and contract, a gas transfer port thatconnects the phased pairs of the chambers in said sections only as theycontract and then expand in a compression phase and a power phaserespectively, lean air-fuel supply means for supplying a lean air-fuelmixture to the intake port of said main chamber section, rich air-fuelsupply means for supplying a rich air-fuel mixture to the intake port ofsaid prechamber section, and spark ignition means in said prechambersection for first igniting the rich air-fuel mixture in the chambers insaid prechamber section whereby ignition originates in the chambers insaid prechamber section and there is effected a pressure differentialcausing hot combustion gases in the chambers in said prechamber section toflow through said combustion gas transfer port and ignite the leanair-fuel mixture in the associated chambers in said main chamber section.3. A rotary combustion engine comprising a main chamber section and aprechamber section, each said section having a two-lobe internalperipheral wall, each said section also having a rotatably supportedcrankshaft with an eccentric, each said section also having a rotorrotatably mounted on said eccentric and cooperating with the associatedperipheral wall to provide three chambers about the rotor that expand andcontract while moving with said rotor as said rotor rotates, each saidsection also having a stationary phasing gear meshing with a rotaryphasing gear on the rotor in this section so that the rotor rotates atone-third the speed of the crankshaft in this section and in fixedrelationship to the peripheral wall in this section, each said sectionalso having an intake port that opens to the chambers in this section asthey expand during an intake phase, each said section also having anexhaust port that opens to the chambers in this section as they contractduring an exhaust phase, the chambers in said prechamber section beingsubstantially smaller in volume than the chambers in said main chambersection, means drivingly connecting with crankshafts with a one-to-onespeed ratio so that the chambers in said sections are phased in pairs thatsimultaneously expand and contract, a gas transfer port that connects thephased pairs of the chambers in said sections only as they contract andthen expand in a compression phase and a power phase respectively, leanair-fuel supply means for supplying a lean air-fuel mixture to the intakeport of said main chamber section, rich air-fuel supply means forsupplying a rich air-fuel mixture to the intake port of said prechambersection, and spark ignition means in said prechamber section for firstigniting the rich air-fuel mixture in the chambers in said prechambersection whereby ignition originates in the chambers in said prechambersection and there is effected a pressure differential causing hotcombustion gases in the chambers in said prechamber section to flowthrough said gas transfer port and ignite the lean air-fuel mixture in theassociated chambers in said main chamber section."}
{"WKU":"039304701","Title":"Vapor injection system for internal combustion engine","App_Date":"1974-01-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Beverly Douglas","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F02D 1900","References":"1304019;1316953;1330574;1964892;3019777;3655169;3834360","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A vapor injection system in combination with an internal combustionengine having a carburetor and an air inlet to the carburetor having aflow axis toward the carburetor, comprising:a. a mist chamber having an enclosure wall,b. at least a portion of said wall comprising a perforated section having aplurality of apertures small enough to permit the passage only of watermist particles of a predetermined size,c. means mounting said perforated section in fluid communication with theair inlet to said carburetor,d. a water tube having a first discharge end projecting through saidenclosure wall so that said first discharge end is within said mistchamber,e. an air tube having a second discharge end projecting through saidenclosure wall so that said second discharge end is within said mistchamber,f. said second discharge end being proximate to said first discharge endand positioned to force a stream of air to intercept at an acute angle astream of water discharged from said first discharge end in the samegeneral direction as said air stream,g. means for supplying water under pressure through said water tube,h. means for supplying compressed air through said air tube with sufficientpressure to atomize the intercepted stream of water from said firstdischarge end and to force said atomized water particles in a path at asubstantial angle to the flow axis of said carburetor air inlet,i. a baffle member,j. means mounting said baffle member within said mist chamber opposing saidfirst discharge end at an angle to, and in, the path of said atomizedwater particles to further atomize said water particles and to deflectsaid water particles at an angle to said path, through said perforatedsection and into said carburetor air inlet.2. The invention according to claim 1 in which the surface of said bafflemember opposing said first discharge end is rough.3. The invention according to claim 1 in which the portion of the enclosurewall of said mist chamber opposite said perforated section is solid.4. The invention according to claim 3 in which said solid enclosure wallportion is concave toward said carburetor air inlet for deflectingadditional water particles through said perforated section into said airinlet.5. The invention according to claim 1 in which said mist chamber is mountedabove said air inlet, said perforated section forming the bottom of saidmist chamber, and said barrier member is mounted above said perforatedsection for deflecting atomized water particles down through saidperforated section."}
{"WKU":"039304710","Title":"Internal combustion engine","App_Date":"1974-01-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Henry J. Leonard;Boris J. Mitchell;Charles H. Turner","Assignee":"General Motors Corporation","ICL_Class":"F02B 1910;F02B 1916","References":"1438937;1568638;1647849;2930367;3092088;3213839;3853097","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An internal combustion engine of the type having a cylinder block with abank of cylinders spaced longitudinally of the engine, a cylinder headmounted on said block and closing the ends of said cylinders, pistonsreciprocably disposed in said cylinders and connected with a rotatablecrank, the cylinders, pistons and head together defining enclosedexpansible working and combustion chambers, a plurality of intake ports insaid cylinder head connecting with each of said combustion chambers andwith an intake manifold mounted on one side of said head, a plurality ofexhaust ports in said cylinder head connecting with each of saidcombustion chambers and with an exhaust manifold mounted on a side of saidcylinder head opposite from said one side, spark plug receiving meansopening to said combustion chambers through said opposite side adjacentsaid exhaust manifold, spark plugs in said plug receiving openings andhaving inwardly protruding electrodes, wall means in said combustionchambers and defining small ignition chambers on one side of andconnecting with each combustion chamber, said wall means enclosing thespark plug electrodes of their respective combustion chambers, main intakepassages extending through said intake manifold and cylinder head intakeports to said combustion chambers, exhaust passages extending from saidcombustion chambers through said exhaust ports and said exhaust manifold,auxiliary intake passages joined to and extending along said intakemanifold, through said cylinder head, along said exhaust manifold and backinto said cylinder head to said ignition chambers, said auxiliary intakepassages extending in heat exchange relation with one of said cylinderhead exhaust ports and exhaust passages in said exhaust manifold,carburetor means on said intake manifold and having separate individuallythrottled throats connecting with said main and auxiliary intake passages,respectively, and engine driven valve mechanism including a main intakevalve, an auxiliary intake valve and an exhaust valve for each combustionchamber, said valves respectively controlling the admission of air-fuelmixtures to the combustion and ignition chambers from the main andauxiliary intake passages and the exhaust of burned gases from thecombustion chamber through the exhaust passages.2. An internal combustion engine of the type having a cylinder block with abank of cylinders spaced longitudinally of the engine, a cylinder headmounted on said block and closing the ends of said cylinders, pistonsreciprocably disposed in said cylinders and connected with a rotatablecrank, the cylinders, pistons and head together defining enclosedexpansible working and combustion chambers, a plurality of intake ports insaid cylinder head connecting with each of said combustion chambers andwith an intake manifold mounted on one side of said head, a plurality ofexhaust ports in said cylinder head connecting with each of saidcombustion chambers and with an exhaust manifold mounted on a side of saidcylinder head opposite from said one side, spark plug receiving meansopening to said combustion chambers through said opposite side adjacentsaid exhaust manifold, spark plugs in said plug receiving openings andhaving inwardly protruding electrodes, wall means in said combustionchambers and defining small ignition chambes on one side of and connectingwith each combustion chamber, said wall means enclosing the spark plugelectrodes of their respective combustion chambers, main intake passagesextending through said intake manifold and cylinder head intake ports tosaid combustion chambers, exhaust passages extending from said combustionchambers through said exhaust ports and said exhaust manifold, auxiliaryintake passages joined to and extending along said intake manifold,through said cylinder head, along said exhaust manifold and back into saidcylinder head to said ignition chambers, said auxiliary intake passagesextending in heat exchange relation with one of said cylinder head exhaustports and exhaust passages in said exhaust manifolds, an exhaust heatpassage extending from one of said cylinder head exhaust ports into saidintake manifold an in heat exchange relation with portions of said mainintake passages in said intake manifold, said auxiliary intake passagesalso being in heat exchange relation with said exhaust heat passage insaid cylinder head and intake manifold, carburetor means on said intakemanifold and having separate individually throttled throats connectingwith said main and auxiliary intake passages, respectively, and enginedriven valve mechanism including a main intake valve, an auxiliary intakevalve and an exhaust valve for each combustion chamber, said valvesrespectively controlling the admission of air-fuel mixtures to thecombustion and ignition chambers from the main and auxiliary intakepassages and the exhaust of burned gases from the combustion chamerthrough the exhaust passages.3. The engine of claim 2 wherein said ignition chamber defining wall meanscomprise thin-walled metal cups received in said spark plug openings andretained therein by flanged portions thereof engaged by said spark plugs,said cups having openings to connect said ignition chambers with saidcombustion chambers and said auxiliary intake passages.4. The engine of claim 2 wherein said valve mechanism further comprisesmeans mechanically engaging the end of each said main intake valve toactuate it in an opening direction, a spring seat member retained adjacenteach said main intake valve end, a valve spring between each said seatmember and said cylinder head and urging its respective main intake valvein a closing direction, auxiliary actuating means carried on each saidspring seat member and operatively engaging the end of the auxiliaryintake valve for its respective cylinder to move said auxiliary valve inan opening direction upon opening movement of said main intake valve, saidauxiliary actuating means including means straddling the upper end of saidauxiliary intake valve to maintain its auxiliary actuating means inalignment with said auxiliary valve upper end, and a valve spring actingbetween each said auxiliary intake valve and said head and urging itsrespective valve in a closing direction.5. An internal combustion engine of the type having a cylinder blockincluding two banks of longitudinally spaced cylinders, a cylinder headmounted on each of said banks and closing the ends of the cylinderstherein, said heads having inwardly and outwardly facing side walls,pistons reciprocably disposed in said cylinders and connected with arotatable crank, the cylinders, pistons and heads together definingenclosed expansible working and combustion chambers, a plurality of intakeports in said cylinder heads connecting with each of said combustionchambers and opening through the inwardly facing side walls of said heads,an intake manifold mounted on said inwardly facing side walls, a pluralityof exhaust ports in said cylinder heads connecting with each of saidcombustion chambers and opening through the outwardly fcing side walls ofsaid heads, an exhaust manifold mounted on said outwardly facing side wallof each head, spark plug receiving means opening to said combustionchambers through said outwardly facing side walls adjacent said exhaustmanifolds, spark plugs in said plug receiving openings and having inwardlyprotruding electrodes, wall means in said combustion chambers and definingsmall ignition chambers therein connected with said combustion chambersand enclosing the spark plug electrodes thereof, main intake passagesextending through said intake manifold and cylinder head intake ports tosaid combustion chambers, exhaust passages extending from said combustionchambers through said exhaust ports and exhaust manifolds, auxiliaryintake passages joined to and extending sequentially along said intakemanifold, through said cylinder heads, along said exhaust manifolds andback into said cylinder heads to said ignition chambers, said auxiliaryintake passages being in heat exchange relation with one of said cylinderhead exhaust ports and exhaust manifold exhaust passages, and enginedriven valve mechanism including a main intake valve, an auxiliary intakevalve and an exhaust valve for each combustion chamber and respectivelycontrolling the admission of air-fuel mixtures to the combustion andignition chambers from the main and auxiliary intake passages and theexhaust of burned gases from the combustion chambers through the exhaustpassages.6. An internal combustion engine of the type having a cylinder blockincluding two banks of longitudinally spaced cylinders, a cylinder headmounted on each of said banks and closing the ends of the cylindertherein, said heads having inwardly and outwardly facing side wallspistons reciprocably disposed in said cylinders and connected with arotatable crank, the cylinders, pistons and heads together definingenclosed expansible working and combustion chambers, a plurality of intakeports in said cylinder heads connecting with each of said combustionchambers and opening through the inwardly facing side walls of said heads,an intake manifold mounted on said inwardly facing side walls, a pluralityof exhaust ports in said cylinder heads connecting with each of saidcombustion chambers and opening through the outwardly facing side walls ofsaid heads, an exhaust manifold mounted on said outwardly facing side wallof each head, spark plug receiving means opening to said combustionchambers through said outwardly facing side walls adjacent said exhaustmanifolds, spark plugs in said plug receiving openings and having inwardlyprotruding electrodes, wall means in said combustion chambers and definingsmall ignition chambers therein connected with said combustion chambersand enclosing the spark plug electrodes thereof, said ignition chamberdefining wall means comprising thin-walled metal cups received in saidspark plug openings and retained therein by flanged portions thereof, saidcups having openings to connect said ignition chambers with saidcombustion chambers and with auxiliary intake ports, main intake passagesextending through said intake manifold and cylinder head intake ports tosaid combustion chambers, exhaust passages extending from said combustionchambers through said exhaust ports and exhaust manifold, auxiliary intakepassages joined to and extending sequentially along said intake manifold,through said cylinder heads, along said exhaust manifolds and back intosaid cylinder head auxiliary intake ports to said ignition chambers, saidauxiliary intake passages being in heat exchange relation with a pluralityof said cylinder head exhaust ports and exhaust manifold exhaust passages,exhaust heat passages in said cylinder heads and said intake manifold andextending between exhaust ports of the separate heads into heat exchangerelation with portions of said main intake passages in said intakemanifold, said auxiliary intake passages also being in heat exchangerelation with said exhaust heat passages in the cylinder heads and intakemanifold, and engine driven valve mechanism including a main intake valve,an auxiliary intake valve and an exhaust valve for each combustion chamberand respectively controlling the admission of air-fuel mixtures to thecombustion and ignition chambers from the main and auxiliary intakepassages and the exhaust of burned gases from the combustion chambersthrough the exhaust passages, said valve mechanism further comprisingmeans mechanically engaging the end of each said main intake valve toactuate it in an opening direction, a spring seat member retained adjacenteach said main intake valve end, a valve spring between each said seatmember and said cylinder head and urging its respective main intake valvein a closing direction, auxiliary actuating means carried on each saidspring seat member and operatively engaging the end of the auxiliaryintake valve for its respective cylinder, to move said auxiliary valve inan opening direction upon opening movement of said main intake valve, saidauxiliary actuating means including means straddling the upper end of saidauxiliary intake valve to maintain its auxiliary actuating means inalignment with said auxiliary valve upper end, and a valve spring actingbetween each said auxiliary intake valve and said head and urging itsrespective valve in a closing direction.7. The combination of valve means with an internal combustion engine of thetype having a main combustion chamber, an ignition chamber adjacent saidmain chamber and connected therewith, and main and auxiliary intake portmeans connected with said main and ignition chambers respectively, saidvalve means comprising:a main intake poppet valve in said engine and positioned to controlcommunication of said main intake port with said main chamber,an auxiliary intake poppet valve adjacent said main valve in said engineand positioned to control communication of said auxiliary intake port withsaid ignition chamber,first and second spring seat members on said main and auxiliary valves,respectively.first and second valve springs engaging said first and second seat membersrespectively and biasing said valves in their closing directions,engine driven actuating means operatively engaging the end of said mainintake valve to actuate it in an opening direction during predeterminedportions of engine operation,said first spring seat member including and solely supporting auxiliaryactuating means on one side thereof and opertively engaging the end ofsaid auxiliary intake valve to move it in an opening direction uponopening movement of said main intake valve,said auxiliary actuating means including guide means straddling the upperend of said auxiliary intake valve to maintain said auxiliary actuatingmeans in alignment with said auxiliary valve end."}
{"WKU":"039304728","Title":"Composite oil-cooled piston for an internal combustion engine","App_Date":"1974-09-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Gernot Athenstaedt","Assignee":"M.A.N.","ICL_Class":"F01P  306","References":"1856107;2407429;2442408;2687931;2742883;3204617","Claims":"I claim:1. A composite oil-cooled piston for an internal combustion engine,comprising:a piston head (1) having a piston face and a piston skirt with seatingmeans for piston rings, said piston head having an annular support ridge(6) on its underside separated from said piston skirt by an annularcooling cavity (29) and surrounding a central cooling cavity (27);a piston carrier body (8) having an upper part (12) of approximately hollowcone shape having an upper surface (7) on which said annular ridge (6) ofsaid piston head is directly supported, the hollow center of said upperpart forming said central cooling cavity (27) with said piston head, saidcarrier body (8) further having a lower part (9) having a wrist pinbearing (10) therein including a load bearing surface (18) and providingcoolant recesses (33,38), said carrier body having coolant channelsrespectively connecting said recesses with said annular cavity, anda piston wrist pin (11,56) in said bearing and a piston rod (17) fastenedto said wrist pin on a surface opposite the load surface (18) of saidbearing (10), said piston rod having an interior coolant supply channel(37) and said wrist pin (11,56) having channels therein (34,36) with axesin a plane (35) passing through the piston axis (A--A), said channels allbeing oblique to said axis at angles between 30.degree. and 60.degree.,and providing coolant paths from said supply channel in said piston rod tosaid recesses.2. A composite piston as defined in claim 1 in which said wrist pin (11,56)is provided with coolant distribution channels (39,40) for cooling saidwrist pin which do not penetrate into the layer of said wrist pin bearingagainst said bearing surface (18).3. A composite piston as defined in claim 1 in which said piston head isprovided with an annular shoulder (13) adjacent to said piston skirt forsupporting said piston head on the edge of said carrier body (8).4. A composite piston as defined in claim 1 in which said coolant channels(32) between said recesses (33,38) and said annular cavity (26) arestraight and run at an angle between 0.degree. and 25.degree. to the axisof said piston.5. A composite piston as defined in claim 1 in which connection channelmeans (41) are provided for circulation of coolant between said annularcavity (26) and said central cavity (27) and in which said central cavity(27) is provided with at least one outlet channel (42) to the exterior ofthe piston.6. A composite piston as defined in claim 1 in which said carrier body (8)is provided with integral sliding members (15) on its periphery.7. A composite piston as defined in claim 1 in which sliding members (15)are removably fastened to said carrier body (8) by expansion screws.8. A composite piston as defined in claim 1 in which a sliding skirt memberin frame form (45) is pivotally mounted on the outer ends of said wristpin (56).9. A composite piston as defined in claim 1 in which said wrist pin (11,56) and said piston rod (17) are fastened together with expansion screws.10. A composite piston as defined in claim 1 in which said piston head ismade of steel.11. A composite piston as defined in claim 1 in which said carrier body (8)is made of a metal consisting principally of aluminum.12. A composite piston as defined in claim 1 in which said wrist pin(11,56) bears directly against the material of which said carrier (8) ismade.13. A composite piston as defined in claim 1 in which said piston head (1)and said carrier body (8) are demountably fastened together by screws(49).14. A composite piston as defined in claim 8 in which said sliding skirtbody (45) is provided with reinforcing ribs (46) on its interior oppositethe sliding surfaces (44) thereof.15. A composite piston as defined in claim 1 in which tapered and inwardlyextending cavities (24) are provided on both ends (23) of said wrist pin(11,56)."}
{"WKU":"039304736","Title":"Manifold for internal combustion engines having steps in the walls of","App_Date":"1974-04-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James D. McFarland, Jr.","Assignee":"Edelbrock Equipment Company","ICL_Class":"F02B 7518","References":"1305174;2011994;2043079;2066923;2163040;2215337;2241461;2639230;2727502;3393984;3559963;3744463;3785628","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An improved manifold for a reciprocating internal combustion engine ofthe type having runners for communicating a fuel-air mixture from a sourcethereof to the engine, the runners having curved walls proximate the exitthereof to the engine, the improvement comprising:a plurality of serially spaced steps in each of the runners on a curvedwall thereof from the exit of the runner to a predetermined point betweenthe exit and the entrance to the runner, the steps being in a zone wheremixture stream velocity is relatively low with respect to mixture streamvelocity elsewhere in the same velocity profile and where the steps are inline of sight communication with the exit.2. The improved manifold claimed in claim 1 wherein;each step has a face substantially perpendicular to the flow of mixture inthe cross section of the runner proximate the face, each step face facingthe exit of the runner in which the step is disposed.3. The improved manifold claimed in claim 2 wherein:each step has a trailing side which joins the face at the latter s terminustoward the center of the runner in which the step is disposed.4. The improvement claimed in claim 3 wherein the step-to-step spacing ineach runner is substantially equal.5. The improvement claimed in claim 1 wherein each step has a facesubstantially perpendicular to the path of expected reversion flow from anengine having the manifold.6. The improvement claimed in claim 5 wherein each step has a trailing sideextending from the free end of the step to the wall of the runnersubstantially parallel with the expected path of reversion flow.7. The improvement claimed in claim 1 wherein:the steps diverge towards a zone where mixture stream velocity isrelatively low with respect to mixture stream velocity in the samevelocity profile and where the steps converge.8. The improvement claimed in claim 7 wherein:each step is defined by a face and a trailing side, the face beingsubstantially perpendicular to the path of expected reversion flow from anengine using the manifold, and the trailing side extending from the freeend of the step to the wall of the runner in which the step is disposedsubstantially parallel with the path of expected reversion flow.9. The improvement claimed in claim 8 wherein: in each runner, thestep-to-step distance is substantially equal.10. The improvement claimed in claim 9 in combination with a four-cycle,reciprocating internal combustion engine.11. The improvement claimed in claim 1 in combination with a four-cycle,reciprocating internal combustion engine.12. The improvement claimed in claim 11 wherein each step has a facesubstantially perpendicular to the path of expected reversion flow fromthe engine.13. The improvement claimed in claim 12 wherein each step has a trailingside extending from the free end of the step to the wall of the runner inwhich the step is disposed substantially parallel to the expected path ofreversion flow from the engine.14. An improved manifold for a four-cycle, multiple cylinder, reciprocatinginternal combustion engine, the manifold being of the single plane typeand which has a plurality of runners for communicating a fuel-air mixturefrom a source thereof to the cylinders of the engine corresponding innumber to the number of cylinders in the engine, the improvementcomprising:a plurality of steps in each runner on a curved wall thereof extending fromthe exit of the runner towards the source a predetermined distance, thesteps being in zones of the runner where mixture stream velocity isrelatively low with respect to stream velocity elsewhere in the samevelocity profile, and the steps being in line-of-sight communication withthe exit.15. The improvement claimed in claim 14 wherein:a. each step has a face approximately perpendicular to the direction offuel-air mixture flow and extending a predetermined distance from thewall; andb. each step has a trailing side approximately parallel with the directionof fuel-air mixture flow and extending from an intersection with the faceof the step to the runner wall.16. The improvement claimed in claim 14 wherein:a. each step has a face approximately perpendicular to the direction ofexpected reversion flow extending a predetermined distance from the wall;andb. each step has a trailing side approximately parallel to the direction ofexptected reversion flow and extending from an intersection with the faceof the step to the runner wall.17. The improvement claimed in claim 16 wherein the step-to-step distanceis substantially constant.18. The improvement claimed in claim 14 wherein:each step has a face approximately perpendicular to the runner wall onwhich the step is disposed and the steps diverge with respect to adjacentsteps towards a zone where the mixture stream velocity in the samevelocity profiles are relatively low with respect to the mixture streamvelocity towards the converging ends of the steps.19. The improvement claimed in claim 18 wherein:each step has a trailing side approximately parallel with the direction ofexpected reversion flow and extending from an intersection with the faceof the step to the runner wall.20. The improvement claimed in claim 14 in combination with the engine.21. An improvement in a single plane, independent runner intake manifoldfor idstributing a fuel and air mixture from a source thereof to thecylinders of a V-8 four-cycle, reciprocating, internal combustio enginehaving its cylinders arrayed in two parallel banks of four cylinders each,the manifold having a lingitudinal axis midway between the banks ofcylinders, a central plenum for receiving the mixture, and an independentrunner for each of the cylinders extending longitudinally and laterally tothe inlet port of its associated cylinder from the plenum, each runnercurving towards the lateral direction it takes and having a generallyquadrilateral cross section for mixture flow, and each runner having anoutside and an inside wall as viewed longitudinally from the plenum, theimprovement comprising:a plurality of serially spaced steps in each of the runners beginning nearthe exit thereof into the inlet port and extending towards the plenum apredetermined distance, the steps being in zones where mixture streamvelocity is relatively low with respect to mixture stream velocityelsewhere in the same velocity profile, on a curved wall of the runner andin lines-of-sight from the exit.22. The improvement claimed in claim 21 wherein the steps for each runnerare on the outside wall thereof.23. The improvement claimed in claim 22 wherein each step has a faceextending from the wall to a free end which is substantially perpendicularto the direction of mixture flow through the runner and which faces theinlet port for the runner.24. The improvement claimed in claim 23 wherein each step has a sideextending from the free end of the face substantially parallel to mixtureflow to the outside wall.25. The improvement claimed in claim 24 wherein the steps of each runnerdiverge from the floor thereof to the roof.26. The improvement claimed in claim 25 wherein the step-to-step distancein each runner is substantially equal.27. The improvement claimed in claim 26 in conbination with the engine."}
{"WKU":"039304744","Title":"Ignition system for internal combustion engines","App_Date":"1973-08-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Noriaki Kawai;Hisaji Okamoto;Yosiaki Takeda;Fukuzi Sano;Akio Kakiuchi;Masami Manabe;Takashi Nomura;Sigeya Abe","Assignee":"Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha;Nippondenso Kabushiki Kaisha","ICL_Class":"F02P  504","References":"3593693;3626455;3704697","Claims":"We claim:1. An improved ignition system for use in a spark-ignition type internalcombustion engine having at least one spark plug to advance the spark at aselected engine temperature corresponding to a coolant temperature lessthan about 40.degree.C and to retard the spark above that temperatureincludingan ignition coil having a primary winding and a secondary windingconnectable in circuit with said spark plug,a power source connected in circuit with said primary winding for supplyingpower to said primary winding, andbreaker means connected in series with the circuit including said primarywinding and said power source to interrupt power supplied from said powersource to said primary winding so as to induce a high voltage in saidsecondary winding, wherein the improvement comprises,first and second current interrupting means connected in parallel with eachother and each connected in series circuit with said primary winding andsaid power source, said first current interrupting means being positionedin advance of said second current interrupting means by a selectedrotational angle for interrupting power supplied to said primary windingfrom said power source,a temperature detecting element for detecting engine temperature having aneffect on engine torque efficiency to produce respective output signalsbelow and above said selected level of said engine temperature, andspark timing change means connected between said temperature detectingelement and said breaker means for changing spark timing to selecteddiscrete levels to interrupt power supplied from said power source to saidprimary winding in response to the output of said temperature detectingelement,said spark timing change means including switch means for switching on saidfirst current interrupting means in response to said below output signalfrom said temperature detecting element for advancing said spark timingfrom a normal pre-TDC level to a selected discrete level that is moreadvanced by about 5.degree. to 15.degree. when the engine temperature islower than said selected engine temperature for improving the power ofsaid engine by generally optimizing engine shaft torque regardless ofengine load and increasing the stability at idling and during accelerationand running speeds of said engine at temperatures thereof below saidselected engine temperature,said switch means being operative in response to the said above temperatureoutput signal to switch off said first current interrupting means and tomake said second current interrupting means operative for retarding saidspark timing to said normal level when said engine temperature is abovesaid selected temperature,said switch means having a single pole and two contacts for double throwaction, said single pole being connected directly to said primary windingand said two contacts being respectively connected to said first andsecond current interrupting means.2. An improved ignition system for use in a spark-ignition type internalcombustion engine having at least one spark plug to advance the spark at aselected engine temperature corresponding to a coolant temperature lessthan about 40.degree.C and to retard the spark above that temperatureincludingan ignition coil having a primary winding and a secondary windingconnectable in circuit with said spark plug,a power source connected in circuit with said primary winding for supplyingpower to said primary winding, andbreaker means connected in series with the circuit including said primarywinding and said power source to interrupt power supplied from said powersource to said primary winding so as to induce a high voltage in saidsecondary winding, wherein the improvement comprises,first and second current interrupting means connected in parallel with eachother and each connected in series circuit with said primary winding andsaid power source, said first current interrupting means being positionedin advance of said second current interrupting means by a selectedrotational angle for interrupting power supplied to said primary windingfrom said power source,a temperature detecting element for detecting engine temperature having aneffect on engine torque efficiency to produce respective output signalsbelow and above said selected level of said engine temperature,spark timing change means connected between said temperature detectingelement and said breaker means for changing spark timing to selecteddiscrete levels to interrupt power supplied from said power source to saidprimary winding in response to the output of said temperature detectingelement,said spark timing change means including switch means for switching on saidsecond current interrupting means in response to said below output signalfrom said temperature detecting element for advancing said spark timingfrom a normal pre-TDC level to a selected discrete level when the enginetemperature is lower than said selected engine temperature for improvingthe power of said engine by generally optimizing engine shaft torqueregardless of engine load and increasing the stability at idling andduring acceleration and running speeds of said engine at temperaturesthereof below said selected engine temperature,said switch means being operative in response to the said above temperatureoutput signal to switch off said second current interrupting means and tomake said first current interrupting means operative for retarding saidspark timing to said normal level when said engine temperature is abovesaid selected temperature,said switch means having a single pole and two contacts for double throwaction, said single pole being connected directly to said primary windingand said two contacts being respectively connected to said first andsecond current interrupting means,a switch connected across said pole and the one of said contacts that isconnected with said second current interrupting means, andmeans for closing said switch only while the starter motor for said engineis in operation so that during the starting of the engine the ignitionspark is always delivered by the action of said second currentinterruption means regardless of the engine temperature but then the sparkis advanced immediately after engine start if the said engine temperatureis below the said selected value thereof corresponding to a coolanttemperature less than about 40.degree.C."}
{"WKU":"039304752","Title":"Engine exhaust gas recirculating control","App_Date":"1973-08-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John A. Lewis;John R. Marshall","Assignee":"Ford Motor Company","ICL_Class":"F02m 2506","References":"3542004;3713428;3717131;3741179;3768452;3774583;3783847;3800765","Claims":"We claim:1. An exhaust gas recirculating system for an internal combustion engine,having a throttle valve controlling flow through a carburetor inductionpassage, comprising, a duct connecting the exhaust gases to the engineintake manifold, a second valve normally closing the duct to preventrecirculation and movable to an open position by a signal vacuum connectedthereto, and control means responsive to changes in engine manifold vacuumaction on the control means to communicate a signal force to the secondvalve that varies from an ambient essentially atmospheric pressure levelat closed throttle positions to manifold vacuum levels at wide openthrottle positions.2. A system as in claim 1, including a vacuum servo connected to the secondvalve having spring means biasing the second valve to a position closingthe duct.3. A system as in claim 1, the control means including a line connectingmodulated manifold vacuum to a signal force passage connected to thesecond valve, and a normally open air bleed valve connected to the passagemovable by decay of manifold vacuum to a value below a predeterminedmanifold vacuum level to variably block the bleed of air into the line asa function of manifold vacuum decreases.4. A system as in claim 1, the control means including a line connectingmanifold vacuum modulated as a function of throttle valve position to asignal force passage connected to the second valve, and an air bleeddevice in the line movable between positions bleeding and not bleeding airinto the line to vary the signal force in the manner indicated in claim 1,the air bleed device including an air bleed opening in the line, a valvemovable in response to intake manifold vacuum changes to block the airbleed opening, and spring means biasing the air bleed valve open above apredetermined intake manifold vacuum level.5. A system as in claim 2, including a first manifold vacuum port and asecond signal vacuum port in the induction passage located respectivelybelow and above the closed position of the throttle valve so as to subjectthe first port to manifold vacuum at all times and the second signal portto atmospheric pressure at closed throttle position and progressively tomanifold vacuum as the throttle valve traverses the signal port, themanifold vacuum responsive means including a second valve spring moved inone direction and having a movement in the opposite direction triggered bymanifold vacuum changes, the second valve movement controlling the flow ofsignal vacuum to the first mentioned valve.6. A system as in claim 5, including a normally open air bleed associatedwith the signal vacuum port and closed by movement of the second valve inthe opposite direction, movement of the second valve in the oppositedirection connecting the signal vacuum to the first valve.7. A system as in claim 5, the second valve comprising a shuttle valve, anormally open air bleed preventing application of signal vacuum to thefirst valve, the shuttle valve in one position maintaining the air bleedopen while blocking connection of signal vacuum to the first valve,movement of the second valve to a second position in response topredetermined manifold vacuum changes blocking the air bleed whileconnecting the signal vacuum to the first valve to open the latter.8. An exhaust gas recirculating system for an internal combustion enginehaving intake and exhaust manifolding and a carburetor with an inductionpassage connected to the intake manifold and having a throttle valvemovable across the passage to open and close the passage to control theflow therethrough, a duct connecting the intake and exhaust manifoldingfor recirculating the exhaust gases back into the engine, a second valvemovable between alternate positions to open and close the duct, a servoconnected to the second valve and having spring means biasing the secondvalve to a closed position, a vacuum signal line connected to the secondvalve for moving the same to an open position, means connecting the vacuumsignal line to a port in the induction passage located above the closedposition of the throttle valve, and air bleed means in the signal linecontrolling the vacuum signal force in the signal line, the air bleedmeans including a normally open vent, an air bleed control valve movableto close or open the vent to control the level of transfer of manifoldvacuum in the port to the signal line, spring means biasing the air bleedvalve opened, and manifold vacuum operated servo means connected to thebleed valve for moving it to a closed vent position so that the vacuumsignal force in the signal line varies with changes in intake manifoldvacuum modulated by movement of the throttle valve whereby the exhaustgases are recirculated only during predetermined engine accelerative modesof operation.9. A system as in claim 8, the servo means including a housing having aflexible diaphragm dividing the housing into a pair of chambers, meansconnecting maniford vacuum to one chamber, means connecting the air bleedvalve to the diaphragm, spring means biasing the diaphragm and bleed valveto an open bleed position, orifice flow restriction means in the diaphragmpermitting slow communication between the chambers, and one-way checkvalve means in the diaphragm permitting a rapid equalization of pressuresat times between the chambers.10. A system as in claim 9, the vacuum in the port being blocked fromcommunication with the first mentioned valve when the bleed valve is in anopen bleed position."}
{"WKU":"039304760","Title":"Internal combustion engine system","App_Date":"1973-03-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Christian Koch","Assignee":"Siemens Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"F02M 3100;F02M  700","References":"1795037;2116718;2201965;2221352;2420325;2560152;3221719;3635200;3684738;3828736","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An internal combustion engine system including an internal combustionengine having a single muffler used for reducing engine noise throughwhich the engine s exhaust passes and a reformer having an intake end fedby vaporized liquid hydrocarbon fuel mixed with an oxygen-containing gasand an output end from which the reformer s gas output is fed to theengine intake wherein the improvement comprises the reformer positionedinside the muffler and wherein the inside of said muffler is divided intoan upper and lower chamber and further including a heat exchanger of theplate type having a plurality of transverse passages connecting said lowerand upper chambers forming heat input flow passages and having a pluralityof longitudinal heat output flow passages, means for conducting saidexhaust into one of said upper and lower chambers and out of the other ofsaid chambers after it flows through said heat input flow passages andmeans for conducting at least the oxygen containing gas from outside themuffler through said heat output flow passages to the reformer intake endwhile separated from the exhaust in the muffler, whereby said plurality oftransverse heat input flow passages through which said exhaust flows willact to both transfer large amounts of heat and at the same time providefor good exhaust noise attenuation.2. The system of claim 1 in which the muffler is connected to the engine byan exhaust pipe short enough to prevent the exhaust from cooling thereinto a degree preventing effective heating of the reformer.3. The system of claim 1 in which said muffler is of the size of aconventional automobile engine muffler and in which said reformer is ofthe type comprising an encased series of porous plates carrying acatalytic agent and having passages through which the vaporized fuel andoxygen containing gas is passed, permitting the reformer to beminiaturized to a degree permitting it to be mounted in the muffler, andthe dimensions of the heat exchanger being of substantially the samecross-sectional size as the reformers cross sectional size.4. The system of claim 3 in which the reformer is encased by a metal casingover which the exhaust flows while in the muffler.5. The system of claim 4 in which the muffler contains means formulti-deflecting the exhaust flowing therethrough."}
{"WKU":"039304779","Title":"Electric heating means for fuel vaporization in internal combustion","App_Date":"1973-08-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Wilmer C. Jordan","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F02M 3100","References":"2175738;2576401;2623978;3556065;3601110;3760780","Claims":"I claim:1. In apparatus for improving the performance of an internal combustionengine operable under certain normal ranges of load, speed and ambienttemperature conditions, said engine including a plurality of cylinders,flow path means for flow of air into said cylinders, an intake valve foreach cylinder for flow from said flow path means thereinto, fuel injectionmeans positioned in spaced relation to each intake valve for injectingfuel into said flow path means to mix with the air flowing through theassociated intake valve into an associated cylinder, and throttle valvemeans for controlling the flow of air into said flow path means, saidengine having characteristics such that an optimum amount of radiant heatapplied to enhance vaporization of fuel within said flow path meansbetween said fuel injector means and said intake valves is effective tocause said engine to develop maximum average torque and acceleration whileoperating within said normal ranges of load, speed and ambient temperatureconditions and with said throttle valve means fully open, average torqueand acceleration being reduced in proportion to a reduction in the amountof radiant heat below said optimum amount and being also reduced inproportion to an increase in the amount of radiant heat above said optimumamount, electric heating means for each cylinder, means arranging saidelectrical heating means for installation in said flow path means betweensaid fuel injection means and the associated intake valve, and electricalconnection means arranged for continuously supplying an optimum amount ofelectrical power to all of said heating means at all times duringoperation of said engine, said optimum amount of electrical power beingpredetermined in accordance with said characteristics of said engine andbeing effective to cause radiation of said optimum amount of radiant heatfrom said heating means into the air-fuel mixture in said flow path means.2. In apparatus as defined in claim 1, each of said electrical heatingmeans comprising an elongated electrical heating unit having an outermetallic housing and an electric resistance element positioned within saidhousing, a portion of said outer metallic housing being positioneddirectly in the path of fuel injected by the associated fuel injectionmeans.3. In apparatus as defined in claim 2, said portion of said outer metallichousing being a terminal end portion thereof and said electric resistanceelement being positioned only within said terminal end portion.4. In apparatus as defined in claim 3, wherein said engine includes anintake manifold having walls defining said flow path means, said terminalend portion of said outer metallic housing having a terminal end spaced ashort distance from one of said walls and the opposite end of said housingmeans being fixedly supported from an opposite wall of said manifold."}
{"WKU":"039304787","Title":"System for the detoxication of exhaust gases","App_Date":"1973-09-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Johannes Brettshneider;Heinrich Knapp","Assignee":"Robert Bosch G.m.b.H.","ICL_Class":"F02M 3100","References":"1448008;1889270;1945178;1947040;2395264;2473808;2702029;2874944;3007463;3061286;3539159;3669423","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In an exhaust gas-detoxicating system for an externally ignited internalcombustion engine having at least one air intake suction tube in which afuel/air mixture is produced by metering into said suction tube fuel froma fuel metering device, and wherein the fuel/air mixture, before its entryinto a cylinder of said engine, can be deviated through a heated-up bypassof at least one such suction tube by means of a flap valve being disposedin said suction tube and being controllable in dependence oncharacteristic engine data,the improvement comprising, in combination measuring means for detectingthe amount of air flowing through said suction tube and apneumatic-mechanical converter for controlling said flap valve independence on the detected air amount and independently of engine load,wherein said measuring means comprise a Venturi constriction provided insaid suction tube, and means for actuating said pneumatic-mechanicalconverter in dependence on the pressure difference between the airpressure in the narrowest cross-sectional area of said Venturiconstriction and the air pressure upstream of said measuring means, andwherein said pneumatic-mechanical converter is connected directly to theflap valve.2. The improvement as described in claim 1, further comprising means forpassing hot exhaust gas from said engine through said bypass, therebyheating the latter.3. The improvement as described in claim 1, wherein said heatable bypass iscommon to at least two suction tubes acting in parallel in said engine.4. In an exhaust gas-detoxicating system for an externally ignited internalcombustion engine having at least one air intake suction tube in which afuel/air mixture is produced by metering into said suction tube fuel froma fuel metering device, and wherein the fuel/air mixture, before its entryinto a cylinder of said engine, can be deviated through a heated-up bypassof at least one such suction tube by means of a flap valve being disposedin said suction tube and being controllable in dependence oncharacteristic engine data,the improvement comprising, in combination measuring means for detectingthe amount of air flowing through said suction tube independently ofengine load, and control means connected between the measuring means andthe flap valve for controlling said flap valve in dependence on thedetected air amount, wherein said measuring means is adapted for emittinga mechanical regulating signal and said control means comprises aconverter connected to the flap valve, and electrical means for detectingthe mechanical signal, generating a comparable electrical signal andapplying said electrical signal to said converter which controls therebythe relative position of the flap valve.5. The improvement as described in claim 4, further comprising means forpassing hot exhaust gas from said enging through said bypass, therebyheating the latter.6. The improvement as described in claim 4, wherein said heatable bypass iscommon to at least two suction tubes acting in parallel in said engine.7. The improvement as described in claim 4, wherein said convertercomprises a servo-motor, and wherein said electrical means comprises aninductive motion pickup and an amplifier, said pickup serving to detectthe mechanical signal and generating the electrical signal which isamplified by the amplifier and delivered to the servo-motor to actuatesaid servo-motor in controlling the position of the flap valve.8. The improvement as described in claim 1, wherein said suction tubecomprises means for varying the narrowest cross sectional area of saidVenturi constriction.9. The improvement as described in claim 4, wherein said measuring means isassociated with said fuel metering device.10. The improvement as described in claim 4, wherein said measuring meanscomprises a carburetor piston and wherein the displacement of said pistonin response to the detected amount of air serves as a regulating distancewhich is proportional to the mechanical signal."}
{"WKU":"039304795","Title":"Fuel metering device for externally ignited internal combustion engines","App_Date":"1973-08-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Gerhard Stumpp","Assignee":"Robert Bosch G.m.b.H.","ICL_Class":"F02M 3900","References":"3561412;3601106;3628515;3698371;3703888;3710769;3738109;3795230","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a fuel metering device for an externally ignited internal combustionengine with compression of the air-fuel mixture, which system comprises asuction tube for the intake of air in which an air-measuring device and arandomly adjustable throttle valve having a flap are arranged in sequence,and in which an essentially proportionate amount of fuel is metered intothe amount of air flowing therethrough and wherein the proportionality ofthe fuel amount is adjustable by means of controlling a bypasscircumventing the air-measuring device in dependence on engine data,the improvement conprising:a. a valve arranged in said bypass, and controllable by the pressureprevailing in said suction tube in the vicinity of said throttle valve,said valve including a pneumatically actuated valve means mounted forcontrolling said valve in said bypass; andb. conduit means connecting said pneumatically actuated valve means withsaid suction tube, said conduit means having an orifice located upstreamof said throttle valve, taken in the direction of air flow through saidsuction tube, and also upstream of the part of the flap of said throttlevalve moving against the flow of air during the release of the air supply,yet still in the immediate vicinity of said flap part.2. The improvement as described in claim 1, further comprising means havinga passage therethrough and being adapted for having the cross-sectionalarea of said passage randomly varied independently of engine data.3. The improvement as described in claim 2, wherein said means having apassage therethrough are throttle means disposed at the mouth of saidbypass in said suction tube.4. The improvement as described in claim 3, wherein said mouth of saidbypass is located upstream of said throttle valve flap when the latter isclosed, and also upstream of the part of said throttle valve flap whichmoves against the air flow through said suction tube when the air supplyis released, but still within the immediate reach of said part of saidflap.5. The improvement as described in claim 4, wherein said mouth of saidbypass or said orifice of said control conduit or both said mouth and saidconduit are so located in said suction tube relative to said throttlevalve flap that the pressure drop produced in the engine will prevailtherein in continuously increasing degree during an opening movement ofsaid flap of said throttle valve.6. The improvement as described in claim 1, wherein said valve in saidbypass comprises two flow paths being independent of one another, andwherein said pneumatically actuated valve means comprise two controlconduits opening into said suction tube through orifices disposed in saidsuction tube in series, said control conduits being associated with saidflowpaths for controlling the flow of air therethrough.7. The improvement as described in claim 6, wherein at least one of saidcontrol conduits comprises throttle means therein, which throttle meanscomprise means for varying the cross-sectional throttling passagetherethrough.8. The improvement as described in claim 1, wherein said pneumaticallyactuated valve means comprise a membrane, a chamber housing said membrane,and spring means for urging said membrane into closed position, saidchamber being in communication with said suction tube by way of saidcontrol conduit.9. The improvement as described in claim 1, wherein said throttle valvecomprises means for controlling the cross-sectional area of said mouth ofsaid bypass in said suction tube, in dependence on the position of saidflap of said throttle valve in said suction tube.10. The improvement as defined in claim 1, wherein the conduit meanscomprises throttle means therein which serve for varying thecross-sectional throttling passage therethrough."}
{"WKU":"039304809","Title":"Fuel-injection pump for an internal combustion engine","App_Date":"1974-05-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Tadashi Yamada;Toshio Banba","Assignee":"Yanmar Diesel Engine Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"F02M 3900","References":"2544561;2778351;2868131;2890657;3020902;3046963;3123006;3127841;3620640;3673996;3777731","Claims":"We claim:1. A fuel-injection pump for an internal combustion engine, said pumpcomprising a barrel member defining a cylindrical bore and formed with asuction port and an outlet port at the periphery of said port, a plungerfitted in the cylindrical bore to reciprocate axially therein and havingone end disposed within the bore and bounding a fuel compression chamberwhich is also bounded by the periphery of the bore, and a discharge valvecontrolling egress of fuel from said fuel compression chamber, the plungerbeing formed with a narrow metering slit disposed substantially at rightangles to the central axis of the plunger and with a passageway whichmaintains communication between said slit and said fuel compressionchamber, the plunger being rotatable within said bore about said centralaxis to bring said metering slit and said outlet port into overlappingrelationship and to vary the proportion of, and the position within, thereciprocating movement range of the plunger in the bore for which themetering slit and the outlet port remain in overlapping relationship.2. A fuel-injection pump as claimed in claim 1, further comprising afuel-injection valve and duct means defining a passage connecting theoutlet valve to said fuel-injection valve, said passage including apulsation control chamber of larger cross-sectional area than the rest ofsaid passage.3. A fuel-injection pump as claimed in claim 1, wherein the plunger has arotational position in which said metering slit and the outlet port are inoverlapping relationship at the start of axial movement of the plunger inthe direction to compress fuel in the fuel compression chamber.4. A fuel-injection pump as claimed in claim 1, wherein said outlet port isdivided into a plurality of sections by a plane through the central axisof the plunger and a plane perpendicular to said central axis, the plungerbeing arranged in such manner that at least one of said plurality ofsections is employed for effecting metering of fuel delivery by fueloutflow through said section or sections.5. A fuel-injection pump for an internal combustion engine, said pumpcomprising a barrel member formed with a suction port and an outlet portat the periphery of said bore and communicating with a fuel reservoir, aplunger fitted in the cylindrical bore with one end disposed within thebore and bounding a fuel compression chamber which is also bounded by theperiphery of the bore, and a discharge valve for controlling egress offuel from said fuel compression chamber, the plunger being reciprocableaxially in the cylindrical bore between a first end position in which thesuction port is closed off by the plunger and a second end position inwhich the suction port communicates with the fuel compression chamber, atleast part of the periphery of the outlet port being oblique to the commoncentral axis of the plunger and the bore, and the plunger being formedwith a narrow metering slit disposed substantially at right angles to saidcentral axis and with a passageway which maintains communication betweensaid slit and said fuel compression chamber, the plunger being rotatablewithin said bore about said central axis so that at a given axial positionof the plunger in its range of reciprocating movement with respect to thebore, the metering slit partially overlaps the outlet port at said obliquepart of the periphery thereof.6. A fuel injection pump as claimed in claim 5, wherein the periphery ofthe outlet port is elliptical."}
{"WKU":"039304817","Title":"Fuel injection system for internal combustion engines","App_Date":"1973-09-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Konrad Eckert","Assignee":"Robert Bosch G.m.b.H.","ICL_Class":"F02M 3900","References":"3703888;3710771;3765387;3796200;3828749;3842813","Claims":"That which is claimed is:1. A fuel metering and injection system for regulating fuel flow so as tomaintain a desired fuel-air mixture in an internal combustion engine, thesystem comprising, in combination:a. an air intake suction tube of the internal combustion engine;b. electro-mechanical means for measuring the quantity of air passingthrough said air intake suction tube;c. pressure control means, responsive to the output from saidelectro-mechanical means for measuring, for generating a variable pressurehead;d. means for establishing a given force;e. fuel distribution means in fluid communication with said control meansand including at least one fuel metering valve having a movable memberwhich can be actuated, against a restoring force provided by said meansfor establishing the given force, by the fluid pressure head; whereby thefuel quantity is metered.2. A system according to claim 1, wherein said means for establishing agiven force comprises a spring having a small spring constant.3. A system according to claim 1, further comprising a fuel pump, aplurality of control valves with control slits, and wherein said movablevalve member is a slide-valve piston which has an axis and is part of saidfuel distribution means and includes an annular groove in which fuel ispassed from said fuel pump through said annular groove of said slidingvalve piston to each control valve of said plurality of control valves forchanging their effective flow cross section, each of said control valvesincluding a resilient member separating first and second chambers wherepressure prevailing downstream of said distribution means is present insaid first chamber and acts upon said resilient member, and wherein saidsecond chamber is provided with pressure prevailing upstream of saiddistribution means, said effective flow cross section of saidsliding-valve piston being changeable linearly by axial sliding of saidslide-valve piston, its annular groove exposing, depending on its axialposition, to variable extent said slits assigned to each said controlvalve, these slits being parallel to substantially said axis of saidsliding-valve piston.4. A system according to claim 3, wherein at least a part of fuel providedby said fuel pump flows continually and sequentially through said secondchambers.5. A system according to claim 1, further comprising a conduit and apressure control means, and wherein control fluid is fuel supplied to saidmovable valve member through said conduit in which is disposed saidpressure control means.6. A system according to claim 5, wherein said pressure control means isformed by a valve having at least two control positions, and whose outletend experiences virtually no hydraulic counterpressure.7. A system according to claim 5, wherein said pressure control meanscomprises a pressure control valve which operates intermittently.8. A system according to claim 5, further including means responsive to atleast one additional engine operating parameter and wherein said pressurecontrol means comprises a nearly hysteresis-free electric solenoid valve,whose magnetic field is changeable in dependence on air quantity streamingthrough said suction tube and on said means responsive to at least oneadditional engine parameter (load, temperature and/or exhaustcontaminants).9. A system according to claim 8, wherein said solenoid operates via a coilarmature associated with a permanent magnet or a magnet having constantexternal excitation.10. A system according to claim 8, wherein said pressure control meansincludes a movable valve member in the form of a membrane.11. A system according to claim 1, wherein said electro-mechanical meansmeasuring the quantity of air in said suction tube is coupled toelectrical circuit means which generate an electrical signal correspondingto air quantity and which determines the magnitude of the control variableof said pressure control means.12. A system according to claim 11, including additional electrical circuitmeans and a comparator, and wherein the amount of fuel metered is measuredby said additional electrical circuit means to produce a measured signaland this measured signal is compared in said comparator with theelectrical signal corresponding to the quantity of air to produce adifference control signal which determines the magnitude of the controlprovided by said pressure control means.13. A system according to claim 11, including a position indicator, andwherein said movable member of said fuel metering valve and thus themetered fuel quantity is measured by said position indicator.14. A system according to claim 13, wherein said position indicator is apotentiometer, whose movable part is activated at least mediately by saidmovable member of said fuel metering valve.15. A system according to claim 13, wherein said position indicator isinductive in nature.16. A system according to claim 13, further comprising a roller and a levermoving a first end and a bearing end, and wherein said movable member ofsaid fuel metering valve transfers its motion via said roller to saidlever mounted eccentrically, whose first end opposite to its said bearingend carries a pick-up portion forming said position indicator.17. A system according to claim 11, further including a position indicator,and wherein said electro-mechanical means for measuring the quantity ofair comprises a static plate operatively associated with said positionindicator.18. A system according to claim 11, including a pressure control unit and atemperature dependent resistor, said temperature dependent resistor beingdisposed within said pressure control unit.19. A system according to claim 11, wherein said electro-mechanical meansfor measuring the quantity of air includes at least onetemperature-dependent resistor disposed within said suction tube andresponsive to the air stream therein.20. A system according to claim 11, further including a bridge circuitmeasuring fuel quantity, and wherein said electro-mechanical means formeasuring the quantity of air includes at least one temperature-dependentresistor disposed within said suction tube and serving as one resistor ofa further bridge circuit, whose characteristic curve approximates that ofsaid bridge circuit measuring fuel quantity."}
{"WKU":"039304825","Title":"Fuel injection piston and method of its manufacture","App_Date":"1973-12-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Tetsuji Akashi;Takuji Isomura","Assignee":"Nippondenso Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"F02F  328","References":"1966694;2225019;2356511;2696807;2810375","Claims":"That which is claimed is:1. In a fuel injection piston of a fuel injection pump for use in internalcombustion engines, the piston being axially reciprocated, as well asrotated within a pump cylinder, with the pump cylinder being formed with afuel supply opening therein, and said piston being formed with an upperend surface and with relieved portions defining an upper control edgedetermining initiation of fuel injection and a lower control edgedetermining termination of fuel injection as the edges move past said fuelsupply opening, and with rotation of said piston determining the relativetiming of movement of the control edges past said opening the improvementwherein:i. the piston is further formed with fluid communication means between saidrelieved portions;ii. the upper end surface of said piston is provided with a notch whichforms at the intersection of the notch with the circumferential surface ofthe piston at least two upper control edge sections serving at least as apart of said upper control edge;iii. said two control edge sections have relatively different inclinationswith respect to the lower control edge, andiv. one of said edge sections extends downwardly at an inclination from theupper end surface of the piston, and the other of said edge sectionsextends upwardly from the bottom of said one edge section in a directionopposite the direction of inclination of said one edge section and towardsthe upper end surface of the piston.2. The piston according to claim 1, wherein the two edge sections haverelatively different inclinations from the lowest point thereof to theupper end surface of the piston to form inclined surfaces which arenon-symmetrical with respect to the axis of the piston and provide saidrelatively differently inclined edge sections.3. The piston according to claim 1, wherein the notch has a first controledge section extending downwardly at an inclination from the upper endsurface of the piston;a second control edge section extending upwardly from the base of the notchin a direction opposite to the inclination of said first control edgesection, and towards the upper end surface of the piston; anda third control edge section extending at the base of the notch andessentially parallel to the upper end surface of the piston and connectingthe first and second control edge sections.4. The piston according to claim 1, wherein the piston is formed with alower notch formed in the circumference of the piston, and wherein theintersection of said lower notch with the circumferential surface of thepiston forms the lower control edge.5. The piston according to claim 4, wherein the lower notch is inclinedwith respect to the axis of the piston and formed with at least twodifferent zones of inclination.6. The piston according to claim 5, wherein the inclined sections of thelower notch have directions of inclination corresponding to those of theinclination of the sections of the notch extending from the upper endsurface of the piston.7. The piston according to claim 1, wherein the notch extends across theface of the piston.8. The piston according to claim 1, wherein the notch is cut into a portionof the upper end surface of the piston.9. The piston according to claim 1, wherein the piston is further formedwith means within said fluid communication means for use in securing saidpiston during manufacture thereof.10. In a fuel injection piston of a fuel injection pump for use in internalcombustion engines, the piston being axially reciprocated, as well asrotated within a pump cylinder, with the pump cylinder being formed with afuel supply opening therein, and said piston being formed with an upperend surface and with relieved portions defining an upper control edgedetermining initiation of fuel injection and a lower control edgedetermining termination of fuel injection as the edges move past said fuelsupply opening, and with rotation of said piston determining the relativetiming of movement of the control edges past said opening, the improvementwherein:i. the piston is further formed with fluid communication means between saidrelieved portions;ii. the upper end surface of said piston is provided with a notch whichforms at the intersection of the notch with the circumferential surface ofthe piston at least two upper control edge sections serving at least as apart of said upper control edge;iii. said two control edge sections have relatively different inclinationswith respect to the lower control edge;iv. wherein the notch has a first control edge section extending downwardlyat an inclination from the upper end surface of the piston;v. a second control edge section extending upwardly from the base of thenotch in a direction opposite to the inclination of said first controledge section, and towards the upper end surface of the piston; andvi. a third control edge section extending at the base of the notch andessentially parallel to the upper end surface of the piston and connectingthe first and second control edge sections.11. In a fuel injection piston of a fuel injection pump for use in internalcombustion engines, the piston being axially reciprocated, as well asrotated within a pump cylinder, with the pump cylinder being formed with afuel supply opening therein, and said piston being formed with an upperend surface and with relieved portions defining an upper control edgedetermining initiation of fuel injection and a lower control edgedetermining termination of fuel injection as the edges move past said fuelsupply opening, and with rotation of said piston determining the relativetiming of movement of the control edges past said opening, the improvementwherein:i. the piston is further formed with fluid communication means between saidrelieved portions;ii. the upper end surface of said piston is provided with a notch whichforms at the intersection of the notch with the circumferential surface ofthe piston at least two upper control edge sections serving at least as apart of said upper control edge;iii. said two control edge sections have relatively different inclinationswith respect to the lower control edge;iv. wherein the piston is formed with a lower notch formed in thecircumference of the piston, and wherein the intersection of said lowernotch with the circumferential surface of the piston forms the lowercontrol edge;v. wherein the lower notch is inclined with respect to the axis of thepiston and formed with at least two different zones of inclination; andvi. wherein the inclined sections of the lower notch have directions ofinclination corresponding to those of the inclination of the sections ofthe notch extending from the upper end surface of the piston."}
{"WKU":"039304833","Title":"Apparatus for supplying fuel to a fuel-injected engine","App_Date":"1974-06-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Charles M. Blisko;Ronald T. Denton;Kazimieras Kizlauskas","Assignee":"Ford Motor Company","ICL_Class":"F02M 5500","References":"2893365;3776209;3783844;3835819;3845748","Claims":"Based upon the foregoing description of the invention, what is claimed is:1. An improved apparatus for supplying fuel to a combustion engine havingan intake manifold and a plurality of fuel injectors, said fuel injectorsbeing elongated in shape and having first and second opposite ends on acommon axis, said first end being located in an opening in said intakemanifold and having a discharge port through which fuel may be dischargedinto said intake manifold, and said second end having an inlet conduit forreceiving fuel to be discharged from said discharge port, wherein theimprovement comprises: a separate clamp for each of said fuel injectors,each of said clamps retaining one of said fuel injectors on said intakemanifold and supplying fuel to such fuel injector, each of said clampsfurther having an opening in which said second end of said fuel injectoris positioned and having inlet and outlet passages in communication withsaid inlet conduit in said second end of said fuel injector, said clampbeing secured to said intake manifold; a pressure regulator for regulatingthe pressure of fuel supplied to said apparatus, and a plurality of piecesof flexible conduit interconnecting said pressure regulator and said inletand outlet passages of said clamps."}
{"WKU":"039304841","Title":"Liquid fuel pumping apparatus","App_Date":"1974-07-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert Thomas John Skinner","Assignee":"C.A.V. Limited","ICL_Class":"F02M 3900","References":"2898900;3516395;3615043;3789818;3818882","Claims":"I claim:1. A liquid fuel injection pumping apparatus for supplying fuel to internalcombustion engines, and of the kind comprising an injection pump driven intimed relationship with an associated engine, a bore, a shuttle slidablein the bore, first valve means through which one end of the bore can beplaced in communication with the injection pump during the filling strokesthereof, and means whereby at other times it can be placed incommunication with a source of fuel under pressure, an adjustable throttlemember for determining the amount of fuel which can flow to said one endof the bore, thereby to vary the amount of fuel which is displaced to theinjection pump during a filling stroke thereof, means for effectingmovement of the shuttle towards said one end of the bore thereby todisplace fuel to the injection pump, said means comprising a second valvemeans operable to place the other end of the bore in communication with afurther source of fuel under pressure to effect movement of the shuttletowards said one end of the bore during the filling periods of theinjection pump, and with a drain to permit the shuttle to move away fromsaid one end of the bore, the pressure of the further source being higherthan that of the first mentioned source.2. An apparatus as claimed in claim 1 including a feed pump for deliveringfuel under pressure, third valve means operable to derive from the outletpressure of the feed pump a pressure which varies in accordance with thesquare of the speed at which the apparatus is driven.3. An apparatus as claimed in claim 2 in which said further source of fuelis the feed pump, said first mentioned source of fuel comprising a fourthvalve means connected between the outlet of the feed pump and saidthrottle member, said fourth valve means being constructed so as toprovide at the upstream side of the throttle member a pressuresubstantially proportional to RN.sup.2.4. An apparatus as claimed in claim 3 in which said fourth valve meansincludes a valve element movable to vary the flow of fuel between an inletand an outlet of the valve means, the outlet of the valve means beingconnected to the upstream side of the throttle member, said valve elementbeing subject to the pressure of fuel in the outlet, said pressure actingto move the valve element to restrict the flow of fuel through the valvemeans, the valve element being urged in the opposite direction by a pistonsubject to the pressure which varies as the square of the speed at whichthe apparatus is driven, the area of the piston being larger than that ofthe valve element, the ratio of the areas being the constant R.5. An apparatus as claimed in claim 4 including a spring interposed betweenthe piston and the valve element.6. An apparatus as claimed in claim 4 including a spring acting on thepiston.7. An apparatus as claimed in claim 3 in which said third valve meanscommunicates with the outlet of the feed pump through a first restrictor.8. An apparatus as claimed in claim 7 including a fluid pressure operablemeans for effecting adjustment of a component of the injection pump, thepressure applied to said fluid pressure operable means being obtained bymeans of a fluid potentiometer including a pair of restrictors one of saidrestrictors having a size which is varied in accordance with the settingof said throttle member.9. An apparatus as claimed in claim 8 in which said one of said pair ofrestrictors communicates with the outlet of the feed pump the other ofsaid pair of restrictors being defined by said first restrictor.10. An apparatus as claimed in claim 8 in which said pair of restrictorsare connected in series in said potentiometer chain, one end of said chainbeing subject to the outlet pressure of the feed pump and the other end ofthe chain being subject to the pressure which varies as the square of thespeed, a point intermediate said pair of restrictors being connected tosaid fluid pressure operable means.11. An apparatus as claimed in claim 10 in which the restrictor of saidpair of restrictors intermediate said point and the outlet of the feedpump is the restrictor which is adjustable.12. An apparatus as claimed in claim 7 in which said first restrictorcommunicates directly with the outlet of the feed pump.13. An apparatus as claimed in claim 7 in which said first restrictorcommunicates with the outlet of the feed pump through said fourth valvemeans.14. An apparatus as claimed in claim 11 including a by-pass passage for theadjustable one of said pair of restrictors and a switch valve in saidby-pass passage, said switch valve including a valve element subject tothe outlet pressure of the feed pump and operable with increasing speed ofoperation of the apparatus to close said by-pass passage.15. An apparatus as claimed in claim 14 including a piston subjected to thepressure of fuel delivered by said first mentioned source, said pistonacting against the valve element in opposition to the force exerted on thevalve element by the outlet pressure of the feed pump."}
{"WKU":"039304850","Title":"Apparatus for mixing fuel and air for an internal combustion","App_Date":"1973-12-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Toshiaki Konomi","Assignee":"Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha","ICL_Class":"F02M 2904;F02M 2914","References":"1121868;1951812;2090673;2384681;3633342","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In combination with a multi-cylinder internal combustion engine of thetype having a carburetor, a suction pipe connected at one end to saidcarburetor, and an intake manifold, apparatus for supplying a homogeneousmixture of fuel and air into said intake manifold, said apparatuscomprising:a tubular housing, one end of said tubular housing being connected to theother end of said suction pipe and the other end of said tubular housingbeing connected to said intake manifold;a plurality of first twisted blades positioned within said tubular housingalong the length thereof; anda plurality of second twisted blades positioned within said tubular housingalong the length thereof in an alternating, closely adjacent relationshipto said first blades;each of said first and second blades being formed from a generallyrectangular plate of a predetermined length, and having a front edge and arear edge the length of each of which is substantially equal to the innerdiameter of said tubular housing, and having a pair of curved side edgessecured to the inner surface of said tubular housing in close contacttherewith;the rear edge of each of said first blades being twisted at substantially aright angle to the front edge thereof in such a manner that the ratio of adistance between said front edge and an intermediate portion along thelength of said plate as measured in front elevation to the angle of twistat said distance as measured in top plan is substantially constantthroughout the length of said plate; andthe rear edge of each of said second blades being twisted at substantiallya right angle to the front edge thereof in such a manner that the relationbetween the breadth of said second blade as measured in front elevation ata distance between said front edge and an intermediate portion along saidlength of said plate and the angle of twist as measured in top plan atsaid distance may be expressed by the following formula:"}
{"WKU":"039304868","Title":"Convertible baseball and tennis practice machine","App_Date":"1974-06-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Edward W. Kahelin","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F41F  104","References":"592221;3018769;3277879;3467073;3568653;3585978;3602208;3640263;3724437","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A compressed air ball projecting machine having an ejection barrel toreceive and eject balls, an air supply tank for subjecting a ball in saidbarrel to compressed air to eject said ball from said barrel,moving means for moving said barrel through lateral oscillations as ballsof one type are cyclically ejected from said barrel to vary the directionof ejection of said balls,an air line through which compressed air is pumped into said air supplytank,valve means in said air line to regulate the flow of air therethrough,said valve means having an actuating lever the position of which determinesthe passage and non-passage of air through said valve means,a pair of notched discs engageable with said actuating lever,a timing motor for rotating said notched discs past said actuating lever tochange the position thereof in accordance with the rotational position ofthe notches on said discs,said lever having an end with a thickness approximately equal to thethickness of said pair of discs whereby said actuating lever is moved onlyupon axial alignment of notched portions of both discs moving past saidactuating lever,said discs being further selectively rotatable relative to each other tovary the axial alignment of said notched portions.2. A compressed air ball projecting machine as set forth in claim 1, andstabilizing means for stabilizing the direction of said barrel for ballejection when balls of another type are used.3. A compressed air ball projecting machine as in claim 1 wherein saiddiscs have notches adjustably positioned to move said actuating leverselectively once every 360.degree. of rotation of said discs, once every180.degree., and once at 150.degree. and 360.degree. spacing.4. A compressed air ball projecting machine having an ejection barrel toreceive and eject balls, an air supply tank for subjecting a ball in saidbarrel to compressed air to eject said ball from said barrel,moving means for moving said barrel through lateral oscillations as ballsof one type are cyclically ejected from said barrel to vary the directionof ejection of said balls,said moving means comprising a rotating disc,an acutator rod pivotally mounted on said disc at a pivot point spaced fromthe center thereof for circular movement of said rod,a pair of fingers having said rod positioned therebetween for verticalmovement, andan eye bolt positioned between said disc and said fingers and having saidrod extending therethrough,said machine being pivotally mounted and having said eye bolt connectedthereto whereby rotation of said disc causes lateral movement of said eyebolt and thus oscillation of said machine.5. A compressed air ball projecting machine as set forth in claim 4, andstabilizing means for stabilizing the direction of said barrel for ballejection when balls of another type are used.6. A compressed air ball projecting machine as set forth in claim 4 whereinthe eye of said eye bolt is vertically moveable to adjust the range ofoscillation of said machine as desired."}
{"WKU":"039304876","Title":"Heat exchanger tube tool","App_Date":"1973-12-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Georg Gugel","Assignee":"Siemens Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"B65H 2332","References":"3169576;3248515","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A tool for inserting a device into a pressurized-water reactorsteam-generator heat-exchanger tube having an end opening into a chamberhaving an access opening offset from alignment with said tube s end, saidtool comprising a flexible guide tube removably inserted through saidaccess opening and bending to said heat-exchanger tube s end and having aninner end provided with means releasably connecting it with theheat-exchanger tube s end and the guide tube having an outer end, saidguide tube having a length such that said outer end remains outside ofsaid chamber, said guide tube having substantially the same insidediameter as said heat-exchanger tube s inside diameter, a flexibletransport hose sliding inside of said guide tube for transporting saiddevice and having a length substantially longer than the length of saidguide tube and an outside diameter substantially smaller than the latter sinside diameter, and a plurality of anti-friction rolling elements fixedto said transport hose at interspaced positions therealong for bearing onthe inside of this guide tube.2. The tool of claim 1 having means at said guide tube s outer end fordriving said transport hose forwardly and backwardly in said guide tube.3. The tool of claim 1 in which said anti-friction rolling elements areformed by mounts fixed to the outside of said transport hose with eachmount forming a plurality of radially extending arms which are interspacedcircumferentially with respect to the transport hose and rollerstransversely journaled by said arms.4. The tool of claim 3 in which said arms each journals a plurality of saidrollers positioned in tandem.5. The tool of claim 3 in which said mounts are interspaced a distanceranging from one to five times the inside diameter of said guide tube.6. The tool of claim 3 in which each of said mounts between its said radialarms forms longitudinally extending smooth running surfaces.7. The tool of claim 4 in which said guide tube internally has a helicallyribbed shape and the interspacing of said tandem rollers is different fromthe interspacing of mutually adjacent convolutions of said ribs."}
{"WKU":"039304884","Title":"Heating panel for use in explosion-prone furnaces","App_Date":"1974-10-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Janos Wallis;Horst Hammecke","Assignee":"Licencia Talalmanyokat Ertekesito Vallalat;Eltra KG Leicht und Trambauer","ICL_Class":"F24C  304","References":"2963529;3197185;R24296","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A heating panel, particularly for explosion-prone furnaces, comprising aframe of substantially rectangular shape, at least one heating elementsecured to the frame on the inner side thereof, means to supply power tosaid heating element, and at least one rectangular sheet of aluminum foilhaving edges and extending across and surrounded edgewise by the frame onthe outer side of the heating element, whereby said foil blows out underthe effect of substantial overpressure, said foil having a shinyreflective surface on its side adjacent said heating element there being aplurality of said foils in parallel spaced apart relationship in saidframe.2. A heating panel as claimed in claim 1, and heat insulation disposedabout the periphery of said frame.3. A heating panel as claimed in claim 1, said heating element being of theinfra-red type. 94. A heating panel as claimed in claim 1, and a cover plate on the outerside of said panel, said cover plate having at least one orifice therein.5. A heating panel as claimed in claim 4, said at least one orifice beingclosed by a sheet of aluminum foil."}
{"WKU":"039304892","Title":"Heating system","App_Date":"1975-03-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Fred A. Anable","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F24H  300","References":"1519673;1530809;1558848;1966360;2386746;2425630;2789520;2891535","Claims":"I claim:1. In a heating system located in a furnace room and including a furnaceand an air blower for delivering air to the furnace via an inlet stack andheating pipes for the delivery of heated air from the furnace to the areasto be heated, the improvement in means for utilizing the heat passingthrough from the furnace to the chimney by preheating furnace room airwiped therepast preliminary to passage thereof through the air blower andinlet stack to the furnace comprising:an elongated horizontally disposed waste stack of generally rectangularplan for the through flow of exhaust gases from the furnace to the chimneyand including,a first end portion connected at its inboard end to the furnace and havingan outboard end and a first side portion connected at its inboard end tothe outboard end of the first end portion and having an outboard end and asecond end portion connected at its inboard end to the outboard end of thefirst side portion and having an outboard end and a second side portionconnected at its inboard end to the outboard end of the second end portionand having an outboard end connected to the chimney,a first pair of arcuate deflectors disposed in close spaced relationshipand circumadjacent the oppositely facing sections of the spaced first andsecond side portions of the waste stack and defining primary curvilinearair passages therebetween,a horizontally disposed baffle connecting between the arcuate deflectors ofthe first pair thereof,an opened bottom hood including a horizontally disposed top wall sectionand spaced opposite end and side wall sections depending therefrom incurving relationship therewith,the respective top and end and side wall sections of the hood beingdisposed in uniform spaced relationship and in close proximity to theadjacent portions of the waste stack and defining secondary curvilinearair passages therebetween,with air from the furnace room being captured and circulated first withinthe secondary air passages and second within the primary air passages forwiping relationship relative to the side and end portions of the wastestack.2. In the heating system as set forth in claim 1, including,a second pair of arcuate deflectors disposed in spaced relationshipscircumadjacent the oppositely facing sections of the first and second endportions of the waste stack and defining tertiary air passagestherebetween."}
{"WKU":"039304906","Title":"Fireplace heater","App_Date":"1974-03-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Carl O. Lassy;William A. Lassy","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F24B  700","References":"737382;1313085;2052643","Claims":"What is claimed as new is as follows:1. A heater for installation in a fireplace comprising cold air duct meansadapted to be oriented adjacent one lower corner of the fireplace, hot airduct means adapted to be oriented adjacent the other lower corner of thefireplace and adapted to extend from front to rear of the fireplace, aplurality of heat exchange tubes interconnecting the cold air duct meansand the hot air duct means and extending upwardly and transversely andadapted to be disposed in overlying relation to a fire in the fireplace sothat heat from the fire and the products of combustion of the fire willpass over and around the heat exchange tubes for heating air passingtherethrough from the cold air duct means to the hot air duct means, andmeans moving air through the heater from the cold air duct means, throughthe heat exchange tubes to the hot air duct means for discharge of hot airtherefrom, said cold air duct means including twin ducts disposed insuperimposed relation with communicating apertures at the rear thereof forguiding cold air rearwardly in the bottom duct, up through the aperturesinto the top duct, said heat exchange tubes being connected to the topduct for discharge of coldest air from the cold air duct means into theheat exchange tubes that are the hottest, thereby increasing the heatexchange efficiency of the heat exchange tubes.2. The structure as defined in claim 1 wherein each of said heat exchangetubes includes a generally horizontally disposed portion adapted to bedisposed adjacent to and generally parallel with the interior surface ofthe fireplace above and in parallel relation to a fireplace grate on whicha fire may burn, said horizontal portions of the heat exchange tubes beingin alternating vertically staggered position for more efficientimpingement of hot gases and combustion products thereon from a fire andfor more efficient heat exchange between the air passing through the heatexchange tubes and the hot gases and combustion products passing over theexterior surfaces thereof.3. The structure as defined in claim 2 wherein said horizontal portions ofthe heat exchange tubes are of generally oval-shaped configuration withthe major dimension of the oval-shaped configuration adapted to extendfrom front to rear of the fireplace for deflecting hot gases from thehorizontal portions of the lower heat exchange tubes toward the horizontalportions of the upper heat exchange tubes.4. The structure as defined in claim 1 wherein said means for circulatingair through the heater includes a fan assembly associated with the coldair duct means, said fan assembly including a fan and AC/DC motor forpowering the fan from household electric current or an automobile batterywhen electrical power is interrupted.5. The structure as defined in claim 1 wherein said cold air duct meansincludes a damper means adapted to selectively discharge a forced draft ofair into the fireplace adjacent the grate to facilitate the starting of afire and to facilitate burning of wet or uncured wood, or the like.6. The structure as defined in claim 1 together with heat exchange tubesextending horizontally between the duct means and adapted to be disposedadjacent the bottom of a fireplace whereby air passing therethrough willbe heated by live coals thereon and adjacent thereto for a substantialperiod of time after the fire in the fireplace has died down.7. A heater for installation in a fireplace comprising cold air duct meansadapted to be oriented adjacent one lower corner of the fireplace, hot airduct means adapted to be oriented adjacent the other lower corner of thefireplace and adapted to extend from front to rear of the fireplace, aplurality of heat exchange tubes interconnecting the cold air duct meansand the hot air duct means and extending upwardly and transversely andadapted to be disposed in overlying relation to a fire in the fireplace sothat heat from the fire and the products of combustion of the fire willpass over and around the heat exchange tubes for heating air passingtherethrough from the cold air duct means to the hot air duct means, andmeans moving air through the heater from the cold air duct means, throughthe heat exchange tubes to the hot air duct means for discharge of hot airtherefrom, said hot air duct means including twin ducts disposed insuperimposed relation with communicating apertures at the rear thereof andan outlet at the forward end of each duct, a spark arrester in each ductadjacent the forward outlet end thereof, the top hot air duct alsoincluding a baffle whereby air discharged from the heat exchange tubesmust pass rearwardly around the baffle with a portion of the hot air thenpassing forwardly to the outlet therein and the remainder of the hot airpassing through the apertures into the bottom air duct and out the outlet.8. In combination with a fireplace having a generally horizontal bottomwith a supporting grate means thereon for supporting combustible materialabove the bottom, upwardly extending side and rear walls, an open front bywhich the combustible material may be placed in position on the gratemeans for burning and an upwardly extending exhaust chimney means forcombustion products, a heat exchange assembly independent from thefireplace and grate means comprising a cold air duct means positionedalong the bottom of the fireplace adjacent one sidewall thereof andextending from the open front to a point adjacent the rear wall alongsidesaid grate means, a hot air duct means paralleling said cold air ductmeans adjacent the other side wall of the fireplace and positioned alongthe bottom of the fireplace alongside the grate means, a plurality of heatexchange tubes extending generally horizontally above the combustiblematerial on the grate means and below the chimney means, each end of eachtube having a depending portion disposed adjacent the side walls of thefireplace and having their lower ends anchored to and communicated withthe cold and hot air duct means respectively and disposed adjacent thegrate means, means circulating air through the duct means and the heatexchange tubes, said means including cold air inlet means in the cold airduct means adjacent a lower end portion of the open front of the fireplaceand hot air outlet means in the hot air duct means adjacent the otherlower end portion of the open front of the fireplace, said grate meansbeing removable from the fireplace independently of the cold and hot airduct means and independently of the heat exchange tubes, said heatexchange tubes being spaced from each other and disposed substantiallythroughout the top and side walls of the fireplace from the open frontthereof to the rear wall, said hot air outlet means being of a largervolume than the cold air inlet means thereby enabling air to expand in theduct means and heat exchange tubes and to be discharged at a highervolume, each of said air duct means having a substantial portion below thegrate means, one of said duct means including a damper controlleddischarge means on the inner surface thereof below the grate means fordischarging combustion supporting air under the grate means, said cold airinlet means including fan means associated therewith for providing apositive pressure for operating the heat exchange assembly, each of saidair duct means including baffle means to provide a tortuous air paththerethrough, and a plurality of transversely extending tubesinterconnecting the rearmost ends of the cold and hot air duct meansrespectively with such tubes being oriented below the grate means for heatexchange association with coals and hot ashes deposited on the bottom ofthe fireplace from the grate means."}
{"WKU":"039304914","Title":"Combination fireplace and space heater","App_Date":"1975-01-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert B. Miller","Assignee":"Raymond Lee Organization Inc.","ICL_Class":"F24B  700","References":"1571741;2359197","Claims":"I claim:1. A combination fireplace and space heater comprising:A fireplace having a top disposed elongated horizontal hollow mantel, ahearth disposed below and to the rear of said mantel, said hearth havingan open front with closed bottom, closed sides and top, and a chimneycommunicating with the hearth and rising upwards from the top, said mantelhaving a front disposed vertical air intake port at one end and a frontdisposed vertical air exhaust port at the other end;an air intake fan disposed in the mantel to block off the interior of themantel into one section communicating with the air intake port and asecond section communicating with the air exhaust port, said fan drawingair inward through the intake port and discharging air;a thermally conductive hollow pipe secured at one end to said fan andreceiving said discharged air, said pipe extending rearwardly from the fanand downwardly from the mantel into the hearth, then looping backwardlyand forwardly in a horizontal plane below the top of the hearth, thenrising upwardly and forwardly into the second section of the mantel toconvey the discharged air via the opposite open end of the pipe into thesecond section and out of the exhaust port, said air being heated while inthe pipe when a fire burns in the hearth.2. The device of claim 1 wherein said pipe is made of copper."}
{"WKU":"039304922","Title":"Air-noncontact type blood sampling assembly","App_Date":"1974-08-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Norio Hatsuno;Tooru Sekiguchi","Assignee":"Jintan Terumo Company, Ltd.","ICL_Class":"A61B  514;A61M  5315","References":"1718605;2745403;2869541;3200813;3336924;3527216;3753432","Claims":"What we claim is:1. An air-noncontact type blood sampling assembly for collecting arterialblood directly from an arterial blood vessel through a needle withoutentrainment of ambient air which comprises in combination:A. a sampling container for containing arterial blood including:"}
{"WKU":"039304930","Title":"Intravascular liquid velocity sensing method using a polarographic","App_Date":"1974-10-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Donald E. Williamson","Assignee":"Cordis Corporation","ICL_Class":"A61B  502","References":"1411796;3242729;3450984","Claims":"Having thus described my invention I claim and desire to secure by LettersPatent:1. The method of measuring the flow rate of an intravascular aqueous liquidcontaining dissolved oxygen comprising contacting said liquid with apolarographic cathode having a surface area greater than 8 squaremillimeters and with a reference anode, applying between said cathode andsaid anode a fixed, predetermined d.c. voltage corresponding to thecharacteristic plateau current of said liquid, said voltage being in theorder of 0.4-0.9 volts and, while maintaining said predetermined voltage,measuring the current passing between said anode and said cathode, saidcurrent being variable as a function of the rate of flow of said liquidover a substantial range due to the substantial electrode area availableto produce depletion in the adjacent volume of said liquid."}
{"WKU":"039304949","Title":"Method and apparatus for the indirect measurement of blood pressure","App_Date":"1971-09-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Alan H. Maurer;John J. Swana;Richard F. Vanderpool","Assignee":"General Electric Company","ICL_Class":"A61B  502","References":"3085567;3318303;3450131","Claims":"We claim:1. In a process for automatically measuring the blood pressure of a personcomprised of inflating a blood pressure cuff to a pressure above the pointin which the radial pulse disappears; releasing the pressure at asubstantially linear rate of from 2-3 mm Hg/sec.; sensing the pressureexerted by the cuff and converting this to a first electrical signal; andsensing the Korotkoff sounds and converting this to an amplified secondelectrical signal, wherein the improvement comprises:filtering the second signal to provide a passband with a low frequencycutoff of no less than 45 Hz with a sharp cutoff slope and a highfrequency cutoff of no less than 100 Hz with a gradual slope; andindicating said first and second signals.2. A process as in claim 1 wherein the low frequency cutoff is of no lessthan 50 Hz with a sharp slope.3. A process as in claim 2 wherein the slope of the low frequency cutoff isno less than 42 db/octave.4. A process as in claim 3 wherein the high frequency cutoff of thefiltering step is 160 Hz with a slope of at least 6 db/octave.5. A process as in claim 1 wherein the high frequency cutoff is no lessthan 160 Hz with a gradual cutoff slope.6. A process as in claim 1 including the step of summing said first andsecond signals to form a composite signal before providing indicationthereof.7. An apparatus for automatically measuring the blood pressure of a personcomprised of an inflatable blood pressure cuff, means for measuring thepressure in the cuff and converting it to a first electrical signal, andmeans for sensing the Korotkoff sounds and converting it to a secondelectrical signal, the improvement comprising:means for filtering said second signal, said means have a low frequencycutoff of no less than 45 Hz with a sharp cutoff slope and have a highfrequency cutoff of no less than 100 Hz with a gradual cutoff slope; andmeans for providing indication of said first signal and said filteredsecond signal.8. An apparatus for automatically measuring the blood pressure of a personcomprised of an inflatable blood pressure cuff, means for measuring thepressure in the cuff and converting it to a first electrical signal, andmeans for sensing the Korotkoff sounds and converting it to a secondelectrical signal, the improvement comprising:means for filtering said second signal, said means have a low frequencycutoff of 50 Hz with a cutoff slope of no less than 42 db/octave and havemeans for providing indication of said first signal and said filteredsecond signal.9. An apparatus for automatically measuring the blood pressure of a personcomprised of an inflatable blood pressure cuff, means for measuring onepressure in the cuff and converting it to a first electrical signal, andmeans for sensing the Korotkoff sounds and converting it to a secondelectrical signal, the improvement comprising:means for filtering said second signal, said means have a low frequencycutoff of no less than 45 Hz with a sharp cutoff slopemeans for providing indication of said first signal and said filteredsecond signal andpulse shaping means connected to the output of said filtering means foremphasizing the change in signal strength due to the muffling of saidsecond signal associated with Phase IV of the Korotkoff sounds."}
{"WKU":"039304957","Title":"Invalid exercising device","App_Date":"1974-08-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Michael Marino, Jr.","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A61H  102","References":"1820372;2020992;3213852;3540435;3572699","Claims":"I claim:1. A paraplegic exercising device comprising:a. frame means having hub portions at both of its ends adapted to receiverotating sprocket means;b. first sprocket means rotatably mounted in one of the hub portions ofsaid frame means;c. second sprocket means rotatably mounted in the opposite hub portion ofsaid frame means and adapted to receive the feet of a paraplegic to beadministered physical therapy;d. sprocket connecting means operably connecting said first and secondsprocket means together whereby rotation of one sprocket causes the othersprocket to rotate; ande. clamping means operably attached to the end of said frame means providedwith said second sprocket means adapted for connection to the feet of aparaplegic to receive physical therapy, said clamping means being furtherdefined in that it is adapted to fit and rest upon the edge of a bed inwhich the paraplegic is positioned in alignment with said second sprocketmeans.2. The paraplegic exercising device of claim 1 further characterized ascomprising:f. auxiliary power means operably connected to said sprocket connectingmeans.3. the paraplegic exercising means of claim 2 further characterized ascomprising:g. seat means operably affixed to said frame means in upper alignment withsaid lower sprocket means.4. The paraplegic exercising device of claim 3 further characterized ascomprising:h. hand grip means operably attached to said frame means and extending inclose proximity to said seat means whereby an operator seated upon saidseat means in position for rotation of said first sprocket means by hisfeet can hold onto said hand grip means to stabilize his position."}
{"WKU":"039304965","Title":"Cast for broken limbs and method","App_Date":"1974-11-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Delamar J. Gibbons","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A61F  504","References":"3373741;3631854;3643656;3656475;3674021","Claims":"What is claimed and desired to be secured by United States Letters Patentis:1. A cast for injured limbs comprising:spaced generally concentric elongated sleeves, the axis of which isparallel to the limb of the patient upon which it is to be used, of pliantimpervious resinous material defining a hollow space between the sleeves;porous reinforcing material disposed within said space and comprising theonly substance between the sleeves, said reinforcing material carrying aresin activating substance;at least one resin ingress port in the outer sleeve whereby inactive resinis injected into said space and caused to be activated and polymerized byintermingling the inactive resin with said activating substance toultimately form a resilient shape-retaining cast the exterior of whichcomprises said sleeve and the interior of which consists of polymerizedresin and said reinforcing material.2. A cast according to claim 1 further comprising means sealing opposedends of the cast intermediate the concentric sleeves.3. A cast according to claim 1 wherein said porous reinforcing materialcomprises a batt of fibers initially cylindrically generallyconcentrically disposed within the space between said sleeves.4. A cast according to claim 3 wherein the initial generally concentricrelationship between the sleeves and the batt of reinforcement is achievedby spacers.5. A cast according to claim 1 further comprising skin breather ports foraerating the skin of the patient disposed between the ends of said castand spanning transversely through and between both sleeves and meanssealing said sleeves one to another at each said skin breather port.6. A method of placing a cast upon an injured limb comprising the steps of:providing a pair of generally concentric elongated sleeves secured one tothe other at opposed ends, the sleeves comprising pliant imperviousresinous material whereby a space is defined between the concentricsleeves the axis of which is essentially coextensive with the limb of thepatient upon which it is placed, the space having porous reinforcingmaterial only disposed therein which carries a resin activating substance;displacing inactive resin through an ingress port in the outer sleeve and aportion thereof across the porous reinforcing material into contiguousrelation with the inside sleeve to substantially fill the space betweensaid sleeves;manually causing intermingling between said displaced inactive resin andsaid activating substance to cause activation and initiate polymerizationof the resin within the space between said sleeves;axial displacing the resin filled sleeves upon the injured limb duringpolymerization before the resin has set;thereafter applying external pressure to the resin filled sleeves upon theinjured limb to bring the cast into contiguous conformity with theexterior of the injured limb and retaining said pressure until the resinwithin the sleeve has adequately set and cured so as to constitute aresilient shape retaining cast; andremoving said pressure.7. A method according to claim 6 wherein said resin displacing stepcomprises injecting the resin through a filler port in the outer sleeve.8. A method according to claim 6 wherein said external pressure is appliedby wrapping the cast with a yieldable bandage to cause said contiguousconformity.9. A method according to claim 6 wherein said intermingling step comprisesmanually kneading the cast through the outer sleeve."}
{"WKU":"039304973","Title":"Surgical drape and system incorporating it","App_Date":"1974-12-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kay E. Krebs;Marion T. Arps","Assignee":"Kimberly-Clark Corporation","ICL_Class":"A61F 1300","References":"3030957;3263680;3669106;3791381;3835851","Claims":"We claim:1. Surgical drape comprisinga. a base sheet formed of liquid repellent nonwoven fabric material, saidbase sheet having a top surface and a bottom surface for contacting apatient and having a generally U-shaped fenestration along a portionthereof to form tails;b. a continuous layer of normally tacky pressure-sensitive adhesive on thebottom of said base sheet adjacent the closed end of said U-shapedfenestration; and extending adjacent the fenestration sides at least halfway to the opened end of said fenestration;c. releasable cover means protecting said adhesive adjacent the sides ofsaid fenestration; andd. separate releasable cover means protecting said adhesive at the closedend of said fenestration,"}
{"WKU":"039304981","Title":"Anti-adherent medical dressings and the like","App_Date":"1973-03-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Andre Monnet;Maurice Cessiecq","Assignee":"Products Chimiques Ugine Kuhlmann","ICL_Class":"A61B 1900;A61L 1500","References":"2477403;3426754;3686725;3709221","Claims":"We claim:1. Anti-adherent materials for coming into contact with the epidermis suchas sheets, surgical dressings, various kinds of bandages and the likewhich comprise a homopolymer or copolymer of tetrafluoroethylenecontaining at least about 50% tetrafluoroethylene deposited upon a supportmaterial which is resistant to the fritting temperature of the homopolymeror copolymer, said anti-adherent materials containing from about 25 to 90%homopolymer or copolymer and from 10 to 75% support material andpossessing regularly disposed perforations comprising about 0.1 to 10% ofthe surface.2. Anti-adherent medical dressings according to claim 1 wherein the supportmaterial is made of glass fiber.3. Anti-adherent medical dressings according to claim 1 made up of twolayers of superimposed support material such that the perforations areinterposed in a regular manner.4. Anti-adherent medical dressings according to claim 1 disposed upon anabsorptive substrate.5. A method for contacting epidermis with anti-adherent materials such assheets, surgical dressings, various kinds of bandages and the like whichcomprises contacting epidermis with a homopolymer or copolymer oftetrafluoroethylene containing at least about 50% tetrafluoroethylenedeposited upon a support material which is resistant to the frittingtemperature of the homopolymer or copolymer, said anti-adherent materialcontaining from about 25 to 90% homopolymer or copolymer and from 10 to75% support material and possessing regularly disposed perforationscomprising about 0.1 to 10% of the surface."}
{"WKU":"039304990","Title":"Hypodermic syringe with parts disposable after use","App_Date":"1974-05-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Henri Rimbaud","Assignee":"Laboratoire S P A D","ICL_Class":"A61M  500","References":"2728341;2847996;2869542;3084688;3110309;3433216;3677247;3742948;3820652","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A syringe comprising a syringe body delivered sterile ready for use tobe discarded after a single usage, said syringe body having one extremitywith connection means thereat for attachment to a syringe head, a needlemounted at the opposite extremity of said body, said needle extendingpartially into the interior of the body and partially externally thereof,said syringe body being delivered in combination with a cartridge ofinjectible fluid frictionally held in said body and including at oneextremity thereof a closure non-slidably fitted in said cartridge andplaced in facing relation with the part of the needle extending into theinterior of the body, said cartridge including, at the other extremitythereof, a piston which is slidable in the cartridge, a removable casemounted on the body and covering a portion thereof and the externallyextending portion of the needle while leaving said connection meansexposed, means coupling said case and body for common rotation, and adetachable support mounted on the case and covering the rest of said body,said support being separable from the case and thus disengaged from theconnection means.2. The combination as claimed in claim 1 wherein said opposite extremity ofsaid syringe body is provided with an aperture separate from said needle.3. The combination as claimed in claim 1 wherein said cartridge comprises atube of constant section fitted with said piston in fluid-tight relation,said closure at the opposite end comprising a plug of elastic materialincluding a first part fitting into the interior of the tube and a secondpart external to the tube and having an external dimension greater thanthe internal dimension of the syringe body so that the plug exerts africtional force against the internal face of the syringe body and opposesfree sliding of the cartridge in the body.4. The combination as claimed in claim 3 wherein said first part of theplug fitted into the interior of the tube of the cartridge has thin wallssuch that said first part is deformed elastically by the pressure of theliquid in the course of injection.5. The combination as claimed in claim 4 wherein said plug has a blindcavity which opens at the exterior extreme face of said second part ofsaid plug and which extends inside said first part of the plug.6. The combination comprisinga syringe head adapted to be retained by the user for permanent use withoutsterilization,a syringe body delivered in sterile state to the user said syringe headincluding at one extremity thereof connection means for attachment to saidsyringe body, said syringe body having at one extremity thereof means forcomplementary connection to the connection means of the syringe head, saidsyringe body being furnished to the user for attachment to the syringehead and comprising before its fixation to said syringe head, an injectionneedle situated at the extremity opposite to that of the complimentaryconnection means, said needle extending partially into the interior of thebody and partially externally thereof, a cartridge of injectible fluidfrictionally mounted in said body and having at one extremity thereof aclosure non-slidably fitted in said cartridge and placed in facingrelation with the part of the needle extending into the interior of thebody, said cartridge including, at the other extremity thereof, a pistonslidably mounted in the cartridge,a removable case mounted on the body and covering one portion thereof andthe externally extending portion of the needle while leaving saidcomplimentary connection means exposed,means coupling said body and case and permitting manual manipulation of thecase, without contact of the fingers of the user with said body, saidcartridge and said needle, for assembly of the complimentary connectionmeans of said syringe body with the connection means of said syringe head,and a detachable support mounted on the case and covering the rest of saidsyringe body, said support being separable from the case thus exposing thecomplimentary connection means for successive attachment of sterilesyringe bodies with the same syringe head."}
{"WKU":"039305007","Title":"Pharmaceutical single-dose container for the eye","App_Date":"1973-03-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Klaus Mohrke;Heinrich Eggert;Helmut Franz;Dieter Jarsen","Assignee":"Boehringer Ingelheim GmbH","ICL_Class":"A61M  700","References":"1438487;2044327;2293952;2397051;2648463;2847010;3094269;3255925;3797493","Claims":"We claim:1. A pharmaceutical single-dose container adapted for applying the contentsthereof to an eye, said container having been formed by placing two foilsface-to-face, positioning an elongate flexible closure member therebetween, and joining and sealing together the edges of said foils by aseam to form a container wall, said seam serving to secure and seal saidclosure member in the container wall, said closure member extendingthrough the wall of the container and sealed therein with part of saidclosure member extending outwardly of the container, said part beingengageable by hand to permit the closure member to be pulled out of thecontainer wall to provide a discharge opening through which the contentsof the container can be discharged, said seam being widened to seal saidoutwardly extending part of said closure member therein, said foils beingeach provided with looped portions extending from one side of said closuremember to the opposite side, the looped portions being bendable topositions in which they define a supporting frame for positioning aroundan eye.2. A container of claim 1 adapted for applying said contents to an eye,wherein said looped portions are dimensioned so that they are bent awayfrom each other about their points of connection at said seam.3. A container of claim 1 adapted for applying said contents to an eye,wherein each looped portion is embossed to provide a central ridge forproviding rigidity to said looped portions."}
{"WKU":"039305015","Title":"Disposable diaper with end flap means and method","App_Date":"1974-05-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Charles H. Schaar","Assignee":"Colgate-Palmolive Company","ICL_Class":"A61F 1316","References":"3402715;3520303;3646937;3650273;3710797;3729005;3731688;3774610;3816227","Claims":"I claim:1. A disposable diaper, comprising: an absorbent pad, a fluid imperviousbacking sheet defining a back surface of the diaper, a front surface, aplurality of longitudinally extending folds defining a box-pleatconfiguration of the diaper, a pleated end flap of the box-pleat diaperadjacent one end of the diaper, said pleated flap being folded over thefront surface of the diaper, and means for retaining at least a portion ofthe flap against the underlying front surface of the box-pleat diaper.2. The diaper of claim 1 wherein said end flap includes a portion of saidbacking sheet.3. The diaper of claim 2 wherein said backing sheet extends to an end edgeof the diaper in said end flap.4. The diaper of claim 2 wherein the backing sheet in the folded over endflap overlies a portion of the absorbent pad.5. The diaper of claim 1 wherein said end flap includes a portion of theabsorbent pad.6. The diaper of claim 1 wherein the box-pleat diaper has a pair of pleatsbeing spaced apart in the lateral central portion of the diaper, a portionof said end flap is spaced from the underlying front surface of the diaperprior to laterally unfolding the associated end of the pleated diaper, andthe retaining means comprises means for securing a central portion of theend flap to the underlying front surface of the diaper intermediate saidpleats.7. The diaper of claim 6 wherein the retaining means further comprisesmeans for securing an outermost section of said pleats in said end flap tothe underlying front surface of said pleats.8. The diaper of claim 1 wherein the box-pleat diaper has a pair of pleats,a portion of said end flap is spaced from the underlying front surface ofthe diaper prior to laterally unfolding the associated end of the pleateddiaper, and the retaining means comprises means for securing the outermostsection of the pleats in said end flap to the underlying front surface ofsaid pleats.9. The diaper of claim 8 wherein the securing means comprises a pair oftape fasteners for use in placing the diaper on an infant, said fastenerssecuring the outermost section of the pleats in the end flap to theunderlying front surface of the pleats.10. The diaper of claim 1 wherein said retaining means comprises adhesiveintermediate the front surface of the flap and the underlying frontsurface of the diaper.11. The diaper of claim 1 wherein said retaining means comprises a heatseal securing the front surface of the end flap to the underlying frontsurface of the diaper.12. The diaper of claim 1 including a second end flap of the box-pleatdiaper adjacent the other end of the diaper, said second end flap beingfolded over the front surface of the diaper, and means for retaining atleast a portion of the second end flap against the underlying frontsurface of the diaper.13. A disposable diaper, comprising: an absorbent pad, a fluid imperviousbacking sheet, a pair of side edges, a pair of end edges connecting theside edges, with said backing sheet extending to at least one end edge ofthe diaper, a front surface, a box-pleat fold of the diaper defining alongitudinally extending central panel, a pair of first pleat panelsextending from and overlying the central panel, and a pair of second pleatpanels extending from and overlying the first pleat panels, and endsection of the diaper including flap means adjacent said one end edge ofthe diaper having its front surface folded against the front surface of aninner adjacent portion of the diaper relative said one end edge, and meansfor securing a lateral region of the flap means to the front surface ofsaid adjacent portion of the diaper, with a second lateral region of theend section being free of attachment from the diaper.14. The diaper of claim 13 wherein said absorbent pad is spaced from saidone end edge of the diaper, and said flap means covers at least a portionof said pad.15. The diaper of claim 13 wherein said flap means includes a portion ofsaid absorbent pad.16. The diaper of claim 13 including a fluid impervious top sheet defininga substantial portion of the front surface of the diaper.17. The diaper of claim 16 wherein said top sheet extends to said one endedge.18. The diaper of claim 13, including a covering sheet overlying thebacking sheet and defining a pocket between the covering and backingsheets, said pocket being open along a substantial portion of said one endedge and closed along said side edges and the other of said end edges.19. The diaper of claim 13 wherein said flap means comprises an end portionof said central panel having its front surface folded against the frontsurface of a portion of the central panel adjacent said end portion.20. The diaper of claim 13 wherein said flap means comprises end portionsof said first pleat panels having their front surfaces folded againstfront surface portions of the respective first pleat panels adjacent saidend portions.21. The diaper of claim 13 wherein said flap means comprises end portionsof said central, first pleat, and second pleat panels, said panels havingtheir front surfaces folded against portions of the respective central,first pleat, and second pleat panels adjacent said end portions.22. The diaper of claim 21 wherein the securing means comprises the pleatsof the box-pleat diaper.23. The diaper of claim 13 wherein said flap means comprises an end sectionof the box-pleat diaper adjacent said one end edge defined by a lateralfold line in the diaper, said end section having its front surface foldedagainst the front surface of the box-pleat diaper adjacent the endsection.24. The diaper of claim 23 wherein said lateral fold line is locatedadjacent an end edge of the absorbent pad.25. The diaper of claim 23 wherein said securing means secures the secondpleat panels in said end section to the underlying front surface of saidsecond pleat panels.26. The diaper of claim 25 wherein said securing means is located at leastadjacent the side edges of said diaper.27. The diaper of claim 25 wherein the securing means comprises a pair oftape fasteners adjacent the side edges of the diaper for use in placingthe diaper on an infant.28. The diaper of claim 27 wherein each of said tape fasteners include arelease sheet retaining the front surface of the second pleat panels inthe end section to the underlying front surface of the second pleatpanels.29. The diaper of claim 27 wherein each of said tape fasteners include atape strip retaining the front surface of the second pleat panels in theend section to the underlying front surface of the second pleat panels.30. The diaper of claim 23 wherein the pleats in the diaper are spacedapart above said central panel, a portion of said end section is spacedfrom the underlying front surface of the diaper prior to laterallyunfolding the pleated diaper, and said securing means secures the centralpanel in said end section to the front surface of the underlying centralpanel intermediate said pleats.31. The diaper of claim 30 wherein said securing means further secures thesecond pleat panels in the end section to the underlying front surface ofsaid second pleat panels.32. The diaper of claim 23 wherein said securing means comprises adhesiveintermediate the front surface of the end section and the underlying frontsurface of the diaper.33. A disposable diaper, comprising: an absorbent pad having a pair of endedges, a backing sheet having a portion extending past at least one endedge of said absorbent pad, a front surface, a plurality of folds defininga pleated configuration of the diaper, an end section of the extendingportion of said backing sheet, said end section having at least a portionof its front surface folded against the front surface of the diaperadjacent the end section after formation of the pleat with said endsection overlying at least a portion of the pleat, and means for retaininga portion of the end section against the front surface of the diaperunderlying the end section.34. The diaper of claim 33 wherein said end section is folded along alateral fold line adjacent said one end edge of the absorbent pad.35. A method of making a disposable diaper, comprising the steps of:folding a flat diaper having a fluid impervious backing sheet into abox-pleat configuration;folding an end section of the box-pleat diaper including a portion of thebacking sheet over the top of the diaper with a front surface of the endsection facing the front surface of the diaper adjacent the end section;andsecuring at least a portion of the end section to the front surface of thediaper adjacent said end section.36. The method of claim 35 wherein said securing step includes the step ofapplying adhesive to the front surface of the diaper adjacent a fold linefor the end section before the end section folding step.37. The method of claim 36 wherein said securing step includes the step ofpressing the folded end section against the diaper adjacent said endsection.38. The method of claim 35 wherein said securing step comprises heatsealing a portion of the front surface of the end section to the frontsurface of the diaper adjacent the end section.39. A disposable diaper, comprising: absorbent pad means, a front surface,a back surface, a plurality of longitudinally extending folds defining abox-pleat configuration of the diaper, and means for releasably retainingan end of the diaper in its box-pleat configuration prior to unfolding theend during placement of the diaper on an infant, the retaining meanscomprising a folded end flap of the box-pleat diaper adjacent said end ofthe diaper restraining and connecting the pleats.40. The diaper of claim 39 wherein said flap is transversely folded overthe front surface of the diaper, and including means for securing at leasta portion of the flap against the underlying front surface of thebox-pleat diaper.41. The diaper of claim 40 wherein the box-pleat diaper has a pair ofpleats, and the securing means secures an outermost section of said pleatsin said end flap to the underlying front surface of said pleats.42. A disposable diaper, comprising: an absorbent pad assembly having abacking sheet defining a back surface of the pad assembly and extending toan end edge of the assembly, a longitudinally extending central panelopposed laterally movable longitudinally extending panel means overlyingthe central panel, and an end section of the pad assembly, including thebacking sheet adjacent said end edge, having a fold defining a portionoverlying said diaper, with a first lateral region of the end sectionbeing secured to the diaper, and with a second lateral region of the endsection being free of attachment from the diaper.43. The diaper of claim 42 wherein said end section overlies said flapmeans, and including means for securing a portion of the surfacesintermediate the end section and flap means together.44. A disposable diaper, comprising: absorbent pad means having front andback waistline portions and pleat means adjacent opposed lateral sides ofthe diaper, fastening means on one of said waistline portions for securingsaid one waistline portion to the other waistline portion during placementof the diaper, and means for releasably retaining the pleat means in theother waistline portion in a pleated configuration while passing the otherwaistline portion between the infant s legs during placement of thediaper.45. The diaper of claim 44 wherein said fastening means comprises a pair oftape fasteners having one end fixedly attached only to said back waistlineportion."}
{"WKU":"039305023","Title":"Disposable diaper with a tape closure system having a double-folded tab","App_Date":"1974-11-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ludwig Tritsch","Assignee":"Johnson & Johnson","ICL_Class":"A61F 1316","References":"3646937;3810472;3840013;3848594;3875621","Claims":"I claim:1. In combination with a disposable diaper having an inside surface fordirection toward an infant when the diaper is worn by that infant and anoutside surface for direction away from said infant and provided with amoisture-retaining layer and a moisture-impervious backing sheet, animproved adhesive tab having a fixed end secured to said backing sheet onsaid outside surface of the diaper and at a marginal location thereof, anda means for providing a shielding and gripping portion including a freeend longer than the fixed end and provided with a tacky surface facing inthe same direction as said inside surface, and a cover strip provided witha release coating on one surface thereof, releasably attached to, andcovering said tacky surface from its outer end toward said marginallocation;said cover strip extending free of and longitudinally beyond said tackysurface to provide a grip tab means; said free end together with saidcover strip forming a creasable laminate; andsaid laminate being folded back over said fixed end and being furtherfolded over on itself.2. The combination in accordance with claim 1 wherein the adhesive tab isfolded in an S-fold, and wherein the cover strip extends beyond said tackysurface towards said fixed end of the tab and is folded back over thedistal portion of said free end.3. The combination in accordance with claim 1 wherein the adhesive tab isfolded in a collapsed spiral configuration, and wherein the cover stripextends beyond said tacky surface towards said fixed end of the tab and isfolded back on itself."}
{"WKU":"039305031","Title":"Disposable diaper with tab fastener means having an integral release","App_Date":"1974-11-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ludwig Tritsch","Assignee":"Johnson & Johnson","ICL_Class":"A41B 1302;A61F 1316;A43C 1100","References":"3642001;3810472;3848594;3875621","Claims":"I claim:1. In combination with a disposable diaper of substantially quadrilateralconfiguration, having an inside surface for direction toward an infantwhen the diaper is worn by that infant and an outside surface fordirection away from said infant and including a thin, flexible backingsheet of substantially moisture-impermeable material and a moistureretaining layer having a pad of absorbent material superposed on saidbacking sheet and attached thereto, a fastening tab means of substantiallyuniform width and comprising a pair of terminal portions and a flexiblecentral segment connecting the terminal portions; one of said terminalportions being attached to said backing sheet and having anoutwardly-facing release surface, the other free terminal portion bearinga layer of pressure-sensitive adhesive for attachment to the outsidesurface of the diaper when the diaper is applied to the infant and beingadapted for removable attachment to said release surface by means of theadhesive layer thereon, and said central segment being longer than saidfree terminal portion and forming a finger-receiving loop when said freeterminal portion is removably attached to said release surface; saidrelease surface on the attached terminal portion and said adhesive layeron the free terminal portion being situated on opposite sides of saidfastening tab means.2. The combination in accordance with claim 1 wherein said central segmentis at least about 1.5 times as long as said free terminal portion.3. The combination in accordance with claim 1 wherein said terminal portionis adhesively attached to said backing sheet.4. The combination in accordance with claim 1 wherein said central segmentis folded back against the diaper outside surface and wherein said freeterminal portion is folded back against the central segment so that theadhesive layer on said free terminal portion is in juxtaposition with andreleasably attached to said release surface.5. The combination in accordance with claim 1 wherein said central segmentis an extensible elastic material which is more stretchable than saidterminal portions."}
{"WKU":"039305040","Title":"Portable light coagulator","App_Date":"1973-12-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hughes de Laforcade","Assignee":"Clinitex, Inc.","ICL_Class":"A61B 1736;G02B  300","References":"3084694;3164058;3327712;3417754;3547125;3702395;3783874","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A light coagulator comprising in combination an arc-lamp parallel lightbeam source, a first lens for focusing at least a portion of the lightinto a beam of light converging toward a focal point and then diverging,an adjustable aperture diaphragm situated at said focal point forpermitting adjustment of the size of the image field in the desired targetarea, a second lens situated in the path of the diverging light beam fordirecting said diverging beam into a parallel light beam and a rotatablemirror positioned in the path of said parallel beam, for reflecting saidbeam to a target area, said mirror having an aperture therethrough forobservation of the target area wherein said light source is a lamp backedby a rotationally symetric concave reflector which directs the lightforward in a parallel beam toward said first lens, and wherein an aperturediaphragm is positioned between said light source and said first lens tocontrol the size of the light passing through siad first and secondlenses.2. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said rotationally symetric concavereflector is a paraboloid reflector.3. The system of claim 1 wherein said light source is a Xenon arc lamp at arated power of at least 150 watts backed by a paraboloid reflector.4. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said focal point is situated betweensaid first and second lenses, the lenses being situated so that theirfocal points coincide.5. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said mirror is situated to direct saidparallel light beam to a portion of an eye.6. The aperture of claim 1 wherein said mirror has an observation aperturetherethrough and a light filter positionable over said aperture to protectthe eye of the observer.7. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said aperture diaphram is an adjustableaperture diaphragm.8. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said second lens is of smaller radiusof curvature than said first lens to form a resultant parallel light beamthat is increased in intensity and reduced in diameter to pass through thepupil of the eye.9. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein means are provided to adjust the lightoutput intensity of said light source and said light source has a shutterto cut off said light beam.10. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said focal point is situated betweensaid first and second lenses, said mirror has an observation aperturetherethrough, a first light diaphragm is positioned between said lightsource and said first lens and a second light diaphragm is positionedproximate said focal point.11. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said first and second lenses arecoated achromat lenses and said apparatus is portable."}
{"WKU":"039305058","Title":"Surgical apparatus for removal of tissue","App_Date":"1974-12-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Mark Wallach","Assignee":"Hydro Pulse Corporation","ICL_Class":"A61B 1732;A61M  100","References":"3589363;3812855;3818913","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An apparatus for disintegrating and removing animal tissue from apreselected enclosed area comprising a hand manipulatable first tubehaving a distally disposed outlet port, a liquid pulsating pump having aninlet and an outlet, a source of liquid connected to said pump inlet,means including a flexible conduit connecting said first tube to said pumpoutlet, a suction conduit including an outlet port disposed proximate saidfirst tube outlet port, a source of suction, and means including aflexible conduit connecting said suction conduit to said source ofsuction, said pump providing a stream of pulsating liquid through saidfirst tube outlet port at a frequency between 1/4 to 333 pulses persecond, at a pressure about atmospheric pressure of about 15 to about3,500 p.s.i. and having a velocity of between 50 and 500 feet per second.2. The apparatus of claim 1 including control means for supplying liquid atabove atmospheric pressure to the suction line in response to the suctionsource being removed from the suction line.3. The apparatus of claim 2 and wherein said control means includessensitivity input means for selecting a predetermined level of suction,transducer means providing an output responsive to the pressure in saidsuction conduit, level comparison means for comparing the transduceroutput with said predetermined level of suction and producing a controlsignal when said transducer output falls below said predetermined level,and motor control means coupled to said source of suction and responsiveto said control signal for stopping said source of suction andintroducting a pressure flow into said suction conduit.4. The apparatus of claim 3 wherein said motor control means includes motormeans for driving said source of suction, and a reversing switch meanscoupled between said motor means and said level comparison means forreversing the operation of said motor means in response to said controlsignal, whereby said source of suction provides a pressure flow into saidsuction conduit.5. The apparatus of claim 4 and wherein said control means further includesduration input means for selecting a predetermined interval during whichsaid motor means is operated, counter means controlled by said reversingswitch means and coupled to said motor means for counting the intervalduring which said motor means operates in reverse, and interval comparisonmeans for producing a duration output signal when the interval counted bysaid counter means reaches said predetermined interval, said durationoutput signal being coupled to said reversing switch means for returningsaid motor means to forward operation.6. The apparatus of claim 4 and including manual switch means coupled tosaid reversing switch means for manually reversing the operation of saidmotor means.7. The apparatus of claim 4 including an irrigation tube having at leastone outlet port disposed proximate said first tube outlet port, a sourceof drainage fluid and interconnecting means including a flexible conduitconnecting said irrigating tube to said source of drainage fluid.8. The apparatus of claim 7 and wherein said irrigation tube extendssomewhat less than the full length of said first tube.9. The apparatus of claim 7 and wherein said interconnecting means includesan irrigation pump means for pumping said drainage fluid from said sourceof drainage fluid through said drainage tube, and wherein said controlmeans includes interlocking means interconnecting said irrigation pumpmeans with said reversing switch means whereby when said reversing switchmeans respond to said control signal said irrigating pump means isstopped.10. The apparatus as in claim 2 and wherein said control means includeslimit input means for selecting a limit level of suction, transducer meansproviding an output responsive to the pressure in said suction conduit,limit level comparison means for comparing the transducer output with saidpredetermined limit level and producing a control signal when saidtransducer output gets above said limit level and motor control meanscoupled to said source of suction and responsive to said control signalfor stopping said source of suction.11. The apparatus of claim 1 and wherein said source of suction includes anevacuation pump, a motor controlling said evacuation pump, an oscillatorsupplying said motor, and speed control means coupled to said oscillatorand capable of being preset in accordance with a desired speed of motoroperation.12. The apparatus of claim 5 including evacuation control means coupledbetween said counter means and said motor means permitting said counter tocount the interval during which said motor means operates in a forwarddirection, said predetermined interval preset on said duration input meansrepresenting a forward interval, and further including turn-off switchmeans interconnecting said interval comparison means with said motor meansfor turning off said motor means when said forward interval counted equalssaid predetermined interval.13. The apparatus of claim 1 and including auxiliary means for introducingsalt crystals into the pulsating liquid flowing out of the first tubeoutlet port.14. The apparatus of claim 13 and wherein said auxiliary means includes acontainer having an input end for inserting therein salt crystals, and anoutput port, said container being in a coaxial position with respect tosaid first tube, the output port of said container being spaced from theoutput port of said first tube in the direction of flow of the pulsatingliquid, whereby as liquid is pumped from said first tube outlet port, saltcrystals will be drawn into said liquid.15. The apparatus of claim 14 and wherein the shape of said container isconical with its narrow end being adjacent the output port thereof.16. The apparatus of claim 13 and wherein said auxiliary means includes anauxiliary tube having an outlet port disposed proximate said first tubeoutlet port, the axis of said auxiliary tube lying in a plane generallyperpendicular to the axis of said first tube outlet port, said auxiliarymeans further including a source of crystal salt, and interconnectingmeans including a flexible conduit conecting said auxiliary tube to saidsource crystal of salt.17. The apparatus of claim 16 and wherein said interconnecting meansfurther includes valve means coupled to said flexible conduit to regulatethe passage of salt therethrough, said valve means being electricalinterconnected with said liquid pulsating pump, whereby a unit of salt isemitted from said auxiliary tube corresponding to each pulse of liquidflowing from said first tube.18. The apparatus of claim 2 and including a second pump, an auxiliaryflexible conduit connected to said second pump, joining means forming a Yjoint which interconnects said suction conduit with its respectiveflexible conduit and with said auxiliary flexible conduit, and whereinsaid control means includes means responsive to a change in pressure insaid suction conduit for stopping operation of said source of suction andcommencing operation of said second pump.19. The apparatus of claim 18 and wherein said control means includes valvemeans for blocking the auxiliary flexible conduit when said source ofsuction is operating and blocking the flexible conduit connected to saidsource of suction when said second pump is operating.20. The method of disintegrating and removing animal tissue from apreselected enclosed area with a nozzle having a working tip comprisingthe steps of:a. generating a stream of liquid pulses leaving the nozzle having afrequency of about 1/4 to about 333 pulses per second;b. adjusting the rate of velocity of said stream of liquid from about 50 toabout 500 feet per second;c. simultaneously directing the pulsating liquid jet onto a confined areaof said tissue to disintegrate said tissue into small particles to form asuspension of particles in said liquid and sucking the suspension ofparticles of said tissue from said preselected area at a suction ofbetween 76 and 304 mm. of mercury.21. The method of claim 20 including the step of removing said suction andintroducing a pressure flow of liquid responsive to the clogging of theflow of said sucked liquid.22. The method of claim 20 including the step of introducing salt crystalsinto the stream of liquid pulses.23. The method of claim 22 and wherein said step of introducing saltcrystals includes the step of providing a unit of salt crystals for eachpulse of liquid.24. The method of claim 21 and wherein said step of removing said suctionincludes the step of reversing the operation of a suction pump to providea positive pressure flow."}
{"WKU":"039305066","Title":"Disposable phlebotomist s tourniquet","App_Date":"1974-06-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Thomas F. Overend","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A61B 1712","References":"1885007;2703083;3086529;3233608;3504675;3587584","Claims":"What is claimed:1. A disposable phlebotomist s tourniquet, comprising a single, flat, solidelastic band 8-20 inches in length, a non-stretchable, pressure-sensitiveadhesive strip bonded to only one flat surface of the band adjacent butspaced from one end of the latter and having a pressure-sensitive adhesivesurface, the adhesive strip including a non-extensible strip of sheetingtherein to impart non-stretchability to the adhesive strip, thenon-extensible strip and the surface of the band to which the strip isbonded coacting to resist deformation of the adhesive strip when the bandis stretched, a removable protective liner covering the pressure-sensitiveadhesive surface and having a peel strength to the adhesive strip lessthan the peel strength of the strip to the band, the liner having at oneend a projecting tab to facilitate easy removal of the liner from theadhesive strip.2. The tourniquet according to claim 1 in which the band is of latex rubbersheeting.3. The tourniquet of claim 1 in which the band is of plasticizedpolyvinylchloride film.4. The tourniquet of claim 1 in which the adhesive strip is spacedapproximately three-fourths inches from one end of the band and extendslongitudinally of the band for a distance of at least 21/2 inches.5. The tourniquet according to claim 1 in which the band is sufficientlysupple to cup concavely outwardly when applied to and stretched about theflesh of the upper arm to apply gentle, non-cutting pressure to the flesh.6. A disposable phlebotomist s tourniquet, comprising a single, flat,solid, supple, drapable elastic band approximately 1 inch in width and of8-20 inches in length, a pressure-sensitive, relatively non-stretchableadhesive strip bonded to one flat surface of the band adjacent to butspaced from the edges of and from one end of the band and providing apressure-sensitive adhesive surface readily adhereable to the opposed flatsurface of the band, the adhesive strip including a strip of substantiallynon-stretchable sheet material sandwiched between layers ofpressure-sensitive adhesive, one of the adhesive layers providing the bondbetween the adhesive strip and the band adjacent one end of the latter, aprotective liner adhered to and protectively covering the otherpressure-sensitive adhesive surface of the adhesive strip and having apeel strength to the adhesive strip less than the peel strength of theadhesive strip to the band to which it is bonded, the liner projectingbeyond that end of the adhesive strip nearest the adjacent band end todefine a graspable pull tab for peeling the liner from the adhesive strip,the non-stretchable adhesive strip coacting with that section of the bandto which it is bonded to maintain substantially constant the dimensions ofthe pressure-sensitive adhesive surface to which a portion of the opposedflat surface of the band may be adhered when the band is stretched toencircle the arm.7. The tourniquet of claim 6 in which the band is approximately 14 inchesin length and in which the adhesive strip is approximately 21/2 inches inlength and is spaced approximately three-fourths of an inch from the oneend of the band."}
{"WKU":"039305074","Title":"Adjustable oral airway","App_Date":"1975-02-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert A. Berman","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A61M 2900;A61M 1600","References":"2127215;2599521;3057347;3419004;3543751","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An adjustable oral airway comprising:a. a narrow, elongated superior section and a narrow, elongated inferiorsection, said superior and inferior sections being attached to each otherat one end and being adapted for relative linear motion at their oppositeend,b. said superior section and said inferior section each being provided witha mouthpiece section, a leaf section, and a sliding section between saidmouthpiece section and said leaf section.2. An adjustable oral airway in accordance with claim 1, wherein;a. said leaf section of said superior section is arcuate,b. said leaf section of said inferior section is arcuate, the radius ofcurvature of said inferior section leaf section being less than the radiusof curvature of said leaf section of said superior section,c. said leaf sections being connected at said one end by means of a hinge.3. An adjustable oral airway in connection with claim 2, wherein:a. said slide section comprises at least one tongue and groove slide,b. whereby said superior section may slide linearly with respect to saidinferior section.4. An adjustable oral airway in accordance with claim 3, wherein:a. said leaf section of said inferior section has a raised rib between itsends,b. whereby said leaf section of said inferior section is less flexible thansaid leaf section of said superior section."}
{"WKU":"039305082","Title":"Wrapper absence detecting and control device for cigar machines","App_Date":"1974-04-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Frank Hollenton","Assignee":"AMF Incorporated","ICL_Class":"A24C  128","References":"631330;2012149;2320346;2324486;2953135;3139091","Claims":"I claim:1. In a cigar machine having a roller nest, a rotatable carrier fordelivering a tobacco strip to the roller nest, a paster and means fordelivering formed tobacco members to the roller nest, a control forpreventing particular operations of the machine while permitting themachine to continue to run, comprisinga source of pressure fluid,first means operatively associated with said carrier and responsive tofluid pressure from said source for detecting the absence of a tobaccostrip from the carrier immediately prior to the operation of the pasterandsecond means for preventing operation of the paster and for preventing thedelivery means from delivering a formed tobacco member to the roller nestonly when the absence of a tobacco strip from the carrier has beendetected by said first means.2. A control in accordance with claim 1 andsaid first means comprising a normally open electrical sensing circuithaving a switch means closing said circuit in response to the fluidpressure in the absence of a tobacco strip from said carrier and a relaymeans with a normally open switch portion which closes when said relaymeans is energized by said sensing circuit when said sensing circuit isclosed,said second means comprising a normally open electrical control circuithaving means for operatively uncoupling the paster from its operatinglinkage and for preventing the delivery means from receiving a formedtobacco member only when said control circuit is closed, andsaid control circuit being connected to the switch portion of said relaymeans and opened and closed thereby.3. A control in accordance with claim 2, andthe carrier and a spring contact arm having a free end spaced from thecarrier providing said switch means of said sensing circuit,a tube having its discharge end spaced from said free end of said arm onthe opposite side thereof from said carrier providing a blast of fluidpressure urging said free end of said arm towards said carrier, andsaid blast of fluid pressure being timed so said free end of said armcontacts and is insulated from said carrier by a tobacco on said carrierapproaching the paster and contacting the carrier thereby closing saidsensing circuit in the absence of a tobacco strip from the carrier.4. A control in accordance with claim 3, whereinsaid blast of fluid pressure is momentary, andsaid relay means including means for holding the switch portion closed fora predetermined period of time after said relay means is de-energized.5. A control in accordance with claim 2, andthe carrier being connected to a controlled source of suction valved tohold a tobacco strip on the carrier and cause said carrier to deliver thetobacco strip to the roller nest,said sensing circuit including a pressure switch responsive to negativefluid pressure of the suction when a tobacco strip is held on the carrierfor maintaining said sensing circuit open and closing said sensing circuitin response to the lower negative fluid pressure in the absence of atobacco strip from the carrier.6. A control in accordance with claim 1, andsaid source of pressure fluid being suction connected to the carrier andvalved to hold a tobacco strip on the carrier from a point of pick-up ofthe tobacco strip to the roller nest,said first means comprising conduit means connected to said suction, andsaid second means being expansible means retained in a contracted conditionby the negative fluid pressure of said suction when a tobacco strip isheld on the carrier and expanding to prevent paster operation and deliveryof a formed tobacco member in response to lower negative pressure fluid inthe absence of a tobacco strip from the carrier."}
{"WKU":"039305090","Title":"Smokers pipe reamer","App_Date":"1975-04-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Karl Zysset","Assignee":"K. Zysset & Co. AG","ICL_Class":"A24F  910","References":"1611622;2894515;3079932","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A smokers s pipe reamer comprising a hollow body having a front portionwith means providing an interior space and a rear portion with a rearwardend, means providing three radial grooves having parallel axes and bearingdisposed within said front portion and spaced at regular angularintervals, three blades, each guided in a respective groove means andhaving means providing a bearing opening, three blade bearing partssecured to said body and each passing through a middle portion of thelength of a said groove means and through a said bearing opening means,and a mechanism accommodated in said body for the bearing adjustment ofsaid blades, wherein each said blade comprises a U-shaped appendageprojecting into said interior space means, said mechanism comprises a partwhich is longitudinally displaceable within said interior space means andwhich includes a conical surface, each said bearing opening means takesthe form of an elongated hole partially delimited by a said appendage anddisposed substanially at right angles to the longitudinal axis of saidbody, and said conical surface being adapted to act upon said appendages.2. A reamer in accordance with claim 1, wherein said mechanism is ascrew-type adjusting mechanism comprising an adjusting knob mountedrotatably and axially immovably on said rearward end and a sliding sleevenon-rotatably guided for longitudinal displacement within said rearportion, and a pin guided in said front portion and having a front endcomprising said conical surface, said pin being secured to said sleeve."}
{"WKU":"039305104","Title":"Cigarette holder ring","App_Date":"1974-10-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Paul R. Johnston","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A24F 1322","References":"1179025;1289666;1434590;1891431;2109609;2134586","Claims":"What I claim as new and desire to protect by Letters Patent is:1. A cigarette holder finger ring comprising:a. ring-shaped band portion adapted to encircle the finger of a wearer,b. a crown member attached to said band portion by means permittingrotation of said crown member relative to said band portion about an axisgenerally radial to said band portion, and having a generally planar outersurface generally parallel to the axis of said band, andc. a clip of generally planar shape pivotally connected to said crownmember for movement between a folded position in which its plane isgenerally parallel to the axis of said band and it lies against the outersurface of said crown member, and an extended position in which its planeextends outwardly from said crown member, said clip being adapted toreceive and hold a cigarette therein when in its extended position.2. The device as recited in claim 1 with the addition of means frictionallyresisting rotation of said crown member relative to said band portion.3. The device as recited in claim 2 with the addition of means frictionallyresisting pivotal movement of said clip relative to said crown member."}
{"WKU":"039305112","Title":"Dual hair pin","App_Date":"1974-10-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Joe L. Roney","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A45D  802","References":"2699790;2791226;3194248","Claims":"I claim:1. A hair pin comprising:a continuous band of resilient material folded back upon itself on oppositesides to form a loop at each end of said pin, each loop having a crimpedouter leg which extends the length of said pin to form a flared tine whichterminates adjacent the other loop, said loops further having a commoncrimped inner leg extending substantially the length of said pinintermediate said loops, which is in crimped compact mating relationshipwith the outer legs for substantially its entire length between said loopsto provide a pair of oppositely disposed crimped pincers."}
{"WKU":"039305120","Title":"Coin sorting and counting apparatus","App_Date":"1975-01-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jack H. Woodland","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"G07D  300","References":"3048251;3086536;3680566","Claims":"What I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent are:1. A coin sorting and counting apparatus for a toll booth or the like, saidapparatus comprising:a. a housing including hopper means for receiving a plurality of coins ofdifferent denominations;b. rotatable conveyor means in said housing for moving the coins along anarcuate path and in a single line;c. means for driving said conveyor means;d. an elongated track assembly for successively receiving the coins fromsaid conveyor means and further including means for selectivelydischarging the coins at different locations depending upon thedenomination of the coin;e. sensing means comprising a plurality of pairs of photoelectric cells andassociated lamps, there being one of said pairs of cells and lamps foreach coin denomination, said pairs of sensing means being spaced along thelength of said track assembly for detecting the denomination of the coinsprior to the discharge thereof;f. means responsive to said sensing means for generating a plurality ofsignals proportional to the denomination of each sensed coin and fortotaling the said signals;g. said first two pairs of sensing means being positioned such that asignal will be generated only when said first two of said pairs of sensingmeans simultaneously detect the passage of a half-dollar therepast in saidtrack assembly and another signal will be generated indicating thepresence of a quarter in said track assembly only when second one of saidpairs of sensing means detects the passage of a quarter therepast; andh. means responsive to said total of said generated signals for indicatingthat the amount of the coins deposited is either correct or incorrect.2. The apparatus according to claim 1 further including a container forreceiving the coins after their discharge from said track assembly, saidcontainer including valve means responsive to said signal generating meansfor opening said container when the amount of coins deposited is correctwhereby the coins may be directed to a remote location for safe keeping.3. The apparatus according to claim 1 wherein said conveyor means comprisesa base wall including an integral central disc having a groove around theperimeter thereof and a plurality of first pins extending away from saidbase wall, said first pins being angularly spaced apart on a commondiameter that is radially outward of said groove whereby the edge of acoin is adapted to be positioned in said groove and concurrently inabutment with one of said first pins so that the coin may be moved alongsaid arcuate path and into said track assembly.4. The apparatus according to claim 3 wherein there is also included atleast one second pin extending away from said base wall, said second pinbeing positioned radially inward of said groove so that a relatively largecoin may be moved along said arcuate path thereby in combination with oneof said first pins.5. The apparatus according to claim 1 wherein there is further includedflexible means for intercepting and displacing from said conveyor meansany coin that is improperly placed prior to the time said improperlyplaced coin reaches said track assembly.6. The apparatus according to claim 1 wherein said track assembly includesa plurality of discharge openings of different sizes corresponding to thediameters of a nickel, a dime, a quarter, a half-dollar and a silverdollar.7. The apparatus according to claim 6 wherein said track assembly includesat least one deflecting means for guiding a coin into and through saiddischarge opening therefor.8. The apparatus according to claim 7 wherein said deflecting means ispositioned proximate said discharge opening for a half-dollar.9. The apparatus according to claim 1 wherein said conveying means is adisc positioned at an angle with respect to a vertical plane and whereinsaid track assembly is angled downwardly with the inlet thereof beingpositioned proximate the maximum elevation of said disc whereby the coinsmove downwardly along said track assembly by gravity.10. The apparatus according to claim 1 wherein said third and fourth pairsof sensing means are positioned such that a signal will be generated aftercoins of different denominations pass through the respective dischargemeans thereof."}
{"WKU":"039305139","Title":"Spray-cleaning apparatus","App_Date":"1973-10-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Pius Buchegger;Pius Johann Buchegger","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B08B  302","References":"1080704;1143217;2598074;3242934;3452763","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Apparatus for cleaning surfaces of articles by means of a liquid sprayedon said surfaces which comprises:a. a support for an article to be cleaned;b. a nozzle system;c. means for supplying cleaning liquid to said nozzle system, said nozzlesystem including:"}
{"WKU":"039305147","Title":"Wind resistant umbrella","App_Date":"1975-04-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Dean T. S. Wu","Assignee":"Raymond Lee Organization Inc.","ICL_Class":"A45B 2522","References":"161962;559577;773499;2522645;3042055","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A wind resistant umbrella frame, comprising:a frame having a plurality of like downwardly extending ribs locatedcircumaxially around an elongated center pole and a collar slidably up anddown on the pole, the collar being connected to each rib by an elongatedstrut that is pivotally connected at one end to the collar and pivotallyconnected at the other end to the rib, and flexible covering secured tothe top of the pole and to the outside of the ribs;a like plurality of first hooks, each first hook being secured to acorresponding rib adjacent the bottom thereof;a like plurality of second hooks, each second hook being secured at thepivotal connection point of the corresponding rib and its associatedstrut;a like plurality of third hooks, each third hook being secured to thecorresponding rib between the corresponding first hook and thecorresponding second hook; anda like plurality of flexible cables, each cable being secured at one end toone of said associated first hooks, and being looped over one of saidcorresponding second and third hooks, and being secured to the center poleat a point above the maximum position of upward travel of the collar.2. The device of claim 1 wherein a circular ring is secured to the pole andthe cables are secured to the ring.3. The device of claim 2 wherein the first and third hooks face concavedownward.4. The device of claim 3 wherein the second hooks face concave upwards."}
{"WKU":"039305155","Title":"Pneumatic control system and valve construction therefor or the like","App_Date":"1974-07-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Billy Edward Kennedy;Boyd Paul Sliger","Assignee":"Robertshaw Controls Company","ICL_Class":"F16K 31365","References":"2474772;3512560;3613710;3683968;3704697;3779220;3789811;3791398","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A pneumatic control system comprising a source of vacuum that issub-atmospheric, a vacuum operated device, and a valve construction forinterconnecting said source of vacuum to said device when in one operatingcondition thereof and for interconnecting the atmosphere to said devicewhen in another operating condition thereof, said valve constructionhaving a housing means provided with a chamber therein and with threespaced port means leading to said chamber, one of said port means beinginterconnected to said source of vacuum, another of said port means beinginterconnected to said device, the remaining port means beinginterconnected to the atmosphere, said housing having a valve seatseparating said one port means from said other port means and saidremaining port means, said housing having a movable valve member forcontrolling said valve seat, said valve member closing said valve seatwhen said valve construction is in said other condition thereof and saidvalve member opening said valve seat when said valve construction is insaid one condition thereof, said valve construction having a vacuumoperated actuator for moving said valve member, said actuator beingcontrolled by said source of vacuum through said one port means of saidhousing, said remaining port means having a restrictor means thereinbetween said chamber of said housing and said atmosphere to bleedatmosphere therethrough at a rate slower than the evacuation rate of saidsource so that said source can operate said device when all of said portsare interconnected together.2. A pneumatic control system as set forth in claim 1 wherein said housinghas another valve seat disposed between said remaining port means and saidother port means to be opened and closed by said valve member.3. A pneumatic control system as set forth in claim 2 wherein said otherport means is disposed intermediate said one port means and said remainingport means as well as intermediate said valve seats.4. A pneumatic control system as set forth in claim 3 wherein said valvemember when in said one condition thereof closes said other valve seat andwhen in said other condition thereof opens said other valve seat.5. A pneumatic control system as set forth in claim 1 wherein said actuatorcomprises a flexible diaphragm carried by said housing and having one sideexposed to said chamber and the other side exposed to the atmosphere.6. A pneumatic control system as set forth in claim 5 wherein said actuatorincludes a stem having one end engageable with said one side of saiddiaphragm and another end for engaging said valve member to move the samerelative to said valve seat.7. A pneumatic control system as set forth in claim 6 wherein said otherend of said stem is adapted to project through said valve seat to engagesaid valve member.8. A pneumatic control system as set forth in claim 6 wherein a spring iscarried by said housing and acts on said valve member in direction to tendto move said valve member to close said valve seat.9. A pneumatic control system as set forth in claim 8 wherein anotherspring is carried by said housing and acts on said stem in a direction totend to maintain said one end of said stem in engagement with saiddiaphragm.10. A valve construction for interconnecting a source of vacuum that issub-atmospheric to a vacuum operated device when in one operatingcondition thereof, and for interconnecting the atmosphere to said devicewhen in another operating condition thereof, said valve constructioncomprising a housing means provided with a chamber therein and with threespaced port means leading to said chamber, one of said port means beingadapted to be interconnected to said source of vacuum, another of saidport means being adapted to be interconnected to said device, theremaining port means being adapted to be interconnected to the atmosphere,said housing having a valve seat separating said one port means from saidother port means and said remaining port means, said housing having amovable valve member for controlling said valve seat, said valve memberclosing said valve seat when said valve construction is in said othercondition thereof and said valve member opening said valve seat when saidvalve construction is in said one condition thereof, said valveconstruction having a vacuum operated actuator for moving said valvemember, said actuator being adapted to be controlled by said source ofvacuum through said one port means of said housing, said remaining portmeans having a restrictor means therein between said chamber of saidhousing and said atmosphere to bleed atmosphere therethrough at a rateslower than the evacuation rate of said source so that said source canoperate said device when all of said ports are interconnected together.11. A valve construction as set forth in claim 10 wherein said housing hasanother valve seat disposed between said remaining port means and saidother port means to be opened and closed by said valve member.12. A valve construction as set forth in claim 11 wherein said other portmeans is disposed intermediate said one port means and said remaining portmeans as well as intermediate said valve seats.13. A valve construction as set forth in claim 12 wherein said valve memberwhen in said one condition thereof closes said other valve seat and whenin said other condition thereof opens said other valve seat.14. A valve construction as set forth in claim 10 wherein said actuatorcomprises a flexible diaphragm carried by said housing and having one sideexposed to said chamber and the other side exposed to the atmosphere.15. A valve construction as set forth in claim 14 wherein said actuatorincludes a stem having one end engageable with said one side of saiddiaphragm and another end for engaging said valve member to move the samerelative to said valve seat.16. A valve construction as set forth in claim 15 wherein said other end ofsaid stem is adapted to project through said valve seat to engage saidvalve member.17. A valve construction as set forth in claim 15 wherein a spring iscarried by said housing and acts on said valve member in a direction totend to move said valve member to close said valve seat.18. A valve construction as set forth in claim 17 wherein another spring iscarried by said housing and acts on said stem in a direction to tend tomaintain said one end of said stem in engagement with said diaphragm."}
{"WKU":"039305163","Title":"Ballcock assembly","App_Date":"1974-12-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Vaughn D. Flinner;Dana D. Zody","Assignee":"Mansfield Sanitary Inc.","ICL_Class":"F16K 2400","References":"2195797;2657703;2706998;2791235;3084472;3109447;3332433;3414005;3457947","Claims":"We claim:1. In combination with a fluid reservoir tank having a base wall and adesired fluid level, a ballcock assembly, said ballcock assemblycomprising; a mounting shank extending through said base wall, meanssealingly to secure said shank to said base wall, said mounting shankhaving an annular locating flange below the tank base wall, a sheathsecured to said mounting shank and extending upwardly through saidreservoir tank, a body portion secured to said sheath upwardly of saiddesried fluid level, a valve having an intake and an exhaust, said exhaustcommunicating with the interior of said reservoir tank, an inlet tubeconnected to the intake of said valve and extending downwardly throughsaid sheath and at least partially through said mounting shank, said inlettube having a pilot to be insertably received within the inner diameter ofsaid annular locating flange, said inlet tube having a rim portion axiallyupward of said pilot that closely fits within said mounting shank, saidrim portion having means for sealing the connection between said inlettube and said mounting shank, said inlet tube being positioned withrespect to said sheath and said mounting shank to define a passageway thatcircumscribes said inlet tube, and a first aperture located below saidmeans sealingly to secure said shank to said base wall by which saidpassageway communicates with atmosphere.2. A combination, as set forth in claim 1, further comprising a secondaperture opening through said sheath at a level higher than the desiredfluid level in said reservoir tank by which said passageway communicateswith atmosphere.3. A combination, as set forth in claim 1, in which said inlet tube isconnected to the fluid supply line in spaced relation below said meanssealingly to secure said shank to said base wall and said first aperturepenetrates said shank within the span of said spaced relation.4. A ballcock assembly comprisng; a mounting shank, a body portion, a valvemechanism housed in said body portion, said valve mechanism having anintake and an exahust, a sheath connecting between said mounting shank andsaid body portion, said mounting shank having an annular locating flange,an inlet tube having first and second, opposite ends, means effectivelyconnecting said first end for communication with the intake of said valvemechanism, said inlet tube extending through said sheath and at leastpartially into said mounting shank, said inlet tube having a pilot to beinsertably received within the inner diameter of said annular locatingflange, said inlet tube having a rim portion axially upward of said pilotthat closely fits within said mounting shank, said rim portion havingmeans for sealing the connection between said inlet tube and said mountingshank, a passageway within said sheath and circumscribing said inlet tubealong the extent thereof between its effective connections to said valvemechanism and said fluid supply source, an aperture through which saidpassageway communicates with atmosphere.5. A ballcock assembly, as set forth in claim 4, in which said aperturecommunicates with said passageway at substantially the lowest elevationthereof.6. A ballcock assembly, as set forth in claim 4, in which said aperturecommunicates with said passageway at substantially the highest elevationthereof.7. A ballcock assembly, as set forth in claim 4, in which said aperturecommunicates with said passageway at substantially the lowest elevationthereof and in which a second aperture communicates with said passagewayat substantially the highest elevation thereof."}
{"WKU":"039305171","Title":"Safety valve","App_Date":"1974-08-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jerome W. Gagala","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F17C 1304","References":"1411483;1698616;2563244;3405732;3701363","Claims":"What is claimed is as follows:1. A combination safety and service valve for closing and opening a highpressure tank, said combination safety and service valve comprising:a body having an outlet port and a sealing portion engaging and closingsaid tank opening, said body having a flow passage extending through saidtank sealing portion for communicating the interior of said pressure tankthrough a valve inlet with said outlet port;a valve seat formed in said flow passage between said sealing portion andsaid outlet port;a first valve member removably engagable with said valve seat to closecommunication between said tank interior and said outlet port;means for actuating said first valve member;a second valve seat formed in said flow passage between said sealingportion and said tank interior;a second valve member engagable with said second seat to closecommunication beyond said second seat;biasing means urging said second valve member into engagement with saidsecond valve seat;means connecting said first valve member to said second valve member tomaintain said second valve member open during normal operation of saidfirst valve member and responsive to displacement of said first valvemember from normal valving positions to permit seating of said secondvalve member;first valve means operable to close communication between said tankinterior and said valve outlet port when the pressure of the fluid withinsaid tank interior falls below a predetermined minimum value; andsecond valve means carried by said first valve means and operable to opencommunication between said valve inlet and said tank interior when saidfirst valve means is closed and fluid under pressure is directed into saidsafety and service valve for pressurizing said tank interior.2. A combination safety and service valve for closing and opening a highpressure tank, said combination safety and service valve comprising:a body having an outlet port and a sealing portion engaging and closingsaid tank opening, said body having a flow passage extending through saidtank sealing portion for communicating the interior of said pressure tankthrough a valve inlet with said outlet port;a valve seat formed in said flow passage between said sealing portion andsaid outlet port;a first valve member removably engagable with said valve seat to closecommunication between said tank interior and said outlet port;means for actuating said first valve member;a second valve seat formed in said flow passage between said sealingportion and said tank interior;a second valve member engagable with said second seat to closecommunication beyond said second seat;biasing means urging said second valve member into engagement with saidsecond valve seat;means connecting said first valve member to said second valve member tomaintain said second valve member open during normal operation of saidfirst valve member and responsive to displacement of said first valvemember from normal valving positions to permit seating of said secondvalve member; andfirst valve means operable to close communication between said tankinterior and said valve outlet port when the pressure of the fluid withinsaid tank interior falls below a predetermined minimum value, said biasingmeans being a coil spring disposed between and in abuttment with saidsecond valve member and said first valve means to provide a common biasfor urging said first valve means to close communication between saidinlet and said outlet and for urging said second valve member intoengagement with said second valve seat."}
{"WKU":"039305180","Title":"Valves","App_Date":"1974-05-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John Alfred Fuller;Edwin Smith","Assignee":"Hopkinsons, Ltd.","ICL_Class":"F16K 3136","References":"2600073;2623539;2938536;3765444","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A control valve for regulating the flow of compressible andnon-compressible fluids in a fluid system and comprising: a control valvebody having in spatial relationship a fluid inlet and a fluid outlet; amovable control valve gate member between the inlet and outlet forcontrolling fluid flow through the control valve body; differentialpressure switch means connected to spaced tappings in the control valvebody for detecting abnormal fluid flow conditions therein; and meansinitiated by the differential pressure switch means for closing themovable gate member when abnormal fluid flow conditions prevail in saidfluid system, the means including a piston-and-cylinder assembly providedwith a vent to atmosphere and operatively connected to the valve gatemember and adapted to be maintained in a balanced, position when the valvegate member is open by the fluid of the system under normal fluid flowconditions, a normally-closed venting valve operatively connected to saidpiston-and-cylinder assembly for controlling venting of said cylinder, apneumatic supply source, a pneumatic actuator connected to said pneumaticsupply source and said venting valve for operating the latter, and anelectrically-operated valve disposed between the pneumatic actuator andthe pneumatic supply source and operatively connected to the differentialpressure switch means to effect venting of the piston-and-cylinderassembly when abnormal fluid conditions prevail via the pneumatic actuatorand venting valve to create fluid imbalance in the assembly and resultingcontrol valve closure.2. A control valve as claimed in claim 1, in which the control valve is aparallel slide venturi gate valve; the control valve body is tappedadjacent its inlet and outlet and at the venturi throat, the tappingsbeing connected by piping to two differential pressure switches, onebetween inlet and throat tappings and the other between throat and outlettappings.3. A control valve as claimed in claim 1 in which the electrically-operatedvalve is a continuously-energised solenoid operated valve.4. A control valve as claimed in claim 3, in which the solenoid-operatedvalve is connected to an electrical supply via adjustable snap-actingswitches controlled by the differential pressure switches.5. A control valve as claimed in claim 4, in which each differentialpressure switch comprises a fluid pressure operated bellows unit assemblyadapted to actuate a torque tube assembly which, in turn, operates thesnap-acting switches.6. A control valve as claimed in claim 3, in which the solenoid-operatedvalve is connected to an electrical supply via electronic relay meanscontrolled by the differential pressure switches.7. A control valve as claimed in claim 6, in which each differentialpressure switch comprises a fluid pressure operated bellows unit assemblyadapted to actuate a torque tube assembly which, in turn, operates theelectronic relay means."}
{"WKU":"039305198","Title":"Pressure regulator","App_Date":"1975-02-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Joe L. Byrd","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Army","ICL_Class":"F16K 3112","References":"3372707","Claims":"I claim:1. A regulator for control of fluid flow between upstream and downstreamsections of a conduit comprising:A circular diaphragm with an axial valve stem secured thereto including apassage for flow of fluid therethrough, a pair of tubular members disposedfor respective engagement with said sections and for mutual engagement toconduct the flow between the sections and to secure said diaphragmtherebetween in fluid tight engagement, an axial valve seat disposed onsaid upstream member and said upstream member including a cylindricalcavity; andAn O-ring circumferentially constrained in said cavity for initialcompression by said stem to provide a fluid tight seal and bias said stemfrom said seat;Said diaphragm being disposed to flex for additional compression of saidO-ring and engagement of said stem with said seat to discontinue flowthrough said axial passage responsive to a predetermined value of fluidpressure in said downstream section.2. A regulator as in claim 1 with a shoulder provided on said stem for thecompression of said O-ring and with said upstream member including anaperture to vent air therefrom."}
{"WKU":"039305201","Title":"Control valve","App_Date":"1974-06-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Eugene Whitaker","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F16K 1100","References":"3524472;3608866;3626981","Claims":"I claim:1. A control valve for controlling fluid to and from a motor or the likefrom a rotary shaft comprising a pair of longitudinally spaced apartstationary valve members facing each other and having aligned centralholes therethrough receiving the rotary shaft and aligned facing annularchannels, one of said stationary valve members having a motor passagecommunicating with the annular channel therein for connection to themotor, the other of said stationary valve members having a source passagecommunicating with the annular channel therein for connection to a sourceof fluid and a vent passage angularly spaced from the source passage andcommunicating with the annular channel therein for connection toatmosphere, a pair of plugs removably secured in the annular channel ofsaid other stationary valve member isolating said source passage and saidvent passage from each other and providing a arcuate source channel and anarcuate vent channel, a rotatable valve disc between the pair ofstationary valve members and engaging the facing surfaces thereof andhaving a central hole therethrough receiving the rotary shaft and aneccentrically located port therethrough communicating the aligned facingannular channels in the stationary valve members, and means connecting thevalve disc to the rotary shaft for rotation thereby for alternatelycommunicating the annular channel and the motor passage in said onestationary valve member with the arcuate source channel and source passageand with the arcuate vent channel and vent passage in said otherstationary valve member.2. A control valve as defined in claim 1 wherein at least one of said plugsin the annular channel in said other stationary valve member is adjustablypositionable therein for adjusting the relative times during which themotor passage in said one stationary valve member communicates with thesource passage and vent passage in said other stationary valve member.3. A control valve as defined in claim 1 including means adjusting the timeof the control valve with respect to the rotary shaft.4. A control valve as defined in claim 1 including a rotatable sleevereceived in the holes through the stationary valve members and therotatable valve disc and receiving the rotary shaft, means securing therotatable valve disc to the rotatable sleeve rotation therewith, and meansfor rotatably adjustably securing the rotatable sleeve to the rotary shaftfor adjusting the timing of the control valve with respect to the rotaryshaft.5. A control valve as defined in claim 1 including supplying lubricant tothe running contact between the stationary valve members and the rotatablevalve disc.6. A control valve as defined in claim 1 including resilient means applyingrunning contact pressure between said rotatable valve disc and said facingsurfaces of said stationary valve members.7. A control valve as defined in claim 6 including supplying lubricant tothe running contact between the stationary valve members and the rotatablevalve disc.8. A control valve as defined in claim 1 wherein said rotatable valve disccomprises a pair of spaced discs rotatably engageable with the facingsurfaces of said stationary valve members, and intermediate resilientlycompressible means between said discs and bonded thereto applying runningcontact pressure between said discs and said facing surfaces of saidstationary valve members, said eccentrically located port of the valvedisc extending through the pair of discs and the intermediate resilientlycompressible means.9. A control valve as defined in claim 8 wherein said intermediateresiliently compressible means comprises a plurality of circumferentiallyspaced resiliently compressible washers bonded to the pair of discs withthe eccentrically located port of the valve disc extending through thepair of discs and one of the washers.10. A control valve as defined in claim 8 wherein the space between thepair of discs of the rotatable valve disc contains a lubricant and whereinthe pair of discs contain lubricating holes in longitudinal alignment withthe facing surfaces of the stationary valve members for lubricating therunning contact between the stationary valve members and the rotatablevalve disc.11. A control valve as defined in claim 1 wherein said motor and sourcepassages in said stationary valve members are radially arranged andincluding a housing having a central cavity receivings said stationaryvalve members and said rotatable valve disc therein and having radiallyarranged motor and source holes in radial alignment and communicatingrespectively with the motor and source passages in said stationary valvemembers.12. A control valve as defined in claim 11 wherein said vent passage islongitudinally arranged in said other stationary valve member.13. A control valve as defined in claim 1 including a two part housing, thetwo housing parts including aligned central cavities therethrough, saidone stationary valve member being secured by force fit in the centralcavity of one of the housing parts and said other stationary valve memberbeing secured by force fit in the central cavity of the other housingpart, and means securing together the two parts of the housing in abuttingrelation with the valve disc between and engaging the facing surfaces ofthe stationary valve members.14. A control valve as defined in claim 13 wherein said motor and sourcepassages in said stationary valve members are radially arranged andwherein said two part housing has radially arranged motor and source holesin radial alignment and communicating respectively with the motor andsource passages in said stationary valve members.15. A control valve as defined in claim 13 wherein said vent passage islongitudinally arranged in said other stationary valve member.16. A control valve as defined in claim 8 including a rotatable sleevereceived in the holes through the stationary valve members and the pair ofdiscs of the rotatable valve disc and receiving the rotary shaft, meanssecuring the pair of discs of the rotatable valve disc to the rotatablesleeve for rotation therewith, and means rotatably adjustably securing therotatable sleeve to the rotary shaft for adjusting the timing of thecontrol valve with respect to the rotary shaft.17. A control valve as defined in claim 16 including indicating meansrotatably positionable with the rotatable sleeve for indicating the timingof the control valve with respect to the rotary shaft.18. A control valve as defined in claim 4 including indicating meansrotatably positionable with the rotatable sleeve for indicating the timingof the control valve with respect to the rotary shaft.19. A control valve as defined in claim 1 including a housing having acentral cavity therein receiving said stationary valve members and saidrotatable valve disc therein, a rotatable sleeve received in the holesthrough the stationary valve members and the rotatable valve disc andreceiving the rotary shaft, means securing the rotatable valve disc to therotatable sleeve for rotation therewith, means rotatably adjustablysecuring the rotatable sleeve to the rotary shaft for adjusting the timingof the control valve with respect to the rotary shaft, and cooperatingindicating means carried by the housing and the rotatable sleeve forindicating the timing of the control valve with respect to the rotaryshaft.20. A control valve as defined in claim 1 wherein the fluid from the sourceis under positive pressure and wherein said rotatable valve disc comprisesa pair of discs rotatably engageable with the facing surfaces of saidstationary valve members, and intermediate resiliently compressible meansbetween said discs and bonded thereto for applying running contactpressure between said discs and said facing surfaces of said stationaryvalve members, said intermediate resiliently compressible means having aconfiguration to internally expose portions of said discs, and means tosupply fluid under positive pressure from the fluid source to theinternally exposed portions of the discs for increasing the runningcontact pressure between said discs and said facing surfaces of saidstationary valve members.21. A control valve as defined in claim 1 wherein said pair of plugs areremovably secured by force fit in the annular channel of said otherstationary valve member.22. A control valve as defined in claim 21 wherein the plugs are tapped toreceive a tool to facilitate removal thereof from the channel.23. A control valve as defined in claim 1 wherein said pair of plugs aresubstantially cylindrical in configuration and are removably secured byforce fit in the annular channel of said stationary valve member with thecylindrical sides of the plugs engaging the sides of the channel.24. A control valve as defined in claim 23 wherein the ends of thesubstantially cylindrical plugs have resiliently compressible pads bondedthereto for resiliently engaging the bottom of the channel when the plugsare so secured in the channel.25. A control valve as defined in claim 23 wherein the substantiallycylindrical plugs are centrally and longitudinally tapped to receive atool to facilitate removal thereof from the channel."}
{"WKU":"039305210","Title":"Gas charging valve for accumulator","App_Date":"1974-09-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Abduz Zahid","Assignee":"Greer Hydraulics, Inc.","ICL_Class":"F16L 5504","References":"3082793;3465786;3756273","Claims":"Having thus described my invention, what I claim as new and desire tosecure by letters patent of the United States is:1. A pressure vessel comprising a container of rigid material having twoports, both axially aligned with said container, one of said portsdefining a gas port and the other a liquid port, a partition interveningbetween said ports to define a variable volume gas chamber and a variablevolume liquid chamber in communication with said gas port and liquid port,respectively, means to close said liquid port, means to charge said gaschamber with gas under pressure, said charging means comprising a valveassembly mounted in the gas port, said valve assembly comprising a borehaving an inner end defining a valve seat, a valve stem slidably mountedin said bore, said stem being of dimensions such as to provide clearancefor gas flow through said bore, said stem having an inner end, a valvedisc of deformable resilient material mounted on said inner end of saidstem, resilient means reacting against said stem to urge the latteroutwardly to retain the outer surface of said valve disc against said seatin a first seating position, and means rigid with said stem adapted toabut against said valve seat when said valve disc is moved outwardly to asecond seating position as a result of gas pressure in said gas chamber,to limit the outward movement of said valve disc.2. The combination set forth in claim 1 in which the inner end of said boreis beveled to define said valve seat, said bore being of larger diameterat its inner end, said valve disc is an annular bead having a peripherywhich engages said larger diameter inner end of said beveled valve seat inthe first seating position of said valve disc.3. The combination set forth in claim 1 in which the inner end of said boreis beveled to define said valve seat, said valve seat being of largerdiameter at its inner end and of smaller diameter at its outer end, theinner end of said valve stem extends into the valve seat and has acylindrical portion of diameter greater than said smaller diameter outerend portion of said beveled seat, said stem having a cylindrical portionadjacent its inner end, said valve disc is an annular bead secured to saidcylindrical portion of said stem, said bead having a periphery engagingsaid larger diameter portion of said beveled seat in the first seatingposition of said valve disc, said cylindrical portion of said stemengaging the smaller diameter outer end portion of said beveled seat in asecond position of said valve disc, said bead being deformed into thebeveled portion of said bore in the second seating position of said valvedisc.4. The combination set forth in claim 1 in which said bore has a reduceddiameter portion near its inner end defining a shoulder, said stem has anouter end having an abutment, a coil spring encompassing said stem andreacting against said abutment and said shoulder, normally urging saidstem outwardly to move said valve disc to its first seating position.5. The combination set forth in claim 1 in which said gas port comprises anadditional bore having an inner end of reduced diameter defining anannular shoulder, said reduced diameter end of said bore being internallythreaded, said valve assembly comprises a casing of rigid material havingsaid first named bore extending axially therethrough, said valve assemblyhaving a transversely extending hub with externally threaded cylindricalportions extending axially from both sides thereof, one of saidcylindrical portions being screwed into the reduced diameter bore portion,said first named bore extending through said cylindrical portions of saidhub.6. The combination set forth in claim 5 in which said hub defines opposedsurfaces, the surface of said hub adjacent the cylindrical portion screwedinto the reduced diameter bore portion has an annular recess in which anO-ring is positioned, said O-ring being compressed against said annularshoulder when the cylindrical portion is tightened to define a seal."}
{"WKU":"039305228","Title":"Structural ceramic article and method of making same","App_Date":"1973-05-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Charles Lamar Turner","Assignee":"General Refractories Company","ICL_Class":"B01J  806;F16L  916","References":"2742437;3295919;3502596;3568723;3641763;3790654;3799796;3824196","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A ceramic article comprising:a fired monolithic cordierite article having a plurality of parallelcircular ducts separated by webs, said ducts extending across the articleto provide for fluid flow through the article, a majority of said parallelcircular ducts being surrounded by six other circular ducts with the axesof the six surrounding ducts being spaced an approximately equal distancefrom the axis of the circular duct they surround, the number of said ductsper square inch of article surface in a plane transverse of the parallelaxes of said ducts being at least 100, said article having a transversecompressive strength of at least about 5% of its longitudinal compressivestrength.2. The catalyst support of claim 1 in which said article has a longitudinalcompressive strength of about 5000 psi and a transverse compressivestrength along any axis transverse of the longitudinal axis of the articleof between about 400-700 psi.3. The fired article of claim 1 in which the diameter of the circular ductsis about 0.055 in. and the number of circular ducts per square inch isabout 225.4. The fired cordierite article of claim 3 which has a cylindrical shape,and in which the axes of the circular ducts are aligned with the axis ofthe cylindrical article."}
{"WKU":"039305236","Title":"Control mechanism for automatically operated warp beams with automatic","App_Date":"1973-11-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"D. Francisco Marlasca Garcia","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"D03D 4906","References":"1711385;2597136;2630838;3072154;3125127;3364403;3567354;3753451;3802467","Claims":"I claim:1. Control mechanism for automatically regulating warp beams with automaticzero setting, comprising means for checking variations in warp tension, awarp beam, means for controllably operating said warp beam, said means forcontrollably operating said warp beam comprising driving means forcontrolling said warp beam and means connected to said means for checkingvariations in warp tension for controlling said driving means, anautomatic zero setting device comprising a transmission connected to saiddriving means, a variator operatively connected to said transmission, andsensing means contacting said warp beam for sensing the diameter thereof,and a reducing assembly connected to said variator for driving said warpbeam.2. Control mechanism, as set forth in claim 1, wherein said means forchecking variations in warp tension comprises a member in contact withsaid warp and over which the warp passes, a spring-biased comparisonregulator connected to said member and arranged to transmit variablemovement in respect to the tension in the warp passing over said member,said driving means comprises an electric motor, and said means forcontrolling said driving means comprises switch means connected to saidelectric motor and actuated by said comparison regulator for affordingvariable operation of electric motor.3. Control mechanism, as set forth in claim 2, wherein said comparisonregulator comprises a lever connected to said member, a shaft connected atone end to said lever, and a plurality of stops mounted at the other endof said shaft, said stops rotating in response to said shaft rotation andcontrolling said switch means.4. Control mechanism, as set forth in claim 1, wherein said means forchecking variations in warp tension comprises a member in contact withsaid warp and over which the warp passes, a three-armed lever, one arm ofsaid three-armed lever connected to said member and pivotable in responsethereto, and said means for controlling said driving means comprises apulling member associated with each of the other two arms of saidthree-armed lever.5. Control mechanism, as set forth in claim 4, wherein said driving meansof said means for controllably operating said warp beam comprises ratchetwheels mounted on said transmission means, a synchronization shaft for theloom, a cam mounted on said synchronization shaft, a parallelogramstructure connected to said cam for transmitting alternating movement,pawls connected to said parallelogram structure and arranged to engagesaid ratchet wheels for regulating movement of said warp beam, and saidpulling members connected to said pawls for selectively positioning saidpawls in relation to the variations in warp tension.6. Control mechanism, as set forth in claim 1, wherein said means forchecking variations in warp tension comprises a member in contact withsaid warp and which warp passes over said member, a spring-biasedcomparison regulator connected to said member and arranged to transmitvariable movement in respect to the tension in the warp passing over saidmember, said driving means comprises ratchet wheels mounted on saidtransmission means, a synchronization shaft for the loom, a cam mounted onsaid synchronization shaft, a parallelogram structure connected to saidcam for transmitting alternating movement, pawls connected to saidparallelogram structure and arranged to engage said ratchet wheels forregulating movement of said warp beam, and an electromagnet associatedwith each of said pawls and connected to said means for controlling saiddriving means.7. Control mechanism, as set forth in claim 2, wherein said means forchecking variation in said warp tension includes a thread-guide rollerconstituting said member arranged to support the warp, and said comparisonregulator comprises shock absorbers supporting the ends of saidthread-guide roller, a lever secured to each end of said thread-guideroller and extending laterally therefrom, a shaft connected to said leverat a position spaced laterally from the connection of said lever to saidthread-guide roller, a pinion mounted on said shaft and displaceableaxially thereon, a spring mounted on said shaft and in contact with saidpinion, means for driving said pinion on said shaft for regulating thebiasing action of said spring, a cam member mounted on said shaft forrotation therewith, a plurality of adjustable stops on said cam member,and said switch means comprises a plurality of micro-switches arranged tobe operated by said adjustable stops on said cam member and to operatesaid electric motor.8. Control mechanism, as set forth in claim 7, wherein said sensing meansarranged to sense the diameter of said warp beam comprises a first shaft,a diameter-sensing arm attached to and extending radially outwardly fromone end of said first shaft, a wheel mounted on the end of said sensingarm spaced outwardly from said first shaft for contacting the exterior ofsaid warp beam, an end stop secured to the opposite end of said firstshaft from the end to which said sensing arm is attached, a pinion mountedon said control shaft of said variator spaced from the connection of saiddrive means to said control shaft, a gear wheel in meshed engagement withsaid pinion of said control shaft, a second shaft mounting said gearwheel, a plate bushing mounted on said second shaft at a position spacedfrom said gear wheel and said plate bushing extending outwardly from saidsecond shaft over the end of said first shaft on which said end stop islocated, a micro-switch mounted within said plate bushings, stops mountedon the exterior of said plate bushing, disconnectors mounted opposite saidstops in the path of movement thereof, and said micro-switch in said platebushing arranged to be contacted by said stops on the end of said firstshaft for stopping the operation of said electric motor.9. Control mechanism for automatically regulated warp beams with automaticzero setting, comprising a warp beam, a zero setting device comprising anassembly arranged to sense the diameter of said warp beam, a variatorarranged to control the operation of said warp beam, said variatorincluding a control shaft, a rotating shaft, and a driving shaft, saiddriving shaft arranged and connected to the synchronization devices in theloom associated with said warp beam, an electric motor, drive meansextending between said electric motor and said control shaft and rotatingshaft, a master safety switch for the loom associated with said warp beam,a first coupling in said drive means selectively connecting said rotatingshaft to said electric motor, a second coupling for selectively couplingsaid driving shaft to the synchronizing devices in the loom, a forkinterconnecting said first coupling and second coupling, a control leverarranged to displace said fork for selectively connecting said first andsecond couplings and also arranged to act on said master safety switch."}
{"WKU":"039305244","Title":"Harness making apparatus","App_Date":"1974-10-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John W. Tarbox","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B21F 2700","References":"3144053;3693228","Claims":"I claim:1. A harness making assembly comprising:a strand dispensing head having a base and a guide member rotatably mountedon the base;a strand feed means mounted on said guide member and defining a strandpassageway having a strand outlet disposed eccentrically of the rotationalaxis of said guide member;means of supplying a strand to said guide member;means for translating said dispensing head sequentially to a plurality ofspaced stations;a plurality of strand retaining elements supported at a plurality of saidstations; andsaid strand retaining elements each comprise a block of resilient materialhaving at least one strand receiving slot therethrough structured topermit the passage therethrough of said feed means and grip a strandprojecting from said outlet.2. Structure according to claim 1 and including cutting means mounted onsaid dispensing head and extendable across said outlet in spaced relationthereto to cut a strand extending therefrom, and retractable clear of saidoutlet subsequent to cutting to leave an extended strand end free to beengaged by a strand-receiving slot.3. Structure according to claim 2 wherein said cutting means comprises aknife slideably mounted on said guide member such that the edge thereof isdisplaceable across the path of a wire extending from said strandpassageway and including a plurality of hard surfaced elements supportedadjacent said retaining elements to serve as anvils for said knife.4. Structure according to claim 1 and including a catch mounted on saiddispensing head for gripping a reverse-traveling strand to prevent thereverse travel thereof in said passageway, and permitting a strand beingdispensed to pass substantially unhindered in the dispensing direction.5. Structure according to claim 4 wherein said catch comprises a resilientblade mounted on said guide member and biased against a surface thereof topermit the travel of a strand threaded between said blade and said surfaceupon the tensioning of such a threaded strand and gripping same upon theslackening thereof.6. Structure according to claim 4 wherein said catch comprises a rampmember mounted in said guide member and having a planar surface, and abearing element mounted in said guide member and displaceable thereinalong a path which is inclined relative to said planar surface, andincluding means biasing said bearing element along said path into theposition nearest to said planar surface, whereby a strand threaded betweensaid ramp member and said bearing is freely displaceable in one axialdirection and subject to pinching action of said bearing and said rampmember upon being displaced in the other axial direction.7. Structure according to claim 1 wherein said feed means includes wallmembers defining a corridor and a guide roller adjacent said outlet andhaving an annular groove in the perimeter thereof, whereby a strand can bethreaded through said corridor and outlet in contact with said groovedroller.8. Structure according to claim 1 wherein said block has a plurality ofupwardly open, parallel strand-receiving slots therein and including asecond plurality of downwardly open slots interdigitated with said strandreceiving slots to permit the expansion of said strand-receiving slots.9. Structure according to claim 1 and including a layout board, said blocksbeing mounted to said layout board, and including a plurality of clustersof upwardly extended resilient finger-like projections mounted on saidboard adjacent said blocks of utility in properly orienting said guidemember on said base relative to the adjacent slotted block.10. Structure according to claim 1 wherein each of said resilient blocks isprovided with a plurality of parallel bores between said slots, said boresbeing staggered laterally of the slots, and including a rigid member foreach block having a plurality of posts extending therefrom into said boreson the side of the block remote from the slot openings to restrain saidblock from movement.11. Structure according to claim 10 and including a layout board, saidrigid members being blocks and including a panel for each rigid block andseparating same from the respective resilient block, each of said panelsbeing apertured to loosely receive said posts and having portions thereofoverlapping said rigid blocks to permit easy removal of said resilientblocks.12. Structure according to claim 1 wherein said strand dispensing head isone of a plurality of strand dispensing heads selectively engageable fortranslatory motion by said translating means, whereby a plurality of wiretypes can be dispensed without requiring re-threading of a stranddispensing head."}
{"WKU":"039305252","Title":"Soft nose hammer and manufacture thereof","App_Date":"1975-02-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Alva E. Stoneburner","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B25D  100","References":"1095866","Claims":"I claim:1. The method of making a hammer comprising the steps of providing aplurality of lengthwise slits in one end of a tubular member, splaying theslitted end of the tubular member by forcing a tapered tool into saidslitted end of the member, removing the tool, providing a moldestablishing the boundaries of a hammer head configuration, pouring amolten hammer head material into the mole while holding the tubular memberwith the splayed end lowermost and within the mold in spaced relation tothe boundaries of the latter in an arrangement such that the pouredmaterial surrounds the splayed end of the tubular member and rises withinthe latter above the slits therein, said material having a lower meltingpoint than that of the tubular member, and removing the mold from thetubular member and the hammer head material after the latter has cooledsufficiently to harden.2. The method of claim 1, wherein the tool is forced into the slitted endof the tubular member by striking the same with an impact tool.3. The method of claim 1, wherein the tubular member is steel pipe andwherein said one end is slitted by sawing to produce at least one pair ofdiametrically opposed slits.4. The method of claim 3, wherein the hammer head material is comprised oflead.5. The method of claim 4, wherein the tool is forced into the slitted endof the tubular member by striking the same with an impact tool.6. In a hammer of the type including a metallic handle having a headmounted on one end portion thereof that is of a relatively soft anddeformable material, an improved means for securing the head to the handlecomprising the handle being tubular and having one end portion thereofslitted lengthwise and flared outwardly at its extremities, said one endportion of the handle being embedded entirely within and spaced from theexternal surface of the hammer head, said material of the hammer headextending as a continuous mass about said one end portion of the tubularmember in uninterrupted contact with all interior and exterior surfaces ofsaid one end portion of the tubular member, whereby head material withinand without coacts to interlock with the configuration of said one end ofthe tubular member to oppose any relative movement of the hammer head onthe handle.7. The combination of claim 6, wherein the handle is comprised of steelpipe, and wherein the hammer head material comprises lead."}
{"WKU":"039305260","Title":"Pneumatic tire and wheel assemblies","App_Date":"1972-12-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Reginald Harold Edwards","Assignee":"Dunlop Limited","ICL_Class":"B60C  500","References":"1359461;2045341;3143155;3208497;3299934;3444918;3739829","Claims":"Having now described my invention, what I claim is:1. A wheel comprising a well-base rim having positioned in said well atleast one container for lubricating material provided with means forreleasing the lubricating material, the container being located within anarc of the circumference of the wheel no greater than one third of thetotal circumference, the remainder of the well being sufficient to allowan associated tire to be fitted with said at least one container inposition within the well and at least one tire bead retaining member formaintaining an associated tire bead in position against the flange of thewheel rim.2. A wheel as claimed in claim 1 in which the container is formedintegrally with the wheel and provided with replaceable means forreleasing the lubricating material.3. A wheel as claimed in claim 1 in which the means for releasing thelubricating material includes a frangible closure member in the containerwhich is ruptured to release the lubricating material.4. A wheel as claimed in claim 1 in which the container has an arcuate formin longitudinal section.5. A wheel as claimed in claim 4 in which the inner curvature of thecontainer matches the external curvature of the base of the well.6. A wheel as claimed in claim 1 comprising a plurality of containerslocated within an arc of the circumference of the wheel less than onethird of the total circumference of the wheel.7. A wheel as claimed in claim 1 including a counterbalancing mass for themass of the container and the lubricating material.8. A wheel as claimed in claim 1 in which the tire bead retaining member islocated diametrically opposite the enclosing means to maintain at leastthe laterally outer bead in position against a flange of the wheel rim.9. A wheel as claimed in claim 1 in which the tire bead retaining membercomprising a tongue movable between a tire fitting position which permitsmounting of a tire on the wheel and a tire bead engaging position in whichit maintains the tire bead in position against a flange of the wheel rimafter the tire has been mounted on the wheel.10. A pneumatic tire and wheel assembly capable of being run in a deflatedcondition comprising a wheel rim, a tire mounted on the wheel rim todefine an inflation chamber, means for preventing the tire from beingdislodged from the wheel rim when being run deflated, an enclosing meansfor lubricating material for the interior surfaces of the tire located inone circumferential sector of the tire, said enclosing means releasinglubricating material onto the interior surfaces of the tire when theassembly is used with the tire deflated to facilitate relative movementbetween contacting interior surfaces of the tire, and a counter-balancingmass located in an opposing circumferential sector which counter-balancesthe mass of the enclosing means and lubricating material in the assemblywhereby on release of the lubricating material from the enclosing meansthe assembly becomes out of balance.11. A pneumatic tire and wheel rim assembly as claimed in claim 10 in whichthe enclosing means has a frangible closure member which is ruptured toeffect release of the lubricating material.12. A pneumatic tire and wheel assembly as claimed in claim 10 in which therim of the wheel has a well in which the enclosing means is located.13. A pneumatic tire and wheel assembly as claimed in claim 12 in which theenclosing means comprises at least one container having an arcuate form inlongitudinal section and dimensioned in cross section to fit into thewell.14. A pneumatic tire and wheel assembly as claimed in claim 13 in which theradially inner curvature of the container matches the external curvatureof the base of the well.15. A pneumatic tire and wheel assembly as claimed in claim 13 comprising asingle container whose length is less than one third of the circumferenceof a circle having a radius corresponding to the radius of curvature ofthe radially inner arcuate surface of the container.16. A pneumatic tire and wheel rim assembly as claimed in claim 13comprising a plurality of containers located within an arc of thecircumference of the wheel less than one third of the total circumferenceof the wheel.17. A pneumatic tire and wheel rim assembly as claimed in claim 13 in whichat least one container is formed integrally with the well of the wheel rimand provided with a replaceable lubricant release means.18. A pneumatic tire and wheel rim assembly as claimed in claim 13 in whichthe means for preventing the tire from being dislodged from the wheel rimcomprises a portion of at least one container extending radially outwardlybeyond the well of the wheel rim to act as a spacer to prevent the tirebeads from being displaced axially inwardly into the well.19. A pneumatic tire and wheel rim assembly as claimed in claim 10 in whichthe means for preventing the tire from being dislodged from the wheel rimwhen being run deflated comprises at least one tire bead retaining memberfor maintaining a tire bead in position against a flange of the wheel rim.20. A pneumatic tire and wheel rim assembly as claimed in claim 19 in whichthe tire bead retaining member is located diametrically opposite theenclosing means to maintain at least the laterally outer bead in positionagainst a flange of the wheel rim.21. A pneumatic tire and wheel rim assembly as claimed in claim 19 in whichthe tire bead retaining member comprises a tongue movable between a tirefitting position which permits mounting of a tire on the wheel rim and atire bead engaging position in which it maintains the tire bead inposition against a flange of the wheel rim after the tire has been mountedon the wheel rim."}
{"WKU":"039305279","Title":"Tire and wheel assembly","App_Date":"1973-09-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Tom French","Assignee":"Dunlop Holdings Limited","ICL_Class":"B60B 2102;B60B 2110;B60B 2520;B60C  500","References":"1921772;2521305;2675846;2822019;2879824;2929432;3299934;3329192;3392772;3610310;3669174;3708847;3739829","Claims":"Having now described my invention what I claim is:1. A wheel for a single chamber pneumatic tire capable of being run in adeflated condition comprising a wheel rim having a pair of spaced apartseats for receiving the tire beads and a pair of annular flanges forpreventing axial outward movement of the tire beads when the tire isinflated, each flange having a circumferentially extending substantiallyaxially outwardly projecting portion defining a surface against which thesidewall of a tire can be supported when the tire is run deflated, eachaxially outwardly projecting portion having on its sidewall supportingsurface a coating of a low friction material.2. A wheel according to claim 1 in which the low friction material ispolytetrafluoroethylene.3. The wheel of claim 1 including a tire having a tread width greater thanthe overall width between extremities of the wheel rim.4. The wheel of claim 1 further including means between the spaced apartbead seats to prevent a bead of a tire mounted thereon from becomingdislodged from its bead seat when running in a deflated condition.5. A wheel according to claim 4 in which the means for preventing a bead ofa tire mounted thereon from becoming dislodged when running in a deflatedcondition comprises a portion on the wheel between the spaced apart seatsprojecting radially outwards thereof to form a saddle on which theinterior surface of the tread of a tire mounted on the rim can besupported upon deflation.6. A wheel according to claim 4 in which the means for preventing a bead ofa tire mounted thereon from becoming dislodged when running in a deflatedcondition comprises movable projections on the wheel rim extendingradially outwardly to prevent at least the laterally outer bead of thetire from moving away from its seat.7. A wheel according to claim 4 in which the means for preventing a bead ofa tire mounted thereon from becoming dislodged when running in a deflatedcondition comprises a nondecreasing diameter of the wheel rim between theflanges.8. A wheel according to claim 7 in which the wheel rim is split to permit atire to be mounted thereon."}
{"WKU":"039305287","Title":"Pneumatic tire having lubricant containing pocket integrally formed","App_Date":"1973-05-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Wilfred Henry Harrington","Assignee":"Dunlop Limited","ICL_Class":"B60C 1700;B60C  902","References":"2712847;2987093;3143155;3444918;3610308;3739829","Claims":"Having now described my invention, what I claim is:1. A pneumatic tire comprising a carcass, a tread portion, two sidewallportions each terminating in a bead region, and at least one of saidsidewall portions comprising two transversely spaced layers of materialwhich define therebetween at least one pocket integrally entirely withinthe tire structure, a lubricant composition in said pocket, the pocketbeing positioned in the tire in the region of a portion of the interiorsurface of the tire which contacts a second portion of the interiorsurface of the tire upon substantial underinflation or deflation of thetire during use thereof on a wheel such that the lubricant composition insaid pocket is releasable therefrom onto the interior surface of the tire.2. A pneumatic tire according to claim 1 wherein a wall of the pocket thatis adjacent to said interior surface is the thinnest wall of the pocket.3. A pneumatic tire according to claim 1 wherein the pocket is positionedadjacent to one of the bead regions of the tire.4. A pneumatic tire according to claim 3 wherein two pockets are definedwithin the tire structure, one being disposed adjacent to each bead regionof the tire.5. A pneumatic tire according to claim 1 wherein the pocket is filleddirectly with the lubricant composition.6. A pneumatic tire according to claim 1 wherein the pocket is rupturableduring use thereof on a wheel, upon substantial underinflation ordeflation of the tire, by impact or abrasion in the portions of theinterior surface of the tire which come into contact.7. A pneumatic tire according to claim 1 wherein the pocket is rupturableduring use thereof on a wheel, upon substantial underinflation ordeflation of the tire, by heat generated between the portions of theinterior surface of the tire which come into contact, upon rotation of thetire and wheel.8. A pneumatic tire according to claim 1 wherein said means defines atleast two pockets, at least one ingredient of the lubricant compositionbeing located in a separate pocket from a second ingredient.9. A pneumatic tire comprising a carcass, a tread portion, two sidewallportions each terminating in a bead region, and at least one of saidsidewall portions comprising two transversely spaced layers of materialwhich define therebetween at least one pocket integrally within the tirestructure, a lubricant composition in said pocket, the pocket beingpositioned in the tire in the region of a portion of the interior surfaceof the tire which contacts a second portion of said surface uponsubstantial underinflation or deflation of the tire during use thereof ona wheel such that the lubricant composition in said pocket is releasabletherefrom onto said surface, at least one permanent opening being providedbetween the pocket interior and the tire interior, the lubricantcomposition being in said pocket in separate containing means.10. A pneumatic tire according to claim 9 wherein the separate containingmeans is rupturable during use thereof on a wheel, upon substantialunderinflation or deflation of the tire, by impact or abrasion in theportions of the interior surface of the tire which come into contact.11. A pneumatic tire according to claim 9 wherein the separate containingmeans is rupturable during use thereof on a wheel, upon substantialunderinflation or deflation of the tire, by heat generated between theportions of the interior surface of the tire which come into contact, uponrotation of the tire and wheel.12. A pneumatic tire according to claim 9 wherein at least two separatecontaining means are located in said pocket, at least one ingredient ofthe lubricant composition being located in a separate containing meansfrom a second ingredient.13. A pneumatic tire according to claim 9 wherein the separate containingmeans comprises at least one sachet of elongated form located in thepocket by insertion through said opening.14. A pneumatic tire according to claim 9 wherein a plurality of openingsare provided in the pocket, the separate containing means comprising aplurality of sachets in the pocket, the sachets being of a length suchthat each end of each sachet is adjacent an opening in the pocket.15. A pneumatic tire according to claim 13 wherein the sachet is rupturableby peristaltic action.16. A pneumatic tire comprising a carcass, a tread portion, two sidewallportions each terminating in a bead region, said tread portion comprisingtwo radially spaced layers of material which define therebetween at leastone pocket integrally entirely within the tire structure, said pocketbeing positioned adjacent to but laterally inwardly of an edge of thetread, a lubricant composition in said pocket, the pocket being positionedin the tire in the region of a portion of the interior surface of the tirewhich contacts a second portion of the interior surface of the tire uponsubstantial underinflation or deflation of the tire during use thereof ona wheel such that the lubricant composition in said pocket is releasabletherefrom onto the interior surface of the tire.17. A pneumatic tire according to claim 16 wherein two pockets are definedwithin the tire structure, one being disposed adjacent to but laterallyinwardly of each tread edge of the tire.18. A pneumatic tire comprising a carcass, a tread portion, two sidewallportions each terminating in a bead region, and at least one pocketintegrally formed within the tire structure and in which a lubricantcomposition can be located, the pocket being positioned in the tire in theregion of a portion of the interior surface of the tire which contacts asecond portion of said surface upon substantial underinflation ordeflation of the tire during use thereof on a wheel such that a lubricantcomposition located in said pocket is releasable therefrom onto saidsurface, at least one permanent opening being provided between the pocketinterior and the tire interior, the lubricant composition being locatablein said pocket in separate containing means, said separate containingmeans comprises at least one sachet of elongated form located in thepocket by insertion through said opening, and said sachet is stronger atthe center than at the ends thereof whereby said sachet can bepreferentially ruptured at at least one end, the lubricant compositionthereby being released adjacent an opening in the pocket.19. A pneumatic tire according to claim 18 wherein said sachet is thickerat the center than at the ends thereof.20. A pneumatic tire according to claim 18 wherein said sachet is cordreinforced at the center thereof.21. A pneumatic tire comprising a carcass, a tread portion and two sidewallportions each terminating in a bead region, the tire forming a singleinflation chamber with a wheel when mounted thereon during use, at leastone of said sidewall portions comprises two transversely spaced layers ofmaterial which define therebetween at least one pocket integrally entirelywithin the tire structure, a lubricant composition in said pocket, thepocket being positioned in the tire in the region of a portion of theinterior surface of the tire which contacts a second portion of theinterior surface of the tire upon substantial underinflation or deflationof the tire during use thereof on the wheel such that the lubricantcomposition in said pocket is releasable therefrom onto the interiorsurface of the tire.22. A pneumatic tire comprising a carcass having at least one carcassreinforcement, a tread portion and two sidewall portions each terminatingin a bead region, at least one of said sidewall portions comprises twotransversely spaced layers of material which define therebetween at leastone pocket integrally entirely within the tire structure, a lubricantcomposition in said pocket, the pocket being positioned in the tirebetween the interior surface of the tire and said carcass reinforcementand in the region of a portion of said surface which contacts a secondportion of the said surface upon substantial underinflation or deflationof the tire during use thereof on a wheel such that the lubricantcomposition in said pocket is releasable therefrom onto the interiorsurface of the tire.23. A pneumatic tire according to claim 22 wherein the tire forms a singleinflation chamber with a wheel when mounted thereon during use.24. A pneumatic tire comprising a carcass, a tread portion and two sidewallportions each terminating in a bead region, the tire forming a singleinflation chamber with a wheel when mounted thereon during use, at leastone of said sidewall portions comprises two transversely spaced layers ofmaterial which define therebetween at least one pocket integrally entirelywithin the tire structure, a lubricant composition in said pocket, thepocket being positioned in the tire in the region of a portion of theinterior surface of the tire which contacts a second portion of theinterior surface of the tire upon substantial underinflation or deflationof the tire during use thereof on a wheel such that the lubricantcomposition in said pocket is releasable therefrom onto the interiorsurface of the tire, the pocket being provided with at least one permanentopening between the interior of the pocket and the interior of the tire,the lubricant composition being locatable therein in separate containingmeans.25. A pneumatic tire according to claim 24 wherein the carcass comprises atleast one carcass reinforcement, the pocket being disposed between thereinforcement and the interior surface of the tire.26. A pneumatic tire comprising a carcass, a tread portion, two sidewallportions each terminating in a bead region, and at least one of saidsidewall portions comprising two transversely spaced layers of materialwhich define therebetween at least one pocket integrally within the tirestructure, a lubricant composition in said pocket, the pocket beingpositioned in the tire in the region of a portion of the interior surfaceof the tire which contacts a second portion of said surface uponsubstantial underinflation or deflation of the tire during use thereof ona wheel such that the lubricant composition in said pocket is releasabletherefrom onto said surface, said pocket being substantially annular andextending around the circumference of the tire, and having a restrictedportion of greater rupture strength than a wall of the pocket whereby thewall ruptures preferentially to the restricted portion.27. A pneumatic tire according to claim 26 wherein a plurality ofrestricted portions are provided in said pocket to form circumferentiallyspaced-apart compartments.28. A pneumatic tire according to claim 27 wherein at least on ingredientof the lubricant composition is located in a compartment separate fromthat in which a second ingredient is located.29. A pneumatic tire comprising a carcass, a tread portion, two sidewallportions each terminating in a bead region, means defining at least onepocket integrally within the tire structure in a bead region of the tire,a lubricant composition in said pocket, the pocket being positioned in thetire in a region of a portion of the interior surface of the tire whichcontacts a second portion of said surface upon substantial underinflationor deflation of the tire during use thereof on a wheel such that thelubricant composition in said pocket is releasable therefrom onto saidsurface, at least one permanent opening being provided between the pocketinterior and the tire interior, the lubricant composition being in saidpocket in at least one lubricant composition container in the pocket, saidopening comprising a slot extending over the circumferential length of thepocket in the radially-outermost part of the pocket, and means forretaining said at least one lubricant composition container in the pocket."}
{"WKU":"039305295","Title":"Method and apparatus for removing tread from tires","App_Date":"1974-05-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William E. Fawcett;William D. Armbrust;Robert S. Gulibon","Assignee":"Kennametal Inc.","ICL_Class":"B29h 2101","References":"2656591;2751663;2930110;3242553;3426828;3526025;3604084","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Cutting means for a machine for removing a tread from a tire in whichthe machine comprises a tool spindle rotatable in a predetermineddirection on a first axis and a work spindle defining a second axis onwhich a tire is rotatable with the tread opposed to an annular region of atool disc on said tool spindle, said axes being relatively pivotal about athird axis to present a lateral range of the tire tread to the tool disc,said cutting means comprising; a tool disc on said tool spindle, an axialflange at the periphery of said tool disc, blocks detachably mounted andarranged in end to end relation radially inside said flange and forming anannular region on said disc, pocket means distributed circumferentially insaid annular region of the disc, and circular cutting inserts of hard wearresistant material detachably and indexably mounted in said pocket meansin predetermined axial and radial positions relative to the tool disc,each insert having a peripheral portion protruding axially and angularlyfrom the tool disc for cutting engagement with a tire on said workspindle, each insert having the diameter thereof which is parallel to theplane of said tool disc extending substantially radially of the disc andeach insert being inclined in the direction of rotation of said disc toprovide an effective positive radial rake angle of not less than about20.degree..2. Cutting means according to claim 1 in which each said insert hasparallel top and bottom faces with the top face on the leading side andthe bottom face on the trailing side, the peripheral wall of said insertbeing bevelled off rearwardly from said top face to form a sharp cuttingedge on the insert at the juncture of the peripheral wall of the insertwith leading side of the insert.3. Cutting means according to claim 2 in which the bevel on the peripheralwall of the insert comprises a first region adjacent the top face making alarger included acute angle with said top face and a second regionextending from said bottom face to the first region and forming a smallerincluded acute angle with said top face.4. Cutting means according to claim 1 in which said inserts are distributedradially in said annular region of the disc.5. Cutting means according to claim 2 in which each pocket means includes acylindrical axial recess in a respective block, a plug element fixed inthe recess and having an inclined support wall for engagement with the topface of a respective insert, a clamp element receivable in the recess andhaving an inclined clamping wall parallel to said support wall andengageable with the bottom face of the insert, and means for clamping saidclamp element in said recess to clamp the insert between the plug elementand the clamp element.6. Cutting means according to claim 5 in which the insert has a centralaxial hole and said clamp element includes a pin upstanding therefrom andengageable with the hole in the insert.7. Cutting means according to claim 5 in which each block has at least oneaxial bore extending therethrough and counterbored from the end nearestsaid disc, and a cup-shaped sleeve element receivable in said bore fromthe counterbore and open toward the other end and forming a said recessfor receiving an insert.8. Cutting means according to claim 5 which includes a relieved regionadjacent the top face of each insert for the flow of chips taken from atire tread.9. A method of removing tread material from a pneumatic tire preparatory torecapping thereof which comprises; rotating the tire on the axis thereof,arranging sharp edged cutting inserts on an annular surface in annularlyand radially differing spaced relation and arranging said surface suchthat said inserts are at a positive radial rake angle of at least about20.degree. relative to the tire tread when adjacent thereto, moving theinserts relative to the tire while maintaining said rake angle, andfeeding the tire and cutting inserts toward each other to cause eachinsert to take a discrete chip which is relatively narrow but ofsubstantial length from the tread of the tire each time the respectiveinsert moves past the tread of the tire.10. A method according to claim 9 in which the tire and inserts are fedtoward each other at a feed rate such that each insert encounters asubstantial body of tread material each time an insert engages the tire.11. A method according to claim 9 in which the tire is rotated on the axisthereof during cutting while the inserts are mounted in a rotary toolholder, and said tire and holder are moved relatively during cutting ofthe tread to cause the region of the tread cut by the inserts to progresslaterally across the tire tread and partway along the side wall portionsof the tire.12. A method according to claim 9 in which the tire is rotated on the axisthereof during cutting while said inserts move in a circular path about anaxis substantially perpendicular to the axis of the tire.13. A method according to claim 9 in which the chips taken by therespective inserts are closely adjacent one another whereby the tire whenfully operated is relatively smooth."}
{"WKU":"039305309","Title":"Clamping device","App_Date":"1974-05-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John Fairburn Askam","Assignee":"Dunlop Limited","ICL_Class":"B60C 2506","References":"2882943;3074468","Claims":"I claim:1. A clamping device for a workpiece having a hole extending therethroughcomprising a base, a post of non-circular cross-section non-rotatablysecured to the base and extending outwardly therefrom, the workpiece beingcapable of being supported against the base with the post extendingthrough the hole of the workpiece, a securing member having an internalcross-sectional shape corresonding sufficiently to the non-circularcross-section of the post to enable the securing member to benon-rotatably positioned on the post, the securing member having aprojection extending outwardly therefrom for abutment with an edge of theworkpiece inwardly of the workpiece periphery and extending radially fromthe post, said internal cross-section and post having friction engagingsurfaces therebetween whereby on application of a force tending to rotatethe workpiece about the post the abutment of the projection with the edgeand the non-rotational engagement of the securing member with the postprevents rotation and axial movement of the workpiece away from the basealong the post without any separate locking means between the securingmember and the post.2. A clamping device according to claim 1 wherein the base is horizontaland the post extends upwardly from the base.3. A clamping device according to claim 1 wherein the securing membercomprises an internal surface which corresponds to the external surface ofthe post.4. A clamping device according to claim 1 wherein the securing membercomprises a flat plate.5. A clamping device according to claim 4 wherein the flat plate is formedwith a square hole and the post is formed with at least two flat faceswhich are parallel to one another and spaced-apart by a distance which isslightly less than that between opposite sides of the square hole.6. A clamping device according to claim 1 wherein the securing membercomprises a tube.7. A clamping device according to claim 6 wherein part of the internalsurface of the tube is hexagonal in cross-section and the external surfaceof the post is hexagonal in cross-section, the tube being a sliding fit onthe post.8. A clamping device according to claim 6 wherein the tube is provided witha slideable bar extending radially thereof.9. A clamping device comprising a base on which a workpiece having a holeextending therethrough may be supported in a substantially horizontalplane, an upright post of non-circular cross-section non-rotatably securedto the base and extending upwardly therefrom, the workpiece being capableof being positioned with the post extending through the hole of theworkpiece, a securing member comprising an external surface for engagementwith the edge of the hole and having an internal cross-sectional shapecorresponding to the non-circular cross-section of the post to enable thesecuring member to be non-rotatably positioned on the post with thesurface in engagement with the edge of the hole of the workpiece, thesecuring member having a projection extending outwardly therefrom forsecure engagement with a radially extending edge of the workpiece radiallyinwards of the workpiece periphery, said internal cross-section and posthaving friction engaging surfaces therebetween whereby on application of aforce tending to rotate the workpiece about the post the abutment of theprojection with the edge and the non-rotational engagement of the securingmember with the post prevents rotation and axial movement of the workpieceaway from the base along the post without any separate locking meansbetween the securing member and the post.10. A clamping device according to claim 9 wherein the surface for engagingthe edge of the hole in the workpiece is conical.11. A tire changing apparatus including a clamping device according toclaim 1."}
{"WKU":"039305317","Title":"Method for manufacturing ingots of high-melting ferroalloys and metal","App_Date":"1974-05-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Josef Frehser;Christian Kubisch;Karl Swoboda","Assignee":"Vereinigte Edelstahlwerke Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"B22D 2702","References":"3067473;3669178;3768543","Claims":"We claim:1. A method of manufacturing ingots of high-melting ferroalloys and metalalloys having favorable formability and a fine grain solidificationtexture comprising: melting at least one consumable electrode in a slagbath in an ingot mold; cooling the ingot mold wall with a liquid metal;providing a gas inert to the slag under a pressure of at least 20atmospheres above the slag; and adjusting the cooling of the ingot mold inthe area of the immersed electrode to retain the liquid condition of theslag, and in the area of the ingot mold wall to retain the solid conditionof the slag, both conditions being retained during the melting phase toobtain an area of solid slag between the ingot mold wall and liquid slagarea of a dimension of between 1/100 and 1/10 of the ingot mold diameter.2. The method according to claim 1, wherein the liquid metal used to coolthe ingot mold is sodium having a temperature of between 350.degree.C and650.degree.C.3. The method according to claim 1, wherein the electrode is continuouslymelted in the slag bath.4. The method according to claim 1, further comprising adding anitrogen-containing substance in finely divided form with a maximum grainsize of 6 mm to the slag bath during the melting phase.5. The method according to claim 4, wherein the nitrogen-containingsubstance is added in a pre-heated condition.6. The method according to claim 4, wherein the nitrogen-containingsubstance has a melting point at least 50.degree.C lower than thetemperature of the slag bath.7. The method according to claim 4, wherein the nitrogen-containingsubstance is a mixture of chromium nitride and manganese nitride andwherein chromium and manganese are present in the same ratio as in theconsumable electrode.8. The method according to claim 1, further comprising adding a ferroalloyin a finely divided form with a maximum grain size of 6 mm to the slagbath during the melting phase.9. The method according to claim 1, further comprising adding a substancewhich when melted produces the ingot composition in a finely divided formwith a maximum grain size of 6 mm to the slag bath during the meltingphase.10. The method according to claim 1, further comprising adding an alkalineearth metal in a finely divided form with a maximum grain size of 6 mm tothe slag bath during the melting phase.11. The method according to claim 1, further comprising adding a materialhaving the same composition as the consumable electrode in a finelydivided form with a maximum grain size of 6 mm to the slag bath during themelting phase."}
{"WKU":"039305325","Title":"Continuous centrifugal tube casting apparatus with dry mold and gas","App_Date":"1971-09-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"George R. Leghorn","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B22D 1302","References":"1377372;1444953;1527729;2707813;3367400;3416591","Claims":"I claim:1. Apparatus for continuous centrifugal casting of tube, comprising:a generally tubular mold having an inlet end portion and an outlet endportion;an exit orifice in said outlet end portion;means for rotating said mold about is axis;means for introducing molten casting material into said inlet end portion;means for controlling the rate of exit of the cast tube from said exitorifice; andpressure means for maintaining a differential gas pressure lower in theinterior of said tube than exterior thereto,said pressure means acting to decrease the expansion of said tube byrotational centrifugal forces and permits normal thermal shrinkage todecrease its diameter to facilitate its exit from said exit orifice.2. Apparatus as in claim 1, further comprising the following inlet endportion sealing means:a rotating sealing member attached to said inlet end portion of said moldand having a peripheral portion in the general shape of an annular troughwith the open portion of said trough facing inwardly;a liquid sealant in said trough maintained therein in the shape of anannular liquid sealing ring by rotational centrifugal force; anda stationary sealing wall member having a generally circular rim portionimmersed in said annular liquid sealing ring,both said sealing members cooperating with said ring to form asubstantially gas-tight seal between the interior and exterior of saidmold.3. Apparatus as in claim 2, wherein:said stationary sealing wall member is generally disc-shaped, and isprovided with apertures for access to the interior of said mold.4. Apparatus as in claim 1, further comprising:an annular enclosure encompassing said outlet end portion of said mold andthe periphery of said tube outside said exit orifice;enclosure seal means rotatably sealing said enclosure to the peripheries ofsaid mold and said tube; andmeans for introducing a gas into said enclosure at a predeterminedpressure,whereby said pressure acts on the exterior of said tube to at leastpartially counteract its expansion by the rotational centrifugal forces.5. Apparatus as in claim 4, wherein:said enclosure seal means comprises a plurality of individually movablerefractory members disposed generally in the manner of an iris diaphragmto maintain sealing contact over a range of inner diameters.6. Apparatus as in claim 4, wherein:said enclosure seal means comprises a gas bearing to reduce frictionbetween the rotating parts and the seal faces,the gas pressure in said gas bearing aiding substantially in maintainingthe pressure in said enclosure.7. Apparatus as in claim 4, wherein:said enclosure seal means comprises a liquid bearing.8. Apparatus as in claim 1, further comprising:means for collapsing a portion of said tube after its exit from said moldto seal it and maintain said gas pressure."}
{"WKU":"039305333","Title":"Continuous casting apparatus with flexible starting bar which is","App_Date":"1975-02-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Joseph Rokop;Geoffrey W. Hughes","Assignee":"Rokop Corporation","ICL_Class":"B22D 1108","References":"1870244;3344844;3433287;3593776","Claims":"We claim:1. Continuous casting apparatus, comprising a flow-through casting mold, anelongated strand-starting member curved lengthwise in a vertical plane andhaving one end formed for temporarily plugging the bottom of the moldwhile molten metal therein adheres to said member, said member beingprovided with a row of rack teeth extending along one side from itsopposite end, a storage housing spaced laterally from the mold and havinga substantially vertical passage therethrough for said member, a pair ofreversible driven pinch rolls located about half way between the mold andstorage housing and at a lower level in a position to grip the lower endportion of said starting member while its upper end is plugging the mold,said rolls being rotatable in a direction to withdraw the starting memberand an attached metal strand from the mold and feed said member up intosaid housing passage, a vertical gear projecting into one side of saidhousing for engagement by said rack teeth, an overrunning clutchoperatively connected with the gear and permitting it to free wheel in onedirection as said rack teeth move upwardly across the gear until the lowerend of the metal strand has passed said pinch rolls, driving means forcontrolling rotation of the clutch in the opposite direction by thestarting member when said member is disconnected from the strand, thedriving means including means for preventing rotation of the clutch insaid opposite direction by said gear while the driving means is notoperating, and means for bending the lower end of the strand down toseparate it from the starting member and straighten the portion of thestrand between said member and rolls while said member is supported bysaid gear, said clutch being rotatable by said driving means at acontrolled speed in said opposite direction to allow the lower end of thestored starting member to return by gravity to said pinch rolls after thestrand has left said rolls, whereupon the starting member can be fed bythe pinch rolls back up to the mold.2. Continuous casting apparatus according to claim 1, in which said clutchincludes inner and outer races with clutching means between them, andmeans rigidly connecting the outer race to one side of said gear, saiddriving means including a shaft rigidly connected to said inner race, andmeans for rotating the shaft only in said opposite direction.3. Continuous casting apparatus according to claim 1, in which said bendingmeans include an arm pivoted at one end on a horizontal axis above thepath of movement of said starting member, and means for swinging theopposite end of the arm down to push the lower end of the stranddownwardly.4. Continuous casting apparatus according to claim 1, in which the strandend of said starting member is provided with a disposable mold plug havingan inner end laterally overlapping the adjoining portion of said member,and a shear pin extending through said plug end and overlapped portion ofthe starting member and adapted to be sheared off by downward pressure ofsaid bending means against the plug.5. Continuous casting apparatus according to claim 4, in which saidoverlapped portion of the starting member has a lateral projection, andthe inner end of said plug is provided with a recess receiving saidprojection, said recess opening upwardly when the plug is in position tobe forced down by said bending means.6. Continuous casting apparatus according to claim 1, including a roller insaid storage housing passage opposite said gear for holding the teeth ofthe starting member against the gear.7. Continuous casting apparatus according to claim 1, in which several ofsaid rack teeth nearest said opposite end of the starting member projectfrom the side of a bar that is pivoted at its inner end to said member ona transverse axis, and a spring is disposed between said bar and theportion of the starting member behind it, whereby said gear can swing theouter end of said bar backward against the resistance of said spring untilthe rack teeth mesh with the gear teeth.8. Continuous casting apparatus according to claim 1, in which saidstarting member includes a plurality of substantially rigid curved linkspivoted together end to end on parallel horizontal axes for limitedpivoted movement relative to one another.9. Continuous casting apparatus according to claim 1, in which saidcontrolled speed of said clutch is faster than said pinch rolls are drivenin feeding the starting member toward the mold.10. Continuous casting apparatus according to claim 1, in which saidstarting member is formed from a plurality of curved links pivoted end toend for limited swinging in a vertical plane relative to one another."}
{"WKU":"039305341","Title":"Mold for continuous casting of slab ingots","App_Date":"1974-02-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Klaus Wunnenberg;Gerd Vogt","Assignee":"Mannesmann Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"B22D 1106;B22D 11124","References":"425846;2079644;3834445","Claims":"We claim:1. In a mold for continuous casting of slab ingots and having wide andnarrow sides accordingly, the wide sides extending lower than the narrowsides to establish two gaps below the bottom lines of the narrow sides,the improvement comprising:at least one roll respectively in each of said gaps, directly underneaththe bottom edge of the respective narrow side and being journalled forengagement with and exertion of controlled pressure upon narrow ingotsides as emerging from the mold.2. In a mold as in claim 1, wherein the rolls are mounted resiliently andadjustable.3. In a mold as in claim 1, there being spray nozzles disposed adjacent therolls for spraying coolant onto the ingot surface as exposed in the gap."}
{"WKU":"039305350","Title":"Apparatus for the preparation and dispensing of soft ice-cream","App_Date":"1974-03-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Waldemar Menzel","Assignee":"Ireks Arkady GmbH","ICL_Class":"F25B 2900","References":"2215729;3225821;3285331;3369596;3402562;3464220;3811494","Claims":"What we claim is:1. An apparatus for the preparation and dispensing of portions of soft icecream comprising:a storage tank;a freezing cylinder disposed below said storage tank;an agitator located in the interior of said freezing cylinder;a replenishing duct connecting said storage tank to said freezing cylinder;anda heating means in said freezing cylinder and connected to said storagetank for heating said freezing cylinder and said storage tank, saidheating means including a first thermostat means for preventing theexceeding of a temperature lying above the evaporation temperature of thecontents of said freezing cylinder, said first thermostat means includinga first temperature sensor fitted on said freezing cylinder, said heatingmeans further including a second thermostat means for switching saidheating means off when a temperature is reached sufficient for thepasteurization of the contents of said storage tank, said secondthermostat means including a second temperature sensor fitted on saidstorage tank;wherein said heating device causes the contents of said freezing cylinderto be partially evaporated and the steam flowing therefrom into saidstorage tank heats the contents of said tank to a sterilizationtemperature.2. Apparatus according to claim 1 wherein said helical cooling channel cutsinto the interior wall of said thick-walled tube to such degree that thewidth of the wall in the region of the cooling channel is minimal incomparison with the overall thickness of the wall of the tube.3. Apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the freezing cylinder is formedby a thick-walled tube in which a helical cooling channel is formed andwhich is closed outwardly by a shrunk-on tube which rests tightly on ahelical web forming the wall of said channel.4. Apparatus according to claim 1, wherein said heating means of thefreezing cylinder is an electrically acting heating device which is fittedto the outer surface of the freezing cylinder only in that region which isacted upon from within by the agitator.5. Apparatus according to claim 1, further including a relay wherein saidsecond thermostat is used to latch said relay connected in the circuit ofthe heating arrangement.6. Apparatus according to claim 1, wherein a driving motor for the agitatorand scraping unit is connected in the circuit for the heating deviceby-passing said first thermostat.7. Apparatus according to claim 1, further including a relay having aswitching contact which is closed in the rest state of the relay and whichis connected in the circuit of a refrigerating installation.8. Apparatus according to claim 7, wherein third and fourth thermostats areconnected in the circuit of the refrigerating installation, thetemperature sensor of one thermostat being fitted on the freezing cylinderand the temperature sensor of the other thermostat being provided on thestorage tank, and the storage tank and the freezing cylinder have coolingcircuits, separate from one another and not capable of being switched ontogether, the cooling circuit of the freezing cylinder being connected forpriority over the cooling circuit of the storage tank."}
{"WKU":"039305368","Title":"Heat exchanger","App_Date":"1974-05-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Harold Cherry;George E. Strudgeon","Assignee":"Zurn Industries, Inc.","ICL_Class":"F28f  926","References":"912671;2274233","Claims":"I claim:1. A heat exchanger for heating sludge comprising a plurality of stackedparallel heat exchange elements,each said heat exchange element comprising an outer tube and an inner tube,return bends connecting each said inner tube in fluid flow relation withthe inner tube of an adjacent said element and connecting each said outertube in fluid flow relation with a said outer tube of said adjacentelement,each said outer tube providing a flow path for hot liquid to an outer tubeof a said adjacent element,each said return bend comprising a hollow body having a first flat externaland surface and a second generally flat external and surface disposedgenerally parallel to each other,an internal partition in said hollow body generally parallel to said flatand surfaces and dividing said hollow body into a first chamber and asecond chamber,two first holes formed in said first end surface of said body and twospaced second holes in said second end surface of said body,two spaced bores in said partition,each said spaced bore being disposed in alignment with a said hole in saidfirst end and a said hole in said second end surface,each said inner tube having a peripherial surface adjacent an end slidablyreceived in a said bore in said partition and having sealing means betweensaid ends of said inner tubes and the inside of said bore,a flanged member having a flat surface resting on said first end surface ofsaid body and sealing means between said flat surface of said body andsaid flat surface of said flanged member,two spaced openings in said flanged member align with said first holes insaid first end surface of said return bend,each said outer tube being fixed to said flanged member and forming acontinuation of a flow path through said flanged member, through saidsecond openings in said first end of said body and through said secondchamber to another said outer tube and first bolt means clamping saidflanged member to said return bend,each of said bodies being adapted to be removed from said flanged memberand from said outer tubes and said inner tubes by removing said bolt meansfrom said flanged member and sliding said inner tubes out of said spacedbores in said partition and from said holes in said first end of saidbody,and threaded plug means in said openings in said second ends of said bodywhereby access to said inner tubes may be obtained by removing said plugs,said second openings being substantially smaller than said inner tubes,said second end of said body having an inner end surface curved about arelatively large radius and providing a contoured path for sludge flowingthrough said inner tubes from said inner tube to another said inner tubeand defining an end of said first chamber providing a relatively low headloss and sludge flowing from one said inner tube to another,said first chamber having a relatively large cross sectional area ascompared to the cross sectional area of said inner tubes whereby pluggingof said chamber by said sludge is inhibited."}
{"WKU":"039305376","Title":"Heat exchanger","App_Date":"1974-05-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Walter Wolowodiuk","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the United States Energy","ICL_Class":"F28f  902","References":"3182719;3490521;3683866;3768554","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A heat exchanger comprising: a shell;an upper tube sheet within said shell;a lower sheet within said shell;plate means below said lower tube sheet, said plate means joining with saidlower tube sheet to define a chamber below said lower tube sheet;a plurality of straight heat exchange tubes extending between said firsttube sheet and said second tube sheet;a shroud within said shell and surrounding said heat exchange tubes;an intake in said shell for flowing a first heat exchange fluid downthrough said shroud, between said tube sheets and over said heat exchangetubes;an exhaust in said shell for allowing said first heat exchange fluid toleave said shell;an inlet in said shell for admitting a second heat exchange fluid into saidshell;an outlet in said shell for permitting said second heat exchange fluid toleave said heat exchanger;a supply pipe connected between said inlet and said chamber, said supplypipe extending generally longitudinally, and laterally of said heatexchange tubes, said supply pipe having a helical portion encircling saidshroud;whereby differences in thermal expansion between said supply pipe and saidheat exchange tubes will not result in structural failure because saidhelical portion will flex to accommodate the difference in thermalexpansion.2. The heat exchanger defined in claim 1 wherein both of said tube sheetsare horizontal and wherein said heat exchange tubes extend vertically.3. The heat exchanger defined in claim 2 wherein said intake is above saidexhaust.4. The heat exchanger defined in claim 3 wherein said supply pipe is one ofa plurality of supply pipes.5. The heat exchanger defined in claim 4 wherein said helical portionsdefine a series of helices with a common axis.6. The heat exchanger defined in claim 5 wherein said helices have equalradii of curvature."}
{"WKU":"039305384","Title":"Wellpoint with adjustable valve","App_Date":"1974-11-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Walter W. Brennan;Charles R. Myers;Paul E. Perry","Assignee":"Griffin Wellpoint Corporation","ICL_Class":"E03B  318;E21B 4302","References":"2359717;2780293;2891623","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A wellpoint comprising:pipe means for the intake of liquid from the well and connection to vacuumproducing means;screen means spaced apart from and surrounding said pipe means foradmitting and maintaining a liquid supply for said pipe means; andslidably adjustable valve means located between said pipe means and saidscreen means for adjusting the amount of surface area of said screen pipesubjected to said vacuum.2. The wellpoint of claim 1 wherein said valve means comprises:a valve member slidably mounted on said pipe means and shaped to conform tothe space between said screen means and said pipe means; andmeans for maintaining said valve members in a selected position on saidscreen pipe.3. The wellpoint of claim 1 wherein said screen means is a cylindrical,intermittently slotted pipe and said pipe means is cylindrical andconcentric within said screen means and removable therefrom and whereinsaid valve means comprises:an annular valve member slidably mounted on said pipe means and shaped toconform to the space between said pipe and screen means, said valve memberhaving first and second chamfered edges abutting said pipe means;a first O-ring mounted on said pipe means and against said first chamferededge; anda second O-ring member mounted on said pipe means and against said secondchamfered edge.4. The wellpoint of claim 1 further including means for positioning saidpipe means within said screen means and enabling manual removal of saidpipe means from said screen means.5. A wellpoint comprising:a cylindrical screen pipe having a closed end for insertion into a well, anopen end and openings formed intermittently on its length;a cylindrical pipe member removably mounted on one end concentricallywithin said open end of said screen pipe and adapted to be connected withvacuum producing means on its other end;an annular valve member slidably mounted on said pipe member and shaped toconform to the space between said screen and pipe member and having firstand second chamfered edges abutting said pipe member;a first O-ring mounted on said pipe member and against said first edge; anda second O-ring mounted on said pipe member and against said second edge.6. In a wellpoint having an outer screen pipe for admitting and maintaininga supply of liquid and an inner vacuum producing pipe, the improvementcomprising:slidably adjustable valve means located between the outer screen pipe andthe vacuum producing pipe for adjusting the amount of surface of saidscreen pipe subjected to said vacuum."}
{"WKU":"039305392","Title":"Method of obtaining increased production in wells","App_Date":"1975-05-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Arvel C. Curtis","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"E21B 4326;E21B 4327","References":"139010;1806499;2747672;3529666;3593793;3630281;3702635;3776312;R26466","Claims":"I claim:1. A process of treating oil or gas wells to increase the productivitythereof which comprises introducing into the bottom of the well a mixtureof two acids which alone do not react vigorously with each other at normaltemperatures and pressures and pumping into the bottom of the well anaccelerator which produces in conjunction with the mixture of acids aviolent exothermic reaction, thereby producing an expansion force anddisintegrating the formation to form large cavities and passages therein.2. A process as claimed in claim 1, in which the acids are hydrochloric andphosphoric acids and the accelerator is aqueous ammonia.3. A process as claimed in claim 2, in which the accelerator is forced intothe well by nitrogen under pressure."}
{"WKU":"039305406","Title":"Wellbore circulating valve","App_Date":"1974-10-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John C. Holden;Gary Q. Wray","Assignee":"Halliburton Company","ICL_Class":"E21B 3300","References":"2951536;3071151;3126965;3237695;3306366;3361212;3433301;3456723;3507327;3570595;3583481;3664415;3750749","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a well testing apparatus to be used in conjunction with a testingtool string having open interior means including flow passage meansoperable to communicate will well formation fluid under the control ofvalve means for opening and closing said flow passage means in response tochanges in pressure of fluid in a well annulus surrounding said apparatus,the improvement comprising:normally closed, well annulus pressure change responsive, circulating valvemeans adapted to communicate a portion of said open interior means of saidstring with said well annulus; andopening means responsive to at least a predetermined minimum number of saidpressure changes for opening said circulating valve means to enable fluidto be removed from said open interior means of said testing tool string bycirculation of fluid between said well annulus and said open interior;said opening means being operable to prevent said opening of saidcirculating valve means until after said predetermined minimum number ofsaid pressure changes has occurred; andsaid circulating valve means, prior to said opening thereof, being operableto prevent fluid communication between fluid in said well annulus andfluid in said open interior means of said tool string, through saidopening means.2. The improvement in the well testing apparatus of claim 1 whereinsaid open interior means has a normally closed port in communicationtherewith, andsaid circulating valve means includes a slidable sleeve arranged to spansaid port in one position and is movable to another position to open saidport.3. The improvement in the well testing apparatus of claim 2 wherein saidopening means includes piston means within said apparatus havinga transverse surface area subject to the pressure of fluid in the wellannulus surrounding said apparatus so that fluid pressure can act to shiftsaid piston means in one longitudinal direction, andmeans for urging said piston means in the other longitudinal direction.4. In a method of well testing to be used in conjunction with a testingtool string having open interior means including flow passage meansoperable to communicate with well formation fluid under the control ofvalve means for opening and closing said flow passage means in response tochanges in the pressure of fluid in a well annulus surrounding saidapparatus, the improvement comprising:providing in said testing tool string normally closed, well annuluspressure change responsive circulating valve means adapted to communicatea portion of said open interior means of said tool string with said wellannulus;responsive to at least a predetermined minimum number of said pressurechanges for opening said circulating valve means, opening said circulatingvalve means to enable fluid to be removed from said open interior means ofsaid testing tool string by circulation of fluid between said well annulusand said open interior;preventing said opening of said circulating valve means until after saidpredetermined minimum number of said pressure changes has occurred; andprior to said opening of said circulating valve means, maintaining saidcirculating valve means closed to prevent fluid communication betweenfluid in said well annulus and fluid in said open interior means of saidtool string, through said opening means."}
{"WKU":"039305414","Title":"Flame prevention system for fuel tank fires","App_Date":"1974-10-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Donald W. Bowman;Robert C. Doetsch;Francis S. Lemmer;Edward C. Zobel","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Army","ICL_Class":"A62C 1340","References":"2317836;2798562;3738428;3835930;R26020","Claims":"We claim:1. In a military vehicle, equipped with a rectangular fuel tank having twogenerally parallel major walls: the improvement comprising means tosuppress fuel fires initiated as a result of fuel tank rupture byarmor-piercing projectiles; said fire suppressing means comprising twohollow panels located in near adjacency to the major walls of the fueltank in the path that an enemy projectile would take during transversepassage through the tank walls, and pressurized suppressant within thepanels for automatic discharge to the ambient atmosphere through openingsformed in the panel by the projectile.2. In a military vehicle having the improvement of claim 1: the combinationfurther comprising a tubular connector joining the hollow spaces withinthe panels, and a suppressant-charged bottle communicating with the hollowspace within one of the panels."}
{"WKU":"039305422","Title":"Rotary harrows","App_Date":"1974-06-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ary van der Lely;Cornelis Johannes Gerardus Bom","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A01B 3306;A01B 3316","References":"230068;2034780;2277304;2582364;3371721;3821989;3841411","Claims":"We claim:1. A cultivator having an elongated frame and a plurality of rotatable soilworking members mounted side-by-side in a transverse row, said soilworking members being rotatable about upwardly extending shafts andcomprising substantially horizontally extending supports having downwardlyextending tines, driving means being in driving engagement with saidshafts to rotate said members during operation, screening means pivotablyconnected to said cultivator and extending horizontally along the front ofsaid frame relative to the direction of travel, a lower portion of saidscreening means being normally located directly in front of theconnections of said tines to their corresponding supports, an upperportion of said screening means being pivotally connected to saidelongated frame and displaceable about an axis located above saidelongated frame, spring means being connected to bias said screening meansto an operative protective position, whereby the front of said frame andthe connections of said tines with their corresponding supports areprotected from debris encountered during operation of the cultivator.2. A cultivator as claimed in claim 1 wherein said screening means isconnected to said frame through upwardly extending arms and said armsbeing pivotally interconnected with said frame by support means on saidframe.3. A cultivator as claimed in claim 2 wherein said support means extendsupwardly and forwardly and pivots connect said support means and saidarms.4. A cultivator as claimed in claim 3 wherein at least one of said arms isconnected to one end of a helical tension spring of said spring meanswhich extends substantially parallel to the upperside of said frame.5. A cultivator as claimed in claim 4 wherein said spring is connected tosaid arm at a point which is located between the ends of said arm.6. A cultivator as claimed in claim 5 wherein said point is adjacent thecenter of said arm.7. A cultivator as claimed in claim 4 wherein said spring is connected to abracket support at the rear of said frame."}
{"WKU":"039305430","Title":"Tractor attachment","App_Date":"1974-03-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard G. Maurer","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A01b 5100;A01b 59044","References":"1870740;2005440;2424372;2426530;2754740;2936561","Claims":"I claim:1. A tractor attachment adapted for removable connection to hitch apparatusat the rear end of a tractor, said attachment comprising frame meansadapted to extend transversely of a tractor; a pair of elongate, spacedapart, parallel arms having forward and rearward ends, each of said armsbeing hinged between its ends; releasable locking means for selectivelyenabling and disabling hinging movement of said arms; means rotatablycoupling said arms at their rearward ends to said frame means and adjacentopposite ends thereof whereby said arms extend in the same direction fromsaid frame means and are rotatable relative to said frame means in asubstantially vertical plane; implement support means for each of saidarms; means mounting said support means on the forward ends of theassociated arms and transversely thereof; attaching means carried by saidframe means between its ends for removably mounting said frame means onthe hitch apparatus of a tractor; and operating means connecting each ofsaid arms to said frame means for swinging said arms verticallyindependently of the hitch apparatus.2. An attachment according to claim 1 wherein each of said support means ismounted by its mounting means for rocking movement about the longitudinalaxis of its associated arm.3. An attachment according to claim 2 including means acting between themounting means of each of said support means and the associated arm forlimiting rocking movement of said support means.4. An attachment according to claim 3 wherein the means for limitingrocking movement comprises a slot in one of said members and a pin carriedby the other of said members and accommodated in said slot.5. An attachment according to claim 1 wherein each of said support means ismounted by its mounting means for rocking movement about its ownlongitudinal axis.6. An attachment according to claim 5 including means connected to each ofsaid support means for rocking the latter about its longitudinal axis.7. An attachment according to claim 1 wherein said attaching meanscomprises means forming three anchor points.8. An attachment according to claim 1 wherein each of said arms includes acylindrical portion and wherein the associated mounting means includes amember in telescoping relation with said cylindrical portion.9. An attachment according to claim 1 including means acting between saidsupport means and said mounting means for rocking said support means aboutits longitudinal axis.10. A tractor attachment adapted for removable connection to verticallyadjustable hitch apparatus at the rear of a tractor having a drawbar atthe rear thereof, said attachment comprising frame means adapted to extendtransversely of a tractor; a pair or elongate, spaced apart, parallel armshaving front and rear ends, each of said arms having a substantiallyhorizontal portion from which extends an upwardly and rearwardly inclinedrearward portion; means rotatably coupling the rear ends of said arms tosaid frame means adjacent opposite ends thereof whereby said arms extendin the same direction from said frame means and are rotatable relative tosaid frame means in a substantially vertical plane; implement supportmeans for each of said arms; means mounting said support means on thefront ends of the associated arms; attaching means carried by said framemeans between its ends for removably mounting the latter on the hitchapparatus of a tractor and for upward movement adjustment in response tovertically upward adjustment of the hitch apparatus to a position in whichsaid attaching means is at a level above that of the drawbar; andoperating means connecting each of said arms to said frame means forswinging said arms vertically independently of the hitch apparatus."}
{"WKU":"039305449","Title":"Garden implement","App_Date":"1974-05-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Lloyd Foster, Sr.","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A01B  110;A01B  112;A01D  706;A01D  710","References":"84231;197956;381169;816320;845891;1120062;1213230;1666374;1734861;1847587;2109488;2119165;2520413;2726504;2795923;2835102;3234720;D139367","Claims":"I claim:1. A garden implement comprising: a rigid elongated body of generallyrectangular cross section, the shorter sides thereof providing a pair ofopposed upper and lower edges, and a tang connection (20) to a handleextending away from a longer side of said body, tapered tines (25)extending in a common plane from the lower edge of said backbone body athorizontally spaced locations from each other along the length of saidbody, said body beveled to a cutting edge (14) in the spaces separatingsaid tines, the horizontal opposite upper edge of said backbone bodybeveled to a cutting edge (13), tines (26) adjacent each end of the bodylocated in a plane offset to the rear of the tines (25) toward the tangand slanted inward with the tapered tip of each tine (26) directed towardthe other tines, the ends of said body terminating in wing portions (16),(18) rising above and from the upper horizontal cutting edge (13) neareach end of said body and outer end portions (17) and (19), each wingcomprising upper sharp edge (16), an inner inclined sharp edge (18)connecting edge (16) and edge (13) of the body, and an outer end portionhaving a sharp edge (17) and lower sharp edge (19).2. A garden implement comprising: a rigid elongated generally verticalrectangular body (30) having an opening (34) defined within, said openingdefining separate opposite side arms and longer horizontal upper and lowersides, and outer edges associated with each horizontal side and eachopposite side arm; tapered tines (25) extending in a common plane from thelower outer edge of said lower horizontal side at horizontally spacedlocations from each other, a tang connection (20) to a handle extendingsubstantially perpendicular with respect to tines (25) from said lowerhorizontal side; said lower and upper horizontal outer edges beveled tocutting edges; tines (26) adjacent each side arm extending from the lowerouter edge of said lower horizontal side located in a plane to the rear ofthe other tines (25) toward the tang and slanted inward with the taperedtip of each tine (26) directed inward toward the other tines (25); theouter edges (35) of the side arms beveled to sharp cutting edges; saidopening (34) extending substantially the distance between tines (26) toreduce resistance when pulling the implement through soil; and saidimplement including a plurality of substantially horizontally spacedprojections (42) extending substantially perpendicular with respect to thetines (25) from a surface of said lower horizontal side opposite the tangconnection (20)."}
{"WKU":"039305457","Title":"Tiltable coupling","App_Date":"1973-11-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Howard V. Sears","Assignee":"St. Joe Minerals Corporation","ICL_Class":"E21B 4702","References":"710935;1476747;1747398;1850403;2674049;2796234;2891769;3068946;3083779;3298449;3407887;3561549","Claims":"What I claim is:1. A tiltable coupling, which can connect a down-hole drill to a section ofdrill rod string for said down-hole drill, which comprises means adjacentone end of said coupling that is selectively engageable with one side of ahole in which said tiltable coupling is disposed, further means adjacentthe opposite end of said coupling that is selectively engageable with anangularly-displaced side of said hole, the first said means being at oneside of said tiltable coupling and said further means being at anangularly-displaced side of said tiltable coupling, said first said meansand said further means coacting, whenever said first said means is inengagement with said one side of said hole and said further means is inengagement with said angularly-displaced side of said hole, to force theaxis of said down-hole drill to be inclined to the axis of the section ofsaid hole in which said tiltable coupling is disposed to cause saiddown-hole drill to drill a curved section of said hole, said first saidmeans being selectively disposable out of engagement with all sides ofsaid hole while said further means also is disposable out of engagementwith all sides of said hole to permit said axis of said down-hole drill tobe essentially parallel to said axis of said section of said hole in whichsaid tiltable coupling is disposed, and thereby enable said down-holedrill to drill an undeflected section of said hole, at least one of saidmeans being movable into engagement with the adjacent side of said hole byfluid under pressure, said drill rod string and said tiltable couplingsupplying fluid to said down-hole drill to actuate said down-hole drill,and a fluid-supplying means which selectively supplies said fluid underpressure to said tiltable coupling to selectively cause said one of saidmeans to move into engagement with said adjacent side of said hole, andsaid fluid-supplying means isolating said fluid under pressure from saidfluid in said drill rod string until after said fluid under pressure hasissued from said fluid-supplying means.2. A tiltable coupling which can connect a down-hole drill to a section ofdrill rod string for said down-hole drill, which comprises means adjacentone end of said coupling that is selectively engageable with one side of ahole in which said tiltable coupling is disposed, further means adjacentthe opposite end of said coupling that is selectively engageable with anangularly-displaced side of said hole, the first said means being at oneside of said tiltable coupling and said further means being at anangularly-displaced side of said tiltable coupling, said first said meansand said further means coacting, whenever said first means is inengagement with said one side of said hole and said further means is inengagement with said angularly-displaced side of said hole, to force theaxis of said down-hole drill to be inclined to the axis of the section ofsaid hole in which said tiltable coupling is disposed to cause saiddown-hole drill to drill a curved section of said hole, said first saidmeans being selectively disposable out of engagement with all sides ofsaid hole while said further means also is disposable out of engagementwith all sides of said hole to permit said axis of said down-hole drill tobe essentially parallel to said axis of said section of said hole in whichsaid tiltable coupling is disposed, and thereby enable said down-holedrill to drill an undeflected section of said hole, said drill rod stringand said tiltable coupling supplying fluid to said down-hole drill toactuate said down-hole drill, one of said means comprising a piston thatis movable laterally of said tiltable coupling to apply a force to theadjacent side of said section of said hole which will force the oppositeside of said down-hole drill away from said adjacent side of said sectionof said hole and thereby incline said axis of said tiltable couplingrelative to said axis of said section of said hole, and isolating means toisolate said piston from said fluid which said drill rod string and saidtiltable coupling supply to said down-hole drill.3. A tiltable coupling which can connect a down-hole drill to a section ofdrill rod string for said down-hole drill, which comprises means adjacentone end of said coupling that is selectively engageable with one side of ahole in which said tiltable coupling is disposed, further means adjacentthe opposite end of said coupling that is selectively engageable with anangularly-displaced side of said hole, the first said means being at oneside of said tiltable coupling and said further means being at anangularly-displaced side of said tiltable coupling, said first said meansand said further means coacting, whenever said first said means is inengagement with said one side of said hole and said further means is inengagement with said angularly-displaced side of said hole to force theaxis of said down-hole drill to be inclined to the axis of the section ofsaid hole in which said tiltable coupling is disposed to cause saiddown-hole drill to drill a curved section of said hole, said first saidmeans being selectively disposable out of engagement with all sides ofsaid hole while said further means also is disposable out of engagementwith all sides of said hole to permit said axis of said down-hole drill tobe essentially parallel to said axis of said section of said hole in whichsaid tiltable coupling is disposed, and thereby enable said down-holedrill to drill an undeflected section of said hole, one of said meanscomprising a fixed protuberance at one side of said tiltable coupling,said fixed protuberance having the outermost portion thereof displacedfrom the axis of said tiltable coupling a distance less than the radius ofsaid hole, whereby said fixed protuberance can permit the axis of theadjacent end of said tiltable coupling to be coaxial with said hole, saidfixed protuberance having the outermost portion thereof displaced radiallyoutwardly beyond the other end of said one side of said tiltable couplinga distance which essentially determines the inclination of said axis ofsaid tiltable coupling relative to said axis of said section of said holewhen said outermost portion of said fixed protuberance and said other endof said one side of said tiltable coupling simultaneously engage theadjacent side of said section of said hole, the other of said meanscomprising a piston that is movable laterally of said tiltable coupling toapply a force to said angularly-displaced side of said section of saidhole, and said fixed protuberance and said laterally-movable pistoncoacting whenever said fixed protuberance and said other end of said oneside of said tiltable coupling engage said adjacent side of said sectionof said hole and said piston simultaneously engages saidangularly-displaced side of said section of said hole to incline said axisof said tiltable coupling relative to said axis of said section of saidhole at a fixed and predetermined angle, said laterally-movable pistonbeing selectively disposable in engagement with or out of engagement withsaid angularly-displaced side of said section of said hole while saiddown-hole drill is deepening said hole.4. A tiltable coupling which can connect a down-hole drill to a section ofdrill rod string for said down-hole drill, which comprises means adjacentone end of said coupling that is selectively engageable with one side of ahole in which said tiltable coupling is disposed, further means adjacentthe opposite end of said coupling that is selectively engageable with anangularly-displaced side of said hole, the first said means being at oneside of said tiltable coupling and said further means being at anangularly-displaced side of said tiltable coupling, said first said meansand said further means coacting, whenever said first said means is inengagement with said one side of said hole and said further means is inengagement with said angularly-displaced side of said hole to force theaxis of said down-hole drill to be inclined to the axis of the section ofsaid hole in which said tiltable coupling is disposed to cause-saiddown-hole drill to drill a curved section of said hole, said first saidmeans being selectively disposable out of engagement with all sides ofsaid hole while said further means also is disposable out of engagementwith all sides of said hole to permit said axis of said down-hole drill tobe essentially parallel to said axis of said section of said hole in whichsaid tiltable coupling is disposed, and thereby enable said down-holedrill to drill an undeflected section of said hole, one of said meanscomprising a piston that has a roller at the outer end thereof, saidpiston being movable laterally of said tiltable coupling to cause saidroller to apply a force to the adjacent side of said section of said holewhich will incline said axis of said tiltable coupling relative to saidaxis of said section of said hole, and means to selectively hold saidlaterally-movable piston radially inwardly of said adjacent side of saidhole while said down-hole drill is deepening said hole.5. A tiltable coupling which can connect a down-hole drill to a section ofdrill rod string for said down-hole drill, which comprises means adjacentone end of said coupling that is selectively engageable with one side of ahole in which said tiltable coupling is disposed, further means adjacentthe opposite end of said coupling that is selectively engageable with anangularly-displaced side of said hole, the first said means being at oneside of said tiltable coupling and said further means being at anangularly-displaced side of said tiltable coupling, said first said meansand said further means coacting, whenever said first said means is inengagement with said one side of said hole and said further means is inengagement with said angularly-displaced side of said hole, to force theaxis of said down-hole drill to be inclined to the axis of the section ofsaid hole in which said tiltable coupling is disposed to cause saiddown-hole drill to drill a curved section of said hole, said first saidmeans being selectively disposable out of engagement with all sides ofsaid hole while said further means also is disposable out of engagementwith all sides of said hole to permit said axis of said down-hole drill tobe essentially parallel to said axis of said section of said hole in whichsaid tiltable coupling is disposed, and thereby enable said down-holedrill to drill an undeflected section of said hole, drill rod string andsaid tiltable coupling supplying fluid to said down-hole drill to actuatesaid down-hole drill, one of said means comprising a piston that has aroller at the outer end thereof, said piston being movable laterally ofsaid tiltable coupling to cause said roller to apply a force to theadjacent side of said section of said hole which will incline said axis ofsaid tiltable coupling relative to said axis of said section of said hole,and said roller coacting with said adjacent side of said section of saidhole, as said down-hole drill moves deeper into said hole, to apply acircumferentially-directed component of reactive force to said tiltablecoupling.6. A tiltable coupling which can connect a down-hole drill to a section ofdrill rod string for said down-hole drill and which comprises means thatcan permit the axis of said down-hole drill to be inclined to the axis ofthe section of a hole in which said tiltable coupling is disposed to causesaid down-hole drill to drill a curved section of said hole, said meanscomprising a piston that is movable laterally relative to a given portionof the length of said tiltable coupling to apply a force to said sectionof said hole and to apply a laterally-directed reaction force to saidgiven portion of said length of said tiltable coupling, a second pistonthat is movable laterally relative to said given portion of said length ofsaid tiltable coupling to apply an oppositely-directed second force tosaid section of said hole and to apply an oppositely-directed reactionforce to said given portion of said length of said tiltable coupling, thefirst said piston having a recess therein, said second piston beingpositioned within and being movable axially relative to said recess, andthe first said and said second forces resisting circumferential movementof said tiltable coupling relative to said section of said hole.7. A tiltable coupling which can connect a percussion-type down-hole drillto a section of drill rod string for said down-hole drill and whichcomprises means adjacent one end of said coupling that is selectivelyengageable with one side of a hole in which said tiltable coupling isdisposed, further means adjacent the opposite end of said coupling that isselectively engageable with an angularly-displaced side of said hole, thefirst said means being at one side of said tiltable coupling and saidfurther means being at an angularly-displaced side of said tiltablecoupling, said first said means and said further means coacting, wheneversaid first said means is in engagement with said one side of said hole andsaid further means is in engagement with said angularly-displaced side ofsaid hole to force the axis of said down-hole drill to be inclined to theaxis of the section of said hole in which said tiltable coupling isdisposed to cause said down-hole drill to drill a curved section of saidhole, an air motor that is located within said tiltable coupling, a torquemultiplier that is connected between said air motor and said down-holedrill to enable said air motor to apply strong rotative forces to saiddown-hole drill, said torque multiplier including a pair of confrontingfaces and an intermediate roller, said torque multiplier including a meansto wobble one of said confronting faces and thereby cause said roller torotate the other of said confronting faces, and said air motor respondingto compressed air passing through said drill rod string to cause saidtorque multiplier to rotate said down-hole drill.8. A tiltable coupling which can connect a down-hole drill to a section ofdrill rod string for said down-hole drill and which comprises meansadjacent one end of said coupling that is selectively engageable with oneside of a hole in which said tiltable coupling is disposed, further meansadjacent the opposite end of said coupling that is selectively engageablewith an angularly-displaced side of said hole, the first said means beingat one side of said tiltable coupling and said further means being at anangularly-displaced side of said tiltable coupling, said first said meansand said further means coacting, whenever said first said means is inengagement with said one side of said hole and said further means is inengagement with said angularly-displaced side of said hole, to force theaxis of said down-hole drill to be inclined to the axis of the section ofsaid hole in which said tiltable coupling is disposed to cause saiddown-hole drill to drill a curved section of said hole, said drill rodstring acting as a conduit to supply fluid under pressure to said tiltablecoupling and thus to said down-hole drill, and an elongated hose thatextends through said hole in parallel relation with said drill rod stringand that is connected to said tiltable coupling to selectively supplyfurther fluid under pressure to said tiltable coupling, said drill rodstring being held against rotation whenever said down-hole drill isdeepening said hole.9. A tiltable coupling as claimed in claim 8 wherein a sensor is disposedwithin said tiltable coupling to sense the attitude of said tiltablecoupling, and wherein the major portions of the lengths of the leads forsaid sensor are located within and are protected by said elongated hose.10. A tiltable coupling which can connect a percussion-type down-hole drillto a section of drill rod string for said down-hole drill and whichcomprises means adjacent one end of said coupling that is selectivelyengageable with one side of a hole in which sad tiltable coupling isdisposed, further means adjacent the opposite end of said coupling that isselectively engageable with an angularly-displaced side of said hole, thefirst said means being at one side of said tiltable coupling and saidfurther means being at an angularly-displaced side of said tiltablecoupling, said first said means and said further means coacting, wheneversaid first said means is in engagement with said one side of said hole andsaid further means is in engagement with said angularly-displaced side ofsaid hole, to force the axis of said down-hole drill to be inclined to theaxis of the section of said hole in which said tiltable coupling isdisposed to cause said down-hole drill to drill a curved section of saidhole, an air motor that is located within said tiltable coupling and thatcan respond to fluid under pressure passing through said drill rod stringto rotate said down-hole drill, said air motor having a hollow rotor thatis connected to a rotatable member to rotate said rotatable member and tosupply fluid under pressure to said rotatable member, a pin that extendsthrough said hollow rotor to connnect said hollow rotor to said rotatablemember, and portions of the wall of said hollow rotor which are adjacentsaid pin being cut away to keep the presence of said pin from decreasingthe effective fluid-transmitting cross section of said hollow rotor, saidair motor rotating said down-hole drill at such a slow rate that saiddown-hole drill effectively deepens said hole by percussive action ratherthan by rotary action.11. A tiltable coupling which can connect a down-hole drill to a section ofdrill rod string for said down-hole drill, said tiltable coupling havinglongitudinally-spaced and angularly-displaced surfaces that areselectively engageable with longitudinally-spaced and angularly-displacedportions of the surface of a hole in which said tiltable coupling isdisposed, said longitudinally-spaced and angularly-displaced surfacesbeing simultaneously engageable with said longitudinally-spaced andangularly-displaced portions of the surface of said hole to incline theaxis of said down-hole drill to the axis of the section of said hole inwhich said tiltable coupling is disposed, a sensor that is disposed withinsaid tiltable coupling, said sensor being usable, during periods when saiddown-hole drill is attached to said tiltable coupling but said down-holedrill is inactive and hence is not deepening said hole, to help indicatethe orientation of said tiltable coupling within said hole, said sensorhaving a movable portion which moves readily and with minimal friction toindicate changes in the attitude of said tiltable coupling but which isnot degraded by fatigue or impact.12. A tiltable coupling which can connect a down-hole drill to a section ofdrill rod string for said down-hole drill, said tiltable coupling havinglongitudinally-spaced and angularly-displaced surfaces that areselectively engageable with longitudinally-spaced and angularly-displacedportions of the surface of a hole in which said tiltable coupling isdisposed, said longitudinally-spaced and angularly-displaced surfacesbeing simultaneously engageable with said longitudinally-spaced andangularly-displaced portions of the surface of said hole to incline theaxis of said down-hole drill to the axis of the section of said hole inwhich said tiltable coupling is disposed, a sensor that is disposed withinsaid tiltable coupling, said sensor including a plurality of electrodesand an electrolyte, the axis of said sensor being inclined relative to theaxis of said tiltable coupling to cause said electrolyte to occupy aposition of great sensitivity whenever said tiltable coupling is in apredetermined attitude, said electrolyte and said electrodes beingresistant to, and not degradable by, fatigue or impact.13. A tiltable coupling which can connect a down-hole drill to a section ofdrill rod string for said down-hole drill, said tiltable coupling havinglongitudinally-spaced and angularly-displaced surfaces that areselectively engageable with longitudinally-spaced and angularly-displacedportions of the surface of a hole in which said tiltable coupling isdisposed, said longitudinally-spaced and angularly-displaced surfacesbeing simultaneously engageable with said longitudinally-spaced andangularly-displaced portions of the surface of said hole to incline theaxis of said down-hole drill to the axis of the section of said hole inwhich said tiltable coupling is disposed, a sensor that is disposed withinsaid tiltable coupling, a second sensor that is disposed within saidtiltable coupling, each of said sensors including a plurality ofelectrodes and an electrolyte, the electrodes of the first said sensordefining a plane, the electrodes of said second sensor defining a secondplane which is at right angles to the first said plane, said electrolyteand said electrodes of said first said sensor being resistant to and notdegradable by, fatigue or impact, and said electrolyte and said electrodesof said second sensor being resistant to, and not degradable by, fatigueor impact.14. A tiltable coupling which can connect a down-hole drill to a section ofdrill rod string for said down-hole drill, said tiltable coupling havinglongitudinally-spaced and angularly-displaced surfaces that areselectively engageable with longitudinally-spaced and angularly-displacedportions of the surface of a hole in which said tiltable coupling isdisposed, said longitudinally-spaced and angularly-displaced surfacesbeing simultaneously engageable with said longitudinally-spaced andangularly-displaced portions of the surface of said hole to incline theaxis of said down-hole drill to the axis of the section of said hole inwhich said tiltable coupling is disposed, a sensor that is disposed withinsaid tiltable coupling, said one of said longitudinally-spaced andangularly-displaced surfaces being on a piston that is movable laterallyof said tiltable coupling, and the axis of said sensor having a fixedrelation to the direction of movement of said piston, said sensor having amovable portion which moves readily and which is resistant to, and notdegradable by, fatigue or impact.15. A tiltable coupling which can connect a down-hole drill to a section ofdrill rod string for said down-hole drill, said tiltable coupling havinglongitudinally-spaced and angularly-displaced surfaces that areselectively engageable with longitudinally-spaced and angularly-displacedportions of the surface of a hole in which said tiltable coupling isdisposed, said longitudinally-spaced and angularly-displaced surfacesbeing simultaneously engageable with said longitudinally-spaced andangularly-displaced portions of the surface of said hole to incline theaxis of said down-hole drill to the axis of the section of said hole inwhich said tiltable coupling is disposed, a sensor that is disposed withinsaid tiltable coupling, said drill rod string acting as a conduit tosupply fluid under pressure to said tiltable coupling and thus to saiddown-hole drill, an elongated hose that extends through said hole inparallel relation with said drill rod string and that is connected to saidtiltable coupling to selectively supply fluid under pressure to saidtiltable coupling, conductors that are electrically connectable to saidsensor and that are disposed within said elongated hose, a short length ofhose that extends from a point on said elongated hose to said tiltablecoupling to conduct said conductors from said point on said elongated hoseto said tiltable coupling, and coupling means that provide fluid-typeconnections between said short length of hose and said point on saidelongated hose and also between said short length of hose and saidtiltable coupling, said sensor having a movable portion which movesreadily and being resistant to, and not degradable by, fatigue or impact.16. A tiltable coupling, which can connect a down-hole drill to a sectionof drill rod string for said down-hole drill, which comprises a firstmember that is securable to said down-hole drill, a second member that issecurable to said section of drill rod string, confronting surfaces onsaid first and second members that can selectively abut each other, saidconfronting surfaces having a predetermined maximum amount of clearancetherebetween to fix the maximum tilt angle between the axes of said firstand second members, and thereby fix the maximum tilt angle between theaxis of said down-hole drill and the axis of said section of said drillrod string, a bushing that is mounted on said section of drill rod stringat a point which is displaced from said second member, the spacing betweensaid bushing and said second member being long enough to enablesimultaneous engagement of said bushing and of said second member withspaced points on the surface of a hole, being drilled by said down-holedrill, to hole a substantial portion of the length of that section of saiddrill rod string which is secured to said second member out of engagementwith said surface of said hole, and said bushing acting as a fulcrum toenable said section of said drill rod string which is secured to saidsecond member to urge said second member against said surface of saidhole.17. A tiltable coupling which can connect a down-hole drill to a section ofdrill rod string for said down-hole drill, said tiltable coupling havinglongitudinally-spaced and angularly-displaced surfaces that areselectively engageable with longitudinally-spaced and angularly-displacedportions of the surface of a hole in which said tiltable coupling isdisposed, said longitudinally-spaced and angularly-displaced surfacesbeing simultaneously engageable with said longitudinally-spaced andangularly-displaced portions of the surface of said hole to incline theaxis of said down-hole drill to the axis of the section of said hole inwhich said tiltable coupling is disposed, said drill rod string acting asa conduit to supply fluid under pressure to said tiltable coupling andthus to said down-hole drill, an elongated hose that extends through saidhole externally of and in parallel relation with said drill rod string andthat is connected to said tiltable coupling to selectively supply fluidunder pressure to said tiltable coupling, one of saidlongitudinally-spaced and angularly-displaced surfaces being on a pistonthat is movable laterally of said tiltable coupling, and said pistonmoving laterally of said tiltable coupling whenever said elongated hosesupplies fluid under pressure to said tiltable coupling.18. A tiltable coupling which can connect a down-hole drill to a section ofdrill rod string for said down-hole drill, said tiltable coupling havinglongitudinally-spaced and angularly-displaced surfaces that areselectively engageable with longitudinally-spaced and angularly-displacedportions of the surface of a hole in which said tiltable coupling isdisposed, said longitudinally-spaced and angularly-displaced surfacesbeing simultaneously engageable with said longitudinally-spaced andangularly-displaced portions of the surface of said hole to incline theaxis of said down-hole drill to the axis of the section of said hole inwhich said tiltable coupling is disposed, one of saidlongitudinally-spaced and angularly-displaced surfaces being on a pistonthat is movable laterally of said tiltable coupling,  means to conductfluid under pressure to said tiltable coupling and said piston beingmovable, laterally of said tiltable coupling by said fluid under pressure,a valve that is mounted on said tiltable coupling and that initiallycauses said fluid under pressure to move said piston laterally of saidtiltable coupling, and said valve subsequently moving to permit said fluidunder pressure to pass to said down-hole drill.19. A tiltable coupling which can connect a down-hole drill to a section ofdrill rod string for said down-hole drill, said tiltable coupling havinglongitudinally-spaced and angularly-displaced surfaces that areselectively engageable with longitudinally-spaced and angularly-displacedportions of the surface of a hole in which said tiltable coupling isdisposed, said longitudinally-spaced and angularly-displaced surfacesbeing simultaneously engageable with said longitudinally-spaced andangularly-displaced portions of the surface of said hole to incline theaxis of said down-hole drill to the axis of the section of said hole inwhich said tiltable coupling is disposed, one of saidlongitudinally-spaced and angularly-displaced surfaces being on a fulcrum,said fulcrum being on a portion of said tiltable coupling which isselectively disposable at different positions circumferentially relativeto the other end of said tiltable coupling, and locking means whichselectively permits circumferential adjustment of the position of saidfulcrum relative to said other end of said tiltable coupling but whichprevents accidental shifting of said fulcrum circumferentially of saidother end of said tiltable coupling.20. A tiltable coupling which can connect a down-hole drill to a section ofdrill rod string for said down-hole drill, said tiltable coupling havinglongitudinally-spaced and angularly-displaced surfaces that areselectively engageable with longitudinally-spaced and angularly-displacedportions of the surface of a hole in which said tiltable coupling isdisposed, said longitudinally-spaced and angularly-displaced surfacesbeing simultaneously engageable with said longitudinally-spaced andangularly-displaced portions of the surface of said hole to incline theaxis of said down-hole drill to the axis of the section of said hole inwhich said tiltable coupling is disposed, one of saidlongitudinally-spaced and angularly-displaced surfaces being movableoutwardly relative to said tiltable coupling in response to fluid underpressure, said drill rod string and said tiltable coupling selectivelysupplying fluid to said down-hole drill to selectively actuate saiddown-hole drill, and a fluid-supplying means which supplies fluid underpressure to said tiltable coupling to move said one of saidlongitudinally-spaced and angularly-displaced surfaces being movableoutwardly relative to said tiltable coupling, said fluid-supplying meansbeing able to supply said fluid under pressure to said tiltable couplingeven when said drill rod string and said tiltable coupling are notsupplying to said down-hole drill.21. A tiltable coupling as claimed in claim 20 wherein said drill rodstring is non-rotating when said down-hole drill is actuated, and whereinsaid fluid-supplying means includes an elongated conduit which is locatedbetween said drill rod string and said hole.22. A tiltable coupling as claimed in claim 20 wherein said fluid-supplyingmeans isolates said fluid under pressure from said fluid in said drill rodstring until after said fluid under pressure has issued from saidfluid-supplying means.23. A tiltable coupling as claimed in claim 20 wherein said tiltablecoupling supplies some of said fluid under pressure to said down-holedrill to help actuate said down-hole drill.24. A tiltable coupling as claimed in claim 20 wherein said drill rodstring is non-rotating when said down-hole drill is actuaged, wherein anelectric attitude sensor is disposed within said tiltable coupling tosense the attitude of said tiltable coupling, wherein said fluid-supplyingmeans includes an elongated conduit which is located between said drillrod string and said hole, and wherein the major portions of the lengths ofthe leads for said electric attitude sensor are located within and areprotected by said elongated conduit."}
{"WKU":"039305465","Title":"Weight grading apparatus","App_Date":"1974-10-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kevin John Fourneau","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"G01G 2314;G01G 2326","References":"2228874;3602325","Claims":"What I claim is:1. A weight grading apparatus including a scale assembly comprising: afulcrum; a scale beam supported upon said fulcrum for pivotal movementabout the fulcrum axis; a first point on said scale beam on one side ofsaid fulcrum arranged to sense the weight of an article being graded; abiasing spring having one end connected to a second point on said scalebeam on the opposite side of said fulcrum to exert a force tending tocounteract the force exerted by the weight of said article being graded,the other end of said spring being connected to an adjustment head; saidadjustment head being movable along an adjustment shaft, said adjustmentshaft extending in a direction parallel to and at least along asubstantial part of the axis of said spring.2. Apparatus according to claim 1 wherein the materials selected for saidbiasing spring and said adjustment shaft are such that thermal expansionin said shaft will compensate for any change of characteristics in saidspring at varying ambient temperatures likely to be experienced inoperation, thereby providing a self compensating arrangement which willnot move significantly out of adjustment due to changes in normaloperating conditions.3. The apparatus according to claim 1 wherein said scale beam is a frame,said first point comprises an upstanding frame end which in use isarranged to provide a surface upon which an article being graded or meansassociated therewith may bear to exert a component of weight upon thescale beam and said second point comprises the other end of said scalebeam which projects beyond the fulcrum and is folded down substantially atright angles to the main part of the frame whereby said second point onsaid scale beam is located almost immediately below said fulcrum.4. The apparatus according to claim 3 wherein said scale beam has ahorizontally arranged substantially right angled Z-shape, said fulcrumbeing towards the down turned end of said  Z  and the axis of said biasingspring and the shaft of said adjustment means being substantially parallelto the main or central part of said scale beam."}
{"WKU":"039305473","Title":"Snow vehicle suspension system","App_Date":"1970-09-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Burke A. West","Assignee":"Monroe Auto Equipment Company","ICL_Class":"B62M 2700","References":"1544169;3613812","Claims":"I claim:1. In an adaptor kit for mounting a telescopic, direct acting shockabsorber having attachment bushings at the opposite ends thereof to thesuspension system of a snow vehicle including at least one ski-likeelement and a leaf spring secured at one portion thereof to the ski by amounting clevis and secured to another portion thereof by a mountingsaddle to the steering system of the vehicle,a first adaptor bracket assembly comprising a pair of plate-like membersconnecting one of said attachment bushings of the shock absorber at aposition adjacent said mounting clevis,a second adaptor bracket assembly for connecting the other of saidattachment bushings of the shock absorber at a position adjacent saidmounting saddle, andfirst fastening means securing one end of said shock absorber to saidmounting clevis and second fastening means securing said first adaptorbracket to said mounting clevis.2. The invention as set forth in claim 1 wherein said mounting cleviscomprises a pair of side sections and wherein said plate-like members arepositionable adjacent the laterally outer sides of said side sections.3. The invention as set forth in claim 2 wherein said mounting clevis issecured as by welding to the upper surface of said ski, and wherein saidplate-like members include laterally offset portions permitting saidmembers to be contiguously engaged with said side sections of saidmounting clevis without interference with the weld connection of saidmounting clevis to said ski.4. In an adaptor kit for mounting a telescopic, direct acting shockabsorber having attachment bushings at the opposite ends thereof to thesuspension system of a snow vehicle including at least one ski-likeelement and a leaf spring secured at one portion thereof to the ski by amounting clevis and secured at another portion thereof by a mountingsaddle to the steering system of the vehicle,a first adaptor bracket assembly connecting one of said attachment bushingsof the shock absorber at a position adjacent said mounting clevis, anda second adaptor bracket assembly for connecting the other of saidattachment bushings of the shock absorber at a position adjacent saidmounting saddle,said second adaptor bracket assembly comprising a generally U-shaped memberincluding laterally spaced apart side sections and a bight portionextending between said side sections and cooperating therewith tonestingly engage an intermediate portion of said spring, and whichincludes fastening means securing said mounting saddle adjacent saidspring.5. The invention as set forth in claim 4 wherein said fastening means isoperable to secure said mounting saddle to said spring.6. The invention as set forth in claim 4 which includes a fastening memberextending laterally between said side sections and through one of saidattachment bushings whereby to secure the said attachment bushing at aposition interjacent said side sections."}
{"WKU":"039305481","Title":"Motorized scaffold attachment","App_Date":"1975-02-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard J. Wallraff","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B60p  314","References":"2578886;2920845;2949972;3025922;3431994;3438456;3731758;3878910","Claims":"That which is claimed is:1. A self-propelling attachment for light duty platform supporting scaffoldtowers of the type generally used for overhead finishing work in theinstallation of wiring and lighting fixtures, duct work ceilings andceiling finishing operations and the like, which towers have supportingcaster wheels detachably mounted on the feet thereof so they may be rolledfrom place to place, said attachment comprising at least two propulsionunits and operating means interconnected therewith for independentoperation of said units, each propulsion unit comprising a base includingmeans thereon for detachably attaching said base to the foot of a tower inplace of the normal caster wheel, wheel mounting means dependingdownwardly from said base and having a propulsion wheel freely rotatablymounted thereon, a motor, and drive means operatively interconnecting saidmotor and said propulsion wheel, means attaching said motor and drivemeans to said base, said drive means including a drive wheel frictionallyengaging said propulsion wheel, said means attaching said motor and drivemeans to said base including means causing effective disengagement of saiddrive wheel from said propulsion wheel upon engagement of the propulsionwheel with an obstacle in its path.2. A self-propelling attachment for light duty platform supporting scaffoldtowers of the type generally used for overhead finishing work in theinstallation of wiring and lighting fixtures, duct work ceilings andceiling finishing operations and the like, which towers have supportingcaster wheels detachably mounted on the feet thereof so they may be rolledfrom place to place, said attachment comprising at least two propulsionunits and operating means interconnected therewith for independentoperation of said units, each propulsion unit comprising a base includingmeans thereon for detachably attaching said base to the foot of a tower inplace of the normal caster wheel, wheel mounting means dependingdownwardly from said base and having a propulsion wheel freely rotatablymounted thereon, frame means swingably attached to said base for swingingmovement toward and away from said propulsion wheel, a motor and a drivemeans affixed to said frame means, said drive means including a drivewheel frictionally engaging said propulsion wheel and limiting movement ofsaid frame means toward said propulsion wheel.3. The attachment of claim 2 wherein said frame means includes a supportingstand and carrying means for said unit when not in use.4. The attachment of claim 2 wherein said frame means includes a supportingstand and carrying means for said unit when not attached, and meansoperatively connected to said frame adapted to maintain said frame in aposition such that said friction wheel remains disengaged from saidpropulsion wheel when said propulsion unit is attached to a scaffold.5. The attachment of claim 2 including stabilizer means rigidlyinterconnecting said propulsion units to one another.6. The attachment of claim 2 including means on each propulsion unit forattaching the drive means to a tower for maintaing the drive wheeldisengaged from the propulsion wheel when it is desired to roll thescaffold by other means.7. The attachment of claim 2 wherein said control means includes controlswitches remote from said drive means and flexibly interconnectedtherewith.8. The attachment of claim 2 wherein said attachment includes means rigidlyinterconnecting said propulsion units with one another.9. A portable propulsion means for scaffolding towers of the type havingcaster wheels on the feet thereof for rolling the tower from place toplace, said propulsion means comprising a motorized wheeled propulsionunit having a base, means on the base for attaching the same to the footof a scaffold tower, a freely rotatable propulsion wheel carried by saidbase, a motor pivotally mounted on said base for free swinging movementtoward and away from said propulsion wheel, drive means rigidly attachedto said motor and interconnecting said motor and said propulsion wheel,said drive means including a driven wheel frictionally engaging saidpropulsion wheel to propel the unit, and control means operably connectedto said propulsion unit for operation remote therefrom.10. The propulsion unit of claim 9 including a frame carrying said motorand drive means, said frame being pivotally mounted at its forward end tosaid base for swinging movement toward and away from said propulsion wheelon an axis parallel to the propulsion wheel axis.11. The propulsion unit of claim 9 including a frame carrying said motorand drive means, said frame being pivotally mounted at its forward end tosaid base for swinging movement toward and away from said propulsion wheelon an axis parallel to the propulsion wheel axis and including at itsrearward end a combination carrying means and supporting stand."}
{"WKU":"039305490","Title":"Protective guard assembly for track drive motors","App_Date":"1974-11-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Bobby D. Griffith","Assignee":"Caterpillar Tractor Co.","ICL_Class":"B62D 5500","References":"2833361;3712398;3797598","Claims":"I claim:1. A track-type vehicle disposed for movement along a longitudinal axisthereof comprisinga main frame,a pair of laterally spaced and parallel track assemblies, each comprising asub-frame and an endless track entrained therearound, mounted on said mainframe and separated laterally at a predetermined maximum gauge width,adjustment means operatively connected between said main frame and at leastone of said sub-frames for permitting selective narrowing of said maximumgauge width to a minimum gauge width,laterally spaced drive motors each mounted on a respective sub-frame andoperatively connected to a respective one of said tracks, anda guard assembly detachably mounted on said main frame to at leastsubstantially enclose said motors when said track assemblies arepositioned at each of their maximum and minimum gauge widths said guardassembly comprising a plurality of upper cover members overlying saidmotors and a horizontally disposed lower plate underlying said drivemotors and secured to said upper cover members.2. The vehicle of claim 1 further comprising conduit means operativelyconnected to each of said drive motors for communicating operating fluidthereto and having portions thereof at least substantially enclosed bysaid guard assembly.3. The vehicle of claim 1 wherein said guard assembly is detachably mountedon said main frame by a plurality of releasable pin connections.4. The vehicle of claim 3 wherein three laterally spaced pin connectionsdetachably mount said guard assembly on said main frame.5. The vehicle of claim 4 wherein a centrally disposed one of said pinconnections is positioned vertically above an outboard pair of said pinconnections.6. The vehicle of claim 3 wherein each of said pin connections comprise abifurcated bracket secured on said guard assembly and detachably mountedon a respective plate of said main frame by a vertically disposed pinextending through each bracket and a respective plate.7. The vehicle of claim 1 wherein said lower plate extends to full lateralwidth of said guard assembly.8. The vehicle of claim 7 further comprising a plurality of reinforcingplates secured on said lower plate to underlie each of said motors.9. The vehicle of claim 1 further comprising a pull hook secured on arearward end of said guard assembly.10. The vehicle of claim 9 further comprising a second pull hook secured ona rearward end of said main frame.11. A unitary guard assembly detachably mounted on a frame of a vehicle bya three laterally spaced releasable pin connections, said guard assemblycomprising a plurality of upper cover members and a horizontally disposedlower plate and a rearward plate each extending the full lateral width ofsaid guard assembly and each secured to said upper cover members.12. The guard assembly of claim 11 further comprising a plurality ofreinforcing plates secured on said lower plate on each outboard sidethereof.13. The guard assembly of claim 11 further comprising a pull hook securedon a rearward end of said guard assembly.14. The guard assembly of claim 13 further comprising a second pull hooksecured on a rearward end of said frame.15. The guard assembly of claim 11 wherein a centrally disposed one of saidpin connections is positioned vertically above an outboard pair of saidpin connections.16. The guard assembly of claim 11 wherein each of said pin connectionscomprises a bifurcated bracket secured on said guard assembly anddetachably mounted on a respective plate of said frame by a verticallydisposed pin extending through each bracket and a respective plate.17. A unitary guard assembly detachably mounted on a frame of a vehicle bya plurality of releasable pin connections, said guard assembly comprisinga plurality of upper cover members and a horizontally disposed lower plateand a rearward plate each extending the full lateral width of said guardassembly and each secured to said upper cover member, a first pull hooksecured on a rearward end of said guard assembly and a second pull hooksecured on a rearward end of said frame.18. A unitary guard assembly detachably mounted on a frame of a vehicle bya plurality of releasable pin connections, said guard assembly comprisinga plurality of upper cover members and a horizontally disposed lower plateand a rearward plate each extending the full lateral width of said guardassembly and each secured to said upper cover members and wherein each ofsaid pin connections comprises a bifurcated bracket secured on said guardassembly and detachably mounted on a respective plate of said frame by avertically disposed pin extending through each bracket and a respectiveplate."}
{"WKU":"039305503","Title":"Vehicle drive and suspension","App_Date":"1974-08-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Harold T. Rose;Clarence D. Gilreath","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Army","ICL_Class":"B60K 1722","References":"3452702;3566825;3666036","Claims":"We claim:1. In a wheeled vehicle having a hull; hull suspension means comprising aroad wheel support arm connected to the hull on a swing axis; elasticforce-absorption means centered on the swing axis inboard from the roadwheel support arm; a torque rod interconnecting the road arm and theforce-absorption means; said torque rod extending along the aforementionedswing axis so that it transmits road wheel forces to the force-absorptionmeans; a rotary drive shaft disposed within the hull on an axis thatintersects and crosses the aforementioned swing axis; and transmissionmeans operatively interconnecting the drive shaft and road wheel; saidtorque rod having a clearance opening therethrough; said drive shaftextending through the clearance opening without interferring withrotational movement of the torque rod around the swing axis.2. In the wheeled vehicle of claim 1 said road wheel support arm includinga barrel extending into the hull on the swing axis; the force-absorptionmeans comprising an elastomeric annulus whose outer diameter issubstantially the same as that of the barrel.3. In the wheeled vehicle of claim 2 the drive shaft having its axislocated approximately midway between the barrel and the elastomericannulus.4. In the wheeled vehicle of claim 1 a housing carried by the hull forsupporting the aforementioned drive shaft; said road wheel support armcomprising a barrel extending into the shaft support housing on theaforementioned swing axis; and a single anti-friction bearing meansdisposed within the shaft support housing to absorb both radial and thrustloads imposed on the barrel.5. In the wheeled vehicle of claim 4 said anti-friction bearing meansconsisting of a single set of balls disposed within a raceway defined bygrooves machined in opposed surfaces of the barrel and housing.6. In the wheeled vehicle of claim 5 the shaft support housing having aball loader opening communicating with the raceway.7. In the wheeled vehicle of claim 1 the aforementioned transmission meanscomprising a sleeve surrounding the torque rod.8. In the wheeled vehicle of claim 1 a housing carried by the hull forsupporting the aforementioned drive shaft; said road wheel support armincluding a rotary barrel extending into the shaft support housing on theaforementioned swing axis; the aforementioned transmission meanscomprising a drive sleeve arranged within the barrel in surroundingrelation to the torque rod.9. In a wheeled vehicle having a hull; road wheel support arms swingablyconnected to the right and left sides of the hull on individual swingaxis; a separate elastic force-absorption means associated with each roadwheel support arm; left and right drive shafts extending parallel to thevehicle longitudinal axis; each drive shaft being disposed within the hullon an axis that intersects and crosses the associated road wheel arm swingaxis; drive trains in selected ones of the road wheel support arms; meansfor transmitting drive forces from the left drive shaft to individualdrive trains in selected ones of the left road wheel support arms; meansfor transmitting drive forces from the right drive shaft to individualdrive trains in selected ones of the right road wheel support arms; eachdrive-transmitting means comprising a drive sleeve concentric with theswing axis for the associated road wheel support arm; eachforce-absorption means comprising an elastomeric annulus located inboardof the associated drive shaft, and a torque rod extending along the swingaxis from the elastomeric annulus to the associated road wheel supportarm; each torque rod having a clearance opening therethrough, theassociated drive shaft extending through the various clearance openingswithout interferring with rotational movements of the individual torquerods around the individual swing axis."}
{"WKU":"039305511","Title":"Electric drive for wheel chairs","App_Date":"1974-06-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Harold Cragg","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B60K  100","References":"752129;2836073;3613813","Claims":"I claim:1. Electric driving means for a wheelchair comprising a wheel plate, anelectric motor mounted on said wheel plate and operable by a batterythrough control means, drive transmitting means on said wheel platecoupled to the electric motor and including an output shaft carrying adriven pinion, a rotatable wheel supported on said wheel plate andcarrying a fixed pinion, mounting means for mounting said wheel plate on aframe member of the wheelchair, and a gear carrier mounted for pivotalmovement relative to said fixed and driven pinions between a first extremeposition, a neutral position, and a second extreme position, the gearcarrier including first idler gear means for transmitting drive from thedriven pinion to the fixed pinion when the gear carrier is in said firstextreme position and second idler gear means having a drive transmissionratio different to that of said first idler gear means for transmittingdrive from the driven pinion to the fixed pinion when the gear carrier isin said second extreme position.2. Electric driving means according to claim 1 wherein the gear carrier ispivotal by means of an eccentric carried on a rotatable shaft extendingthrough the wheel plate and engageable with a cam bush on the gearcarrier.3. Electric driving means according to claim 2 further including meansresponsive to movement of said eccentric for locking the position of saidgear carrier with respect to said wheel plate.4. Electric driving means according to claim 3 wherein said locking meanscomprises a camming surface on said wheel plate and a boss on therotatable shaft of said eccentric for cooperation with said cammingsurface.5. Electric driving means according to claim 1 wherein said first idlergear comprises a single gear.6. Electric driving means according to claim 1 wherein said second idlergear means comprises a double stacked gear assembly of which one gear isengageable with the driven pinion, the other gear having a differentnumber of teeth from said one gear and engaging the fixed pinion.7. Electric driving means according to claim 1 wherein said wheel isrotatably supported on a spindle; and wherein said gear carrier is mountedfor pivotal movement on the wheel spindle.8. Electric driving means according to claim 7 wherein said gear carriercomprises a plate and a cover assembly supporting said idler gearstherebetween.9. Electric driving means according to claim 8 wherein said gear carrier ismovable between said first extreme position and said second extremeposition by a rotatable cam.10. Electric driving means according to claim 9 wherein said cam is aneccentric engageable with a cam bush carried by said gear carrier.11. Electric driving means according to claim 10 wherein said cam iscarried on a shaft rotatable by a control shaft and said control shaft isarranged for locking in a selected position by a releasible locking arm.12. Electric driving means according to claim 1 wherein said drivetransmitting means includes a reduction gear box carried by said wheelplate, said reduction gear box comprising said output shaft coupled tosaid electric motor by a worm wheel carried on said output shaft andengaging with a worm driven by said electric motor.13. Electric driving means according to claim 1 wherein said wheel plate isresiliently carried by a mounting bracket for connection to the framemember, said mounting bracket including a bushing having a suspensionmedium arranged to permit limited resilient movement of the wheel platerelative to the bracket.14. Electric driving meams according to claim 1 further including means forlocking said gear carrier in said first extreme position, said secondextreme position and said neutral position.15. In a wheelchair having a frame supporting a pair of castor wheels, apaid of drive wheel assemblies, and a battery, the improvement whereineach of said drive wheel assemblies comprisesa support,an electric motor on said support and operable by said battery through acontrol means,drive transmitting means coupled to the electric motor and having an outputshaft carrying a drive pinion,a drive wheel rotatably mounted on said support and carrying a fixedpinion, andgear transmission means on said support for coupling said drive pinion tosaid fixed pinion, said gear transmission means including a gear carriermounted for pivotal movement relative to said fixed and drive pinionsbetween a first extreme position and a neutral position, the gear carrierincluding at least one idler gear means for transmitting drive torque fromthe drive pinion to the fixed pinion when the gear carrier is in saidfirst extreme position, and said carrier being moved by a rotatableeccentric engaging a cam bush on said gear carrier.16. The invention as recited in claim 15 wherein said gear carrier includessecond idler gear means having a drive transmission ratio different fromthat of said first idler gear means for transmitting drive torque from thedrive pinion to the fixed pinion when the gear carrier is in a secondextreme position."}
{"WKU":"039305520","Title":"Motor vehicle battery holder","App_Date":"1974-10-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Calvin S. Kunkle;Hugh A. Little","Assignee":"FMC Corporation","ICL_Class":"B60R 1802","References":"1091583;1209962;1483097;1843691;2548256;2609268;3120412","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a motor vehicle having a battery storage compartment and a supportsurface located adjacent the compartment, an improved battery holdercomprising a mounting base in said compartment, a battery cell supporttray mounted on wheels for rolling between a position on the base wherebattery cells are housed and a position on the support surface wherebattery cells are serviced and inspected, and means for locking the trayin the position on the base to prevent undesired movement of the tray,said tray having a front panel and a bottom panel, said tray locking meansincluding a vertical sleeve fixed to the front panel, a handle slidablyfitted axially within the sleeve and pivotally supported therein forrotation through a horizontal angle, said handle having a grip portionextending outward horizontally above the sleeve and a lock portionprojecting downward vertically below the sleeve, a pin extendinghorizontally from the lock portion of the handle in a vertical planeperpendicular to the grip portion, a keeper mounted on the base forreceiving and retaining the lock portion of the handle, said pin extendingunder the bottom panel of the tray when the grip portion of the handleextends adjacent the tray and thereby preventing the lock portion of thehandle from being elevated out of the keeper without rotating the handleto a position where the grip portion extends outwardly from the tray.2. An improved battery holder as described in claim 1 wherein said traylocking means further includes a radial flange projecting outwardly fromthe handle above the sleeve, and a compression spring positioned aroundthe handle between the radial flange and the top of the sleeve to urge thehandle upward and to require compression before locking the tray.3. An improved battery holder as described in claim 1 wherein said pinextends outwardly from each side of the lock portion of the handle wherebyeach end of the pin limits rotational movement of the handle in anelevated position by contact with the front panel to maintain the gripportion of the handle extending outwardly from the tray.4. An improved battery holder as described in claim 3 which furtherincludes wheel retainers mounted to the base and extending over the traywheels to limit upward movement of the tray and thereby prevent accidentalremoval of the lock portion of the handle from the keeper.5. An improved battery holder as described in claim 1 which furtherincludes at least one stop projecting upward from the end of said mountingbase adjacent the support surface, and at least one stop projectingdownward from the end of said tray opposite from the support surface toengage the corresponding mounting base stop, thereby limiting movement ofthe tray outwardly from the battery compartment onto the support surface.6. An improved battery holder as described in claim 5 which furtherincludes means for restraining upward movement of the tray to maintain thetray stop at a level to engage the mounting base stop.7. An improved battery holder as described in claim 1 which furtherincludes a guide projecting upward from said mounting base and extendingin a direction along the base corresponding with the direction of movementof the tray between the battery storage compartment and the supportsurface, and a pair of guides projecting downward from the tray onopposite sides of the base guide to restrain the tray from movinglaterally of the direction of movement between the compartment and thesupport surface.8. In a motor vehicle having a battery storage compartment, a supportsurface located adjacent the compartment, and a door separating thecompartment from the support surface, an improved battery holdercomprising a mounting base in said battery compartment, a battery cellsupport tray mounted on wheels for rolling between a position on the basewhere battery cells are housed and a position on the support surface wherebattery cells are serviced and inspected, and means for locking the trayin the position on the base to prevent undesired movement of the tray,said tray locking means including a handle that must be in a lockedposition before the door can be closed.9. An improved battery holder as described in claim 8 wherein said handlehas a horizontally extending grip portion that must be rotated to aposition projecting outwardly from the tray to unlock the tray formovement from the position on the mounting base, said door in a closedposition being located to limit rotational movement of the handle andthereby prevent the tray locking means from becoming unlocked.10. In a motor vehicle having a battery storage compartment and a supportsurface located adjacent the compartment, said surface having ridges andintermediate valleys in a tread pattern to reduce slippage of personsstepping thereon, an improved battery holder comprising a mounting base insaid battery compartment, a battery cell support tray mounted on wheelsfor rolling between a position on the base where the battery cells arehoused and a position on the support surface where the battery cells areserviced and inspected, said tray having wheels of a diameter and a widthlarge enough to roll on top of the surface ridges without dropping intothe intermediate valleys, and means for locking the tray in the positionon the base to prevent undesired movement of the tray.11. In a motor vehicle having a battery storage compartment and a supportsurface located adjacent the compartment, an improved battery holdercomprising a mounting base in said compartment, a battery cell supporttray mounted on wheels for rolling between a position on the base wherebattery cells are housed and a position on the support surface wherebattery cells are serviced and inspected, a handle mounted upon the trayfor pivotal movement in a horizontal plane and for slidable movementvertically along its pivotal axis, said handle having a grip portionextending outward horizontally from its pivotal axis adjacent the tray anda lock portion depending downward vertically below the tray, a pinextending horizontally from the lock portion of the handle in a verticalplane perpendicular to the grip portion, a keeper mounted on the base forreceiving and retaining the lock portion of the handle to preventundesired tray movement, said pin extending under the tray above thekeeper when the grip portion of the handle extends adjacent the tray andthereby preventing the lock portion of the handle from being elevated outof the keeper without turning the handle to a position where the gripportion extends outwardly from the tray.12. An improved battery holder as described in claim 11 wherein said traylocking means includes resilient means for urging the handle verticallyalong its pivotal axis, said resilient means requiring compression to movethe handle downward for inserting the lock portion of the handle into thekeeper."}
{"WKU":"039305538","Title":"Track tension control","App_Date":"1974-11-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John F. Kopera;William E. Lawson;James P. Carr","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Army","ICL_Class":"B62M 2702","References":"1355853;1534639;1885486;3299978","Claims":"We claim:1. In a vehicle comprising a hull; at least two road wheels located at eachside of the hull; a suspension arm for each road wheel; each suspensionarm being independently swingably connected to the hull for movement aboutan individual swing axis; each road wheel being rotatably connected to theassociated suspension arm for movement around an axis remote from theaforementioned swing axis; each wheel axis being spaced approximately thesame distance from the associated swing axis; and an endless trackencircling two adjacent wheels at each side of the hull to convert thevehicle to the tracked mode: the improvement comprising a rigid connectormeans extending between the wheels in each track-wheel unit, eachconnector means being compressively positioned between the associatedwheels to keep said wheels operatively engaged with the encircling track;each connector means being effective to maintain the wheel axes spacingsubstantially equal to the swing axes spacing, whereby the suspension armsin each track-wheel unit move in the fashion of a parallel bar linkagewhen the vehicle is in the tracked mode.2. In the vehicle of claim 1: each wheel connector means comprisingtelescoped elements connected to different ones of the wheels.3. In the vehicle of claim 1: each wheel connector means comprising anoutwardly projecting shaft carried by each wheel on the wheel axis, and atie mechanism having rotary connections with the shafts so that theindividual wheels can turn without restraint from the tie mechanism.4. In the vehicle of claim 3: each wheel connector means further comprisinga mounting plate for each shaft; each plate being removably attached toone of the vehicle road wheels by means of the existing wheel studs andnuts.5. In the vehicle of claim 3: each wheel connector means further comprisinga mounting plate 34 for each shaft; each plate being removably attached toone of the road wheels by means of the existing wheel studs and nuts; eachtie mechanism comprising a sleeve 38 surrounding one of the aforementionedshafts, and anti-friction bearings 40 interposed between each shaft andthe associated sleeve; said bearings being located within the associatedwheel between its side edges.6. In the vehicle of claim 1: each connector means comprising inner andouter tubes telescoped onto each other, each tube having a swivelconnection with a different wheel in the respective track-wheel unit,whereby the individual wheels can turn without restraint from thetelescoped tubes; the outer tube in each connector means having aninternal stop 32 cooperating with an end of the inner tube to limitcontractive movement of the tubes.7. In the vehicle of claim 6: each stop 32 being adjustable along the axisof the associated outer tube."}
{"WKU":"039305546","Title":"Power-assisted steering gear","App_Date":"1973-09-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Benjamin Ward","Assignee":"Borman & Sons Limited","ICL_Class":"B62D  508","References":"2826258;2893504;3183992;3406773;3465842;3692137","Claims":"I claim:1. A power assisted steering gear for a road vehicle having steerablewheels and a driver rotatable shaft, including a pressure operated device,valve means controlling said pressure operated device comprising tworelatively angularly movable valve members, a torsion bar having oppositeends, means connecting said two valve members to respective opposite endsof said torsion bar, means operably connecting one of such valve membersto the driver rotatable shaft, means operably connecting the other of saidvalve members to the steerable wheels, said torsion bar offeringresistance to relative movement of the valve members, said torsion barhaving a recess therein intermediate the opposite ends thereof, and aplunger having an inner end, means mounting said plunger on one of saidvalve members to be normal to the torsion bar and being movable bypressurized fluid, the pressure of which is dependent upon road speed ofthe vehicle, in a radially inward direction to bring the inner end of theplunger into engagement with the recess in the torsion bar for increasingthe stiffness of the torsion bar with increasing road speed of thevehicle.2. The power assisted steering gear as claimed in claim 1 wherein saidrecess is formed at the center of the length of the torsion bar.3. The power assisted steering gear as claimed in claim 1 wherein saidrecess and the inner end of said plunger have similar taperedconfigurations.4. A power assisted steering gear for a road vehicle having steerablewheels and a driver rotatable shaft, including a pressure operated device,valve means controlling said pressure operated device comprisingrelatively angularly movable inner and sleeve members, a torsion barhaving opposite ends, means connecting said inner and sleeve members torespective opposite ends of said torsion bar, means operably connectingsaid inner member to the driver rotatable shaft, means operably connectingthe sleeve member to the steerable wheels, said torsion bar offeringresistance to relative movement of the inner and sleeve members, saidtorsion bar having a recess therein intermediate the opposite endsthereof, said sleeve member having a housing located normal to the torsionbar, and a plunger having an inner end mounted in said housing and beingmovable by pressurized fluid, the pressure of which is dependent upon roadspeed of the vehicle, in a radially inward direction to bring the innerend of the plunger into engagement with the recess in the torsion bar forincreasing the stiffness of the torsion bar with increasing road speed ofthe vehicle."}
{"WKU":"039305554","Title":"Transmission shifting control system","App_Date":"1974-12-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Tetsuya Iijima","Assignee":"Nissan Motor Company Limited","ICL_Class":"B60R 2110","References":"1675465;1805088;3438455;3729059;3859625;3864668;3870120","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A transmission shifting control system for a motor vehicle, comprisingelectrically operated means movable between a first position to connecttwo sections of a shift linkage of a transmission of the vehicle to allowshifting of said transmission and a second position to disconnect said twosections of said shift linkage from each other to inhibit shifting of saidtransmission, first sensing means sensing that the driver sits down on hisseat of the vehicle to produce a first output signal and sensing that thedriver is absent from his seat to produce a second output signal, secondsensing means sensing that the driver fails to carry out a precautionaryprocedure for his safety and protection when said first sensing meansproduces said first output signal to produce an output signal, and anelectric control circuit connect to said first and second sensing meansand to said electric operated means and responsive to said output signalof said second sensing means to produce an output signal to move saidelectrically operated means from said first position into said secondposition to inhibit shifting of said transmission.2. A transmission shifting control system as claimed in claim 1, in whichsaid electric control circuit comprises a failure detecting circuitcomprising a first bistable memory circuit which is set by said secondoutput signal of said first sensing means to produce an output signal andwhich is reset by said output signal of said second sensing means to ceaseto produce said output signal, a first AND gate circuit for producing anoutput signal only when said first output signal of said first sensingmeans and said output signal of said bistable memory circuit areconcurrently present, and an OR gate circuit for producing an outputsignal when only one of said output signal of said second sensing meansand said output signal of said AND gate circuit is present, saidelectrically operated means being moved from said first position into saidsecond position to disconnect said two sections of said shift linkage fromeach other to inhibit shifting of said transmission when said outputsignal of said OR gate circuit is present.3. A transmission shifting control system as claimed in claim 2, in whichsaid first sensing means comprises a switch which is normally open andclosed to produce said first output signal when the driver sits down onhis seat, and a NOT circuit which produces said second output signal whensaid first output signal is absent and said second sensing means comprisesa switch which is normally closed to produce said output signal and openedwhen the driver carries out said precautionary procedure.4. A transmission shifting control system as claimed in claim 2, in whichsaid electric control circuit further comprises a sensor responsive tovehicle engine speed to produce an output signal and a second AND gatecircuit for producing an output signal only when said output signal ofsaid OR gate circuit and said output signal of said sensor areconcurrently present, said electrically operated means being moved fromsaid first position to said second position to disconnect said twosections of said shift linkage from each other when said output signal ofsaid second AND gate circuit is present.5. A transmission shifting control system as claimed in claim 2, in whichsaid electric control circuit further comprises a sensor responsive tovehicle engine speed to produce an output signal, a parallel connection ofa parking switch and a neutral switch, said parking switch being closed toproduce an output signal only when a gear selector lever of saidtransmission is in a parking position, said neutral switch being closed toproduce an output signal only when said gear selector lever is in aneutral position, and a second AND gate circuit for producing an outputsignal only when said output signal of said OR gate circuit, said outputsignal of said sensor and said output signal of said parallel connectionare concurrently present, said electrically operated means being movedfrom said first position to said second position to disconnect said twosections of said shift linkage from each other to inhibit shifting of saidtransmission when said output signal of said second AND gate circuit ispresent.6. A transmission shifting control system as claimed in claim 2, in whichsaid electric control circuit further comprises a first sensor responsiveto the vehicle engine speed to produce an output signal, a parallelconnection of a parking switch and a neutral switch, said parking switchbeing closed to produce an output signal only when a gear selector leverof said transmission is in a parking position, said neutral switch beingclosed to produce an output signal only when said gear selector lever isin a neutral position, a second sensor responsive to vehicle speed toproduce an output signal, a NOT circuit for producing an output signalonly when said output signal of said second sensor is absent, and a secondAND gate circuit for producing an output signal only when said outputsignal of said OR gate circuit, said output signal of said first sensor,said output signal of said parallel connection and said output signal ofsaid NOT circuit are concurrently present, said electrically operatedmeans being moved from said first position to said second position todisconnect said two sections of said shift linkage from each other toinhibit shifting of said transmission when said output signal of saidsecond AND gate circuit is present.7. A transmission shifting control system as claimed in claim 4, in whichsaid electric control circuit further comprises a NOT circuit forproducing an output signal when said output signal of said second AND gatecircuit is absent, and a second bistable memory circuit which is set by anoutput signal produced by closing of an ignition switch of the vehicle toproduce an output signal and which is reset by said output signal of saidNOT circuit to cease to produce said output signal, and a third AND gatecircuit for producing an output signal only when said output signal ofsaid second AND gate circuit and said output signal of said secondbistable memory circuit are concurrently present, said electricallyoperated means being moved from said first position into said secondposition to disconnect said two sections of said shift linkage from eachother to inhibit shifting of said transmission when said output signal ofsaid third AND gate circuit is present.8. A transmission shifting control system as claimed in claim 2, in whichsaid electrically operated means comprises a solenoid which is fixedlymounted on a gear selected lever forming one of said two sections of saidshift linkage and which has a projection extending from a core of saidsolenoid, and a linking lever which forms the other of said two sectionsof said shift linkage and which is formed therein with a recess, saidprojection engaging said recess to connect said gear selector lever andsaid linking lever to allow shifting of said transmission when it is insaid first position, said solenoid being energized to move said projectionfrom said first position into said second position to disconnect said gearselector lever from said linking lever to inhibit shifting of saidtransmission when said output signal of said OR gate circuit is present."}
{"WKU":"039305562","Title":"Method of detecting leak of fluid from a long pipeline","App_Date":"1973-06-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Takazo Kusuda;Niichi Nishiwaki","Assignee":"Osaka Gas Kabushiki Kaisha","ICL_Class":"G01V  100","References":"2940302;3028450","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A method of detecting a leak of fluid from a pipe of a long pipeline fortransporting fluid comprising, in combination:a. forming a long hollow space defined at least on its one side in crosssection by a wall of said pipe for the transport of fluid, said hollowspace extending longitudinally along said pipe;b. providing a plurality of stationary first means for intercepting sonicwalve propagated within said hollow space, individual ones of said firstmeans being in longitudinally spaced apart relationship to each otheralong said pipe over a long distance, any two of said individual ones ofsaid first means which are adjacent to one another being capable ofseparate interception of a sonic wave inside of said pipe caused by a leakwhich may occur between them;c. providing second means for detecting signals from said plurality offirst means indicating the interception of a sonic wave by said firstmeans;d. causing at least any two of said first means which are adjacent to oneanother to intercept a sonic wave propagated within said hollow space;e. causing said second means to detect the signals from said plurality offirst means indicating that a sonic wave caused by a leak has beenintercepted by at least said two adjacent ones of said first means; andf. analyzing the relative relation between the signals;whereby the presence and position of a fluid leak from the pipe isdetected.2. A method as set forth in claim 1, including providing a plurality ofsaid second means, corresponding on a one-to-one basis to said firstmeans, and positioning all of said second means at one place.3. A method as set forth in claim 2, wherein the step of forming saidhollow space is the step of forming this space from interior space of saidpipe.4. A method as set forth in claim 2, wherein the step of forming saidhollow space is the step of forming this space from space formed betweensaid pipe and a wall surrounding said pipe.5. A method as set forth in claim 2, including determining when intensityof a sonic wave intercepted by at least one of said first means exceeds apredetermined value as an indication of a leak.6. A method as set forth in claim 5, wherein the determining step iseffected by at least one of said first means which detect that theintensity of an intercepted sonic wave has exceeded the predeterminedvalue.7. A method as set forth in claim 5, including sending from said firstmeans to said second means a wave signal converted from a sonic waveintercepted by said first means, and determining with said second meansthat the intensity of the wave signal has exceeded a predetermined valuethus indicating that the intensity of the sonic wave has exceeded thepredetermined value.8. A method as set forth in claim 2, including selecting a sonic wavecaused by a leak of fluid from said pipe by self-correlation analysis fromamong sonic waves intercepted by said first means, thus determiningpresence of the leak.9. A method as set forth in claim 2, including intercepting by at least twoof said first means a sonic wave propagated through said hollow space,subjecting a plurality of sonic waves intercepted by a plurality of saidfirst means respectively to cross-correlation analysis. selecting a sonicwave caused by a leak by cross-correlation analysis from among the sonicwaves thus intercepted, thus determining the presence of a leak.10. A method as set forth in claim 1, including forming a pattern fromfrequency and intensity changes in the sonic wave intercepted by saidfirst means during a time period, and comparing the pattern thus obtainedwith a standard pattern showing known changes over a period of time infrequency and intensity of a sonic wave upon the occurence of a leak offluid from said pipe, thus determining the presence of a leak of fluidfrom said pipe.11. A method as set forth in claim 2, further comprising causing at least anumber of said plurality of said first means to produce a plurality ofrespective signals indicating that said first means have intercepted thesonic wave; providing third means which include said second means at oneplace; sending the signals produced by said first means to said thirdmeans, these signals being a plurality of wave signals converted from thesonic waves intercepted by each one of said first means; and analyzing therelative relation between the wave signals sent to said third means so asto pinpoint the position of a leak point.12. A method as set forth in claim 11, wherein the analyzing step iseffected by comparison of relative intensity among a plurality of the wavesignals produced by at least a number of said plurality of said firstmeans.13. A method as set forth in claim 12, including subjecting each of thewave signals to self-correlation analysis prior to the comparison step toselect from among the wave signals a wave signal caused by a leak.14. A method as set forth in claim 11, wherein the step of analyzing iseffected by determining difference between times required for the sonicwaves to be propagated respectively from the leak point to at least anumber of said plurality of said first means respectively by acrosscorrelation analysis among the wave signals.15. A method as set forth in claim 11, wherein the analyzing step includesautomatically analyzing the relative relation among said signals; andfurther comprising automatically computing the position of the leak pointbased on the analysis of the relative relation, and indicating theresulting value.16. A method as set forth in claim 15, further comprising automaticallystopping supply of the fluid to the leak point by closing means."}
{"WKU":"039305570","Title":"Noise reduction kit for can closing machine","App_Date":"1974-11-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Albert C. Schnell;Craig W. Arends;Dean N. Zwikel","Assignee":"Continental Can Company, Inc.","ICL_Class":"E04b  199","References":"2696285;2952233;3556031;3583347","Claims":"The invention is hereby claimed as follows:1. A soundproof enclosure having at least one noise trap and vibrationeliminator tunnel for feeding can end units or similar disc-shaped objectsinto the interior of the enclosure and also incorporating a noise sealbetween the tunnel and the enclosure wall comprising:a first rigid annular support ring mounted on an enclosure for said endunits and having an opening in said ring such that said end units passfreely through a center hole of said ring;a first flexible and resilient annular ring seal mounted underneath saidfirst rigid ring and having an outer size the same as said first rigidring and an inner size slightly smaller than said first rigid ring andequal or smaller in size to said end units such that said first flexiblering seal imposes a retarding sliding frictional force on the periphery ofeach end unit that passes through said ring seal and at the same timecreates an airtight seal about the periphery of the end unit as said endunit travels past said first flexible ring seal;a second rigid annular ring having the same inner and outer size as saidfirst rigid ring and mounted on and under said enclosure and forming withsaid first rigid annular support and said enclosure an annular hollow forsaid first flexible annular ring seal between the bottom surface of saidfirst rigid ring and the top surface of said second rigid ring and actingas a spacer for a second flexible and resilient annular ring seal which ismounted on the bottom surface of said second rigid ring, said second rigidannular ring having a thickness equal to about several thicknesses of theend unit plus one-half thickness whereby when an end unit is in engagementwith said first ring seal two or more said end units lie within thethickness of said second rigid ring and said second flexible ring seal isnot in engagement with said periphery of said end unit lying on top ofsaid end units in said length of said second rigid ring;a second flexible and resilient annular ring seal mounted on the bottom ofsaid second rigid annular ring; anda third rigid annular ring having the same inner and outer size as saidfirst and second rigid rings and mounted on a conveyor frame andsandwiching said second ring seal between the bottom surface of saidsecond rigid ring and the top surface of said third rigid ring wherebysaid can end units are prevented from bouncing and noise from within saidenclosure does not leak out.2. A soundproof enclosure having at least one noise trap and vibrationeliminator tunnel for feeding end units or similar disc-shaped objectsinto the interior of said enclosure as set forth in claim 1 in which saidsecond annular ring comprises:an annular ring having a thickness equal to an integral number of end unitplus one-half an end unit and an interior diameter of slightly greaterthan the diameter of said can end units.3. A soundproof enclosure having at least one noise trap and vibrationeliminator tunnel for feeding can end units or similar disc-shaped objectsinto the interior of the enclosure and which includes a noise seal betweenthe tunnel and the enclosure wall which comprises an opening in theenclosure wall sized such that said end units pass freely therethrough,first and second resilient annular ring seals mounted at the opening, eachring seal having an opening aligning with the enclosure wall opening butsized smaller and equal to or smaller than said end units such that aretarding frictional force is applied to the periphery of each end unit asit passes through the openings of the ring seals to create an airtightseal about the periphery of each end unit and said ring seals being spacedapart such that at least one end unit in a stack placed in the enclosurewall opening tightly seals at its periphery with one of the ring sealswhereby said can end units are prevented from bouncing and noise fromwithin said enclosure does not leak out."}
{"WKU":"039305589","Title":"Noise reduction kit for can closing machine","App_Date":"1974-11-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Albert C. Schnell;Craig W. Arends;Dean N. Zwikel","Assignee":"Continental Can Company, Inc.","ICL_Class":"F02F  700;F01N  100","References":"1381056;1705778;2420939;2971507;3478958;3642092","Claims":"The invention is hereby claimed as follows:1. A noise enclosure for a self-cooling motor having a self-cooling fan forcirculating cooling air along its longitudinal axis comprising: side andend walls, said motor being mounted within the enclosure so that thelongitudinal axis of the motor generally parallels the side walls, a firstpartition in the enclosure extending generally perpendicular to thelongitudinal axis of the motor and snugly surrounding the motor to coactwith the motor and side walls for separating air coming to said motor fromwarmer air leaving the motor, an air intake opening on one side of thepartition and an air discharge opening on the other side of the partition,said openings being directly adjacent the opposite sides of the partition,a second partition in the enclosure extending generally parallel to thelongitudinal axis of the motor and perpendicular to said first partition,said second partition coacting with the side and end walls and said firstpartition to define on the side facing the motor first and second chambersand on the opposite side and between the ends thereof and the end wallspassageway means communicating between the openings and the chambers,means on the exterior of the enclosure coacting with the openings todirect air flow from the discharge opening in a direction directlyopposite to the air flow entering the air intake opening, and soundabsorbing material on the inner surfaces of the side and end walls and onthe sides of said partitions."}
{"WKU":"039305597","Title":"Sound insulating hoods for noise emitting apparatus","App_Date":"1975-02-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Berndt Ebbe Frick","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"E04B  182","References":"1246203;1686016;2046695;2111644;2241797;2256547;2270249;2701618;2893533;3747735;3785452","Claims":"I claim:1. A sound-insulating hood for snugly housing a key-operated noise-emittingapparatus such as a teleprinter and the like, said hood comprising:a. a fixed bottom portion;b. a pair of oppositely-disposed side walls and a back wall extending fromsaid bottom portion;c. a front wall hinged to said bottom portion and being movable between aclosed position against the front edges of said side walls and a loweredposition exposing said teleprinter and the like;d. a top cover hinged to said back wall and being movable between a closedposition overlying said side walls and a raised position to permit accessto the interior of said hood from above;e. a plate member supporting said apparatus slidably engaging said bottomportion to permit withdrawal thereof from the hood to make it availablefor service when said front wall in its lowered position;f. said top cover having means for carrying a roll of fresh paper forreceiving teletype messages and a roll of fresh paper for sending teletypemessages, said rolls being raised to an elevated position together withsaid top cover to make them easily available for service and inspection;g. said front wall and said top cover extending towards each other in sucha manner that the front wall in its lowered position and the top cover inits raised position exposes said teleprinter and the like.2. A hood according to claim 1, having portions of the side walls, aportion of the bottom and a portion of the top cover forming a part of thefront wall.3. A hood according to claim 1, said front wall having a hatch pivotallymounted thereon and a flap pivotally supported on the inner surface ofsaid front wall and positioned such that said flap is located behind thekeys of said apparatus when the front wall is in a closed position.4. The combination of a stand for supporting a plurality of superposedhoods as defined in claim 1, said stand comprising:a. first support means for supporting a first hood for the first lowermostteleprinter and the like at a proper working height above a floor for anoperator in a sitting position;b. second support means for supporting a second hood for the secondteleprinter above said lowermost first hood at a height proper for anoperator in a standing position;c. said first and second hoods comprising guide means for slidably engagingsaid plate member to permit withdrawal of the teleprinter from the hoods;d. said guide means in the second hood extending downwardly at an angleproper for the standing operator to facilitate the opening and closing ofthe hood and the withdrawal therefrom of the teleprinter.5. The combination according to claim 4 having the first supporting meansextending perpendicular to posts forming the stand and the second supportmeans extending with an acute angle from said posts."}
{"WKU":"039305600","Title":"Damping element","App_Date":"1974-07-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Elmer V. Carlson;August F. Mostardo, Jr.","Assignee":"Industrial Research Products, Inc.","ICL_Class":"H04R  128;G10K 1300;H04R  700","References":"2540498;2761912;3124663;3381773;3418437","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An acoustic cup-like plug for positioning in an acoustical port; saidplug being of a resilient material of fiber mesh or screen, the sides ofthe cup-like plug being fused to obtain a cylindrical wall, said wallbeing substantially acoustically impervious for cooperating with the sidesof the associated port to form an acoustical seal therebetween, the screenend of said cup-like plug positioned substantially parallel to the planeof the port opening for providing a maximum area for the passage of soundwhile effecting a selected acoustical resistance, the fibers in the end ofthe plug being fused in discrete sections for selectively determining theacoustical resistance provided by the screen end of said cup to soundpassing therethrough, and the plug being readily restorable to its initialshape if distorted whereby the member may be conveniently handled, shippedand cleaned."}
{"WKU":"039305619","Title":"Low distortion pyramidal dispersion speaker","App_Date":"1974-06-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Arnold I. Klayman","Assignee":"Monitron Industries, Inc.","ICL_Class":"G10K 1100","References":"965328;997870;1381430;1692994;1754506;1777273;1996743","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A loudspeaker horn adapted to be driven by a speaker driver assembly,said horn comprising:a conical section having a small cone end compatible with said speakerdriver assembly, said conical section flaring outwardly to providesubstantially distortion-free coupling of the driver to the horn;an exponential section secured to the large cone end, said exponentialsection flaring exponentially outward to form a horn mouth, said hornmouth having a square cross-section;a raised diffraction lip secured around the periphery of said horn mouth;andmeans preventing any substantial vibration of the horn at the expectedfrequencies.2. A loudspeaker horn as defined in claim 1 wherein said exponentialsection is symmetrical about the longitudinal axis of said cone.3. A loudspeaker horn as defined in claim 2 wherein the inner wall of saiddiffraction lip is parallel to the longitudinal axis of said horn.4. A horn as defined in claim 3 wherein said lip has a height sufficient tocreate a drop of about six decibels or less as the horn is rotated in apolar dispersion test through at least 60.degree. in any direction fromalignment of its central longitudinal axis with a microphone.5. A horn as defined in claim 4 wherein said conical section is a circularcone.6. A horn as defined in claim 5 wherein:the inner wall of said diffraction lip is about 0.1 inches high and formsan angle of about 90.degree. with the lip outer surface; and,said vibration preventing means includes walls of said conical andexponential sections sufficiently thick to provide an aperiodic horn inthe expected frequency range."}
{"WKU":"039305627","Title":"Removable step climbing assembly","App_Date":"1974-12-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Michael W. Zorn","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"E06C  136","References":"186424;459844;503335;1263724;3707273","Claims":"I claim:1. In combination with an upwardly extending, substantially vertical memberof sufficient strength to support a person thereon, a step climbingassembly, said assembly including:a. a plurality of longitudinally spaced pairs of brackets that arealternately situated as on opposite sides of said member, with thebrackets in each of said pairs longitudinally spaced from one another, andthe two brackets in each of said pairs defining two coaxially aligned,longitudinally extending confined spaces;b. first means for rigidly securing said brackets to said elongate member;andc. a pair of step defining units, with each of said units including twolongitudinally spaced coaxially aligned first and second flanges thatextend in the same direction and may be removably inserted in saidconfined spaces of two of said pairs of brackets on opposite sides of saidmember that are adjacently disposed to support the feet of said personclimbing said member, with said step defining units as said person climbsup or down said member being sequentially disengaged one by one from saidpair of brackets and caused to removably engage the next unengaged pair ofsaid brackets in the direction in which said person is climbing to supportsaid person on said member, with each of said step defining units havingan elongate rigid metallic strap that has first and second end portions,with the part of said strap intermediate said first and second endportions being bent to define a shoe supporting section and an angularsection, with said first and second flanges being defined by said firstand second end portions that are bent relative to the free ends of saidfirst receiving section and said angular section.2. An assembly as defined in claim 1 in which each of said bracketsincludes:d. a rigid metallic plate;e. an elongate strap having first and second end portions, and anintermediate U-shaped portion between said first and second end portions;andf. second means for rigidly securing said first and second end portions tosaid plate, with said intermediate U-shaped portion cooperating with saidplate to define one of said confined spaces.3. An assembly as defined in claim 2 in which said second means are welds.4. An assembly as defined in claim 2 in which said first means are aplurality of screws that extend through openings in said plates to engagesaid elongate member.5. An assembly as defined in claim 1 which in addition includes:d. manually operable resilient means that removably locks said stepdefining units on said brackets on which they are supported.6. An assembly as defined in claim 5 in which said resilient means aretriggers secured to said pair of step defining units, said triggerscapable of occupying first positions in which they interlock with saidbrackets on which they are supported and second positions where they aredisengaged from said brackets."}
{"WKU":"039305635","Title":"Lift vehicle","App_Date":"1973-06-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Theodor Abels","Assignee":"Linde Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"B66F  920","References":"2915210;3520426","Claims":"I claim:1. A load-lifting assembly for a fork lift truck or the like, comprising:a support;a pair of transversely spaced upright first column members rigidly mountedon said support;a movable mast section comprising at least one pair of second columnmembers telescopingly engaged with and in sliding contact with theexterior of said first column members and vertically shiftable relativelythereto;a load-engaging carriage vertically shiftable on said section anddisplaceable relatively to said second column members; anda flexible elongated element connected to said carriage for controlling thedisplacement thereof, said second column members substantiallyperipherally surrounding said first column members and being slideablyguided thereon, each of said first column members forming directly part ofa hydraulic cylinder arrangement for raising said section and chargeablewith hydraulic fluid under pressure, said movable mast section comprisinga respective plunger piston receivable in each cylinder formed by therespective first column member, said plunger pistons depending from saidsection and being formed at their lower ends with respective guideshoulders engageable with an inner wall of the respective first columnmembers, said cylinders being sealed with respect to said plunger pistononly at the upper ends of each cylinder whereby the first column membersare the sole support and structure between the lowermost portion of themovable mast section and the said support.2. The assembly defined in claim 1, further comprising a hydraulic cylinderarrangement on said section and engageable with said flexible elongatedelement for displacing said carriage independently of said section.3. The assembly defined in claim 2 wherein said column members are formedwith hydraulic cylinders connected in parallel with said arrangement andchargeable with hydraulic fluid for raising said section said hydrauliccylinders of said column members having a total surface area effective tolift said section at most equal to the effective surface area of saidarrangement timing to lift said carriage.4. The assembly defined in claim 3 wherein said element passes over a guidewheel and is a chain, said guide wheel being vertically displaceable bysaid arrangement.5. The assembly defined in claim 1, further comprising a pair of tubularsleeves on said carriage vertically guiding same on second column members.6. The assembly defined in claim 1 wherein said support comprises across-beam and said first column members are provided with stiffeninginsert at their lower end anchored to said support beam.7. The assembly defined in claim 1 wherein the upper ends of said firstcolumn members are provided with guide members slideably engaging theinner wall of said second column members and the lower end of secondcolumn members are formed with guide members slideably engaged at outerwall of said first column members.8. The assembly defined in claim 7 wherein said guide members are composedof self-lubricating material."}
{"WKU":"039305643","Title":"Disc brakes for vehicles","App_Date":"1973-04-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Toyoaki Kobayashi;Yoshinori Mori","Assignee":"Aisin Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha","ICL_Class":"F16D 6502","References":"3310135;3621946;3656589;3661232;3724606;R26746","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A disc brake comprising: in combination:a rotatable disc;a rigid stationary member comprising a pair of torque taking arms extendingabove and across the periphery of said rotatable disc and forming anopening therebetween, the extended portions of the torque taking armsbeing entirely disposed outside of the periphery of said rotatable disc,and the inner portions of the torque taking arms having protuberancesdisposed inside the periphry of said rotatable disc;a cylinder housing located on one side of said disc;piston means slidably fitted in said cylinder housing;a pair of backing plates having friction pads fixed thereto and disposed onopposite sides of said disc;one of said backing plates and friction pads located on one side of saiddisc slidably engaging the protuberances of the inner portion of said pairof torque taking arms at opposite sides thereof, whereby the brake torqueon said friction pad is absorbed by said torque taking arms only insidethe periphery of said disc during braking;the other of said backing plates and friction pad being located on theother side of said disc, over which side the said extended portions ofsaid torque taking arms are disposed;the said other backing plate having at its opposite sides integrallyprojecting edges slidably engaging inside surfaces of the extendedportions of said torque taking arms, whereby the brake torque on thefriction pad fixed to said other backing plate, during braking, isdirectly absorbed by said torque taking arms only outside the periphery ofsaid rotatable disc;a reaction transfer member fixed to said cylinder housing and extended overand across the periphery of said disc for bringing the said other frictionpad into frictional engagement with said disc upon brake application and;a pair of parallel pins for guiding and supporting said backing plates andfriction pads, both ends of said pins being fixed to the torque takingarms.2. A disc braking according to claim 1 wherein said cylinder housing isformed on said reaction transfer member which is formed into asubstantially U-shape.3. A disc brake according to claim 2 wherein one end of each of saidparallel pins is secured to said torque taking arm and its other end isloosely mounted on said reaction transfer member thereby permitting saidreaction transfer member to slide axially thereon upon the brakeapplication.4. A disc brake according to claim 2 wherein there is provided a pair ofguiding bolts at radially each side of said cylinder housing, each boltbeing fixed to said stationary member at its one end and being looselymounted on said cylinder housing at its other end.5. A disc brake according to claim 2 wherein there is provided a pair ofsubstantially S-shape resilient straps, each strap being mounted on saidstationary member and said reaction transfer member at the radially eachside of said cylinder housing."}
{"WKU":"039305651","Title":"Column of adjustable height","App_Date":"1975-02-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hans Scheben;Herbert Freitag","Assignee":"Stabilus GmbH","ICL_Class":"F16F  932","References":"1454367;2630887;3223206","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A column of adjustable length comprising, in combination:a. two column members elongated in the direction of a common axis andmovable relative to each other in said direction in telescopingengagement,"}
{"WKU":"039305660","Title":"Device for driving a power window","App_Date":"1974-03-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Takeo Matsushima","Assignee":"Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha","ICL_Class":"B60L  100","References":"1997646;2145666;2881881;3235248;3361235","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A device for driving a power window comprising:a motor,a gear housing which is fixed to a stator of said motor having an openside,a casing having a drum shaped portion for covering said open side of saidgear housing;a fixed shaft penetrating through a central portion of said gear housingand said casing for securing said casing to said gear housing anda rotary shaft rotatably fitted on an outer periphery of said fixed shaftand which has splines at one end and an output pinion at the other end;a worm gear driven by said motor which extends into said gear housing;a worm wheel rotatably fitted on the outer periphery of said rotary shaftnear the output pinion end thereof and which meshes with said worm;said worm wheel having a first cylinder portion at an inner side wall alongthe periphery of said rotary shaft and a second cylinder portion spacedradially away from said first cylinder portion, the space between saidfirst and second cylinder portions being divided into a plurality of smallcompartments by partition plates;buffer members which are closely fitted in said small compartments, each ofwhich has an inserting hole and which are made of an elastic material,a core which is held in close contact with said first cylinder portion andwhich is rotatably fitted on said outer periphery of said rotary shaft;pins provided at one side wall of said core and which are snugly insertedin said inserting holes of said buffer members;a third cylinder portion which is provided at the other side wall of saidcore along the periphery of said rotary shaft;a cut-away portion which is formed in a part of said third cylinderportion;a coil spring which is loosely fitted on the outer periphery of said thirdcylinder portion and having bent portions at the ends thereof forretaining said end parts in said cut-away portion;an output piece fitted in said spline of said rotary shaft adjacent saidthird cylinder portion; anda dog which is formed at a peripheral edge end of one side wall of saidoutput piece in a manner to be slightly less wide than said cut-awayportion;said output piece being coupled to said core by insertion of said dogbetween both the ends of said coiled spring in said cut-away portion, aninner peripheral surface of said drum portion and an outer peripheralsurface of said coiled spring being normally held in frictional contact,rotational motion of said worm wheel being conveyed to said core via saidbuffer members and causing frictional engagement of said coiled springwith said inner peripheral surface of said drum portion to inhibitrotation by expansion of the diameter of said coil spring for onedirection of rotation, and causing a decrease in the diameter of saidcoiled spring for the other direction of rotation for allowing rotation ofsaid core, rotation of said core causing engagement of said core with saiddog at said cut away section and causing rotation of said output piece andthe output pinion gear of said rotary shaft.2. The reversal preventing device for a power window motor according toclaim 1, wherein splines formed at an end of said rotary shaft are fittedwith spline grooves formed inside a central part of said output piece.3. The reversal preventing device for a power window motor according toclaim 1, wherein said worm wheel has a double cylinder portion, theinterior of said double cylinder portion being divided into smallcompartments by partition plates, and wherein said buffer members areformed of an elastic material such as rubber, said members being closelyfitted in respective small compartments.4. An apparatus for transmitting motive power for raising and lowering awindow comprising:a housing adapted to be attached to a motor,a drum shaped cover fitted to said housing,a fixed shaft secured within said housing for securing said cover to saidhousing,a rotatable shaft rotatably and concentrically disposed about said fixedshaft, said rotatable shaft having a pinion gear at one end thereof formotive power output and a plurality of splines at the other end thereof,a gear wheel rotatably and concentrically disposed about said rotatableshaft adapted to receive motive power from a motor,a core rotatably and concentrically fitted to said rotatable shaft andhaving a cylindrical portion, said cylindrical portion having a cut awayradial section,buffer means resiliently coupling said gear wheel and said core,a coil spring concentric with said cylindrical portion fitted between saidcylindrical portion and the inner surface of said drum shaped cover, saidcoil spring being bent at the ends thereof, said bent ends being fitted inand engageable with the cylindrical portion in said cut away section, andan output piece engageably fitted with the splines on the end of saidrotatable shaft and having a dog inserted in said cut away section betweenthe bent ends of said coil spring,rotational motion of said gear wheel being conveyed to said core via saidbuffer means and causing frictional engagement of said coil spring withsaid inner surface of said cover to inhibit rotation by expansion of thediameter of said coil spring for one direction of rotation, and causing adecrease in the diameter of said coil spring for the other direction ofrotation for allowing rotation of said core, rotation of said core causingengagement of said core with said dog at said cut away section and causingrotation of said output piece and the pinion gear of said rotatable shaft."}
{"WKU":"039305678","Title":"Chute for front end discharge concrete mixers","App_Date":"1974-09-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert L. Sims","Assignee":"Travel Batcher Corporation","ICL_Class":"B65G 1112;B65G 1114","References":"1178326;1190564;1978014;2859949;3085675;3456769;3774741","Claims":"What I claim is:1. In a self propelled front end discharge concrete mixer unit having abowl adapted for discharging concrete at the forward end of the unit, amovable chute including a pivot mounting between said movable chute andsaid mixer unit, a first power cylinder adapted for swinging the movablechute about its pivot at the forward end of the concrete mixer unit, saidchute having two complementary sections consisting of a mounted sectionand an extendable section, and a hinged connection therebetween wherebysaid extension section is movable from a retracted doubled over positionrelatively to said mounted section to a second position wherein theextension section forms an elongated continuation of the mounted section,a fluid motor actuator including a cam, a cam follower forming a part ofsaid extendable section and operatively engagable by said cam which biasesthe cam follower and extendable section about said hinged connection todisplace said section from its retracted position to its extendedposition, locking means for defining the fully extended position of saidextendable section wherein said first and second sections formcomplementary extensions of each other, and spring means biasing said camto a position whereby said cam is disengagable with said cam follower whenthe retracted section of said chute is swung downwardly with the mountedchute section and providing for retractile movement of said cam as theextension chute is swung from extended to retracted position.2. The chute construction in accordance with claim 1 wherein said powercylinder includes a cylinder, an expandable fluid chamber and an elongatedpiston rod, said piston rod being operatively connected to said extensionchute, said cam being operatively mounted by said cylinder and engagableby said cam follower as the piston rod moves the chute section in apivoting manner within a vertical plane.3. The chute control in accordance with claim 1 including means fordirecting the flow of concrete as it discharges from the mixer bowl intothe end of said chute adjacent the unit.4. The chute construction in accordance with claim 1 including means forclamping the cam follower means onto its associated chute section."}
{"WKU":"039305686","Title":"Bar stock silencer tube","App_Date":"1974-08-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Cyril D. Levey","Assignee":"BTI Company","ICL_Class":"B23B 2500;B65G 1116","References":"570169;674210;2308307;2322488;2512335;2534811;2857931;2933173;3038551;3087570;3087572;3117054;3130700;3563825;3665968;3667175;3698440","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A sound attenuating bar stock feed tube comprising in combination anelongated inner tube, the inner tube including on its exterior a coveringof non-metallic sound-absorbing material, a concentrically disposedelongated outer tube having an internal diameter greater than the externaldiameter of the inner tube to thereby define with the inner tube anannular space, closure means for said annular space at each end, a layerof lead shot in said annular space, said lead layer having a thickness ofbetween approximately 0.090 to 0.120 inches, said layer of lead shot beingformed of a particle size in the range of approximately 0.030 to 0.050inch whereby it forms a loose layer of between 2 and 3 courses ofparticles.2. A sound attenuating bar stock feed tube comprising in combination anelongated inner cylindrical feed tube, an outer cylindrical tubeconcentric about and of substantially the same length as said inner tube,said outer tube having an inner diameter greater than the diameter of anouter surface of the inner tube whereby an annular space is formed betweenthe inner and outer tubes, closure means at each end of said annularspace, at least one layer of woven fabric in contact with and wrappedabout said outer surface of said inner tube, the thickness of said wovenfabric layer being selected in relation to the outside diameter of saidinner tube and the inside diameter of said outer tube to leave a radialclearance zone in said annular space of about 0.090 to 0.120 inch betweensaid fabric layer and the inside surface of said outer tube, a layer oflead shot in said annular space, said shot being provided with a particlesize in a range of about 0.030 to 0.050 inch whereby it forms asound-absorbing layer of approximately 2 to 3 courses of loose particles."}
{"WKU":"039305694","Title":"Power driven typewriter with flexible type head","App_Date":"1973-12-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert E. Boyden","Assignee":"Thomas O Reilly","ICL_Class":"B41J 2304;B41J  154;B41J 2524","References":"2193970;2879876;2919002;2978086;3302765;3313389;3352398;3362517;3405794;3640369","Claims":"I claim:1. A typewriter comprising:a. a rotatable drive member;b. a type drum mounted on said drive member for movement therewith, saiddrum having a plurality of type characters on the outer surface thereof,each of said type characters being movable relative to the remainder ofsaid drum member;c. selectively operable character selecting elements;d. means controlled by said selecting elements for effecting alignment ofthe type character corresponding to the particular selecting elementoperated with a predetermined printing position;e. print control means for causing each of said type characters to movefrom a normal position spaced from said printing position to accuratelyarrive at said printing position and to consistently apply a predeterminedpressure on a record medium, said print control means including"}
{"WKU":"039305708","Title":"Automatic line finder and line counter","App_Date":"1974-01-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Steven J. Fletcher","Assignee":"Sperry Rand Corporation","ICL_Class":"B41J  530","References":"888808;3174610;3297124;3486005;3740531;3757920","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property orprivilege are claimed are defined as follows:1. In an automatic typewriter system having a typewriter with a continuousforms indexing means and a playback/record means for recording typed dataor playing back recorded data, said system being selectively operable in aplurality of modes including an automatic playback mode in which recordeddata is played back and typed one character at a time, said system alsoproducing mode signals and carrier return signals, the improvementcomprising:switch means settable to represent a line count;counter means;means for transferring said line count from said switch means to saidcounter means;first circuit means responsive to each said carrier return signal fordecrementing the line count in said counter means;means for producing an index signal;second circuit means responsive to said index signal, said counter means,and said mode signals for generating a find signal;third circuit means responsive to a fine signal for generating first andsecond sequences of pulses;means responsive to said first sequence pulses for advancing the continousforms indexing means of said typewriter; and,means for applying said second sequence of pulses to said counter means todecrement the line count therein.2. The improvement as claimed in claim 1 wherein:said second circuit means includes means responsive to said indexsignal, asignal indicating the count in said counter means is greater than apredetermined value, and a signal indicating said system is not in theautomatic playback mode for generating said find signal over an intervalof time sufficient to permit said second sequence of pulses to decrementthe count in said counter means to zero and permit said first sequence ofpulses to advance said continuous forms indexing means to bring the firstline of a next sheet of the continuous form into typing position; and,said switch means is set to a value representing the number of linesbetween the first typing lines on consecutive sheets of continuous form.3. The improvement as claimed in claim 2 wherein said means for producingsaid index signal includes a manual key means and storage means forstoring an indication that said key means has been actuated.4. The improvement as claimed in claim 3 including means responsive to azero count in said counter means for resetting said storage means andtransferring the line count from said switch means to said counter means.5. The improvement as claimed in claim 2 wherein said predetermined valueis one.6. In an automatic typewriter system having a typewriter with a continuousforms indexing means and a playback/record means for recording typed dataor playing back recorded data, said system being selectively operable in aplurality of modes including an automatic playback mode in which recordeddata is played back and typed one character at a time, said system alsoproducing mode signals and carrier return signals, the improvementcomprising:switch means settable to a line count representing the number of linesbetween the first typing lines of two consecutive sheets of a continuousform;counter means;means for transferring the line count in said switch means to said countermeans;first circuit means responsive to each carrier return signal fordecrementing the count in said counter means; and,second circuit means responsive to said counter means and a signal fromsaid typewriter indicating termination of said automatic playback mode forgenerating a find signal;third circuit means responsive to said find signal for generating pulses toindex said continuous forms indexing means and decrement said countermeans; and,fourth circuit means responsive to a zero count in said counter means foractivating said means transferring the line count in said switch means,terminating said find signal, and applying a signal to said typewriter torestart operation in said automatic playback mode.7. The improvement as claimed in claim 6 wherein said system includes meansresponsive to a recorded stop code for generating said signal indicatingtermination of said automatic playback mode, said improvement furthercomprising:means for generating a character signal in response to said signalindicating termination of said automatic playback mode; and,means for applying said character signal to said typewriter whereby therecorded character following said stop code is processed by said systemwhile said continuous forms indexing means is being indexed.8. The improvement as claimed in claim 7 wherein said second circuit meanscomprises means for generating said find signal if the count in saidcounter means is greater than one when the signal indicating terminationof the automatic playback mode occurs.9. The improvement as claimed in claim 8 wherein said third circuit meanscomprises means for generating sequences of indexing and decrement signalsas long as said third circuit means receives said find signal.10. In an automatic typewriter system having a typewriter with a formindexing means and a playback/record means for recording typed data orplaying back recorded data, said system being selectively operable in aplurality of modes including an automatic playback mode in which up to apage of recorded data is played back and typed without operatorintervention, said system also having means for producing mode signals andcarrier return signals, the improvement comprising:switch means settable to represent a line count;counter means;means for transferring said line count from said switch means to saidcounter means;first circuit means responsive to each said carrier return signal fordecrementing the line count in said counter means;second circuit means responsive to said counter means and said mode signalsfor producing a line signal for terminating the automatic playback mode ofsaid system when said system is in the automatic playback mode and thecount in said counter means is decremented to a predetermined count; andsaid line signal changing said system to a line mode wherein said systemplays back and types one further line of data, executes a carrier return,and stops.11. The improvement as claimed in claim 10 and further including meansresponsive to said counter means as said counter means is decremented to asecond predetermined count for activating said means for transferring theline count from said switch means to said counter means.12. The improvement as claimed in claim 10 wherein said line count set intosaid switch means has a value equal to the maximum number of lines to betyped on a form.13. The improvement as claimed in claim 10 and further comprising:third circuit means responsive to said counter means and said mode signalsfor producing a further signal when the line count in said counter meansis decremented to a second predetermined count and said system is not inthe automatic playback mode, said system including means responsive tosaid further signal for locking said typewriter.14. The improvement as claim in claim 13 wherein the value set into saidswitch means has a value equal to the maximum number of lines to be typedon a form, said first predetermined count is one and said secondpredetermined count is zero."}
{"WKU":"039305716","Title":"Apparatus for aligning elongated articles","App_Date":"1974-08-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Lars H. Svensson;Pierre Luginbuhl","Assignee":"SIG Schweizerische Industrie Gesellschaft","ICL_Class":"B65G 4700","References":"1373605;2901095;3508639;3722658","Claims":"We claim:1. In apparatus for aligning randomly arriving elongate articles andincluding a substantially horizontally disposed turntable mounted forrotation, at least one stationary spiral guide rail disposed above theturntable and lying generally along a spiral path which extends, in thedirection of turntable rotation, from a point in the vicinity of theturntable axis to the turntable periphery, means for delivering randomlyordered articles to the turntable in a region near the starting point ofthe spiral and spaced radially outwardly from such starting point, andmeans, adjacent the periphery of the turntable in the region where sucharticles are pushed off of the turntable by the guide rail, for conveyingaligned articles away from the turntable, the improvement wherein saidguide rail is formed to be constituted by a plurality of sections whichsucceed one another along the spiral path, with each section being at agreater distance from the turntable axis of rotation than its immediatelypreceding section, said sections being oriented relative to one another insuch a manner as to present a sharp change in direction between adjacentsections, and said guide rail is disposed for causing articles on theturntable to engage only the surface thereof which is directed away fromthe axis of turntable rotation.2. Apparatus as defined in claim 1 wherein said breaks are constituted byslightly rounded portions of said rail.3. Apparatus as defined in claim 1 wherein said guide rail comprises linearsections between said changes in direction.4. Apparatus as defined in claim 3 wherein each said linear section of saidguide rail is perpendicular to the radial line extending from the axis ofrotation of the turntable to the end of that section which is nearer suchaxis.5. Apparatus as defined in claim 4 wherein a plurality of adjacent sectionsof said guide rail extending along the portion of said spiral path nearestthe turntable axis of rotation subtend identical sector angles about suchaxis and the successive sections following such plurality of adjacentsections subtend sector angles of progressively decreasing size.6. Apparatus as defined in claim 1 wherein the surface of said guide railwhich is directed away from the turntable axis is perpendicular to theplane of the turntable."}
{"WKU":"039305724","Title":"Apparatus for separating a series of objects","App_Date":"1974-07-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Rene Fluck;Franz Ruegg","Assignee":"SIG Schweizerische Industrie-Gesellschaft","ICL_Class":"B65G 4726","References":"3037610;3339706;3734266;3811549;3826348","Claims":"We claim:1. In apparatus for conveying a continuous series of flat items along apath while in an upright position and in contact with one another and fordividing the series of items into successive separate groups at the endportion of the conveying path by insertion of a separator member betweenthe last item of the group being separated and the next succeeding item ofthe series, the improvement wherein said apparatus comprises: firstconveying path means defining the end portion of said conveying path andhaving an effective length corresponding to the length of each group to beseparated; second conveying path means disposed adjacent said firstconveying path means and defining the portion of said conveying pathimmediately upstream of said end portion, said second conveying path meansbeing fixed in position; means supporting said first conveying path meansfor pivotal movement about an axis transverse to the direction in whichitems are conveyed along said conveying path, the axis being at leastapproximately in the plane of insertion movement of the separator member;and wherein said separator member comprises: first separator meansconstituting a retaining member for the item next succeeding the last itemof the group being separated and arranged for movement only in a directionperpendicular to the portion of said conveying path defined by said secondconveying path means; and second separator means arranged for movement ina direction perpendicular to the portion of said conveying path defined bysaid first conveying path means and arranged to pivot together with saidfirst conveying path means.2. An arrangement as defined in claim 1 wherein said second conveying pathmeans are obtained in an upwardly inclined manner and said first conveyingpath means are pivotal between such upwardly inclined orientation and ahorizontal orientation.3. An arrangement as defined in claim 1 wherein said second separator meansis formed to present an opening in which said second separator means isdisposed at least at the start of insertion movement of said separatormember.4. An arrangement as defined in claim 1 further comprising: sensor meansdisposed at the end of the path portion defined by said first conveyingpath means for sensing the arrival of an item at the end of that pathportion; and latch means connected to said first conveying path means fornormally preventing pivotal movement thereof and operatively associatedwith said sensor means to permit pivotal movement of said first conveyingpath means when said sensor means senses the arrival of an item.5. An arrangement as defined in claim 4 wherein said sensor means comprise:a position switch disposed to be actuated by an item arriving at the endof the path portion defined by said first conveying path means; and amagnet having a movable armature, said magnet being operatively connectedto move said armature when said position switch is actuated and saidarmature being connected to cause said latch means to release said firstconveying path means when said armature is moved by said magnet.6. An arrangement as defined in claim 4 further comprising: a concave,forked lever disposed in front of said sensor means and mounted to pivotaway from the direction of movement of items on said conveying path, saidforked lever being arranged to place upright an item arriving in a proneposition at the end of said conveying path.7. An arrangement as defined in claim 1 further comprising: a plungermounted on said second separator means for pivotal movement with saidsecond separator means and for movement relative thereto parallel to thedirection of insertion movement of said separator member and located forholding the last item of the group being separated; and spring meansarranged for urging said plunger toward such item."}
{"WKU":"039305732","Title":"Accumulating conveyor and control means","App_Date":"1974-12-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ronald E. Wyman","Assignee":"Wyard Industries, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B65G 4308","References":"2932380;3066788","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An accumulating conveyor comprisingsupport members defining a conveyor stretch along which material may bemoved, said conveyor stretch having a load end and a discharge end,drive means for moving material along said support members,operator means positioned along said conveyor stretch for positioning saiddrive means in position to engage said material including operator meansat the discharge end of said conveyor,control means for said operator means for positioning said operator meansin an operative position to drive said material along said conveyor untilmaterial is positioned over said operator means at said discharge end ofsaid conveyor and for moving said operator means successively to aninoperative position as material is moved thereover stopping material andfilling the conveyor from the discharge end toward the load end.2. A conveyor according to claim 1 wherein said drive means comprises anendless member and said operator means comprises a wear member forsupporting said endless member for vertical movement and guiding it alongsaid conveyor stretch and fluid motors for moving said wear membersvertically.3. A conveyor according to claim 1 wherein said operator means comprise alength of material for supporting said drive means and motor means forpositioning said length of material and said drive means at differentvertical positions, and said control means comprise a plurality of spacedoperator valves operated by material moving along said conveyor stretch,each operator valve having a normal position connecting said motor meansto pressurized fluid and a sensing position connecting said motor means ofa said operator means to the motor means of the preceding operator means.4. A conveyor according to claim 3 wherein said operator means at thedischarge end of the conveyor has its operator valve movable to connectits said motor means to a fluid pressure source or to an exhaust line anda bypass valve intermediate said operator valve and said exhaust line forconnecting said motor means to a pressure line operating said motor meanson command to move material therefrom.5. A conveyor according to claim 4 wherein said operator valves are two-wayvalves to connect all motor means to said exhaust line when said operatorvalves are all in said sensing position and separately to a pressure fluidline when in their normal position.6. A conveyor according to claim 3 wherein said length of material is achannel-shaped wear member extending along said conveyor stretch, saiddrive means is an endless chain riding in the channel-shaped wear member,and said motor means are fluid cylinders to raise and lower each said wearmember to lift said chain into frictional contact with material on saidsupport members.7. A conveyor according to claim 3 wherein said operator valves areoperated by a pivoted sensing arm positioned in the path of materialmoving along said conveyor stretch.8. A conveyor according to claim 4 wherein said control means includesmeans to connect all motor means previously connected to said exhaust lineto pressurized fluid when said operator means at the discharge end of theconveyor has its operator valve in said normal position whereby allmaterial on said conveyor spaced from said discharge end will be advancedsimultaneously when material is removed from said discharge end.9. A conveyor according to claim 1 wherein said drive means comprises anendless member moved along the conveyor stretch, said operator meanscomprise a plurality of spaced wear members for supporting said endlessmember and fluid motors for moving said wear members from said inoperativeposition with said endless member in a position spaced from contact withsaid material to said operative position with said endless member moved toa position engaging said material to be moved, and said control meansincludes means for simultaneously charging all said fluid motors of saidoperator means in said inoperative position upon movement of material fromsaid discharge end whereby all material on said conveyor will besimultaneously advanced toward said discharge end rapidly affording spaceat said load end.10. An accumulating conveyor for pallets or containers which will maintainthe pallets or containers thereon in spaced positions along its length,said conveyor comprisingroller support members extending along a path to support pallets and definea conveyor stretch having a loading and discharge end,an endless chain extending along said path and supported at each end ofsaid path for engaging a pallet on said support members,means for driving said chain along said path,support members spaced along said chain between the ends of said path forsupporting said chain along said path, said support members being spacedless than the length of a pallet or container to be moved along theconveyor stretch,motor means supporting said support members to move the same vertically toraise and lower said chain supported thereby into and out of engagementwith the pallets or containers,a source of fluid pressure,a valve associated with each said support member and associated motormeans, said valve being connected to said source of fluid pressure,connected to adjacent valves, and to said associated motor means by abranch line connected to said line connecting adjacent valves,a sensing arm, positioned to be engaged by a pallet or container movingalong said conveyor stretch, connected to each said valve for moving saidvalve from a normal position connecting said associated motor means tosaid source of fluid pressure to a sensing position to exhaust saidassociated motor means and lower said support member, andcontrol valve means for sequentially exhausting pressure from each saidvalve associated with each support member upon the valve at the dischargeend of the conveyor stretch being moved to a sensing position whereby thesupport members sequentially lower the chain from contact with a pallet orcontainer upon operation of the valves sequentially from the discharge endtoward the loading end after a pallet or container actuates the valve atthe discharge end.11. An accumulating conveyor according to claim 10 wherein said controlvalve means includes means for simultaneously connecting said motor meanspreviously connected to be exhausted to said source of fluid pressure uponsaid valve at the discharge end of the conveyor stretch being returned toa normal position from said sensing position whereby the pallets on saidconveyor stretch will simultaneously move toward the discharge end of saidconveyor upon a pallet being removed therefrom."}
{"WKU":"039305740","Title":"Apparatus for orienting and accumulating containers","App_Date":"1974-10-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kazushige Iwata;Minoru Hosoya","Assignee":"Kao Soap Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"B65G 4724","References":"907116;1876066;2198594;2667959;3084090;3256971;3467237","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which we claim an exclusive property orprivilege are defined as follows:1. An apparatus for transporting, orienting and accumulating articleshaving at least a portion of oval cross-section defined by substantiallyperpendicular short and long diameters, said apparatus comprising:conveyor means including an elongated movable conveying member traveling ina selected direction and having an upwardly facing support surface forsupporting said articles thereon;first guide means for confining therebetween the oval portion of saidarticles, said first guide means including a first pair of spaced sideguide members disposed adjacent said support surface and definingtherebetween a transporting zone, said first pair of side guide membersbeing spaced apart by a distance which is smaller than the long diameterof said articles so as to confine therebetween the oval portion of saidarticles and to facilitate the movement of said articles through saidtransporting zone by said conveying member, said articles when in saidtransporting zone being disposed with the short diameters thereofsubstantially transverse to said selected direction;second guide means for confining therebetween the oval portion of saidarticles, said second guide means including a second pair of spaced sideguide members disposed adjacent said support surface and defining anaccumulation zone therebetween, said second pair of guide members beingspaced downstream a substantial distance from said first pair of sideguide members, said second pair of side guide members being spaced apartby a distance which is substantially equal to or slightly greater than thelong diameter of said articles to permit alignment of said articles in thedirection of the short diameters thereof;restricting means coacting with said articles within said accumulation zonefor causing said articles within said accumulation zone to accumulatewithin a row extending in said selected direction, the individual articlesin said row being maintained in contact with one another and beingoriented so that the long diameter thereof is substantially perpendicularto said selected direction; andthird guide means extending between the first and second pairs of sideguide members and coacting with the oval portion of said articles forpermitting the individual articles to be turned as they are being suppliedfrom said transporting zone to said accumulation zone so that their longdiameters are disposed substantially perpendicular to said selecteddirection when said articles reach said accumulation zone;said third guide means including a third pair of spaced elongated sideguide members disposed adjacent said conveying member and extendingbetween said first and second pairs of side guide members, the side guidemembers defining said third pair being inclined relative to one anotherand defining an elongated orienting passage therebetween which diverges insaid selected direction, said third guide means permitting the articles tobe turned as they pass therethrough only when the articles in theaccumulation zone are oriented with their long diameters substantiallyperpendicular to said selected direction and are disposed within a rowwhich extends back into said orienting passage.2. An apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the side guide members ofsaid third pair are each substantially straight and are each slightlyinclined at a small angle relative to said selected direction of movementof said conveying member, said third pair of side guide members definingan elongated passage therebetween which progressively increases in widthfrom the inlet end thereof to the outlet end thereof, the inlet end ofsaid orienting passage having a width substantially equal to the widthbetween said first pair of side guide members, and the outlet end of saidorienting passage having a width substantially equal to the width betweensaid second pair of side guide members.3. An apparatus according to claim 1, wherein said first pair of side guidemembers are spaced apart by a width which is only slightly greater thanthe small diameter of said articles for causing said articles when beingtransported along said transporting zone to be disposed on said conveyingmember with their long diameters extending approximately parallel to saidselected direction.4. An apparatus according to claim 1, wherein each of the inclined sideguide members defining said third pair comprises a single elongated andsubstantially straight rail member having a length of between about threeto about ten times the long diameter of said articles.5. An apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the individual side guidemembers of said second pair are parallel with respect to one another andare parallel with the side guide members of said first pair, therespective side guide members of said second pair each being spacedoutwardly relative to the respective side guide members of said first pairrelative to the width of said conveying member, whereby the longitudinallyextending centerline of the transporting zone is substantially alignedwith the longitudinally extending centerline of said accumulation zone.6. An apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the side guide members ofsaid first, second and third pairs each comprise a substantially straightand elongated rail member, each rail member having a length substantiallygreater than the long diameter of said article, and the rail membersdefining said third pair each having a length which is at least threetimes greater than the long diameter of said articles."}
{"WKU":"039305759","Title":"Method for a surface treatment of an iron, ferrous alloy or cemented","App_Date":"1973-11-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Noboru Komatsu;Tohru Arai;Yoshihiko Sugimoto","Assignee":"Kabushiki Kaisha Toyota Chuo Kenkyusho","ICL_Class":"C25D  366","References":"2741587;2874454;2933439;3697390;3713993;3827954","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method for forming a hard coating comprising the carbide of a IV-bgroup element of the Periodic Table on the surface of a cemented carbidearticle containing at least 0.05% by weight of carbon, comprising thesteps ofpreparing a molten bath composed of molten boron oxide and a substancecontaining a IV-b group element in a vessel,immersing the article in the molten bath,connecting the article as a cathode and applying an electric current tosaid cathode with a current density within the range of 0.01 to 15A/cm.sup.2 in order to form a hard layer comprising the carbide of theIV-b group element on the surface of said article, andremoving said article from said molten bath.2. A method according to claim 1, wherein said boron oxide is selected fromthe group consisting of boric acid and borate.3. A method according to claim 2, wherein said borate is selected from thegroup consisting of sodium borate, potassium borate and lithium borate.4. A method according to claim 1, wherein said molten bath is composed of60 to 99% by weight of said molten boron oxide and 1 to 40% by weight ofsaid substance dissolved in said molten boron oxide.5. A method according to claim 4, wherein said substance is a pure metal oran alloy of a IV-b group element.6. A method according to claim 5, wherein said metal or alloy is in theform of a powder or a thin plate.7. A method according to claim 4, wherein said metal or alloy is in theform of a block and said block is anodically dissolved in the molten boronoxide.8. A method according to claim 1, wherein said substance is an oxide of aIV-b group element.9. A method according to claim 1, wherein said substance is a halide of aIV-b group element."}
{"WKU":"039305767","Title":"Combined packaging and display box","App_Date":"1974-09-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Paul B. Stephens","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B65D 2502","References":"490365;1094605;2751070;2788123;2950003;2962156;3370702","Claims":"Having thus described my invention, I claim:1. A jewelry display and packaging box comprising:a bottom member adapted to rest in a horizontal position on a horizontalsupporting surface, a display panel carried by said bottom member andhaving a face positioned to be exposed upwardly when said bottom member isin a horizontal position;said bottom member having a front edge and a rear edge;a cover member for the bottom member and having a top wall and peripheralwall depending from the top wall and defining therewith an open faceunobstructed concavity which, in the closed position of the cover member,is open toward said face of the panel;said peripheral wall including a front wall, and a rear wall positioned tolie at the front and rear edges, respectively, of said bottom member inthe closed position of the cover member and side walls extending from thefront wall to the rear wall;said front, rear, and side walls having free edges, respectively, which, insaid closed position of the cover member, engage said bottom member;a hinge member connecting the cover member to the bottom member at the rearof the members so that the cover member can be swung about the hinge axisin a direction upwardly and rearwardly relative to the bottom member, insaid horizontal position of the bottom member, to an open position inwhich the cover member is generally upright and the open face of theconcavity thereof is exposed forwardly of the bottom member;"}
{"WKU":"039305775","Title":"Display container","App_Date":"1974-09-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Leonard R. Kortick","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B65D 7900;B65D 4320","References":"371182;416552;1107985;1527356;1651804;2880858;3316656","Claims":"I claim:1. A display container comprising a rigid plastic housing having spacedparallel elongated oval sides and a wall portion extending along thebottom perimeter of said sides, the front end of said wall portionextending around the front of said oval sides and partially along the top,the rear end of said wall portion extending upwardly at the rear of saidoval sides, the space between the front and rear ends of said wall portionforming the container top opening, opposed grooves extending around theinside of said sides adjacent the perimeter, a plastic cover slidable insaid grooves and having transverse grooves forming thin web portions toimpart flexibility to said cover, said cover being slidable rearwardly toopen said container and being slidable forwardly to close said container,and an article display means pivotally mounted in said container, saidpivotal mounting being between said side walls adjacent the front end ofsaid container, the inner ends of said grooves curving forwardly andupwardly adjacent and rearwardly of the pivotal mounting of said displaymeans, said cover being of such length that the rear end of said coverwill engage said display means adjacent said pivotal mounting only aftersaid cover has been slid rearwardly to open position with the front edgeof said cover spaced forwardly from the rear edge of said wall portion,whereby final movement of the front edge of said cover rearwardly towardthe rear edge of said wall portion will cause the rear end of said coverto pivot said display means into raised position.2. A display container as in claim 1, wherein said display means isprovided with a vertical support extending downwardly to rest on thebottom of said housing for maintaining said said display means inhorizontal position.3. A display container as in claim 1, wherein said pivotal mountings areopposed sector-shaped recesses adjacent the front end, the apex of eachsector-shaped recess being pointed toward the bottom of the container, aflat bar loosely mounted in said recesses for pivotal movement from onestraight side to the other straight side of each recess, and said displaymeans extending at right angles from said flat bar.4. A display container as in claim 3, wherein said display means includes aframe member extending from said flat bar, whereby a travel clock may befrictionally held in said frame member.5. A display container as in claim 4, wherein said display means includesan annular watch band holder mounted on said display means, whereby awrist watch may be mounted on said holder.6. A display container as in claim 4, wherein said display means includes arectangular base extending from said flat bar, means for frictionallymounting a travel clock on the upper face of said base, and means forslidably mounting photographs or the like on the under side of said base.7. A display container as in claim 4, wherein said display means includes apair of spaced arms extending from said flat bar, opposed grooves on saidarms, and an article supporting plate slidable in said grooves."}
{"WKU":"039305783","Title":"Container package","App_Date":"1974-04-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard J. Stein","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B65D 8562;B65D 7556;B65D 7102","References":"2680039;2853186;2891664;2931491;3097740;3232422;3307321;3822012","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A container package comprising at least one packaging band that enclosesa plurality of containers arranged in at least one row, said packagingband incompletely enclosing the periphery of each individual containerwhile completely enclosing the said at least one row of containers, saidpackaging band having portions at opposite sides thereof which are not inphysical contact with said containers, and at least one carrying band offlexible materials operatively associated with said at least one packagingband at the said opposite portions thereof to lift and draw said oppositeportions of the packaging band inwardly and to draw the containerstogether when said at least one carrying band is lifted to lift theenclosed plurality of containers as a package.2. The container carrier according to claim 1 wherein the packaging band isin position spaced downwardly away from the periphery of the top of thecontainer.3. The container carrier according to claim 1 wherein said at least onepackaging band encloses said containers in a direction substantiallyperpendicular to the upright direction of the containers4. The container carrier according to claim 3 wherein said at least oneflexible carrying band is an integral loop positioned to loosely enclosethe said opposite portions of said at least one packaging band.5. The container carrier according to claim 3 wherein said at least oneflexible carrying band is an open-ended loop connected at opposite endsthereof to said at least one packaging band at said opposite portionsthereof.6. The container carrier according to claim 5 wherein said at least oneflexible carrier band has rigid hooked end portions operative to engagesaid packaging band at said opposite portions thereof.7. The container carrier according to claim 1 wherein:a. said plurality of containers number at least four arranged in at leasttwo rows of at least two; andb. said at least one packaging band is positioned to enclose said at leasttwo rows running in a direction substantially perpendicular to the uprightdirection of the containers.8. The container carrier according to claim 7 wherein the number of rows iseven and said at least one flexible carrying band comprises an integralloop positioned to loosely enclose said at least one packaging bandbetween the two innermost rows of containers at said opposite portionsthereto.9. The container carrier according to claim 7 wherein the number of rows isodd and said at least one flexible carrying band comprises two integralloops positioned to loosely enclose said at least one packaging bandbetween the innermost and one adjacent rows of containers and between theinnermost and another adjacent rows of containers at said oppositeportions thereof.10. The container carrier according to claim 1 wherein:a. said plurality of containers number at least four arranged in at leasttwo rows of at least two;b. said at least one packaging band is positioned to enclose each of thecontainer rows individually, running in a direction substantiallyperpendicular to the upright direction of the containers; andc. said at least one flexible carrying band comprises at least one integralloop positioned to loosely enclose at least a portion of said at least onepackaging band at at least one location for each of said rows at the saidopposite portions thereof.11. The container carrier according to claim 10 further comprising a secondpackaging band tightly enclosing said at least two rows in a directionsubstantially perpendicular to the upright direction of the containers.12. The container carrier according to claim 1 wherein:a. said plurality of containers number at least six arranged in at leastthree rows of at least two;b. said packaging band is positioned to enclose said at least three rowsrunning in a direction substantially perpendicular to the uprightdirection of the containers; andc. said at least one flexible carrying band comprises an integral loophaving side portions running between the innermost and one adjacent rowsand between said innermost another adjacent rows beneath said at least onepackaging band at the said opposite portions thereof and having endportions extending beyond opposite ends of the containers of the innermostrow operative to be pulled upwards above the containers to form carryinghandles.13. A container carrier according to claim 7 further comprising anidentical second level of containers stacked thereon and furthercomprising at least one flexible carrying band for the two levels ofcontainers operative, when lifted, to lift the two levels as a package.14. The container carrier according to claim 1 wherein:a. said plurality of containers number at least six arranged in at leastthree rows of at least two;b. said at least one packaging band is positioned to enclose said at leastthree rows running in a direction substantially perpendicular to theupright direction of the containers; andc. said at least one flexible carrying band comprises two integral loopstightly enclosing said packaging band at said opposite portions thereofbetween the innermost and one adjacent rows of containers and between theinnermost and another adjacent row of containers and another integral looploosely enclosing at least a portion of said two integral loops.15. The container carrier according to claim 1 wherein:a. said plurality of containers number at least six arranged in at leastthree rows of at least two; andb. said at least one packaging band comprises at least one first packagingband positioned to enclose said at least three rows running in a directionsubstantially perpendicular to the upright direction of the containers andan at least one second packaging band positioned to enclose another row.16. The container carrier according to claim 15 wherein said at least onecarrying band is an integral loop loosely enclosing at least a portion ofsaid at least one first and second packaging bands at the said oppositeportions thereof.17. The container carrier according to claim 15 wherein said at least onecarrying band comprises an integral loop having side portions runningbetween the innermost and one adjacent rows and between said innermostanother adjacent rows beneath said at least one first packaging band atthe said opposite portions thereof, said flexible carrying band having endportions extending beyond opposite ends of the containers of the innermostrow operative to be pulled upwards above the containers to form carryinghandles.18. The container carrier according to claim 17 wherein said carryinghandles are joined.19. The container carrier according to claim 15 wherein said at least onefirst and second packaging bands comprise a continuous band.20. The container carrier according to claim 3 wherein said at least onepackaging band is joined about said containers adhesively.21. The container carrier according to claim 3 wherein said at least onepackaging band is heat shrinkable and tightly drawn about said containersby the application of heat.22. The container carrier according to claim 3 wherein said at least onepackaging band is adhesively coated on a surface thereof, said surfacecontacting at least a portion of each outer container."}
{"WKU":"039305791","Title":"Multipack means for packaging a plurality of cathode ray tubes","App_Date":"1975-04-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Joseph M. Kurtz","Assignee":"GTE Sylvania Incorporated","ICL_Class":"B65D 8542;B65D 6500;B65D 8530","References":"3363753;3750871","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An improvement in multipack container for accommodating a plurality ofcathode ray tubes wherein the tubes and related internal supportive andprotective structural members are oriented between two spaced-apart andinversely superposed tray members of substantially rigid materialconjunctively serving as top and bottom closure members of the multipackcontainer, each of the tray-like closure members evidences a structuralthickness defined by spatially related interior and exterior parallelplanes bounded by four walls therearound, a plurality of configuratedcavities are formed in each of the tray structures internally of theinterior plane to accommodate the placement and retention of a portion ofthe contourial surface of the respective tubes, the exterior plane of eachclosure member has a related peripheral ledge portion outstanding from thewalls therearound, said improvement providing structural rigidity andflame retardant properties to said multipack comprising:two substantially U-shaped peripherally edge-positioned areal supportmembers having major and minor dimensionings located in opposedorientation between the ledges of said top and bottom closure members,whereof said minor dimensioning equals the distance between said ledges,said closure members being fabricated of flame retardant material, each ofsaid edge support members being formed of a substantially rigid-boardmaterial symmetrically folded in a predetermined vertical manner alongscore lines parallel to said minor dimensioning to provide asquare-cornered structure of substantially U-shaping defining an arealcentral portion with two extremital wing portions projecting thereform,said central portion having a major dimension coinciding with thelongitudinal dimensions of the two superposed walls of said top and bottomclosure members, said projecting wings being seated on and contiguouslyextended along the ledges of opposed walls of each closure member for adistance less than one-half the longitudinal dimension therealong, theforward section of each wing portion being folded inwardly to provide fourreinforcing edge folds oriented vertically between the superposed closuremembers, said folds of the opposed forward sections being separated fromone another to effect a window opening therebetween on both sides of saidmultipack structure, said internal supportive and protective structuralmeans being predeterminately spaced from said peripheral support members;anda tight covering of plastic material contiguously encompassing theassembled multipack means including the tubes and the internal memberspositioned therein, said ambient covering effecting a beneficiallyutilized and reinforced multipack structure thereby providing improvedstructural rigidity and enhanced protection for the flame retardativeintegration and contents as a whole.2. The improved multipack container according to claim 1 wherein each ofthe square corners of said two opposed support members has twospaced-apart inset formations reversely folded to provide inwardlyprojecting seating stops for the corners of said superposed top and bottomclosure members.3. The improved multipack container according to claim 1 wherein each ofsaid forward sections related to the respective vertical folds in theprojecting wing portions has a top and bottom protruding tabular memberindividually shaped for insertion into a compatible recess formed in eachof said closure members to improve the rigidity of the multipackcontainer.4. The improved multipack container according to claim 1 wherein saidmultipack assembly is positioned on a pallet member in a manner that saidplastic wrapping includes said pallet member to provide a multipack-palletassembly.5. The improved multipack container according to claim 1 wherein saidsubstantially rigid board material is of corrugated fabrication, andwherein said rigid closure members are constituted of a substantiallyrigid plastic foam material.6. The improved packaging means for cathode ray tubes according to claim 1wherein a plurality of size-related multipacks are vertically stacked andincorporated within a common wrapping of plastic to provide a plurallyintegrated multipack assemblage."}
{"WKU":"039305805","Title":"Sterilizable, peelable pouch or tray assembly","App_Date":"1973-10-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Seymour Bazell;Edward M. Goldberg","Assignee":"Medical Products Corporation","ICL_Class":"A61B 1902","References":"3093242;3186628;3291374;3322603;3556318;3604616;3687352;3761013","Claims":"We claim:1. A sterilizable, peelable, medical and surgical equipment-containingassembly which comprises:a bottom member;a plastic face sheet superimposed over the bottom member;a continuous plastic strip folded over and sealed to the exterior surfacesof the bottom member and the plastic sheet on at least a portion of theperimetric edges of said sheet and said member to define a readilyseparable interconnection between the sheets separable solely at thejuncture of the bottom member and the plastic face sheet, said striphaving the properties of strength under tension and partability undershear;means for initiating peeling of said face sheet from said bottom membersolely at said juncture, positioned diagonally to the juncture of the topsheet and the bottom member; andmeans for sealing the remaining perimeter of the sheets, said plastic sheetcomprising a plastic that is resistant to transmission of liquid water,wherein the plastic sheet is separated from the first member by peelingsaid sheet from said member.2. An assembly as in claim 1 wherein said bottom member is a plastic sheet.3. An assembly according to claim 2 wherein at least one of said plasticsheets is transparent.4. An assembly according to claim 2 wherein said sheets are elongatedrectangular sheet and a pair of said continuous strips is positioned overand attached to both sides of the sheet.5. An assembly according to claim 4 wherein the strips are heat-sealed tothe sheets and the ends of the pouch are sealed by heat sealing.6. An assembly according to claim 2 wherein the interior surface of one ofsaid sheets has paper bonded thereto.7. An assembly according to claim 2 wherein at least one of said sheets isporous to sterilizing vapors.8. An assembly according to claim 1 wherein the interior surface of saidfirst member has paper bonded thereto.9. An assembly according to claim 1 wherein at least one of said sheet orsaid first member is porous to sterilizing vapors.10. An assembly according to claim 1 wherein said means for initiating peelincludes a score on the exterior of said sheet to facilitate opening ofthe sealed assembly.11. An assembly according to claim 10 wherein a tab is positioned on theexterior of said scored sheet adjacent to the score."}
{"WKU":"039305813","Title":"Sheet feeding mechanisms","App_Date":"1975-01-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Colin Gray","Assignee":"Crosfield Business Machines Limited","ICL_Class":"G06F  738","References":"1839973;2429159;2827167;3412993;3582618","Claims":"We claim:1. A sheet feeding mechanism in which the sheets in a batch of sheets areto be sorted into different output stackers, comprising means foradvancing the sheets along a given path, a buffer store for receiving andtemporarily holding a batch of sheets fed along the path while apredetermined batch value is verified, a batch verifier responsive to thepassage of each sheet along the path for comparing a measured batch valuewith a reference value to derive an error signal, means for extracting thesheets one by one from the store, and a sheet sorting mechanism forsorting the sheets extracted from the store into different outputstackers, the sorting mechanism including means responsive to the outputof the verifier for segregating the sheets of a batch extracted from thestore whenever the error exceeds a predetermined value.2. A sheet feeding mechanism according to claim 1 in which the buffer storeincludes an input station and an output station, a sheet conveyingmechanism for conveying the sheets between the input station and theoutput station, means located at the input station for continuouslyloading the sheets one by one into the sheet conveying mechanism in such amanner that at least the leading edges of the sheets are separated fromone another, the sheet extraction means being located at the outputstation and the sheets being conveyed continuously between the twostations in such a manner that the first sheet of a batch reaches theoutput station only after the last sheet of the batch has passed throughthe input station.3. A sheet feeding mechanism according to claim 2 in which the sheetextraction means is operative at a speed exceeding the speed at which thesheets are conveyed between the input station and the output stationwhereby each sheet vacates the output station before the next succeedingsheet moves into the output station.4. A sheet feeding mechanism according to claim 3 in which the sheetconveying mechanism includes a predetermined number of storage units eachcapable of retaining a single sheet, and in which the loading meanslocated at the input station is so arranged that the sheets are loaded oneby one into successive units as the units move through the input station.5. A sheet feeding mechanism according to claim 4 in which the sheetconveying mechanism includes a drum rotatable about a fixed axis, eachstorage unit comprising a pocket extending radially from the drum and eachpocket including means for releasably retaining a sheet in the pocketduring rotation of the drum about the fixed axis.6. A sheet feeding mechanism according to claim 2 in which the sheetloading means includes means for superimposing the sheets one behind theother in a partially overlapping formation, and the sheet conveyingmechanism includes means for retaining the sheets in the partiallyoverlapping formation during their passage between the input station andthe output station.7. A sheet feeding mechanism according to claim 2 in which the sheetextraction means includes means for engaging the leading edge of eachsheet when the sheet is located at the output station and means foradvancing the engaged sheet at a speed exceeding the speed at which thesheets are conveyed through the store, the excess speed of the engagedsheet being such that the trailing edge of the sheet will have passedbeyond the point at which the sheet is initially engaged by the engagingmeans before the leading edge of the next succeeding sheet reaches theengagement means.8. A sheet feeding mechanism according to claim 1 further comprising afacer for facing the sheets extracted from the buffer store, the facerincluding first and second sheet advancing means which, when energised,move a sheet along first and second paths respectively, the first path butnot the second path reversing the direction in which the sheet is facingand the two paths subsequently uniting with one another, means forbringing each sheet in turn into a position where one end of the sheet isin engagement with the first sheet advancing means and the opposite end ofthe sheet is in engagement with the second sheet advancing means, andmeans responsive to a signal indicating the direction in which the sheetis facing for energising either the first or the second sheet advancingmeans such that only those sheets facing in the wrong direction are fedalong the first path.9. A sheet feeding mechanism in which the sheets in a batch of sheets areto be sorted into different output stackers, comprising means foradvancing the sheets along a given path, a buffer store for receiving andtemporarily holding a batch of sheets fed along the path while the numberof sheets in each batch is verified, means for sensing the passage of eachsheet along the path to derive a signal representing the number of sheetsin each batch, a batch verifier for comparing the measured number ofsheets in each batch with a reference value to derive an error signal,means for extracting the sheets one by one from the store, and a sheetsorting mechanism for sorting the sheets extracted from the store intodifferent output stackers, the sorting mechanism including meansresponsive to the output of the verifier for segregating the sheets of abatch extracted from the store whenever the measured number of sheets inthe batch differs from the reference value."}
{"WKU":"039305821","Title":"System for testing paper money and the like","App_Date":"1974-05-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Fritz Gartner;Erich Berger","Assignee":"Oesterreichische National Bank","ICL_Class":"B07B  115","References":"3417476;3581402;3590992;3759095;3778051;3842668","Claims":"We claim:1. A method of testing specimens of sheet material against a standard,comprising the steps of successively measuring the thickness of a testspecimen at a multiplicity of closely spaced locations along at least onescanning line between opposite edges thereof, comparing the measuredthickness with a reference value at each of said locations, correlatingthe results of comparison to establish a pattern of distribution ofpositive and negative deviations of said measured thickness from saidreference value along said scanning line, and classifying the testspecimen according to the distribution pattern thus obtained.2. A method as defined in claim 1 wherein the test specimen is classifiedaccording to the number of deviations of either sign along said scanningline.3. A method as defined in claim 1 wherein the test specimen is classifiedaccording to the correlation between deviations measured along different,parallel scanning lines.4. A method as defined in claim 1 wherein said reference value has an upperand a lower tolerance limit, said deviations being determined bycomparison with said tolerance limits.5. A method as defined in claim 1 wherein said reference value is derivedfrom thickness measurements of a standard specimen scanned concurrentlywith the test specimen.6. A system for testing specimens of sheet material against a standard,comprising:thickness-gauging means positioned for coaction with a test specimen;transport means for relatively displacing said thickness-gauging means andsaid test specimen along at least one scanning line extending from aleading edge to a trailing edge of the latter;timing means establishing a multiplicity of successive incremental periodsduring a traverse of said thickness-gauging means from said leading edgeto said trailing edge;logical circuitry connected to said thickness-gauging means and to saidtiming means for storing data on deviations of the thickness of said testspecimen from a reference value during any of said incremental periodsthroughout said traverse; anddiscriminating means connected to said logical circuitry for classifyingsaid test specimen according to the pattern of distribution of itsthickness deviations from said reference value along said scanning line.7. A system as defined in claim 6 wherein said thickness-gauging meanscomprises at least one electromechanical pressure sensor engageable withsaid test specimen.8. A system as defined in claim 7 wherein said pressure sensor comprises aleaf spring, mounting means clamping one end of said leaf spring, theother end of said leaf spring being provided with a specimen-engagingformation remote from said mounting means, and transducer meansoperatively coupled with said leaf spring for translating a deflectionthereof from a normal position into a bipolar electrical signal.9. A system as defined in claim 6 wherein said thickness-gauging meanscomprises a plurality of electromechanical pressure sensors spaced aparttransversely to the direction of relative displacement of said testspecimen for scanning same along parallel lines.10. A system as defined in claim 6, wherein said timing means comprises anemitter of equispaced gating pulses, said logical circuitry includingcounting means for said gating pulses.11. A system as defined in claim 6 wherein said thickness-gauging meanscomprises a plurality of sensors positioned to coact with said testspecimen along parallel scanning lines, said logical circuitry includingcoincidence and anticoincidence gates connected to said sensors forestablishing correlation between thickness measurements taken alongdifferent scanning lines.12. A system as defined in claim 6 wherein said thickness-gauging meansincludes threshold means for comparing the thickness of said test specimenwith two range limits, said threshold means being adapted to emitdifferent types of signals during any incremental period according to theoutcome of the comparison, said logical circuitry including separatestorage means for said different types of signals connected to saiddiscriminating means.13. A system as defined in claim 12 wherein said separate storage meanscomprise a plurality of pulse counters.14. A system for testing specimens of sheet material against a standard,comprising:at least one electromechanical pressure sensor engageable with a testspecimen, said pressure sensor including a leaf spring, mounting meansclamping one end of said leaf spring, the other end of said leaf springbeing provided with a specimen-engaging formation remote from saidmounting means, and transducer means operatively coupled with said leafspring for translating a deflection thereof from a normal position into abipolar electrical signal;transport means for relatively displacing said pressure sensor and saidtest specimen along a scanning line extending from a leading edge to atrailing edge of the latter;timing means establishing a succession of incremental periods during atraverse of said pressure sensor from said leading edge to said trailingedge;a source of reference voltage for the thickness of said test specimen;comparison means connected to said pressure sensor and to said source fordetermining deviations of said signal from said reference voltage duringany of said incremental periods; anddiscriminating means connected to said comparison means and to said timingmeans for classifying the test specimen according to the distribution ofsaid deviations.15. A system as defined in claim 14 wherein said transducer means comprisesa piezoelectric element.16. A system as defined in claim 15 wherein said piezoelectric element issecured to said mounting means and bears upon one face of said leaf springadjacent said one end thereof, said mounting means forming an abutmentbearing upon the opposite face of said leaf spring at a pointlongitudinally offset from said piezoelectric element.17. A system as defined in claim 16 wherein said abutment and saidpiezoelectric element are relatively adjustable on said mounting means inthe longitudinal direction of said leaf spring.18. A system as defined in claim 17 wherein said transducer means furthercomprises an analog/digital converter in series with said piezoelectricelement.19. A system as defined in claim 14 wherein said transducer means comprisesa mirror carried on said leaf spring, an emitter of luminous radiationtrained upon said mirror, and receiving means for radiation reflected bysaid mirror.20. A system as defined in claim 19 wherein said emitter is a laser, saidreceiving means comprising an interferometer.21. A system as defined in claim 20 wherein said receiving means comprisesa forward/backward counter for output pulses emitted by saidinterferometer.22. A system as defined in claim 14 wherein said transport means includes arotatable cylinder supporting said test specimen, said formation bearingupon said cylinder through said test specimen.23. A system as defined in claim 22 wherein said transport means furtherincludes at least one pair of endless bands sandwiching a narrow zone ofsaid test specimen between them, one of said bands contacting saidcylinder.24. A system as defined in claim 23 wherein said endless bands form twopairs engaging respective longitudinal edges of said test specimen."}
{"WKU":"039305830","Title":"Balancing system for high capacity cranes","App_Date":"1974-09-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Maurice Jouffray","Assignee":"Creusot-Loire","ICL_Class":"B66C 2372","References":"2139960;2589915;3485383;3842984","Claims":"What I claim is:1. A high-capacity crane comprising a support structure, a chassis mountedon ground engaging drive means and mounting said support structure forrotation about a vertical axis relative to said chassis, a jib and acounter jib pivotally mounted on said support structure, a hoisting cableconnected to said jib for hoisting a load, an I-beam in the form of an arcof a circle spaced from and centered on the axis of rotation of saidrotatable structure and positioned to be on the opposite side of said axisfrom said jib, an upper surface for said I-beam, means for releasablyanchoring said beam to the ground, an anchoring device mounted formovement along said beam, carriage means for preventing vertical upwardmovement of said anchoring device relative to said beam as said anchoringdevice moves along said beam, at least one arm pivotally connected betweensaid chassis and said beam, an arm pivotally connected between saidanchoring device and said support structure, a retaining cable connectingthe upper end of said counter jib to said device, said device moving alongsaid beam according to the angular orientation of said rotatablestructure, a variable length pulley system connected between said jib andsaid counter jib to adjust the inclination of said jib, a pulley system toadjust said counter jib connected between the upper end of said counterjib and said support structure, said pulley systems and said cablepositioning said jib whereby said device exerts pressure beneath saidupper surface before loading said jib, whereby when said releasableanchoring means is released from the ground the jib, counter jib,retaining cable and hoisting cable cooperate to lift the beam from theground for transfer to other locations.2. A crane in accordance with claim 1, said means for anchoring the beam tothe ground including a series of detachable counterweights arranged alongthe beam and connected to said beam.3. A crane in accordance with claim 1, said means for anchoring the beam tothe ground including a series of bolts fixed in the ground, bearing onsaid beam and distributed along said beam.4. A crane in accordance with claim 1, in which said securing devicecomprises a carriage, rollers for said carriage bearing on said uppersurface of said beam and on either side of the web of said beam downwardlyextending claws for said device engaging under said upper surface of saidbeam.5. A crane in accordance with claim 4, including additional ballast mountedon said carriage.6. A crane in accordance with claim 4, including guide rollers for saidcarriage engaging at least one lateral face of said beam.7. A crane in accordance with claim 4, including independent drive means onsaid carriage for moving said carriage along said beam.8. A crane in accordance with claim 7, said drive means including a motorfixed to said carriage and driving a pinion engaging a rack fixed alongsaid beam."}
{"WKU":"039305848","Title":"Boat loading device for high top vehicles","App_Date":"1974-04-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Howard Davis;Euphemia M. Davis","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B60R  904","References":"3045849;3311246;3478908;3762587","Claims":"What is claimed as new is as follows:1. In combination with a vehicle including a high top, a boat loadingdevice comprising an elongated support arm, means pivotally supporting oneend of said support arm from an elevated portion of one marginal portionof said vehicle for swinging movement of said arm about a horizontal axisgenerally paralleling said marginal portion between a lowered positionwith the other end of said arm inclined downwardly and outwardly forcontact with the surface upon which said vehicle rests and a raisedposition with said other end of said arm swung upwardly to a positiongenerally horizontally aligned with said top, said elevated portion ofsaid vehicle being disposed at a height equal to at least one-half theeffective length of said support arm, said other end of said support armincluding mounting means adapted for pivotal connection to an upperportion of the transom of a boat.2. The combination of claim 1 wherein said mounting means comprises a clampassembly adapted to clampingly engage the upper portion of said transompivotally supported from said other end of said arm for rotation about ahorizontal axis generally paralleling the first mentioned axis.3. The combination of claim 1 including an abutment bracket supported fromsaid marginal portion below said top and above said elevated portion forabutment by a mid-portion of said arm to limit swinging toward said raisedposition, said abutment bracket and mid-portion of said arm includingcoacting retaining means releasably retaining said support arm in saidraised position.4. The combination of claim 1 including an elongated horizontal rollerassembly supported from said top and extending along said marginal portionand adapted to rollingly support opposite side gunnel portions of aninverted boat being lengthwise advanced transversely of said rollerassembly.5. The combination of claim 4 including tension member guide means carriedby said roller assembly and having an elongated flexible tension memberengaged therewith for lengthwise guided shifting relative thereto, one endof said tension member being provided with anchor means adapted forselective anchoring to said other end of said arm and the bow portion of aboat disposed horizontally outwardly from the said other end of said armwhen said other end is pivotally connected, by said mounting means to saidupper transom portion.6. The combination of claim 5 including a winding member carried by saidmarginal portion below said elevated portion to which the other end ofsaid tension member is connected.7. The combination of claim 6 including an abutment bracket supported fromsaid marginal portion below said top and above said elevated portion forabutment by a mid-portion of said arm to limit swinging toward said raisedposition, said abutment bracket and mid-portion of said arm includingcoacting retaining means releasably retaining said support arm in saidraised position, second tension member guide means carried by saidabutment bracket below and outwardly of a vertical plane containing thefirst mentioned guide means and with which the portion of said tensionmember extending between said winding member and the first mentioned guidemeans is guidingly engaged for lengthwise shifting relative thereto.8. In combination with a vehicle including a high top, a boat loadingdevice including an elongated support device comprising an elongatedsupport arm, means pivotally supporting one end of said support arm froman elevated portion of one marginal portion of said vehicle for swingingmovement of said arm about a horizontal axis generally paralleling saidmarginal portion between a lowered position with the other end of said arminclined downwardly and outwardly for contact with the surface upon whichsaid vehicle rests and a raised position with said other end of said armswung upwardly to a position generally horizontally aligned with said top,said other end of said support arm including mounting means adapted forpivotal connection to an upper portion of the transom of a boat, anabutment bracket supported from said marginal portion below said top andabove said elevated portion for abutment by a mid-portion of said arm tolimit swinging toward said raised position, said abutment bracket andmid-portion of said arm including coacting retaining means releasablyretaining said support arm in said raised position, an elongatedhorizontal roller assembly supported from said top and extending alongsaid marginal portion and adapted to rollingly support opposite sidegunnel portions of an inverted boat being lengthwise advanced transverselyof said roller assembly, a pulley journaled from said roller assembly andhaving the mid-portion of an elongated flexible tension member passedthereover for lengthwise guided shifting relative thereto, one end of saidtension member being provided with anchor means adapted for selectiveanchoring to said other end of said arm and the bow portion of a boatdisposed horizontally outwardly from the said other end of said arm whensaid other end is pivotally connected, by said mounting means to saidupper transom portion, a winding member carried by said marginal portionbelow said elevated portion and to which the other end of said tensionmember is connected, and a second tension member guide pulley journaledfrom said abutment bracket below and outwardly of a vertical planecontaining the first mentioned guide means and over which the portion ofsaid tension member extending between said winding member and the firstmentioned guide means is guidingly engaged for lengthwise shiftingrelative thereto."}
{"WKU":"039305856","Title":"Coil lifting apparatus and method","App_Date":"1974-05-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jack M. Lynch","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B66F  918","References":"594644;2314792;2358767;2600538;2680644;3019929;3050206;3319815;3476360","Claims":"I claim:1. Coil lifting apparatus adapted for use with a fork lift truck having apair of spaced forks extending from a tilting mast and adapted to lift acoil of the type comprising an elongate strip of material rolled into acoil having a central core, said coil lifting apparatus comprising, incombination:a housing having a top wall, an end wall, and a pair of spaced channelseach depending from the top wall and adapted to receive a fork of thetruck for attachment of the housing to the forks, the end wall beingarranged to abut ends of the forks in the channels;pivot means attached to the housing; anda rigid hook attached to the pivot means to pivot in a vertical planeperpendicular to the mast of the fork lift truck to about a horizontalposition, said hook being adapted to receive and lift a coil and to limittwisting movement of a coil carried on the hook to about15.degree.-20.degree. when the mast of the fork lift truck is tilted.2. Coil lifting apparatus according to claim 1, wherein:the hook is formed to have a generally C-shaped configuration comprising anupper vertical portion, a main portion offset from the upper verticalportion and connected thereto at its upper end, a coil holding portionconnected to the lower end of the main portion and extending horizontallytherefrom with its outer end on the side of the upper vertical portionopposite from the main portion, and a lip portion extending upwardly fromthe outer end of the core holding portion, the main portion being as longas the radius of a coil carried on the hook and the coil holding portionbeing as long as the width of such coil, and the upper vertical portionbeing approximately aligned with the center of gravity of a coil carriedon the hook, and further includingfinger means attached to the main portion of the hook on the side thereofopposite from the coil holding portion, the finger means having a flatportion adapted to engage the central core of a coil for offsetting a coilfrom a stack of coils when the hook is in its horizontal position.3. Coil lifting apparatus adapted for use with a fork lift truck having apair of spaced forks extending from a mast and adapted to lift a coil ofthe type comprising an elgonate strip of material rolled into a coilhaving a central core, said coil lifting apparatus comprising, incombination:a housing having a top wall, an end wall, and a pair of spaced channelseach depending from the top wall and adapted to receive a fork of thetruck for attachment of the housing to the forks, the end wall beingarranged to abut ends of the forks in the channels;pivot means attached to the housing; anda rigid hook attached to the pivot means to pivot in a vertical planeperpendicular to the mast of the fork lift truck, to about a horizontalposition, said hook being adapted to receive and lift a coil and including(1) a coil holding portion and (2) finger means positioned on the hookopposite from the coil holding portion, the finger means having a flatportion adapted to engage the central core of a coil for offsetting a coilfrom a stack of coils when the hook is in its horizontal position.4. Coil lifting apparatus adapted for use with a fork lift truck having apair of spaced forks extending from a mast and adapted to lift a coil ofthe type comprising an elongate strip of material rolled into a coilhaving a central core, said coil lifting apparatus comprising, incombination:a housing having a top wall, an end wall, a pair of spaced channels eachdepending from the top wall and adapted to receive a fork of the truck forattachment of the housing to the forks;pivot means attached to the housing, the pivot means including a verticalpost attached to the housing and having a bar extending laterally beyondboth sides of the post; anda hook attached to the pivot means to pivot in a vertical planeperpendicular to the mast of the fork lift truck, said hook being attachedto the pivot means with a bifurcated strap attached to the hook and havingtwo arms extending about the bar of the pivot means, one on each side ofthe post, and said hook being adapted to receive and lift a coil and saidstrap being spaced slightly from the housing and adapted to contact thehousing to limit twisting movement of a coil carried on the hook.5. Coil lifting apparatus adapted for use with a fork lift truck having apair of spaced forks extending from a mast and adapted to lift a coil ofthe type comprising an elongate strip of material rolled into a coilhaving a central core, said coil lifting apparatus comprising, incombination:a housing having a pair of spaced channels each adapted to receive a forkof the truck for attachment of the housing to the forks;pivot means attached to the housing; anda rigid hook attached to the pivot means to pivot in a vertical planeperpendicular to the mast of the fork lift truck to about a horizontalposition, said hook being adapted to receive and lift a coil and including(1) a coil holding portion and (2) finger means positioned on the hookopposite from the coil holding portion, the finger means having a flatportion adapted to engage the central core of a coil for offsetting a coilfrom a stack of coils when the hook is in its horizontal position."}
{"WKU":"039305864","Title":"Implement device and method of mounting same on tractor","App_Date":"1973-07-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Eldon M. Frank","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"E02F  342","References":"1799204;2285039;2675933;2869740;2975923;3048292;3497973;3612311","Claims":"I claim:1. In combination, a tractor and implement comprising,an implement having a boom having oppositely disposed side frame memberspivotally connected to the opposite sides of said tractor,a power means for selectively pivoting said boom relative to said tractor,a working tool on the outer end of said boom,a power means for pivoting said working tool on and relative to said boom,said power means including an upstanding A-frame having a pair of straightlegs pivoted to each other at adjacent ends with the opposite end of oneleg pivoted to the boom and the opposite end of the other leg pivoted tosaid tool at a point remote from the pivotal axis of said tool on saidboom, and a selectively extendable hydraulic cylinder connected betweenthe legs of said A-frame at their substantial midpoints along their lengthfor opening and closing said legs thereby pivoting said tool on said boomwith said hydraulic cylinder moving in an arcuate path about said pivotalaxis of said one leg connected to said boom thereby accelerating thepivoting action of said tool relative to said boom, said cylinder having abarrel and a piston rod with said barrel at its inner end and said pistonrod at its outer end being connected to said A-frame legs,said working tool being a bucket having a bottom wall, an upstanding rearend wall and a top wall along the top edge of said rear end wall, and saidboom being pivotally connected to said rear end wall of said bucket andsaid other leg of said A-frame being connected to said top wall,a bridging assembly interconnecting the forward ends of said boom sideframe members,said bridging assembly including a cross element having outer endsextending angularly rearwardly into engagement with said side framemembers of said boom thereby positioning the cross frame element moreforwardly than its outer ends to provide clearance for the front end ofsaid tractor and strengthening said boom, and said one leg of said A-frameis connected to said cross frame element between its outer ends."}
{"WKU":"039305872","Title":"Retractable chain lifting device","App_Date":"1973-04-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"George N. Bliss","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B65G 4700","References":"2574045;2869379;3070248;3098349;3239088;3566603;3709394","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property orprivilege is claimed are defined as follows:1. A retractable forklift device comprising frame means, means for movingsaid frame means for carrying objects to different locations, retractablefork means on said frame means and means for extending and retracting saidfork means, said fork means including collapsible links extendibleoutwardly in a substantially horizontal plane and being self-supportingand proportionately sharing the weight of the object when extended, saidlinks each having an upper object-supporting surface slidable beneath anobject for supporting the object, said links including a plurality oflongitudinally aligned standard links having sides and opposite ends, theopposite ends of the longitudinally aligned standard links havingperipheral surfaces, with such peripheral surfaces of adjacent standardlinks abutting one another, and a plurality of longitudinally alignedstabilizing links transversely adjacent said standard links, saidstabilizing links having sides and opposite ends, the opposite ends of thelongitudinally aligned stabilizing links having peripheral surfaces, withsuch peripheral surfaces of adjacent stabilizing links abutting oneanother, folding pins joining said transversely adjacent stabilizing andstandard links, said stabilizing links overlapping the ends of saidstandard links and having outwardly opening recesses adjoining saidperipheral end surfaces of said stabilizing link opposite ends, andstabilizing pins having opposite end portions mounted in transverselyaligned standard links and having central portions abutting the recessesof said longitudinally adjacent stabilizing links for holding the standardand stabilizing links flat when said standard and stabilizing links areextended.2. The forklift device of claim 1, said standard links includinglongitudinal rows of sets of transversely spaced and aligned links, saidsides of said standard links in the transversely innermost set of standardlinks including confronting side portions, said stabilizing pins centralportions including enlarged shoulders having lateral surfaces abutting theconfronting side portions of said innermost set of standard links.3. The forklift device of claim 2, said means for extending and retractingsaid fork means including a sprocket mounted for rotation about an axisand further including spacer pins between said folding pins and saidstabilizing pins, said spacer pins, folding pins and stabilizing pinsbeing engageable by said sprocket for extending and retracting thestabilizing and standard links, roller means mounted for rotation aboutsaid sprocket axis independently of said sprocket and having peripheralsurface means engageable with the upper object-supporting surfaces of saidlinks for providing a bearing support to counter the load-applying momenton said links and to compensate for changes in the relative angularvelocities between the points of contact of the sprocket and rollers onthe pins and the object-supporting surfaces of the links, respectively.4. The forklift device of claim 1, said stabilizing links lying centrallyin a longitudinal row of confronting sets and having spacer pinsseparating the stabilizing links in each set, said standard linksincluding a first longtudinal row of sets of aligned, transversely spacedlinks, each standard link of said sets having a side portion confrontingthe corresponding side portion of the other link in said set of said firstrow, said stabilizing pins including enlarged shoulder having end surfacesabutting the inner confronting said portions of said set of standardlinks, and including additional longitudinal rows of sets of aligned,transversely spaced standard links, each row of additional standard linksets being spaced adjacent, transversely outward of and in overlappingrelation to the next innermost row of standard link sets for increasingthe loadcarrying strength of said fork means."}
{"WKU":"039305880","Title":"Bottle cap","App_Date":"1974-02-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Henri Coursaut","Assignee":"Le Bouchage Mecanique","ICL_Class":"B65D 4134","References":"1875431;2415609;2888159;3685677","Claims":"I claim:1. A cap for a bottle having a thread-bearing annulus, said cap comprisinga cap member and a skirt member, the cap member having a crown and a skirtintegrally connected to the crown, said skirt further having asubstantially circular row of perforations formed therein, said rowdefining as a removable ring the portion of the skirt below said row, saidskirt further having therein a slit extending over part of the height ofsaid ring, said skirt member being of cylindrical shape and extending atone end in telescoping relation inside of and being affixed to said ring,the opposite end of the skirt member extending below said ring.2. A cap according to claim 1 wherein said members are affixed together byfriction between the inner surface of said ring and the outer surface ofsaid skirt member.3. A cap according to claim 1 wherein said ring and the upper portion ofsaid skirt member possess complementary protrusions and indentationsrespectively for affixation thereof together.4. A cap according to claim 1 wherein the upper limit of said skirt memberis substantially at the location of said perforations axially of said capmember.5. A cap according to claim 1 in which the inside diameter of said skirtmember is at least as large as the outside diameter of the thread-bearingannulus of the bottle to be capped thereby.6. A cap according to claim 1 including visible indicia on the exteriorsurface of said ring.7. A cap according to claim 6 wherein said indicia extend from said ringover a portion of the exterior surface of said skirt member below saidring."}
{"WKU":"039305899","Title":"Pry-off closure cap","App_Date":"1975-04-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Carl E. Koontz","Assignee":"Anchor Hocking Corporation","ICL_Class":"B65D 5300","References":"978634;1365274;1676044;1755168;2700186;3272369;3286868;3373889;3445023;3460701","Claims":"Having thus described my invention, I claim:1. An improved composite closure cap for sealing a container having aradially outwardly projecting cap engaging bead at its rim comprising thecombination of:a molded plastic ring having an annular cover portion and a downwardlydependent skirt portion both of said portions being relatively rectangularin cross-section;said cover portion and said skirt portion being coupled together by acorner portion;inwardly projecting container engaging means on the said skirt portion forengaging the container bead having a generally horizontal container beadengaging portion at its top and a guide portion therebelow forming anacute angle with the vertical;said cover portion, said corner portion, said skirt portion and saidcontainer engaging means cooperating to form an inwardly facing channel;a circular metal cap cover positioned within said plastic ring having anouter depending skirt received within said channel having its lower edgepositioned above said bead engaging portion of said container engagingmeans and having an outer annular top portion in engagement with theunderside of the cover portion of said plastic ring;the lower corner of said skirt comprising a generally rectangular portionin cross-section positioned to be spaced from the container; anda sealing gasket on the underside of said metal cap cover for engaging thecontainer rim.2. A composite closure cap as claimed in claim 1 in which said cornerportion includes an upwardly extending circular stacking flange having agenerally rectangular cross-section.3. A composite closure cap as claimed in claim 1 in which said sealinggasket comprises a cut liner.4. A composite closure cap as claimed in claim 1 in which said sealinggasket comprises a cut liner with a safety seal membrane positioned on theunder surface of said liner.5. A composite closure cap as claimed in claim 1 in which said containerengaging means comprises a circular bead.6. A composite closure cap as claimed in claim 1 in which said containerengaging means comprises a plurality of arcuate lug members.7. An improved composite closure cap for sealing a container having aradially outwardly projecting cap engaging circular bead with a roundedconvex cross-section at its rim comprising the combination of:a molded plastic ring having an annular cover portion and a downwardlydepending skirt portion;said cover portion and said skirt portion being relatively rigid and bothbeing generally rectangular in cross-section;said cover portion and said skirt portion being coupled together by acorner portion;radially inwardly projecting holding means on the inner surface of saidplastic ring for engaging a lower portion of the cap engaging bead on thecontainer;said holding means having a rounded convex cross-section including an uppercontainer bead engaging surface extending radially inwardly and downwardlyfrom said inner ring surface at a slight angle to the horizontal and thencurving downwardly and outwardly from its radially innermost portion at anacute angle to the vertical forming a lower guide portion;said cover portion, said corner portion, said skirt portion and saidcontainer engaging means on said plastic ring cooperating to form aninwardly facing channel;a circular metal cap cover positioned within said plastic ring having anouter depending skirt received within said channel with the lower skirtedge positioned above the radially outermost portion of the bead engagingsurface of said holding means and having an outer annular top portion inengagement with the underside of the cover portion of said plastic ring;the lower portion of said skirt portion positioned to be spaced from saidcontainer; anda sealing gasket on the underside of said metal cap cover for engaging thecontainer rim."}
{"WKU":"039305902","Title":"Storage installation for liquefied gas","App_Date":"1974-11-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Harold K. Ebbrell","Assignee":"Shell Oil Company","ICL_Class":"F65D 2518","References":"3047184;3407606;3791164;3852973","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In an installation for the storage of liquefied gas, comprising a tanksurrounded by collecting means selected from the group consisting of awall and a dam which together with the enclosed ground forms a collectingspace around the tank the improvement comprising that the surface of theground of the collecting space and said collecting means comprises a layerof heat-insulating material consisting of lightweight concrete materialhaving a density in the range from about 32 kg per cubic meters to 1840 kgper cubic meter.2. The installation as in claim 1, wherein the surface of the lightweightconcrete material is covered with a layer of an epoxy resin material.3. The installation as in claim 1 wherein the surface of said groundcomprises a layer of lightweight concrete material applied on normal denseconcrete material."}
{"WKU":"039305910","Title":"Container construction","App_Date":"1973-04-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Manfred Hawerkamp","Assignee":"Troisdorfer Bau-und Kunstoff Gesellschaft mit beschrankter Haftung","ICL_Class":"B65D  704;B65D  738","References":"1080179;1233632;1268980;1464771;1816411;1853949;1883646;2031553;2273601;2330940;2366617;2839218;3240644;3246794","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A container comprising a cylindrical container shell having end edgeswith diametrically opposed straight edge portions and intermediate curvedvaulted portions between said opposed straight edge portions, and aclosing end portion at each end of semi-cylindrical shape each having endedge faces on each end terminating in a common plane and definingrespective end support surfaces and having guide edges centrally joined tosaid shell straight edge portions and continuing outwardly to each side ofsaid shell and each having an interior curved undersurface joined to saidshell vaulted portions and closing respective ends of said shell and eachhaving a longitudinal axis extending perpendicular to the longitudinalaxis of said shell.2. A container according to claim 1, wherein said closing ends comprisesingle piece half cylinders having respective radii equal to the radius ofsaid cylindrical container shell.3. A container according to claim 1, wherein said semi-cylindrical closingends project beyond the surface of said container shell and are orientedso that their longitudinal axes are mutually parallel.4. A container according to claim 1, wherein said shell and said closingends are of double-walled construction.5. A container according to claim 1, wherein at least one of said ends isprovided with a socket piece, said socket piece being welded to saidshell.6. A container according to claim 1, wherein said semi-cylindrical closingend portions are disposed in opposition and substantially parallel andwherein the end support surface on respective ends of said end portionsare aligned in a common plane with the respective opposite end supportingsurfaces."}
{"WKU":"039305929","Title":"Beer can structure","App_Date":"1974-12-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Daniel DiIanni","Assignee":"Carling O Keefe Limited","ICL_Class":"B65D 4132","References":"2027430;3152711;3664543","Claims":"What I claim is:1. A sealed can structure including a cylindrical wall member, end wallmembers located substantially at each end of said cylindrical wall memberand sealing said can, a potable liquid located within the can structureand intended in its potable condition to exert at least a predeterminedgaseous pressure of about 12 psi internally of said can, a tab formedintegral with but separable from one of said end wall members, a pull ringhaving a substantially circular opening and joined to said tab forseparating said tab from said one end wall member and gaining access tothe contents of said can, and integrally-formed indicator means in saidone end wall member, said indicator means being substantially disc-likeand being located at least partially within the circular opening in saidpull ring, said indicator means being constructed to assume one positionrelative to the remainder of said end wall member when said internalpressure exceeds said predetermined pressure of about 12 psi and to assumea second position relative to the remainder of said one end wall when saidinternal gaseous pressure is below said predetermined pressure of about 12psi through opening of said can or through leakage of gas pressure from anunopened can, said second position being usually and tactilely differentfrom said first position, whereby external examination of said can in theimmediate vicinity of the tab and pull-ring for said can reveals whetheror not said internal pressure has fallen below said predetermined value ofabout 12 psi and hence whether or not pressure leakage has occurred.2. The can structure of claim 1 wherein said indicator means includes afirst central circular portion dished outwardly of the said one end wallmember and a second annular portion integrally joining said centralportion to the remainder of said one end wall member, said second annularportion having a serpentine cross section and being resiliently-biased insaid first position for movement to said second position when the internalpressure of said can falls below said predetermined value, said firstcentral portion outwardly projecting from the remainder of said one endwall member in said first portion and being located substantially at thelevel of or below that of said one end wall member in said second positon.3. The can structure of claim 1 wherein said indicator means includes aflexible dished disc integrally formed with and joined to the remainder ofsaid one end wall member through a resiliently-biasable peripheral portionthereof, said disc being resiliently biased in said first postion formovement to said second position when the internal pressure of said canfalls below said predetermined value, said disc being dished convexlyoutwardly of the remainder of said one end wall member in said firstposition and being dished concavely inwardly of the remainder of said oneend wall member in said second position.4. The can structure of claim 1 wherein said indicator means includes aflexible circular member formed of a series of concentricintegrally-joined corrugations joined to the remainder of said one endwall member through an annular resilient portion, said circular memberbeing resiliently biased in said first position for movement to saidsecond position when the internal pressure of said can falls below saidpredetermined value, said circular member projecting convexly outwardly ofthe remainder of said one end wall member in said first position andprojecting concavely inwardly of the remainder of said one end wall memberin said second position.5. The can structure of claim 1 wherein said potable liquid is beer."}
{"WKU":"039305937","Title":"Container (or vessel) with a cover","App_Date":"1973-07-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Christian Ragettli","Assignee":"Koninklijke Emballage Industrie van Leer B.V.","ICL_Class":"B65D 1700","References":"3120321;3425596","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A container having a cover, said container having a rim and a firstcurled edge at said rim, a portion of said first curled edge having itsbiggest diameter in a plane perpendicular to the center line of thecontainer, said cover having a second curled edge gripping around saidfirst curled edge, said second curled edge including a circumferentialcutting line which flows up and down with peaks at a region of or abovesaid portion of said first curl having the biggest diameter and withvalleys underneath said portion.2. A container having a cover in accordance with claim 1 wherein saidcutting line comprises a first groove at the outer side of said secondcurled edge and a second groove at the inner side of said second curlededge, said second groove lying in alignment opposite to said first groove."}
{"WKU":"039305945","Title":"Pivot hinge for an apparatus cover hood","App_Date":"1975-04-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Manfred Jungmann","Assignee":"Dual Gebruder Steidinger","ICL_Class":"B65D 4108","References":"3548446;3888386","Claims":"I claim:1. In an apparatus housing comprising a bottom part and a cover hood, theimprovement comprisinga pivotal connection means between said bottom part and said cover hood foropening and closing, respectively, said cover hood by pivoting the latterabout an axis extending parallel to a side of said bottom part, said meanscomprisingat least one sleeve disposed concentrically to said pivot axis and axiallydisplaceably, yet non-rotatably arranged relative to said bottom part onthe latter,said at least one sleeve having a face side forming a curved course,a cam pivotally mounted about said pivot axis adjacent to said face side ofsaid at least one sleeve, said cam being connected with said cover hoodfor joint rotation therewith,a compression spring operatively disposed pressing said axiallydisplaceable sleeve with said curved course against said cam, andsaid curved course having an inclination relative to a radial plane throughsaid at least one sleeve, said inclination and said compression springbeing sized such that within a predetermined rotation range of said camabout said axis corresponding substantially to an opening movement of saidcover hood, there is produced relative to said axis a rotational moment onsaid cam by said curved course of said sleeve pressing against said cam,which moment corresponds in every position within said rotation rangesubstantially to a rotational moment produced by the gravity force on saidcover hood, yet in an opposite rotational sense.2. In the apparatus housing as set forth in claim 1, the improvementfurther whereinsaid curved course of said face side on said sleeve has a transfer portionin a radial plane relative to said axis, said transfer portion lying in arange of a position of said cam, which position corresponds to a closedposition of said cover hood.3. In the apparatus housing as set forth in claim 1, the improvementfurther comprisinga holding part supported on said bottom part of said apparatus rotatablyabout said axis, said holding part holding said cam,said holding part being formed with a slot shaped, one sided accessibleopening,said cover hood having an extension directed substantially perpendicularlydownwardly provided on its bottom side, andsaid extension is insertable in said slot shaped opening on said holdingpart.4. In the apparatus housing as set forth in claim 1, the improvementfurther whereinsaid at least one sleeve comprises two sleeves disposed on opposite sidesof said cam, andtwo of said compression spring, respectively, disposed pressing said twosleeves, respectively, with said curved courses against said cam atopposite sides thereof."}
{"WKU":"039305953","Title":"Article feeding device","App_Date":"1975-01-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Joseph J. Formanski","Assignee":"Michigan Automation Company, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B65G 5904","References":"3448894","Claims":"I claim:1. In article feeding apparatus for translating magnetizable parts chargedinto said apparatus, the improvement comprising in combinationa housing having upper, lower and lateral wall members defining a partiallyenclosed chamber to receive said parts and hold them in a mass for unitaryor plural translation therefrom,at least one said lateral wall member having an opening therethrough toadmit said parts to said chamber and to pass said parts therefrom,a non-magnetic face plate for sliding translation of said parts thereon,disposed between two opposed facing lateral wall members and comprising alower parts support surface portion and an upper parts translation surfaceportion having a segment thereof disposed in vertically spaced apartoverlying relationship to said lower support portion,"}
{"WKU":"039305961","Title":"Components feeding devices","App_Date":"1974-05-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Walter Alan Russell","Assignee":"Elite Engineering Limited","ICL_Class":"B65H 3120","References":"1990879;2584466;2945613;3399793","Claims":"I claim:1. A vibratory hopper for supplying elongate components one by one to awork station via parallel guide channels mounted on a U-shaped supportmember comprising a pair of upstanding limbs for mounting said member on astationary frame member, and an interconnecting bight portion, said hopperhaving spaced wall members adapted to move over said bight portion toaccommodate different length components in the hopper, a strip memberclamped on the bight portion and having a portion at its ends bent overrear and front edges of the bight portion, a pair of non-vibratory guidemembers disposed opposite said portion bent over the front edge of thebight member, said bent over portions extending normal to the spaced wallmembers and the portion of the strip member bent over the front edge ofthe bight portion being maintained a predetermined distance from the frontedge of the bight portion and from a pair of non-vibratory spaced guidemembers.2. A vibratory hopper as claimed in claim 1 wherein the components are fedbetween the portion of the strip member bent over the front edge of thebight portion and the pair of non-vibratory guide members into a channelformed between parallel zigzag guides."}
{"WKU":"039305970","Title":"Chemical dispensing anti-burglary device","App_Date":"1974-03-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Charles Robert Fegley","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B67B  728","References":"3806000","Claims":"I claim:1. A chemical dispensing anti-burglary device for use with a pressurizedcontainer, the device comprising: a body member; means for slideablysupporting said pressurized container in said body member; a fluidpassageway extending through said body member having an open entrysection; means for causing the discharge of fluid from said pressurizedcontainer into said open entry section of said fluid passageway; a springbiased firing member supported in said body member and arranged todischarge fluid from said pressurized container upon movement of saidslidably supported pressurized container when said firing member isreleased; means for releasably retaining said firing member in a cockedposition; said retaining means including a trigger element; said triggerelement being mounted for movement between an actuation position and arelease position; said trigger element when in said actuation positionbeing in engagement with surface of said firing member to retain saidfiring member in said cocked position; and said trigger element in saidrelease position allowing said firing member to activate said dischargingmeans through movement of said pressurized container.2. The invention of claim 1 wherein said pressurized container includes adispensing valve actuated to permit fluid discharge therethrough upondepression thereof, said valve being activated to said release positionthrough movement of said spring biased firing member acting to move saidslideably mounted pressurized container to cause depression of said valve,thus causing discharge.3. The chemical dispensing anti-burglar device of claim 2, wherein saidvalve pressurized container contains a projecting dispensing spout, saiddispensing spout discharging fluid upon depression thereof, said openentry section being funnel shaped for receiving said projecting dispensingspout on said container.4. The chemical dispensing anti-burglar device of claim 2 wherein saidvalve pressurized container includes a recessed valve, said body memberincludes a projection in said open entry section extending beyond saidopen entry section toward said container to engage said recessed valve,said recessed valve activated upon depression thereof to emit fluid.5. The chemical dispensing anti-burglar device of claim 2 wherein saidvalve pressurized container contains a projecting dispensing cap activatedto permit fluid discharge therethrough upon depression thereof, means forrestricting movement of said projecting dispensing cap by said bodymember, an aperture in said body member in communication with said cap,said slideably supported pressurized container arranged to activate saiddispensing cap thereby discharging said pressurized container through saidcap and aperture when said firing member is released.6. The chemical dispensing anti-burglar device of claim 1 in which thepressurized container comprises a pierceable section, means to provide aseal between said pierceable section and said open entry section, andmeans for puncturing said pierceable section, whereby fluid may bedischarged.7. The chemical dispensing anti-burglar device of claim 6 in which saidmeans for puncturing comprises a projecting spout depending from said bodymember.8. The chemical dispensing anti-burglar device of claim 1 wherein saidtrigger element is mounted for rotation between said actuation positionand said release position.9. The chemical dispensing anti-burglar device of claim 1 wherein saidtrigger element is mounted for sliding movement between said actuationposition and said release position.10. The chemical dispensing anti-burglar device of claim 1 wherein saidtrigger element when in said actuation position is in shoulderedengagement with said firing member to retain said firing member in acocked position.11. The anti-burglar chemical dispensing device of claim 10 and a means forelectromechanically retaining and releasing said trigger element.12. The anti-burglar chemical dispensing device of claim 11 wherein saidelectromechanical retaining-releasing means of said trigger elementcomprises a solenoid latch lever for holding said trigger element in saidactuation position, said solenoid lever being resiliently held inengagement with said trigger element to retain said firing member in saidcocked position and a magnetic cored coil for moving said solenoid leverout of engagement with said trigger element whereby said trigger elementmoves to said release position.13. The chemical dispensing anti-burglar device of claim 1 wherein saidtrigger element in said actuation position is in cammed engagement with ashaped surface of said firing member, said cammed engagement arranged tomove said trigger element from said actuation position to said releaseposition, means for holding said trigger element in engagement with saidfiring member, said holding means mounted for movement between holdingposition and a release position, said holding means in said holdingposition securing said trigger element in engagement with surface of saidfiring member, said holding means in said release position permittingtrigger element to move to its release position.14. The chemical dispensing anti-burglar device of claim 1 wherein there isa means for moving said trigger element from said actuation position tosaid release position, said trigger moving means including a means forattaching a cord to said trigger element, said cord arranged to causemovement of said trigger.15. The anti-burglar chemical dispensing device of claim 1 wherein there ismeans for retaining said trigger element in said actuation position, saidretaining means comprising of a fusible link mounted in engagement withsaid trigger element to retain said trigger element in a cocked position,said fusible link to release said trigger element when an electric currentis passed through said fusible link.16. The anti-burglar chemical dispensing device of claim 1 wherein there isa means for moving said trigger element from said actuation position tosaid release position, said trigger element moving means comprising of asolenoid containing an electromagnetic coil and a plunger, saidelectromagnetic coil and plunger being mounted to cause release of saidtrigger element when said electromagnetic coil is electrically energized.17. The anti-burglar device of claim 1 wherein th is a means to safelyretain said trigger element, said retaining means including a pin, saidpin being mounted for an insertion position and a removable position, saidpin in said insertion position being mounted through a hole in said bodymember in a manner to prevent movement of said trigger element, saidremovable position having pin removed permitting movement of said triggerelement when actuated."}
{"WKU":"039305988","Title":"Liquid dispensing apparatus","App_Date":"1974-03-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William E. Slagle","Assignee":"Bildon Company","ICL_Class":"B67D  556","References":"1772545;2109259;2453080;2547823;2618410;2711268;2962193;3217887;3647118","Claims":"Having thus described my invention, I now claim:1. A liquid dispensing apparatus adapted to regulate liquid flow from aplurality of liquid containers which each have a liquid outlet therein,said apparatus comprising: a closed manifold having a liquid chamber forreceiving liquid from said plurality of containers, a manifold liquidoutlet communicating with said chamber and a plurality of containerreceiver means individually disposed along the manifold in fluidcommunication with said chamber, said receivers being dimensioned toreceive and support said containers in a manner whereby all the liquidtherein may be selectively emptied therefrom by gravity, said receivermeans including means for locating said containers in said receiver meanssuch as to provide a barometric pressure liquid outlet port for each ofsaid plurality of containers, each of said outlet ports being open toatmosphere intermediate said manifold and the respective container andbeing disposed at a different vertical level than the liquid outlet portsof the remainder of said plurality, all the liquid outlet ports of saidplurality being at least submerged in said liquid when said plurality ofcontainers are in position on said receiver means so as to prevent liquidflow therefrom, the highest vertically disposed liquid outlet port forsaid containers having liquid therein being temporarily removed fromsubmersion as a selected portion of liquid is removed from said manifoldthrough said manifold outlet, whereby air may flow into said highestliquid outlet port for allowing liquid to flow therefrom until theoriginal liquid level is reestablished to prevent further liquid flow.2. The apparatus as defined in claim 1 further including a rigid containersupport sleeve associated with each of said plurality of receiver means,said sleeves being selectively movable relative to said receiver meansbetween first non-supporting positions and second supporting positionsclosely spaced to said containers, and selectively releasable positiveretaining means for retaining said sleeves in said supporting positions onsaid receiver means.3. The apparatus defined in claim 2 wherein said sleeves each furtherinclude a deformable gasket member disposed adjacent the uppermost endthereof, each said gasket being adapted to be deformed by and closelyembrace an associated one of said containers.4. The apparatus as defined in claim 1 wherein said manifold is disposed ina generally horizontal position and said receiver means are disposedgenerally normal thereto and extend substantially vertically upwardtherefrom, the container liquid outlet ports for each succeeding containerof said plurality of containers from adjacent said manifold liquid outletbeing disposed at a higher vertical level than the preceding container.5. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein each said receiver means comprises anupwardly opening cup-like receptor mounted directly on said manifold.6. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said containers have container liquidoutlets, a valve body sealingly secured to each said container liquidoutlet, each said valve body having a valve body outlet defining saidliquid outlet ports, each said valve body outlet being spaced asubstantial distance from each said container liquid outlet so that saidcontainer liquid outlets are always above the highest liquid level in saidreceiver means.7. The apparatus of claim 6 wherein said receiver means includes shelfmeans for supporting said valve bodies so that substantially the fullweight of said containers and the liquid therein is transferred to saidreceiver means through said valve bodies.8. The apparatus of claim 7 wherein said valve body includes a support capportion having a diameter substantially larger than the diameter of saidcontainer liquid outlets, and said support cap portions being supported onsaid shelf means.9. The apparatus of claim 8 wherein said support cap portion is locatedbetween said valve body outlets and said container liquid outlets.10. A liquid container receiving and supporting structure adapted for usein a container liquid dispensing manifold, comprising in combination:receptor means having a bottom wall, an open top end and a continuous sidewall defining a cup-like structure adapted to receive at least the liquidoutlet portion of a liquid container, said bottom wall having a flow porttherein adapted for liquid communication with said manifold, a pluralityof longitudinal ribs extending along at least a portion of the inside ofsaid side wall from adjacent said bottom wall toward said open end, saidribs further including inwardly extending steps for cumulatively defininga shelf-like area for supporting said container in a precise position insaid receptor means whereby the container liquid outlet may be disposedsuch that substantially all the liquid contents may be selectively drawntherefrom by gravity, that portion of said ribs extending from said stepstoward said open end defining guides for a flow control valve; and,a liquid flow control valve defining a liquid outlet port and having a plugportion adapted to be closely received within a container liquid outletand a selectively movable seal portion for controlling liquid flow fromsaid container, said seal portion having a first normally closed positionblocking fluid flow and including an operating stem for engaging a portionof said receptor means when said container and valve are positionedtherein whereby said seal portion is moved from said first position to asecond opened position to allow liquid to flow from said container throughsaid outlet port, said valve further including means for engaging saidshelf-like area for precisely locating and supporting said container insaid receptor means.11. The combination as defined in claim 10 wherein said means on said valvefor engaging said shelf-like area comprises an outwardly extending rim onsaid valve.12. The combination as defined in claim 10 wherein said receptor furtherincludes a rigid container support sleeve closely associated therewith andadapted for longitudinal movement relative thereto, said sleeve having anopen ended generally cylindrical configuration and further having meansfor selectively retaining it in a desired position relative to saidreceptor whereby further support for said container may be obtained whensaid container and flow valve are received in said receptor by moving saidsleeve closely adjacent to said container.13. The combination as defined in claim 12 wherein said sleeve is closelyslidably received over the outside of said receptor side wall and furtherincludes a deformable gasket-like member over the outermost end thereofadapted to closely embrace the side wall of said container.14. The combination as defined in claim 10 wherein said manifold comprisesan elongated manifold having an elongated liquid chamber and a pluralityof said container receiving and supporting structures are mounted directlyon said manifold in longitudinally spaced-apart relationship and saidshelf-like areas on said plurality of container receiving and supportingstructures being located at progressively greater distances from saidmanifold from one end of said manifold toward the other end thereof.15. The combination as defined in claim 11 wherein said means on said valvefor engaging said shelf-like area comprises an outwardly extendinggenerally circular rim on said valve, said rim having a diametersubstantially greater than said container liquid outlet, and said liquidoutlet port in said valve being spaced a substantial distance from saidrim.16. The combination as defined in claim 10 wherein said receptor means ismolded in one-piece of synthetic plastic material and includes anexternally threaded protrusion extending outwardly from said bottom wall,said flow port extending through said protrusion, said manifold having aninternally threaded fitting receiving said protrusion.17. The combination as defined in claim 16 wherein said manifold iselongated and has a plurality of said fittings longitudinally spaced-apartthereon, each said fitting having one of said receptor means mountedthereto, said shelf-like area on each said receptor means being spaced adifferent distance from said bottom wall than the other said receptormeans.18. Liquid dispensing apparatus comprising; an elongated manifold having amanifold liquid outlet at one end thereof, a plurality of receptorsmounted directly on said manifold in spaced-apart relationship forreceiving and supporting inverted containers having barometric pressurecontainer liquid outlets, said receptors having bottom walls includingflow ports therethrough communicating with said manifold, said receptorshaving shelf means spaced above said bottom walls thereof for locating andsupporting containers, and said shelf means on said receptors beinglocated at progressively greater distances from said bottom walls whenproceeding from said one end of said manifold toward the other endthereof.19. The apparatus of claim 18 wherein said receptors are cup-like membersmolded in one-piece of synthetic plastic material and have protrusionmeans extending outwardly from the bottom walls thereof for cooperatingwith fittings on said manifold to amount said receptors on said manifold.20. The apparatus of claim 18 and including a plurality of liquidcontainers having container liquid outlets receiving valve bodies havingvalve outlets, said containers being inverted with said valve bodiessupported on said shelf means, and said receptors being open toatmospheric pressure.21. The apparatus of claim 20 wherein said valve bodies have plug portionssealingly received in said container liquid outlets, said valve bodiesincluding generally circular rim portions having a diameter substantiallygreater than the diameter of said container liquid outlets, said rimportions being supported on said shelf means, and said valve outlets beingspaced a substantial distance downwardly from said rim portions.22. A receptor for supporting and locating containers in a liquiddispensing apparatus comprising; a cup-like member molded in one-piece ofsynthetic plastic material and having a bottom wall, a peripheral wall andan open upper end, protrusion means extending outwardly from said bottomwall for mounting said member to a dispensing manifold, a flow portthrough said protrusion means, circumferentially spaced-apart ribsextending longitudinally along the inner surface of said peripheral wallfrom said bottom wall, and said ribs having upwardly facing support edgesspaced a substantial distance below said upper end.23. The receptor of claim 22 wherein said protrusion means is externallythreaded.24. The receptor of claim 22 wherein said support edges are defined bynotches formed in the upper ends of said ribs.25. The receptor of claim 22 and further including a rigid sleeve memberslidably received on said peripheral wall, and selectively releasablerestraining means for releasably restraining said sleeve member againstmovement relative to said peripheral wall."}
{"WKU":"039305996","Title":"Cap for caulking cartridge","App_Date":"1975-02-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Don R. Brothers;Stephen E. Toth","Assignee":"Century Industries Corporation","ICL_Class":"B65D 4118","References":"1481508;3021037;3179313;3237800;3322298;3322299;3351249;3732591","Claims":"I claim:1. The combination of an elongated dispensing caulking cartridge andprotective cap therefor, said combination comprising:an elongated tubular cartridge having at least one stationary closed endwith a coaxial dispensing spout protruding outwardly therefrom, said spoutgenerally converging from said closed end toward an outermost end, saidcartridge further having means forming a bead disposed peripherally aroundsaid closed end for receiving and releasably retaining said cap on saidcartridge;a movable piston disposed within the cartridge remote from the closed end,the protective cap comprising a generally cup shaped member having a topwall and a continuous side wall including inner and outer peripheralsurfaces depending therefrom, the outermost edge of said side walldefining an open bottom end dimensioned to be axially received over saidone end of said cartridge; an elongated dispensing spout receiverprotruding from said top wall and substantially transverse thereto towardsaid open end, said receiver being dimensioned so as to receive an axialportion of said spout with a segment of said axial portion being closelyembraced by said receiver; and means disposed at said open bottom forreleasably retaining said cap generally coaxially disposed over said oneend with said portion of said spout disposed in said spout receiver, saidreceiver and said spout being coaxially aligned when the cap is coaxiallyaligned with said one end,said retaining means comprising a resilient bead receiver extendingperipherially around at least portions of said side wall adjacent saidopen end dimensioned to closely receive said bead means,said bead receiver comprising a generally U-shaped cross-section having afirst lip substantially coplanar with said inner peripheral surface, abead receiver top wall extending generally transversely outward of saidouter peripheral surface and a second lip extending downwardly beyond saidfirst lip generally parallel thereto, said second lip including aresiliently deformable locking bead dimensioned to be closely receivedover said bead means with said locking bead received on the side of saidU-shaped cross-section spaced remote from said closed end,means for releasing said retaining means from a retaining condition on saidcartridge,said dispensing spout having a generally circular cross-section, saiddispensing spout receiver having a generally circular cross-sectionaldimension to receive an axial portion of said spout from said outermostend and closely embrace at least a segment of said axial portion spacedfrom said outermost end,at least the inner peripheral surface of said spout receiver taperingoutwardly from said top wall over substantially the entire length thereofthe outer peripheral surface of said spout receiver tapering inwardly fromsaid top wall over substantially the entire length thereof, the taper ofsaid inner peripheral surface being greater than the taper of said outerperipheral surface,said top wall being dimensioned such that a portion of said cap from saidtop wall toward its open end is receivable in the other end of anothercartridge identical to said cartridge in an end to end axial relationship,andmeans on said cap for limiting the amount of insertion of said cap intosaid another cartridge without the cap top wall contacting the piston insaid another cartridge.2. The combination as defined in claim 1 further including locking beadextensions disposed around said locking bead to extend further inwardlytoward said first lip from said locking bead.3. The combination as defined in claim 1 wherein said releasing meanscomprises at least one tab-like member protruding outwardly of said secondlip.4. The combination as defined in claim 1 wherein said bead receiver extendscompletely around the periphery of said side wall at said open end.5. The combination as defined in claim 1 further including a spout receiverinner portion coaxial with said receiver dimensioned to be received withinsaid dispensing spout from said outermost end.6. The combination as defined in claim 5 wherein said inner portionincludes engaging means for positively engaging the inner peripheral wallof said spout when said cap is in position on said cartridge.7. The combination as defined in claim 2 including a spout receiver innerportion coaxial with said receiver dimensioned to be received within saiddispensing spout from said outermost end said inner portion includingengaging means for positively engaging the inner peripheral wall of saidspout when said cap is positioned on said cartridge.8. The combination as defined in claim 1 including a forming blade attachedto the cap.9. The combination as defined in claim 8 wherein the blade is rigidly fixedrelative to the cap.10. The combination as defined in claim 8 wherein the blade is pivotablerelative to the cap."}
{"WKU":"039306003","Title":"Injection molding device with back pressure control of screw movement","App_Date":"1973-05-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Victor Thomas Gardner","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B29F  106","References":"2950501;3140332;3492700;3538549;3695800;3721512","Claims":"I claim:1. In injection molding apparatus of the type in which increments ofplasticized material are intermittently supplied to mold means from abarrel provided with a screw operating on a cycle that includes (a) a shotpreparation portion during which the screw is rotated to feed the materialto be molded toward a front end of the barrel with the screw being allowedto move rearwardly in the barrel until enough material is accumulated inthe front end portion of the barrel to fill a mold cavity and (b) aninjection portion during which communication is established between thefront end of the barrel and the mold cavity and the screw is thrustedforwardly in the barrel to inject the material from the front end portionof the barrel into the mold cavity, the combination comprisinga fluid cylinder having front and rear ends;piston means operatively connected with said screw for reciprocationtherewith and including a head movable forwardly and rearwardly in saidcylinder; andmeans operatively connected to both the front and rear ends of saidcylinder for supplying fluid under predetermined pressure both to thefront end and to the rear end of said cylinder throughout said shotpreparation portion of said cycle to provide opposing forces on oppositesides of said head of such magnitude that a net force difference resistsrearward movement of said head and of the screw connected therewith.2. Apparatus according to claim 1, wherein said means for supplying fluidunder pressure includesa first source of fluid under pressure operatively connected to said frontend of said cylinder;a second source of fluid under pressure operatively connected to said rearend of said cylinder; andmeans for controlling the magnitude of the pressure of the fluid suppliedto the rear end of said cylinder from said second source independently ofthe pressure of the fluid supplied to the front end of said cylinder.3. Apparatus according to claim 2, wherein said second source of fluidunder pressure provides pressure much higher than the pressure of thefluid supplied to the front end of said cylinder, and wherein said meansfor controlling the magnitude of the pressure of the fluid supplied to therear end of said cylinder includes:relief valve means operable at a pressure lower than the pressure providedby said second source but higher than a pressure which, when applied tothe rear of said head, would produce a force on the head equal to thatproduced by the pressure of the fluid supplied to the front end of saidcylinder, andmeans connecting the rear end of said cylinder to said second source and tosaid relief valve with a shut-off valve interposed between said cylinderand said relief valve so that, during the injection portion of said cycle,said shut-off valve may be closed to provide high pressure on the rear ofsaid head for thrusting said screw forwardly in said barrel and, duringthe shot preparation portion of said cycle, said shut-off valve may beopened to provide a pressure on the rear of said head sufficient toproduce the said net force difference resisting rearward movement of saidhead.4. Apparatus according to claim 1, additionally comprising means forcontrolling the magnitude of the pressure of the fluid supplied to thefront end of said cylinder from said first source of fluid under pressureindependently of the pressure of the fluid supplied to the rear end ofsaid cylinder."}
{"WKU":"039306011","Title":"Sheet material pin feed tractor mechanism","App_Date":"1974-11-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Yoshihisa Masuda","Assignee":"Centronics Data Computer Corporation","ICL_Class":"G03B  130","References":"2179156;3606122;3687347","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A tractor mechanism for advancing sheet material that has spacedapertures therealong; said mechanism comprising:a. a supporting frame;b. a drive sprocket having a plurality of grooves along the peripherythereof; a drive shaft on which said sprocket is mounted and which rotatessaid sprocket; said shaft being supported on said frame, therebysupporting said sprocket with respect to said frame;c. a stationary, substantially U-shaped idler means; means on said framesupporting said idler means; the peripheral surface of said idler meansand said sprocket defining an oval-shaped guide path;d. closed loop belt means entrained around said sprocket periphery and saididler means peripheral edge and being supported by and guided for motionaround said sprocket and said idler means; said belt means spaced teeth;e. a plurality of pin feed assemblies secured to and arrayed along eachtooth of said belt means and having pin tabs that project to one side ofsaid belt means, each pin tab having an upwardly extending feed pin forengaging the perforations in the sheet material;f. each of said assemblies having sprocket engaging elements on the toothside of said belt selectively receivable by the sprocket grooves alongsaid sprocket periphery, for rotating said belt and pin feed assemblies.2. The tractor mechanism of claim 1, further comprising:a guide track on said idler means peripheral edge; said pin assembliesbeing shaped to slidably engage said guide track, to maintain alignment ofsaid belt and pin feed assemblies.3. The tractor mechanism of claim 2, wherein said pin feed assemblies areeach further comprised of:a first upstanding flange extending along one side edge of said belt meansand including a second upstanding flange extending along the opposite sideedge of said belt means;a joining rib spanning between said flanges and adapted to engage a toothalong one surface and a sprocket groove along the opposite surface;said first and said second flanges having opposite ends that face towardthe flange ends of the adjacent assemblies; said first and said second pinframe flanges being of a length along said belt means such that on anoperative perforation engaging portion of the path of said belt meansbetween said sprocket and said end of said idler means, the flange ends ofadjacent assemblies abut one another to maintain the assemblies inalignment and prevent twisting.4. The tractor mechanism of claim 3, wherein said operative perforationengaging portion of said belt means path is straight and between saidsprocket and the curved end of said idler means.5. The tractor mechanism of claim 3 wherein:said drive shaft has a non-cylindrical cross-section;clamping means for securing said drive shaft to said sprocket; saidclamping means comprising a plurality of separate clamping pieces, eachshaped to have a surface that conforms to a respective part of saidprofiled exterior of said drive shaft; each said clamping piece beingpositioned to embrace said drive shaft with its said surface in registrywith its respective said portion of said exterior of said drive shaft withwhich it conforms; adjustable means for securing said clamping pieces tosaid sprocket to substantially eliminate any play between the rotatingelements.6. The tractor mechanism of claim 1, wherein the radius of said sprocketand the radius of the curved end of said idler means are substantiallyequal; said idler means peripheral surface extending away from its saidcurved end and toward said sprocket in a manner such that a pair of spacedlinear pathways separated by a distance substantially equal to thediameter of said sprocket is defined; said peripheral surface of saididler means supporting and engaging said belt means.7. The tractor mechanism of claim 1, wherein said support means on saidframe for said idler means is adapted to enable adjustable positioning ofsaid idler means with respect to the position of said sprocket, forobtaining the desired tensioning of said belt means.8. The tractor mechanism of claim 6, wherein said support means furthercomprises a projection extending outwardly from said frame; a notch insaid idler means slidably engaging said frame projection; said frameprojection having elongated sidewalls extending in a direction betweensaid sprocket and said idler means end; said idler means notch havingelongated walls engaging said frame projection sidewalls, thereby causingsaid frame projection to guide shifting of said idler means parallel tosaid projection side walls.9. The tractor mechanism of claim 8, wherein said idler means furtherincludes an elongated opening;said frame having a bushing thereon extending through said elongatedopening;a supporting guide shaft extending through said bushing; said frame beingadjustably positionable along said separate guide shaft, means forsecuring said bushing to said guide shaft for fixing their relativepositions.10. A tractor mechanism for advancing sheet material having spacedapertures therealong; said mechanism comprising:a. a supporting frame;b. a drive sprocket; a drive shaft on which said sprocket is mounted andwhich rotates said sprocket; said shaft being supported on said frame,thereby supporting said sprocket with respect to said frame; said driveshaft being profiled around its exterior for engaging a clamping means;c. clamping means for embracing said drive shaft and comprising a pluralityof separate clamping pieces, each shaped to have a profiled surfaceportion that conforms to a respective part of said profiled exterior ofsaid drive shaft; each said clamping piece embracing said drive shaft inregistry with its respective said portion of said exterior of said driveshaft with which its said profiled surface portion conforms;d. means adjustably securing said clamping pieces to said sprocket wherebysaid drive shaft rotates said sprocket without play;e. idler means spaced from said sprocket; means on said frame forsupporting said idler means; said idler means having a substantiallyU-shaped peripheral edge; the curved end of said idler means being remotefrom said sprocket, the peripheries of said sprocket and of said idlermeans collectively defining an oval shaped guide path for a continuousbelt means;f. closed loop belt means entrained about said sprocket and said idlermeans;g. a plurality of pins projecting outwardly from said belt for engaging theperforations in sheet material;h. sprocket engaging elements on said belt; said sprocket periphery havinga plurality of spaced grooves whereby rotation of said sprocket advancessaid elements and said belt.11. The tractor mechanism of claim 10, wherein said means securing saidclamping pieces to said sprocket comprises a bushing surrounding saiddrive shaft; said bushing having a flange projecting radially outwardlywith respect to said drive shaft; said clamping pieces being secured tosaid bushing flange; said sprocket being secured to said bushing.12. The tractor mechanism of claim 10, wherein said drive shaft haspolygonal shaped cross-section and each said clamping piece profiledsurface portion is shaped to conform to a portion of said polygonalcross-section.13. The tractor mechanism of claim 12, wherein said drive shaft is ofsquare profile and each said clamping piece profiled surface portion isshaped to define a right angle corner notch, with the lengths of the sidesof each notch being shorter than the lengths of the sides of the squareprofile of said drive shaft.14. A tractor mechanism for advancing sheet material having spacedapertures therealong; said mechanism comprising:a. a supporting frame;b. a drive sprocket; a drive shaft on which said sprocket is mounted andwhich rotates said sprocket; said shaft being supported on said frame,thereby supporting said sprocket with respect to said frame;c. idler means positioned adjacent said sprocket; means on said frame forsupporting said idler means; said idler means having a U-shaped peripheraledge; said sprocket periphery and said idler means peripheral edgecooperatively defining an oval-shaped guide path;d. closed loop belt means passing around said sprocket periphery and saididler means peripheral edge;e. sprocket engaging elements on said belt and grooves on said sprocketperiphery for engaging said elements, whereby rotation of said sprocketmoves said belt and said elements;f. each of sprocket engaging elements having a pin projecting outwardlyfrom said belt means and towards said paper document and being oriented soas to selectively engage the perforations in sheet material;g. an elongated belt means support element in that said space, which ispositioned to provide a supporting surface against which said belt meanscan be pressed as it moves past that said space; said belt means supportelement being positioned inside the enclosed pathway defined by theenclosed said belt means;h. a plate for engaging said pin frames and pressing said pin frames andsaid belt means to which said pin frames are attached against its saidelongated support element, at the same time thereby squeezing said pinframes between said elongated belt means support element and said plateand preventing motion of said pins toward and away from said elongatedbelt means support element.15. The tractor mechanism of claim 14, further comprising:a door hingedly connected to said frame and positioned such that in aclosed position, said door extends over the outside of the projecting saidpins, and in an open position, said door permits free access to said pins;said door having an elongated slot formed therein and positioned to bealigned with said pins when said door is in closed position; said door insaid hingedly closed position being located such that said pins projectoutwardly through said door slot.16. The tractor mechanism of claim 15, wherein said elongated beltsupporting element is connected to and is an extension of said idlermeans.17. A tractor mechanism for advancing sheet material that has spacedapertures therealong; said mechanism comprising:a. a supporting frame;b. a drive sprocket; a drive shaft on which said sprocket is mounted andwhich rotates said sprocket; said shaft being supported on said frame,thereby supporting said sprocket with respect to said frame;c. U-shaped idler means spaced from said sprocket; means on said frame forsupporting said idler means; said idler means having a curved end remotefrom said sprocket; said sprocket periphery and said idler means peripherycooperatively defining a guide path for a closed loop belt means;d. closed loop belt means passing around the peripheries of said sprocketand said idler means and being moved by said sprocket means;e. a plurality of pin frames secured to and arrayed along said belt meansare each supporting an outwardly projecting pin for engaging a perforationin said sheet material; each said pin frame being individually secured onbelt means; each said pin frame including a first upstanding flangeextending along one side edge of said belt means and including a secondupstanding flange extending along the opposite side edge of said beltmeans;f. said first and said second flanges having opposite ends that face towardthe flange ends of neighboring pin frame flanges; said first and saidsecond pin frame flanges being of a length along said belt means such thaton an operative, perforation engaging portion of the path of said beltmeans between said sprocket and said end of said idler means, the said pinframe first flange opposite ends of one said pin frame each abut arespective said pin frame first flange end of the neighboring said pinframes, and the said pin frame second flange opposite ends of one said pinframe each abut a respective said pin frame first flange end of theneighboring said pin frames, and the said pin frame second flange oppositeends of one said pin frame each abut a respective said pin frame secondflange end of the neighboring said pin frames, to thereby prevent twistingof said pin frames;g. a pin support arm projecting outwardly with respect to said belt meansone edge and from each said first frame flange; an upwardly extending pinaffixed on each said pin support arm;h. said sprocket having a plurality of grooves, said frames each having asprocket engaging portion on said belt and adapted to be received by agroove on said sprocket periphery, whereby rotation of said sprocketcauses movement of said belt and said frames.18. The tractor mechanism of claim 17, further comprising:an oval shaped belt supporting surface positioned to provide a supportingsurface for said pin support arms;a plate positioned to engage said pin frames and press said pin framestowards said elongated support element to confine said pin support armsbetween said elongated belt means support element and said plate.19. The tractor mechanism of claim 17, wherein said belt means has aplurality of spaced teeth; each of said sprocket engaging elementscomprises a respective, tooth receiving groove on a said pin frame and acurved surface opposite said tooth receiving groove for engaging a grooveon the sprocket periphery.20. A pin feed assembly for advancing a paper document having spacedapertures for interengagement with the pin feed assembly which comprises:first and second spaced parallel frames each having first and secondrespectively coaxially aligned openings;an elongated positioning rod extending through the first openings of saidfirst and second frames;an elongated drive shaft arranged parallel to said positioning rod andextending through the second openings of said first and second frames;a drive sprocket mounted for rotation upon said drive shaft and having acollar portion extending into the second opening of said first frame, saidsprocket being positioned between said first and second frames;a U-shaped idler positioned between said first and second frames, thecurved end being remote from said sprocket and the legs of said idlerextending towards said sprocket; said sprocket and said idler collectivelydefining an oval shaped contour;closed loop belt means entrained about said idler and said sprocket, saidbelt means having spaced teeth projecting towards said oval shaped path;pin frames being secured to said belt means and having a spanning rib witha first grooved surface engaging a tooth and an opposite curved surface;a pair of flanges arranged on opposite edges of said belt means and beingintegrally joined to opposite ends of said spanning rib;a strap connected to said flanges for and cooperating with said flanges andsaid spanning rib to embrace said belt means;said flanges extending downwardly from said rib towards said oval-shapedpath;said sprocket having spaced grooves along the periphery thereof forengaging a rib and driving said belt;said idler having a raised track whereby said downwardly depending flangesslidably engage the periphery of said idler on opposite sides of saidtrack to maintain said frames and said belt means in alignment as saidbelt means is driven;said first frame having a projection between said first and second openingsand extending towards said second frame;the legs of said U-shaped idler slidably engaging said projection and beinglongitudinally adjustable towards or away from said second opening toadjust the tension of said belt means;means for securing said idler to said second frame;the straight peripheral portions of said idler providing support for saidframes and hence said belt means;each of said frames having a pin tab extending away from said belt andtowards said first frame;a pin integrally joined to and extending upwardly from said tab and awayfrom said oval shaped path for moving into a perforation in said paperdocument to provide positive advancement of the document.21. The pin feed assembly of claim 20, wherein said first frame is providedwith an oval-shaped surface adjacent said sprocket and said idler forslidably supporting said tabs.22. The pin feed assembly of claim 21, further comprising a door hingeablymounted to said second frame and biased towards said second frame tooverlie said pins and said belt means;said door having an elongated slot aligned with said pins to permit saidpins to extend through said slot and freely move therealong.23. The pin feed assembly of claim 22, wherein said hinge assemblycomprises a pair of spaced flanges on the hinge end of said door;a cooperating pair of flanges on said second frame;each of said door flanges and said second frame flanges having axiallyaligned openings;an elongated pin extending through the openings in said door flanges andsaid second frame flanges from hingedly mounting said door to said secondframe;a biasing spring having a first end secured to said door adjacent one ofsaid door flanges and a second end secured to said second frame adjacentthat said one of the second frame flanges closest to said one door flangefor biasing said door towards said first frame."}
{"WKU":"039306020","Title":"Apparatus for transferring threads from the spinning and finishing part","App_Date":"1974-10-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Alexandr Kupriyanovich Vorobiev;Vladimir Anatolievich Goldin;Adolf Sergeevich Severin;Ljudmila Sergeevna Scherbakova;Nikolai Alexandrovich Orlov;Vsevolod Grigorievich Novitsky;Oleg Vladimirovich Tryaskin;Dmitry Pavlovich Olenin;Valery Iosifovich Nesvizhsky;Evsei Moiseevich Mogilevsky;Igor Petrovich Baksheev;Georgy Georgievich Finger;Ivan Gavrilovich Shimko;Gleb Alexandrovich Golubev","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B65H 1732","References":"2563986;3729831","Claims":"What we claim is:1. An apparatus for transferring threads from the spinning-and-finishingpart of a machine for continuous production of artificial threads to thetake-up and winding arrangement thereof, comprising: a plurality of threadguiding tubes each having the inlet end thereof situated adjacent to saidspinning and finishing part and having the outlet end thereof situatedadjacent to said take-up and winding arrangement; a plurality of threadguides mounted on said ends of said tubes and adapted to center individualthreads along the axes of respective tubes; an ejector means mounted onsaid inlet end of each said tube and adapted to feed respective threadsinto said tube by directing a stream of air toward said outlet endthereof; each of said thread guides mounted on said outlet ends of saidtubes including a cup-shaped member having a bottom and a side wall; anaperture made in the center of said bottom of each said cup-shaped member;a port made in said side wall of each said cup-shaped member, having asize greater than that of said aperture and communicating therewith; ascreen means mounted adjacent to said cup-shaped member of each said tubein opposition to said port thereof and adapted to separate the adjacentones of said threads and to slow down the jet of air issuing from saidtube together with a respective thread, as the latter is being fed throughsaid tube.2. An apparatus as claimed in claim 1, wherein said aperture in said bottomof said cup-shaped member has a diameter smaller than the diameter of saidthread guiding tube.3. An apparatus as claimed in claim 1, wherein said cup-shaped members arearranged on respective tubes so that said ports of the adjacent ones ofsaid cup-shaped members are oriented in diametrally opposing directions,said screen means being made in the form of a partition successivelyenveloping said cup-shaped members on the side of said ports thereof.4. An apparatus as claimed in claim 3, wherein a tray is provided tounderlie said screen means and said cup-shaped members.5. An apparatus as claimed in claim 4, wherein said tray is air-permeable.6. An apparatus as claimed in claim 1, wherein said screen means is of anarcuate shape and is mounted next to said cup-shaped member to envelopethe latter on the side of said port thereof and on the side of saidaperture thereof.7. An apparatus as claimed in claim 1, wherein said screen means isair-permeable."}
{"WKU":"039306038","Title":"Low inertia capstan","App_Date":"1973-11-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Frederic F. Grant","Assignee":"Ampex Corporation","ICL_Class":"B65H 1720","References":"2000573;3042281;3537661;3554420;3622059;3645432;3659797;3695728;3695729","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A low inertia capstan for use in a digital magnetic tape transportcomprising:a generally cylindrical hub rotatable about a central axis thereof;a pair of at least partially conical web elements mounted on opposite sidesof the hub for rotation therewith, said web elements beingcircumferentially rigid to maintain a rim rotationally fixed relative tothe hub and having thin walls which may be substantially flexed withoutpermanent deformation; anda hollow, generally cylindrical rim mounted on the pair of partiallyconical web elements.2. The invention defined in claim 1, wherein the hub, the conical webelements and the rim are made of plastic.3. The invention defined in claim 1, wherein the conical web elements havea thickness of approximately 0.01 inch or less and are concentricallydisposed on the hub so as to be separated by distances in the vicinity ofthe hub which are greater than the distances which separate the conicalweb elements in the vicinity of the rim.4. A low inertia capstan for use in a digital magnetic tape transportcomprising:a generally cylindrical hub rotatable about a central axis thereof;a pair of at least partially conical web elements mounted at opposite sidesof the hub for rotation therewith, said web elements having a spacingtherebetween in the vicinity of the hub which is greater than a spacingtherebetween in the vicinity of a rim and being circumferentially rigid tomaintain a rim rotationally fixed relative to the hub and having thinwalls which may be substantially flexed without permanent deformation; anda hollow, generally cylindrical rim mounted on the pair of partiallyconical web elements, the rim including a pair of radial flanges on theinside thereof disposed between and adjacent respective ones of theconical web elements.5. A capstan for use in a digital magnetic tape transport comprising:a generally cylindrical hub;a hollow, generally cylindrical rim generally concentrically disposed aboutthe hub, the rim having a thin, cylindrical outer circumference and beingcapable of substantial flexure without permanent deformation; andat least one generally circular plastic web disposed between and mountingthe rim on the hub to maintain circumferential and axial rigidity betweenthe rim and hub during tape transport operation.6. The invention defined in claim 5, wherein the plastic web includes aplurality of spokes extending generally radially outwardly between the huband the rim, each of the spokes having a cross-sectional shape which iscurved.7. The invention defined in claim 6, wherein each of the spokes includes apair of flanges disposed on opposite sides thereof along a substantialportion of the length thereof between the hub and the rim, the flangesextending in directions generally normal to the web.8. A low inertia, highly elastic capstan for use in a digital magnetic tapetransport, said capstan including an inner hub portion rotatable about anaxis, a thin, elastic outer rim portion generally concentrically disposedabout the inner hub portion and having a cylindrical outer circumferenceadapted to engage and drive a magnetic tape, and at least two web elementsextending between and mounting the outer rim portion on the inner hubportion, said web elements being circumferentially and radially rigid tomaintain the rim rotationally and radially fixed relative to the hub andhaving thin walls which may be substantially flexed without permanentdeformation, a substantial portion of the capstan being made of plastic.9. The invention defined in claim 8, wherein all of the capstan is made ofplastic.10. The invention defined in claim 8, wherein the plastic portion of thecapstan comprises thermoplastic polycarbonate resins.11. The invention defined in claim 8, wherein the plastic portion of thecapstan comprises a thermoplastic nylon resin.12. A low inertia, highly elastic capstan for use in a digital magnetictape transport, said capstan including an inner hub rotatable about anaxis, a flexible outer rim generally concentrically disposed about theinner hub and adapted to engage and drive a magnetic tape, and two atleast partially conical, thin webs mounted on opposite sides of the hubwhich may be flexed without permanent deformation extending between andmounting the outer rim portion on the inner hub portion, the rim and websbeing comprised of material having a strain at yield greater than 0.015.13. The invention defined in claim 12, wherein the material comprising atleast the outer rim and the webs has a strain at yield greater than 0.003,and has a tensile modulus of elasticity less than 30 .times.  10.sup. 5pounds per square inch, and wherein the capstan has a ratio of inertia todiameter less than 0.5 millinch-ounce-second.sup.2 per inch.14. A low inertia, highly elastic capstan for use in a digital magnetictape transport, said capstan including an inner hub portion rotatableabout an axis, an outer rim portion generally concentrically disposedabout the inner hub portion and adapted to engage and drive a magnetictape, and a web portion including two at least partially conical webelements mounted on opposite sides of the hub and extending between andmounting the outer rim portion on the inner hub portion, the capstanhaving a diameter of at least approximately 11/2 inches and an inertia atleast as low as 0.4 millinch-ounce-seconds.sup.2.15. The invention defined in claim 14, wherein the capstan diameter is atleast approximately 21/2 inches and the capstan inertia is no greater than0.3 millinch-ounce-seconds.sup.2.16. A resiliently deformable capstan for driving magnetic tape in a digitaltape transport comprising:in inner hub;an elastic outer rim disposed concentrically about the inner hub; andmeans connecting the outer rim to the inner hub in a manner inhibitingsubstantially all relative motion therebetween in a circumferentialdirection of rotation while permitting substantial axial motion of theouter rim relative to the hub without permanent deformation of thecapstan, said means including a pair of at least partially conical webelements mounted at opposite sides of the hub.17. The capstan as set forth in claim 16 above, wherein the rim isdeformable by stress into a smaller radius than the unstressed radiusthereof in accordance with the relationship##EQU5##where a is half the thickness of the rim, R.sub.s is the mean radius ofthe material of the rim under stress and R is the mean unstressed radiusof the material of the rim.18. The capstan as set forth in claim 17 above, wherein the relationship is##EQU6##19. The capstan as set forth in claim 16 above, wherein the connectingmeans includes a pair of web members having a thickness less than or equalto 0.010 inch.20. The capstan as set forth in claim 16 above, wherein the connectingmeans includes a pair of thin web members having radially extending spokeswith a minimum width in the circumferential direction at least 15 timesthe thickness of the material of the spokes.21. A capstan for driving magnetic tape comprising:a generally cylindrical inner hub;a resiliently deformable outer rim disposed concentrically about the innerhub; anda pair of thin, at least partially conical web members mounted in spacedapart relationship concentric with the inner hub and connected to maintainthe hub and rim in a predetermined relationship, said web members havingsubstantial rigidity with respect to relative motion between the rim andhub in a circumferential direction of rotation and being resilientlydeformable in response to relative motion between the rim and hub in otherdirections.22. The capstan as set forth in claim 21 above, wherein the web members aregenerally conical in shape and are mounted in facing relationship with thegreater spacing adjacent the hub and the least spacing adjacent the rim."}
{"WKU":"039306046","Title":"Walking stick and staple fastening tool","App_Date":"1974-06-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Roy S. Pitkin, Jr.;Timothy A. Pitkin","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B25C  510","References":"2915754;3272267;3595460;3734377;3771708;3796365","Claims":"We claim:1. In a stapler tool for use on roofing decks of the class described, aframe, a tool handle on said frame, a staple driver head mounted on saidframe, a handle connected to said head adjacent to the top thereof andextending in a direction opposed to the staple driver, a staple magazineconnected to said head adjacent the base thereof, a trigger pivotallyconnected to the under side of the handle adjacent to the head thereof,and a deck contact trip assembly mounted on said head said trigger andsaid deck contact trip assembly being simultaneously actuatable tooperaate said staple driver head, said deck contact trip assemblycomprising a trip lever and a trip guide, a contact trip lever armslidingly engaging said trip guide for movement in the vertical directionthereon and extending downwardly and outwardly from engagement therewith,deck contacting means mounted on said contact trip lever arm extendingdownward therefrom substantially in line with the staple driver; a heelend pivot means mounted on the magazine on the end thereof opposed to thehead of the frame, a walking stick means removably mounted on the upperportion of the head of the frame extending upwardly and outwardlytherefrom, and an operator actuated trigger actuating means mounted on thewalking stick assembly adjacent to the top of the head, whereby theoperator may actuate the trigger and by shifting the terminal free end ofthe walking stick trip the contact trip assembly to drive a staple.2. A stapler tool as set forth in claim 1 wherein the trigger actuatingmeans comprises:a. a sleeve adjacently secured to the lower end of said handle having acenter line extending in a horizontal direction and having a first openend above the trigger and a second open end overhanging the head of thetool in the direction of the walking stick means;b. a torque rod pivotally mounted in the sleeve and extending out from eachopen end thereof;c. an arming lever fixedly mounted on the end of the torque rod extendingout the second end of the sleeve generally extending in a direction atright angles relative thereto, and having a working clearance relative tothe head of the tool;d. a torque arm fixedly mounted at one end to the first end of the torquerod and generally extending in a direction at right angles relativethereto, ande. a trigger actuating arm integrally formed at one end to the second endof the torque arm and generally extending in a direction under the handleof the tool and operationally contacting the trigger thereat from below.3. A stapler tool comprising a head end and staple driving head mountedthereon, a handle having a trigger mounted on the under side thereofconnected to and extending from one side of the head end, a walking stickconnected to and extending upwardly and outwardly from the other side ofthe head end, a staple magazine connected to the head end of the tool andextending therefrom and spaced below and in parallel relation to the toolhandle, a trigger actuating assembly actuatable through said walking stickadjacent to and extending below the tool handle thereof in transverserelation thereto and in contact from below with the lower side of thetrigger, a heel end wheel assembly mounting to the heel end of themagazine a bracket secured to said head having one flange portionextending in a horizontal plane and another flange portion extending downin a vertical plane over the head end of the tool, said vertical flangehaving a pair of spaced side flanges forming a  T  slot a  T  plate havingears on the side edges thereof slidably mounted in the  T  slot andfixedly connected to one end of the walking stick at the head end of thetool, a pivot sleeve mounted to the lower end of the walking stick and  T plate and having its axis extending horizontally, a torque rod pivotallymounting in the sleeve with both ends extending outwardly therefrom, alever fixedly mounted on one end of the torque rod and terminating underthe stick, the other end of said torque arm having a portion dependingvertically at one side of said handle and terminating in a right angledcam arm extending below and in contact with the trigger of the tool, atrip guide mounted on the head end of of the tool, a contact trip leverarm slidingly installed in the trip guide for vertical guidance relativethereto, a yoke mounting to the lower end of the trip lever arm, armsextending from said yoke to a lower level adjacent to the driving head andhaving slots therein, a yoke axle loosely mounting in the slots and heldin transverse relation therein relatiive to the handle of the tool,collars fixedly mounting on each outstanding end of the yoke axle outsideof the yoke arms, an axle support bracket having a heel plate fastened invertical relation to the heel end of the magazine of the tool and a shoeplate extending in a horizontal plane relative thereto, a wheel axlemounting to the under side of the shoe plate in transverse relation to themagazine, and wheels rotatably mounting on each end of said axle."}
{"WKU":"039306054","Title":"Method of fabricating a conformable sandwich structure","App_Date":"1973-08-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Peter S. Merrill;Richard S. Mueller","Assignee":"International Harvester Company","ICL_Class":"B23K 3102","References":"2700632;2988809;3300839;3373480","Claims":"We claim:1. A method of fabricating a sandwich structure comprising the steps of:forming a rigid sheet to the desired configuration;securing a core to one face of said rigid sheet;placing said rigid sheet with said core secured thereto in abutment to amandrel;forming a compliant sheet to the desired configuration;placing said formed compliant sheet in complementary juxtaposition to saidcore;securing said compliant sheet to said mandrel to form a hermetic chamber;creating a vacuum between said core and said compliant sheet, whereby saidsheet is caused to abut said core; andsecuring said compliant sheet to said core.2. A method of fabricating a conformable sandwich structure comprising thesteps of:forming a rigid sheet to the desired configuration;securing a flexible core to one face of said rigid sheet;forming a compliant sheet to the desired configuration;placing said formed compliant sheet in juxtaposition to said core;placing said rigid sheet with said flexible core secured thereto inabutment to a mandrel;securing the edges of said compliant sheet to said mandrel; andcreating a vacuum between said mandrel and said compliant sheet, wherebysaid sheet is drawn into abutment to said core.3. A method of fabricating a sandwich structure comprising the steps of:forming a rigid sheet to the desired configuration;securing a core to one face of said rigid sheet;placing said rigid sheet with said core secured thereto in abutment to amandrel;forming a compliant sheet to the desired configuration;placing said formed compliant sheet in complementary juxtaposition to saidcore;perforating said formed compliant sheet in juxtaposition to said core;securing a second compliant sheet to said mandrel to form a hermeticchamber; andcreating a vacuum between said mandrel and said second compliant sheet,whereby said second compliant sheet causes said perforated compliant sheetto abut said core."}
{"WKU":"039306062","Title":"Method and apparatus for securing wires to connector terminals","App_Date":"1974-05-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"George Franklyn Dewdney","Assignee":"RCA Corporation","ICL_Class":"B23K  112;H01R  504","References":"3040385;3200471;3448182;3455022;3679189;3775527;3801246;3861033","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method of soldering a wire to a terminal comprising:positioning each of a plurality of terminals at a given position,releaseably securing a separate, different wire to each of said terminals,disposing a heat shrinkable tube and solder ring about each said wire atsaid terminals, anddirecting a stream of hot gaseous fluid at said given position at agradually increasing temperature and pressure for melting said solder andshrinking said tube.2. The method of claim 1 wherein said directing step includes changing thedirection and length of path of said stream.3. The method of claim 1 wherein said directing step includes forming astream of hot gaseous fluid, deflecting said formed stream of fluid towardsaid tube and solder ring, and then directing said formed stream of fluiddirectly on said tube and solder ring after said deflected stream of fluidimpinges upon said tube and ring.4. An apparatus for soldering a wire to a terminal using a heat shrinkabletube and solder ring disposed about said wire at said terminal comprising:terminal receiving and positioning means for receiving and positioning eachof a plurality of terminals at a given position,wire securing means mounted on said positioning means for releaseablysecuring a separate, different wire adjacent each said terminals, andfluid directing means mounted adjacent said given position for directing astream of hot gaseous fluid at said given position at a graduallyincreasing temperature and pressure for melting said solder and shrinkingsaid tube.5. The apparatus of claim 4 wherein said directing means includes a sourceof said stream and a fluid baffle disposed adjacent said receiving andpositioning means for deflecting said fluid from said source to said tubeand solder ring when disposed about said wire, said fluid directing meansand said receiving and positioning means being arranged to sequentiallyapply said deflected fluid first and then the undeflected fluid at saidposition to preheat said tube and solder ring with said deflected fluid.6. In combination:conveying means,connector receiving means mounted on the conveying means at a givenposition for receiving a connector terminal, a wire to be secured to saidterminal, and a heat shrinkable tube and solder ring disposed about saidwire at said terminal,a source of a first hot gaseous fluid stream having a given temperature andpressure mounted adjacent said conveying means and arranged to direct saidfirst stream in a first direction, andfluid redirecting means coupled with said conveying means for redirectingsaid first stream into a second stream flowing in a second direction at atemperature and pressure lower than said given temperature and direction,said receiving means, redirecting means and said source being arranged toinitially direct said second stream and then said first stream at saidgiven position to sequentially increase the temperature and pressure ofthe gaseous fluid directed at said given position from said lowertemperature and pressure to said given temperature and pressure.7. The combination of claim 6 wherein said fluid redirecting means is afluid baffle coupled with said conveying means for deflecting and formingsaid first stream into said second stream."}
{"WKU":"039306070","Title":"Container and blanks therefor","App_Date":"1975-01-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ernest L. Smith","Assignee":"Phillips Petroleum Company","ICL_Class":"B65D  512;B65D 1304","References":"827984;1504491;2163703;2726803;3006522;3157340;3327893;3451610;3465944","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A container comprising:a tubular body having a first end and a second end;a first closure engaging means associated with said first end of saidtubular body, said first closure engaging means comprising a plurality ofclosure engaging panels connected by a first hinged line of attachment to,and folded inwardly from, said first end of said body; each said closureengaging panel comprising:"}
{"WKU":"039306089","Title":"Centrifuge","App_Date":"1973-09-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Martin Baram","Assignee":"Escher Wyss Limited","ICL_Class":"B04b  112","References":"499349;686917;1640707;2276824;2308559;3771715","Claims":"I claim:1. A centrifuge comprising a solid-walled drum having an inlet for amixture of liquid and solids which is to be centrifuged, and overflow forthe clarified liquid, and an outlet for the solids; and pushing means forcontrolling movement of the solids in the drum towards said outlet, andcharacterized in that the drum is subdivided into two zones, the pushingmeans being located in the first zone and arranged to move solids throughthis zone and into the second zone, and the second zone having adeposition channel for solids which is located outside the region of thepushing means and has said outlet for solids located at its bottom.2. A centrifuge as defined in claim 1 in which the drum has a portion whichbears deposited solids and extends, in both zones, below said overflow forclarified liquid, whereby both zones have a common liquid level.3. A centrifuge as defined in claim 1 in which at least part of said drumin the first zone is cylindrical.4. A centrifuge as defined in claim 1 in which the size of said outlet forsolids is adjustable during operation.5. A centrifuge as defined in claim 1 in which said outlet for solids isformed by two rings which are axially slidable relatively to one another.6. A centrifuge as defined in claim 5 including a spring which presses thetwo rings towards one another in the axial direction."}
{"WKU":"039306097","Title":"Centrifuge preventing air admission during sludge discharge","App_Date":"1974-08-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kurt Nelson","Assignee":"The De Laval Separator Company","ICL_Class":"B04B  114","References":"3563453","Claims":"I claim:1. A sludge centrifuge comprising a centrifugal bowl rotatable about anaxis and forming a separating chamber having an inlet for a mixture ofliquid and solids, the bowl also forming a paring chamber communicatingwith the separating chamber for receiving therefrom a liquid separated asa relatively light component from said mixture, the separating chamberhaving an outer sludge space for receiving solids separated from saidmixture as a relatively heavy sludge component, means for alternatelyopening and closing the outer periphery of the bowl to discharge sludgeintermittently from said sludge space, a stationary paring disk in theparing chamber for discharging separated liquid from the bowl while itssaid outer periphery is closed to maintain a normal liquid level in thebowl, said liquid level moving radially outward from the bowl axis inresponse to opening of the bowl s outer periphery, the paring chamberhaving an air passage at its radially inner portion for discharging airfrom the bowl to atmosphere while the liquid is at said normal level, adam rotating with the bowl and located therein to limit said outwardmovement of the liquid level in the paring chamber, thereby maintaining aminimum liquid level in the paring chamber during said sludge discharge,and means in the paring chamber operable at said minimum liquid level toprevent air from being sucked into the bowl through said air passageduring said sludge discharge.2. The centrifuge of claim 1, in which said means in the paring chamberinclude a second dam forming an outward extension of the stationary paringdisk and dimensioned to remain substantially immersed in the liquid atsaid minimum level.3. The centrifuge of claim 1, in which said means in the paring chamberinclude a check valve for discharging air from the bowl through said airpassage while the liquid is at said normal level in the paring chamber,the check valve being operable to close against air admission from saidair passage into the bowl in response to said opening of the bowl s outerperiphery.4. The centrifuge of claim 1, in which said means in the paring chamberinclude a second dam forming an outward extension of the stationary paringdisk and dimensioned to remain substantially immersed in the liquid atsaid minimum level, whereby the second dam seals against entrance of airfrom said passage into the separated liquid in the bowl during said sludgedischarge, said means in the paring chamber also including a check valvefor discharging air from the bowl through said air passage while theliquid is at said normal level in the paring chamber, the check valvebeing operable to close against air admission from said air passage intothe bowl in repsonse to said opening of the bowl s outer periphery.5. The centrifuge of claim 4, in which said check valve extends through theparing disk from an inner portion of the paring chamber at one side of thedisk to region of said air passage at the outer side of the disk.6. The centrifuge of claim 1, in which said rotating dam is an annularmember having a radially inner edge over which liquid flows in passingfrom the separating chamber to the paring chamber.7. The centrifuge of claim 2, in which the paring disc has inlet openingsfor receiving separated liquid for discharge from the bowl, said seconddam being situated above said paring disc openings."}
{"WKU":"039306100","Title":"Method and apparatus for obtaining accurately the angle of attack of an","App_Date":"1974-06-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jean-Guy Hache","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"G06G  778","References":"3091962;3398267;3654443;3814912","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property orprivilege is claimed are defined as follows:1. A system for generating a signal representative of the angle of attackof an aircraft using vertical speed, air speed and pitch attitude data,said system comprising means for generating a pitch attitude signalproportional to aircraft pitch attitude, a processor for receiving saidpitch attitude signal and for developing therefrom an output signal themagnitude and sense of which vary as a function of the aircraft chord lineangle, means for generating a relative wind angle signal, comparison meansfor receiving and differentially combining said relative wind angle signaland the output signal from said processor so as to produce a signal whosemagnitude and sense are respectively definitive of the extent anddirection of the aircraft angle of attack, said means for generating arelative wind angle signal including an airspeed sensor for producing anairspeed signal, a corrective network connected to the output of saidairspeed sensor for correcting said airspeed signal so as to provide atrue airspeed signal, drift angle sensor means for generating a driftangle signal, means for connecting said drift angle signal to saidcorrective network and feedback means for connecting the output of saidcomparison means to said corrective network.2. A system for generating a signal representative of the angle of attackon an aircraft using vertical speed, airspeed and pitch attitude data,said system comprising means for generating a pitch attitude signalproportional to aircraft pitch attitude, a processor for receiving saidpitch attitude signal and for developing therefrom an output signal themagnitude and sense of which vary as a function of the aircraft chord lineangle, means for generating a relative wind angle signal, comparison meansfor receiving and differentially combining said relative wind angle signaland the output signal from said processor so as to produce a signal whosemagnitude and sense are respectively definitive of the extent anddirection of the aircraft angle of attack, said means for generating arelative wind angle signal including an airspeed sensor for producing anairspeed signal, means for generating a vertical speed signal, a verticalspeed signal modulator, an airspeed signal modulator, a carrier source forcoupling a reference signal to said vertical speed signal modulator andsaid airspeed signal modulator, a resolver for producing a signal relatedto an angle whose sign is the ratio of said vertical speed signal oversaid airspeed signal, said resolver including first and second inputs forreceiving the outputs of said vertical speed signal modulator and saidairspeed signal modulator, a feedback loop, including a motor, connectedto said resolver for adjusting the angular position of the resolver rotorso as to nullify the effect of the input signals to said resolver, andmeans including a rotary variable differential transformer and aphase-sensitive demodulator, controlled by said carrier source andresponsive to the output of said resolver, for producing an electricalsignal proportional to the relative wind angle.3. A method of producing a signal proportional to the angle of attack of anaircraft in flight, comprising generating a vertical speed signal, anairspeed signal, and a pitch attitude signal, resolving the inverse sineof the ratio of the vertical speed signal over the airspeed signal so asto generate a relative wind angle signal, generating a chord angle signalby adding an offset angle signal related to the geometry of the aircraftto said pitch signal and differentially combining said relative wind anglesignal and said chord line angle signal so as to produce a signal which isproportional to the angle of attack of said aircraft, said method furtherincluding generating a drift angle signal and applying said drift anglesignal to a corrective network, and feeding back said signal proportionalto the angle of the attack to said corrective network so as to obtain acorrected true airspeed signal."}
{"WKU":"039306119","Title":"Air conditioning control system and method","App_Date":"1974-07-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Merlin E. Demaray","Assignee":"Ranco Incorporated","ICL_Class":"G05D 2324;F24F 1108","References":"2196170;2236624;2265512;2719672;3038663","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a system for governing air temperatures in zones of a multiple zonestructure including circulating means for directing a forced flow of zoneheating medium toward the zones, heating means for heating the mediumflowing toward the zones, control means for governing operation of saidheating means in response to an electrical input condition signal having avalue which varies according to a reference value, said control meanscomprising a plurality of input signal producing circuit means eachassociated with a respective zone, a plurality of zone air temperaturesensors each associated with a respective input signal producing circuitmeans and each producing an electrical zone air temperature signal whichvaries relative to a reference value in response to sensed changes in airtemperature in the associated zone, a plurality of supply mediumtemperature sensors each associated with a respective input signalproducing circuit means and each producing an electrical supply mediumtemperature signal which varies relative to a reference value in responseto sensed changes in supply medium temperature flowing to the associatedzone, said input signal producing circuit means individually responding tosaid zone air temperature signal and said supply medium temperature signalto produce an input condition signal, analyzer circuitry for selecting aninput condition signal having an extreme value and transmitting saidselected input condition signal to said control means, and, zone set backmeans including temperature set back signal source circuitry for producinga predetermined temperature set back signal and connecting means forconnecting said set back signal source circuitry to each of said inputsignal producing circuit means so that said set back signal effectivelyreplaces the supply medium temperature signal from the supply mediumtemperature sensors of each input signal producing circuit means connectedto said set back signal source circuitry and the input condition signalvalue produced by any input signal producing circuit means connected tosaid set back signal source circuitry and selected by said analyzercircuitry is unaffected by the sensed temperature of heating mediumsupplied to that zone."}
{"WKU":"039306127","Title":"Humidity control system and humidity responsive control device therefor","App_Date":"1974-08-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Harold G. Brakebill;Jay L. Lewis","Assignee":"Robertshaw Controls Company","ICL_Class":"G05D 2200","References":"3373934;3452928;3718280;3819113","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A fluid pressure transmitter comprising frame means, valve seat meanscarried by said frame means, a flapper spring lever pivotally carried bysaid frame means in a cantilevered manner and having a free end means forcontrolling said valve seat means whereby the position of said end meansrelative to said valve seat means determines the degree of fluid flowthrough said valve seat means, said flapper spring lever having a normalbias to tend to move said end means thereof to one of its pivotedpositions relative to said valve seat means, an actuating lever pivotallycarried by said frame means, a condition responsive means operativelyinterconnected to said actuating lever to pivot said lever in relation tothe condition sensed thereby, and a compression spring disposed betweenand engaging said actuating lever and said end means of said flapper leverto control movement of said end means relative to said valve seat means inrelation to pivoting movement of said actuating lever by said conditionresponsive means.2. A fluid pressure transmitter as set forth in claim 1 wherein saidcondition responsive means is a humidity sensor.3. A fluid pressure transmitter as set forth in claim 2 wherein saidhumidity sensor comprises an expandible and contractible ribbon havingopposed end means one of which is interconnected to said actuating leverand the other end means being operatively interconnected to said framemeans.4. A fluid pressure transmitter as set forth in claim 3 wherein anadjustable selector means is carried by said frame means and operativelyinterconnects said other end means of said ribbon to said frame means.5. A fluid pressure transmitter as set forth in claim 4 wherein anadjustable lever is pivotally carried by said frame means and comprisespart of said ajustable selector means.6. A fluid pressure transmitter as set forth in claim 5 wherein saidactuating lever is operatively interconnected to said adjustable lever bysaid ribbon, said selector means including a movable cam for moving saidadjustable lever.7. A fluid pressure transmitter as set forth in claim 1 wherein a movablevalve member is disposed adjacent said valve seat means, said end means ofsaid actuating lever being operatively associated with said valve memberto position the same relative to said valve seat means.8. A fluid pressure transmitter as set forth in claim 7 wherein said valvemember comprises a ball valve member, said frame means carrying a movableplunger disposed between said end means of said flapper lever and saidball valve member to operate the same.9. In a fluid pressure control system comprising a source of pressurefluid, a fluid pressure operated device, and passage defining meansinterconnecting said source to said device, the improvement comprising afluid pressure transmitter having a frame means, valve seat means carriedby said frame means and being in fluid communication with said passagedefining means, a flapper spring lever pivotally carried by said framemeans in a cantilevered manner and having a free end means for controllingsaid valve seat means whereby the position of said end means relative tosaid valve seat means determines the degree of fluid flow through saidvalve seat means, said flapper spring lever having a normal bias to tendto move said end means thereof to one of its pivoted positions relative tosaid valve seat means, an actuating lever pivotally carried by said framemeans, a condition responsive means operatively interconnected to saidactuating lever and to said end means of said flapper lever to controlmovement of said end means relative to said valve seat means in relationto pivoting movement of said actuating lever by said condition responsivemeans, and a compression spring disposed between and engaging saidactuating lever and said end means of said flapper lever to controlmovement of said end means relative to said valve seat means in relationto pivoting movement of said actuating lever by said condition responsivemeans.10. In a fluid pressure control system as set forth in claim 9, the furtherimprovement wherein said condition responsive means is a humidity sensor.11. In a fluid pressure control system as set forth in claim 10, thefurther improvement wherein said humidity sensor comprises an expandibleand contractible ribbon having opposed end means one of which isinterconnected to said actuating lever and the other end means beingoperatively interconnected to said frame means.12. In a fluid pressure control system as set forth in claim 11, thefurther improvement wherein an adjustable selector means is carried bysaid frame means and operatively interconnects said other end means ofsaid ribbon to said frame means.13. In a fluid pressure control system as set forth in claim 12, thefurther improvement wherein an adjustable lever is pivotally carried bysaid frame means and comprises part of said adjustable selector means.14. In a fluid pressure control system as set forth in claim 13, thefurther improvement wherein said actuating lever is operativelyinterconnected to said adjustable lever by said ribbon, said selectormeans including a movable cam for moving said adjustable lever.15. In a fluid pressure control system as set forth in claim 9, the furtherimprovement wherein a movable valve member is disposed adjacent said valveseat means, said end means of said actuating lever being operativelyassociated with said valve member to position the same relative to saidvalve seat means.16. In a fluid pressure control system as set forth in claim 15, thefurther improvement wherein said valve member comprises a ball valvemember, said frame means carrying a movable plunger disposed between saidend means of said flapper lever and said ball valve member to operate thesame."}
{"WKU":"039306135","Title":"Check valve having temperature response","App_Date":"1974-10-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Donald E. Place","Assignee":"Therm-O-Disc Incorporated","ICL_Class":"G05D 2310","References":"1848031;1923882;2585863;3450342;3704697;3734403;3856259","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A thermally responsive check valve comprising a body assembly providinga chamber open for flow of fluid therethrough and a port open to saidchamber through a valve seat, a bimetallic snap disc in said chambermovable with snap action between first and second positions upon reachingpredetermined operating temperatures, said disc in said first positionoperating as a check valve and being movable into and out of engagementwith said valve seat to allow flow only from said port to said chamber,said disc in said second position terminating said check valve operationand rendering said valve in the same condition with respect to flow inboth directions through said valve seat.2. A thermally responsive check valve as set forth in claim 1 wherein saidbody assembly provides means to maintain said snap disc spaced from saidvalve seat when said snap disc is in said second position.3. A thermally responsive check valve as set forth in claim 2 wherein saidmeans includes stop surfaces engageable with the periphery of said discwhen said disc is in said second position.4. A thermally responsive check valve as set forth in claim 3 wherein saidstop surfaces are symmetrically positioned around said disc and aresubstantially coplanar with said valve seat.5. A thermally responsive check valve as set forth in claim 4 wherein saidvalve assembly is shaped to maintain said disc substantially coaxial withsaid valve seat and said stop surfaces are spaced from the periphery ofsaid disc when said disc is in engagement with said valve seat and in saidfirst position.6. A thermally responsive check valve as set forth in claim 5 wherein saiddisc when in said first position is normally spaced from said valve seatand is movable into engagement with said valve seat by fluid flow fromsaid chamber to said port.7. A thermally responsive check valve as set forth in claim 2 wherein saiddisc when in said first position normally engages said valve seat and ismoved from said valve seat when the pressure in said port exceeds thepressure in said chamber.8. A thermally responsive check valve as set forth in claim 1 wherein saidvalve seat is provided with tubular elements positioned within said portand which is movable with respect to said first port to locate said valveseat in the desired position within said chamber.9. A thermally responsive check valve as set forth in claim 1 wherein saidbody assembly provides means to maintain said snap disc in engagement withsaid valve seat when said snap is in said second position.10. A thermally responsive check valve as set forth in claim 9 wherein saidmeans to maintain said snap disc in engagement with said valve seat is aspring engageable with the periphery of said disc on the side thereofopposite said valve seat.11. A thermally responsive check valve as set forth in claim 10 whereinsaid spring allows free movement of said disc away from said valve seatwhen said disc is in said first position.12. A thermally responsive check valve as set forth in claim 11 whereinsaid spring is a wave washer.13. A thermally responsive check valve as set forth in claim 9 wherein saidvalve seat is shaped to be engaged by said disc at a first diameter whensaid disc is in said second position and is engaged by said disc at asecond diameter smaller than said first diameter when said disc is in saidfirst position.14. A thermally responsive check valve comprising a body assembly defininga valve chamber and providing first and second ports open to said chamberwith a circular valve seat around said first port, a bimetal snap disc insaid chamber movable with snap action between first and second positionsof stability upon reaching predetermined operating temperatures, said discin said first position of stability providing check valve operation byengaging said seat and preventing flow from said chamber into said firstport when the pressure in said chamber exceeds the pressure in said firstport and being unseated and allowing flow from said first port to saidchamber when the pressure in said first port exceeds the pressure in saidchamber, movement of said disc to said second position terminating saidcheck valve operation.15. A thermally responsive check valve as set forth in claim 14 whereinmeans are provided preventing engagement between said disc and seat whensaid disc is in said second position to maintain said valve open.16. A thermally responsive check valve as set forth in claim 14 whereinmeans are provided to maintain engagement between said disc and seat whensaid disc is in said second position to maintain said valve closed."}
{"WKU":"039306143","Title":"Device for spraying a traveling paper web or the like","App_Date":"1974-09-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Bernhard Krenkel","Assignee":"J. M. Voith GmbH","ICL_Class":"B05B  500;F23D 1128","References":"2729191;2733171;3323934;3402697;3476082;3757491","Claims":"I claim:1. Device for spraying a traveling paper web or the like with a liquidunder the influence of an electrostatic high voltage comprising spraynozzle means for spraying the liquid through a given space and onto theweb, high voltage source means, electrode means connected to said highvoltage source means and energizable thereby to ionize the space throughwhich the liquid is sprayed, and means for grounding the web and saidspray nozzle means, said spray nozzle means and said electrodes each beingdisposed on both sides of a path through which the web travels and eachbeing located opposite one another.2. Device according to claim 1 wherein said high voltage source meanscomprise a first high voltage source producing a positive high voltagepotential and a second high voltage source producing a negative highvoltage potential, said electrode means comprising electrodes on bothsides of the travel path of the web, the electrodes on one side thereofbeing connected to said first high voltage source, and the electrodes onthe other side thereof being connected to said second high voltage source.3. Device according to claim 1 wherein said electrode means are in the formof a grid surrounding said spray nozzle means on all sides."}
{"WKU":"039306151","Title":"Spray gun with low pressure air","App_Date":"1975-01-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Irmgard Farnsteiner","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F23D 1116;F23D 1340;F23D 1500","References":"2513523;3796376","Claims":"Having described my invention, I claim:1. In a spray gun comprising a gun body, a liquid outlet from the gun bodyfor liquid to be atomized, means to supply liquid to said outlet, a stemreciprocable in the body to open and close the outlet, means toreciprocate the stem in the body, means to supply compressed air to thebody to atomize the liquid emerging from said outlet; the improvementcomprising a venturi throat in said body through which said compressed airpasses, means to induct atmospheric air into said venturi thereby toreduce the pressure of the air that emerges from said venturi, valve meansfor the inlet of said compressed air, said valve means comprising anannular member surrounding said stem and reciprocable lengthwise with saidstem to open and close said inlet for said compressed air, said valvemeans comprising an annular piston reciprocable in said body andsurrounding said stem, and means to supply compressed air to said pistonto reciprocate said piston to open and close said compressed air inlet andsaid liquid outlet.2. A spray gun as claimed in claim 1, in which the throat of said venturisurrounds said stem with clearance.3. A spray gun as claimed in claim 1, said annular member being carried bysaid piston and extending from said piston in the direction of saidoutlet.4. A spray gun as claimed in claim 1, said stem and valve means and annularmember and piston being coaxial and axially reciprocable together as aunit."}
{"WKU":"039306160","Title":"Water blast apparatus","App_Date":"1974-10-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Frank N. Winter","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B05B  702;B05B  108;B05B  130;A62C 2306","References":"188909;2090277;2271715;2457993;2813529;3520477;3711020","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A water blast apparatus comprising:a nozzle adapted for connection to a source of fluid under pressure andhaving a port for discharging a jet of said fluid;a wall mounted in spaced relation to said port and providing a fluiddiversion passageway therebetween;said wall and nozzle being mounted for relative displacement into and outof wall intersecting relation to said jet while maintaining said spacedrelation, said wall in said jet intersecting relation diverting the fluidin said jet into said passageway, said passageway being formed anddimensioned to provide substantially unimpeded flow of fluid from saidport in said wall jet intersecting relation; andmanually engageable means connected to said wall and nozzle for effectingsaid relative displacement.2. Apparatus as defined in claim 1, said port being formed to issue a jetof predetermined diameter axially of said port, said wall in jetintersecting position traversing said axis for impingement on said wall ofsaid jet and said wall being formed with an opening larger than thediameter of said jet and registrable with said jet axis in one relativelydisplaced position of said wall and nozzle for substantially unimpededprojection of said jet through said wall.3. Apparatus as defined in claim 2, said wall being of frusto-conical formhaving said opening in its apex and being mounted with said wall divergingfrom said axis in a direction away from said port.4. Apparatus as defined in claim 3, andmeans co-functioning with said wall and nozzle for providing a chamber forfluid deflected by said wall in its said jet intersecting position andhaving a discharge outlet for said chamber.5. Apparatus as defined in claim 4, said last-named means comprising ahousing surrounding said nozzle in spaced relationship to provide saidchamber; anda flexible sealing gasket connecting said housing and nozzle and hingingsaid nozzle for displacement of said jet between positions impinging onsaid wall and aligned with said wall opening.6. Apparatus as defined in claim 5, said nozzle having an inlet passage ata first end for connection to said fluid source and having said port atits opposite end;said gasket being connected to said nozzle intermediate its ends with saidfirst end exteriorly of said gasket with respect to said chamber; andsaid manually engageable means comprising a lever connected to said firstend of said nozzle and having an elongated handle portion extending inspaced substantially parallel relation to the exterior of said housing forjoint manual engagement of said handle portion and housing and movement ofsaid handle portion to and from said housing and effecting said relativedisplacement of said wall and port.7. Apparatus as defined in claim 6, andmeans for adjusting the position of said nozzle in said housing in mutuallyperpendicular directions for obtaining precise alignment of said port andwall opening.8. Apparatus as defined in claim 4, andoperator face shield fluid-cleansing means connected to said dischargeoutlet.9. Apparatus as defined in claim 8, said last-named means comprising aconduit connected to said discharge outlet; andspray means connected to said conduit and adapted for mounting on anoperator s helmet in position to direct said fluid over said face shield.10. Apparatus as defined in claim 1, ahousing surrounding said nozzle in spaced relationship;said nozzle being of elongated form and having an inlet passage at one endadapted for connection to said fluid source and having said port at itsopposite end;swivel-motion-mounting means connected to said nozzle intermediate its endsand to said housing;a length of rigid conduit connected to said nozzle inlet passage andproviding a handle extension for said apparatus; andsaid manually engageable means being positioned for manual engagement andoperation adjacent said rigid conduit.11. Apparatus as defined in claim 10, said manually engageable meanscomprising a lever connected to said nozzle and housing and extendinglongitudinally of said rigid conduit in spaced confronting relationthereto for manual gripping of said lever conjointly with said rigidconduit.12. Apparatus as defined in claim 4, wherein said fluid source includes aburner for heating said fluid and a pump and a control circuit for saidburner and pump; andthermal-sensing means connected to said outlet and adapted for connectionto said control circuit.13. Apparatus as defined in claim 12, and a conduit connected to saidoutlet and adapted to return fluid to said source."}
{"WKU":"039306178","Title":"Impact sprinkler","App_Date":"1974-11-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Charles William Dunmire","Assignee":"Johns-Manville Corporation","ICL_Class":"B05B  304;B05B  316;F16C 3320","References":"1236511;2153397;2314702;2625411;2878062;3009650;3315897;3434665;3664586;3726479","Claims":"What I claim is:1. An impact-type sprinkler, comprising:a. a main body including"}
{"WKU":"039306186","Title":"Balanced sprinkler impact drive","App_Date":"1975-03-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"George Lockwood","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B05B  304","References":"3402890;3583638","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A sprinkler relatively free of radial vibrations comprising:a sprinkler body,a sprinkler head, movably connected to said body, anda sprinkler drive system,said sprinkler body including a fluid inlet for receiving fluid supplied tosaid inlet and a fluid outlet connected to said inlet,said sprinkler head including a fluid inlet connected to said sprinklerbody fluid outlet, and a fluid outlet connected to said sprinkler headinlet for distributing the fluid from the sprinkler,said drive system positioned in respect to the sprinkler to move saidsprinkler head relative to said sprinkler body said drive system includinga plurality of driven surface means and impact drive means,said impact drive means including at least two independent striker meansfor intermittently contacting said driven surface means to rotate saidsprinkler head, anda fluid control means positioned in respect to the sprinkler to provide afluid driving force for rotating said impact drive means.2. A sprinkler as set forth in claim 1, wherein, said striker means aremovable radially after impact.3. A sprinkler as set forth in claim 2 wherein, said striker means areballs.4. A sprinkler relatively free of radial vibrations comprising:a sprinkler body,a sprinkler head movably connected to said sprinkler body,a sprinkler drive system positioned relative to said sprinkler to move saidsprinkler head relative to said sprinkler body,said sprinkler body including a fluid inlet for receiving fluid supplied tothe sprinkler, and a fluid outlet connected to said inlet,said sprinkler head including a fluid inlet connected to said sprinklerbody outlet, and a fluid outlet connected to sprinkler head fluid inletfor distributing the supplied fluid from the sprinkler,said sprinkler drive system including a plurality of driven surface meansand impact drive means,said driven surface means connected to said sprinkler head,said impact drive means positioned relative to said sprinkler, said impactdrive means including a striker carrier means and at least two independentstriker means movable relative to said striker carrier means,a fluid control means for providing a fluid driving force for propellingsaid impact drive means for intermittently contacting said driven surfacemeans to rotate said sprinkler head.5. A sprinkler as set forth in claim 4 wherein;said impact drive means are symmetrically constructed to provide a radiallydynamically balanced rotatable impact drive means.6. A sprinkler as set forth in claim 4 wherein,said striker carrier means positions each said striker means to provide aradially dynamically balanced impact drive means.7. A sprinkler as set forth in claim 4 wherein;each said striker means are equally spaced from one another for movementalong a generally circular path by said striker carrier, and each of saiddriven surfaces are equally spaced in said generally circular path toprovide simultaneous impact of all said striker means on said drivensurfaces.8. A sprinkler as set forth in claim 4 wherein;said impact drive means include a plurality of balls and a striker carrier.9. A sprinkler as set forth in claim 8 wherein;said balls move on a generally circular pathway andsaid striker carrier includes ball guide means to allow relative movementbetween said balls and said generally circular pathway and to positioneach of said balls for simultaneous engagement with said driven surfacemeans.10. A sprinkler as set forth in claim 8 wherein; said balls provideanti-friction bearing means to support said striker carrier duringmovement of said impact drive means.11. A sprinkler as set forth in claim 8 wherein;said striker carrier includes ball guide means to position said balls formovement along their impact path before, during and after each impact.12. A sprinkler that is relatively free of all non-torsional vibrationscomprising:a sprinkler body,a sprinkler head, anda sprinkler drive system,said sprinkler body including a fluid inlet, drive chamber connected to thefluid inlet of said body and a fluid outlet connected to said drivechamber,said sprinkler head rotatably connected to said sprinkler body, saidsprinkler head includes a ball track means located in said drive chamber,said sprinkler head including a fluid inlet connected to said fluid outletof said sprinkler body, and a fluid outlet connected to said fluid inletof said sprinkler head for distributing the fluid supplied to thesprinkler,said drive system located in said drive chamber for rotating said sprinklerhead,said drive system including a plurality of driven surface means and impactdrive means,said driven surface means connected to said sprinkler head along said balltrack means,said impact drive means rotatable in said drive chamber, said impact drivemeans including at least two independent striker ball means and a strikercarrier, said carrier including ball guide means for positioning said ballmeans,said ball means relatively movable in said ball guide means,a fluid control means connected to said sprinkler body for providing afluid driving force for rotating said impact drive means, andsaid ball means symmetrically located by said ball guide means so as tosimultaneously and intermittently contact at least two of thesymmetrically positioned driven surface means to rotate said sprinklerhead.13. A sprinkler as set forth in claim 12 wherein;said ball guide means includes pathways for said ball means to move aroundsaid driven surface means after each impact.14. A sprinkler including a balanced radially movable rotating impact drivemeans relatively free of radial vibrations as set forth in claim 1wherein,each of said independent striker means are movable in the same generalplane."}
{"WKU":"039306194","Title":"Adjustable orifice spray gun","App_Date":"1974-11-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Gustave S. Levey;Edward Moser","Assignee":"Gustave S. Levey","ICL_Class":"B05B  702;B05B  130;B05B  100","References":"3000576;3072151;3077903;3095175;3253782;3837363;R24534;R25052","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An airless paint spray gun comprising a body portion having a conduitadapted to be connected at its inlet end to a source of liquid paint underpressure and adapted to have a spray tip having an elongated spray openingconnected to the discharge end thereof, pre-orifice means adjacent thedischarge end of said conduit including an elastomeric disc having acentral aperture forming an axially extending pre-orifice openingadjustable in cross-sectional area, said pre-orifice means includingrelatively movable rigid wall means engaging and confining the oppositesides of said disc radially outward from the central aperture thereof,said relatively movable wall means having axial openings aligned with andof substantially no greater diameter than said central aperture, andmanually operable means associated with said pre-orifice means operable tomove said relatively movable wall means toward each other to elasticallydeform said disc and to reduce the diameter of said pre-orifice opening toa diameter less than those of said axial openings.2. An airless paint spray gun as set forth in claim 1 wherein said manuallyoperable means include spring means operably arranged to apply apredetermined axial load to said pre-orifice means.3. An airless paint spray gun as set forth in claim 2 wherein saidpre-orifice means include capsule means having said elastomeric discmounted therein, said capsule means providing one of said relativelymovable wall means and being mounted for axial movement toward the otherof said wall means to provide deformation of said elastomeric disc inresponse to axial loading by said spring means.4. An airless paint spray gun as set forth in claim 3 wherein said manuallyoperable means include a control member externally mounted on said bodyportion for threadedly loading and unloading said spring means.5. An airless paint spray gun as set forth in claim 1 wherein saidelastomeric disc comprises a polyurethane elastomeric disc having asubstantially cylindrical configuration.6. In an airless paint spray gun comprising a body portion having a conduitadapted to be connected at its inlet end to a source of liquid underpressure and adapted to have a spray tip providing an elongated sprayopening connected to the discharge end of said conduit, the improvementcomprising an adjustable pre-orifice assembly in said conduit upstreamfrom said spray opening including a radially disposed resilient wallhaving an aperture therethrough defining a pre-orifice opening coaxiallyaligned with respect to said spray opening, said pre-orifice assembly alsoincluding rigid wall means for confining said resilient wall againstradial outward deformation and relatively movable rigid wall meansengaging and confining the opposite radial surfaces of said resilient wallradially outward from said pre-orifice opening, said relatively movablewall means having axial openings aligned with and of no greater diameterthan said pre-orifice opening in a non-restrictive flow condition, saidresilient wall being elastically deformable to reduce the diameter of saidpre-orifice opening from said non-restrictive flow condition to arestrictive flow condition in response to axial loads applied to saidrelatively movable wall means by manually operable means associated withsaid pre-orifice assembly.7. In an airless spray gun comprising a body portion with a passage forliquid paint adapted to be connected at its inlet end to a source ofliquid paint under pressure and adapted to have a flat fan spray tiphaving an elongated spray opening connected to the discharge end of saidpassage, the improvement comprising a pre-orifice assembly including atransversely disposed elastomeric member defining a co-axially extendingpre-orifice opening adjustable in cross-sectional area upstream in saidpassage from said spray tip, said pre-orifice opening being defined by thewall of an opening extending through said elastomeric member and having adiameter in a full open position greater than that of the adjacentupstream passage, and manually operable means carried by said body portionoperably associated with said pre-orifice means and movable to reduce thearea of said pre-orifice opening to an area at least substantially equalto the area of said elongated spray opening.8. The improvement set forth in claim 7 wherein said pre-orifice assemblyincludes means for radially confining said elastomeric member at alocation radially outward from said pre-orifice opening and relativelymovable rigid wall means engaging and confining opposite transverselyextending surfaces of said elastomeric member radially outward of saidpre-orifice opening.9. The improvement set forth in claim 7 wherein said pre-orifice assemblyincludes capsule means having said elastomeric member mounted therein,said capsule means including forwardly projecting, connecting means fordetachably securing said pre-orifice assembly to a spray tip to provide anintegrally removable assembly thereof.10. An airless paint spray gun comprising a body portion with a conduittherethrough adapted to be connected to a source of paint under pressure,a spray tip having an elongated spray opening connected to said conduit,an adjustable pre-orifice assembly in said conduit upstream from saidspray opening, said pre-orifice assembly including an elastomeric dischaving a central aperture defining an axially extending pre-orificeopening adjustable in cross-sectional area, said pre-orifice assemblyincluding a relatively movable capsule member for confining radiallyoutward flow of said elastomeric member and cooperating with a fixedportion of said spray gun to engage and confine opposite faces of saidelastomeric disc radially outward of said pre-orifice opening, andmanually operable means carried by said body portion operably associatedwith said pre-orifice assembly to move said capsule member and toelastically deform said elastomeric means to vary the area of saidpre-orifice opening.11. In an airless paint spray gun comprising a body portion with a passagefor paint under pressure, a flat fan spray tip having an elongated openingsecured to said body portion in communication with the outlet end of saidpassage, the improvement comprising rotational locking means formaintaining said spray tip in a preselected angular orientation relativeto said body portion, a resilient member disposed between said said spraytip and said body portion having an aperture therethrough communicatingbetween said spray tip and the outlet end of said passage, and manuallyoperable means externally carried by said body portion and threadedlyengaged therewith for mounting said spray tip in fluid tight sealingrelationship with said body portion adjacent the outlet end of saidpassage, said manually operable means including wall means arranged foraxial movement relative to said body portion upon operation of saidmanually operable means, and said manually operable means also includingspring means entrapped between said wall means and spray tip fortransmitting axial biasing loads to said spray tip to compress saidresilient member and maintain said spray tip in fluid tight sealingrelationship.12. In an airless paint spray gun comprising a body portion having aconduit adapted to be connected at its inlet end to a source of liquidpaint under pressure and adapted to have a spray tip connected to thedischarge end thereof, a pre-orifice assembly adjacent the discharge endof said conduit including an axially extending pre-orifice openingadjustable in cross-sectional area, and manually operable means carried bysaid body portion operably associated with said pre-orifice assembly andmovable to vary the area of said pre-orifice opening, the improvementcomprising an elastomeric member having an aperture extending therethroughdefining said pre-orifice opening, said pre-orifice opening having adiameter in a full open position greater than that of an adjacent upstreamconduit, and the manually operable means being adapted to elasticallydeform said elastomeric member and reduce the cross-sectional area of saidpre-orifice opening to an area at least substantially equal to the area ofthe spray tip opening of a connected spray tip."}
{"WKU":"039306208","Title":"Turret rewinder","App_Date":"1974-04-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Charles M. Taitel","Assignee":"Compensating Tension Controls Inc.","ICL_Class":"B65H 1920","References":"1040188;2298004;3411732;3552670;3733035","Claims":"We claim:1. Web rewinding apparatus comprising in combination a frame, a turretmounted for rotation with respect to said frame, a plurality of spindlescarried by the turret for receiving web roll cores, said spindles beingequally spaced around the edge of the turret, at least four equally spacedstations on said frame adjacent the periphery of said turret, the firststation being for placement of web roll cores on the spindles, means forrotating the spindles, means for rotating said turret in steps tosequentially position each of said spindles at each of said stations,means at said second station for applying glue on the cores, means forfeeding web from a supply to the core at the fourth station, and means atsaid third station for cutting the web extending to the fourth station andapplying the end of the web extending from said supply to the core at thethird station, said means for rotating said spindles including a pluralityof rotary elements carried by said turret, each operatively connected toone of said spindles, a double-faced endless drive member, means fordriving said endless drive member including two frame mounted rotaryelements positioned at widely spaced points about the periphery of saidturret, one face of said endless drive member being in driving contactwith said two frame mounted rotary elements and the opposite surface beingin contact with said spindle rotary elements positioned between said framemounted rotary elements.2. Apparatus according to claim 1 wherein said means for rotating saidspindles is arranged to drive spindles in said third and fourth positions,and wherein means are provided for driving the spindle at said secondstation at slow speed to prevent the glue applied to the core of thespindle at the second station from being thrown off.3. Apparatus according to claim 2, wherein said means for applying glue atsaid second station includes a container, a quantity of heat liquifiableglue in said container, means for maintaining the glue at a predeterminedtemperature, a glue applicator rotatably mounted to said container so asto extend into the glue and protrude from said container, and means formoving said container toward said spindle in said second position to bringthe glue applicator into contact with the core on the spindle in saidsecond position, whereby rotation of the spindle rotates the glueapplicator to carry glue from said container and deposit the glue on thecore.4. Apparatus according to claim 3, including a plurality of glue applicatordiscs arranged in a row parallel to said spindles, each of said discsbeing rotatably mounted on a spring member secured to said container.5. Apparatus according to claim 4, wherein said glue varies in viscositywith temperature whereby the amount of glue deposited can be controlled byvarying the relationship between the temperature of the glue, the speed ofspindle rotation and the period during which the spindle and the discs arein contact.6. Web rewinding apparatus comprising in combination a frame, a turretmounted for rotation with respect to said frame, a plurality of spindlescarried by the turret for receiving web roll cores, said spindles beingequally spaced around the edge of the turret, at least four equally spacedstations on said frame adjacent the periphery of said turret, the firststation being for placement of web roll cores on the spindles, means forrotating the spindles, means for rotating said turret in steps tosequentially position each of said spindles at each of said stations,means at said second station for applying glue on the cores, means forfeeding web from a supply to the core at the fourth station, and means atsaid third station for cutting the web extending to the fourth station andapplying the end of the web extending from said supply to the core at thethird station, said means for cutting the web and applying the end of theweb to the core including a member mounted on said frame to be moveabletoward the core at said third station, a roller parallel to the corecarried by said member and positioned to press the web against the core inthe third position, a knife blade carried by said member to engage and cutthe web between the third and fourth positions as said roller presses theroller against the core, and means for moving said member toward the coreat said third station.7. Apparatus according to claim 6, including a second arm pivoted to saidframe, and a back-up bar carried by said second arm to be positioned inalignment with said knife blade on the opposite side of said web.8. Apparatus according to claim 7, including a second glue applying meansmounted on said second arm to contact the web between the knife blade andthe fourth position when said arms are pivoted to cut the web.9. Apparatus according to claim 8, wherein said second glue applying meansincludes a glue receptacle, a quantity of glue in said receptacle, and adispensing nozzle facing the web extending to said fourth station, saiddispensing nozzle including a body extending from said receptacle formedwith a bore in communication with said glue in said receptacle, a headmember mounted on said body having an aperture therein, means providing avalve seat at said aperture, said head member being formed to provide achamber at the end of said body in communication with said aperture andsaid bore, a valve member within said chamber for sealing said aperture,said valve member being constructed to extend through said aperture to becontacted by the web and moved away from the aperture to allow glue toflow onto the web.10. Apparatus according to claim 9, including means providing a valve seatat the end of said body for cooperating with said valve member to preventglue flow into said chamber when said valve member is moved away from theaperture whereby the glue dispensed is limited.11. Apparatus according to claim 10, wherein said valve member is a ball.12. Apparatus according to claim 11, including means for urging the balltoward the aperture.13. Web rewinding apparatus comprising in combination a frame, a turretmounted for rotation with respect to said frame, a plurality of spindlescarried by the turret for receiving web roll cores, said spindles beingequally spaced around the edge of the turret, at least five equally spacedstations on said frame adjacent the periphery of said turret, the firststation being for placement of web roll cores on the spindles, means forrotating the spindles, means for rotating said turret in steps tosequentially position each of said spindles at each of said stations,means at said second station for applying glue on the cores, means forfeeding web from a supply to the core at the fourth station, means at saidthird station for cutting the web extending to the fourth station andapplying the end of the web to the core at the third station, and means atthe fifth station for engaging the core on the spindle positioned thereatand sliding said core off said spindle, said core removing means includingan actuator having a rod movable at right angles to said frame, a firstslide member parallel to said frame mounted on said rod to move therewith,a second slide member slidably mounted on said first slide member, meansfor moving said second slide member toward said spindle in said fifthposition as said first slide member moves away from said frame and forretracting said second member when said first member is moved toward saidframe.14. Apparatus according to claim 6, wherein said member is an arm pivotedon said frame."}
{"WKU":"039306216","Title":"Paper holding attachment for drafting boards","App_Date":"1974-06-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Russell J. Wood","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B65H 1702","References":"414067;1934952;2872842;3190574;3394900","Claims":"I claim:1. A paper holding attachment for use with drafting boards, comprising anelongate hollow housing defining an interior paper holding chamber whoseinterior wall is cylindrically concave for receiving a roll of draftingpaper, said housing having an opening lengthwise thereof through which thepaper may be slipped into or out of the chamber, means for supporting thehousing at an edge of the drafting board below the surface with theopening parallel to said edge and substantially at the level of thesurface of the board, said means providing an upwardly inclined apron overwhich the paper from the opening travels to the plane of the board, arotor mounted in the chamber in concentrical relation thereto for rotationabout said axis upon which the paper is adapted to be wound, springmembers comprising coils mounted interiorly of the chamber from theconcave wall, said spring members extending along arcuate paths ofdescreasing radius of curvature into engagement with the rotor and saidchamber being provided with axially spaced openings in its wall throughwhich the spring members can be withdrawn to positions such that onlytheir distal ends are engaged with the inner side of the wall.2. A paper holding attachment according to claim 1, wherein there areguides on the convex outer side wall of the housing adjacent the openingsthrough which the spring members are arranged to be withdrawn and withwhich the spring members are adapted to be frictionally engaged as theyare withdrawn to hold the withdrawn portion of the spring members engagedwith the convex outer side wall of the housing.3. A paper holding attachment according to claim 1, wherein there are meansat the outer ends of the spring members for manipulating them to withdrawor insert the spring members.4. A paper holding attachment for use with drafting boards, comprising anelongate hollow housing defining an interior paper holding chamber whoseinterior wall is cylindrically concave for receiving a roll of draftingpaper, said housing having a narrow opening lengthwise thereof throughwhich the paper may be slipped into and out of the chamber, means forsupporting the housing at an edge of the drafting board below the surfacewith the opening parallel to the edge and substantially at the level ofthe surface, said means providing an upwardly inclined apron along oneside of the opening over which the paper from the opening may be moved toor from the plane of the board, a rotor mounted in the chamber inconcentric relation thereto for rotation about said longitudinal axis uponwhich the paper is adapted to be wound, means supported within the chamberwhich extends part way around the rotor divergently from the wall of thechamber and convergently towards the rotor into engagement therewith foryieldably pressing the paper against the surface of the rotor to cause itto become wound onto the rotor as the latter is rotated, said meansextending around the rotor in a direction corresponding to the directionthe rotor is rotated to wind the paper onto the rotor and means foreffecting rotation of the rotor.5. A paper holding attachment according to claim 4, wherein the means forsupporting the housing at the edge of the drafting board is designed todetachably mount the holder thereon and comprises a bracket having rightangularly disposed parts, one of which is adapted to be screwed to theedge face of the board and has an outwardly facing channel and the otherof which is designed to form an extension of the board, and flange meansextending from the convex outer side wall of the housing adjacent theopening for sliding engagement with the channel to support the housingwith said extension adjacent the opening and wherein the extension at itsdistal edge has a smooth surface inclined downwardly into the opening overwhich the paper is adapted to be moved as it enters or leaves the opening.6. A paper holding attachment according to claim 4, wherein the rotor hason its peripheral surface frictional means.7. A paper holding attachment according to claim 4, wherein there arebearing caps at the opposite ends of the chamber and there are hub membersat the opposite ends of the rotor rotatably supported in the bearing caps.8. A paper holding attachment according to claim 7, wherein the hub membershave radial flanges corresponding substantially to the interior diameterof the chamber for confining the edges of the paper wound on the rotor.9. A paper holding attachment according to claim 7, wherein the hub membershave affixed thereto extensions which extend through the bearing caps andthere are crank handles mounted on the extension by means of which therotor can be rotated.10. A paper holding attachment for use with drafting boards, comprising anelongate hollow housing defining an interior paper holding chamber whoseinterior wall is cylindrically concave for receiving a roll of draftingpaper, said housing having an opening lengthwise thereof through which thepaper may be slipped into or out of the chamber, means for supporting thehousing at an edge of the drafting board below the surface with theopening parallel to said edge and substantially at the level of thesurface, said means providing an upwardly inclined apron on which thepaper from the opening travels to the plane of the board, a rotor mountedin the chamber in concentric relation thereto, for rotation about saidaxis upon which the paper is adapted to be wound, spring members mountedinteriorly of the chamber on the concave wall, said spring members beingstressed to form coils of a lesser radius of curvature than the interiorof the chamber so that they extend along an arcuate path of decreasingradius of curvature with respect to the interior wall of the chamber intoengagement with the surface of the rotor for yieldably pressing the paperagainst the surface of the rotor to cause it to become wound onto therotor as the latter is rotated, said spring members extending around therotor in a direction corresponding to the direction the rotor is rotatedto wind the paper on the rotor and means for effecting rotation of therotor."}
{"WKU":"039306224","Title":"Energy storing safety belt retractor","App_Date":"1974-06-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Akira Tanaka;Avraham Ziv","Assignee":"American Safety Equipment Corporation","ICL_Class":"B65H 7548","References":"3659800;3722824;3819126","Claims":"We claim:1. A positively locking mechanism for a seat belt retractor, which locksthe retractor against further protractive movement of the belt when thevehicle upon which the retractor is mounted undergoes a change in inertiaduring a crash or other sudden deceleration, including a ratchet wheelwith teeth thereon and a lock bar which engages the ratchet wheel on beingactuated by the locking mechanism to prevent rotation of the ratchetwheel, said mechanism comprising:a. vehicle inertia responsive means on said retractor for sensing changesin the inertia of the vehicles; andb. energy storing means in force transmitting relationship between saidvehicle inertia responsive means and said lock bar for receiving andstoring energy imparted thereto by movement of the vehicle inertiaresponsive means and for urging said lock bar toward locking engagementwith said ratchet wheel through a pawl bounce condition when said lock barinitially bounces off a tooth of said ratchet wheel before attaining alocking engagement with said wheel.2. The retractor mechanism of claim 1 wherein said vehicle inertiaresponsive means comprises a mass mounted on the retractor movable inresponse to changes in the inertia of the vehicle and actuator meansbetween said mass and said lock bar for transmitting locking movement tosaid lock bar upon movement of said mass, said energy storing meansincluding resilient stem means connecting said mass to said actuator, saidstem means being elastically bendable upon movement of said mass such thatit stores energy while being bent so that the energy storing means willurge said lock bar toward locking engagement with said ratchet wheelthrough the pawl bounce condition.3. The retractor mechanism of claim 2 wherein said resilient stem meanscomprises a spring wire connecting said mass with said actuator.4. The retractor mechanism of claim 2 wherein said resilient stem meanscomprises a coil spring connecting said mass with said actuator.5. The retractor mechanism of claim 1 wherein said vehicle inertiaresponsive means comprises a mass mounted on the retractor movable inresponse to changes in inertia of the vehicle and actuator means betweensaid mass and said lock bar for transmitting locking movement to said lockbar upon movement of the mass, said energy storing means includingresilient means between said actuator means and said lock bar for storingenergy transmitted between said actuator and said lock bar.6. The retractor mechanism of claim 5 wherein said resilient means includesdiaphragm means mounted on said actuator means for storing energy in theresiliency of the diaphragm.7. The retractor mechanism of claim 5 wherein said resilient means includeselastomeric material interposed between said actuator and said lock barfor storing the energy in the compression of the material.8. The retractor mechanism of claim 7 wherein said elastomeric material isattached to said actuator.9. The retractor mechanism of claim 7 wherein said elastomeric material isattached to said lock bar.10. The retractor mechanism of claim 5 wherein said resilient meansincludes lock bar spring means mounted on said lock bar to store energyfrom said actuator means.11. In an emergency locking safety belt retractor having a locking baroperated by inertia responsive means, including an inertia responsivemass, for locking with teeth of the ratchet wheel associated with a beltwinding reel of the retractor, the improvement in inertia responsive meanscomprising the provision of:energy storage means in force transmitting relation between said lock barand said mass for receiving and storing energy imparted thereto bymovement of said mass and for thereby urging said lock bar toward lockingengagement with said ratchet wheel through a pawl bounce condition whereinsaid lock bar initially bounces off the tooth of said wheel beforeattaining a locking engagement with said wheel.12. The improved inertia responsive means of claim 11 further including theprovision of:actuator means between said mass and said lock bar for transmitting lockingmovement to said lock bar upon movement of said mass, said energy storingmeans including resilient stem means connecting said mass to saidactuator, said stem means being elastically bendable upon movement of saidmass such that it stores energy while being bent to urge said lock bartoward locking engagement with said ratchet wheel through the pawl bouncecondition.13. In the improved inertia responsive means of claim 12, the improvementfurther comprising the provision of:said resilient stem means comprising a spring wire connecting said masswith said actuator.14. In the improved inertia responsive means of claim 12, the improvementfurther comprising the provision of:said resilient stem means comprising a coil spring connecting said masswith said actuator.15. In the improved inertia responsive means of claim 11, the improvementfurther comprising the provision of:actuator means between said mass and said lock bar for transmitting lockingmovement to said lock bar upon movement of said mass, said energy storingmeans including resilient means between said actuator means and said lockfor storing energy transmitted between said actuator and said lock bar.16. In the improved inertia responsive means of claim 15, the improvementfurther comprising the provision of:said resilient means including diaphragm means mounted on said actuatormeans for storing energy in the resiliency of the diaphragm.17. In the improved inertia responsive means of claim 15, the improvementfurther comprising the provision of:said resilient means including elastomeric material interposed between saidactuator and said lock bar for storing energy in the compression of thematerial.18. In the improved inertia responsive means of claim 17, the improvementfurther comprising the provision of:said elastomeric material being attached to said actuator.19. In the improved inertia responsive means of claim 17, the improvementfurther comprising the provision of:said elastomeric material being attached to said lock bar.20. In the improved inertia responsive means of claim 15, the improvementfurther comprising the provision of:said resilient means including lock bar spring means mounted on said lockbar to store energy in the resiliency of said spring means."}
{"WKU":"039306232","Title":"Package supply device","App_Date":"1974-12-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard I. Walden","Assignee":"Leesona Corporation","ICL_Class":"B65H 4902;D03J  508;D02H  100","References":"3081045;3815844","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An automatic package supply device for presenting a fresh package ofyarn for winding to an automatic winding machine having means for rotatinga delivery package to wind yarn thereon, an unwinding station, a reservestation and means for uniting yarn from said reserve station to yarn onsaid delivery package upon a signal created by the absence of an activeunwinding yarn end at said unwinding station comprising;a pair of side supporting members,an endless cam track mounted on one of said supporting members,a pair of parallel vertically orientated carrier plates supported by saidsupporting members for rotation about a horizontal axis,a pair of package supporting members mounted in opposed relation on"}
{"WKU":"039306240","Title":"Aircraft","App_Date":"1973-07-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard R. Thompson","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B64C  100","References":"591211;992086;1014194;1558958;2035730","Claims":"I claim:1. An aircraft having a major longitudinal strength structure generallycentralized in the vertical midplane,shallow V-shaped wing structures, viewed from above, secured to saidstrength structure, one at the top and one at the bottom of said strengthstructure, said wing structure comprising paired upper and lower panels,andcontrol linkages being positioned and connected to act as stays betweensaid paired upper and lower wing panels.2. The aircraft of claim 1, with said wing structure having controllablesurfacing normally aerodynamically loaded in a positive lift sense, andsaid aircraft having a pilot seat and control member centered along thebottom of said major strength structure, and tension linkage coupled tosaid surfacing and to said control member.3. The construction of claim 2, wherein such controllable surfacing islocated toward the rear of the aircraft, the said control member ismovable in a fore-and-aft sense, and such tension linkage pulls thesurfacing downwardly upon forward movement of said member.4. The construction of claim 3, with an adjustable bungee for said controlmember.5. The construction of claim 2, wherein such controllable surfacingcomprises differentially-actuable areas at opposite sides of the aircraft,the said control member is movable in a transverse sense, and such tensionlinkage is coupled thereto and to said differentially-actuable areas insuch manner as to actuate said areas differentially by differentialtensions at the two sides.6. For an aircraft, a sustaining wing of substantially rhomboidal cellularconfiguration viewed from the side and axially of the aircraft so thatthere are upper and lower pairs of panels converging toward the wing tips,said panels being of substantially sail-like construction in at leasttheir aft area, and having rigid upwardly-convex ribbing flexibly mountedand positioned generally axially of the aircraft to maintain a generallyaeroform contouring of the wing panels.7. The wing of claim 6, haaving one pair of its panels swept back.8. The wing of claim 7, wherein the upper panels are swept back.9. The wing of claim 6, having one pair of its panels swept forward.10. The wing of claim 9, wherein the lower panels are swept forward.11. The wing of claim 6, having one pair of its panels swept back and theother pair of its panels swept forward.12. The construction of claim 6, having controls coupled to trailing edgesof at least two of the wing panels.13. The construction of claim 12, wherein said controls comprise linkagescoupled to said trailing edges for operating normally in tension only.14. The construction of claim 12, wherein said controls are operativedifferentially.15. The construction of claim 12, wherein said controls are operative inunison.16. The construction of claim 6, wherein the sail-like wing constructionhas lacing securing it in place, said lacing providing for adjustment tovary the effective camber of the wing.17. In an aircraft, a plurality of cellular wings, one adjacent the frontand another adjacent the rear of the craft, each of said wings, whenviewed longitudinally and from the side of the aircraft, appearingsubstantially rhomboidal with one of its diagonal axes extendingtransversely of the aircraft and the other vertically, the upper and lowersurfaces of each of said wings being differentially swept wherein saidwings have flexible trailing edges, the upper and lower surfaces of theforward of said wings being interconnected, adjacent their trailing edges,by independent linkages which are oppositely controllable.18. The construction of claim 17, wherein the upper surfaces of therearward of said wings are interconnected, adjacent their trailing edges,by linkage actuable to move them in like senses to serve as a pitchingcontrol.19. In an aircraft, a plurality of cellular wings, one adjacent the frontand another adjacent the rear of the craft, each of said wings, whenviewed longitudinally and from the side of the aircraft, appearingsubstantially rhomboidal with its longer axis extending transversely ofthe aircraft, the upper and lower surfaces of each of said wings beingformed substantially as a sail, and having curved rib means establishing alifting curvature for such sail.20. The construction of claim 19, wherein the rib means of upper and lowersurfaces are interconnected adjacent their rear ends by control linkage."}
{"WKU":"039306259","Title":"Steam-powered aircraft","App_Date":"1974-09-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Alexander Krivka","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B64C 2708;B64C 2716","References":"1344661;1637389;1692397;2575886;2659556;2799353;3050275;3138349;3752418","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A vehicle comprising:a fuselage, steam-generating means on said fuselage for generating steamunder pressure on said fuselage;a forwardly-directable propeller comprised of a plurality of propellerblades rotatably mounted on said fuselage, a substantiallycircumferentially-directed jet positioned substantially on the tip of oneof said propeller blades, a pipe connected between said steam-generatingmeans and said propeller tip jet for delivering steam under pressure tosaid propeller tip jet to cause rotation of said propeller;a shroud positioned around the path of said propeller tip jet, said shroudhaving an annular space therein, and said propeller tip jet extending intosaid annular space so that steam discharged from said propeller tip jet isdischarged into the annular space in said shroud so that steam iscondensed within said shroud.2. The vehicle of claim 1 wherein there isan annular slot on the interior wall of said shroud said slot extendinginto the annular space in said shroud, said propeller tip jet extendingthrough said annular slot into said annular space, a shroud ringpositioned in said annular slot to substantially close said annular slotto limit the escape of steam from the annular space in said shroud.3. The vehicle of claim 2 wherein thereare a plurality of propeller blades on said propeller, and each of saidpropeller blades carries a substantially circumferentially-directed jetadjacent the tip thereof and positioned within the annular space in saidshroud, said shroud ring being attached to each of said blades adjacentthe tip thereof and rotating with said blades.4. The vehicle of claim 3 whereinsaid blades are mounted on a rotating hub, and said hub contains a rotatingsteam joint for supply of steam from said steam generator means to saidpropeller blade tip jets.5. The vehicle of claim 1 whereinsaid propeller blades are mounted for rotation about a substantiallyforwardly-directed fixed axis and further comprising:a plurality of lift rotor blades mounted for rotation about an upright axisso that, as said lift rotor blades rotate about said upright axis, lift isproduced which acts upon said fuselage.6. The vehicle of claim 5 whereinsaid lift rotor blades each have a substantially circumferentially-directedjet adjacent the tip thereof, and conduit means is connected between saidsteam generator means and said lift rotor blade tip jet so that steam canbe discharged from said lift rotor blade tip jets to cause rotation ofsaid lift rotor blades to produce lift on said fuselage.7. The vehicle of claim 6 whereinan upright mast is carried on said fuselage, said lift rotor bladesrotating adjacent the upper end of said mast, said mast being hollow andhaving a steam conduit therethrough, a distributor at the upper end ofsaid mast, said distributor distributing steam to said lift rotor bladesfor discharge from the tip jets thereon to cause rotation of said liftrotor for producing lift.8. The vehicle of claim 7 whereina valve is connected to shut off steam flow to the said lift rotor bladesso that, during normal motion of said vehicle, all steam produced by saidsteam generator means is discharged through said propeller blade tip jetsfor recondensation and recirculation.9. The vehicle of claim 4 whereinsaid propeller blades are mounted for rotation about a substantiallyforwardly-directed fixed axis and further comprising:a plurality of lift rotor blades mounted for rotation about an upright axisso that, as said lift rotor blades rotate about said upright axis, lift isproduced which acts upon said fuselage.10. The vehicle of claim 9 whereinsaid lift rotor blades each have a substantially circumferentially-directedjet adjacent the tip thereof, and conduit means is connected between saidsteam generator means and said lift rotor blade tip jet so that steam canbe discharged from said lift rotor blade tip jets to cause rotation ofsaid lift rotor blades to produce lift on said fuselage.11. The vehicle of claim 10 whereinan upright mast is carried on said fuselage, said lift rotor bladesrotating adjacent the upper end of said mast, said mast being hollow andhaving a steam conduit therethrough, a distributor at the upper end ofsaid mast, said distributor distributing steam to said lift rotor bladesfor discharge from the tip jets thereon to cause rotation of said liftrotor for producing lift.12. The vehicle of claim 11 whereina valve is connected to shut off steam flow to the said lift rotor bladesso that, during normal motion of said vehicle, all steam produced by saidsteam generator means is discharged through said propeller blade tip jetsfor recondensation and recirculation.13. A vehicle comprising:a fuselage, steam-generating means on said fuselage for generating steamunder pressure on said fuselage;a forwardly directed propeller comprised of a plurality of propeller bladesrotatable mounted on said fuselage on a substantially forwardly directedhorizontal axis;a lift rotor comprised of a plurality of rotor blades rotatably mounted ona substantially upwardly directed vertical axis on said fuselagepropulsion means connected to said steam-generating means for selectivelyrotating both said forwardly directed propeller and said lift rotor sothat said vehicle can selectively be furnished with lifting force forlifting said vehicle and forward thrust for forwardly propelling saidvehicle from said steam-generating means.a condenser shroud surrounding said forwardly directed propeller forcondensing steam employed in the rotation of said forwardly directedpropeller.14. The vehicle of claim 13 wherein steamforce-producing means is secured to the outer ends of said forwardlydirected propeller and within said shroud for producing torque of saidforwardly directed propeller by steam action on said steam thrustproducingmeans and steam acting therewith is discharged into said shroud tocondense in said shroud.15. The vehicle of claim 14 wherein mechanincalconnection means is interconnected between said forwardly directedpropeller and said lift rotor for rotating said lift rotor from torqueproduced by said forward directed propeller.16. The vehicle of claim 15 wherein a clutchis positioned in said mechanical connection means so that torque from saidforwardly directed propeller can be clutched and declutched to said liftrotor.17. The vehicle of claim 16 wherein thereare two contra-rotating, forwardly directed propellers, each of saidpropellers receiving torque from interaction between said propellers anddischarging steam within a shroud.18. The vehicle of claim 17 wherein both ofsaid forwardly directed propellers are selectively connectable to saidrotor.19. The vehicle of claim 17 wherein thereare two lift rotors and each of said forwardly directed propellers isseparately connected through a clutch to drive one of said lift rotors.20. The vehicle of claim 19 wherein saidforwardly directed propellers include blades which are featherable."}
{"WKU":"039306267","Title":"Airplane wing camber control","App_Date":"1974-09-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Thomas L. Croswell, Jr.","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B64C  344","References":"2523427;3042371","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A fluid flow affecting generally planar member having opposed fluid flowsurfaces on opposite sides of a geometric central plane, defininggenerally a leading edge and a trailing edge with respect to the relativeflow direction; structural means maintaining said member in a particulargeometric shape with a relatively fixed curvature for said centralgeometric plane; said structural means at least in part beingconstructured of an electrostrictive material having an orientation suchthat with a voltage application, the electrostrictive material will changein shape to correspondingly change the shape of said structural means andthereby correspondingly warp the member and change the curvature of itsgeometric central plane; and electrical drive means for selectivelyimpressing a voltage upon said electrostrictive material.2. The device of claim 1, wherein said electrostrictive material exhibitsthe properties of expansion with one of a negative voltage and positivevoltage, and contraction with the other of the negative voltage andpositive voltage; and said drive means for impressing a voltage beingcapable of selectively supplying only a negative voltage to saidelectrostrictive material for an indeterminate length of time and furtherfor selectively applying only a positive voltage to said electrostrictivematerial for an indeterminate period of time.3. The device of claim 2, wherein said structural means is pretensioned inits normal condition with zero voltage being applied to saidelectrostrictive material.4. The device of claim 2, wherein said structural means is pretensioned inits normal condition with no voltage being impressed, and further whereinsaid electrostrictive material exhibits the properties of expansion whenbeing subjected to an electrical voltage to thereby reduce thepretensioning of said structural means.5. The fluid flow affecting member of claim 2 mounted on an airplanefuselage and extending from the fuselage to substantially affect theairplane aerodynamic characteristics for inflight control of the airplane.6. The fluid flow affecting member of claim 1 mounted on an airplanefuselage and extending from the fuselage to substantially affect theairplane aerodynamic characteristics for inflight control of the airplane.7. A method for controlling the curvature of a fluid flow control memberhaving a leading edge generally transverse to the fluid flow, a trailingedge generally transverse to the fluid flow, opposed surfaces over whichthe fluid flows, which surfaces are on opposite sides of a geometriccentral plane having a predetermined normal curvature, and structuralmeans on opposite sides of said plane to maintain said control member inthe predetermined curvature of said geometric central plane, comprisingthe steps of: orienting electrostrictive material as an integral part ofthe structural means so that with a voltage applied to theelectrostrictive material, it will change in length to correspondinglychange the effective length of the structural means and warp the controlmember as defined by a change in curvature of the geometric central plane;and selectively applying a voltage to the electrostrictive material in anamount and of a characteristic to provide a desired curvature of thecontrol member.8. The method of claim 7, wherein said step of applying voltage selectivelyapplies a positive voltage for an indefinite period of time and a negativevoltage for a separate indefinite period of time respectivelycorresponding to desired curvature in one direction and the oppositedirection.9. The method of claim 8, including the step of prestressing the structuralmeans mechanically under normal conditions of no applied voltage, andmaintaining said prestressing as an integral part of the control memberwithout external power."}
{"WKU":"039306275","Title":"Radiation shielding and gas diffusion apparatus","App_Date":"1975-01-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert C. Miller","Assignee":"Summa Corporation","ICL_Class":"B64C  140","References":"1888749;2548563;2913009;3210934;3289943;3372874;3448583;3449189;3612212;3631678;3685547;3815360;3817030","Claims":"1.  A device for shielding a heated surface from infrared detection throughan opening adjacent the heated surface comprising:a gas conducting member adapted to receive heated gases from the opening;said member being formed of a material which has a high heat conductivity;said member having an interior surface and an exterior surface separated bya wall, an inlet for receipt of heated gases and an outlet for dischargeof heated gases;said member having a configuration which blocks said inlet fromline-of-sight view through said outlet;said interior surface having a configuration which shields a portion ofsaid interior surface against contact with heated gases passing throughsaid member, andmeans to promote heat transfer through said wall from said interior surfaceto said exterior surface,whereby heat transfer from the heated gases to said interior surface isreduced by the lack of contact between the heated gases and said shieldedportions of the interior surface while heat received by the member at saidinterior surface is rapidly removed from the member by said second meansto maintain said member at a relatively low temperature with respect tothe temperature of said heated gases.2. The device of claim 1 includingindentations in said interior surface to form recessed pockets therein;said indentations having a width which is sufficiently small to impede theentrance of heated gases into said pockets,whereby the available heat transfer area on said interior surface isreduced in relation to the area removed from the interior surface by saidindentations.3. The device of claim 2 wherein said indentations are slots in saidinterior surface.4. The device of claim 2 wherein said indentations are convolutions in saidinterior surface.5. The device of claim 2 wherein said indentations are serrations in saidinterior surface.6. The device of claim 1 wherein said gas conducting member has an elbowconfiguration.7. The device of claim 1 wherein said gas conducting member is formed of ametal which has high heat conductivity.8. The device of claim 1 includingan annular opening in said member for introducing an annulus of cool air asa boundary layer adjacent the inner surface of said member.9. The device of claim 1 includingmeans on said exterior surface to increase heat rejection from the exteriorsurface.10. The device of claim 9 includingfins on said exterior surface.11. The device of claim 10 wherein said fins have an undulatingconfiguration.12. The device of claim 11 including openings formed through said fins.13. The device of claim 9 including a reticulated metal foam on saidexterior surface.14. The device of claim 13 wherein said metal form has a thickness of about1/8 to about one inch.15. The device of claim 13 wherein said metal foam has from about 5 toabout 80 pores per inch.16. The device of claim 13 wherein said foam is formed from stainlesssteel.17. The device of claim 9 including a honeycomb structure on said exteriorsurface.18. The device of claim 17 wherein said honeycomb structure is slotted.19. The device of claim 18 wherein the slots in said honeycomb structureare positioned longitudinally with respect to said gas conducting member.20. The device of claim 18 wherein the slots in said honeycomb structureare positioned both longitudinally and transversely with respect to saidgas conducting member.21. The device of claim 1 includingdiffusion means positioned to break up the stream of exhaust gas into aplurality of smaller streams.22. The device of claim 1 includingmeans on said exhaust gas conducting member to change the shape of theexhaust gas stream to a shape having a reduced emissivity.23. The device of claim 22 including means to change the cross sectionalconfiguration of the exhaust gas stream to an elongated elliptical orrectangular configuration.24. The device of claim 1 includingdiffusion means positioned to break up the stream of exhaust gas into aplurality of smaller streams and to provide the smaller streams with ashape having a reduced emissivity.25. The device of claim 24 wherein said smaller streams are randomlypositioned with respect to each other such that one stream blocks anotherfrom view and a region of higher temperature in one smaller stream doesnot tend to reinforce the infrared signal provided by a region of highertemperature in another smaller stream.26. The device of claim 1 includingmeans to introduce a boundary layer of a cooling gas adjacent the interiorsurface of said member.27. The device of claim 2 wherein said indentations are formed by a threadin said interior surface.28. The device of claim 26 includingmeans to vary the quantity of cooling gas introduced into said member.29. The device of claim 28 wherein the quantity of cooling gas is varied byvarying the velocity of the heated gas within the gas conducting member.30. The device of claim 9 includinga plurality of posts positioned on said exterior surface, andopenings between said posts to permit the flow of air with respect to thesurfaces of the posts irrespective of the direction of relative movementof the said device and the cooling air.31. The device of claim 30 wherein said posts have a rectangular crosssectional configuration.32. The device of claim 31 wherein said posts have a substantially squarecross sectional configuration.33. The device of claim 31 wherein said posts have an elongated rectangularcross sectional configuration.34. The device of claim 30 wherein said posts have a triangular crosssectional configuration.35. The device of claim 30 wherein said posts have a generally cruciformcross sectional configuration.36. The device of claim 30 wherein said openings are positioned in both alongitudinal and a transverse direction with respect to said device.37. The device of claim 30 including openings between said posts positionedin a diagonal direction with respect to said device.38. The device of claim 30 whereinsaid posts are positioned on the exterior surface in groups, and includingopenings positioned in both a longitudinal and a transverse direction withrespect to said device;said openings separating said groups of posts, andopenings positioned diagonally with respect to said device with thediagonal openings separating the individual posts from other posts in itsgroups.39. The device of claim 38 wherein each group contains two posts, andthe two posts in each group are separated by one diagonal opening.40. The device of claim 38 whereineach group contains four posts, andthe four posts in each group are separated by two intersecting diagonalopenings.41. The device of claim 30 includingopenings in said posts to define internal surfaces therein.42. The device of claim 41 wherein the openings in the posts aresubstantially circular.43. A diffusion device for breaking a main stream of a heated exhaust gasinto a plurality of smaller streams which have a lower emissivity than themain stream of exhaust gas comprising:a body adapted to receive a main stream of heated exhaust gas;insulation means on said body to maintain the exterior surface of said bodyat a relatively low temperature with respect to the temperature of theheated exhaust gas;a plurality of openings in said body for discharge of smaller streams ofexhaust gas from said body;exhaust gas conducting members positioned to receive the smaller streams ofexhaust gas from said openings;said exhaust gas conducting members having a configuration which blockssaid openings from line-of-sight view;said members being formed of a material having high heat conductivity witheach of said members having an interior surface and an exterior surfaceseparated by a wall, an inlet for receipt of heated exhaust gas and anoutlet for discharge of heated exhaust gas;said interior surface having a configuration which shields a portion ofsaid interior surface against contact with heated exhaust gas passingthrough said member, andmeans to promote heat transfer through said wall from said interior surfaceto said exterior surface,whereby heat transfer from the heated exhaust gas to the interior surfacesof said members is reduced by the lack of contact between the heated gasand said shielded portions of the interior surfaces while heat received bythe members at said interior surfaces is rapidly removed from said membersby said second means to maintain the members at a relatively lowtemperature with respect to the temperature of the heated exhaust gas.44. The diffusion device of claim 43 wherein said body has an ocarinaconfiguration.45. The diffusion device of claim 43 wherein said body has a fluteconfiguration.46. The diffusion device of claim 43 wherein said body has a marimbaconfiguration.47. The diffusion device of claim 43 includingmeans on said exhaust gas conducting members to provide the smaller streamof exhaust gas with a shape which reduces the emissivity of said smallerstreams.48. The diffusion device of claim 47 wherein the smaller streams of exhaustgases are provided with a generally rectangular or elliptical crosssectional configuration.49. The diffusion device of claim 43 wherein the exhaust gas conductingmembers are shaped to prevent impingement of the smaller streams ofexhaust gas against the exterior surface of said body or against theexterior surface of an adjacent exhaust gas conducting member.50. The diffusion device of claim 43 wherein the smaller streams arerandomly positioned such that one stream blocks another from view and aregion of higher temperature in one smaller stream does not tend toreinforce the infrared signal provided by a region of higher temperaturein another smaller stream.51. The diffusion device of claim 43 includingindentations in said interior surface to form recessed pockets therein;said indentations having a width which is sufficiently small to impede theentrance of heated exhaust gas into said pockets,whereby the available heat transfer area on said interior surface isreduced in relation to the area removed from the interior surface by saidindentations.52. The diffusion device of claim 43 wherein said exhaust gas conductingmembers are formed of a metal which has high heat conductivity.53. The diffusion device of claim 43 includingan interior surface on said exhaust gas conducting member, andan opening in said member for introducing cool air as a boundary layeradjacent said interior surface.54. The diffusion device of claim 43 including means on said exteriorsurface to increase heat rejection from the exterior surface.55. The device of claim 54 includingfins on the exterior surface of the gas conducting member.56. The diffusion device of claim 43 wherein said gas conducting member hasan elbow configuration.57. The device of claim 54 includinga plurality of posts positioned on said exterior surface, andopenings between said posts to permit the flow of air with respect to thesurfaces of the posts irrespective of the direction of relative movementof the said device and the cooling air.58. The device of claim 57 wherein said posts have a rectangularconfiguration.59. The device of claim 58 wherein said posts have a substantially squarecross sectional configuration.60. The device of claim 58 wherein said posts have an elongated rectangularcross sectional configuration.61. The device of claim 57 wherein said posts have a triangular crosssectional configuration.62. The device of claim 57 wherein said posts have a generally cruciformcross sectional configuration.63. The device of claim 57 wherein said openings are positioned in both alongitudinal and a transverse direction with respect to said gasconducting member.64. The device of claim 57 including openings between said posts positionedin a diagonal direction with respect to said gas conducting member.65. The device of claim 57 whereinsaid posts are positioned on the exterior surface in groups, andopenings positioned in both a longitudinal and a transverse direction withrespect to said gas conducting member,said openings separating said groups of posts, andopenings positioned diagonally with respect to said device with thediagonal openings separating the individual posts from other posts in itsgroup.66. The device of claim 65 whereineach group contains two posts, andthe two posts in each group are separated by one diagonal opening.67. The device of claim 65 whereineach group contains four posts, andthe four posts in each group are separated by two intersecting diagonalopenings.68. The device of claim 57 includingopenings in said posts to define internal surfaces therein.69. The device of claim 68 wherein the openings in the posts aresubstantially circular.70. The diffusion device of claim 54 includinga reticulated metal foam on the exterior surface of the gas conductingmember.71. The diffusion device of claim 70 wherein said metal foam has athickness of about 1/8 to about one inch.72. The diffusion device of claim 70 wherein said metal foam has from about5 to about 80 pores per inch.73. The device of claim 54 including fins on said exterior surface withsaid fins having an undulating configuration.74. The device of claim 73 including openings formed through said fins.75. The device of claim 54 including a honeycomb structure on said exteriorsurface.76. The device of claim 75 wherein said honeycomb structure is slotted.77. The device of claim 76 wherein the slots in said honeycomb structureare positioned longitudinally with respect to said gas conducting member.78. The device of claim 76 wherein the slots in said honeycomb structureare positioned both longitudinally and transversely with respect to saidgas conducting member.79. A device for conveying a heated gas comprising:a metallic gas conduit having a high heat conductivity;said metallic conduit having an interior surface and an exterior surfaceseparated by a wall, an inlet for receipt of heated gases and an outletfor discharge of gases;indentations in said interior surface to form recessed pockets therein;said indentations having a width which is sufficiently small to impede theentrance of heated gas into said pockets, andmeans to promote heat transfer through said wall in maintaining saidconduit at a relatively low temperature with respect to the temperature ofthe heated gas.80. A device for conveying a heated gas comprising:a metallic gas conduit having a high heat conductivity;said metallic conduit having an interior surface and an exterior surfaceseparated by a wall, an inlet for receipt of heated gases and an outletfor discharge of heated gases;said interior surface having a configuration which shields a portion ofsaid interior surface against contact with heated gases passing throughsaid member, andmeans to promote heat transfer through said wall from said interior surfaceto said exterior surface,whereby heat transfer from the heated gas to said interior surface isreduced by the lack of contact between the heated gas and said shieldedportions of the interior surface while heat received by the conduit atsaid interior surface is rapidly removed from the conduit by said secondmeans to maintain said conduit at a relatively low temperature withrespect to the temperature of said heated gas."}
{"WKU":"039306283","Title":"Depoly/release system","App_Date":"1974-11-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"David B. Robelen","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the National Aeronautics","ICL_Class":"B64D 2500","References":"1899713;1938853;2118603;2257277;2478758;3107887;3301511;3463425;3699708","Claims":"What is claimed as new and desired to be secured by Letters Pattent of theUnited States is:1. Apparatus for arresting uncontrollable motions of a model aircraftcomprising in combination:a model aircraft;a parachute having shrouds connected to one end of a riser; said riserhaving a closed loop at the other end thereof;a platform firmly attached to said model aircraft for supporting saidparachute during normal aircraft flight; and parachute being releasablyheld in a suitably folded position on said platform by an elastic bandhaving one end thereof securely fastened to said platform and having ametal loop at the other end thereof; said metal loop being releasablyfastened to said platform by a release pin; a frame means for firmlyattaching said platform to said aircraft; said frame means having aplunger slidably mounted thereon; said plunger being inserted through saidloop of said riser for holding said parachute after said parachute hasbeen deployed; a deploy means for releasing said release pin in responseto a deploy signal thereby deploying said parachute; and jettison meansfor slidably moving said plunger in response to a jettison signal therebyjettisoning said parachute.2. An apparatus as set forth in claim 1 wherein said stowing meansincludes:a platform for supporting said parachute during normal aircraft flight;said parachute being suitably folded and placed on said platform;an elastic band having one end thereof rigidly secured to said platform andthe other end thereof secured to a metal loop;said elastic band being stretched over said parachute and said metal loopbeing releasably connected to said platform thereby securely holding saidparachute against said platform during normal aircraft flight.3. An apparatus as set forth in claim 2 wherein said deploy means includestwo eyelets rigidly fastened to said platform; a release pin for holdingsaid elastic band across said parachute; said elastic band being stretchedover said parachute and said metal loop being received between saideyelets and releasably held therein by said release pin, said release pinbeing slidably positioned through said eyelets and said metal loop; saidrelease pin being slidably removable from said eyelets and said metal loopin response to said deploy signal thereby releasing said elastic band andpermitting said parachute to deploy.4. An apparatus as set forth in claim 3 wherein said deploy means includesa tension means for applying a rearward acting tensile force to saidrelease pin to thereby maintain said release pin positioned through saideyelets and said metal loop.5. An apparatus as set forth in claim 1 wherein said jettison meansincludes a plunger slidably mounted on said frame means for holding saidparachute after said parachute has been deployed; said plunger beinginserted through said closed loop of said riser; and spring means forinitially maintaining said plunger in position; said jettison signalserving to slidably move said plunger to thereby remove said plunger fromsaid closed loop and cause jettisoning of said parachute.6. An apparatus as set forth in claim 1 wherein said deploy means and saidjettison means are operated by a linkage means in response to said deployand jettison signals.7. An apparatus as set forth in claim 1 wherein said deploy means and saidjettison means are actuated by a linkage means comprising:a single radio channel; a radio receiver rigidly mounted in said aircraftfor receiving said deploy and jettison signals; a single digitalproportional servo rigidly mounted in said aircraft for releasing saidrelease pin and for slidably moving said plunger; said digitalproportional servo communicating with said deploy means by way of a deploycable having one end thereof attached to said servo and the other endthereof attached to said release pin; said digital proportional servo alsocommunicating with said jettison means by way of a jettison cable havingone end thereof attached to said servo and the other end thereof attachedto said plunger; and power source rigidly mounted in said aircraft forsupplying power to said radio receiver and said digital proportionalservo.8. An apparatus as set forth in claim 7 wherein said receiver meansreceives remotely transmitted radio signals."}
{"WKU":"039306291","Title":"Overheated journal bearing derailment prevention system","App_Date":"1974-08-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John H. Armstrong;Frank C. Kluge","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy","ICL_Class":"B61K  904","References":"1512456;3803374","Claims":"What is claimed as new and desired to be secured by Letters Patent of theUnited States is:1. In combination with a train car a thermal sensor and actuator system formonitoring bearing temperature and actuating the train brake system at apredetermined temperature comprising:a thermal sensor positioned approximate the train journal bearings torelease an impact member at a predetermined temperature;signal producing means cooperating with said thermal sensor to produce anoutput signal; andelectroexplosive means responsive to said output signal to vent the brakelines on said train car to stop said train car.2. The combination of claim 1 wherein said electroexplosive means comprisesa explosively-actuated diaphragm cutter.3. The combination of claim 2 wherein said signal producing means comprisesa power source responsive to said impact member to produce an electricsignal.4. The combination of claim 3 further comprising conductor means connectingsaid power source and said diaphragm cutter.5. The combination of claim 1 wherein said thermal sensor comprises:a deformable, temperature-responsive means;a spring-loaded firing pin restrained in a cocked position by saidtemperature-responsive means; anda power source responsive to impact of said firing pin to produce an outputcurrent upon release of said firing pin by said temperature-responsivemeans.6. The combination of claim 5 wherein said deformable,temperature-responsive means comprises a material which undergoes a phasechange at a predetermined temperature.7. The combination of claim 6 wherein said electroexplosive means comprisesan explosively-actuated diaphragm cutter to puncture and vent the trainbrake line.8. The combination of claim 7 wherein said diaphragm cutter is actuated byan explosively-extended bellows motor.9. The combination of claim 8 further comprising a calibrated venting meansconnected to said diaphragm cutter capable of producing an audible signalupon brake line venting.10. The combination of claim 9 wherein said deformable,temperature-responsive material comprises an alloy having a crystallinephase change at a predetermined temperature.11. The combination of claim 10 wherein said crystalline phase change alloycomprises an intermetallic alloy of nickel and titanium having a shapechange above a predetermined temperature.12. The combination of claim 9 wherein said temperature-responsive materialcomprises a eutectic alloy having a predetermined melting temperature.13. The combination of claim 12 wherein said alloy comprises an alloy ofbismuth.14. The combination of claim 12 wherein said power source comprises apiezoelectric element initiated by impact of said firing pin.15. The combination of claim 14 wherein said piezoelectric elementcomprises a detonator initiated by said firing pin and piezoelectriccrystals crushed by pressure from said detonator to produce an electriccurrent.16. The combination of claim 12 wherein said power source comprises athermal battery activated by impact of said firing pin.17. The combination of claim 16 wherein said thermal battery comprises:a pyrotechnic reactant;an electrochemical reactant; anda percussion primer triggered by impact of said firing pin to initiate anelectric-current-producing reaction between said pyrotechnic reactant andsaid electrochemical reactants.18. The combination of claim 11 wherein said power source comprises apiezoelectric element initiated by impact of said firing pin.19. The combination of claim 18 wherein said piezoelectric elementcomprises a detonator initiated by said firing pin and piezoelectriccrystals crushed by pressure from said detonator to produce an electriccurrent.20. The combination of claim 11 wherein said power source comprises athermal battery activated by impact of said firing pin.21. The combination of claim 20 wherein said thermal battery comprises:a pyrotechnic reactant;an electrochemical reactant; anda percussion primer triggered by impact of said firing pin to initiate anelectric-current-producing reaction between said pyrotechnic reactant andsaid electrochemical reactants."}
{"WKU":"039306305","Title":"Vacuum cleaner support apparatus","App_Date":"1974-08-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard F. Wulff","Assignee":"Advance Machine Company","ICL_Class":"B62B  308","References":"267191;1798565;1937668;2121514;2291984;2683012;3527469;3658383;3702016","Claims":"Having thus described the invention, what I claim as new and desire tosecure by Letters Patent is:1. Apparatus for tilting the collecting chamber of a vacuum cleanercomprising in combination:a. a chassis;b. first means for allowing movement of the chassis over a floor surface;c. second means for pivotally mounting the collecting chamber to thechassis about a pivot point;d. a handle having a gripping portion;e. third means for pivotally interconnecting the handle to the secondmeans; andf. fourth means for locking the handle relative to said second means in afirst push position and a second tilt position, the first push positionallowing the application of a force to the gripping portion of the handleto be transferred to the chassis to cause movement of the chassis over thefloor surface, and the second tilt position being rotated from the firstpush position to allow the application of a force to the gripping portionto pivot the second means about the pivot point to therefore tilt thecollecting chamber to allow emptying the contents therefrom.2. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein the handle includes an angularextension which is pivotally mounted on the second means such that in thefirst push position, the gripping portion of the handle is placed abovethe pivot point of the second means and the chassis and in the second tiltposition, the gripping portion of the handle lies below the pivot point ofthe second means and the chassis creating a force advantage due to theleverage obtained and such that gripping portion of the handle is in aconvenient position for tilting the collecting chamber.3. The apparatus of claim 2, wherein the second means includes arm membersconnected to the collecting chamber and pivotable about the pivot point.4. The apparatus of claim 3, wherein the chassis includes a flat surfaceand a pair of upright arms extending from the rear of the flat surfaceadjacent the handle and the pivot point is located on the uppermostportion of the two upstanding arms.5. The apparatus of claim 4, wherein the second means includes at least twoapertures and the fourth means includes at least one biased detentmechanism carried by the handle which extends into the apertures of thesecond means to selectively lock the handle in the first push and secondtilt positions.6. The apparatus of claim 5, wherein the arm members connected to thechamber are horizontal, the arm members include notches for camming thedetent mechanism in a direction opposite to the bias of the detentmechanism, and the angular extension of the handle is offset L-shaped.7. The apparatus of claim 2, wherein the second means includes at least twoapertures and the fourth means includes at least one biased detentmechanism carried by the handle which extends into the apertures of thesecond means to selectively lock the handle in the first push and secondtilt positions.8. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein the chassis includes a flat surfaceand a pair of upright arms extending from the rear of the flat surfaceadjacent the handle and the pivot point is located on the uppermostportion of the two upstanding arms.9. The apparatus of claim 7, wherein the second means includes arm membersconnected to the collecting chamber and pivotable about the pivot point.10. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein the second means includes at leasttwo apertures and the fourth means includes at least one biased detentmechanism carried by the handle which extends into the apertures of thesecond means to selectively lock the handle in the first push and secondtilt positions."}
{"WKU":"039306313","Title":"Mounting device particularly for ceiling or wall fittings","App_Date":"1974-11-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Sven Laarm","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F21S  102;F21S  106;F16M 1300","References":"1215838;1507758;1551914;1557515;2239125;3407454","Claims":"What I claim is:1. A mounting device for a ceiling or wall fitting, comprising a firstmember adapted to engage attachment means disposed in a mounting surface,and a second member having means to engage complementary attachmentportions of said first member for bringing said first and second membersinto positive engagement with each other, said first member being formedwith a groove which follows a helical path around said attachment means sothat rotation of said first member is one sense about said attachmentmeans brings said attachment means gradually into firm engagement withsaid first member to urge said first member against said mounting surface.2. A mounting device as claimed in claim 1, wherein said groove is providedwith radially extending corrugations.3. A mounting device as claimed in claim 1, wherein said complementaryattachment portions include inclined flanges provided in said firstmember, said second member including vanes as said means to engage thecomplementary attachment portions.4. A mounting device for a ceiling or wall fitting, comprising a firstmember adapted to engage a mounting surface, a second member having meansto engage complementary attachement portions of said first member forbringing said first and second members into positive engagement with eachother, and a fastening device adapted to be interposed between said firstmember and attachment means disposed in the mounting surface, saidfastening device being formed with a groove which follows a helical patharound said attachment means so that rotation of said fastening device inone sense about said attachment means brings said attachment meansgradually into firm engagement with said fastening device to urge saidfastening device against said first member and said first member againstsaid mounting surface.5. A mounting device as claimed in claim 4, wherein said groove is providedwith radially extending corrugations.6. A mounting device as claimed in claim 4, wherein said fastening deviceis an elastic washer.7. A mounting device as claimed in claim 4, wherein said complementaryattachment portions include inclined flanges provided in said firstmember, said second member including vanes as said means to engage thecomplementary attachment portions."}
{"WKU":"039306321","Title":"Adjustable seat assembly","App_Date":"1973-12-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Masahiko Shigeta;Gonshiro Miyoshi;Hisakazu Murakami;Shoji Ogata","Assignee":"Nissan Motor Company Limited;Ichikoh Industries Limited","ICL_Class":"F16M 1300","References":"2396511;2868273;2964093;3198139;3208400;3381927;3445143;3507472;3595171;3756094;3806191","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An adjustable seat assembly of a vehicle comprising a seat cushion; aframe mounting the seat cushion thereon; a pair of box-section upper guiderails each having a top panel secured to the frame of the seat cushion, abase panel through which an opening is formed throughout the length of theupper rail, two side panels interconnecting the top and base panels andtwo upper rail vertical flanges integrally on and at right angle to therespective edges of the opening of said base panel, forming therewith agenerally T-shaped configuration; a pair of I-beam lower guide rails eachhaving a top flange portion, with spaced apart edges on which the upperguide rail is slidably supported, a bottom flange portion secured to thefloor of the vehicle, a web interconnecting the top and bottom flangeportions and two lower rail vertical flanges integrally on and at rightangle to the respective edges of said top flange portion, and formingtherewith a generally T-shaped configuration, said lower rail verticalflange being embraced by an interior wall formed by a portion of the toppanel, side panel, base panel and vertical flange of the upper guide rail,said interior wall being configured to correspond to the lower railvertical flange, said upper guide rail being assembled with said lowerguide rail, such that said assembly thereby provides an arrangementwhereby, upon application of force tending to separate the upper rail fromthe lower rail of the assembly in any direction, the upper rail verticalflange and the lower rail vertical flange engage one another to preventsuch separation; and means for restraining the longitudinal movement ofsaid upper guide rail relative to the lower guide rail including a lockingbar laterally passable through the upper rail vertical flanges and thelower rail web.2. An assembly as in claim 1, wherein said upper rail vertical flange isembraced by an exterior wall formed by the lower rail vertical flange,bottom flange portion and web portion of the lower rail, said exteriorwall being configured to correspond to the upper rail vertical flange.3. An assembly as in claim 1, further comprising at least two pairs offriction reducing members each fitted between the interior wall of theupper guide rail and the lower rail vertical flange, said frictionreducing member being curved substantially along the interior wall of theupper rail and being gradually reduced in thickness toward the bottomflange portion of the upper rail.4. An assembly as in claim 1, further comprising an extension integrallydepending from one edge of the lower rail bottom flange portion, at whichthe lower rail is mounted on the floor of the vehicle body.5. An assembly as in claim 1, wherein said restraining means includes amanually operable lever pivotally mounted on a support adjacent theassembled upper and lower rails, said lever forming an integral guideblock at one end thereof, said locking bar being movable across theassembled upper and lower guide rails and normally urged by a springtoward the assembled rails, said locking bar having a hole through whichsaid guide block passes, said locking bar passing through two oppositenotches formed respectively at lower portions of said upper rail verticalflange and through one of a plurality of holes formed in said lower railweb portion when said notches and said one of holes are aligned with eachother, while when the lever is manually turned in a predetermineddirection said locking bar overcoming the action of the spring iswithdrawn from said notches and said hole thereby allowing free movementof the upper rail.6. An adustable seat assembly of a vehicle comprising a seat cushion; aframe mounting the seat cushion thereon; a pair of box-section upper guiderails each having a top panel secured to the frame of the seat cushion, abase panel through which an opening with facing edges is formed throughoutthe length of the upper rail and two side panels interconnecting the topand base panels; two upper rail vertical flanges integrally on and atright angle to the respective edges of said base panel, and formingtherewith a generally T-shaped configuration, said upper rail verticalflanges respectively having two opposite notches at their lower portions;a pair of I-beam lower guide rails each having a top flange portion, withspaced apart edges, on which the upper guide rail is slidably supported, abottom flange portion secured to the floor of the vehicle and a webportion interconnecting the top and bottom flange portions, said webportion having a series of longitudinally arranged holes any one of whichcan be aligned with said two opposite notches in accordance withlongitudinal movement of the upper rail; two lower rail vertical flangesintegrally on and at right angle to the respective edges of said topflange portion, and forming therewith a generally T-shaped configuration,said lower rail vertical flange being embraced by an interior wall formedby a portion of the top panel, side panel base panel and vertical flangeof the upper guide rail said interior wall being configured to correspondto the lower rail vertical flange, said upper guide rail being assembledwith said lower guide rail, such that said assembly thereby provides anarrangement whereby, upon application of force tending to separate theupper rail from the lower rail of the assembly in any direction the upperrail vertical flange and the lower rail vertical flange engage one anotherto prevent such separation; and means for restraining the longitudinalmovement of said upper guide rail comprising a manually operable lockingmember which is urged by a spring to pass through one of said oppositenotches of the upper rail, one of said series of holes in the lower railweb and the other of said notches in this sequence when said two notchesand said one of holes are aligned with each other, while said member ismanually operated to be withdrawn from said aligned notches and holethereby allowing free longitudinal movement of the upper rail."}
{"WKU":"039306330","Title":"Formwork and connecting means for forming annular structures","App_Date":"1974-02-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Johann Wolf","Assignee":"FA. Johann Wolf Gesellschaft m.b.H. KG.","ICL_Class":"E04G 1104","References":"908326;1212397;1236824;1535023;1641927;2102717;2151210;3045313;3619431;3733163","Claims":"I claim:1. Formwork for use in making a round tank, which comprisesa plurality of formwork elements each of which is curved according to anarc of a circle and which are assembled to form an inner formwork wall andan outer formwork wall,each of said formwork elements having two vertical edges provided withangled portions which form engaging faces, which engage engaging faces ofhorizontally adjacent formwork elements of the same formwork wall,said angled portions of said formwork elements of said outer formwork wallextending outwardly,said angled portions of said formwork elements of said inner formwork wallextending inwardly,said formwork elements forming said outer formwork wall being provided withlugs formed with circumferentially extending slots, the slots of adjacentformwork elements overlying each other,tightening wedges inserted in said slots to hold said adjacent formworkelements together,said lugs extending beyond and bearing against the outer edges of saidangled portions,and angle section members secured to said two vertical edges of each ofsaid formwork elements and having first flanges extending in thecircumferential direction and engaging the inside of said angled portions,and second flanges,said second flanges of said angle section members of the outer formworkwall extending outwardly andsaid second flanges of said angle section members of the inner formworkwall extending inwardly,said lugs being secured to said angle section members of the outer formworkwall.2. Formwork as set forth in claim 1, in which said formwork elementsconsist of sheet metal.3. Formwork as set forth in claim 1, in which said angled portions have inthe radial dimension with respect to the center of curvature of theassociated formwork element a dimension which is approximately two to fourtimes the wall thickness of the formwork element.4. Formwork as set forth in claim 1, which comprises a circular series ofvertical posts supporting the formwork elements forming said innerformwork wall.5. Formwork as set forth in claim 4 in whichone of said posts is disposed inwardly and approximately midway of eachodd-numbered formwork element of said inner formwork wall andadjacent posts are connected by struts which are adjustable in length.6. Formwork as set forth in claim 5, in which said struts are detachablyconnected to said posts.7. Formwork as set forth in claim 4, in whichsaid formwork elements of said inner formwork wall are connected to saidposts by first and second struts,said first struts are horizontal and extend to those engaging faces of theformwork element which is opposite to respective posts which engagehorizontally adjacent formwork elements of said inner formwork wall, andsaid second struts are adjustable in length and extend to those engagingedges of said horizontally adjacent formwork elements which engage thenext following formwork elements of said inner formwork wall.8. Formwork as set forth in claim 4, in which said formwork elements whichare opposite to said posts and formwork elements of said inner formworkwall which are superimposed on said opposite formwork elements aresupported by crossing inclined struts disposed in a radial plane.9. Formwork as set forth in claim 4, which comprises struts detachablyconnected to said posts and to formwork elements of said inner formworkwall.10. Formwork as set forth in claim 9, in whichangle section members are secured to said two vertical edges of each ofsaid formwork elements of said inner formwork wall and have flangesextending in the circumferential direction and engaging the inside of saidangled portions of said formwork elements of said inner formwork wall, andsecond flanges,said second flanges extend inwardly,angle section stiffening members are provided which are disposed on theinside of said formwork elements of said inner formwork wall and haveflanges which engage the formwork elements adjacent thereto and are formedwith holes which contain spot welds, andsaid struts are detachably connected to said angle section members and saidangle section stiffening members.11. Formwork as set forth in claim 4, in which each of said posts consistsof sections connected by detachable connections.12. Formwork for use in making a round tank, which comprises a plurality offormwork elements each of which is curved according to an arc of a circleand which are assembled to form an inner formwork wall and an outerformwork wall, each of said formwork elements having two vertical edgesprovided with angled portions which form engaging faces, which engageengaging faces of horizontally adjacent formwork elements of the sameformwork wall, said angled portions of said formwork elements of saidouter formwork wall extending outwardly, said angled portions of saidformwork elements of said inner formwork wall extending inwardly, meansholding said formwork elements forming said outer formwork wall together,each of said formwork elements comprising, 1  an upper edge and a loweredge, each of said formwork walls comprising superposed formwork elements,horizontal stiffening bars secured to said upper and lower edges, andclamping means which engage said horizontal stiffening bars at adjacentedges of superimposed formwork elements to hold them together, saidhorizontal stiffening bars at adjacent edges of superimposed formworkelements being formed with aligned bores, said clamping means comprising atightening plate having an angled portion provided with a pin extendinginto said bores, said tightening plate having an angled slot thereinhaving a portion which is at right angles to said pin and that is definedby surfaces of said tightening plate that converge in a direction awayfrom said pin, said pin being disposed at one end of said slot and saidslot being closed at its other end but opening through a side edge of saidtightening plate beside said pin.13. Formwork for use in making a round tank, which comprises a plurality offormwork elements each of which is curved according to an arc of a circleand which are assembled to form an inner formwork wall and an outerformwork wall, each of said formwork elements having two vertical edgesprovided with angled portions which form engaging faces, which engageengaging faces of horizontally adjacent formwork elements of the sameformwork wall, said angled portions of said formwork elements of saidouter formwork wall extending outwardly, said angled portions of saidformwork elements of said inner formwork wall extending inwardly, anglesection members having flanges at right angles to each other, one of saidflanges being secured to one of said formwork elements at an edge thereofwhich is adjacent to another formwork element, lugs that are secured tothe other of said flanges and that have circumferentially extending slotstherein, separate tightening plates formed with circumferentiallyextending slots therein, the slots of each tightening plate overlying saidslots of said lugs of both of an adjacent pair of formwork elements, andtightening wedges inserted in said slots thereby to interconnect and holdtogether said adjacent formwork elements via said separate tighteningplates."}
{"WKU":"039306348","Title":"Safety control for valve","App_Date":"1974-06-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Stanley M. Loveless","Assignee":"General Gas Light Company","ICL_Class":"F16K 3502","References":"1687554;1716277;1920511","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property orprivilege is claimed are defined as follows:1. In combination, a valve assembly including a valve housing having aprojecting valve stem rotatably supported thereon, the valve housing alsohaving a mounting surface thereon, and a manually-actuated operatorcoacting with said valve stem for controlling the rotational movement ofsaid valve stem between first and second positions, comprising theimprovement wherein said operator includes:an elongated rod positioned coaxially with said valve stem and havingnoncircular means at its inner end adjacent said stem effective upon axialmovement of said rod for interengaging with said stem for effectingrotational movement of said stem upon rotational movement of said rod;first and second L-shaped support members fixedly mounted on said valvehousing and slidably supporting said rod thereon, said first and secondsupport members respectively including first and second support platesdisposed directly adjacent one another and overlying said mountingsurface;said first and second support members respectively including first andsecond flanges extending substantially transverse to the respectivesupport plates, said first flange being disposed adjacent said stem, saidsecond flange being substantially parallel to but spaced outwardly fromsaid first flange, and said elongated rod being slidably supported on andextending through said first and second flanges;handle means disposed outwardly from said second flange and fixedlyconnected to the outer end of said rod;resilient means disposed between said first and second flanges andencircling said rod for constantly urging said rod outwardly away fromsaid valve stem into a retracted position wherein the inner end of saidrod is disengaged from said valve stem; andlocking means coacting between said rod and said first flange forpreventing rotation of said rod when said valve stem is in said firstposition and said rod is in its retracted position, said locking meansincluding an opening in said first flange and a projection fixed to saidrod and positionable within said opening for preventing rotation of saidrod when it is in said retracted position, said projection being removedfrom said opening and engaged with said valve stem when said rod is movedinwardly toward said valve stem whereby said rod can be rotatablydisplaced for moving said valve stem from said first position to saidsecond position, said first flange preventing said rod from being returnedoutwardly into its retracted position when said rod is being rotatablymoved between said first and second positions;whereby said rod may be pushed inwardly against the resilient means by anoperator into engagement with said valve stem for rotation thereof butwill, in response to said resilient means when said valve stem is in saidfirst position, disengage itself from said valve stem so that saidprojection enters into said opening for holding said rod nonrotatable withrespect to said first flange.2. A combination according to claim 1, wherein said projection comprises alug which projects radially outwardly of the rod, said opening in saidfirst flange including a circular center portion for rotatably receivingtherein said rod and an outwardly projecting radial portion for receivingtherein said lug when said rod is in said retracted position, said rodhaving a second lug formed thereon and projecting radially therefrom, saidsecond lug being disposed between said first and second flanges, and saidresilient means comprising a coil spring disposed in encirclingrelationship to said rod and having one end thereof bearing against saidfirst flange and the other end thereof bearing against said second lugwhereby said rod is resiliently urged outwardly toward said retractedposition, said first support plate being sandwiched between said mountingsurface and said second support plate, and threaded fastener meanscoacting between said first and second support plates and said housing forfixedly but releasably attaching said first and second support members tosaid housing.3. In a valve controller for a gas valve having a valve stem rotatablysupported on a valve housing, the combination comprising:bracket means adapted to be fixedly but releasably attached to said valvehousing, said bracket means including first and second substantiallyparallel flanges having substantially aligned openings therethrough, saidopenings being substantially aligned with said valve stem and said firstflange being closely adjacent said valve stem;an elongated rod extending between and projecting outwardly beyond theopposite sides of said first and second flanges, said rod being rotatablysupported relative to said first and second flanges and having noncircularmeans at its inner end adjacent said stem and effective upon axialmovement thereof for engaging said stem to effect rotation thereof towardor away from a preselected rotational position upon rotation of said rod;said rod being axially slidably supported on said first and second flangeswhen said valve stem is in said preselected position, said valve stembeing axially movable inwardly into an engaged position wherein said innerend is engaged with said valve stem to permit rotation thereof;spring means disposed between said first and second flanges and encirclingsaid rod for urging said rod outwardly into a retracted position whereinthe inner end of said rod is disengaged from said valve stem;a noncircular opening within said first flange for receiving saidnoncircular means upon retraction of said rod into its retracted position,said noncircular means being received within said noncircular opening whensaid valve stem and said rod is in said preselected rotational positionfor permitting retraction of said rod to disengage same from said valvestem, said rod when in said retracted position being held against rotationby said noncircular means being engaged within the noncircular opening insaid first flange; andhandle means fixedly connected to the outer end of said rod and spacedoutwardly from said second flange."}
{"WKU":"039306356","Title":"Leak-proof rotary, plug-type fluid control valve","App_Date":"1974-07-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Russell G. Smith","Assignee":"Xomox Corporation","ICL_Class":"F16K  516;F16K 4112","References":"2029438;3132838;3521856","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A rotary, plug-type fluid-control valve comprising, in combination, abody member having an open upper portion and a closed lower portion, avalving member and a sealing member, wherein each of said members includeflow passages, means mounting the valving member for rotational movementrelative to the body and sealing members to place the flow passages of thevalving member in and out of communication with the flow passages of saidbody and sealing members; said sealing member interposed between theperipheral face of the valving member and body member; a chamber definedby the lower end of the sealing member, the lower end of the valvingmember and the lower portion of said body member; the upper end of saidvalving member terminating in a centrally disposed, outwardly projectingactuator stem; an annular seat circumscribing the upper end of saidvalving member adjacent said actuator stem; a flexible, fluid-imperviousdiaphragm having a central opening therein accommodating the actuatorstem, said diaphragm spanning the upper end of the valving member andterminating in an outer marginal portion which overlies the upper portionof the body member; means securing the marginal portion of the diaphragmrelative to the body member; means positioning those portions of thediaphragm between its outer marginal edge and the actuator stem of thevalving member against outward axial movement relative to said valvingmember; an annular recess circumscribing the peripheral-adjacent portionof the upper end of the valving member; wherein a second chamber isdefined by the upper end of the sealing member, the annular recess in thevalving member the upper portion of the body member and the undersurfaceof the diaphragm; a passageway establishing continuous open communicationbetween said first-mentioned and second chambers; fluid media in andfilling each of said chambers and the passageway therebetween; wherein thefluid media in the first-mentioned chamber impinges against the lower endof the valving member for uging said valving member toward the diaphragmfor disposing the annular seat which circumscribes the upper end of thevalving member in contacting, leak-proof engagement with said diaphragm;and wherein the fluid media in the second chamber impinges against thediaphragm intermediate the said annular seat and the locus of securementof the marginal portion of the diaphragm to the body member, to resistflow of valve controlled fluid past said annular seat and along theactuator stem of the valving member.2. A valve as called for in claim 1, wherein the passageway is disposedentirely within the valving member, and wherein the valve includes meansfor introducing fluid media, under pressure, into said chambers andpassageway.3. A valve as called for in claim 1, wherein the passageway interconnectingsaid chambers is, at all times, completely isolated from the fluidpassageways of the valve.4. A valve as called for in claim 1, wherein the passageway interconnectingsaid chambers is, at all times, in open communication with the flowpassage of the valving member.5. A valve as called for in claim 1, wherein the area of the lower end ofsaid valving member which is exposed to fluid media within saidfirst-mentioned chamber exceeds the area of the upper portion of thevalving member which is exposed to fluid media within the second chamber.6. A valve as called for in claim 1, wherein the sealing member comprises aself-lubricating, inert, polyfluoroethylene material."}
{"WKU":"039306364","Title":"Ball valves","App_Date":"1974-11-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"David Edward Pugh","Assignee":"Saunders Valve Company Limited","ICL_Class":"F16K  506","References":"2890017;3208470;3378026","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A ball valve comprising:a. a valve housing have a bore therethrough;b. a ball rotatably mounted in the bore, the ball having a flow passagetherethrough and being rotatable to open and close the valve;c. a recess in the wall of the bore, said recess having an axiallyextending surface portion; andd. a seating ring located in the recess, the seating ring being inengagement with the ball on one side thereof and having a radially outwardfacing surface, the axially extending surface portion of the recess andthe radially outwardly facing surface of the seating ring being providedwith correspondingly threaded portions so arranged that when the seatingring is in position in the recess the threaded portion of the ring haspassed through and lies wholly to one side of the threaded portion of therecess, and the recess and seating ring being so dimensioned that, in thisposition of the ring, there is radial clearance between the threadedportion of the ring and the recess.2. A ball valve according to claim 1, wherein, when the ring is positionedin the recess, there is radial clearance between the threaded portion ofthe recess and the ring.3. A ball valve according to claim 1 wherein, when the ring is in positionin the recess, there is axial clearance between the threaded portion ofthe ring and the threaded portion of the recess.4. A ball valve according to claim 1 wherein a spring is provided to biasthe seating ring towards the ball.5. A ball valve according to claim 4, wherein said spring is an elastomericspring.6. A ball valve according to claim 5, wherein said elastomeric springcomprises an O-ring seal located between the end of the seating ringremote from the ball and a wall of the recess.7. A ball valve according to claim 1 wherein the sealing ring is made froma plastics material.8. A ball valve according to claim 7, wherein the plastics material ispolytetrafluoroethylene."}
{"WKU":"039306372","Title":"Fence and fence post assembly","App_Date":"1974-04-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Delbert A. Davis","Assignee":"Burlington Industries, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B21F 2700","References":"2064165;3464479;3537688","Claims":"What I claim is:1. A fence post assembly comprising a post adapted to be installed in theground, a section of double-faced pressure sensitive tape for affixing toat least a portion of said post for holding fabric fencing thereto, andholding means for securing fencing to said tape against said post, wherebyfencing can be easily aligned with said post and securely attached theretowithout wearing at the points of engagement with said holding means.2. A fence post assembly as recited in claim 1 wherein said post has acurved surface on at least a portion of the outside surface area thereofand wherein said holding means includes an elongated holding member havinga curved inside surface of substantially the same curvature as said curvedsurface of said post.3. A fence post assembly as recited in claim 2 wherein said holding meansfurther includes a bolt insertable through a hole in said member and saidpost, and a nut, said nut and bolt securing said member to said post.4. A fence post assembly as recited in claim 2 wherein said holding meanscovers substantially one-third the circumference of said post.5. A fence post assembly as recited in claim 1 wherein said post iscomposed of plastic.6. A fence post assembly as recited in claim 5 wherein said plastic isrelatively flexible, being rigid enough to withstand winds and supportfencing but bending while not breaking upon collision with an object orperson.7. A fence post assembly as recited in claim 1 wherein said post is a pipeof generally circular cross-section.8. A fence post assembly as recited in claim 1 wherein said tape extendssubstantially the whole length of said post above the ground.9. A fence post assembly as recited in claim 8 wherein said tape has awidth substantially one-third the circumference of said post.10. A fence post assembly as recited in claim 1 wherein said holding meansincludes an elongated holding member having an inside surface conformingsubstantially to the outside surface of said post.11. A fence assembly comprising a fence post adapted to be installed in theground, a section of double-faced pressure sensitive tape affixed to atleast a portion of said post, fabric fencing affixed to said post by saidtape, and holding means for holding said fabric fencing against said tape.12. A fence assembly as recited in claim 11 wherein said fabric fencing iswoven from strands of tough synthetic plastic material.13. A fence assembly as recited in claim 12 wherein said fabric haslaterally-spaced longitudinal bands of relatively tightly woven wrap andfilling strands separated by relatively open longitudinal bands containingonly filling strands.14. A fence assembly as recited in claim 13 wherein said fabric has arelatively thin elastomeric weather-resistant coating substantially evenlyadhered to the surface of each strand, the relative thickness of saidcoating being no greater than the diameter of each of said strands.15. A fence assembly as recited in claim 11 wherein said post is a plasticpipe of substantially circular cross-section.16. A fence assembly as recited in claim 15 wherein said holding meansincludes an elongated holding member having a curved inside surface ofsubstantially the same curvature as said post.17. A fence assembly as recited in claim 16 wherein said holding membercovers substantially one-third the circumference of said post.18. A fence assembly as recited in claim 17 wherein said tape coverssubstantially the same circumference of said post as said holding member.19. A fence assembly as recited in claim 16 wherein said holding meansfurther includes a bolt insertable through a hole in said holding memberand said post, and a nut, said nut and bolt securing said holding memberto said post.20. A fence assembly as recited in claim 11 wherein said tape extendssubstantially the whole length of said post above the ground, and whereinsaid tape has a width substantially one-third the circumference of saidpipe.21. A fence assembly as recited in claim 11 wherein said holding meansincludes an elongated holding member having an inside surface conformingsubstantially to the outside surface of said post.22. A fence post assembly comprising a post adapted to be installed in theground, holding means for securing fabric fencing to said post, and asection of double-faced pressure sensitive tape for affixing to at least aportion of said holding means for holding fabric fencing thereto, wherebyfencing can be securely attached to said post without wearing at thepoints of engagement with said post and said holding means."}
{"WKU":"039306380","Title":"Hand rail","App_Date":"1974-09-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Cleon L. Ehlinger;Theodore D. Kipper","Assignee":"Vanguard Countertops, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B21F 2700","References":"1954242;2362904;3274744;3748009","Claims":"We claim:1. A hand rail for attachment to a vertically disposed planar support wall,said hand rail comprising:an elongated support means adapted to be secured to the support wall andhaving a top portion, a bottom portion and an outer end portion spacedfrom the support member,an elongated rail member secured to the outer end portion of said supportmeans and having an inwardly extending upper end portion spaced above theupper end of said support means,said support means comprising first and second elongated flat membersjoined together and having upper surfaces which combine to form anelongated upwardly presented surface extending along substantially theentire length of said rail member to prevent a person s hand from beingcaught  between said support wall and said rail member;securing means for operatively securing said first member to said supportwall;said first member having in cross section two vertical surfacesinterconnected by an upwardly presented beveled surface extendingdownwardly and towards said support wall;said second member carrying said rail member and having in cross sectiontwo vertical surfaces interconnected by a downwardly presented beveledsurface extending upwardly and away from said support wall,said vertical and beveled surfaces of said first and second members beingmatingly joined whereby said mating beveled surfaces support said secondmember on said first member and urge said second member towards saidsupport wall;all of said vertical and beveled surfaces extending along the length ofsaid rail so as to provide continuous support thereof and so as to closethe space between said rail and said support wall; andan adhesive joining said mated surfaces of said first and second members.2. A rail according to claim 1 wherein said rail member is comprised of aparticle board material and a laminate material is secured to saidparticle board material of said rail member.3. The hand rail of claim 1 wherein said laminate material is a plasticlaminate material.4. The hand rail of claim 3 wherein said plastic laminate material is ahigh pressure plastic laminate.5. The hand rail of claim 4 wherein said plastic laminate material isselected from a group consisting of MICARTA, FORMICA and TEXTOLITE.6. The hand rail of claim 3 wherein said rail member is comprised of layersof particle board material secured together in a laminated manner.7. The hand rail of claim 6 wherein said support means is comprised oflayers of particle board material secured together in a laminated manner."}
{"WKU":"039306399","Title":"Pumpable rockbolt method","App_Date":"1974-09-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Meyer Steinberg;Bernard Manowitz;Charles H. Waide","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the United States Energy","ICL_Class":"B01F 1502","References":"2930199;3108442;3332244;3541797;3790030","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Apparatus for providing a rockbolt in an upwardly extending bore hole ina rock face, comprising:a. first supply means for a pumpable stable first composition which is thefirst of a two component ambient temperature curable resin system;b. second supply means for a pumpable stable second composition which isthe second of the two component ambient temperature curable resin system;c. mixing means for receiving the first and second compositions for formingan intimate mixture thereof;d. means for simultaneously pumping the components from said first andsecond supply means in preselected proportion to said mixing means; ande. bolting head assembly means for receiving said mixture from said mixingmeans and communicating with the inlet of said bore hole to deliver saidmixture into said hole, said assembly means having a well forcommunicating with said hole during delivery of said mixture into saidhole and during polymerization of said mixture, said well having means toprevent adherence of the polymerized mixture to said assembly means,thereby permitting removal of said assembly means from said rock face.2. The apparatus of claim 1 having means to purge from said apparatus anymixture of said compositions remaining outside of said well after pumpinginto said hole is complete.3. The apparatus of claim 2 having means to supply resilient long strandedmaterial to said hole during pumping to provide additional strength tosaid rockbolt.4. The apparatus of claim 1 having means to supply to said hole duringpumping a venting tube to release dropped gases in said hole and to remainduring polymerization to provide additional strength to said rockbolt."}
{"WKU":"039306402","Title":"Method of preparing moldable plastic and additive agents","App_Date":"1974-12-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jack W. Kuehn","Assignee":"Tote Bulk Handling, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B29B  104","References":"2464746;2904827;2918701;3509247","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. The method of preparing a mixture of moldable plastic and an additiveamount of additive material to be dispersed throughout the moldableplastic, which mixture is intended for subsequent use in a plastic moldingprocess, which method includes the steps of:a. obtaining small, additive-poor pellets comprising a first moldableplastic composition, said pellets having a first shape;b. obtaining small, additive concentrate pellets comprising a secondmoldable plastic composition, said second moldable plastic compositionbeing rich in an additive material, at least as compared to said firstmoldable plastic composition, said pellets having a second shape which isreadily classifiably different from said first shape; andc. intentionally mixing plastic pellets of said first shape with a minoramount of pellets of said second shape, for purposes of obtaining amixture which can be subsequently separated such that said additivepoorpellets are separated from said additive-concentrate pellets, the amountof pellets of said second shape being sufficient to impart a desiredadditive characteristic to the mixture of pellets, when the pellets havebeen fused and molded.2. The method of claim 1 in which the pellets of steps (a) and (b) are ofapproximately equal length and of approximately equal cross-sectionalarea.3. The method of claim 1 in which the densities of the pellets of steps (a)and (b) are different.4. The method of claim 1 in which the pellets of step (a) are cylindricaland are substantially free of coloring agent.5. The method of claim 4 in which the pellets of step (b) are fluted and inwhich the lengths and cross-sectional areas of the pellets of steps (a)and (b) are approximately equal.6. The method of claim 5 in which the plastic is polyethylene."}
{"WKU":"039306410","Title":"Furnace hood structure","App_Date":"1974-09-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert C. Overmyer;Billy M. Brumett","Assignee":"Hawley Manufacturing Corporation","ICL_Class":"C21C  538","References":"3756582","Claims":"We claim:1. In a combination of a furnace which is provided with an upwardly openingmouth, a lid for said mouth and means supporting said lid to swing about asubstantially vertical axis outside the boundary of said mouth between aposition in registry with said mouth and a position laterally removed fromsuch registry, a hood associated with said furnace and enclosing saidmouth, said hood having a ceiling disposed above the uppermost position ofsaid lid and said ceiling being formed with a port registering with saidfurnace mouth, and a cover for said port, the improvement in which saidmeans for supporting said lid includes a generally vertically upwardlyextending post upon which said lid is mounted, said post defining saidaxis, and said cover being mounted upon said post for upward movement assaid post is projected axially upwardly and for swinging movement aboutsaid axis with said post and said lid, said cover being supported by saidpost when said post is projected axially upwardly.2. The improvement of claim 1 in which said ceiling is provided with anaperture spaced apart from said port and in vertical registry with saidpost, said post having an upper portion extending upwardly through saidaperture, said cover being connected to said upper portion.3. The improvement of claim 1 in which said post provides an upper portionextending upwardly through an aperture in said ceiling, and rigid supportarms extending radially outwardly from said upper portion and above saidceiling, said cover being rigidly attached to said support arms formovement therewith.4. The invention of claim 3 in which said post upper portion is removablyfastened to the portion of said post upon which said lid is mounted suchthat said hood and cover and post upper portion can be removed from saidfurnace as an assembly.5. The invention of claim 2 in which said post upper portion is removablyfastened to the portion of said post upon which said lid is mounted suchthat said hood and cover and post upper portion can be removed from saidfurnace as an assembly."}
{"WKU":"039306429","Title":"Drum-type machine for agglomeration of ores and concentrates under","App_Date":"1974-12-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Evgeny Felixovich Vegman;Boris Nikolaevich Zherebin;Sergei Evgenievich Lazutkin;Nikolai Fomich Pashkov;Anatoly Nikolaevich Pyrikov;Anatoly Nikolaevich Pokhvisnev;Julian Semenovich Jusfin;Anatoly Vasilievich Zherdev;Valentin Vasilievich Korobov;Vitaly Ivanovich Krivonosov;Ivan Mitrofanovich Mischenko","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F27B 2106","References":"916394;2123593;2933306","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A drum-type maching for agglomeration of ores and concentrates underpressure comprising: a drum mounted for rotation; a sintering grate on theperipheral surface of said drum; a tightly sealed casing communicatingwith a compressed air source, said drum being mounted within said casing;hollow journals mounting said drum and also serving for removing exhaustgases; hoppers with seal valves communicating with the top portion of saidcasing, said hoppers serving for loading said sintering grate with a bedand charge and defining the loading zone of said drum; a hearth forignition and sintering of the charge into finished agglomerate mountedwithin said casing coaxially with said drum and defining the zone ofignition and sintering of the charge; means for discharging finishedagglomerate from said sintering grate, said means being disposed betweensaid loading zone and said zone of ignition and sintering, said meansdefining the unloading zone of said drum; a hopper with seal valvescommunicating with the bottom portion of said casing and serving fordischarging finished agglomerate; said means for discharging finishedagglomerate from the sintering grate comprising a box-shaped housinghaving the form of a sector in the cross-section, said housing beingstationary mounted within said drum coaxially therewith and open on theside facing said sintering grate; fixed air conduits disposed coaxiallywithin said hollow journals and serving for supplying into the box of saidhousing compressed air under a pressure substantially exceeding thepressure in said casing around the drum, whereby finished agglomerate,which is fed during the rotation of said drum into the unloading zone, isdischarged from the sintering grate under its own weight and under theaction of compressed air supplied from beneath said grate through the boxof said housing."}
{"WKU":"039306437","Title":"Roll-over fixture","App_Date":"1974-07-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Stanley H. Moore","Assignee":"Wescan Mining Trucks & Equipment Ltd.","ICL_Class":"B23Q  104;B25B  122","References":"2166410;2224958;3155219;3190463;3236535;3669409;3710955","Claims":"What I claim as my invention is:1. A workholder comprising a primary supporting structure; workholdingmeans mounted for rotation in said structure about a fixed axis ofrotation; a control system comprising sensing means sensitive to out ofbalance forces within said workholder, said forces being caused by therotation of a workpiece when held by said workholding means and horizontalmovement of the center of gravity of said workpiece relative to said axisof rotation, said sensing means providing an output signal indicative ofsaid forces, and adjusting means responsive to said output signal toeffect positional adjustment of said workholding means on said structurerelative to said axis of rotation, said positional adjustment tending todecrease and remove said out of balance forces.2. A workholder according to claim 1 wherein said workholding meanscomprises a pair of workholding elements providing a work-receiving areatherebetween, each element comprising a first part mounted for rotation ona shaft journaled in said structure and a second part attachable to saidworkpiece, rotatable with said first part, and slidable in said firstpart, sliding movement of said second part within the first part beingcontrolled by said adjusting means responsive to said output signal.3. A workholder according to claim 2 wherein each second part is attachableto a circular frame formed integrally on and surrounding said workpiece,said circular frame being located adjacent the side of each first partwhich is opposite the respective shaft of the first part when saidcircular frame is attached.4. A workholder according to claim 1 wherein said adjusting means includeshydraulic motor means and hydraulic fluid valve means and said sensingmeans includes pressure sensitive switching means which actuate whenhydraulic pressure in a portion of said control system exceeds apredetermined level.5. A workholder according to claim 4 wherein said pressure sensitiveswitching means includes two pressure sensitive switches, said workholderincludes a hydraulic motor to rotate said workholding means, and operatedby hydraulic fluid entering and leaving said motor by two hydraulic fluidlines, one of said switches sensing the pressure in one of said fluidlines and the other of said switches sensing the pressure in the other ofsaid fluid lines.6. A workholder according to claim 5 wherein said adjusting means includesan attitude sensing device, said device being mounted on said workholdingmeans and adapted to sense the attitude of said workholding means and totransmit the output signal accordingly to the remainder of said adjustingmeans.7. A workholder according to claim 6 wherein said attitude sensing meanshas two sensing parts, one of said sensing parts being connected in seriesto said one of said switches and to said hydraulic fluid valve means andthe other of said sensing parts being connected in series to said other ofsaid switches and to said hydraulic fluid valve means.8. A workholder according to claim 7 wherein each sensing part of saidattitude sensing means is a single-pole, double throw mercury tilt switchmounted with its longitudinal axis perpendicular to a center line of theworkholding means, said center line passing generally through said axis ofrotation and being parallel to the direction of said sliding movement ofsaid second part.9. A workholder according to claim 1 wherein said adjusting means includesan attitude sensing device, said device being mounted on said workholdingmeans and adapted to sense the attitude of said workholding means and totransmit the output signal accordingly to the remainder of said adjustingmeans.10. A workholder according to claim 1 wherein said adjusting means includesan attitude sensing device, said device being mounted on said workholdingmeans and adapted to sense the attitude of said workholding means and totransmit the output signal to the remainder of said adjusting meansaccording to said attitude, said remainder including motor means to moveat least a portion of said workholding means to effect said positionaladjustment in response to said output signal.11. A workholder according to claim 10 wherein said adjusting meansincludes a three position hydraulic valve, said motor means is hydraulicand is operated by said three position hydraulic valve, and said hydraulicvalve is connected to said attitude sensing device to receive and to beactuated by said output signal therefrom according to the attitude of saidworkholding means.12. A workholder according to claim 11 wherein said sensing means includespressure sensitive switching means which actuate when hydraulic pressurein a portion of said control system exceeds a predetermined level.13. A workholder according to claim 12 wherein said pressure sensitiveswitching means includes two pressure sensitive switches, said workholderincludes a hydraulic motor to rotate said workholding means and operatedby hydraulic fluid entering and leaving said motor by two hydraulic fluidlines, one of said switches sensing the pressure in one of said fluidlines and the other of said switches sensing the pressure in the other ofsaid fluid lines.14. A workholder according to claim 13 wherein said attitude sensing meanshas two sensing parts, one of said sensing parts being connected in seriesto said one of said switches and to said hydraulic valve, the other ofsaid sensing parts being connected in series to said other of saidswitches and to said hydraulic valve.15. A workholder according to claim 14 wherein each sensing part of saidattitude sensing means is a single-pole, double throw mercury tilt switchmounted with its longitudinal axis perpendicular to a centre line of theworkholding means, said centre line passing generally through said axis ofrotation.16. A workholder according to claim 15 wherein the first position of saidthree position hydraulic valve causes said motor means to adjust theposition of said workholding means in one direction, the second positionthereof hydraulically locks said motor means and the third positionthereof causes said motor means to adjust the position of said workholdingmeans in a direction opposite to said one direction, and wherein each endof each tilt switch is connected to a solenoid which moves said hydraulicvalve to one of said first and third positions whereby when each tiltswitch is tilted downwards towards one end of the tilt switch saidhydraulic valve is moved to said first position and, when each tilt switchis tilted downwards towards the end opposite said one end, said hydraulicvalve is moved to said third position.17. A workholder according to claim 16 wherein said workholding meanscomprises a pair of workholding elements providing a work-receiving areatherebetween, each element comprising a first part mounted for rotation ona shaft journaled in said structure and a second part attachable to saidworkpiece, rotatable with said first part, and slidable in said firstpart, sliding movement of said second part within the first part beingcontrolled by said adjusting means responsive to said output signal.18. A workholder according to claim 17 whrein said motor means includes twohydraulic motors each mounted to one of said first parts and adapted toslide the respective second part in said one first part.19. A workholder according to claim 6 wherein said hydraulic motor isoperated by a three position main hydraulic valve connected to saidhydraulic motor via said two fluid lines, a safety valve is interposedalong each fluid line to prevent overspeed of said hydraulic motor, andthe pressure sensitive switch in each line is interposed between thehydraulic motor and the safety valve of the respective line.20. A workholder according to claim 2 including brake means for selectivelypreventing rotation of said workholding means and said workpiece relativeto said structure when desired."}
{"WKU":"039306445","Title":"Printed circuit board carrier","App_Date":"1974-12-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Eugene V. Albert, Jr.","Assignee":"Q Corporation","ICL_Class":"B25B  502;B25B  514","References":"3577682;3600746;3662456;3680762;3775644;3848864","Claims":"What I claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent is :1. A printed circuit board carrier comprising:a. a frame having a longitudinal beam and laterally extending leading andtrailing elongated end members, said frame including connector membersadjustably receiving said beam and end members to secure same relative toeach other;b. support means mounted on said end members and adapted to engage aconveyor for movement of said frame thereby;c. carrier side members each having a plurality of block members connectedtogether in longitudinal alignment and defining a length greater than acircuit board to be carried, certain of said block members receiving saidend members for support thereon, said block members each havinglongitudinally extending grooves forming a lower ledge for receiving andsupporting a circuit board side edge;d. means securing said certain blocks of said side members to said endmembers thereby positioning said side members in selected laterally spacedrelation for the grooves therein to slidably receive and support thecircuit board side edges;e. a first carrier end member adjustably mounted on said beam adjacent oneend member; andf. a second carrier end member movably mounted on said beam, said first andsecond carrier end members having grooves to receive and support leadingand trailing edges of the circuit board in gripping engagement in responseto movement of said second carrier end member toward said first carrierend member.2. A printed circuit board carrier as set forth in Claim 1 wherein saidsupport means includes:a. an elongated member for and rotatably mounted on each end of each ofsaid end members;b. a pin for and extending from one side of each of said elongated membersand adapted to be received in respective portions of a conveyor;c. a leg for and extending from one end of each of said elongated membersand adapted to engage a support surface; andd. means for and defining a recess in the other end of each of saidelongated members and adapted to receive a respective leg therein wherebythe carrier is stackable with like carriers.3. A printed circuit board carrier as set forth in Claim 1 wherein:a. said frame end members are each elongated bars having a non-round crosssection;b. said carrier side members each include:"}
{"WKU":"039306453","Title":"Ceiling article support device","App_Date":"1974-11-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Raymond Anderson","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B25J  300","References":"885251;2164609;2858094;2907598;3131928","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A ceiling article support device comprising in combination:a base having a receiving boss for receiving and retaining a first verticalsupport member;a second vertical support member receiving and connected with said firstvertical support member;a plurality of vertical support members one of which receives andinterconnects with said second vertical support members and each of whichis slideably interconnectable one to another;a ceiling article support member supported by and fastened to one of saidplurality of vertical support members;an adjusting flange plate connected to said second vertical support memberand having a hole providing friction-maintained relative vertical positionof said first vertical support member with respect to said second verticalsupport member;an adjusting mechanism including a first adjusting handle attached to thevertical support member that has the ceiling article support memberattached thereto;a second adjusting handle pivotally attached to said second verticalsupport member;a first adjusting rod member interconnected between said first adjustinghandle and said adjusting flange plate;a second rod member interconnected between said second adjusting handle andsaid flange plate;a tension spring coaxially mounted around said second rod member betweensaid second adjusting handle and said adjusting flange plate, so as tobias said adjusting flange plate against said first vertical supportmember, thereby maintaining adjustable frictional contact of the flangeplate against the first vertical support member.2. A ceiling article support device as recited in claim 1 wherein saidfirst vertical support member terminates in a spring-retaining plug andfits into a tube having a load adjustment spring.3. The article of claim 2 wherein said slideably interconnectable verticalsupport members are tubes having slide fittings.4. A ceiling article support device as recited in claim 1 wherein saidadjusting flange plate has a hole, said hole having sharp edges.5. The device of claim 1 wherein said first adjusting rod member comprisesa plurality of intermediate interconnectable rods."}
{"WKU":"039306461","Title":"Tennis novelty","App_Date":"1974-12-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Marshall A. Widman","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A63G 3100;A63F  706","References":"1853620;2167847","Claims":"Having thus described the invention, what is claimed as new and desired tobe secured by Letters Patent is:1. Game novelty apparatus comprising:structure provided with a miniature playing surface having means thereonwhich causes the surface to simulate the court or field on which a game isplayed;a miniature net secured to said structure and extending across said surfacethereabove;a pair of hitting elements on said surface simulating players of said game,one on each side of said net;a wire-like member secured at each end to said structure and extendingabove said surface over said net to simulate the path of a projectile usedto play said game;a component slidable on said member and representing said projectile;means mounting each element for movement in a direction causing thecomponent to be struck by the element and propelled along the member awayfrom a position of the component on the member adjacent the element; anddrive means coupled with said elements for automatically alternatelyactuating the latter to cause the component to be propelled back and forthover the net, whereby to simulate the action in said game.2. The apparatus as claimed in claim 1, wherein said member has a pair ofopposed ends fixed to said structure behind the respective elements.3. The apparatus as claimed in claim 1, wherein said component has anopening therethrough receiving said member for free sliding movement ofthe component therealong.4. The apparatus as claimed in claim 1, wherein said component is a beadthreaded on said member.5. The apparatus as claimed in claim 1, further comprising a stop on saidmember adjacent each of said elements respectively and defining saidposition of the component adjacent the corresponding element.6. The apparatus as claimed in claim 5, wherein said component has anopening therethrough receiving said member for free sliding movement ofthe component therealong, said member having a pair of opposed ends fixedto said structure behind the respective elements, and wherein said stopscomprise a pair of sleeves on said ends of the member of greater diameterthan said opening.7. The apparatus as claimed in claim 1, wherein said mounting meanssupports each element for oscillation about an upright axis, and whereinsaid drive means includes a pair of cam followers connected withrespective elements, a rotatable cam engageable with said followers, drivespring means coupled with each of said elements, and means for rotatingsaid cam to alternately swing each element against the action of its saidspring means and release the element upon disengagement of the cam withthe associated follower for return movement of the element in saiddirection under the action of its spring means."}
{"WKU":"039306470","Title":"Skating rink assembled from a kit","App_Date":"1974-10-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ray Berlemont","Assignee":"The Raymond Lee Organization, Inc.","ICL_Class":"A63C 1910","References":"2616096;2730150;2797896;2907362;2989757;2996896;3012596;3233251;3797049;3808831","Claims":"I claim:1. A skating rink assembled from a kit and comprising:an annular floor disposable on the ground and having its outer edge bentvertically upward to form a circular wall, said floor including aplurality of like flexible plastic sheets taking on the shapes ofrectangles disposed side by side to form an annulus and a like pluralityof elongated rectangular plastic straps, each strap overlying the boundarybetween two adjoining ones of said sheets;a circumferential vertical ring surrounding the floor and abutting theoutside of said circular wall; andfasteners for securing the ring and wall to the ground.2. The rink of claim 1 wherein said ring is a corrugated metal band.3. The rink of claim 2 further including tacks extending through saidstraps adapted to extend into the ground.4. The rink of claim 3 wherein said fasteners are elongated clips whichhave sharp tips at their lower extremities and have U-shaped bends attheir upper extremities, said sharp tips adapted to extend into theground, said bends extending over the top of the band and the top of thecircular wall and squeezing the floor and band together."}
{"WKU":"039306488","Title":"Game racket and stringing means therefor","App_Date":"1974-09-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Thomas E. Brown","Assignee":"A-T-O Inc.","ICL_Class":"A63B 5100","References":"1930285;1937787;2171223;3625512;3642283;3647211;3664669","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A racket comprising a metal frame head, said head having an externalperipheral dove tail shaped groove and holes for passage of stringsextending from the base of the groove to the inside of the head, thegroove having a relatively narrow entrance at the outside of the headtapering to a relatively wider section inward of the entrance adjacentsaid base, said groove having imperforate side walls, and a stringer stripreceived in the groove, said strip having a body which, throughout thelength of the strip, is narrower than said entrance of the groove forbeing inserted in the groove through said entrance without any substantiallateral compression of said body, said strip having tubular string guidesprojecting from the inside surface of the body thereof and extendingthrough the holes in the head, said strip further having a plurality oftabs spaced at intervals along its length projecting laterally outwardlyfrom opposite sides of said body adjacent the inside surface of said body,said tabs being thin relative to the height of said body and flexible soas to be foldable upwardly on the sides of said body upon insertion ofsaid strip in said groove through said entrance, each of said tabs havingthickened projections formed on the outside upper surfaces of said tabs,said projections being elongated in the lengthwise direction of said stripand being spaced laterally from the sides of said body slightly less thanthe height of said body sides above the upper surfaces of said tabs, saidprojections being so formed that when the tabs are folded upwardly saidprojections will overlie said top of the strip thereby allowing the widthdimensions of said strip to conform to said entrance width of said groove,and upon complete insertion of said strip in said groove said projectionswill abut the sides of said body and a substantial portion of said sidewalls of said groove below the entrance of said groove to establish awidth dimension greater than said entrance width to retain said strip insaid groove.2. A racket as set forth in claim 1 wherein the upper surface of said stripis formed with a series of undulating arcuate pads for engagement by thestrings between adjacent pairs of said tubular guides, said tabs beinglocated at regions between pads so that said thickened portions of thetabs overlie the top of the strip between pads."}
{"WKU":"039306496","Title":"Tethered ball and elliptical target","App_Date":"1974-05-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Harold E. Yackel, Jr.","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A63B 7102","References":"3656747;3770273;3773330","Claims":"What I now claim is:1. A cradle ball device, comprising a rectangular flat base, a pair ofspaced apart and inverted V-frames secured upon said base, a string andball carried by each said frame, and a ball rest and support membercarried by said base, leg portions of said frames being secured withinblock members, said block members being fixedly secured to a longitudinaledge of said base, each said ball being secured fixedly to one end of eachsaid string, the opposite ends of said strings being fixedly secured anddepending from apexes of said frames, each said ball when verticallydepending on the said string being spaced just above said base for freedomof swing, said ball rest being centrally positioned between said framesand being elliptical in configuration with a long axis thereof beingalined to intercept said strings of said frames when said balls dependvertically, each said ball rest when viewed from a side being downwardlyarcuate at its center and opposite extending ends thereof being upwardlyturned, the ball rest being secured upon said support member by beingmounted upon leg portions thereof which converge downwardly toward an apexmounted upon a center of said base, said ball rest providing a rest meansfor both said balls."}
{"WKU":"039306500","Title":"Throwing device","App_Date":"1974-12-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William Watson","Assignee":"Molded Foam Industries, Inc.","ICL_Class":"A63B 6500","References":"334848;890920;1539977;3359678;3613295;3673732;3675926;3712627;3758985;3761087;3852910","Claims":"I claim:1. A throwing device composed of a resilient foam material and having anouter surface comprised of a major and minor sub-surface, each of saidsub-surfaces being symmetrical about a common axis of symmetry and beingconvex relative to a plane which is perpendicular to said common axis andbetween said sub-surfaces, said major and minor sub-surfaces each havingan extremal point along said common axis, said major sub-surface extremalpoint being farther from said plane than said minor sub-surface extremalpoint, and wherein said major sub-surface is a segment of a substantiallyspherical surface2. A throwing device according to claim 1 wherein said minor sub-surface isa segment of a substantially spherical surface, said spherical surfaceshaving differing radii of curvature.3. A throwing device according to claim 2 wherein the solid anglecircumscribed by the smaller radius sub-surface about its center ofcurvature exceeds the solid angle circumscribed by the larger radiussub-surface about its center of curvature.4. A throwing device according to claim 3 wherein the centers of curvatureof both of said spherical surfaces lie within the interior region of atleast one of said spherical surfaces.5. A throwing device according to claim 4 wherein one of said surfaces hasradius of curvature in the range 2-6 inches and the other has radius ofcurvature in the range 3-12 inches.6. A throwing device according to claim 5 wherein said segments aremutually joined by a smooth surface, said smooth surface being symmetricalabout said common axis.7. A throwing device according to claim 4 wherein the ratio of said radiiof curvature is in the range 1/1.25 to 1/4.0.8. A throwing device according to claim 7 wherein said segments aremutually joined by a smooth surface, said smooth surface being symmetricalabout said common axis.9. A throwing device according to claim 2 wherein one of said surfaces hasradius of curvature in the range 2-6 inches and the other has radius ofcurvature in the range 3-12 inches.10. A throwing device according to claim 2 wherein the ratio of said radiiof curvature is in the range 1/1.25 to 1/4.0.11. A throwing device according to claim 2 wherein said segments aremutually joined by a smooth surface, said smooth surface being symmetricalabout said common axis.12. A throwing device according to claim 1 wherein said outer surface issmooth and non-porous.13. A throwing device according to claim 1 wherein said resilient foammaterial is urethane."}
{"WKU":"039306518","Title":"Three dimensional word game","App_Date":"1974-08-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James Eads Rader","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A63F  300","References":"487063;2886325;3427028;3771795","Claims":"What is claimed as new and desired to be secured by Letters Patent of theUnited States is:1. Word game apparatus comprising, in combination:a three-dimensional cube including means located on each of the six facesthereof forming at least 26 defined locations for receiving letter pieces,26 cubical letter pieces each of which has a unique letter of the Englishalphabet associated therewith and inscribed on each of the six facesthereof, said letter pieces interacting with said cube such that saidletter pieces may be placed at said defined locations on saidthree-dimensional cube, and words may be spelled out by tracing a paththrough consecutively adjacent letter pieces on said three-dimensionalcube.2. Apparatus according to claim 1 in which said cube comprises a3.times.3.times.3 cube, whereby the number of said letter-receivinglocations on the surface of said cube is the same as the number of lettersin the English alphabet.3. Apparatus according to claim 3 wherein said cube is formed by threeintersecting pairs of parallel walls, said walls defining a cubicaloutline and twenty-six cubical recesses for receiving letter pieces.4. Apparatus according to claim 3 further comprising a stand having a pairof arms for holding said cube and allowing it to be rotated about an axissaid arms each comprising a U-shaped member the ends of which areconnected to one of said pairs of parallel walls, each of said arms beingconnected to the same pair of parallel walls but disposed 180.degree.apart from one another.5. Apparatus according to claim 3, wherein each of said letter pieces iscolored in two colors, three mutually orthogonal and contacting faces ofeach cubical piece being in one color, the remaining three mutuallyorthogonal and contacting faces being in the other of said two colors."}
{"WKU":"039306526","Title":"Portable lawn playing checker apparatus","App_Date":"1974-09-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Leo Lapolice","Assignee":"Lawrence Peska Associates, Inc.","ICL_Class":"A63F  302","References":"16116;621799;877814;1254380;1430778;1623881;2548606;2946592","Claims":"Having thus described the invention, what is claimed as new is:1. A portable lawn playing checker apparatus comprised of:a. a rectangular base board having a first face and a second face whoselength is about 5 feet 5 inches and whose width is about 4 feet 2 inches;b. a plurality of rectangles inscribed upon the first face;c. a plurality of movable rings which can fit within the rectangles;d. a first holding means and a second holding means attached to the firstface of the rectangular base board on opposite ends of the base board forholding the plurality of movable rings when a game is being played;e. a first storage means and a second storage means attached to the secondface of the rectangular base board on opposite ends of the base board andjuxtaposed below the first holding means and the second holding means, forstoring the plurality of movable rings when the portable lawn playingchecker apparatus is being stored;f. a foldong means between the first storage means and the second storagemeans for folding the rectangular baseboard in half for storage andg. a means for moving the movable rings from rectangle to rectangle.2. The portable lawn playing checker apparatus of claim 1, wherein theplurality of rectangles are alternately colored with two colors.3. The portable lawn playing checker apparatus of claim 1, wherein theplurality of rectangles are comprised of a grid eight rectangles by eightrectangles.4. The portable lawn playing checker apparatus of claim 1, wherein theplurality of movable rings are of two colors.5. The portable lawn playing checker apparatus of claim 1, wherein thereare 16 movable rings.6. The portable lawn playing checker apparatus of claim 1, wherein thestorage means and the holding means are shelves of sufficient size tostore 16 movable rings.7. The portable lawn playing checker apparatus of claim 1, wherein thefolding means is a plurality of hinges.8. The portable lawn playing checker apparatus of claim 1, wherein themeans for moving the movable ring is comprised of:a reaching member; anda hook on one end of the reaching member."}
{"WKU":"039306534","Title":"Lid latch mechanism for a disc record player","App_Date":"1975-01-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Larry Dean Huff","Assignee":"RCA Corporation","ICL_Class":"G11B  100","References":"3716240;3842194;3886592","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a playback system for recovering prerecorded signals by a signalpickup from a disc record rotatably mounted on a turntable, the playbacksystem including a lid pivoted on a base for movement between a closedposition and an open position, and a signal pickup carriage reciprocablymounted on the base for travel between a standby mode and a playback mode,a lid latch mechanism comprising:1. a lid release button mounted on the base;2. lid latch means selectively responsive to operation of the releasebutton for releasably securing the lid, wherein the latch means comprises:"}
{"WKU":"039306542","Title":"Sound track unit for audio-visual apparatus","App_Date":"1973-12-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jiri M. Nessel","Assignee":"Victor Richards","ICL_Class":"G11B 2504","References":"3062552;3416150;3593327;3706857;3818986;3829207","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A sound track unit for audio apparatus comprising:a. two centrally apertured circular disc-like members having soundrecordings inscribed on the flat surfaces thereof;b. a hollow housing enclosing both of said two disc-like members;c. means mounting said disc-like members within said housing for rotationabout their respective axes, said axes of said disc-like members beingparallel to and spaced from each other with said disc-like membersoverlapping each other in planes spaced axially thereof, said mountingmeans including thrust bearings preventing movement of said disc-likemembers along said axes thereof while permitting rotation of saiddisc-like members in their respective planes as well as limited movementof said axes thereof toward and away from each other; andd. means for rotating said disc-like members including a pair of hollowcylindrical drive members each extending through the central aperture of adifferent one of said two disc-like members and mechanically connectedthereto in coaxial alignment therewith, the internal surface of each ofsaid hollow cylindrical drive members defining a pair of truncated rightcircular cones having their truncated apexes joined and their bases atopposite ends of said drive members, and four apertures through saidhousing each of said apertures surrounding a different end of a differentone of said pair of hollow cylindrical drive members throughout saidlimited movement of said axes of said disc-like members toward and awayfrom each other.2. A sound track unit for audio apparatus as claimed in claim 1 wherein astrip of material providing low surface friction is interposed between theoverlapping surfaces of said two disc-like members.3. A sound track unit for audio apparatus as claimed in claim 1 whereinpads made of a fluorocarbon resin providing low surface friction aremounted on interior surfaces of said housing adjacent non-overlappingsurfaces of said two disc-like members.4. A sound track unit for audio apparatus as claimed in claim 1 whereineach of said pair of hollow cylindrical drive members includes a circularflange projecting from its exterior surface centrally thereof and saidthrust bearings comprise ball bearing structures on opposite sides of eachof said circular flanges.5. A sound track unit for audio apparatus as claimed in claim 1 whereinsaid hollow housing has four elongated rectilinear slots therein eachassociated with a different side of a different one of said two disc-likemembers and extending radially thereof.6. A sound track unit for audio apparatus as claimed in claim 5 whereinsaid hollow housing comprises a rigid frame in the form of a hollowopen-ended rectangular box and a pair of flanged cover members each ofwhich is provided with two of said four apertures of said means forrotating said disc-like members and two of said four elongated rectilinearapertures, said cover members closing the open ends of the hollow boxformed by said frame with said disc-like members sandwiched therebetween."}
{"WKU":"039306550","Title":"Seals for use between two relatively-rotating surfaces","App_Date":"1974-04-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Alan Gregory Fern","Assignee":"Dowty Seals Limited","ICL_Class":"F16J 1554","References":"2958551;3504920;3515395;3523692","Claims":"I claim:1. A seal for retaining liquid between two relatively rotatable members ofwhich one member carries the seal and the other member has a cylindricalsurface engaged by the seal, comprising a sealing ring having a staticsealing portion carried by said one member and spaced from the saidsurface of the said other member, a flexible flange extending from thestatic sealing portion, generally in the direction in which the saidsurface of said other member extends and towards the liquid to be sealed,to an outer end portion of the sealing ring, two mutually-inclinedsurfaces on said outer end portion defining a circular sealing lip, and aplurality of circumferentiallyspaced projections raised on that inclinedsurface which is the closer of the two inclined surfaces to the staticsealing portion and which is remote from the liquid, each projectionhaving a surface which is generated by movement, about the central axis ofthe ring, of a line which, when the seal is carried by the first saidmember and is in its free state prior to assembly of the said othermember, is substantially parallel to the operative direction of the saidsurface of said other member and which, at one position, is contiguouswith the sealing lip and which, on opposite sides of said one position,recedes from the sealing lip in a direction toward said static sealingportion so that when said seal is in said free state said surface of saidprojection lies entirely at the same radial distance as the sealing lip oron the same side of said sealing lip as said static sealing portion, saidsurface of said projection having a substantial width at said oneposition, the sealing lip and the portion of the said surface of eachprojection which is contiguous with the sealing lip engaging the saidsurface of the said other member with an interference fit, whereby uponassembly of the sealing ring between said members, the flange is deflectedfrom its free state, about the static sealing portion, the part of thesurface of each projection in the vicinity of that part which iscontiguous with the lip consequently engaging the said surface of the saidother member over an area having opposite sides which extend away from thesealing lip and which diverge away from each other and with a pressurewhich increases as the distance from the sealing lip in a direction atright angles to the plane of the sealing lip increases.2. A seal according to claim 1, wherein the said surface of each projectionat the side of said one position not only recedes from the sealing lip butmerges circumferentially into the corresponding surface of the adjacentprojection.3. A seal according to claim 1, wherein the said surface of each projectionis convex in a direction radially inwardly of said sealing lip adjacentand on both sides of one position.4. A seal as claimed in claim 1, in which said sealing lip is on theradially innermost part of the seal.5. A seal as claimed in claim 1, in which said sealing lip is on theradially outermost part of the seal."}
{"WKU":"039306569","Title":"Sealed joint and gasket therefor","App_Date":"1974-02-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jerry G. Jelinek","Assignee":"Parker-Hannifin Corporation","ICL_Class":"B65D 5300;F16L 1902","References":"494402;3033582;3448986;3655210;3721452","Claims":"I claim:1. A gasket comprising a thin plate of rigid material having an openingtherethrough and having radially spaced first and second edges and upperand lower faces, a generally U shaped corrugation in said plate betweensaid edges and forming a recess in one face and a raised rib on the otherface, said corrugation extending continuously about said opening, a sheetof elastomeric material on said other face on each side of said rib andhaving exposed flat faces, said sheet on one side of said raised ribhaving a bead projecting above said flat face thereon to a height abovesaid other face greater than the height of said raised rib from said otherface and an elastomeric sealing element in said recess and projectingtherefrom.2. The gasket of claim 1 in which the thickness of said sheets other thanat said bead is substantially the same as the height of said rib.3. The gasket of claim 1 in which each of said sheets extends from arespective side of said rib to a respective one of said edges.4. The gasket of claim 1 in which said sheet on the other side of said ribalso has a raised bead projecting above said rib.5. The gasket of claim 1 in which said elastomeric material at one of saidedges has a raised bead extending therealong.6. The gasket of claim 1 in which said plate has another generally U shapedcorrugation therein radially spaced from and of greater height than saidfirst mentioned corrugation but of less height than said bead.7. A gasket comprising a thin plate of rigid material having a centralopening that forms an inner margin on said plate, said plate having anouter margin spaced radially outwardly of said inner margin, said platehaving a series of other openings between said margins and spaced fromeach other circumferentially about said central opening, said plate havinga generally U shaped corrugation between two of said other openings andextending in a transverse direction relative to said inner and outermargins, said corrugation forming a recess in one face of the plate and afirst raised rib on the other face, a deformable packing in said recess,elastomeric material on said other face on each side of said rib, saidmaterial having projecting therefrom inner and outer beads thatrespectively extend along radially inner and outer sides of said two otheropenings, a first raised cross bead on said material on one side of saidrib and located between said two other openings and connected to saidinner and outer beads.8. The gasket of claim 7 in which said plate has another opening radiallyoutwardly of one of said other openings, said outer bead extends aboutsaid another opening, another generally U shaped corrugation in said platebetween said another opening and said one of said other openings andforming a second raised rib on said other face, and there is a secondraised cross bead on said material between said another opening and saidone of said other openings and connected at its ends to said outer bead.9. The gasket of claim 8 in which said first and second cross beads areclosely adjacent and generally parallel to the respective one of saidfirst and second raised ribs.10. A sealed assembly comprising a first member having a opening therein,said opening being surrounded by a recess in said first member, saidrecess having a bottom wall surface and a side wall, said member having afirst face radially outwardly of said side wall, a second member having asecond surface overlying said first face and said bottom wall surface, agasket within said recess, said gasket comprising a plate of rigidmaterial that has a generally U shaped corrugation therein that surroundssaid opening and is axially between said surfaces, said corrugationforming a recess in one face of the plate and a raised rib on the otherface, a deformable packing in said recess and in sealing engagement withone of said surfaces, a first sheet of elastomeric material on said otherface on one side of said rib, a second sheet of elastomeric material onsaid other face on the the other side of said rib, said sheets being of athickness substantially the same as the height of said raised rib abovesaid other face, one of said sheets having a first bead projecting axiallytherefrom, and said second surfaces having sealed engagement with saidbead.11. The joint of claim 10 in which said first bead is radially inward ofsaid rib and the other of said sheets initially includes a second raisedbead surrounding said rib and which also has sealed engagement with saidsecond surface.12. The joint of claim 10 in which said second surface is engageable withsaid first face and when said second surface and said first face are soengaged, the axial distance from said one face of the plate to the top ofsaid rib is slightly less than the axial distance between said surfaceswhereby said plate will remain out of contact with one or the other ofsaid surfaces when said second surface engages said first face.13. A sealed joint comprising a first member having a central openingtherein and other openings spaced radially outward of the central opening,a second member overlying the first member, one of the members having arecess therein surrounding all of said openings, said recess having abottom wall and a side wall, said members having opposed engageable facessurrounding said recess, said second member having a transverse faceoverlying said recess bottom wall, a gasket within said recess, saidgasket including a plate of rigid material that has therein a centralopening and other openings that are respectively aligned with said centraland other openings of said first member, a generally U shaped corrugationin said plate between two of said other openings in said plate, saidcorrugation forming a recess in one face of the plate and a raised rib onthe other face of the plate, a layer of readily deformable material onsaid other face of the plate, said layer including a raised inner beadextending along the inner margin of said plate at said central opening ofsaid plate and a raised outer bead along the radially outward margin ofsaid plate, said deformable material also including a raised beadconnecting said inner and outer bead adjacent said corrugation, adeformable packing in said recess in sealing engagement with one of saidmembers and said inner and outer beads being in sealed engagement withsaid members and said connecting bead being in sealed engagement with theother said members.14. The joint of claim 13 in which the greatest axial dimension of saidplate is less than the axial distance between said bottom wall and anopposed face of the other of said members when said engageable faces ofsaid member are in contact with each other.15. The joint of claim 14 in which said connecting bead is on one side ofsaid rib and said layer includes another raised bead on the other side ofsaid rib and in sealing engagement with said other member."}
{"WKU":"039306577","Title":"Device for sealing between preferably movable parts","App_Date":"1973-07-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Assar Natanael Svensson;Sture Valter Persson","Assignee":"Skega Aktiebolag","ICL_Class":"F16J 1524","References":"1686090;2456356;2927804;3188099;3582093","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A device for producing a seal between movable and/or stationary partswhich are subjected to high fluid pressures, said device comprising asealing ring in the form of an O-ring, a pair of separate spaced supportrings disposed on opposite sides of said sealing ring respectively incoaxial relation thereto, each said support ring consisting of athermoplastic polymer material having a hardness greater than that of thematerial of the sealing ring, said support rings being formed withconcavely curved contact surfaces respectively disposed towards andconforming to opposite sides of said sealing ring and each looselyengaging one side of said sealing ring, each said support ring having asecond contact surface disposed essentially parallel to a radial planethrough the device, and a pair of spaced guide rings coaxial with saidsealing and support rings, each said guide ring being disposed outside ofan associated one of said support rings relative to said sealing ring andconsisting of a polymer material having a hardness greater than that ofthe thermoplastic polymer of the said associated support ring, each ofsaid guide rings having a pair of side surfaces which are essentiallyplane-parallel to one another and to said radial plane, one of said sidesurfaces substantially fully engaging said second contact surface of saidassociated support ring and having essentially the same radial extensionas said second contact surface, and each said guide ring also having aperipherally arranged sliding surface extending essentially perpendicularto both of its said side surfaces and having a larger axial extension thanthat of said associated support ring, said sealing ring, support rings,and guide rings being arranged adjacent to one another in axially andradially mutually displaceable relation to one another and withoutinterconnection therebetween.2. The device according to claim 1 wherein each guide ring is L-shaped incross section.3. The device of claim 1 wherein said sealing ring is fabricated of amaterial such as nitrile rubber, each support ring is fabricated of athermoplastic polyester, and each guide ring is fabricated of a materialsuch as acetal resin, polytetrafluoroethylene, or the like."}
{"WKU":"039306585","Title":"Plastic ski and method of making the same","App_Date":"1973-10-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John G. Howe;William L. Schmidt","Assignee":"AMF Incorporated","ICL_Class":"A63C  512","References":"3201138;3703729;3816573","Claims":"What we claim to be our invention is:1. In an aluminum and plastic sandwich ski structure, a bottom subassembly,a core, and a top subassembly sandwiched together, said bottom subassemblycomprising a bottom plastic running surface member, steel edges adhered toopposite side edges of said bottom running surface member and a firstaluminum strip adhered to the top surface of said bottom running surfacemember, said top subassembly comprising an outer plastic surface and anunderlying second aluminum strip adhered thereto, said core comprising arigid plastic foam material member adhered to and formed in situ betweensaid top and bottom subassemblies, and frangible strip means of porousmaterial embedded in said in situ formed core, said frangible strip meansbearing against said top and bottom subassemblies to space the same fromeach other to the selected thickness of said core, wherein said firstaluminum strip has a width less than the distance between the innermostportions of said steel edges so as to be spaced therefrom and withoutdirect connection therewith whereby said ski structure is adapted to haveits physical characteristics varied by making small variations in thewidth of said first aluminum strip.2. In a ski structure, as in claim 1, wherein said frangible strip meanscomprises a corrugated member constructed from narrow strips of paperoriented perpendicular to said top and bottom subassemblies.3. In a ski structure, as in claim 2, wherein said strips of paper bearagainst said steel edges, and strips of compressible porous plastic foammaterial are positioned along opposite sides of said corrugated member tospace the same inwardly from the outermost side surfaces of said skistructure."}
{"WKU":"039306593","Title":"Ski brake","App_Date":"1974-06-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Georges Pierre Joseph Salomon","Assignee":"S.A. Francois Salomon & Fils","ICL_Class":"A63C  710","References":"3048418;3249365;3511516;3715126;3741575","Claims":"I claim:1. A ski brake withdrawable by placing a ski boot in position on a ski,comprising:at least one brake arm providing a spike fitted laterally to a ski andpivoting relative to the ski about a generally transverse axis;resilient means for moving said arm towards an operative braking positionin which it projects beneath the base of the ski;a pedal mounted on the brake arm, extending above the upper surface of theski and disposed to be pushed onto this surface by a ski boot placed inposition on the ski, thereby retracting the arm into an inoperative restposition in relation to the ski;a sleeve in which said resilient means is lodged with one end thereofsupported by one end of the sleeve;piston means slidably located in said sleeve; anda cam located in said sleeve at its other end;said piston means being permanently thrust against said cam by saidresilient means, and said cam being disposed about said transverse axis ofsaid brake arm and having a profile such that the pressure exerted by saidpiston means on the cam by the action of said resilient means functionsthrough a couple acting on said brake arm and causing said brake arm topivot into said operative braking position when said ski boot leaves saidpedal.2. A ski brake as claimed in claim 1, wherein said resilient means is acoiled compression spring.3. A ski brake as claimed in claim 1, wherein said cam is fixed and thusconstitutes a journal for the pivoting of said brake arm, said brake armhaving a hollow portion constituting the sleeve in which said piston meansis thrust against said fixed cam.4. A ski brake as claimed in claim 3, wherein said cam has a supportsurface against which said piston means is thrust, said support surfacesloping downwardly and backwardly in relation to the base of said ski.5. A ski brake as claimed in claim 4, wherein said support surface is flatand diametrical and wherein said cam is semi-circular.6. A ski brake as claimed in claim 4, wherein said support surface of thecam has an angular shape whose bisector slopes upwards and backwards, theremainder of the cam surface having a circular section.7. A ski brake as claimed in claim 6 wherein said angular shape is theshape of a dihedral.8. A ski brake as claimed in claim 6 wherein said angular shape is theshape of a cone.9. A ski brake as claimed in claim 4, wherein said cam has means, defininga second, auxiliary, support surface, for keeping the arm withdrawn duringtransport and arranged in such a way that said pedal in the rest positionof the arm is slightly raised in front of a ski boot fastening abutmentfor the ski.10. A ski brake as claimed in claim 1, including a second pivoting brakearm constructed and disposed similarly to said one arm, the two armsrespectively adjoining two vertical side faces of said ski and each beingarticulated about a respective cam, said cams providing journals on saidtransverse axis, said two arms each having a rearward part, said rearwardparts being connected together at their rear ends by said pedal extendingtransversely to said ski and said arms, at least one of said armscontaining said resilient means in its said rearward part.11. A ski brake as claimed in claim 10, wherein said pedal comprises twomutually telescoping shafts fixed respectively at the ends of saidrearward parts of the arms and aligned transversely of the ski, twomutually facing aligned roller sleeves mounted so as to rotate onrespective ones of said shafts, and an intermediate shaft engaged in saidroller sleeves.12. A ski brake as claimed in claim 1, wherein said cam is integral withsaid brake arm and constitutes a pivot mounted to rotate when said cam issubjected to the thrust of said piston means actuated by said resilientmeans, said sleeve containing the resilient means and piston means beingdisposed to be fixed to the ski.13. A ski brake as claimed in claim 12, wherein said cam has a diametricalsupport surface towards which said piston means is thrust by saidresilient means.14. A ski brake as claimed in claim 1, including means for enabling thepedal to be disposed in a second inoperative rest position opposite anabutment for a ski boot, slightly raised above the ski; the pedalcomprising at least one transverse shaft and a roller fitted thereon whoseperipheral surface projects in relation to the profile of the arm on whichthe pedal is mounted."}
{"WKU":"039306607","Title":"Ski binding","App_Date":"1974-02-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jean-Paul Frechin","Assignee":"Mitchell S.A.","ICL_Class":"A63C  9081","References":"2491485;2545574;3838866","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A ski binding, comprising;an elongate soleplate extending from a first end to a second end;an intermediate plate hingedly connected to the soleplate adjacent saidfirst end about a transverse axis and having means defining an opening insaid intermediate plate, said intermediate plate having a free end and anupper face;a pin attachable perpendicular to a ski, said pin having an enlarged headwhich can pass through said opening in the intermediate plate;means defining cooperating relatively inclined surfaces on the underside ofsaid head of the pin and on said upper face of said intermediate plate ina part of said opening adjacent said free end; andspring operated means for releasably locking said second end of thesoleplate to the ski subject to release of the soleplate by pivoting aboutsaid transverse axis and about said perpendicular pin, said springoperated means being attachable to the ski at a distance from said pin;whereby in use said spring operated means urges said sole- plate and saidintermediate plate in a direction towards said pin to inter- engage saidcooperating surfaces and thereby releasably to lock said sole- plate tothe ski, subject to movement of said first end of the sole- plate relativeto the ski to free said soleplate by coaction of said cooperating surfacesagainst the action of said spring-operated means.2. A ski binding according to claim 1, in which said soleplate isincorporated in a sole of a boot.3. A ski binding according to claim 2, in which said soleplate comprises agenerally flat plate attachable to a lower surface portion of said sole.4. A ski binding according to claim 2, in which said boot sole includesmeans defining a recess for receiving therein said intermediate plate withsaid upper surface uppermost, and means for releasably holding theintermediate plate in said recess.5. A ski binding according to claim 1, in which said first end of thesoleplate is adapted to support the toe end of a boot and said second endis adapted to support the heel end of a boot, said spring-operated lockingmeans comprising manually operable means for placing it in an inoperativeposition allowing free movement of said second end of the soleplate, thebinding further comprising manually operable means for locking saidsoleplate and intermediate plate against pivoting about said pin whileallowing pivoting of the soleplate about said transverse axis.6. A ski binding according to claim 5, wherein said manually-operablelocking means comprise a base plate adapted to be secured on the ski, ahook member slidably mounted on the base plate for movement along theaxial direction of the ski, said hook member being adapted in one axialposition to at least indirectly engage with and immobilize saidintermediate plate, and screw means for holding said hook member inposition.7. A ski binding according to claim 1, in which said opening in theintermediate plate has an end portion which is V-shaped in plan view, andthe means defining it comprises one of the means defining co-operativerelatively inclined surfaces.8. A ski binding according to claim 1, in which said soleplate is integralwith the sole of a boot.9. A ski binding according to claim 1 in which said spring-operated meansincludes manually operable means for unlocking the second end of thesoleplate from the ski at will."}
{"WKU":"039306615","Title":"Safety ski-binding","App_Date":"1975-01-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hannes Marker","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A63C  908","References":"3801121;3822070;3854744","Claims":"I claim:1. A safety ski-binding comprising an elongated sole plate adapted to befitted on a ski to support a ski boot, front and rear sole depressorsprovided on the sole plate for retaining the boot thereon except when itis to be intentionally released, and mounting means for the sole plateeffective to release the latter from the ski in a vertical and/orhorizontal direction on the occurrence of overload, wherein the sole plateis provided with at least one transverse horizontal pivotal axis which isdisposed in the region supporting the ball of the boot and about which thesole plate can bend only in the upward direction.2. The binding of claim 1, wherein said sole plate is made in at least twoparts which are hinged to one another.3. The binding of claim 1, wherein at least the ball-supporting region ofthe sole plate comprises a continuous thin flexible sheet to the undersideof which there are secured a plurality of juxtaposed transverse members.4. The binding of claim 1, wherein at least one of the sole depressors isoutwardly displaceable lengthwise of the sole plate against spring force."}
{"WKU":"039306623","Title":"Chair and hand truck combination","App_Date":"1974-03-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Thomas D. Manner","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B62B  120","References":"2065233;2472407;3031228;3061365;3191959;3230006;3251495;3290089;3677573;3827707","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A portable chair and ice chest combination comprising:a. a flat rigidd rectangular platform for normally being disposed adjacentto the ground in a horizontal position above the ground;b. spaced wheels mounted for rotation about a transverse axis, said wheelsbeing respectively mounted on said platform adjacent the rear cornersthereof, said wheels being adapted to engage the ground for supporting therear portion of said platform and for permitting said platform to bepivoted about said axis from its normal horizontal position to an upwardlyextending position;c. a back pivotally mounted to said rear portion of said platform forremaining upright as said platform is pivoted to its outwardly, horizontalextending position;d. means connected between said back and said platform for holding saidback in its upright position when said platform is in its normalhorizontal position;e. a rigid ice chest removeably carried by said platform, said ice chesthaving a horizontally disposed upper surface on which a person may sit ina normal position;f. a pair of spaced opposed arms pivotally mounted by their rear endportions respectively to intermediate portions of said back, said armsnormally extending forwardly of said back and parallel to each other andbeing pivotable to upwardly extending positions adjacent to the upperportion of said back; andg. rigid front leg means pivotally connected to said platform forwardly ofsaid wheels and pivotally connected to said arms forwardly of said back,said rigid means being respectively disposed outwardly of the sides ofsaid chest when said chest is carried on said platform for arrestinglateral movement of said chest on said platform and for providing supportfor said arms.2. The structure defined in claim 1 including a transverse axle for saidwheels and wherein said back includes a U shaped frame member, said axlepassing through the end portions of said U shaped frame and through saidplatform.3. The structure defined in claim 1 wherein said arms are secured to saidback at positions above said upper surface so that they provide arm restsfor the person seated on said upper surface.4. The structure defined in claim 1 wherein said platform includes upwardlyextending flanges along the edges of said platform for confining thebottom portion of said chest to prevent appreciable movement of said chestwhen it is carried by said platform and an axle passing through saidflanges for rotatably receiving said wheels, outwardly of said flanges.5. The structure defined in claim 1 wherein said rigid means includes a Ushaped leg structure, the opposed legs of which pass adjacent said chestand are pivotally mounted to the arms and the platform, the portion ofsaid leg structure, which joins said opposed legs, passing beneath saidplatform to provide support on the ground for the forward portion of saidplatform.6. The structure defined in claim 1 wherein said first mentioned meansincludes foldable braces extending from positions adjacent the forwardedge portions of said platform, upwardly and rearwardly to intermediateportions of said back."}
{"WKU":"039306631","Title":"Collapsible carrier for equestrian saddle","App_Date":"1974-12-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert D. Scripter","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B62B  120","References":"2706008;2957700","Claims":"I claim:1. A collapsible wheeled carrier for transporting an equestrian saddle,said carrier comprising:a. a main frame member extending upwardly rearward from the lower endthereof toward the upper end thereof and having"}
{"WKU":"039306640","Title":"Occupant restraint system","App_Date":"1972-05-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ben C. Parr;Carl M. Savage, Jr.","Assignee":"General Motors Corporation","ICL_Class":"B60R 2102","References":"2755125;3473824;3514124;3591201;3640546;3643971;3666289;3799573","Claims":"We claim:1. The combination comprising, a vehicle having a windshield, an instrumentpanel including an upper portion having an elongated opening thereinextending generally transversely of the vehicle adjacent the windshield,an elongated manifold within the instrument panel having a base wall andan opposite open upper side generally coextensive with the opening of theupper portion of the instrument panel, an elongated oval-shape diffuserlocated in the manifold adjacent the base wall, spaced means securing thediffuser to the base wall of the manifold, an inflatable occupantrestraint cushion including an occupant engageable portion and anumbilical portion generally coextensive with the opening, means mountingthe umbilical portion on the vehicle inwardly of the opening of theinstrument panel in communication with the diffuser, the cushion beingnormally folded and stored within the manifold intermediate the diffuserand the manifold opening, releasable cover means covering the manifoldopening and continuing the upper portion of the instrument panelthereover, means communicating the diffuser with a source of pressurefluid upon the occurrence of a predetermined event to inflate the cushionand deploy the cushion from the manifold through the manifold andinstrument panel openings, the diffuser expanding from an oval shapetoward circular shape upon receipt thereby of pressure fluid, the spacedsecuring means blocking sinuous deformation of the diffuser upon expansionthereof, the cover means being moved out of the instrument panel openingby the cushion when the cushion deploys, and means communicating thecushion with ambient atmosphere when the pressure within the cushionexceeds a predetermined level.2. The combination comprising, a vehicle having a windshield, an instrumentpanel including an upper portion having an elongated opening thereinextending generally transversely of the vehicle adjacent the windshield,an elongated manifold within the instrument panel having a base wall andan opposite upper opening generally coextensive with the opening of theupper portion of the instrument panel, an elongated oval-shape diffuserlocated in the manifold adjacent the base wall thereof, spaced meanssecuring the diffuser to the base wall of the manifold, an inflatableoccupant restraint cushion including an umbilical portion and an occupantengageable portion, means mounting the umbilical portion on the vehicleinwardly of the opening of the instrument panel in communication with thediffuser, the cushion being normally folded and stored within the manifoldintermediate the diffuser and the manifold opening, means communicatingthe diffuser with a source of pressure fluid upon the occurrence of apredetermined event to inflate the cushion and deploy the cushion from themanifold through the manifold and instrument panel openings, the diffuserexpanding from oval shape toward circular shape upon receipt thereby ofpressure fluid, the spaced securing means blocking sinuous deformation ofthe diffuser upon expansion thereof, a cover coextensive with theinstrument panel opening and received therein, means hinging the forwardedge thereof to the vehicle, and means releasably securing the rearwardedge thereof to the vehicle, the cover being swung forwardly of thevehicle toward the windshield about the forward edge thereof uponinflation and deployment of the cushion.3. The combination comprising, a vehicle having a windshield, an instrumentpanel including an upper portion having an elongated opening thereinextending generally transversely of the vehicle adjacent the windshield,an elongated manifold within the instrument panel having a base wall andan opposite upper opening generally coextensive with the opening of theinstrument panel, an elongated oval-shape diffuser having a portionthereof seated on the base wall of the manifold, means spacedlongitudinally of the diffuser and securing the seated portion of thediffuser and the base wall of the manifold to the vehicle, an inflatableoccupant restraint cushion including an umbilical portion, means mountingthe umbilical portion on the vehicle inwardly of the opening of theinstrument panel in communication with the diffuser, the cushion beingnormally folded and stored within the manifold intermediate the diffuserand the manifold opening, and means communicating the diffuser with asource of pressure fluid upon the occurrence of a predetermined event toinflate the cushion, the diffuser expanding from oval shape towardcircular shape upon receipt thereby of pressure fluid, the spaced securingmeans block sinuous deformation of the diffuser upon expansion thereof."}
{"WKU":"039306658","Title":"Energy absorbing panel structure","App_Date":"1974-07-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kazuo Ikawa","Assignee":"Nissan Motor Company Limited","ICL_Class":"B60R 2108","References":"3412628;3774713;3806154;3831705","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Restraining means for restraining forward movement of a vehicle occupantarising from a sudden deceleration of the vehicle, comprising a firstsheet of metal secured to a structural member of the passenger compartmentof said vehicle, a second sheet of metal secured at the opposite endsthereof in spaced relationship to said first sheet of metal forming animpact receiving surface, and a third sheet of metal folded into ameandering shape and supported by the inner sides of said first and secondsheets with the folded portions connected with said inner sides, saidsecond sheet having rows of apertures, each row being arranged between theadjacent folded portions, whereby upon receipt of an impact force saidsecond sheet is fractured along said rows so that part of the kineticenergy of said vehicle occupant is absorbed and said third sheet isflexured subsequently to absorb the remainder of said kinetic energy.2. Restraining means as claimed in claim 1, wherein said apertures areslots extending along said rows.3. Restraining means as claimed in claim 1, further comprising a resilientpadding on said impact receiving surface.4. A knee restraint for limiting the forward movement of a vehicle occupantarising from a sudden deceleration of a vehicle, comprising a first sheetof metal secured at the opposite ends thereof to structural members of thepassenger compartment of said vehicle in a position to engage the kneeportion of said occupant under sudden deceleration of the vehicle, asecond sheet of metal secured at the opposite ends thereof in spacedrelation to said first sheet of metal forming an impact receiving surface,and a third sheet of metal folded into a meandering shape and supported bythe inner sides of said first and second sheets with the folded portionsconnected with said inner sides, said second sheet having rows ofapertures, each row being arranged between the adjacent folded portions,whereby upon receipt of an impact force said second sheet of metal isfractured along said rows so that part of the kinetic energy of saidvehicle occupant is absorbed and said third sheet of metal is flexuredsubsequently to absorb the remainder of said kinetic energy.5. A knee restraint as claimed in claim 4, wherein said apertures are slotsextending along said rows.6. A knee restraint as claimed in claim 4, further comprising a resilientpadding on said impact receiving surface.7. A knee restraint as claimed in claim 4, wherein said first and secondsheets have the intermediate portion thereof bent to form a generallyU-shaped groove transverse to the length.8. A knee restraint as claimed in claim 7, wherein said first and secondsheets are positioned so that the steering column of said vehicle extendsthrough said U-shaped groove."}
{"WKU":"039306666","Title":"Hybrid gas system for automobile passenger restraint system","App_Date":"1974-05-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert W. Lynch;Vincent O. Catanzarite","Assignee":"Specialty Products Development Corporation","ICL_Class":"B60R 2108","References":"3089418;3089419;3163014;3183021;3642304;3649045;3663036;3674059;3680896;3711115;3813007","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A hybrid gas supply system for inflating an automobile passengerrestraint bag comprising:a cylindrical high pressure gas storage reservoir;an axial gas flow orifice in one end of the gas reservoir;a frangible diaphragm sealing the gas flow orifice;a pyrotechnic gas generator external to the gas reservoir;an axial gas flow passage in the gas generator;connection means for interconnecting the gas generator and the gasreservoir with the axial passage coaxial with the gas flow orifice andisolated from the high pressure gas by the infrangible diaphragm; andan explosive detonator in the axial gas flow passage external to the gasstorage reservoir and adjacent the frangible diaphragm for bursting thediaphragm upon receipt of an electrical signal; and whereinthe gas storage reservoir includes an inverted neck extending from an endtowards the interior of the reservoir, the frangible diaphragm beingwithin the inverted neck, and wherein the connection means includes afemale connector moiety within the inverted neck and a male connectormoiety on the gas generator.2. A system as defined in claim 1 wherein the exterior of the gas generatorhas substantially the same transverse cross section as the cylindrical gasreservoir.3. A hybrid gas supply system for inflating an automobile passengerrestraint bag comprising:a cylindrical high pressure gas storage reservoir;an axial gas flow orifice in one end of the gas reservoir;a frangible diaphragm sealing the gas flow orifice;a pyrotechnic gas generator external to the gas reservoir having agenerally square transverse cross section with chamfered cornerscomprising:"}
{"WKU":"039306674","Title":"Inflatable garment for crash protection","App_Date":"1975-02-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Andrew J. Osuchowski;Robert S. Lulenski","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B60R 2100","References":"1640270;1771727;2316101;3243822;3392405;3441963;3827716","Claims":"Having thus described our invention, we claim:1. In a crash protection device for a rider who jumps or is thrown from avehicle having a source of pressurized gas actuatable to release said gasin anticipation of predetermined deceleration of the vehicle, aninflatable garment adapted to be worn by the rider, hose means forconnecting at one end with said source of gas, connecting means carried bysaid garment for releasably connecting the other end of said hose meanswith said garment to inflate the latter upon release of said gas from saidsource and being releasable from said other end by the pull of the garmentthereon when the rider wearing said suit falls from the motorcycle, andone-way valve means cooperable with said connecting means to enableinflation of said garment by the gas from said source and to preventescape of said gas from said garment via said connecting means.2. In a device according to claim 1, said connecting means comprising alength of flexible hose secured at one end to said garment and having afirst coupling member at its opposite end, said hose means having a secondcoupling member at said other end thereof for releasably coupling withsaid first coupling member, and means for pivotally connecting said secondcoupling member to said motorcycle for aligning said second couplingmember with the direction of said pull.3. In a device according to claim 2, said garment having inflatable arm andleg sections, and manually operative valve means adjacent the extremity ofat least one of said sections for rapidly deflating said garment.4. In a device according to claim 2, said coupling members havinginterlockable means movable between locking and unlocking positions forinterlocking said members together and for releasing the same forseparation from each other, and resilient means normally holding saidinterlockable means in the locking position when said members are coupledand being yieldable to the force of said pull for enabling movement ofsaid interlockable means to the unlocking position.5. In a device according to claim 1, said vehicle having a steeringmechanism with a handgrip portion, and manually actuatable trigger meansfor selectively actuating said source to release said gas and mounted onsaid vehicle adjacent said handgrip portion.6. In a device according to claim 5, said vehicle having a motorcycle typehandle bar steering mechanism with said handgrip portions, and saidtrigger means being mounted on said handlebar adjacent one of saidhandgrip portions.7. In a device according to claim 1, means for slowly dissipating gas fromsaid garment to deflate the same approximately 50 percent from a fullyinflated condition in a time interval amounting to more than severalseconds and less than a minute.8. In a device according to claim 1, said garment having a non-inflatableportion at the buttocks region comprising a shock absorbing cushion.9. In a device according to claim 1, an exhaust port in said garment, valvemeans normally closing said exhaust port and manually operable forselectively opening the latter valve for deflating said garment, and meanscooperable with the latter valve means to prevent said garment fromclosing said exhaust port during deflation of said garment comprisingspacer means for spacing said garment from said exhaust port.10. In a device according to claim 1, said garment having inflatable bodyand arm sections, said arm sections being inflatable to a lesser extentthan said body section to facilitate movement of the inflated arm sectionsby said rider."}
{"WKU":"039306682","Title":"Stabilizer foot for backhoes and the like","App_Date":"1974-08-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kenneth W. Schuermann;Fred H. Kohman","Assignee":"The Charles Machine Works, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B60S  902","References":"1973226;2567989;2623679;2767898;2992016","Claims":"We claim:1. A foot for the ground engaging end of a stabilizing support arm asemployed with earth working construction equipment such as a backhoecomprising:a pad having a plurality of ground engaging faces, each such face formingone side of said pad and each face having a different ground engagingconfiguration to accommodate different terrain conditions;removable attaching means for connecting said pad to the stabilizingsupport arm in a selected one of a plurality of different orientationswhere in each of said orientations only one ground engaging face of saidpad is retained to be engageable with the ground surface, said removableattaching means including a removable pin means forming an axis topivotally connect said pad to the stabilizing support arm and permitlimited pivoting of said pad relative to the support arm for said pad toalign itself with the ground surface it engages and thereby afford optimalground contact between the surface of the pad and the engaged groundsurface;means on said pad limiting the degree of pivoting of the pad relative tothe stabilizing support arm such that in each orientation of said pad onlyone of said plurality of ground engaging faces is retained in orientedposition to engage the ground surface; andsaid pin means having retaining means thereon to restrict removal of saidpin, removal of said pin being required to detach said pad from thestabilizing support arm and enable orientation of said pad to a differentselected orientation position whereat said pin means is reinserted andanother of said ground engaging faces is pivotally retained to align withthe ground surface it engages.2. A foot for the ground engaging end of a stabilizing support arm asdefined in claim 1 wherein said pad comprises one ground engaging facewith a substantially flat resilient member detachably mounted to said padand having a plurality of resilient projections extending therefrom, saidresilient member serving to engage a ground surface of pavement withoutdigging into or damaging said pavement; and said pad further comprises aground engaging face having a pair of parallel projecting rib membersperpendicularly mounted on a substantially flat surface which orients saidrib members such that they can firmly engage into an earthen groundsurface.3. A foot for the ground-engaging end of a stabilizing support arm asdefined in claim 1 wherein said pad further comprises a ground-engagingface having projecting rib members which serve to dig into and firmlyengage an earthen ground surface.4. A foot for the ground-engaging end of a stabilizing support arm asdefined in claim 1 wherein one said ground-engaging face comprises:a resilient member detachably attached to said pad which is suited toengage a ground surface of pavement without digging into and damaging thepavement.5. A foot for the ground-engaging end of a stabilizing support arm asdefined in clam 4 wherein said resilient member has a generally flatground-engaging surface having a plurality of resilient spaced projectionsextending from said surface."}
{"WKU":"039306690","Title":"Steerable trailer suspension system","App_Date":"1974-11-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Melvin M. Kollander;Norman A. Kollander;James B. Wade;Anthony Parisi","Assignee":"East Sandia Industrial Group","ICL_Class":"B62D 1302","References":"2954239;2959428;3430985;3448999;3690698","Claims":"What is claimed as new is as follows:1. A steerable trailer suspension system comprising a tandem axle assemblyincluding a pair of longitudinally extending supporting beams, frontresiliently supported rocker assemblies on the beams supporting forwardwheel assemblies, rear resiliently supported rocker assemblies on thebeams supporting rear wheel assemblies, spindle assemblies on one pair ofrocker assemblies supporting the wheel assemblies therefrom for swingingmovement about substantially vertical axes spaced forwardly of therotational axes of the wheel assemblies supported from the spindleassemblies, and steering control means connected to the spindle assembliesfor controlling the orientation of the steerable wheel assemblies.2. The structure as defined in claim 1 wherein the spindle assemblies eachis of angulated configuration and including a spindle rotatably supportinga wheel assembly, an axle assembly in the form of spaced barsinterconnecting the spindle assemblies and forming a parallelogram linkageto maintain the steerable wheels in a vertical plane, said bars beingconnected to the spindle assemblies by a ball joint connection to enableindependent vertical elevation of the spindle assemblies and steerablewheels carried thereby.3. The structure as defined in claim 2 wherein the spindle assemblies areconnected to the rear rocker assemblies, said steering control meansincluding a laterally extending steering arm connected to each spindleassembly.4. The structure as defined in claim 1 wherein each rocker assembly ispivotally supported from an end portion of the beam, and spring meansinterposed between the beam and rocker for spring supporting the rocker.5. The structure as defined in claim 4 wherein said beam is substantiallystraight with the forward rocker assemblies supporting a nonsteerable axlehaving wheel assemblies on each end thereof.6. The structure as defined in claim 1 wherein said beam is angulated withan elevated central portion with three rocker assemblies being connectedto the beam and to each other supporting three axle and wheel assemblieswith at least two of the wheel assemblies being steerable.7. In combination with a towing tractor and trailer interconnected by afifth wheel and kingpin, a tandem axle suspension assembly includingsteerable wheels, control means interconnecting the steerable wheels and asteering arm maintained generally parallel to the rotational axis of thedrive wheels on the tractor to steer the steerable wheels generally in thedirection for moving the trailer in substantially the same path as thetractor, said steerable wheels each including a spindle assembly ofangulated configuration and provided with a vertical pivotal connection tothe trailer for pivoting the steerable wheels about vertical axes spacedlongitudinally from the rotational axes of the steerable wheels inresponse to articulate movement of the tractor and trailer about thekingpin.8. The combination as defined in claim 7 wherein said spindle assembliesare interconnected by parallel bars having universal connection with thespindle assemblies to retain the spindle assemblies in predeterminedorientation during change in elevational relationship between the spindleassemblies and wheel assemblies mounted thereon.9. The combination as defined in claim 8 in which the spindle assembliesare mounted rearwardly of a non-steerable axle on a two axle tandem axlesuspension system.10. The combination as defined in claim 8 wherein the trailer includes athree axle tandem axle suspension assembly with two of the axles includingspindle assemblies being steerably controlled and one of the axlesincluding non-steerable wheels.11. A trailer suspension system comprising a first set of wheels disposedin supporting relation to a trailer, a second set of wheels oriented inrearwardly spaced relation to the first set of wheels and disposed insupporting relation to a trailer, longitudinally extending beam means insupporting engagement with the trailer, and means interconnecting saidbeam means and said sets of wheels to retain the wheels in supportingrelation to the beam means, said interconnecting means including a springrocker assembly for each set of wheels, each spring rocker assemblyincluding a pair of laterally spaced rocker members pivotally connected tothe beam means for pivotal movement about a transverse axis, spring meansinterconnecting each of said rocker members and said beam means andassociated with the transverse pivot axes to independently bias saidrocker members about its transverse axis to bias the wheels downwardlythereby supporting the trailer resiliently from the wheels.12. The combination of claim 11 wherein one set of said wheels areinterconnected by an axle assembly, means interconnecting the axleassembly, and two of said rocker members to transmit braking torque fromthe wheels to the beam means while permitting the wheels in said set tomove vertically in relation to each other.13. The combination of claim 12 wherein said axle assembly is rigid androtatably supports the wheels in said one set in parallel non-steerablecondition.14. The combination of claim 12 wherein said axle assembly includes a pairof parallel, vertically spaced bars, a spindle assembly at each end of theaxle assembly, ball joint means connecting the ends of the bars to thespindle assemblies, said wheels being rotatably mounted on the respectivespindle assemblies for rotation about a generally transverse axis with thebars enabling vertical movement of the wheels while maintaining them in avertical plane.15. The combination of claim 14 wherein each of said spindle assembliesincludes an offset portion extending longitudinally of the trailer inrelation to the rotational axis of the wheel mounted thereon, meanspivotally supporting the offset portion of each spindle assembly to itsrespective rocker member for pivotal movement about a vertical axis spacedlongitudinally from the rotational axis of the wheels whereby the wheelsmay swing laterally of the trailer and move vertically relative to eachother with the bars maintaining the wheels in a vertical plane, andsteering control means connected to each of said offset portions of thespindle assemblies for swinging said wheels and maintaining their axes ofrotation in generally parallel relation and providing steering control forthe trailer to enable the span between the first and second set of wheelsto be increased.16. The combination of claim 15 wherein said trailer is connected to atowing tractor by a kingpin and fifth wheel assembly enabling relativeangular movement about a generally vertical axis, said steering controlmeans including means operatively connected to the tractor in offsetrelation to the kingpin for controlling the steerable swingable wheels inresponse to angular relationship of the tractor and trailer for steeringthe trailer to substantially follow the path of the tractor therebyreducing lateral forces exerted on the kingpin thereby reducing thepossibility of the tractor and trailer jackknifing.17. The combination of claim 16 wherein said axle assembly is locatedrearwardly of the beam means, the other set of wheels being disposedforwardly of the beam means and being interconnected at a rigid axleassembly rotatably supporting the wheels on the outer ends thereof innon-steerable condition, means interconnecting said rigid axle assemblyand two of said rocker members to transmit braking torque from the forwardwheels to the beam means while permitting the front wheels to changeelevation in relation to each other.18. The combination of claim 17 wherein said means connecting the offsetportions of the spindle assemblies to the rocker members includes avertical pivot member for transmitting braking torque from the rear wheelsto the beam means.19. The combination of claim 18 wherein said torque transmitting meansconnected to the rigid axle assembly includes clamps connected to therigid axle, and a longitudinally extending shaft rigid with each rockermember and swivelly connected with each clamp to permit relative movementabout longitudinal axes spaced laterally of each other, one of said clampsbeing mounted for pivotal movement about the axis of the rigid axleassembly, the other clamp being ridigly keyed to the rigid axle assemblyto transmit torque from the front wheels to the beam means.20. The combination of claim 19 wherein the rocker members have overlappingend portions remote from the wheels, and spring means associated with theoverlapping ends of the rocker members to cushion relative movementtherebetween, said overlapping ends being arranged whereby the brakingtorque from the front and rear wheels will counteract each other thusmaintaining wheel contact with the ground surface during emergency stopsand thereby preventing wheel hop and providing a straight line brakingpath when the wheels skid.21. The combination of claim 17 together with a third set of wheelsoriented rearwardly of the second set of wheels and being interconnectedby an axle assembly, said third set of wheels and axle assembly beingduplicative of the steerable wheels and being controlled by said steeringcontrol means for following the path of the second set of wheels wherebythe trailer will pivot about the line of contact between the front set ofwheels and the ground surface.22. The combination of claim 21 wherein said steering control meansincludes a pair of longitudinal tension members disposed below the trailerand being adjustable in length to accurately orient the steerable wheels,said beam means being centrally pivotally connected to the trailer.23. The combination of claim 11 wherein each of said spring means includesmultiple concentric coil springs having seat means forming an arcuatecontact surface which enables angulation of the springs so that the lineof force on the springs will be along the longitudinal axis to retain themin straight condition.24. The combination of claim 23 wherein each of the multiple coil springsincludes two or more springs having different resilient characteristicswhereby the lighter of the springs will support the unloaded trailer andas the trailer loading increases, additional springs are used to supportthe load thus maintaining a more constant spring rate-to-load ratio and amore natural constant frequency thereby reducing the tendency of the wheelto hop or leave the road when driven over uneven roads or braked."}
{"WKU":"039306704","Title":"Oscillation damping and stabilizing trailer hitch dolly","App_Date":"1974-10-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert William Haskins","Assignee":"Robert Whittemore Haskins","ICL_Class":"B60D  700","References":"2302246;2506718;2570482;2622891","Claims":"I claim:1. An oscillation-damping and stabilizing trailer hitch dolly forconnecting the chassis of a towing vehicle to a trailer with aconventional first trailer hitch component thereon, said dolly comprisinga dolly coupling adapter structure adapted to be secured to the rearwardportion of the towing vehicle chassis,a dolly frame including a cross member and a draft structure extendingforward from said cross member into coupling engagement with said adapterstructure,pivot means pivotally interconnecting said structures,axle means mounted on said frame transversely of said draft structure,ground wheels mounted on said axle means in laterally-spaced relationshipfor rotation relatively to said frame,a leaf spring mounted on said cross member transversely of said frame forvertical oscillation relatively thereto,and a second trailer hitch component adapted to cooperably engage the firsttrailer hitch component in separable hitching relationship, said secondtrailer hitch component operatively engaging and transmitting motionbetween said leaf spring and the first trailer hitch component.2. An oscilation-damping and stabilizing trailer hitch dolly, according toclaim 1, wherein a vertical guideway is connected to said cross memberadjacent said second trailer hitch component in vertical guidingrelationship therewith.3. An oscillation-damping and stabilizing trailer hitch dolly, according toclaim 1, wherein a vertically operative shock absorber is mounted on saidframe and operatively connected to said leaf spring in oscillation-dampingrelationship therewith.4. An oscillation-damping and stabilizing trailer hitch dolly, according toclaim 3, wherein said shock absorber is a fluid-operated shock absorber.5. An oscillation-damping and stabilizing trailer hitch dolly, according toclaim 4, wherein said shock absorber has a cylinder element and a pistonelement reciprocable in said cylinder element, one of said elements beingconnected to said frame and the other element being operatively connectedto said second trailer hitch component whereby to dampen the oscillationsimparted thereto by said leaf spring in response to the engagement of saidground wheels with roadway obstacles.6. An oscillation-damping and stabilizing trailer hitch dolly, according toclaim 2, wherein said guideway includies a vertical guide member connectedto said cross member in supported relationship therewith.7. An oscillation-damping and stabilizing trailer hitch dolly, according toclaim 3, wherein a cross-head is connected to said second trailer hitchcomponent and is also connected to said shock absorber inmotion-transmitting relationship therebetween.8. An oscillation-damping and stabilizing trailer hitch dolly, according toclaim 5, wherein a cross-head is supportingly connected to said secondtrailer hitch component and is also operatively connected to said otherelement in motion-transmitting relationship therebetween.9. An oscillation-damping and stabilizing trailer hitch dolly, according toclaim 7, wherein a vertical guide member is connected to said cross-memberin supported relationship therewith and wherein said cross-head slidablyengages said guide member in guided relationship therewith.10. An oscillation-damping and stabilizing trailer hitch dolly, accordingto claim 1, wherein wear plates of wear-resistant material are mounted onsaid cross member in spaced relationship therealong and disposed incontacting engagement with the opposite ends of said leaf spring."}
{"WKU":"039306712","Title":"Color former and pressure-sensitive copying paper","App_Date":"1974-04-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hideo Usui;Sadao Ishige;Teruo Kobayashi;Keiso Saeki","Assignee":"Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"B41M  516","References":"3331854;3619238;3849164","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A pressure-sensitive copying paper system which comprises a supporthaving thereon a color former layer containing a1,3-dihydro-1-oxo-benzo[b]thieno[2,3-C]furan derivative represented by thefollowing General Formula I:##SPC7##or a 1,3-dihydro-3-oxo-benzo[b]thieno[2,3-C]furan derivative represented bythe following General Formula II:##SPC8##wherein ring A represents a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring, R.sub.1 andR.sub.2 each represents an amino group, and X, Y and Z each represents ahydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxygroup, an aralkoxy group, an acyloxy group, a nitro group or an aminogroup and a color developer layer for said color former on the same oropposite side of said support, or on a different support.2. The pressure-sensitive copying paper of claim 1, wherein said aminogroup for R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 is an unsubstituted amino group or asubstituted amino grup having as substituents an alkyl group, an aralkylgroup, an aryl group, an acyl group, an alicyclic group or a heterocyclicgroup, wherein said halogen atom for X, Y and Z is a chlorine atom, abromine atom or an iodine atom, said alkyl group for X, Y and Z has 1 to 4carbon atoms, said aralkyl group for X, Y and Z has 1 to 4 carbon atoms inthe alkyl moiety thereof and the aryl moiety thereof is a phenyl group ora naphthyl group, said alkoxy group for X, Y and Z has 1 to 4 carbon atomsin the alkyl moiety thereof, said aralkoxy group for X, Y and Z has 1 to 4carbon atoms in the alkyl moiety thereof and the aryl moiety thereof is aphenyl group or a naphthyl group, said acyloxy group for X, Y and Z is analiphatic acyloxy group or an aromatic acyloxy group and wherein saidamino group for X, Y and Z is an unsubstituted amino group or asubstituted amino group having substituents as defined for R.sub.1 andR.sub.2.3. The pressure-sensitive copying paper of claim 2, wherein said aminogroup for R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 is an amino group substituted with a methylgroup, an ethyl group, a propyl group, a butyl group, a chloromethylgroup, a chloroethyl group, a bromomethyl group, a bromoethyl group, aniodomethyl group, an iodoethyl group, a cyanomethyl group, a cyanoethylgroup, a cyanopropyl group, a cyanobutyl group, a methoxyethyl group, anethoxyethyl group, a benzyl group, a chlorobenzyl group, a bromobenzylgroup, a methylbenzyl group, an ethylbenzyl group, a phenethyl group, achlorophenethyl group, a bromophenethyl group, a methylphenethyl group, anethylphenethyl group, a phenyl group, a chlorophenyl group, a bromophenylgroup, a tolyl group, an ethylphenyl group, a naphthyl group, achloronaphthyl group, a bromonaphthyl group, a methylnaphthyl group, anethylnaphthyl group, an acetyl group, a benzoyl group, a phenacyl group, acyclohexyl group, a morpholino group, a piperidino group or a julolidinogroup.4. The pressure-sensitive copying paper of claim 1, wherein said colorformer layer comprises microcapsules containing said compound of theGeneral Formula I, the General Formula II, or mixture thereof.5. The pressure-sensitive copying paper of claim 1, wherein said support isa paper, a plastic sheet, or a resin-coated paper.6. The pressure-sensitive copying paper of claim 1, wherein said colorformer layer additionally contains a color former selected from the groupconsisting of a triarylmethane compound, a diphenylmethane compound, axanthane compound, a thiazine compound, a spiro compound and a mixturethereof."}
{"WKU":"039306720","Title":"Pressure-sensitive copying paper containing lactone compounds derived","App_Date":"1974-03-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Minoru Ozutsumi;Yoshihide Miyazawa;Susumu Suzuka;Sadao Ishige;Keiso Saeki;Akio Watanabe","Assignee":"Hodogaya Chemical Co., Ltd.;Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"B41M  512;B41M  516;B41M  522","References":"3669710;3725416;3730754;3775424;3787325","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A pressure-sensitive copying paper system comprising an adsorbent solidacid and a micro-encapsulated color former capable of forming a distinctcolor when reacted with said adsorbent solid acid, each coated on the sameor different surfaces of one or more supports, said microcapsulescontaining an organic solvent having dissolved therein a lactone colorformer comprising at least one lactone compound derived frompyridine-carboxylic acid represented by the formula##SPC11##or a mixture thereof, wherein R.sub.1 represents a hydrogen atom, a loweralkyl group or a benzyl group; R.sub.2 represents a lower alkyl group, abenzyl group or a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl group wherein thesubstituent is a lower alkyl group or a halogen atom; R.sub.3 represents ahydrogen atom, a lower alkyl group, a halogen atom or a phenyl group; andthe partial structure##SPC12##represents##SPC13##wherein R.sub.4 represents a hydrogen atom, a lower alkyl group, a loweralkoxy group, a halogen atom, an amino, mono-lower alkylamino, di-loweralkyl-amino, monobenzylamino, dibenzylamino, N-lower alkyl-N-benzylamino,anilino, N-lower alkylanilino or -NHCO-X group wherein X represents alower alkyl, lower alkenyl or a substituted or unsubstituted styryl,phenyl or naphthyl group, the substituent being a lower alkyl, loweralkoxy, di-lower alkylamino, hydroxy or nitro group or a halogen atom,wherein the lower alkyl, alkoxy and alkenyl groups have 1 to 5 carbonatoms.2. The pressure sensitive copying paper system of claim 1, wherein saidcolor former is a mixture of the following compounds:##SPC14##3. The pressure sensitive copying paper system of claim 1, wherein saidcolor former is selected from the group consisting of:##SPC15##4. The pressure sensitive copying paper system of claim 1, wherein saidcolor former is selected from the group consisting of:##SPC16####SPC17##5. The pressure sensitive copying paper system of claim 1, wherein saidcolor former is selected from the group consisting of:##SPC18##6. The pressure sensitive copying paper system of claim 1, wherein saidcolor former is selected from the group consisting of:##SPC19####SPC20##7. The pressure sensitive copying paper system of claim 1, wherein saidcolor former is selected from the group consisting of:##SPC21##"}
{"WKU":"039306739","Title":"Lottery ticket","App_Date":"1974-08-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Stig Emil Sanden","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B42D 1500","References":"3593443;3736006","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A lottery ticket of laminar sheet material adapted to be opened bybreaking at least one outer and at least one inner seal, the improvementconsisting in that the ticket comprises a top leaf (1) provided withweakening or perforation lines (1a) disposed in spaced relation to theticket edge to provide a finger-grip for tearing off a first lug (1b)thereof, an intermediate leaf (2) provided with weakening or perforationlines (2a) which provide a finger-grip for tearing off a lug (2c, 2f)after said lug (1b) of top leaf (1) has been torn off, said lug (2c, 2f)of the intermediate leaf being partially disposed beneath a lug (1f) or awindow (1g) of the top leaf (1) and defined by weakening or perforationlines (2d, 2e and 2f) which, relative to the outer edges of the lotteryticket, are disposed outside weakening or perforation lines (1c, 1d and1e) defining said second lug (1f) of the top leaf (1), or outside theedges defining the window (1g) formed in the top leaf, so that at least aportion of the lug (2c, 2g) of the intermediate leaf is larger than thelug (1f) on the window (1g) of the top leaf, said lottery ticket furthercomprising a bottom leaf (3) carrying a ticket number (3a) or othersuitable designation so disposed as to be visible in the opening formedwhen the second lug (1f) of the top leaf and the lug (2c, 2g) of theintermediate leaf have been lifted off, or exposed in the window (1g) asthe lug (2c, 2g) of the intermediate leaf has been pulled out from betweenthe top and bottom leaves (1 and 3).2. A lottery ticket according to claim 1 wherein a second lug (1f) isdefined in the top leaf (1), said lug (1f) being sealed, preferably glued,to the lug (2g) of the intermediate leaf (2).3. A lottery ticket according to claim 1 wherein the top leaf has a window(1g) formed therein, said window being disposed adjacent to andsubstantially in centered alignment with the perforation lines (1a) of thetop leaf (1) and preferably having the same length or width as the areadefined by said lines (1a).4. A lottery ticket according to claim 3 wherein the perforation lines (1a)of the top leaf (1) define a tongue which tapers in a direction away froman adjacent side edge of the ticket and has a truncated end, and theperforation lines (2a) of the intermediate leaf (2) also define a taperedtongue which in part, at least, underlies the tongue of the top leaf andwhich tapers in a direction opposite to that of said last-mentioned tongueand which has also a truncated end.5. A lottery ticket according to claim 4 comprising a strip which is foldedover at two locations in a manner to cause two portions thereof on eitherside of one folding line (4) to form the top leaf and the bottom leaf (1and 3) respectively and to cause a third portion thereof to lie betweenthe latter leaves, thus forming the intermediate leaf (2).6. A lottery ticket according to claim 5, wherein the perforation lines(1a) of the top leaf (1) are disposed adjacent said one folding line (4)and define a tongue which tapers in a direction away from the latter andhas a truncated end, the perforation lines (2a) of the intermediate leaf(2) defining a tongue which in part at least, underlies the tongue of thetop leaf (1), which tapers in a direction towards said folding line (4)and towards the end edge (2b) of the intermediate leaf (2), and has atruncated end, the truncated end edge being constituted by the end edge(2b) of the last-mentioned leaf (2).7. A lottery ticket according to claim 6 wherein its leaves are sealed,preferably glued, to each other over the entire area outside the weakeninglines (2d, 2e and 2f) defining the lug (2g) of the intermediate leaf (2)."}
{"WKU":"039306747","Title":"Couplings","App_Date":"1974-03-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Nils Gunnar Jonsson","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F16L 3708","References":"740664;1980530;2690939;2709094;2826437;2967723;3124405;3372949;3405957;3479069;3669474;R19132","Claims":"I claim:1. A coupling for transmitting high pressure fluid comprising: two conduitmembers having interengaging sealing means and cylindrical flanges, saidconduit flanges being in proximity with each other when the sealing meansengage; and snap clip means in the form of a single generally arcuate webmember subtending more than two right angles at the center of the arc,said web having two end portions each having a pair of flanges projectingradially inwardly and engaging the side faces of said conduit flanges,said clip flanges extending along a substantial portion of thecircumference of said web and being sufficiently robust to prevent theconduit flanges from moving apart under the action of internal fluidpressure, the edges of said clip flanges engaging the walls of saidconduit members adjacent said conduit flanges to space said web outwardlyof the peripheries of said conduit flanges so as to form a space betweensaid web and the peripheries of said conduit flanges, the central portionof said web being free of flanges and being resilient so that the flangedends of the clip means can be moved apart to allow the clip means to snapover said cylindrical conduit flanges whereupon the flanges of said clipmeans resist separation of said conduit flanges and whereby rapid removalof the said clip means may be effected by inserting a tool into saidspace.2. A coupling as claimed in claim 1 in which the clip arcuate web and theflanges of the clip means are formed from a single piece of metal.3. A coupling as claimed in claim 1 in which said space between said weband the peripheries of said conduit flanges is in the form of a part of anannulus.4. A coupling as claimed in claim 1 in which the clip flanges extendradially inwardly of the web at an angle not greater than approximatelyright angles.5. A coupling as in claim 1 wherein the web of said clip means subtendsabout 270.degree..6. A coupling as in claim 1 wherein the web is narrower at its centralportion than at its end portions.7. A coupling as in claim 1 wherein the central portion of the web of saidclip is provided with cuts extending from opposite sides in the directionof the axis of said clip so that the resilience of the clip may beprovided by the torsional resilience of the portions between the cuts.8. A coupling as in claim 1 wherein the ends of the clip means haveelongated arms with openings in the arms whereby a wire seal may passthrough the arms to seal the clip means in position.9. A coupling as in claim 1 wherein the conduit members are rotatablerelative to each other and relative to said clip about the axis of thecoupling."}
{"WKU":"039306755","Title":"Strain equalizer for thermally stressed pipes","App_Date":"1974-08-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Joachim Sasse","Assignee":"Chemiebau Dr. A. Zieren GmbH & Co.","ICL_Class":"F16L 5102","References":"2335478;2568923;2960354;3659879","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A device for compensating for the thermal expansion of a pipelinefixedly disposed between components so as to minimize bearing pressures atsaid components, comprising:a. at least one linear pipeline section extending between a first and asecond longitudinally spaced, fixedly disposed, stress-susceptiblepipeline component;b. longitudinally spaced first and second linear bellows-type strainequalizers interposed in said pipeline section between and spaced inwardlyfrom said components, the portion of said pipeline between saidlongitudinally spaced first and second strain equalizers being continuousand rigid;c. a first rigid longitudinal anchor rigidly secured at one end thereof tosaid pipeline section at a first point thereon between said strainequalizers and nearer the first strain equalizer, and rigidly secured atthe other end thereof to said pipeline section at a second point thereonbetween the second strain equalizer and said second component;d. a second rigid longitudinal anchor rigidly secured at one end thereof tosaid pipeline section at a third point thereon between the first strainequalizer and said first component, and rigidly secured at the other endthereof to said pipeline section at a fourth point thereon between saidstrain equalizers and nearer the second strain equalizer;e. the distance between said second and third points being less than thesum of the distance between said first and second points plus the distancebetween said third and fourth points; andf. the distance between said first point and said fourth point along whichdistance said anchors longitudinally overlap being approximately equal tothe sum of the distance between said first component and said third pointplus the distance between said second component and said second point.2. The device according to claim 1, wherein the overlapping portion of saidlongitudinal anchors is symmetrically located between said strainequalizers.3. The device according to claim 1, comprising a plurality of linear strainequalizers and longitudinal anchors, wherein the sum of the lengths of alllongitudinal anchor overlaps equals the sum of the lengths of alllongitudinally unanchored portions of said pipeline between fixed pipelinecomponents.4. The device according to claim 3, wherein the number of longitudinalanchor overlaps does not exceed a number which is one less than the numberof linear strain equalizers.5. The device according to claim 4, wherein said at least one section isincluded in a three-dimensional pipeline system.6. The device according to claim 4, wherein said at least one section isincluded in a two-dimensional planar pipeline system."}
{"WKU":"039306763","Title":"Hose coupling and joint","App_Date":"1974-12-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Cecil L. Adams","Assignee":"Parker-Hannifin Corporation","ICL_Class":"F16L 3302","References":"186855;2937892;3174777","Claims":"I claim:1. A hose coupling joint comprising a hose of relatively hard but flexiblematerial resistant to radially outward expansion, a coupling having aradial abutment and having a nipple extending from one side of theabutment into an end of the hose, the nipple having axially inner andouter annular portions each of greater length than their maximum outsidediameters, said abutment extending radially beyond each of said inner andouter portions the outer portion having a smooth uninterrupted exteriorsurface that tapers at an angle of substantially 11/2.degree. to thelongitudinal axis of the coupling from a smaller diameter at its outer endto a larger diameter at its inner end, said larger diameter beingsubstantially the same as the normal inside diameter of the hose and saidsmaller diameter being smaller than the normal inside diameter of the hoseto facilitate the insertion of said nipple into said hose and to permitflexing and radial movement of the hose relative to said outer portion, afirst barb at the inner end of said outer portion, a series of additionalbarbs between said first barb and said abutment, the inner edge of eachbarb being smaller in diameter than the inner edge of the adjacent barb inthe axially outward direction whereby a line through said edges makes anangle of about 2.degree. with the longitudinal axis of said nipple, acircular clamp having a smooth inner surface and of less axial length thansaid inner portion surrounding the hose radially opposite all of saidadditional barbs and clamping the hose thereagainst, said clamp prior toapplying clamping pressure having a substantially uniform inner diameterwhereby upon radial contraction of said clamp there is progressivelygreater compression of the hose against said additional barbs in adirection toward said outer portion, the axially outer end of said clampbeing spaced axially inwardly of said first barb whereby direct clampingpressure applied by the clamp to the hose will be on said additional barbsand there will be no direct clamping pressure from the clamp applied atthe first barb so that stretching or flexing of the hose is not resistedin an abrupt manner at said first barb.2. The joint of claim 1 in which said outer end of the clamp is axiallyintermediate said first barb and the additional barb adjacent thereto.3. The joint of claim 1 in which the innermost of said additional barbs isspaced from said abutment substantially the same distance as the spacingbetween said additional barbs and in which the axially inner end of theclamp is between said abutment and the adjacent one of said additionalbarbs."}
{"WKU":"039306771","Title":"Latch mechanism for closure member","App_Date":"1974-11-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Lyn C. Hollis","Assignee":"General Motors Corporation","ICL_Class":"E05C  112","References":"1220939;3353858;3586361;3666306","Claims":"I claim:1. A latch mechanism for a closure member that is supported for movementbetween an open position wherein said closure member is spaced from afixed strike plate having an opening formed therein and a closed positionwherein said closure member is located adjacent said strike plate, saidlatch mechanism comprising a housing having an outer edge, a main boltslidably supported in said housing, said main bolt having an outer end andan inner end and being adapted to be located in a retracted positionwherein the outer end of the bolt is positioned substantially at the outeredge of the housing, and a normally extended position wherein the outerend of said main bolt is located outwardly beyond the outer edge of thehousing a predetermined distance, and a fully extended position whereinthe outer end of the bolt is located outwardly beyond the outer edge adistance greater than said predetermined distance, an auxiliary bolthaving a pair of legs formed therewith and being slidably supported insaid housing along side said main bolt, said auxiliary bolt having anouter end adapted to assume, a normally extended position wherein saidouter end of the auxiliary bolt extends out of said housing a distancesubstantially equal to said predetermined distance and a retractedposition wherein said outer end of the auxiliary bolt is locatedsubstantially at said outer edge of said housing, said outer end of theauxiliary bolt adapted to contact said strike plate and be moved into andbe maintained in its retracted position when said closure member is insaid closed position, an elongated link, an actuator member, a first pivotconnection for connecting one end of said link to said auxiliary bolt, asecond pivot connection for connecting the acutator member to said linkadjacent to said first pivot connection, a lost motion connection forconnecting the other end of said link to said main bolt, a tension springextending between said main bolt and said actuator member, and acompression spring normally biasing said actuator member outwardly fromsaid housing for maintaining the main bolt and the auxiliary bolt in saidnormally extended position when said closure member is in said openposition and for causing the main bolt to be extended by said link to saidfully extended position into the opening in said strike plate when saidclosure member is in said closed position.2. A latch mechanism for a closure member that is supported for movementbetween an open position wherein said closure member is spaced from afixed strike plate having an opening formed therein and a closed positionwherein said closure member is located adjacent said strike plate, saidlatch mechanism comprising a housing having an outer edge, a main boltslidably supported in said housing, said main bolt having an outer end andan inner end and being adapted to be located in a retracted positionwherein the outer end of the bolt is positioned substantially at the outeredge of the housing, and a normally extended position wherein the outerend of said main bolt is located outwardly beyond the outer edge of thehousing a predetermined distance, and a fully extended position whereinthe outer end of the bolt is located outwardly beyond the outer edge adistance greater than said predetermined distance, an auxiliary boltslidably supported in said housing along side said main bolt, saidauxiliary bolt having an outer end adapted to assume a normally extendedposition wherein said outer end of the auxiliary bolt extends out of saidhousing a distance substantially equal to said predetermined distance anda retracted position wherein said outer end of the auxiliary bolt islocated substantially at said outer edge of said housing, said outer endof the auxiliary bolt adapted to contact said strike plate and be movedinto and be maintained in its retracted position when said closure memberis in said closed position, a link, an actuator member, a first pivotconnection for connecting a first portion of said link to said auxiliarybolt, a second pivot connection for connecting the actuator member to saidlink adjacent to said first pivot connection, a lost motion connection forconnecting a second portion of said link to said main bolt, a tensionspring extending between said main bolt and said actuator member, and acompression spring normally biasing said actuator member outwardly fromsaid housing for maintaining the main bolt and the auxiliary bolt in saidnormally extended position when said closure member is in said openposition and for causing the main bolt to be extended by said link to saidfully extended position into the opening in said strike plate when saidclosure member is in said closed position."}
{"WKU":"039306780","Title":"Locking means for sliding closures","App_Date":"1974-10-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James H. Alexander","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"E05C 1918","References":"426303;464265;572591;1137321;1571024;2003128;3526421","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Means for preventing relative movement between members mounted forrelative sliding movement, each of said members having a surface with anopening formed therein, said means comprising a one-piece locking memberhaving spaced substantially parallel means thereon for simultaneouslycooperating with the openings formed in the relatively movable memberswhereby the members are locked in selected relative positions.2. The means defined in claim 1 wherein the openings in the relativelymovable members are cylindrical holes and the locking member has spacedconnected positions with projections located thereon for simultaneouslyextending into the openings in the respective relatively movable members.3. The means defined in claim 1 wherein the locking member is formed of onepiece of folded material having projecting substantially parallel endportions simultaneously engageable with the respective openings in therelatively movable members.4. The means defined in claim 1 including means for attaching the lockingmember to one of said relatively movable members to prevent disengagementbetween the means cooperatively engageable with the openings and theopenings in the relatively movable members.5. The means defined in claim 4 wherein the means for attaching the lockingmember to one of the relatively movable members includes a threadedmember.6. The means defined in claim 1 wherein the relatively movable membersinclude sash members of a double hung sliding sash window assembly.7. The means defined in claim 1 wherein the relatively movable membersinclude a sliding door member of a sliding door assembly.8. The means defined in claim 1 wherein the locking member includes anelongated member having a central portion with spaced and oppositelyextending flanges formed adjacent opposite ends thereof, and wherein themeans cooperatively engageable with the openings include a peg attached toeach of said flanges on corresponding sides thereof, said pegs beingsubstantially parallel to each other.9. The means defined in claim 8 wherein two pegs are formed on each of saidflanges and two openings are formed in each of said relatively movablemembers to cooperatively receive said pegs.10. The means defined in claim 8 including means on at least one of saidpegs to locate a place on one of said relatively movable members where oneof the openings is to be made.11. A bridge type lock for double hung window and sliding door assembliescomprising an assembly having at least one member that is slidably movablerelative to another, each of said relatively movable members having asurface facing in the same direction with an opening formed therein, and aone-piece lock member having a Z-shaped cross-section and having a centralportion with oppositely extending substantially parallel end flangeportions, means extending in spaced parallel relation from correspondingsides of the respective end flange portions, said means being positionedto simultaneously cooperate with the openings in the respective relativelymovable members in selected positions thereof.12. Means for locking two relatively movable members to prevent relativemovement therebetween comprising two relatively movable members, meansmounting at least one of said relatively movable members for slidingmovement relative to the other, each of said relatively movable membershaving a surface thereon, the surfaces being in spaced parallelrelationship to each other, a hole in each of said members extending fromsaid parallel surfaces, and a one-piece member having substantiallyparallel means thereon simultaneously engageable with the holes in therelatively movable members, said one-piece member having a portion thatextends between the spaced parallel surfaces and connects thesubstantially parallel means thereon.13. Means to prevent relative movement between members comprising a pair ofmembers having adjacent surfaces at least one of which is movable relativeto the other while maintaining the adjacent surfaces in parallelrelationship, an opening in each of said movable members, said openingsbeing substantially parallel to each other, and a one-piece bridge memberhaving spaced connected portions, one of said portions having means forcooperating with the opening in one of said movable members and the otherof said portions having means thereon for simultaneously cooperating withthe opening in the other of said movable members, the simultaneouscooperation of the means on the bridge member with the respective openingspreventing relative movement between the relatively movable members.14. The means defined in claim 13 wherein the bridge member includes acentral elongated portion with integral flanges formed extending inopposite directions from the ends of the central portion.15. The means defined in claim 14 wherein the means on the bridge memberfor cooperating with the respective openings in the movable membersinclude a projection on each of said flanges, said projections extendingfrom corresponding sides of the flanges in spaced, substantially parallelrelationship.16. The means defined in claim 13 wherein the bridge member is formed offlat metal having an elongated central portion and oppositely extendingright angle portions formed respectively on each opposite end.17. The means defined in claim 13 wherein at least one of said openings andthe means for cooperating therewith have portions which snap intoengagement when the bridge member is installed.18. The means defined in claim 13 including a plurality of spaced openingsformed in one of said relatively movable members for cooperating with themeans on the bridge member.19. The means defined in claim 13 wherein at least one of said openings inthe relatively movable members is provided with liner means.20. The means defined in claim 13 wherein said means cooperating with theopening in at least one of the relatively movable members has an endwardlyprojecting pointed portion.21. Means to prevent relative movement between two members each havingadjacent parallel surfaces and side edges, one of which members is movablerelative to the other in a direction substantially parallel to saidparallel surfaces, an opening formed in one of the parallel surfaces ofone of said members, the improvement comprising a one-piece locking memberhaving a first portion cooperatively engageable with the opening in saidone member and a second portion simultaneously engageable with the sideedge of the other member.22. Means for preventing relative movement between members mounted forrelative sliding movement, each of said members having a surface with anopening formed therein, said means comprising a locking member havingspaced means thereon for simultaneously cooperating with the openingsformed in the relatively movable members whereby the members are locked inselected relative positions, and means for attaching the locking member toone of said relatively movable members, said means for attaching thelocking member including spring biased means.23. Means to prevent relative movement between members comprising a pair ofmembers having adjacent surfaces at least one of which is movable relativeto the other while maintaining the adjacent surfaces in parallelrelationship, an opening in each of said movable members, said openingsbeing substantially parallel to each other, means including a bridgemember having spaced connected portions, one of said portions having meansfor cooperating with the opening in one of said movable members and theother of said portions having means thereon for simultaneously cooperatingwith the opening in the other of said movable members, the simultaneouscooperation of the means on the bridge member with the respective openingspreventing relative movement between the movable members, a second openingformed in one of said relatively movable members adjacent to the bridgemember, said second opening being angularly related to the aforesaidopenings, and means including spring means movable into cooperativeengagement with said second opening when the bridge member is installed."}
{"WKU":"039306798","Title":"Dry hole wire core barrel apparatus","App_Date":"1974-04-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ronald B. Anderson;Walter W. Svendsen","Assignee":"Longyear Company","ICL_Class":"E21B 2500;E21B 3100","References":"3127943;3225845;3266835;3333647;3441098;3461981;3666300","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A wire line core barrel inner tube assembly comprising tubular means forreceivingly retaining a core therein, a latch body, means for connectingthe core receiving means to the latch body, a latch mounted on the latchbody for limited movement relative thereto between a drill stem latch seatengaging position and a retracted position, latch release means mounted onthe latch body for limited movement relative thereto for releasing thelatch from the drill stem latch seat engaging position, and a firstovershot coupling member fixedly secured to the latch body.2. The apparatus of claim 1 further characterized in that there is provideda second overshot coupling member that is fixedly secured to the latchrelease means.3. The apparatus of claim 2 further characterized in that said releasemeans comprises a latch release tube having the latch body extendedthereinto, that said second coupling member is annular and has one endportion secured to the latch release tube remote from the latch body andan opposite end portion more remote from the latch body than said one endportion, said first coupling member being slidably extended into theannular coupling member.4. The apparatus of claim 3 further characterized in that each of the latchrelease tube and latch body are axially elongated, that the latch releasetube is mounted on the latch body for limited axial movement relativethereto, that said second overshot coupling member is secured to the latchrelease tube to extend axially outwardly thereof in a direction away fromthe latch body and that the first overshot coupling member is axiallyelongated and of an axial length to extend through the annular couplingmember to a location substantially axially more remote from the latchrelease tube than the annular coupling member in both of the latch releasemeans limited positions.5. The apparatus of claim 4 further characterized in that said annularmember opposite end portion has a frusto conical outer surface having amajor base and a minor base axially more remote from the latch releasetube than the major base, and that said annular member has an axiallyelongated intermediate portion axially between said annular member endportions that is of a smaller outer diameter than the major base and isjoined to said annular member opposite end portion to form an annularshoulder facing toward said one end portion.6. The apparatus of claim 4 further characterized in that said firstcoupling member has an outer end portion that has a circumferentialovershot assembly detent receiving groove.7. The apparatus of claim 6 further characterized in that said secondcoupling member opposite end portion has a frusto conical surface having aminor base and a major base substantially more closely adjacent the latchrelease tube than the minor base, and that the second coupling member hasan axially extending intermediate portion having an outer diametersubstantially smaller than the corresponding dimension of the major baseand is joined to the second member opposite end portion to form a shoulderfacing toward the second coupling member one end portion.8. The apparatus of claim 7 further characterized in that there is providedan overshot assembly having an overshot body and plurality of axiallyelongated, circumferentially spaced spring fingers, each of the springfingers having one end portions joined to the overshot body and oppositejaw end portions substantially axially spaced therefrom, for couplinglyengaging said second coupling member, said jaws being resiliently retainedin a radially spaced datum position and having shoulders for abuttinglyengaging the coupling member shoulder to transmit a lifting force thereto.9. The apparatus of claim 8 further characterized in that said jaw endportions have radially inner, axially downwardly and radially outwardlytapered surfaces that in a transverse plane through the radially mostclosely adjacent parts of the jaw end portions are generallycircumferentially curved about a circle having a radius of curvature in afinger datum position greater than one half the maximum transversedimension of part of the first coupling member that extends more remotefrom the latch release tube than the second coupling member, said radiusof curvature being substantially smaller than the radius of the majorbase.10. The apparatus of claim 1 further characterized in that the latchrelease means comprises an axially elongated latch release tube that ismounted on the latch body for limited axial movement relative theretobetween a latch retracting position and a position permitting the latchmoving to the latch seat engaging position, said latch body extending intothe latch release tube, said tube having a latch slot for the latch toextend through in the latch drill stem latch seat engaging position, thatthe latch is pivotally mounted on the latch body for movement between thelatch positions, and that there is provided a second overshot couplingmember that is annular and has one end portion fixedly secured to thelatch release tube axially outwardly of the pivotal connection of thelatch to the latch body and an opposite end portion axially outwardly ofsaid one end portion, said first coupling member being slidably extendedthrough the second coupling member, axially elongated, and of an axiallength to extend to a location substantially more remote from the latchrelease tube than the second coupling member opposite end portion in boththe latch release tube positions.11. Wire line core barrel apparatus operable through a drill stem,comprising a wire line core barrel inner tube assembly having an axiallyouter overshot coupling member, said coupling member comprising an axiallyextending rod that includes a portion having a circumferential detentreceiving groove, and an overshot assembly for couplingly engaging thesaid rod, said overshot assembly having an annular detent mounting memberfor receiving said rod portion therein, a detent mounted by the detentmounting member for a movement between a first position extendable intosaid groove and a rod portion release second position, ramp means mountedon the detent mounting member for limited axial movement between a firstposition retaining the detent in the detent first position and a secondposition axially outwardly of the ramp means first position to permit thedetent moving to its second position, resilient means acting against theramp means for resiliently retaining the ramp means in the ramp meansfirst position relative the detent mounting member, an axially elongatedtubular overshot member having an axially inner end portion into which therod portion is extendable, and means for mounting the detent moutingmember in the tubular member in a position that the rod end portion ismovable into the detent mounting member to abut against the detent whenthe ramp means is in the ramp means first position, and through thedetent, force the ramp means to its second position whereby the rodportion is movable relative the detent and detent mounting member to aposition that the detent is moved to extend into said groove and the rampmeans then moves to its first position to retain the detent in the detentfirst position, and means for attaching a wire line cable to the tubularmember, the tubular member having an axially inner end portion abuttableagainst the ramp means to limit the axially inward movement of the rampmeans and the detent mounting member mounting means including meansmounting the detent mounting member for axial inwardly movement relativethe tubular member to a first position that the ramp means abuts againstsaid tubular member portion with the ramp means in its second positionrelative the detent mounting member, and an axially outer position thatthe ramp means in each of its positions relative the detent mountingmember is axially spaced from said tubular portion, and resilientlyretaining the detent mounting member from moving to its first positionuntil an axially inward force exerted thereon is substantially greaterthan the weight of the core barrel inner tube assembly.12. The apparatus of claim 11 further characterized in that the wire linecable attaching means includes an overshot coupling rod connected to thetubular member to extend axially outwardly thereof, said overshot couplingrod having an outer end portion that has a circumferential detentreceiving groove, an overshot device, operable detent lock means forlockingly engaging said overshot rod portion, including a detent adaptedfor movement into the overshot rod portion groove, said lock means beingoperable to a rod release position, means for mounting the lock means onthe overshot device for limited axial movement relative thereto between adatum position and a position axially inwardly of the last mentioned datumposition, and resiliently retaining the lock means in the said lastmentioned datum position, and a fitting mounted on the overshot device toextend axially inwardly thereof for operating the lock means to itsrelease position as the lock means moves relative the overshot device tothe position axially inwardly of said last mentioned datum position, andmeans for attaching a wire line cable to said overshot device.13. The apparatus of claim 12 further characterized in that means formounting the lock means includes means, that requires a substantialgreater force to be deformed than a force to similarly deform the meansfor resiliently retaining the detent mounting member, for resilientlyretaining the lock means in said last mentioned datum position.14. An axially elongated core barrel inner tube assembly movable through adrill stem by an overshot assembly comprising tubular means forreceivingly retaining a core sample, a latch body, means for mounting thecore sample retaining means on the latch body axially inwardly of thelatch body, a latch mounted on the latch body for limited movementrelative thereto between a drill stem latch seat engaging position and aretracted position, means for resiliently urging the latch to the latchseat engaging position, an axially elongated latch release tube mounted onthe latch body for limited movement between an axial inner positionpermitting the latch moving to the latch seat engaging position and anaxial outer position retracting the latch, a first overshot engagablecoupling member adapted for being couplingly engaged by an overshotassembly for lowering the latch body through the drill stem, and a secondcoupling member adapted for being couplingly engaged by an overshotassembly for moving the latch release tube from the tube first position tothe tube second position, said second coupling member being mounted on thelatch release tube and the first coupling member being mounted on thelatch body.15. The apparatus of claim 14 further characterized in that said firstcoupling member is extended through the second coupling member and axiallymovable relative thereto, said first coupling member being of an axiallength to extend axially outwardly of the second coupling member in eachof the latch release tube positions.16. The apparatus of claim 15 further characterized in that the overshotassembly adapted for couplingly engaging the first coupling memberincludes an overshot body having an axially inner end portion and meansfor coupling engaging the first coupling member and retaining the couplingengagement therewith until more than a predetermined force is exertedthereto in a direction to move the overshot body axially away from thelatch body, the last mentioned means being mounted on the overshot bodyinner end portion.17. For lowering a wire line core barrel inner tube assembly having anovershot coupling member through a drill stem, an overshot mechanismcomprising an axially elongated overshot member, operable detent lockmeans for lockingly engaging said coupling member, said lock means beingoperable to a coupling member release position, means for mounting thelock means on the overshot member for limited axial movement relativethereto between a datum position and a position axially inwardly of thedatum position, and resiliently retaining the lock means in the datumposition, a fitting mounted on the overshot member to extend axiallyinwardly thereof for operating the lock means to its release position asthe lock means moves relative the overshot member to the position axiallyinwardly of the datum position, and means for attaching a wire line cableto the overshot member axially outwardly of the fitting.18. The apparatus of claim 17 wherein said coupling member includes acircumferential overshot detent receiving groove, further characterized inthat the lock means includes a detent adapted for movement into saidgroove, a detent mount mounted on the means for mounting the lock meansfor mounting the detent for movement between a coupling member releaseposition and a coupling locking engagement position, and annular meansabuttable against the fitting and movably mounted on the detent mount formoving the detent out of the groove as the lock means moves axiallyinwardly of the datum position, said fitting being annular and having ashoulder abuttable against the annular means to limit the axial inwardmovement thereof when the detent mount is moved axially inwardly.19. The apparatus of claim 17 further characterized in that the lock meansincludes a lock member, means mounting the lock member for limitedmovement between a coupling member locking position and a coupling memberrelease position, the lock member mounting means being mounted on themeans for mounting the lock means, lock operating means mounted on thelock member mounting means for moving the lock member between itspositions and being movable between a first position to retain the lockmember in the coupling member locking position and an axially outwardlysecond position to retain the lock member in the release position, andmeans for resiliently urging the lock operating means to its firstposition, said means for mounting the lock means including means formounting the lock member mounting means for limited axial movement,resiliently retaining the lock member mounting means in a datum positionand permitting limited axial movement thereof to a second position axiallyinwardly of the last mentioned datum position, said lock operating meansbeing abuttable againt the fitting to limit the axial inward movementthereof as the lock member mounting means moves it to its second positionto thereby operate the lock operating means to the lock member releaseposition.20. The apparatus of claim 17 further characterized in that the fitting ismounted on the overshot member in a fixed axial position relative thereto.21. A wire line core barrel inner tube assembly comprising means forreceivingly retaining a core, latch body, means for connecting the corereceiving means to the latch body, a latch mounted on the latch body forlimited movement relative thereto between a drill stem latch seat engagingposition and a retracted position, latch release means mounted on thelatch body for limited movement relative thereto for releasing the latchfrom the drill stem latch seat engaging position, said release meanscomprising an axially elongated latch release tube mounted on the latchbody for limited axial movement relative thereto and having the latch bodyextended thereinto, an axially elongated first overshot coupling memberfixedly secured to the latch body and having an outer end portion that hasa circumferential overshot assembly detent receiving groove, an annularsecond overshot coupling member fixedly secured to the latch release tubeto extend axially outwardly therefrom in a direction away from the latchbody and having one end portion secured to the latch release tube remotefrom the latch body, an opposite end portion more remote from the latchbody than said one end portion and having a frusto conical surface havinga minor base and a major base substantially more closely adjacent thelatch release tube than the minor base, and an axially extendingintermediate portion having an outer diameter substantially smaller thanthe corresponding dimension of the major base and joined to the secondmember outer end portion to form a shoulder facing toward the secondcoupling member one end portion, said first coupling member being slidablyextended into the annular coupling member and being of an axial length toextend through the annular coupling member to a location substantiallyaxially more remote from the latch release tube than the annular couplingmember in both of the latch release means limited positions, and anovershot assembly having overshot body and a plurality of axiallyelongated, circumferentially spaced spring fingers, each of the springfingers having one end portions joined to the overshot body and oppositejaw end portions substantially axially spaced therefrom, for couplinglyengaging said second coupling member, said jaws being resiliently retainedin a radially spaced datum position and having shoulders for abuttinglyengaging the coupling member shoulder to transmit a lifting force thereto,an overshot coupling rod attached to the overshot body to extend axiallyoutwardly thereof and having circumferential detent receiving grooveaxially outwardly of the overshot body, and means for attaching a wireline cable to the overshot assembly, the last mentioned means including anovershot device having an axially inner end portion and means for couplingengaging the overshot coupling rod and retaining the coupling engagementtherewith until more than a determined force is exerted in a direction tomove the overshot device axially away from the overshot coupling rod, thelast mentioned means being mounted on the overshot body inner end portionand including operable detent lock means for lockingly engaging saidovershot rod, said lock means being operable to a rod release position,means for mounting the lock means on the overshot device for limited axialmovement relative thereto between a datum position and a position axiallyinwardly of the datum position, and resiliently retaining the lock meansin the datum position, and a fitting mounted on the overshot device toextend axially inwardly thereof for operating the lock means to itsrelease position as the lock means moves relative the overshot device to aposition axially inwardly of the datum position, and means for attaching awire cable to the overshot device axially remote from the lock means.22. A wire line core barrel inner tube assembly comprising means forreceivingly retaining a core, an axially elongated latch body, means forconnecting the core receiving means to the latch body, a latch mounted onthe latch body for limited movement relative thereto between a drill stemlatch seat engaging position and a retracted position, latch release meansmounted on the latch body for limited movement relative thereto forreleasing the latch from the drill stem latch seat engaging position, saidrelease means comprising an axially elongated latch release tube mountedon the latch body for limited axial movement relative thereto and havingthe latch body extended thereinto, an axially elongated first overshotcoupling member fixedly secured to the latch body and having an outer endportion that has a circumferential overshot assembly detent receivinggroove, an annular second overshot coupling member fixedly secured to thelatch release tube to extend axially outwardly therefrom in a directionaway from the latch body and having one end portion secured to the latchrelease tube remote from the latch body, an opposite end portion moreremote from the latch body than said one end portion, said first couplingmember being slidably extended into the annular coupling member and beingof an axial length to extend through the annular coupling member to alocation substantially axially more remote from the latch release tubethan the annular coupling member in both of the latch release meanslimited positions, and an overshot assembly for lowering the core barrelinner tube assembly, said overshot assembly including an overshot couplingdevice for releasably couplingly engaging the first coupling member,overshot means for mounting the coupling device, said device including anannular detent mounting member having an axially inner bore portion of alarger diameter than the maximum outer diameter of the first couplingmember outer end portion for receiving the last mentioned outer endportion therein, a detent mounted by the detent mounting member forlimited movement relative thereto between a first coupling member lockingposition extendable into said groove and a first coupling member releaseposition, ramp means mounted on the detent mounting member for limitedmovement relative thereto between a first position for retaining thedetent in its locking position and a second position permitting the detentmoving to its release position, means acting between the detent mountingmember and the ramp means for resiliently urging the ramp means to itslocked position, and means mounted by the overshot means for mounting thedetent mounting member for limited axial movement and resilientlyretaining the detent mounting member in a datum axial position whilepermitting the detent mounting member moving relative the overshot meansto a second position substantially axially lower than the datum position,said overshot means having a portion extending beneath the ramp means andabuttable agains the ramp means to limit the downwardly movement of theramp means as the detent mounting member moves to its second position to aposition that the ramp means and detent mounting member are relativelymoved to the ramp means second position.23. The apparatus of claim 22 further characterized in that said overshotassembly includes an overshot coupling rod attached to the overshot meansto extend axially outwardly thereof and having a circumferential detentreceiving groove axially outwardly of the overshot means, and that thereis provided means for attaching a wire line cable to the overshotassembly, the last mentioned means including an overshot device having anaxially inner end portion and means for couplingly engaging the overshotcoupling rod and retaining the coupling engagement therewith until morethan a determined force is exerted in a direction to move the overshotdevice axially away from the overshot means, the last mentioned couplingmeans being mounted on the overshot means inner end portion and comprisingoperable detent lock means for lockingly engaging said overshot rodportion, including a detent adapted for movement into the last mentionedgroove, said lock means being operable to a rod release position, meansfor mounting the lock means on the overshot device for limited axialmovement relative thereto between a datum position and a position axiallyinwardly of the last mentioned datum position, and resiliently retainingthe lock means in the last mentioned datum position, and a fitting mountedon the overshot device to extend axially inwardly thereof for operatingthe lock means to its release position as the lock means moves relativethe overshot device to the position axially inwardly of said lastmentioned datum position, the means mounting the lock means havingresilient characteristics that a substantially greater force is requiredfor relatively moving the lock means to a position that the fittingoperates the lock means to its release position than the force required toovercome the resilient action of the means for mounting the detentmounting means resisting the movement of the detent mounting means to itssecond position, and that there is provided means for attaching a wirecable to the overshot device axially remote from the lock means.24. The apparatus of claim 22 further characterized in that the detentmember mounting means includes a mount mounted by the overshot means in afixed position relative thereto, an axially elongated spindle axiallyslidably extended through the mount, and resilient means acting againstthe spindle and mount for resiliently urging the spindle upwardly, saiddetent mounting member being mounted on the spindle below the mount.25. The apparatus of claim 24 further characterized in that said detentmounting member includes means abutable against the mount to limit theupward movement of the spindle relative the mount, and that the ramp meanssecond position relative the detent mounting member is axially outwardlyof the ramp means first position.26. For being moved through a drill stem, an axially elongated core barrelinner tube assembly and a first overshot assembly for moving the corebarrel inner tube assembly through the drill stem, said core barrel innertube assembly comprising means for receivingly retaining a core sample, alatch body, means for mounting the core sample retaining means on thelatch body axially inwardly of the latch body, a latch mounted on thelatch body for limited axial movement relative thereto between a drillstem latch seat engaging position and a retracted position, means forresiliently urging the latch to the latch seat engaging position, anaxially elongated latch release tube mounted on the latch body for limitedmovement between an axial inner position permitting the latch moving tothe latch seat engaging position and an axial outer position retractingthe latch, a first overshot engagable coupling member mounted on the latchbody and adapted for being couplingly engaged by the first overshotassembly for lowering the latch body through the drill stem, said firstcoupling member including an axially elongated rod fixedly attached to thelatch body to extend axially outwardly thereof, said rod having an outerend portion that has a circumferential detent receiving groove, and asecond coupling member mounted on the latch release tube and adapted forbeing couplingly engaged by a second overshot assembly for moving thelatch release tube from the tube first position to the tube secondposition, said first coupling member being extended through the secondcoupling member and axially movable relative thereto, and being of anaxial length to extend axially outwardly of the second coupling member ineach of the latch release tubes positions, and the first overshot assemblyfor couplingly engaging the first coupling member including an overshotbody having an axially inner end portion and coupling engaging meansmounted on the overshot body inner end portion for couplingly engaging thefirst coupling member and retaining the coupling engagement therewithuntil more than a predetermined force is exerted thereto in a direction tomove the overshot body axially away from the latch body, the couplingengaging means comprising operable detent lock means for lockinglyengaging said rod portion, including a detent adapted for movement intosaid groove, said lock means being operable to a rod release position,means for mounting the lock means on the overshot body for limited axialmovement relative thereto between a datum position and a position axiallyinwardly of the datum position, and resiliently retaining the lock meansin the datum position, and a fitting mounted on the overshot body toextend axially inwardly thereof for operating the lock means to itsrelease position as the lock means moves relative the overshot body to aposition axially inwardly of the datum position.27. For being moved through a drill stem, an axially elongated core barrelinner tube assembly, a first overshot assembly for moving the core barrelinner tube assembly through the drill stem, said core barrel inner tubeassembly comprising means for receivingly retaining a core sample, a latchbody, means for mounting the core sample retaining means on the latch bodyaxially inwardly of the latch body, a latch mounted on the latch body forlimited axial movement relative thereto between a drill stem latch seatengaging position and a retracted position, means for resiliently urgingthe latch to the latch seat engaging position, an axially elongated latchrelease tube mounted on the latch body for limited movement between anaxial inner position permitting the latch moving to the latch seatengaging position and an axial outer position retracting the latch, afirst overshot engagable coupling member mounted on the latch body andadapted for being couplingly engaged by the first overshot assembly forlowering the latch body through the drill stem, a second coupling membermounted on the latch release tube and adapted for being couplingly engagedby a second overshot assembly for moving the latch release tube from thetube first position to the tube second position, said first couplingmember being extended through the second coupling member and axiallymovable relative thereto, and being of an axial length to extend axiallyoutwardly of the second coupling member in each of the latch release tubespositions, and the first overshot assembly for couplingly engaging thefirst coupling member including an overshot body having an axially innerend portion, coupling engaging means mounted on the overshot body innerend portion for couplingly engaging the first coupling member andretaining the coupling engagement therewith until more than apredetermined force is exerted thereto in a direction to move the overshotbody axially away from the latch body, and an overshot coupling rodattached to the overshot body to extend axially outwardly thereof, anovershot device, operable detent lock means for lockingly engaging saidovershot rod, said lock means being operable to a rod release position,means for mounting the lock means on the overshot device for limited axialmovement relative thereto between a datum position and a position axiallyinwardly of the last mentioned datum position, and resiliently retainingthe lock means in the said last mentioned datum position, a fittingmounted on the overshot device to extend axially inwardly thereof foroperating the lock means to its release position as the lock means movesrelative the overshot device to a position axially inwardly of said lastmentioned datum position, and means for attaching a wire line cable to theovershot device, said overshot device including a spindle, a lower jawelement fixedly secured to the spindle and an upper jaw element mounted onthe spindle for limited slidable movement for applying a hammering blow tothe lower jaw element.28. For lowering a wire line core barrel inner tube assembly having anovershot coupling member through a drill stem, an axially elongatedovershot body having an inner end portion and means for couplinglyengaging the overshot coupling rod and retaining the coupling engagementtherewith until more than a predetermined force is exerted in a directionto move the overshot body axially away from the overshot coupling rod, thelast mentioned means being mounted on the overshot body inner end portionand including operable detent lock means for lockingly engaging saidovershot rod, said lock means being operable to a rod release position,means for mounting the lock means on the overshot body for limited axialmovement relative thereto between a datum position and a position axiallyinwardly of the datum position, and resiliently retaining the lock meansin the datum position, and a fitting mounted on the overshot body toextend axially inwardly thereof for operating the lock means to itsrelease position as the lock means moves relative the overshot body to aposition axially inwardly of the datum position, and means for attaching awire cable to the overshot device axially remote from the lock means."}
{"WKU":"039306801","Title":"Modular structures for enclosing a vehicle load or passenger receiving","App_Date":"1973-07-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Roger L. Littlefield","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B60P  332","References":"807360;1025601;2324508;2324508;3155419;3155419;3163462;3205002;3574391","Claims":"What is claimed and desired to be secured by Letters Patent is:1. A conversion assembly for converting a truck having an open load orpassenger-carrying bed structure into a carrier for either confiningdetained persons or protecting passengers wherein said truck has upwardlyopening hollow stanchions extending upwardly from said bed structure, saidconversion assembly comprising a series of enclosure-defining knockdownpanels for enclosing said bed structure, a sub-assembly of said series ofpanels defining side and end wall portions of the enclosure defined bysaid series of panels, and said sub-assembly of panels being detachablymounted directly on said truck without the use of tool-manipulatedfasteners of any kind, each of the panels forming said side wall portionscomprising an inner frame, an outer frame fixed to said inner frame, apair of legs rigid with said inner frame and being adapted to be removablyslidably received in predetermined pair of said stanchions, and meansfixed to said outer frame for enclosing the frame space bordered by saidouter frame, said outer frame and said last mentioned means being disposedexteriorly of said pair of stanchions when said legs are received in saidpair of stanchions, and said means enclosing said frame space comprisinginner and outer screens fixed to said outer frame in spaced apart,essential parallel relation, with the outer one of said screens beingsufficiently resilient to have a spring effect for repelling thrownobjects.2. The conversion assembly defined in claim 1 wherein said inner screen isformed from a relatively stiff, expanded metal mesh, and wherein saidouter screen is formed from a material that obscures a view of theinterior of the enclosure from a position outside the enclosure.3. An assembly for converting a truck having an open load orpassenger-carrying bed structure into a carrier for either confiningdetained persons or protecting passengers, said assembly comprising meansadapted to be detachably mounted on said truck and defining an enclosurefor enclosing said bed structure and having opposed spaced apart sidewalls, front and rear end walls, and a top wall covering the spaceconfined by said side and end walls, door means forming a part of saidenclosure-defining means and being supported for displacement betweenclosed and opened positions to provide an opening for entering and leavingsaid enclosure, said door means defining at least a portion of said rearend wall, said enclosure-defining means restricting ingress and egressrelative to said enclosure except through said opening, said enclosuredefining means further including a series of separately formed knockdownpanels that define said side walls, said top wall and said front end wall,and means interlocking said panels without the use of tool-manipulatedfasteners of any kind and cooperating with said door means to prevent saidpanels from being displaced or removed from their enclosure-definingpositions to positions allowing ingress or egress relative to saidenclosure except upon predetermined displacement of said door means fromits closed position.4. An assembly for converting a truck having an open load orpassenger-carrying bed structure into a carrier for either confiningdetained persons or protecting passengers, said assembly comprising afirst sub-assembly having a series of separately formed knockdown panelsdetachably supported on said bed structure, a second sub-assembly havingat least one panel-like door and cooperating with said first sub-assemblyto define an enclosure having top, side and end walls for enclosing saidbed structure, said second sub-assembly being displaceably supported bysaid first sub-assembly to provide an opening for entering and leavingsaid enclosure, and means interlocking said panels and cooperating withsaid second sub-assembly to prevent disassembly of said panels when saidsecond sub-assembly is positioned to close said opening.5. A conversion assembly for converting a truck having an open load orpassenger-carrying bed structure into a carrier for confining detainedpersons or protecting passengers, said conversion assembly comprising anarray of separately formed knockdown panels detachably supported on saidbed structure and defining an enclosure for enclosing said bed structureto confine or protect persons occupying said bed structure, said enclosurebeing formed with opposed, spaced apart end walls, first and secondopposed spaced apart side walls extending between said end walls, and atop wall covering the space confined by said end and side walls, saidarray having first, second, and third sub-assemblies of said panels, saidfirst sub-assembly having at least one of said panels and defining one ofsaid end walls, said second sub-assembly having at least two of saidpanels respectively defining a portion of said first side wall and aportion of said second side wall, said third sub-assembly having at leastone panel defining a portion of said top wall, and means interlocking saidfirst, second, and third sub-assemblies to enable the panels of saidfirst, second, and third sub-assemblies to be assembled and disassembledonly in a single predetermined order.6. The conversion assembly defined in claim 5 wherein the order ofdisassembly of said sub-assemblies provided by said interlocking means isas follows: said third sub-assembly, said second sub-assembly, and firstsub-assembly.7. The conversion assembly defined in claim 6 wherein the panels of saidfirst, second, and third sub-assemblies cooperate to define two corners ofsaid enclosure.8. The conversion assembly defined in claim 7 wherein said two panelsdefining said portions of said first and second side walls are disposed inspaced apart opposed relation, wherein said at least one panel definingsaid portion of said top wall spans the space between said two panels thatdefine said portions of said first and second side walls, and wherein saidat least one panel defining said one of said end walls is disposedadjacent to correspondingly facing edges to said two panels that definesaid portions of said first and second side walls and of said at least onepanel that defines said portion of said top wall.9. The conversion assembly defined in claim 8 wherein said interlockingmeans comprises a member fixed to said at least one panel defining saidone of said end walls, said member having a leg portion overlapping theadjacent edge of said at least one top wall portion defining panel andbeing separably abuttable therewith to prevent said at least one top wallportion defining panel from being pushed or pulled upwardly and away fromsaid at least one panel defining said one of said end walls at least inthe region of said leg portion.10. The conversion assembly defined in claim 8 wherein said two panelsdefining said two portions of said first and second side walls each havean exterior protective panel portion and a further portion disposedinwardly of and fixed to said exterior portion, said at least one paneldefining said portion of said top wall being seated on said furtherportions of said two side wall portions defining panels between theexterior portions of said two side wall portion defining panels.11. The conversion assembly defined in claim 8 wherein said interlockingmeans comprise tabs on opposite sides of said at least one top wallportion defining panel, said tabs being separably interlockingly receivedin spaces between said exterior and further portions of said two side wallportion defining panels to prevent the upper edge of each of said two sidewall portion defining panels from being pushed or pulled away from said atleast one top wall portion defining panel.12. A conversion assembly for converting a truck having an open load orpassenger-carrying bed structure into a carrier for confining detainedpersons or protecting passengers, said conversion assembly comprising anarray of separately formed, knockdown panels detachably supported on saidbed structure to define an enclosure of inverted box-like configurationfor enclosing said bed structure, there being three of said panelsrespectively forming end wall, side wall, and top wall portions of saidenclosure and being disposed adjacent to each other to define two cornersof said enclosure, and means fixed on only one of said three panels forseparably interlocking said three panels without the use of fasteners ofany kind.13. A conversion assembly for converting a truck having an open bedstructure into a carrier for confining detained persons or protectingpassengers, said conversion assembly comprising an array of separatelyformed knockdown panels detachably supported on said bed structure todefine an enclosure for enclosing said bed structure to confine or protectpersons occupying said bed structure, said enclosure having opposed spacedapart end walls, opposed spaced apart side walls extending between saidend walls, and a top wall covering the space confined by said end and sidewalls, there being at least one of said panels defining each of said sidewalls and at least another one of said panels defining said top wall, theside wall-defining ones of said panels each having an exterior portion andan inner portion, said inner portion being formed with a top wall panelseating surface disposed at a level that is below the upper edge of saidexterior portion, said top wall-defining panel being seated on the innerportion seating surfaces of said side wall-defining panels and beingdisposed between and confined against sideward movement by the regions ofsaid exterior portions which extend above said seating surfaces.14. An assembly for converting a truck having an open load orpassenger-carrying bed structure into a carrier for either confiningdetained persons or protecting passengers, said assembly comprising meansadapted to be mounted on said truck for detaining or protecting persons onsaid bed structure and defining an enclosure for enclosing said bedstructure and having opposed spaced apart side walls, front and rear endwalls, and a top wall covering the space confined by said side and endwalls, door means forming a part of said enclosure-defining means andbeing supported for displacement between closed and opened positions toprovide an opening in one of said end walls for entering and leaving saidenclosure, said enclosure-defining means further including a series ofseparately formed knockdown panels that define said top wall, said sidewalls and the other of said end walls, and means interlocking said panelsand cooperating with said door means (a) to prevent said panels from beingdisplaced or removed from their assembled, enclosure-defining positions topositions allowing personnel ingress or egress relative to said enclosurewhen said door means is in its closed position and (b) to enabledisassembly of said panels upon predetermined displacement of said doormeans from said closed position.15. The assembly defined in claim 14 wherein each of said panels isdisposed adjacent to at least another one of said panels, and wherein saidinterlocking means comprises coacting formations respectively onadjacently disposed ones of said panels and being in separable seatingsurface engagement with each other, said panels being retained againstdisplacement from their assembled enclosure-defining positions only by theseparable seating surface engagement of said formations.16. An assembly for converting a truck having an open load orpassenger-carrying bed structure into a carrier for either confiningdetained persons or protecting passengers, wherein said truck has upwardlyopening hollow stanchions extending upwardly from said bed structure, saidassembly comprising means adapted to be mounted on said truck andincluding panel means and door means, said door means cooperating withsaid panel means for defining an enclosure enclosing said bed structureand having opposed spaced apart end walls, opposed spaced apart side wallsextending between said end walls, and a top wall covering the spaceconfined by said side and end walls, said door means providing an openingin one of said end walls for entering and leaving said enclosure, saidpanel means comprising a plurality of knockdown panels forming portions ofsaid side walls, and each of said knockdown panels comprising rigidstructural means comprising a pair of legs that are adapted to beremovably slidably received in a predetermined pair of said stanchions, aframe fixed to said structural means, and means fixed to said frame forenclosing the space bordered by said frame, said frame and said meansfixed to said frame for enclosing said space being disposed exteriorly ofsaid predetermined pair of stanchions in overlapping relation thereto whensaid legs are received in said pair of stanchions to block access to saidpair of stanchions from the exterior of said enclosure.17. An assembly for converting a truck having an open load orpassenger-carrying bed structure into a carrier for either confiningdetained persons or protecting passengers, said assembly comprising meansadapted to be detachably mounted on said truck and forming an enclosurefor enclosing said bed structure and having opposed spaced apart sidewalls, front and rear wall end walls and a top wall covering the spaceconfined by said side and end walls, door means forming a part of saidenclosure-defining means to provide an opening at said rear end wall forentering and leaving said enclosure, said enclosure-defining means furtherincluding a series of knockdown panels defining said side walls, said topwall and said front end wall, said panels blocking ingress and egressrelative to said enclosure except through said opening, and meansdetachably interlocking said panels to prevent each panel from beingremoved transversely of the enclosure-forming wall portion that itdefines, said interlocking means having portions that are accessible fromthe exterior of said enclosure, and all of the portions of saidinterlocking means that are accessible from the exterior of said enclosurebeing permanently fixed to predetermined ones of said panels.18. An assembly for converting a truck having an open load orpassenger-carrying bed structure into a carrier for either confiningdetained persons or protecting passengers, said assembly comprising meansadapted to be detachably mounted on said truck and forming an enclosurefor enclosing said bed structure and having opposed spaced apart sidewalls, front and rear wall end walls and a top wall covering the spaceconfined by said side and end walls, door means forming a part of saidenclosure-defining means to provide a security opening at said rear endwall for entering and leaving said enclosure, said enclosure-definingmeans further including a series of knockdown panels defining said sidewalls, said top wall and said front end wall, said panels blocking ingressand egress relative to said enclosure except through said opening, andmeans detachably interlocking said panels to prevent each panel from beingremoved transversely of the enclosure-forming wall portion that itdefines, said interlocking means having portions that are accessible fromthe interior of said enclosure, and all of the portions of saidinterlocking means that are accessible from the interior of said enclosurebeing permanently fixed to predetermined ones of said panels.19. An assembly for converting a truck having an open load orpassenger-carrying bed structure into a carrier for either confiningdetained persons or protecting passengers, wherein said truck has upwardlyopening hollow stanchions extending upwardly from said bed structure, saidassembly comprising means adapted to be mounted on said truck andincluding panel means and door means, said door means cooperating withsaid panel means for defining a security enclosure enclosing said bedstructure and having opposed spaced apart end walls, opposed spaced apartside walls, and a top wall covering the space confined by said side andend walls, said door means providing an opening in one of said end wallsfor entering and leaving said enclosure, said panel means cooperating withsaid door means to block ingress into and egress from said enclosure whensaid door means is held closed, said panel means comprising a firstplurality of knockdown panels forming portions of said side walls, andeach of said knockdown panels comprising rigid structural means having apair of legs that are adapted to be removably slidably received in apredetermined pair of said stanchions, a frame fixed to said structuralmeans and means fixed to said frame for blocking the space bordered bysaid frame to block ingress and egress through said space, said frame andsaid means fixed to said frame for blocking said space being disposedexteriorly of said predetermined pair of stanchions in overlappingrelation thereto when said legs are received in said pair of stanchions toblock access to said pair of stanchions from the exterior of saidenclosure, said panel means including a second plurality of knockdownpanels defining said top wall and the other of said end walls.20. The assembly defined in claim 19, wherein said means for blocking thespace bordered by said frame comprises a screen.21. An assembly for converting a truck having an open load orpassenger-carrying bed structure into a carrier for either confiningdetained persons or protecting passengers, said assembly comprising meansadapted to be mounted on said truck and including an array of separatelyformed, knockdown panels and door means, said door means cooperating withsaid panels for defining a security enclosure enclosing said bed structureand having opposed spaced apart end walls, opposed spaced apart sidewalls, and a top wall covering the space confined by said side and endwalls, said door means providing an opening in one of said end walls forentering and leaving said enclosure, said panels cooperating with saiddoor means to block ingress into and egress from said enclosure when saiddoor means is held closed, there being at least one of said panelsdefining each of said side walls and at least another one of said panelsdefining said top wall, the side wall-defining ones of said panels eachhaving (a) a frame, (b) means fixed to said frame for blocking the spacebordered by said frame, and (c) structural means fixed to said frame, saidstructural means being disposed on the inner side of said frame anddefining an upwardly facing top wall panel seating surface, said seatingsurface being disposed inwardly of said frame and at a level below theupper edge of said frame, said top wall-defining panel being seated on theseating surfaces defined by said structural means and being disposedbetween the regions of the frames of said side wall-defining panels whichextend above said seating surfaces, said regions of said frames extendingabove said seating surfaces being disposed to confine sideward movement ofsaid top wall-defining panel.22. The assembly defined in claim 21 wherein said truck has upwardlyopening stanchions extending upwardly from said bed structure, and whereineach of said side wall-defining panels includes a pair of leg portions,said leg portions being rigid with said structural means and arranged tobe removably slidably received in a pair of said stanchions upon assemblyof said side wall-defining panel on said bed structure.23. In combination with a truck having an open load or passenger-carryingbed structure and upwardly opening hollow stanchions extending upwardlyfrom said bed structure, an assembly detachably mounted on said truck andincluding panel means and door means, said door means cooperating withsaid panel means for defining a security enclosure enclosing said bedstructure and having opposed spaced apart end walls, opposed spaced sidewalls extending between said end walls, and a top wall covering the spaceconfined by said side and end walls, said door means providing an openingin one of said end walls for entering and leaving said enclosure, saidpanel means cooperating with said door means to block ingress into andegress from said enclosure when said door means is held closed, said panelmeans comprising a plurality of knockdown panels forming portions of saidside walls, and each of said knockdown panels comprising a frame, a pairof legs fixed to said frame and removably slidably received in apre-selected pair of said stanchions, and means fixed to said frame forblocking the space bordered by said frame, said frame and said blockingmeans being disposed exteriorly of said pre-selected pair of stanchions inoverlapping relation thereto when said legs are received in said pair ofstanchions to block access to said pre-selected pair of stanchions fromthe exterior of said enclosure.24. The combination defined in claim 23 wherein said blocking meanscomprises a screen.25. The combination defined in claim 23 wherein said panel means includes afurther plurality of knockdown panels that define said top wall and theother of said end walls.26. The combination defined in claim 25, wherein two knockdown panels ofsaid futher plurality of panels defines said other of said end walls, oneof said two panels being mounted on and supported by the other of said twopanels.27. The combination defined in claim 25 wherein said assembly furthercomprises means for detachably interlocking the side-wall-formingknockdown panels and said further plurality of said panels.28. In combination with a truck having an open load or passenger-carryingbed structure, an assembly detachably mounted on said truck for eitherconfining detained persons or protecting passengers on said bed structuresaid assembly comprising an array of separately formed, knockdown panelsand door means, said door means cooperating with said panels for defininga security enclosure enclosing said bed structure and having opposedspaced apart end walls, opposed spaced apart side walls, and a top wallcovering the space confined by said side and end walls, said door meansproviding an opening in one of said end walls for entering and leavingsaid enclosure, said panels cooperating with said door means to blockingress into and egress from said enclosure when said door means is heldclosed, there being at least one of said panels defining each of said sidewalls and at least another one of said panels defining said top wall, theside wall-defining ones of said panels each having (a) a frame, (b) meansfixed to same frame for blocking the space bordered by said frame, and (c)structural means fixed to said frame, said structural means being disposedon the inner side of said frame and defining an upwardly facing top wallpanel seating surface, said seating surface being disposed inwardly ofsaid frame and at a level below the upper edge of said frame, said topwall-defining panel being seated on the seating surfaces defined by saidstructural means and being disposed between the regions of the frames ofsaid side wall-defining panels which extend above said seating surfaces,said regions of said frames extending above said seating surfaces beingdisposed to confine sideward movement of said top wall-defining panel."}
{"WKU":"039306810","Title":"Automotive vehicle tilt cab latching devices","App_Date":"1974-10-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Arthur Malcolm Burton;Ronald Jost","Assignee":"General Motors Corporation","ICL_Class":"B62D 2300","References":"2427603;2995794;3825295","Claims":"We claim:1. In an automotive vehicle having a frame and a tilt cab adapted to betilted about a hinge axis at the front of the vehicle frame from a downposition to a raised position thereon, a tilt cab latching devicecomprising:a tilt cab member movable, upon tilting of the cab, into and out ofabutment with a member of said vehicle frame,and a toggle clamp operable to clamp said tilt cab member and said framemember together when said tilt cab is in the down position, said toggleclamp comprising:a latch housing secured on one of said tilt cab and frame members;a pivot bar pivotally mounted on said housing and pivotable about thelongitudinal axis of said pivot bar;a lever fixed at one end thereof on said pivot bar and operable to pivotsaid pivot bar about said axis;an over-centre link fixed at one end thereof on said pivot bar, and havingat its other end a link pin;a hook member of greater length than said over-centre link, and having twoopposed ends, one of which is pivotally mounted on said link pin;means connecting said hook member and said latch housing, said meanscomprising a slot formed in said hook member adjacent said one endthereof, and a guide-pin secured in said housing and extending throughsaid slot, the means constraining said hook member so that angularmovement of said lever into a first predetermined position effectsmovement of the hook member and the over-centre link into a position inwhich the over-centre link is at an angle to a line joining said pivot barand the position of abutment of said tilt cab and frame members, a linejoining the ends of the hook member is at an angle to said over-centrelink and the other end of said hook member is disengaged from the other ofsaid tilt cab and frame members;and movement of the lever towards a second predetermined position pivotssaid over-centre link and link pin into a position over-centre relative toa line joining said pivot bar axis and said abutment position of said tiltcab and frame members, and the means constrains the hook member to moveangularly about said link pin relative to said over-centre link wherebythe other end of the hook member is brought into engagement with saidother member to clamp together said tilt cab and frame members and latchsaid tilt cab to said frame.2. In an automotive vehicle having a frame and a tilt cab adapted to betilted about a hinge axis at the front of the vehicle frame from a downposition to a raised position thereon, a tilt cab latching devicecomprising:a tilt cab member movable, upon tilting of the cab, into and out ofabutment with a member of said vehicle frame;and a toggle clamp operable to clamp said tilt cab member and said framemember together when said tilt cab is in the down position, said toggleclamp comprising;a box-like structure having a base secured on said frame member, and afacing top side spaced from said base by two facing walls connected by athird wall and defining three sides of the box-like structure, saidbox-like structure having an open fourth side, said box-like structureforming a latch housing of said device;a pivot bar pivotally mounted in the two facing walls of said latch housingfor pivotal movement about the longitudinal axis of said pivot bar, saidpivot bar having one end thereof extending outwardly of one wall of saidhousing;a lever fixed at one end thereof on said pivot bar end, and having at itsother end a pivot pin;an over-centre link fixed at one end thereof on said pivot bar, and havingat its other end a link pin;a hook member of greater length than said over-centre link, and having twoopposed ends, one of which is pivotally mounted on said link pin withinsaid latch housing, the other end at least of said hook member extendingoutwardly of said latch housing through said open side thereof;means connecting said hook member and said latch housing, said meanscomprising an arcuate slot formed in said hook member adjacent said oneend thereof, and a guide pin extending through said arcuate slot andmounted at its ends in said two facing walls of said latch housing, themeans constraining said hook member so that angular movement of said leverinto a first predetermined position effects movement of the hook memberand the over-centre link into a position in which the over-centre link isat an angle to a line joining said pivot bar and the position of abutmentof said tilt cab and frame members, a line joining the ends of the hookmember is at an angle to said over-centre link and the other end of saidhook member is disengaged from the tilt cab member;and movement of the lever towards a second predetermined position pivotssaid over-centre link and said link pin into a position over-centrerelative to a line joining said pivot bar axis and said abutment positionof said tilt cab and frame members, and the means constrains the hookmember to move angularly about said link pin relative to said over-centrelink whereby the other end of the hook member is brought into engagementwith the tilt cab member to clamp together said tilt cab and frame membersand latch said tilt cab to said frame;and the curvature of said arcuate slot at one end portion thereof differsfrom the curvature of the remainder of said arcuate slot such thatrelative movement between said one end portion and the guide pin resultsin a greater angular movement of the hook member than results frommovement of the remainder of the slot about the guide pin, for quickinitial movement of said hook member into and out of engagement with saidtilt cab member.3. An automotive vehicle tilt cab latching device as defined in claim 2, inwhich the length of the guide pin is such as to permit flexing of theguide pin as the hook member is moved to and from its over-centreposition.4. An automotive vehicle tilt cab latching device as defined in claim 2, inwhich the other end of the hook member has a contoured portion whicheffects rolling contact with said tilt cab member as the hook member isbrought into engagement therewith.5. In an automotive vehicle having a frame and a tilt cab adapted to betilted about a hinge axis at the front of the vehicle from a down positionto a raised position thereon, the tilt cab having at least a back wall andtwo opposed side walls, a latching assembly comprising:two tilt cab member portions extending from said back wall and eachadjacent a respective one of said side walls, each tilt cab member portionbeing movable, upon tilting of the cab, into and out of abutment with asurface on a respective one of a pair of latch housings secured on theframe of the vehicle;and a pair of toggle clamps operable to clamp said tilt cab member portionsagainst said surfaces when said tilt cab is in the down position, eachtoggle clamp comprising:a box-like structure having a base secured on the frame of the vehicle, afacing top side spaced from said base by two facing wall portionsconnected by a third wall and defining three sides of the box-likestructure, said box-like structure having an open fourth side, saidbox-like structure forming a latch housing of said device, each facing topside defining the respective surface of the latch housing for abutment bythe respective tilt cab member portion;a pivot bar pivotally mounted in the two facing walls of said latch housingfor pivotal movement about the longitudinal axis of said pivot bar, saidpivot bar having one end extending outside one of said two facing walls;a lever fixed at one end thereof on said one end of the pivot bar, andhaving at its other end a pivot pin;an over-centre link fixed at one end thereof on said pivot bar, and havingat its other end a link pin;a hook member of greater length than said over-centre link having twoopposed ends, one of which is pivotally mounted on said link pin withinsaid latch housing, the other end at least of said hook member extendingoutwardly of said latch housing through said open side thereof, said otherend of said hook member having a contoured portion thereon which effectsrolling contact with said tilt cab member portion when said hook member isbrought into contact with said tilt cab member portion;means connecting said hook member and said latch housing, said meanscomprising an arcuate slot formed in said hook member adjacent said oneend thereof, and a guide pin extending through said arcuate slot andmounted at its ends in said two facing walls of the latch housing, themeans constraining the hook member so that angular movement of said leverinto a first predetermined position effects movement of the hook memberand the over-centre link into a position in which the over-centre link isat an angle to a line joining said pivot bar and the position of abutmentof said tilt cab member portion with said surface of said latch housing, aline joining the ends of the hook member is at an angle to saidover-centre link, and the other end of said hook member is disengaged fromsaid tilt cab member portion;and movement of said lever to a second predetermined position pivots saidover-centre link and said link pin to a position over-centre relative to aline joining said pivot bar axis and said abutment position of said tiltcab member portion with said surface of said latch housing, and the meansconstrains the hook member to move angularly about said link pin relativeto said over-centre link whereby the other end of said hook member isbrought into engagement with said tilt cab member portion, said contouredend portion of said hook member other end rolling over said tilt cabmember portion to clampingly abut said tilt cab member portion againstsaid latch housing surface and latch said tilt cab to said frame;said arcuate slot having one end portion thereof with a different curvaturefrom the remainder of said slot length such that relative movement betweensaid one end portion of said arcuate slot and the guide pin results in agreater angular movement of the hook member than results from movement ofthe remainder of the slot length about said guide pin to thereby effectquick initial movement of said hook member into and out of engagement withsaid tilt cab member portion."}
{"WKU":"039306828","Title":"Safety belt tension relieving apparatus","App_Date":"1974-09-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Frederick C. Booth","Assignee":"Allied Chemical Corporation","ICL_Class":"A62B 3500","References":"3679228;3682412;3700184;3741495;3771742;3804192;3817473;3847434","Claims":"I claim:1. In a vehicle safety belt system adapted to restrain an occupant in avehicle seat, the safety belt system including a shoulder belt and aretractor having a rewind mechanism biased to rewind the shoulder belt ona reel of the retractor, the improvement of a shoulder belt,tension-relieving apparatus adapted for relieving tension on the shoulderbelt by the rewind mechanism of the retractor, said shoulder belttension-relieving apparatus comprising:a pressure sensing means disposed in the back portion of the seat adjacentto the back of the seated occupant, said pressure sensing means adapted tosense a condition when the seated occupant is leaning against the backportion of his seat;a locking member disposed adjacent to a portion of the safety belt, havinga locking position and an unlocking position and being adapted to beactuated from its unlocking position to its locking position, said lockingmember in its locking position preventing further rewinding of theshoulder belt into the retractor;an electric actuating means mounted adjacent to said locking member,mechanically connected to said locking member and electrically connectedto said pressure sensing means, said electric actuating means actuatingsaid locking member to its locking position to thereby relieve the tensionon said shoulder belt produced by the rewind mechanism of the retractor inresponse to said pressure sensing means sensing said occupant leaningagainst said back; anda biasing means biasing said locking member in its unlocking position.2. The shoulder belt tension-relieving apparatus of claim 1 wherein: saidelectric actuating means is a solenoid having a plunger connected to saidlocking member.3. The shoulder belt tension-relieving apparatus of claim 2 and furthercomprising: a backing surface disposed on the opposite side of saidshoulder belt from said locking member.4. The shoulder belt tension relieving apparatus of claim 3 wherein: saidlocking member is a clamp bar adapted to press a portion of said shoulderbelt against said backing surface to prevent further rewinding of saidshoulder belt.5. The shoulder belt tension relieving apparatus of claim 4 wherein: saidclamp bar has a clamping portion and an actuated portion, said clampinghaving a knurled surface adapted to clamp against said shoulder belt, saidactuated portion being engaged by said plunger of said solenoid.6. The shoulder belt tensions-relieving apparatus of claim 5 wherein: saidactuated position of said clamping bar has an elongated slot; and saidplunger of said solenoid has a pin extending from said plunger into saidslot of said clamp bar, said pin thereby mechanically connecting saidplunger to said clamping bar.7. The shoulder belt tension-relieving apparatus of claim 1 wherein: saidlocking member is a locking pawl.8. The shoulder belt tension-relieving apparatus of claim 7 and furthercomprising: a ratchet wheel connected to the reel of the retractor andadapted to be locked by said locking pawl.9. In a vehicle safety belt system adapted to restrain an occupant in avehicle seat, the safety belt system including a shoulder belt and aretractor having a rewind mechanism biased to rewind the shoulder belt ona reel of the retractor, the improvement of a shoulder belt,tension-relieving apparatus adapted for relieving tension on the shoulderbelt by the rewind mechanism of the retractor, said shoulder belttension-relieving apparatus comprising:a pressure sensing means disposed in the back portion of the seat adjacentto the back of the seated occupant, said pressure sensing means adapted tosense a condition when the seated occupant is leaning against the backportion of his seat;a locking member disposed adjacent to a portion of the safety belt having alocking position and an unlocking position and being adapted to beactuated from its unlocking position to its locking position, said lockingmember in its locking position preventing further rewinding of theshoulder belt into the retractor;an electric actuating means mounted adjacent to said locking member,mechanically connected to said locking member and electrically connectedto said pressure sensing means, said electric actuating means actuatingsaid locking member to its locking position to thereby relieve the tensionon said shoulder belt produced by the rewind mechanism of the retractor;in response to said pressure sensing means sensing said occupant leaningagainst said back;a biasing means biasing said locking member in its unlocking position; anda backing surface disposed on the opposite side of said shoulder belt fromsaid locking member; wherein:said electric actuating means is a solenoid having a plunger connected tosaid locking member;said locking member is a clamp bar adapted to press a portion of saidshoulder belt against said backing surface to prevent further rewinding ofsaid shoulder belt, said clamp bar having a clamping portion and anactuated portion, said clamping portion having a knurled surface adaptedto clamp against said shoulder belt, said actuated portion being engagedby said plunger of said solenoid; said actuated portion of said clampingbar has an elongated slot; and said plunger of said solenoid has a pinextending from said plunger into said slot of said clamp bar, said pinthereby mechanically connecting said plunger to said clamping bar.10. In a vehicle safety belt system adapted to restrain an occupant in avehicle seat, the safety belt system including a shoulder belt and aretractor having a rewind mechanism biased to rewind the shoulder belt ona reel of the retractor, the improvement of a shoulder belt,tension-relieving apparatus adapted for relieving tension on the shoulderbelt by the rewind mechanism of the retractor, said shoulder belttension-relieving apparatus comprising:a pressure sensing means disposed in the back portion of the seat adjacentto the back of the seated occupant, said pressure sensing means adapted tosense a condition when the seated occupant is leaning against the backportion of his seat;a locking pawl disposed adjacent to a portion of the safety belt, having alocking position and an unlocking position and being adapted to beactuated from its unlocking position to its locking position, said lockingmember in its locking position preventing further rewinding of theshoulder belt into the retractor, said locking pawl having an engagingportion near one end thereof and an actuated portion near the opposite endthereof;an electric actuating means mounted adjacent to said locking member,mechanically connected to said locking member and electrically connectedto said pressure sensing means, said electric actuating means actuatingsaid locking member to its locking position to thereby relieve the tensionon said shoulder belt produced by the rewind mechanism of the retractor;in response to said pressure sensing means sensing said occupant leaningagainst said back;a biasing means biasing said locking member in its unlocking position; anda ratchet wheel connected to the reel of the retractor and adapted to beengaged by said engaging portion of said locking pawl; and wherein:said electric actuating means is a solenoid having a plunger connected tosaid actuated portion of said locking pawl."}
{"WKU":"039306836","Title":"Demountable pneumatic tire rim assembly","App_Date":"1974-11-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Graeme J. MacKeown","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B60B 2304","References":"1093071;1497725;3063488;3612614","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a demountable pneumatic tire rim assembly: a pneumatic tire rimassembly comprising a cylindrical support rim having a central mountingmeans thereon for fixed attachment to a vehicle, said support rimincluding a projecting portion extending therefrom, a removable rim havinga projecting portion corresponding to at least part of the projectingportion of said support rim whereby said portions are assembled incoextensive and overlapping relationship to each other and whereby saidremovable rim is removably fitted to said support rim and a tire may bemounted and inflated on said assembled support rim and removable rim, andlocking members on said removable rim which are formed by depressing thesurface of the rim to form a plurality of cavities at the edge thereof outof the plane of the surface of the removable rim and which are engageablewith corresponding locking members on said fixed support rim by relativemotion there between to remove or replace same, and to retain said rims incoextensive overlapping relationship to receive the tire which is inflatedthereon."}
{"WKU":"039306844","Title":"Automatic wafer feeding and pre-alignment apparatus and method","App_Date":"1973-10-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Cecil A. Lasch, Jr.;Laszlo Sipos;Karl Ursprung","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B65G 4724","References":"2293553;2791314;2855740;2878954;3297134;3415350;3441121;3618742;3645581;3651985","Claims":"We claim:1. A method of pre-aligning wafers prior to mask alignment or liketreatment thereof without handling, comprisingA. feeding generally circular wafers in sequence from a supply thereof,each of which includes a flat edge portion, to a pre-alignment station,B. providing reading means at said station capable of determiningautomatically when the flat edge portion of each wafer is in apredetermined orientation,C. rotating each said wafer in sequence at said pre-alignment stationbeneath said reading means on a directional fluid bearing which supportsand imparts rotational movement thereto until said reading means senseseach such wafer is in said predetermined orientation, andD. maintaining such orientation of each such wafer while transferring thesame to a mask alignment station from said pre-alignment station.2. The method of claim 1 in which the speed of rotation of said wafers atsaid pre-alignment station is varied during rotation and pre-alignmentthereof on said fluid bearing.3. The method of claim 1 which further includesE. feeding said wafers to said pre-alignment station on a fluid bearing.4. The method of claim 1 which further includesE. indexing said supply of said wafers to present individual wafers insequence for feeding to said pre-alignment station.5. The method of claim 1 which further includesE. transferring said wafers in sequence from said mask alignment station toa receiver station for collection in a magazine thereat.6. The method of claim 5 in which said wafer transfer is effected on afluid bearing.7. The method of claim 1 which further includesE. providing additional wafers in sequence to a buffer station adjacentsaid pre-alignment station ready for introduction to said pre-alignmentstation when said station is unoccupied.8. The method of claim 7 which includesF. initiating rotation of said wafers during introduction of the same insequence into said pre-alignment station from said buffer station.9. The method of claim 1 which further includesE. passing said wafers in sequence back through said pre-alignment stationfrom said mask alignment station prior to transferring the same to areceiver station for collection thereat.10. The method of claim 1 which further includesE. providing a discharge magazine at a receiver station spaced from saidpre-alignment station, andF. indexing said discharge magazine in sequence as individual wafers aretransferred thereto from said mask alignment station.11. The method of claim 1 in which said wafers are rotated at saidpre-alignment station on a directional fluid bearing which supports andimparts rotational movement thereto.12. The method of claim 11 in which the speed of rotation of said wafers atsaid pre-alignment station is varied during rotation and alignment thereofon said fluid bearing.13. A method of pre-aligning wafers prior to mask alignment or liketreatment thereof without manual handling, comprising,A. feeding generally circular wafers in sequence from a supply thereof,each of which includes a flat edge portion, to a buffer station adjacent apre-alignment station,B. providing reading means at said pre-alignment station capable ofdetermining automatically when the flat edge portion of each wafer is in apredetermined orientation,C. providing additional wafers in sequence at said buffer station adjacentsaid pre-alignment station when such station is unoccupied,D. initiating rotation of each said wafer during introduction of the samein sequence into said pre-alignment station from said buffer station,E. continuing rotation of each said wafer at said pre-alignment stationbeneath said reading means until said reading means senses each such waferis in said predetermined orientation and then halting rotation thereof,andF. maintaining the predetermined orientation of each said wafer whiletransferring the same to a mask alignment station from said pre-alignmentstation.14. An apparatus for pre-aligning wafers prior to mask alignment or othertreatment thereof, comprisingA. means for presenting individual wafers in sequence to a pre-alignmentstation, each such wafer including a flat portion for use in suchpre-alignment,B. means at said pre-alignment station for rotating each said wafer at saidstation,C. reading means at said station for determining automatically when theflat edge portion of each said wafer is in a predetermined orientation,D. said means for rotating wafers at said pre-alignment station, comprising"}
{"WKU":"039306852","Title":"Solids flow control device","App_Date":"1974-10-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Thomas Henry Milliken","Assignee":"Western States Mining Partners, Ltd.  B ","ICL_Class":"B65G 5330;B65G  306","References":"2692702","Claims":"I claim:1. A solids flow control device for controlling the rate of flow and thedistribution of flow of solids in a continuous counter current contactbetween liquid and solids, comprisinga. a vessel provided with liquid intake means near its bottom receivingupwardly directed liquid for interaction with a bed of solids free to movedownwardly in the vessel,b. a series of rotatable rolls occupying the total cross section of thebottom of the vessel, said rolls being axially parallel and grouped inpairs in which the rolls of each pair turn counter to one another, eachpair being spaced from an adjacent pair,c. a series of horizontal baffles located above the spaces between pairs ofrolls, said baffles extending the length of the rolls and over the twonearest rolls to about their vertical center lines, andd. means rotating the rolls.2. The device defined by claim 1, which includes a hopper connected to thevessel below the series of rolls for receiving interacted liquid-solids,and a lift conduit communicating with the hopper.3. The device defined by claim 1, in which the vessel is cylindrical and isuniform in diameter throughout its height including the portion occupiedby said rolls and baffles.4. The device defined by claim 1, in which the rolls comprise a metallictubular body and a resilient sleeve covering the body.5. The device defined by claim 1, in which each baffle comprises ahorizontal base member spaced from the rolls and an upper angle stripspaced from and parallel to said base member, said angle strip supportingsolids in said moving bed and guiding the solids to passage in fluidbetween the baffle base member and rolls and into the spaces betweenadjacent pairs of rolls.6. The device defined by claim 5, in which each baffle includeslongitudinal side walls extending upwardly from the base member and spacedfrom the angle strip for distribution of liquid evenly over the horizontalcross section of the vessel through the spaces between side walls andangle strip.7. The device defined by claim 5, in which the baffles are movable toadjust the space between baffles and rolls so that the angle of repose ofthe solids in the liquid passing between the baffles and nearest rolls isnot exceeded by the angle of a line drawn from the bottom edge of thebaffle tangentially to the nearest roll.8. The device defined by claim 7, in which the baffles are movablerelatively to the rolls in vertical directions, and a line drawn from thebottom edge of the baffle tangentially to the nearest roll may be variedby altering the width of the baffle base member.9. A solids flow control for controlling the rate of flow and thedistribution of flow of solids in a continuous counter current contactbetween liquid and solids comprisinga. a vessel uniform in horizontal cross section throughout its heightprovided with liquid intake means near its bottom receiving upwardlydirected liquid for interaction with a bed of solids free to movedownwardly in the vessel,b. a series of rotatable rolls occupying the total cross section of thebottom of the vessel, said rolls being axially parallel and grouped inpairs in which the rolls of each pair turn counter to one another, eachpair being spaced from an adjacent pair of rolls,c. a series of horizontal baffles located above the spaces between pairs ofrolls, said baffles having base members which extend the length of therolls and over the two nearest rolls to about their vertical center lines,side walls extending upwardly from the base members and forming with saidbase members conduits for liquid, and upper angle strips spaced from theside walls supporting solids in their passage downwardly to the rolls andbetween pairs of rolls,d. a liquid-solids receiving hopper connected to the bottom of the vesselbelow the rolls, ande. means rotating the rolls.10. The device defined by claim 9, in which the means rotating the rollscomprises a sprocket wheel on an end of each roll, a chain engaging saidsprockets, and a motor driving the chain.11. The device defined by claim 9, in which the baffles are movable toadjust the space between the baffles and rolls so that the angle of a linedrawn from the bottom edge of the baffle tangentially to the nearest rollexceeds the angle of repose of the solids in the liquid passing betweenthe baffles and nearest rolls.12. The device defined by claim 11, in which the baffles are movablerelatively to the rolls in vertical directions, and a line drawn from thebottom edge of the baffle tangentially to the nearest roll may be variedby altering the width of the baffle base member."}
{"WKU":"039306860","Title":"Air brake blend back proportioning valve","App_Date":"1974-05-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Edward S. Orzel","Assignee":"The Weatherhead Company","ICL_Class":"B60T 1536","References":"3011833;3228731;3428071;3473849;3653722","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A fluid pressure proportioning valve comprising a housing having aninlet port and an outlet port, a shuttle piston slidably disposed in saidhousing, said shuttle piston having an inlet portion and an outletportion, said inlet portion carrying a valve member movable between anopen position and a closed position for throttling flow from said inletport to said outlet port to control increases in pressure in said outletport in response to increases in pressure in said inlet port, said inletportion having a predetermined lateral cross-sectional inlet area exposedto inlet port pressure under all conditions, an outlet diaphragm having apredetermined lateral cross-sectional outlet area exposed to outletpressure under all conditions, said outlet diaphragm having a radiallyouter portion secured to said housing and a radially inner portion securedto and acting against said outlet portion, said outlet portion being in arest position and said outlet diaphragm having a first predeterminedlateral cross-sectional area of its outlet area of at least zero actingagainst said housing and a second predetermined lateral cross-sectionalarea of its outlet area exceeding zero acting against said outlet portionwhen said outlet port pressure is greater than zero and less than a firstpredetermined pressure, said inlet and outlet portions being constructedand arranged to move said valve member between said open position and saidclosed position to maintain increases in outlet port pressure proportionalto but less than increases in inlet port pressure when said outlet portpressure is greater than zero and less than said first predeterminedpressure, said outlet diaphragm having a third predetermined lateralcross-sectional area of its outlet area greater than said first areaacting against said housing when said outlet port pressure is greater thansaid first predetermined pressure, said outlet portion being axiallymovable relative to said inlet portion from said rest position to adisplaced position to increase said area of said outlet area actingagainst said housing from said first area to said third area, said outletportion being in said displaced position when said outlet pressure exceedssaid first predetermined pressure, and said inlet and outlet portionsbeing constructed and arranged to move said valve member between said openposition and said closed position to maintain increases in outlet portpressure proportional to but greater than increases in inlet port pressurewhen said outlet port pressure exceeds said first predetermined pressure.2. A fluid pressure proportioning valve as defined in claim 1 including aspring carried by one of said inlet and outlet portions, and said outletportion being biased by said spring toward said rest position when saidoutlet pressure is less than said first predetermined pressure.3. A fluid pressure proportioning valve as defined in claim 2 wherein saidspring is preloaded to prevent movement of said outlet portion from saidrest position to said displaced position when said outlet pressure is lessthan said first predetermined pressure.4. A fluid pressure proportioning valve as defined in claim 3 wherein saidoutlet portion includes abutment means engaging said spring and movingagainst the preload of said spring when said outlet port pressure isgreater than said first predetermined pressure.5. A fluid pressure proportioning valve as defined in claim 1 wherein saidinlet portion and said outlet portion cooperatively define a referencepressure chamber, and said reference pressure chamber is isolated fromsaid inlet pressure and from said outlet pressure under all conditions.6. A fluid pressure proportioning valve as defined in claim 5 wherein saidinlet portion and said outlet portion each include a predetermined lateralcross-sectional area exposed to reference chamber pressure.7. A fluid pressure proportioning valve as defined in claim 1 wherein saidvalve member is movable to said open position to open communicationbetween said inlet port and said outlet port when said outlet portpressure exceeds another predetermined pressure greater than said firstmentioned predetermined pressure, and said inlet portion and said outletportion are constructed and arranged to maintain increases in outlet portpressure equal to increases in inlet port pressure when said outlet portpressure exceeds said other predetermined pressure.8. A fluid pressure proportioning valve comprising a housing having aninlet port and an outlet port, a shuttle piston slidably disposed in saidhousing, said shuttle piston having an inlet end face and an outlet endface, said inlet and outlet end faces each including a diaphragm having aradially outer portion secured to said housing, said inlet and outletdiaphragms being axially spaced apart and cooperatively defining in saidhousing a reference pressure chamber, said reference pressure chamberbeing constructed and arranged such that it is isolated from pressure insaid inlet port and from pressure in said outlet port under allconditions, said inlet and outlet diaphragms each having one side exposedto the pressure in said reference pressure chamber, said inlet diaphragmhaving another side which carries a valve surface movable between an openposition and a closed position for throttling flow from said inlet port tosaid outlet port to control increases in pressure in said outlet port inresponse to increases in pressure in said inlet port, said inlet end facehaving a predetermined cross-sectional inlet area on said other side ofsaid inlet diaphragm exposed to pressure in said inlet port under allconditions constructed and arranged such that the pressure in said inletport acting against said inlet area urges said valve surface toward saidopen position, said outlet diaphragm having another side, said outlet endface having a predetermined cross-sectional outlet area on said other sideof said outlet diaphragm exposed to pressure in said outlet portconstructed and arranged such that the pressure in said outlet port actingagainst said outlet area urges said valve surface toward said closedposition when said outlet port pressure is less than a predeterminedpressure, said outlet area being axially movable relative to said inletarea from a rest position to a displaced position, said outlet area beingin said rest position when said outlet port pressure is less than saidpredetermined pressure, said outlet area being in said displaced positionwhen said outlet pressure exceeds said predetermined pressure, and saidoutlet area being constructed and arranged such that the pressure in saidoutlet port acting against said outlet area is inoperative to urge saidvalve surface toward said closed position but urges said outlet areaagainst said housing when said outlet area is in said displaced position.9. A fluid pressure proportioning valve as defined in claim 8 including aspring disposed in said reference pressure chamber acting between saidinlet area and said outlet area, and said outlet area being biased by saidspring toward said rest position when said outlet pressure is less thansaid predetermined pressures."}
{"WKU":"039306879","Title":"Signal generating circuit for anti-skid brake control apparatus","App_Date":"1974-07-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hiroyuki Amano","Assignee":"Aisin Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha","ICL_Class":"B60T  800","References":"3768873;3825307;3841712","Claims":"I claim:1. A signal generating circuit for actuating an anti-skid brake actuatorcomprising at least a pair of first and second wheel means,said first wheel means comprising a first wheel, and a first sensing meansincluding a first sensing coil sensing rotational conditions of said firstwheel and generating a first signal in response thereto,a first detecting circuit electrically connected to said first sensing coiland detecting faulty conditions thereof thereby generating a second signalin response thereto,said second wheel means comprising a second wheel and a second sensingmeans including a second sensing coil sensing rotational conditions ofsaid second wheel and generating a third signal in response thereto,a second detecting circuit electrically connected to said second sensingcoil and detecting faulty conditions thereof thereby generating a fourthsignal in response thereto anda logic circuit for receiving said four signals and generating first andsecond output signals therefrom a first of which corresponds to the firstsignal of said first sensing coil and second of which corresponds to thethird signal of said second sensing coil under normal anti-skid brakeoperation, whereby upon reception of said second signal in response to afaulty condition of said first sensing coil, said first output signal isentirely substituted for and directly replaced by said third signal of thenon-faulty second sensing coil.2. A signal generating circuit as claimed in claim 1, wherein each of saidpair of first and second sensing means further comprises a convertercircuit electrically connected to said corresponding sensing coil therebyconverting said first signal into pulsed wave form.3. A signal generating circuit as claimed in claim 2, wherein eachdetecting circuit comprises first and second operational amplifiers, saidfirst operational amplifiers detecting shorted conditions of therespective sensing coils, and said second operational amplifiers detectingrespectively open circuit conditions thereof.4. A signal generating circuit as claimed in claim 3, wherein each of saiddetecting circuits further comprises a luminous diode informing thetroubled conditons of each sensing coil upon said second or fourth signalbeing generated.5. A signal generating circuit as claimed in claim 1 further comprising acancelling circuit inserted between said first and second wheel means andsaid logic circuit and receiving said second signals of said first andsecond wheel means whereby upon reception of said second and fourthsignals of said first and second detecting circuits, anti-skid brakeoperation is substituted by normal brake operation independently of saidfirst and second output signals of said logic circuit.6. A signal generating circuit as claimed in claim 5, wherein saidcancelling circuit is electrically connected to said anti-skid brakeactuator thereby controlling the actuation thereof.7. A signal generating circuit for anti-skid brake system including atleast a pair of first and second sensing coils correlated to first andsecond wheels for sensing rotational conditions of said first and secondwheels, respectively, and generating first and second signals in responsethereto, wherein upon faulty conditions occuring in either one of saidfirst and second sensing coils, the signal of the other one of said firstand second sensing coils is entirely substituted to directly replace thesignal of said faulty sensing coil in order to maintain anti-skid brakeoperation even in the event that one of the sensing coils is faulty."}
{"WKU":"039306887","Title":"Anti-skid control system","App_Date":"1974-10-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James E. Rau;Rogell Van Wyk;George A. Watson","Assignee":"Rockwell International Corporation","ICL_Class":"B60T  808","References":"3235036;3508795","Claims":"We claim;1. A digital machine method for augmenting braking control of a brakedwheeled vehicle employing fluid pressure operated wheel brakes, comprisingthe step of selectively modulating the fluid pressure applied to the valveof at least one braked wheel so as to cause the braking control to trackthe knee of the road torque and wheel velocity versus time envelope.2. The method of claim 1 in which said step includes the set of iterativesteps ofpreselectively relieving an applied brake pressure to said braked wheel inresponse to either wheel deceleration thereof being greater than apreselectively large first level or the combination of a wheeldeceleration of a lesser preselected second level and a wheel velocitywithin a preselected first range of upper and lower velocity levels; andpreselectively restoring an applied wheel brake pressure to said brakedwheel for a period not in excess of a preselected first mode interval inresponse to said wheel deceleration being less than said second lesserdeceleration level and said wheel velocity being at least equal to asecond velocity level less than said first range of upper and lowervelocity levels.3. The method of claim 2 in which said first interval is substantiallyequal to ten times the response time of said valve.4. The method of claim 2 in which there is further included the step ofremoving braking control augmentation in response toeither the existence for a first preselected mode duration of the recitedstep of preselectively relievingor the existence for a second preselected mode duration of said recitedstep of preselectively restoring.5. The method of claim 4 wherein there is included the alternative stepintermediate said step of iterative steps and said step of removingbraking control augmentation the further alternative step of adaptivelyreducing the pressure attenuation provided by said step for relieving onlyin response to wheel velocity decreasing below said velocity limit (6fps).6. The method of claim 2 in which there is included the further stepintermediate said step of relieving and a next step subsequent thereto ofthe further step of adaptively reducing the pressure attenuation providedby said step for relieving only in response to wheel velocity decreasingbelow said velocity limit (6 fps).7. A digital machine method for augmenting braking control of a brakedwheel vehicle employing fluid pressure operated wheel brakes, comprisingthe step of selectively modulating the fluid pressure applied to the valveof at least one braked wheel so as to cause the braking control to trackthe knee of the road torque and wheel velocity versus time envelope, andincluding an additional and antecedent initial step of modulating theapplied fluid pressure as a preselectively delayed and progressivelyincreasing attenuated single test pressure pulse for a preselected pulsetime interval, the delay corresponding to the delay time of said valve andsaid pulse interval corresponding to the rise time of said valve.8. A digital machine method for augmenting braking control of a brakedwheeled vehicle employing fluid pressure operated wheel brakes, comprisingthe step of selectively modulating the fluid pressure applied to the valveof at least one braked wheel so as to cause the braking control to trackthe knee of the road torque and wheel velocity versus time envelope, whichsaid step includes the set of iterative steps ofpreselectively relieving an applied brake pressure to said braked wheel inresponse to either wheel deceleration thereof being greater than apreselectively large first level or the combination of a wheeldeceleration of a lesser preselected second level and a wheel velocitywithin a preselected first range of upper and lower velocity levels; andpreselectively restoring an applied wheel brake pressure to said brakedwheel for a period not in excess of a preselected first mode interval inresponse to said wheel deceleration being less than said second lesserdeceleration level and said wheel velocity being at least equal to asecond velocity level less than said first range of upper and lowervelocity levels,and including an additional and antecedent initial step ofmodulating the applied fluid pressure as a preselectively delayed andprogressively increasing attenuated single test pressure pulse for apreselected pulse time interval, the delay corresponding to the delay timeof said valve and said pulse interval corresponding to the rise time ofsaid valve.9. A digital machine method for augmenting braking control of a brakedwheeled vehicle employing fluid pressure operated wheel brakes, comprisingthe step of selectively modulating the fluid pressure applied to the valveof at least one braked wheel so as to cause the braking control to trackthe knee of the road torque and wheel velocity versus time envelope, andincluding an additional and antecedent initial step of attenuativelymodulating the applied fluid pressure as a single initial test pressurepulse of a preselected pulse width.10. The method of claim 9 in which said antecedent step and said iterativesteps include the sequential limitation that said set of said iterativesteps following said antecedent step commence with said step ofpreselectively restoring.11. A digital machine method for augmenting braking control of a brakedwheeled vehicle employing fluid pressure operated wheel brakes, comprisingthe step of selectively modulating the fluid pressure applied to the valveof at least one braked wheel so as to cause the braking control to trackthe knee of the road torque and wheel velocity versus time envelope, whichsaid step includes the set of iterative steps ofpreselectively relieving an applied brake pressure to said braked wheel inresponse to either wheel deceleration thereof being greater than apreselectively large first level or the combination of a wheeldeceleration of a lesser preselected second level and a wheel velocitywithin a preselected first range of upper and lower velocity levels; andpreselectively restoring an applied wheel brake pressure to said brakedwheel for a period not in excess of a preselected first mode interval inresponse to said wheel deceleration being less than said second lesserdeceleration level and said wheel velocity being at least equal to asecond velocity level less than said first range of upper and lowervelocity levels,and including an additional and antecedent initial step of attenuativelymodulating the applied fluid pressure as a single initial test pressurepulse of a preselected pulse width.12. The method of claim 11 in which said antecedent step and said iterativesteps include the sequential limitation that said set of said iterativesteps following said antecedent step commence with said step ofpreselectively restoring."}
{"WKU":"039306895","Title":"Drive belt assembly for snowmobiles","App_Date":"1974-05-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kenneth A. Maki","Assignee":"Arctic Enterprises, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B62D 5524","References":"2786725;3623780;3680926;3758170;3762779;3790231;3829174","Claims":"What I claim and desire to secure by Letters Patent is:1. A drive belt assembly for a snowmobile, said assembly comprising, incombination, an endless drive belt operatively and drivably supported onsaid snowmobile, first and second lateral edges defined on said drivebelt, longitudinally spaced rigid metallic drive cleats securely mountedon the outer surface of said drive belt, each of said cleats extendingtransversely partially across said belt, each of said cleats having firstand second end portions, said second end portion being spaced inwardlyfrom said second edge, an outer surface portion defined on said beltadjacent each of said cleats between said second end portion and saidsecond edge, and flexible upright means projecting from each of said outersurface portions, said cleats and said flexible means cooperating toprovide forward traction for said snowmobiles while substantially avoidingside slippage of said snowmobile.2. The drive belt assembly of claim 1 including first and second sets ofdrive cleats, each of said first end portions being adjacent said firstedge, and each of said second end portions being spaced inwardly from saidsecond edge, said second set of drive cleats being alternately mounted andlongitudinally spaced on said belt, and each of said outer surfaceportions is defined longitudinally between two of said first end portionsand transversely between said second end portion of one of said cleats andsaid second edge.3. The drive belt assembly of claim 2 wherein said endless drive beltcomprises first, second and third transversely spaced belt members, saidfirst set of cleats extends substantially across only said first andsecond belts, and said second set of cleats extends substantially acrossonly said second and third belts, and said outer surface portions and saidflexible means are positioned only on said first and third belts.4. The drive belt assembly of claim 1 wherein said flexible means projectfrom said outer surface portion to a height which is at least slightlymore than the height of each of said cleats.5. The drive belt assembly of claim 1 wherein said flexible means are eachunitarily formed with said drive belt.6. The drive belt assembly of claim 1 wherein each of said flexible meansis in substantially direct transverse alignment with each of said partialcleats.7. The drive belt assembly of claim 1 wherein said flexible means areunitarily formed with said drive belt, said flexible cleats extend to aheight at least slightly beyond the height of each of said cleats, andsaid flexible means are each in substantially direct transverse alignmentwith each of said cleats."}
{"WKU":"039306909","Title":"Agitator shaft seal","App_Date":"1975-01-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Roy F. Broyhill","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F16C  124;F16C 3372","References":"1304231;2518338;2829931;3190702;3359048;3606260;3718209","Claims":"I claim:1. A method of applying a shaft seal to an agitator shaft for a tank forcontaining fluids, comprising the steps of:providing an opening in the tank wall substantially larger than thediameter of the shaft,arranging a portion of the shaft within the tank by passing it axiallythrough the opening therein so that a portion remains exteriorly of thetank,providing full and complete support for the shaft exteriorly of the tankand free of attachment thereto,encasing the shaft exteriorly of the tank with a packing gland equippedseal unit having one end with a bore complementary to said opening, andconnecting said one end of said seal unit to the tank at the point of theopening therein.2.  A method as defined in claim 1 including providing bearing supports forthe shaft exteriorly of the tank and free of attachment thereto.3. A method as defined in claim 1 including providing the seal unit with aflexible tubing connection between the packing gland and the opening inthe tank to absorb any torque from the packing gland.4.  In a seal unit for an agitator shaft of the type used for mixing andstirring fluids within a tank, the combination of:an elongated shaft,bearing means disposed exteriorly of said tank and free of attachmentthereto for supporting said shaft,a housed seal unit journalled on said shaft exteriorly of said tank,said seal unit including a fitting member having a bore substantiallylarger than the diameter of said shaft,said tank being provided with an opening corresponding in size to the borein said fitting member,one end portion of said shaft extended axially through said fitting memberand said opening into said tank, andmeans for releasably connecting said fitting member to said tank at thepoint of said opening.5. A device as defined in claim 4 wherein said housed seal unit comprises:a packing gland assembly provided with a through bore, anda flexible tubing secured at one end to said packing gland assembly andsecured at its other end to said fitting member.6. A device as defined in claim 5 including means attached to said housedseal unit exteriorly of said tank and free of attachment thereto wherebysaid means and said flexible tubing absorbs torque from said packing glandassembly.7.  A seal unit as defined in claim 5 including a shaft alignment bushingmounted in the bore of said packing gland assembly."}
{"WKU":"039306917","Title":"Swing pad bearing","App_Date":"1974-04-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jerome Greene","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F16C  704;F16C 1703;F16C 1706;F16C 2706","References":"1117506;1173369;1293471;1331108;1684693;1825519;2362667;2424028;2577798;2621090;2691556;2744799;2955003;3011839;3398996;3398997;3495886;3635534","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A bearing having opposing relatively moving members including:a plurality of pads mounted on one of said relatively moving members andinterposed between said members;each of said pads having a face portion and a base portion;a fluid lubricant in contact with the bearing pads and said relativelymoving members;means responsive to the relative movement of the members to cause the faceportion of each of said pads to swing in the direction of motion of theother of said members about a center of rotation positioned outside saidpad in the direction of said other member.2. A bearing as claimed in claim 1 in which said pad comprises:a face member;a base member, with an arcuate low friction interface between said base andsaid face members;said interface having its center of curvature outside of the pad and in thedirection of the other of said opposing members.3. A bearing as claimed in claim 1 in which said means includes ametal-elastomer laminate bonded to said face portion on one side and tothe base portion on the other side.4. A bearing having opposing stationary and moving members including:a plurality of load bearing pads interposed between said moving and saidstationary member;each of said pads having a face portion and a base portion;a fluid in contact with the load bearing pads and the moving member;means to cause the face of each of said pads to swing in the direction ofmotion of the moving member when under load, said means including ametal-elastomer laminate bonded to said face portion on one side and tothe base portion on the other side, said metal-elastomer laminate havingarcuate lamina with the center of curvature of the arc lying outside ofsaid pad and in the direction of the opposing member.5. A bearing as claimed in claim 4 in which the moment of the load force isequal and opposite to the moment of the friction forces under operatingconditions.6. A bearing as claimed in claim 4 in which said metal-elastomer laminateprovides for load equalization between the load bearing pads.7. A hydrodynamic bearing pad for supporting a relatively movable member inlow-friction relationship through a lubricating fluid medium, said padcomprising a swingable face portion disposed adjacent said movable member,and means for supporting said face portion for swinging motion about acenter of rotation disposed in a direction towards said movable member andaway from said face portion, said swinging motion including a component ofmotion parallel to and in the direction of motion of said relativelymovable member and a component along the perpendicular through the centerof rotation to cause a swinging movement of said face portion about saidcenter of rotation.8. The hydrodynamic bearing pad recited in claim 7, wherein said means forsupporting said face portion for swinging motion comprises a relativelystationary base element, the said face portion and base elementintersecting along an arcuate interface, the center of curvature of saidarcuate interface lying in the direction of said movable member and awayfrom said face portion, said interface comprising a relativelylow-friction joint between said face portion and said base element in adirection parallel to said arcuate interface.9. The hydrodynamic bearing pad recited in claim 7, wherein said means forsupporting said face portion for swinging motion comprises a relativelystationary base element, the said face portion and base element beingjoined together along an arcuate interface by an elastomeric material thatis relatively rigid in a radial direction with respect to said arcuateinterface, and is relatively yielding in a direction parallel to saidarcuate interface, the center of curvature of said arcuate interface lyingin the direction of said movable member and away from said face member.10. The hydrodynamic bearing pad recited in claim 9, wherein saidelastomeric material is a composite elastomer-inelastic laminate.11. A hydrodynamic bearing arrangement for supporting a movable loadapplying member in low-friction relationship through a lubricating fluidmedium, said bearing arrangement comprising a plurality of bearing padsbetween said movable load applying member and a relatively stationarysupport structure, each bearing pad including a swingable face portiondisposed adjacent said movable member, and means for supporting said faceportion for swinging motion about a center of rotation disposed in adirection towards said movable member and away from said face portion,said swinging motion including a component of motion parallel to thedirection of motion of said relatively movable member and a rotationalcomponent about an axis extending laterally transversely of said directionof motion, said face portion of each pad being swingable to a dynamicallystable inclined position under the combined influences of friction andload forces acting thereon to produce a hydrodynamic lubricantwedge-shaped gap between said movable member and face portion, said gapcovering in the direction of motion of said movable member.12. The hydrodynamic bearing arrangement recited in claim 11, wherein saidmeans for supporting each face portion of each of said pads comprises arelatively stationary base element, each face portion and base elementintersecting along an arcuate interface, the center of curvation of saidarcuate interface lying in a direction towards said movable member andaway from said face portion, said interface comprising a relativelylow-friction joint between said face portion and said base element.13. The hydrodynamic bearing arrangement recited in claim 11, wherein saidmeans for supporting each face portion of each of said pads comprises arelatively stationary base element, each face portion and base elementbeing joined together along a arcuate interface by an elastomeric materialthat is relatively rigid in a radial direction with respect to saidarcuate interface, and is relatively yielding in a direction parallel tosaid arcuate interface, the center of curvature of said arcuate interfacelying in a direction towards said movable member and away from each ofsaid face portions.14. The hydrodynamic bearing arrangement recited in claim 13, wherein saidelastomeric material is a composite elastomer-inelastic laminate.15. The hydrodynamic bearing arrangement recited in claim 13, wherein saidelastomeric material is slightly yieldable in a radial direction withrespect to said arcuate interface to provide for load equalization betweensaid bearing pads and to accommodate minor angular displacements of saidface portions relative to said base portions.16. A hydrodynamic bearing pad for supporting a relatively movable loadapplying member in low-friction relationship through a lubricating fluidmedium, said pad comprising a face portion disposed adjacent said movablemember, means supporting said pad for swinging motion about an axis ofswinging motion positioned outside said face portion and towards saidmovable member, said swinging motion occurring in response to friction andload forces resulting from relative motion between said movable member andsaid face portion of said pad to produce a hydrodynamic lubricantwedge-shaped gap between said movable member and said face portion, saidgap converging in the direction of motion of said movable member."}
{"WKU":"039306925","Title":"Combined radial and thrust bearing","App_Date":"1975-01-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Charles Edward Condon, Jr.;Charles Warrell Shattuck","Assignee":"The Torrington Company","ICL_Class":"F16C 1904","References":"3157980;3168359;3341263;3632178","Claims":"We claim:1. A combined radial and thrust bearing comprising: an axially extendingrolling member radial bearing race having an axially extending raceway anda substantially radially inwardly extending annular portion; a radiallyextending rolling member thrust bearing race, an axial extensionintegrally connected to the inner periphery of the thrust bearing race orthe inner periphery of said annular portion, or both,; a thrust bearingcage with rolling members; said thrust bearing cage having a predeterminedinner periphery; means for retaining the thrust bearing cage againstexcessive axial movement; and radial bearing rolling members, said thrustbearing race being separate from and having at least a portion thereof ininterlocking contact with said radially inwardly extending portionradially inwardly of the inner periphery of the thrust bearing cage sothat force may be applied against the radially inner portion of theradially extending thrust bearing race and against the annular portion ofthe radial bearing race to assemble the bearing in a housing.2. A combined radial and thrust bearing in accordance with claim 1 wherein:said portion of the thrust bearing race is bonded to said substantiallyradially inwardly extending portion of the radial bearing race.3. A combined radial and thrust bearing in accordance with claim 1 wherein:the substantially radially inwardly extending annular portion is anannular shoulder; the axial extension is integrally connected to theannular shoulder; and at least a part of the circumference of the axialextension is provided with a projecting surface doubled back around theinside periphery of the thrust race.4. A combined radial and thrust bearing in accordance with claim 1 wherein:the axial extension is integrally connected to the thrust race andinterlocks with the inner periphery of the substantially radially inwardlyextending annular portion of the radial bearing race.5. A combined radial and thrust bearing in accordance with claim 1 wherein:the substantially radially inwardly extending portion is an annularshoulder which connects the radial race to an axial extension having asmaller outside diameter than the outside diameter of said radial race;and the thrust bearing race has an inner axial flange with a portion ofthe radially extending thrust bearing race being in assembled contact withthe annular shoulder of the radial race and the axial flange being inassembled contact with the outside of the radial race axial extension.6. A combined radial and thrust bearing in accordance with claim 5 wherein:interlocking means are provided to interlock the thrust bearing raceflange and the radial race extension.7. A combined radial and thrust bearing in accordance with claim 6 wherein:the interlocking means comprises: a plurality of circumferentially spacedcutouts formed in the thrust bearing race flange; and a plurality ofprojections on the radial bearing race extension, each adapted to fit intoa corresponding cutout.8. A combined radial and thrust bearing in accordance with claim 7 whereineach projection on the axial extension of the radial bearing race issufficiently long to extend through the cutout and retain the thrustbearing cage against excessive axial movement."}
{"WKU":"039306933","Title":"Full complement bearing having preloaded hollow rollers","App_Date":"1973-02-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Willard L. Bowen","Assignee":"The Torrington Company","ICL_Class":"B63P 1100;B21H  114","References":"715579;1327026;1652766;2859076;3410618;3713712;3765071","Claims":"I claim:1. A full complement bearing comprising inner and outer race members androllers positioned between said race members for individual relativemovement; each of said rollers being circumferentially continuous, havinga cylindrical central portion prior to being positioned between said racemembers, being hollow and preloaded between said race members so as to bein pressure contact with each of said race members at all times, and atleast the initially cylindrical central portion having a degree ofovality.2. The bearing of claim 1 wherein the hollowness of said rollers range from40% to 80% as expressed in the relation of hole diameter to externaldiameter.3. The bearing of claim 1 wherein in use said bearing has a loading zonewherein a radial load is primarily transferred from one of said races tothe other of said races through said rollers, and wherein in said loadingzone said rollers are spaced apart during the operation of said bearingnotwithstanding an increase in the ovality thereof.4. The bearing of claim 1 wherein each of said rollers has relieved endportions and the ratio of roller diameter to length is on the order of 1to 4 and less.5. The bearing of claim 1 wherein each of said rollers has relieved endportions and the axial extent of each bearing end portion is on the orderof 15%.6. The bearing of claim 1 wherein the minimum spacing between rollercenters is equal to the maximum ovality of a roller plus 0.000050 inch.7. A method of eliminating roller scuff in a full complement bearing of thetype including inner and outer race members and rollers spacing andmounting said race members for relative rotation; said method residing inmaking said rollers circumferentially continuous, having a central portioncylindrical prior to installation between said race members, hollow, andof a diameter greater than the maximum spacing between said race memberswith said rollers remaining in pressure contact with said races at alltimes and are constantly driven.8. A method of operating a full complement roller bearing of the typeincluding inner and outer race members separated by rollers in a manner toobtain optimum results, said method comprising the steps of forming saidrollers of a hollow and circumferentially continuous construction andhaving at least a cylindrical central portion of a diameter greater thanthe maximum spacing between said race members, installing the rollersbetween the race members in preloaded radially stressed oval conditions,said bearing having a loading zone wherein radial forces on said rollersare a maximum rotating one of said race members relative to the other ofsaid race members and thereby continuously driving all of said rollers andgradually radially flattening said rollers to an increased ovality as saidrollers enter into said loading zone with the spacing between adjacentrollers slightly decreasing, and then gradually expanding said rollers toa decreased ovality as said rollers pass out of said loading zone toslightly increase the spacing between adjacent rollers and thus definelubricant receiving spaces therebetween to assure the existence ofsufficient lubricant between adjacent rollers in said loading zone.9. The discovery of a method of forming a full complement roller bearing ofsuperior runout characteristics utilizing bearing components of aninferior dimension control, comprising in conjunction with an acceptablestandard of grading bearings and bearing components wherein the quality ofbearings and bearing components are graded in a predetermined sequence,the steps of selecting companion bearing races of known inferior grade inaccordance with said standard, selecting circumferentially continuoushollow rollers of a known grade in accordance with said standard andhaving at least a cylindrical central portion of a diameter greater thanthe maximum spacing between said races, assembling a full complement ofsaid rollers in a preloaded condition between said races for obtaining afull complement bearing having the runout characteristics of a bearing ofa grade in accordance with said standard superior than that expected froma bearing utilizing races of said known inferior grade and rollers of saidknown grade without clearance between each roller and said races.10. The discovered method of claim 9 wherein the runout of said bearing isless than the permissible runout for one only of said races according tothe standard of the grade of the selected race.11. The discovered method of claim 9 wherein said acceptable standards arethe known AFBMA standards and the grades thereof are numerical grades withgrade 1 bearings and components having largest tolerance and leastaccuracy and grade 9 bearings and components having least tolerance andgreatest accuracy."}
{"WKU":"039306941","Title":"Bearing for a vertical axle","App_Date":"1974-08-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Martin Acker;Holm Scheufele","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F16C 1904","References":"1302872;2622948;2782512;3853362","Claims":"We claim:1. A bearing for vertical axle, particularly for goniometers comprisinga non-displaceable member of an instrument,a bush being provided on said non-displaceable member,a movable member of an instrument,a cylindrical journal being rigidly connected to said movable member,"}
{"WKU":"039306950","Title":"Race securing device","App_Date":"1974-09-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard E. Forrest","Assignee":"Westinghouse Electric Corporation","ICL_Class":"F16B 3700;F16C 3330;F16C 4100;F16C 4300","References":"1375671;1669725;1812973;1840412;2837382;2891829;3147050","Claims":"I claim:1. A bearing lock for confining a bearing within an end bell of adynamoelectric machine, said bearing having an inner race, an outer race,and rolling elements therebetween, said end bell including an interiorhub, said hub having a recessed seat adapted to receive said bearing andhaving an opening extending through said hub to an accessible exteriorside of said end bell, said opening being adapted to receive said lock,comprising:a nut having a shoulder portion in engagement with said hub and having atang in engagement with said outer race of said bearing, said shoulderportion being in threaded engagement with a bolt, a predetermined portionof said hub being operable as a fulcrum for transmitting a mechanicalforce from said hub through said shoulder portion and said tang of saidnut to said outer race of said bearing when assembled.2. The bearing lock of claim 1 wherein a portion of said accessibleexterior side of said end bell is formed into a planar surface, saidplanar surface being inclined in a predetermined angle .alpha. withrespect to the plane defined by the surface-to-surface union of said tangand said outer race of said bearing.3. The device bearing lock of claim 2 wherein said tang is inclined in apredetermined angle .theta. with respect to the axis of said nut, the sumof .alpha. and .theta. being approximately a right angle.4. The bearing lock of claim 1 wherein the periphery of said opening isdisposed within said planar surface and is defined by a plurality ofintersecting surfaces wherein at least one of said intersecting surfacesis substantially planar.5. The bearing lock of claim 1 wherein said opening is defined by twoparallel planar surfaces which intersect at right angles with a thirdplanar surface, said parallel planar surfaces also intersecting with anarcuately shaped surface."}
{"WKU":"039306968","Title":"Toilet paper storage and dispenser","App_Date":"1974-09-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Florence M. Hight;Duane D. Hight","Assignee":"The Raymond Lee Organization, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B65H 1900;A47B 7500","References":"478702;1486957;2459252;2546820;2728604;3171135","Claims":"Having thus described the invention, what I claim as new and desire tosecure by Letters Patent of the United States is:1. A cabinet for containing a storage roll of tissue and air freshenermaterial mountable to the wall of a bathroom with means to dispense thestored air freshener material into the bathroom in which the device isinstalled comprisingA cabinet fitted with a partition dividing the interior into a firstcompartment and a second compartment, said first compartment of a size tohold a roll of tissue and said second compartment of a size for thestorage of air freshener material, with an exterior wall of said secondcompartment perforated for permitting passage of air through theperforations, in which the cabinet is fitted with a pivotable door that inthe closed position serves as an external wall of both compartments.2. The combination as recited in claim 1 in which external mounting armsare fitted to the cabinet for holding a dispensable roll of tissue."}
{"WKU":"039306976","Title":"Dispenser for strip material","App_Date":"1975-01-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Victor Barouh;Robert Glenn","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B65H 1900","References":"2333378;2787014;3869094","Claims":"We claim:1. A dispenser for strip material comprising a receptacle having anelongated support for supporting a feed roll of strip material, a coveroverlying said receptacle and enclosing said feed roll of strip material,said receptacle and said cover having cooperating closely adjacent arcuatesurfaces between which strip material is led, and a base detachablysecured to said receptacle for forming in combination with said receptaclea storage compartment for storing strips of material removed from saidfeed roll of strip material.2. A dispenser for strip material comprising a receptacle having an arcuatewell open at the bottom for receiving a reservoir roll of strip materialand having an elongated support ledge for supporting a feed roll of stripmaterial, a cover overlying said receptacle and enclosing said feed rollof strip material, said receptacle and said cover having cooperatingclosely adjacent surfaces between which strip material is led, and a basedetachably secured to said receptacle for forming in combination with saidreceptacle a storage compartment for storing strips of material removedfrom said feed roll of strip material, said base retaining said reservoirroll within said receptacle.3. A dispenser according to claim 2, wherein said base has upwardlyextending side flanges for clampingly engaging said receptacle.4. A dispenser according to claim 3, wherein said base has finger holes inthe opposite ends thereof for facilitating depositing strips of materialtorn from said feed roll between said receptacle and said base and forfacilitating removal of said base from said receptacle.5. A dispenser according to claim 4, including means for separating saidcompartment from said reservoir roll.6. A dispenser according to claim 2, wherein the top of said cover is of agenerally upper heart shaped configuration having a downwardly dependingfeed guide for strip material from said feed roll.7. A dispenser according to claim 2, wherein said base has upwardlyextending resilient side flanges and a partition extending normal to saidflanges and spaced therefrom, said receptacle being clampingly heldbetween said flanges and said partition separating said compartment fromsaid reservoir roll.8. A dispenser according to claim 7, wherein said base has finger holemeans for providing access to said compartment.9. A dispenser according to claim 7, wherein said base has finger holes inthe opposite ends thereof for facilitating depositing strips of materialtorn from said feed roll between said receptacle and said base and forfacilitating removal of said base from said receptacle.10. A dispenser according to claim 9, wherein the top of said cover is of agenerally upper heart shaped configuration having a downwardly dependingfeed guide for strip material from said feed roll."}
{"WKU":"039306984","Title":"Plate holder and dispenser","App_Date":"1974-10-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Bruce W. Colgan","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A47F  100","References":"1564529;1769541;2115720;3164298;3193139;3342375;3446543","Claims":"Having thus described the invention what I desire to claim and secure byLetters Patent is:1. A dispenser for a plurality of stacked, dish-like articles, each ofwhich is of a predetermined depth, comprising:a bottom wall and a side wall extending away from said bottom wall, saidside wall being of a configuration corresponding substantially to that ofsaid dish-like articles and being of a height sufficient to receive aplurality of stacked dish-like articles therein;said bottom wall having an arcuate opening formed therein, said openingsubstantially paralleling said side wall and circumscribing an arc of morethan 180.degree., said opening being defined by a pair of substantiallyparalleling inner and outer arcuate edges, the inner arcuate edge of saidopening defining, in part, a central support region for the lowermost ofthe dish-like articles in the stack, the outer arcuate edge of saidopening being located with respect to said stacked dish-like articles sothat the peripheries of said stacked, dish-like articles lie slightlywithin the outer arcuate edge;said central support region of said bottom wall extending upwardly to anextent approximately equal to said predetermined depth whereby when saiddish-like articles are placed in a bottom-down configuration in saiddevice, the central portion of the lowermost dish-like article in thestack thereof will be supported at an elevation such that the peripheraledge of said dish-like articles will be disposed approximately at thelevel of said bottom wall, said stack of dish-like articles beingsupported substantially solely by said central support region; andsaid side wall having a heightwise extending slot formed therein incommunication with said opening in said bottom wall.2. A device as defined in claim 1 further comprising:retaining means secured to the inner surface of said sidewall and extendinginwardly therefrom for engaging the periphery of a plurality of saidplates.3. A device as defined in claim 2 wherein said retaining means comprisesbrush-like members extending inwardly toward the periphery of said stackeddishes.4. A device as defined in claim 1 further comprising:means for detachably connecting a plurality of feet to said bottom wall ofsaid container;a cover detachably connected to the upper end of said sidewall; andsaid cover being constructed as to enable it to be secured to a supportingstructure.5. The dispenser as defined in claim 1 wherein said opening in said bottomwall is disposed symmetrically with respect to said slot in said sidewall.6. A dispenser for a plurality of stacked, dish-like articles, each ofwhich is of a predetermined depth, comprising:a bottom wall and a side wall extending away from said bottom wall, saidside wall being of a configuration corresponding substantially to that ofsaid dish-like articles and being of a height sufficient to receive aplurality of stacked dish-like articles therein;said bottom wall having an arcuate opening formed therein, said openingsubstantially paralleling said side wall and circumscribing an arc of morethan 180.degree., said opening being defined by a pair of substantiallyparalleling inner and outer arcuate edges, the inner arcuate edge of saidopening defining, in part, a central support region for the lowermost ofthe dish-like articles in the stack, the outer arcuate edge of saidopening being located with respect to said stacked dish-like articles sothat the peripheries of said stacked, dish-like articles lie slightlywithin the outer arcuate edge;a raised member secured to the central support region of the bottom walland extending upwardly therefrom, the height of the raised member beingapproximately equal to said predetermined depth whereby when saiddish-like articles are placed in a bottom-down configuration in saiddevice, the central portion of the lowermost dish-like article in thestack thereof will be supported at an elevation such that the peripheraledges of said dish-like articles will be disposed approximately at thelevel of said bottom wall, said stack of dish-like articles beingsupported substantially solely by said raised member; andsaid side wall having a heightwise extending slot formed therein incommunication with said opening in said bottom wall.7. The dispenser as defined in claim 6 wherein said support membercomprises a flexible, brush-like member."}
{"WKU":"039306992","Title":"Stackable and nestable container units","App_Date":"1975-02-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John G. Schnizlein, Jr.","Assignee":"Rosemary Schnizlein","ICL_Class":"B65D 2106;F16B 1200","References":"2774511;3334942;3368856;3834776","Claims":"The invention is claimed as follows:1. A stackable and nestable sequence of containers; each of said containersbeing rectangular in form and comprising two flat parallel end panels, twoflat parallel side panels extending between the end panels inperpendicular relation thereto, and a flat bottom panel disposed betweenthe end panels and between the side panels in proximate spaced relation tothe lower edges of the side panels; said containers being of uniform widthso that placement on one container on a parallel container below causesthe side panels of the container above to directly overlie the side panelsof the container below; said containers varying successively in length ofdifferential longitudinal increments slightly exceeding the combinedthickness of the two end panels so that placement of successively shortercontainers on a parallel container below causes each container above tofit longitudinally between the end panels of the container below andwhich, conversely, causes each container below to fit longitudinallybetween the end panels of the container above when the containers arestacked in reverse sequence one above another; except for the longestcontainer of the sequence, the two end panels of each container definingtwo lower support abutments substantially flush with the lower edges ofthe container side panels and facing downwardly to rest on the upper edgesof the side panels of a longer container below; the lower portion of eachend panel, except for end panels of the longest container, defining a pairof outwardly facing abutments extending downwardly from the adjacent lowersupport abutments to fit between the side panels of an underlying longercontainer to preclude relative lateral displacement of the containers; theend panels of containers, shorter than the longest container, projectingabove the container side panels and defining respectively two uppersupport abutments facing upwardly in upwardly spaced and horizontallyalined relation to the container side panels to fit against the loweredges of the side panels of an overlying longer container to support thelatter in an elevated stacked relation to the lower container; and theupper portions of the end panels of containers, shorter than the longestcontainer, defining respectively a pair of outwardly facing abutmentsprojecting above the adjacent upper support abutments to fit betweeen thelower edges of the side panels of a longer container stacked thereabove topreclude lateral displacement of the containers.2. A sequence of containers according to claim 1, in which the side panelsof the shortest container are increased in width to extend substantiallyto the top of the container end panels and a generally flat top panel inmounted to extend between the side panels and between the end panels sothat the shortest container constitutes an enclosure for a doll wardrobeand the like, the bottom panel of the shortest container being madeslidably removable to afford access to the interior of the container.3. A stackable and nestable sequence of containers; each of said containersbeing rectangular in form and comprising two parallel end panels, twoparallel side panels extending between the end panels in perpendicularrelation thereto, and a bottom panel disposed between the end panels andbetween the side panels; said containers being of uniform width so thatplacement of one container on a parallel container below causes the sidepanels of the container above to directly overlie the side panels of thecontainer below; said containers varying successively in length bydifferential longitudinal increments slightly exceeding the combinedthickness of the two end panels so that placement of successively shortercontainers on a parallel container below causes each container above tofit longitudinally between the end panels of the container below andwhich, conversely, causes each container below to fit longitudinallybetween the end panels of the container above when the containers arestacked in reverse sequence one above another; end panels of thecontainers being shaped at the lower edge thereof to effect an overlyingconfronting relationship between the lower edges of the side panels of acontainer above and the upper edges of the side panels of an underlyinglonger container; the lower portion of each end panel of containers otherthan the longest container defining a pair of laterally facing abutmentsextending downwardly to overlap the side panels of an underlying longercontainer to preclude relative lateral displacement of the containers; theend panels of containers, shorter than the longest container, projectingabove the container side panels and defining respectively two uppersupport abutments facing upwardly in upwardly spaced and horizontallyalined relation to the container side panels to fit against the loweredges of the side panels of an overlying longer container to support thelatter in an elevated stacked relation to the lower container; and theupper portions of the end panels of containers, shorter than the longestcontainer, defining respectively a pair of laterally facing abutmentsprojecting above the adjacent upper support abutments to overlap the loweredges of the side panels of a longer container stacked thereabove topreclude lateral displacement of the containers.4. A sequence of containers according to claim 3 in which the side panelsof the shortest container are increased in width to extend substantiallyto the top of the container end panels and a generally flat top panel ismounted to extend between the side panels and between the end panels sothat the shortest container constitutes an enclosure for a doll wardrobeand the like, and one panel of the shortest container being made movableto afford access to the interior of the container."}
{"WKU":"039307000","Title":"Information storage system","App_Date":"1974-09-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Maurice C. Figueres","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B42D 1504;G09F  712","References":"1634240;2014267;2039752;2215163;3330581;3520560;3817588","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a publication including a plurality of pages, at least one page beingof heavy weight and having a plurality of selected areas thereofcontaining printed information, a line of weakening about each respectivearea for removal of each said area as a storage card from said one page,each said removed storage card having means for permitting storage of saidremoved card for subsequent reference.2. In a publication as set forth in claim 1, said means including a pair ofshaped cut-outs on one edge.3. In a publication including a plurality of pages, at lease one pagehaving a plurality of pre-printed peelable forms adhesively secured in aremovable manner thereon, each said form having an adhesive thereon forsecuring said form to a rigid backing having a pair of shaped cut-outs onone edge for permitting storage of a removed form for subsequentreference.4. In combination,a publication including a plurality of pages;a plurality of forms containing printed information releaseably mounted onat least one of said pages;a plurality of backings, each said backing being sized to receive aselective one of said removed forms thereon and having shaped cut-outs onone edge; andan adhesive on a backside of a removed form for securing a removed form toa selected one of said backings.5. The combination as set forth in claim 4 which further includes a storagecontainer for receiving a plurality of said backings with a respectiveform thereon, said container having means for reception in said cut-outsto align said received backings therewith.6. In combinationa form containing printed information; anda transparent sheet folded about said form, said sheet having a frontportion, a back portion and a flap, said front and back portions havingsaid form sandwiched therebetween with said flap folded from one of saidportions over the other of said portions, said portions each having ashaped cut-out in alignment with each other.7. The combination as set forth in claim 6 wherein said form has at leastone shaped cut-out at one edge in alignment with said cut-out in saidportions of said sheet.8. The combination as set forth in claim 6 which further included a storagecontainer for receiving a plurality of said folded transparent sheets andenclosed forms, said container having means for reception in said cut-outsto align said folded transparent sheets therewith.9. An information storage system comprisinga series of publications, at least some of said publications including atleast one page having a plurality of selected areas thereof eachcontaining printed information relating to a preselected subject matter, aline of weakening about each said area for removal of each said area fromsaid page as a form each said area having cut-outs in an edge thereof; andat least one storage container for receiving and storing a plurality ofremoved forms containing information relating to common subject matter forsubsequent retrieval, said container having means for reception in saidcut-outs to align received forms in said container.10. An information storage system comprisinga series of publications, at least some of said publications including atleast one page having a plurality of selected areas thereon eachcontaining printed information relating to a preselected subject matter,each said area being peelable from said page as a form and having anadhesive thereon;a plurality of backings, each said backing being sized to adhesivelyreceive a respectively form thereon and having cut-outs in an edgethereof; andat least one storage container for receiving and storing a plurality ofsaid backing mounted forms containing information relating to commonsubject matter for subsequent retrieval, said container including meansfor reception in said cut-outs of said backings to align received backingsin said container.11. In combinationa form containing printed information; anda transparent sheet about said form, said sheet having a front portion anda back portion having said form sandwiched therebetween, said portionseach having at least one pre-shaped cut-out along an edge thereof inalignment with a cut-out in the other portion for storing of the encasedform in a container in alignment with other like encased forms."}
{"WKU":"039307018","Title":"Portable television cabinet surface extender","App_Date":"1973-12-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Daniel A. Otakie","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A47B 1308;A47B 9502","References":"1413111;1848475;1904897;2341635;2572333;2634183;2955888;3633519","Claims":"What is claimed and desired to be secured by United States Letters Patentis:1. In combination, a television cabinet having a substantially horizontalupper portion, a handle upwardly protrusive from said upper portion andhaving a recess defining a horizontal grip, a surface extender resting onsaid upper portion, handle engaging means including a laterally extendingmember carried by surface extender and engaging under said horizontal gripof said handle, and a portion of the surface extender extending beyondsaid substantially horizontal upper portion.2. In the combination of claim 1, the surface extender including ahorizontal top, and the portion of the surface extender resting on saidupper portion comprising a frame, said frame extending above said upperportion higher than the upward protrusion of said handle and dependingdownwardly from the top in position for resting on the periphery of saidhorizontal upper portion.3. In the combination of claim 2, said handle engaging means including asecond frame, and means for securing the second frame to the top withportions of the second frame on opposite sides of the handle.4. In the combination of claim 3, said handle said handle engaging meansincluding at least one elongate member passing through at least a portionof the second frame and below a portion of the handle.5. In the combination of claim 3, said handle-engagement including contactbetween the handle and said portions of the second frame on opposite sidesof the handle.6. In the combination of claim 5, said handle horizontal grip having avertical support at each end, each of said second frame portions having apair of holes passing therethrough with respective pairs of in oppositeportions of said second frame holes being coaxially aligned and saidhandle engaging means including a pair of rods passing through said holesbeneath the horizontal grip with one rod adjacent each vertical support.7. In the combination of claim 6, each of said second frame portions havinga plurality of said pairs of holes therein.8. In the combination of claim 6, wherein a portion of the first said framehas a pair of holes therein coaxially aligned with the first said pairs ofholes, and wherein the pair of rods passes through the pair of holes inthe first said frame portion.9. In the combination of claim 8, and means on an end of at least one rodfor releasably securing the rod in place.10. In the combination of claim 6, wherein an intermediate member isprovided, wherein means are provided for securing the intermediate memberbeneath the top in spaced relation with one of said portions of the secondframe and an aligned portion of the first frame, wherein the intermediatemember has a pair of holes therein coaxially aligned with the first saidpairs of holes, and wherein the pair of rods passes through the pair ofholes in said intermediate member.11. In the combination of claim 10, and hinge structure attaching thealigned portion of the first frame pivotally about a horizontal axisbeneath the top.12. In the combination of claim 10, and hinge structure attaching thealigned portion of the first frame pivotally about a vertical axis beneaththe top.13. In the combination of claim 12, and means for latching the alignedportion of the first frame and thereby retaining the aligned portionagainst another portion of the first frame.14. In the combination of claim 10, said intermediate member beingpositioned to rest on a peripheral part of the television cabinetsubstantially horizontal upper portion, said extending portion of thesurface extender extending therebeyond, and an adjustable brace connectingsaid extending portion of the surface extender with the televisioncabinet.15. In the combination of claim 6, a second surface extender, and means formovably securing the second surface extender to the first said surfaceextender.16. In the combination of claim 15, the second surface extender comprisinga leaf and said means for movably securing comprising hinge structurepivotally securing the leaf to a margin of the top.17. In a combination of claim 16, the leaf having pigeonhole structureattached thereto, said margin of the top being a laterally overhangingmargin, hinge structure on a portion of the leaf opposite said laterallyoverhanging margin of the top, and a leg pivotally secured by said hingestructure on the leaf.18. In the combination as recited in claim 6, a wedge member proportionedto fit between said handle and television cabinet, for thereby supportingthe handle in the upwardly projecting position.19. In the combination of claim 6, a second surface extender comprising ahorizontal planar member, and means for parallel spacing the horizontalplanar member in fixed relation above the top.20. In the combination of claim 19, and at least one drawer between saidhorizontal planar member and said top.21. In the combination of claim 5, wherein the portion of the surfaceextender extending beyond said substantially horizontal portion comprisesa laterally overhanging margin of said top, wherein a vertical set ofshelves is provided, and wherein means are provided for movably securingthe vertical set of shelves to the top, comprising dovetail structuredetachably securing the topmost shelf of said vertical set of shelves tothe laterally overhanging margin of the top.22. In the combination of claim 4, the second frame comprising a pair ofspaced downwardly extending members, and means for adjusting the spacingbetween said downwardly extending members.23. In the combination of claim 4, said means for securing including meansfor adjusting the position of the second frame relative to the top.24. In the combination of claim 23, said means for securing including meansfor adjusting the spacing between said portions of the second frame.25. In the combination of claim 24, said means for securing comprising atleast one slot structure affixed to the top, and means for releasablyconnecting the slot structure and said second frame.26. In the combination of claim 4, an intermediate member, and means foradjusting said intermediate member in position relative to said top.27. In the combination of claim 4, a portion of the top having an aperturetherein, and a panel detachably secured in said aperture.28. In the combination of claim 27, said aperture being a slot in the rearmargin of the top, for thereby providing antenna access.29. In the combination of claim 4, the top having a fixed forward portion,a rearward portion, and a hinge securing the rearward portion pivotallyrelative to the forward portion.30. In the combination of claim 29, the hinge affixed at the rearward edgeof the forward portion and the forward edge of the rearward portion,whereby the rearward portion of the top can pivot into overlyingrelationship with the forward portion, thereby providing access forantenna deployment from beneath the rearward portion of the top.31. In the combination of claim 29, the hinge affixed at the rearward edgeof the rearward portion and to the first said frame, thereby providingaccess for antenna deployment from beneath the rearward portion of thetop.32. In the combination of claim 4, wherein the means for securing thesecond frame comprises a spaced plurality of resilient members protrusivedownwardly from the top, wherein the second frame comprises a pair ofdownwardly extending members having grooves therein for engaging a portionof the resilient members when positioned therebetween.33. In the combination of claim 4, the top having a fixed forward portion,a separate rearward portion, and means for detachably fixing the rearwardportion in relation to the forward portion.34. The combination of a surface extender and a television cabinet having ahandle on the upper surface thereof, the surface extender comprising: ahorizontal top, a frame depending downwardly from said top, and alaterally projecting elongate handle engaging member secured to saidsurface extender in vertically spaced relation with the underside of, saidtop said handle engaging member being axially slideable for therebyengaging said handle."}
{"WKU":"039307026","Title":"Hang-it-all jewelry cabinet","App_Date":"1974-08-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John R. Pichowicz","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A47B 6702","References":"858831;1245582;3639022;3697363","Claims":"I claim:1. A decorative wall cabinet for receiving and storing ladies jewelry;comprising,a thin box like chamber having a back wall, a top wall, side walls, abottom wall and a lower short front wall,a door covering the front of said chamber except for the short front wallthereof;concealed hinges pivotally connecting the door to one of the side walls ofthe box;said door having a front surface and a back surface;a slightly recessed panel on the front outer surface of the door;a decorative member mounted in said panel giving the visual effect to thewall cabinet of a picture hanging on the wall;a large mirror;means fixedly mounting said mirror on the back surface of said door;a bar;means mounting said bar on the back surface of the door below the mirror;pins having slightly rounded heads fixed to and extending outwardly fromsaid bar to receive short necklaces or chains in hanging position;means forming a row of compartments adjacent the top box like chamber toreceive small articles of jewelry;a second bar;means fixedly mounting said second bar to the sides and back walls of saidbox like chamber below the row of compartments;a second row of headed pins mounted in and projecting from said second barto receive long chains or necklaces in spaced hanging position;a compartment bounded by the short front wall, the side walls, the backwall and the bottom wall of the box like chamber;two drawers in said compartment;hinge means attached to the short front wall of the chamber attaching thedrawers to the chamber to allow the drawers to swing into and out of saidcompartment;partitions in said drawers forming pockets to receive small articles ofjewelrymeans including nails for fixedly attaching said cabinet to a verticalsurface such as a wallwhereby there is provided a cabinet wherein ladies jewelry may be retainedin a neat orderly arrangement with the fine gold chains and strings ofbeads in spaced hanging relation and not in the mixed up, tangled andknotted condition experienced when storing them in a horizontal boxnormally used for jewelry wherein the side walls have reinforcing blocksfixedly attached to the inner surface of said walls, mounting blocksincluding inclined openings therethrough to receive said nails indownwardly slanting positions to cause the cabinet to be fixedly attachedto a wall in increasingly tighter position."}
{"WKU":"039307034","Title":"Central plug connection","App_Date":"1974-06-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Norbert Kinast","Assignee":"Daimler-Benz Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"H01R  306","References":"3384865;3829815","Claims":"I claim:1. A central plug connection, which comprises a frame box means ofelectrically insulating material and a ground rail means disposed withinsaid frame box means, said ground rail means being adapted to be connectedwith vehicle ground, wherein electrical connecting lines coming fromindividual aggregates are provided with a plug socket means, each plugsocket means being sealingly and disconnectably connected with the framebox means, said plug socket means including a ground connectionelectrically connected with said ground rail means, and wherein a commonmulti-plug is adapted to be inserted into the sockets of all plug socketmeans.2. A central plug connection according to claim 1, characterized in thatthe ground rail means is a continuous, uninterrupted strip.3. A central plug connection according to claim 1, characterized in thatsaid ground connection includes a ground and shielding connection which iselectrically connected with the ground rail means.4. A central plug connection according to claim 1, characterized in thatthe central plug connection is adapted to be secured in a vehicle for theinterconnection with diagnostic apparatus.5. A central plug connection according to claim 1, characterized in thatthe frame box means includes one sealing frame means for each plug socketmeans to be secured thereat and in that each plug socket means issurrounded by a seal which seals the plug socket means with respect to theframe box means during the fastening thereof at the frame box means and onthe other side of the plug socket means surrounds the electricalconnecting line in a water-tight manner.6. A central plug connection according to claim 5, characterized in thateach plug socket means is operable to be secured at the ground rail meansby a screw, and in that to this end the plug socket means includes aground socket, each ground socket being provided with an internal thread,and the ground rail means being provided with a bore for each plug socketmeans.7. A central plug connection according to claim 6, characterized in thatthe last-mentioned bore is countersunk for the screw.8. A central plug connection according to claim 6, characterized in thatthe ground rail means projects at least on one side out of the frame boxmeans securely connected therewith and is provided with a bore for thefastening of the frame box means at the vehicle as well as for theelectrical connection of the ground rail means with said vehicle ground.9. A central plug connection according to claim 8, characterized in thateach plug socket means includes one of cam and groove means which engagesin a corresponding one of groove and cam means provided in the sealingframe means.10. A central plug connection according to claim 9, characterized in thatthe frame box means is adapted to be closed on the side opposite the plugsocket means by a cover seated in a water-tight manner.11. A central plug connection according to claim 10, characterized in thatthe ground rail means is a continuous, uninterrupted strip.12. A central plug connection according to claim 11, characterized in thatsaid ground connection includes a ground and shielding connection which iselectrically connected with the ground rail means.13. A central plug connection according to claim 11, characterized in thatthe central plug connection is adapted to be secured in a vehicle for theinterconnection with diagnostic apparatus.14. A central plug connection according to claim 1, characterized in thateach plug socket means is operable to be secured at the ground rail meansby a screw, and in that to this end the plug socket means includes aground socket, each ground socket being provided with an internal thread,and the ground rail means being provided with a bore for each plug socketmeans.15. A central plug connection according to claim 1, characterized in thatthe ground rail means projects at least on one side out of the frame boxmeans securely connected therewith and is provided with a bore for thefastening of the frame box means at the vehicle as well as for theelectrical connection of the ground rail means with said vehicle ground.16. A central plug connection according to claim 5, characterized in thateach plug socket means includes one of cam and groove means which engagesin a corresponding one of groove and cam means provided in the sealingframe means.17. A central plug connection according to claim 1, characterized in thatthe frame box means is adapted to be closed on the side opposite the plugsocket means by a cover seated in a water-tight manner.18. A central plug connection according to claim 1, characterized in thatsaid ground rail means is arranged parallel to the longitudinal axis ofsaid frame box means."}
{"WKU":"039307042","Title":"Wall socket","App_Date":"1974-06-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Dinko Dekanic","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"H01R 1344","References":"1171914;1522574;2155925;2579538;3736547","Claims":"I claim:1. A wall socket having at least one opening into which an electricalcontact pin of a plug may be introduced to make electrical contact thereincomprising:a socket body;at least one guiding device;means movably supporting the guiding device within the socket body forlimited movement in the general direction of plug introduction;at least one cam surface on the guiding device;at least one contacting member movable between an inoperative positionwhere it is inaccessible from the socket opening and an operative contactposition;means for supporting and springingly urging the contacting member lateralto the direction of plug introduction;a lug integral with the guiding device and forming in conjunction therewitha recess;the contacting member being housed within the recess of the guiding devicewhen in the inoperative position; andmeans responsive to the introduction of a plug into the wall socket toforce, by way of the cam surface, the contacting member into contact withthe plug pin.2. A wall socket in accordance with claim 1 further comprising springbiasing means for urging the guiding device toward the at least oneopening and therefore also the contacting member into the guiding devicerecess.3. A wall socket in accordance with claim 1 wherein there is one guidingdevice and two contacting members, the socket further including anadditional lug integral with the guiding device and forming in conjunctiontherewith an additional recess for receiving the other of the contactingmembers in the inoperative position.4. A wall socket in accordance with claim 3 wherein the plug is providedwith two pins for making electrical contact with respective contactingmembers and a guiding device actuating pin, the socket having twoelectrical contact pin openings and a guiding device actuating pin openingwhereby, when the plug is introduced into the socket, the guiding deviceactuating pin engages the guiding device to move the guiding device in thedirection of plug insertion thereby freeing the contacting members fromtheir respective recesses.5. A wall socket in accordance with claim 1 wherein there are two guidingdevices and two associated contacting members supported within the socketbody to provide a socket for accepting a dual pin plug.6. A wall socket in accordance with claim 5 wherein the socket has two pinaccepting openings and further comprising spring biasing means forindependently urging the two guiding devices toward the pin acceptingopenings and therefore also the contacting members into their respectiveguiding device recesses.7. A wall socket in accordance with claim 6 wherein a portion of eachguiding device is exposed for engagement with a plug whereby introductionof the plug into the socket forces each guiding device against itsrespective bias urging to force the contacting members from theirrespective guiding device recesses and into contact with the plug pins."}
{"WKU":"039307050","Title":"Electrical connector assembly","App_Date":"1974-03-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"David A. Gallagher","Assignee":"Bunker Ramo Corporation","ICL_Class":"H01R  904","References":"2787770;3167374;3182278;3196382;3445580;3445804;3588784;3676833","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An electrical connector assembly for connecting each contact of oneplurality of contacts with a respective contact of another plurality ofcontacts comprising:a first connector body having a longitudinal axis with a plurality ofaxially extending passageways extending parallel to said axis andreceiving a respective contact of said one plurality of contacts, saidbody having an annular wall at one end with an internal surface of saidwall defining an encircled axially extending recess open at said one endwith said one plurality of contacts extending parallel to the axis of saidbody into said recess and spaced from said one end;a second connector body having a projecting front portion with a front endreceived in said recess and a longitudinal second body axis with aplurality of passageways extending parallel to said second body axis andreceiving a respective contact of said other plurality of contacts saidother plurality of contacts each terminating in said projecting frontportion of said second body and spaced from said front end of said secondconnector body for engagement with a respective contact of the firstplurality of contacts;cam means on one of said connector bodies; andcam follower means on the other connector body for engagement with the cammeans on the one connector body in response to the receipt of saidprojecting front portion in said recess and axial pressure between saidbodies to rotate the bodies relative one another to a predeterminedangular position and angularly align each contact of the first pluralityof contacts with a respective contact of the other plurality of contactsfor engaging each contact of said one plurality of contacts with arespective contact of said other plurality of contacts.2. The connector assembly claimed in claim 1 in which said cam meansincludes a first ramp surface portion formed in said recess on theinternal surface of said annular wall with said ramp surface portionterminating intermediate the opposite axial ends of said recess andextending transversely to the longitudinal axis of said first connectorbody at an angle of less than 90.degree..3. In the connector assembly claimed in claim 2, a first flat surfaceportion formed in said recess on the internal surface of said annular wallextending parallel to the longitudinal axis of said first body from oneend of said ramp surface portion toward the end of said first connectorbody opposite said one end.4. The connector assembly claimed in claim 3 in which said cam followermeans includes the juncture of a radially extending front face at thefront end of said second connector body and a peripheral axially extendingarcuate surface portion on the projecting portion of said second connectorbody.5. In the connector assembly claimed in claim 4, in which said projectingfront portion has a flat surface portion parallel to the longitudinal axisof said second connector body and intersecting both said peripheralaxially extending arcuate surface portion and said radially extendingfront face for engagement with the first flat surface portion formed insaid recess, and a second ramp surface portion formed on said secondconnector body at an angle transverse to the longitudinal axis of saidsecond body and corresponding to the angle of the first ramp portion forengagement with said first ramp surface portion on the internal surface ofsaid annular wall.6. The connector assembly claimed in claim 1 in which said second connectorbody is integrally formed in one piece and the passageways in said secondconnector body for receiving a respective one of said other plurality ofcontacts each have a reduced diameter portion spaced adjacent the end ofsaid second connector body opposite said front end and each contact ofsaid other plurality of contacts has a contact radial face at one end ofeach contact of said other plurality of contacts with each contact radialface of larger diameter than said reduced diameter portion, and eachpassageway in said second connector body has an enlarged diameterpassageway portion formed between each small diameter portion and saidopposite end of said second connector body and in communication with therespective reduced diameter portion for aligning and guiding the radialface of the respective contact of said other plurality of contacts throughthe respective reduced diameter portion of the respective passageway.7. In the assembly claimed in claim 1, an elongate annular boot of flexiblerubber material having one end for receipt either over the end oppositesaid one end of said first body and over the end opposite said front endof said second connector body;said boot having a free conical end portion extending radially inwardly andaxially from said other end to define a reduced diameter passageway; anda shoulder formed intermediate the ends of said boot with said shoulderspaced radially from each connector body and axially from the reduceddiameter passageway to provide an area of increased resistance todeformation on said boot whereby said conical portion is axiallytranslated toward the other end of said either one of said bodies toprovide a guideway enabling enlargement of said passageway for receiving aplurality of conductors connected to respective contacts carried by saideither one of said bodies.8. An electrical connector assembly for connecting each contact of oneplurality of contacts with a respective contact of another plurality ofcontacts comprising:a first connector body having a longitudinal axis with a plurality ofpassageways extending parallel to said axis and receiving a respectivecontact of said one plurality of contacts, said body having an annularwall at one end with an internal surface defining an encircled axiallyextending recess open at said one end with said one plurality of contactsextending parallel to the axis of said body into said recess and spacedfrom said one end;a second connector body having a front end received in said recess and alongitudinal axis with a plurality of passageways extending parallel tosaid axis and receiving a respective contact of said other plurality ofcontacts, said other plurality of contacts each terminating at a positionin said second body spaced from said front end of said second connectorbody for engagement with a respective contact of the first plurality ofcontacts;cam means integrally formed on the internal surface of said annular wall;andcam follower means on the front end of the second connector body forengagement with the cam means on the internal surface of said annular wallin response to the receipt of said second connector front end in saidrecess and the application of axial pressure between said bodies to rotatesaid second connector body relative the first connector body to apredetermined angular position and angularly align each contact of thefirst plurality of contacts with a respective contact of the otherplurality of contacts for engaging each contact of said one plurality ofcontacts with a respective contact of said other plurality of contacts."}
{"WKU":"039307069","Title":"Circuit panel connector","App_Date":"1974-06-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Edward A. Obuch;William T. Waddington","Assignee":"Amerace Corporation","ICL_Class":"H01R 1350","References":"2765450;2935725;3075167;3270313;3296576;3346835;3660803;3775733","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property orprivilege is claimed are defined as follows:1. A circuit panel connector for enabling connection of the circuitterminals along the edge of a circuit panel, such as a printed circuitboard, with external conductors, said panel connector comprising:a body of dielectric material;an elongate socket in the body for receiving said panel edge, the sockethaving opposite side walls and a bottom;a plurality of bifurcated electrical contacts in the body, the contactseach having a base juxtaposed with the bottom of the socket and opposedtines juxtaposed with the side walls and including contact membersprojecting beyond the side walls into the socket;a plurality of tubular connector elements, one for each bifurcated contact,each connector element being captured within the body against movementrelative thereto and being spaced from a corresponding bifurcated contact;a conductive strap integral with the base of the bifurcated contact, saidstrap being recessed within the body and extending from the base to thetubular connector element, said strap being received within acorresponding tubular connector element and being adapted to sliderelative to the corresponding tubular connector element upon lateralmovement of the corresponding bifurcated contact; andmeans cooperating with each said tubular connector element for releasablyclamping an external conductor to the connector element and in electricalcontact with the strap, said body including an opening juxtaposed witheach tubular connector element such that an external conductor will beguided through the opening and received within the tubular connectorelement between the strap and the clamping means;each tine being spaced from the corresponding side wall with which the tineis juxtaposed to enable lateral movement of the bifurcated contactrelative to the body and resilient flexing of both tines away from oneanother in response to entry of the panel edge between the contact membersof the tines.2. The invention of claim 1 wherein the tubular connector elements have arectangular cross-sectional configuration.3. The invention of claim 1 wherein the integral connection between thestrap and the base of the bifurcated contact is relatively rigid.4. The invention of claim 1 wherein the clamping means include a screwthreaded in the tubular connector element for advancement into clampingposition, said screw being recessed within said body when in the clampingposition.5. The invention of claim 1 wherein the clamping means is recessed withinthe body relative to the opening.6. The invention of claim 5 wherein the opening includes beveled edges forproviding a funneled entry for the external conductor into the tubularconnector element, the strap and the clamping means being recessed behindsaid beveled edges.7. The invention of claim 1 wherein the contact members are rounded lobesunitary with the tines at an end of the tines opposite to the common base.8. The invention of claim 7 wherein the socket includes an entrance, saidentrance being flared to facilitate entry of the circuit panel edge, saidlobes being juxtaposed with the flared entrance to facilitate entry of thecircuit panel edge between the lobes.9. The invention of claim 1 wherein the body includes a plurality of slots,each slot being located between adjacent bifurcated contacts along thesocket for receiving a key selectively insertable therein to assurecorrect circuit panel insertion.10. The invention of claim 9 wherein the body comprises upper and lowerbody portions permanently affixed to one another.11. The invention of claim 1 wherein the body comprises upper and lowerbody portions permanently affixed to one another, the lower body portionincluding a basal surface electrically insulated from the contacts andconnector elements by the dielectric material of the said body."}
{"WKU":"039307077","Title":"Interface connector","App_Date":"1974-06-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John T. Venaleck;Kenneth W. Braund","Assignee":"A P Products Incorporated","ICL_Class":"H01R 1354","References":"3086189;3160459;3173737;3221288;3221289;3278714;3360767;3474388;3573706;3656087;3731252","Claims":"We claim:1. An interface connector for mechanically attaching a printed circuitboard or the like to a plurality of electrically conductive pins formechanical support by such pins and for electrically connecting circuitson such printed circuit board to respective pins, comprising:an electrically non-conductive housing having forward and rear faces, theformer having opening means for receiving inserted pins and the latterincluding an opening into a space in said housing for receiving aninserted portion of such printed circuit board; anda plurality of electrically conductive contacts supported in relativeelectrically insulated relation in said housing, said contacts beingmovable in said housing between locked and unlocked condition with respectto such inserted pins, each contact having a forward locking end means forstrong mechanical and electrical attachment to a respective pin and arearward end means for wiping engagement with a received printed circuitboard to make electrical contact with a respective circuit printed on thelatter;each contact rearward end means including means responsive to insertion ofsuch printed circuit board into said housing opening for urging saidforward locking end means of said contact from unlocked condition tolocked condition with a respective pin for mechanical support of saidconnector and printed circuit board by such pins.2. An interface connector as set forth in claim 1, wherein said contactsare positioned in said housing in opposed pairs for force balance betweenrows of pins to which the interface connector is connected.3. An interface connector as set forth in claim 1, wherein said housingcomprises a main body portion and a plurality of contact holding coverportions, said contacts being retained between the former and a respectivecover portion, said cover portions being ultrasonically welded to saidmain body portion.4. An interface connector as set forth in claim 1, wherein at least saidlocking end means of each contact comprises hard metal relative to that ofthe electrically conductive pins, and upon being forced into lockingengagement with a respective pin, said locking end means bites into themetal thereof.5. An interface connector as set forth in claim 4, wherein said locking endmeans includes a concave recess having a radius of curvature larger thanthe edge dimension of an electrically conductive pin to facilitate suchbiting.6. An interface connector as set forth in claim 4, wherein each contactincludes a rearward contact tail portion for attachment to said housingproximate said housing rear face, and said rearward end means includes alocking end means, and said cantilever portion being positioned formovement by the leading portion of such inserted printed circuit board tourge said end means into locking engagement with such inserted pin.7. An interface connector as set forth in claim 6, further comprising anoff-set bend in said cantilever portion of each contact and the cantileverportion forward of said off-set bend being located for wiping engagementwith a circuit printed on such printed circuit board, and a longitudinallattice support member integral with and proximate the forward end of saidhousing and against which the forward ends of said contacts are normallybiased, said off-set bends permitting said contacts to remain in unlockedposition while such printed circuit board is inserted into said housingopening up to said off-set bends, and further insertion of such printedcircuit board into said space beyond said off-set bends effects suchwiping engagement and forces said locking end means of said contacts intolocking engagement with respective pins.8. An interface connector as set forth in claim 1, wherein said housingcomprises a plurality of lattice members at the forward end thereof, saidlattice members including a longitudinal central support and a pluralityof dividers defining openings into which respective pins may be inserted.9. An interface connector as set forth in claim 8, wherein said housingcomprises guide means within each said opening for guiding respective pinswithin the same to respective locations for engagement by respectivecontacts when the latter are urged to locked engagement with such pins.10. An interface connector as set forth in claim 9, wherein said housingcomprises a stop surface defining the maximum extent of insertion of eachsuch pin, and a lateral support surface for each such pin when engaged bya locking end means of a respective contact.11. An interface connector as set forth in claim 1, further comprisingmeans for retaining such printed circuit board in said housing.12. An interface connector as set forth in claim 11, wherein said means forretaining comprises a plurality of tang members, each being positioned inoverlying relation with a respective contact and said contacts and tangmembers being attached to said housing, each tang member including aresilient cantilever portion extending forwardly into said space in saidhousing in the insertion path of such an inserted printed circuit board,and a plurality of holes in such printed circuit board positioned foralignment with respective tangs upon insertion into said space in saidhousing, said tangs, printed circuit board, holes in the latter, and spacebeing related such that upon insertion into said space such printedcircuit board deforms said tangs against the resilient force of theircantilever portions and at a point during such insertion said tangs snapinto respective holes to preclude withdrawal of such printed circuitboard.13. An interface connector as set forth in claim 12, wherein said contactsare positioned in two rows of opposed contact pairs, and said tangscomprise at least two pairs of opposed tangs, each pair being positionedto overlie respective opposed contacts proximate opposed ends of saidhousing.14. An interface connector as set forth in claim 13, wherein therelationship of said space, said tangs, and said plurality of holes insuch printed circuit board permits movement of such printed circuit boardwithin said housing between a position whereby said contacts are inunlocked condition and a position to urge said contacts to lockedcondition.15. An interface connector as set forth in claim 11, wherein said means forretaining comprises a laterally protruding member proximate the forwardedge of such printed circuit board, and a hole in a side of said housing,whereby said protruding member may be force fitted into said housing intosaid hole as such printed circuit board is inserted into said space, thusprecluding withdrawal of the printed circuit board from the housing.16. An interface connector as set forth in claim 15, wherein said means forretaining comprises two laterally protruding members at opposed sides ofthe leading edge of such printed circuit board, and said holes comprisetwo holes at opposed sides of said housing.17. An interface connector as set forth in claim 16, wherein said holes areof a size sufficient to permit movement of such printed circuit boardwithin said housing between a position whereby said contacts are inunlocked condition and a position to urge said contacts to lockedcondition."}
{"WKU":"039307085","Title":"Flat cable wire-connector","App_Date":"1974-09-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Albert D. Wedekind;John W. Benzer","Assignee":"Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company","ICL_Class":"H01R 1120","References":"3434093;3605071;3805214;3816818;3820055;3820058","Claims":"What is claimed is as follows:1. A wire-connector for making solderless connection to wires of a compactflat cable, comprising a contact element having a flat metal plate bodyhaving parallel closely spaced sharp-ended prongs extending from one edge,including two outer prongs lying in a common plane and an inner pronglying in a plane parallel to said plane and offset therefrom by no morethan twice the thickness of said plate, the ends of said prongs slopinginwardly toward the space between said planes to define a terminalwire-receiving trough.2. Wire-connector of claim 1 including an insulating base for supporting asaid cable and containing at least one said contact element in positionfor making contact with a corresponding wire, and an insulating cover forretaining said cable in position against said base and having pockets forreceiving the extended prongs of said elements.3. Wire-connector of claim 2 wherein said elements include an extensionopposite the extended prongs and passing through at least a portion ofsaid base for providing an external contact."}
{"WKU":"039307093","Title":"Electrical connector","App_Date":"1975-03-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert J. Stanger;Larry N. Siebens","Assignee":"Amerace Corporation","ICL_Class":"H01R 1352","References":"2762025","Claims":"What is claimed is: pin-shaped1. In a first connector housing for use in connecting or disconnecting anenergized high voltage circuit by engagement or disengagement with asecond connector housing, said second housing supporting a first contactelement, said first housing having an axial passage including anelectrically conductive surface fixedly secured within said first housing,the invention comprising in combination:a. a contact assembly disposed in said passage and including1. a second contact element for engaging said first contact element,"}
{"WKU":"039307107","Title":"Connector backshell adapter and method of using same","App_Date":"1974-09-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard Sollanek","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy","ICL_Class":"H01R 1346","References":"923284;1334709;2546854;3659251","Claims":"What is claimed as new and desired to be secured by Letters Patent of theUnited States is:1. In combination with an adapter device for use with an electricalconnector, having a backshell element with cable clamping means detachablyconnected by threads means to a frontal cable connector with a connectormating ring, designed to be used with multi-element cables, wherein:a tubular adapter is threadably formed at its opposing ends having externalthreads at one end and having internal threads at the other end to matchthe thread means of the electrical connectors backshell and mating rings,and is interposed between and connected by the tubular screw threads tothe backshell and mating rings, so as to provide increased mechanicalsupport and strain-relief to the multi-element cable which is held by thecable clamping means and which passes through the tubular adapter toconnections on the connector and to aid in connection of largemulti-element cable assemblies, the improvement which comprises a tubularadapter ring, slidably positioned about the tubular adapter, said adapterring comprising at least two longitudinally adjacent, segments, a firstsegment having a cross-sectional diameter slightly larger than the crosssectional diameter of the tubular adapter and having a marginal region ofits surface scribed with knurling; and a second segment having across-sectional diameter large enough to allow sliding engagement betweenthe tubular adapter ring and the cable connector ring and having aplurality of tapped set screws circumferentially positioned around theadapter ring to provide locking engagement between the adapter ring theconnector ring.2. The adapter device of claim 1 wherein said device is anodized.3. The adapter device of claim 1 wherein said device is color coded.4. The adapter device of claim 1 including an identification code placedthereon.5. A method of attaching cables to equipment comprising the steps of:interconnecting a cable connector backshell to an adapter device sleeve;inserting a cable through the sleeve;securing said cable to said backshell;sliding an adapter device ring onto said sleeve;mounting said cable onto a connector mating ring;engaging said adapter device sleeve with said connector mating ring;setting said adapter ring in place on said mounting ring; andconnecting the cable to the equipment.6. The method of attaching cables to equipment of claim 5 wherein the stepof connecting the cable to the equipment includes turning the adapter ringto threadably engage said mounting ring to the equipment."}
{"WKU":"039307115","Title":"Special effects lens","App_Date":"1973-10-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Charles W. Powell","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"G02B 2708","References":"1716668;1826090;2452363;2454577;3111878;3237512;3383150;3661439","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A special effects lens comprising an elongated housing of substantiallytriangular shape in transverse section including three longitudinallyextending walls each having a main section and an end section, said mainsection being attached along their longitudinal edges and said endsections being detached from each other, a spherical lens, means formounting said spherical lens in the end sections of said elongated housingin substantially axial alignment therewith, said mounting means includingseats formed on said end sections, said end sections being spaced withrespect to each other and in relation to the diameter of said sphericallens to grippingly engage and mount said spherical lens in said seats, acolored element mounted at each of the apices of said elongated housingalong a transverse plane, and a viewing end opposite said end section,said main sections of said longitudinally-extending walls being of alength substantially equal to the focal length of said spherical lens suchthat clear and sharp images of objects viewed over a wide range ofdistances from said spherical lens are produced at said viewing end.2. A special effects lens in accordance with claim 1 wherein each of saidend sections are tapered along their longitudinal edges so as to formopenings which diverge toward said end opening along the longitudinaledges of said end sections and said end sections further define an endopening adapted to receive said spherical lens in said end sections, saidend sections being formed of a flexible material deflecting laterally andgrippingly engaging said spherical lens by the restoring force in saidflexible material, whereby said spherical lens may be inserted throughsaid end opening to outwardly flex said end sections and to snap-fit saidspherical lens.3. A special effects lens in accordance with claim 1 further includingmeans for removably connecting said special effects lens to a camera."}
{"WKU":"039307123","Title":"Dual turret attachment for a microscope and the like","App_Date":"1972-11-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Olin W. Boughton;Richard Schultz","Assignee":"American Optical Corporation","ICL_Class":"G02B 2108","References":"1995599;2209532;2264835;2266797;2427689;2484972;2565419;2977848;3572889","Claims":"I claim:1. A sub-stage dual-turret attachment for a microscope comprising:a body adapted to be removably mounted on the microscope frame,a first rotatable turret connected to said body, said first rotatableturret having a plurality of openings therein, at least one of saidopenings being adapted to releasably retain an optical element therein,said first rotatable turret being manually rotatable about an axis tobring any one of said openings into substantial alignment with the opticalaxis of the microscope, first indexing means engagable with said firstrotatable turret for releasably retaining any one of said openings insubstantial alignment with the optical axis of the microscope, manuallyoperable means for adjusting said optical element laterally in any desireddirection with respect to the optical axis of the microscope;a second rotatable turret connected to said body, said second rotatableturret having two apertures defined by iris diaphrams therein, twocondenser lens systems carried by said rotatable turret in respectiveoptical alignment with said two apertures, said second rotatable turretbeing manually rotatable about an axis to bring any one of said condenserlens systems into substantial alignment with the optical axis of themicroscope,second indexing means engagable with said second rotatable turret forreleasably retaining any one of said apertures and corresponding condenserlens systems in substantial alignment with the optical axis of themicroscope;said first and second rotatable turrets have a common axis of rotation; andorthogonal adjustment means to provide lateral movement for alignment ofsaid attachment with the optical axis of the microscope, said orthogonaladjustment means including a pair of spaced protrusions on said body, aring member having a first pair of diametrically opposed recesses adaptedto cooperate with said protrusions to slidably locate said ring, a secondpair of diametrically opposed recesses in said ring spaced equidistantfrom said first pair of diametrically opposed recesses, and a supporthaving a pair of protrusions adapted to cooperate with said second pair ofrecesses to slidably locate said support, said support carrying said firstand second rotatable turrets and lock means to hold the attachment in aselected position to provide optical alignment."}
{"WKU":"039307131","Title":"Incident light illumination instrument for selective light and dark","App_Date":"1974-05-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hans-Werner Stankewitz;Hans Determann","Assignee":"Ernst Leitz G.m.b.H.","ICL_Class":"G02B 2110","References":"1943510","Claims":"We claim:1. An incident light illumination apparatus having a light source forgenerating dark and light field illumination along an optical axiscomprising:a. at least one optical component (9) located along said optical axis (18),having a first outer zone (9b) for dark field illumination beams (13) anda separate second inner zone (9a) for light field illumination beams (19),said second inner zone (9a) having a given reciprocal focal lengthdifferent from said first outer zone (9b);b. a microscope objective (2) located along said optical axis;c. an annular lens (15) located along said optical axis and arranged tosaid objective for directing in parallel divergent portions of said darkfield illumination beams;d. a sleeve (17) surrounding said object (2) and said annular lens (15)having an obtuse conical inner reflecting surface for directing said darkfield illumination beams onto an object (14);e. a microscope saddle bracket (1) provided with a bore (4) located alongsaid optical axis (18) between said optical component (9) and saidmicroscope objective (2) with a body of rotation (5) having an insidereflecting surface (5a) located on said bore, said inside reflectingsurface (5a) solely reproducing said dark field beams (13) as a light ringin a plane on the rear side of said microscope objective (2); andf. a splitting mirror (6) located along said optical axis (18) between saidoptical component (9) and said body of rotation (5).2. The incident light illumination apparatus of claim 1, further comprisingmeans for eliminating said light field illumination beams located alongsaid optical axis in proximity to said optical component wherein saidmeans for eliminating is a switchable light stop.3. The incident light illumination apparatus of claim 2, wherein said bodyof rotation (5) is an ellipsoidal segment having one of the foci of saidsegment located in proximity to said first outer zone (9b) and said bodyof rotation has an axis of rotation continuous with said optical axis.4. The incident light illumination apparatus of claim 2, wherein said bodyof rotation is circular.5. The incident light illumination apparatus of claim 2, wherein saidswitchable light stop is between said light source and said opticalcomponent.6. The incident light illumination apparatus of claim 2, wherein saidswitchable light stop is betweem said optical component and said body ofrotation."}
{"WKU":"039307140","Title":"Method of manufacturing an optical fibre light waveguide","App_Date":"1973-11-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard Burnaby Dyott","Assignee":"The Post Office","ICL_Class":"G02B  514;C03C 2502;C03C 2320","References":"2825260;3278283;3387959;3505046;3535017;3615313;3677730","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A method of making a monomode dielectric optical waveguide having atleast one core of triangular cross-section of a first glass compositionand a cladding of a second glass composition, the refractive index of theglass of said core being higher than that of the glass of said cladding,the steps comprising:a. forming a bundle consisting of circular cross-section cladding rods ofequal diameter in integral multiples of three with all rods parallel andthe rods in each group of three in peripheral contact with the other two,with a core rod of circular cross-section arranged in the space definedbetween each group of three cladding rods and sized so as to be inperipheral contact with each surrounding cladding rod;b. heating said bundle to a temperature at which the glasses of both saidfirst and second compositions are plastic; andc. drawing said bundle down by an amount sufficient to produce a triangularcross-section of said core rods and a circular cross-section of the drawnbundle.2. A method of making a triangular cored dielectric optical waveguide asclaimed in claim 1 wherein said bundle of rods comprises a single rod ofsaid first composition and three rods of said second composition.3. A method of making a triangular cored dielectric optical waveguide asclaimed in claim 1 wherein said bundle of rods includes a plurality ofrods of said first composition.4. A dielectric optical waveguide made by the process claimed in claim 1."}
{"WKU":"039307158","Title":"Optical plasma devices","App_Date":"1973-05-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"George C. Brumlik","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"G02F  101","References":"2085406;3067420","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An optical reflector comprising a body of plasma matter in an electricaldischarge field, wherein said plasma matter contains fine particles ofrefractory material in suspension.2. Optical reflector of claim 1 wherein the shape of said reflector isdetermined by the shape of the electrical discharge field and the partialpressures within said plasma matter.3. Optical reflector of claim 1 wherein said fine particles of refractorymaterial are selected from the group of C, Bn, SiO.sub.2, MgO, A1.sub.2O.sub.3 and ThO.sub.2.4. A radiation shield according to claim 1.5. Optical reflector of claim 1 wherein the plasma matter has a wavepattern superimposed on it.6. Optical reflector of claim 1 wherein the plasma matter is immersed in amagnetic field."}
{"WKU":"039307166","Title":"Method of collecting orientation of the molecules of a liquid crystal","App_Date":"1974-10-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jacques Robert","Assignee":"Commissariat a l Energie Atomique","ICL_Class":"G02F  113","References":"3694053;3728008","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A method of collective orientation of the molecules of a mesomorphousliquid crystal in the proximity of a wall comprising the steps ofdepositing on said wall a thin film of solid smectic crystals andcontacting said liquid crystal with said thin film.2. A method according to claim 1, including the step of depositing saidthin film of smectic crystals by vacuum evaporation.3. A liquid-crystal cell for collectively orientation of a mesomorphousliquid crystal comprising two oppositely-facing strips, a conductivedeposit on each of said strips, a thin film of solid smetic crystals onsaid conductive deposits and a mesomorphous liquid crystal in contact withsaid two thin film.4. A liquid-crystal cell according to claim 3, wherein said smecticcrystals are of type A, the resultant orientation of the molecules of saidmesomorphous liquid crystal in the absence of excitation beingperpendicular to said strips.5. A liquid-crystal cell according to claim 3, wherein said smecticcrystals are of type C, the resultant orientation of the molecules of saidliquid crystal in the absence of excitation being inclined with respect tothe normal to said strips."}
{"WKU":"039307174","Title":"Variable light transmission device containing ferrous ammonium sulfate","App_Date":"1974-03-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Michael John McDermott;John Graham Allen","Assignee":"Imperial Chemical Industries Limited","ICL_Class":"G02F  136","References":"3712709;3839857","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A device for the control of light transmission or reflection whichcomprises a working electrode having radiation transmission or reflectionproperties, a counter electrode, and a solution comprising (a) an activematerial which is an N(p-cyanophenyl)-substituted derivative of acompound, usually bicyclic, having two conjugated nitrogen-containingrings and (b) ferrous ammonium sulphate, said solution being in contactwith both working and counter electrodes.2. A device according to claim 1 in which the active material is aN,N di(p-cyanophenyl) 4,4 -bipyridyl salt.3. A device according to claim 1 which comprises a plurality of workingelectrodes disposed to form a display.4. A device according to claim 1 in which the concentration of the activematerial is within the range 0.0005 to 0.02M.5. A device according to claim 4 in which the concentration of the activematerial is within the range 0.001 to 0.01M.6. A device according to claim 1 in which the concentration of the ferrousammonium sulphate is 0.1M to 0.5M.7. A device according to claim 1 in which the pH of the solution is between1 and 3."}
{"WKU":"039307182","Title":"Electro-optic modulator","App_Date":"1974-04-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard E. Jensen","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy","ICL_Class":"G02F  132","References":"3282148;3498693;3626511;3787111;3813142","Claims":"What is claimed as new and desired to be secured by Letters Patent of theUnited States is:1. An electro-optic modulator for modulating a coherent beam of lightcomprising:a Fabry-Perot etalon including a first and a second parallel reflectivesurface, constructed of an electro-optic material;electrically charged metal grating means including an array of alternatelyconnected electrodes of triangular cross-section attached to onereflective surface of said Fabry-Perot etalon for creating an electricallyinduced diffraction grating within said Fabry-Perot etalon to modulatesaid coherent beam of light;wherein said coherent beam of light is reflected a multiple number of timeswithin said Fabry-Perot etalong such that said coherent beam of light isdiffracted said multiple number of times by said electrically induceddiffraction grating thereby reducing the magnitude of an electrical signalrequired on said electrically charged metal grating from that requiredwithout said multiple reflections to produce a predetermined deviation ofsaid coherent light beam.2. An electro-optic modulator for modulating a coherent beam of lightincident thereon comprising:electro-optic material;a partial mirror attached to a first side of said electro-optic material;a dielectric reflective coating having a coefficient of reflectivitysubstantially equal to 100% applied to a second side of said electro-opticmaterial opposite said partial mirror;grid means for producing, by the application of an electrical charge tosaid grid means, a diffraction grating in said electro-optic material tomodulate said coherent beam of light;means for applying an electrical field in said electro-optic material whichis substantially perpendicular to said coherent beam of light passingthrough said partial mirror and said electro-optic material and impingentupon said dielectric reflective coating;wherein said coherent beam of light is reflected a multiple number of timesbetween said partial mirror and said reflective coating such that saidelectrically induced diffraction grating causes said coherent beam oflight to be diffracted by the application of an electrical charge havingan amplitude reduced by said multiple number of reflections from thatamplitude required to produce a predetermined deviation of said coherentbeam of light without said multiple number of reflections.3. The modulator of claim 2 wherein said grid means comprises a metalgrating having a triangular cross-sectional shape.4. The electro-optical modulator described in claim 2 wherein said partialmirror comprises a second dielectric reflective coating.5. The electro-optic modulator described in claim 2 wherein said partialmirror comprises an electrical conductor.6. The electro-optic modulator described in claim 2 wherein a first and asecond electrode are attached to opposite sides of said etalon in planesperpendicular to said dielectric coating."}
{"WKU":"039307190","Title":"Edge brightness display and method using a material exhibiting","App_Date":"1973-04-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert W. Madrid;Joseph J. Wysocki","Assignee":"Xerox Corporation","ICL_Class":"G02f  126","References":"3512876;3540769;3697150;3718382;3790251","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An electro-optic method, comprising:a. providing a member comprising between two transparent electrodes adielectric anisotropic material having, at least under the influence of anelectrical field, optical uniaxiality; one of said electrodes having animagewise portion separated from a background portion by an electricallyinsulating surface;b. providing an electrical field across said dielectric anisotropicmaterial by applying a voltage between the other of said two electrodesand each of imagewise and background portions of said one electrodes; andc. removing the voltage between the imagewise portion of said one electrodeand the other electrode; and applying a voltage between said imagewise andbackground portions of said one electrode.2. The method of claim 1 wherein the dielectric anisotropic materialcomprises about 60 percent by weight cholesteryl chloride and about 40percent by weight cholesteryl nonanoate.3. The method of claim 1 wherein the dielectric anisotropic materialcomprises about 8 percent by weight N-phenyl-l-napthylamine and about 92percent by weight of a mixture containing about 60 percent by weightcholesteryl chloride and about 40 percent by weight cholesteryl nonanoate.4. The method of claim 1 wherein the dielectric anisotropic material is aliquid crystalline material.5. The method of claim 1 wherein the liquid crystalline material comprisesa compensated cholesteric liquid crystalline mixture.6. The method of claim 1 wherein said dielectric anisotropic material is acholesteric which, under the influence of the electrical field applied instep (b), assumes optical uniaxiality.7. The method of claim 1 wherein said dielectric anisotropic material is apositive dielectric anisotropic material and in step (b) has its opticaxis substantially parallel to the electrical field.8. The method of claim 1 wherein said dielectric anisotropic material is anegative dielectric anisotropic material and in step (b) has its opticaxis substantially normal to the electrical field.9. The method of claim 1 further including the addition of eitherelectrophoretic or dielectrophoretic particles to said dielectricanisotropic material.10. The method of claim 1 wherein said dielectric anisotropic materialcomprises anisotropic particles in a carrier liquid.11. An electro-optic method, comprising:a. providing a member comprising between two electrodes a dielectricanisotropic material having, at least under the influence of an electricalfield, optical uniaxiality; one of said electrodes being a transparentmatrix electrode having a plurality of individually addressable solid areaelectrodes; the other of said electrodes being a transparent line gridelectrode having a plurality of line grid patterns comprising conductingand insulating surfaces, said line grid patterns being in registry withsaid plurality of solid area electrodes;b. providing an electrical field across said dielectric anisotropicmaterial by applying a voltage between at least one of the solid areaelectrodes and the line grid pattern in registry therewith; andc. electrically connecting said at least one solid area electrode and theline grid pattern in registry therewith.12. An electro-optic display, comprising:a. a transparent matrix electrode having a plurality of individuallyaddressable solid areas electrodes;b. a transparent line grid electrode having a plurality of line gridpatterns comprising conducting and insulating surfaces, said line gridpatterns being in registry with said plurality of solid area electrodes;c. a dielectric anisotropic material sandwiched between said matrixelectrode and said line grid electrode, said dielectric anisotropicmaterial having, at least under the influence of an electrical field,optical uniaxiality;d. means for providing an electrical field across said dielectricanisotropic material by selectively applying a voltage between at leastone of the solid area electrodes and the line grid patterns in registrytherewith; ande. means for selectively electrically connecting said at least one of saidsolid area electrodes and the line grid pattern in registry therewith.13. The display of claim 12 wherein the solid area electrodes aresubstantially circular dots and the grid-line electrode patterns are dotpatterns.14. The apparatus of claim 12 further including polarizers crossed at about90.degree., on opposite sides of the matrix electrode-dielectricanisotropic material-line grid electrode sandwich; and a source ofcollimated light oriented so that the collimated beam provided by saidsource is substantially normal to the polarizers.15. An electro-optic display, comprising:a. A first transparent electrode comprising an imagewise portion separatedfrom a background portion by an electrically insulating surface;b. a second transparent electrode having a plurality of alternatingconductive and insulating grid lines;c. a dielectric anisotropic material sandwiched between said first andsecond electrodes; said dielectric anisotropic material having at leastunder the influence of an electrical field, optical uniaxiality.d. means for applying an electrical field across said dielectricanisotropic material comprising a voltage source, one polarity of saidvoltage source being in electrical connection with said second electrodeand the other polarity of said voltage source being in electricalconnection with the background portion of said first electrode; ande. means for selectively electrically connecting said imagewise portion ofsaid first electrode to either of said voltage source polarities.16. The display according to claim 15, further including polarizers crossedat about 90.degree., on opposite sides of the display; and a source ofcollimated light oriented so that the collimated beam provided by saidsource is substantially normal to the polarizers."}
{"WKU":"039307204","Title":"Control device for a zoom lens system","App_Date":"1975-02-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kyozo Uesugi","Assignee":"Minolta Camera Kabushiki Kaisha","ICL_Class":"G02B 1500","References":"3059534;3095750;3185029;3399943;3450019","Claims":"I claim:1. A control device for a zoom lens system having an optical systemincluding a focus lens unit and a zoom lens unit coaxially arranged andmovable along the optical axis of the optical sytstem, the position of thefocusing lens unit being varied in accordance with the focal length of theoptical system, the control device comprising:zoom adjusting means for moving said zoom lens unit along the optical axisin response to a zooming operation so as to vary the focal length of saidoptical system;means pivotally mounted about a point and being pivotable in response to afocusing operation; and,focus adjusting means having a portion coupled to said pivotable means andadditionally coupled to said focus lens unit, said focus adjusting meansbeing operated in response to movement of said pivotable means and inresponse thereto causing movement of said focus lens unit along saidoptical axis for a distance dependent upon the distance between saidcoupled portion and said pivoting point so as to adjust the focal point ofsaid optical system, said focus adjustment means also being coupled tosaid zoom adjusting means so that said coupled portion is movable inresponse to operation of said zoom adjusting means so as to vary thedistance between said coupled portion and said pivoting point inaccordance with a variance in the focal length of said optical systemcaused by the zooming operation.2. A control device as defined in claim 1, wherein said zoom lens unitforms one part of said focus lens unit and is arranged behind the outerpart of said focus lens unit with respect to an object.3. A control device as defined in claim 1, wherein said zoom lens unit isarranged in front of said focus lens unit with respect to an object.4. A control device as defined in claim 1, wherein said zoom lens unit andsaid focus lens unit comprise the same lens groups.5. A control device as defined in claim 1, wherein said focus lens unitforms one part of said zoom lens unit and is arranged behind the otherpart of said zoom lens unit with respect to an object.6. A control device as defined in claim 1 further comprising a barrelstructure supporting said focus lens unit and said zoom lens unit; andwherein said zoom control means, said pivotable means and said focusadjustment means are provided outside of said barrel structure; and saidfocus adjustment means includes:a first movable member movable in a first direction parallel to saidoptical axis and coupled with said focus lens unit so as to move saidfocus lens unit along said optical axis for adjustment of the focal point;and,a second movable member providing said coupled portion, said second movablemember being associated with said first movable member and said zoomcontrol means so as to be movable in a second direction perpendicular tothe first direction independently of said first movable member, inresponse to the operation of said zoom control means so as to vary thedistance between said coupled portion and said pivoting point inaccordance with a variance in the focal length and movable in said firstdirection together with said first movable member, in response to movementof said pivotable means, for a distance dependent upon the distancebetween said coupled portion and said pivoting point.7. A control device as defined in claim 6, wherein said zoom adjustingmeans includes a rotatable member coupled to said zoom lens unit and saidsecond movable member, said rotatable member having rotatable in responseto a zooming operation so as to move said zoom lens unit along the opticalaxis to vary the focal length of said optical system and also so as tomove said second movable member in the second direction to vary thedistance from said coupled portion to said pivoting point.8. A control device as defined in claim 7, wherein said second movablemember has a slot extending in the first direction, and said rotatablemember has a pin provided at a radially offset position from its rotatingcenter, said slot and said pin cooperating to move said second movablemember in the second direction in accordance with the rotation of saidrotatable member.9. A control device as defined in claim 6 futher comprising means forconveying a focusing operation to said pivotable means so that saidpivotable means can be pivoted in response to such focusing operation.10. A control device for a zoom lens system including an optical systemhaving first, second and third lens groups coaxially arranged andpositioned away from an object in such order, a fixed barrel, a firstmovable barrel carrying the first lens group and movable along the opticalaxis of the optical system, a second movable barrel carrying the secondlens group and movable along the optical axis, and a third movable barrelcarrying the third lens group and movable along the optical axis, forfocusing the first to third movable barrels being moved as a unit by anamount dependent upon the focal length of the optical system selected by azooming operation, the control device comprises:a first manually operable member for focusing;a second manually operable member for zooming;means for zoom control operable in response to operation of said secondmanual member so as to move said second and third movable barrels alongthe optical axis for select distances for varying the focal length of saidoptical system;means pivotable about a pivoting point lying in a plane parallel to theoptical axis and being pivoted in response to operation of said firstmanual member;first focus adjustment means movable in a first direction parallel to theoptical axis to move said first, second and third movable barrels alongthe optical axis as a unit for adjustment of the focal point of saidoptical system; and,second focus adjustment means having a portion operatively coupled withsaid pivotable means, and said second means also being operatively coupledwith said first movable member so as to be moved in the first directionwith said portion in response to a pivoting of said pivotable means, suchmovement in the first direction being for an amount dependent upon thedistance between said portion and said pivoting point, said second focusadjustment means also being operatively coupled with said zoom controlmeans so as to be moved in a second direction perpendicular to the firstdirection independently of said first focus adjustment means in responseto operation of said zoom control means to vary the distance between saidportion and said pivoting point in accordance with a variance in the focallength.11. A control device as defined in claim 10, wherein said pivotable meansincludes a first pivotable member pivotable about said pivoting point inresponse to the focusing operation and a second pivotable member pivotableabout said pivoting point together with said first pivotable member andoperatively coupled with said portion of said second focus adjustmentmeans; and further comprising manually operable means for changing therelative position of said second pivotable member to said first pivotablemember in a pivoting plane of said second pivotable member.12. A control device as defined in claim 11 further comprising a pinconnecting said first pivotable member and said second pivotable membertogether at their substantially end portions offset from said pivotingpoint so as to permit said second pivotable member to pivot about said pinin the pivoting plane of said second pivotable member by the operation ofsaid manual means so at to change the relative position of said secondpivotable member to said first pivotable member in said pivoting plane ofsaid second pivotable member.13. A control device for an objective lens system of the type in which thefocal length is variable in response to a zooming operation, the objectivelens system having at least one lens group movable in response to a focusadjusting operation so that the amount of movement of such lens group foran object at the same distance varies in reliance upon the focal lengthadjusted, the control device comprising:zoom means responsive to a zooming operation for adjusting said objectivelens system to vary its focal length;focus means coupled with said at least one lens group for adjusting theposition of said lens group;control means angularly movable about a rotational axis in response to afocus adjusting operation and associated with said focus means at anassociating point positioned at a distance from said rotational axis so asto determine the position of said focus means as a function of the angularposition of said control means; and,adjusting means for varying the distance between said associating point andsaid rotational axis in accordance with the focal length adjusted by saidzoom means.14. A control device as defined in claim 13, further comprising a barrelstructure supporting said lens system; wherein said control means isdisposed outside of said barrel structure in such a manner that saidrotational axis is substantially perpendicular to the optical axis of saidlens system.15. A control device as defined in claim 14, wherein: said zoom meansincludes a disk plate rotatable about an axis parallel with saidrotational axis and cam means for determining the focal length inaccordance with the rotational position of said disk plate; and focusmeans includes an intermediate member coupled with said control means atsaid associating point and guide means for guiding said intermediatemember to move in such a specific direction as to vary the distancebetween said associating point and said rotational axis; and saidadjusting means includes means for moving said intermediate member in suchspecific direction in accordance with the rotation of said disk plate.16. A control device as defined in claim 15, whrein said focus meansfurther includes a frame structure interconnected with said lens groupsfor focus adjustment so as to move therewith, and said guide means isformed on said frame structure.17. A control device as defined in claim 16, wherein said lens systemincludes two groups of lenses movable relative to each other for varyingthe focal length and interlocked with said disk plate to be controlledthereby, and said disk plate is mounted on said frame structure to movetherewith.18. A control device as defined in claim 17, wherein said control meansincludes a control plate provided with a straight groove extending in aradial direction with respect to said rotational axis, and saidintermediate member has a pin fixed thereon and engaged with said groove.19. A control device as defined in claim 18, wherein: said frame structureis movable along the optical axis of said lens system for focusadjustment; said guide means guides said intermediate member in adirection substantially perpendicular to the direction of movement of saidframe structure; said intermediate member has a slot; said disk plate hasa pin fixed thereon and engaged with said slot; said cam means includescam slot means formed on said disk plate such that said pin of said diskplate moves substantially in parallel with said intermediate member withsaid cam slot means selecting approximately a middle focal length in theavailable range.20. A control device for a varifocal objective lens system of the type inwhich the amount of focus adjustment varies as a function of the focallength of the system, said control device comprising:first operable means angularly movable about a rotational axis in responseto a focus adjusting operation;second operable means movable in response to a focal length adjustingoperation to vary the focal length of the system;focus control means for adjusting the focusing condition of said objectivelens system in accordance with the angular position of said first operablemeans, said focus control means being coupled between said first andsecond operable means such that the distance from said rotational axis toan acting point where said first operable member acts on said focuscontrol member varies in accordance with the movement of said secondoperable means so that the amount of adjustment for focusing for the sameangular movement of said first operable means varies as a function of thefocal length adjustment.21. A control device as defined in claim 20, further comprising a barrelstructure supporting lens system; and wherein said control means isdisposed outside of said barrel structure such that said rotational axisis substantially perpendicular to the optical axis of said lens system andsaid second operable means includes a disk plate rotatable about an axissubstantially parallel with said rotational axis.22. A control device as defined in claim 21, wherein said objective lenssystem includes two groups of lenses movable relative to each other, oneof said lens groups being interlocked with said focus control means to becontrolled thereby, and said disk plate has cam means for controlling therelative movement of said lens groups.23. A control device as defined in claim 21, wherein: said objective lenssystem includes two groups of lenses movable relative to each other; saiddisk plate has cam means for controlling the relative movement of saidlens groups and said disk plate is associated with said two lens groups insuch a manner that rotation of said disk plate causes the relativemovement; and said focus control means is movable in accordance with theangular position of said first operable means together with said diskplate to move said two lens groups in response to adjustment of thefocusing condition.24. A control device as defined in claim 23, wherein said focus controlmeans includes an intermediate member movable in response to a rotation ofsaid disk plate and a frame structure having guide means for controllingthe movement of said intermediate member, said disk plate is rotatablymounted on said frame structure and said intermediate member isinterconnected with said control means to vary the distance between saidrotational axis and said acting point in accordance with the movement ofsaid intermediate member.25. A control device as claimed in claim 24, wherein: said frame structureis movable along the optical axis of said objective lens system for focusadjustment; said guide means guides the intermediate member in a directionsubstantially perpendicular to the direction of movement of said framestructure; said intermediate member has a slot; said disk plate has a pinfixed thereon and engaged with said slot; said cam means includes two camslots formed on said disk plate such that said pin of said disk platemoves in parallel with said intermediate member at the middle of the zoomcontrol range."}
{"WKU":"039307212","Title":"Slidable mirror for adjustable speed projector with synchronized sound","App_Date":"1975-02-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Guy C. Caraway","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"G05D 2500;G03B 1912","References":"1449429;1962321;2400483;3825218","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Retractable mirror apparatus comprising:a mirror element having a base portion and a reflecting portion, saidreflecting portion being disposed at an angle to said base portion;a frame member having a straight groove for guiding said base portion toslide in a straight line between extended and retracted positions and anopening for receiving said reflecting portion of said mirror element whenin the extended position;a spring member mounted on said frame member and engaging said base portionof said mirror element to resiliently urge said mirror element againstsaid frame member and toward the retracted position; andan actuating element for engaging said spring member to move said mirrorelement to the extended position so that said base portion lies againstsaid frame member within said groove and said reflector portion extendsthrough said opening in said frame member at an angle determined by theangle between said reflector portion and said base portion of said mirrorelement.2. The retractable mirror apparatus of claim 1 wherein said spring memberincludes a first leg extending parallel to said frame member atapproximately right angles to said groove, one end of said leg engagingsaid frame member and the other end of said leg engaging said base portionof said mirror element, and wherein said actuating element is movable in adirection parallel to said groove and engages said leg at a point betweenits ends.3. The retractable mirror apparatus of claim 2 wherein said spring memberincludes a second leg which is bent to resiliently engage said framemember so as to cause said first leg to urge said base portion of saidmirror element against said frame member and toward the retractedposition."}
{"WKU":"039307220","Title":"Sanitary wig viewing device","App_Date":"1974-05-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert A. Anzivino","Assignee":"Omri M. Behr","ICL_Class":"G02B  510;A47G  114","References":"936344;2665040;2899860;D52639;D190789","Claims":"I claim:1. A sanitary wig viewing means comprising:a substantially oval, concave mirror having a focal length in the range offifteen to thirty inches and having dimensions substantially those of theoutline of the frontal elevation of a human face below the normal hairline of said face; and,means for mounting a wig peripherally around at least the upper half of thecircumference of said mirror.2. A sanitary wig viewing means comprising:a rigid, self-supporting stand adapted to support a wig, said stand havingthe size and mutual dimensions of a human head rearwardly of that portionof the head comprising the forehead, the nose, the eyes, the mouth, andthe chin; and,a substantially oval, concave mirror having a focal length in the range offifteen to thirty inches, said mirror being located in the front portionof said support means and having dimensions substantially equivalent tothe frontal elevation presented by said human head,wherein when a wig is in position on the wig viewing means, a human headwill appear in substantially the correct proportions with respect to saidwig when viewed from within arms distance of the wig viewing means."}
{"WKU":"039307239","Title":"Method and apparatus for viewing pictures","App_Date":"1974-04-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James B. Holt","Assignee":"Creative Optics, Inc.","ICL_Class":"G03B 2100;G03B 2156","References":"1419901;2045120;2174778;2320760;2482031;3246943","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method for viewing pictures comprising the steps of:a. providing a flat surface containing a picture to be viewed;b. positioning a concave mirror at an angle to said surface, said anglebeing defined by the intersection of the plane of said concave mirror withsaid flat surface at a point below said concave mirror so that a viewercan view the picture as reflected to his eye by said concave mirror; andc. securing marginal masking means directly in full surface contact to allof the marginal edges of said concave mirror to define within the maskingmeans of reflecting area less than the total area of the picture wherebythe visibility of the top, bottom, and side portions of the picture can bechanged by the viewer shifting his line of sight, said masking meansdefining a window which appears closer than the viewed picture so that athree-dimensional effect results.2. The method of claim 1, including the additional steps of making themasking means on the top of the concave mirror narrower in width than onthe bottom, and making the opposite side masking means taper in width frombottom to top such that when said mirror is viewed while at said angle,the masking means appears to have uniform width.3. The method of claim 1, including the step of projecting said picture tobe viewed onto said flat surface, the optical axis of the projectionforming an angle with the perpendicular to said surface so that thepicture appears distorted when viewed directly while contained on thesurface, the angular relationship and curvature of said mirror being suchas to distort the picture in an opposite sense to the original distortionwhereby said picture appears undistorted when its reflection is viewed insaid concave mirror.4. An apparatus for viewing pictures comprising, in combination:a. a casing having an upper flat surface upon which a picture to be viewedis provided;b. a concave mirror supported by said casing in a position forming an acuteangle with said flat surface, said angle being defined by the intersectionof the plane of said concave mirror with said flat surface at a pointbelow said concave mirror such that a viewer can view the picture asreflected to his eye by said concave mirror; andc. masking means secured directly in full surface contact to all of themarginal surfaces of said concave mirror to define a reflecting areawithin said masking means less than the total area of said picture wherebythe visibility of the top, bottom, and side portions of the picture can bechanged by the viewer shifting his line of vision, said masking meansdefining a window which appears closer than the viewed picture so that athree-dimensional effect results.5. An apparatus according to claim 4, in which said masking means isnarrower in width on the top of the concave mirror than on the bottom, theopposite side masking means tapering in width from bottom to top such thatwhen said mirror is viewed while at said angle, the masking means appearsto have uniform width.6. An apparatus according to claim 4, in which said flat surface is definedby a rear projection screen, said casing including a projector forprojecting said picture onto said flat surface, the optical axis of saidprojector forming an angle with the perpendicular to said surface so thatthe picture appears distorted when viewed directly while on said surface,the angular relationship and curvature of said mirror being such as todistort the picture in an opposite sense to the original distortionwhereby said picture appears undistorted when its reflection is viewed insaid concave mirror."}
{"WKU":"039307247","Title":"Masking apparatus for a multi-color electrophotographic printing machine","App_Date":"1973-11-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James H. McVeigh","Assignee":"Xerox Corporation","ICL_Class":"G03g 1504","References":"2523735;2890343","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An electrophotographic printing machine of the type having an opticalsystem arranged to create a light image of an original document whichirradiates a charged photoconductive member recording an electrostaticlatent image of the original documents thereon, wherein the improvementincludes:means for supporting the original document in a light receivingrelationship with the optical system;a substantially transparent sheet;means for holding the original document in operative communication withsaid transparent sheet to enable selective portions of the originaldocument to be masked on said transparent sheet;at least one opaque substantially non-light absorbing strip adapted to besecured to said transparent sheet for masking a selected portion of theoriginal document; andmeans for moving said transparent sheet with said opaque strip securedthereto into a masking relationship with the original document.2. A printing machine as recited in claim 1, wherein said opaque stripcontains additional indicia thereon adapted to be inserted into theoriginal document.3. A printing machine as recited in claim 1, wherein said moving meansincludes:a frame having a registration mark thereon;a plurality of spaced rollers mounted on said frame; andan endless belt entrained about said rollers, said endless belt beingarranged to advance said transparent sheet into alignment with theregistration mark on said frame.4. A printing machine as recited in claim 3, wherein said holding meansincludes a tray having a generally planar surface for supporting theoriginal document thereon, said tray being mounted slidably on said framebeneath the upper portion of said endless belt.5. A printing machine as recited in claim 4, wherein said supporting meansincludes in tray having a generally planar surface for supporting theoriginal document beneath the lower portion of said endless belt aftersaid opaque strip has been secured to said transparent sheet, therebyenabling said transparent sheet with said opaque strip secured thereto tobe interposed between the original document and the optical system of theprinting machine."}
{"WKU":"039307255","Title":"Multiple sheet feeding system for electrostatographic printing machines","App_Date":"1974-03-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hugh L. Jones;James W. Van Deluyster","Assignee":"Xerox Corporation","ICL_Class":"G03G 1500","References":"1007008;1991003;3490842;3630607;3698706","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A reproduction machine having a plurality of processing stations toproduce a developed latent image on a moving photoreceptor member fortransferral to a sheet of copy paper, and a programming system forcontrolling operation of the processing stations in timed sequencerelative to the movement of the photoreceptor member including:a plurality of copy paper supply sources, each having a stack of papersheets and a sheet separating device;a sheet conveying mechanism associated with each of said paper sourceswhereby sheets separated from the stacks are transported therefrom bytheir respective conveying mechanisms;registration means associated with said sheet conveying mechanisms forregistering and aligning each sheet presented to said registration meansby said conveying mechanisms,drive means for moving said registration means at a speed such thatregistration and alignment of the sheet occurs at a linear sheet speedsubstantially equal to the linear speed of the photoreceptor member; and,control means operatively connected to the machine programming system andsaid sheet separating devices to actuate said sheet separating devices ata predetermined point in the process of producing a developed imageirrespective of the paper supply source being utilized, said sheetconveying mechanisms and said paper supply sources being arranged suchthat the sheets separated from said sources arrive at the registrationmeans at the same predetermined time after actuation of the sheetseparating devices associated therewith, thereby allowing the same timedrelationship between actuation of any of the sheet separating devices andthe registration of said sheets to allow sequential operation of theseparating devices without requiring a change in machine timing.2. A reproduction machine having a plurality of processing stations toproduce a developed latent image on a moving photoreceptor member fortransferral to a sheet of copy paper, and a programming system forcontrolling operation of the processing stations in timed sequencerelative to the movement of the photoreceptor member including:a plurality of copy paper supply sources, each having a stack of papersheets and a sheet separating device, one of said paper sources having aprimary sheet conveying mechanism associated therewith whereby sheetsseparated from said one paper source are transported therefrom, theremainder of said paper supply sources each having a secondary conveyingmechanism associated therewith whereby sheets separated from the stacksare transported therefrom by their respective secondary conveyingmechanism, said secondary conveying mechanisms being arranged forconveying sheets to said primary conveying mechanism for permittingconveyance thereby of all sheets during a portion of their path ofmovement;registration means positioned in the machine for registering and aligningeach sheet received from said primary conveying mechanism,means for driving said registration means at a speed such that registrationand alignment of the sheets occurs at a linear speed substantially equalto the linear speed of the photoreceptor member for delivery of sheetsfrom the registration means to the photoreceptor at the linear speed ofthe photoreceptor, andcontrol means operatively connected to the machine programming system andsaid sheet separating devices to actuate said sheet separating devices ata predetermined point in the process of producing the developed imageirrespective of the paper supply source being utilized, said sheetconveying mechanism and said paper supply sources being located such thatthe sheets separated from said supply sources arrive at the registrationmeans at the same predetermined time after actuation of the sheetseparating device associated therewith, thereby allowing the same timedrelationship between actuation of any of the sheet separating devices andthe registration of said sheets to allow sequential operation of theseparating devices without requiring a change in machine timing.3. A reproduction machine having a plurality of processing stations toproduce a developed latent image on a moving photoreceptor member fortransferral to suitable image support material, and a programming systemfor controlling operation of the processing stations in timed sequencerelative to the movement of the photoreceptor member including:a plurality of support material sources;continuously rotating registration fingers positioned in the machine forregistering and aligning individual sheets of support material;means for rotating said registration fingers at a variable speed, thelowest circumferential speed attained by said registration fingers beingsubstantially equal to the linear speed of the photoreceptor member toprovide for registration and alignment of the support material at a linearspeed substantially equal to the linear speed of the photoreceptor memberprior to delivery of the support material to the photoreceptor member;support material supplying means associated with each of said supportmaterial sources whereby support material from said sources is fedtherefrom to said registration means; andcontrol means operatively connected to the machine programming and saidsupport material supplying means to move said support material from itssource at a predetermined point in the process of producing the developedimage irrespective of the source being utilized, said supplying means andsaid sources being arranged such that the material separated therefromarrives at the registration means at the same predetermined time afterleaving its source irrespective of its source, thereby allowing the sametimed relationship between movement of the material from any of saidsources and the registration of said material to allow utilization of anyof said sources without requiring a change in machine timing."}
{"WKU":"039307263","Title":"System for measuring volumetric ratios of liquid suspended solids","App_Date":"1974-05-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Stephen E. Dolive","Assignee":"Reginald C. Shuck","ICL_Class":"G01N 3316","References":"3684450;3740143;3817632;3830569","Claims":"I claim:1. A system for determining the volumetric ratio of solids suspended in aliquid, comprising:means for passing a beam of electromagnetic energy through a sample of aliquid having solids suspended therein;means for measuring a characteristic representative of the amount of saidenergy absorbed by said sample;means for computing said volumetric ratio by electronically applying aproportionality factor to an output of said measuring means;means for passing said beam through a standard sample of said liquid havinga known volumetric ratio, said measuring means further comprising meansfor measuring a characteristic representative of the amount of said energyabsorbed by said standard liquid sample; andmeans for electronically calculating said proportionality factor as a ratioof said known volumetric ratio to the amount of said beam absorbed by saidstandard liquid sample.2. The system recited in claim 1 further comprising means for diluting saidliquid sample.3. The system recited in claim 1 wherein said beam passing means comprises:means for holding a liquid sample container;said beam of electromagnetic energy comprising a source of light positionedadjacent said container-holding means such that said container isinterposed in said beam;first means for receiving energy in said beam after having passed through aportion of said container filled with said liquids; andsecond means for receiving a light output directly from said source.4. The system recited in claim 3 wherein said source comprises a lightsource complementary to said solids suspended in said liquids.5. The system recited in claim 3 further comprisingreference charge storing means coupled to said second receiving meanswhereby charge is stored therein corresponding to the amount of lightreceived directly from said source.6. The system recited in claim 5 wherein said measuring means comprisesother charge storing means coupled to said first receiving means, wherebycharge is stored therein corresponding to the amount of light receivedthrough said liquidfilled portion of said container.7. The system recited in claim 6 further comprising:amplifying means coupled between both said charge storing means and firstand second receiving means;first switching means interposed between said first and second receivingmeans and said amplifying means for alternately switching said amplifierbetween said receiving means; andsecond switching means coupled between said amplifying means and said twocharges storing means for alternately switching said amplifying meansbetween said two charge storing means.8. The system recited in claim 7 further comprising stabilizing circuitmeans coupled to said amplifier for correcting offset voltages out of saidamplifier.9. The system recited in claim 8 further comprising sequencing means foralternatively energizing said first and second switching means and saidstabilizing circuit means.10. The system recited in claim 9 wherein said stabilizing circuit meanscomprises:a capacitor coupled to the output of said amplifying means; andthird switching means coupled between said capacitor and the output of saidamplifier.11. The system recited in claim 10 wherein said sequencing means comprisesmeans for energizing said third switching means prior to each energizationof each of said first and second switching means.12. The system recited in claim 6 further comprising:means for draining charge from said reference charge storage means; andmeans for measuring the time required for draining the difference in chargestored in said reference charge storing means with respect to said othercharge storing means.13. The system recited in claim 12 wherein said charge draining meanscomprises:an impedance; andmeans for sequentially applying said impedance across said reference chargestoring means.14. The system recited in claim 13 wherein said time measuring meanscomprises:repetitive pulsing means; andmeans for counting the number of repetitive pulses from said pulsing meansduring said charge difference draining time.15. The system recited in claim 14 further comprising a comparator circuitcoupled to both said charge storing means for interrupting said countingmeans when both said charge storing means have equal charges storedtherein.16. The system recited in claim 12 further comprising means for alteringthe discharge rate from said two charge storing means.17. The system recited in claim 16 further comprising means for adjustingsaid correction voltage to the sum of any offset voltage out of saidamplifier and any noise voltage across said charge storing means.18. The system recited in claim 1 wherein said solid consists essentiallyof blood cells, and wherein said volumetric ratio comprises the hematocritratio of said blood cells.19. The system recited in claim 18 wherein said measuring means comprisesmeans for measuring the amount of said electromagnetic energy transmittedthrough said sample.20. A system for determining the hematocrit ratio of blood cells suspendedin a liquid, comprising:means for passing a beam of electromagnetic energy through a sample of saidliquid having said blood cells therein;means for determining a characteristic representative of the amount ofenergy absorbed by said blood cells in said sample;means for storing a charge corresponding to the magnitude of said absorbedenergy characteristic;means for storing a charge corresponding to the magnitude of energy in saidbeam before passing through said sample;means for determining the logarithm of the difference of charges stored insaid two charge storing means;means for computing said volumetric ratio by electronically applying aproportionality factor to an output of said logarithm determining means;means for passing said beam through a standard blood sample having a knownhematic ratio, said determining means further comprising means fordetermining a characteristic representative of the amount of energyabsorbed by said standard blood sample; andmeans for electronically calculating said proportionality factor as a ratioof said known hematic ratio to the amount of said energy absorbed by saidstandard blood sample.21. The system recited in claim 20, further comprising:repetitive pulsing means; andmeans for counting the number of said repetitive pulses during operation ofsaid stored charge difference determining means.22. The system recited in claim 21, further comprising means for providinga visual indication of the number of said repetitive pulses counted."}
{"WKU":"039307271","Title":"Automatic variable filters for use in scanned spectrometers and the like","App_Date":"1974-01-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Joseph A. Vergato","Assignee":"Perkin-Elmer Corporation","ICL_Class":"G01J  342","References":"3409373","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a spectrometer of the type used for scanning an light sourcecontaining a pluality of unknown frequencies, by optically viewing andscanning said source over a predetermined range of frequencies, to developelectrical signals having frequency components related to those present insaid source, and in combination, means for selectively filtering saidelectrical signals comprising:a. variable low pass filter means responsive to said electrical signals,and capable of providing a plurality of different time constants relatedrespectively to possible frequency components in said electrical signalsto effectively respond to any one of said frequency components, saidfilter means having a control input terminal for application thereto of acontrol voltage signal for varying said time constant to any valueincluded in said plurality of different time constants,b. modulating means having an input responsive to the rate of scanning andproviding at an output a modulated control voltage signal manifesting avariation according to said scanning rate, andc. means coupling said modulated control voltage signal to said controlinput terminal of said filter means to vary said time constant accordingto said scanning rate.2. The apparatus according to claim 1 wherein said modulating means is apulse width modulator.3. The apparatus according to claim 1 wherein said variable filter meansincludes at least one active semiconductor device, having an input, outputand control electrode, said control electrode operative upon applicationof a control signal thereto to vary the impedance of said active devicebetween said input and output electrode, said input electrode adapted tobe responsive to said electrical signals.4. The apparatus according to claim 3 wherein said active semiconductordevice is a field effect transistor.5. In a spectrometer for determining the frequencies contained in opticalsignals wherein variable rate scanning means scans the optical signals ata selected rate and over a predetermined range of frequencies forisolating the frequencies contained in said range and wherein the scannedoptical signals are converted into electrical signals which are filteredby filter means to separate out desired components and then furtherprocessed to identify the frequencies present in said range, and incombination:a variable pulse width modulator for producing pulsed electrical signals,means for varying the widths of the electrical pulses from the pulse widthmodulator in relation to changes in the scan rate of the scanning means,said filter means comprising a variable frequency low pass filter,said electrical signals being connected to said filter through on-offswitch means,the time constant of the filter being variable in proportion to the ratioof the on to off time of said switch means as means for varying thecharacteristic frequency of the filter means, andsaid pulse width modulator being connected to actuate said switch meansbetween its on and off conditions in proportion to the width of electricalpulses therefrom,whereby the time constant of the filter means and hence its characteristicfrequency are continuously and automatically varied in relation to changesin the scan rate for maintaining an optimum characteristic frequency ofthe filter for the selected scan rate."}
{"WKU":"039307280","Title":"Monochromator with concave grating","App_Date":"1974-07-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Guy Pieuchard;Jean Flamand;Genevieve Passereau","Assignee":"Jobin-Yvon","ICL_Class":"G01J  318","References":"3628849","Claims":"We claim:1. A monochromator comprising a concave grating the lines of which aresituated at the intersection of the concave surface with a family ofsurfaces geometrically like the equiphasic surfaces obtained as loci ofthe luminous intensity maxima produced by the interference of two beamsfrom two point sources C and D, means defining an entry slit A and meansdefining an exit slit B, wherein the polar coordinates of said points Cand D and of said entry slit A said exit slit B in a system of polarcoordinates having as its origin the apex of said grating and as referenceaxis the axis of said grating in a plane of reference passing through theaxis are connected by the following relationships:##EQU3##in which (.alpha., l.sub.A), (.beta., l.sub.B), (.gamma., l.sub.C) and(.delta., l.sub.D) are the polar coordinates of A, B, C and D,respectively, R is the radius of curvature of said grating, .omega. =(.alpha.+.beta.)/2, .omega. being the angle of rotation of the grating,and .phi.=(.alpha.-.beta.)/2, 2.phi. being the angle at which the twoslits at the summit of the grating are viewed.2. Monochromator according to claim 1, wherein1500 .ltoreq.N      .ltoreq. 2000(N being the number of51.degree..ltoreq..gamma..ltoreq.  76.degree.lines per mm of said2.degree..ltoreq..delta..ltoreq.  grating)e.0.8R .ltoreq.l.sub.O.ltoreq.  1.1R3R .ltoreq.l.sub.D.ltoreq.  35R75.degree..ltoreq.2 l    .ltoreq.  95.degree.0.9R .ltoreq.l.sub.A.ltoreq.  1.1R0.4R .ltoreq.l.sub.B.ltoreq.  0.6.3. Monochromator according to claim 2, wherein said grating is a concavespherical calotte having 1584 lines per mm, and:"}
{"WKU":"039307298","Title":"Interferometer apparatus incorporating a spherical element of index of","App_Date":"1973-06-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John Battiscombe Gunn","Assignee":"International Business Machines Corporation","ICL_Class":"G01B  902;F16C  704","References":"3148456;3158674;3398287;3466121;R19070","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An interferometer arrangement comprising:a source of electromagnetic radiation for projecting said radiation along agiven path; anda pair of at least partially spherical, transparent elements disposed insaid given path, said elements having an index of refraction ofapproximately 2 at the wavelength of said source.2. An interferometer arrangement according to claim 1 wherein one of saidpair of elements is a retroreflector and the other is a collimator.3. An interferometer arrangement according to claim 1 wherein both of saidelements are collimators.4. An interferometer arrangement according to claim 1 wherein at least oneof said elements is a beam splitter.5. An interferometer arrangement according to claim 1 wherein said elementsare glass spheres.6. An interferometer arrangement according to claim 1 wherein said sourceis a laser.7. An interferometer arrangement according to claim 1 further includingmeans connected to at least one of said elements for applying relativemotion between said elements.8. An interferometer arrangement according to claim 7 further includingmeans disposed in electromagnetically coupled relationship with saidelements for detecting interference fringe patterns.9. An interferometer arrangement according to claim 8 further includingmeans responsive to said detecting means for actuating said means forapplying relative motion.10. An interferometer-mechanical arrangement for controlling the movementof a movable body relative to a reference body comprising, in combination:at least one actuator having a given longitudinal axis connected between atleast a point on each of said bodies;at least a source of electromagnetic radiation for projecting radiation ofgiven wavelength along at least a given path said at least a given pathextending between each of said bodies; anda pair of at least partially spherical elements disposed in said at least agiven path, said elements having an index of refraction of approximately 2at the wavelength of said source.11. An interferometer-mechanical arrangement according to claim 10 whereinsaid elements are glass spheres.12. An interferometer-mechanical arrangement according to claim 10 furtherincluding interference fringe detection means disposed in said at least agiven energy path.13. An interferometer-mechanical arrangement according to claim 10 furtherincluding interference fringe counting means disposed in said at least agiven energy path for monitoring the relative motion applied by said atleast one actuator to said movable body and said reference body.14. An interferometer-mechanical arrangement according to claim 10 whereinsaid pair of elements is disposed internally of said at least one actuatorand said given path and said given longitudinal axis are coincident.15. An interferometer-mechanical arrangement according to claim 10 furtherincluding transducer means integral with said at least an actuator togenerate small displacements along a desired path.16. An interferometer-mechanical arrangement according to claim 12 furtherincluding means responsive to said fringe detection means for actuatingsaid at least one actuator to move or maintain said movable body and saidreference body to or in a desired relationship.17. An interferometer-mechanical arrangement according to claim 13 furtherincluding means connected to said at least one actuator for applyingrelative motion between said movable body and said reference body.18. An interferometer-mechanical arrangement according to claim 15 whereinsaid transducer means is a magnetostrictive transducer including amagnetostrictive member integral with said actuator and a solenoiddisposed in magnetostrictively coupled relationship with said member.19. An interferometer-mechanical arrangement according to claim 15 whereinsaid transducer means is an hydrostatic transducer comprising:a fixed bearing member;a movable bearing member containing a plurality of flow channels eachterminating in a bearing pad, said bearing pads being disposed incircumferential space of relationship about said fixed member; andmeans connected to certain of said flow channels for applying differentialpressure to their oppositely disposed associated bearing pads to applymotion to said movable bearing member along said desired path.20. An interferometer-mechanical arrangement according to claim 16 whereinsaid means for actuating said actuator includes:means for comparing measured interference fringe counts with desired fringecounts;means for generating error signals determined by differences betweencounts; andmeans responsive to said means for generating error signals for producing aforce in said at least one actuator which tends to reduce the differencebetween said measured and desired fringe counts.21. An interferometer-mechanical arrangement according to claim 17 whereinsaid means connected to said at least one actuators for applying relativemotion between said movable and said reference bodies includes:means coupled to said at least one actuator for applying a force to said atleast one actuator;means for comparing measured interference fringe counts with desired fringecounts;means for generating error signals determined by differences betweencounts; andmeans connected to said means for applying for halting the application ofsaid force when the difference between said counts is zero.22. An interferometer-mechanical arrangement for controlling the movementof a movable body relative to a reference body comprising, in combination:a plurality of actuators each having a given longitudinal axis connectedbetween points on said bodies at least three points on each of said bodiesbeing disposed thereon in noncollinear relationship;a plurality of sources of electromagnetic radiation for projectingradiation of given wavelength along a plurality of given paths said givenpaths extending between each of said bodies; anda pair of at least partially spherical elements disposed in each of saidgiven paths, said elements having an index of refraction of approximately2 at the wavelength of said source.23. An interferometer-mechanical arrangement according to claim 22 whereinsaid elements are glass spheres.24. An interferometer-mechanical arrangement according to claim 22 furtherincluding interference fringe detection means disposed in each of saidgiven energy paths.25. An interferometer-mechanical arrangement according to claim 22 furtherincluding interference fringe counting means disposed in each of saidgiven energy paths for monitoring the relative motion applied by eachactuator to said movable body and said reference body.26. An interferometer-mechanical arrangement according to claim 22 whereinsaid pair of elements is disposed internally of each of said actuators andsaid given paths and said given longitudinal axes are coincident.27. An interferometer-mechanical arrangement according to claim 22 furtherincluding transducer means integral with each of said actuators togenerate small displacements along a desired path.28. An interferometer-mechanical arrangement according to claim 24 furtherincluding means responsive to said fringe detection means for actuatingeach of said actuators to move or maintain said movable body and saidreference body to or in a desired relationship.29. An interferometer-mechanical arrangement according to claim 25 furtherincluding means connected to each of said actuators for applying relativemotion between said movable body and said reference body.30. An interferometer-mechanical arrangement according to claim 27 whereinsaid transducer means is a magnetostrictive transducer including amagnetostrictive member integral with said actuator and a solenoiddisposed in magnetostrictively coupled relationship with said member.31. An interferometer-mechanical arrangement according to claim 27 whereinsaid transducer means is an hydrostatic transducer comprising:a fixed bearing member;a movable bearing member containing a plurality of flow channels eachterminating in a bearing pad, said bearing pads being disposed incircumferential space of relationship about said fixed member; andmeans connected to certain of said flow channels for applying differentialpressure to their oppositely disposed associated bearing pads to applymotion to said movable bearing member along said desired path.32. An interferometer-mechanical arrangement according to claim 28 whereinsaid means for actuating said actuators includes:means for comparing measured interference fringe counts with desired fringecounts;means for generating error signals determined by differences betweencounts; andmeans responsive to said means for generating error signals for producingforces in said actuators which tend to reduce the difference between saidmeasured and desired fringe counts.33. An interferometer-mechanical arrangement according to claim 29 whereinsaid means connected to each of said actuators for applying relativemotion between said movable and said reference bodies includes:means coupled to each of said actuators for applying a force to each ofsaid actuators;means for comparing measured interference fringe counts with desired fringecounts;means for generating error signals determined by differences betweencounts; andmeans connected to each of said means for applying for halting theapplication of said force when the difference between said counts is zero.34. An interferometer-spindle arrangement comprising:a spindle having a circular hollow portion given a longitudinal axis, and aflange extending outwardly from said portion, a housing into which thehollow portion of said spindle is receivable containing a plurality offlow channels certain of which terminate in bearing pads disposed incircumferential spaced relationship about said spindle and certain othersof which terminate in thrust bearing pads disposed in spaced relationshipon opposite sides of said outwardly extending flange;a first plurality of at least partially spherical radiation directingelements having an index of refraction of approximately 2 at a givenwavelength mounted in a wall of said housing, one of said first elementsbeing coincident with said longitudinal axis the remainder being spacedfrom said one of said first elements by a given radius, and a secondplurality of at least partially spherical elements having an index ofrefraction of approximately 2 at a given wavelength disposed internally ofsaid hollow portion of said spindle, the centers of said second pluralityof elements being coincident with said longitudinal axis;a first plurality of light sources operating at said given wavelength oneof which is in conjunction with said one of said first elements and one ofsaid second plurality of elements comprises a first interferometer havinga first optical axis others of which in conjunction with said remainder ofsaid first plurality of elements and with said one of said secondplurality of elements comprises a first plurality of interferometers,having a first plurality of optical axes;a second plurality of light sources operating at said given wavelength eachof which in conjunction with each of the remainder of said first elementsand another of said second plurality of elements comprises a secondplurality of interferometers having a second plurality of optical axes;andinterference fringe counting means disposed in electromagnetically coupledrelationship with said first interferometer and said first and secondpluralities of interferometers.35. An interferometer-spindle arrangement according to claim 34 furtherincluding means connected to said certain of said plurality of flowchannels for applying differential pressure to their oppositely disposedassociated bearing pads and to said certain others of said plurality offlow channels for applying differential pressure to their associatedthrust bearing pads to control the radial and axial position of saidspindle relative to said housing.36. An interferometer arrangement for measuring distances to surfaces ofmembers disposed in juxtaposition to a planar surface comprising:at least three at least partially spherical radiation directing elementsdisposed on said planar surface said elements having an index ofrefraction of 2 at a given wavelength;a movable at least partially spherical radiation directing element havingan index of refraction of 2 at said given wavelength said at least threeat least partially spherical radiation directing elements and said movableelement forming at least three interferometers the optical axes of whichintersect at the center of said movable element; andmeans for projecting electromagnetic radiation at said given wavelengthalong said optical axes.37. An interferometer arrangement according to claim 36 further includinginterference fringe counting means disposed in electromagnetically coupledrelationship with said optical axes.38. An interferometer arrangement according to claim 36 wherein saidradiation directing elements are glass spheres having an index ofrefraction of 2 at said given wavelength.39. An interferometer arrangement according to claim 36 wherein said meansfor projecting electromagnetic radiation is a laser."}
{"WKU":"039307301","Title":"Interferometric device for measurement of variations in length of a","App_Date":"1973-09-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Albert Adelin Suffrein Laurens;Jean-Paul Christy;Jean-Pierre Durand","Assignee":"Republic of France","ICL_Class":"G01B  902","References":"3788746","Claims":"We claim:1. In an interferometric device for measurement of the variations in lengthof a sample under the influence of temperature, the length of the samplebeing within a plane of reference and a plane of measurement defined bytwo plane terminal faces of the sample, the device comprising a source ofmonochromatic light, means to form parallel beams from said source, acontrollable temperature thermostatic enclosure, a sample holder placed inthe enclosure, a reflecting reference surface for receiving one of saidbeams, a reflecting measurement surface joined to the plane of measurementfor receiving the other of said beams, means to cause interferences of thetwo beams reflected respectively by the two reflecting surfaces, and asensor to observe and measure interference fringes, the improvementcomprising a bearing face presented by said sample holder for the terminalreference face of the sample, elastic means for applying the sampleagainst said bearing face, and support means for supporting saidreflecting reference surface inside said enclosure and ensuring that thevariation of distance between the two reflecting surfaces will be equal tothe variation in length of the sample when the temperature of thethermostatic enclosure is varied, said sample holder comprising a supportfor the reflecting measurement surface, of thickness a.sub.1 and withcoefficient of thermal dilatation .lambda..sub.1, applied against theterminal measurement face of the sample, the support means for thereflecting reference surface having a thickness a.sub.2, measured from theplane of reference, and a coefficient of dilatation .lambda..sub.2, andthese thicknesses and these coefficients of dilatation satisfying theequation a.sub.1 .lambda..sub.1 equals a.sub.2 .lambda..sub.2.2. Device as in claim 1, wherein the support means for the reflectingreference surface is an integral part of the sample holder.3. Device as in claim 1 wherein the support of the reflecting measurementsurface presents straps that bear elastically against the rear part of thesample holder to apply the support of the reflecting measurement surfaceagainst the measurement face of the sample.4. In an interferometric device for measurement of the variations in lengthof a sample under the influence of temperature, the length of the samplebeing within a plane of reference and a plane of measurement defined bytwo plane terminal faces of the sample, the device comprising a source ofmonochromatic light, means to form parallel beams from said source, acontrollable temperature thermostatic enclosure, a sample holder placed inthe enclosure, a reflecting reference surface for receiving one of saidbeams, a reflecting measurement surface joined to the plane of measurementfor receiving the other of said beams, means to cause interferences of thetwo beams reflected respectively by the two reflecting surfaces, and asensor to observe and measure interference fringes, the improvementcomprising a bearing face presented by said sample holder for the terminalreference face of the sample, elastic means for applying the sampleagainst said bearing face, said sample holder presenting a straightconcave seat for the sample of substantially trapezoidal section as viewedparallel to said other of said beams such that said sample lies within theconcave seat and is supported by the diverging walls of the trapezoidalsection to facilitate maintenance of alignment of the axis of the sampleand prevent pinching, swinging or compression of the sample, and supportmeans for supporting said reflecting reference surface inside saidenclosure and ensuring that the variation of distance between the tworeflecting surfaces will be equal to the variation in length of the samplewhen the temperature of the thermostatic enclosure is varied.5. Device as in claim 4, wherein the reflecting measurement surfacecoincides with the measurement plane of the sample, the reflectingreference surface is in the plane of reference, and said support means isan integral part of the sample holder.6. In an interferometric device for measurement of the variations in lengthof a sample under the influence of temperature, the length of the samplebeing within a plane of reference and a plane of measurement defined bytwo plane terminal faces of the sample, the device comprising a source ofmonochromatic light, means to form parallel beams from said source, acontrollable temperature thermostatic enclosure, a sample holder placed inthe enclosure, a reflecting reference surface for receiving one of saidbeams, a reflecting measurement surface joined to the plane of measurementfor receiving the other of said beams, means to cause interferences of thetwo beams reflected respectively by the two reflecting surfaces, and asensor to observe and measure interference fringes, the improvementcomprising a bearing face presented by said sample holder for the terminalreference face of the sample, elastic means for applying the sampleagainst said bearing face, support means for supporting said reflectingreference surface inside said enclosure and ensuring that the variation ofdistance between the two reflecting surfaces will be equal to thevariation in length of the sample when the temperature of the thermostaticenclosure is varied, at least two centering feet and corresponding matingformations carried by respective ones of said sample holder and saidenclosure for releasably positioning the sample holder in the enclosure,the axes of said centering feet and said mating formations lyingsubstantially in said plane of reference.7. Device as in claim 6 further comprising a base bearing the enclosure andthe means to cause interference of the beams, and at least two centeringfeet and cooperating mating formations carried by respective ones of saidenclosure and said base for positioning the enclosure on the base, theaxes of these second-mentioned centering feet and mating formations lyingsubstantially in said plane of reference.8. Device as in claim 7 further comprising at least two further centeringfeet, whose axes are in a plane parallel to the plane of reference, forcooperation with mating formations to position on the base supports forsaid means to cause interference of the beams."}
{"WKU":"039307310","Title":"Laser gyroscope","App_Date":"1974-02-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Keimpe Andringa","Assignee":"Raytheon Company","ICL_Class":"H01s  310;H01s  322","References":"3596201","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In combination:a. means for directing a first pair of oppositely polarized laser wavesthrough a laser medium in a first direction and a second pair ofoppositely polarized laser waves through said laser medium in a directionopposite to such first direction, each of such polarized waves having adifferent frequency; and,b. a polarization dispersive structure disposed in the path of the twopairs of waves comprising: an anisotropic crystal the crystallographicaxes of such crystal being oriented to produce different delays to theoppositely sensed polarized laser waves passing therethrough, such delaysbeing related to such orientation.2. The combination recited in claim 2 wherein the waves have circularpolarization.3. The combination recited in claim 2 wherein the anisotropic crystalincludes a half-wave retarder.4. In combination:a. means for directing a first pair of oppositely polarized laser wavesthrough a laser medium in a first direction and a second pair ofoppositely polarized laser waves through said laser medium in a directionopposite to such first direction, each one of such waves having adifferent frequency; andb. polarization dispersive means disposed in the path of such waves, suchmeans including an anisotropic crystal and means for positioning suchcrystal in a predetermined orientation to enable the frequencies of thefirst pair of oppositely polarized laser waves to be positioned betweenthe frequencies of the second pair of oppositely polarized laser waves.5. The combination recited in claim 4 including means for orienting thecrystallographic axis of such crystal to produce different delays betweenthe pair of waves.6. The combination recited in claim 5 wherein the path of the laser wavesis bounded by an odd number of reflectors.7. The combination recited in claim 5 including a second anisotropiccrystal wherein the path of the laser waves is bounded by an even numberof reflectors.8. The combination recited in claim 4 wherein the anisotropic crystal is ahalf-wave retarder.9. The combination recited in claim 6 wherein the anisotropic crystal is ahalf-wave retarder.10. The combination recited in claim 7 wherein each one of the anisotropiccrystals is a half-wave retarder.11. The combination recited in claim 1 wherein the polarization dispersivestructure comprises means for positioning such crystal in a predeterminedorientation to enable the frequencies of the first pair of oppositelypolarized laser waves to be positioned between the frequencies of thesecond pair of oppositely polarized laser waves.12. The combination recited in claim 11 including means for maintaining thefrequencies of the first pair of oppositely polarized laser waves and thefrequencies of the second pair of oppositely polarized laser wavesdisposed symmetrically about a predetermined frequency.13. The combination recited in claim 4 including means for maintaining thefrequencies of the first pair of oppositely polarized laser waves and thefrequencies of the second pair of oppositely polarized laser wavesdisposed symmetrically about a predetermined frequency.14. In a laser gyroscope having a polarization dispersive structure forenabling two pairs of oppositely polarized laser waves to pass through alaser medium in opposite directions, such structure comprising: Ananisotropic crystal disposed in the path of the waves; and, means foradjusting the orientation of the crystal to enable the frequencies of oneof the pairs of waves to be positioned between the frequencies of theother one of the pairs of waves in said laser gyroscope."}
{"WKU":"039307328","Title":"Device and process for testing a lens system","App_Date":"1974-11-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Sandor Holly","Assignee":"Atlantic Research Corporation","ICL_Class":"G01B  900;G01B 1500","References":"2878722;3492076","Claims":"I claim:1. In apparatus for testing the optical transfer function of a lens,comprising a radiation source; object-forming means in the object plane ofthe test lens, said object-forming means having a spatial-frequency whichis adapted to being incrementally or continuously changed; adjustablemounting means for the test lens in the test channel; slit means foranalyzing the image formed by the test lens; a reference channel; andetector means with associated electronics for measuring and comparing themodulation transfer function of the test lens and reference channelsystems, the improvement comprising:1. means for forming a moving-fringe interference pattern in the objectplane of the test lens in the test channel, said means for forming saidpattern comprising two converging, monochromatic, coherent-radiation beamsof substantially the same intensity and size and respectively differentfrequencies f.sub.o and f.sub.o .sub. , the difference in frequency.DELTA.f being in the ratio frequency range;2. means for changing the fringe period .lambda..sub.s of said patternequally and simultaneously in the range from infinity to a finite.lambda..sub.s determined by the design characteristics of the test lens;3. means positioned across the x-y plane of said fringe pattern for formingsaid pattern into a real-image target for said test lens in the objectplane;4. slit means positionable in the image plane of said test lens and,thereby, in the reimaged fringe pattern formed by said test lens in thetest channel, said slit means being characterized by:"}
{"WKU":"039307336","Title":"Process and apparatus for monitoring angular orientation","App_Date":"1974-04-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Sandor Holly","Assignee":"Atlantic Research Corporation","ICL_Class":"G01B  902","References":"3572937","Claims":"I claim:1. A process for sensing the angular orientation of at least one line orslit element of an article, comprising:1. producing two coherent light beams of the same intensity, one of saidbeams having a different frequency from said other beam, the frequencydifference being within the radio frequency range;2. converging said beams to form an interference zone comprising alaterally moving fringe pattern within the zone of convergence, saidpattern having a fringe period which is substantially wider than saidelement or the positive difference between the width of the element and awhole integer multiple of the fringe period;3. positioning at least the portion of said article bearing said elementwithin the interference zone in such manner that said article lies in aplane defined by the axis normal to the plane of the convergent beams andthe axis normal to the fringe planes, and said element is in a position,relative to said article, such that the longitudinal axis of said elementis substantially parallel to the fringe plane or can, by rotation of saidfringe zone and/or said article relative to each other around the z-axisby the converging beam bisector, be brought into fringe-plane parallelposition;4. rotating the fringe zone and/or the article positioned within saidfringe zone around the z-axis in such manner as to produce relativeangular rotation between them; and5. continuously determining the ratio of AC to DC signal components of theresulting scattered or transmitted radiation as rotation continues,whereby varying AC/DC ratios are obtained in the course of said rotation,a maximum AC/DC ratio indicates parallel fringe plane alignment of theelement, and the degree of angular rotation from a given relative positionof the fringe plane and the element to a succeeding position of parallelfringe-plane and element alignment indicates the angular orientation ofthe element on the article.2. The process of claim 1 wherein the fringe period is at least twice aswide as the element.3. The process of claim 1 wherein the illuminated length of the element issubstantially larger than the fringe period.4. The process of claim 2 wherein the illuminated length of the element issubstantially larger than the fringe period.5. The process of claim 1 wherein the said at least one element is aplurality of elements.6. The process of claim 2 wherein the said at least one element is aplurality of elements.7. The process of claim 3 wherein the said at least one element is aplurality of elements.8. The process of claim 4 wherein the said at least one element is aplurality of elements.9. The process of claim 5 wherein at least two of said elements are at anonparallel angle each to the other.10. The process of claim 6 wherein at least two of said elements are at anonparallel angle each to the other.11. The process of claim 7 wherein at least two of said elements are at anonparallel angle each to the other.12. The process of claim 8 wherein at least two of said elements are at anonparallel angle each to the other.13. The process of claim 5 wherein said elements comprise at least onearray of parallel elements.14. The process of claim 6 wherein said elements comprise at least onearray of parallel elements.15. The process of claim 7 wherein said elements comprise at least onearray of parallel elements.16. The process of claim 8 wherein said elements comprise at least onearray of parallel elements.17. The process of claim 1 wherein the AC/DC ratio signals are transmittedto angle-orientation adjustment controls in a manufacturing process.18. The process of claim 2 wherein the AC/DC ratio signals are transmittedto angle-orientation adjustment controls in a manufacturing process.19. The process of claim 3 wherein the AC/DC ratio signals are transmittedto angle-orientation adjustment controls in a manufacturing process.20. The process of claim 4 wherein the AC/DC ratio signals are transmittedto angle-orientation adjustment controls in a manufacturing process.21. The process of claim 5 wherein the AC/DC ratio signals are transmittedto angle-orientation adjustment controls in a manufacturing process.22. The process of claim 6 wherein the AC/DC ratio signals are transmittedto angle-orientation adjustment controls in a manufacturing process.23. The process of claim 7 wherein the AC/DC ratio signals are transmittedto angle-orientation adjustment controls in a manufacturing process.24. The process of claim 8 wherein the AC/DC ratio signals are transmittedto angle-orientation adjustment controls in a manufacturing process.25. The process of claim 9 wherein the AC/DC ratio signals are transmittedto angle-orientation adjustment controls in a manufacturing process.26. The process of claim 10 wherein the AC/DC ratio signals are transmittedto angle-orientation adjustment controls in a manufacturing process.27. The process of claim 11 wherein the AC/DC ratio signals are transmittedto angle-orientation adjustment controls in a manufacturing process.28. The process of claim 12 wherein the AC/DC ratio signals are transmittedto angle-orientation adjustment controls in a manufacturing process.29. The process of claim 5 wherein the AC/DC ratio signals are employed ina data acquisition system capable of producing a display or recording.30. The process of claim 6 wherein the AC/DC ratio signals are employed ina data acquisition system capable of producing a display or recording.31. The process of claim 7 wherein the AC/DC ratio signals are employed ina data acquisition system capable of producing a display or recording.32. The process of claim 8 wherein the AC/DC ratio signals are employed ina data acquisition system capable of producing a display or recording.33. The process of claim 9 wherein the AC/DC ratio signals are employed ina data acquisition system capable of producing a display or recording.34. The process of claim 10 wherein the AC/DC ratio signals are employed ina data acquisition system capable of producing a display or recording.35. The process of claim 11 wherein the AC/DC ratio signals are employed ina data acquisition system capable of producing a display or recording.36. The process of claim 12 wherein the AC/DC ratio signals are employed ina data acquisition system capable of producing a display or recording.37. Apparatus for sensing the angular orientation of at least one line orslit element of an article comprising:1. means for producing two convergent coherent light beams of the sameintensity, one of said beams having a different frequency from said otherbeam, the frequency difference being within the radio frequency range;2. means for positioning at least the portion of said article bearing saidelement within the interference fringe zone produced by the convergence ofsaid two beams, said interference fringe zone comprising a laterallymoving fringe pattern having a predetermined fringe period, said articlebeing positioned in such manner that it lies in a plane defined by theaxis normal to the plane of the convergent beams and the axis normal tothe fringe planes, and said element is in a position, relative to saidarticle such that the longitudinal axis of said element is substantiallyparallel to the fringe plane or can by rotation of said fringe zone andsaid article relative to each other around the z-axis defined by theconverging beam bisector, be brought into fringe-plane parallel position;3. adjustment means capable of setting said predetermined fringe period ata size substantially wider than said element or the positive differencebetween the width of the element and a whole integer multiple of thefringe period;4. means for continuously rotating said fringe zone and/or said articlepositioned within said fringe zone relative to each other around thez-axis;5. means for separating radiation scattered by said line element ortransmitted by said slit element into AC and DC signal components; and6. means for continuously determining the AC/DC ratio during rotation.38. The apparatus of claim 37 wherein the rotating means comprises meansfor rotating said fringe zone.39. The apparatus of claim 37 wherein the rotating means comprises meansfor rotating said article.40. The apparatus of claim 37 which includes means for transmitting theAC/DC ratio signals to angle-orientation controls in a manufacturingprocess.41. The apparatus of claim 38 which includes means for transmitting theAC/DC ratio signals to angle-orientation controls in a manufacturingprocess.42. The apparatus of claim 39 which includes means for transmitting theAC/DC ratio signals to angle-orientation controls in a manufacturingprocess.43. The apparatus of claim 37 which includes means for transmitting theAC/DC ratio signals to a data acquisition system capable of producing adisplay or recording.44. The apparatus of claim 38 which includes means for transmitting theAC/DC ratio signals to a data acquisition system capable of producing adisplay or recording.45. The apparatus of claim 39 which includes means for transmitting theAC/DC ratio signals to a data acquisition system capable of producing adisplay or recording.46. The process of claim 1 wherein the fringe period is about twice as wideas the positive difference between the width of the element and a wholeinteger multiple of the fringe period.47. The process of claim 46 wherein the illuminated length of the elementis substantially larger than the fringe period.48. The process of claim 46 wherein the said at least one element is aplurality of elements.49. The process of claim 47 wherein the said at least one element is aplurality of elements."}
{"WKU":"039307344","Title":"Process and apparatus for sensing magnitude and direction of lateral","App_Date":"1974-04-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Sandor Holly;Shui Lin Chao","Assignee":"Atlantic Research Corporation","ICL_Class":"G01B  902","References":"3502414;3779647","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for sensing the magnitude and direction of lateraldisplacement of at least one line or slit element of an articlecomprising:1. producing two coherent light beams of the same intensity, one of saidbeams having a different frequency from said other beam, the frequencydifference .DELTA.f being within the radio frequency range;2. converging said beams to form an interference zone comprising a fringepattern within the zone of convergence, said fringe pattern continuouslymoving laterally at a rate equal to .DELTA.f;3. adjusting the fringe period .lambda..sub.s of the pattern to a widthwhich is substantially wider than the width w of said element or thepositive difference between the width of the element and an integermultiple of the fringe period n.lambda..sub.s ;4. positioning at least the portion of said article bearing said elementwithin the interference zone in such manner that said article lies in aplane defined by the x-axis normal to the plane of the convergent beamsand the y-axis normal to the fringe planes, and said element is in aposition, relative to said article, such that the longitudinal axis ofsaid element is substantially parallel to a fringe plane;5. laterally shifting the fringe zone and/or the article positioned withinsaid fringe zone along the y-axis in such a manner as to produce relativelateral displacement between them while maintaining said elementsubstantially parallel to the fringe plane at least at the central portionof the fringe zone;6. continuously determining the phase of the RF signal component of theradiation scattered or transmitted by said element as said relativelateral displacement between said zone and article continues from a firstposition to a second position of said element within the fringe zone;7. simultaneously continuously comparing the phase of the scattered ortransmitted radiation RF signal with the phase of a constant RF referencehaving a frequency equal to .DELTA.f; and8. sensing the magnitude and direction of phase shift between saidradiation RF signal and said RF reference between first and secondpositions, whereby said magnitude indicates the extent of lateraldisplacement of the element between said first and second position andsaid direction indicates the direction of relative lateral displacement.2. The process of claim 1 wherein said element is a single element and saidsecond position is a desired spatial position on said article.3. The process of claim 1 wherein said at least one element comprises twosubstantially parallel elements; the fringe period .lambda..sub.s or itsinteger multiple n.lambda..sub.s is additionally adjusted to besubstantially equal to the distance d between the elements; and thediameter D of the fringe zone is adjusted to be wider than d.4. The process of claim 3 wherein said two elements respectively representsaid first and second positions.5. The process of claim 1 wherein said at least one element comprises aplurality of substantially equidistant elements; each of said plurality ofelements is substantially parallel to the next adjacent element; thefringe period .lambda..sub.s or its integer multiple n.lambda..sub.s isadditionally adjusted to be substantially equal to the distance d betweenthe elements; and the diameter D of the fringe zone is adjusted to bewider than d.6. The process of claim 5 wherein the distance between said first andsecond positions includes an integer multiple of d.7. The process of claim 5 wherein said elements comprise a linear array ofsubstantially parallel elements.8. The process of claim 6 wherein said elements comprise a linear array ofsubstantially parallel elements.9. The process of claim 5 wherein said elements comprise a circular arrayof elements positioned adjacent the outer periphery of a circular article.10. The process of claim 6 wherein said elements comprise a circular arrayof elements positioned adjacent the outer periphery of a circular article.11. The process of claim 9 wherein the article is a disc encoder.12. The process of claim 10 wherein the article is a disc encoder.13. The process of claim 9 wherein the two beams of different frequency areeach equally divided to form at least two sets of two beams having thesame frequency characteristics as the parent beams; said at least two setsof beams are oriented to converge and form at least two moving fringepatterns at predetermined spatially-separated positions with respect tosaid circular array of elements.14. The process of claim 10 wherein the two beams of different frequencyare each equally divided to form at least two sets of two beams having thesame frequency characteristics as the parent beams; said at least two setsof beams are oriented to converge and form at least two moving fringepatterns at predetermined spatially-separated positions with respect tosaid circular array of elements.15. The process of claim 11 wherein the two beams of different frequencyare each equally divided to form at least two sets of two beams having thesame frequency characteristics as the parent beams; said at least two setsof beams are oriented to converge and form at least two moving fringepatterns at predetermined spatially-separated positions with respect tosaid circular array of elements.16. The process of claim 12 wherein the two beams of different frequencyare each equally divided to form at least two sets of two beams having thesame frequency characteristics as the parent beams; said at least two setsof beams are oriented to converge and form at least two moving fringepatterns at predetermined spatially-separated positions with respect tosaid circular array of elements.17. The process of claim 1 wherein the fringe period is at least twice aswide as the element.18. The process of claim 2 wherein the fringe period is at least twice aswide as the element.19. The process of claim 3 wherein the fringe period is at least twice aswide as the element.20. The process of claim 4 wherein the fringe period is at least twice aswide as the element.21. The process of claim 5 wherein the fringe period is at least twice aswide as the element.22. The process of claim 6 wherein the fringe period is at least twice aswide as the element.23. The process of claim 7 wherein the fringe period is at least twice aswide as the element.24. The process of claim 8 wherein the fringe period is at least twice aswide as the element.25. The process of claim 9 wherein the fringe period is at least twice aswide as the element.26. The process of claim 10 wherein the fringe period is at least twice aswide as the element.27. The process of claim 11 wherein the fringe period is at least twice aswide as the element.28. The process of claim 12 wherein the fringe period is at least twice aswide as the element.29. The process of claim 13 wherein the fringe period is at least twice aswide as the element.30. The process of claim 14 wherein the fringe period is at least twice aswide as the element.31. The process of claim 15 wherein the fringe period is at least twice aswide as the element.32. The process of claim 16 wherein the fringe period is at least twice aswide as the element.33. The process of claim 3 wherein d equals .lambda..sub.s.34. The process of claim 4 wherein d equals .lambda..sub.s.35. The process of claim 5 wherein d equals .lambda..sub.s.36. The process of claim 6 wherein d equals .lambda..sub.s.37. The process of claim 7 wherein d equals .lambda..sub.s.38. The process of claim 8 wherein d equals .lambda..sub.s.39. The process of claim 9 wherein d equals .lambda..sub.s.40. The process of claim 10 wherein d equals .lambda..sub.s.41. The process of claim 11 wherein d equals .lambda..sub.s.42. The process of claim 12 wherein d equals .lambda..sub.s.43. The process of claim 13 wherein d equals .lambda..sub.s.44. The process of claim 14 wherein d equals .lambda..sub.s.45. The process of claim 15 wherein d equals .lambda..sub.s.46. The process of claim 16 wherein d equals .lambda..sub.s.47. The process of claim 19 wherein d equals .lambda..sub.s.48. The process of claim 20 wherein d equals .lambda..sub.s.49. The process of claim 21 wherein d equals .lambda..sub.s.50. The process of claim 22 wherein d equals .lambda..sub.s.51. The process of claim 23 wherein d equals .lambda..sub.s.52. The process of claim 24 wherein d equals .lambda..sub.s.53. The process of claim 25 wherein d equals .lambda..sub.s.54. The process of claim 26 wherein d equals .lambda..sub.s.55. The process of claim 27 wherein d equals .lambda..sub.s.56. The process of claim 28 wherein d equals .lambda..sub.s.57. The process of claim 29 wherein d equals .lambda..sub.s.58. The process of claim 30 wherein d equals .lambda..sub.s.59. The process of claim 31 wherein d equals .lambda..sub.s.60. The process of claim 32 wherein d equals .lambda..sub.s.61. Apparatus for sensing the magnitude and direction of displacement of atleast one line or slit element on an article, comprising:1. means for producing two convergent coherent light beams of the sameintensity, one of said beams having a different frequency from said otherbeam, the frequency difference .DELTA.f being within the radio frequencyrange;2. means for positioning at least the portion of said article bearing saidelement within the interference fringe zone produced by the convergence ofsaid two beams, said interference fringe zone comprising a laterallymoving fringe pattern having a predetermined fringe period, said articlebeing positioned in such manner that it lies in a plane defined by theaxis normal to the plane of the convergent beams and the axis normal tothe fringe planes, and said element is in a position, relative to saidarticle such that the longitudinal axis of said element is substantiallyparallel to the fringe plane;3. adjustment means capable of setting said predetermined fringe period ata size substantially wider than said element or the positive differencebetween the width of the element and a whole integer multiple of thefringe period;4. means for shifting said fringe zone and/or said article positionedwithin said fringe zone relative to each other along the y-axis;5. means for separating the RF signal component from the radiationscattered by said line element or transmitted by said slit element;6. means for producing a constant RF reference having a frequency .DELTA.f;7. means for continuously detecting and comparing the phase of theradiation RF signal and the phase of the RF reference.62. The apparatus of claim 61 wherein the shifting means comprises meansfor shifting the article.63. The apparatus of claim 61 wherein the means for producing the RFreference is the means for producing the two light beams of differentfrequency, the frequency difference .DELTA.f being in the radio frequencyrange.64. The apparatus of claim 62 wherein the means for producing the RFreference is the means for producing the two light beams of differentfrequency, the frequency difference .DELTA.f being in the radio frequencyrange.65. The apparatus of claim 61 which includes means for computing the extentof phase shift between the radiation RF phase and the RF reference phase.66. The apparatus of claim 62 which includes means for computing the extentof phase shift between the radiation RF phase and the RF reference phase.67. The apparatus of claim 63 which includes means for computing the extentof phase shift between the radiation RF phase and the RF reference phase.68. The apparatus of claim 64 which includes means for computing the extentof phase shift between the radiation RF phase and the RF reference phase.69. The apparatus of claim 65 which includes means for transmitting thephase shift information to a data acquisition system capable of producinga display or recording.70. The apparatus of claim 65 which includes means for transmitting thephase shift information to controls in a manufacturing process."}
{"WKU":"039307352","Title":"Traffic survey system","App_Date":"1974-12-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Joseph H. Kerr","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the United States","ICL_Class":"G08G  100","References":"2899857;3663937","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A traffic survey system comprising:holding means for holding a transparency image frame of a discrete areacontaining at least one roadway;light means including a beam of light positioned to project light on saidtransparency image frame and including beam positioning means responsiveto an input scanning signal for causing said beam to scan discretecoordinately located areas of roadways on said transparency;first scan generating means for generating a said scanning signal andsupplying it to said light means, whereby said transparency image frame isscanned;detection means responsive to light passed by said transparency forindicating the presence of a vehicle on a said roadway; andmemory means responsive to said scan generating means and said detectionmeans for storing an indication of the presence of a vehicle in a codedmemory location.2. A traffic survey system as set forth in claim 1 wherein said detectionmeans further comprises filter means responsive to light passed by saidtransparency for indicating the size of a vehicle.3. A traffic survey system as set forth in claim 2 wherein said light meanscomprises a source of monochromatic light, and said filter means comprisesa plurality of holograms, each hologram comprising a holographic filter ofa vehicle of a discrete size, whereby the vehicle size of a photographedvehicle is indicated by the particular filter emitting a discrete outputof light.4. A traffic survey system as set forth in claim 3 wherein:said memory means includes a plurality of memory stage addresses, one foreach selected said discrete coordinately located area of roadway to bescanned, and each said address comprising a plurality of memory stagesubaddresses at least equal to the number of said holographic filters;light detection means responsive to light from a said filter for providingan output upon the receipt of a selected amplitude of light;said memory means is further responsive to a second scanning signal forstoring a said indication of the presence of a vehicle in one of saidsubaddresses;filter scanning means responsive to said second scanning signal forsequentially scanning light from said filters and directing the light fromeach filter to said light detection means; andsecond scan generating means for generating said second scanning signal andsupplying said second scanning signal to said memory means and to saidfilter scanning means, whereby a location of a said vehicle is storableand indicated from the particular address of storage in said memory meansand the size of the vehicle storable in and indicated by a particular oneof said subaddresses where said indication of a said vehicle is stored.5. A traffic survey system as set forth in claim 4 further comprising:second holding means for holding a reference transparency image frame, atransparency image frame of the same overall area as that contained onsaid first-named transparency image frame but wherein, on said referencetransparency, roadway areas and other areas are of oppositetransmissivity;second light means including means for illuminating said referencetransparency image frame;reference transparency scanning means responsive to said input scanningsignal for scanning said reference transparency image frame and providinga first discrete output for scanned areas wherein there are roadways and asecond discrete output where there are no roadways;second memory means responsive to a said input scanning signal for storingin coordinate addresses, to addresses contained in said first-named memorymeans, said first discrete outputs indicative of coordinate areas of saidreference transparency image frame wherein there are roadways, and storingsecond discrete outputs indicative of coordinate areas where there are noroadways; andmemory read means responsive to the output of said second memory means forselectively enabling said light means responsive to a said first discreteoutput for operating said light means  on  and responsive to a said seconddiscrete output for operating said light means  off,  whereby onlyroadways are illuminated by said light means.6. A traffic survey system as set forth in claim 5 wherein:said system further comprises means for optically comparing the systemposition of a said transparency image frame and a said reference imagetransparency frame; andone of said holding means further comprising means for positioning atransparency image frame whereby the system position of a saidtransparency image frame may be made identical whereby memory location ofimage information in said memory means are coordinately located."}
{"WKU":"039307360","Title":"Aperture tube with attached thief","App_Date":"1974-07-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Wallace Coulter","Assignee":"Coulter Electronics, Inc.","ICL_Class":"G01N  110","References":"3743424;3746976;3746977","Claims":"What it is desired to secure by Letters Patent of the United States is:1. an apparatus for use in a particle measuring device wherein liquidsuspensions of particles to be measured are brought into contact with theapparatus and wherein the liquid suspensions can adhere to the apparatusand carry over from one suspension to another causing contamination, theapparatus including in combination,an aperture tube having a top end, a bottom end and an aperture formedtherein a predetermined height below said top end,a thief conduit attached to said aperture tube and forming a unitarystructure therewith for reducing exterior surface area whereby saidunitary structure minimizes carry over from one suspension to another forthat portion of the unitary structure brought into contact with saidliquid suspensions of particles.2. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said unitary structure is furtherconstructed and arranged to have a substantially minimum total exteriorsurface area for exposing a minimum surface area to said liquid suspensionwhereby carry over for that portion of the unitary structure brought intocontact with said liquid suspensions of particles is minimized.3. the apparatus of claim 1 wherein said thief conduit has an open bottomend, the aperture tube aperture and the open bottom end of said thiefconduit veing located at substantially the same height below said top endon said apparatus.4. the apparatus of claim 1 wherein said aperture tube has at least a firstradius extending from the center of said tube to the aperture and saidthief conduit is secured to said aperture tube along a line substantiallyradially opposite the aperture tube aperture.5. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said aperture tube is an elongatecylinder having a first thief opening formed therein, said thief conduithaving a first thief end secured to the periphery of said first openingand extending interior said aperture tube from said first end to a point apredetermined distance above said first end, said thief conduit passingthrough said cylinder from interior to exterior at said second point andterminating at a second end exterior to said aperture tube.6. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said aperture tube and thief conduitare each elongate cylinders and are attached to one another at their outersurfaces and at substantially a single line along the length thereof toform a junction, said cylinders forming a substantially V shapeddepression on each side of said junction, and wherein materialsubstantially fills said V shaped depression and forms a portion of saidexterior surface for minimizing carry over of said liquid suspension insaid V shaped depression.7. The apparatus of claim 6 wherein said aperture tube, thief conduit andmaterial are glass.8. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said aperture tube is an elongatecylinder having an open top end and a closed bottom end, said cylinderhaving a first thief opening formed therein, said thief conduit having afirst end secured to the periphery of said first thief opening with saidthief conduit bore being axially aligned with said thief opening, saidthief conduit extending from said first end towards said aperture tube topend interior said elongate cylinder for a predetermined distance, saidthief conduit exiting said cylinder at a point on said cylinder below saidopen end.9. The apparatus of claim 8 wherein said first thief opening is formed atsubstantially the same height with respect to said aperture tube top endas said aperture tube aperture.10. The apparatus of claim 8 wherein said aperture tube has at least afirst radius extending from the center thereof to said aperture tube andwherein said first thief opening is formed substantially radially oppositesaid aperture tube aperture.11. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said thief conduit is an elongatecylinder positioned in said aperture tube, said thief conduit openingthrough said aperture tube exterior surface at opposite ends of the thiefconduit.12. The apparatus of claim 11 wherein said thief conduit and aperture tubeare glass."}
{"WKU":"039307379","Title":"Stud assembly","App_Date":"1974-08-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Peter Schenk","Assignee":"Dzus Fastener Co., Inc.","ICL_Class":"F16B  200","References":"2078212;2183824;2253831;2349677","Claims":"I claim:1. A stud assembly comprising:a head portion having opposing gripping surfaces extending from a base withat least one locking recess therein;a stud member with a receptacle end portion having a slot therein and acircumferential groove adjacent the edge thereof;the stud member positioned so that the base of the head portion is locatedin the slot and the circumferential groove is aligned with the recess;a deformable washer in deformed condition so as to extend into the grooveand slot of the stud and the locking recess of the head thereby lockingthe stud member to the head and forming a unitary stud assembly;the stud member being substantially cylindrical in configuration; andthe receptacle end portion including the slot having a pair of spacedannular rings extending laterally therefrom with the spaced therebetweenforming the circumferential groove and the slot extending through therings."}
{"WKU":"039307387","Title":"Adjustable window frame anchor clip","App_Date":"1974-11-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"David T. Thuss;Mitchell L. Stein;John Gurniak;Michael C. Stefanski","Assignee":"Swiss Aluminium Ltd.","ICL_Class":"B25G  300;F16B  100;F16D  100;F16G 1100","References":"1754762;1846650;2622831;3148851;3553891","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A clip member adapted to anchor a frame member to a wall structure whichcomprises:a longitudinally extending generally L-shaped member adapted at one endthereof to fixedly engage said wall structure and provided at the oppositeend thereof with a connecting means adapted to engage a pair of opposedgrooves provided on the underside of said frame member, said connectingmeans being generally V-shaped, and the joined portion thereof comprisinga base portion projecting perpendicularly from one end of said L-shapedmember, said base portion possessing a proximal and a distal end inrelation to said L-shaped member, and arm portions diverging from saidproximal and said distal ends and from each other, said arm portionsprovided at the unconnected ends thereof with generally oppositelyextending lip portions adapted to seat within the respective opposedgrooves of said frame member; anda wedge shaped fastener adapted to clamp said L-shaped member to said framemember by insertion in an opening defined by the surfaces of said framemember, said base portion and said arm portions, said fastener possessinglongitudinally extended inclined surfaces with a plurality of laterallydirected serrations for fixing said fastener in engagement with saidsurfaces.2. The clip member of claim 1 wherein said L-shaped member includes meansfor attachment to said wall structure.3. The clip member of claim 2 wherein said attachment means comprises oneor more holes provided in said L-shaped member and a corresponding numberof bolts or the like passing through said holes to fasten said L-shapedmember to said structure.4. The clip member of claim 2 wherein said L-shaped member comprises atleast two integral surfaces lying in longitudinal planes which subtend anacute angle with respect to each other.5. The clip member of claim 4 wherein said planes are perpendicular to eachother.6. The clip member of claim 2 wherein said L-shaped member comprises afirst planar section integral with said connecting means, a secondgenerally L-shaped section fastenable thereto and means for thereciprocally adjustable fastening of said first and said second sections.7. The clip member of claim 6 wherein said adjustable fastening meanscomprises a longitudinally extended first passageway provided in saidfirst planar section and a plurality of laterally extended serrations on alongitudinal surface of said planar section, and a washer possessingserrations on a lateral surface thereof for cooperation with theserrations of said planar section, and a second passageway leading in adirection perpendicular to the plane of said serrations, a thirdpassageway provided in said second L-shaped section for respectivecommunication with said second and said first passageways, and a devicefor fixedly engaging said first planar section, said washer and saidsecond L-shaped section by passage through the respective passagewaysdefined thereby.8. The clip member of claim 7 wherein said fastening means comprises asuitably dimensioned bolt and mating hex nut."}
{"WKU":"039307395","Title":"Manhole frame with adjustment screws","App_Date":"1974-04-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Folke J. Larsson;Rune H. Larsson","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"E02D 2914","References":"1076386;2930295;3263579;3773428","Claims":"We claim:1. Manhole frame comprising a lid, adjustment screws, an annular memberadapted to cover the manhole opening and having a rim for supporting saidlid, said annular member having at least three axially extending holeslocated at a peripheral distance from each other and each having adiameter which slightly exceeds the diameter of a corresponding one ofsaid adjustment screws, said annular member having further non-circularopenings extending radially from the interior surface thereof and crossingsaid holes, removable blocks each having a shape and dimensioncorresponding to and being radially inserted in one of said side openingsand a threaded hole having one of said screws extending therethrough andsaid screws being provided at their upper end with means for facilitatingtheir turning, cup-shaped flexible members each having a threaded bottomopening having one of said screws extending therethrough and end portionspositioned on one of said blocks.2. Manhole frame comprising a lid, adjustment screws, an annular memberadapted to cover the manhole opening and having a rim for supporting saidlid, said annular member having at least three axially extending holeslocated at a peripheral distance from each other and each having adiameter which slightly exceeds the diameter of a corresponding one ofsaid adjustment screws, said annular member having further non-circularopenings extending radially from the interior surface thereof and crossingsaid holes, removable blocks each having a shape and dimensioncorresponding to and being radially inserted in one of said side openingsand a threaded hole having one of said screws extending therethrough, andsaid screws being provided at their upper end with means for facilitatingtheir turning, an outer annular member surrounding, but spaced from saidfirst mentioned annular member, at least three irons extending inwardlyfrom said outer annular member and capable of being bent so as to projectinto the manhole opening thereby centering said outer member relative tothe manhole opening, support members extending inwardly from said outermember with one of said screws supported on one of said support members,lugs projecting radially from said first mentioned member, said outermember being correspondingly shaped with internal recesses for said lugsand said support members each bridge one of said recesses.3. Manhole frame comprising a lid, adjustment screws, an annular memberadapted to cover the manhole opening and having a rim for supporting saidlid, said annular member having at least three axially extending holeslocated at a peripheral distance from each other and each having adiameter which slightly exceeds the diameter of a corresponding one ofsaid adjustment screws, said annular member having further non-circularopenings extending radially from the interior surface thereof and crossingsaid holes, removable blocks each having a shape and dimensioncorresponding to and being radially inserted in one of said side openingsand a threaded hole having one of said screws extending therethrough, andsaid screws being provided at their upper end with means for facilitatingtheir turning, an outer annular member surrounding, but spaced from saidfirst mentioned member, at least three irons extending inwardly from saidouter annular member and capable of being bent so as to project into themanhole opening thereby centering said outer member relative to themanhole opening, support members extending inwardly from said outer memberwith one of said screws supported on one of said support members, saidouter member having a groove following the interior surface of said memberand a sealing ring seated in said groove and positioned for contactingsaid first mentioned member."}
{"WKU":"039307409","Title":"Tools for imprinting non-repeating stone patterns in fresh concrete","App_Date":"1974-10-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Bradshaw Bowman","Assignee":"Bomanite Corporation","ICL_Class":"E01C 2316","References":"881001;967714;1063752;3406618","Claims":"I claim:1. A tool for forming stone patterns in fresh concrete in non-repeatingpatterns consisting of a single blade group, said glade group including aplurality of blades all of which are joined together at a common point andforming that part of the pattern comprising the corners of the stones inthe stone pattern, each blade of the group having sides downwardlyconverging to a penetrating edge, the penetrating edges of each of saidblades defining a plane, and a shaft on the blade group extending upwardgenerally normally from said plane.2. A tool as defined in claim 1, wherein the blades of said group aregenerally radial relative to said shaft.3. A tool as defined in claim 2 wherein the radially extending blades arespaced equiangularly from each other.4. A tool as defined in claim 1 wherein said blades form a right angle witheach other."}
{"WKU":"039307417","Title":"Vibratory compactor attachment","App_Date":"1974-10-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James D. Berry","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"E01C 1934","References":"2633781;2703222;2771012;3091159;3128682;3253522;3635133;R20663","Claims":"Having thus described the invention what is desired to be secured under aLetters Patent is:1. A tool for compacting earthen material within and covering a conduitburial trench by successive passes in opposite directions, said tool forattachment to a mobile prime mover having vibratory means thereon, saidtool comprising,a shank in perpendicular relationship to the surface being compacted andadapted at its upper end for pinned attachment to shank mounting means onthe prime mover,a shoe having upturned leading and trailing surfaces and an imperforatebottom surface,reinforcing bars extending lengthwise of the shoe,pivot means coupling said shoe to the lower end of said shank permittinginclination of the shoe about the axis of said pivot means during acompacting operation so as to permit the forwardly or rearwardly movingshoe to ride over material being compacted, andsaid shoe contactable with said shank at points spaced from said axis tolimit shoe inclination about said axis during tool operation.2. The tool as claimed in claim 1 wherein said reinforcing bars are inspaced parallel relationship, said shank terminating at its lower endbetween said bars, said pivot means embodied within a quick release pinextending through said bars and the shank end, said quick release pinpermitting shoe substitution for compacting subterranean surfaces ofgreater width than a conduit burial trench.3. The tool as claimed in claim 1 additionally including fluid dispersalmeans affixed to the forward portion of the shoe, said dispersal meansincluding a reservoir, means detachably mounting said reservoir on theshoe reinforcing bars, a conduit disposed transversely along an edge ofsaid shoe in communication with said reservoir for metering fluid to theunderside of the shoe.4. The tool as claimed in claim 1 additionally including meansinterconnecting one extremity of the shoe to a point on said shank to biasthe forward end of the shoe toward an upwardly inclined position."}
{"WKU":"039307425","Title":"Velocity probe for compressor surge control","App_Date":"1974-10-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Meherwan P. Boyce","Assignee":"Howell Instruments, Inc.","ICL_Class":"F01D 2114","References":"1834392;3240422;3248043;3638490;3677000;3759098;3846038;3875797","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In combination, a compressor having a fluid inlet and a fluid outlet inwhich fluid outlet a flow of fluid is to be sensed, anda velocity probe assembly for sensing the velocity of fluid flow, saidassembly comprising,"}
{"WKU":"039307433","Title":"Fluidic governor system","App_Date":"1973-12-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hansjoerg Stern","Assignee":"General Electric Company","ICL_Class":"F04B 4900;F01D 1706;F01B 2506","References":"1566995;2941120;3424370;3499599;3538931;3580086;3743434","Claims":"What I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the UnitedStates is:1. A fluidic governor system for controlling the speed of a drive shaftoutput of a prime mover, comprising:a. a fluidic governor having a control input port, a power input port and acontrol output port;b. a compressor, mechanically coupled to and driven by the drive shaftoutput of the prime mover, for generating both pneumatic power and apulsating fluidic signal having a frequency proportional to the rotationof the drive shaft output of the prime mover, the pulsating fluidic signalbeing fluidically coupled to said control input port of said fluidicgovernor;c. means for blocking the passage of said pulsating fluidic signal to saidpower input port of said governor and for converting the pneumatic powerto a steady fluidic power supply, the steady fluidic power supply beingfluidically coupled to said power input port of said fluidic governor; andd. means for adjusting a drive feed supplied to a power input of the primemover to correct the speed of the drive shaft output of said prime moverin response to a speed error signal which is generated from said controloutput port of said fluidic governor and whose magnitude is proportionalto the error in the frequency of the pulsating fluidic signal from saidcompressor.2. A fluidic governor system according to claim 1, wherein said convertingmeans is comprised of a fluidic RC filter.3. A fluidic governor system according to claim 2, wherein said fluidic RCfilter is comprised of:a. a fluidic resistor having a first and a second terminal, said firstterminal being fluidically coupled to the generated output from saidcompressor; andb. a fluidic capacitor having a first and a second terminal, said firstterminal of said fluidic capacitor being fluidically connected to saidsecond terminal of said fluidic resistor, and said second terminal of saidfluidic capacitor being fluidically coupled to said power input port ofsaid fluidic governor.4. A fluidic governor system according to claim 3, further comprising a gasfilter and a fluidic regulator interposed between said second terminal ofsaid fluidic capacitor and said power input port of said fluidic governor.5. A fluidic governor system comprising:a. a fluidic governor having a control input port, a power input port and acontrol output port;b. a prime mover having a power input and a drive shaft output;c. a compressor, mechanically coupled to and driven by said drive shaftoutput of said prime mover, for generating both pneumatic power and apulsating fluidic signal having a frequency proportional to the rotationof said drive shaft output of said prime mover, the pulsating fluidicsignal being fluidically coupled to said control input port of saidfluidic governor;d. means for blocking the passage of said pulsating fluidic signal to saidpower input port of said governor and for converting the pneumatic powerto a steady fluidic power supply, the steady fluidic power supply beingfluidically coupled to said power input port of said fluidic governor; ande. means for adjusting a drive feed supplied to said power input of saidprime mover to correct the speed of said drive shaft output of said primemover in response to a speed error signal which is generated from saidcontrol output port of said fluidic governor and whose magnitude isproportional to the error in the frequency of the pulsating fluidic signalfrom said compressor.6. A fluidic governor system according to claim 5, wherein said convertingmeans is comprised of a fluidic RC filter.7. A fluidic governor system according to claim 6, wherein said fluidic RCfilter is comprised of:a. a fluidic resistor having a first and a second terminal, said firstterminal being fluidically coupled to the generated output from saidcompressor; andb. a fluidic capacitor having a first and a second terminal, said firstterminal of said fluidic capacitor being fluidically connected to saidsecond terminal of said fluidic resistor, and said second terminal of saidfluidic capacitor being fluidically coupled to said power input port ofsaid fluidic governor.8. A fluidic governor system according to claim 7, further comprising a gasfilter and a fluidic regulator interposed between said second terminal ofsaid fluidic capacitor and said power input port of said fluidic governor."}
{"WKU":"039307441","Title":"Pressure gas engine","App_Date":"1973-10-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James V. Theis, Jr.","Assignee":"Hollymatic Corporation","ICL_Class":"F04D  500","References":"111538;685967;812795;858500;925127;980504;982035;988990;1079177;1110302;1454286","Claims":"I claim:1. A pressure gas engine, comprising: an enclosing casing with spacedoutlet openings; an inner first member in said casing of substantiallycircular cross section having first energy conversion means at itsperiphery for converting dynamic gas velocity to power; an outer secondmember in said casing surrounding said first member and having secondenergy conversion means facing said inner first member also for convertingdynamic gas velocity to power; power means including a work output powershaft for mounting one of said first and second members additional meansfor mounting the other of said first and second members to effect relativerotation therebetween when said power is exerted on one of said first andsecond members, one of said energy conversion means comprising a straightthrough gas nozzle having a converging entrance, a throat and a divergingexhaust, said nozzle lying on a chord of its said member that is less thana diameter and exhausting into the other energy conversion means, saidother energy conversion means comprising a series of impulse turbinebuckets each spaced in its entirety from said member containing saidnozzles and facing said nozzles, each bucket having an arcuate surface ofconstant radius transverse to the direction of said rotation, each saidnozzle having its exhaust entering each bucket adjacent one edge forgenerally arcuate travel around said arcuate surface of the bucket andleaving the bucket at an exhaust edge that is opposite said one edge in anenergy transmitting wiping action; means for supplying pressure gas to theconverging end of said nozzle; and means for exhausting gas from saidexhaust edges of said buckets in substantially unrestricted gas flowsubstantially directly into said casing for escape through said outletopenings in the casing.2. The engine of claim 1 wherein said inner first member and said outersecond member are both rotatable about a common axis with one of saidmembers containing a plurality of said nozzles and the other of saidmembers containing said impulse turbine buckets for receiving gas exhaustfrom the nozzles, and there is provided a single said work output powershaft and said additional means comprises gearing means connecting bothsaid rotatable first and second members to said single shaft for drivingthe same.3. The engine of claim 1 wherein said impulse turbine buckets are arrangedin a plurality of circular side-by-side series with adjacent buckets inadjacent series having a common sharp edge positioned opposite the nozzleexhaust whereby the exhaust is divided by said edge for simultaneous flowinto the adjacent buckets.4. The engine of claim 1 wherein said buckets are arranged in twoside-by-side circular series with the adjacent edges of adjacent bucketsbeing joined at a sharp edge and the opposite exhaust edges of the bucketsbeing extended to overlap the side of the member containing the nozzle asan aid in preventing pumping of the gas by the rotating member.5. The engine of claim 1 wherein said arcuate surface of each said bucketextends for about 90.degree.-270.degree..6. The engine of claim 1 wherein said arcuate surface of each said bucketextends for about 180.degree..7. The engine of claim 1 wherein said inner first member is rotatable andhas a hollow interior bounded by a peripheral wall in which are located acircular series of said nozzles each communicating with said hollowinterior.8. The engine of claim 7 wherein each said nozzle discharges generallytangentially and in the same direction relative to the circumference ofsaid wall.9. The engine of claim 1 wherein said inner first member and said outersecond member are both rotatable about a common axis with one of saidmembers containing said nozzle and the other of said members containingsaid impulse turbine buckets for receiving gas exhaust from the nozzle.10. The engine of claim 9 wherein there are a plurality of said nozzlesarranged in circular series around the periphery of said first memberrotor and exhausting toward said second member rotor and said buckets arearranged in a pair of circular series with an adjacent pair of buckets inthe series being aligned substantially parallel to the axis of rotationand having closely adjacent sides.11. The engine of claim 1 wherein said buckets are arranged in a pair ofclosely adjacent circular series with each pair of laterally adjacentbuckets in the two series being joined at a common sharp edge forreceiving the exhaust of said nozzle and the opposite edge of each bucketexhausting into a circular series of buckets arranged in the same membercontaining the nozzle and with the nozzle member buckets being in two setscircularly arranged on opposite sides of said nozzle."}
{"WKU":"039307450","Title":"Fluid pumps","App_Date":"1974-12-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Donald V. Gassie","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F04D  500","References":"104603;159127;271824;526533;1580807","Claims":"Having thus completely and fully described the invention, what is nowclaimed and desired to be protected by Letters Patent of the United Statesof America:1. A double action fluid pump which consists of the combination of the ninefollowing main components, viz; a rotor formed by two discs mounted inparallel on a common axle; multiple feathering blades on their own axlesmounted between the said discs on bearings in each of the discs, with theouter edges of the blades, when in direct line with the said rotor axle,are even with and at right angles to the periphery of the said discs; acasing in which the said rotor-blade assembly is installed on bearings atthe said casing s side, said casing being contoured to the said rotor andits related fluid movement area, and having a main suction chamber and adischarge chamber with their inlets and outlets in line with each otherand in line with approximately one third of the lower periphery of thesaid rotor; a conventional blade feathering system; a vane forming theupper wall of the discharge chamber and extending from the outlet of thedischarge chamber toward and to a point adjacent to the furthest point ofblade travel in the direction of the discharge chamber inlet; asupplementary suction chamber which is located within the upper quadranton the discharge side of the said casing, with the said vane serving asits lower wall, and its inlet through the casing wall at a pointapproximately one third the distance of the rotor diameter above the saidvane; and a fluid control valve located outside of and connectedhydraulically to the said supplementary suction chamber inlet."}
{"WKU":"039307468","Title":"Outlet diffusor for a centrifugal compressor","App_Date":"1974-06-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Sven-Olof Kronogard","Assignee":"United Turbine AB & Co., Kommanditbolag","ICL_Class":"F01D 1700;F04D 2946","References":"2439933;2645410;2708883;3132594;3333762;3778186;3860360;3873232","Claims":"I claim:1. An outlet diffusor in combination with a centrifugal compressorcomprising a rotor for discharging radially and tangentially of the axisof rotation of the rotor, the diffusor comprising parallel, planar discshaving an inner and outer periphery circumposed about the rotor, aplurality of individual separated elongated passage-forming elementscircumferentially spaced, transversely between said discs, said elementscomprising opposed planar, parallel side faces defining a segment of acircle along their length and extending in juxtaposed relation on theopposed inner surfaces of said discs and substantially from the inner tothe outer periphery of said discs, said elements including opposed channelshaped edge faces converging in a concave transverse edge between saidside faces and adjacent the inner periphery of said discs, the parallelside faces of the elements terminating in a rounded ends flanking thetransverse edge at the inner periphery of the discs, the channel shapededge faces merging into each other along the transverse edge, adjacentedge faces of adjacent elements combining to form divergent expansionpassages from the inner to the outer periphery of said discs.2. The structure according to claims 1, in which each element is pivotablymounted on the discs by means of a trunnion pin located adjacent to itsinner end, each element being provided with an elongated slot, remotelylocated with respect to the said pin, and means operatively connected insaid slots for adjusting the angular position of the element, relative tothe outer periphery of said rotor.3. The structure according to claim 1, in which each element includes arear portion which is fixed in relation to the discs and an inner portionincluding the transverse edge, said inner portion being angularlydisplaceable with respect to a pivot located in the plane separating thetwo portions of the segment, whereby the entrance of the diffusor passagesis adjustable.4. The structure according to claim 2 including an inlet portion for thecentrifugal compressor, adjustable inlet vanes, operatively associatedwith said inlet portion, the means for adjusting the position of thediffusor elements being operatively connected to means for adjusting theposition of the inlet vanes.5. The structure according to claim 1 in which the transverse arcuate edgeby way of the flanking rounded ends merge into the parallel side faces ofthe elements, and a passage, extending from each of said rounded ends runswithin the element for a distance upstream of the transverse edge, andopens at the low pressure side of the element.6. The structure according to claim 1 in which said elements comprise aseparate main portion and nose portion, and means connecting said main andnose portions in integrated relationship, said nose portion comprising amaterial of greater wear resistence than said main portion and beingreplaceable if excess wear occurs."}
{"WKU":"039307476","Title":"Turbine housing","App_Date":"1973-11-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William Edward Woollenweber","Assignee":"Cummins Engine Company, Inc.","ICL_Class":"F02b 3700;F01d  108","References":"2899797;3005618;3218029;3292364;3408046;3614259;3664761","Claims":"I claim:1. In a centripetal flow turbine housing having a first inlet and a firstinlet passageway receiving fluid flow and a volute section connected tosaid first inlet passageway for discharging said fluid flow, theimprovement comprising at least one additional inlet spaced from saidfirst inlet means forming at least one additional inlet passageway forreceiving fluid flow from said additional inlet and defining an outlet fordirecting said fluid flow in a direction which is substantially parallelto the direction of flow through said first inlet passageway, saidadditional inlet passageway being surrounded at some point downstream fromsaid inlets by at least 160.degree. of said first inlet passageway asviewed in a plane generally normal with respect to the flow through saidadditional inlet passageway.2. In a centripetal flow gas driven turbine adapted to receive gas from atleast two gas supply ducts, the improvement of a turbine housing forming avolute section, said housing including means forming a first inlet and afirst passageway leading from said first inlet to said volute section,said first inlet being adapted to be connected to one of said supplyducts, said housing further including means forming a second inlet spacedfrom said inlet and connected to another of said supply ducts and a secondpassageway leading from said second inlet to an outlet, said outlet beingsurrounded at some point downstream from said inlets by said firstpassageway to an extent of at least 160.degree. as viewed in a planegenerally normal with respect to the flow of gas through said passageways.3. In an internal combustion engine including a plurality of combustionchambers which fire in a sequential firing order, an intake manifold forsupplying fresh intake air to said chambers, and a turbocharger includinga compressor connected to said intake manifold, the improvement comprisinga divided exhaust duct system connected to conduct exhaust gases from saidchambers, said duct system including a first branch connected to one ofsaid chambers and a second branch connected to another of said chambers,and a housing of a centripetal turbine of said turbocharger, said housingincluding a volute section, means forming a first inlet and a firstpassageway leading from said first inlet to said volute section, saidfirst inlet being adapted to be connected to one of said branches, saidhousing further including means forming a second inlet spaced from saidfirst inlet and connected to another of said branches, and a secondpassageway leading from said second inlet to an outlet, said outlet beingsurrounded at some point downstream from said inlets by said firstpassageway to an extent of at least 160.degree. as viewed in a planegenerally normal with respect to the flow of gas through said passageways.4. In a centripetal flow turbine housing having a first inlet opening andan inlet passage receiving fluid flow and a volute section for dischargingsaid fluid flow, the improvement comprising at least one additional inletopening spaced from said first inlet opening, means for forming at leastone additional inlet passage also receiving fluid flow from saidadditional inlet opening and defining an outlet surrounded at some pointdownstream from said inlet openings by at least 160.degree. of said inletpassage as viewed in a plane generally normal with respect to the flowthrough said additional inlet passage.5. A housing according to claim 1, wherein said first passageway surroundsat least 180.degree. of said second passageway.6. A housing according to claim 1, wherein the first passageway surroundsfrom 270.degree. to 360.degree. of the second passageway.7. A housing according to claim 1, wherein the passageways are graduallyaltered in shape from the inlet to the point of merger where one at leastpartially surrounds another.8. A housing according to claim 1, where the cross-sectional area of eachpassageway is gradually reduced from the inlet to the point of merger withanother passageway.9. A housing according to claim 1 which includes only two passageways,which passageways merge at the start of the volute section of the housing.10. A housing according to claims 1 which includes only two passageways,which merge at a point upstream of the start of the volute section of thehousing.11. A housing according to claim 1, which includes three passageways whichmerge at the start of the volute section of the housing.12. A housing according to claim 1, which includes three passageways whichmerge at a point upstream of the start of the volute section of thehousing.13. A housing according to claim 11 wherein each of two passagewayssurrounds at least a 160.degree. portion of the third passageway at thepoint of merger.14. A housing according to claim 12, wherein each of two passagewayssurrounds at least a 160.degree. portion of the third passageway at thepoint of merger.15. A housing according to claim 1, which includes three passageways two ofwhich merge to form a common passageway which merges with the thirdpassageway, the first passageway surrounding at least 160.degree. of thesecond passageway at the point of merger and the third passagewaysurrounding at least 160.degree. of the merged first and secondpassageways at the point of merger of the third passageway therewith.16. A turbine including a housing according to claim 1.17. A turbocharger including a turbine according to claim 16.18. In combination an internal combustion engine and a turbochargeraccording to claim 16.19. A turbine housing according to claim 1, in combination with an exhaustsystem comprising two ducts joining to form a common duct in such a mannerthat one of said ducts surrounds at least 160.degree. of the other duct atthe point at which they join, and two further ducts which merge to form afurther common duct, one of said two further ducts surrounding at least160.degree. of the other further duct at the point of merger, said commonducts connecting one with each inlet passageway of the turbine housing.20. A turbine housing according to claim 1, in combination with an exhaustsystem comprising three ducts which simultaneously merge to form a singleduct, each of two of said ducts surrounding at least 160.degree. of thethird duct, and three further ducts which merge together simultaneously toform a further single duct each of two of said further ducts surroundingat least 160.degree. of the third further duct, said single ductsconnecting with the turbine housing inlet passageways.21. A turbine housing according to claim 1, in combination with an exhaustsystem comprising three ducts which merge to form a common duct, one ductfirst merging with a second duct and the duct so formed subsequentlymerging with the third duct, three further ducts merging in the samemanner to form a further common duct, said common ducts connecting withthe turbine housing inlets.22. A turbine housing according to claim 1, in combination with a rotaryengine.23. A turbine housing according to claim 19, in combination with a rotaryengine.24. A turbine housing according to claim 20, in combination with a rotaryengine.25. A housing according to claim 21, in combination with a rotary engine.26. A turbine housing according to claim 22, characterised in that anexhaust duct connects with an inlet of the housing, a tapered nozzlesection of the duct connecting with the inlet.27. A turbine housing according to claim 19, characterised in that anexhaust duct connects with an inlet of the housing, a tapered nozzlesection of the duct connecting with the inlet.28. A turbine housing according to claim 20, characterised in that anexhaust duct connects with an inlet of the housing, a tapered nozzlesection of the duct connecting with the inlet.29. A turbine housing according to claim 21, characterised in that anexhuast duct connects with an inlet of the housing, a tapered nozzlesection of the duct connecting with the inlet.30. A turbine housing according to claim 1, characterised in that anexhaust duct connects with an inlet passageway of the housing, a taperednozzle section of the duct connecting with the inlet passageway."}
{"WKU":"039307484","Title":"Hollow cooled vane or blade for a gas turbine engine","App_Date":"1973-07-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert Frederick Redman;Michael John Sharpe","Assignee":"Rolls-Royce (1971) Limited","ICL_Class":"F01D  518","References":"2787441;2873944;2923525;3240468;3388888;3433015;3574481;3628880;3628885;3635587;3644060;3700348;3707750;3782852;3799696;3806276","Claims":"We claim:1. A blade assembly for a gas turbine engine comprising: a hollow cooledblade having a wall defined by an exterior and an interior surface, acooling air entry tube positioned interior of the blade and extendinglongitudinally of the same, said cooling air entry tube being sealed tothe blade interior surface at spaced apart locations at or adjacent thetip and root of the blade to provide a space between the blade and theblade interior surface, means to operatively support said air entry tubefrom the interior surface of said blade, longitudinally extendingpartitions which seal between the blade interior surface and the exteriorsurface of the tube, said partitions dividing said space between the tubeand the interior surface of said blade into a plurality of separatelongitudinal sections, at least one of said partitions comprising alongitudinally extending deformable sealing member trapped between therespective tube and the interior surface of said blade, apertures in thetube arranged to allow air at different pressures into the differentlongitudinal sections, and film cooling holes extending from at least oneof said sections through the blade wall to the exterior blade surface.2. A blade as claimed in claim 1 in which at least some of saidlongitudinal partitions support said cooling air tube.3. A blade as claimed in claim 1 and comprising a single hollow centralportion within which said tube is located.4. A blade as claimed in claim 3 and in which there is a single said tubelocated within said hollow central portion.5. A blade as claimed in claim 1 and in which there are two said tubeslocated in the forward and rearward parts respectively of said hollowblade.6. A blade as claimed in claim 4 and in which there is a trailing edge slotin communication with at least one said longitudinal section.7. A blade as claimed in claim 1 and comprising a leading hollow portionwithin which the tube is located and a trailing portion which is providedwith a sinuous passage for the flow therethrough of cooling air.8. A blade as claimed in claim 7 and in which there is a trailing edge slotthrough which the air from said sinuous passage may discharge.9. A blade as claimed in claim 1 and comprising a forward hollow portionwithin which one said tube is located and a rearward hollow portion withinwhich a second said tube is located, said forward and rearward hollowportions being separated by a longitudinally extending web.10. A blade as claimed in claim 9 and in which there is a trailing edgeslot with which at least part of the rearward tube communicates so as todischarge air therethrough.11. A blade as claimed in claim 9 and in which the space between each saidtube and the interior of its respective hollow portion is divided into aplurality of longitudinal sections.12. A blade as claimed in claim 1 and in which at least one said partitioncomprises an integral longitudinally extending projection from theinterior surface of the blade and extending to said tube.13. A blade as claimed in claim 1 and in which said deformable sealingmember comprises a resilient tube.14. A blade as claimed in claim 1 and in which there are chordwiseextending ribs projecting from the blade interior which support thecooling air tube."}
{"WKU":"039307492","Title":"Turbodrill","App_Date":"1974-12-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Moisei Timofeevich Gusman;Boris Georgievich Ljubimov;Igor Leonidovich Konstantinov;Irina Ivanovna Kuznetsova;Boris Davidovich Malkin;Gely Meierovich Nikitin","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F03B 1302","References":"1482702;2306583;2340738;2353534;3356338;3405912;3598187;3728040;3754835","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A turbodrill for drilling wells having a top portion for coupling withthe bottom end of the drilling string for receiving drilling fluid whichis positively fed therethrough and a bottom portion provided with acoupling member for a rock-disintegrating tool, said turbodrillcomprising: a housing; stators fixed in said housing; said stators havingblades arranged to form a circular patterns and to define guide passagesfor the flow of drilling fluid positively fed through the drilling string;a shaft having a central passage accommodated in said housing; bearingmeans mounted in said housing for rotation of said shaft relative to saidhousing and for transmitting the load from the drilling string to therock-disintegrating tool; rotors fixed to said shaft, said rotors havingblades arranged to form a circular pattern, said blades being directedoppositely relative to said stator blades and mounted in a manner suchthat said stator and rotor blades form turbodrill turbine stages in whichthe linear motion of the drilling fluid is transformed into the rotarymotion of said rotors; means for fixing said stators and rotors of theturbine stages to said shaft and housing, respectively; the blades of saidrotor and stator being shaped in such a manner that an angle (.theta.)between tangents to a middle line of the profile of said blades at theinlet and outlet edges of said blades is determined by the relationshihp.theta. = 180.degree. - (4.5 .div. 7).alpha..sub.1, wherein .alpha..sub.1is an angle between a line perpendicular to an axis of said blade patternsand the tangent to the middle line of the profile of said blades at theinlet edge thereof as measured in the direction towards the concaveportion of the blade profile, an angle (.alpha..sub.2) between the lineperpendicular to the axis of said blade patters and the tangent to themiddle line of said blades at the outlet edge thereof is determined by therelationship .alpha..sub.2 = (3.5 .div. 6) .alpha..sub.1, and a ratio ofmaximum thickness ( .delta. ) of the profile of said blades to the chord( 1 ) thereof is selected within the range .delta./1 = 0.09 + 0.19.2. A turbodrill for drilling wells having a top portion for coupling withthe bottom end of the drilling string for receiving drilling fluid whichis positively fed therethrough, and a bottom portion provided with acoupling member for a rock-disintegrating tool, said turbodrillcomprising: a housing; stators fixed in said housing, said stators havingblades arranged to form a circular pattern and to define guide passagesfor the flow of drilling fluid positively fed through the drilling string;a shaft having a central passage accommodated in said housing; bearingmeans mounted in said housing for rotation of said shaft relative to saidhousing and for transmitting the load from the drilling string to therock-disintegrating tool; rotors fixed to said shaft, said rotors havingblades arranged to form a circular pattern, said blades being directedoppositely relative to said stator blades and mounted in such a mannerthat said stator and rotor blades form turbodrill turbine stages in whichthe linear motion of the drilling fluid is transformed into the rotarymotion of said rotors; means for fixing said stators and rotors of theturbine stages to said shaft and housing, respectively; the blades of saidrotor and stator being shaped in such a manner that an angle (.theta.)between tangents to a middle line of the profile of said blades at theinlet and outlet edge of said blades is determined by the relationship.theta. = 180.degree. - (4.5 .div. 7) .alpha..sub.1, wherein .alpha..sub.1is an angle between the line perpendicular to an axis of said bladepatterns and the tangent to the middle line of profile of said blades atthe inlet edge thereof, as measured in the direction towards the concaveportion of the blade profile, and angle (.alpha..sub.2) between a lineperpendicular to the axis of said blade patterns and the tangent to themiddle line of said blades at the outlet thereof is determined by therelationship .alpha..sub.2 = (3.5 .div. 6) .alpha..sub.1, and the ratio ofmaximum thickness ( .delta. ) of the profile of said blades to the chord( 1 ) thereof is selected within the range .delta./1 = 0.09 + 0.19; a cagemounted below said thrust bearing comprising: a first shouldered bushingfixed to said shaft and provided with passages defining, together withsaid shaft, an annular space, and a second shouldered bushing accommodatedin the annular space of said first bushing and fixed in said housing, theannular space communicating with the central passage of said shaft throughthe passages of said bushing.3. The turbodrill as claimed in in claim 2 wherein the thrust bearing ismounted on an independent assembly spindle."}
{"WKU":"039307506","Title":"Wind power plant","App_Date":"1974-04-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Wilderich C. Schultz","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F03D  300","References":"303585;625614;1359180;1609883;1812741;2252788;2518611","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A power plant of the windmill type comprising: a supporting structure, apropeller unit mounted on said supporting structure for rotation about avertical axis and including a hub, a plurality of vanes affixed to saidhub, each of said vanes having a shell of a generally paraboliccross-section defining a leading edge with a symmetrical air foilconfiguration and further defining an open trailing edge, and a zig-zagshaped webbing member mounted within said shell to define a series ofessentially triangular individual cells extending the length of the shelland exposed to the open trailing edge thereof.2. The power plant defined in claim 1, in which each of said vanes extendsas a cantilever radially from said hub in a horizontal plane."}
{"WKU":"039307514","Title":"Bucket locking mechanism","App_Date":"1974-07-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William A. Straslicka;Arthur J. Miller","Assignee":"Carrier Corporation","ICL_Class":"F01D  532","References":"2867408;3088708;3198485","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a rotor assembly of the type wherein a series of side entry bladesare mounted upon a rotor disc by sliding the blade roots intocomplementary grooves formed within the disc, each blade further having aplatform overlying the tang formed in the disc between each root receivinggroove, the side edges of each platform being in close proximity with thatof the next adjacent blade platform, the improvement comprisinga radially extending hole formed in each tang, the hole being formed sothat it is substantially centered between adjacent blade platforms withthe hole extending beneath each of said adjacent platforms,a locking pin having a close sliding fit with said holes being mountedwithin each hole, said pin having a shoulder being arranged to passbeneath one of said adjacent platforms and an extended section passingoutwardly from said hole and being slidably received within acomplementary groove formed in the other of said adjacent platforms, andscrew means operatively associated with each of said pins for raising thepin within said hole to lock the shoulder of said pin against said oneadjacent platform whereby the damping characteristics and balance of eachblade is adjustable.2. The assembly of claim 1 wherein one of said pins is of a lengthsubstantially equal to or less than the depth of the hole whereby theplatform of the last mounted blade upon said disc is able to pass over thepin when said pin is recessed within the hole and said pin is capable ofbeing raised into a locking position when said last blade platform ispositioned upon said disc.3. The assembly of claim 2 wherein said screw means comprises a set screwthreadably passing through the axis of said pin and being arranged to seatagainst the bottom of said hole.4. The assembly of claim 1 wherein said hole is of a circular cross sectionof a substantially greater diameter than the space between each adjacentblade."}
{"WKU":"039307522","Title":"Oil well pumpoff control system utilizing integration timer","App_Date":"1974-05-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Bobby L. Douglas","Assignee":"Dresser Industries, Inc.","ICL_Class":"F04B 4900","References":"2456456;2550093;3091179;3610779;3778694;3851995","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property orprivilege is claimed are defined as follows:1. A system for controlling the operation of a well pumping installationincluding a pump, a motor for operating said pump and a pumped fluidflowpipe, said system comprising:flow detection means responsive to the flow of fluid from the well;signal means for generating signals indicative of said response;means for determining if the percentage of time during a given timeinterval that such signals are occurring is below a predetermineddesirable value;means for terminating the pumping operation when the percentage of timesaid signals are occurring is less than the predetermined desirable value;means for restarting said pumping operation after a predetermined period ofshutdown time in said system; and,recycle means in said system for resetting said determining means and saidterminating means to allow recycling of the pumping operation.2. The control system of claim 1 further comprising shutdown means forpreventing recycling of the operation after such operation has beenrecycled a predetermined number of times.3. The control system of claim 1 wherein said restarting means comprisespump-up timing means in said system arranged to provide a definite periodof pumping time immediately after said shutdown time, said pump-up timingmeans adapted to override said terminating means during said definiteperiod of pumping time and further adapted to remove said override at theend of said pumping period.4. The control system of claim 3 further comprising resetting means betweensaid determining means and said recycle preventing means; said resettingmeans arranged to reset said preventing means to zero when the percentageof time that signals are occurring is at or above said predetermineddesirable value, thereby preventing shutdown of the system duringsuccessful recycling.5. The control system of claim 1 further comprising means for determiningthe exact percentage of time that fluid is flowing from the pumped well.6. The control system of claim 5 wherein said percentage determining meanshas a continuous recording means and a visible readout, said readout beingcapable of indicating either the flow-time percentage when the pumpingsystem is operating, or the last flow-time percentage of the previouspumping cycle when the system is not pumping.7. The control system of claim 1 wherein said flow detection meanscomprises valve means having magnetic means therein, with proximity switchmeans thereon, said magnetic means and proximity switch means adapted toenergize said signal means when said valve means is opened by fluid flowfrom the well.8. The control system of claim 1 wherein said signal means comprises afirst oscillator having a known frequency wave-train output; and saiddetermining means comprises a variable frequency oscillator, counter meansconnected to said oscillators, means for comparing the outputs of saidcounter means, means connected to said comparing means for generating apulse signal in response to the output of said comparing means, and clockmeans connected to said counter means arranged to empty said counter meansperiodically into said comparing means.9. The control system of claim 4 wherein said resetting means comprises alogic gate having two inputs and an output, and adapted to emit a resetsignal only when receiving signals through both of said inputs; signalinverting means between said determining means and one of said logic gateinputs; clock means arranged to generate a periodic signal pulse to thesecond of said logic gate inputs; and, signal conducting means from saidlogic gate output to said recycle preventing means.10. Well pump-off control apparatus for controlling the operation of a wellpumping installation having a pump, pump motor, and pumped fluid flowpipe;said apparatus comprising:sensing means in said flowpipe adapted to sense the flow of fluidtherethrough;signal means responsive to said sensing means and adapted to generatesignals indicative of said fluid flow;comparison means for receiving said generated signals and comparing thetime of fluid flow during a given interval to a predetermined referencevalue;terminating means in communication with said comparison means and arrangedto terminate the pumping operation when the time of fluid flow during thegiven interval drops below said predetermined reference value;shutdown timing means in said apparatus arranged to maintain the wellpumping operation shutdown for a predetermined period of time;pump-up timing means communicating with said shutdown timing means andarranged to restart the pumping operation after said shutdown period andmaintain the pumping for a predetermined period of time regardless of theflow condition from the well;recycle means in communication with said pump-up timing means and saidcomparison means and arranged to recycle said well control apparatus tobegin another pumping cycle;system shutdown means in said well control apparatus, communicating withsaid recycle means and said terminating means, and adapted to count thenumber of times the pumping operation has been terminated and arranged tocompletely shut down the well control apparatus upon counting apredetermined number of times the pumping has been terminated; andresetting means between said comparison means and said system shutdownmeans and arranged to generate and transmit a resetting signal to saidsystem shutdown means when said time of fluid during a given interval isgreater than said predetermined reference value; said system shutdownmeans further adapted upon receiving said resetting signal to restartcounting from zero the number of times the pumping operation has beenterminated.11. The well control apparatus of claim 10 further comprising means forcalculating the actual percentage of time that well fluid is being pumpedfrom the well, said calculating means also comprising recorder means forcontinuously recording said calculated percentage, and display means fordisplaying the most recently calculated flow time percentage.12. The well control apparatus of claim 10 wherein said signal meanscomprises a magnetic proximity switch connected to a first oscillator, andsaid comparison means comprises a variable frequency oscillator, countermeans connected to said oscillators, comparator means receiving theoutputs of said counter means and comparing them, pulse signal meansconnected to said comparator means, and, clock means connected to saidcounter means and arranged to empty said counter means periodically intosaid comparing means.13. The well control apparatus of claim 11 wherein said calculating meanscomprises a multiplier circuit, a divide circuit, a gang tuner, and arecorder.14. The well control apparatus of claim 12 wherein said resetting meanscomprises a logic gate having two inputs and an output and adapted to emita reset signal to said system shutdown means when receiving signalsthrough both inputs; signal inverting means between said comparator meansand one of said logic gate inputs; signal conducting means from said clockmeans to the other of said logic gate inputs; and signal conductor meansfrom said logic gate output to said system shutdown means.15. Apparatus for controlling the operation of a well pumping installationutilizing a pump, pump motor, and pumped fluid flowpipe; said apparatuscomprising:flow sensing means responsive to the flow of fluid through the flowpipe;signal generating means arranged to generate signals indicative of the flowof fluid;means for determining if the percentage of time during a given timeinterval that such signals are occurring is below a predetermineddesirable value;means for terminating the pumping operation when the percentage of timesaid signals are occurring is less than the predetermined desirable value;means for generating a pumping signal indicative of the duration of pumpon-time during a given cycle;means for restarting the pumping operation after a period of shutdown time;and,means functionally related to said on-time signal for automaticallyadjusting the period of time the pump will be shutdown during a subsequentpumping cycle.16. The well control apparatus of claim 15 further comprising:recycle means in said apparatus for resetting said determining means andsaid terminating means to allow recycling of the pumping operation; andsystem shutdown means for counting the number of system recycles and forpreventing recycling of the operation after such operation has beenrecycled a predetermined number of times.17. The well control apparatus of claim 16 further comprising:resetting means between said determining means and said system shutdownmeans arranged to reset said system shutdown means to zero when thepercentage of time that signals are occurring is at or above saidpredetermined desirable value; andmeans for determining and recording the exact percentage of time during agiven interval that fluid is flowing from the pumped well.18. The well control apparatus of claim 15 wherein said adjusting meanscomprises:means for determining the pump running time fo the immediately precedingcycle;means for dividing said pump running time into a preset value of desirablerunning time;means for multiplying the obtained quotient by the shutdown time of theimmediately preceding cycle; and,timing means in communication with said multiplying means adapted toreceive a signal proportional to the product of said multiplying means toestablish a time period directly proportional thereto and emit a signal atthe end of said time period.19. The apparatus of claim 18 wherein said adjusting means furthercomprises comparator means between said multiplying means and said timingmeans adapted to receive said product signal and compare it to a presetminimum value signal, thereafter transmitting a signal proportional to thelarger of said two incoming signal values to said timing means.20. The apparatus of claim 19 wherein said adjusting means furthercomprises second comparator means communicating with said multiplyingmeans and adapted to receive a signal proportional to a preset minimumshutdown time and a signal proportional to the shutdown time of theimmediately preceding pump cycle and to transmit to said multiplying meansa signal proportional to the larger of the two values represented by thetwo incoming signals.21. The apparatus of claim 20 wherein said timing means is adapted toreceive a signal proportional to a precalculated shutdown time and delivera startup signal to said restarting means at the end of said precalculatedshutdown period.22. A well control system for automatically controlling the operation of awell pumping installation having a pump, a pump motor, and a pump motorpower supply source; said well control system comprising:flow sensing means on the well adapted for sensing the flow of pumped wellfluids therefrom;signal generating means communicating with said sensing means and adaptedto transmit signals indicative of said sensed flow;integrator means adapted to receive said signals and compare them to apreset minimum flow value, said integrator means having means forgenerating a shutdown signal when the pumped fluid flow value drops belowthe preset minimum flow value;cycle shutdown means communicating with said integrator means and locatedbetween the pump motor and its power supply source, said shutdown meansadapted to receive said shutdown signal and interrupt the flow of powerfrom the power supply source to the pump motor;restart means in communication with said shutdown means and adapted toreestablish flow of power to the pump motor and recycle said well controlsystem;system shutdown means communicating with said cycle shutdown means andarranged to completely shut down said well control system after counting apreset number of system recycles;resetting means between said integrator means and said system shutdownmeans arranged to reset said system shutdown means to zero when the pumpedfluid flow value equals or exceeds said preset minimum flow value;means for generating a pumping signal indicative of the duration of pumpon-time during a given cycle;pump-up timing means communicating with said restart means and adapted tooperate the pumping assembly by overriding said cycle shutdown means for apredetermined period of time; andanalyzing means in communication with said integrator means and saidrestart means, said analyzing means adapted to energize said restart meansafter determining and timing a shutdown period calculated to alter theactual pump running time to a value closer to a preset desirable runningtime.23. The well control system of claim 22 further comprising percentagedetermining and recording means for determining and recording the amountof time during a given time interval that the well fluid is being pumpedfrom the well.24. The well control system of claim 22 wherein said analyzing meanscomprises means for performing the calculation:##EQU3##where t.sub.n is the time of the upcoming shutdown period,T.sub.s is a preset desirable running time,I.sub.(n.sub.-1)  is the runtime of the preceding pump cycle, andt.sub.n.sub.-1 is the shutdown period of the preceding pumping cycle.25. The well control system of claim 24 wherein said analyzing meansfurther comprises:means for determining the pump running time of the immediately precedingcycle;means for dividing said pump running time into the value of a presetdesirable run time;means for multiplying the obtained quotient by the shutdown time of theimmediately preceding cycle;timing means in communication with said multiplying means adapted toreceive a signal proportional to the product of said multiplying means toestablish a time period directly proportional thereto and emit a signal atthe end of said time period;comparator means between said multiplying means and said timing meansadapted to receive said product signal and compare it to a preset minimumvalue signal, thereafter transmitting a signal proportional to the largerof the said two incoming signal values to said timing means; and,second comparator means communicating with said multiplying means andadapted to receive a signal proportional to a preset minimum shutdown timeand a signal proportional to the shutdown time of the immediatelypreceding pump cycle and to transmit to said multiplying means a signalproportional to the larger of the two values represented by the twoincoming signals.26. A method of controlling an oil well pumping installation having an oilwell pump, a prime mover, a power supply and a pumped fluid flowpipe, saidmethod comprising:sensing the flow of fluid pumped through the flowpipe;comparing the time fluid flows through the flowpipe during a given unit oftime to a predetermined desirable flow time;disconnecting the power supply from the prime mover when said fluid flowtime drops below the predetermined desirable flow time thereby shuttingdown the pumping installation;reconnecting the power supply to the prime mover after a predeterminedshutdown time, thereby restarting the pumping installation; andrepeating the above steps an indefinite number of times.27. The method of claim 26 further comprising the steps of:counting the number of times the pumping installation has been shut down;andcompletely shutting down the pumping installation and control apparatus andpreventing reconnecting of the power supply to the prime mover when thecounted number of shutdowns reaches a predetermined amount.28. The method of claim 27 further comprising:restarting said counting step at zero each time the fluid flow time exceedssaid preset flow time after the power supply has been reconnected to theprime mover.29. The method of claim 28 further comprising varying the shutdown time ofthe pumping installation to achieve a predetermined, desirable continuouspumping run-time.30. The method of claim 29 wherein said varying step is performedautomatically and comprises:measuring the run-time of a preceding pumping cycle;measuring the shutdown time of a preceding cycle; anddetermining a new shutdown time according to the formula:##EQU4##where: t.sub.n is the time of the upcoming shutdown period,T.sub.s is a preset desirable runtime,T.sub.(n.sub.-m) is the runtime of a preceding cycle,t.sub.(n.sub.-p) is the shutdown of a preceding cycle.31. The method of claim 30 wherein said preceding cycles are both the samecycle which is the immediately preceding cycle."}
{"WKU":"039307530","Title":"Dual prerotator","App_Date":"1974-07-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Joseph V. Foa","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F04B 1924","References":"108529;2058613;2905276;3361336","Claims":"I claim:1. The method of dividing a first flow of a fluid into two subflows whilesimultaneously imparting to said subflows angular momenta of oppositesigns, comprising feeding said first flow transversely into, and at somelocation along, a conduit formed by the space between two coaxial surfacesof revolution and generally helicoidal stationary surfaces substantiallyspanning said space, whereby one of said subflows flows in one directionaway from said location and the other of said subflows flows in the otherdirection away from said location, and said subflows are, by virtue ofsaid geometry, constrained to acquire angular momenta of opposite signs.2. The method of dividing the fluid input to an internal-separation energyseparator having energizing and deenergizing components into two flowswhile simultaneously imparting to said flows angular momenta of oppositesigns, comprising feeding said input transversely, and at some locationalong, a substantially helicoidal stationary conduit leading in onedirection away from said location to the energizing component and in theother direction away from said location to the de-energizing component ofsaid energy separator, whereby the portion of said fluid which flowstoward said energizing component and the portion of said fluid which flowstoward said de-energizing component are constrained to acquire angularmomenta of opposite signs.3. A device for dividing the fluid input to an internal-separation energyseparator into two flows while simultaneously imparting to said two flowsangular momenta of opposite signs, and for reducing fluctuations andlosses in said two flows, comprising a substantially helicoidal stationaryconduit, means for supplying said fluid transversely into said conduit atsome location along its length, said energy separator having energizingand de-energizing discharges, said conduit leading in one direction awayfrom said location to said energizing discharge and in the other directionaway from said location to said de-energizing discharge, whereby theportion of said fluid which flows toward said energizing discharge andthat which flows toward said de-energizing discharge are constrained toacquire angular momenta of opposite signs.4. A device for dividing the fluid input to an internal-separation energyseparator having a rotor with energizing and de-energizing components intotwo flows while simultaneously imparting to said two flows angular momentaof opposite signs, and for reducing fluctuations and losses in said twoflows, comprising means defining two surfaces of revolution coaxiallypositioned with respect to said rotor, a generally helicoidal stationarypartition substantially spanning the space between said two surfaces anddefining a passage between said surfaces and said partition, said passageleading in one direction toward said energizing component and in theopposite direction toward said de-energizing component, the orientation ofsaid partition being such that the angular momentum acquired by particlesadvancing within said passage toward said de-energizing component is ofthe same sign as the angular velocity of said rotor while the angularmomentum acquired by particles advancing within said passage toward saidenergizing component is of the opposite sign, and means for feeding saidfluid input transversely into, and at some location along, said passage.5. A device for dividing the input flow to an internal-separation energyseparator having a rotor with energizing and de-energizing components intotwo flows while simultaneously imparting to said two flows angular momentaof opposite signs, and for reducing fluctuations and losses in said twoflows, comprising a stationary inner body and a stationary outer bodylaterally enshrouding said inner body, the outer surface of said innerbody and the inner surface of said outer body being substantiallycoaxially positioned with respect to said rotor, the space between saidsurfaces leading in one axial direction to said energizing component andin the opposite direction to said de-energizing component, a substantiallyhelicoidal stationary partition laterally spanning said space, therebyforming with said surfaces a substantially helicoidal stationary conduitin said space, means for supplying said input flow transversely into saidconduit at a location between its two ends, whereby the portion of saidfluid which flows toward said energizing component is constrained toacquire an angular momentum of sign opposite to that acquired by theportion of said fluid which flows toward said de-energizing component.6. A device as set forth in claim 4, in which said input flow is suppliedto a plurality of substantially helicoidal conduits formed in said spaceby said surface and a plurality of substantially helicoidal partitions.7. A device as set forth in claim 4, in which said energizing component isa compressor and said de-energizing component is a turbine.8. A device as set forth in claim 4, in which said energizing component isa pump and said de-energizing component is a turbine."}
{"WKU":"039307549","Title":"Portable water sampling apparatus","App_Date":"1974-12-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Joe L. Mogg;Rueben E. Paulson","Assignee":"Universal Oil Products Company","ICL_Class":"F01D 2526;F03B 1100;E21B 4700","References":"640463;3722589","Claims":"We claim as our invention:1. A portable water pumping apparatus for sampling water from a wellcomprising: a storage reel having a hub and side flanges and storing apair of elongated, flexible, telescopically positioned, radially spacedinner and outer tubing members and for supporting the upper end portion ofeach of said tubing members; handle means on said storage reel for reelingand unreeling the lower end portion of said tubing members into a well; acylinder of pressurized gas and complementary means on said cylinder andon the upper end portion of the inner tubing member for attaching saidcylinder to the upper end of said inner tubing member, valve means forcontrolling the flow of gas from said cylinder into said inner tubingmember; weight means attached to said outer tubing member at its lower endportion; the lower end portions of the inner and outer tubing membercommunicating with each other, means communicating the space between theinner and outer tubing members with water to be pumped; and dischargeopening means at the upper end of the outer tubing member for dischargingwater forced up through the space between the inner and outer tubingmembers by gas passing down through the lower end portion of said innertubing member from said cylinder when the lower end portion of each tubingmember is submerged beneath the water in a well.2. The water pumping apparatus of claim 1 wherein the upper end of saidinner tubing member passes through the wall of said outer tubing member ata location spaced from the end thereof.3. The water pumping apparatus of claim 1 wherein a plug member is fastenedto the lower ends of said inner and outer tubing members to preventrelative movement between said tubing members and to maintain radialspacing between them.4. The water pumping apparatus of claim 3 wherein the means communicatingthe space between the inner and outer tubing members with water to bepumped comprises longitudinal grooves in the peripheral surface of saidplug member.5. The water pumping apparatus of claim 4 wherein said weight means isattached to said outer tubing member by a fastener which passes throughthe wall of said tubing and engages the walls of aperture means in saidplug."}
{"WKU":"039307557","Title":"Air-pressure actuated slurry pump","App_Date":"1974-08-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Lawrence N. Lahr;Donald J. Lahr","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F04F  106;F04F  300","References":"350761;1492171;1830424;2270434;2315824;3173379;3422768;3662715;3667869","Claims":"What is claimed:1. A slurry pump particularly useful for pumping liquid manure andcomprising:a pressure tank with an inlet for admission of slurry to the tank and alower outlet for passage of slurry from the tank, the inlet having ahinged plate swingable inwardly from the inlet and including anair-operated pneumatic cylinder and piston attached internally of the tankand oriented to force the plate upwardly and outwardly to provide anair-tight seal at the inlet when the piston is extended from the cylinder,and the outlet having means preventing backflow of slurry through theoutlet;a source of air under pressure and an air line extending from the source ofair and passing through a wall of the tank and communicating internally ofthe tank with the pneumatic cylinder to actuate the same, the air lineincluding a pressure-actuated directional valve communicating in itsclosed position with the pneumatic cylinder and in its opened positionwith the tank to supply air under pressure to the latter when the pressureof air driving the pneumatic cylinder has reached a predetermined value;level sensor means for sensing the recedence of slurry below apredetermined level as slurry is pumped from the pressure tank; andcontrol means responsive to the level sensor means for discontinuing theflow of pressurized air to the tank when the slurry level has decreased tothe predetermined level.2. The slurry pump of claim 1 wherein the closure plate is of sufficientweight to swing open under the force of gravity when otherwiseunrestrained, retracting the piston into the cylinder.3. The slurry pump of claim 1 wherein the level sensor means comprises afloat tethered within the tank and having a first position in which thefloat floats upon the slurry within the tank and a second position whereinthe float is suspended from its tether, the float having internalelectrical contacts communicating electrically with the source of airunder pressure and means closing and opening the contacts in response tomovement of the sensor between its first and second positions to shut offthe flow of pressurized air to the tank when the sensor moves from thefirst position to the second position.4. The slurry pump of claim 3 wherein the source of air under pressure isan electric motor-driven air compressor including a limit switch forshutting off the compressor when the pressure pumped against exceeds apredetermined upper pressure and turning on the compressor when thepressure pumped against has fallen below a lower predetermined pressure,whereby the slurry within the tank during the pumping operation issubjected to pressure cycling between the upper and lower predeterminedpressures.5. The slurry pump of claim 1 including a door hinged to the outlet of thetank and oriented to open outwardly against the force of gravity andcloseable inwardly of the tank to prevent the backflow of slurrytherewithin.6. A slurry pump particularly useful for pumping liquid manure andcomprisinga. a pressure tank with top and bottom walls, the top wall having an inletfor admission to the tank of liquid manure and having an internal,gasketed peripheral surface, closure plate openable inwardly of the tankand internally hinged to the top wall, the closure plate being swingableupwardly into sealing contact against the gasketed inner periphery of theinlet, a pneumatic cylinder mounted internally of the tank at one end andhaving an extendable piston attached to the closure plate, the pneumaticcylinder and piston being oriented to force the plate upwardly intosealing engagement with the inlet periphery upon extension of the pistonfrom the cylinder, the bottom wall of the tank including a channel openinggenerally transversely outwardly of the tank and having an outer endconnectable to a duct for conveying liquid manure to a storage area, theouter end of the channel including a top-hinged door swingable outwardlyand upwardly to permit outflow of liquid manure through the channel, andcloseable inwardly to prevent backflow of liquid manure into the tank;b. an electrically operated air compressor including a limit switch forshutting the compressor off when the pressure pumped against by thecompressor exceeds a predetermined upper pressure and turning on thecompressor when the pressure pumped against has fallen below a lowerpredetermined pressure;c. an air line for carrying air under pressure from the compressor to thetank, the air line extending through the top wall of the tank andincluding internally of the tank a pressure actuated directional valvecommunicating in its closed position with the pneumatic cylinder and inits opened position with the tank to supply air under pressure to the tankwhen the pressure of air driving the cylinder has reached a predeterminedvalue;d. a level sensor float tethered to the top wall internally of the tank andhaving a first position in which the float is carried upon the surface ofliquid manure within the tank and a second position wherein the float issuspended from its tether when liquid manure within the tank has recededto a predetermined level, the float having internal electrical contacts,and means closing and opening the contacts in response to movement of thesensor between its first, floating position and its second,tether-supported position; ande. control means electrically connected to the electrical contacts of thefloat for shutting off the air compressor in response to movement of thefloat from its floating to its tether-supported position.7. The slurry pump of claim 6 including a source of water under pressure, awater line extending through the top wall of the tank and terminatinginternally of the tank in a generally centrally positioned sprayhead towash down the tank walls.8. A slurry pump particularly useful for pumping liquid manure andcomprising:a pressure tank with an inlet for admission of slurry to the tank and alower outlet for passage of slurry from the tank, the inlet having ahinged closure for closing the inlet with an air-tight seal;a source of air under pressure;a pneumatic cylinder attached to the closure to close the latter uponapplication of air under pressure to the cylinder; andair conveying means including a pressure-actuated directional valve forconveying air under pressure from the source of pressurized air to thecylinder and to the tank, said valve conveying pressurized air to the tankonly when the closure has been closed and the pressure of air driving thecylinder has increased to a predetermined value.9. The slurry pump of claim 8 in which the tank has a top wall with theinlet positioned centrally thereof.10. The slurry pump of claim 9 in which the tank has a floor slopingtowards its center and said outlet extending substantially to the centerof the floor."}
{"WKU":"039307565","Title":"Metering pulse pump","App_Date":"1974-01-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William L. Bruggeman","Assignee":"Cat Pumps Corporation","ICL_Class":"F04G 2304;F04B 1700;F04B  908","References":"3032060;3121373;3235129;3450053;3663122;3680981;3692433;3809508","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A metering pulse pump for metering an additive liquid into a liquidcarrier under high pressure comprising:a rapidly reciprocable piston pump with an inlet connectable to a source ofliquid and an outlet, and an outlet line carrying liquid from the outletunder high pressure;a pressure-relief valve at the outlet of the piston pump and permittingone-way flow therethrough into the outlet line, the pressure relief valveincluding a plug and valve seat, a spring biasing the valve into a closedposition, and means for varying the spring pressure to control thepressure differential across the valve at which the valve will open;a diaphragm pump having a housing defining a compartment having a movablediaphragm separating the compartment into a first chamber communicatingdirectly with the outlet of the piston pump upstream of thepressure-relief valve and a second chamber having an inflow portconnectable to a source of additive liquid and an outflow port throughwhich additive liquid is pumped by movement of the diaphragm, the inflowand outflow ports respectively having check valves permitting flow onlyinto and out of the second chamber; anda manually closable bleeder duct communicating the first and seconddiaphragm pump chambers for priming the second chamber with liquid fromthe first chamber, the bleeder duct having a check valve permitting flowof liquid only from the first chamber to the second chamber when the ductis open.2. A metering pulse pump for metering an additive liquid into a liquidcarrier under high pressure comprising:a rapidly reciprocable piston pump with an inlet connectable to a source ofliquid carrier, an outlet, and an outlet line carrying the liquid carrierfrom the outlet under high pressure;a diaphragm pump having a housing defining a compartment having a movablediaphragm separating the compartment into a first chamber communicatingdirectly with the outlet of the piston pump and a second chamber having aninflow port connectable to a source of additive liquid and an outflow portcommunicating with the high pressure outlet line of the piston pump andthrough which additive liquid is pumped by movement of the diaphragm, theinflow and outflow ports respectively having check valves permitting flowonly into and out of the second chamber; anda unidirectional flow pressure-relief valve mounted at the outlet of thepiston pump to limit the pressure developed in the first chamber of thediaphragm pump during a pumping stroke of the piston pump, the pressurerelief valve having a valve seat, inner and outer coaxial helical valvesprings, and a plug having a surface configured to receive adjacent endsof the helical springs, the opposite end of the outer spring being rigidlysupported within the valve, and the opposite end of the inner spring beingaxially movable to vary the continuous compressive force exerted by thelatter spring upon the valve plug, the pressure-relief valve beingopenable upon application of a pre-set pressure differential thereacross,the length of a diaphragm pumping stroke corresponding to a rapid pistonpump stroke thus depending upon said pre-set pressure differential.3. A metering pulse pump for metering an additive liquid into a liquidcarrier under high pressure comprising:a piston pump with an inlet connectable to a source of liquid, and anoutlet and capable of rapid reciprocation;a pressure relief valve at the outlet of the piston pump and comprising aplug, a valve seat receiving the plug, inner and outer coaxial helicalvalve springs biasing the plug against the valve seat, a housing enclosingthe plug, valve seat, and helical springs, a valve stem threaded into thehousing for axial movement in response to axial rotation of the stem, theouter end of the stem projecting from the housing for external, manualrotation, and the inner end of the stem terminating in a centering rodwhich extends into and centers the inner helical spring, the centering rodhaving spaced from its inner end an outwardly projecting shoulder defininga spring seat against which one end of the inner helical spring abuts,axial movement of the valve stem thus varying the pressure which the innerhelical spring exerts upon the plug;a diaphragm pump having a housing defining a compartment having a movablediaphragm separating the compartment into a first chamber communicatingdirectly with the outlet of the piston pump upstream of thepressure-relief valve, and a second chamber having an inflow portconnectable to a source of additive liquid and an outflow port throughwhich the additive liquid is metered, the inflow and outflow portsrespectively having check valves permitting flow only into and out of thesecond chamber.4. A metering pulse pump for metering an additive liquid into a liquidcarrier under high pressure comprising:a piston pump with an inlet connectable to a source of liquid, and anoutlet and capable of rapid reciprocation;a pressure-relief valve at the outlet of the piston pump;a diaphragm pump having a housing defining a compartment having a movablediaphragm separating the compartment into a first chamber communicatingdirectly with the outlet of the piston pump upstream of thepressure-relief valve, and a second chamber having an inflow portconnectable to a source of additive liquid and an outflow port throughwhich additive liquid is metered, the inflow and outflow portsrespectively having check valves permitting flow only into and out of thesecond chamber; anda manually closable bleeder duct communicating the first and seconddiaphragm pump chambers for priming the second chamber with liquid fromthe first chamber, the bleeder duct having a check valve permitting flowof liquid only from the first chamber to the second chamber when the ductis open.5. The metering pulse pump of claim 4 wherein said piston pump is one unitof a multi-piston pump having an inlet manifold and an outlet manifold forcollectively supplying liquid to and receiving high pressure liquid fromeach piston pump, the outflow port of the diaphragm pump communicatingwith the outlet manifold of the multi-piston pump.6. The metering pulse pump of claim 4 wherein the bleeder duct includes ahousing defining a conduit communicating the first and second chambers ofthe diaphragm pump, a valve seat internally of the housing, a ball plugseatable against the valve seat to restrain flow from the second to thefirst chamber of the diaphragm pump, and a valve pin threaded into thebleeder duct housing, the valve pin having one end extending from thehousing for external operation and having its other end extending inwardlyof the housing to engage the ball plug and to seat the latter against thevalve seat when the pin is advanced inwardly of the housing.7. The metering pulse pump of claim 4 wherein the housing of the diaphragmpump defines an elongated chamber extending between the first chamber ofthe diaphragm pump and the outlet of the piston pump, the diaphragm pumpincluding a helical spring, a spring centering pin extending through thehelical spring into the elongated chamber and there terminating in ahelical spring seat abutting one end of the helical spring, the centeringpin being attached at its other end centrally of the diaphragm, thediaphragm pump housing including a plurality of internal projectionsextending into the first chamber, the projections being spacedcircumferentially from each other and from the spring centering pin toallow axial movement of the centering pin and to permit free liquidcommunication between the first chamber of the diaphragm pump and theelongated chamber, the projections defining at one end of a seat againstwhich the diaphragm may rest when in its retracted position, and theprojections at their other ends defining an inwardly extending helicalspring seat against which the other end of the helical spring abuts.8. The metering pulse pump of claim 7 wherein the helical spring seat atthe end of the spring centering pin is movable axially of the pin topermit the compressive force of the spring to be varied.9. A metering pulse pump for metering an additive liquid into a liquidcarrier under high pressure and comprising:a piston pump with an inlet connectable to a source of liquid and anoutlet, and capable of rapid reciprocation through pumping and returnstrokes and drawing substantially no vacuum at its outlet during thereturn stroke;a diaphragm pump having a housing and a diaphragm dividing the housing intoa first chamber communicating directly with the outlet of the piston pumpand a second chamber having an inflow port connectable to a source ofadditive liquid and an outflow port through which additive liquid ismetered, the diaphragm moving from a retracted position through itspumping stroke in response to pressure within the first chamber generatedby the piston pump, the inflow and outflow ports of the second chamberrespectively having check valves permitting flow only into and out of thesecond chamber, the diaphragm pump including a spring urging the diaphragminto its retracted position for returning the diaphragm to the latterposition following a pumping stroke; the first and second chamberscommunicating through a manually closable bleeder duct having a checkvalve permitting flow only from the first chamber to the second chamberwhen the duct is open to prime the second chamber;a unidirectional flow pressure-relief valve mounted at the outlet of thepiston pump to limit pressure developed in the first chamber of thediaphragm pump during a pumping stroke of the piston pump, thepressure-relief valve having a plug and valve seat and a valve springbiasing the valve into a closed position, the valve including anexternally operable valve stem having an internal spring seat againstwhich the valve spring bears, operation of the valve stem varying theforce exerted by said valve spring to thus vary the pressure differentialacross the valve at which the valve will open,whereby the pressure developed in the first chamber of the diaphragm pump,and hence the length of a diaphragm pumping stroke corresponding to arapid piston pump stroke, may thus be predeterminally varied by varyingthe spring force of the pressure-relief valve spring.10. The metering pulse pump of claim 9 including an outlet manifoldcommunicating with the piston pump downstream of the pressure-reliefvalve, and an outflow conduit communicating the outflow port of thediaphragm pump with the outlet manifold, whereby the additive liquidmetered by the diaphragm pump is added to the liquid pumped by the pistonpump.11. A metering pulse pump for metering an additive liquid into a liquidcarrier under high pressure and comprising:a multi-piston pump having inlet and outlet manifolds, the inlet manifoldcommunicating with a source of liquid carrier, the multi-piston pumpincluding a plurality of piston pumps each having an inlet and an outletcommunicating respectively with the inlet and outlet manifolds and eachcapable of rapid reciprocation through pumping in return strokes anddrawing substantially no vacuum at its outlet during the return strokes;at least one of the piston pumps having an associated diaphragm pump, thelatter having a housing and a diaphragm dividing the housing into a firstchamber communicating directly with the outlet of the piston pump and asecond chamber having an inflow port connectable to a source of additiveliquid and an outflow port through which additive liquid is metered, thediaphragm moving from a retracted position through its pumping stroke inresponse to pressure within the first chamber generated by the pistonpump, the inflow and outflow ports of the second chamber respectivelyhaving check valves permitting flow only into and out of the secondchamber and the outflow port having a conduit communicating with theoutlet manifold of the multi-piston pump to inject additive liquids intothe carrier liquid pumped by the multi-piston pump, the diaphragm pumpincluding a spring urging the diaphragm into its retracted position forreturning the diaphragm to the latter position following a pumping strokeand a manually closable bleeder duct communicating the first and secondchambers, the duct having a check valve permitting flow only from thefirst chamber to the second chamber when the duct is open;each piston pump which has an associated diaphragm pump additionallyincluding a unidirectional flow pressure-relief valve mounted at theoutlet of the piston pump to limit pressure developed in the first chamberof the diaphragm pump during a pumping stroke of the piston pump, thepressure-relief valve having a plug and a valve seat and a valve springbiasing the valve into a closed position, the valve including anexternally operable valve stem having an internal spring seat againstwhich the valve spring bears, operation of the valve stem varying theforce exerted by the valve spring to thus vary the pressure differentialacross the valve at which the valve will open,whereby the length of a diaphragm pumping stroke corresponding to a rapidpiston pump stroke may thus be predeterminally varied by varying thespring force of the pressure-relief valve.12. The metering pulse pump of claim 11 wherein said diaphragm pumpincludes confronting spring seats attached respectively to the diaphragmpump housing and the diaphragm, and a helical spring mounted between thespring seats."}
{"WKU":"039307573","Title":"Pressure equalizing pump","App_Date":"1975-03-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Eric A. Salo","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F04D 1708","References":"61650;2997015","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Pumping apparatus comprising a casing, a toroidal chamber defined by asurface within the casing, said chamber having angularly spaced inlet andoutlet openings a ring of reduced transverse cross-section disposed withinthe chamber, spaced discs on the ring, expansible rings carried by thediscs and disposed in engagement with said surface, said discs and ringsdividing said chamber into a plurality of separate compartments, and meansto rotatably drive said ring around said chamber comprising gear teethformed around said ring at one side thereof, each of said discs beingformed in part by one or more of said gear teeth, said expansible ringsbeing positioned within grooves formed in those teeth which form in partsaid discs.2. The apparatus of claim 1 including a drive housing connected to thecasing, and a drive gear rotatably mounted within the housing and disposedin mesh with the ring gear teeth.3. The apparatus of claim 2 including a liquid input conduit angularlyspaced from said housing and disposed in communication with said inletopening of said chamber and successively with said compartments as theyare moved thereby, a liquid output conduit angularly spaced from saidinput conduit and disposed in communication with said outlet opening ofsaid chamber and successively with said compartments as they are movedthereby, and a pressurized fluid supply conduit adapted to be disposed incommunication with said output conduit through said compartmentssuccessively to pump therefrom the liquid charges obtained from said inputconduit.4. The apparatus of claim 3 including one or more fluid discharge conduitsangularly spaced from said fluid supply conduit and disposed incommunication with said chamber and successively with said compartments asthey are moved thereby enabling the venting from said compartments ofpressurized fluid received from said supply conduit."}
{"WKU":"039307581","Title":"Means for lubricating swash plate air conditioning compressor","App_Date":"1974-03-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kwang H. Park","Assignee":"General Motors Corporation","ICL_Class":"F04B  112;F01M  100","References":"3057545;3215341;3380651;3577891;3750848;3801227;3838942","Claims":"I claim:1. In a compressor, a cylindrical casing element, a pair of cylinder blocksdisposed intermediate the ends of said cylindrical casing element defininga crankcase therebetween, front and rear cylinder heads disposed withinopposite ends of said cylindrical casing element, said rear cylinder headhaving an inlet suction line and an outlet discharge line, valve platemeans interposed between said cylinder heads and said cylinder blocks andhaving inlet and outlet ports therein, said cylinder heads each having acircular peripheral rib and an intermediate closed rib island defining aninner suction inlet chamber and an outer discharge outlet chamber adjacentsaid inlet and outlet ports respectively, the inlet and outlet chambers insaid rear cylinder head being in communication with said inlet suctionline and said outlet discharge line, respectively; a compressor driveshaft having its ends rotatably mounted in front and rear axially spacedbores of said cylinder blocks by means of front and rear needle journalbearings, said cylinder blocks having first passage means for conveyingcompressed gas between said head outlet chambers, each of said cylinderblocks each having a suction cavity in their outer end faces to providefront and rear suction cavities, said cylinder blocks having secondsuction crossover passage means therein for connecting said front and rearsuction cavities, said cylinder blocks having three pairs of alignedpumping chambers spaced radially outward from the central axis of saidshaft, three double ended pistons arranged to reciprocate withinassociated pairs of said pumping chambers, a swash plate disposed betweensaid cylinder blocks and secured to said shaft so as to rotate therewith,means whereby rotation of said swash plate imparts reciprocation to saiddouble ended pistons, front and rear drive shaft needle thrust bearingassemblies between said swash plate and the inner ends of said front andrear shaft bores so as to be in communication with the crankcase chamber,wherein the improvement comprising having the rear end surface of saidshaft spaced a defined distance from the inner surface of said rear valveplate means, the front end of said shaft extending through alignedopenings in said front valve plate means and through said front headsuction chamber whereby said front shaft bore is in communicationtherewith, said aligned openings of a sufficient diameter to permit oil toflow from said front shaft bore into said front head suction chamber, saidrear cylinder block having a radial slot formed in its outer transverseface providing communication between said rear suction cavity and theouter end of said rear shaft bore, whereby a differential suction pressuregradient is created therebetween which cooperates with the oilrefrigerantgas piston chamber blow-by during each compressive stroke of the pistonsto provide a first flow of lubricating oil through the compressor rearneedle thrust and journal bearings, said first oil flow being from saidcrankcase through said rear thrust bearings and rear journal bearings viasaid rear shaft bore for radially outward flow in said rear radial slotinto said rear suction cavity, and thence via said suction crossoverpassage into said front suction cavity for differential pressure flow intosaid front head suction chamber and thence via piston blow-by into saidfront piston chambers for differential pressure return to said crankcase,and said second oil flow being from said crankcase through said frontthrust and front journal bearings and thence via said front shaft borethrough said aligned shaft openings into said front head suction chamberfor return to said crankcase with said first oil flow.2. In a compressor, a cylindrical casing element, a pair of cylinder blocksdisposed intermediate the ends of said cylindrical casing element defininga crank case therebetween, front and rear cylinder heads disposed withinopposite ends of said cylindrical casing element, said rear cylinder headhaving an inlet suction line and an outlet discharge line, front and rearvalve plates interposed between said front and rear cylinder heads andsaid cylinder blocks respectively, and having inlet and outlet portstherein, said cylinder heads each having a circular peripheral rib and anintermediate closed rib island defining an inner suction inlet and anouter discharge chamber adjacent said inlet and outlet ports respectively,the inlet and outlet chambers in said rear cylinder head being incommunication with said inlet suction line and said outlet discharge line,respectively; a compressor drive shaft having its ends rotatably mountedin front and rear axially spaced bores of said cylinder blocks by means offront and rear bearings, said cylinder blocks having first passage meansfor conveying comprsssed gas between said head outlet chambers, each ofsaid cylinder blocks each having a suction cavity in their outer end facesto provide front and rear suction cavities, said cylinder blocks havingsecond suction crossover passage means therein for connecting said frontand rear suction cavities, said cylinder having six aligned pumpingchambers spaced radially outward from the central axis of said shaft,three double ended pistons arranged to reciprocate within said pumpingchambers, a swash plate disposed between said cylinder blocks and securedto said shaft so as to rotate therewith, means whereby rotation of saidswash plate imparts reciprocation to said double ended pistons, said frontand rear valve plate having three reed valves thereon for controlling thedischarge of gas through said outlet ports wherein the improvementcomprises said front head having a plurality of radial reinforcement ribsextending between said intermediate closed rib and said peripheral ribdefining three discharge gas pockets muffling sound energy in gasesflowing therethrough during operation of the compressor, said radial ribshaving notches therein to allow the gases to flow between said pockets tothe discharge line.3. In a compressor, a cylindrical casing element, a pair of cylinder blocksdisposed intermediate the ends of said cylindrical casing element defininga crankcase therebetween, front and rear cylinder heads disposed withinopposite ends of said cylindrical casing element, said rear cylinder headhaving an inlet suction line and an outlet discharge line, valve platemeans interposed between said cylinder heads and cylinder blocks andhaving inlet and outlet ports therein, said cylinder heads each having acircular peripheral rib and an intermediate closed rib island defining aninner suction inlet chamber and an outer discharge outlet chamber adjacentsaid inlet and outlet ports respectively, the inlet and outlet chambers insaid rear cylinder head being in communication with said inlet suctionline and said outlet discharge line, respectively; a compressor driveshaft having its ends rotatably mounted in front and rear axially spacedshaft bores of said cylinder blocks by means of front and rear journalbearing means, said cylinder blocks having first passage means forconveying compressed gas between said head outlet chambers, each of saidcylinder blocks each having a suction cavity in their outer end faces toprovide front and rear suction cavities, said cylinder blocks havingsecond suction crossover passage means therein for connecting said frontand rear suction cavities, said cylinder blocks having a plurality ofpaired aligned pumping chambers spaced radially outward from the centralaxis of said shaft, a double ended piston arranged to reciprocate withineach pair of the aligned pumping chambers, a swash plate disposed betweensaid cylinder blocks and secured to said shaft so as to rotate therewith,means whereby rotation of said swash plate imparts reciprocation to saiddouble ended pistons, front and rear drive shaft thrust bearing meansbetween said swash plate and the inner ends of said front and rear shaftbores so as to be in communication with the crankcase chamber, wherein theimprovement comprising having the rear end surface of said shaft spaced adefined distance from the inner surface of said rear valve plate means,the front end of said shaft extending through aligned openings in saidfront valve plate means and through said front head suction chamberwhereby said front shaft bore is in communication therewith, said alignedopenings of a sufficient diameter to permit oil to flow from said frontshaft bore into said front head suction chamber, said rear cylinder blockhaving a radial slot formed in its outer face providing communicationbetween said rear suction cavity and the outer end of said rear shaft borewhereby a differential suction pressure gradient is created therebetweenwhich cooperates with the oil-refrigerant gas piston chamber blow-byduring each compressive stroke of the pistons to provide a first flow oflubricating oil through the compressor rear thrust and journal bearingmeans, said first oil flow being from said crankcase through said rearthrust bearing means and rear journal bearing means via said rear shaftbore for generally upward flow in said rear radial slot into said rearsuction cavity, and thence via said suction crossover passge into saidfront suction cavity for differential pressure flow into said front headsuction chamber and thence via piston blow-by into said front pistonchambers for differential pressure return to said crankcase, and saidsecond oil flow being from said crankcase through said front thrust andfront journal bearing means via said front shaft bore, through saidaligned shaft openings into said front head suction chamber for return tosaid crankcase with said first oil flow."}
{"WKU":"039307590","Title":"Integral housing pump with servo controlled cheek plate","App_Date":"1974-06-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Gilbert H. Drutchas","Assignee":"TRW Inc.","ICL_Class":"F04B 4902","References":"2755741;2818813;3671143;3822965","Claims":"I claim as my invention:1. A positive displacement pump which comprises a one-piece housing havingan outlet and first and second cavities open at one end, a train of pumpcomponents in the first cavity including a cam ring defining an interiorpumping chamber with inlet and outlet sides, a rotor carrying pumpingmeans riding in the cam ring and a fluid pressure loaded cheek platepressed against one side of the cam ring, said first cavity providing astatic fluid pressure chamber behind said cheek plate, servo valvecomponents in the second cavity, a shaft rotatably carried by the housingcoupled to said rotor, a cup-shaped shell telescoped over the housingclosing the open end thereof and providing a fluid reservoir around thehousing, and passages in said housing from the reservoir to the inlet sideof the pumping chamber and from the outlet side of the pumping chamber tothe outlet, an orifice in the passage to the outlet, and passages in thehousing from the upstream side of said orifice to the second cavity, fromthe inlet side of the pumping chamber to the second cavity and from thestatic fluid pressure chamber to the second cavity whereby the servo valveis sensitive to pressure drop on opposite sides of the orifice andcontrols the unloading of the cheek plate and all components in thehousing are placed in operating fluid communication by housing passages.2. The pump of claim 1 wherein the cheek plate is positioned in the inboardend of the first cavity.3. The pump of claim 1 wherein the cheek plate is positioned in theoutboard end of the first cavity.4. The pump of claim 3 including a cover plate closing the outboard end ofthe first cavity and cooperating therewith to form a static fluid chamberbehind the cheek plate.5. The pump of claim 1 wherein the pumping means riding in the cam ring arespring loaded slippers.6. The pump of claim 1 wherein the train of pump components is bottomed ona snap ring in the first cavity.7. The pump of claim 1 including an additional passage connecting thesecond cavity to the downstream side of the orifice to aspirate fluid fromthe second cavity.8. An integral housing slipper pump adapted for automotive power steeringgear having a servo valve controlling an unloading plate to bypass fluidfor controlling pump flow output which comprises a housing with a largecavity and an adjacent smaller cavity, said cavities opened at one end ofthe housing and closed at the other end of the housing, a shell telescopedover said one end of the housing closing both cavities and forming areservoir around the housing, a shaft rotatably supported by said housing,a train of pump components in said large cavity of the housing including acam ring, end plates bottomed on both sides of the cam ring, a rotorcoupled to said shaft having fluid displacement means riding in said camring, and a spring biasing one of said end plates against the cam ring,said large cavity having a static fluid chamber behind said spring biasedend plate, a servo valve slidable in said small cavity, and core passagesin said housing joining the cavities to direct fluid for shifting theservo valve to control the unloading of fluid from the static chamber andthereby permit the spring loaded end plate to unseat from the cam ring fordirectly bypassing fluid from the inlet to the outlet sides of the camring.9. The slipper pump of claim 8 wherein the servo valve has a spring loadedcheek valve for relieving fluid from one end of the servo valve.10. The slipper pump of claim 8 wherein the servo valve is a spool valve,has an axial bore vented to the periphery thereof intermediate the endsthereof and has a spring loaded ball closing the mouth of the bore.11. The slipper pump of claim 8 including a cylindrical boss projectinginto the central portion of the large cavity and an annular cheek plateriding on said boss.12. The slipper pump of claim 8 wherein the housing is a metal casting andthe cavities and passages are formed in the casting."}
{"WKU":"039307603","Title":"Hydraulic pump incorporating means for limiting volume of flow","App_Date":"1974-02-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Klaus Winter","Assignee":"ITT Industries, Inc.","ICL_Class":"F04B 4900","References":"3465679;3600108;3813187","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a vane-type hydraulic pump, a rotor formed about a pump shaft withina pump housing, and flow control means for regulating discharge volume ofthe pump comprising an operating piston and a pressure relief valvedisposed in a concentric bore within walls of the pump shaft, inlet andoutlet means extending through said housing, duct means and chambersproviding paths through a pressure line interconnecting said inlet andoutlet means through walls of the piston and the pump shaft, means forsensing volume of flow in said pressure line and for providing thetransfer of pressure signals through ducts in said piston to govern theposition of said operating piston relative to an overflow line to therebycontrol volume of flow.2. The invention as claimed in claim 1, in which the overflow line includesa duct of restricted diameter through the pump shaft wall between theconcentric bore and the pressure line, whereby movement of the operatingpiston to open the overflow line permits pressure medium in the piston toflow into the pressure line to enhance the pump effect.3. The invention as claimed in claim 1, in which the means for sensingvolume of flow includes a duct in said pressure line which provides adifferential pressure between two chambers in the pressure line and ductmeans which couple said two chambers to respective sides of the operatingpiston within the concentric bore, said operating piston responding to aselected difference in pressure to open said overflow line and reducepressure in said pressure line.4. The invention as claimed in claim 1, in which the pump includes asuction chamber bounded by an annular collar spaced from the pump shaftand embracing it concentrically, said collar forming together with a sidewall of the pump housing an annular opening wherein there are terminatingessentially radially extending ducts provided in the pump shaft andforming the overflow line.5. The invention as claimed in claim 4, in which injection of a pressuremedium is provided by an annular port formed between the side wall of thepump housing and the annular collar, where the annular port enlargestowards a suction duct in the direction of rotation."}
{"WKU":"039307611","Title":"Portable and manually operable peristaltic pump","App_Date":"1972-12-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Keith S. Barraclough","Assignee":"The Boots Company, Ltd.","ICL_Class":"F04B 4308;A63H  318;A61M  500","References":"401950;424944;2527614;3318482;3353537;3649138;3674024;3786683","Claims":"I claim:1. A peristaltic pump comprising a portable housing capable of being heldin the hand and which carries means on an inner surface of the housingdefining an elongated surface, a tube leading across the housing incontact with the inner surface of the housing defining an elongatedsurface and that includes, near one end of the housing, a non-return valvethat allows fluid to flow only in the direction that leads away from thehousing, the tube being a flexible tube along at least that part of itslength in contact with the inner surface of the housing defining anelongated surface, a roller which is reciprocable along the flexible tube,means for squeezing the tube against the inner surface of the housing by aroller and thereby closing the tube and for moving the roller along thetube towards the non-return valve while thus squeezing the tube, means forcontinuously biasing the roller away from the non-return valve, and meansto withdraw the roller from squeezing contact with said tube during orsubsequent to its return to its initial position consisting of adepression in said inner surface of the housing defining an elongatedsurface at a point distant from the non-return valve, whereby the flexibletube returns substantially to its normal configuration while thenon-return valve closes."}
{"WKU":"039307620","Title":"Apparatus for use as a gas compressor or gas blower","App_Date":"1973-07-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John Maximilian Jules Varga","Assignee":"Carding Specialists (Canada) Limited","ICL_Class":"F04B  706;F04B 3910","References":"1729430;2422789;3230892","Claims":"What I claim is:1. A gas compressor or blower comprising a cylinder having air intake andexhaust ports; a piston which is rotatably and reciprocably movable in thecylinder; valve means for admitting air into and exhausting air from atleast one chamber lying to one side of the piston; a piston shaft to whichthe piston is secured, the piston shaft passing through seals at the axialends of the cylinder; means for applying a rotary drive to the piston rod;and a cam arrangement for causing reciprocation of the piston rod as itrotates; the arrangement of ports and valve means being such that as thepiston rotates and reciprocates air is induced into the chamber, iscompressed in the chamber and then exhausted from the chamber; means foraxially balancing the piston shaft comprising support means, and means formounting said cylinder on said support means so that said cylinder hasfree axial movement on said support means.2. A gas compressor or blower comprising a cylinder having air intake andexhaust ports; a piston which is rotatably and reciprocably movable in thecylinder; valve means for admitting air into and exhausting air from atleast one chamber lying to one side of the piston; a piston shaft to whichthe piston is secured, the piston shaft passing through seals at the axialends of the cylinder; means for applying a rotary drive to the piston rod;and a cam arrangement for causing reciprocation of the piston rod as itrotates; the arrangement of ports and valve means being such that as thepiston rotates and reciprocates air is induced into the chamber, iscompressed in the chamber and then exhausted from the chamber; said camarrangement comprising a first cam at a first end of the cylinder fordriving the piston shaft in a first axial direction and a second cam at asecond end of the cylinder for driving the piston shaft in a second axialdirection, each cam being a face cam secured to rotate with the pistonshaft and bearing on roller means carried at the respective end of thecylinder, each said roller means comprising two roller assemblies bearingon a common face cam, the roller assemblies being opposed by 180.degree.and spaced equidistantly from the center line of the piston shaft, andboth roller assemblies mounted on a carrier which is mounted on thecylinder for pivotal movement about an axis perpendicular to the axis ofthe piston shaft.3. A gas compressor or blower comprising a cylinder having air intake andexhaust ports; a piston which is rotatably and reciprocably movable in thecylinder; valve means for admitting air into and exhausting air from atleast one chamber lying to one side of the piston; a piston shaft to whichthe piston is secured, the piston shaft passing through seals at the axialends of the cylinder; means for applying a rotary drive to the piston rod;and a cam arrangement for causing reciprocation of the piston rod as itrotates; the arrangement of ports and valve means being such that as thepiston rotates and reciprocates air is induced into the chamber, iscompressed in the chamber and then exhausted from the chamber; the meansfor applying rotary drive to the piston shaft comprising projectionsextending axially from and spaced radially from an end member secured tothe piston shaft, a drive shaft, and means rotatable with the drive shaftand bearing on the projections to drive the piston shaft in the same senseas the drive shaft while allowing axial movement of the piston shaftrelative to the drive shaft; said projections spaced equidistantly to eachside of the piston shaft and the means rotatable with the drive shaftapplies equal force to each of the projections and comprises a bell cranklever, a first lever having a first end and a second end and pivoted to afirst arm of the bell crank lever and bearing at said first end on a firstone of said projections, a second lever having a first end and a secondend and pivoted to a second arm of the bell crank lever and bearing at afirst end on a second one of said projections, said first and secondlevers bearing against each other at said second ends, the moment arm fromthe pivot point of each lever to its point of contact with the respectiveprojection being equal to the moment arm from said pivot point to thepoint of contact with the other lever."}
{"WKU":"039307638","Title":"Rotary cell pump for the conveying of sausage stuffing and the like","App_Date":"1973-09-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Heinz Rose","Assignee":"VEMAG Verdener Maschinen-und Apparatebau GmbH","ICL_Class":"F01C 1300","References":"1607383;1626973;2287369;2368572;2512593;2653548;2759664;2907307;3115871;3381668;3543330;3631565;3742556","Claims":"The invention is claimed as follows:1. A rotary pump for pumping material mixed with air comprising; astationary hub and a stator surrounding the hub in concentric spacedrelation therewith, a rotor disposed between said hub and said stator andeccentric relative to said hub and stator, said rotor with said hub andsaid stator comprising an inner material pump chamber and an outer airremoval pump chamber respectively, said inner pump chamber receivingmaterial having entrapped air therewith, means providing an inlet to saidinner pump chamber to receive material and entrapped air therein, andmeans providing an outlet from said inner pump chamber and means to forcesaid material therefrom and fluid flow means connected between said innerand outer chambers to extract entrapped air from the material within saidinner chamber, means for venting said outer chamber.2. A pump according to claim 1 wherein the inlet means and the outlet meansboth extend generally in the same direction axially of said hub.3. A pump as set forth in claim 2 wherein the hub and stator axes areinclined at substantially 45.degree. to the vertical, and wherein theinlet means and the outlet means are provided with branches respectivelysubstantially vertical and substantially horizontal.4. A pump as set forth in claim 1 wherein the outer pump chamber comprisesan air pump, and means providing a connection for the said inner chamberand said outer pump chambers for pumping air from the material mix.5. A pump as set forth in claim 1 wherein the pump has a housing with abottom plate at least part of which rotates with the rotor.6. A pump as set forth in claim 5 wherein the rotor bottom part of thehousing is integral with the rotor."}
{"WKU":"039307646","Title":"Air tool overspeed shutoff device","App_Date":"1974-12-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"George R. Curtiss","Assignee":"Cooper Industries, Inc.","ICL_Class":"F01C 2112;G05D 1310","References":"2586968;3257913;3279485;3749530","Claims":"I claim:1. In a rotary tool having a pneumatic motor, a rotary shaft connected tothe motor, means defining a first inlet port through which pressurized airis supplied to drive the motor, a centrifugally operated rotatably drivengovernor including a valve cooperating with said first port to control theflow of air through said first port in relation to the rotational speed ofsaid governor, and means defining a second inlet port, downstream of saidgovernor, through which pressurized air from the first port travels to themotor, the improvement of a safety overspeed device operable to shut offthe motor in response to a predetermined motor speed level, comprisingvalve closure means for engaging and closing the second inlet port, saidclosure means being slidably mounted for axial movement on the shaft andspaced from the second inlet port in normal operation, means connected tothe shaft for rotating said closure means in its normal operatingposition, and means responsive to centrifugal force associated with apredetermined motor speed for moving said closure means toward and intoengagement with the second inlet port.2. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said rotating means further includesmeans for releasing the closure means from rotation with the shaft inresponse to axial translation of the closure means toward the inlet port.3. In a rotary tool having a pneumatic motor, a rotary shaft connected tothe motor, means defining a first inlet port through which pressurized airis supplied to drive the motor, a centrifugally operated rotatably drivengovernor incuding a valve cooperating with said first port to control theflow of air through said first port in relation to the rotational speed ofsaid governor, and means defining a second inlet port, downstream of saidgovernor, through which pressurized air from the first port travels to themotor, the improvement of a safety overspeed device operable to shut offthe motor in response to a predetermined motor speed level, comprising avalve closure means in the path of airflow upstream of said second inletport for engaging and closing the second inlet port, said closure meansbeing slidably mounted on the shaft for axial movement with respectthereto and positioned in spaced, upstream relationship to the secondinlet port in normal operation, means connected to the shaft for rotatingthe closure means in its normal operating position and for releasing theclosure means from rotation with the shaft in response to axialtranslation of the closure means toward the second air inlet port, meansretaining the closure means in its position spaced from the second airinlet port in normal operation, and means responsive to centrifugal forceassociated with a predetermined motor speed for releasing said retainingmeans, whereby, when said predetermined motor speed is reached, said valveclosure means is moved by a pressure differential between its upstream anddownstream sides toward and into engagement with the second inlet port toshut off the motor.4. In a rotary tool having a pneumatic motor, an inlet port through whichpressurized air is supplied to drive the motor, and a rotary shaftconnected to the motor, the improvement of a safety overspeed deviceoperable to shut off the motor in response to a predetermined motor speedlevel, comprising a valve closure means for engaging and closing the inletport, said closure means being slidably mounted for axial movement on saidshaft and positioned in spaced relationship from the inlet port in normaloperation, means connected to the shaft for rotating the valve closuremeans in its normal operating position, means axially urging the valveclosure means toward the inlet port, a groove extending in acircumferential direction in the shaft, a wire extending transversely tothe shaft and operable to engage said groove and retain the valve closuremeans in its position spaced from the inlet port, means affixing one endof the wire to the valve closure means, means biasing the wire toward thegroove, and means responsive to centrifugal force associated with apredetermined motor speed for pulling the wire out of the groove, whereby,when said predetermined motor speed is reached, said valve closure meansis moved by said urging means toward and into engagement with the inletport to shut off the motor.5. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said urging means comprises thepositioning of the valve closure means in the path of airflow upstream ofthe inlet port, whereby, when said predetermined motor speed is reached,the valve closure means is moved by a pressure differential between itsupstream and downstream sides toward the inlet port.6. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said centrifugal responsive meanscomprises a weight slidable along the wire toward the end of the wireopposite said one end, a bend in the wire between the shaft and the weightdefining a generally radial orientation of said opposite end of the wire,and means biasing the weight radially inwardly on the wire, whereby, whencentrifugal force associated with said predetermined motor speed acts onthe weight, the weight is urged radially outwardly sufficiently toovercome the bias force on said spring wire, thereby translating theweight in a circumferential as well as a radial direction to pull the wireout of the groove in the shaft.7. The apparatus of claim 6 wherein the direction of rotation of saidoverspeed device is opposite said circumferential direction of movement ofthe weight, and wherein said overspeed device further includes guide meansfor restricting the movement of the weight to a radial direction during aninitial portion of the outward travel of the weight."}
{"WKU":"039307654","Title":"Rotary displacement pumps","App_Date":"1974-02-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William Edmund Waite","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F04C  106;F04C 1706","References":"3340814","Claims":"I claim:1. In a rotary positive displacement pump of the internally-meshing screwkind having a stator, a rotor and a chamber at one end of the stator thechamber being defined by a surrounding wall; the improvement comprisingdrive means for the rotor comprising an elongated connecting member ofcircular cross section, one end of said member being rigidly secured tothe rotor and extending into said chamber, a bearing for said connectingmember within said chamber, the connecting member, near its end remotefrom the rotor, passing through said bearing, a resilient support memberfor said bearing, said resilient support member being liquid-impermeableand having the form of a frustum of a cone extending completely around andhaving its smaller end sealed to the bearing, the support member at itslarger end being sealed also to the wall of said chamber thereby to form afluidtight barrier between the bearing and said wall of the chamber, adrive shaft, first and second universal joints, and a connecting rodbetween said universal joints, said connecting member at the end beyondsaid bearing being connected by said first universal joint to saidconnecting rod, which connecting rod is connected by said second universaljoint to said drive shaft, said chamber being elongated, said connectingmember being secured to the rotor at one end of said chamber, said bearingbeing disposed at the other end of said chamber, and an inlet for materialto be pumped opening into said chamber between said bearing and said oneend of said chamber, said connecting member having a length to diameterratio greater than three and extending at least most of the length of saidchamber.2. A pump as claimed in claim 1 wherein a seal is provided around theconnecting member adjacent the bearing to prevent any ingress of fluidalong the shaft into the bearing.3. A pump as claimed in claim 1 wherein said chamber is of generallycylindrical form and has an annular wall with an end flange at the endremote from said rotor and wherein an end wall extends at least partlyacross that end of said chamber, said end wall having an aperture for saiddrive means, and wherein said resilient support member has an annularflange which is clamped between said end wall and said end flange on saidannular wall of the chamber."}
{"WKU":"039307662","Title":"Radial balancing means for a hydraulic device","App_Date":"1974-12-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Nils Einar Swedberg","Assignee":"Eaton Corporation","ICL_Class":"F01C  102;F03C  300;F04C  102","References":"3389618;3591320;3680987;3692439","Claims":"Having thus defined my invention, I claim:1. An internally-toothed member for use in a rotary fluid pressure deviceof the geroter type, said internally-toothed member comprising a ringmember having a plurality of substantially semi-cylindrical pocketstherein, a substantially cylindrical roller received in each of saidpockets, each of said pockets having a configured surface includingaxially-extending recesses therein and roller support surfacesintermediate said recesses, said roller support surfaces defining at leastone groove communicating between adjacent recesses.2. The device of claim 1 wherein said recesses are symmetrically spacedabout the centerline of said pockets.3. Pressure-balancing means in a hydraulic device of the geroter typehaving an internally-toothed ring member with a plurality of spaced,axially-extending pockets formed along its internal periphery and a rollerloosely disposed in each pocket to define the teeth thereof, anexternally-toothed star member having less teeth than said ring member andeccentrically disposed within said ring member, said ring and said starmember cooperating with one another to define increasing and decreasingvolume chambers, the improvement comprising:each of said pockets having a plurality of axially-extending recessestherein spaced symmetrically about the centerline of said pocket, andmeans for communicating pressure between said recesses, and saidcommunicating means comprising at least one land between said recesses,said land adapted to support said roller and defining groovescommunicating said recesses with each other.4. The improvement of claim 3 wherein each pocket has a circularcross-sectional configuration extending beyond 180.degree. and saidrecesses which comprise two in number are spaced apart from one anotherless than 180.degree. to define two opposed circular leading edge supportsurfaces, each edge surface adjacent at one end to the internal peripheryof said ring member and adjacent at its other end to a recess.5. The improvement of claim 4 wherein said roller support surface and saidleading edge surfaces are radially-aligned.6. A rotary fluid pressure device comprising:a housing having inlet and outlet ports;an internally-toothed ring member disposed within said housing, and anexternally-toothed star member having less teeth than said ring member andeccentrically disposed within said ring member to define a line ofeccentricity passing through the axes of said members;one of said members having a plurality of generally semi-cylindricalpockets and a generally cylindrical roller disposed within each pocket todefine the teeth thereof;said teeth of said members intermeshing as one member orbits about the axisof the other to define expanding volume chambers on one side of said lineand contracting volume chambers on the other side of said line;valving means communicating with said inlet and outlet ports to supply highpressure to those chambers on one side of said line and low pressure tothose chambers on the other side of said line;balancing means biasing a roller momentarily positioned between a volumechamber at high pressure and a volume chamber at low pressure by exertingfluid pressure about the pocket centerline in a substantially symmetricaldistribution which extends over a portion of the pocket periphery;said balancing means comprising a plurality of axially-extending recessesdefined by said pocket, said recesses being symmetrically spaced about thepocket periphery in relation to the pocket centerline;the spacing between adjacent recesses defining at least one roller supportsurface and at least one depressed area in said roller support surfacecommunicating adjacent recesses with one another; andsaid pocket further defined by diametrically-opposed leading support edgesurfaces extending from the recesses furthest-removed from the pocketcenterline to the internal periphery of said ring member."}
{"WKU":"039307670","Title":"Circular rotor side seal for rotary machines","App_Date":"1974-07-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jack A. Hart","Assignee":"General Motors Corporation","ICL_Class":"F01C 1904;F01C 1908;F04C 2700","References":"3193188;3251541;3827835;3853439","Claims":"I claim:1. In a rotary machine comprising a housing having a cavity; a rotordisposed in said cavity; said rotor having a plurality of adjoining andintersecting peripheral faces and a pair of opposite side faces; an apexseal at each intersection of said peripheral faces; an output shaftrotatably supported by said housing and having an eccentric rotatablysupporting said rotor; said rotor peripheral faces, said rotor side facesand said housing cooperatively defining a plurality of sealed variablevolume working chambers spaced around said rotor that move with said rotorwithin said housing, an intake port periodically connected to said workingchambers as said rotor rotates, an exhaust port periodically connected toeach of said working chambers as said rotor rotates; the improvementcomprising: said rotor side faces having circular seal grooves formedtherein; a circular compression seal assembly mounted in each groove; acorner seal assembly at each intersection of said rotor peripheral faces,said corner seal assemblies being of substantial size and containing asegment of said circular seal grooves and said compression sealassemblies, said corner seal assemblies also containing a portion of saidapex seals, and a plug seal assembly mounted in each of said corner sealcircular seal groove segments in sealing relationship with each saidcompression seal assembly therein thereby providing a complete side sealarrangement permitting sealing of said working chambers.2. In a rotary internal combustion engine comprising a housing includingend walls and central member having a two-lobed internal peripheralsurface, the end walls and said surface defining a cavity; a triangularlyshaped rotor having three apices disposed in said cavity; said rotorhaving three peripheral faces intersecting at said apices and having apair of opposite side faces facing said housing end walls; an apex sealmounted in an axial groove in said rotor at each apex; an output shaftrotatably supported by said housing and having an eccentric rotatablysupporting said rotor; said rotor peripheral faces, said rotor side facesand said housing end walls cooperatively defining a plurality of sealedvariable volume working chambers spaced around said rotor and moving withsaid rotor as it rotates within said cavity; intake and exhaust ports insaid housing periodically connected to each of said working chambers assaid rotor rotates; the improvement comprising: said rotor side faceshaving circular seal grooves formed therein; a spring positioned in thebottom of each seal groove; a circular seal ring positioned in each ofsaid seal grooves and being biased outwardly of said rotor side faces bysaid springs forming compression seals; a circular corner button sealpositioned in a like recess in said rotor side face at each rotor apex,said recess being sufficiently large in diameter to intersect the path ofsaid circular seal grooves and said apex seal grooves at each rotor apex;said button seal containing a segment of said circular seal grooves, and aplug seal assembly mounted in each of said button seal circular sealgroove segments in sealing relationship with each said seal ring thereinwhereby said apex seals, said button seals, said plug seal assemblies andsaid circular side compression seals complete a rotor side sealarrangement permitting sealing of said working chambers.3. In a rotary internal combustion engine comprising a housing includingend walls and central member having a two-lobed internal peripheralsurface, the end walls and said surface defining a cavity; a triangularlyshaped rotor having three apices disposed in said cavity; said rotorhaving three peripheral faces intersecting at said apices and having apair of opposite side faces facing said housing end walls; an apex sealmounted in an axial groove in said rotor at each apex; an output shaftrotatably supported by said housing and having an eccentric rotatablysupporting said rotor; said rotor peripheral faces, said rotor side facesand said housing end walls cooperatively defining a plurality of sealedvariable volume working chambers spaced around said rotor and moving withsaid rotor as it rotates within said cavity; intake and exhaust ports insaid housing periodically connected to each of said working chambers assaid rotor rotates; the improvement comprising: said rotor side faceshaving circular seal grooves formed therein; a circular wave springmounted in each groove; a circular compression seal ring mounted in eachgroove upon said wave springs and being biased outwardly of said groovesthereby; said rotor having cylindrical recesses in said side facesadjacent each apex; said cylindrical recesses being of sufficient diameterto extend across said seal grooves and said apex seal grooves; a cornerbutton spring mounted in each of said recesses; a corner button sealmounted in each of said cylindrical recesses upon said springs and beingbiased outwardly of said cylindrical recesses thereby for continualengagement with said housing end walls; said button seals each containinga segment of said circular seal grooves and having a recessed area intheir outer faces reducing the force required to obtain the continualengagement with said housing end walls; said button seals containing aplug seal cylindrical hole in each of said seal groove segments; a springdisposed in the bottom of each of said plug seal holes; and a plug sealslidably received in each of said holes and each containing a groovereceiving respective seal rings providing a seal underneath said rings;said button seals providing a closed sealed path from said circular sealrings outwardly across said button seals to said apex seals thereby fluidsealing each working chamber from its adjoining chambers."}
{"WKU":"039307689","Title":"Blow-head for tubular film","App_Date":"1974-02-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Werner Josef Zimmermann;Hartmut Upmeier","Assignee":"Windmoller & Holscher","ICL_Class":"B29D 2304","References":"3647339","Claims":"We claim:1. A sheet blow head for the manufacture of sheet tubes from athermoplastic material with central melt feed line and with distributingbores that extend radially from it to the blow head casing, and which openinto one distributing helical member of the blow head insert forming anincreasingly larger overflow gap with the blow head casing, wherein thedistributing bores take their course in the generated surface of anobtuse-angled cone, and an internal air cooling system, the improvementcomprising channels supplying and exhausting interior air consisting ofconcentric pipes that penetrate the blow head axially, while the co-axialair supply channels are connected with the pertinent air conduits outsidethe blow head via, at least, one feed pipe and outlet pipe, each whichextend substantially vertically through the generated surface of the coneand between adjoining distributor bores.2. A blowhead for producing tubular film from thermoplastic molten materialcomprising:a housing with a central supply conduit for the molten material;an insert member inserted into said housing having a plurality ofdistributing helices which form with said housing an overflow gap locateddownstream of said helices;distributing means for conducting molten material from said central supplyconduit to said plurality of distributing helices comprising a pluralityof distributing passages having one end connected to said central supplyconduit and the other end connected to one of said plurality of helices,said one ends being connected to said central supply conduit so that saidplurality of distributing passages form the conical surface of anobtuse-angled cone and radiate from said central supply conduit with saidcentral supply conduit coincident with the apex of said obtuse-angledconical surface; andmeans for internally cooling blown film comprising concentric air inlet andoutlet passages extending axially of said housing, and at least one inlettube connected to said inlet passage and one outlet tube having one endconnected to said outlet passage, said one ends being connected to saidconcentric air inlet and outlet passages and extending to the exterior ofthe housing intersecting the conical surface of said obtuse-angled cone atsubstantially right angles.3. A blow head according to claim 2 wherein there is an equal even numberof distributing passages and tubes and wherein the inlet and outlet tubesare provided in an alternating arrangement.4. A blow head according to claim 2, wherein the at least one inlet tubeand said at least one outlet tube constitute the diverging branches of abreeches pipe of which one leg is disposed centrally of the housing anddefines the said air outlet passage, and wherein the at least one inlettube opens into a collecting chamber leading to the said air inlet passagewhich is disposed concentrically around the leg of the breeches pipe andis connected to an internal air nozzle of the blowhead."}
{"WKU":"039307697","Title":"Process and apparatus for producing a thin dough material","App_Date":"1975-04-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Karl Gunther","Assignee":"Vereinigte Nahrungsmittelindustrie Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"A21C  302","References":"2132713;2892422;2899201;3064590;3577586;3610500;3708831","Claims":"I claim:1. Apparatus for producing a thin dough material from stretchable doughs,particularly doughs rich in gluten, comprisinga. rolling means for rolling the dough in a first direction into a flatsheet having a thickness exceeding the thickness of the final doughmaterial to be produced,b. means for continuously conveying said dough sheet from said rollingmeans while stretching said rolled sheet of dough in a second directionsubstantially transverse to said first direction,c. means for continuously conveying said dough sheet from said stretchingmeans while clamping the edges of said rolled and stretched dough sheet tomaintain said rolled stretched dough sheet in substantially its moststretched condition, andd. means for removing moisture from said rolled stretched dough sheet, at arate greater than it would be removed by mere evaporation by exposure toambient air, while said sheet is maintained in its stretched condition sothat the moisture content of the dough sheet is lowered and the finaldesired dough material is produced.2. Apparatus as recited in claim 1 wherein said dough sheet is conveyed bysaid clamping and conveying means a distance at least twice as great asthe distance said dough sheet is conveyed by said stretching and conveyingmeans during stretching thereof.3. Apparatus as recited in claim 1 wherein said means for stretching saidrolled dough sheet includes means for clamping said dough arranged instraight line diverging paths.4. Apparatus as recited in claim 3 wherein the extent of divergence of saidpaths is from 1/3 to 1/7 of the length of said paths.5. Apparatus as recited in claim 4 wherein the extent of divergence of saidpaths is 1/5 the length of said paths.6. Apparatus as recited in claim 3 wherein said clamping means associatedwith said stretching means, and said clamping means for maintaining saidstretched sheet in a stretched condition are driven by a continuouslyspeed adjustable drive means.7. Apparatus as recited in claim 3 wherein said stretching means clampingmeans includes a plurality of pairs of V-belts arranged in said divergingpaths, each pair comprising an upper belt and a lower belt, and means forresiliently pressing said belts together.8. Apparatus as recited in claim 7 wherein said means for resilientlypressing said belts together include resiliently loaded rollers spacedfrom one another above the upper belts, and wherein the lower belts run onstationary rollers of a roller chain.9. Apparatus as recited in claim 7 further comprising a layer of feltmaterial provided on the surfaces of said belts cooperating with saiddough sheet.10. Apparatus as recited in claim 1 wherein said means for removingmoisture from said sheet include a heating member for blowing hot air onsaid sheet.11. Apparatus as recited in claim 1 wherein said means for removingmoisture from said sheet includes an endless band of absorptive material.12. Apparatus as recited in claim 11 wherein said band of absorptivematerial is arranged between shaped sheet edge engaging portions of saidclamping means and is driven at substantially the same speed as saidclamping conveying means.13. Apparatus as recited in claim 1 wherein said clamping and conveyingmeans includes two pairs of clamping members for clamping the edges ofsaid sheet, each pair clamping a sheet edge, said two pairs of clampingmembers being driven at substantially the same speed.14. Apparatus as recited in claim 13 wherein said stretching means includeclamping means, said clamping means of said stretching means overlappingsaid clamping members of said clamping and conveying means.15. Apparatus as recited in claim 3 wherein said stretching means clampingmeans includes paired plate chain members."}
{"WKU":"039307700","Title":"Expandable poincon method and apparatus","App_Date":"1975-02-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"David Alvin Gaudet;John Moss Wathen, Jr.","Assignee":"American Can Company","ICL_Class":"B29F  110","References":"2100985;2644198;2763910;3020594;3110931;3125801;3313875;3330006;3373479","Claims":"We claim:1. Apparatus for molding a headpiece on a tubular body, comprising:a female forming member having a surface defining a mold cavity with anopening thereinto, said cavity being configured to define the externalsurface of a headpiece;a washer configured to define at least a portion of the internal surface ofa headpiece, said washer being expandable to dispose a continuousperipheral portion thereof in close proximity to said cavity-definingsurface;means for disposing said washer within said cavity of said forming memberadjacent said opening thereinto said female forming member and said washercooperatively defining at least a portion of a head-piece forming space insaid apparatus;means for expanding said washer; andmeans for introducing a flowable synthetic resinous material into saidheadpiece-forming space, said apparatus being adapted to receive anopen-ended tubular body with the open end thereof seated within saidcavity adjacent said opening thereinto, and with said washer at leastpartially disposed within the tubular body adjacent its open end so that,upon expansion of said washer, said peripheral portion thereof may beurged into sealing engagement with the inner surface of the tubular body,in turn urging the outer surface of the tubular body into sealingengagement with said cavity-defining surface, the tubular body therebysealing said forming space and cooperatively defining a mold cavitytherewith, for forming a headpiece on the body.2. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said female forming member has apassageway thereinto at a location spaced from said opening, to providesaid resin-introducing means.3. Apparatus for molding a headpiece on a tubular body, comprising:a female forming member having a mold cavity with an opening thereinto,said cavity being configured to define the external surface of aheadpiece;a male member supported for movement between a withdrawn position, and aninserted position with one end disposed within said cavity;a generally conical hollow washer disposed on said male member adjacentsaid one end thereof and configured to define therewith the internalsurface of a headpiece, said washer being expandable to dispose, in saidinserted position of said male member, a continuous circumferentialportion thereof in close proximity to the cavity-defining surface of saidforming member adjacent said opening and to define, in cooperation withsaid cavity-defining surface, a headpiece-forming space therebetween;means for expanding said washer; andmeans for introducing a flowable synthetic resinous material into saidheadpiece-forming space, said male member being adapted for mounting of anopen-ended tubular body thereon with said washer disposed therewithinadjacent an open end thereof, and said female member being adapted toreceive the body with the open end thereof seated within said cavityadjacent said opening thereinto so that, in said inserted position of saidmale member, said circumferential portion of said washer may be urged bysaid expanding means into sealing engagement with the inner surface of thebody, in turn urging the outer surface of the body into sealing engagementwith said cavity-defining surface, the tubular body thereby sealing saidforming space and cooperatively defining a mold cavity therewith, forforming a headpiece on the body.4. The apparatus of claim 3 wherein said female forming member has apassageway thereinto at a location spaced from said opening, to providesaid resin-introducing means.5. The apparatus of claim 3 wherein said male member comprises an elongatedbody having an axial bore extending therethrough, and a post slidablyreceived therewithin and having an end portion protruding from a first endthereof at said one end of said member, wherein said washer is mounted onsaid end portion of said post with its apex disposed away from saidelongated body, and wherein said first end of said body is configured tospread said washer upon engagement therewith, so that relative slidingmovement of said post toward said elongated body may cause said washer toengage said first end, to thereby effect expansion of said washer.6. The apparatus of claim 5 wherein said male member has at least onechannel extending from said axial bore to an outer surface thereof, andwherein said axial bore communicates with an air source, so that air maybe supplied through said channel to said outer surface of said malemember, to thereby lubricate said male member and assist in the facilemounting of a tubular body thereon."}
{"WKU":"039307719","Title":"Apparatus for manufacturing a dual seal insulator","App_Date":"1974-08-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John E. Meyn","Assignee":"Microdot Inc.","ICL_Class":"B29D  300","References":"1982279;2369291;2382200;2983958;3254372;3543337;3754846","Claims":"I claim:1. An apparatus for simultaneously molding a seal on each end of a plasticinsert having first and second end faces and multiple bores extendingtherebetween; first means cooperating with the first end face to define afirst cavity shaped to the configuration desired for one of the seals;said first means cooperating with the second end face to define a secondcavity shaped to the configuration desired for another of the seals;second means for sealing the bores in the insert which are of twodifferent diameters, the ends of said second means of one diameterextending across the first cavities, the ends of said second means of theother diameter extending across said second cavities, and third means forpressing a curable elastomeric material into the first cavity to occupythe area about said second means therein; the edge of the insert has atleast one passage between the first and second cavities.2. An apparatus as recited in claim 1 wherein the insert has at least oneportion which defines at the periphery of the insert at least onelongitudinal recess extending between the end faces thereof, the portioncooperating with the first means to define the passage between andcommunicating with the first and second cavities.3. A combination as recited in claim 2 wherein a plurality of longitudinalrecesses are provided in the edge of the insert to form a plurality ofpassageways which function as keyways which orient the insert in aconnector.4. The apparatus as recited in claim 1 wherein the first means comprises:first wall portions in substantial contact with the circumference of theinsert;second wall portions extending from the first wall portions to at leastpartially define the first mold cavity;third wall portions extending from the first wall portion to at leastpartially define the second mold cavity;the first wall portions including at least one longitudinal recess whichcooperates with the insert to at least partially define the passage.5. In an apparatus for simultaneously molding at least first and secondseals into a multiple bore insert, mold means having characteristics forenclosing the insert and cooperating with the insert to define first andsecond cavities; a multiplicity of like contact elements having theforward and rearward ends of different diameter for sealing the top andbottom edges of the bores in the insulator and with the ends of onediameter extending across the first said cavities, and the ends of theother diameter extending across the second cavities; means for chargingthe first cavities with a curable elastomeric material whereby thematerial fills the spaces among the contact elements in the first cavityto form the first seal; the insert having portions which at leastpartially define a plurality of passages extending from the first cavityinto the second cavity whereby the charging of the first cavity forces aportion of the material through the passages into the second cavity toform the second seal having apertures of different diameter in theelastomeric material at opposite ends of the insert.6. An apparatus as recited in claim 5 wherein the mold means comprises:first wall portions shaped in the configuration the first seal andcooperating with the insert to form the first cavity;second wall portions shaped in the configuration of the second seal andcooperating with the insert to form the second cavity; andthird wall portions disposed between the first and second wall portions andin juxtaposition to the insert, said third wall portions cooperating withthe insert to define the passages.7. An apparatus for receiving a multiple bore rigid insert and molding aseal onto each of the ends thereof, comprising: first wall portionsconfigured to contact the edge of an insert; second wall portionscooperating with one end of said insert to define a first mold cavity;third wall portions cooperating with another end of said insert to definea second mold cavity; a plurality of contact elements having one end ofgreater diameter than the other, the ends of different diameters sealingthe top and bottom ends of the insert bores; the ends of the contactelements of smaller diameter extending across the first mold cavity, theends of the contact elements of greater diameter extending across thesecond mold cavities."}
{"WKU":"039307727","Title":"Manufacture of conjugate filaments","App_Date":"1974-04-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"David Anthony Rees;Desmond Alfred Price","Assignee":"Imperial Chemical Industries Limited","ICL_Class":"B29C 2300","References":"3457342;3672802;3778208","Claims":"We claim:1. Apparatus for the production of conjugate filaments comprising aspinneret plate having an upper surface and containing extrusion orificesformed therethrough, a member to which viscous liquid polymers have accessfrom all sides located on the upper surface of said spinneret plate andhaving narrow channels formed therein, each channel extending from a sideof said member in a direction substantially perpendicular to the extrusionorifices and terminating in a closed end portion, each end portion beingconnected to a separate extrusion orifice formed below said end portion,and means located above and in contact with said member for supplyingviscous liquid polymers to the upper surface of said spinneret plate inthe form of superposed layers.2. Apparatus as in claim 1 wherein said member is integral with saidspinneret plate.3. Apparatus as in claim 1 wherein the means for supplying the polymercomponents as superposed layers comprises a plate in contact with saidmember located on the spinneret surface and defining a confined spaceabove said spinneret plate, which plate permits the polymer components toflow as a band-like composite stream around the periphery thereof into thesaid confined space to form superposed layers.4. Apparatus as in claim 1 wherein the means for supplying the polymercomponents as superposed layers comprises an upper and lower platecontaining axially aligned orifices, the lower plate being in contact withthe member on the surface of the spinneret plate, means for supplying onepolymer component between the said plates and a polymer supply meanslocated behind the upper plate and in communication with the orificestherein to permit streams of polymer in a sheath/core configuration to bedirected on to the upper surface of the spinneret plate.5. Apparatus for the production of conjugate filaments comprising aspinneret plate having an upper surface and containing extrusion orificesformed therethrough, said upper surface having a raised portion with sidesand containing channels therein, and means located above and in contactwith said sides for supplying two viscous liquids in the form of twosuperposed layers thereto, each of said channels extending from a side ofthe raised portion in a direction perpendicular to the extrusion orificesand terminating in a closed end portion having an extrusion orificelocated therein."}
{"WKU":"039307735","Title":"Machine for making cinnamon rolls and the like","App_Date":"1974-05-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Harry H. Bundschuh","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A21C 1118","References":"2905110;2982231;3286661;3314381","Claims":"I claim:1. A machine for making cinnamon rolls and the like comprising:a dough hopper;a hollow piston having an open end connected to said hopper and the outerend having one-way means therein;a fixed cylinder operatively within which said piston is mounted, saidcylinder having a substantially closed end with at least one open bottomeddough discharge outlet therein;spiral pass-through form means operatively mounted in said discharge outletto receive and form dough expressed therethrough in a spiral shape;said spiral means comprising a rigid planar spiral strap having a loweredge defining a plane coincident with the bottom of said dough dischargeoutlet, and an apertured fluid distribution tube integral with the upperedge of said strap;means to inject flavored fluid into said fluid distribution tube;means to reciprocate said hopper and piston relative to said fixedcylinder, whereby dough is expressed through said spiral form means; andcut-off means operatively mounted to move across said discharge outlet andthe lower edge of said spiral form means for periodically cutting offdough expressed through said spiral form means, whereby said strap servesas a positioning wall to maintain the shape of the expressed dough whilecutting.2. A machine according to claim 1 wherein said fixed cylinder, pass-throughform means, means to reciprocate, and means to inject are connectedtogether as parts of a unitary removable assembly.3. A machine according to claim 2 and wherein said cut-off means is alsoconnected as a part of said removable assembly."}
{"WKU":"039307743","Title":"Extruder controller","App_Date":"1973-07-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ronald W. Brand;Richard A. Forbes;Robert L. Heiks;Bruce A. Huber","Assignee":"Industrial Nucleonics Corporation","ICL_Class":"B29D  306","References":"3286302;3307215;3399262","Claims":"We claim:1. In an apparatus for controlling an extruder system responsive to asupply of input material, said extruder system including a screw forfeeding the input material through an extruder and means for taking asheet product formed by the extruder away from the extruder, said screwand means for taking the product away from the extruder being capable ofaffecting thickness and throughput of the sheet; means for measuring thethickness of the formed sheet, means for establishing a signal indicativeof a deadband region for the sheet thickness, means comparing a signalindicative of the measured sheet thickness and the deadband regionindicating signal for deriving first and second signals respectivelyindicative of the thickness being within and outside of the deadbandregion, means for measuring take-away speed of the sheet product, meansresponsive to the first signal and a signal indicative of measuredtake-away speed for concomitantly controlling screw speed and take-awayspeed, and means responsive to the second signal and a signal indicativeof measured thickness for controlling at least one of screw speed andtake-away speed.2. A system for controlling an extruder system responsive to a supply ofinput material, said extruder system including a screw for feeding theinput material through an extruder and means for taking a sheet productformed by the extruder away from the extruder, the thickness, T, of thesheet product being related to rotational speed of the screw, V.sub.S, andtake-away speed of the sheet from the extruder, V.sub.L, by:##EQU12##where: a, b, and c are predetermined constants,comprising means responsive to a measured value of V.sub.L for computing asignal indicative of the rate of change of a variable of said equationwith respect to another variable of said equation, means responsive to ameasured value of one of the variables of said equation for deriving anerror signal for said one variable, and means responsive to the rate ofchange indicating signal and the derived error signal for controlling thespeed of at least one of the screw rotational velocity and the take-awayspeed.3. In an apparatus for controlling an extruder system responsive to asupply of input material, said extruder system including a screw forfeeding the input material through an extruder, means for taking theproduct away from the extruder, said screw and means for taking theproduct away from the extruder being capable of affecting thickness andthroughput of the sheet, the thickness of the sheet product, the screwrotational speed and the take-away speed being variables related by apredetermined equation, comprising means for measuring take-away speed ofthe sheet, means for measuring another variable of the equation related tothe thickness of the formed sheet, means combining signals indicative ofthe measured sheet speed and the another variable for deriving a signalindicative of the rate of change of one of said variables with respect toanother of said variables, means responsive to a measured value of one ofthe variables of said equation for deriving an error signal for said onevariable, and means responsive to the rate of change indicating signal andthe derived error signal for controlling the speed of at least one of thescrew rotational velocity and the take-away speed.4. In an apparatus for controlling an extruder system responsive to asupply of input material, said extruder system including a screw forfeeding the input material through an extruder and means for taking asheet product formed by the extruder away from the extruder, thethickness, T, of the sheet product being related to rotational speed ofthe screw, V.sub.S, and take-away speed of the sheet from the extruder,V.sub.L, by:##EQU13##where: a, b, and c are predetermined constants,means responsive to a measured value of V.sub.L for computing a signalindicative of the rate of change of a variable of said equation withrespect to another variable of said equation, means responsive to ameasured value of one of the variables of said equation for deriving anerror signal for said one variable, and means responsive to the rate ofchange indicating signal and the derived error signal for deriving acontrol signal for the speed of at least one of the screw rotationalvelocity and the take-away speed, and means responsive to the controlsignal for controlling the speed of the at least one of the screwrotational velocity and the take-away speed.5. In an apparatus for controlling an extruder system responsive to asupply of input material, said extruder system including a screw forfeeding the input material through an extruder and means for taking asheet product formed by the extruder away from the extruder, thethickness, T of the sheet product being related to rotational speed of thescrew, V.sub.S, and take-away speed of the sheet from the extruder,V.sub.L, by:##EQU14##where: a, b, and c are predetermined constants,means responsive to a measured value of V.sub.L for computing a signalindicative of the rate of change of a variable of said equation withrespect to another variable of said equation means responsive to ameasured value of one of the variables of said equation for deriving anerror signal for said one variable, and means responsive to the rate ofchange indicating signal and the derived error signal for deriving acontrol signal for the speed of the screw rotational velocity, said meansfor deriving the rate of change indicating signals including means forderiving a signal representing rate of change of screw speed with respectto take-away speed, the error signal deriving means including means forderiving an error signal for take-away speed, and the control signalderiving means including means for multiplying the take-away speed errorsignal and the signal representing rate of change of screw speed withrespect to take-away speed, and means responsive to the control signal forcontrolling the screw rotational velocity.6. In an apparatus for controlling an extruder system responsive to asupply of input material, said extruder system including a screw forfeeding the input material through an extruder and means for taking asheet product formed by the extruder away from the extruder, thethickness, T, of the sheet product being related to rotational speed ofthe screw, V.sub.S, and take-away speed of the sheet from the extruder,V.sub.L, by:##EQU15##where: a, b, and c are predetermined constantsmeans responsive to a measured value of V.sub.L for computing a signalindicative of the rate of change of a variable of said equation withrespect to another variable of said equation, means responsive to ameasured value of one of the variables of said equation for deriving anerror signal for said one variable, and means responsive to the rate ofchange indicating signal and the derived error signal for deriving acontrol signal for the speed of the take-away speed, said means forderiving the rate of change indicating signals includes means for derivingthe signal respresenting rate of change of take-away speed with respect tosheet thickness, the error signal deriving means including means forderiving an error signal for sheet thickness, and the control signalderiving means including means for multiplying the sheet thickness errorsignal and the signal representing rate of change of take-away speed withrespect to sheet thickness, and means responsive to control signal forcontrolling the take-away speed.7. In an apparatus for controlling an extruder system responsive to asupply of input material, said extruder system including a screw forfeeding the input material through an extruder and means for taking asheet product formed by the extruder away from the extruder, thethickness, T, of the sheet product being related to rotational speed ofthe screw, V.sub.S and take-away speed of the sheet from the extruder,V.sub.L, by:##EQU16##where: a, b, and c are predetermined constantsmeans responsive to a measured value of V.sub.L for computing a signalindicative of the rate of change of a variable of said equation withrespect to another variable of said equation, means responsive to ameasured value of one of the variables of said equation for deriving anerror signal for said one variable, and means responsive to the rate ofchange indicating signal and the derived error signal for deriving acontrol signal for the speed of the screw rotational velocity, said meansfor deriving the rate of change indicating signals includes means forderiving a signal respresenting rate of change of screw speed with respectto sheet thickness, the error signal deriving means including means forderiving an error signal for sheet thickness and the control signalderiving means including means for multiplying the sheet thickness errorsignal and the signal representing rate of change of screw speed withrespect to sheet thickness, said means for deriving the signalrepresenting rate of change of screw speed with respect to thicknessincludes means for deriving the rate of change signal in accordance with:##EQU17##and means responsive to the control signal for controlling the screwrotational velocity.8. In an apparatus for controlling an extruder system responsive to asupply of input material, said extruder system including a screw forfeeding the input material through an extruder and means for taking asheet product formed by the extruder away from the extruder, said screwand means for taking the product away from the extruder being capable ofaffecting thickness and throughput of the sheet; means for measuring thethickness of the formed sheet, means for measuring the rate at which theinput material is fed through the extruder, means for measuring take-awayspeed of the sheet product from the extruder, and means responsive to themeasured speed, the measured rate, and the measured sheet thickness forderiving a control signal for at least one of the take-away means and thescrew rotational velocity, and means responsive to the control signal forcontrolling the speed of the at least one of the screw rotational velocityand the take-away speed.9. In an apparatus for controlling an extruder system responsive to asupply of input material, said extruder system including a screw forfeeding the input material through an extruder and means for taking asheet product formed by the extruder away from the extruder, said screwand means for taking the product away from the extruder being capable ofaffecting thickness and throughout of the sheet; means for measuring thethickness of the formed sheet, means for measuring the rate at which theinput material is fed through the extruder, means for measuring take-awayspeed of the sheet product from the extruder, and means responsive to themeasured speed, the measured rate, and the measured sheet thickness forderiving a control signal for the screw rotational velocity, said meansfor deriving including: means for deriving a signal representing rate ofchange of screw speed with respect to take-away speed and an error signalfor take-away speed, and means for multiplying the take-away speed errorsignal and the signal representing rate of change of screw speed withrespect to take-away speed, and means responsive to the control signal forcontrolling the screw rotational velocity.10. In an apparatus for controlling an extruder system responsive to asupply of input material, said extruder system including a screw forfeeding the input material through an extruder and means for taking asheet product formed by the extruder away from the extruder, said screwand means for taking the product away from the extruder being capable ofaffecting thickness and throughput of the sheet; means for measuring thethickness of the formed sheet, means for measuring the rate at which theinput material is fed through the extruder, means for measuring take-awayspeed of the sheet product from the extruder, and means responsive to themeasured speed, the measured rate, and the measured sheet thickness fromderiving a control signal for the take-away means, said means for derivingincluding: means for deriving a signal representing rate of change oftake-away speed with respect to sheet thickness and an error signal forsheet thickness, and means for multiplying the sheet thickness errorsignal and the signal representing rate of change of take-away speed withrespect to sheet thickness, and means responsive to the control signal forcontrolling the take-away speed.11. In an apparatus for controlling an extruder system responsive to asupply of input material, said extruder system including a screw forfeeding the input material through an extruder, and means for taking theproduct away from th extruder being capable of affecting thickness andthroughput of the sheet, the thickness of the sheet product, the screwrotational speed and the take-away speed being variables related by apredetermined equation, means for measuring take-away speed of the sheet,means for measuring another variable of equation related to the thicknessof the formed sheet, means combining signals indicative of the measuredsheet speed and the another variable for deriving a signal indicative ofthe rate of change of one of said variables with respect to another ofsaid variables, means responsive to a measured value of one of thevariables of said equation for deriving an error signal for said onevariable, and means responsive to the rate of change indicating signal andthe derived error signal for deriving a control signal for the speed of atleast one of the screw rotational velocity and the take-away speed, andmeans responsive to the control signal for controlling the speed of the atleast one of the screw rotational velocity and the take-away speed.12. In an apparatus for controlling an extruder system responsive to asupply of input material, said extruder system including a screw forfeeding the input material through an extruder, and means for taking theproduct away from the extruder, said screw and means for taking theproduct away from the extruder being capable of affecting thickness andthroughput of the sheet, the thickness of the sheet product, the screwrotational speed and the take-away speed being variables related by apredetermined equation, means for measuring take-away speed of the sheet,means for measuring another variable of the equation related to thethickness of the formed sheet, means combining signals indicative of themeasured sheet speed and the another variable for deriving a signalindicative of the rate of change of one of said variables with respect toanother of said variables, means responsive to a measured value of one ofthe variables of said equation for deriving an error signal for said onevariable, and means responsive to the rate of change indicating signal andthe derived error signal for deriving a control signal for the speed ofthe screw rotational velocity, said means for deriving the rate of changeindicating signals including means for deriving a signal representing rateof change of screw speed with respect to take-away speed, the error signalderiving means including means for deriving an error signal for take-awayspeed, and the control signal deriving means including means formultiplying the take-away speed error signal and the signal representingrate of change of screw speed with respect to take-away speed, and meansresponsive to the control signal for controlling the screw rotationalvelocity.13. In an apparatus for controlling an extruder system responsive to asupply of input material, said extruder system including a screw forfeeding the input material through an extruder, and means for taking theproduct away from the extruder, said screw and means for taking theproduct away from the extruder being capable of affecting thickness andthroughput of the sheet, the thickness of the sheet product, and the screwrotational speed and the take-away speed being variables related by apredetermined equation, means for measuring take-away speed of the sheet,means for measuring another variable of the equation related to thethickness of the formed sheet, means combining signals indicative of themeasured sheet speed and the another variable for deriving a signalindicative of the rate of change of one of said variables with respect toanother of said variables, means responsive to a measured value of one ofthe variables of said equation for deriving an error signal for said onevariable, and means responsive to the rate of change indicating signal andthe derived error signal for deriving a control signal for the speed ofthe take-away speed, said means for deriving the rate of change indicatingsignals including means for deriving a signal representing rate of changeof take-away speed with respect to sheet thickness, the error signalderiving means including means for deriving an error signal for sheetthickness, and the control signal deriving means including means formultiplying the sheet thickness error signal and the signal representingrate of change of take-away speed with respect to sheet thickness, andmeans responsive to the control signal for controlling the take-awayspeed.14. In an apparatus for controlling an extruder system responsive to asupply of input material, said extruder system including a screw forfeeding the input material through an extruder and means for taking asheet product formed by the extruder away from the extruder, said screwand means for taking the product away from the extruder being capable ofaffecting thickness and throughput of the sheet, means for measuring therate at which material is fed through the extruder, means for measuringanother parameter related to sheet thickness, and means combining signalsindicative of the measured screw rotational speed and the measured sheetthickness related parameter for deriving a control signal for one of theactuators affecting the sheet thickness, and means responsive to thecontrol signal for controlling the one actuator.15. In an apparatus for controlling an extruder system responsive to asupply of input material, said extruder system including a screw forfeeding the input material through an extruder and means for taking asheet product formed by the extruder away from the extruder, said screwand means for taking the product away from the extruder being capable ofaffecting thickness and throughput of the sheet, means for measuring therate at which material is fed through the extruder, means for measuringanother parameter related to sheet thickness, and means combining signalsindicative of the measured screw rotational speed and the measured sheetthickness related parameter for deriving a control signal for screw speedchanges, said means for deriving including: means for deriving a signalrepresenting rate of change of screw speed with respect to take-away speedand an error signal for take-away speed, and means for multiplying thetake-away speed error signal and the signal representing rate of change ofscrew speed with respect to take-away speed, and means responsive to thecontrol signal for controlling the screw rotational velocity.16. In an apparatus for controlling an extruder system responsive to asupply of input material, said extruder system including a screw forfeeding the input material through an extruder and means for taking asheet product formed by the extruder away from the extruder, said screwand means for taking the product away from the extruder being capable ofaffecting thickness and throughput of the sheet, means for measuring therate at which material is fed through the extruder, means for measuringanother parameter related to sheet thickness, and means combining signalsindicative of the measured screw rotational speed and the measured sheetthickness related parameter for deriving a control signal for take-awayspeed changes, said means for deriving including means for deriving asignal representing rate of change of take-away speed with respect tosheet thickness and an error signal for sheet thickness, and means formultiplying the sheet thickness error signal and the signal representingrate of change of take-away speed with respect to sheet thickness, andmeans responsive to the control signal for controlling the take-awayspeed.17. In an apparatus for controlling an extruder system responsive to asupply of input material, said extruder system including a screw forfeeding the input material through an extruder and means for taking asheet product formed by the extruder away from the extruder, said screwand means for taking the product away from the extruder being capable ofaffecting thickness and throughput of the sheet, means for measuring therate at which material is fed through the extruder, means for measuringanother parameter related to sheet thickness, and means combining signalsindicative of the measured screw rotational speed and the measured sheetthickness related parameter for deriving a control signal for screw speedchanges, said means for deriving including: means for deriving a signalrepresenting rate of change of screw speed with respect to sheet thicknessand an error signal for sheet thickness, and means for multiplying thesheet thickness error signal and the signal representing rate of change ofscrew speed with respect to sheet thickness, and means responsive to thecontrol signal for controlling the screw rotational velocity."}
{"WKU":"039307751","Title":"Testing and correcting metering accuracy of multihole spinnerets","App_Date":"1974-09-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William Bernard Fisher;Howard Lyle Helmer;David Pendlebury","Assignee":"Allied Chemical Corporation","ICL_Class":"G01B 1300;D01D  300","References":"1676831;3221546","Claims":"We claim:1. An apparatus for dividing and channeling the fluid flow from the exitend of an inverted split multihole spinneret, said split multiholespinneret being divided into parts by means of an unpierced stripe wideenough to form a visible split in said fluid flow at the exit end of saidsplit multihole spinneret, said apparatus for dividing and channeling thefluid flow from the exit end of said split multihole spinneret comprising:a. an enclosed wall, said enclosed wall having a base, said enclosed wallalong with said base being adapted to form a seal with the periphery ofsaid exit end of said split multihole spinneret, without blocking any ofthe holes therethrough;b. a divider plate, said divider plate having its ends secured in saidenclosed wall;c. sealing means, said sealing means being affixed to the bottom of saiddivider plate to form a seal with said unpierced stripe when said base ofsaid enclosed wall is sealed against said periphery of said exit end ofsaid split multihole spinneret, said enclosed wall with said divider platethereby defining a plurality of open chambers the bases of which areformed by said exit end of said split multihole spinneret, the portion ofsaid enclosed wall defining each of said open chambers having an aperturetherein; andd. a plurality of tubes, the number of said tubes corresponding to thenumber of said apertures in said enclosed wall and leading outwardlytherefrom; whereby the fluid flowing through said split multiholespinneret divides as it exits therefrom to flow through said tubes to aplurality of collection points.2. An apparatus for dividing and channeling the fluid flow from the exitend of an inverted split multihole spinneret, the split spinneret beingdivided into two parts by means of an unpierced stripe wide enough to forma visible split in said fluid flow at the exit end of said splitspinneret, said apparatus for dividing and channeling the fluid flow fromthe exit end of said split spinneret comprising:a. an enclosed wall, said enclosed wall having a base, said base beingadapted to form a seal with the periphery of said exit end of said splitspinneret without blocking any of the holes therethrough, said enclosedwall also having one divider plate, said divider plate having its endsterminating at the interior of said enclosed wall; andb. sealing means, said sealing means being affixed to the bottom of saiddivider plate of said enclosed wall so as to form a seal with saidunpierced stripe of said split spinneret, said enclosed wall with its saiddivider plate thereby defining two open chambers the bases of which areformed by said exit end of said split spinneret, the portion of saidenclosed wall defining each of said open chambers having an aperturetherein with a tube leading outwardly therefrom, said apertures being atsuch distance from said base of said enclosed wall that the fluid flowingthrough said split spinneret is divided as it exits therefrom to flowthrough said tubes to two collection points."}
{"WKU":"039307760","Title":"Hydraulic wrench","App_Date":"1974-08-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Philip J. Keller","Assignee":"Unex Corporation","ICL_Class":"B25B 1346","References":"2573469;2758569;2844982;3706244;3791230","Claims":"What is claimed as new and desired to be protected by Letters Patent is setforth in the appended claims:1. A hydraulic wrench, comprising a support; a drive assembly including ashaft journalled on said support and turnable relative thereto about afirst axis, a sector drive plate turnable on said shaft and having anarcuate edge face formed with a plurality of slots spaced about said firstaxis and extending substantially parallel to the same, and a square drivemember turnable with said shaft and adapted for insertion into a matingdrive socket; transmission means for transmitting motion from said sectordrive plate to said shaft so as to turn the latter; a hydraulic cylinderunit also mounted on said support for pivotal movement about a second axisspaced from and parallel to said first axis, said cylinder unit includinga reciprocable piston rod having a working stroke; and a projection onsaid piston rod for engagement in the respective slots, so as to turn saidsector drive plate on said shaft during the working stroke of said pistonrod.2. A hydraulic wrench as defined in claim 1, wherein said drive assemblyincludes on said shaft an additional turnable sector drive plate spacedfrom and substantially parallel to the first-mentioned one and alsoprovided with an arcuate edge face having slots corresponding to thefirst-mentioned slots; and wherein said projection on said piston rodcomprises a first portion engageable in the respective first-mentionedslots, and a second portion engageable in said slots of said additionalsector drive plate.3. A hydraulic wrench as defined in claim 2, wherein said transmissionmeans comprises a ratchet wheel surrounding said shaft intermediate saidsector drive plates and being turnable with said shaft, and aspring-loaded pawl pivotably mounted on said sector drive plates formovement with the latter and being in engagement with said ratchet wheel.4. A hydraulic wrench as defined in claim 3; and further comprising a pairof circlips engaging said sector drive plates and maintaining the sameagainst movement away from said ratchet wheel in axial direction of saidshaft.5. A hydraulic wrench as defined in claim 3, wherein said support comprisesa pair of transversely spaced plate members located outwardly adjacent tothe respective sector drive plates, and connecting means rigidlyconnecting said plate members to one another.6. A hydraulic wrench as defined in claim 1, wherein said hydrauliccylinder unit includes a double-acting piston provided with said pistonrod, and a hydraulic circuit for selectively moving said piston inmutually opposite directions.7. A hydraulic wrench as defined in claim 6; further comprisingquick-connect and -disconnect couplings for connecting said circuit withsaid hydraulic cylinder unit.8. A hydraulic wrench as defined in claim 7, wherein said piston rod has afree end portion provided with a handle structure for engagement by anoperator; and further comprising biasing means connected between saidhandle structure and said support so as to urge said hydraulic cylinderunit to tilt about a second axis and to maintain said projection inengagement with the respective slots.9. A hydraulic wrench, comprising a support; a drive assembly mounted onsaid support and including a shaft turnable about a first axis, a sectordrive plate turnable on said shaft and having an arcuate edge face formedwith a plurality of slots spaced about said first axis and extendingsubstantially parallel to the same, and a square drive member turnablewith said shaft and adapted for insertion into a mating drive socket;transmission means for transmitting motion from said sector drive plate tosaid shaft so as to turn the latter, said transmission means comprising aratchet wheel surrounding said shaft and turnable with the same and aspring-loaded pawl pivotably mounted on said sector driver plate formovement with the latter and being in engagement with said ratchet wheel;a hydraulic cylinder unit mounted on said support for pivotal movementabout a second axis spaced from and parallel to said first axis, saidcylinder unit including a reciprocable piston rod having a working stroke;and a projection on said piston rod for engagement in the respectiveslots, so as to turn said sector drive plate on said shaft during theworking stroke of said piston rod."}
{"WKU":"039307778","Title":"Plastic U-shaped return conduit and apparatus and method for molding the","App_Date":"1974-12-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William C. Ramsey","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B29C  114;B29C  700","References":"3028630;3222727;3711590;3746493;3849053","Claims":"I claim:1. Apparatus for molding a U-shaped tubular conduit, comprising a firstmold section and a second mold section adapted to be moved between openedand closed positions and cooperating to define a generally U-shapedcavity, a generally U-shaped core member disposed within said cavity andhaving opposite end portions, a first support member connected to one ofsaid end portions of said core member, a second support member connectedto the other of said end portions of said core member, means for injectinga moldable material into said cavity to form a molded conduit, means forretracting said second support member from said core member when said moldsections are in their open position, means for stripping the moldedconduit from said core member after said second support member isretracted, and means for directing the molded conduit past said firstsupport member when the conduit is stripped from said core member.2. Apparatus as defined in claim 1 wherein said second support memberincludes a core element projecting into said cavity for engaging said coremember, a first slide member supporting said core element, and means formoving said slide member between retracted and extended positions inresponse to movement of said mold sections between said open and closedpositions.3. Apparatus as defined in claim 2 wherein said means for moving said slidemember comprise an elongated inclined rod supported by one of said moldsections, and said rod is effective to cam said slide member between saidretracted and extended positions.4. Apparatus as defined in claim 2 wherein said first support memberincludes an elongated support rod, an annular core element surroundingsaid rod and projecting into said cavity adjacent said core member, and asecond slide member supported for longitudinal movement relative to saidsupport rod and supporting said annular core element for movement betweenextended and retracted positions relative to said core member.5. Apparatus as defined in claim 4 including means for moving said secondslide member, said support rod and said annular core element as a unitbetween retracted and elevated positions relative to said second moldsection to facilitate removing a molded conduit from said core member whensaid mold sections are in said open positions.6. Apparatus as defined in claim 4 including means for moving one of saidslide members between its retracted and extended positions in response tomovement of the other of said slide members between said retracted andextended positions.7. Apparatus as defined in claim 1 wherein said means for stripping amolded conduit from said core member, comprise an annular strippingmember, means supporting said stripping member for both rotary and axialmovement on a predetermined axis, and power actuated means for moving saidstripping member.8. Apparatus as defined in claim 7 including means for moving saidstripping member along a predetermined helical path in response tooperation of said power actuated means.9. Apparatus for molding a U-shaped tubular conduit, comprising a firstmold section and a second mold section adapted to be moved between openedand closed positions and cooperating to define a generally U-shaped cavityhaving a slight helical configuration, a generally U-shaped core memberhaving a slight helical configuration and disposed within said cavity,said core member having opposite end portions, a first core elementconnected to one of said end portions of said core member, a first slidemember supporting said first core element, a second core element connectedto the other of said end portions of said core member, a second slidemember supporting said second core element, means for injecting a moldablematerial into said cavity to form a molded conduit, means for retractingsaid slide members and said core elements from said core member when saidmold sections are in their open position, a support rod extending throughsaid first core element and supporting said core member when said slidemembers and core elements are retracted, and means for stripping themolded conduit from said core member and past said support rod after saidsecond core element is retracted.10. Apparatus as defined in claim 9 wherein said means for stripping themolded part from said core member comprise a stripping member connected toa rotary actuator, and means for moving said stripping along a helicalpath in response to operation of said actuator.11. A method of molding a U-shaped conduit, comprising the steps of forminga generally U-shaped cavity within a set of mating first and second moldsections, adapted to be moved between opened and closed positions,supporting a generally U-shaped core member within said cavity by firstand second support members connected to opposite ends of said coremembers, supporting said second support member for lateral movementbetween retracted and extended positions relative to the corresponding endof said core member, injecting a fluid plastics material into said cavityand around said core member to form a molded conduit, moving said moldsections to said open position after the material has cured, moving saidsecond support member to said retracted position, stripping the moldedconduit from said core member, and directing the molded conduit past saidfirst support member as the conduit is being stripped from said coremember.12. A method as defined in claim 11 including the steps of forming saidcavity with a slight helical configuration, and constructing said coremember with a corresponding slight helical configuration to provide fordirecting the molded conduit past said first support member during thestripping operation."}
{"WKU":"039307786","Title":"Molding ejector device for interchangeable molds","App_Date":"1974-07-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Paul E. Roncelli","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B28B  710","References":"2564615;3197825;3357057;3555620;3737268","Claims":"What I claim is:1. In a machine for molding articles, including a mold member having a moldcavity,one or more headless ejector pins having reciprocable travel from said moldmember to a rest position, and toward said mold member to an ejectionposition to eject a molded article from said mold cavity,a carriage to carry said ejector pins in said reciprocable travel, saidejector pins being releasably mounted in said carriage,latch means movable on said carriage, between a locking position to engagesaid ejector pins and resist their withdrawal from said carriage, and arelease position to release said ejector pins and afford their withdrawalfrom said carriage,means adapting said ejector pins for said engagement,means to retain said latch means movably on said carriage.2. A machine as set forth in claim 1, including,a support member to support said mold member, said support member beinginterposed between said mold member and said carriage,one or more holes in said support member to afford said travel of saidejector pins through said support member.3. In a machine as set forth in claim 2,means to limit the travel of said carriage from said mold member andestablish the rest position of said ejector pins,said ejector pins being removably insertable through said holes in saidsupport member, when said latch means is in its release position.4. In a machine as set forth in claim 3,one or more sockets formed in said carriage, said sockets beingrespectively registered with said respective holes in said support member,andan end portion of each said ejector pin being removably received in asocket.5. In a machine as set forth in claim 1,said ejector pins being distributed in a predetermined pattern on saidcarriage,said carriage being addapted to accommodate alternative predeterminedpatterns of distribution of saids ejector pins.6. In a machine as set forth in claim 5,a support member to support said mold member, said support member beinginterposed between said mold member and said carriage,a plurality of holes in said support member to afford said travel of saidejector pins,said holes being distributed to accommodate said alternative patterns ofejector pins.7. In a machine as set forth in claim 6,said carriage being formed with a plurality of sockets,said sockets conforming in number and distribution to said holes in saidsupport member,each respective hole being registered with a respective socket,an end portion of each ejector pin being received in a respective socket.8. In a machine as set forth in claim 7,a housing enclosing said carriage, and secured to said support member,said latch means being elongated, and having opposite parallel sideportions,a series of lugs formed on at least one of said marginal edge portions,a slideway on said carriage to receive each latch member for longitudinallydirected reciprocable sliding travel,means adapting an end portion of each ejector pin for engagement ordisengagement by a lug on said latch member,each ejector pin being removably insertable into a respective socketthrough a respective hole in said support member.9. In a machine as set forth in claim 8,said means adapting said end portion being an annular groove releasablyengageable by a lug on said latch member.10. In a machine as set forth in claim 1,said molded article having a sprue,a sprue ejector pin comprising,an elongated shank, andan elongated extension removably applicable to said shank,said shank being received in said carriage,means on said shank to resist rotation of said shank about its longitudinalaxis,means on said carriage co-acting with said means on said shank to resistsuch rotation.11. In a machine as set forth in claim 10,a support member to support said mold member,a hole in said support member to afford passage therethrough of said sprueejector pin,whereby said elongated extension may be removed and replaced through saidhole in said support means.12. In a machine as set forth in claim 4,said latch means being elongated, and having opposite parallel marginalside portions,a series of lugs formed on at least one of said marginal edge portions,a slideway on said carriage to receive each latch member for reciprocablesliding travel,means adapting said end portion of said ejector pin for engagement by a lugon said latch member in the locking position of said latch member, and tobe disengaged by such lug in a release position of said member.13. In a machine as set forth in claim 12,said means adapting said end portion being an annular groove formed on saidend portion of said ejector pin for releasable engagement by a lug.14. In a machine as set forth in claim 3,said means to limit the travel of said carriage being a housing,means securing said housing to said support member, said carriage beingconfined within said housing.15. In a machine as set forth in claim 1,said means adapting said ejector pin for said engagement being a grooveformed in said ejector pin and, having a flat bottom, and releasablyengageable by said latch means to resist rotation of said ejector pinabout its longitudinal axis."}
{"WKU":"039307794","Title":"Injection molding apparatus with improved cooling","App_Date":"1974-01-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John J. Farrell","Assignee":"Farrell Patent Company","ICL_Class":"B29D 2302;B29D 2303","References":"3029468;3191225;3707591;3709644;3761219;3789093","Claims":"I claim:1. A blow molding machine for making plastic articles including aninjection station, a blowing station, and a stripper station; a core rodsupport that moves horizontally disposed core rods horizontally,successively from one station to the next through a cycle, a blow mold atthe blowing station including a cavity into which successive core rodsextend for blowing parisons on the core rods while in said cavity, acooling chamber in the blow mold and through which cooling fluidcirculates, an air conditioner that removes moisture from air to lower thedew point of the air, and means for supplying the dried air in acontinuous curtain transversely disposed to the horizontally disposed corerods so as to prevent other air from contacting and depositing moisture onthe mold, characterized by the blow mold having two sections that movetoward and from each other to open and close the mold, and air dischargemeans located adjacent to one end of the space that is formed between themold sections as they move away from one another, the dried air beingsupplied to said air discharge means and flowing therefrom as a curtain ofair around said space and wherein said curtain is spaced from said blowarticle, characterized by the air discharge means comprising a jacketaround the sides of one of the mold sections and forming with said sides aplenum having a slot at the end thereof which is closest to the other moldsection and from which air is discharged around the entire periphery ofthe space between the mold sections when the mold sections are separatedfrom one another.2. The blow molding machine described in claim 1 characterized by anotherplenum at the other end of the air curtain and into which the air curtainflows, and a duct system through which air in said other plenum isrecirculated back to the air conditioner.3. A blow molding machine for making plastic articles including aninjection station, a blowing station, and a stripper station; a core rodsupport that moves core rods successively from one station to the nextthrough a cycle, a blow mold at the blowing station including a cavityinto which successive core rods extend for blowing parisons on the corerods while in said cavity, a cooling chamber in the blow mold and throughwhich cooling fluid circulates, an air conditioner that removes moisturefrom air to lower the dew point of the air, and means for supplying thedried air to exposed surfaces of the blow mold at the time of discharge ofa blown article therefrom to prevent sweating of said surfaces,characterized by a mold at the injection station and in which a parison isapplied to a core rod, a plasticizer that injects molten material into theinjection mold, valve means for shutting off the plasticizer from the moldto shorten the cycle of the plasticizer by permitting the plasticizer torecover sooner after each injection in preparation for the next injection,and an auxiliary plastic pump that performs some of the operations of theinjection cycle in place of the plasticizer, characterized by auxiliarycooling means for the core rods to compensate for the shorter cycle of themolding machine resulting from the shorter blowing operation and theshorter injection cycle, said auxiliary cooling means including a fluidsupply head in position to discharge cooling fluid from said head intocontact with an outside surface of the core rod after stripping of theblown article from the core rod, characterized by a stripper at thestripper station movable into contact with a blown article and lengthwiseof the core rod to strip the blown article from the core rod, andauxiliary cooling means for the core rod including a head with jetorifices that blow fluid streams against the outside of the core rodaround the circumference of the core rod, bearing means on which the headis movable lengthwise of the core rod to blow the cooling fluid againstthe different parts of the length of the core rod, and valve means thatchange the rate at which the fluid is blown against the core rod inaccordance with the position of the head along the length of the core rodand in accordance with different cross sections of materials of the corerod at different regions along the length thereof.4. The blow molding machine described in claim 3 characterized by a cam andcam follower, one of which has relative movement with respect to the otherproportional to the movement of the head along the length of the core rod,the cam being contoured to change the rate of flow of cooling fluid fromthe jets in proportion to the amount of heat to be removed from thevarious portions of the core rod along its length.5. A blow molding machine for making plastic articles including aninjection station, a blowing station, and a stripper station; a core rodsupport that moves core rods successively from one station to the nextthrough a cycle, a blow mold at the blowing station including a cavityinto which successive core rods extend for blowing parisons on the corerods while in said cavity, a cooling chamber in the blow mold and throughwhich cooling fluid circulates, an air conditioner that removes moisturefrom air to lower the dew point of the air, and means for supplying thedried air to exposed surfaces of the blow mold at the time of discharge ofa blown article therefrom to prevent sweating of said surfacescharacterized by an injection mold at the injection station, and anenclosure between the injection station and the blowing station throughwhich each core rod passes on its way from the injection mold to the blowmold, said enclosure being open at both ends for passage of the core rodsthrough the enclosure with continuous motion, means for blowing dry airover a parison on the core rod while passing through the enclosure, andmeans for controlling the temperature of the air supplied to saidenclosure.6. A blow molding machine for making plastic articles including aninjection station, a blowing station, and a stripper station; a coresupport that moves core rods successively from one station to the nextthrough a cycle, auxiliary cooling means for the core rods including afluid supply head in position to discharge cooling fluid from said headinto contact with an outside surface of the core rod after the strippingof a blown article from the core rod, a stripper at the stripper stationmovable into contact with a blown article and lengthwise of the core rodto strip the blown article from the core rod, the auxiliary cooling meansfor the core rod including a head with a jet orifice that blows fluidstreams against the outside of the core rod around the circumference ofthe core rod, bearing means on which the head is movable lengthwise of thecore rod to blow the cooling fluid along different portions of the lengthof the core rod, and valve means that change the rate at which fluid isblown against the core rod in accordance with the position of the headalong the length of the core rod."}
{"WKU":"039307808","Title":"Injection molding apparatus for partitioned containers","App_Date":"1973-07-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Walter R. Lovejoy","Assignee":"Beatrice Foods Co.","ICL_Class":"B29C  700;B29F  100","References":"3509603;3564660;3585690","Claims":"I claim:1. An injection mold for manufacture of an article having first and secondpairs of opposed sidewalls defining a generally rectangular enclosure withan open top and bottom and having a plurality of partition walls extendingbetween one of said pairs of opposed sidewalls for dividing said enclosureinto a plurality of cells, comprising:first mold means including a first base member and four sidewall membersbeing movable between a closed position in which said four sidewallmembers are adjacent said first base member and cooperatively form arectangular mold cavity conforming to the desired exterior dimensions ofsaid generally rectangular enclosure and an open position in which saidsidewall members are displaced along a predetermined angular path relativeto the sidewalls of the article away from said first base member andlaterally outwardly from one another;core mold means disposed within the rectangular enclosure formed by saidfour sidewall members;second mold means comprising a second base member movable between a closedposition abutting one end of each of said four sidewall members fordefining in conjunction with said core mold means and first mold means,when said four sidewall members are in said closed position, a mold cavitycorresponding to said article and an open position in which said secondmold means is displaced relative to said first mold means by a distancegreater than the sidewall length of said article and along a path parallelto said four sidewalls of said article;said core mold means comprising a first set of core elements rigidlysecured to said first mold means and extending the major length of saidsidewall members and a second set of core elements rigidly secured to saidsecond mold means in registry with said first set of core elements andextending upwardly the remaining length of said sidewall members, saidfirst and second sets of core elements being constructed and arranged forinterlocking with one another when said second mold means is in its closedposition to maintain a predetermined alignment of said first and secondsets of core elements during molding of said article;stripper ring means comprising a rectangular ring member of interiorperipheral dimensions corresponding to the perimeter of said article anddisposed adjacent the end of said sidewall members opposite said one endsand mechanically interlocked with said sidewall members for co-ordinatedmovement therewith and for engagement of the adjacent ends of the foursidewalls of the molded article to strip said article from said first setof core elements upon movement of said sidewall members from said closedto said open position; said stripper ring means further including ejectormeans supported by said second mold means and comprising a plurality ofejector rods for ejecting said article from said second set of coreelements; andinterlock means for mechanically coupling said four sidewall members tosaid second mold means for co-ordinated movement from said closed positiontoward said open position of said second mold means and for releasing saidsidewall members from said second mold means at approximately the openposition of said sidewall members and for permitting continued movement ofsaid second mold means to its open position.2. The mold of claim 1 in which said side wall members are each notched attheir said opposite ends for cooperatively defining a shoulder portion ofrectangular outline for seating said rectangular ring member of saidstripper ring means and further in which said first mold means includesabutment members fixedly secured to each of said side wall members andoverlying said ring member for interlocking said ring member with saidside walls for motion along a first path parallel to said article sidewalls and for permitting free relative movement of said side wall membersand said ring member along a path transverse to said first path.3. The mold of claim 2 and further including limit means comprising aplurality of bolt members journaled in said first mold means for slidingmovement and each having one end fixedly secured to said stripper ringmeans and having respective enlarged head portions for engaging said firstmold means at a predetermined limit of travel of said bolt means forcorrespondingly limiting the travel of said retainer ring means and saidfour side wall members.4. The mold of claim 3 in which said interlock means comprises respectivefirst interlock members integral with said four side wall members andincluding first shoulder portions and further comprising respective secondinterlock members fixedly secured to said second mold means and includingsecond shoulder portions overlying said first shoulder portions when saidside wall members are in their closed position and said first and secondshoulder portions moving laterally relative to one another as said secondmold means and said sidewall members move toward their respective openpositions so that said first and second shoulder portions clear oneanother as said four sidewall members reach their open position to releasethe interlock between said first and second interlock members thereby topermit independent movement of said four sidewall members and said secondmold means.5. The mold of claim 4 in which said first mold means includes an enlargedrectangular yoke portion surrounding and supporting said four sidewallmembers with said yoke portion having interior sidewalls contiguousrespective outer walls of said four sidewall members and forming therewithrespective planes inclined outwardly at an acute angle from thecorresponding side walls of the article to be molded and further withtongue and groove interconnections being provided between respective onesof said sidewall members and corresponding interior side walls of saidyoke portion to provide sliding motion between said yoke portion and saidrespective sidewall members, said tongue and groove interconnections beingeffected so as to cause said sidewall members to lift clear of acontiguous relationship with said yoke portion upon sliding movement ofsaid sidewall members from their closed position to their open positionthereby to prevent galling of the facing surfaces of said sidewall membersand said yoke portion."}
{"WKU":"039307816","Title":"Post-cooling apparatus for blown thermoplastic film","App_Date":"1974-11-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hartmut Upmeier","Assignee":"Windmoller & Holscher","ICL_Class":"B29D  722","References":"3355770;3596321;3726743;3749540;3775523;3804571;3804572;3867083","Claims":"I claim:1. Post-cooling apparatus for blown thermoplastic film comprising at leastone cooling air ring surrounding the tubular film downstream of thesolidification line of the film, the ring having air outlets directed ontothe tube, characterised in that the cooling air ring comprises a pluralityof individual blow pipes (8 , 8 ) which are pivotally interconnected inpairs at their adjacent ends and are hinged at their outer ends, aboutaxes perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the blow pipe, to holdingelements (7 , 7 ) that are radially adjustable with respect to the tubeaxis, the hinge axes on the holding elements being disposed so that theblow pipes form a uniform polygon as viewed longitudinally of the tube,and the length of the individual blow pipes being selected so that, with aradially outermost setting of the holding elements, the pipes extend in anobtuse angled zig-zag line circumferentially of the tube.2. Post-cooling apparatus according to claim 1, characterised in thatuniversal joints (9) are provided for the pivotal connection of theindividual blow pipes (8 , 8 ) and that the individual blow pipes of eachpair include the same angle, as viewed lengthwise of the tube, as do eachof two individual blow pipes hinged to a holding element (7 , 7 ).3. Post-cooling apparatus according to claim 2, characterised in that theuniversal joints (9) comprise ball joints.4. Post-cooling apparatus according to claim 1, characterised in that theholding elements (7 , 7 ) of the post-cooling apparatus are connected tothe radially adjustable holding elements (5 , 5 ) for the supporting andcalibrating segments (6 , 6 ) of a steplessly adjustable film calibratingapparatus.5. Post-cooling apparatus according to claim 1, characterised in that eachindividual blow pipe (8 , 8 ) is connected by an air hose (13) to acompressed air supply conduit (12).6. Post-cooling apparatus according to claim 5, characterised in that thecompressed air supply conduit is in the form of an annular channel (12).7. Post-cooling apparatus according to claim 1, characterised in that aplurality of cooling air rings, each comprising individual blow pipes (8 ,8 ) are arranged in superposition."}
{"WKU":"039307824","Title":"Apparatus for extruding plastic material","App_Date":"1974-04-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Bernard Keith Bigland","Assignee":"The General Engineering Co. (Radcliffe) Limited","ICL_Class":"B29F  306","References":"2680880;2767437;3078513;3110930;3499186;3649147","Claims":"I claim:1. An apparatus for extruding plastic materials comprising a screw extruderin which said plastic mterials are plasticized, drive means for the screwextruder, a feed means for supplying plastic materials to said screwextruder, an extruder die for shaping said plasticized material, positivedisplacement delivery means disposed between said screw extruder and saidextruder die for receiving plasticized material from said extruder and forconveying plasticized materials to said die, and gear means operablyconnected between said positive displacement delivery means and said drivemeans whereby said delivery means and drive means are geared together forregulating the flow of plasticized material from said delivery means inresponse to flow from said screw extruder.2. An apparatus as claimed in claim 1 in which the positive displacementdelivery means is a gear pump.3. An apparatus as claimed in claim 1 in which the positive displacementdelivery means is an intermeshing positive displacement multi-screw pump.4. An apparatus as claimed in claim 1 in which there are a plurality ofpositive displacement delivery means connected to the outlet of anextruder, each of said positive displacement delivery means beingconnected to its own die head.5. An apparatus as claimed in claim 1 in which there are a plurality ofpositive displacement delivery means, each connected to an extruder andeach connected to a common die head.6. An apparatus as claimed in claim 4 in which the positive displacementdelivery means are geared together.7. An apparatus as claimed in claim 5 in which the positive displacementdelivery means are geared together and each positive displacement deliverymeans is geared to an extruder.8. An apparatus for extruding plastic materials comprising plasticizingmeans including a least one screw extruder in which said plastic materialsare plasticized, drive means for said plasticizing means, a feed means forsupplying plastic materials to said plasticizing means, at least oneextruder die for shaping said plasticized material, a plurality ofpositive displacement delivery means, each of said positive displacementdelivery means disposed between a screw extruder and a die and receivingplasticized material from said extruder and for conveying plasticizedmaterials to said die under pressure and at a uniform rate of flow, andgear means operably connected between each of said positive displacementdelivery means for controlling the pressure and rate of flow ofplasticized material from each of said positive displacement deliverymeans with respect to the others.9. The extruding apparatus set forth in claim 8 wherein said positivedisplacement delivery means are gear pumps.10. The extruding apparatus set forth in claim 8 wherein said plasticizingmeans includes a plurality of screw extruders and said delivery means areconnected to a separate screw extruder and wherein said delivery means areconnected to the same extruder die."}
{"WKU":"039307832","Title":"Primary control means for furnaces","App_Date":"1974-08-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Frederick T. Bauer","Assignee":"Robertshaw Controls Company","ICL_Class":"F23N  508","References":"3610789;3627458;3701137","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In an electrical primary control system for furnaces, the combinationincluding burner control means adapted to be connected to a main linesource of AC current, a low voltage control circuit including burnerignition detection means, means providing a substantially lower voltagethan line voltage in said control circuit, means in said low voltagecontrol circuit including solid state means effective to actuate saidburner control means in response to a signal from said ignition detectionmeans, energy conversion means effective to interrupt the flow of currentthrough said solid state means, said energy conversion means including amounting base, first and second bimetallic blades, one end portion of saidfirst blade being fixed to said base, the other end portion of said firstblade being fixed directly to one end portion of said second blade, saidfirst and second blades bending in opposite directions upon an increase intemperature, stop means carried by the other end portion of said secondblade, a pair of contact members fixed to said base, said contact membersbeing in electrical contact with each other when one of said members is inengagement with said stop means, electrical heating means encompassingsaid first blade and effective to heat said first blade to cause said stopmeans to be disengaged from said one contact member responsive to bendingof said first blade, the directions of bending of said first and secondblades responsive to change in temperature being such that an increase intemperature of said second blade will tend to counteract deflection ofsaid stop means responsive to an equivalent increase in temperature ofsaid first blade, manually operable means supported by said base andeffective to move said contact member into engagement with said stopmeans, and means interfacing between said low voltage control circuit andsaid burner control means.2. In an electrical primary control system for furnaces, the combinationincluding burner control means adapted to be connected to a furnace burnerconnected to a main line source of AC current, a low voltage controlcircuit including burner ignition detection means, means providing asubstantially lower voltage than line voltage in said control circuit,means in said low voltage control circuit including solid state meanseffective to actuate said burner control means in response to a signalfrom said ignition detection means, electrical switch means effective tointerrupt the flow of current through said solid state means, saidelectrical switch means including a hoursing having an end wall, aU-shaped mounting base having a web portion and a pair of spaced flangeportions disposed in said housing, first and second bimetallic blades, oneend portion of said first blade fixed to one of said flange portions, theother end portion of said first blade being fixed directly to one endportion of said second blade, said first and second blades bending inopposite directions upon an increase in temperature, stop means carried bythe other end portion of said second blade, a pair of resilient contactmembers fixed to said web portion of said base, said contact members beingin electrical contact with each other when one of said members is inengagement with said stop means, electrical heating means encompassingsaid first blade and being effective to heat said first blade to causesaid stop means to be disengaged from said one contact member responsiveto bending of said first blade, the directions of bending of said firstand second blades responsive to a change in temperature being such that anincrease in temperature of said second blade will tend to counteractdeflection of said stop means responsive to an equivalent increase intemperature of said first blade, a manually operable plunger, said plungerbeing supported for axial movement by the other of said flange portionsand said end wall of said housing, said plunger sequentially engaging saidcontact members upon the application of manual force thereto andmaintaining separation of said members until said one contact memberengages said stop means, resilient means biasing said plunger away fromsaid one contact member and toward said end wall, and means interfacingbetween said low voltage control circuit and said burner control means.3. In an electrical primary control system for furnaces, the combinationincluding a burner control triac adapted to be connected to a main linesource of AC current, a low voltage control circuit including burnerignition detection means, means providing a substantially lower voltagethan line voltage in said control circuit, means in said low voltagecontrol circuit including solid state means effective to actuate saidburner control triac in response to a signal from said ignition detectionmeans, energy conversion means including a switch means effective tointerrupt the flow of current through said solid state means, and meansinterfacing between said low voltage control circuit and said burnercontrol triac.4. The combination as set forth in claim 3 wherein said switch meansincludes time delay means.5. The combination as set forth in claim 3 wherein said ignition detectionmeans controls the flow of current through said solid state means.6. The combination as set forth in claim 3 wherein said interfacing meanscontrols the conduction of said burner control triac.7. In an electrical primary control system for furnaces, the combinationincluding a burner control triac, said triac including one main terminaladapted to be connected to a furnace burner, said triac including anothermain terminal adapted to be connected to a main line source of AC current,said triac also including a gate for rendering said triac conductiveacross said main terminals when said gate is energized, a low voltagecontrol circuit including burner ignition detection means and energyconversion means, means providing a substantially lower voltage than linevoltage in said control circuit, means in said low voltage control circuitincluding solid state means effective to energize said gate of said burnercontrol triac in response to a signal from said ignition detection means,electrical switch means controlled by said energy conversion means andeffective to interrupt the flow of current through said solid state means,and means interfacing between said low voltage control circuit and saidgate of said burner control triac."}
{"WKU":"039307840","Title":"Photoflash lamp having non-shorting construction","App_Date":"1974-12-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert M. Anderson","Assignee":"General Electric Company","ICL_Class":"F21K  502","References":"2201294;3706522;3816054","Claims":"What I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the UnitedStates is:1. A photoflash lamp of the type comprising a bulb having a base, a pair oflead-in members extending through said base and into said bulb, and flashinitiation means connected between said lead-in members within said bulb,said bulb containing combustible material ignitable by said flashinitiation means, wherein the improvement comprises a plurality of beadmembers of electrically insulative material positioned within said bulbnear siad base thereof and around at least one of said lead-in membersthus reducing the possiblity of shorting between the lead-in members.2. A lamp as claimed in claim 1, in which said combustible material engagesagainst the upper surface of said bead members and holds said plurality ofbead members in position.3. A lamp as claimed in claim 1, including an adhesive material on at leastthe uppermost of said bead members thereby holding said plurality of beadmembers in place.4. A lamp as claimed in claim 1, in which said bead members have sphericalshapes.5. A lamp as claimed in claim 1, in which said bead members are hollow andhave one or more openings through the walls thereof.6. A lamp as claimed in claim 1, in which said bead members are cup-shaped.7. A lamp as claimed in claim 6, in which said bead members are hollowhemispheres.8. A lamp as claimed in claim 1, in which said plurality of bead membersextends upwardly from said base to near said flash initiation means.9. A lamp as claimed in claim 1, including a support bead sealed to saidlead-in members at a position between said base and said flash initiationmeans, said plurality of beads extending in said bulb from said base tosaid support bead.10. A lamp as claimed in claim 1, in which said plurality of bead are madeof glass.11. A method of making a photoflash lamp, comprising the steps of providinga bulb, sealing lead-in members through a base of said bulb, placing aplurality of bead members in said bulb and onto said base and around atleast one of said lead-in members, placing combustible material in saidbulb and over said plurality of bead members, providing acombustion-supporting gas in said bulb, and sealing the bulb.12. A method as claimed in claim 11, in which said combustible material ispositioned against the top of said plurality of bead members therebyholding them in position in the finished lamp.13. A method as claimed in claim 11, including the step of combining anadhesive material with said bead members to hold them in place.14. A method as claimed in claim 11, including the step of providing asupport bead sealed to said lead-in members at a position spaced from saidbase of the bulb and spaced from the wall of the bulb, said plurality ofbead members being sufficiently small in size to pass between said supportbead and said wall of the bulb."}
{"WKU":"039307859","Title":"Portable lighter","App_Date":"1974-04-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Taro Yanai","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F23Q  232","References":"1057585;2018094;2140277","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a portable lighter including a hollow casing enclosing fuel paddingimpregnated with a fuel, and having a hole extending into the fuel paddingand a striking surface on one outer surface thereof, and an ignition rodassembly removably insertable in said hole, the ignition rod assemblyincluding a rod-shaped holder having one end adapted to be inserted insaid hole, and an ignition wick and a striker piece mounted on said oneend of said holder, whereby the ignition rod assembly may be manuallyremoved from said holder to enable engagement of the striking piece withthe striking surface to effect ignition of the wick; the improvementwherein said one end of said holder is externally threaded and has adiametral slit extending thereacross and a hole extending axially therein,said striker piece being mounted in said slit and extending across saidhole, said wick being positioned within said hole at the side of saidstriker piece, and further comprising a sleeve having internal threadsengaging said threads of said holder for holding said striker piece insaid slit.2. The portable lighter of claim 1, wherein said end of said holder iscylindrical, and said hole extends coaxially therein.3. The portable lighter of claim 1, wherein said striker piece comprises athin rectangular plate.4. The portable lighter of claim 3, wherein said striker piece is of steel.5. The portable lighter of claim 3, wherein said holder has a conical stemfor cylindrically engaging said hole of said casing.6. The portable lighter of claim 1, wherein said end of said holder iscylindrical, the hole extending therein extending coaxially therein, saidstriker piece comprising a thin rectangular plate extending beyond saidend of said holder and engaging said slit on both sides of the hole insaid holder, said wick extending in said hole on both sides of said plateand beyond said end of said holder.7. The portable lighter of claim 6, wherein said wick extends into saidhole in said holder beyond the edge of said plate therein."}
{"WKU":"039307867","Title":"Apparatus for heating steel scrap","App_Date":"1974-11-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William M. Bloom","Assignee":"Allegheny Ludlum Industries, Inc.","ICL_Class":"F27B 1400","References":"1335279;1708509;3514279;3734719","Claims":"I claim:1. Apparatus for heating pieces of steel scrap which comprises a refractorylined container having an open top, means for charging said steel scrapinto said container with the central part of the charge substantiallydenser than the peripheral part, a cover for closing the top of saidcontainer, means for moving said cover between an open and closedpositions, a flue opening from said container adjacent the top thereofwhen said cover is in closed position, a plurality of spaced apartfuel-oxygen burners mounted around the periphery of said cover, saidburners being positioned to direct their flames downwardly into saidcontainer generally parallel to the inside wall thereof, and means forcontrolling said burners to obtain a reducing atmosphere under pressure insaid container.2. Apparatus according to claim 1 in which said means for charging scrapincludes a crane having a magnet thereon.3. Apparatus according to claim 1 in which said means for moving said coverincludes a horizontal axis support, means connecting said cover to saidaxis support, and means for moving said cover about said axis support.4. Apparatus according to claim 3 in which said means for charging scrapincludes a crane having a magnet thereon.5. Apparatus according to claim 1 in which said container has a generallyhorizontal main top portion and a spout extending upwardly from the saidmain portion, and said cover includes a generally horizontal leg restingon said horizontal main top portion and a vertical leg extending upwardlyfrom said horizontal leg and spaced from the wall of said spout to providesaid flue opening, said burners being mounted on said horizontal leg.6. Apparatus according to claim 5 in which said means for moving said coverincludes a vertical support extending upwardly adjacent said container ata position on the side away from said support, means pivotally mountingsaid vertical support on a horizontal axis adjacent the lower end thereof,means for moving said vertical support about its axis to move its upperend toward and away from said ladle, a support attached to said cover andpivotally supported on said vertical support for movement about ahorizontal axis, and means for moving said cover support about its axisbetween a horizontal operative position and an inoperative raisedposition.7. Apparatus according to claim 2 in which container has a generallyhorizontal main top portion and a spout extending upwardly from the saidmain portion, and said cover includes a generally horizontal leg restingon said horizontal main top portion and a vertical leg extending upwardlyfrom said horizontal leg and spaced from the wall of said spout to providesaid flue opening, said burners being mounted on said horizontal leg.8. Apparatus according to claim 7 in which said means for moving said coverincludes a vertical support extending upwardly adjacent said container ata position on the side away from said support, means pivotally mountingsaid vertical support on a horizontal axis adjacent the lower end thereof,means for moving said vertical support about its axis to move its upperend toward and away from said ladle, a support attached to said cover andpivotally supported on said vertical support for movement about ahorizontal axis, and means for moving said cover support about its axisbetween a horizontal operative position and an inoperative raisedposition."}
{"WKU":"039307875","Title":"Sintering furnace with hydrogen carbon dioxide atmosphere","App_Date":"1974-03-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William R. DeHollander;Yogesh Nivas","Assignee":"General Electric Company","ICL_Class":"F27b  904","References":"2253897;2269838;3054606;3708285;3808145","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An enclosed heated sintering furnace for controlling the partialpressure of oxygen in the furnace and for removing impurities fromstructures of uranium oxide containing compositions being sintered in thefurnace, the furnace having means for introducing an atmosphere comprisinga mixture of hydrogen and carbon dioxide as initially introduced to thefurnace and the furnace having means for passing the structurescountercurrently to the atmosphere.2. An enclosed heated sintering furnace according to claim 1 in which thereis from about 0.5 to about 90 percent hydrogen by volume and the balanceis carbon dioxide.3. An enclosed heated sintering furnace according to claim 1 in which thereis from about 2 to about 20 percent hydrogen by volume and the balance iscarbon dioxide.4. An enclosed heated sintering furnace according to claim 1 in which theatmosphere has in addition a carrier gas.5. An enclosed heated sintering furnace according to claim 1 in which thecarrier gas is nitrogen.6. An enclosed heated sintering furnace according to claim 1 in which thecarrier gas is argon.7. An enclosed heated sintering furnace according to claim 1 in which thehydrogen in the atmosphere is from dissociated ammonia and the atmospherehas a carrier gas of nitrogen.8. An enclosed heated sintering furnace according to claim 1 in which theinterior of the furnace is maintained at a temperature in the range ofabout 900.degree. to about 1,500.degree.C.9. An enclosed heated sintering furnace according to claim 1 in which thefurnace has therein structures comprised of uranium oxide with fluorideimpurities.10. An enclosed heated sintering furnace according to claim 1 in which thefurnace has therein structures comprised of uranium dioxide with fluorideimpurities."}
{"WKU":"039307883","Title":"Parison oven","App_Date":"1974-05-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert A. Daane;Edward D. Beachler;Raymond C. Vonderau;Nickolas N. Sokolow","Assignee":"Beloit Corporation","ICL_Class":"F27B  914","References":"3347182;3556494;3627282;3787170","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An oven for heating tubular thermoplastic parisons to a targettemperature including:means for transporting said parisons through the oven;means for defining a first plenum in said oven;means defining a second plenum in said oven;said first plenum being disposed on one wall of the oven and said secondplenum being disposed on a second wall of the oven, said second wall beingopposite said first wall;means defining an exhaust chamber disposed between said plenums;said first plenum and said chamber defining a first heating zone;means for supplying heating fluid to said first zone from said first plenumfor fast heating of said parisons;said second plenum and said chamber defining a second heating zone;means for supplying heating fluid to said second zone from said secondplenum for tempering said parisons and substantially equalizing thetemperature of the parisons.2. The oven recited in claim 1 and including means to supply heating fluidto said first zone at a temperature above the target temperature of saidparisons, and means to maintain said heating fluid in said first zone at atemperature above the target temperature of said parisons.3. The oven recited in claim 1 including means to supply said heating fluidto said second zone at a temperature approximately equal to the targettemperature of the parisons.4. The oven recited in claim 1 and including means to maintain the heatingfluid supplied to the chamber at a velocity slightly below the distortionvelocity of the parisons.5. The oven recited in claim 1 and including means to provide the heatingfluid to the chamber at a velocity slightly below either the tippingvelocity or the distortion velocity of the parisons, whichever velocitybeing lower in magnitude.6. An oven for heating hollow thermoplastic parisons having inner and outerwalls to a target temperature including:means defining a first plenum in said oven, said first plenum cooperatingwith said oven to define a first heating zone;means supplying heating fluid at a temperature above the target temperaturefrom said first plenum in said oven to said first heating zone for heatingat least a portion of said parisons to a temperature above said targettemperature in said first zone;means defining a second plenum in said oven, said second plenum cooperatingwith said oven to define a second heating zone;means supplying heating fluid at the target temperature from said secondplenum in said oven to said second heating zone, for tempering saidparisons.7. The oven recited in claim 6 and further including means to maintain thetemperature above the target temperature and below the melting point ofthe parisons.8. The structure recited in claim 6 and further including means totransport parisons from said first to said second zone.9. An oven for heating hollow thermoplastic parisons to a targettemperature including:means to heat fluid to at least said target temperature of the parisons;means defining a first plenum, said first plenum cooperating with said ovento define a first heating zone;means defining a second plenum in said oven, said plenum cooperating withthe oven to define a second heating zone;means to supply said heating fluid from said first plenum to said firstzone at a velocity slightly below the distortion velocity of the parisons.10. The oven recited in claim 9 wherein means are provided to supply theheating fluid at a temperature slightly below the melting temperature ofthe heated parisons and means to supply heating fluid thereafter to theparisons at the target temperature to equalize the temperature of theparisons.11. The oven recited in claim 9 and further including meansto supply heating fluid at a temperature slightly below the meltingtemperature of the parisons to said first heating zone; andmeans to supply heating fluid at the target temperature to said secondheating zone.12. The oven recited in claim 9 and including means to supply fluid to thesecond heating zone at a velocity which is below the velocity beingsupplied to the fluid in the first heating zone.13. The oven recited in claim 9 and further including additional heatingmeans to program the parisons.14. The oven recited in claim 9 wherein means are provided to maintain thevelocity of the heating fluid below the tipping velocity of the parisons."}
{"WKU":"039307891","Title":"Device for preheating waste gases of an exhaust conduit","App_Date":"1974-02-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kenner Erich;Hans Hintennach","Assignee":"J. Eberspacher","ICL_Class":"F01N  300","References":"3083525;3117770;3174277;3226206;3791143;3829281","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A device for the rapid and independent preheating of admixing air,preferably secondary air for a catalytic exhaust gas treatment device ininternal combustion engines, comprising an exhaust gas conduit havingseparated and aligned entrance and discharge portions for the flow ofexhaust gases therethrough, means defining an annular chamber around saidentrance portion adajcent the end thereof closest to said dischargeportion and having an inwardly tapered transition connected to saiddischarge portion and enclosing the separation between said entrance anddischarge portions, a burner having tubular discharge connected into saidannular chamber, said annular chamber having an opening at the dischargeend thereof adjacent said transition covering a sector of 60.degree. to120.degree., combustion means for generating combustion gases in saidburner housing and delivering the combustion gases through said tubulardischarge for partial annular flow around said annular chamber and exitthrough the opening of said annular chamber to said discharge, the openingbeing substantially diametrically opposite said entrance connectionwhereby the gases are whirled around the annular chamber before they aredirected outwardly therefrom and into the transition and they are whirledin a whirling motion for admixing with the exhaust gases for combined flowof the combustion gases and exhaust gases through said discharge.2. A device according to claim 1, including a conduit for secondary air,connected into said burner tubular discharge.3. A device for preheating gases, according to claim 1, wherein saidtubular burner has a connection socket for ignition means on a side wallthereof, and having an end wall with a connection for fuel and combustionair.4. A device for preheating gases, according to claim 1, wherein saidcombustion means for includes a separate connection for an igniter and anend fitting for fuel and combustion air having a mixing nozzle portionwith a central passage for mixed fuel and air and a further mixing passagelocated downstream of said mixing passage.5. A device for preheating gases, according to claim 4, including a furtherconnection for control means on said burner."}
{"WKU":"039307905","Title":"Method and apparatus for shrinking plastic film over grouped articles","App_Date":"1971-04-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John E. Rogosch","Assignee":"Ethyl Corporation","ICL_Class":"B65B 5302;F24J  300","References":"3073379;3508375;3514920;3572004;3581458;3589102","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In an apparatus for shrinking plastic film around an article or group ofarticles, the combination comprising:a. a support frame having a base and a substantially vertical supportmember;b. a heater assembly mounted on said vertical support member for up anddown movement;c. heater means including at least one flameless fuel gas infrared heaterunit mounted on said heater assembly to direct heat inwardly, said heaterunit emitting more than fifty percent of its energy as infrared energyhaving a wavelength of from about two to about six microns and generatingtemperatures in the range of from about 700.degree.F to about1,000.degree.F; andd. power means mounted on said support frame and coupled to said heaterassembly for moving said heater assembly up and down said power meansincluding a double-acting, solely fluid powered assembly mountedvertically on said support frame and having a length equal to or greaterthan the length of the path traversed by said heater assembly during upand down movement.2. In the apparatus of claim 1 wherein said double-acting, fluid-poweredassembly includes a pneumatically powered piston received in a cylinder,said piston having flexible connector means coupling said piston to saidheater assembly.3. In the apparatus of claim 2 wherein said support frame includes a pairof spaced apart, substantially vertically extending support members andsaid double-acting, fluid-powered assembly is mounted between said pair ofvertically extending support members and has one end attached to said baseand the other end attached to the upper ends of said support members bymeans of a cross brace."}
{"WKU":"039307913","Title":"Process for the dyeing of synthetic fibrous material from organic","App_Date":"1973-11-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Walter Birke;Franz Schon;Willi Steckelberg","Assignee":"Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"D06P  138","References":"3792972;3792973","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for the continuous dyeing of textile materials consisting of,or containing, synthetic fibrous materials of the group consisting of highmolecular polyamides, polyolefins, polyacrylonitriles, polyurethanes,polyvinylchlorides, polyvinylacetates, cellulose-2 1/2-acetate,cellulose-triacetate and high molecular polyesters, which comprisesimpregnating the said fibrous materials with an organic dyebath containingat least one dyestuff of the formula##SPC23##in which R represents a linear or branched alkylcarbonyl radical of at most20 carbon atoms or the naphthoyl group being unsubstituted or substitutedon the naphthalene nucteus by lower alkyl, X represents an oxygen orsulfuratom, Y represents hydrogen, chlorine or bromine, A represents alinear or branched alkylene groups of 1 to 4 carbon atoms unsubstituted orsubstituted by methoxy, ethoxy, phenoxy, or R being defined as above, andB represents (1) phenyl unsubstituted or substituted by fluorine,chlorine, bromine, alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkoxy of 1 to 4 carbonatoms, trifluoromethyl, cyano, carboalkoxy, nitro, acetyl, benzoyl,phenoxy or phenyl, or (2) naphthyl, and heating the impregnated fibrousmaterials to a temperature between 100.degree. and 240.degree.C.2. The process as claimed in claim 1, wherein the organic solvent in thedyebath is an organic solvent having a boiling point of at most150.degree.C under standard conditions.3. The process as claimed in claim 1, wherein the organic solvent in thedyebath is an aliphatic hydrocarbon, aliphatic chlorinated hydrocarbon,aromatic hydrocarbon, chlorinated aromatic hydrocarbon, aliphatic alcoholhaving 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or mixtures thereof, the boiling point ofwhich not exceeding 150.degree.C under standard conditions.4. The process as claimed in claim 1, wherein the organic solvent in thedyebath is a special boiling point spirit, methylenechloride,dichloroethane, trichloroethane, trichloro-fluoro-methane,trichloroethylene, tetrachloroethane, tetrachloroethylene,dichlorofluoromethane, trichloro-trifluoro-ethane,dichloro-tetrafluoro-ethane, octafluoro-cyclobutane, toluene, xylene,chlorobenzene or fluorobenzene, or mixtures thereof."}
{"WKU":"039307921","Title":"Hair dyeing and conditioning compositions","App_Date":"1974-10-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"George Alperin;Richard DeMarco;Raymond Feinland","Assignee":"Clairol Incorporated","ICL_Class":"A61K  713","References":"3555584;3577528;3629330","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An aqueous hair dye composition of the semi-permanent type comprisinga. a tinctorial amount of a direct-dyeing nitroaminobenzene hair dye havinggood affinity for hair when applied at ambient temperatures;b. from about 0.1% to 3% by weight based on the total weight of thecompositions of a hair-substantive quarternary amine compound of formula:##EQU10##in which: i. R.sup.1, R.sup.2 and R.sup.3 are alkyl having from 1 to 3carbons;"}
{"WKU":"039307930","Title":"Process for the dyeing of synthetic fiber materials from organic solvents","App_Date":"1973-10-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Walter Birke;Rudolf Schickfluss;Franz Schon;Willi Steckelberg","Assignee":"Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C08K  523;C09B 4318;D06P  104","References":"1738978;2691027;2888452;3663161;3684431;3738803","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for the continuous dyeing of textile material containing orconsisting of synthetic fibers from organic solvents, which comprisesimpregnating the said textile materials with an organic dyebath containingat least one dyestuff of the formula"}
{"WKU":"039307948","Title":"Process for the dyeing of synthetic fiber materials from organic solvents","App_Date":"1973-10-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Walter Birke;Rudolf Schickfluss;Franz Schon;Willi Steckelberg","Assignee":"Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C08K  523;C09B 4318;D06P  104","References":"1738978;2691027;2888452;3663161;3684431;3738803","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for the continuous dyeing of textile materials containing orconsisting of synthetic fibrous materials from organic solvents, whichcomprises impregnating the said textile materials with an organic dyebathcontaining at least one dyestuff of the formula##SPC26##in which the phenyl radical A is unsubstituted or substituted by 1 to 3substituents of the group consisting of halogen, nitro, cyano,trifluoromethyl, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy and lower alkoxy-loweralkylene--O--, B represents naphthylene or##SPC27##R.sub.2, r.sub.3, r.sub.4 and R.sub.5 each represent hydrogen, halogen,lower alkyl, lower alkoxy or lower alkoxy-lower alkylene--O--, and R.sub.1stands for a linear or branched alkylcarbonyl of at most 18 carbon atoms,##SPC28####SPC29####SPC30####SPC31##and an organic solvent, and fixing the dyestuffs by submitting theimpregnated materials to a heat treatment.2. The process as claimed in claim 1, wherein at least one halogenatedhydrocarbon is used as organic solvent.3. The process as claimed in claim 1, wherein at least one aliphaticalcohol is used as organic solvent.4. The process as claimed in claim 1, wherein a mixture consisting of ahalogenated organic hydrocarbon and an aliphatic alcohol is used asorganic solvent.5. The process as claimed in claim 1, wherein the boiling limit benzines,methylene chloride, dichloro-ethane, trichloro-ethane, tetrachloro-ethane,dichloro-fluoromethane, dichloro-tetrafluoro-methane,octafluoro-cyclobutane, toluene, xylene, chlorobenzene, fluorobenzene,trichloro-fluoro-methane, 1,2,2-trichloro-1,1,2-trichloro-ethane,tetrachloroethylene, trichloroethylene and 1,1,1-trichloro-ethane are usedas organic solvent.6. The process as claimed in claim 1, wherein the dyeing is aftertreated inan organic solvent.7. The process as claimed in claim 1, wherein the dyeing is aftertreated inthe same organic solvent or mixture of organic solvents which had beenused in the preceding dyeing process.8. The process as claimed in claim 1, wherein a textile material consistingof or containing polyamides, polyurethanes, polyolefins,polyacrylonitriles, polyvinyl chlorides, polyvinyl acetates,cellulose--21/2-acetate, cellulose-triacetate or polyethyleneterephthalate is dyed."}
{"WKU":"039307956","Title":"Process for the level dyeing of wool","App_Date":"1973-09-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hermann Fuchs;Hermann-Heinz Konrad","Assignee":"Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C09B 4900;D06P  314","References":"2643958;3278253","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for the level dyeing of wool, having an anti-felting finishconsisting of a coating layer of polyimine or of polyamine resin,according to the exhaustion method, with reactive dyestuffs which containtwo or more sulfonic acid or sulfonate groups, other than sulfonic acid orsulfonate groups contained in the fiber-reactive groupings, which processcomprises: carrying out the dyeings with a dyestuff or with a combinationof dyestuffs having different absorbing capacity, from an aqueous bath atelevated temperature and adding at least one compound of the formula##SPC23##wherein X is hydrogen or the radical of the formula --SO.sub.3 (H,Na),R.sub.1 is alkyl having 2 to 14 carbon atoms, R.sub.2 is hydrogen or alkylhaving 2 to 14 carbon atoms and A is a bridge-member of the formula--CH.sub.2 -- or##SPC24##2. A process as claimed in claim 1, wherein the compounds of the formulaeI, II or III are used in amounts of from 0.2 to 2 %, calculated on theweight of the dry wool.3. A process as claimed in claim 2, wherein the compounds of the formulaeI, II or III are used in amounts of from 0.5 to 1 %, calculated on theweight of the dry wool.4. A process as claimed in claim 1, wherein an alkali-yielding agent isallowed to act on the dyeings in the same bath in an amount capable ofchanging the pH of the liquor gradually from the acid to the neutral rangein the course of the after-treatment operation.5. A process as claimed in claim 4, wherein the alkali-yielding agent issodium trichloroacetate."}
{"WKU":"039307964","Title":"Catalytic fume control device","App_Date":"1973-09-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Vladimir Haensel","Assignee":"Universal Oil Products Company","ICL_Class":"A61L  900;B01J  802;H01K  128","References":"1678778;1864980;2539696;3043977;3200280;3362783;3462632;3558958;3681260;3763347;3768982","Claims":"I claim:1. A catalytic converter for use in purifying air in a room or generallysmall zone, which comprises an electric lamp bulb adapted to be mounted inan electric current supplying receptacle and having on at least a portionof its external surface a covering of a refractory inorganic material andan oxidation catalyst comprising at least one metal of Groups I, V, VI andVIII of the Periodic Table, whereby the heat from the bulb will maintain ahot catalyst surface to assist in the catalytic conversion of fumes andodors passing over the bulb in natural convection current flow.2. The catalytic converter of claim 1 further characterized in that aseparate wall means is held in a spaced position around at least the lowerportion of said lamp bulb to provide an annular space therebetween andenhance convection air stream flow in such annular space.3. The catalytic converter of claim 1 further characterized in that saidelectric lamp bulb is provided with a threaded end and is adapted to beinserted into a threaded electric current supplying receptacle.4. The catalytic converter of claim 1 further characterized in that saidcovering comprises a mixture of said refractory material and catalyst.5. The catalytic converter of claim 1 further characterized in that saidcovering comprises separate layers of said refractory material and saidcatalyst, the refractory layer tightly encompassing at least a portion ofthe bulb surface and being coated with the catalyst layer.6. The catalytic converter of claim 5 still further characterized in thatsaid covering comprises a catalytic coated foil-like material.7. The catalytic converter of claim 5 still further characterized in thatsaid refractory material comprises wound refractory inorganic fibers.8. The catalytic converter of claim 5 still further characterized in thatsaid refractory material comprises a fabric type of material in turnformed from heat resistant fibers."}
{"WKU":"039307972","Title":"Air treatment device","App_Date":"1974-07-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Albert E. Gertz","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A61L  904;F24F  312;A61L  300;F24F 1316","References":"234369;2460335;2867866;3290112;3419217;3474598;3576593;3661323;3694146;3820308","Claims":"I claim:1. In combination, with an air duct having a duct wall, said wall having anopening therein, an air treatment device comprising:A substantially rectangular face plate fixedly secured to the duct wall,the face plate defining a port, and the port being aligned with theopening in the duct wall;hinge sleeves on one side of the face plate;an imperforate door configured to fit over the face plate, the door havinghinge sleeves on one side thereof aligned with the hinge sleeves of theface plate;hinge pins extending through the aligned hinge sleeves, and hingedlyconnecting the door to the face plate, the door being movable from apivoted open position providing access through the port and opening to aclosed position over said port;a box secured to the face plate and projecting through the opening into theduct;the box having an imperforate back wall, imperforate side walls, and anopen top frame;the box further having a lower base wall secured to the side and backwalls;a pair of L-shaped flange members, one of said flange members being securedto each of the side walls, the flange members including horizontal footportions which extend upwardly in closely spaced relation to the lowerbase wall;an upper base wall mounted for a limited sliding movement within the boxbetween the lower base wall and the foot portions of the flanges;the upper base wall having a handle thereon to facilitate sliding movementthereof;the upper and lower base walls each having a series of holes formedtherein, said holes being spaced apart and having imperforate sectionstherebetween, the holes of the respective walls being selectivelyalignable and movement of the upper base wall serving to fully close,fully or partially align the holes; anda quantity of air dispersible substance in an enclosure, said substancebeing conveyed through the duct when the holes are fully or partiallyaligned, said enclosure being supported on the upper base wall."}
{"WKU":"039307980","Title":"Method and apparatus for testing aqueous samples","App_Date":"1973-05-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Gunter Schierjott;Herbert A. Bleier","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"G01N 3318","References":"3512936;3540845;3703355","Claims":"Having thus described the invention, what is desired to be secured byLetters Patent and hereby claimed is:1. A method of simultaneously and continuously determining the amount ofinorganic carbon and organic carbon contained in an aqueous sample, and ofdetermining the amount of an oxidizing agent consumed by such sample, thismethod comprising continuously treating a homogeneous aqueous sample witha strong acid to convert all the inorganically bound carbon contained insaid sample to carbox dioxide and thereby form a first gas-liquid mixtureincluding said formed carbon dioxide and the treated sample, separatingthe gas, which is carbon dioxide, from said first gas-liquid mixture anddetermining the amount thereof, treating the liquid portion of said firstgas-liquid mixture with an excess of an oxidizing agent to thereby convertall the organically bound carbon contained therein to carbon dioxide andthus form a second gas-liquid mixture, separating the gas, which is carbondioxide, from said second gas-liquid mixture and determining the amountthereof, said amount being a measure of the total organic carbon of saidsample and measuring the amount of unreacted oxidizing agent contained inthe liquid portion of said second gas-liquid mixture to thereby determinethe amount of said oxidizing agent which has been consumed by the sample.2. A method as claimed in claim 1 wherein the strong acid is concentratedsulfuric acid.3. A method as claimed in claim 1 wherein the oxidizing agent is a mixtureof potassium dichromate and silver sulfate (I).4. A method as claimed in claim 1 wherein the amount of carbon dioxidecontained in the second gas-liquid mixture is determinined byconductimetrically titrating said carbon dioxide with sodium hydroxide ina conventional conductivity measuring means.5. A method as claimed in claim 1 wherein the amount of unreacted oxidizingagent contained in the liquid portion of said second gas-liquid mixture isdetermined by reacting said unreacted oxidizing agent with a redox reagenthaving a previously determined potential and thereafter determining thepotential of the reaction mixture, the difference between said twopotentials being a measure of the amount of unreacted oxidizing agent.6. A method as claimed in claim 5 wherein the redox reagent is a mixture offerrous ammonium sulfate and ferric ammonium sulfate.7. A method as claimed in claim 4 comprising removing chlorine gascontained in the carbon dioxide portion of the second gas-liquid mixturebefore said carbon dioxide is conductimetrically titrated with sodiumhydroxide.8. A method as claimed in claim 7 wherein said chlorine gas is removed bypassing said carbon dioxide through a chlorine removal zone having tingranulate disposed therein.9. Apparatus for analyzing aqueous samples comprising, in combination, amulti-channel peristaltic pump for continuously introducing measuredamounts of a plurality of samples and reagents into said apparatus,reacting means connected to and operatively associated with said pump forreacting an aqueous sample with a strong acid to convert inorganicallybound carbon in said sample to carbon dioxide, separating means connectedto said reacting means for separating said carbon dioxide from saidsample, an oxidation reactor connected to and operatively associated withthe separating means, for reacting the sample, from which carbon dioxidehas been removed, with an oxidizing agent to convert organically boundcarbon in said sample to carbon dioxide, gas-liquid separation means forseparating said carbon dioxide from the sample having the oxidizing agentadded thereto, means for determining the amount of carbon dioxide obtainedfrom said organically bound carbon, measuring means for determining theamount of oxidizing agent remaining in said sample after the separation ofsaid carbon dioxide, and recording means for continuously recording theresults of the determinations of carbon dioxide and remaining oxidizingagent, said recording means being connected to and operatively associatedwith said measuring means."}
{"WKU":"039307999","Title":"Apparatus for making organic fertilizer","App_Date":"1974-07-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Eric W. Eweson","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"C05F  306;B01F  906","References":"313401;2994592;3224839;3235369;3245759","Claims":"I claim as my invention:1. Apparatus for making organic fertilizer comprising a cylindrical drumhaving an inlet end and a discharge end, means for rotating said drum on alongitudinal axis tilted at an angle to the horizontal, a plurality ofchains located within said drum, each of said chains having its endsmounted on the interior wall of the drum at diametrically opposedpositions, the length of each chain being slightly greater than thecircumferential distance between the points of attachment so as to form aloop therebetween, the points of attachment of each chain being spacedcircumferentially from the points of attachment of other chains with theloop of each chain partially overlapping the loop of each adjacent chain,with all of said points of attachment lying substantially in a commonplane whereby the loops of adjacent chains rub against each other as thedrum rotates.2. Apparatus as claimed in claim 1, including a multiplicity of knivesmounted on the interior wall of said drum, said knives lying in planesperpendicular to the axis of rotation of said drum and extending inwardlytoward the axis of rotation, and in which said chains are located betweenat least some of said knives and said discharge end.3. Apparatus as claimed in claim 2 in which the interior of said drum isdivided into a plurality of compartments by transverse partitions, each ofwhich has apertures therein to permit passage of material from onecompartment to the next, and in which said knives are mounted in a firstcompartment and said chains are mounted in a second compartment betweensaid first compartment and said discharge end."}
{"WKU":"039308006","Title":"Fluidized bed desubliming apparatus for recovery of aluminum chloride","App_Date":"1973-08-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ronald C. Schoener;Larry K. King;Lester L. Knapp;Nicholas Kloap","Assignee":"Aluminum Company of America","ICL_Class":"B01D  700;B01J  216","References":"2583013;2607440;3133109","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Apparatus for effecting the desublimation of gaseous aluminum chlorideto solid form, comprisingchamber means for confining a self replenishing fluidizable bed ofparticles of aluminum chloride,a gas distribution plate defining the bottom of said fluidizable bed ofparticles,a gas distribution inlet disposed beneath said distribution plate forintroduction of substantially aluminum chloride free gas into said chamberto maintain said bed of particles of aluminum chloride in fluidizedcondition,cooling means disposed within said chamber and in the portion thereofoccupied by said bed of fluidized particles for maintaining thetemperature of said bed of particles at a predetermined value below theupper ambient conditon desublimation temperature of aluminum chloride.means disposed remote from said gas distribution plate and from saidcooling means for introducing a flow of gas containing gaseous aluminumchloride into said bed of fluidized aluminum chloride particles remotefrom all contact surfaces within said chamber which are at a temperaturebelow the ambient desublimation temperature of aluminum chloride todesublime at least a substantial portion of said gaseous aluminum chlorideon the surfaces of said aluminum chloride particles of said bed,heating means for maintaining the temperature of said last mentioned meansand the temperature of the gas emanating therefrom above the ambientdesublimation temperature of aluminum chloride to prevent prematurecooling and deleterious condensation of the gaseous aluminum chloridevalues thereon,a residual gaseous effluent outlet disposed at the upper end of saidchamber and remote from the upper surface of the bed of fluidizedparticles disposed therewithin, andmeans disposed adjacent said gas distribution plate for withdrawingaluminum chloride particles from said bed.2. Apparatus according to claim 1 wherein said gas distribution plate isangularly positioned to direct a flow of heavier particles of aluminumchloride toward said particle withdrawing means concurrently with thepassage of fluidizing gas therethrough."}
{"WKU":"039308014","Title":"Apparatus for liquid extracting of products which are part of solid","App_Date":"1974-03-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Charles Henri Jules Pinet","Assignee":" Raffinerie tirlemontoise ","ICL_Class":"B01D 1102","References":"2637666;2645589;3297410;3400826;3595695;3809538","Claims":"I claim:1. In an apparatus for extracting materials from solids by contacting thesolids with counterflowing liquid, having:a revolving drum housing means,a pair of impervious to liquid wall means being mounted in said revolvingdrum housing means and being integral therewith, which wall means definewindings of two staggered helical screws said staggered helical screwsdefining two screw conveyors for conveying liquid into two separate flowsalong one axial direction of the drum housing means, there being a firstwinding and a last winding for each of said helical screws which definerespectively a screw sonveyors inlet end and outlet end for the liquid,central axial partition walls extending between the screws succeedingwindings and being integral with said drum housing means to separate saidwindings into half portions of windings and to define two series of cellsfor solids, each cell being defined between a partition wall, said drumhousing means and succeding half portions of windings, said axialpartition walls being pervious to the liquid at peripheral portionsthereof which extend from said housing means up to a distance from thedrum housing means axis so that for each partition wall the peripheralportions comprise raising portions for the solids of one cell duringrevolving of the drum housing means,channel means for interconnection of adjacent cells in each series of cellsthrough openings in said half windings adjacent the central part of saidpartition walls, to convey solids from said solids raising portions alongthe central part of the axial partition walls from cell to cell in eachseries of cells in counteraxial direction in relation to the liquid flowsdirection, andmeans for feeding liquid at the inlet side of each of said two screwconveyor:the improvements comprising a first cell for solids in each series of cellswhich first cell is defined between the terminal half portion of the lastwinding of one of said helical screws and the succeeding half portion ofthe last winding of the second of said helical screws,a supply compartment for solids, which supply compartment comprises acircular housing means being in axial extension of said drum housing meansbeyond said first cells for solids, said extension having a substantiallyequal diameter to that of said drum housing means, which circular housingmeans being pervious to the liquid, a terminal diametral wall providedwith a central inlet opening for the solid being attached to said circularhousing means at a distance from each screw conveyor last winding, asupply compartment axial partition wall being mounted in said supplycompartment in extension of the partition wall defining the first cell forthe solids of each series of cells, said supply compartment partition wallstopping at a distance from said central inlet opening in said diametralwall, said supply axial partition having its peripheral portions perviousto the liquid and being each one in extension of the partition wallraising portion of one series of cells first cell, said supply compartmentaxial partition wall dividing said supply compartment into two cupplycells, each one having along the generatrix corresponding to the raisingpart of the supply compartment partition wall of said cell, a width (L1)equal to said raising part of the partition wall and along the generatrixcorresponding to the raising part of the partition wall of the secondsupply cell, a width (L2) corresponding to the sum of said raising partand of the raising part of the adjacent to said second supply cell firstcell,channel means being provided between said diametral terminal wall and saidlast screw conveyors half windings to convey the solids raised by theraising portion of the partition wall of each supply cell into the firstcell for solids of each series of cells, andsaid drum housing means comprises a portion which is pervious to theliquid, said pervious portion being situated in the extension of saidcircular housing means defining said supply compartment, said perviousportion of the drum housing means and said pervious circular housing meansdefining a cylindrical pervious housing means which extend from saidterminal diametral wall on a distance corresponding to the sum of thewidth of one raising part of the partition wall of the supply compartmentand to the width of the partition wall raising part of one of the adjacentto said supply cell first cells.2. An apparatus as claimed in claim 1 in which between the top of eachcentral channel located in the supply compartment, when considering saidchannel by the fall of the solid materials, and the portion facing thesupply opening in the terminal wall, is arranged a baffle element for thesolid material bounding said supply opening.3. An apparatus as claimed in claim 1 in which the terminal diametral wallis located when considering the zone where lies the solid material raisingelement of the first cell from each cell series, at a distance from thelast half winding of the screw conveyor which is in the range of the widthof a conveyor cell.4. An apparatus as claimed in claim 1 in which the supply compartmentterminal wall is pervious to the liquid between the drum circumference anda distance from the supply opening and in which a fixed ring liquid headersurrounds said cylindrical pervious housing means part of the apparatus asat least that portion which is pervious to the liquid of the terminalwall."}
{"WKU":"039308022","Title":"Industrial waste gas incinerator","App_Date":"1974-09-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Albert W. Beasley;James Clark","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F23G  706","References":"3289729;3560165;3702756;3808987","Claims":"We claim:1. An apparatus for oxidizing residual combustible hydrocarbons in a fluegas stream, comprising:an upright casing having an internal high temperature resistant refractorylined lower end wall portion forming a combustion chamber and having acentrally apertured bottom wall defining the lower limit of the combustionchamber;flue gas inlet means including a centrally apertured horizontally disposedledge underlying said casing in supporting relation and walls dependingfrom said ledge for forming a flue gas chamber communicating with thecombustion chamber;burner means in the flue gas chamber;an inner tubular bushing of high temperature resistant refractory materialcoaxial with the casing bottom wall aperture and spaced inwardly of thecombustion chamber refractory wall to define an annular expansion zonetherebetween;baffle means overlying said inner tubular bushing to cause initial settlingand downward flow of gases and entrained particulate matter,"}
{"WKU":"039308030","Title":"Anti-pollution apparatus","App_Date":"1974-09-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Karl Winter","Assignee":"CEAG Concordia Elektrizitats-Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"B01J  122;B01D 5334","References":"3395972","Claims":"I claim:1. Apparatus for purifying an air or gas flow of combustible vaporous orgaseous impurities comprising an adsorption chamber, an adsorption filterdisposed in said adsorption chamber, inlet means in said adsorptionchamber for the introduction of an air or gas flow of combustible vaporousor gaseous impurities for passage to one side of said filter permittingsaid air or gas to pass therethrough and charge said filter to apredetermined level, outlet means in said adsorption chamber for thedischarge of said air or gas passing through said filter and leaving theside of the filter opposite the side of introduction of said air or gas, afirst gas inlet closing member on the inlet side for introduction of saidair or gas containing impurities and a second gas outlet closing member onthe discharge side of said air and gas for blocking the flow of said airor gas, a first burning chamber outside said adsorption chamber forgenerating an inert gas, connecting means for introducing said inert gasinto said adsorption chamber at a point between said gas outlet closingmember and said opposite side of the filter, thereby passing said inertgas through said filter in a direction of flow opposite that of said airand gas to desorb said filter and a third inert gas flow closing member toblock the flow of said inert gas.2. Apparatus as set forth in claim 1 comprising said first and secondclosing members disposed in said inlet and outlet means, respectively,said first and second closing members being in an open position to permitthe passage of said air or gas through said filter and a closed positionwhen said filter is desorbed, said first burning chamber being connectedwith said outlet through said third closing member, a second burningchamber being connected with said inlet through a fourth closing member,said third and fourth closing members being closed when said air or gaspasses through said filter and being open when said filter is desorbed.3. Apparatus as set forth in claim 2, wherein said inert gas is generatedin said first burning chamber, said first burning chamber comprising meansfor stoichiometrically burning a hydrocarbon.4. Apparatus as set forth in claim 3, wherein a desorbate is produced whensaid filter is desorbed, said second burning chamber comprising means forsupplying oxygen to completely burn said desorbate.5. Apparatus as set forth in claim 1, wherein said filter comprisesactivated charcoal, silica gel or zeolite."}
{"WKU":"039308049","Title":"Deep sea gas generator container","App_Date":"1974-11-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"George F. Hickey, Jr.","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy","ICL_Class":"B01J  702;C06D  510;F23R  114","References":"2918003;3352238;3372996","Claims":"What is claimed and desired to be secured by letters patent of the UnitedStates is:1. In a gas generator which comprises a slug of material which reacts withwater to produce a gas, the improvement which includes,an elongated open ended housing of extensible material,said housing having an inside diameter substantially equal to the outsidediameter of said slug of material,a plastic end cap enclosing each end of said housing thereby confining saidslug within said housing,said plastic end caps having an outer diameter greater than the innerdiameter of said housing of extensible material, said end caps extendingsaid housing about the outer surface thereof,an aperture extending from the outer surface of and into one end cap, theaxis of the aperture being at an angle relative to and directed toward thelong axis of said housing;a blasting cap secured within said aperture,whereby activation of said blasting cap ruptures said end cap permittingwater to enter said housing thereby activating said slug of material toproduce gas from the reaction.2. The gas generator as claimed in claim 1 in whichsaid aperture in which said blasting cap is placed is at a 45.degree. anglerelative to the long axis.3. The gas generator as claimed in claim 1 in whichthe end cap not apertured for the blasting cap includes an axially alignedthreaded hole for securing said generator to a holder.4. The gas generator as claimed in claim 1 in whichsaid slug of material is pressed LiH with a suitable binder for generatinga hydrogen gas.5. The gas generator as claimed in claim 1 in whichsaid slug of material is mixed lithium and aluminum in powder form pressedinto a slug for generating hydrogen."}
{"WKU":"039308057","Title":"Apparatus receiving catalysts for the decontamination of exhaust gas of","App_Date":"1973-08-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Wilhelm Vogt;Eitel Goedicke;Gerhard Mietens;Hermann Glaser","Assignee":"Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"B01J  802;F01N  315","References":"2253516;3001605;3018841;3094394;3441382;3449086;3503715;3649213;3729936;3755534;3838977","Claims":"We claim:1. In an apparatus receiving catalysts for the decontamination of exhaustgas of internal combustion engines, wherein a container having alongitudinal axis and being disposed between a pair of covers is providedwith an inlet for introducing exhaust gas thereinto and an outlet forremoving decontaminated exhaust gas therefrom, said inlet and outlet beingspaced from each other and at least one bed of particulate catalyst beingconfined between a pair of pressure plates permeable to gas being disposedin the space between the inlet and outlet, the improvement which comprisesa clamping device being arranged outside and parallel with respect to thelongitudinal axis of the container and being rigidly secured to at leastone of the pair of container covers; said clamping device being an openframe-shaped mounting including two supporting beams disposedsubstantially parallel to said longitudinal axis and which are spacedapart and held in position by means of a cross beam; a thrust rod beingextended through said cross beam and through said at least one of saidpair of covers by means of a central passageway forming part of saidcover; the thrust rod portion projecting outwardly through said passagewaybeing threaded and carrying a nut positioned between said cross beam andsaid cover; and a helical spring concentrically surrounding said thrustrod, being clamped between said cross beam of said frame-shaped mountingand said nut and elastically urging the thrust rod into contact with atleast one of the pair of pressure plates confining the bed of catalyst,whereby the bed of catalyst is maintained under compression.2. The apparatus as claimed in claim 1, wherein the central passageway isprovided with a sleeve incorporating a labyrinth packing, receiving thethrust rod and sealing the cover of the container.3. The apparatus as claimed in claim 1, wherein the container contains twobeds of catalyst being spaced apart by means of spacers and being disposedwith one downstream of the other, with respect to exhaust gas travellingtherethrough.4. The apparatus as claimed in claim 3, wherein the container is penetratedin the area of the spacers by a further inlet for feeding secondary airthereinto.5. The apparatus as claimed in claim 3, wherein a pair of clamping devicesare disposed on opposite sides of the beds of catalyst."}
{"WKU":"039308065","Title":"Laminated cookware units","App_Date":"1973-01-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Nick S. Racz","Assignee":"Burdett Manufacturing Company","ICL_Class":"B02D 2014","References":"1792377;2468206;2664874;2941289;3173202;3456332;3468695;3490126;3788513","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A multiply, laminated cookware unit component comprisinga core comprising mild steel,continuous second and third layers comprising substantially homogeneous andpore-free rolled non-ferrous sheets of aluminum or alloys thereof pressurebonded directly to said steel core, said core being sandwiched between thesheets of said second and third layers such that one of said second andthird layers is positioned on the side of said core facing the food whichis to be prepared by said cookware unit component.2. The multiply unit component of claim 1 wherein said core is a sheet.3. The multiply unit component of claim 1 wherein the minimum thickness ofsaid second and third layers is at least 35 microns.4. The multiply unit component of claim 1 wherein at least one of saidsecond or third layers is polished.5. The multiply unit component of claim 1 wherein at least one of saidsecond or third layers is coated with a heat bonded cookware finish.6. The multiply unit component of claim 5 wherein said heat bonded coatingcomprises an inorganic coating heat bonded to at least one of said secondand third layers at a temperature in excess of 500.degree. C.7. The multiply unit component of claim 5 wherein said heat bonded coatingis of the PTFE family.8. The multiply unit component of claim 1 including an exposed edge on saidunit at which the end of said core is exposed, a protective coveringcomprising a portion of one of said second and third layers adjacent saidedge drawn to a length to extend beyond said edge and folded over the endof said core.9. The multiply unit component of claim 8 wherein said second and thirdlayers are anodic relative to the material of said core.10. The multiply unit component of claim 1 wherein at least one of saidsecond and third layers is substantially inert and anodic relative to saidcore and softer than the mild steel of said core and having a minimumthickness of at least 35 microns, andan inorganic vitreous coating bonded directly to the surface of at leastone of said second and third layers at a temperature in excess of500.degree. C.11. The multiply laminated component of claim 10 wherein said second andthird layers are roll plated to said mild steel core."}
{"WKU":"039308073","Title":"Plastic molding having satin finish type metallic luster","App_Date":"1974-04-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Tatsumi Kobayashi;Tadashi Ito;Yoshihide Kamei;Teruhisa Oda;Toshio Matsuki","Assignee":"Canon Kabushiki Kaisha","ICL_Class":"B32B 1508","References":"3479160;3496623;3527579;3558290;3661538;3681209;3771977","Claims":"We claim:1. A metal-coated plastic molding having a satin finish type metallicluster comprising:a. A plastic molding having a satin finish;b. An intermediate electroless plated layer of electrically conductivematerial bonded to said satin finished base, said intermediate layerhaving a mechanically polished uniform surface; andc. An electroplated metal outer layer bonded to said intermediate layer.2. A plastic molding according to claim 1 wherein said outer electroplatedlayer comprises a chromium layer overlying a nickel layer.3. A plastic molding according to claim 1 wherein the thickness of themetal film is 5 to 20 .mu..4. In the method for forming a plastic molding having a satin finish typemetallic luster by applying satin finishing to the surface of the plasticmolding to make the surface uneven, electrolessly applying a chemicalplating to the satin surface to form a conductive coating, and applying anelectroplated metal layer over said conductive coating, the improvementwhich comprises mechanically polishing the conductive coating to form auniform surface thereon prior to applying said electroplated layer wherebythe minimum thickness of said outer layer is about 5 microns, peelingtendencies of said conductive layer are reduced, and said satin finish isprotected from deterioration during manufacture.5. A plastic molding according to claim 4 wherein the satin finishing iscarried out using an abrasive grain of 80 to 150 mesh.6. A plastic molding according to claim 4 wherein the polishing treatmentof the conductive coating is carried out using an abrasive grain."}
{"WKU":"039308081","Title":"Automatic collet hinge/screw placement machine","App_Date":"1975-02-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Leslie R. Miller;John D. McKenney","Assignee":"Royal Industries, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B23P 1900","References":"3466730;3537166;3675297;3772757","Claims":"We claim:1. An automatic screw insertion machine comprising:means for storing, delivering and inserting screws into a workpieceadjacent one edge thereof;a table upon which the workpiece is placed to receive said screws, one edgeportion of the table being generally below the first-mentioned means;means for relatively lowering and elevating said table edge to facilitateplacement of said workpiece edge directly beneath said first-mentionedmeans;first stop means physically locating said workpiece edge exactly along apredetermined line on said table;second stop means physically locating the ends of said workpiece in apredetermined position on said table in respect to said first-mentionedmeans.2. In an apparatus for inserting a screw into a workpiece comprising:means for inserting screws into the workpiece;a table upon which the workpiece is placed;a plurality of edge stop abutments, at least one said edge stop abutmentcomprising a master switch enabling the apparatus, when actuated byengagement with one edge of the workpiece upon the table, said edge stopabutments serving to engage and precisely orient said workpiece edge alonga pre-defined line on the table;a plurality of selectively operable end stop abutments, the end stopabutments serving to selectively engage and precisely orient respectiveends of the workpiece on the table;means for relatively displacing each end stop abutment between interferingand non-interfering locations respecting the workpiece;whereby the workpiece is precisely three dimensionally located on thetable.3. The apparatus of claim 2 wherein the screw inserting means comprise:a head simultaneously holding at least one screw for insertion into theworkpiece;driver means advancing and rotating the screw into the workpiece; andfurther comprising:means relatively displacing the head to a position adjacent the workpiece;the screw inserting means further comprising:power means causing the driver means to advance and rotate;control means enabling the power means only when the head is adjacent theworkpiece.4. The apparatus of claim 2 wherein said end stop abutments comprise two,wherein said displacing means oppositely simultaneously displace said twoend stop abutments and further comprising two switches exposed at thesurface of the table spaced such that one or the other but not both isactuated by the work piece upon the table to elevate one and lower theother end stop abutment whereby the work piece can be accurately placed ineither or both, sequentially, of two predetermined positions to receivescrews.5. In an automatic screw insertion machine:a frame;a waist level table supported by the frame;a plurality of horizontally oriented rods carried by the frame;a plurality of workpiece edge and end stop abutments slidably disposed uponat least one of said rods;means for locking each stop abutment in a selected position along said atleast one rod;at least one mechanism, comprising a screw storage reservoir, screw feedingmeans, screw holding means and screw driving means movably mounted uponone or more of said rods for simultaneously inserting sets of screws intoa workpiece;means for locking said at least one mechanism in a selected position alongsaid one or more rods.6. An automatic machine for simultaneously placing a plurality of screwsinto the body of a workpiece comprising:a screw delivery mechanism comprising:"}
{"WKU":"039308090","Title":"Assembly fixture for fixed point probe card","App_Date":"1974-07-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Arthur Evans","Assignee":"Wentworth Laboratories, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B23K  114;H05K  118","References":"3445770;3738560","Claims":"I claim:1. A fixture for assembling a probe card adapted to test an integratedcircuit pattern formed on a substrate, said card including a board havingan opening providing access to said pattern and surrounded by an array ofconductive pads and probes cantilevered from the pads, each probe beingconstituted by a needle-holding blade disposed in the vertical plane at aposition slightly raised above its associated pad and having a needleextending therefrom to engage a contact on the pattern; said fixturecomprising:A. a chuck for holding said integrated circuit substrate to present thepattern thereof;B. a platform for supporting said probe card board at a position in whichthe opening of the board is aligned with the chuck,C. means for shifting said platform in the X and Y directions to orientsaid array of pads surrounding the board opening relative to the presentedpattern,D. an arm for gripping the blade of a probe to be assembled to hold theblade in the vertical plane, andE. means to shift said arm in the X, Y and Z directions to align said bladeat a raised position with respect to a selected pad and to align the pointof the needle extending from the blade with a contact on said pattern,whereby when the blade is properly oriented it may be soldered to saidpad.2. A fixture as set forth in claim 1, further including means to adjust theposition of said chuck in the theta and Z directions to present saidsubstrate.3. A fixture as set forth in claim 1, wherein said gripping arm isconstituted by a pair of jaws which are relieved to define two pairs ofopposing teeth which grip the holder at spaced positions to preventbending thereof without a heat sink effect that inhibits a solderingoperation.4. A fixture as set forth in claim 1, further including a microscopetrained on said chuck to facilitate the alignment operations.5. A fixture as set forth in claim 4, further including a continuity testerto determine where the needle makes electrical and physical connectionwith a selected contact on said pattern, said tester including a powersource connected in series with a light indicator to said arm for grippingthe needle-holder, said arm being electrically insulated from said fixturewhereby a circuit to said indicator is completed only when said needlemakes said connection.6. A fixture as set forth in claim 5, wherein said indicator is mountedbelow said microscope whereby one looking through the microscope sees saidlight when the circuit is completed."}
{"WKU":"039308103","Title":"Additives for petroleum distillates","App_Date":"1974-07-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Marion J. Gattuso","Assignee":"Universal Oil Products Company","ICL_Class":"C10L  122","References":"3030939;3294499;3598553;3653853;3686315;3756795","Claims":"I claim as my invention:1. An additive formulation for petroleum distillates which comprises fromabout 50% to about 90% by weight of a solution of the polymeric reactionproduct of an epihalohydrin and an N-alkylpolyamine in which the alkylgroup contains at least 12 carbon atoms, from about 10% to about 50% byweight of a solution of the polymeric reaction product of an epihalohydrinand a primary alkylamine in which the alkyl portion contains at least 12carbon atoms, from about 1% to about 10% by weight of an alcohol of from 1to 5 carbon atoms, and from about 1% to about 10% by weight of a copolymerof ethylene oxide and propylene oxide.2. The additive formulation of claim 1 in which said epihalohydrin isepichlorohydrin.3. The additive formulation of claim 2 in which said N-alkylpolyamine isN-tallow-1,3-propanediamine.4. The additive formulation of claim 2 in which said N-alkylpolyamine isN-soya-1,3-propanediamine.5. The additive formulation of claim 2 in which said primary amine ishydrogenated tallow amine.6. The additive formulation of claim 2 in which said primary amine is oleylamine.7. The additive formulation of claim 2 in which said N-alkylpolyamine isN-tallow-1,3-diaminopropane and said primary alkylamine is oleyl amine.8. The additive formulation of claim 1 in which said alcohol is ethylalcohol.9. The additive formulation of claim 1 in which said alcohol is isopropylalcohol.10. Petroleum distillate containing from about 25 to about 1,000 ppm. byweight of the addition formulation of claim 1.11. The composition of claim 10 in which said petroleum distillate isgasoline.12. The composition of claim 10 in which said petroleum distillate is adistillate fuel oil."}
{"WKU":"039308111","Title":"Reactor for the pressure gasification of coal","App_Date":"1974-09-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Heinz Hiller;Paul Rudolph","Assignee":"Metallgesellschaft Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C10J  316;C10J  342","References":"1412118;1810738;1814787;1972897;2808321","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Reactor for the continuous gasification of coal under superatmosphericpressures at elevated temperatures with gaseous gasification agents whichcontain free oxygen and with oxygen-free gasifying agents such as watervapor and/or carbon dioxide, comprising substantially conical rotary gratemeans rotatably mounted in the lower portion of the stationary reactorhousing, said reactor housing having a central ash discharge conduit belowthe rotary grate means, said rotary grate means being adapted to feedgasifying agent and/or discharge gasification residues, notwithstandingthe inside diameter of the reactor housing, the clearance a between therotary grate means and the housing is 100-200 millimeters, the height b ofthe annular rim of the rotary grate means is 100-350 millimeters, and thevertical distance c from the rotary grate means to the housing bottom is100-350 millimeters, said rotary grate means having at least one scraperaffixed thereto to withdraw ash from the housing bottom and move it tosaid central ash discharge conduit.2. Reactor of claim 1 wherein the clearance a amounts to at least 150millimeters and the clearance c to 150-250 millimeters.3. Reactor of claim 1 wherein the angle of elevation .alpha. of the conicalsurface of the rotary grate is 35.degree.-50.degree..4. Reactor of claim 3 wherein the angle of elevation .alpha. is about45.degree.."}
{"WKU":"039308120","Title":"Methane synthesis","App_Date":"1974-06-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Norman Harris;Ray Fowler","Assignee":"Davy Powergas Limited","ICL_Class":"C10K  302","References":"3511624","Claims":"It is claimed:1. A process for the production of methane comprising reacting hydrogen andat least one carbon oxide selected from the group consisting of carbonmonoxide and carbon dioxide, said hydrogen and carbon oxide comprising agas, by passing said gas over a Group VIII metal-containing catalyst,which catalyst is effective for the reaction at a temperature below500.degree.F., at a temperature sufficient to vaporize water and below550.degree.F. and at a pressure of 0 to 2000 psig. in the presence ofwater in the liquid phase to form methane and to vaporize water to removethe heat of the reaction.2. A process for producing a product gas containing increased methane bythe reaction of hydrogen with carbon monoxide and/or carbon dioxidecomprising feeding a gaseous feedstock produced by gasification of fossilfuels or aliphatic alcohols with steam and/or oxygen to a reaction chamberwhich contains a catalyst of a Group VIII metal and is effective for thereaction at a temperature below 500.degree.F., spraying water in theliquid phase over the catalyst so that the water evaporates and removesthe heat of reaction within the chamber, the reaction in the chamber beingcarried out below a temperature of 550.degree.F. and at a pressure of 0 to2000 psig, to form the product gas of increased methane content.3. A process for the production of methane comprising reacting hydrogenwith carbon monoxide or carbon dioxide in the presence of water in theliquid phase, removing the heat of reaction by evaporation of the water,said reaction being conducted with the use of a catalyst which iseffective for the reaction at a temperature below 500.degree.F.4. The process of claim 17 wherein the reaction temperature is below550.degree.F.5. The process of claim 3 wherein the reaction is carried out at asuper-atmospheric pressure up to 2000 psig.6. The process of claim 3 wherein the reaction is carried out at atemperature of from 350.degree. to 400.degree.F. and at a pressure of from250 psig to 350 psig.7. The process of claim 3 wherein the hydrogen and carbon monoxide orcarbon dioxide are produced by gasification of fossil fuels or aliphaticalcohols with steam and/or oxygen.8. The process of claim 7 wherein the gasification product is subjected toa shift conversion reaction prior to methanation.9. The process of claim 3 in which liquid water is introduced into areaction chamber which contains the catalyst for methanation.10. The process of claim 9 wherein the liquid water is recycled through thereaction chamber.11. The process of claim 9 wherein off-take from the methanation containscarbon dioxide and water, and carbon dioxide is removed from the off-takeafter separation of water.12. The process of claim 11 wherein the off-take from the reaction chamberand water separation are effected with recovery of heat from the off-take.13. The process of claim 3 wherein the water is present as a spray over thecatalyst and the gas and liquid water flows are co-current.14. The process of claim 9 wherein the water is present as a spray and isintroduced at at least one place in the reaction chamber over the catalystand the gas and water flows are co-current.15. The process of claim 3 wherein the methanation is effected in at leasttwo stages.16. The process of claim 3 wherein the catalyst comprises a Group VIIImetal.17. The process of claim 16 wherein the catalyst comprises Raney nickel andat least one metal of the platinum group."}
{"WKU":"039308138","Title":"Process for producing nitrogen dioxide-free oxygen-enriched gas","App_Date":"1974-11-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"David M. Gessner","Assignee":"General Electric Company","ICL_Class":"B01D 5322;B01D 5316","References":"2966235;3121624;3280536;3369343;3463603;3784478","Claims":"I claim:1. In a membrane permeation process to produce oxygen-enriched gas fromatmospheric air comprising delivering a flow of atmospheric air feed to anarray of selectively permeable membrane cells having a greaterpermeability of oxygen and nitrogen dioxide relative to nitrogen andmaintaining a pressure differential across said array to produce anoxygen-enriched permeate therethrough, the improvement for reducing thenitrogen dioxide content in said permeate to substantially nil comprising:i. initially passing the atmospheric air feed containing at least anambient content of nitrogen dioxide into contact with triethanolamineuntil removal of the nitrogen dioxide from the air feed is substantiallycomplete; andii. thereafter delivering the air depleted in nitrogen dioxide to themembrane cell array.2. A process as defined in claim 1 wherein the triethanolamine is supportedon a particulate substance.3. A process as defined in claim 2 wherein said inert particulate substanceis crushed firebrick.4. A process as defined in claim 3 wherein the triethanolamine loading onthe crushed firebrick comprises from about 10 to about 35% by weight.5. A process as defined in claim 2 including the step of compressing theatmospheric air before feeding it into contact with the triethanolaminesupported on said inert particulate substance.6. A process as defined in claim 5 wherein the triethanolamine supported onsaid inert particulate substance is maintained in a pressure tight vesselin the high pressure conduit feeding the membrane cell array.7. A process as defined in claim 1 wherein the ambient oxygen feed containsabout 0.1 parts per million of nitrogen dioxide and said membrane cellarray is adapted to deliver oxygen-enriched gas having about 40% oxygenand less than 0.0075 parts per million of nitrogen dioxide.8. A process as defined in claim 1 wherein said cell membranes are formedof a polyphenylene ether."}
{"WKU":"039308146","Title":"Process for producing oxygen-enriched gas","App_Date":"1974-11-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"David M. Gessner","Assignee":"General Electric Company","ICL_Class":"B01D 5322","References":"2609059;3256675;3771365","Claims":"I claim:1. In a membrane permeation process to produce oxygen enriched gas fromatmospheric air comprising delivering a flow of atmospheric air to anarray of series flow, selectively permeable membrane cells having agreater permeability of oxygen relative to nitrogen and maintaining apressure differential across said array to produce an oxygen enrichedpermeate therethrough, the improvement for controlling and detectingmembrane failure comprising:i. dividing the selectively permeable membrane into two groups of cells;ii. independently collecting the oxygen-enriched permeate output from eachof said groups of cells;iii. passing each collected permeate output through independent conduitmeans including means for restricting the flow of said oxygen enrichedpermeate output to initially produce zero pressure differential betweeneach conduit means, said pressure being measured in each conduit means ata location upstream of the flow restricting means;iv. continuously determining the presence or absence of a pressuredifferential between said conduit means; andv. discontinuing the process when a pressure differential is determined toexist between the conduit means indicating a membrane leakage failure inone of the two groups of membrane cells.2. A process as defined in claim 1 including the step of measuring thepressure differential across one of said restrictions whereby the totaloxygen enriched permeate flow delivered in the process is determined.3. A process as defined in claim 1 wherein the array comprises at leastfour cells and the two groups are provided by dividing alternate cells.4. A process as defined in claim 1 wherein at least one of said restrictingmeans is adjustable and the initial production of zero pressuredifferential between each conduit means is achieved by adjusting therespective restricting means.5. A process as defined in claim 1 including the steps of compressing theatmospheric air and delivering it to the array of cells in a compressedstate.6. A process as defined in claim 1 including the steps of delivering theatmospheric air to the array of cells at substantially ambient pressureand maintaining a partial vacuum within said cells for independentlycollecting the oxygen-enriched permeate for transfer into said independentconduit means.7. A process as defined in claim 1 wherein said cell array is adapted toprovide enriched gas having about 40% oxygen.8. A process as defined in claim 1 wherein said cell membranes are formedof a polyphenylene ether.9. A process as defined in claim 8 wherein each of said membranes is about1000 Angstroms in thickness.10. A process as defined in claim 1 wherein the independent conduit meansare adapted to deliver oxygen-enriched permeate for further use at a ratein the range of about 4 to 8 liters per minute."}
{"WKU":"039308154","Title":"Electrostatic apparatus for removing entrained particulate material from","App_Date":"1974-12-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Senichi Masuda","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B03C  302","References":"1428839;3577705;3733784;3739552","Claims":"I claim:1. Apparatus for removing particulate material from a gas stream in whichit is entrained, comprising:A. wall means defining"}
{"WKU":"039308162","Title":"Structure for a gas and liquid contacting chamber in a gas effluent","App_Date":"1973-04-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Gerhard Miczek","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B01D 4700","References":"630023;2233019;2343682;2351864;2886297;3131041;3722185","Claims":"I claim:1. In a gas effluent processing system, gas and liquid contacting apparatusadapted to separate particulate matter from a contaminated gas flowcomprising an elongated cylindrical casing defining a contacting chamber,said casing disposed with its longitudinal axis extending generallyvertically and having inlet conduit means disposed to direct contaminatedgas and scrubbing liquid flows into contact within said chamber wherebysaid flows progress downwardly in a spiraling flow path therethrough andparticulate matter is transferred from said gas flow to said liquid flow,means disposed at the lower end of said casing for exhausting gas flowfrom said chamber comprising an exhaust conduit having an upper endportion extending centrally upwardly into said chamber whereby surroundingspace for liquid flow is defined between said upper end of said conduitand the sidewall of said casing, the lower end of said surrounding spacebeing defined by a floor portion having a gradually downwardly spiralingsurface which descends in a direction concurrent with the path of saidwhirling gas flow, leading to a liquid outlet conduit, said liquid outletconduit being located below said floor portion and being directedgenerally outwardly for the purpose of receiving liquid flow guidedthereto by said downwardly spiraling surface and draining said liquid flowwith particulate matter therein away from said chamber, means located inthe upper end of said chamber on a level of said inlet conduit meansadapted to effect intermixing contact between the entering contaminatedgas flow and the liquid flow comprising a plurality of ring-like segmentsdisposed generally concentric to the chamber s longitudinal axis, each ofsaid ring-like elements being generally planar in cross-section and havingan outer pheripheral edge fastened in firm abutment against the insidesurface of said casing and being extended radially-inwardly toward saidchamber s longitudinal axis such that each of said segments forms a ledgefor intersecting liquid flow moving downward to the chamber, the ring-likeelements being vertically spaced apart to form a plurality of annular flowchannels oriented in a descending arrangement, and said channels beingdisposed relative to the inlet conduit means so that the contaminated gasflow moves initially through said chamber circumferentially within saidchannels.2. In a gas effluent processing system, gas and liquid contacting apparatusadapted to separate particulate matter from a contaminated gas flowcomprising an elongated cylindrical casing defining a contacting chamber,said casing disposed with its longitudinal axis extending generallyvertically and having inlet conduit means disposed to direct contaminatedgas and scrubbing liquid flows into contact within said chamber wherebysaid flows progress downwardly in a spiraling flow path therethrough andparticulate matter is transferred from said gas flow to said liquid flow,means disposed at the lower end of said casing for exhausting cleansed gasflow from said chamber comprising an exhaust conduit having an upper endportion extending centrally upwardly into said chamber whereby surroundingspace for liquid flow is defined between said upper end of said conduitand the sidewall of said casing, the lower end of said surrounding spacedefined by a floor portion having a gradually downwardly spiraling surfacedescending in a direction concurrent with the path of said whirling gasflow and leading to a liquid outlet conduit, said liquid conduit beinglocated below said floor portion and being directed generally outwardlyfor the purpose of receiving liquid flow guided thereto by said downwardlyspiraling surface and draining said liquid flow with particulate mattertherein away from said chamber, gas flow control means within said chamberadapted to influence said gas flow to progress downwardly through saidchamber in a winding pathway, said gas flow control means comprising astationary flow diverting device disposed within said chamber at a pointintermediate its length, said diverting device having a flow interrupterportion centrally located above the entrance into said exhaust conduit,said interrupter portion having blade-like elements therewith projectingradially outwardly toward the sidewall of said casing, said blade-likeelements are disposed in a spaced-apart relation whereby flow channels areformed between adjacent elements, and said elements are inwardly attachedto said interrupter portion, and at least a majority of said elementsterminate short of the side wall of said casing whereby an unobstructedpassage for liquid flow is defined at the outer end of most of saidelements.3. The apparatus of claim 2 further including means for increasing thevelocity of the contaminated gas flow at a point preceding the initialcontact of the contaminated gas flow with the liquid flow within saidchamber."}
{"WKU":"039308170","Title":"Extraction apparatus","App_Date":"1974-04-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kenneth Thomas Stevenson;George Alfred Wesson;George Armine Newell","Assignee":"Newclean Engineering Limited","ICL_Class":"B01D 4604","References":"2276805;2892512;3535851;3653190;3707046","Claims":"We claim:1. Extraction apparatus mounted on a roadway wheeled vehicle andcomprising:a. a storage chamber at the lower part of a detachably mounted tank;b. a plenum chamber at the upper part of said tank;c. means, including filter means, inter-connecting said storage chamber andsaid plenum chamber;d. outlet means at one end of said plenum chamber and in communicationtherewith;e. an extractor blower unit mounted in fixed position on said wheeledvehicle;f. detachable means connecting said extractor unit to said plenum-chamberoutlet means, said connecting means being adapted to be disconnected toallow said outlet means, said plenum chamber and said storage chamber tobe moved relative to said fixed extractor unit;g. a vent to atmosphere at said one end of said plenum chamber;h. inlet means at the opposite end of said storage chamber;i. valve means in said storage-chamber inlet means, in said plenum-chamberoutlet means and in said plenum-chamber vent, whereby when said valves areplaced in certain positions said extractor unit is effective to draw airthrough said inlet means into said storage chamber and through said filtermeans into said plenum chamber, and in other positions of said valves, airis sucked through said vent into said plenum chamber and through saidfilter means in the reverse direction into said storage chamber, therebyto effect self-cleaning of said filter means.2. Apparatus according to claim 1 in which a partition is provided todefine a filter chamber between the filter and the storage chamber.3. Apparatus according to claim 1 wherein:a. a blower chamber is provided at the inlet end of said storage chamber,said blower chamber having an outlet;b. said extractor unit includes a blower;c. conduit means connect said blower to said blowing chamber, wherebymaterial in said storage chamber is removable by blowing.4. Apparatus according to claim 1 in which the filter is a ceramic filter.5. Apparatus according to claim 4 in which the filter comprises ceramicfilter tiles.6. Apparatus according to claim 5 in which the tiles are removably mountedin a framework.7. Extraction apparatus mounted on a roadway wheeled chassis, saidapparatus comprising:a. an enlongated storage chamber at the lower part of a detachably mountedtank;b. a plenum chamber above and substantially coextensive with said storagechamber;c. filter means between and substantially coextensive with said storage andplenum chambers;d. input means at the rearward end of said storage chamber;e. valve means in said input means;f. outlet means in the forward end of said plenum chamber;g. vent means to atmosphere in said plenum-chamber outlet means;h. valve means in said vent means;i. blower means mounted in fixed position on said chassis forward of saidstorage chamber;j. disconnectable joint means connecting said blower means and saidplenum-chamber outlet means through valve means mounted in fixed positionon said chassis;k. said joint means adapted to be uncoupled to allow said plenum-chamberoutlet means to be moved relative to said blower means and blower valvemeans;l. a blower chamber at the rearward end of said storage chamber;m. conduit means connecting said blower means and said blower chamber;n. said blower means adapted to create a low-pressure condition on theplenum-chamber outlet side of said blower means and a high-pressurecondition on the blower chamber side; ando. a discharge outlet in said blower chamber.8. Apparatus according to claim 7 wherein:a. aeration pipe means are provided at the rearward end of said storagechamber;b. hose means are provided between said aeration pipe means and saidconduit means which connect said blower means to said blower chamber."}
{"WKU":"039308189","Title":"Air cleaner","App_Date":"1974-12-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Redford W. McDougall","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B01D 3100","References":"2085159;2152447;2808124;3629999;3715972;3791113","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An air cleaner for removing airborne contaminants in a room, comprising,a housing adapted to be hung from a ceiling or mounted to a wall anddefining a linearly elongated duct of rectangular cross section, a lowefficiency filter mounted spanning said duct at one end thereof, a highefficiency filter mounted spanning said duct on the side of said lowefficiency filter toward the opposite end of said duct from the end atwhich said low efficiency filter is mounted, said high efficiency filterhaving an efficiency of at least about 93 percent of the ASHRAEDiscoloration Test Method (Standard 52-68), a centrifugal blower mountedwithin said duct on the side of said high efficiency filter opposite saidlow efficiency filter, said blower having an axis of rotation which isperpendicular to the direction of elongation of said housing and havingintake and discharge orifices, baffle means mounted to said housing forisolating said intake and discharge orifices of said blower, said bafflemeans including a substantially planar panel closing said duct at the endthereof opposite said low efficiency filter and having an orifice therein,means detachably securing said panel to said duct, said blower having saiddischarge orifice engaging said panel at said panel orifice through whichsaid discharge orifice of said blower discharges in a directionsubstantially coinciding with the direction of flow of air through saidduct, a directional air diffuser mounted across the path of discharge ofsaid blower, and means mounting said blower and said air diffuser to saidpanel for removal therewith as a unit from said housing.2. An air cleaner according to claim 1 wherein said housing includes ashoulder extending about said duct adjacent the periphery of said highefficiency filter, and wherein said high efficiency filter has a mountingframe, said shoulder having a surface engaging said mounting frame of saidhigh efficiency filter on the side thereof toward said blower.3. An air cleaner according to claim 1 wherein said mounting means comprisea support plate secured to said panel, and means securing said blower tosaid support plate, said support plate being removable with said panel."}
{"WKU":"039308197","Title":"Press molded hot glassware handling apparatus","App_Date":"1975-02-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John Martin","Assignee":"Fabrication de Maquinas, S.A.","ICL_Class":"C03B 3900;C03B  914;C03B 1800;C03B 2700","References":"1478126;3167814;3205057;3328148;3361551;3372017","Claims":"I claim:1. A method of removing freshly molded glass articles such as plates, cups,tumblers and the like from the mold in which they were formed, said moldhaving means communicating atmospheric pressure to the underside of themolded article, the steps comprising:removing the press member from the mold to expose the upper surface of themolded article while still in the mold:positioning a Bernoulli nozzle member having a surface of the sameconfiguration as the upper surface of the molded article in verticallyclosely spaced non-contacting alignment therewith, said nozzle memberhaving fluid passageways extending therethrough and opening substantiallytangentially into said surface;forcing air under pressure through said fluid passageways along said nozzlesurface to create a thin film of high velocity air at less thanatmospheric pressure between said surface and the upper surface of saidmolded article;elevating said nozzle member to remove the article from the mold whilemaintaining closely spaced non-contacting relation between the nozzle andthe article; anddirecting a flow of air onto the underside of the article while supportedby said nozzle; whereby said article is simultaneously formed, heattreated and cooled without the necessity of mechanical contact therewith.2. The method defined by claim 1 including the additional steps of movingsaid nozzle and article horizontally away from the mold, then out of thepath of air flow on the underside of the article, and then over aconveying means and finally stopping the flow of air to said nozzle todeposit the article on said conveying means.3. The method defined by claim 1 in which said article is removed from itsmold while still too hot to be self supporting.4. A method defined by claim 2 including continuously repeating all saidsteps in timed relation to the operation of an associated moldingapparatus.5. Apparatus for removing freshly pressed glassware from a mold while stilltoo hot to be self supporting said mold having means communicatingatmospheric pressure to the underside of the molded article comprising:a Bernoulli nozzle member having a surface of substantially the same sizeand shape as the upper surface of the glass ware, said nozzle memberincluding a plurality of passageways therethrough terminating in openingsdirected substantially tangentially to said surface;means for forcing air under positive pressure through said passageways tocreate a moving film of air along said surface;means for supporting said member so that said surface is in closely spacedalignment with the glassware to be removed from its mold;means for elevating said member together with the glassware to remove itfrom the mold; andmeans for moving said support means in a plane parallel to the plane of themold to permit a succession of molding and removal steps.6. Apparatus as defined by claim 5 in which said support means includes amanifold supporting a plurality of nozzle members in a circular array andmeans for indexing said support means in circular fashion to alignsuccessive nozzle members with the mold."}
{"WKU":"039308200","Title":"Strengthening sheet glass by ion exchange","App_Date":"1974-06-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"william C. Cooke;Albert H. Agett","Assignee":"ASG Industries Inc.","ICL_Class":"C03C 2100","References":"3415637;3441398;3627491;3650720;3791809","Claims":"We claim:1. In the method of activating a molten bath of chemically impure potassiumnitrate for use in strengthening glass by an ion exchange method, theimprovement comprising adding to said molten potassium nitrate bath, aneffective amount of potassium chloride or arsenous sulfide to removesubstantially all of the calcium and magnesium impurities as compoundsthat are insoluble in potassium nitrate.2. The method of claim 1 in which the effective amount of arsenous sulfideadded to the chemically impure potassium nitrate bath is at least o.4% byweight of the potassium nitrate.3. The method of claim 1 in which the effective amount of potassiumchloride added to the chemically impure potassium nitrate bath is at least0.6% by weight of the potassium nitrate."}
{"WKU":"039308219","Title":"Process for making carbon-containing glass resistors","App_Date":"1975-01-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Thomas H. Elmer","Assignee":"Corning Glass Works","ICL_Class":"C03C 1500;C03C  700","References":"3378431;3390452;3628984;3632385;3640906;3775078;3810780;3813232","Claims":"I claim:1. An improved process for making a carbon-impregnated glass electricalresistance material which comprises the steps of:a. impregnating a porous 96% silica glass with an aqueous solution offurfuryl alcohol;b. contacting the impregnated porous glass with an aqueous solutioncontaining HCl in a concentration of at least about 6 Normal for a timesufficient to polymerize the furfuryl alcohol in the glass to a resin;c. drying the glass to remove water from the pore structure thereof, andd. firing the glass in a non-oxidizing atmosphere to a temperature of atleast about 1,200.degree.C. to convert the resin in the glass to carbonand to consolidate the porous glass.2. A process according to claim 1 which further comprises water-washing theimpregnated porous glass, subsequent to contacting said glass with theaqueous solution containing HCl, to reduce the concentration of HCl in theporous glass.3. A process according to claim 1 wherein the aqueous solution of furfurylalcohol contains a stabilizing agent selected from the group consisting ofthe lower alkanols of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms per molecule, saidstabilizing agent being present in said solution in an amount ranging fromabout 10-50 percent by volume.4. A process according to claim 3 wherein said aqueous solution of furfurylalcohol consists essentially of furfuryl alcohol, ethanol, and water.5. A process according to claim 1 wherein the aqueous solution containingHCl comprises HCl in a concentration ranging from 8 to 12 Normal.6. A process according to claim 1 wherein the aqueous solution of HCl is ata temperature of at least about 95.degree.C."}
{"WKU":"039308227","Title":"Process for making carbon-containing glass resistors","App_Date":"1975-01-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Thomas H. Elmer","Assignee":"Corning Glass Works","ICL_Class":"C03C 1500;C03C  700","References":"3378431;3390452;3628984;3632385;3640906;3775078;3810780;3813232","Claims":"I claim:1. An improved process for making a carbon-impregnated glass electricalresistance material having an electrical resistivity in the 10.sup.1.5 -10.sup.10 ohm-centimeter range which comprises the steps of:a. impregnating a porous 96% silica glass with an aqueous solution offurfuryl alcohol wherein furfuryl alcohol is present in an amount rangingabout 1-50 percent by volume;b. flash heating the solution impregnated porous 96% silica glass to atemperature in the range of about 150.degree.-225.degree.C. andmaintaining it at a temperature in that range for a time at leastsufficient to polymerize the furfuryl alcohol present in the glass to aresin; andc. firing the glass containing the resin in a non-oxidizing atmosphere to atemperature of at least about 1,200.degree.C. to convert the resin tocarbon.2. A process in accordance with claim 1 wherein flash-heating thesolution-impregnated porous 96% silica glass comprises heating the glassat a rate of at least about 750.degree.C. per hour to a temperature in therange of 150.degree.-225.degree.C.3. A process in accordance with claim 2 wherein the aqueous solution offurfuryl alcohol comprises a stabilizing agent selected from the groupconsisting of the lower alkanols of from one to four carbon atoms permolecule, said stabilizing agent being present in an amount ranging fromabout 10-50 percent by volume of said solution.4. A process in accordance with claim 3 wherein the stabilizing agent isethanol."}
{"WKU":"039308235","Title":"High temperature transducers and housing including fabrication methods","App_Date":"1973-05-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Anthony D. Kurtz;Joseph R. Mallon, Jr.","Assignee":"Kulite Semiconductor Products, Inc.","ICL_Class":"C03c 2900","References":"2889952;3404319;3486871;3503763;3533832;3662312","Claims":"We claim:1. A method for securing a disc-like diaphragm of the type having locatedon the surface thereof, a dielectrically isolated piezoresistive sensingelement, to a silicon annular ring housing, said silicon ring having asubstantially lower expansion property than a metal, comprising the stepsof:a. mixing a fine powdered solder glass compound with a suspension vehicleto thereby form a frit of a paste-like consistency,b. placing the frit about the top periphery of said silicon annular ring,c. securing the diaphragm in congruency with the annular ring with thesensing element positioned in the aperture,d. heating the structure for a predetermined period at a first elevatedtemperature to insure full evaporation of said suspension vehicle,e. heating the bonded diaphragm and ring at a second higher temperature fora second period to provide a bond between said diaphragm and said ring,said bond having a crystalline structure, andf. solder glass bonding said silicon annular ring to a second housing of anannular configuration, fabricated from a metal.2. The method according to claim 1 wherein said first period is forapproximately forty-five minutes at a temperature of about 170.degree.F.3. The method according to claim 1 wherein said second higher temperatureis about 800.degree.F and said second period is also about forty-fiveminutes.4. The method according to claim 1 wherein said solder glass is of thethermosetting type having a relatively low melting point when comparedwith ordinary glass.5. The method according to claim 1 wherein said suspension vehicle is amixture of nitrocellane and anylacetate."}
{"WKU":"039308243","Title":"Method of forming laser components","App_Date":"1974-07-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Carl Harry Knowles","Assignee":"Metrologic Instruments, Inc.","ICL_Class":"C03B 1108;C03B  900;C03B 1900","References":"1048227;1466973;2699014;3258434;3288585;3347651;3582300;3888205","Claims":"I claim:1. A method of manufacturing laser components comprising the steps of:providing a plurality of metallic annular elements interconnected in anintegral matrix structure;placing said matrix elements between top and bottom mold portions to definecavities around each of said annular elements, each cavity closing againstthe corresponding annular element between the inner and outercircumference thereof, for partial overlap by the mold portions of eachannular element;providing glass slugs in each of said cavities; melting and cooling saidslugs to conform to the shape of said cavities, thereby partially tooverlap each associated annular element with glass;optically finishing said glass; andseparating each element from the matrix at points which were overlapped bysaid mold portions and which therefore were not overlapped by meltedglass.2. A method as in claim 1 wherein said finishing step comprises:mounting said matrix on polishing fixture;grinding all glass portions to a desired configuration; and polishing allglass portions to a desired finish.3. A method as in claim 1 wherein the slugs are composed of a materialcompatible for bonding with the metal of said matrix."}
{"WKU":"039308251","Title":"Method of laser beam cutting of a ribbon of hot glass","App_Date":"1974-11-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Granger K. Chui","Assignee":"Ford Motor Company","ICL_Class":"C03B 2102","References":"3352015;3453097;3589883;3684473","Claims":"I claim:1. A method of forming an article of glass comprising:melting glass forming materials;forming a ribbon of flat glass in a ribbon forming apparatus;withdrawing the flat glass from the ribbon forming apparatus with thetemperature of the flat glass being in excess of 1000.degree.F.;moving the hot flat glass under at least a pair of focused laser beamdevices which project laser beams onto the glass capable of cuttingthrough the hot flat glass;moving the laser beams in a controlled manner having at least a lateralcomponent for each beam as the hot flat glass moves thereunder so that onelaser beam cuts out a first side portion of the article of glass and theother laser beam cuts out a second side portion of the article of glasswhereby a complete article shape is formed said laser beam paths having acommon intersecting point at the beginning and end of each article;removing the excess of the flat glass not forming a part of the article;andcooling the glass article in a controlled manner to produce a final glassarticle.2. The method of forming a glass article as defined in claim 1 wherein:prior to cooling the glass article is formed into an article having acurved configuration by a glass-shaping operation.3. The method of forming a glass article as defined in claim 1 wherein: thecooling of the glass article takes place at a rapid rate to produce atempered glass article.4. The method of forming a glass article as defined in claim 1 wherein: thecooling of the glass article takes place at a slow rate to produce anannealed glass article.5. The method of forming a glass article as defined in claim 2 wherein: thecooling of the glass article takes place at a rapid rate to produce atempered glass article.6. The method of forming a glass article as defined in claim 2 wherein: thecooling of the glass article takes place at a slow rate to produce anannealed glass article."}
{"WKU":"039308260","Title":"Conditioning flat glass for removal from supporting liquid following","App_Date":"1974-10-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James R. Schornhorst","Assignee":"PPG Industries, Inc.","ICL_Class":"C03B 1802","References":"3218143","Claims":"I claim:1. In a method of making flat glass comprising the steps of deliveringmolten glass onto the surface of a pool of molten metal contained in anenclosed chamber, supporting the glass on the molten metal, advancing thedelivered glass as a single layer of glass in a path along the surface ofthe pool of molten metal while cooling the glass to form a dimensionallystable, continuous sheet of glass and continuing to advance thedimensionally stable, continuous sheet of glass along the path of advance,freely lifting the dimensionally stable, continuous sheet of glasssubstantially vertically upwardly from the surface of the pool of moltenmetal and conveying the lifted, dimensionally stable, continuous sheet ofglass substantially vertically upwardly from the pool of molten metalwherein, as the dimensionally stable, continuous sheet of glass is freelylifted from the pool of molten metal, it assumes a continuously curvedshape along its length and an exposed meniscus of molten metal is formedacross the width and against one surface of the dimensionally stable,continuous sheet of glass, which surface had been in contact with themolten metal prior to lifting, the improvement which comprises:cooling the molten metal from within the pool of molten metal substantiallybeneath the glass being lifted and beneath the exposed meniscus of moltenmetal at a depth and in an amount sufficient to induce a downward flow ofmolten metal for drawing the meniscus downwardly whereby the elevationsand depressions characterizing the surface of the dimensionally stable,continuous sheet of glass which had been in contact with the molten metalare observably diminished.2. The method according to claim 1 wherein the pool of molten metal isprovided with greater depth beneath where the dimensionally stable,continuous sheet of glass is lifted and the cooling is at a depth and inan amount sufficient to cause a downward flow of molten metal into thegreater depth of molten metal.3. In an apparatus for making flat glass comprising means for preparingmolten glass, means for delivering molten glass from the molten glasspreparation means to a forming chamber, a forming chamber comprising anenclosed chamber having a bottom, a roof, spaced sidewalls and upstreamand downstream ends and containing a pool of molten metal having a generaldepth in a lower portion and a head space for maintaining a protectiveatmosphere over the pool of molten metal in an upper portion and furthercomprising means for advancing the glass along the surface of the pool ofmolten metal and means for cooling the glass during its advance to form acontinuous sheet of flat glass therefrom and means for lifting thecontinuous sheet of flat glass upwardly from the pool of molten metal at alifting location and for conveying it upwardly therefrom, the improvementcomprising:a trough extending transversely across the bottom of the chamber at thelifting location beneath the lifting means for providing a portion of thepool of molten metal with a depth sufficiently greater than the generaldepth of the pool of molten metal to provide for substantially greaterthermally induced circulation in the portion of greater depth than in theremainder of the pool of molten metal; andmeans for selectively cooling the molten metal in the portion of the poolof molten metal beneath the lifting location to a temperature below thetemperature of the molten metal upstream of the lifting location and belowthe temperature of the molten metal downstream of the lifting location,said cooling means extending at least partially lengthwise in the troughin the bottom of the forming chamber and extending at least partiallybeneath an exposed surface of the molten metal."}
{"WKU":"039308278","Title":"Method and apparatus for stabilizing movement of glass during its","App_Date":"1974-10-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"E. Kears Pollock","Assignee":"PPG Industries, Inc.","ICL_Class":"C03B 1802","References":"3223509;3333936;3533773","Claims":"I claim:1. In a process for making flat glass wherein molten glass is deliveredonto the surface of a pool of molten metal in an enclosed forming chamberhaving a bottom, an upstream inlet end, a downstream outlet end, and aroof and side walls extending from the upstream end to the downstream endof the chamber and providing an enclosed space between them and beneaththe roof; advancing the glass along the surface of the pool of moltenmetal from the upstream end toward the downstream end of the chamber;cooling the advancing glass to form a dimensionally stable, continuoussheet of glass therefrom; and removing the continuous sheet of glass fromthe forming chamber, wherein the advancing glass has tendency to driftfrom a direct path of advance; the improvement comprisingselectively adjusting and maintaining the temperature of at least onemarginal edge portion of the advancing glass to maintain the advancingglass in a preselected path by controlling the transfer of heat betweenthe marginal edge portion of the glass and a radiant cooler, wherein suchcontrol is achieved by partially shielding the cooler from the glass by aheat reflective enclosure having an elongated aperture facing a marginaledge portion of the advancing glass and substantially aligned with itsedge.2. The method according to claim 1 wherein the temperature of each marginaledge portion of the glass is adjusted and maintained at least at alocation spaced downstream sufficiently from the upstream end of thechamber to provide for the development of an advancing layer of freelyflowable glass of substantially uniform transverse thickness between theupstream end of the chamber and the location and sufficiently close to theupstream end of the chamber so that the affected glass has not yet reacheddimensional stability.3. The method according to claim 2 wherein the width of the glass isdecreased as it is formed and the temperature of each marginal edgeportion of the glass is adjusted and maintained at least as the width ofthe advancing glass is decreasing.4. The method according to claim 2 wherein the temperature of each marginaledge portion of the glass is adjusted and maintained at least twolocations respectively spaced a first distance and a second, greaterdistance downstream from the upstream end of the chamber, wherein thesecond location that is spaced a greater distance downstream from theupstream end of the chamber is sufficiently spaced therefrom to providefor the development of the advancing layer of freely flowable glassbetween the upstream end of the chamber and the second location of glasstemperature adjustment and maintenance.5. The method according to claim 4 wherein the glass of one marginal edgeportion is cooled more at its first location than at its second locationwhile the glass of the other marginal edge portion is cooled more at itssecond location than at its first location.6. The method according to claim 1 wherein the marginal edge portions ofthe glass are supported by molten metal having lesser depth than thatsupporting the central portion of the glass as the glass is advanced fromits location of delivery at the upstream end of the chamber to a locationfor said selective adjustment and maintenance of the temperature of eachmarginal edge portion of the advancing glass.7. The method according to claim 6 wherein the glass is delivered along asubstantially horizontal path onto the pool of molten metal and whereinthe depth of molten metal supporting the central portion of the glass hasa depth that is maintained to vary with respect to distance from theupstream end of the chamber and with respect to distance from thecenterline of the chamber extending from the upstream end of the chamberto the downstream end midway between its side walls.8. The method according to claim 7 wherein the depth of the molten metalbeneath the central portion of the advancing glass substantiallyimmediately following its delivery is such that the molten metal in thatcentral portion is maintained as a truncated paraboloid having itstruncated section as a plane substantially parallel to the glasssupporting surface of the molten metal and its apex facing the upstreamend of the forming chamber.9. In an apparatus for making flat glass comprising a forming chamber;means for delivering a layer of molten glass to the forming chamber; andmeans for removing a formed continuous sheet of flat glass from theforming chamber; wherein the forming chamber includes a bottom, anupstream end adjacent the molten glass delivery means, a downstream endadjacent the glass sheet removal means, side walls extending from theupstream end to the downstream end and upwardly from the bottom and a roofextending between the side walls and between the upstream and downstreamends providing an enclosed space, the enclosed space containing a pool ofmolten metal on the bottom for receiving and supporting glass deliveredthereto and a headspace overlying the pool of molten metal; means foradvancing glass along the surface of the pool of molten metal; and meansfor cooling the glass during its advance for forming it into a continuoussheet; the improvement comprisinga pair of radiators disposed in the headspace of the chamber, one radiatorspaced inwardly from each side wall to overlie a marginal edge portion ofan advancing layer of glass, each being individually controllable forseparately adjusting and maintaining the temperature of the marginal edgeportion of the glass it overlies, said radiators being spaced sufficientlyfrom the upstream end of the chamber to provide for the development of anadvancing layer of glass between them and the upstream end of the chamberand spaced sufficiently close to the upstream end of the chamber foroverlying the glass before it is cooled sufficiently to reach dimensionalstability, wherein each of said radiators comprises a cooler within anenclosure having a surface providing an aperture for facing a marginaledge portion of an advancing layer of glass.10. The apparatus according to claim 9 wherein each of said radiators iselongated having a long dimension defining its length and a shortdimension defining its width and each is disposed within the chamber sothat its long dimension lies in a line extending from the upstream end tothe downstream end of the chamber.11. The apparatus according to claim 10 wherein each of said radiators isdisposed within the chamber so that its long dimension is substantiallyaligned with a centerline joining the upstream and downstream ends of thechamber at their mid-points.12. The apparatus according to claim 9 wherein each of said enclosures hasa surface providing an elongated aperture having a long dimension and ashort dimension and wherein said radiator is disposed within the chamberso that the aperture faces a marginal edge portion of an advancing layerof glass with its long dimension substantially aligned with an intendedpath of advance for the edge of the advancing layer of glass.13. The apparatus according to claim 12 wherein the surface providing theaperture is a heat reflecting surface.14. The apparatus according to claim 9 wherein each of said radiatorsfurther comprises a heater mounted thereon for facing a marginal edgeportion of an advancing layer of glass.15. The apparatus according to claim 14 wherein said heater is an electricheater.16. The apparatus according to claim 9 wherein each of said radiatorscomprises a plurality of individually controllable sections along itslength.17. The apparatus according to claim 9 wherein each of said radiatorsfurther comprises means for directing a gas through its enclosure.18. The apparatus according to claim 9 wherein each of said radiatorsfurther includes thermal insulation at least partially surrounding saidcooler separating it from its enclosure.19. The apparatus according to claim 9 wherein the bottom of the chamber ina region adjacent the upstream end of the chamber provides for a greaterdepth of molten metal in a central portion of the chamber than along thebottom adjacent the side walls of the chamber.20. The apparatus according to claim 19 wherein the region of the bottom ofthe chamber providing for a greater depth of molten metal in the centralportion of the chamber at least partially underlies said radiators.21. A radiator for use in a glass forming chamber, wherein glass issupported on and advanced along a pool of molten metal for forming theglass into a continuous sheet of flat glass, comprisinga. a shell including a face with a glass facing surface having an elongatedopening therein;b. a cooler disposed within said shell and facing the opening of the glassfacing face thereof and providing a space between said cooler and saidshell;c. coolant conduits connected to said cooler through said shell; andd. means for supporting said shell and said cooler in a glass formingchamber over a marginal edge portion of advancing glass contained thereinand for aligning the elongated opening substantially along a desired pathof advance for the marginal edge portion of the glass.22. The radiator according to claim 21 wherein the glass facing surface ofsaid shell is a heat reflecting surface.23. The radiator according to claim 21 wherein said coolant conduits arethermally insulated adjacent said shell.24. The radiator according to claim 21 wherein thermal insulation isdisposed in at least a portion of the space between said cooler and saidshell.25. The radiation according to claim 21 further comprising a heater mountedon said shell for facing advancing glass in a glass forming chamber.26. The radiator according to claim 21 further comprising means fordirecting a protective gas into the space between said cooler and saidshell."}
{"WKU":"039308286","Title":"Thermal control in a glass sheet forming chamber","App_Date":"1974-10-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Gerald E. Kunkle","Assignee":"PPG Industries, Inc.","ICL_Class":"C03B 1802","References":"3503728;3645713","Claims":"I claim:1. In a method of making glass comprising the steps of delivering moltenglass onto the surface of a pool of supporting molten metal; advancing theglass along the surface of the pool of molten metal while cooling it andapplying forces to it to form a continuous sheet of glass; removing thecontinuous sheet of glass from the surface of the pool of molten metal;and conveying the continuous sheet of glass from the pool of molten metalby applying a force to the glass; the improvement comprisingadvancing the glass in a path along the surface of the pool of molten metalover a plurality of compartments of molten metal; separated from oneanother by barriers disposed across the path of advance of the glass, themolten metal of adjacent compartments being in communication immediatelybeneath the advancing glass; and cooling the molten metal within acompartment by removing sufficiently more heat from the molten metal in anupstream portion of the compartment closest the barrier over which glassfirst advances than from the molten metal in a downstream portion of thecompartment closest the barrier over which the glass advances afteradvancing over molten metal in the compartment to provide a circulatingflow of molten metal in the compartment to cool the glass advancing overthe molten metal in the compartment.2. The method according to claim 1 wherein the molten metal in the upstreamportion of the compartment is cooled by transferring heat from the moltenmetal in the compartment to a coolant flowing through a conduit disposedtransversely across the upstream portion of the compartment.3. The method according to claim 2 wherein the flow of coolant is adjustedand maintained to control the rate at which heat is transferred from themolten metal to the coolant.4. The method according to claim 2 wherein a plurality of coolants havingdifferent heat capacities are directed through a plurality of separateconduits at least some of which are disposed transversely across theupstream portion of the compartment to control the rate of heat transferfrom the molten metal to the coolants at separate locations along the pathof advance of the glass.5. In an apparatus for making flat glass comprising a glassmaking furnacefor supplying molten glass for forming, means for delivering molten glassfrom the furnace to a forming chamber, a glass forming chamber for forminga continuous sheet of glass connected to the glassmaking furnace throughthe molten glass delivery means; and means for removing and conveying aformed continuous sheet of glass from the forming chamber; wherein theforming chamber comprises a bottom, an upstream end in the vicinity of themolten glass delivery means, a downstream end in the vicinity of the glasssheet removing means, side walls and a roof providing an enclosed chamberhaving in its upper portion a space for containing a protectivenon-oxidizing atmosphere and having in its lower portion a pool of moltenmetal for supporting glass during forming, the pool of molten metal havingan upper glass-supporting surface and a bottom portion adjacent thechamber bottom; means for advancing the glass along the surface of thepool of molten metal and for applying forces to the glass during itsadvance, the improvement comprising a plurality of barriers disposedacross the forming chamber having upper surfaces at elevations beneath theupper surface of the pool of molten metal and segregating the pool ofmolten metal into a plurality of molten metal compartments, and means forcooling the molten metal of a compartment disposed beneath the uppersurface of the pool of molten metal between adjacent barriers defining thecompartment and closer to a first adjacent barrier closest to the upstreamend of the chamber than to a second adjacent barrier closest to thedownstream end of the chamber.6. The apparatus according to claim 5 wherein the cooling means is disposedbeneath a portion of the bottom of the forming chamber.7. The apparatus according to claim 6 wherein the cooling means is disposedwithin the bottom of the forming chamber.8. An apparatus for making flat glass comprising a glassmaking furnace forsupplying molten glass for forming, means for delivering molten glass fromthe furnace to a forming chamber, a glass forming chamber for forming adimensionally stable, continuous sheet of glass connected to theglassmaking furnace through the molten glass delivery means; and means forlifting and conveying a dimensionally stable, formed continuous sheet ofglass vertically upwardly from the forming chamber; whereinthe forming chamber comprises a bottom, an upstream end in the vicinity ofthe molten glass delivery means, a downstream end in the vicinity of theglass sheet removing means, side walls and a roof providing an enclosedchamber having in its upper portion a space for containing a protectivenon-oxidizing atmosphere and having in its lower portion a pool of moltenmetal for supporting glass during forming, the pool of molten metal havingan upper glass-supporting surface at substantially the same elevation as aglass supporting member of said molten glass delivery means and a bottomportion adjacent the chamber bottom; means for advancing the glass alongthe surface of the pool of molten metal and for applying forces to theglass during its advance; and a plurality of barriers disposed across theforming chamber having upper surfaces at elevations beneath the uppersurface of the pool of molten metal and segregating the pool of moltenmetal into a plurality of molten metal compartments; and means for coolingthe molten metal of a compartment disposed beneath the upper surface ofthe pool of molten metal between adjacent barriers defining thecompartment."}
{"WKU":"039308294","Title":"Movable dam barriers for use in the manufacture of a glass ribbon on a","App_Date":"1974-10-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John E. Sensi","Assignee":"PPG Industries, Inc.","ICL_Class":"C03B 1802","References":"3317302;3420647;3485617;3539320;3843345","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a method of making a continuous ribbon of flat glass which comprisesproviding a layer of molten glass on the surface of a pool of supportingmolten metal; advancing the layer of glass along the surface of the poolof molten metal in a downstream direction from upstream locations tosucceeding downstream locations; and controlling the temperature of thelayer of glass to cool the layer of glass to form a dimensionally stableribbon of flat glass of a specified thickness wherein at least a portionof the cooling of the advancing layer of glass being by transfer of heatto the molten metal, the improvement, associated with changing fromforming glass of a first specified thickness to forming glass of a secondthinner specified thickness, comprising:positioning movable dam barriers in the molten metal and extending at leastpartially transversely to the direction of glass advance to change thepattern of heat removal from the layer of glass within a sizing region inwhich the glass is at a temperature within its sizing temperature range bydecreasing the spacing between at least two adjacent dam barriers in adownstream portion of the region from their spacing when forming glass ofthe first specified thickness.2. The improved method as set forth in claim 1 wherein said positioningstep is accomplished by:moving a dam barrier in the downstream portion of the sizing region in adirection opposite to the direction of advance of the layer of glass.3. The method as set forth in claim 1 comprising the further step ofincreasing the spacing between two adjacent dam barriers in an upstreamportion of the sizing region from their spacing when forming glass of thefirst specified thickness.4. The improved method as set forth in claim 3 wherein said positioningstep is accomplished by:moving a dam barrier in an upstream portion of the sizing region in thesame direction as the advance of the layer of glass.5. The improved method as set forth in claim 4 wherein said positioningstep is accomplished by:removing a dam barrier from the molten metal in the upstream portion of thesizing region.6. The improved method as set forth in claim 1 wherein said positioningstep is accomplished by:inserting a dam barrier in the molten metal in the downstream portion ofthe sizing region.7. In a method of making a continuous ribbon of flat glass which comprisesproviding a layer of molten glass on the surface of a pool of supportingmolten metal; advancing the layer of glass along the surface of the poolof molten metal in a downstream direction from upstream locations tosucceeding downstream locations; and controlling the temperature of thelayer of glass to cool the layer of glass to form a dimensionally stableribbon of flat glass of a specified thickness wherein at least a portionof the cooling of the advancing layer of glass being by transfer of heatto the molten metal, the improvement, associated with changing fromforming glass of a first specified thickness to forming glass of a secondthicker specified thickness, comprising:positioning movable dam barriers in the molten metal and extending a leastpartially transversely to the direction of glass advance to change thepattern of heat removal from the layer of glass within a sizing region inwhich the glass is at a temperature within its sizing temperature range byincreasing the spacing between at least two adjacent dam barriers in adownstream portion of the region from their spacing when forming glass ofthe first specified thickness.8. The improved method as set forth in claim 7 wherein said positioningstep is accomplished by:moving a dam barrier in the downstream portion of the sizing region in thesame direction as the advance of the layer of glass.9. The method as set forth in claim 7 comprising the further step ofdecreasing the spacing between two adjacent dam barriers in an upstreamportion of the sizing region from their spacing when forming glass of thefirst specified thickness.10. The improved method as set forth in claim 9 wherein said positioningstep is accomplished by:moving a dam barrier in an upstream portion of the sizing region in adirection opposite to the direction of advance of the layer of glass.11. The improved method as set forth in claim 10 wherein said positioningstep is accomplished by:inserting a dam barrier in the molten metal in the upstream portion of thesizing region.12. The improved method as set forth in claim 7 wherein said positioningstep is accomplished by:removing a dam barrier from the molten metal in the downstream portion ofthe sizing region.13. In a method of making a continuous ribbon of flat glass which comprisesproviding a layer of molten glass on the surface of a pool of supportingmolten metal; advancing the layer of glass along the surface of the poolof molten metal in a downstream direction from upstream locations tosucceeding downstream locations; and controlling the temperature of thelayer of glass to cool the layer of glass to form a dimensionally stableribbon of flat glass of a specified thickness wherein at least a portionof the cooling of the advancing layer of glass is by transfer of heat tothe molten metal, the improvement comprising:arranging at least two pairs of dam barriers in the molten metal such thata line drawn through each dam barrier of a pair of dam barriers in adirection opposite to the advance of the glass intersects with a similarline drawn through the other dam barrier of the pair, said two pairs ofdam barriers providing compartments of molten metal between adjacent dambarriers which provide for the free circulation of molten metal between anupstream location spaced a first distance inwardly from a side of the poolof molten metal beneath the advancing glass and a downstream locationspaced a second lesser distance inwardly from the same side of the pool ofmolten metal.14. In an apparatus for making flat glass wherein the apparatus is of thetype having a glass melting furnace for supplying molten glass forforming; a glass forming chamber having a bottom and side portions forcontaining a pool of supporting molten metal; delivery means connectingthe exit end of the furnace and entrance end of the forming chamber formoving the molten glass from the furnace to the forming chamber to providea layer of molten glass on the pool of supporting molten metal wherein themolten glass as it advances along the molten metal is cooled to form acontinuous glass ribbon of a specified thickness wherein at least aportion of the cooling of the glass being by transfer of heat to themolten metal and means for continuously removing the glass ribbon from theforming chamber, the improvement comprising:movable dam barriers mounted on the bottom of the forming chamber, each ofsaid dam barriers comprising an outer cover of material which issubstantially non-reactive with the molten metal and an inner body ofmaterial having a density greater than that of the molten metal.15. The apparatus as set forth in claim 14 wherein at least one of said dambarrier comprises:a cylindrical body; andmeans mounted on said body to prevent rolling motion of said body.16. The apparatus as set forth in claim 15 wherein said cylindrical body isin at least two sections to permit insertion of the dam barrier beneaththe glass ribbon.17. The apparatus as set forth in claim 14 wherein said body is made of analloy of tungsten and molybdenum.18. The apparatus as set forth in claim 17 wherein said cover is anasbestos cloth.19. The apparatus as set forth in claim 14 wherein the cover is made ofgraphite and the body has a density sufficiently greater than the densityof the molten metal to increase the density of the body and cover incombination to be effectively greater than that of molten metal.20. The apparatus as set forth in claim 14 wherein the body of said dambarrier is made of a plurality of cylindrical roll members securely joinedtogether.21. The apparatus as set forth in claim 20 wherein each of said pluralityof cylindrical roll members is made of an alloy of tungsten and molybdenumand the cover comprises an asbestos cloth around said plurality ofcylindrical rolls.22. The apparatus as set forth in claim 14 further comprising:means for vertically removing the glass sheet from the forming chamber.23. The apparatus as set forth in claim 14 further comprising:means for horizontally removing the glass sheet from the forming chamber.24. In an apparatus for making flat glass wherein the apparatus is of thetype having a glass melting furnace for supplying molten glass forforming; a glass forming chamber having a bottom and side portions forcontaining a pool of supporting molten metal; delivery means connectingthe exit end of the furnace and entrance end of the forming chamber formoving the molten glass from the furnace to the forming chamber to providea layer of molten glass on the pool of supporting molten metal wherein themolten glass as it advances along the molten metal is cooled to form acontinuous glass ribbon of a specified thickness wherein at least aportion of the cooling of the glass being by transfer of heat to themolten metal and means for continuously removing the glass ribbon from theforming chamber, the improvement comprising:a dam barrier member having a triangular cross-section extending at leastpartially across the chamber within the pool of molten metal; andmeans for rotating said dam barrier members to vary the distance betweensaid dam barrier member and the top surface of the molten metal."}
{"WKU":"039308308","Title":"Method for producing glass articles","App_Date":"1974-09-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Naohiro Yoshikawa;Takashi Yamaoka","Assignee":"Nippon Electric Glass Company, Limited","ICL_Class":"C03B 1514","References":"3260586","Claims":"What we claim is:1. An improved method for producing an article of a molten glass having anoptimum working temperature and a liquidus temperature, comprising thesteps of1. molding the molten glass into the article at a temperature higher thanthe optimum working and liquidus temperatures, and2. placing the molded glass article into contact with water before thetemperature of the molded glass article drops down to the liquidustemperature whereby the molded glass article passes rapidly through thedevitrifying temperature of the glass and devitrification of the glass isinhibited.2. The improved method of claim 1, wherein the molded glass article isplaced into contact with water by passing it through a water bath.3. The improved method of claim 1, wherein the molded glass article isplaced into contact with water by passing it through a layer ofwater-wetted granular material floating on water.4. The improved method of claim 3, wherein the granular material is cork.5. An improved method for producing an elongated article of a devitrifiableglass having an optimum working temperature in the vicinity of theliquidus temperature thereof, comprising the steps of1. heating the glass to a temperature higher than the optimum working andliquidus temperatures thereof to melt the glass,2. feeding the molten glass to a molding station whereat the molten glassis maintained at the higher temperature,3. continuously leading the molten glass at the higher temperature througha molding orifice at the molding station, and4. leading the molded glass article into contact with water before thetemperature of the molded glass article drops down to the liquidustemperature whereby the molded glass article passes rapidly through thedevitrifying temperature of the glass and devitrification of the glass isinhibited.6. The improved method of claim 5, wherein the molded glass article isplaced into contact with water by passing it through a water bath.7. The improved method of claim 5, wherein the molded glass article isplaced into contact with water by passing it through a layer ofwater-wetted granular material floating on water.8. The improved method of claim 7, wherein the granular material is cork."}
{"WKU":"039308316","Title":"Furnace for heat treating glass sheet material","App_Date":"1975-01-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Harold A. McMaster;Norman C. Nitschke","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"C03B 2904","References":"1311286;2664838;2841925","Claims":"We claim:1. A furnace for heat treating glass sheet material and the likecomprising: an enclosure having walls of refractory material, said wallshaving an outer insulating layer and an inner layer of material having alow coefficient of thermal expansion; at least one opening defined in saidenclosure; said inner layer having spaced end portions projectingexternally beyond said outer layer and the outer periphery of saidenclosure to define said opening.2. A furnace as claimed in claim 1 further including a door for controllingsaid opening, said door comprising an elongated support bar, a pluralityof blocks of refractory material supported on said bar in end-to-endrelationship, and means adjustably securing each of said blocks to saidbar to accommodate irregularities in said opening.3. A furnace as claimed in claim 2 wherein said last named means comprisesa metal jacket for each of said blocks partially enclosing the respectiveblock; flanges projecting from said jackets and receiving said bar; andmeans securing said flanges to said rod to permit selective adjustment ofsaid blocks transversely of said bar.4. A furnace for heat treating glass sheet material and the likecomprising: a top, bottom and side walls of refractory material; an inletopening and an outlet opening in the side walls; said side walls having anouter insulating layer and an inner layer of material having a lowcoefficient of thermal expansion; said inner layer having spaced endportions projecting externally beyond the outer layer and the periphery ofthe side walls to define said inlet and outlet openings.5. A furnace as claimed in claim 4 wherein said furnace is cylindrical andsaid inner layer comprises two semi-circular sections in cross-sectionhaving slightly thickened portions terminating at said end portions.6. A furnace as claimed in claim 5 further including a pair of doors, eachcontrolling one of said openings, each of said doors comprising anelongated support bar, a plurality of blocks of refractory materialsupported on said bar in end-to-end relationship and means adjustablysecuring each of said blocks to said bar to accommodate irregularities inthe opening controlled thereby.7. A furnace as claimed in claim 6 wherein said last named means comprisesa metal jacket for each of said blocks partially enclosing the respectiveblock; flanges projecting from said jackets and receiving said bar; andmeans securing said flanges to said rod to permit selective adjustment ofsaid blocks transversely of said bar.8. A door for controlling the opening of a furnace for heat treating glasssheet material and the like comprising: an elongated support bar; aplurality of blocks of refractory material supported on said bar inend-to-end relationship to define said door and means adjustably securingeach of said blocks to said bar to permit the blocks to be individuallyadjusted with respect to said bar to accommodate irregularities in theopening to be controlled by said door said last named means comprising ametal jacket for each of said blocks partially enclosing the respectiveblock; flanges projecting from said jackets and receiving said bar; andmeans securing said flanges to said rod to permit selective adjustment ofsaid blocks transversely of said bar.9. A furnace for heat treating glass sheet material and the likecomprising: an enclosure having a cyclindrical side wall of circularcross-section; said side wall having an outer insulating layer and aninner layer of material having a low coefficient of thermal expansion; apair of diametrically opposed openings formed in said side wall eachextending substantially the full length of said side wall in parallelrelationship with the longitudinal axis thereof; said inner layer having apair of spaced end portions at each of said openings projecting externallybeyond said outer layer and the outer periphery of said side wall anddefining the walls of said openings; a pair of doors, each controlling oneof said openings; each of said doors comprising a plurality of blocks ofrefractory material supported in end-to-end relationship and for selectiveadjustment relative to each other toward and away from the longitudinalaxis of said cyclindrical side wall to accommodate irregularities in thewalls of the opening controlled thereby."}
{"WKU":"039308324","Title":"Inhibition of corrosive action of zinc-containing fertilizer solutions","App_Date":"1975-04-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James Earl Sansing, Jr.;Joseph Novotny","Assignee":"Allied Chemical Corporation","ICL_Class":"C05C  900","References":"3419379;3714067;3718603;3723347;3753675;3816333;3877085","Claims":"We claim:1. A process of preparing a zinc-containing fertilizer solution of lowcorrosiveness toward carbon steel which comprises incorporating in anaqueous zinc nitrate-ammonium nitrate-urea solution containing at least 8percent by weight zinc nitrate, at least 14 percent by weight ammoniumnitrate, at least 10 percent by weight urea, and the balance substantiallyconsisting of water, about 0.1 to 5 percent by weight of a water-solublethiosulfate compound selected from the group consisting of ammoniumthiosulfate, sodium thiosulfate, and potassium thiosulfate.2. The process of claim 1 wherein the thiosulfate compound is ammoniumthiosulfate.3. The process of claim 1 wherein the thiosulfate compound is sodiumthiosulfate.4. The process of claim 1 wherein the thiosulfate compound is potassiumthiosulfate.5. The process of claim 1 wherein the solution is diluted with sufficientwater to provide a foliar spray solution containing about 0.1 to 0.2weight percent of zinc nitrate.6. A process for controlling corrosiveness to carbon steel of a solution ofzinc nitrate, ammonium nitrate, and urea in water, said solutioncontaining 12 to 20 percent by weight of zinc nitrate, 21 to 30 percent byweight of ammonium nitrate, 15 to 23 percent by weight of urea, and thebalance consisting essentially of water, comprising incorporating in saidsolution about 0.1 to 0.5 percent by weight of a water-soluble thiosulfatecompound selected from the group consisting of ammonium thiosulfate,sodium thiosulfate and potassium thiosulfate.7. The process of claim 6 wherein the thiosulfate compound is ammoniumthiosulfate.8. The process of claim 6 wherein the thiosulfate compound is sodiumthiosulfate.9. The process of claim 6 wherein the thiosulfate compound is potassiumthiosulfate.10. The process of claim 6 wherein the solution is diluted with sufficientwater to provide a foliar spray solution containing about 0.1 to 0.2weight percent of zinc nitrate.11. As a new composition of matter of low corrosiveness to carbon steel, anaqueous zinc nitrate-ammonium nitrate-urea solution consisting essentiallyof at least 8 percent by weight zinc nitrate, at least 14 percent byweight ammonium nitrate, at least 10 percent by weight urea, about 0.1 to5 percent by weight of a water-soluble thiosulfate compound selected fromthe group consisting of ammonium thiosulfate, sodium thiosulfate, andpotassium thiosulfate, and the balance substantially consisting of water.12. The composition of claim 11 wherein the thiosulfate compound isammonium thiosulfate.13. The composition of claim 11 wherein the thiosulfate compound is sodiumthiosulfate.14. The composition of claim 11 wherein the thiosulfate compound ispotassium thiosulfate.15. The composition of claim 11 wherein sufficient ammonia is incorporatedto adjust the pH of the composition to pH 4-5.16. As a new composition of matter of low corrosiveness to carbon steel, asolution of zinc nitrate, ammonium nitrate, and urea in water, saidsolution consisting essentially of 12 to 20 percent by weight of zincnitrate, 21 to 30 percent by weight of ammonium nitrate, 15 to 23 percentby weight of urea, 0.1 to 0.5 percent by weight of a water-solublethiosulfate compound selected from the group consisting of ammoniumthiosulfate, sodium thiosulfate and potassium thiosulfate, and the balanceconsisting essentially of water.17. The composition of claim 16 wherein the thiosulfate compound isammonium thiosulfate.18. The composition of claim 16 wherein the thiosulfate compound is sodiumthiosulfate.19. The composition of claim 16 wherein the thiosulfate compound ispotasium thiosulfate.20. The composition of claim 16 wherein sufficient ammonia is incorporatedto adjust the pH of the composition to pH 4-5."}
{"WKU":"039308332","Title":"Micronutrient metal-containing phosphate glasses","App_Date":"1973-10-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Gordon J. Roberts","Assignee":"Ferro Corporation","ICL_Class":"C05G  300;C03C  316","References":"2806773;2920972;2988439","Claims":"I claim:1. A glass composition adapted in comminuted form to act as a micronutrientin both acidic and alkaline soils consisting essentially of anon-oxidizing phosphate base glass containing a nutrient amount of zincoxide to nourish plant and seed growth in such acidic or alkaline soils,and a metal control agent to control the water-solubility of said glasscomposition and provide a water-extraction of said zinc oxide from saidphosphate base glass at a rate within a predetermined range, said glasscomposition consisting essentially in weight percent of about:"}
{"WKU":"039308340","Title":"Algaecidal composition","App_Date":"1974-01-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"David T. Schulteis;Donald E. Seymour","Assignee":"Applied Biochemists, Inc.","ICL_Class":"A01N 1700","References":"2734028;3634061;3716351","Claims":"I claim:1. An algaecide composition having improved stability, comprising anaqueous solution containing an algaecidal effective amount of a coppercomplex produced by reacting a water-insoluble copper compound selectedfrom the group consisting of (a) copper carbonate, (b) copper oxide, (c)copper hydroxide, (d) copper bicarbonate, (e) copper benzoate, (f) copperthiocyanate and (g) naturally occurring copper minerals containing atleast one of said (a)-(f) inclusive with an aqueous solution of an acid insufficient amount to dissociate the copper ions from said compound, saidacid selected from the group consisting of an inorganic acid and anorganic acid having from 1 to 22 carbon atoms in the molecule, andthereafter chelating the copper ions with a chelating agent selected fromthe group consisting of (a) an alkanolamine having at least one alkanolgroup containing from 1 to 10 carbon atoms in the molecule, (b)polyethylene glycols having an average molecular weight in the range of200 to 4000, (c) tertiary amines and (d) carboxylic acids having 1 to 22carbon atoms in the molecule and (e) water soluble salts of (d), toprovide the complex.2. The composition of claim 1, wherein said aqueous solution contains atleast 9% by weight of elemental copper.3. The composition of claim 1, wherein the copper compound is coppercarbonate, and the chelating agent is triethanolamine.4. The composition of claim 1, wherein the alkanolamine is used in a weightratio of 1 to 2 parts per 1 part of copper.5. An algaecide composition, comprising a plurality of generally inertparticles and a copper complex absorbed on said particles, said complexproduced by reacting a water-insoluble copper compound selected from thegroup consisting of (a) copper carbonate, (b) copper oxide (c) copperhydroxide, (d) copper bicarbonate (e) copper benzoate, (f) copperthiocyanate and (g) naturally occuring copper minerals containing at leastone of said (a)-(f) inclusive with an aqueous solution of an acid insufficient amount to dissociate the copper ions from said compound, saidacid selected from the group consisting of an inorganic acid and anorganic acid having from 1 to 22 carbon atoms in the molecule, andthereafter chelating the copper ions with a chelating agent selected fromthe group consisting of (a) an alkanolamine having at least one alkanolgroup containing from 1 to 10 carbon atoms in the molecule, (b)polyethylene glycols having an average molecular weight in the range of200 to 4000, (c) tertiary amines and (d) carboxylic acids having 1 to 22carbon atoms in the molecule and (e) water soluble salts of (d), toprovide the complex.6. The composition of claim 5, wherein the particles, have a size in therange of 8 to 16 mesh.7. The composition of claim 6 wherein the particles have a bulk density inthe range of 0.5 to 15 gr./cc.8. The composition of claim 6 wherein the particles are clay and arecharacterized by the ability to break up into a fine powder when exposedto water.9. The composition of claim 8 wherein the particles are selected from thegroup consisting of Atapulgite clay and Celaton clay.10. The method of preparing an algaecide composition having improvedstability, comprising the steps of reacting a water insoluble coppercompound selected from the group consisting of (a) copper carbonate (b)copper oxide, (c) copper hydroxide, (d) copper bicarbonate, (e) copperbenzoate, (f) copper thiocyanate and (g) naturally occurring copperminerals containing at least one of said (a)-(f) inclusive with an aqueoussolution of an acid in sufficient amount to dissociate the copper ionsfrom said compound, said acid selected from the group consisting of aninorganic acid and an organic acid having from 1 to 22 carbon atoms in themolecule, and thereafter chelating the copper ions with a chelating agentselected from the group consisting of (a) an alkanolamine having at leastone alkanol group containing from 1 to 10 carbon atoms in the molecule,(b) polyethylene glycols having an average molecular weight in the rangeof 200 to 4000, (c) tertiary amines and (d) carboxylic acids having 1 to22 carbon atoms in the molecule and (e) water soluble salts of (d), toprovide the complex.11. The method of claim 10, wherein the solution contains more than 9% byweight of elemental copper in the form of the copper complex.12. The method of claim 10, wherein the chelating agent is alkanolamine andis used in a weight ratio of 1 to 2 parts per 1 part of copper.13. The method of claim 10, wherein said copper compound is coppercarbonate, said first named acid is acetic acid and said chelating agentis triethanolamine.14. The method of claim 10 wherein the acid is substantially free ofnitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus and halogens.15. A method of controlling the growth of algae in a body of water,comprising the step of bringing into contact with the algae an aqueoussolution of a copper complex produced by reacting a water-soluble coppercompound selected from the group consisting of (a) copper carbonate, (b)copper oxide, (c) copper hydroxide, (d) copper bicarbonate, (e) copperbenzoate, (f) copper thiocyanate and (g) naturally occurring copperminerals containing at least one of said (a)-(f) inclusive with an aqueoussolution of an acid in sufficient amount to dissociate the copper ionsfrom said compound, said acid selected from the group consisting of aninorganic acid and an organic acid having from 1 to 22 carbon atoms in themolecule, and thereafter chelating the copper ions with a chelating agentselected from the group consisting of (a) an alkanolamine having at leastone alkanol group containing from 1 to 10 carbon atoms in the molecular,(b) polyethylene glycols having an average molecular weight in the rangeof 200 to 4000, (c) tertiary amines and (d) carboxylic acids having 1 to22 carbon atoms in the molecule and (e) water soluble salts of (d), toprovide the complex.16. The method of claim 6, wherein the solution is added to the body ofwater in an amount such that the body of water contains from 0.25 to 20ppm of the complex.17. The method of claim 15, wherein the first named acid is substantiallyfree of nitrogen, sulfur, phosphorus and halogens."}
{"WKU":"039308359","Title":"Pesticidal compositions and methods employing substituted oxirane","App_Date":"1972-10-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Thomas M. Ozretich","Assignee":"The Dow Chemical Company","ICL_Class":"A01N  928","References":"2939872;2993058;3166398;3183074;3798254","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method for controlling undesirable plants which comprises applyingthereto an effective herbicidal amount of a substituted oxirane compoundcorresponding to the formula:##SPC5##wherein X represents halogen; Z represents hydrogen, halogen, cyano orlower alkyl; R and R  each independently represent hydrogen, halogen,cyano, nitro, alkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, trifluoromethyl,benzyloxy or lower alkyl, with the proviso that when R  is hydrogen, R isother than hydrogen.2. A method according to claim 1 wherein said oxirane compound is appliedto soil containing seeds of undesired plants.3. A method according to claim 1 wherein said oxirane compound is appliedto established plants.4. A method according to claim 1 wherein R is hydrogen.5. A method according to claim 1 wherein R and R  each independentlyrepresent hydrogen, halogen, nitro, trifluoromethyl, lower alkoxy or loweralkyl, with the proviso that when R  is hydrogen, R is other thanhydrogen.6. A method according to claim 1 wherein R is hydrogen and R  is halogen ortrifluoromethyl.7. The method of claim 1 wherein the compound is2-(m-nitrophenyl)-2-(2,2,2-trichloroethyl)oxirane.8. The method of claim 1 wherein the compound is2-(p-nitrophenyl)-2-(2,2,2-trichloroethyl)oxirane.9. The method of claim 1 wherein the compound is 2-(.alpha.,.alpha.,.alpha. -trifluoro-m-tolyl)-2-(2,2,2-trichloroethyl)oxirane.10. The method of claim 1 wherein the compound is2-(m-bromophenyl)-2-(2,2,2-trichloroethyl)oxirane.11. The method of claim 1 wherein the compound is2-(p-bromophenyl)-2-(2,2,2-trichloroethyl)oxirane.12. The method of claim 1 wherein the compound is2-(m-chlorophenyl)-2-(2,2,2-trichloroethyl)oxirane.13. The method of claim 1 wherein the compound is2-(p-chlorophenyl)-2-(2,2,2-trichloroethyl)oxirane.14. The method of claim 1 wherein the compound is2-(m-fluorophenyl)-2-(2,2,2-trichloroethyl)oxirane.15. The method of claim 1 wherein the compound is2-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-2-(2,2,2-trichloroethyl)oxirane.16. The method of claim 1 wherein the compound is2-(m-tolyl)-2-(2,2,2-trichloroethyl)oxirane.17. The method of claim 1 wherein the compound is2-(m-methoxyphenyl)-2-(2,2,2-trichloroethyl)oxirane.18. The method of claim 1 wherein the compound is2-(m-ethoxyphenyl)-2-(2,2,2-trichloroethyl)oxirane.19. The method of claim 1 wherein the compound is2-(m-(benzyloxy)phenyl)-2-(2,2,2-trichloroethyl)oxirane.20. The method according to claim 1 wherein R and R  each independentlyrepresent hydrogen, halogen, trifluoromethyl or lower alkyl, with theproviso that when R  is hydrogen, R is other than hydrogen.21. A method for the selective control of weedy grasses in the presence ofdesirable crops which comprises applying to soil containing desirablecrops before the plants to be destroyed emerge in a concentration toxic toweedy grasses, but not toxic to desirable crops, a compound of the formula##SPC6##wherein X represents halogen; Z represents hydrogen, halogen, cyano orlower alkyl; R represents hydrogen and R  is halogen or trifluoromethyl.22. The method of claim 21 wherein R  is halogen.23. The method of claim 2 wherein the compound is2-(m-chlorophenyl)-2-(2,2,2-trichloroethyl)oxirane.24. The method of claim 21 wherein the compound is2-(m-bromophenyl)-2-(2,2,2-trichloroethyl)oxirane.25. The method of claim 21 wherein the compound is 2-(.alpha.,.alpha.,.alpha. -trifluoromethyl-m-tolyl)-2-(2,2,2-trichloroethyl)oxirane.26. A herbicidal composition which comprises an inert carrier and as theactive agent a herbicidally-effective amount of a compound of the formula:##SPC7##wherein X represents halogen; Z represents hydrogen, halogen, cyano orlower alkyl; R and R  each independently represent hydrogen, halogen,cyano, nitro, alkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, trifluoromethyl,benzyloxy or lower alkyl, with the proviso that when R  is hydrogen, R iscyano, nitro, alkoxy, trifluoromethyl, benzyloxy or lower alkyl.27. The composition of claim 26 wherein R represents hydrogen and R represents halogen or trifluoromethyl.28. The composition according to claim 26 whrein R and R  eachindependently represent hydrogen, halogen, trifluoromethyl or lower alkyl,with the proviso that when R  is hydrogen, R is other than hydrogen.29. The composition of claim 26 wherein the compound is2-(m-chlorophenyl)-2-(2,2,2-trichloroethyl)oxirane.30. The composition of claim 26 wherein the compound is2-(m-bromophenyl)-2-(2,2,2-trichloroethyl)oxirane.31. The composition of claim 26 wherein the compound is 2-(.alpha.,.alpha.,.alpha. -trifluoromethyl-m-tolyl)-2-(2,2,2-trichloroethyl)oxirane.32. Aqueous dispersion of the composition claimed in claim 26, the oxiranecompound in such dispersion being present in a herbicidal amount of atleast 0.0001 percent by weight.33. The composition of claim 26 in intimate admixture with an inert finelydivided solid, the oxirane compound in such admixture being present in aherbicidal amount of from 0.1 to 60 percent by weight."}
{"WKU":"039308367","Title":"Substituted sulfonate antidote compounds and method of use with","App_Date":"1974-04-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Duane R. Arneklev","Assignee":"Stauffer Chemical Company","ICL_Class":"A01N  922","References":"3131509;3749566","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In the method of controlling weeds wherein a herbicide is added to thehabitat thereof, said herbicide containing an effective amount of amixture of a thiocarbamate and a triazine, the improvement comprisingadding to the habitat thereof from 0.01 to about 15 parts by weight foreach part by weight of the herbicide mixture, an antidote compoundrepresented by the formula:##EQU1##"}
{"WKU":"039308375","Title":"3-Chloro-5-acetamidaisoquinoline as a herbicide","App_Date":"1972-12-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Alexander Serban","Assignee":"ICI Australia Limited","ICL_Class":"A01N  922","References":"2661276;2661277;2665203;2692822;2870153;3000894;3235556;3247212;3277096;3285923","Claims":"I claim:1. A herbicidal composition comprising as active ingredient an effectiveambient of 3-chloro-5-acetamidoisoquinoline and an inert carrier therefor.2. A process of controlling or eradicating undesired vegetation, whichprocess comprises treating areas infested with undesired vegetation with acomposition according to claim 1 and providing 0.25 to 10 lb/acre ofactive ingredient.3. A process for selectively controlling or eradicating undesiredvegetation in areas under cultivation to grain or peas, which processcomprises applying to the said areas a composition according to claim 1,said composition providing from 0.25 to 10 lb/acre of active ingredient."}
{"WKU":"039308383","Title":"S-benzyl-N,N-disec-butylthiocarbamate and its use as a rice field","App_Date":"1973-12-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Giovanni Pellegrini;Giuseppe Losco;Antonio Quattrini;Emilio Arsura","Assignee":"Montecatini Edison S.p.A.","ICL_Class":"A01N  912","References":"3632332;3679726;3682616","Claims":"What we desire to secure by Letters Patent and hereby claim is:1. A composition for controlling and killing rice field weeds andsimultaneously stimulating the growth of rice, said composition comprisingan effective amount of S-benzyl N,N-disec.butyl-thiocarbamate and an inertvehicle therefor.2. A method for controlling rice field weeds and stimulating the growth ofrice, said method comprising applying to a rice field an amount ofS-benzyl-N,N-disec. butyl-thiocarbamate which is effective tosimultaneously control rice field weeds and stimulate the growth of rice.3. The method of claim 2 wherein the S-benzyl-N,N-disec.butyl-thiocarbamate is employed in a composition containing a productselected from the group consisting of a solid carrier and a liquid solventor dispersion medium therefor.4. The method of claim 2 wherein the S-benzyl-N,N-disec.butyl-thiocarbamateis applied to the rice field before germination of the rice.5. The method of claim 2 wherein the S-benzyl-N,N-didec.butyl-thiocarbamateis applied to the rice field after germination of the rice.6. The method of claim 2 wherein the S-benzyl-N,N-disec.butyl-thiocarbamateis applied to the rice field in the form of an aqueous dispersion.7. The method of claim 2 wherein the S-benzyl-N,N-disec.butyl-thiocarbamateis applied to the rice field in the form of an aqueous emulsion.8. The method of claim 3 wherein the S-benzyl-N,N-disec.butyl-thiocarbamatecomposition is in the form of a paste.9. The method of claim 2 wherein the S-benzyl-N,N-disec.butyl-thiocarbamateis applied to the rice field in the form of dry powder or pellets.10. The method of claim 2 wherein theS-benzyl-N,N-disec.butyl-thiocarbamate is applied to the rice field bycoating pre-soaked rice seeds therewith and thereafter sowing the coatedrice seeds in the rice field.11. The method of claim 3 wherein the carrier is selected from the groupconsisting of bentonite, calcite, dolomite vermiculite, attapulgite,pyrophyllite, sepiolite, phosphorite, kieselguhr, hydrated silica andsynthetic calcium silicates.12. The method of claim 2 wherein said amount is between about 2 and about30 kg./ha.13. The method of claim 2 wherein said amount is between about 2 and about8 kg./ha.14. The composition of claim 1, wherein the inert vehicle is selected fromthe group consisting of water, organic solvents for saidS-benzyl-N,N-disec.butyl-thiocarbamate, and solid carriers compatibletherewith."}
{"WKU":"039308391","Title":"Substituted sulfonate antidote compositions and method of use with","App_Date":"1974-04-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Duane R. Arneklev","Assignee":"Stauffer Chemical Company","ICL_Class":"A01N  912","References":"3131509","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In the method of controlling weeds wherein an effective amount of athiolcarbamate herbicide is added to the habitat thereof the improvementcomprising adding to the habitat thereof from about 0.01 to about 15 partsby weight for each part by weight of the herbicide an antidote compoundrepresented by the formula:##EQU1##"}
{"WKU":"039308405","Title":"Ripening of sugarcane by use of certain alcoholic and ethoxylated","App_Date":"1974-04-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Louis G. Nickell","Assignee":"Hawaiian Sugar Planters  Association","ICL_Class":"A01N  924","References":"3224865;3630717;3672865","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for increasing the sugar yield of field grown, maturingsugarcane which comprises applying to the cane at a time at least abouttwo weeks and up to about twelve weeks prior to harvest as essentially thesole ripening agent in an amount effective to increase sucrose yield, acompound selected from the group consisting of:a. linear alcohols containing 11 to 15 carbon atoms,b. polyalkylene glycols containing 2 to 3 carbon atoms in the alkylenegroup, andc. ethoxylated phenols or alcohols corresponding to the formula"}
{"WKU":"039308413","Title":"Thermoplastic prealloyed powder","App_Date":"1974-06-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Timothy Earl Volin;John Stanwood Benjamin;Jay Michael Larson;Robert Lacock Cairns","Assignee":"The International Nickel Company, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B22F  900","References":"3519503;3591362;3631583;3639179;3671230;3728088","Claims":"We claim:1. A process particularly adapted to improving the fabricatingcharacteristics of difficulty workable alloys which comprises forming acharge of prealloyed powder of predesired composition, subjecting theprealloyed powder charge to a force capable of inducing strain energy intothe powder, and continuing the application of said force at least untilthe amount of strain energy imparted is sufficient so as to alter thenature of the powder such that it is characterized by a ThermoplasticPhysical Characteristic of at least TPC-1, whereby in the case of adifficultly workable composition the prealloyed powder is characterized bya lower flow stress and can be further processed at lower stress and/ortemperature than prealloyed powder of the same composition but withoutstrain energy having been imparted thereto.2. A process in accordance with claim 1 in which the strain energy inducedconfers a Thermoplastic Physical Characteristic of at least TPC-2 to theprealloyed powder.3. A process in accordance with claim 1 in which the strain energy inducedconfers a Thermoplastic Physical Characteristic of at least TPC-3 to theprealloyed powder.4. A process in accordance with claim 1 in which the prealloyed powder is asuperalloy containing up to 60% chromium, up to 30% cobalt, up to 10%aluminum, up to 8% titanium, up to 30% molybdenum, up to 25% tungsten, upto 10% columbium, up to 10% tantalum, up to 7% zirconium, up to 0.5%boron, up to 5% hafnium, up to 2% vanadium, up to 6% copper, up to 5%manganese, up to 70% iron, up to 4% silicon and the balance essentiallynickel.5. A process in accordance with claim 4 in which the prealloyed powdercontains at least 4% of aluminum plus titanium.6. A process in accordance with claim 4 in which the prealloyed powder isselected from the group consisting of IN-100, IN-738, IN-792, Rene alloys41 and 95, Waspaloy, Astroloy, Alloys 500, 700, 713 and 718, Mar-M alloys200 and 246 and Alloy A-286.7. A process in accordance with claim 1 in which the strain energy inducedin the prealloyed powder is brought about by the forces imparted throughdry, intensive high energy milling.8. A process particularly adapted to improving the fabricatingcharacteristics of difficultly workable alloys which comprises forming acharge of atomized prealloyed powder of a base alloy of predesiredcomposition and selected from the group of nickel, cobalt and nickel pluscobalt alloys, refractory alloys and titanium alloys, subjecting theprealloyed powder charge to a compressive force to induce strain energyinto the powder such that the amount of strain energy imparted issufficient to alter the nature of the powder such that it is characterizedby a Thermoplastic Physical Characteristic of at least TPC-1, whereby inthe case of a difficultly workable composition the prealloyed powder ischaracterized by a lower flow stress and can be further processed at lowerstress and/or temperature than prealloyed powder of the same compositionbut without strain energy having been imparted thereto."}
{"WKU":"039308421","Title":"Method of producing alloys based on calcium, silicon and iron","App_Date":"1974-08-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Mark Abramovich Ryss;Viktor Petrovich Zaiko;Gerald Semenovich Belyaev;Anatoly Konstantinovich Golev;Aron Semenovich Mikulinsky;Vladimir Nikolaevich Gusarov;Stepan Evgenievich Pigasov;Igor Sergeevich Bedov;Valentin Nikotovich Pomogaev;Georgy Nikolaevich Kozhevnikov","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"C22D  706","References":"2194965;3256087;3475162","Claims":"What we claim is:1. In a method for continuously producing calcium-silicon-iron alloyscomprising the steps of: charging batches into an electric furnace andunder a reducing atmosphere, each of the batches comprising lime,silicon-containing reducing agents and fluxes and being introduced in atleast three portions; melting the at least three portions of one of thebatches to form a melt consisting of a calcium-silicon-iron alloy andslag; and pouring the melt from the furnace prior to charging another oneof the batches; the improvement comprising the steps of: charging a firstportion consisting of lime and fluxes of each of the batches while pouringthe melt formed from a previous batch from the furnace; charging at leastone portion consisting of lime, the silicon-containing reducing agents andthe fluxes of each of the batches after pouring the melt from a previousbatch from the furnace; and charging a last portion of each of the batchesduring a period of 10 to 30 minutes prior to beginning the pouring of themelt from the furnace, the last portion comprising from 3 to 30% by weightof the melt prior to pouring.2. In a method for continuously producing calcium-silicon-iron alloyscomprising the steps of: charging batches into an electric furnace andunder a reducing atmosphere, each of the batches comprising lime,silicon-containing reducing agents and fluxes and being introduced in atleast three portions; melting the at least three portions of one of thebatches to form a melt consisting of a calcium-silicon-iron alloy andslag; and pouring the melt from the furnace prior to charging another oneof the batches; the improvement comprising the steps of: charging a firstportion consisting of lime of each of the batches while pouring the meltformed from a previous batch from the furnace; charging at least oneportion consisting of lime, the silicon-containing reducing agents and thefluxes of each of the batches after pouring the melt from a previous batchfrom the furnace; and charging a last portion of each of the batchesduring a period of 10 to 30 minutes prior to beginning the pouring of themelt from the furnace, the last portion comprising from 3 to 30% by weightof the melt prior to pouring.3. The method of producing alloys based on calcium, silicon and iron asclaimed in claim 2, wherein the last portion of each of the batchescharged into the furnace contains an aluminum-containing alloy.4. The method of producing alloys based on calcium, silicon and iron asclaimed in claim 2, wherein the last portion of each of the batchescharged into the furnace contains an alloying material.5. The method of producing alloys based on calcium, silicon and iron asclaimed in claim 2, wherein batch materials having a particle size of lessthan 20 mm are used.6. The method of producing alloys based on calcium, silicon and iron asclaimed in claim 2, wherein the silicon-containing reducing agentscontains from 60-70% of silicon.7. The method of producing alloys based on calcium, silicon and iron asclaimed in claim 2, wherein the lime is preliminarily calcined at atemperature of 1400.degree.-1800.degree.C.8. The method of producing alloys based on calcium, silicon and iron asclaimed in claim 2, wherein the reducing atmosphere in the furnace isprovided by introducing carbon-containing materials into a furnace zonewhere the temperature exceeds 1800.degree.C."}
{"WKU":"039308430","Title":"Method for increasing metallic yield in bottom blown processes","App_Date":"1974-08-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard J. Fruehan","Assignee":"United States Steel Corporation","ICL_Class":"C21C  534","References":"3046107;3706549;3725041","Claims":"I claim:1. In the bottom blown process for the refining of molten pig iron, whichcomprises introducing an oxygen containing gas therein to decrease theimpurity content thereof and produce a final molten steel productcontaining,C . . . 0.08 max.balance Fe, and incidental steelmaking residual elements, said gas beingintroduced during the initial blowing period, at an average total rateR.sub.T, said total rate R.sub.T being the sum of R.sub.O, the rate atwhich O.sub.2 is introduced and R.sub.p, the rate at which protectivegasses are introduced, and wherein R.sub.O >> R.sub.p,the improvement, subsequent to the time the C content of said melt isdecreased to a level of 0.25%, which comprises introducing said O.sub.2 ata generally decreasing rate, while maintaining the total gas input at alevel not substantially different from R.sub.T by the introduction thereinof a non-deleterious gas, said generally decreasing O.sub.2 rate beingachieved by introducing O.sub.2 at an average rate within the rangeprescribed in the following periods;i. the period wherein C decreases from 0.25 to 0.18%, at an average rate offrom 0.4 R.sub.o to 1.0 R.sub.oii. the period wherein C decreases from 0.18 to 0.09%, at an average rateof from 0.3 R.sub.o to 0.8 R.sub.oiii. the period wherein C decreases from 0.09% to the final level, at anaverage rate of from zero to 0.5 R.sub.o.2. The method of claim 1, wherein the O.sub.2 is introduced during period(iii) at an average rate less than 0.3 R.sub.o.3. The method of claim 2, wherein the level of C in the final molten steelproduct is 0.02 to 0.05 percent.4. The method of claim 3, wherein said non-deleterious gas is argon.5. The method of claim 2, wherein the O.sub.2 is introduced during period(ii) at an average rate within the range 0.3 R.sub.o to 0.7 R.sub.o.6. The method of claim 4, wherein the average O.sub.2 rate for period (i)is less than 0.8 R.sub.o.7. The method of claim 6, wherein the level of C in the final molten steelproduct is 0.02 to 0.05 percent.8. The method of claim 7, wherein said non-deleterious gas is argon."}
{"WKU":"039308448","Title":"Method for disposal of pyrotechnic waste","App_Date":"1975-02-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Clyde F. Parrish;James E. Short, Jr.;Karen S. Whorrall","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy","ICL_Class":"C22B 2622","References":"2170394;2274237;2744007;2756140","Claims":"We claim:1. A method for disposing of tracer ammunition pyrotechnic materialcontaining strontium nitrate, magnesium, strontium peroxide, polyvinylchloride, calcium resinate and other pyrotechnic materials, with thecombined percentages of strontium nitrate and magnesium comprising atleast 60 percent of the total percentage of said tracer ammunitionpyrotechnic material, comprising the steps offirst immersing said tracer ammunition pyrotechnic material in watersufficiently cold to dissolve only strontium nitrate,then decanting the water solution of strontium nitrate and evaporating thewater to reclaim strontium nitrate,then removing all materials of said tracer ammunition pyrotechnic materialother than magnesium by successive washes of hot water and solvents, andthen drying the remaining magnesium for reuse as a pyrotechnic material.2. A method of disposing of tracer ammunition pyrotechnic material as setforth in claim 1 wherein said tracer ammunition pyrotechnic material isfirst immersed in water having a temperature of about 13.degree. C.3. A method of disposing of tracer ammunition pyrotechnic material as setforth in claim 1 wherein said water solution of strontium nitrate isfiltered before evaporating the water to reclaim strontium nitrate.4. A method of disposing of tracer ammunition pyrotechnic material as setforth in claim 1 wherein said successive washes are a water wash withwater having a temperature within the range of 70.degree.-85.degree. C.,followed next by a wash with ethyl alcohol and then by a wash withmethylene chloride."}
{"WKU":"039308456","Title":"Producing high purity gold powder","App_Date":"1973-01-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Herbert J. Bovey;Dennis A. Temple;Basil J. Goldswain","Assignee":"Anglo American Corporation of South Africa","ICL_Class":"C22B  300","References":"267723;1671004;3709681;3778252","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for treating a gold bearing Merrill slime, comprising thesteps of:contacting said slime with a gold chloride solution with agitation, wherebydissolved gold is caused to be cemented out on said slime and base metalimpurities are caused to go into solution;separating the cemented slime from the solution;suspending the cemented slime in water and chlorinating the suspension bypassing chlorine gas through it;separating the residual solution from the solids;precipitating gold powder from the residual solution by the addition ofless than a stoichiometric amount of a suitable reductant so that aproportion of the gold remains in the residual solution andseparating, washing and drying the precipitated gold powder.2. The process of claim 1, in which the residual solution left afterseparation of gold powder is used for contacting the slime.3. The process of claim 2 in which the molar ratio of Cl/Au in thechlorinated suspension is adjusted to be about 4 before separating thesolution from the cemented slime.4. The process of claim 3 in which the molar ratio of Cl/Au is increasedbefore precipitating gold powder from the solution.5. The process of claim 1 in which the precipitated gold powder is washedwith an aqueous solution of ammonia, ammonium chloride and EDTA afterseparation."}
{"WKU":"039308464","Title":"Method for precipitating copper metal from copper bearing solutions","App_Date":"1974-10-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James Carl Compton;Wilbert Norman Sims","Assignee":"Marcona Corporation","ICL_Class":"C22B 1512","References":"3333953;3560201;3606290;3674466","Claims":"We claim:1. In a method of precipitating copper from a copper bearing solution in acontainer using a particulate solid precipitant which reduces the copperin solution to form  the free copper, the steps of forming a bed of thesolid precipitant, directing the copper bearing solution in a highvelocity jet stream and rotating said stream to sweep out an arc whichimpinges upon and vigorously agitates the solid precipitant in its pathwith sufficient force to chemically react with the same to form aprecipitate of the free copper of relatively small size in comparison tothe precipitant and to entrain copper precipitate formed in the bed bysuch chemical reactions, and continuously separating the free copper andessentially all of the spent solution as underflow from the residualprecipitant in the vessel, said precipitant bed being maintained in anessentially unflooded state in solid-to-solid contact.2. A method as in claim 1 together with the additional steps of directingan aqueous rinsing stream in a high velocity jet stream into the bed afterdirecting the copper metal bearing solution to further entrain free copperprecipitate, and withdrawing said free metal-entrained rinsing stream asunderflow from the container.3. A method in claim 1 in which said copper bearing solution issimultaneously directing into said container from a plurality ofvertically spaced high velocity jet streams.4. A method as in claim 1 in which the free copper and spent solution arewithdrawn as underflow through a screen with openings large enough to passthe free copper but small enough to retain the precipitant.5. A method as in claim 1 together with the steps of separating thewithdrawn spent solution from the withdrawn free copper and directing thesolution to a second stage reactor vessel repeating the method of claim 1to precipitate further copper.6. A method as in claim 1 in which the metal solution comprises coppersulfate, and the precipitant comprises iron."}
{"WKU":"039308472","Title":"Recovery of copper by cementation","App_Date":"1974-03-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William Richard Stern","Assignee":"The Anaconda Company","ICL_Class":"C22B 1512","References":"1019708;1431130;2647830;3154411","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In the method of recovering copper from solutions containing the same bycementation using iron, the improvement comprising the use of copper-ironmaterials as part of the cementation launder, the copper and iron in saidmaterials being substantially physically inseparable.2. The method of claim 1 wherein the copper-iron material is a copper-cladiron scrap.3. The method of claim 1 wherein the copper-iron material comprises atleast a major portion by weight of the cementation launder.4. The method of claim 1 wherein the solution is a copper leach liquor.5. The method of claim 1 wherein the solution is a copper mine water."}
{"WKU":"039308480","Title":"High temperature low density cobalt alloy","App_Date":"1975-01-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ralph J. Hecht","Assignee":"United Technologies Corporation","ICL_Class":"C22C 1907","References":"3667939","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A cobalt base alloy for high temperature use which consists essentiallyof, by weight, from 0.85 to 0.95% carbon, from 24 to 26% chromium, from 14to 16% nickel, from 7.25 to 7.75% tungsten, from 2.0 to 2.4% titanium,from 1.0 to 1.4% zirconium, from 0.9 to 1.1% iron, balance essentiallycobalt, said alloy being substantially free from tantalum and columbium.2. An alloy as in claim 1 wherein the total tantalum plus colubium level islimited to be less than 0.5%."}
{"WKU":"039308499","Title":"Electrical contact material of the Ag-CdO type and method of making same","App_Date":"1973-05-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard H. Krock;Yuan-Shou Shen","Assignee":"P. R. Mallory & Co., Inc.","ICL_Class":"C22C  500","References":"2796346;3472654;3607244;3694197;3694198","Claims":"We claim:1. Ag-CdO type material suitable for use as an electrical contact material,the material consisting essentially of Ag and Cd with about 0.01 wt% toabout 2 wt.% Sn, and about 0.001 wt% to about 0.2 wt.% of a metal selectedfrom Mg, Ca, or mixtures of such metals, the material oxidized so as toconvert the oxidizable constituents to their respective oxides prior touse of the material as an electrical contact material.2. The Ag-CdO type material of claim 1, wherein the oxide of Sn is thereaction product of heating Sn to an elevated temperature in an oxygenrich atmosphere, and wherein the oxide of the metal is the reactionproduct of heating such metal to an elevated temperature in an oxygen richatmosphere.3. The Ag-CdO type material of claim 1, wherein the metal is about 0.001wt.% to about 0.1 wt% of the total weight of the material.4. The Ag-CdO type material of claim 1, wherein the CdO and the oxide of Snare substantially uniformly distributed throughout the material, the oxideof the metal selected from Mg, Ca, or mixtures of the oxides of suchmetals is substantially at the interface of the grains of CdO and theoxide of Sn.5. The Ag-CdO type material of claim 4, wherein the mixed oxides of Cd, Snand the additive metal has an average particle size of about 3 microns orless.6. A method of making the Ag-CdO type contact material as claimed in claim1 including the steps of forming a melt including Ag, Cd, Sn and a metalselected from Mg, Ca, or mixtures of such metals, forming the melt into ashape, and subjecting the shape to selective internal oxidation to convertthe Cd, the Sn, and the metal selected from Mg, Ca, or mixtures of suchselected metals to an oxide of each metal.7. The metal of making the Ag-CdO type contact material of claim 6, whereinthe step of subjecting the shape to selective internal oxidation includesheating in an oxygen rich atmosphere the Cd, the Sn and the metal selectedfrom Mg, Ca, or mixtures of such metals to convert the metals to areaction product including oxygen.8. The Ag-CdO type material of claim 1, wherein the small but effectiveamount of the metal is about 0.001 wt.% to about 0.2 wt.% Ca, preferablyabout 0.001 to about 0.1 wt.% Ca, the oxide of Ca is substantially at theinterface of the grains of the oxide of Cd and the oxide of Sn, the grainsof the mixed oxides of Cd, Sn and Ca having an average particle size ofabout 3 microns or less."}
{"WKU":"039308502","Title":"Process for electrophotographic copying by transfer of electrostatic","App_Date":"1973-07-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Shoji Matsumoto;Hitoshi Nishihama;Tatsuo Aizawa","Assignee":"Mita Industrial Company, Ltd.","ICL_Class":"G03G 1318;G03G 1301;G03G 1322","References":"2879395;3076092;3438706;3464818;3515548;3666363;3666364;3666365;3666458;3676117;3679405;3770429;3775104;3830645;3853553","Claims":"What we claim is:1. An electrophotographic process which comprises1. using an overcoated sensitive member consisting essentially of anelectrically conductive base, a photoconductive layer and alight-transmitting surface insulating layer;2. subjecting the surface of said overcoated sensitive member to a primarycharging in a specific polarity;3. exposing the surface of said overcoated sensitive member to an imagehaving light and dark areas to produce on the surface of the chargedsensitive member an electrostatic latent image corresponding to said lightand dark image areas, and simultaneously or subsequently generating coronadischarge current between said electrically conductive base and anelectrode spaced from the surface of the overcoated sensitive member by asuitable distance, thereby to subject the overcoated sensitive member to asecondary charging;4. then, uniformly exposing the entire surface of the overcoated sensitivemember to activating light to substantially remove the charge formed onthe interface between the surface insulating layer and the photoconductivelayer;5. transferring the electrostatic latent image to the surface of the chargeretainable transfer material by bringing the surface of the transfermaterial into contact with the surface of the sensitive member withoutapplying voltage between the sensitive member and the transfer member orcharging the back surface of the transfer member uniformly beforehand; and6. developing the electrostatic latent image transferred to the surface ofthe transfer material;said process further characterized in that the corona discharge current ofthe secondary charging is an asymmetric alternating current in which acurrent component of the same polarity as the primary charging is greaterthan a current component of the opposite polarity, and its asymmetry issuch that when the potential of the surface of th sensitive member as aresult of the secondary charging has reached an equilibrium, itsequilibrium potential is substantially equal to the untransferable upperlimit potential whereby after the uniform exposure of step (4) theelectrostatic image formed on the surface of the sensitive member has apotential in the light non-image area substantially equal to theuntransferable upper limit potential and a potential in the dark imagearea higher than the untransferable upper limit potential.2. The process of claim 1 wherein the potential of the dark image area ofthe electrostatic image formed on the sensitive member is at least 400 Vhigher than the untransferable upper limit potential.3. The process of claim 1 wherein the time required for the secondarycharging is the time required until the surface potential of the sensitivemember becomes of the same polarity as the primary charging and becomessubstantially equal to the transferable upper limit potential.4. The process of claim 1 wherein said overcoated sensitive member furtherincludes an intermediate insulating layer within the photoconductivelayer.5. The process of claim 1 wherein said overcoated sensitive member furtherincludes an intermediate insulating layer between the photoconductivelayer and the electrically conductive base."}
{"WKU":"039308510","Title":"Electrophotographic process using methylene indoline photoconductive","App_Date":"1974-03-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hisatake Ono;Syu Watarai;Harumi Katsuyama","Assignee":"Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"G03G 1322;G03G  506","References":"3441410;3527602;3532638;3647428;3660086;3684506;3707369;3730711","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An electrophotographic process comprising the steps of charging, imageexposing and developing a member comprising a resin binder and a compoundof formula (A) which is more than 25 percent of the total components ofthe member;##SPC6##wherein R.sub.1 is selected from the group consisting of an hydrogen atom,halogen atom, alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkoxy group having1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkoxycarbonyl group having an alkyl group of 1 to 4carbon atoms, nitro group, alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms whichis able to make a bis-compound, and a bond which is able to make abis-compound; R.sub.2 is selected from the group consisting of an hydrogenatom, hydroxyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group having alkyl group of 1 to 4carbon atoms, cyano group and a phenyl group; R is selected from the groupconsisting of a substituted phenyl group (where the substituted group isselected from the group consisting of an hydrogen atom, halogen atom,alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and an alkoxy group having 1 to 4carbon atoms), alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms which is able tomake a bis-compound, phenylene group which is able to make a bis-compound,and a bond which is able to make a bis-compound; and m is an integer from1 to 4.2. An electrophotographic process as in claim 1 where said member includesa sensitizer.3. An electrophotographic process as in claim 1 where said member includesa plasticizer.4. An electrophotographic process including the steps of charging, imageexposing and developing a member comprising a resin binder and a compoundof the formula (I) which is more than 25 percent of the total componentsof the member,##SPC7##wherein R.sub.1 is selected from the group consisting of an hydrogen atom,halogen atom, alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkoxy group having1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkoxycarbonyl group having alkyl group of 1 to 4carbon atoms and a nitro group, R.sub.2 is selected from the groupconsisting of an hydrogen atom, hydroxyl group, alkoxycarbonyl grouphaving alkyl group of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, cyano and a phenyl group,R.sub.3 is selected from the group consisting of an hydrogen atom, halogenatom, alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and an alkoxy group having 1to 4 carbon atoms, and m is an integer from 1 to 4.5. An electrophotographic method comprising the steps of charging, imageexposing, and developing a member comprising a resin binder and a compoundof the formula (II) which is more than 25 percent of the total componentsof the member;##SPC8##wherein R.sub.2 is selected from the group consisting of an hydrogen atom,hydroxyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group having alkyl group of 1 to 4 carbonatoms, cyano and a phenyl group, R.sub.3 is selected from the groupconsisting of an hydrogen atom, halogen atom, alkyl group having 1 to 4carbon atoms and an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, m is aninteger from 1 to 4, and n is an integer from 0 to 2.6. An electrophotographic method comprising the steps of charging, imageexposing and developing a member comprising a resin binder and a compoundof the formula (III) which is more than 25 percent of the total componentsof the member;##SPC9##wherein R.sub.1 is selected from the group consisting of an hydrogen atom,halogen atom, alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkoxy group having1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkoxycarbonyl group having alkyl group of 1 to 4carbon atoms and a nitro group, R.sub.2 is selected from the groupconsisting of an hydrogen atom, hydroxyl group, alkoxycarbonyl grouphaving alkyl group of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, cyano and a phenyl group,R.sub.4 is selected from the group consisting of a direct bond of carbonatoms, alkylene group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms which is capable offorming a bis-compound and a phenylene group which is capable of forming abis-compound, and m is an integer from 1 to 4.7. An electrophotographic method comprising the steps of charging, imageexposing, and developing a member comprising a compound of the formula(IV) which is more than 25 percent of the total components of the member;##SPC10##wherein R.sub.2 is selected from the group consisting of an hydrogen atom,hydroxyl group, alkoxycarbonyl group having alkyl group of 1 to 4 carbonatoms, cyano and a phenyl group, R.sub.4 is selected from the groupconsisting of a direct bond of carbon atoms, alkylene group having 1 to 3carbon atoms which is capable of forming a bis-compound and a phenylenegroup which is capable of forming a bis-compound, m is an integer from 1to 4, n is an integer from 0 to 2, and x is an integer from 5 to 100.8. An electrophotographic method as in claim 7 where said member furthercomprises a resin binder."}
{"WKU":"039308529","Title":"Electrophotographic sensitive member with attaching means","App_Date":"1974-04-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Susumu Tanaka;Yuji Enoguchi;Hidetoshi Kawabata","Assignee":"Minolta Camera Kabushiki Kaisha","ICL_Class":"G03G  500","References":"2277013;3190199;3536481;3552957;3574615;3578445","Claims":"We claim:1. An electrophotographic sensitive member comprising a longitudinallyextending flexible first web including a substrate provided with anelectrically conducting layer and a photoconductive layer superimposed onsaid electrically conducting layer, and a connecting member extendinglongitudinally from an end of said first web and including an electricallyinsulating molecularly longitudinally stretch oriented, flexible,polymeric resin second web which is unidirectionally longitudinally heatcontractible.2. The electrophotographic sensitive member of claim 1 wherein said firstand second webs are of rectangular configuration and substantiallyco-extensive in width.3. The electrophotographic sensitive member of claim 1 including means forjoining the free ends of said webs to form an endless loop.4. The electrophotographic sensitive member of claim 1 including layers ofan adhesive agent located along the underfaces of the free outer endborders of said webs.5. An electrophotographic sensitive member comprising a flexible first webincluding a substrate having an electrically conductive layer with aphotoconductive layer thereon and a uni-directionally longitudinally heatcontractible second web of a predetermined length extending longitudinallyfrom an end of said first web and formed of an electrically insulatingmolecularly longitudinally stretch oriented polymeric resin."}
{"WKU":"039308537","Title":"Accelerating aging method for selenium-arsenic photoconductors","App_Date":"1973-12-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Anthony J. Ciuffini","Assignee":"Xerox Corporation","ICL_Class":"G03G  504","References":"2551582;2886434;3533783","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a process for improving the operating efficiency and to increase lowdensity copy resolution of a xerographic photoreceptor comprising asubstrate and at least one selenium-arsenic alloy as a photoconductorlayer, the improvement comprising exposing the uncharged photoconductorlayer of the photoreceptor to a nonimaging visible or ultraviolet lightflux while at a temperature of about 55.degree.-180.degree.C.2. The process of claim 1 comprising exposing the photoconductor layer to alight flux of about 4,000-7,000 Angstrom.3. The process of claim 2 wherein the photoconductor layer is exposed tovisible white light while the photoconductor is within a temperature rangeof about 85.degree.-170.degree.C.4. The process of claim 2 wherein at least one photoconductor layercomprising selenium and not less than about 5% be weight of arsenic isexposed to light for a period of about 15-120 minutes.5. The process of claim 2 wherein the photoconductor layer comprisesselenium and about 5-50% by weight of arsenic.6. The process of claim 2 wherein the photoconductor layer is exposed tolight at an intensity of about 100-300 microwatts/cm.sup.2.7. The process of claim 3 wherein the photoconductor layer containsselenium and about 5-50% by weight of arsenic.8. The process of claim 3 wherein the photoconductor layer is exposed tocool white light at an intensity of about 150-200 microwatts/cm.sup.2.9. The process of claim 8 wherein the photoconductor layer is permitted tocool from about 170.degree.C. for about 30-120 minutes in the presence ofcool white light."}
{"WKU":"039308545","Title":"Electrostatic copy paper containing manganous salt","App_Date":"1974-07-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Edgar L. Jones;Leonard Laskin;Phillip E. Sokol","Assignee":"DeSoto, Inc.","ICL_Class":"G03G  508","References":"3037861;3197307;3553009","Claims":"We claim:1. An organic solvent solution coating composition comprising an inertorganic solvent having dissolved therein a resin binder selected from thegroup consisting of:1. copolymers containing at least 30% by weight of copolymerized styrene;2. copolymers containing at least 30% by weight of C.sub.1 - C.sub.20 alkylesters of copolymerized acrylic, methacrylic and crotonic acids;3. copolymers containing at least 30% by weight of copolymerized vinylacetate;4. alkyd resins copolymerized with at least 30% by weight of styrene; and5. mixtures of the foregoing; said solution further containing from 250 to4000 parts per million of manganese, based on the weight of the resin, inthe form of manganous salt selected from the group consisting of manganouschloride and manganous bromide.2. An organic solvent solution coating composition as recited in claim 1further including finely divided zinc oxide present in a weight ratio withrespect to said resin binder of from 4:1 to 30:1.3. An organic solvent solution coating composition as recited in claim 1 inwhich manganous salt is manganous chloride.4. An organic solvent solution coating composition as recited in claim 1 inwhich said organic solvent comprises from 5-40% of n-propanol, based onthe total weight of solvent.5. An electrostatic copy paper comprising a sheet of electricallyconductive paper having a surface thereof coated with a photoconductivecoating, said coating comprising finely divided zinc oxide particlesdispersed in an insulating resin binder, and said coating havingincorporated therein from 50 to 400 parts per million of manganese, basedon the weight of said zinc oxide, in the form of manganous salt selectedfrom the group consisting of manganous chloride and manganous bromide.6. An electrostatic copy paper as recited in claim 5 in which saidmanganous salt is manganous chloride.7. an electrostatic copy paper as recited in claim 5 in which saidphotoconductive coating further includes a small proportion of dyesensitizers to improve sensitivity to visible light.8. An electrostatic copy paper as recited in claim 5 in which said zincoxide is present in a weight ratio with respect to said resin binder offrom 5:1 to 10:1.9. An electrostatic copy paper as recited in claim 5 in which said resinbinder is selected from the group consisting of:1. copolymers containing at least 30% by weight of copolymerized styrene;2. copolymers containing at least 30% by weight of copolymerized C.sub.1 -C.sub.20 alkyl esters of acrylic, methacrylic and crotonic acids;3. copolymers containing at least 30% by weight of copolymerized vinylacetate;4. alkyd resins copolymerized with at least 30% by weight of styrene; and5. mixtures of the foregoing."}
{"WKU":"039308553","Title":"Process for the photographic production of given transparency or density","App_Date":"1974-04-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Reinhard Muller","Assignee":"Agfa-Gevaert Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"G03C  504","References":"2995066;3148581;3165969;3468230;3513308;3580660;3687543;3700325","Claims":"I claim:1. Photographic process for the production of density or transparencyprofiles in photographic layers, characterized by the following stages:a. a photographic material containing at least one silver halide gelatinemulsion layer is exposed behind a photographic test wedge in the usualmanner, the exposed photographic material is developed to produce aresulting image, the curve characterizing the photographic properties ofthe layer is deduced from the resulting image of the test wedge, theexposure being plotted along the abscissa on a linear scale andtransparency or density along the ordinate;b. on this graph, the required transparency or density distribution isentered as a function of the auxiliary space coordinate X and thisdistribution is reflected on the characteristic curve obtained in Stage(a) to determine the brightness distribution required for subsequentexposure on the same photographic material;c. the brightness distribution obtained by reflection in Stage (b) isproduced by suitable optical anamorphotic means in which the image planealong the auxiliary space coordinate X is substantially unfocused wherebyit defines substantially only brightness andd. to produce an image by using the obtained brightness distribution in thegeometric shape of the desired profile on the same photographic materialof stage a which is then developed with the same developer as that usedfor developing the photographic material in stage (a).2. Process according to claim 1, characterised in that the exposedphotographic material for producing coloured raster profiles is processedby a dye incorporation colour development process.3. Process according to claim 1, characterized in that colour photographicmaterials are exposed to coloured light in the anamorphotic apparatus andthen coloured developed.4. Process according to claim 3, characterised in that repeated exposuresare carried out with differently coloured lights and different models.5. Process according to claim 4, characterised in that after each exposureto a coloured light, the photographic material is rotated through acertain angle around the optical axis of the anamorphotic apparatus."}
{"WKU":"039308561","Title":"Photopolymerisable compositions and their uses with diazonium salts as","App_Date":"1973-07-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Peter Pinot de Moira;John Philip Murphy","Assignee":"Ozalid Company Limited","ICL_Class":"G03F  708;G03C  154","References":"3155513;3205157;3211553;3294743;3295974;3353984;3433769;3585034;3703496;3708296;3711390","Claims":"We claim:1. A light-sensitive material comprising a support carrying a coating of aphotopolymerisable epoxy resin composition and containing, as aphotosensitive compound capable of catalyzing hardening of the epoxyresin, a diazonium salt soluble in organic solvents wherein the anion ofsaid diazonium salt is difluorophosphate, said diazonium salt being freeof amino groups and groups which would react with Lewis acids which areproduced as a result of the decomposition of the diazonium salt.2. A light-sensitive material comprising a support carrying a coating of aphotopolymerisable epoxy resin composition containing, as a photosensitivecompound capable of catalyzing hardening of the epoxy resin, a diazoniumsalt soluble in organic solvents wherein the anion of said diazonium saltis phosphotungstate, said diazonium salt being free of amino groups andgroups which would react with Lewis acids which are produced as a resultof the decomposition of the diazonium salt.3. A material as claimed in claim 1, wherein the diazonium cation isselected from 2,5-dimethoxy (or diethoxy)-4-p-tolylmercaptobenzenediazonium, 2,5-diethoxy (or dimethoxy)-4-benzamidobenzene diazonium,2,5-diethoxy (or dimethoxy)-4-n-butylmercaptobenzene diazonium and2-N-methyl-N-ethoxycarbonylamino-4-p-tolylmercapto-5-methoxybenzenediazonium.4. A material as claimed in claim 2 wherein the diazonium cation isselected from 2,5-dimethoxy (or diethoxy)-4-p-tolylmercaptobenzenediazonium, 2,5-diethoxy (or dimethoxy)-4-benzamidobenzene diazonium,2,5-diethoxy (or dimethoxy)-4-n-butylmercaptobenzene diazonium and2-N-methyl-N-ethoxycarbonyl-amino-4-p-tolylmercapto-5-methoxybenzenediazonium.5. A material as claimed in claim 1, wherein the diazonium salt is presentin the coating in an amount of 2-15% by weight of the weight of epoxyresin.6. A material as claimed in claim 1, wherein the diazonium salt is presentin the coating in an amount of 8-10% by weight of the weight of the resin.7. A material as claimed in claim 1, wherein the diazonium salt is2,5-dimethoxy-4-p-tolylmercapto-benzene diazonium difluorophosphate.8. A material as claimed in claim 1, wherein part of the epoxy resin is anepoxylated novolak.9. A material as claimed in claim 1, wherein the support is of aluminium.10. A material as claimed in claim 1, wherein the support is a polymericfilm.11. A material as claimed in claim 1, wherein the support is a silk screen.12. A method of making a printing plate, which comprises exposing toultra-violet light under a master a material as claimed in claim 1 anddeveloping the exposed material by removing the coating from the unexposedareas of the support by means of a solvent.13. A method of making a printed circuit, which comprises exposing toultra-violet light under a master a material as claimed in claim 1 whereinthe support is a metal foil mounted on an electrically insulating backing,removing the unexposed areas of the coating from the support by treatingwith solvent and removing by etching the bared areas of the metal foil.14. A photographic copying method, which comprises exposing to light undera master a material as claimed in claim 1, heating the exposed material torender the unexposed areas of the coating sticky and dusting pigment on tothe material to effect adherence of the powder to the sticky areas."}
{"WKU":"039308570","Title":"Resist process","App_Date":"1973-05-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Diana Jean Bendz;Gerald Andrei Bendz;Anne Marie Wildman","Assignee":"International Business Machines Corporation","ICL_Class":"G03C  500","References":"3152938;3458311;3535137;3600243;3649393;3730717;3756827","Claims":"We claim:1. A resist process comprising:a. forming a resist layer on a substrate,b. exposing said layer patternwise while varying the exposure energy acrossthe pattern to form a plurality of exposed regions in said layer havingdiffering solubility rates,c. developing said resist layer with a first developer so as to remove theportions of said layer having the greatest solubility rate from saidsubstrate and form a resist mask having a first configuration,d. subjecting the exposed portions of said substrate to a first additive orsubtractive treatment with the remainder of said resist layer acting toprotect the covered portions of said substrate from the treatment,e. developing the resist layer with a second, more concentrated, developerso as to remove the patterns of said layer having the next greatestsolubility rate from said substrate to form a resist mask having a secondconfiguration,f. subjecting the exposed portions of said substrate to a second additiveor subtractive treatment with the remainder of said resist layer acting toprotect the covered portions of said substrate from said treatment.2. The process of claim 1 wherein the exposure step comprises the step ofexposing said layer through a graded mask having areas of differingoptical density to the transmittal of light.3. The process of claim 1 wherein said substrate is a dielectric materialwhich is coated with an electrically conductive layer.4. The process of claim 3 wherein said first and second treatments areetching steps to remove portions of said electrically conductive layer.5. The process of claim 3 wherein said first treatment is an etching stepand said second treatment is a plating step.6. The process of claim 1 wherein said substrate is a semiconductor device.7. The process of claim 2 wherein the resist is an alkali soluble positiveacting resist containing a meta-cresol formaldehyde novolak resin havingan average molecular weight of about 1,000, and a sensitizer which is the2-diazo-1-oxo-naphthalene-5-sulfonic acid ester of2,3,4-trihydroxybenzophenone and said developers are aqueous alkalinesolutions with said first developer being more dilute in that it containsa lower solids content by weight of alkaline material than said seconddeveloper."}
{"WKU":"039308588","Title":"Heat development process utilizing a photosensitive composition","App_Date":"1973-11-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William W. Limburg;Leon A. Teuscher","Assignee":"Xerox Corporation","ICL_Class":"G03C  524","References":"2772158;2789052;2789053;2905555;3046137","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method of forming an image which comprises:a. exposing to actinic radiation in an imagewise manner a compositionconsisting essentially of:"}
{"WKU":"039308596","Title":"Photographic process, system, recording medium and monoweb","App_Date":"1973-07-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard A. Corrigan","Assignee":"Bell & Howell Company","ICL_Class":"G03C  526;G03C  106","References":"2698798;2774668;2819166;3179517;3260598;3415651;3419395;3468664;3518088;3576632;3729314;3759712","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An improved photographic recording medium comprising:a layer of silver halide emulsion;a barrier layer, soluble in aqueous alkali but insoluble in water andacidic media, disposed on a surface of said emulsion layer, said barrierlayer comprising a material selected from the group consisting of: amonoalkyl ester-containing copolymer derivative of methyl ethylether-maleic anhydride copolymer, and a vinyl acetate-maleic anhydridecopolymer; andan acidic developer for said silver halide with said barrier layer, saiddeveloper being activatable at an alkaline pH.2. The improved recording medium of claim 1 wherein said developer isformed as a layer disposed on the surface of said barrier layer oppositethe barrier layer surface contacting said emulsion.3. The improved recording medium of claim 1 wherein said copolymercomprises monoalkyl ester-containing copolymer derivative of methyl ethylether-maleic anhydride copolymer.4. The improved recording medium of claim 1 wherein said copolymercomprises a vinyl acetate-maleic anhydride copolymer.5. An improved photographic process, which process comprises:exposing a photographic recording medium to a pattern of light, said mediumcomprising:"}
{"WKU":"039308600","Title":"Spectrally sensitized color photographic materials suitable for high","App_Date":"1974-01-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Keisuke Shiba;Masanao Hinata;Seiiti Kubodera","Assignee":"Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"G03C  700","References":"3480434;3573916;3703377;3713828;3713835;3814609;3822136","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method for producing an image having a reduced amount of fog whichcomprises a step of color developing at a temperature of at least30.degree.C., an exposed light-sensitive silver halide material containingat least one spectrally sensitized silver halide photographic emulsionlayer on a support, said emulsion layer containing at least onesensitizing dye having the halide ion concentration increasing effectwhich can be determined by:a. warming mixture A to 70.degree.C., wherein mixture A comprises:"}
{"WKU":"039308618","Title":"Silver halide emulsions containing 3-anilino-2-pyrazolin-5-one color","App_Date":"1974-03-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Raphael Karel Van Poucke;Hector Alfons Vanden Eynde;Leo August Van Wijnsberghe","Assignee":"Agfa-Gevaert N.V.","ICL_Class":"G03C  700;G03C  140","References":"2289805;2343703;3415652;3798234","Claims":"We claim:1. Method of producing a magenta coloured photographic image in aphotographic light-sensitive silver halide material which comprisesexposing the material and developing it with an aromatic primary aminocolour developing agent in the presence of a 3-anilino-2-pyrazolin-5-onecolour coupler wherein the anilino group carries an aryloxysulphonylgroup.2. Method according to claim 1, wherein the 2-pyrazolin-5-one colourcoupler corresponds to the formula:##EQU2##wherein: R.sub.1 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or aheterocycle,X represents hydrogen or a substituent that exhibits 2-equivalentcharacter,Ar represents a phenyl group carrying an aryloxysulphonyl group.3. Method according to claim 1 wherein the aryloxysulphonyl group is aphenyloxysulphonyl group which may be substituted with one or more of thegroups alkyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxy, halogen, alkoxy, alkylthio oralkylsulphonyl.4. Method according to claim 2 wherein in the formula the group Arrepresents a group of the formula:##SPC6##wherein:Z is hydrogen, halogen, alkoxy, or alkylthio, andA is a carbocyclic aryl group which may be substituted with one or more ofthe groups, alkyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxy, halogen, alkoxy, alkylthio oralkylsulphonyl.5. A photographic element containing at least one silver halide emulsionlayer and a 3-anilino-2-pyrazolin-5-one compound wherein the anilino groupcarries an aryloxy sulphonyl group.6. A photographic element according to claim 5 wherein the compoundcorresponds to the formula:##EQU3##wherein: R.sub.1 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, or aheterocycle,X represents hydrogen or a substituent that exhibits 2-equivalentcharacter,Ar represents a phenyl group carrying an aryloxysulphonyl group.7. A photographic element according to claim 5 wherein the aryloxysulphonylgroup is a phenyloxysulphonyl group which may be substituted with one ormore of the groups alkyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxy, halogen, alkoxy, alkylthioor alkylsulphonyl.8. A photographic element according to claim 6 wherein in the formula thegroup Ar represents a group of the formula:##SPC7##wherein:Z is hydrogen, halogen, alkoxy, or alkylthio, andA is a carbocyclic aryl group which may be substituted with one or more ofthe groups, alkyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxy, halogen, alkoxy, alkylthio oralkylsulphonyl.9. A photographic element according to claim 5, wherein thearyloxysulphonyl group comprises one or more aliphatic hydrocarbon groupsof at least 5 C-atoms.10. A photographic element according to claim 5 wherein said3-anilino-2-pyrazolin-5-one compound carries in the 1-position an arylgroup containing an aliphatic hydrocarbon group of at least 5 carbonatoms."}
{"WKU":"039308626","Title":"Dye developer transfer photosensitive material with substituted catechol","App_Date":"1974-05-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Motohiko Tsubota;Yoshiharu Fuseya","Assignee":"Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"G03C  700;G03C  554;G03C  176;G03C  140","References":"2983606;3002997;3146102;3262781;3462266;3617277;3653896","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A light-sensitive member for use in a color diffusion transfer elementwhich comprises a support having thereon at least one silver halideemulsion layer and at least one dye developing agent combined with thesilver halide in said silver halide emulsion layer, wherein at least onelayer on said support contains an auxiliary developing agent selected fromthe group consisting of a catechol having at least one substituentselected from the group consisting of an alkoxy group, an acylamino group,an acylimino group, an alkylsulfonamido group, an alkylthio group, anarylthio group, an alkylseleno group, an arylseleno group and aheterocyclic group; dissolved in a substantially water-insoluble solventand present in said layer as finely divided liquid droplets.2. The light-sensitive member for use in a color diffusion transfer elementof claim 1, wherein said alkoxy group is a methoxy group, an ethoxy group,a propoxy group, an isopropoxy group, a butoxy group, an isobutoxy group,a t-butoxy group, a pentyloxy group, a hexyloxy group or an octyloxygroup; said acylamino group is an acylamino group containing as acyl groupsubstituents an acetyl group, a propanoyl group, a butanoyl group, abenzoyl group, or substituted benzoyl groups substituted with an alkylgroup having 1 to 4 carbon atoms and/or a halogen atom; said acyliminogroup is an acylimino group containing as acyl group substituents the sameacyl group substituents recited for said acylamino group and acyliminogroups containing in addition to said acyl group alkyl groups having 1 to4 carbon atoms, phenyl groups and substituted phenyl groups substitutedwith an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms and/or a halogen atom assubstituents; said alkylsulfoamido group is a methylsulfonamido group;said alkylthio group and said alkylseleno group are alkylthio andalkylseleno groups in which the alkyl group is a methyl group, an ethylgroup, a propyl group, a butyl group, a t-butyl group, a pentyl group, ahexyl group, an octyl group or a benzyl group; said arylthio group andsaid arylseleno group are phenylthio and phenylseleno groups and saidheterocyclic group is a heterocyclic group containing a 5- or 6-memberring containing at least one non-metal atom selected from the groupconsisting of a nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur and selenium atom.3. The light-sensitive member for use in a color diffusion transfer elementof claim 1, wherein said catechol derivative is 4-methoxycatechol,4-propoxycatechol, 4-octyloxycatechol, 4-t-butoxycatechol,3,4-dimethoxy-6-methylcatechol, 3,4,5-tribromo-6-methoxycatechol,3-isobutoxycatechol, 3-hexyloxy-4-methoxycatechol,5-aminoethyl-3-methoxycatechol, 4-acetylaminocatechol,4-(N-acetyl-N-methylamino)catechol, 4-acetylamino-5-chlorocatechol,4-benzoylaminocatechol, 3,5-diacetylaminocatechol,4-(N-methylsulfoamido)catechol, 4-butylmercaptocatechol,4-benzylmercaptocatechol, 4-phenylselenocatechol,4-(2 -morpholino)-catechol, 4,4 -(2 -aminothiazolyl)catechol,3-methyl-4-phenyl-mercaptocatechol,3-benzylmercapto-4,6-di-t-butylcatechol, 1,2-diacetoxy-4-methoxybenzene or2-acetoxy-3,4,5-tribromo-6-methoxyphenol.4. The light-sensitive member for use in a color diffusion transfer elementof claim 1, wherein said layer containing said auxiliary developing agentcontains a synthetic polymer latex.5. The light-sensitive member for use in a color diffusion transfer elementof claim 1, wherein said auxiliary developing agent is present in anamount ranging from 5 .times. 10.sup..sup.-1 to 5 .times. 10.sup..sup.-5mols/m.sup.2 of said support.6. The light-sensitive member for use in a color diffusion transfer elementof claim 1, wherein said silver halide is silver chloride, silver bromide,silver bromochloride, silver iodobromide, silver iodobromochloride or amixture thereof and wherein said dye developing agent is at least one of4-(p-(2 ,5 -dihydroxyphenyl)-phenylazo)-5-acetamido-1-naphthol,4-(p-(2 ,5 -dihydroxyphenethyl)-phenylazo)-5-benzamido-1-naphthol,1-phenyl-3-methyl-4-(p-(2 ,5 -dihydroxyphenethyl)-phenylazo)-5-pyrazolone,2-(p-(2 ,5 -dihydroxyphenethyl)-phenylazo)-4-acetamido-1-naphtohl,2-(p-2 ,5 -dihydroxyphenethyl)-phenylazo)-4-amino-1-naphthol,2-(p-(2 ,5 -dihydroxyphenethyl)-phenylazo)-4-methoxy-1-naphthol,2-(p-(2 ,5 -dihydroxyphenethyl)-phenylazo)-4-ethoxy-1-naphthol,1-phenyl-3-N-n-butyl-carboxamido-4-(p-(2 ,5 -dihydroxyphenethyl)-phenylazo)-5-pyrazolone,1-phenyl-3-N-n-hexyl-carboxamido-4-(p-(2 ,5 -dihydroxyphenethyl)-phenylazo)-5-pyrazolone,1-phenyl-3-N-cyclohexylcarboxamido-4-(p-(2 ,5 -dihydroxyphenethyl)-phenylazo)-5-pyrazolone,1-phenyl-3-amino-4-(4 -(p-(2 ,5 -dihydroxyphenethyl)phenylazo)-2 ,5 -diethoxyphenylazo)-5-pyrazolone,1-acetoxy-2-(p-(.beta.-hydroquinonyl)-phenylazo)-4-methoxynaphthalene,4-isopropoxy-2-(p-(.beta.-hydroquinonyl-ethyl)-phenylazo)-1-naphthol,1-acetoxy-2-(p-(.beta.-hydroquinonyl-ethyl)-phenylazo)-4-propoxynaphthalene, 1,4-bis-(2 ,5 -dihydroxyanilino)anthraquinone,1,5-bis-(2 ,5 -dihydroxyanilino)-4,8-dihydroxyanthraquinone,1,4-bis-(.beta.-(2 ,5 -dihydroxyphenyl)-isopropylamino)-anthraquinone,1,4-bis-(.beta.-(2 ,5 -dihydroxyphenyl)-ethylamino)-anthraquinone,1-chloro-4-(.beta.-(2 ,5 -dihydroxyphenyl)-ethylamino)-anthraquinone,N-monobenzoyl-1,4-bis-(.beta.-(2 ,5 -dihydroxyphenyl)-ethylamino)-anthraquinone or5,8-dihydroxy-1,4-bis-(.beta.-hydroquinonyl-.alpha.-methyl)-ethylamino)-anthraquinone."}
{"WKU":"039308634","Title":"Color photographic sensitive material","App_Date":"1974-04-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Keisuke Shiba;Takeshi Hirose;Toshiaki Aono;Reiichi Ohi;Tadao Shishido","Assignee":"Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"G03C  700;G03C  716;G03C  148;G03C  140","References":"3227551;3424583;3620746;3698897;3700453;3725062","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An incorporated type multi-layer color photographic sensitive materialcomprising a support having thereon at least two photosensitive emulsionlayer units each containing color couplers which form images having adifferent color from each other by color development, wherein at least oneof said photosensitive emulsion layer units comprises two or moreindividual layers, and at least one of said individual layers contains ahydroquinone derivative for interlayer color correction.2. The multi-layer color photographic sensitive material of claim 1,wherein said hydroquinone derivative has the general formula (I)##SPC3##wherein P, Q and R each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, analkenyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an amino group, analkylthio group, an aryl group, an arylthio group, a heterocyclic group,or a --SZ group, and wherein P and Q can combine to form a carbocyclicring; A and A  each represents a hydrogen atom or an alkaline splitablegroup selected from the group consisting of an acyl group and analkoxycarbonyl group; and Z represents a heterocyclic residue, saidheterocyclic residue being photographically inactive when combined andreleased upon development.3. The multi-layer color photographic sensitive material of claim 2, whreinsaid heterocyclic residue for Z is a heterocyclic aromatic group selectedfrom the group consisting of a tetrazolyl group, a triazolyl group, athiadiazolyl group, an oxazolyl group, an oxadiazolyl group, a thiazolylgroup and a pyrimidyl group.4. The multi-layer color photographic sensitive material of claim 1,wherein said hydroquinone derivative is diffusion resistant.5. The multi-layer color photographic sensitive material of claim 1,wherein said coupler is a magenta dye forming coupler, a yellow dyeforming coupler, or a cyan dye forming coupler.6. The multi-layer color photographic sensitive material of claim 5,wherein said magenta dye forming coupler is a 5-pyrazolone coupler, acyanoacetylcoumarone coupler or an imidazolone coupler, wherein saidyellow-dye forming coupler is an open-chained acylacetanilide coupler, anopen-chained acylacetonitrile coupler, an acylacetyl coupler and whereinsaid cyan dye forming coupler is a naphthol coupler or a phenol coupler.7. The multi-layer color photographic sensitive element of claim 6 whereinsaid magenta dye forming coupler is represented by general formula (II)##EQU3##wherein R.sub.1 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group,an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic group, an amino group, an acid amidegroup, or a ureido group; R.sub.2 represents an alkyl group, an arylgroup, or a heterocyclic group; and Z.sub.1 represents a hydrogen atom ora group splitable at color development selected from the group consistingof a thiocyano group, an acyloxy group, an aryloxy group, an alkoxy group,an alkoxycarbonyloxy group, an aryloxycarbonyloxy group, a disubstitutedamino group, an arylazo group, a heterocyclic azo group, an arylmonothiogroup, a heterocyclic monothio group, and a heterocyclic imide group;wherein said yellow dye forming coupler has the general formula (III)##EQU4##wherein R.sub.3 represents an alkyl group, or an aryl group; R.sub.4represents a phenyl group; Z.sub.2 represents a hydrogen atom or a groupsplitable at color development selected from the group consisting of ahalogen atom, an acyloxy group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic aromaticcarbonyloxy group, an arylsulfoxy group, a dioxoimido group and adioxythiazolidinyl group; and wherein said cyan dye forming coupler isrepresented by the general formula (IV) or (V)##SPC4##wherein R.sub.5 represents a carbamyl group, a sulfamyl group, analkoxycarbonyl group or an aryloxycarbonyl group; R.sub.6 represents analkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an amino group, acarboxamido group, a sulfonamido group, a sulfamyl group, or a carbamylgroup; R.sub.7, R.sub.8 and R.sub.9 each represents the same groups asdefined for R.sub.6 additionally a halogen atom or an alkoxy group; andZ.sub.3 represents a hydrogen atom or a group splitable at colordevelopment selected from the group consisting of a halogen atom, athiocyano group, an imino group, a cycloimido group, an arylazo group anda heterocyclic azo group.8. The multi-layer color photographic sensitive material of claim 1 whereinsaid at least one of said photosensitive emulsion layer units comprisestwo or more emulsion layers which are sensitive to the same wavelengthregion.9. The multi-layer color photographic sensitive material of claim 1,wherein said hydroquinone derivative for interlayer color correction isincluded in an amount up to about 50 mol % based on the coupler includedin the layer to which said hydroquinone derivative is added.10. The multi-layer color photographic sensitive material of claim 9,wherein said hydroquinone derivative for interlayer color correction ispresent in an amount of 5 to 20 mol %.11. The multi-layer color photographic sensitive layer of claim 1, whereineach of the photosensitive emulsion layers present have substantially thesame developing rate.12. The multi-layer color photographic sensitive material of claim 11,wherein each emulsion layer unit comprises a plurality of emulsion layerssensitive to the same wavelength region which have substantially the samedeveloping rate.13. The multi-layer color photographic sensitive element of claim 1,wherein said hydroquinone derivative for interlayer color correctionreleases a diffusable color development inhibitor at color developmentwhich selectively inhibits color development of an adjacent photosensitiveemulsion layer.14. The multi-layer color photographic sensitive element of claim 8,wherein said hydroquinone derivative for interlayer color correctionreleases a diffusable color development inhibitor at color developmentwhich selectively inhibits color development of an adjacent photosensitiveemulsion layer."}
{"WKU":"039308642","Title":"Auxiliary mordant layer for excess dye formed in integral color transfer","App_Date":"1974-04-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Edward P. Abel;Richard W. Becker","Assignee":"Eastman Kodak Company","ICL_Class":"G03C  140;G03C  700;G03C  554","References":"2977226;3620731;3647437;3679409;3721556;3836365","Claims":"We claim:1. In a photographic assemblage comprising:a. a support having thereon at least one photosensitive silver halideemulsion layer, said emulsion layer having associated therewith a dyeimage-providing material;b. a dye image-receiving layer; andc. means for discharging an alkaline processing composition within saidassemblage;said assemblage containing a silver halide developing agent, theimprovement comprising employing a scavenger mordant layer in saidassemblage to scavenge excess dye and unwanted byproducts produced duringprocessing of said assemblage, said scavenger mordant layer being solocated in said assemblage that when said alkaline processing compositionis discharged within said assemblage to form a layer, the scavengermordant layer will be on one side of both said alkaline processingcomposition layer and said emulsion layer and the dye image-receivinglayer will be on the other side of said layers, and wherein said scavengermordant layer is located in a timing layer or behind a timing layer withrespect to said silver halide emulsion layer and said alkaline processingcomposition layer so that at least approximately four times as much dyewill be imagewise transferred after processing to said dye image-receivinglayer as compared with said scavenger mordant layer.2. The assemblage of claim 1 wherein:a. said dye image-receiving layer is located betweem said support and saidsilver halide emulsion layer; andb. said assemblage also includes a transparent sheet superposed over thelayer outermost from said support.3. The assemblage of claim 2 wherein said scavenger mordant layer and itsassociated timing layer are on said transparent sheet.4. The assemblage of claim 3 wherein said transparent sheet includes apH-lowering layer.5. The assemblage of claim 4 wherein said pH-lowering layer is a polymericacid.6. The assemblage of claim 5 wherein said transparent sheet comprises atransparent support coated with said polymeric acid layer, said scavengermordant layer, and said timing layer.7. The assemblage of claim 2 wherein said discharging means is a rupturablecontainer containing said alkaline processing composition and anopacifying agent, said container being so positioned during processing ofsaid assemblage that a compressive force applied to said container willeffect a discharge of the container s contents between said transparentsheet and the outermost layer of said photosensitive element.8. The assemblage of claim 1 comprising:a. a photosensitive element comprising a transparent support having thereonthe following layers in sequence: an image-receiving layer, an alkalinesolution-permeable, light-reflective layer, an alkalinesolution-permeable, opaque layer, a nondiffusible redox cyan dye releaserlayer, a red-sensitive silver halide emulsion layer, a non-diffusibleredox magenta dye releaser layer, a green-sensitive silver halide emulsionlayer, a nondiffusible redox yellow dye releaser layer, and ablue-sensitive silver halide emulsion layer;b. a transparent sheet superposed over said blue-sensitive silver halideemulsion layer and comprising a transparent support coated with apolymeric acid layer, said scavenger mordant layer, and said timing layer;andc. a rupturable container containing said alkaline processing compositionand an opacifying agent, said container being so positioned duringprocessing of said assemblage that a compressive force applied to saidcontainer will effect a discharge of the container s contents between saidtiming layer on said transparent sheet and said blue-sensitive silverhalide emulsion layer.9. The assemblage of claim 8 wherein each said redox dye releaser is anondiffusible sulfonamido compound which is alkali-cleavable uponoxidation to release a diffusible color-providing moiety from the benzenenucleus, said compound having the formula:##SPC4##wherein:1. Col is a dye or dye precursor moiety;2. Ballast is an organic ballasting radical of such molecular size andconfiguration as to render said compound non-diffusible during developmentin an alkaline processing composition;3. G is OR or NHR.sub.1 wherein R is hydrogen or a hydrolyzable moiety andR.sub.1 is hydrogen or an alkyl group of 1 to 22 carbon atoms; and4. n is a positive integer of 1 to 2 and is 2 when G is OR or when R.sub.1is hydrogen or an alkyl group of less than 8 carbon atoms.10. The assemblage of claim 9 wherein each said silver halide emulsionlayer is a direct positive silver halide emulsion.11. The assemblage of claim 1 wherein the same material is used for saiddye image-receiving layer and said scavenger mordant layer.12. The assemblage of claim 1 wherein different materials are used for saiddye image-receiving layer and said scavenger mordant layer.13. The assemblage of claim 1 wherein said dye image-receiving layer islocated on a separate transparent support superposed over the layeroutermost from an opaque support having thereon said photosensitive silverhalide emulsion layer.14. The assemblage of claim 13 wherein said scavenger mordant layer and itsassociated timing layer are located between said opaque support and saidsilver halide emulsion layer.15. The assemblage of claim 14 wherein the material in said scavengermordant layer and the material in said timing layer are present togetherin a single, timed scavenger layer.16. The assemblage of claim 13 which includes a pH-lowering layer betweensaid transparent support and said dye image-receiving layer.17. The assemblage of claim 16 wherein said pH-lowering layer is apolymeric acid layer.18. The assemblage of claim 17 wherein said transparent support is coatedwith said polymeric acid layer, a timing layer, and said dyeimage-receiving layer.19. The assemblage of claim 13 wherein said discharging means is arupturable container containing said alkaline processing composition andan opacifying agent, said container being so positioned during processingof said assemblage that a compressive force applied to said container willeffect a discharge of the container s contents between said transparentsheet and the outermost layer of said photosensitive element.20. The assemblage of claim 19 wherein said opacifying agent is aninorganic light-reflecting pigment and said processing composition alsocontains a dye which absorbs light within the visible region at the pH ofsaid alkaline composition, said dye exhibiting light absorptionsubstantially outside of the visible region at a second pH which is lowerthan said first-mentioned pH.21. The assemblage of claim 20 wherein said dye is a phthalein dye.22. The assemblage of claim 20 wherein said light-reflecting pigment istitanium dioxide.23. The assemblage of claim 13 comprising:a. a photosensitive element comprising an opaque support having thereon thefollowing layers in sequence: said scavenger mordant layer, said timinglayer, a cyan dye image-providing material, a red-sensitive silver halideemulsion layer, a magneta dye image-providing material, a green-sensitivesilver halide emulsion layer, a yellow dye image-providing material and ablue-sensitive silver halide emulsion layer;b. a transparent sheet superposed over said blue-sensitive silver halideemulsion layer and comprising a transparent support coated with apolymeric acid layer, a timing layer, and said dye image-receiving layer;andc. a rupturable container containing said alkaline processing compositionand an opacifying agent, said container being so positioned duringprocessing of said assemblage that a compressive force applied to saidcontainer will effect a discharge of the container s contents between saiddye image-receiving layers on said transparent sheet and saidblue-sensitive silver halide emulsion layer.24. The assemblage of claim 23 wherein each said dye image-providingmaterial is a redox dye releaser.25. The assemblage of claim 24 wherein each said redox dye releaser is anondiffusible sulfonamido compound which is alkali-cleavable uponoxidation to release a diffusible color-providing moiety from the benzenenucleus, said compound having the formula:##SPC5##wherein:1. Col is a dye or dye precursor moiety;2. Ballast is an organic ballasting radical of such molecular size andconfiguration as to render said compound nondiffusible during developmentin an alkaline processing composition;3. G is OR or NHR.sub.1 wherein R is hydrogen or a hydrolyzable moiety andR.sub.1 is hydrogen or an alkyl group of 1 to 22 carbon atoms; and4. n is a positive integer of 1 to 2 and is 2 when G is OR or when R.sub.1is hydrogen or an alkyl group of less than 8 carbon atoms.26. The assemblage of claim 25 wherein each said silver halide emulsionlayer is a direct positive silver halide emulsion.27. The assemblage of claim 13 wherein said dye image-providing material isa dye developer.28. The assemblage of claim 13 wherein said dye image-providing material isan oxichromic compound which contains a reduced azomethine linkage."}
{"WKU":"039308650","Title":"Photopolymerizable copying composition","App_Date":"1974-12-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Raimund Josef Faust;Kurt Walter Klupfel","Assignee":"Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"G03C  168;G03C  170","References":"3796578;3804631;3833384;3850770","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A photopolymerizable copying composition comprising at least onepolymerizable compound, at least one photo-initiator, and at least onecopolymer ofA. an unsaturated carboxylic acid,B. an alkyl methacrylate with at least 4 carbon atoms in the alkyl group,andC. at least one additional monomer which is capable of copolymerizationwith monomers (A) and (B), the homopolymer of said additional monomerhaving a glass transition temperature of at least 80.degree.C.2. A copying composition according to claim 1 which comprises methacrylicacid, acrylic acid, crotonic acid, sorbic acid, maleic or itaconic acid,or the half-esters thereof, as monomer (A).3. A copying composition according to claim 2 which comprises methacrylicacid as the unsaturated carboxylic acid (A).4. A copying composition according to claim 1 in which the alkylmethacrylate (B) has from 4 to 20 carbon atoms in the alkyl group.5. A copying composition according to claim 1 which comprises styrene,p-chlorostyrene, vinyl toluene, vinyl naphthalene, vinyl carbazole, vinylcyclohexane, acrylamide, methacrylamide, N-alkyl-acrylamide, phenylmethacrylate, acrylonitrile, methacrylonitrile, or benzyl methacrylate asthe monomeric component (C).6. A copying composition according to claim 1 in which the homopolymer ofthe monomeric component (C) has a glass transition temperature of at least100.degree.C.7. A copying composition according to claim 6 in which styrene is themonomeric component (C).8. A copying composition according to claim 1 in which, in the copolymer,the component (A) is present in a concentration of about 10 to 40 percentby weight, the component (B) is present in a concentration of about 35 to83 percent by weight, and the component (C) is present in a concentrationof about 1 to not more than 35 percent by weight.9. A copying composition according to claim 1 in the form of a solidlight-sensitive layer on a metallic support.10. A copying composition according to claim 9 in which the support is acopper support.11. A copying composition according to claim 1 in the form of a solid,transferable light-sensitive layer on an intermediate plastic filmsupport.12. A copying composition according to claim 1 containing a copolymer of 30parts by weight of methacrylic acid, 60 parts by weight of n-hexylmethacrylate, and 10 parts by weight of styrene.13. A copying composition according to claim 1 containing a copolymer of 50parts by weight of methacrylic acid, 100 parts by weight of n-hexylmethacrylate, and 10 parts by weight of 1-vinyl naphthalene.14. A copying composition according to claim 1 containing a copolymer of 20parts by weight of methacrylic acid, 68.7 parts by weight of n-butylmethacrylate, and 11.3 parts by weight of styrene.15. A copying composition according to claim 1 containing a copolymer of 50parts by weight of methacrylic acid, 100 parts by weight of 2-ethyl-hexylmethacrylate, and 15 parts by weight of acrylonitrile.16. A copying composition according to claim 1 containing a copolymer of 95parts by weight of methacrylic acid, 175 parts by weight of n-hexylmethacrylate, and 50 parts by weight of acrylonitrile."}
{"WKU":"039308669","Title":"Silver halide color photographic materials containing","App_Date":"1974-04-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Yasushi Oishi;Minoru Yamada;Hiroyuki Amano;Tokio Nishimura","Assignee":"Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"G03C  140","References":"3127269;3698909;3761274;3764337","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A color photographic material comprising at least one silver halideemulsion layer containing a magenta dye forming coupler comprising a3-anilino-5-pyrazolone type coupler having a hydrophobic ballast group onthe aromatic nucleus of the anilino group contained in combination with aphenolic compound containing an ether bond at the 4-position and havingthe ability to improve the light fastness of the magenta dye image formedby the coupling reaction of said magenta dye forming coupler with theoxidation produce of an aromatic primary amine color developing agent anda nucleus-substituted hydroquinone, wherein said magenta dye formingcoupler is represented by the general formula (I)##SPC30##wherein X represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, anaryloxy group, an N-substituted amino group, an amido group, a halogenatom, a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, or a nitro group; Y represents anaryl group or a heterocyclic group; Z represents a hydrogen atom or acoupling releasable group which is releasable from the active carbon atthe coupling position of said coupler when the coupler couples with theoxidation product of an aromatic primary amine color developing agent; Wrepresents a hydrophobic ballast group; and V represents a hydrogen atomor a group as defined for X or W; and wherein said phenolic compound isrepresented by the general formulae (III-a), (III-b) or (III-c):##SPC31##wherein R.sub.1 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group,or a terpenyl group; and R.sub.2, R.sub.3 and R.sub.4, which may be thesame or different, each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, analkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, an aralkyl group, anaralkoxy group, an alkenyl group, an alkenoxy group, an acylamino group,or a halogen atom;##SPC32##wherein R.sub.2, R.sub.3 and R.sub.4, which may be the same or different,each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an arylgroup, an aryloxy group, an aralkyl group, an aralkoxy group, an alkenylgroup, an alkenoxy group, an acylamino group, or a halogen atom; and Arepresents the non-metallic atoms necessary for forming a 5-membered ringor a 6-membered ring together with the##EQU8##moiety; or##SPC33##wherein R.sub.2 and R.sub.4, which may be the same or different, eachrepresents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an arylgroup, an aryloxy group, an aralkyl group, an aralkoxy group, an alkenylgroup, an alkenoxy group, an acylamino group, or a halogen atom.2. A color photographic material comprising a support having thereon atleast one silver halide emulsion layer containinga. A 3-anilino-5-pyrazolone type magenta dye forming coupler having ahydrophoblic ballast group on the aromatic nucleus of the anilino group,b. a phenolic compound having an ether bond at the 4-position and havingthe ability to improve the light fastness of the magenta dye image formedby the coupling of said magenta dye forming coupler with the oxidationproduct of an aromatic primary amine color developing agent, andc. a nucleus-substituted hydroquinone, wherein said magenta dye formingcoupler is represented by the general formula##SPC34##wherein X represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, anaryloxy group, an N-substituted amino group, an amido group a halogenatom, a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, or a nitro group; Y represents anaryl group or a heterocyclic group; Z represents a hydrogen atom or acoupling releasable group which is releasable from the active carbon atthe coupling position of said coupler when the coupler couples with theoxidation product of an aromatic primary amino color developing agent; Wrepresents a hydrophobic ballast group; and V represents a hydrogen atomor a group as defined for X or W; wherein said phenolic compound isrepresented by the general formulae (III-a), (III-b) or (III-c):##SPC35##wherein R.sub.1 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, an aralkyl group,or a terpenyl group; and R.sub.2, R.sub.3 and R.sub.4, which may be thesame or different, each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, analkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, an aralkyl group, anaralkoxy group, an alkenyl group, an alkenoxy group, an acylamino group,or a halogen atom;##SPC36##wherein R.sub.2, R.sub.3 and R.sub.4, which may be the same or different,each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an arylgroup, an aryloxy group, an aralkyl group, an aralkoxy group, an alkenylgroup, an alkenoxy group, an acylamino group, or a halogen atom; and Arepresents the non-metallic atoms necessary for forming a 5-membered ringor a 6-membered ring together with the##EQU9##moiety; or##SPC37##wherein R.sub.2 and R.sub.4, which may be the same or different, eachrepresents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an arylgroup, an aryloxy group, an aralkyl group, an aralkoxy group, an alkenylgroup, an alkenoxy group, an acylamino group, or a halogen atom andwherein said nucleus-substituted hydroquinone is represented by thegeneral formula (IV)##SPC38##wherein R.sub.5 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, and alkoxy group,an aryloxy group, a carbamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, an acyl group, analkoxycarbonyl group, or an aryloxycarbonyl group; Q represents a hydrogenatom or a halogen atom; and n is an integer of 1 to 4.3. The color photographic material as set forth in claim 1, in which saidmagenta dye forming coupler is represented by the general formula (II)##SPC39##wherein W represents a hydrophobic ballast group; Z represents a hydrogenatom or a coupling releasable group; X.sub.1 represents an alkyl grouphaving 1 to 4 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, ahalogen atom, a hydroxyl group, a cyano group, or a nitro group; Y.sub.1represents a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, an alkyl group, a carboxylgroup, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a nitro group, an aryloxy group, a cyanogroup, or an acylamino group; and Y.sub.2 and Y.sub.3, which may be thesame or different, each represents a hydrogen atom or a group as definedfor Y.sub.1.4. The color photographic material as set forth in claim 3, wherein X.sub.1is a halogen atom.5. The color photographic material as set forth in claim 2, in whichR.sub.5 represents a straight chain or branch chain alkyl group or anaralkyl group; Q is a hydrogen atom, and the total number of carbon atomsin the R.sub.5 group or R.sub.5 groups is 8 or more.6. The color photographic material as set forth in claim 1 wherein X is analkyl group.7. The color photographic material as set forth in claim 1 wherein X is ahalogen atom.8. The color photographic material as set forth in claim 5 wherein X ischlorine.9. The color photographic material as set forth in claim 1 wherein X isalkoxy.10. The color photographic material as set forth in claim 2 wherein X is analkyl group.11. The color photographic material as set forth in claim 2 wherein X is ahalogen atom.12. The color photographic material as set forth in claim 11 wherein X ischlorine.13. The color photographic material as set forth in claim 2 wherein X isalkoxy.14. The color photographic material as set forth in claim 3 wherein X.sub.1is an alkyl group.15. The color photographic material as set forth in claim 4 wherein X.sub.1is chlorine.16. The color photographic material as set forth in claim 3 wherein X.sub.1is alkoxy.17. The color photographic material as set forth in claim 1, wherein Z ishydrogen.18. The color photographic material as set forth in claim 1, wherein Z isselected from the group consisting of a thiocyano group, an acyloxy group,an aryloxy group, an aralkyloxycarbonyloxy group, an alkyloxycarbonyloxygroup, a halogen atom, an arylazo group, a 2-aryltriazolyl group, andalkylthio group, an arylthio group, a heterothio group, a cycloalkylthiogroup, a cycloalkoxy group and an N-heterocyclic group.19. The color photographic material as set forth in claim 1, wherein Z isselected from the group consisting of an acetoxy group, a dodecanoyloxygroup, an octadecanoyloxy group, a 3-pentadecylphenoxyacetoxy group, abenzoyloxy group, a .beta.-naphthoyloxy group, a3-[.gamma.-(2,4-di-t-amylphenoxy)-butylamido] benzoyloxy group, a phenoxygroup, a p-chlorophenoxy group, a p-nitrophenoxy group, a naphthoxy group,a benzyloxycarbonyloxy group, an ethyloxycarbonyloxy group, a chlorineatom, a bromine atom, a fluorine atom, a phenylazo group, ahydroxyphenylazo group, a chlorophenylazo group, a methylphenylazo group,a methoxyphenylazo group, a naphthylazo group, a 2-benzotriazolyl group, a2-naphthoazolyl group, an alkylthio group having 4 to 10 carbon atoms, aphenylthio group, a naphthylthio group, a 2-benthiazolylthio group, a1-phenyl-5-tetrazolylthio group, a 2-benzoxazolylthio group, a2-benzimidazolylthio group, a 5-phenyl-1,3,4-oxadiazolyl-2-thio group, acyclohexylthio group, a cyclohexyloxy group, a phthalimido group, a1,2,3,4-tetra-hydroisoquinolyl group, a piperidinyl group, a imidazolylgroup, and a 5,5 -dimethyl-3-hydantoinyl group.20. The color photographic material as set forth in claim 2, wherein Z ishydrogen.21. The color photographic material as set forth in claim 2, wherein Z isselected from the group consisting of a thiocyano group, an acyloxy group,an aryloxy group, an aralkyloxycarbonyloxy group, an alkyloxycarbonyloxygroup, a halogen atom, an arylazo group, a 2-aryltriazolyl group, analkylthio group, an arylthio group, a heterothio group, a cycloalkylthiogroup, a cycloalkoxy group and an N-heterocyclic group.22. The color photographic material as set forth in claim 2, wherein Z isselected from the group consisting of an acetoxy group, a dodecanoyloxygroup, an octadecanoyloxy group, a 3-pentadecylphenoxyacetoxy group, abenzoyloxy group, a .beta.-naphthoyloxy group, a3-[.gamma.-(2,4-di-t-amylphenoxy)-butylamido] benzoyloxy group, a phenoxygroup, a p-chlorophenoxy group, a p-nitrophenoxy group, a naphthoxy group,a benzyloxycarbonyloxy group, an ethyloxycarbonyloxy group, a chlorineatom, a bromine atom, a fluorine atom, a phenylazo group, ahydroxyphenylazo group, a chlorophenylazo group, a methylphenylazo group,a methoxyphenylazo group, a naphthylazo group, a 2-benzotriazolyl group, a2-naphthoazolyl group, an alkylthio group having 4 to 10 carbon atoms, aphenylthio group, a naphthylthio group, a 2-benzthiazolylthio group, a1-phenyl-5-tetrazolylthio group, a 2-benzoxazolylthio group, a2-benzimidazolylthio group, a 5-phenyl-1,3,4-oxadiazolyl-2-thio group, acyclohexylthio group, a cyclohexyloxy group, a phthalimido group, a1,2,3,4-tetra-hydroisoquinolyl group, a piperidinyl group, an imidazolygroup and a 5,5 -dimethyl-3-hydrantoinyl group."}
{"WKU":"039308677","Title":"Macrocyclic polyamines as sensitizers for silver halide emulsions","App_Date":"1974-01-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John H. Bigelow","Assignee":"E. I. Du Pont de Nemours and Company","ICL_Class":"G03C  128","References":"2743182;3408196;3595662","Claims":"I claim:1. A photographic colloid-silver halide emulsion containing a sensitizingamount of a chemical sensitizer or a salt or metal chelate thereof, saidchemical sensitizer having the formula"}
{"WKU":"039308685","Title":"Light sensitive arylglyoxyacrylate compositions","App_Date":"1973-05-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Thaddeus M. Muzyczko;Donald W. Fieder","Assignee":"The Richardson Company","ICL_Class":"G03C  168","References":"2367660;3725116;3770602","Claims":"We claim:1. A light sensitive and polymerizable composition having the followinggeneral structure:##EQU13##wherein X represents an aromatic or a heterocyclic structure, R.sub.1represents an alkyl group having from one to ten carbon atoms, R.sub.2represents a grouping selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, or alower alkyl group having from one to five carbon atoms, and R.sub.3represents an alkenyl group having from one to 10 carbon atoms.2. Claim 1 wherein X is benzene.3. Claim 1 wherein X is naphthalene.4. Claim 1 wherein R.sub.1 has two carbon atoms.5. Claim 1 wherein R.sub.2 has one carbon atom.6. Claim 1 wherein R.sub.3 has singular unsaturation.7. Claim 1 wherein R.sub.3 has one carbon atom.8. Claim 1 wherein Ar is benzene, R.sub.1 has two carbon atoms, and R.sub.2has one carbon atom.9. A photopolymeric relief plate having from about 0.005 to about 0.05inches of a coating described in claim 1 placed on a suitable backingmember.10. A lithographic printing plate comprising the light sensitivecomposition of claim 1 placed on a suitable backing member."}
{"WKU":"039308693","Title":"Photographic silver halide photosensitive materials","App_Date":"1974-01-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Akira Tanaka;Shoichi Horii;Seigo Ebato;Mamoru Sekido;Shoji Oka","Assignee":"Mitsubishi Paper Mills, Ltd.","ICL_Class":"G03C  110","References":"2635961;2656351;3719495","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A photographic silver halide emulsion containing, as a sensitizing dye,at least one compound having the following general formula:##EQU4##wherein R.sub.1, R.sub.2 and R.sub.3 are selected from the groupconsisting of alkyl of not more than 5 carbon atoms, alkyl of not morethan 5 carbon atoms substituted with alkoxy of not more than 5 carbonatoms, alkyl of not more than 5 carbon atoms substituted withalkoxycarbonyl of not more than 5 carbon atoms, dicarbomethoxyphenyl andallyl with the proviso that all of R.sub.1, R.sub.2 and R.sub.3 cannot bealkyl at the same time.2. A photographic silver halide emulsion according to claim 1, wherein saidcompound is selected from the group consisting of the following compounds:"}
{"WKU":"039308707","Title":"Silicon polishing solution preparation","App_Date":"1973-12-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jagtar Singh Basi","Assignee":"International Business Machines Corporation","ICL_Class":"C09K 1304","References":"2410322;2588253;2814589;3088889;3155556;3436259","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a process for preparing a silicon chemical-mechanical polishingsolution comprising cupric nitrate and ammonium fluoride in water in anamount effective to chemical-mechanical polish silicon, the improvementwhich comprises bringing cupric nitrate, ammonium nitrate and nitric acidinto aqueous solution and then adding thereto ammonium fluoride, saidnitric acid and ammonium nitrate being present in an amount effective toprevent copper precipitation.2. The process of claim 1 where the cupric nitrate is in the trihydrateform and the amount of cupric nitrate is greater than about 20 g/l ofpolishing solution.3. The process of claim 2 where the amount of cupric nitrate is less thanabout 100 g/l of polishing solution.4. The process of claim 2 where the ammonium fluoride is present in aconcentration sufficient to provide a fluoride ion normality of about 2.1to about 2.2 N in the polishing solution.5. The process of claim 2 where the nitric acid is present in an amount offrom about 6 to about 12 cc/l of polishing solution, calculated as 70%nitric acid.6. The process of claim 5 where the ammonium nitrate is present in anamount greater than about 10 g/l of polishing solution.7. The process of claim 2 where the polishing solution comprises:about 20 to about 100 g/l of cupric nitrate trihydrate;sufficient ammonium fluoride to provide a fluoride ion normality of about2.1 to about 2.2 N;from about 6 to about 12 cc/l of nitric acid, calculated as 70% nitricacid; andgreater than about 10 g/l of ammonium nitrate.8. In a silicon chemical-mechanical polishing solution comprising cupricnitrate and ammonium fluoride in water in an amount effective tochemical-mechanical polish silicon, the improvement which comprises saidsilicon chemical-mechanical polishing solution further comprising nitricacid and ammonium nitrate in an amount effective to prevent theprecipitation of copper from said cupric nitrate, said cupric nitratebeing present in an amount which would cause copper precipitation but forthe presence of said nitric acid and ammonium nitrate.9. The chemical-mechanical polishing solution of claim 8 where the cupricnitrate is in the trihydrate form and the amount of cupric nitrate isgreater than about 20 g/l of polishing solution.10. The chemical-mechanical polishing solution of claim 9 where the amountof cupric nitrate is less than about 100 g/l of polishing solution.11. The chemical-mechanical polishing solution of claim 9 where theammonium fluoride is present in a concentration sufficient to provide afluoride ion normality of about 2.1 to about 2.2 N in the polishingsolution.12. The chemical-mechanical polishing solution of claim 9 where the nitricacid is present in an amount of from about 6 to about 12 cc/l of polishingsolution calculated as 70% nitric acid.13. The chemical-mechanical polishing solution of claim 12 where theammonium nitrate is present in an amount greater than about 10 g/l ofpolishing solution.14. The chemical-mechanical polishing solution of claim 9 where thepolishing solution comprises:about 20 to about 100 g/l of cupric nitrate trihydrate;sufficient ammonium fluoride to provide a fluoride ion normality of about2.1 to about 2.2 N;from about 6 to about 12 cc/l of nitric acid, calculated as 70% nitricacid; andgreater than about 10 g/l of ammonium nitrate.15. The process of claim 7 where said ammonium nitrate is present in anamount up to about 20 g/l.16. The chemical-mechanical polishing solution of claim 14 where theammonium nitrate is present in an amount of up to about 20 g/l."}
{"WKU":"039308715","Title":"Thickening compositions","App_Date":"1971-03-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Charles A. Starace","Assignee":"Kelco Company","ICL_Class":"C09J  306;C09J  326;C09K  300","References":"3000790;3232929;3551133","Claims":"I claim:1. A denture adhesive composition consisting essentially of about 10 toabout 40 parts by weight of a Xanthomonas hydrophilic colloid and fromabout 60 to about 90 parts by weight of dextrin, said colloid-dextrinmixture providing the adhesive property.2. The composition of claim 1 containing a buffering salt in minor amountsuitable to provide a pH of about neutral.3. The composition of claim 2 wherein said buffering salt is sodiumtetraborate.4. The composition of claim 1 in the form of a dry powder.5. The composition of claim 1 in the form of a paste containing from about40 to about 60% by weight of water.6. The compostion of claim 1 in the form of a cream base formulation.7. The composition of claim 1 wherein said colloid is a Xanthomonascampestris colloid.8. The composition of claim 6 containing a buffering salt in minor amountsuitable to provide a pH of about neutral.9. The composition of claim 8 wherein said buffering salt is sodiumtetraborate."}
{"WKU":"039308723","Title":"Binder compositions","App_Date":"1973-11-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard H. Toeniskoetter;John J. Spiwak","Assignee":"Ashland Oil, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B28B  734","References":"2522548;2995453;3661608;3746557","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Binder composition which comprises:A. boronated aluminum phosphate containing boron in an amount from about 3mole % to about 40 mole % based upon the moles of aluminum and containinga mole ratio of phosphorus to total moles of aluminum and boron of about2:1 to about 4:1;B. an oxygen-containing alkaline earth metal compound capable of reactingwith the aluminum phosphate and which contains alkaline earth metal and anoxide; andC. water;wherein the amount of boronated aluminum phosphate is from about 50 toabout 95% by weight based upon the total weight of aluminum phosphate andalkaline earth compound; the amount of alkaline earth compound is fromabout 50 to about 5% by weight based upon the total weight of aluminumphosphate and alkaline earth compound; and the amount of water is fromabout 15 to about 50% by weight based upon the total weight of boronatedaluminum phosphate and water.2. The binder composition of claim 1 wherein said boronated aluminumphosphate contains boron in an amount from about 5 to about 30 mole %based upon the moles of aluminum.3. The binder composition of claim 1 wherein said boronated aluminumphosphate contains boron in an amount from about 10 to about 25 mole %based upon the moles of aluminum.4. The binder composition of claim 1 wherein said boronated aluminumphosphate contains a mole ratio of phosphorus to total moles of aluminumand boron of from about 2.5:1 to about 3.5:1.5. The binder composition of claim 1 wherein said aluminum phosphatecontains a mole ratio of phosphorus to total moles of aluminum and boronof from about 2.8:1 to about 3.2:1.6. The binder composition of claim 1 wherein said boronated aluminumphosphate contains boron in an amount between about 10 and about 25 mole %based upon the moles of aluminum, and wherein the mole ratio of phosphorusto total moles of aluminum and boron is between about 2.8:1 to about3.2:1.7. The binder composition of claim 1 wherein the amount of boronatedaluminum phosphate is from about 65 to about 90% by weight based upon thetotal weight of boronated aluminum phosphate and alkaline earth compound,and the amount of alkaline earth compound is from about 10 to about 35% byweight based upon the total weight of aluminum phosphate and alkalineearth compound.8. The binder composition of claim 1 wherein said alkaline earth compoundincludes a free alkaline earth metal oxide or a free alkaline earth metalhydroxide and wherein said oxide or hydroxide has a surface area nogreater than about 8.5 m.sup.2 /gram (measured by the BET procedure).9. The binder composition of claim 8 wherein said free alkaline earth metaloxide or free alkaline earth metal hydroxide has a surface area no greaterthan about 3 m.sup.2 /gram.10. The binder composition of claim 1 wherein said alkaline earth metalcompound has surface area no greater than about 8.5 m.sup.2 /gram.11. The binder composition of claim 1 wherein said alkaline earth metalcompound is a mixture of a free alkaline earth metal oxide and a materialwhich contains the alkaline earth metal and oxide in combination withanother constituent and wherein said alkaline earth metal compound has asurface area no greater than about 8.5 m.sup.2 /gram.12. The binder composition of claim 11 wherein said alkaline earth metaloxide is magnesium oxide.13. The binder composition of claim 11 wherein said mixture contains fromabout 2 to about 8 parts by weight of the free alkaline earth metal oxideper part by weight of the material containing constituents in combinationwith the free metal oxide and/or hydroxide and alkaline earth metal.14. The binder composition of claim 1 wherein the amount of water is fromabout 20 to about 40% by weight based upon the total weight of theboronated aluminum phosphate and water.15. The composition of claim 1 wherein the aluminum phosphate has a moleratio of phosphorus to total moles of aluminum and boron of about 2.5:1 toabout 3.5:1; wherein the aluminum phosphate contains boron in an amountfrom about 5 to about 30 mole % based upon the moles of aluminum; saidalkaline earth compound includes free alkaline earth metal oxide and/orfree alkaline earth metal hydroxide, and wherein said free alkaline earthmetal oxide and/or free alkaline earth metal hydroxide has a surface areaof no greater than about 3 m.sup.2 /grams.16. Molding composition which comprises:A. a major amount of aggregate; andB. an effective bonding amount up to about 40% by weight of the aggregateof the binder composition of claim 1.17. The composition of claim 16 wherein the boronated aluminum phosphatecontains boron in an amount from about 10 to about 25 mole % based uponthe moles of aluminum.18. The composition of claim 16 wherein the boronated aluminum phosphatecontains a mole ratio of phosphorus19. The composition of claim 16 wherein the boronated aluminum phosphatecontains boron in an amount between about 10 and about 25 mole % basedupon the moles of aluminum, and wherein the mole ratio of phosphorus tototal moles of aluminum and boron is between about 2.8:1 to about 3.2:1.20. The composition of claim 16 wherein the amount of boronated aluminumphosphate is from about 65 to about 90% by weight based upon the totalweight of boronated aluminum phosphate and alkaline earth compound, andthe amount of alkaline earth material is from about 10 to about 35% byweight based upon the total weight of aluminum phosphate and alkalineearth compound.21. The composition of claim 16 wherein the alkaline earth compoundincludes a free alkaline earth metal oxide or a free alkaline earth metalhydroxide and wherein said oxide or hydroxide has a surface area nogreater than about 8.5 m.sup.2 /gram (measured by the BET procedure).22. The composition of claim 16 wherein the alkaline earth metal materialhas a surface area no greater than about 8.5 m.sup.2 /gram.23. The composition of claim 16 wherein the alkaline earth metal compoundis a mixture of a free alkaline earth metal oxide and a material whichcontains the alkaline earth metal and oxide in combination with anotherconstituent and wherein said alkaline earth metal compound has a surfacearea no greater than about 8.5 m.sup.2 /gram.24. The composition of claim 23 wherein said mixture contains from about 2to about 8 parts by weight of the free alkaline earth metal oxide per partby weight of the material containing constituents in combination with thefree metal oxide and/or hydroxide and alkaline earth metal.25. The composition of claim 16 wherein the amount of water is from about20 to about 40% by weight based upon the total weight of the boronatedaluminum phosphate and water.26. A process for the fabrication of foundry shape which comprises:A. mixing foundry aggregate with a bonding amount of up to about 10% byweight based upon the weight of the aggregate of the composition of claim1, and wherein the quantity and particle size of said aggregate are suchto provide sufficient porosity in the foundry shape to permit escape ofvolatiles from the shape during casting;B. introducing the foundry mix obtained from step (A) into a pattern;C. allowing the foundry mix to remain in the pattern for a time at leastsufficient for the mix to become self-supporting; andD. thereafter removing the shaped foundry mix of step (C) from the pattern,and allowing it to cure at room temperature, thereby obtaining a hard,solid, cured foundry shape."}
{"WKU":"039308731","Title":"Radio-photoluminescence dosimeter glass of low energy dependence and","App_Date":"1973-07-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hans-Herbert Kaes;Hans Staaden","Assignee":"Ernst Leitz G.m.b.H.","ICL_Class":"C03c  316","References":"3208860;3449136;3554920;3740241","Claims":"We claim:1. A radio-photoluminescence dosimeter glass of low dependence on energy,consisting essentially of an inorganic silver compound and at least onemetal fluoride selected from the group consisting of an alkali metal,alkaline earth metal, lanthanum, and aluminum.2. A radio-photoluminescence dosimeter glass of low dependence on energy,consisting essentially of an inorganic silver compound and at least oneinorganic complex metal fluoride.3. The glass of claim 1, additionally containing at least one metal oxideselected from the group consisting of an alkali metal, alkaline earthmetal, and aluminum, and phosphorus pentoxide.4. The glass of Claim 1, additionally containing nitrogen pentoxide.5. The glass of claim 3, additionally containing nitrogen pentoxide.6. The glass of claim 1, consisting of 0.0001 to 15.0 %, by weight, ofsilver oxide Ag.sub.2 O and a corresponding weight equivalent amount ofphosphorus pentoxide P.sub.2 O.sub.5 calculated for the compound silvermetaphosphate AgPO.sub.3 and an amount of at least one metal fluoride soas to make 100 %, by weight.7. The glass of claim 1, consisting of 0.001 to 10.0 %, by weight, ofsilver oxide Ag.sub.2 O and a corresponding weight equivalent amount ofphosphorus pentoxide P.sub.2 O.sub.5 calculated for the compound silvermetaphosphate AgPO.sub.3 and an amount of at least one metal fluoride soas to make 100 %, by weight.8. The glass of claim 1, consisting of 0.01 % to 2.0 %, by weight, ofsilver oxide Ag.sub.2 O and a corresponding weight equivalent amount ofphosphorus pentoxide P.sub.2 O.sub.5 calculated for the compound silvermetaphosphate AgPO.sub.3 and an amount of at least one metal fluoride soas to make 100 %, by weight.9. The glass according to claim 5, in which the metal oxide content isbetween 2.0 and 25.0 %, by weight, and the phosphorus pentoxide content isbetween 15.0 and 80.0 %, by weight.10. The glass according to claim 1, additionally containing 0.5 to 5.0 %,by weight, of nitrogen pentoxide N.sub.2 O.sub.5.11. The glass of claim 6, additionally containing 2 to 25 %, by weight, ofa metal oxide selected from the group consisting of an alkali metal,alkaline earth metal, and aluminum, 15 to 80 %, by weight, of phosphoruspentoxide, and 0.5 to 5.0 %, by weight, of nitrogen pentoxide.12. The glass of claim 1, consisting of 0.02 to 1.7 %, by weight, of silveroxide Ag.sub.2 O, 0.01 to 1.0 %, by weight of phosphorus pentoxide P.sub.2O.sub.5, and 5.0 to 99.5 %, by weight, of at least one of the metalfluorides of claim 1.13. The glass of claim 12, additionally containing 5.0 % to 25.0 %, byweight, of a metal oxide selected from the group consisting of an alkalimetal, alkaline earth metal, and aluminum and up to 77.0 %, by weight, ofphosphorus pentoxide P.sub.2 O.sub.5.14. The glass of claim 13, additionally containing 1.0 to 2.0 %, by weight,of nitrogen pentoxide N.sub.2 O.sub.5.15. The glass according to claim 12, additionally containing at least oneof the following metal oxides in the amounts given:up to 10.0 %, by weight, of an alkali metal oxide,up to 22.0 %, by weight, of an alkaline earth metal oxide, andup to 10.0 %, by weight, of aluminum oxide.16. The glass of claim 15, containing at least one of the following alkalimetal oxides in the amounts given:up to 1.0 %, by weight, of sodium oxide Na.sub.2 O andup to 9.0 %, by weight, of lithium oxide Li.sub.2 O.17. The glass of claim 15, containing at least one of the followingalkaline earth metal oxides in the amounts given:up to 3.0 %, by weight, of magnesium oxide MgO andup to 4.0 %, by weight, of calcium oxide CaO.18. The glass of claim 15, containing at least one of the followingalkaline earth metal oxides in the amounts given:up to 3.0 %, by weight, of magnesium oxide MgO andup to 22.0 %, by weight, of barium oxide BaO.19. The glass of claim 15, containing aluminum oxide Al.sub.2 O.sub.3 in anamount not exceeding 10.0 %, by weight.20. The glass of claim 12, in which the fluoride is present in an amount ofat least 5 % andup to 50.0 %, by weight, of an alkali metal fluoride,up to 65.0 %, by weight, of an alkaline earth metal fluoride, andup to 35.0 %, by weight, of aluminum or lanthanum fluoride.21. The glass of claim 12, in which the fluoride is present in an amount ofat least 5 % andup to 50.0 %, by weight, of an alkali metal fluoride.22. The glass of claim 12, in which the fluoride is present in an amount ofat least 5 % andup to 65.0 %, by weight, of an alkaline earth metal fluoride.23. The glass of claim 12, in which the fluoride is present in an amount ofat least 5 % andup to 35.0 %, by weight, of aluminum or lanthanum fluoride.24. The glass of claim 21, in which the alkali metal fluoride is present inan amount of at least 5 % andup to 49.0 %, by weight, of lithium flouride LiF andup to 5.0 %, by weight, of potassium fluoride KF.25. The glass of claim 22, in which the alkaline earth metal fluoride ispresent in an amount of at least 5 % andup to 10.0 %, by weight, of beryllium fluoride BeF.sub.2,up to 10.0 %, by weight, of magnesium fluoride MgF.sub.2,up to 32.0 %, by weight, of calcium fluoride CaF.sub.2,up to 12.0 %, by weight, of strontium fluoride SrF.sub.2, andup to 15.0 %, by weight, of barium fluoride BaF.sub.2.26. The glass of claim 23, in which at least one of the aluminum andlanthanum fluorides is present in an amount of at least 5 % andup to 6.0 %, by weight, of lanthanum fluoride LaF.sub.3 andup to 31.0 %, by weight, of aluminum fluoride AlF.sub.3.27. A radio-photoluminescence dosimeter glass of low dependence on energy,said glass essentially consisting ofa silver compound selected from the group consisting of silvermetaphosphate, silver nitrate, silver carbonate, and silver lithiummetaphosphate, anda metal fluoride selected from the group consisting of an alkali metalfluoride, and alkaline earth metal fluoride, aluminum fluoride, lanthanumfluoride, the hydrogen fluorides of said metals, and the inorganic complexfluorides thereof,the fluoride content of said glass being at least about 5 %, by weight, andthe silver oxide content of said glass being between about 0.0001 and about15.0 %, by weight.28. A radio-photoluminescence dosimeter glass of low dependence on energy,said glass essentially consisting ofa silver compound selected from the group consisting of silvermetaphosphate, silver nitrate, silver carbonate, and silver lithiummetaphosphate,a metal fluoride selected from the group consisting of an alkali metalfluoride, an alkaline earth metal fluoride, aluminum fluoride, lanthanumfluoride, the hydrogen fluorides of said metals, and the inorganic complexfluorides thereof, anda metal metaphosphate selected from the group consisting of an alkali metalmetaphosphate, an alkaline earth metal metaphosphate and aluminummetaphosphate,the fluoride content of said glass being at least about 5 %, by weight,the silver oxide content of said glass being between 0.0001 % and 15.0 %,by weight, andthe metaphosphate content including the silver metaphosphate content ofsaid glass being between 95.0 % and 0.5 %, by weight."}
{"WKU":"039308740","Title":"Bonded fused grain basic refractory and batch therefor","App_Date":"1974-06-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Donald L. Guile;Robert K. Smith","Assignee":"Corning Glass Works","ICL_Class":"C04B 3502;C04B 3504;C04B 3548","References":"2572688;3141784;3262795;3715222","Claims":"We claim:1. A size-graded batch for the production of basic refractory bodies andconsisting essentially of, with percentages on the weight basis, a mixtureof,a. dead-burned magnesite,b. at least one strength additive selected from the group consisting ofmaterials yielding silica, materials yielding zirconia, and mixturesthereof, andc. at least one refractory grain analytically consisting essentially of50-67% MgO and 33-50% CaO and selected from the group consisting ofdead-burned grain, fused grain, and mixtures thereof,40-50% of the batch being a coarse grain fraction whose grains aresubstantially all -4+35 Tyler mesh and composed of said refractory grain,2- 30% being an intermediate grain fraction whose grains are substantiallyall -20+65 Tyler mesh and composed of said refractory grain,20-35% being a fine fraction whose particles are substantially all -100Tyler mesh and consisting essentially of said strength additive in amountsufficient to provide, based on the whole batch, 0.5-4.0% of oxideselected from SiO.sub.2, ZrO.sub.2 and mixtures thereof, with the balanceof the fine fraction being substantially all said dead-burned magnesite.2. The batch of claim 1 wherein said strength additive is selected in anamount sufficient to yield 0.5-2.5% of oxide selected from SiO.sub.2,ZrO.sub.2 and mixtures thereof.3. The batch of claim 2 wherein said strength additive is selected fromSiO.sub.2, ZrO.sub.2, and ZrSiO.sub.4.4. The batch of claim 3 whereinat least 75% of the dead-burned magnesite particles are -325 Tyler mesh,andsubstantially all of the strength additive particles are -325 Tyler mesh.5. The batch of claim 4 whereinsaid refractory grains of said coarse grain fraction are substantially all-4+10 Tyler mesh, andsaid refractory grains of said intermediate grain fraction aresubstantially all -20+35 Tyler mesh.6. A compacted and burned refractory body made from the batch of claim 1.7. The refractory body of claim 6 which has been burned at a temperature ofat least 1600.degree.C.8. A compacted and burned refractory body made from the batch of claim 3.9. The refractory body of claim 8 which had been burned at a temperature ofat least 1600.degree.C.10. A compacted and burned refractory body made from the batch of claim 5.11. The refractory body of claim 10 which had been burned at a temperatureof at least 1600.degree.C."}
{"WKU":"039308758","Title":"Pump member for molten metal","App_Date":"1973-04-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Toshihiko Ochiai;Mitsutoshi Hirano;Hiroshi Inoue","Assignee":"Tokyo Shibaura Electric Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"C04b 3558","References":"3108887","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A pump member of a hot chamber type aluminium metal die casting machinewhich directly contacts molten aluminium metal in operation, consistingessentially of a sintered mass of a powdered mixture of the followingingredients in the percentages by weight indicated:"}
{"WKU":"039308766","Title":"Inorganic coating composition","App_Date":"1974-06-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jun Nakajima;Hiroshi Iwai;Iwao Momiyama;Tatsuo Fukushima;Rentaro Takeda","Assignee":"Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.;Kansai Paint Company, Ltd.","ICL_Class":"C09D  102;C09J  102","References":"3669699","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method of preparing an aqueous coating composition which comprisesmixing (A) a water soluble silicate selected from the group consisting of(1) silicates of the formula:"}
{"WKU":"039308774","Title":"Cationic starch and condensates for making the same","App_Date":"1974-08-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Thomas Aitken","Assignee":"Nalco Chemical Company","ICL_Class":"C08L  302","References":"2520093;3441609","Claims":"The embodiments of this invention in which an exclusive property orprivilege is claimed are defined as follows:1. An additive to produce cationic starch which consists of a condensate ofepichlorohydrin with an equimolar amount of dimethylamine modified by atleast a minor amount up to 30 percent molar amount of ammonia based on thedimethylamine and substituted therefor.2. The starch additive according to claim 1, wherein the additive consistsof a condensate of epichlorohydrin with an equimolar amount ofdimethylamine.3. The starch additive according to claim 1, wherein the dimethylamine ismodified by about 10 percent molar ammonia substituted therefor.4. The starch additive according to claim 1, wherein the dimethylamine ismodified by about 20 percent molar ammonia substituted therefor.5. The starch additive according to claim 1, wherein the dimethylamine ismodified by about 30 percent molar ammonia substituted therefor."}
{"WKU":"039308782","Title":"Method and apparatus for reducing starch-containing material to flour","App_Date":"1974-04-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Fausto Celorio Mendoza","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B02C  200;C13L  108","References":"333369;1021950;1851071;1885283;2653770;2744826;2749814;3008505;3285524;3305183;R26256","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A device for reducing starch-containing material to flour whilesimultaneously rupturing the starch granules therein comprising, incombination, truncated inner and outer cone members mounted on a commonvertical axis, said inner cone member having a first series of closelyspaced grinding grooves on the outer surface thereof, a first feed groovedisposed between each first series of grinding grooves for feeding thestarch-containing material to the grinding grooves, said outer cone memberhaving a second series of closely spaced grinding grooves on the innersurface thereof, a second feed groove disposed between each second seriesof grinding grooves on said outer cone member for feeding thestarch-containing material to the grinding grooves, said first and secondfeed grooves having a depth larger than the grinding grooves, said conemembers being substantially coextensive in the axial direction, hoppermeans for supplying starch-containing material to be ground to the annularspace between said cone members at the upper end for movementtherebetween, said inner cone member having an inwardly tapering upper enddisposed in the bottom of said hopper and forming therewith a feed throatleading to the annular space between said cone members, and motor meansfor driving at least one of said cone members in rotation.2. A device according to claim 1 in which the opposed surfaces of said conemembers are substantially parallel along the lower region of said conemembers and diverge along the upper region thereof.3. The method of reducing starch-containing material to flour whilesimultaneously rupturing the starch granules therein comprising the stepsof supplying the starch-containing material to the space between a pair ofrelatively movable vertically disposed grinding members for gravity flowof the starch-containing material between the members wherein thestarch-containing material is reduced to flour in a substantially drycondition in the upper position of the grinding members and converting themoisture contained in the starch-containing material into hot vapor byattrition in the lower position of the grinding members to disintegratethe granules of the starch-containing material thus increasing its volume,mechanically rupturing the starch granules of the starch-containingmaterial under the action of the hot vapor and the attrition from hegrinding members thereby providing a starch granule ruptured to such adegree that a high water absorbency is developed in the starch-containingmaterial at least equal to the water absorbency developed by an actualcooking of the starch-containing material.4. The method according to claim 3 in which the starch-containing materialis heated to a temperature ranging up to about 200.degree.C.5. The method according to claim 3 which includes supplying heat to atleast one of said grinding members from an external source.6. The method according to claim 3 which includes cooling saidstarch-containing material before it leaves the space between saidgrinding members whereby the ground starch-material material absorbs atleast a part of the moisture driven therefrom while the material was hot.7. The method according to claim 3 in which the starch-containing materialmoves along an inwardly tapering path during the reduction thereof toflour and then moves along a constricted path during the development ofheat thereon.8. The method according to claim 7 which includes varying the degree ofconstriction of the constricted path to vary the amount of heat developedin the starch-containing material."}
{"WKU":"039308790","Title":"Closed alkaline wash water system for cleaning metal parts","App_Date":"1974-03-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Paul R. Erickson;Lawrence M. Sontoski;Albert R. Sylvester","Assignee":"Rexnord Inc.","ICL_Class":"B08B  310;B01D 1702;B01D 2110","References":"1743465;2711978;3372704;3544369;3639172;3823823;3846173","Claims":"We claim:1. In an alkaline wash water system for cleaning metal-working oil andscale from metal parts in the process of their manufacture, said systemincluding a container for temporarily holding such parts, a pump, a washwater supply line from said pump to said container for discharging thewash water over such parts, a wash water supply tank disposed to receivethe wash water with oil and scale which drains from such parts and havingan outlet connected to said pump and a heater for continuously maintainingthe wash water in the tank at an elevated temperature, said pump providingthe circulation of the wash water over the parts in a first loop asrequired, the improvement wherein said tank is provided with an overflowweir for the continuous withdrawal of the upper fraction of the wash watertherein, and an inlet for the continuous return of wash water to the tank,a gravity separator including means defining a central zone having aninlet and an outlet for connection to said tank, said separator furtherhaving an upper outlet for removal of floating separated oil and a loweroutlet for removal of settled separated scale, and hydraulic linesincluding a pump respectively connecting the central zone inlet and outletwith the tank outlet and inlet respectively and providing the continuousrecirculation of wash water through the central zone of said separator ina second loop, said heater and said hydraulic means being effective tomaintain the contents of the separator also at an elevated temperature.2. The improvement of claim 1 wherein the inlet provided the wash watersupply tank is directed so that the flow of the second loop into said tankis effective to direct scale and the floating oil therein toward theoverflow weir provided for the removal of the upper fraction of the washwater in the tank, particularly while no parts are being washed and nocirculation of the wash water in the first loop is being effected.3. The system of claim 1 which includes a second separator and hydrauliclines and valves for the alternate use of one separator while the oil andscale is removed from the other separator --that is, one separatorfunctions as a three-part separator while the other functions as atwo-part separator, and the functions of the two separators areperiodically alternated.4. The system of claim 3 which includes a third gravity separator and linesconnecting the same alternately to either of said first two separators toreceive therefrom and to allow the separated components of such oil to beselectively reused and disposed of.5. The system of claim 1 wherein a make-up water supply line having a valvecontrolling the line is connected to the separator and the separatorincludes a float controller which operates said valve to open the linewhen the level in the separator is less than a selected elevation.6. The system of claim 5 wherein the elevation referred to is a selecteddistance above the overflow weir of the tank, whereby the minimum rate offlow referred to is determined and maintained by the hydraulic headrepresented by said distance.7. An alkaline wash water system for cleaning metal-working oil and scalefrom metal parts in the process of their manufacture, said systemincluding a spray header, a temporary parts container beneath said header,a tank below said container and having a heater and an outlet along oneside of the tank, and a recirculating pump having its inlet connected tosaid tank outlet and its discharge outlet connected to said spray header,said pump providing the recirculation of wash water in the tank in a firstloop, said tank further having an inlet below said outlet, an overflowweir above said outlet and an overflow trough and the system furtherincluding a second pump and gravity separator hydraulically connected inseries with said tank inlet and overflow trough, said separator morespecifically having an intermediate inlet connected to said trough, anupper outlet for the oil removed from the parts and floating in theseparator, a lower outlet for the scale from the parts and settled in theseparator, and an intermediate outlet connected to the inlet of said tank,said second pump providing the continuous recirculation of the wash waterproduct of the separator in a second loop, the recirculated washing waterpassing through a central zone of the separator defined between saidintermediate inlet and said intermediate outlet, said heater beingeffective to maintain both loops at a suitably elevated temperature, themovement of the combined loops in the tank being in the direction of theoverflow weir of the tank, and said second pump maintaining the rate offlow of the second loop at the minimum rate of flow over the weir wherebythe scale as well as the oil from the parts is transferred from the firstloop to the second loop for their removal in the separator.8. A system as in claim 7 further comprising means for adding wash water tothe system to accommodate for wash water lost by evaporation and partsdrag out.9. A system as in claim 7 wherein the separator comprises a pair of gravityseparation tanks connected to be alternately usable and wherein said upperoutlet is an oil skimmer.10. The method of cleaning metal-working oil and scale from metal parts inthe process of their manufacture with a given supply of an alkaline washwater, which method comprises withdrawing wash water from said supply,circulating the withdrawn wash water over said parts and returning thewash water with oil and scale to the supply, separately withdrawing andcontinuously circulating a small portion of said supply through thecentral zone of a gravity separator, providing the wash water in theseparator with a detention time which allows the oil and scale to separatetherefrom, separately removing the oil and scale from the top and bottomof the separator, respectively, drawing separated wash water off from thecentral zone of the separator, and returning the separated wash water tosaid supply.11. The method of claim 10 which includes adding make-up water to theportion circulating through the separator.12. The method of claim 10 which includes directing the return of the washwater from the separator into the wash water supply to cause the settledscale and floating oil in the supply to be withdrawn therefrom andintroduced into the separator with said small portion referred to.13. The method of claim 10 which includes continuously heating the supplyof wash water directly and indirectly heating the wash water in theseparator."}
{"WKU":"039308804","Title":"Slab gel diffusion destainer","App_Date":"1974-03-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Stanton A. Hoefer","Assignee":"Hoefer Scientific Instruments","ICL_Class":"B08B  310;B08B 1102","References":"3041212;3265078;3500840;3534747","Claims":"I claim:1. A destainer for electrophoresis slab gels utilizing a circulatingwashing liquid comprising a liquid container having side walls and abottom wall, a partition supported within said container occupyingsubstantially all of a cross section between the side walls and dividingsaid container into first and second compartments, said partition having aplurality of openings therethrough, means for defining a return flow pathin communication with said first container compartment at one end and withsaid second container compartment through a first one of said plurality ofopenings at the other end, filter means mounted in said return flow pathand extending across substantially all of a cross section of said returnflow path, a plurality of gel slab holders supported by said partition incommunication with each of said plurality of openings other than saidfirst one, flexible means permeable to the washing liquid for containingsaid slab gels, said flexible means being formed for rolling into acylinder for insertion into said gel slab holders, means for defining acontinuous flow path including said means for defining a return flow pathand said gel slab holders, and means for circulating the washing liquidthrough said continuous flow path, whereby substantially all of thewashing liquid is circulated past all external surfaces of the slab gelsin a filtered condition.2. A destainer for electrophoresis slab gels utilizing a circulatingwashing liquid comprising a liquid container having side walls and abottom wall, a partition supported within said container occupyingsubstantially all of a cross section between the side walls and dividingsaid container into first and second compartments, said partition having aplurality of openings therethrough including a first opening, means fordefining a return flow path in communication with said first containercompartment at one end and with said second container compartment throughsaid first opening at the other end, filter means mounted in said returnflow path, a plurality of gel slab holding tubes supported by saidpartition in communication with one each of said plurality of openingsother than said first opening, a plurality of perforated caps for coveringeach end of said holding tubes, said caps being formed to fit within saidother openings, flexible means for containing said slab gels for insertioninto said gel slab holding tubes, means for defining a continuous flowpath including said means for defining a return flow path and said gelslab holders, and means for circulating the washing liquid through saidflow path, whereby substantially all of the washing liquid is circulatedpast the slab gels in a filtered condition, said flexible means forcontaining the slab gels being rolled into a cylindrical shape prior toinsertion into said holding tubes.3. A destainer for electrophoresis slab gels as in claim 2 wherein saidtubes include a plurality of longitudinal members attached to andextending along the inside wall of said holding tubes, whereby saidflexible means are held in spaced relation from the inside wall of saidholding tubes so that the washing liquid flows past substantially all ofthe slab gel external surfaces.4. A destainer for electrophoresis slab gels as in claim 2 wherein saidmeans for circulating the washing liquid comprises a bar containingmagnetic material pivoted on said bottom wall of said container andcoupled magnetically to an externally applied rotating magnetic fieldwhereby said bar is caused to rotate within said second compartment.5. A slab gel diffusion destainer utilizing a circulating liquid comprisinga liquid container having sidewalls and a bottom wall, means for defininga return flow path within said container, a flange spaced from said bottomwall attached to one end of said means defining said return flow pathoccupying substantially all of a cross section between said sidewalls andsaid last named means, said flange having at least first and secondopenings therethrough, said first opening being in communication with saidreturn flow path, a gel slab holding tube, a flexible mesh for supportinga slab gel on both sides thereof, said flexible mesh being formed to berolled into a cylinder for insertion into said slab holding tube,perforated caps for covering each end of said holding tube therebyconfining said flexible mesh cylinder therein, said holding tube and capassembly formed to fit in said second flange opening, filter means mountedin said return flow path, and means for circulating the liquid throughsaid first opening, slab gel holding tube, return flow path, and secondopening so that when the slab gel is confined in said holding tube and capassembly and placed in said second flange opening, it is washed untilexcess stain is removed.6. A slab gel diffusion destainer as in claim 5 wherein said return pathhas an axis removed from the axis of said liquid container and the axis ofsaid slab holding tube is parallel to the axis of said return path.7. A slab gel diffusion destainer as in claim 5 wherein said means forcirculating the liquid has a rotating member acting as a centrifugal pumpfor forcing the liquid away from said filter towards said second flangeopening.8. A slab gel diffusion destainer as in claim 7 wherein said rotatingmember is pivoted on the bottom wall of said container and is coupledmagnetically to an externally applied rotating magnetic field which causessaid member to rotate.9. A slab gel diffusion destainer as in claim 5 wherein the circulatingliquid is an acid solution and wherein said liquid container, means fordefining a return flow path, flange, slab gel holding tube, flexible mesh,filter means, and means for circulating the liquid are constructed fromacid resistant materials.10. A slab gel diffusion destainer as in claim 5 wherein said gel slabholding tube includes longitudinal members attached to the inside diameterof said holding tube and extending along the length thereof, whereby saidflexible mesh is held away from the inside wall of said holding tube sothat both sides of the slab gel are washed by the circulating liquid."}
{"WKU":"039308812","Title":"Immobilized battery electrolyte","App_Date":"1974-07-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John P. Cestaro;Linda J. Crosby","Assignee":"NL Industries, Inc.","ICL_Class":"H01M 4700","References":"396367;1417007;3172782;3586539","Claims":"WE CLAIM:1. An immobilized electrolyte paste adaptable for use in a lead acidstorage battery wherein the immobilized electrolyte paste comprises 1.5 to4.0 parts sulfuric acid having a specific gravity from 1.050 to 1.350 and1 part organic microparticles being inert to sulfuric acid and having aparticle diameter of 0.1 to 3 .mu..2. An immobilized electrolyte paste according to claim 1 wherein theorganic microparticles of the immobilized electrolyte paste have aparticle diameter of 0.2 to 1 .mu..3. An immobilized electrolyte paste according to claim 1 wherein theorganic microparticles of the immobilized electrolyte paste are solidmicroparticles.4. An immobilized electrolyte paste according to claim 1 wherein theorganic microparticles of the immobilized electrolyte paste are hollowmicroparticles.5. An immobilized electrolyte paste according to claim 1 wherein theorganic microparticles are polystyrene.6. An immobilized electrolyte paste according to claim 1 wherein theorganic microparticles are polymethyl methacrylate.7. A lead acid storage battery comprising:a. A battery case;b. Positive and negative lead base plates wherein the positive and negativeplates are alternately positioned in the battery case in spaced apartrelationship;c. Means for maintaining the positive and negative plates in spaced apartrelationship; andd. An immobilized electrolyte paste which comprises a mixture of 1.5 to 4parts sulfuric acid having a specific gravity from 1.050 to 1.350 and 1part organic microparticles being inert to sulfuric acid and having aparticle diameter of 0.1 to 3 .mu..8. A lead acid storage battery according to claim 7 wherein the positiveand negative lead base plates are coated with a sulfated lead monoxidepaste.9. A lead acid storage battery having as an electrolyte an immobilizedelectrolyte paste adaptable for use in a lead acid storage battery withinthe immobilized electrolyte paste comprises 1.5 to 4.0 parts sulfuric acidhaving a specific gravity from 1.050 to 1.350 and 1 part organicmicroparticles being inert to sulfuric acid and having a particle diameterof 0.1 to 3 .mu.."}
{"WKU":"039308820","Title":"Rechargeable galvanic cell","App_Date":"1974-01-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kazuya Ohsawa;Katsuyoshi Hirasa;Hideo Kinoshita","Assignee":"The Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd.;The Furukawa Battery Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"H01m 4306","References":"3653965;3660170;3775183;3793079","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A rechargeable galvanic cell comprising a zinc anode, a cathode and anelectrolyte wherein the electrolyte comprises an aqueous alkaline solutioncontaining alkali metal zincate and a polycation selected from the groupconsisting of ionen type polycation and pendant type polycation in anamount sufficient to suppress the formation of zinc dendrites on said zincanode during cell charge, said ionen type polycation having quaternarynitrogen included in the main chain of the molecule and said pendant typepolycation having quaternary nitrogen included in the side chain of themolecule.2. A rechargeable galvanic cell according to claim 1 wherein the polycationis an aliphatic ionen expressed by the following general formula:##EQU2##where: n = degree of polymerizationx.sup.- = anionR.sub.1, R.sub.2, R.sub.4 and R.sub.5 = alkyl groups having one to twocarbon atomsR.sub.3 = alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atomsR.sub.6 = alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms.3. A rechargeable galvanic cell according to claim 1 wherein the polycationis an aliphatic ionen expressed by the following general formula:##EQU3##where: n = degree of polymerizationx.sup.- = anionR.sub.1, r.sub.2, r.sub.4 and R.sub.5 = alkyl groups having 1 to 2 carbonatomsR.sub.3 = alkylene group having 2 to 4 carbon atomsR.sub.6 = alkylene group having 4 to 8 carbon atoms.4. A rechargeable galvanic cell according to claim 2 wherein the polycationis poly(N, N, N , N -tetramethyl-N-ethylene-N -hexamethylenediammoniumdibromide).5. A rechargeable galvanic cell according to claim 2 wherein the polycationis poly(N, N, N , N -tetramethyl-N-ethylene-N -pentamethylenediammoniumdibromide).6. A rechargeable galvanic cell according to claim 2 wherein the polycationis poly(N, N, N , N -tetramethyl-N-trimethylene-N -hexamethylenediammoniumdibromide).7. A rechargeable galvanic cell according to claim 2 wherein the polycationis poly(N, N, N ,N -tetramethyl-N-trimethylene-N -pentamethylenediammonium dibromide).8. A rechargeable galvanic cell according to claim 1 wherein the polycationis poly(vinylbenzyltrialkylammonium salt).9. A rechargeable galvanic cell according to claim 8 wherein the polycationis poly(vinylbenzyltrimethylammonium chloride).10. A rechargeable galvanic cell according to claim 1 wherein thepolycation is poly(oxyethyl-1-methylenetrialkylammonium salt).11. A rechargeable galvanic cell according to claim 10 wherein thepolycation is poly(oxyethyl-1-methylenetrimethylammonium chloride).12. A rechargeable galvanic cell according to claim 1 wherein thepolycation is prepared by quarternizing polyepihalohydrin withtrimethylamine.13. A rechargeable galvanic cell according to claim 12 wherein thepolycation is prepared by quarternizing polyepichlorohydrin withtrimethylamine.14. A rechargeable galvanic cell according to claim 1 wherein thepolycation has an average molecular weight of 500 to 50,000.15. A rechargeable galvanic cell according to claim 1 wherein thepolycation has an average molecular weight of 1,000 to 20,000.16. A rechargeable galvanic cell according to claim 1 wherein thepolycation is present in the electrolyte in an amount of 0.01 to 10percent by weight based on the weight of said electrolyte.17. A rechargeable galvanic cell according to claim 1 wherein thepolycation is present in the electrolyte in an amount of 0.1 to 2 percentby weight based on the weight of said electrolyte."}
{"WKU":"039308839","Title":"Zinc-containing electrode","App_Date":"1974-02-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ludwig Kandler","Assignee":"Rheinisch-Westfalisches Elektrizitalswerk Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"H01M 3530","References":"3272653;3427203;3516862;3607409;3671319;3816178","Claims":"I claim:1. A method of making a negative electrode for an alkaline accumulator,comprising the steps of:a. electrolytically depositing zinc and calcium upon a conductive supportin the form of Zn, Zn(OH).sub.2 and Ca(OH).sub.2 from an electrolytic bathcontaining zinc ion, calcium ion and nitrate ion with the ratio of zincion to calcium ion made relatively high and establishing the proportionsof zinc and calcium deposited on said support in a first electrochemicallyactive layer directly upon said support;b. electrochemically depositing on said first electrochemically activelayer an outer electrochemically active layer containing zinc and calciumas Zn, Zn(OH).sub.2 and Ca(OH).sub.2 from an electrolyte containing zincion, calcium ion and nitrate ion with the ratio of zinc ion to calcium ionmade less than in step (a) whereby the outer layer has a smaller ratio ofzinc to calcium; andc. forming said layers by electrolyzing same to transform the depositedzinc ion of said layers into elemental zinc.2. The method defined in claim 1, further comprising the steps ofamalgamating the metallic zinc, applying to said outer layer a coating ofa calcium-containing substance free from zinc, and wrapping the electrodein a porous synthetic-resin material impregnated with calcium hydroxide."}
{"WKU":"039308847","Title":"Activated stable oxygen electrode","App_Date":"1974-05-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Georg Zimmermann;Manfred Schonborn;Horst Magenau;Horst Jahnke;Brunhilde Becker","Assignee":"Robert Bosch G.m.b.H.","ICL_Class":"H01M  488;H01M  490;B01J 3112","References":"3585079;3617388;3649365;3658721;3773878;3778313;3821028","Claims":"We claim:1. A stable oxygen electrode which retains its useful catalytic activityover a long service life, comprising an electrode carrier  containing anactivated transition metal chelate of5,14-dihydrodibenzo(5,9,14,18)-tetraaza(14)-annulene, said activated metalchelate having been activated by heating in an inert gas atmosphere at atemperature between about 600.degree.C and 1000.degree.C for a minimumtime of 5 minutes.2. The electrode of claim 1, wherein said metal is selected from the groupconsisting of cobalt, iron, copper and nickel.3. The electrode of claim 1, wherein said metal chelate is the cobaltchelate.4. The electrode of claim 3, wherein said catalytic material is admixedwith an active form of carbon.5. The electrode of claim 1 wherein said inert gas is nitrogen.6. The electrode of claim 5, wherein said metal chelate is the cobaltchelate which had been activated by heating to between about 600.degree.Cand 850.degree.C.7. The electrode of claim 6 wherein said catalytic material is admixed withan active form of carbon.8. The electrode of claim 7, wherein said metal chelate had been activatedby heating to about 800.degree.C."}
{"WKU":"039308855","Title":"Organic electrolyte reserve cell","App_Date":"1973-01-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Arabinda N. Dey","Assignee":"P. R. Mallory & Co., Inc.","ICL_Class":"H01M 2110","References":"2624767;2783291;2852592;3294589;3376166;3468715;3484297;3736188;3743545","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An organic electrolyte reserve cell comprising, a cell casing having anopen end, a spring loaded disposable plunger activation mechanism having avertically movable plunger placed therein and adapted to be moved by thespring, said plunger mechanism connected to said cell casing by aplurality of ears formed in said open end of said casing; a metalresilient lid for closing said casing, said lid having a central depressedportion to which said plunger is in abutment and whereby said centraldepressed lid portion may be moved upon movement of said plunger at apredetermined time; a plastic containing electrolyte reservoir having anaccordian like configuration contained in said casing, a circular disc insaid reservoir having a severality of impact rigid bars connected to theunderside of said electrolyte reservoir opposite the depressed center ofsaid metal cell lid, a frangible flat disc connected to said electrolytereservoir and being placed over the electrodes of said cell, whereby whensaid always rigid impact bars are driven down against said frangible discquickly and positively breaks the same so as to allow the organicelectrolyte to quickly flow and activate the cell electrodes and toenergize the cell without trouble.2. An organic electrolyte reserve cell comprising, a cell casing having anopen end, a spring loaded disposable plunger activation mechanism having avertically movable plunger contained therein and adapted to be moved bythe spring, said plunger mechanism connected to said battery casing by amultiplicity of ears formed in said open end of said casing; a metalresilient lid for closing said casing, said lid having a central depressedportion to which said plunger is in abutment and whereby said central lidportion may be moved significantly upon movement of said plunger at apredetermined time; a plastic pleated electrolyte reservoir contained insaid cell casing, a circular disc connected to said reservoir having aplurality of vertical rigid impact bars connected to the underside of saidelectrolyte reservoir at a point opposite the depressed center of saidmetal cell lid; a frangible flat disc connected to said electrolytereservoir placed adjacent the electrodes of said cell, whereby when saidstiff always rigid impact bars are driven against said frangible discquickly and positively breaks the same so as to allow the organicelectrolyte to repeatly flow and activate the cell electrodes and toenergize the cell without incident.3. An organic electrolyte reserve cell comprising, a cell casing having atop open end, a pressure spring loaded disposable plunger activationmechanism having a vertically movable rod plunger therein and adapted tobe moved vertically upon said spring activation, said plunger mechanismbeing directly connected to said battery casing by a plurality of struckout ears formed at said open end of said casing; a metal lid for closingsaid open end of said casing, said lid having a central depressedresilient portion to which said plunger is in abutment and whereby saidcentral lid having a central depressed resilient portion to which saidplunger is in abutment and whereby said central lid portion may be moveddownward significantly upon movement of said plunger; a molded pleatedfluid electrolyte reservoir contained therein, a circular flat thin dischaving a plurality of vertical impact rigid bars connected to theunderside of said electrolyte reservoir at a point opposite the depressedcenter of said metal cell top open end, a frangible flat lid connected tosaid electrolyte reservoir being placed adjacent the electrodes of theelectrochemical cell, whereby when said always rigid impact bars aredriven against said frangible disc quickly and positively breaks the sameso as to allow the organic electrolyte to flow and activate the cellelectrodes and to energize the cell."}
{"WKU":"039308863","Title":"Porous fluoro-carbon polymer matrices","App_Date":"1973-06-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Edward C. Mesiti;Solomon Rosenblatt","Assignee":"Leesona Corporation","ICL_Class":"H01M  214","References":"3418168;3497256;3702267;3749604","Claims":"It is claimed:1. A hydrophobic polymeric matrix having preselected wettablecharacteristics comprising a continuous phase of sintered fluorocarbonpolymeric material having a series of integral interconnecting pores and adiscontinuous colloidal mineral phase deposited in or at the surfaces ofsaid pores, said mineral phase being uniformly arranged from major surfaceto major surface of said matrix.2. The matrix according to claim 1 wherein the particulate fluorocarbonpolymer has an average particle size of from about 0.1 to about 50 micronsand the pores have an average diameter of from about 0.5 to 10 microns andsaid colloidal mineral filler has an average particle size of from about0.01 to 0.2 microns.3. The matrix according to claim 2 wherein the ratio of fluorocarbonpolymer to colloidal mineral filler is from about 0.1 to about 10.0 on aweight basis.4. A membrane forming composition that comprises a porous film-likefluorocarbon polymeric matrix formed of a sintered particulatefluorocarbon polymer, said matrix having a finely divided solidelectrolyte stable wettable mineral uniformly dispersed in the poresthereof and firmly held therein, the finely divided particulate mineralbeing present in an amount sufficient to permit an aqueous phase toachieve continuity throughout the porous structure.5. The combination in an electrolytic cell, of at least one negativeelectrode and at least one positive electrode, and an electrolyte confinedbetween said positive and said negative electrodes and in contacttherewith comprising an aqueous electrolyte and a chemically inert highlyporous matrix formed of a sintered finely divided fluorocarbon polymer,said matrix sintered to a coherent pliable mass, characterized by a largenumber of inter-connected pores, which matrix has a finely dividedelectrolyte stable, wettable mineral uniformly dispersed throughout theinterconnecting pores and firmly held therein, characterized by itsimpermeability to transfer therethrough of gaseous products and having acontinuity of electrolyte phase throughout said inter-connecting pores ofsaid matrix establishing a high degree of electrochemical activity andhigh degree of ionic conductivity."}
{"WKU":"039308871","Title":"Batteries with improved shelf life","App_Date":"1974-02-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Willard P. Conner","Assignee":"Hercules Incorporated","ICL_Class":"H01M 2300","References":"2159034;2653180;2876271;3007110","Claims":"What I claim and desire to protect by Letters Patent is:1. In a battery having self-discharge characteristics and an anode and acathode within a container the improvement of which comprises a highresistance element connected across said anode and said cathode, whereinsaid high resistance element has a value selected to provide apredetermined low current drain on said battery.2. A battery as set forth in claim 1 wherein said high resistance elementis mounted externally of said container and is connected across said anodeand said cathode.3. A battery as set forth in claim 1 wherein said high resistance elementis mounted internally within said container and is connected across saidanode and said cathode.4. A battery as set forth in claim 1 wherein said high resistance elementhas a high negative temperature coefficient of resistance.5. In a dry cell battery having a zinc anode, a carbon cathode and adepolarizer-electrolyte mix within a container, the improvement of whichcomprises a high resistance element connected across said anode and saidcathode, wherein said high resistance element has a value selected toprovide a predetermined low current drain on said battery.6. A dry cell battery as set forth in claim 5 wherein said high resistanceelement is mounted externally of said container and is connected acrosssaid anode and said cathode.7. A dry cell battery as set forth in claim 5 wherein said high resistanceelement is mounted externally within said container and is connectedacross said anode and said cathode.8. A dry cell battery as set forth in claim 5 wherein said high resistanceelement has a high negative temperature coefficient of resistance.9. In a dry cell battery comprising a zinc anode in the form of acontainer, a depolarizer-electrolyte mix within said anode and a carboncathode positioned and substantially within said electrolyte mix with oneend projecting therefrom and the other end spaced from the bottom andsides of said anode, the improvement of which comprises a high resistanceelement connected across said anode and said cathode, wherein said highresistance element has a value selected to provide a predetermined currentdrain on said battery.10. A dry cell battery as set forth in claim 9 wherein said high resistanceelement is mounted external to said anode and connects said anode to theprojecting end of said cathode.11. A dry cell battery as set forth in claim 9 wherein said high resistanceelement is mounted within said anode to internally connect said anode andsaid cathode.12. A dry cell battery as set forth in claim 9 wherein said high resistanceelement has a high negative temperature coefficient of resistance.13. A dry cell battery as set forth in claim 9 wherein said high resistanceelement has a value of about 10,000 ohms to about 40,000 ohms.14. In an article operable by one or more batteries and having acompartment for receiving said batteries and an on-off switch forconnecting said batteries into a circuit to operate the article, theimprovement of which comprises a high resistance element mounted in saidcompartment to connect across the terminals of said batteries and providea predetermined low current drain from said batteries to improve the shelflife thereof.15. An article as set forth in claim 14 wherein said high resistanceelement is mounted so that it is connected across said terminals of saidbatteries when said switch is off, and is disconnected from said terminalswhen said switch is on.16. An article as set forth in claim 14 wherein said high resistanceelement has a high negative temperature coefficient of resistance.17. In a package for receiving one or more batteries, the improvement ofwhich comprises a high resistance element mounted to said package toconnect across the terminals of said batteries to provide a predeterminedlow current drain on said batteries.18. A package as set forth in claim 17 wherein said high resistance elementhas a high negative temperature coefficient of resistance."}
{"WKU":"039308880","Title":"Molten metal anode","App_Date":"1975-03-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"George C. Bowser;James R. Moser, deceased","Assignee":"Catalyst Research Corporation","ICL_Class":"H01M  406","References":"3425872;3667822;3669748;3704221;3723183;3773557;3891460","Claims":"We claim:1. An anode assembly for a heat activated battery comprising an anodehaving substantially parallel inner and outer surfaces and a side surface,said anode consisting essentially of a foraminous metal substrate wettableby and filled with a fusible metal selected from the group consisting ofalkali metals, alkaline earth metals and alloys thereof melting below theoperating temperature of the battery, and a housing covering the outersurface and side of said anode and consisting of an impervious metalportion in electrical contact with said anode and a porous portion insealing engagement against the periphery of said metal portion and incontact with said anode, said porous portion being formed from refractoryfibers.2. An anode assembly according to claim 1 in which the porous portion isasbestos sheet.3. An anode assembly according to claim 2 comprising a metal cup having aplanar bottom and sidewall, the anode being contained within the cup, aporous sheet overlying and covering the anode inner surface, the cuphaving an inturned flange integral with its open end and overlapping themargin of the porous sheet.4. An anode assembly according to claim 3 having a plurality of poroussheet layers, a layer spaced from the anode surface being impregnated witha fusible electrolyte.5. An anode assembly according to claim 1 in which the housing envelops theanode, at least a portion of the anode inner surface being covered by theporous portion.6. An anode assembly according to claim 5 in which the porous portion isasbestos sheet.7. An anode assembly according to claim 5 having a plurality of porouslayers, a layer spaced from the anode surface being impregnated with afusible electrolyte.8. An anode assembly according to claim 1 having a metal plate abutting andhaving a margin extending beyond the anode outer surface, and a porousannulus engaging the anode side surface and annulus.9. An anode assembly according to claim 8 having a porous sheet coveringthe anode inner surface and annulus.10. An anode assembly according to claim 1 in which the substrate is aplurality of screens.11. An anode assembly according to claim 1 in which the metal is lithium.12. An anode assembly according to claim 1 in which the metal is an alloyof calcium and lithium melting below about 400.degree.C."}
{"WKU":"039308898","Title":"Multiple source battery-powered apparatus","App_Date":"1974-07-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"George William Ruggiero;Robert Myrick Kelly;Eliashiv Mazor","Assignee":"Bell & Howell Company","ICL_Class":"H01M  202","References":"3220888;3506902;3611568","Claims":"We claim:1. An electric battery in an electrically-conductive case forming oneterminal for the battery, said case having a side surface between firstand second ends and enclosing one of said ends, an electrically-insulatingcover over said side surface and said one end, and an aperture in saidcover over said side surface located nearer to one of said ends than tothe other for giving via said side surface the only contact access to saidone terminal, a second battery terminal being located in the other of saidends.2. A battery according to claim 1 in which said case is cylindrical andsaid cover is in two parts with an annular space between them providingsaid aperture.3. A battery according to claim 2 in which said cover overlies theperiphery of the other of said ends.4. In a battery-powered electrical apparatus for use alternatively with,either a rechargeable battery having a terminal for a first polarity atone end and a charging terminal for a second polarity positioned on a sidesurface of said battery, or a non-rechargeable battery having a terminalfor said first polarity at one end and a terminal for said second polarityat the other end; a case for the apparatus, a battery chamber in said casefor receiving a battery, first battery contact means for said firstpolarity located at a first position at one end in said chamber, secondbattery contact means for said second polarity located in a secondposition at the opposite end in said chamber, third battery contact meansfor said second polarity located in a third position between said ends insaid chamber for making contact with said terminal for said secondpolarity of said rechargeable battery when the latter is installed in saidchamber, said second and third battery contact means being connected toeach other within said case, first and second battery charging contactsoutside said chamber, a connection from said first charging contact tosaid first battery contact means, fourth battery contact means in saidchamber adjoining said third battery contact means, for making contactwith said charging terminal of said rechargeable battery when the latteris installed in said chamber, and a connection from said second batterycharging contact to said fourth battery contact means.5. Apparatus according to claim 4 in which said second battery contactmeans is a flat plate.6. Apparatus according to claim 5 including an insulating projection onsaid plate.7. In a battery-powered electrical apparatus, a battery chamber havingfirst and second confronting ends and side wall means between them forreceiving a battery of similar proportions, first battery contact meansfor a first polarity located at said first end in said chamber, secondbattery contact means for a second polarity located at a side wall in saidchamber nearer to one of said ends than to the other, third batterycontact means for said second polarity located at said second end in saidchamber, said second and third battery contact means being connected toeach other, first and second battery-charging contacts outside saidchamber, a connection from said first charging contact to said firstbattery contact means, a fourth battery contact means located at a sidewall in said chamber opposite to said second battery contact means, and aconnection from said second charging contact to said fourth batterycontact means, for receiving optionally in said chamber a rechargeablebattery having a first terminal at one end located to mate with said firstbattery contact means and a second circumferential terminal at one sidenearer to one end than to the other to mate with said second and fourthbattery contact means and to connect same together with said secondcharging contact, or a non-rechargeable battery having respectiveterminals at both ends located to mate respectively with said first andthird battery contact means respectively.8. In combination with an apparatus according to claim 7, a holder for theapparatus, said holder having a socket to receive the apparatus in adesired position, said holder including charging means for a rechargeablebattery when present in the apparatus, said charging means having firstand second charging contacts located to register respectively with thefirst and second charging contacts of said apparatus when the apparatus ispresent in the holder, whereby, when a rechargeable battery is present inthe apparatus said battery can be recharged while the apparatus is in theholder, and when a non-rechargeable battery is present in the apparatussaid charging means will be inoperative while the apparatus is in theholder."}
{"WKU":"039308901","Title":"Storage battery gas recombination catalyst device","App_Date":"1974-05-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hermann Dietz","Assignee":"Robert Bosch G.m.b.H.","ICL_Class":"H01M  212;B01J  800","References":"3102059;3464860;3701691;3817717","Claims":"I claim:1. A device for promoting catalytic recombination of gases generated in astorage battery, comprising a catalyst body encased in a poroushydrophobic shell consisting of superposed layers respectively of sinteredand unsintered polytetrafluoroethylene, said body being of such dimensionsand constitution that a multiplicity of said bodies may float freely onthe electrolyte of a storage battery and that the specific weight of thedevice as a whole is less than the specific weight of the electrolyte inits condition of lowest battery charge, said catalyst body beingconstituted largely of a material having a high proportion of void spacein its interior and a low bulk density and serving as a carrier for afinally divided catalyst material.2. A device as defined in claim 1 in which the specific weight of thedevice as a whole is smaller than 1 g/cm.sup.3.3. A device as defined in claim 1 in which said material of which saidcatalyst body is largely constituted is activated charcoal.4. A device as defined in claim 1 in which said hydrophobic shell consistsof an inner layer of unsintered polytetrafluoroethylene and an outer layerof sintered polytetrafluoroethylene.5. A device as defined in claim 1 in which said material of which saidcatalyst body is largely constituted consists of hollow glass sphericalparticles.6. A device as defined in claim 1 in which said material of which saidcatalyst body is largely constituted is a foamed synthetic resin."}
{"WKU":"039308910","Title":"Pilot burner thermocouple apparatus","App_Date":"1973-11-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Donnell H. Fox;Charles Matilo","Assignee":"Robertshaw Controls Company","ICL_Class":"G01K  702","References":"3290178;3650843","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Thermocouple apparatus for use with a burner having a mounting bracketformed with aligned upper and lower apertures, said thermocouple apparatuscomprising:an elongated thermocouple body of generally cylindrical configuration andincluding a mounting portion, said body being received by the apertures ofsaid bracket;an upper adaptor having a sleeve that tapers downwardly toward said loweraperture and radially and is formed with a bore that receives the body ofsaid thermocouple, with the exterior surface of said sleeve telescopicallyengaging the upper aperture of said mounting bracket;a tapered frusto-conical flexible spring clip that is openablecircumferentially and has its larger end removeably engaged with theunderside of said sleeve and its smaller end frictionally engaged with themounting portion of said thermocouple; andwith the frictional resistance between the smaller end of said spring clipand the mounting portion of said thermocouple body being greater than thefrictional resistance between said spring clip and said sleeve whereby assaid thermocouple body is withdrawn downwardly through said sleeve saidsleeve remains engaged with said bracket, while said spring remainsattached to and is removed with said body.2. Thermocouple apparatus as set forth in claim 1 wherein:the mounting portion of said thermocouple body is formed with externalaxially spaced grooves and the smaller end of said spring is formed with adetent that frictionally engages said grooves."}
{"WKU":"039308928","Title":"Replacement thermocouple apparatus for a pilot burner","App_Date":"1973-11-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Donnell H. Fox;Donald K. Murrell","Assignee":"Robertshaw Controls Company","ICL_Class":"G01K  702","References":"3290178;3650843","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Thermocouple apparatus for use with a burner having a mounting bracketformed with a threaded aperture, said thermocouple apparatus comprising:an elongated thermocouple body of generally cylindrical configurationhaving a flame-receiving tip and said body also having a mounting portionformed with external axially spaced grooves;a barrel like adaptor body formed with a coaxial opening that receives saidthermocouple body, said body also being formed with external threadsengageable with the threads of the mounting bracket aperture to securesaid body therewithin; anda tapered frusto-conical spring clip that is openable circumferentially andincludes means for locking said spring to said adaptor so as to be bothaxially and nonrotatably secured within the opening of said adaptor body,said spring clip being formed with a detent frictionally engaged with thegrooves of the thermocouple body mounting portion whereby said body may bevertically adjusted relative to said adaptor body.2. Thermocouple apparatus as set forth in claim 1 wherein:said adaptor body is formed with a second set of external threads axiallyspaced from the other threads and on a portion of said body of differentdiameter than the firstmentioned threads.3. Thermocouple apparatus as set forth in claim 1 wherein:the grooves on said thermocouple body are threads whereby relative rotationbetween the adaptor body and the thermocouple body will effect concurrentaxial movement therebetween.4. Thermocouple apparatus as set forth in claim 2 wherein:the grooves on said thermocouple body are threads whereby relative rotationbetween the adaptor body and the thermocouple body will effect concurrentaxial movement therebetween."}
{"WKU":"039308936","Title":"Conductivity connected charge-coupled device fabrication process","App_Date":"1975-03-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Wallace Edward Tchon","Assignee":"Honeywell Information Systems, Inc.","ICL_Class":"H01L 21263","References":"3650019;3852119;3853634;3865652;3892596","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method of fabricating a charge-coupled semiconductor device, saidmethod comprising the steps of:A. applying a layer of gate oxide on a substrate of semiconductor material;B. applying a first mask to the layer of gate oxide, said first mask havingopenings therein of predetermined size and location relative to oneanother;C. implanting regions in said substrate of a different semiconductorresistivity than said substrate through the holes in said first mask;D. removing said first mask from said substrate;E. applying a layer of polysilicon over said gate oxide layer;F. applying a second mask to said layer of polysilicon, said second maskhaving holes therein of different location than the holes of said firstmask;G. removing the portions of said layers of polysilicon and gate oxideunderlying said holes in said second mask;H. doping the remaining portions of said polysilicon and the portions ofsaid substrate underlying the removed portions of said polysilicon andgate oxide layers by adding impurity atoms to same.2. The method according to claim 1, wherein said substrate is comprised ofN-type semiconductor material and said regions of different semiconductorresistivity are comprised of N-type silicon which has been dopedsubstantially more than said substrate.3. The method according to claim 2, wherein said doped portions of saidsubstrate are comprised of P-type silicon.4. The method according to claim 1, wherein said substrate is comprised ofP-type semiconductor material and said regions of different semiconductorresistivity are comprised of P-type silicon which has been dopedsubstantially more than said substrate.5. The method according to claim 4, wherein said doped portions of saidsubstrate are comprised of N-type silicon.6. A method of fabricating charge-coupled semiconductor devices on a firstportion of a semiconductor substrate and fabricating metal oxidesemiconductor devices on a second portion of the same substrate, saidmethod comprising the steps of:A. applying a layer of thick oxide to said semiconductor substrate;B. removing said thick oxide layer at predetermined locations of said firstand second portions of said substrate;C. applying a layer of gate oxide;D. applying a first mask to the layer of gate oxide, said first mask havingopenings of predetermined size and location relative to one another inthat part of said first mask overlying said first portion of saidsubstrate, and said first mask having no openings in that part of saidfirst mask overlying said second portion of said substrate;E. implanting regions in said substrate of a different semiconductorresistivity than said substrate through the holes of said first mask;F. removing said first mask from said substrate;G. applying a layer of polysilicon over said gate oxide layer;H. applying a second mask to said layer of polysilicon, said second maskhaving holes therein of different location than the holes of said firstmask;I. removing the portions of said layers of polysilicon and gate oxideunderlying said holes in said second mask;J. removing said second mask;K. doping the remaining portions of said polysilicon and the portions ofsaid substrate underlying the removed portions of said polysilicon andgate oxide layers by diffusing impurity atoms into same;L. applying a layer of third oxide to said second portion of saidsubstrate;M. removing said layer of third oxide overlying those portions of thesecond portion of said substrate which were doped in step K;N. applying a layer of metal over said second portion of said substrate;andO. removing portions of said layer of metal at predetermined locations ofsaid second portion of said substrate.7. The method according to claim 6, wherein said substrate is comprised ofN-type semiconductor material, said regions of different semiconductorresistivity are comprised of N-type silicon which has been dopedsubstantially more than said substrate, and wherein said doped portions ofsaid substrate are comprised of P-type silicon.8. The method according to claim 6, wherein said substrate is comprised ofP-type semiconductor material, said regions of different semiconductorresistivity are comprised of P-type silicon which has been dopedsubstantially more than said substrate, and wherein said doped portions ofsaid substrate are comprised of N-type silicon.9. A method of fabricating charge-coupled semiconductor devices on a firstportion of a semiconductor substrate, fabricating metal oxidesemiconductor devices on a second portion of the same substrate, andfabricating metal oxide semiconductor devices on a third portion of thesame substrate, said devices on said third portion having a differentthreshold than those on said second portion, said method comprising thesteps of:A. applying a layer of thick oxide to said semiconductor substrate;B. removing said thick oxide layer at predetermined locations of saidfirst, second and third portions of said substrate;C. applying a layer of gate oxide;D. applying a first mask to the layer of gate oxide, said first mask havingopenings of predetermined size and location relative to one another inthose portions of said first mask overlying said first and third portionsof said substrate, and said first mask having no openings in that part ofsaid first mask overlying said second portion of said substrate;E. implanting regions in said substrate of a different semiconductorresistivity than said substrate through the holes of said first mask;F. removing said first mask from said substrate;G. applying a layer of polysilicon over said gate oxide layer;H. applying a second mask to said layer of polysilicon, said second maskhaving holes therein of different location than the holes of said firstmask;I. removing the portions of said layers of said polysilicon and gate oxideunderlying said holes in said second mask;J. removing said second mask;K. doping the remaining portions of said polysilicon and the portions ofsaid substrate underlying the removed portions of said polysilicon andgate oxide layers by diffusing impurity atoms into same;L. applying a layer of third oxide to said second and third portions ofsaid substrate;M. removing said layer of third oxide overlying those portions of thesecond and third portions of said substrate which were doped in step K;N. applying a layer of metal over said second and third portions of saidsubstrate; andO. removing portions of said layer of metal at predetermined locations ofsaid second and third portions of said substrate.10. The method according to claim 6, wherein said substrate is comprised ofN-type semiconductor material, said regions of different semiconductorresistivity are comprised of N-type silicon which has been dopedsubstantially more than said substrate, and wherein said doped portions ofsaid substrate are comprised of P-type silicon.11. The method according to claim 9, wherein said substrate is comprised ofP-type semiconductor material, said regions of different semiconductorresistivity are comprised of P-type silicon which has been dopedsubstantially more than said substrate, and wherein said doped portions ofsaid substrate are comprised of N-type silicon."}
{"WKU":"039308944","Title":"Method of preparing copper base alloys","App_Date":"1974-11-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Stanley Shapiro;Michael J. Pryor;Ronald N. Caron","Assignee":"Olin Corporation","ICL_Class":"C22F  108","References":"2059555;2059556;2059557;2059558;2128955;2136918;2210670;2636101","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method of preparing wrought copper base alloys having good hotrollability, good stress corrosion resistance, good strength propertiesand good bend characteristics which comprises:A. casting a copper base alloy having the composition consistingessentially of: tin from 2 to 11 percent; phosphorus from 0.01 to 0.3percent; a transition metal selected from the group consisting ofchromium, zirconium, titanium, vanadium and mixtures thereof in an amountfrom 0.2 to 0.8 percent each; a material selected from the groupconsisting of iron from 0.3 to 2.0 percent, cobalt from 0.3 to 2.0percent, and mixtures thereof, wherein the total iron plus cobalt must beat least 0.8 percent, balance copper;B. homogenizing for at least 15 minutes at a temperature between700.degree.C and the solidus temperature of the alloy;C. hot rolling at a starting temperature in excess of 650.degree.C and upto within 50.degree.C of the solidus temperature, and at a finishingtemperature in excess of 400.degree.C; andD. cold rolling the material,thereby obtaining a copper base alloy having a grain size less than 0.010mm and containing particulate phases uniformly dispersed throughout thematrix thereof, wherein a first of said phases contains an iron and/orcobalt-transition metal intermediate phase comprising a solid solution ofsaid iron and/or cobalt plus transition metal and wherein a second of saidphases contains iron and/or cobalt-transition metal phosphides.2. A method according to claim 1 wherein said alloy is subjected to a finalheat treatment at from 100.degree.C to 850.degree.C for from 10 seconds to8 hours.3. A method according to claim 1 wherein the material is cold rolled instep (D) with intermediate anneals.4. A method according to claim 1 wherein said alloy is homogenized in step(B) for from 800.degree.C to 900.degree.C for 15 minutes to 4 hours.5. A method according to claim 3 wherein said intermediate anneals are at atemperature from 250.degree.C to 850.degree.C for from 10 seconds to 24hours.6. A method according to claim 1 wherein said transition metal is chromium."}
{"WKU":"039308952","Title":"Special magnesium-manganese aluminum alloy","App_Date":"1974-04-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Clarence J. Moser;Wilbur E. Stephens","Assignee":"Amax Aluminum Company, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B22D 2104;B22D 1106;C22C 2104","References":"1928641;2790216;3219491;3219492;3490955;3787248;3802931","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method of improving the deep drawing and ironing characteristics of atype 3004 aluminum alloy in sheet form which comprises providing saidalloy consisting essentially of by weight about 0.1 to 0.3% Si, about 0.25to 0.8% Fe, about 0.1 to 0.25% Cu, about 0.75 to 1.75% Mg, with themanganese content controlled over the range of about 2 to 3% Mn and thebalance essentially Al for use in the production of containers, such asbeverage cans and the like which comprises,establishing a molten bath of said alloy and chill casting said alloy bypassing said molten alloy bath between a pair of water-cooled rotatingrolls to produce a cast sheet metal stock,heating said sheet metal stock to a temperature of about 950.degree.F to1050.degree.F for a time sufficient to homogenize said alloy,air cooling said sheet metal stock to room temperature,and cold rolling said sheet metal stock to the desired gage withintermediate anneals where necessary to produce a cold rolled sheet metalproduct,"}
{"WKU":"039308960","Title":"Method for producing metal film resistor by electroless plating","App_Date":"1974-05-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hiroshi Takahama;Hachiro Hamaguchi","Assignee":"Tatsuta Densen Kabushiki Kaisha","ICL_Class":"C23C 1900;B05D  512","References":"3105772;3134690;3432338;3586839;3597266;3698919;3778300;3846015","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A method for producing a nickel-cobalt alloy film for use as a resistor,which comprises immersing a ceramic or glass base material in a stannouschloride solution, a silver salt solution and a palladium chloridesolution, respectively, subjecting the thus treated base material toelectroless plating in a bath containing 0.016 - 0.038 mol of cobalt ions,nickel ions in an amount to provide a molar ratio of cobalt ions to nickelions of 6:1 to 15:1, 0.28 - 0.47 mol of sodium hypophosphite and 0.34 -0.75 mol of sodium citrate, all bath component amounts being based on oneliter of bath composition, at a bath temperature of 20.degree.-50.degree.Cwhile maintaining the pH of the bath at 9.5 - 10.5 by means of ammoniumhydroxide, heat-treating the resultant metal film in an atmosphere whichsubstantially prevents oxidation of the metal film at a pressure below 10mm Hg and temperature above 230.degree.C, with the proviso that KT.gtoreq. 1000 wherein K is the heat treatment temperature in .degree.C andT is the time of the heat treatment in hours, and surface treating theheat-treated metal film in an atmosphere which causes oxidation of themetal film at a pressure above 10 mm Hg and temperature above150.degree.C, with the proviso that KT .gtoreq. 200 wherein K and T are asdefined above.2. A method according to claim 1, wherein the electroless plating bathfurther contains at least one member selected from the group consisting of0.04 - 0.22 mol of sodium tartrate and 0.05 - 0.16 mol of sodium malateper liter of bath composition.3. A method according to claim 1, wherein the heat treatment of the metalfilm is carried out in a vacuum or an inert gas.4. A method according to claim 1, wherein the surface treatment of themetal film is carried out in air.5. A cobalt-nickel alloy film resistor produced in accordance with claim 1."}
{"WKU":"039308979","Title":"Method of treating an object of silicon steel provided with an","App_Date":"1974-10-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Carl-Artur Akerblom","Assignee":"Allmanna Svenska Elektriska Aktiebolaget","ICL_Class":"C23F  710","References":"2753282;2835618;3615918;3658587","Claims":"I claim:1. Method of producing a phosphate coating on an object of silicon steelhaving an insulating coating of silicate, with a solution of phosphate,which comprises coating the object with an aqueous solution containingphosphate ions and complex metal-ammonia ions consisting essentially ofcupric and/or chromic ions, said aqueous solution having a content ofphosphate ions, complex metal ions, ammonium ions and dissolved ammonia oftogether 5 to 50 per cent by weight, the solution having a pH of at least9, and heating the coated object to a temperature of at least about550.degree.C for a time sufficient to anchor the resulting phosphate layerto the silicate coating.2. Method according to claim 1, in which the phosphate ions consistessentially of monophosphate ions.3. Method according to claim 1, which comprises heating the object with theapplied phosphate solution to a temperature of 700.degree.to 850.degree.C.4. Method according to claim 1, in which the solution contains an insolublefiller."}
{"WKU":"039308987","Title":"Process for imparting a dark patina to low-melting metal articles","App_Date":"1973-12-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Marion S. Cooley","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"C23C  300;C23F  502","References":"153726;282754;3238059;3577282","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for imparting a dark patina to the surface of an articleformed from a low-melting alloy metal, the alloy metal being an alloymetal of Bi, Pb, Sn and Cd having a melting point below 350.degree.F,comprising exposing the alloy metal surface of said article to a mineralacid solution of a copper salt selected from the group consisting ofcopper sulfate, copper chloride and copper nitrate.2. The process of claim 1 wherein the acidic solution of copper salt is an0.01M to 1 M aqueous solution of a strong mineral acid containing 0.01M to1M copper salt.3. The process of claim 2 wherein the acidic solution contains 0.001M to0.01M copper salt.4. The process of claim 1 wherein the alloy melts below 250.degree.F.5. The process of claim 4 wherein the acidic solution is rinsed from thearticle with water."}
{"WKU":"039308995","Title":"Method of spraying molybdenum on aluminum or aluminum alloy","App_Date":"1973-12-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hiroshi Sakamaki;Shohei Ishikawa;Toshiyuki Maeda","Assignee":"Nippon Piston Ring Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"C23C  700","References":"2662831;2676916;3148086;3180715;3202529","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method of spraying a molybdenum layer onto an aluminum or aluminumalloy surface having enhanced adhesion thereto comprisinga. subjecting the surface to a zinc-substitution treatment to form a zinclayer in said surface, andb. spraying the molybdenum onto the substituted zinc layer to form themolybdenum layer, the aluminum or aluminum alloy not being heated prior tostep (b), such that the zinc from the zinc-substituted layer melts intothe sprayed molybdenum layer.2. A method of spraying a molybdenum layer onto an aluminum or aluminumalloy surface having enhanced adhesion thereto comprisinga. subjecting the surface to a zinc-substitution treatment to form a zinclayer in said surface,b. preliminarily spraying nickel aluminide onto the substituted zinc layerbetween steps (a) and (b) which has a high adhesion to the zinc layer, andc. spraying the molybdenum onto the preliminarily sprayed nickel aluminidelayer of (b) to form the molybdenum layer, the aluminum or aluminum alloynot being heated prior to step (c), such that the zinc from thezinc-substituted layer melts into the sprayed nickel aluminide-molybdenumlayer.3. A sealing element produced by the method of claim 1.4. A sealing element produced by the method of claim 2."}
{"WKU":"039309002","Title":"Process for cooling hot rolled steel rod","App_Date":"1974-10-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Norman A. Wilson","Assignee":"Morgan Construction Company","ICL_Class":"C21D  952","References":"3231432;3645805;3711338","Claims":"I claim:1. A process for treating steel rod comprising hot rolling the rod,depositing the rod directly from rolling onto a moving conveyor inspread-out rings, and controlling the loss of heat by said rod by applyingradiant heat to the rod selectively in substantially inverse proportion tothe accumulated mass of said rod from side to side of said rings.2. A process for treating steel rod comprising hot rolling the rod,depositing the rod directly from rolling onto a moving conveyor inspread-out rings in a condition in which the rings normally cool morerapidly at their center than at their edges, and controlling the coolingrate of the various parts of the rod so as to render it uniform across therings by selectively releasing radiant energy from the edges of the ringsand retaining it at the centers in proportion to the normal difference incooling rates of the respective portions.3. A process for treating steel rod comprising hot rolling the rod,depositing the rod directly from rolling onto a moving conveyor inspread-out rings in a condition in which the rings normally cool morerapidly at their center than at their edges, and controlling the coolingrate of the various parts of the rod so as to render it uniform across therings by a combination of confining said rings so as to minimizeconvective cooling and selectively releasing in substantial proportionacross said conveyor to the mass flow ratio of said rod along saidconveyor.4. The process of claim 3 further characterized by applying additionalradiant heat uniformly across the conveyor so as to retard the coolingrate of the steel.5. A process for treating steel rod comprising hot rolling the rod,depositing the rod directly from rolling onto a moving conveyor inspread-out rings in a condition in which the rings normally cool morerapidly at their center than at their edges, and controlling the coolingrate of the various parts of the rod so as to render it uniform across therings by a combination of confining said rings so as to minimizeconvective cooling, and selectively applying radiant heat to said ringsacross said conveyor in substantially inverse proportion to the mass flowratio of said rod along said conveyor.6. A process for treating steel rod comprising hot rolling the rod, coolingthe rod after rolling to a temperature near to but above thetransformation temperature of said steel, depositing said rod onto amoving conveyor in over-lapping ring form, and cooling said rod on saidconveyor while applying radiant heat to the centers of the rings.7. The process of claim 6 further characterized by metering the applicationof radiant heat across the rings in inverse proportion to the mass flowratio of rod along the conveyor.8. The process of claim 7 further characterized by restricting the flow ofgas to said rod so as to minimize convective cooling.9. The process of claim 7 further characterized by the application ofradiant heat to the centers being accomplished at least in part byreflection of radiant heat from the rod itself, and simultaneouslypermitting a substantial portion of the radiant heat from the edges of therod rings to escape without reflecting back onto the rod.10. A process for treating steel rod comprising rolling steel to rod at atemperature of about 1000.degree.C, cooling the rod to a temperature nearto but above transformation and laying it in spread-out rings on a movingconveyor, confining the rings on the conveyor to minimize the access andflow of gas to the rings, regulating the cooling rate of the rod to therange of 0.1.degree.C per sec. to 2.degree.C/sec., both by restricting thepath of heat loss by radiation, and by applying radiation to the rod insubstantial inverse proportion to the mass flow ratio of rod along saidconveyor."}
{"WKU":"039309010","Title":"Coating ingot pretreatment","App_Date":"1975-01-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard C. Krutenat","Assignee":"United Technologies Corporation","ICL_Class":"C22F  102","References":"3676085","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. The method of pretreating a vacuum vapor deposition coating alloy ingotformed from a cobalt-base alloy containing aluminum and yttrium togetherwith alumina inclusions which comprises:heat treating the ingot in vacuum for a time and at a temperaturesufficient to substantially convert the alumina to yttria and aluminumwhereby the spitting propensity of the ingot is reduced.2. The method according to claim 1 wherein:the ingot comprises fine compacted powders.3. The method of pretreating a fine compacted powder ingot formed of acobalt alloy containing about 15- 40 weight percent chromium, 10- 25weight percent aluminum, 0.01- 5 percent yttrium and alumina inclusionswhich comprises:heat treating the ingot in vacuum for a time and at a temperature tosubstantially convert the alumina to yttria and aluminum.4. The method according to claim 3 wherein:the treatment is conducted at a temperature not less than about2000.degree.F.5. The method according to claim 4 wherein:the treatment is conducted at a temperature of about 2000.degree.F. forabout 16 hours.6. The method of pretreating a coating alloy ingot containing aluminainclusions which lead to unacceptable spitting in the coating processesinvolving vacuum vapor deposition which comprises:including elemental yttrium in the coating alloy; andheat treating the ingot in a time/temperature treatment in vacuumsufficient to substantially convert the alumina to aluminum and yttria."}
{"WKU":"039309029","Title":"Relative sliding members","App_Date":"1975-01-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Takeshi Hiraoka;Shigeru Urano","Assignee":"Nippon Piston Ring Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"C22C 3816","References":"3793691","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Relative sliding members in mating combination comprising a nitrifiedsintered alloy consisting of by weight 0.9-2.00% of T.C, 2.00-6.00% of Cu,0.40-0.80% of Mo, less than 1.00% and other elements, and the balanceiron, and an alloy cast iron consisting of by weight 2.00-3.50% of carbon,1.50-2.50% of silicon, 0.03-1.00% of manganese, less than 0.30% ofphosphorous, less than 0.12% of sulfur, 0.20-1.00% of copper, 0.2-1.00% ofmolybdenum, and the balance iron."}
{"WKU":"039309037","Title":"Stabilized superconductive wires","App_Date":"1974-02-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert N. Randall;James Wong","Assignee":"Supercon, Inc.","ICL_Class":"H01L 3900;H01B 1200","References":"3541680;3623221;3625662;3807041","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Superconductive multi-filament wire product comprising,means defining a copper matrix with a plurality of spaced filamentstherein,each of the filaments comprising a layer therein of type II superconductingintermetallic compound of Beta-Wolfram structure, being the diffusionreaction product of source filaments comprising a cross-section multilayerconfiguration of a refractory metal layer each containing componentelements of the compound,the copper matrix having a resistance ratio greater than 100 and beingessentially free of said component elements, and the diffusion layer being0.5-2 microns thick, the compound layers of the fialments beingmetallurgically bonded to the copper matrix.2. Superconductive multi-filament wire produced in accordance with claim 1wherein said compound comprises Nb.sub.3 Sn, said refractory metalcomprises niobium and said bronze comprises tin.3. Superconductive multi-filament wire produced in accordance with claim 2and further comprising,a niobium outer layer in each filament jacketing the compound layerthereof,said niobium layer being metallurgically bonded to said copper matrix.4. Superconductive multi-filament wire product in accordance with claim 1and further comprising,a residual part of said source refractory metal outer layer in eachfilament jacketing the compound layer thereof,said refractory metal being metallurgically bonded to said compound layerand to said copper matrix.5. Superconductive multi-filament wire product in accordance with claim 1wherein said compound comprises V.sub.3 Ga, said refractory metalcomprises vanadium and said bronze comprises gallium.6. Superconductive multi-filament wire product in accordance with claim 5and further comprising,a residual vanadium layer in each filament metallurgically bonded to thecompound layer thereof,said vanadium layer being metallurgically bonded to said bronze core."}
{"WKU":"039309045","Title":"Nickel-iron-chromium alloy wrought products","App_Date":"1974-10-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Herbert L. Eiselstein;James C. Hosier;Ralph C. Scarberry","Assignee":"The International Nickel Company, Inc.","ICL_Class":"C22C 3844;C22C 3848","References":"2777766;2994605;3243287;3492117;3547625","Claims":"We claim:1. A high strength, corrosion-resistant, wrought and heat treatednickel-chromium-molybdenum-columbium-iron alloy product having themicrostructural condition that results from annealing at about1800.degree.F and having a fine-grain annealed microstructurecharacterized by grain size of ASTM 7 and finer, a metallurgically stablesolid-solution austenitic phase structure that remains essentially devoidof sigma phase and resists embrittlement when heated at 1400.degree.F.,and a room temperature yield strength of at least 65,000 pounds per squareinch and composed of an alloy consisting essentially of 38% to 42% nickel,14% to 17% chromium, 5% to 7% molybdenum, 1.5% to 2.5% columbium, up to0.08% carbon, up to 1.5% manganese and balance essentially iron in aproportion whereby iron is at least 29% and not greater than 40% of thealloy.2. A fume scrubber made of the product set forth in claim 1.3. A propeller shaft made of the product set forth in claim 1.4. A product as set forth in claim 1 wherein the alloy contains 39% to 40%nickel and 14.8% to 15.9% chromium.5. A product as set forth in claim 1 wherein the alloy contains carbon inan amount not exeeding 0.05%.6. A product as set forth in claim 1 wherein the alloy contains about 40%nickel, about 15.5% chromium, about 6% molybdenum, about 2% columbium andup to 0.05% carbon.7. A product as set forth in claim 1 wherein the balance of essentiallyiron is restricted to not exceeding 0.5% copper, not exceeding 0.5%silicon, not exceeding 0.5% aluminum, not exceeding 0.5% titanium, notexceeding 0.05% calcium, not exceeding 0.015% sulfur and not exceeding0.03% phosphorus.8. A product as set forth in claim 7 containing 0.05% to 0.5% metal fromthe group aluminum, titanium and mixtures thereof."}
{"WKU":"039309053","Title":"Method of manufacturing an object of silicon steel","App_Date":"1973-10-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Carl-Artur Akerblom","Assignee":"Allmanna Svenska Elektriska Aktiebolaget","ICL_Class":"H01F  104","References":"2394030;2501846;2689185;3396044;3627594;3676227;3697322;3793073;3827922;3832245","Claims":"I claim:1. An object of silicon steel having a heat-resistant, electricallyinsulating coating firmly thereto, said heat-resistant, insulating coatingcomprising a layer of a thickness of 0.1-5 microns consisting essentiallyof calcium titanate.2. An object according to claim 1, having an intermediate layer consistingessentially of silicate between the steel surface of the object and thelayer of titanate.3. An object according to claim 2, in which the intermediate layer consistsessentially of a silicate of a substance selected from the groupconsisting of alkaline earth metals and aluminum.4. An object according to claim 2, in which the intermediate layer consistsessentially of a magnesium silicate.5. An object according to claim 1, in which the layer of calcium titanateis in direct contact with the steel surface of the object.6. An object according to claim 1, in which the coating comprises avanadium compound derived from a vanadium compound selected from the groupconsisting of vanadium (V) oxide and alkaline earth metal vanadates in anamount which stoichometrically corresponds to at least 0.001 g V.sub.2O.sub.5 per square meter of the surface of the object.7. An object according to claim 2, in which the quantity of titanate in thecoating stoichiometrically corresponds to 5 - 100 parts by weightTiO.sub.2 for 100 parts by weight MgO or the equivalent quantity ofanother compound in the intermediate layer of silicate.8. An object according to claim 1, having a layer of a phosphate outsidethe layer of titanate.9. An object according to claim 2, in which the coating comprises avanadium compound derived from a vanadium compound selected from the groupconsisting of vanadium (V) oxide and alkaline earth metal vanadates in anamount which stoichometrically corresponds to at least 0.001 g V.sub.2O.sub.5 per square meter of the surface of the object.10. An object according to claim 2 having a layer of a phosphate outsidethe layer of titanate."}
{"WKU":"039309061","Title":"Method for forming an insulating glass film on a grain-oriented silicon","App_Date":"1975-02-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Toshio Irie;Yasuo Yokoyama;Toshitomo Sugiyama;Hiroshi Shimanaka;Shigeru Kobayashi","Assignee":"Kawasaki Steel Corporation","ICL_Class":"H01F  104","References":"3632456;3770517;3853641;3872704","Claims":"Whar is claimed is:1. In a method for producing a grain-oriented silicon steel sheet havingB.sub.8 value of more than 1.88 Wb/m.sup.2 and provided with a uniforminsulating glass film having a high adhesion to a base metal, in which acold rolled silicon steel sheet having a final gauge is subjected todecarburization annealing under wet hydrogen atmosphere to form an oxidelayer consisting mainly of SiO.sub.2 and FeO on the surface of the steelsheet, a separator containing MgO is coated on the decarburizationannealed steel sheet, the thus treated sheet is wound into a coil and thecoiled sheet is heated by keeping the temperature at800.degree.-920.degree.C constantly for at least 10 hours to fully developsecondary recrystallized grains of (110) [001] orientation and thenraising and keeping the temperature at 1,000.degree.-1,200.degree.Cconstant to form MgO-SiO.sub.2 glass film on the surface of the steelsheet, the improvement which comprises using a neutral gas inert againstiron at least in the above described temperature keeping stage of800.degree.-920.degree.C and replacing the natural gas with hydrogen gasthe above described temperature keeping stage of1,000.degree.-1,200.degree.C.2. The method as claimed in claim 1, wherein said silicon steel sheetcontains 0.005-0.2% of Sb.3. The method as claimed in claim 1, wherein a thickness of the oxide layerformed by the decarburization annealing is 0.5-4.0 .mu.m.4. The method as claimed in claim 1, wherein the neutral atmosphere is usedfrom room temperature to the end of the temperature keeping stage of800.degree.-920.degree.C.5. The method as claimed in claim 1, wherein the replacement of theatmosphere from the neutral gas to hydrogen is effected at a temperatureof lower than 950.degree.C.6. The method as claimed in claim 1, wherein said neutral gas is nitrogencontaining less than 100 ppm of 0.sub.2."}
{"WKU":"039309070","Title":"High strength ductile hot rolled nitrogenized steel","App_Date":"1974-12-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Donald J. Bailey","Assignee":"General Motors Corporation","ICL_Class":"C21D  602;C21D  946","References":"3330705;3625780;3788903","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. The method of producing a high yield strength steel comprising the stepsof:heating an aging low carbon steel to a temperature within the alpha plusgamma region of the iron carbon phase diagram for a time sufficient todissolve a substantial proportion of the carbon into the ferrite of saidsteel and to form a predetermined proportion of said steel into austenite,quenching said steel to substantially retain the solubilized carbon insolution and to transform at least the major proportion of said austeniteinto a form selected from the group consisting of martensite and bainite,tempering said steel,plastically deforming the steel an amount equivalent to at least 2 percenton the tensile stress-strain diagram,aging said deformed steel for time sufficient to develop a desired superioryield strength,said predetermined proportion of austenite being an amount necessary toprovide the aged steel with said yield strength when said steel isdeformed at least the equivalent of 2 percent on the tensile stress-straindiagram,said temper providing the said quenched steel with sufficient ductility forsubsequent forming without preventing the development of said desiredyield strength.2. The method of producing a high yield strength nitrogenized low carbonsteel comprising the steps of:rapidly heating an aging low carbon nitrogenized steel to a temperaturewithin the alpha plus gamma region of the phase diagram for a timesufficient to dissolve a substantial proportion of the carbon and nitrogeninto the ferrite of said steel and to form a predetermined proportion ofsaid steel into austenite,quenching said steel to substantially retain the solubilized carbon andnitrogen in solution and to transform at least the major proportion ofsaid austenite into a form selected from the group consisting ofmartensite and bainite,tempering said quenched steel,plastically deforming the steel an amount equivalent to at least 2 percenton the tensile stress-strain diagram,aging said deformed steel for a time sufficient to develop a minimum yieldstrength of 80,000 psi,said predetermined proportion of austenite being an amount necessary toprovide the aged steel with the yield strength of about 80,000 psi whensaid steel is deformed at least the equivalent of 2 percent on the tensilestress-strain diagram,said temper providing said quenched steel with sufficient ductility forsubsequent forming without preventing the development of said minimumyield strength.3. The method of producing a high yield strength nitrogenized low carbonsteel comprising the steps of:rapidly heating a hot rolled aging low carbon nitrogenized steel to atemperature within the alpha plus gamma region of the phase diagram for atime sufficient to dissolve a substantial proportion of the carbon andnitrogen into the ferrite of said steel and to form a predeterminedproportion of said steel into austenite,quenching said steel to substantially retain the solubilized carbon andnitrogen in solution and to transform at least the major proportion ofsaid austenite into a form selected from a group consisting of martensiteand bainite,tempering said quenched steel,plastically deforming the steel an amount equivalent to at least 2 percenton the tensile stress-strain diagram,aging said deformed steel for a time sufficient to develop a minimum yieldstrength of 80,000 psi,said predetermined proportion of austenite being an amount necessary toprovide the aged steel with a yield strength of about 80,000 psi when saidsteel is deformed at least the equivalent of 2 percent on the tensilestress-strain diagram,said temper providing said quenched steel with sufficient ductility forsubsequent forming without preventing the development of said minimumyield strength.4. The method of producing a high yield strength nitrogenized low carbonhot rolled steel comprising the steps of:rapidly heating an aging low carbon steel to a temperature within the alphaplus gamma region of the iron carbon phase diagram in the range of about1,319.degree. to 1,420.degree.F. for a time sufficient to dissolve asubstantial proportion of the carbon and nitrogen into the ferrite of saidsteel and to form a predetermined proportion of said steel into austenite,quenching said steel to substantially retain the solubilized carbon andnitrogen in solution and to transform at least the major proportion ofsaid austenite into a form selected from the group consisting ofmartensite and bainite,tempering said quenched steel,plastically deforming the steel an amount equivalent to at least 2 percenton the tensile stress-strain diagram,aging said deformed steel for time sufficient to develop a minimum yieldstrength of 80,000 psi,said predetermined proportion of austenite being an amount necessary toprovide the aged steel with the yield strength of about 80,000 psi whensaid steel is deformed at least the equivalent of 2 percent on the tensilestress-strain diagram,said temper providing said quenched steel with sufficient ductility forsubsequent forming without preventing the development of said minimumyield strength.5. The method of producing a high yield strength nitrogenized low carbonhot rolled steel comprising the steps of:rapidly heating an aging low carbon steel to a temperature within the alphaplus gamma region of the iron carbon phase diagram in the range of about1,319.degree. to 1,420.degree.F. for a time period of 3 to 60 seconds todissolve a substantial proportion of the carbon and nitrogen into theferrite of said steel and to form a predetermined proportion of said steelinto austenite,quenching said steel to substantially retain the solubilized carbon andnitrogen in solution and to transform at least the major proportion ofsaid austenite into a form selected from the group consisting ofmartensite and bainite,tempering said quenched steel,plastically deforming the steel an amount equivalent to at least 2 percenton the tensile stress-strain diagram,aging said deformed steel for time sufficient to develop a minimum yieldstrength of 80,000 psi,said predetermined proportion of austenite being an amount necessary toprovide the aged steel with the yield strength of at least about 80,000psi when said steel is deformed at least the equivalent of 2 percent onthe tensile stress-strain diagram,said temper being such as to provide the quenched steel with sufficientductility to permit a tensile deformation of about 18 percent withoutpreventing the development of the said 80,000 psi final yield strength."}
{"WKU":"039309088","Title":"Accurate control during vapor phase epitaxy","App_Date":"1974-09-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Stuart Talbot Jolly","Assignee":"RCA Corporation","ICL_Class":"H01L 2120;H01L 21205","References":"3173814;3243323;3321278;3366516;3413145;3511702;3522118;3721583","Claims":"I claim:1. In the process of vapor phase epitaxy, a method for quickly andaccurately varying the rate of flow of a gaseous component into thereaction chamber, comprising the steps of:a. establishing at least one primary gaseous flow into said reactionchamber,b. establishing a desired flow of said gaseous component, andc. communicating with gaseous component directly into said primary gaseousflow with said gaseous component passing through substantially nointervening space before reaching said primary gaseous flow such that saidgaseous component is swept into said reaction chamber whenever saidgaseous component is communicated directly into said primary gaseous flow.2. A method in accordance with claim 1 in which said gaseous component iscommunicated away from the primary gaseous flow when said gaseouscomponent is not required in said reaction chamber.3. A method in accordance with claim 2 in which said flow of gaseouscomponent is kept continuously flowing.4. A method in accordance with claim 3 in which said flow of gaseouscomponent introduced into said primary gaseous flow is small as comparedto the flow of said primary gaseous flow introduced into said reactionchamber.5. A method in accordance with claim 4 in which said flow of gaseouscomponent introduced into said reaction chamber is varied withoutappreciably altering said primary gaseous flow.6. In the process of vapor phase epitaxy in which more than one gaseouscomponent is communicated into a reaction chamber for deposition onto asubstrate, a method for quickly and accurately varying the rate of flow ofat least one of said gaseous components into said reaction chamber,comprising the steps of:a. establishing at least one primary gaseous flow into said reactionchamber,b. establishing a desired flow of said one gaseous component, andc. communicating with one gaseous component directly into said primarygaseous flow with said gaseous component passing through substantially nointervening space before reaching said primary gaseous flow such that saidone gaseous component is swept into said reaction chamber whenever saidone gaseous component is communicated directly into said primary gaseousflow.7. A method in accordance with claim 6 in which said primary gaseous flowhas a maximized velocity such that the overall growth rate on saidsubstrate is maintained.8. In the process of vapor phase epitaxy in which more than one gaseouscomponent is communicated into a reaction chamber for deposition onto asubstrate, a method for quickly and accurately varying the rate of flow ofat least one of said gaseous components into said reaction chamber,comprising the steps of:a. establishing at least one primary gaseous flow through a control memberand into said reaction chamber,b. establishing a desired flow of said one gaseous component through saidcontrol member, andc. communicating said one gaseous component directly into said primarygaseous flow in said control member with said gaseous component passingthrough substantially no intervening space before reaching said primarygaseous flow such that one gaseous component is swept into said reactionchamber whenever said one gaseous component is communicated directly intosaid primary gaseous flow."}
{"WKU":"039309096","Title":"Method of manufacturing a semiconductor device utilizing simultaneous","App_Date":"1974-11-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Albert Schmitz;Cornelis Mulder;Arie Slob","Assignee":"U.S. Philips Corporation","ICL_Class":"H01L 2120;H01L 2122;H01L 2704","References":"3089794;3260624;3260902;3327182;3335341;3449643;3474308;3481801","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method of making a semiconductor device comprising the steps ofproviding a semiconductor body having a substrate portion of oneconductivity type and having a surface, introducing in a first limitedarea surface region of the substrate portion and at said surface one-typeforming impurities, introducing in a second surface region of the saidsubstrate portion and at said surface opposite-type forming impurities,said second surface region completely overlapping said first surfaceregion, growing an epitaxial layer of the opposite conductivity type onthe said surface containing the first and second surface regions, theimpurity concentrations in and the depth of said first and second surfaceregions and the relative diffusion coefficients of the impurities havingvalues such that upon the application of heat the said one-type formingimpurities form a first buried layer of one conductivity type, and thesaid opposite-type forming impurities form a second buried layer of theopposite conductivity type which completely separates the first buriedlayer from underlying substrate parts of one conductivity type, andforming in the epitaxial layer portion overlying the first buried layer atleast part of the semiconductor circuit element.2. A method as claimed in claim 1, wherein said body is heated until saidfirst buried layer is extended into the epitaxial layer by out-diffusionof one-type forming impurities from said first surface region, theintroduced opposite-type forming impurities having a diffusion coefficientlower than that of the one-type forming impurities and being provided insuch a high concentration that the said second surface region is of theopposite-type conductivity and forms part of the second buried layer ofopposite conductivity type.3. A method as claimed in claim 1, wherein the opposite-type formingimpurities are introduced in said second surface region in a concentrationhigher than that of the impurities in said substrate portion determiningthe one conductivity type of the substrate portion, but lower than that ofthe one-type forming impurities in said first surface region, and suchthat the second surface region extends to a greater depth into thesubstrate than that of the first surface region, whereby the first surfaceregion is of one conductivity type surrounded by a part of the secondsurface region of the opposite conductivity part, said first surfaceregion after provision of the epitaxial layer remaining part of the firstone-type buried layer.4. A method as claimed in claim 1, wherein the opposite-type formingimpurities have a diffusion coefficient higher than that of the one-typeforming impurities and a concentration lower than that of the one-typeforming impurities such that the first surface region is of one-typeconductivity, and heating the body such that after provision of theepitaxial layer the first surface region remains part of the first buriedlayer of one conductivity type and the second buried layer of oppositeconductivity type at least partly is obtained by diffusion ofopposite-type forming impurities from the second surface region deeperinto the substrate portion.5. A method as set forth in claim 1, wherein following growth of theepitaxial layer one-type impurities are diffused into the epitaxial layersurface in a position overlying a portion of the first buried layer untilthey reach the latter forming a surface contact region connected to thefirst buried layer.6. A method as set forth in claim 5, wherein the one-type impurities arediffused into the epitaxial layer surface in an annular pattern overlyingperipheral portions of the first buried layer to form a first one-typetub-shaped region enclosing at least part of the circuit element.7. A method as set forth in claim 6, and further including a step offorming by introducing impurities into the epitaxial layer an annularregion of one-type conductivity laterally surrounding and spaced from thefirst tub-shaped region and extending from the epitaxial layer surfacethrough the epitaxial layer into substrate parts of one-type conductivityto form isolation walls surrounding the tub-shaped region.8. A method as set forth in claim 1, wherein the second substrate surfaceregion also has a limited area less than the whole substrate surface.9. A method of making a semiconductor device comprising the steps ofproviding a semiconductor monocrystal having a substrate portion of oneconductivity type and having a surface, forming in the substrate portionat said surface a first limited area surface region containing one-typeforming impurities, forming in the substrate portion at said surface asecond surface region containing opposite-type impurities, said secondsubstrate surface region completely overlapping the first substratesurface region and extending deeper into the substrate than the latter andseparating the first limited surface region from substrate parts of oneconductivity type underneath said first region, thereafter growing asingle epitaxial layer of the opposite conductivity type containingimpurities in a uniform concentration lower than that present in the firstand second surface regions on the substrate surface containing the firstand second surface regions, said opposite-type impurities in the secondsubstrate surface region having a diffusion coefficient lower than that ofthe one-type impurities in the first substrate surface region but beingpresent in the substrate in a concentration exceeding that of the one-typeimpurities, applying heat to the assembly until there is formed in theepitaxial layer by out-diffusion of one-type forming impurities from thefirst substrate surface region a first buried layer of one-typeconductivity but which remains spaced from the surface of the epitaxiallayer and is separated by the second substrate surface region fromunderlying substrate parts of one conductivity type, and forming in theepitaxial layer portion overlying the first buried layer at least part ofa semiconductor circuit element.10. A method as set forth in claim 9, wherein following growth of theepitaxial layer one-type impurities are diffused into the epitaxial layersurface in a position overlying a portion of the first buried layer untilthey reach the latter forming a surface contact region connected to thefirst buried layer."}
{"WKU":"039309100","Title":"Blasting composition containing an alkanol","App_Date":"1974-03-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John R. Post","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"C06B 4502","References":"3765966","Claims":"What is claimed as new and desired to be secured by Letters Patent of theUnited States is:1. A blasting agent having a density of 1.10 to 1.55 gm/cc. comprisingcrushed ammonium nitrate, 1-17% by weight nitropropane and 1-17% by weightof alkanol having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, wherein the combined weightpercentage of nitropropane plus alkanol is 10-18%.2. A blasting agent as defined in claim 1 wherein the ammonium nitrate ishigh density, low porosity cake ammonium nitrate.3. A blasting agent as defined in claim 1 wherein the ammonium nitrate ishigh density, high porosity prilled ammonium nitrate.4. A blasting agent as defined in claim 1 wherein the ammonium nitrate islow density, high porosity prilled ammonium nitrate.5. A blasting agent as defined in claim 1 wherein less than 60 percent ofthe ammonium nitrate has a particle size greater than 20 mesh.6. A blasting agent as defined in claim 1 wherein the nitropropane ispresent in an amount of 5-9 percent by weight and wherein the alkanol ispresent in an amount of 5-9 percent by weight.7. A blasting agent as defined in claim 1 wherein the oxygen balance issubstantially zero.8. The blasting agent of claim 1 wherein less than 7 percent of said groundammonium nitrate has a particle size greater than 20 mesh.9. The blasting agent of claim 1 wherein the nitropropane consistsessentially of 2-nitropropane and wherein said alkanol consistsessentially of methanol.10. A blasting agent as defined in claim 1 which is not cap-sensitive."}
{"WKU":"039309118","Title":"Blasting composition and method of making same","App_Date":"1974-03-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jared W. Clark","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"C06B 3128","References":"3522117;3706607;3770522;3779821","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A non-emulsified blasting composition which consists essentially of asubstantially uniform mixture of from about 80 to about 94 weight per centammonium nitrate, from about 3 to about 6 weight per cent oxidizeablecarbonaceous material, from about 0.1 to about 10 weight per cent organicacid soluble in said carbonaceous material and having about 8 to about 20carbon atoms, from about 1 to about 9 weight per cent water and from about0.5 to about 1.5 moles of ammonia per mole of said organic acid, andwherein the density of the said blasting composition is greater than thedensity of water.2. A composition as in claim 1 wherein at least part of the said ammoniumnitrate is replaced with a compound selected from the group consisting ofsodium nitrate, potassium nitrate, calcium nitrate and mixtures thereof.3. A composition as in claim 1 wherein the said acid is a saturated fattyacid containing from about 8 to about 18 carbon atoms.4. A composition as in claim 2 wherein the said acid is a saturated fattyacid containing from about 8 to about 18 carbon atoms.5. A composition as in claim 1 wherein the said acid is selected from thegroup consisting of coconut oil fatty acid and iso-stearic acid.6. A composition as in claim 2 wherein the said acid is selected from thegroup consisting of coconut oil fatty acid and iso-stearic acid.7. A composition as in claim 1 wherein the amount of water is from about 1to about 4 weight per cent.8. A composition as in claim 2 wherein the amount of water is from about 1to about 4 weight per cent.9. A composition as in claim 3 wherein the amount of water is from about 1to about 4 weight per cent.10. A composition as in claim 4 wherein the amount of water is from about 1to about 4 weight per cent.11. A composition as in claim 5 wherein the amount of water is from about 1to about 4 weight per cent.12. A composition as in claim 6 wherein the amount of water is from about 1to about 4 weight per cent.13. A process for the preparation of a blasting composition which comprisesmixing from about 80 to about 94 per cent ammonium nitrate with from about0.1 to about 10 weight per cent acid, from about 3 to about 6 weight percent oxidizeable carbonaceous material, from about 1 to about 9 weight percent water and from about 0.5 to about 1.5 moles of ammonia per mole ofsaid acid, wherein said acid contains from about 8 to about 20 carbonatoms and is soluble in said oxidizeable carbonaceous material, carryingon the mixing of said components until the resultant product attains adensity greater than the density of water.14. The process of claim 13 wherein at least a part of the ammonium nitrateis in the form of an aqueous solution.15. The process of claim 13 wherein the said components are mixed until theresultant product attains a density of from about 1.1 to about 1.4.16. The process of claim 14 wherein the said components are mixed until theresultant product attains a density of from about 1.1 to about 1.4."}
{"WKU":"039309126","Title":"Method of manufacturing light emitting diodes","App_Date":"1974-09-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Philip Henry Wisbey","Assignee":"The Marconi Company Limited","ICL_Class":"H01L 2120","References":"3559283;3590479;3689993;3746587;3765970;3767494;3805376;3853650","Claims":"I claim:1. A method of forming a plurality of light emitting diodes in anarrangement of columns and rows, said method comprising the steps of:providing an n-type epitaxial layer formed on an n.sup.+-type substrate;diffusing a p-type dopant into selected regions of said epitaxial n-typelayer to form a plurality of p-type islands arranged in columns and rows,each p-type island having a junction with said n-type epitaxial layer toform a p-n diode of said arrangement;covering each row of said arrangement with a different one of a pluralityof first conductors, each first conductor being electrically connected toall p-n diodes in its row and being electrically isolated from every otherfirst conductor;mounting said arrangement on a transparent support with said plurality offirst conductors adjacent thereto;covering said n.sup.+ type substrate with a plurality of second conductorsin orthogonal relation to said plurality of first conductors, each secondconductor being aligned with a different one of said columns and saidsecond conductors being spaced apart to form gaps therebetween which areregistered with areas between p-type islands; andetching those portions of said n-type epitaxial layer and said n.sup.+ typesubstrate which coincide with said gaps.2. A method as recited in claim 1 in which said first conductors arearranged to cover the p-type islands and are provided with windows fromwhich a portion of the islands may be viewed.3. A method as recited in claim 1 in which said first set of conductors areplated up to provide a substantial metal conductor.4. A method as recited in claim 3 wherein said metal conductor is formed ofcopper.5. A method as recited in claim 1 wherein said transparent support is madeof sapphire.6. A method as recited in claim 1 wherein the thickness of said substrateis reduced prior to depositing said second set of conductors thereon."}
{"WKU":"039309134","Title":"Process for manufacturing integrated circuits and metallic mesh screens","App_Date":"1974-07-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Adir Jacob","Assignee":"LFE Corporation","ICL_Class":"B29C 1708;C23F  102","References":"3615956;3664899;3795557;3806365;3816196;3846166","Claims":"Claims1. In a process for the manufacture of thin film integrated circuitsincluding a step in which a patterned layer of organic material isoverlaid on a metallic layer, the improvement in the further step ofremoving the organic material comprising the step of:exposing the organic material to a low temperature, low pressure plasmaformed from a gaseous mixture of oxygen and nitrogen, wherein the oxygenfraction lies within the range of 0.5 to 15% by volume.2. A process as in claim 1 wherein the gaseous multicomponent mixture issupplied from a single pressurized source.3. The improvement of claim 1 when the metallic layer is copper metal,wherein the oxygen component is 4%, balance nitrogen by volume.4. A process as in claim 1 wherein the reaction pressure is in the range0.05 to 5 torr.5. A process as in claim 1 wherein the reaction temperature is below300.degree.C.6. The process of claim 1 wherein said organic material is photoresist.7. A process as in claim 6 deployed with underlying nickel-chrome(nichrome) resistive film, wherein the oxygen component is 4%, balancenitrogen by volume.8. A process as in claim 4 deployed with underlying chrome-cobalt resistivefilm, wherein the oxygen component is 4%, balance nitrogen by volume.9. A process as in claim 6 deployed with underlying gold conductors,wherein the oxygen component is 4%, balance nitrogen by volume.10. In a process for the fabrication of chromium photomasks including astep in which a patterned layer of photoresist is overlaid on saidchromium, the improvement in the further step of removing the photoresistcomprising the step of:exposing the photoresist material to a low temperature, low pressure plasmaformed from a gaseous mixture of oxygen and nitrogen wherein the oxygencomponent is 2%, balance nitrogen by volume.11. In a process for the fabrication of nickel mesh screens including astep in which a patterned layer of photoresist is overlaid on said nickel,the improvement in the further step of removing the photoresist comprisingthe step of:exposing the photoresist material to a low temperature, low pressure plasmaformed of a gaseous mixture of oxygen and nitrogen wherein the oxygencomponent is 4%, balance nitrogen by volume.12. In a process for the fabrication of copper mesh screens including astep in which a patterned layer of photoresist is overlaid on said copper,the improvement in the further step of removing the photoresist comprisingthe step of:exposing the photoresist material to a low temperature, low pressure plasmaformed of a gaseous mixture of oxygen and nitrogen wherein the oxygencomponent is 0.5%, balance nitrogen by volume."}
{"WKU":"039309142","Title":"THINNING SEMICONDUCTIVE SUBSTRATES","App_Date":"1974-08-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Harold Arthur Hetrich","Assignee":"Western Electric Co., Inc.","ICL_Class":"H01L  750","References":"2958147;3404049;3447985","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method of thinning a portion of a workpiece, which comprises the stepsof:depositing a fluid in a cavity;positioning the face of the workpiece on the fluid to leave no spacebetween the face of the workpiece and the fluid;retaining the workpiece in the cavity with an apertured member, whereby theface is masked by the fluid and a portion of the backside of the workpieceopposite the face is masked by the member; andtreating through the aperture of the member the unmasked backside of theworkpiece to remove at least a portion of such workpiece, while the maskedface and the masked portion of the backside of the workpiece remainuntreated.2. The method of claim 1, wherein the treating is accomplished by etchingthrough the aperture of the member the unmasked workpiece to remove atleast a portion of such workpiece.3. The method of claim 1, comprising the further step of optically checkingthe thickness of the etched workpiece by transmitting infrared radiationthrough the workpiece and the fluid.4. A method of protecting a first portion of a workpiece from a deleterioussubstance, comprising:positioning the first portion of the workpiece on a non-deleterious fluidso as to leave no space between the workpiece and the fluid and to sealthe fluid to such first portion;retaining the workpiece on the fluid with a member having an opening; andapplying the deleterious substance through the opening to another portionof the workpiece, whereby the non-deleterious fluid sealed to the firstportion of the workpiece excludes the deleterious substance from suchfirst portion to thereby protect such first portion.5. The method of claim 4, wherein the non-deleterious fluid is a liquidtransparent to infrared radiation, the deleterious substance includesfumes and removes at least a part of the other portion of the workpiece,and the non-deleterious fluid excludes both the deleterious substance andits fumes from the first portion of the workpiece.6. A method of selectively thinning a portion of a substrate, comprisingthe steps of:filling a cavity in an etchant-resistant holding device with a quantity ofwater exceeding the volume of the cavity to form a meniscus of the waterat the top of the cavity;positioning the face of the substate on the water;exerting a force on the backside of a substrate opposite its face to forcethe quantity of the water exceeding the volume of the cavity to flow outof the cavity and over the outer edge of the device to thereby eliminatethe meniscus and leave no space between the face and the water and therebymask the face with the water;force-fitting a resilient, etchant-resistant top member having an aperturetherein over the outer edge of the holding device:"}
{"WKU":"039309150","Title":"Method of making an electrical article","App_Date":"1974-07-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Morris A. Mendelsohn;James D. B. Smith","Assignee":"Westinghouse Electric Corporation","ICL_Class":"H01B 1306","References":"2479417;2656290;3014980;3073004;3378630;3844860","Claims":"We claim:1. A method of making an electrical article comprisinga. lap-wrapping a conductor with a binding tape having a rough-texturedsurface which comprises a woven ribbon coated with a dry, non-tacky,non-pressure sensitive, swellable resin composition cured beyond theB-stage;b. immersing said wrapped conductor into a curable solventless impregnatingresin under pressure;c. removing said wrapped conductor from said solventless impregnatingresin; andd. curing said impregnating resin.2. A method according to claim 1 wherein said woven ribbon comprises glassfibers in the fill direction and flexible, thermally stable fibers havingan elongation of at least 2% in the warp direction.3. A method according to claim 1 wherein said ribbon is about 3 1/2 toabout 8 mils thick and about 1/4 to about 2 inches wide.4. A method according to claim 1 wherein said swellable resin compositionis about 110 to about 310% of the weight of said ribbon.5. A method according to claim 1 wherein said rough-texture of said tapeconstitutes hills and valleys where the hills are about 1 to about 6 milshigher than the valleys.6. A method according to claim 2 wherein said flexible, thermally stablefibers are polyethylene terephthalate.7. A method according to claim 1 wherein said swellable resin compositioncomprises 1 part by weight curable resin, about 0.03 to about 1.1 parts byweight filler, and about 0.014 to about 0.26 parts by weight swellaccelerator.8. A method according to claim 7 wherein said filler is selected from thegroup consisting of talc, silicon, powdered mica, calcium carbonate,calcium stearate, and mixtures thereof.9. A method according to claim 7 wherein said swell accelerator is castoroil.10. A method according to claim 1 wherein said swellable resin is apolyester resin.11. A method according to claim 10 wherein said polyester resin comprises1. one part by weight alkyd polyester comprising"}
{"WKU":"039309169","Title":"Heat resistant panels","App_Date":"1974-06-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Stanley John Shelley","Assignee":"Zirconal Processes Limited","ICL_Class":"C04B 4302","References":"1693015;2379155;2389622;2792051;2853394;3687093;3819468;3830892;3832815","Claims":"We claim:1. A method of manufacturing lining element modules for the hot-facesurface of a furnace or oven which comprises:dividing into laterally extending strips a sheet of refractory fibrousmaterial having fibers extending longitudinally parallel to the flat planeof the sheet,attaching the resulting strips to a support with the fibers in each strippositioned end-on to said support with an unhardened refractory cement,said support comprising:"}
{"WKU":"039309177","Title":"Low density laminated foam and process and apparatus for producing same","App_Date":"1974-09-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Michael D. Esakov;Arvid Honkanen","Assignee":"W. R. Grace & Co.","ICL_Class":"B32B  326","References":"3062698;3180778;3398035;3496058;3499819;3586574;3814659;3823047","Claims":"Having thus described our invention, we claim:1. A process for laminating covering material selected from the groupconsisting of paper and metal foil to foamed polystyrene sheet comprisingthe steps of:a. aging the thermoplastic foam sheet after it has been extruded;b. expanding the foam sheet in a steam atmosphere at a temperature in therange of 180.degree.F to 212.degree.F;c. further expanding said foam sheet by heating it outside of said steamatmosphere until the foam reaches the temperature in the range of180.degree. to 230.degree.F;d. heating said covering material until it is above the melting point ofthe foam; and,e. applying said heated covering material to the heated and softened foamsheet to bond said sheet to said foam thereby forming polystyrene foamlaminate.2. The process of claim 1 wherein the further expanding of said foam isaccomplished by passing the foam sheet through a radiant heat oven and theheating of said covering material is accomplished by passing the paperover rollers maintained in the temperature range of 350.degree. to550.degree.F.3. The process of claim 1 wherein said covering material is paper includingthe steps of providing and applying a second paper sheet to the opposedside of said softened foam sheet after said second sheet has been heatedabove the melting point of the foam.4. The process of claim 3 including the steps of providing and applying asecond heat softened foam sheet to said second paper sheet and thenapplying a third paper sheet heated above the melting point of the foam tosaid second foam sheet."}
{"WKU":"039309185","Title":"Method of preparing a steel cord for the measurement of stress therein","App_Date":"1974-04-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Bruce Milan Cernik","Assignee":"The Firestone Tire & Rubber Company","ICL_Class":"G01M 1702","References":"3245018;3662596","Claims":"I claim:1. A method of preparing a steel cord for the measurement of stress thereincomprising the steps of immersing a portion of the steel cord in a meltedsolder material thereby encapsulating the portion of the wire; permittingsaid solder to cool and solidify; forming at least one flat surface onsaid solder; placing a transducer having lead wires associated therewithon said flat surface so that stresses along the steel cord can bemonitored by said transducer; building said steel cord into a tire havingreinforcing cords therein by forming a channel in the tire by removing atleast one of the reinforcing cords, placing said steel cord in the channelso formed, and covering said steel cord to completely encapsulate the samein the tire; conducting said lead wires of said transducer through thetire to expose the same internally of the tire; and temporarily affixingsaid lead wires to the inside of the tire preparatory to curing of thetire by first wrapping the same in a starch impregnated cloth andthereafter placing a skim stack over said cloth and lead wires.2. A method according to claim 1 wherein at least two flat surfaces areformed on opposite sides of said solder and a transducer is placed on eachflat surface and connected in series to cancel out bending forces.3. A method according to claim 1 including the additional step of coatingsaid transducer with a protective material."}
{"WKU":"039309193","Title":"Preparation of a thermosetting resin article","App_Date":"1973-04-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Peter R. Chant;Albert W. de Ruyter VAN Steveninck","Assignee":"Shell Oil Company","ICL_Class":"B29D 2700","References":"3118800;3293094;3386878;3433700;3458337;3607341;3607593;3627603;3745040","Claims":"We claim as our invention:1. In the process of producing an article of thermosetting resin whichcomprisesa. impregnating a flexible, compressible, wettable sheet having anopen-cell structure with a curable thermosetting resin,b. applying a layer of fibrous reinforcing material to at least one side ofthe impregnated sheet,c. compressing the sheet and reinforcing layer to the extent that resin isexpelled from the sheet into the fibrous reinforcing layer and toimpregnate this layer with resin throughout its thickness, andd. allowing the resin in the sheet and layer to cure while maintaining thecompression,the improvement which comprises uniformly incorporating a gas release agentinto the curable thermosetting resin so that gas pressure is generatedwithin the impregnated sheet during compression of the sheet therebypromoting the expulsion of resin from the sheet into the reinforcinglayer.2. The process of claim 1 wherein said curable thermosetting resin is anepoxy resin with an epoxy resin curing agent."}
{"WKU":"039309207","Title":"Process of manufacturing tennis racket frames or the like","App_Date":"1975-02-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Karl Heinz Kicherer","Assignee":"Modicus Karl-Heinz Kicherer","ICL_Class":"B65C  326","References":"2593714;2878020;3256125;3755037","Claims":"What I claim is:1. A process of manufacturing frames for tennis rackets from afiber-reinforced plastic material in a mold including a pair ofcomplementary mold halves, each said mold half having an internal moldcavity substantially defining the contour of said racket frame, comprisingthe steps of:a. positioning a first layer of a plastic impregnated material in each saidmold cavity extending beyond the rim of said mold cavity; superimposing asecond layer of a uni-directionally oriented plastic strip material onsaid first layer;b. encompassing each of a pair of elastic, gas-impervious, heat resistanthollow tubes with a uni-directionally oriented plastic strip material;winding a further layer of a diagonally oriented plastic strip materialabout said uni-directionally oriented plastic strip material;c. positioning one said plastic material-encompassed tube withinrespectively each of said mold half cavities;d. filling the spaces intermediate said tubes and the surfaces of each ofsaid mold cavities with a hard foam member;e. folding the portions of said first plastic impregnated materialextending beyond said mold cavity rim about said hard foam member; andf. closing said mold halves; heating said mold while concurrentlypressurizing said tubes so as to polymerize the plastic material of thelayers while conforming to the shape of said mold cavities; andwithdrawing said elastic tube from said molded tennis racket frame.2. A process as claimed in claim 1, said uni-directionally oriented stripmaterial encompassing said hollow tube having the side edges thereof insubstantially contiguous relationship, the side edges of successivewindings of said diagonally oriented plastic strip material being inoverlapping relationship.3. A process as claimed in claim 1, comprising a foamable adhesive filmlayer being applied to at least one surface of said hard foam member.4. A process as claimed in claim 1, comprising embedding wear-resistantprofiled means along at least portions of the outer peripheral surface ofsaid racket frame.5. A process as claimed in claim 1, comprising interposing molding insertsbetween said mold halves to form apertures for subsequent stringing ofsaid molded racket frame, said inserts having enlarged width dimensionsalong portions thereof so as to form a continuous inwardly extendinggroove about the periphery of said molded tennis racket frame.6. A process as claimed in claim 1, said plastic material comprising alow-pressure prepreg material."}
{"WKU":"039309215","Title":"Method of finishing leather","App_Date":"1973-08-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hugh H. Connett","Assignee":"Barrett & Company","ICL_Class":"B32B 3120;B32B 2708;B32B 3112;D06P  332","References":"1843739;2029377;2126321;2606853;2795564;3276933;3328190;3458376;3473990;3713938;3794544","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method of finishing leather, which comprises:a. superimposing the leather substrate to be finished on a release layerhaving a releasable finish coating thereon, at least the outer stratum ofthe finish coating on said layer comprising a thermoplastic, adhesiveacrylic polymer coating adapted to be bonded to and permanently adhere tothe surface of the leather; said finish coating comprising a first stratumfor forming a base coat of the finish on the leather, said base coat beingconstituted of said thermoplastic, adhesive acrylic polymer coating; and asecond stratum for forming a top coat of the finish on the leather, saidtop coat being constituted of a hard non-tacky nitrocellulose lacquer;b. subjecting the superimposed layers to the application of heat andpressure to transfer the finish coating to the leather; andc. separating the release layer from the thus finished leather.2. The method of claim 1, wherein said base coat is substantially thickerthan said top coat whereby to impart sufficient flexibility to the finishcoating on the leather to prevent cracking thereof.3. The method of claim 1, wherein said thermoplastic, adhesive acrylicpolymer coating comprises an interpolymer made up of (A) units havingcarboxylate groups from at least one polymerizable alpha, beta-unsaturatedvinylidene carboxylic acid, (B) units from at least one polymerizableester which by itself forms soft polymers and which is selected from thegroup consisting of esters of acrylic acid and primary or secondaryalkanols having from 1 to 18 carbon atoms, esters of methacrylic acid andprimary or secondary alkanols having from 5 to 18 carbon atoms, and (C)units from at least one polymerizable monovinylidene compound which byitself forms a hard polymer and which is selected from the classconsisting of alkyl methacrylates in which the alkyl group has from 1 to 4carbon atoms, tert-amyl methacrylate, tert-butyl acrylate, tert-amylacrylate, cyclohexyl acrylate, and cyclohexyl methacrylate, thecarboxylated units constituting between 0.5 and 2.5% by weight of theinterpolymer and the ratio of units (B) from said ester to units (C) fromsaid compound being between 9:1 and 1:20.4. The method of claim 1, wherein the leather substrate to be finished issupported by a backing layer contacting said substrate, and wherein thefinish coating is transferred in step (b) from the release layer to thejuxtaposed surfaces of the leather substrate and the backing layer tothereby offset substantially all of the finish coating from the releaselayer.5. The method of claim 4, wherein the backing layer and the release layerare continuous supporting and transfer webs, respectively, and in whichthe leather substrate is finished by:a. placing the same on the supporting web and feeding said web with theleather substrate thereon into contact with the transfer web;b. transferring the finish coating from the transfer web to the juxtaposedsurfaces of the leather substrate and the supporting web;c. separating the transfer web from the supporting web and the finishcoated leather substrate; andd. removing the coated leather substrate from the supporting web.6. The method of claim 5, wherein the supporting web is constituted ofkraft paper and the transfer web is a paper coated on at least one sidewith a permanent release coating having the transferable finish coatingpre-coated thereon.7. The method of claim 6, wherein the transfer web is coated on both sideswith said permanent release coating.8. The method of claim 5, wherein the backing layer and the release layerare discrete sheet material articles having substantially the samedimensions and being secured to one another along an abutting edge of eachsaid article, and in which the backing and release layers are pressed intoa sandwich-like assembly with the leather substrate therebetween totransfer the finish coating from the release layer to the juxtaposedsurfaces of the leather substrate and the backing layer.9. The method of claim 8, wherein the backing layer is constituted of kraftpaper and the release layer is a paper coated on one side with a permanentrelease coating having the transferable finish coating pre-coated thereon."}
{"WKU":"039309223","Title":"Process control","App_Date":"1972-06-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John Francis Donoghue;Dan Edward Forney;Robert Lee Heiks;Gerald A. Lasson;Robert Eugene McCall;Charles Ray Rich","Assignee":"Industrial Nucleonics Corporation","ICL_Class":"B32B 3106","References":"1969232;2750986;3006225;3067939;3159516;3190261;3292208;3307215;3378676;3405267;3510374;3515860;3531827;3562500;3566092;3599288;3609318;3610897;3635627","Claims":"We claim:1. Apparatus for automatically controlling a tire calendar to maintain adesired thickness profile in a strip of laminated sheet material includingfirst and second layers of rubber and in intermediate layer of tire cord,in which said first layer of rubber is formed in a substantiallycontinuous fashion between a first pair of coacting calender rolls havingadjustable elements at either end thereof for adjusting the spacingbetween said first pair of rolls to vary the thickness of said first layerof rubber, and said second layer of rubber is formed in a substantiallycontinuous fashion between a second pair of coacting calender rolls havingadjustable elements at either end thereof for adjusting the spacingbetween said second pair of rolls to vary the thickness of said secondlayer of rubber, and in which said layer of tire cord is laminated betweensaid first and second layers of rubber by adjoining calender rolls, saidapparatus comprisingfirst measuring means located in a fixed position adjacent one of saidadjoining calender rolls at the input side thereof for providingindications of the thickness of said first layer of rubber,second measuring means located at the strip output side of said adjoiningcalender rolls for providing indications of the total thickness of saidstrip and being arranged to scan across said strip,means for averaging the indications of thickness provided by said firstmeasuring means to provide a first signal and for separately averaging theindications of thickness provided by said second measuring means toprovide a second signal,first comparison means for comparing the first signal indication of averagefirst layer thickness with a first layer target to provide a first layererror indication,first controller means responsive to said first layer error indication foractuating said adjustable elements associated with said first pair ofcoacting calender rolls to maintain said first layer thicknesssubstantially at said first layer target,means for coordinating the operation of said first and second measuringmeans and said averaging means, whereby said averaging means provides athird signal that provides an indication of average first layer thicknessfor a period of time substantially equal to the time required by saidsecond measuring means to traverse a selected portion of said strip toprovide the second signal indication of average total thickness, and saidtraversal by said second measuring means is delayed by an amount of timenecessary to ensure that the respective indications provided by said firstand second measuring means and separately averaged by said averaging meansto produce said second and third signals, respectively, are derived fromsubstantially the same longitudinal portion of said strip,combining means responsive to said third signal indication of average firstlayer thickness and said second signal indication of average totalthickness for providing a control signal representing the change inthickness of said layer required to maintain the total thickness of saidstrip at a total thickness target, andsecond controller means responsive to said control signal for actuatingsaid adjustable elements associated with said second pair of coactingcalender rolls, to maintain said total thickness substantially at saidtotal thickness target.2. Apparatus according to claim 1, wherein said second measuring meanstraverses substantially the entire width of said strip to provide saidindications of total thickness.3. Apparatus for automatically controlling a tire calender to maintain adesired thickness profile in a strip of laminated sheet material includingfirst and second layers of rubber and an intermediate layer of tire cord,in which said first layer of rubber is formed in a substantiallycontinuous fashion between a first pair of coacting calender rolls havingadjustable elements at either end thereof for adjusting the spacingbetween said first pair of rolls to vary the thickness of said first layerof rubber, and said second layer of rubber is formed in a substantiallycontinuous fashion between a second pair of coacting calender rolls havingadjustable elements at either end thereof for adjusting the spacingbetween said second pair of rolls to vary the thickness of said secondlayer of rubber, and in which said layer of tire cord is laminated betweensaid first and second layers of rubber by adjoining calender rolls, saidapparatus comprisingfirst measuring means located in a fixed position adjacent one of saidadjoining calender rolls at the input side thereof for providingindications of the thickness of said first layer of rubber,second measuring means located at the strip output side of said adjoiningcalender rolls for providing indications of the total thickness of saidstrip and being arranged to scan across said strip,means for averaging the indications of thickness provided by said firstmeasuring means to provide a first signal and for separately averaging theindications of thickness provided by said second measuring means, toprovide a second signal,first comparison means for comparing the first signal indication of averagefirst layer thickness with a first layer target to provide a first layererror indication,first controller means responsive to said first layer error indication foractuating said adjustable elements associated with said first pair ofcoacting calender rolls, to maintain said first layer thicknesssubstantially at said first layer target,means for coordinating the operation of said first and second measuringmeans and said averaging means, whereby said averaging means provides athird signal that provides an indication of average first layer thicknessfor a perior of time substantially equal to the time required by saidsecond measuring means to traverse a selected portion of said strip toprovide the second signal indication of average total thickness, and saidtraversal by said second measuring means is delayed by an amount of timenecessary to ensure that the respective indications provided by said firstand second measuring means and separately averaged by said averaging meansto produce said second and third signals, respectively, are derived fromsubstantially the same longitudinal portion of said strip,second comparison means for comparing said third signal indication ofaverage first layer thickness with said first layer target to provide anadditional first layer error indication,third comparison means for comparing said second signal indication ofaverage total thickness with a total thickness target to provide a totalerror indication for said laminated strip,fourth comparison means for comparing said third signal first layer errorindication with said total error indication to provide an error indicationfor said second layer, andsecond controller means responsive to said second layer error indicationfor actuating said adjustable elements associated with said second pair ofcoacting calender rolls, to maintain said total thickness substantially atsaid total thickness target.4. Apparatus according to claim 3, wherein said second measuring meanstraverses substantially the entire width of said strip to provide saidindications of total thickness.5. Apparatus for automatically controlling a tire calender to maintain adesired thickness profile in a strip of laminated sheet material includingfirst and second layers of rubber and an intermediate layer of tire cord,in which said first layer of rubber is formed in a substantiallycontinuous fashion between a first pair of coacting calender rolls havingadjustable elements at either end thereof for adjusting the spacingbetween said first pair of rolls to vary the thickness of said first layerof rubber, and said second layer of rubber is formed in a substantiallycontinuous fashion between a second pair of coacting calender rolls havingadjustable elements at either end thereof for adjusting the spacingbetween said second pair of rolls to vary the thickness of said secondlayer of rubber, and in which said layer of tire cord is laminated betweensaid first and second layers of rubber by adjoining calender rolls, saidapparatus comprisingfirst measuring means located in a fixed position adjacent one of saidadjoining calender rolls at the input side thereof for providingindications of the thickness of said first layer of rubber,second measuring means located at the strip output side of said adjoiningcalender rolls for providing indications of the total thickness of saidstrip and being arranged to scan across said strip,means for averaging the indications of thickness provided by said firstmeasuring means to provide a first signal and for separately averaging theindications of thickness provided by said second measuring means toprovide a second signal,first comparison means for comparing the first signal indication of averagefirst layer thickness with a first layer target to provide a first layererror indication,first controller means responsive to said first layer error indication foractuating said adjustable elements associated with said first pair ofcoacting calender rolls, to maintain said first layer thicknesssubstantially at said first layer target,means for coordinating the operation of said first and second measuringmeans and said averaging means, whereby said averaging means provides athird signal that provides an indication of average first layer thicknessfor a period of time substantially equal to the time required by saidsecond measuring means to traverse a selected portion of said strip toprovide the second signal indication of average total thickness, and saidtraversal by said second measuring means is delayed by an amount of timenecessary to ensure that the respective indications provided by said firstand second measuring means and separately averaged by said averaging meansto produce said second and third signals, respectively, are derived fromsubstantially the same longitudinal portion of said strip,means responsive to said third signal indication of first layer thicknessand to said second signal to provide a fifth signal that indicates theaverage combined thicknesses of said second layer and said tire cord, andsecond controller means responsive to said fifth signal indication foractuating said adjustable elements associated with said second pair ofcoacting calender rolls to maintain the combined thicknesses of saidsecond layer and said tire cord substantially at a second target, the sumof said first layer target and said second target being equal to a desiredthickness target, whereby said total thickness is maintained substantiallyat said total thickness target.6. Apparatus according to claim 5, wherein said second measuring meanstraverses substantially the entire width of said strip to provide saidindications of total thickness.7. Apparatus for automatically controlling a tire calender to maintain adesired thickness profile in a strip of laminated sheet material includingfirst and second layers of rubber and an intermediate layer of tire cord,in which said first layer of rubber is formed in a substantiallycontinuous fashion between a first pair of coacting calender rolls havingadjustable elements at either end thereof for adjusting the spacingbetween said first pair of rolls to vary the thickness of said first layerof rubber, and said second layer of rubber is formed in a substantiallycontinuous fashion between a second pair of coacting calender rolls havingadjustable elements at either end thereof for adjusting the spacingbetween said second pair of rolls to vary the thickness of said secondlayer of rubber, and in which said layer of tire cord is laminated betweensaid first and second layers of rubber by adjoining calender rolls, saidapparatus comprisingfirst measuring means located in a fixed position adjacent one of saidadjoining calender rolls at the input side thereof for providingindications of the thickness of said first layer of rubber,second measuring means located at the strip output side of said adjoiningcalender rolls for providing indications of the total thickness of saidstrip and being arranged to scan across said strip,means for averaging the indications of thickness provided by said firstmeasuring means to provide a first signal and for separately averaging theindications of thickness provided by said second measuring means toprovide a second signal,first comparison means for comparing the first signal indication of averagefirst layer thickness with a first layer target to provide a first layererror indication,first controller means responsive to said first layer thickness indicationfor actuating said adjustable elements associated with said first pair ofcoacting calender rolls to maintain said first layer thicknesssubstantially at said first layer target,means for coordinating the operation of said first and second measuringmeans and said averaging means, said coordinating means initiating saidaveraging means to provide a third signal indication of average firstlayer thickness measured by said first measuring means along the length ofthe strip and to provide said second signal indication of average totalthickness measured by said second measuring means along the same striplength portion,combining means responsive to said third signal indication of average firstlayer thickness and to said second signal indication of average totalthickness for providing a control signal representing the change inthickness of said second layer required to maintain the total thickness ofsaid strip at a total thickness target, andsecond controller means responsive to said second layer error indicationfor actuating said adjustable elements associated with said second pair ofcoacting calender rolls, to maintain said total thickness substantially atsaid total thickness target.8. Apparatus according to claim 7, wherein said second measuring meanstraverses substantially the entire width of said strip to provide saidindications of total thickness.9. Method for maintaining a desired thickness profile in a moving strip oflaminated sheet material produced in a tire calendering process, saidsheet material including a first layer of rubber, a second layer ofrubber, and an intermediate layer of tire cord, said method comprisingmeasuring the thickness of said first layer of rubber as it passes a pointprior to lamination with said second layer of rubber and said tire cord toprovide indications of the thickness of said first layer of rubber,measuring the total thickness of said laminated strip subsequent to thelamination of said first and second rubber layers with said first cord toprovide indications of the total thickness of said laminated strip at aplurality of transverse points on said strip,said first layer thickness measurement being made at a fixed, cross sheetlocation while the total thickness indications are beng measured at theplural points,averaging said indications of first layer thickness over a firstpredetermined time period to provide an indication of average first layerthickness,comparing said indication of average first layer thickness with a firstlayer target to provide a first layer error indication,controlling said first layer thickness substantially to said first layertarget in response to said first layer error indication,averaging said indications of total thickness provided at a substantialnumber of said plurality of transverse points during a secondpredetermined time period,averaging said indications of first layer thickness over a timesubstantially equal to said second predetermined time period to provide anadditional indication of average first layer thickness,initiating the averaging of said indications of total thickness after atime equal to the transport delay time between the locations along thestrip length at which the respective measurements of said first layer andsaid strip are made has elapsed since the initiation of averaging of saidindications of first layer thickness, so that the averaged indications offirst layer thickness and total thickness are derived from substantiallythe same longitudinal portion of the strip,combining said additional indication of average first layer thickness andsaid indication of average total thickness to provide a control signalrepresenting the change in thickness of said second layer required tomaintain the total thickness of said strip at a total thickness target,andcontrolling said second layer thickness in response to said control signalto maintain said total thickness substantially at said total thicknesstarget.10. Apparatus for automatically controlling a tire calender to maintain adesired thickness profile in a strip of laminated sheet material includingfirst and second layers of rubber and an intermediate layer of tire cord,in which said first layer of rubber is formed in a substantiallycontinuous fashion between a first pair of coacting calender rolls havingadjustable elements at either end thereof for adjusting the spacingbetween said first pair of rolls to vary the thickness of said first layerof rubber, and said second layer of rubber is formed in a substantiallycontinuous fashion between a second pair of coacting calender rolls havingadjustable elements at either end thereof for adjusting the spacingbetween said second pair of rolls to vary the thickness of said secondlayer of rubber, and in which said layer of tire cord is laminated betweensaid first and second layers of rubber by adjoining calender rolls, saidapparatus comprisingfirst measuring means located in a fixed position adjacent one of saidadjoining calender rolls at the input side thereof for providingindications of the thickness of said first layer of rubber,second measuring means located at the strip output side of said adjoiningcalender rolls for providing indications of the total thickness of saidstrip and being arranged to scan across said strip,means for averaging the indications of thickness provided by said firstmeasuring means to produce first and second signals and for separatelyaveraging the indications of thickness provided by said second measuringmeans to produce a third signal,first comparison means for comparing said first signal indication ofaverage first layer thickness with a first layer target to provide a firstlayer error indication,first controller means responsive to said first layer error indication foractuating said adjustable elements associated with said first pair ofcoacting calender rolls to maintain said first layer thicknesssubstantially at said first layer target,means for coordinating the operation of said first and second measuringmeans and said averaging means, whereby said averaging means second signalprovides an indication of average first layer thickness for a period oftime substantially equal to the time required by said second measuringmeans to traverse a selected portion of said strip to provide said secondsignal indication of average total thickness, and said traversal by saidsecond measuring means is delayed by an amount of time necessary to ensurethat the respective indications provided by said first and secondmeasuring means for said second signal and said third signal andseparately averaged by said averaging means are derived from substantiallythe same longitudinal portion of said strip,combining means responsive to said second signal indication of averagefirst layer thickness provided through the action of said coordinatingmeans and to said third signal indication of average total thickness forproviding a control signal representing the change in thickness of saidsecond layer required to maintain the total thickness of said strip at atotal thickness target, andsecond controller means responsive to said control signal for actuatingsaid adjustable elements associated with said second pair of coactingcalender rolls, to maintain said total thickness substantially at saidtotal thickness target.11. Apparatus according to claim 10, wherein said second measuring meanstraverses substantially the entire width of said strip to provide saidindications of total thickness.12. Apparatus for automatically controlling a tire calender to maintain adesired thickness profile in a strip of laminated sheet material includingfirst and second layers of rubber and an intermediate layer of tire cord,in which said first layer of rubber is formed in a substantiallycontinuous fashion between a first pair of coacting calender rolls havingadjustable elements at either end thereof for adjusting the spacingbetween said first pair of rolls to vary the thickness of said first layerof rubber, and said second layer of rubber is formed in a substantiallycontinuous fashion between a second pair of coacting calender rolls havingadjustable elements at either end thereof for adjusting the spacingbetween said second pair of rolls to vary the thickness of said secondlayer of rubber, and in which said layer of tire cord is laminated betweensaid first and second layers of rubber by adjoining calender rolls, saidapparatus comprisingfirst measuring means located in a fixed position adjacent one of saidadjoining calender rolls at the input side thereof for providingindications of the thickness of said first layer of rubber,second measuring means located at the strip output side of said adjoiningcalender rolls for providing indications of the total thickness of saidstrip and being arranged to scan across said strip,first means for averaging the indications of thickness provided by saidfirst measuring means to provide a first signal,second means for averaging the indications of thickness provided by saidsecond measuring means to provide a second signal,third means for averaging the indications of thickness provided by saidfirst measuring means to provide a third signal, said third averagingmeans being capable of averaging said indications at more frequent timeintervals than said first averaging means,first comparison means responsive to said third signal for comparing anindication of average first layer thickness with a first layer target toprovide a first layer error indication,first controller means responsive to said first layer error indication foractuating said adjustable elements associated with said first pair ofcoacting calender rolls, to maintain said first layer thicknesssubstantially at said first layer target,means for coordinating the operation of said first and second measuringmeans and said first and second averaging means, whereby said first signalprovides an indication of average first layer thickness for a period oftime substantially equal to the time required by said second measuringmeans to traverse a selected portion of said strip and said second signalprovides an indication of average total thickness, and said traversal bysaid second measuring means is delayed by an amount of time necessary toensure that the respective indications provided by said first and secondmeasuring means and separately averaged by said first and second averagingmeans are derived from substantially the same longitudinal portion of saidstrip,Combining means responsive to said first signal indication of average firstlayer thickness provided by said first averaging means and to said secondsignal indication of average total thickness provided by said secondaveraging means for providing a control signal representing the change inthickness of said second layer required to maintain the total thickness ofsaid strip at a total thickness target, andsecond controller means responsive to said control signal for actuatingsaid adjustable elements associated with said second pair of coactingcalender rolls, to maintain said total thickness substantially at saidtotal thickness target, whereby said first controller means is capable ofmore frequent control actuations than said second controller means.13. Apparatus according to claim 12, wherein said second measuring meanstraverses substantially the entire width of said strip to provide saidindications of total thickness."}
{"WKU":"039309231","Title":"Nylon extrusion coating","App_Date":"1972-10-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Bentley W. Elliott","Assignee":"Milprint, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B29F  308","References":"3075864;3154608;3371002;3374303;3387068;3570748;3697368","Claims":"While this invention has been described with reference to certain specificembodiments in order to illustrate its practice, it is expected that thoseskilled in the art will be able to devise other changes that will bewithin the spirit and scope of this invention as set forth in the appendedclaims.1. An extrusion coating process for the production of flexible packagingfilms of nylon coated substrates consisting of the steps of:1. heating nylon in an extruder to a melt temperature of 450.degree. to550.degree.F, and discharging the nylon as a molten web through anextruder die onto the periphery of a rotating chill roll;2. arranging the extrusion die at an angle to the chill roll such that themolten nylon web is perpendicular to the lips of the extrusion die when itleaves the die and, further, such that the molten nylon web tangentiallycontacts the surface of the chill roll;3. subjecting the zone between the molten nylon web and the underlyingsurface of the chill roll to sub-atmospheric pressure;4. rapidly cooling the extruded nylon on the surface of the chill roll tounder 200.degree.F to form a nylon web with a volume crystallinity of 35%or less; then5. withdrawing the cooled nylon web from the chill roll, and thereafterjoining the nylon to a substrate web to thereby form the completedpackaging film.2. The process of claim 1, wherein:the nylon is cooled to a temperature below 150.degree.F on the chill roll.3. The process of claim 1, wherein:the zone between the molten nylon web and the underlying surface of thechill roll is subjected to sub-atmospheric pressure of 1 to 2 below theambient atmospheric pressure.4. The process of claim 1, including the step of:cooling the surface of the chill roll to about 90.degree.F to 120.degree.F.5. The process of claim 1, including the step of:subjecting a surface of the nylon web to corona discharge treatment afterit is withdrawn from the chill roll and before it is joined to thesubstrate, and then joining the treated surface of the nylon web to thesubstrate.6. The process of claim 1, wherein:the nylon is cooled on the chill roll to a volume crystallinity of about23%."}
{"WKU":"039309240","Title":"Process for making identification cards","App_Date":"1973-02-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Satoshi Oka;Tawara Junro;Akira Ohmameuda;Kazumasa Uda","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B32B 3118;B32B 3120;B44C  122","References":"2699720;2881246;2986598;3217643;3578538","Claims":"We claim:1. A method for manufacturing an identification card comprising the stepsof:forming a base material,forming a colored layer, having a color different from the color of thebase material, on at least a portion of the base material,heating and pressing the base material and the colored layer together toembed the colored layer into the base material and integrate it to thebase material thereby forming a final flat card ready to be engraved,and engraving to varying depths a portion of the colored layer and part ofthe base material under the colored layer with an engraving machine tocreate an engraved image.2. The method of claim 1 wherein the engraved portion of the colored layerand part of the base material is in the form of fine lines.3. The method of claim 1 wherein the engraved portion of the colored layerand part of the base material is in the form of points.4. The method of claim 1 wherein the engraved portion of the colored layerand part of the base material is in the form of fine lines and points.5. The method of claim 1 wherein the step of forming the colored layer isachieved by printing.6. The method of claim 1 wherein the step of forming the colored layer isachieved by painting.7. The method of claim 1 wherein the step of forming the colored layer isachieved by laminating a film of colored resin to the base material.8. The method of claim 1 wherein the step of forming the colored layer isachieved by impregnating a coloring agent into said portion of the basematerial."}
{"WKU":"039309258","Title":"Master plate treating device for a duplicating machine","App_Date":"1974-10-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Masanori Yamanaka","Assignee":"Ricoh Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"C23F  102","References":"2604024;2803078;3647596","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A master plate treating device comprising:a closed path having an inlet for introducing a developed master platetherethrough into the closed path and an outlet for discharging saidmaster plate from the closed path after subjecting the same to selectedtreatments and permitting the master plate to move therethrough;heating means mounted in one portion of said closed path interposed betweensaid inlet and said outlet for heating the master plate passing throughsaid one portion of the closed path;ink-repellent etching solution applying means mounted in another portion ofsaid closed path interposed between said inlet and said outlet forapplying an ink-repellent etching solution to the master plate passingthrough said another portion of the closed path;means disposed in the vicinity of said outlet for switching the masterplate between two directions, one direction leading to said outlet and theother direction permitting the master plate to move further on in saidclosed path; andmeans for controlling said for switching the master plate.2. A device as in claim 1 further comprising means disposed outside saidinlet for introducing a master plate into said closed path through theinlet when the master plate is brought to a stand-by position for entranceinto the closed path after being developed.3. A device as in claim 2 further comprising means for rendering thetreating device operative when the developed master plate is brought tosaid stand-by position.4. A device as in claim 2 wherein said introducing means comprises adelivery member adapted to move in reciprocating motion and to engage atrailing end of the master plate to deliver the same into the closed paththrough the inlet."}
{"WKU":"039309266","Title":"Apparatus for forming tubular fibrous insulatory articles","App_Date":"1973-07-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Romain Eugene Loeffler","Assignee":"Johns-Manville Corporation","ICL_Class":"B30B  304;B29J  100","References":"2165280;2331146;2503041;2509715;3063887;3140968;3347725","Claims":"I claim:1. In an appartus for forming a tubular shaped article from a continuousfibrous blanket having a binder therein, said blanket having a thick bodyportion and at least one feathered longitudinal edge portion generallyparalleling its direction of advance, including a mandrel for winding saidblanket around to form said tubular article, a pressure roll forforcefully bearing against said blanket while it is being wrapped aroundsaid mandrel, and a conveyor for conveying said blanket to said mandrel,the improvement comprising:means for gathering said feathered edge portion, for displacing said edgeportion towards said thick body portion without severing the blanket, andfor forming regular ends having a more uniform density on said tubulararticle, said gathering, displacing, and end-forming means comprising atleast one forming member pivotally mounted in the path of said blanket ata point in the path before said blanket reachs said mandrel, said formingmember having a first surface extending parallel to the direction ofadvance of the blanket and inclined to a major face of said blanket at afirst obtuse angle, a second surface in the form of an ear contiguous withsaid first surface and inclined with respect to the advance of the blanketat a second obtuse angle, said second surface being inclined with respectto the face of the blanket a greater degree than said first surface, and athird surface lying in a plane perpendicular to the axis of said mandreland defining a tube end forming face, said first surface extending aroundsaid pressure roll from a location in advance of where said blanketcontacts said roll to a point where said feathered edge has been gatheredand displaced toward said thick body portion, said second surface beingcontiguous with and located downstream from said first surface, and saidthird surface being adjacent to said pressure roll at a point downstreamfrom said second surface.2. The apparatus as defined in claim 1 wherein the first surface of saidforming member is in the shape of a sector of a frustum of a cone.3. The apparatus as defined in claim 2 wherein the ear extends across thewidth of said conical sector and projects outwardly therefrom with aleading edge facing upstream of the moving blanket and a trailing edgefacing downstream.4. An apparatus as defined in claim 2 wherein the ear has a surfaceextending outwardly toward the end of said pressure roll to gather in anyfringe of the feathered edge of said blanket.5. An apparatus as defined in claim 2 wherein said leading and trailingedges are of a shape accommodating the natural fall of displacement ofsaid feathered edge and said ear has an additional directing surfaceinclined towards said thick body portion.6. An apparatus as defined in claim 2 wherein the ear converges inconjunction with the first surface with respect to the direction ofadvance of the blanket, is essentially perpendicular to the major face ofthe blanket, and has generally vertically extending leading and trailingedges.7. An apparatus as defined in claim 1 wherein the pivotally mounted formingmember is eccentrically mounted in such a manner that said forming memberhas the tendency to swing towards said mandrel."}
{"WKU":"039309274","Title":"Tape dispenser for double-coated tape","App_Date":"1974-05-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Dorman N. Thompson;Aldon W. Haglund","Assignee":"Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company","ICL_Class":"B32B 3118;B32B 3500","References":"2468619;3117051;3764439;R25056;R28010","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An apparatus for dispensing discrete lengths of double-coated adhesivetape onto a substrate comprising:a housing having one open side;an applicating drum rotatably mounted in and near one end of said housing,said drum having a plurality of flat applicating surfaces disposed aboutthe circumference thereof;means for supporting a supply of double-coated adhesive tape in saidhousing near the opposite end of said housing, said applicating drum andsaid tape being positioned whereby tape from said supply roll contactssaid drum at a tape receiving position remote from a tape applyingposition where said tape is applied to said substrate, said supply beingadapted to feed a continuous length of tape to said applicating drum;a base pivotally attached to the housing adjacent said opposite end andextending along the open side of said housing, the base having an end withan opening adjacent said one end of said housing through which a singleapplicating surface can pass;means attached to said housing and said base to bias said one end of saidhousing away from said base;means for rotating said applicating wheel upon movement of said one end ofsaid housing toward and away from said base to bring an applicatingsurface bearing double-coated tape into an applicating position;registering means to position said applicating surface in registry with theopening in said base; andcutting means for severing the double-coated tape on said applicatingsurface from the supply of tape;whereby as the apparatus is activated, a severed length of tape is exposedin said opening and transferred to said substrate.2. The apparatus of claim 1 where said means for rotating said applicatingwheel comprises:a plurality of pins disposed on and axially projecting from the sides ofsaid drum; anda pawl mounted on said base extending into said housing and having a detentadapted for engaging said pins so that when said end of said base and saidone end of said housing are moved toward and away from each other saiddetent will engage one of said pins thereby rotating said applicatingdrum.3. A device of claim 1 where said cutting means comprises a plurality ofevenly spaced slots extending into said drum and a cutting blade mountedon said base and positioned opposite said drum so that as said base ismoved toward said housing, said blade will enter one of said slotssevering said tape thereacross.4. A device of claim 1 where said applicating surfaces are knurled therebylessening the adhesion of said double-coated tape to said applicatingsurface.5. An apparatus for dispensing discrete lengths of double-coated adhesivetape onto a substrate comprising:a housing having one open side;an applicating drum rotatably mounted in and near one end of said housing,said drum having a plurality of flat applicating surfaces disposed aboutthe circumference thereof and a plurality of slots extending across thewidth of said drum evenly spaced about the circumference of said drum;a base pivotally mounted to said housing adjacent the end thereof oppositesaid one end, said base having an opening in an end thereof opposite saidpivotal mounting through which an applicating surface can pass;means for supporting a supply of convolutely wound double-coated adhesivetape adjacent said opposite end of said housing, said means being adaptedto feed a continuous length of tape to said applicating roller, said tapemaking contact with said applicating drum at a point remote from the pointat which said applicating surface will apply said tape to a substrate;a plurality of pins disposed on and projecting axially from the sides ofsaid applicating roller;a pawl mounted on said base extending into said housing and having detentmeans for successively engaging said pins;a cutting blade mounted on said base, said blade being positioned at theend of said base opposite said pivotal mounting to engage said slots tosever said double-coated tape into discrete lengths; andmeans positioned between said housing and said base for biasing said oneend of said housing away from said base into an open position;whereby when said base and said housing are pivoted relative to each other,said pawl engages one of said pins rotating said applicating drum untilone of said flat applicating surfaces having tape disposed thereon is inline with said opening in said base, and said cutting blade will seversaid tape allowing said tape to be applied to a substrate by saidapplicating surface."}
{"WKU":"039309282","Title":"Automatic cover slipper for microscope slides","App_Date":"1974-07-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Thomas J. Tapert","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B32B 3112;G02B 2134","References":"3480504;3715258;3833449;3834966","Claims":"I claim:1. In an automatic cover slipper for microscope slides; a base with spacedupright end walls;guide means above said base interconnecting said walls;a manually reciprocating slide on said guide means having an advanced and aretracted position;there being a pair of parallel spaced transverse slots in said base adaptedto receive a microscope slide, and a stack of slide covers respectively;a slide cover lifter assembly on said reciprocating slide including adepending suction cup overlying and in the advanced position of saidreciprocating slide adapted for engaging registry with a slide cover forlifting it off the stack;a cement dispenser assembly on said reciprocating slide spacedlongitudinally of said lifter assembly, mounting a cement reservoir andincluding a control valve adapted to deliver a drop of cement upon saidmicroscope slide; said lifting assembly on movement of the reciprocatingslide to retracted position adapted to transfer the slide cover intoregistry with the microscope slide and for dropping the slide cover intojuxtaposition thereon;said slide cover lifter assembly including a lifter guide sleeve securedupon said reciprocating slide; there being a bore and a counter-bore inthe reciprocating slide in axial registry with said sleeve;a spring in said counter bore;a lifter tube guidably projected through said sleeve and yieldably mountedon said spring, supporting said suction cup at its lower end;and an apertured handle upon the upper end of said tube, said handleaperture communicating with the lifter tube and suction cup.2. In the cover slipper of claim 1, a slide stop on said guide meanslimiting forward movement of the reciprocating slide to advanced position;one end wall limiting return movement of the reciprocating slide toretracted position.3. In the cover slipper of claim 1, said guide means including a pair ofparallel spaced rods between said walls; said reciprocating slide having acorresponding pair of longitudinal bores receiving said rods.4. In the cover slipper of claim 1, the slot in said base for said slidecovers being closed at its ends holding said covers against longitudinaland transverse movements; the base slot for said microscope slide beingopen at its outer end to facilitate loading and unloading.5. In the cover slipper of claim 1, said suction cup having an aperturedshank connected to said tube in communication with the bore of said tube;manual lowering of said tube flexing said suction cup against a slidecover, said spring adapted to retract said tube and suction cup with thebore of said tube closed manually, whereby on movement of thereciprocating slide to retracted position, and manual lowering of saidtube and suction cup, the bore of said tube when opened permitting thetransported slide cover to drop upon said microscope slide.6. In the cover slipper of claim 5, the rim of said suction cup lying in aplane inclined at an acute angle to the tube axis, so that the cover whenlifted lies in a corresponding plane whereby the cover when deposited uponthe microscope slide folds over into registry therewith preventing airentrapment between the cover and microscope slide.7. In an automatic cover slipper for microscope slides; a base with spacedupright end walls;guide means above said base interconnecting said walls;a manually reciprocating slide on said guide means having an advanced and aretracted position;there being a pair of parallel spaced transverse slots in said base adaptedto receive a microscope slide, and a stack of slide covers respectively;a slide cover lifter assembly on said reciprocating slide including adepending suction cup overlying and in the advanced position of saidreciprocating slide adapted for engaging registry with a slide cover forlifting it off the stack;a cement dispenser assembly on said reciprocating slide spacedlongitudinally of said lifter assembly, mounting a cement reservoir andincluding a control valve adapted to deliver a drop of cement upon saidmicroscope slide; said lifting assembly on movement of the reciprocatingslide to retracted position adapted to transfer the slide cover intoregistry with the microscope slide and for dropping the slide cover intojuxtaposition thereon;said cement dispenser assembly including an upright cylindrical bodymounted on and projected through said reciprocating slide;said reservoir including a bottle of cement inverted with its necksupported within the upper end of said body;said control valve being a ball check valve within said body;a bellows suspended within said body having a chamber adapted to receivecement from said bottle;a vertically adjustable end plate on said bellows mounted on and dependingfrom said body, having an outlet;an apertured adapter mounted over said outlet and including a dependingapertured dispenser needle;a bellows actuator on said reciprocal slide operably engageable with saidadjustable bellows end plate for momentarily compressing the bellows andexpelling a measured quantity of cement through said needle;said bellows actuator including a transverse rock shaft journalled uponsaid reciprocating slide;a cantilever secured to said rock shaft and having a bifurcated endoperatable registerable with said bellows end plate;a control arm secured to and depending from said rock shaft;and a stop on said base in the path of forward movement of said controlarm, whereby when the reciprocating slide is moved to advance position,the arm is tilted by said stop actuating said cantilever and expelling adrop of cement down onto the microscope slide."}
{"WKU":"039309290","Title":"Apparatus to construct wall panels having openings for doors and windows","App_Date":"1974-05-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hans Lingl","Assignee":"Lingl Corporation","ICL_Class":"B32B 3104;E04B 0100;E04B 0202","References":"2241898;2639608;3039233;3350833;3503174;3585092;3789101;3790428;3849228","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An apparatus for the production of wall panels having openings for doorsand windows by perpendicular superposition of rows of blocks wherein saidblocks have mortar disposed between both their horizontal and verticalfaces in which said apparatus comprises:a. a conveying means adapted to support and transport a row of blocks;b. means for aligning said blocks with their intended vertical faceshorizontally oriented;c. first applying means for applying mortar of a predetermined thicknessonto the intended vertical faces of said blocks;d. means for turning said blocks by 90.degree. after passage from saidfirst applying means whereby the intended vertical faces are orientedvertically and the intended horizontal faces are oriented horizontally;e. means for bringing the intended vertical faces together to form verticaljoints;f. second applying means for applying mortar of a predetermined thicknessonto said intended horizontal faces of said turned blocks;g. second aligning means disposed adjacent to an end section of saidconveying means for aligning portions of a row of blocks into groups whichform piers when rows of blocks comprising said groups are stacked on topof another; andh. means for transporting a predetermined number of said blocks onto ahorizontal support so that a row of a wall panel of such blocks is formed.2. An apparatus as described in claim 1 wherein a third applying means isdisposed adjacent to said conveying means for applying mortar of apredetermined thickness to additional blocks which are inserted onto theconveying means subsequent to said turning means.3. An apparatus as described in claim 1 wherein said second aligning meanscomprises a plurality of sighting levels each operatively engaged with astop, said sighting levels and stops being secured to a pivot arm arrangedto pivot said sighting levels and stops to engage groups of blocks andalign them according to predetermined orientations, said pivot arm alsobeing operative to pivot said sighting levels and stops to a position sothat said means for transporting can lift the blocks off of the endsection of said conveying means.4. An apparatus as described in claim 3 wherein said means for transportingis disposed on a frame which is movable over a floor surface or the like,said frame enabling said means for transporting to lift blocks off of saidconveying means and stack said blocks into wall panels, said wall panelsbeing produced in a line one after another.5. An apparatus as described in claim 3 wherein means for introducinglintels onto said conveying means is disposed adjacent to said conveyingmeans at a position following said turning means."}
{"WKU":"039309304","Title":"Apparatus for manufacturing a laminate by means of a solventless adhesive","App_Date":"1974-06-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Rudiger De Keyser;Andre Depuydt","Assignee":"U.C.B. Societe Anonyme","ICL_Class":"B05C  108;B32B 3112;C09J  500","References":"2089524;2333629;2882179;3023128;3647525;3661626","Claims":"We claim:1. An apparatus for manufacturing a laminate having a width of at least 30cm. by means of a solventless adhesive, said apparatus comprising:an adhesive distributor means including a predosing element and anelastic-surfaced rotating element adjacent said predosing element;means for rotating said elastic-surfaced rotating element;means for continuously supplying solventless adhesive at a predeterminedrate to said distributor means between said elastic-surfaced rotatingelement and said predosing element, and for applying all of saidsolventless adhesive from said predosing element to said elastic-surfacedrotating element in a layer having a thickness of from 5 to 50 microns;means for moving with respect to said elastic-surfaced rotating element afirst film at a linear speed of from 10 to 50 times the circumferentialspeed of said elastic-surfaced rotating element, and for transferring allof said layer of solventless adhesive from said elastic-surfaced rotatingelement to said first film in a coating having a thickness of from 0.5 to5 microns; andmeans for bonding said thus coated first film to a second film to form alaminate.2. An apparatus as claimed in claim 1, wherein said predosing element isfixed.3. An apparatus as claimed in claim 1, wherein said predosing element ismade of metal.4. An apparatus as claimed in claim 1, wherein said predosing element isrotatably mounted and is provided with drive means.5. An apparatus as claimed in claim 1, further comprising an intermediaterotatable cylinder of smooth-surfaced rigid material interposed betweensaid elastic-surfaced rotating element and the path of the film to becoated, drive means for rotating said intermediate rotating cylinder, saidmeans for rotating the elastic-surfaced rotating element and the drivemeans of the intermediate rotating cylinder being so adjustable that theircircumferential speeds will be in a ratio of from 1:10 to 1:50.6. An apparatus as claimed in claim 1, further comprising an intermediaterotatable cylinder of smooth-surfaced rigid material interposed betweensaid elastic-surfaced rotating element and the path of the film to becoated, drive means for rotating said intermediate rotating cylinder, saidmeans for rotating the elastic-surfaced element and the drive means of theintermediate rotating cylinder being so adjustable that theircircumferential speeds will be in a ratio of from 1:10 to 1:50; andwherein said means for moving said first film is so adjustable that thespeed of displacement of said first film will be equal to thecircumferential speed of the intermediate rotating cylinder.7. An apparatus as claimed in claim 1, further comprising an intermediaterotatable cylinder of smooth-surfaced rigid material interposed betweensaid elastic-surfaced rotating element and the path of the film to becoated, drive means for rotating said intermediate rotating cylinder, saidmeans for rotating the elastic-surfaced rotating element and the drivemeans of the intermediate rotating cylinder being so adjustable that theircircumferential speeds will be in a ratio of from 1:10 to 1:50; andwherein said means for moving said first film is so adjustable that thespeed of displacement of the film will be higher than the circumferentialspeed of the intermediate rotating cylinder.8. An apparatus as claimed in claim 1, wherein said elastic-surfacedrotating element is a metal cylinder, the surface of which is providedwith a covering of natural or synthetic rubber.9. An apparatus as claimed in claim 1, further comprising acounter-cylinder adapted to press said first film against saidelastic-surfaced rotating element.10. An apparatus as claimed in claim 1, further comprising acounter-cylinder adapted to press said first film against saidelastic-surfaced rotating element, said counter-cylinder being providedwith an elastic surface."}
{"WKU":"039309312","Title":"Apparatus and method for stripping styrene from an aqueous dispersion of","App_Date":"1974-06-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Lawrence C. Baughman","Assignee":"The General Tire & Rubber Company","ICL_Class":"B01D  116;B01D  122","References":"2572321;2726198;2925127;3365808;3453184;3469617;3512570;3630262;3815655","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In apparatus adapted to remove a volatile material from an aqueousdispersion of particles of a polymeric material wherein the volatilematerial has a boiling point higher than the water phase of suchdispersion, such as for removing styrene from an aqueous latex dispersionof a styrene-butadiene polymer, the combination comprising:a. a vaporous mixture contacting tube means requiring no external heatingand defining an elongated and substantially open and unrestrictedpressurable contacting chamber;b. mixing means connected with one end of said contacting tube means andadapted to mix said dispersion in heated condition with a hot strippinggas to form a vaporous mixture and to inject said vaporous mixture intosaid contacting chamber to form a turbulent flow of said vaporous mixturethrough said chamber with said vaporous mixture being maintained at atemperature range of about 212.degree.F-270.degree.F(100.degree.C-132.degree.C) and at a selected pressure above about 5 psig(35 KPa);c. said contacting chamber being of width selected to permit substantiallyunrestricted flow and minimum pressure drop of the turbulent flow of saidvaporous mixture through said chamber and of length selected to permit anoptimum approach to substantially equilibrium saturation of said volatilematerial into said stripping gas;d. post contacting tube means connected into a standard flash separatormeans having vacuum producing means adapted to maintain said postcontacting tube means and the chamber of said separator means at a vacuumof about 15-25 inches (38-64 cm) of mercury to separate said volatilematerial along with said stripping gas from said aqueous dispersion;e. flow throttling discharge nozzle means connected between said vaporousmixture contacting tube means and said post contacting tube means andadapted to discharge said vaporous mixture from said contacting chamberinto said post contacting tube means with the size of said nozzle meansbeing selected to cause said vaporous mixture to discharge and expand intothe vacuum within said post contacting tube means with an explosiveexpansion action and also to maintain said selected pressure within saidcontacting chamber in combined action with said mixing means;f. means for removing said aqueous dispersion separated as a liquid fromsaid separator means and for separately removing said volatile materialalong with said stripping gas from said separator means.2. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein the size of said discharge nozzle meansis selected to discharge said mixture through said discharge nozzle with adifferential pressure of at least about 15 psi (105 KPa) existing betweensaid chamber and said post contacting tube means.3. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said contacting tube means is inproportion of about 5 inches (12.7 cm) in width and about 10 to 30 feet(3.05-9.15 m) in length.4. The apparatus of claim 3 wherein said mixing means and said flowdischarge means are adapted in combination to form the turbulent flow ofsaid vaporous mixture in a temperature range of about 212.degree. -270.degree. F. (100.degree.  - 132.degree. C.) and at a pressure aboveabout 5 psig (35 KPa) and wherein said separator means is adapted tomaintain a vacuum in the range of about 15-25 inches (38-64 cm) ofmercury.5. The apparatus of claim 3 wherein said vaporous mixture contacting tubemeans includes one or more U-tubes defining a portion of said contactingchamber.6. The apparatus of claim 3 wherein said mixing means and said flowdischarge means are adapted in combination to form the turbulent flow ofsaid vaporous mixture in a temperature range of about 212.degree. -270.degree.F. (100.degree. - 132.degree.C.) and at a pressure above about5 psig (35 KPa).7. The apparatus of claim 6 wherein the size of said discharge nozzle meansis selected to discharge said mixture through said discharge nozzle with adifferential pressure of at least about 15 psi (105 KPa) existing betweensaid chamber and said post contacting tube means."}
{"WKU":"039309320","Title":"Process for sizing cellulose fibre containing material","App_Date":"1974-01-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James Axel Christer Bjorklund;Karin Ulla Elisabet Helmer","Assignee":"Kemanord AB","ICL_Class":"D21D  300","References":"3008978;3492081;3499824;3501523","Claims":"We claim:1. In the known process for sizing cellulose fibers in aqueous suspensionor for sizing paper products containing cellulose fibers which comprisestreating the cellulose fibers with an amount of a carbamoyl chloride whichis sufficient to effect sizing of the cellulose fibers, said carbamoylchloride having the general formula##EQU1##wherein R.sub.1 is an organic hydrophobic group and R.sub.2 is a loweralkyl group or has the same meaning as R.sub.1, the improvement whichcomprises combining with the carbamoyl chloride a material selected fromthe group consisting of alkyl chloroformates or alkyl isocyanates, whereinthe alkyl chain in each instance contains 8 - 40 carbon atoms, the ratioof the carbamoyl chloride to chloroformate or the ratio of the carbamoylchloride to the isocyanate being within the range of from about 1:0.5 to1:1.2. A composition for sizing cellulose fibers in aqueous suspension or paperproducts containing cellulose fibers comprising a water dispersion ofa. an emulsifier in an emulsifying amount,b. a carbamoyl chloride as sizing agent, andc. a material selected from the group consisting of alkyl chloroformates oralkyl isocyanates, wherein the alkyl chain in each instance contains 8-40carbon atoms and where the ratio of carbamoyl chloride to chloroformate orisocyanate respectively is within the range of from about 1:0.05 to 1:1."}
{"WKU":"039309339","Title":"Debonded cellulose fiber pulp sheet and method for producing same","App_Date":"1970-11-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Donald K. George;Joseph H. Angel","Assignee":"Riegel Textile Corporation","ICL_Class":"D21D  300","References":"1864833;2110032;3395708;3554862","Claims":"We claim:1. A debonded cellulose fiber pulp sheet that is adapted to be fiberizedeasily by mechanical action to form a fluffy, lofty and absorbent fibrousmaterial, said sheet being impregnated with an admixture of a long chainfatty alkyl cationic compound having at least 12 carbon atoms in at leastone alkyl chain, and a natural non-drying oil which has no adverse effecton the pulp and which per se does not effect debonding of the fibers butcoacts with the cationic compound to effect debonding of the fibers of thepulp sheet and thereby render it easily fiberizable.2. A debonded cellulose fiber pulp sheet as defined in claim 1 and in whichthe amount of cationic compound is less than 1% and the oil is in anamount greater than 1% of the dry weight of the pulp sheet.3. A debonded cellulose fiber sheet as defined in claim 1 and in which thecationic compound is a long chain fatty quaternary ammonium compound.4. A debonded cellulose fiber pulp sheet as defined in claim 1 and in whichthe oil is a natural non-drying mineral oil.5. A method of producing an easily fiberizable pulp sheet comprisingintroducing into the pulp before the sheet is dried, an admixture of along chain fatty alkyl cationic compound having at least 12 carbon atomsin at least one alkyl chain, and a natural non-drying oil which has noadverse effect on the pulp and which per se does not effect debonding ofthe fibers but coacts with the cationic compound to effect debonding ofthe fibers of the pulp sheet and thereby render it easily fiberizable, andthen drying the pulp sheet.6. A method of producing an easily fiberizable pulp sheet as defined inclaim 5 and in which the admixture of the cationic compound and oil isintroduced into the pulp slurry before formation of the sheet.7. A method of producing an easily fiberizable pulp sheet as defined inclaim 5 and in which the admixture of cationic compound and oil isintroduced into the preformed wet pulp sheet before it is dried."}
{"WKU":"039309347","Title":"Speed optimization control for fibrous sheet making machines such as","App_Date":"1974-06-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"David Allan Spitz","Assignee":"Industrial Nucleonics Corporation","ICL_Class":"D21F  106;D21F  500;D21F  902;D21F 1102","References":"3564224;3564724;3649444;3666621;3687802","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a control system for a fibrous sheet making machine having means forregulating the flow of fibrous material to the machine to control thebasis weight and for regulating the dryer system to control the moisturecontent of the sheet, the improvement of means responsive to a speedup-ramp signal for increasing the speed of the machine, means responsiveto the dryer system for detecting a limiting condition for the operationthereof which could prevent the dryer from removing a substantiallygreater amount of moisture per unit time, and means responsive todetection of said limiting condition for discontinuing said regulating andsubstituting therefor first and second signals for regulation of thefibrous material flow and machine speed, respectively, to control themoisture content and prevent a change in basis weight when the moisture ischanged and a third signal to regulate the machine speed to control basisweight.2. The method of controlling a fibrous sheet making machine including afirst dryer system for the sheet, said machine may include a second dryersystem that may be operational, and may include a moisture control systemand a bone dry basis weight control system for said second dryer system,and said machine may include a rewet system that may be operational, whichcomprisesproviding the machine with: (a) a first control system including means forregulating the flow of fibrous material to the machine to control thebasis weight and for regulating the first dryer system to control themoisture content of the sheet, (b) an alternate second control systemhaving means for producing first and second signals for regulating thefibrous material flow and machine speed, respectively, to control themoisture content and prevent a change in basis weight when the moisturecontent is changed and a third signal for regulating the machine speed inresponse to measurement of basis weight to control the basis weight, and acomputer means having a memory,storing in said computer memory indications of the presence or absence onsaid machine of at least one of an operating: second dryer system, machinerewet system, second moisture control system, and second basis weightcontrol system,increasing the speed of the machine controlling the machine with said firstcontrol system until a dryer limiting condition is reached,detecting said limiting condition for at least one of the dryers whichcould prevent the dryer from removing a greater amount of moisture perunit time, andresponding to the detection of said limiting condition and to said presenceor absence indications to perform at least one of the operations of: (a)terminating the speed increase, (b) disabling the second moisture controlsystem, and (c) in response to the detection of the limiting condition,controlling the machine with said alternate second control system insubstitution for said first control system.3. A method for controlling a fibrous sheet forming machine having a stockvalve, a steam dryer with a steam valve and means for controlling thespeed of the sheet being formed, the drying rate of the dryer having alimit, comprising:a. controlling the sheet basis weight and moisture content with the stockvalve and steam valve respectively, while increasing the speed of thesheet until the limit on the dryer rate is reached:b. sensing the limit condition being reached discontinuing step (a) aboveand,c. in response to the limit on the dryer rate being reached, controllingthe sheet moisture with first and second signals that change the stockvalve and sheet speed, respectively, to prevent a change in basis weightwhen the moisture is changed, while controlling the sheet basis weightwith a third signal that changes the sheet speed, and at the same timemaintaining the dryer drying rate at the limit.4. Apparatus for controlling a fibrous sheet producing machine having astock valve, a steam dryer with a steam valve, means for controlling thespeed of the sheet being produced and an operator input for initiating thespeed control, comprising means for signalling the occurrence of a limitcondition for the steam dryer such that a limit for its sheet dryingability is attained, means responsive to the operator input and the limitsignalling means indicating that the dryer limit has not been reached forconcomitantly controlling the stock valve and steam valve to control sheetbone dry basis weight and moisture, respectively, while activating thesheet control means to increase speed until the limit signalling meansindicates that the dryer limit has been reached, and means responsive tothe limit signalling means indicating that the dryer limit has beenreached for discontinuing operation of said stock valve and steam valvecontrol means and concomitantly producing a first signal controlling thesheet basis weight by controlling the sheet speed and second and thirdsignals controlling the sheet moisture by controlling the stock valve andsheet speed, respectively, to prevent a change in basis weight when themoisture content is changed while maintaining the steam valve such thatthe dryer remains at the limit.5. Apparatus as claimed in claim 4 wherein the means for signalling thelimit condition includes means for sensing the opening of the steam valve,and means responsive to the steam valve being fully open to indicate thatthe dryer limit has been reached for locking the steam valve in the fullyopen condition."}
{"WKU":"039309355","Title":"Apparatus for making webs of filtering material for tobacco product","App_Date":"1973-11-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Paul Adolf Muller;Hans Muster","Assignee":"Celfil Company Establishment","ICL_Class":"D21H  506;D21H  516","References":"192277;1689037;2216803;2995481;3161557;3466358;3470053;3621764","Claims":"What we claim:1. Apparatus for treating an elongated web of fibrous material to renderthe same particularly adapted to be gathered transversely and enclosed ina wrapper to make a filter cord subdividable into filter rods and filterplugs for cigarettes, comprising:a first pair of meshing non-contacting rotating rolls provided with narrowlongitudinal grooves alternating with narrow longitudinal ribs, saidgrooves and ribs being parallel to the axes of said rolls, said ribs beingadapted to engage a web of fibrous material passed through the bightbetween said rolls and to prevent appreciable longitudinal contraction ofthe web so that the latter is stretched longitudinally in closely-spacedsuccessive narrow transverse areas to loosen and expose fibers in suchareas without substantial impairment of the longitudinal continuity of theweb;a second pair of non-contacting meshing rotating rolls provided with narrowcircumferential grooves alternating with narrow circumferential ribsadapted to engage a web of fibrous material passed through the bightbetween said rolls and to prevent appreciable lateral contraction of theweb so that the web is grooved in a direction parallel to its travel andstretched transversely of the grooves in a plurality of closely-spacednarrow longitudinal areas to loosen and expose fibers in such areaswithout substantial impairment of the transverse continuity of the web;andmeans for advancing a web of fibrous material succesively through thebights between the rolls of said first and second pairs.2. Apparatus according to claim 1 including means for moistening thematerial in advance of its passage through the bight between the rolls ofthe first pair; andmeans, including the second pair of rolls, for heating the material tosubstantially dry the same as it emerges from the bight between saidsecond pair.3. Apparatus according to claim 1 including means for moistening thematerial in advance of its passage through the bight between the rolls ofthe first pair; andmeans for heating the material, including the rolls of one of the pairs, toat least partly dry the material during its passage through the bightsbetween the rolls of the first and second pair."}
{"WKU":"039309363","Title":"Nuclear reactor","App_Date":"1973-04-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Werner Aleite;Erich Klar;Hans-Gerd Spillekothen","Assignee":"Siemens Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"G21C 1700","References":"3565760","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A nuclear reactor having a reactor core and means for determining theflux density in this core and including flux detectors located in the coreat fixed positions and flux probes which are movable in the core through arange of positions; wherein the improvement comprises means for movingsaid movable probes automatically in response to actuation of saiddetectors by flux densities of predetermined value, one of said valuesbeing lower relative to another and said operating means being responsiveto actuation of said detectors by either of these values independently ofthe other value.2. A nuclear reactor having a reactor core and means for determining theflux density in this core and including flux detectors located in the coreat fixed positions and flux probes which are movable in the core through arange of positions; wherein the improvement comprises means for movingsaid movable probes automatically in response to actuation of saiddetectors by flux densities of predetermined values, said movable probemoving means having an electrical controller and said fixed-positioneddetectors producing an electric actuating signal transmitted to saidcontroller, and means for terminating said signal to said controller aftera probing movement of said probes to prevent repetitious probing movementsof the probes.3. The reactor of claim 2 having means for manually activating saidactuating signal.4. The reactor of claim 2 in which said probing movement requires a knowntime period for completion and said terminating means is automaticallyresponsive to said time period."}
{"WKU":"039309371","Title":"Steam relief valve control system for a nuclear reactor","App_Date":"1973-04-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jose Marcelo Torres","Assignee":"Combustion Engineering, Inc.","ICL_Class":"G21c  732;G21c 1710;G21c  700","References":"3332849;3565760;3778347","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A control rod interlock system for a nuclear power plant having anuclear reactor with a core and control rods for controling the poweroutput thereof, and having a working fluid circuit for providing theworking fluid to a load, and having steam relief valves for diverting theworking fluid around the load, the interlock system comprising:a. means responsive to said working fluid for detecting a condition of saidworking fluid;b. means responsive to said detecting means for generating a signalindicative of a steam relief valve demand; andc. means responsive to said signal indicative of steam relief valve demandfor preventing the movement of said control rods out of said core of saidreactor.2. A control rod interlock system for a nuclear power plant having anuclear reactor with a core and control rods for controlling the poweroutput thereof, and having a primary fluid circuit for circulating acoolant through the reactor core, a secondary fluid circuit in heatexchange relation with the primary fluid circuit to provide secondaryfluid to a load, and steam relief valves for allowing the secondary fluidto passed around the load, the interlock system comprising:a. means responsive to the fluid pressure of said secondary circuit forgenerating a signal for actuating said steam relief valves;b. means responsive to the fluid flow of the secondary circuit forgenerating a signal for actuating said steam relief valves;c. means responsive to the signals of said means responsive to the fluidpressure of said secondary circuit for generating a signal for actuatingsaid steam relief valves or to the signals of said means responsive to thefluid flow of the secondary circuit for generating a signal for actuatingsaid steam relief valves for generating a digital signal indicative of theexistance of any single steam relief valve demand signal; andd. means responsive to said means for generating a digital signalindicative of the existance of any single steam relief valve demand signalfor preventing the movement of said control rods out of the core of saidreactor.3. A control rod interlock system as recited in claim 2 wherein said meansresponsive to said means responsive to the fluid pressure of saidsecondary circuit for generating a signal for actuating said steam reliefvalves or to the signals of said means responsive to the fluid flow of thesecondary circuit for generating a signal for actuating said steam reliefvalves is an  OR  gate."}
{"WKU":"039309380","Title":"Attachment and locking of finger control rods in a nuclear reactor of","App_Date":"1973-10-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ake Berglund;Antti Suvanto","Assignee":"Asea-Atom","ICL_Class":"G21C  708","References":"3107209;3377252","Claims":"We claim:1. In a nuclear reactor of BWR type, having a fuel assembly and a fingercontrol rod having a longitudinal axis movable between upper and lowerpositions with respect to said fuel assembly, at least one member movablein the direction of the longitudinal axes of the control rod, and meansreleasably securing said control rod to said member, said assembly andsaid control rod having cooperating means thereon responsive to theposition of the control rod with respect to the fuel assembly to permitrelease of said locking means only when said control rod is moved to itsupper position with respect to said fuel assembly.2. In a nuclear reactor as claimed in claim 1, said fuel assembly having asingle member, a plurality of control rods being connected to said member.3. In a nuclear reactor as claimed in claim 1, said securing meansincluding locking means releasable by turning of the control rod about itslongitudinal axis, and means for preventing turning of the control rodwhen said rod is below its upper position.4. In a nuclear reactor as claimed in claim 3, having a guide tube for thecontrol rod, said means for preventing turning including cooperating meanson the tube and the rod.5. In a nuclear reactor as claimed in claim 4, said means for preventingturning including a sleeve slidably and non-rotatably mounted on thecontrol rod and having a portion constituting a part of said cooperatingmeans, said sleeve and tube having cooperating means thereon to preventturning of the sleeve as long as it is engaged within the tube, saidsleeve being movable out of the tube in the upper position of the controlrod to release said prevention turning means.6. In a nuclear reactor as claimed in claim 5, spring means urging saidsleeve into the tube.7. In a nuclear reactor as claimed in claim 5, said tube being noncircularand said sleeve having a portion fitting into the tube and non-turnabletherein.8. In a nuclear reactor as claimed in claim 5, said tube being circular andhaving inwardly directed ribs extending longitudinally thereof and saidsleeve having projections engageable with the ribs."}
{"WKU":"039309398","Title":"Pressure suppression system for a nuclear reactor","App_Date":"1973-06-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Dietmar Bittermann;Claus Goetzmann;Klaus Hassmann;Hans-Joachim Preuss;Manfred Schatz;Peter Rau","Assignee":"Siemens Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"G21C  900","References":"3238105;3607630;3629064;3702802","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A gas-coolant nuclear reactor including a core enclosed by a pressurevessel, a melted core intercept basin below the core and a metalcontainment vessel enclosing the vessel and basin and having a metal tophaving an outer surface which is exposed to the outside of the top;wherein the improvement comprises means for conducting a fluid coolantcooling a melted core in said basin, from the basin to an extended area ofthe inside of said top of said metal containment vessel for cooling by theconduction of heat through the containment vessel s wall to the outside ofthe containment vessel, said top of said containment vessel having doublewalls between which said conducting means connects.2. A gas-coolant nuclear reactor comprising a core, a pressure vesselhaving an inside enclosing said core and an outside, and a basin belowsaid core and positioned to intercept said core in the event the coremelts and falls, said pressure vessel forming an enclosure above saidbasin, a steel containment shell enclosing said pressure vessel and saidbasin and having a heat-conductive upper portion extending above thepressure vessel and basin, the steel shell s said upper portion having anoutside exposed to the atmosphere outside of the containment shell, saidupper portion having an inside, ducts connecting with said basin andextending upwardly and opening to the steel shell s said inside andextending from said inside downwardly and back to said basin, and acoolant in contact with said basin for removing heat from said core in theevent it melts and falls and is intercepted by the basin, said ductsconnecting with said basin to conduct said coolant when thermally risingfrom the basin, to said inside of said upper portion of said steelcontainment shell and, when cooled by conduction of heat through saidupper portion to its said outside, to conduct said coolant back to saidbasin, said pressure vessel, said basin, said ducts and said inside ofsaid upper portion of said steel containment shell cooperatively forming arecirculation circuit for said coolant.3. The installation of claim 2 in which said basin is positioned on theoutside of and below said pressure vessel inside of said shell.4. The installation of claim 3 which said coolant is formed by a gasatmosphere contained between the outside of said pressure vessel and theinside of said shell, and said basin has an inside and an open topdirectly facing the pressure vessel s said outside, said ducts connectingsaid gas atmosphere with the inside of said basin.5. The installation of claim 2 in which said basin is positioned on theinside of said pressure vessel, and a second basin is positioned on theoutside of and below said pressure vessel inside of said steel shell.6. The installation of claim 2 in which said basin is positioned on theinside of said pressure vessel and said coolant is a material whichvaporizes under the heat of a melted core falling into said basin, andhaving means for separating said coolant from the inside of said pressurevessel."}
{"WKU":"039309401","Title":"Nuclear fuel subassembly","App_Date":"1970-12-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Andre Cayol;Andre Chalony;Georges Clottes;Jean-Pierre Praizey;Jean Skok;Henri Venobre","Assignee":"Commissariat a l Energie Atomique","ICL_Class":"G21C  308;G21C  310","References":"3215606;3356587;3442763;3575808;3607642;3625822;3629066","Claims":"We claim:1. A nuclear fuel sub-assembly comprising a shroud of substantiallypolygonal cross-section containing at least one cluster of elongatedparallel fuel pins disposed on a uniform lattice, said shroud having aninlet and an outlet for receiving and discharging a coolant whichcirculates in the shroud along a direction generally parallel to the pins,each fuel pin being provided over at least the greater part of its lengthwith radially projecting helical spacer means providing a minimum spacingbetween each fuel pin and the adjacent pins or the shroud, the length ofthe radial projection of the spacer means on each outer fuel pin of thecluster where said spacer means engage the shroud being smaller than thelength of the radial projection of the spacer means on each inner fuelpins of the cluster, the spacer means being a wire, the wires of the innerfuel pins and mounted in tube sections having an external diameter thesame as that of the wires carried by the inner fuel pins, said tubesections being placed in the zones in which the outer fuel pins confrontinner fuel pins and adjacent outer pins and internal longitudinal ribs onsaid shroud projecting between the outer fuel pins.2. A fuel sub-assembly according to claim 1, wherein the cross-section ofsaid longitudinal ribs is such that the flow within each sub-channellimited by outer fuel pins and a flat portion of the shroud issubstantially equal to the flow within each sub-channel limited by innerfuel pins only.3. A fuel sub-assembly according to claim 1, wherein said longitudinal ribsconsist of strips secured to the internal face of the shroud.4. A fuel sub-assembly according to claim 1, wherein said ribs consist oflongitudinal deformations of the shroud.5. A fuel sub-assembly according to claim 1, wherein said ribs are formedon plates which are slidably engaged between the shroud and the fuelcluster."}
{"WKU":"039309410","Title":"Fuel element for a reactor","App_Date":"1973-11-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ekkehard Meerwald;Mario Dalle Donne","Assignee":"Gesellschaft fur Kernforschung m.b.H.","ICL_Class":"G21c  308","References":"3261756","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A nuclear fuel element cladding tube having a longitudinal axis and anouter surface, comprising a plurality of fins carried on said surface,said fins being arranged in a plurality of parallel-spaced rows extendingat right angles to said axis, the fins in any one of said rows beingspaced from one another and being offset relative to the fins of animmediately adjacent row, the distance between immediately adjacent rowsbeing twice the height of the individual fins and the distance between twoadjacent fins in alignment parallel to said axis being four times saidheight.2. A cladding tube as defined in claim 1, wherein the distance between twosuccessive fins of the same row is at most equal to the fin width measuredin a direction normal to said axis.3. A cladding tube as defined in claim 1, wherein said fins are circularsegments of rectangular cross section."}
{"WKU":"039309428","Title":"Industrial technique","App_Date":"1973-03-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Paul Thome","Assignee":"Babcock-Atlantique, S.A.","ICL_Class":"G21c 1708","References":"3145636;3234102;3567576;3755079","Claims":"I claim:1. An installation for a fluid having an undesirable effect, comprising anormal retaining wall for the fluid, a second wall adapted to retain thefluid in the event of breakdown of the first wall, and a space between thetwo walls, characterized in that the surface of the first wall disposedfacing the second wall is bare and the said space is adapted to receive atrolley which can travel along said surface and which is equipped with atleast one repair device for the said installation.2. Installation according to claim 1, wherein the space contains a filling,the effect of which is greatly to reduce the fall in level in the vesselbounded by the first wall in the event of leakage, said filling beingdisplaceable by the force of the trolley.3. Installation according to claim 2, wherein the filling is a train ofcoupled elements.4. Installation according to claim 1, wherein the second wall has an accessdoor to the inspection space, said door being intended for the trolley.5. Installation according to claim 4, wherein the second wall is buried,the installation comprising an underground gallery leading to the accessdoor provided with an air-lock.6. Installation according to claim 1, wherein the device is movable over aguide track having a similar profile to that of the primary wall.7. Installation according to claim 6, comprising means for adjusting thedistance between the guide track and the primary wall.8. Installation according to claim 1, comprising a longitudinal trolleytrack laid along the inter-wall space, a transverse trolley track enablingthe trolley to enter and leave the space, the trolley having two wheelsets, one for each track, at least one of the said wheel sets beingvertically adjustable to allow the trolley to be deposited at willselectively on the two tracks at their intersection.9. Installation according to claim 1, wherein the space is in the form of abody of revolution.10. Installation according to claim 1, wherein the trolley bears at leastone remotely controlled, remotely monitored inspection, maintenance andrepair means.11. Installation according to claim 1, wherein the surface of the primarywall facing the second wall bears locating elements for inspection andmaintenance and repair devices.12. Installation according to claim 2, wherein the filling is formed byseparate blocks adapted to serve as storage tanks.13. Application of the features according to claim 1 wherein said normalretaining wall is adapted to receive a water reactor vessel."}
{"WKU":"039309436","Title":"Nuclear power plant component protection","App_Date":"1973-11-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Eberhard Michel;Richard Ruf;Heinrich Dorner","Assignee":"Siemens Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"G21f  300;G21c 1102","References":"3192121;3264190;3716451","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A nuclear power plant installation comprising a concrete biologicalshield forming a pit, a reactor pressure vessel positioned in said pit, asteam generator having a substantially cylindrical side wall andpositioned on the outside of said pit, and coolant pipe lines ofsubstantially cylindrical shape and interconnecting said vessel andgenerator by extending through said shield; wherein the improvementcomprises segmentally cylindrical segments interfitted to form cylindricalenclosures surrounding said generator and line on the outside of saidshield, and which are made of non-metallic heat-insulating material, andhigh-tensile strength metal elements encircling said segments.2. The installation of claim 1 in which said segments are made of concrete.3. The installation of claim 2 in which said segments are enclosed by sheetmetal casings.4. The installation of claim 3 in which said segments form a series ofcylindrical rings with each two adjacent rings having their end formedwith mutually interlocking steps.5. The installation of claim 4 in which said rings are axially heldtogether by axially extending high-tensile strength tension elementsuniformly distributed circumferentially throughout said enclosures.6. The installation of claim 5 in which said enclosures have metal endmembers to which said tension elements are connected.7. The installation of claim 6 in which said tension elements have lengthsproportioned relative to the lengths of said enclosure when cold so thatwith thermal expansion of said enclosures the latter are placed underaxial compression.8. The installation of claim 7 in which said steam generator is positionedby means permitting the generator to move to relieve stress when said pipeline s enclosures thermally expand and contract axially.9. The installation of claim 1 in which a coolant pump is on the outside ofsaid shield and connected with said pipe line, said pump being of otherthan cylindrical shape and being enclosed by interfitting shells made ofmetal."}
{"WKU":"039309444","Title":"Urokinase production","App_Date":"1975-03-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Evelyn Carmon Nicol","Assignee":"Abbott Laboratories","ICL_Class":"C12K  900;C07G  7026","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. The process of producing urokinase from a contiguous culture of livekidney cells in an aqueous nutrient medium containing, in addition to theusual cell culture maintenance additives, between 6 and 50 .mu.g. ofpronase per 100 milliliters of said nutrient.2. The process of claim 1 wherein said pronase is used in an amount ofbetween 6 and 20 .mu.g."}
{"WKU":"039309452","Title":"Urokinase production","App_Date":"1975-03-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"L. James Lewis","Assignee":"Abbott Laboratories","ICL_Class":"C12K  900;C07G  7026","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. The process of producing urokinase from a contiguous culture of livekidney cells in an aqueous nutrient medium containing, in addition to theusual cell culture maintenance additives, between 0.3 and 1.2 parts byweight of glycine per 100 parts by volume of said nutrient.2. The process of claim 1 wherein said glycine is used in an amount ofbetween 0.6 and 1.2 parts by weight."}
{"WKU":"039309460","Title":"Yeasts","App_Date":"1973-11-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Paul Maldonado;Jean-Pierre Desmarquest;Claude Gaillardin;Daniel Binet","Assignee":"Institut Francaise du Petrole, des Carburants et Lubrifiants;Institut Francais du Petrole","ICL_Class":"C12B  100","References":"3616213","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for the preparation of a stable diploid of Candida lipolyticawhich comprises (a) in a first stage, separately cultivating two haploidstrains of Candida lipolytica of opposed sign in a medium rich inassimilable carbon nutrient; (b) in a second stage, cultivating the tworesultant strains together in a medium poor in assimilable carbonnutrient; and (c) in a third stage, after the appearance of diploidcolonies, treating them with a mutagenic agent to stabilize them.2. A process as claimed in claim 1 in which the carbon-rich medium containsat least 10 grams per liter of assimilable carbon nutrient.3. A process as claimed in claim 1 in which the carbon-rich medium containsabout 20 times as much assimilable carbon source as does the carbon-poormedium.4. A process as claimed in claim 1 in which the culture media contain yeastextract or yeast.5. A process for the preparation of .alpha.-ketoglutaric acid whichcomprises cultivating a stable diploid mutant of Candida lipolytica on ahydrocarbon substrate to produce .alpha.-ketoglutaric acid, said stablediploid being produced by (a) in a first stage, separately cultivating twohaploid strains of Candida lipolytica of opposed sign in a medium rich inassimilable carbon nutrient; (b) in a second stage, cultivating the tworesultant strains together in a medium poor in assimilable carbonnutrient; and (c) in a third stage, after the appearance of diploidcolonies, treating them with a mutagenic agent to stabilize them, andfinally recovering the .alpha.-ketoglutaric acid so produced.6. A process as claimed in claim 5 in which the assimilable sourcecomprises at least one n-paraffin containing from 9 to 22 carbon atoms."}
{"WKU":"039309479","Title":"Method of producing microbial cells from methane","App_Date":"1974-12-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Yasushi Morinaga;Shigeru Yamanaka;Yoshio Hirose","Assignee":"Ajinomoto Co., Inc.","ICL_Class":"C12B  100","References":"3354047;3649459","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method which comprises culturing Methylomonas sp. FERM P-2400 in anaqueous culture medium containing an assimilable nitrogen source andinorganic salts, in the presence of methane as the major carbon source,until the cells of said strain multiply in said culture medium, andrecovering the multiplied cells from said medium.2. A method as in claim 1, wherein said methane constitutes the solesignificant source of assimilable carbon in said medium.3. A method as in claim 1 including the addition of from 1% to 5% by weightof carbon dioxide.4. A method as in claim 1 carried out in a batchwise manner.5. A method as in claim 1 carried out in a continuous manner.6. A method as in claim 1 wherein yeast extracts or peptone are utilized asan additional carbon source."}
{"WKU":"039309487","Title":"Enzymatic method for producing aromatic ethylamines","App_Date":"1974-07-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Konosuke Sano;Keizo Matsuda;Hidetsugu Nakazawa;Koji Mitsugi","Assignee":"Ajinomoto Co., Inc.","ICL_Class":"C12D 1300","References":"3579427","Claims":"What is claimes is:1. A method for producing substituted ethylamine, which comprises holdingan amino acid and an effective amount of decarboxylase produced by aMicrococcus in an aqueous solution at pH 5 to 12 at a temperature of10.degree.to 50.degree.C, and recovering the substituted ethylamineproduced from the aqueous solution, said amino acid being tryptophan,5-hydroxytryptophan, 5-fluorotryptophan, 6-fluorotryptophan,4-methyltryptophan, 5-methyltryptophan, 6-methyltryptophan,7methyltryptophan, 5-methoxytryptophan, phenylalanine,.beta.-phenylserine, 2-hydroxyphenylalanine, 4-aminophenylalanine,4-chlorophenylalanine, 2-fluorophenylalanine, 3-fluorophenylalanine,4-fluorophenylalanine, tyrosine, 3-nitrotyrosine, 3-iodotyrosine,3,5-diiodotyrosine, or 3,5-dibromotyrosine, and said substitutedethylamine being tryptamine, serotonin, .beta.-(5-fluoroindolyl)-ethylamine, .beta.-(6-fluoroindolyl) -ethylamine,.beta.-(4-methylindolyl) -ethylamine, .beta.-(5-methylindolyl)-ethylamine, .beta.-(6-methylindolyl) -ethylamine,.beta.-(7-methylindolyl) -ethylamine, .beta.-(5-methoxyindolyl)-ethylamine, .beta.-phenylethylamine,.beta.-phenyl-.beta.-hydroxyethylamine, .beta.-(2-hydroxyphenyl)-ethylamine, .beta.-(4-aminophenyl) -ethylamine, .beta.-(4-chlorophenyl)-ethylamine, .beta.-(2-fluorophenyl) -ethylamine, .beta.-(3-fluorophenyl)-ethylamine, .beta.-(4-fluorophenyl) -ethylamine, .beta.-(4-hydroxyphenyl) -ethylamine, .beta.-(3nitor-4-hydroxyphenyl)-ethylamine, .beta.-(3iodo-4-hydroxyphenyl) -ethylamine,.beta.-(3,5-diiodo-4-hydroxyphenyl) -ethylamine, or.beta.-(3,5-dibromo-4-hydroxyphenyl) -ethylamine.2. A method as set forth in claim 1, wherein said Micrococcus isMicroccoccus percitreus FERM-P 2200.3. A method as set forth in claim 1, wherein, said Micrococcus isMicrococcus conglomeratus FERM-P 2199."}
{"WKU":"039309495","Title":"Process for the production of 7-amino-.DELTA..sup.3 -cephem derivatives","App_Date":"1974-10-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Carl Kutzbach;Uwe Petersen","Assignee":"Bayer Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C12D  102","References":"3239394;3507861;3736230","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for the production of a compound of the formula:##SPC18##wherein:R is hydrogen; hydroxy; amino; cyano; --O--CO--NH.sub.2 ;##EQU3##wherein n is an integer from 4 to 6; --O--CO--R.sup.1 ; --NH--CO--R.sup.1or --S--CS--O--R.sup.1 wherein R.sup.1 is alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms;-S-Het or Het wherein Het is a 5- or 6-membered hetero-aromatic ringunsubstituted or substituted by 1 to 3 alkyl moieties of 1 to 3 carbonatoms or said ring having a positive charge; andX is hydrogen; or, is a negative charge if R has a positive charge,which comprises reacting a compound of the formula:##SPC19##or a salt thereof with an inorganic or organic base,wherein:R and X are as above defined;R.sup.2 is phenyl, phenoxy, 2-thienyl or 2-furyl, unsubstituted orsubstituted in the ring by amino, hydroxy or alkyl of 1 to 3 carbon atoms;andR.sup.3 is hydrogen, amino, hydroxy or alkyl of 1 to 3 carbon atoms,with penicillinacylase which is bound by covalent bonds to awater-insoluble carrier.2. A process according to claim 1 whereinR.sup.1 is alkyl of 1 or 2 carbon atoms;n is 4 or 5;said hetero-aromatic ring contains from 1 to 3 of the same or differenthetero-atoms selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur andnitrogen, the alkyl substituent on said hetero-aromatic ring is of 1 or 2carbon atoms and the alkyl substituent on the phenyl, phenoxy, 2-thienylor 2-furyl substituent is of 1 or 2 carbon atoms.3. A process according to claim 1 whereinR, r.sup.3 and X are each hydrogen; andR.sup.2 is phenyl or phenoxy; orR is --O--CO--CH.sub.3 ;R.sup.3 and X are each hydrogen; andR.sup.2 is phenyl or phenoxy.4. A process according to claim 1 whereinR is hydrogen, --O--CO--CH.sub.3 ; or##SPC20##R.sup.2 is phenyl, phenoxy or thienyl;R.sup.3 is hydrogen or amino; andX is hydrogen or a negative charge.5. A process according to claim 1 whereinR is hydrogen or --O--CO--CH.sub.3 ;R.sup.2 is phenyl or phenoxy;R.sup.3 is hydrogen; andX is hydrogen.6. A process according to claim 1 whereinR is hydrogen, --O--CO--CH.sub.3, or##SPC21##R.sup.2 is phenyl, phenoxy or thienyl;R.sup.3 is hydrogen or amino; andX is hydrogen or a negative charge.7. A process according to claim 1 wherein the penicillinacylase is bound tocross-linked polymers which consist essentially of copolymeric unitscomprising:a. 0.1 to 50% by weight of .alpha.-.beta.-mono-olefinically unsaturateddicarboxylic anhydrides of 4 to 9 carbon atoms; andb. 99.9 to 50% by weight of at least one member selected from the groupconsisting of diacrylates, polyacrylates, dimethacrylates andpolymethacrylates.8. A process according to claim 7 wherein the penicillinacylase is bound tocopolymers which consist essentially of cross-linked polymers wherein thecopolymerized units comprise:a. 0.1 to 30% by weight of .alpha.-.beta.-mono-olefinically unsaturateddicarboxylic acid anhydrides of 4 to 9 carbon atoms;b. 35 to 90% by weight of at least one member selected from the groupconsisting of diacrylates, polyacrylates, dimethacrylates andpolyacrylates; andc. 5 to 60% by weight of at least one hydrophilic monomer other than thoseset forth in (b) above.9. A process according to claim 1 wherein the penicillinacylase is obtainedfrom E. coli.10. A process according to claim 9 wherein the E. coli is ATCC 11,105.11. A process according to claim 1 for the production of7-aminocephalosporanic acid which comprises reacting the sodium salt of7-(2-thienyl)-acetamido-cephalosporanic acid with penicillinacylaseobtained from E. coli bound by covalent bonds to a water-insoluble carriercomprising tetraethylene glycol dimethacrylate and maleic anhydride.12. A process according to claim 1 for the production of7-amino-3-pyridiniummethyl-.DELTA..sup.3 -cephem-4-carboxylate whichcomprises reacting7-(2-thienyl)-acetamido-3-pyridiniummethyl-.DELTA..sup.3-cephem-4-carboxylate with penicillinacylase obtained from E. coli boundby covalent bonds to a water-insoluble carrier comprising tetraethyleneglycol dimethacrylate and maleic anhydride.13. A process according to claim 1 for the production of7-amino-desacetoxy-cephalosporanic acid which comprises reacting7-phenylacetamido-desacetoxy-cephalosporanic acid with penicillinacylaseobtained from E. coli bound by covalent bonds to a water-insoluble carriercomprising tetraethylene glycol dimethacrylate and maleic anhydride.14. A process according to claim 1 for the production of7-amino-desacetoxy-cephalosporanic acid which comprises reacting7-phenoxyacetamido-desacetoxy-cephalosporanic acid with penicillinacylaseobtained from E. coli bound by covalent bonds to a water-insoluble carriercomprising tetraethylene glycol dimethacrylate and maleic anhydride.15. A process according to claim 1 for the production of7-amino-desacetoxy-cephalosporanic acid which comprises reacting7-(.alpha.-amino-phenylacetyl)-desacetoxy-cephalosporanic acid withpenicillinacylase obtained from E. coli bound by covalent bonds to awater-insoluble carrier comprising tetraethylene glycol dimethacrylate andmaleic anhydride.16. A process according to claim 1 for the production of7-amino-desacetoxy-cephalosporanic acid which comprises reacting7-phenylacetamido-desacetoxy-cephalosporanic acid with penicillinacylaseobtained from E. coli bound by covalent bonds to a water-insoluble carrierwhich comprises tetramethylene glycol dimethacrylate, methacrylic acid andmaleic anhydride.17. A process according to claim 1 for the production of7-amino-desacetoxy-cephalosporanic acid which comprises reacting7-phenoxyacetamido-desacetoxy-cephalosporanic acid with penicillinacylaseobtained from E. coli bound by covalent bonds to a water-insoluble carrierwhich comprises tetramethylene glycol dimethacrylate, methacrylic acid andmaleic anhydride."}
{"WKU":"039309509","Title":"Method of immobilizing an enzyme","App_Date":"1974-04-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Garfield P. Royer","Assignee":"The Ohio State University Research Foundation","ICL_Class":"C07G  702","References":"3802997","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method of immobilizing an enzyme comprising:providing an activated support member which is capable of reacting with anenzyme to cause said enzyme to become chemically bonded thereto;in sequence, (1) mixing an enzyme and a substrate and thereby forming anenzyme-substrate complex and (2) contacting said activated support memberwith the enzyme-substrate complex, said support member being maintained inactivated condition prior to contact with the complex by preventing itscontact with reactive materials, whereby said enzyme moiety of saidenzyme-substrate complex becomes chemically bonded to said support member.2. The method of claim 1 wherein after said enzyme of said enzyme-substratecomplex is chemically bonded to said support member said substrate isremoved from said enzyme-substrate complex.3. The method of claim 2 wherein said substrate is removed by subjectingsaid enzyme-substrate complex to a washing treatment.4. The method of claim 1 wherein said support member is selected from thegroup consisting of carbohydrates, vinyl polymers, amino acid polymers,derivatives of amino acid polymers, nylon, polystyrene,phenol-formaldehyde resins, and mixtures thereof.5. The method of claim 1 wherein said support member is selected from thegroup consisting of porous glass, nickel screen and alumina-silicatestructures.6. The method of claim 5 wherein said support member is an arylaminederivative of porous glass.7. The method of claim 6 wherein said arylamine derivative of porous glassis obtained by reacting an arylamine containing glass with aHCl-NaNO.sub.2 solution.8. The method of claim 1 wherein said support member comprises a pluralityof glass beads.9. The method of claim 1 wherein said enzyme-substrate complex is formed bymixing together said enzyme and said substrate in such a manner that saidenzyme is saturated with said substrate.10. The method of claim 1 wherein after said enzyme of saidenzyme-substrate complex is chemically bonded to said support member saidsubstrate is removed from said enzyme-substrate complex.11. The method of claim 10 wherein said substrate is removed by subjectingsaid enzyme-substrate complex to a washing treatment.12. A method for immobilizing an enzyme by bonding to an active solidsupport member, which consists essentially ofpremixing an enzyme with an effective amount of a solution ofenzyme-complexing substrate material to obtain an enzyme-substrate complexpremixture;contacting the premixture with an active solid support member to effectreaction of the enzyme with the support member; said support member beingmaintained in activated condition prior to contact with the complex bypreventing its contact with reactive materials; andremoving the substrate material with an inert liquid to obtain a bondedenzyme having substantially greater enzymic activity than directly bondedenzyme.13. The method of claim 12 wherein the solid support member comprisesporous glass treated to provide a diazo structure, the enzyme consistsessentially of trypsin, the complexing substrate consists essentially ofN-.alpha.-benzoyl-L-arginine ethyl ester, and wherein the enzyme-substratecomplex premixture is contacted with the solid support member at about0.degree. to 4.degree.C.14. An immobilized enzyme made according to the method of claim 12.15. An immobilized enzyme made according to the method of claim 13.16. The method of claim 12 wherein the amount of substrate is sufficient tosubstantially saturate the enzyme in the complex premixture."}
{"WKU":"039309517","Title":"Bonding enzymes to porous inorganic carriers","App_Date":"1974-05-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ralph A. Messing","Assignee":"Corning Glass Works","ICL_Class":"C07G  702","References":"2968635;3666627;3669841;3705084;3783101;3804719","Claims":"I claim:1. A method of preparing an immobilized enzyme composite which comprisesthe steps of (1) reacting an essentially waterinsoluble inorganic carrierwith a solution of 4,4 -bi(2-methoxybenzenediazonium chloride) to formsurface diazo groups on the carrier, the carrier being porous and havingan average pore diameter at least as large as the larger of the enzyme orits substrate but less than about 1000A, the carrier consisting ofparticles having an average particle size between about 4 to 200 mesh,U.S. Standard Sieve, and selected from the group consisting of porousglass, porous alumina, porous silica, and porous mixtures of alumina andsilica; (2) removing the surface-treated carrier from the reactionsolution; and (3) then reacting the treated carrier with an aqueous enzymesolution to chemically couple enzymes to the carrier through the surfacediazo groups.2. The method of claim 1 wherein the enzyme of the aqueous enzyme solutionis alkaline Bacillus subtilis protease and the carrier consists of poroussilica particles.3. The method of claim 1 wherein the enzyme of the enzyme solution consistsof papain and the carrier consists of porous glass particles.4. The method of claim 1 wherein the enzyme of the enzyme solution isglucose isomerase and the carrier consists of an agglomerated mixture ofsilica and alumina particles.5. The method of claim 1 wherein the enzyme of the enzyme solution isurease and the carrier consists of silica particles.6. An immobilized enzyme composite comprising an enzyme coupled chemicallyto porous inorganic carriers in accordance with the method of claim 1."}
{"WKU":"039309525","Title":"Microbiological reduction of PGA.sub.2 and 15-epi PGA.sub.2","App_Date":"1975-04-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"George Greenspan;Michael R. G. Leeming","Assignee":"American Home Products Corporation","ICL_Class":"C12D  102","References":"3788947","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for the preparation of7-[2-(3-hydroxy-1-octenyl)-5-oxo-cyclopentyl]-5-heptenoic acid whichcomprises subjecting7-[2-(3-hydroxy-1-octenyl)-5-oxo-cyclopenten-1-yl]-5-heptenoic acid to thefermentative action of an organism selected from the genera:a. Streptomyces,b. Pseudomonas, andc. Corynebacterium;and then isolating the prostaglandin product.2. A process as described in claim 1 for the preparation of7-(2-[(3R)-3-hydroxy-1-octenyl]-5-oxo-cyclopentyl)-5-heptenoic acid whichcomprises subjecting7-(2-[(3R)-3-hydroxy-1-octenyl]-5-oxo-3-cyclopenten-1-yl)-5-heptenoic acidto the fermentative action of an organism selected from the genera:a. Streptomyces, andb. Pseudomonas.3. A process as described in claim 2 wherein7-(2-[(3R)-3-hydroxy-1-octenyl]-5-oxo-3-cyclopenten-1-yl)-5-heptenoic acidis subjected to the fermentative action of Streptomyces griseus.4. A process as described in claim 2 wherein7-(2-[(3R)-3-hydroxy-1-octenyl]-5-oxo-3-cyclopenten-1-yl)-5-heptenoic acidis subjected to the fermentative action of Streptomyces griseus NRRL 3231.5. A process as described in claim 2 wherein7-(2-[(3R)-3-hydroxy-1-octenyl]--oxo--ox-3-cyclopenten-1-yl)-5-heptenoicacid is subjected to the fermentative action of an organism selected fromthe genus Pseudomonas.6. A process as described in claim 2 wherein7-(2-[(3R)-3-hydroxy-1-octenyl]-5-oxo-3-cyclopenten-1-yl)-5-heptenoic acidis subjected to the fermentative action of Pseudomonas taetrolens NRRLB-14; Pseudomonas ribicola NRRL B-859; Pseudomonas papaveris NRRL B-1640;Pseudomonas septica NRRL B-2081; Pseudomonas sp. NRRL B-3266; orPseudomonas sp. NRRL B-3294.7. A process as described in claim 1 for the preparation of7-(2-[(3S)-3-hydroxy-1-octenyl]-5-oxo-cyclopentyl)-5-heptenoic acid whichcomprises subjecting7-(2-[(3S)-3-hydroxy-1-octenyl]-5-oxo-3-cyclopenten-1-yl)-5-heptenoicacid; to the fermentative action of an organism selected from the genera:a. Corynebacterium,b. Pseudomonas, andc. Streptomyces.8. A process as described in claim 7 wherein7-(2-[(3S)-3-hydroxy-1-octenyl]-5-oxo-3-cyclopenten-1-yl)-5-heptenoic acidis subjected to the fermentative action of an organism of the genusCorynebacterium.9. A process as described in claim 7 wherein7-(2-[(3S)-3-hydroxy-1-octenyl]-5-oxo-3-cyclopenten-1-yl)-5-heptenoic acidis subjected to the fermentative action of Corynebacterium hoagii;Corynebacterium equi; Corynebacterium mediolanum; Corynebacteriumsepedonicum; Corynebacterium lilium; or Corynebacterium simplex.10. A process as described in claim 7 wherein7-(2-[(3S)-3-hydroxy-1-octenyl]-5-oxo-3-cyclopenten-1-yl)-5-heptenoic acidis subjected to the fermentative action of an organism of the genusPseudomonas.11. A process as described in claim 7 wherein7-(2-[(3S)-3-hydroxy-1-octenyl]-5-oxo-3-cyclopenten-1-yl)-5-heptenoic acidis subjected to the fermentative action of Pseudomonas papaveris NRRLB-1630; Pseudomonas septica NRRL B-2081; Pseudomonas aeruginosa QM B-1468;Pseudomonas reptilivora NRRL B-6bs; Pseudomonas cruciviae NRRL B-1021;Pseudomonas acidovorans NRRL B-802; Pseudomonas putrefaciens NRRL B-950;Pseudomonas desmolytica NRRL B-979; Pseudomonas sp. NRRL B-3266; orPseudomonas sp. NRRL B-3294.12. A process as described in claim 7 wherein7-(2-[(3S)-3-hydroxy-1-octenyl]-5-oxo-3-cyclopenten-1-yl)-5-heptenoic acidis subjected to the fermentative action of an organism of the genusStreptomyces.13. A process as described in claim 7 wherein7-(2-[(3S)-3-hydroxy-1-octenyl]-5-oxo-3-cyclopenten-1-yl)-5-heptenoic acidis subjected to the fermentative action of Streptomyces caelestis;Streptomyces viridifaciens; Streptomyces rimosus forma paromomycinus;Streptomyces rimosus; Streptomyces aureofaciens; Streptomyces bellus;Streptomyces chartreusis; Streptomyces avellaneus; Streptomyces erumpens;Streptomyces aureus; Streptomyces cellulosae; Streptomyces lipmanii;Streptomyces antibioticus; Streptomyces halstedii; Streptomyceslavendulae; or Streptomyces spectabilis."}
{"WKU":"039309533","Title":"Glucose oxidase poor in catalase and process for obtaining it","App_Date":"1974-02-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Josef Stark","Assignee":"Behringwerke Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07G  7028","References":"3468760;3645851","Claims":"I claim:1. A process for obtaining glucose oxidase poor in catalase which comprisesprecipitating a prepurified glucose oxidase composition with awater-soluble salt of an acridine base, and subsequently purifying it bychromatography on a cation exchanger and an anion exchanger.2. A process as defined in claim 1 in which the cation exchanger is onehaving functional sulfoethyl groups and the ion exchanger is one havingfunctional diethylamino groups.3. A process as claimed in claim 1 wherein said water-soluble salt of anacridine base is diaminoethoxyacridine lactate.4. A process as claimed in claim 1 wherein said prepurified glucose oxidasecomposition is derived from a mold.5. A process as claimed in claim 4 wherein said mold is Aspergillus niger.6. A process as claimed in claim 4 wherein said mold is Penicilliumnotatum.7. Glucose oxidase poor in catalase, prepared by the process of claim 1,containing more than 250 units/mg of protein of glucose oxidase activityand less than 0.1 unit/mg of protein of catalase activity."}
{"WKU":"039309541","Title":"Neutral protease useful for animal tissue and cell culture","App_Date":"1974-05-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Yoshio Irie","Assignee":"Godo Shusei Kabushiki Kaisha","ICL_Class":"C07G  702;C12K  900;C12D 1310","References":"","Claims":"I claim:1. A neutral protease having the following characteristics:a. optimum pH of 8.5 for proteolytic activity to casein,b. stable within a pH range of 4-9,c. active within a temperature range of 20.degree.-75.degree.C, with theoptimum temperature being 60.degree.C,d. absence of activity at pH below 3 and pH above 10, and absence ofactivity upon heating at 65.degree.C for 10 minutes,e. activity inhibited by ethylene-diaminetetraacetate, citric acid,o-phenanthroline, 2,2 -dipyridyl, sodium fluoride, N-bromosuccinimide andiodine,f. activity enhanced by Ca.sup.+.sup.+, Mn.sup.+.sup.+, Mg.sup.+.sup.+,Fe.sup.+.sup.+, Fe.sup.+.sup.+.sup.+ and Al.sup.+.sup.+.sup.+,g. molecular weight of 35,900 as determined by ultracentrifugal analysis,h. elemental analysis of 46.57% C, 7.17% H, 31.57% O, 14.48% N and 0.21% S,andi. cleaves the peptide bonds in the oxidized B-chain of insulin atpositions Phe(1)-Val(2), His(5)-Leu(6), His(10)-Leu(11), Glu(13)-Ala(14),Ala(14)-Leu(15), Leu(15)-Tyr(16), Tyr(16)-Leu(17), Leu(17)-Val(18),Gly(23)-Phe(24), Phe(24)-Phe(25), Phe(25)-Tyr(26) and Lys(29)-Ala(30)."}
{"WKU":"039309550","Title":"Process for producing pterin deaminases having antitumor activity","App_Date":"1974-05-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hitoshi Kusakabe;Kenjiro Kodama;Yuichirow Midorikawa;Haruhiko Machida;Akira Kuninaka;Hiroshi Yoshino","Assignee":"Yamasa Shoyu Kabushiki Kaisha","ICL_Class":"A61K 3748;C12D 1310","References":"","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for the production of pterin deaminase which comprises growinga microorganism selected from the genera Aspergillus, Mucor, Rhizopus, andPenicillium, extracting pterin deaminase, and isolating the extractedpterin deaminase.2. A process according to claim 1 wherein the microorganism is of thespecies Aspergillus oryzae.3. A process according to claim 1 wherein the microorganism is of thespecies Aspergillus tamarii.4. A process according to claim 1 wherein the microorganism is of thespecies Rhizopus japonicus.5. A process according to claim 1 wherein the microorganism is of thespecies Mucor lamprosporus.6. A process according to claim 1 wherein the microorganism is PenicilliumY70-2, ATCC 20411.7. A process according to claim 1 wherein the microorganism is AspergillusY8-5, ATCC 20413.8. A process according to claim 1 in which the culture medium is a solidculture medium.9. A process according to claim 1 in which the culture medium containswheat bran.10. A process according to claim 1 in which the temperature is maintainedbetween about 10.degree. and 40.degree.C.11. A process according to claim 1 in which the pH is maintained betweenabout 5 and 9."}
{"WKU":"039309568","Title":"Method for the genetic detection of microorganisms","App_Date":"1973-10-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Elliot Juni","Assignee":"The Regents of the University of Michigan","ICL_Class":"C12K  104","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method for detecting the presence of a specific microorganism in abiological sample comprising the steps o:a. contacting said biological sample with an aqueous solution containing asurfactant capable of lysing microorganism cells present in saidbiological sample to form a sterile, crude, aqueous extract comprisingendogenous deoxyribonucleic acid;b. contacting a viable, transformable variant of said specificmicroorganism with said crude extract to form a mixture, said specificmicroorganism possessing a distinguishing characteristic relative to saidvariant, said variant being supported on a microbiological medium capableof diffusing aqueous solutions; andc. subjecting said mixture to an analysis for detecting the presence ofsaid distinguishing characteristic;said surfactnat in step (a) being present in said aqueous solution at aconcentration sufficient to lyse substantially all of the microorganismcells present in said biological sample while sufficient to destroy asubstantial amount of said variant upon contacting said variant with saidcrude extract in step (b) and during the diffusion of said crude, aqueousextract into said microbiological medium.2. A method as in claim 1 which comprises the additional step of incubatingthe mixture resulting from step (b) for a predetermined period of time.3. A method as in claim 1 wherein said specific microorganism is selectedfrom the group consisting of Moraxella, Pneumococcus, Haemophilus,Streptococcus, Staphylococcus, Bacillus, Neisseria, Rhizobium, andAcinetobacter.4. A method as in claim 1 wherein said surfactant is in a concentration ofbetween about 0.01 and 0.l percent by weight.5. A method as in claim 4 wherein said surfactant is sodium dodecylsulfate.6. A method as in claim 5 wherein sodium dodecyl sulfate is in aconcentration of about 0.05 percent by weight.7. A method as in claim 1 wherein said distinguishing characteristic is thefact that said variant and its transformant differ in their ability togrow upon contacting a particular microbiological medium.8. A method as in claim 7 wherein said transformant is capable of growingupon contacting said particular microbiological medium whereas the variantis not and wherein step (c) is accomplished by contacting said mixturewith said particular microbiological medium and detecting the developmentof microbiological growth, the development of microbiological growthindicating the presence of said specific microorganism in said biologicalsample.9. A method as in claim 8 wherein said variant is a mutant.10. A method as in claim 9 wherein said mutant is an auxotroph of saidspecific microorganism and wherein said particular microbiological mediumis a minimal medium containing all of the nutrients required by theprototroph of said auxotroph for growth while lacking at least one of thenutrients required by said auxotroph for growth.11. A method as in claim 8 wherein said detection of the development ofmicrobiological growth is accomplished by an observation of colonyformation.12. A method as in claim 11 wherein said observation is accomplishedvisually.13. A method as in claim 11 wherein said observation is accomplished byinstrumental means.14. A method as in claim 8 wherein said particular microbiological mediumcomprises an indicator responsive to the presence of microorganisms andwherein the indicator response is observed visually or by instrumentalmeans.15. A method as in claim 8 wherein said particular microbiological mediumis in a liquid form and wherein said detection of the development ofmicrobiological growth is accomplished by observing the turbidity of saidparticular microbiological medium.16. A method as in claim 15 wherein said turbidity is observed byinstrumental means.17. A method as in claim 1 wherein said distinguishing characteristic isthe fact that said variant and its transformant differ in their ability togrow in an environment having a particular temperature.18. A method as in claim 17 wherein said transformant is capable of growingin contact with a microbiological medium in an environment having saidparticular temperature whereas the variant is not and wherein step (c) isaccomplished by placing said mixture in an environment having saidparticular temperature and detecting the development of microbiologicalgrowth, the development of microbiological growth indicating the presenceof said specific microorganism in said biological sample.19. A method as in claim 17 wherein said detection of the development ofmicrobiological growth is accomplished by an observation of colonyformation.20. A method as in claim 19 wherein said observation is accomplishedvisually.21. A method as in claim 19 wherein said observation is accomplished byinstrumental means.22. A method as in claim 17 wherein said particular microbiological mediumcomprises an indicator responsive to the presence of microorganisms andwherein the indicator response is observed visually or by instrumentalmeans.23. A method as in claim 17 wherein said particular microbiological mediumis in a liquid form and wherein said detection of the development ofmicrobiological growth is accomplished by observing the turbidity of saidparticular microbiological medium.24. A method as in claim 23 wherein said turbidity is observed byinstrumental means.25. A method for detecting the presence of a specific microorganism in abiological sample comprising the steps of:a. treating said biological sample with an aqueous solution of a surfactantwhich is in a sufficiently high concentration to lyse substantially all ofthe microorganism cells present in said sample and thereby releaseendogenous deoxyribonucleic acid in the form of a sterile, crude extractthereof, said surfactant being in a sufficiently low concentration so thatupon contacting said crude extract with a number of microorganism cellsgrowing on the surface of a microbiological medium capable of diffusingaqueous solutions which come into contact with a surface thereof, asubstantial number of the cells are not destroyed by the solution ofsurfactant as it diffuses into the medium;b. contacting said crude extract with cells of an auxotroph of saidspecific microorganism, which cells are growing on the surface of acomplete microbiological medium, said complete medium containing all ofthe nutrients required by said auxotroph for growth and being capable ofdiffusing aqueous solutions which come into contact with a surfacethereof.c. incubating the resulting mixture for a predetermined period of time.d. transferring at least a portion of the resulting incubated mixture to aminimal microbiological medium containing all of the nutrients required bythe prototroph of said auxotroph for growth but lacking at least one ofthe nutrients required by said auxotroph for growth, ande. detecting the development of any microbiological growth of the portionof said resulting incubated mixture transferred to said minimalmicrobiological medium, the development of microbiological growthindicating the presence of said specific microorganism in said biologicalsample.26. A method as in claim 25 wherein said surfactant is in a concentrationof between about 0.01 and 0.1 percent by weight.27. A method as in claim 26 wherein said surfactant is sodium dodecylsulfate.28. A method as in claim 27 wherein sodium dodecyl sulfate is in aconcentration of about 0.05 percent by weight.29. A method as in claim 25 wherein step (e) is accomplished by anobservation of colony formation.30. A method as in claim 29 wherein said observation is accomplishedvisually.31. A method as in claim 29 wherein said observation is accomplished byinstrumental means.32. A method as in claim 25 wherein said minimal microbiological mediumcomprises an indicator responsive to the presence of microorganisms andwherein the indicator response is observed visually or by instrumentalmeans.33. A method as in claim 25 wherein said minimal microbiological medium isin a liquid form and wherein step (e) is accomplished by observing theturbidity of said minimal microbiological medium.34. A method as in claim 33 wherein said turbidity is observed byinstrumental means."}
{"WKU":"039309576","Title":"Apparatus and method for biological analysis","App_Date":"1974-07-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John P. Cummings;Robert B. Koch","Assignee":"Honeywell Inc.","ICL_Class":"C12K  104","References":"3427225;3635681;3838011;3839154","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property or right isclaimed are defined as follows:1. A continuous method for determining the concentration of a component ofinterest in a sample wherein the detection of the concentration of chargecarriers of an ionic indicating product species of an enzyme-catalyzedreaction is indicative of the concentration of said component of interest,said method comprising the steps of:combining said sample with a substantially ionically inactive carriersolution containing an organic buffer;flowing the combined solution through a quantity of an enzyme selected tocatalyze the desired reaction, wherein said enzyme is immobilized in amanner which allows free contact between the solution components and theenzyme molecules occasioning substantially no loss of enzyme thereby;measuring the increase in conductance of said combined solution;generating an output indicative of the concentration of said component ofinterest;reclaiming said carrier solution after said enzyme catalyzed reaction byreducing the conductance of the reacted solution substantially to thatexisting before said reaction; andrecycling said reclaimed carrier solution to be reused with subsequentsamples.2. The method of claim 1 wherein said output is generated by measuring theelectrical conductance of said solution after said reaction.3. The method of claim 1 wherein said output is generated by measuring theconductance of said solution both before and after said enzyme-catalyzedreaction, the difference therebetween being indicative of theconcentration of said ionic indicating product species.4. The method of claim 1 wherein said output is generated by measuring therate of change of the electrical conduction of said solution during saidreaction.5. The method of claim 1 wherein said reclaiming of said carrier solutionis achieved by substantially de-ionizing the reacted solution.6. The method of claim 1 wherein said component of interest is urea andsaid immobilized enzyme is urease.7. A continuous flow-through analytical apparatus for determining theconcentration of a component of interest in a sample wherein the detectionof the concentration of charge carriers of an ionic indicating productspecies of an enzyme-catalyzed reaction is indicative of the concentrationof the component of interest, said apparatus comprising:a first chamber including an amount of an enzyme immobilized and disposedtherein in a manner which allows free contact between said enzyme and asolution flowing therethrough,means for introducing a substantially ionically inactive, carrier solutioncontaining an organic buffer into said chamber;means for introducing a sample into said carrier solution;sensor means for detecting the increase in said charge carriers in saidcombined solution;means for generating an output from said sensor related to theconcentration of said species of interest;means for reclaiming said carrier solution after said reaction by reducingthe conductance of said carrier solution substantially to that existingbefore said reaction; andmeans for recirculating said reclaimed solution.8. The apparatus of claim 7 wherein said sensor means comprises a pair ofelectrical conductance measuring electrodes placed downstream of saidfirst chamber.9. The apparatus of claim 8 further comprising a second pair ofconductance-measuring electrodes disposed in said apparatus at a pointbefore said solution enters said first chamber.10. The apparatus of claim 7 wherein said sensor means comprises a pair ofconductance-measuring electrodes placed in said first chamber to measurethe rate of production of said ionic charge carriers."}
{"WKU":"039309584","Title":"Desalination apparatus","App_Date":"1974-05-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Nobuo Maruichi","Assignee":"Zeoplant Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"B01D  122;B01D  126;B01D  302","References":"735348;1768179;2446997;3198241","Claims":"What I claim is:1. A desalination apparatus comprising, in combination, at least threeevaporating-condensing elements coaxially superposed in a verticalstructure, with circumscribing rims and inwardly declining bottomdiaphragms; a feed tube above the topmost one of said elements forintroducing salt water to be desalinated; said diaphragms having upwardlydiverging inner walls defining central ducts which constitute an axialpassageway through the sturcture; liquid-conveying discharge pipes leadingfrom each of said elements to the next lower element, except for thelowermost one of said elements, which has instead a tube for dischargingconcentrated salt water; means for heating said lowermost element; a drainreceiver below the lowermost one of said ducts for leading away condensedvapors; and condensation-promoting, drop-inhibiting layers applied to theundersides of at least some of said diaphragms, said layers being in theform of a metallic mesh.2. A desalination apparatus comprising, in combination, at least threeevaporating-condensing elements coaxially superposed in a verticalstructure, with circumscribing rims sealed against a casing and inwardlydeclining bottom diaphragms; a feed tube above the topmost one of saidelements for introducing salt water to be desalinated; said diaphragmshaving upwardly diverging inner walls defining central ducts whichconstitute an axial passageway through the structure; liquid-conveyingdischarge pipes leading from each of said elements to the next lowerelement, except for the lowermost one of said elements, which has insteada tube for discharging concentrated salt water; means for heating saidlowermost element; a drain receiver below the lowermost one of said ductsfor leading away condensed vapors; and condensation-promoting,drop-inhibiting layers applied to the undersides of at least some of saiddiaphragms, said layers being in the form of a woven material.3. A desalination apparatus comprising, in combination, at least threeevaporating-condensing elements coaxially superposed in a verticalstructure, with circumscribing rims sealed against a casing and inwardlydeclining bottom diaphragms; a feed tube above the topmost one of saidelements for introducing salt water to be desalinated; said diaphragmshaving upwardly diverging inner walls defining central ducts whichconstitute an axial passageway through the structure; liquid-conveyingdischarge pipes leading from each of said elements to the next lowerelement, except for the lowermost one of said elements, which has insteada tube for discharging concentrated salt water; means for heating saidlowermost element; and a drain receiver below the lowermost one of saidducts for leading away condensed vapors; wherein the separation betweensaid elements is between 15 and 20 millimeters in said structure.4. A desalination apparatus comprising, in combination, at least threeevaporating-condensing elements coaxially superposed in a verticalstructure, with circumscribing rims sealed against a casing and inwardlydeclining bottom diaphragms; a feed tube above the topmost one of saidelements for introducing salt water to be desalinated; said diaphragmshaving upwardly diverging inner walls defining central ducts whichconstitute an axial passageway through the structure; liquid-conveyingdischarge pipes leading from each of said elements to the next lowerelement, except of the lowermost one of said elements, which has instead atube for discharging concentrated salt water; means for heating saidlowermost element; a drain receiver below the lowermost one of said ductsfor leading away condensed vapors; and a vertical, vapor-condensing andfeed conveying cooling pipe projecting with its top into said topmostelement, below the water level therein, and passing downward through saidaxial passageway and drain receiver.5. The desalination apparatus as defined in claim 4, wherein said heatingmeans is in the form of a heat source placed below said lowermost element.6. The desalination apparatus as defined in claim 4, wherein said heatingmeans is in the form of a pipe for supplying hot water to said lowermostelement with a temperature as high as or higher than that of the saltwater introduced into said lowermost element.7. The desalination apparatus as defined in claim 4, wherein said ducts ofthe diaphragms diverge outwardly."}
{"WKU":"039309592","Title":"Combined water cooler & distiller","App_Date":"1973-08-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John D. Kirschmann","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B01D  342;B01D  300","References":"878744;1204300;2841217;3226306;3350279;3736234","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A combination water distiller and cooler comprising:a boiler container and associated heating means for generating steam fromwater;a raw water supply conduit connected to said boiler container;a steam condensing coil in fluid flow communication with said boilercontainer;a distilled water accumulating tank in fluid flow communication with theoutlet of said condensing coil, said condensing coil being disposed inheat exchange relation with distilled water accumulated in said tank;a refrigerant compressor, condenser and evaporator interconnected inrefrigerant flow relationship in a closed refrigeration circuit, saidevaporator being disposed in heat exchange relation with said accumulatingtank so as to cool the water accumulating therein, the cooling effect ofsaid evaporator and cooled distilled water serving to condense steamflowing through said steam condensing coil;an expansion chamber in the form of a vessel mounted on the top of saiddistilled water accumulating tank and having an outlet of reduced area atthe bottom end thereof opening into the upper end of said accumulatingtank, and said steam condensing coil terminating in a tubular segmentextending upwardly within said vessel through said outlet at the bottomend thereof to a point adjacent the top of said vessel; andair flow passage means extending upwardly inside of said vessel throughsaid outlet at the bottom thereof and having a first open end exposed tothe surrounding atmosphere and a second open end within said vessel.2. A water distiller as defined in claim 1 wherein:said air flow passage means comprises an air conduit extending upwardlyinside of said vessel through said outlet at its bottom end from a pointoutside of said vessel exposed to the surrounding atmosphere.3. A water distiller as defined in claim 1 wherein:said expansion chamber is in the form of a vessel mounted on the top ofsaid accumulating tank with its bottom end resting on a flexible mountingring interposed between the top of said accumulating tank and the bottomof said vessel; andsaid heating means for said boiler comprises an electric heating elementdisposed therein, said heating element being connected to an electricpower source in a control circuit; andpressure control switch means connected to said heating element in saidcontrol circuit and mounted within a recess in said mounting ring, saidswitch means having a pressure responsive element exposed to the interiorof said accumulating tank and displaceable in response to the pressure ofwater at a predetermined level within said tank to open the circuit tosaid electric heating element and thereby de-energize said heating elementwhen distilled water accumulated in said tank reaches said predeterminedlevel.4. A water distiller as defined in claim 3 wherein:said recess in said mounting ring is disposed inside of said accumulatortank at the upper end thereof; andsaid pressure responsive element comprises a flexible diaphragm extendingacross the open end of said recess over said switch means in sealingengagement with said mounting ring."}
{"WKU":"039309606","Title":"Evaporator-condenser unit for producing potable water from sewage","App_Date":"1974-05-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Fred W. Taylor","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B01D  302","References":"1213596;2487884;2619453;3000795;3099607;3165435;3503433;3748234","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An evaporator-condenser unit comprising an elongated enclosed housingdefining a chamber therein,means for introducing hot combustion gases into the upper portion of saidchamber, said gases being forced in a cyclonic wind downwardly about theinside periphery of said chamber,an array of tubes positioned about the inside periphery of said chamber,said hot gases impinging upon and passing about said tubes,means for periodically cleaning said tubes of particulate matter, saidcleaning means including a plurality of injection nozzles, one eachpositioned at the mouth of a corresponding tube,means for pumping relatively cool sanitary waste water up through saidtubes, said waste water cooling said tubes to thereby provide a pluralityof surfaces upon which the water vapor in said hot gases are condensed,the cyclonic wind action of said gases in said chamber forcing saidcondensation from said tubes downwardly in said chamber,means for collecting said condensation proximate the bottom of saidchamber, andmeans for conducting said gases away from said chamber after passingthrough said array of tubes.2. The evaporator-condenser of claim 1 further comprising blow-down meansfor periodically clearing each of said tubes of particulate matter.3. The evaporator-condenser of claim 2 wherein said means for periodicallyclearing said tubes of particulate matter includesmeans for periodically conveying a liquid under a relatively high pressureto a selected plurality of said tubes, said liquid and particulate matterlodged in said tubes being blown out of said tubes into said steamcollector, andmeans for conveying said liquid and particulate matter from said steamcollector.4. An evaporator-condenser unit comprising in combinationan elongated vertically oriented enclosed housing defining a chambertherein,means for introducing hot combustion gases into the upper portion of saidchamber proximate the outer periphery thereof, said gases thereby forminga downwardly directed cyclonic wind within said chamber,an array of vertically oriented tubes positioned about the inside peripheryof said chamber, said hot gases impinging upon and passing about saidtubes,means for periodically cleaning said tubes of particular matter, saidcleaning means including a plurality of injection nozzles, one eachpositioned at the mouth of a corresponding tube,means for forcing relatively cool sewage water up through said tubes undera relatively low pressure, said water cooling said tubes to therebyprovide a plurality of condensation surfaces upon which the water vapor insaid hot gases are condensed, the cyclonic wind action of said gases insaid chamber forcing said condensation from said tubes downwardly in saidchamber,means for collecting said condensation proximate the bottom of saidchamber,a steam collector positioned above said elongated housing and having theopen ends of said tubes extending into and terminating therein, said waterin said sewage being vaporized by said hot gases impinging upon andpassing about said tubes, said vapors being collected in said steamcollector, andmeans for injecting said steam into the stream of hot gases flowing intosaid chamber, said steam thereby being condensed and collected proximatethe bottom of said chamber.5. An evaporator-condenser unit comprising in combination:an elongated vertically oriented enclosed housing defining a chambertherein,means for introducing hot combustion gases into the upper portion of saidchamber proximate the outer periphery thereof, said gases thereby forminga downwardly directed cyclonic wind within said chamber,an array of vertically oriented tubes positioned about the inside peripheryof said chamber, said hot gases impinging upon and passing about saidtubes,means for forcing relatively cool sewage water up through said tubes undera relatively low pressure, said sewage water cooling said tubes to therebyprovide a plurality of condensation surfaces upon which the water vapor insaid hot gases is condensed, the cyclonic wind action of said combustiongases in said chamber forcing said condensation from said tubes downwardlyin said chamber,means for collecting said condensation proximate the bottom of saidchamber,a steam collector positioned above said elongated housing and having theopen ends of said tubes extending into and terminating therein, said waterin said sewage being evaporated by said hot gases impinging upon andpassing about said tubes, said vapors being collected in said steamcollector,means for drawing a partial vacuum in said steam collector to thereby lowerthe temperature at which said sewage water vaporizes and wherein saidsewage water is pumped into said tubes at such a rate that the watersubstantially is vaporized by the time the water reaches said steamcollector,means for periodically clearing said tubes of particulate matter.said cleaning means including a plurality of injection nozzles, one eachpositioned at the mouth of a corresponding tube,means for separating the water vapor remaining in said hot gases as saidgases are exhausted from said chamber, said separated water vapor beingconducted into said steam collector, andmeans for injecting said steam into the stream of hot gases flowing intosaid chamber, said steam thereby being condensed and collected proximatethe bottom of said chamber.6. An evaporator-condenser unit comprising in combination:an elongated vertically oriented enclosed housing defining a chambertherein,means for introducing hot combustion gases into the upper portion of saidchamber proximate the outer periphery thereof, said gases thereby forminga downwardly directed cyclonic wind within said chamber,an array of vertically oriented tubes positioned about the inside peripheryof said chamber, said hot gases impinging upon and passing about saidtubes,means for forcing relatively cool sewage water up through said tubes undera relatively low pressure, said water cooling said tubes to therebyprovide a plurality of condensation surfaces upon which the water vapor insaid hot gases is condensed, the cyclonic wind action of said gases insaid chamber forcing said condensation from said tubes downwardly in saidchamber,means for collecting said condensation proximate the bottom of saidchamber,a steam collector positioned above said elongated housing and having theopen ends of said tubes extending into and terminating therein, said waterin said sewage being vaporized by said hot gases impinging upon andpassing about said tubes, said vapors being collected in said steamcollector,means for drawing a partial vacuum in said steam collector to thereby lowerthe temperature at which said sewage water vaporizes, wherein said sewagewater is pumped into said tubes at such a rate that the watersubstantially is vaporized by the time the water reaches said steamcollector,means for periodically clearing said tubes of particulate matter, saidmeans including a plurality of injection nozzles, one each positioned atthe mouth of a corresponding tube,means for selectively coupling liquid under pressure to said nozzles toforce said liquid under pressure up through said tubes to said steamcollector, said selective coupling means periodically coupling liquidunder pressure to each of the tubes in said chamber,means for separating the water vapor remaining in said hot gases as saidgases are exhausted from said chamber, said separated water vapor beingconducted into said steam collector, andmeans for injecting said steam into the stream of hot gases flowing intosaid chamber, said steam thereby being condensed and collected proximatethe bottom of said chamber."}
{"WKU":"039309614","Title":"Hooded quenching wharf for coke side emission control","App_Date":"1974-04-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John D. Sustarsic;Ronald O. McClelland","Assignee":"Koppers Company, Inc.","ICL_Class":"C10B 3904;C10B 2700","References":"892865;2072392;3547782;3652403;3721609;3809619;3817840;3843461;3844901","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In apparatus for quenching hot coke pushed from coke oven chambersthrough a coke guide onto a coke wharf from which the quenched coke isremoved by a rotary plow and a belt conveyor, the combination with saidcoke wharf of:a. an enclosure covering said coke wharf and having doors in said enclosureopposite said coke oven chambers;b. means on said coke guide for opening and closing a door in saidenclosure when said guide is aligned with a coke oven chamber to bepushed;c. at least one movable structure within said enclosure that carriesnozzles that emit water for quenching said coke as it falls onto saidwharf;d. means at each door within said enclosure for deflecting said coke as itpasses therethrough;e. means for collecting and removing effluent from said enclosure when cokeis quenched within said enclosure; andf. means supplying said water to said nozzles.2. The invention of claim 1 wherein:a. said means for collecting is a conduit connected to said enclosure thatreceives effluent from said coke as it is quenched; and includingb. a plurality of dampers that control and regulate the flow of saideffluent from said enclosure into said conduit.3. The invention of claim 1 wherein:a. said means for deflecting said coke includes a plurality of spaced apartplates arranged vertically on both sides of each said door.4. The invention of claim 1 including:a. a second means for collecting positioned above said coke oven chambersthat collects and removes effluent from said chambers when doors thereonare removed preparatory to pushing coke from said chambers.5. The invention of claim 4 including:a. a conduit communicating said second means for collecting with said meansfor collecting and removing effluent from said enclosure.6. The invention of claim 1 including:a. means within said enclosure that coacts with coke entering saidenclosure and activates the flow of water from said nozzles.7. The invention of claim 6 wherein:a. said means that coacts with said coke includes a paddle-type switch.8. In apparatus for quenching hot coke pushed from coke oven chambersthrough a coke guide onto a coke wharf from which the quenched coke isremoved by a rotary plow and a belt conveyor, the combination with saidcoke wharf of:a. an enclosure covering said coke wharf and having doors in said enclosureopposite said coke oven chambers;b. a pinion operated rack on said coke guide that engages a protrusion on adoor in said enclosure whereby, when said coke guide is opposite a cokeoven chamber to be pushed, said pinion operated rack moves and opens adoor opposite said chamber to be pushed;c. a frame that is movable within said enclosure carrying nozzles fromwhich water is sprayed onto hot coke as it is pushed into said enclosure;d. a plurality of deflector plates within the enclosure arranged verticallyalongside each such door;e. a first collecting main communicating with said enclosure for receivingand removing effluent from said enclosure;f. a second collecting main above said coke oven chambers that collectseffluent from said chambers when doors thereon are removed preparatory topushing coke from said chambers;g. at least one conduit communicating with said first collecting main andsaid second collecting main;h. means within said enclosure that coacts with coke entering saidenclosure and activates the flow of water from said nozzles; andi. means supplying water to said nozzles."}
{"WKU":"039309622","Title":"Process and apparatus for producing thin copper foils on a molybdenum or","App_Date":"1975-02-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Glenn M. Cook;Walter E. Galin","Assignee":"Kennecott Copper Corporation","ICL_Class":"C25D  104","References":"3461046;3677906","Claims":"1.  In a process for preparing thin copper foils, the improvementcomprising,electrodepositing the copper on a rotating electrode having a molybdenumsurface.2. In a process for preparing thin copper foils, the improvement comprisingelectrodepositing the copper on a rotating electrode having a surfaceformed from a titanium, zirconium, molybdenum alloy.3. A process in accordance with claim 1 wherein the copper is plated from asoluble anode in a plating solution of proportions 240 gramsCuSO.sub.4.5H.sub.2 O, 60 grams H.sub.2 SO.sub.4 and 1 liter of H.sub.2 O.4. A process in accordance with claim 1 wherein the copper is plated from asoluble anode in a plating solution consisting of cupric fluorobate,fluoboric acid and boric acid in distilled water.5. A process in accordance with claim 4 wherein the plating solutionproportions are: 2.05 M cupric fluoborate, 0.44 M fluoborate acid and 1.05M boric acid in distilled water.6. Apparatus for the electrolytic production of copper foil comprising,an electrolyte tank,a copper anode having at least a portion of its surface within saidelectrolyte tank,a rotatable drum having a portion of its surface disposed within said tank,said rotatable drum having a molybdenum surface and means to rotate saiddrum.7. Apparatus in accordance with claim 6 wherein said rotatable drum has asurface formed of titanium, zirconium, molybdenum alloy."}
{"WKU":"039309630","Title":"Method for the production of radiant energy imaged printed circuit boards","App_Date":"1972-02-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Joseph Polichette;Edward J. Leech","Assignee":"Photocircuits Division of Kollmorgen Corporation","ICL_Class":"H05K  318","References":"3152903;3436233;3562005;3615732;3627558;3674485;3704208;3772056","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for making printed circuit boards comprising treating aninsulating base with a solution of a reducible non-noble metal salt, aradiation sensitive reducing compound and a secondary reducer, exposingthe treated base to radiant energy in selected areas to produce freemetallic nuclei in the form of a non-conducting real image of the desiredcircuit pattern, rinsing the exposed base to remove unexposed metal salts,and exposing the real image to an electroless metal bath to build upconductor lines of electroless metal thereon.2. A process as defined in claim 1 wherein the radiant energy compriseslight, X-ray radiation or electron beams.3. A process as defined in claim 1 wherein said insulating base is opaqueto the transmission of radiant energy therethrough.4. A process as defined in claim 1 which also includes the intermediatestep of intensifying the real image by deposition of a layer ofelectroless metal from an initial electroless metal bath, prior to thestep of electrolessly plating the conductor lines.5. A process as defined in claim 1 wherein said secondary reducer is anorganic hydroxy compound selected from an alcohol or a polyol.6. A process as defined in claim 5 wherein said organic hydroxy compound isglycerol, sorbitol or pentaerythritol, or a mixture of any of theforegoing.7. A process as defined in claim 1 wherein radiation sensitive reducingcompound is a visible or ultraviolet light sensitive compound.8. A process as defined in claim 7 wherein said insulating base includes avisible or ultraviolet radiant energy absorbing barrier in an amountsufficient to render it opaque to the transmission of such energy.9. A process as defined in claim 1 wherein said composition also includes asurfactant.10. A process as defined in claim 9 wherein said surfactant is a non-ionicsurfactant.11. A process as defined in claim 1 wherein said composition also includesa metal reduction accelerator.12. A process as defined in claim 11 wherein said metal reductionaccelerator comprises a halogen compound, an organic acid or a mixturethereof.13. A process as defined in claim 1 wherein the electroless metal iscopper, nickel, cobalt, gold or silver.14. A process for making printed circuit boards comprising treating aninsulating base with a solution of a reducible non-noble metal salt, aradiation sensitive reducing compound and a secondary reducer, exposingthe treated base to radiant energy in selected areas to radiant energy inselected areas to produce free metallic nuclei in the form of anon-conducting real image of the desired circuit pattern, rinsing theexposed base to remove unexposed metal salts, exposing the real image toan electroless metal bath to build up conductor lines of electroless metalthereon said process including the subsequent step of solder coating thecircuit pattern.15. A process for making printed circuit boards comprising treating aninsulating base with a solution of a reducible non-noble metal salt, aradiation sensitive reducing compound and a secondary reducer, exposingthe treated base to radiant energy in selected areas to produce freemetallic nuclei in the form of a non-conducting real image of the desiredcircuit pattern, rinsing the exposed base to remove unexposed metal salts,exposing the real image to an electroless metal bath to build up conductorlines of electroless metal thereon said process including the step ofproviding the insulating base in areas on which electroless metaldeposition is not desired with a poison capable of lowering the catalyticactivity in the vicinity of surface imperfections which are present insaid areas.16. A process as defined in claim 15 wherein the poison comprises anelement selected from the group consisting of sulfur, tellurium, selenium,polonium, arsenic or a mixture of the foregoing.17. A process as defined in claim 15 wherein said poison is2-mercaptobenzothiazole or nickel dibutyldithiocarbamate.18. A process for making printed circuit boards comprising treating aninsulating base with a solution of a reducible non-noble metal salt, aradiation sensitive reducing compound and a secondary reducer, exposingthe treated base to radiant energy in selected areas to produce freemetallic nuclei in the form of a non-conducting real image of the desiredcircuit pattern, rinsing the exposed base to remove unexposed metal salts,exposing the real image to an electroless metal bath to build up conductorlines of electroless metal thereon, said process including the subsequentstep of depositing electroplated metal on the electroless metal.19. A process as defined in claim 18 wherein the electroplated metal iscopper, nickel, cobalt, gold or silver.20. In a process for making printed circuit boards, the steps comprising:a. treating a base material having a non-polar surface with apre-activating compound or composition;b. treating the pre-activated base material with an oxidizing agent;c. treating the pre-activated, oxidized base material with a reducingagent;d. treating the base to remove the pre-activating agent and excessoxidizing and reducing agents;e. treating the base with a poison to retard extraneous electroless metaldeposition;f. drying the base;g. treating the base with a solution of a reducible non-noble metal salt, aradiation sensitive reducing compound and a secondary reducer;h. drying the base;i. exposing the base to radiant energy in selected areas to produce freemetallic nuclei in the form of a non-conducting real image of the desiredcircuit pattern;j. rinsing the base to remove unexposed metal salts;k. immersing the base in an initial electroless metal bath to intensify thereal image;l. electrolessly plating the intensified image to form conductor lines ofthe desired thickness on the base;m. rinsing the base; andn. post-curing the base to produce the printed circuit board.21. A process as defined in claim 20 wherein the base material is opaque tothe transmission of radiant energy therethrough.22. A process as defined in claim 21 wherein the circuit pattern is formedon both major surfaces of the base.23. A process as defined in claim 20 including the steps of producing atleast one hole in the base or a pathway around the edge or through a slotbefore the pre-activating step (a), and also exposing the lateral walls ofsaid hole or holes or said pathway around said edge or said slot toradiant energy during step (i) to provide after step (k) a conductivelayer of metal on the hole walls or on the pathway around said edge orsaid slot in the printed circuit board.24. A process as defined in claim 20 including the subsequent steps ofsolder coating to produce a printed circuit board having a layer of solderon the conductor lines.25. A process as defined in claim 23 including the subsequent steps ofsolder coating to produce a printed circuit board having a continuouslayer of solder on the conductor lines and on the layer of metal in thehole walls in the printed circuit board.26. In a process for making printed circuit boards, the steps comprising:a. providing an insulating base with a resinous oxidizable surface;b. treating the base with an oxidizing agent to oxidize the surface andproduce a microporous surface;c. treating the base having a microporous surface to remove excessoxidizing agent;d. treating the base with a poison to retard extraneous electroless metaldeposition;e. drying the base;f. treating the base with a solution of a reducible non-noble metal salt, aradiation sensitive reducing compound and a secondary reducer;g. drying the base;h. exposing the base to radiant energy in selected areas to produce freemetallic nuclei in the form of a non-conducting real image of the desiredcircuit pattern;i. rinsing the base to remove unexposed metal salts;j. immersing the base in an initial electroless metal bath to intensify thereal image;k. electrolessly plating the intensified image to form conductor lines ofthe desired thickness on the base; andl. rinsing the base to produce the printed circuit board.27. A process as defined in claim 26 wherein the resinous layer is anadhesive layer containing dispersed oxidizable rubber particles.28. A process as defined in claim 26 wherein the base material is opaque tothe transmission of radiant energy therethrough.29. A process as defined in claim 28 wherein the circuit pattern is formedon both major surfaces of the base.30. A process as defined in claim 26 including the steps of producing atleast one hole in the base or a pathway around the edge of the base orthrough a slot before the oxidation step (b), and also exposing thelateral walls of said hole or holes or said pathway around said edge orsaid slot to radiant energy during step (h) to provide after step (j) aconductive layer of metal on the hole walls or on the pathway around saidedge or said slot in the printed circuit boards.31. A process as defined in claim 26 including the subsequent step ofsolder coating to produce a printed circuit board having a layer of solderon the conductor lines.32. A process as defined in claim 30 including the subsequent step ofsolder coating to produce a printed circuit board having a continuouslayer of solder on the conductor lines and on the layer of metal in thehole walls in the printed circuit board.33. In a process for making printed circuit boards, the steps comprising:a. providing an insulating base material having a resinous oxidizablesurface;b. treating the base with an oxidizing agent to oxidize the surface andproduce a microporous surface;c. treating the base having a microporous surface to remove excessoxidizing agent;d. treating the base with a poison to retard extraneous electroless metaldeposition;e. drying the base;f. treating the base with a solution of a reducible non-noble metal salt, aradiation sensitive reducing compound and a secondary reducer;g. drying the base;h. exposing the base to radiant energy in selected areas to produce freemetallic nuclei in the form of a non-conducting real image of the desiredcircuit pattern;i. rinsing the base to remove unexposed metal salts;j. immersing the base in an initial electroless metal bath to intensify thereal image; andk. electroplating the intensified image to form conductor lines of thedesired thickness on the base to produce the printed circuit board.34. A process as defined in claim 33 wherein the resinous surface is anadhesive containing dispersed oxidizable rubber particles.35. A process as defined in claim 33 wherein the base material is opaque tothe transmission of radiant energy therethrough.36. A process as defined in claim 35 wherein the circuit pattern is formedon both major surfaces of the base.37. A process as defined in claim 33, including the steps of producing atleast one hole in the base or a pathway around the edge of the base orthrough a slot before the oxidizer step (b), and also exposing the lateralwalls of said hole or holes or said pathway around said edge or said slotto radiant energy during step (h) to provide, after step (j), a conductivelayer of metal on the hole walls or on the pathway around said edge orsaid slot in the printed circuit board.38. A process as defined in claim 33 including the subsequent step ofsolder coating to produce a printed circuit board having a layer of solderon the conductor lines.39. A process as defined in claim 37 including the subsequent step ofsolder coating to produce a printed circuit board having a continuouslayer of solder on the conductor lines and on the layer of metal or metalsin the hole walls in the printed circuit board.40. In a process for making printed circuit boards, the steps comprising:a. treating an insulating base material having a non-polar surface with apre-activating compound or composition;b. treating the pre-activated base material with an oxidizing agent toproduce a microporous wettable surface on said base;c. treating the pre-activated, oxidized base material with a reducing agentto neutralize and remove excess oxidizing agent from said base;d. treating the base to remove the pre-activating agent and excessoxidizing and reducing agents;e. treating the base with a poison to retard extraneous electroless metaldeposition;f. drying the base;g. treating the base with a solution of a reducible metal metal salt, aradiation sensitive reducing compound and a secondary reducer;h. drying the base;i. exposing the base to radiant energy in selected areas to produce freemetallic nuclei in the form of a non-conducting real image of the desiredcircuit pattern;j. rinsing the base to remove unexposed metal salts;k. immersing the base in an initial electroless metal bath to intensify thereal image; andl. electroplating the intensified image to form conductor lines of thedesired thickness on the base to produce the printed circuit board.41. A process as defined in claim 40 wherein the base material is opaque tothe transmission of radiant energy therethrough.42. A process as defined in claim 41 wherein the circuit pattern is formedon both major surfaces of the base.43. A process as defined in claim 40 including the steps of producing atleast one hole in the base or a pathway around the edge of the base orthrough a slot before the pre-activating step (a), and also exposing thelateral walls of said hole or holes or said pathway around said edge orsaid slot to radiant energy during step (i) to provide, after step (k), aconductive layer of metal on the hole walls or on the pathway around saidedge or said slot in the printed circuit board.44. A process as defined in claim 40 including the subsequent step ofsolder coating to produce a printed circuit board having a layer of solderon the conductor lines.45. A process as defined in claim 43 including the subsequent step ofsolder coating to produce a printed circuit board having a continuouslayer of solder on the conductor lines and on the layer of metal or metalsin the hole walls in the printed circuit board.46. In a process for making printed circuit boards, the steps comprising:a. treating an insulating base material having a non-polar surface with apre-activating compound or composition;b. treating the pre-activated base material with an oxidizing agent toproduce a microporous, wettable surface on said base;c. treating the pre-activated, oxidized base material with a reducing agentto neutralize and remove excess oxidizing agent from said base;d. treating the base to remove the pre-activating agent and excessoxidizing and reducing agents;e. treating the base with a poison to retard extraneous electroless metaldeposition;f. drying the base;g. treating the base with a solution of a reducible copper salt and aradiation sensitive anthraquinone compound;h. drying the base;i. exposing the base to light through a negative mask to produce a realimage comprised of free copper nuclei in the form of the desired circuitpattern;j. rinsing the base to remove unexposed copper salts;k. immersing the base in an initial electroless copper bath to intensifythe real image;l. immersing the base in an electroless copper bath and plating theintensified image to form conductor lines of the desired thickness;m. rinsing the base; andn. post-curing the base to produce the printed circuit board.47. A process as defined in claim 46 wherein said insulating base includesa visible or ultraviolet radiant energy absorbing barrier in an amountsufficient to render it opaque to the transmission of such energy.48. A process as defined in claim 47 wherein the circuit pattern is formedon both major surfaces of the base.49. A process as defined in claim 46 including the steps of producing atleast one hole or a pathway around the edge of the base or through a slotin the base before the pre-activating step (a), and also exposing thelateral walls of said hole or holes or said pathway around said edge orsaid slot to radiation during step (i) to provide, after step (k), aconductive layer of copper on the hole walls or on the pathway around saidedge or said slot in the printed circuit board.50. A process as defined in claim 46 including the subsequent step ofproviding a metal plated layer on said conductor pattern by electrolessdeposition, solder coating or electroplating.51. A process as defined in claim 49 including the subsequent step ofproviding a continuous metal plated layer on said conductor pattern and inthe hole walls or on the pathways by electroless deposition, soldercoating or electroplating.52. A process for making printed circuit boards comprising treating aninsulating base with a composition of a reducible metal salt selected fromthe group consisting of copper salts, nickel salts, cobalt salts, ironsalts and mixtures thereof, a radiation sensitive reducing compound and asecondary reducer, exposing the treated base to radiant energy in selectedareas to produce free metallic nuclei in the form of a non-conducting realimage of the desired circuit pattern, rinsing the exposed base to removeunexposed metal salts, and exposing the real image to an electroless metalbath to build up conductor lines of electroless metal thereon.53. In a process for making printed circuit boards, the steps comprising:a. treating a base material having a non-polar surface with apre-activating compound or composition;b. treating the pre-activated base material with an oxidizing agent;c. treating the pre-activated, oxidized base material with a reducingagent;d. treating the base to remove the pre-activating agent and excessoxidizing and reducing agents;e. drying the base;f. treating the base with a solution of a reducible metal salt selectedfrom copper salts, nickel salts, cobalt salts, iron salts and mixturesthereof, a radiation sensitive reducing compound and a secondary reducer;g, drying the base;h. exposing the base to radiant energy in selected areas to produce freemetallic nuclei in the form of a non-conducting real image of the desiredcircuit pattern;i. rinsing the base to remove unexposed metal salts;j. immersing the base in an initial electroless metal bath to intensify thereal image;k. electrolessly plating the intensified image to form conductor lines ofthe desired thickness on the base;l. rinsing the base; andm. post curing the base to produce the printed circuit board."}
{"WKU":"039309649","Title":"Method for painting aluminum or aluminum-based alloy material","App_Date":"1974-10-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Toshiro Takahashi;Toshihiro Nagano;Matsuo Suzuki;Shozo Zuzuki;Yasuo Aoshima;Teruo Asahina;Katsushige Ikeda;Isao Hayashi;Takashi Kato;Nobuo Minagawa","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B05D  302;B05D  700;C25D 1118","References":"3533920;3622473;3704176;3711313;3775266;3799848","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method for painting aluminous material comprising the steps of:1. immersing a degreased and washed aluminous material in water at atemperature higher than 75.degree.C and applying a current thereto to forma colorless clear boehmite layer,2. immersing the aluminous material provided with the boehmite layer in awater-soluble thermosetting resin paint bath containing an organic aminehaving a temperature of 40.degree.-60.degree. C and thereafter removingthe aluminous material from the paint bath and3. heating the now painted aluminous material to a temperature of150.degree.-210.degree.C for a time sufficient to bake and cure the paintand simultaneously to complete the formation of the boehmite layer.2. A method as claimed in claim 1, wherein step (1) is effected byimmersing the degreased and washed aluminous material in an aqueoussolution of an organic amine and applying a current of 0.5 to 20 V theretoto form the colorless clear boehmite layer.3. A method as claimed in claim 1, wherein step (1) is effected byimmersing the degreased and washed aluminous material in an aqueoussolution of an organic amine with a metal more noble than the aluminousmaterial as an opposite pole to the aluminous material to form thecolorless clear boehmite layer.4. A method as claimed in claim 1, wherein step (1) is effected byimmersing the degreased and washed aluminous material in a basic aqueoussolution of a pH 9. 5-11 first at 40.degree.-75.degree. C for more thantwo minutes to form a bayerite layer on the aluminous material, and thenraising the temperature to a value higher than 75.degree. C with a metalmore noble than the aluminous material immersed in the aqueous solution asan opposite pole to the aluminous material to convert the bayerite layerto a clear and colorless boehmite layer."}
{"WKU":"039309657","Title":"Zinc-copper alloy electroplating baths","App_Date":"1974-03-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Charles N. Abbott","Assignee":"McGean Chemical Company, Inc.","ICL_Class":"C25D  358","References":"2684937;2916423;2989448","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An aqueous electroplating bath for the production of zinc-copper alloysby electrodeposition which comprises 13.5 - 40.4 gm/l zinc cyanide, 10.6 -31.7 gm/l copper cyanide, 30.0 - 52.5 gm/l sodium cyanide (Free), 15 - 45gm/l sodium hydroxide, 0.01 - 40.0 gm/l boric acid, 0.001 - 0.025 gm/lnickel ion and 0.01 - 2.0 gm/l of ethylenediaminetetra acetic acid (asalkali metal salt).2. The plating bath of claim 1 further including 1.0 to 75.0 gm/l of alkalimetal carbonate.3. An aqueous electroplating bath for the production of zinc-copper alloysby electrodeposition which comprises 13.5 to 40.4 gm/l zinc cyanide, 10.6to 31.7 gm/l copper cyanide, 30.0 to 52.5 gm/l sodium cyanide (free) and15 to 45 gm/l sodium hydroxide having dissolved therein a mixture ofadditives comprising:a. an effective amount of at least one buffering agent selected from thegroup consisting of boric acid, alkali metal borate, alkali metalphosphate, alkali metal carbonate, glycine and mixtures thereof;b. about 0.001 to about 0.025 gm./l of at least one metallic ionic materialselected from the group consisting of nickel ion and cobalt ion andmixtures thereof; andc. about 0.01 to about 2.0 gm./l of ethylenediaminetetra acetic acid (asalkali metal salt).4. The aqueous electroplating bath of claim 3 wherein said buffering agentis boric acid which is present in an amount ranging from about 0.010 toabout 40.0 gm/l.5. The aqueous electroplating bath of claim 3 wherein said buffering agentis an alkali metal borate which is present in an amount ranging from about0.010 to about 40.0 gm/l.6. The aqueous electroplating bath of claim 3 wherein said buffering agentis an alkali metal phosphate which is present in an amount ranging fromabout 0.1 to about 20.0 gm/l.7. The aqueous electroplating bath of claim 3 wherein said buffering agentis glycine which is present in an amount ranging from about 1.0 to about15.0 gm/l.8. The aqueous electroplating bath of claim 3 wherein said buffering agentis an alkali metal carbonate which is present in an amount ranging fromabout 1.0 to about 75.0 gm/l."}
{"WKU":"039309665","Title":"Method of forming colored oxide film on aluminum or aluminum alloy","App_Date":"1974-03-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Toshiro Takahashi;Toshihiro Nagano;Kenji Wada;Yasushi Suzuki","Assignee":"Riken Light Metal Industries Company, Ltd.","ICL_Class":"C25D 1108;C25D 1114","References":"2930741;2998358;3468772;3669856;3717555;3761362;3790452;3798137","Claims":"We claim as our invention:1. A method of forming a colored oxide film on aluminum which containsincidental impurities and on aluminum alloys by electrolyzing the aluminummaterial by applying a rectangular pulse voltage thereto in anelectrolytic bath consisting essentially of an aqueous solution ofsulfuric acid to form an aluminum oxide film containing aluminum suboxidesand having crystal lattice defects on the surface of the aluminummaterial, said rectangular pulse voltage having a peak voltage value inthe range of from about 5 volts to about 120 volts and a period in therange of from about 0.2 seconds to about 120 seconds.2. A method of forming a colored oxide film on an aluminum materialaccording to claim 1, wherein said rectangular pulse voltage includes apositive pulse voltage for the formation of the aluminum oxide film andfor driving the sulfuric ions into the lattice defects.3. A method of forming a colored oxide film on an aluminum materialaccording to claim 2, wherein said rectangular pulse voltage includes anegative pulse voltage to promote the reduction of the sulfuric ions toform sulfur and sulfides.4. A method of forming a colored oxide film on an aluminum materialaccording to claim 1, wherein the aqueous solution contains 5 to 90% byweight of sulfuric acid.5. A method of forming a colored oxide film on an aluminum materialaccording to claim 1, wherein the aluminum material is an aluminum alloycontaining an element whose affinity with oxygen is equal to or strongerthan that of aluminum or stronger than copper."}
{"WKU":"039309673","Title":"Process for the electrolysis of a molten charge using inconsumable","App_Date":"1974-07-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hanspeter Alder","Assignee":"Swiss Aluminium Ltd.","ICL_Class":"C25C  300;C25C  702","References":"2480474;2959527;3178363;3554893;3562122;3578580;3586613;3647673;3718550;3732157;3775099;3785941","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a process for the production of metals in a multicell type furnace,by the electrolysis of metal compounds dissolved in a molten electrolyte,comprising the steps of:disposing a first anode and a first cathode spaced apart therefrom in thefurnace,dividing said furnace into cells by disposing at least one inconsumablebipolar electrode between said first anode and said first cathode, saidbipolar electrode including a second anode the surface of which iscomposed of electron conductive ceramic oxide and a second cathode thesurface of which is composed of another electron conductive material,joined together in such a way that, under conditions found in theoperating cell, they form a mechanical and an electrical unit,maintaining a predetermined electrical potential across the first anode andthe first cathode whereby a current flows through the cell and the anionshave their charges removed at the anodes, and the metal ions have theircharges removed at the surface of the cathodes.2. In a process as claimed in claim 1, wherein said metal compound is ametal oxide, and said anions are oxygen ions.3. In a process as claimed in claim 1, wherein said metal is aluminum andsaid metal oxide is aluminum oxide.4. In a process as claimed in claim 1, wherein said second cathode iscomposed of materials compatible with the second anode materials underoperating conditions of the cell.5. Process in accordance with claim 1, whereby the current density at theanode surfaces is at least 0.001 A/cm.sup.2.6. Process in accordance with claim 5, whereby the current density is atleast 0.01 A/cm.sup.2.7. Process in accordance with claim 6, whereby the current density is atleast 0.025 A/cm.sup.2.8. Process in accordance with claim 1, characterized in that, the surfacelevel of the molten electrolyte is so maintained, that at least the freesurface of the anode is completely immersed in the melt.9. Method in accordance with claim 8, wherein the top surface of theelectrolyte melt lies in the region of the upper edge of the frame of theelectrode.10. Method in accordance with claim 1, wherein the electrolyte has acryolite basis.11. Method in accordance with claim 1, wherein the electrolyte has an oxidebasis.12. In a multicell furnace for production of metals by electrolysis ofmetal compounds dissolved in a molten electrolyte,a first anode and a first cathode disposed spaced apart in said furnace;andat least one inconsumable bipolar electrode disposed substantially parallelto and between said first anode and first cathode dividing said furnaceinto separate cells, including a second anode the surface of which iscomposed of electron conductive ceramic oxide and a second cathode thesurface of which is composed of another electron conductive material,joined together in such a way that, under conditions found in theoperating cell, they form a mechanical and an electrical unit; said firstand second anode being composed of the same material and said first andsecond cathode being composed of the same material.13. Multi-cell furnace, in accordance claim 12, wherein an electricallyconductive intermediate layer is arranged between anode and cathodematerial of the bi-polar electrode.14. Multi-cell furnace, in accordance with claim 13, wherein theintermediate layer consists of a metal or a carbide, nitride, boride,silicide or a mixture of these.15. Multi-cell furnace, in accordance with claim 14, wherein the metal issilver, nickel, copper, cobalt or molybdenum.16. Multi-cell furnace, in accordance with claim 12, wherein said ceramicoxide material is tin oxide, iron oxide, chromium oxide, cobalt oxide,nickel oxide or zinc oxide.17. Multi-cell furnace in accordance with claim 16, wherein said ceramicoxide is doped with at least one other metal oxide.18. Multi-cell furnace in accordance with claim 17, wherein said ceramicoxide consists of SnO.sub.2 and at least one other metal oxide in aconcentration of 0.01 - 20 %.19. Multi-cell furnace in accordance with claim 18, wherein the other metaloxide is present in a concentration of 0.05 - 2 %.20. Multi-cell furnace in accordance with claim 17, wherein the metalliccomponents of the additional oxide are selected from the group consistingof Fe, Sb, Cu, Mn, Nb, Zn, Cr, Co, W, Cd, Zr, Ta, In, Ni, Ca, Ba and Bi.21. Multi-cell furnace, in accordance with claim 20, wherein said ceramicoxide is doped with 0.5 - 2 % CuO and 0.5 - 2 % Sb.sub.2 O.sub.3.22. Multi-cell furnace in accordance with claim 12, wherein the cathode ofthe bipolar electrode is made of carbon or borides, carbides, nitrides orsilicides which are good electrical conductors.23. Multi-cell furnace in accordance with claim 22, wherein the cathode ismade of carbon as graphite.24. Multi-cell furnace in accordance with claim 22, wherein the cathode ismade of a material selected from the group consisting of borides,carbides, nitrides or silicides of the elements C and Si of the IV maingroup, the metals of the IV - VI subgroups of the periodic system ofelements or mixtures of these.25. Multi-cell furnace in accordance with claim 24, wherein the cathode ismade of titanium carbide, titanium boride, zirconium boride or siliconcarbide.26. Multi-cell furnace in accordance with claim 16, wherein the anode orcathode or both are made as an adherent coating on a substrate using aknown method.27. Multi-cell furnace in accordance with claim 26, wherein the substrateserves as an intermediate layer.28. Multi-cell furnace in accordance with claim 12, wherein the individualparts of the bi-polar electrode are held together by a holding means whichis a poor electrical conductor and which is stable at the temperature ofoperation.29. Multi-cell furnace in accordance with claim 28, wherein said holdingmeans consists of boron nitride, silicon nitride, aluminum oxide ormagnesium oxide.30. Multi-cell furnace in accordance with claim 28, wherein said holdingmeans is a frame.31. Multi-cell furnace in accordance with claim 12, wherein the individualparts of the electrode are operable to be held in place by solidifiedelectrolytic material and insulated in recesses in the furnace lining."}
{"WKU":"039309681","Title":"Process for the manufacture of phenylhydrazine","App_Date":"1974-02-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jurgen Cramer;Hartmuth Wilhelm Alt, deceased;by Ortwin Franz Felix Alt, heir;by Gudrun Anneliese Beyer, nee Alt, heir","Assignee":"Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C25B  304;C25B 1102;C25B 1112","References":"833513;2069206;3103473;3759812;3836440","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a process for producing phenylhydrazine by cathodic reduction ofdiazoaminobenzene in an electrolytic cell having a cathode zone withgraphite cathode therein, an anode zone with an anode therein and adiaphragm separating said cathode zone from said anode zone, and in whichprocess a catholyte comprising an alkali metal hydroxide, ammoniumhydroxide, an organic base or mixtures thereof at a temperature of-20.degree. to 90.degree.C. is caused to flow through said cathode zone, avoltage is applied across said anode and cathode to reducediazoaminobenzene to phenylhydrazine in said cell and phenylhydrazine isrecovered from said catholyte, the improvement which comprises providingin said cell a graphite cathode having grooves or internal passages formedtherein and causing said catholyte to flow through said grooves orpassages to produce phenylhydrazine at an improved yield.2. The process as claimed in claim 1, wherein said graphite cathodematerial is of particles of mean diameters from 0.5 to 30 mm.3. The process as claimed in claim 1, wherein said graphite cathodematerial is of mean diameters from 1.5 mm to 10 mm.4. The process as claimed in claim 1, wherein as graphite cathode materialone or more layers or nets of graphite or of mixtures of graphite fiberswith fibers of inert non-conductive materials are used.5. The process as claimed in claim 1, wherein as graphite cathode material,stacked, flow-through graphite plates are used.6. The process as claimed in claim 1, wherein the diaphragm is supported bya net of inert non-conductive material from the cathode body."}
{"WKU":"039309690","Title":"Process for oxidizing metal sulfides to elemental sulfur using activated","App_Date":"1974-06-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Tom P. Chen","Assignee":"Cyprus Metallurgical Processes Corporation","ICL_Class":"C25C  100;C22B  908;C22B 1508;C25C  120","References":"3736238;3767543;3798026","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a chemical leach reaction process wherein metal sulfides selectedfrom the group consisting of sulfides of metals of groups Ib, IIb, IVa, Vaand VIII of the Periodic Table are subjected to a reaction with an aqueousmedium of a temperature of at least 50.degree.C wherein the sulfide sulfuris oxidized to elemental sulfur, and the metal values are solubilized, theimprovement comprising performing the leach reaction in the presence of atleast about 2% by weight of the metal sulfides being treated of activatedcarbon.2. The process of claim 1 wherein the chemical leaching agent is ferricchloride.3. The process of claim 1 wherein the chemical leaching agent is cupricchloride.4. The process of claim 1 wherein the metal sulfide is copper sulfide.5. The process of claim 1 wherein the metal sulfide is silver sulfide.6. The process of claim 1 wherein the metal sulfide is gold sulfide.7. The process of claim 1 wherein the metal sulfide is zinc sulfide.8. The process of claim 1 wherein the metal sulfide is cadmium sulfide.9. The process of claim 1 wherein the metal sulfide is mercury sulfide.10. The process of claim 1 wherein the metal sulfide is germanium sulfide.11. The process of claim 1 wherein the metal sulfide is tin sulfide.12. The process of claim 1 wherein the metal sulfide is lead sulfide.13. The process of claim 1 wherein the metal sulfide is arsenic sulfide.14. The process of claim 1 wherein the metal sulfide is antimony sulfide.15. The process of claim 1 wherein the metal sulfide is bismuth sulfide.16. The process of claim 1 wherein the metal sulfide is iron sulfide.17. The process of claim 1 wherein the metal sulfide is cobalt sulfide.18. The process of claim 1 wherein the metal sulfide is nickel sulfide.19. The process of claim 1 wherein the metal sulfide is ruthenium sulfide.20. The process of claim 1 wherein the metal sulfide is rhodium sulfide.21. The process of claim 1 wherein the metal sulfide is palladium sulfide.22. The process of claim 1 wherein the metal sulfide is osmium sulfide.23. The process of claim 1 wherein the metal sulfide is iridium sulfide.24. The process of claim 1 wherein the metal sulfide is platinum sulfide.25. In a chemical leach reaction process wherein metal sulfides selectedfrom the group consisting of sulfides of metals of groups Ib, IIb, IVa, Vaand VIII of the Periodic Table are subjected to a reaction in an aqueousmedium at a temperature of at least 50.degree.C wherein the sulfide isoxidized to elemental sulfur, and the metal values are solubilized theimprovement comprising performing the initial portion of the chemicalleach reaction in a conventional manner, and performing the subsequentportion of the chemical leach reaction in the presence of at least about2% by weight of the metal sulfides being treated of activated carbon.26. In a chemical leach reaction process wherein metal sulfides selectedfrom the group consisting of sulfides of metals of groups Ib, IIb, IVa, Vaand VIII of the Periodic Table are subjected to a reaction in an aqueousmedium at a temperature of at least 50.degree.C wherein the sulfide isoxidized to elemental sulfur and wherein at least one of the metalsulfides consists of a noble metal sulfide and the metal values aresolubilized, the improvement comprising performing the chemical leachreaction in the presence of at least 2% by weight of the metal sulfidesbeing treated of activated carbon and adsorbing the noble metal by theactivated carbon.27. An electrolytic process wherein metal sulfides selected from the groupconsisting of sulfides of metals of groups Ib, IIb, IVa, Va and VIII ofthe Periodic Table are subjected to a reaction in an aqueous mediumwherein the sulfide sulfur is oxidized to elemental sulfur, comprising:a. providing an electrolyte in an electrolytic cell including at least ananode compartment and a cathode compartment separated by a diaphragm, theelectrolyte comprising an acidic aqueous solution of at least one chloridesalt selected from the group consisting of aluminum, chromium, copper,iron, manganese, nickel, zinc, and rare earth metals, and mixturesthereof, the solution having a concentration from about 0.5 N tosaturation;b. mixing with the electrolyte a solid feed sulfide of the metal having anaverage particle size smaller than about 60 mesh U.S. Standard;c. maintaining the temperature of the electrolyte media at about 50.degree.to 105.degree.C., and the pH of the electrolyte media below about 3.9while introducing electric current into the electrolytic cell to providean anode current density above about 12 amperes per square foot todissociate the metal sulfide into metal ions and elemental sulfur;d. performing the electrolytic dissociation in the presence of activatedcarbon; ande. recovering metal from the electrolyte.28. The process of claim 27 wherein the metal sulfide is copper sulfide.29. The process of claim 27 wherein the electrolyte comprises ferricchloride.30. The process of claim 27 wherein the electrolyte comprises cupricchloride."}
{"WKU":"039309703","Title":"Photolysis of alcohol nitrites","App_Date":"1974-11-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Derek Harold Richard Barton","Assignee":"Research Institute for Medicine and Chemistry Inc.","ICL_Class":"B01J  110","References":"3127406;3154569","Claims":"I claim:1. A process for the preparation of a mononitrate ester of a diol whereby anitrite ester of an alcohol having a hydrogen atom which is or is able tobe conformationally adjacent to the hydroxy group and in which the atomsjoining the hydrogen atom and the hydroxyl group include at least twoadjacent atoms forming part of a ring, is photolysed in the presence ofmolecular oxygen, whereby a corresponding compound is formed in which thesaid hydrogen atom is replaced by a nitrooxy group.2. A process according to claim 1 in which the photolysis is effected in asolvent selected from aromatic compounds, halogenated aromatic compounds,halogenated hydrocarbons, halogenated ethers and nitriles.3. A process according to claim 2, in which the solvent is selected frombenzene, toluene, xylene, hexafluorobenzene, chlorobenzene, thechlorotoluenes, the chloroxylenes, chloroalkanes, chlorofluoroalkanes,perfluoroalkanes, perfluoroalkylamines, perfluoromethyltetrahydrofuran andacetonitrile.4. A process according to claim 2 in which a single phase mixture or anemulsion of two solvents is used.5. A process according to claim 1 in which the reaction is effected at atemperature of from 40.degree. to the freezing point of the reactionmixture.6. A process according to claim 1 in which the reaction is effected usinglight of a wavelength of 300 nm or more.7. A process according to claim 6 in which the wavelength is 300 - 380 nm.8. A process according to claim 1 in which the starting nitrite is asteroid.9. A process according to claim 8 in which the steroid is a nitrite esterof a 6-hydroxy-, 11-hydroxy-, 7.alpha.-hydroxy- or 20-hydroxy-steroid.10. A process according to claim 8 in which the steroid containssubstituents and double bonds selected from a keto, hydroxy or acyloxygroup in the 3-position; alkyl groups in any of the 2-, 4-, 6-, 10-, 13-,14- and 16-positions; a keto, ketal or orthoester group at the20-position; a keto group or hydroxy and/or hydrocarbon or acyl groups atthe 17-position; a hydroxy or keto group at the 11- or 12-position, ahydroxy group at the 6-, 7- or 20-position, an esterified hydroxy group atthe 21-position, a double bond at 5-position or the 1- and/or 4-positionand a halogen atom in the 11- or 6-position.11. A process according to claim 8 in which the steroid is in the pregnane,lanostane, norpregnane, oestrane or cholestane series.12. A process according to claim 1 in which the nitrate obtained isreductively cleaved to yield the corresponding alcohol.13. A process according to claim 12 in which the reaction is effected usinga source of nascent hydrogen.14. A process according to claim 12 in which the diol mononitrate producedis subjected to further reactions selected from oxidation, dehydration,isomerisation, esterification, etherification and hydrolysis, before thenitrate group is cleaved.15. A process according to claim 1 in which a radio-labelled hydroxy groupis introduced."}
{"WKU":"039309711","Title":"Coating compositions","App_Date":"1974-03-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Gabriel Karoly;John L. Gardon","Assignee":"M & T Chemicals Inc.","ICL_Class":"C08F  250","References":"3205157;3711390;3711391;3721616;3721617","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An improved pigmented liquid composition which is rapidly polymerizableto form solid coatings upon exposure to ultraviolet light at ambienttemperature, the liquid composition comprising at least one epoxide, apigment which is present at a concentration (Cp) of between 10 and 50% byvolume, based on said composition, and between 0.25 and 5% by weight of adiazonium compound of the general formula##SPC6##wherein X represents a halogen radical and M represents an element selectedfrom the group consisting of antimony, arsenic, bismuth, boron, iron,phosphorus and tin; Y is selected from at least one of the groupconsisting of nitro, hydroxyl, halogen, N-morpholino, alkyl, alkoxy, aryl,amino, arylamino, alkyamino and arylmercapto radicals, p is an integerbetween 1 and 5, inclusive, r is an integer equal to the absolute value ofthe charge on the complex anion MX.sub.r.sub.+s and s is an integer equalto the valence state of M wherein the improvements consist of:a. the presence of at least one liquid epoxide selected from the groupconsisting of:1. those exhibiting the general formula##EQU6##and low molecular weight telomers thereof wherein Ar represents an aryl oralkaryl hydrocarbon radical, n is the integer 2 or 3,"}
{"WKU":"039309720","Title":"Process for preparing thermally stabilized oxymethylene polymer from","App_Date":"1973-09-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Akihiko Ito;Masaru Yoshida;Yoshiaki Nakase;Tadafumi Yamauchi;Tadashi Iwai;Koichiro Hayashi","Assignee":"Japan Atomic Energy Research Institute","ICL_Class":"C08G  202;C08G  200","References":"3677922;3703454","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A process for preparing an oxymethylene polymer comprisingmixing trioxane with about 0.01 to 15 per cent by weight based on theweight of said trioxane of a thiocyanate andcarrying out polymerization by keeping the mixture at a temperature in therange of from about 30.degree. to about 140.degree.C,said polymerization being initiated and promoted by irradiating saidmixture with an ionizing radiation at a dose rate of about 10.sup.2 -10.sup.8 rad/hr and for a total dose of about 10.sup.2 - 10.sup.8 rad.2. A process of claim 1, in which said thiocyanate is represented by theformula R-SCN wherein R is selected from an aliphatic, a cycloaliphaticand an aromatic groups.3. A process of claim 1, in which the polymerization is conducted in solidphase.4. A process of claim 1, in which at least one additive selected from thegroup consisting of a cyclic acetal, an acyclic acetal, an oxathiolane, anoxathiane and an organic carboxylic acid anhydride is concomitantlyemployed in a quantity of not more than 15% by weight of trioxane."}
{"WKU":"039309738","Title":"Electrophoretic process","App_Date":"1972-11-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Samuel T. Nerenberg","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B01D 1302","References":"2147458;2843540;2962425;2962426;3317417;3317418;3378481;3402118;3407133;3421998;3432414;3432424;3594263;3616387;3715295","Claims":"I claim:1. In an electrophoretic method for separating components of a mixedmacromolecule sample, the steps ofa. depositing an electrically conductive buffer solution containing atleast two flexible paper-thin liquid-permeable membranes in spaced apartside-by-side relationship onto an essentially rigid generally flat supportplate and layering an interconnecting buffer solution containing wickbetween adjacent edges of said membranes;b. pressing the membranes against the plate to provide a flat configurationto the membranes corresponding to that of the plate with intimate contactbetween the membranes and the plate;c. removing excess buffer solution from the membranes and area of contactbetween the membranes and the plate;d. providing two paths of buffer solution sorbed in wicks, each extendingfrom an opposing edge of an outermost of said membranes to separatereservoirs of buffer solution;e. applying a plurality of samples to the exposed surfaces of at least twoof said membranes; andf. electrophesing the samples by passing an electric current across saidmembranes between said buffer reservoirs maintained at opposite polaritieswhile said membranes are maintained having one surface in contact withsaid plate and with their opposite surfaces exposed.2. A method as in claim 1 in which different buffers are layered for eachmembrane.3. A method for carrying out counter-electrophoresis at an optimum distanceto be maintained on a counter-electrophoresis membrane between an unknownprotein sample and a plurality of antisera which comprises applying to atest membrane a plurality of site applications of a known control proteinspecimen along a first straight line perpendicular to the expected line ofprotein migration, applying to said membrane a plurality of siteapplications of a monospecific anti-serum for said protein along a secondstraight line spaced from said first straight line and at an anglethereto, subjecting said membrane to electrophoresis to cause at least aportion of said protein and at least a portion of said antiserum tomigrate toward each other and form a precipitin line, measuring thedistance between said first and second straight lines where the precipitinline is about midway between them and thereafter subjecting an unknownprotein specimen to counter-electrophoresis on a test membrane on whichthe protein specimen is applied to said membrane in a plurality of siteapplications in a line perpendicular to the expected line of proteinmigration and a plurality of antisera are applied to said membrane in aplurality of site applications in a line parallel to said line of proteinapplications and spaced therefrom by said measured distance.4. In an electrophoretic method for separating components of a mixedmacromolecule sample, the steps ofa. depositing an electrically conductive buffer solution containing aflexible paper-thin, liquid-permeable membrane onto opposite faces of anessentially rigid generally flat support plate;b. pressing each membrane against the plate to provide a flat configurationto the membrane corresponding to that of the plate with intimate contactbetween the membrane and the plate;c. removing excess buffer solution from each membrane and area of contactbetween the membrane and plate;d. providing for each membrane two paths of buffer solution sorbed inwicks, each extending from an opposing edge of said membrane to separatereservoirs of buffer solution;e. applying a plurality of samples to the exposed surface of each membrane;andf. simultaneously electrophesing the samples on each membrane by passing anelectric current across said membrane between said buffer reservoirsmaintained at opposite polarities while said membrane is maintained havingone surface in contact with said plate and with its opposite surfaceexposed."}
{"WKU":"039309746","Title":"Two stage selective leaching of metal values from ocean floor nodule ore","App_Date":"1973-05-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William S. Kane;Paul H. Cardwell","Assignee":"Deepsea Ventures, Inc.","ICL_Class":"C25c  110","References":"3169856;3374090;3466169","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for selectively removing metal values from an ocean floornodule ore, the nodule ore comprising as primary components the oxides ofmanganese and iron and as secondary components, compounds of copper,cobalt and nickel, the process comprising the steps of (a) leaching thenodule ore with an aqueous solution of a mineral acid, which is capable ofreacting with the ore to form water-soluble salts of nickel and copper,without reducing substantially any of the tetravalent manganese in the oreto divalent manganese, selected from the group consisting of sulfuric acidand aqueous hydrogen halide solutions, to form an aqueous solutioncomprising the dissolved water-soluble salts of copper and nickel; (b)separating the aqueous solution from insoluble ore solids to form apregnant leach solution comprising the mixed soluble salts of copper andnickel; (c) separating the individual copper and nickel metal values byselectively extracting at least one of the metal values from the aqueousleach solution to form two separate solutions of the individual metalvalues, respectively, in the form of a water-soluble salt of each; (d)obtaining an aqueous, releach solution comprising dissolved water-solublesalts of manganese and cobalt, substantially free from iron, by thefollowing steps: (i) releaching the insoluble ore solids with an aqueoussolution of a reducing agent capable of forming water-soluble salts ofcobalt and manganese, and selected from the group consisting of ferroussulfate, ferrous halides and sulfur dioxide to form an aqueous solutioncomprising dissolved cobalt, manganese and iron, and, in any chronologicalorder or simultaneously, (ii) separating the aqueous solution from aninsoluble ore residue; (iii) oxygenating the aqueous solution to convertthe dissolved iron to an insoluble iron oxide, and (iv) separating theaqueous solution from the insoluble iron oxide; (e) separating out theindividual metal values from the releach solution by selectivelyextracting cobalt from the releach solution to form a separate solution ofthe cobalt value in the form of a water-soluble salt and a releachraffinate substantially free of cobalt; and (f) reducing the individualmetal values thus obtained to the respective elemental metals bycathodically electroplating the individual metal values.2. The process of claim 1, wherein the copper is selectively extracted fromthe first pregnant leach solution by contacting the first pregnant leachsolution with a water-immiscible liquid ion exchange extraction mediumselective to extract copper, separating the extraction medium containingthe copper value from an aqueous leach raffinate substantially free ofcopper, and stripping the copper from the extraction medium with an acidicaqueous stripping solution to form a separate aqueous solution of thecopper.3. The process of claim 2, comprising in addition contacting the aqueousleach raffinate solution with a water-immiscible liquid ion exchangeextraction medium selective to extract nickel from the leach raffinate,separating the extraction medium containing the nickel from the aqueoussolution substantially free of nickel, and stripping the nickel from theextraction medium with a weak acid solution having a hydrogen ionconcentration less than about 6N, to form a separate aqueous solution ofnickel.4. The process of claim 3, wherein the weak acid solution is theelectrolyte from a nickel sulfate aqueous electrolysis cell.5. The process of claim 3 wherein the liquid ion exchange extraction mediumcomprises an extracting agent selected from the group consisting ofalpha-hydroxyoximes and the hydrocarbyl-substituted-8-hydroxyquinolines.6. The process of claim 2, wherein the stripping solution is theelectrolyte from an aqueous copper sulfate electrolysis cell.7. The process of claim 1, wherein the cobalt is selectively extracted fromthe second pregnant releach solution by contacting the pregnant releachsolution with a water-immiscible liquid ion exchange extraction mediumselective to extract cobalt, separating the extraction medium containingthe cobalt value from an aqueous releach raffinate substantially free ofcobalt and stripping the cobalt from the extraction medium with an aqueoussolution of hydrochloric acid having a concentration of hydrogen ion andchloride ion of at least 6N each to form a highly acidic solution ofcobalt chloride.8. The process of claim 7 wherein the liquid iron exchange extractionmedium comprises an extracting agent selected from the group consisting ofalapha-hydroxyoximes and the hydrocarbyl-substituted-8-hydroxyquinolines.9. The process of claim 1, wherein the reducing agent reacts with thecobalt and manganese present in the nodule ore to form the soluble sulfatesalts of cobalt and manganese.10. The process of claim 1, wherein the reducing agent reacts with thecobalt and manganese present in the nodule ore to form the solublechloride salts of cobalt and manganese.11. The process of claim 1, wherein the mineral acid is sulfuric acid.12. The process of claim 1, wherein the mineral acid is hydrochloric acid.13. The process of claim 1, wherein the individual metal values arecathodically electroplated from an aqueous solution of their individualmetal salts.14. The process of claim 7 comprising extracting the cobalt from the highlyacidic solution with an extracting medium, from which the cobalt can bestripped using a weakly acidic electrolyte solution from an aqueous cobaltelectrolytic cell, leaving an aqueous raffinate 6N in chloride andhydrogen ion substantially free of cobalt.15. The process of claim 1, wherein the aqueous solution of the mineralacid is derived from a manganese electrolysis cell.16. The process of claim 1 comprising in addition treating the releachraffinate with a reagent capable of precipitating metal value more noblethan manganese which may be present in the releach raffinate, andseparating the precipitated metal value from the aqueous solutioncomprising soluble manganese salts.17. The process of claim 1 wherein the reducing agent is sulfur dioxide andthe oxygenation occurs simultaneously with the releaching of the insolubleore with the aqueous solution of the reducing agent and wherein thereleach solution is simultaneously separated from the insoluble oreresidue and from the insoluble iron oxide.18. A process for separating metal values from an ocean floor nodule ore,the nodule ore comprising as primary components the oxides of manganeseand iron and as secondary components, compounds of copper, cobalt andnickel, the process comprising the steps of (a) leaching the nodule orewith a mineral acid selected from the group consisting of aqueous hydrogenhalides and sulfuric acid so as to form an aqueous solution comprising thecorresponding water-soluble salts of the copper and nickel present in thenodule ore; (b) separating the aqueous solution from insoluble ore solidsto form a first pregnant leach solution comprising the mixed water-solublesalts of copper and nickel; (c) releaching the insoluble ore solids withan aqueous solution of a reducing agent capable of forming water-solublesalts of cobalt and manganese and oxygenating the aqueous solution so thatsubstantially all of the iron is in an insoluble ore residue; (d)separating the aqueous solution from the insoluble ore residue so as toform a second pregnant releach solution comprising water-soluble salts ofcobalt and manganese and substantially free of iron; (e) separating outthe individual metal values from the pregnant leach solution byselectively extracting the copper from the pregnant leach solution to forma separate solution of a water-soluble copper salt and a leach raffinate;(f) separating out the individual metal values from the second pregnantreleach solution by selectively extracting cobalt from the releachsolution to form a separate solution of the cobalt value in the form of awater-soluble salt and a releach raffinate; (g) selectively extracting thenickel from the leach raffinate to form a separate solution of the nickelin the form of a water-soluble salt; (h) removing other metal values morenoble than manganese from the releach raffinate; and (i) reducing theindividual metal values to the elemental metal by cathodicallyelectroplating from the individual metal salt.19. The process of claim 18, wherein the mineral acid is sulfuric acid andwherein cobalt sulfate and manganese sulfate are dissolved in the secondpregnant releach solution.20. The process of claim 18, wherein the cathodic electroplating of each ofthe metal salts is carried out in an aqueous electrolyte solution.21. A process for selectively removing metal values from an ocean floornodule ore, the nodule ore comprising as primary components the oxides ofmanganese and iron and as secondary components, compounds of copper,cobalt and nickel, the process comprising the steps of (a) leaching thenodule ore with a mineral acid selected from the group consisting ofaqueous hydrogen halides and sulfuric acid to form an aqueous solutioncomprising the dissolved water-soluble salts of copper and nickel; (b)separating the aqueous solution from any insoluble ore solids to form apregnant leach solution comprising the mixed soluble salts of copper andnickel; (c) separating out the individual metal values from the pregnantleach solution by selectively extracting the copper from the pregnantleach solution to form a separate solution of the copper value in the formof a water-soluble salt; (d) releaching the insoluble ore solids with anaqueous solution of sulfur dioxide while oxygenating the aqueous solutionto form an aqueous pregnant leach solution comprising the water-solublesalts of cobalt and manganese and water-insoluble solids comprising oreresidue and iron oxide; (e) separating the releach solution from theinsoluble solids; (f) separating out the individual metal values from thereleach solution by selectively extracting cobalt from the releachsolution to form a separate solution of the cobalt value in the form of awater-soluble salt and a releach raffinate substantially free of cobaltand thus forming four separate aqueous solutions comprising the coppervalue, the nickel value, the manganese value, and the cobalt value,respectively.22. The process of claim 21, wherein the reducing agent reacts with thecobalt and manganese present in the nodule ore to form the soluble sulfatesalts of cobalt and manganese.23. The process of claim 21, wherein the mineral acid is sulfuric acid.24. The process of claim 21, wherein the mineral acid is hydrochloric acid.25. A process for selectively removing metal values from an ocean floornodule ore, the nodule ore comprising as primary components, the oxides ofmanganese and iron and as secondary components, compounds of copper,cobalt and nickel, the process comprising the steps of (a) leaching thenodule ore with an aqueous solution of a mineral acid, which is capable ofreacting with the ore to form water-soluble salts of nickel and copper,selected from the group consisting of sulfuric acid and aqueous hydrogenhalide solutions, to form an aqueous solution comprising the dissolvedwater-soluble salts of copper and nickel, without reducing substantiallyany of the tetravalent manganese in the ore to divalent manganese; (b)separating the aqueous solution from insoluble ore solids to form apregnant leach solution comprising the mixed soluble salts of copper andnickel; (c) separating the individual copper and nickel metal values byselectively extracting at least one of the metal values from the aqueousleach solution to form two separate solutions of the individual metalvalues, respectively, in the form of a water-soluble salt of each; (d)releaching the insoluble ore solids with an amount of an aqueous solutionof a reducing agent selected from the group consisting of ferrous halidesand ferrous sulfate, to form an aqueous pregnant leach solution comprisingthe water-soluble salts of cobalt and manganese substantially free ofdissolved iron; (e) separating the releach solution from any insoluble oreresidue; (f) separating out the individual metal values from the releachsolution by selectively extracting cobalt from the releach solution toform a separate solution of the cobalt value in the form of awater-soluble salt and a releach second raffinate substantially free ofcobalt; and (g) reducing the individual metal values thus obtained to therespective elemental metals by cathodically electroplating the individualmetal values."}
{"WKU":"039309754","Title":"Sputtering method for producing solder-fast copper layers","App_Date":"1974-10-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Gert Siegle;Hans Lutz;Helmut Adam;Erhard Gossl","Assignee":"Robert Bosch G.m.b.H.","ICL_Class":"C23C 1500;H01L 21283","References":"3720541;3766041;3798146;3835007","Claims":"We claim:1. Method of producing a solder-fast thin film circuit unit having copperlayer connection paths and contact patches which comprises the step ofcathodically sputtering copper onto a substrate in a circuit patternincluding contact patches, said sputtering being carried out in a gasdischarge medium consisting of a monatomic gas with an admixture ofbetween 0.5 and 16% by volume of a normally predominantly diatomicatmospheric gas under conditions in which said atmospheric gas is taken upin part in said copper layer and reduces the conductivity of the depositedcopper to between 7 and 40% of the conductivity of a pure copper layer,whereby contact patches capable of being soldered and of withstandingsoldering are produced.2. Method as defined in claim 1 in which said substrate is a substratewhich has been previously provided with constituting a surface layer aresistance to electrical conductivity.3. Method as defined in claim 2 in which said copper layer is sputteredwithout any intermediate sputtering of an interleaved layer functioning asa diffusion barrier.4. Method as defined in claim 1 in which said monatomic gas is argon and inwhich said atmospheric gas is nitrogen.5. Method as defined in claim 1 in which said monatomic gas is argon andsaid atmospheric gas is oxygen.6. Method as defined in claim 1 in which said monatomic gas is argon andsaid atmospheric gas is air.7. Method as defined in claim 1 in which the amount of said admixture of anatmospheric gas is between 2 and 4% by volume.8. Method as defined in claim 1 in which the copper sputtering step employsa pure copper target cathode.9. Method as defined in claim 1 in which sputtering is carried out under apotential between 3 and 8 kV. in a diode apparatus.10. Method as defined in claim 9 in which said potential is approximately 6kV.11. Method as defined in claim 1 in which during the cathode sputteringstep a gas flow through the sputtering vessel is provided of a magnitude,reduced to normal conditions, between 0.1 and 3 liters per hour.12. Method as defined in claim 11 in which said gas flow is approximately 1liter per hour and the cathode surface has an area of approximately 1,000cm.sup.2.13. Method as define in claim 1 in which the sputtering step is carried outfor such a period that the copper layer produced has a thickness of about0.5 .mu.m.14. Method as defined in claim 1 in which monatomic gas is argon and saidatmospheric gas is a mixture of oxygen and nitrogen.15. Method of producing a solder-fast thin film unit having a resistivelayer and a copper layer thereon which comprises the step of cathodicallysputtering copper onto a substrate which has previously been provided witha surface layer of a material selected from the group which consists oftantalum nitride, tantalum oxynitride and mixtures of tantalum andaluminum, said step of sputtering copper being carried out in a gasdischarge medium consisting of a monatomic gas with an admixture ofbetween 0.5 and 16% by volume of a normally predominantly diatomicatmospheric gas under conditions in which said atmospheric gas is taken upin part in said copper layer and reduces the conductivity of the depositedcopper to between 7 and 40% of the conducitivity of a pure copper layer."}
{"WKU":"039309762","Title":"Glass electrode assembly","App_Date":"1974-01-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John Cadwaladr Owen","Assignee":"George Kent Limited","ICL_Class":"G01N 2736","References":"2256733;2756203;2844532;3234117;3424664;3476671;3551315","Claims":"I claim:1. An electrochemical electrode assembly comprising a tube of glassterminating in a glass member defining a glass membrane, said membercontaining a quantity of electrolyte in contact with the internal surfaceof said membrane, the external surface of said membrane being externallyaccessible, closure means retaining the electrolyte in said tube, anelectrical conductor passing through said closure means and extending intosaid electrolyte, an electrical lead extending into said tube andconnected to said conductor, an electrical screen surrounding said leadand extending to the proximity of said closure member, and a sleevemounted within said tube and abutting at one end against said closuremeans, said closure means comprising a plug of resilientelectrically-insulating material having two portions of differentdiameter, the larger diameter portion of said plug being of a size suchthat it is compressed by said tube and provides a sealing fit against theinside wall of said tube and said electrical conductor, and the smallerdiameter portion of said plug being fitted within said sleeve andproviding a sealing fit against the inside wall of the sleeve, wherebysaid plug forms an electrically-insulating barrier between the electrolyteand said electrical screen.2. An electrochemical electrode comprising a tube of glass terminating in aglass member defining a glass membrane, said member containing a quantityof electrolyte in contact with the internal surface of said membrane, theexternal surface of said membrane being externally accessible, closuremeans retaining the electrolyte in said tube, a metallic electricalconductor passing through said closure means and extending into saidelectrolyte, and a co-axial screened electrical cable extending into saidtube, said cable comprising an inner electrical lead connected to saidconductor, a co-axial electrical screen surrounding said lead andinsulated therefrom, and an external electrically insulating covering onsaid screen, characterized in that said closure means comprises apreformed plug of resilient electrical insulating material which in anunstressed condition has a transverse cross section of the same shape butlarger diameter than the cross section of the interior of the tube,whereby upon insertion in the tube the plug is compressed by said tubebetween the wall of the tube and the electrical conductor, and the end ofsaid cable is embedded in a mass of resilient electrically insulatingsealing material on the adjacent end of the plug, whereby said plug andsaid mass of sealing material form an electrically insulating barrierbetween the electrolyte and the screen on the cable in direct sealingcontact with said conductor, screen and tube.3. An electrochemical electrode as claimed in claim 2, characterized inthat the end of the plug remote from the electrolyte is formed with arecess, the end of the cable extends into said recess, and the mass ofsealing material is cast in said recess so as to embed the end of thecable in the sealing material."}
{"WKU":"039309770","Title":"Protection system for equipment and metallic fittings of non-metallic","App_Date":"1973-04-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ralph E. Wood","Assignee":"Dunwood Development Corporation","ICL_Class":"C23F 1300;B63B 1700","References":"2762767;2878173;2890157;3223604;3241512;3303118;3383588;3636409;3769926","Claims":"I therefore particularly point out and distinctly claim as my invention:1. In a system protecting personnel and electrical equipment of dockedpower boats having non-metallic hulls and protecting the immersed metalfittings of such hulls from corrosion, said boats being supplied from ashore-based source of 3-wire, customary voltage alternating currentcomprising a hot leg, a neutral leg and an equipment ground;circuit breakers inserted in the hot leg and the neutral leg of thealternating current supply;a polarity alarm which will continue to operate when a circuit breaker isin open position;a grounding socket adapted to receive a polarity light tester;a battery ground;a ground plate and a bonding ground, andan electrical circuit in which the negative lead of the battery ground, theequipment ground, and the neutral leg of the shore-based alternatingcurrent supply are electrically connected with both the ground plate andthe bonding ground of the boat.2. The protective system of claim 1 in which the polarity alarm includes abell for audible warning and a light for visual warning.3. The protective system of claim 1 in which the shore-based power sourceis 110-120 volt, 3-wire alternating current."}
{"WKU":"039309789","Title":"Circuit of electrolytic cells","App_Date":"1975-01-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Wolfgang Strewe;Luciano Mose;Wolfgang Kramer;Bernd Strasser","Assignee":"Friedrich Uhde GmbH","ICL_Class":"C25B  904","References":"2649510","Claims":"We claim:1. A circuit of electrolytic cells installed in electrical series,comprising:a plurality of vertical electrode cells whose aspect ratio of cell lengthto cell width is at least 2:1, said cells being disposed in at least onerow so that the anode lead-in and cathode lead-out busbars are disposedalong the length of each cell, said cell circuit containing at least oneportable jumper switch beneath a cell row and movable along the centerline of the cell row, said portable jumper switch having cell connectorson opposite sides, said jumper switch permitting that a cell may be takenout of service by conducting the current through the jumper switch withoutinterrupting continuous operation of the other cells in the circuitthereby ensuring that the electric current flow through said connectors ofthe jumper switch from one cell to the other cell connected to the jumperswitch is rectilinear in the top view of the cell row.2. A circuit of electrolytic cells according to claim 1 wherein the supportmeans of the cells and the support structure carrying the cells arelocated outside the switch operating area permitting installation,movement and operation of the portable jumper switch beneath the cell row.3. A circuit of electrolytic cells according to claim 2 wherein the supportstructure supporting the cells is also used for supporting the cellgangways.4. A circuit of electrolytic cells according to claim 2 wherein the supportstructure carrying the cells is also used for supporting the piping of thecell room.5. A circuit of electrolytic cells according to claim 1 wherein the anodelead-in and cathode lead-out busbars are uniformly disposed acrosssubstantially the entire length of the cells.6. A circuit of electrolytic cells according to claim 1 wherein the anodelead-in and cathode lead-out busbars are provided with separate electricalcontact areas for the cell to cell connection and for the cell to switchconnection.7. A circuit of electrolytic cells according to claim 1 containing at leastone portable jumper switch, said jumper switch comprising a plurality offlexible cell connectors, a plurality of switch contacts all evenlydisposed across substantially the entire length of the switchcorresponding to the length of the cell.8. A circuit of electrolytic cells according to claim 1 wherein meanssupporting the crossover busbars are arranged to be located below thelevel of the cell gangway."}
{"WKU":"039309797","Title":"Porous diaphragms","App_Date":"1974-06-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Christopher Vallance","Assignee":"Imperial Chemical Industries Limited","ICL_Class":"C25C  200","References":"2542527;3257334;3282875;3718561","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A process for the manufacture of a porous diaphragm of a syntheticmaterial for use in an electrolytic cell which comprises forming a sheetof the synthetic material in admixture with a solid particulate additiveto be removed therefrom, introducing said sheet into an electrolytic cell,and removing solid particulate additive from the sheet in situ in the cellby treating the sheet with an acid containing a corrosion inhibitor.2. A process as claimed in claim 1 wherein the acid is a mineral acid.3. A process as claimed in claim 2 wherein the acid is nitric, sulphuric orhydrochloric acid.4. A process as claimed in claim 3 wherein the acid is 16 to 18% by weighthydrochloric acid.5. A process as claimed in claim 1 wherein the acid is an alkanoic acid.6. A process as claimed in claim 5 wherein the acid is acetic acid.7. A process as claimed in claim 1 wherein the corrosion inhibitor ispropargyl alcohol.8. A process as claimed in claim 1 wherein the corrosion inhibitor isthiourea.9. A process as claimed in claim 1 wherein the corrosion inhibitor is analkali metal thiocyanate.10. A process as claimed in claim 9 wherein the corrosion inhibitor ispotassium thiocyanate.11. A process as claimed in claim 1 wherein the proportion of corrosioninhibitor is in the range 0.01 to 5.0 percent by volume based on thevolume of acid.12. A process as claimed in claim 11 wherein the proportion of corrosioninhibitor is 0.1 percent by volume based on the volume of acid.13. A process as claimed in claim 1, which is carried out at ambienttemperature.14. A process as claimed in claim 1, which is carried out at a temperaturein the range 50.degree. to 60.degree.C.15. A process as claimed in claim 1 wherein the synthetic material ispolytetrafluoroethylene.16. A process as claimed in claim 1 wherein the solid particulate additiveis starch, cellulose, cellulose acetate, or a water-insoluble base orcarbonate.17. A process as claimed in claim 16 wherein the removable solidparticulate additive is maize starch and/or potato starch or calciumcarbonate.18. An electrolytic cell fitted with a porous diaphragm, which porousdiaphragm is produced in accordance with claim 1.19. An electrolytic cell as claimed in claim 18 for the electrolysis of analkali metal chloride brine.20. An electrolytic cell as claimed in claim 18 for the electrolysis ofsodium chloride brine."}
{"WKU":"039309800","Title":"Electrolysis cell","App_Date":"1970-06-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Oronzio De Nora;Vittorio De Nora","Assignee":"Oronzio De Nora Impianti Elettrochimici S.p.A.","ICL_Class":"C25B 1300","References":"563972;1620052;1790248;1815078;2739936;3236760;3536598;3563878","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In an electrolysis cell, a plurality of cell units, a rectangular framearound each cell unit, an anode compartment and a cathode compartment ineach cell unit, said anode compartments and cathode compartments beingseparated from the anode and cathode compartments of the adjacent cellunits by a continuous separating partition of a ferrous metal on thecathode side and a valve metal on the anode side, said frames and theanode and cathode compartments therein being substantially rectangularthroughout and extending substantially from top to bottom and from side toside of said cell units, a plurality of valve metal anodes in hollow waveform in each said anode compartment, valve metal electrical connectorsbetween the base of the waves of said anodes and the valve metal of saidseparating partition, said electrical connectors spacing the anodes fromthe valve metal of said partitions, an electrically conductiveelectrocatalytic coating on said anode waves, a plurality of metalcathodes in wave form in said cathode compartments, electrical connectorsbetween the base of said cathode waves and the ferrous metal of saidpartitions, said electrical connectors spacing the cathodes from theferrous metal of said partitions, said anodes and cathodes extendingsubstantially vertically in said compartments substantially from the topto the bottom and from side to side of said compartments, said anodes andcathodes being nested together to provide a substantially uniform spacingbetween the anode and cathode surfaces, a lining on the side walls of saidanode compartments resistant to the electrolyte and electrolysisconditions, means to feed an electrolyte to said cell, means to pass anelectrolysis current through the electrolyte between said anode andcathode surfaces, means to discharge anodic gases and cathodic gases fromsaid cell, and means to discharge a catholyte liquor from the cathodecompartments of said cell.2. The cell of claim 1, in which diaphragms are provided between the anodeand cathode waves.3. The cell of claim 2, in which the anodes are made of titanium, and thelining of the anode compartment is made of titanium.4. A bipolar electrolysis cell according to claim 2, in which the cathodesare diaphragm covered steel net and the anodes are open mesh titaniumprovided with a conductive electrocatalytic coating.5. A bipolar electrolysis cell according to claim 4, in which the anodesare in the form of closed end fingers extending from the valve metalportion of said separating partitions, the cathodes are in the form offingers extending from the ferrous metal portion of said separatingpartitions, the rectangular frame is titanium lined, the anode fingers andthe cathode fingers nest together providing a uniform spacing therebetweenand the valve metal of said separating partitions and the ferrous metal ofsaid separating partitions are secured together back to back to provide abipolar metallic electrical contact between one cell unit and another cellunit.6. A bipolar cell according to claim 5, in which the titanium and theferrous metal of said separating partitions are secured together byelectric welding.7. A bipolar electrolyzer according to claim 5, in which the titaniumportion and the ferrous metal portion of said separating partitions aresecured together by titanium bolts extending through the titanium portioninto threaded holes in the ferrous metal portion of said separatingpartitions and the anode waves are connected to the titanium bolts toprovide an electrical path between the bipolar cell units.8. The cell of claim 7, in which the anode waves are connected to thetitanium bolts which extend into the ferrous metal portion of theseparating partitions by smaller titanium bolts which are screw threadedinto a hole in the first-named titanium bolts.9. A bipolar electrolyzer according to claim 5, in which the cathodecompartments are surrounded by a rectangular-shaped steel pipe frame, saidframe has a number of holes in its upper horizontal leg for the passage ofgas into the horizontal leg and a gas discharge passage from saidhorizontal leg and one of the side legs of said frame has holes for thepassage of catholyte liquor into said side leg and said side leg isconnected to an adjustable catholyte outlet.10. The cell of claim 1, in which the anodes are of open mesh constructionand each cell unit is provided with a diaphragm and means are provided toregulate the level of the catholyte liquor in the cathode compartments.11. A bipolar electrolyzer according to claim 1, in which a chlorineresistant container on the top of each cell unit receives producedchlorine gas from the cell units and feeds fresh brine into the cellunits.12. The cell of claim 1, in which the means to discharge catholyte liquorfrom the cathode compartment constitutes an adjustable tube to control thecatholyte liquor level in said cell unit.13. The cell of claim 1, in which the rectangular frame of each cell unitis provided with flanges matching with the flanges of the adjacent cellunit, gaskets are provided between said flanges and all the cell units areheld together with said flanges in contact with said gaskets by tie rodsinsulated from their surrounding parts.14. In a bipolar electrolysis cell, a positive end unit containing anodesand cathodes, a negative end unit containing anodes and cathodes and aplurality of intermediate units containing anodes and cathodes, all ofsaid units being substantially rectangular and each of said units havingan anode compartment and a cathode compartment, said anode compartmentsand cathode compartments being separated from the adjacent cell units by acontinuous partition of ferrous metal on the cathode side and a valvemetal on the anode side, a corrosion resistant lining in each of saidanode compartments, said units being connected in series to pass anelectrolysis current through all of said cell units, the anode beingconstructed of a valve metal in the form of open mesh hollow finger-likewaves and the cathodes being constructed of ferrous metal in the form ofhollow finger-like waves which are nested together, means to permit anodicgases rising through the electrolyte to escape from the electrolyte fromboth the front and back of the anodes and from the top of each cell unit,the cathodes of one cell unit being connected back to back to the anodesof the adjacent cell unit by a metal to metal contact between the valvemetal anodes and the ferrous metal cathodes through said partitions.15. The electrolysis cell of claim 14, in which the anodes are formed oftitanium having an electrocatalytic conductive coating thereon, thecathodes are formed of ferrous metal, and a diaphragm is provided betweenthe anodes and cathodes.16. The cell of claim 15, in which the anodes are supported on the valvemetal portion of said separating partitions, the said valve metal portionalso forms part of the lining of the anode compartments, a titanium liningis provided on the side walls of the anode compartments, the cathodes aresupported on the ferrous metal portion of said separating partitions andthe two portions of said partitions are secured together back to back witha metal to metal contact.17. The cell of claim 16, in which the space between the cathodes and theferrous metal portion of the separating partitions forms a catholytechamber and said space is surrounded by a rectangular pipe, said pipehaving openings to receive and discharge catholyte gas and openings toreceive and discharge catholyte liquor.18. The electrolysis cell of claim 14, in which gas formed at the anodesrises through the electrolyte and is fed into a gas receiver at the top ofeach unit.19. In an electrolysis cell, a first hollow rectangular metal box-likesupport, vertically mounted hollow metal anode fingers supported on andprojecting from said first box-like support, means to introduceelectrolyte into said first box-like support and said anode fingers, asecond hollow rectangular metal box-like support, vertically mountedhollow cathode fingers supported on and projecting from said secondbox-like support, means to discharge spent electrolyte from said secondbox-like support, the said first and second box-like supports beingsecured together, back to back, in electronically conductive contact.20. The cell of claim 19, in which the first hollow box-like support andthe anode fingers supported thereby are made of titanium, the secondhollow box-like support and the cathode fingers supported thereby are madeof steel and each pair of anode and cathode fingers is enclosed within ahollow box-like enclosure forming the side walls of the cell.21. The cell of claim 20, in which the first hollow box-like support has apassage for the inlet of electrolyte into the cell and a passage for theoutlet of anodic gases, and the second hollow box-like support has apassage for the outlet of cathodic gases and a passage for the outlet ofcatholyte liquor.22. In a bipolar electrolysis cell, an intermediate cell element comprisinga first hollow valve metal box-like support, hollow open mesh valve metalanode fingers supported on and projecting vertically from said firstsupport, means to introduce electrolyte into said first box-like supportand discharge anodic gases therefrom, a second hollow metal box-likesupport, hollow open mesh metal cathode fingers supported on andprojecting vertically from said second support, means to dischargecathodic gases and spent electrolyte from said second box-like support,the said anode and cathode fingers communicating with the interior oftheir respective supports, the said first and second supports beingelectrically secured to each other, back to back, and a hollow rectangularbox-like enclosure, for each pair of anode and cathode fingers, formingthe side walls of each cell element."}
{"WKU":"039309819","Title":"Bipolar electrolysis cells with perforate metal anodes and baffles to","App_Date":"1974-06-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Oronzio De Nora;Vittorio De Nora","Assignee":"Oronzio De Nora Impianti Elettrochimici S.p.A.","ICL_Class":"C25B 1103;C25B 1108;C25B 1110","References":"1771091;3676315;3809630","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In an electrolysis cell having substantially vertically mounteddimensionally stable hollow wave anodes and diaphragm covered hollow wavecathodes nested together and forming an interelectrodic gap in wave formtherebetween, the method of removing anodic gases from the interelectrodicgap between the hollow wave anodes and the diaphragm covered hollow wavecathodes, which comprises passing the gases released at the anodessubstantially vertically upward in the interelectrodic gap along the anodefaces, passing the gases through openings in the anode faces, deflectingthe gases to the back of the anodes, away from the top of theinterelectrodic gap and discharging the gases from the interelectrodic gapand from the top of the space behind the anodes.2. The method of claim 1, in which the gases are deflected to the back ofthe anodes by baffles at the back of the anodes.3. The method of claim 1, in which the gases are deflected to the back ofthe anodes by baffles at the front of the anodes.4. The method of claim 1, in which the gases are deflected into a spacebehind the anodes which is larger than the space between the hollow waveanodes and the hollow wave cathodes.5. The method of claim 1, in which the gases released at the anodes arepassed through diamond-shaped openings in the anodes in which the top ofthe diamonds are forward of the center longitudinal plane of the anodesand the bottom of the diamonds are rearward of the center longitudinalplane of the anodes and the gases released from the bottom area of thediamond-shaped openings are deflected from the front to the back of theanodes.6. The method of claim 1, in which the gases released at the anodes travelsubstantially vertically upward along anode rods and are deflected towardthe rear of the anode rods away from the interelectrodic gap by bafflesextending away from the interelectrodic gap and upwardly from the anoderods.7. In an electrolysis cell having substantially vertically mounteddimensionally stable hollow metal anodes and cathodes in nested wave formforming an interelectrodic gap in wave form therebetween, an electricallyconducting electrocatalytic coating on said dimensionally stable anodes,facing said gap, a diaphragm in said gap covering said cathodes, passagesthrough the anodes for the escape of anodic gases formed at the anodefaces to the rear of the anodes, and deflectors, deflecting the anodicgases upwardly and away from the interelectrodic gap.8. The cell of claim 7, in which the cell is bipolar and the space behindthe hollow anodes and cathodes in wave form is greater than the space inthe interelectrodic gap and the anodic gases are deflected into the saidgreater space.9. The cell of claim 7, in which the deflectors are at the back of saidanodes.10. The cell of claim 7, in which the deflectors are at the front of saidanodes.11. The cell of claim 7, in which the deflectors are at both the front andback of said anodes.12. The cell of claim 7, in which the passages through the anodes arediamond-shaped openings and in which the top of the diamonds are forwardof the center longitudinal plane of the anodes and the bottom of thediamonds are rearward of the center longitudinal plane of the anodes, sothat gases released from the bottom area of the diamond -shaped openingswill pass through the diamond-shaped openings and be deflected away fromthe interelectrodic gap.13. The cell of claim 7, in which the anodes are formed of substantiallyvertically arranged rods secured to said deflectors.14. The cell of claim 13, in which the anode rods are titanium covered withan electrically conducting electrocatalytic coating and the deflectorblades are non-conducting.15. The cell of claim 14, in which the anode rods are from the groupconsisting of round, oval, square and diamond-shaped rods.16. In a bipolar electrolyzer, substantially vertically mounted hollow waveanodes and cathodes forming an interelectrodic gap therebetween, verticalgrooves in said anodes through which gases released at the anode rise andgas passages through the anodes and deflectors for deflecting the anodicgases away from the interelectrodic gap.17. The electrolyzer of claim 16, in which the anodes are formed ofvertically mounted rods.18. In an electrolysis cell substantially vertically mounted diemnsionallystable metal anodes with an electrically conducting electrocatalyticcoating thereon and diamond-shaped gas passages through the anodes, inwhich the top of the diamonds are forward of the center longitudinal planeof the anodes and the bottom of the diamonds are rearward of the centerlongidutinal plane of the anodes, and the longer dimension of thediamond-shaped openings is horizontal, so that gases released from thebottom area of the diamond-shaped opening will pass through thediamond-shaped openings and be deflected away from the interelectrodicgap.19. In a monopolar diaphragm electrolysis cell having diaphragm coveredcathodes and rectangular hollow perforate anodes in vertical rod form inthe spaces between the cathodes, the method of removing anodic gases fromthe interelectrodic gap between the anodes and the diaphragm coveredcathodes which comprises passing the gases released at the anodessubstantially vertically upward along the rod faces of the anodes, passinga portion of the gases through openings between the rods in the anodes,into the hollow interior thereof, deflecting a portion of the gases awayfrom the interelectrodic gap and into the rectangular hollow space insidethe anodes and discharging a portion of the gases from the interior of thehollow space at the top of the rectangular hollow anodes.20. In a monopolar diaphragm cell having diaphragm covered cathodes anddimensionally stable rectangular hollow perforate metal anodes in verticalrod form between the cathodes, forming an interelectrodic gap between theanodes and cathodes, an electrically conducting electrocatalytic coatingcontaining a platinum group metal oxide on the exterior of the rods ofsaid dimensionally stable rectangular hollow anodes, facing said gap,passages between the rods through the coated anode faces for the escape ofanodic gases formed at the anode rod faces to the rear of the anode rodfaces and deflector means deflecting the anodic gases into the rectangularhollow spaces in the rear of said anodes and upwardly through rectangularhollow space inside said rod anodes and away from the interelectrodic gap.21. The method of producing chlorine in a bipolar electrolysis cell havinghollow perforate nested valve metal anodes in finger form extending fromthe acid resistant side of a bimetallic supporting partition which is acidresistant on one side and alkali resistant on the other side, and hollowperforate cathodes in finger form extending from the alkali resistant sideof said bimetallic partition, said anode and cathode fingers being nestedtogather and forming an electrolysis gap in wave form therebetween andhaving a diaphragm between the anode and cathode fingers, said cell beingfilled with electrolyte, which comprises passing an electrolysis currentfrom the anode fingers to the cathode fingers, releasing anodic gases atthe anode and passing a portion of said gases upwardly through theelectrolyte in said electrolysis gap, passing another portion of saidgases through the perforate anode fingers and upwardly through theelectrolyte behind said anode fingers, discharging both portions of saidanodic gases above the top of the anodes and into a gas receiving space atthe top of said cell, discharging cathode liquor and cathode gases behindthe cathode fingers and maintaining the level of the liquor behind thecathode fingers below the liquor level in the electrolysis gap.22. The method of claim 21, in which the anode and cathode fingers are morethan two meters in height and the anodic gases are deflected away from theelectrolysis gap approximately every 2/3rd meter in height and passedthrough the anode fingers and upwardly behind said anode fingers and aredischarged behind said anode fingers, whereby the anode and cathodefingers can be made two to four times higher than normal and theaccumulation of gas bubbles in the electrolysis gap and the destruction ofthe diaphragms in the electrolysis gap is reduced."}
{"WKU":"039309827","Title":"Ferroelectric apparatus for dielectrophoresis particle extraction","App_Date":"1973-04-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Howard D. Batha;Leslie E. Cross","Assignee":"The Carborundum Company","ICL_Class":"B01D 1302","References":"1734975;1860529;1930536;2439499;2490452;2578505;2620894;2782397;2836737;3197394;3243648;3365592;3535686;3687834","Claims":"We claim:1. Apparatus for generating a periodic non-uniform electric field, externalto the field-genrating electrodes, comprisinga. a ferroelectric material, polarizable in directions perpendicular to thesurface of the ferroelectric material; the ferroelectric materialcomprising at least one portion, the direction of polarization of which isto be alternated during generation of the periodic non-uniform electricfield, and at least another portion, the direction of polarization ofwhich is to remain the same during generation of the periodic non-uniformelectric field;b. a plurality of electrodes, applied to opposite sides of theferroelectric material, covering both sides of the portions of theferroelectric material, the direction of polarization of which is to bealternated during generation of the periodic non-uniform electric field,but leaving uncovered at least one side of the portions of theferroelectric material so as to produce a non-uniform electric field, thedirection of polarization of which is to remain the same during generationof the periodic non-uniform electric field, defining a location externalto the field-generating electrodes and adjacent the boundary between thealternately polarized portions of the ferroelectric material, in which theperiodic non-uniform electric field is to be generated; andc. means for providing alternating potential to the electrodes1. for alternating the direction of polarization of the covered portions ofthe ferroelectric material and leaving polarized in their originaldirection, the uncovered portions of the ferroelectric material;"}
{"WKU":"039309835","Title":"Arrangement and process for determining antigens","App_Date":"1975-02-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Axel Sieber","Assignee":"Behringwerke Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"B01K  500","References":"3432424;3554894;3558459;3582490;3674678","Claims":"I claim:1. An arrangement for the simultaneous qualitative or quantitativedetermination of several antigens in mixtures of antigens byimmuno-electrophoresis in a matrix containing antibodies, whicharrangement comprises coating the support for the matrix with severalmatrix strips, one following the other and each containing a specificantiserum.2. An arrangement as claimed in claim 1, wherein the support for the matrixis coated with an antiserum-free matrix strip suitable for receiving themixtures of antigens, followed by several other matrix strips eachcontaining a specific antiserum.3. A process for the simultaneous qualitative or quantitative determinationof several antigens, which comprises using an arrangement as claimed inclaim 1.4. A process for the simultaneous qualitative or quantitative determinationof several antigens, which comprises using an arrangemetn as claimed inclaim 2."}
{"WKU":"039309843","Title":"Coal-anthracene oil slurry liquefied with carbon monoxide and","App_Date":"1972-11-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Armin C. Pitchford","Assignee":"Phillips Petroleum Company","ICL_Class":"C10g  108","References":"1890434;2057996;2132855;3488279;3488280;3642607;3687838;3694342","Claims":"I claim:1. A method for liquefying coal in which the coal is slurried in anthraceneoil, said method comprising contacting said coal anthracene oil slurrywith a catalytically active metal selected from the group consistingessentially of molybdenum, nickel, cobalt, and iron promoted with a bariumcompound in the presence of carbon monoxide at a temperature in the rangeof 675.degree. to 720.degree.F and a pressure in the range of about 1,000to about 5,000 psig for a time sufficient to carry out the process ofliquefaction of the coal.2. The method of claim 1 wherein the catalytically active metal is presentas cobalt molybdate and the barium compound is present as barium oxide.3. The method of claim 1 wherein said catalytically active metal isassociated with an aluminum catalytic support material which comprisesfrom about 40 to about 95 weight percent of the total catalystcomposition.4. The method of claim 1 wherein said reaction is carried out batchwise andthe ratio of solid catalyst to feedstock is in the range of about 0.1 toabout 20 weight percent catalyst based on weight of feedstock and thereaction time is in the range of about 0.1 to about 20 hours.5. The method of claim 1 wherein steam is added to the reaction zone in aratio of liquid water to liquid hydrocarbon feed of from about 1:5 toabout 1:100 by volume.6. The method of claim 1 wherein said reaction is continuous in a fixedspan and the liquid hourly space velocity of the feed is in the range ofabout 0.2 to about 10.7. The method of claim 5 wherein steam is added to the reaction zone in aratio of liquid water to liquid hydrocarbon feed of from about 1:5 toabout 1:100 by volume."}
{"WKU":"039309851","Title":"Method of producing special cokes","App_Date":"1972-05-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Franz Schieber;Petar Husnjak;Frane Paro;Konrad Koziol;Baptist Zenk;Nada Lenac-Lukacevic;Dieter Zollner;Peter Walser;Friedrich Rittmann","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"C10G  914","References":"2775549;2922755;3344057;3493489;3704224","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A method of producing cokes for use in connection with the making ofultra-high-power electrodes which includes in combination the steps of:coking a mixture of from 50 to 90% by weight of atmospheric virgin reducedcrude oil having a density of from 0.935 to 0.965 grams per cubiccentimeter, a viscosity of from 2.8.degree. to 4.3.degree. Engler at100.degree.C, a sulfur content of from 0.85 to 1.10%, a coke valueaccording to Conradson of from 5 to 7%, a content in aromatics of from 40to 60%, an asphalt content below 1.8% with a boiling component less than20% within the temperature range of from 250.degree. to 350.degree.C, andwith a content in ash forming elements of less than 0.05% and with from 10to 50% by weight of a catalyst-free catalytic residue which has beenobtained by catalytic cracking of distillates low in residues and ashesand which has a viscosity of from 2.5.degree. to 3.2.degree. Engler at50.degree.C, with a sulfur content of less than 0.6%, a coke valueaccording to Conradson of from 3.5 to 4.5%, a content in aromaticsexceeding 35%, an asphalt content of less than 0.6% and boiling componentsof from 8 to 12% for the range of from 250.degree. to 300.degree.C andboiling components of from 30 to 40% for the range of from 300.degree. to350.degree.C in a 24 to 48 hour cycle at temperatures of from 475.degree.to 515.degree.C at pressures of from 3 to 7 atmospheres above atmosphericpressure, said coking being effected at such a recycling ratio as toobtain a yield in green coke of from 15 to 40%, in which as atmosphericvirgin reduced crude oil residues there are used atmospheric distillationresidues from Pannonian petroleum.2. A method in combination according to claim 1, in which saidcatalyst-free catalytic residue is obtained by cracking gas oils.3. A method of producing cokes for use in connection with the making ofultra-high-power electrodes which includes in combination the steps of:coking a mixture of from 50 to 90% by weight of atmospheric virgin reducedcrude oil having a density of from 0.935 to 0.965 grams per cubiccentimeter, a viscosity of from 2.8.degree. to 4.3.degree. Engler at100.degree.C, a sulfur content of from 0.85 to 1.10%, a coke valueaccording to Conradson of from 5 to 7%, a content in aromatics of from 40to 60%, an asphalt content below 1.8% with a boiling component less than20% within the temperature range of from 250.degree. to 350.degree.C, andwith a content in ash forming elements of less than 0.05% and with from 10to 50% by weight of a catalyst-free catalytic residue which has beenobtained by catalytic cracking of distillates low in residues and ashesand which has a viscosity of from 2.5.degree. to 3.2.degree. Engler at50.degree.C, with a sulfur content of less than 0.6%, a coke valueaccording to Conradson of from 3.5 to 4.5%, a content in aromaticsexceeding 35%, an asphalt content of less than 0.6% and boiling componentsof from 8 to 12% for the range of from 250.degree. to 300.degree.C andboiling components of from 30 to 40% for the range of from 300.degree. to350.degree.C in a 24 to 48 hour cycle at temperatures of from 475.degree.to 515.degree.C at pressures of from 3 to 7 atmospheres above atmosphericpressure, said coking being effected at such a recycling ratio as toobtain a yield in green coke of from 15 to 40%."}
{"WKU":"039309860","Title":"High octane motor fuel production","App_Date":"1974-12-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Charles V. Berger","Assignee":"Universal Oil Products Company","ICL_Class":"C10G 3710","References":"3385781","Claims":"I claim as my invention:1. In a process for the production of a high octane motor fuel whichcomprises the steps of:a. hydrocracking naphtha boiling range hydrocarbons containing cycliccomponents including aromatics with hydrogen, in a first reaction zone, incontact with a first catalytic composite of a Group VIII noble metalcomponent and a zeolitic aluminosilicate carrier material and at atemperature in the range of about 350.degree.F. to about 800.degree.F. anda pressure from about 100 to about 700 psig. which is conductedadiabatically and therefore has a marked propensity for a high temperaturerun-away;b. reacting the resulting first reaction zone effluent without intermediateseparation thereof, in a second reaction zone, in contact with a secondcatalytic composite comprising platinum and alumina, at a temperature inthe range of about 800.degree.F. to about 1100.degree.F. and at a pressureof from about 100 to about 700 psig; and,c. recovering said high octane motor fuel from the resulting secondreaction zone effluent;"}
{"WKU":"039309878","Title":"Catalyst and method of preparing same","App_Date":"1974-05-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Harry S. Grand","Assignee":"Mobil Oil Corporation","ICL_Class":"C10G 1302;C10G 1102;B01J 2906","References":"3463608;3556988","Claims":"Having thus described the invention what is desired to be secured byLetters Patent and hereby claimed is:1. A method of preparing a rare earth-impregnated composite catalyticcomposition comprising a matrix having a crystalline aluminosilicatezeolite dispersed therein, said crystalline aluminosilicate zeolitecarrying rare-earth cations, said matrix comprising an inorganic oxidewherein at least 50 weight percent of said inorganic oxide is silica,alumina, or silica-alumina, said method comprising incorporating rareearth into said composite rare earth in an amount equivalent to about 1 to6 percent by weight, expressed as RE.sub.2 O.sub.3, said amount being overand above the rare earth level that would be present in said composite byvirtue of rare earth ion exchange alone.2. The method of claim 1 wherein said matrix additionally comprises aweighting agent selected from the group consisting of clay and alumina.3. The method of claim 2 wherein said weighting agent is Kaolin clay.4. The method of claim 1 wherein said incorporation is effected byimpregnation of said composite with a rare earth-containing solution,removing excess solution, and drying.5. The method of claim 1 wherein said incorporation is effected byimpregnation of said matrix with rare earth, admixing the resulting rareearth-impregnated matrix with said particles of crystallinealuminosilicate, zeolite and drying.6. The method of claim 1 wherein said incorporation is effected bytreatment of said crystalline aluminosilicate zeolite with a rareearth-containing solution, admixing the resultant rare earth-impregnatedcrystalline aluminosilicate zeolite with said matrix, and drying.7. The method of claim 6 wherein said admixing is carried out in theabsence of any intermediate washing.8. The method of claim 6 wherein any washing carried out prior to saidadmixing is effected under such conditions as to permit removal of only aportion of the excess of rare earth ions present so that sufficient excessrare earth ions remains that upon drying, the resultant composite containsimpregnated rare earth in an amount, expressed as RE.sub.2 O.sub.3, of atleast about 1 percent by weight, said amount being over and above the rareearth level that would be present in said composite by virtue of ionexchange alone.9. The method of claim 4 wherein said drying is carried out over a periodof at least 5 minutes, the water content during said period being not lessthan 20 weight percent.10. A composite catalyst comprising a matrix having a particulatecrystalline aluminosilicate zeolite dispersed therein, said crystallinealuminosilicate zeolite carrying rare earth cations, said matrixcomprising an inorganic oxide wherein at least 50 weight percent of saidinorganic oxide is silica, alumina, or silica-alumina, said compositecontaining impregnated rare earth in an amount equivalent to about 1 to 6percent by weight, expressed as RE.sub.2 O.sub.3, said amount being overand above the rare earth level present in said composite by virtue of rareearth ion exchange alone.11. The catalyst of claim 10 wherein said matrix additionally comprises aweighting agent selected from the group consisting of clay and alumina.12. The catalyst of claim 11 wherein said weighting agent is Kaolin clay.13. The catalyst of claim 10 wherein said inorganic oxide is silica,silica-alumina, silica-zirconia, or silica-zirconia-alumina, saidinorganic oxide having a pore volume of at least about 0.4 cc per gram.14. The catalyst of claim 11 wherein said weighting agent is clay, saidweighting agent is from about 30 to 50 weight percent of said matrix andsaid inorganic oxide is correspondingly from about 70 to 50 weight percentof said matrix, and said crystalline aluminosilicate zeolite is present insaid composite in an amount of from about 5 to 15 percent by weight.15. A method of catalytically converting petroleum charge stocks comprisingcontacting a petroleum charge stream under catalytic conversion conditionswith the catalyst of claim 10.16. The method of claim 15 wherein the conversion process is catalyticcracking."}
{"WKU":"039309886","Title":"Reclaiming used motor oil","App_Date":"1975-02-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Marvin M. Johnson","Assignee":"Phillips Petroleum Company","ICL_Class":"C10M 1100;C10G 1700","References":"1828429;3169917;3294678;3791965;3817855;3879282","Claims":"I claim:1. A process for reducing the ash content of used lubricating oils whichcomprises:a. contacting used lubricating oil with an aqueous solution of ammoniumsulfate and/or ammonium bisulfate under conditions of temperature andpressure sufficient to react said ammonium sulfate and/or ammoniumbisulfate with metal-containing components present in the used lubricatingoil and form metal-containing solids,b. allowing the reaction mass of (a) to separate into an oil phase and anaqueous phase containing said solids, andc. recovering the oil phase as a marketable low-ash oil product.2. A process according to claim 1 wherein said aqueous solution is amixture of ammonium sulfate and ammonium bisulfate.3. A process according to claim 1 wherein said aqueous solution isapproximately an equimolar mixture of ammonium sulfate and ammoniumbisulfate.4. A process according to claim 1 wherein the temperature is in the rangeof about 200.degree.F to about 500.degree.F (93.degree.-260.degree.C), thepressure is in the range of from atmospheric to about 750 psig, and theconcentration of ammonium sulfate and/or ammonium bisulfate in the aqueousphase ranges from about 2 to about 25 weight percent.5. A process according to claim 1 which additionally contains the step ofd. contacting said oil phase recovered in (c) with an absorbent selectedfrom activated clay, silica gel, and alumina under conditions sufficientto remove polar compounds including oxygen-, nitrogen-, andsulfur-containing compounds therefrom.6. A process according to claim 5 which additionally contains the steps ofe. subjecting said oil phase reduced in said polar compounds tohydrotreating in the presence of hydrogen and a hydrofining catalystselected from nickel-molybdenum sulfide on alumina, cobalt molybdate, andtungsten-nickel sulfide on alumina under conditions including atemperature in the range of 500.degree.F to 800.degree.F(260.degree.-427.degree.C) sufficient to remove residual polar compoundsand unsaturated compounds, andf. recovering as product the hydrotreated oil phase which is suited to useas a lube stock.7. A process for reducing the lead content of used motor oil whichcomprisesa. contacting said oil with an aqueous solution of ammonium sulfate and/orammonium bisulfate reagent at conditions of temperature and pressuresufficient to react said ammonium sulfate with lead compounds present inthe used motor oil,b. allowing the precipitate formed by the reaction to settle, andc. separting the oil from the water and solid precipitate.8. A process according to claim 7 wherein the aqueous solution is a mixtureof ammonium sulfate and ammonium bisulfate.9. A process according to claim 7 wherein the reaction temperature is inthe range of about 200.degree.F to about 500.degree.F(93.degree.-260.degree.C), the reaction pressure is in the range of aboutatmospheric to about 750 psig, and the concentration of ammonium sulfatein the aqueous reaction solution is about 2 to about 25 weight percent.10. A process according to claim 7 comprising the additional steps ofd. contacting said oil phase recovered in (c) with an absorbent selectedfrom activated clay, silica gel, and alumina under conditions sufficientto remove polar compounds including oxygen-, nitrogen-, andsulfur-containing compounds therefrom,e. subjecting said oil phase reduced in polar compounds to hydrotreating inthe presence of hydrogen and a hydrofining catalyst selected fromnickel-molybdenum sulfide on alumina, cobalt molybdate, andtungsten-nickel sulfide on alumina under conditions including atemperature in the range 500.degree. to 800.degree.F(260.degree.-427.degree.C) sufficient to remove residual polar compoundsand unsaturated compounds, andf. recovering as product the hydrotreated oil phase which is suited to useas a lube stock.11. A process for reclaiming used motor oil containing metal salts whichcomprisesa. preheating the used motor oil to a temperature in the range of about200.degree.F to about 500.degree.F (93.degree.-260.degree.C),b. preheating an aqueous solution of ammonium sulfate and/or ammoniumbisulfate to a temperature in the range of about 200.degree.F to about500.degree.F (93.degree.-260.degree.C),c. contacting said preheated motor oil and said pre-heated aqueous solutionof ammonium sulfate in at least one agitated reaction zone underconditions sufficient to maintain a reaction producing a precipitate,d. allowing the reaction product to separate into an oil layer and a waterlayer and the precipitate to settle in the water layer,e. removing the water layer and filtering the precipitate from the water,f. adding sufficient ammonium sulfate to the filtered water to produce anaqueous solution of ammonium sulfate and/or ammonium bisulfate having aconcentration of about 2 to about 25 weight percent ammonium sulfate andrecycle to step (b), andg. recovering the oil phase as a marketable low-ash oil product.12. A process according to claim 11 which comprises the additional steps ofh. contacting said oil phase recovered in (g) with an absorbent selectedfrom activated clay, silica gel, and alumina under conditions sufficientto remove polar compounds including oxygen-, nitrogen-, andsulfur-containing compounds therefrom,i. subjecting said oil phase reduced in polar compounds to hydrotreating inthe presence of hydrogen and a hydrofining catalyst selected fromnickel-molybdenum sulfide on alumina, cobalt molybdate, andtungsten-nickel sulfide on alumina under conditions including atemperature in the range 500.degree. to 800.degree.F(260.degree.-427.degree.C) sufficient to remove residual polar compoundsand unsaturated compounds, andj. recovering as product the hydrotreated oil phase which is suited to useas a lube stock."}
{"WKU":"039309894","Title":"Method for reduction of sulfur and nitrogen content in hydrocarbons","App_Date":"1974-10-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Bernard E. Weichman;John H. Knight","Assignee":"The Superior Oil Company","ICL_Class":"C10G 1900","References":"1872679;1942054;1942071;2412809;3406501;3540387;3710737;3823676;3850745","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method for reducing the sulfur and nitrogen content of a hydrocarboncontaining sulfur and nitrogen impurities which comprises:a. contacting said hydrocarbon in the liquid or gaseous phase withnahcolite in an amount effective to remove sulfur and nitrogen impuritiesfrom said hydrocarbon; andb. removing the nahcolite containing combined sulfur and nitrogen from saidhydrocarbon.2. The method of claim 1, wherein said hydrocarbon is shale oil and saidshale oil and nahcolite are contacted in a shale oil retort.3. The method of claim 1, wherein said hydrocarbon is in the liquid phaseand said nahcolite containing combined sulfur and nitrogen is removed byfiltration.4. A method of reducing the sulfur and nitrogen content of a liquid phasehydrocarbon containing sulfur and nitrogen impurities which comprisesfiltering said liquid phase hydrocarbon through nahcolite.5. The method of claim 4, wherein said nahcolite is coated on a filter.6. A method of reducing sulfur dioxide and nitrogen oxide(s) emissions inthe combustion of a combustible hydrocarbon containing sulfur and nitrogenimpurities, which comprises contacting said combustible hydrocarbon in theliquid or gaseous phase prior to combustion with nahcolite, in an amounteffective to appreciably reduce sulfur dioxide and nitrogen oxide(s)emissions.7. The method of claim 6, wherein said combustible hydrocarbon is a fueloil.8. The method of claim 6, wherein said nahcolite is contacted with saidcombustible hydrocarbon in finely divided form.9. The method of claim 6, wherein said nahcolite is contacted with saidcombustible hydrocarbon in an amount of from about one percent to about 20percent by weight, based on the weight of the sulfur and nitrogen in thecombustible hydrocarbon."}
{"WKU":"039309908","Title":"Process for separating hydrocarbons","App_Date":"1974-04-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jean-Pierre Brun;Gerard Bulvestre;Michel Guillou;Pierre Thirion;Rene Pautrat","Assignee":"Agence Nationale de Valorisation de la Recherche (ANVAR)","ICL_Class":"B01D 1300;C07C  700","References":"2159434;2475990;2947687;2960462;2981680;3370102;3563889;3819742","Claims":"We claim:1. In a process for separating hydrocarbons from mixtures thereof ofhydrocarbons with similar boiling points by permeation or pervaporationthrough a specific membrane, the improvement consisting of contacting amixture of hydrocarbons with similar boiling points with a membrane formedof a high molecular weight polymer containing functional groups chemicallycombined by covalent bonding within the polymer forming the said membrane,said high molecular weight polymer being less selective than saidfunctional groups, the said groups possessing a physiochemical affinity,with respect to one of said hydrocarbons and substantially the absence ofsuch an affinity with respect to other hydrocarbons of the mixture; saidfunctional groups being the same as those of a liquid organic solventhaving a particular affinity for separating one of the hydrocarbons of themixture; said affinity resulting from the formation of an electroniccomplex characterized by a resonant structure between the solventmolecules and the molecules of the said hydrocarbon, which is selectivelyseparated by the specific membrane; the membrane used being substitutedwith an active group selected from the group consisting of nitrile,pyrrolidone, .beta.-lactam, N-substituted groups, and sulfonic acidfunctional groups; and applying a gradient of pressure or chemicalpotential to the said membrane whereby on one side of the membrane afraction enriched with the hydrocarbon having selectively passed throughthe membrane, and on the other side of the membrane a fraction containingpredominantly the other hydrocarbons of the mixture are obtained.2. The process of claim 1, wherein the part of the membrane material whichis less selective, is a high plastic polymer selected from the groupconsisting of polyvinyl chloride, polystyrene, polyethylene andpolytetrafluoroethylene.3. The process of claim 1 wherein the part of the membrane material whichis less selective, is an elastomer selected from the group consisting ofcopolymers of ethylene and propylene, of polyisoprene, of polybutadiene,polyoxypropylene and polyisobutene.4. The process of claim 1 wherein the membrane has a thickness in the rangeof between about 1/1000 mm and 0.5 mm.5. The process of claim 1 wherein the membrane is applied to a poroussupport.6. The process of claim 4 wherein a vulcanized membrane is used.7. The process of claim 1 wherein the specific functional groups used tointensify the separation power are chemically fixed by grafting onto ahigh polymer in the membrane mass.8. The process of claim 1 wherein the active functional groups used tointensify the selectivity are directly combined with a basis monomerduring a polymerization step.9. The process of claim 1 wherein the active group improving the separationis an N-alkyl group.10. The process of claim 9 wherein the said active group improving theseparation is the N-methyl group.11. The process of claim 1 wherein the said active group improving theseparation is N-methyl pyrrolidone.12. The process of claim 1 wherein the specific membrane is obtained bycopolymerizing acrylonitrile containing nitrile active groups withbutadiene whereby the copolymer contains 5 to 60% of acrylonitrile.13. The process of claim 1 wherein the specific membrane is obtained incopolymerizing acrylonitrile containing nitrile active groups withbutadiene whereby the copolymer contains 30 to 45% of acrylonitrile.14. The process of claim 3 wherein the specific membrane is vulcanized bycuring agents selected from the group consisting of peroxides and sulfur.15. The process of claim 1 wherein the specific membrane is vulcanized bycuring agents selected from the group consisting of peroxides and sulfur.16. The process of claim 1 wherein said active groups are fixed by graftinginto the mass of a basis polymer membrane whereby the copolymer contains 5to 60% of acrylonitrile.17. The process of claim 16 wherein the basis polymer is selected from thegroup consisting of polyvinyl chloride, polystyrene, polyethylene,polypropylene, copolymers of ethylene and propylene, andpolytetrafluoroethylene.18. The process of claim 16 wherein the basis polymer is selected from thegroup consisting of polyisobutene, polyisoprene, polybutadiene andpolyoxypropylene.19. The process of claim 16 wherein said active groups are selected fromthe group consisting of N-alkyl and pyrrolidone.20. The process of claim 19 wherein said active groups are obtained fromcompounds selected from the group consisting of N-methyl pyrrolidone,N-vinylpyrrolidone and maleic N-methyl imide.21. The process of claim 1 wherein said acid groups are grafted into thebasis polymer membrane.22. The process of claim 21 wherein the said basis polymer is a rubberselected from the group consisting of polybutadienes, polyisoprenes andethylene-propylene copolymers.23. The process of claim 21 wherein the said basis polymer is a plasticmaterial selected from the group consisting of polystyrene, polyethyleneand polytetrafluoroethylene.24. The process of claim 1 wherein pressure is exerted on the surface ofthe specific membrane with which the mixture to be separated is contacted.25. The process of claim 1 wherein a vacuum is applied to the surface ofthe specific membrane opposite to the surface with which the mixture iscontacted.26. The process of claim 1 which is operated at a temperature between about0.degree.C and 40.degree.C.27. The process of claim 1 wherein the mixture to be separated is used inthe gaseous state.28. The process of claim 1 wherein the mixture to be separated is used inthe liquid state.29. The process of claim 1 wherein the separated hydrocarbon is separatedin the gaseous state.30. The process of claim 1 wherein the separated hydrocarbon is separatedin the liquid state.31. The process of claim 1 wherein said gradient is a gradient of pressure.32. The process of claim 1 wherein said gradient is a gradient of chemicalpotential.33. In a process for separating hydrocarbons from mixtures thereofcontaining the same by permeation or pervaporation through a specificmembrane, the improvement consisting of contacting a mixture consisting ofbutadiene or isoprene and a member selected from the group consisting ofC.sub.4 -monoolefins, pentadiene, C.sub.5 -diolefins and C.sub.5-monoolefins with a membrane formed of a high polymer comprisingfunctional groups chemically combined by covalent bonding within thepolymer forming the said membrane, the said groups possessing aphysiochemical affinity, with respect to one of said dienes or monoolefinsand substantially the absence of such an affinity with respect to otherdienes and monoolefins of the mixture; the said functional groups are thesame as those of a liquid organic solvent having a particular affinity forseparating one of the dienes or monoolefins from the mixture; saidaffinity resulting from the formation of an electronic complexcharacterized by a resonant structure between the solvent molecules andthe molecules of the said diene or monoolefin, which is selectivelyseparated by the specific membrane; the membrane used is substituted withan active group selected from the group consisting of nitrile,pyrrolidone, .beta.-lactam, N-substituted groups and sulfonic acidfunctional groups; and applying a gradient of pressure to the saidmembrane whereby on one side of the membrane a fraction enriched by thediene or having selectively passed through the membrane, and on the otherside of the membrane a fraction containing predominantly, the other dienesand monoolefins of the mixture, are obtained.34. In a process for separating hydrocarbons from mixtures thereofcontaining the same by permeation or pervaporation through a specificmembrane, the improvement consisting of contacting a mixture consisting ofbutadiene or isoprene and a member selected from the group consisting ofC.sub.4 -monoolefins, pentadiene, C.sub.5 -diolefins and C.sub.5-monoolefins with a membrane formed of a high polymer comprisingfunctional groups chemically combined by covalent bonding within thepolymer forming the said membrane, the said groups possessing aphysiochemical affinity, with respect to one of said dienes or monoolefinsand substantially the absence of such an affinity with respect to otherdienes and monoolefins of the mixture; the said functional groups are thesame as those of a liquid organic solvent having a particular affinity forseparating one of the dienes or monoolefins from the mixture, saidaffinity resulting from the formation of an electronic complexcharacterized by a resonant structure between the solvent molecules andthe molecules of the said diene or monoolefin, which is selectivelyseparated by the specific membrane; the membrane used is substituted withan active group selected from the group consisting of nitrile,pyrrolidone, .beta.-lactam, N-substituted groups and sulfonic acidfunctional groups; and applying a gradient of chemical potential to thesaid membrane whereby on one side of the membrane a fraction enriched bythe diene having selectively passed through the membrane, and on the otherside of the membrane a fraction containing predominantly, the other dienesand monoolefins of the mixture, are obtained.35. The process of claim 34 wherein the active group improving theseparation is an N-alkyl group.36. The process of claim 35 wherein the said active group improving theseparation is the N-methyl group.37. The process of claim 35 wherein the said active group improving theseparation is the N-methyl pyrrolidone.38. The process of claim 35 wherein the specific membrane is obtained bycopolymerizing acrylonitrile containing nitrile active groups withbutadiene whereby the copolymer contains 5 to 60% of acrylonitrile.39. The process of claim 34 wherein the specific membrane is obtained incopolymerizing acrylonitrile containing nitrile active groups withbutadiene whereby the copolymer contains 30 to 45% of acrylonitrile.40. The process of claim 38 wherein the specific membrane is vulcanized bycuring agents selected from the group consisting of peroxides and sulfur.41. The process of claim 39 wherein the specific membrane is vulcanized bycuring agents selected from the group consisting of peroxides and sulfur.42. The process of claim 34 wherein said active groups are fixed bygrafting into the mass of a basis polymer membrane whereby the copolymercontains 5 to 60% of acrylonitrile.43. The process of claim 42 wherein the basis polymer is selected from thegroup consisting of polyvinyl chloride, polystyrene, polyethylene,polypropylene, copolymers of ethylene and propylene,polytetrafluoroethylene, and polyisoprene-cis.44. The process of claim 42 wherein the initial basis polymer is selectedfrom the group consisting of polyisobutene, polyisoprene, polybutadieneand polyoxypropylene.45. The process of claim 42 wherein said active groups are selected fromthe group consisting of N-alkyl and pyrrolidone.46. The process of claim 45 wherein said active groups are obtained fromcompounds selected from the group consisting of N-methyl pyrrolidone,N-vinylpyrrolidone and maleic N-methyl imide.47. In a process for separating hydrocarbons from mixtures thereofcontaining the same by permeation or pervaporation through a specificmembrane, the improvement consisting of contacting a hydrocarbon mixturecontaining an olefin selected from the group consisting of isobutene and1-butene with a membrane formed of a high polymer comprising functionalgroups chemically combined by covalent bonding within the polymer formingthe said membrane, the said groups possessing a physiochemical affinity,with respect to one of said olefins and substantially the absence of suchan affinity with respect to other hydrocarbons of the mixture; the saidfunctional groups are the same as those of a liquid organic solvent havinga particular affinity for separating one of said olefins from the mixture,said affinity resulting from the formation of an electronic complexcharacterized by a resonant structure between the solvent molecules andthe molecules of one of said olefins, which is selectively separated bythe specific membrane; the membrane used is substituted with a sulfonicacid active group; and applying a gradient of pressure to the saidmembrane whereby on one side of the membrane a fraction enriched by theolefin having selectively passed through the membrane, and on the otherside of the membrane a fraction containing predominantly, the otherhydrocarbons of the mixture, are obtained.48. The process of claim 47, wherein said hydrocarbon mixture consists of50% to 70% by volume of isobutene and 30% to 50% by volume of 1-butene.49. In a process for separating aromatic and aliphatic hydrocarbons frommixtures thereof containing the same by permeation or pervaporationthrough a specific membrane, the improvement consisting of contacting amixture comprising from 20% to 88% of benzene and from 12% to 80% ofheptane with a membrane formed of a high polymer comprising functionalgroups chemically combined by covalent bonding within the polymer formingthe said membrane, the said groups possessing a physiochemical affinity,with respect to one of said benzene or heptane and substantially theabsence of such an affinity with respect to other of said benzene orheptane; the said functional groups are the same as those of a liquidorganic solvent having a particular affinity for separating one of saidbenzene or heptane from the mixture, said affinity resulting from theformation of an electronic complex characterized by a resonant structurebetween the solvent molecules and the molecules of the said benzene orheptane, which is selectively separated by the specific membrane; themembrane used consisting essentially of a butadiene-acrylonitrilecopolymer having from 25% to 50% of acrylonitrile and 50% to 75% ofbutadiene; and applying a gradient of pressure or chemical potential tothe said membrane whereby on one side of the membrane a fraction enrichedby benzene or heptane having selectively passed through the membrane, andon the other side of the membrane a fraction containing predominantly, theother one of benzene or heptane, are obtained.50. The process of claim 49 wherein said membrane contains 30% ofacrylonitrile and 70% of butadiene.51. In a process for separating aromatic and aliphatic hydrocarbons frommixtures thereof containing the same by permeation or pervaporationthrough a specific membrane, the improvement consisting of contacting amixture comprising from 0.1% to 20% benzene and 80% to 99.9% heptane witha membrane formed of a high polymer comprising functional groupschemically combined by covalent bonding within the polymer forming thesaid membrane, the said groups possessing a physiochemical affinity, withrespect to one of said benzene or heptane and substantially the absence ofsuch an affinity with respect to other of said benzene or heptane; thesaid functional groups are the same as those of a liquid organic solventhaving a particular affinity for separating one of said benzene orheptane, said affinity resulting from the formation of an electroniccomplex characterized by a resonant structure between the solventmolecules and the molecules of the said benzene or heptane, which isselectively separated by the specific membrane; the membrane usedconsisting essentially of a butadiene-styrene copolymer having from 23.5%to 63.5% of styrene and 36.5% to 76.5% of butadiene, and said membrane maybe substituted with an active group selected from the group consisting ofnitrile, and N-substituted groups; and applying a gradient of pressure orchemical potential to the said membrane whereby on one side of themembrane a fraction enriched by the benzene or heptane having selectivelypassed through the membrane, and on the other side of the membrane afraction containing predominantly, the other one of said benzene orheptane, are obtained.52. The process of claim 51 wherein said membrane contains 53.5% of styreneand 46.5% of butadiene.53. In a process for separating hydrocarbons from mixtures thereof ofhydrocarbons with similar boiling points by permeation or pervaporationthrough a specific membrane, the improvement consisting of contacting amixture of aromatic and aliphatic hydrocarbons with similar boiling pointswith a membrane formed of a high molecular weight polymer containingfunctional groups chemically combined by covalent bonding within thepolymer forming the said membrane, the said groups possessing aphysiochemical affinity, with respect to one of said hydrocarbons andsubstantially the absence of such an affinity with respect to otherhydrocarbons of the mixture; the membrane used being substituted with anactive group identical to the molecule which is to be passed through themembrane; and applying a gradient of pressure or chemical potential to thesaid membrane whereby on one side of the membrane a fraction enriched withthe hydrocarbon having selectively passed through the membrane, and on theother side of the membrane a fraction containing predominantly the otherhydrocarbons of the mixture are obtained."}
{"WKU":"039309916","Title":"Meat processing","App_Date":"1974-10-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert M. Gillespie","Assignee":"Sortex Company of North America, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B07C  5342","References":"2020843;2373361;2531343;3011634;3499527;3545610;3650396","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property orprivilege is claimed are defined as follows:1. A system for processing trim meat pieces having lean meat portions andfat portions, said system comprising:means for dividing said trim meat pieces into substantially regular shapemeat chunks having higher lean meat content and lower lean meat content;means for singularizing said meat chunks;means to cool said meat chunks to a low temperature in said singularizingmeans;A photometric sensing means for detecting an optical property related tothe lean meat content of said meat chunks;means for passing said singularized meat chunks through said photometricsensing means; andmeans to sort said meat chunks according to the value of the opticalproperty thus detected;whereby said meat chunks are sorted according to the lean meat contentthereof to achieve a fat rich concentrate and a lean meat richconcentrate.2. A system according to claim 1 wherein said dividing means includes anextruder.3. A system according to claim 2 wherein said singularizing means includesa vibratory feeder tray and a conveyor belt positioned to receive meatchunks from said vibratory feeder tray, and said conveyor belt projectssaid meat chunks through said photometric sensing means.4. A system according to claim 3 wherein said photometric sensing meansdetects the color of said meat chunks and said sorting means includesmeans to deflect the trajectory path of said meat chunks according to thecolor thereof.5. A system according to claim 4 wherein said photometric sensing meansincludes means to photometrically sense opposite sides of said meat chunksas said meat chunks pass through said photometric sensing means.6. A system for sorting substantially regular shape meat chunks having ahigher lean meat content from substantially regular shape meat chunkshaving a higher fat content, said system comprising:means for singularizing said meat chunks;a photometric sensing means for detecting an optical property relating tothe lean meat content of said meat chunks;means for passing said singularized meat chunks through said photometricsensing means;means to sort said meat chunks according to the value of the opticalproperty thus detected; andmeans for cooling said meat chunks on said singularizing means and on saidpassing means to a low temperature to assist in separation andmanipulation of said meat chunks;whereby said meat chunks are sorted according to lean meat content thereofto achieve a fat-rich concentrate and a lean meat rich concentrate.7. A system for processing trim meat pieces having lean meat portions andfat portions, said system comprising:means for dividing said trim meat pieces into substantially regular shapemeat chunks having higher lean meat content and lower lean meat content;means for singularizing said meat chunks;a photometric sensing means for detecting an optical property related tothe lean meat content of said meat chunks, said sensing means includingmeans to detect said optical property at opposite sides of said meatchunks;means for passing said singularized meat chunks through said photometricsensing means; andmeans to sort said meat chunks according to the value of the opticalproperty thus detected, said sorting means including means to sort saidmeat chunks when said optical property at either side of said meat chunksexceeds a predetermined value;whereby said meat chunks are sorted according to the lean meat contentthereof to achieve a fat rich concentrate and a lean meat richconcentrate.8. A system according to claim 6 wherein said sorting means furtherincludes an AND gate circuit with means to sort said meat chunks only whensaid optical property detected on both sides thereof exceeds apredetermined value, and switch means for alternately coupling said ORcircuit and said AND circuit with said sensing means.9. A system for processing trim meat pieces having lean meat portions andfat portions, said system comprising:means for dividing said trim meat pieces into substantially regular shapemeat chunks having higher lean meat content and lower lean meat content;means for singularizing said meat chunks;a photometric sensing means for detecting an optical property related tothe lean meat content of said meat chunks, said sensing means includingmeans to detect said optical property at opposite sides of said meatchunks;means for passing said singularized meat chunks through said photometricsensing means; andmeans to sort said meat chunks according to the value of the opticalproperty thus detected, said sorting means including means to sort saidmeat chunks only when said optical property detected on both sides thereofexceeds a predetermined value."}
{"WKU":"039309924","Title":"Information storage retrieval system","App_Date":"1974-02-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Irwin D. Baumel;Nathan A. Moerman;Attilio A. De Meo","Assignee":"Sanders Associates, Inc.","ICL_Class":"G06K 2100","References":"2386520;3363958;3413628","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In combination with a storage bin having a plurality of substantiallyplanar records stored on edge therein and wherein each of said records isprovided with a tab extending beyond the edge of the remainder of therecord, apparatus positioned adjacent to said bin for partially extractinga preselected record, comprising,a finger assembly including a pair of tab grasping fingers resilientlyurged to an open position and selectively actuatable to a closed position,means for positioning said finger assembly opposite the tab of saidpreselected record,a record transporting mechanism including a pair of endless belts adjacentto each other for frictionally engaging a record therebetween andtransporting it in either direction, andmeans for successively"}
{"WKU":"039309932","Title":"Capacitor testing and sorting apparatus","App_Date":"1974-11-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Howard S. Best;Daniel J. Bustraan;Bernard P. McDonnell","Assignee":"Corning Glass Works","ICL_Class":"G01R 1152;G01R 2726","References":"2016455;2567741;3761806","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Apparatus for automatically testing and sorting a succession of similarcylindrical capacitors having axial leads and sequentially transportedthrough a first path of travel to a loading station for transfer of eachsaid capacitor successively to said apparatus, such apparatus comprising,in combination;A. a capacitor conveyor having a capacitor receiving station locatedadjacent said loading station and carrying a succession of capacitorclamping assemblies;B. means at said receiving station for successively transferring each saidcapacitor arriving at said loading station to said receiving station andthereby to said conveyor;C. motor means for imparting periodic movements to said conveyor tosuccessively convey said capacitors received at said receiving stationthrough a second path of travel including, in sequence, such receivingstation, a succession of capacitor electrical charge stations, a capacitorcurrent leakage testing station, a capacitor electrical discharge station,a first capacitor reject station, an electrical capacitance testingstation, a second capacitor reject station, and a succession of capacitorsorting stations, there being on said conveyor one of said capacitorclamping assemblies for each said station in said second path of travel;D. a vertically reciprocative tool plate supported above said conveyor formovement between raised and lowered positions, such tool plate supporting,"}
{"WKU":"039309940","Title":"Method and means for internal inspection and sorting of produce","App_Date":"1973-10-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Tim D. Conway;Paul F. Paddock","Assignee":"Sunkist Growers, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B07C  534","References":"3628657;3768645;3773172","Claims":"We claim:1. The method of automatically selecting and separating internally damagedcitrus fruit from undamaged fruit, which comprises the steps of:a. simultaneously scanning meat portions on opposite sides of each fruitcore with light rays;b. sensing variations in light transparencies of the scanned portions;c. integrating the sensed variations to evaluate said damage and nondamage;andd. classifying the fruits in accordance with such evaluations.2. The method according to claim 1 including the further steps ofcompensating the integrated sensed variations for fruit size to obtaindamage evaluations in terms of percentage.3. The method in accordance with claim 1 in which said light rays are laserbeams.4. The method in accordance with claim 3 in which said laser beams have awave length of about 633 nanometers.5. Apparatus for grading objects according to changes in a common internalcharacteristic thereof, comprising:a. an inspection station;b. a sorting station including a plurality of sorting positionscorresponding to various possible classification grades of the objectsaccording to said internal characteristics thereof;c. conveyor means for continuously moving said objects in sequence throughsaid inspection station to said sorting station;d. light-ray means at said inspection station for successively evaluatingchanges in said internal characteristic of each object and determining itsgrade classification; ande. means at each sorting position energizable for removing from saidconveyor each object with a determined grade classification correspondingto that of the sorting position.6. Apparatus in accordance with claim 5 in which said light-ray means is atleast one laser.7. Apparatus in accordance with claim 6 in which said light rays have awave length of about 633 nanometers.8. Apparatus for grading objects according to a common internalcharacteristic thereof, comprising:a. an inspection station;b. a sorting station including a plurality of sorting positionscorresponding to various possible classifications of the objects accordingto said internal characteristics thereof;c. conveyor means for continuously moving said objects in sequence throughsaid inspection station to said sorting station;d. light-ray means at said inspection station for successively evaluatingsaid internal characteristic of each object and determining itsclassification, including two spaced apart sensors for simultaneouslyevaluating adjacent paths through said object; ande. means at each sorting position energizable for removing from saidconveyor each object with a determined classification corresponding tothat of the sorting position.9. Apparatus in accordance with claim 8 in which said light-ray means is atleast one laser.10. Apparatus in accordance with claim 9 in which said light rays have awave length of about 633 nanometers.11. Apparatus for automatically selecting between a plurality of generallyspherical objects based on the optical transparency characteristicsthereof, which comprises:a. a source of light-rays;b. means for translating successive changes in transparency betweendifferent parts on opposite sides of the center of each object subjectedto said light-rays into an integrated electrical signal; andc. means for selecting between the objects on the basis of this electricalsignal.12. Apparatus in accordance with claim 11 in which said light-ray source isat least one laser.13. Apparatus in accordance with claim 12 in which said laser light rayshave a wave length of about 633 nanometers.14. Apparatus according to claim 11, wherein the objects comprise corecontaining fruits initially oriented to align their cores, and said fruitsare successively moved along a path through the light rays, and thetransparency translating means includes means for integrating the changesalong said path for the different parts on the opposite sides of the fruitcore axis; and including means for limiting the integrated changessubstantially to parts in the meat portion of the fruit between the denserskin portions at the leading and trailing ends of the fruit.15. Apparatus according to claim 11, wherein said objects comprise citrusfruits oriented with their core axes substantially correspondinglypositioned, and said fruits are successively moved along a path throughthe light rays, and the transparency translating means comprises fruitdamage sensor means for sensing transmitted light in said different partsalong said path on opposite sides of the fruit core axis.16. Apparatus in accordance with claim 15 in which said light-ray source isat least one laser.17. Apparatus in accordance with claim 16 in which said light has a wavelength of about 633 nanometers.18. Apparatus for automatically inspecting and sorting citrus fruits intodifferent grades according to the extent of their internal nondamage anddamage, comprising:a. a source of light rays;b. conveyor means for successively moving citrus fruit in a path passingthrough said light rays;c. sensing means for translating successive changes for each fruit of itsoptical transparency along said path into electric singals;d. electronic computer means for converting said electric signals for eachfruit into an electric output characteristic of its internal damage inrelation to one of said grades;e. fruit discharge positions traversed by said conveyor corresponding tothe respective grades of said fruit; andf. control means synchronized with the movements of said fruits forselectively discharging each fruit from said conveyor when it reaches itsgrade discharge position.19. Apparatus in accordance with claim 18 in which said light-ray source isat least one laser.20. Apparatus in accordance with claim 19 in which said light has a wavelength of about 633 nanometers.21. Apparatus for automatically inspecting and sorting citrus fruits intodifferent grades according to the extent of their internal nondamage anddamage, comprising:a. a source of light rays;b. conveyor means for successively moving citrus fruit in a path passingthrough said light rays;c. sensing means for translating each fruit optical transparency intoelectric signals, comprising a pair of damage sensor units spaced totraverse scanning paths on opposite sides of the core of a preorientedfruit, each of said units including a photomultiplier tube responding tovariations in the optical transparency along the path scanned by said unitand providing output electric signals in accordance with said variations;d. electronic computer means for converting said electric signals for eachfruit into an electric output characteristic of its internal damage inrelation to one of said grades;e. fruit discharge positions traversed by said conveyor corresponding tothe respective grades of said fruit; andf. control means synchronized with the movements of said fruits forselectively discharging each fruit from said conveyor when it reaches itsgrade discharge position.22. Apparatus in accordance with claim 21 in which said light-ray source isat least one laser.23. Apparatus in accordance with claim 22 in which said light has a wavelength of about 633 nanometers.24. The method of inspecting core type fruits to determine as betweeninternally damaged and nondamaged fruits, which comprises the steps of:a. successively moving core oriented fruits through a light ray scanningpath; andb. simultaneously sensing variations in optical transparency of meatcontaining portions lying on opposite sides of each fruit core.25. Apparatus in accordance with claim 24 in which said light-ray source isat least one laser.26. Apparatus in accordance with claim 25 in which said light has a wavelength of about 633 nanometers.27. Apparatus according to claim 11, wherein the damage sensor meanscomprises a pair of damage sensor units operatively positioned to straddlethe core of each fruit as it is moved along said path, each of said sensorunits including a photomultiplier tube having a photosensitive surfacecapable of responding to the changes in said light transparency of thedifferent parts.28. Apparatus according to claim 18, wherein said synchronized controlmeans includes memory means for storing said electrical outputcharacteristic for each fruit until it reaches its corresponding gradedischarge position.29. Apparatus according to claim 21, wherein the electronic computer meansincludes a pair of damage evaluating circuits having inputs respectivelyconnected to receive the output electric signals of said photomultipliertubes, and outputs connected into a difference amplifier circuit whereinthe evaluation signals for one of said scanning paths are subtracted fromthe evaluation signals for the other of said scanning paths.30. Apparatus according to claim 29, wherein each of said damage evaluatingcircuits contains logarithmic amplifier circuit means having componentsoperable to compensate for the logarithmic absorption characteristic ofthe fruit in such a manner that a change due to damage will cause the sameoutput for a small fruit as for a large fruit, and its output voltageincreases upwardly towards a predetermined positive voltage potential.31. Apparatus according to claim 30, wherein the input to each logarithmicamplifier is connected with a noise filter circuit having components foreliminating high frequency noise signals that do not relate to fruitdamage, and the output of the logarithmic amplifier is connected to passthrough a high pass filter circuit having components for eliminating lowfrequency signals caused by drift errors, fruit length irregularities anddifferences in thickness from one side of the fruit to the other.32. Apparatus according to claim 29, wherein the output of the differenceamplifier circuit is coupled with a gain adjusting circuit means havingcomponents variable to set the gain at the most desirable values for theparticular type of internal damage that is being evaluated.33. Apparatus according to claim 32, which includes an absolute valueamplifier circuit having an input connected with the output of the gainadjusting circuit and components operative to provide at its output anabsolute value of its received input.34. Apparatus according to claim 33, which includes an integrator circuithaving components operative to integrate the output of the absolute valueamplifier circuit for the period during which the fruit is moved over thedamage sensor units and timed switching means for controlling saidcomponents so that the integrated output will be for the time that thedamage sensor units are scanning the meat portion of the fruit.35. Apparatus according to claim 34, including a ramp generator circuithaving components operable to provide an output ramp wave form variablefor fruit size compensation, timed switching means for controlling theoperation of the ramp generator during a period concurrent with that ofsaid integrator circuit, and divider circuit means coupled with theoutputs of said ramp generator circuit and the integrator circuit andhaving components operative to divide the output of the integrator circuitby the output of the ramp generator circuit to obtain a percentageevaluation of the fruit damage.36. Apparatus according to claim 35, including a sample hold amplifiercircuit connected to receive the output signal of said divider, andincluding components operative to prolong said output signal for eachfruit at its output value until the next fruit traverses the sensor units.37. Apparatus according to claim 36, including a switched amplifier circuitconnected to receive the output of the sample hold circuit, and havingswitching component for applying the hold portion of said received outputto a grade separator circuit.38. Apparatus according to claim 37, wherein said grade separator circuitcomprises a plurality of voltage comparator circuits having thresholdactivating voltages for selectively providing group determinative outputsfor the grade separator circuit depending upon the input value of theswitched fruit characteristic damage evaluation signal.39. Apparatus according to claim 14, wherein the limiting means comprises aswitching circuit for activating and deactivating said integrating means,and including timing sensor means in said path, said sensor means beingresponsive to the interception of light rays by the skin portions at theleading and trailing ends of the fruit.40. Apparatus according to claim 39, wherein the timing sensor meansincludes two photodiodes spaced apart in the direction of said path adistance substantially corresponding to the skin thickness at the leadingand trailing ends of the fruit."}
{"WKU":"039309959","Title":"Grade distributing apparatus","App_Date":"1974-08-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Paul F. Paddock;Jerry W. Cramer","Assignee":"Sunkist Growers, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B07B 1308","References":"532597;1496376;2194381;2308729;2901089;3086636;3100040;3327848;3401796","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a sorting conveyor in a system for classifying and sorting objects bygrades wherein the objects successively pass through an inspection stationwhere evaluation signals are generated for a given set of grades of theobjects and the sorting conveyor has a series of successive dischargestations corresponding to the given grades where the objects are releasedin response to the corresponding evaluation signals,the combination of:a conveyor;a continuous series of interconnected holders for the inspected objectsprovided by the conveyor to convey the objects to the successive dischargestations,each of said holders having a normal state to transport an object and beingbiased to a release state to release the object,each holder being hingedly mounted on the conveyor with the hinge axisoffset on one side from the center of gravity of the conveyor so that theholder is gravitationally biased to swing downward to discharge an objecttherefrom;a corresponding series of latches on the conveyor traveling with therespective holders to releasably retain the holders in their normalstates,in which the corresponding latch releasably secures the holder to theconveyor on the opposite side of the center of gravity of the holder sothat releasing the latch causes the holder to swing downward to release anobject in the holder;said latch being responsive to return swinging movement of the holder tolatch the holder at its normal position, andin which the latch includes a downwardly extending spring-biased latch armfor hook engagement with a portion of the holder and the end of the latcharm is formed with a cam surface to cooperate with said portion of theholder so that on the return movement of the holder said portion of theholder impinges on said cam surface to retract the latch arm out of theway and then the latch arm snaps into engagement with the portion of theholder;trippers at the respective discharge stations operable in response tocorresponding evaluation signals to release the holders as the holdersreach the discharge stations; andfixed means in the path of the released holder to cam the holder back toits normal position.2. A combination as set forth in claim 1 in which said portion of theholder is formed with a cam surface to cooperate with the cam surface ofsaid latch arm.3. A combination as set forth in claim 1 in which said latch arm is one armof a lever and the second arm of the lever is an operating arm movable bythe conveyor along a given path past the discharge stations and each ofsaid trippers is operable to move from a retracted position to aneffective position intersecting said path.4. A combination as set forth in claim 1 in which each of said trippers hasa trip member and a corresponding solenoid responsive to evaluationsignals is operable to shift the trip member from an ineffective retractedposition to a latch-releasing position.5. In a sorting conveyor in a system for classifying and sorting objects bygrades wherein the objects successively pass through an inspection stationwhere evaluation signals are generated for a given set of grades of theobjects and the sorting conveyor has a series of successive dischargestations corresponding to the given grades where the objects are releasedin response to the corresponding evaluation signals,the combination of:a conveyor;a continuous series of interconnected holders for the inspected objectsprovided by the conveyor to convey the objects to the successive dischargestations,each of said holders having a normal state to transport an object and beingbiased to a release state to release the object;a corresponding series of latches on the conveyor traveling with therespective holders to releasably retain the holders in their normalstates;trippers at the respective discharge stations operable in response tocorresponding evaluation signals to release the holders as the holdersreach the discharge stations;guide chutes at the respective discharge stations to receive the releasedobjects and to direct the released objects gravitationally laterally awayfrom the path of the conveyor,each of said guide chutes being movable selectively to alternate oppositepositions directed to the opposite sides of the conveyor; andmeans to releasably secure each of the guide chutes at its two alternatepositions selectively.6. In a sorting conveyor in a system for classifying and sorting objects bygrades wherein the objects successively pass through an inspection stationwhere evaluation signals are generated for a given set of grades of theobjects and the sorting conveyor has a series of successive stationarydischarge stations corresponding to the given grades where the objects arereleased in response to the corresponding evaluation signals.the combination of:a conveyor;a continuous series of interconnected holders for the inspected objectsprovided by the conveyor to convey the objects to the successive dischargestations,each of said holders having a normal state to transport an object and beingbiased to a release state to release the object;a corresponding series of latches on the conveyor traveling with therespective holders, releasably engaging said holders and holding theholders in their normal states;tripper means at the respective discharge stations operable in response tocorresponding evaluation signals to engage and release said latches fromsaid holders to thereby release the holders to their released state as theholders reach the discharge stations;a plurality of grade conveyors corresponding to the discharge stationsrespectively and extending transversely of the sorting conveyor below thedischarge stations; andmeans at each of said discharge stations to divert the released objects tothe corresponding grade conveyor.7. A combination as set forth in claim 6 in which each of said gradeconveyors is reversible and each of the corresponding diverting means isreversible accordingly to divert the released objects in reversedirections.8. A combination as set forth in claim 7,in which the grade conveyors are reversible in direction of travel to carrythe objects in opposite directions from the sorting conveyor;in which a first set of receiving stations corresponding to the gradeconveyors receive the objects from the grade conveyors when the gradeconveyors travel in one direction;and in which a second similar set of receiving stations receive the objectsfrom the grade conveyors when the grade conveyors travel in the oppositedirection.9. In a system for classifying and sorting objects, wherein the objects areinspected in succession and corresponding evaluation signals are generatedin accord with a given set of grades and the evaluated objects aredelivered to a sorting conveyor of a distribution system which sortingconveyor has a series of discharge stations corresponding to the givengrades and an object is released at each discharge station in response toa corresponding evaluation signal,the improvement comprising:a guide chute under each discharge station to receive the dischargedobject,said guide chute comprising an inclined trough of flexible sheet materialsuspended by its edges,said chute being at an acute angle to the sorting conveyor to divert thereleased object laterally of the conveyor, andsaid guide chute being reversible to divert the released object in eitherdirection laterally of the sorting conveyor.10. In a system for classifying and sorting objects, wherein the objectsare inspected to succession and corresponding evaluation signals aregenerated in accord with a given set of grades and the evaluated objectsare delivered to a sorting conveyor of a distribution system which sortingconveyor has a series of discharge stations corresponding to the givengrades and an object is released at each discharge station in response toa corresponding evaluation signal,the improvement comprising:a guide chute under each discharge station to receive the dischargedobject,said guide chute comprising an inclined trough of flexible sheet materialsuspended by its edges,said chute being at an acute angle to the sorting conveyor to divert thereleased object laterally of the conveyor; andrigid means suspending the flexible sheet material of the guide chute,said rigid means being provided with an inner resilient yieldable means tocushion impact of the objects."}
{"WKU":"039309967","Title":"Automatic popcorn popping method","App_Date":"1974-05-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Alan M. Day;Gordon D. Browning","Assignee":"Humbolt Instrument Co.","ICL_Class":"B07B  701","References":"15630;1873395;2208896;2477160;2668636;2899139;3294546","Claims":"We claim:1. The method of removing popped corn from the closed pot of a popcornpopping machine in which popcorn has been cooked in heated seasoning oil,including the steps of: maintaining the pot closed except for an air inletopening and an evacuation outlet: directing an air current through the airinlet opening into the pot; carrying the popped corn and unpopped kernelsout of the pot with said air current through the evacuation outlet;directing the air current with the evacuated popped corn and kernels alonga path whereby the kernels drop downwardly by gravity and the popped cornis directed along a path separated from the kernals; and collecting thekernels for removal from the machine.2. The method of claim 1 in which the air current after being directedthrough the inlet opening is dflected outwardly and downwardly along theinside periphery of the pot, thereafter directing the air current acrossthe bottom of the pot to sweep the popped corn and unpopped kernels towardthe center of the pot, and thereafter directing the air current upwardlythrough said evacuation outlet.3. The method of claim 2 in which the popped corn is separated from the aircurrent and the air current is recirculated in a path back into said airinlet.4. A method of removing popped corn from the closed pot of a poppingmachine in which popcorn has been cooked in heated seasoning oil,including the steps of: directing an air current downwardly through anupper inlet opening of the pot, directing the air current along the bottomof the pot and toward the center thereof to entrain along popped corn andunpopped kernels, discharging the air current and entrained corn andkernels from the pot through an evacuation conduit, directing thedischarged air current in a path which curves downwardly and then upwardlywhereby the corn and kernels are separated from the air current anddirected downwardly therefrom, and thereafter recirculating the aircurrent into the pot through said inlet opening."}
{"WKU":"039309975","Title":"Univalent metal double cyanide as reducing agents in froth flotation of","App_Date":"1974-04-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Vojislav Petrovich","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B03D  102","References":"1628046;3382976","Claims":"I claim:1. An improved method of beneficiating ores and minerals selected from thegroup of dioxides of manganese, tin, titanium, thorium, the vanadates andthe wolframates by froth flotation process to produce a froth concentrateof desired metal value, which improvement comprises; effecting frothflotation of the ore by treating the comminuted ore of the mineral slurrywith dipotassium manganese, or dipotassium iron, or dipotassium nickeltricyanide, which compounds act as reducing agents reducing said ores andminerals with the recited cyanides to a lower oxidizing state, and anaddition of adequate amounts of potassium cyanide and sulfuric acid,followed by an effective amount of a collector selected from the group ofolefine alcohols or propargyl carbinols, said alcohols and said carbinolshave from 5 to 15 carbon atoms; and recovering a froth concentraterelatively rich in the desired metal value to leave the tailingsrelatively poor in the desired metal value."}
{"WKU":"039309983","Title":"Wastewater treatment","App_Date":"1974-09-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Paul V. Knopp;Wayne B. Gitchel","Assignee":"Sterling Drug Inc.","ICL_Class":"C02C  300","References":"3359200;3617540;3697417;3764523;3824185;3849303","Claims":"We claim:1. In a process of nitrogen removal from wastewater comprising:a. mixing wastewater containing reduced nitrogenous compounds with activenitrifying organisms and an oxygen-containing gas for a sufficient lengthof time to convert substantially all of the nitrogenous material to thenitrate form and thereby produce a nitrified wastewater stream andaccumulated biomass;b. separating said nitrifying organisms and accumulated biomass from saidnitrified wastewater stream, recycling the separated nitrifying organismsand accumulated biomass to the nitrification contacting step, andperiodically or continuously removing a portion of the accumulated biomassfrom the nitrifying step;c. contacting said nitrified wastewater stream with heterotrophicdenitrifying organisms and an organic carbon source for a length of timesufficient to reduce the nitrate nitrogen to elemental nitrogen;d. separating said denitrifying organisms and accumulated biomass from thedenitrified wastewater stream, recycling the separated denitrifyingorganisms and accumulated biomass to the denitrification step, andperiodically or continuously removing a portion of the accumulated biomassfrom the denitrifying step; ande. removing a final effluent with nitrogen removed therefrom; theimprovement which comprises heating the biomass removed from thenitrifying and denitrifying steps in the presence of an oxygen-containinggas at a temperature of 175.degree.C. to 315.degree.C. at an oxygenpartial pressure of 5 to 250 psi to partially oxidize the biomass andconvert substantially all of the organic nitrogen to ammonia nitrogen,separating the resulting oxidized mixture into a solid phase and a liquidphase, removing ammonia from the liquid phase and directing said liquidphase to the denitrifying contact step to provide a source of organiccarbon for the denitrifying organisms.2. A process according to claim 1 in which the biomass to be subjected topartial oxidation is mixed with primary sludge from the sedimentation ofraw sewage.3. A process according to claim 1 in which the biomass to be subjected topartial oxidation is mixed with finely ground waste material having a lownitrogen content thereby obtaining a liquid phase containing a highercarbon to nitrogen ratio than in the liquid phase obtained by oxidizingsaid biomass alone.4. A process according to claim 1 which comprises adding an alkalinesubstance to the liquid phase derived from the partial oxidation ofbiomass to raise the pH to at least 9.5, stripping ammonia from saidliquid phase and directing said liquid phase stripped of ammonia to thedenitrifying contact step.5. A process according to claim 4 in which the ammonia is stripped from theliquid phase by passing a non-condensible gas through the liquid phase,and the non-condensible gas then passed through an ammonia absorptionvessel and recirculated through the liquid phase.6. A process according to claim 4 in which the alkaline material is sodiumhydroxide.7. A process according to claim 4 in which the alkaline material is limeand a residue of a mixture of calcium carbonate and calcium hydroxide isproduced.8. A process according to claim 7 wherein the residue of calcium carbonateand calcium hydroxide is transferred to step (a) of the process of claim1."}
{"WKU":"039309991","Title":"Pulse transfer thickening","App_Date":"1973-12-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John B. Rosenquest, Jr.","Assignee":"Dorr-Oliver Incorporated","ICL_Class":"B01D 1700","References":"2383193;2673525;2932552;2958655;3600305;3785969;3816034","Claims":"I claim:1. A method for obtaining improved thickening of sewage sludge in a primarysettling tank which comprises regular pulsed discharge of the thickenedsludge from the primary settling tank, wherein from 1 to 20 dischargepulses per minute are employed, each pulse imparting to the sludge a peakvelocity of at least 2.5 feet per second.2. The method of claim 1 wherein each pulse has a duration of from about1/2 to 1 second.3. The method of claim 1 wherein each pulse has a duration of about 3/4 ofa second.4. The method of claim 1 wherein from 1 to 10 discharge pulses per minuteare employed.5. The method of claim 4 wherein each pulse has a duration of from about1/2 to 1 second.6. The method of claim 4 wherein each pulse has a duration of about 3/4 ofa second.7. A system for obtaining improved thickening of sewage sludge comprising aprimary settling tank and a digester or thickener, an air operated springassisted diaphragm pump located in the discharge conduit connecting saidsettling tank to said digester or thickener, said pump providing pulseddischarge of said sludge, each discharge pulse having a time duration offrom 1/2 to 1 second and imparting a peak velocity to the sludge of atleast 2.5 feet per second.8. The system of claim 7 wherein from 1 to 20 pulses per minute areprovided by said pump and each pulse has a time duration of about 3/4 of asecond.9. The system of claim 8 wherein from 1 to 10 pulses per minute areprovided by said pump."}
{"WKU":"039310000","Title":"Coalescing dialysis","App_Date":"1972-11-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Charles Eugene Hamilton","Assignee":"The Dow Chemical Company","ICL_Class":"B01D 1300","References":"1885393;2768977;3225107;3228877;3608729;3769206","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process comprising:a. contacting a heterogeneous dispersion in which the disperse phase is apolysubstituted phenolic compound with one side of a membrane in which thedisperse phase is soluble and on which the disperse phase coalesces; andb. contacting the opposite side of the membrane with a membrane insolublereactant for the disperse phase whereby the disperse phase is reacted toproduce a material which is essentially insoluble in the membrane withoutthe build-up of a back pressure against said opposite side of saidmembrane.2. The process of claim 1 wherein the polysubstituted phenolic compound isdinitro-orthosecondary-butyl-phenol.3. The process of claim 2 wherein the reactant is sodium hydroxide.4. A process for removing one or more polysubstituted phenolics from anaqueous waste stream, wherein the phenolics are present in amounts greaterthan their solubility limit, which comprises:a. feeding said stream past a membrane in which the phenolics are solubleand on which the phenolics coalesce, thereby passing said phenolicsthrough said membrane; andb. feeding on the opposite side of the membrane a reactant whereby thephenolics passing through the membrane are reacted to produce a materialwhich is essentially insoluble in the membrane.5. The process of claim 4 wherein the reactant is sodium hydroxide.6. The process of claim 4 wherein the polysubstituted phenolics areselected from the group consisting of bromo, nitro, amino, sulfo orchlorophenols."}
{"WKU":"039310019","Title":"Pentachlorophenol recovery with methylene chloride","App_Date":"1974-06-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William D. Winn","Assignee":"The Dow Chemical Company","ICL_Class":"B01D  300;B01D 1100","References":"2761563;3365395;3692829","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for recovering pentachlorophenol from water which comprises:a. contacting in a zone the water containing pentachlorophenol in acountercurrent manner with methylene chloride to produce an aqueous phaseand a methylene chloride phase;b. withdrawing the aqueous phase from the top of said contacting zone;c. withdrawing said methylene chloride phase from the bottom of saidcontacting zone;d. heating the withdrawn aqueous phase to distill the methylene chloridefrom the phase;e. discarding the residue of said distillation;f. condensing the methylene chloride and water vapors from saiddistillation;g. separating the condensed methylene chloride from said condensed water bydecantation;h. mixing the methylene chloride so separated with the withdrawn methylenechloride phase from the contacting zone;said contacting zone being packed to increase the contact of the methylenechloride and the water phases;said methylene chloride being employed in an amount sufficient to (1)dissolve the pentachlorophenol in the water entering the zone and (2) inan amount in excess of that necessary to saturate the aqueous phase inorder to insure phase separation of the water and methylene chloride."}
{"WKU":"039310027","Title":"Process for removing heavy metals from solutions","App_Date":"1973-06-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Johannes H. Ottenheym;Bernardus H. N. Dassen","Assignee":"Stamicarbon B.V.","ICL_Class":"B01D 1500;C02B  142;C07G  700","References":"3255172;3725261","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for removing heavy metals from solutions and gaseous mixtureswhich comprises:a. contacting the solutions or gaseous mixtures with a sulphur-containingreagent selected from the group consisting of reduced keratin, Bunte saltsof keratin, and natural or synthetic polyamides at least part of whoseamide groups has been replaced by thio-amide groups, whereby the metalsare bound to the reagent, andb. separating the loaded reagent formed in (a), wherein the Bunte salts ofkeratin are derived from keratin by treatment of the keratin in an aqueousmedium with the aid of sulphite ions in which an oxidant is used to causethe reaction to go to completion and wherein the sulphite ions are derivedfrom either alkali metal sulphites or alkaline earth metal sulphites and atetrathionate is used as an oxidant.2. The process of claim 1 wherein the natural or synthetic polyamides areobtained by the reaction of natural or synthetic polyamides withphosphorous pentasulfide.3. The process of claim 1 wherein the natural or synthetic polyamides areselected from the group consisting of polybutyrolactam, polycaprolactam,polyoenantholactam, polyundecalactam, polylaurinolactam,polyhexamethylene-diamine adipate, copolymers on the basis of the monomersof these polyamides, fowl s feathers, horn, outer skin, hair and wool."}
{"WKU":"039310035","Title":"Ion exchanger for the treatment of waste water","App_Date":"1974-02-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Sven Erik Jorgensen","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B01D 1504","References":"3192156;3498911;3801499","Claims":"I claim:1. A method for the treatment of waste water to remove dissolved highmolecular weight organic compounds, ammonium ions and phosphate ionstherefrom which comprises subjecting the waste water to a treatment with achemical selected from the group consisting of precipitating agents andflocculating agents and subsequently passing the pretreated water througha bed consisting of a cellulose ion-exchanger impregnated with.gamma.-manganese dioxide.2. A method according to claim 1, where in the water which has been treatedby passing through the bed consisting of a cellulose ion-exchangerimpregnated with .gamma.-manganese dioxide is subsequently passed througha bed consisting of activated carbon impregnated with .gamma.-manganesedioxide.3. A method for the treatment of waste water to remove dissolved, highmolecular weight organic compounds, ammonium ions and phosphate ionstherefrom which comprises passing the water through a bed of celluloseion-exchange material impregnated with .gamma.-manganese dioxide.4. The method of claim 3, wherein the water is further treated bysubsequently passing it through a bed of activated carbon impregnated with.gamma.-manganese dioxide.5. The method of claim 3, wherein the cellulose ion-exchange material isbark.6. The method of claim 3, wherein the cellulose ion-exchange material issulphonated bark.7. The method of claim 6, wherein the sulphonated bark is produced bytreating bark with concentrated sulphuric acid having a concentration ofabout 50 to 80% for a period of from 30 to 120 minutes.8. the method of claim 3, wherein potassium permanganate is added to thewaste water before it is passed through the bed of ion-exchange material.9. The method of claim 3, wherein the high molecular weight organiccompounds are high molecular weight proteins.10. The method of claim 3, wherein the waste water is subjected to chemicalpretreatment prior to passing the water through the ion-exchange material."}
{"WKU":"039310043","Title":"Method of treating waste liquids from photographic processings","App_Date":"1973-04-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Isao Shimamura;Haruhiko Iwano","Assignee":"Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"B01D 1506","References":"2688000;3232867;3253920;3293036;3429835;3634088;3667950","Claims":"What is cclaimed is:1. A method of treating a waste liquid from a reducer used for the reducingtreatment of photographic printing materials containing ferricyanide ionsand/or ferrocyanide ions from photographic processings which comprisescontacting the waste liquid with a weakly-basic anion-exchange resin inthe presence of ammonium ions and thiosulfate ions.2. The method as set forth in claim 1 wherein the weakly-basicanion-exchange resin used for the treatment of the waste liquid forremoving therefrom ferricyanide ions and/or ferrocyanide ions isregenerated for reuse.3. The method as set forth in claim 2 where regeneration is with an aqueousalkali solution.4. The method as set forth in claim 3 where the aqueous alkali solutioncomprises 1-20 wt.% alkali, based on solution weight.5. The method as set forth in claim 1 where the amount of ferricyanide inthe waste liquid is from 0.1 to 50 g per liter of the waste liquid, andthe amount of ammonium ions and thiosulfate ions, expressed as ammoniumthiosulfate, is 1 to 400 g per liter of the waste liquid.6. The method as set forth in claim 5 where the ammonium ions andthiosulfate ions are derived from ammonium thiosulfate present in thewaste liquid.7. The method as set forth in claim 1 where the weakly-basic anion-exchangeresin comprises at least one of primary, secondary or tertiary aminegroups as the active exchange groups.8. The method as set forth in claim 7 where the groups are on a basematerial selected from the group consisting of: a copolymer of styrene anddivinylbenzene; a copolymer of methacrylate and divinylbenzene; and acopolymer of phenol and formaldehyde.9. The method as set forth in claim 1, wherein said waste liquid is aFarmer s reducer.10. A method of removing ferricyanide ions and/or ferrocyanide ions from awaste solution discharged after subjecting photographic printing plates toa reducing treatment using a reducer containing ferricyanide and athiosulfate by contacting the waste solution with an ion-exchange resinwhich comprises using ammonium thiosulfate as the thiosulfate and using aweakly-basic anion-exchange resin as the ion-exchange resin.11. The method as set forth in claim 10 wherein said ion-exchange resinused for the removal of ferricyanide ions and/or ferrocyanide ions fromthe waste solution is regenerated for reuse.12. The method as set forth in claim 11 where regeneration is with anaqueous alkali solution.13. The method as set forth in claim 12 where the aqueous alkali solutioncomprises 1-20 wt.% alkali, based on solution weight.14. The method as set forth in claim 10 where the amount of ferricyanide inthe waste solution is 0.1 to 50 g per liter of the waste solution, and theamount of ammonium thiosulfate is from 1 to 400 g per liter of the wastesolution.15. The method as set forth in claim 10 where the weakly-basicanion-exchange resin comprises at least one of primary, secondary ortertiary amine groups as the active exchange groups.16. The method as set forth in claim 15 where the groups are on a basematerial selected from the group consisting of: a copolymer of styrene anddivinylbenzene; a copolymer of methacrylate and divinylbenzene; and acopolymer of phenol and formaldehyde.17. The method as set forth in claim 10, wherein said waste solution is aFarmer s reducer."}
{"WKU":"039310051","Title":"Process for separating oil from emulsions of oil in water","App_Date":"1973-08-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Adolf Gasser","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B01D 1704","References":"2897149;3171800;3316181;3347786;3415745;3446732","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A single-stage process of separating oil from an oil-in-water emulsionwhich comprises adding a ferric salt to the emulsion, thereafter adding tothe emulsion containing the ferric salt used oil and an alkali insufficient amount to adjust the hydrogen-ion concentration of the mixtureto a pH between 5.5 and 6.5, subsequently adding an aqueous solution ofhigh-molecular weight water-soluble polymeric flocculating agent to themixture, intimately mixing the mixture and thereafter allowing it to standfor a sufficient period for it to stratify into two phases, one phaseconsisting essentially of water free from oil and the other consisting ofthe flocculating agent and the ferric hydroxide containing the oil presentin the emulsion, and finally separating the two phases.2. A single-stage process as defined in claim 1, in which the alkali issodium hydroxide.3. A single-stage process as defined in claim 2, in which the mixture isadjusted to a pH of 6.2 by the addition of sodium hydroxide.4. A single-stage process as defined in claim 2, wherein the ferric salt isferric sulfate.5. A single-stage process as defined in claim 2, wherein the ferric salt isferric chloride.6. A single-stage process as defined in claim 1, wherein said step offorming said intimate mixture comprises passing a compressed gas throughthe mixture to intensify the mixing.7. A single-stage process of separating oil from an oil-water emulsionwhich comprises adding a ferric salt to the emulsion; adding undervigorous stirring used oil and an alkali in an amount sufficient to adjustthe hydrogen-ion concentration of the mixture to a pH value between 5.5and 6.5; subsequently adding an aqueous solution of high-molecular weightwater-soluble polymeric flocculating agent to the mixture; intimatelymixing the components of said mixture and thereafter allowing it to standfor a sufficient time period to separate into two phases, one phaseconsisting essentially of water free of oil, and the other consisting ofthe flocculating agent, ferric hydroxide containing the oil originallypresent in the emulsion together with the subsequently added oil; andfinally separating the two phases.8. A single-stage process as defined in claim 7, in which the amount of theaqueous solution of the polymer that is added to the mixture is equivalentto between 30 and 60 milligrams of polymer per liter of the mixture.9. A single-stage process as defined in claim 7, wherein said polymer isselected from the group consisting of polyacrylic acid, polyacrylamidepolyvinyl alcohol and polyethylene oxide.10. A single-stage process as defined in claim 7, wherein said polymerconsists essentially of a mixture of polyacrylamide with an alkali salt ofpolyacrylic acid.11. A single-stage process as defined in claim 7, wherein said polymerconsists essentially of a mixture of polyacrylamide with an ammonium saltof polyacrylic acid.12. A single-stage process as defined in claim 7, in which the oil added isoil that was recovered from a prior batch of ferric hydroxide that wasseparated in a prior operation of the process.13. A single-stage process as defined in claim 7, in which a mineral oil isadded to the mixture after its adjustment to a pH value between 5.5 and6.5 has been made, in an amount equivalent to approximately one volume ofoil to each 100 volumes of the mixture.14. A single-stage process as defined in claim 7, in which the oil-in-wateremulsion is a used cutting oil.15. A single-stage process as defined in claim 7, wherein said mixture isadjusted to a pH value of 5.5 by the addition of sodium hydroxide.16. A single-stage process as defined in claim 7, wherein said mixture isadjusted to a pH value of 6.2 by the addition of sodium hydroxide."}
{"WKU":"039310060","Title":"Method of reducing sludge accumulation from tar sands hot water process","App_Date":"1974-10-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert A. Baillie;James Van Dyck Fear","Assignee":"Great Canadian Oil Sands Limited","ICL_Class":"B01D 2100","References":"3052621;3487003;3526585;3751358;3763041;3816305","Claims":"The invention claimed is:1. In a hot water process for extracting bitumen from tar sands whereinsaid tar sands are mulled with water at a temperature in the range of170.degree. to 190.degree.F. to provide a bituminous froth product and awaste water stream containing 35 to 75% solids by weight including sand,silt, clay and bitumen and wherein said waste water stream is stored in aretention pond containing an upper layer of water and a lower layer ofsludge containing up to 50% by weight dispersed solids including clay,silt and bitumen, the improvement which comprises a method for compactingsaid sludge layer which comprises dispersing said waste water stream overthe surface of said pond thereby raining the sand in said waste waterstream through said sludge layer thereby compacting said sludge layer andincreasing the proportion of the non-sludge layer in the pond."}
{"WKU":"039310078","Title":"Method of extracting heavy metals from industrial waste waters","App_Date":"1973-12-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Izuru Sugano;Toshiro Tsuji;Masaru Kanamori","Assignee":"Nippon Electric Company Limited","ICL_Class":"C02B  120","References":"2232295;3347787;3575854;3617559","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method of extracting heavy metals from acidcontaining waste watersolution which comprises, providing said solution with ferrous ions and abase selected from the group consisting of hydroxides and carbonates ofalkali metals and alkaline earth metals and ammonium hydroxide, the amountof ferrous ions being at least 2 times the amount in mols of the totalmols of heavy metals present other than iron, the amount of base addedcorresponding to 0.9 to 1.2 equivalent of acid radicals present in saidsolution, thereby providing a suspension of metal hydroxides includingferrous hydroxide, bubbling an oxygen-containing gas into the suspensionto oxidize said suspension and form a crystalline precipitate ofessentially at least one of the ferric compounds selected from the groupconsisting of ferrites, magnetite and oxyhydrate of iron containing saidheavy metals originally contained in said waste water, and then separatingsaid precipitate from said waste water to obtain clean water.2. A method of extracting heavy metals from waste water solution,comprising the steps of adding ferrous ions to said waste water in anamount of at least about two times the mol amount of all heavy metal ionspresent other than iron in said waste water, said solution containing acidradicals, adding a base selected from the group consisting of hydroxidesand carbonates of alkali metals and alkaline earth metals and ammoniumhydroxide to said waste water in an amount corresponding essentially to0.9 to 1.2 equivalent of the acid radicals contained in said solution, asuspension of metal hydroxides including ferrous hydroxide being formedfollowing addition of both the ferrous ions and the base, bubbling anoxygen-containing gas into the suspension to stir up and to oxidize thesuspension, and form a crystalline precipitate of essentially at least oneof the ferric compounds selected from the group consisting of ferrites,magnetite and oxyhydrate of iron containing said heavy metals originallycontained in said waste water, and then separating said precipitate fromsaid waste water to obtain clean water.3. A method of extracting heavy metals from waste water solution containingferrous ions, comprising the steps of adding ferrous ions to said wastewater in such an amount that the mol amount of ferrous ions present in thewaste water is at least two times the total mols of heavy metal ions otherthan iron contained in said waste water, said resulting solutioncontaining acid radicals, adding a base selected from the group consistingof hydroxides and carbonates of alkali metals and alkaline earth metalsand ammonium hydroxide to said waste water in an amount corresponding to0.9 to 1.2 equivalent of the acid radicals present, a suspension of metalhydroxides being obtained containing ferrous hydroxide following theaddition of both the ferrous ions and said base, bubbling anoxygen-containing gas into the suspension to stir up and to oxidize thesuspension, and form a crystalline precipitate of essentially at least oneof the ferric compounds selected from the group consisting of ferrites,magnetite and oxyhydrate of iron and further containing said heavy metalsoriginally contained in said waste water, and then separating saidprecipitate from said waste water to obtain clean water.4. A method of extracting heavy metals from waste water solution containingferrous ions in an amount at least about two times the total mols of saidheavy metals present other than iron, said solution containing acidradicals, said method comprising the steps of adding a base selected fromthe group consisting of hydroxides and carbonates of alkali metals andalkaline earth metals and ammonium hydroxide to said waste water in anamount corresponding to 0.9 to 1.2 equivalent of the acid radicalscontained in said waste water to form at least a suspension of ferroushydroxide, bubbling an oxygen-containing gas into the suspension to stirup and oxidize the suspension, and form a crystalline precipitate ofessentially at least one of the ferric compounds selected from the groupconsisting of ferrites, magnetite and oxyhydrate of iron containing saidheavy metals originally contained in said waste water, and then separatingthe precipitate from said waste water to obtain clean water.5. The method claimed according to claim 1, wherein said separating stepcomprises removing said precipitate from the waste water by means of amagnet.6. The method as claimed in claim 2, wherein said separating step comprisesremoving said precipitate from the waste water by means of a magnet.7. A method of extracting heavy metals from acidic waste water, at leastone of said metals lying below iron in the electromotive series whichcomprises the steps of, adding metallic iron to said waste water tochemically deposit said at least one metal below iron in saidelectromotive series on said metallic iron, separating the iron on whichsaid at least one metal has been deposited from said waste water,adjusting the amount of ferrous ions in said waste water so that it is atleast two times the mol amount of the total mols of heavy metal ionsremaining in said waste water, raising the pH of said water by adding abase selected from the group consisting of hydroxides and carbonates ofalkali metals and alkaline earth metals and ammonium hydroxide in anamount corresponding to 0.9 to 1.2 equivalent of the acid present, andthen oxidizing said solution by bubbling an oxygencontaining gastherethrough to form a crystalline precipitate of essentially at least oneof the ferric compounds selected from the group consisting of ferrites,magnetite and oxyhydrate of iron containing said heavy metals remaining insaid solution and then separating said precipitate from said waste waterto obtain clean water.8. The method as claimed in claim 7, wherein said at least one metal belowiron in the electromotive series is selected from the group consisting ofNi, Pb, Cd, Hg and Cu.9. A method of removing at least one heavy metal selected from the groupconsisting of Pb, Ti, V, Cr, Mn, Fe, Co, Ni, Cu, Zn, Y, Cd, Sn, Hg, Bi,Al, and Mg from waste water, comprising the steps of providing said wastewater with ferrous ions and a base selected from the group consisting ofhydroxides and carbonates of alkali metals and alkaline earth metals andammonium hydroxide, the mol amount of ferrous ions being at least twotimes the total mols of heavy metals present in the waste water other thanferrous ions, the base being added in an amount corresponding to 0.9 to1.2 equivalent of acid radicals present in the water, thereby providing asuspension of metal hydroxides including ferrous hydroxide, bubbling anoxygen-containing gas into the suspension to oxidize said suspension andform a crystalline precipitate consisting essentially of at least oneferric compound selected from the group consisting of ferrites, magnetite,and oxyhydrate of iron and containing said at least one metal originallycontained in said waste water, and separating the precipitate from saidwaste water.10. The method claimed in claim 9, wherein said separating step includesattracting said precipitate by means of a magnet.11. A method of removing metals from waste water containing at least onemetal selected from the group of Pb, Ti, V, Cr, Mn, Co, Ni, Cu, Zn, Y, Cd,Sn, Fe, Hg, Bi, Al and Mg and further containing ferrous ions in a molamount of at least two times the total mols of said at least one metalpresent other than iron, said solution containing acid radicals, saidmethod comprising the steps of adding a base selected from the groupconsisting of hydroxides and carbonates of alkali metals and alkalineearth metals and ammonium hydroxide to said waste water in an amountcorresponding to 0.9 to 1.2 equivalent of said acid radicals present toform at least a suspension of ferrous hydroxides, bubbling anoxygen-containing gas into the suspension to oxidize the suspension, andform a crystalline precipitate of essentially at least one of the ferriccompounds selected from the group consisting of ferrites, magnetite andoxyhydrate of iron and containing said at least one metal originallycontained in said waste water, and separating the precipitate from saidwaste water."}
{"WKU":"039310086","Title":"Apparatus for the treatment of liquid wastes","App_Date":"1974-11-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jean-Claude Page;Armand Rappaz;Ulrich Frauchiger","Assignee":"Ciba-Geigy AG","ICL_Class":"B01D 2108","References":"1149045;1747803;3485749;3679053;3755156","Claims":"We claim:1. An apparatus for the treatment of at least two liquid wastes which arechemically incompatible with one another, comprising at least two additionchambers for receiving respective wastes, a common dilution chamber abovesaid addition chambers, at least two sedimentation chambers above saiddilution chamber, inlet means for introducing a respective liquid wasteinto each of said addition members, inlet means for introducing arespective treating substance into each of said addition chambers, atleast two pumps each respectively connected with one of said additionchambers, respective pipe means connecting each pump with one of saidsedimentation chambers and for recirculating liquid from said one additionchamber back thereto, means for removing sediment from said sedimentationchambers, filter chambers each associated with a respective one of saidsedimentation chambers for collection of filtered overflow therein,conduit means for receipt of overflow from said sedimentation chambers anddelivery to said common dilution chamber, means for introducing diluent tosaid dilution chamber, means for withdrawing diluted product from saiddilution chamber, and a valved cross-over transfer conduit connecting thefilter chamber of one of said sedimentation chambers with anothernon-respective addition chamber for selective supply of filtered overflowto said other addition chamber, whereby fresh wastes are separatelytreated, allowed to settle and are then combined for dilution prior todischarge.2. An apparatus according to claim 1 further including means for limitingthe level of the liquid effluent in each of said addition chambers, whichlevel-limiting means switch the respective circulating pump on or off.3. An apparatus according to claim 1 further including a respective supplyvessel for each of said treating substances, said vessels being locatedabove said addition chambers so as to feed thereto by gravity."}
{"WKU":"039310094","Title":"Water purification apparatus and timing device for initiating a","App_Date":"1974-01-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Oliver Thurston Davis","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B01D 2324;B01D 2320;G01F  324","References":"1556186;3021276;3347379;3350937;3682307","Claims":"What I claim is:1. A water purification apparatus comprising:a. an aeration chamber means for areating unpurified water introducedthereto from a source;b. a filter chamber means directly beneath said areation chamber meanscontaining a granular media extending from the top to the bottom of saidfilter chamber for filtering said aerated water;c. means in said filter chamber for collecting said filtered water;d. reservoir means directly beneath said filter chamber for storing saidcollected water;e. automatic means for stopping the introduction of unpurified water tosaid aeration chamber when said reservoir means is full;f. automatic means for controlling the flow of said filtered water fromsaid collecting means to said reservoir in response to the water level ofsaid areated water in said filter chamber;g. means for introducing backwash water at different levels within saidgranular media; andh. automatic means for starting the introduction of said backwash water inresponse to the frequency said reservoir has been filled and emptied ofpurified water.2. A water purification apparatus as set forth in claim 1 furthercomprising:a. a source of backwash water under pressure, andb. electrically actuated valve means connected between said source ofbackwash water and said means for introducing said backwash water at saiddifferent levels in said granular media.3. An apparatus as set forth in claim 1 further comprising:a. valve means connected between said reservoir means and said collectingmeans and said source of backwash water; andb. float means mounted beneath said areation chamber and operativelyconnected to said valve means, said float means having a buoyancysufficient to open said valve means when said filter chamber is full andhaving insufficient buoyancy to maintain said valve in said open positionupon the introduction of said backwash water.4. An apparatus as set forth in claim 2 further comprising:a. float means in said reservoir;b. wheel means having a circumferentially extending notch on the outerperiphery thereof, said wheel means being operatively connected to saidfloat means for rotating said wheel means as said float means drops insaid reservoir; andc. first switch means adjacent said wheel means, said switch means havingactuating means engaging said outer periphery, said actuating meansclosing said switch means to energize said valve means when said actuatingmeans enters said notch.5. An apparatus as set forth in claim 4 further comprising:a. gear means connected to said wheel means;b. rod means connected to said float means; andc. pawl means mounted on said rod, said pawl means engaging said gear meansto rotate said gear means as said float drops in said reservoir.6. An apparatus as set forth in claim 5 further comprising electric motormeans mounted on said rod, said motor means having drive gear means whichengages said gear means only when said float means is at its lowest levelin said reservoir and wherein said switch means energizes said motor meanswhen said actuating means enters said notch, said motor means rotatingsaid notch a predetermined distance representing the duration said valvemeans is energized.7. An apparatus as set forth in claim 4 wherein said means for stopping theintroduction of unpurified water to said aeration chamber is a secondswitch means having an actuating arm operatively connected betweenspaced-apart stop means on said float means, said switch being actuatedopen by said stop means when said reservoir is full and actuated closed bysaid stop means when said reservoir is empty.8. An apparatus as set forth in claim 7 wherein said first and secondswitch means are connected in series so that said second switch means isincapable of starting the introduction of unpurified water to saidaeration chamber when said first switch actuating means is in said notch."}
{"WKU":"039310108","Title":"Serum/plasma separators with centrifugal valves","App_Date":"1974-02-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Waldemar A. Ayres;William J. Holderith","Assignee":"Becton, Dickinson and Company","ICL_Class":"B01D 2126","References":"2577780;3661265;3779383;3786985;3814248","Claims":"What is claimed:1. A self-contained fluid separator assembly, capable of separating bloodinto its component parts of plasma or serum and cellular portion,comprising:a. a container having at least one open end which is adapted to receiveblood for subsequent separation into a light phase ans a heavy phase;b. a closure sealing the open end of the container, the closure beingformed of a self-sealing elastomeric material which is penetrable by acannula through which blood to be separated is conducted into thecontainer;c. a piston having a specific gravity relatively greater than the cellularportion of the blood and slidably mounted in the upper portion of thecontainer and having means on an outer surface in sealing engagement withan inner surface of the container;d. centrifugally actuated valve means associated with said piston, saidvalve means being in the form of a downwardly projecting substantiallydome-shaped concave diaphragm having a specific gravity greater than bloodand having a slit therein openable when subjected to substantialcentrifugal force, said valve means being normally closed, so that whensaid container is subjected to moderate centrifugal force the bloodseparates into its light phase and heavy phase with the piston staying inthe upper portion of the container, and subsequently when increasedcentrifugal force is used on the valve means automatically opens with thelight phase passing up through the valve means enabling the piston to movedown through the light phase while retaining sealing engagement with theinner surfaces of the container, said valve means remaining open untiltermination of the substantial centrifugal force; andmechanical stop means on the container whereby the piston when movingthrough the light phase will stop a predetermined distance from one of theends of the container followed by termination of substantial centrifugalforce which permits the vlave means to automatically shift from an openposition to a closed position to provide an impervious barrier between theseparated light phase and heavy phase of the blood.2. A self-contained fluid separator of claim 1, wherein the stop means onthe container is an annular groove interposed between the ends of thecontainer forming an annular constriction of the inner surface of thecontainer so that said piston is prevented from passing the stop meanswhen subjected to centrifugal forces.3. The invention in accordance with claim 1, wherein a plurality of spacedannular sealing rings are on the periphery of the piston and in sealingengagement with the interior of the container.4. The invention in accordance with claim 1, wherein the valve means isindependent of the piston sealing means.5. The piston of claim 1, wherein the body portion of said piston is formedhaving a filter means associated therewith and in fluid communication withsaid valve means whereby said filter means is adapted to removeparticulate material from the light phase as the piston moves downwardlytherethrough."}
{"WKU":"039310116","Title":"Fluid separation apparatus","App_Date":"1973-11-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Mark S. Richards;Shannon B. Copeland","Assignee":"Racor Industries, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B01D 2708","References":"1378274;2052540;2313896;2729338;2983384;3199676;3253712;3397793;3428180;3494863","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Apparatus for separating low density fluid from high density fluid andparticles comprising:a. a fluid impervious hollow elongated chamber closed at one end by cupmeans;b. a fluid inlet passage extending into said chamber intermediate the endsthereof and having a tubular portion with a free end extending toward saidcup means along the axis of elongation of said chamber;c. a fluid impervious funnel member surrounding said tubular portion ofsaid inlet passage in close spaced relation to the outer surface thereof,the apex of said funnel member extending toward said cup member and theouter periphery of said funnel member forming a fluid-tight annular jointwith the inner wall of said chamber;d. a deflector turbine means mounted at the free end of said tubularportion of said inlet passage to receive fluid from said inlet passage andurge said fluid to move in generally annular paths about the axis ofelongation of said chamber, said deflector turbine means including afrusto-conical fluid impervious surface spaced from the free end of saidtubular portion of said inlet passage having helical flutes therein andextending across said chamber with the apex thereof adjacent said free endof said tubular portion of said inlet passage and the periphery of thebase thereof in close spaced relation to the inner surface of saidchamber, said periphery of the base of said frusto-conical fluidimpervious surface having a plurality of protuberances spaced from eachother thereabout with each of said protuberances being located between adifferent pair of flutes on said frusto-conical surface and extending intocontact with the inner surface of said chamber, and a frusto-conicalmember having an aperture at its apex communicating with said free end ofsaid tubular portion of said inlet passage and having an innerfrusto-conical surface mating with said fluted frusto-conical fluidimpervious surface in close spaced relation thereto and an outerfrusto-conical surface substantially parallel to said inner frusto-conicalsurface;e. an outlet passage extending out of said chamber intermediate its endsand having a tubular portion extending away from said cup means along theaxis of elongation of said chamber;f. a tubular filter element more pervious to said low density fluid thansaid high density fluid surrounding said tubular portion of said outletpassage in spaced relation thereto, the outer surface of said tubularfilter element being spaced from the inner surface of said chamber;g. fluid impervious wall means extending outwardly from the outer surfaceof said tubular portion of said outlet passage and across the inner end ofsaid tubular filter element, said wall means forming fluid-tight jointswith said outer surface of said tubular portion of said outlet passage andwith the inner end of said tubular filter element and having its outerperiphery in close spaced relation to the inner surface of said chamber;andh. fluid impervious cap means closing the other end of said chamber.2. Apparatus as claimed in claim 1 wherein said inlet means is providedwith a restriction spaced from said free end of said tubular portionthereof by a distance greater than the diameter of said tubular portionand a hollow ball of lightweight material having a diameter less than thediameter of said tubular portion is contained in said tubular portion andgreater than the diameter of said restriction between said restriction andsaid deflector turbine means at said free end of said tubular portion.3. Apparatus as claimed in claim 1 wherein said tubular portion of saidoutlet passage extends the length of said filter element and at least twoaligned outlet holes are provided through the wall of said tubular portionat the end thereof adjacent said cap means, said holes having a total areagreater than the cross-sectional area of said outlet passage.4. Apparatus as claimed in claim 1 wherein said filter element comprisesinner and outer foraminous walls with the volume therebetween filled withradial flow surface type filter material or resin impregnated cellulose.5. Apparatus as claimed in claim 1 wherein said hollow elongated chambercomprises a hollow cylinder and an annular body between said hollowcylinder and said cup means, said annular body including a pair ofintegrally formed radially extending tubular members providing a pair ofoppositely disposed passageways through the wall of said annular body,said tubular members being mechanically joined at the center of saidannular body, one of said pair of tubular members providing said inletpassage, and the other of said pair of tubular members providing saidoutlet passage."}
{"WKU":"039310124","Title":"Sewage treatment system","App_Date":"1974-02-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Henry Huse","Assignee":"Atlantic Fluidics, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B01D 3300","References":"2855494;2880875;3081944;3227281;3296122;3357379;3549528;3559807;3595181;3648630;3697417","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A sewage treatment system including in combination: an incinerator forreceiving solids and burning them to inert ash, a liquid reactor columnfor receiving separated liquids,a separator for receiving sewage wastes containing solids and liquids andfor separating the solids and the liquids, said separator including anendless screen, drive and idler pulleys supporting said screen formovement in a horizontal plane, first means for disposing said sewagewastes on said screen so that liquid flows therethrough by gravity andsolids are held on said screen and dropped by gravity at one of saidpulleys and second and third means for respectively delivering said liquidto said column and said solids to said incinerator;said incinerator including a removable vessel for receiving said solids,tungsten-quartz infrared radiant heaters directed to the top of saidvessel to incinerate said solids contained therewithin, an insulated firstchamber enclosing said vessel and said radiant heaters, an insulated andgasketed access door to said first chamber, an afterburner, a secondchamber of said afterburner, conduit means connecting said first andsecond chambers for flow of gas and vapor discharge from said firstchamber to said second chamber, infra-red radiant heating elementsexternal of said second chamber and heating the same, said second chamberbeing provided with conductive and non-corrosive material through whichgases and vapor are directed whereby upon contact residual hydrocarbongases are oxidized and vapors superheated and means for introducing airinto said afterburner to act as an oxidizer;means for introducing ozone into said column to contact the liquids thereinoxidizing organic pollutants in the liquids; andlevel control means on said column to control liquid level in said columnand by linkage to overflow valve control the flow of water through thecolumn and maintain a constant level of water in the column.2. A sewage treatment system in accordance with claim 1 in which water isintroduced at the top of said column so that flow is in a downwarddirection, and includes an air compressor, dryer, and electricallyoperated ozone generator feeding ozone in air to the bottom of said columnunder sufficient pressure that the static head in said column is exceededand ozone-air mixture bubbles up counter to the flow of water, saidozone-air mixture passing through perforated plate or gas distributionmeans so that maximum contact is made between water and ozone, withunreacted ozone and air collected at the top of said column and vented todischarge stack, and further including water pump means to pump water fromstorage tank to said column and water operated eductor means in the pipebetween the pump and column with connection to top of column so that byventuri action unspent ozone plus air is introduced into the waterproviding mixing and reaction of unspent ozone in the heavily pollutedwater supply to said column."}
{"WKU":"039310132","Title":"Water separator-recirculator for dishwashing machine","App_Date":"1974-08-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Erik O. Vilen;Vytas Zygas","Assignee":"G. S. Balkeslee & Co.","ICL_Class":"B01D 3322","References":"1521469;2308264;2439543;3231088;3622508","Claims":"The invention claimed is:1. A water-waste separator comprising a trough into which mixed water andwaste is introduced at one end thereof, a first opening in the bottom ofsaid trough intermediate of the ends thereof, a second opening in thebottom of said trough at the other end thereof, a plurality of horizontallaterally spaced apart elongated grid bars overlying said first openingand accommodating the flow of water therethrough into said first opening,a stationary transverse wiper unit along the upstream side of said firstopening and having a plurality of laterally spaced apart apertures, saidgrid bars being slidably supported in said apertures of said wiper unit,and means for oscillating said grid bars whereby waste collected thereonis cyclically forced by said wiper unit over the ends of said grid barsand is directed into said second opening.2. A water-waste separator comprising a trough into which mixed water andwaste is introduced at one end thereof, a first opening in the bottom ofsaid trough intermediate of the ends thereof, a second opening in thebottom of said trough at the other end thereof, a plurality ofhorizontally laterally spaced apart elongated grid bars overlying saidfirst opening and accommodating the flow of water therethrough into saidfirst opening, stationary side-by-side C-shaped wiper segments along theupstream side of said first opening, said grid bars being slidablysupported in said wiper segments, and means for oscillating said grid barswhereby waste collected thereon is cyclically forced by said wipersegments over the ends of said grid bars and is directed into said secondopening.3. The water-waste separator of claim 2 wherein said first and secondopenings are defined by an intermediate transverse web member, and the oneends of said grid bars are slidably supported on said web member.4. The water-waste separator of claim 1 wherein said means for oscillatingsaid grid bars comprises a generally horizontally movable L-shapedpush-pull drive member having horizontal and vertical leg portions withthe end of said vertical leg portion being pivotally connected to saidgrid bars, and drive means for effecting movement of said drive member.5. The water-waste separator of claim 4 wherein said drive means comprisesa crank arm, a connecting link pivotally connected at its one end to saidcrank arm and at its other end to the end of said horizontal leg portion,a reaction link pivotally connected at its one end to said end of saidhorizontal leg portion and at its other end to a stationary pivot point,and means for revolving said crank arm.6. The water-waste separator of claim 1 including a reservoir tank beneathsaid trough, and conduit means between said first opening and saidreservoir tank for conveying water from the former to the latter.7. The water-waste separator of claim 6 including a mechanical wastedisposal unit communicating with said second opening for receiving wastetherefrom and comminuting the same."}
{"WKU":"039310140","Title":"Filter plate-and-diaphragm assemblies for a filter press","App_Date":"1974-04-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Franz Heimbach;Alfons Schotten","Assignee":"Eberhard Hoesch & Soehne","ICL_Class":"B01D 2512","References":"459488;2989187;3221883;3289845;3503326;3543938;3655056;3737041","Claims":"We claim:1. In a filter plate-and-diaphragm assembly of the type including a filterplate having a base and a marginally extending frame, the frame having asealing face; a pressure diaphragm having a dished base and a marginallyextending sealing zone lying over the sealing face of the frame; thesealing zone including a sealing face oriented toward and adjoining thesealing face of the frame; means provided in said filter plate forintroducing a pressure medium between the diaphragm base and the platebase; a portion of the diaphragm and a portion of the filter platetogether defining between themselves and inwardly of the sealing zone, apressure chamber for the pressure medium, the improvement comprising:a. means defining a groove in said frame;b. a rib forming part of said diaphragm and received in said groove, saidrib being situated in said sealing zone adjacent an edge thereof, saidedge being remote from said portions defining said pressure chamber,whereby said sealing face of said diaphragm being disposed between saidrib and said portions defining said pressure chamber;c. means defining open channels on that side of the diaphragm base that isoriented away from the plate base;d. a truncated pyramidal portion forming part of said diaphragm andconnecting said sealing zone of said diaphragm with the diaphragm base;ande. means defining a plurality of additional open channels in said truncatedpyramidal portion, said additional open channels being oriented away fromthe plate base.2. In a filter plate-and-diaphragm assembly of the type including a filterplate having a base and a marginally extending frame, the frame having asealing face; a pressure diaphragm having a dished base and a marginallyextending sealing zone lying over the sealing face of the frame; thesealing zone including a sealing face oriented toward and adjoining thesealing face of the frame; means provided in said filter plate forintroducing a pressure medium between the diaphragm base and the platebase; a portion of the diaphragm and a portion of the filter platetogether defining between themselves and inwardly of the sealing zone, apressure chamber for the pressure medium; means defining a groove in saidframe; and a rib forming part of said diaphragm and received in saidgroove; the improvement wherein said rib is situated in said sealing zoneadjacent an edge thereof, said edge being remote from said portionsdefining said pressure chamber for positioning said sealing face of saiddiaphragm between said rib and said portions defining said pressurechamber; the diaphragm portion which carries said sealing face has auniform thickness; said rib and said groove having a dovetail-shapedsection; and said rib having a height that is greater than the depth ofsaid groove.3. An assembly as defined in claim 2, including adhesive means bonding saidrib to said groove.4. An assembly as defined in claim 3, wherein said adhesive meansconstitutes a strip provided with an adhesive on both sides, said stripbeing disposed in said groove.5. An assembly as defined in claim 2, including a projecting lip providedon said diaphragm along a further edge of said sealing zone, said furtheredge being remote from said rib, said lip being situated on the reverseside of said diaphragm with respect to said rib.6. An assembly as defined in claim 2, said filter plate further havingmeans defining a throughgoing opening in said frame, the improvementfurther comprising:c. means defining an additional groove in said frame about said opening;d. means defining an opening in said sealing zone in alignment with theopening in said frame; ande. an additional rib surrounding said opening in said sealing zone andreceived in said additional groove.7. An assembly as defined in claim 6, wherein said additional groove andsaid additional rib have at least one interengaging auxiliary rib andauxiliary groove."}
{"WKU":"039310159","Title":"Filter vessel and filter element assembly","App_Date":"1974-12-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Bernard M. Jenkins","Assignee":"C. B. Kaupp & Sons, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B01D 2910","References":"2170247;2633990;2801764;2808937;3295689;3774769;3814261","Claims":"I claim:1. A filter comprising a casing having a vertical cylindrical side wall, anopen top, a side inlet extending through said side wall below said opentop, and a bottom outlet, said cylindrical wall having a circumferentiallyindented portion providing an inner circumferential shoulder below saidinlet and above said outlet, a filter element open at its top and having acircumferential outward projection separably seated on said shoulder belowsaid inlet, a cover including a top wall and closing said top of saidcylindrical side wall and having an extension to extend into said casingto a point below said inlet and engage said outward projection of thefilter element and press said projection against said shoulder when thecover is closed, said extension having perforations located above saidshoulder when the cover is closed and providing for flow of liquid fromsaid inlet through the open top of said filter element, and means forreleasably holding said cover in closed position.2. The filter as defined in claim 1 wherein said extension has acylindrical wall coaxial with said top wall of the cover and provided withan outwardly projecting circumferential flange to engage said outwardprojection of said filter element and press said projection against saidshoulder when the cover is closed, and said perforations are formed insaid circumferential flange.3. The filter as defined in claim 2 wherein said extension has a portionbelow said circumferential flange to extend into the liquid in the casingbelow said inner circumferential shoulder when the cover is closed."}
{"WKU":"039310167","Title":"Self-cleaning fluid filter","App_Date":"1975-02-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Grady R. Lovelady","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B01D 2324","References":"1694666;2213881;2823656;2994407;3865022","Claims":"THE INVENTION CLAIMED IS:1. A self-cleaning fluid filter comprising:a housing, said housing having an intake opening in one side thereof, and acentrally located exhaust opening in a top portion thereof;a pump disposed immediately above said exhaust opening, said pump having aplurality of blades;a pump duct surrounding said pump and having an exhaust opening;an annular plate fixedly attached to the bottom edges of the blades of saidpump;a cylindrical filter drum attached to said annular plate at a top portionthereof and extending downwardly into said housing through said centrallylocated exhaust opening, said annular plate and said cylindrical filterdrum being disposed in close proximity to said exhaust opening with saidannular plate overlapping said exhaust opening; anda deflection plate disposed in proximity to said inlet in the direction offlow from said inlet and angled for deflecting particles away from saidcylindrical drum.2. The self-cleaning fluid filter of claim 1 and further including:a conical guide extending downwardly from said exhaust opening in saidhousing converging towards said exhaust opening.3. The self-cleaning fluid filter of claim 1 and further including:an adjustable damper disposed in said pump duct.4. The self-cleaning fluid filter of claim 1 wherein:said inlet and said deflection plate are disposed directly beneath saidfilter drum."}
{"WKU":"039310175","Title":"Filter unit","App_Date":"1974-04-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Wilfried Schulte;Horst Sowa;Klaus Kerger","Assignee":"Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"B01D 3302","References":"470355;3292791;3297163;3662894;3693803","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A filter unit for use in a filter casing having fluid inlet and outletopenings, said unit including a hollow shaft having a plurality ofelongated radial ribs thereon extending along the length of the shaft,defining fluid flow channels therebetween, and filtrate outlet openingscommunicating with said channels and an outlet in said casing; a pluralityof filter disks concentrically mounted in stacked superimposed relation onsaid shaft and each having first and second opposite surfaces with saidsecond surfaces having radially extending ribs formed thereon ofpredetermined height; a plurality of spacer rings concentrically mountedon said shaft and respectively located between and engaged with adjacentpairs of filter disks, said rings each having a plurality of spacer camsformed on one side thereof engaging the first side of an immediatelyadjacent filter disk and defining a predetermined free cross-sectionalarea between the ring and the immediately adjacent filter disk engagedwith its spacer cams, a plurality of filtering sheets respectively securedto said filter disks on the first side thereof, each of said sheets havinginner ends positioned over the side of the spacer ring engaged with itsassociated filter disk which is opposite to the spacer cams thereof,thereby to define a fluid passage between the sheet and the disk whichcommunicates through said free cross sectional area of the ring with theflow channels defined by said shaft ribs, whereby fluid to be filteredflows between the ribs on the second side of a filter disk through thefilter medium on the first side of its adjacent filter disk to be filteredthereby, and the filtrate then flows into said passage to said channelsand filtrate outlet openings in the shaft.2. The filter unit as defined in claim 1 wherein the free cross-sectionalarea of said spacer rings diminishes from one filter disk to the otherwith the minimum cross-sectional area being located adjacent the outletopening in said shaft and the maximum cross sectional area being locatedat the filter disk farthest from said outlet opening.3. The filter unit as defined in claim 2 wherein said cross-sectional areais determined by the number of spacer cams on the respective spacer rings.4. The filter unit as defined in claim 2 wherein the height of the radialribs on said filter disks corresponds to the distance between two adjacentdisks."}
{"WKU":"039310183","Title":"Assembly for collection, separation and filtration of blood","App_Date":"1974-08-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Howard North, Jr.","Assignee":"Becton, Dickinson and Company","ICL_Class":"B01D 3300","References":"2305278;3508653;3537605;3661265;3667652;3699961;3779383;3814258","Claims":"What is claimed:1. An assembly for the collection, separation and filtration of the liquidportion of blood, which comprises:a tubular container having one open end and one closed end;a removable closure for said open end;a piston component which comprises,"}
{"WKU":"039310191","Title":"Reinforced coalescing cell","App_Date":"1975-02-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Leslie L. Fowler","Assignee":"Products and Pollution Controls Co.","ICL_Class":"B01D 2522","References":"926038;2164142;2395301;2405838;3016345;3228527;3231091;3241680","Claims":"What is claimed:1. A coalescing cell for use in coalescing oil dispersed in a wateremulsion, comprising:an elongated perforated tube core into which emulsion is injected;at least one layer of emulsion breaking fibrous material wound around saidcore through which emulsion is forced to pass; anda length of wire wound helically on the exterior cylindrical surface ofsaid fibrous material, the wire being wound thereon with a tension ofabout 10 to 25 pounds, the spacing between the wire being between 1/4 inchand 1 inch, the wire forming a helical indentation in the cylindricalsurface of the fibrous material.2. A coalescing cell according to claim 1 wherein said wire is of stainlesssteel and of a diameter of about 0.032 inch.3. A coalescing cell according to claim 1 in which said wire is wound onsaid cell at a tension of between 15 and 18 pounds."}
{"WKU":"039310205","Title":"Smokeless forging lubricant","App_Date":"1974-08-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Lester E. Burgess;Sheldon A. Spachner","Assignee":"Gulf & Western Industries, Inc.","ICL_Class":"C10M  110;C10M  302;C10M  502;C10M  702","References":"3637498;3843529","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A lubricant for metal working operations comprises a mixture of sodiumbicarbonate, sodium nitrite, and a particulate lubricant selected from thegroup consisting of graphite and zinc oxide.2. The lubricant of claim 1, wherein the proportion by weight of the sum ofsodium bicarbonate and sodium nitrite to particulate lubricant is betweenabout 0.4:1 to about 17:1.3. The lubricant of claim 1 further including water.4. The lubricant of claim 1 wherein the essential ingredients thereof arepresent in the following proportions by weight percent of the total weightof lubricant:"}
{"WKU":"039310213","Title":"Method for controlling viscosity of lubricating oils","App_Date":"1974-05-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert D. Lundberg","Assignee":"Exxon Research and Engineering Company","ICL_Class":"C01M  144","References":"2449025;2454824;2638445;3396136;3642728;3679382","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method for controlling the viscosity of a lubricating oil, saidlubricating oil having a solubility parameter of from about 6.0 to about10.5 and a viscosity of from 35 to 50,000 SUS at 100.degree.F., whichcomprises incorporating in said lubricating oil an ionomeric polymer, saidionomeric polymer comprising a hydrocarbon backbone which is substantiallysoluble in said lubricating oil and from 0.2 to 10 mole % pendant ionicgroups, said pendant ionic groups being selected from the group consistingof carboxylate, phosphonate and sulfonate groups, and said pendant ionicgroups being neutralized to a degree of from 50 to 500 mole % with a basicmaterial selected from Groups IA, IIA, IB, and IIB of the Periodic Tableof the Elements and lead, tin and antimony, and polar cosolvent having asolubility parameter of from about 10 to 20, the solubility parameter ofsaid polar solvent being at least 1.0 unit higher than the solubilityparameter of said lubricating oil, and said polar cosolvent being solubleor miscible with said lubricating oil, wherein said ionomeric polymer isincorporated into said lubricating oil at a level of from 0.1 to 20 weight% of said lubricating oil, and said polar cosolvent being incorporatedinto said lubricating oil in an amount of from 10 to 600 moles per mole ofpendant ionic group.2. The method of claim 1 wherein said pendant ionic groups are sulfonategroups.3. The method of claim 1 wherein said lubricating oil is ahydrocarbonaceous oil.4. The method of claim 1 wherein said polar cosolvent comprises from about.1 to 40 weight percent of the total mixture of lubricating oil, ionomericpolymer and polar cosolvent.5. The method of claim 4 wherein said polar cosolvent is selected from thegroup consisting of alcohols and amines.6. The method of claim 5 wherein said polar cosolvent has a boiling pointof at least 50.degree.C.7. The method of claim 2 wherein said ionomeric polymer is selected fromthe group consisting of sulfonated ethylene, sulfonated propylene,sulfonated ethylene-propylene copolymers and terpolymers wherein the thirdmonomer is a nonconjugated diene hydrocarbon having from 5 to 15 carbonatoms and sulfonated polystyrene.8. The method of claim 1 wherein said ionomeric polymer comprises from 0.5to 5 mole % pendant ionic groups.9. The method of claim 1 wherein said ionomer groups are neutralized to adegree of from about 90 to about 200%.10. The method of claim 1 wherein said ionomer groups are neutralized to adegree of from about 100 to about 200%.11. The method of claim 2 wherein said ionomeric polymer is sulfonatedpolystyrene.12. The method of claim 2 wherein said ionomeric polymer is sulfonatedpolyethylene.13. The method of claim 2 wherein said ionomeric polymer is sulfonatedt-butylstyrene14. The method of claim 2 wherein said ionomeric polymer is sulfonatedpolypropylene.15. The method of claim 2 wherein said ionomeric polymer is sulfonatedpolyisobutylene.16. The method of claim 2 wherein said ionomeric polymer is a sulfonatedethylene-propylene ethylidene norbornene terpolymer.17. The method of claim 2 wherein said ionomeric polymer is a sulfonatedpolyisoprene.18. The method of claim 3 wherein said ionomeric polymer is a sulfonatedethylene-propylene ethylidene norbornene terpolymer.19. The method of claim 18 wherein said polar cosolvent is selected fromthe group consisting of hexanol, decanol and benzyl alcohol.20. A composition of matter comprising a major amount of a lubricating oilhaving a solubility parameter of from 6.0 to 10.5 and a viscosity of 35 to50,000 SUS at 100.degree.F., and an ionomeric polymer, said ionomericpolymer comprising a hydrocarbon backbone which is substantially solublein said lubricating oil and from 0.2 to 10 mole % pendant ionic groups,said pendant ionic groups being selected from the group consisting ofcarboxylate, phosphonate and sulfonate groups, and said pendant ionicgroups being neutralized to a degree of from 50 to 500 mole % with a basicmaterial selected from Groups IA, IIA, IB, and IIB of the Periodic Tableof the Elements and lead, tin and antimony, and a polar cosolvent having asolubility parameter of from about 10 to 20, the solubility parameter ofsaid polar solvent being at least 1.0 unit higher than the solubilityparameter of said lubricating oil, said polar cosolvent being soluble ormiscible with said lubricating oil, wherein said composition of mattercomprises from 0.1 to 20 weight %, based on said lubricating oil, of saidionomeric polymer, and from 10 to 600 moles polar cosolvent per molependant ionic group.21. The composition of claim 20 wherein said lubricating oil is ahydrocarbonaceous oil.22. The composition of claim 20 wherein said polar cosolvent comprises fromabout 0.1 to 40 weight percent of the total mixture of lubricating oil,ionomeric polymer and polar cosolvent.23. The composition of claim 20 wherein said polar cosolvent is selectedfrom the group consisting of alcohols and amines.24. The composition of claim 23 wherein said polar cosolvent has a boilingpoint of at least 50.degree.C.25. The composition of claim 20 wherein said pendant ionic groups aresulfonate groups.26. The composition of claim 25 wherein said ionomeric polymer is selectedfrom the group consisting of sulfonated ethylene, sulfonated propylene,sulfonated ethylene-propylene copolymers and terpolymers wherein the thirdmonomer is a nonconjugated diene hydrocarbon having from 5 to 15 carbonatoms and sulfonated polystyrene.27. The composition of claim 20 wherein said ionomeric polymer comprisesfrom about 0.5 to about 5 mole % pendant ionic groups.28. The composition of claim 20 wherein said ionomer groups are neutralizedto a degree of from about 90 to about 200%.29. The composition of claim 20 wherein said ionomer groups are neutralizedto a degree of from about 100 to about 200%.30. The composition of claim 20 wherein said ionomeric polymer issulfonated polystyrene.31. The composition of claim 20 wherein said ionomeric polymer issulfonated polyethylene.32. The composition of claim 20 wherein said ionomeric polymer issulfonated t-butylstyrene.33. The composition of claim 20 wherein said ionomeric polymer issulfonated polypropylene.34. The composition of claim 20 wherein said ionomeric polymer issulfonated polyisobutylene.35. The composition of claim 20 wherein said ionomeric polymer is asulfonated ethylene-propylene ethylidene norbornene terpolymer.36. The composition of claim 20 wherein said ionomeric polymer is asulfonated polyisoprene.37. The composition of claim 21 wherein said ionomeric polymer is asulfonated ethylene-propylene ethylidene norbornene terpolymer.38. The composition of claim 37 wherein said polar cosolvent is selectedfrom the group consisting of hexanol, decanol and benzyl alcohol."}
{"WKU":"039310221","Title":"Turbine lubricant and method","App_Date":"1974-09-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ralph P. Chesluk;Norman R. Odell;Lawrence F. Kuntschik;James A. White","Assignee":"Texaco Inc.","ICL_Class":"C10M  138;C10M  332;C10M  528;C10M  736","References":"3609077;3707500;3778376;3790481","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A vapor phase rust inhibiting, oxidation stable, lubricating compositionhaving improved air release properties and comprising in combination, amajor amount of a mineral lubricating oil having an SUS viscosity at100.degree.F. between 70 and 5000; a minor effective oxidation stabilizingamount of a heterocyclic anti-oxidant compound of the formula:##EQU2##wherein R and R.sub.1 are alkyl or aryl, straight or branched chain, orform a six membered ring and have one to 30 carbon atoms each; or can beabsent and at least one member of the group ABCDE is carbon and at leastthree other members are selected from the group of nitrogen, oxygen andsulfur, a minor effective antifoaming amount of an antifoaming agent, aminor effective vapor phase rust inhibiting amount of a C.sub.8 toC.sub.10 aliphatic monocarboxylic acid, a minor work load improving amountof tricresylphosphate and a minor effective antioxidant amount of analkylphenol antioxidant.2. A composition in accordance with claim 1 wherein the monocarboxylic acidis caprylic acid.3. A composition in accordance with claim 1 wherein the monocarboxylic acidis pelargonic acid.4. A composition in accordance with claim 1 wherein the monocarboxylic acidis capric acid.5. A composition in accordance with claim 1 wherein the antifoamant is adimethyl silicone polymer.6. A composition in accordance with claim 1 wherein said heterocyclicantioxidant is tolutriazole.7. A composition in accordance with claim 1 wherein said heterocyclicantioxidant is dihydrobenzotriazole.8. A composition according to claim 1 containing:"}
{"WKU":"039310230","Title":"Triaryl phosphate ester functional fluids","App_Date":"1974-07-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Harry Dounchis","Assignee":"FMC Corporation","ICL_Class":"C10M  110;C10M  302;C10M  502;C10M  702","References":"3071549;3576923","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Functional fluid compositions comprising, as the base stock, 95 to 99.99percent by weight of a mixed liquid tertiary-butylphenyl/phenyl phosphatecontaining from about 15 to 60 percent by weight mono- anddi-t-butylphenyl radicals, and in admixture with the base stock about 0.01to 5 percent by weight of a lubricant additive.2. The composition of claim 1 where the lubricant additive is a rustinhibitor, corrosion inhibitor, anti-foam agent, cavitation inhibitor oranti-wear agent.3. The composition of claim 1, characterized as having a kinematicviscosity stability of .+-.5 percent when subjected to temperatures in therange of about 175.degree. to 220.degree.C. for a period of about 72hours.4. The composition of claim 1 wherein the fluid contains 0.01 to 0.1percent benzotriazole as the additive.5. The composition of claim 1 when the fluid contains 0.01 to 0.1 percentN-oleoyl sarcosine as the additive.6. The composition of claim 1 where the fluid contains 0.01 to 0.1 percentof a mixed mono- and dialkyl phosphate as the additive, the alkyl beingabout 8 to 12 carbon atoms.7. The composition of claim 1 where the fluid contains 0.01% benzotriazole,0.01% of a mixed C.sub.8 -C.sub.12 mono- and dialkyl phosphate and 0.001%of a silicone antifoam agent.8. Mixed functional fluid compositions comprising (a) 10 to 90 percent byweight of a mixed liquid tertiary-butylphenyl/phenyl phosphate, containingfrom about 15 to 60 percent by weight mono- and di-t-butylphenyl radicalsand (b) 90 to 10 percent by weight of another fluid composition useful informulating functional fluids.9. The composition of claim 8 where said other fluid composition isselected from the group consisting of synthetic and natural hydrocarbonoils, halogenated aromatic hydrocarbons, alkanoic acid esters ofpolyhydroxy organic compounds, alkoxy polysiloxanes, organo polysiloxanes,methyl alkyl silicone fluids, siloxane esters, polyphenyl ethers,polyglycols and silicate esters.10. The composition of claim 8 wherein there is present from 60 to 40percent by weight of said t-butylphenyl/phenyl phosphate.11. The composition of claim 8 where said other fluid composition is apentaerythritol, trimethylolethane, trimethylol propane or neopentylglycol ester of a C.sub.5 to C.sub.10 alkanoic acid.12. The method of lubricating metallic surfaces at elevated temperaturescomprising applying to said surfaces a liquid phosphate ester lubricantconsisting essentially of a liquid mixed t-butylphenyl/phenyl phosphatecontaining from about 15 to 60 percent by weight mono- anddi-t-butylphenyl radicals.13. The method of claim 12 wherein said metallic surfaces are turbinebearings and gears.14. The method of claim 12 where the temperature is in excess of175.degree.C."}
{"WKU":"039310248","Title":"Nitrogen-containing dispersant from polyolefin","App_Date":"1972-06-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Shih-En Hu","Assignee":"Exxon Research and Engineering Company","ICL_Class":"C10M  132;C10M  326;C10M  520;C10M  730","References":"3316177;3432479;3513095;3687849;3687905;3769216;3785980","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An oil composition comprising a major proportion of an oil selected fromthe class consisting of gasoline, middle distillate fuel, hydrocarbonlubricating oil and synthetic lubricating oil, to which has been addedfrom about 0.001 to about 10 weight percent of an oil-solublenitrogen-containing dispersant which is an addition product obtained bydirectly reacting, with essentially no water produced, at about60.degree.to 250.degree.C., about 0.2 to about 2.5 moles of an aliphaticpolyamine which is an alkylene amino compound containing from 2 to 12nitrogen atoms wherein pairs of nitrogen atoms are joined by alkylenegroups of 2 to 4 carbon atoms, with one mole of an oxygen-containingproduct of the non-catalyzed air oxidation of a 400 to 4000 molecularweight unsaturated polymer of a C.sub.2 to C.sub.5 monoolefin, or of thenon-catalyzed air oxidation of said polymer that has first beenhalogenated with sufficient chlorine or bromine to incorporate about 0.5to 2 atoms of halogen per double bond of said polymer, wherein said airoxidation consists of contacting said polymer with air at a temperature ofabout 120.degree. to 250.degree.C. sufficient to obtain saidoxygen-containing product having about 1 to about 4.5 wt. % oxygen, andwherein about 70 to 100 percent of said reaction between said polyamineand said oxygen-containing product is said addition product, and whereinessentially all of the oxygen present in said oxygen-containing product isstill present after reaction with said polyamine to form saidnitrogen-containing dispersant.2. An oil composition according to claim 1, wherein said oil is ahydrocarbon lubricating oil.3. An oil composition as defined by claim 2, wherein said polymer ispolyisobutylene of about 600 to 2400 molecular weight, wherein said airoxidation is carried out at about 120.degree.to 220.degree.C., and saidoxygen-containing product contains about 1.8 to about 3 wt. % oxygen.4. An oil composition according to claim 2, wherein said polymer ischlorinated polyisobutylene of about 600 to 2400 molecular weight, whereinsaid air oxidation is carried out at about 120.degree. to 220.degree.C.,and said oxygen-containing product contains about 1.8 to about 3 wt. %oxygen.5. An oil composition according to claim 3, wherein said polyamine istetraethylene pentamine.6. An oil composition according to claim 4, wherein said polyamine istetraethylene pentamine.7. A process for preparing an oil-soluble nitrogen-containing ashlessdispersant additive for an oil composition which comprises oxidizing a 400to 4000 average molecular weight polymer or halogenated polymer of aC.sub.2 to C.sub.5 aliphatic monoolefin, said oxidizing consisting ofcontacting said polymer with air in the absence of a catalyst at atemperature within the range of about 120.degree.to 250.degree.C. for asufficient time to obtain an oxygenated product containing about 1 to 4.5weight percent oxygen, and (2) thereafter directly reacting one mole ofthe oxygenated product with from about 0.2 to 2.5 moles of an aliphaticpolyamine which is an alkylene amino compound containing from 2 to 12nitrogen atoms wherein pairs of nitrogen atoms are joined by alkylenegroups of 2 to 4 carbon atoms, at a temperature within the range of about60.degree. to 250.degree.C., wherein about 70 to 100 percent of saidreaction between said polyamine and said oxygenated product is an additivereaction, with essentially no water produced, and wherein essentially allof the oxygen present in said oxygenated product is still present afterreaction with said polyamine to form said additive.8. A process according to claim 7, wherein polyisobutylene of about 600 to2400 molecular weight is oxidized to form said oxygenated product, whereinsaid air oxidation is carried out at about 120.degree. to 220.degree.C.,and said oxygenated product contains about 1.8 to about 3 wt. % oxygen.9. A process according to claim 7, wherein chlorinated polyisobutylene ofabout 600 to 2400 molecular weight is oxidized to form said oxygenatedproduct, wherein said air oxidation is carried out at about 120.degree. to220.degree.C. and said oxygenated product contains about 1.8 to about 3wt. % oxygen.10. A process according to claim 8, wherein said polyamine is tetraethylenepentamine.11. A process according to claim 9, wherein said polyamine is tetraethylenepentamine."}
{"WKU":"039310256","Title":"Magnetic iron oxides with improved orientability and a process for their","App_Date":"1974-08-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Peter Woditsch;Gunter Buxbaum;Franz Hund;Volker Hahnkamm","Assignee":"Bayer Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C01G 4906","References":"3382174;3652334;3873462","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An acicular, magnetic iron oxide pigment containing about 0.1 to 2percent by weight of zinc and phosphate ions.2. An iron oxide pigment as claimed in claim 1 containing about 0.15 to 1.0percent by weight of zinc ion, about 0.15 to 1.0 percent of phosphate ionand about 1 to 10 percent by weight of at least one of cobalt, nickel andmanganese.3. In the production of an acicular, magnetic iron oxide pigment by addinga basically reacting precipitant to an iron (II) salt solution toprecipitate iron hydroxide, carbonate or a basic iron salt, followed byoxidation at a pH of about 2 to 8 to form FeOOH seeds, growing said seedsand subsequently dehydrating and reducing, the improvement which comprisescarrying out seed formation in the presence of about 0.1 to 4 percent byweight of zinc ions and about 0.1 to 2 percent by weight of phosphateions, based on the .alpha.-FeOOH to be precipitated.4. The process of claim 3, wherein seed formation is carried out in thepresence of about 0.1 to 2 percent by weight of zinc ions and about 0.1 to1.0 percent by weight of phosphate ions.5. The process of claim 3, wherein the zinc and phosphate ions are added toat least one of the iron (II) salt solution and the basic precipitantbefore seed formation.6. The process of claim 3, wherein the phosphate ions are added togetherwith the basic precipitant to the iron (II) salt solution.7. The process of claim 3, wherein zinc and phosphate ions are used inabout equimolecular quantities."}
{"WKU":"039310264","Title":"Electrically insulating encapsulating composition for semiconductor","App_Date":"1972-12-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Rolf Berkner","Assignee":"Semikron Gesellschaft fur Gleichrichterbau und Elektronik m.b.H.","ICL_Class":"H01B  300","References":"3141850;3287311;3429906","Claims":"I claim:1. An electrically insulating composition adapted for the encapsulation ofa semiconductor body and for protecting the semiconductor surface againstharmful impurities, comprising a mixture of:a. a polymerizable and/or condensable organic resin;b. at least one filler which improves the electrical properties of thesemiconductor body; andc. at least one organic chelating agent which binds undesirable impuritiesin said resin and in filler, the amount of said chelating agent beingsufficient to bind undesirable impurities on the surface of saidsemiconductor body when said composition is applied to said semiconductorbody after formation of said composition.2. The composition of claim 1 in which the proportion of said filler is upto 70% by weight.3. The composition of claim 1 in which the proportion of chelating agent isbetween about 0.02% and about 10% by weight with reference to the weightof the filler.4. The composition of claim 1 in which the filler is a surface-activesubstance selected from the group consisting of a metal oxide, silicicacid and a calcium salt.5. The composition of claim 1 in which said resin is chosen from the groupconsisting of the epoxy resins.6. The composition of claim 1 in which said resin is chosen from the groupconsisting of the epoxynovolake resins.7. The composition of claim 1 in which said resin is chosen from the groupconsisting of the polyimide resins.8. The composition of claim 1 in which said resin is chosen from the groupconsisting of the silicone resins.9. The composition of claim 1 in which said organic chelating agent ischosen from the group of fluorone derivatives having chelate-formingsubstituents.10. The composition of claim 1 in which said organic chelating agent ischosen from the group of xanthone derivatives having chelate-formingsubstituents.11. The composition of claim 1 in which said organic chelating agent ischosen from the group of cumarin derivatives having chelate-formingsubstituents.12. The composition of claim 1 in which said organic chelating agent ischosen from the group of chromone derivatives having chelate-formingsubstituents.13. The composition of claim 1 in which said organic chelating agent ischosen from the group of quinoline derivatives having chelate-formingsubstituents.14. The composition of claim 1 in which said organic chelating agent ischosen from the group of triarylmethane derivatives having chelate-formingsubstituents.15. The composition of claim 1 in which said organic chelating agent ischosen from the group of quinone derivatives having chelate-formingsubstituents.16. The composition of claim 1 in which said organic chelating agent ischosen from the group of phenoxazine derivatives having chelate-formingsubstituents.17. The composition of claim 1 in which said organic chelating agent ischosen from the group of thiazolidin derivatives having chelate-formingsubstituents.18. The composition of claim 1 in which said organic chelating agent ischosen from the group of imidazolone derivatives having chelate-formingsubstituents.19. The composition of claim 1 in which said organic chelating agent ischosen from the group of pyrazolone derivatives having chelate-formingsubstituents.20. The composition of claim 1 in which said organic chelating agent ischosen from the group of squaric acid derivatives having chelate-formingsubstituents.21. The composition of claim 1 in which said organic chelating agent ischosen from the group of porphyrin derivatives having chelate-formingsubstituents.22. The composition of claim 1 in which said organic chelating agent ischosen from the group of phthalocyanine derivatives having chelate-formingsubstituents.23. The composition of claim 1 in which said organic chelating agent ischosen from the group of azo coloring agent derivatives havingchelate-forming substituents.24. The composition of claim 1 in which said organic chelating agent ischosen from the group of azomethine coloring agent derivatives havingchelate-forming substituents.25. The composition of claim 1 in which said organic chelating agent ischosen from the group of azine coloring agent derivatives havingchelate-forming substituents."}
{"WKU":"039310272","Title":"Cellulose material treated with a thermosetting resin and having","App_Date":"1973-06-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Fred S. Sadler;John Lapp","Assignee":"McGraw-Edison Company","ICL_Class":"H01B  318;H01B  300;D06M 1334;D06M 1300","References":"2722561;2912382;3102159;3211516;3429819","Claims":"We claim:1. A method of treating cellulose material to increase its physicalproperties at elevated temperatures, comprising the steps of impregnatingthe cellulose material with an aqueous treating medium having dispersedtherein a liquid uncured thermosetting resin selected from the groupconsisting of epoxy resins and polyester resins, and an organic amine,evaporating the water from the aqueous medium, and thereafter curing theresin to provide a treated cellulose material having improved physicalproperties at elevated temperatures.2. The method of claim 1, and including the step of incorporating in theaqueous medium a protein material selected from the group consisting ofcasein, isolated soy protein, collagentype protein, and mixtures thereof.3. The method of claim 1, wherein the dry cellulose material has a nitrogencontent in the range of 0.3% to 10.0% by weight of the cellulose material.4. The method of claim 1, wherein the resin is present in an amount of 5%to 65% by weight of the cellulose material based on 100% solids.5. The method of claim 2, and including the step of incorporating in theaqueous medium a water-soluble nitrogen containing solvent for saidprotein material, said solvent being miscible with water and used in anamount of 0.1 to 5.0% by weight of the cellulose material based on 100%solids.6. The method of claim 1, and including the step of incorporating in theaqueous medium a water-soluble nitrogen-containing solvent for said resin,said solvent being miscible with water and present in an amount of 0.1% to5% by weight of the dry cellulose material based on 100% solids.7. The method of claim 1, wherein said organic amine has a reactiveNH.sub.2 group and functions as a curing agent for the resin as well ascontributing improved heat stability to the treated cellulose material.8. The method of claim 1, and including the step of incorporating in theaqueous medium a nitrogen-containing compound having a reactive NH.sub.2group, said nitrogen containing compound contributing improved heatstability to the treated cellulose material.9. A method of treating cellulose material to increase its physicalproperties at elevated temperatures, comprising the steps of impregnatingthe cellulose material with an aqueous treating medium having dispersedtherein a liquid uncured epoxy resin and an organic amine curing agent forsaid epoxy resin, said medium containing from 1 to 30% by weight ofsolids, said resin being present in an amount of 5% to 65% by weight ofthe cellulose material based on 100% solids, said amine being present in astoichiometric amount necessary to substantially completely cure saidresin, evaporating the water from the aqueous medium, and thereaftercuring the resin to provide a treated cellulose material having a nitrogencontent in the range of 0.3 to 10% by weight of the dry cellulosematerial.10. The method of claim 9, wherein said curing agent is dicyandiamide, andsaid method includes the step of incorporating in the aqueous-medium aprotein material selected from the group consisting of casein, isolatedsoy protein, collagen-type protein, and mixtures thereof.11. A treated cellulose fiber product having improved physical propertiesat elevated temperatures, said product being produced by impregnating acellulose fiber material with an aqueous treating medium having dispersedtherein a liquid uncured thermosetting resin selected from the groupconsisting of epoxy resins and polyester resins, and an organic amine,evaporating the water from the aqueous medium, and thereafter crosslinkingthe resin to provide a treated product, containing from 0.3% to 10% byweight of nitrogen based on the weight of the dry cellulose material, saidproduct having sufficient flexibility to be wound in coiled form.12. The product of claim 11, wherein said product is produced byincorporating in the aqueous medium a protein material selected from thegroup consisting of casein, isolated soy protein, collagen-type protein,and mixtures thereof.13. The product of claim 11, wherein the resin is an epoxy resin derivedfrom the reaction of bisphenol-A and epichlorhydrin and the amine isdicyandiamide.14. The product of claim 11, wherein said product is produced byincorporating in the aqueous medium a nitrogen-containing compound havinga reactive NH.sub.2 group, said nitrogen containing compound contributingimproved heat stability to the treated cellulose material.15. The product of claim 11, wherein said product is produced byincorporating in the aqueous medium a water-soluble nitrogen-containingsolvent for said resin, said solvent being miscible with water and presentin an amount of 0.01% to 5% by weight of the dry cellulose material basedon 100% solids.16. The product of claim 12, wherein said product is produced byincorporating in the aqueous medium a water-soluble nitrogen containingsolvent for said protein material, said solvent being miscible with waterand used in an amount of 0.1% to 5.0% by weight of the cellulose materialbased on 100% solids.17. The product of claim 11, wherein said organic amine has a reactiveNH.sub.2 group and functions as a curing agent for the resin as well ascontributing improved heat stability to the treated cellulose material."}
{"WKU":"039310280","Title":"Heat transfer fluid","App_Date":"1973-04-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Larry L. Jackson;Walter F. Seifert;Daniel E. Collins","Assignee":"The Dow Chemical Company","ICL_Class":"C09K  500","References":"1882809;1972847;2172391","Claims":"We claim:1. A heat transfer fluid consisting essentially of (a) diphenyl oxide, (b)biphenyl and (c) methylbiphenyl, ethylbiphenyl or mixture thereof, wherein(a) and (b) are present in essentially the proportions in their binaryeutectic mixture and (c) is present in an amount sufficient tosignificantly lower the freezing point of the mixture of (a) and (b) saidamount of (c) being at least about 5% by volume but not exceeding about70% by volume.2. The fluid of claim 1 wherein the component (c) constitutes about 5 to50% of the total fluid.3. The fluid of claim 1 wherein the component (c) constitutes about 10 to40% of the total fluid.4. The fluid of claim 1 wherein the ratio of components (a) and (b) isabout 70:30 to 80:20 by volume.5. The fluid of claim 1 wherein component (c) is a mixture of isomers ofmethylbiphenyl.6. The fluid of claim 5 wherein component (c) contains at least about 50%of the meta isomer.7. The fluid of claim 6 wherein component (c) contains at least about 90%of the combined meta and para isomers."}
{"WKU":"039310299","Title":"Corrosion inhibited antifreeze compositions and process for inhibiting","App_Date":"1974-10-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Daniel R. Dutton;John W. Compton","Assignee":"BASF Wyandotte Corporation","ICL_Class":"C09K  500;C23F 1112","References":"2632695;2737497;3238136;3705109;3734859;3753968;3763053","Claims":"We claim:1. A corrosion inhibited antifreeze composition comprising a water solubleliquid alcohol freezing point depressant and an inhibitor, the inhibitorbeing present in the antifreeze composition in an amount effective toinhibit the corrosion of solder alloys when intimately contactedtherewith, the inhibitor being present in an amount of about 0.01-1% byweight and comprising at least one substance selected from the groupconsisting ofa. compounds corresponding to the structural formula:##SPC3##wherein R.sub.1 is an alkylene radical containing from zero to 12 carbonatoms inclusive, R.sub.2 is an alkyl radical containing from one to 10carbon atoms inclusive and R.sub.3 is an alkylene radical containing fromone to 12 carbon atoms inclusive, andb. the mono- and di- metal salts, the mono- and di- ammonium salts and themono- and di- amides of (a).2. The antifreeze composition of claim 1 wherein R.sub.1 contains from zeroto four carbon atoms inclusive, R.sub.2 contains from four to eight carbonatoms inclusive, and R.sub.3 contains from five to nine carbon atomsinclusive.3. The antifreeze composition of claim 1 wherein the inhibitor comprises1-carboxy-2-hexyl-5-(7-carboxyheptyl)-cyclohex-3-ene.4. The antifreeze composition of claim 1 wherein the inhibitor is presentin an amount of about 0.3-0.6% by weight.5. The antifreeze composition of claim 1 wherein the inhibitor is presentin an amount of about 0.3% by weight.6. The antifreeze composition of claim 1 wherein the freezing pointdepressant comprises at least one water soluble alcohol containing fromone to four carbon atoms inclusive and from one to four hydroxy atomsinclusive.7. A corrosion inhibited antifreeze composition comprising ethylene glycolas a freezing point depressant and an inhibitor, the inhibitor beingpresent in the antifreeze composition in a minor but effective amount toinhibit the corrosion of solder alloys when intimately contactedtherewith, and the inhibitor comprising at least one substance selectedfrom the group consisting ofa. compounds corresponding to the structural formula:##SPC4##wherein R.sub.1 is an alkylene radical containing from zero to 12 carbonatoms inclusive, R.sub.2 is an alkyl radical containing from one to 10carbon atoms inclusive and R.sub.3 is an alkylene radical containing fromone to 12 carbon atoms inclusive, andb. the mono- and di- metal salts, the mono- and di- ammonium salts and themono- and di- amides of (a).8. The antifreeze composition of claim 7 wherein R.sub.1 contains from zeroto four carbon atoms inclusive, R.sub.2 contains from four to eight carbonatoms inclusive, and R.sub.3 contains from five to nine carbon atomsinclusive.9. The antifreeze composition of claim 7 wherein R.sub.1 contains zerocarbon atoms, R.sub.2 contains six carbon atoms, and R.sub.3 containsseven carbon atoms.10. The antifreeze composition of claim 7 wherein the inhibitor is presentin an amount of about 0.01-1% by weight.11. The antifreeze composition of claim 7 wherein the inhibitor is presentin an amount of about 0.3-0.6% by weight.12. The antifreeze composition of claim 7 wherein the inhibitor is presentin an amount of about 0.3% by weight.13. A corrosion inhibited antifreeze composition comprising a water solubleliquid alcohol freezing point depressant, an antifoam agent and aninhibitor, the inhibitor being present in the antifreeze composition in aminor but effective amount to inhibit the corrosion of solder alloys whenintimately contacted therewith, and the inhibitor comprising at least onesubstance selected from the group consisting ofa. compounds corresponding to the structural formula:##SPC5##wherein R.sub.1 is an alkylene radical containg from zero to 12 carbonatoms inclusive, R.sub.2 is an alkyl radical containing from one to 10carbon atoms inclusive and R.sub.3 is an alkylene radical containing fromone to 12 carbon atoms inclusive, andb. the mono- and di- metal salts, the mono- and di- ammonium salts and themono- and di- amides of (a).14. The antifreeze composition of claim 13 wherein R.sub.1 contains fromzero to four carbon atoms inclusive, R.sub.2 contains from four to eightcarbon atoms inclusive, and R.sub.3 contains from five to nine carbonatoms inclusive.15. The antifreeze composition of claim 13 wherein the inhibitor comprises1-carboxy-2-hexyl-5-(7-carboxyheptyl)-cyclohex-3-ene.16. The antifreeze composition of claim 13 wherein the inhibitor is presentin an amount of about 0.01-1% by weight.17. The antifreeze composition of claim 13 wherein the inhibitor is presentin an amount of about 0.3-0.6% by weight.18. The antifreeze composition of claim 13 wherein the inhibitor is presentin an amount of about 0.3% by weight.19. The antifreeze composition of claim 13 wherein the freezing pointdepressant comprises at least one water soluble alcohol containing fromone to four carbon atoms inclusive and from one to four hydroxy atomsinclusive.20. The antifreeze composition of claim 13 wherein the freezing pointdepressant comprises ethylene glycol.21. The antifreeze composition of claim 13 wherein the antifoam agentcomprises an alkoxylated nonionic surfactant which exhibits low foamingcharacteristics.22. The antifreeze composition of claim 13 wherein the antifoam agentcomprises a polyoxypropylenepolyoxyethylene block copolymer correspondingto the formula:"}
{"WKU":"039310302","Title":"Etching composition for etching nickel screen rolls or plates","App_Date":"1973-10-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Yoshio Ohno","Assignee":"Kenseido Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha","ICL_Class":"C09K 1306","References":"3376228;3412032;3417022;3682702","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An etching composition for nickel screen rolls or plates which comprises5 - 15% by volume of 62% HNO.sub.3 and 15 - 25% by volume of 35% hydrogenperoxide and 3 - 6% by volume of additives and a balance of water; saidadditives comprising 40 - 60% by volume of a petroleum hydrocarbon solventwhich is incompatible with water, 15 - 25% by volume of sulfate salt ofglyceride of fatty acid consisting essentially of 18 carbon atoms, sulfatesalt of fatty acid consisting essentially of 18 carbon atoms, or sulfatesalt of fatty alcohol consisting essentially of 18 carbon atoms, 4 - 6% byvolume of a first etching promoter selected from the group consisting ofdialkyl sulfosuccinate salt, sulfonate salt of C.sub.10 - C.sub.12petroleum hydrocarbon, sulfonate salt or sulfate salt of C.sub.10 -C.sub.12 fatty acid, and sulfonate salt or sulfate salt of C.sub.10 -C.sub.12 fatty alcohol and 20 - 30% by volume of a second etching promoterselected from the group consisting of butyl carbitol, polypropyleneglycol, polyethylene glycol, a mixture thereof and a block copolymerthereof."}
{"WKU":"039310310","Title":"Surface active compositions","App_Date":"1973-08-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John W. Willard, Sr.","Assignee":"CAW Industries, Inc.","ICL_Class":"C11D  754","References":"3272753;3350391;3351558","Claims":"I claim:1. A composition of matter for use in removing stains and soil fromsubstrates consisting essentially of as active ingredientsA. major proportion by weight of a surface active agent effective inremoving stains and soil from substrates washed therewith in water, andB. catalytically effective minor proportion by weight of a catalyst,the surface active agent being present in an amount effective to removestains and soil from substrates washed in water containing the saidcomposition and the catalyst being present in a catalytically effectiveamount which promotes the removal of the stains and soil from thesubstrates.the catalyst being prepared by a process comprisingadmixing a water soluble alkali metal silicate with an aqueous mediumcontaining a dissolved substance which is a source of calcium ion and adissolved substance which is a source of magnesium ion,the aqueous medium containing said dissolved substances in amounts toprovide between about 1 .times. 10.sup.-.sup.4 and 1 .times.10.sup.-.sup.1 mole per liter each of calcium ion and magnesium ion,the aqueous medium containing said dissolved substances in amounts toprovide a molar ratio of calcium ion to magnesium ion between about2.0:1.0 and 1.0:2.0,the alkali metal silicate having an alkali metal oxide to silicon dioxideratio between about 0.9:1.0 and less than 2.0:1.0 and being admixed withthe aqueous medium in an amount of about 0.05-2 moles per liter,reacting the alkali metal silicate with said dissolved substances providingcalcium ion and magnesium ion in the aqueous medium in liquid phase toproduce an aqueous suspension of finely divided particles of the reactionproduct,admixing a micelle-forming surfactant with the aqueous medium in an amountto form catalyst micelles comprising said finely divided particles of thereaction product upon agitating the aqueous medium, andagitating the aqueous medium containing the finely divided particles of thereaction product and surfactant to form said catalyst micelles.2. The composition of claim 1 wherein the said active ingredients consistessentially of (A) a major proportion by weight of the said surface activeagent and an additional water softening agent effective to soften watercontaining calcium and/or magnesium ions when admixed therewith other thanthe said surfactant or the said micelle-forming surfactant, and (B) thesaid catalytically effective minor proportion by weight of the catalyst.3. The composition of claim 1 wherein the said active ingredients consistessentially of (A) a major proportion by weight of the said surface activeagent and a bleaching agent which exhibits a bleaching action when admixedwith water, and (B) the said catalytically effective minor proportion byweight of the catalyst.4. The composition of claim 1 wherein the said active ingredients consistessentially of (A) a major proportion by weight of the said surface activeagent, an additional water softening agent effective to soften watercontaining calcium and/or magnesium ions when admixed therewith other thanthe said surfactant or the micelle forming surfactant, and a bleachingagent which exhibits a bleaching action when admixed with water, and (B)the said catalytically effective minor proportion by weight of thecatalyst.5. The composition of claim 1 wherein in the process for preparing thecatalyst, said ratio of calcium ion to magnesium ion is between about1.5:1.0 and 1.0:1.5.6. The composition of claim 1 wherein in the process for preparing thecatalyst, said ratio of calcium ion to magnesium ion is about 1.0:1.0.7. The composition of claim 1 wherein in the process for preparing thecatalyst, the alkali metal silicate is admixed with an aqueous mediumcontaining said dissolved substances in amounts to provide between about 1.times. 10.sup.-.sup.3 and 6 .times. 10.sup.-.sup.3 mole per liter each ofcalcium ion and magnesium ion.8. The composition of claim 1 wherein in the process for preparing thecatalyst, the alkali metal silicate is admixed with an aqueous mediumcontaining said dissolved substances in amounts to provide between about2.5 .times. 10.sup.-.sup.3 and 3.0 .times. 10.sup.-.sup.3 mole per litereach of calcium ion and magnesium ion.9. The composition of claim 1 wherein in the process for preparing thecatalyst, about 0.2-0.5 mole per liter of the alkali metal silicate isadmixted with the aqueous medium.10. The composition of claim 1 wherein in the process for preparing thecatalyst, the alkali metal silicate has an alkali metal oxide to silicondioxide ratio between about 0.9:1.0 and 1.2:1.0.11. The composition of claim 1 wherein in the process for preparing thecatalyst, the alkali metal silicate is alkali metal metasilicate having analkali metal oxide to silicon dioxide ratio of about 1.0:1.0.12. The composition of claim 1 wherein in the process for preparing thecatalyst, about 0.01-0.1 mole per liter of the surfactant is admixed withthe aqueous medium.13. The composition of claim 1 wherein in the process for preparing thecatalyst, the surfactant comprises sulfated castor oil.14. The composition of claim 1 wherein in the process for preparing thecatalyst, the alkali metal silicate is admixed with an aqueous mediumcontaining said dissolved substances in amounts to provide between about 1.times. 10.sup.-.sup.3 and 6 .times. 10.sup.-.sup.3 mole per liter each ofcalcium ion and magnesium ion, the ratio of calcium ion to magnesium ionis between about 1.5:1.0 and 1.0:1.5, about 0.2:0.5 mole per liter of thealkali metal silicate is admixed with the aqueous medium, and the alkalimetal silicate has an alkali metal oxide to silicon dioxide ratio betweenabout 0.9:1.0 and 1.2:1.0.15. The composition of claim 1 wherein in the process of preparing thecatalyst, the alkali metal silicate is admixed with an aqueous mediumcontaining said dissolved substances in amounts to provide between about2.5 .times. 10.sup.-.sup.3 and 3.0 .times. 10.sup.-.sup.3 mole per litereach of calcium ion and magnesium ion, the aqueous medium contains aboutequimolar amounts of calcium ion and magnesium ion, about 0.2-0.3 mole perliter of the alkali metal silicate is admixed with the aqueous medium, andthe alkali metal silicate is alkali metal metasilicate having an alkalimetal oxide to silicon dioxide ratio of about 1.0:1.0.16. The composition of claim 15 wherein in the process for preparing thecatalyst, the alkali metal metasilicate is sodium metasilicate having asodium oxide to silicon dioxide ratio of about 1.0:1.0.17. The composition of claim 15 wherein in the process for preparing thecatalyst, about 0.01-0.1 mole per liter of the surfactant is admixed withthe aqueous medium.18. The composition of claim 15 wherein in the process for preparing thecatalyst, the alkali metal silicate is admixed with an aqueous mediumcontaining said dissolved substances in amounts to provide about 2.9.times. 10.sup.-.sup.3 mole per liter of calcium ion and about 2.7 .times.10.sup.-.sup.3 mole per liter of magnesium ion, about 0.25 mole per literof sodium metasilicate having a sodium oxide to silicon dioxide ratio ofabout 1.0:1.0 is admixed with the aqueous medium, the aqueous mediumcontains not more than 10 parts per million by weight of carbonate ion andbicarbonate ion, the surfactant comprises sulfated castor oil and at least50% of the hydroxy groups of the castor oil are sulfated, and about 0.05mole per liter of the sulfated castor oil is admixed with the aqueousmedium.19. The composition of claim 17 wherein in the process for preparing thecatalyst, the surfactant comprises sulfated castor oil.20. The composition of claim 19 wherein in the process for preparing thecatalyst, the alkali metal metasilicate is sodium metasilicate having asodium oxide to silicon dioxide ratio of about 1.0:1.0.21. The composition of claim 20 wherein in the process for preparing thecatalyst, at least 50% of the hydroxy groups of the castor oil aresulfated, and about 0.03-0.07 mole per liter of the sulfated castor oil isadmixed with the aqueous medium."}
{"WKU":"039310329","Title":"Antibacterial and germicidal N,N-dialkylthiocarbamoyl sulfenamide","App_Date":"1973-10-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kenneth S. Karsten","Assignee":"R. T. Vanderbilt Company, Inc.","ICL_Class":"C11D  348;C11D  950","References":"2269893;2424921;2432255;2692862;2910497;2927899;2972627;3423416;3565894","Claims":"I claim:1. A skin-substantive microorganism-inhibiting cleansing compositioncomprising a synthetic organic detergent selected from the groupconsisting of anionic, nonionic cationic and amphoteric detergents andfatty acid soaps, and a biostatically effective amount of a compound ofthe general formula:##EQU4##said compound being selected from the group consisting of compoundswherein (1) R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are methyl or ethyl, R.sub.3 and R.sub.4are cyclohexyl; (2) R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are methyl and R.sub.3 is hydrogenwhen R.sub.4 is phenyl; and (3) R.sub.1 with R.sub.2 and R.sub.3 withR.sub.4 form heterocyclic rings.2. A skin substantive microorganism inhibiting cleansing composition asclaimed in claim 1 wherein the heterocyclic ring formed by R.sub.1 andR.sub.2, and R.sub.3 and R.sub.4 is morpholine.3. A skin substantive microorganism inhibiting cleansing composition asclaimed in claim 1 wherein the biostatically effective amount is 0.1 to 5percent of the total weight of the composition.4. A skin substantive microorganism inhibiting cleansing composition asclaimed in claim 3 wherein the detergent is a shampoo.5. A biostatically active, skin substantive detergent compositioncomprising at least one synthetic organic detergent selected from thegroup consisting of anionic, nonionic, cationic and amphoteric detergentsand fatty acid soaps, and a biostatically effective amount of an activeagent selected from the group consisting ofN,N-dimethylthiocarbamoyl-N ,N -dicyclohexylsulfenamide,N,N-diethylthiocarbamoyl-N ,N -dicyclohexylsulfenamide,N,N-dimethylthiocarbamoyl-N  -phenylsulfenamide and N,N,N ,N -bis(2,2 -oxydiethylene) thiocarbamoylsulfenamide.6. A method of inhibiting skin microorganisms comprising applying thereto acleansing agent composition including at least one synthetic organicdetergent selected from the group consisting of anionic, nonionic,cationic and amphoteric detergents and fatty acid soaps and from 0.1 to 5percent of the total weight of the composition of a compound of thegeneral formula##EQU5##where the compound is selected from the group consisting of compounds were(2) R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are methyl or ethyl, R.sub.3 and R.sub.4 arecyclohexyl; (2) R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are methyl and R.sub.3 is hydrogenwhen R.sub.4 is phenyl; and (3) R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 and R.sub.3 andR.sub.4 form a heterocyclic ring."}
{"WKU":"039310337","Title":"Liquid foam-regulated nonionic detergent compositions","App_Date":"1974-12-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Albrecht Lohr;Manfred Hennemann;Gunter Jakobi","Assignee":"Henkel & Cie G.m.b.H.","ICL_Class":"C11D  1825;C11D  344;C11D 1004;C11D 1708","References":"2943058;2954348;3037936;3156655;3210287;3367878;3679608;3679609;3720621;3812041;3869399","Claims":"We claim:1. A liquid foam-regulated washing and cleansing agent compositioncontaining non-ionic surface-active compounds and organic water-misciblesolvents consisting essentially ofa. from 30 to 60 percent by weight of a combination of two ethoxylatedalcohols having from 12 to 20 carbon atoms selected from the groupconsisting of alkanols, alkenols and mixtures thereof, where one of thetwo ethoxylated alcohols is adducted with an average of from 2 to 6 molsof ethylene oxide and the other ethoxylated alcohol is adducted with anaverage of 8 to 20 mols of ethylene oxide, and where the quantitativeratio of the lower ethoxylated alcohol to the higher ethoxylated alcoholis from 1:3 to 1:1;b. from 2 to 6 percent by weight of an alkali metal soap of fatty acidswith substantially from 12 to 18 carbon atoms;c. from 0.1 to 1 percent by weight of a water-soluble organic sequesteringagent for heavy metal ions;d. from 20 to 35 percent by weight of a water-miscible solvent combinationof a monohydric ether alcohol having from 5 to 8 carbon atoms selectedfrom the group consisting of alkoxyalkanols and alkoxyalkoxyalkanols, anda diol having from 2 to 6 carbon atoms selected from the group consistingof alkanediols and alkoxyalkanediols, said alcohol and said diol havingboiling points of over 160.degree.C and flash points of over 60.degree.Cand the quantitative ratio of said alcohol to said diol being from 2:1 to1:2, with the proviso that up to 3 percent by weight, based on the totalcomposition, of said monohydric ether alcohol is replaced with amonohydric alcohol selected from the group consisting of ethanol andisopropyl alcohol; ande. at least 8 percent by weight up to the balance of 100% by weight, ofwater.2. The washing and cleansing composition of claim 1 wherein, in component(a), said two ethoxylated alcohols are ethoxylated products ofstraight-chained primary alcohols having from 12 to 18 carbon atoms.3. The washing and cleansing composition of claim 1 wherein, in component(a), one of said two ethoxylated alcohols is adducted with an average offrom 3 to 5 mols of ethylene oxide and the other ethoxylated alcohol isadducted with an average of 10 to 15 mols of ethylene oxide.4. The washing and cleansing composition of claim 1 wherein, in component(a), the quantitative ratio of said lower ethoxylated alcohol to saidhigher ethoxylated alcohol is from 1:2 to 1:1.5. The washing and cleansing composition of claim 1 wherein the amount ofcomponent (a) is from 35 to 45 percent by weight, the amount of component(b) is from 4 to 6 percent by weight, the amount of component (c) is from0.3 to 0.5 percent by weight.6. The washing and cleansing composition of claim 1 wherein the amount ofcomponent (d) is from 25 to 30 percent by weight.7. The washing and cleansing composition of claim 1 wherein, in component(d), said quantitative ratio of said alcohol to said diol is from 3:2 to1:1.8. The washing and cleansing composition of claim 1 wherein, in component(d), said monohydric ether alcohol is n-butoxyethoxyethanol and said diolis 1,2-propanediol.9. The washing and cleansing composition of claim 1 wherein, in component(d), up to 3 percent by weight, based on the total composition, of saidmonohydric ether alcohol is replaced by ethanol.10. The washing and cleansing composition of claim 1 wherein, in component(d), up to 3 percent by weight, based on the total composition, of saidmonohydric ether alcohol is replaced by isopropyl alcohol.11. The washing and cleansing composition of claim 10 wherein from 0.15 to0.25 percent by weight of perfume is additionally contained in saidcomposition.12. The washing and cleansing composition of claim 1 wherein saidcomposition contains up to 1 percent by weight of an optical brightener.13. The washing and cleansing composition of claim 1 wherein the amount ofcomponent (a) is from 35 to 45 percent by weight of two ethoxylatedalcohols having from 12 to 18 carbon atoms where said alcohols arestraight-chained, primary alcohols, one of said ethoxylated alcohols beingadducted with an average of from 3 to 5 mols of ethylene oxide and theother, with an average of 10 to 15 mols of ethylene oxide, with thequantitative ratio between said lower ethoxylated alcohol to said higherethoxylated alcohol being from 1:2 to 1:1; the amount of component (b) isfrom 4 to 6 percent by weight, the amount of component (c) is from 0.3 to0.5 percent by weight; and the amount of component (d) is from 25 to 30percent by weight where the quantitative ratio of said alcohol to saiddiol is from 3:2 to 1:1."}
{"WKU":"039310345","Title":"Detergent materials containing enzymes","App_Date":"1973-08-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jack Thomas Inamorato;Robert Tweedy Hunter, Jr.","Assignee":"Colgate-Palmolive Company","ICL_Class":"C11D  938;C11D 1000","References":"3451935;3630930","Claims":"We claim:1. A detergent composition for the washing of fabrics which consistsessentially of a mixture of a surface active synthetic organic detergentselected from the group consisting of anionic, nonionic and amphotericdetergents and a mixture of enzyme powders, which enzyme powder mixtureconsists essentially of about 90,000 Novo alpha-amylase units of abacterial alpha-amylase to about 3/8 Anson unit of an alkaline protease,with the alkaline protease being present in an amount to provide one Ansonunit thereof for each 100 to 500 grams of detergent composition.2. A detergent composition according to claim 1 wherein the syntheticorganic detergent contains a hydrocarbon sulfonate having 8 to 26 carbonatoms and the content of alkaline protease is about one Anson unit thereoffor each 200 to 400 grams of detergent composition.3. A composition according to claim 2 in which the hydrocarbon sulfonate issodium linear alkyl benzene sulfonate, having 10 to 16 carbon atoms in thealkyl group thereof and in which there is present a water soluble buildersalt, with the proportion thereof being 50 to 1,000 parts by weight per100 parts by weight of synthetic organic detergent and the content ofalkaline protease is about 3/8 Anson unit per 100 grams of detergentcomposition.4. A composition according to claim 3 wherein the synthetic organicdetergent is a mixture of about 10 parts of sodium linear tridecylbenzenesulfonate, about 2 parts of the ethoxylation product of 11 mols ofethylene oxide and a primary alkanol of 14 to 15 carbon atoms and about 2parts of sodium soap of higher fatty acids and the builder salt ispentasodium tripolyphosphate.5. A built synthetic organic detergent composition for use in washingfabrics which consists essentially of a mixture of an alkaline buildersalt and a minor proportion of a mixture of a surface active syntheticorganic detergents selected from the group consisting of anionic, nonionicand amphoteric detergents, and an enzyme powder, which enzyme powderconsists essentially of a mixture of bacterial alpha-amylase and alkalineprotease with the proportion thereof being about 90,000 Novo alpha-amylaseunits of bacterial alpha-amylase to about 3/8 Anson unit of alkalineprotease, the builder salt being present in an amount corresponding toabout 50 to 1,000 parts thereof by weight per 100 parts by weight of saidsurface active synthetic organic detergent and said alkaline proteasebeing present in an amount to provide one Anson unit thereof for each 100to 500 grams of detergent composition.6. A composition according to claim 5 which has a pH, measured in 0.15%aqueous solution, of 9 to 10.5.7. In the washing of fabrics in wash water containing a surface activesynthetic organic detergent selected from the group consisting of anionic,nonionic and amphoteric detergents, and water soluble builder salt, saidbuilder salt being present in an amount of about 50 to 1,000 parts byweight per 100 parts by weight of said synthetic organic detergent, theimprovement which comprises including in the wash water a mixture ofenzymes, which mixture consists essentially of bacterial alpha-amylase andalkaline protease with the proportion thereof being about 90,000 Novoalpha-amylase units of the bacterial alpha-amylase to about 3/8 Anson unitof alkaline protease and with the amounts of such enzymes being such as toprovide one Anson unit of the alkaline protease for each 100 to 500 gramsof detergent composition."}
{"WKU":"039310353","Title":"Soap bar","App_Date":"1975-04-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Theodore G. Brown","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"C11D  900;C11D 1314;C11D 1700;C11D 1704","References":"1320855;1495978;3553138","Claims":"I claim as my invention:1. A soap bar comprising a hollow shell of bar soap material defining alarge cavity and an access opening, said shell, cavity and access openinghaving the configuration shown in FIG. 1, and a hard core of soap materialof a size and shape substantially filling said cavity.2. A soap bar as in claim 1, said core being composed of a multiplicity ofbar soap remnants and a congealed soap solution in which said remnants areimbedded.3. A soap bar as in claim 2, said shell having an access opening forinitially receiving the soap bar remnants and thereafter a soapy solutionin cream, paste or liquid form.4. A soap bar as in claim 3, and a portion of the congealed soap solutionfilling said access opening."}
{"WKU":"039310361","Title":"Compacted alkali metal silicate","App_Date":"1974-05-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard H. Pierce","Assignee":"Philadelphia Quartz Company","ICL_Class":"B01J  200;B01J  220;B01J  222;C11D  714","References":"2463680;2874123;3177147;3329616;3548046;3674700;3687640;3748103;3764356;3868227","Claims":"I claim:1. In the known process of preparing product granules of hydrated alkalimetal silicate with a particle size larger than 100 mesh, a mol ratio ofSiO.sub.2 /M.sub.2 O between 1.6/1.0 and 4.0/1.0 wherein M stands for analkali metal, a bulk density of 35 to 75 lbs/ft.sup.3 and a moisturecontent of 12 to 26%, the improvement comprising:a. preparing a damp, uniform mixture of 90 to 97% alkali metal silicatepowder and 3 to 10% alkali metal silicate solution by:"}
{"WKU":"039310370","Title":"Substantially uncolored detergent products containing coloring materials","App_Date":"1973-11-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Randall Brian Hall","Assignee":"The Procter & Gamble Company","ICL_Class":"C11D  306","References":"2059449;2930760;3123565;3154496;3451935;3519570;3529923;3687640","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for preparing a granular composition for use in a granulardetergent product comprising the steps of:a. mixing together, by weight, from about 0.001 percent to about 10 percentof a dry particulate coloring material selected from the group consistingof Polar Brilliant Blue GAW 180 percent, FD&C Blue No. 1, Rhodamine BM,Pontacyl Light Yellow 36, Polar Brilliant Blue RAW, Phthalocyanine Blue,Phthalocyanine Green, and Ultramarine Blue having substantially noparticles larger than 150 .mu. with from 90 percent to 99.999 percent of agranular material selected from the group consisting of hydratable saltsand detergent compositions having an average particle size of about 150.mu. to about 1000 .mu.;b. spraying onto the mixture prepared in step (a) during continuous mixing,from about 1 percent to about 15 percent, based on the total weight of(a), of water to form agglomerates of said coloring material and saidgranular material.2. The process of claim 1 wherein the granular material is sodiumtripolyphosphate.3. The process of claim 1 wherein the coloring material is a fabric bluingagent selected from the group consisting of Ultramarine Blue, PolarBrilliant Blue GAW, and Polar Brilliant Blue RAW."}
{"WKU":"039310388","Title":"Scale and corrosion inhibition for cooling water systems","App_Date":"1973-07-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Francesca Mochi-Bartolani;Mauro Minervini;Aurelio Mannini","Assignee":"Nalco Chemical Company","ICL_Class":"C02B  500","References":"3462365;3518203","Claims":"The embodiments of this invention in which an exclusive property orprivilege is claimed are defined as follows:1.  A corrosion and scale inhibiting composition useful in preventingcorrosion of iron and other metal surfaces in contact with cooling waterconsisting of:"}
{"WKU":"039310396","Title":"Composition for diffusing phosphorus","App_Date":"1973-11-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Mitsuo Yamashita;Akio Mikogami;Masashi Hasegawa;Hiroshi Oizumi","Assignee":"Denki Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha","ICL_Class":"H01B  302;H01L 21225;H01L 21223","References":"3486951;3849344","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A composition for diffusing phosphorus which comprises 30 - 95 percentby weight of phosphorus nitride and 70 - 5 percent by weight of silicondioxide.2. A composition as claimed in claim 1 wherein the composition is in theform of wafer.3. A wafer as claimed in claim 2 treated with an inert gas saturated withwater vapor having a temperature of 0.degree. - 30.degree.C at 500.degree.- 900.degree.C for 0.5-3.0 hours.4. A wafer as claimed in claim 2 treated with a gas mixture of 0.1-10percent by volume of oxygen and 99.9- 90 percent by volume of an inert gasat 500.degree.-900.degree.C for 0.5 - 3.0 hours.5. A method for treating a wafer as claimed in claim 2 with an inert gassaturated with water vapor having a temperature of 0.degree. - 30.degree.Cat 500.degree. - 900.degree.C for 0.5 - 3.0 hours.6. A method for treating a wafer as claimed in claim 2 with a gas mixtureof 0.1 - 10 percent by volume of oxygen and 99.9 - 90 percent by volume ofan inert gas at 500.degree. - 900.degree.C for 0.5 - 3.0 hours."}
{"WKU":"039310400","Title":"Gas generating composition","App_Date":"1973-08-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jack D. Breazeale","Assignee":"United Technologies Corporation","ICL_Class":"C06D  506;B60R 2110","References":"3741585;3773351;3779823;3814694","Claims":"We claim:1. A gaseous nitrogen generating composition comprising a mixture of ametal azide and a material selected from the group consisting of: Fe.sub.2O.sub.3, AlF.sub.3, Al.sub.2 O.sub.3 +Fe.sub.2 O.sub.3, B.sub.2 O.sub.3,CuCl, CuO, Fe.sub.3 O.sub.4, MnO.sub.2, SiO.sub.2, TiO.sub.2 and mixturesthereof, said materials being oxides and salt of elements lower in theelectrochemical series of the elements than the metal component of theazide and being capable of liberating sufficient heat upon exothermicreaction with said azide to maintain a self-sustained combustion.2. The composition of claim 1 wherein said metal azide is selected from thegroup consisting of alkali metal azides.3. The composition of claim 2 further comprising a material selected fromthe group consisting of carbon-nitrogen compounds, metal oxalates andmetal carbonates.4. The composition of claim 3 wherein said carbon-nitrogen compounds, metaloxalates and metal carbonates are selected from the group consisting oftetracyanoethylene, Li.sub.2 C.sub.2 O.sub.4, Na.sub.2 C.sub.2 O.sub.4,MgC.sub.2 O.sub.4, CaCO.sub.3, FeCO.sub.3, MgCO.sub.3,MgCa(CO.sub.3).sub.2 and mixtures thereof.5. The composition of claim 4 further comprising an oxidizing agentselected from the group consisting of NaNO.sub.3, NaClO.sub.4, LiNO.sub.3,LiClO.sub.4, NaClO.sub.3, Mg(ClO.sub.4).sub.2.6. The composition of claim 4 further comprising a material selected fromthe group consisting of FeO(OH), Mg(ClO.sub.4).sub.2.6H.sub.2 O,(COOH).sub.2.2H.sub.2 O and oxamide.7. The composition of claim 6 further comprising a material selected fromthe group consisting of NaNO.sub.3, NaClO.sub.4, LiNO.sub.3, LiClO.sub.4,NaClO.sub.3 and Mg(ClO.sub.4).sub.2.8. The composition of claim 1 wherein said azide is sodium azide and saidmaterial is Fe.sub.2 O.sub.3.9. The composition of claim 1 wherein said azide is sodium azide and saidmaterial is CuCl.10. The composition of claim 1 wherein said azide is sodium azide and saidmaterial is Al.sub.2 O.sub.3 +Fe.sub.2 O.sub.3.11. The composition of claim 1 wherein said azide is sodium azide and saidmaterial is SiO.sub.2.12. The composition of claim 1 wherein said azide is sodium azide and saidmaterial is CuO.13. The composition of claim 1 wherein said azide is sodium azide and saidmaterial is B.sub.2 O.sub.3.14. The composition of claim 1 further comprising a fiberous binder.15. The composition of claim 7 further comprising a fiberous binder."}
{"WKU":"039310418","Title":"Liquid crystal compositions","App_Date":"1974-02-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Franklin D. Saeva;Richard L. Schank","Assignee":"Xerox Corporation","ICL_Class":"C09K  334;G02B  523;G02F  101;G02F  116","References":"3806230","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An imaging method comprising the steps ofa providing an imaging member comprising a layer of a liquid crystallinecomposition having the optical properties of the cholesteric liquidcrystalline mesophase, said composition consisting essentially of at leastone nematic liquid crystalline material and at least one structurallysimilar non-mesomorphic optically active material which is represented bya general formula selected from the group consisting ofW-ar-Z, andW-ar-X = Y-Ar-Zwhere X and Y are radicals chosen from the group consisting ofX = y = chx = ch, y = nx = y = nx = n, y = n .fwdarw. ox = ch, y = n .fwdarw. owhere W and Z can be the same or different and are chosen from the groupconsisting of NH.sub.2 and alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, alkyl, ester,carbonate, and aldehyde radicals having up to and including nine carbonatoms, and where Ar is chosen from the group consisting of##SPC2##b applying an electrical field in imagewise configuration across said layerwhereby the image portions of said layer are distinguishable from thebackground portions of said layer.2. The imaging method as defined in claim I wherein said imaging memberfurther includes a pair of electrodes and said liquid crystalline layer isarranged between said electrodes, wherein at least one of said electrodesis substantially transparent.3. The imaging method as defined on claim 2 wherein at least one of saidelectrodes is shaped in image configuration.4. An imaging method comprising the steps ofa providing an imaging member comprising a layer of a liquid crystallinecomposition having the optical properties of the cholesteric liquidcrystalline mesophase shaped in imagewise configuration, said compositionconsisting essentially of at least one nematic liquid crystalline materialand at least one structurally similar non-mesomorphic optically activematerial which is represented by a general formula selected from the groupconsisting ofW-ar-Z, andW-ar-X = Y-Ar-Zwhere X and Y are radicals chosen from the group consisting ofX = y = chx = ch, y = nx = y = nx = n, y = n .fwdarw. ox = ch, y = n .fwdarw. owhere W and Z can be the same or different and are chosen from the groupconsisting of NH.sub.2 and alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxy, alkyl, ester,carbonate, and aldehyde radicals having up to and including nine carbonatoms, and where Ar is chosen from the group consisting of##SPC3##b applying an electrical field across said layer whereby an image isobserved.5. The imaging method as defined in claim 4 wherein said imaging memberfurther includes a pair of electrodes and said liquid crystalline layer isarranged between said electrodes, wherein at least one of said electrodesis substantially transparent."}
{"WKU":"039310426","Title":"Cathodochromic sodalite","App_Date":"1973-06-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Roelof Egbert Schuil","Assignee":"U.S. Philips Corporation","ICL_Class":"F21V  900","References":"2752521;2761846;3598750;3705323;3773540","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A cathodochromic sodalite defined by the formula Na.sub.3 Al.sub.3Si.sub.3 O.sub.12.NaX in which X represents at least one halogen selectedfrom the group consisting of chlorine, bromine and iodine, wherein thesodalite contains at least one element selected from the group consistingof tin, lead and germanium in a quantity of between 0.05 and 2 atom %calculated with respect to silicon.2. A cathodochromic sodalite as claimed in claim 1, wherein the saidquantity has a value of between 0.1 and 1 atom %.3. A cathodochromic sodalite as claimed in claim 1 wherein the sodalitecontains at least one element selected from the group consisting of tinand lead.4. A cathodochromic sodalite as claimed in claim 3, wherein the sodalitecontains tin.5. A cathodochromic sodalite as claimed in claim 1, wherein X is bromine.6. A cathode-ray tube provided with an image screen comprising acathodochromic sodalite as claimed in claim 1.7. A method of manufacturing a cathodochromic sodalite of claim 1comprising forming an aqueous solution of sodium aluminate (NaAlO.sub.2),at least 0.33 mol of sodium halide (naX) per mol of NaAlO2, at0.0005 to0.02 mol per mol of NaAlO.sub.2 of at least one element selected from thegroup consisting of tin, lead and germanium and 0.90 to 1.10 per mol ofNaAlO.sub.2 of silicon dioxide, drying said solution, heating saidresultant dried product below the melting point of the sodalite andwashing said heated product with water."}
{"WKU":"039310434","Title":"Filming amine emulsions","App_Date":"1973-06-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jerry Lee Walker;Thomas Edward Cornelius, III","Assignee":"Calgon Corporation","ICL_Class":"C23F 1114","References":"3239470;3418254;3454647;3520820;3717433","Claims":"We claim:1. A stable, fluid corrosion-inhibiting composition comprising from about 1percent by weight to about 90 percent by weight of an aliphatic amineselected from the group consisting of octadecylamine, coco amine, andhydrogenated tallow amine, from about 1 percent by weight to about 10percent by weight of a dispersing agent which is at least one memberselected from the group consisting of ethoxylated beta amines andethoxylated beta diamines and from about 10 percent to about 99 percentwater.2. A composition as in claim 1 wherein the dispersing agent is anethoxylated beta amine.3. A composition as in claim 2 wherein the ethoxylated beta amine isrepresented by the formula:##EQU6##wherein R.sub.1 is an alkyl group containing from eight to 20 carbonatoms, R.sub.2 is an alkyl group containing from one to four carbon atomsand x and y each are equal to or greater than 1, provided, however, thatthe sum of x and y is less than 100.4. A composition as in claim 3 wherein R.sub.1 is nonyl, R.sub.2 is methyland x plus y equals 15.5. A composition as in claim 3 wherein R.sub.1 is tridecyl, R.sub.2 ismethyl and x plus y equals 5.6. A composition as in claim 1 wherein the dispersing agent is anethoxylated beta diamine.7. A composition as in claim 6 wherein the ethoxylated beta diamine isrepresented by the formula:##EQU7##wherein R.sub.1 is an alkyl group containing from eight to 20 carbonatoms, R.sub.2 is an alkyl group containing from one to four carbon atomsand x and y each are equal to or greater than 1, provided, however, thatthe sum of x, y, and z is less than 100.8. A composition as in claim 7 wherein R.sub.1 is tridecyl and R.sub.2 ismethyl.9. A method of inhibiting the formation of corrosion in an aqueous systemwhich comprises maintaining in the water of said system from about 0.01 toabout 100 ppm of a composition comprising from about 1 percent by weightto about 90 percent by weight of an aliphatic amine selected from thegroup consisting of octadecylamine, coco amine, and hydrogenated tallowamine, from about 1 percent by weight to about 10 percent by weight of adispersing agent which is at least one member selected from the groupconsisting of ethoxylated beta amines and ethoxylated beta diamines andfrom about 10 percent to about 99 percent water.10. A method as in claim 9 wherein the dispersing agent is an ethoxylatedbeta amine.11. A method as in claim 10 wherein the ethoxylated beta amine isrepresented by the formula:##EQU8##wherein R.sub.1 is an alkyl group containing from eight to 20 carbonatoms, R.sub.2 is an alkyl group containing from one to four carbon atomsand x and y each are equal to or greater than 1, provided, however, thatthe sum of x and y is less than 100.12. A method as in claim 11 wherein R.sub.1 is nonyl, R.sub.2 is methyl andx plus y equals 15.13. A method as in claim 11 wherein R.sub.1 is tridecyl, R.sub.2 is methyland x plus y equals 5.14. A method as in claim 9 wherein the dispersing agent is an ethoxylatedbeta diamine.15. A method as in claim 14 wherein the ethoxylated beta diamine isrepresented by the formula:##EQU9##wherein R.sub.1 is an alkyl group containing from eight to 20 carbonatoms, R.sub.2 is an alkyl group containing from one to four carbon atomsand x and y each are equal to or greater than 1, provided, however, thatthe sum of x, y, and z is less than 100.16. A method as in claim 15 wherein R.sub.1 is tridecyl and R.sub.2 ismethyl."}
{"WKU":"039310442","Title":"Method for recovering molybdenum catalyst values and use of said values","App_Date":"1974-02-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jean Maurin","Assignee":"Compagnie Francaise de Raffinage","ICL_Class":"B01J 3700;B01J 3112;C07C 2902","References":"3453068;3463604;3629144;3822321","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for regenerating as a molybdic ester, a molybdenum catalystused in synthesizing a vicinal alkane diol having four or five carbonatoms per molecule by contacting in an aqueous medium butene ormethyl-butene, an alkane hydroperoxide which forms an alcohol as reductionproduct, and a catalyst which consists essentially of the reaction productof molybdic acid or ammonium molybdate with a vicinal alkanediol havingfour or five carbon atoms per molecule; separating the products of thereaction by distillation to isolate any unreacted olefin, said alcohol,said diol, and with the distillation bottoms said catalyst; comprising thesteps of:a. taking at least a portion of said bottoms and reacting ammonia with themolybdenum content thereof to form ammonium molybdate;b. separating said ammonium molybdate from at least any organic phase ofthe reaction mixture resulting from step (a);c. reacting an aqueous solution of said ammonium molybdate with an amountof said diol to convert said ammonium molybdate to the correspondingmolybdic ester precipitate with released ammonia being recycled to step(a).d. separating said precipitate from the reaction mixture of step (c) andrecycling it as at least a portion of the catalyst for said synthesizingprocess.2. The process as defined in claim 1 wherein the bottoms of step (a) isdissolved in a solvent and contacted with gaseous ammonia.3. The process as defined in claim 2 wherein said ammonia and said solventsconstitute respectively from 0.05 to 6 and from 15 to 85 wt. % of thetotal reaction charge; wherein said solvents are selected from the groupconsisting of acetone, methylethylketone, and methylisospropylketone; andsaid portion of bottoms reacted with said ammonia is from 20 to 80% byweight of the bottoms from said synthesizing process.4. The process as defined in claim 2 wherein said separated organic phaseis distilled in turn to separate the organic residue from said solvent,which latter is recycled in step (a).5. The process as defined in claim 4 wherein the separation in step (b) isby filtration.6. The process as defined in claim 5, wherein said ammonia and water areboiled off in step (c) and thereafter are separated from one another bydistillation, said gaseous ammonia being then recycled to step (a), andfurther wherein excess diol from step (d) saturated with molybdic ester isrecycled to step (c).7. The process as defined in claim 6, wherein said solvent in step (a) inacetone.8. The process as defined in claim 1, wherein the bottoms in step (a) isfirst calcined at a temperature of less than about 500.degree.C,converting the catalyst therein to MoO.sub.3, which in turn is reactedwith said ammonia in an aqueous solution.9. The process as defined in claim 8 wherein said ammonia reaction in step(a) is at about 40.degree.C and said ammonium molybdate reaction in step(c) is at about 80.degree.C.10. The process as defined in claim 1 wherein said ammonia and water areboiled off in step (c).11. The process as defined in claim 1 wherein the bottoms in step (a) isdirectly treated with an aqueous solution of ammonia, the resultingaqueous phase containing ammonium molybdate is decanted from the organicphase and thereafter treated according to step (c).12. The process as defined in claim 11 wherein the organic phase isdistilled to separate the organic residue from said solvent, which latteris recycled to step (a); wherein said ammonia and water are boiled off instep (c) and thereafter are separated from one another by distillation,said gaseous ammonia being then recycled to step (a); and further whereinexcess diol from step (d) saturated with molybdic ester is recycled tostep (c).13. The process as defined in claim 7 wherein said diol is butane diol-2,3;said olefin is butene-2; said hydroperoxide is t-butyl hydroperoxide; andsaid alcohol is t-butyl alcohol.14. The process as defined in claim 7 wherein said diol is methyl-2-pentanediol-2,3; said olefin is methyl-2-butene-2; said hydroperoxide is t-amylhydroperoxide; and said alcohol is t-amyl alcohol."}
{"WKU":"039310450","Title":"Catalyst activation","App_Date":"1973-05-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Elton E. Rush","Assignee":"Phillips Petroleum Company","ICL_Class":"B01D 1506;B01J 3712","References":"3557238;3558692;3560556;3576891","Claims":"I claim:1. In a process for activating a solid, particulate metal oxide catalyticmaterial which comprises contacting said material with a heated freeoxygen-containing gas, the improvement which comprises emplacing a deposithaving a thickness in the range of about 0.05 inch to about 1 inch of saidparticulate catalytic material on a porous substrate comprising a sinteredmetal; passing a stream of a free oxygen-containing gas through saiddeposit and said porous substrate at a temperature in the approximaterange of 400.degree. to 2,000.degree.F for a period of time sufficient toactivate said catalytic material, said deposit being maintained in aquiescent state during said time period, dislodging the thus activatedcatalytic material from said porous substrate; and separately recoveringsaid activated catalytic material.2. The process of claim 1 wherein said deposit thickness is in theapproximate range of 0.1 inch to 0.4 inch.3. The process of claim 1 wherein said oxygen-containing gas is molecularoxygen.4. The process of claim 1 wherein said oxygen-containing gas is air.5. The process of claim 1 wherein said oxygen-containing gas has asuperficial velocity in the approximate range of 0.01 to 10 feet persecond.6. The process of claim 1 wherein said oxygen-containing gas has asuperficial velocity in the approximate range of 0.05 to 2 feet persecond.7. The process of claim 1 wherein said temperature is in the approximaterange of 800.degree. to 1,800.degree.F.8. The process of claim 1 wherein said time period of activation is in theapproximate range of 1 to 20 hours.9. The process of claim 1 wherein said catalytic material is a chromiumoxide-based catalyst, said deposit thickness is 0.2 inch, said temperatureis 1,650.degree.F, said time is 12 hours and said oxygen-containing gas isair.10. The process of claim 1 wherein said porous substrate is a cylinder.11. The process of claim 1 wherein the pressure drop across said depositand said substrate is not more than 280 inches of water."}
{"WKU":"039310469","Title":"V-P-Zr catalysts and method of preparation thereof in the absence of","App_Date":"1974-04-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Benjamin Weinstein;Anthony T. Jurewicz;Lewis Brewster Young","Assignee":"Mobil Oil Corporation","ICL_Class":"B01J 2718","References":"2773921;3156705;3293268;3684741;3832359","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method for preparing a vanadium-phosphorus-zirconium catalystcomposite that consists essentially of:a. forming an aqueous mixture of V.sub.2 O.sub.5, VOCl.sub.3,VO(NO.sub.3).sub.3, NH.sub.4 VO.sub.3, or VF.sub.5 and a lower dialkylphosphonate, in a P/V atomic ratio of 0.5, refluxing said mixture forbetween about 0.5 hour and 5 hours;b. adding ZrOCl.sub.2.4H.sub.2 O, ZrOCl.sub.2.8H.sub.2 O,ZrO(OAc).sub.2.H.sub.2 O, ZrCl.sub.4, Zr(OAc).sub.4, Na.sub.2 ZrCl.sub.6,or ZrOBr.sub.2.XH.sub.2 O, in a Zr/V atomic ratio of between about 0.0025and about 0.5, continuing refluxing for between about 0.5 hour and about 5hours;c. adding phosphoric acid or a compound hydrolyzable to phosphoric acid, ina P/V atomic ratio of between about 0.6 and about 1, continuing refluxingfor between about 0.5 hour and about 5 hours to form a slurry; andd. drying said slurry.2. The method of claim 1, wherein said lower dialkyl phosphonate isdimethyl phosphonate.3. The method of claim 1, wherein said zirconium salt is zirconyl acetate.4. The method of claim 2, wherein said zirconium salt is zirconyl acetate."}
{"WKU":"039310477","Title":"Catalyst composition for room temperature vulcanizing silicone","App_Date":"1974-10-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert A. Smith","Assignee":"General Electric Company","ICL_Class":"B01J 3112","References":"3019204;3865759","Claims":"I claim:1. A catalyst composition for room temperature vulcanizing silicone rubbercompositions, said catalyst composition comprising:i. a stannous carboxylate of a branched chain alkyl carboxylic acid havingfrom about eight to about 12 carbon atoms in the alkyl chain; and, as astabilizing carrier therefor,ii. a fluid organopolysiloxane composition having an average formula:"}
{"WKU":"039310485","Title":"Hydrocarbon conversion catalytic composite","App_Date":"1974-05-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Lee Hilfman","Assignee":"Universal Oil Products Company","ICL_Class":"B01J 2906;C10G 1302","References":"3216922;3433748;3472791","Claims":"1. A catalytic composite comprising a combination of a nickel component,and a tungsten component with a silica-alumina carrier material whereinsaid carrier material is co-gelled silica-alumina consisting of from about43 percent to about 57 percent by weight alumina and from about 57 to 43percent by weight silica and wherein said components are present inamounts sufficient to result in the composite containing, on an elementalbasis, about 2 to about 10 percent by weight of the nickel component and2. A catalytic composite as defined in claim 1 wherein said carriermaterial consists of 50 percent by weight of alumina and wherein saidcomposite contains, on an elemental basis, about 7 to about 9 percent byweight of nickel and about 17 to about 19 percent by weight of tungsten.3. A catalytic composite comprising a combination of the catalyticcomposite of claim 1 with a sulfur component in amounts sufficient toincorporate about 0.05 to about 1 weight percent sulfur, calculated on anelemental basis."}
{"WKU":"039310493","Title":"Method for producing a catalyst","App_Date":"1974-12-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James A. Ford;Sheldon H. Butt","Assignee":"Olin Corporation","ICL_Class":"B01J 2934","References":"3718733;3773894","Claims":"1. A method for producing a catalyst comprising the steps of:A. providing a nickel alloy substrate, said alloy containing from 2 to 6%aluminum, from 0.5 to 4% silicon and the balance essentially nickel;B. applying to said substrate a layer of a surface material of copper or acopper alloy by electroplating, said layer having a thickness of from1,000 A to 0.1 inch; andC. heat treating the substrate-surface layer combination at a temperatureof from 750.degree. to 1050.degree.C for from 5 minutes to 4 hours in anatmosphere nonoxidizing to nickel, whereby the surface layer and thesubstrate interdiffuse so that the ratio of nickel to copper at the2. A method as in claim 1 wherein the copper concentration at the surface3. A method as in claim 1 wherein said nickel alloy substrate contains from.001 to .4% manganese and from .001 to .1% magnesium in addition to the4. A method as in claim 1 wherein the nickel alloy substrate contains from5. A method as in claim 1 wherein the nickel alloy substrate contains from6. A method as in claim 1 wherein the nickel alloy substrate contains from7. A method as in claim 1 including the steps of heating the heat treatedsubstrate-surface layer combination in an oxidizing atmosphere at atemperature of between 200.degree. and 600.degree.C for a time period of8. A method as in claim 1 including the step of forming the substrate into9. A method as in claim 1 wherein the copper layer is formed byelectroplating alternate layers of copper and nickel until the desiredthickness is obtained."}
{"WKU":"039310507","Title":"Catalyst for purifying exhaust gas from vehicles","App_Date":"1974-04-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Mitsuru Asano;Minoru Ohta;Masami Oki","Assignee":"Nippon Soken, Inc.;Nippondenso Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"B01J 2104;B01J 2340;B01J 2364","References":"3397154;3615166;3741725;3839224","Claims":"1. A catalyst for purifying exhaust gas from vehicles, which comprises amonolithic carrier having a plurality of exhaust gas passages penetratingthrough the carrier, a layer of active refractory metallic oxide selectedfrom the group consisting of .gamma.-alumina, magnesium oxide, berylliumoxide and thorium oxide containing a catalytic metal of the platinum groupdeposited as first layer on inside surfaces of said plurality of thepassages, and a layer of exhaust gas-permeable refractory metallic oxideselected from the group consisting of .gamma.-alumina, magnesium oxide,beryllium oxide, thorium oxide, lanthanum oxide, barium oxide and lithiumoxide free from said catalytic metal deposited as an outermost layer2. A catalyst according to claim 1, wherein the catalytic metal comprise at3. A catalyst according to claim 1 including also at least one oxide of4. A catalyst according to claim 1, wherein 1 to 20 % by weight of thecatalytic metal is contained in the first layer on the basis of the weightof the active refractory metallic oxide layer containing the catalytic5. A catalyst according to claim 1, wherein the catalytic metal isplatinum, and the active refractory metallic oxide and the exhaust6. A catalyst according to claim 4, wherein an amount of the.gamma.-alumina as the active refractory metallic oxide is four to 307. A catalyst according to claim 1, wherein the catalytic metal is amixture of platinum and ruthenium, and the active refractory metal oxideand the exhaust gas-permeable refractory metal oxide are .gamma.-alumina.8. A catalyst according to claim 1 wherein the catalytic metal consists of9. A catalyst according to claim 1 wherein the catalytic metal is a mixture10. A catalyst according to claim 1 wherein the catalytic metal is amixture of platinum and at least one oxide of nickel, iron, cobalt, copperor chromium."}
{"WKU":"039310515","Title":"Catalyst for the oxidation of ammonia","App_Date":"1974-08-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Horst Dubler","Assignee":"Deutsche Gold- und Silber-Scheideanstalt vormals Roessler","ICL_Class":"B01J 2104;B01J 2364","References":"1927963","Claims":"1. A catalyst gauze packet suitable for use in the oxidation of ammonia tonitrogen oxide wherein 20 to 100 percent of the individual gauzes in thepacket consist essentially of wires of platinum-rhodium alloy and wires ofan oxidation-resistant, heat-resistant non-noble metal alloy, and thebalance of the individual gauzes consist essentially of wires of2. The catalyst packet according to claim 1, wherein all of the individualgauzes contain both platinum-rhodium alloy wires and the non-noble metal3. The catalyst packet according to claim 1, wherein some of the individual4. The catalyst packet according to claim 1 wherein the non-noble metal5. The catalyst packet according to claim 4 wherein the non-noble metalalloy consists essentially of iron containing 20 to 25 percent chromium6. The catalyst packet according to claim 1, wherein the non-noble metal7. The catalyst packet according to claim 1, wherein the non-noble metal8. The catalyst packet according to claim 1, wherein the warp of the gauzefabric consists of both wires of platinum-rhodium-alloy and wires ofnon-noble metal alloy and the weft wires consist of either9. The catalyst of claim 1 wherein the individual gauzes of the gauze10. The catalyst of claim 1, wherein the platinum-rhodium alloy contains up11. The catalyst of claim 10 wherein the platinum-rhodium alloy contains 10percent rhodium and the non-noble metal alloy contains 23 percentchromium, 4 percent aluminum and balance iron."}
{"WKU":"039310523","Title":"Alumina-supported catalyst for residua demetalation and desulfurization","App_Date":"1975-03-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Stephen M. Oleck;Thomas R. Stein;Howard S. Sherry;Donald Milstein","Assignee":"Mobil Oil Corporation","ICL_Class":"B01J 2316;B01J 2374;B01J 2306","References":"3712861;3798156;3814683;3876523;3876680;3891541","Claims":"1. A hydrodemetalation-desulfurization catalyst comprising : at least onemetal selected from the group consisting of Group VI-B metals, Group VIIImetals and zinc composited with an alumina base, said composite catalysthaving not less than about 65 percent of the volume of the pores with adiameter within the range of about 180A to about 300A, and further havinga surface area of about 40 m.sup.2 /g to about 100 m.sup.2 /g, and an2. The catalyst as claimed in claim 1 wherein said catalyst has a surface3. The catalyst as claimed in claim 1, said hydrogenating componentconsists essentially of about 2 to about 10 percent by weight cobalt and4. The catalyst of claim 3, the pore volume distribution being furtherdefined according to pore diameter as follows: 0 to 20 percent in the0-80A range, 0 to 30 percent in the 80A-180A range, 65 to 75 percent inthe 180A-300A range and 0 to 20 percent in the range greater than 300A.5. The catalyst as claimed in claim 4 wherein said alumina is in the theta6. The catalyst as claimed in claim 4 wherein said alumina is in the delta7. The catalyst as claimed in claim 4 wherein said alumina is a mixture of8. The catalyst as claimed in claim 4 wherein said alumina is produced bycalcining an alpha monohydrate to a temperature of about 1700.degree.F toabout 2000.degree.F."}
{"WKU":"039310531","Title":"Catalyst for conversion of hydrocarbons and method of preparing same","App_Date":"1974-04-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Evgeny Vasilievich Kazakov;Igor Fedorovich Balitsky;Viktor Stanislavovich Sobolevsky;Vladimir Petrovich Semenov;Galina Nikiforovna Kashirina;Natalya Alexandrovna Kruglikova;Viktor Ivanovich Yagodkin;Mikhail Arkadievich Shpolyansky;Sergei Ivanovich Ruzinsky;Igor Dmitrievich Gorbachevich;Ivan Emanuilovich Gergert","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B01J 2104;B01J 2378","References":"3533963;3549556;3839223;3840356","Claims":"1. A catalyst for conversion of hydrocarbons consisting of a mixture of2. A catalyst for conversion of hydrocarbons according to claim 1, havingthe following composition, in per cent by weight:"}
{"WKU":"039310540","Title":"Method of catalyst manufacture","App_Date":"1974-04-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"George R. Lester","Assignee":"Universal Oil Products Company","ICL_Class":"B01J 2356;B01J 2374;B01J 2104","References":"3259454;3367888","Claims":"I claim as my invention:1. A method of manufacturing a catalytic composite which comprises:(a) commingling a refractory inorganic oxide carrier material in animpregnating solution with a metal component selected from the groupconsisting of iron group metal salt, noble metal salt and noble metal acidand from about 0.05 to about 0.75 wt. % dibasic carboxylic acid having thefollowing structural formula:##EQU2##where: R is selected from hydrogen, hydroxyl and alkyl groups;R.sup.1 is selected from hydrogen, alkyl and carboxyl groups; andn is within the range of 0-6b. maintaining said carrier material in said solution for a period of fromabout 2 to about 10 minutes, thereafter commingling from about 0.1 toabout 1.5 wt. % sulfur-containing carboxylic acid with said solution,based on the weight of said carrier material, said sulfur-containing acidbeing selected from the group consisting of thiomalic, thioglycolic andmercaptopropionic acids, and effecting the deposition of said metalcomponent concentrated in a thin subsurface layer on the carrier material;c. thereafter washing, drying and calcining the impregnated carriermaterial.2. The method of claim 1 further characterized in that said dibasiccarboxylic acid is citric acid.3. The method of claim 1 further characterized in that saidsulfur-containing carboxylic acid is thiomalic acid.4. The method of claim 1 further characterized in that said metal componentis a noble metal salt or noble metal acid.5. The method of claim 1 further characterized in that said metal componentis a platinum salt or platinum acid.6. The method of claim 1 further characterized in that said metal componentis a platinum salt or platinum acid in combination with a palladium saltor palladium acid.7. The method of claim 1 further characterized in that said metal componentcomprises palladium salt or palladium acid in combination with platinum ina weight ratio of from about 9:1 to about 1:4, in an amount to yield afinal catalytic composite containing from about 0.0025 to about 2.0 wt. %of the palladium-platinum combination.8. The method of claim 1 further characterized in that said refractoryinorganic oxide carrier material is a low density, spheroidal alumina witha surface area of from about 25 to about 600 square meters per gram.9. The method of claim 1 further characterized in that said impregnatedcarrier material is dried and calcined at a temperature of from about200.degree. to about 1000.degree. C. or more."}
{"WKU":"039310558","Title":"Electrically conducting ceramic to metal seal, particularly for","App_Date":"1973-08-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Karl-Hermann Friese","Assignee":"Robert Bosch G.m.b.H.","ICL_Class":"H01B  104","References":"3226342;3538021;3567658","Claims":"I claim:1. An electrically conducting material for ceramic to metal seals,particularly suitable for spark plugs, said material being composed ofglass granules and of a conducting powder composed principally of carbonblack in its powder form and containing no substantial amount of a metalother than not more than 5% by volume of a powdered metal capable offorming a carbide between 750.degree. and 950.degree.C and other than notmore than 5% by volume of a metal melting at a temperature not higher thanthe melting point of zinc (419.degree.C), said material being mixedtogether and sintered in place and exhibiting, with reference to acylindrical body of about 4.5 mm diameter and about 4.5 mm length, aresistance between 0.5 and 50 Ohms.2. A ceramic to metal seal material as defined in claim 1 in which theconducting material is thermal black.3. A ceramic to metal seal material as defined in claim 2 in which saidthermal black has a specific surface of 5 to 15 square meters per gram.4. A ceramic to metal seal material as defined in claim 3 in which thematerial as prepared contains carbon black in a proportion of between 10and 40% by volume.5. A ceramic to metal seal material as defined in claim 4 in which theglass component has a thermal expansion coefficient equal to or smallerthan 6 .times. 10.sup.-.sup.6 /.degree.C.6. A ceramic to metal seal material as defined in claim 5 in which theglass component is a borosilicate glass with or without a minor content ofoxides of one or more of the metals in the group consisting of lithium,calcium and barium.7. A ceramic to metal seal material as defined in claim 6 in which there isalso present an additional material that is inert with respect to glassand to carbon black and cooperates with the glass and the carbon black toprovide an average thermal expansion coefficient for the material, whichapproximates that of the surrounding ceramic.8. A ceramic to metal seal material as defined in claim 7 in which saidinert component is a material selected from the group consisting ofcorundum, mullite, zirconium dioxide, silicon carbide, titanium carbide,boron nitride, titanium nitride and zirconium nitride.9. A ceramic to metal seal material as defined in claim 7 suited for usewith high alumina ceramic materials, which material contains graphite aspart of its inert component.10. A ceramic to metal seal material as defined in claim 8 in which theinert component is present in a proportion between 0.5 and 15% by volume.11. A ceramic to metal seal material as defined in claim 1 in which, inorder to prevent a rise of resistance under prolonged stress in sparkservice, there is included as a component the powder of a metal having amelting point not higher than the melting point of zinc, in a proportionbetween 0.5 and 5.0% by volume.12. A ceramic to metal seal material as defined in claim 1 in which thereis provided for prevention of rise of resistance by prolonged stress inspark service, a component consisting of the powder of a metal capable offorming a carbide between 750.degree. and 950.degree.C, said metal powderbeing incorporated in the material in a proportion between 0.5 and 5.0% byvolume.13. A process for preparing a sealing material for ceramic to metal sealscomprising the steps of:wetting glass powder with a water solution or emulsion of an organic binderselected from the group consisting of dextrin, methyl cellulose, wax andcombinations of two or more of them, and thencoating the particles of said glass powder over a substantial part of theirrespective surfaces with smaller particles of carbon black no greater thanone-tenth the size of the particles of the glass powder by mixing thewetted glass particles with a finely divided material of which at least85% consists of the aforesaid carbon black particles and the remainderconsists of particles of non-metallic inert material selected from thegroup consisting of corundum, mullite, zirconium dioxide, silicon carbide,titanium carbide, boron nitride, titanium nitride and zirconium nitride,the particles of said inert material being of a size likewise no greaterthan one-tenth the size of the particles of the glass powder.14. A process as defined in claim 13 in which the finely divided materialwith which the glass particles are mixed constitutes not more than 40% ofthe mixture by volume and contains between 0.5 and 15% by volume of saidinert nonmetallic material.15. A process for preparing a sealing material for ceramic to metal sealscomprising the steps of:wetting glass powder with a water solution or emulsion of an organic binderselected from the group consisting of dextrin, methyl cellulose, wax andcombinations of two or more of them, and thencoating the particles of said glass powder over a substantial part of theirrespective surfaces with smaller particles of carbon black no greater thanone-tenth the size of the particles of the glass powder by mixing thewetted glass particles with a finely divided material constituting between10 and 40% by volume of the complete mixture, said finely divided materialconsisting of at least 85% by volume of the said carbon black particles,between 0.5 and 5% by volume of the mixture of a component for preventingincrease of resistance in sparkplug service, selected from the groupconsisting of powdered zinc, powdered tin, powdered aluminum and powderediron, and the remainder consisting of particles of nonmetallic inertmaterial selected from the group consisting of graphite, corundum,mullite, zirconium dioxide, silicon carbide, titanium carbide, boronnitride, titanium nitride and zirconium nitride, all the particles of saidfinely divided material being of a size no greater than one-tenth the sizeof the particles of the glass powder.16. A ceramic to metal seal as defined in claim 11 in which said metalhaving a melting point not higher than the melting point of zinc is ametal selected from the group consisting of zinc and tin.17. A ceramic to metal seal as defined in claim 12 in which said metalcapable of forming a carbide is a metal selected from the group consistingof aluminum and iron."}
{"WKU":"039310566","Title":"Solid diffusion sources for phosphorus doping containing silicon and","App_Date":"1974-08-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Thomas A. Myles;Curtis E. Zimmer","Assignee":"The Carborundum Company","ICL_Class":"H01B  106;C04B 3548;C04B 3502;H01L  736","References":"2794846;3354005;3473980;3514348;3540951;3630793;3849344;3852086","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A solid phosphorus containing source body for semiconductor diffusiondoping, said body consisting essentially of from about 5 to about 95percent by weight of silicon pyrophosphate and from about 95 to about 5percent by weight of zirconium pyrophosphate.2. A solid phosphorus body as set forth in claim 1 consisting essentiallyof from about 25 to about 75 percent by weight silicon pyrophosphate andfrom about 25 to about 75 percent by weight zirconium pyrophosphate.3. A method for the formation of solid phosphorus diffusion bodiescomprising preparing a blend consisting essentially of from 5 to 95 weightpercent SiP.sub.2 O.sub.7 with from 95 to 5 weight percent ZrP.sub.2O.sub.7, cold-pressing a portion of said blend to thereby form a shapedunfired body, and sintering said body at a temperature of from about1080.degree.C to about 1200.degree.C.4. A method as set forth in claim 3 wherein said cold-pressing is conductedat a pressure of from about 4,000 psi to about 20,000 psi.5. A method as set forth in claim 4 wherein said blend consists essentiallyof SiP.sub.2 O .sub.7 and ZrP.sub.2 O.sub.7 in 1:1 proportions.6. A method as set forth in claim 5 wherein said sintering is conducted ata temperature of from about 1090.degree.C to about 1120.degree.C, and saidcold-pressing is conducted at a pressure of from about 10,000 psi to about12,000 psi.7. A method for preparing phosphorus dopants comprising SiP.sub.2 O.sub.7,said method comprising the steps of:a. forming a blend of from about 5 to about 95 weight percent SiP.sub.2O.sub.7, the balance ZrP.sub.2 O.sub.7 ;b. adding to said blend a volatilizable organic binder;c. pressing said blend containing said binder at a pressure of from 4,000psi to 20,000 psi to form a wafer of the desired dimensions; andd. firing said wafer at an elevated temperature to volatilize said binderand form a porous wafer consisting essentially of SiP.sub.2 O.sub.7 andZrP.sub.2 O.sub.7.8. A method as set forth in claim 7 wherein said SiP.sub.2 O.sub.7 isessentially free of any Si.sub.2 P.sub.2 O.sub.9.9. A method as set forth in claim 8 wherein said pressing is at a pressureof from about 10,000 psi to 12,000 psi and said firing temperature is fromabout 1080.degree.C to about 1190.degree.C.10. A method as set forth in claim 9 wherein the initial blend consists offrom 25 to 75 weight percent SiP.sub.2 O.sub.7, the balance beingZrP.sub.2 O.sub.7."}
{"WKU":"039310574","Title":"Surfactant compositions","App_Date":"1973-12-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Shih K. Liu","Assignee":"Monsanto Company","ICL_Class":"C11D  112;C11D  168","References":"1897741;2241421;2275413;2808442;3017437;3242200;3256155;3607778","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A composition comprising at least 75% by weight of a mixture ofcompounds represented by the formula##EQU3##wherein X is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and SO.sub.3M, the X group being the same in substantially all of said compounds,wherein M is selected from the group consisting of alkali metals andammonium, and R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are each selected from the groupconsisting of hydrogen and linear alkyl groups containing from 1 to 15carbon atoms, at least one of R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 being an alkyl group andthe total number of carbon atoms in R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 being from 14 to15 and the weight ratio of compounds in which the number of carbon atomsin R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 is 14 to compounds in which the number of carbonatoms in R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 is 15 being from 1:4 to 3:2.2. The composition of claim 1 wherein X is SO.sub.3 M.3. A detergent formulation consisting essentially of, as a surfactant, atleast 2% by weight of a mixture of alkane vicinal methyl ether sulfatecompounds represented by the formula##EQU4##wherein M is selected from the group consisting of alkali metals andammonium and R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are each selected from the groupconsostomg of hydrogen and linear alkyl groups containing from 1 to 15carbon atoms, at least one of R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 being an alkyl group andthe total number of carbon atoms in R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 being from 14 to15 and the weight ratio of compounds in which the number of carbon atomsin R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 is 14 to compounds in which the number of carbonatoms in R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 is 15 being from 1:4 to 3:2 and a detergencybuilder, the ratio of surfactant to detergency builder being from about10:1 to about 1:10."}
{"WKU":"039310582","Title":"Polyglycidyl compounds, processes for their manufacture and use","App_Date":"1973-12-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hans Batzer;Juerger Habermeier;Daniel Porret","Assignee":"Ciba-Geigy AG","ICL_Class":"C08G 5428","References":"2730531;3562274","Claims":"We claim:1. A curable mixture which is suitable for the manufacture of moldings,including sheet-like structures, consisting essentially of a polyglycidylcompound of the formula:##EQU11##wherein A is phenyl or a phenyl substituted with at least one methyl,methoxy, trifluoromethyl or nitro group; and X is methyl or hydrogen and acuring agent for said epoxide resin."}
{"WKU":"039310590","Title":"Process for preparing polycarbodiimide foams in the presence of","App_Date":"1974-08-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Andrea La Spina;Werner Dietrich;Reinhard Schliebs","Assignee":"Bayer Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C08G 1814;C08G 1816","References":"3657161;3717596;3723364;3723366;3728289;3746709;3766103","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a process for making a rigid foam plastic which contains carbodiimidegroups from an organic polyisocyanate, the improvement which comprisesincludig a catalytic amount of an addition compound ofa. a phosphetane oxide or phosphetane sulphide of the general formulae Iand II##EQU10##wherein X denotes a C.sub.1 -C.sub.18 alkyl, C.sub.2 -C.sub.18 alkenyl,C.sub.6 -C.sub.14 aryl, C.sub.7 -C.sub.20 aralkyl, C.sub.1 -C.sub.18alkoxy or C.sub.6 -C.sub.14 aroxy group andR.sup.1 to R.sup.6 denote hydrogen and/or C.sub.1 -C.sub.4 alkyl groups andb. a mono-, di- and/or polyhydric alcohol with a molecular weight of about32 to about 250, a protonic acid which has a pH of between 1 and 8 in N/10aqueous solution, a metal salt or an acid chloride and allowing thepolyisocyanate to react.2. The process of claim 1 wherein up to 50 equivalents percent, based onthe quantity of isocyanate, of a compound with a molecular weight of about62 to about 10,000, which contains at least two hydrogen atoms which arereactive with isocyanates are included in the reaction mixture.3. The process of claim 1 wherein from about 0.5 to 20% by weight, based onthe quantity of isocyanate, of a catalyst which forms isocyanurate groupsis included in the reaction mixture.4. The process of claimm 1 wherein the polyisocyanate is an undistilledphosgenation product of tolylene diamine or a mixture of tolylene-2,4-and/or -2,6-diisocyanate and 5% to 60% by weight of the distillationresidue obtained from the production of tolylene diisocyanate.5. The process of claim 1 wherein the polyisocyanate is a mixture ofpolyisocyanates obtained by the condensation of aniline with formaldehydefollowed by phosgenation and 5% to 50% by weight, of the distillationresidue obtained from the production of tolylene diisocyanate.6. The process of claim 1 wherein a mixture which is stable when stored atroom temperature containing the polyisocyanate and the catalyst is heatedto 40.degree. to 200.degree.C to start foaming.7. A process of making a polycarbodiimide foam from an organicpolyisocyanate which comprises heating the polyisocyanate in the presenceof a catalytic amount of an addition compound of a phosphetane orphosphetane sulphide and an alcohol, a protonic acid adapted to form aN/10 aqueous solution having a pH of 1 to 8, a metal salt or an acidchloride.8. The process of claim 7 wherein a blowing agent, an organicpolyisocyanate and a compound having at least two hydrogen atomsdetermined by the Zerewitinoff method are heated to form apolycarbodiimide-polyurethane or polyurea foam."}
{"WKU":"039310604","Title":"Polyurethane foam free from internal discoloration","App_Date":"1974-08-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Rudiger Schubart;Ulrich Nehen;Ernst Roos;Manfred Dahm","Assignee":"Bayer Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C08G 1830;C08K  513;C08K  547","References":"3214397;3446779;3485778;3536663;3634315;3635862;3700750;3703489;3715381;3772218","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a process for producing a polyurethane foam which is substantiallyfree from discoloration at the center thereof from a foamable mixturecontaining an organic polyisocyanate, an organic compound which containsat least 2 active hydrogen atoms, a blowing agent and a catalyst for thereaction between the polyisocyanate and the said organic compound, theimprovement which comprises effecting the reaction in the presence of asufficient amount in effective proportions ofa. a heterocyclic mercapto compound of the general formula##SPC12##in whichX = --O--, --S--, --NH--, --N--(C.sub.1 -C.sub.12)--alkyl, --N--(C.sub.5-C.sub.6)--cycloalkyl-----N--phenyl, --N--(C.sub.7 014 C.sub.12)--aralkyl,--N--(C.sub.7 -C.sub.12)--alkyl--aryl-- or --N--CO--(C.sub.1-C.sub.6)--alkyl,"}
{"WKU":"039310612","Title":"Blushed polystyrene pigment","App_Date":"1974-12-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Harry F. Kohne, Jr.;Frederick L. Kurrle","Assignee":"Westvaco Corporation","ICL_Class":"C08J  900","References":"3255127;3371053;3472801","Claims":"We claim:1. A composition of matter comprising a synthetic opaque polystyrenepigment prepared from a polystyrne emulsion and consisting essentially ofexpanded spherical particles that are optically efficient in the absenceof mineral matter, characterized as:1. having an air containing microporous structure as a result of thepresence of air-solid interfaces within the individual particles;2. having an average ultimate particle diameter in the range of from about0.10 and 0.20 micron;3. having a G.E. Bulk brightness of about 99.7; and,4. having a scattering coefficient of from about 0.41 to 0.48 when appliedto cellophane with a 2% solution of sodium carboxymethylcellulose at acoat weight of from about 2.3 to 12.0 pounds per ream.2. A composition of matter comprising a synthetic opaque polystyrenecontaining pigment prepared from a polystyrene containing emulsion andconsisting essentially of expanded spherical particles that are opticallyefficient in the absence of mineral matter, characterized as:1. having an air containing microporous structure as a result of thepresence of air-solid interfaces within the individual particles;2. having an average ultimate particle diameter in the range of from about0.10 to 0.20 micron;3. having a G.E. Bulk Brightness of about 99.4; and,4. having a scattering coefficient of from about 0.45 to 0.42 when appliedto cellophane with a 2% solution of sodium carboxymethylcellulose at acoat weight of from about 3.5 to 11.7 pounds per ream."}
{"WKU":"039310620","Title":"Flexible hot-molded flame retardant polyurethane foams","App_Date":"1973-11-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"David Stanley Cobbledick","Assignee":"The General Tire & Rubber Company","ICL_Class":"C08G 1814;C08G 1862;C08K  322;C08K  326","References":"3102875;3476121;3574149;3644229;3661862;3714077;3718611;3737400;3857802","Claims":"I claim:1. In the method of making a flexible or semi-flexible hot-molded lowdensity, fire retardant polyurethane foam by the reaction of (A) apolyetherpolyol having from two to four hydroxyl groups and having amolecular weight of from about 1,000 to 10,000, (B) an organicpolyisocyanate and (C) a blowing agent comprising water in admixture with(D) a surfactant, (E) a catalyst comprising from about 0.05 to 3.2 partsby weight per 100 parts by weight of said polyol of a tertiary amine andfrom 0.1 to 0.9 part by weight per 100 parts by weight of said polyol of atin-containing polyurethane catalyst (F) from about 1 to 50 parts byweight per 100 parts by weight of said polyol of a finely divided, solidchlorine-containing polymeric resin containing an average of from 0.4 to 1chlorine atom per carbon and having an intrinsic viscosity of from about0.25 to 2.5 as measured in 0.3 percent by weight solution in cyclohexanoneat 25.degree.C., (G) finely divided zinc oxide in an amount of from about0.1 to 10 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight of said polyol (A), (H)finely divided antimony trioxide in an amount of from about 0.5 to 15parts by weight per 100 parts by weight of said polyol (A), and,optionally, (J) a chlorinated paraffin having an average molecular weightof from about 250 to 1400 and containing from about 40 to 70% by weight ofchlorine, using the one-shot prepolymer process, the improvment comprisingincorporating in said formulation from 0.5 to 2.5 parts by weight per 100parts by weight of polyetherpolyol (A) of at least one compound selectedfrom the class consisting of oxides, hydroxides and basic salts of metalsfrom Group 2a of the Periodic Table of the Elements, said metals havingatomic numbers of 12 to 20 inclusive, said compounds having an averageparticle size of from about 0.05 to 200 microns, any magnesium oxidehaving an activity number of 0 to about 60, there being at least 0.05 partby weight of said compounds in any premix of components containing atleast 10 parts by weight of polyetherpolyol (A).2. The method according to claim 1 in which the polyol (A) is apolyalkylene ether polyol.3. The method according to claim 2 in which the resin (F) is selected fromthe group consisting of polyvinyl chloride, a copolymer of a major amountof vinyl chloride and a minor amount of vinyl acetate, a partiallyhydrolyzed copolymer of a major amount of vinyl chloride and a minoramount of vinyl acetate, and chlorinated polyethylene, and is used in anamount of from about 2 to 25 parts by weight, the zinc oxide (G) is usedin amount of from about 0.2 to 5 parts by weight and the antimony trioxide(H) is used in an amount of from about 1 to 10 parts by weight, theamounts of said (F), (G) and (H) being based on 100 parts by weight ofsaid polyol.4. A flexible or semi-flexible hot-molded low density, fire retardantpolyetherurethane foam, the ether moieties of said foam being derived frompolyetherpolyols having from two to four hydroxyl groups and having amolecular weight of from about 1,000 to 10,000, said foam containing fromabout 1 to 50 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight of said polyol of afinely divided, solid chlorine-containing polymeric resin containing anaverage of from 0.4 to 1 chlorine atom per carbon and having an intrinsicviscosity of from about 0.25 to 2.5 as measured in 0.3 percent by weightsolution in cyclohexanone at 25.degree.C., finely divided zinc oxide in anamount of from about 0.1 to 10 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight ofsaid polyol, finely divided antimony trioxide in an amount of from about0.5 to 15 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight of said polyol, and,optionally, a chlorinated paraffin having an average molecular weight offrom about 250 to 1400 and containing from about 40 to 70% by weight ofchlorine, said foam being particularly characterized in containing from0.05 to 2.5 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight of polyetherpolyol ofat least one compound selected from the class consisting of oxides,hydroxides and basic salts of metals from Group 2a of the Periodic Tableof the Elements, said metals having atomic numbers of 12 to 20 inclusive,said compounds having an average particle size of from about 0.05 to 200microns, any magnesium oxide having an activity number of 0 to about 60.5. The method according to claim 3 wherein said Group 2a metals are presentas carbonates.6. The method according to claim 3 wherein said Group 2a metals are presentas compounds selected from the group consisting of calcium carbonate,magnesium carbonate and magnesium oxide.7. The method according to claim 6 wherein said Group 2a metal ismagnesium.8. A composition according to claim 4 wherein said Group 2a metals arepresent as compounds selected from the group consisting of calciumcarbonate, magnesium carbonate and magnesium oxide.9. A composition according to claim 8 wherein said Group 2a metal ismagnesium."}
{"WKU":"039310639","Title":"Process for the manufacture of porous solids consisting of crosslinked","App_Date":"1974-03-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Alfred Renner","Assignee":"Ciba-Geigy AG","ICL_Class":"C08J  900;C08L  126","References":"3553115;3712879","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for the manufacture of porous more or less agglomeratedindividual particles of crosslinked urea-formaldehyde polycondensationproducts having an internal surface area greater than 10 m.sup.2 /g andhaving a tendency to become agglomerated which comprises forming anaqueous solution of urea and formaldehyde or of a precondensate of ureaand formaldehyde, adjusting the pH of the resulting solution at atemperature of between room temperature and 100.degree.C to a pH value of1.2- 1.5 by adding a Bronsted acid having a dissociation constant of notless than 1 .times. 10.sup.-.sup.6 so as to form a precipitate, the molarratio of formaldehyde:urea being at least 0.5 and at most 1.0 not laterthan at the time of precipitation, separating off the resultantprecipitate and drying.2. A process as claimed in claim 1, wherein sulphamic acid or awater-soluble ammonium hydrogen sulphate of formula"}
{"WKU":"039310647","Title":"Polymer foams","App_Date":"1974-05-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Neil Hunter Ray;Bruce Cochran Lane;Bryan Shaw","Assignee":"Imperial Chemical Industries Limited","ICL_Class":"C08K  340;C08K  529;C08K  534","References":"3243388;3365315;3625872;3725319;3816307;3826764","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A composition comprising an isocyanate-based polymeric foam materialselected from polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, andpolyurethane/polyisocyanurate foam materials and produced by reacting afoamable liquid mixture of a polyisocyanate containing two or moreisocyanate groups and a compound containing two or more groups reactivewith isocyanate groups, and dispersed in said foam material inorganicoxide glass powder having a particle size in the range 0.1 to 300 micronsthe inorganic oxide glass having a transformation temperature of notgreater than 300.degree.C.2. A composition as claimed in claim 1 in which the foam material is arigid foam material.3. A composition as claimed in claim 1 in which the foam material is apolyurethane foam.4. A composition as claimed in claim 1 in which the inorganic oxide glassis a phosphate glass comprising at least 25 mole % of P.sub.2 O.sub.5.5. A composition as claimed in claim 4 in which the inorganic oxide glasscomprises at least 50 mole % of P.sub.2 O.sub.5.6. A composition as claimed in claim 5 in which the inorganic oxide glasscomprises from 1.2 to 3.5 mole % of B.sub.2 O.sub.3.7. A composition as claimed in claim 5 in which the inorganic oxide glassconsists essentially of the following components, in mole % and excludingwater which may be present, B.sub.2 O.sub.3 1.2 to 3.5, P.sub.2 O.sub.5 50to 72, PbO 0 to 30, transition metal oxides 0 to 5, and the remainder, ifany, being oxides selected from alkali metal oxides, alkaline earth metaloxides and zinc oxide.8. A composition as claimed in claim 7 in which the inorganic oxide glassconsists essentially of the following components, in mole% and excludingwater, B.sub.2 O.sub.3 1.2 to 3.5, P.sub.2 O.sub.5 58 to 70, PbO less than15, transition metal oxide 0 to 5, the remainder being oxides selectedfrom alkali metal oxides, alkaline earth metal oxides and zinc oxide.9. A composition as claimed in claim 1 in which the inorganic oxide glassin present in the form of particles having a size in the range 0.1 to 25microns.10. A composition as claimed in claim 1 in which the inorganic oxide glassis present in a proportion of 10 to 30% by weight of the foam material.11. A composition as claimed in claim 1 in which there is present a blowingagent which is a material which, when heated above a temperature150.degree. to 400.degree.C., decomposes with evolution of a non-flammablegas and does not volatilize or evolve gas during foam formation.12. A composition as claimed in claim 1 in which the blowing agent ispresent in a proportion of from 5 to 10% by weight of the foamed material."}
{"WKU":"039310655","Title":"Polyurethane-modified polyisocyanurate foam and a method for the","App_Date":"1967-02-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kaneyoshi Ashida;Takao Yagi","Assignee":"Nisshin Boseki Kabushiki Kaisha","ICL_Class":"C08G 1814","References":"3179626;3206352;3211704;3252942;3516950","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A method for the preparation of a rigid, highly flame resistantpolyurethane-modified polyisocyanurate foam which comprises reactingA. at least one aromatic polyisocyanate having no orthosubstituent andhaving a plurality of aromatic nuclei in the molecule,B. at least one polyether polyol containing more than 3 hydroxy groups andhaving an equivalent weight of at least 114,C. at least one foaming agent useful for the preparation of polyurethanefoam,D. at least one catalyst useful for the trimerization of the isocyanategroup,E. at least one surfactant andF. at least one flame retardant useful for the preparation of polyurethanefoam, the proportion of said components A, B, C, D, E and F being such asto satisfy the relationships of"}
{"WKU":"039310663","Title":"High resilience polyurethane foam","App_Date":"1974-08-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John E. Puig;Bruce G. VAN Leuwen","Assignee":"Olin Corporation","ICL_Class":"C08G 1814;C08G 1832;C08G 1848;C08K  554","References":"3467606;3630973;3738953;3741917;3741921;3803064;3847844","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a process for preparing a flexible high resilience polyurethane foamfrom a reaction mixture comprised of an organic polyisocyanate, a foamingagent, a reaction catalyst polydimethylsiloxane fluid surfactant, and apolyether polyol reactant characterized by (1) a molecular weight of atleast 4000, (2) a polyhydroxy alcohol nucleus having a functionability of2-4, (3) polyoxyalkylene chain segments attached to said nucleus and (4) aratio of primary to secondary hydroxy groups ranging from about 1.5:1 toabout 6:1, the improvement which comprises including in said reactionmixture a foam stabilizing proportion of a supplemental polyether polyolhaving at least about 30% of primary hydroxy groups, an average of 2-6hydroxy groups, and a hydroxyl number from about 250 to about 800, saidsupplemental polyol being an adduct of alkylene oxide having 2-4 carbonatoms and a mixture selected from the group consisting of a mixture ofdextrose and water, a mixture of dextrose and an aliphatic diol or triol,and a mixture of dextrose, water and an aliphatic diol or triol.2. A polyurethane foam prepared by the process of claim 1.3. The process of claim 1 wherein said polyether polyol reactant is apolyether triol having a molecular weight of about 4500-7500.4. The process of claim 3 wherein said supplemental polyol has a hydroxylnumber of about 300-700 and an average of about 2.5-5 hydroxy groups.5. The process of claim 4 wherein said polyether triol has a ratio ofprimary to secondary hydroxy groups ranging from about 2:1 to about 5:1.6. The process of claim 5 wherein said stabilizing proportion ranges fromabout 0.5 to about 12 parts per every 100 parts by weight of saidpolyether triol.7. The process of claim 6 wherein said supplemental polyol contains about40-100 percent of primary hydroxy groups.8. A polyurethane foam prepared by the process of claim 7.9. The process of claim 7 wherein said polyether triol has a molecularweight of about 5600-6600 and said catalyst is comprised of at least onetertiary amine catalyst.10. The process of claim 9 wherein said surfactant is apolydimethylsiloxane having a viscosity of about 5 centistokes at25.degree.C.11. The process of claim 10 wherein said organic polyisocyanate is toluenediisocyanate or a mixture thereof with polymethylene polyphenylisocyanate.12. The process of claim 11 wherein said supplemental polyol is an adductof propylene oxide or 4,4,4-trichlorobutylene oxide and a mixture ofdextrose with an aliphatic diol or triol.13. A polyurethane foam prepared by the process of claim 12.14. The process of claim 12 wherein said foaming agent is water.15. The process of claim 14 wherein said polyether triol is anoxypropylated oxyethylated glycerin.16. A polyurethane foam prepared by the process of claim 15."}
{"WKU":"039310671","Title":"Hydrophobic microporous materials and process for producing same","App_Date":"1974-08-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Bruce S. Goldberg;Dennis E. Johnson","Assignee":"Amerace Corporation","ICL_Class":"C08K  324;C08K  334;C08K  336;C08K  502","References":"3862030","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for producing a gas permeable hydrophobic article from anormally hydrophobic microporous material characterized by a polymericmatrix and a filler dispersed throughout said matrix forming a pluralityof micropores therein, said filler comprising a compound having an activepolar group, said process comprising the step of reacting the fillercompound dispersed throughout said polymeric matrix with a silane wherebythe contact angle of a water-based liquid deposited on the surface of saidarticle after said reaction is rendered too great to permit wetting ofsaid article therewith.2. The process defined in claim 1 wherein the silane is anorgano-substituted silane.3. The process defined in claim 1 wherein the silane is in liquid formduring said reaction.4. The process of claim 1 wherein the silane is in vapor form during saidreaction.5. The process of claim 1 wherein said silane is dissolved in a solventduring said reaction.6. The process defined in claim 1 wherein the polymeric matrix comprises asynthetic or natural thermosetting polymer or copolymer thereof.7. The process of claim 1 wherein the polymeric matrix comprises athermoplastic polymeric resin or copolymer thereof.8. The process defined in claim 6 wherein said normally hydrophilicmicroporous material is formed by:a. blending together suitable quantities of said thermosetting polymer orcopolymer thereof, a filler compound having an active polar group and acuring agent to form a composition;b. vulcanizing said composition in a pressurized steam ambient; andc. dehydrating the resulting vulcanizate.9. The process defined in claim 8 wherein said thermosetting polymer orcopolymer thereof is natural rubber, said filler compound is silicic acidand said curing agent is sulfur.10. The process defined in claim 7 wherein said normally hydrophilicmicroporous material is formed by:a. blending together suitable quantities of said thermoplastic resin, afiller compound having an active polar group, solvent, and water to form acomposition;b. extruding or molding said composition at room temperature or above toform an extrudate;c. passing said extrudate through an extraction medium to replace saidsolvent therein with said extraction medium; andd. removing said extraction medium from said extrudate.11. The process defined in claim 10 wherein said thermoplastic resin ispolyvinyl chloride, said filler is silicic acid and said extraction mediumis water.12. The reaction product of claim 1.13. The reaction product of claim 2.14. A process for producing a gas permeable hydrophobic article from anormally hydrophilic microporous material characterized by a polymericmatrix and a filler dispersed throughout said matrix forming a pluralityof micropores therein, said filler comprising a compound having an activepolar group, said process comprising the step of reacting the fillercompound dispersed throughout said polymeric matrix with a silazanewhereby the contact angle of a water-based liquid deposited on the surfaceof said article after said reaction is rendered too great to permit thewetting of said article therewith.15. The process defined in claim 14 wherein the silazane is anorgano-substituted silazane.16. The process defined in claim 14 wherein the silazane is in liquid formduring said reaction.17. The process of claim 14 wherein the silazane is in vapor form duringsaid reaction.18. The process of claim 14 wherein said silazane is dissolved in a solventduring said reaction.19. The process defined in claim 14 wherein the polymeric matrix comprisesa synthetic or natural thermosetting polymer or copolymer thereof.20. The process of claim 14 wherein the polymeric matrix comprises athermoplastic polymeric resin or copolymer thereof.21. The process defined in claim 19 wherein said normally hydrophilicmicroporous material is formed by:a. blending together suitable quantities of said thermosetting polymer orcopolymer thereof, a filler compound having an active polar group and acuring agent to form a composition;b. vulcanizing said composition in a pressurized steam ambient; andc. dehydrating the resulting vulcanizate.22. The process defined in claim 21 wherein said thermosetting polymer orcopolymer thereof is natural rubber, said filler compound is a silicicacid and said curing agent is sulfur.23. The process defined in claim 20 wherein said normally hydrophilicmicroporous material is formed by:a. blending together suitable quantities of said thermoplastic resin, afiller compound having an active polar group, solvent, and water to form acomposition;b. extruding or molding said composition at room temperature or above toform an extrudate;c. passing said extrudate through an extraction medium to replace saidsolvent therein with said extraction medium; andd. removing said extraction medium from said extrudate.24. The process defined in claim 23 wherein said thermoplastic resin ispolyvinyl chloride, said filler is silicic acid and said extraction mediumis water.25. The reaction product of claim 14.26. The reaction product of claim 15.27. A process for producing a gas permeable hydrophobic article from anormally hydrophilic microporous material characterized by a polymericmatrix and a filler dispersed throughout said matrix forming a pluralityof micropores therein, said filler comprising a compound having an activepolar group, said process comprising the step of reacting the fillercompound dispersed throughout said polymeric matrix with a Werner-typecomplex of fatty acids coordinated with a metal whereby the contact angleof a water-based liquid deposited on the surface of said article aftersaid reaction is rendered too great to permit wetting of said articletherewith.28. The process of claim 27 wherein said coordinating metal is chromium.29. The process of claim 27 wherein said Werner-type complex is dissolvedin a solvent during said reaction.30. The process of claim 29 wherein said solvent is isopropanol and theconcentration of said Werner-type complex therein is about 30 per cent byweight.31. The process of claim 27 wherein said Werner-type complex is dissolvedin a solvent and water solution during said reaction.32. The process defined in claim 27 wherein the polymeric matrix comprisesa synthetic or natural thermosetting polymer or copolymer thereof.33. The process defined in claim 32 wherein said normally hydrophilicmicroporous material is formed by:a. blending together suitable quantities of said thermosetting polymer orcopolymer thereof, a filler compound having an active polar group, and acuring agent to form a composition;b. vulcanizing said composition in a pressurized steam ambient; andc. dehydrating the resulting vulcanizate.34. The process defined in claim 33 wherein said thermosetting polymer orcopolymer thereof is natural rubber, said filler compound is a silicicacid, and said curing agent is sulfur.35. The process of claim 27 wherein the polymeric matrix comprises athermoplastic polymeric resin or copolymer thereof.36. The process defined in claim 35 wherein said normally hydrophilicmicroporous material is formed by:a. blending together suitable quantities of said thermoplastic resin, afiller compound having an active polar group, solvent, and water to form acomposition;b. extruding or molding said composition at room temperature or above toform an extrudate;c. passing said extrudate through an extraction medium to replace saidsolvent therein with said extraction medium; andd. removing said extraction medium from said extrudate.37. The process defined in claim 36 wherein said thermoplastic resin ispolyvinyl chloride, said filler is silicic acid and said extraction mediumis water.38. The reaction product of claim 27."}
{"WKU":"039310680","Title":"Blends of biodegradable thermoplastic oxyalkanoyl polymer, a naturally","App_Date":"1974-07-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert A. Clendinning;James E. Potts;Walter D. Niegisch","Assignee":"Union Carbide Corporation","ICL_Class":"C08L 6706","References":"2757160;3169945;3314205;3361690;3481257;3632687;3636956;3647111;3734979;3741918;3746670","Claims":"We claim:1. A blend comprising (i) from about 3 to about 97 weight percent ofbiodegradable thermoplastic oxyalkanoyl polymer, said polymer having areduced viscosity value of at least about 0.1 and upwards to about 12 andbeing further characterized in that at least about 10 weight percent ofsaid thermoplastic oxyalkanoyl polymer is attributable to recurringoxyalkanoyl units of the formula##EQU15##wherein x is an integer having a value of 2 to 7, with the proviso that xdoes not equal 3; (ii) from less than 97 to about 3 weight percent ofnaturally occurring biodegradable product; and (iii) more than 0 to about75 weight percent of ingredients of the group consisting of plasticadditives, fillers, and mixtures thereof, based on the total weight ofsaid blend.2. The blend of claim 1 wherein said recurring oxyalkanoyl units have theformula##EQU16##3. The blend of claim 2 wherein said biodegradable thermoplasticoxyalkanoyl polymer has a reduced viscosity value of at least about 0.2 toabout 8 and is further characterized in that at least about 20 weightpercent of said polymer is attributable to the recurring oxyalkanoyl unitshown therein.4. The blend of claim 3 wherein at least about 50 weight percent of saidpolymer is attributable to recurring oxycaproyl units.5. The blend of claim 4 wherein at least about 80 to about 100 weightpercent of said polymer is attributable to recurring oxycaproyl units.6. The blend of claim 4 wherein said polymer has a reduced viscosity valueof at least about 0.25 to about 3.7. The blend of claim 4 comprising (i) from about 10 to about 90 weightpercent of biodegradable thermoplastic oxycaproyl polymer, and (ii) fromabout 10 to about 90 weight percent of naturally occurring biodegradableproduct, based on the total weight of said blend.8. The blend of claim 7 comprising (i) from about 20 to about 80 weightpercent of biodegradable thermoplastic oxycaproyl polymer, (ii) from about20 to about 80 weight percent of naturally occurring biodegradableproduct, and (iii) from greater than 0 to about 60 weight percent ofingredients of the group consisting of plastic additives, fillers, andmixtures thereof, based on the total weight of said blend.9. The blend of claim 8 wherein said naturally occurring biodegradableproduct is tree bark.10. The blend of claim 9 wherein said naturally occurring biodegradableproduct is shredded wood.11. The blend of claim 9 wherein said tree bark is Douglas Fir bark.12. Articles of manufacture from the blend claimed in claim 1.13. Articles of manufacture from the blend claimed in claim 2.14. Articles of manufacture from the blend claimed in claim 3.15. Articles of manufacture from the blend claimed in claim 4.16. Articles of manufacture from the blend claimed in claim 5.17. The articles of manufacture of claim 16 in the form of a container.18. The articles of manufacture of claim 16 in the form of a film.19. The articles of manufacture of claim 16 in the form of packagingmaterial.20. A blend comprising (i) from about 3 to about 97 weight percent ofbiodegradable thermoplastic oxyalkanoyl polymer, said polymer having areduced viscosity value of at least about 0.1 and upwards to about 12 andbeing further characterized in that at least about 10 weight percent ofsaid thermoplastic oxyalkanoyl polymer is attributable to recurringoxyalkanoyl units of the formula##EQU17##wherein x is an integer having a value of 2 to 7, with the proviso that xdoes not equal 3; (ii) from less than 97 to about 3 weight percent ofsoybean meal; and, (iii) more than 0 to about 75 weight percent ofingredients of the group consisting of plastic additives, fillers, andmixtures thereof, based on the total weight of said blend.21. The blend of claim 20 wherein said recurring oxyalkanoyl units have theformula##EQU18##22. The blend of claim 21 wherein said biodegradable thermoplasticoxyalkanoyl polymer has a reduced viscosity value of at least about 0.2 toabout 8 and is further characterized in that at least about 20 weightpercent of said polymer is attributable to the recurring oxyalkanoyl unitshown therein.23. The blend of claim 22 wherein at least about 50 weight percent of saidpolymer is attributable to recurring oxycaproyl units.24. The blend of claim 23 wherein at least about 80 to about 100 weightpercent of said polymer is attributable to recurring oxycaproyl units.25. The blend of claim 23 wherein said polymer has a reduced viscosityvalue of at least about 0.25 to about 3.26. The blend of claim 23 comprising (i) from about 10 to about 90 weightpercent of biodegradable thermoplastic oxycaproyl polymer, and (ii) fromabout 10 to about 90 weight percent of soybean meal, based on the totalweight of said blend.27. Articles of manufacture from the blend claimed in claim 26.28. The articles of manufacture of claim 27 in the form of a container."}
{"WKU":"039310698","Title":"Dispersion for sizing cellulose fibres and use thereof","App_Date":"1973-07-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Claes Olof Axel Lundin","Assignee":"Kemnord AB","ICL_Class":"C08L  128;D21H  326;D21H  338;D21D  300","References":"2627477;2762270;3006806;3212961;3311532;3524796","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A cationic dispersion for the sizing of cellulose fibers having a totalsolids content of up to 30 percent by weight which containsa. ketene dimer, having the general formula##EQU2##wherein R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 each individually represents an organichydrophobic hydrocarbon group having about 8 - 40 carbon atoms,b. water,c. a dispersing agent selected from the group consisting of a water-solubleor water-dispersible cationic polymer, the amount of the dispersing agentbeing within the range of about 0.5 to 10 percent by weight based upon theweight of the ketene dimer; andd. a water-soluble or water-dispersible alkyl hydroxyalkyl cellulose,wherein the alkyl groups contain 1 - 4 carbon atoms, in an amount withinthe range of about 0.5 to 10 percent by weight based upon the weight ofthe ketene dimer,e. the ratio of cellulose ether to cationic polymer being within the rangeof 1:20 - 20:1,f. said alkyl hydroxyalkyl cellulose having a Brookfield viscosity withinthe range of from 20 - 12,000 cp in a 2 percent water solution at atemperature of 20.degree.C.2. The dispersion of claim 1 wherein said cationic dispersing agent ispolyvinyl pyridine.3. The dispersion of claim 1 wherein the solids content of ketene dimer iswithin the range of about 10 to about 25 per cent by weight.4. The dispersion of claim 1 wherein the solids content of ketene dimer iswithin the range of about 15 to about 20 per cent by weight.5. The dispersion of claim 1 wherein said alkylhydroxyalkyl cellulose isselected from the group of ethyl hydroxyethyl cellulose, methylhydroxypropyl cellulose, and mixtures thereof.6. The dispersion of claim 1 wherein said cationic dispersing agent isselected from the group of polyethylene imine, cationic starch, polyvinylpyridine, polyacrylamide, polyalkylene polyamide, epichlorohydrinderivative of polyalkylene polyamide, and mixtures thereof.7. The process of sizing cellulose fibres which comprises applying thecomposition of claim 1 to said cellulose fibres."}
{"WKU":"039310701","Title":"Plywood adhesive","App_Date":"1975-01-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Wayne H. Bond;Thomas J. Moehl","Assignee":"Georgia-Pacific Corporation","ICL_Class":"C08L 9702","References":"2395375;2784184;2786820;2849314;3296159;3597375;3658638;3677884","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a process of applying a phenol-formaldehyde resin adhesive containingamylaceous or proteinaceous materials to plywood veneer using a curtaincoater, the improvement which comprises adding at least 1 percent, basedupon the weight of the phenol-formaldehyde resin in said adhesive, of asodium base lignosulfonate and from 0.05 to 1 percent, based upon theweight of the phenol-formaldehyde resin, of a trialkyl phosphate havingalkyl substituents of from 1 to 6 carbon atoms.2. A process according to claim 1 wherein the trialkyl phosphate istributyl phosphate.3. A process according to claim 1 wherein a sodium base lignosulfonate isadded in an amount of from 3 to 6 weight percent.4. A process according to claim 1 wherein the trialkyl phosphate istributyl phosphate and is added in an amount of from 0.25 to 0.75 percent.5. A process according to claim 1 wherein the sodium lignosulfonate isadded to the phenol and formaldehyde mixture during the condensation ofthe phenol with the formaldehyde in the preparation of thephenol-formaldehyde resin.6. A process according to claim 5 wherein the lignosulfonate is added in anamount of from 3 to 6 weight percent and the trialkyl phosphate istributyl phosphate added in an amount of from 0.25 to 0.75 percent.7. A process according to claim 6 wherein the sodium base lignosulfonate isa sodium base spent sulfite liquor.8. A process according to claim 7 wherein the phenol-formaldehyde resin iscondensed in a mole ratio of 1.6 to 2.5 moles of formaldehyde per mole ofphenol.9. In a phenol-formaldehyde plywood adhesive containing amylaceous orproteinaceous materials to plywood veneer using a curtain coater, theimprovement which comprises adding at least 1 percent, based upon theweight of the phenol-formaldehyde resin in said adhesive, of a sodium baselignosulfonate and from 0.05 to 1 percent, based upon the weight of thephenol-formaldehyde resin, of a trialkyl phosphate having alkylsubstituents of from 1 to 6 carbon atoms.10. An adhesive composition according to claim 9 wherein the sodium baselignosulfonate is added in an amount of 3 to 6 weight percent to thephenol and formaldehyde mixture during the condensation of the phenol withformaldehyde in the preparation of the phenol-formaldehyde resin and thetrialkyl phosphate is tributyl phosphate added in an amount of 0.25 to0.75 percent."}
{"WKU":"039310710","Title":"Compositions of acrylated epoxidized soybean oil amine compounds useful","App_Date":"1974-06-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"David John Trecker;George Wayne Borden;Oliver Wendell Smith","Assignee":"Union Carbide Corporation","ICL_Class":"C08f 1914;C08f 2101","References":"3673140;3713864","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A composition comprising:I. an acrylated epoxidized soybean oil amine compound having in themolecule the group:##EQU10##wherein X is hydrogen or methyl and R  taken singly is alkyl of 1 to 15carbon atoms or aryl having up to 15 carbon atoms and the two R  groupstaken together with the nitrogen atom attached thereto form a heterocyclicring having from 5 to 6 ring atoms, said compound being the reactionproduct of:A. epoxidized soybean oil reacted with at least 2 moles of acrylic acid ormethacrylic acid per mole thereof andB. from 5 to 40 mole percent, based on acrylyl groups of an organic amineof the formula R.sub.2   NH wherein R  is as defined above, andIi. an acrylyl compound.2. A composition as claimed in claim 1 wherein said acrylyl compound (II)is present at a concentration up to about 90 weight percent thereof and isacrylonitrile or of the formula:##EQU11##wherein Z is hydrogen or methyl;t is an integer having a value of 1 to 3; andR   is alkoxy of 1 to 18 carbon atoms, hydroxyalkoxy of up to 15 carbonatoms, alkoxyalkoxy of up to 15 carbon atoms, cyanoalkoxy of up to 15carbon atoms, aryloxy, or --(OC.sub.n H.sub.2n).sub.z NR   wherein n has avalue of 1 to 10, z has a value of 0 or 1 and R   is alkyl of 1 to 10carbon atoms when t is one or a polyvalent alkylene or oxyalkylene having2 to 8 carbon atoms in the alkylene moiety thereof when t is other thanone.3. A composition as claimed in claim 2 wherein (A) is the reaction productof epoxidized soybean oil with acrylic acid.4. A composition as claimed in claim 2 wherein (A) is the reaction productof epoxidized soybean oil with methacrylic acid.5. A composition as claimed in claim 2 wherein (B) is diethanolamine.6. A composition as claimed in claim 2 wherein (B) is morpholine.7. A composition as claimed in claim 1 wherein a pigment is additionallypresent."}
{"WKU":"039310728","Title":"Particleboard, hardboard, and plywood produced in combination with a","App_Date":"1972-08-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert P. Coyle","Assignee":"Champion International Corporation","ICL_Class":"C08H  502;C08L 6110","References":"2282518;3076772;3095392;3296159;3308218;3336185;3658638;3677884;3790441;3790442","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property ofprivilege is claimed are defined as follows:1. Process for the preparation of an improved glue system for adhering woodparticles to each other which comprises preparing a lignin sulfonateformaldehyde prepolymer by heating a solution of a salt of a lignosulfonicacid with an alkali metal hydroxide, thereafter adding a first amount offormaldehyde to form said prepolymer, thereafter adding phenol to saidprepolymer followed by the addition of a second amount of formaldehyde,and heating the resulting mixture to form the glue system.2. Process as defined by claim 1 wherein said salt is the sodium salt, andwherein said salt of lignosulfonic acid and said alkali metal hydroxidesolution is heated to a temperature in the range of about 80.degree. to110.degree.C, said solution being cooled before adding said first amountof said formaldehyde, followed by reheating said solution and said firstamount of formaldehyde, allowing the solution to exotherm until theformaldehyde is consumed, cooling the resulting reaction mixture andadding thereto said phenol, followed by the addition of said second amountof said formaldehyde, followed by heating to a temperature in the range ofabout 80.degree. to 110.degree.C for a time period in the range of about20 to 60 minutes.3. Process as defined by claim 1 wherein sufficient alkali metal hydroxideis used to secure a glue system having a pH in the range of about 10.3 to10.7."}
{"WKU":"039310736","Title":"Hot melt compositions","App_Date":"1974-07-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Winston J. Jackson, Jr.;William R. Darnell","Assignee":"Eastman Kodak Company","ICL_Class":"C08G 6348;C09J  302","References":"3383343;3390108;3642679;3644267;3657389;3743616;3770677;3795644;3827999;R27279","Claims":"We claim:1. An adhesive composition comprisingA. from about 50 to about 95 weight percent of a copolyester of"}
{"WKU":"039310744","Title":"Modifiers for high nitrile polymers","App_Date":"1974-03-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"I. Luis Gomez","Assignee":"Monsanto Company","ICL_Class":"C08L 9100","References":"3426102;3451538;3479308;3615710;3681275","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A nitrile polymer which has been compounded with a modifier which is acombination of (1) a C.sub.12 to C.sub.28 saturated aliphatic fatty acidester of a compound selected from the group consisting of glycerol andsorbitan; and (2) a polyoxyethylene sorbitan ester of a C.sub.12 toC.sub.28 saturated fatty acid, wherein the polyoxyethylene contains from 4to 30 oxyethylene units; wherein the weight ratio of component (1) tocomponent (2) is in the range of from 80/20 to 20/80; and wherein theamount of modifier used is in the range of from 0.01 to 1.0% by weightbased on the weight of the nitrile polymer.2. A nitrile polymer as in claim 1 which contains 55 to 85% by weight of anitrile monomer selected from the group consisting of acrylonitrile andmethacrylonitrile, wherein the weight of the methacrylonitrile iscalculated as acrylonitrile.3. A nitrile polymer as in claim 2 wherein the amount of modifier used isin the range from 0.01 to 0.5% by weight.4. A nitrile polymer as in claim 2 wherein the amount of modifier used isin the range from 0.01 to 0.1% by weight.5. A nitrile polymer as in claim 2 wherein the saturated aliphatic fattyacids used in components (1) and (2) contains from 16 to 20 carbon atoms.6. A nitrile polymer as in claim 2 wherein the saturated aliphatic fattyacids used in components (1) and (2) is stearic acid.7. A nitrile polymer as in claim 2 wherein the polyoxyethylene segmentcontains 16 to 24 oxyethylene units.8. An acrylonitrile polymer containing from 60 to 83% by weight ofacrylonitrile which has been compounded with a modifier which is acombination of (1) a C.sub.16 to C.sub.20 saturated aliphatic fatty acidester of a compound selected from the group consisting of glycerol andsorbitan; and (2) a polyoxyethylene sorbitan ester of a C.sub.16 toC.sub.20 saturated fatty acid, wherein the polyoxyethylene contains from16 to 24 oxyethylene units, wherein the weight ratio of component (1) tocomponent (2) is in the range of from 80/20 to 20/80; and wherein theamount of modifier used is in the range from 0.01 to 0.5% by weight basedon the weight of the acrylonitrile polymer.9. An acrylonitrile polymer as in claim 8 wherein the saturated aliphaticfatty acids used in components (1) and (2) is stearic acid.10. An acrylonitrile polymer as in claim 8 wherein the polyoxyethyleneester is polyoxyethylene(20) sorbitan tristearate.11. An acrylonitrile polymer as in claim 8 wherein the modifier is acombination of (1) glyceryl monostearate and (2) polyoxyethylene(20)sorbitan tristearate.12. An acrylonitrile polymer as in claim 8 wherein the modifier is acombination of (1) sorbitan monostearate and polyoxyethylene(20) sorbitantristearate.13. An acrylonitrile polymer containing from 60 to 83% by weight ofacrylonitrile which has been compounded with a modifier which is acombination of (1) a compound selected from the group consisting ofglyceryl monostearate and sorbitan monostearate; and (2)polyoxyethylene(20) sorbitan tristearate; wherein the weight ratio ofcomponent (1) to component (2) is in the range of from 80/20 to 20/80; andwherein the amount of modifier used is in the range from 0.01 to 0.5% byweight based on the weight of the acrylonitrile polymer.14. An acrylonitrile polymer as in claim 13 wherein the amount of modifierused is in the range from 0.01 to 0.1% by weight.15. An acrylonitrile polymer as in claim 13 which is rubber modified.16. A nitrile polymer as in claim 2 wherein styrene is added as acopolymer.17. A molded container formed from the nitrile polymer of claim 1.18. The molded container of claim 17 wherein the container is in the formof a bottle.19. A molded container formed from the nitrile polymer of claim 8.20. The molded container of claim 19 wherein the container is in the formof a bottle.21. A molded container formed from the nitrile polymer of claim 16."}
{"WKU":"039310752","Title":"Acrylated epoxidized soybean oil amine compositions and method","App_Date":"1974-06-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"David John Trecker;George Wayne Borden;Oliver Wendell Smith","Assignee":"Union Carbide Corporation","ICL_Class":"C08f 1914;C08f 2104","References":"3673140;3713864","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Acrylated epoxidized soybean oil amine compounds having in the moleculethe group:##EQU8##wherein X is hydrogen or methyl, R  taken singly is alkyl of 1 to 15carbon atoms or phenyl, and the two R  groups taken together with thenitrogen atom attached thereto form a heterocyclic ring having from 5 to 6ring atoms, said compound being the reaction product of:A. epoxidized soybean oil reacted with at least two moles of acrylic acidor methacrylic acid per mole thereof andB. from 5 to 40 mole percent, based on acrylyl groups of an organic amineof the formula R .sub.2 NH wherein R  is as defined above.2. A compound as claimed in claim 1 wherein (A) is the reaction product ofepoxidized soybean oil with acrylic acid.3. A compound as claimed in claim 1 wherein (A) is the reaction product ofepoxidized soybean oil with methacrylic acid.4. A compound as claimed in claim 2 wherein (B) is diethanolamine.5. A compound as claimed in claim 2 wherein (B) is morpholine.6. A composition as claimed in claim 1 wherein a pigment is additionallypresent.7. A composition as claimed in claim 2 wherein a pigment is additionallypresent.8. A composition as claimed in claim 3 wherein a pigment is additionallypresent.9. A composition as claimed in claim 4 wherein a pigment is additionallypresent.10. A composition as claimed in claim 5 wherein a pigment is additionallypresent."}
{"WKU":"039310760","Title":"Elimination of pinking in vinyl asbestos formulations","App_Date":"1974-01-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Gerald Rubin","Assignee":"Exxon Research and Engineering Company","ICL_Class":"C08K  334;C08K  509;C08K  534","References":"2837490;3180848;3287300;3288737;3314906;3541047;3730943","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A vinyl asbestos composition comprising a vinyl resin, asbestos,fillers, a stabilizing amount of from 0.1% to 2.5% by weight based on theweight of said composition of melamine and an effective amount of from0.01 to 10% by weight based on the weight of said composition of ananti-pinking additive selected from the group consisting of trialkylacetic acids having the formula##EQU2##wherein R, R  and R  are alkyl groups having from 1-18 carbon atoms.2. The composition according to claim 1 wherein said vinyl resin is a vinylchloride/vinyl acetate copolymer.3. The composition according to claim 1 wherein said anti-pinking additiveis a trialkyl acetic acid where R, R  and R  are alkyl groups having from1 to 6 carbon atoms.4. The composition according to claim 1 wherein said anti-pinking additiveis neodecanoic acid.5. The composition of claim 4 wherein the amount of neodecanoic acidemployed is in the range of from 3 to 5 weight per cent based on the totalweight of the composition.6. The composition of claim 2, wherein from about 3 to about 20% by weightof the vinyl resin is vinyl acetate.7. The composition according to claim 1 wherein said vinyl resin ispolyvinyl chloride.8. The composition according to claim 1 wherein said vinyl asbestoscomposition additionally contains plasticizers selected from the groupconsisting of tricresyl phosphate, dihexyl phthalate, dibutyl phthalate,dioctyl phthalate, diisononyl phthalate, butylbenzyl phthalate, butyloctylphthalate, dipropylene glycol dibenzoate, epoxidized soybean oil andmixtures thereof."}
{"WKU":"039310779","Title":"Reactive hot melt adhesive composition and method for use thereof","App_Date":"1974-01-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Taku Uchigaki;Kenichi Omori;Masataka Okamura","Assignee":"Mitsui Petrochemical Industries, Ltd.","ICL_Class":"C08L 9300","References":"3242230;3703492","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A reactive hot melt-type adhesive composition comprising (a) a reactivecompound, (b) a thermoplastic resin and (c) a tackifier; wherein:a. the reactive compound is a urethane prepolymer having terminalisocyanate groups at both ends thereof and a viscosity higher than 300,000cps at 25.degree.C; resulting from the addition polymerization of at leastone diisocyanate and at least one diolb. the thermoplastic resin is an ethylene-vinylacetate co-polymer or anethylene-acrylic acid copolymer, or an ethyleneacrylate copolymer or anatactic polypropylene or a polyethyleneterephthalate linear polymer; andc. the tackifier is a hydrogenated abietic acid-type rosin or estersthereof having its double bonds removed by hydrogenation in whole or inpart, or a terpene-phenol copolymer of a mono- or diterpene wherein theterpene has 10 carbon atoms and having a 1.0 to 3.0 molar ratio of terpeneto phenol; said adhesive composition comprising 20 - 73 wt % of saidurethane prepolymer (a), 2 - 25 wt % of said thermoplastic resin (b) and25 - 55 wt % of said tackifier (c) said composition having a viscosityranging from 9000 cp to 2000 cp in the temperature range of 100.degree. -130.degree.C.2. The adhesive composition according to claim 1 wherein the urethaneprepolymer is an addition polymerization product of a diisocyanateselected from the group consisting of 2,4-tolylenediisocyanate,2,6-tolylenediisocyanate, 4,4 -diphenylmethanediisocyanate, hexamethylenediisocyanate, or 1,5-naphthylenediisocyanate or a mixture thereof; and adiol selected from the group consisting of ethyleneglycol,propyleneglycol, 1,4-butanediol or 1,4-butinediol or polymers thereof,polytetramethyleneglycol ether or a mixture thereof.3. The adhesive composition according to claim 1 wherein said thermoplasticresin is a thermoplastic ethylene-vinylacetate copolymer having avinylacetate content of 5 - 70 wt.%.4. The adhesive composition according to claim 1 wherein said thermoplasticresin is a thermoplastic ethylene-ethylacrylate copolymer having anethylene content of 70 - 95 wt.%.5. The adhesive composition according to claim 1 wherein said tackifier hasgood miscibility with the urethane prepolymer, is non-reactive, with theterminal isocyanate groups thereof, has a low viscosity at 100.degree. to130.degree.C. and is solid at 60.degree.C."}
{"WKU":"039310787","Title":"Sealant and coating compositions from","App_Date":"1974-02-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Oren L. Marrs;Richard C. Doss","Assignee":"Phillips Petroleum Company","ICL_Class":"C08L 9500","References":"2910922;3316194;3491046;3503930;3540961;3717617;3749688;3798192;3810857","Claims":"We claim:1. Compositions capable of being cured to sealant and coating compositionshaving improved tensile break values, modulus values and elongation valuescomprising:a. about 10 to about 65 weight percent of at least onepoly(oxyalkylene)-polyester-poly(monosulfide)-polythiol having an averageof more than two mercapto groups per molecule,b. about 25 to about 60 weight percent coal tar,c. about 10 to about 60 weight percent of at least one filler selected fromclays, carbon black, slate flour, silica, limestone, calcium carbonate,asbestine, titanium dioxide, iron oxide, alumina, and zirconia, andd. at least one curing agent in an amount sufficient to convert at leastabout 70 percent of the mercapto groups in the polymer to polysulfidelinkages.2. A composition according to claim 1 which additionally containsnon-elastomeric components selected from pigments, plasticizers,extenders, stabilizers, thickeners, adhesion promoters, and wettingagents.3. A composition according to claim 1 wherein (a) is the reaction productof1. a mercaptoalkanoic acid having the formula HS(CR.sub.2).sub.n COOHwherein R is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkylradicals having from 1-5, inclusive, carbon atoms, the maximum number ofcarbon atoms in all R groups being 10, and n is an integer ranging from1-5,2. a thiodialkanoic acid having the formula HOOC(CR.sub.2).sub.nS(CR.sub.2).sub.n COOH wherein R and n are as defined above, the maximumnumber of carbon atoms in all R groups being 20, and3. a poly(oxyalkylene)-polyol having on average more than two pendenthydroxy groups per molecule and a molecular weight in the range200-20,000, the amount of (3) being in the range 0.8-1.2 equivalents ofpendent hydroxy groups for each equivalent of carboxylic groups of themercaptoalkanoic and thiodialkanoic acids.4. A composition according to claim 1 whereinb. is a coal tar having a viscosity at 25.degree.C within the range ofabout 300 to about 30,000 centipoises,c. the filler is a hard kaolin clay, andd. the curing agent is lead dioxide.5. A composition according to claim 1 whereina. is present in said composition in amounts ranging from about 15 to about35 weight percent,b. a coal tar is present in amounts ranging from about 30 to about 50weight percent, and has a viscosity at 25.degree.C within the range ofabout 500 to about 20,000 centipoises, andc. a filler is present in amounts ranging from about 30 to about 50 weightpercent.6. A composition according to claim 3 which containsd. a curing agent selected from peroxy compounds, metal oxides, metal saltsof carboxylic acids, ammonium and alkali metal chromates and persulfates,and sulfur, in an amount sufficient to convert at least about 70 percentof the pendent thiol groups to polysulfide groups.7. A composition according to claim 3 whereina. is present in amounts ranging from about 15 to about 35 weight percent,b. the coal tar is present in amounts ranging from about 30 to about 50weight percent and has a viscosity at 25.degree.C within the range ofabout 500 to about 20,000 centipoises, andc. the amount of filler present ranges from about 30 to about 50 weightpercent.8. A composition according to claim 3 wherein (c) is hard kaolin clay andthe composition containsd. lead dioxide as a curing agent.9. A composition according to claim 3 wherein (a) is formed by reacting1. 3-mercaptopropionic acid,2. thiodipropionic acid, and3. a poly(oxyalkylene)-polyol formed by reacting 1,2,6-hexanetriol andpropylene oxide, and further wherein the amount of (1) employed rangesfrom 60 to 80 weight percent based upon the total of (1) and (2).10. A composition according to claim 9 wherein said filler (c) is hardkaolin clay and the composition additionally containsd. lead dioxide as a curing agent,together with a minor amount of carbon black as pigment and lecithin aswetting agent.11. A process for the production of sealant and coating compositions whichcomprises mixinga. about 10 to about 65 weight percent of at least onepoly(oxyalkylene)-polyester-poly(monosulfide)-polythiol having an averageof more than two mercapto groups per molecule,b. about 25 to about 60 weight percent coal tar,c. about 10 to about 60 weight percent of at least one filler selected fromclays, carbon black, slate flour, silica, limestone, calcium carbonate,asbestine, titanium dioxide, iron oxide, alumina, and zirconia, the amountof each of (a), (b), and (c) being based upon the total amount of (a) plus(b) plus (c), andd. a curing agent selected from peroxy compounds, metal oxides, metal saltsof carboxylic acids, ammonium and alkali metal chromates and persulfates,and sulfur in an amount sufficient to convert at least about 70 percent ofthe pendent thiol groups to polysulfide groups, ande. allowing the thus prepared formulation to cure to form sealants andcoatings having a desirable balance of properties.12. A process according to claim 11 wherein said polythiol is formed byreacting 3-mercaptopropionic acid, thiodipropionic acid and apoly(oxyalkylene)-polyol formed by reacting 1,2,6-hexanetriol andpropylene oxide.13. A process according to claim 11 wherein (c) is hard kaolin clay and (d)is lead dioxide.14. A process according to claim 11 wherein the curing agent is added to amixture of (a), (b), and (c).15. A process according to claim 4 wherein at least a portion of the curingagent is mixed with at least a portion of at least one of (b) and (c)prior to mixing with (a)."}
{"WKU":"039310795","Title":"Viscosity stabilized wax emulsion polish composition","App_Date":"1971-09-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Louis M. Wise;Andrew M. Murdoch;Leon E. Paszek","Assignee":"American Home Products Corporation","ICL_Class":"C09G  110","References":"2798053;2909462;2923692;2955047;3013907;3429842;3553123","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. The method of stabilizing the viscosity of multi-component wax emulsionshoe polish compositions by incorporating from about 0.1% to about 1.0% byweight, of a stabilizer selected from the group consisting of compoundshaving the formula:"}
{"WKU":"039310809","Title":"Aqueous aminoplast coating composition with polymers of fluorinated","App_Date":"1973-12-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Klaus-Dieter Hammer;Wolfgang Heinrich;Dieter Hoffmann;Erich Schuierer","Assignee":"Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"B23B 2740;B23B 2742;C08L 6134;C08L 7512","References":"3491169;3652513;3655732;3679634;3721700","Claims":"We claim:1. An aqueous composition of matter for the treatment of structures ofpolyurethane having a velvety surface comprisingA. about 1 to about 10 % by weight of a water soluble aminoplastprecondensate,B. about 0.1 to about 3 % by weight of a dispersion of a polymer consistingessentially of recurring units of the formula##SPC7##in which R.sub.f is perfluoroalkyl of 6 to 10 carbon atoms and a is 1 or 2,which polymer is dispersed in a dispersant of the formula##SPC8##in which R .sub.f is perfluoroalkyl of 5 to 7 carbon atoms, b is 1 or 2 andc is a number of about 18 to about 50, in which dispersion the ratio byweight of polymer to dispersant is from about 40 : 60 to about 60 : 40,C. about 0.05 to about 2 % by weight of a urea of the formula##EQU6##in which R.sub.1 is alkyl of 8 to 24 carbon atoms, R.sub.2, X.sub.1 andX.sub.2 each is hydrogen or hydroxymethyl or X.sub.1 and X.sub.2 togetherare ethylene, andD. about 0.05 to about 8 % by weight of a water soluble inorganic acidiccross-linking condensation catalyst.2. An aqueous compostion as defined in claim 1, consisting essentially ofabout 1 to about 7.5 % by weight of (A),about 0.2 to about 3 % by weight of (B),about 0.1 to about 1.5 % by weight of (C) andabout 0.1 to about 6 % by weight of (D).3. A composition as defined in claim 1, consisting of3 to 7.5 % by weight of (A),0.2 to 3 % by weight of (B),0.1 to 1.5 % by weight of (C),0.3 to 4.5 % by weight of (D),the balance to 100 % by weight being water.4. A composition as defined in claim 1, consisting of1 to 3 % by weight of (A),0.2 to 3 % by weight of (B),0.1 to 0.5 % by weight of (C),0.1 to 1.8 % by weight of (D),the balance to 100 % by weight being water.5. A composition as defined in claim 1, wherein the amount of (D) is 5 to80 % by weight of the amount of (A).6. A composition as defined in claim 1, wherein the amount of (D) is 10 to60 % by weight of the amount of (A).7. A composition as defined in claim 1, wherein in component (B) the ratioby weight of polymer to dispersant is 50 : 50.8. A composition as defined in claim 1, wherein (A) is a condensationproduct of formaldehyde with melamine, urea or a compound of the formula##EQU7##in which R and R  are hydrogen or lower alkyl.9. A composition as defined in claim 1, wherein (A) is a water-solubleprecondensate of formaldehyde and urea or melamine.10. A composition as defined in claim 1, wherein the polymer in (B) is ahomopolymer or mixed polymer having a straight or branched per-fluoroalkylof 7 to 8 carbon atoms on an average.11. A composition as defined in claim 1, wherein the dispersant in (B) is apolyethylene glycol chain the value c of which is about 23 to about 46.12. A composition as defined in claim 1, wherein (B) is a mixture of equalparts by weight of a mixed polymer consisting of recurring units of theformula##SPC9##in which R.sub.f is n-C.sub. 6 F.sub.13, n-C.sub. 8 F.sub.17 and n-C.sub.10F.sub.21, which units are contained in the molecule in about equal partsby weight, anda dispersant of the formula##SPC10##13. A composition as defined in claim 1, wherein (C) is stearyl trimethylolurea or N-stearyl - N , N -ethylene-urea.14. A composition as defined in claim 1, wherein D is ammonium chloride,magnesium chloride, zinc chloride, zinc nitrate, zinc fluoborate oraluminum chloride.15. A composition as defined in claim 14, wherein D is ammonium ormagnesium chloride."}
{"WKU":"039310817","Title":"Flameproof moulding compositions based on polyolefins","App_Date":"1974-06-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Franz-Josef Dany;Joachim Wortmann;Peter Munch;Gunther Braun;Rudolf Kern","Assignee":"Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft;Ruhrchemie Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C08G  600","References":"2452055;2538199;2603614;2620044;2992201;3399156;3666715;3728294;3808127;3810850;3810862;3819517;3819575;3883475","Claims":"We claim:1. Improved flameproof moulding composition, comprising a pulverulent blendof a polyolefin and a plurality of flame retardants consisting of, inaddition to red phosphorus, at least one organic nitrogen compound,selected from the group consisting of melamine and polyacrylonitrile, theamount of flame retardants being about 10-3o weight % of said composition,the quantitative ratio of red phosphorus and the organic nitrogen compoundbeing 3o:7o - 7o:3o, the improved moulding composition containing as astabilizera. between about 1 and 1o weight % of amidosulfonic acid or ammoniumbisulfate, based on the total quantity of the flame-retardant, orb. between about 5 and 15 weight % of a paraffin oil having a densitybetween about o.83 and o.88 g/cc and a viscosity between about 15 and 38ocentipoises, or of a mineral oil boiling within the range 17o and35.degree.C, or of a silicon oil, based on the quantity of red phosphorus,orc. between about 2o and 5o weight % of pentaerythritol, based on thequantity of organic nitrogen compound, ord. mixtures of (a) and (b).2. The moulding composition as claimed in claim 1, containing a mixture ofthe (a) and (b) stabilizers in a ratio of 2:5."}
{"WKU":"039310825","Title":"Microcrystalline polyesters and dispersions thereof","App_Date":"1974-04-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Mamerto M. Cruz, Jr.;Nicholas Z. Erdi;Orlando A. Battista","Assignee":"FMC Corporation","ICL_Class":"C08G 6312","References":"2595679;2945840;3014011;3115476;3135577;3190718;3214500;3377323;3472608;3510457;3536647","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for separating a finely divided, microcrystalline polyesterparticulate product having two separate melting point ranges from a fiberforming, synthetic, linear polyester having an inherentcrystalline-amorphous morphology and a single melting point rangecomprising hydrolyzing the polyester with a basic solution comprising anaqueous solution of a lower aliphatic amine or ammonia whereby estergroups in the amorphous regions are preferentially hydrolyzed andsolubilized without substantial dissolution of the crystalline regionsthereby forming a polyester material having a terminal amide group andhaving a higher crystallinity than the precursor polyester, removingsolubilized amorphous regions, recovering an insoluble microcrystallinepolyester having a terminal amide group and two separate melting pointranges and then mechanically disintegrating the recovered microcrystallinepolyester until at least 5% by weight has a particle size not exceeding 1micron.2. A process as defined in claim 1 wherein a fiber forming polyester isannealed prior to the hydrolyzing treatment.3. A process as defined in claim 1 wherein the fiber forming polyester ispoly(ethylene terephthalate) and the basic solution is an aqueous solutionof ammonia.4. A process as defined in claim 1 wherein the fiber forming polyester ispoly(ester of 4,4 -isopropylidenediphenol with carbonic acid).5. An article of manufacture comprising a finely divided, mechanicallydisintegrated, microcrystalline, synthetic, linear polyester productseparated from a fiber forming, synthetic, linear polyester having aninherent crystalline-amorphous morphology and a single melting pointrange, the microcrystalline polyester product, in contrast to the fiberforming polyester, having a terminal amide group being substantially freeof amorphous portions of the polyester chains, exhibiting a sharper x-raydiffraction pattern, having a lower molecular weight, having two separatemelting point ranges, consisting of particles at least 5% by weight ofwhich have a particle size not exceeding about 1 micron and being furthercharacterized in forming a stable, colloidal soliquoid in liquid mediahaving a minimal swelling action on the microcrystals which may solvatethe surfaces without destroying the interior of the microcrystals.6. An article of manufacture as defined in claim 5 wherein the mechanicallydisintegrated polyester product consists of particles at least 95% byweight of which have a particle size not exceeding about one micron andabout at least 5% by weight of which have a particle size not exceeding0.1 micron.7. An article of manufacture as defined in claim 5 which is in the form ofa soliquoid of the mechanically disintegrated polyester product in aliquid media having a minimal swelling action on the microcrystals whichmay solvate the surfaces without destroying the interior of themicrocrystals.8. An article of manufacture as defined in claim 5 which is in the form ofa soliquoid of the mechanical disintegrated polyester product in anaqueous media having a minimal swelling action on the microcrystals whichmay solvate the surfaces without destroying the interior of themicrocrystals.9. An article of manufacture as defined in claim 5 which is in the form ofa soliquoid of the mechanically disintegrated polyester product in water.10. An article of manufacture as defined in claim 5 which is in the form ofa soliquoid of the mechanically disintegrated polyester product in anorganic liquid media having a minimal swelling action on the microcrystalswhich may solvate the surfaces without destroying the interior of themicrocrystals."}
{"WKU":"039310833","Title":"Water-reducing admixtures for ceramic pastes","App_Date":"1974-01-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Isamu Sasaki;Iwao Kojima;Fujio Namigata;Yoku Ashigame;Hiroshi Mihara","Assignee":"Showa Denko Kabushiki Kaisha","ICL_Class":"C04B  702;C08G  818","References":"3677979;3687603","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A ceramic paste comprising a hydraulic cement, water and as awater-reducing additive between about 0.1 to 2.0% by weight based on theweight of said cement, of phenol substituted with at least one memberselected from the group consisting of sulfo radical and sulfomethylradical, wherein the hydrogen atoms of acidic radicals in part of saidphenol compound are substituted by atoms selected from the groupconsisting of sodium, potassium and calcium.2. The ceramic paste of claim 1 which is concrete comprising portlandcement, sand, gravel and water.3. The ceramic paste of claim 1 which is mortar comprising portland cement,sand and water.4. A ceramic paste comprising hydraulic cement, water and as awater-reducing additive between about 0.1 to 2.0% by weight based on theweight of said cement of a water-soluble primary condensation product offormaldehyde and a phenol derivative having at least one member selectedfrom the group consisting of sulfo radical and sulfomethyl radical,wherein the hydrogen atoms of acidic radicals in part of said condensationproduct are substituted by atoms selected from the group consisting ofsodium, potassium and calcium.5. The ceramic paste of claim 4 wherein the amount of additive is betweenabout 0.5 to 1% by weight based on the weight of cement in the paste.6. The Ceramic paste of claim 7 which is concrete comprising portlandcement, sand gravel and water.7. The ceramic paste of claim 4 which is mortar comprising portland cement,sand and water."}
{"WKU":"039310841","Title":"Fluorocarbon polymer compositions, containing silicone film builder and","App_Date":"1973-06-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ronald Peter Buckley;John Wilmar Edwards;Barry William Farrant","Assignee":"Imperial Chemical Industries Limited","ICL_Class":"C08L 2718","References":"3062764;3202626;3325434;3476827;3489595;3644261","Claims":"We claim:1. A liquid coating composition free of chromium compounds consistingessentially ofa. A solid fluorocarbon polymer dispersed in an aqueous medium;b. an adhesive dissolved in the aqueous medium to assist adhesion of thefluorocarbon polymer to substrate surfaces, the adhesive being selectedfrom the group consisting of aluminum chloride, a halogen-containingcomplex phosphate of aluminum containing a chemically-bound hydroxycompound R-OH where R is a hydrogen atom or an inert organic group andwherein the ratio of aluminum-to-phosphorus is equal to or less than 1.8and a composition which is constituted by aluminum ions, phosphate ionsand the ions of a mineral acid wherein the ratio of the number of atoms ofaluminum to the number of phosphate ions is equal to or less than 1.8, theamount of the adhesive being such that the weight of aluminum is from 0.2to 4.5 gm per 100 gm of fluorocarbon polymer;c. a film building amount of an alkyl aryl polysiloxane dispersed in theaqueous medium; andd. a stabilizing amount of non-ionic surfactant; the polysiloxane andnon-ionic surfactant being present respectively in amounts to insure thatthe composition will form coatings on a substrate by a single applicationwhich, after drying, baking and sintering, are at least 20 .mu.m thickwithout discernible cracks, showing good adhesion to the substrate,non-stick properties and freedom from toxicity.2. A composition according to claim 1, the components being present inamounts such that the composition has a minimum shelf life of 8 weeks.3. A composition according to claim 1 wherein a solution of the alkyl arylpolysiloxane in an organic solvent is emulsified in the aqueous dispersionof the fluorocarbon polymer containing the adhesive.4. A composition according to claim 3 wherein the emulsion of the solutionof the aryl alkyl polysiloxane in the organic solvent is stabilized with anon-ionic surfactant and the aqueous dispersion of the fluorocarbonpolymer containing the adhesive is stabilized with a different non-ionicsurfactant.5. A composition according to claim 1 wherein the adhesive is thecomposition of aluminum ions, phosphate ions and hydrochloric acid ions.6. A coating composition according to claim 1 wherein the fluorocarbonpolymer is polytetrafluoroethylene, the film builder is the alkyl arylpolysiloxane dissolved in an organic solvent and there are present asstabilizers, at least one alkoxy derivative of a phenol or alcohol and atleast one ethylene oxide propylene oxide block copolymer.7. A liquid coating composition free of chromium compounds consistingessentially ofa. a solid fluorocarbon polymer dispersed in an aqueous medium;b. an adhesive dissolved in the aqueous medium to assist adhesion of thefluorocarbon polymer to substrate surfaces, the adhesive being selectedfrom the group consisting of aluminum chloride, aluminum hydroxychloride,a halogen-containing complex phosphate of aluminum containing achemically-bound hydroxy compound R-OH where R is a hydrogen atom or aninert organic group and wherein the ratio of aluminum-to-phosphorus isequal to or less than 1.8 and a composition which is constituted byaluminum ions, phosphate ions and the ions of a mineral acid wherein theratio of the number of atoms of aluminum to the number of phosphate ionsis equal to or less than 1.8, the amount of the adhesive being such thatthe weight of aluminum is from 0.2 to 4.5 gm per 100 gm of fluorocarbonpolymer;c. a film building amount of an alkyl aryl polysiloxane dispersed in theaqueous medium; andd. a stabilizing amount of non-ionic surfactant; the polysiloxane andnon-ionic surfactant being present respectively in amounts to insure thatthe composition will form coatings on a substrate by a single applicationwhich, after drying, baking and sintering, are at least 20 .mu.m thickwithout discernible cracks, showing good adhesion to the substrate,non-stick properties and freedom from toxicity.8. A composition according to claim 5 wherein the adhesive is made by theaddition of hydrochloric acid and orthophosphoric acid to aluminumhydroxychloride."}
{"WKU":"039310850","Title":"Synthetic resin compositions","App_Date":"1974-02-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Arthur H. Drelich;George J. Lukacs","Assignee":"Johnson & Johnson","ICL_Class":"C08L 3500;C08L 4500","References":"2444801;2758102;3032523;3079358;3211686;3280050;3308078;3547771;3640916;3692727;3697466;3706595;3720562;3821146;3832197;3865775;3873486","Claims":"We claim:1. A synthetic resin composition having an alkaline pH comprising:1. 0.1% to 60% by weight on a solids basis of a synthetic resin solidcolloidally dispersed in an aqueous medium;2. 0.01% to 5% by weight based on the weight of said resin solid, of apolyvalent metal complex coordination compound;3. 5% to 90% molecular equivalent on a stoichiometric basis of saidpolyvalent metal, of a water-soluble ionically active ammonium or alkalimetal salt of an acid capable of being chemically converted into anionically-inactive polyvalent metal salt of said acid by chemical reactionand precipitation or sequestration of said polyvalent metal salt; and4. carboxyl groups included in said synthetic resin or in a separatelyadded water-soluble polymeric carboxylic thickener which carboxyl groupsact to coagulate the composition.2. A synthetic resin composition as defined in claim 1 wherein thesynthetic resin is a carboxylated resin.3. A synthetic resin composition as defined in claim 1 wherein thesynthetic resin is a carboxylated styrene-butadiene resin.4. A synthetic composition as defined in claim 1 wherein the syntheticresin is an ammonium salt of a copolymer of acrylic acid and acrylamide.5. A synthetic resin composition as defined in claim 1 wherein thesynthetic resin is an acrylic latex resin.6. A synthetic resin composition as defined in claim 1 wherein thesynthetic resin is a polyvinyl chloride latex resin.7. A synthetic resin composition as defined in claim 1 wherein thesynthetic resin is a polyvinyl acetate latex resin.8. A synthetic resin composition as defined in claim 1 wherein thesynthetic resin is an ethylene-vinyl acetate latex resin.9. A synthetic resin composition as defined in claim 1 wherein the metalcomplex coordination compound is ammonium zirconyl carbonate.10. A synthetic resin composition as defined in claim 1 wherein the metalcomplex coordination compound is a metal ammine complex coordinationcompound.11. A synthetic resin composition as defined in claim 1 wherein the metalcomplex coordination compound is zinc tetrammine sulfate.12. A synthetic resin composition as defined in claim 1 wherein the metalcomplex coordination compound is zinc treatment carbonate.13. A synthetic resin composition as defined in claim 1 wherein the metalcomplex coordination compound is zinc tetrammine chloride.14. A synthetic resin composition as defined in claim 1 wherein the metalcomplex coordination compound is zinc tetrammine nitrate.15. A synthetic resin composition as defined in claim 1 wherein thewater-soluble, ionically-active salt of an acid is an ammonium salt ofphosphoric acid.16. A synthetic resin composition as defined in claim 1 wherein thewater-soluble, ionically-active salt of an acid is diammonium phosphate.17. A synthetic resin composition as defined in claim 1 wherein thewater-soluble, ionically-active salt of an acid is an ammonium salt of adibasic acid.18. A synthetic resin composition as defined in claim 1 wherein thewater-soluble, ionically-active salt of an acid is ammonium oxalate.19. A synthetic resin composition as defined in claim 1 wherein thewater-soluble, ionically-active salt of an acid is an ammonium salt of ahydroxy acid.20. A synthetic resin composition as defined in claim 1 wherein thewater-soluble, ionically-active salt of an acid is ammonium citrate.21. A synthetic resin composition as defined in claim 1 wherein thewater-soluble, ionically-active salt of an acid is an ammonium salt of amonocyclic aromatic acid.22. A synthetic resin composition as defined in claim 1 wherein thewater-soluble, ionically-active salt of an acid is ammonium benzoate.23. A synthetic resin composition as defined in claim 1 wherein thewater-soluble, ionically-active salt of an acid is an ammonium salt of analiphatic acid having at least 10 carbon atoms.24. A synthetic resin composition as defined in claim 1 wherein thewater-soluble ionically-active salt of an acid is ammonium palmitate.25. A synthetic resin composition as defined in claim 1 wherein asurfactant is added and at least one of said synthetic resin andsurfactant components has a hydroxy-containing coordinating ligand."}
{"WKU":"039310868","Title":"Thermosetting acrylic emulsions based on N-methylol allyl carbamates","App_Date":"1974-05-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Martin K. Lindemann","Assignee":"Chas. S. Tanner Co.","ICL_Class":"C08F 1604;C08L 6120","References":"2865893;3165498;3222419;3238167;3732184;3852233","Claims":"I claim:1. A thermosetting acrylic emulsion comprising water having dispersedtherein an emulsion copolymer of monoethylenic monomers at least 65% ofwhich are nonreactive acrylic monomers, and from 0.2-15% of reactivemonomers at least about one-third of which are an N-methylol derivative,or a C.sub.1 - C.sub.8 alcohol ether thereof, of an allyl carbamate havingthe formula:##EQU4##in which R.sub.1 is hydrogen or methyl, R.sub.2 is an alkylidene groupcontaining from 2-4 carbon atoms, and n is an integer from 0-10.2. An emulsion as recited in claim 1 in which said acrylic monomersconstitute at least 85% of the copolymer.3. An emulsion as recited in claim 1 in which at least 75% of the acrylicmonomers are C.sub.1 - C.sub.8 alcohol esters of alpha,beta-monoethylenically unsaturated monocarboxylic acids.4. An emulsion as recited in claim 1 in which said acrylic monomersconstitute at least 85% of the copolymer, and at least 75% of the acrylicmonomers are C.sub.1 - C.sub.8 alcohol esters of acrylic acid ormethacrylic acid providing a T.sub.g below 20.degree.C.5. An emulsion as recited in claim 4 in which the copolymer has a T.sub.gbelow 0.degree.C. down to about -60.degree.C.6. An emulsion as recited in claim 5 in which the N-methylol derivative orthe ether thereof is a derivative of N-methylol allyl carbamate and saidreactive monomers are present in an amount of from 0.5-10%.7. An emulsion as recited in claim 6 in which the propyl or butyl ether ofN-methylol allyl carbamate is used.8. An emulsion as recited in claim 6 in which said emulsion copolymer isformed by subjecting at least the first 35% of the monomers to anessentially adiabatic exotherm.9. An emulsion as recited in claim 1 in which said emulsion furtherincludes an aminoplast resin.10. A thermosetting acrylic emulsion comprising water having dispersedtherein an emulsion copolymer consisting essentially of at least 65% ofC.sub.1 - C.sub.8 alcohol esters of acrylic or methacrylic acids and from0.5-10% of reactive monomers at least about one-third of which are anN-methylol derivative, or a C.sub.1 - C.sub.8 alcohol ether thereof, ofallyl or methallyl carbamate, any balance of said copolymer being selectedfrom acrylonitrile, styrene, vinyl toluene, vinyl acetate, vinyl chlorideand vinylidene chloride, said copolymer having a T.sub.g below20.degree.C.11. An emulsion as recited in claim 10 in which said copolymer comprisesmethyl methacrylate, and a butyl acrylate providing a T.sub.g of fromabout -20.degree.C. to about 15.degree.C.12. An emulsion as recited in claim 11 in which said N-methylol derivativeis the propyl ether of N-methylol allyl carbamate."}
{"WKU":"039310876","Title":"Pressure-sensitive emulsion interpolymers containing","App_Date":"1974-05-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James C. Baatz;Albert E. Corey","Assignee":"Monsanto Company","ICL_Class":"C08F20000;C08F 2038","References":"3332904;3697618;3790533","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An aqueous emulsion of a pressure sensitive interpolymer wherein theinterpolymer comprises:A. from 0.1 to 1.5 weight percent of 2-acrylamido-2-methylpropanesulfonicacid, andB. at least one monomer selected from the group consisting of esters ofacrylic acid and methacrylic acid containing from 6 to 20 carbon atoms;and wherein the interpolymer has a weight average molecular weight in therange 10,000 to 1,000,000 and a glass transition temperature in the rangeof -15.degree. to -75.degree.C.2. The aqueous emulsion of claim 1 wherein the acid is neutralized with analkali metal base, ammonia or a monobasic amine of molecular weight in therange 31 to 300, and the pH of the emulsion is in the range 4.0 to 8.0.3. The aqueous emulsion of claim 1 wherein the Group B comonomer isselected from the group consisting of isobutyl acrylate, 2-ethylhexylacrylate and 2-ethylhexyl methacrylate.4. The aqueous emulsion of claim 1 wherein the monomer is vinyl acetate,methyl acrylate, or ethyl acrylate.5. The aqueous emulsion of claim 1 wherein the interpolymer containsbetween 0.25 and 1 weight percent of 2-acrylamido-2-methylpropanesulfonicacid.6. The aqueous emulsion of claim 5 wherein the acid is neutralized with analkali metal base, ammonia or a monobasic amine of molecular weight in therange 31 to 300, and the pH of the emulsion is in the range 4.0 to 8.0.7. The aqueous emulsion of claim 1 wherein the interpolymer has a molecularweight between 50,000 and 700,000.8. A process for improving the peel strength retention of apressure-sensitive acrylic interpolymer wherein the ratio of monomers inthe interpolymer is selected to provide an interpolymer glass transitiontemperature in the range of -15.degree. to -75.degree.C. which comprisescopolymerizing from 0.1 to 1.5 weight percent of2-acrylamido-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid with the monomers of theinterpolymer.9. The aqueous emulsion of claim 1 wherein the interpolymer furthercontains a monomer selected from the group consisting of alpha-olefinscontaining from 2 to 10 carbon atoms, vinyl esters of alkanoic acidscontaining from 3 to 10 carbon atoms, ethyl and methyl esters of acrylicand methacrylic acids, acrylonitrile, methacrylonitrile, styrene, vinyltoluene, and vinyl chloride."}
{"WKU":"039310884","Title":"Adhesive composition consisting of polyvinylalcohol solution or","App_Date":"1973-08-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Seiichi Sakurada;Yasuaki Miyazaki;Tatsuaki Hattori;Makoto Shiraishi;Taisei Inoue","Assignee":"Kuraray Co., Ltd.;Asahi Co., Ltd.;Koyo Sangyo Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"C08L 2904;C08L 2336","References":"2277083;2430479;3350362;3382215;3791849","Claims":"We claim:1. An adhesive composition comprising (1) an aqueous solution of polyvinylalcohol and (2) a hydrophobic solution of an isocyanate compound.2. An adhesive composition according to claim 1, containing an anionicsurface active agent.3. An adhesive composition according to claim 1, containing an aqueousemulsion of vinyl acetate polymer.4. An adhesive composition according to claim 1, containing an aqueouslatex of butadiene polymer.5. An adhesive composition according to claim 1, containing both an aqueousemulsion of vinyl acetate polymer and an aqueous latex of butadienepolymer.6. An adhesive composition according to claim 5 containing an anionicsurface active agent.7. An adhesive composition according to claim 3, wherein the aqueousemulsion of vinyl acetate polymer is selected from the group consisting ofan aqueous emulsion of polyvinyl acetate, an aqueous emulsion of acopolymer of vinyl acetate and ethylene and an aqueous emulsion of acopolymer of vinyl acetate and another comonomer of polymerizable withvinyl acetate.8. An adhesive composition according to claim 4, wherein the aqueous latexof butadiene polymer is selected from the group consisting of an aqueouslatex of a copolymer of styrene and butadiene and an aqueous latex of acopolymer of acrylonitrile and butadiene."}
{"WKU":"039310892","Title":"Acid compositions comprised of polymeric","App_Date":"1974-06-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Curtis Lee Karl","Assignee":"General Mills Chemicals, Inc.","ICL_Class":"G08F22056","References":"2558030;2809959;3238141;3332904","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property orprivilege is claimed are defined as follows:1. A composition of matter comprising water in an amount of at least 25% byweight of the composition, an acid selected from the mineral acids, thewater soluble carboxylic acids containing one to four carbon atoms andmixtures thereof in an amount to produce a pH level of about 2 or below,and a thickener selected from a homopolymer and the alkali and alkalineearth metal salts of the homopolymer of2-acrylamido-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid in an amount of about 0.05% to5.0% by weight of the composition.2. The composition of claim 1 wherein an alcohol containing two to threecarbon atoms is included in an amount of about 5% to 10% by weight of thecomposition.3. The composition of claim 1 wherein the thickener is included in amountsof about 1% to 4% by weight of the composition.4. The composition of claim 1 wherein the thickener is the homopolymer of2-acrylamido-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid in an amount of about 1% to 4%by weight of the composition."}
{"WKU":"039310906","Title":"Rubber composition for flexible belts","App_Date":"1974-04-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Paul C. Amatangelo","Assignee":"Xerox Corporation","ICL_Class":"C08L 9100","References":"2960539;3437621;3787341","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A composition for manufacture of belts used to feed or transportsubstrate material, said belts being characterized by resistance toovercure reversion, by a high coefficient of friction for said substratematerial and by a high resistance to physical degradation due to dynamicmechanical stress, comprising, synthetic polyisoprene; about 6.0 to about15.0 parts by weight metallic oxide per 100 parts of polyisoprene; about1.0 to about 5.0 parts by weight fatty acid per 100 parts of polyisoprene;0.0 to about 2.0 parts by weight antioxidant per 100 parts polyisopreneand sulfur-containing cure ingredients and accelerators comprising about0.5 to about 1.5 parts by weight of at least one organic polysulfidechosen from the group consisting of the dimorpholine polysulfides and theliquid aliphatic polysulfides per 100 parts of polyisoprene, about 0.5 toabout 1.5 parts by weight of at least one sulfenamide accelerator per 100parts of polyisoprene, about 0.5 to about 1.0 part by weight of at leastone thiuram sulfide of the type having at least two sulfide groups ormercaptobenzothiazyl disulfide, accelerator per 100 parts of polyisoprene,and about 0.1 to about 1.3 parts by weight sulfur per 100 parts ofpolyisoprene.2. The composition of claim 1 wherein said fatty acid is stearic acid.3. The composition of Claim 1 wherein said anti-oxidant is selected fromthe group consisting of 2,2 -bis(4-methyl-6-tertiary-butyl phenol;2,2 -methylene bis (4-ethyl-6-tertiary-butyl phenol; hydroquinone; and amixture of di-para-methoxydiphenylamine, diphenyl-para-phenylene diamine,and phenyl-beta-naphthyl-amine.4. The composition of claim 1 wherein the sulfenamide accelerator isselected from the group consisting of N-cyclohexyl-2-benzothiazolesulfenamide and N-tertiary-butyl-2-benzothiazole sulfenamide.5. The composition of claim 1 wherein the thiuram sulfide accelerator isselected form the group consisting of tetramethyl thiuram disulfide andmercaptobenzothiazyl disulfide.6. The composition of claim 1 wherein the metallic oxide is zinc oxide.7. The composition of claim 1 wherein the organic polysulfide is4,4 -dithiodimorpholine.8. A belt material for the manufacture of flexible paper feed belts insheet feeders, transporters or separators in xerographic machines made bythe process of:a. adding to synthetic isoprene rubber gum about 6.0 to about 15.0 parts byweight zinc oxide per 100 parts of said gum; about 1.0 to about 5.0 partsby weight fatty acid per 100 parts of said gum; 0.0 to about 2.0 parts byweight anti-oxidant per 100 parts of said gum; and sulfur-containing cureand accelerator ingredients consisting essentially of about 0.5 to about1.5 parts by weight 4,4 -dithiodimorpholine per 100 parts of said gum;about 0.5 to about 1.5 parts by weight of a sulfenamide accelerator per100 parts of said gum, about 0.5 to about 1.5 parts by weight of thiuramsulfide of the type having at least two sulfide groups ormercaptobenzothiazyl disulfide, accelerator per 100 parts of said gum; and0.0 to about 1.3 parts by weight sulfur per 100 parts of said gum; andb. working the ingredients of (a) into said gum to form a blend of theingredients and the isoprene rubber gum.9. The belt material made by the process of claim 8 further comprisingforming the uniformly dispersed blend into a shape suitable for flexiblebelts and curing said blend at elevated temperatures.10. The belt material made by the process of claim 9 wherein the blend iscured by exposing said blend to heat at about 300.degree.F., to about340.degree.F.11. The belt material made by the process of claim 8 wherein theingredients of step (b) are pre-mixed and added to said gum.12. The belt material made by the process of claim 8 wherein thesulfur-containing cure and accelerator ingredients of step (b) arepre-mixed and added to said gum.13. The belt material made by the process of claim 8 wherein the fatty acidis stearic acid.14. The belt material made by the process of claim 8 wherein theanti-oxidant is selected from the group consisting of diarylamines,hydroquinones, aldehyde-amines, substituted phenols, bis phenols andmixtures of aromatic amines.15. The belt material made by the process of claim 8 wherein thesulfenamide accelerator is selected from the group consisting ofN-cyclohexyl-2-benzothiazole sulfenamide andN-tertiary-butyl-2-benzothiazole sulfenamide.16. The belt material made by the process of claim 8 wherein the thiuramsulfide accelerator is selected from the group consisting of tetramethylthiuram disulfide and mercaptobenzothiazyl disulfide.17. The belt material made by the process of claim 8 further comprisingadding up to 15.0 parts by weight reinforcing fillers or plasticizer orboth per 100 parts of said gum, said fillers or plasticizers comprisingingredients having no effect on the curing of the gum."}
{"WKU":"039310914","Title":"Polyvinyl chloride compositions plasticized with m-ethylphenyl phosphate","App_Date":"1973-05-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Pierre M. J. G. de Radzitzky d Ostrowick","Assignee":"Labofina S.A.","ICL_Class":"C08K  552","References":"2168587;3022331;3125529;3549730;3576923","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Plasticized polyvinyl chloride compositions comprising polyvinylchloride and an a plasticizer consisting essentially of organic phosphateselected from the group consisting of the phosphates of the formula(C.sub.6 H.sub.5).sub.x (m-C.sub.2 H.sub.5 C.sub.6 H.sub.4).sub.yPO.sub.4, wherein x is 0, 1 or 2 and y is 1, 2 or 3, x + y being 3, andmixtures of said phosphates, the amount of said organic phosphates beingwithin the range of 20 to 100 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight ofpolyvinyl chloride.2. The plasticized polyvinyl chloride of claim 1 wherein said organicphosphate is tri(m-ethylphenyl) phosphate.3. The plasticized polyvinyl chloride of claim 1 wherein said organicphosphate is one prepared from a metaethylphenol containing thepara-isomer thereof in concentration of less than 10% by weight.4. The plasticized polyvinyl chloride of claim 1 wherein said organicphosphate is one prepared from a metaethylphenol containing theortho-isomer thereof in concentration of less than 1% by weight.5. A process for plasticizing polyvinyl chloride comprising incorporatinginto a polyvinyl chloride polymer 20 to 100 parts by weight of an organicphosphate plasticizer per 100 parts by weight of polyvinyl chloride, saidorganic phosphate consisting essentially of one having the formula(C.sub.6 H.sub.5).sub.x (m-C.sub.2 H.sub.5 C.sub.6 H.sub.4).sub.yPO.sub.4, wherein x is 0, 1 or 2 and y is 1, 2 or 3, x + y being 3.6. The process of claim 5 wherein said organic phosphate istri(m-ethylphenyl) phosphate."}
{"WKU":"039310922","Title":"Finely-divided polymeric solids having improved physical properties","App_Date":"1974-04-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Gerhard G. Ramlow;Louis C. Pizzini;John T. Patton, Jr.;John R. Murphy","Assignee":"BASF Wyandotte Corporation","ICL_Class":"C08F21602;C08F26706;C08F  212","References":"2851379;3089863;3222421;3652489;3718714","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property orprivilege is claimed are defined as follows:1. A finely-divided dispersed solid polymer prepared by polymerizing at atemperature between 25.degree.C. and 180.degree.C. in the presence of fromabout 0.05 to 5.0 weight percent based on the weight of (a) below of afree radical catalyst and from about one part to nineteen parts by weightper part of (b) below of an organic solvent having a boiling point between25.degree.C. and 250.degree.C.:a. from about 55 to 95 weight percent of an ethylenically unsaturatedmonomer or mixture of monomers, andb. from about 45 to 5 weight percent of a hydroxy-terminated organiccompound having from one to eight hydroxyl groups, a hydroxyl equivalentweight of from 500 to 10,000 and containing a polymerizablecarbon-to-carbon double bond, said weight percents of (a) and (b) beingbased on the total weight of (a) and (b).2. The polymer of claim 1 wherein the ethylenically unsaturated monomer isselected from the group consisting of styrene, acrylonitrile, vinylidenechloride, methylmethacrylate, acrylamide and mixtures thereof.3. The polymer of claim 1 wherein the ethylenically unsaturated monomer isa mixture of styrene and acrylonitrile.4. The polymer of claim 1 wherein the ethylenically unsaturated monomer isstyrene.5. The polymer of claim 1 wherein the hydroxy-terminated organic compoundis prepared by the reaction of from one to two moles of an organiccompound having both ethylenic unsaturation and a hydroxyl, carboxyl orepoxy group with one mole of a hydroxy-containing polyalkylene polyetherfollowed by reaction with an alkylene oxide to yield a compound having anacid number of less than one.6. The polymer of claim 5 wherein the organic compound having bothethylenic unsaturation and a hydroxyl, carboxyl or epoxy group is maleicanhydride.7. The polymer of claim 5 wherein the hydroxy-containing polyalkylene etheris an alkylene oxide adduct of trimethylolpropane, glycerol, propyleneglycol and mixtures thereof.8. The polymer of claim 1 wherein the ethylenically unsaturated monomercomprises from 60 to 80 weight percent based on the total weight ofmonomer and hydroxyterminated organic compound.9. The polymer of claim 1 wherein the organic solvent is an alkanol.10. The polymer of claim 1 wherein the alkanol is isopropanol.11. A process for the preparation of a finelydivided dispersed solidcomprising polymerizing at a temperature between 25.degree.C. and180.degree.C. in the presence of from about 0.05 to 5.0 weight percentbased on the weight of (a) below of a free radical catalyst and from aboutone part to nineteen parts by weight per part of (b) below of an organicsolvent having a boiling point between 25.degree.C. and 250.degree.C.:a. from about 55 to 95 weight percent of an ethylenically unsaturatedmonomer or mixture of monomers andb. from about 45 to 5 weight percent of a hydroxy-terminated organiccompound having from one to eight hydroxyl groups, a hydroxyl equivalentweight of from 500 to 10,000 and containing a polymerizablecarbon-to-carbon double bond, said weight percents of (a) and (b) beingbased on the total weight of (a) and (b).12. The process of claim 11 wherein the ethylenically unsaturated monomeris selected from the group consisting of styrene, acrylonitrile,vinylidene chloride, methylmethacrylate, acrylamide and mixtures thereof.13. The process of claim 11 wherein the ethylenically unsaturated monomeris a mixture of styrene and acrylonitrile.14. The process of claim 11 wherein the ethylenically unsaturated monomeris styrene.15. The process of claim 11 wherein the hydroxy-terminated organic compoundis prepared by the reaction of from one to two moles of an organiccompound having both ethylenic unsaturation and a hydroxyl, carboxyl orepoxy group with one mole of a hydroxy-containing polyalkylene polyetherfollowed by reaction with an alkylene oxide to yield a compound having anacid number of less than one.16. The process of claim 15 wherein the organic compound having bothethylenic unsaturation and a hydroxyl, carboxyl or epoxy group is maleicanhydride.17. The process of claim 15 wherein the hydroxy-containing polyalkyleneether is an alkylene oxide adduct of trimethylolpropane, glycerol,propylene glycol and mixtures thereof.18. The process of claim 11 wherein the ethylenically unsaturated monomercomprises from 60 to 80 weight percent based on the total weight ofmonomer and hydroxy-terminated organic compound.19. The process of claim 11 wherein the organic solvent is an alkanol.20. The process of claim 11 wherein the alkanol is isopropanol.21. A process for the preparation of a finelydivided solid polymercomprising:a. polymerizing at a temperature between 25.degree.C. and 180.degree.C. inthe presence of from about 0.05 to 5.0 weight percent based on the weightof (a) below of a free radical catalyst and from about one part tonineteen parts by weight per part ofb. below of an organic solvent having a boiling point between 25.degree.C.and 250.degree.C.:"}
{"WKU":"039310930","Title":"Thermosetting compositions of a poly(arylacetylene) and a phenolaldehyde","App_Date":"1975-02-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Joseph Henry Del Nero","Assignee":"Hercules Incorporated","ICL_Class":"C08K  501;C08L 6100","References":"3705131;3748305","Claims":"What I claim and desire to protect by Letters Patent is:1. A thermosetting composition comprising from about 10 to about 50% byweight of a phenol-aldehyde resin and from about 50 to about 90% by weightof a polymer composition comprising a prepolymer of at least onepolyacetylenically substituted aromatic compound, said prepolymer having anumber average molecular weight of from about 900 to about 12,000, a ratioof aromatic protons to olefinic protons greater than about 2.4 andcontaining from about 5 to about 20% terminal acetylenic groups by weightof the prepolymer.2. The composition of claim 1 wherein the prepolymer comprises a polymer ofa diethynylbenzene.3. The composition of claim 2 wherein the polymer of a diethynylbenzene isa copolymer of a diethynylbenzene and phenylacetylene.4. The composition of claim 1 wherein the polymer composition additionallycomprises, as a fluidizer for the prepolymer, from about 2 to about 70%,by weight of the prepolymer, of a monomeric acetylenically substitutedaromatic compound having a melting point below about 185.degree.C. and aboiling point above about 250.degree.C.5. The composition of claim 4 wherein the fluidizer is diphenylbutadiyne.6. The composition of claim 4 wherein the fluidizer is diphenylacetylene.7. The composition of claim 1 wherein the phenolaldehyde resin is a novolacresin.8. The composition of claim 1 wherein the phenolaldehyde resin is a resoleresin.9. The composition of claim 1 wherein the phenolaldehyde resin is anepoxy-modified novolac resin.10. The composition of claim 1 wherein the amount of phenol-aldehyde resinis from about 10 to about 25% by weight.11. A thermoset resin obtained by heat curing the composition of claim 1.12. The process of preparing a thermoset resin essentially free ofaliphatic unsaturation which comprises1. in a first stage (A) preparing a polymer composition by polymerizing atleast one polyacetylenically substituted aromatic compound by heating saidcompound with an aromatization catalyst in an inert organic diluent to atemperature of from about 55.degree. to about 250.degree.C. until fromabout 30 to about 90% of said compound has been converted to polymer, (B)separating the polymer composition from the polymerization reactionmixture, and2. in a second stage, (A) combining said polymer composition with aphenol-aldehyde resin, the amount of said resin in the resultingthermosetting composition being from about 10 to about 50% by weight, and(B) heating the thermosetting composition to a temperature of from about100.degree. to about 300.degree.C."}
{"WKU":"039310949","Title":"Filled thermoplastic containing fibrous dispersion aid","App_Date":"1973-07-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Leon Segal;Albert H. Steinberg","Assignee":"Allied Chemical Corporation","ICL_Class":"C08K  714","References":"2667465;3682859;3708456;3728294","Claims":"We claim:1. A method for improving the processability of highly filled thermoplasticcompositions, which are formable under heat and pressure and which have 25to 50% by weight filler, comprising the steps of:a. combining the thermoplastic polymer, filler and a dispersion materialconsisting essentially of 0.5 to 15% fibrous material having an aspectratio at least about 10 times the aspect ratio of the filler said fibrousmaterial being of sufficient length before blending such that its lengthafter blending is less than about 1/8 inch; andb. intimately blending the resultant mixture.2. The method of claim 1 wherein the fibrous material is added in amountsof 1-5%.3. The method of claim 1 wherein the fibrous material is glass fiber.4. The method of claim 1 wherein the fibrous material is alumina whisker.5. The method of claim 1 wherein the fibrous material is a syntheticpolymeric material.6. The method of claim 1 wherein the mixture is blended in an extruder.7. The method of claim 1 wherein the mixture is blended in an injectionmolding machine.8. Filled thermoplastic molding compositions possessing improvedprocessability comprising 15-80% by weight of the total mixturethermoplastic polymer, 25-50% filler and, as a dispersion effecting aid,0.5-15% fibrous material having an aspect ratio at least about 10 timesthe aspect ratio of the filler and having a length of less than about 1/8inch.9. The composition of claim 8 wherein the fibrous material is present in anamount of 1-5% by weight of the total mixture.10. The filled thermoplastic composition of claim 9 wherein the fibrousmaterial is present in an amount of 0.7-18% by weight of the filler.11. The filled thermoplastic composition of claim 8 wherein the fibrousmaterial and/or filler are coated with processing agents in amounts lessthan 2% of the total inorganic material.12. The compositions of claim 8 wherein the filler contains 15-40% glassfibers.13. A homogeneous, uniformed quality product prepared by shaping thecomposition of claim 8 in an extruder.14. A homogeneous, uniformed quality product prepared by shaping thecomposition of claim 8 in an injection molding machine."}
{"WKU":"039310957","Title":"Fire retardant thermosetting resin composition","App_Date":"1974-06-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Renichi Kondo;Koji Nakagawa;Makoto Fukuda;Ikuji Kishi;Tateki Ohtsuki","Assignee":"Nippon Kayaku K.K.;Denki Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha","ICL_Class":"C08K  322","References":"1853406;1932889;2242258;2452041;3733283","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A fire retardant thermosetting resin composition consisting essentiallyof a thermosetting resin and tricalcium aluminate hexahydrate crystals,wherein the proportion of the tricalcium aluminate hexahydrate crystals isabout 10 to 90% by weight based on the total weight of the tricalciumaluminate hexahydrate crystals and the resin, and wherein said tricalciumaluminate hexahydrate crystals have a particle size ranging from about 0.5to 50.mu..2. The fire retardant thermosetting resin composition as claimed in claim1, wherein the proportion of the tricalcium aluminium hexahydrate crystalsis 30 to 70% by weight.3. The fire retardant thermosetting resin composition as claimed in claim1, wherein said thermosetting resin comprises a urea resin, a phenolresin, a furan resin, an amino resin, a melamine resin, an unsaturatedpolyester resin, a diallyphthalate resin, an epoxy resin, a polyurethaneresin, a silicone resin, an alkyd resin or a mixture thereof.4. The fire retardant thermosetting resin composition as claimed in claim1, wherein said thermosetting resin is an unsaturated polyester resin.5. The fire retardant thermosetting resin composition as claimed in claim1, wherein said thermosetting resin is an epoxy resin.6. The fire retardant thermosetting resin composition as claimed in claim1, wherein said thermosetting resin comprises an uncured thermosettingresin.7. The fire retardant thermosetting resin composition as claimed in claim1, wherein said thermosetting resin comprises a cured thermosetting resin.8. A thermosetting resin article comprising a shaped and cured molding ofthe composition as claimed in claim 6."}
{"WKU":"039310965","Title":"Low fluid loss cementing compositions","App_Date":"1974-10-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Lawrence James Guilbault;Frederick Alan Hoffstadt","Assignee":"Calgon Corporation","ICL_Class":"C08K  322;C08K  334","References":"3094501;3661880","Claims":"We claim:1. A low fluid loss cement composition capable of forming a fluid slurrywhen mixed with water, said cement composition comprising dry hydrauliccement and from about 0.05 to about 5.0 percent by weight, based on dryhydraulic cement, of a water-soluble polymer ofmethacrylamidopropyltrimethylammonium chloride.2. A composition as in claim 1 wherein the polymer is a copolymer ofacrylamide and methacrylamidopropyltrimethylammonium chloride."}
{"WKU":"039310973","Title":"Ethylene-propylene copolymer rubber composition having high modulus","App_Date":"1974-12-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ryota Fujio;Nobuyuki Kataoka;Motozumi Kitayama;Yoshihide Fukabori;Shiro Anzai","Assignee":"Bridgestone Tire Company Limited","ICL_Class":"C08K  304;C08K  322;C08L 2326","References":"3179715;3632680","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An ethylene-propylene copolymer rubber composition having a high Young smodulus, which comprises100 parts by weight of a mixture of the following ingredients (a) and (b)in a weight ratio of ingredient (a)/ingredient (b) of 67/33-50/50,said ingredient (a) being an ethylene-propylene copolymer having a Mooneyviscosity of at least 75, which may contain an unsaturated thirdcomponent, andsaid ingredient (b) being divinylbenzene,(c) 0.3-2.5 parts by weight of an organic peroxide, and(d) 0.01-0.25 part by weight of sulfur,said rubber composition when cured at 120-180.degree.C being homogeneousand having a Young s modulus of 200-500 Kg/cm.sup.2, a tensile strength ofat least 200 Kg/cm.sup.2, an elongation of at least 300%, a tear energy.GAMMA. of at least 10 Kg/cm, and retentions of Young s modulus andtensile strength at 70.degree.C of at least 50%.2. An ethylene-propylene copolymer rubber composition having a high Young smodulus, which comprises100 parts by weight of a mixture of the following ingredients (a) and (b)in a weight ratio of ingredient (a)/ingredient (b) of 67/33-50/50,said ingredient (a) being an ethylene-propylene copolymer having a Mooneyviscosity of at least 75, which may contain an unsaturated thirdcomponent, andsaid ingredient (b) being divinylbenzene,(c) 0.3-2.5 parts by weight of an organic peroxide,(d) 0.01-0.25 part hy weight of sulfur, and(e) 0.1-5.0 parts by weight of an ultraviolet absorbing agent,said rubber composition when cured at 120-180.degree.C being homogeneousand having a Young s modulus of 200-500 Kg/cm.sup.2, a tensile strength ofat least 200 Kg/cm.sup.2, an elongation of at least 300%, a tear energy.GAMMA. of at least 10 Kg/cm, and retentions of Young s modulus andtensile strength at 70.degree.C of at least 50%.3. An ethylene-propylene copolymer rubber composition having a high Young smodulus, which comprises100 parts by weight of a mixture of the following ingredients (a) and (b)in a weight ratio of ingredient (a)/ingredient (b) of 67/33-50/50,said ingredient (a) being an ethylene-propylene copolymer having a Mooneyviscosity of at least 75, which may contain an unsaturated thirdcomponent, andsaid ingredient (b) being divinylbenzene,(c) 0.3-2.5 parts by weight of an organic peroxide,(d) 0.01-0.25 part by weight of sulfur, and(e ) 1-10 parts by weight of carbon black and/or red iron oxide,said rubber composition when cured at 120-180.degree.C being homogeneousand having a Young s modulus of 200-500 Kg/cm.sup.2, a tensile strength ofat least 200 Kg/cm.sup.2, an elongation of at least 300%, a tear energy.GAMMA. of at least 10 Kg/cm, and retentions of Young s modulus andtensile strength at 70.degree.C of at least 50%.4. An ethylene-propylene copolymer rubber composition having a high Young smodulus, which comprises100 parts by weight of a mixture of the following ingredients (a) and (b)in a weight ratio of ingredient (a)/ingredient (b) of 67/33-50/50,said ingredient (a) being an ethylene-propylene copolymer having a Mooneyviscosity of at least 75, andsaid ingredient (b) being divinylbenzene,(c) 0.3-2.5 parts by weight of an organic peroxide,(d) 0.01-0.25 part by weight of sulfur, and(e ) 1-10 parts by weight of a mixture of ultraviolet absorbing agent andpigment,said rubber composition when cured at 120-180.degree.C being homogeneousand having a Young s modulus of 200-500 Kg/cm.sup.2, a tensile strength ofat least 200 Kg/cm.sup.2, an elongation of at least 300%, a tear energy.GAMMA. of at least 10 Kg/cm, and retentions of Young s modulus andtensile strength at 70.degree.C of at least 50%.5. An ethylene-propylene copolymer rubber composition having a high Young smodulus, which comprises100 parts by weight of a mixture of the following ingredients (a) and (b)in a weight ratio of ingredient (a)/ingredient (b) of 67/33-50/50,said ingredient (a) being an ethylene-propylene copolymer having a Mooneyviscosity of at least 75, andsaid ingredient (b) being divinylbenzene,(c) 0.3-2.5 parts by weight of an organic peroxide,(d) 0.01-0.25 part by weight of sulfur, and(e  ) 1-10 parts by weight of a mixture of ultraviolet absorbing agent andat least one of carbon black and red iron oxide,said rubber composition when cured at 120-180.degree.C being homogeneousand having a Young s modulus of 200-500 Kg/cm.sup.2, a tensile strength ofat least 200 Kg/cm.sup.2, an elongation of at least 300%, a tear energy.GAMMA. of at least 10 Kg/cm, and retentions of Young s modulus andtensile strength at 70.degree.C of at least 50%.6. A rubber composition according to claim 1, wherein saidethylene-propylene copolymer is a rubbery copolymer having a Mooneyviscosity of at least 75 and containing 40-80% of ethylene unit, 60-20% ofpropylene unit and 0-10% of unsaturated component unit.7. A rubber composition according to claim 1, wherein the weight ratio ofethylene-propylene copolymer/divinylbenzene is 65/35-55/45.8. A rubber composition according to claim 1, wherein said organic peroxideis dicumyl peroxide, di-t-butyl peroxide,1,1-di-t-butyl-3,3,5-peroxycyclohexane, t-butyl cumyl peroxide or2,5-dimethyl-2,5-di-t-butylperoxyhexane.9. A rubber composition according to claim 1, wherein said organic peroxideis dicumyl peroxide.10. A rubber composition according to claim 1, wherein the amount of saidorganic peroxide is 0.5-1.5 parts by weight based on 100 parts by weightof the total amount of ethylene-propylene copolymer and divinylbenzene.11. A rubber composition according to claim 1, wherein the amount of sulfuris 0.03-0.16 part by weight based on 100 parts by weight of the totalamount of ethylene-propylene copolymer and divinylbenzene.12. A rubber composition according to claim 2, wherein said ultravioletabsorbing agent is6-chloro-2-(2 -hydroxy-3 -t-butyl-5 -methyl)benzotriazole,2-hydroxy-4-n-octoxybenzophenone, 2,2 -thiobis-(4-t-octylphenolate)-n-butylamine nickel, 2 -hydroxy-4 -n-octoxybenzotriazole,nickel dibutyldithiocarbamate or a mixture of2-hydroxy-4-n-octoxybenzophenone and nickel dibutyldithiocarbamate in thesame weight.13. A rubber composition according to claim 2, wherein the amount of saidultraviolet absorbing agent is 0.5-4.0 parts by weight based on 100 partsby weight of the total amount of ethylene-propylene copolymer anddivinylbenzene.14. A rubber composition according to claim 4, wherein said pigment isPhthalocyanine Green or Permanent Carmine.15. A rubber composition according to claim 5, wherein said ultravioletabsorbing agent is 2,2 -thiobis-(4-t-octyl phenolate)-n-butylamine nickelor nickel dibutyldithiocarbamate."}
{"WKU":"039310981","Title":"Method for producing webs, panels or sandwich elements of foam plastics","App_Date":"1974-02-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Peter Herweg;Franz Prager","Assignee":"Bayer Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"B29H  720","References":"3084973;3172072;3378613;3684415;3691004;3854917","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method for producing a continuous fiber reinforced foam plastic webcomprising:a. directing a continuous roving onto a moving support means by means of anair nozzle wherein the roving is deposited in the form of random loops andthe angle between the air nozzle and the moving support is used to controlthe form of the loops formed in the roving as it is deposited;b. depositing a foamable reaction mixture onto said support means eitherbefore or after the deposition of said roving;c. allowing said mixture to foam and permeate said roving; andd. using the relative sequence and time lag between the mixture depositionand the roving deposition to control the ultimate position of the rovingin the foamed web and to insure that the distribution of the roving isthree dimensional such that the roving provides reinforcement for the web."}
{"WKU":"039310990","Title":"Fire retardant polyester fibers","App_Date":"1972-11-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Henry L. King","Assignee":"Monsanto Company","ICL_Class":"C08K  553","References":"2572076;2636876;2743258;2891915;3027349;3406224;3525712;3629365","Claims":"We claim:1. A synthetic fiber in which the fiber-forming substance is any long chainsynthetic polymer comprising at least 85% by weight of an ester of adihydric alcohol and terephthalic acid and not more than about 20%, basedon the weight of the polymer, of a compound having the general formula:##SPC3##where R is a radical selected from the group consisting of alkyl, aryl, andbrominated aryl; where x + y equal 4-8, and where n is an integer of from2-100.2. The fiber of claim 1 wherein said compound is present in the polymer inthe amount of about 10-20%.3. The fiber of claim 1 wherein n is about 3-10.4. The fiber of claim 1 wherein n is about 3.5. The fiber of claim 1 wherein the compound is poly(tetrabromo diphenophenyl phosphonate).6. The fiber of claim 5 wherein said compound is present in the amount ofabout 15%.7. The fiber of claim 1 wherein said ester is polyethylene terephthalate."}
{"WKU":"039311007","Title":"Flame retardant polycarbonate composition","App_Date":"1973-12-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Victor Mark","Assignee":"General Electric Company","ICL_Class":"C08L 6900","References":"3775367","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A flame retardant aromatic carbonate polymer composition comprising inadmixture an aromatic carbonate polymer and a minor amount of an additivehaving the following formula:"}
{"WKU":"039311015","Title":"Flameproof moulding compositions based on polyolefins","App_Date":"1973-05-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Franz-Josef Dany;Joachim Wortmann;Peter Munch;Gunther Braun","Assignee":"Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft;Ruhrchemie Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C08G  600","References":"2544706;2603614;3666715;3714114;3808127;3810850;3810862;3819575","Claims":"We claim:1. A flameproof molding composition comprising a pulverulent blend of apolyolefin and a plurality of flame retardants consisting of, in additionto red phosphorus, melamine, the amount of flame retardants being about10-30 weight % of said composition, the quantitative ratio of redphosphorus and melamine being 1:1 - 3:1.2. The moulding composition as claimed in claim 1, wherein the polyolefinis polyethylene or polypropylene.3. The molding composition as claimed in claim 1, wherein the redphosphorus has a particle size of 75-200 microns.4. The moulding composition as claimed in claim 1, wherein the melamine hasa particle size of 75-200 microns.5. The moulding composition as claimed in claim 1, wherein the quantitativeratio of red phosphorus and melamine is 1:1."}
{"WKU":"039311023","Title":"Moulding composition based on poly(oxymethylene)","App_Date":"1974-10-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hans-Hermann Grossmann;Karlheinz Burg;Gunter Sextro","Assignee":"Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C08K  513;C08K  521;C08K  534","References":"2985619;3219621;3240748;3316206;3767610","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Moulding composition based on poly(oxymethylene), consisting of (a) from99.9 to 95 weight percent of a poly(oxymethylene) and(b) from 0.1 to 5 weight percent of a hydroxyphenyl-ureido-s-triazinehaving the formula##SPC4##in which R.sup.1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl radical or an alkoxyradical each having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a phenyl or a phenoxyradical -- each of which may be substituted by a hydroxyl group or anamino group being able to carry one or two alkyl radicals having from 1 to6 carbon atoms each -- or an amino group which may carry one or two alkylradicals having each from 1 to 6 carbon atoms; and R.sup.2 represents ahydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkyl radical or alkoxy radical eachhaving from 1 to 6 carbon atoms or a phenyl radical."}
{"WKU":"039311031","Title":"Copper inhibitors for polyolefins","App_Date":"1974-10-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William Baptist Hardy","Assignee":"American Cyanamid Company","ICL_Class":"C08G  600","References":"3734885;3849942","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A stabilizer composition useful in the enhancement of the resistance ofpolyolefins to copper-catalyzed thermal degradation comprising, incombination, a hindered-phenol antioxidant and a compound of the formula##SPC4##wherein R is alkyl of 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and X is hydrogen or --OR.2. A composition as defined in claim 1 wherein R is methyl and X ishydrogen or methoxy.3. A composition as defined in claim 2 wherein X is methoxy.4. A composition as defined in claim 1 wherein said hindered-phenolantioxidant is pentaerythrityltetrakis-3-(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)propionate.5. A composition comprising a polyolefin and a stabilizing amount of thestabilizer composition of claim 1.6. A composition as defined in claim 5 wherein said polyolefin ispolypropylene.7. A composition comprising a polyolefin and a stabilizing amount of thestabilizing composition of claim 2.8. A composition comprising a polyolefin and a stabilizing amount of thestabilizing composition of claim 3.9. Polypropylene stabilized against copper-catalyzed thermal degradation bythe combination of (a) an amount of a hindered-phenol antioxidantsufficient to stabilize said polypropylene against thermal degradation inthe absence of copper and (b) an amount of a compound of claim 1sufficient to reduce the effects of copper on such thermal degradationeven in the presence of said hindered-phenol antioxidant.10. A composition as defined in claim 9 wherein said compound has theformula##SPC5##11. A composition as defined in claim 10 wherein R is methyl and X ishydrogen or methoxy.12. A composition as defined in claim 11 wherein X is methoxy.13. A composition as defined in claim 9 wherein said hindered phenolantioxidant is pentaerythrityltetrakis-3-(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)propionate."}
{"WKU":"039311040","Title":"Plastics stabilized against ultraviolet radiation","App_Date":"1974-06-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Walter Luders;Edgar Fischer","Assignee":"Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C08G  600","References":"3269963;3341625;3532668;3594346;3629365;3676393","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A plastic material consisting essentially of a polymer selected fromhomopolymers and copolymers of ethylene, propylene, butene and4-methyl-1-pentene and polystyrene and from 0.5 to 2% by weight of anultra-violet radiation stabilizer which is a tertiary phosphine oxide orsulfide of the formula##EQU3##in which X is oxygen or sulfur and either (a) R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are.beta.-cyano-ethyl and R.sub.3 is a radical other than .beta.-cyanoethylselected from the group of radicals consisting of hydroxyalkyl, haloalkyl,hydroxy haloalkyl carbalkoxyalkyl, acyloxyalkyl, phenylhydroxyalkylwherein the phenyl radical may be substituted by one or more halogens, andcyanoethyl wherein the alkyl radical has 1 to 6 carbon atoms or (b)R.sub.1, R.sub.2 and R.sub.3 are the same and each is selected from saidgroup of radicals.2. A plastic material according to claim 1 wherein said polymer ispolypropylene.3. A plastic material according to claim 1 wherein at least one of R.sub.1,R.sub.2 and R.sub.3 is hydroxyhaloalkyl.4. A plastic material according to claim 1 wherein said stabilizer isbis-(2-cyanoethyl)-hydroxymethyl-phosphine oxide.5. A plastic material according to claim 1 wherein said stabilizer isbis-(2-cyanoethyl)-1-hydroxyethyl-phosphine oxide.6. A plastic material according to claim 1 wherein said stabilizer isbis-(2-cyanoethyl)-2-chloro-1-hydroxyethyl-phosphine oxide.7. A plastic material according to claim 1 wherein said stabilizer isbis-(2-cyanoethyl)-2,2,2-tri-chloro-1-hydroxyethyl-phosphine oxide.8. A plastic material according to claim 1 wherein said stabilizer isbis-(2-cyanoethyl)-1,2-dicarboxymethylethyl-phosphine oxide.9. A plastic material according to claim 1 wherein said stabilizer istris-hydroxymethyl-phosphine oxide.10. A plastic material according to claim 1 wherein said stabilizer isoxethylated tris-hydroxymethyl-phosphine oxide.11. A plastic material according to claim 1 wherein said stabilizer isoxpropylated tris-hydroxymethyl-phosphine oxide.12. A plastic material according to claim 1 wherein said stabilizer istris-(2-cyanoethyl)-phosphine sulfide.13. A plastic material according to claim 1 wherein said stabilizer istris-stearolyoxymethyl-phosphine sulfide.14. A plastic material according to claim 1 wherein said stabilizer istris-(2-carbmethoxy)-ethyl-phosphine oxide.15. A thermoplastic polymer containing a stabilizing amount of anultra-violet radiation stabilizer which is a tertiary phosphine oxide orsulfide of the formula##EQU4##in which X is oxygen or sulfur and R.sub.1, R.sub.2 and R.sub.3 are eachselected from hydroxyalkyl, haloalkyl, hydroxy haloalkyl carbalkoxyalkyl,acyloxyalkyl, phenylhydroxyalkyl wherein the phenyl radical may besubstituted by one or more halogens, and cyanoalkyl wherein the alkylradical has 1 to 6 carbon atoms, provided that said stabilizer does notcontain more than two cyanoalkyl groups.16. A thermoplastic polymer according to claim 15 containing from 0.5 to 2%by weight of said stabilizer."}
{"WKU":"039311058","Title":"Catalyst composition for room temperature vulcanizing silicone","App_Date":"1974-10-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert A. Smith","Assignee":"General Electric Company","ICL_Class":"C08G 7704","References":"3865759","Claims":"I claim:1. In a room temperature vulcanizable silicone rubber compositioncomprising:A. a linear diorganopolysiloxane having terminal silicon-bonded hydroxylgroups;B. a polyfunctional organosilicon compound containing more than twofunctional groups and capable of cross-linking (A); andC. a tin soap condensation catalyst, the improvement which comprises using,as component (C), a catalyst composition comprising:i. a stannous carboxylate of a branched chain alkyl carboxylic acid havingfrom about 8 to about 12 carbon atoms in the alkyl chain; and, as astabilizing carrier therefor,ii. a fluid organopolysiloxane composition having an average formula:##EQU8##where R is higher alkyl radical, R.sup.1 is selected from the classconsisting of monovalent and divalent hindered t-butyl-substitutedhydroxyaryl radicals, the sum of a plus b is from 5 to 40, inclusive, andthe ratio of b over the sum of a plus b is from 0.005 to 0.1, inclusive."}
{"WKU":"039311066","Title":"Generation and use of dinitrile oxides","App_Date":"1974-05-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John Crosby;Robert Allan Campbell Rennie;John Tanner;Robert Michael Paton","Assignee":"Imperial Chemical Industries Limited","ICL_Class":"C08G 7704","References":"3390204;3448063;3576908","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A process for the modification of a polyfunctional species whichcomprises mixing the said species with a furoxan containing a monocyclicor polycyclic ring system fused to the carbon atoms of the furoxan ring,and subsequently heating the mixture to a temperature at which a dinitrileoxide compound is generated in situ by thermal decomposition at atemperature ranging from 30.degree.-280.degree.C of the furoxan and causedto react with the said polyfunctional species, wherein the polyfunctionalspecies contains functional groups capable of entering into 1-3 additionor 1-3 cycloaddition reactions with the nitrile oxide and wherein saidpolyfunctional species is monomeric or polymeric and if said species ismonomeric then the molar proportion of furoxan: monomeric material isbetween 3:2 to 2:3 and if said species is polymeric, thenfuroxan:polymeric material is 1:3 to 1:1000.2. A process as claimed in claim 1 in which the functional groups areselected from olefinic double bonds, acetylenic triple bonds, >C=N-groups, nitrile, carbonyl, hydroxyl, thiol, amino and carboxylic acidgroups.3. A process as claimed in claim 1 in which the furoxan is selected from3,4-alkano furoxans of general formula##SPC21##where n is an integer from 3 to 10; dicyclopentadiene furoxan; acenaphthenefuroxan; 3,4(1 ,4 -methano) butano furoxan; and 3,4-propano furoxan.4. A process as claimed in claim 1 in which the polyfunctional speciescomprises one or more monomeric compounds each of said monomeric compoundscontaining at least two functional groups capable of entering into 1-3addition or 1-3 cycloaddition reactions with a nitrile oxide, so thatreaction of said monomeric compounds with a nitrile oxide causes the saidcompounds to be linked together to form a polymeric material.5. A process as claimed in claim 4 in which the monomeric material ormaterials comprise a diene and/or a dinitrile.6. A process as claimed in claim 1 in which the polyfunctional species is apolymeric material containing more than two functional groups in thepolymer chain, which is cross-linked by reaction with the dinitrile oxide.7. A process as claimed in claim 6 in which the polymeric material is anuncured natural or synthetic rubber.8. A process as claimed in claim 7 in which a synthetic rubber iscross-linked using dicyclopentadiene furoxan, 3,4-propano-furoxan oracenaphthane furoxan, the rubber being selected from the elastomericcopolymers of styrene/butadiene, acrylonitrile butadiene,ethylene/propylene/diene, ethylene/propylene/ethylidene-norbornene,acrylonitrile/butadiene/styrene, and polysiloxanes containing more thantwo olefinic, acetylenic or nitrile reactive groups.9. A process as claimed in claim 4 in which the monomeric materialcomprises an alcohol and the dinitrile oxide is caused to isomerise to adiisocyanate which reacts with the said alcohol to form a urethane.10. A process as claimed in claim 9 in which the alcohol is a polyhydricalcohol and the product is a polyurethane.11. A process according to claim 1 in which an additive containing afunctional group capable of entering into a 1-3 addition or a 1-3cycloaddition reaction with a nitrile oxide is incorporated in the mixtureand is subsequently bonded to the polyfunctional species by such areaction.12. A process as claimed in claim 1 in which the mixture is heated to atemperature in the range 30.degree.-280.degree.C to generate the dinitrileoxide.13. A process as claimed in claim 12 in which the mixture is heated to atemperature in the range 80.degree.-180.degree.C.14. A process as claimed in claim 4 in which the molar proportions offuroxan and monomeric material are in the range 3:2 to 2:3.15. A process as claimed in claim 6 in which the molar proportions offuroxan and polymeric material are in the range 1:3 to 1:1000.16. A thermally curable polymeric composition which comprises a polymericmaterial containing functional groups capable of entering into additionreactions with a dinitrile oxide, admixed with a furoxan containing amonocyclic or polycyclic ring system fused to the carbon atoms of thefuroxan ring.17. A composition as claimed in claim 16, the components of the mixturebeing chosen so that it may be formed into a flexible or pliable solidarticle in its uncured state.18. A composition as claimed in claim 16, the components of which arechosen so that it is pourable in its uncured state at a temperature belowthe decomposition temperature of the furoxan to allow it to be cast intoshape.19. A process as claimed in claim 1 wherein the polyfunctional species is apolysiloxane.20. The process of claim 9, wherein said isomerization comprises a thermalring opening.21. The process of claim 11, wherein said additive is a dye, soil releaseagent, antistatic agent, antioxidant or water repellant."}
{"WKU":"039311074","Title":"Polyalkoxy monovinylaromatic compound in copolymerization of a","App_Date":"1973-06-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William J. Trepka","Assignee":"Phillips Petroleum Company","ICL_Class":"C08F23604","References":"3410836;3725368","Claims":"I claim:1. A polymerization process which comprises contacting at least onepolymerizable conjugated diene and at least one polymerizablemonovinyl-substituted aromatic hydrocarbon with an effective amount of anorganolithium initiator under polymerization conditions includingeffective temperature and pressure in the presence of a polyalkoxymonovinyl-substituted aromatic compound randomizer, wherein saidpolyalkoxy monovinyl-substituted aromatic compound is characterized by atleast two adjacent alkoxy groups on a benzene ring nucleus, and whereinsaid randomizer is employed in quantity effective to promote the formationof random copolymers between said conjugated diene and saidmonovinyl-substituted aromatic hydrocarbon.2. The polymeric product produced by the process of claim 1.3. The process according to claim 1 wherein said polyalkoxymonovinyl-substituted aromatic hydrocarbon can be represented by##SPC2##wherein each R is hydrogen, alkoxy --OR , hydrocarbyl, or halogen, suchthat at least two R groups are OR  and are adjacent, wherein R  is analkyl radical, R groups where hydrocarbyl are alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl,wherein two adjacent R groups together with the corresponding carbons ofthe aromatic nucleus can be a 5 to 10 membered ring system, wherein saidhalogen is fluorine or chlorine.4. The process according to claim 3 wherein the total number of carbonatoms in said polyalkoxy monovinyl-substituted aromatic hydrocarbon is 10to 20.5. The process according to claim 4 wherein said polyalkoxymonovinyl-substituted aromatic compound randomizer is3,4-dimethoxystyrene, 3,4-diethoxy-5-methylstyrene,3,4-dimethoxy-5-cyclohexylstyrene,3,4-dimethoxy-5-(1,3-dimethylbutyl)styrene,3,4-di-(n-propoxy)-5-fluorostyrene, 3-vinyl-5,6-dimethoxybiphenyl,1-vinyl-3,4-dimethoxy-5-ethyl-6-chloro-7-fluoronaphthalene,3,4,5-triethoxystyrene, pentamethoxystyrene,3,4-dimethoxy-5-(p-tolyl)styrene, or mixture.6. The process according to claim 1 wherein said conjugated diene contains4 to 12 carbon atoms per molecule; said monovinyl-substituted aromatichydrocarbon contains 8 to 20 carbon atoms per molecule; and the weightratio of said conjugated diene to said monovinyl-substituted aromatichydrocarbon is in the range of about 5:95 to 95:5.7. The process according to claim 6 wherein said conjugated diene is1,3-butadiene, isoprene, 2,3-dimethyl-1,3-butadiene, piperylene,3-butyl-1,3-octadiene, 2-phenyl-1,3-butadiene, or mixture, and saidmonovinyl-substituted aromatic hydrocarbon is styrene, 1-vinylnaphthalene,2-vinylnaphthalene, 3-methylstyrene, 4-n-propylstyrene,4-cyclohexylstyrene, 4-dodecylstyrene, 2-ethyl-4-benzylstyrene,4-p-tolylstyrene, 4-(4-phenyl-n-butyl)styrene, or mixture.8. The process according to claim 6 wherein said polyalkoxymonovinyl-substituted aromatic compound randomizer is employed in saidpolymerization process in amounts sufficient to provide from about 0.01 to10 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight of monomer.9. The process according to claim 8 wherein said organolithium initiator isa hydrocarbyllithium initiator which can be represented by the formulaR Li.sub.x wherein R  is a hydrocarbon radical, and x is an integer of 1to 4, inclusive.10. The process according to claim 9 wherein said R  is aliphatic,cycloaliphatic, aromatic, or combination radical of up to 20 carbon atomsper radical.11. The process according to claim 10 wherein said organolithium initiatoris methyllithium, isopropyllithium, butyllithium, t-octyllithium,n-decyllithium, phenyllithium, naphthyllithium, 4-butylphenyllithium,p-tolyllithium, 4-phenylbutyllithium, cyclohexllithium,4-butylcyclohexyllithium, 4-cyclohexylbutyllithium, dilithiomethane,1,4-dilithiobutane, 1,10-dilithiodecane, 1,20-dilithioeicosane,1,4-dilithiocyclohexane, 1,4-dilithio-2-butene, 1,8-dilithio-3-decene,1,4-dilithiobenzene, 1,5-dilithionaphthalene,1,2-dilithio-1,2,-diphenylethane, 9,10-dilithio-9,10-dihydroanthracene,1,2-dilithio-1,8-diphenyloctane, 1,3,5-trilithiopentane,1,5,15-trilithioeicosane, 1,3,5-trilithiocyclohexane,1,2,5-trilithionaphthalene, 1,3,5-trilithioanthracene,1,3,5,8-trilithiodecane, 1,5,10,20-tetralithioeicosane,1,2,3,5-tetralithiocyclohexane, or 1,2,3,5-tetralithio-4-hexylanthracene.12. The process according to claim 9 wherein said polymerization process isconducted in the presence of a hydrocarbon diluent, and wherein saidpolymerization conditions include a pressure sufficient to maintain thereactants and diluents substantially in the liquid phase, a polymerizationtemperature in the range of about -20.degree. to 215.degree. F., andwherein is employed about 0.01 to 1 part by weight organolithium initiatorto 100 parts by weight total monomer excluding randomizer.13. The process according to claim 12 wherein said conjugated diene isbutadiene, said monovinyl-substituted aromatic hydrocarbon is styrene.14. The process according to claim 13 wherein said polyalkoxymonovinyl-substituted aromatic hydrocarbon is 3,4-dimethoxystyrene.15. The process according to claim 14 wherein said organolithium initiatoris n-butyllithium.16. The process according to claim 1 wherein said randomizer and saidorganolithium initiator are admixed prior to contacting said monomers.17. Copolymers of conjugated dienes and monovinyl-substituted aromatichydrocarbons prepared by the process comprising polymerizing at least onesaid conjugated diene and at least one said monovinyl-substituted aromatichydrocarbon under effective polymerization conditions includingtemperature and pressure and employing an effective amount of ahydrocarbon lithium initiator in the presence of at least one polyalkoxymonovinyl-substituted aromatic compound in a quantity sufficient topromote the formation of random copolymers between said conjugated dieneand said monovinyl-substituted aromatic hydrocarbon, wherein saidpolyalkoxy monovinyl-substituted aromatic compound is characterized by atleast two alkoxy groups positioned ortho to each other on a benzene ringnucleus.18. The copolymers according to claim 17 wherein said polyalkoxymonovinyl-substituted aromatic hydrocarbon is represented by##SPC3##wherein each R is hydrogen, alkoxyl, --OR , hydrocarbyl, or halogen, suchthat at least two R groups are OR , wherein R  is an alkyl radical, Rgroups where hydrocarbon are alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, wherein two adjacentR groups together with the corresponding carbons of the aromatic nucleuscan be a 3 to 8 membered ring system, wherein said halogen is fluorine orchlorine.19. The copolymers according to claim 18 wherein the total number of carbonatoms in said polyalkoxy monovinyl-substituted aromatic hydrocarbon isfrom 10 to 20.20. The copolymers according to claim 19 wherein said polyalkoxymonovinyl-substituted aromatic compound randomizer is3,4-dimethoxystyrene, 3,4-diethoxy-5-methylstyrene,3,4-dimethoxy-5-cyclohexylstyrene,3,4-dimethoxy-5-(1,3-dimethylbutyl)styrene,3,4-di-(n-propoxy)-5-fluorostyrene, 3-vinyl-5,6-dimethoxybiphenyl,1-vinyl-3,4-dimethoxy-5-ethyl-6-chloro-7-fluoronaphthalene,3,4,5-triethoxystyrene, pentamethoxystyrene,3,4-dimethoxy-5-(p-tolyl)styrene, or mixture.21. The copolymers according to claim 18 wherein said polyalkoxymonovinyl-substituted aromatic compound randomizer is employed in saidpolymerization process in amounts sufficient to provide from aout 0.01 to10 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight of monomer.22. The copolymers according to claim 21 wherein said conjugated dienecontains 4 to 12 carbon atoms per molecule; said monovinyl-substitutedaromatic hydrocarbon contains 8 to 20 carbon atoms per molecule; and theweight ratio of said conjugated diene to said monovinyl-substitutedaromatic hydrocarbon is in the range of about 5:95 to 95:5.23. The copolymers according to claim 22 wherein said conjugated diene is1,3-butadiene, isoprene, 2,3-dimethyl-1,3-butadiene, piperylene,3-butyl-1,3-octadiene, 2-phenyl-1,3-butadiene, or mixture, and saidmonovinyl-substituted aromatic hydrocarbon is styrene, 1-vinylnaphthalene,2-vinylnaphthalene, 3-methylstyrene, 4-n-propylstyrene,4-cyclohexylstyrene, 4-dodecylstyrene, 2-ethyl-4-benzylstyrene,4-p-tolylstyrene, 4-(4-phenyl-n-butyl)styrene, or mixture.24. The copolymers according to claim 22 wherein said organolithiuminitiator is a hydrocarbon lithium initiator which can be represented bythe formula R Li.sub.x wherein R  is a hydrocarbon radical, and x is aninteger of 1 to 4, inclusive.25. The copolymers according to claim 24 wherein said R  is aliphatic,cycloaliphatic, aromatic, or combination radical of up to 20 carbon atomsper radical.26. The copolymers according to claim 25 wherein said organolithiuminitiator is methyllithium, isopropyllithium, butyllithium,t-octyllithium, n-decyllithium, phenyllithium, naphthyllithium,4-butylphenyllithium, p-tolyllithium, 4-phenylbutyllithium,cyclohexyllithium, 4-butylcyclohexyllithium, 4-cyclohexylbutyllithium,dilithiomethane, 1,4-dilithiobutane, 1,10-dilithiodecane,1,20-dilithioeicosane, 1,4-dilithiocyclohexane, 1,4-dilithio-2-butene,1,8-dilithio-3-decene, 1,4-dilithiobenzene, 1,5-dilithionaphthalene,1,2-dilithio-1,2-diphenylethane, 9,10-dilithio-9,10-dihydroanthracene,1,2-dilithio-1,8-diphenyloctane, 1,3,5-trilithiopentane,1,5,15-trilithioeicosane, 1,3,5-trilithiocyclohexane,1,2,5-trilithionaphthalene, 1,3,5-trilithioanthracene,1,3,5,8-trilithiodecane, 1,5,10,20-tetralithioeicosane,1,2,3,5-tetralithiocyclohexane, or 1,2,3,5-tetralithio-4-hexylanthracene.27. The copolymers according to claim 24 wherein said polymerizationconditions include polymerization in the presence of a hydrocarbondiluent, a pressure sufficient to maintain the reactants and diluentssubstantially in the liquid phase, a polymerization temperature in therange of about -20.degree. to 215.degree. F., and employment of saidhydrocarbon lithium initiator in the range of about 0.01 to 1 part byweight per 100 parts by weight total monomer other than randomizer.28. The method according to claim 27 wherein said conjugated diene isbutadiene, said monovinyl-substituted aromatic hydrocarbon is styrene, andsaid polyalkoxy monovinyl-substituted aromatic hydrocarbon is3,4-dimethoxystyrene.29. The method according to claim 28 wherein said organolithium initiatoris n-butyllithium.30. A polymerization process which comprises contacting at least onepolymerizable monomer which is at least one polymerizable conjugateddiene, or at least one polymerizable conjugated diene and at least onecopolymerizable monovinyl-substituted aromatic hydrocarbon, underpolymerization conditions, with the organolithium initiator prepared bythe process comprising contacting at least one hydrocarbon lithiumcompound with at least one polyalkoxy monovinyl-substituted aromaticcompound in a ratio effective to result in said initiator,wherein said hydrocarbon lithium compound is represented by R Li.sub.xwherein R  is a hydrocarbon radical containing up to 20 carbon atoms permolecule, x is an integer of 1 to 4, inclusive,said polyalkoxy monovinyl-substituted aromatic hydrocarbon is representedby##SPC4##wherein each R is hydrogen, alkoxy --OR , hydrocarbyl, or halogen, suchthat at least two R groups are OR  and are adjacent the benzene ring, R is an alkyl radical, R groups where hydrocarbyl are alkyl, cycloalkyl, oraryl, and wherein two adjacent R groups together with the correspondingcarbons of the benzene ring can be a 5 to 10 membered ring system, saidhalogen is fluorine or chlorine, and wherein said polyalkoxymonovinyl-substituted aromatic hydrocarbon contains 10 to 20 carbon atomsper molecule, andwherein said polymerization conditions include a temperature, pressure, andamount of said organolithium initiator effective for said polymerizationprocess to produce a polymer of said conjugated diene, or copolymer ofsaid conjugated diene with said monovinyl-substituted aromatichydrocarbon.31. The process according to claim 30 wherein is employed a ratio of saidhydrocarbon lithium compound to said polyalkoxy monovinyl-substitutedaromatic compound in the range of about 0.00035:1 to 3.5:1, and whereinsaid polymerization process is conducted at a temperature in the range ofabout -20.degree. F. to 215.degree. F., in the presence of a hydrocarbondiluent, and under a pressure sufficient to maintain reactants anddiluents substantially in the liquid phase, and wherein said organolithiuminitiator is employed in amounts sufficient to provide about 0.01 to 1part by weight initiator per 100 parts by weight total monomer.32. The polymerization process according to claim 31 wherein saidconjugated diene contains 4 to 12 carbon atoms per molecule, and saidmonovinyl-substituted aromatic hydrocarbon contains 8 to 20 carbon atomsper molecule.33. The polymerization process according to claim 32 wherein saidpolymerizable monomer is butadiene, or butadiene and styrene.34. The polymerization process according to claim 33 wherein saidhydrocarbon lithium compound is n-butyllithium, and said polyalkoxymonovinyl-substituted aromatic compound is 3,4-dimethoxystyrene.35. The process according to claim 31 wherein is employed a ratio of saidhydrocarbon lithium compound to said polyalkoxy monovinyl-substitutedaromatic compound of about 0.3:1 to 1.4:1 in a weight ratio, and whereinsaid polyalkoxy monovinyl-substituted hydrocarbon is a polymethoxymonovinyl-substituted aromatic hydrocarbon."}
{"WKU":"039311082","Title":"Process for preparing polycarbonates","App_Date":"1973-10-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Rudolf Binsack;Heinrich Haupt;Hugo Vernaleken;Eckart Reese","Assignee":"Bayer Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C08G 6362","References":"3646102;R27682","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In the process of producing a polycarbonate suitable for film extrusionhaving a relative viscosity measured at a concentration of 0.5 g ofpolycarbonate in 100 ml of methylene chloride solution at a temperature of25.degree.C of between about 1.35 and about 1.55 by reacting an aqueousalkaline solution of an aromatic dihydroxy compound with phosgene underthe conditions of a phase boundary reaction the improvement whichcomprises the sequential steps ofa. allowing the reaction to proceed to give an oligomeric polycarbonatehaving a degree of polymerization of about 5 to 15;b. adding a catalytic amount of tertiary amine and about 0.05 to 2.0 molpercent relative to the aromatic dihydroxy compound, of a branching agenthaving more than three phenolic hydroxy groups to the phase boundaryreaction mixture; andc. allowing the condensation reaction to go to completion.2. In the process of claim 1 the further improvement wherein about 0.05 to0.5 mol percent of the branching agent is added.3. In the process of claim 1 the further improvement wherein about 0.10 to0.35 mol percent of the branching agent is added.4. The polycarbonate produced by the method of claim 1.5. The polycarbonate produced by the method of claim 2.6. The polycarbonate produced by the method of claim 3."}
{"WKU":"039311090","Title":"Process for coating substrates with high molecular weight epoxy resins","App_Date":"1974-03-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Patrick Henry Martin","Assignee":"The Dow Chemical Company","ICL_Class":"C08G 3004","References":"2928809;3716598;3824212","Claims":"I claim:1. An epoxy resin coating composition comprising in dispersed form1. a liquid epoxy resin having more than one 1,2-epoxy groups2.2. a mixture comprising a solid phenolic hydroxyl containing compoundhaving more than one phenolic hydroxyl group and a catalytic amount of acatalyst for effecting the reaction between the epoxy groups and thephenolic hydroxyl groups selected from the group consisting of phosphoniumsalts of organic and inorganic acids, imidazoles, imidazolines andquaternary ammonium compounds;wherein the epoxy resin and phenolic hydroxyl-containing compound areemployed in quantities such as to provide a product having an averagemolecular weight of at least about 15,000 and wherein said phenolichydroxyl-containing compound and catalyst mixture is dispersed in saidliquid epoxy resin. 2. The composition of claim 1 wherein the epoxy resinis a liquid epoxy resin dissolved in a solvent that is a non-solvent forthe phenolic hydroxyl-containing compound.3. The composition of claim 1 wherein the epoxy resin is a solid dissolvedin a solvent that is a non-solvent for the phenolic hydroxyl-containingcompound.4. The composition of claim 3 wherein the epoxy resin is a phenolic-basedepoxy resin.5. The composition of claim 4 wherein at least one of the componentsselected from the epoxy resin and the phenolic hydroxyl-containingcompound has a functionality greater than 2.6. The composition of claim 5 wherein the epoxy resin has a functionalitygreater than 2.7. The composition of claim 1 wherein said solid phenolichydroxyl-containing compound is a material represented by the formula##SPC6##wherein A is a divalent hydrocarbon group having from about 1 to about 6carbon atoms,##EQU5##each X is independently hydrogen, chlorine or bromine, and n has anaverage value of from about 1 to about 4.8. The composition of claim 7 wherein Component A is an isopropylidenegroup, each X is hydrogen."}
{"WKU":"039311104","Title":"Rapid curing adhesive compositions comprising the reaction product of a","App_Date":"1973-10-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Harlan G. Freeman;Gene F. Baxter;George Graham Allen","Assignee":"The Dow Chemical Company","ICL_Class":"C08G  602","References":"1755099;2191802;2766218;2839487;3518159;3704269;3773721;3784515","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A rapid curing adhesive composition comprisinga. an amine-modified condensation polymer comprising the reaction productof a ketone-formaldehyde condensation polymer containing reactive alkylolgroups with a primary aromatic amine of the formula##SPC4##wherein X.sub.1 is --NH.sub.2 or --CH.sub.2 NH.sub.2 ; X.sub.2 is--NH.sub.2, --CH.sub.2 NH.sub.2 or --OH; X.sub.3 is --NH.sub.2, --CH.sub.2NH.sub.2, --NO.sub.2, --OH, alkyl of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, hydrogen,halogen, halogenated alkyl, alkyoxy or##SPC5##X.sub.4 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms or aryl; and A is--SO.sub.2 --, --NH--, --O--, --S--, --C=c--, --S--S--, --N=N-- or##EQU4##where Y.sub.1 and Y.sub.2 are hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 3 carbon atoms andz is 0, 1 or 2; the amount of said amine being at least 0.1 part by weightper part of said ketone-formaldehyde condensation polymer; andb. a curing agent reactable with said modified condensation polymer atambient temperatures, the amounts of said modified polymer and curingagent being sufficient to cause said composition to rapidly becomeinsoluble and infusible at ambient temperatures.2. The composition of claim 1 wherein said amine is m-hydroxyaniline.3. The composition of claim 1 wherein said amine is a phenylenediamine.4. The composition of claim 1 wherein said curing agent comprises analkylene donating compound, a diisocyanate, a polyisocyanate or anepoxide.5. The composition of claim 1 wherein said curing agent comprises analkylene donating compound.6. The composition of claim 1 wherein said curing agent comprisesformaldehyde.7. The composition of claim 1 wherein the amount of curing agent is from0.02 to 2.0 parts by weight per part by weight of said modifiedcondensation polymer.8. The composition of claim 1 wherein the amount of said amine is from 0.1to 1.0 part by weight per part of said ketone-formaldehyde condensationpolymer.9. The composition of claim 1 wherein said ketone-formaldehyde condensationpolymer is an acetone-formaldehyde polymer.10. The composition of claim 9 wherein the amount of said amine is from 0.1to 1.0 part by weight per part of said ketone-formaldehyde condensationpolymer.11. The composition of claim 10 wherein said amine is m-hydroxyaniline.12. The composition of claim 10 wherein said amine is a phenylenediamine.13. The composition of claim 1 wherein said ketone-formaldehydecondensation polymer is an acetone-formaldehyde polymer, a methyl ethylketone-formaldehyde polymer, or a methyl isobutyl ketone-formaldehydepolymer.14. The composition of claim 13 wherein the amount of said amine is from0.1 to 1.0 part by weight per part of said ketone-formaldehydecondensation polymer.15. The composition of claim 14 wherein said amine is m-hydroxyaliline.16. The composition of claim 14 wherein said amine is a phenylenediamine.17. The process of claim 1 wherein said amine is m-hydroxyaniline, aphenylenediamine, a triaminobenzene, a diaminotoluene or xylylenediamine.18. The composition of claim 17 wherein the amount of said amine is from0.1 to 1.0 part by weight per part of said ketone-formaldehydecondensation polymer.19. The composition of claim 18 wherein the ketone-formaldehydecondensation polymer is an acetone-formaldehyde polymer.20. The composition of claim 19 wherein said curing agent comprises analkylene donating compound.21. A process for the preparation of a rapid curing adhesive comprising:1. blending together at ambient temperatures"}
{"WKU":"039311112","Title":"Soluble hydrophilic polymers and process for processing the same","App_Date":"1973-02-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jinrich Kopecek;Jiri Vacik;Ladislav Sprincl","Assignee":"Ceskoslovenska akadamie ved","ICL_Class":"C08G  238;C08G 1862;A61K 31785","References":"3245941;3326823;3382090;3575946;3577522;3590125;3607848;3787474;R27151","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A water soluble hydrophilic low molecular weight polymer suitable formedical use including blood plasma substitute comprising the polymerizateof at least one monomer selected from the group consisting of N-alkylmethacrylamides, N-hydroxyalkyl methacrylamides, N-alkyl acrylamides,N-hydroxyalkyl acrylamides, N,N-dialkyl acrylamides, and mono-esters ofacrylic and methacrylic acids with di-, tri- and higher homologouspolyethlene glycols wherein the alkyl radicals are selected from the groupconsisting of unsubstituted and substituted alkyl radicals, thesubstituents being selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, aminoand alkoxy groups, said low molecular weight polymer having an averagemolecular weight in a range of 10,000 to 60,000 and containing up to 1%maximum of a fraction having a molecular weight above 100,000, said lowmolecular weight polymer being condensed with at least one bifunctionalcompound selected from diisocyanates, halides of dicarboxylic acids,phosgene and dialdehydes derived from dicarboxylic acids to form acondensation polymer having a molecular weight in a range of 60,000 to250,000 and having cleavable cross-links.2. The polymer as defined in claim 1 wherein said alkyl radicals containfrom one to three carbon atoms and the hydroxy, amino, and alkyl groupscontain from one to six carbon atoms.3. Soluble hydrophilic polymers as defined in claim 1 wherein up to 49 mol% of the monomer is replaced with a material selected from the groupconsisting of acrylamide, methacrylamide and monolefinic monomerscontaining an -- N H -- group.4. Soluble hydrophilic polymers as defined in claim 1 wherein the lowmolecular weight polymer is a copolymer.5. A soluble hydrophilic polymer as defined in claim 1 comprising ahexamethylene diisocyanate cross-linked copolymer comprising N-ethylmethacrylamide with acrylamide in a molar ratio of 8 to 2, respectively.6. A process for making water soluble, hydrophilic polymers suitable asblood plasma substitutes comprising the steps of polymerizing, in thepresence of a chain transfer agent, at least one monomer selected from thegroup consisting of N-alkyl methacrylamides, N-alkyl acrylamides,N,N-dialkyl acrylamides and mono-esters of acrylic and methacrylic acidswith di-, tri- and higher homologous polyethylene glycols wherein thealkyl radicals are selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted andsubstituted alkyl radicals and the substituents therein are selected fromthe group consisting of hydroxy, amino and alkoxy groups, for a sufficienttime to form a low molecular weight polymer having an average molecularweight in a range of 10,000 to 60,000 and containing up to 1% maximum of afraction having a molecular weight above 100,000, thereafter condensingsaid low molecular weight polymer with at least one bifunctional compoundselected from diisocyanates, halides of dicarboxylic acids, phosgene anddialdehydes derived from dicarboxylic acids in an amount sufficient toform a condensation polymer having a molecular weight in a range of 60,000to 250,000 and having cleavable crosslinks.7. The process according to claim 6 wherein said alkyl radicals containfrom one to three carbon atoms and the hydroxy -alkyl and amino -alkylgroup contains from one to six carbon atoms.8. The process as defined in claim 6 wherein up to 49 mol % of the monomeris replaced with a material selected from the group consisting ofacrylamide, methacrylamide and monoolefinic monomers containing an -- NH-- group.9. The process as defined in claim 6 wherein the monomer isN-(2-hydroxy-propyl) methacrylamide monomer.10. The process as defined in claim 6 polymer is copolymer formed fromN-ethyl methacrylamide with acrylamide in a molar ratio of 8 to 2,respectively and the bifunctional compound is hexamethylene diisocyanate.11. Soluble hydrophilic polymer as defined in claim 1, wherein the monomeris N-(2-hydroxypropyl)methacrylamide."}
{"WKU":"039311120","Title":"Process for N-methylolating diisocyanate polyaddition products","App_Date":"1974-02-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kuno Wagner;Hans Jurgen Muller","Assignee":"Bayer Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C08G 1220;C08K  505","References":"3087912;3242230;3384606;3427272;3442843;3491067","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for N-methylolating a polyurethane comprising reactinga. a polyurethane containing about 0.2 to 0.4 NH equivalents obtained fromurea groups for every 200 parts by weight of polyurethane withb. between 0.1 to 10 equivalents of formaldehyde per methylolatable NHequivalent, dissolved in a solvent mixture ofc. an inert organic solvent selected from the group consisting of benzene,toluene, xylene, ethyl benzene, chlorobenzene, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane,1,3-dioxalene, glycol carbonate, ethyl glycol acetate, methylene chloride,chloroform and trichloroethylene andd. a tertiary alcoholat a temperature of between about -20.degree. and 160.degree.C.2. A process of N-methylolating a polyurethane comprising reactinga. a polyurethane containing about 0.2 to 0.4 NH equivalents obtained fromurea groups for every 200 parts by weight of polyurethane, withb. 0.1 to 2 equivalents of formaldehyde per methylolatable NH equivalent,in a solvent mixture ofc. an inert organic solvent selected from the group consisting of benzene,toluene, xylene, ethyl benzene, chlorobenzene, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane,1,3-dioxalene, glycol carbonate, ethyl glycol acetate, methylene chloride,chloroform and trichloroethylene, andd. about 5 to 95 wt%, based on the total weight of solvent, of a tertiaryalcoholat a temperature of between -20.degree.C and 160.degree.C.3. The process of claim 2 wherein 0.3 to 1.5 equivalents of formaldehydeper methylolatable NH equivalent are used, the solvent mixture contains 10to 90 wt% tertiary butanol and the reaction is carried out at 20.degree.to 70.degree.C.4. The product of the process of claim 1.5. The product of the process of claim 2.6. The process of claim 2 wherein the formaldehyde is produced in thereaction mixture from a compound adapted to release formaldehyde.7. The process of claim 6 wherein the compound which releases formaldehydeis a semiacetal of formaldehyde.8. The process of claim 7 wherein N-methylol-caprolactam,N-methylol-butyrolactam or N-methylol-valerolactam is included along withthe said semiacetal.9. The process of claim 2 wherein the polyurethane is a polyurethane-urea,polyurethane polyamide, polyurethanepolyurea-polyhydrazodicarbonamide, ora polyurethane-polyhydrazodicarbonamide."}
{"WKU":"039311139","Title":"Impact-resistant thermoplastic polyester urethanes","App_Date":"1972-11-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Nelson V. Seeger;Andrew J. Kaman","Assignee":"PPG Industries, Inc.","ICL_Class":"C08G 1875;C08G 1842","References":"3523101;3591561;3620905;3711440;3755262;3764457;3766148;3823060","Claims":"We claim:1. A transparent, thermoplastic polyesterurethane that is the reactionproduct of (a) essentially linear hydroxy-terminated polyester selectedfrom the group consisting of poly(1,4-butylene adipate) having a molecularweight of about 2000, poly(1,4-butylene azelate) having a molecular weightof from about 1000 to about 2000 and poly(epsilon caprolactone) having amolecular weight of from about 1000 to about 2000, (b) aliphatic diol offrom 2 to 10 carbon atoms, and (c) 4,4 -methylene-bis(cyclohexylisocyanate), the mole ratio of (b) to (a) ranging from about 0.9 to 1.2:1for polyesters of about 1000 molecular weight to from about 0.7 to 5:1 forpolyesters of about 2000 molecular weight, and the number of isocyanategroups provided by (c) being substantially equivalent to the total numberof hydroxy groups provided by (a) and (b) whereby to provide apolyesterurethane that is substantially free of unreacted isocyanategroups.2. The polyesterurethane of claim 1 wherein the aliphatic diol is selectedfrom the group 1,4-butanediol, 1,3-butanediol, 1,5-pentanediol, and1,6-hexanediol.3. The polyesterurethane of claim 1 wherein the diisocyanate has astereoisomer content of 19 to 21 percent trans, trans, 17 to 18 percentcis, cis, and 62 to 64 percent cis, trans.4. The polyesterurethane of claim 1 wherein the diisocyanate has astereoisomer ratio of 70 percent total trans and 30 percent total cis.5. The polyesterurethane of claim 1 wherein the aliphatic diol is asymmetrical diol when the trans, trans isomer content of the diisocyanateis less than 30 percent and the aliphatic diol is unsymmetrical when thetrans, trans isomer content of the diisocyanate is more than 30 percent.6. The polyesterurethane of claim 1 wherein the urethane content is between13 and 16 percent.7. A transparent, thermoplastic polyesterurethane that is the reactionproduct of (a) essentially linear, hydroxy-terminated polyester selectedfrom the group consisting of poly(1,4-butylene azelate) and poly(epsiloncaprolactone), said polyester having a molecular weight of about 1000, (b)aliphatic diol of from 2 to 10 carbon atoms, and (c)4,4 -methylene-bis(cyclohexyl isocyanate), the mole ratio of (b) and (a)being from about 0.9 to 1.2:1 and the number of isocyanate groups providedby (c) being substantially equivalent to the total number of hydroxygroups provided by (a) and (b) whereby to provide a polyesterurethane thatis substantially free of unreacted isocyanate groups.8. The polyesterurethane of claim 7 wherein the aliphatic diol is1,4-butane diol.9. The polyesterurethane of claim 7 wherein the aliphatic diol is asymmetrical diol when the trans, trans isomer content of the diisocyanateis less than 30 percent and the aliphatic diol is unsymmetrical when thetrans, trans isomer content of the diisocyanate is more than 30 percent.10. The polyesterurethane of claim 8 wherein the diisocyanate has astereoisomer content of 19 to 21 percent trans, trans, 17 to 18 percentcis, cis, and 62 to 64 percent cis, trans.11. The polyesterurethane of claim 7 wherein the urethane content isbetween 13 and 15 percent.12. A transparent, thermoplastic polyesterurethane that is the reactionproduct of (a) essentially linear hydroxy-terminated polyester selectedfrom the group consisting of poly(1,4-butylene adipate) andpoly(1,4-butylene azelate), said polyester having a molecular weight ofabout 2000, (b) aliphatic diol of from 2 to 10 carbon atoms, and (c)4,4 -methylene-bis(cyclohexyl isocyanate), the mole ratio of (b) to (a)being from about 0.7 to 5:1 and the number of isocyanate groups providedby (c) being substantially equivalent to the total number of hydroxygroups provided by (a) and (b) whereby to provide a polyesterurethane thatis substantially free of unreacted isocyanate groups.13. The polyesterurethane of claim 12 wherein the aliphatic diol is1,4-butanediol.14. The polyesterurethane of claim 12 wherein the aliphatic diol is asymmetrical diol when the trans, trans isomer content of the diisocyanateis less than 30 percent and the aliphatic diol is unsymmetrical when thetrans, trans isomer content of the diisocyanate is more than 30 percent.15. The polyesterurethane of claim 12 wherein the diisocyanate has astereoisomer content of 19 to 21 percent trans, trans, 17 to 18 percentcis, cis, and 62 to 64 percent cis, trans, the aliphatic diol is1,4-butanediol, and the polyester is poly(1,4-butylene adipate).16. The polyesterurethane of claim 12 wherein the urethane content isbetween 12 and 18 percent."}
{"WKU":"039311147","Title":"Polybutylene terephthalate blow molded article","App_Date":"1974-01-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John S. Gall;George W. Halek","Assignee":"Celanese Corporation","ICL_Class":"C08G 6370;C08G 6316","References":"3329653;3624024;3706111;3733309;3745150;3822332","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A polybutylene terephthalate blow molded article wherein saidpolybutylene terephthalate has an intrinsic viscosity in the range of 1.05to 1.4 deciliters per gram measured in orthochlorophenol at 25.degree.C.2. A polybutylene terephthalate article in accordance with claim 1 whereinsaid polybutylene terephthalate has an intrinsic viscosity in the range ofabout 1.1 to 1.4 deciliters per gram measured in orthochlorophenol at25.degree.C.3. A polybutylene terephthalate blow molded article in accordance withclaim 1 wherein said article is a bottle.4. A polybutylene terephthalate article in accordance with claim 3 whereinsaid bottle is an aerosol bottle."}
{"WKU":"039311155","Title":"Process of spraying polyurethane-polyurea compositions and applications","App_Date":"1973-03-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Albert Pierre Strassel","Assignee":"Societe Anonyoe: Produits Chimiques Ugine Kuhlmann","ICL_Class":"C08G 1828","References":"3440086;3499858;3509102;3658761;3666724;3684770;3705132;3746665;3784061;3804810","Claims":"I claim:1. A method for forming a film of polyurethane-polyurea on a supportcomprising spraying said support with a two component composition mixed atthe time of spraying consisting as first component a solution of at leastone organic diamine in a solvent and as a second component a prepolymerliquid at prepolymer spray temperatures of 20.degree. to 130.degree.Ccontaining both polyether and polyester linkages in a ratio of 9:1 to 1:9and prepared by reacting at least one polyol with a molecular weight of300 to 6000 and an organic polyisocyanate with a ratio of NCO/OH betweenabout 1.5 and 3 and recovering the support with a polyurethane-polyureacoating, said second component containing from 0 up to 30% of a solventand having a viscosity of 2000 cps or less at the prepolymer spraytemperature, the proportions of the first and second components being suchthat the ratio of NH.sub.2 /OH is greater than 0.5 and the ratio of NCO/OH+ NH.sub.2 is between 0.95 and 1.6.2. The method of claim 1 wherein the prepolymer is at a temperature of20.degree. to 120.degree.C at the time of spraying.3. The method of claim 1 wherein the diamine is selected from the groupconsisting of aromatic, cycloaliphatic and aliphatic diamines and mixturesthereof.4. The method of claim 1 wherein the polyol has at least two OH groups andcontains in the molecule polyether and polyester linkages.5. The method of claim 1 wherein the prepolymer is prepared by reacting amixture of polyether polyol and a polyester polyol and said organicpolyisocyanate.6. An article coated with a polyurethane-polyurea coating produced by themethod of claim 1."}
{"WKU":"039311163","Title":"Curable amine-terminated polyurethane-urea-epoxide lacquers","App_Date":"1974-03-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Carl Bernstein;Konstantinos Arvanitis;Yuen Ng","Assignee":"Witco Chemical Corporation","ICL_Class":"C08G 1830;C08K  520","References":"2500600;2888439;3290208;3296179;3374186;3527729;3565972;3636133","Claims":"We claim:1. A curable polymer-forming lacquer solution comprising:a. An amine terminated polyetherurethane-urea prepared by the addition ofan isocyanate terminated polyalkylene ether diol prepolymer to an excessof diamine, there being at least one active hydrogen on each amine groupof said diamine, in an organic solvent system, andb. A chain-extending amount of a polyepoxide of about 0.1 to about 9.0percent, by weight, based on said amine-terminated polyetherurethane-ureapresent in said organic solvent system of component (a).2. A composition as in claim 1 wherein under (b) the chain extending amountof polyepoxide is in the range of about 1.0-5.0 percent, by weight, basedon said amine terminated polyetherurethane-urea.3. A composition as in claim 1 wherein the epoxide is the diglycidyl etherof p,p -isopropylidene-diphenol.4. A composition as in claim 1 wherein the epoxide is a triglycidyl etherof a phenol-formaldehyde resin.5. A composition as in claim 1 wherein the epoxide is1,2,3,-tris(2,3-epoxypropoxy)propane.6. A composition as in claim 1 wherein the polyetherurethane urea isderived from a cycloaliphatic diamine.7. A composition as in claim 1 wherein the polyetherurethane-urea isderived from 3-aminomethyl-3,5,5-trimethyl cyclohexylamine.8. A composition as in claim 1 wherein the polyetherurethane-urea isderived from 1,8-diamino-p-menthane.9. A composition as in claim 1 wherein the polyetherurethane-urea isderived from hexahydropyrazine.10. A composition as in claim 1 wherein the polyetherurethane-urea isderived from excess diamine containing up to 25 percent equivalents basedupon total amine, of a primary or secondary aliphatic monoamine.11. A composition as in claim 1 wherein the organic solvent is aconventional lacquer solvent containing more than about 5 percent of aC.sub.1 -C.sub.5 monohydric alcohol.12. A composition as in claim 1 wherein the organic solvent is atoluene-isopropanol mixture.13. A composition as in claim 1 wherein the organic solvent issubstantially all isopropanol.14. A curable polymer-forming lacquer solution comprising:a. An amine terminated polyetherurethane-urea prepared by the addition ofan isocyanate terminated polyalkylene ether diol prepolymer to an excessof diamine, there being at least one active hydrogen on each amine groupof said diamine, in one organic solvent system, andb. A polyepoxide having a molecular weight within the range of about 100 toabout 900, said polyepoxide being utilized in a chain-extending proportionof up to about 9% by weight of said amine terminatedpolyetherurethane-urea present in said organic solvent system of component(a).15. The method of chain extending an amine terminatedpolyetherurethane-urea with a polyepoxide to produce a polymer-forminglacquer solution comprising reacting an isocyanate terminated polyalkyleneether diol prepolymer with an excess of diamine, there being at least oneactive hydrogen on each amino group of said diamine, in an organic solventsystem and chain-extending with an amount of a polyepoxide of about 0.1 toabout 9.0 percent by weight, based on said amine terminatedpolyetherurethane-urea.16. The method of chain-extending an amine terminatedpolyetherurethane-urea as in claim 15, wherein the organic solvent systemis a toluene-isopropanol mixture.17. The polymer formed by curing the composition of claim 1."}
{"WKU":"039311171","Title":"Coating powders for protective films based on","App_Date":"1974-08-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"David P. Leonard","Assignee":"Cook Paint and Varnish Company","ICL_Class":"C08G 1880;C08G 1842","References":"3210272;3659003;3660355;3660359;3819586;3822240","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A coating powder for use in the preparation of protective films whichcomprises an intimate mixture of:i. a caprolactam-blocked organic polyisocyanate andii. A film-forming hydroxy-containing polyester, or a film-forminghydroxy-containing polymer obtained by reacting from 10-30 parts of ahydroxy lower alkyl acrylate or methacrylate, from 35-45 parts of a loweralkyl acrylate or methacrylate and from 35-45 parts of styrene or vinyltoluene, wherein the polyisocyanate is present in sufficient quantity toprovide from about 0.8 to 1.20 blocked isocyanate groups for each hydroxygroup in the coating powder, the caprolactam-blocked organicpolyisocyanate component (i) being a 1:1 molar mixture of"}
{"WKU":"039311180","Title":"Aminoalkanesulfonate-modified polyamides","App_Date":"1971-09-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James W. Cleary","Assignee":"Phillips Petroleum Company","ICL_Class":"C08G 6948","References":"3142662;3389172","Claims":"What I claim is:1. A fiber-forming aliphatic polycarbonamide wherein recurring amidelinkages and terminal sulfonate groups are integral parts of a polymerchain which consists essentially of a polymerization product obtained fromreactants consisting essentially of (A) at least one polyamide-formingcomponent selected from the group consisting of amino acid, lactam,dicarboxylic acid and diamine, and salt of dicarboxylic acid and diamine,and (B) at least one basic dyeability modifier selected from the groupconsisting of aminoalkanesulfonic acid and alkali metal salt thereofhaving the formula RNHR SO.sub.3 M wherein M is hydrogen or an alkalimetal, R is hydrogen or a monovalent saturated hydrocarbon radical having1-12 carbon atoms per radical, R  is a divalent saturated hydrocarbonradical having 1-18 carbon atoms per radical; said basic dyeabilitymodifier being present therein in an amount of from about 0.05 to about 4mol percent based on the mols of recurring amide units in thepolycarbonamide.2. A fiber-forming polycarbonamide according to claim 1 wherein R  is adivalent saturated hydrocarbon radical having from 2-6 carbon atoms perradical.3. A fiber-forming polycarbonamide according to claim 1 wherein reactant(A) is the salt of (a) at least one dicarboxylic acid having the formulaHO.sub.2 CR CO.sub.2 H and (b) at least one diamine having the formulaH.sub.2 NR NH.sub.2, wherein R  is a divalent hydrocarbon radical havingfrom about 2 to about 18 carbon atoms per radical.4. A fiber-forming polycarbonamide according to claim 1 wherein reactant(A) is at least one aminocarboxylic acid having a formula H.sub.2NR CO.sub.2 H, wherein R  is a divalent hydrocarbon radical having fromabout 2 to about 18 carbon atoms per radical.5. A fiber-forming polycarbonamide according to claim 1 wherein saidmodifier is present in an amount of from about 0.1 to about 2 mol percentbased on the mols of recurring amide units in the polycarbonamide.6. A fiber-forming polycarbonamide according to claim 1 wherein saidmodifier is selected from the group consisting of18-(dodecylamino)octadecanesulfonic acid,5-(3-methylcyclopentylamino)pentanesulfonic acid, 3-aminopropanesulfonicacid, 2-methyl-3-aminocyclopentanesulfonic acid, lithiumaminomethanesulfonate, sodium 2-aminoethanesulfonate, sodium2-(methylamino)ethanesulfonate, sodium 3-aminopropanesulfonate, potassium6-(isobutylamino)hexanesulfonate, rubidium8-(cyclohexylamino)-2-ethyloctanesulfonate, cesium12-(hexylamino)dodecanesulfonate, lithium2-[(cyclopentylmethyl)amino]ethanesulfonate, sodium N-methyltaurine,sodium 4-aminocyclohexanesulfonate, potassium4-(aminomethyl)cyclohexylmethanesulfonate, and sodium2-amino-2-cyclohexylethanesulfonate.7. A fiber-forming polycarbonamide according to claim 1 wherein saidmodifier is 3-aminopropanesulfonic acid.8. A fiber-forming polycarbonamide according to claim 1 wherein saidmodifier is sodium 3-aminopropanesulfonate.9. A fiber-forming polycarbonamide according to claim 1 wherein saidmodifier is sodium N-methyltaurine."}
{"WKU":"039311198","Title":"Aromatic carboxamide-sulphonamide polycondensates","App_Date":"1973-09-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jean-Claude Leblanc","Assignee":"Rhone-Poulenc S.A.","ICL_Class":"C08G 6932","References":"3354125;3786024","Claims":"I claim:1. A heat-resistant film- or fibre-forming aromatic polyamide-sulphonamideconsisting essentially of recurring units of the formula:"}
{"WKU":"039311201","Title":"Flameproof modacrylic fibers","App_Date":"1973-09-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Yoshihisa Shichijo;Hideo Sato;Toshio Iwasa;Yasuo Uchida","Assignee":"Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha","ICL_Class":"C08F 2802;C08F23002","References":"3077418","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A modacrylic synthetic fiber prepared from a polymer compositionconsisting essentially of polymerized units ofa. at least 50 percent by weight based on the composition of acrylonitrile;b. at least 25 percent by weight based on the composition of vinylidenechloride;c. 0.1 to 3 percent by weight based on the composition ofbis(2-chloroethyl) vinylphosphonate; andd. at least one ethylenically unsaturated compound copolymerizabletherewith, present in an amount of up to 10 percent by weight and whichincludes at least one ethylenically unsaturated monomer having a dye sitetherein for a basic dye, said monomer having a dye site being present inan amount of up to 1 percent by weight.2. A modacrylic synthetic fiber of claim 1 wherein said copolymerizableethylenically unsaturated compound having a dye site is vinylsulfonicacid, styrenesulfonic acid, allylsulfonic acid, methallylsulfonic acid, orsodium, potassium or ammonium salts thereof.3. A modacrylic synthetic fiber prepared from a polymer compositionconsisting essentially of 50-70 percent by weight based on the compositionof acrylonitrile, 25-40 percent by weight based on the composition ofvinylidene chloride and 1-2.5 percent by weight based on the compositionof bis(2-chloroethyl) vinylphosphonate, 2-5 percent by weight based on thecomposition of methyl acrylate and 0.1-1 percent by weight based on thecomposition of sodium methallylsulfonate.4. A modacrylic synthetic fiber prepared from a polymer compositionconsisting essentially of 50-70 percent by weight based on the compositionof acrylonitrile, 25-40 percent by weight based on the composition ofvinylidene chloride and 1-2.5 percent by weight based on the compositionof bis(2-chloroethyl) vinylphosphonate, 2-10 percent by weight based onthe composition of acrylamide and 0.1-1.0 percent by weight based on thecomposition of sodium methallylsulfonate."}
{"WKU":"039311210","Title":"Process for accelerating the curing of polymers with organo","App_Date":"1974-11-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Pauls Davis;Herwart C. Vogt;Charles F. Deck","Assignee":"BASF Wyandotte Corporation","ICL_Class":"C08F  830;C08C 1912","References":"2157997;3127384;3207721;3723404","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property orprivilege is claimed are defined as follows:1. A process for accelerating the curing of polymers selected from thegroup consisting of polyethylene, polypropylene, polystyrene,styrene-butadiene rubber, butyl rubber, natural rubber, polybutadiene,polyisobutylene, ethylene-propylene copolymers, bis-1,4-polyisoprene,ethylene-propylene dichloropentadiene terpolymer, polyvinyl chloridepolymer, vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate copolymers, vinylchloride-vinylidene chloride copolymers polyperfluoropropylene vinylidenefluoride, chlorinated natural rubber, sulfochlorinated polyethylene,polychloroprene, chlorinated butyl rubber, chlorinated polyethylene andchlorinated polypropylene, wherein said polymers are crosslinked withpolyfunctional chloronitroso groups in the presence of a metallic ormetallic salt accelerator selected from the group consisting of anhydrouscupric sulfate, ferric chloride, cupric chloride, nickel bromide, and ironpowder, cobalt acetate tetrahydrate and ferrous ammonium sulfatedodecahydrate.2. The process of claim 1 wherein said polymers are crosslinked at atemperature range of from about 30.degree.C. to about 300.degree.C.3. The process of claim 1 wherein the concentration of the chloronitrosocompound is from about 0.1 to about 10 weight percent of the weight ofsaid polymer.4. The process of claim 1 wherein the concentration of the metallic saltaccelerator is from about 10 to about 30 weight percent of the weight ofthe chloronitroso compound.5. The process of claim 1 wherein the concentration of the iron powderaccelerator is from about 1 to about 3 weight percent of the weight of thechloronitroso compound."}
{"WKU":"039311228","Title":"Method for producing high molecular weight polyacrylamide type resins","App_Date":"1974-01-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Shin-ichi Isaoka;Tutomu Shintani;Shigenori Taziri;Shiro Sakai;Wataru Thoma","Assignee":"Sumitomo Chemical Company, Limited","ICL_Class":"C08F  214;C08F  220","References":"3414514;3480761;3509113","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for producing resinous polymers of acrylamide which comprisescopolymerizing acrylamide with at least one monovinyl monomer selectedfrom the group consisting of acrylonitrile, acrylic acid and its salts,methacrylic acid and its salts and vinylpyridine, the total amount ofacrylamide and the monovinyl monomer being 20 to 30 percent by weightbased on the total amount of the reaction mixture and the amount ofacrylamide being 65 to 99 percent by weight based on the total amount ofacrylamide and the monovinyl monomer, in a solvent mixture of water andacetone, said solvent mixture containing 23 to 30 percent by weight ofacetone, in the presence of a redox type catalyst consisting essentiallyof at least one persulfate selected from the group consisting of potassiumpersulfate, sodium persulfate and ammonium persulfate, at least onealiphatic amine selected from the group consisting ofdimethylaminoethanol, triethanolamine, hexamethylene diamine, diethylenetriamine, triethylene tetramine, tetraethylene pentamine,polyethylenimine, tetramethylethylene diamine, tetramethylpropylenediamine and tetramethylhexamethylene diamine and at least one Lewis acidselected from the group consisting of the chlorides and bromides ofaluminum, antimony, lithium and zinc, the weight ratio of the persulfateto the aliphatic amine being 1 : 0.5-2.5 and the weight ratio of thealiphatic amine to said Lewis acid being 1 : 0.5-3.0, the amount of saidredox type catalyst being 0.01 to 1.0 percent by weight based on the totalamount of acrylamide and the monovinyl monomer.2. The process according to claim 1 wherein the copolymerization iseffected in the presence of polyvinyl alcohol as a dispersing agent.3. The process according to claim 2 wherein the amount of polyvinyl alcoholis 0.1 to 4 percent by weight based on the total amount of the reactionmixture."}
{"WKU":"039311236","Title":"Hydrophilic nitrite copolymers","App_Date":"1973-04-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jiri Vacik;Jindrich Kopecek","Assignee":"Ceskoslovenska akadamie ved","ICL_Class":"C08F  842;C08F 1602","References":"2484487;3418295;3544262;3741272","Claims":"We claim:1. A composition comprising a hydrophilic copolymer having reactive-C.tbd.N groups, which contains (A) 2 - 50 mol. percent ofmethacrylonitrile or acrylonitrile and (B) 50 - 98 mol. percent of glycolmonoesters of acrylic or methacrylic acid, where the glycol is selectedfrom the group consisting of ethylene glycol, diethylene glycol,triethylene glycol and their mixtures.2. A composition comprising a hydrophilic copolymer having reactive-C.tbd.N groups, which contains (A) 2 - 50 mol. percent ofmethacrylonitrile or acrylonitrile, (B) 97.9 - 20 percent glycolmonoesters of acrylic or methacrylic acid, wherein the glycol is selectedfrom the group consisting of ethylene glycol, diethylene glycol,triethylene glycol and their mixtures, and (C) 0.1 - 30 mol. percent of across-linking agent selected from the group consisting of 1,4-cyclohexanedimethyl dimethacrylate, ethylene glycol dimethacrylate, diethylene glycoldimethacrylate, 1,6-hexamethylene-bis-acrylamide, triethylene glycoldimethacrylate, tetraethylene glycol dimethacrylate,methylene-bis-acrylamide, and ethylene-bis-acrylamide.3. A low-temperature hydrogenation catalyst comprising the composition ofclaim 2 having bonded thereto a metal selected from the group consistingof Pt, Pd, and Rh."}
{"WKU":"039311244","Title":"Fluoroelastomer composition","App_Date":"1974-03-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Yutaka Kometani;Shun Koizumi;Takeshi Suzuki;Yasuyoshi Furukawa;Masayasu Tomoda;Kiyoichi Kondo","Assignee":"Daikin Kogyo Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"C08F21418;C08F21420;C08F21422;C08F21424","References":"3347812","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A fluoroelastomer composition comprising (a) a fluoroelastomercopolymer, (b) at least one member selected from the group consisting ofbivalent metal oxide, bivalent metal hydroxide and mixture of bivalentmetal oxide or metal hydroxide with metal salt of weak acid, (c) anaromatic polyhydroxy compound, and from about 0.2 to 10 parts per 100parts by weight of fluoroelastomer copolymer of (d) a quaternary ammoniumcompound having the general formula:##SPC2##wherein R is alkyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms or aralkyl grouphaving 7 to 20 carbon atoms, and X.sup.- is an anion such as halide ion,hydroxylate ion, alkoxylate ion, carboxylate ion, phenoxide ion, sulfonateion, sulfate ion, sulfite ion and carbonate ion.2. The composition of claim 1, wherein said quaternary ammonium compound ispresent in an amount of 0.2 to 3 parts by weight to 100 parts by weight offluoroelastomer.3. The composition of claim 1, wherein said quaternary ammonium compound isa member selected from the group consisting of8-methyl-1,8-diaza-bicyclo[5.4.0]-7-undecenium chloride,8-methyl-1,8-diaza-bicyclo[5.4.0]-7-undecenium iodide,8-methyl-1,8-diaza-bicyclo[5.4.0]-7-undecenium hydroxide,9-methyl-1,8-diaza-bicyclo[5.4.0]-7-undecenium methylsulfate,8-ethyl-1,8-diaza-bicyclo-[5.4.0]-7-undecenium bromide,8-propyl-1,8-diaza-bicyclo-[5.4.0]-7-undecenium bromide,8-dodecyl-1,8-diaza-bicyclo-[5.4.0]-7-undecenium chloride,8-dodecyl-1,8-diaza-bicyclo[5.4.0]-7-undecenium hydroxide,8-eicosyl-1,8-diaza-bicyclo[5.4.0]-7-undecenium chloride,8-tetracosyl-1,8-diaza-bicyclo[5.4.0]-7-undecenium chloride,8-benzyl-1,8-diaza-bicyclo[5.4.0]-7-undecenium chloride,8-benzyl-1,8-diaza-bicyclo[5.4.0]-7-undecenium hydroxide,8-phenethyl-1,8-diaza-bicyclo[5.4.0]-7-undecenium chloride and8-(3-phenylpropyl)-1,8-diaza-bicyclo[5.4.0]-7-undecenium chloride.4. The composition of claim 1, wherein said (b) ingredient is added in anamount of 2 to 30 parts by weight to 100 parts by weight offluoroelastomer.5. The composition of claim 1, wherein said (b) ingredient is added in anamount of 5 to 20 parts by weight to 100 parts by weight offluoroelastomer.6. The composition of claim 1, wherein said aromatic polyhydroxy compoundis added in an amount of 0.5 to 5 parts by weight to 100 parts by weightof fluoroelastomer.7. The composition of claim 1, wherein said aromatic polyhydroxy compoundis added in an amount of 1 to 2 parts by weight to 100 parts by weight offluoroelastomer.8. The composition of claim 1, wherein said polyhydroxy aromatic compoundis hydroquinone, 2,2-bis(4-hydroxyphenyl)propane,2,2-bis(4-hydroxyphenyl)butane or 2,2-bis(4-hydroxyphenyl) per fluoropropane.9. The composition of claim 1, wherein said fluoroelastomer is a copolymerof vinylidene fluoride and hexafluoropropene.10. The composition of claim 9, wherein said fluoroelastomer is a copolymerwhich composition is in the ratio of vinylidene fluoride andhexafluoropropene being 92 : 8 to 66 : 34 by mole.11. The composition of claim 1, wherein said fluoroelastomer is aterpolymer of vinylidene fluoride, tetrafluoroethylene andhexafluoropropene.12. The composition of claim 11, wherein said fluoroelastomer is aterpolymer which composition is in rectangular area formed by thefollowing four ratios of vinylidene fluoride, tetrafluoroethylene andhexafluoropropene being 85.7 : 5 : 9.3, 59.7 : 5 : 35.3, 28 : 30 : 42 and54 : 30 : 16 by mole.13. The composition of claim 1, wherein said fluoroelastomer copolymer isan elastomeric copolymer of vinylidene fluoride and at least one otherfluoroolefin.14. The composition of claim 1, wherein said fluoroelastomer copolymer isan elastomeric copolymer of vinylidene fluoride and at least one of themembers selected from the group consisting of hexafluoropropene,pentafluoropropene, trifluoroethylene, trifluorochloroethylene,tetrafluoroethylene, vinyl fluoride, perfluoro(methyl vinyl ether) andperfluoro(propy vinyl ether).15. A fluoro-rubber obtained by curing the fluoroelastomer composition ofclaim 1.16. A process for preparing fluoro-rubber which comprises milling afluoroelastomer composition comprising (a) a fluoroelastomer copolymer,(b) at least one member selected from the group consisting of bivalentmetal oxide, bivalent metal hydroxide and mixture of bivalent metal oxideor metal hydroxide with metal salt of weak acid, (c) an aromaticpolyhydroxy compound, and from about 0.2 to 10 parts per 100 parts byweight of fluoroelastomer copolymer of (d) quaternary ammonium compoundhaving a general formula:##SPC3##wherein R is alkyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms or aralkyl grouphaving 7 to 20 carbon atoms, and X.sup.- is an anion such as halide ion,hydroxylate ion, alkoxylate ion, carboxylate ion, phenoxide ion, sulfonateion, sulfate ion, sulfite ion and carbonate ion, putting into a mold,curing at a temperature of 100.degree. to 200.degree.C. under a pressureof 20 to 100 kg./cm..sup.2 for a period of 10 to 180 minutes, removing outof the mold and curing at a temperature of 150.degree. to 300.degree.C.for a period of 0 to 30 hours in an oven.17. A fluoro-rubber obtained by the process of claim 16."}
{"WKU":"039311252","Title":"Process for producing hydrocarbon resin and pressure-sensitive adhesives","App_Date":"1974-03-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Shigeru Katayama;Izuru Yokoyama;Katsuhiko Tasaka","Assignee":"Mitsui Petrochemical Industries, Ltd.","ICL_Class":"C08F21400;C08F21200","References":"3753963","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for producing a hydrocarbon resin (C) which comprisescopolymerizing 100 parts by weight of vinyl aromatic hydrocarbons (A)comprising about 80 to 100% by weight isopropenyltoluene and 0 to 20% byweight vinyl aromatic hydrocarbons having 8 to 9 carbon atoms and fromabout 5 to 100 parts by weight of a fraction (B) having a boiling pointrange from about -15.degree.C to 45.degree.C and comprising a majorproportion by weight of unsaturated hydrocarbons having 4 to 5 carbonatoms, which is the by-product in the refining or cracking of petroleum,in the presence of a Friedel-Crafts catalyst.2. The process for producing the hydrocarbon resin (C) as claimed in claim1, wherein said by-product fraction (B) is a fraction having a boilingpoint range from about 30.degree.C to 45.degree.C and comprising a majorportion by weight of unsaturated hydrocarbons having 5 carbon atoms.3. The process for producing the hydrocarbon resin (C) as claimed in claim1, wherein said by-product fraction (B) is a fraction having a boilingpoint range from about -15.degree.C to 15.degree.C and comprising a majorportion by weight of unsaturated hydrocarbons having 4 carbon atoms.4. The process for producing the hydrocarbon resin (C) as claimed in claim1, wherein said vinyl aromatic hydrocarbon having 8 to 9 carbon atoms isselected from the group consisting of styrene, vinyltoluene,.alpha.-methylstyrene and a mixture thereof.5. The process for producing the hydrocarbon resin (C) as claimed in claim1, wherein said component (A) is isopropenyltoluene.6. The process for producing the hydrocarbon resin (C) as claimed in claim1, wherein said component (A) is copolymerized with said component (B) inthe presence of a solvent selected from the group consisting of analiphatic hydrocarbon, an alicyclic hydrocarbon and an aromatichydrocarbon.7. The process for producing the hydrocarbon resin (C) as claimed in claim6, wherein said solvent is selected from the group consisting of aliphatichydrocarbons having 5 to 8 carbon atoms, alicyclic hydrocarbons having 5to 7 carbon atoms, and aromatic hydrocarbons having 7 to 9 carbon atoms.8. The process for producing the hydrocarbon resin (C) as claimed in claim6, wherein said solvent is toluene or xylene.9. The process for producing the hydrocarbon resin (C) as claimed in claim1, wherein the polymerization of said components (A) and (B) is conductedat a temperature ranging from about -50.degree.C to 50.degree.C.10. The process for producing the hydrocarbon resin (C) as claimed in claim1, wherein said Friedel-Crafts catalyst is selected from the groupconsisting of aluminum chloride, aluminum bromide, dichloromonoethylaluminum, titanium tetrachloride, tin tetrachloride, boron trifluoride,and a complex compound of boron trifluoride.11. The process for producing the hydrocarbon resin (C) as claimed in claim10, wherein said complex compound is a complex compound of borontrifluoride and phenol or a complex compound of boron tifluoride andethanol.12. The process for producing the hydrocarbon resin (C) as claimed in claim1, wherein the amount of said Friedel-Crafts catalyst is about 0.1 to 3%by weight of the total amount of said component (A) and component (B).13. The process for producing the hydrocarbon resin (C) as claimed in claim1, wherein the amount of said Friedel-Crafts catalyst is about 0.5 to 1.5%by weight of the total amount of said component (A) and component (B).14. A process for producing a hydrocarbon resin having a softening point of30.degree.C to 140.degree.C which comprises copolymerizing 100 parts byweight of isopropenyltoluene (A) and 10 to 50 parts by weight of aby-product fraction (B) produced in cracking or refining petroleum andhaving a boiling point ranging from about -15.degree.C to 45.degree.C, andcomprising a major proportion by weight of unsaturated hydrocarbons having4 to 5 carbon atoms, at temperatures of -20 to 10.degree.C in the presenceof a complex compound of boron trifluoride and phenol in an amount ofabout 0.1 to 1.5% by weight of the total amount of said components (A) and(B) and toluene.15. A hydrocarbon resin having a softening point of about 30.degree.C to140.degree.C, and a bromine value of 3 to 20 produced by the process asclaimed in claim 1.16. A hydrocarbon resin having a softening point of about 30.degree.C to140.degree.C, and a bromine value of 3 to 20 produced by the process asclaimed in claim 14.17. The hydrocarbon resin of claim 15 having a Gardner value of 1 to 5.18. The hydrocarbon resin of claim 16 having a Gardner value of 1 to 5."}
{"WKU":"039311260","Title":"Modification of conjugated diene polymers by treatment with","App_Date":"1967-10-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Floyd E. Naylor","Assignee":"Phillips Petroleum Company","ICL_Class":"C08C 1922","References":"3090819;3135716;3177165;3402162","Claims":"I claim:1. A method for reducing the inherent viscosity of a preformed polymerwherein said polymer is at least one of a polymer of at least oneconjugated diene having from about 4 to 8 carbon atoms per molecule and acopolymer of said conjugated diene with a vinyl aromatic compoundcontaining up to 20 carbon atoms per molecule, which comprises reactingsaid preformed polymer for at least two minutes in an inert hydrocarbondiluent at a pressure sufficient for liquid-phase operation with (1) anorganolithium treating agent selected from (a) compounds represented bythe formula R(Li).sub.x wherein R is a hydrocarbon radical selected fromthe group consisting of alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkenyl, arylradicals, and combinations thereof, and x is an integer of from 1 to 4,(b) a halogensubstituted phenyllithium, or (c) a lithium adduct ofnaphthalene or stilbene and (2) N,N,N ,N  -tetramethylalkylenediamine,wherein said N,N,N ,N -tetramethylalkylenediamine is##EQU2##wherein a is an integer from 1 to 6, inclusive, and each Y is selectedfrom the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl radicals containing from 1to 3, inclusive, carbon atoms, and wherein the mole ratio of saidorganolithium treating agent to said N,N,N ,N -tetramethylalkylenediamineis in the range of from 1:10 to 10:1 and wherein from 20 to 200 grammillimoles of said N,N,N ,N -tetramethylalkylenediamine are used per 100grams of said polymer.2. The method of claim 1 wherein said preformed polymer is selected fromhomopolymers of said conjugated diene and copolymers at least two of saidconjugated dienes.3. The method of claim 2 wherein the temperature is maintained in the rangeof 25.degree. to 200.degree.C. and said preformed polymer is treated inthe range of from 5 to 10 hours.4. The method of claim 3 wherein said preformed polymer is a homopolymer ofbutadiene.5. The method of claim 1 wherein said preformed polymer is a copolymer ofbutadiene and a monovinyl aromatic compound.6. The method of claim 3 wherein said N,N,N ,N -tetramethylalkylenediamineis N,N,N ,N -tetramethylethylenediamine wherein said organolithiumtreating agent is n-butyllithium.7. The method of claim 2 wherein the treated conjugated diene polymer is,prior to inactivation of said organolithium treating agent, furthertreated with a compound capable of replacing the lithium atoms with morestable radicals.8. The composition prepared by the method of claim 1.9. The composition prepared by the method of claim 2.10. The method of treating an unsaturated polymer from the class consistingof homopolymers and copolymers of conjugated dienes and conjugated dieneswith monovinyl aromatic compounds, containing a plurality of olefinicgroups, which method comprises reacting the polymer at a plurality of thedouble bonds thereof with an organolithium treating reagent andN,N,N ,N -tetramethylalkylenediamine of the formula:##EQU3##wherein a is any whole number from 1-6, and each Y is H or alkyl of 1-3carbon atoms, the ratio of organolithium treating reagent toN,N,N ,N -tetramethylalkylene diamine is 1:10 to 10:1, and wherein saidtreating is conducted in a hydrocarbon diluent at pressure sufficient forliquid phase operation."}
{"WKU":"039311279","Title":"Cyclized copolymer from a conjugated diene and an alpha olefin, and the","App_Date":"1973-11-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Adel Farhan Halasa;Tai Chun Cheng","Assignee":"The Firestone Tire & Rubber Company","ICL_Class":"C08F  446;C08F 3604;C08F23604","References":"","Claims":"We claim:1. A cyclized polymer with a molecular weight of substantially 500 to200,000 which includes substantially 20 to 60 percent of cyclized unitshaving in the cycle 50 to 95 parts by weight of conjugated diene units and50 to 5 parts by weight of alpha olefin units, each conjugated diene unitcontaining 4 to 8 carbon atoms and each alpha olefin unit containing 2 to8 carbon atoms, and in addition to the cyclized portion of the polymer, anuncyclized portion, 10 to 15 percent of which is cis-1,4 polymer, 20 to 25percent of which is trans-1,4 polymer and between about 70 to 60 percentof which is 1,2-polymer.2. The process of producing a cyclized polymer which includes cycles ofalpha olefin and conjugated diene units, the alpha olefin units containing2 to 8 carbon atoms and the conjugated diene units containing 4 to 8carbon atoms, which process comprises polymerizing in solution 5 to 50weight percent alpha olefin with 95 to 50 percent of a monomer of theclass consisting of such conjugated dienes and copolymerizable mixtures ofsuch a conjugated diene and an aryl vinyl monomer, using as a catalystcomposition (a) sodium, potassium, alkyl sodium or alkyl potassium inwhich the alkyl group contains 1 to 8 carbon atoms and (b) an equimolaramount of N,N,N ,N -tetraalkylalkylenediamine in which each alkyl groupcontains 1 to 8 carbon atoms and each alkylene group containssubstantially 2 to 10 carbon atoms, and maintaining the monomer in suchstarved supply that substantially 20 to 60 percent of the monomer iscyclized.3. The process of claim 2 in which the catalyst includes a substantiallyequal molar amount of an alkali metal alkoxide containing 1 to 8 carbonatoms, the alkali metal being different from that present in the alkalimetal or alkyl alkali metal used in the catalyst."}
{"WKU":"039311287","Title":"Process for preparing copolymer of acrylonitrile and aromatic vinyl","App_Date":"1974-04-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hidehiko Takizawa;Mitsuto Hisashige","Assignee":"Denki Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha","ICL_Class":"C08F22044","References":"2658057;3032540;3198775;3738972;3763128","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for preparing a copolymer of acrylonitrile and an aromaticvinyl compound comprising suspension polymerizing acrylonitrile and anaromatic vinyl compound chosen from the group consisting of styrene,o-methylstyrene, m-methylstyrene, p-methylstyrene and.alpha.-methylstyrene in an initial weight ratio of acrylonitrile to vinylcompound of 30-50: 70-50 which is during the process adjusted to a ratioof 20-35: 80-65 by the addition of vinyl compound, in the presence of atleast one azo catalyst selected from the group consisting of1,1 -azobiscyclohexanitrile, 1,1 -azobiscycloheptanitrile,2,2 -azobis(2-nitropropane), 2,2 -azobis-(2-thiocyanopropane) and2,2 -azobis(2-methoxycarbonyl propane) and at least one peroxide catalystselected from the group consisting of ditertiary butyl peroxide,2,5-dimethyl-2,5-di(tertiary butyl peroxy) hexane, tertiary butyl peroxyacetate and tertiary butyl peroxy isopropyl carbonate in an amount ofcatalyst of about 0.01 to 0.5% by weight, and and about 0.005 to 0.2% byweight, respectively, based on the weight of the monomers, and maintainingthe temperature at a first level of about 90.degree. to 110.degree.C untilthe conversion of the monomers reaches 70%, and then, increasing thetemperature to a second level in excess of said first level in the rangeof about 110.degree. to 140.degree.C until completion of thepolymerization.2. The process of claim 1, wherein said azo catalyst is1,1 -azobiscyclohexanitrile or 1,1 -azobiscycloheptanitrile, and saidperoxide catalyst is tertiary butyl peroxy isopropyl carbonate.3. The process of claim 1, wherein said peroxide catalyst is added when theconversion of monomers has reached 70%.4. The process of claim 1, wherein a dispersing agent selected from thegroup consisting of tricalcium phosphate, trisodium phosphate, sodiumphosphate, calcium chloride or disodium phosphate is present in saidprocess as a dispersing agent.5. The process of claim 1, wherein a compound selected from the groupconsisting of tertiary dodecyl mercaptan, normal dodecyl mercaptan, anunsaturated dimer of .alpha.-methylstyrene, trichloroethylene andterpinolene is present as a molecular weight adjuster."}
{"WKU":"039311295","Title":"Fluoroelastomer composition","App_Date":"1974-03-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Yutaka Kometani;Shun Koizumi;Takeshi Suzuki;Yasuyoshi Furukawa;Masayasu Tomoda;Kiyoichi Kondo","Assignee":"Daikin Kogyo Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"C08F21422","References":"3403127;3424710;3502628;3524836;3655727;3723577;3752787","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A fluoroelastomer composition comprising per 100 parts by weight of (a)a fluoroelastomer, (b) from 2 to 30 parts by weight of at least one memberselected from the group consisting of bivalent metal oxide, bivalent metalhydroxide and mixture of bivalent metal oxide or metal hydroxide withmetal salt of weak acid, (c) from 0.5 to 5 parts by weight of an aromaticpolyhydroxy compound, and (d) from 0.2 to 10 parts by weight of aquaternary ammonium compound having the general formula:##SPC2##wherein R.sub.1 is alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, carbocyclicgroup, heterocyclic group or aralkyl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms,R.sub.2 is hydrogen, alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, carbocyclicgroup, heterocyclic group, phenyl group, substituted phenyl group, aralkylgroup having 7 to 12 carbon atoms, alkoxyl group having 1 to 12 carbonatoms, benzyloxy group, hydroxyl group, carboxyl group, alkoxycarbonylgroup, acyl group, benzoyl group or cyclohexylcarbonyl group, R.sub.3 isalkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or aralkyl group having 7 to 20carbon atoms, R.sub.4 and R.sub.5 are hydrogen or lower alkyl group, A isalkylene group or phenylene group, B is alkylene group, and X.sup.- is ananion such as halide ion, hydroxylate ion, alkoxylate ion, phenoxide ion,carboxylate ion, sulfonate ion, sulfate ion, sulfite ion and carbonateion.2. The composition of claim 1, wherein said quaternary ammonium compound ispresent in an amount of 0.5 to 3 parts by weight to 100 parts by weight offluoroelastomer.3. The composition of claim 1, wherein said quaternary ammonium salt is amember selected from the group consisting of1,3-dibenzyl-2-methylimidazolium chloride and1-dodecyl-2-methyl-3-benzylimidazolium chloride.4. The composition of claim 1, wherein said (b) ingredient is added in anamount of 5 to 20 parts by weight to 100 parts by weight offluoroelastomer.5. The composition of claim 1, wherein said aromatic polyhydroxy compoundis added in an amount of 1 to 2 parts by weight to 100 parts by weight offluoroelastomer.6. The composition of claim 1, wherein said polyhydroxy aromatic compoundis hydroquinone, Bisphenol A, Bisphenol B or Bisphenol AF.7. The composition of claim 1, wherein said fluoroelastomer is a copolymerof vinylidene fluoride and hexafluoropropene.8. The composition of claim 1, wherein said fluoroelastomer is a terpolymerof vinylidene fluoride, tetrafluoroethylene and hexafluoropropene.9. The composition of claim 7, wherein said fluoroelastomer is a copolymerwhich composition is in the ratio of vinylidene fluoride andhexafluropropene being 92 : 8 to 66 : 34 by mole.10. The composition of claim 8, wherein said fluoroelastomer is aterpolymer which composition is in rectangular area formed by thefollowing four ratios of vinylidene fluoride, tetrafluoroethylene andhexafluoropropene being 85.7 : 5 : 9.3, 59.7 : 5 35.3, 28 : 30 : 42 and 54: 30 : 16 by mole.11. A process for preparing fluoro-rubber which comprises milling afluoroelastomer composition comprising per 100 parts by weight of (a) afluoroelastomer, (b) from 2 to 30 parts by weight of at least one memberselected from the group consisting of bivalent metal oxide, bivalent metalhydroxide and mixture of bivalent metal oxide or metal hydroxide withmetal salt of weak acid, (c) from 0.5 to 5 parts by weight of an aromaticpolyhydroxy compound, and (d) from 0.2 to 10 parts by weight of aquaternary ammonium compound having the general formula:##SPC3##wherein R.sub.1 is alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, carbocyclicgroup, heterocyclic group or aralykl group having 7 to 20 carbon atoms,R.sub.2 is hydrogen, alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, carbocyclicgroup, heterocyclic group, phenyl group, substituted phenyl group, aralkylgroup having 7 to 12 carbon atoms, alkoxyl group having 1 to 12 carbonatoms, benzyloxy group, hydroxyl group, carboxyl group, alkoxycarbonylgroup, acyl group, benzoyl group or cyclohexylcarbonyl group, R.sub.3 isalkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or aralkyl group having 7 to 20carbon atoms, R.sub.4 and R.sub.5 are hydrogen or lower alkyl group, A isalkylene group or phenylene group, B is alkylene group, and X.sup.- is ananion such as halide ion, hydroxylate ion, alkoxylate ion, phenoxide ion,carboxylate ion, sulfonate ion, sulfate ion, sulfite ion and carbonateion, putting into a mold, curing at a temperature of 100.degree. to200.degree.C. under a pressure of 20 to 100 kg./cm..sup.2 for a period of10 to 180 minutes, removing out of the mold and curing at a temperature of150.degree. to 300.degree.C. for a period of 0 to 30 hours in an oven.12. A fluoro-rubber obtained by curing the fluoroelastomer composition ofclaim 1.13. A fluoro-rubber obtained by the process of claim 11.14. The composition of claim 1 adapted to be cured to form a fluoro-rubberhaving a low compression set and elasticity.15. The composition of claim 1 wherein the fluoroelastomer (a) is acopolymer of vinylidene fluoride and at least one fluoro-olefin.16. The composition of claim 15 wherein the said fluoroolefin ishexafluoropropene, pentafluoropropene, trifluoroethylenetrifluorochloroethylene, tetrafluoroethylene, vinyl fluoride,perfluoro-(methyl vinyl ether) or perfluoro(propyl vinyl ether)."}
{"WKU":"039311309","Title":"Process for removing residual volatile solvent impurities from polymer","App_Date":"1974-01-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Heinz Beining","Assignee":"Du Pont of Canada, Ltd.","ICL_Class":"C08F21000;C08F21200","References":"3090744;3189588;3591569;3847886","Claims":"I claim:1. In a process for the treatment of pellets of a crystalline,thermoplastic polymer to remove residual volatile solvents containedtherein by heating below the melting point of the polymer, the improvementwhich comprises passing the pellets slurried with water into the base of agenerally cylindrical, vertical column of hot water, passing the pelletsin plug-flow upwardly through the column of hot water, said water beingmaintained at a temperature between at least 100.degree.C. and about8.degree.C. below the crystalline melting point of the polymer, whileremoving excess, cooler water from the base of the column of water at arate such that the height of the water in the column remains constant,continuously supplying heat to the column of water at a point above thebase of the column at a rate sufficient to maintain the temperature in thecolumn, maintaining sufficient pressure on the top of the column toprevent boiling of the water, and withdrawing the pellets from the top ofthe column of water to a drying column and there drying them with a hotgas comprising superheated steam while recovering the volatile solvent,stripped from the pellets, from the water drawn off from the bottom of thecolumn, by steam distillation.2. The process of claim 1 in which the polymer is an .alpha.-olefinpolymer.3. The process of claim 2 in which the .alpha.-olefin comprises ethylene.4. The process of claim 3 in which the polymer is a homopolymer ofethylene.5. The process of claim 3 in which the polymer is a copolymer of ethyleneand a higher .alpha.-olefin.6. The process of claim 5 in which the higher .alpha.-olefin is butene-1.7. The process of claim 1 in which the temperature of the water is about125.degree.C. and the density of the polymer is in the range about 0.940 -0.960.8. The process of claim 1 in which the temperature of the water is about115.degree.C. and the density of the polymer is in the range about 0.940 -0.960.9. The process of claim 1 in which the volatile impurity removed comprisescyclohexane.10. The process of claim 1 in which the crystalline, thermoplastic polymeris a polymer of ethylene having a density above 0.940, the volatilesolvent removed is cyclohexane and the water temperature in the verticalcolumn is maintained at a temperature in the range of 115.degree. to125.degree.C."}
{"WKU":"039311317","Title":"Process and apparatus for suspension polymerization","App_Date":"1974-12-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hiroyuki Noziri;Mituaki Sugahara;Hirotada Tanno","Assignee":"Kureha Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha","ICL_Class":"C08F  218;C08F 1400","References":"2838380;3488328;3515709;3842055;3849179;3882195;B415124","Claims":"We claim:1. A suspension polymerization process which comprises polymerizing amember selected from the group consisting of ethylene halides and mixturesof an ethylene halide and a monomer copolymerizable therewith in anaqueous medium in the presence of a suspending agent and an oil-solublecatalyst under pressure in a pressure polymerization vessel the internalexposed surfaces of which are at least partially lined with wood therebyto prevent adhesion thereto of the resulting polymer.2. The process according to claim 1 wherein the pressure polymerizationvessel is provided with a cooling coil therein.3. The process according to claim 2 wherein the pressure polymerizationvessel is a single polymerization vessel which is divided into a pluralityof compartments.4. The process according to claim 2 wherein the pressure polymerizationvessel comprises a plurality of single vessels connected to each other bypipes lined on the inner wall surface thereof with wood."}
{"WKU":"039311325","Title":"Utilization of oxygen difluoride for syntheses of fluoropolymers","App_Date":"1970-06-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"George M. Deputy Administrator of the National Aernautics and Space Low;Madeline S. Toy","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"C08F11400;C08L  900;C08L 2712","References":"2757167;3309348","Claims":"I claim:1. A method of modifying a polyperfluoro-1,2 and 1,4 butadiene polymercontaining a high percentage of pendant 1,2-perfluoro vinyl groups andbeing prepared by the free radical polymerization of perfluorobutadiene bya gaseous perfluoroalkyl peroxide catalyst, said polymer consistingessentially of units of the formula:##EQU16##where x and y are integers such that the molecular weight is at least25,000 comprising the step of:reacting said polymer with oxygen difluoride at a temperature of no lessthan 25.degree.C to form a polymer containing acyl groups of the formula:##EQU17##2. The method of claim 1 wherein said polymer prepared by said free radicalpolymerization reaction is solid at ambient conditions and furthercomprising:forming a dispersion of particles of said solid polymer in an inert liquid,and contacting said OF.sub.2 with said dispersion.3. The method of claim 2 comprising:continuously bubbling said OF.sub.2 through said liquid dispersion to formsaid resulting groups.4. A method according to claim 1 further including the step of hydrolyzingsaid acyl groups to form a carboxyl-containing group of the formula:##EQU18##5. An acylated polyperfluoro-1,2 and 1,4 butadiene polymer from apolyperfluoro-1,2 and 1,4 butadiene polymer containing a high percentageof pendant 1,2-perfluoro vinyl groups, said last mentioned polymer beingprepared by the free radical polymerization of perfluorobutadiene by agaseous perfluoroalkyl peroxide catalyst, said acylated polymer consistingof units of the formula:##EQU19##where x and y are positive integers such that the molecular weight is atleast 25,000.6. A carboxyl substituted polyperfluoro-1,2 and 1,4 butadiene polymer froma polyperfluoro-1,2 and 1,4 butadiene polymer containing a high percentageof pendant 1,2-perfluoro vinyl groups, said last mentioned polymer beingprepared by the free radical polymerization of perfluorobutadiene by agaseous perfluoroalkyl peroxide catalyst, said carboxyl substitutedpolymer consisting of units of the formula:##EQU20##where x and y are positive integers such that the molecular weight is atleast 25,000."}
{"WKU":"039311333","Title":"Suspension polymerization process for ethylenic monomers","App_Date":"1973-12-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jacques Desilles","Assignee":"Aquitaine Total Organico","ICL_Class":"C08f  704;C08f  376;C08f 1902","References":"3047534;3068192;3100763;3328374","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for the suspension polymerization of styrene in the presenceof a tertiary butyl perbenzoate, which comprises co-precipitating inwater, a mixture of an alkali metal phosphate and an alkali metalcarbonate containing at least one gram-ion of carbonate to 3 gram-ions ofphosphate equivalents by means of a soluble salt of metals selected fromthe group consisting of calcium, barium, magnesium, iron and aluminum inan amount of at least 10 metal ions to 6 phosphate equivalents and 1 metalion to each carbonate ion, at a temperature range from about ambient to40.degree.C, dispersing in the thus obtained suspension, whoseconcentration range is from 0.01 to 10 g/liter, the said styrene andtertiary butyl perbenzoate, then raising the temperature of the resultingsuspension to about 140.degree.C for a period of from 3 to 24 hours.2. A polymerization process according to claim 1, in which the mixture ofsoluble phosphate and carbonate contains not more than 1 gram-ion ofCO.sub.3 .sup.-.sup.- to 1 gram-ion of PO.sub.4 .sup.-.sup.-.sup.-equivalents.3. A polymerization process according to claim 2, in which the mixture ofsoluble phosphate and carbonate contains between 1 gram-ion of CO.sub.3.sup.-.sup.- to 2 gram-ions of PO.sub.4 .sup.-.sup.-.sup.- equivalents,and 2 gram-ions of CO.sub.3 .sup.-.sup.- to 3 gram-ions of PO.sub.4.sup.-.sup.-.sup.- equivalents.4. A polymerization process according to claim 1, in which the solublesalts are nitrates of said metals.5. A polymerization process according to claim 1, in which the solublesalts are halides of said metals.6. A polymerization process according to claim 1, in which the solublesalts are acetates of paid metals of the periodic table of elements.7. A polymerization process according to claim 1, in which the solublesalts are barium salts.8. A polymerization process according to claim 1, in which the solublesalts are magnesium salts.9. A polymerization process according to claim 1, in which the solublesalts are calcium salts.10. A polymerization process according to claim 1, in which the mixture ofsoluble phosphate and carbonate is coprecipitated by a mixture of solublesalts of two different metals.11. A polymerization process according to claim 10, in which the mixture ofsoluble phosphate and carbonate is coprecipitated by a mixture of calciumand magnesium salts.12. A polymerization process according to claim 11, in which the mixture ofcalcium and magnesium salts contains between 2 Mg.sup.+.sup.+ to 1Ca.sup.+.sup.+ and 1 Mg.sup.+.sup.+ to 10 Ca.sup.+.sup.+.13. A polymerization process according to claim 12, in which the mixture ofcalcium and magnesium salts contains between 1 Mg.sup.+.sup.+ to 2CA.sup.+.sup.+ and 1 Mg.sup.+.sup.+ to 9 Ca.sup.+.sup.+.14. A polymerization process according to claim 1, in which astoichiometric quantity of soluble salts is added to the mixture ofphosphate and carbonate.15. A polymerization process according to claim 1, in which a molar excessof approximately 10 % of soluble salts is added to the mixture ofphosphate and carbonate.16. A polymerization process according to claim 1, in which the precipitateis prepared in the reaction mixture, before polymerization begins.17. A polymerization process according to claim 1, in which the precipitateis prepared in the reaction mixture during polymerization, before 60 %conversion has occurred.18. A polymerization process according to claim 17, in which theprecipitate is prepared in the reaction mixture during polymerization,before 50 % conversion has occurred.19. A polymerization process according to claim 1, in which theconcentration of precipitate is between 0.01 and 10 g per litre of aqueousphase.20. A polymerization process according to claim 19, in which theconcentration of precipitate is between 0.1 and 5 g per litre of aqueousphase.21. A polymerization process according to claim 1, in which the suspensionmedium contains a surface-active agent.22. A polymerization process according to claim 1, in which the ratio oforganic phase to aqueous phase is between 3 and 0.5.23. A polymerization process according to claim 22, in which the ratio oforganic phase to aqueous phase is between 2 and 1.24. A polymerization process according to claim 1, in which polymerizationoccurs in the presence of a polymer.25. A polymerization process according to claim 24, in which polymerizationis begun in bulk until between 5 and 40 % conversion has occurred, afterwhich it is completed in suspension."}
{"WKU":"039311341","Title":"Process and apparatus for the separating out of coarse and/or heavy","App_Date":"1971-07-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Rainer Hartmann;Oskar Dorschner;Hans-Werner Gross","Assignee":"Veba-Chemie AG","ICL_Class":"C08F  234;C08F 1000","References":"2936303;3023203;3627129;3770714","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Process of continuously recovering particulate material of coarser grainsize from admixture with material of smaller grain size, which particulatematerial contains an olefin polymerization catalyst, which processcomprises feeding a gaseous olefin through a first zone; establishing andmaintaining a gas-solids suspension consisting of solid particulatematerial in said gaseous olefin in said first zone, said solid particulatematerial being reactable with said olefin so as to increase in grain sizeolefin undergoes polymerization; feeding said olefin from said first zonethrough an intermediate zone whose cross-section is a smallercross-section up to about 0.85 that of said dispersed suspension firstzone thereby increasing the velocity of said olefin relative to itsvelocity in said first zone; feeding said olefin from said intermediatezone to a second zone having a crosssectional area about 2 to 15 timesthat of said first zone; establishing and maintaining a dense fluidizedbed of said solid particulate material in said second zone; and recoveringcoarser grain solid particles from the base of said dispersed suspensionfirst zone.2. The process as claimed in claim 1 including providing said intermediatezone as a perforated plate and sizing the aperture of said perforationssuch that the diameters thereof are about 5 to 20 times the particle sizeof the coarser grain particles recovered from the base of said dispersedsuspension first zone.3. Process as claimed in claim 1 including providing said intermediate zoneas an annulus between a jacket means and an insert element which annulushas a gap which is about 2 to 10 times the diameter of said coarser grainparticles withdrawn from said dispersed suspension first zone.4. Process as claimed in claim 1 including tapping a portion of said gasupstream of said intermediate zone.5. Process as claimed in claim 4 including reintroducing said tapped gas tosaid process downstream of said intermediate zone.6. Process as claimed in claim 5 including admixing said gas with fresh gasand feeding said admixture to said process downstream of said intermediatezone.7. Process as claimed in claim 1 wherein the gas is under pressure.8. Process as claimed in claim 5 including admixing said gas with fresh gasand feeding said admixture to said process upstream of said intermediatezone."}
{"WKU":"039311350","Title":"Process for reusing polymerization solvent by recycling","App_Date":"1973-12-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Mamoru Asada;Akinobu Shiga;Kiyoshi Matsuyama","Assignee":"Sumitomo Chemical Company, Limited","ICL_Class":"C08F  214;C08F  452;C08F 1000","References":"3058963;3160622;3227526;3303178;3309350","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a process for mass polymerizing or suspension polymerizing.alpha.-olefins in a polymerization zone to produce apolymer-polymerization solvent slurry using a catalyst system consistingof, as catalyst component (A), titanium trichloride or an eutectic mixtureof titanium trichloride and a metal halide, and, as catalyst component(B), an organoaluminium compound, the improvement which comprisespolymerizing the .alpha.-olefins using an organoaluminium compoundrepresented by the formula AlR.sub.3.sub.-n Cl.sub.n, wherein R representsan alkyl group and n is about 0.9 as catalyst component (B), saidorganoaluminium compound being a mixture of trialkylaluminium anddialkylaluminium halide, separating the polymer produced and the solventbefore adding a polymerization inhibitor to the polymer, recycling thesolvent to the polymerization zone, adding purified fresh solvent, freshcatalyst component (A) and fresh catalyst component (B) to said separatedsolvent and further carrying out the polymerizing.2. The process of claim 1 wherein said organoaluminium compound is amixture of triethyl aluminium and diethyl aluminium chloride."}
{"WKU":"039311368","Title":"Catalytic production of a high molecular weight cis-1,4-polyisoprene","App_Date":"1974-05-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kan Mori;Hiroharu Ikeda;Isao Nagaoka;Tooru Shibata;Sigeo Kawatani;Tatsuhiko Kikuchi","Assignee":"Japan Synthetic Rubber Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"C08D  114;C08D  312","References":"2881156;3036056","Claims":"We claim:1. In the process for producing at least an 80% yield of high molecularweight high cis-1,4-polyisoprene by contacting isoprene in the presence ofcyclopentadiene in amounts up to about 100 ppm. with a polymerizationcatalyst, the improvement which comprises using as said polymerizationcatalyst a catalyst consisting ofA. titanium tetrachloride,B. an organoaluminum compound of the formula AlR.sub.3 wherein each R isselected from the group consisting of alkyl, aryl and cycloalkyl radicals,andC. a beta-diketone of the formula##EQU2##wherein R  and R  are each independently selected from the groupconsisting of alkyl and aryl radicals, said catalyst being prepared bymixing first the components (B) and (C) and then adding the component (A)thereto, and the molar ratio of the component (A) to the component (B)being in the range of from 0.1:1 to 2:1, and the molar ratio of thecomponent (B) to the component (C) being in the range of from 1:0.05 to1:0.7.2. The process of claim 1 wherein the ratio of component (A) to component(B) is 0.2:1 to 1:1, and the ratio of component (B) to component (C) is1:0.1 to 1:0.5."}
{"WKU":"039311376","Title":"Herbicidal compositions","App_Date":"1974-05-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Brian Graham White","Assignee":"Imperial Chemical Industries Limited","ICL_Class":"C07B 2100","References":"2830039;2972528;3340041","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A solid cyrstalline, essentially dry complex of a herbicidalbipyridylium salt selected from the group consisting of1,1 -ethylene-2,2 -bipyridylium dibromide,1,1 -dimethyl-4,4 -bipyridylium dichloride,1,1 -di-2-hydroxyethyl-4,4 -bipyridylium dichloride,1,1 -bis-3,5 -dimethylmorpholinocarbonylmethyl-4,4 -bipyridyliumdichloride,1-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1 -methyl-4,4 -bipyridylium dichloride,1,1 -di-carbamoylmethyl-4,4 -bipyridylium dichloride,1,1 -di-N-methylcarbamoylmethyl-4,4 -bipyridylium dichloride,1,1 -bis-N,N-dimethylcarbamoylmethyl-4,4 -bipyridylium dichloride,1,1 -diacetonyl-4,4 -bipyridylium dichloride,1,1 -diethoxycarbonylmethyl-4,4 -bipyridylium dibromide, and1,1 -diallyl-4,4 -bipyridylium dibromide in combination with urea orthiourea, said complex having the formula X(A).sub.n (H.sub.2 O).sub.m,wherein X represents the bipyridylium salt, A represents a compoundselected from urea and thiourea, n is selected from the integers 1, 2, and4 and m is O or an integer of from 1-4, any water in said complex beingpresent as lattice hydration.2. A solid complex according to claim 1, in which X is a1,1 -dimethyl-4,4 -bipyridylium dichloride, A is urea, and n is 2.3. A solid complex according to claim 1, in which X is a1,1 -dimethyl-4,4 -bipyridylium dichloride, A is thiourea, and n is 4.4. A process of preparing a solid crystalline, essentially dry complex of aherbicidal bipyridylium salt selected from the group consisting of1,1 -ethylene-2,2 -bipyridylium dibromide,1,1 -dimethyl-4,4 -bipyridylium dichloride,1,1 -di-2-hydroxyethyl-4,4 -bipyridylium dichloride,1,1 -bis-3,5-dimethylmorpholinocarbonylmethyl-4,4 -bipyridylium dichloride,1-(2-hydroxyethyl)-1 -methyl-4,4 -bipyridylium dichloride,1,1 -di-carbamoylmethyl-4,4 -bipyridylium dichloride,1,1 -di-N-methylcarbamoylmethyl-4,4 -bipyridylium dichloride,1,1 -bis-N,N-dimethylcarbamoylmethyl-4,4 -bipyridylium dichloride,1. 1 -diacetonyl-4,4 -bipyridylium dichloride,1,1 -diethoxycarbonylmethyl-4,4 -bipyridylium dibromide, and1,1 -diallyl 4,4 -bipyridylium dibromide in combination with urea orthiourea, said complex having the formula X(A).sub.n (H.sub.2 O)m, whereinX represents the bipyridylium salt, A represents a compound selected fromurea and thiourea, n is selected from the integers 1, 2, and 4 and m is Oor an integer of from 1-4, any water in said complex being present aslattice hydration, which comprises adding urea or thiourea to a heatedsolution of said bipyridylium salt in which the concentration ofbipyridylium cation is a least 10% on a grams per milliliter basis andseparating and drying the resulting crystalline complex so that any watertherein is present as lattice hydration.5. A process according to claim 4 which includes adding a salt which iscapable of acquiring water of crystallization to said solution.6. A solid, crystalline, essentially dry herbicidally effective complex ofa herbicidal salt of the 1,1 -dimethyl- 4,4 -bipyridylium cation havingthe structure:##SPC10##in combination with urea or thiourea, said complex having the formulaX(A).sub.n (H.sub.2 O).sub.m, wherein X represents the1,1 -dimethyl-4,4 -bipyridylium salt, A represents a compound selectedfrom urea or thiourea, n is selected from the integers 1, 2 and 4 and m isO or an integer from 1 to 4."}
{"WKU":"039311384","Title":"N-carbobenzoxy-pyroglutamyl-histidine","App_Date":"1974-09-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Masahiko Fujino;Shigeru Kobayashi;Obayashi, Mikihio;Susumu Shinagawa;Tsunehiko Fukuda","Assignee":"Abbott Laboratories","ICL_Class":"C07C10352;C07G  700","References":"3853837;3855198","Claims":"We claim:1. Carbobenzoxy-pyroglutamyl-histidine.2. The compound of claim 1 wherein both aminoacids are in the L-form."}
{"WKU":"039311392","Title":"Tripeptides having an antidepressive and prolactin-releasing action","App_Date":"1974-08-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hans Wissmann;Rolf Geiger;Wolfgang Konig;Hansjorg Kruse;Karl Seeger","Assignee":"Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07C10352;A61K 3700","References":"3725380;3795666","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A tripeptide of the formula##SPC2##wherein X is alkyl having 3 to 8 carbon atoms, cycloalkyl having 5 to 7carbon atoms, or aralkyl having 1 or 2 carbon atoms in the alkyl portionthereof.2. A tripeptide as in claim 1 wherein X is n-propyl.3. A tripeptide as in claim 1 wherein X is isobutyl.4. A tripeptide as in claim 1 wherein X is n-pentyl.5. A tripeptide as in claim 1 wherein X is .beta.-phenylethyl.6. A tripeptide as in claim 1 wherein X is n-hexyl.7. A tripeptide as in claim 1 wherein X is cyclohexyl."}
{"WKU":"039311406","Title":"(H-gly-gly-tyr-ala).sup.1 -somatostatin","App_Date":"1975-01-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Dimitrios Sarantakis","Assignee":"American Home Products Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07C10352;A61K 3700","References":"3842066;3842067;3882098","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A compound selected from the group consisting of##EQU3##the corresponding linear heptadecapeptide, the protamine zinc, protaminealuminum and non-toxic acid addition salts thereof.2. The heptadecapeptide of claim 1 which isglycyl-glycyl-L-tyrosyl-L-alanylglycyl-L-cysteinyl-L-lysyl-L-asparaginyl-L-phenylalanyl-L-phenylalanyl-L-tryptophyl-L-lysyl-L-threonyl-L-phenylalanyl-L-threonyl-L-seryl-L-cysteine.3. The heptadecapeptide of claim 1 which isglycyl-glycyl-L-tyrosyl-L-alanylglycyl-L-cysteinyl-L-lysyl-L-asparaginyl-L-phenylalanyl-L-phenylalanyl-L-tryptophyl-L-lysyl-L-threonyl-L-phenylalanyl-L-threonyl-L-seryl-L-cysteine [6- 17 disulfide].4. A heptadecapeptide of the formulaR-Gly-Gly-Try(R.sup.1)-Ala-Gly-Cys(R.sup.2)-Lys(R.sup.3)-Asn-Phe-Phe-Trp-Lys(R.sup.4)-Thr (R.sup.5)-Phe-Thr (R.sup.6)-Ser (R.sup.7)-Cys (R.sup.8)-O-Xin which R is a member selected from the group consisting of hydrogen andan .alpha.-amino protecting group; R.sup.1 is a protecting group for thephenolic hydroxyl group of the tyrosyl moiety selected from the groupconsisting of benzyl, 2,6-dichlorobenzyl, benzyloxycarbonyl and2-bromobenzyloxycarbonyl;R.sup.2 and R.sup.8 are protecting groups for the sulfhydryl group of thetwo cysteinyl moiety independently selected from the group consisting ofbenzyl; methyl, methoxy or nitro-benzyl; trityl, benzyloxycarbonyl,benzhydryl, tetrahydropyranyl, carboxymethyl acetamidomethyl, benzoyl,benzylthiomethyl, ethylcarbamyl, thioethyl, p-methoxybenzyloxycarbonyl,and the sulfonate salt;R.sup.3 and R.sup.4 are members independently selected from the groupconsisting of hydrogen and a protecting group for the epsilon amino groupof the two lysyl moieties selected from benzyloxycarbonyl; halo- ornitro-benzyloxycarbonyl; tosyl, diisopropylmethoxycarbonyl,t-amyloxy-carbonyl and t-butyloxycarbonyl;R.sup.5, r.sup.6 and R.sup.7 are selected from the group consisting ofhydrogen and a protecting group for the hydroxyl group of the threonyl andseryl moieties, independently selected from acetyl, benzoyl, tert-butyl,trityl, benzyl, 2,6-dichlorobenzyl, and benzyloxycarbonyl;andX is a member selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, methoxy and--O--CH.sub.2 -[polystyrene resin support], wherein said polystyrene resinis cross linked with from 0.5 to about 3 percent divinylbenzene.5. The compound of claim 4 in which R is t-butyloxycarbonyl, R.sup.1 is2,6-dichlorobenzyl, R.sup.2 and R.sup.8 are p-methoxybenzyl, R.sup.3 andR.sup.4 are 2-chlorobenzyloxycarbonyl and R.sup.5 and R.sup.6 and R.sup.7are benzyl."}
{"WKU":"039311414","Title":"Novel heptapeptides having gastrin activity","App_Date":"1973-11-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hans Wissmann;Rolf Geiger;Rudolf Schleyerbach","Assignee":"Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07C10352;A61K 3700","References":"3652531","Claims":"We claim:1. A heptapeptide of the formula"}
{"WKU":"039311422","Title":"Heterocyclic containing disazo compounds","App_Date":"1973-10-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John Lenoir;Paul Tschopp;Hansrolf Loeffel;DE Montmollin: Rene","Assignee":"Ciba-Geigy AG","ICL_Class":"C07C10704","References":"3443952;3555004","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A disazo dyestuff of the formula##SPC30##wherein A.sub.2 denotes##SPC31##wherein Q.sub.1 denotes hydrogen, pyridinecarboxyl, benzoyl, phenylsulfonylor substituted benzoyl, pyridenecarboxyl or phenylsulfonyl wherein thesubstituents are selected from the group consisting ofhalo, nitro, cyano, trifluoromethyl, lower alkyl,lower alkoxy,--CO--W.sub.1,--so.sub.2 --w.sub.2,--nh--co--w.sub.3,or--NH--SO.sub.2 --W.sub.4wherein W.sub.1 is hydroxyl, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, phenyl, or--NH.sub.2, W.sub.2 is hydroxyl, lower alkyl, phenyl, or --NH.sub.2,W.sub.3 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, phenyl, HOOC-lower alkylene,HOOC-phenylene, HO.sub.3 S-phenylene, furyl, thienyl or pyridyl, andW.sub.4 is lower alkyl, phenyl, lower alkylphenylene or HOOC-phenylene;X.sub.4 is hydrogen or lower alkyl,X.sub.3 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, phenyl or substituted phenyl wherein thesubstituents are selected from the group consisting of lower alkyl, loweralkoxy, halo, sulfo, lower alkylsulphonyl and lower alkylcarbonyl,Y is -CF.sub.3, -CN, -SO.sub.2 T.sub.1 or##EQU6##wherein T.sub.1 is lower alkyl, phenyl or lower alkylphenyl, or loweralkyl, phenyl or lower alkylphenyl substituted by hydroxyl, carboxy orsulfo;R.sub.1 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower hydroxyalkyl, lower alkoxyalkyl,sulpho lower alkyl, phenyl or phenyl substituted by carboxy, sulpho, halo,lower alkyl or lower alkoxy;R.sub.2 is hydrogen, lower alkyl or lower hydroxyalkyl;V is hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy or halo;L is hydrogen or sulpho; andD.sub.1 is a dicarboxylic acid amide radical derived from pyridine,thiophene or furane dicarboxylic acid.2. A disazo dyestuff according to claim 1, wherein V is hydrogen, andT.sub.1 is methyl, pheyl or 4-methyl-3-sulpho-phenyl.3. A disazo dyestuff according to claim 1, whereinV is hydrogen;Q is pyridinecarboxyl, benzoyl, phenylsulfonyl, or said substitutedbenzoyl, pyridinecarboxyl or phenylsulfonyl, X.sub.4 is hydrogen, andX.sub.3 is hydrogen, phenyl or said substituted phenyl.4. A disazo dyestuff according to claim 1, of the formula##SPC32##wherein X.sub.4 is hydrogen, phenyl or said substituted phenyl,Y is --CF.sub.3, --CN, SO.sub.2 T.sub.1 or##EQU7##wherein T.sub.1 is methyl, phenyl or 4-methyl-3-sulpho-phenyl, R.sub.1 ishydrogen, lower alkyl, lower hydroxyalkyl, lower alkoxyalkyl, sulpho loweralkyl phenyl or phenyl substituted by carboxy, sulpho, halo, lower alkylor lower alkoxy, R.sub.2 is hydrogen, lower alkyl or lower hydroxyalkyl,and D.sub.2 is the dicarbonyl radical of pyridine, thiophene or furanedicarboxylic acid.5. A disazo dyestuff according to claim 4, wherein R.sub.1 is hydrogen,methyl, ethyl, hydroxyethyl, sulphoethyl, sulphopropyl, phenyl or phenylsubstituted by lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, carboxy or sulpho, and R.sub.2is hydrogen, methyl or hydroxyethyl.6. A disazo dyestuff according to claim 5, wherein X.sub.3 is hydrogen or agroup of the formula##SPC33##wherein G.sub.1 is hydrogen, methyl or methoxy,G.sub.2 is chloro, methyl, methoxy, methylsulphonyl or sulpho,G.sub.3 is hydrogen or methyl andD.sub.2 is thiophene-2,5-dicarbonyl, pyridine-2,6-dicarbonyl,pyridine-2,4-dicarbonyl, pyridine-2,5-dicarbonyl orpyridine-3,5-dicarbonyl.7. A disazo dyestuff according to claim 6, wherein T.sub.1 is methyl or4-methyl-3-sulpho-phenyl, and X.sub.3 is hydrogen or 2,6-dimethylphenyl.8. A disazo dyestuff according to claim 7, which contains the --NH-- groupin the p-position to the azo group in the benzene radical.9. A polyazo dyestyff according to claim 1, of the formula##SPC34##wherein Y.sub.4 denotes##SPC35##or --SO.sub.2 N--CH.sub.2 CH.sub.2 OH).sub.2 and D.sub.4 denotes,pyridine-2,6-dicarbonyl.10. A disazo dyestuff according to claim 1 of the formula##SPC36##wherein E.sub.1 and E.sub.2 are in the 3-, 4- or 5-position to the --CO--group and E.sub.1 and E.sub.2 each are halogen, hydrogen, nitro, cyano,trifluoromethyl, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy or-- CO -- W.sub.1,-- so.sub.2 -- w.sub.2,-- nh -- co -- w.sub.3 or--NH -- SO.sub.2 -- W.sub.4.11. A disazo dyestuff according to claim 10 of the formula##SPC37##wherein Y.sub.2 represents --CF.sub.3, --CN, --SO.sub.2 T.sub.3 or##EQU8##wherein T.sub.3 is methyl, phenyl or 4-methyl-3-sulpho-phenyl, R.sub.5 ishydrogen, methyl, ethyl, hydroxyethyl, sulphoethyl, sulphopropyl phenyl orphenyl substituted by lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, carboxy or sulpho andR.sub.6 is hydrogen, methyl or hydroxyethyl,D.sub.3 is thiophene-2,5-dicarbonyl, pyridine-2,6-dicarbonyl,pyridine-2,4-dicarbonyl, pyridine-2,5-dicarbonyl orpyridine-3,5-dicarbonyl,E.sub.3 is hydrogen, halo, cyano, trifluoromethyl, lower alkyl, loweralkoxy or --CO--W.sub.5, --SO.sub.2 --W.sub.6, --NH--CO--W.sub.7 or--NH--SO.sub.2 --W.sub.8,whereinW.sub.5 represents lower alkyl or lower alkoxy,W.sub.6 represents lower alkyl or --NH.sub.2,W.sub.7 represents lower alkyl or lower alkylene--COOH andW.sub.8 represents lower alkyl.12. A polyazo dyestuff according to claim 11, of the formula##SPC38##wherein Y.sub.3 represents --CF.sub.3, --CN, SO.sub.2 CH.sub.3,##SPC39##wherein R.sub.7 denotes hydrogen, methyl, hydroxyethyl, sulphoethyl prphenyl, R.sub.6 denotes hydrogen, methyl or hydroxyethyl and E.sub.4denotes hydrogen, chlorine, cyano, acetyl, carbomethoxy, sulphoamido,methylsulphonyl or methanesulphonylamino.13. A polyazo dyestuff according to claim 12, of the formula##SPC40##wherein D.sub.4 denotes pyridine-2,6-dicarbonyl and Y.sub.3 has the meaningindicated in claim 12.14. A polyazo dyestuff according to claim 12, of the formula##SPC41##wherein Y.sub.3 has the meaning indicated in claim 12 and D.sub.4 denotespyridine-2,6-dicarbonyl."}
{"WKU":"039311430","Title":"Unsymmetrical aliphatic monoazo compounds","App_Date":"1971-06-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ronald Edward MacLeay;Chester Stephen Sheppard","Assignee":"Pennwalt Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07C10702","References":"2492763;2515628;2586995;2599299;2605260;2711405;2778818;3309297;3350385","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A compound having the formula##EQU49##where: a. R  is alkyl of 1-13 carbons, aralkyl of 7-12 carbons or phenyl,not more than one R  being phenyl;b. R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are alkyl or substituted alkyl of 1-20 carbons,cycloalkyl or bicycloalkyl of 3-10 carbons or, taken together, form analkylene diradical of 2-16 carbons, and R.sub.2 can also be phenyl orsubstituted phenyl, the alkyl and phenyl substituents being selected fromlower alkoxy, phenoxy, lower alkyl-substituted phenoxy, carboxy, hydroxy,lower alkoxycarbonyl, phenylcarbonyloxy, lower alkylcarbonyloxy, halogen,cyano and lower alkylsulfonato, and the phenyl substituents being furtherselected from lower alkyl; andc. Z is --CN, --C(O)NH.sub.2 or --C(NOH)NH.sub.2.2. A compound as in claim 1 wherein the R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 groups areunsubstituted.3. A compound as in claim 1 wherein the alkyl and phenyl substituents in(b) are selected from carboxy and lower alkoxy and Z is --CN.4. A compound as in claim 1 wherein the alkyl and phenyl substituents in(b) are selected from lower alkoxy, phenoxy or lower alkyl-substitutedphenoxy.5. A compound as in claim 1 wherein Z is --CN or --C(O)NH.sub.2 and thealkyl and phenyl substituents in (b) are carboxy.6. A compound as in claim 1 wherein Z is --CN.7. A compound as in claim 3 wherein (R ).sub.3 C--is t-butyl or t-cumyl.8. A compound as in claim 3 wherein said compound is2-t-butylazo-2-cyanopropane.9. A compound as in claim 4 wherein said compound is1-t-butylazo-1-cyanocyclohexane.10. A compound as in claim 3 wherein said compound is4-t-butylazo-4-cyanovaleric acid.11. A compound as in claim 3 wherein said compound is2-t-butylazo-2-cyanobutane.12. A compound as in claim 3 wherein said compound is2-t-butylazo-2-cyano-4-methylpentane.13. A compound as in claim 3 wherein said compound is2-t-butylazo-2-cyano-4-methoxy-4-methylpentane."}
{"WKU":"039311449","Title":"Magenta image-providing phenylazonaphthyl dyes","App_Date":"1974-02-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Carl H. Eldredge;Jan R. Haase;Richard A. Landholm","Assignee":"Eastman Kodak Company","ICL_Class":"C09B 2910;C09B 2920;G03C  530;G03C  554","References":"2706684;3148062;3443939;3443940;3459548;3498785;3585028;3628952;3709693;3737316;3751406","Claims":"We claim:1. A nondiffusible sulfonamido compound which is alkali-cleavable uponoxidation to release a diffusible colorproviding moiety from a benzenenucleus thereof, said compound having a formula as follows:##SPC37##wherein Ball represents an organic ballasting group containing at least 8carbon atoms which renders the compound nondiffusible in a photographicelement during development in an alkaline processing composition;Y represents the carbon atoms necessary to complete a benzene ornaphthalene nucleus;X represents -R.sup.2 -L.sub.n -R.sup.2.sub.p - where each R.sup.2 can bethe same or different and each represents alkylene having 1 to 8 carbonatoms; phenylene; or phenylene substituted with chloro, bromo, cyano,nitro, methoxy, methyl, carboxy, or sulfo; L represents oxy, carbonyl,carboxamido, carbamoyl, sulfonamido, sulfamoyl, sulfinyl or sulfonyl; n isan integer having a value of 0 or 1; p is 1 when n equals 1 and p is 1 or0 when n equals 0, provided that when p is 1 the carbon content of the sumof both R.sup.2 radicals does not exceed 14 carbon atoms;R represents hydrogen, or alkyl having 1 to 6 carbon atoms;J represents sulfonyl or carbonyl;m and q each represent an integer having a value of 0 or 1;R.sup.1 represents hydrogen, chloro, bromo, fluoro, alkyl having 1 to 6carbon atoms or alkoxy having 1 to 6 carbon atoms;Q is the 5- or 8-position relative to the hydroxy radical and representshydrogen, hydroxy, or -NHCOR.sup.3 or -NHSO.sub.2 R.sup.3 wherein R.sup.3is alkyl having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, alkyl having 1 to 4 carbon atomssubstituted with hydroxy, cyano, sulfinyl, carboxy or sulfo; benzyl,phenyl or phenyl substituted with carboxy, chloro, methyl, methoxy, orsulfonyl;G represents hydroxy, an alkali metal salt thereof, a photographicallyinactive amine salt thereof, or a hydrolyzable acyloxy group having theformula:##EQU14##wherein R.sup.4 is alkyl having 1 to 18 carbon atoms or phenyl; Erepresents hydrogen, sulfo, -SO.sub.2 NR.sup.5 R.sup.6 wherein R.sup.5represents hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 6 carbon atoms and R.sup.6represents hydrogen, alkyl having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, alkyl having 1 to 4carbon atoms substituted with hydroxy, cyano, sulfamoyl, carboxy or sulfo;benzyl; phenyl, or phenyl substituted with hydroxy, sulfonyl, sulfamoyl,carboxy, or sulfo; or E represents##SPC38##wherein each member is as described previously;r is an integer having a value of 1 or 2;Z represents chloro, bromo, or fluoro; carboxy, -COOR.sup.4 wherein R.sup.4is as described previously, sulfo, a sulfamoyl radical as described for E,as well as hydrogen, alkoxy having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, alkyl having 1 to6 carbon atoms, alkyl having 1 to 6 carbon atoms substituted with cyano,hydroxy, sulfamoyl, carboxy, or alkylsulfonamido having 1 to 4 carbonatoms; or -CON(R.sup.5).sub.2 wherein each R.sup.5 is the same ordifferent and is as described previously;X.sup.1 represents alkylene, phenylene or substituted phenylene asdescribed for R.sup.2 ;X.sup.2 represents alkylene as described for R.sup.2 ;with the proviso that there be only one sulfo or carboxy radical present insaid compound and that only one of R.sup.1 and Z be hydrogen.2. A compound as described in claim 1 wherein m has a value of 0, and r hasa value of 1.3. A compound as described in claim 1 wherein Y represents the atomsnecessary to complete a naphthalene nucleus and r has a value of 1.4. A compound as described in claim 1 wherein G is a hydroxy radical, and rhas a value of 1.5. A compound as described in claim 1 wherein R.sup.1 represents alkoxyhaving 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and r has a value of 1.6. A compound as described in claim 1 whereinY represents the atoms necessary to complete a naphthalene nucleus;R.sup.2 represents alkylene having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, phenylene orphenylene substituted with carboxy, chloro, methyl or methoxy;L represents sulfamoyl, sulfonamido, carbamoyl or carboxamido;R represents hydrogen;n is 0, p is 0;q is an integer having a value of 1;m is an integer having a value of 0 or 1;R.sup.1 represents alkoxy having 1 to 4 carbon atoms;Q represents hydrogen, hydroxy, -NHCOR.sup.3 or -NHSO.sub.2 R.sup.3 whereinR.sup.3 represents alkyl having 1 to 4 carbon atoms; alkyl having 1 to 4carbon atoms substituted with hydroxy, cyano, sulfomoyl, carboxy, orsulfo; benzyl, phenyl or phenyl substituted with carboxy, chloro, methyl,methoxy or sulfamoyl;E represents sulfo, --SO.sub.2 NHR.sup.6 wherein R.sup.6 is hydrogen, alkylhaving 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or alkyl having 1 to 4 carbon atomssubstituted with hydroxy, cyano, sulfamoyl, carboxy or sulfo; benzyl,phenyl or phenyl substituted with hydroxy, sulfonyl, sulfamoyl, carboxy orsulfo;r has a value of 1; andZ represents hydrogen, alkyl having 1 to 4 carbon atoms; chloro; alkylhaving 1 to 6 carbon atoms substituted with hydroxy, cyano, sulfamoyl,carboxy, sulfo, or alkylsulfonamido having 1 to 4 carbon atoms;X.sup.1 represents phenylene; andX.sup.2 represents alkylene having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.7. A compound as described in claim 6 wherein m has a value of 0.8. A compound as described in claim 6 wherein G is hydroxy.9. A compound as described in claim 6 wherein X represents phenylene; Jrepresents sulfonyl; X.sup.1 represents phenylene; X.sup.2 representsalkylene of 1 to about 4 carbon atoms; Q represents hydrogen, hydroxy,--NHSO.sub.2 CH.sub.3, or --NHCOCH.sub.3 ; and Z represents hydrogen,chloro, or --CH.sub.2 NHSO.sub.2 CH.sub.3.10. A compound as described in claim 6 wherein Ball represents##SPC39##"}
{"WKU":"039311457","Title":"Keto-amido containing phenylazophenyl dyestuffs","App_Date":"1972-12-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Lester N. Stanley;Russell E. Farris","Assignee":"GAF Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07C10706","References":"1770714;2346013;2436115;3406165;3553190;3740189","Claims":"We claim:1. A dyestuff of the formula:##SPC23##whereinD is (a) phenyl or phenyl substituted with a substituent selected from thegroup of chlorine, bromine, fluorine, cyano, thiocyano, loweralkylsulfonyl, nitro, trifluoromethyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkanoyl,benzoyl, lower alkoxycarbonyl, unsubstituted carbamyl, unsubstitutedsulfamyl, and carbamyl or sulfamyl N-mono-or N, N-di- substituted withlower alkylZ is hydrogen, halogen, lower alkyl or NHX and X is SO.sub.2 --R, SO.sub.2OR, COR or COOR with R being hydrogen, phenyl or lower alkyl;Y is hydrogen, lower alkyl or lower alkoxyR.sup.2 is C.sub.2 H.sub.4 --CO--NHC(CH.sub.3).sub.2 CH.sub.2 COCH.sub.3,hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, lower alkynyl or lower alkyl, loweralkenyl or lower alkynyl substituted with chlorine, bromine, fluorine,hydroxy, cyano, thiocyano, lower alkoxy, hydroxyethoxy,polyloweralkyleneoxy, lower alkoxycarbonyl, lower alkanoyloxy, benzoyloxy,unsubstituted carbamyl, or carbamyl N-mono- or N,N-di- substituted withlower alkyl.2. A dyestuff as defined in claim 1 wherein D is derived from a compound ofthe formula:##SPC24##whereinD.sup.1 is"}
{"WKU":"039311465","Title":"Hydrogenated pullulan","App_Date":"1974-05-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Koso Kato;Makoto Shiosaka","Assignee":"Hayashibara Biochemical Laboratories, Incorporated","ICL_Class":"C07G  300","References":"3277077","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Hydrogenated pullulan produced by reacting an aqueous solution ofpullulan with hydrogen gas under a pressure of 20 to 150 kg/cm.sup.2 inthe presence of a hydrogenation catalyst until said pullulan is free fromreducing power capable of being detected by the method of Somogyi-Nelson."}
{"WKU":"039311473","Title":"Water-soluble derivatives of sodium mannoheptonate","App_Date":"1973-09-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kenneth R. Gray;John C. Steinberg","Assignee":"International Telephone and Telegraph Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07H  302","References":"3074927;3466252;3563978;3629229;3679659;3706545","Claims":"We claim:1. A water-soluble metal complex of sodium mannoheptonate in which themetal is selected from the group consisting of aluminum, and chromiumtrivalent ions.2. The metal complex of claim 1 in which the metal is aluminum.3. The metal complex of claim 1 in which the metal is chromium."}
{"WKU":"039311481","Title":"Hydroxyalkylamino glycosides and process of preparation","App_Date":"1974-12-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William K. Langdon","Assignee":"BASF Wyandotte Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07H 1502","References":"3332934;3376281;3441616;3449320","Claims":"Having thus described the invention, what it is desired to claim and secureby Letters Patent is:1. A compound having the formula##EQU5##wherein M is selected from the group consisting of##EQU6##wherein R is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen or hydrocarbonranging from CH.sub.3 -C.sub.18 H.sub.37, R  is selected from the groupconsisting of hydrocarbon ranging from C.sub.8 H.sub.17 to C.sub.18H.sub.37, R  is selected from the group consisting of benzyl orhydrocarbon ranging from CH.sub.3 to C.sub.18 H.sub.37, the moietiesC.sub.6 H.sub.11 O.sub.5 and C.sub.6 H.sub.10 O.sub.5 represent glycosylunits and m is a number from 0 to 20.2. The compound of claim 1 wherein R  is selected from the group consistingof hydrocarbon radicals ranging from C.sub.10 H.sub.21 to C.sub.18H.sub.37.3. The compound of claim 1 wherein the moieties (C.sub.6 H.sub.11 O.sub.5)and (C.sub.6 H.sub.10 O.sub.5) are derived from dextrose.4. The compound of claim 1 wherein the moieties (C.sub.6 H.sub.11 O.sub.5)and (C.sub.6 H.sub.10 O.sub.5) are derived from starch.5. A process for the preparation of 2-hydroxy-3 alkylaminopropyl glycosidewhich comprises reacting glucose or a polysaccharide that is hydrolyzableto glucose with from about 0.5 mole to about 1.2 mole of3-chloro-1,2-propanediol per mole of anhydroglucose unit based on saidglucose or said polysaccharide in the presence of an acid catalyst,followed by a reaction with a quantity of an alkali metal hydroxide or analkaline earth metal hydroxide sufficient to react with the hydrochloricacid formed in the reaction and a quantity of amine selected from thegroup consisting of primary, secondary, tertiary, saturated, unsaturated,alicyclic, arylalkyl and aryl amines containing from about 8 to about 30carbon atoms equivalent to the amount of 3-chloro-1,2-propanediol.6. The process of claim 5 wherein the acid catalyst is sulfuric acid.7. The process of claim 5 wherein the alkali metal hydroxide is sodiumhydroxide.8. The process of claim 5 wherein the reaction with said metal hydroxidesoccurs prior to the reaction with the amine.9. The process of claim 5 wherein the reaction with the amine occurs priorto the reaction with said metal hydroxides.10. The process of claim 5 wherein the reaction with said metal hydroxidesand the amine occurs simultaneously.11. The process of claim 5 wherein the concentration of the acid catalystis from about 0.01 to about 1.0 weight percent based upon the total weightof the reactants.12. The process of claim 5 wherein R  is selected from the group consistingof hydrocarbon ranging from C.sub.10 H.sub.21 to C.sub.18 H.sub.37."}
{"WKU":"039311490","Title":"Copper complexes of diisopropylidene xylo-2-hexulofuranosonate compounds","App_Date":"1974-08-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William Szkrybalo","Assignee":"Hoffmann-La Roche Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07H 1704","References":"3451993;3542761;3586650;3592808;3598804","Claims":"I claim:1. Copper (II)2,3:4,6-di-O-isopropylidene-alpha-L-xylo-2-hexulofuranosonate hydrate.2. Tripyridine copper (II)2,3:4,6-di-O-isopropylidene-alpha-L-xylo-2-hexulofuranosonate.3. Diimidazole copper (II)2,3:4,6-di-O-isopropylidene-alpha-L-xylo-2-hexulofuranosonate hemihydrate.4. 2,2 -dipyridyl copper (II)2,3:4,6-di-O-isopropylidene-alpha-L-xylo-2-hexulofuranosonate hydrate.5. Di-(4-methylpyridine) copper (II)2,3:4,6-di-O-isopropylidene-alpha-L-xylo-2-hexulofuranosonate.6. Di-(2-methylpyridine) copper (II)2,3:4,6-di-O-isopropylidene-alpha-L-xylo-2-hexulofuranosonate.7. Tri-(3-methylpyridine) copper (II)2,3:4,6-di-O-isopropylidene-alpha-L-xylo-2-hexulofuranosonate hydrate."}
{"WKU":"039311503","Title":"Probenecidoxymethyl and 1-ethyl esters of ampicillin","App_Date":"1974-07-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Burton G. Christensen;William J. Leanza","Assignee":"Merck & Co., Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07D49968","References":"3697507","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Probenecidoxymethyl ester of ampicillin or probenecidoxy-1-ethyl esterof ampicillin and non-toxic salts thereof.2. A compound according to claim 1 wherein the non-toxic salt is thehydrochloride.3. A compound according to claim 2 named probenecidoxymethyl ester ofampicillin hydrochloride.4. A compound according to claim 2 named probenecidoxy-1-ethyl ester ofampicillin hydrochloride."}
{"WKU":"039311511","Title":"Dibenzo (b,f) azepines","App_Date":"1973-10-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Lucien Nedelec;Jacques Guillaume;Andre Allais","Assignee":"Roussel-UCLAF","ICL_Class":"C07D22326","References":"","Claims":"We claim:1. A compound selected from the group consisting of a compound of theformula##SPC13##wherein R is alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, R is selected from the groupconsisting of hydrogen and alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, n is 0 or 2 andAlK is alkyl of 1 to 2 carbon atoms and their non-toxic, pharmaceuticallyacceptable acid addition salts.2. A compound of claim 1 wherein AlK is ethyl and n is 0 or 2.3. A compound of claim 1 selected from the group consisting of2-ethylthio-5-methyl-11-(.beta.-dimethylaminoethyl) [5H] dibenzo (b,f)azepine and its hydrochloride.4. A compound of claim 1 selected from the group consisting of2-ethylsulfonyl-5-methyl-11-(.beta.-dimethylaminoethyl) [5H] dibenzo (b,f)azepine and its hydrochloride.5. A compound of claim 1 selected from the group consisting of2-ethylthio-5-methyl-11-(.beta.-methylaminoethyl) [5H] dibenzo (b,f)azepine and its fumarate.6. A compound of claim 1 which is2-ethylsulfonyl-5-methyl-11-(.beta.-methylaminoethyl) [5H] dibenzo (b,f)azepine."}
{"WKU":"039311520","Title":"2-(1,3-Diazacycloalkenyl)-2-hydrazones of substituted chalcones","App_Date":"1974-01-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Andrew Stephen Tomcufcik;Raymond George Wilkinson;Ralph Grassing Child","Assignee":"American Cyanamid Company","ICL_Class":"C07D24304","References":"2369817;3468887","Claims":"We claim:1. A substituted chalcone of the formula:##EQU4##wherein R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are the same or different and are selectedfrom the group consisting of monohalophenyl, monomethylphenyl,dimethylphenyl, C.sub.1 -C.sub.4 -alkylthiophenyl, methylsulfonylphenyl,trifluoromethylphenyl and biphenylyl; R is hydrogen or methyl and X ischloro, iodo or bromo.2. The substituted chalcone in accordance with claim1,4,5,6,7-tetrahydro-1H-1,3-diazepin-2-ylhydrazone of4,4 -dichloro-62-methylchalcone hydrochloride.3. The substituted chalcone in accordance with claim1,4,5,6,7-tetrahydro-1H-1,3-diazepin-2-ylhydrazone of4,4 -dichlorochalcone hydrochloride.4. The substituted chalcone in accordance with claim1,4,5,6,7-tetrahydro-1H-, 1,3-diazepin-2-ylhydrazone of 4-chloro-4 -(methylthio)chalcone hydrochloride.5. The substituted chalcone in accordance with claim1,4,5,6,7-tetrahydro-1H-1,3-diazepin-2-ylhydrazone of4-bromo-4 -chlorochalcone hydrochloride.6. The substituted chalcone in accordance with claim 14,5,6,7-tetrahydro-1H-1,3-diazepin-2-ylhydrazone of4 -chloro-4-(trifluoromethyl)chalcone hydrochloride.7. The substituted chalcone in accordance with claim 1,4,5,6,7-tetrahydro-1H-1,3-diazepin-2-ylhydrazone  of4,4-bis(trifluoromethyl)chalcone hydrochloride.8. The substituted chalcone in accordance with claim 1,4,5,6,7-tetrahydro-1H-1,3-diazepin-2-ylhydrazone of4,4 -bis(methylthio)chalcone hydrochloride.9. The substituted chalcone in accordance with claim 1,4,5,6,7-tetrahydro-1H-1,3diazepin-2-ylhydrazone of .beta.,4,4 -trimethylchalcone hydrochloride.10. The substituted chalcone in accordance with claim 1,4,5,6,7-tetrahydro-1H-1,3-diazepin-2-yl-hydrazone of4-chloro-4 -(methylsulfonyl)chalcone hydrochloride.11. The substituted chalcone in accordance with claim 1,4,5,6,7-tetrahydro-1H-1,3-diazepin-2-ylhydrazone of4 -chloro-4-(methylthio)chalcone hydrochloride.12. The substituted chalcone in accordance with claim 1,4,5,6,7-tetrahydro-1H, 1,3-diazepin-2-ylhydrazone of4-chloro-3 ,4 -dimethylchalcone hydrochloride.13.  The substituted chalcone in accordance with claim 1,4,5,6,7-tetrahydro-1H-1,3-diazepin-2-ylhydrazone of .beta.,2,2 ,5,5 -pentamethylchalcone."}
{"WKU":"039311538","Title":"Penicillins","App_Date":"1973-11-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Gunter Schmidt;Karl Georg Metzger","Assignee":"Bayer Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07D49944","References":"3268513;3433784","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A compound of the formula:##SPC53##or a pharmaceutically acceptable nontoxic salt thereof whereinthe carbon atom designated by * is asymmetrically substituted;R.sub.1 is hydrogen, halo, lower alkyl, hydroxy, nitro or A--NH--;A is R.sub.3 CO-- or R.sub.4 CS-- in which"}
{"WKU":"039311546","Title":"Process for the preparation of steroid oxiranes","App_Date":"1974-07-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Rainer Philippson","Assignee":"Schering Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07J 1700","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a process for the production of a .alpha.,.beta. -unsaturated ketosteroid having a spiro oxirane group from a polyketo steroid having anisolated keto group and an .alpha.,.beta.-unsaturated keto group, theimprovement which comprises reacting the polyketo steroid with dimethylsulfonium methylide in a non-reactive polar solvent and in the presence ofan alkali metal tertiary alcoholate.2. A process according to claim 1, wherein the alkali metal alcoholate issodium or potassium tertiary butylate or tertiary amylate.3. A process according to claim 1, wherein the reaction solvent isdimethylformamide, dimethylacetamide or hexamethylphosphoric triamide.4. A process according to claim 1, wherein the dimethyl sulfonium methylideis produced in situ by adding the alkali metal alcoholate to a mixture ofthe starting steroid dissolved in, and trimethyl sulfonium iodidesuspended in the polar solvent.5. A process according to claim 1, wherein the starting steroid is a3,17-diketo or 3,20-diketo steroid wherein the 3-keto group is.alpha.,.beta.-unsaturated.6. A process according to claim 4, wherein the alkali metal alcoholate issodium or potassium tertiary butylate or tertiary amylate.7. A process according to claim 6, wherein the starting steroid is a3,17-diketo or 3,20-diketo steroid wherein the 3-keto group is.alpha.,.beta.-unsaturated.8. A process according to claim 1, wherein the starting steroid is asteroid of the formula##SPC3##Z is an oxygen atom, two hydrogen atoms or the grouping H,OH; E-D is asingle or double bond; F-G is##EQU6##R is a hydrogen atom or methyl; R.sub.2 is methyl or ethyl; R.sub.3 is ahydrogen, fluorine or chlorine atom; R.sub.4 is a hydrogen, fluorine orchlorine atom or methyl; R.sub.5 is a hydrogen atom or alkanoyl of up to15 carbon atoms; R.sub.6 is a hydrogen atom, methyl or ethinyl; R.sub.7 isa hydrogen atom, methyl or -O-R.sub.5 ; R.sub.8 is a hydrogen atom, ahalogen atom or -O-R.sub.8 ; R.sub.9 is a hydrogen atom or -O-R.sub.5 ;R.sub.6 and R.sub.7 or R.sub.7 and R.sub.9 collectively are##EQU7##wherein R.sub.10 and R.sub.11 each are a hydrogen atom or alkyl of up to 5carbon atoms, with the proviso that one of A and BC comprises anon-conjugated keto group and the other an .alpha.,.beta.-unsaturated ketogroup.9. A process according to claim 8, wherein the starting steroid is asteroid of the formula##SPC4##wherein B C  is##EQU8##F  - G  is a single or double bond, and R.sub.1, R.sub.2, R.sub.3, and Zeach have the values given therein.10. A process according to claim 9, wherein the alkali metal alcoholate issodium or potassium tertiary butylate or tertiary amylate and wherein thereaction solvent is dimethylformamide, dimethylacetamide orhexamethylphosphoric triamide."}
{"WKU":"039311554","Title":"Process for preparing 2-azacycloalkylmethyl ketones","App_Date":"1973-04-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"J. Martin Grisar;George P. Claxton","Assignee":"Richardson-Merrell Inc.","ICL_Class":"C09B 2300","References":"3316272;3853855;3882104","Claims":"We claim:1. A process of preparing 2-azacycloalkylmethyl ketones having the formula:##EQU7##wherein n is an integer of from 3 to 5, p is an integer of from 1 to 2, Ris a neutral organic radical selected from the group consisting of alkyl,alkenyl, carbocycle furanyl, pyrrolyl, benzothienyl, pyrazolyl, oxazolyl,benzimidazolyl, dibenzofuranyl and dibenzothienyl, R.sub.1 is hydrogen orlower alkyl having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms which comprises heating asolution of a methyl ketone having the formula##EQU8##with an excess of magnesium methyl carbonate to form a magnesium chelate;cooling the reaction mixture and reacting said chelate solution in anatmosphere of carbon dioxide with a 1-azacycloalkene having the formula:##EQU9##and isolating the product therefrom.2. A process of claim 1 in which the 1-azacycloalkene is2,3,4,5-tetrahydropyridine.3. A process of claim 1 in which the 1-azacycloalkene is 1-pyrroline.4. A process according to claim 1 of preparing 2-azacycloalkylmethylketones having the formula:##SPC10##whereiin n is an integer of from 3 to 5, p is an integer of from 1 to 2,R.sub.1 is hydrogen or lower alkyl having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms,X.sub.2 is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, halophenyl,trifluoromethylphenyl, alkoxyphenyl having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms,alkylthiophenyl having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, phenoxy, halophenoxy,trifluoromethylphenoxy, alkoxyphenoxy, having 1 to 4 carbon atoms,alkylthiophenoxy having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, phenylthio, phenylalkylhaving from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, phenylvinyl, phenylalkoxy having from 2to 4 carbon atoms, and phenoxyalkoxy having from 2 to 4 carbon atoms,which comprises heating a solution of a methyl ketone having the formula##SPC11##with an excess of magnesium methyl carbonate to form a magnesium chelate;cooling the reaction mixture and reacting said chelate solution in anatmosphere of carbon dioxide with a 1-azacycloalkene having the formula##EQU10##and isolating the product therefrom.5. A process according to claim 1 of preparing 2-azacycloalkylmethylketones having the formula:##SPC12##wherein n is integer of from 3 to 5, p is an integer of from 1 to 2,R.sub.1 is hydrogen or lower alkyl having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, m isan integer of from 1 to 3, X.sub.3 is selected from the group consistingof hydrogen, lower alkyl having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, alkoxy havingfrom 1 to 6 carbon atoms, alkylthio having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms,halogen, trifluoromethyl and phenyl, A is a sigma bond or selected fromthe group of radicals consisting of vinylidene and propenylidene, whichcomprises heating a solution of a methyl ketone having the formula##SPC13##with an excess of magnesium methyl carbonate to form a magnesium chelate;cooling the reaction mixture and reacting said chelate solution in anatmosphere of carbon dioxide with a 1-azacycloalkene having the formula##EQU11##and isolating the product therefrom.6. A process according to claim 1 of preparing 2-azacycloalkylmethylketones having the formula:##SPC14##wherein n is an integer of from 3 to 5, p is an integer of from 1 to 2,R.sub.1 is hydrogen or lower alkyl having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, m isan integer of from 1 to 3, X.sub.6 is selected from the group consistingof hydrogen, lower alkyl having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, lower alkoxyhaving from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylthio having from 1 to 4 carbon atomsand halogen, X.sub.7 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen andlower alkyl having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, which comprises heating asolution of a methyl ketone having the formula##SPC15##with an excess of magnesium methyl carbonate to form a magnesium chelate;cooling the reaction mixture and reacting said chelate solution in anatmosphere of carbon dioxide with a 1-azacycloalkene having the formula##EQU12##and isolating the product therefrom.7. A 2-azacycloalkylmethyl derivative having the formula:##SPC16##wherein n is an integer of from 3 to 5; p is an integer of from 1 to 2;R.sub.1 is hydrogen or lower alkyl having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms;X.sub.10 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, lower alkylhaving from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, lower alkoxy having from 1 to 4 carbonatoms and halogen; Y represents the radicals##EQU13##W is selected from the group of radicals consisting of --O--, --S--,--CH.sub.2 --, --CH=CH-- and --CH.sub.2 CH.sub.2 --; and thepharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts thereof.8. A compound of claim 7 wherein n is an integer of from 3 to 4; R.sub.1and X.sub.10 are both hydrogen; and Y is the radical =O.9. A compound of claim 7 which is 2-fluorenyl 2-piperidylmethyl ketone andits pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts.10. A compound of claim 7 which is.alpha.-(3-phenanthryl)-2-piperidineethanol and its pharmaceuticallyacceptable acid addition salts.11. A process according to claim 1 of preparing 2-azacycloalkylmethylketones having the formula:##SPC17##wherein n is an integer of from 3 to 5, p is an integer of from 1 to 2,R.sub.1 is hydrogen or lower alkyl having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms,X.sub.10 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, lower alkylhaving from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, lower alkoxy having from 1 to 4 carbonatoms and halogen, W is selected from the group of radicals consisting ofO--, --S--, --CH.sub.2 --, --CH=CH-- and --CH.sub.2 CH.sub.2 --, whichcomprises heating a solution of a methyl ketone having the formula##SPC18##with an excess of magnesium methyl carbonate to form a magnesium chelate;cooling the reaction mixture and reacting said chelate solution in anatmosphere of carbon dioxide with a 1-azacycloalkene having the formula##EQU14##and isolating the product therefrom."}
{"WKU":"039311562","Title":"Methine dyes","App_Date":"1973-04-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Marcel Jan Libeer;Henri Depoorter;Gerrit Godfried Van Mierlo;Raymond Gerard Lemahieu","Assignee":"Agfa-Gevaert N.V.","ICL_Class":"C09b 2310;C09b 2314","References":"3243298;3337540;3505319","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A compound of the formula:##SPC63##wherein X represents an anion.2. A sensitizing dye for photographic silver halide emulsions selected fromthe class consisting of merocyanine and styryl dyes, said dyes derivedfrom 1,2-alkylene benzimidazole or 1,2-alkylene naphthimidazole in whichthe alkylene group contains from 3 to 4 carbon atoms in the chainconnecting the nitrogen atom in the 1-position and the carbon atom in the2-position of the imidazole ring.3. A compound of the formula:##SPC64##wherein:Z represents the non-metallic atoms necessary to complete a heterocyclicnucleus selected from the group consisting of benzimidazole andnaphthimidazole;n represents an integer of from 1 to 2;m represents an integer from 1 to 2;R represents a member selected from the class consisting of lower alkyl, ahydroxy-lower alkyl, an acetoxy-lower alkyl, a sulpho-lower alkyl, and acarboxy-lower alkyl;R.sub.4, r.sub.5, and R.sub.6 each represents a hydrogen atom, lower alkylor phenylX represents an acid radical, andR.sub.2 and R.sub.3 each represents a member selected from the groupconsisting of hydrogen, lower alkyl, and phenyl.4. A compound of the formula##SPC65##wherein X represents an anion.5. A compound of the formula##SPC66##wherein X represents an anion.6. A compound of the formula##SPC67##wherein X represents an anion.7. A compound of the formula##SPC68##wherein X represents an anion."}
{"WKU":"039311570","Title":"Substituted 2-benzofuranyl propenones and method of preparation","App_Date":"1974-12-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ralph Grassing Child;Raymond George Wilkinson;Andrew Stephen Tomcufcik","Assignee":"American Cyanamid Company","ICL_Class":"C07D40512","References":"3414580;3743639;3859279;3882149","Claims":"We claim:1. A compound selected from those of the formula:##SPC3##wherein R.sub.1 and R.sub.3 may be the same or different and are selectedfrom the group consisting of hydrogen, chloro, bromo, fluoro, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, phenyl, C.sub.1 -C.sub.4 alkyl, and C.sub.1 -C.sub.4alkyl thio, R.sub.2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,C.sub.1 -C.sub.4 alkyl and phenyl, R.sub.4 is hydrogen, C.sub.1 -C.sub.4alkyl or chloro and when R.sub.3 and R.sub.4 are present on adjacentcarbon atoms, they may represent --O--CH.sub.2 --O--, n is 2, 3 or 4 or anacid addition salt thereof.2. The compound in accordance with claim 1,4,5,6,7-tetrahydro-1H-1,3-diazepin-2-ylhydrazone of1-(2-benzofuranyl)-3-(p-chlrophenyl)-2-propen-1-one.3. The compound in accordance with claim 1,(1,4,5,6-tetrahydro-2-pyrimidinyl)hydrazone of1-(5-chloro-2-benzofuranyl)-3-(p-chlorophenyl)-2-propen-1-one.4. The compound in accordance with claim 1,(1,4,5,6-tetrahydro-2-pyrimidinyl)hydrazone of1-(5-bromo-2-benzofuranyl)-3-(p-chlorophenyl)-2-propen-1-one.5. The compound in accordance with claim 1,(1,4,5,6-tetrahydro-2-pyrimidinyl)hydrazone of1-(5-chloro-2-benzofuranyl)-3-(4-biphenylyl)-2-propen-1-one.6. The compound in accordance with claim 1,(1,4,5,6-tetrahydro-2-pyrimidinyl)hydrazone of1-(5-Phenyl-2-benzofuranyl)-3-(p-chlorophenyl)-2-propen-1-onehydrochloride.7. The compound in accordance with claim 1,(1,4,5,6-tetrahydro-2-pyrimidinyl)hydrazone of 1-(1,3-dioxolo[4,5-f][1]-benzofuran-6yl)-3-(p-chlorophenyl)-2-propen-1-one hydrochloride,n-propanolate.8. The compound in accorance with claim 1,(1,4,5,6-tetrahydro-2-pyrimidinyl)hydrazone of1,3-bis(5-chloro-2-benzofuranyl)-2-propen-1-one.9. A method of preparing a compound of the formula:##SPC4##wherein R.sub.1 and R.sub.3 may be the same or different and are selectedfrom the group consisting of hydrogen, chloro, bromo, fluoro, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 alkoxy, phenyl, C.sub.1 -C.sub.4 alkyl, and C.sub.1 -C.sub.4alkyl thio, R.sub.2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,C.sub.1 -C.sub.4 alkyl and phenyl, R.sub.4 is hydrogen, C.sub.1 -C.sub.4alkyl or chloro and when R.sub.3 and R.sub.4 are present on adjacentcarbon atoms, they may represent --O--CH.sub.2 --O--, n is 2, 3 or 4 or anacid addition salt thereof, which comprises heating a compound of theformula:##SPC5##wherein R.sub.1, R.sub.2, R.sub.3 and R.sub.4 are as defined above, with acompound of the formula:##EQU1##wherein n is as defined above, in the presence of a hydrophilic solventand recovering said compound therefrom.10. A compound selected from those of the formula:##SPC6##wherein R.sub.1 and R.sub.3 may be the same or different and are selectedfrom the group consisting of hydrogen, chloro, bromo, fluoro, C.sub.1-C.sub.4 -alkoxy, phenyl, C.sub.1 -C.sub.4 -alkyl and C.sub.1 -C.sub.4alkyl thio, R.sub.2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogenC.sub.1 -C.sub.4 -alkyl and phenyl, R.sub.4 is hydrogen, C.sub.1 -C.sub.4alkyl or chloro and when R.sub.3 and R.sub.4 are present on adjacentcarbon atoms they may represent --O--CH.sub.2 --O-- and an acid additionsalt thereof."}
{"WKU":"039311589","Title":"Cis and","App_Date":"1973-12-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jules Freedman","Assignee":"Richardson-Merrell Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07D22318","References":"3699099","Claims":"I claim:1. cis-2-Chloro-11-(3-dimethylaminopropylidene)-6-phenyl-5,6-dihydromorphanthridine.2. trans-2-Chloro-11-(3-dimethylaminopropylidene)-6-phenyl-5,6-dihydromorphanthridine.3. The compound2-chloro-11-(3-dimethylaminopropylidene)-6-phenyl-5,6-dihydromorphanthridine."}
{"WKU":"039311597","Title":"Substituted 3-benzoylacrylamido-cephalosporanic acid derivative","App_Date":"1974-03-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Peter H. L. Wei;Ronald J. McCaully","Assignee":"American Home Products Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07D50122;C07D50124","References":"3338896;3546219","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. The compound which is7-[3-(p-chlorobenzoyl)acrylamido]-3-methyl-8-oxo-5-thia-1-azabicyclo[4.2.0]oct-2-ene-2-carboxylic acid.2. The compound which is7-[3-(4-biphenylyl-carbonyl)acrylamido]cephalosporanic acid."}
{"WKU":"039311600","Title":".alpha.-Amino-.alpha.-(acylamidophenyl)acetamidocephalosporins","App_Date":"1974-05-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"George L. Dunn","Assignee":"SmithKline Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07D50120","References":"3464985;3776906;3813388;3840535","Claims":"I claim:1. A compound of the formula##SPC2##wherein:the RCONH group is attached at the para or meta positions;R is hydrogen, lower alkyl of 1-4 carbon atoms, or trifluoromethyl; andHet is a 5 or 6 member heterocyclic ring containing carbon and 1-4 atomsselected from the group consisting of N, O, and S, unsubstituted orsubstituted with one or two substituents selected from the groupconsistingof C.sub.1 -C.sub.6 alkyl, C.sub.1 -C.sub.6 alkoxy, allyoxy,oxide, carbamyl, carboxyl, carbalkoxy of C.sub.1 -C.sub.6, halogen,mercapto, methylthio, trifluoromethyl, hydroxy, amino, alkylamino anddialkylamino, each undefined alkyl having 1-6 carbon atoms,or a non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.2. A compound as claimed in claim 1 in which the RCONH group is attached atthe para position.3. A compound as claimed in claim 2 where Het is tetrazolyl, thiadiazolyl,triazolyl, oxadiazolyl, diazolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl or pyrazinyl,unsubstituted or substituted with one or two lower alkyl groups containing1-4 carbon atoms.4. A compound as claimed in claim 3 where R is hydrogen.5. A compound as claimed in claim 3 where R is lower alkyl of 1-4 carbonatoms.6. A compound as claimed in claim 3 where R is trifluoromethyl.7. A compound as claimed in claim 5 where R is methyl.8. A compound as claimed in claim 4 being the compound7-[.alpha.-amino-.alpha.-(p-formamidophenyl)acetamido]-3-(5-methyl-1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-ylthiomethyl)-3-cephem-4-carboxylic acid.9. A compound as claimed in claim 4 being the compound7-[.alpha.-amino-.alpha.-(p-formamidophenyl)acetamido]-3-(1,2,3-triazol-4-ylthiomethyl)-3-cephem-4-carboxylic acid.10. A compound as claimed in claim 6 being the compound7-[.alpha.-amino-.alpha.-(p-trifluoroacetamidophenyl)-acetamido]-3-(5-methyl-1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-ylthiomethyl)-3-cephem-4-carboxylic acid.11. A compound as claimed in claim 7 being the compound7-[.alpha.-amino-.alpha.-(p-acetamidophenyl)acetamido]-3-(5-methyl-1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-ylthiomethyl)-3-cephem-4-carboxylic acid.12. A compound as claimed in claim 7 being the compound7-[.alpha.-amino-.alpha.-(p-acetmidophenyl)acetamido]-3-(1-methyltetrazol-5-ylthiomethyl)-3-cephem-4-carboxylic acid.13. A compound as claimed in claim 1 in which the RCONH group is attachedat the meta position.14. A compound as claimed in claim 13 where Het is tetrazolyl,thiadiazolyl, triazolyl, oxadiazolyl, diazolyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl orpyrazinyl, unsubstituted or substituted with one or two lower alkyl groupscontaining 1-4 carbon atoms.15. A compound as claimed in claim 14 being the compound7-[.alpha.-amino-.alpha.-(m-formamidophenyl)acetamido]-3-(1-methyltetrazol-5-ylthiomethyl)-3-cephem-4-carboxylic acid.16. A compound as claimed in claim 14 being the compound7-[.alpha.-amino-.alpha.-(m-formamidophenyl)acetamido]-3-(5-methyl-1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-ylthiomethyl)-3-cephem-4-carboxylic acid.17. A compound as claimed in claim 14 being the compound7-[.alpha.-amino-.alpha.-(m-formamidophenyl)acetamido]-3-(1,2,3-triazol-4-ylthiomethyl)-3-cephem-4-carboxylic acid."}
{"WKU":"039311619","Title":"Cephalosporin derivatives","App_Date":"1973-03-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Carlo Buitar;Giuseppe Mascellani;Guido Guerra","Assignee":"Alfa Farmaceutici S.p.A.","ICL_Class":"C07D50120","References":"3573295;3573296;3575970;3641018;3813389;3821208","Claims":"We claim:1. In a process of recovering cephalosporin C from a fermentation broththereof by treating said broth with a reactant which causes a protectingmoeity to become attached to the amino side chain of said cephalosporin C,the improvement which comprises employing an acid chloride of the formulaR-CO-Cl, wherein R is an aliphatic hydrocarbon radical of 9-21 carbonatoms, as said reactant and wherein said fermentation broth is treatedwith at least 1.5 mols of said reactant per mol of cephalosporin C in thebroth.2. The process of claim 1 wherein said fermentation broth is treated withfrom 2- 15 mols of said reactant per mol of cephalosporin C in the broth,at a pH of about 8, while maintaining the temperature of the broth in therange of from -10.degree. C. to +40.degree. C.3. The process of claim 1 wherein said reactant is selected from the groupconsisting of decanoyl chloride, dodecanoyl chloride and hendecenoylchloride.4. In the process of recovering cephalosporin C from a fermentation broththereof by treating said broth with a reactant which causes a protectingmoiety to become attached to the amino side chain of said cephalosporin Cand thereafter recovering the resulting protected cephalosporin C fromsaid broth by extraction with a water immiscible organic solvent at anacid pH, the improvement which comprises employing an acid chloride of theformula R-CO-Cl, wherein R is an aliphatic hydrocarbon radical of 9-21carbon atoms, as said reactant.5. The process of claim 4 wherein said reactant is selected from the groupconsisting of decanoyl chloride, dodecanoyl chloride, and hendecenoylchloride.6. In the process of preparing 7-aminocephalosporanic acid which comprisesthe steps of treating a cephalosporin C fermentation broth with a reactantwhich causes a protecting moiety to become attached to the amino sidechain of said cephalosporin C, recovering the resulting protectedcephalosporin C from said broth by extraction with a water immiscibleorganic solvent at acid pH, forming a silyl di-ester of said protectedcephalosporin C, halogenating said silyl di-ester thereby forming thecorresponding imino-halide, reacting said imino-halide with a loweraliphatic alcohol thereby forming the corresponding imino-ether, andhydrolyzing said imino-ether under acidic conditions thereby forming thedesired 7-aminocephalosporanic acid, the improvement which comprisesemploying and an acid chloride of the formula R-CO-Cl, wherein R is analiphatic hydrocarbon radical of 9-21 carbon atoms, as said reactant.7. The process of claim 6 wherein said reactant is selected from the groupconsisting of decanoyl chloride, dodecanoyl chloride and hendecenoylchloride.8. In the process of preparing 7-aminocephalosporanic acid which comprisesthe steps of forming a silyl di-ester of an amino side chain protectedcephalosporin C, halogenating said silyl di-ester thereby forming thecorresponding imino-halide, reacting said imino-halide with a loweraliphatic alcohol thereby forming the corresponding aminoether, andhydrolyzing said imino-ether under acidic conditions thereby forming thedesired 7-aminocephalosporanic acid, the improvement which comprisesemploying as said amino side chain protected cephalosporin C, a compoundof the formula##SPC5##wherein A is selected from the group consisting of CH.sub.3 COCH.sub.2 COand R-CO-, wherein R is a hydrocarbon radical of 9-21 carbon atoms.9. The process of claim 8 wherein said amino side chain protectedcephalosporin C is selected from the group consisting ofN-decanoylcephalosporin C, N-dodecanoylcephalosporin C, andN-hendecenoylcephalosporin C.10. A cephalosporin derivative of the formula##SPC6##wherein A is R-CO-, R representing an aliphatic hydrocarbon group of 9-21carbon atoms; the sodium, potassium, calcium, zinc, iron, cadmium, copper,aluminum, ammonium, and organic base salts thereof, wherein said organicbase is selected from the group consisting of quinoline, cyclohexylamine,5-ethyl-2-methylpyridine, 2-picoline, 3-picoline, 4-picoline,N-ethylmorpholine, N-methylmorpholine, 2,6-lutidine,N,N-diethylcyclohexylamine, hexamethylenetetramine,N,N-diethylbenzylamine, and N,N-dibenzylethylenediamine.11. The cephalosporin derivative of claim 10 wherein the compound of saidformula is selected from the group consisting of N-decanoylcephalosporinC, N-dodecanoylcephalosporin C, and N-hendecenoylcephalosporin C."}
{"WKU":"039311627","Title":"N-Aminomethyl heterocyclic thioacetamides","App_Date":"1974-12-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Henry C. Caldwell;Bernard Loev","Assignee":"SmithKline Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07D29512;C07D21512","References":"3573304;3726878;3749728;3825547;3853865;3876645;3880860;3882126","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A compound of the formula:##EQU3##in which: R.sub.1 is 2-quinolyl;R.sub.2 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl or -(CH.sub.2).sub.n-phenyl;R.sub.3 is di-lower alkylamino, N-lower alkyl-N-phenylamino, pyrrolidino,piperidino or morpholino andn is 0 or 1 or a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.-thiazolyl)thiopropanamide.2. A compound of claim 1 in which R.sub.2 is hydrogen or lower alkyl andR.sub.3 is morpholino.3. A compound of claim 1 in which R.sub.2 is hydrogen or lower alkyl andR.sub.3 is di-lower alkylamino, pyrrolidino, piperidino or morpholino.4. A compound of claim 1, said compound beingN-morpholinomethyl-2-(2-quinolyl)thioacetamide.5. A compound of claim 1, said compound beingN-pyrrolidinomethyl-2-(2-quinolyl)thioacetamide."}
{"WKU":"039311635","Title":"Naphthoquinone derivatives","App_Date":"1973-10-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Bansi Lal Kaul","Assignee":"Sandoz Ltd., (Sandoz AG)","ICL_Class":"C07D25126;C07D23900","References":"3413302","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A compound of formula I,##SPC15##whereinR.sub.1 signifies a chlorine atom; a bromine atom; a nitro group; anunsubstituted (C.sub.1-4) alkoxy group; a (C.sub.1-4) alkoxy groupsubstituted by a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, a hydroxy group or a(C.sub.1-4) alkoxy group; or a group of the formula##EQU18##in which each of R.sub.30 and R.sub.31, which may be the same ordifferent, signifies a hydrogen atom; an unsubstituted (C.sub.1-4) alkylgroup; a (C.sub.1-4) alkyl group substituted by a chlorine atom, a bromineatom, a hydroxy group or a (C.sub.1-4) alkoxy group; an unsubstitutedphenyl radical; a phenyl radical substituted by up to three substituentsselected from the group consisting of chloro, bromo, hydroxy and(C.sub.1-4) alkoxy; or a group of formula R--Y-- or R --Z--,in which"}
{"WKU":"039311643","Title":"Heterocyclic compounds","App_Date":"1974-10-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ian Trevor Kay","Assignee":"Imperial Chemical Industries Limited","ICL_Class":"C07D25142","References":"3887552","Claims":"I claim:1. A compound of formula:##SPC6##wherein R.sup.1, R.sup.2 and R.sup.3 are alkyl groups of from one to sixcarbon atoms and R.sup.4 is an alkyl group of from one to 20 carbon atomsor benzyl, allyl, cyclohexyl, phenyl or carboxymethyl.2. A compound according to claim 1 wherein R.sup.1 is methyl, R.sup.2 isn-butyl and R.sup.3 is ethyl.3. A process for the preparation of a compound as defined in claim 1 whichcomprises the steps ofa. suspending or dissolving a compound of formula##SPC7##in a diluent or solvent selected from the group consisting of loweralcohols and water,b. treating said suspended or dissolved compound with at least astoichiometric amount of formaldehyde in the form of an aqueous solutionthereof, and with at least a stoichiometric amount of a primary amine offormula R.sup.4 NH.sub.2 ;c. heating the reaction mixture thus produced to the reflux temperature ofthe diluent or solvent for a period to accelerate the reaction, andd. recovering from the mixture the compound of formula:##SPC8##thus produced; wherein R.sup.1, R.sup.2, R.sup.3 and R.sup.4 have any ofthe meanings given in claim 1."}
{"WKU":"039311651","Title":"Tri-substituted triazines","App_Date":"1974-05-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Sol J. Barer;Richard F. Stockel;Jaroslav Vit","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"C07D25144;C07D25150","References":"B129999","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A compound having the formula:##SPC4##wherein n is 1 or 2; wherein X is a halogen; wherein R.sub.1 is hydrogen,halogen, alkyl of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, allyl, benzyl, cyclopropyl orcyclohexyl; wherein R.sub.2 is alkyl of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, allyl,cyanoisopropyl, benzyl, cyclopropyl, cyclohexyl, phenyl, halophenyl,methylphenyl, ethylphenyl, propenylphenyl, diphenyl, naphthyl orphenanthryl, with the proviso that at least one R.sub.1 is halogen.2. A compound according to claim 1 wherein X is halogen having an atomicnumber of from 17 to 53, and wherein all R.sub.1 halogen atoms have anatomic number of from 17 to 53.3. A compound according to claim 2 wherein X is chlorine and wherein allR.sub.1 halogen atoms are chlorine.4. A compound according to claim 2 wherein R.sub.1 is hydrogen, halogen ofatomic number of from 17 to 53 or alkyl of 1 to 12 carbon atoms; andwherein R.sub.2 is alkyl of 1 to 12 carbon atoms.5. A compound according to claim 4 wherein n is 2.6. A compound according to claim 4 wherein n is 1.7. A compound according to claim 1 having the formula:##SPC5##wherein R.sub.3 and R.sub.4 individually are alkyl of 1 to 12 carbon atoms;wherein X is a halogen; wherein Y.sub.1 is halogen; and Y.sub.2 ishydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, or halogen.8. A compound according to claim 7 wherein X and Y, individually, arehalogen of atomic number of from 17 to 53; and wherein Y.sub.2 is hydrogenor halogen of atomic number of from 17 to 53.9. A compound according to claim 8 wherein all halogen atoms are chlorine.10. A compound according to claim 9 wherein R.sub.3 and R.sub.4 are loweralkyl groups of 1 to 6 carbon atoms.11. A compound according to claim 10 wherein R.sub.3 and R.sub.4 are bothethyl.12. A compound according to claim 10 wherein R.sub.3 is ethyl and whereinR.sub.4 is isopropyl.13. A process of preparing a compound according to claim 1 comprisingreacting a hypohalite of the formula ROX or Ca(OX).sub.2 where R issodium, potassium, lithium, 1 to 8 carbon atom alkyl, methylcyclopentyl ormethycyclohexyl hypohalite with a triazine of the formula:##SPC6##wherein n is 1 or 2; wherein X is a halogen, wherein R.sub.5 is hydrogen,alkyl of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, allyl, benzyl, cyclopropyl or cyclohexyland wherein R.sub.6 is alkyl of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, allyl, benzyl,cyclopropyl, cyclohexyl, phenyl, halophenyl, methyphenyl, ethylphenyl,propenylphenyl, diphenyl, naphthyl or phenanthryl.14. A process according to claim 13 wherein the hypohalite has the formulaR.sub.7 OX wherein R.sub.7 is alkyl of 1 to 8 carbon atoms,methylcyclopentyl or methylcyclohexyl.15. A process according to claim 14 wherein R.sub.7 is tertiary alkyl.16. A process according to claim 15 wherein R.sub.7 OX is t-butylhypochlorite.17. A process according to claim 16 wherein the reaction is carried out inan inert organic medium.18. A process according to claim 17 wherein the temperature is -30  to+30.degree.C.19. A process according to claim 13 wherein the temperature is -30  to+30.degree.C."}
{"WKU":"039311660","Title":"Certain 2,5-dimethyl-3-thiopyrazines","App_Date":"1974-07-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Max Winter;Fritz Gautschi;Ivon Flament;Max Stoll","Assignee":"Firmenich & Cie","ICL_Class":"C07D24118","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A new composition of matter consisting essentially of a pyrazine sulfurcompound having the general formula:##SPC66##wherein R is methyl, ethyl, furfuryl or acetyl.2. The composition of matter of claim 1 wherein the pyrazine sulfurcompound is 2,5-dimethyl-3-methylthio-pyrazine.3. The composition of matter of claim 1 wherein the pyrazine sulfurcompound is 2,5-dimethyl-3-ethylthio-pyrazine.4. The composition of matter of claim 1 wherein the pyrazine sulfurcompound is 2,5-dimethyl-3-furfurylthio-pyrazine.5. The composition of matter of claim 1 wherein the pyrazine sulfurcompound is 2,5-dimethyl-3-acetylthio-pyrazine."}
{"WKU":"039311678","Title":"Process for the manufacture of 3-keto-6-azido-4,6-bis-dehydro-steroids","App_Date":"1974-06-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Michael J. Green;Satish C. Bisarya","Assignee":"Schering Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07J  100;C07J  500","References":"3026320;3665017;3707484","Claims":"We claim:1. The process for the manufacture of a3-keto-6-azido-4,6-bis-dehydro-steroid of the pregnane and androstaneseries which comprises treating a3-keto-6.beta.,7-dihydrocarbonsulfonyloxy-4-dehydro-steriod of thepregnane and androstane series, said hydrocarbonsulfonyloxy having up to12 carbon atoms, with an azide reagent selected from the group consistingof an alkali metal azide, an alkaline earth metal azide, a tetraloweralkylammonium azide and a tetra-lower alkylguanidinium azide, in anon-reactive organic solvent.2. The process of claim 1 wherein said3-keto-6.beta.,7-dihydrocarbonsulfonyloxy-4-dehydro-steroid is a3-keto-6.beta.,7.beta.-dimethanesulfonyloxy-4-dehydro-steroid of thepregnane and androstane series.3. The process of claim 1 wherein said azide reagent is an alkali metalazide, and said3-keto-6.beta.,7-dihydrocarbonsulfonyloxy-4-dehydro-steroid is a3-keto-6.beta.,7.beta.-dimethanesulfonyloxy-4-dehydro-steroid of thepregnane series.4. The process of claim 1 wherein said3-keto-6.beta.,7-dihydrocarbonsulfonyloxy-4-dehydro-steroid is a3,20-diketo-6.beta.,7.beta.-dimethanesulfonyloxy-1,4-pregnadiene-17.alpha.,21-diol 21-lower alkanoate, said azide reagent is sodium azide, and saidnon-reactive organic solvent is dimethylformamide, whereby is formed a3,20-diketo-6-azido-1,4,6-pregnatriene-17.alpha.,21-diol-21-loweralkanoate.5. The process according to claim 1 wherein said3-keto-6.beta.,7-dihydrocarbonsulfonyloxy-4-dehydro-steriod is a3,20-diketo-6.beta.,7.beta.-dimethanesulfonyloxy-1,4-pregnadiene-17.alpha.,21-diol 21-lower alkanoate having a halogen at C-9 and a .beta.-hydroxylor keto function at C-11, said azide reagent is sodium azide, and saidnonreactive organic solvent is dimethylformamide.6. The process of claim 1 wherein said3-keto-6.beta.,7-dihydrocarbonsulfonyloxy-4-dehydro-steroid is a3-keto-6.beta.,7.beta.-dimethanesulfonyloxy-4-dehydro-steroid of thepregnane and androstane series, said azide reagent istetra-n-butyl-ammonium azide and said non-reactive organic solvent ischloroform.7. The process according to claim 5 wherein said3-keto-6.beta.,7-dihydrocarbonsulfonyloxy-4-dehydro-steroid is 6.beta.,7.beta.-dimethanesulfonyloxy-9.alpha.-fluoro-16.alpha.-methyl-1,4-pregnadiene-11.beta.,17.alpha.,21-triol-3,20-dione 21-acetate whereby is formed6-azido-9.alpha.-fluoro-16.alpha.-methyl-1,4,6-pregnatriene-11.beta.,17.alpha.,21-triol-3,20-dione 21-acetate.8. The process according to claim 5 wherein said3-keto-6.beta.,7-dihydrocarbonsulfonyloxy-4-dehydro-steroid is6.beta.,7.beta.-dimethanesulfonyloxy-9.alpha.-fluoro-16.beta.-methyl-1,4-pregnadiene-11.beta.,17.alpha.,21-triol-3,20-dione 21-acetate whereby isformed6-azido-9.alpha.-fluoro-16.beta.-methyl-1,4,6-pregnatriene-11.beta.,17.alpha.,21-triol-3,20-dione 21-acetate.9. The process according to claim 5 wherein said3-keto-6.beta.,7-dihydrocarbonsulfonyloxy-4-dehydro-steroid is6.beta.,7.beta.-dimethanesulfonyloxy-9.alpha.-fluoro-16.alpha.,17.alpha.-iso-propylidenedioxy-1,4-pregnadiene-11.beta.,21-diol-3,20-dione 21-acetatewhereby is formed6-azido-9.alpha.-fluoro-16.alpha.,17.alpha.-iso-propylidenedioxy-1,4,6-pregnatriene-11.beta.,21-diol-3,20-dione 21-acetate.10. The process according to claim 5 wherein said3-keto-6.beta.,7-dihydrocarbonsulfonyloxy-4-dehydro-steroid is6.beta.,7.beta.-dimethanesulfonyloxy-9.alpha.-fluoro-1,4-pregnadiene-11.beta.,16.alpha., 17.alpha.,21-tetrol-3,20-dione 16,21-diacetate whereby isformed6-azido-9.alpha.-fluoro-1,4,6-pregnatriene-11.beta.,16.alpha.,17.alpha.,21-tetrol-3,20-dione 16,21-diacetate.11. The process according to claim 1 wherein said3-keto-6.beta.,7-dihydrocarbonsulfonyloxy-4-dehydro-steroid is a3,20-diketo-6.beta.,7.beta.-dimethanesulfonyloxy-1,2-dihydro-4-pregene-17.alpha.,21-diol 21-lower alkanoate having a halogen at C-9 and a.beta.-hydroxyl or a keto function at C-11, wherein said azide reagent issodium azide, and said non-reactive organic solvent is an aqueous loweralkanol in the presence of a weak acid.12. The process according to claim 11 wherein said3-keto-6.beta.,7-dihydrocarbonsulfonyloxy-4-dehydro steroid is6.beta.,7.beta.-dimethanesulfonyloxy-9.alpha.-fluoro-16.alpha.-methyl-4-pregnene-11.beta.,17.alpha., 21-triol-3,20-dione 21-acetate and saidnon-reactive organic solvent is aqueous methanol in the presence of aceticacid whereby is formed6-azido-9.alpha.-fluoro-16.alpha.-methyl-4,6-pregnadiene-11.beta.,17.alpha.,21-triol-3,20-dione 21-acetate.13. The process according to claim 11 wherein said3-keto-6.beta.,7-dihydrocarbonsulfonyloxy-4-dehydro-steroid is6.beta.,7.beta.-dimethanesulfonyloxy-9.alpha.-fluoro-16.beta.-methyl-4-pregnene-11.beta.,17.alpha.,21-triol-3,20-dione 21-acetate and saidnon-reactive organic solvent is aqueous methanol in the presence of aceticacid whereby is formed6-azido-9.alpha.-fluoro-16.beta.-methyl-4,6-pregnadiene-11.beta.,18.alpha.,21-triol-3,20-dione 21-acetate.14. The process according to claim 2 wherein said3-keto-6.beta.,7.beta.-dihydrocarbonsulfonyloxy-4-dehydro-steroid isprepared by treating a 3-keto-4,6-bis-dehydro-steroid of the pregnane andandrostane series unsubstituted at C-6 and C-7 with osmium tetroxide in asolvent selected from the group consisting of a saturated halogenatedhydrocarbon and a saturated ether, followed by reductive cleavage of thethereby formed 6.beta.,7.beta.-osmate ester and treating the resulting3-keto-6.beta.,7.beta.-dihydroxy-4-dehydro-steroid of the pregnane andandrostane series with a hydrocarbonsulfonyl halide in a tertiary amine.15. The process of claim 14 wherein said hydrocarbonsulfonyl halide in atertiary amine is methanesulfonyl chloride in pyridine.16. A compound selected from the group consisting of a3-keto-6.beta.,7.beta.-dihydroxy-4-dehydro-steroid derivative of thefollowing formulae I and II and the 1-dehydro analogs thereof:##SPC5##wherein M is an acyl radical of a hydrocarbonsulfonic acid having up to 12carbon atoms,Q is a member selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxy andOR, R being an acyl radical of a hydrocarbon carboxylic acid having up to12 carbon atoms;V is a member selected from the group consisting of oxygen, (H,.beta.-OR.sub.1); (.alpha.-methyl, .beta.-OR.sub.1), (.alpha.-loweralkinyl, .beta.OR.sub.1) and (.alpha.-halogenoalkinyl .beta.-OR.sub.1)wherein R.sub.1 is a member selected from the group consisting of hydrogenand lower alkanoyl;W is a member selected from the group consisting of##EQU5##(H, .alpha.-lower alkyl), (H, .beta.-lower alkyl), (H, .alpha.-OH), (H,.alpha.-OR ) wherein R  is an acyl radical of a hydrocarbon carboxylicacid having up to 12 carbon atoms, =CHT when Q is other than hydrogenwherein T is a member selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,lower alkyl, fluorine, chlorine, and W and Q together is alkylidenedioxy;X is a member selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and halogenhaving an atomic weight less than 100;Y is a member selected from the group consisting of##EQU6##provided X is hydrogen, oxygen, (H,.beta.OH), and (H, .beta.-halogen ofatomic weight less than 100) provided X is halogen;Z is a member selected from the group consisting of OR  (R  being an acylradical of a hydrocarbon carboxylic acid having up to 12 carbon atoms),hydrogen and halogen, and Z together with Q is a member selected from thegroup consisting of alkylidenedioxy and alkylorthoalkanoate.17. A compound according to claim 16 wherein M is methanesulfonyl.18. A compound according to claim 16, formula I, wherein M ismethanesulfonyl, Q is hydroxy or lower alkanoyloxy and Z is loweralkanoyloxy, or Z together with Q is alkylidenedioxy.19. A compound according to claim 16, formula I, wherein M ismethanesulfonyl, X is fluorine, Y is (H, .beta.OH) or oxygen, Q is hydroxyor lower alkanoyloxy, and Z is lower alkanoyloxy or Z together with Q isalkylidenedioxy.20. A compound according to claim 19 wherein W is (H,methyl).21. A 1-dehydro compound according to claim 20 wherein Q and Z arepropionyloxy, said compound being6.beta.,7.beta.-dimethanesulfonyloxy-9.alpha.-fluoro-16-methyl-1,4-pregnadiene-11.beta.,17.alpha.,21-triol-3,20-dione 17,21-dipropionate.22. A compound according to claim 19 wherein Y is (H,.beta.OH) and W is amember selected from the group consisting of (H,.alpha.lower alkyl),(H,.beta.-lower alkyl), (H, .alpha.-OH), (H, .alpha.-OR ), or W and Qtogether are alkylidenedioxy.23. A compound according to claim 22 wherein W is (H,.alpha.-methyl and Zis acetoxy, said compound being6.beta.,7.beta.-dimethanesulfonyloxy-9.alpha.-fluoro-16.alpha.-methyl-4-pregnene-11.beta.,17.alpha.,21-triol-3,20-dione 21-acetate.24. A compound according to claim 22 wherein W is (H,.beta.-methyl) and Zis acetoxy, said compound being6.beta.,7.beta.-dimethanesulfonyloxy-9.alpha.-fluoro-16.beta.-methyl-4-pregnene-11.beta.,17.alpha.,21-triol-3,20-dione 21-acetate.25. A 1-dehydro compound according to claim 22 wherein W is(H,.alpha.-methyl) and Z is acetoxy, said compound being6.beta.,7.beta.-dimethanesulfonyloxy-9.alpha.-fluoro-16.alpha.-methyl-1,4-pregnadiene-11.beta.,17.alpha.,21-triol-3,20-dione 21-acetate.26. A 1-dehydro compound according to claim 22 wherein W is(H,.beta.-methyl) and Z is acetoxy, said compound being6.beta.,7.beta.-dimethanesulfonyloxy-9.alpha.-fluoro-16.beta.-methyl-1,4-pregnadiene-11.beta., 17.alpha.,21-triol-3,20-dione 21-acetate.27. A compound according to claim 22 wherein W is .alpha.-loweralkanoyloxy.28. A 1-dehydro compound according to claim 27 wherein W and Z are acetoxy,said compound being 6.beta.,7.beta.-dimethanesulfonyloxy-9.alpha.-fluoro-1,4-pregnadiene-11.beta.,16.alpha., 17.alpha. ,21-tetrol-3,20-dione 16,21-diacetate.29. A compound according to claim 22 wherein Z is acetoxy and W and Qtogether are iso-propylidenedioxy, said compound being a member selectedfrom the group consisting of6.beta.,7.beta.-dimethanesulfonyloxy-9.alpha.-fluoro-16.alpha.,17.alpha.-iso-propylidenedioxy-4-pregnene-11.beta.,21-diol-3,20-dione 21-acetete andthe 1-dehydro analog thereof.30. A 1-dehydro compound according to claim 16, formula I, wherein M ismethanesulfonyl, Q is hydroxy, W is (H, .alpha.-methyl), X is fluorine, Yis (H, (H,.beta.OH) and Z is hydrogen, said compound being6.beta.,7.beta.-dimethanesulfonyloxy-9.alpha.-fluoro-11.beta.,17.alpha.-dihydroxy-16.alpha.-methyl-1,4-pregnadiene-3,20-dione.31. 6.beta.,7.beta.-dihydroxy-9.alpha.-fluoro-16.beta.-methyl-16.alpha.,17.alpha.-oxido-1,4-pregnadiene-11.beta.,21-diol-3,20-dione 21-acetate.32. 6.beta.,7.beta.-dihydroxy-9.alpha.-fluoro-16.beta.-methyl-16.alpha.,17.alpha.-oxido-1,4-pregnadiene-11.beta.-ol-3,20-dione."}
{"WKU":"039311686","Title":"Cinnamamidohydantoins","App_Date":"1974-08-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert J. Alaimo;Christopher J. Hatton","Assignee":"Morton-Norwich Products, Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07D23380","References":"3182058;3830805;3835128","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A compound of the formula:##EQU2##wherein R.sub.2 is a member of the group consisting of hydrogen, chloro,fluoro and trifluoromethyl; R.sub.3 is a member of the group consisting ofhydrogen, chloro, fluoro, methyl, ethyl and cyano; and R.sub.2 and R.sub.3taken together are methylenedioxy.2. The compound 1-(3,4-dichlorocinnamamido)hydantoin.3. The compound 1-cinnamamidohydantoin.4. The compound 1-(3-chloro-4-methylcinnamamido)hydantoin.5. The compound 1-(4-chlorocinnamamido)hydantoin.6. The compound 1-(3,4-methylenedioxycinnamamido)hydantoin.7. The compound 1-(4-chloro-3-trifluoromethylcinnamamido) hydantoin.8. The compound 1-(4-fluorocinnamamido)hydantoin.9. The compound 1-(3-chloro-4-ethylcinnamamido)hydantoin.10. The compound 1-(4-cyanocinnamamido)hydantoin.11. The compound 1-(3-fluorocinnamamido)hydantoin.12. The compound 1-(3-chloro-4-fluorocinnamamido)hydantoin."}
{"WKU":"039311694","Title":"5-Substituted-pyrazolo(4,3-c)pyridines","App_Date":"1975-01-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John Krapcho;Chester Frank Turk","Assignee":"E. R. Squibb & Sons, Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07D47102","References":"3423414;3787430","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A compound of the formula##SPC6##wherein X.sub.1 and X.sub.2 are the same or different and are selected fromthe group consisting of hydrogen, F, cl, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, orCF.sub.3 ; R is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, loweralkyl, phenyl lower alkyl, x.sub.1 or 2.sub.- substituted phenyl loweralkyl wherein X.sub.1 or 2 is as previously defined, hydroxy lower alkylor lower alkanoyl; R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are the same or different and areselected from the group consisting of hydrogen or lower alkyl or##EQU16##may be taken together to form a 5- or 6-membered heterocyclic ring whichmay include one other heteroatom selected from the group consisting ofsulfur, nitrogen or oxygen; and n is 0 to 4; and N-oxides andpharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts thereof.2. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein X.sub.1 and X.sub.2 are thesame.3. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein X.sub.1 and X.sub.2 arehydrogen.4. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein one of X.sub.1 and X.sub.2 ishydrogen.5. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein X.sub.1 and X.sub.2 are thesame or different and are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,lower alkyl, F or Cl.6. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein X.sub.1 and X.sub.2 are thesame or different and are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,lower alkoxy or CF.sub.3.7. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein R is selected from the groupconsisting of hydrogen and lower alkyl.8. A compound as defined in claim 7 wherein R is selected from the groupconsisting of hydrogen, lower alkyl, and hydroxy lower alkyl.9. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein R is phenyl lower alkyl orX.sub.1 or 2 -substituted phenyl lower alkyl.10. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein n is 0, 1 or 2.11. A compound as defined in claim 10 wherein X.sub.1 and X.sub.2 arehydrogen, and R is methyl.12. A compound of claim 1 having the name2,3,3a,4,6,7-hexahydro-N-2-dimethyl-3-phenyl-7-(phenylmethylene)-5H-pyrazolo-[4,3-c]pyridine-5-carboxamide.13. A compound as defined in claim 1 having the name2,3,3a,4,6,7-hexahydro-2-methyl-3-phenyl-7-(phenylmethylene)-5H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine-5 carboxamide.14. A compound as defined in claim 1 having the name5-[(dimethylamino)acetyl]-3,3a,4,5,6,7-hexahydro-2-methyl-3-phenyl-7-(phenylmethylene)-2H-pyrazolo[4,3-c]pyridine.15. A compound as defined in claim 1 having the name5-[3-(Dimethylamino)propionyl]-3,3a,4,5,6,7-hexahydro-2-methyl-3-phenyl-7-(phenylmethylene)-2H-pyrazolo-[4,3-c]pyridine.16. A compound of claim 1 wherein##EQU17##is selected from the group consisting of piperidino, pyrrolidino,morpholino, thiamorpholino, piperazino and N-lower alkyl piperazino."}
{"WKU":"039311708","Title":"3-Heterothio derivatives of (carbamoylthioacetyl)cephalosporins","App_Date":"1974-08-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Uwe D. Treuner;Hermann Breuer","Assignee":"E. R. Squibb & Sons, Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07D50150;A61K 31545","References":"3391141;3775408;3812116","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A compound of the formula##EQU13##wherein R is hydrogen, lower alkyl, phenyl-lower alkyl, diphenylmethyl,tri(lower alkyl)silyl,##EQU14##alkali metal, alkaline earth metal, mono (lower alkyl) amine salt or tri(lower alkyl) amine salt; R.sub.1 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, phenyl,thienyl, furyl or pyridyl; R.sub.2 is lower alkyl, phenyl-lower alkyl ordiphenyl methyl; R.sub.3 is R.sub.5 -thiadiazole, R.sub.5 -oxadiazole,R.sub.5 -isoxazole, R.sub.5 -isothiazole, R.sub.5 -tetrazole or R.sub.5-pyridine-N-Oxide; R.sub.4 is lower alkyl, phenyl, phenyl-lower alkyl ordiphenyl methyl; and R.sub.5 is hydrogen or lower alkyl; said lower alkylgroups having up to seven carbon atoms.2. A compound as in claim 1 wherein R.sub.1 is phenyl.3. A compound as in claim 2 wherein R.sub.2 is lower alkyl.4. A compound as in claim 1 wherein R is hydrogen, alkali metal,trimethylsilyl, diphenylmethyl or##EQU15##R.sub.1 is phenyl or thienyl; R.sub.2 is lower alkyl; R.sub.3 is (loweralkyl)tetrazole or (lower alkyl)thiadiazole; and R.sub.4 is methyl ort-butyl.5. A compound as in claim 2 wherein R is hydrogen and R.sub.2 is loweralkyl.6. A compound as in claim 4 wherein R is hydrogen, R.sub.1 is phenyl,R.sub.2 is lower alkyl and R.sub.3 is (lower alkyl)tetrazole.7. A compound as in claim 4 wherein R is alkali metal, R.sub.1 is phenyl,R.sub.2 is lower alkyl and R.sub.3 is (lower alkyl)-tetrazole.8. A compound as in claim 4 wherein R is hydrogen, R.sub.1 is phenyl,R.sub.2 is methyl and R.sub.3 is 1-methyl-1H-tetrazol-5-yl.9. Alkali metal salt of the compound of claim 8.10. Diphenylmethyl ester of the compound of claim 8.11. A compound as in claim 1 wherein R.sub.1 is thienyl."}
{"WKU":"039311716","Title":"Process for the production of","App_Date":"1972-11-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Gerhard Jager;Hans-Jurgen Weinzelburger;Richard Wegler","Assignee":"Bayer Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07D26508;C07D26512","References":"2336868;2758994;2849306;3190795;3235360;3235361;3480631;3654362;3717633","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Process for the production of a 2,3-dihydro-1,3-oxazinedione-(2,4)compound of the formula##SPC14##in whichR.sub.1 is alkyl with 1 to 10 carbon atoms or cycloalkyl of from 5 to 6carbon atoms, norbornyl methyl, benzyl, phenylethyl, benzoyl,phenylsulfonyl, phenylmercaptocarbonyl, phenyl or naphthyl which radicalsmay be substituted by up to three alkyl of from 1 to 6 carbon atoms,phenyl, alkoxy of from 1 to 2 carbon atoms, haloalkyl of from 1 to 2carbon atoms, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine, cyano, nitro, or aminogroups; or R.sub.1 can be trichloropyrimidyl or dichlorotriazyl; orR.sub.1 can be the group of the formula##SPC15##R.sub.2 is hydrogen and R.sub.3 is methyl, or R.sub.2 and R.sub.3 togetherform a trimethylene radical which may be substituted by one or more alkylradicals,which process comprises reacting, at a temperature of from 80.degree. to200.degree.C, a 1,3-dioxinone-(4) of the formula##SPC16##in whichR.sub.2 and R.sub.3 have the meaning stated above, andR.sub.4 is hydrogen or alkyl, andR.sub.5 is alkyl or aryl, orR.sub.4 and R.sub.5 taken together form a divalent alkylene group of theformula --(CH.sub.2).sub.n --, where n is 4, 5 or 6;with an isocyanate of the formula"}
{"WKU":"039311724","Title":"1-Tertiary-butyl-3-morpholino-3-phenyl-2,1-benzisoxaxolines","App_Date":"1974-02-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert V. Coombs;Goetz E. Hardtmann","Assignee":"Sandoz Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07D26354","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A compound of the formula:##SPC6##whereinR.sup.o and R are independently hydrogen, halo of atomic weight of from 18to 80, lower alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, lower alkoxy of 1 to 4 carbonatoms or trifluoromethyl, andY and Y  are independently hydrogen, halo of atomic weight of from 18 to80, lower alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, lower alkoxy of 1 to 4 carbonatoms or trifluoromethyl.2. A compound of claim 1 having the formula:##SPC7##wherein R.sup.o and R are as defined in claim 1.3. A compound of claim 1 having the formula:##SPC8##wherein R.sup.o is as defined in claim 1.4. A compound of claim 1 having the formula:##SPC9##wherein R is as defined in claim 1.5. The compound of claim 1 which is1-tertiary-butyl-5-chloro-6-methyl-3-morpholino-3-phenyl-2,1-benzisoxazoline.6. The compound of claim 1 which is1-tertiary-butyl-5-chloro-3-morpholino-3-phenyl-2,1-benzisoxazoline."}
{"WKU":"039311732","Title":"Dioxocin carboxamide derivatives","App_Date":"1971-07-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Roger Alan Parker;David Lawrence Wenstrup","Assignee":"Richardson-Merrell Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07D29518","References":"3551484;3553234;3652646;3652670","Claims":"We claim:1. A compound selected fromA. a compound of the formula##SPC6##B. a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt of the salt formingcompounds, wherein each Y is selected from the group consisting ofhydrogen, or chlorine; n is 1; R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 are hydrogen, loweralkyl of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, picolyl, or o-tolyl or --NR.sup.1R.sup.2 taken together are piperidino, or morpholino.2. A compound of claim 1 wherein one of said chlorine atoms as representedby Y is attached in the 2-position of the dibenzo[d,g][1,3]dioxocin ringand the remaining chlorine atom is attached in the 10-position of thedibenzo[d,g][1,3]dioxocin ring.3. A compound of claim 2 which is 2,10-dichloro-N-(3-pyridylmethyl)-##SPC7##12H-dibenzo[d,g][1,3]dioxocin-6-carboxamide or the pharmaceuticallyacceptable acid addition salts thereof.4. A compound of claim 2 which is 2,10-dichloro-12-pyridylmethyl)-d,g][1,3]dioxocin-6-carboxamide.5. A compound of claim 2 which is2,10-dichloro-N-ethyl-12H-dibenzo[d,g][1,3]dioxocin-6-carboxamide.6. A compound of claim 2 which is2,10-dichloro-N,N-dimethyl-12H-dibenzo[d,g][1,3]dioxocin-6-carboxamide.7. A compound of claim 2 which is1-(2,10-dichloro-12H-dibenzo-[d,g][1,3]dioxocin-6-carbonyl)piperidine.8. A compound of claim 2 which is4-(2,10-dichloro-12H-dibenzo-[d,g][1,3]dioxocin-6-carbonyl)morpholine.9. A compound of claim 2 which is2,10-dichloro-N(o-tolyl)-12H-dibenzo[d,g][1,3]dioxocin-6-carboxamide."}
{"WKU":"039311740","Title":"Alkylmercaptomethylquinoxaline-1,4-dioxides and oxidized derivatives","App_Date":"1974-01-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James W. McFarland","Assignee":"Pfizer Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07D24144","References":"3803145","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A compound of the formula##SPC8##wherein R is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and methyl;Y is lower alkyl; andn is 0 or an integer from 1 to 2.2. A compound according to claim 1 wherein R is hydrogen.3. A compound according to claim 1 wherein R is methyl.4. A compound according to claim 2 wherein n is 0.5. A compound according to claim 2 wherein n is 2.6. A compound according to claim 3 wherein n is 2.7. The compound according to claim 4 wherein Y is ethyl.8. The compound according to claim 5 wherein Y is methyl.9. The compound according to claim 5 wherein Y is ethyl.10. The compound according to claim 6 wherein Y is methyl."}
{"WKU":"039311759","Title":"Imidazo(1,2b)pyridazinyl esters, process and insecticidal compositions","App_Date":"1974-07-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jacques Perronnet;Laurent Taliani","Assignee":"Roussel-UCLAF","ICL_Class":"C07D23726","References":"3100206;3808227;3878210","Claims":"We claim:1. Substituted imidazo(1,2b)pyridazinyl esters having the formula##SPC11##wherein R.sub.1 is a member selected from the group consisting of hydrogenand halogen, Y is a member selected from the group consisting of oxygenand sulfur, X is alkyl having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and Z is a memberselected from the group consisting of hydrogen and --COOR , wherein R  isalkyl having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.2. The substituted imidazo(1,2b)pyridazinyl esters of claim 1 whereinR.sub.1 is halogen.3. The substituted imidazo(1,2b)pyridazinyl esters of claim 1 whereinR.sub.1 is hydrogen.4. The substituted imidazo(1,2b)pyridazinyl esters of claim 1 wherein saidester is 2-(dimethoxythiophosphoryloxy)-6-chloro-imidazo(1,2b)pyridazine.5. The substituted imidazo(1,2b)pyridazinyl esters of claim 1 wherein saidester is 2-(diethoxythiophsophoryloxy)-6-chloro-imidazo(1,2b)pyridazine.6. The substituted imidazo(1,2b)pyridazinyl esters of claim 1 wherein saidester is2-(diethoxythiophosphoryloxy)-3-carbethoxy-6-chloro-imidazo(1,2b)-pyridazine.7. The substituted imidazo(1,2b)pyridazinyl esters of claim 1 wherein saidester is 2-(diethoxythiophosphoryloxy)-imidazo(1,2b)pyridazine.8. The substituted imidazo(1,2b)pyridazinyl esters of claim 1 wherein saidester is 2-(dimethoxyphosphoryloxy)-imidazo(1,2b)pyridazine.9. A compound of claim 1 wherein R.sub.1 is hydrogen or chlorine."}
{"WKU":"039311767","Title":"Hydroxyalkyl substituted-4,5-dihydropyridazin(2H)-3-ones","App_Date":"1973-10-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William J. Houlihan","Assignee":"Sandoz Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07D23704","References":"3497512;3549620;3657242","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A compound of the formula:##SPC7##whereR is lower alkyl having 1 to 4 carbon atoms,R.sub.1, r.sub.2, r.sub.3, and R.sub.4 each independently representhydrogen or lower alkyl having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, andA represents##SPC8##whereR.sup.7 represents hydrogen; fluoro, chloro or straight chain lower alkylhaving 1 to 4 carbon atoms, andR.sub.5 and R.sub.6 each independently represent hydrogen, fluoro, chloro,trifluoromethyl or lower alkyl having 1 to 4 carbon atomsprovided that when both R.sup.5 and R.sup.6 represent trifluoromethyl, theyare on other than adjacent carbon atoms and that at least one of R.sup.5,R.sup.6, and R.sup.7 is hydrogen.2. The compounds according to claim 1 in which R.sub.1, R.sub.2, R.sub.3,and R.sub.4 are hydrogen and R is ethyl.3. The compound of claim 1 which is6-(p-chlorophenyl)-2-(2-hydroxybutyl)-4,5-dihydropyridazin(2H)-3-one.4. The compound of claim 1 which is6-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-2-(2-hydroxybutyl)-4,5-dihydropyridazin(2H)-3-one.5. The compound of claim 1 which is6-(p-fluorophenyl)-2-(2-hydroxybutyl)-4,5-dihydropyridazin(2H)-one.6. The compound of claim 1 which is6-(p-fluorophenyl)-2-(2-hydroxyhexyl)-4,5-dihydropyridazin(2H)-3-one.7. The compound of claim 1 which is6-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-2-(2-hydroxypropyl)-4,5-dihydropyridazin(2H)-3-one.8. The compound of claim 1 which is6-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-2-(2-hydroxyhexyl)-4,5-dihydropyridazin(2H)-3-one.9. The compound of claim 1 which is6-(3-methyl-4-chlorophenyl)-2-(2-hydroxybutyl)-4,5-dihydropyridazin(2H)-3-one.10. The compound of claim 1 which is6-(p-chlorophenyl)-2-(2-hydroxybutyl)-5-methyl-4,5-dihydropyridazin(2H)-3-one.11. The compound of claim 1 which is6-(p-chlorophenyl)-2-(2-hydroxybutyl)-4,4-dimethyl-4,5-dihydropyridazin(2H)-3-one.12. The compound of claim 1 which is6-(p-chlorophenyl)-2-(2-hydroxybutyl)-4-methyl-,4,5-dihydropyridazin(2H)-3-one."}
{"WKU":"039311775","Title":"6-(3-Substituted","App_Date":"1974-12-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William John Coates;Anthony Maitland Roe;Robert Antony Slater","Assignee":"Smith Kline & French Laboratories, Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07D23704","References":"3689652","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A compound of the formula:##SPC6##wherein"}
{"WKU":"039311783","Title":"1-Substituted-2-imino-pyrido[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4(1H)-ones","App_Date":"1974-07-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Goetz E. Hardtmann","Assignee":"Sandoz Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07D23900","References":"3794637","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A compound of the formula##SPC17##whereinR.sub.1 is alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms, alkenyl of 3 to 8 carbon atoms orphenalkyl of the formula:##SPC18##n is 0 or 1,R  is hydrogen or methyl provided that R  is hydrogen when n is 1,R.sub.2 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms or alkenyl of 3 to 6carbon atoms,R.sub.3 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms or alkenyl of 3 to 6carbon atoms,R is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 3 carbon atoms, andY and Y  are independently hydrogen, fluoro, chloro, alkyl of 1 to 3 carbonatoms or alkoxy of 1 to 3 carbon atoms or one is hydrogen and the otherbromo or trifluoromethyl, or a pharmaceutically acceptable acid additionsalt of the compounds in which each of R.sub.2 and R.sub.3 is hydrogen.2. A compound of claim 1 in which R.sub.3 is hydrogen.3. A compound of claim 1 in which each of R.sub.2 and R.sub.3 is hydrogen.4. A compound of claim 1 in which each of R.sub.2 and R.sub.3 is alkyl.5. A compound of claim 2 in which R.sub.2 is alkyl.6. A compound of claim 5 in which R.sub.2 is alkyl of 1 to 3 carbon atoms.7. A compound of claim 1 in which R.sub.1 is##SPC19##8. A compound of claim 7 in which R  is hydrogen, n is O, Y is hydrogen,fluoro, chloro or bromo and Y  is hydrogen, fluoro or chloro, with theproviso that Y  is hydrogen when Y is bromo.9. A compound of claim 8 in which Y is 4-fluorobenzyl, 4-chlorobenzyl or4-bromobenzyl and Y  is hydrogen.10. A compound of claim 8 in which R.sub.2 is hydrogen or alkyl and R.sub.3is hydrogen.11. A compound of claim 10 in which R is hydrogen.12. The compound of claim 11 which is1-(4 -fluorobenzyl-2-methylimino-pyrido[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4(1H)-one.13. The compound of claim 6 which is1-(4 -fluorobenzyl)-2-ethylamino-pyrido[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4(1H)-one.14. A compound of claim 1 in which R.sub.1 is alkyl.15. A compound of claim 1 in which R.sub.2 and R.sub.3 are hydrogen oralkyl."}
{"WKU":"039311791","Title":"N,N-Bis(4-Quinazolinyl)alkanediamines","App_Date":"1974-03-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William R. J. Simpson","Assignee":"Sandoz Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07D23986","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A compound of the formula:##SPC5##wherein R and R.sub.1 are independently hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 4 carbonatoms,n is 0 to 12,each Y is independently hydrogen, fluoro, chloro, bromo, alkyl of 1 to 4carbon atoms, alkoxy of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, trifluoromethyl, nitro, aminoor N,N-dialkylamino in which each alkyl is of 1 to 3 carbon atoms or twoadjacent Y together form 6,7-methylenedioxy or 6,7-ethylenedioxy with theother Y on any such alkylenedioxy substituted ring being hydrogen,provided that adjacent Ys do not both have a tert-butyl moiety, furtherprovided that no more than 2 Ys in each A and B ring are nitro,trifluoromethyl, amino or dialkylamino, and also provided that when any Yis amino or dialkylamino, then any dissimilar Y is hydrogen, fluoro,chloro, bromo, alkyl or alkoxy, andeach Y   is independently hydrogen, fluoro, chloro, bromo or alkyl of 1 to4 carbon atoms, ora pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.2. A compound of claim 1 in which n is 6 to 10.3. A compound of claim 2 in which each of R and R.sub.1 is hydrogen.4. The compound of claim 3 which isN,N -Bis(7-chloro-4-quinazolinyl)-1,9-nonanediamine.5. The compound of claim 3 which isN,N -Bis(7-trifluoromethyl-4-quinazolinyl)-1,9-nonanediamine.6. The compound of claim 3 which isN,N -Bis(6,8-dichloro-4-quinazolinyl)-1,9-nonanediamine.7. A compound of claim 1 in which n is 7."}
{"WKU":"039311805","Title":"Substituted 6-hydroxy pyrimidines","App_Date":"1974-03-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Herbert Muhle;Karlheinz Milzner;Fritz Reisser","Assignee":"Sandoz Ltd., (Sandoz AG)","ICL_Class":"C07D23900","References":"2754243;3287453;3591589;3862188","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A compound of the formula:##SPC6##whereinR.sub.1 is alkyl (C.sub.1 -C.sub.6) or cycloalkyl (C.sub.3 -C.sub.8),R.sub.2 is hydrogen, alkyl (C.sub.1 -C.sub.6) or alkenyl-(C.sub.2 -C.sub.6)andR.sub.3 is a radical --NR.sub.4 R.sub.5"}
{"WKU":"039311813","Title":"2,4-Diamino-5-benzylpyrimidines","App_Date":"1974-07-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ivan Kompis;Gerald Rey-Bellet;Guido Zanetti","Assignee":"Hoffmann-La Roche Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07D23900","References":"3341541;3644364","Claims":"We claim:1. A compound of the formula##SPC17##wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2, individually, are lower alkyl of 1 to 4 carbonatoms or lower alkenyl of 2 to 3 carbon atoms; Z is an oxygen atom bondedto one of the cyclic nitrogen atoms, n is 0 or 1, and A.sup.1 istrifluoromethyl,##EQU8##wherein R.sup.6 is oxo and R.sup.7 is hydrogen, lower alkyl of 1 to 4carbon atoms or alkoxy of 1 to 4 carbon atoms; or R.sup.6 is hydroxyiminoand R.sup.7 is lower alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms; or R.sup.6 takentogether with R.sup.7 is nitrils; R.sup.8 and R.sup.9, individually, arehydrogen or lower alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms; and R.sup.10 is hydroxy,lower alkoxy of 1 to 4 carbon atoms or --N(R.sup.3)(R.sup.4), whereinR.sup.3 and R.sup.4, individually, are hydrogen, lower alkyl of 1 to 4carbon atoms or lower alkanoyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms; or R.sup.9 andR.sup.10, individually, are lower alkoxy of 1 to 4 carbon atoms or loweralkylthio of 1 to 4 carbon atoms; or R.sup.9 taken together with R.sup.10are lower alkylenedioxy of 2 to 3 carbon atoms or lower alkylenedithio of2 to 3 carbon atoms; or a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition saltthereof.2. A compound in accordance with claim 1, wherein n is 0, R.sup.6 is oxoand R.sup.7 is hydrogen, lower alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms or loweralkoxy of 1 to 4 carbon atoms; R.sup.8 and R.sup.9, individually, arehydrogen or lower alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and R.sup.10 is hydroxy,lower alkoxy of 1 to 4 carbon atoms or N(R.sup.3)(R.sup.4), whereinR.sup.3 and R.sup.4, individually, are hydrogen, lower alkyl of 1 to 4carbon atoms or lower alkanoyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms.3. A compound in accordance with claim 1, wherein n is 0, R.sup.6 is oxoand R.sup.7 is hydrogen, lower alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms or loweralkoxy of 1 to 4 carbon atoms; R.sup.9 and R.sup.10, individually, arelower alkoxy of 1 to 4 carbon atoms or lower alkylthio of 1 to 4 carbonatoms.4. A compound in accordance with claim 1, wherein n is 0, R.sup.6 is oxoand R.sup.7 is hydrogen, lower alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms or loweralkoxy of 1 to 4 carbon atoms; R.sup.9, taken together with R.sup.10, arelower alkylenedioxy of 2 to 3 carbon atoms or lower alkylenedithio of 2 to3 carbon atoms.5. A compound in accordance with claim 1, wherein n is 0, R.sup.6 is oxoand R.sup.7 is hydrogen, lower alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms or loweralkoxy of 1 to 4 carbon atoms.6. A compound in accordance with claim 1, wherein n is 0, R.sup.6 ishydroxyimino and R.sup.7 is lower alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms; R.sup.8and R.sup.9, individually, are hydrogen or lower alkyl of 1 to 4 carbonatoms, and R.sup.10 is hydroxy, lower alkoxy of 1 to 4 carbon atoms orN(R.sup.3)(R.sup.4), wherein R.sup.3 and R.sup.4, individually, arehydrogen, lower alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms or lower alkanoyl of 1 to 4carbon atoms.7. A compound in accordance with claim 1, wherein n is 0, R.sup.6 ishydroxyimino and R.sup.7 is lower alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms; R.sup.9and R.sup.10, individually, are lower alkoxy of 1 to 4 carbon atoms orlower alkylthio of 1 to 4 carbon atoms.8. A compound in accordance with claim 1, wherein n is 0, R.sup.6 ishydroxyimino and R.sup.7 is lower alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms; R.sup.9,taken together with R.sup.10, are lower alkylenedioxy of 2 to 3 carbonatoms or lower alkylenedithio of 2 to 3 carbon atoms.9. A compound in accordance with claim 1, wherein n is 0; R.sup.6 ishydroxyimino, R.sup.7 is lower alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms and R.sup.8 ishydrogen.10. A compound in accordance with claim 1, wherein A.sup.1 istrifluoromethyl.11. A compound in accordance with claim 1, wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 arelower alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms and A.sup.1 is C-mono-alkylated ordialkylated hydroxymethyl wherein each alkyl is of 1 to 4 carbon atoms.12. A compound in accordance with claim 1,.alpha.-(2,4-diamino-5-pyrimidinyl)-2,6-dimethoxy-p-toluic acid isopropylester.13. A compound in accordance with claim 1,.alpha.-(2,4-diamino-5-pyrimidinyl)-2,6-dimethoxy-p-toluic acid methylester.14. A compound in accordance with claim 1,.alpha.-(2,4-diamino-5-pyrimidinyl)-2,6-dimethoxy-p-toluic acid.15. A compound in accordance with claim 1,.alpha.-(2,4-diamino-5-pyrimidinyl)-2,6-diethoxy-p-toluic acid ethylester.16. A compound in accordance with claim 1,ethyl-.alpha.-(2,4-diamino-5-pyrimidinyl)-2,6-dimethoxy-p-toluate.17. A compound in accordance with claim 1,4 -[(2,4-diamino-5-pyrimidinyl)-methyl]-2 ,6 -diethoxy-acetophenone.18. A compound in accordance with claim 1,4 -[(2,4-diamino-5-pyrimidinyl)-methyl]-2 ,6 -dimethoxy-acetophenone.19. A compound in accordance with claim 1,4-[(2,4-diamino-5-pyrimidinyl)-methyl]-2,6-dimethoxy-.alpha.-methylbenzylalcohol.20. A compound in accordance with claim 1,2,4-diamino-5-[3,5-dimethoxy-4-(methoxymethyl)-benzyl]pyrimidine.21. A compound in accordance with claim 1,4-[(2,4-diamino-5-pyrimidinyl)-methyl]-2,6-dimethoxy-.alpha.,.alpha.-dimethylbenzyl)alcohol."}
{"WKU":"039311821","Title":"Lactones of the diazaxanthene series, their production and their use as","App_Date":"1974-07-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hellmut Kast;Guenter Dunkelmann","Assignee":"BASF Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07D23900","References":"","Claims":"We claim:1. A lactone of the diazaxanthene series of the formula:##SPC6##in whichR.sup.1 is hydrogen or alkyl of one to three carbon atoms;R.sup.2 is phenyl; or phenyl monosubstituted by alkyl of one to threecarbon atoms, chloro or bromo;R.sup.3 and R.sup.4 independently of one another are each alkyl of one tosix carbon atoms per alkyl or alkoxyalkyl of two to twelve carbon atoms;or R.sup.3 and R.sup.4 together with the nitrogen form a piperidino group,a pyrrolidino group or a N.sup.1 -methylpiperazino group;R.sup.5 is hydrogen or alkyl of one to three carbon atoms;Y is hydrogen or chloro;Z is hydrogen or chloro; or Z is nitro or alkyl of one to three carbonatoms when Y is hydrogen; andn is one of the integers 1, 2 and 3.2. A lactone of the diazaxanthene series of the formula##SPC7##in whichR.sup.2.sup.  is phenyl, o-tolyl, p-tolyl, o-chlorophenyl orp-chlorophenyl;R.sup.3.sup.  and R.sup.4.sup.  independently of one another are eachmethyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;R.sup.5.sup.  is hydrogen or methyl;Y is hydrogen or chloro;Z is hydrogen or chloro; or Z is hydrogen, nitro or methyl when Y ishydrogen; andn is 3.3. A lactone as claimed in claim 2, whereinR.sup.2.sup.  is phenyl, o-tolyl, p-tolyl, o-chlorophenyl orp-chlorophenyl;R.sup.3.sup.  and R.sup.4.sup.  are methyl, ethyl, propyl or butyl;R.sup.5.sup.  is methyl andZ and Y are hydrogen.4. A lactone of the diazaxanthene series of the formula##SPC8##in whichR.sup.2.sup.  is phenyl, o-tolyl, p-tolyl, o-chlorophenyl orp-chlorophenyl; and##EQU3##is piperidino, pyrrolidino or N -methyl-piperazino.5. A compound as claimed in claim 3 having the formula##SPC9##6. A compound as claimed in claim 3 having the formula##SPC10##7. A compound as claimed in claim 4 having the formula##SPC11##"}
{"WKU":"039311830","Title":"1-Substituted-2-disubstitutedamino-pyrido[2,3-D]pyrimidin-4(1H)-ones","App_Date":"1974-07-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Goetz E. Hardtmann","Assignee":"Sandoz Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07D23900","References":"3794637","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A compound of the formula##SPC8##whereinR.sub.1 is alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms, alkenyl of 3 to 8 carbon atoms orphenalkyl of the formula:##EQU6##n is 0 to 1 R  is hydrogen or methyl,R.sub.2 and R.sub.3 are independently alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms oralkenyl of 3 to 6 carbon atoms,R  is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 3 carbon atoms, andY and Y  are independently hydrogen, fluoro, chloro, alkyl of 1 to 3 carbonatoms or alkoxy of 1 to 3 carbon atoms or one is hydrogen and the otherbromo or trifluoromethyl.2. A compound of claim 1 in which R.sub.1 is alkyl.3. A compound of claim 2 in which R  is hydrogen.4. A compound of claim 1 in which each of R.sub.2 and R.sub.3 is alkyl.5. A compound of claim 1 in which R.sub.1 is##EQU7##6. A compound of claim 5 in which R  is hydrogen, n is 0, Y is hydrogen,fluoro, chloro or bromo and Y  is hydrogen, fluoro or chloro, with theproviso that Y  is hydrogen when Y is bromo.7. A compound of claim 6 in which R  is hydrogen.8. A compound of claim 5 in which each of R.sub.2 and R.sub.3 is alkyl.9. A compound of claim 7 in which each of R.sub.2 and R.sub.3 is methyl.10. The compound of claim 9 which is1-(4 -fluorobenzyl)-2-dimethylamino-pyrido[2,3-d]pyrimidin-4(1H)-one."}
{"WKU":"039311848","Title":"Purification method for prolyl-leucylglycinamide","App_Date":"1974-10-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Charles George Lex","Assignee":"Abbott Laboratories","ICL_Class":"C07C10352;C07G  700","References":"3708593;3795738","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. The process of purifying the crude tripeptideL-prolyl-L-leucylglycinamide consisting essentially in dissolving 1 partby weight of said tripeptide in at least about 3 parts by volume ofmethanol, adding at least 12 parts by volume of diethyl ether to saidsolution, and crystallizing said tripeptide at a temperature of 0.degree.- 25.degree. C.2. The process of claim 1 wherein 3 - 4 parts by volume of methanol areused to dissolve one part by weight of said tripeptide and said solutionis filtered before adding said ether."}
{"WKU":"039311856","Title":"1-Phenyl-2,2,4,4-C.sub.1 -C.sub.2 alkyl-3-[4-(phenyl or","App_Date":"1973-11-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Manfred Kleemann;Joachim Kahling;Gerhart Griss;Rudolf Hurnaus","Assignee":"Boehringer Ingelheim GmbH","ICL_Class":"C07D29512","References":"","Claims":"We claim:1. A compound of the formula##SPC11##wherein R.sub.1  is hydrogen, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, hydroxyl,trifluoromethyl, benzyloxy, alkyl of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, alkoxy of 1 to 3carbon atoms, benzyloxy, acetoxy, benzoyloxy, isobutyryloxy, phenyl orcyclohexyl,R.sub.2 and R.sub.3 are each hydrogen, methyl or methoxy, or any two ofR.sub.1, R.sub.2 and R.sub.3 taken together are methylenedioxy,R.sub.4 is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 2 carbon atoms,R.sub.5 is hydrogen or methyl, andR.sub.6 is##SPC12##where R.sub.7 and R.sub.8 are each hydrogen, fluorine, chlorine, bromine,trifluoromethyl, hydroxyl, nitro, benzyloxy, alkyl or 1 to 2 carbon atoms,alkoxy of 1 to 3 carbon atoms, methylthio, acetoxy, benzoyloxy orisobutyryloxy, andR.sub.9 is hydrogen, chlorine, bromine, hydroxyl, nitro, amino, benzyloxy,carboxy, carbomethoxy, carbethoxy, methyl, methoxy or acetoxy,provided however, that only one of R.sub.1, R.sub.7, R.sub.8 and R.sub.9 isacetoxy, benzoyloxy or isobutyryloxy; a physiologically compatible acidaddition salt thereof; or, when R.sub.9 is carboxy, a physiologically2. A cyclobutane derivative of claim 1 wherein the transconfiguration is3. A trans-cyclobutane derivative of claim 2, wherein R.sub.1, R.sub.2 ,R.sub.3 and R.sub.5 are hydrogen, R.sub.4 is methyl, and R.sub.6 is4. A trans-cyclobutane derivative of claim 3, which istrans-1-(4-isopropylphenyl)-2,2,4,4-tetramethyl-3-[4-(pyridyl-2)-piperazinyl]-cyclobutanol-(1) or a physiologically compatible acid addition salt5. A trans-cyclobutane derivative of claim 3, which istrans-1-(4-isopropylphenyl)-2,2,4,4-tetramethyl-3-(4-phenyl-piperazinyl)-cyclobutanol-(1) or a physiologically compatible acid addition salt thereof.6. A trans-cyclobutane derivative of claim 3, which istrans-1-(4-chlorophenyl)-2,2,4,4-tetramethyl-3-[4-(pyridyl-2)-piperazinyl]-cyclobutanol-(1) or a physiologically compatible acid addition salt7. A trans-cyclobutane derivative of claim 3, which istrans-1-(4-tert.pentylphenyl)-2,2,4,4-tetramethyl-3-[4-(pyridyl-2)-piperazinyl]-cyclobutanol-(1) or a physiologically compatible acid addition salt8. A trans-cyclobutane derivative of claim 3, which istrans-D,L-1-(4-butyl-(2)-phenyl)-2,2,4,4-tetramethyl-3-[4-(pyridyl-2)-piperazinyl]-cyclobutanol-(1) or a physiologically compatible acid addition9. A trans-cyclobutane derivative of claim 3, which istrans-D,L-1-(4-butyl-(2)-phenyl)-2,2,4,4-tetramethyl-3-(4-phenyl-piperazinyl)-cyclobutanol-(1) or a physiologically compatible acid addition salt10. A trans-cyclobutane derivative of claim 3, which istrans-1-(4-hydroxyphenyl)-2,2,4,4-tetramethyl-3-[4-(pyridyl-2)-piperazinyl] -cyclobutanol-(1) or a physiologically compatible acid addition salt11. A trans-cyclobutane derivative of claim 3, which istrans-1-(4-propylphenyl)-2,2,4,4-tetramethyl-3-[4-(pyridyl-11) or aphysiologically compatible acid addition salt thereof."}
{"WKU":"039311864","Title":"Process for preparing naphtholyene arylimidazol-peri-dicarboxylic acid","App_Date":"1973-09-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Otto Fuchs;Adolf Kroh","Assignee":"Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07D47116","References":"","Claims":"1. Process for preparing naphthoylene-arylimidazolperi-dicarboxylicacid-imide-compounds of the formula##SPC8##wherein R.sub.1 is hydrogen, hydroxy or amino, phenyl, alkyl having 1 to 8carbon atoms, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl, amino-alkyl, mono- ordialkylaminoalkyl, hydroxyalkoxy-alkyl, alkoxyalkoxyalkyl,carbalkoxyalkyl, carboxylalkyl or phenyl-alkyl each having 1 to 6 carbonatoms in the alkyl or alkoxy portion and R is hydrogen or halogen, alkyl,alkoxy, carbalkoxy each having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, nitro, cyano,carbonamido, mono- or diloweralkylcarbonamide or sulfonamido, mono- ordiloweralkylsulfonamido and n represents the integers 1 to 3, in whichprocess naphthalimide-4,5-dicarboxylic acids of the formula##SPC9##are condensed in a medium consisting essentially of water at a pH of from1.5 to 4.0 with a diamine of the formula##SPC10##at temperatures of from 80.degree.to 160.degree.C, R, R and n having theabove meanings."}
{"WKU":"039311872","Title":"N-(heteroaryl-methyl)-7.alpha.-acyl-6,14-(endoetheno or","App_Date":"1973-06-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Adolf Langbein;Herbert Merz;Gerhard Walther;Klaus Stockhaus","Assignee":"Boehringer Ingelheim GmbH","ICL_Class":"C07D48912","References":"3442900;3560505;3562279;3793329","Claims":"We claim:1. A compound of the formula##SPC20##whereinR is hydrogen, methyl or acetyl,R.sub.1 is methyl, phenyl or hydrogen,Z is --CH=CH-- or --CH.sub.2 --CH.sub.2 --, andR.sub.3 is hydrogen or methyl,or a non-toxic, pharmacologically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.2. A compound of claim 1, which is of the formula##SPC21##whereinR is hydrogen, methyl or acetyl,Z is --CH=CH-- or --CH.sub.2 --CH.sub.2 --, andR.sub.3 is hydrogen or methyl,or a non-toxic, pharmacologically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.3. A compound of claim 1, which is of the formula##SPC22##whereinR.sub.1 is methyl or phenyl, andZ is --CH=CH-- or --CH.sub.2 --CH.sub.2 --,or a non-toxic, pharmacologically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.4. A compound of claim 1, which isN-furfuryl-6,14-endoetheno-7.alpha.-acetyl-tetrahydro-northebaine or anon-toxic, pharmacologically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.5. A compound of claim 1, which isN-(3 -furylmethyl)-6,14-endoetheno-7.alpha.-acetyl-tetrahydro-northebaineor a non-toxic, pharmacologically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.6. A compound of claim 1, which isN-(2 -methyl-3 -furylmethyl)-6,14-endoetheno-7.alpha.-acetyl-tetrahydro-northebaine or a non-toxic, pharmacologically acceptable acid addition saltthereof."}
{"WKU":"039311880","Title":"3-Hydroxy-5,6-benzomorphinan derivatives","App_Date":"1974-05-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James L. Douglas;Jacques Meunier;Marcel Menard","Assignee":"Bristol-Myers Company","ICL_Class":"C07D22122;C07D22128;A61K 31485","References":"3329682","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A compound having the formula##SPC20##wherein R is selected from the group consisting of##SPC21##or a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.2. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein R is the group##SPC22##3. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein R is the group##SPC23##4. The essentially pure levorotatory isomer of the compound of claim 2.5. The essentially pure dextrorotatory isomer of the compound of claim 2.6. The essentially pure levorotatory isomer of the compound of claim 3.7. The essentially pure dextrorotatory isomer of the compound of claim 3.8. The hydrochloride salt of the compound of claim 2.9. The hydrochloride salt of the compound of claim 3."}
{"WKU":"039311899","Title":"N-(heteroaryl-methyl)-6,14-(endoethano or","App_Date":"1973-06-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Adolf Langbein;Herbert Merz;Gerhard Walther;Kalus Stockhaus","Assignee":"Boehringer Ingelheim GmbH","ICL_Class":"C07D48912","References":"3285914;3442900;3793329","Claims":"We claim:1. A compound of the formula##SPC15##whereinR.sub.1 is hydrogen, methyl or acetyl,R.sub.2 is hydrogen or methyl,R.sub.3 is hydrogen, methyl, n-propyl, phenethyl or phenyl,R.sub.4 is hydrogen or methyl, andZ is --CH=CH-- or --CH.sub.2 --CH.sub.2 --, or a non-toxic,pharmacologically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.2. A compound of claim 1, which is of the formula##SPC16##whereinR.sub.2 is hydrogen or methyl,R.sub.3 is hydrogen, methyl, n-propyl, phenethyl or phenyl,R.sub.4 is hydrogen or methyl, andZ is --CH=CH-- or --CH.sub.2 --CH.sub.2 --or a non-toxic, pharmacologically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.3. A compound of claim 1, which isN-furfuryl-6,14-endoetheno-7.alpha.-(hydroxy-methyl)-tetrahydro-northebaine or a non-toxic, pharmacologically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.4. A compound of claim 1, which isN-furfuryl-6,14-endoetheno-7.alpha.-(hydroxy-methyl)-tetrahydro-nororipavine or a non-toxic, pharmacologically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.5. A compound of claim 1, which isN-furfuryl-6,14-endoetheno-7.alpha.-(1 -hydroxy-1 -methyl-ethyl)-tetrahydronororipavine or a non-toxic, pharmacologically acceptable acid additionsalt thereof.6. A compound of claim 1, which isN-(2 -methyl-3 -furylmethyl)-6,14-endoetheno-7.alpha.-(hydroxy-methyl)-tetra-hydro-nororipavine or a non-toxic, pharmacologically acceptable acidaddition salt thereof."}
{"WKU":"039311902","Title":"Preparation of 2-chloropyridine by hydrogenolysis","App_Date":"1974-03-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Roland R. Kyi","Assignee":"Olin Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07D21361","References":"3355456","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for preparing 2-chloropyridine consisting essentially ofreacting together in the liquid phase at a temperature in the range of-10.degree.C. to 100.degree.C., 2,6-dichloropyridine at least 0.25gram-atoms per mole of 2,6-dichloropyridine of a finely divided metalselected from the group consisting of zinc, iron, cobalt and aluminum andat least 0.1 part by weight per part by weight of said2,6-dichloropyridine of a base selected from the group consisting of analkali metal hydroxide and an alkaline earth metal hydroxide.2. The process of claim 1 wherein a pressure of from about 0.2 atmosphereto about 100 atmospheres is employed.3. The process of claim 2 wherein said metal is selected from the groupconsisting of zinc and iron.4. The process of claim 3 wherein said alkali metal hydroxide is selectedfrom the group consisting of sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide,lithium hydroxide, cesium hydroxide and rubidium hydroxide and saidalkaline earth metal hydroxide is selected from the group consisting ofcalcium hydroxide and magnesium hydroxide.5. The process of claim 4 wherein said metal is zinc.6. The process of claim 5 wherein said base is provided as an aqueoussolution containing up to about 75 percent by weight of said alkali metalhydroxide or said alkaline earth metal hydroxide and wherein at least 0.1part by weight of said hydroxide per part by weight of2,6-dichloropyridine is used.7. The process of claim 6 wherein said zinc metal is in the form of zincdust and said base is sodium hydroxide.8. The process of claim 7 wherein pyridine is employed as a solvent.9. The process of claim 8 wherein said reaction temperature is from about 0to about 30.degree.C, said pressure is from about 1 to about 10atmospheres, said aqueous solution contains about 10 to about 53 percentby weight of sodium hydroxide, from about 1 to about 10 parts by weight ofsaid sodium hydroxide per part by weight of 2,6-dichloropyridine is usedand at least 0.25 gram-atoms of said zinc per mole of 2,6-dichloropyridineis used."}
{"WKU":"039311910","Title":"Conversion of tetrahydropyrimidines to pyridines","App_Date":"1973-08-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Bernardus A. Oude Alink","Assignee":"Petrolite Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07D21304","References":"","Claims":"I claim:1. The process of converting a 2,3,4,5-tetrahydropyrimidine of the formula##SPC4##wherein R.sub.1, R.sub.2, R.sub.3, R.sub.4, and R.sub.5 may be the same ordifferent are hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, alkaryl, aralkyl orheterocyclic to the corresponding pyridine which comprises heating saidtetrahydropyrimidine to a temperature between 75.degree.C. and350.degree.C. sufficiently high to remove ammonia and hydrogen so as toform said pyridine.2. The process of claim 1 where a Lewis Acid catalyst is employed.3. The process of claim 2 where the Lewis Acid catalyst is an ammoniumsalt.4. The process of claim 3 where the ammonium salt is an ammonium salt of aninorganic or an organic acid.5. The process of claim 4 where the ammonium salt is ammonium chloride orammonium acetate."}
{"WKU":"039311929","Title":"Process for piperidine intermediates for quinine, quinidine and analogs","App_Date":"1974-05-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Guenter Grethe;Milan Radoje Uskokovic","Assignee":"Hoffmann-La Roche Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07D21102","References":"","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for preparing diastereomeric compounds of the formulas##SPC9##enantiomers and racemates thereof, which comprises hydrogenating a compoundof the formula##SPC10##enantiomer and racemate thereof, in an acidic medium in the presence of ahydrogenation catalyst.2. A process in accordance with claim 1, wherein the catalyst is a noblemetal."}
{"WKU":"039311937","Title":"Quinuclidine derivatives","App_Date":"1974-05-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Guenter Grethe;Milan Radoje Uskokovic","Assignee":"Hoffmann-La Roche Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07D45302","References":"","Claims":"We claim:1. A racemic epimer of the formula##SPC9##wherein R.sub.3 is lower alkyl.2. An epimer in accordance with claim 1, racemic4,5-erythro-5-ethylquinuclidine-2 .xi.-carboxylic acid ethyl ester.3. An epimer in accordance with claim 1, racemic4,5-erythro-5-ethylquinuclidine-2 .xi.-carboxylic acid methyl ester.4. A racemic epimer of the formula##SPC10##5. A racemic epimer in accordance with claim 4,4,5-erythro-5-ethylquinuclidine-2 .xi.-carboxylic acid."}
{"WKU":"039311945","Title":"2-Heteroaryl-methyl)-5,9.beta.-dialkyl-6,7-benzomorphans and salts","App_Date":"1973-06-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Herbert Merz;Adolf Langbein;Klaus Stockhaus;Helmut Wick","Assignee":"Boehringer Ingelheim GmbH","ICL_Class":"C07D22126","References":"2924603;3823150","Claims":"We claim:1. A racemic or optically active compound of the formula##SPC23##wherein R is hydrogen, methyl or acetyl,R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are each alkyl of 1 to 3 carbon atoms,R.sub.3 is hydrogen or methyl, andY is oxygen or sulfur,or a non-toxic, pharmacologically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.2. A compound of claim 1, whereinR is hydrogen, methyl or acetyl,R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are each methyl or ethyl,R.sub.3 is hydrogen or methyl, andY is oxygen,or a non-toxic, pharmacologically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.3. A compound of claim 1, whereinR is hydrogen,R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are each methyl or ethyl,R.sub.3 is hydrogen or methyl, andY is oxygen,or a non-toxic, pharmacologically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.4. A compound of claim 1, whereinR is hydrogen,R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are methyl,R.sub.3 is hydrogen, andY is sulfur,or a non-toxic, pharmacologically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.5. A compound of claim 3, which is2-(3 -methylfurfuryl)-2 -hydroxy-5,9.beta.-dimethyl-6,7-benzomorphan or anon-toxic, pharmacologically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.6. A compound of claim 3, which is2-(3 -furylmethyl)-2 -hydroxy-5,9.beta.-dimethyl-6,7-benzomorphan or anon-toxic, pharmacologically acceptable acid addition salt thereof."}
{"WKU":"039311953","Title":"Substituted piperidines","App_Date":"1973-07-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Stanley J. Dykstra;Joseph L. Minielli","Assignee":"Mead Johnson & Company","ICL_Class":"C07D21108","References":"2686784;2780577;3192213","Claims":"What is claimed:1. A compound selected from the group consisting of substituted piperidineshaving Formula I and Formula XII##SPC22####SPC23##whereinR.sup.1 represents hydrogen;R.sup.2 represents hydrogen or methylenedioxy attached in the benzenoid4,5-position;R.sup.3 represents hydrogen or methyl;R.sup.4 represents hydrogen;R.sup.5 is cinnamoyl or##SPC24##whereinR.sup.7 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, chlorine,dimethylamino, alkylthio of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms inclusive, alkyl offrom 1 to 4 carbon atoms inclusive, methoxy, 3,4-dimethoxy, 3,5-dimethoxy,and 3,4,5-trimethoxy;R.sup.8 represents lower alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms inclusive;R.sup.9 is selected from the group consisting of cinnamoyl or##SPC25##whereinR.sup.10 is methoxy;"}
{"WKU":"039311961","Title":"Phosphinolines and phosphindolines","App_Date":"1973-02-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John Melvin Swan","Assignee":"Monash University","ICL_Class":"C07F  953","References":"3442948;3505404;3632649","Claims":"I claim:1. A compound of the formula##EQU8##wherein n is 0 or 1; X is O or S; R.sup.3 is hydrogen or methyl; R.sup.5is hydrogen or methyl, or may be bound to R.sup.13 to form a morpholino,piperidino or pyrrolidino ring; R.sup.7 is hydrogen or hydroxy; R.sup.11and R.sup.12 are hydrogen; R.sup.13 is methyl, or R.sup.13 and R.sup.5 maybe joined together as above stated to form a morpholino, piperidino, orpyrrolidino ring.2. The compound1-(2-N,N-dimethylaminoethyl)-1-oxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydrophosphinoline.3. The compound1-(2-N,N-dimethylaminoethyl)-1-thio-1,2,3,4-tetrahydrophosphinoline.4. The compound 1-(2-N,N-dimethylaminoethyl)phosphindoline 1-oxide.5. The compound 1-(2,N,N-dimethylaminoethyl)phosphindoline 1-sulphide.6. The compound1-(2-pyrrolidinoethyl)-1-oxo-1,2,3,4-tetrahydrophosphinoline.7. The compound1-(2-pyrrolidinoethyl)-1-thio-1,2,3,4-tetrahydrophosphinoline.8. The compound1-(2-piperidinoethyl)-1-thio-1,2,3,4-tetrahydrophosphinoline."}
{"WKU":"039311970","Title":"Substituted piperidine derivatives","App_Date":"1974-02-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Albert A. Carr;C. Richard Kinsolving","Assignee":"Richardson-Merrell Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07D21122","References":"3438991;3806526;3829433","Claims":"We claim:1. A compound selected from a base of the formula##SPC8##wherein R.sup.1 is selected from the group consisting of cyclohexyl,phenyl, and a substituted phenyl ring wherein the substituent on thesubstituted phenyl ring is attached at the ortho, meta, or para positionof the phenyl ring and is selected from the group consisting of halogen, astraight or branched lower alkyl group of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and alower alkoxy group of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms; R.sup.2 is selected fromthe group consisting of hydrogen or hydroxy; R.sup.3 represents hydrogen;or R.sup.2 and R.sup.3 taken together form a second bond between thecarbon atoms bearing R.sup.2 and R.sup.3 ; n is an integer of from 1 to 3;Z is selected from the group consisting of thienyl, naphthyl, phenyl or asubstituted phenyl ring wherein the substituent on the substituted phenylring is attached at the ortho, meta or para position of the phenyl ringand is selected from the group consisting of halogen, a straight orbranched alkyl group of from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group of from1 to 6 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group of from 3 to 6 carbon atoms,di(lower)alkylamino, or a saturated monocyclic heterocyclic group selectedfrom the group consisting of pyrrolidino, piperidino, morpholino, andN-(lower)alkylpiperazino with the proviso that when R.sup.1 is phenyl, Zis naphthyl or a substituted phenyl ring wherein the substituent on thesubstituted phenyl ring is attached at the ortho, meta or para position ofthe phenyl ring and is selected from the group consisting of a straight orbranched alkyl group of 5 or 6 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group of 5 or 6carbon atoms and a cycloalkyl group of from 3 to 6 carbon atoms; andpharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts thereof.2. A compound of claim 1 wherein R.sup.1 is phenyl.3. A compound of claim 2 wherein R.sup.2 is hydroxy.4. A compound of claim 3 which is4-[4-(.alpha.-hydroxy-.alpha.-phenylbenzyl)piperidino]-1-(2-naphthyl)butan-1-one or a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.5. A compound of claim 3 which is4 -cyclopentyl-4]4-(.alpha.-hydroxy-.alpha.-phenylbenzyl)piperidino]butyrophenone or a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.6. A compound of claim 3 which is4-[4-.alpha.-hydroxy-.alpha.-phenylbenzyl)piperidino]-4 -neopentylbutyrophenone or a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.7. A compound of claim 1 wherein R.sup.1 is a substituted phenyl ring.8. A compound of claim 7 wherein R.sup.2 is hydroxy.9. A compound of claim 8 which is4 -tert-butyl-4-[4-[.alpha.-hydroxy-.alpha.-(p-tolyl)benzyl]piperidino]butyrophenone or a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.10. A compound of claim 8 which is4 -tert-butyl-4-[4-[.alpha.-hydroxy-.alpha.-(p-chlorophenyl)benzyl]piperidino]butyrophenone or a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition saltthereof.11. A compound of claim 8 which is4 -tert-butyl-4-[4-[.alpha.-hydroxy-.alpha.-(o-anisyl)benzyl]piperidino]butyrophenone or a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.12. A compound of claim 8 which is4 -fluoro-4-[4-[.alpha.-hydroxy-.alpha.-(p-chlorophenyl)benzyl]piperidino]butyrophenone or a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.13. A compound of claim 7 wherein R.sup.2 and R.sup.3 taken together form asecond bond between the carbon atoms bearing R.sup.2 and R.sup.3.14. A compound of claim 13 which is4 -tert-butyl-4-[4-[.alpha.-(p-tolyl)benzylidene]piperidino]butyrophenoneor a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof."}
{"WKU":"039311988","Title":"2-Amino-5-spiro substituted oxazoline-4-one compounds","App_Date":"1973-02-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Michael Raymond Harnden","Assignee":"Abbott Laboratories","ICL_Class":"C07D21118","References":"","Claims":"I claim:1. A compound of the formula##SPC7##wherein Z is C.sub.4 to C.sub.8 cycloalkyl, 3-methylcyclohexyl,4-methylcyclohexyl, 3,4,5-trimethylcyclohexyl, 4-piperidyl,1,2,6-trimethyl-4-piperidyl, N-isopropyl-4-piperidyl, orN-(2-phenethyl)-4-piperidyl.2. A compound in accordance with claim 1, said compound being2-amino-7,8,9-trimethyl-1-oxa-3,8-diazaspiro [4.5]dec-2-en-4-one.3. A compound in accordance with claim 1, said compound being2-amino-1-oxa-3,8-diazaspior[4,5]dec-2-en-4-one.4. A compound in accordance with claim 1, said compound being2-amino-7-methyl-1-oxa-3-azaspiro[4.5]dec-2-en-4-one."}
{"WKU":"039311996","Title":"Benzopyrano and benzothiopyrano [2,3-6] pyridines","App_Date":"1974-03-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Michio Nakanishi;Takanori Oe;Mineo Tsuruda","Assignee":"Yoshitomi Pharmaceutical Industries, Ltd.","ICL_Class":"C07D49108;C07D51308","References":"3803153","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A member selected from the group consisting of chemical compounds of theformula:##SPC19##wherein A is a carbonyl group; B is an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom; eachof R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 is a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl grouphaving 1 to 4 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, aphenyl group or a substituted phenyl group, the substituent being selectedfrom the group consisting of a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 4carbon atoms and an alkoxy group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms; X is an alkylgroup having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having 3 to 6 carbonatoms or OM (wherein  M is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 4carbon atoms, a metal atom or NH.sub.4); and ring P represents a pyridinering.2. A compound of claim 1:7-acetyl-5-oxo-5H-[1]benzopyrano[2,3-b]pyridine.3. A compound of claim 1:7-isobutyryl-5-oxo-5H-[1]benzopyrano[2,3-b]pyridine.4.  A compound of claim 1:7-acetyl-2-methyl-5-oxo-5H-[1]benzopyrano[2,3-b]pyridine.5. A compound of claim 1:7-acetyl-2-phenyl-5-oxo-5H-[1]benzopyrano[2,3-b]pyridine.6. A compound of claim 1:5-oxo-5H-[1]benzopyrano[2,3-b]pyridine-7-carboxylic acid.7. A compound of claim 1:sodium 5-oxo-5H-[1]benzopyrano[2,3-b]pyridine-7-carboxylate.8. A compound of claim 1:9-chloro-5-oxo-5H-[1]benzopyrano[2,3-b]pyridine-7-carboxylic acid.9. A compound of claim 1:9-methyl-5-oxo-5H-[1]benzopyrano[2,3-b]pyridine-7-carboxylic acid.10. A compound of claim 1:sodium 2-phenyl-5-oxo-5H-[1]benzopyrano[2,3-b]pyridine-7-carboxylate.11. A compound of claim 1:5-oxo-5H-[1]benzothiopyrano[2,3-b]pyridine-7-carboxylic acid."}
{"WKU":"039312003","Title":"Substituted pyridinylalkoxy-, pyridinylalkylsulfonyl- and","App_Date":"1974-01-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Alin H. Gulbenk","Assignee":"The Dow Chemical Company","ICL_Class":"C07D21375","References":"3748356","Claims":"I claim:1. A compound of the formula:##SPC9##whereinT is##EQU8##each X independently represents bromo, chloro, fluoro, or iodo; each X independently represents trichloromethyl, NH.sub.2, trifluoromethyl,methyl, methylthio or methoxy;n represents an integer of 0 to 4, inclusive;each q independently represents an integer of 0 to 2, inclusive;each p independently represents an integer of 0 or 1;r represents an integer of 4 or 5;each R.sup.1 is hydrogen or methyl;Y is a chalcogen of atomic number 8 to 16, inclusive or --SO.sub.2 ;Q is methyl, ethyl or halo;Z is a chalcogen of atomic number 8 to 16, inclusive;R.sup.2 represents hydrogen, alkyl of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, inclusiveor alkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, inclusive; andR.sup.3 represents alkyl of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, inclusive.2. The compound of claim 1 wherein q is at least one and n is zero.3. The compound of claim 1 wherein n is at least one and q is zero.4. The compound of claim 1 wherein n is 1, R.sup.1 is hydrogen and X issubstituted in the 6-ring position.5. The compound of claim 1 wherein T is##EQU9##6. The compound of claim 5 wherein q is at least one and n is zero.7. The compound of claim 5 wherein n is at least one and q is zero.8. The compound of claim 5 wherein n is 1, R.sup.1 is hydrogen and X issubstituted in the 6-ring position.9. The compound of claim 5 which isN -(4-((6-chloro-2-pyridinyl)methoxy)phenyl)-N,N-dimethylurea.10. The compound of claim 5 which isN,N-dimethyl-N -(4-((2-pyridinylmethyl)thio)phenyl)urea.11. The compound of claim 5 which isN,N-dimethyl-N -(4-(2-pyridinylmethoxy)phenyl)urea.12. The compound of claim 5 which isN -(4-((6-chloro-2-pyridinyl)methyl)thio)phenyl-N,N-dimethylthiourea.13. The compound of claim 5 which isN -(4-((6-methyl-2-pyridinyl)methoxy)phenyl)-N,N-dimethylurea,14. The compound of claim 5 which isN -(4-((6-methyl-2-pyridinyl)methyl)thio)phenyl-N,N-dimethylurea.15. The compound of claim 5 which isN -(4-((4-amino-3,5,6-trichloro-2-pyridinyl)methoxy)phenyl)-N,N-dimethylthiourea.16. The compound of claim 5 which isN -(4-(((6-iodo-2-pyridinyl)methoxy)-3-chlorophenyl)-N-butylurea-1-oxide.17. The compound of claim 5 which isN -(4-((6-bromo-2-pyridinyl)methyl)thio)-3-methylphenyl)-N,N-dibutylthiourea.18. The compound of claim 5 which isN -(4-((6-fluoro-2-pyridinyl)-1-methylmethoxy)-3-bromophenyl)urea-1-oxide.19. The compound of claim 1 wherein T is##EQU10##20. The compound of claim 19 wherein q is at least one and n is zero.21. The compound of claim 19 wherein n is at least one and q is zero.22. The compound of claim 19 wherein n is 1, R.sup.1 is hydrogen and X issubstituted in the 6-ring position."}
{"WKU":"039312011","Title":"Substituted pyridinyloxy(thio)phenyl -acetamides, -ureas and urea","App_Date":"1974-01-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Howard Johnston","Assignee":"The Dow Chemical Company","ICL_Class":"C07D21302","References":"3060235;3412098;3429689;3530138;3576616;3637720","Claims":"I claim:1. A compound corresponding to the formula:##SPC9##wherein:each p independently represents an integer of 0 or 1;each X independently represents bromo, chloro, iodo or fluoro;m represents an integer of 0 to 4, inclusive;each Y independently represents nitro, ZR.sup.3, --C(X ).sub.3 or##EQU11##n represents an integer of 0 to 2, inclusive; each Z independentlyrepresents oxygen or sulfur;Q represents methyl, ethyl, halo, nitro or trifluoromethyl;each X  independently represents hydrogen or halo;R.sup.1 represents hydrogen, alkyl of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms or alkoxy offrom 1 to 4 carbon atoms;R.sup.2 represents alkyl of from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or##SPC10##R.sup.3 represents alkyl of from 1 to 3 carbon atoms;R.sup.4 and R.sup.5 each independently represent hydrogen or alkyl of from1 to 4 carbon atoms; andeach R.sup.6 represents halo or alkyl of from 1 to 3 carbon atoms.2. The compound of claim 1 wherein n is 0 and m is at least 1.3. The compound of claim 1 wherein m is 0 and n is at least 1.4. The compound of claim 1 wherein the sum of n + m is one and X or Y issubstituted on the 6-ring position.5. The compound of claim 1 wherein m is 1, n is 0, X is substituted in the6-ring position of the pyridine moiety.6. The compound of claim 1 wherein m is 0, n is 1 and Y is substituted inthe 6-ring position of the pyridine moiety.7. The compound of claim 1 wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 each representalkyl.8. The compound of claim 1 wherein R.sup.1 is alkoxy and R.sup.2 is alkyl.9. The compound of claim 1 which isN -(4-((6-(trifluoromethyl)-2-pyridinyl)oxy)phenyl)-N,N-dimethyl urea.10. The compound of claim 1 which isN -(4-((6-chloro-2-pyridinyl)oxy)phenyl)-N-methoxy-N-methyl urea.11. The compound of claim 1 which isN -(4-((6-chloro-2-pyridinyl)oxy)phenyl)-N,N-dimethyl urea.12. The compound of claim 1 which isN -(4-((6-chloro-2-pyridinyl)thio)phenyl)-N-methoxy-N-methyl urea.13. The compound of claim 1 which isN-methoxy-N-methyl-N -((6-trifluoromethyl)-2-pyridinyl)oxy)phenyl) urea.14. The compound of claim 1 which isN -(4-((6-bromo-2-pyridinyl)oxy)phenyl)-N,N-dimethyl urea."}
{"WKU":"039312020","Title":"Pyridyl phenyl-carbamate rodenticides","App_Date":"1974-06-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"J. Edgar Ware, Jr.;Edward E. Kilbourn;David L. Peardon","Assignee":"Rohm and Haas Company","ICL_Class":"C07D21375","References":"2681879;3284461;3428642;3584000;3676457","Claims":"We claim:1. A compund having the formula:##SPC3##wherein X is selected from the group consisting of --NO.sub.2, --CN,--CF.sub.3, --SR, --SOR, --SO.sub.2 R, and --SO.sub.2 NH.sub.2 wherein Ris lower alkyl.2. A compound of claim 1 wherein X is --NO.sub.2.3. A compound of claim 1 wherein X is --CN.4. A compound of claim 1 wherein X is --CF.sub.3.5. A compound of claim 1 wherein X is --SR, R being lower alkyl.6. A compound of claim 6 wherein X is --SCH.sub.3 .7. A compound of claim 1 wherein X is --SO.sub.n R wherein n may be 1 or 2and R is lower alkyl.8. A compound of claim 7 wherein R is methyl and n is 1.9. A compound of claim 7 wherein R is methyl and n is 2.10. A compound of claim 7 wherein R is ethyl and n is 1.11. A compound of claim 1 wherein X is --SO.sub.2 NH.sub.2.12. A compound of claim 1 in the form of a strong acid salt thereof."}
{"WKU":"039312038","Title":"3-Pyridylmethyl aryl urea rodenticides","App_Date":"1974-04-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Edward E. Kilbourn;David L. Peardon;J. Edgar Ware","Assignee":"Rohm and Haas Company","ICL_Class":"C07D21375","References":"3700678","Claims":"We claim:1. A compound, or an acid addition salt thereof, having the formula##EQU2##wherein Aryl is##SPC3##wherein X is selected from the group consisting of --NO.sub.2, --CN,CF.sub.3, --C(O)R.sub.1 wherein R.sub.1 is alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms.2. A compound according to claim 1 wherein Aryl is##SPC4##3. A compound according to claim 2 wherein X is --NO.sub.2.4. A compound according to claim 2 wherein X is --CN.5. A compound according to claim 2 wherein X is --C(O)CH.sub.2 CH.sub.2CH.sub.3.6. The compound according to claim 3 wherein the acid addition salt is thehydrochloride.7. The compound according to claim 4 wherein the acid addition salt is thehydrochloride.8. The compound according to claim 5 wherein the acid addition salt is thehydrochloride."}
{"WKU":"039312046","Title":"Thieno[3,4-d]pyrimidines","App_Date":"1974-01-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Paul Croisier","Assignee":"U.C.B. Societe Anonyme","ICL_Class":"C07D23900","References":"3272811;3850919","Claims":"I claim:1. A compound selected from the group consisting ofa. thieno[3,4-d]pyrimidines of the formula:##SPC11##wherein R.sub.1 is a member selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,chloro, alkyl, alkoxy, alkylamino, and phenylamino, all the alkyl groupshaving 1 to 7 carbon atoms, the alkoxy group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms."}
{"WKU":"039312054","Title":"Substituted alkanoic acids and derivatives","App_Date":"1973-07-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Michio Nakanishi;Takanori Oe;Mineo Tsuruda","Assignee":"Yoshitomi Pharmaceutical Industries, Ltd.","ICL_Class":"C07D47100","References":"3429889;3514464;3583997;3787424","Claims":"1.  A compound selected from the group consisting of##SPC24##wherein each of X.sup.1 and X.sup.2 is a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, analkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms or an alkoxy group having 1 to 4carbon atoms; each of R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 is a hydrogen atom or an alkylgroup having 1 to 4 carbon atoms; A is carbonyl, methylene or alkylidenehaving 2 to 4 carbon atoms; Y is --O--; and ring P represents a pyridineor pyridine N-oxide ring; and a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.2. A compound of claim 1:5H-[1]benzopyrano[2,3-b]pyridin-7-yl-acetic acid.3. A compound of claim 1:2-(5H-[1]benzopyrano[2,3-b]pyridin-7-yl)propionic acid.4. A compound of claim 1:2-(5H-[1]benzopyrano[2,3-b]pyridin-9-yl)propionic acid.5. A compound of claim 1:2-(5H-[1]benzopyrano[2,3-b]pyridin-7-yl)butyric acid.6. A compound of claim 1:2-(5H-[1]benzopyrano[2,3-b]pyridin-7-yl)isobutyric acid.7. A compound of claim 1:2-(2-methyl-5H-[1]benzopyrano[2,3-b]pyridin-7-yl)propionic acid.8. A compound of claim 1:2-(9-chloro-5H-[1]benzopyrano[2,3-b]pyridin-7-yl)propionic acid.9. A compound of claim 1:2-(5H-[1]benzopyrano[2,3-b]pyridin-7-yl)propionic acid N-oxide.10. A compound of claim 1:5-oxo-5H-[1]benzopyrano[2,3-b]pyridin-7-yl-acetic acid.11. A compound of claim 1:2-(5-oxo-5H-[1]benzopyrano[2,3-b]pyridin-7-yl)propionic acid.12. A compound of claim 1:2-(5-oxo-5H-[1]benzopyrano[2,3-b]pyridin-9-yl)propionic acid.13. A compound of claim 1:2-(5-oxo-5H-[1]benzopyrano[2,3-b]pyridin-7-yl)butyric acid.14. A compound of claim 1:2-(5-oxo-5H-[1]benzopyrano[2,3-b]pyridin-7-yl)isobutyric acid.15. A compound of claim 1;10-oxo-10H-[1]benzopyrano[3,2-c]pyridin-8-yl-acetic acid.16. a compound of claim 1:2-(2-methyl-5-oxo-5H-[1]benzopyrano[2,3-b]pyridin-7-yl)propionic acid.17. A compound of claim 1:2-(5-oxo-5H-[1]benzopyrano[2,3-b]pyridin-7-yl)propionic acid N-oxide.18. A compound of claim 1:5,5-dimethyl-5H-[1]benzopyrano[2,3-b]pyridin-7-yl-acetic acid."}
{"WKU":"039312062","Title":"Prostanoic acid derivatives","App_Date":"1973-09-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jean Bowler;Keith Blakeney Mallion;Dora Nellie Richardson","Assignee":"Imperial Chemical Industries Limited","ICL_Class":"C07D21344","References":"3726909;3836578","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A prostanoic acid derivative of the formula:##SPC13##wherein R.sup.1 is carboxy, hydroxymethyl or alkoxycarbonyl of 2 to 11carbon atoms, A.sup.1 is ethylene or vinylene, either R.sup.2 is hydroxyand R.sup.3 is hydrogen or R.sup.2 and R.sup.3 together are oxo, A.sup.2is ethylene or trans-vinylene, R.sup.5 is hydrogen, either X is alkyleneof 1 to 3 carbon atoms bearing 0, 1 or 2 alkyl substituents of 1 to 3carbon atoms and Y is oxygen, sulphur or a direct bond, or X and Y areboth a direct bond, R.sup.4 is a pyridyl radical bearing 0 to 4substituents selected from the group consisting of halogen, alkyl of 1 to5 carbon atoms and alkoxy of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and which compound bears0 to 1 alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms on carbon atom 2, 3 or 4 thereof, andfor those compounds wherein R.sup.1 is carboxy, a pharmaceutically orveterinarily acceptable base addition salt thereof.2. The prostanoic acid derivative of claim 1 wherein R.sup.1 is carboxy oralkoxycarbonyl of 2 to 5 carbon atoms, A.sup.1 is cis-vinylene, R.sup.2 ishydroxy, R.sup.3 is hydrogen, A.sup.2 is trans-vinylene, R.sup.5 ishydrogen, X and Y together form ethylene or methyleneoxy, or a directbond, and R.sup.4 is 2-, 3- or 4-pyridyl bearing 0 to 4 substituentsselected from halogen, alkyl of 1 to 5 carbon atoms and alkoxy of 1 to 5carbon atoms, and a pharmaceutically or veterinarily acceptable baseaddition salt thereof.3. The prostanoic acid derivative of claim 2 wherein R.sup.1 is carboxy ormethoxycarbonyl, A.sup.1 is cis-vinylene, R.sup.2 is hydroxy, R.sup.3 ishydrogen, A.sup.2 is trans-vinylene, R.sup.5 is hydrogen, X is methylene,Y is oxygen, R.sup.4 is unsubstituted 2-, 3- or 4-pyridyl, chloropyridylwherein the chlorine substituent is located meta to the carbon atombearing the free valency, methylpyridyl wherein the methyl substituent islocated meta or para to the carbon atom bearing the free valency, or4,6-dimethylpyrid-2-yl, and for those compounds wherein R.sup.1 is acarboxy radical, the sodium or potassium salt thereof.4. The prostanoic acid derivative of claim 2 wherein R.sup.4 is 2-, 3-, or4-pyridyl, 6-methylpyrid-2-yl, 2-, 4- and 6-methylpyrid-3-yl,4,6-dimethylpyrid-2-yl, 2, 6-dimethyl-pyrid-4-yl, 6-chloropyrid-2-yl,5-chloropyrid-3-yl, 2-chloro-pyrid-4-yl, 2,5-dichloropyrid-3-yl or6-methoxypyrid-3-yl.5. The prostanoic acid derivative of claim 2 which is selected from thegroup consisting of9.alpha.,11.alpha.,15-trihydroxy-16-(pyrid-2-yloxy)-17,18,19,20-tetranor-5-cis, 13-trans-prostadienoic acid,9.alpha.,11.alpha.,15-trihydroxy-16-(pyrid-3-yloxy)-17,18,19,20-tetranor-5-cis, 13-trans-prostadienoic acid, methyl9.alpha.,11.alpha.,15-trihydroxy-16-(pyrid-4-yloxy)-17,18,19,20-tetranor-5-cis, 13-trans-prostadienoate,9.alpha.,11.alpha.,15-trihydroxy-16-(6-methylpyrid-2-yloxy)-17,18,19,20-tetranor-5-cis, 13-trans-prostadienoic acid,9.alpha.,11.alpha.,15-trihydroxy-16-(6-methylpyrid-3-yloxy)-17,18,19,20-tetranor-5-cis, 13-trans-prostadienoic acid,16-(6-chloropyrid-2-yloxy)-9.alpha.,11.alpha.,15-trihydroxy-17,18,19,20-tetranor-5-cis, 13-trans-prostadienoic acid,16-(2-chloropyrid-4-yloxy)-9.alpha.,11.alpha.,15-trihydroxy-17,18,19,20-tetranor-5-cis, 13-trans-prostadienoic acid, methyl16-(5-chloropyrid-3-yloxy)-9.alpha.,11.alpha.,15-trihydroxy-17,18,19,20-tetranor-5-cis, 13-trans-prostadienoate and methyl16-(4,6-dimethylpyrid-2-yloxy)-9.alpha.,11.alpha.,15-trihydroxy-17,18,19,20-tetranor-5-cis, 13-trans-prostadienoate, and the sodium or potassium saltof those compounds which are acids.6. The prostanoic acid derivative of claim 1 selected from the groupconsisting of16-(6-chloropyrid-2-yloxy)-9.alpha.,11.alpha.,15-trihydroxy-17,18,19,20-tetranor-5-cis, 13-trans-prostadienoic acid and the sodium or potassium saltthereof."}
{"WKU":"039312070","Title":"Tetramic acid analogs of pulvinic acid","App_Date":"1973-12-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Joseph Weinstock","Assignee":"SmithKline Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07D40104","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A compound of the formula:##SPC5##in which:R.sup.1 is lower alkyl of from one to four carbon atoms;R.sup.2, r.sup.3, r.sup.4 and R.sup.5 are each hydrogen, lower alkyl offrom one to four carbon atoms, lower alkoxy of from one to four carbonatoms, phenyl, phenoxy, halogen, trifluoromethyl, hydroxy or takentogether in adjacent positions, methylenedioxy; andR.sup.6 is hydrogen, phenyl, phenyl substituted with methyl, halogen ortrifluoromethyl or a heterocycle selected from the group consisting of2-thiazolyl, 2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, 3-pyridazinyl, 2-pyrazinyl, 2-oxazolyl,2-imidazolyl, 3-pyrazolyl and 5-isothiazolyl, said heterocycle beingunsubstituted or substituted with methyl, halogen or trifluoromethyl.2. A compound as claimed in claim 1 where R.sup.6 is 2-thiazolyl or3-pyridyl.3. A compound as claimed in claim 2 where R.sup.1 is methyl and R.sup.2,R.sup.3, R.sup.4 and R.sup.5 are each hydrogen, chloro or ethoxy.4. A compound as claimed in claim 3 being the compound5-(1 -carbomethoxy-1 -phenylmethylidene)11-(2 -thiazolyl)-3-phenyltetramicacid (E).5. A compound as claimed in claim 3 being the compound5-(1 -carbomethoxy-1 -phenylmethylidene)-1-(3 -pyridyl)13-phenytetramicacid (E).6. A process for preparing compounds of the formula:##SPC6##in which:R.sup.1 is lower alkyl of from one to four carbon atoms;R.sup.2, r.sup.3, r.sup.4 and R.sup.5 are each hydrogen, lower alkyl offrom one to four carbon atoms, lower alkoxy of from one to four carbonatoms, phenyl, phenoxy, halogen, trifluoromethyl hydroxy or, takentogether in adjacent positions, methylenedioxy; andR.sup.6 is phenyl, phenyl substituted with methyl, halogen ortrifluoromethyl or a five or six membered heterocycle containing carbonand one or two atoms of nitrogen, sulfur or oxygen, unsubstituted orsubstituted with methyl, halogen or trifluoromethyl comprising reacting apulvinic acid amide of the formula:##SPC7##where R.sup.2, R.sup.3, R.sup.4, R.sup.5 and R.sup.6 are as defined abovewith phosphorus pentachloride and phosphorus trichloride, followed bytreatment of the product lactone-lactam of the formula:##SPC8##where R.sup.2, R.sup.3, R.sup.4, R.sup.5 and R.sup.6 are as defined abovewith a lower alcoholic solution of an alkali metal lower alkoxide.7. A process for preparing compounds of the formula:##SPC9##in which:R.sup.1 is lower alkyl of from one to four carbon atoms;R.sub.2, r.sup.3, r.sup.4 and R.sup.5 are each hydrogen, lower alkyl offrom one to four carbon atoms, lower alkoxy of from one to four carbonatoms, phenyl, phenoxy, halogen, trifluoromethyl, hydroxy or, takentogether in adjacent positions, methylenedioxy; andR.sup.6 is phenyl, phenyl substituted with methyl, halogen ortrifluoromethyl or a five or six membered hereterocycle containing carbonand one or two atoms of nitrogen, sulfur or oxygen, unsubstituted orsubstituted with methyl, halogen or trifluoromethyl comprising reacting apulvinic acid amide of the formula:##SPC10##where R.sup.2, R.sup.3, R.sup.4, R.sup.5 and R.sup.6 are as defined abovewith p-toluenesulfonyl chloride in pyridine containing triethylaminefollowed by treatment of the crude lactone-lactam of the formula:##SPC11##where R.sup.2, R.sup.3, R.sup.4, R.sup.5 and R.sup.6 are as defined abovewith a lower alcohol."}
{"WKU":"039312089","Title":"Process for the production of thiazolines-(3)","App_Date":"1973-11-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Heribert Offermanns;Friedrich Asinger;Wolf-Dieter Pfeifer;Paul Scherberich;Gerd Schreyer","Assignee":"Deutsche Gold- und Silber-Scheideanstalt vormals Roessler","ICL_Class":"C07D27710","References":"2879273;3004981;3700683","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for the production of a thiazoline-(3) compound of the formula##EQU7##wherein R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 individually are lower alkyl or ar- loweralkyl groups or R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 together are an alkylene group whichjoins with the adjacent carbon atom to form a closed carbocyclic ring,R.sub.3 is hydrogen, lower alkyl or ar- lower alkyl, R.sub.4 is loweralkyl or ar- lower alkyl or R.sub.3 and R.sub.4 together are an alkylenegroup which joins with the adjacent carbon atom to form a closedcarbocyclic ring comprising reacting (1) a 2,2 -dioxodisulfide of theformula##EQU8##with (2) an oxo compound of the formula##EQU9##(3) hydrogen sulfide and (4) ammonia in the presence of (5) an amine and(6) an ammonium salt of an acid.2. A process according to claim 1 wherein R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 individuallyare alkyl of 1 to 6 carbons atoms or aralkyl with 1 to 3 carbon atoms inthe alkyl group, or R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 together are alkylene of 5 to 12carbon atoms, R.sub.3 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms or aralkylwith 1 to 3 carbon atoms in the alkyl group, R.sub.4 is alkyl of 1 to 6carbon atoms, alkenyl of 2 to 6 carbon atoms or phenylalkyl with 1 to 3carbon atoms in the alkyl group or R.sub.3 and R.sub.4 together arealkylene of 5 to 12 carbon atoms.3. A process according to claim 2 wherein R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 individuallyare alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms or benzyl or R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 togetherare alkylene of 5 to 12 carbon atoms, R.sub.3 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 6carbon atoms or benzyl, R.sub.4 is alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms or benzylor R.sub.3 and R.sub.4 together are alkylene of 5 to 12 carbon atoms.4. A process according to claim 3 wherein R.sub.1 is methyl, R.sub.2 ismethyl or R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 together are penta methylene orheptamethylene, R.sub.3 is hydrogen, methyl or ethyl, R.sub.4 is methylethyl or benzyl or R.sub.3 and R.sub.4 together are pentamethylene.5. A process according to claim 1 wherein the amine is a secondary ortertiary amine.6. A process according to claim 1 wherein the ammonium salt is an ammoniumsalt other than ammonium sulfide.7. A process according to claim 1 wherein there is employed for each moleof dioxodisulfide II from 2 to 8 moles of oxo compound III, from 2 to 6moles of ammonia, from 1 to 5 moles of hydrogen sulfide, from 1 to 5 molesof amine and from 0.1 to 4 moles of ammonium salt.8. A process according to claim 2 wherein there is employed for each moleof dioxodisulfide II from 4 to 6 moles of oxo compound III, from 3 to 4moles of ammonia, from 3 to 4 moles of hydrogen sulfide, from 2 to 4 molesof amine and from 1 to 2 moles of ammonium salt.9. A process according to claim 8 wherein the amine is a monoalkyl amine, adialkylamine, a thialkylamine, a monoalkanolamine, a dialkanolamine, atrialkanolamine, a cycloalkylamine, a primary carbocyclic aromatic amine,a secondary carbocyclic aromatic amine, a tertiary carbocyclic aromaticamine or a heterocyclic amine having 5 to 6 carbon atom s in theheterocyclic ring and the ammonium salt is ammonium sulfate, ammoniumchloride, ammonium acetate, ammonium bromide, ammonium hydrogen sulfate,ammonium carbonate, ammonium bicarbonate, ammonium nitrate, ammoniumphosphate, ammonium salt of a fatty acid having 1 to 18 carbon atoms,ammonium oxalate, ammonium tartrate, ammonium citrate or ammoniumbenzoate.10. A process according to claim 7 carried out in the presence of an inertorganic solvent.11. A process according to claim 7 carried out at -10.degree.C, to theboiling point of the mixture.12. A process according to claim 7 wherein the hydrogen sulfide is added assuch.13. A process according to claim 12 wherein the hydrogen sulfide is addedas a compound which decomposes to form hydrogen sulfide in situ.14. A process according to claim 13 wherein the decomposable compound isthioacetamide.15. A process according to claim 7 wherein the dioxodisulfide II is in afirst step reacted with at least a part of the hydrogen sulfide in thepresence of the amine and thereafter in a second step there is added theammonia, the ammonia salt and the oxo compound III.16. A process according to claim 7 wherein the dioxodisulfide II is2,2 -dithio-di-isobutyraldehyde or 2,2 -dithio-di-cyclohexanealdehyde, theoxo compound III is acetone, diethyl ketone or cyclohexanone.17. A process according to claim 16 wherein the amine is triethylamine,pyridine, piperidine or triethanolamine and the ammonium salt is ammoniumchloride, ammonium sulfate or ammonium acetate.18. A process according to claim 16 wherein the oxo compound is acetone.19. A process according to claim 3 wherein the amine is a secondary ortertiary amine.20. A process according to claim 3 wherein the ammonium salt is an ammoniumsalt other than ammonium sulfide.21. A process according to claim 1 wherein the ammonium salt is an ammoniumsalt other than ammonium sulfide.22. A process according to claim 1 wherein R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 individuallyare lower alkyl or aralkyl with 1 to 3 carbon atoms in the alkyl group orR.sub.1 and R.sub.2 together are alkylene of 5 to 12 carbon atoms, R.sub.3individually is hydrogen, lower alkyl or aralkyl with 1 to 3 carbon atomsin the alkyl group or R.sub.3 and R.sub.4 together are alkylene of 5 to 12carbon atoms."}
{"WKU":"039312097","Title":"2-Alkyl-4-thiadiazolyl-1,2,4-triazolidin-3-ones","App_Date":"1974-03-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John Krenzer","Assignee":"Velsicol Chemical Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07D51302","References":"3025303;3496187;3600399;3772316","Claims":"I claim:1. A compound of the formula##EQU7##wherein R.sup.1 is selected from the group consisting of lower alkyl,lower alkenyl, lower chloroalkyl, trifluoromethyl, lower alkoxy, loweralkylthio, lower alkylsulfonyl, lower alkylsulfinyl and cycloalkyl of from3 to 7 carbon atoms optionally substituted with from 1 to 2 substituentsselected from the group consisting of lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, chlorine,bromine and fluorine; and R.sup.2 is lower alkyl.2. The compound of claim 1,2-methyl-4-(5-trifluoromethyl-1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-yl)-1,2,4-triazolidin-3-one.3. The compound of claim 1,2-methyl-4-(5-t-butyl-1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-yl)-1,2,4-triazolidin-3-one.4. The compound of claim 1,2-ethyl-4-(5-methyl-1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-yl)-1,2,4-triazolidin-3-one.5. The compound of claim 1,2-propyl-4-(5-methoxy-1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-yl)-1,2,4-triazolidin-3-one.6. The compound claim 1,2-methyl-4-(5-methylthio-1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-yl)-1,2,4-triazolidin-3-one.7. The compound of claim 1,2-n-butyl-4-(5-methylsulfonyl-1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-yl)-1,2,4-triazolidin-3-one.8. The compound of claim 1,2-n-hexyl-4-(5-methylsulfinyl-1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-yl)-1,2,4-triazolidin-3-one."}
{"WKU":"039312100","Title":"Production of p-aminobenzoic acid","App_Date":"1974-03-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hans-Georg Zengel;Manfred Bergfeld","Assignee":"Akzo N.V.","ICL_Class":"C07C10156","References":"","Claims":"The invention is hereby claimed as follows:1. A process for the production of p-aminobenzoic acid which comprises:reacting ammonia, which contains not more than 15% by weight of water, inthe liquid phase at temperatures of 50.degree. to 132.degree.C. and at anammonia pressure of 20 to 115 atmospheres in a first stage with at leastone monoester reactant of the formula##SPC5##wherein"}
{"WKU":"039312119","Title":"Oxazole compounds, process for their manufacture and use thereof","App_Date":"1973-09-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kurt Weber","Assignee":"Ciba-Geigy AG","ICL_Class":"C07D26356","References":"3586673","Claims":"I claim:1. A compound of the formula##SPC13##wherein R.sub.4 represents alkyl or alkoxy with 1 to 4 carbon atoms, phenylor phenoxy, R.sub.5 represents hydrogen or alkyl with 1 to 4 carbon atomsand R.sub.4 and R.sub.5 in ortho-position to each other representtetramethylene, or trimethylene.2. A compound according to claim 1, corresponding to the formula##SPC14##wherein R.sub.6 represents alkyl with 1 to 4 carbon atoms, phenyl orphenoxy, and R.sub.7 represents hydrogen or alkyl with 1 to 4 carbonatoms, or R.sub.6 and R.sub.7 together represent tetramethylene ortrimethylene.3. A compound of the formula##SPC15##wherein B represents the atoms necessary to form a naphthoxazole ring.4. The compound according to claim 1, corresponding to the formula##SPC16##5. The compound according to claim 1, corresponding to the formula##SPC17##"}
{"WKU":"039312127","Title":"Method for treating cardiovascular circulatory insufficiencies and","App_Date":"1974-06-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Gerhard Satzinger;Manfred Herrmann","Assignee":"Warner-Lambert Company","ICL_Class":"C07D26306","References":"3565905","Claims":"We claim:1. The compound 2-(3 -Hydroxyphenyl)-1-Oxa-4-Azaspiro [4,6] Undecane.2. The compound7,9,9-Trimethyl-2-(3 -Hydroxyphenyl)-1-Oxa-4-Azaspiro[4,5]Dec-6-Ene.3. The compound6-Methyl-6,9-Endo-Dimethylmethylene)-2-(3 -Hydroxyphenyl)-1-Oxa-4-Azaspiro[4,5]Decane.4. The compound9,9-Dimethyl-7-Hydroxy-2-(3 -Hydroxyphenyl)-1-Oxa-4-Azaspiro[4,5]Dec-6-Ene"}
{"WKU":"039312135","Title":"3-Chloro-2-oxazolidinones","App_Date":"1974-12-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James J. Kaminski;Nicolae S. Bodor","Assignee":"Interx Research Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07D26322","References":"3591601;3850920","Claims":"We claim:1. A compound having the formula:##SPC6##where either R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are the same or different non-tertiarylower-alkyl, and R.sub.3 and R.sub.4 are each hydrogen or R.sub.1 andR.sub.2 are each hydrogen, and R.sub.3 and R.sub.4 are the same ordifferent non-tertiary lower-alkyl.2. A compound according to claim 1 where R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are eachhydrogen, and R.sub.3 and R.sub.4 are the same or different lower-alkyl.3. A compound according to claim 1 where R.sub.3 and R.sub.4 are eachhydrogen, and R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are the same or different lower-alkyl.4. A compound according to claim 2 where R.sub.3 and R.sub.4 are the samelower-alkyl.5. 3-Chloro-4,4-dimethyl-2-oxazolidinone according to claim 4.6. 3-Chloro-4-ethyl-4-methyl-2-oxazolidinone according to claim 2.7. 3-Chloro-5,5-dimethyl-2-oxazolidinone according to claim 3."}
{"WKU":"039312143","Title":"2-Amino-2-oxazolines and process for preparing them","App_Date":"1973-10-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Klaus-Dieter Kampe;Milos Babej;Joachim Kaiser","Assignee":"Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07D26328","References":"3110650;3124589;3161650","Claims":"We claim:1. 4,4-Dimethyl-2-amino-2-oxazoline.2. 4-Methyl-4-n-propyl-2-amino-2-oxazoline.3. 2-Amino-3a.4.5.6.7.7a-hexahydro-4,7-methano-benzoxazole."}
{"WKU":"039312151","Title":"Benzofuran derivatives","App_Date":"1974-01-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Anton Horn;Erich Schinzel;Wilfried Sahm;Gunter Rosch","Assignee":"Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07D23518","References":"3586673;3766199","Claims":"We claim:1. A compound of the formula##SPC8##in which L, M, P and Q are hydrogen, halogen, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy orphenyl of L and M together or P and Q together are a cyclohexenyl orphenyl ring annellated at the positions 4 and 5; U is hydrogen, loweralkyl or phenyl; V is hydrogen, lower alkyl, benzyl, phenyl or phenylsubstituted by chlorine, methyl or methoxy; W is lower alkyl, cyanomethyl,carbamylmethyl, carboxymethyl, lower carboalkoxymethyl, benzyl or benzylsubstituted in the phenyl moiety by chlorine, methyl of methoxy; Y is agroup of the formula##SPC9##n is zero or 1 and F is a colorless anion.2. A compound of the formula##SPC10##in which L, M, P and and Q are hydrogen, chlorine, lower alkyl or loweralkoxy or L and M together or P and Q together are a cyclopentenyl,cyclohexenyl or phenyl ring annellated at the positions 4 and 5; U ishydrogen or methyl; V is hydrogen or methyl; W is methyl or benzyl; Y isphenylene or naphthylene; n is zero or 1 and F is halogen, lower alkylsulfate, lower alkysulfonate, phenylsulfonate or tosylate.3. A compound as defined in claim 1, wherein L, M, P and Q are hydrogen,methyl or methoxy and L and M together and P and Q together are annellatedphenyl at the positions 4 and 5; U is hydrogen or methyl; V is hydrogen ormethyl; W is methyl; Y is a group of the formula##SPC11##n is zero or 1 and F is chloride or methosulfate.4. The compound as claimed in claim 1, in which L, M, P, Q, U and V arehydrogen, Y is p-phenylene and n is zero.5. The compound as claimed in claim 1, in which L, M, P, Q, and U arehydrogen, V is methyl, Y is p-phenylene and n is zero.6. The compound as claimed in claim 1, in which L, M, P, Q and V arehydrogen, U is methyl, Y is p-phenylene and n is zero.7. The compound as claimed in claim 1, in which L, M, P and Q are hydrogen,U and V are methyl, Y is p-phenylene and n is zero.8. The compound as claimed in claim 1, in which P, Q and U are hydrogen, Lis 5-methyl, M is 6-methyl, V is methyl, Y is p-phenylene and n is zero.9. The compound as claimed in claim 1, in which P, Q and U are hydrogen, Lis 5-methyl, M is 6-methyl, V and W are methyl, Y is p-phenylene, n is oneand R is methosulfate.10. The compound as claimed in claim 1, in which L, M, P and Q arehydrogen, U, V and W are methyl, Y is p-phenylene, n is one and F ismethosulfate."}
{"WKU":"039312160","Title":"Process for the manufacture of 2-arylamino-2-imidazoline derivatives and","App_Date":"1974-03-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Rudolf Franzmair","Assignee":"Boehringer Ingelheim GmbH","ICL_Class":"C07D 4934","References":"2899426;3236857;3462433;3595961;3752810","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for the preparation of 2-arylamino-2-imidazoline derivativesselected from the group consisting of compounds of the formula##SPC3##in which each of R.sub.1, R.sub.2 and R.sub.3, which may be the same ordifferent, is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, chlorine,bromine, alkyl with 1-4 C-atoms, alkoxy with 1-4 C-atoms and nitro, withthe proviso that in each case at least one of R.sub.1, R.sub.2 and R.sub.3is not a hydrogen atom, or acid addition salt thereof, which comprisesreacting aniline derivatives of the formula##SPC4##in which R.sub.1, R.sub.2 and R.sub.3 are as defined above, with1-acrylimidazolidin-2-ones of the formula##EQU2##in which R.sub.4 is selected from the group consisting of the residues ofaliphatic-cycloaliphatic- and araliphatic monocarboxylic acids,alkyl-carbonic-, aralkylcarbonic and aryl-carbonic acids, in the presenceof at least 2 mols of phosphorus oxychloride per mol of the anilinederivative of the formula (II) at a temperature from room temperature toat most the boiling point of phosphorus oxychloride, neutralizing theresulting phosphorus containing intermediate product to give an acylderivative of the compounds of formula I, whereby acyl is R.sub.4 andsplitting off the acyl group in said acyl derivative by treating it withsplitting agent selected from the group consisting of lower aliphaticmonoalcohols, inorganic acids, organic acids, alkaline sodium salts,alkaline potassium salts, ammonia, amines and alkalialcoholates for morethan one hour and recovering said compound of formula I directly as thebase or acidifying said base and recovering it as an acid addition salt.2. A process according to claim 1, in which more than 3 mols of phosphorusoxychloride are used per mol of aniline derivative of formula (II).3. A process according to claim 1, in which the reaction is carried out inexcess phosphorus oxychloride as the solvent.4. A process according to claim 1, in which in the said acyl derivative ofthe compound of formula I the acyl group is split off by treating saidacyl product with a lower aliphatic primary alcohol with boiling for morethan 1 hour.5. A process according to claim 1, in which in the said acyl derivative ofthe compound of formula I the acyl group is split off by boiling the saidacyl product with methanol for more than 1 hour.6. A process according to claim 1 in which 2,6-dichloroaniline is reactedwith the acylimidazolin-2-one of formula III.7. A process according to claim 1 in which the phosphorus containingintermediate product as such is treated with said splitting agent for morethan 1 hour.8. The process according to claim 1 wherein the splitting agent is aceticacid, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, ammonia,n-butylamine, ethanolamine, benzylamine, piperidine or an alkali metalalcoholate."}
{"WKU":"039312178","Title":"2,3-Dihydro-5-alkoxy-5-phenyl-5H-imidazo[2,1-a]isoindoles","App_Date":"1974-05-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Werner Metlesics;Leo Henryk Sternbach","Assignee":"Hoffmann-La Roche Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07D23502","References":"3444181","Claims":"We claim:1. A compound of the formula##SPC11##wherein R.sub.1 and R.sub.3 are each independently selected from the groupconsisting of hydrogen and halogen; and R.sub.7 is lower alkylor a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.2. The compound according to claim 1 wherein R.sub.1 and R.sub.3 are eachhydrogen, i.e., the compound2,3-dihydro-5-methoxy-5-phenyl-5H-imidazo[2,1-a]isoindole."}
{"WKU":"039312186","Title":"2-(N-alkyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl)benzophenones and process for their","App_Date":"1974-08-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Theodore S. Sulkowski;Albert A. Mascitti","Assignee":"American Home Products Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07D 4934","References":"2214152;3202674;3408361;3717658","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for the preparation of compounds of the formula##SPC7##wherein R is (lower)alkyl; R.sub.1 is selected from the group consisting ofphenyl, monohalophenyl, dihalophenyl, mono(lower)alkylphenyl,di(lower)-alkylphenyl, trifluoromethylphenyl, mono(lower)alkoxyphenyl,di(lower)alkoxyphenyl, thienyl, pyridyl, furyl, and tetrahydro-2-naphthyl;R.sub.2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halogen, amino,(lower)alkylamino, (lower)alkyl and (lower) alkoxy; R.sub.3 is hydrogenwhen R.sub.2 and R.sub.3 are dissimilar and when R.sub.2 and R.sub.3 arethe same they are both selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,halogen, (lower)alkyl and (lower)alkoxy; R.sub.4 and R.sub.5 are eachhydrogen or lower alkyl and attached to the same carbon atom; and R.sub.6is hydrogen or (lower)alkyl which comprises heating a compound of theformula##SPC8##wherein R, R.sub.1, R.sub.2, R.sub.3, R.sub.4, R.sub.5 and R.sub.6 are asdefined above and R.sub.7 is selected from the group consisting of loweralkylsulfonyl, phenylsulfonyl, monohalophenysulfonyl,dihalophenylsulfonyl, mono(lower)alkylphenylsulfonyl,di(lower)alkylphenylsulfonyl and lower alkoxyphenylsulfonyl, on a steambath with sulfuric acid of from about 90.degree. to about 100.degree.concentration.2. Compounds of the formula##SPC9##wherein R is (lower)alkyl; R.sub.1 is selected from the group consisting ofphenyl, monohalophenyl, dihalophenyl, mono(lower)alkylphenyl,di(lower)alkylphenyl, trifluoromethylphenyl, mono(lower) alkoxyphenyl,di(lower)alkoxyphenyl; R.sub.2 is selected from the group consisting ofhydrogen, halogen, amino (lower)alkylamino, (lower)alkyl and (lower)alkoxy; R.sub.3 is hydrogen when R.sub.2 and R.sub.3 are dissimilar andwhen R.sub.2 and R.sub.3 are the same they are both selected from thegroup consisting of hydrogen, halogen, (lower) alkyl and (lower)alkoxy;R.sub.4 and R.sub.5 are each hydrogen or lower alkyl and attached to thesame carbon atom; and R.sub.6 is hydrogen or (lower)alkyl, or thepharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt of such a compound.3. The compound of claim 2 which is4 -chloro-2-(1-ethyl-5,5-dimethyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl)benzophenone or apharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt.4. The compound of claim 2 which is4 fluoro-2-(1-ethyl-5,5-dimethyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl)benzophenone or apharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt.5. The compound of claim 2 which is2-(1-ethyl-5,5-dimethyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl)benzophenone or apharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt.6. The compound of claim 2 which is4 -chloro-2-(1-ethyl-4-methyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl)benzophenone or apharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt.7. The compound of claim 2 which is4 -bromo-2-(1-ethyl-5,5-dimethyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl)benzophenone or apharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt.8. The compound of claim 2 is3 ,4 -dichloro-2-(1-ethyl-5,5-dimethyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl)benzophenone or apharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt.9. The compound of claim 2 which is2-(1-isopropyl-4-methyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl)benzophenone or apharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt.10. The compound of claim 2 which is4 chloro-2(1-isopropyl-4-methyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl)benzophenone or apharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt.11. The compound of claim 2 which is4 -chloro-2-(1-ethyl-4-isopropyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl)benzophenone or apharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt.12. The compound of claim 2 which is2-(1-ethyl-4-isopropyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl)benzophenone or apharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt.13. The compound of claim 2 which is4 -chloro-2-(1-ethyl-5-methyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl)benzophenone or apharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt.14. The compound of claim 2 which is4 -chloro-2-(1-isopropyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl)benzophenone.15. The compound of claim 2 which is4 -chloro-2-(1-ethyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl)benzophenone.16. The compound of claim 2 which is2-(1-isopropyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl)benzophenone.17. The compound of claim 2 which is4 -chloro-2-(1-n-propyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl)benzophenone.18. The compound of claim 2 which is4 -fluoro-2-(1-isopropyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl)benzophenone.19. The compound of claim 2 which is2-(1-isopropyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl)-4 -methyl benzophenone.20. The compound of claim 2 which is4 -trifluoromethyl-2-(1-isopropyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl)benzophenone.21. The compound of claim 2 which isL-(-)-2-(1-ethyl-4-methyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl)benzophenone.22. The compound of claim 2 which isL-(-)-2-(1-ethyl-4-isopropyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl)benzophenone.23. The compound of claim 2 which isD-(+)-2-(1-ethyl-4-isopropyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl)benzophenone.24. The compound of claim 2 which isD-(+)-4 -chloro-2-(1,4-dimethyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl)benzophenone.25. D-(+)-2-(1-ethyl-4-isopropyl-2-imidazolin-2-yl)-4 -fluoro-benzophenone,hydrochloride."}
{"WKU":"039312194","Title":"Process for preparing hexahydrothieno[3,4-d]imidazole-2,4-diones","App_Date":"1974-09-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Yasuhiko Aoki;Hiroyuki Suzuki;Hisao Akiyama;Shigeru Okano","Assignee":"Sumitomo Chemical Company, Limited","ICL_Class":"C07D 4934","References":"2489232;2489234;2519720;3700659;3876656","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for the conversion of ahexahydrofuro[3,4-d]imidazole-2,4-dione compound having the formula:##SPC2##wherein R is alkyl, aryl or aralkyl into the correspondinghexahydrothieno[3,4-d]imidazole-2,4-dione compound having the formula:##SPC3##wherein R is as defined above which comprises reacting the startinghexahydrofuro[3,4-d]imidazole-2,4-dione compound with a dithiocarbamatehaving the formula R NHCSSM wherein R  is alkyl, cycloalkyl or aryl and Mis an alkali metal.2. The process according to claim 1, wherein the reaction is effected in ahigh boiling point polar solvent.3. The process according to claim 2, wherein the high boiling point polarsolvent is sulfolane, N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide,tetramethylurea or hexamethylphosphoramide.4. The process according to claim 1, wherein the reaction is effected at atemperature of about 100.degree. to 120.degree.C.5. The process according to claim 1, wherein the reaction is effected forabout 4 to 6 hours.6. The process according to claim 1, wherein the dithiocarbamate isprepared by reacting an alkali metal hydrosulfide with an isothiocyanate.7. The process according to claim 6 wherein the isothiocyanate is an alkylisothiocyanate, a cycloalkyl isothiocyanate or an aryl isothiocyanate.8. The process according to claim 6, wherein the dithiocarbamate issubjected to the reaction with the hexahydrofuro[3,4-d]imidazole-2,4-dionecompound after its separation from the reaction mixture for preparing thesame.9. The process according to claim 6, wherein the dithiocarbamate issubjected to the reaction with the hexahydrofuro[3,4-d]imidazole-2,4-dionecompound without its separation from the reaction mixture for preparingthe same."}
{"WKU":"039312208","Title":".beta.-Phenyl-.beta.-azolyl-nitroethanes","App_Date":"1973-11-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Uwe Petersen;Siegfried Petersen;Hans Scheinpflug;Brigitte Hamburger","Assignee":"Bayer Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07D23112","References":"3682956;3714182","Claims":"What is claimed is:  pg,261. A .beta.-phenyl-.beta.-azolylnitroethane of the formula##SPC8##in whichR.sup.1, r.sup.2 and R.sup.3 each individually is hydrogen; methyl or ethyloptionally substituted by fluorine or chlorine; halogen; nitrile;thiocyano; nitro; or alkoxycarbonyl with up to 6 carbon atoms in thealkoxy radical, andR.sup.4 is a pyrazolyl-1, a benzopyrazolyl-1 or atetrahydrobenzylpyrazolyl-1 radical optionally substituted on a carbonatom by halogen, methyl, ethyl, nitro or trifluoromethyl.2. A compound according to claim 1, in which R.sup.1, R.sup.2 and R.sup.3each individually is hydrogen, fluorine, chlorine, methoxycarbonyl,ethoxycarbonyl, or optionally chlorinated or fluorinated methyl or ethyl,and R.sup.4 is a pyrazolyl-1, a benzopyrazolyl-1 or atetrahydrobenzopyrazolyl-1 radical optionally substituted on a carbon atomby methyl, ethyl, chlorine or fluorine.3. A compound according to claim 1, in which R.sup.1, R.sup.2 and R.sup.3each individually is hydrogen, chlorine or trifluoromethyl.4. The compound according to claim 1 wherein such compound is.beta.-(2,6-dichlorophenyl)-.beta.-(pyrazolyl-1)-nitroethane of theformula##SPC9##40/9"}
{"WKU":"039312216","Title":"Process for preparing 3-anilino-pyrazolones-(5)","App_Date":"1973-12-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ernst Meier;Hans Glockner;Karl Kuffner;Immo Boie;Fritz Nittel","Assignee":"Agfa-Gevaert Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07D23120","References":"","Claims":"What we claim is:1. In the process of preparing a 3-anilino-pyrazolone-(5) magenta colorcoupler by condensing a hydrazine with a hydrohalide of abeta-anilino-acrylic acid ester having in the beta position a second groupreplaceable by the hydrazine during a pyrazolone-ring-forming cyclization,the improvement according to which the replaceable group is NH.sub.2.2. The combination of claim 1 in which the hydrohalide is thehydrochloride.3. The combination of claim 1 in which the ester is the ethyl ester.4. The combination of claim 1 in which the anilino group isnitro-substituted.5. The combination of claim 1 in which the anilino group isnitro-substituted and the hydrazine is a halogen-substituted arylhydrazine."}
{"WKU":"039312224","Title":"Tetrahydro-carbazole derivates","App_Date":"1974-05-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Peter E. Cross;Roger P. Dickinson;John E. G. Kemp","Assignee":"Pfizer Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07D20986","References":"2541211;3663567","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A compound of the formula:##SPC7##or an N-oxide or a pharmaceutically-acceptable acid addition salt thereofwherein R is alkyl of from 3 to 5 carbon atoms, R.sup.1 is hydrogen,halogen, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy or hydroxy; and Y is aminoalkyl of theformula --Alk--NR.sup.2 R.sup.3 in which R.sup.2 and R.sup.3 takenseparately are each lower alkyl and R.sup.2 and R.sup.3 taken togetherwith the nitrogen atom to which they are attached form a pyrrolidino,piperidino, perhydroazepino, morpholino, thiomorpholino or1,1-dioxo-perhydro-1,4-thiazino group and `Alk` is a divalent alkyl groupcontaining from 2 to 4 carbon atoms; or Y is an amino-cyclic group of theformula --C.sub.n H.sub.2n --CH  Z, in which n is 0 to 3 and Z is adivalent group which completes a pyrrolidine, piperidine orperhydroazepine ring, the nitrogen atom in said ring being separated fromthe nitrogen atom to which the aminocyclic group is attached by a chain offrom 2 to 4 carbon atoms.2. A compound as claimed in claim 1, in which R is a branched chain alkylgroup containing a quaternary carbon atom.3. A compound as claimed in claim 2, in which R is a tertiary butyl group.4. A compound as claimed in claim 1, in which R.sup.1 is hydrogen orhalogen.5. A compound as claimed in claim 1, in which Y is an aminoalkyl group--Alk--NR.sup.2 R.sup.3 in which `Alk` is ethylene or trimethylene.6. A compound as claimed in claim 5, in which --NR.sup.2 R.sup.3 is adimethylamino, diethylamino, pyrrolidino, piperidino, perhydroazepino ormorpholino group.7. 3-Tertiary-butyl-9-(2-pyrrolidino-ethyl)-1,2,3,4-tetrahydrocarbazole, oran N-oxide or a pharmaceutically-acceptable acid addition salt thereof."}
{"WKU":"039312232","Title":"3-(Dimethylamino)-1,2,3,4,8,9-hexahydro-1H[1]benzazepino[1,2,3-k,j]carba","App_Date":"1974-06-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Aram Mooradian","Assignee":"Sterling Drug Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07D20988","References":"3592824","Claims":"I claim:1. 3-(Dimethylamino)-1,2,3,4,8,9-hexahydro-1H[1]benzazepino[1,2,3-k,j]carbazole ora medicinally acceptable acid-addition salt thereof.2. 3-(Dimethylamino)-1,2,3,4,8,9-hexahydro-1H[1]benzazepino[1,2,3-k,j]carbazole according to claim 1.3. 3-(Dimethylamino)-1,2,3,4,8,9-hexahydro-1H[1]benzazepino[1,2,3-k,j]carbazole hydrochloride according to claim 1."}
{"WKU":"039312240","Title":"Aromatic imidodicarboxylic acid diallyl esters, prepolymers thereof,","App_Date":"1973-09-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Toshihiro Santa;Yuzo Aito;Katsuhisa Watanabe;Kiyokazu Tsunawaki;Yuji Mitani;Kiyoshi Nawata","Assignee":"Teijin Limited","ICL_Class":"C07D20948","References":"3217014","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An aromatic imidodicarboxylic acid diallyl ester of the formula##SPC54##wherein R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are the same or different and represent ahydrogen atom or methyl group.2. The ester of claim 1 which is4-allyloxycarbonyl-N-(4-allyloxycarbonylphenyl) phthalimide.3. The ester of claim 1 which is4-allyloxycarbonyl-N-(3-allyloxycarbonylphenyl) phthalimide."}
{"WKU":"039312259","Title":"Process for preparing o-nitrobenzylketones","App_Date":"1974-01-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Rodney Ian Fryer;Edward Ernest Garcia","Assignee":"Hoffmann-La Roche Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07D20948;C07C 4976","References":"","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for preparing o-nitrobenzylketone of the formula##SPC10##wherein R.sub.1 is lower alkyl, halo-lower alkyl, phenyl,halogen-substituted phenyl, lower alkyl-substituted phenyl, loweralkoxy-substituted phenyl or phthalimido-lower alkyl,which comprises the steps of:a. reacting a trans- .beta. -substituted amino-2-nitrostyrene of theformula##SPC11##wherein R.sub.2 and R.sub.3, independently, are lower alkyl, or when takentogether are lower alkylene,with an acyl halide selected from the group consisting of lower alkanoylhalide, halo-lower alkanoyl halide, phthalimido-lower alkanoyl halide,benzoyl halide, halogen-substituted benzoyl halide, loweralkyl-substituted benzoyl halide and lower alkoxy-substituted benzoylhalide, to yield the corresponding compound of the formula##SPC12##wherein R is lower alkanoyl, halo-lower alkanoyl, phthalimido-loweralkanoyl, benzoyl, halogen-substituted benzoyl, lower alkyl-substitutedbenzoyl or lower alkoxy-substituted benzoyl, and R.sub.2 and R.sub.3,independently, are lower alkyl, or when taken together, are loweralkylene,at a temperature in the range of from 0.degree. to the reflux temperatureof the reaction mixture and subsequently,b. hydrolyzing the product of step (a) to yield a compound of the formula##SPC13##wherein R.sub.1 is lower alkyl, halo-lower alkyl, phenyl,halogen-substituted phenyl, lower alkyl-substituted phenyl, loweralkoxy-substituted phenyl or phthalimido-lower alkyl.2. A process in accordance with claim 1, wherein R.sub.2 and R.sub.3 aremethyl.3. A process in accordance with claim 1, wherein step (a) is carried out inan inert organic solvent."}
{"WKU":"039312267","Title":"Process for the preparation of diazepino[1,2-a]indoles","App_Date":"1974-04-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Alan Chapman White;Stanley Charles Bell","Assignee":"John Wyeth & Brother Limited","ICL_Class":"C07D48704","References":"","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for the preparation of an indole derivative selected from thegroup consisting of a compound of the formula (I)##SPC6##and an acid addition salt thereof, wherein R.sup.1, R.sup.2, R.sup.3 andR.sup.4 are selected independently from the group consisting of hydrogen,hydroxyl, lower alkyl containing 1 to 4 carbon atoms, lower alkoxycontaining 1 to 4 carbon atoms, trifluoromethyl, and halogen, R.sup.5 andR.sup.6 are selected independently from the group consisting of hydrogenand lower alkyl containing 1 to 4 carbon atoms and n and m are selectedfrom the group consisting of 1 and 2 such that the sum of m + n is 3,which process comprises condensing an indole derivative of formula (II)##SPC7##wherein R.sup.1, R.sup.2, R.sup.3 and R.sup.4 have the meanings given abovewith a dihaloalkane of formula (III)##EQU3##where R.sup.5, R.sup.6, m and n have the meanings given above and Hal andHal  are each chlorine or bromine.2. A process according to claim 1 wherein the condensation is carried outby heating the indole derivative of formula (II) with the dihaloalkane offormula (III) in an inert organic solvent.3. A process according to claim 1 for preparing2,4,5,11-tetrahydro-11-phenyl-3H-1,3-diazepino[1,2-a]indol-11-ol whichcomprises heating 2-amino-3-phenyl-3H-indol-3-ol with 1,4-dibromobutane inan inert organic solvent.4. A process according to claim 1 for preparing11-(m-chlorophenyl)-2,4,5,11-tetrahydro-3H-1,3-diazepino[1,2-a]indol-11-olwhich comprises heating 2-amino-3-(m-chlorophenyl)-3H-indol-3-ol with1,4-dibromobutane in an inert organic solvent.5. A process according to claim 1 for prearing9-chloro-11-(o-chlorophenyl)-2,4,5,11-tetrahydro-3H-1,3-diazepino[1,2-a]indol-11-ol which comprises heating2-amino-5-chloro-3-(o-chlorophenyl)-3H-indol-3-ol with 1,4-dibromobutanein an inert organic solvent.6. A process according to claim 1 for preparing9-chloro-11-phenyl-2,4,5,11-tetrahydro-3H-1,3-diazepino[1,2-]indol-11-olwhich comprises heating 2-amino-5-chloro-3-phenyl-3H-indol-3-ol with1,4-dibromobutane in an inert organic solvent."}
{"WKU":"039312275","Title":"3,3-Di-(indolin-5-yl)-phthalides and naphthalides","App_Date":"1973-12-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Alan L. Borror;Paulina P. Garcia","Assignee":"Polaroid Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07D20908;C07D20918","References":"3509174","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A compound of the formula:##SPC4##wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2, the same, are hydrogen or a group which isunsubstituted and which contains up to 20 carbon atoms selected fromalkyl; cycloalkyl; aryl selected from phenyl and naphthyl; alkaryl whereinthe aryl portion of said alkaryl is phenyl; and aralkyl wherein the arylportion of said aralkyl is phenyl; and X represents the atoms necessary tocomplete a ring-closing moiety selected from phthalide, unsubstituted orsubstituted in the 7-position with --COOR wherein R is hydrogen or alkylcontaining 1 to 4 carbon atoms and naphthalide, unsubstituted.2. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 arearalkyl.3. A compound as defined in claim 2 wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 are benzyl.4. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 arehydrogen.5. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein X represents phthalide.6. 3,3-di-(indolin-5-yl)-7-carboxyphthalide.7. 3,3-di-(indolin-5-yl)-7-carbethoxyphthalide.8. 3,3-di-(N-benzylindolin-5-yl)-7-carboxyphthalide."}
{"WKU":"039312283","Title":"Process for preparing phthalide and naphthalide indicator dyes","App_Date":"1974-02-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Alan L. Borror","Assignee":"Polaroid Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07D20910;C07D20912;C07D20914","References":"3491116","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process which comprises the steps of:1. reacting in substantially equimolar proportions in an inert organicliquid solvent at a temperature between about 20.degree.C. and120.degree.C. in the presence of an acid catalyst selected fromtoluene-p-sulfonic acid, sulfuric acid, trifluoroacetic acid andtrichloroacetic acid, (a) a compound selected from##SPC33##wherein R.sup.1 is selected from hydrogen, alkoxy containing 1 to 3 carbonatoms and alkyl containing 1 to 3 carbon atoms; R.sup.2 is selected fromhydrogen, hydroxy, carboxy, sulfonamido, sulfamoyl, o-hydroxyphenyl,bis-trifluoromethylcarbinol, methoxy, alkyl containing 1 to 16 carbonatoms; R.sup.3 is selected from hydrogen, alkoxy containing 1 to 18 carbonatoms and alkyl containing 1 to 3 carbon atoms; R.sup.4 is selected fromhydrogen, hydroxy and carboxy; R.sup.5 is selected from hydrogen andalkoxy containing 1 to 18 carbon atoms; R.sup.6 is selected from hydrogen,phenyl, alkyl containing 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and alkoxy containing 1 to18 carbon atoms; R.sup.7 is selected from hydrogen, phenyl,o-hydroxyphenyl and alkyl containing 1 to 3 carbon atoms and R.sup.8 isselected from hydrogen, cyano, carboxy, halo, trifluoromethyl, sulfonyland alkoxy containing 1 to 18 carbon atoms with (b) an aldehydic acidselected from phthalaldehydic acid, unsubstituted or substituted in one ofthe 4- or 7-positions with carboxy and naphthalaldehydic acid,unsubstituted, to form the corresponding adduct having the formula:##SPC34##wherein A is a radical selected from p-hydroxyphenyl, p-hydroxynaphthyl,pyrr-2-yl and indol-3-yl corresponding to said (i), (ii) and (iii) and(iv), respectively, and X represents the carbon atoms necessary tocomplete a ring-closing moiety selected from phthalide, unsubstituted orsubstituted in the 4- or 7-position with carboxy, and naphthalide,unsubstituted; and2. reacting said adduct with a quinone selected from chloranil, o-chloraniland 2,3-dichloro-5,6-dicyano-1,4-benzoquinone in a molar ratio of about1.1 to 1.5 moles of quinone per 1.0 mole of adduct in an inert organicliquid solvent at a temperature between about 20.degree.C. and200.degree.C. to form the corresponding oxidation product selected from##SPC35##wherein A and X have the same meaning given above, and##SPC36##wherein A  is selected from##SPC37##wherein R.sup.1, R.sup.2, R.sup.3, R.sup.4, R.sup.5, R.sup.6, R.sup.7 andR.sup.8 and X have the same meaning given above and mixtures of (I) and(II), said (I) being produced under anhydrous conditions and said (II) andsaid mixtures of (i) and (II) being produced in the presence of moisture.2. A process as defined in claim 1 which includes the additional step of:3. reacting said oxidation product with a compound (c) selected from (i),(ii), (iii) and (iv) as defined in (a) above in substantially equimolarproportions in an inert organic liquid solvent at a temperature betweenabout 20.degree.C. and 120.degree.C. in the presence of an acid catalystselected from toluene-p-sulfonic acid, sulfuric acid, trifluoroaceticacid, trichloroacetic acid and a Lewis acid to form the corresponding3,3-disubstituted phthalide or naphthalide,##SPC38##wherein A and B each is a radical selected from p-hydroxyphenyl,p-hydroxynaphthyl, pyrr-2-yl, and indol-3-yl corresponding to said (i),(ii), (iii) and (iv), respectively, and X represents the carbon atomsnecessary to complete a ring-closing moiety selected from phthalide,unsubstituted or substituted in the 4- or 7-position with carboxy andnaphthalide, unsubstituted.3. A process as defined in claim 2 wherein said step (1) is conducted inthe presence of toluene-p-sulfonic acid.4. A process as defined in claim 2 wherein said step (2) is conducted undersubstantially anhydrous conditions.5. A process as defined in claim 4 wherein said quinone is o-chloranil.6. A process as defined in claim 2 wherein said compound (a) is (iv).7. A process as defined in claim 6 wherein said indole compound (a) is7-carboxyindole.8. A process as defined in claim 7 wherein said aldehydic acid isnaphthalaldehydic acid.9. A process as defined in claim 8 wherein said compound (c) is (iv).10. A process as defined in claim 9 wherein said indole compound (c) is7-hexadecylsulfonamidoindole.11. A process as defined in claim 9 wherein said indole compound (c) is2-ortho-hydroxyphenyl indole.12. A process as defined in claim 9 wherein said indole compound (c) is7-carboxyindole.13. A process as defined in claim 9 wherein said indole compound (c) is5-bromo-7-octadecylsulfamoyl indole.14. A process as defined in claim 2 wherein said compound (a) is (i).15. A process as defined in claim 14 wherein said phenol compound (a) is2,6-diisopropylphenol.16. A process as defined in claim 15 wherein said compound (c) is (ii).17. A process as defined in claim 16 wherein said 1-naphthol compound (c)is 2-hexadecyl-1-naphthol and said aldehydic acid is naphthalaldehydicacid.18. A process as defined in 14 wherein said compound (c) is (i).19. A process as defined in claim 18 wherein said phenol compound (a) iso-cresol, said phenol compound (c) is o-cresol and said aldehydic acid is7-carboxy-phthalaldehydic acid.20. A process as defined in claim 2 wherein said compound (a) is (ii).21. A process as defined in claim 20 wherein said compound (c) is (ii).22. A process as defined in claim 21 wherein said aldehydic acid isnaphthalaldehydic acid.23. A process as defined in claim 22 wherein said 1-naphthol compound (a)is 2-carboxy-1-naphthol and said 1-naphthol compound (c) is2-carboxy-1-naphthol.24. A process as defined in claim 1 wherein said oxidation product formedin step (2) is##SPC39##wherein A and X have the same meaning given above.25. A process as defined in claim 1 wherein said oxidation product formedin step (2) is##SPC40##wherein A  is selected from##SPC41##wherein R.sup.1, R.sup.2, R.sup.3, R.sup.4, R.sup.5, R.sup.6, R.sup.7 andR.sup.8 and X have the same meaning given above.26. A process as defined in claim 1 wherein said quinone is2,3-dichloro-5,6-dicyano-1,4-benzoquinone.27. A process as defined in claim 1 wherein said quinone is o-chloranil.28. A process as defined in claim 1 wherein said step (1) is conducted inthe presence of toluene-p-sulfonic acid.29. A process as defined in claim 1 wherein said compound (a) is (i).30. A process as defined in claim 1 wherein said compound (a) is (ii).31. A process as defined in claim 1 wherein said compound (a) is (iv)."}
{"WKU":"039312291","Title":"3-Thiomethyl-2[2-(dialkylamino)ethyl]indoles","App_Date":"1974-04-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Harold Zinnes;Martin L. Schwartz","Assignee":"Warner-Lambert Company","ICL_Class":"C07D20904","References":"3033875;3478051","Claims":"We claim:1. A compound of the formula##SPC24##wherein R.sub.1, R.sub.2 and R.sub.3 are hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 7carbon atoms, R.sub.4 is alkyl having 1 to 7 carbon atoms, aryl having 6to 10 carbon atoms, aralkyl in which aryl and alkyl are as defined, or a 5or 6-membered heterocyclic ring having one or two atoms selected from thegroup consisting of nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur and R.sub.5 is hydrogen,alkyl having 1 to 7 carbon atoms, alkoxy having 1 to 7 carbon atoms, andhydroxyl and the corresponding pharmaceutically acceptable acid additionsalt.2. A compound according to claim 1 which is 2[2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]-3-[(ethylthio)methyl]indole.3. A compound according to claim 1 which is 2[2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]-3-[(phenylthio)methyl]indole.4. A compound according to claim 1 which is1-methyl-2-[2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]-3-[(phenylthio)methyl]indole.5. A compound according to claim 1 which is 2-[2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]-3-[(p-chlorophenylthio)methyl]indole.6. A compound according to claim 1 which is 2-[2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]-3-[2-(dimethylamino)ethylthiomethyl]-indole.7. A compound according to claim 1 which is 2-[2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]-3-[(2-thiazolin-2-ylthio)methyl]indole.8. A compound according to claim 1 which is 2-[2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]-3-[(o-tolylthio)methyl]indole.9. A compound according to claim 1 which is 2-[2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]-3-[(2-furylmethylthio)methyl]indole.10. A compound according to claim 1 which is 2-[2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]-3-[(1-methylimidazol-2-ylthio)methyl]indole.11. A compound according to claim 1 which is 2-[2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]-3-[(benzylthio)methyl]indole.12. A compound according to claim 1 which is5-bromo-2-[2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]-3-[(phenylthio)methyl]indole.13. A compound according to claim 1 which is1-methyl-2-[2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]-3-[(ethylthio)methyl]indole.14. A compound according to claim 1 which is2-[2-(ethylmethylamino)ethyl]-3-[(phenylthio)methyl]indole.15. A compound according to claim 1 which is5-methoxy-2-[2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]-3-[(phenylthio)methyl]indole.16. A compound according to claim 1 which is1-ethyl-2-[2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]-3-[(phenylthio)methyl]indole.17. A compound according to claim 1 which is1-n-propyl-2-[2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]-3-[(phenylthio)methyl]indole.18. A compound according to claim 1 which is 2-[2-(Dimethylamino)ethyl]-3-[p-tolylthiomethyl]indole.19. A compound according to claim 1 which is 2-[2-(Dimethylamino)ethyl]-3-[(m-tolylthio)methyl]indole.20. A compound according to claim 1 which is 2-[2-(Dimethylamino)ethyl]-1-methyl-3-[(p-tolylthio)methyl]indole.21. A compound according to claim 1 which is 2-[2-(Dimethylamino)ethyl]-1-methyl-3-[m-tolylthio)methyl]indole.22. A process for the production of a compound according to claim 1 whichcomprises refluxing a compound of the formula##SPC25##with a compound of the formula"}
{"WKU":"039312305","Title":"3-Substituted isotryptamine derivatives and process for their production","App_Date":"1974-04-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Harold Zinnes;Martin L. Schwartz","Assignee":"Warner-Lambert Company","ICL_Class":"C07D20914","References":"2883394;3781299","Claims":"We claim:1. A compound of the formula:##SPC37##wherein R.sub.1 is hydrogen, lower alkyl or phenyl lower alkyl; R.sub.2 ishydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, halogen, trifluoromethyl, cyano ornitro; R.sub.3 is lower alkyl; and X is cyano.2. A compound according to claim 1 which is2-[2-(dimethylamino)ethyl]indole-3-acetonitrile.3. A compound according to claim 1 which is2-[(2-dimethylamino)ethyl]-1-methylindole-3-acetonitrile."}
{"WKU":"039312313","Title":"4,5,6,7-Tetrachloro-2-thio-phthalide","App_Date":"1974-10-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ernst Roos;Klaus Wagner;Hans Scheinpflug","Assignee":"Bayer Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07D33372","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. 4,5,6,7-Tetrachloro-2-thio-phthalide of the formula##SPC8##2. A process for the preparation of 4,5,6,7-tetrachloro-2-thio-phthalideaccording to claim 1, in which an alkali metal salt of2-mercaptomethyl-3,4,5,6-tetrachloro-thiolbenzoic acid, of the formula##SPC9##in whichX is SH or SM, andM is an alkali metal,is treated with an acid.3. The process according to claim 2, in which M is sodium or potassium.4. The process according to claim 2, in which the reaction is effected inthe presence of a water-miscible, organic solvent.5. The process according to claim 2, in which the reaction is effectedbetween about -10.degree. and 40.degree.C.6. A process according to claim 2, in which the acid is hydrochloric acidor sulfuric acid.7. The process according to claim 2, in which the salt of2-mercaptomethyl-3,4,5,6-tetrachlorothiolbenzoic acid is reacted in situafter having been prepared by the reaction of2-chloromethyl-3,4,5,6-tetrachloro-benzoyl chloride with sodium hydrogensulfide in alcoholic solution.8. The process according to claim 6, in which M is sodium or potassium, theacid is added to produce a pH of about 5 to 6, and the reaction iseffected between about 0.degree. and 20.degree.C."}
{"WKU":"039312321","Title":"3-Alkyl xanthene compounds","App_Date":"1974-06-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Paul E. Bender;Bernard Loev","Assignee":"SmithKline Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07D31182;C07D31180","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A compound of the formula:##SPC3##in which:ring A is a benzene ring, a cyclohexane ring or a cyclohexene ring with thedouble bond at position 5a-8a;R.sub.1 is hydrogen, methyl or ethyl;R.sub.2 is hydrogen, methyl or ethyl;R.sub.3 is hydrogen or alkanoyl of from two to five carbon atoms;R.sub.4 is hydrogen, methyl or ethyl and R.sub.5 and R.sub.6 are hydrogenor methyl, at least one of R.sub.4, R.sub.5 and R.sub.6 being other thanhydrogen; andR.sub.7 is alkyl of from four to eight carbon atoms.2. A compound as claimed in claim 1 where ring A is a benzene ring or acyclohexene ring with the double bond at position 5a-8a.3. A compound as claimed in claim 2 where R.sub.4 is methyl and R.sub.5 andR.sub.6 are hydrogen or methyl.4. A compound as claimed in claim 3 where R.sub.1 is hydrogen or methyl inthe 6-position, R.sub.2 is hydrogen or methyl, R.sub.3 is hydrogen oracetyl and R.sub.7 is n-pentyl.5. A compound as claimed in claim 4 being the compound3-(1,2-dimethylheptyl)-5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-1-hydroxy-9-methylxanthene.6. A compound as claimed in claim 4 being the compound3-(1,2-dimethylheptyl)-1-hydroxy-6,9-dimethylxanthene.7. A compound as claimed in claim 4 being the compound3-(1,2-dimethylheptyl)-1-hydroxy-9-methylxanthene."}
{"WKU":"039312330","Title":"Process for the production of 5-bromo-5-nitro-1,3-dioxane","App_Date":"1973-09-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jens Conrad","Assignee":"Henkel & Cie G.m.b.H.","ICL_Class":"C07D31906","References":"","Claims":"I claim:1. A process for the production of 5-bromo-5-nitro-1-3-dioxane consistingessentially of condensing the reactants formaldehyde and2-bromo-2-nitro-propanediol-1,3, in substantially equimilar amounts in thepresence of the inert water-immiscible organic solvent ethylene chloride,and concentrated sulfuric acid as sole catalyst under conditions wherebywater produced is removed from the reaction, said concentrated sulfuricacid being slowly added to said solution of reactants at the refluxtemperature and recovering said 5-bromo-5-nitro-1,3-dioxane.2. The process of claim 1, wherein there is from 1.01 to 1.5 mols of2-bromo-2-nitro-propanediol-1,3 per 1 mol of formaldehyde.3. The process of claim 1, wherein said water produced is removed byazeotropic distillation.4. The process of claim 3 wherein there is from 0.01 to 5 percent byweight, based upon the weight of said reactants, of said sulfuric acidpresent as said sole catalyst.5. The process of claim 1 wherein said water produced is removed from thereaction by an excess of concentrated sulfuric acid.6. The process of claim 5 wherein said excess of concentrated sulfuric acidused is an amount, which when fully diluted by the water produced, is atleast 35 percent by weight sulfuric acid."}
{"WKU":"039312348","Title":"3,3A-Beta-4,5,6,6a,beta-hexahydro-4beta-ni","App_Date":"1974-09-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jane Liu Jernow;Perry Rosen","Assignee":"Hoffmann-La Roche Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07D30783","References":"3816463","Claims":"We claim:1. A compound of the formula:##SPC4##wherein R is hydrogen, tetra-hydropyranyl, alpha-lower alkoxy-lower alkyl,benzyl, lower alkyl silyl, alkanoyl or benzoyl;or enantiomers or racemates thereof.2. The compound of claim 1 wherein said compound is3,3a,beta-4,5,6,6a,beta-hexahydro-4beta-nitromethyl-5alpha-acetoxy-2-oxo-2H-cyclopenta [b]furan.3. The compound of claim 1 wherein said compound is3,3a,beta-4,5,6,6a,beta-hexahydro-4beta-nitromethyl-5alpha-hydroxyl-2-oxo-2H-cyclopenta [b]furan.4. The compound of claim 1 wherein said compound is3,3a,beta-4,5,6,6a,beta-hexahydro-4beta-nitromethyl-5alpha-tetrahydropyranyloxy-2-oxo-2H-cyclopenta [b]furan."}
{"WKU":"039312356","Title":"Process for preparing sulfur-containing hydroxy pyrones","App_Date":"1973-12-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert F. Harris;Joseph E. Dunbar","Assignee":"The Dow Chemical Company","ICL_Class":"C07D30938","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for making a compound corresponding to the formula##SPC7##wherein R  represents a 1 to 20 carbon alkyl, phenyl, halophenyl,nitrophenyl, lower alkylphenyl, benzyl, phenethyl, naphthylmethyl,halobenzyl, lower alkylbenzyl, nitrobenzyl, propargyl, allyl, cyclohexylloweralkyl, (lower alkylthio)-loweralkyl or adamantyl, which comprisesreacting an alkali metal salt of 4-hydroxy-6-methyl-2-pyrone with asubstantially equimolar proportion of an R -thiolsulfonate of the formulaR.sup.2 --SO.sub.2 SR  wherein R.sup.2 is methyl, phenyl or p-tolyl in thepresence of an inert organic solvent at substantially reflux temperature;and recovering the said compound."}
{"WKU":"039312364","Title":"Oxidation and dehydrohalogenation of halotetrahydropyrans","App_Date":"1973-04-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hans D. Holtz;John E. Mahan","Assignee":"Phillips Petroleum Company","ICL_Class":"C07D30930","References":"2453890;3527771","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for preparing a 5,6-dihydro-1,2-pyrone comprising the steps ofreacting a monohalotetrahydropyran selected from the group consisting of4-chlorotetrahydropyran, 3-chlorotetrahydropyran, 4-bromotetrahydropyran,3-bromotetrahydropyran, 4-iodotetrahydropyran, and 3-iodotetrahydropyranwith oxygen at a partial O.sub.2 pressure of from about 2 to about 200psig and a temperature of from about 30.degree. to about 180.degree.C inthe presence of a free radical initiator selected from the groupconsisting of 2,2 -azobis(2-methylpropionitrile) (AIBN), di-tert-butylperoxide, tert-butyl hydroperoxide, cumyl peroxide, benzoyl peroxide, andcumene hydroperoxide, capable of functioning as oxidation initiators underthe reaction conditions employed.2. A process according to claim 1 wherein the halotetrahydropyran is4-chlorotetrahydropyran.3. A process for preparing 5,6-dihydro-1,2-pyrone comprising the step ofreacting 4-chlorotetrahydropyran with oxygen at a temperature of about30.degree. to about 180.degree.C, at a partial O.sub.2 pressure of fromabout 2 to about 200 psig, in the presence of2,2 -azobis(2-methylpropionitrile) for about 0.1 to about 100 hours."}
{"WKU":"039312372","Title":"Production of 2,2-disubstituted propiolactones","App_Date":"1974-07-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jerry D. Holmes","Assignee":"Eastman Kodak Company","ICL_Class":"C07D30512","References":"2462357;2469704;2806064;3201474","Claims":"I claim:1. A process for producing a 2,2-disubstituted propiolactone having theformula##SPC5##which comprises the steps of reacting an isoanhydride having the formula##EQU3##wherein R and R.sup.1 individually may be straight- or branched-chainalkyl, having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, with formaldehyde or a formaldehydeyielding material at a temperature of from about 190.degree.C. to about400.degree.C., in the presence of a catalyst consisting of the metaloxide-silica gel complex which results from heating the calcined residueof a mixture of silica gel and a water-soluble salt of a metal selectedfrom the group consisting of tantalum, titanium, niobium and zirconium toa temperature of from about 650.degree.C. to about 1000.degree.C. in thepresence of water vapor.2. The process of claim 1 wherein each R and R.sup.1 individually isstraight- or branched-chain alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms.3. The process of claim 1 wherein the isoanhydride is selected from thegroup consisting of isobutyric anhydride, 2-ethylhexanoic anhydride,2-phenylpropionic anhydride, 2-ethylbutyric anhydride, and2-methylpentanoic anhydride.4. The process of claim 1 wherein the catalyst is formed by mixing awater-soluble salt of the selected heavy metal with silica gel, removingthe water by evaporation, and subsequently calcining the material at atemperature of from about 400.degree.C. to about 600.degree.C.5. The process of claim 4 wherein the calcining takes place at atemperature of from about 500.degree.C. to about 550.degree.C.6. The process of claim 1 wherein the calcined residue is heated, in thepresence of water vapor, to a temperature of from about 730.degree.C. toabout 780.degree.C.7. The process of claim 6 wherein the calcined residue is heated, in thepresence of water vapor, for a period of from about 3 to about 6 hours.8. The process of claim 6 wherein the calcined residue is heated, in thepresence of water vapor, to a temperature of from about 760.degree.C. toabout 780.degree.C.9. The process of claim 8 wherein the calcined residue is heated, in thepresence of water vapor, for a period of from about 4 to about 6 hours.10. The process of claim 1 wherein the reaction is conducted at atemperature of from about 240.degree.C. to about 300.degree.C.11. The process of claim 1 wherein the process is conducted at atmosphericpressure.12. The process of claim 1 wherein the ratio of anhydride to aldehyde isfrom about 1.15 to 1 to about 5 to 1.13. The process of claim 12 wherein the ratio of anhydride to aldehyde isfrom about 3 to 1 to about 4 to 1.14. A process for producing pivalolactone whereby isobutyric anhydride isreacted with formaldehyde at a temperature of from about 190.degree.C. toabout 400.degree.C. in the presence of a catalyst consisting essentiallyof the metal oxide-silica gel complex which results from heating thecalcined residue of a mixture of silica gel and a water-soluble salt of ametal selected from the group consisting of tantalum, titanium, niobiumand zirconium to a temperature of from about 650.degree.C. to about1000.degree.C. in the presence of water vapor.15. The process of claim 14 wherein the catalyst is formed by mixing awater-soluble salt of the selected heavy metal with silica gel, removingthe water by evaporation, and subsequently calcining the material at atemperature of from about 400.degree.C. to about 550.degree.C.16. The process of claim 15 wherein the calcining takes place at atemperature of from about 500.degree.C. to about 550.degree.C.17. The process of claim 14 wherein the calcined residue is heated, in thepresence of water vapor, to a temperature of from about 730.degree.C. toabout 780.degree.C.18. The process of claim 17 wherein the calcined residue is heated, in thepresence of water vapor, for a period of from about 3 to about 6 hours.19. The process of claim 17 wherein the calcined residue is heated, in thepresence of water vapor, to a temperature of from about 760.degree.C. toabout 780.degree.C.20. The process of claim 19 wherein the calcined residue is heated, in thepresence of water vapor, for a period of from about 4 to about 6 hours.21. The process of claim 14 wherein the reaction is conducted at atemperature of from about 240.degree.C. to about 300.degree.C.22. The process of claim 14 wherein the reaction is conducted atatmospheric pressure.23. The process of claim 14 wherein the ratio of anhydride fed to aldehydeis from about 1.15 to 1 to about 5 to 1.24. The process of claim 23 wherein the ratio of anhydride fed to aldehydeis from about 3 to 1 to about 4 to 1."}
{"WKU":"039312380","Title":"Preparation of alcohols and ethers","App_Date":"1974-04-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Charles M. Starks","Assignee":"Continental Oil Company","ICL_Class":"C07D30706;C07C 4100;C07C 2100;C07C 2912","References":"","Claims":"The invention having thus been described, what is claimed and desired to besecure by Letters Patent is:1. A process for preparing alcohols and ethers wherein the processcomprises reacting a substituted hydrocarbon compound containing 1 to 40carbon atoms and containing 1 to 10 chlorine or bromine atoms or an alkylsulfate group, with at least a stoichiometric amount of an alkali metalhydroxide, in aqueous solution, at a temperature in the range of about25.degree. to about 300.degree.C in the presence of a catalytic amount, inthe range of from about 0.01 to about to about 20 weight percent based onsaid organic compound, of a betaine, and recovering from the reactionmixture by distillation said alcohol and said ether, said process beingcharacterized further in that:A. the hydrocarbon fraction of the substituted hydrocarbon compound isselected from the group consisting of:"}
{"WKU":"039312399","Title":"6-Oxo-7-substituted-6H-indeno-[5,4-b]furan(and thiophene)-carboxylic","App_Date":"1974-04-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Edward J. Cragoe, Jr.;Otto W. WOLTERSDORF, Jr.","Assignee":"Merck & Co., Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07D30777","References":"3483226","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A compound having the formula:##SPC12##wherein the dotted lines indicate no unsaturation or 1,2-,7,8-, and1,2,7,8- unsaturated embodiments; A is oxygen or sulfur; R is hydrogen,lower alkyl or halo; R.sup.1 is lower alkyl or cycloalkyl having from 3-6carbon atoms; R and R.sup.1, together with the carbon atom to which theyare attached, may be joined to form a cycloalkyl radical having from 3 toabout 6 carbon atoms; R.sup.2 is hydrogen, lower alkyl or phenyl; X.sup.1is lower alkyl or halo; X.sup.2 is hydrogen, lower alkyl or halo; a7-alkylidene embodiment is characterized in that the substituent at the7-position is = CR.sup.3 R.sup.4 ; wherein R.sup.3 and R.sup.4 areindependently selected from a group consisting of hydrogen, lower alkyl,cycloalkyl having from 3 - 6 carbon atoms, and phenyl; and if the dottedline at the 7,8-position represents unsaturation the R radical isnonexistent; and the non-toxic, pharmacologically acceptable salt andlower alkyl ester derivatives thereof.2. The compound of claim 1 wherein R is hydrogen, lower alkyl having from 1to 6 carbon atoms, or halogen selected from a group consisting of chloro,bromo and fluoro; R.sup.1 is lower alkyl having from 1 to 6 carbon atomsand cycloalkyl having from 3 to 6 carbon atoms; R and R.sup.1 are joinedtogether with the carbon atom to which they are attached to form acycloalkyl radical having from 3 to 6 carbon atoms; R.sup.2 is hydrogen,lower alkyl having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms or phenyl; R.sup.3 and R.sup.4are independently selected from hydrogen, lower alkyl having from 1 to 6carbon atoms, cycloalkyl having from 3 to 6 carbon atoms and phenyl;X.sup.1 is lower alkyl having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms or halogen selectedfrom a group consisting of chloro, fluoro and bromo; X.sup.2 is hydrogen,lower alkyl having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or halogen selected from thegroup consisting of chloro, fluoro and bromo; and the non-toxicpharmaceutically acceptable salt and lower alkyl ester derivativesthereof.3. The compound of claim 2 wherein A is oxygen.4. The compound of claim 3 wherein R.sup.2 is phenyl or hydrogen; R ishydrogen, methyl, chloro or bromo; R.sup.1 is lower alkyl having from 1 to6 carbon atoms, cycloalkyl having from 5 to 6 carbon atoms; R.sup.3 andR.sup.4 are independently selected from hydrogen and lower alkyl havingfrom 1 to 6 carbon atoms.5. The compound of claim 4 which is4,5-dimethyl-6-oxo-7-isopropyl-1,2,7,8-tetrahydro-6H-indeno-[5,4-b]furan-2-carboxylic acid.6. The compound of claim 4 which is4,5-dimethyl-6-oxo-7-isopropyl-7,8-dihydro-6H-indeno-[5,4-b]-furan-2-carboxylic acid.7. The compound of claim 4 which is4,5,7-trimethyl-6-oxo-7-isopropyl-1,2,7,8-tetrahydro-6H-indeno-[5,4-b]furan-2-carboxylic acid.8. The compound of claim 4 which is4,5-dimethyl-6-oxo-7-isopropyl-6H-indeno[5,4-b]furan-2-carboxylic acid.9. The compound of claim 4 which is4,5-dimethyl-6-oxo-7,8-dihydro-7-isopropylidene-6H-indeno-[5,4-b]furan-2-carboxylic acid.10. The compound of claim 4 which is4,5-dichloro-7-ethyl-6-oxo-8-phenyl-1,2,7,8-tetrahydro-6H-indeno[5,4-b]furan-2-carboxylic acid.11. 4 ,5 -Dichloro-6 -oxo-1 ,2 ,7 ,8 -tetrahydrospiro-(cyclopentane-1,7 ,-6 H-ideno[5,4-b]furan)-2 -carboxylic acid and its nontoxic pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt and lower alkyl ester derivatives.12. 4,5-Dimethyl-6-oxo-7-propyl-7,8-dihydro-6H-indeno[5,4-b]furan-2-carboxylic acid and its nontoxic pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt and lower alkyl ester derivatives.13. 4,5-Dimethyl-6-oxo-7-bromo-7-propyl-7,8-dihydro-6H-indeno[5,4-b]furan-2-carboxylic acid and its nontoxic pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt and lower alkyl ester derivatives.14. 4,5-Dimethyl-6-oxo-7-propyl-6H-indeno-[5,4-b]furan-2-carboxylic acidand its nontoxic pharmaceutically acceptable salt and lower alkyl esterderivatives.15. 4,5-Dimethyl-6-oxo-7-propylidene-7,8-dihydro-6H-indeno[5,4-b]furan-2-carboxylic acidand its nontoxic pharmaceutically acceptable salt and lower alkyl esterderivatives.16. 4,5-Dimethyl-6-hydroxy-7-propyl-1,2,7,8-tetrahydro-6H-indeno[5,4-b]-furan-2-carboxylic acid and its nontoxic pharmaceutically acceptable salt and lower alkylester derivatives.17. 4,5-Dimethyl-6-oxo-7-propyl-1,2,7,8-tetrahydro-6H-indeno[5,4-b]furan-2-carboxylic acid andits nontoxic pharmaceutically acceptable salt and lower alkyl esterderivatives.18. 4,5-Dimethyl-6-oxo-7-bromo-7-propyl-1,2,7,8-tetrahydro-6H-indeno[5,4-b]furan-2-carboxylic acid and its nontoxic pharmaceutically acceptable salt and loweralkyl ester derivatives.19. 4,5-Dimethyl-6-oxo-7-propyl-1,2-dihydro-6H-indeno[5,4-b]furan-2-carboxylic acid and its nontoxicpharmaceutically acceptable salt and lower alkyl ester derivatives.20. 4,5-Dimethyl-6-oxo-7-propylidene-1,2,7,8-tetrahydro-6H-indeno[5,4-b]furan-2-carboxylic acid and its nontoxic pharmaceutically acceptablesalt and lower alkyl ester derivatives."}
{"WKU":"039312402","Title":"Benzofuranyloxy and benzthienyloxy and certain 2,3-dihydro","App_Date":"1974-12-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Fernand Binon;Pierre Luc Eymard","Assignee":"Labaz","ICL_Class":"C07D30783","References":"","Claims":"We claim:1. An amidoxime derivative corresponding to the general formula:##EQU8##or a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof, whereinR.sub.1 and R.sub.2, which are the same or different, represent hydrogenor a straight-chain lower alkyl radical containing form 1 to 3 carbonatoms, n is 0, 1 or 2 and R is selected from the groups consisting of##SPC2##wherein X represents oxygen or sulphur, Y...Z represents HC-CH or C=C,R.sub.3 and R.sub.4, which are the same or different, represent hydrogenor a branched- or straight-chain lower alkyl radical containing from 1 to3 carbon atoms with the provisos that:a. when n is 1, R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are each hydrogen and R is selectedfrom the groups A and B.b. when n is 2, R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are each hydrogen and R is selectedfrom the groups A and B.2. 2-(7-Benzofuryloxy)-propionamidoxime or a pharmaceutically acceptableacid addition salt thereof.3. 2-(4-Benzofuryloxy)-propionamidoxime or a pharmaceutically acceptableacid addition salt thereof.4. 2-(2,3-Dihydro-7-benzofuryloxy)-propionamidoxime or a pharmaceuticallyacceptable acid addition salt thereof.5. 3-(7-Benzofuryloxy)-propionamidoxime or a pharmaceutically acceptableacid addition salt thereof."}
{"WKU":"039312410","Title":"Method for preparation of citraconic acid and derivatives thereof","App_Date":"1974-08-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Chiyuki Fujii;Yoshio Kosai;Iwao Kibayashi","Assignee":"Denki Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha","ICL_Class":"C07D30760","References":"3770812","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method for the preparation of citraconic acid and derivatives thereofcomprising reacting methylsuccinic acid, methylsuccinic acid halide,methylsuccinic acid anhyride, methylsuccinic acid monoesters or diesterswherein said esters are those with aliphatic alcohols having 1 to 8 carbonatoms and with aromatic alcohols, or a mixture thereof with chlorine at atemperature ranging from about 100.degree. to 500.degree.C.2. The method as claimed in claim 1, wherein the reacting is in thepresence of a catalyst selected from the group consisting of (1) thehalides of a member selected from the group consisting of phosphorous,iodine, sulfur, iron, aluminum, nickel and copper, (2) the oxychloride ofsulfur, and (3) the anhydrides and halides of organic acids selected fromthe group consisting of acetic acid, monochloroacetic acid, dichloroaceticacid, trichloroacetic acid and trifluoroacetic acid.3. The method as claimed in claim 1, including recovering chlorine from thehydrogen chloride generated in the reaction by conversion using adehydrating technique.4. The method as claimed in claim 1, wherein the reaction is a liquid-phasereaction.5. The method as claimed in claim 1, wherein the temperature ranges from140.degree. to 400.degree.C."}
{"WKU":"039312429","Title":"New molybdenum and tungsten compounds, their manufacture and their use","App_Date":"1973-12-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Francois Dawans;Emmanuel Goldenberg","Assignee":"Institut Francaise du Petrole, des Carburants et Lubrifiants","ICL_Class":"C07F 1100","References":"3660445","Claims":"What we claim as this invention is:1. A compound of the formula [(H.sub.3.sub.-n X.sub.n)C--CO.sub.2M(CO).sub.m (R).sub.p (L).sub.q ].sub.rin which each X is fluorine, chlorine or bromine with the provision that atleast one X is fluorine, n is an integer selected from 1, 2 and 3, M is ametal selected from the group consisting of molybdenum and tungsten, R isselected from the group consisting of a hydride ion or a methyl, ethyl,allyl, methallyl, crotyl, phenyl or benzyl radical, L is a tetrahydrofuranor dioxane Lewis base, m is an integer from 1 to 3 inclusive, p is 1 and qis an integer selected from the values 1 and 2, and r is 1, with theproviso that the values of m, p and q are such that in the valence shellof said metal M the sum of the number of electrons contributed by saidmetal M and the number of electrons contributed by the ligands is 18.2. A compound as defined by claim 1, in which n is 3 and all X arefluorine.3. A compound as defined by claim 1, in which R is a hydride ion.4. A compound as defined by claim 1, in which R is .pi.-allyl.5. A compound as defined by claim 1, in which the Lewis base istetrahydrofuran.6. A compound as defined by claim 1, said compound having the formula"}
{"WKU":"039312437","Title":"Production of phthalic anhydride","App_Date":"1974-01-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John E. Paustian;Abraham P. Gelbein","Assignee":"The Lummus Company","ICL_Class":"C07D30789","References":"2478464;2499055;2657230;3403170","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for producing phthalic anhydride, comprising:a. hydrolyzing a feed comprising phthalonitrile with an aqueous solution ofa tertiary aliphatic amine at a temperature of from 150.degree. to500.degree.F while removing evolved ammonia to produce the correspondingdiamine salt of phthalic acid; andb. thermally decomposing said diamine salt of phthalic acid whilecontinuously removing evolved amine to produce phthalic anhydride.2. The process of claim 1 wherein the diamine salt is decomposed attemperatures of 100.degree. to 450.degree.F.3. The process of claim 2 wherein diamine salt is decomposed in the form ofan aqueous solution.4. The process of claim 2 wherein the decomposition is effected by heatingthe aqueous solution in an inert liquid.5. The process of claim 4 wherein the decomposition is effected at atemperature to effect volatization of the inert liquid which functions asa stripping gas.6. The process of claim 2 wherein the feed in step (a) further containsphthalimide.7. The process of claim 2 wherein the amine is trimethylamine.8. The process of claim 2 wherein the amine isN,N,N ,N -tetramethylethylenediamine."}
{"WKU":"039312445","Title":"Thioureas","App_Date":"1974-05-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John Leheup Archibald;John Lambert Jackson","Assignee":"John Wyeth & Brother Limited","ICL_Class":"C07D30768","References":"","Claims":"We claim:1. A thiourea of the formula##EQU4##wherein R is selected from the group consisting of phenyl, furyl andphenyl monosubstituted by a member of the group consisting of halogen,lower alkyl, lower alkoxy and trifluoromethyl and R.sup.1 is selected fromthe group consisting of hydrogen and methyl.2. A thiourea as claimed in claim 1 which isN-benzoyl-N -(1-methyl-2-phenyl)ethylthiourea.3. A thiourea as claimed in claim 1 which isN-benzoyl-N -phenethylthiourea.4. A thiourea as claimed in claim 1 which isN-(4-methoxy-benzoyl)-N -(1-methyl-2-phenyl)ethylthiourea.5. A thiourea as claimed in claim 1 which isN-(3-trifluoro-methylbenzoyl)-N -(1-methyl-2-phenyl)ethylthiourea.6. A thiourea as claimed in claim 1 which isN-(4-chlorobenzoyl)-N -(1-methyl-2-phenyl)ethylthiourea.7. A thiourea as claimed in claim 1 which isN-furoyl-N -(1-methyl-2-phenyl)ethylthiourea.8. A thiourea as claimed in claim 1 which isN-(3-toluoyl)-N -(1-methyl-2-phenyl)ethylthiourea."}
{"WKU":"039312453","Title":"Flavoring agent","App_Date":"1974-07-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Max Winter;Fritz Gautschi;Ivon Flament;Max Stoll","Assignee":"Firmenich & Cie","ICL_Class":"C07D30754","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A furan sulfur compound of the formula##SPC66##wherein n is 1 and R is methyl, ethyl, propyl, 1-methyl-prop-1-en-1-yl,2-methyl-prop-1-en-1-yl, furyl or hydrogen; and wherein n is 2 and R ismethyl.2. A furan sulfur compound as in claim 1 in which said compound isfurfurylthiol acetate.3. A furan sulfur compound as in claim 1 in which said compound isfurfurylthiol propionate.4. A furan sulfur compound as in claim 1 in which said compound isfurfurylthiol butyrate.5. A furan sulfur compound as in claim 1 in which said compound isfurfurylthiol furoate.6. A furan sulfur compound as in claim 1 in which said compound isfurfurylthiol .beta.,.beta. - dimethylacrylate.7. A furan sulfur compound as in claim 1 in which said compound isfurfurylthiol tiglate.8. A furan sulfur compound as in claim 1 in which said compound is furfurylformate.9. A furan sulfur compound as in claim 1 in which said compound is2-(furyl-2)-ethanthiol acetate."}
{"WKU":"039312461","Title":"Flavoring agents","App_Date":"1974-07-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Max Winter;Fritz Gautschi;Ivon Flament;Max Stoll","Assignee":"Firmenich & Cie","ICL_Class":"C07D30738","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A furan sulfur compound of the formula:##SPC66##wherein when n is O, R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are methyl; when n is 1, R.sub.1and R.sub.2 are methyl or R.sub.1 is hydrogen and R.sub.2 is5-methylfuryl; and when n is 2, R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are hydrogen.2. A furan sulfur compound as in claim 1 in which said compound is5-methylfurfuryl methyl sulfide.3. A furan sulfur compound as in claim 1 in which said compound is furfuryl5-methylfuryl sulfide.4. A furan sulfur compound as in claim 1 in which said compound is5-methylfur-2-yl methyl sulfide.5. A furan sulfur compound as in claim 1 in which said compound is2-(furyl-2)-ethanthiol."}
{"WKU":"039312470","Title":"5-(Substituted)phenylfurfuryl alcohols","App_Date":"1974-12-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Stanford S. Pelosi, Jr.","Assignee":"Morton-Norwich Products, Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07D30742","References":"3458523","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A compound of the formula:##SPC2##wherein X is 4-nitro, 3,4-dichloro, 3-trifluoromethyl, 4-amino,4-acetamido, 4-methylsulfonyl, 4-cyano, or 4-chloro and R is methyl, ethylor chloromethyl.2. The compound 5-(4-nitrophenyl)-.alpha.-methylfurfuryl alcohol.3. The compound 5-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-.alpha.-methylfurfuryl alcohol.4. The compound 5-(3-trifluoromethylphenyl)-.alpha.-methylfurfuryl alcohol.5. The compound 5-(4-aminophenyl)-.alpha.-methylfurfuryl alcohol.6. The compound 5-(4-acetamidophenyl)-.alpha.-methylfurfuryl alcohol.7. The compound 5-(4-methylsulfonylphenyl)-.alpha.-methylfurfuryl alcohol.8. The compound 5-(4-cyanophenyl)-.alpha.-methylfurfuryl alcohol.9. The compound 5-(4-nitrophenyl)-.alpha.-chloromethylfurfuryl alcohol.10. The compound 5-(4-chlorophenyl)-.alpha.-ethylfurfuryl alcohol."}
{"WKU":"039312488","Title":"Reactive high polymer compound","App_Date":"1974-02-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Yukio Maekawa;Masato Satomura;Akira Umehara","Assignee":"Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"C07D30754","References":"2653866","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A monomer represented by the following formula;##SPC4##wherein R.sub.1 represents##EQU9##R.sub.2 represents H, C.sub.n H.sub.2n.sup.+1.sub. , Cl, Br, F or NO.sub.2; X represents O or S; Y represents H or CN; m represents 0 or 1; and n is1, 2, 3 or 4.2. A monomer represented by the following formula:##SPC5##wherein R.sub.2 is H, C.sub.n H.sub.2n.sup.+1.sub.  Cl, Br, F or NO.sub.2 ;R.sub.3 is H or CH.sub.3 ; R.sub.4 is##EQU10##--CH.sub.2 CH.sub.2 (OCH.sub.2 CH.sub.2).sub.n##EQU11##X is O or S; Y is H or CN; n is 1, 2, 3 or 4; and m is 0 or 1.3. A monomer represented by the following formula;##SPC6##wherein R.sub.2 represents H, C.sub.n H.sub.2n.sup.+1, Cl, Br, F orNO.sub.2 ; R.sub.5 represents -CH.sub.2).sub.m ; X represents O or S; Yrepresents H or CN; m represents 0 or 1; and n represents 1, 2, 3, or 4.4. .beta.-vinyloxyethyl-5-furyl-2,4-pentadienate."}
{"WKU":"039312496","Title":"Epoxidation using phthalocyanine catalysts","App_Date":"1974-02-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Adin Lee Stautzenberger","Assignee":"Celanese Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07D30120","References":"3333010;3350422;3351635;3391214;3505360","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property orprivilege is claimed are defined as follows:1. In a process for the catalytic reaction of an organic hydroperoxide withan ethylenically unsaturated hydrocarbon of 3 to about 20 carbon atomswhich is free of acetylenic unsaturation so as to introduce an oxiraneoxygen at the site of an ethylenic double bond in said hydrocarbon, theimprovement which comprises employing nickel phthalocyanine as catalystfor said reaction, the reaction being conducted in a reaction zonecontaining a liquid reaction medium consisting essentially ofethylenically-unsaturated hydrocarbon or mixtures ofethylenically-unsaturated hydrocarbon with an unreactive reaction solvent,together with said hydroperoxide and said catalyst, the reactiontemperature being about 80.degree. to 150.degree.C, the reaction pressurebeing one which is high enough to keep said reaction medium in the liquidphase, and the concentration of nickel phthalocyanine in said reactionmedium being at least about 10.sup.-.sup.6 molar.2. The process of claim 1 wherein the hydrocarbon is an aliphatic oralicyclic hydrocarbon of 3 to about 20 carbon atoms.3. The process of claim 1 wherein there are introduced into said reactionzone as reaction feedstocks about 0.8 to 10 ethylenic double bond moietiesper mole of said organic hydroperoxide introduced thereinto.4. The process of claim 3 wherein said organic hydroperoxide is of theformula R.sub.2 --OOH wherein R.sub.2 is a hydrocarbon, halo-substitutedhydrocarbon, hydroxyl-substituted hydrocarbon, or nitro-substitutedhydrocarbon of 3 to about 20 carbon atoms.5. The process of claim 4 wherein said organic hydroperoxide is of theformula R.sub.2 --OOH wherein R.sub.2 is a hydrocarbon radical of 3 toabout 20 carbon atoms free of ethylenic and acetylenic unsaturation.6. The process of claim 5 wherein said ethylenically-unsaturatedhydrocarbon is an aliphatic or alicyclic hydrocarbon of 3 to about 20carbon atoms having in the molecule a single double bond."}
{"WKU":"039312500","Title":"Heterocyclic compound as odor- and flavor-modifying agent","App_Date":"1974-11-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Alan Francis Thomas","Assignee":"Firmenich SA","ICL_Class":"C07D30734","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A pure compound of formula##SPC12##2. A pure compound selected from the group consisting of at least onecompound of formula##SPC13##"}
{"WKU":"039312518","Title":"Process for the manufacture of 1-nitroanthraquinone","App_Date":"1973-10-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Axel Vogel;Reinold Schmitz","Assignee":"Bayer Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07C 7937","References":"2302729;3786073;3798244","Claims":"We claim:1. In a process wherein a reaction mixture obtained by the nitration ofanthraquinone and comprising 1-nitroanthraquinone and containingdinitroanthraquinone as an impurity is treated at temperatures of75.degree.C-150.degree.C with an aqueous solution of a salt of sulfurousacid to solubilize said dinitroanthraquinone and the solubilizeddinitroanthraquinone is removed from said 1-nitroanthraquinone theimprovement which comprises conducting the treatment in the presence of aninert organic solvent selected from the group consisting of aromatic andaraliphatic hydrocarbons of the benzene and naphthalene series with up tothirty carbon atoms which may contain in the nucleus halogen, nitro,sulphone, ether, thioether, keto or carbalkoxy groups or mixtures thereofor aliphatic and alicyclic hydrocarbons with up to thirty carbon atomswhich may contain halogen, nitro, sulphone, sulfoxide, ether, thioether,hydroxyl, carbonyl, carboxyl, carboalkoxy, or carboaryloxy groups ormixtures thereof.2. Process according to claim 1, characterised in that per part by weightof 1-nitroanthraquinone containing dinitroanthraquinone, 0.01 - 40 partsby volume of organic solvent are employed.3. Process of claim 2 wherein 0.1-10 parts by volume of organic solvent areemployed.4. Process according to claim 1, characterised in that it is carried out atpH-values above 8.5. Process of claim 4, wherein the pH is from 9-12.6. Process of claim 1 wherein the temperature is 80.degree.-130.degree.C.7. Process according to claim 1, characterised in that water-immiscibleorganic solvents are used.8. Process according to claim 7, characterised in that aromatic oraliphatic optionally halogenated hydrocarbons are used.9. Process according to claim 8, characterised in that benzene, toluene,xylene, cumene, chlorobenzene, chlorotoluene or dichlorobenzene are used."}
{"WKU":"039312526","Title":"Process for the preparation of pure 1-nitroanthraquinone","App_Date":"1973-11-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Wolfgang Auge;Bernd Thelen;Karl-Werner Thiem;Rutger Neeff","Assignee":"Bayer Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07C 7937","References":"2874168;3766222;3798243;3798244","Claims":"We claim:1. In the process for manufacturing pure 1-nitroanthraquinone whereinanthraquinone is nitrated with at least 90% by weight nitric acid or 90%by weight of a mixture of nitric acid and another inorganic acid attemperatures of -40.degree. to +80.degree.C; the improvement whichcomprises adjusting the acid content to from 76% at a molar ratio of acidto nitration products of 19:1 to 96% at a molar ratio of 4:1 afternitration has occurred, allowing crude 1-nitroanthraquinone tocrystallize, and subsequently rectifying the precipitated reaction productat temperatures of 200.degree. to 400.degree.C and pressures of from 0.5to 100 mm. of mercury.2. The process of claim 1 wherein said nitration takes place with a molarratio of acid to anthraquinone of from 4:1 to 19:1.3. Process according to claim 1, characterised in that thenitroanthraquinone mixture obtained from the nitration is subjected to atreatment with alkali metal sulphites in the presence of water prior tothe rectification.4. Process according to claim 1, characterised in that the nitration ofanthraquinone is carried out at temperatures of 20.degree. to 60.degree.Cand molar ratios of nitric acid to anthraquinone of 8:1 to 19:1, theconditions are then adjusted to conditions between nitric acidconcentrations of 79% at molar ratios of nitric acid to nitration productsof 15:1 and nitric acid concentrations of 93% at molar ratios of 6:1, andthe reaction product which precipitates is subjected to a rectification.5. Process according to claim 1 characterized in that the reaction productis rectified together with a diluent with is inert under the rectificationconditions and which boils between 100.degree. and 300.degree.C and the1-nitroanthraquinone which crystallizes is isolated from the condensate.6. Process of claim 5 wherein the diluent is selected from the groupconsisting of high-boiling hydrocarbons and silicone oils.7. Process according to claim 5, characterised in that a hydrocarbon isused as diluent.8. Process according to claim 7, characterised in that a paraffin isemployed.9. Process according to claim 5, characterised in that a silicone oil isemployed as a diluent.10. Process of claim 1 wherein the nitration is continuous."}
{"WKU":"039312534","Title":"Process for the production of aminoanthraquinone","App_Date":"1973-08-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Franz Krenmueller;Heinrich Till","Assignee":"Sandoz Ltd., (Sandoz AG)","ICL_Class":"C09B  120","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for producing an aminoanthraquinone or a diaminoanthraquinoneor mixtures thereof from a nitroanthraquinone selected from the groupconsisting of 1-nitroanthraquinone, 2-nitroanthraquinone,1,2-dinitroanthraquinone, 1,6-dinitroanthraquinone,1,7-dinitroanthraquinone, 1,8-dinitroanthraquinone,1,5-dinitroanthraquinone, 2,7-dinitroanthraquinone,2,6-dinitroanthraquinone, and mixtures thereof, comprising the steps of:1) dissolving said nitroanthraquinone in an inert organic solvent selectedfrom the group consisting of a liquid substituted or unsubstitutedaromatic hydrocarbon, a liquid ether and a liquid carboxylic acid ester,the weight ratio of solvent to nitroanthraquinone being between 100:1 and1:2, 2) adding to said mixture, based on the weight of nitroanthraquinone,between 0.05 percent and 10 percent of a metal hydrogenation catalystselected from the group consisting of noble metal and Raney nickel; 3)heating the resultant mixture to an upper temperature of between50.degree. and 200.degree.C.; 4) hydrogenating the resultant heatedmixture with molecular hydrogen at a partial pressure between 0.5 and 15atmospheres, while maintaining said upper temperature; 5) separating theundissolved spent catalyst at said upper temperature from the reactionmixture containing dissolved aminoanthraquinone; 6) cooling the reactionmixture to a lower temperature to precipitate the aminoanthraquinone, saidlower temperature being between 40.degree. and 150.degree.C. below theupper temperature; and 7) recovering the precipitated aminoanthraquinone,said process characterized in that the inert solvent is such that theresulting aminoanthraquinone is soluble therein at an upper temperatureand insoluble therein at a lower temperature, the catalyst being removedat the upper temperature.2. The process of claim 1 wherein said nitroanthraquinone is selected fromthe group consisting of 1-nitroanthraquinone, 2-nitroanthraquinone, or amixture thereof.3. The process of claim 1 wherein said nitroanthraquinone is selected fromthe group consisting of 1,2-dinitroanthraquinone,1,5-dinitroanthraquinone, 1,6-dinitroanthraquinone,1,7-dinitroanthraquinone, 1,8-dinitroanthraquinone,2,6-dinitroanthraquinone, 2,7-dinitroanthraquinone, or a mixture thereof.4. The process of claim 1 wherein said nitroanthraquinone comprises amixture of mononitroanthraquinone and dinitroanthraquinone.5. The process of claim 2, wherein a single compound or a mixture in whicha single compound predominates is used.6. The process of claim 5, wherein 1-nitroanthraquinone is used andpredominates to at least 85 percent by weight.7. The process of claim 1, wherein the inert organic solvent is a liquidsubstituted or unsubstituted aromatic hydrocarbon.8. The process of claim 7, wherein the inert organic solvent is an aromatichydrocarbon petroleum fraction.9. The process of claim 8, wherein the aromatic hydrocarbon petroleumfraction has a boiling range of 170.degree.-200.degree.C.10. The process of claim 1, wherein the inert organic solvent is a liquidether.11. The process of claim 10, wherein the liquid ether is an aryl-alkylether.12. The process of claim 11, wherein the aryl-alkyl ether is anisole,phenetol, hydroquinone dimethyl ether or resorcinol dimethyl ether.13. The process of claim 10, wherein the ether is an aliphatic ether.14. The process of claim 13, wherein the aliphatic ether is a glycol ether.15. The process of claim 14, wherein the glycol ether is monoethyldiethylene glycol.16. The process of claim 1, wherein the inert organic solvent is a liquidcarboxylic acid ester.17. The process of claim 16, wherein the liquid carboxylic acid ester isethyl benzoate.18. The process of claim 1, wherein the hydrogenation catalyst comprises anoble metal catalyst.19. The process of claim 18, wherein the noble metal catalyst is platinumor palladium.20. The process of claim 19, wherein the catalyst is palladium on a carrierof active charcoal.21. The process of claim 1, wherein the hydrogenation is effected at atemperature of between 80.degree. and 160.degree.C.22. The process of claim 1, wherein said ratio is between 20:1 to 1:1.23. The process of claim 1, wherein the amount of catalyst employed isbetween 0.1 and 5 percent of the weight of the nitroanthraquinone."}
{"WKU":"039312542","Title":"Process for the preparation of anthraquinone","App_Date":"1974-05-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Raymond Janin;Leon Krumenacker","Assignee":"Rhone-Poulenc S.A.","ICL_Class":"C07C 4968;C09B  106","References":"1787416;1787417;1880322;2643269;2824881","Claims":"We claim:1. In a process for the preparation of anthraquinone which comprisesoxidising anthracene by means of oxygen or an oxygen-containing gas in theliquid phase, in an inert organic diluent, in the presence of a coppersalt, the improvement wherein the copper salt is a halogen-copper bondfree copper salt of an inorganic or carboxylic acid and the organicdiluent is a compound of the general formula:##EQU2##in which R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 denote a hydrogen atom, R  denotes a linearor branched alkylene radical containing up to 10 carbon atoms, and n is aninteger from 1 to 3.2. Process according to claim 1 in which the copper derivative is cupricsulphate.3. Process according to claim 1 in which the copper derivative is cupricacetate.4. Process according to claim 1, in which the diluent is ethylene glycol.5. Process according to claim 1 in which the reaction is carried out at atemperature from 20.degree. to 200.degree.C with an oxygen partialpressure from 0.1 to 20 bars.6. Process according to claim 1 in which the copper derivative is presentin an amount of at least 1 .times. 10.sup.-.sup.5 gram atom of copper permol of anthracene.7. Process according to claim 1 in which anthracene is oxidised in ethyleneglycol in the presence of cupric sulphate and antimony pentachloride.8. Process according to claim 1 which is carried out in the presence of atleast one activator which is an iron halide, an aluminum halide, borontrifluoride, an antimony halide, an arsenic halide and a bismuth halide,or an inorganic acid with a pK in water of less than 2 other thanhydrochloric acid.9. Process according to claim 8, in which the activator is antimonypentachloride.10. Process according to claim 8 in which the activator is present in anamount of at least 1 .times. 10.sup.-.sup.5 mol per mol of anthracene.11. Process according to claim 1 in which n is 1."}
{"WKU":"039312550","Title":"Process for the production of 5-nitro-1,4-naphthoquinone","App_Date":"1974-11-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Friedrich Durholz;Rolf Putter","Assignee":"Bayer Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07C 7602","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Process for producing 5-nitro-1,4-naphthoquinone which comprisesreducing an oxime selected from the group of8-nitro-1,4-naphthoquinone-1-oxime, 5-nitro-1,4-naphthoquinone-1-oxime andmixtures of the foregoing in a reaction medium selected from the group ofwater, an organic solvent and mixtures of water and an organic solvent inthe presence of iron (II) ions and a hydrogen halide at a temperature inthe range of from -20.degree. to 100.degree.C, and thereafter oxidizingthe naphthol product formed, or the corresponding salt, optionally withoutintermediate isolation, at a temperature in the range of from -10.degree.to 100.degree.C to form the desired 5-nitro-1,4-naphthoquinone.2. Process of claim 1 wherein reduction is carried out at a temperature inthe range of from -5.degree. to 70.degree.C.3. Process of claim 2 wherein the temperature is from 10.degree. to45.degree.C.4. Process of claim 1 wherein oxidation is carried out at a temperature inthe range of from 20.degree. to 80.degree.C.5. Process of claim 4 wherein the temperature is from 4.degree. to60.degree.C.6. Process of claim 1 wherein the iron (III) ions formed during reductionare used as an oxidizing agent for the oxidizing step."}
{"WKU":"039312569","Title":"Chemical process for production of bile acids","App_Date":"1975-02-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William H. Saltzman","Assignee":"Intellectual Property Development Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07J  900","References":"3846411","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method for the production of substantially pure bile acids fromnatural animal bile, which comprises:a. Extracting the naturally occurring bile acids from the natural animalbile by the treatment thereof with a multiphasic organic solvent systemhaving at least two phase, in one phase of which the said bile acids aresoluble and the naturally occurring pigments and impurities containedtherein are not soluble, and in the remaining phases of which the saidimpurities and pigments are soluble and the said bile acids are notsoluble;b. Hydrolyzing the said extracted bile acids by treating with an alkalimetal base;c. Esterifying the resultant hydrolyzed bile acids by treating with analcohol esterification agent;d. Isolating the desired esterified bile acid; ande. Recovering the resultant substantially pure free bile acid.2. The method of removing bile pigments and other impurities from naturalanimal bile, which comprises:a. Substantially dehydrating said natural animal bile;b. Esterifying said substantially dehydrated natural animal bile bytreatment with a suitable organic esterification agent;c. Subjecting said esterified natural animal bile to a multiphasic organicsolvent system having at least two phases in one phase of which the bileacid fraction of said animal bile is soluble and the pigments and otherimpurities thereof are not soluble, and in the remaining phases of whichthe said pigments and other impurities are soluble and the bile acidfraction is not soluble;d. Separating and recovering the substantially pigment and impurity-freebile acid fraction of the natural animal bile.3. The method of claim 2, wherein the natural animal bile is derived frombirds.4. The method of claim 2, wherein the natural animal bile is selected fromthe bile of chicken, turkeys, geese and ducks.5. The method of claim 2, wherein the natural animal bile is chicken bileor turkey bile.6. The method of claim 2, wherein in step c., the multiphasic organicsolvent system is selected from the group consisting of halogenatedhydrocarbon: alcohol; aromatic organic solvent: alcohol; aromatic organicsolvent: alkane; ether: alcohol; and halogenated hydrocarbon: ketone.7. The method of claim 2, wherein in step b., the organic esterificationagent is an alcohol.8. The method of claim 2, wherein in step b., the organic esterificationagent is an alkyl esterification agent.9. The method of claim 2, wherein the natural animal bile is chicken orturkey bile; wherein in step b., the organic esterification agent is analkyl esterification agent; and wherein in step c., the multiphasicorganic solvent system is halogenated hydrocarbon: alcohol."}
{"WKU":"039312577","Title":"Polyene compounds","App_Date":"1974-08-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Beverly Ann Pawson","Assignee":"Hoffmann-La Roche Inc.","ICL_Class":"C11C  100;C11C  300","References":"2529498;3247239;3761495;3781313;3876673","Claims":"I claim:1. A compound selected from compounds represented by the formula##SPC12##wherein R.sub.1 is a 2,6,6-trimethyl-cyclohex-1-en-1-yl group or a phenylgroup substituted in positions 2 and 6 by a member selected from the groupconsisting of halogen, lower alkyl and lower alkoxy and in at least one ofpositions 3, 4 and 5 by a member selected from the group consisting ofhalogen, hydroxy, lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, lower alkoxy, loweralkenoxy, lower alkanoyloxy and R.sub.2 is carboxyl .2. A compound in accordance with claim 1 wherein said compound is3,7-dimethyl-9-(2,6,6-trimethyl-cyclohex-1-en-1-yl)-nona-2,6,8-trien-1-oicacid.3. A compound in accordance with claim 1 wherein said compound is3,7-dimethyl-9-(4-methoxy-2,3,6-trimethyl-phenyl)-nona-2,6,8-trien-1-oicacid.4. A compound in accordance with claim 1 wherein said compound is3,7-dimethyl-9-(3-chloro-2,6-dimethyl-4-methoxy-phenyl)-nona-2,6,8-trien-1-oic acid."}
{"WKU":"039312585","Title":"Recovery of sugar cane wax","App_Date":"1974-12-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Alan W. Lake","Assignee":"Chemical Services (Proprietary) Limited","ICL_Class":"C11B 1300;C11B  110","References":"2428813;2476974;2499008;2508002","Claims":"I claim:1. A method of recovering sugar cane wax from filter cake derived from thetreatment of sugar cane including the steps of forming an aqueous slurryof the filter cake, the slurry containing a quaternary ammonium compoundas a cationic surface active agent to weaken the bond between wax andfibers in the slurry, if the slurry is alkaline adjusting the pH of theslurry to the acid side, heating the slurry to melt the wax, adding anextractant vehicle which is a solvent for the wax to the slurry to extractthe wax from the aqueous phase, and separating the extractant vehiclecontaining the wax from the liquid phase of the slurry.2. The method of claim 1 in which the surface active wetting agent ismyristyl dimethyl benzene ammonium chloride.3. The method of claim 1 which the pH of the slurry is adjusted to between4 and 5.4. The method of claim 3 in which the pH of the slurry is adjusted by theaddition of hydrochloric acid thereto.5. The method of claim 1 in which the slurry and extractant vehicle aregently agitated by boiling the slurry, the mass thereafter being allowedto stand to permit the extractant and aqueous phases to separatewhereafter the extractant is decanted off.6. The method of claim 1 in which the wax is recovered from the extractantvehicle by cooling the extractant, allowing the wax to crystallise andseparating the wax from the extractant by filtration or by centrifuging.7. The method of claim 1 in which the extractant is added to the slurryonly after the latter has been heated to melt the wax.8. The method of claim 6 in which the extractant vehicle is kerosene.9. The method of claim 1 in which the slurry is formed by mixing the filtercake with 1 to 5 times its volume of water whereafter between 0.05 and 0.5percent by volume of surface active agent is added thereto and 10 to 30percent of extractant vehicle.10. The method of claim 1, the extractant vehicle being kerosene, theslurry being formed by mixing the filter cake with 1 to 5 times its volumeof water whereafter between 0.05 and 0.5 percent by volume of the surfaceactive agent is added thereto and 10 to 30 percent of extractant vehicle,the slurry and the extractant vehicle being gently agitated by boiling theslurry, the mass thereafter being allowed to stand to permit theextractant and aqueous phases to separate whereafter the extractant isdecanted off, the wax is recovered from the extractant vehicle by coolingthe extractant, allowing the wax to crystallize and thereafter separatingthe wax from the extractant."}
{"WKU":"039312593","Title":"Process for the preparation of carboxylic acids","App_Date":"1971-11-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Herbert Lepper;Werner Stein","Assignee":"Henkel & Cie G.m.b.H.","ICL_Class":"C08H 1736","References":"2365290;2585129;2862942;3678107;3692809","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for the preparation of carboxylic acids consisting essentiallyof the steps of reacting an organic material starting substance selectedfrom the group consisting of (a) an alkane vicinal diol having 6 to 18carbon atoms having the formula##EQU4##wherein R is alkyl having 4 to 16 carbon atoms and wherein R.sub.1 ishydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 12 carbon atoms with the proviso that thetotal number of carbon atoms in said diol is from 6 to 18 and that whenR.sub.1 is alkyl at least one of R or R.sub.1 has at least 6 carbon atoms,(b) monoesters or diesters of said alkane vicinal diol with lower alkanoicacids, and (c) mixtures of (a) and (b) with nitric acid having aconcentration of at least 65% in the absence of an oxidation catalyst attemperatures from 40.degree. to 100.degree.C with the molar ratio of diolor diol ester to nitric acid being from 1:10 to 1:20 to produce saidcarboxylic acids; and recovering said carboxylic acids.2. The process as claimed in claim 1 in which the lower alkanoic acid of(b) has 1 to 2 carbon atoms.3. The process as claimed in claim 1 in which recovering said carboxylicacids consists essentially of the steps dissolving the unreacted startingsubstance and the formed carboxylic acid in an inert organic solvent toproduce an organic solution; extracting the carboxylic acids from theorganic solution with a dilute aqueous solution of a strong base;isolating the base extracted carboxylic acids by acidification with adilute strong acid; and again reacting said unreacted starting materialwith said nitric acid.4. The process as claimed in claim 1 in which the nitric acid has aconcentration of 70 - 85%.5. The process as claimed in claim 1 in which the reaction temperature isbetween 60.degree. and 80.degree.C.6. The process as claimed in claim 1 in which mixtures of substances areused as starting substances which have been obtained by hydroxylation ofrelatively long-chain olefins having 6 to 18 carbon atoms by means of anoxidation agent, selected from the group consisting of peracetic acid,acetic acid/H.sub.2 O.sub.2, formic acid/H.sub.2 O.sub.2 and the mixturesthereof, followed by separation of excess solvent.7. The process as claimed in claim 1 in which the reaction is carried outin the presence of a solvent which does not react with nitric acid underthe reaction conditions and which has a boiling point of at least40.degree.C above the reaction temperature used."}
{"WKU":"039312607","Title":"Organo metallic compounds","App_Date":"1974-02-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kevin M. Foley;Francesco M. Vigo","Assignee":"Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07F  700","References":"2511013;2512063;2709174;2883348;3031425;3081327;3190892;3203812;3471411;3781315","Claims":"We claim:1. A compound having the formula##EQU64##wherein M is a tetravalent metal selected from the group consisting oftitanium, tin, germanium and zirconium, R is hydrogen or alkyl, R.sub.2 isa group of the formula##EQU65##wherein R.sub.1 is hydrogen or methyl, X is halogen, a and b are eachintegers from 1 to 3, with the sum of a and b being equal to 4.2. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein X is chlorine or bromine.3. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein M is titanium.4. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein a is 3 and b is 1.5. A compound having the formula##EQU66##wherein R is hydrogen or alkyl, X is halogen, R.sub.2 is a group of theformula##EQU67##wherein R.sub.1 is hydrogen or methyl, and a and b are each integers from1 to 2, with the sum of a and b being equal to 3.6. A compound as defined in claim 5 wherein X is chlorine or bromine.7. A compound as defined in claim 5 wherein a is 2 and b is 1.8. A compound of the formula##EQU68##wherein M is a tetravalent metal selected from the group consisting oftitanium tin, germanium and zirconium, X is halogen, R is hydrogen oralkyl, R.sub.2 is selected from the group consisting of aryl, alkyl,alkenyl and a group of the formula##EQU69##wherein R.sub.1 is hydrogen or methyl and R.sub.3 is a divalent organicgroup selected from the group consisting of alkylene, alkyleneoxyalkylene,oxyalkyleneoxy, oxyalkyleneoxyalkyleneoxy, a group having the formula##SPC4##and a group having the formula##SPC5##11. A compound selected from the group consisting of1. a compound of the formula##EQU70##and 2. a compound of the formula##EQU71##wherein X is halogen, R is hydrogen or alkyl, R.sub.2 is selected from thegroup consisting of aryl, alkyl, alkenyl and a group of the formula##EQU72##wherein R.sub.1 is hydrogen or methyl, and R.sub.3 is a divalent organicgroup selected from the group consisting of alkylene, alkyleneoxyalkylene,oxyalkyleneoxy, oxyalkyleneoxyalkyleneoxy, a group having the formula##SPC6##and a group having the formula##SPC7##12. A compound as defined in claim 11 wherein X is chlorine or bromine.13. A method of preparing organo metallic compounds by contacting, in theliquid stage, (1) an antimony halide and (2) an alkylene oxide having theformula##EQU73##wherein R is hydrogen or alkyl, and (3) an epoxide having the formula##EQU74##wherein R.sub.2 is a group of the formula##EQU75##wherein R.sub.1 is hydrogen or methyl.14. The method of claim 13 in which from 1 to 2 epoxide equivalents of (2)are contacted with 1 to 2 epoxide equivalents of (3) per mole of antimonyhalide.15. the method of claim 13 in which the antimony halide is antimonychloride or antimony bromide.16. The method of claim 13 in which the reaction produced includescompounds having the formula##EQU76##wherein X is halogen and a and b, each, are integers from 1 to 2 with thesum of a and b being equal to 3."}
{"WKU":"039312615","Title":"Bromosalicylanilide biocidal agents","App_Date":"1971-09-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Albert F. Strobel","Assignee":"GAF Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07F  306","References":"3057920;3064048","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Compounds of the following general formula:##SPC8##wherein R is hydrogen or halogen, n is a whole number of 1 or 2, l is 1/2or 1 and M is selected from the group consisting of alkali metals,alkaline earth metals, copper and zinc.2. A compound according to claim 1 wherein R is hydrogen, chlorine orbromine.3. A compound according to claim 1 wherein R is hydrogen, n is 1 and M issodium l is 1.4. A compound according to claim 1 wherein R is hydrogen, n is 1 and M iscalcium l is 1/2.5. A compound according to claim 1 wherein R is hydrogen, n is 1 and M ismagnesium l is 1/2.6. A compound according to claim 1 wherein R is hydrogen, n is 1 and M iscopper l is 1/2.7. A compound according to claim 1 wherein R is hydrogen, n is 1 and M iszinc l is 1/2.8. A compound according to claim 1 wherein R is bromine, n is 1 and M issodium, calcium, magnesium, copper or zinc.9. A compound according to claim 1 wherein n is 2."}
{"WKU":"039312623","Title":"Hydrophilic and difficultly volatile biocidal triorganotin compounds","App_Date":"1974-07-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hermann Otto Wirth;Hans Joachim Lorenz;Hans-Helmut Friedrich","Assignee":"Ciba-Geigy Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07F  722","References":"2641596;2704756;2997496;3015644;3095434;3129236;3242201;3525760;3793356;3798249","Claims":"We claim:1. A triorganotin compound of the general formula I##EQU48##wherein R.sub.1, R.sub.2 and R.sub.3 each independently represents alinear or branched aliphatic group with 1 to 16 carbon atoms, which can besaturated or singly olefinically unsaturated, a cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl orphenyl group, the sum of the carbon atoms of the substituents R.sub.1,R.sub.2 and R.sub.3 being at most 18, and A represents a stronglyhydrophilic residue selected from the group consisting ofa. a polyethylene oxide of the formula"}
{"WKU":"039312640","Title":"Method for recovering solubilized organotin halides","App_Date":"1974-08-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William A. Larkin;Jean W. Bouchoux","Assignee":"M & T Chemicals Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07F  722","References":"2569492;3297732;3389158;3404167;3415857;3519665","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method for isolating an organotin halide of the general formula(CH.sub.3).sub.a SnX.sub.4.sub.-a or C.sub.4 H.sub.9 SnX.sub.3, wherein ais the integer 2 or 3 and X represents chlorine, bromine or iodine, insubstantially pure form from an aqueous solution containing more thanabout 2% by weight of said organotin halide, the method consistingessentially of the following steps:1. combining said aqueous solution with an amount of a chemically inertwater-soluble, inorganic salt sufficient to attain a concentration of from50 g. to said salt per 100 cc. of water up to the concentration equivalentto a saturated or super-saturated solution of said salt;2. maintaining the temperature of the solution at between ambient and theboiling point of the solution as required to effect a separation of theorganotin halide from the aqueous phase;3. isolating the organotin halide.2. A method as described in claim 1 wherein X is chlorine.3. A method as described in claim 1 wherein the water-soluble inorganicsalt is a halide of calcium, zinc or manganese.4. A method as described in claim 3 wherein the halide is a chloride. percent.5. A method as described in claim 4 wherein the chloride is calciumchloride. per cent.6. A method as described in claim 1 wherein the concentration of saidinorganic salt is equivalent to a saturated solution of said salt in thepresence of the organotin halide."}
{"WKU":"039312658","Title":"Process for producing anionic metal-containing sulfonates","App_Date":"1973-11-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Roy C. Sias","Assignee":"Continental Oil Company","ICL_Class":"C07F  968","References":"2451549;2760970;2809209;2824126;3025259;3192158","Claims":"Having thus described the invention, I claim:1. A process of producing a reaction product of a polyamine compound, anoil-soluble sulfonic acid and arsenic oxide or a hydrate thereofcomprising:a. admixing said arsenic oxide or hydrate thereof and said oil-solublesulfonic acid with said polyamine compound, said sulfonic acid beingpresent in sufficient amount to neutralize at least one amine group ofsaid polyamine, and at least one amine group of said polyamine beingavailable to react with said arsenic oxide or hydrate thereof;b. agitating and heating the resulting mixture to the reflux temperature ofsaid mixture for a period of time sufficient to allow formation of saidreaction product; andc. recovering said reaction product.2. The process of claim 1 wherein said oil-soluble sulfonic acid is dilutedwith from about 5 to 75 weight percent of an inert volatile solvent andsaid reflux temperature is in the range of about 60.degree. to 125.degree.C.3. The process of claim 2 wherein said inert volatile solvent is a lowboiling hydrocarbon selected from the group consisting of hexane andnaptha.4. The process of claim 1 wherein said reaction mixture is maintained atits reflux temperature for a period of time ranging from about 0.5 to 12hours.5. The process of claim 4 which includes the step of admixing from about 5to about 75 weight percent water, based on the amount of sulfonic acidemployed, to said mixture prior to same being refluxed.6. The process of claim 4 which includes the step of admixing from about 50to about 300 weight percent of a high boiling alcohol, based on the amountof sulfonic acid employed, to said mixture prior to same being refluxed.7. The process of claim 1 wherein the refluxed mixture is stripped ofvolatile components by heating said refluxed mixture to a temperaturewithin the range of about 125.degree. to 175.degree. C. and includes thestep of admixing from about 10 to 300 weight percent of a nonvolatileorganic carrier component based on the amount of sulfonic acid employed,to said reflux mixture during refluxing of same.8. The process of claim 7 which includes the additional purification stepsof stripping the product with an inert gas selected from the groupconsisting of nitrogen, carbon dioxide, air and mixtures thereof for aperiod of time ranging from about 0.2 to 6 hours and filtering the gasstripped product through an inert absorbent material selected from thegroup consisting of alumina, diatomaceous earth and pumice.9. The process of claim 1 wherein the polyamine compound has a molecularweight of at least 100.10. The process of claim 9 wherein said oil-soluble sulfonic acid wasderived from an alkyl-aromatic compound which was predominantlydi-n-alkylbenzenes having a molecular weight of about 420, and saidnonvolatile carrier component is pale oil.11. The process of claim 10 wherein said nonvolatile carrier is dilutedwith a solvent selected from the group consisting of petroleum naptha,hexane, heptane, octane, benzene, toluene, and xylene.12. The process of claim 9 wherein said polyamine compound is1,3-diaminopropane having an alkyl moiety selected from the groupconsisting of N-coco, N-tallow, N-soya, and N-oleyl."}
{"WKU":"039312666","Title":"Organo silicon compounds","App_Date":"1973-04-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kevin M. Foley;Francesco M. Vigo","Assignee":"Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07F  704;C07F  718","References":"2511013;2529956;3555051","Claims":"We claim:1. Organo silicon compounds prepared by reaction of a halosilane selectedfrom the group consisting of an organo halosilane having the formula"}
{"WKU":"039312674","Title":"Silylated bisphenol","App_Date":"1974-07-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"George L. Brode","Assignee":"Union Carbide Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07F  704;C07F  708;C07F  718","References":"2611776;3055864;3328450;3595974","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A silane compound having the formula:##SPC3##wherein R is a lower alkyl radical; n is 1 or 2; m is 0 or 1; the sum of n+ m is 2; a is 0, 1 or 2; and X is a hydrolyzable group.2. A silane compound as defined in claim 1, wherein n is 2.3. A silane compound as defined in claim 1, wherein X is a methoxy radical.4. 2,2-bis[4-hydroxy-3-(gamma-trimethoxysilylpropyl)phenyl] propane."}
{"WKU":"039312682","Title":"Methylhydrazinomethyl-substituted benzoic acid amides","App_Date":"1970-05-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Werner Bollag;Hugo Gutmann;Balthasar Hegedus;Ado Kaiser;Albert Langemann;Marcel Muller;Paul Zeller","Assignee":"Hoffmann-La Roche Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07C10376;C07C10378;C07C10382;C07C10322","References":"3520926","Claims":"We claim:1. A compound selected from the group consisting of compounds of theformula##SPC5##and pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts thereof; whereinR.sub.4 is hydrogen and R.sub.5 is selected from the group consisting ofhydroxy-lower alkyl, (2-methylhydrazinomethyl)phenyl, hydrogen, loweralkoxy-lower alkyl, cyclo-lower alkyl, and cyano-lower alkyl.2. A compound as in claim 1 which is4-[(2-methylhydrazino)methyl]-benzamide.3. A compound as in claim 1 which is 4-[(2-methylhydrazino)methyl]-benzoicacid (3-methoxypropyl)-amide.4. A compound as in claim 1 which is 4-[(2-methylhydrazino)methyl]-benzoicacid (2-cyanoethyl)-amide.5. A compound as in claim 1 which is 4-[(2-methylhydrazino)methyl]-benzoicacid cyclopropylamide.6. A compound as in claim 1 which is4,4 -bis-[(2-methylhydrazino)-methyl]-benzanilide.7. A compound as in claim 1 of the formula##SPC6##8. A compound as in claim 7 which is 4-[(2-methylhydrazino)methyl]-benzoicacid (2-hydroxyethyl)-amide."}
{"WKU":"039312690","Title":"Alpha-acyl substituted naphthylacetic acids","App_Date":"1975-02-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Julius Diamond;Ching Tan Tsuei","Assignee":"William H. Rorer, Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07C15307","References":"3829467","Claims":"We claim:1. A compound which is .alpha.-acetylthio-6-methoxy-2-naphthylacetic acid.2. A compound which is .alpha.-propionylthio-6-methoxy-2-naphthylaceticacid.3. A compound which is .alpha.-benzoylthio-6-methoxy-2-naphthylacetic acid.4. A compound which is .alpha.-thioacetylthio-6-methoxy-2-naphthylaceticacid.5. A compound which is .alpha.-thioformylthio-6-methoxy-2-naphthylaceticacid."}
{"WKU":"039312704","Title":"Process for producing 2-thia substituted 1,4 diones","App_Date":"1975-01-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William J. Evers;Bernard J. Mayers","Assignee":"International Flavors & Fragrances Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07C15307","References":"2630452;3441589","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for producing a substituted or unsubstituted 3-thiaalkane-4-one-1-al comprising the step of intimately admixing analk-2-ene-4-one-1-al having the structure:##SPC21##with a sulfur compound having the formula"}
{"WKU":"039312712","Title":"Process for the production of secondary alcohol ether sulfates","App_Date":"1971-02-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Horst Baumann;Wilfried Umbach;Werner Stein","Assignee":"Henkel & Cie G.m.b.H.","ICL_Class":"C07C13900;C07C13910;C07C14100","References":"2174761;3413331;3755407","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for the production of secondary alcohol ether sulfates whichconsists essentially of reacting crude adducts of secondary alkanolshaving from 6 to 22 carbon atoms adducted with 1 to 10 mols of an alkyleneoxide selected from the group consisting of ethylene oxide and propyleneoxide, said crude adduct having at least 1 mol of oxypropylene per mol ofalcohol and being obtained from the oxyalkylation reaction withoutintervening purification, with from 1.0 to 1.2 mols per mol of said crudeadduct, of a sulfating agent stronger than concentrated sulfuric acidselected from the group consisting of sulfur trioxide, sulfur trioxide/airmixtures, oleum and chlorosulfonic acid, at temperatures of from10.degree.C to 30.degree.C, and recovering said secondary alcohol ethersulfate having a high degree of sulfation.2. The process of claim 1 wherein said crude adduct of said secondaryalkanol is a propylene oxide adduct containing from 1.5 to 5 mols ofpropylene oxide per mol of secondary alkanol.3. The process of claim 1 wherein said secondary alkanol was prepared bythe oxidation of a paraffin.4. The process of claim 1 wherein said sulfating agent stronger thanconcentrated sulfuric acid is chlorosulfonic acid.5. The process of claim 1 wherein said sulfating agent stronger thansulfuric acid is utilized in an amount of from 1.02 to 1.1 mols per mol ofsaid crude adduct of said secondary alkanol.6. The process of claim 1 wherein said crude adduct of said secondaryalkanol is first adducted with propylene oxide and then with from 1 to 4mols of ethylene oxide.7. The process of claim 1 wherein said crude adduct of said secondaryalkanol is first adducted with from 1 to 4 mols of ethylene oxide and thenwith said propylene oxide.8. The process of claim 1 wherein said crude adduct of said secondaryalkanol is adducted with a mixture of from 1 to 4 mols of ethylene oxideand said propylene oxide."}
{"WKU":"039312720","Title":"Biodegradable detergents","App_Date":"1974-12-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Herman S. Bloch","Assignee":"Universal Oil Products Company","ICL_Class":"C07C14110","References":"3332978;3652684","Claims":"I claim as my Invention:1. A biodegradable detergent compound of the formula:##SPC3##in which M is an alkali metal and R is an alkyl group of from 1 to about 14carbon atoms.2. The biodegradable detergent compound of claim 1 beingsodium(n-octyl-3-cyclohexenyl)methano sulfate.3. The biodegradable detergent compound of claim 1 beingsodium(n-tetradecyl-3-cyclohexenyl)methano sulfate.4. The biodegradable detergent compound of claim 1 beingpotassium(n-decyl-3-cyclohexenyl)methano sulfate.5. The biodegradable detergent compound of claim 1 beingsodium(n-dodecyl-3-cyclohexenyl)methano sulfate.6. The biodegradable detergent compound of claim 1 beingpotassium(n-octyl-3-cyclohexenyl)methano sulfate."}
{"WKU":"039312739","Title":"Method for sulphonatizing and sulphatizing organic compounds with","App_Date":"1974-03-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Agostino Lanteri","Assignee":"Costruzioni Meccaniche G. Mazzoni S.p.A.","ICL_Class":"C07C14102;C07C14316;C07C14312;C07C14334","References":"2923728;3169142;3270038;3531518","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An improved process for continuously sulfonating and sulfating a liquidorganic compound selected from the group consisting of olefins, aromatichydrocarbons, alkyl aromatic hydrocarbons, fatty alcohols, fatty acids,fatty acid esters, ethoxylated fatty alcohols, and ethoxylated alkylphenols, wherein the liquid reactant consisting of said sulfonatable andsulfatable organic compound and a gaseous reactant consisting of a mixtureof sulfur trioxide and inert gas are fed, each from a single space,through distribution means, to a plurality of externally cooled parallelreaction tubes with downward annular two-phase flow to effect sulfonationand sulfation of said compound, which process comprises: introducing saidliquid reactant circumferentially into said tubes, introducing saidgaseous reactant centrally into said tubes immediately beyond theintroducing openings for said liquid reactant, introducing to said tubesfurther inert gas from a further separated single space through saidintroducing openings and in contact with said liquid reactant, the flowrate of said further inert gas being in the range of 8-19 percent of theoverall inert gas flow rate in each tube, the pressure drops of saidfurther inert gas at the entrance of said tubes being in the range of0.5-8 percent of the pressure drop in the distribution means of saidgaseous reactant, so that said further inert gas actually distributes tosaid tubes producing an overall gas flow rate in each tube which is adecreasing function of the resistance therein to the gas flow, therebysubstantially to equalize the pressure downstream of all the distributionmeans for the liquid and gaseous reactants in order to provide for uniformdistribution of the reactants to said reaction tubes without limiting thepressure drop therein, which is utilized as an energy factor forincreasing liquid reactant flow rate, promoting heat removal andinterphase mass transfer and reducing liquid phase residence time.2. A process according to claim 1, wherein the temperature in said reactiontubes is in the range of about 30.degree.-110.degree.C.3. A process according to claim 1, wherein the pressure drop in saiddistribution means for the gaseous reactant is in the range of 0.10-0.35kg/cm.sup.2 and the pressure drops of said further inert gas forequalizing the pressures, at the entrance of said reaction tubes, is inthe range of 20-120 mm. column of water.4. A process according to claim 1, wherein the molar ratio of SO.sub.3 tothe organic compound is in the range of 0.9-1.2.5. A process according to claim 1, wherein the concentration of sulfurtrioxide in the gaseous reactant is in the range of 2-12 volume percent.6. A method according to claim 1, wherein the further inert gas forequalizing the pressures flows to the reaction tubes concentricallybetween the liquid reactant supplied to the inner surfaces of the tubesand the gas reactant injected in the central zone of each tube.7. A method according to claim 1, wherein said reaction tubes have an innerdiameter in the range of 8-18 mm and a length in the range of 0.8-5.0meters."}
{"WKU":"039312747","Title":"Bis(2,3-dibromopropyl carbonates) of tetrahalobisphenol A","App_Date":"1973-03-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert M. Thomas;Rastko I. Mamuzic","Assignee":"Great Lakes Chemical Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07C 6996;C08K  510;C08K  5159;C08K  336","References":"3218347;3267070;3688001;3804792","Claims":"We claim:1. A compound selected from the group consisting of (a)bis(2,3-dibromopropyl carbonate) of tetrabromobisphenol A and (b)bis(2,3-dibromopropyl carbonate) of tetrachlorobisphenol A.2. A compound of claim 1 which is bis(2,3-dibromopropyl carbonate) oftetrabromobisphenol A.3. A compound of claim 1 which is bis(2,3-dibromopropyl carbonate) oftetrachlorobisphenol A."}
{"WKU":"039312755","Title":"Bis(4-(4-hydroxybenzyl)phenyl) carbonic acid ester","App_Date":"1973-12-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Mario Gustav Buzzolini","Assignee":"Sandoz Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07C 6996;C07C 4320;A61K 31265","References":"2380130;3017424;3510507;3579561;3592837","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. The compound of the formula##SPC5##2. The compound of claim 1 in the form of its pharmacologically acceptablesalts.3. The compound which is bis (4-[4-benzyloxybenzyl]-phenyl) carbonic acidester."}
{"WKU":"039312763","Title":"2-Chloro-trichloro-benzonitriles","App_Date":"1973-03-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Erich Klauke","Assignee":"Bayer Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07C12152","References":"","Claims":"What we claim is:1. Benzonitrile derivative having the formula:##SPC6##2. Compound of claim 1 selected from the group of2-chloro-4-trichloromethyl-benzonitrile;2-chloro-5-trichloromethyl-benzonitrile; and2-chloro-6-trichloromethyl-benzonitrile.3. Process for preparing a 2-chloro-trichloromethyl-benzonitrile whichcomprises the steps ofi. reacting a dimethyl benzonitrile having the formula##SPC7##in a first reaction stage with chlorine at a temperature in the range of20.degree. to 200.degree.C, forming bis-(trichloromethyl)-benzonitrile;andii. further chlorinating said bis-(trichloromethyl)-benzonitrile in asecond reaction stage at a temperature in the range of from 200.degree. to280.degree.C until the elimination of carbon tetrachloride is over,forming a 2-chloro-trichloromethylbenzonitrile.4. Process of claim 3 wherein the chlorination in the first stage iscarried out in the presence of ultraviolet irradiation.5. Process of claim 3 wherein the bis-(trichloromethyl)-benzonitrile formedduring the first reaction stage is isolated as an intermediate beforeundergoing the second reaction stage.6. Process of claim 3 wherein the first stage chlorination is carried outat a temperature in the range of from 70.degree. to 190.degree.C.7. Process of claim 3 wherein chlorination is carried out in the secondstage at a temperature in the range 230.degree. to 260.degree.C.8. Process of claim 3 wherein both stages of the reaction are carried outin the presence of ultraviolet irradiation."}
{"WKU":"039312771","Title":"Novel isocyanates and processes for their preparation","App_Date":"1973-11-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Gerhard Lohaus;Hilmar Mildenberger","Assignee":"Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07C143128","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Sulfonylamino-sulfonyl-isocyanates of the formula##EQU4##where R.sub.1 is alkyl having from 1 to 12 carbon atoms, or cycloalkylhaving from 4 to 8 carbon atoms, and R.sub.2 is alkyl or halogeno-alkyl,each having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms; cycloalkyl having from 5 to 8carbon atoms; phenyl, benzyl or naphthyl optionally substituted byhalogen, alkyl or alkoxy each having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, cyanoand/or nitro.2. A process for the preparation of compounds of formula I, which comprisesreacting sulfonamides of the formula"}
{"WKU":"039312780","Title":"Process for preparing 5-oxohexane-nitrile","App_Date":"1974-06-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Werner Muller","Assignee":"Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07C12000;C07C12134","References":"2768962;2850519;3686262;3708515;3780082;3780083;3816503;3821274;3855266","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a process for preparing 5-oxohexane-nitrile by reaction of acetonewith acrylonitrile at from 50.degree.C to 250.degree.C in the presence offrom 0.001 to 0.02 mols of an acid per mol of acrylonitrile and from 0.01to 0.2 mols of a compound per mol of acrylonitrile, said compound beingselected from the group consisting of primary amines and Schiff bases, theimprovement comprising carrying out the reaction in the presence of watermaintained at the rate of from 0.2 to 5 weight percent, calculated on thereaction mixture.2. A process according to claim 1 wherein the reaction ratio of acetone toacrylonitrile is at a molar proportion of about 1:1 to about 20:1.3. A process according to claim 2, wherein said compound is selected fromthe group consisting of alkane primary amines having 1 to 5 carbon atoms,said amines further having a hydroxyl group, said amines further having acarboxylic group, and monocyclic primary means having 6 carbon atoms inthe ring structure and 6 to 7 carbon atoms in the total structure, andsaid Schiff bases which are the condensation product of acetone and aforegoing primary amine.4. A process according to claim 2 wherein said acid is chosen from thegroup consisting of formic, acetic, butyric, benzoic, adipic, hydrochloricand phosphoric acids.5. A process according to claim 4, wherein said reaction is at a pressureof 1 to 50 atmospheres."}
{"WKU":"039312798","Title":"5-Oxa prostaglandin F.sub.2.sub..alpha.  analogs","App_Date":"1973-05-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Norman A. Nelson","Assignee":"The Upjohn Company","ICL_Class":"C07C 6938;C07C 6974;C07C 63592;C07C 6360","References":"","Claims":"I claim:1. An optically active compound of the formula##EQU106##or a racemic compound of that formula and the mirror image thereof,wherein C.sub.g H.sub.2g  is alkylene of one to 9 carbon atoms inclusive,with one to 5 carbon atoms, inclusive, in the chain between --CR.sub.9R.sub.9 --and terminal methyl; wherein Q.sub.1 is##EQU107##wherein R.sub.6 and R.sub.7 are hydrogen or alkyl of one to 4 carbonatoms, inclusive, being the same or different; wherein R.sub.1 ishydrogen, alkyl of one to 12 carbon atoms, inclusive, cycloalkyl of 3 to10 carbon atoms, inclusive, aralkyl of 7 to 12 carbon atoms, inclusive,phenyl, or phenyl substituted with one, 2, or 3 chloro or alkyl of one to4 carbon atoms, inclusive; wherein R.sub.3, R.sub.8 , and R.sub.9 arehydrogen, alkyl of one to 4 carbon atoms, inclusive, or fluoro, being thesame or different, with the proviso that R.sub.9 is fluoro only whenR.sub.8 is hydrogen or fluoro; wherein R.sub.2 is hydrogen or fluoro, withthe proviso that R.sub.2 is fluoro only when R.sub.3 is hydrogen orfluoro; and wherein R.sub.4 and R.sub.5 are hydrogen or alkyl of one to 4carbon atoms, inclusive, being the same or different, with the provisothat no more than one of R.sub.3, R.sub.4, and R.sub.5 is alkyl; includingthe lower alkanoates thereof, and the pharmacologically acceptable saltsthereof when R.sub.1 is hydrogen.2. A compound according to claim 1 wherein Q.sub.1 is##EQU108##wherein R.sub.6 and R.sub.7 are hydrogen or alkyl of one to 4 carbonatoms, inclusive, being the same or different.3. A compound according to claim 2 wherein the sum of of the carbon atomsin R.sub.6, R.sub.7, R.sub.8 and R.sub.9 taken together is not greaterthan 7.4. A compound according to claim 3 wherein R.sub.3, R.sub.4, and R.sub.5are either hydrogen or methyl, and one of R.sub.3, R.sub.4, and R.sub.5 ismethyl.5. A compound according to claim 3 wherein R.sub.2, R.sub.3, R.sub.4, andR.sub.5 are hydrogen.6. A compound according to claim 5 wherein R.sub.6, R.sub.7, R.sub.8, andR.sub.9 are either hydrogen or methyl, and at least one of R.sub.6,R.sub.7, R.sub.8, and R.sub.9 is methyl.7. A compound according to claim 6 wherein R.sub.6 is methyl.8. A compound according to claim 7 wherein C.sub.g H.sub.2g istrimethylene.9. An optically active compound according to claim 8.10. A compound according to claim 9 wherein R.sub.1 is alkyl of one to 12carbon atoms, inclusive.11. (15S)-15-Methyl-5-oxa-PGF.sub.1.sub..alpha., methyl ester, a compoundaccording to claim 10.12. A compound according to claim 9 wherein R.sub.1 is hydrogen.13. A racemic compound according to claim 8.14. A compound according to claim 6 wherein R.sub.7 is methyl.15. A compound according to claim 6 wherein one or both of R.sub.8 andR.sub.9 are methyl.16. A compound according to claim 15 wherein C.sub.g H.sub.2g istrimethylene.17. An optically active compound according to claim 16.18. A compound according to claim 17 wherein R.sub.1 is alkyl of one to 12carbon atoms, inclusive.19. 16,16-Dimethyl-5-oxa-PGF.sub.1.sub..alpha., methyl ester, a compoundaccording to claim 18.20. A compound according to claim 17 wherein R.sub.1 is hydrogen.21. A racemic compound according to claim 16.22. A compound according to claim 5 wherein R.sub.6, R.sub.7, R.sub.8, andR.sub.9 are hydrogen.23. A compound according to claim 22 wherein C.sub.g H.sub.2g istrimethylene.24. An optically active compound according to claim 23.25. A compound according to claim 24 wherein R.sub.1 is alkyl of one to 12carbon atoms.26. 5-Oxa-PGF.sub.1.sub..alpha., methyl ester, a compound according toclaim 25.27. A compound according to claim 24 wherein R.sub.1 is hydrogen.28. 5-Oxa-PGF.sub.1.sub..alpha., a compound according to claim 27.29. A racemic compound according to claim 23.30. A compound according to claim 1 wherein Q.sub.1 is##EQU109##31. A compound according to claim 30 wherein the sum of the carbon atoms inR.sub.6, R.sub.7, R.sub.8, and R.sub.9 taken together is not greater than7.32. A compound according to claim 31 wherein R.sub.3, R.sub.4, and R.sub.5are either hydrogen or methyl, and one of R.sub.3, R.sub.4 and R.sub.5 ismethyl.33. A compound according to claim 31 wherein R.sub.2, R.sub.3, R.sub.4, andR.sub.5 are hydrogen.34. A compound according to claim 33 wherein R.sub.6, R.sub.7, R.sub.8, andR.sub.9 are either hydrogen or methyl, and at least one of R.sub.6,R.sub.7, R.sub.8, and R.sub.9 is methyl.35. A compound according to claim 34 wherein R.sub.6 is methyl.36. A compound according to claim 35 wherein C.sub.g H.sub.2g istrimethylene.37. An optically active compound according to claim 36.38. A compound according to claim 37 wherein R.sub.1 is alkyl of one to 12carbon atoms, inclusive.39. (15R)-15-Methyl-5-oxa-PGF.sub.1.sub..alpha., methyl ester, a compoundaccording to claim 38.40. A compound according to claim 37 wherein R.sub.1 is hydrogen.41. A racemic compound according to claim 36.42. A compound according to claim 34 wherein R.sub.7 is methyl.43. A compound according to claim 34 wherein one or both of R.sub.8 andR.sub.9 are methyl.44. A compound according to claim 33 wherein R.sub.6, R.sub.7, R.sub.8, andR.sub.9 are hydrogen."}
{"WKU":"039312801","Title":"Process for preparing alkyl trans-chrysanthemate","App_Date":"1973-09-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Tsuneyuki Nagase;Gohu Suzukamo;Masami Fukao;Hirosuke Yoshioka","Assignee":"Sumitomo Chemical Company, Limited","ICL_Class":"C07C 6730","References":"3046299;3538143","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for preparing an alkyl trans-chrysanthemate which comprisestreating the corresponding cis-isomer with an alkali metal lower alkoxidein the amount of about 1/100 to 1/5 mole of said alkali metal loweralkoxide per 1 mole of the starting cis-isomer at a temperature of about50.degree. to 200.degree.C. in the absence of a solvent.2. The process according to claim 1, wherein the alkali metal loweralkoxide is sodium methoxide or sodium ethoxide.3. The process according to claim 1, followed by the hydrolysis of theresulting alkyl trans-chrysanthemate to the corresponding free acid.4. The process according to claim 1, wherein the alkali metal loweralkoxide is derived from a primary alcohol.5. The process according to claim 1, wherein the alkali metal loweralkoxide is sodium methoxide, sodium ethoxide, potassium methoxide,potassium ethoxide or lithium ethoxide.6. The process according to claim 1, wherein the reaction temperature isfrom about 70.degree.C. to 180.degree.C."}
{"WKU":"039312810","Title":"Substituted anilide ester of PGA.sub.2","App_Date":"1974-01-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Walter Morozowich","Assignee":"The Upjohn Company","ICL_Class":"C07C 6974","References":"","Claims":"I claim:1. An optically active compound of the formula##SPC16##or a racemic compound of that formula and the mirror image thereof, whereinZ is##SPC17##wherein R.sub.1 is##SPC18##wherein R.sub.2 is##SPC19##and wherein Y is##EQU5##2. The ester of p-(p-benzamidobenzamido)phenol and PGA.sub.2, a compoundaccording to claim 1.3. The ester of 1-hydroxy-4-ureidonaphthalene and PGA.sub.2, a compoundaccording to claim 1.4. The ester of p-(p-benzamidobenzamido)phenol and 15-methyl-PGA.sub.2, acompound according to claim 1.5. The ester of 1-benzamido-4-hydroxynaphthalene and 15-methyl-PGA.sub.2, acompound according to claim 1.6. The ester of 1-hydroxy-4-ureidonaphthalene and 15-methyl-PGA.sub.2, acompound according to claim 1.7. The ester of 1-benzamido-4-hydroxynaphthalene and15(R)-15-methyl-PGA.sub.2, a compound according to claim 1.8. The ester of 1-hydroxy-4-ureidonaphthalene and15(R)-15-methyl-PGA.sub.2, a compound according to claim 1.9. The ester of p-benzamidophenol and PGA.sub.2, a compound according toclaim 1.10. The ester of p-(p-acetamidobenzamido)phenol and PGA.sub.2, a compoundaccording to claim 1.11. Free-flowing crystals of a compound of the formula:##SPC20##wherein E is##SPC21##"}
{"WKU":"039312828","Title":"11.alpha.-Hydroxymethyl prostaglandins","App_Date":"1974-02-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Joseph M. Muchowski;Angel Guzman","Assignee":"Syntex (U.S.A.) Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07C 6138;C07C 6974","References":"3845042","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An 8R-antimeric or racemic compound selected from the group of thoserepresented by the following formula:##SPC7##whereinR is the grouping##EQU2##each of R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 is hydrogen or a hydrocarbon carboxylic groupof 1 to 6 carbon atoms;R.sup.3 is methyl or ethyl;R.sup.4 is hydrogen, a lower alkyl group of 1 to 6 carbon atoms or thepharmaceutically acceptable, non-toxic salts of compounds in which R.sup.4is hydrogen;Z is a cis double bond and the wavy lines ( ) indicate the .alpha. or.beta. configuration or mixtures thereof, provided that when R.sup.3 is.alpha., the hydroxyl group, attached to the same carbon atom as R.sup.3,is .beta.; and when R.sup.3 is .beta., the hydroxyl group, attached to thesame carbon atom as R.sup.3, is .alpha..2. A compound according to claim 1 wherein R is.alpha.-hydroxy-.beta.-hydrogen and R.sup.2 and R.sup.4 are hydrogen.3. A compound according to claim 1 wherein R is.beta.-hydroxy-.alpha.-hydrogen and R.sup.2 and R.sup.4 are hydrogen.4. A compound according to claim 1 wherein R.sup.2 and R.sup.4 arehydrogen.5. A compound according to claim 1 wherein R.sup.3 is methyl and R.sup.2and R.sup.4 are hydrogen.6. A compound according to claim 1 wherein said compound is an 8R-antimer.7. A compound according to claim 6 wherein R is.alpha.-hydroxy-.beta.-hydrogen, R.sup.2 and R.sup.4 are hydrogen, R.sup.3is .beta.-methyl and Z is a cis-double bond,8R-11.alpha.-hydroxymethyl-15.beta.-methyl-9.alpha.,15.alpha.-dihydroxyprosta-5-cis,13-trans-dienoic acid and the non-toxic, pharmaceuticallyacceptable salts thereof.8. A compound according to claim 6 wherein R is.alpha.-hydroxy-.beta.-hydrogen, R.sup.2 is hydrogen, R.sup.3 is.beta.-methyl, R.sup.4 is methyl and Z is a cis-double bond,8R-11.alpha.-hydroxymethyl-15.beta.-methyl-9.alpha.,15.alpha.-dihydroxyprosta-5-cis,13-trans-dienoic acid methyl ester.9. A compound according to claim 6 wherein R is.beta.-hydroxy-.alpha.-hydrogen, R.sup.2 and R.sup.4 are hydrogen, R.sup.3is .beta.-methyl and Z is a cis double bond,8R-11.alpha.-hydroxymethyl-15.beta.-methyl-9.beta.,15.alpha.-dihydroxyprosta-5-cis,13-trans-dienoic acid and the non-toxic, pharmaceuticallyacceptable salts thereof.10. A compound according to claim 6 wherein R is.beta.-hydroxy-.alpha.-hydrogen, R.sup.2 is hydrogen, R.sup.3 is.beta.-methyl, R.sup.4 is methyl and Z is a cis double bond,8R-11.alpha.-hydroxymethyl-15.beta.-methyl-9.beta.,15.alpha.-dihydroxyprosta-5-cis,13-trans-dienoic acid methyl ester.11. A compound according to claim 1 wherein said compound is a racemiccompound.12. A compound according to claim 11 wherein R is.alpha.-hydroxy-.beta.-hydrogen, R.sup.2 and R.sup.4 are hydrogen, R.sup.3is methyl and Z is a cis-double bond, 11.alpha.-hydroxymethyl-15-methyl-9.alpha.,15 -dihydroxyprosta-5-cis,13-trans-dienoic acid and thenontoxic, pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.13. A compound according to claim 11 wherein R is.alpha.-hydroxy-.beta.-hydrogen, R.sup.2 is hydrogen, R.sup.3 and R.sup.4are methyl and Z is a cis-double bond, 11.alpha.-hydroxymethyl-15-methyl-9.alpha.,15 -dihydroxyprosta-5-cis,13-trans-dienoic acid methylester.14. A compound according to claim 11 wherein R is.beta.-hydroxy-.alpha.-hydrogen, R.sup.2 and R.sup.4 are hydrogen, R.sup.3is methyl and Z is a cis double bond, 11.alpha.-hydroxymethyl-15-methyl-9.beta.,15 -dihydroxyprosta-5-cis,13-trans-dienoic acid and thenontoxic, pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.15. A compound according to claim 11, wherein R is.beta.-hydroxy-.alpha.-hydrogen, R.sup.2 is hydrogen, R.sup.3 and R.sup.4are methyl and Z is a cis double bond, 11.alpha.-hydroxymethyl-15-methyl-9.beta.,15 -dihydroxyprosta-5-cis,13-trans-dienoic acid methylester."}
{"WKU":"039312836","Title":"11.beta.-PGF.sub.2.sub..beta. compounds","App_Date":"1974-07-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John E. Pike;William P. Schneider","Assignee":"The Upjohn Company","ICL_Class":"C07C 6138;C07C 6974","References":"","Claims":"We claim:1. The compound of the formula##SPC14##wherein R.sub.1 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 8 carbon atoms, inclusive,cycloalkyl, of 3 to 10 carbon atoms, inclusive, aralkyl of 7 to 12 carbonatoms, inclusive, phenyl or phenyl substituted with one, 2, or 3 chloro oralkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, inclusive, and the pharmacologicallyacceptable salts thereof when R.sub.1 is hydrogen.2. The compound according to claim 1 wherein R.sub.1 is methyl.3. The compound according to claim 1 wherein R.sub.1 is hydrogen."}
{"WKU":"039312844","Title":"11.beta.-PGE.sub.2 compounds","App_Date":"1974-07-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John E. Pike;William P. Schneider","Assignee":"The Upjohn Company","ICL_Class":"C07C 6138;C07C 6974","References":"","Claims":"We claim:1. The compound of the formula##SPC16##wherein R.sub.1 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 8 carbon atoms, inclusive,cycloalkyl of 3 to 10 carbon atoms, inclusive, aralkyl of 7 to 12 carbonatoms, inclusive, phenyl or phenyl substituted with one, 2, or 3 chloro oralkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, inclusive, and the pharmacologicallyacceptable salts thereof when R.sub.1 is hydrogen.2. The compound according to claim 1 wherein R.sub.1 is methyl.3. The compound according to claim 1 wherein R.sub.1 is hydrogen."}
{"WKU":"039312852","Title":"Substituted tolyl esters of PGE.sub.1","App_Date":"1974-12-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Walter Morozowich","Assignee":"The Upjohn Company","ICL_Class":"C07C13308;C07C10382","References":"","Claims":"I claim:1. An optically active compound of the formula:##SPC20##or a racemic compound of that formula and the mirror image thereof, whereinZ is##SPC21##and wherein Y is##EQU5##2. The ester of N-acetyl-L-tyrosinamide and PGE.sub.1, a compound accordingto claim 1.3. The ester of N-benzoyl-L-tyrosinamide and PGE.sub.1, a compoundaccording to claim 1.4. The ester of p-hydroxybenzaldehyde semicarbazone and PGE.sub.1, acompound according to claim 1.5. The ester of N-acetyl-L-tyrosinamide and 15-methyl-PGE.sub.1, a compoundaccording to claim 1.6. The ester of N-benzoyl-L-tyrosinamide and 15-methyl-PGE.sub.1, acompound according to claim 1.7. The ester of p-hydroxybenzaldehyde semicarbazone and15-methyl-PGE.sub.1, a compound according to claim 1.8. The ester of N-acetyl-L-tyrosinamide and 15(R)-15-methyl-PGE.sub.1, acompound according to claim 1.9. The ester of N-benzoyl-L-tyrosinamide and 15(R)-15-methyl-PGE.sub.1, acompound according to claim 1.10. The ester of p-hydroxybenzaldehyde semicarbazone and15(R)-15-methyl-PGE.sub.1, a compound according to claim 1."}
{"WKU":"039312860","Title":"Novel benzoylphenylacetic acid derivatives","App_Date":"1974-06-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jean Meier;Odile Le Martret","Assignee":"Roussel-UCLAF","ICL_Class":"C07C 6995","References":"3828093","Claims":"We claim:1. A benzoylphenylacetic acid compound of the formula##SPC4##wherein X is selected from the group consisting of geranyloxy andpivaloyloxymethoxy.2. A compound of claim 1 which is pivaloyloxymethyl2-methyl-3-(p-chlorobenzoyl)-phenylacetate.3. A compound of claim 1 which is geranyl2-methyl-3-(p-chlorobenzoyl)-phenylacetate."}
{"WKU":"039312879","Title":"Polyene compounds","App_Date":"1973-08-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Clifton L. Kehr;Walter R. Wszolek","Assignee":"W. R. Grace & Co.","ICL_Class":"C07C12506","References":"3783152","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A polyene compound which comprises the formula:##EQU15##wherein R is a radical selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,fluorine, chlorine, phenyl, benzyl, alkyl, and cycloalkyl; said alkylhaving from 1 to 9 carbon atoms and said cycloalkyl having from 3 to 8carbon atoms; wherein [A] is free of reactive carbon-to-carbonunsaturation and formed of at least two repeating units selected from thegroup consisting of --CH.sub.2) .sub.g, --C.sub.2 H.sub.4 O) .sub.h,--C.sub.3 H.sub.6 O) .sub.h, and --C.sub.4 H.sub.8 O) .sub.h, g is aninteger from 1 to 9 and h is an integer from 1 to 200; said compoundhaving a molecular weight in the range of 300 to 20,000 and a viscosity inthe range from essentially 0 to 20 million centipoises at 70.degree.C; andwherein R.sub.7 is a member of the group consisting of hydrogen, phenyl,cycloalkyl, alkyl, and CH.sub.2 =CH--, wherein said alkyl has from 1 to 9carbon atoms, said cycloalkyl has from 3 to 8 carbon atoms, and n is atleast 1.2. The polyene compound of claim 1 having the formula:##EQU16##3. The polyene compound of claim 1 having the formula:##EQU17##4. The polyene composition of claim 1 having the formula:##EQU18##wherein the sum of x + y + z in each chain segment is at least 1.5. A polyene compound having the formula:##EQU19##wherein the sum of x + y + z is at least 1; n is at least 1; and P is atleast 2; said compound having a molecular weight in the range of 300 to20,000 and a viscosity in the range from essentially 0 to 20 millioncentipoises at 70.degree. C."}
{"WKU":"039312887","Title":"Alkyl esters of 4-chlorophenoxy-4-oxo-cycloalkyl-carboxylic acid","App_Date":"1973-11-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Leo Berger;Willy Leimgruber;Fausto Eugenio Schenker","Assignee":"Hoffmann-La Roche Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07C 6976","References":"","Claims":"We claim:1. A compound, 3-(4-chlorophenoxy)-4-oxo-cyclohexanecarboxylic acid ethylester.2. A compound, 3-(4-chlorophenoxy)-4-oxo-cyclopentanecarboxylic acid methylester."}
{"WKU":"039312895","Title":"3-Oxa phenyl-substituted PGE compounds","App_Date":"1974-04-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Gordon L. Bundy","Assignee":"The Upjohn Company","ICL_Class":"C07C 0522;C07C 6976","References":"3804387","Claims":"I claim:1. A compound of the formula:##SPC64##wherein R.sub.1 is hydrogen, alkyl of one to 8 carbon atoms, inclusive,cycloalkyl of 3 to 10 carbon atoms, inclusive, aralkyl of 7 to 12 carbonatoms, inclusive, phenyl, phenyl substituted with one, 2, or 3 chloro oralkyl of one to 4 carbon atoms, inclusive, or ethyl substituted in the.beta.-position with 3 chloro, 2 or 3 bromo, or 1, 2, or 3 iodo; whereinR.sub.2, R.sub.3, R.sub.4, R.sub.5, and R.sub.6 are hydrogen or alkyl ofone to 4 carbon atoms, inclusive; wherein C.sub.n H.sub.2n is alkylene ofone to 10 carbon atoms, inclusive, with one to 5 carbon atoms, inclusive,between --CHR.sub.2 -- and --O--; wherein C.sub.t H.sub.2t represents (1)a valence bond or (2) alkylene of one to 10 carbon atoms, inclusive,substituted with zero, one, or 2 fluoro, with one to 7 carbon atoms,inclusive, between --CR.sub.3 OH-- and the ring; wherein T is alkyl of oneto 4 carbon atoms, inclusive, fluoro, chloro, trifluoromethyl, or--OR.sub.9, wherein R.sub.9 is hydrogen, alkyl of one to 4 carbon atoms,inclusive, or tetrahydropyranyl, and s is zero, one, 2, or 3, with theproviso that no more than two T are other than alkyl; and wherein .about.indicates attachment of the group to the ring in alpha or betaconfiguration; including the lower alkanoates thereof, and thepharmacologically acceptable salts thereof when R.sub.1 is hydrogen.2. A compound of the formula:##SPC65##wherein R.sub.1 is hydrogen, alkyl of one to 8 carbon atoms, inclusive,cycloalkyl of 3 to 10 carbon atoms, inclusive, aralkyl of 7 to 12 carbonatoms, inclusive, phenyl, phenyl substituted with one, 2, or 3 chloro oralkyl of one to 4 carbon atoms, inclusive, or ethyl substituted in the.beta.-position with 3 chloro, 2 or 3 bromo, or 1, 2, or 3 iodo; whereinR.sub.2, R.sub.3, R.sub.4, R.sub.5, and R.sub.6 are hydrogen or alkyl ofone to 4 carbon atoms, inclusive; wherein C.sub.p H.sub.2p is alkylene ofone to 8 carbon atoms, inclusive, with one, 2, or 3 carbon atoms between--CH=CH-- and --O--; wherein C.sub.t H.sub.2t represents (1) a valencebond or (2) alkylene of one to 10 carbon atoms, inclusive, substitutedwith zero, one, or 2 fluoro, with one to 7 carbon atoms, inclusive,between --CR.sub.3 OH-- and the ring; wherein T is alkyl of one to 4carbon atoms, inclusive, fluoro, chloro, trifluoromethyl, or --OR.sub.9,wherein R.sub.9 is hydrogen, alkyl of one to 4 carbon atoms, inclusive, ortetrahydropyranyl, and s is zero, one, 2, or 3, with the proviso that nomore than two T are other than alkyl; and wherein .about. indicatesattachment of the group to the ring in alpha or beta configuration;including the lower alkanoates thereof, and the pharmacologicallyacceptable salts thereof when R.sub.1 is hydrogen.3. A compound of the formula:##SPC66##wherein R.sub.1 is hydrogen, alkyl of one to 8 carbon atoms, inclusive,cycloalkyl of 3 to 10 carbon atoms, inclusive, aralkyl of 7 to 12 carbonatoms, inclusive, phenyl, phenyl substituted with one, 2, or 3 chloro oralkyl or one to 4 carbon atoms, inclusive, or ethyl substituted in the.beta.-position with 3 chloro, 2 or 3 bromo, or 1, 2, or 3 iodo; whereinR.sub.2, R.sub.3, R.sub.4, R.sub.5, and R.sub.6 are hydrogen or alkyl ofone to 4 carbon atoms, inclusive; wherein C.sub.p H.sub.2p is alkylene ofone to 8 carbon atoms, inclusive, with one, 2, or 3 carbon atoms between--C.tbd.C-- and --O--; wherein C.sub.t H.sub.2t represents (1) a valencebond or (2) alkylene of one to 10 carbon atoms, inclusive, substitutedwith zero, one, or 2 fluoro, with one to 7 carbon atoms, inclusive,between --CR.sub.3 OH-- and the ring; wherein T is alkyl of one to 4carbon atoms, inclusive, fluoro, chloro, trifluoromethyl, or --OR.sub.9,wherein R.sub.9 is hydrogen, alkyl of one to 4 carbon atoms, inclusive, ortetrahydropyranyl, and s is zero, one, 2, or 3, with the proviso that nomore than two T are other than alkyl; and wherein .about. indicatesattachment of the group to the ring in alpha or beta configuration;including the lower alkanoates thereof, and the pharmacologicallyacceptable salts thereof when R.sub.1 is hydrogen.4. A compound of the formula:##SPC67##wherein R.sub.1 is hydrogen, alkyl of one to 8 carbon atoms, inclusive,cycloalkyl or 3 to 10 carbon atoms, inclusive, aralkyl of 7 to 12 carbonatoms, inclusive, phenyl, phenyl substituted with one, 2, or 3 chloro oralkyl of one to 4 carbon atoms, inclusive, or ethyl substituted in the.beta.-position with 3 chloro, 2 or 3 bromo, or 1, 2, or 3 iodo; whereinR.sub.2, R.sub.3, R.sub.4, R.sub.5, and R.sub.6 are hydrogen or alkyl ofone to 4 carbon atoms, inclusive; wherein C.sub.n H.sub.2n is alkylene ofone to 10 carbon atoms, inclusive, with one to 5 carbon atoms, inclusive,between --CHR.sub.2 -- and --O--; wherein C.sub.t H.sub.2t represents (1)a valence bond or (2) alkylene of one to 10 carbon atoms, inclusive,substituted with zero, one, or 2 fluoro, with one to 7 carbon atoms,inclusive, between --CR.sub.3 OH-- and the ring; wherein T is alkyl of oneto 4 carbon atoms, inclusive, fluoro, chloro, trifluoromethyl, or--OR.sub.9, wherein R.sub.9 is hydrogen, alkyl of one to 4 carbon atoms,inclusive, or tetrahydropyranyl, and s is zero, one, 2, or 3, with theproviso that no more than two T are other than alkyl; and wherein .about.indicates attachment of the group to the ring in alpha or betaconfiguration; including the lower alkanoates thereof, and thepharmacologically acceptable salts thereof when R.sub.1 is hydrogen.5. A compound according to claim 1 wherein##EQU102##"}
{"WKU":"039312909","Title":"Preparation of carboxylic acid alkyl esters","App_Date":"1972-09-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Yolande Bourgau;Jean Berthoux;Ghislain Schwachhofer","Assignee":"Rhone-Progil","ICL_Class":"C07C 6704","References":"2021852","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a process for the preparation of carboxylic acid alkyl esterscomprising the reaction of a linear or branched 1-halo-alkane containingfrom 6-18 carbon atoms and an alkali metal salt of a carboxylic acidselected from the group consisting of aliphatic mono-acids and diacids andaromatic mono-acids and diacids, in the presence of a nitrogen containingcatalyst, the improvement wherein:the reaction mixture consists essentially of an heterogeneous liquid phaseof the organic halo-alkane and an aqueous solution of the carboxylic acidalkali metal salt;and wherein said reaction mixture is heated at 110.degree.-250.degree.C.and at least those pressures which would be generated by the reaction in aclosed autoclave, said catalyst consisting essentially of a nitrogenouscompound selected from the group consisting of ammonia, primary andsecondary amines, and of tertiary amines and quaternary ammonium saltscontaining in the whole molecule at least 10 carbon atoms, said catalystbeing chosen from compounds in which the nitrogen is not connected to acarbon belonging to an unsaturated cycle, and wherein said catalyst ispresent in a molar percentage between 0.5 and 5% with regard to saidcarboxylic acid alkali metal salt.2. A process in accordance with claim 1 wherein said halo-alkane is abromo-1-alkane containing 6 to 18 carbon atoms.3. A process in accordance with claim 1 wherein said carboxylic acid alkalimetal salt is a sodium salt of a dicarboxylic acid.4. A process in accordance with claim 1 wherein said catalyst is selectedfrom the group consisting of monomethylamine, dimethylamine,monoethylamine, diethylamine, morpholine, dimethyloctadecylamine andtetrabutylammonium bromide.5. A process in accordance with claim 4 wherein said catalyst isdimethylamine or diethylamine.6. A method in accordance with claim 1 wherein, as a preliminary operation,said carboxylic acid alkali metal salt is formed in situ by reaction in anaqueous medium of an alkali metal hydroxide with a carboxylic acid oranhydride.7. A process in accordance with claim 1 wherein said halo-alkane is presentin excess in the reaction medium, wherein the water comprising the aqueousphase is present in a quantity of between 50 and 200 grams per mole ofhalo-alkane, and wherein said reaction is carried out for a period of from30 minutes to 5 hours.8. A process in accordance with claim 1 for preparing carboxylic acid alkyldiesters, further comprising extracting the monoesters from the reactionproduct and recirculating said monoesters to the reaction medium toreplace an equivalent molar quantity of carboxylic acid alkali metal salt.9. A process in accordance with claim 1 wherein said catalyst is selectedfrom the group consisting of ammonia, primary and secondary amines, and oftertiary amines containing in the whole molecule at least 10 carbon atoms,said catalyst being chosen from compounds in which the nitrogen is notconnected to a carbon belonging to an unsaturated cycle.10. A process in accordance with claim 1, wherein said reaction takes placein a closed autoclave."}
{"WKU":"039312917","Title":"Preparation of optically active allethrorone via allethronyl acid","App_Date":"1974-03-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Fukashi Horiuchi","Assignee":"Sumitomo Chemical Company, Limited","ICL_Class":"C07C 6980","References":"3201455;3484489","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method for preparing optically active allethronyl acid phthalate,which comprises reacting (.+-.)-allethronyl acid phthalate of the formula##SPC12##with an optically active amine selected from the group consisting of.alpha.-phenylethylamine of the formula##SPC13##.alpha.-phenyl-.beta.-p-tolylethylamine of the formula,##SPC14##threo-2-dimethylamino-1-(p-nitrophenyl)-1,3-propanediol of the formula,##SPC15##and naphthylethylamine of the formula##SPC16##in the presence of a solvent selected from the group consisting of benzene,toluene, hexane, chloroform, tetrachloromethane, chlorobenzene,dichloroethane, tetrachloroethylene, ethylether, isopropylether, acetone,methylethyl ketone, methylisobutyl ketone, diisobutyl ketone, ethylacetate, methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropyl alcohol, a mixture thereofand an aqueous mixture thereof,the ratio of the optical active amine being 0.5 to 1.5 mole to 1 mole ofthe allethronyl acid phthalate, to form a diastereomeric salt thereof, anddecomposing the resolved salt to obtain the optically active allethronylacid phthalate.2. A method according to claim 1, wherein the diastereomeric salt isdecomposed with an acid or alkali."}
{"WKU":"039312925","Title":"Preparation of omega-amino-substituted beta-alkoxycarboxylic esters","App_Date":"1973-12-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Johan W. Garritsen;Josef M. Penders","Assignee":"Stamicarbon B.V.","ICL_Class":"C07C10118","References":"3062884;3104201;3166562","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An .omega.-amino-.beta.-alkoxycarboxylic acid ester of the generalformula##EQU4##wherein n is an integer of from 1 to 5,  the two R groups which may be thesame or different, represent an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl groupcontaining not more than 10 carbon atoms, andR.sub.1 and R.sub.2 , which may be the same or different, representhydrogen, an alkyl group or a cycloalkyl group containing not more than 10carbon atoms.2. An ester of the general formula of claim 1 wherein n is 2 or 3, Rrepresents a methyl group or an ethyl group, and R.sub.1 and R.sub.2represent hydrogen."}
{"WKU":"039312933","Title":"Processes for producing cis alkyl-2-methyl-3-pentenoates and isomer","App_Date":"1974-07-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ching Y. Tseng;John B. Hall;Manfred Hugo Vock;Joaquin F. Vinals;Edward J. Shuster","Assignee":"International Flavors & Fragrances Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07C 6954","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for preparing a mixture containing 80%cis-2-methyl-3-pentenoic acid C.sub.2 -C.sub.6 alkyl ester and 20%2-methyl-2-pentenoic acid C.sub.2 -C.sub.6 alkyl ester comprising thesteps of:a. reacting in the presence of a non-reactive solvent at a temperature inthe range of 40.degree.-60.degree.C methyl acetylene with a methylmagnesium halide to form a methyl acetylene magnesium halide Grignardreagent;b. reacting in the presence of a non-reactive solvent at a temperature inthe range of 20.degree.-30.degree.C the methyl acetylene magnesium halideGrignard reagent with acetaldehyde to form a 3-pentyn-2-ol magnesiumhalide salt;c. hydrolyzing said 3-pentyn-2-ol magnesium halide salt with concentratedmineral acid to form 3-pentyn-2-ol;d. reacting said 3-pentyn-2-ol with a halogenating reagent selected fromthe group consisting of phosphorous trichloride, phosphorous tribromideand SOCl.sub.2 at a temperature in the range of 20.degree.-80.degree.C toform a 4-halo-2-pentyne;e. reacting in the presence of a non-reactive solvent at a temperature inthe range of 25.degree.-50.degree.C said 4-halo-2-pentyne with magnesiumto form a 4-magnesium halo-2-pentyne Grignard reagent;f. reacting said 4-magnesium halo-2-pentyne Grignard reagent with CO.sub.2to form a magnesium halo carboxylate salt mixture;g. hydrolyzing said magnesium halo carboxylate salt mixture with aqueousmineral acid at a temperature in the range of 20.degree.-30.degree.C toform a mixture of 2-methyl-3-pentenoic acid and 2-methyl-2,3-pentadienoicacid;h. reacting in the presence of a non-reactive solvent said mixture of2-methyl-3-pentynoic acid and 2-methyl-2,3-pentadienoic acid withhydrogen; the reaction taking place at a pressure of 20-200 psig and atemperature in the range of 20.degree.-40.degree.C in the presence of aPd/CaSO.sub.4 catalyst to form a mixture containing 80%cis-2-methyl-3-pentenoic acid and 20% 2-methyl-2-pentenoic acid; andi. intimately admixing said mixture of 80% cis-2-methyl-3-pentenoic acidand 2-methyl-2-pentenoic acid with an alkali metal base and a compoundhaving the formula RX, wherein R is C.sub.2 -C.sub.6 alkyl, and X isselected from the group consisting of chloro, bromo and iodo in thepresence of a solvent selected from the group consisting of hexamethylphosphoramide, a dilower alkyl formamide and dimethyl sulfoxide at atemperature in the range of 0.degree.-50.degree.C."}
{"WKU":"039312941","Title":"Production of 2-phenyl-ethylene phosphonic acid","App_Date":"1974-06-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Theodor Auel;Gero Heymer;Hans-Werner Stephan","Assignee":"Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07F  938","References":"2471472;2685602","Claims":"We claim:1. In a process for making 2-phenyl-ethylene phosphonic acid by reactingwith styrene with phosphorus pentachloride in a molar ratio of about 1 : 2in liquid phase and hydrolyzing the resulting complex 2-phenyl-ethylenephosphonic acid tetrachloride with water, the improvement which comprisesstarting the reaction with the use, as the liquid phase (A), of theequimolar mixture of 2-phenyl-ethylene phosphonic acid dichloride andphosphorus oxychloride obtained as an intermediary product; introducingstyrene and phosphorus pentachloride thereinto with continuous agitation;partially hydrolyzing the complex 2-phenyl-ethylene phosphonic acidtetrachloride by adding a predetermined quantity of water to obtain anequimolar mixture of 2-phenyl-ethylene phosphonic acid dichloride andphosphorus oxychloride; continuously using as the liquid phase (A) atleast two thirds of the resulting clear solution and continuouslydistilling off under reduced pressure phosphorus oxychloride from theremainder of the solution; hydrolyzing the remaining 2-phenyl-ethylenephosphonic acid dichloride by admixing it with an overstoichiometricproportion of water to obtain an aqueous solution of 2-phenyl-ethylenephosphonic acid; cooling the aqueous solution and effecting theprecipitation of crystalline phosphonic acid therefrom.2. The process as claimed in claim 1, wherein the reactions are effected attemperatures within the range 0.degree. and 90.degree.C.3. A process as claimed in claim 1, wherein 2-phenyl-ethylene phosphonicacid dichloride is hydrolyzed with the use of four to seven times itsquantity by weight of water."}
{"WKU":"039312950","Title":"Hydroxylation of aromatic compounds","App_Date":"1974-07-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Stephen N. Massie","Assignee":"Universal Oil Products Company","ICL_Class":"C07F  938;C07C14364;C07C14344;C07C 6504","References":"2395638;2437648;3531519;3580956","Claims":"I claim as my invention:1. A process for the nuclear hydroxylation of an aromatic compound havingthe formula R.sub.m ArX.sub.n H in which Ar is a monocyclic or polycyclichydrocarbon nucleus, R is selected from the group consisting ofcarboxylic, sulfonic, phosphonic acid groups, alkali metal salt oralkaline earth metal salts of the acids, X is independently selected fromthe group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy,aralkyl, alkaryl, halogen and amino substituents, m being an integer from1 to about 5 and n being an integer between 0 and 5, which comprisesreacting said aromatic compound with hydrogen peroxide at a temperature offrom about -10.degree.C. to about 150.degree.C., a pressure of from aboutatmospheric to about 100 atmospheres and a mol ratio of from about 1:1 toabout 1:10 mols of hydrogen peroxide per mol of aromatic compound in thepresence of a catalyst consisting essentially of an alkaline solution ofan aromatic nitrile selected from the group consisting of benzonitrile andalkyl benzonitrile and recovering the resultant hydroxylated aromaticcompound.2. The process of claim 1 further characterized in that the aromaticnitrile is an alkyl benzonitrile.3. The process of claim 1 further characterized in that the aromaticnitrile is benzonitrile.4. The process of claim 1 further characterized in that the alkalinesolution comprises aqueous sodium hydroxide.5. The process of claim 1 further characterized in that the alkalinesolution comprises aqueous potassium hydroxide.6. The process of claim 1 further characterized in that the alkalinesolution comprises aqueous lithium hydroxide.7. The process of claim 1 further characterized in that the aromaticcompound is benzoic acid and the resultant hydroxylated compound is2-hydroxybenzoic acid.8. The process of claim 1 further characterized in that the aromaticcompound is sodiumbenzenesulfonate and the resultant hydroxylated compoundis 2-hydroxybenzenesulfonic acid disodium salt.9. The process of claim 1 further characterized in that the aromaticcompound is benzenephosphonic acid and the resultant hydroxylated compoundis 2-hydroxybenzenephosphonic acid.10. The process of claim 1 further characterized in that the aromaticcompound is 2-chlorobenzoic acid and the resultant hydroxylated compoundsare polyhydroxy-substituted isomers of 2-chlorobenzoic acid.11. The process of claim 1 further characterized in that the aromaticcompound is 4-aminobenzenesulfonic acid and the resultant hydroxylatedcompounds are hydroxy-substituted isomers of 4-aminobenzenesulfonic acid."}
{"WKU":"039312968","Title":"Trans-.DELTA..sup.2 -prostaglandins","App_Date":"1973-12-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Masaki Hayashi;Hirohisa Wakatsuka;Seiji Kori","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"C07C 6138;C07C 6974","References":"","Claims":"We claim:1. A compound of the formula:##SPC24##in which X is --CH.sub.2 CH.sub.2 -- or trans --CH=CH--, R.sub.1 is abranched-chain alkyl radical of 1 to 10 carbon atoms or a straight- orbranched-chain alkyl radical of 1 to 6 carbon atoms substituted by phenylor cycloalkyl of 5 to 7 carbon atoms and R.sub.2 is hydrogen or astraight- or branched-chain alkyl radical of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and inwhich   indicates attachment of the hydroxyl radical to the carbon atom inalpha or beta configuration, and the corresponding cyclodextrinclathrates, alkyl esters and non-toxic salts thereof.2. A compound according to claim 1 which is trans-.DELTA..sup.2-dihydro-PGE.sub.1.3. A compound according to claim 1 which is16(R)-methyl-trans-.DELTA..sup.2 -PGE.sub.1.4. A compound according to claim 1 which is 17-methyl-trans-.DELTA..sup.2-PGE.sub.1.5. A compound according to claim 1 which is16-phenyl-.omega.-trinor-trans-.DELTA..sup.2 -PGE.sub.1.6. A compound according to claim 1 which is16-cyclohexyl-.omega.-trinor-trans-.DELTA..sup.2 -PGE.sub.1.7. A compound according to claim 1 which is16-cyclopentyl-.omega.-trinor-trans-.DELTA..sup.2 -PGE.sub.1.8. A compound according to claim 1 which is15,16-dimethyl-trans-.DELTA..sup.2 -PGE.sub.1.9. A compound according to claim 1 which is 17-ethyl-trans-.DELTA..sup.2-PGE.sub.1.10. A compound according to claim 1 which is 17-ethyl-trans-.DELTA..sup.2-15-epi-PGE.sub.1.11. A compound which is 15-methyl-trans-.DELTA..sup.2 -PGE.sub.1."}
{"WKU":"039312976","Title":"10-Hydroxy PGC compounds","App_Date":"1972-09-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Pierre Crabbe","Assignee":"Syntex (U.S.A.) Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07C 6138;C07C 6474","References":"3846475","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A compound selected from the group of those represented by the formula:##SPC4##wherein R.sup.1 and R.sup.2 are independently selected from the group ofhydroxy, hydrocarbon carboxylic containing from one to 12 carbon atoms orthe group consisting of methoxy, ethoxy, cycopentyloxy,tetrahydrofuran-2-yloxy, tetrahydropyran-2-yloxy and4-methoxytetrahydropyran-4-yloxy;R.sup.4 is hydrogen or lower alkyl;Z is a carbon-carbon double bond; andZ  is a cis-olefin double bond or a saturated linkage; and pharmaceuticallyacceptable salts where R.sup.4 is hydrogen.2. The compound of claim 1 wherein said compound is selected from the groupof 9-keto-10.alpha.,15.alpha.-dihydroxyprosta-5-cis,11,13-trans-trienoicacid and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.3. The compound of claim 1 wherein said compound is selected from the groupof 9-keto-10.alpha.,15.alpha.-dihydroxyprosta-11,13-trans-dienoic acid andpharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof."}
{"WKU":"039312984","Title":"Chemical process for forming 2,6-dimethylaniline","App_Date":"1974-09-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John C. Wollensak","Assignee":"Ethyl Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07C 8502","References":"2013873;2413598;3037057;3219702;3219704;3272865;3278598;3442950","Claims":"I claim:1. In a process for converting a hydroxy aromatic starting material to thecorresponding aromatic amine, said process comprising reacting saidhydroxy aromatic with ammonia in the presence of a catalyst at atemperature of about 200.degree.-400.degree.C, the improvement whereinsaid catalyst is a Group VIII metal catalyst in combination with fromabout 0.05 to about 0.5 moles of a saturated cyclohexanone co-catalyst permole of said hydroxy aromatic.2. An improved process of claim 1 wherein said catalyst is palladiumsupported on a catalyst support.3. An improved process of claim 2 wherein said hydroxy aromatic is analkyl-substituted mononuclear phenol.4. An improved process of claim 3 wherein said alkyl-substitutedmononuclear phenol is an ortho-alkyl-substituted phenol.5. An improved process of claim 4 wherein said ortho-alkyl-substitutedphenol is a 2,6-dialkylphenol.6. An improved process of claim 5 wherein said 2,6-dialkylphenol is2,6-dimethylphenol.7. An improved process of claim 6 wherein said cyclohexanone is2,6-dimethyl cyclohexanone.8. An improved process of claim 5 wherein said 2,6-dialkylphenol is a2-methyl-6-tert-alkylphenol.9. An improved process of claim 8 wherein said 2-methyl-6-tert-alkylphenolis 2-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol.10. An improved process of claim 9 wherein said cyclohexanone is2-methyl-6-tert-butyl-cyclohexanone.11. An improved process of claim 5 wherein said 2,6-dialkylphenol is a2,6-di-tert-alkylphenol.12. An improved process of claim 11 wherein said 2,6-di-tert-alkylphenol is2,6-di-tert-butylphenol.13. An improved process of claim 2 wherein said cyclohexanone co-catalystis the reduced product of said hydroxy aromatic formed by reducing aportion of said hydroxy aromatic with hydrogen.14. An improved process of claim 13 wherein said reduced product of saidhydroxy aromatic is formed in a first stage by reacting said hydroxyaromatic containing said palladium catalyst with hydrogen and thereafter,in a second stage, adding said ammonia and reacting at200.degree.-400.degree.C.15. An improved process of claim 14 wherein said hydroxy aromatic is2,6-dimethylphenol.16. An improved process of claim 14 wherein said hydroxy aromatic is2-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol.17. An improved process of claim 2 wherein said cyclohexanone co-catalystis a distillation fraction from a prior process carried out in accordancewith claim 2, said distillation fraction consisting essentially of saidcyclohexanone and a cyclohexanol and a cyclohexyl amine wherein thecyclohexyl portion of said cyclohexanol and said cyclohexyl aminecorresponds to the cyclohexyl portion of said cyclohexanone.18. An improved process of claim 17 adapted for making 2,6-dimethylaniline,said process comprising adding a palladium catalyst and said distillationfraction consisting essentially of 2,6-dimethylcyclohexanone,2,6-dimethylcyclohexanol and 2,6-dimethylcyclohexylamine to2,6-dimethylphenol and reacting this mixture with aqueous ammonia at atemperature of about 200.degree.-400.degree.C, said distillation fractionbeing a distillation fraction obtained from a previous reaction of2,6-dimethylphenol with ammonia in contact with a palladium catalyst and2,6-dimethylcyclohexanone co-catalyst.19. An improved process of claim 17 adapted for making2-methyl-6-tert-butylaniline, said process comprising adding a palladiumcatalyst and said distillation fraction consisting essentially of2-methyl-6-tert-butylcyclohexanone, 2-methyl-6-tert-butylcyclohexanol and2-methyl-6-tert-butylcyclohexylamine to 2-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol andreacting this mixture with aqueous ammonia at a temperature of about200.degree.-275.degree.C, said distillation fraction being a distillationfraction obtained from a previous reaction of 2-methyl-6-tert-butylphenolwith ammonia in contact with a palladium catalyst and2-methyl-6-tert-butylcyclohexanone co-catalyst.20. A process for making 2,6-dimethylaniline, said process comprisingadding a palladium catalyst to 2,6-dimethylphenol, hydrogenating said2,6-dimethylphenol with about 0.1-1.0 moles of hydrogen per mole of2,6-dimethylphenol to reduce a portion of said 2,6-dimethylphenol, addingabout 1-4 moles of ammonia per mole of initial 2,6-dimethylphenol, heatingthe mixture in a sealed vessel at 200.degree.-400.degree.C to convert said2,6-dimethylphenol to 2,6-dimethylaniline, and recovering said2,6-dimethylaniline.21. A process for making 2,6-dimethylaniline, said process comprisingadding a palladium catalyst to 2,6-dimethylphenol, adding as a co-catalysta distillation fraction of reduced products consisting essentially of amixture of 2,6-dimethylcyclohexanone, 2,6-dimethylcyclohexanol and2,6-dimethylcyclohexylamine, said distillation fraction being obtainedfrom a previous reaction carried out in the same manner, adding about 1-4moles of ammonia per mole of said 2,6-dimethylphenol, heating the mixturein a sealed vessel at 200.degree.-400.degree.C to convert said2,6-dimethylphenol to 2,6-dimethylaniline, distilling the resultantmixture to obtain distillation fractions of reduced products and2,6-dimethylaniline product, said reduced products having a boiling pointbelow 2,6-dimethylphenol and 2,6-dimethylaniline and consistingessentially of a mixture of 2,6-dimethylcyclohexanone,2,6-dimethylcyclohexanol and 2,6-dimethylcyclohexylamine and recyclingsaid reduced products as the co-catalyst in a subsequent reaction carriedout in the same manner.22. A process of claim 21 wherein hydrogen is reacted with the initialmixture of 2,6-dimethylphenol, palladium catalyst and reduced productsco-catalyst in an amount sufficient to adjust the total amount of reducedproducts to about 0.05-0.5 moles per mole of 2,6-dimethylphenol.23. A process for making 2-methyl-6-tert-butylaniline, said processcomprising adding a palladium catalyst to 2-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol,hydrogenating said 2-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol with about 0.1-1 moles ofhydrogen per mole of 2-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol to reduce a portion ofsaid 2-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol, adding about 1-4 moles of ammonia permole of initial 2-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol and heating the mixture in asealed vessel at 200.degree.-275.degree.C to convert said2-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol to 2-methyl-6-tert-butylaniline and recoveringsaid 2-methyl-6-tert-butylaniline.24. A process for making 2-methyl-6-tert-butylaniline, said processcomprising adding a palladium catalyst to 2-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol,adding as a co-catalyst a distillation fraction of reduced productsconsisting essentially of a mixture of 2-methyl-6-tert-butylcyclohexanone,2-methyl-6-tert-butylcyclohexanol and2-methyl-6-tert-butylcyclohexylamine, said distillation fraction beingobtained from a previous reaction carried out in the same manner, addingabout 1-4 moles of ammonia per mole of said 2-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol,heating the mixture in a sealed vessel at 200.degree.-275.degree.C toconvert said 2-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol to 2-methyl-6-tert-butylaniline,distilling the resultant mixture to obtain distillation fractions ofreduced products and 2-methyl-6-tert-butylaniline product, said reducedproducts having a boiling point below 2-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol and2-methyl-6-tert-butylaniline and consisting essentially of a mixture of2-methyl-6-tert-butylcyclohexanone, 2-methyl-6-tert-butylcyclohexanol and2-methyl-6-tert-butylcyclohexylamine and recycling said reduced productsas the co-catalyst in a subsequent reaction carried out in the samemanner.25. A process of claim 24 wherein hydrogen is reacted with the initialmixture of 2-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol, palladium catalyst and reducedproducts co-catalyst in an amount sufficient to adjust the total amount ofreduced products to about 0.05-0.5 moles per mole of2-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol."}
{"WKU":"039312992","Title":"9.beta.-Formyl prostaglandin derivatives","App_Date":"1974-09-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Donald P. Strike","Assignee":"American Home Products Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07C 6138;C07C 6971","References":"","Claims":"The subject matter which the applicants regard as their invention isparticularly pointed out and distinctly claimed as follows:1. A chemical compound of the structure:##SPC6##whereini. X is a single bond; orii. X is a cis double bond,and R is hydrogen or alkyl of from 1 to 6 carbon atoms.2. The compound of claim 1 wherein X is a single bond and R is hydrogen.3. The compound of claim 1 wherein X is a cis double bond and R ishydrogen."}
{"WKU":"039313000","Title":"Process for the production of dichlorobenzoic acids","App_Date":"1974-04-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Helmut Junge;Hans-Juergen Quadbeck-Seeger","Assignee":"BASF Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07C 6312","References":"","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for the production of a dichlorobenzoic acid of the formula##SPC4##which comprises:reacting at an elevated temperature the diazonium salt of adichloroaminobenzoic acid of the formula##SPC5##in which X is the anion of an acid, with a saturated aliphatic oraraliphatic alcohol in an amount of from 1 mole to 10 moles per mole ofstarting material (II) in the presence of water in an amount of at least100% by weight based on the alcohol.2. A process as claimed in claim 1 wherein the reaction is carried out withfrom 1 mole to 3 moles of alcohol per mole of starting material (II).3. A process as claimed in claim 1 wherein the reaction is carried out witha hydrogen sulfate, sulfate, nitrate or chloride of the diazonium compoundof 2-amino-3,5-dichlorobenzoic acid, 2-amino-4,6-dichlorobenzoic acid,2-amino-3,6-dichlorobenzoic acid, 3-amino-2,6-dichlorobenzoic acid,4-amino-3,5-dichlorobenzoic acid, 4-amino-2,6-dichlorobenzoic acid, or3-amino-2,4-dichlorobenzoic acid.4. A process as claimed in claim 1 wherein the reaction is carried out at atemperature of from 40.degree.C to the boiling temperature of the mixture.5. A process as claimed in claim 1 carried out at a temperature of from50.degree. to 200.degree.C.6. A process as claimed in claim 1 carried out at a temperature of from50.degree. to 100.degree.C.7. A process as claimed in claim 1 wherein the reaction is carried out inthe presence of water in an amount of from 100 to 6000% by weight based onalcohol.8. A process as claimed in claimed 1 wherein the reaction is carried out inthe presence of from 2000 to 4000% by weight of water based on alcohol.9. A process as claimed in claim 1 wherein the alcohol has the formula ROHin which:R is alkyl of 1 to 5 carbon atoms or aralkyl of 7 to 12 carbon atoms or oneof the radicals HO--R.sup.1 -- or R.sup.2 O--(R.sup.1 O).sub.n --R.sup.1-- wherein each R.sup.1 is alkylene of 2 to 4 carbon atoms,R.sup.2 is hydrogen or alkyl of one to four carbon atoms andn is 1, 2, 3 or 4.10. A process as claimed in claim 9 wherein the reaction is carried out ata temperature of from 40.degree.C. to the boiling temperature of themixture.11. A process as claimed in claim 9 wherein the reaction is carried out inthe presence of water in an amount of from 100 to 6000% by weight based onthe alcohol."}
{"WKU":"039313018","Title":"Benzophenone derivatives and process for their preparation III","App_Date":"1974-08-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Heinz Gunter Greve;Klaus Resag","Assignee":"Cassella Farbwerke Mainkur Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07C14920;C07C 6520","References":"3741988","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Benzophenone derivative having the structural formula##SPC7##and the acid addition salts thereof, whereinR.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are substituents selected from the group consisting ofhydrogen, saturated and unsaturated alkyl groups having 1 - 4 carbonatoms;R.sub.3 is a substituent selected from the group consisting of --COOH and--COOMe, Me signifying a pharmacologically acceptable metallic cation;n is an integer selected from 1 and 2; andm is an integer selected from 1, 2 and 3, and wherein the ring A may besubstituted with a substituent selected from the group consisting ofhalogen, nitro, trifluoromethyl, methyl, methoxy and methylmercapto andthe ring B may be substituted with a substituent selected from the groupconsisting of fluorine and chlorine.2. Benzophenone derivative according to claim 1, wherein the ring A issubstituted at the 5-position and the ring B is substituted at the 2 position.3. Benzophenone derivative according to claim 1, wherein R.sub.1 is asubstituent selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and methyl andR.sub.2 is a substituent selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,methyl and butyl."}
{"WKU":"039313026","Title":"4-(M-benzoylphenyl)butyric acid derivatives","App_Date":"1972-08-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Andre Allais;Jean Meier;Jacques Dube","Assignee":"Roussel-UCLAF","ICL_Class":"C07C 6522","References":"3652666;3741988","Claims":"We claim:1. A compound selected from the group consisting of butyric acidderivatives of the formula##SPC25##wherein X, X.sub.1, X.sub.2 and X.sub.3 are individually selected from thegroup consisting of hydrogen, halogen, lower alkyl of 1 to 5 carbon atoms,lower alkoxy of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, lower alkylthio of 1 to 5 carbonatoms, trifluoromethoxy, trifluoromethylthio, trifluoromethyl, OH anddilower alkylamino of 1 to 5 carbon atoms for each alkyl, R is selectedfrom the group consisting of hydrogen, lower alkyl of 1 to 5 carbon atoms,o-carboxyphenyl, 2,3-dihydroxypropyl and##EQU12##wherein P and Q are individually lower alkyl of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, Z andX.sub.4 are individually selected from the group consisting of hydrogenand lower alkyl of 1 to 5 carbon atoms and Y is selected from the groupconsisting of hydrogen and -- OH and the dotted line indicates theoptional presence of a double bond when Y is hydrogen and when R ishydrogen or o-carboxyphenyl, the salts thereof with a non-toxic,pharmaceutically acceptable mineral or organic base.2. A compound of claim 1 wherein X.sub.1 and X.sub.3 are hydrogen, X andX.sub.2 are individually selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,halogen, lower alkyl of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, lower alkoxy of 1 to 5 carbonatoms, lower alkylthio of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, trifluoromethoxy,trifluoromethylthio, trifluoromethyl, R is selected from the groupconsisting of hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, 2,3-dihydroxypropyland##EQU13##wherein P and Q are individually alkyl of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, andX.sub.4, Z and Y have the definition of claim 1.3. A compound of claim 2 having the formula##SPC26##wherein X, X.sub.2, X.sub.4, Z and R have the definition of claim 2 andsalts thereof where R is hydrogen.4. A compound of claim 2 having the formula##SPC27##wherein X, X.sub.2, X.sub.4, Y, Z and R have the definition of claim 2 andthe dotted line indicates the optional presence of a double bond, when Yis hydrogen, in either .alpha..beta. or .beta..gamma. to the carboxylicgroup and salts thereof where R is hydrogen.5. A compound of claim 2 having the formula##SPC28##wherein X, X.sub.2 and R have the definition of claim 2 and salts thereofwhere R is hydrogen.6. A compound of claim 1 which is4-(3 -p-chlorobenzoyl-2 -methyl-phenyl)-butyric acid.7. A compound of claim 1 which is4-(3 -p-chlorobenzoyl-2 -methyl-phenyl)-2-butenoic acid."}
{"WKU":"039313034","Title":"Process for preparing 5-halo-2,3-phenylenediamine-1-carboxylic acid","App_Date":"1973-06-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Charles H. Chang;David I. Randall","Assignee":"GAF Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07C10168","References":"3158646","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for preparing 5-halo-2,3-diamino benzoic acids having theformula:##SPC6##wherein X is a member selected from the group consisting of chlorine,bromine and fluorine which comprises the high temperature reaction of2,5-dihalo-3-nitrobenzoic acid with ammonium hydroxide at a temperature of125.degree. and 140.degree.C. to produce 5-halo-3-nitroanthranilic acidand reducing said 5-halo-3-nitroanthranilic acid to 5-halo-2,3-diamino2. Method according to claim 1 which comprises reacting said nitrobenzoicacid with ammonium hydroxide in an autoclave at a temperature of3. Method according to claim 1 which comprises reducing said5-halo-3-nitroanthranilic acid by treatment with stannous chloride and4. Method according to claim 1 which comprises reducing said5-halo-3-nitrobenzoic acid by treatment with hydrogen in the presence of5. A 5-halo-2,3-phenylenediamine-1-carboxylic acid having the formula:##SPC7##wherein X is a member selected from the group consisting of chlorine,6. Compound according to claim 5 designated 5-chloro-2,3-phenylenediamine7. Compound according to claim 5 designated 5-bromo-2,3-phenylenediaminebenzoic acid."}
{"WKU":"039313042","Title":"Bismuth enhanced activity of transition metal-bromine catalysis of di-","App_Date":"1973-05-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Gene L. Wampfler","Assignee":"Standard Oil Company","ICL_Class":"C07C 5133","References":"2833816;3299125","Claims":"1. A method of preparing o-phthalic acid or trimellitic acid by oxidizingo-xylene or pseudocumene with molecular oxygen at a temperature in therange of 130.degree. to 275.degree.C in the presence of acetic acid undera pressure to maintain acetic acid in the liquid phase at suchtemperature, the improvement comprising the use of catalysis provided bythe components consisting essentially of bismuth, bromine and the variablevalence metals cobalt and manganese wherein said variable valence metalsare present in the amounts of from 2 to 5 milligram atoms and bromine ispresent in amounts of from 2 to 10 milligram atoms, each on a per grammole of o-xylene or pseudocumene basis and the ratio of bismuth to said2. The method of claim 1 for the preparation of o-phthalic acid by theoxidation of o-xylene with air in the presence of liquid acetic acidsolution of the components of catalysis wherein for each gram mole ofo-xylene there is present 1.0 milligram atom of each of Bi, Co and Mn."}
{"WKU":"039313050","Title":"Terephthalic acid recovery by continuous flash crystallization","App_Date":"1973-08-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jay A. Fisher","Assignee":"Standard Oil Company","ICL_Class":"C07C 5146;C07C 5144;C07C 6326","References":"3639465;3708532","Claims":"1. For the recovery of crystalline terephthalic acid product having amaximum p-toluic acid content not exceeding 150 ppm from a liquid aqueoussolution substantially saturated with terephthalic acid containing500-6,000 ppm of p-toluic acid at a temperature in the range of400.degree. to 550.degree. F., the improved process comprisingcontinuously charging such aqueous solution to the first of two or moreseries connected flash solvent evaporation and stirred crystallizationzones each operated at a successively lower temperature wherein at leastthe zones operated at a temperature within and below the range of360.degree.-320.degree. F. crystallize decreasing proportions oforiginally dissolved terephthalic acid, the flash evaporated solvent isremoved from each zone and the temperature of recovery of terephthalic2. The process of claim 1 wherein the number of series connected zones is3. The process of claim 1 wherein the number of series connected zones isin the range of from 3 to 6 for initial liquid aqueous solutions of4. The process of claim 3 wherein a total of 75-95% of originally dissolvedterephthalic acid is crystallized in substantially equal proportions inthe first two zones at a temperature above the range of360.degree.-320.degree. F. and thereafter the remaining 5-25% proportionof originally dissolved terephthalic acid is crystallized in decreasing5. The process of claim 3 wherein the incremental proportions ofterephthalic acid crystallized decrease from the first to the last zone.6. The process of claim 5 wherein a substantially equal temperaturedifference between the temperature of the feed and first zone and between7. The process of claim 5 wherein the number of zones is in the range of8. The process of claim 5 wherein the number of zones is in the range offrom 4 to 8 and the temperature of the last zone is in the range of212.degree. to 285.degree. F."}
{"WKU":"039313069","Title":"Process for producing isomer mixtures containing high proportions of","App_Date":"1974-07-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John B. Hall;Manfred Hugo Vock;Joaquin Vinals;Edward J. Shuster","Assignee":"International Flavors & Fragrances Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07C 5702","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for preparing a mixture containing 80%cis-2-methyl-3-pentenoic acid and 20% 2-methyl-2-pentenoic acid comprisingthe steps of:a. reacting in the presence of a non-reactive solvent at a temperature inthe range of 40.degree.-60.degree.C methyl acetylene with a methylmagnesium halide to form a methyl acetylene magnesium halide Grignardreagent;b. reacting in the presence of a non-reactive solvent at a temperature inthe range of 20.degree.-30.degree.C the methyl acetylene magnesium halideGrignard reagent with acetaldehyde to form a 3-pentyn-2-ol magnesiumhalide salt;c. hydrolyzing said 3-pentyn-2-ol magnesium halide salt with concentratedmineral acid to form 3-pentyn-2-ol;b. reacting in the presence of a non-reactive solvent at a temperature inthe range of 20.degree.-30.degree.C the methyl acetylene magnesium halideGrignard reagent with acetaldehyde to form a 3-pentyn-2-ol magnesiumhalide salt;e. reacting in the presence of a non-reactive solvent at a temperature inthe range of 25.degree.-50.degree.C said 4-halo-2-pentyne with magnesiumto form a 4-magnesium halo-2-pentyne Grignard reagent;f. reacting said 4-magnesium halo-2-pentyne Grignard reagent with CO.sub.2to form a magnesium halo carboxylate salt mixture;g. hydrolyzing said magnesium halo carboxylate salt mixture with aqueousmineral acid at a temperature in the range of 20.degree.-30.degree.C toform a mixture of 2-methyl-3-pentenoic acid and 2-methyl-2,3-pentadienoicacid; andh. reacting in the presence of a non-reactive solvent said mixture of2-methyl-3-pentynoic acid and 2-methyl-2,3-pentadienoic acid withhydrogen; the reaction taking place at a pressure of 20.degree.-200 psigand a temperature in the range of 20.degree.-40.degree.C in the presenceof a Pd/CaSO.sub.4 catalyst to form a mixture containing 80%cis-2-methyl-3-pentenoic acid and 20% 2-methyl-2-pentenoic acid."}
{"WKU":"039313077","Title":"Process for the stabilization of methionine","App_Date":"1973-11-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Gerd Eikelmann;Rudolf Fahnenstich;Theodor Lussling;Sven-Peter Mannsfeld;Gerhard Pohl;Herbert Tanner;Hans Wagner","Assignee":"Deutsche Gold- und Silber-Scheideanstalt vormals Roessler","ICL_Class":"C07C149247","References":"2432429","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for stabilizing methionine containing contaminants occurringin its production, said methionine being in the wet condition and having apH of at least 5 comprising adjusting the pH of the methionine to 3.0 to4.9 and drying the thus pH adjusted methionine to recover storage stabledry methionine which upon dissoltion in water gives a pH of 3.0 to 4.9.2. A process according to claim 1 wherein the pH is adjusted by addition ofan acid supplying material which is inert to methionine.3. A process of preparing storage stable methionine according to claim 2wherein the methionine is prepared by the alkaline hydrolysis of (1) alphaamino gamma methylmercapto butyronitrile or (2)5-(beta-methylmercaptoethyl) hydantoin, and containing residual impuritiesfrom said hydrolysis.4. A process according to claim 3 wherein the alkaline hydrolysis productis neutralized and then is acidified to a pH of 3 to 4.9 in the presenceof water.5. A process according to claim 4 wherein the compound hydrolyzed is5-(beta-methylmercaptoethyl) hydantoin.6. A process according to claim 5 wherein the hydrolysis had been carriedout in an aqueous alkali carbonate medium.7. A process according to claim 5 wherein the alkali carbonate is sodiumcarbonate or potassium carbonate and the neutralization of the reactionmixture is carried out with carbon dioxide.8. A process according to claim 7 wherein the pH of the methionine isadjusted to 4.3-4.8.9. A process according to claim 8 wherein the pH is adjusted to 4.3 to 4.8with sulfuric acid or sodium bisulfate."}
{"WKU":"039313085","Title":"Process for conversion of lysine dihydrochloride to lysine","App_Date":"1974-05-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Stylianos Sifniades","Assignee":"Allied Chemical Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07C 9900;C07C 9906;C07C 9912","References":"2556917;2564649;2876218;3576859","Claims":"I claim:1. In a method for converting an aqueous solution of lysine dihydrochlorideto crystalline lysine monohydrochloride wherein the lysine dihydrochlorideis produced from the hydrolysis of .alpha.-amino-.epsilon.-caprolactam, or.alpha.-amino-.epsilon.-caprolactam hydrochloride with more than two molsof hydrochloric acid per mol of .alpha.-amino-.epsilon.-caprolactam, theimprovement comprising the steps of:a. neutralizing said solution with .alpha.-amino-.epsilon.-caprolactam or atransition metal complex chloride salt thereof;b. crystallizing lysine monohydrochloride from said solution by addition ofan organic solvent; andc. removing the precipitated crystalline lysine monohydrochloride.2. The method of claim 1 wherein the lysine dihydrochloride solution issubjected to a distillation step prior to neutralization to remove excessHCl.3. The method of claim 1 wherein the lysine dihydrochloride solutioncontains up to about 20 percent unhydrolyzed.alpha.-amino-.epsilon.-caprolactam or .alpha.-amino-.epsilon.-caprolactamhydrochloride.4. The method of claim 1 wherein said organic solvent is chosen from thegroup consisting of an alcohol or ether.5. The method of claim 4 wherein said organic solvent is chosen from thegroup consisting of methanol, ethanol, n-propanol, isopropanol, ormixtures thereof.6. The method of claim 1 wherein the lysine dihydrochloride is neutralizedin a solution consisting essentially of.alpha.-amino-.epsilon.-caprolactam which has been first dissolved in anorganic solvent.7. The method of claim 1 wherein the neutralization agent isL-.alpha.-amino-.epsilon.-caprolactam and further comprising the steps of:a. fractionating the solution remaining after removal of the precipitatedlysine monohydrochloride to separate the organic solvent from a solutioncontaining L-.alpha.-amino-.epsilon.-caprolactam hydrochloride;b. recycling the organic solvent to the neutralization operation; andc. recycling the fractionation residue containing primarilyL-.alpha.-amino-.epsilon.-caprolactam hydrochloride to the hydrolysisstep.8. The method of claim 1 wherein the neutralization agent isD,L-.alpha.-amino-.epsilon.-caprolactam orD-.alpha.-amino-.epsilon.-caprolactam and further comprising the steps of:a. fractionating the solution remaining after removal of the precipitatedlysine monohydrochloride to separate the organic solvent and a portion ofthe water from the remaining solution;b. recycling the organic solvent to the neutralization operation;c. filtering to remove the precipitated crystallineD,L-.alpha.-amino-.epsilon.-caprolactam hydrochloride orD-.alpha.-amino-.epsilon.-caprolactam hydrochloride for recycle to aresolution operation; andd. recycling the filtrate to the neutralization step.9. The method of claim 1 wherein the neutralization agent is anL-.alpha.-amino-.epsilon.-caprolactam - transition metal complex chloridesalt and further comprising the steps of:a. drying the solution remaining after removal of the precipitated lysinemonohydrochloride to separate the organic solvent and to remove the waterfrom the crystalline residue;b. recycling the organic solvent;c. extracting the crystalline residue with an alcohol to separate thecrystalline L-.alpha.-amino-.epsilon.-caprolactam hydrochloride from thealcohol solution containing the transition metal salt;d. recycling the extraction residue containing primarily crystallineL-.alpha.-amino-.epsilon.-caprolactam hydrochloride to the hydrolysisstep; ande. recycling the alcohol extract containing primarily transition metal saltin the alcohol solution to resolution.10. The method of claim 9 wherein the L-.alpha.-amino-.epsilon.-caprolactamtransition metal salt is optically impure and whereinD,L-.alpha.-amino-.epsilon.-caprolactam hydrochloride produced as abyproduct remains dissolved in the alcoholic solution.11. The method of claim 1 wherein step (a) comprises neutralizing saidsolution with the nickel chloride complex of.alpha.-amino-.epsilon.-caprolactam.12. The method of claim 1 wherein said transition metal complex chloridesalt is employed as a neutralization agent."}
{"WKU":"039313093","Title":"Process for the preparation of carbon tetrachloride and phosgene","App_Date":"1971-07-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Wilhelm Riemenschneider;Hans Krekeler;Helmut Meidert","Assignee":"Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07C 5158","References":"383992;3515752","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for the preparation of a mixture of carbon tetrachloride andphosgene in the absence of catalysts, which comprises reactinga. oxygen-containing carbon-hydrogen compounds, in which the number ofcarbon atoms exceeds the number of oxygen atoms by at least one, orb. a compound selected from the group consisting of oxygen-containingcarbon-hydrogen compounds, carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, water, andmixtures thereof, in admixture with a compound selected from the groupconsisting of benzene, toluene, naphthalene, anthracene, diphenyl,chlorinated compounds thereof, methyl chloride, chloroform, chlorinatedalkanes and alkenes of at least two carbon atoms, chlorinatedcycloalkanes, and mixtures thereof, with chlorine at a temperature of upto 400.degree.C. in a preliminary reaction zone and continuing thereaction in a main reaction zone at a temperature in the range of from400.degree. to 800.degree.C. and a pressure of between 50 and 800atmospheres gage.2. A process as claimed in claim 1, which comprises using simultaneouslycarbon monoxide, carbon dioxide and water.3. A process for the preparation of a mixture of carbon tetrachloride andphosgene in the absence of a catalyst, which comprises reacting anoxygen-containing carbon-hydrogen compound, in which the number of carbonatoms exceeds the number of oxygen atoms by at least one, with chlorine ata temperature of up to 400.degree.C. in a preliminary reaction zone andcontinuing the reaction in a main reaction zone at a temperature in therange of from 400.degree. to 800.degree.C. and a pressure of between 50and 800 atmospheres gage.4. A process as claimed in claim 3, wherein the temperature is in the rangeof from 500.degree. to 700.degree.C.5. A process as claimed in claim 3, wherein the pressure is in the range offrom 80 to 300 atmospheres gage.6. A process as claimed in claim 3, which comprises introducing thechlorine into the reactor in a liquid form.7. A process as claimed in claim 3, which comprises using the chlorine inan excess amount of from 50 to 100 %, calculated on the theory.8. A process as claimed in claim 7, which comprises recirculating thechlorine.9. A process as defined in claim 3 in which the oxygen-containingcarbon-hydrogen compound is an alcohol, aldehyde, ketone, acid, acidester, acid anhydride, ether, phenol, quinone, epoxide, oxygen-containinghetero-cycle, or oxygen-containing polymer.10. A process as defined in claim 3 in which the oxygen-containingcarbon-hydrogen compound is ethanol."}
{"WKU":"039313107","Title":"Phosphorus-containing condensation products","App_Date":"1972-08-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hermann Nachbur;Arthur Maeder","Assignee":"Ciba-Geigy AG","ICL_Class":"C07F  954","References":"2812311","Claims":"We claim:1. A water-soluble condensation product fromtetrakis-(hydroxymethyl)-phosphonium compound and dicyandiamide, producedby the process, comprising condensing atetrakis-(hydroxymethyl)-phosphonium salt ortetrakis(hydroxymethyl)-phosphonium hydroxide with dicyandiamide ormethylolated dicyandiamide, at a molar ratio of 1:0.02 to 0.2, at40.degree. to 120.degree.C in the presence of an inert organic solvent oraqueous medium or in the melt, to give the condensation product, whilesimultaneously removing by distillation from the reaction mixture anywater present or formed during the condensation.2. A product of claim 1, wherein further condensation occurs as thereaction temperature is elevated to 100.degree. to 150.degree.C afterremoval of the water.3. A product of claim 1, wherein the resulting product is further treatedwith an alkanol of 1 to 4 carbon atoms in an acid medium to effect partialor complete etherification.4. A product of claim 1, wherein reaction mixture further includesformaldehyde or paraformaldehyde.5. A product of claim 1, wherein the tetrakis-(hydroxymethyl)-phosphoniumcompound is treated with dicyandiamide.6. A product of claim 1, wherein the inert organic solvent is an aromatichydrocarbon solvent.7. A product of claim 1, wherein the molar ratio is 1:0.05 to 0.15.8. A product of claim 1, wherein the tetrakis-(hydroxymethyl)-phosphoniumsalt is a tetrakis(hydroxymethyl)-phosphonium halide.9. A product of claim 8, wherein the tetrakis-(hydroxymethyl)-phosphoniumhalide is tetrakis(hydroxymethyl)-phosphonium chloride."}
{"WKU":"039313115","Title":"N,N,N-trisubstituted N-halogenomethylurea and thiourea compounds and","App_Date":"1973-02-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Rudolf Thomas;Wolfgang Kramer;Ludwig Eue;Carl Metzger;Gerhard Jager","Assignee":"Bayer Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07C12719;C07C15702","References":"3505454","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. N,N ,N -trisubstituted N-halogenomethylurea compound of the formula##EQU12##in which X is oxygen or sulfurR.sup.1 is phenyl, unsubstituted or substituted with chlorine, bromine,trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, methyl, ethyl, methoxy,methylthio, ethoxy or chlorophenoxy,R.sup.2 and R.sup.3 are selected from the group of methyl,butyl, allyl,##EQU13##and chloroethyl, and Y is chlorine.2. Compound as claimed in claim 1 wherein R.sup.1 is 4-chlorophenyl or3,4-dichlorophenyl, R.sup.2 and R.sup.3 are methyl, X is sulfur and Y ischlorine.3. Compound as claimed in claim 1 wherein R.sup.1 is 4-chlorophenyl or3,4-dichlorophenyl, R.sup.2 is methoxy, R.sup.3 is methyl, X is oxygen,and Y is chlorine.4. Compound as claimed in claim 1 designated1-chloromethyl-1-phenyl-3,3-dimethylurea.5. Compound as claimed in claim 1 designated1-chloromethyl-1-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-3-methoxy-3-methylurea.6. Compound as claimed in claim 1 designated1-chloromethyl-(4-chlorophenyl)-3,3-dimethylurea.7. Compound as claimed in claim 1 designated1-chloromethyl-1-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-3,3-dimethylurea."}
{"WKU":"039313123","Title":"Novel N(-difluoromethylmercaptophenyl) urea compounds and herbicidal","App_Date":"1973-05-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Erich Klauke;Engelbert Kuhle;Ludwig Eue","Assignee":"Bayer Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07C12719","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. N-arylurea compound of the formula##SPC5##in whichX.sub.1 and X.sub.2 are difluorochloromethylmercapto, chlorine or hydrogenwith the proviso that one and only one of X.sub.1 and X.sub.2 isdifluorochloromethylmercapto;R.sub.1 is hydrogen, alkyl of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms; andR.sub.2 is alkyl of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms.2. Compound as claimed in claim 1 wherein X.sub.1 isdifluorochloromethylmercapto.3. Compound as claimed in claim 1 wherein X.sub.2 isdifluorochloromethylmercapto.4. Compound as claimed in claim 1 wherein one of X.sub.1 and X.sub.2 ishydrogen.5. Compound as claimed in claim 1 wherein one of X.sub.1 and X.sub.2 ischlorine.6. Compound as claimed in claim 1 designated asN-(4-difluorochloromethylmercaptophenyl)-N , N -dimethylurea.7. Compound as claimed in claim 1 designated asN-(3-difluorochloromethylmercaptophenyl)-N , N -dimethylurea.8. Compound as claimed in claim 1 designated asN-(3-chloro-4-difluorochloromethylmercaptophenyl)-N , N -dimethylurea."}
{"WKU":"039313131","Title":"Schiff s base dichloroacetamides","App_Date":"1974-11-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Don R. Baker","Assignee":"Stauffer Chemical Company","ICL_Class":"C07C10334","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A compound having the formula##EQU3##in which R.sub.1 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl havingfrom 1 to 6 carbon atoms, inclusive, alkenyl having from 3 to 6 carbonatoms, inclusive, alkynyl having from 3 to 6 carbon stoms, inclusive, andalkoxyalkyl having a total of from 2 to 8 carbon atoms, inclusive; andR.sub.2 is alkylimino having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, inclusive.2. A compound according to claim 1 in which R.sub.1 is alkyl and R.sub.2 isalkylimino.3. A compound according to claim 2 in which R.sub.1 is methyl and R.sub.2is 2-isopropylimino."}
{"WKU":"039313140","Title":"Benzophenone derivatives and process for their production","App_Date":"1974-08-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Heinz Gunter Greve;Klaus Resag","Assignee":"Cassella Farbwerke Mainkur Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07C10334","References":"3334100;3429874;3729470","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Benzophenone derivative having the structural formula##EQU8##and the acid addition salts thereof, wherein R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 aresubstituents selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, saturated andunsaturated alkyl groups having 1 - 4 carbon atoms; R.sub.3 is--CONH.sub.2 ; n is an integer selected from 1 and 2; and m is an integerselected from 1, 2 and 3, and wherein the ring A is substituted at the5-position with a substituent selected from the group consisting ofhalogen, nitro, trifluoromethyl, methyl, methoxy and methylmercapto andthe ring B is substituted at the 2  position with a substituent selectedfrom the group consisting of fluorine and chlorine.2. Benzophenone derivative according to claim 1, wherein R.sub.1 is asubstituent selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and methyl andR.sub.2 is a substituent selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,methyl and butyl."}
{"WKU":"039313158","Title":"Alicyclic amino compounds and their production","App_Date":"1973-10-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Akisato Katanosaka;Manabu Hanamoto","Assignee":"Nard Institute, Ltd.","ICL_Class":"C07C 8740","References":"2635979;3505402;3595917","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An alicyclic amino compound of the general formula:##SPC6##wherein R.sub.1, R.sub.2, R.sub.3, R.sub.4 and R.sub.5 are each hydrogen oralkyl having 1 to 6 carbon atoms; X is hydrogen, alkyl having 1 to 6carbon atoms or aminomethyl; n is an integer of 1 or 2.2. The alicyclic amino compound claimed in claim 1 wherein R.sub.1 R.sub.2,R.sub.3, R.sub.4, R.sub.5 and X are each hydrogen; n is 1.3. The alicyclic amino compound claimed in claim 1 wherein R.sub.1,R.sub.2, R.sub.3, R.sub.4, R.sub.5 and X are eacy hydrogen; n is 2.4. The alicyclic amino compound claimed in claim 1 wherein R.sub.1,R.sub.2, R.sub.3, R.sub.4 and R.sub.5 are each hydrogen; X is aminomethyl;n is 2.5. A process for producing an alicyclic amino compound of the generalformula:##SPC7##wherein R.sub.1, R.sub.2, R.sub.3, R.sub.4 and R.sub.5 are each hydrogen oralkyl having 1 to 6 carbon atoms; X is hydrogen, alkyl having 1 to 6carbon atoms or aminomethyl; n is an integer of 1 or 2, which compriseshydrogenating an alicyclic cyano compound of the general formula:##SPC8##Wherein R.sub.1, R.sub.2, R.sub.3, R.sub.4, R.sub.5 and n are each asdefined above; X  is each hydrogen, alkyl having 1 to 6 carbon atoms,aminomethyl or cyano."}
{"WKU":"039313166","Title":"Method of preparing O-methyl-isourea hydrogen sulfate and","App_Date":"1974-12-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Stefan Weiss","Assignee":"Suddeutsche Kalkstickstoff-Werke AG","ICL_Class":"C07C12300","References":"3551489;3670022","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method of preparing O-methyl-isourea sulfate of the formula##EQU3##which comprises holding a mixture of substantially equimolar amounts ofcyanamide and O-methyl-isourea hydrogen sulfate of the formula##EQU4##in a liquid medium essentially consisting of methanol at a temperature of5.degree. to 40.degree.C for a period sufficient for forming saidO-methyl-isourea sulfate, and recovering the formed O-methyl-isoureasulfate from said medium.2. A method as set forth in claim 1, wherein said period extends for 4 to40 hours.3. A method as set forth in claim 2, wherein the amount of said methanol insaid medium is 2 to 5 moles of methanol per mole of said cyanamide.4. A method as set forth in claim 1, wherein said medium further includessulfuric acid in an amount of 0.01 to 0.1 mole per mole of said cyanamide.5. A method as set forth in claim 1, wherein said temperature is 30.degree.to 40.degree.C, and said period is 4 to 6 hours.6. A method as set forth in claim 1, wherein said mixture is held at saidtemperature in said medium until said O-methyl-isourea sulfate is formedin an amount exceeding 50 mole percent of said O-methyl-isourea hydrogensulfate.7. A method as set forth in claim 1, wherein said O-methyl-isourea hydrogensulfate, prior to said holding of said mixture, is prepared by mixingconcentrated sulfuric acid with methanol in a weight ratio of 50 to 150parts methanol to 100 parts sulfuric acid, and further with crystallinecyanamide, and holding the resulting composition at -10.degree. to20.degree.C until said O-methyl-isourea hydrogen sulfate is formed.8. A method as set forth in claim 7, wherein the weight of said crystallinecyanamide is 37 to 47 parts per 100 parts of said sulfuric acid, on ananhydrous basis, the weight of said methanol being 75 to 100 parts, saidmethanol and sulfuric acid being mixed, and said cyanamide being added tothe mixed sulfuric acid and methanol.9. A method as set forth in claim 7, wherein said formed O-methyl-isoureahydrogen sulfate is separated from substantially the entire remainder ofsaid composition prior to said holding of said mixture.10. A method as set forth in claim 9, wherein said remainder is replenishedwith at least one member of the group consisting of cyanamide, sulfuricacid, and methanol until the replenished composition contains, per 100parts of said sulfuric acid on an anhydrous basis, 37 to 47 parts of saidcyanamide and 75 to 100 parts of said methanol.11. A method of preparing O-methyl-isourea hydrogen sulfate which comprisesmixing concentrated sulfuric acid and methanol in a weight ratio of 50 to150 parts methanol to 100 parts sulfuric acid, adding crystallinecyanamide to the liquid so obtained, holding the resulting composition at-10.degree. to 20.degree.C until said O-methyl-isourea hydrogen sulfate isformed, and separating the formed O-methyl-isourea hydrogen sulfate fromthe bulk of the remainder of said composition."}
{"WKU":"039313174","Title":"N-trifluoromethyl-N-(trihalomethylthio)-amino-benzo-imide chlorides","App_Date":"1974-06-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Engelbert Kuhle;Erich Klauke","Assignee":"Bayer Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07C11900","References":"3714182;3715396","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A substituted aminobenzimide-chloride of the formula##SPC6##in whichX, x  and X  each independently is fluorine, chlorine or bromine,R is hydrogen, halogen, nitro, trifluoromethyl, or alkyl or alkoxy eachwith up to 3 carbon atoms, andR  is alkyl with up to 16 carbon atoms, cycloalkyl with up to 7 carbonatoms, aralkyl with a total of up to 8 carbon atoms, or aryl with up to 10carbon atoms.2. A compound according to claim 1, in which X, X  and X  eachindependently is fluorine or chlorine; R is hydrogen, methyl, methoxy,trifluoromethyl, chlorine or nitro; and R  is alkyl with up to 12 carbonatoms, cycloalkyl with 5 or 6 carbon atoms, benzyl or phenyl.3. A compound according to claim 1, wherein such compound is3-[N-trifluoromethyl-N-(fluorodichloromethylthio)-amino]-benzo-isopropylimide chloride of the formula##SPC7##4. A compound according to claim 1, wherein such compound is4-[N-trifluoromethyl-N-(fluorodichloromethylthio)-amino]-benzoisopropylimide chloride of the formula##SPC8##5. A compound according to claim 1, wherein such compound is2-[N-trifluoromethyl-N-(fluorodichloromethylthio)-amino]-benzo-methylimidechloride of the formula##SPC9##"}
{"WKU":"039313182","Title":"Alkylthio benzoyl chloride phenylhydrazones","App_Date":"1974-12-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Girts Kaugars","Assignee":"The Upjohn Company","ICL_Class":"C07C10916","References":"3786094","Claims":"I claim:1. The new chemical compounds ar or ar  (alkylthio) benzoyl chloridephenylhydrazones having the structural formula:##SPC3##wherein  alkyl  is of from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, inclusive, X is halogen,alkyl of from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, inclusive, alkylthio of from 1 to 6carbon atoms, inclusive, .alpha.-F.sub.n alkyl of from 1 to 3 carbonatoms, inclusive, wherein n is the integer 2 or 3, and nitro; Y is alkylof from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, inclusive, halogen, alkylthio of from 1 to 6carbon atoms, inclusive, .alpha.-F.sub.n alkyl of from 1 to 3 carbonatoms, inclusive, and nitro; n  is an integer 0 to 3, inclusive; n  is 1except when Y is alkylthio, when it can be zero; m is an integer from 0 to3, inclusive, the sum of n  +n  +m being not more than 6, the sum ofcarbon atoms in the alkyl substituents being not more than 15, there beingno more than one nitro group in the molecule, and no more than two.alpha.-F.sub.n alkyl groups on any benzene ring or three total.2. New chemical compounds according to claim 1 wherein n  is one and the S-alkyl  group is in the para position.3. New chemical compounds according to claim 2, wherein n  is zero.4. New chemical compounds according to claim 3 wherein m is zero.5. The new chemical compound according to claim 4, p-(methylthio)benzoylchloride phenylhydrazone.6. New chemical compounds according to claim 2 wherein the  S-alkyl  groupis methylthio.7. New chemical compounds according to claim 6 wherein n  is zero.8. New chemical compounds according to claim 1 wherein Y is alkylthio andn  is zero.9. New chemical compounds according to claim 8 wherein alkylthio ismethylthio.10. The new chemical compound according to claim 9 benzoyl chloride[p-(methylthio)phenyl]hydrazone."}
{"WKU":"039313190","Title":"Capped polymers","App_Date":"1974-10-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Harold A. Green;John J. Merianos;Alfonso N. Petrocci","Assignee":"Millmaster Onyx Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07C 8746","References":"2525777;3079436","Claims":"The invention claimed is:1. The compound##EQU4##wherein R  and R  are selected from the group consisting of (a) primary orsecondary alkyls having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, (b) hydroxy or dihydroxyderivatives of R  and R , (c) benzyl, and (d) benzyl having at least onealkyl group bonded to the benzene ring, with the total sum of alkyl carbonatoms attached to the benzene ring being less than 7; wherein R  ,R.sup.IV and R.sup.V are selected from the group consisting of (a) primaryor secondary alkyls having 1 to 20 carbon atoms and (b) hydroxyalkyl;wherein Z consists of 1 to 3 aliphatic divalent radicals, each of whichhas 2 to 10 carbon atoms with each aliphatic radical having 0 to 2 doublebonds and 0 to 2 hydroxy substituents; wherein X is selected from thegroup consisting of chlorine and bromine; and wherein n is an integer ofabout 2 to about 30."}
{"WKU":"039313204","Title":"Process for the production of aromatic polyamines","App_Date":"1972-05-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Willi Eifler;Roderich Raue;Ernst-Heinrich Rohe;Josef Finkel","Assignee":"Bayer Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07c 8728","References":"3297759","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a process for the production of an aromatic polyamine comprisingcondensing a primary or secondary aromatic amine with formaldehyde or aformaldehyde precursor in the presence of an acid catalyst and liberatingthe polyamine upon completion of condensation by the addition of abasically reacting reagent, wherein a first mixture of the totalquantities of the amine and the catalyst required for the reaction isformed and cooled to below about 40.degree.C. and wherein a second mixturecontaining amine, catalyst, aldehyde, precondensates formed therefrom, andwater, issues from a mixer at a maximum temperature of about 40.degree.C.,the improvement which comprises separating said second mixture intoa. a side stream which is admixed with the first mixture to form a reactingmixture liberating heat, which heat is dissipated in a heat exchanger, andintroducing the reacting mixture at a temperature of at most about40.degree.C. into the mixer into which the formaldehyde or formaldehydeprecursor is added, andb. a main stream which is passed through a reaction zone, maintained at amaximum temperature of about 40.degree.C., and into a heated residencereactor maintained at a temperature from about 80.degree.C. to about200.degree.C., wherein the condensation reaction is completed.2. The process of claim 1, wherein the ratio of side stream to a mainstream is from about 5 : 1 to about 1 : 3.3. The process of claim 1, wherein a second side stream is removed from thesystem immediately before the mixer, and is reacted, in heated residencereactors to form a polyamine with a binuclear polyamine content of morethan 70% by weight.4. The process of claim 1 wherein aniline, o-toluidine, N-methylaniline,N-ethylaniline or a mixture thereof, is used as the aromatic amine.5. The process of claim 1, wherein hydrochloric acid is used as thecatalyst."}
{"WKU":"039313212","Title":"Process for the preparation of O-aminothiophenols","App_Date":"1974-10-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Siegfried Planker;Konrad Baessler","Assignee":"Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07C 8511","References":"1933217;2894035","Claims":"We claim:1. In a process for the preparation of an o-aminothiophenol compound fromo-chloro-nitrobenzene-compounds by the action of water-solublehydrogen-sulfides or sulfides, the improvement comprising isolating thefree aninothiophenol from the alkaline solution by neutralization withmineral acid in the presence of from 1.5 to 2.5 moles of a water-solublesulfite or of from 0.75 to 1.25 moles of a water-soluble disulfite permole of o-chloronitrobenzene compound at a temperature within the range offrom about 0.degree.C to about 30.degree.C and at a pH ranging from 5 to7.2. A process as claimed in claim 1, wherein sodium sulfite is used aswater-soluble sulfite.3. A process as claimed in claim 1, wherein about 1.6 moles of sodiumsulfite are used per mole of chloronitrobenzene.4. A process as claimed in claim 1, wherein the neutralization is carriedout at a temperature within the range of from 5.degree.C to 15.degree.C.5. A process as claimed in claim 1, wherein the pH is adjusted at 6 duringneutralization.6. A process as claimed in claim 1, wherein the reaction is carried out inan atmosphere of inert gas."}
{"WKU":"039313220","Title":"Synthesis of 2-alkyl-cyclopentan-1,3-diones","App_Date":"1974-01-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Urs Oskar Hengartner;Pius Anton Wehrli","Assignee":"Hoffmann-La Roche Inc.","ICL_Class":"C07C 4500","References":"2158071;3349130;3504036;3518296;3798259","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for the preparation of a compound of the formula##SPC3##wherein R.sub.1 is lower alkyl, which comprises treating a compound of theformula##SPC4##wherein R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are each lower alkyl, with a colloidalsuspension of an alkali metal primary lower alkyl alcoholate in an inertorganic solvent medium, at an elevated temperature.2. The process of claim 1 wherein the alkali metal primary lower alcoholateis sodium methoxide.3. The process of claim 1 wherein R.sub.1 is methyl, that is, the compoundof formula I is 2-methyl-cyclopentan-1,3-dione.4. The process of claim 1 wherein R.sub.1 is ethyl, that is, the compoundof formula I is 2-ethyl-cyclopentan-1,3-dione.5. The process of claim 1 wherein the inert organic solvent medium isselected from the group consisting of aliphatic hydrocarbons, benzenehydrocarbons and substituted benzene hydrocarbons.6. The process of claim 5 wherein the solvent is xylene.7. The process of claim 1 wherein the colloidal suspension of alkali metalprimary lower alcoholate is prepared by addition of a concentratedsolution of said alcoholate in its correspondong alcohol to the solventmedium at about reflux.8. The process of claim 1 wherein the solvent medium contains between about0.1 and 2.0 equivalents of a polar aprotic cosolvent, relative to thecompound of formula II.9. The process of claim 8 wherein between about 0.2 and 0.5 equivalents ofcosolvent are utilized.10. The process of claim 8 wherein the polar aprotic cosolvent isdimethylsulfoxide.11. The process of claim 1 wherein between about 1 and 5.0 equivalents ofalkali metal primary lower alcoholate are utilized.12. The process of claim 11 wherein between about 1 and 2.5 equivalents ofalkali metal primary lower alkyl alcoholate are utilized.13. The process of claim 1 wherein the temperature is between about80.degree. and 250.degree.C.14. The process of claim 13 wherein the reaction temperature is at aboutthe reflux point of the solvent medium."}
{"WKU":"039313239","Title":"Process for the preparation of alkenoyl-substituted cyclohexenes","App_Date":"1973-03-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"George Hermann Buchi;John Christopher Vederas","Assignee":"Firmenich SA","ICL_Class":"C07C 4500","References":"","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for preparing compounds of formula##SPC18##wherein the ring contains one endocyclic double bond in position 1, 2, 3 or4, or an exocyclic double bond in position 2, or two conjugated doublebonds in position 1 and 3, the double bonds being represented by dottedlines; and each of the symbols R.sup.1, R.sup.2, R.sup.3, R.sup.4 andR.sup.5 represents either a hydrogen atom or a lower alkyl radical having1 to 6 carbon atoms; which comprises:a. reducing a compound having the formula##SPC19##wherein the dotted lines and the symbols R.sup.1, R.sup.2, R.sup.3, R.sup.4and R.sup.5 are as described above, by means of an alkali metal or analkaline earth metal in solution of liquid ammonia and in the presence oftert-butanol as a proton donor to yield a .beta.-amino-ketone compoundhaving the formula##SPC20##wherein the dotted lines of the ring and the symbols R.sup.1, R.sup.2,R.sup.3, R.sup.4 and R.sup.5 are as described above; andb. subsequently removing an ammonia molecule from the said.beta.-amino-ketone compound by addition of a mineral acid orp-toluene-sulphonic or by heating.2. A process for preparing compounds of formula##SPC21##wherein the ring contains one endocyclic double bond in position 1, 2, 3 or4, or an exocyclic double bond in position 2, or two conjugated doublebonds in position 1 and 3, the double bonds being represented by dottedlines; and each of the symbols R.sup.1, R.sup.2, R.sup.3, R.sup.4 andR.sup.5 represents either a hydrogen atom or a lower alkyl radical having1 to 6 carbon atoms; which comprisesa. reducing a compound having the formula##SPC22##wherein the dotted lines and the symbols R.sup.1, R.sup.2, R.sup.3, R.sup.4and R.sup.5 are as described above, by means of catalytic hydrogenation toyield a .beta.-imino-ketone equilibrium reaction mixture of##SPC23##wherein the dotted lines and the symbols R.sup.1, R.sup.2, R.sup.3, R.sup.4and R.sup.5 are as described above; andb. subsequently further adding to the reaction mixture of a. a reducingagent selected from the group of1. an alkali metal or alkaline earth metal in solution of liquid ammoniaand in the presence of tert-butanol as a proton donor; and"}
{"WKU":"039313247","Title":"2-Hydrocarbyl ethers of cycloaliphatic ketones and process for their","App_Date":"1973-11-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Rudolph Rosenthal;Giovanni A. Bonetti","Assignee":"Atlantic Richfield Company","ICL_Class":"C07C 4500","References":"2713068;3431308","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for preparing 2-hydrocarbyloxy cycloalkanones comprisingreacting a 1,1-bis (hydrocarbylperoxy) cycloalkane with cycloalkanone inthe presence of a molybdenum containing catalyst selected from the groupconsisting of metallic molybdenum and compounds of molybdenum at areaction temperature of from about 20.degree.C. to about 150.degree.C.;the molar ratio of cycloalkanone to 1,1-bis (hydrocarbylperoxy)cycloalkane being from about 1:1 to about 10:1.2. The process of claim 1 wherein the catalyst is present in a range offrom about 0.01 wt. % to 2 wt. % of the total weight of the startingmaterials.3. The process of claim 2 wherein the catalyst is molybdenum naphthenate.4. The process of claim 2 wherein pressures are from about atmospheric toabout 100 atmospheres.5. The process of claim 1 whrein said cycloalkanone is cyclohexanone.6. A process for preparing 2-t-butoxycyclohexanone comprising reacting at atemperature of from about 20.degree.C. to about 150.degree.C. (a)cyclohexanone with (b) 1,1-bis (t-butylperoxy) cyclohexane in the presenceof a molybdenum containing catalyst wherein the molar ratio of (a) to (b)is from about 1:1 to about 10:1.7. The process of claim 6 wherein said catalyst is molybdenum naphthenate.8. The process of claim 6 wherein the reaction is carried out in thepresence of an inert solvent.9. A process for preparing 2-isopropoxycyclohexanone comprising reacting ata temperature of from about 20.degree.C. to about 150.degree.C. (a)cyclohexanone with (b) 1,1-bis (isopropylperoxy) cyclohexane in thepresence of a molybdenum containing catalyst wherein the molar ratio of(a) to (b) is from about 1:1 to about 10:1.10. The process of claim 1 wherein said compound of molybdenum is selectedfrom the group consisting of molybdenum oxides, molybdenum chlorides,molybdenum fluoride, molybdic acid, molybdic acid salts, molybdenumnaphthenates, molybdenum stearates, molybdenum octoates, molybdenumcarbonyls, and molybdenum acetylacetonates."}
{"WKU":"039313255","Title":"Perfluorocyclohexene-1,4-dione","App_Date":"1974-03-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Harold E. Doorenbos;Hughie R. Frick","Assignee":"The Dow Chemical Company","ICL_Class":"C07C 4948","References":"3306936;3379765","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Perfluorocyclohexene-1,4-dione.2. A compound useful in the synthesis of thermally stable elastomericpolymers, said compound being characterized by the following properties:a. boiling point of about 140.degree. C. at atmospheric pressure;b. molecular weight of 218.056 grams per mole;c. characteristic absorption in the infrared region of the spectrumsubstantially corresponding to that shown in FIG. 2;d. a fluorine resonance spectrum at 56.4 MHz with principal characteristicabsorption peaks at 131.0 and 126.1, expressed in .delta. units relativeto CFCl.sub.3 ; ande. a mass spectrum having an M.sup.+ peak at 218 m/e units, and furthercharacteristic peaks at 168, and 109 m/e units."}
{"WKU":"039313263","Title":"Alkenoyl-cyclohexadienes","App_Date":"1974-11-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ervin Kovats;Edouard Demole;Gunther Ohloff;Max Stoll, deceased","Assignee":"Firmenich SA","ICL_Class":"C07C 4961","References":"2877271;3354218","Claims":"We claim:1. A composition of matter consisting essentially of a compound having theformula##SPC38##containing a double bond in the position 2  - or 3  - of the acyl sidechain, the double bonds being represented by dotted lines, and wherein nis zero or 1, R.sup.1, R.sup.2, and R.sup.3 represent hydrogen or one ofthem a lower alkyl radical, and R.sup.4, and R.sup.5, R.sup.6, and R.sup.72. Compounds according to claim 1 wherein R.sup.5, R.sup.6 and R.sup.74. Compounds according to claim 1 wherein R.sup.4, R.sup.6 and R.sup.76. Compounds according to claim 1 wherein R.sup.4, R.sup.5 and R.sup.78. Compounds according to claim 1 wherein R.sup.4, R.sup.5 and R.sup.610. Compounds according to claim 1 wherein R.sup.4, R.sup.5, R.sup.6 andR.sup.7 represent hydrogen."}
{"WKU":"039313271","Title":"Process for the preparation of a diketone derivative","App_Date":"1974-12-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hugo Strickler;Joseph J. Becker;Gunther Ohloff","Assignee":"Firmenich SA","ICL_Class":"C07C 4500","References":"2819298;2917539;3070629;3404185","Claims":"1. Process for the preparation of 2,2,6-trimethyl-cyclohex-5-en-1,4-dione,which comprises oxidizing, in the gas phase,3,3,5-trimethyl-cyclohex-5-en-1-one in the presence of vanadium oxide or amixture of vanadium oxides deposited on an inert solid support by means of2. Process according to claim 1, wherein the oxidation is performed bymeans of an oxygen containing gas mixture comprising of from about 20 to3. Process according to claim 2, wherein the oxygen containing gas mixture4. Process according to claim 1, wherein the oxidation is effected atbarometric pressure and at a temperature of from about 180.degree. to5. Process according to claim 4, wherein the oxidation is effected at a6. Process according to claim 1, wherein the inert solid support is porous7. Process according to claim 1, wherein the oxidation is performed in thepresence of vanadium oxide, or a mixture of vanadium oxides, deposited ata concentration of from about 5 to 25 percent by weight of V.sub.2 O.sub.5on porous silica containing of from about 0.1 to 3 percent by weight of an8. Process according to claim 7, wherein the concentration of vanadiumoxide, or mixture of vanadium oxides, is of about 15 percent by weight ofV.sub.2 O.sub.5 deposited on porous silica containing about 1 percent by9. Process according to claim 1, wherein the vanadium oxide catalyst ispreliminarily activated by heating under a stream of air at a temperatureof from about 200.degree. to 400.degree.C."}
{"WKU":"039313280","Title":"Benzobicycloalkane ketones","App_Date":"1973-12-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Meier E. Freed;John R. Potoski","Assignee":"American Home Products Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07C 4984;C07C 4982","References":"","Claims":"The subject matter which the applicants regard as their invention isparticularly pointed out and distinctly claimed as follows:1. A compound of the formula:##SPC13##wherein R is lower alkyloxy or hydroxy; R.sup.1 is lower alkyl and n is aninteger from 3 to 5.2. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein n is 3.3. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein n is 4.4. A compound as defined in claim 1 wherein n is 5.5. A compound as defined in claim 2 which is5,6,7,8,9,10-hexahydro-3-methoxy-5-methyl-5,9-methano-benzocycloocten-11-one.6. A compound as defined in claim 3 which is6,7,8,9,10,11-hexahydro-3-methoxy-5-methyl-5,10-methano-5H-benzocyclononen-12-one.7. A compound as defined in claim 3 which is5-ethyl-6,7,8,9,10,11-hexahydro-3-methoxy-5,10-methano-5H-benzocyclononen-12-one.8. A compound as defined in claim 4 which is5-methyl-3-methoxy-5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12-octahydro-5,11-methano-benzocyclodecen-13-one."}
{"WKU":"039313298","Title":"Aldehyde condensation products of fluoroaliphatic phenols","App_Date":"1974-01-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Leland S. Endres;Leo F. Gehlhoff;Dallas D. Zimmerman","Assignee":"Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company","ICL_Class":"C07C 4980","References":"3832409","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A condensation polymer having an average molecular weight of about 800to about 1500 of the condensation catalyst catalyzed reaction of a phenolof the formula##EQU1##wherein l, m and r are 1 or 2, t is 1; H is a hydrogen atom sufficientlyreactive to undergo a catalyzed condensation reaction with an aldehyde; Ais an aryl nucleus containing from 6 to 15 carbon atoms; OH is a phenolichydroxyl group; R.sub.f is a monovalent fluorinated saturated aliphaticradical containing from 3 to 20 carbon atoms and Q is selected from theclass consisting of carbonyl and carbonamide and a saturated aliphaticaldehyde containing not more than 7 carbon atoms in addition to thealdehyde carbon atom or benzaldehyde.2. A condensation polymer having an average molecular weight of about 900to about 2500 of the condensation catalyst catalyzed reaction of a phenolof the formula##EQU2##wherein l, m and r are 1 or 2, t is 1; H is a hydrogen atom sufficientlyreactive to undergo a catalyzed condensation reaction with an aldehyde; Ais an aryl nucleus containing from 6 to 15 carbon atoms; OH is a phenolichydroxyl group; R.sub.f is a monovalent fluorinated saturated aliphaticradical containing from 3 to 20 carbon atoms and Q is selected from theclass consisting of carbonyl and carbonamide and a saturated aliphaticaldehyde containing not more than 7 carbon atoms in addition to thealdehyde carbon atom or benzaldehyde.3. A polymer according to claim 1 wherein the aldehyde is formaldehyde.4. A polymer according to claim 3 wherein the phenol is##SPC3##"}
{"WKU":"039313301","Title":"Process for the production of benzaldehyde","App_Date":"1972-05-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Nazar S. Aprahamian","Assignee":"Union Carbide Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07C 4752;C07C 4754;C07C 4755","References":"2673217","Claims":"I claim:1. A liquid phase process for the production of benzaldehyde consistingessentially of admixing in the presence of a chromium, cobalt, iron ormanganese containing catalyst, toluene with an aliphatic saturatedaldehyde consisting of carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen atoms and having 2 to7 carbon atoms and a molecular oxygen containing gas wherein the molarratio of toluene to aldehyde is about 0.1 to about 250 mols of toluene permol of aldehyde, the molar ratio of oxygen to aldehyde is about 1:1 togreater than 1:20, and the temperature is in the range of about50.degree.C to about 250.degree.C.2. The process defined in claim 1 wherein the molar ratio of toluene toaldehyde is about 1 to about 25 mols of toluene per mol of aldehyde andthe molar ratio of oxygen to aldehyde is about 1:1 to about 1:4.3. The process defined in claim 2 wherein the temperature is in the rangeof about 80.degree. to about 180.degree.C.4. The process defined in claim 3 wherein the aldehyde is acetaldehyde orbutyraldehyde.5. The process defined in claim 1 wherein the said catalyst is introducedinto the admixture in an amount in the range of about 20 to about 100parts by weight per million parts by weight of toluene.6. The process defined in claim 5 wherein the said catalyst is selectedfrom the group consisting of free metals, inorganic compounds orcomplexes, and organometallic compounds or complexes.7. The process defined in claim 6 wherein the molar ratio of toluene toaldehyde is about 1 to about 25 mols of toluene per mol of aldehyde andthe molar ratio of oxygen to aldehyde is about 1:1 to about 1:4.8. The process defined in claim 7 wherein the temperature is in the rangeof about 80.degree. to about 180.degree.C.9. The process defined in claim 8 wherein the aldehyde is acetaldehyde orbutyraldehyde.10. The process defined in claim 8 wherein the catalyst is anorgano-metallic compound having a metallic moiety of chromium, cobalt,iron or manganese.11. The process defined in claim 10 wherein the organic moiety isacetylacetonate or napthenate."}
{"WKU":"039313310","Title":"Process of preparing .alpha.-formyl sulfides and","App_Date":"1974-10-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Chempolil Thomas Mathew;Harry Edwards Ulmer","Assignee":"Allied Chemical Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07C 4700","References":"","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for preparing an .alpha.-formyl sulfide comprisinga. reacting under reflux conditions a halogen selected from the groupconsisting of chlorine, bromine and iodine with an aldehyde of the formula##EQU20##wherein R  and R  independently are hydrogen, hydrocarbon radicals of 1 to18 carbon atoms selected from the group consisting of alkyl, cycloalkyl,alkenyl, cycloalkenyl and aryl or substituted hydrocarbon radicals of theabove group wherein the substituted moieties are selected from the groupconsisting of alkyl of 1 to 18 carbon atoms, aryl of 6 to 18 carbon atoms,halogen, cyano, sulfo, mercapto, alkylthio of 1 to 6 carbon atoms,hydroxy, alkoxy of 1 to 6 carbon atoms, dialkoxy phosphino in which eachalkoxy group contains 1 to 6 carbon atoms, dialkyl phosphonoxy in whicheach alkyl group contains 1 to 6 carbon atoms, carboxy, alkoxy carbonyl inwhich the alkoxy group contains 1 to 6 carbon atoms, nitro andcombinations thereof, to thereby form an .alpha.-haloaldehyde of theformula##EQU21##wherein X is chlorine, bromine or iodine, and b. reacting in an aqueousmedium under basic conditions and at a temperature in the range of about-20 to about 90.degree.C the thus formed .alpha.-haloaldehyde with a thiolsalt of the formula R  SM, wherein R   is a hydrocarbon radical of 1 to 18carbon atoms selected from the group consisting of alkyl, cycloalkyl,alkenyl, cycloalkenyl and aryl or a substituted hydrocarbon radical of theabove group wherein the substituted moiety is selected from the groupconsisting of alkyl of 1 to 18 carbon atoms, aryl of 6 to 18 carbon atoms,halogen, cyano, alkylthio of 1 to 6 carbon atoms, amido, sulfo,sulfonamido, hydroxy, alkoxy of 1 to 6 carbon atoms, dialkoxy phosphino inwhich each alkoxy group contains 1 to 6 carbon atoms, dialkyl phosphonoxyin which each alkyl group contains 1 to 6 carbon atoms, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl in which the alkoxy group contains 1 to 6 carbon atoms, nitro andcombinations thereof, and M is an alkali or alkaline earth metal, therebyforming an .alpha.-formyl sulfide of the formula##EQU22##2. The process of claim 1 wherein said .alpha.-haloaldehyde formed in step(a) is either directly charged into a reaction vessel wherein step (b) iscarried out or is maintained at elevated temperatures prior to step (b) inorder to minimize formation of oligomers of said .alpha.-haloaldehyde.3. The process of claim 2 wherein said halogen is chlorine.4. The process of claim 3 wherein said aldehyde is isobutyraldehyde andwherein the .alpha.-chloroisobutyraldehyde formed in step (a) is eitherdirectly charged into a reaction vessel wherein step (b) is carried out oris maintained at a temperature in the range of about 40.degree. to90.degree.C prior to step (b).5. The process of claim 4 wherein step (a) is conducted at a temperaturebetween about 50.degree. to 120.degree.C.6. The process of claim 4 wherein said thiol salt is sodium thiomethylateand said .alpha.-formyl sulfide is 2-methyl-2-methylpropionaldehyde.7. The process of claim 6 wherein step (b) is carried out at a pH of 12.0to 13.8.8. The process of claim 3 wherein said aldehyde is isobutyraldehyde.9. The process of claim 8 wherein step (a) is conducted at a temperaturebetween about 50.degree. to 120.degree.C.10. The process of claim 1 wherein the hydrocarbon radicals representing R and R  are alkyl radicals of 1 to 4 carbon atoms.11. The process of claim 1 including the step of oximating said.alpha.-formyl sulfide to form a 2-hydrocarbylthioaldoxime of the formula##EQU23##12. The process of claim 6 including oximating the resultant2-methyl-2-methylthiopropionaldehyde to form2-methyl-2-methylthiopropionaldoxime."}
{"WKU":"039313328","Title":"Stabilized hydroformylation reaction systems","App_Date":"1973-06-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John B. Wilkes","Assignee":"Chevron Research Company","ICL_Class":"C07C 4508","References":"3278612;3594425","Claims":"I claim:1. In the cobalt carbonyl complex compound catalyzed reaction of ahydroformylatable monoolefinic hydrocarbon with carbon monoxide andhydrogen in a hydroformylation reactor, wherein during the course of saidreaction cobalt metal resulting from destructive dissociation of saidcobalt compound plates-out on the interior surfaces of said reactor, theimprovement which consists essentially of carrying out the reaction at atemperature in the range from 100.degree. to 225.degree.C., with thereactants in contact with a cobalt carbonyl complex compound stabilizerconsisting of a diamine of the formula##EQU4##wherein said .theta. are the same or different and are selected from thegroup consisting of hydrogen and alkyl groups having a carbon atom contentless than 25; wherein at least one of the .theta. is an alkyl group havinga carbon atom content in the range from about 10 to 25; wherein Y is analkyl group having a carbon atom content less than 25; and wherein a is 0,1, or 2 and b is 0 or 1 with the sum of a + b being 1 or 2; and whereinfor each mol of cobalt in the catalyst an amount of the stabilizer in therange from 0.001 to 0.45 mol is present in the reactor and wherein thecobalt catalyst is free of phosphine compounds.2. The hydroformylation as in claim 1 further characterized in that theamount of the stabilizer is in the range from about 0.1 to 0.25 mol.3. The hydroformylation as in claim 1 further characterized in that thereaction is effected using two temperature stages, the first of which isin the range from about 140.degree. to 170.degree.C., and the second ofwhich is in the range from about 180.degree. to 210.degree.C.4. The hydroformylation as in claim 1 further characterized in that thestabilizer is of the formula##EQU5##wherein .theta. is an alkyl group having a carbon atom content in therange from about 10 to 25 and c is 2 or 3.5. The hydroformylation as in claim 1 further characterized in that thehydrocarbon is a linear mono-olefinic hydrocarbon having a carbon atomcontent in the range from about 3 to 20.6. In the cobalt carbonyl complex compound catalyzed reaction of ahydroformylatable 1-alkene hydrocarbon with carbon monoxide and hydrogenin a hydroformylation reactor, wherein during the course of said reactioncobalt metal resulting from destructive dissociation of said cobaltcompound plates-out on the interior surfaces of said reactor, theimprovement which consists essentially of carrying out the reaction at atemperature of about 190.degree.C. with the reactants in contact with acobalt carbonyl complex compound stabilizer consisting ofN-octadecyl-propane-1,3-diamine, wherein for each mol of cobalt in thecatalyst an amount of the stabilizer in the range from about 0.1 to 0.25mol is present in the reactor and wherein the cobalt catalyst is free ofphosphine compounds."}
{"WKU":"039313336","Title":"Production of halogen-containing tertiary phosphine oxides","App_Date":"1974-06-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hubert Neumaier;Manfred Finke;Richard Schuller","Assignee":"Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07F  902","References":"3306937;3716580","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for making halogen-containing tertiary phosphine oxides of thegeneral formula I##EQU6##in which the substituents R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 being methyl, propyl orchloromethyl and R.sub.3 stands for chloromethyl-, chloropropyl or##EQU7##which comprises reacting a compound of the general formula II##EQU8##in which R.sub.4 and R.sub.5 stand for methy, propyl or hydroxymethyl andR.sub.6 being hydroxymethyl, hydroxypropyl or##EQU9##with at least equivalent proportions, based on the number of hydroxylgroups, of gaseous hydrogen chloride at temperatures within the rangeabout 100.degree. and 300.degree.C; freeing the reaction mixture, duringthe reaction or after termination thereof, from water originating from thereaction; and separating from the resulting reaction mixture thehalogen-containing tertiary phosphine oxide by distillation orcrystallization.2. The process as claimed in claim 1, wherein the reaction is effected attemperatures within the range 130.degree. and 250.degree.C.3. The process as claimed in claim 1, wherein the reaction is effected atatmospheric pressure or under overpressure up to about 20 atmospheresgauge.4. The process as claimed in claim 1, wherein the reaction is effected inthe melt or in the presence of an inert solvent forming an azeotrope withwater.5. The process as claimed in claim 4, wherein the solvent is selected fromxylene, p-chlorotoluene, trimethylbenzene, tetramethylbenzene, tetralin,decalin, decane or dodecane.6. The process as claimed in claim 1, wherein about 1 to 6 mols of hydrogenchloride are used per hydroxyl group in the starting material.7. The process as claimed in claim 1, wherein the reaction is effected inthe melt and resulting reaction water is continually removed atatmospheric pressure, from the reaction mixture.8. The process as claimed in claim 1, wherein the reaction is effected inthe presence of a solvent and the resulting reaction water is continuallyremoved in the form of a solvent/water-azeotrope, from the reactionmixture.9. The process as claimed in claim 1, wherein hydrogen chloride in excessis stripped off by flowing an inert gas through the reaction mixture,after termination of the reaction."}
{"WKU":"039313344","Title":"Lubricant compositions comprising substituted indans","App_Date":"1973-07-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert M. Gemmill, Jr.;John W. Schick","Assignee":"Mobil Oil Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07C14900","References":"2968678;3523981","Claims":"We claim:1. A substituted indan having the structure:##SPC8##2. A process for producing the indan of claim 1 which comprises subjectinga mixture of a thiophenoxycumene compound and a halogen to a temperaturefrom about 0.degree.C to about 20.degree.C to effect halogenation of theisopropyl group of said cumene compound; and thereafter subjecting thehalogenated cumene compound thus produced to a temperature from about100.degree.C to about 200.degree.C in the presence of an acidic catalysthaving an ionization contant greater than about 1 .times. 10.sup..sup.-5to an extent at which the aformentioned compound is converted to itscorresponding indan."}
{"WKU":"039313352","Title":"Process for selectively producing 4,4-monothiodiphenolic compounds in","App_Date":"1974-08-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Merle E. Cisney;Robert A. Damon","Assignee":"Crown Zellerbach Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07C14936","References":"2760988;2760989;3057926;3390190;3553269;3718699;3726928","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for selectively producing 4,4 -monothiodiphenol compounds inhigh yields, which comprises:a. forming a reaction system having a reactant portion including either oneof an unsubstituted and sterically nonhindered ortho-substituted phenoliccompound and sulfur dichloride, an initiation promoter portion including acrystalline additive of said 4,4 -monothiodiphenolic product compound, anda catalytic amount of anhydrous hydrogen chloride, and a solvent portionincluding a substantially saturated compound having a solubility parameterof at least about 7.0 (Cal/cc).sup.1/2 up to 9.0 (Cal/cc).sup.1/2 and alow degree of hydrogen bonding;b. reacting said phenolic compound and sulfur dichloride, in the presenceof said initiation promoter and solvent portions, respectively at atemperature greater than the freezing point of the phenolic compound andsolvent portion, and less than the temperature at which a substantialamount of undesirable, noncrystalline by-product will be produced, toproduce said 4,4 -monothiodiphenolic, selective, high yield product; andc. recovering said 4,4 -monothiodiphenolic product from said reactionsystem.2. The selective 4,4 -monothiodiphenol formation process of claim 1 furthercharacterized in that said product is recovered in high yields, onsubstantial completion of said phenolic compound-sulfur dichloridereaction step, without requiring any additional reaction steps.3. The selective 4,4 -monothiodiphenol formation process of claim 1,wherein the reaction system contains a minimum amount of undesirableby-products, including polysulfides, non-para- substituted thiodiphenoliccompounds, chlorinated phenolic products, sulfonium compounds andpolymeric materials.4. The selective 4,4 -monothiodiphenol formation process of claim 1,wherein the selectivity of said product formed is at least about 80% byweight, based on the total weight of recovered material.5. The selective 4,4 -monothiodiphenol formation process of claim 1,wherein the yield of said product formed is at least about 70% by weight.6. The selective 4,4 -monothiodiphenol formation process of claim 1,wherein the selectivity of said product formed is at least about 90% byweight, based on the total weight of recovered material.7. The selective 4,4 -monothiodiphenol formation process of claim 1,wherein the yield of said product formed is at least about 80% by weight.8. The selective 4,4 -monothiodiphenol formation process of claim 1,wherein the amount of polysulfides present in the product recovered isless than about 1.0% by weight, based on the total weight of recoveredmaterial.9. The selective 4,4 -monothiodiphenol formation process of claim 1,wherein the amount of polysulfides present in the product recovered isless than about 0.5% by weight, based on the total weight of recoveredmaterial.10. The selective 4,4 -monothiodiphenol formation process of claim 1,wherein said substituted phenolic compound is further characterized inthat the pendant groups substituted in the ortho- position on saidphenolic ring include lower alkyl groups having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms,the total number of said carbon atoms present in said alkyl groups of thesubstituted phenolic compound being from 1 to 5.11. The selective 4,4 -monothiodiphenol formation process of claim 1,wherein the phenolic compound is selected from the group consisting ofphenol, o-cresol, and 2,6-xylenol.12. The selective 4,4 -monothiodiphenol formation process of claim 1,wherein the phenolic compound is phenol, and the high yield4,4 -monothiodiphenolic product selectively formed is 4,4 -thiodiphenol.13. The selective 4,4 -monothiodiphenol formation process of claim 1,wherein the solvent portion of said reaction system has a solubilityparameter of at least about 7.5 and up to about 8.5 (Cal/cc).sup.1/2 .14. The selective 4,4 -monothiodiphenol formation process of claim 1,wherein the solvent portion employed is a compound selected from the groupconsisting of substituted or unsubstituted cycloaliphatics, aliphatics,halogenated aliphatics, and mixtures thereof.15. The selective 4,4 -monothiodiphenol formation process of claim 1,wherein the solvent portion employed is a compound selected from the groupconsisting of hexane, heptane, cyclohexane, methylcyclopentane,methylcyclohexane, and mixtures thereof.16. The process of claim 1, wherein the selective thiodiphenol formationprocess is carried out in a continuous manner.17. The continuous selective 4,4 -monothiodiphenol formation process ofclaim 16 further characterized in that the contact time for completion ofthe above formation process is not more than about 0.5 hour.18. The continuous process of claim 17, wherein said contact time is notmore than about 0.25 hour.19. The selective 4,4 -monothiodiphenol formation process of claim 1,wherein said reaction system is formed by admixing the respectivereactant, initiation promoter, and solvent portions together, one with theother.20. The selective 4,4 -monothiodiphenol formation process of claim 1,wherein the 4,4 -monothiodiphenol crystals are present in the initiationpromoter portion in an amount sufficient for saturation of said reactionsystem.21. The selective formation process of claim 20, wherein an excess amountof said crystals are present in said reaction system.22. The selective 4,4 -monothiodiphenol formation process of claim 1,wherein hydrogen chloride is present in the initiation promoter portion inan amount sufficient to saturate the reaction system.23. The selective 4,4 -monothiodiphenol formation process of claim 1,wherein the molar ratio of phenolic compound to sulfur dichloride in thereactant portion of the reaction system is at least a minimum of about3:1, up to a ratio of about 10:1.24. The selective formation process of claim 23, wherein the minimum ratiois at least about 4:1.25. The selective 4,4 -monothiodiphenol formation process of claim 1,wherein the concentration of said phenolic compound in said reactionsystem is greater than about 0.5% by weight, based on the weight ofsolvent, and less than an amount which would cause the formation ofundesirable, noncrystalline by-products.26. The selective thiodiphenolic formation process of claim 1, wherein theconcentration of the phenolic compound in the reactant system is at leastabout 1% and up to about 20% by weight, based on the total weight of thereaction system.27. The selective thiodiphenolic formation process of claim 1, wherein thereaction temperature is greater than the freezing point of the reactionsolvent and less than a temperature at which a substantial amount ofundesirable noncrystalline by-product will be produced."}
{"WKU":"039313360","Title":"Production of oxyalkylated .alpha.-hydroxy acetylenic compounds","App_Date":"1973-08-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kurt Schneider","Assignee":"Badische Anilin- & Soda-Fabrik Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C07C 4102;C07C 4110","References":"2674619;3293191;3341599;3366557;3547881","Claims":"I claim:1. In a process for the production of an .alpha.-hydroxy acetyleniccompound of the formula"}
{"WKU":"039313379","Title":"Multi-block polyacetal copolymer surfactants","App_Date":"1974-08-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William K. Langdon","Assignee":"BASF Wyandotte Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07C 4300;C07C 4330","References":"2000252;2071252;2110499;2379703;2905719;3244753","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property orprivilege is claimed are defined as follows:1. A surfactant having the formula##EQU7##wherein R is an alkyl radical containing 1 to 4 carbon atoms, Y is theresidue of an organic compound selected from the group consisting ofethylene glycol, diethylene glycol, propylene glycol, dipropylene glycol,butylene glycol, amylene glycol, hexylene glycol, heptylene glycol andoctylene glycol, minus the terminal hydrogens,M is a hydrophilic chain of units selected from the group consisting ofoxyethylene and oxyethylene-oxypropylene units wherein the oxyethylenecontent of said hydrophilic chain is from about 75 to 100 weight percentand the oxypropylene content is from 0 to about 25 weight percent, thetotal number of oxyethylene and oxypropylene units in M being from about 4to about 30,N is a hydrophobic chain of units selected from the group consisting ofoxypropylene units and oxyethylene-oxypropylene units wherein theoxypropylene content is from about 75 to 100 weight percent and theoxyethylene content is from 0 to about 25 weight percent,the total number of oxyethylene and oxypropylene groups in N being fromabout 4 to about 20,wherein groups##EQU8##and##EQU9##may be linked either in a random or an ordered manner, and a and b arenumbers from 2 to 20 in a ratio between 1:9 to 9:1.2. The surfactant of claim 1 wherein the alkyl radical R is ethyl."}
{"WKU":"039313387","Title":"Method for production of hydroxyalkylglycol ethers","App_Date":"1974-04-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Wolfgang Rupilius","Assignee":"Henkel & Cie G.m.b.H.","ICL_Class":"C07C 4102","References":"2723294;2782240;2807651;3240819;3242200;3607778","Claims":"I claim:1. In the method for the production of hydroxyalkylglycol ethers of theformula##EQU12##wherein R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are each alkyl having 2 to 22 carbon atoms,with the proviso that the sum of R.sub.1 plus R.sub.2 is from 6 to 26carbon atoms, comprising reacting a vicinal non-terminal epoxide of theformula##EQU13##wherein R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 have the above-defined meanings with ethyleneglycol in the presence of a catalytic amount of an acid alkoxylationcatalyst; wherein the improvement comprises conducting said reaction inthe presence of at least one solvent consisting essentially of at leastone saturated hydrocarbon having 4 to 24 carbon atoms.2. The method of claim 1, in which said solvent is selected from the groupconsisting of alkane having 4 to 24 carbon atoms and mixtures thereof andcycloalkane having 4 to 24 carbon atoms and mixtures thereof.3. The method of claim 1, in which said solvent is selected from the groupconsisting of alkane having 5 to 16 carbon atoms, and mixtures thereof andcycloalkane having 5 to 16 carbon atoms and mixtures thereof.4. The method of claim 1, in which said solvent is selected from the groupconsisting of cyclohexane, cyclopentane, decahydronaphthalene and mixturesthereof and pentane, hexane, heptane, octane, nonane, decane, undecane,dodecane, tridecane, pentadecane, hexadecane, and mixtures thereof.5. The method of claim 1, in which said solvent is selected from the groupconsisting of pentane, hexane, heptane, octane and the mixtures thereof.6. The method of claim 1, in which said solvent is alkane having 5 to 8carbon atoms.7. The method of claim 1, in which said solvent is pentane."}
{"WKU":"039313395","Title":"Removal and neutralisation of acid catalyst from products of cumene","App_Date":"1973-12-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Maurice Dudley Cooke","Assignee":"BP Chemicals International Limited","ICL_Class":"C07C 3724","References":"2734085;2737480;2744143","Claims":"I claim:1. A process for the removal and neutralization of mineral acid catalystand organic acid by-products from the reaction mixture resulting frommineral acid catalyzed cumene hydroperoxide cleavage which processcomprises contacting at a temperature below about 50.degree.C. saidreaction mixture in a first zone with an aqueous solution comprising anacidic or neutral inorganic salt and an excess of alkaline alkali metalhydroxide or phenate sufficient to neutralize said mineral acid andorganic acid by-products and to maintain the pH of the aqueous phasebetween 7 and 9 whereby said acids are extracted from the organic phaseinto the aqueous phase and neutralized therein, separating said aqueousphase containing the neutralized acids therefrom, then contacting at atemperature of from about 10.degree.-60.degree.C. said organic phase in asecond zone with an aqueous solution comprising an acidic or neutralinorganic salt and a weak acid selected from the group consisting ofcarbonic acid, citric acid and oxalic acid in an amount sufficient todecompose alkali metal phenate carried over from the first zone, andthereafter separating the aqueous phase therefrom.2. A process according to claim 1 wherein the acid is carbonic acid formed`in situ` by feeding carbon dioxide to the second zone in the presence ofan aqueous solution of an inorganic salt.3. A process according to claim 1 wherein the inorganic salt is selectedfrom alkali metal sulphates, ammonium sulphate, alkali metal chlorides,ammonium chloride, alkali metal phosphates, ammonium phosphate, alkalimetal nitrates and ammonium nitrate.4. A process according to claim 3 wherein the concentration of theinorganic salt is in the range 0.5 to 50%.5. A process according to claim 1 wherein the inorganic salt used in thefirst and second zones in a salt in which the anion corresponds to theanion of the mineral acid catalyst used in the cleavage reaction and thecation corresponds to the cation of the alkaline alkali metal compoundused for neutralisation of the acids.6. A process according to claim 5 wherein the inorganic salt is sodiumsulphate when sulphuric acid is the mineral acid catalyst and the alkalinealkali metal compound used for neutralisation of the acids is selectedfrom sodium hydroxide or sodium phenate.7. A process according to claim 6 wherein the concentration of sodiumsulphate in the aqueous solution is in the range 0.5 to 30% by weight at atemperature in the range 40.degree. to 45.degree.C.8. A process according to claim 1 wherein the alkaline alkali metalcompound used for neutralisation of the acids is selected from sodiumhydroxide and sodium phenate."}
{"WKU":"039313409","Title":"Chlorination of aromatic compounds","App_Date":"1974-05-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Akio Nishihara;Hidekastu Kato;Yaoki Jimbo;Yoshiro Tomoda;Jinichi Omi","Assignee":"Asahi Denka Kogyo K.K.","ICL_Class":"C07C 3928","References":"2410497;3510529;3542882","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property orprivilege is claimed are defined as follows:1. A process for the nuclear mono chlorination of a phenol of the formula##SPC4##wherein R.sup.3 is hydrogen; hydroxy; halogen; alkyl having one to 4 carbonatoms; alkyl having 1 to 4 carbon atoms substituted by aryl, hydroxy aryl,mono-halogenated hydroxy aryl, hydroxyl, or carboxyl; aryl; or arylsubstituted by halogen, alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms or halogen andsaid latter alkyl; R.sup.4 and R.sup.5, which are the same or different,are hydrogen; alkyl having 1 to 4 carbon atoms; alkyl having one to 4carbon atoms substituted by aryl, hydroxy aryl, mono-halogenated hydroxyaryl, hydroxyl or carboxyl; provided that when R.sup.5 is hydrogen,R.sup.3 and R.sup.4 can both be halogen, provided further that said phenolhas at least one replaceable hydrogen on the 2, 4 or 6 positions relativeto the phenolic hydroxyl, which comprises: contacting in the liquid phase,reactants consisting essentially ofA. said phenolB. from 0.5 to 5.0 moles of copper (I) chloride plus copper (II) chloride,per mole of said phenol, andC. an aqueous solution of hydrochloric acid providing a concentration ofhydrochloric acid in the reaction system of more than 2N,at a temperature in the range of 85.degree. to 130.degree.C, at a pressurein the range of from atmospheric to about 2 kg/cm.sup.2 gauge, and addingto the reaction system chlorine gas to convert copper (I) chloride tocopper (II) chloride, the chlorine gas being supplied at a rate effectiveto maintain the mole ratio of (a) copper (I) chloride/(b) copper (I)chloride plus copper (II) chloride, in the range of from 0.005/1 to0.15/1, throughout the reaction to obtain a reaction product comprisedpredominantly of said phenol monochlorinated by replacement of one of saidreplaceable hydrogens by chlorine.2. A process according to claim 1, in which the phenol is selected from thegroup consisting of phenol, m-xylenol, o-chloro phenol and o-cresol.3. A process according to claim 1, in which the rate of addition ofchlorine to the reaction system is controlled to maintain the mole ratioof (a) copper (I) chloride/(b) copper (I) chloride plus copper (II)chloride in the range of from 0.02/1.0 to 0.15/1.0 during the reaction.4. A process according to claim 1, in which the phenol is selected from thegroup consisting of phenol, o-phenyl phenol, p-phenyl phenol, o-chlorophenol, m-cresol, thymol, resorcinol, m-xylenol, p-chloro phenol ando-cresol."}
{"WKU":"039313417","Title":"Treated pentachlorophenol","App_Date":"1973-04-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Thomas P. Brady;Horst G. Langer","Assignee":"The Dow Chemical Company","ICL_Class":"C07c 3936","References":"3231640;3646225;3692561","Claims":"We claim:1. Substantially free flowing, non-blooming pentachlorophenol havingadmixed therewith about 0.5-10% by weight of benzyl alcohol.2. The composition of claim 1 wherein about 1-5 percent of benzyl alcoholis present."}
{"WKU":"039313425","Title":"Process for the recovery of glycols from an aqueous solution","App_Date":"1974-05-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ming N. Sheng","Assignee":"Atlantic Richfield Company","ICL_Class":"C07C 2726","References":"2116665;2389263;2916525;3053880;3483264","Claims":"I claim:1. A process for the recovery of glycols or glycerol having from 2 to 4carbon atoms in the molecule from an aqueous solution containing saidglycol or glycerol, a dissolved borate and osmium compounds derived fromthe aqueous phase oxidation of a C.sub.2 -C.sub.4 olefinic compoundselected from the group consisting of ethylene, propylene, allyl alcoholand butylene with molecular oxygen in the presence of an octavalent osmiumcatalyst and an alkali metal borate which comprises the steps of:adding to the aqueous solution at least one water soluble organic solventselected from the group consisting of lower alkanones, lower alkanols,lower alkyl ethers and cyclic ethers containing only carbon, hydrogen andoxygen, and lower alkyl nitriles to co-precipitate borate and reducedosmium compounds from said solution;separating the precipitated borate and osmium compounds from said solutionto form a water-solvent-glycol mixture containing a minor amount of analkali metal acetate; anddistilling said mixture to separate water and solvent and recovering thedesired glycol or glycerol.2. A process according to claim 1 wherein the solvent is a mixture of watersoluble organic solvents.3. A process according to claim 2 wherein one of the solvents is acetoneand the other solvent is methyl ethyl ketone and the acetone ranges from50 weight per cent to 90 weight per cent of the amount of the twosolvents.4. A process according to claim 1 wherein said precipitated borate andosmium compounds are separated by filtration or centrifugation to form awater-solvent-glycol mixture containing a minor amount of an alkali metalacetate.5. A process according to claim 1 wherein the borate is borax having themolecular formula Na.sub.2 B.sub.4 O.sub.7. 10H.sub.2 O.6. A process according to claim 1 wherein soluble osmium compound containedin the aqueous solution is reduced to a water insoluble Os.sup.+.sup.4tetravalent state prior to coprecipitation with the borate.7. A process according to claim 6 wherein the aqueous solution is heated atreflux temperature to reduce soluble osmium compound to a water insolubleOs.sup.+.sup.4 tetravalent state.8. A process according to claim 2 wherein hydrogen is bubbled into theheated aqueous solution to aid in the reduction of the soluble osmiumcompound to said water insoluble state.9. A process according to claim 7 wherein sodium borohydride is added tothe heated aqueous solution to aid in the reduction of the soluble osmiumcompound to said water insoluble state.10. A process according to claim 1 wherein the aqueous solution containspropylene glycol, dissolved borax and a reduced osmium compound andacetone is added to said aqueous solution to co-precipitate said borateand osmium compounds from said solution.11. A process according to claim 1 wherein following the distilling toseparate water and solvent, the solution of glycol or glycerol isdistilled for final recovery of glycol or glycerol.12. A method according to claim 1 wherein the alkali metal borate isselected from the group consisting of sodium, potassium and lithiumborates."}
{"WKU":"039313433","Title":"Nitrosochlorination of cyclo-olefins","App_Date":"1974-02-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John Pisanchyn;Stylianos Sifniades;Robert Fuhrmann;Fred W. Koff","Assignee":"Allied Chemical Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07C 8100","References":"2485180;3714255","Claims":"I claim:1. In a process for the nitrosochlorination of cyclo-olefins wherein acyclo-olefin is dissolved in liquid sulfur dioxide and contacted with NOClat a reaction temperature below -10.degree.C, the improvement whichcomprises maintaining a substantially oxygen-free environment throughoutthe reaction by excluding air and peroxides and thereafter separating theresulting nitrosochloride.2. The process of claim 1 wherein the reaction mixture is purged withnitrogen prior to introduction of the NOCl.3. The process of claim 1 wherein the molar ratio of NOCl to cyclo-olefinis in the range of about 0.49:1 to 0.92:1.4. The process of claim 1 wherein the NOCl is added gradually to themixture to prevent build up of free NOCl in the mixture.5. The process of claim 1 wherein the temperature is maintained at about-10.degree. to -40.degree.C.6. The process of claim 1 wherein the cyclo-olefin is cyclohexene."}
{"WKU":"039313441","Title":"Bromofluorocyclopropanes","App_Date":"1974-12-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Charles Alden Billings;Gerald Joseph O Neill;Charles William Simons;Robert S. Holdsworth","Assignee":"W. R. Grace & Co.","ICL_Class":"C07C 2304","References":"3865950","Claims":"What we claim is:1. 1-Bromo-1,2-difluoro-2-methylcyclopropane."}
{"WKU":"039313450","Title":"Hydrogenation and hydrodealkylation process","App_Date":"1973-04-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Vladimir Mikhailovich Gryaznov;Viktor Sergeevich Smirnov;Alexandr Petrovich Mischenko;Natalia Vsevolodovna Orekhova;Boris Petrovich Krivdin;Viktoria Petrovna Polyakova;Evgeny Mikhailovich Savitsky","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"C07C  510;C07C  358","References":"2721226;2890114;3153678;3159687;3261876;3290406;3344582;3562346;3595932;3607961;3649707","Claims":"We claim:1. In a method for the hydrogenation of aromatic hydrocarbons theimprovement comprising reacting said hydrocarbons under hydrogenationconditions including a temperature of 100.degree. to 300.degree.C over acatalyst comprising a palladium-molybdenum alloy with a molybdenum contentin the alloy of 0.1 to 30% by weight, said catalyst being in the form ofgranules, powder, or gauze, or membranes, films, foils or tubesselectively permeable only to hydrogen.2. A method as claimed in claim 1 wherein said catalyst has a molybdenumcontent of 2 to 15% by weight.3. A method as claimed in claim 1 wherein said catalyst has a palladiumcontent of 98% by weight and a molybdenum content of 2% by weight.4. A method as claimed in claim 1 wherein said catalyst has a palladiumcontent of 85% by weight and a molybdenum content of 15% by weight.5. A method as claimed in claim 1 wherein said hydrocarbons are fedtogether with hydrogen into a reactor with said catalyst.6. A method as claimed in claim 1 wherein said hydrocarbons are fed in aninert gas flow into a reactor and hydrogen is fed by diffusion throughsaid catalyst in the form of membranes, films, foils, or tubes.7. A method as claimed in claim 2 wherein said hydrocarbon is benzene.8. In a method for the hydrodealkylation of aromatic hydrocarbons, theimprovement comprising reacting said hydrocarbons under hydrodealkylationconditions including a temperature of 400.degree. to 650.degree.C over acatalyst comprising a palladium-molybdenum alloy having a molybdenumcontent of 0.1 to 30% by weight in the form of granules, powder, or gauzeor membranes, films, foils, or tubes that are selectively permeable onlyto hydrogen.9. A method as claimed in claim 8 wherein said catalyst has a molybdenumcontent of 2 to 15% by weight.10. A method as claimed in claim 8 wherein said catalyst has a palladiumcontent of 98% by weight and a molybdenum content of 2% by weight.11. A method as claimed in claim 8 wherein said catalyst has a palladiumcontent of 85% by weight and a molybdenum content of 15% by weight.12. A method as claimed in claim 8 wherein said aromatic hydrocarbons arefed together with hydrogen into a reactor with said catalyst.13. A method as claimed in claim 8 wherein said hydrocarbons are fed in aninert gas flow and hydrogen is fed by diffusion through said catalyst inthe form of membranes, tubes, foils, or films.14. A method as claimed in claim 9 wherein said hydrocarbon is toluene."}
{"WKU":"039313468","Title":"Process for preparing a polymerizable diene polymer","App_Date":"1974-04-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jihei Inomata;Seiichi Hino;Tatsuo Tani","Assignee":"Mitsubishi Chemical Industries Ltd.","ICL_Class":"C08D  502;C08D  120","References":"3609111;3652520;3705866;3842146","Claims":"What is claimed as new and intended to be covered by letters patent is:1. A process for preparing a liquid polymerizable diene polymer, whichcomprises:reacting a liquid polymerizable unsaturated carboxylic acid, anhydride,ester or acid halide with a liquid polydroxydiene polymer having terminaland pendant hydroxy groups obtained from the reaction of one mole of aliving polymer having a molecular weight of 500 to 10,000 which isprepared by reacting a conjugated diolefin or a mixture of said conjugateddiolefin and a vinyl compound having the formula: CH.sub.2 =CR.sub.1R.sub.2, wherein R.sub.1 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group andR.sub.2 represents an aryl group or a pyridyl group in the presence ofsodium or lithium metal or an organo sodium or lithium compound with 0.5mole to 2.0 moles of epichlorohydrin, epibromohydrin, epifluorohydrin,chlorobutylene oxide or bromobutylene oxide.2. The process of claim 1, which further comprises admixing thepolymerizable diene polymer with a polymerizable vinyl monomer.3. The process of claim 2, wherein said polymerizable diene polymer is usedwith 0 to 200 percent by weight of said polymerizable vinyl monomer basedon the amount of polymerizable diene polymer at 0.degree. to 250.degree.C.4. The process of claim 2, wherein said polymerizable vinyl monomer isstyrene, 4-t-butylstyrene, chlorostyrene, divinylbenzene,methylmethacrylate, ethylmethacrylate, propylmethacrylate,butylmethacrylate, octylmethacrylate, methylacrylate, ethylacrylate,propylacrylate, butylacrylate, octylacrylate, ethyleneglycoldiacrylate,diethyleneglycoldiacrylate, ethyleneglycol dimethacrylate,diethyleneglycol dimethacrylate, diallylphthalate, triallylisocyanurate ordiallyl ether.5. The process of claim 1, which further comprises curing the polymerizablediene polymer with a radical polymerizing initiator.6. The process of claim 5, wherein said radical polymerization initiator isdicumyl peroxide, 2,5-dimethyl-2,5-di(t-butylperoxy)benzene,t-butylcumylperoxide, di-t-butylperoxide, cyclohexanone peroxide,methylethylketone peroxide, acetyl peroxide, succinic peroxide, propionylperoxide, lauroyl peroxide, azobis(isobutyronitrile),azobismethylvaleronitrile or azobiscyclohexane carbonitrile."}
{"WKU":"039313476","Title":"Purification of dinitrotoluene","App_Date":"1974-12-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"David H. Rosenblatt;William H. Dennis, Jr.","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Army","ICL_Class":"C07C 7910","References":"","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for separating 2,4- and 2,6-dinitrotoluenes from isomericdinitrotoluene impurities, which comprises suspending a mixture of 2,4-and 2,6-dinitrotoluenes containing a small amount of isomericdinitrotoluene impurities, in an aqueous solution containing a smallamount of an alkali metal disulfide which is sufficient to convert saidisomeric dinitrotoluene impurities to water-soluble reaction products butinsufficient to convert a substantial amount of said 2,4- and2,6-dinitrotoluene isomers, and separating the insoluble 2,4- and2,6-dinitrotoluenes from said aqueous mixture containing the water solublereaction products of said isomeric dinitrotoluene impurities.2. The process of claim 1, wherein the alkali metal disulfide is sodiumdisulfide.3. The process of claim 2, wherein the mixture of 2,4- and2,6-dinitrotoluenes contains less than 5 percent of isomericdinitrotoluene impurities.4. The process of claim 3, wherein the amount of sodium disulfide is notmore than about 0.5 mol per mol of said mixture of 2,4- and2,6-dinitrotoluenes.5. The process of claim 3, wherein the aqueous slurry is maintained at atemperature above the melting point of the 2,4- and 2,6-dinitrotoluenesduring the conversion step.6. The process of claim 5, wherein the aqueous slurry is maintained at atemperature between about 70.degree. and about 100.degree.C. during theconversion step and thereafter cooled to solidify the 2,4- and2,6-dinitrotoluenes prior to separation thereof from said slurry.7. The process of claim 6, wherein the mixture of 2,4- and2,6-dinitrotoluenes contains about 2 percent of isomeric dinitrotolueneimpurities and the amount of sodium disulfide is between about 0.1 andabout 0.3 mol per mol of said mixture of 2,4- and 2,6-dinitrotoluenes.8. The process of claim 7, wherein the aqueous solution has a pH betweenabout 9 and about 11."}
{"WKU":"039313484","Title":"Process for preparing dimethyl naphthalene","App_Date":"1973-12-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Katsuo Taniguchi;Shizunori Miyamoto;Hideto Matsuoka","Assignee":"Mitsui Petrochemical Industries, Ltd.","ICL_Class":"C07c 1524","References":"2958643;3244758;3775498;3781375","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for preparing dimethyl naphthalenes selected from at least oneof 1,6-, 2,6-, or 2,7-dimethyl naphthalene which comprisesheating a compound (I) selected from the group consisting ofmethyl-4-(p-tolyl)butane, methyl-4-(p-tolyl) butene andmethyl-4-(p-tolyl)butadiene wherein the p-tolyl is attached at theterminal position of the butane, butene or butadiene skeleton,in the vapor phase at a temperature of about 200.degree.C to about700.degree.C for a contact time of about 0.1 to about 15 seconds,in the presence of the cyclization-dehydrogenation catalyst selected fromthe group consisting of (a) an oxide of rhenium and (b) a mixture of (a)with an oxide of chromium.2. The process of claim 1 wherein the amount of the catalyst is about 0.001mol to about 1 mol per mol of the compound (I).3. The process of claim 1 wherein the catalyst is supported on a solidcarrier and further contains an oxide of a metal selected from the groupconsisting of alkali metals and alkaline earth metals.4. The process of claim 3 wherein the amount of said alkali or alkalineearth metal oxide is 0.1 to 20% by weight based on the weight of thecatalyst.5. The process of claim 3 wherein the amount of said metal oxide is 0.5 to10% by weight calculated as metal based on the weight of the solidcarrier.6. The process of claim 1 wherein the compound (I) is a compound obtainedby the addition reaction of p-xylene with a compound selected from thegroup consisting of butene and butadiene.7. The process of claim 1 wherein said dimethyl naphthalene is selectedfrom at least one of 2,6- or 2,7-dimethyl naphthalene and said compound(I) is selected from the group consisting of 2-methyl-4-(p-tolyl)butaneand 3-methyl-4-(p-tolyl)butane.8. The process of claim 7 wherein the amount of said catalyst is about0.001 mol to about 1 mol per mole of the compound (I).9. The process of claim 7 wherein said catalyst further contains an oxideof a metal selected from the group consisting of alkali metals andalkaline earth metals.10. The process of claim 9 wherein the amount of said alkalo alkalialkaline earth metal oxide is 0.1 to 20% by weight based on the weight ofthe catalyst.11. The process of claim 9 wherein the amount of said metal oxide is 0.5 to10% by weight calculated as metal based on the weight of the solidcarrier.12. The process of claim 1 wherein said catalyst is an oxide of rhenium.13. The process of claim 7 wherein said catalyst is an oxide of rhenium."}
{"WKU":"039313492","Title":"Conversion of methanol to gasoline components","App_Date":"1974-09-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James C. W. Kuo","Assignee":"Mobil Oil Corporation","ICL_Class":"C10G 3706;B01J 2928","References":"2456584;3728408;3756942;3760024;3984105;3984106;3984107","Claims":"I claim:1. In an exothermic conversion process relied upon for producing gasolineboiling range components from a methanol rich feed which comprises:passing preheated methanol feed in contact with a catalyst and underconditions selective for restricting the conversion of methanol to aproduct comprising dimethyl ether,combining a light hydrocarbon gasiform diluent with said product comprisingdimethyl ether in an amount which will dissipate exothermic heat releasedupon subsequent contact with a ZSM-5 type crystalline zeolite conversioncatalyst andcontacting said ether comprising product and said light hydrocarbon diluentwith a ZSM-5 type crystalline zeolite under conditions selective forconverting said ether to products boiling in the gasoline boiling range.2. The process of claim 1 wherein a sequence of fixed catalyst beds isrelied upon to effect said conversions and the temperature of the effluentobtained from said first bed of catalyst is essentially catalyst limited.3. The process of claim 1 wherein the product comprising dimethyl ether isin equilibrium with methanol and water and the total equilibrium mixtureis passed with said diluent to said second stage of catalyst contact.4. The process of claim 1 wherein a gamma alumina is relied upon to producesaid product comprising dimethyl ether and a ZSM-5 type crystallinezeolite is employed to form gasoline boiling range components comprisingaromatics and iso-paraffins.5. The process of claim 1 wherein the ether comprising product is adjustedto a temperature of about 600.degree.F. before contacting the crystallinezeolite catalyst.6. The process of claim 1 wherein the hydrocarbon diluent comprises C.sub.5and lower boiling hydrocarbons.7. The process of claim 1 wherein the crystalline zeolite is ZSM-5.8. The process of claim 1 wherein sufficient diluent is employed torestrict the temperature of the effluent from the crystalline zeolitecontact step not to exceed about 850.degree.F.9. The process of claim 1 wherein the methanol charge contains up to about16 weight percent water."}
{"WKU":"039313506","Title":"Process for producing alkylaromatics","App_Date":"1974-03-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Allen K. Sparks","Assignee":"Universal Oil Products Company","ICL_Class":"C07C  352","References":"1820907;2170620;2257914;2628933;3365508;3394200;3403194","Claims":"I claim as my invention:1. In a process for producing a linear alkylaromatic product from a C.sub.9-C.sub.18 n-paraffin-containing feed stock and a monocyclic aromatichydrocarbon by (i) contacting said C.sub.9 -C.sub.18 n-paraffin-containingfeed stock with chlorine or bromine in a halogenation step to form amonohalogenated n-paraffin alkylating agent, and (ii) reacting saidaromatic hydrocarbon with said alkylating agent in an alkylation step,utilizing an alkylation catalyst, to provide said linear alkylaromaticproduct, wherein oxygen-containing hydrocarbonaceous compounds are presentin said feed stock in concentrations sufficient to inhibit the rate ofhalogenation of said n-paraffin in said halogenation step, the improvementwhich comprises contacting said feed stock, prior to said halogenationstep, with a sorbent selected from the group consisting of dehydratedsilica gel, activated alumina, activated charcoal, zeolites, clay andsulphonic ion-exchange resin under separation conditions, including acontact time of about 0.1 to about 120 minutes and a temperature of about0.degree. C. to about 200.degree. C., sufficient to remove at least aportion of said oxygen-containing compounds from said feed stock, wherebythe rate of halogenation of said n-paraffin is increased.2. The improvement of claim 1 wherein said sorbent is dehydrated silicagel.3. The improvement of claim 1 wherein said sorbent is activated alumina."}
{"WKU":"039313514","Title":"Modification of iron and barium ferrite catalysts","App_Date":"1974-08-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert E. Hinkson;William H. Taylor","Assignee":"Petro-Tex Chemical Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07C  548","References":"3207806;3207809;3308193;3308198;3670042","Claims":"The invention claimed is:1. A process for the oxidative dehydrogenation of hydrocarbons having 4 to7 carbon atoms having a stright chain of at least 4 carbon atoms toproduce less saturated hydrocarbons of the same number of carbon atomswhich comprises contacting, at a temperature of greater than400.degree.C., said hydrocarbon, a halogen or halogen compound which wouldliberate halogen said halogen being iodine, bromine or chlorine under theconditions of reaction and from 0.2 to 2.5 moles of oxygen per mole ofsaid hydrocarbon with a catalyst for the dehydrogenation consistingessentially of iron ferrite and 0.35 to 1.3 moles of a metal oxidemodifier which is a mixture of ZnO and PbO per mole of iron oxide.2. A process according to claim 1 wherein the hydrocarbon is selected fromthe group consisting of n-butane, n-butene and mixtures thereof.3. A process according to claim 2 wherein the temperature is from500.degree.C to 600.degree.C.4. A process according to claim 1 wherein said hydrocarbon is selected fromthe group consisting of saturated hydrocarbons, monoolefins, diolefins,and mixtures thereof.5. A process according to claim 4 wherein the hydrocarbon is selected fromthe group consisting of butene-1, cis-butene-2, trans-butene-2, pentene-1,cis-pentene-2, trans-pentene-2, 2-methyl butene-1, 2-methyl butene-2,3-methyl butene-1, 2-methyl pentene-1, 2-methyl pentene-2, 2-methylpentene-3 and mixtures thereof."}
{"WKU":"039313522","Title":"HF acid treating the paraffin feed stream to an integrated paraffin","App_Date":"1974-07-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Michael Z. Mikulicz","Assignee":"Universal Oil Products Company","ICL_Class":"C07C  354;C07C  524","References":"3254137;3650943;3830871","Claims":"I claim as my invention:1. A process for the isomerization of a liquid normal paraffin feed streamcontaining water, sulfur and nitrogen contaminants which are detrimentalto solid isomerization catalyst, which process comprises the steps of:a. contacting said liquid feed stream with liquid hydrofluoric acid toremove aforesaid detrimental contaminants therefrom;b. separating the treated feed stream of step (a) fromcontaminant-containing liquid hydrofluoric acid;c. stripping the treated feed stream of step (b) in a fractionation zone toremove hydrogen fluoride therefrom;d. treating the stripped feed stream of step (c) for the removal of anyremaining fluorides therefrom;e. contacting the thus purified feed stream of step (d) with solidisomerization catalyst at isomerization conditions;f. introducing the isomerization effluent of step (e) to said fractionationzone of step (c) for fractionation therein together with said treated feedstream; andg. withdrawing isoparaffin product from said fractionation zone.2. The process of claim 1 further characterized in that the fluorideremoval in step (d) is effected by successive contact of said strippedfeed stream with alumina and caustic.3. The process of claim 1 further characterized in that the feed stream andthe liquid hydrofluoric acid are intimately contacted by theirsimultaneous passage through a mixing orifice.4. The process of claim 1 further characterized in that the feed stream andthe liquid hydrofluoric acid are intimately contacted by spraying a finedispersion of the feed stream into a quantity of the acid.5. A process for the isomerization and subsequent alkylation of a liquidnormal paraffin feed stream containing water, sulfur and nitrogencontaminants which are detrimental to solid isomerization catalyst, whichprocess comprises the steps of:a. contacting said liquid feed stream with liquid hydrofluoric acid toremove aforesaid detrimental contaminants therefrom;b. separating the treated feed stream of step (a) fromcontaminant-containing liquid hydrofluoric acid;c. stripping the treated feed stream of step (b) in a fractionation zone toremove hydrogen fluoride therefrom;d. treating the stripped feed stream of step (c) for the removal of anyremaining fluorides therefrom;e. contacting the thus purified feed stream of step (d) with solidisomerization catalyst at isomerization conditions;f. introducing the isomerization effluent of step (e) to said fractionationzone of step (e) for fractionation therein together with said treated feedstream;g. stripping isoparaffin from said fractionation zone and reacting the samewith mono-olefin in contact with hydrofluoric acid catalyst at alkylationconditions;h. supplying resultant hydrocarbon phase separated from step (g) containingalkylate in admixture with unreacted isoparaffin to said fractionationzone; andi. removing a high purity alkylate product from the lower portion of saidfractionation zone.6. The process of claim 5 further characterized in that said fractionationzone comprises an isostripper used in a process for the hydrofluoricacid-catalyzed alkylation of isoparaffins.7. The process of claim 5, further characterized in that the feed stream tostep (a) comprises normal paraffins having from 4 to 7 carbon atoms permolecule.8. The process of claim 7 further characterized in that the mono-olefincontains from 2 to 5 carbon atoms per molecule.9. The process of claim 5 further characterized in that hydrofluoric acidwhich has been contacted with the feed stream in step (a) hydrofluoricacid which has been used as catalyst in the alkylation of step (g) areregenerated and the regenerated acid is recycled to the alkylation of step(g).10. The process of claim 8 further characterized in that hydrofluoric acidwithdrawn from the alkylation of step (g) is used as the hydrofluoric acidcontacted with the feed stream in step (a).11. The process of claim 5 further characterized in that hydrofluoric acidcatalyst is supplied from alkylation step (g) to step (a).12. The process of claim 8 further characterized in that at least a portionof the isomerization effluent of step (a) is combined with the feed streamof step (b) prior to passage of said feed stream into the fractionationzone in step (c)."}
{"WKU":"039313530","Title":"Polymerizable cycloacetal resinous composition","App_Date":"1974-07-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Toshiaki Hanyuda;Eiichiro Takiyama","Assignee":"Showa High Polymer Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"C08F 2400","References":"2687407;2975156;3087918;3247282;3291860;3296337;3468857","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A polymerizable cycloacetal resinous composition, which comprisesA. a resin prepared by reacting 1 equivalent of diallylidenepentaerythritol(I) with 0.8 - 2.0 equivalents of polyhydric alcohol unsaturatedmonocarboxylic acid ester mono-ol (II) having both a hydroxyl group and apolymerizable or copolymerizable unsaturated bond in the same molecule,with or without the presence of a solvent, in the presence ofpolymerization inhibitor and addition reaction catalystB. an unsaturated polyester of a polycarboxylic acid or epoxyacrylate resinprepared from an epoxy resin and an unsaturated monocarboxylic acid and inthe presence or absence ofC. vinyl monomers.2. A polymerizable cycloacetal resinous composition according to claim 1,said polyhydric alcohol unsaturated monocarboxylic acid ester mono-ol (II)is hydroxylethyl (or propyl) methacrylate, hydroxylethyl (orpropyl)acrylate, hydroxylethyl (or propyl) crotonate,trimethylolpropanedimethacrylate, trimethylolpropane-diacrylate,trimethylolethanedimethacrylate, trimethylolethanediacrylate orglycerinedimethacrylate.3. A polymerizable cycloacetal resinous composition according to claim 1which is curable by ultraviolet rays.4. A polymerizable cycloacetal resinous composition according to claim 1which is curable by electron beams.5. A polymerizable cycloacetal resinous composition according to claim 1wherein the unsaturated polyester of a polycarboxylic acid is an alkydresin is produced by reacting 10.5 moles of propylene glycol, 5 moles ofmaleic anhydride and 5 moles of phthalic anhydride in 35% of styrenecontaining 0.02% hydroquinone.6. A process according to claim 1 wherein the epoxy-acrylate resin isproduced by reacting 520 weight parts of an epoxy resin having an epoxyequivalent of 260, 140 weight parts of acrylic acid, 0.14 weight partshydroquinone and 2.5 weight parts of diethyleneamine hydrochloride."}
{"WKU":"039313549","Title":"Reaction products of carboxyl terminated 1,2-polybutadiene with epoxides","App_Date":"1974-08-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Clyde H. Sheppard;Robert J. Jones","Assignee":"TRW Inc.","ICL_Class":"C08L 6302;C08L 6304;C08L 6308;C08L 6310","References":"3515772;3673274;3730948;3738967;3763087;3853815;3855176","Claims":"We claim:1. A hard thermoset resin which is a reaction product of the ratio of:1. one mole of 1,2-polybutadiene having at least two carboxyl terminalgroups;2. two moles of an epoxide selected from the group consisting of alkyleneepoxide, cycloalkylene epoxide, alkoxyarylene epoxide, arylene epoxide,alkyl cycloalkylene epoxide, cycloalkene epoxide, andalkylenecycloalkylene epoxide;3. 0.1 to 0.8 moles of an aromatic amine maleimide per mole of1,2-polybutadiene; and4. a peroxide free radical initiator.2. A hard thermoset resin according to claim 1 wherein:said maleimide is selected from the group consisting of methylene dianilinemaleimide, thiodianiline, meta-phenylene diamine maleimide, maleimide, andoxydianiline maleimide.3. A thermosetting polymer comprising a reaction product of the ratio of:1. one mole of 1,2-polybutadiene having at least two carboxyl terminalgroups;2. two moles of an expoxide selected from the group consisting of alkyleneepoxide, cycloalkylene epoxide, alkoxyarylene epoxide, arylene epoxide,alkyl cycloalkylene epoxide, cycloalkene epoxide, andalkylenecycloalkylene epoxide;3. 0.1 to 0.8 moles of an aromatic amine maleimide per mole of1,2-polybutadiene; and4. a peroxide free radical initiator homogeneously dispersed throughout thereaction product.4. A thermosetting polymer according to claim 3 wherein:said epoxide is selected from the group consisting of alkylene epoxide,cycloalkylene epoxide, alkoxyarylene alkylcycloalkylene arylene epoxide,alkycycloalkylene epoxide, cycloalkene epoxide, and alkenecycloalkyleneepoxide.5. A thermosetting polymer according to claim 3 wherein:said maleimide is selected from the group consisting of  methylenedianiline maleimide, thiodianiline maleimide, meta-phenylene diaminemaleimide, and oxydianiline maleimide.6. A method of producing a hard thermoset polybutadiene-epoxy resincomprising:A. reacting by ratio (1) one mole of 1,2-polybutadiene having at least twocarboxyl terminal groups with (2) two moles of an epoxide to form an epoxyend-capped polybutadiene;  B. mixing the epoxy end-capped polybutadieneterminated adduct with (3) a peroxide free radical initiator and (4) 0.1to 0.8 moles of an aromatic amine maleimide per mole of 1,2-polybutadiene;and  C. curing the mixture to a hard thermoset resin.7. A method according to claim 6 wherein:said epoxide is selected from the group consisting of alkylene epoxide,cycloalkylene epoxide, alkoxyarylene epoxide, arylene epoxide,alkylcycloalkylene epoxide, cycloalkene epoxide, and alkenecycloalkyleneepoxide.8. A method according to claim 6 wherein:said maleimide is selected from the group consisting of methylene dianilinemaleimide, thiodianiline maleimide, and oxydianiline maleimide.9. A method according to claim 6 wherein:the two dicarboxyl terminated groups are formed by the reaction of oneequivalent of dihydroxy-1,2-polybutadiene with one equivalent of an acidanhydride and is selected from the group consisting of trimelliticanhydride; tetrahydrophthalic anhydride; hexahydrophthalic anhydride;tetrachlorophthalic anhydride, tetrabromophthalic anhydride; chlorendicanhydride; nadic anhydride; maleic anhydride; oxalic anhydride; succinicanhydride; malonic anhydride; suberic anhydride; azelaic anhydride;sebacic anhydride; adipic anhydride; glutaric anhydride; pimelicanhydride; phthalic anhydride; 3,4 ,4,4 -benzophenone tetracarboxylicdianhydride; polyazelaic polyanhydride, pyromellitic dianhydride;1,2,3,4,-cyclopentane tetracarboxylic dianhydride; and endo-cis bicyclo(2.2.1)-5-heptene-2,3-dicarboxylic dianhydride."}
{"WKU":"039313557","Title":"Radical-initiated polymerization reactions and mixture","App_Date":"1974-01-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hans Rudolph;Hans-Joachim Traenckner","Assignee":"Bayer Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C08F  416","References":"3313863;3313864;3531438","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A method of polymerizing a substance containing polymerizablecarbon-carbon double bonds which comprises polymerizing the substance inthe presence of a trialkyl or triaryl silyl-ether of atetraaryl-1,2-glycol.2. A method as claimed in claim 1 wherein the silyl-ether is of the formula##EQU2##in which A, B, D and E are each a member selected from the groupconsisting of an unsubstituted 2-naphthyl radical, an unsubstituted phenylradical, a phenyl radical substituted in at least one of the 2-, 3-, 4-,5- and 6-positions by chlorine or bromine, a phenyl radical having 6-18carbon atoms substituted in at least one of the 2-, 3-, 4-, 5- and6-positions by alkyl having up to 4 carbon atoms, a phenyl radical having6-18 carbon atoms substituted in at least one of the 2-, 3-, 4-, 5- and6-positions by alkoxy having up to 4 carbon atoms, a phenyl radical with12 to 18 carbon atoms substituted in at least one of the 3-, 4- and5-positions by phenyl, in which A and B and D and E may form together withthe carbon atom to which they are attached the fluorenylidene radical, andin which X and Y are trialkyl-siloxy or triaryl-siloxy radicals.3. A method as claimed in claim 2 wherein the silylether is of the formula##SPC1##in which R.sup.1 is hydrogen, methyl, ethyl or methoxy; R.sup.2 ishydrogen, methyl or ethyl; R.sup.3 is hydrogen or methyl and R.sup.4 ismethyl.4. A method as claimed in claim 1 wherein the polymerization is conductedat a temperature above 50.degree.C.5. A method as claimed in claim 1 wherein the silyl-ether is present in anamount of 0.05 to 0.2% by weight, based on the weight of the polymerizablesubstance.6. A method as claimed in claim 1 wherein the polymerizable substance is amember selected from the group consisting of a monoolefin, a conjugateddiolefin, a vinyl-substituted benzene or a derivative thereof, a N-vinylheterocycle, an .alpha.,.beta.-olefinically unsaturated carboxylic acid oran ester, amide or nitrile thereof, a vinyl ester, a vinyl ketone, anallyl ester, a di(allylphenyl) carbonate, a vinyl halide, a vinylidenehalide, a di(vinylphenyl) carbonate, a polyol acrylate, a polyolmethacrylate, a N,N -methylene-bis-acrylamide and aN,N -methylene-bis-methylacrylamide.7. A method as claimed in claim 1 wherein the polymerizable substance is amixture of an unsaturated polyester of a dihydric alcohol and an.alpha.,.beta.-unsaturated dicarboxylic acid and a copolymerizableethylenically unsaturated monomer.8. A method as claimed in claim 7 wherein the silyl-ether istetra-(4-tolyl)-1,2-bis-(trimethylsiloxy)-ethane.9. A method as claimed in claim 1 wherein the polymerizable substance ismethyl methacrylate and the silyl-ether isbis-fluorenyl-1,2-bis-(trimethylsiloxy)-ethane.10. A polymerizable mixture comprising a substance containing polymerizablecarbon-carbon bonds and a silyl-ether of a tetraaryl-1,2-glycol.11. A mixture as claimed in claim 10 wherein the silyl-ether is of theformula##EQU3##in which A, B, D and E are each a member selected from the groupconsisting of an unsubstituted 2-naphthyl radical, an unsubstituted phenylradical, a phenyl radical substituted in at least one of the 2-, 3-, 4-,5- and 6-positions by chlorine or bromine, a phenyl radical having 6-18carbon atoms substituted in at least one of the 2-, 3-, 4-, 5- and6-positions by alkyl having up to 4 carbon atoms, a phenyl radical having6-18 carbon atoms substituted in at least one of the 2-, 3-, 4-, 5- and6-positions by alkoxy having up to 4 carbon atoms, a phenyl radical with12 to 18 carbon atoms substituted in at least one of the 3-, 4- and5-positions by phenyl, in which A and B and D and E may form together withthe carbon atom to which they are attached the fluorenylidene radical, andin which X and Y are trialkyl-siloxy or triaryl-siloxy radicals.12. A mixture as claimed in claim 11 wherein the silyl-ether is of theformula##SPC2##in which R.sup.1 is hydrogen, methyl, ethyl or methoxy; R.sup.2 ishydrogen, methyl or ethyl; R.sup.3 is hydrogen or methyl and R.sup.4 ismethyl.13. A mixture as claimed in claim 11 wherein the silyl-ether is present inan amount of 0.05 to 0.08% by weight, based on the weight of thepolymerizable substance.14. A mixture as claimed in claim 11 wherein the polymerizable substance isa member selected from the group consisting of a mono-olefin, a conjugateddiolefin, a vinyl-substituted benzene or a derivative thereof, a N-vinylheterocycle, an .alpha.,.beta.-olefinically unsaturated carboxylic acid oran ester, amide or nitrile thereof, a vinyl ester, a vinyl ketone, anallyl ester, a di(allylphenyl) carbonate, a vinyl halide, a vinylidenehalide, a di(vinylphenyl) carbonate, a polyolacrylate, a polyolmethacrylate, a N,N -methylene-bis-acrylamide and aN,N -methylene-bis-methacrylamide.15. A mixture as claimed in claim 11 wherein the polymerizable substance isa mixture of an unsaturated polyester of a dihydric alcohol and.alpha.,.beta.-unsaturated dicarboxylic acid and a copolymerizableethylenically unsaturated monomer.16. A mixture as claimed in claim 15 wherein the silyl-ether istetra-(4-tolyl)-1,2-bis-(trimethylsiloxy)-ethane ordiphenyl-di-(4-tolyl)-1,2-bis-(trimethylsiloxy)-ethane.17. A mixture as claimed in claim 15 in the form of a molding or coatingcomposition.18. A mixture as claimed in claim 10 comprising methyl methacrylate andbis-fluorenyl-1,2-bis-(trimethylsiloxy)-ethane."}
{"WKU":"039313565","Title":"Continuous process for the preparation of ABS type polyblends","App_Date":"1974-04-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William O. Dalton","Assignee":"Monsanto Company","ICL_Class":"C08L  902;C08L  906;C08L 5106;C08L 5502","References":"3509238;3511895;3513145;3576910;3658946;3660535;3700622","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A continuous mass polymerization process for the preparation of an ABStype polyblend, the steps comprising:A. continuously charging a monomer composition comprising at least onealkenyl nitrile monomer of the formula:##EQU6##wherein R is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkylradicals containing from 1 through 4 carbon atoms each and at least onemonoalkenyl aromatic monomer of the formula:##EQU7##wherein: Ar is selected from the group consisting of a phenyl radical, analkaryl radical of 6 through 9 carbon atoms, a monochlorophenyl radical, adichlorophenyl radical, a monobromophenyl radical, and a dibromophenylradical, and"}
{"WKU":"039313573","Title":"Separate streams with different catalyst prior to combination","App_Date":"1973-08-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Klaus Meyer;Roland Streck;Heinrich Weber","Assignee":"Chemische Werke Huls Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"C08L  900;C08L 2316","References":"3692872","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for grafting a polydiene or a polyalkenamer onto anunsaturated polyolefin rubber backbone, which comprises:a. dispersing in a first liquid stream a catalytically effective amount ofa first organic solvent-soluble Ziegler-Natta metathesis catalystcomponent containing a metal of Subgroups V thru VII of the periodictable;b. dispersing in a second liquid stream separate from said first liquidstream a catalytically effective amount of a second organicsolvent-soluble Ziegler-Natta metathesis catalyst component containing analkyl or a hydride of a metal from Main groups I thru III of the periodictable;c. dispersing, separately or as a mixture, into one or both of said firstand second liquid streams or into at least one further liquid stream (i) apolydiene or a polyalkenamer having at least one metathesisable doublebond per molecule and (ii) an unsaturated polyolefin rubber comprising ametathesisable copolymer of two or more .alpha.-olefins with anunconjugated diolefin; andd. intensively intermixing said liquid streams under metathesis reactioncondictions to form in situ a catalytic amount of a complete Ziegler-Nattametathesis catalyst system and to metathetically graft said polydiene orpolyalkenamer onto said polyolefin rubber, thereby reducing side reactionsbetween the catalyst components and the polymer components of saidstreams; ande. recovering the resultant graft copolymer characterized by an increasedreduced specific viscosity as compared to the starting polymer and a lowgel content.2. A process according to claim 1, wherein the reaction is conductedcontinuously.3. A process according to claim 1, wherein the first and secondmetal-containing catalyst components are dissolved in separate identicalpartial streams each containing both said unsaturated polyolefin rubberand said polydiene or polyalkenamer.4. A process according to claim 1, wherein one of the metal-containingcomponents of the catalyst system is dissolved in a solution of theunsaturated polyolefin rubber, and the other metal-containing component ofthe catalyst system is dissolved in a solution of the polydiene orpolyalkenamer.5. A process according to claim 1, wherein one of the metal-containingcomponents of the catalyst system is dissolved in a solution of a singlepolymer, and the other metal-containing component of the catalyst systemis dissolved in a mixture of said polymer reactants.6. A process according to claim 1, wherein one of the metal-containingcomponents of the catalyst system is dissolved in a partial streamcontaining a solution mixture of said polymer reactants and the othermetal-containing component of the catalyst system is dissolved in asolvent stream.7. A process according to claim 1, further comprising admixing aZiegler-Natta catalyst activator with one or more partial streams.8. A process according to claim 1, wherein the unsaturated polyolefinrubber is an ethylene-propylene-unconjugated diene rubber.9. A process according to claim 8, wherein the double bonds of the rubberare at least partially unsubstituted and are present either in an openchain or in a ring system which can be polymerized under ring opening.10. A process according to claim 9, wherein the diene component of therubber is dicyclopentadiene.11. A process according to claim 9, wherein the diene component of therubber is 1,4-hexadiene.12. A process according to claim 1, wherein the polymer amenable to themetathesis reaction is a polyalkenamer.13. A process according to claim 12, wherein the polyalkenamer is a polymeror oligomer of butadiene.14. A process according to claim 13, wherein at least 90% of the doublebonds of the butadiene are present as 1,4-vinylene groups.15. A process according to claim 13, wherein more than 75% of the doublebonds of the polybutadiene are present as cis-1,4 groups.16. A process according to claim 12, wherein the polyalkenamer ispolypentenamer.17. A process according to claim 12, wherein the polyalkenamer ispolyoctenamer.18. A process according to claim 12, wherein the polyalkenamer ispolydodecenamer."}
{"WKU":"039313581","Title":"Thio and sulfonyl glyoxylnitrileoxime phosphates and phosphonates","App_Date":"1972-01-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Arnold D. Gutman","Assignee":"Stauffer Chemical Company","ICL_Class":"A01N  936;C07F  9165;C07F  940","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A compound of the formula##EQU7##in which R is lower alkyl having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, inclusive; R.sub.1is selected from the group consisting of lower alkyl having 1 to 4 carbonatoms, inclusive, and lower alkoxy having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, inclusive;X is selected from the group consisting of thio and sulfonyl; R.sub.2 isselected from the group consisting of benzyl, naphthyl, phenyl orsubstituted phenyl wherein said substituents are selected from the groupconsisting of chloro, bromo, methyl and methoxy.2. The compound according to claim 1 in which R is lower alkyl, R.sub.1 islower alkoxy, X is thio and R.sub.2 is p-chlorophenyl.3. The compound according to claim 2 in which R is ethyl and R.sub.1 isethoxy.4. The compound according to claim 1 in which R is lower alkyl, R.sub.1 islower alkoxy, X is thio and R.sub.2 is phenyl.5. The compound according to claim 4 in which R is methyl and R.sub.1 ismethoxy.6. The compound according to claim 1 in which R is lower alkyl, R.sub.1 islower alkoxy, X is sulfonyl and R.sub.2 is phenyl.7. The compound according to claim 6 in which R is ethyl and R.sub.1 isethoxy.8. The compound according to claim 6 in which R is methyl and R.sub.1 ismethoxy.9. The compound according to claim 1 in which R is lower alkyl, R.sub.1 isalkoxy, X is sulfonyl and R.sub.2 is p-methylphenyl.10. The compound according to claim 9 in which R is ethyl and R.sub.1 isethoxy.11. The compound according to claim 9 in which R is methyl and R.sub.1 ismethoxy.12. The compound according to claim 1 in which R is lower alkyl, R.sub.1 islower alkoxy, X is sulfonyl and R.sub.2 is p-bromophenyl.13. The compound according to claim 12 in which R is ethyl and R.sub.1 isethoxy.14. The compound according to claim 12 in which R is methyl and R.sub.1 ismethoxy.15. The compound according to claim 1 in which R is lower alkyl, R.sub.1 islower alkoxy, X is thio and R.sub.2 is benzyl.16. The compound according to claim 15 in which R is ethyl and R.sub.1 isethoxy.17. The compound according to claim 15 in which R is methyl and R.sub.1 ismethoxy.18. The compound according to claim 1 in which R is lower alkyl, R.sub.1 islower alkyl, X is thio and R.sub.2 is benzyl.19. The compound according to claim 18 in which R is ethyl and R.sub.1 isethyl."}
{"WKU":"039313590","Title":"O-(4-iodophenyl) thiono (phosphonic acid esters and ester amides","App_Date":"1973-01-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Karl-Julius Schmidt;Bernhard Homeyer;Ingeborg Hammann;Wilhelm Stendel","Assignee":"Bayer Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"A01N  936;C07F  9205;C07F  924;C07F  940","References":"2552538;2552574;2875233;3149143;3253061;3260712;3322864;3444274","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An iodo-phenyl-thiono-phosphoric (phosphonic) acid ester or ester amideselected from the group consisting ofO-isopropyl-O-(4-iodophenyl)-methanethionophosphonic acid ester,O-isopropyl-O-(4-iodophenyl)-ethanethionophosphonic acid ester, orO-ethyl-N-isopropyl-thionophosphoric acid ester amide.2. The compound according to claim 1 wherein such compound isO-isopropyl-O-(4-iodophenyl)-methanothionophosphonic acid ester of theformula##SPC8##3. The compound according to claim 1 wherein such compound isO-isopropyl-O-(4-iodophenyl)-ethanethionophosphonic acid ester of theformula##SPC9##4. The compound according to claim 1 wherein such compound isO-ethyl-N-isopropyl-thionophosphoric acid ester amide of the formula##SPC10##"}
{"WKU":"039313603","Title":"Color improvement of phosphate esters","App_Date":"1974-12-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Silvio L. Giolito","Assignee":"Stauffer Chemical Company","ICL_Class":"C07F  912","References":"3356775;3681482","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a method for producing alkylphenyl esters of phosphoric acid whichcomprises the alkylation of phenol with an olefin followed by the additionof POCL.sub.3 in the presence of a Friedel-Crafts catalyst at an elevatedtemperature, the improvement which comprises contacting said esters withan effective amount of a solution of a soluble alkali metalnitrilotriacetate salt for a period of time sufficient to reduce the colorto the desired level whereby said esters are decolorized and stabilizedagainst subsequent color formation.2. The method of claim 1 wherein said alkylphenyl esters correspond to theformula:##EQU2##wherein R is alkaryl and R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are selected from the groupconsisting of alkyl, aralkyl, alkaryl and aryl, and wherein the alkylgroups contain from 1 to about 20 carbon atoms.3. The method of claim 2 wherein said alkyl groups contain from 1 to about12 carbon atoms.4. The method of claim 1 wherein the alkylphenyl esters contain unreactedphenols.5. The method of claim 1 wherein said alkali metal nitrilotriacetate issodium nitrilatriacetate.6. The method of claim 1 wherein said decolorizing and stabilizing isconducted under an inert atmosphere.7. The method of claim 6 wherein said inert atmosphere comprises nitrogen.8. The method of claim 1 wherein said nitriloacetate salt is employed in anaqueous solution.9. The method of claim 1 wherein the alkyl phenyl ester of phosphoric acidis an isopropylphenyl phenyl phosphate."}
{"WKU":"039313611","Title":"Color improvement of phosphate esters","App_Date":"1974-12-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Fred Jaffe;Silvio L. Giolito;Edward N. Walsh","Assignee":"Stauffer Chemical Company","ICL_Class":"C07F  912","References":"3356775;3681482","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method for producing alkylphenyl esters of phosphoric acid whichcomprises the alkylation of phenol with an olefin followed by the additionof POCl.sub.3 in the presence of a Friedel-Crafts catalyst at an elevatedtemperature the improvement which comprises contacting said esters with aneffective amount of a water-soluble salt of a dithionite or formaldehydesulfoxylate selected from the group consisting of sodium, potassium,lithium, ammonium, calcium, and mixtures thereof, for a period of timesufficient to reduce the color to the desired level whereby said estersare decolorized and stabilized against subsequent color formation.2. The method of claim 1 wherein said alkylphenyl esters correspond to theformula:##EQU2##wherein R is alkaryl and R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are selected from the groupconsisting of alkyl, aralkyl, alkaryl and aryl, and wherein the alkylgroups contain from 1 to 20 carbon atoms.3. The method of claim 2 wherein said alkyl groups contain from 1 to 12carbon atoms.4. The method of claim 1 wherein the alkylphenyl esters contain unreactedphenols.5. The method of claim 1 wherein said water soluble salt is selected fromthe group consisting of sodium, potassium and mixtures thereof.6. The method of claim 5 wherein said water soluble salt is selected fromthe group consisting of sodium dithionite, sodium formaldehydesulfoxylate, and mixtures thereof.7. The method of claim 5 wherein said water soluble salt is selected fromthe group consisting of potassium, dithionite, potassium formaldehydesulfoxylate, and mixtures thereof.8. The method of claim 5 wherein said alkali metal salt is employed in anaqueous solution.9. The method of claim 1 wherein the alkyl phenyl ester of phosphoric acidis an isopropylphenyl phenyl phosphate.10. The method of claim 1 wherein said decolorizing and stabilizing isconducted under an inert atmosphere.11. The method of claim 10 wherein said inert atmosphere comprisesnitrogen.12. The method of claim 1 wherein said decolorizing and stabilizing isaccomplished in a dilute sodium hydroxide solution."}
{"WKU":"039313620","Title":"Color improvement of phosphate esters","App_Date":"1974-12-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Silvio L. Giolito;Fred Jaffe","Assignee":"Stauffer Chemical Company","ICL_Class":"C07F  912","References":"2983742;3275717;3356775;3668282;3681482;3852288","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a method for producing alkylphenyl esters of phosphoric acid whichcomprises the alkylation of phenol with an olefin followed by the additionof POCl.sub.3 in the presence of a Friedel-Crafts catalyst at an elevatedtemperature, the improvement which comprises contacting said esters withan effective amount of an oxidizable nitrogenous compound selected fromthe group consisting of hydrazine, semicarbazide, and mixtures thereof,for a period of time sufficient to reduce the color to the desired levelwhereby said esters are decolorized and stabilized against subsequentcolor formation.2. The method of claim 1 wherein said alkylphenyl esters correspond to theformula:##EQU3##wherein R is alkaryl and R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are selected from the groupconsisting of alkyl, aralkyl, alkaryl and aryl, and wherein the alkylgroups contain from 1 to about 20 carbon atoms.3. The method of claim 2 wherein said alkyl groups contain from 1 to about12 carbon atoms.4. The method of claim 3 wherein the alkylphenyl esters contain unreactedphenols.5. The method of claim 1 wherein said oxidizable nitrogenous compound ishydrazine.6. The method of claim 3 wherein said alkylphenol ester of phosphoric acidis an isopropylphenyl phenyl phosphate.7. The method of claim 1 wherein said decolorizing and stabilizing isconducted under an inert atmosphere.8. The method of claim 7 wherein said inert atmosphere comprises nitrogen.9. The method of claim 1 wherein said oxidizable nitrogenous compound isemployed in an aqueous solution.10. The method of claim 1 wherein said oxidizable nitrogenous compound issemicarbazide."}
{"WKU":"039313638","Title":"Color improvement of phosphate esters","App_Date":"1974-12-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Silvio L. Giolito;Stanley B. Mirviss","Assignee":"Stauffer Chemical Company","ICL_Class":"C07F  912","References":"3356775;3681482","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a method for producing alkylphenyl esters of phosphoric acid whichcomprises the alkylation of phenol with an olefin followed by the additionof POCl.sub.3 in the presence of a Friedel-Crafts catalyst at an elevatedtemperature, the improvement which comprises contacting said esters withan effective amount of an organoaluminum compound in accordance with theformula:"}
{"WKU":"039313646","Title":"Color improvement of phosphate esters","App_Date":"1974-12-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Silvio L. Giolito;Stanley B. Mirviss","Assignee":"Stauffer Chemical Company","ICL_Class":"C07F  912","References":"3356775;3681482","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a method for producing alkylphenyl esters of phosphoric acid whichcomprises the alkylation of phenol with an olefin followed by the additionof POCl.sub.3 in the presence of a Friedel-Crafts catalyst at an elevatedtemperature, the improvement which comprises contacting said esters withan effective amount of a phosphite ester corresponding to the formula:##EQU3##wherein R.sub.3, R.sub.4 and R.sub.5 are radicals, each independentlyselected from the group consisting of alkyl, cycloalkyl, phenyl,alkylphenyl and phenylalkyl, wherein the alkyl groups contain from 1 toabout 20 carbon atoms, and wherein at least one radical from the groupR.sub.3, R.sub.4 and R.sub.5 is phenyl or alkylphenyl; for a period oftime sufficient to reduce the color to the desired level whereby saidesters are decolorized and stabilized against subsequent color formation.2. The method of claim 1 wherein said alkylphenyl esters correspond to theformula:##EQU4##wherein R is alkaryl and R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are selected from the groupconsisting of alkyl, aralkyl, alkaryl and aryl, and wherein the alkylgroups contain from 1 to about 20 carbon atoms.3. The method of claim 1 wherein said alkyl groups contain from 1 to about12 carbon atoms.4. The method of claim 1 wherein the alkylphenyl esters contain unreactedphenols.5. The method of claim 1 wherein said phosphite ester is a triphenylphosphite.6. The method of claim 1 wherein said phosphite ester is atris(alkylphenyl) phosphite.7. The method of claim 1 wherein said alkylphenyl ester of phosphoric acidis an isopropylphenyl phosphate.8. The method of claim 1 wherein the alkylphenyl ester of phosphoric acidis an isopropylphenyl phenyl phosphate.9. The method of claim 1 wherein said decolorizing and stabilizing isconducted under an inert atmosphere.10. The method of claim 9 wherein said inert atmosphere comprises nitrogen.11. The method of claim 1 wherein said phosphite ester is employed in analkaline solution."}
{"WKU":"039313654","Title":"Color improvement of phosphate esters","App_Date":"1974-12-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Silvio L. Giolito;Stanley B. Mirviss","Assignee":"Stauffer Chemical Company","ICL_Class":"C07F  912","References":"3356775;3681482","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a method for producing alkylphenyl esters of phosphoric acid whichcomprises the alkylation of phenol with an olefin followed by the additionof POCl.sub.3 in the presence of a Friedel-Crafts catalyst at an elevatedtemperature, the improvement which comprises contacting said esters withan effective amount of a water-soluble salt of a reduced form of sulfurwherein the cation is selected from the group consisting of sodium,potassium, ammonium, calcium, and mixtures thereof; and wherein the anionis selected from the group consisting of thiosulfate, sulfite, bisulfite,and mixtures thereof; for a period of time sufficient to reduce the colorto the desired level whereby said esters are decolorized and stabilizedagainst subsequent color formation.2. The method of claim 1 wherein said alkylphenyl esters correspond to theformula:##EQU2##wherein R is alkaryl and R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are selected from the groupconsisting of alkyl, aralkyl, alkaryl and aryl, and wherein the alkylgroups contain from 1 to 20 carbon atoms.3. The method of claim 2 wherein said alkyl groups contain from 1 to 12carbon atoms.4. The method of claim 1 wherein the alkylphenyl esters contain unreactedphenols.5. The method of claim 1 wherein said water soluble salt of a reduced formof sulfur comprises a sodium salt selected from the group consisting ofsodium thiosulfate, sodium sulfite, sodium bisulfite, and mixturesthereof.6. The method of claim 1 wherein said water soluble salt of a reduced formof sulfur comprises a potassium salt selected from the group consisting ofpotassium thiosulfate, potassium sulfite, postassium bisulfite, andmixtures thereof.7. The method of claim 1 wherein said water soluble salt of a reduced formof sulfur is employed in an aqueous solution.8. The method of claim 1 wherein the alkylphenyl ester of phosphoric acidis an isopropylphenyl phenyl phosphate.9. The method of claim 1 wherein said decolorizing and stabilizing isconducted under an inert atmosphere.10. The method of claim 9 wherein said inert atmosphere comprises nitrogen."}
{"WKU":"039313662","Title":"Color improvement of phosphate esters","App_Date":"1974-12-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Silvio L. Giolito;Don Keith Worster","Assignee":"Stauffer Chemical Company","ICL_Class":"C07F  912","References":"3356775;3576923;3681482;3706823","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a method for producing alkylphenyl esters of phosphoric acid whichcomprises the alkylation of phenol with an olefin followed by the additionof POCl.sub.3 in the presence of a Friedel-Crafts catalyst at an elevatedtemperature, the improvement which comprises the in situ contacting of aneffective amount of PCl.sub.3 with the alkylation mixture, to produce anester which is decolorized and stabilized against subsequent colorformation.2. The method of claim 1 wherein said alkylphenyl esters correspond to theformula:##EQU2##where R is alkaryl and R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are selected from the groupconsisting of alkyl, aralkyl, alkaryl and aryl, and wherein the alkylgroups contain from 1 to about 20 carbon atoms.3. The method of claim 2 wherein the alkyl groups contain from 1 to about12 carbon atoms.4. The method of claim 1 wherein the alkylphenyl esters contain unreactedphenols.5. The method of claim 1 wherein the alkyl phenyl ester of phosphoric acidis an ispropyl phenyl phenylphosphate.6. The method of claim 1 wherein the PCl.sub.3 contacting is conductedunder an inert atmosphere.7. The method of claim 6 wherein said inert atmosphere comprises nitrogen."}
{"WKU":"039313670","Title":"Color improvement of phosphate esters","App_Date":"1974-12-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Silvio L. Giolito;Don Keith Worster","Assignee":"Stauffer Chemical Company","ICL_Class":"C07F  912","References":"3356775;3681482","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a method for producing alkylphenyl esters of phosphoric acid whichcomprises the alkylation of phenol with an olefin followed by the additionof POCl.sub.3 in the presence of a Friedel-Crafts catalyst at an elevatedtemperature, the improvement which comprises contacting said esters withan effective amount of a stannous fatty acid salt consisting essentiallyof stannous octoate for a period of time sufficient to reduce color to thedesired level whereby said esters are decolorized and stabilized againstsubsequent color formation.2. The method of claim 1 wherein said alkylphenyl esters correspond to theformula:##EQU2##wherein R is alkaryl and R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are selected from the groupconsisting of alkyl, aralkyl, alkaryl and aryl, and wherein the alkylgroups contain from 1 to about 20 carbon atoms.3. The method of claim 2 wherein said alkyl groups contain from 1 to about12 carbon atoms.4. The method of claim 1 wherein the alkylphenyl esters contain unreactedphenols.5. The method of claim 1 wherein said alkylphenyl esters of phosphoric acidare isopropylphenyl phenyl phosphates.6. The method of claim 1 wherein said decolorizing and stabilizing isconducted under an inert atmosphere.7. The method of claim 6 wherein said inert atmosphere comprises nitrogen.8. The method of claim 1 wherein said stannous fatty acid salt is employedneat or in an aqueous solution."}
{"WKU":"039313689","Title":"Fuel flow proportioning valve","App_Date":"1974-02-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Thomas D. Barker;Steve R. Mueller;Clifford A. Nickel;Thomas A. Sweder","Assignee":"Ford Motor Company","ICL_Class":"F02M  906","References":"1258153;2052225;2462217;2720151;2759468;2998828;3350073;3426799;3752451;3778038;3794302","Claims":"We claim:1. A carburetor having an air/fuel mixture passage defined in part by avariable area venturi having a movable wall to vary the area, a source offuel under pressure, a fuel supply port connected to the source, a fuelconduit having a portion extending across the venturi adjacent the throatsection thereof for cooperation with the movable wall and having a numberof axially spaced fuel discharge ports uncovered progressively uponmovement of the wall to enlarge the venturi, and a fuel flow spool typemetering valve operably associated with the supply port and movable withthe wall and constructed to meter fuel flow to the conduit as a functionof the position of the valve and the wall, the construction including ahollow valve body sleeve having a circular segment removed to define aflat fuel inlet slot of predetermined axial and lateral extentcommunicating with the supply port, the valve being slidably movablewithin the sleeve and having a central land straddled by the inlet slot,the sleeve having a pair of fuel outlet ports one on each side of andspaced from the slot whereby fuel flow from the supply port through theslot is split by the land in direct proportion to the position of the landfrom a central null position to flow fuel in the proportioned amounts toeach outlet, and means connecting one outlet to the source, and the otheroutlet to the fuel conduit, the supply port being maintained filled withfuel at all times to fill the inlet port to provide a predeterminedschedule of fuel flow volume to opposite sides of the land as a functionof the shape of the inlet port as it is traversed by the land."}
{"WKU":"039313697","Title":"Carburetor idle system fuel atomizer","App_Date":"1974-05-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Dennis L. E. Dale;Anthony S. D. Dedman;John G. Donnelly;Frank T. Newbury","Assignee":"Ford Motor Company","ICL_Class":"F02M  308","References":"3143401;3252539;3437320;3544083;3814389","Claims":"We claim:1. A carburetor idle speed fuel atomizer comprising, in combination, anengine carburetor having an induction passage open to atmospheric pressureat one end and adapted to be connected to an engine intake manifold at theopposite end so as to be subject to engine vacuum varying in level fromambient atmospheric pressure at engine shutdown to a maximumsubatmospheric pressure level during engine deceleration operatingconditions, a throttle valve rotatably mounted across said passage andmovable from an engine idle speed position essentially closing theinduction passage to a wide open throttle position, and return, forcontrolling flow through the passage, the carburetor including an idlespeed air and fuel supply system including a fuel/air mixture passagecontaining fuel and air connected to the induction passage around thethrottle valve and having a discharge end connected to the inductionpassage below the closed throttle position so as to provide an idleair/fuel mixture during engine running operation even though the throttlevalve is in a closed position, the fuel/air mixture passage having idletransfer ports connecting the latter passage to the induction passageadjacent the edge of the throttle valve when in an idle speed position forthe subjection of the fuel/air mixture passage to the pressure of theinduction passage above and below the throttle valve, the idle speedsystem including a mixing chamber connected at one end to the dischargeend of the fuel/air mixture passage and at its other end to the inductionpassage, the idle speed system also including an additional air passageconnected at one end to the induction passage above the throttle valve andconnected at its other end to the mixing chamber to dilute the idle speedfuel/air mixture to the desired fuel/air ratio for idling purposes, theatomizer comprising an elongated tube projecting into the inductionpassage and having a nozzle in the other end of the mixing chamber andhaving an air/fuel flow opening of a size in proportion to the level ofmanifold vacuum acting thereon to provide sonic velocity to the flowtherethrough to atomize the fuel particles in the flow, the additional airpassage having a flow restriction therein sufficient to create a pressuredepression in the idle speed mixing chamber upon operation of the engineto effect induction of the air and fuel into the mixing chamber from theidle speed fuel/air mixture passage, the nozzle cross-sectional area beingsmaller than that of the flow restriction to provide the pressuredifferential across the nozzle sufficient to provide the sonic flow.2. An atomizer as in claim 1, including an adjustable needle valve betweenthe end of the fuel/air mixture passage and mixture chamber to variablycontrol the flow area for the flow of fuel/air mixture to the chamber."}
{"WKU":"039313700","Title":"Double funnel with baffle cascade aeration unit","App_Date":"1975-01-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Declan S. Murphy","Assignee":"Atara Corporation","ICL_Class":"C02C  106;C02B  308;B01D 4702","References":"2289953;2353195;3452966;3722679;3817500","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property orprivilege is claimed are defined as follows:1. An assembly adapted to aerate sewage comprising:oxygen-containing gas supply means having two delivery orifices to form twostreams of gas;two first funnels converging downstream and secured downstream from andcooperating with said orifices so that oxygen-containing gas issuing fromthe orifice can entrain liquid and become mixed therewith;two second funnels converging downstream and spaced downstream from thefirst funnels;baffle means in the flow path between the exit from the first funnels andthe entry to the second funnels; andmeans securing the first funnels, the baffle means and the second funnelstogether so that the mixture of oxygen-containing gas and sewage streamingfrom the exit of the first funnels impinges on the baffle means beforeentering the second funnels.2. An assembly as claimed in claim 1 wherein the baffle means comprisesa skirt joining the two second funnels together.3. An assembly as claimed in claim 1 wherein said securing means comprisesa tube extending both upstream and downstream from said second funnels,said tube having cutouts both upstream and downstream of the inlet to thetwo second funnels, whereby the upstream openings allow access of unmixedliquid sewage to the inlet of the two second funnels, together with themixture issuing from the two first funnels, and the downstream openingsallow access of further unmixed sewage whereby the downstream extendingportion forms an exit tube in which further mixing occurs.4. An assembly as claimed in claim 3 wherein the tube has a minimumdiameter of at least 18 inches.5. An assembly as claimed in claim 2 wherein each of the two second funnelsare asymmetrically flared at the upstream end so as to blend into theskirts and form a circular section therewith."}
{"WKU":"039313719","Title":"Attemperator","App_Date":"1974-07-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Erich Maurer;Herbert Fangrat","Assignee":"Babcock & Wilcox Limited","ICL_Class":"F22g  512","References":"2523126;2642150;2990031;3121127;3177634;3219483;3318589;3559627;3646728;3732851","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property orprivilege is claimed are defined as follows:1. An attemperator comprising an upright vessel, a sleeve disposed withinthe vessel in spaced relation therewith, and respective inlet and outletmeans provided for said vessel and sleeve to accommodate the flow of vaportherethrough, said inlet means being subjacent to the outlet means, thesleeve including a perforated upper segment defining the outlet therefrom,a fixed cone-shaped deflector extending into at least a portion of theperforated segment and forming a closure over the top of said sleeve, anda lower segment of said vessel and sleeve being formed with a plurality ofspaced openings fitted with fixed nozzle means for upwardly injecting acooling fluid within the sleeve for mixing with the vapor to regulate thetemperature thereof.2. The attemperator according to claim 1 wherein the horizontalcross-sectional area of the upper segment is smaller than that of saidlower segment.3. The attemperator according to claim 2 wherein said upper and lowersegments are joined by a frusto-conical transition member.4. The attemperator according to claim 1 wherein the sleeve inlet meansincludes a frusto-conical member divergent in the direction of vapor flow.5. The attemperator according to claim 1 wherein said nozzle means areprovided with upwardly oriented discharge orifices disposed adjacent thesleeve inner periphery.6. The attemperator according to claim 1 wherein the vessel outlet issubjacent to said sleeve outlet.7. The attemperator according to claim 1 including plate means forming aplurality of axially spaced annular drip ledges fixedly connected to saiddeflector.8. The attemperator according to claim 1 including plate means forming atleast one drip ledge projecting outwardly from said deflector.9. The attemperator according to claim 8 wherein said ledge is of annularconfiguration and forms an upright skirt surrounding an intermediateportion of said deflector.10. The attemperator according to claim 9 wherein said ledge is formed withbevelled end faces."}
{"WKU":"039313727","Title":"Carburettors for internal combustion engines","App_Date":"1974-11-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Michel Eugene Pierlot","Assignee":"Societe Industrielle de Brevets et d Etudes S.I.B.E.","ICL_Class":"F02M  306","References":"2925256;3425672;3454264;3608874;3711069;3878271","Claims":"I claim:1. In a carburettor for an internal combustion engine having an intakeconduit and an operator operable throttle member in said conduit, anidling circuit comprising: an idling duct connected to a source of fueland to a source of atmospheric air via respective calibrated orifices andformed with an adjustable orifice located downstream of said calibratedorifices on the path of air and fuel; an air duct having an inletconnected to receive atmospheric air and formed with a first passagehaving means for adjusting its cross-section, both said ducts havingrespective outlets opening into a zone of said intake conduit which islocated downstream of the throttle member for the underpressure prevailingin that zone when the throttle member is in an idling position to draw arich mixture of fuel and air via the idling speed duct and dilution airvia the air duct, wherein the idling duct is connected to a second passageof the air duct whose section is adjustable by said adjusting meanssimultaneously with the first passage, said second passage being locatedupstream of the first passage in the direction of flow of air in said airduct.2. A carburettor as set forth in claim 1, wherein said adjusting means andpassages are constructed for the cross-section of said second passage tobe greater than the cross-section of the first passage whatever theposition of the adjusting means.3. A carburettor as set forth in claim 2, wherein the air duct has an inletconnected to a section of the carburettor air intake which is locateddownstream of an inlet air filter and upstream of said throttling member.4. A carburettor as set forth in claim 2, wherein the air duct has an inletconnected to the section of the intake conduit which is located downstreamof a venturi thereof and upstream of said throttling member.5. A carburettor as set forth in claim 2, wherein said first passage islimited by said adjusting means and by a shoulder in the wall of said airduct which limits an enlarged portion thereof.6. A carburettor as set forth in claim 5, wherein said idling duct opensinto said air duct through an orifice in the wall of the enlarged portionthereof which confronts an end portion of said adjusting means.7. A carburettor according to claim 6, wherein said adjusting meanscomprises a screw projecting by an adjustable extent into said enlargedportion toward said orifice.8. A carburettor according to claim 7, wherein said screw is provided witha braking spring."}
{"WKU":"039313735","Title":"Replication processes for producing plastic optical components","App_Date":"1974-04-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John O. Beattie","Assignee":"J. O. Beattie Research Company","ICL_Class":"B29D 1100","References":"3211811;3380718;3423488;3497577;3699089;3806079","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for producing a plastic optical element having a predeterminedsurface configuration comprising:a. forming a replica mold having a surface configuration negative to saidelement s predetermined surface configuration, said negative surfaceconfiguration being formed from a polymeric composition which has aflexural modulus above about 2 .times. 10.sup.5 psi so that the mold willresist distortion of the plastic optical element during cure thereof, saidpolymeric composition also being one which: (1) is releasable from amaster mold surface; (2) has balanced adhesion to said plastic opticalelement during cure thereof; (3) is resistant to solvent attack by saidplastic optical element during cure thereof; (4) is thermally stable atthe molding temperature for said plastic optical element; and (5) iscapable of forming an optical quality surface on the plastic opticalelement;b. molding said plastic optical element against said replica mold surfaceconfiguration; and,c. releasing said optical element after cure thereof from said replicamold.2. A process of claim 1 wherein said polymeric composition is releasablefrom a glass master mold surface.3. A process of claim 2 wherein said plastic optical element comprises anophthalmic lens.4. A process of claim 3 wherein said ophthalmic lens is formed frompolymerized allyl diglycol carbonate.5. A process of claim 4 wherein the molding of said plastic optical elementis conducted at a positive pressure of from about 50 to about 100 psi.6. A process of claim 5 wherein the molding of said plastic optical elementis conducted at a temperature of from about 40.degree.C. to about95.degree.C.7. A process of claim 6 wherein a flexible member is used to absorbpolymerization shrinkage during molding of said plastic replica mold.8. A process of claim 7 wherein said polymeric composition comprises amember selected from the group consisting of:a. polymethyl methacrylate cross-linked with a minor amount of across-linking agent;b. a copolymer formed from about 99 to about 20 parts of methylmethacrylate and from about 1 to about 80 parts of acrylonitrile, saidcopolymer being cross-linked with from 0 to a minor amount of across-linking agent;c. polystyrene cross-linked with a minor amount of a cross-linking agent;d. a copolymer formed from about 90 to 10 parts of styrene and from about10 to about 90 parts of acrylonitrile, said copolymer being cross-linkedwith a minor amount of a cross-linking agent; and,e. a copolymer formed from about 90 to about 10 parts of styrene and fromabout 10 to about 90 parts of methyl methacrylate, said copolymer beingcross-linked with a minor amount of a cross-linking agent.9. A process of claim 7 wherein said polymeric composition comprisespolystyrene cross-linked with from about 1 to about 20% of a cross-linkingagent.10. A process of claim 9 wherein said cross-linking agent comprises glycoldimethacrylate.11. A process of claim 7 wherein said polymeric composition is a copolymercomprising from about 65 parts to about 25 parts of methyl methacrylateand from about 35 parts to about 75 parts of acrylonitrile, said copolymerbeing cross-linked with from about 5% to about 30% of a cross-linkingagent.12. A process of claim 7 wherein said polymeric composition is a copolymercomprising about 30 parts of methyl methacrylate and about 70 parts ofacrylonitrile, said copolymer being cross-linked with from about 5 toabout 30% of glycol dimethacrylate.13. A process for forming a plurality of ophthalmic lenses having apredetermined surface configuration from polymerized allyl diglycolcarbonate comprising:a. forming a glass master mold having a surface configuration correspondingto said predetermined surface configuration;b. casting a copolymer comprising from about 65 to about 25 parts of methylmethacrylate and from about 35 to about 75 parts of acrylonitrile, saidcopolymer being cross-linked with from about 5% to about 30% of across-linking agent, against said master mold to form a replica moldhaving a surface configuration negative to that of said master mold;c. casting allyl diglycol carbonate against said replica mold at atemperature of from about 40.degree.C. to about 95.degree.C. and apressure of from about 50 to about 100 psi to form an ophthalmic lens;d. releasing said ophthalmic lens from said replica mold; and,e. repeating steps c and d.14. In a replication process for producing ophthalmic lenses wherein areplica mold is formed by casting a polymeric resin against a glass masterand subsequently casting an ophthalmic resin against said replica mold toproduce ophthalmic lenses:the improvement comprising selecting a polymeric resin which has a flexuralmodulus above about 2 .times. 10.sup.5 psi so that the mold will resistdistortion of the ophthalmic lens during cure thereof and which has acomposition of:"}
{"WKU":"039313743","Title":"Processes for the manufacture of fuel blocks containing a metallic","App_Date":"1970-10-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Helene Denise Moutet nee Layrisse;Maurice J. Pugibet;Jean-Jacques Scherchen","Assignee":"Office National d Etudes et de Recherches Aerospatiales (O.N.E.R.A.)","ICL_Class":"C06B 2100","References":"3203171;3257801;3420695;3455749;3463682;3466204;3513043","Claims":"We claim:1. In a method for the manufacture of a fuel block containing a powder ofat least one energizing light metal selected from the group consisting oflithium, beryllium, sodium, magnesium, potassium, boron, aluminum andsilicon, the steps of applying to the surface of each particle of saidmetallic powder a discontinuous coating comprised of discrete particles ofa polyfluoroethylene compound, preparing a liquified mixture containingsaid coated metallic powder particles and an organic fuel compound whichis normally solid at ambient temperature, and forming a dried fuel blockfrom said mixture, said coated metallic powder particles comprising from20 to 40% of the total weight of said dried fuel block.2. The method of claim 1 in which said coated metallic powder comprisesabout 30% of the total weight of said dried fuel block.3. Method according to claim 1, wherein the energising light metal powderpreviously coated with the coating substance is incorporated in theorganic fuel compound at a temperature at which said compound isliquefied.4. Method according to claim 1, wherein the organic fuel compound is anamine compound.5. Method according to claim 4, wherein said amine compound is metatoluenediamine associated with a plasticised polyamide."}
{"WKU":"039313751","Title":"Production of metal powder","App_Date":"1974-04-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Joseph T. Blucher;Donald D. Dalrymple","Assignee":"Industrial Materials Technology, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B22D 2308","References":"2897539;3021562;3041672","Claims":"We claim:1. A method of producing metal particles in powder form from a metal wirewhich comprises the steps ofa. creating a first direct current electromagnetic field in the region of arotatable disc and having lines of force substantially parallel to theaxis of rotation of said disc;b. feeding a consumable metal wire through said first magnetic field andinto contact with said disc in a direction substantially perpendicular tosaid lines of force of said first magnetic field;c. applying a direct electrical potential between said wire and said discto cause direct current flow through said wire and said disc, said currentbeing of a magnitude sufficient to melt the end of said wire when incontact with said disc and said current causing a second magnetic field tobe formed about said wire having lines of force substantiallyperpendicular to the lines of force of said electromagnetic field;d. rotating said disc to break electrical contact between said wire andsaid disc and to cause the formation of an electrical arc between the endof said wire and said disc whereby additional portions of the end of saidwire are melted;e. continuously feeding the end of said wire against said rotating disc toreestablish contact between the end of said wire and said disc whereby acycle of continuously making and breaking the electrical contact betweensaid wire and said disc is established;f. removing molten metal droplets, formed from the area of contact of saidwire and said disc, by the interaction of the lines of force of saidelectromagnetic field and the lines of force of said second magneticfield; andg. cooling to solidification the molten metal removed fromsaid area ofcontact and collecting same in particle form.2. A method of producing metal particles in powder form from a metal wireaccording to claim 1 wherein the process is carried out in a vacuum.3. A method of producing metal particles in powder form from a metal wireaccording to claim 1, which also comprises providing an electromagnet forcreating said first direct current electromagnetic field and removingsolid metal particles magnetically attracted to said electromagnet."}
{"WKU":"039313760","Title":"Method for rolling out a bar-shaped pre-molding of ceramic material to","App_Date":"1971-05-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jochen Hartmann","Assignee":"Fetok GmbH","ICL_Class":"B28B  312","References":"3705112","Claims":"I claim:1. A method for rolling out bar-shaped premolding of ceramic material toform a thin plate, comprising passing the premolding through the nip of apair of rolls, of which the upper roll is smooth and the lower roll isrough, allowing the ceramic material to adhere to the upper roll andtravel round with it for at least one revolution and then detaching theceramic material from the upper roll by applying an electric field to therolls so that the upper roll becomes negative in relation to the lowerroll, said electric field being of sufficient intensity to detach saidmaterial from said upper roll and said ceramic material being a ceramicmaterial capable of being detached fromm said smooth roll by theapplication of said electric field."}
{"WKU":"039313778","Title":"Carbon black pelletizing method and apparatus","App_Date":"1973-09-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert E. Dollinger","Assignee":"Phillips Petroleum Company","ICL_Class":"B01J  212","References":"3186928;3555133;3579717","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for the production of carbon black pellets while controllingthe cake buildup comprisinga. introducing carbon black and a pelleting liquid into a pelletizer havingan inner surface maintained at a temperature above about 212.degree. F.;b. moving a series of mixing elements through the carbon black and thepelleting liquid thus forming a mixture;c. jetting a plurality of fluid streams through said mixing elementsagainst said inner surface of said pelletizer for periods and in an amountsufficient to prevent carbon black cake buildup and hardening on saidinner surface;d. forming carbon black pellets from said mixture during said mixing step;ande. recovering the carbon black pellets from said pelletizer.2. A process in accordance with claim 1 wherein said fluid streams areexpelled toward said inner surface at velocities greater than about 3/4 ofthe acoustic velocity of said fluids.3. A process in accordance with claim 1 wherein said fluid streams are wetsteam.4. A process in accordance with claim 1 wherein said mixing elements aremoved by a motor, the power of said motor is sensed by a power-sensingelement delivering a signal and the introduction of the pelleting liquidinto said pelletizer is controlled by said signal.5. A process in accordance with claim 1 wherein said fluid streams areintroduced intermittently against said inner surface of said pelletizer.6. A process in accordance with claim 1 wherein the temperature of saidfluid streams is controlled responsive to the temperature of the innersurface of said pelletizer."}
{"WKU":"039313786","Title":"Foam bead bottom plastic cup and method of making same","App_Date":"1974-06-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Clifford Clayton Goehring","Assignee":"American Can Company","ICL_Class":"B29D 2700","References":"3069725;3315018;3344222;3673033;3792137","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method for producing a disposable molded, lapped seam, fused foamplastic cup having leakproof seals between the bottom wall and sidewalland along the sidewall seam and wherein the side seam and the sidewall areof identical thickness comprising the steps of:a. providing an extruded, foamed plastic sheet material;b. compressing said sheet material to a thickness less than that of thefinal sidewall;c. forming a blank from said compressed sheet of suitable size and shape toform the sidewall of said cup;d. providing mold means comprising female and male mold members;e. providing pre-expanded foam beads in sufficient quantity to form thebottom wall of said cup;f. positioning said sidewall blank in said mold means;g. introducing said pre-expanded foam beads in the bottom of said femalemold member;h. joining said mold members sufficiently to space them an amount greaterthan the thickness of said compressed sidewall blank and equal to thethickness of the final sidewall of said cup andi. molding and fusing said sidewall blank and foam beads in the presence ofsteam to expand said compressed sheet into the space between said moldmembers and to simultaneously compress, form and fuse a bottom wall fromsaid foam beads to said sidewall.2. The method of claim 1 wherein said mold members are preheated withsteam.3. The method of claim 1 wherein said foam beads comprise polystyrene.4. The method of claim 1 wherein sufficient pre-expanded beads are employedto provide a bottom wall that is twice as thick as the sidewall.5. The method of claim 1 wherein the thickness of said sheet material isabout 35 to 40 mils as extruded, about 23 to 26 mils as compressed andabout 30 mils after molding.6. A method for producing a disposable molded, lapped seam, fused foamplastic cup having leakproof seals between the bottom wall and sidewalland along the sidewall seam and wherein the side seam and the sidewall areof identical thickness comprising the steps of:a. providing an extruded, foamed plastic sheet material;b. compressing said sheet material to a thickness less than that of thefinal sidewall;c. forming a blank from said compressed sheet of suitable size and shape toform the sidewall of said cup;d. providing mold means comprising female and male mold members;e. providing pre-expanded foam beads in sufficient quantity to form thebottom wall of said cup;f. positioning said sidewall blank in said mold means;g. joining said mold members sufficiently to space them an amount greaterthan the thickness of said compressed sidewall blank and equal to thethickness of the final sidewall of said cup;h. injecting preexpanded foam beads into the bottom of the closed mold andi. molding and fusing said sidewall blank and foam beads in the presence ofsteam to expand said compressed sheet into the space between said moldmembers and to simultaneously expand, form and fuse a bottom wall fromsaid foam beads to said sidewall."}
{"WKU":"039313794","Title":"Foamed profile extrusion process","App_Date":"1973-07-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Bob Joe Cruson;Ronald D. Medley","Assignee":"Cosden Oil & Chemical Company","ICL_Class":"B29D 2700;B29F  306","References":"2941964;2941965;3344092;3431163;3431164;3461496;3764642","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for the manufacture of profiled products having a specificgravity of from about 0.3 to 0.6 by the steps of extruding an expandablestyrene polymer composition in substantially unexpanded condition througha die orifice having the desired profile and subsequently passing theresinous material through a sizing member having the desired profile andcross-section whereupon the resinous material fully expands within theconfines of said sizing member to produce the desired product having anon-foamed outer layer of styrene polymer and a foamed interiorcross-section and wherein the expandable styrene polymer composition isone consisting essentially of from about 0.2 to 1.0 parts by weight of analkaline earth metal carbonate and from about 0.2 to 1.0 parts by weightof citric acid as a blowing agent per 100 parts by weight of styrenepolymer.2. The process of claim 1 wherein said alkaline earth metal carbonate isselected from the group consisting of calcium carbonate and magnesiumcarbonate.3. The process of claim 1 wherein said styrene polymer is homopolystyrene.4. The process of claim 1 wherein said styrene polymer is impactpolystyrene."}
{"WKU":"039313808","Title":"Method of making nestable foamed plastic cups","App_Date":"1973-12-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ilie Mila Belivakici;Clifford Clayton Goehring;James Alan Wachtel;William Joseph Lahm;Carl Richard Storms","Assignee":"American Can Company","ICL_Class":"B29D 2700","References":"3311681;3454208;3658615;3666162;3673033","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method of making from foamed plastic sheet material a molded, lappedseam, fused cup having wall portions thinner than the initial sheetmaterial, leakproof seals between the bottom and sidewalls and wherein theseam and the sidewall are of identical thickness comprising the steps of:1. providing an extruded, foamed plastic sheet material having a density ofabout 16 to 17 lbs./ft..sup.3 and a substantial skin on its outer surfaceonly, a density gradient wherein the cell size of said sheet increasesinwardly from said outer surface and a thickness greater than the finalsidewall thickness;2. comprising said extruded sheet to a thickness less than that of thefinal sidewall thereby decreasing the cell size variation;3. forming a blank from said compressed sheet of suitable shape and size toform the sidewall of said cup;4. providing mold means comprising female and male mold members;5. positioning said sidewall blank in said female mold member;6. positioning a blank of suitable shape and size to form the bottom wallof said cup on said male mold member;7. joining said mold members sufficiently to form a mold cavity wherein themold members are spaced an amount greater than the thickness of saidcompressed sidewall blank and equal to the thickness of the final sidewallof said cup; and8. fusing said sidewall and bottom wall blanks thus positioned in said moldcavity in the presence of steam to expand said compressed sheet into thespace between said mold members to form a cup having a sidewall increasedin thickness and decreased in cell size variation from that of thecompressed sheet.2. The method of claim 1 wherein said plastic foam sheet material having asubstantial skin on its outer surface and density gradient provided instep (1) is obtained by extruding foam plastic through an orifice andimpinging cooling air on the outer surface of said sheet as it isextruded.3. The method of claim 1 wherein the thickness of said sheet material isabout 35 to 40 mils as extruded, about 23 to 26 mils as compressed andabout 30 mils after molding.4. The method of claim 1 wherein the plastic is polystyrene."}
{"WKU":"039313816","Title":"Mold release method for polyurethane integral-skin foam","App_Date":"1974-09-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Charles D. Lindberg","Assignee":"The General Tire & Rubber Company","ICL_Class":"B29C  104;B29D 2700","References":"2902376;3046177;3101244;3165567;3210448;3341646;3413390;3492394;3523918","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method of preparing a mold to release flexible polyurethane integralskin foam comprising:a. applying a continuous coating of a fused polytetrafluoroethylene polymerto the mold surfaces;b. applying a thin film of a liquid mixture comprising (by weight) from 1to 10 parts of a hydrocarbon wax having a melting point of from about200.degree. to 220.degree.F., an acid number of about zero, and asaponification number of about zero, from 7 to 26 parts of sodiumdi(2-ethylhexyl) sulfosuccinate, and from 330 to 300 parts of a solventfor said wax and said sodium di(2-ethylhexyl) sulfosuccinate over saidcoating; and,c. drying said film prior to injecting the mixture of foam reactants intothe said mold.2. The method of claim 1 wherein said melting point of said wax is210.degree.F.3. A method of molding flexible polyurethane integral-skin foam, free ofsurface pinholes and ruptures, comprising:a. applying a continuous coating of a fused polytetrafluoroethylene polymerto the mold surfaces;b. applying a thin film of a liquid mixture comprising (by weight) from 1to 10 parts of a hydrocarbon wax having a melting point of from about200.degree. to 220.degree.F., an acid number of about zero, and asaponification number of about zero, from 7 to 26 parts of sodiumdi(2-ethylhexyl) sulfosuccinate, and from 330 to 300 parts of a solventfor said wax and said sodium di(2-ethylhexyl) sulfosuccinate over saidcoating;c. drying said film,d. injecting a mixture of flexible polyurethane foam reactants into saidmold containing said dried film to react and produce an integral skinfoam;e. curing said integral-skin foam in said mold;f. removing said cured integral-skin foam from said mold; and,g. washing said foam with water to remove traces of said mixture."}
{"WKU":"039313824","Title":"Method for rapid isostatic pressing","App_Date":"1975-01-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Donald E. Witkin","Assignee":"National Forge Company","ICL_Class":"B29F  304","References":"3551946;3599281;3741755","Claims":"I claim:1. The process of isostatically pressing an article at a temperature aboveits bonding temperature comprising:a. inserting said article in a dry isostatic pressing vessel;b. substantially filling said vessel with a liquid without said liquidcontacting said article; andc. filling the remainder of said vessel and raising the pressure of saidliquid to a pressure above the critical pressure of said liquid to compactsaid article before said article cools to a temperature below its bondingtemperature.2. The process of claim 1 wherein approximately nine tenths of said vesselis filled before said liquid contacts said article.3. The process of claim 1 wherein said vessel is rotating while beingfilled.4. The process of claim 1 wherein the liquid stream filling said vessel issubstantially tangentially directed with respect to the adjacent vesselwall.5. The process of claim 1 which further comprises the step of interposingan annular ring between said article and the walls of said vessel wherebysaid liquid does not contact said article until the annulus between saidring and the wall of said vessel is filled.6. The process of claim 5 which further includes the step of interposing asecond annular ring between said article and said first annular ringwherein the temperature of said second annular ring is greater than thetemperature of said article.7. Method of compacting a porous body by isostatic pressing techniquescomprisingheating the body to a selected temperature, said temperature beingsufficiently high for adequate bonding and compacting of said heated bodybut below the fusion temperature thereof,inserting said heated body into a dry pressure vessel,closing and sealing the pressure vessel,rapidly pumping a liquid pressurizing medium into said pressure vessel tofill the same while avoiding direct contact of said medium with saidheated body until said pressure vessel is substantially completely filledwith said medium,rapidly increasing the pressure within the vessel to a preselected levelsufficient to compact said body by continuing to pump said pressurizingmedium into the vessel until said preselected pressure has been reached,said preselected pressure being greater than the critical pressure of saidmedium,the rate of pressure increase in said last mentioned step being adequate toprevent the formation of vapor in said vessel as a result of contact ofsaid medium with said body sufficient to lower substantially thetemperature of said heated body prior to compaction of said body,decreasing the pressure and withdrawing said medium from said pressurevessel, andremoving the body from the pressure vessel.8. The method of claim 7 in which the pressure vessel is cold.9. The method of claim 7 in which additional heat is supplied to said bodyfollowing insertion thereof into said pressure vessel.10. The method of claim 7 in which said liquid pressurizing medium iswater.11. The method of claim 10 in which the porous body is a metal powder, theselected compacting temperature is about 2,200.degree.F. and thepreselected pressure is about 29,000 psi.12. The method of claim 11 in which the metal powder is an iron basepowder.13. The method of claim 11 in which the metal powder is a nickel basepowder.14. The method of claim 7 in which said body is separated from the internalsurfaces of said pressure vessel by being inserted in a shieldingcontainer and in which a space is provided between said shieldingcontainer and said internal surfaces, said liquid pressurizing mediumbeing pumped into said space to fill the same thereby to avoid directcontact between said medium and said heated body until said pressurevessel is substantially completely filled with said medium.15. Method of compacting a porous body by isostatic pressing techniquescomprisingheating the body to a selected temperature, said temperature beingsufficiently high for adequate bonding and compacting of said heated bodybut below the fusion temperature thereof,inserting said heated body into a dry pressure vessel,closing and sealing the pressure vessel,rapidly pumping a liquid pressurizing medium into said pressure vessel tofill the same while avoiding direct contact of said medium with saidheated body until said pressure vessel is substantially completely filledwith said medium,said body being separated from the internal surfaces of said pressurevessel by a space and said liquid pressurizing medium being pumped at highvelocity into said space tangentially to said internal surfaces of saidvessel to form a liquid vortex within said space while filling the same,rapidly increasing the pressure within the vessel to a preselected levelsufficient to compact said body by continuing to pump said pressuringmedium into the vessel until said preselected pressure has been reached,said preselected pressure being greater than the critical pressure of saidmedium,decreasing the pressure and withdrawing said medium from said pressurevessel, andremoving the body from the pressure vessel.16. Method of compacting a porous body by isostatic pressing techniquescomprisingheating the body to a selected temperature, said temperature beingsufficiently high for adequate bonding and compacting of said heated bodybut below the fusion temperature thereof,inserting said heated body into a dry pressure vessel,closing and sealing the pressure vessel,rapidly pumping a liquid pressurizing medium into said pressure vessel tofill the same while avoiding direct contact of said medium with saidheated body until said pressure vessel is substantially completely filledwith said medium,said body being separated from the internal surfaces of said pressurevessel by a space and said vessel being provided with an inlet arrangedtangentially to the internal surfaces of said pressure vessel said liquidpressurizing medium being pumped into said space through said inlet athigh velocity to form a liquid vortex within said space while filling saidspace,rapidly increasing the pressure within the vessel to a preselected levelsufficient to compact said body by continuing to pump said pressurizingmedium into the vessel until said preselected pressure has been reached,said preselected pressure being greater than the critical pressure of saidmedium,decreasing the pressure and withdrawing said medium from said pressurevessel, andremoving the body from the pressure vessel.17. Method of compacting a porous body by isostatic pressing techniquescomprisingheating the body to a selected temperature, said temperature beingsufficiently high for adequate bonding and compacting of said heated bodybut below the fusion temperature thereof,inserting said heated body into a dry pressure vessel,closing and sealing the pressure vessel,rapidly pumping a liquid pressurizing medium into said pressure vessel tofill the same while avoiding direct contact of said medium with saidheated body until said pressure vessel is substantially completely filledwith said medium,said body being separated from the internal surfaces of said pressurevessel by a space, said liquid pressurizing medium being pumped into saidspace to fill the same, and said pressure vessel being rapidly rotatedduring the filling of said space to cause centrifugal forces to be exertedon said medium during said filling,rapidly increasing the pressure within the vessel to a preselected levelsufficient to compact said body by continuing to pump said pressurizingmedium into the vessel until said preselected pressure has been reached,said preselected pressure being greater than the critical pressure of saidmedium,decreasing the pressure and withdrawing said medium from said pressurevessel, andremoving the body from the pressure vessel."}
{"WKU":"039313832","Title":"Method for continuously forming plastic sheet with vacuum pressure","App_Date":"1974-05-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard H. Erlewine;Charles W. Richter, III;Arthur J. Calpha, Jr.","Assignee":"General Plastics Corporation","ICL_Class":"B29C 1704","References":"3024496;3178494;3342914;3471600","Claims":"The invention claimed is:1. A method of forming grooves in a sheet of plastic comprising the stepsof:providing a heated plastic sheet in a formable state with said sheetincluding longitudinally extending edges;forcing said sheet while in a heated condition onto a support having lengthwith a smooth inclined forward portion and with grooves extendingrearwardly therefrom in the direction of said length;contacting continuously said forward portion across the width of said sheetto effect an airtight seal therebetween;contacting said longitudinally extending edges of said sheet against saidsupport to effect an airtight seal therebetween;moving said sheet across said support in the direction of said length whilekeeping said support stationary and while maintaining an airtight sealbetween said sheet and said forward portion of said support and betweensaid edges of said sheet and said support;maintaining said forward portion of said support in a heated condition tomaintain said sheet in a soft condition and allow for effecting said airtight seal;withdrawing during said moving step air from said grooves of said supportcreating a vacuum pressure between said sheet and said support and forcingsaid sheet into said grooves of said support to form grooves in saidsheet; and,allowing said sheet having grooves therein to cool and set.2. The method of claim 1 and comprising the additional steps of:cooling a second portion of said support adjacent said forward portion;forcing said sheet against said second portion to maintain an airtight sealbetween said sheet and said support and to effect cooling of said sheet.3. The method of claim 2 and comprising the additional step of:contacting said sheet subsequent to said providing step but to said movingstep with a heated element imparting a skin to said sheet whilemaintaining said sheet in a formable state; and wherein:said support has a top surface.4. The method of claim 3 and comprising the additional step of:forcing said sheet lower in elevation than said top surface of said supportafter said skin is imparted to said sheet."}
{"WKU":"039313840","Title":"Method of making end frames for upholstered furniture","App_Date":"1972-10-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Larry J. Forquer;Robert P. Habgood, Jr.;John M. Rembold","Assignee":"Plexowood, Inc.","ICL_Class":"B29J  500","References":"3354248;3373233;3439081","Claims":"We claim:1. The method of pressure molding a pair of right and left hand end frameseach having a planar portion and a portion diverging from the planarportion comprising (a) filling with a mixture of wood flakes and resin thecavity of a pressure mold comprehending the planar portion of each saidend frame and filling with the same mixture the cavity of an attachedpressure mold portion comprehending the diverging portion, said pressuremolds being sufficiently deep to accommodate the uncompressed mixture ofwood flakes and resin required to form said end frame pre-forms, (b)compressing the mixture to produce a self-sustaining preform having theshape of the mold and its attached portion, removing the compressedpre-form from the mold, (c) detaching the mold portion comprehending thediverging portion and substituting therefore a mold portion comprehendingthe portion diverging in the opposite direction, (d) filling the cavity ofthe mold and its attached portion with a mixture of wood flakes and resinand compressing the mixture to produce a self-sustaining pre-form which isthe mirror image of the pre-form first produced, (e) transferring eachpre-form to a curing mold shaped to receive and support each pre-formincluding its diverging portion and (f) heating and pressing each pre-formto a density greater than that of the wood from which the flakes arederived so as to bond the wood flakes together with the resin in both theplanar and diverging portions of each pre-form to form fully bonded endframes."}
{"WKU":"039313859","Title":"Method for the production of composite containers","App_Date":"1974-02-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Brian Leo Chudleigh Sutch","Assignee":"Airfix Industries Limited","ICL_Class":"B29D  300;B65D  320","References":"3154617;3476852;3511902","Claims":"I claim:1. The method of making an article having a first wall including an arcuateedge portion and a second wall folded relative to the first wall from thearcuate edge portion of said first wall comprising forming a flat blankhaving first and second panels conforming to the respective first andsecond walls with the arc of the arcuate edge portion of said first panelintersecting the adjacent edge of said second panel at two spacedpositions, forming a slit in the blank between said spaced positions todefine a pair of hinge parts at the ends of the slit adjacent the pointsof intersection of said panels and also to define a cut-away in at leastone of the panels when the panels are folded relative to one another aboutsaid hinge parts to the relative panel positions required by the shape ofthe article, folding said panels to said relative positions, confining theso folded panels between two mould tools which define a blank cavity forreceiving the panels in their relative folded positions and also define amould cavity in the region of the cut-away and in the region of edges ofthe panels juxtaposed by virtue of folding said panels to their relativepositions, and injecting material into the mould cavity to complete thatpanel having the cut-away formed by said slit and to connect saidjuxtaposed edges.2. The method of claim 1 wherein said hinge parts are formed so that theyfold along lines substantially tangent to the arcuate edge portion of thefirst panel.3. The method of claim 1 wherein the slit is formed so as to intersect ateach end the arc of the arcuate edge portion of the first panel with therespective hinge parts extending from said points of intersection of thepanels to the point where the ends of the slit intersect the arc of thefirst panel.4. The method of claim 1 wherein the intersecting edge of the second panelis defined by the arc of a circle having a greater radius than that of thearcuate edge portion of the first panel.5. A method according to claim 4 in which the slit is at a radial distancefrom the centre of the circle of the first panel no greater than theradius of that circle and at a distance from the centre of the circle ofthe second panel at least as great as the radius of that circle, foldingof the panel at the hinge parts being effected substantially on theperiphery of the wall defined by the panel which is cut-away.6. A method according to claim 4 in which the slit is linear.7. A method according to claim 4 in which the slit is arcuate.8. A method according to claim 7 in which at least the mid-part of the slitlies on the circle of the second panel.9. A method according to claim 8 in which material is injected into thecavity through a pin gate in a cavity tool.10. A method according to claim 9 in which the panel defining the cut-awayaccommodates a pin gate standing proud of the base of the cavity tool.11. A method according to claim 10 in which a plurality of side walls areto be provided upstanding from the surface of an end wall, each side wallbeing integral with the end wall, a slit being made between each side wallpanel and the end wall panel, the end wall including at least one recessadjacent the location of the ends of a pair of juxtaposed side edges ofadjacent side panels when the blank is folded to accommodate a pin gate."}
{"WKU":"039313867","Title":"Process for producing drawn or undrawn flame-resistant, anti-fusing","App_Date":"1972-10-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Isao Kimura;Hiroaki Koyama","Assignee":"Nippon Kynol Incorporated","ICL_Class":"B29C 2500","References":"2142007;2168335;2376511;2378667;2683130;3363025;3651199;3716521;3723588;3808289","Claims":"What we claim:1. A process for producing a drawn or undrawn flame-resistant andanti-fusing cured phenolic continuous filament which comprisesmelt-spinning an uncured novolak resin which may contain up to 40% byweight based on the total weight of a fiber-foaming thermoplasticsynthetic resin selected from the group consisting of nylon resin andpolyurethane resin and then curing the melt-spun filament with a curingagent in the presence of a catalyst; said novolak resin produced by thereaction of a phenol selected from the group consisting of phenol,o-cresol, m-cresol, p-cresol, 2,3-xylenol, 2,5-xylenol, 2,4-xylenol,2,6-xylenol, 3,4-xylenol 3,5-xylenol o-ethylphenol, m-ethylphenol,p-ethylphenol, p-phenylphenol, p-tertiary butyl phenol, p-tertiaryamylphenol, bisphenol A, resorcinol and mixtures thereof and an aldehydeselected from the group consisting of formaldehyde, paraformaldehyde,benzaldehyde hexamethylenetetramine, furfural and mixtures thereof;characterized by pre-curing the melt-spun filament with an aldehyde as acuring agent in the presence of an acid catalyst in a single pre-curingbath, and then curing the pre-cured filament with an aldehyde in thepresence of a basic catalyst.2. The process according to claim 1, wherein the pre-curing is carried outat a temperature ranging from about 15.degree.to about 105.degree.C withthe concentration each of the aldehyde and the acid catalyst being kept at6.0 to 40% by weight.3. The process according to claim 1, wherein the curing is carried out at atemperature ranging from about 40.degree. to about 105.degree.C with theconcentration of the aldehyde being kept at 1 to 60% by weight and that ofthe basic catalyst, at 0.2 to 20% by weight.4. The process according to claim 1, wherein the acid catalyst is selectedfrom the group consisting of hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, nitricacid, acetic acid, oxalic acid, formic acid, orthophosphoric acid, butyricacid, lactic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, p-toluensulfonic acid, boric acidand mixtures thereof.5. The process according to claim 1, wherein the basic catalyst is selectedfrom the group consisting of ammonia, ammonium hydroxide, amines,hydroxides of alkali metals, hydroxides of alkaline earth metals,carbonates of alkali metals, carbonates of alkaline earth metals andmixtures thereof.6. The process according to claim 1, wherein the curing agent is selectedfrom the group consisting of formaldehyde, paraformaldehyde, benzaldehyde,hexamethylenetetramine, furfural and mixtures thereof.7. The process according to claim 1, wherein the melt-spun filament isdrawn before and/or after curing and the draw ratio is up to 2.5 based onthe length of the undrawn filament.8. The process of claim 1 wherein the precuring is carried out for about0.5 - 5 hours and the concentration each of the aldehyde and the acidcatalyst is kept at 15 -25% by weight.9. The process of claim 1 wherein the curing of the precured filament iscarried out by first placing the precured filament in a bath containingthe aldehyde and basic catalyst at a temperature of about 15.degree. to40.degree.C. after which the temperature is gradually raised from about40.degree. to about 105.degree.C. at a rate of less than 50.degree.C./hr.with the concentration of the aldehyde being kept at 1 - 60% by weight andthat of the basic catalyst of 0.2 - 20% by weight.10. The process of claim 3 wherein the curing of the precured filament iscarried out for 15 - 90 minutes.11. The process of claim 1 wherein the curing treatment of the precuredfilament is carried out in an aqueous solution of formaldehyde and ammoniaat 60.degree.- 80.degree.C. for 30 - 60 minutes, the concentration of theammonia in the aqueous solution being within the range of 0.2 - 20% byweight and the concentration of the formaldehyde in the aqueous solutionbeing in the range of from 1 - 60% by weight.12. The process of claim 11 wherein the concentration of the ammonia isfrom 1 - 10% by weight and the concentration of the formaldehyde is fromabout 12 - 45% by weight.13. The process of claim 1 wherein said nylon resin is selected from thegroup consisting of polycaproamide, poly-.omega.-aminoheptanoic acid,poly-.omega.-aminononanoic acid, polyundecaneamide, polydodecaneamide,polyhexamethylene adipamide, polyhexamethylene sebacamide,polyhexamethylene undecaneamide, polyhexamethylene dodecaneamide andcopolyamides thereof."}
{"WKU":"039313875","Title":"Catalyst system for injection molding polyurethanes","App_Date":"1973-04-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Fritz Hostettler","Assignee":"Inter-Polymer Research Corporation","ICL_Class":"C08G 1824;B29G  300","References":"2969960;3188296;3201358;3215652;3372130;3392153;3397158;3398106;3438908;3476933;3520835;3767602;3769244;3772221;3814707;3822223;3822223","Claims":"I claim:1. A process for preparing polyurethane elastomers which comprisescombining:a. at least one polyether diol, polyester diol or mixture thereof, at leastone organic bifunctional extender selected to be a diamine, aminoalcoholor glycol having a rate of reactivity greater than the alkylene glycolsand the hindered amines, and a catalytically effective amount of acatalyst system comprising per 100 parts of polymerization mixture,"}
{"WKU":"039313883","Title":"Crystal resonator housing configurations","App_Date":"1974-05-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Erich Hafner;John R. Vig","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Army","ICL_Class":"H01L 4104","References":"1875324;2341683;2409838;3047749;3069572;3173035;3828210;3832761","Claims":"We claim:1. A force responsive resonator assembly of the type capable ofmechanically vibrating or flexing at a predetermined rate, comprising:a. a crystal having parallel upper and lower surfaces and a squared outeredge;b. a frame assembly having a central aperture, said frame assemblyfabricated from an insulator material and including first and secondlayers of metallic conducting material embedded in the wall of saidassembly, said first and second layers aligned in a common plane andlocated on opposite sides of said aperture;c. first and second support members mounted on said frame located withinsaid aperture and electrically coupled to said first and second layers ofsaid metallic conducting material;d. each said support member comprising a flexible curved ribbon membersecured within said central aperture and electrically connected to saidfirst and second layers of said metallic conducting material, said ribbonmember including a V-shaped slot having a width substantially greater thanthe height of said crystal;e. said crystal being mounted in said central aperture with said edges ofsaid crystal extending into said V-shaped slots, said edges being joinedto said ribbon members along a line at the upper and lower periphery ofsaid edges; andf. means coupled to said frame assembly at both ends of said centralaperture to hermetically enclose said force responsive member within thehollow formed by said aperture.2. The apparatus according to claim 1 wherein said insulator material is aceramic material.3. The apparatus according to claim 1 wherein said frame assembly isfabricated from a high alumina ceramic including at least 90% or more ofalumina.4. The apparatus according to claim 1 wherein said frame assembly isfabricated from a berriyllia ceramic.5. The apparatus according to claim 1 wherein said means coupled to saidframe assembly includes a layer of deposited metal about the perimeter ofsaid frame at said top and bottom ends.6. The apparatus according to claim 5 wherein said means coupled to saidframe assembly comprise a top and bottom lid cover members having acentrally located ridge approximately congruent with said central aperturefor insertion thereto, the edges of said lid nesting about the metallizedperimeter of said frame at said top and bottom ends, and a layer of metalcovering that portion of each lid coacting with said frame perimeter atsaid appropriate end to permit the formation of an adhesion bond tothereby enclose the hollow confines formed by said frame aperture.7. The apparatus according to claim 1 wherein said frame assembly isfabricated from a ceramic tape."}
{"WKU":"039313891","Title":"Process of desulfurizing hot gases","App_Date":"1974-10-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Karl Bratzler;Alexander Dorges;Georg Kempf;Paul Rudolph;Johann Schlauer","Assignee":"Metallgesellschaft Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"B01D 5334","References":"2607657;2886405;3101996;3787559","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Process for desulfurizing hot raw gas produced by the gasification ofcoal with oxygen-containing gases and water vapor under pressure whichcomprises:a. cooling said raw gas in at least two stages, in the last cooling stagebefore the desulfurizing step, cooling said raw gas by indirect heatexchange to a temperature below the temperature of the desulfurizing stepand removing condensate;b. in a subsequent stage raising the temperature of the raw gas to thetemperature of the desulfurizing step and introducing said raw gas into adesulfurizing stage where it is treated with a hot solution of one or morealkali salts of weak inorganic acids to selectively remove the sulfurcompounds from the gas; andc. regenerating the laden desulfurizing solution and recycling it to thedesulfurizing stage.2. Process of claim 1 wherein the temperature is raised in said subsequentstage by directly contacting said gas with a recirculated hot aqueoussolution of alkali salts of weak inorganic acids, said solution alsoprescrubbing and saturating said raw gas with water vapor.3. Process of claim 1 wherein the raw gas is desulfurized at temperaturesof about 105.degree. to 115.degree.C.4. Process of claim 1 wherein said raw gas is precooled to200.degree.-150.degree.C and subsequently indirectly cooled to atemperature which is a few degrees below the operating temperature of thedesulfurizing step, then the temperature of the raw gas is raised in aprescrubbing stage and thereafter desulfurized.5. Process of claim 2 wherein the hot aqueous solution contains sodiumcarbonate.6. Process of claim 1 wherein subsequent indirect cooling is carried out ina plurality of stages and pre-cooling is carried out with water underpressure.7. Process of claim 6 wherein one subsequent indirect cooling stageinvolves a heat exchange between the gas and the absorbent solution ladenwith sulfur compounds prior to regeneration.8. Process of claim 7 wherein water drained from the first subsequentindirect cooling stage is cooled by a direct contact with the desulfurizedgas and is recycled to the first indirect cooling stage."}
{"WKU":"039313905","Title":"Catalytic process for removing sulfur dioxide from gas streams","App_Date":"1974-11-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Frank C. Palilla;Gary G. Gaudet;Helmut Lingertat","Assignee":"GTE Laboratories Incorporated","ICL_Class":"C01B 1700;B01J  800","References":"3856925;3864459;3885020","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for removing sulfur dioxide from a gas stream containingsulfur dioxide comprising passing a gas stream containing sulfur dioxideand a sufficient amount of carbon monoxide or hydrogen to reduce at leasta portion of said sulfur dioxide to elemental sulfur through a reactionchamber charged with a material of the formula Ln.sub.2 O.sub.3 . Co.sub.2O.sub.3, where Ln is either Y or Gd, to catalytically produce at asufficiently elevated temperature a product stream containing elementalsulfur and carbon dioxide or water, and thereafter removing said elementalsulfur from said product stream.2. The process of claim 1 wherein the temperature in said reaction chamberis in the range of from about 450.degree.C to about 700.degree.C.3. The process of claim 1 wherein said material is Y.sub.2 O.sub.3 .Co.sub.2 O.sub.3.4. The process of claim 1 wherein said material is Gd.sub.2 O.sub.3 .Co.sub.2 O.sub.3.5. The process of claim 1 wherein said process is characterized by a sulfurdioxide removal efficiency greater than about 90%.6. The process of claim 1 wherein said process is characterized by a sulfurdioxide removal efficiency greater than about 90% even in the presence ofoxygen in said reaction chamber.7. The process of claim 1 wherein the production of said product streamproceeds even in the presence of oxygen in said reaction chamber.8. The process of claim 1 wherein not greater than minimal amounts ofhydrogen sulfide and carbonyl sulfide are produced during the catalyticproduction of said elemental sulfur.9. The process of claim 1 wherein said carbon monoxide or hydrogen in saidgas stream is in an amount not greater than the stoichiometric amountthereof required for reduction of all oxidants in said gas stream.10. The process of claim 1 wherein said carbon monoxide or hydrogen in saidgas stream is within .+-. 15% of the stoichiometric amount required forcomplete reduction of all oxidants in said gas stream.11. The process of claim 1 wherein a portion of said carbon monoxide orhydrogen in said gas stream is generated in situ.12. The process of claim 1 wherein a portion of said carbon monoxide orhydrogen in said gas stream is added thereto from an external source.13. A process for removing sulfur dioxide from a gas stream containingsulfur dioxide comprising adding carbon monoxide or hydrogen to a gasstream containing sulfur dioxide and oxygen to thereby provide a gaseousreaction stream, the total amount of carbon monoxide or hydrogen in saidgaseous reaction stream being approximately the stoichiometric amountrequired for reduction of all oxidants in said gaseous reaction stream,heating said gaseous reaction stream to a temperature in the range fromabout 450.degree.C to about 700.degree.C, passing said heated gaseousreaction stream through at least one reaction chamber charged with amaterial represented by the formula Ln.sub.2 O.sub.3 . Co.sub.2 O.sub.3,where Ln is either Y or Gd, to catalytically produce a product streamcomprising elemental sulfur, carbon dioxide or water, and not greater thanminimal quantities of hydrogen sulfide and carbonyl sulfide, andthereafter remving said elemental sulfur from said product stream.14. The process of claim 13 wherein said material is Y.sub.2 O.sub.3 .Co.sub.2 O.sub.3.15. The process of claim 13 wherein said material is Gd.sub.2 O.sub.3 .Co.sub.2 O.sub.3.16. The process of claim 13 wherein said gaseous reaction stream contains aminor concentration of oxygen, and the production of said elemental sulfurproceeds even in the presence of said oxygen in said gaseous reactionstream.17. The process of claim 13 wherein said carbon monoxide or hydrogen insaid gaseous reaction stream is within .+-. 15% of the stoichiometricamount required for complete reduction of all oxidants in said gaseousreaction stream.18. The process of claim 1 wherein said material is supported on a magnesiacarrier.19. The process of claim 13 wherein said material is supported on amagnesia carrier.20. The process of claim 1 wherein said material is supported on a zirconiacarrier.21. The process of claim 13 wherein said material is supported on azirconia carrier."}
{"WKU":"039313913","Title":"Process for oxidation of ammonia","App_Date":"1974-05-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Edgar Koberstein;Klaus-Peter Muller","Assignee":"Deutsche Gold- und Silber-Scheideanstalt vormals Roessler","ICL_Class":"C01B 2126","References":"3767772","Claims":"We claim:1. A process for oxidizing ammonia to nitric oxides suitable for formingnitric acid comprising heating at 750.degree. to 950.degree.C a mixture ofammonia and air or oxygen in the presence of a catalyst said catalysthaving been prepared by forming cobalt oxide doped with 0.1-10 atom % oflithium into shape, then calcining in air or oxygen at300.degree.-700.degree.C and subsequently tempering at700.degree.-900.degree.C in a reaction gas mixture of air and 8-10 volume% of ammonia to stabilize the form.2. A process according to claim 1 wherein the cobalt oxide is Co.sub.3O.sub.4.3. A process according to claim 2 wherein the catalyst contains 0.5-3 atom% of lithium.4. A process according to claim 1 wherein the lithium doped cobalt oxide isprepared by mixing an aqueous solution of a cobalt salt and lithiumhydroxide to form a precipitate, suspending the precipitate in an aqueoussolution of an oxidizing agent and drying the suspension prior tocalcining.5. A process according to claim 1 wherein the ammonia is oxidized at atemperature of 780.degree. to 830.degree.C."}
{"WKU":"039313921","Title":"Enhancement of ultimate tensile strength of carbon fibers","App_Date":"1974-01-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Victor R. Deitz","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy","ICL_Class":"B29C 2500;D01F  912","References":"3035901;3427120;3529934;3556729;3627571;3660140","Claims":"What is claimed and desired to be secured by Letters Patent of the UnitedStates is:1. A method of treating carbon fibers to enhance their tensile strength;which comprises,immersing said carbon fibers in liquid bromine within a container for aperiod of from about one hour to several day at ambient temperature;removing any excess bromine from said container and said fibers;subsequent to the disappearance of any coloration due to bromine vapor,heating the treated carbon fibers at a temperature of from about150.degree.C to about 250.degree.C for about 1 hour, andcooling said heated fibers within a helium atmosphere to ambienttemperature.2. A method as claimed in claim 1; whereinsaid bromine is removed from said fibers by flushing the treated fiberswith an inert gas at room temperature.3. A method as claimed in claim 2; whereinsaid inert gas is helium.4. A method as claimed in claim 3; whereinsaid treated carbon fibers are heated to a temperature of about240.degree.C subsequent to flushing with said helium.5. A method as claimed in claim 4; whereinsaid temperature is 150.degree.C.6. A method as claimed in claim 4; whereinsaid temperature is 200.degree.C.7. A method as claimed in claim 3; whereinprior to removing said excess bromine said bromine immersed fibers withinsaid container are immersed in an ice bath for a period of about 12 hours;andsubsequent to cooling said fibers, warming said fibers to room temperatureprior to removing said excess bromine.8. A method as claimed in claim 3; wherein,said bromine removed from said carbon fibers is condensed and saved forfurther use."}
{"WKU":"039313930","Title":"Catalytic process for removing sulfur dioxide from gas streams","App_Date":"1974-10-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Frank C. Palilla","Assignee":"GTE Laboratories Incorporated","ICL_Class":"C01B 1704","References":"2361825;3752877;3755550;3864459","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for removing sulfur dioxide from a gas stream containingsulfur dioxide comprising passing a gas stream containing sulfur dioxideand a sufficient amount of carbon monoxide and/or hydrogen to reduce atleast a portion of said sulfur dioxide to elemental sulfur through areaction chamber containing a material x La.sub.2 O.sub.3 . y Co.sub.2O.sub.3, where x and y are varied independently from 1 to 3, inclusive, tocatalytically produce at a sufficiently elevated temperature a productstream comprising elemental sulfur and carbon dioxide or water, andthereafter removing said elemental sulfur from said product stream.2. The process of claim 1 wherein said gas stream is heated to atemperature in the range from about 450.degree.C to about 700.degree.C.3. The process of claim 1 wherein said material is LaCoO.sub.3.4. The process of claim 1 wherein x .noteq. y.5. The process of claim 1 wherein said process is characterized by a sulfurdioxide to sulfur conversion efficiency greater than about 90%.6. The process of claim 1 wherein said process is characterized by a sulfurdioxide to sulfur conversion efficiency greater than about 90% even afterprolonged exposure to substantial proportions of oxygen in said heated gasstream.7. The process of claim 1 wherein the production of said product streamproceeds even in the presence of substantial percentages of oxygen in saidheated gas stream.8. The process of claim 1 wherein not greater than minimal amounts ofhydrogen sulfide and carbonyl sulfide are contained in said productstream.9. The process of claim 1 wherein said carbon monoxide or hydrogen in saidgas stream is in an amount not greater than the stoichiometric amountthereof required for reduction of all oxidants in said gas stream.10. The process of claim 1 wherein said carbon monoxide or hydrogen in saidgas stream is within .+-. 15% of the stoichiometric amount required forcomplete reduction of all oxidants in said gas stream.11. The process of claim 1 wherein a portion of said carbon monoxide orhydrogen in said gas stream is generated in situ.12. The process of claim 1 wherein a portion of said carbon monoxide orhydrogen in said gas stream is added thereto from an external source.13. A process for removing sulfur dioxide from a gas stream containingsulfur dioxide comprising adding carbon monoxide to a gas streamcontaining sulfur dioxide and oxygen to thereby provide a gaseous reactionstream, the total amount of carbon monoxide in said gaseous reactionmixture being approximately the stoichiometric amount required forreduction of all of said oxygen and said sulfur dioxide in said gaseousreaction stream, heating said gaseous reaction stream to a temperature inthe range from about 450.degree.C to about 700.degree.C, passing saidheated gaseous reaction stream through at least one reaction chambercontaining a material represented by the formula xLa.sub.2 O.sub.3 .yCo.sub.2 O.sub.3, where x and y are varied independently from 1 to 3,inclusive, to catalytically produce a product stream comprising elementalsulfur, carbon dioxide, and not greater than minimal quantities ofhydrogen sulfide and carbonyl sulfide, the sulfur dioxide to sulfurcatalytic conversion efficiency being greater than about 90%, andthereafter removing said elemental sulfur from said product stream.14. The process of claim 13 wherein said material is LaCoO.sub.3.15. The process of claim 13 wherein x .noteq. y.16. The process of claim 13 wherein said catalytic conversion efficiency isnot substantially adversely affected even after prolonged exposure of saidcatalytic material to said oxygen in said gaseous reaction stream.17. The process of claim 13 wherein said carbon monoxide in said gaseousreaction stream is within .+-. 15% of the stoichiometric amount requiredfor complete reduction of all oxidants in said gaseous reaction stream.18. The process of claim 1 wherein said material is supported on a magnesiacarrier.19. The process of claim 13 wherein said material is supported on amagnesia carrier.20. The catalytic material of claim 18 wherein said catalytic material issupported on a magnesia carrier.21. The process of claim 1 wherein said material is supported on a zirconiacarrier.22. The process of claim 13 wherein said material is supported on azirconia carrier.23. The process of claim 1, wherein the elevated temperature is in therange from about 450.degree.C. to about 700.degree.C."}
{"WKU":"039313948","Title":"Hydrogen sulfide removal","App_Date":"1971-05-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Akira Toyama;Koji Ishizaki","Assignee":"Kobe Steel Ltd.","ICL_Class":"C01b 1704","References":"1700982;3099535","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. The process for the removal of hydrogen sulfide from gaseous or aqueousmaterial through conversion of hydrogen sulfide into sulfur whichcomprises bringing said material into contact with nitrohumic acid or thesodium, potassium or ammonium salt thereof.2. The process according to claim 1 wherein gaseous material is broughtinto contact with an aqueous solution of the sodium, potassium or ammoniumsalt of nitrohumic acid, said solution having a pH in the range of from 8to 10.3. The process according to claim 2 wherein the activity of said nitrohumicacid is regenerated through treatment with oxygen.4. The process according to claim 3 wherein oxygen is passed through saidsolution after contact with the gaseous material.5. The process according to claim 3 wherein oxygen is brought in contactwith the solution continuously with said gaseous material."}
{"WKU":"039313956","Title":"Process for generating hydrogen gas","App_Date":"1974-06-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Werner F. Beckert;Ottmar H. Dengel;Rodger W. McKain","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy","ICL_Class":"C01B  102;C01B 2100;C01D  304","References":"3419361;3734863","Claims":"What is claimed and desired to be secured by Letters Patent of the UnitedStates is:1. A method for generating hydrogen gas which comprises heating acomposition comprising the intimate mixture in the solid state of at leastone compound having the general formula (NH.sub.4).sub.n X wherein X is aninorganic acid group and n is the valency of said inorganic acid group andat least one compound having the general formula Y(ZH.sub.4).sub.m whereinY is a mono- or divalent metal capable of forming complex hydrides and isselected from the group consisting of alkali metals and alkaline earthmetals, m is the valency of said mono- or divalent metal and Z is atrivalent metal capable of forming complex hydrides and is selected fromthe group consisting of boron and aluminum, wherein said compounds arepresent in about stoichiometric amounts or are present in amounts suchthat there is a stoichiometirc excess of one of the components, to atemperature high enough that said Y(ZH.sub.4).sub.m reacts with said(NH.sub.4).sub.n X to produce hydrogen gas.2. A method according to claim 1 wherein said compounds are present inabout stoichiometric amounts.3. A method according to claim 2 wherein said inorganic acid group isselected from the group consisting of halogen and sulfate.4. A method according to claim 1 wherein said compounds are present inamounts such that there is a stoichiometric excess of one of thecomponents.5. A method according to claim 4 wherein said inorganic acid group isselected from the group consisting of halogen and sulfate.6. A method according to claim 5 wherein the mixture comprises at least onecompound selected from the group consisting of NH.sub.4 F and NH.sub.4 Clin combination with at least one compound selected from the groupconsisting of LiAlH.sub.4, NaAlH.sub.4, NaBH.sub.4, and LiBH.sub.4.7. A method according to claim 6 using a mixture comprising NH.sub.4 Cl andNaAlH.sub.4.8. A method according to cliam 6 using a mixture comprising NH.sub.4 Cl andLiAlH.sub.4.9. A method according to claim 6 using a mixture comprising NH.sub.4 F andLiAlH.sub.4.10. A method according to claim 6 using a mixture comprising NH.sub.4 F andNaBH.sub.4.11. A method according to claim 6 using a mixture comprising NH.sub.4 F,NH.sub.4 Cl, LiAlH.sub.4 and NaBH.sub.4.12. A method according to claim 3 wherein the mixture comprises at leastone compound selected from the group consisting of NH.sub.4 F and NH.sub.4Cl in combination with at least one compound selected from the groupconsisting of LiAlH.sub.4, NaAlH.sub.4, NaBH.sub.4, and LiBH.sub.4.13. A method according to claim 12 using a mixture comprising NH.sub.4 Fand LiAlH.sub.4.14. A method according to claim 12 using a mixture comprising NH.sub.4 Cland NaAlH.sub.4.15. A method according to claim 12 using a mixture comprising Nh.sub.4 Fand NaBH.sub.4.16. A method according to claim 12 using a mixture comprising NH.sub.4 Cland LiAlH.sub.4.17. A method according to claim 12 using a mixture comprising NH.sub.4 F,NH.sub.4 Cl, LiAlH.sub.4 and NaBH.sub.4.18. The method of claim 1 wherein at least one component of the mixture iscoated with a polymer selected from the group consisting of polystyrene,polyethylene, polybutadiene, polycarbonate and hydroxyvinyl resins.19. A method for generating hydrogen gas comprising heating a compositioncomprising:the intimate mixture in the solid state of at least one compound having thegeneral formula (N.sub.2 H.sub.6).sub.n X.sub.2 wherein X is an inorganicacid group and n is the valency of said inorganic acid group and at leastone compound having the general formula Y(ZH.sub.4).sub.m wherein Y is amono- or divalent metal capable of forming complex hydrides and isselected from the group consisting of alkali metals and alkaline earthmetals, m is the valency of said mono- or divalent metal and Z is atrivalent metal capable of forming complex hydrides and is selected fromthe group consisting of boron and aluminum to a temperature high enoughthat said Y(ZH.sub.4).sub.m reacts with said (N.sub.2 H.sub.6).sub.nX.sub.2 to produce hydrogen gas.20. The method of claim 19 wherein said inorganic acid group is selectedfrom the group consisting of halogen and sulfate.21. A method according to claim 20 using a mixture comprising N.sub.2H.sub.6 Cl.sub.2 and LiBH.sub.4.22. The method of claim 19 wherein at least one component of the mixture iscoated with a polymer selected from the group consisting of polystyrene,polyethylene, polybutadiene, polycarbonate and hydroxyvinyl resins.23. A method of generating hydrogen gas comprising heating a compositioncomprisingthe intimate mixture in the solid state of at least one compound having thegeneral formula (NH.sub.4).sub.n X wherein X is an inorganic acid groupand n is the valency of said inorganic acid group, at least one compoundhaving the general formula (N.sub.2 H.sub.6).sub.n X.sub.2 wherein X is aninorganic acid group and n is the valency of said inorganic acid group,and at least one compound having the general formula Y(ZH.sub.4).sub.mwherein Y is a mono- or divalent metal capable of forming complex hydridesand is selected from the group consisting of alkali metals and alkalineearth metals, m is the valency of said mono- or divalent metal, and Z is atrivalent metal capable of forming complex hydrides and is selected fromthe group consisting of boron and aluminum to a temperature high enoughthat said Y(ZH.sub.4).sub.m reacts with said (NH.sub.4).sub.n X and withsaid (N.sub.2 H.sub.6).sub.n X.sub.2 to produce hydrogen gas.24. The method of claim 23 wherein said inorganic acid group in bothoccurrences is selected from the group consisting of halogen and sulfate.25. A method according to claim 24 using a mixture which comprises N.sub.2H.sub.6 Cl.sub.2, NH.sub.4 F, LiAlH.sub.4, and NaBH.sub.4.26. The method of claim 23 wherein at least one component of the mixture iscoated with a polymer selected from the group consisting of polystyrene,polyethylene, polybutadiene, polycarbonate and hydroxyvinyl resins."}
{"WKU":"039313964","Title":"Method of preparation of a composition having a base of 99.sup.m","App_Date":"1974-03-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Andre Bardy;Jacqueline Beydon","Assignee":"Commissariat a l Energie Atomique","ICL_Class":"A61k 2704","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method for preparing a tin-pyrophosphate complex labelled with 99 m Tcand intended for medical diagnosis by scintigraphy, comprising a firststep consisting in admixing a pyrophosphate solution with a freshlyprepared solution of stannous chloride in an acidic medium, and at leastpartially neutralizing the solution, and a second step consisting inadmixing the thus obtained mixture with a solution containing 99 m Tc, atthe moment of use.2. A method for preparing a tin-pyrophosphate complex labelled with 99 m Tcaccording to claim 1, wherein neutralization of said solution is achievedby bringing the pH thereof to a value within the range of 5 to 7.3. A method for preparing a tin-pyrophosphate complex labelled with99.sup.m Tc according to claim 2, which further comprises lyophilizingsaid mixture after said increase of the pH at the end of said first stepso as to obtain said complex in powder form.4. A method for preparing a tin-pyrophosphate complex labelled with 99m Tcaccording to claim 3, wherein, following the lyophilization step, saidcompound is kept in vacuo.5. A method for preparing a tin-pyrophosphate complex labelled with 99m Tcaccording to claim 3, wherein, following the loyphilization step, saidcompound is kept in an inert nitrogen or argon atmosphere.6. A method for preparing a tin-pyrophosphate complex according to claim 1,wherein said solution containing 99m Tc is a solution of sodiumpertechnetate TcO.sub.4 Na.7. A method for preparing a tin-pyrophosphate complex according to claim 1,wherein said pyrophosphate is sodium pyrophosphate."}
{"WKU":"039313972","Title":"Biologically active material","App_Date":"1973-11-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Michael Raymond Harnden","Assignee":"Beecham Group Limited","ICL_Class":"A61K 4504","References":"3679654;3725545","Claims":"I claim:1. A pharmaceutical composition useful for treating viral infections causedby any one or more of a wide variety of DNA and RNA viruses in suseptiblemammals which comprises an effective serum-interferon producingribonuclease-stable amount of an antiviral complex which is a principallyionic complex soluble in 0.15 M aqueous sodium chloride solution in whichthe cations are organic polymer polycations having a plurality ofquaternary nitrogen sites located at intervals along the polymer chains,said polycations having the formula##EQU6##wherein each of a and b, independent of the other, is an integer of from 2to 6 and X is a number which is such that the average molecular weight ofthe polycation divided by the equivalent weight which is the molecularweight of the polycation divided by the value (2X + 2) is not greater than98, and the anions are one of: (a) double-stranded ribonucleic acidpolyanions, said double-stranded ribonucleic acid being of natural origin,or (b) polyanions of a double-stranded ribonucleic acid of natural originwhich has been subject to chemical or enzymatic reaction which alters oneor more of the primary, secondary, and tertiary structure, provided thatthe resultant ribonucleic acid retains a substantial degree of basepairing between complementary strands, said antiviral complex having morethan 60% of the anionic sites on the double-stranded ribonucleic acidanions neutralized by the quaternary cationic sites on the quaternarypolymer, in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable nontoxic liquidinjectable or topical carrier.2. A pharmaceutical composition according to claim 1 wherein more than 75%of the anionic sites on the double-stranded ribonucleic acid anions areneutralized by the quaternary cationic sites on the quaternary polymer.3. A pharmaceutical composition according to claim 1 wherein thedouble-stranded ribonucleic acid component is from the virus particlesfound in infected strains of Penicillium chrysogenum, Penicilliumstoloniferum, Penicillium funiculosum, Penicillium cyaneofulvum,Aspergillus niger or Aspergillus foetidus.4. A pharmaceutical composition according to claim 1 in injectableadministration form.5. A pharmaceutical composition according to claim 1 in a form suitable forapplication to the mucous membrane of a susceptible mammal."}
{"WKU":"039313980","Title":"Method for local immunization against dental caries","App_Date":"1973-06-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Abdul Gaffar;Hans Wilhelm Marcussen, Jr.","Assignee":"Colgate-Palmolive Company","ICL_Class":"A61K 3902;A61K  500;A61K  726","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a method for immunization against dental caries, which comprisesadministering subcutaneously by injection a vaccine, the improvement whichcomprises locally administering into or near the oral cavity a vaccineconstituting an aqueous saline dispersion of an active ingredient selectedfrom the group consisting of (1) a polyglucan polysaccharide elaborationproduct of a strain of microorganism of the species S.mutans or S.sanguis,and (2) a polyfructan polysaccharide elaboration product of a strain ofmicroorganism within the genus streptococcus, to an animal susceptible todental caries, said active ingredient being administered in an amounteffective for immunization.2. The method of claim 1 wherein said vaccine is administered into or nearthe major or minor salivary glands.3. The method of claim 1, wherein the polyglucan or polyfructan isincorporated in the vaccine in the form of dead cells of the microorganismfrom which it is elaborated.4. The method of claim 1, wherein the polyfructan is the active ingredientof said vaccine, the polyfructan incorporating a molecular weight fractionhaving characteristic infrared absorption peaks at 920 cm..sup.-.sup.1,875 cm..sup.-.sup.1 and 805 cm..sup.-.sup.1, an intrinsic viscosity at25.degree. C of from 0.15-0.16, and [.alpha.].sub.D.sup.20 rotation of43.degree. to 54.degree..5. The method of claim 1, wherein the polyfructan is the active ingredientof said vaccine, said polyfructan being an elaboration product ofStreptococcus Strain SS2.6. The method of claim 1, wherein the polyglucan is the active ingredientof said vaccine, said polyglucan being an elaboration product of S.mutansStrain 6715.7. The method of claim 1, wherein the vaccine is administered by injectioninto the chin of the animal to be immunized.8. The method of claim 1 wherein said vaccine is administered by directinjection.9. The method of claim 1, wherein the vaccine additionally containsFreund s adjuvant.10. The method of claim 1, wherein the polysaccharide is administered inthe vaccine in an amount equivalent to from 1 to 20 micrograms thereof perkilogram of the body weight of the animal to be immunized."}
{"WKU":"039313999","Title":"Process for isolating a fibrin-stabilizing factor","App_Date":"1973-12-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hans Bohn;Fritz Emmerich","Assignee":"Behringwerke Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"A61K 3548","References":"3497492","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for isolating a fibrin-stabilizing factor which comprises:a. extracting human placentae at a temperature from 0.degree.C. to20.degree.C. with a dilute aqueous sodium chloride solution and removingsolid contaminants from the extract;b. adding a dilute aqueous solution of diaminoethoxy-acridine lactate tosaid extract at a temperature from 5.degree.C. to 20.degree.C. and at a pHbetween 5.0 and 7.5 in an amount furnishing 6 to 10 grams of said lactateper 100 grams of protein content in said extract to form a firstprecipitate, and isolating said first precipitate;c. dissolving said precipitate at a temperature from 5.degree.C. to20.degree.C. in a dilute solution of alkali metal chloride at a pH between7.0 and 8.0, said solution containing about 5 percent, by weight of saidalkali metal chloride, of a complexing agent selected from the groupconsisting of ethylene diamine tetraacetic acid and nitrilo-triaceticacid, and removing any insoluble substances from the solution;d. adding a quaternary ammonium base to the solution in an amount from 0.04to 0.08 percent, by weight of the solution, at a temperature from5.degree.C. to 20.degree.C. to form a second precipitate, and removing anddiscarding this second precipitate;e. adding a dilute aqueous solution of diaminoethoxy-acridine lactate tothe solution at a temperature from 5.degree.C. to 20.degree.C. to form athird precipitate, and isolating said third precipitate;f. dissolving said third precipitate in a dilute solution of an alkalimetal chloride at a temperature from 5.degree.C. to 20.degree.C. and at apH between 7.0 and 8.0, said solution containing about 5 percent, byweight of said alkali metal chloride, of ethylene diamine tetraacetic acidor nitrilo-triacetic acid and removing any insoluble substances from thesolution;g. adding 20 to 30 percent of solid ammonium sulfate to the solution toform a fourth precipitate, and isolating said fourth precipitate;h. forming a paste from said fourth precipitate and a dilute solution ofethylene diamine tetraacetic acid or nitrilo-triacetic acid and dialyzingsaid paste against tris(hydroxymethyl)-aminoethane/hydrochloric acidbuffer containing ethylene diamine tetraacetic acid or nitrilo-triaceticacid and sodium azide, whereby the paste is solubilized;i. adjusting the pH of the dialyzed solution to 6.0 to form a fifthprecipitate which is separated and discarded, and readjusting the pH to7.0;j. gel filtering the solution on cross-linked dextran, eluting withtris(hydroxymethyl)-aminomethane/hydrochloric acid buffer containingethylene diamine tetraacetic acid or nitrilo-triacetic acid and sodiumazide, and collecting and combining active fractions having an activity ofmore than 2 units of fibrin-stabilizing factor;k. adding sufficient solid ammonium sulfate to the collected activefractions to form a sixth precipitate containing the fibrin-stabilizingfactor, and isolating said sixth precipitate;l. dissolving said sixth precipitate in a neutraltris(hydroxymethyl)-aminomethane/ethylene diamine tetraacetic acid buffer;m. dialyzing the solution against neutraltris(hydroxymethyl)-aminomethane/ethylene diamine tetraacetic acid buffer;n. adjusting the pH of the dialyzed solution to 5.0 to precipitate thefibrin-stabilizing factor and isolating the precipitate."}
{"WKU":"039314006","Title":"Fortimicin B and process for production thereof","App_Date":"1974-04-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Takashi Nara;Seigo Takasawa;Ryo Okachi;Isao Kawamoto;Mitsuyoshi Yamamoto","Assignee":"Abbott Laboratories","ICL_Class":"A61K 3500","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A composition of matter having antibiotic activity characterized by:a. molecular weight of 348;b. molecular formula of C.sub.15 H.sub.32 N.sub.4 O.sub.5 ;c. an ultraviolet absorption spectrum essentially as shown in FIG. 1;d. an infrared absorption spectrum essentially as shown in FIG. 2; ande. a nuclear magnetic reasonance spectrum essentially as shown in FIG. 3.said composition of matter being Fortimicin B.2. A pharmaceutically acceptable, non-toxic acid addition salt of thecomposition of matter of claim 1, said acid addition salt being selectedfrom the group consisting of the hydrochloride, hydrobromide, hydroiodide,sulfate, sulfamate, phosphate, maleate, acetate, citrate, oxalate,succinate, benzoate, tartrate, fumarate, malate, mandelate and ascorbate.3. A process for producing the antibiotic Fortimicin B which comprisesculturing a microorganism selected from the group consisting ofMicromonospora olivoasterospora ATCC 21819, Micromonosporaolivoasterospora ATCC 31009 and Micromonospora olivoasterospora ATCC 31010in a nutrient medium containing assimilable sources of carbon and nitrogenat 25.degree. to 40.degree.C. and at about neutral pH until substantialantibacterial activity is detected in the culture liquor and thereafterisolating Fortimicin B."}
{"WKU":"039314014","Title":"1,N.sup.6 -etheno-5 -adenosine carboxamides for increasing coronary","App_Date":"1974-05-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Raj Nandan Prasad;David Lyon Garmaise","Assignee":"Abbott Laboratories","ICL_Class":"A61K 3170","References":"3551409;3697504","Claims":"We claim:1. A method of increasing coronary sinus partial pressure of oxygen in apatient in need of such treatment comprising administering an effectivecoronary sinus partial pressure of oxygen increasing amount of a compoundof the formula##SPC4##wherein R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 each are hydrogen, loweralkyl, a cycloalkyl of3 to 6 carbon atoms, loweralkenyl or loweralkynyl and R.sub.3 and R.sub.4each are hydrogen, acetyl, propionyl, butyryl, or R.sub.3 and R.sub.4taken together form an isopropylidene or benzylidene moiety; or apharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof, to said patient.2. A method according to claim 1, wherein said compound is administered ina dosage of from 0.1 to 10.0 mg./kg. of body weight daily."}
{"WKU":"039314022","Title":"Preparations containing hexoses","App_Date":"1973-07-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Giuseppe Ghielmetti;Rodolfo Ferrari","Assignee":"Societa Prodotti Antibiotici S.p.A.","ICL_Class":"A61K 3170","References":"","Claims":"We claim:1. A composition useful for administering an immediate source of energy toa patient consisting essentially of a mixture of glucose with a saltselected from the group consisting of an alkali metal salt ofglucose-1-phosphate, glucose-6-phosphate, and 6-phosphogluconate, saidsalt constituting 0.1-50% by weight of the mixture.2. A composition useful for administering an immediate source of energy toa patient consisting essentially of a mixture of fructose with an alkalimetal salt of fructose-1,6-diphosphate, said salt constituting 0.1-50% byweight of the mixture.3. A composition useful for administering an immediate source of energy toa patient consisting essentially of a mixture of glucose, fructose and asalt selected from the group consisting of an alkali metal salt ofglucose-1-phosphate, glucose-6-phosphate and 6-phosphogluconate, said saltconstituting 0.1-50% by weight of the mixture.4. A composition useful for administering an immediate source of energy toa patient consisting essentially of a mixture of glucose, fructose, a saltselected from the group consisting of an alkali metal salt ofglucose-1-phosphate, glucose-6-phosphate and 6-phosphogluconate and analkali metal salt of fructose-1,6-phosphate, said salts constituting0.1-50% by weight of the mixture.5. A sterile aqueous solution of the composition of claim 1 containing atherapeutically effective amount thereof up to about 6% by weight.6. A sterile aqueous solution of the composition of claim 2 containing atherapeutically effective amount thereof up to about 6% by weight.7. A sterile aqueous solution of the composition of claim 3 containing atherapeutically effective amount thereof up to about 6% by weight.8. A sterile aqueous solution of the composition of claim 4, containing atherapeutically effective amount thereof up to about 6% by weight.9. A composition according to claim 1 wherein the alkali metal salt is thesodium or potassium salt.10. A composition according to claim 2 wherein the alkali metal salt is thesodium of potassium salt.11. A composition according to claim 3 wherein the alkali metal salt is thesodium or potassium salt.12. A composition according to claim 4 wherein the alkali metal salt is thesodium or potassium salt."}
{"WKU":"039314030","Title":"Antimicrobial compositions","App_Date":"1974-11-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William H. Saltzman","Assignee":"Intellectual Property Development Corporation","ICL_Class":"C07J  900","References":"3839565;3852440;3856953","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A composition possessing antimicrobial properties, comprising from about10 to 1500 milligrams of a compound of the formula:##SPC3##whereineach Y is hydrogen;each A is hydroxy, acyloxy, or alkoxy;"}
{"WKU":"039314049","Title":"High dosage orally administrable cephalosporin antibiotic preparations","App_Date":"1973-12-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Werner Fulberth;Dietrich Hiller;Alfred Muller;Gerhard Ross","Assignee":"Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"A61K 3154","References":"3573294;3624225","Claims":"We claim:1. An antibiotic preparation in compressed tablet form consistingessentially of cephalexin or cephaloglycin and from 5 to 15 percent, byweight of said preparation, of pharmaceutical excipients selected from thegroup consisting of starch, crystalline cellulose, lactose,ultraamylopectin, talc, and magnesium stearate.2. A preparation as in claim 1 consisting essentially of85 to 95 percent of a cephalosporin antibiotic,10 to 2.5 percent of crystalline cellulose,3 to 1.5 percent of ultraamylopectin, and2 to 1 percent of magnesium stearate.3. A preparation as in claim 1 consisting essentially of85 to 93 percent of a cephalosporin antibiotic,8 to 4 percent of lactose,5 to 2 percent of ultraamylopectin, and2 to 1 percent of magnesium stearate.4. A preparation as in claim 1 consisting essentially of85 to 95 percent of a cephalosporin antibiotic,8 to 2.6 percent of starch,5 to 2 percent of talc, and2 to 0.4 percent of magnesium stearate.5. A preparation as in claim 1 wherein said cephalosporin antibiotic iscephalexin.6. As a dosage unit form for oral administration, a compressed tabletcomprising from 0.25 g to 3 g of the preparation as in claim 1.7. The method of making a dosage unit form for oral administration whichcomprises compressing from 0.25 to 3 g of the preparation as in claim 1into tablet form."}
{"WKU":"039314057","Title":"New penicillin esters and methods and compositions for treating","App_Date":"1973-02-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Bertil Ake Ekstrom;Odon Kalman Jozsef Kovacs;Olof Harald Sjoberg","Assignee":"Astra Lakemedel Aktiebolag","ICL_Class":"A61K 3143","References":"3660575;3697507","Claims":"We claim:1. A pharmaceutical preparation for the treatment of diseases caused bybacterial organisms wherein the active ingredient is an anti-bacteriallyeffective amount of the compound 1 -ethoxycarbonyloxyethyl6-(D-.alpha.-benzylsulphonylamino-phenyl-acetamido)penicillanate or atherapeutically acceptable salt thereof in association with apharmaceutically acceptable carrier, wherein the amount of activeingredient is in the range of about 1%-95%.2. A capsule or tablet suitable for oral administration for the treatmentof diseases caused by bacterial organisms containing therein apharmaceutical preparation according to claim 1.3. A pharmaceutical preparation for the treatment of diseases caused bybacterial organisms wherein the active ingredient is an anti-bacteriallyeffective amount of the compound ethoxycarbonyloxymethyl6-(D-.alpha.-benzylsulphonylamino-phenylacetamido)penicillanate or atherapeutically acceptable salt thereof in association with apharmaceutically acceptable carrier, wherein the amount of activeingredient is in the range of about 1%-95%.4. A capsule or tablet suitable for oral administration for the treatmentof diseases caused by bacterial organisms containing therein apharmaceutical preparation according to claim 3.5. A method for treatment of diseases caused by bacterial organisms inanimals, including man, comprising administering to a host anantibacterially effective amount of the compound 1 -ethoxycarbonyloxyethyl6-(D-.alpha.-benzylsulphonylamino-phenylacetamido)-penicillanate or atherapeutically acceptable salt thereof.6. A method for treatment of diseases caused by bacterial organisms inanimals, including man, comprising administering to a host anantibacterially effective amount of the compound ethoxycarbonyloxymethyl6-(D-.alpha.-benzylsulphonylamino-phenylacetamido)-penicillanate or atherapeutically acceptable salt thereof."}
{"WKU":"039314065","Title":"Pyrazolidine fungicides","App_Date":"1975-02-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Herman Berenson","Assignee":"American Cyanamid Company","ICL_Class":"A01N  922","References":"3818096","Claims":"I claim:1. A method for protecting growing plants from attack by fungal organismscomprising applying to the foliage of said plants a fungicidally effectiveamount of a compound having a formula selected from the group consistingof:##SPC6##wherein R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 each represent alkyl C.sub.1 -C.sub.4 ; R.sub.3and R.sub.5 each represent a member selected from the group consisting ofcycloalkyl C.sub.3 -C.sub.7, and##SPC7##Y represents a member selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,halogen and alkyl C.sub.1 -C.sub.4 ; and HX represents an acid.2. The method according to claim 1, wherein HX represents an acid selectedfrom the group consisting of HCl, HBr, HI, HNO.sub.3, H.sub.3 PO.sub.4,H.sub.2 SO.sub.4, HClO.sub.4 and##SPC8##3. The method according to claim 1, wherein R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 are methyl;R.sub.3 and R.sub.5 each represent a member selected from the groupconsisting of cyclohexyl and##SPC9##Y represents a member selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,fluoro and methyl; and HX is an inorganic acid.4. The method according to claim 1, wherein the fungal organism causespowdery mildew, and the plant to be protected is barley or wheat.5. The method according to claim 1, wherein the compound iscis-1,2-dimethyl-3,5-diphenylpyrazolidine hydrochloride.6. The method according to claim 1 wherein the compound is1,2-dimethyl-3,5-di-m-tolylpyrazolidine hydroiodide.7. The method according to claim 1 wherein the compound is1,2-dimethyl-3,5-diphenylpyrazolidine hydrobromide.8. The method according to claim 1 wherein said compound is brought intocontact with the foliage in the form of an aqueous spray containing 50 to5,600 ppm of said compound.9. The method according to claim 1 wherein said compound is in the cisform.10. The method according to claim 1 wherein said compound is the free base.11. The method according to claim 1 wherein said compound is the acid salt."}
{"WKU":"039314073","Title":"Method of treatment with and compositions containing condensed pyrroles","App_Date":"1974-10-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard C. Allen;V. Brian Anderson","Assignee":"American Hoechst Corporation","ICL_Class":"A61K 3140","References":"3687971","Claims":"We claim:1. An orally administerable composition for treating inflammation and painwhich consists essentially of a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier andfrom about 1 to about 200 mg of an active compound of the formula##SPC111##whereinR is alkyl of one to six carbon atoms; thienyl; phenyl; diphenyl; or phenylsubstituted by halogen, trifluoromethyl, alkyl of one to six carbon atoms,alkoxy of one to six carbon atoms, nitro, cyano, or hydroxy;R.sub.1 is carboxyl, alkoxycarbonyl of two to seven carbon atoms,carbamoyl, N-alkylcarbamoyl of two to seven carbon atoms,N,N-dialkylcarbamoyl of three to seven carbon atoms, hydroxycarbamoyl, ordialkylphosphinylalkoxycarbonyl of four to ten carbon atoms;R.sub.2 is hydrogen, hydroxyl, mercapto, halogen, trifluoromethyl, alkoxyof one to six carbon atoms, alkanoyloxy of one to six carbon atoms, amino,alkanoylamino of one to six carbon atoms, dialkylthiocarbamoyloxy of threeto seven carbon atoms, or dialkylcarbamoylthio of three to seven carbonatoms; n is 1 or 2;R.sub.3 is hydrogen, alkanoyl of one to six carbon atoms, or phenyl;X is alkylene of three to five carbon atoms, alkylene of three to fivecarbon atoms substituted by alkyl or alkoxy of one to six carbon atoms,divinylene, divinylene substituted by alkyl of one to six carbon atoms,##SPC112##wherein D is hydrogen, alkoxy of one to six carbon atoms, or halogen.2. An orally administerable composition for treating inflammation and painwhich consists essentially of a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier andfrom about 1 to about 200 mg of an active compound as defined in claim 1in whichR is tertiary butyl, thienyl, phenyl, diphenyl or phenyl substituted bychlorine, bromine, fluorine, hydroxyl, trifluoromethyl, methyl, methoxy,nitro or cyano;R.sub.1 is carboxyl, methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, carbamoyl,N-ethylcarbamoyl, N,N-diethylcarbamoyl, hydroxycarbamoyl, ordimethylphosphinylmethoxycarbonyl;R.sub.2 is hydrogen, hydroxyl, mercapto, chlorine, bromine,trifluoromethyl, methoxy, acetyl, acetylamino, dimethylthiocarbamoyloxy ordimethylcarbamoylthio;R.sub.3 is hydrogen, acetyl, or phenyl; andX is alkylene of three to five carbon atoms, butylene substituted bymethyl, tertiary butyl or methoxy, divinylene, divinylene substituted bytertiary butyl,##SPC113##wherein D is hydrogen, methoxy or chlorine.3. A composition as defined in claim 2 in which the active compound is3-(3-carboxy-4-hydroxyphenyl)-4, 5-dihydro-2-phenylbenz[e]indole.4. A composition as defined in claim 2 in which the active compound is3-(4-acetoxy-3-carboxyphenyl)-4, 5-dihydro-2-phenylbenz[e]indole.5. A composition as defined in claim 2 in which the active compound is3-(3-carboxy-4-hydroxyphenyl)-2-phenylbenz[e]indole.6. A composition as defined in claim 2 in which the active compound is1-(3-carboxy-4-hydroxyphenyl)-2-phenylindole.7. A composition as defined in claim 2 in which the active compound is1-)3-carboxy-4-hydroxyphenyl)-2-phenyl-4,5,6,7-tetrahydroindole.8. A composition as defined in claim 2 in which the active compound is1-(3-carboxy-4-mercaptophenyl)-2-phenyl-4,5,6,7-tetrahydroindole.9. A composition as defined in claim 2 in which the active compound is1-(3-carboxy-4-hydroxyphenyl)-2-(4-fluorophenyl)-4,5,6,7-tetrahydroindole.10. A composition as defined in claim 2 in which the active compound is1-(3-carboxy-4-hydroxyphenyl)-2-phenyl-1,4,5,6-tetrahydrocyclopenta[b]pyrrole.11. A composition as defined in claim 2 in whichh the actice compound is1-(3-carboxy-4-hydroxyphenyl)-1,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydro-2-phenycyclohepta[b]pyrrole.12. A composition as defined in claim 2 in which the active compound is1-(3-carboxy-4-mercaptophenyl)-2-phenyl-4,5,6,7-tetrahydroindole.13. A method of treating inflammation and pain which comprisesadministering to a patient an effective amount from about 1 to about 200mg/kg per doz of an active compound of the formula##SPC114##whereinR is alkyl of one to six carbon atoms; thienyl; phenyl; diphenyl; or phenylsubstituted by halogen, trifluoromethyl alkyl of one to six carbon atoms,alkoxy of one to six carbon atoms, nitro, cyano, or hydroxy;R.sub.1 is carboxyl, alkoxycarbonyl of two to seven carbon atoms,carbamoyl, N-alkylcarbamoyl of two to seven carbon atoms,N,N,-dialkylcarbamoyl of three to seven carbon atoms, hydroxycarbamoyl, ordialkylphosphinylalkoxycarbonyl of four to 10 carbon atoms;R.sub.2 is hydrogen, hydroxyl, mercapto, halogen, trifluoromethyl, alkoxyof one to six carbon atoms, alkanoyloxy of one to six carbon atoms, amino,alkanoylamino of one to six carbon atoms, dialkylthiocarbamoyloxy of threeto seven carbon atoms, or dialkylcarbamoylthio of three to seven carbonatoms; n is 1 to 2;R.sub.3 is hydrogen, alkanoyl of one to six caron atoms, or phenyl;X is alkylene of three to five carbon atoms, alkylene of three to fivecarbon atoms substituted by alkyl or alkoxy of one to six carbon atoms,divinylene, divinylene substituted by alkyl of one to six carbon atoms,##SPC115##wherein D is hydrogen, alkoxy of one to six carbon atoms, or halogen.14. A method of treatment as defined in claim 13 wherein R is tertiarybutyl, thienyl, phenyl, diphenyl or phenyl substituted by chlorine,bromine, fluorine, hydroxyl, trifluoromethyl, methyl, methoxy, nitro orcyano;R.sub.1 is carboxyl, methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, carbamoyl,N-ethylcarbamoyl, N,N-diethylcarbamoyl, hydroxycarbamoyl ordimethylphosphinylmethoxycarbonyl;R.sub.2 is hydrogen, hydroxyl, mercapto, chlorine, bromine,trifluoromethyl, methoxy, acetyl, acetylamino, dimethylthiocarbamoyloxy ordimethylcarbamoylthio;R.sub.3 is hydrogen, acetyl, or phenyl; andX is alkylene of three to five carbon atoms, butylene substituted bymethyl, tertiary butyl or methoxy, divinylene, divinylene substituted bytertiary butyl,##SPC116##wherein D is hydrogen, methoxy or chlorine.15. The method of treatment as defined in claim 14 in which the activecompound is 3-(3-carboxy-4-hydroxyphenyl)-4,5-dihydro-2-phenylbenz[e]indole.16. The method of treatment as defined in claim 14 in which the activecompound is 3-(4-acetoxy-3-carboxyphenyl)-4,5-dihydro-2-phenylbenz[e]indole.17. The method of treatment as defined in claim 14 in which the activecompound is 3-(3-carboxy-4-hydroxyphenyl)-2-phenylbenz[e]indole.18. The method of treatment as defined in claim 14 in which the activecompound is 1-(3-carboxy-4-hydroxyphenyl)-2-phenylindole.19. The method of treatment as defined in claim 14 in which the activecompound is1-(3-carboxy-4-hydroxyphenyl)-2-phenyl-4,5,6,7-tetrahydroindole.20. The method of treatment as defined in claim 14 in which the activecompound is1-(3-carboxy-4-mercaptophenyl)-2-phenyl-4,5,6,7-tetrahydroindole.21. The method of treatment as defined in claim 14 in which the activecompound is1-(3-carboxy-4-hydroxyphenyl)-2-(4-fluorophenyl)-4,5,6,7-tetrahydroindole.22. The method of treatment as defined in claim 14 in which the activecompound is1-(3-carboxy-4-hydroxyphenyl)-2-phenyl-1,4,5,6-tetrahydrocyclopenta[b]pyrrole.23. The method of treatment is defined in claim 14 in which the activecompound is1-(3-carboxy-4-hydroxyphenyl)-1,4,5,6,7,8-hexahydro-2-phenylcyclohepta[b]pyrrole.24. The method of treatment as defined in claim 14 in which the activecompound is1-(3-carboxy-4-mercaptophenyl)-2-phenyl-4,5,6,7-tetrahydroindole."}
{"WKU":"039314081","Title":"Pesticidal compositions and methods of killing pests using","App_Date":"1974-06-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Erwin Nikles","Assignee":"Ciba-Geigy AG","ICL_Class":"A01N  920","References":"3202573","Claims":"I claim:1. A method of combating insects and acarids which comprises applyingthereto an insecticidally and acaricidally effective amount of a compoundof the formula##SPC4##in which each of R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 represents alkyl of from one to fourcarbon atoms or one of R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 represents hydrogen.2. The method of claim 1 in which one of R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 representshydrogen, methyl, ethyl or isopropyl and the other represents methyl,ethyl, n-propyl or isopropyl.3. The method of claim 2 in which the compound is##SPC5##4. The method of claim 2 in which the compound is##SPC6##5. The method of claim 2 in which the compound is##SPC7##6. An insecticidal and acaricidal composition which comprises (1) as activeingredient an insecticidally and acaricidally effective amount of acompound of the formula##SPC8##in which each of R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 represents alkyl of from one to fourcarbon atoms or one of R.sub.1 and R.sub.2 represents hydrogen, and (2) acarrier."}
{"WKU":"039314090","Title":"Composition and method for treatment of hyperuricemia","App_Date":"1974-11-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ardie R. Nickel;Franklin J. Rosenberg;James H. Ackerman","Assignee":"Sterling Drug Inc.","ICL_Class":"A61K 3124;A61K 31205","References":"3100226;3703546","Claims":"We claim:1. A composition for the treatment and prophylaxis of hyperuricemia in amammal which comprises in unit dosage form a uricosurically effectiveamount of a compound in an inert diluent, said compound having the formula##SPC4##wherein:R, r.degree. and R  are hydrogen or alkyl of 1-4 carbon atoms; andR  is hydrogen or alkanoyl of 1-6 carbon atoms, R  being limited toalkanoyl when R  is alkyl;or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof where R.degree. is hydrogen.2. A composition according to claim 1 wherein the inert diluent is a solidexcipient.3. A composition according to claim 1 wherein the compound is a salt andthe inert diluent is a sterile aqueous medium suitable for intravenousadministration.4. A composition according to claim 1 which comprises a uricosuricallyeffective amount of3-(n-butyramido)-2,4,6-trichloro-.alpha.-ethylhydrocinnamic acid in asolid excipient.5. A composition according to claim 1 which comprises a uricosuricallyeffective amount of 3-acetamido-2,4,6-trichloro-.alpha.-ethylhydrocinnamicacid in a solid excipient.6. A method for treatment and prophylaxis of hyperuricemia in a mammal,which comprises administering to said mammal a uricosurically effectiveamount of a compound in an inert diluent, said compound having the formula##SPC5##wherein:R, r.degree. and R  are hydrogen or alkyl of 1-4 carbon atoms; andR  is hydrogen or alkanoyl of 1-6 carbon atoms, R  being limited toalkanoyl when R  is alkyl;or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof where R.degree. is hydrogen.7. A method according to claim 6 in which the inert diluent is a solidexcipient and the administration is by the oral route.8. A method according to claim 6 in which the compound is a salt, the inertdiluent is a sterile aqueous medium, and the administration is by theintravenous route.9. A method according to claim 6 which comprises administering orally auricosurically effective amount of3-(n-butyramido)-2,4,6-trichloro-.alpha.-ethylhydrocinnamic acid in asolid excipient.10. A method according to claim 6 which comprises administering orally auricosurically effective amount of3-acetamido-2,4,6-trichloro-.alpha.-ethylhydrocinnamic acid in a solidexcipient."}
{"WKU":"039314103","Title":"Composition and method of use","App_Date":"1974-09-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Gilbert A. Youngdale","Assignee":"The Upjohn Company","ICL_Class":"A61K 3122","References":"3259649","Claims":"I claim:1. A pharmaceutical preparation in the form of an oral ration for rodentsconsisting essentially of an effective amount for producing epididymallesions and infertility in male rodents of a compound of the formula:##EQU2##wherein R  is a member selected from the group consisting of hydrogen andalkyl of from one to eight carbon atoms, inclusive, and R is a memberselected from the group consisting of hydrogen and an acyl radical of ahydrocarbon carboxylic acid of one to 18 carbon atoms, inclusive,compounded with an ingestible bulking agent acceptable to said rodents,said ration providing at least about 15 mg./kg. of male rodent bodyweight.2. The ration of claim 1 wherein the compound ismethyl-4-chloro-3-hydroxy-butyrate.3. The ration of claim 1 which contains from about 0.03% to about 0.5% byweight of said compound.4. A method of producing epididymal lesions and infertility in male rodentswhich comprises supplying to said rodents in locales available to andfrequented by said rodents a ration supplying an effective amount forproducing the lesions and infertility of a compound of the formula##EQU3##wherein R  is a member selected from the group consisting of hydrogen andalkyl of from one to eight carbon atoms, inclusive, and R is a memberselected from the group consisting of hydrogen and an acyl radical of ahydrocarbon carboxylic acid of one to 18 carbon atoms, inclusive.5. A method of claim 4 wherein the effective amount is at least about 15mg./kg. of body weight of said male rodents.6. The method of claim 4 wherein the compound ismethyl-4-chloro-3-hydroxy-butyrate."}
{"WKU":"039314111","Title":"Method for tranquilization without general depression","App_Date":"1973-12-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Walter Joseph Potts","Assignee":"G. D. Searle & Co.","ICL_Class":"A61K 3120;A61K 3123","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method for tranquilizing mammals without general depression comprisingadministering to a mammal in need of tranquilization an effective amountof a compound of the formula##SPC9##wherein R.sub.1 and R.sub.3 represent hydrogen or lower alkyl containing1-7 carbon atoms, R.sub.2 represents hydrogen or alkanoyl containing 1-6carbons, X represents ethylene or cis vinylene, Y represents transvinylene or ethynylene, and Z represents cis vinylene, or hydroxy- or(lower alkyl)-substituted ethylene in which the methylene portion isadjacent to the carbonyl of the cyclopentane ring in the formula.2. As in claim 1, a method for tranquilizing mammals without generaldepression comprising administering to a mammal in need of tranquilizationan effective amount of a compound selected from the group consisting ofPGA.sub.2, 15(S)-acetoxy-9-oxo-5-cis-10,13-trans-prostatrienoic acid,methyl 15(S)-11.beta.,15-dihydroxy-20-methyl-9-oxoprost-13-trans-enoate,3(RS)2-(3-hydroxy-1-heptynyl)-5-oxocyclopent-1-eneheptanoic acid,2-(3-hydroxy-1-octynyl)-5-oxocyclopent-1-eneoctanoic acid, methyl(3R)-hydroxy-2.alpha.-(3(S)-hydroxy-3R-methyl-1-octynyl)-5-oxocyclopentane-1.beta.-heptanoate, 2-((3RS)-3-hydroxy-1-nonynyl)-3-hydroxy-5-oxocyclopent-1-eneheptanoic acid, and15(S)-hydroxy-11-methyl-9-oxoprosta-5-cis-13-trans-dienoic acid.3. As in claim 1, a method for tranquilizing mammals without generaldepression comprising administering to a mammal in need of tranquilizationan effective amount of a compound selected from the group consisting ofPGA.sub.2 and 15(S)-acetoxy-9-oxo-5-cis-10,13-trans-prostatrienoic acid,and methyl15(S)-11.beta.,15-dihydroxy-20-methyl-9-oxoprost-13-trans-enoate.4. As in claim 1, a method for tranquilizing mammals without generaldepression comprising administering to a mammal in need of tranquilizationan effective amount of methyl15(S)-11.beta.,15-dihydroxy-20-methyl-9-oxoprost-13-trans-enoate."}
{"WKU":"039314120","Title":"Fungus and bacteria control with di-carboxylic acid esters","App_Date":"1974-05-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Daniel L. Kensler, Jr.;Gustave K. Kohn;David D. Walgenbach","Assignee":"Chevron Research Company","ICL_Class":"A01N  924","References":"3219630;3336262;3608085","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method for controlling the growth of fungi which comprises applying tosaid fungi or their habitat a fungicidally effective amount of a di-esterof the formula##EQU3##wherein R is alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms or alkenyl of 2 to 6 carbonatoms, R.sup.2 is alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms or alkenyl of 2 to 6 carbonatoms, R.sup.1 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms, chloroalkyl of 1to 4 carbon atoms and 1 to 5 chloro groups, alkenyl of 2 to 6 carbonatoms, phenyl, or alkphenyl of 7 to 10 carbon atoms, and n is 1, 2 or 3.2. The method of claim 1 wherein R.sup.1 is alkenyl of 2 to 6 carbon atoms.3. The method of claim 2 wherein the di-ester is allylidene bispropionate.4. The method of claim 1 wherein R.sup.1 is chloroalkyl.5. The method of claim 1 wherein the di-ester is 2,2,2-trichloroethylidenebispropionate.6. The method of claim 1 wherein R.sup.1 is phenyl or alkphenyl of 7 to 10carbon atoms.7. The method of claim 6 wherein the di-ester is benzylidene bispropionate.8. A method of controlling the growth of fungi which comprises applying tosaid fungi or their habitat a fungicidally effective amount of a di-esterof the formula##EQU4##wherein R is alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms, R.sup.2 is alkyl of 1 to 6carbon atoms, R.sup.1 is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms and n is1, 2 or 3.9. The method of claim 8 wherein R.sup.1 is hydrogen and n is 1 or 2.10. The method of claim 9 wherein R and R.sup.2 are methyl.11. The method of claim 9 wherein R and R.sup.2 are ethyl.12. The method of claim 9 wherein R and R.sup.2 are n-propyl.13. The method of claim 8 wherein R and R.sup.2 are isopropyl.14. The method of claim 8 wherein R.sup.1 is alkyl of 1 to 3 carbon atomsand n is 1.15. The method of claim 14 wherein R.sup.1 is methyl.16. The method of claim 15 wherein R and R.sup.2 are methyl.17. The method of claim 8 wherein the fungal habitat is a vegetativeproduct or animal feedstuff.18. The method of claim 17 wherein the vegetative products are forage cropsor seeds.19. The method of claim 18 wherein the seed is a cereal grain or a nutseed.20. The method of claim 18 wherein the crop is peanuts.21. The method of claim 18 wherein the crop is wood chips, hay, corn,soybeans or sorghum.22. The method of claim 18 wherein R.sup.1 is hydrogen, R and R.sup.2 arethe same alkyl, and n is 1 or 2.23. The method of claim 22 wherein the di-ester is methylene bispropionate.24. The method of claim 8 wherein the di-ester is formulated with abiologically inert carrier.25. The method of claim 8 wherein an aqueous solution of the di-ester isemployed.26. A method for the control of Venturia inaequalis fungus which comprisesapplying to said fungus or its habitat a fungicidally effective amount ofthe compound defined in claim 8.27. The method of claim 26 wherein R.sup.1 is hydrogen, R and R.sup.2 arethe same alkyl and n is 1 or 2.28. The method of claim 27 wherein the di-ester is methylene bispropionate.29. A method for the control of bacteria which comprises applying to saidbacteria or their habitat a bactericidally effective amount of thedi-ester of claim 8."}
{"WKU":"039314138","Title":"Control of fungi","App_Date":"1974-05-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Eric Lionel Frick;Roy Terry Burchill","Assignee":"National Research Development Corporation","ICL_Class":"A01N  900;A01N  922;A01N  924","References":"1589866;2030093;2576987;3717706;3849558","Claims":"We claim:1. A method for the treatment of plants in order to inhibit infectioncaused by a fungus which is capable of overwintering in the bud of theplant said fungus selected from the group consisting of Venturiainaequalis, Venturia pirina, Podosphaera leucotricha, Sphaerotheca pannosavar. Persicae, Uncinula necator and Taphrina deformans, which consistsessentially of applying a fungidical amount of an aliphatic acidcontaining six to 18 carbon atoms to said buds of the plant during theperiod of dormancy of said buds.2. A method according to claim 1, wherein the plant is selected from thegroup consisting of an apple tree, a pear tree, a peach tree, a rose bushand a grape vine.3. A method for the treatment of plants in order to inhibit infectioncaused by a fungus of the type which is capable of overwintering in thebud of the plant, which fungus infection is caused by a fungus selectedfrom the group consisting of Venturia inaequalis, Venturia pirina andPodosphaera leucotricha, which consists essentially of applying afungicidal amount of an aliphatic acid containing six to 18 carbon atomsto the buds of the plant during the period of dormancy of said buds.4. A method according to claim 3, wherein the plant is selected from thegroup consisting of an apple tree and a pear tree.5. A method according to claim 3, wherein said fungus infection is causedby Podosphaera leucotricha and the plant is an apple.6. A method according to claim 1, wherein said compound is selected fromthe group consisting of an aliphatic acid containing from six to 12 carbonatoms.7. A method according to claim 6 wherein said compound is selected from thegroup consisting of octanoic, decanoic and undecanoic acid.8. A method according to claim 6, wherein said compound is decanoic acid.9. A method according to claim 6, wherein said compound is undecanoic acid.10. A method according to claim 1, wherein the plant is treated during theperiod of dormancy of the buds before leaf fall.11. A method according to claim 1, wherein the compound is applied to theplant in the form of a composition containing from 1 to 6% (w/v) of thecompound in a diluent or carrier.12. A method according to claim 11, wherein said composition contains from3 to 5% (w/v) of the compound in a diluent or carrier.13. A method according to claim 1, wherein the compound is applied to theplant as an aqueous composition at high volume.14. A method according to claim 1, wherein the aliphatic acid is applied tothe plant in the form of a composition containing a surface active agent.15. A method according to claim 14, wherein said surface active agent isnon-ionic or anionic.16. A method according to claim 15, wherein said surface active agent is afatty acid ester of a polyoxyethylene sorbitan containing from about threeto about 80 oxyethylene units per molecule and wherein the fatty acidgroup has from about eight to about 18 carbon atoms.17. A method according to claim 16, wherein said surface active agent isselected from the group consisting of a dodecanoate ester ofpolyethoxylated sorbitan containing an average of 20 oxyethylene units permolecule, an oleate ester of polyethoxylated sorbitan containing anaverage of 20 oxyethylene units per molecule, and a dodecanoate ester ofpolyethoxylated sorbitan containing an average of about five oxyethyleneunits per molecule.18. A method according to claim 15, wherein said surface active agent is apolyethylene oxide condensate of an alkyl phenol wherein the alkyl groupcontains from six to 12 carbon atoms, and wherein said ethylene oxide ispresent in an amount of from 5 to 25 moles of ethylene oxide per mole ofalkyl phenol."}
{"WKU":"039314146","Title":"Fish bait composition","App_Date":"1974-07-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Samuel J. Popeil","Assignee":"Popeil Bros., Inc.","ICL_Class":"A01K 8500;A23L  1325","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A fish bait composition which includesa dry component comprising a pulverulent fish food including at least fishmeal, said fish food having at least a 30% protein content, and said drycomponent further comprising pulverized freeze dried fish eggs which havea fine particle size relative to the coarser particle size of the fishfood,said pulverized freeze dried fish eggs being distributed throughout saidcoarser fish food,water intimately mixed with said dry component in an amount sufficient tomoisten all the particles present in said dry component, andsaid pulverized freeze dried fish eggs present in the dry component beingin an amount sufficient to provide binding so a resultant cohesive mass ofthe moistened fish bait particles can be formed for mounting to a fishhook and retention on said fish hook when depositing the fish hook andmounted fish bait composition into a body of water to attract fish.2. A fish bait composition which includes the features of claim 1 abovewherein said dry component consists essentially of about equal parts byvolume of the pulverized freeze dried fish eggs and the fish food.3. A fish bait composition which includes the features of claim 2 whereinabout four parts by volume of said dry component is mixed with about threeparts by volume of said water to obtain said cohesive mass.4. A fish bait composition which includes the features of claim 1 whereinsaid dry component further includes a water activated natural plantbinder.5. A fish bait composition which includes the features of claim 4 whereinsaid fish food is present in a major proportion in said dry component, andsaid pulverized freeze dried fish eggs and plant binder together arepresent in a minor proportion in said dry component.6. A fish bait composition which includes the features of claim 5 whereinabout one part by volume of said dry component is combined with aboutone-half part by volume of said water to obtain said cohesive mass.7. A fish bait composition which includes the features of claim 4 whereinsaid plant binder is a vegetable gum activated by water to at least swellin the presence of such water.8. A fish bait composition which includes the features of claim 4 whereinsaid plant binder is a starch activated by water to at least swell in thepresence of such water.9. A fish bait composition which includes the features of claim 4 whereinsaid plant binder is dextrin which is activated by dissolving in water.10. A fish bait composition which includes the features of claim 1 whereinsaid dry component is present from about 50% to about 70% by volume in thecomposition, and said water is present from about 30% to about 50% byvolume in said composition.11. A fish bait composition which includes the features of claim 10 whereinsaid fish food in said dry component is present from about 50% to about90% by volume, and said pulverized freeze dried fish eggs are present fromabout 10% to about 50% by volume in the dry component.12. A fish bait composition which includes the features of claim 11 whereinsaid dry component further includes from about 5% to about 15% of a wateractivated plant binder, with the further provision that the pulverizedfreeze dried fish eggs are present in about the same parts by volume assaid plant binder.13. A fish bait composition which includes the features of claim 12 whereinsaid plant binder is selected from the group consisting of a wateractivated vegetable gum, a water activated starch, and water activateddextrin.14. A fish bait composition which includes the features of claim 12 whereinsaid dry component comprises about equal parts by volume of fish food andpulverized freeze dried fish eggs, and wherein about four parts by volumeof said dry component is mixed with about three parts by volume of saidwater.15. A fish bait composition which includes the features of claim 12 whereinsaid dry component comprises about five parts by volume of dry fish food,about one-half part by volume of pulverized freeze dried fish eggs andabout one-half part by volume of an plant binder, and wherein about twoparts by volume of said dry component is combined with about one part byvolume of the water to obtain said cohesive mass.16. A fish bait composition which includes the features of claim 15 whereinsaid plant binder includes a mixture of water activated vegetable gum andplant starch.17. A fish bait dry component adapted to be combined with water to obtain amoistened, moldable, cohesive mass for mounting to a fish hook, said drycomponent including fish food of coarsely ground particles including atleast fish meal and having a protein content of at least 30%, andpulverized freeze dried fish eggs distributed throughout said fish food,said fish eggs having a fine particle size relative to said fish food.18. A fish bait dry component which includes the features of claim 17wherein said dry component further includes a minor amount of a wateractivated plant binder selected from the group consisting of vegetablegum, plant starch, and dextrin.19. A fish bait dry component which includes the features of claim 18wherein said fish food comprises a major proportion, and said freeze driedfish eggs and plant binder are present in about equal proportions byweight, and comprise a minor proportion of said dry component.20. A fish bait dry component which includes the features of claim 18wherein said dry fish food is present from about 70% to about 90% byvolume and each of the freeze dried eggs and plant binder is present fromabout 5% to about 15% by volume in said dry component.21. A fish bait dry component which includes the features of claim 20wherein said dry fish food is present in about 80% by volume and each ofsaid freeze dried fish eggs and plant binder is present at about 10% byvolume in said dry component.22. A fish bait dry component which includes the features of claim 21wherein said plant binder is a mixture of water activated vegetable gumand plant starch.23. A fish bait dry component which includes the features of claim 17wherein said dry fish food and said pulverized freeze dried fish eggs arepresent in about equal proportions by volume in said dry component."}
{"WKU":"039314154","Title":"Raw fish bait product and method of making same","App_Date":"1974-10-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Lars T. Larsen;Robert M. Morse","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"A23L  1325;A23K  110;A01K 9704","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A fish bait product consisting almost entirely of relatively solidlycompacted body of comminuted, substantially dried out raw fish remnantshaving structural integrity sufficient to maintain its basic form andshape when submerged in water.2. A product according to claim 1 and wherein said raw fish remnantsconsist almost entirely of raw fish carcasses.3. A product according to claim 1 and wherein said remnants include amixture of raw fish carcasses and a relatively minor amount of remnantsfrom non-skeletal raw fish such as squid.4. A product according to claim 1 which is substantially free of anysubstantive amounts of preservatives or additives.5. The product of claim 1 and wherein the density of the wafer is in therange of 15 -  20 grams per cubic inch.6. A method of making a raw fish bait product comprising the steps ofcomminuting the remnants of fresh raw fish; drying the comminuted mass toa point where said mass is substantially dry to the touch and has asubstantially coarse meally texture and consistency; then compressing andcompacting said comminuted dry raw fish particles into a discrete body ofgeometric form and shape having structural integrity sufficient tomaintain its basic form and shape when submerged in water."}
{"WKU":"039314162","Title":"Process for manufacturing calcium-sodium-phosphate consisting mainly of","App_Date":"1974-08-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Gerhard Grams;Hans Ratajczak","Assignee":"Chemische Fabrik Kalk GmbH","ICL_Class":"A23K  116","References":"1902832;2442969;2893834;2997367;3058804;3074780;3101999;3426837;3658549;3851086","Claims":"We claim:1. In a process for manufacturing calcium-sodium-phosphates consistingmainly of Rhenanit and suitable as supplementary animal food by heating amixture of crude phosphate, phosphoric acid and sodium hydroxide or sodiumcompounds with anions, which are volatile under the process reactionconditions, to temperatures not exceeding 1,000.degree.C, the improvementcomprising granulating the mixture which contains 1.75 to 2.25 mole CaOand 1.25 to 0.75 mole Na.sub.2 O per mole P.sub.2 O.sub.5, drying theresulting granules, heating the granules for at least 10 minutes, whilebeing subjected to vigorous movement, up to temperatures between600.degree. to 1,000.degree.C so as to defluorinate the granulatedmixture, and finally cooling the granules to room temperature so as toobtain a calcium-sodium-phosphate product having a substantially reducedfluorine content.2. Process according to claim 1, wherein the granules are heated to atemperature of 800.degree. to 1,000.degree.C."}
{"WKU":"039314170","Title":"Method of manifold copying","App_Date":"1972-01-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert J. Wright","Assignee":"Moore Business Forms Inc.","ICL_Class":"G03G 1600","References":"3108894;3206600;3579330","Claims":"I claim:1. The method of manifold copying comprising the following steps:A. preparing a multiplicity of thin record sheets to form on each sheet animage-receiving dielectric surface coating having a resistivity of atleast 10.sup.12 ohms per square centimeter and a lower resistivity coatedreverse surface having a resistivity in the range of 10.sup.3 to 10.sup.8ohms per square centimeter at 50 percent relative humidity, limiting thedielectric surface coating to a coating weight of no more than 10 gramsper square meter;B. forming a manifold pack by stacking a plurality of said record sheets,sheet-on-sheet, with all of the dielectric surfaces facing in onedirection so that each dielectric surface in the stack, except theoutermost dielectric surface, is in direct contact with the lowerresistivity reverse surface of the next adjacent sheet;C. positioning the manifold pack on a support with the reverse surfacesfacing toward the support and the dielectric surfaces facing outwardlyfrom the support;D. contacting the dielectric surface of the outermost sheet with pressureimaging means in accordance with a given pattern to be reproduced, wherebythe dielectric surface of each sheet except the outermost sheet iscontacted in pattern form by the lower resistivity surface of theoverlying sheet, thereby forming a latent image of said pattern on eachdielectric surface;E. separating the sheets of the manifold pack, the dielectric surface ofeach sheet retaining a latent image of said pattern; andF. developing the latent image on each sheet, without further charging orimaging, with a developer including marking means capable of deposition inresponse to said latent image.2. The method of manifold copying, in accordance with claim 1, in which therecord sheets are prepared by coating thin paper stock having a weight ofabout 25 grams per square meter with a continuous dielectric layer havinga density of 1 to 10 grams per square meter.3. The method of manifold copying, in accordance with claim 2, in which thedielectric layer is formed from a material selected from the groupconsisting of alkyd resins, epoxy resins, vinyl resins, and syntheticrubbers.4. The method of manifold copying in accordance with claim 2, in which thepreparation of each record sheet includes the step of coating the reverseside of the sheet with a continuous layer of vinylbenzyl trimethylammonium chloride.5. The method of manifold copying in accordance with claim 2, in which thepreparation of each record sheet includes the step of coating the reverseside of the sheet with a continuous layer of polyelectrolyte resin."}
{"WKU":"039314189","Title":"Process for the production of insulating coatings on electrical","App_Date":"1974-02-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Karl-Heinz Risken","Assignee":"Dr. Kurt Herberts & Co. Gesellschaft mit beschrankter Haftung Vorm. Otto","ICL_Class":"B05D  512;B05D  302","References":"2216234;2512722;2671744;2683100;2686740;2936296;3058948;3118861;3668275;3707403;3746570","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a process for the production of an insulating coating on anelectrical conductor comprising coating the conductor by passing theconductor through a bath of a thermosetting polyester-based stoving resincomprising a condensation product of a polyvalent aromatic carboxylic acidwith a polyhydric alcohol and a stoving catalyst and thereafter heatingthe coated conductor to an elevated temperature sufficient to cure thecondensation product, the improvement which comprises said polyester-basedresin being a low molecular weight resin having from about 0.85 to 1 moleof polyhydric alcohol in co-condensed form per equivalent ofpolycarboxylic acid and having a melt viscosity of from 1,000 to 40,000 mPa s at a temperature between room temperature and 120.degree. C., saidpolyester-based resin containing a co-condensed carboxylic acid compoundcontaining a five-membered imide ring and said coating being carried outby passing the conductor through a melt of said resin at a melttemperature between room temperature and 120.degree. C., said melt beingsubstantially free of solvents which do not take part in the reaction bywhich the polyester resins are produced and containing less than about 10%content of said solvent.2. A process as defined by claim 1, wherein coating is carried out in theabsence of said solvents.3. A process as defined by claim 1, wherein the coating compositioncontains a stoving residue of at least 70% by weight.4. A process as defined by claim 1, wherein the polyester resins have aresin melt viscosity of between 1,000 and 30,000 m Pa s at a temperaturebetween room temperature and 120.degree. C.5. A process as defined by claim 1, wherein the polyester resins are lowmolecular weight resins having a number average molecular weight of from250 to 700.6. A process as defined by claim 5, wherein the polyesters contain from0.95 to 1 mol of polyhydric alcohols in co-condensed form per equivalentof carboxylic acid.7. A process as defined by claim 1, wherein the polyester additionallycontains co-condensed carboxylic acids or alcohols having a functionalitygreater than 2.8. A process as defined by claim 7, wherein there are from about 5 to about300 equivalents of said carboxylic acids or alcohols having afunctionality greater than 2 per 100 equivalents of dicarboxylic acid inthe polyesters.9. A process as defined by claim 8, wherein there are from about 50 toabout 100 equivalents of said carboxylic acids or alcohols having afunctionality greater than 2 per 100 equivalents of dicarboxylic acid inthe polyesters.10. A process as defined by claim 7, wherein the carboxylic acids oralcohols having a functionality greater than 2 contain 3 or 4 functionalgroups.11. The process as defined by claim 1, wherein said polyester-based stovingresin additionally contains up to about 25 mole % of a co-condensedaliphatic polycarboxylic acid.12. The process as defined by claim 1, wherein said polyester-based stovingresin additionally contains up to about 25 mole % of a co-condensed aminogroup-containing compound.13. The process as defined by claim 3, wherein the coating compositioncontains a stoving residue of at least 80% by weight.14. The process as defined by claim 13, wherein the coating compositioncontains a stoving residue of at least 85% by weight.15. The process as defined by claim 1, wherein said melt temperature isbetween room temperature and about 100.degree. C.16. The process as defined by claim 15, wherein said melt temperature isbetween room temperature and about 60.degree. C.17. The process as defined by claim 16, wherein said melt temperature isroom temperature.18. The process as defined by claim 1, wherein said carboxylic acidcompound containing a five-membered imide ring is derived from trimelliticacid or trimellitic anhydride and a diamine.19. The process as defined by claim 1, wherein said polyhydric alcohol isselected from the group consisting of glycerin, butylene glycol, propyleneglycol, ethylene glycol, tris-(.beta.-hydroxyethyl)-isocyanurate,trimethylolpropane and trimethylolethane.20. The process as defined by claim 1, wherein said polycarboxylic acid isselected from the group consisting of terephthalic acid, isophthalic acid,orthophthalic acid, trimellitic acid, pyromellitic acid, esters thereof,anhydrides thereof and tris-(2 carboxyethyl)-isocyanurate.21. The process as defined by claim 12, wherein said amino group-containingcompound is selected from the group consisting of ethanolamine, ethylenediamine, amino-methylolpropane and p-aminobenzyl alcohol."}
{"WKU":"039314197","Title":"Coating with arylene sulfide polymer cured with the aid of certain","App_Date":"1974-12-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jennings P. Blackwell","Assignee":"Phillips Petroleum Company","ICL_Class":"B05D  302;B32B 1508","References":"3354129;3408342;3492125;3524835;3622376;3634125;3658753;3728313;3728313","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method of forming a coated substrate comprising:applying a coating composition comprising an arylene sulfide polymer and aneffective cure accelerating amount of a compound selected from the groupconsisting of:a. aluminum phosphate;b. a polyfunctional benzene derivative in which at least two positions onthe benzene nucleus are replaced by a functional group selected from OHand NH.sub.2 with the substitution being in the meta or para position ifonly two positions are substituted;c. a metal salt selected from cobalt sulfate, cobalt acetate, ferroussulfate, or cupric naphthenate; andd. ammonium persulfate, to a substrate;and thereafter heating said substrate for a time within the range of 10 to40 minutes and a temperature within the range of 575.degree. to725.degree.F.2. A method according to claim 1 wherein said polymer is poly(phenylenesulfide), said time is 15 to 20 minutes and said temperature is600.degree. to 700.degree.F.3. A method according to claim 1 wherein said composition contains inaddition 10 to 50 parts by weight of a pigment filler based on 100 partsby weight of said polymer.4. A method according to claim 1 wherein said substrate is steel.5. A process according to claim 1 wherein said compound is present in anamount within the range of 1 to 5 weight per cent based on the weight ofsaid polymer.6. A process according to claim 1 wherein said compound is aluminumphosphate.7. A process according to claim 1 wherein said compound is selected fromthe group consisting of para-amino phenol, 1,3-dihydroxybenzene, and1,2,3-trihydroxybenzene.8. A process according to claim 1 wherein said compound is selected fromthe group consisting of cobalt sulfate, cobalt acetate, ferrous sulfate,and cupric naphthenate.9. A process according to claim 1 wherein said compound is ammoniumpersulfate.10. A process according to claim 1 wherein said polymer is polyphenylenesulfide."}
{"WKU":"039314200","Title":"Temperature compensated acoustic surface wave device","App_Date":"1973-05-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Manfred B. Schulz;Melvin G. Holland","Assignee":"Raytheon Company","ICL_Class":"B05D  512","References":"3347703;3385731;3388002;3409464;3469120;3573960","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. The method of forming a surface wave delay line comprising the steps of:depositing at least an electrode array upon a non-piezoelectric substrate;anddepositing a piezoelectric overlay film on said electrode array, thethickness of said film being such that the temperature coefficient ofdelay of surface waves is substantially zero at at least one wavelength ofsaid surface waves.2. The method in accordance with claim 1 wherein said substrate is of athickness large with respect to said wavelength.3. The method in accordance with claim 2 wherein the step of depositing theoverlay film comprises the vacuum deposition of zinc oxide on a fusedsilica substrate.4. The method in accodance with claim 1 wherein said step of depositingsaid electrode array comprises forming a metal film on said substrate andremoving portions of said film to form said array.5. The method in accordance with claim 4 wherein said substrate comprisesfused silica.6. The method of forming a surface wave delay line comprising the steps of:depositing at least an electrode array upon a piezoelectric substrate; anddepositing a non-piezoelectric overlay film on said electrode array, thethickness of said film being such that the temperature coefficient ofdelay of surface waves is substantially zero at at least one wavelength ofsaid surface waves.7. The method in accordance with claim 6 wherein said substrate is of athickness large with respect to said wavelength.8. The method of claim 7 wherein said step of depositing an electrode arraycomprises forming a metal film on said substrate and removing portions ofsaid film to form said array.9. The method of claim 8 wherein said overlay film comprises a compound ofoxygen.10. The method of claim 9 wherein said substrate comprises zinc oxide."}
{"WKU":"039314219","Title":"Coating with a dispersion of an arylene sulfide polymer containing high","App_Date":"1974-09-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Dale O. Tieszen;James T. Edmonds, Jr.","Assignee":"Phillips Petroleum Company","ICL_Class":"B05D  300;B05D  700","References":"3311494;3312651;3492125;3616186;3622376;3652327;3701665;3819407","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for forming a coated article comprising:applying to a substrate a dispersion formed by subjecting fluorocarbonpolymer, in particulate form, having a molecular weight sufficient to givea melt viscosity flow of 0.degree. at 380.degree.C using a 5000 g. weight,to intensive dry milling by ball milling or rod milling with a pigment inparticulate form; and thereafter subjecting the resulting mixture tointensive milling by ball milling or rod milling with poly (arylenesulfide) in particulate form in a liquid selected from water, ethyleneglycol, or propylene glycol; andheating said thus applied dispersion at a temperature of at least500.degree.F to form a cured coating.2. A method according to claim 1 wherein said fluorocarbon polymer ispolytetrafluoroethylene.3. A method according to claim 2 wherein said liquid is water containing asurface active agent.4. A method according to claim 3 wherein said poly(arylene sulfide) ispolyphenylene sulfide.5. A method according to claim 4 wherein said pigment is titanium dioxide.6. A method according to claim 4 wherein said pigment, fluorocarbon polymerand arylene sulfide particles each have a particle size of less than 40mesh.7. A method according to claim 4 wherein a ratio of said polyphenylenesulfide to polytetrafluoroethylene is within the range of 5:1 to 20:1, andthe total solids content is within the range of 20-40 weight per centbased on the total weight of said dispersion.8. A method according to claim 4 wherein said intensive dry milling is donefor a time period of greater than 2 days and said intensive milling withsaid liquid is done for a time of greater than 8 hours.9. A method according to claim 1 wherein said fluorocarbon is present in anamount within the range of 0.02 to 1 part by weight per 1 part by weightof said pigment and a ratio of said poly(arylene sulfide) to fluorocarbonpolymer is within the range of 3:1 to 30:1 and wherein the total solidscontent is within the range of 15 to 40 weight per cent based on the totalweight of said dispersion.10. A method according to claim 1 wherein said intensive dry milling isdone for a time period of greater than 2 days.11. A method according to claim 1 wherein said intensive dry milling isdone by vibratory ball milling for a time period of greater than 8 hours.12. A method according to claim 1 wherein said dispersion is applied bymeans of spraying.13. A method according to claim 1 wherein said thus applied dispersion isheated to a temperature within the range of 600- 850.degree.F for a timewithin the range of 15 minutes to 2 hours to effect said cure.14. A coated article formed by the process of claim 1."}
{"WKU":"039314227","Title":"Polyester/starch paper sizing","App_Date":"1974-10-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Mark E. Bateman;Eugene M. Holda","Assignee":"Standard Oil Company","ICL_Class":"B05D  102;C08L  302;C09D  320","References":"3351604;3650997","Claims":"We claim:1. The method of improving the water-resistance of paper which comprisessizing said paper at the size press with a composition comprising degradedstarch and a polyester of polyhydric alcohol and a trimellitic acidcompound, said polyester having an average molecular weight under about4,000 and an acid number of at least 35, wherein said polyester is presentin a weight ratio of 0.1 to 100 parts by weight per each 100 parts byweight starch solids.2. The process of claim 1 wherein said polyester contains primarilyintralinear free carboxyl groups.3. The process of claim 1 wherein said polyester has a substantially linearbackbone comprising esterified polyhydric alcohol and dicarboxylic acidmoieties having an acid number of about 0 to 25 and sufficient terminaltrimellitic groups providing the polyester with an acid number of at least35.4. The process of claim 3 wherein said starch has a fluidity of about 75 to97 cc.5. The process of claim 4 wherein said polyester has an acid number of atleast 70."}
{"WKU":"039314235","Title":"Non-aerated pudding compositions","App_Date":"1974-05-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William Alexander Mitchell;George Emil Orozovich;William Charles Seidel","Assignee":"General Foods Corporation","ICL_Class":"A23L  1187","References":"3231391;3364036","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An instant non-aerated creamytextured pudding composition comprising incombination a low molecular weight aliphatic acid ester of a polyhydricalcohol and a modified starch, the amount of acid ester present being inthe range of about 0.3 to 3 percent by weight of the pudding such that nopreparation said pudding has a reduced tendency to foam.2. The composition as claimed in claim 1 wherein the amount of acid esterpresent is from about 0.5 to about 1.5 percent.3. The composition as claimed in claim 2 wherein the amount of acid esterpresent is about 1 percent.4. The composition as claimed in claim 1 wherein the low molecular weightacid ester of the polyhydric alcohol is triacetin.5. The composition as claimed in claim 1 wherein the modified starch has adegree of propoxylation of about 5 to about 10 percent.6. The composition as claimed in claim 4 wherein the degree ofpropoxylation is 2 to 7 percent."}
{"WKU":"039314243","Title":"Prefabricated thermal insulation structure and method","App_Date":"1973-12-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jack C. Helf;Frank E. Mack","Assignee":"Rockwell International Corporation","ICL_Class":"B32B  704","References":"3099362;3112043;3196622;3230681;3319431;3367492;3367527;3411656;3502239;3525661;3757982","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A multilayer insulation system comprisinga first layer of cellular foam,a liquid-impervious membrane attached to the inner surface of said firstlayer,a second layer of cellular foam having one surface attached to the innersurface of said membrane, said second layer of foam comprising a pluralityof foam blocks attached to said membrane in edge-to-edge abutment with oneanother, and means for forming an expansion joint between adjacent ones ofsaid foam blocks of said second layer, said means for forming an expansionjoint comprising"}
{"WKU":"039314251","Title":"Simulated stained-glass article and method of making the same","App_Date":"1974-05-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Minoru Kuroda","Assignee":"Nishizawa Shoji Co. Ltd;Dimension Weld International Corporation","ICL_Class":"B44C  508","References":"1800763;2710046;2749640;3183140;3382134;3533889;3633221","Claims":"What is claimed as new and desired to be protected by letters patent is setforth in the appended claims:1. A simulated stained-glass article which has a realistic appearance whenviewed from either side, comprising a top layer of at least translucentsynthetic plastic sheet material having two opposite major surfaces; abottom layer of clear synthetic plastic sheet material laminated to one ofsaid surfaces of said top layer; raised ridges on the other of said majorsurfaces and forming design lines which visually subdivide said top layerinto a plurality of portions; first black color lines substantiallycoextensive with said ridges at said other major surface; second blackcolor lines on said one major surface and each registering with one ofsaid first black color lines; and a plurality of transparent inks ofdifferent colors applied to the respective portions on at least one ofsaid major surfaces.2. An article as defined in claim 1, wherein at least said top layer ispolyvinyl chloride.3. An article as defined in claim 1, wherein both of said layers arepolyvinyl chloride.4. An article as defined in claim 1, wherein said layers are ofthermoplastic material and are thermally laminated to one another.5. An article as defined in claim 1, said bottom layer having a side facingaway from said top layer; and further comprising a layer of adhesivematerial on said side for affixing said article to a support.6. An article as defined in claim 5, wherein said adhesive material is anactively adhesive material; and further comprising a layer of releasematerial covering said layer of adhesive material to protect the sameuntil the time of use.7. An article as defined in claim 1, wherein at least one of said majorsurfaces is embossed to simulate rough glass.8. A method of making a simulated stained-glass article, comprising thesteps of forming one of two major surfaces of an at least translucentsynthetic plastic sheet with raised ridges which subdivide said one majorsurface into a plurality of portions; applying first black color lines tosaid raised ridges at said one major surface; applying different-coloredtransparent inks to the respective portions; applying to the other of saidmajor surfaces second black color lines which each register with one ofthe first black color lines of said one major surface; and laminating asheet of clear synthetic plastic sheet material to the first-mentionedsheet.9. A method as defined in claim 8, wherein said sheets are thermoplastic,and wherein the step of laminating comprises heat-welding said sheetstogether.10. A method as defined in claim 9, wherein the step of laminatingcomprises applying pressure to said sheets while heat-welding themtogether.11. A method as defined in claim 10, wherein said pressure is applied atleast at said portions.12. A method as defined in claim 8; and further comprising the step ofapplying a layer of adhesive to a side of said clear plastic sheet whichfaces away from said first-mentioned sheet.13. A method as defined in claim 12, wherein said adhesive is an activelyadhesive material; and further comprising the step of applying arelease-material sheet over said adhesive to protect the latter until thetime of use."}
{"WKU":"039314260","Title":"Marking tape assembly","App_Date":"1974-07-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Philip N. Braun;Robert J. Filsinger","Assignee":"Philip N. Braun","ICL_Class":"B32B  304","References":"674058;972550;1393213;2035768;2096559;2282610;2648924;2670971;2800214;2976062;3135533;3153868;3691005","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A marking tape assembly for applying permanent marking indicia to anidentifying label, said assembly comprising in combination:a. a first sheet having a pressure sensitive adhesive on one surfacethereof;b. a second sheet having a pressure transferable permanent marking materialon one surface thereof;c. a tape element having a heat sensitive adhesive on one surface thereofand adapted to receive on the other surface markings transferred from saidone surface of said second sheet;d. said first and second sheets being secured together by said pressuresensitive adhesive, a first portion of said one surface of said firstsheet being covered by said second sheet, and a second portion adapted tobe exposed for adherence to a support surface;e. said second sheet and said tape being so constructed and arranged thatsaid one surface of said second sheet is in facing engagement with saidother surface of said tape, and the latter is disposed to receive markingstransferred from said second sheet when said second portion of said onesurface of said first sheet is secured to a support surface; andf. a protective sheet releasably secured to said first sheet in coveringrelation to said second portion of said one surface.2. The invention according to claim 1 wherein said second sheet comprises asheet of carbon paper.3. The invention according to claim 1 wherein a first longitudinal edgeportion only of said second sheet is attached to said first sheet, leavingthe major portion unattached, and the unattached portion of said secondsheet is folded along a line parallel to said first longitudinal edge withsaid one surface innermost to provide two layers with said tape disposedbetween said layers and in contact with said one surface of said secondsheet.4. The invention according to claim 1 wherein said protective sheet extendsfrom covering relation with said first sheet to lie in unengaged, coveringrelation to at least a portion of said other surface of said second sheet.5. The invention according to claim 4 wherein said protective sheet istransparent.6. The invention according to claim 1 wherein both said second sheet andsaid tape are secured over substantially their entire areas to said firstsheet and the latter may be folded along a medial line between said secondsheet and tape to bring the two into juxtaposition with said one surfaceof said second sheet in facing engagement with said other surface of saidtape.7. The invention according to claim 6 wherein a portion of said first sheetextends outwardly from said second sheet to provide a portion foradhesively securing to an underlying support surface with said othersurface of said tape facing upwardly.8. The invention according to claim 7 wherein said first sheet is undersaid second sheet on the side of said medial line on which said secondsheet is attached to said first sheet rather than on the side on whichsaid tape is attached to said second sheet, said tape and said secondsheet on the side of said medial line on which said tape is attached bothbeing of substantially the same width.9. The invention according to claim 1 and further including a third sheetsecured to said first sheet by said pressure sensitive adhesive alongmutually overlapping marginal edges, said second sheet being attachedalong a marginal edge portion thereof to said first sheet adjacent theattachment thereto of said third sheet, said second sheet extending fromits attached edge in covering relation to said third sheet, the latterbeing folded along a line parallel to said marginal edge thereof to formtwo layers with a major portion of said second sheet disposedtherebetween, said tape being disposed between said second sheet and theone of said layers of said third sheet not secured to said first sheet.10. The invention according to claim 9 wherein said third sheet extendsfrom said marginal edge to a parallel free edge with said fold linetherebetween, the width of said third sheet between said fold line andsaid free edge being substantially equal to the width of said label, thelatter being disposed between said second sheet and the layer of saidthird sheet between said fold line and said free edge."}
{"WKU":"039314278","Title":"Stamp dyed napped fabric","App_Date":"1973-10-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jose Benzaquen","Assignee":"Benzaquen Sociedad Anonima Industrial, Commercial, Immobiliaria &","ICL_Class":"B32B 3300;D06C 1100","References":"3650800","Claims":"I claim as my invention:1. A process for treating the surface of a woven fabric which comprisesstamping one side of a substantially crude woven textile fabric with a dyeto superficially dye the surface of said one side of the fabric; and,submitting the side of the fabric thus stamped with dye to a superficialabrasion to produce a feltlike appearance and a simultaneous mutation inthe coloring of said superficially dyed surface.2. The process of claim 1, wherein said fabric is scoured and said one sideof said scoured fabric is stamped by a rotating stamping cylindercontaining a dye to superficially dye the fabric surface, and repeatedlysuperficially abrading said stamped side of the fabric to produce afeltlike appearance and a simultaneous mutation in the shade of thestamped surface.3. The process of claim 1, wherein said stamping is effected by a planeschablon.4. The process of claim 1, wherein said fabric is scoured and one side ofsaid scoured fabric is stamped with a dye containing pigments.5. A fabric having a treated surface, said fabric comprising a woven basefabric having one of its sides stamped with a dye such that the surface ofsaid one side of the fabric is superficially dyed, said superficially dyedsurface being abraded to produce a plurality of superficially raisedfibrils on the threads of said superficially dyed surface resulting in afeltlike appearance and shade of dye differing from the shade of the dyestamped on said surface, and the other side of said fabric beingsubstantially untreated.6. The fabric of claim 5 wherein the dye present on one of the sides of thefabric contains pigments, wherein the dye pigments are attached to thefibers of the fabric with a binder, and wherein said pigments arepartially loosened from said binder by abrasion to produce the differingdye shade on the stamped side of the fabric."}
{"WKU":"039314286","Title":"Substrate coated with super-hydrophobic layers","App_Date":"1974-01-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Franklin G. Reick","Assignee":"Michael Ebert","ICL_Class":"C08J  704;C08J  942;D06N  704","References":"2342979;2471224;2567804;3288983;3825371","Claims":"I claim:1. A product having super-hydrophobic properties, comprising a substratehaving a micro-rough face which is physically hydrophobic, said face beingcoated with hydrophobic fumed silicon dioxide particles which are bondedto said face by a binder having chemical hydrophobic properties, theamount of said binder, by weight relative to the amount of said particlesbeing less than one-half the amount of said particles.2. A product as set forth in claim 1, wherein said substrate is formed by alayer of closed-cell foam plastic material, the cells of which, on theface of the layer, are cut open to create a multiplicity of projectionsonto which said particles are bonded.3. A product as set forth in claim 2, wherein said material is selectedfrom the class consisting of foamed polyethylene and foamed polypropylene.4. A product as set forth in claim 1, wherein said substrate is formed byspunbonded olefin material.5. A product as set forth in claim 1, wherein said substrate is formed byspunbonded polyester material.6. A product as set forth in claim 1, wherein said substrate is in sheetform, the underface of which is adherable to the skin of an aircraft.7. A product as set forth in claim 1, wherein said binder is formed bypolystyrene.8. The method of fabricating a product having a super-hydrophobic surfacecomprising the steps of dissolving in a solvent a binder having chemicalhydrophobic properties, dispersing in the solvent particles of fumedhydrophobic silicon dioxide to form a flowable coating material, andapplying said material to the face of a substrate having a micro-roughsurface which is physically hydrophobic, whereby when the solvent isvolatilized, the resultant dry coating imparts super-hydrophobicproperties to the substrate, the amount of said binder, by weight,relative to the amount of said particles being less than one-half theamount of said particles.9. The method as set forth in claim 8, wherein said solvent is selectedfrom a class consisting of trichloroethylene, perchloroethylene andbenzene.10. The method as set forth in claim 8, wherein said substrate is formedfrom chemically-hydrophobic material.11. The method as set forth in claim 10, wherein said binder is formed ofhigh-impact polystyrene.12. The method as set forth in claim 7, further including the step ofcalendering the coated face of said substrate to lock the coating therein.13. The method as set forth in claim 7, wherein said substrate isconstituted by a porous sheet of spunbonded synthetic fibers which whentreated is capable of functioning as a selective filter to block thepassage of water and to pass other fluids."}
{"WKU":"039314294","Title":"Surface covering materials","App_Date":"1974-02-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Michael Charles Austin","Assignee":"Marley Tile A.G.","ICL_Class":"B32B  300;B32B  326","References":"2920977;3591401","Claims":"I claim:1. A process for the production of surface covering materials having atextured effect which comprises (a) applying a layer of a first foamableresinous composition on to a substrate; (b) applying a second foamableresinous composition on to selected areas of the surface of the said firstfoamable resinous composition; (c) applying at least one essentiallynon-foaming resinous layer over the said first and second foamableresinous compositions; and (d) heating to effect foaming of the first andsecond foamable resinous compositions whereby a surface covering materialhaving a textured effect is produced; the said first and second foamableresinous compositions being selected whereby upon heating substantialfoaming of the said second foamable resinous composition occurs before anysubstantial foaming of the said first foamable resinous composition.2. A process as claimed in claim 1 wherein the substrate comprisesrubber-bonded asbestos paper.3. A process as claimed in claim 1 wherein the substrate comprises a filmcasting support, the film casting support being removed subsequent to step(d).4. A process as claimed in claim 3 wherein subsequent to removal of thefilm casting support a polyvinyl chloride composition backing material isapplied to the product.5. A process as claimed in claim 1 wherein subsequent to step (c) but priorto step (d) there are performed the additional steps of printing adecorative pattern on to the surface of the essentially non-foamingresinous layer and of applying an overall transparent wear layer to theassembly.6. A process as claimed in claim 1 wherein the said foamable resinouscompositions comprise polyvinyl chloride plastisols containing a blowingagent.7. A process as claimed in claim 6 wherein the said plastisols contain, per100 parts by weight of polyvinyl chloride, from 3 to 100 parts by weightof a plasticiser; up to 10 parts by weight of the stabiliser; up to 10parts by weight of blowing agent; up to 100 parts by weight of a filler;up to 10 parts by weight of a viscosity modifier; and up to 20 parts byweight of volatile additives.8. A process as claimed in claim 1 wherein a thickness of at least 0.005inches of foamable composition is applied in step (a).9. A process as claimed in claim 1 wherein a thickness of from 0.002 to0.005 inches of foamable composition is applied in step (b).10. A process as claimed in claim 1 wherein the essentially non-foamableresinous composition comprises a polyvinyl chloride plastisol.11. A process as claimed in claim 10 wherein the essentially non-foamableresinous composition is as defined in claim 7 with the omission of ablowing agent.12. A process as claimed in claim 1 wherein the thickness of theessentially non-foamable resinous composition measured at points where thesecond foamable resinous composition has been applied is at least 0.0005inches.13. A surface covering material having a textured effect which comprises asubstrate of backing layer, a layer of a first foamed resinous compositionon the substrate or backing layer, a second foamed resinous composition onselected areas of the said first foamed resinous composition and a layerof an essentially nonfoamed resinous composition over the said first andsecond foamed resinous compositions; the surface of the said materialbeing at a higher level in areas with both first and second foamedresinous composition applied than in other areas of the surface coveringmaterial; and the said second foamed resinous composition having astructure characteristic of a resinous composition which has foamed to asignificant extent whilst supported by a non-foaming substrate.14. A surface covering material as claimed in claim 13 wherein the layer ofessentially non-foamed resinous composition is a transparaent wear layerwith a decorative pattern applied between the first and second foamedresinous compositions and the said wear layer.15. A surface covering material as claimed in claim 13 wherein the layer ofessentially non-foamed resinous composition is opaque and a separatetransparent wear layer is present with a decorative pattern appliedbetween the said layer of essentially non-foamed resinous composition andthe said wear layer."}
{"WKU":"039314308","Title":"Method of desensitizing a pressure sensitive recording sheet and the","App_Date":"1973-11-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Tomonori Tada;Akira Shiono","Assignee":"Kanzaki Paper Mfg. Co. Ltd.","ICL_Class":"B41M  502","References":"2654673;2730456;2730457;3809668","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A method of desensitizing a pressure sensitive recording sheetcomprising applying to a predetermined area of the pressure sensitiverecording sheet a desensitizer which comprises a reaction product producedby the reaction of (1) ammonia, alkylamines, alkyleneamines selected fromthe group consisting essentially of ethylenediamine, propylenediamine,hexamethylenediamine, diethylenetriamine and triethylenetetramine,alkenylamines, cyclicamines or arylamines with (2) one member selectedfrom the group consisting of alkylglycidylethers,cycloalkylglycidylethers, arylglycidylethers, alkenylglycidylethers,glycidylalkylates, glycidylalkenates and glycidylarylates.2. A method of desensitizing a pressure sensitive recording sheet asdefined in claim 1, in which said desensitizer is applied in the form ofan ink to said area of said pressure sensitive recording sheet.3. A method of desensitizing a pressure sensitive recording sheet asdefined in claim 2, in which said desensitizer is applied in the form ofan ink with an oil vehicle to said area of said pressure sensitiverecording sheet.4. The process of claim 1, wherein said step of applying comprisesdissolving said reaction product in the solvent to form a solution andspraying said solution.5. The process of claim 1, wherein said step of applying comprises usingsaid reaction product in the solid form wherein said desensitizer is mixedand tempered with paraffin, japan wax and white pigment.6. The method of claim 1, wherein said step of applying comprisesdissolving said reaction product in a solvent to form a solution andspraying said solution.7. The method of claim 1, wherein said step of applying comprises usingsaid reaction product as a solid form wherein the densitizer is mixed andtempered with paraffin, japan wax and white pigment.8. A partly desensitized, pressure sensitive recording sheet which isobtained according to the method defined in claim 1.9. A method of desensitizing a pressure sensitive recording sheetcomprising applying to a predetermined area of the pressure sensitiverecording sheet a desensitizer which comprises a reaction product producedby the reaction of (1) ammonia, alkylamines, alkenylamines, cyclicaminesor arylamines with (2) one member selected from the group consisting ofalkylglycidylethers, cycloalkylglycidylethers, arylglycidylethers,alkenylglycidylethers, glycidylalkylates, glycidylalkenates andglycidylarylates."}
{"WKU":"039314316","Title":"Photographs coated with a protective and finishing layer","App_Date":"1974-04-18","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Lewis A. Giorgi","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B32B  330","References":"2013867;2530738;2798004;2830900","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A finishing composition brushed or sprayed onto contoured colored studiophotographs to form a colorless transparent protective coating thereonwhich when dry retains flexiblity and elasticity characteristicsindependent of time, humidity and atmospheric conditions, said compositionbeing composed essentially of commercial particulate vinyl resin dissolvedor dispersed in methyl isobutyl ketone, diisobutyl ketone or trimethylnonanone containing naphtha, a naphthene or a xylene and free frombenzene, methanol, acetone and chlorinated hydrocarbons having solventaction on the colored studio photographs, said vinyl resin being polyvinylchloride or a vinyl chloride copolymer wherein the vinyl chloridepredominates.2. A coated photograph according to claim 1 wherein the coating is composedof a plurality of superimposed layers.3. A coated photograph according to claim 1 wherein brush texture, spraytexture, matte and lustre coatings are brushed or sprayed on differentareas of the photograph to effect visual effects.4. A coated photograph according to claim 1 wherein the coating preventsfading or color changes in the underlying black and white or colorcontoured studio photograph."}
{"WKU":"039314324","Title":"Printing process","App_Date":"1973-12-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Alan James Butters;Walter Peace;James Duncan Pont","Assignee":"Imperial Chemical Industries Limited","ICL_Class":"B41M  100","References":"","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A process for the gravure or flexographic printing of flexiblesubstrates wherein the printing vehicle comprises a dispersion ofparticles of a synthetic film-forming polymer, which is a homopolymer ofmethyl methacrylate or a copolymer thereof with alkyl esters of acrylic ormethacrylic acid in which the alkyl groups contain from 2 to 8 carbonatoms, in an inert organic liquid in which the polymer is insoluble, thedispersion (a) being stabilized by a polymeric stabilizer which is a blockor graft polymer one polymeric constituent of which, being an anchoringcomponent which associates with the particles of disperse polymer, iscompatible with the polymer of which the disperse particles are formed andanother polymeric constituent of which is solvated by the organic liquidof the dispersion, to provide a stabilizing steric protective barrier atleast 12 A thick, and (b) being of such a composition that afterevaporation of not more than 50% by weight of the organic liquid presentthe residue remains as a stable dispersion capable of blendinghomogeneously with fresh dispersion, and wherein the polymer particles aresubsequently integrated upon the substrate, said printing vehicle having asolids content in the range of 20 to 70% by weight and a viscosity of from16 to 40 seconds measured in a No. 4 Ford cup at 20.degree.C.2. A process as claimed in claim 1, wherein the block or graft copolymerstabiliser is pre-formed and has a polymeric backbone constituting theanchoring component and attached thereto on average at least five sidechains of molecular weight at least 500 which are solvated by the liquidof the dispersion, the weight ratio of the side chains to the backbonebeing from 0.5:1 to 5:1.3. A process as claimed in claim 2, wherein the polymeric stabiliser isadditionally anchored to the disperse polymer particles by means ofcovalent linkages.4. A process as claimed in claim 3, wherein the inert organic liquid,whilst being as a whole a non-solvent for the disperse polymer, contains aproportion of a liquid which is a solvent for the polymer.5. A process as claimed in claim 4 wherein the disperse polymer is aconvertible polymer containing reactive groups and wherein in a finalstage a cross-linking reaction is effected between the reactive groupseither by direct interaction or by mutual reaction with a multifunctionalcross-linking agent.6. A process as claimed in claim 4, wherein the disperse polymer is anon-convertible polymer derived from one or more ethylenically unsaturatedmonomers.7. A process as claimed in claim 1, wherein the disperse polymer is apreplasticised polymer made by a dispersion polymerisation process carriedout in the presence of a plasticiser which is either soluble or insolublein the liquid of the dispersion.8. A process as claimed in claim 1, wherein the polymer particles areintegrated upon the substrate by heating to a temperature of from80.degree. to 150.degree.C.9. The process of claim 1 wherein said printing vehicle also contains adispersed pigment or pigments.10. A flexible substrate printed by a gravure or flexographic process asclaimed in claim 1."}
{"WKU":"039314332","Title":"Simulated beverage pulp, beverage mix, beverage prepared therefrom and","App_Date":"1973-12-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James D. Eskritt;Brian C. Shrimpton;Linda A. Ven Huizen","Assignee":"General Foods, Limited","ICL_Class":"A23L  127","References":"2332074;3117878;3316101;3446625;3579341;3615589;3615672;3759714;3788862;3790688","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property orprivilege is claimed are defined as follows:1. A simulated beverage pulp comprising a codried pregelatinized starch anda water-insoluble dye.2. A simulated pulp as defined in claim 1 in which the starch is a coldwater-swellable modified waxy maize starch.3. A simulated beverage pulp as defined in claim 2 in which thewater-insoluble dye is canthaxanthin.4. A simulated beverage pulp as defined in claim 3 further comprisingtomato solids codried with said starch and said dye.5. A beverage mix adapted to be reconstituted with water comprising asimulated beverage pulp comprising a codried, pregelatinized starch and awater-insoluble dye, sugar, acid, buffer and flavor.6. A beverage mix adapted to be reconstituted with water comprising asimulated beverage pulp comprising a codried pregelatinized starch, awater-insoluble dye, and tomato solids, sugar, acid, buffer and flavor.7. A beverage prepared by reconstituting the beverage mix as defined inclaim 5.8. A beverage prepared by reconstituting the beverage mix as defined inclaim 6.9. A process for preparing a simulated beverage pulp comprising admixing apregelatinized starch with a water-insoluble dye, codrying the mixture andgrinding the codried admixture to a fine powder.10. A process as defined in claim 9 in which codrying is carried out on adrum drier and said starch is a cold water-swellable modified waxy maizestarch.11. The process as defined in claim 10 further comprising admixing tomatosolids with said starch and said dye."}
{"WKU":"039314340","Title":"Method of manufacturing dehydrated fruit used as an additive to powdered","App_Date":"1974-01-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hiroshi Murai","Assignee":"Nagatanien Honpo Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"A23B  702","References":"1062969;1099577;2415995;2650881;2834681;3134683;3219461;3295995;3365309;3833747","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method of manufacturing dehydrated fruit used as an additive topowdered instant food which comprises coating granulated sugar on thesurface of raw preliminarily dried fruit containing 20 to 30 percent ofwater, mechanically pressing the fruit so as to embed the granulated sugarinto the fruit in a solid state and dehydrating the fruit thus embeddedwith the granulated sugar at a temperature up to 100.degree.C until thewater content in the fruit is reduced to below 6 percent.2. A method according to claim 1 wherein said fruit is apricot.3. A method according to claim 2 wherein the raw preliminarily dried fruitis dehydrated at a temperature of 60.degree. to 80.degree.C for a lengthof time ranging between 90 and 150 minutes.4. A method according to claim 3 wherein the granulated sugar has aparticle size of 40 to 65 mesh."}
{"WKU":"039314359","Title":"Electron beam positive resists containing acetate polymers","App_Date":"1974-12-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Edward Gipstein;Wayne M. Moreau;Omar U. Need, III","Assignee":"International Business Machines Corporation","ICL_Class":"B05D  306","References":"3535137","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A process for forming an image with a positive resist, said processcomprising the steps of:1. forming on a substrate a film of a composition comprising polymericmethyl methacrylate, said composition having increased sensitivity toelectron beam radiation due to the presence in said composition of from 1to 20% by weight based on said polymeric methyl methacrylate ofpolymerized vinyl acetate or polymerized isopropenyl acetate,2. exposing said film in a predetermined pattern to radiation,3. removing the radiation exposed portion of said film with a solvent.2. A process as claimed in claim 1 wherein the radiation is electron beamsat a strength of from 5 to 30KV.3. A process as claimed in claim 1 wherein the film comprises about 5%polymerized vinyl acetate.4. A process as claimed in claim 1 wherein the film comprises about 5%polymerized isopropenyl acetate.5. A process as claimed in claim 1 wherein the solvent is amyl acetate."}
{"WKU":"039314367","Title":"Segmented gas discharge display panel device and method of manufacturing","App_Date":"1974-07-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"George A. Kupsky","Assignee":"Owens-Illinois, Inc.","ICL_Class":"H01J  900","References":"3575746","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a process for making a gas discharge information display panel of thetype in which plural cathode electrodes are exposed to the gas mediumconfined in a discharge chamber and the anode electrode is a transparentelectrode carried on a viewing plate and in which a dielectric maskoutlines the cathode electrodes, and said cathode electrodes are printedwith conductive silver paste and firing same on a glass substrate forminga part of said panel said dielectric mask being applied as a heat fusedcoating on said glass substrate, said viewing plate being joined to saidglass substrate in spaced relation by a heat fusible glass seal, theimprovement comprising firing said conductive silver paste at atemperature higher than any temperature subsequently used in thefabrication of said information display panel so as to substantiallyeliminate cathode porosity and provide a smooth cathode surface.2. The invention defined in claim 1 wherein said cathode elements printedon said glass substrate are coplanar and have a spacing therebetween, thestep of printing said dielectric on said substrate at least between saidcathode elements to form a sputter barrier between the cathode elements.3. In a batch process for making a plurality of gas discharge informationdisplay panels, printing with a conductive silver paste, on a common glasssubstrate a plurality of separate groups of cathode electrodes, one saidgroup for each panel, firing said silver paste as defined in claim 1,applying a separate dielectric mask to each said separate group of cathodesegments, and separating said common glass substrate to a plurality ofseparate glass substrates, each separate glass substrate carrying one ofsaid separate groups of cathode electrodes, joining one said viewing plateto each separated substrate and filling with an ionizable gaseoue medium.4. In a batch process for making a plurality of gas discharge informationdisplay panels, printing with a conductive silver paste, on a common glasssubstrate a plurality of separate groups of cathode electrodes, one saidgroup for each panel, firing said silver paste as defined in claim 2,applying a separate dielectric mask to each said separate group of cathodesegments, and separating said common glass substrate to a plurality ofseparate glass substrates, each separate glass substrate carrying one ofsaid separate groups of cathode electrodes, joining one said viewing plateto each separated substrate and filling with an ionizable gaseous medium."}
{"WKU":"039314375","Title":"Surface treatment of microporous material","App_Date":"1973-09-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Frank Peter Civardi;Hans Georg Kuenstler","Assignee":"Inmont Corporation","ICL_Class":"B05D  500;B05D  312;B05D  310;B05D  304","References":"2348165;3067483;3100721;3157723;3202527;3284274;3429727;3481766;3481767;3483015;3496000;3501326;3510344;3515573;3536553;3671375;3687715","Claims":"We claim:1. Process for the treatment of microporous material which consistsessentially of providing a sheet material having a water vaportransmission of at least about 100 g/m.sup.2 /24 hrs. and having at leastone surface zone of microporous polymeric material, said surface zonebeing wet with a liquid, applying to the outer surface of said surfacezone a solution of polymeric material in a solvent which attacks thepolymeric material of said surface zone, coagulating said solution by theaction of said liquid present in said surface zone and removing saidsolvent and said liquid supplied by said surface zone by evaporation toform an adherent layer less than 20 microns in thickness on said surfacezone, said liquid being a non-solvent for the polymeric material of saidsolution and of said surface zone and being a coagulant for said solutionwhereby to coagulate said solution as a water vapor permeable layer onsaid outer surface, there being sufficient of said non-solvent in saidzone to effect said coagulation.2. Process as in claim 1 in which said surface zone is of fiber-freemicroporous polyurethane having an apparent density of 0.3 to 0.4g/cm.sup.3.3. Process as in claim 1 in which said surface zone is of fiber-freemicroporous polyurethane, said solvent is dimethylformamide, said liquidnon-solvent is water, and said resulting water vapor permeable layer isessentially free of pores whose diameter is above 0.3 micron.4. Process as in claim 3 in which said microporous polyurethane is presentas a layer at least 0.2 mm thick.5. Process as in claim 4 in which said layer thickness is 0.5 mm, theapparent density of said microporous layer is 0.3 to 0.4 g/cm.sup.3, thepolyurethane of said microporous layer is a thermoplastic elastomer having(in cast film form) a permanent set, after 100% elongation, of about 5 to20%.6. Process as in claim 1 in which said solution is carried on a solidtransfer surface and is thereby applied to said microporous surface whilethe latter is wet with said non-solvent liquid.7. Process as in claim 1 in which a layer of said solution is formed onsaid wet surface and said coagulation occurs primarily in that portion ofsaid applied solution which is adjacent to said outer surface of saidmicroporous zone, said coagulated layer after said coagulation andevaporation having a lustrous surface.8. Process as in claim 3 in which said resulting water vapor permeablelayer bridges and covers micropores which pass through said outer surfaceof said surface zone, and said solution of polymeric material containsdissolved elastomeric polyurethane.9. Process as in claim 8 in which said solution contains a dispersedpigment, the ratio of dispersed pigment to polyurethane being in the rangeof about 1:1 to 1:10.10. Process as in claim 9 in which said resulting water vapor permeablelayer is 10 microns thick.11. A process as in claim 9 in which said microporous surface zone hascavities, whose maximum dimensions are up to about 45 microns, connectedby passages having smaller dimensions, the thickness of the walls of saidcavities being in the range of about 1 to 10 microns.12. A process as in claim 11 in which said adherent layer is about 2 to 10microns thick."}
{"WKU":"039314383","Title":"Differential densification strengthening of glass-ceramics","App_Date":"1973-11-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"George H. Beall;Kenneth Chyung","Assignee":"Corning Glass Works","ICL_Class":"6 5;B32B  702;B32B 1706;C03B 3200","References":"1960121;2157100;3253975;3573020;3582385;3637453;3673049;3756798;3764444;3779856","Claims":"We claim:1. A strengthened laminated glass-ceramic article comprising aglass-ceramic core portion and a compressively-stressed glass-ceramicsurface layer laminated to and substantially enveloping said core portion,whereina. the difference in thermal expansion coefficient between the core andsurface layer glass-ceramics is less than about 5 .times. 10.sup.-.sup.7/.degree.C.;b. the glass-ceramic core portion is formed of a composition having at aselected crystallization temperature a density D.sub.ci prior tocrystallization in situ and a density D.sub.cf subsequent thereto;c. the compressively-stressed glass-ceramic surface layer is formed of acomposition having at said crystallization temperature a density D.sub.siprior to crystallization in situ and a density D.sub.sf subsequentthereto; and whereind. the values of the densities D.sub.ci, D.sub.cf, D.sub.si, and D.sub.sfare such that the present value of the densification differential (D) asdefined by the expression:##EQU3##is positive.2. A strengthened laminated glass-ceramic article according to claim 1wherein D has a value in the range of about 0.5-20%.3. A strengthened laminated glass-ceramic article according to claim 2wherein D has a value in the range of about 1-5%.4. A strengthened laminated glass-ceramic article according to claim 2wherein the core and compressively-stressed surface layer glass-ceramicsare composed of Li.sub.2 O--Al.sub.2 O.sub.3 --SiO.sub.2 compositionswherein the principal crystal phases are selected from the groupconsisting of beta-quartz and beta-spodumene solid solutions."}
{"WKU":"039314391","Title":"Modified asphalt hydraulic sealer","App_Date":"1974-08-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Clarence R. Bresson;Forrest D. Spaulding","Assignee":"Phillips Petroleum Company","ICL_Class":"B23B 2700","References":"2834742;3010928;3345316;3853682","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An improved hydraulic barrier system capable of withstanding ahydrostatic pressure at least equal to 35 feet of water at a temperatureof 100.degree.F comprising at least one layer of a suitable fabric havingapplied thereto a sealant composition consisting essentially of anair-blown cut-back asphalt having incorporated therein from 1 to 10 weightpercent of an additive selected from the group consisting of (a) ahydrogenated random butadiene-styrene copolymer containing from about 30to about 44 parts by weight of butadiene per 100 parts by weight of totalmonomers with the remainder being styrene; (b) a butadiene-styrene blockcopolymer having the configuration S-B-S, containing about 70 weightpercent butadiene and about 30 percent styrene; and (c) mixtures of (a)and (b) in a weight ratio of (a) to (b) in the range of 1:10 to 10:1.2. The barrier system of claim 1 wherein the weight ratio of said mixture(c) is 1:1.3. The barrier system of claim 1 wherein said fabric is a nonwoven fabric.4. The barrier system of claim 3 wherein said fabric is formed ofpolypropylene fibers.5. The barrier system of claim 1 wherein said fabric is a nonwoven fabricformed of polypropylene fiber fused on one side and capped with anadditional layer of fibers selected from polypropylene and nylon and saidsealant composition consists essentially of said asphalt and saidcopolymer mixture (c).6. A reservoir comprising as a liner extending over its inner surfaces thebarrier system of claim 1.7. A method of sealing an essentially porous substrate which comprisesforming an asphaltic gel composition consisting essentially of anair-blown cut-back asphalt and from 1 to 10 weight percent of a mixture of(a) a hydrogenated random butadiene-styrene copolymer containing fromabout 30 to about 44 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight of totalmonomers with the remainder being styrene and (b) a butadiene-styreneblock copolymer having the configuration S-B-S, containing about 70 weightpercent butadiene and about 30 weight percent styrene, wherein the weightratio of said (a) to said (b) is in the range of 1:10 to 10:1; heatingsaid gel to a temperature sufficient to render said gel substantiallyliquid; applying said heated liquid to said substrate; and allowing saidasphaltic composition to cool upon contacting said substrate, thus forminga gel and thereby sealing said substrate.8. The method of claim 7 wherein said substrate is a nonwoven fabric."}
{"WKU":"039314405","Title":"Roofing shingle utilizing an asphalt composition and method of making an","App_Date":"1974-02-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Philip Bickford Shepherd;Robert William Croop","Assignee":"Johns-Manville Corporation","ICL_Class":"D04H  108;B32B 1904","References":"2619675;2640786;2733159;2771387;2893889;3015582;3216888;3332830;3808164","Claims":"What we claim is:1. An asphalt shingle comprising:a. a base sheet; andb. an asphalt composition substantially completely encapsulating and atleast partially penetrating in said base sheet, said composition including"}
{"WKU":"039314413","Title":"Fiber-sphere article of manufacture","App_Date":"1973-09-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John Vincent Milewski","Assignee":"Exxon Research and Engineering Company","ICL_Class":"B32B  516","References":"2431143;3024206;3242101;3316139;3560408;3632709;3697447;3769126","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A fiber and sphere reinforced plastic article of manufacture comprising:a resin matrix material as binder; and,a mixture of glass fiber and glass bead sphere reinforcing materials, saidfiber and sphere materials being present in a maximum packing conditionthereby providing substantially low voids between said fibers and spheresin said article, said fibers having a definite length to diameter ratioranging from 1/1 to 100/1, said fiber loading being between 0 and 100% insaid mixture of fiber and spheres, and the ratio of the diameter of thespheres to that of the fibers being selected from values between 5 and 100and between 0.1 and 0.01.2. An article according to claim 1 wherein the length to diameter ratio ofsaid fibers is between 1/1 to 50/1, the fiber loading is between 0 and60%, and wherein the ratio of the diameter of the spheres to that of thefibers is greater than 5 and up to 100.3. An article according to claim 1 wherein the fiber loading is between 10and 100%.4. An article according to claim 1 wherein the length to diameter ratio ofthe fibers is 40 or greater, the fiber loading is between 10 and 100% andthe ratio of the diameter of the spheres to the diameter of the fiber isabout 0.1.5. An article according to claim 1 wherein the length to diameter ratio ofthe fibers ranges from 2/1 to 19/1, the fiber is between 0 to 20%, and theratio of the spheres to the ratio of the fiber is about 20."}
{"WKU":"039314421","Title":"Temporary modification of a pattern mask for use in forming a color CRT","App_Date":"1974-11-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Peter H. Rollason","Assignee":"GTE Sylvania Incorporated","ICL_Class":"H01J 3100","References":"3616732;3645734;3653900;3653901;3703374;3725065;3770434;3775116","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a screen-related multi-apertured pattern member as used in a colorcathode ray tube, a temporary modification improvement of the aperturedportion for utilization during at least one selected radiant energyexposure step of the procedure for fabricating a patterned screenstructure disposed on the interior surface of an associated viewing panel,said temporary modification improvement comprising:a dried light-attenuating coating of a water-soluble polyhydric secondaryalcohol in the form of a polyvinyl alcohol solution substantiallyuniformly covering both surfaces of said apertured member to effect abridging meniscus of coating in each aperture thereof, said coating beingformed from a homogeneous solution of a 50--50 volumetric percentage ofwater and a C.sub.1 - C.sub.2 monohydric alcohol having six to eightweight percent of polyvinyl alcohol solids dissolved therein, said coatingmeniscus being formed of a continuous film bridging the central region ofsaid aperture and merging peripherally into a gradual thickening ofcoating effecting annular support within the aperture perimeter, thecentral region of said meniscus having a minimum thickness in the order ofone micron, said coating material having homogeneously dispersed therein awatersoluble light attenuating chemical composition substantiallyselectively absorbent of ultraviolet radiant energy within substantiallythe 350 to 380 nanometer bandwidth range as utilized in said screenexposure step, the degree of absorptive modification in each aperturebeing resultant of the variations in thickness of the homogeneouscomposition of said coating meniscus and the concentration of absorptivechemical material dissolved therein, said uv absorbent coatingadditionally providing a uniform covering for the interstitial maaterialdefining said apertures thereby reducing deleterious reflections ofactinic radiation during screen structure fabrication.2. A process for effecting the improvement of temporarily modifying theapertured portion of a multi-apertured pattern member with a continuousbridging of the apertures subsequently utilized in forming the patternedscreen structure disposed on the viewing panel of a color cathode raytube, said modification process comprising the steps of:formulating a homogeneous coating solution of a 50--50 volumetricpercentage of water and a C.sub.1 - C.sub.2 monohydric alcohol having sixto eight weight percent of polyvinyl alcohol solids dissolved therein,adding thereto a water-soluble uv absorbing light attenuating chemicalcomposition to effect a desired degree of light attenuation insubstantially the 350 to 380 nanometer bandwidth range, along with up toforty additional volumetric percent of a C.sub.1 - C.sub.2 monohydricalcohol to achieve a viscosity for application;applying said coating in a manner to uniformly cover both surfaces of saidapertured member, the viscosity of said coating effecting a bridgingmeniscus of coating in each aperture and a uniform covering for theinterstitial material between apertures;positioning said aperture member in an inverted manner to effect uniformcoating coverage and excess coating run-off therefrom; anddrying said coated mask in an environment of moving air whereof thevelocity is of a level insufficient to disrupt said coating meniscus.3. A process for temporarily modifying the apertured pattern member of acathode ray tube according to claim 2 wherein said C.sub.1 - C.sub.2monohydric alcohol is selected from the group consisting essentially ofmethanol and ethanol.4. A process for temporarily modifying the apertured pattern member of acathode ray tube according to claim 2 wherein the viscosity of saidapplied coating is within the range of 60 to 100 centipoises."}
{"WKU":"039314430","Title":"Duplicating systems","App_Date":"1973-08-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"David John Neale;Stanford Frederick Dawney","Assignee":"Lamson Industries Limited","ICL_Class":"B41M  504","References":"2927041;3036924;3230875","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a process for hectographic duplicating, said process comprising thesteps ofa. forming hectographic transfer sheets by applying a coating of acomposition comprising at least 20% by weight of at least one at leastsubstantially colorless dyestuff precursor, and a film-forming vehicletherefor, at a dry coated weight of about 5 to about 40 gsm, to a baseweb.b. thereafter contacting said coating with a hectographic sheet, andtransferring selected portions of said coating to the hectographic sheetby the application of pressure, to form an imaged hectographic master and,c. thereafter successively contacting the imaged hectographic master with aplurality of hectographic copy sheets moistened with an ethanol spiritduplicating fluid, and converting the dyestuff precursor into the dyestuffto form legible copies,the improvement comprising using, as said dyestuff precursor, aleucauramine dyestuff precursor of the formula##SPC5##wherein R is methoxy, sodium p-carboxyphenylamino orsodium-p-sulphophenylamino.2. Process according to claim 1, wherein said dyestuff precursor is sodiump-carboxyphenyl leucauramine.3. In a process for hectographic duplicating, said process comprising thesteps ofa. forming hectographic transfer sheets by applying a coating of acomposition comprising at least 20% by weight of at least one at leastsubstantially colorless dyestuff precursor, and a film-forming vehicletherefor, at a dry coated weight of about 5 to about 40 gsm, to a baseweb,b. thereafter contacting said coating with a hectographic sheet, andtransferring selected portions of said coating to the hectographic sheetby the application of pressure, to form an imaged hectographic master and,c. thereafter successively contacting the imaged hectographic master with aplurality of hectographic copy sheets moistened with an ethanol spiritduplicating fluid, and converting the dyestuff precursor into the dyestuffto form legible copies,the improvement comprising using, as said dyestuff precursor, sodiump-sulphophenyl leucauramine.4. Process according to claim 1, wherein said dyestuff precursor isMichler s hydrol methylether.5. Process according to claim 1, wherein the base web is coated with saidcomposition by a hot melt coating step.6. Process according to claim 5, wherein the hectographic copy sheets havedyestuff precursor-reactive properties at least upon the contacted surfacethereof.7. Process according to claim 5, wherein the dyestuff precursor isincorporated into a vehicle comprising film-forming waxes, fats and oils,and the resulting coating composition is heated to at least a temperaturewherein the viscosity of said composition is 20-300 centipoises, thecomposition being substantially at said temperature when applied to saidbase web, and thereafter the coated web is cooled to ambient temperature.8. Process according to claim 7, wherein said coating compositionadditionally includes a dispersing agent.9. Process according to claim 8, wherein the base web is coated with about20 gsm of the composition, on a dry basis.10. Process according to claim 1, wherein the base web is coated with saidcomposition by a solvent coating step, with the coating componentsdispersed in a volatile solvent, and thereafter the solvent is removed.11. Process according to claim 10, wherein said hectographic copy sheetshave reactive properties at least on the contacted surface thereof.12. Process according to claim 9, wherein the film-forming vehicle includesa film-forming synthetic resin.13. Process according to claim 12, wherein said composition is dispersed ina volatile solvent, and the solvent is evaporated after the dispersion isapplied to said base web.14. Process according to claim 13, wherein said solution includes adispersing agent.15. Process according to claim 1, wherein the coating composition includesN,N -diorthotolyguanidine.16. Process according to claim 13, wherein said dispersion contains about 2to about 20% by weight of an alkylene oxide condensate of the generalformula R--O--[C.sub.2 H.sub.4 O].sub.m --H.17. Process according to claim 13, wherein said composition is applied tosaid base web at a dry coated weight of about 17 to about 25 gsm.18. Process according to claim 1, wherein said ethanol spirit duplicatingfluid contains up to 20% by weight of at least one additive selected fromthe group consisting of benzyl alcohol, ethylene glycol, and water.19. Process according to claim 1, including the additional step of applyinga protective wax overcoating to the hectographic copy paper.20. A hectographic transfer sheet consisting essentially of a base webhaving a coating on at least one side thereof, said coating comprising atleast 15% by weight of at least one dyestuff precursor of the formula##SPC6##wherein R is methoxy, sodium p-carboxyphenylamino orsodium-p-sulphophenylamino, and a film-forming vehicle therefor; whereinthe coating is at a dry coated weight of about 5 to about 40 gsm.21. Hectographic transfer sheet according to claim 20, wherein saiddyestuff precursor is sodium p-carboxyphenyl leucauramine.22. A hectographic transfer sheet consisting essentially of a base webhaving a coating on at least one side thereof, said coating comprising atleast 15% by weight of sodium p-sulphophenyl leucauramine, and afilm-forming vehicle therefor, wherein the coating is at a dry coatedweight of about 5 to about 40 gsm.23. Hectographic transfer sheet according to claim 20, wherein saiddyestuff precursor is Michler s hydrol methylether.24. Hectographic transfer sheet according to claim 20, wherein said coatingalso includes from 2 to 20% by weight of N,N -diorthotolylguanadine."}
{"WKU":"039314448","Title":"Backing sheet coated with catalyst and self curing interpolymer adhesive","App_Date":"1974-12-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Lawrence W. McKenna;Donald M. Gardner","Assignee":"Monsanto Company","ICL_Class":"C08F 1540","References":"3563953;3694418;3697618","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An article of manufacture which comprises a substrate coated on at leastone side with a pressure-sensitive permanently tacky compositioncomprising a dried mixture of an interpolymer and between 0.01 and 1.0parts by weight of 1,3-bis(dimethylamino)-2-hydroxypropane per 100 partsby weight of the interpolymer, wherein the interpolymer has a weightaverage molecular weight in the range of 10,000 to 500,000, a glasstransition temperature in the range of -15.degree. to -75.degree.C. andcomprises:1. between 0.1 and 15 weight percent of an .alpha.,.beta.-ethylenicallyunsaturated aliphatic carboxylic acid,2. between 0.1 and 2 weight percent of a glycidyl monomer selected from thegroup consisting of glycidyl acrylate, glycidyl methacrylate, and allylglycidyl ether,3. between 35 to 84.9 weight percent of a monomer selected from the groupconsisting of esters of acrylic acid and methacrylic acid containing from6 to 20 carbon atoms, and4. optionally, a monomer selected from the group consisting of.alpha.-olefins containing 2 to 10 carbon atoms, vinyl esters of alkanoicacids containing from 3 to 10 carbon atoms, vinyl and methyl esters ofacrylic and methacrylic acids, acrylonitrile, methacrylonitrile, styreneand vinyl chloride.2. The article of manufacture of claim 1 wherein the substrate is a tape.3. The article of manufacture of claim 1 wherein the substrate is a sheet.4. The article of manufacture of claim 1 wherein the substrate is a sheetof silicone coated release paper.5. The article of manufacture of claim 1 wherein the substrate comprises apolymer resin selected from the group consisting of plasticized poly(vinylchloride), polyester, cellulose acetate, nylon, polyethylene andpolypropylene."}
{"WKU":"039314456","Title":"Precoated large-diameter monofilaments for prepreg tape","App_Date":"1973-06-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Joseph N. Schurb","Assignee":"Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company","ICL_Class":"B32B  900;D02G  300","References":"3403844;3456917;3466219;3491055","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A flexible handleable reinforcing filament adapted for inclusion inprepreg tape from which are molded high-strength substantially void-freeresinous structural members uniformly reinforced with continuouscollimated reinforcing filaments, said reinforcing filament consistingessentially of a continuous length of a single high-strengthlarge-diameter monofilament coated with a nontacky circumferential layerat least about 0.1 mil in thickness that comprises a partially crosslinkedprecoat resin composition that comprises epoxy resin modified by inclusionof a high-molecular-weight polymeric component that exhibits substantialelongation when stressed beyond its yield point to increase the capabilityof elongation of the precoat resin composition when fully crosslinked; ishighly adherent to the monofilament; has high strength in the moldedcondition; and exhibits substantially no flow when the coated monofilamentis embedded in the matrix sheet of resin composition of a prepreg tape andthe tape is subjected to a useful molding operation.2. The reinforcing filament of claim 1 in which the large-diametermonofilament is a boron monofilament.3. A reinforcing filament of claim 1 in which said layer does not softenwhen tested in the manner described herein in a Fisher-Johns melting pointapparatus and heated from room temperature to 350.degree.F at the rate of2.degree.F per minute."}
{"WKU":"039314464","Title":"Process for producing polymeric piezoelectric elements and the article","App_Date":"1974-03-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Naohiro Murayama;Takao Oikawa","Assignee":"Kureha Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha","ICL_Class":"B05D  512;B32B 2700","References":"3197538;3691264;3798473","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A polarized piezoelectric film comprising an oriented or unorientedpolyvinylidene fluoride having electrodes on both surfaces, wherein saidPVDF has an infrared absorbance ratio D.sub.530 /D.sub. 510 of not morethan 1.2.2. The film of claim 1, wherein said PVDF has an infrared absorbance ratioD.sub.530 /D.sub.510 of not more than 0.6.3. The film of claim 1, wherein said electrodes are formed by a vacuummetallizing process.4. The film of claim 1, wherein said film has a piezoelectric constant inexcess of 1.5 .times. 10.sup..sup.-7 c.g.s.e.s.u.5. A process for producing highly piezoelectric elements which comprisesstretching a polyvinylidene fluoride film having a major proportion of the.alpha.-type crystal structure at a temperature not higher than100.degree.C in at least one axial direction to form a polyvinylidenefluoride film having a major proportion of the .beta.-type crystalstructure as exibited by an infrared absorbance ratio D.sub.530 /D.sub.510 of not more than 1.2; attaching electrodes on both surfaces of theresulting film; and then treating the resulting film with the electrodesto a temperature of at least 40.degree.C, but below the melting point ofsaid film, while applying to said film a direct current voltage of between200 KV/cm amd 1,500 KV/cm.6. The process of claim 1, wherein said film is heated at a temperature of50.degree.C to 160.degree.C.7. The process of claim 1, wherein prior to said heating, said film havinga major proportion of the .beta.-type crystal structure is heat-treatedunder tension at a temperature of at least 80.degree. C but below themelting point of said film.8. The process of claim 1, wherein said film is heated for a period of 10minutes to 2 hours.9. The process of claim 1, wherein said electrodes are formed by a vacuummetallizing process.10. The process of claim 1, wherein said stretching is conducted below100.degree.C.11. The process of claim 1, wherein said film having a major part of the.beta.-type crystal structure exibits an infrared absorbance ratioD.sub.530 /D.sub.510 of not more than 0.6."}
{"WKU":"039314472","Title":"Fused silicide coatings containing discrete particles for protecting","App_Date":"1973-05-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Salvatore J. Grisaffe;Stanley R. Levine","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the United States","ICL_Class":"B32B  906;B32B 1504","References":"2337691;2690401;3192065;3442720;3502493;3503791;3734769;3759727;3761372;3765953;3770487;3775164;3801363","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A niobium alloy having an oxidation protective coating consistingessentially ofa fused silicide material with a higher thermal expansion coefficient thansaid niobium alloy, andfibers selected from the group consisting of tungsten and molybdenum insaid silicide material to modify the physical properties of said coatingby providing dispersed nucleation sites therein, said fibers having athermal expansion coefficient lower than that of said fused silicidematerial whereby said coating has a thermal expansion coefficient betweenthat of said fibers and said fused silicide material.2. An article of manufacture as claimed in claim 1 wherein the coatingmaterial is formed from a fusable slurry and the discrete particles aremixed thoroughly therethrough.3. A niobium alloy having an oxidation protective coating consistingessentially ofa fused silicide material with a higher thermal expansion coefficient thansaid niobium alloy, anddiscrete particles comprising oxide fibers in said silicide material tomodify the physical properties of said coating by providing dispersednucleation sites therein, said discrete particles having a thermalexpansion coefficient lower than that of said fuse silicide materialwhereby said coating has a thermal expansion coefficient between that ofsaid discrete particles and said fused silicide material.4. An article of manufacture as claimed in claim 3 wherein the discreteparticles are non-reactive oxide.5. An article of manufacture as claimed in claim 4 wherein the oxides areselected from the group consisting of SiO.sub. 2, Al.sub. 2 O.sub.3,HfO.sub. 2, and stabilized ZrO.sub. 2.6. An article of manufacture as claimed in claim 3 wherein the discreteparticles have high emittance and are near the coating surface therebyincreasing the emittance of the coatings whereby the effective temperatureof the coating is lowered.7. An article of manufacture as claimed in claim 6 wherein the highemittance particles are selected from the group consisting of Cr.sub. 2O.sub. 3, and NiO.8. A method of modifying a fused silicide coating for protecting a surfaceof a niobium alloy having a lower thermal expansion coefficient than thatof the fused silicide coating material whereby said fused silicide coatingmaterial is prone to crack upon cooling from elevated temperatures, saidmethod comprising the steps ofdistributing a plurality of discrete particles of active metals selectedfrom the group consisting of molybdenum, tungsten, columbium and tantalumin said coating material on the surface of said niobium alloy, andheating the coating material with said particles therein whereby saidcoating material is fused with the microstructure thereof altered and thethermal expansion coefficient reduced thereby minimizing the number oftensile cracks."}
{"WKU":"039314480","Title":"Coated articles","App_Date":"1973-12-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert E. Parkinson","Assignee":"United States Steel Corporation","ICL_Class":"B32B 1312;B32B 1508","References":"2902458;2902459;3041301;3361692;3392131;3644262","Claims":"I claim:1. A coated article comprising a substrate coated with a compositioncomprising an aqueous dispersion of: from about 25 to about 95 weightpercent of resin solids of a copolymer of ethylene and acrylic acid,wherein the acrylic acid constitutes about 18% to 24% of the copolymer;blended with b. from about 5 to about 75 weight percent of resin solids ofa water-dispersible, heat-reactable, rseol, A-stage type phenolic resinessentially free of unreacted phenol and containing a substantial amountof trimethylol phenol.2. A coated article according to claim 1 in which said substrate is steel,whereby the resultant coated steel is suitable for use in electromagneticcores.3. An article according to claim 1 wherein said substrate is selected fromthe group consisting of metals, wood, fiberboard, paper and ceramics."}
{"WKU":"039314499","Title":"Resinous laminates having improved gas permeation and resistance to","App_Date":"1973-08-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Sadao Hirata;Syunsaku Hirata;Toru Suzuki;Akira Kishimoto","Assignee":"Toyo Seikan Kaisha Limited","ICL_Class":"B32B 2708;C08G 4104","References":"3419654;3496061;3552638;3595740;3673055;3767523;3847728","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A resin laminate structure comprising at least one layer (a) of apolyolefin and at least one layer (b) consisting essentially of (A) apolyolefin and (B) a saponified product of ethylene-vinyl acetatecopolymers having an ethylene content of 25 to 50 mole % and a degree ofsaponification of at least 96% at an A : B mixing weight ratio rangingfrom 90 : 10 to 10 : 90, said two layers being laminated by means ofco-extrusion without an adhesive so that said layer (a) and said layer (b)are adjacent to each other, wherein said layer (b) is of such amulti-layer laminar structure that the polymer composition is differentwith respect to the thickness direction but substantially identical withrespect to the plane direction and that when the layer (b) is divided intoat least two layers in the direction of the thickness, at least thatdivided layer adjacent to said layer (a) contains predominantly thepolyolefin (A), namely contains said saponified product in an amountexpressed by the following formula"}
{"WKU":"039314502","Title":"Polyurethane foam composite","App_Date":"1974-10-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John T. Patton, Jr.;Louis C. Pizzini;John G. Demou;Gerhard G. Ramlow","Assignee":"BASF Wyandotte Corporation","ICL_Class":"B32B  326","References":"3205120;3497416;3729370;3850861","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property orprivilege is claimed are defined as follows:1. A polyurethane foam composite prepared by heat sealing a substrate and apolyurethane foam prepared by the reaction in the presence of a blowingagent of an organic polyisocyanate with a graft polyol obtained by the insitu polymerization in the presence of a free radical catalyst of anethylenically unsaturated monomer or mixture of monomers in a polyol.2. The composite of claim 1 wherein the substrate is polyvinyl chloride.3. The composite of claim 1 wherein the organic polyisocyanate is toluenediisocyanate.4. The composite of claim 1 wherein the graft polyol is prepared by the insitu polymerization in the presence of a free radical catalyst of anethylenically unsaturated monomer or mixture of monomers in anunsaturation-containing polyol.5. The composite of claim 4 wherein the mixture of ethylenicallyunsaturated monomers is styrene and acrylonitrile.6. The composite of claim 4 wherein the mixture of ethylenicallyunsaturated monomers is styrene, acrylonitrile andbis(.beta.-chloroethyl)vinyl phosphonate.7. The composite of claim 4 wherein the unsaturation-containing polyol isprepared by the reaction of a polyether polyol with an organic compoundhaving both ethylenic unsaturation and a hydroxyl, carboxyl or epoxygroup.8. The composite of claim 1 wherein the foam is prepared by the reaction ofan organic polyisocyanate with a graft polyol in the presence of a blowingagent and a phosphorus-containing organic compound."}
{"WKU":"039314510","Title":"Apparatus for preventing burn-off due to an accidentical standing arc in","App_Date":"1974-02-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Rolf Durschner;Werner Lehmann","Assignee":"Siemens Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"H01B  904;H01B  906","References":"1924793;3391243;3546356;3610807;3629486;3766306;3767837;3781454;3814831","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In high voltage apparatus including a voltage carrying part which isenclosed by a housing and supported within the housing by insulatingmembers and wherein gas under pressure is contained within the housing asinsulation and which further includes an inner reinforcement memberforming a double wall along with the outer housing wall with a space beingformed therebetween to prevent burn-off in the case of an accidentalstanding arc, the improvement comprising said inner reinforcement memberforming a double wall in the area of each of said insulating members, saidinner reinforcement member including means for relieving the pressure towhich said double wall portion is subjected in the case of an accidentalstanding arc burning near an insulating member and including means forretarding the heat generated thereby from being transmitted to the wall ofsaid housing in amounts sufficient to cause damage.2. High voltage apparatus according to claim 1 wherein the space betweensaid housing and the reinforcement member is in communication with theinterior of the remainder of said housing.3. High voltage apparatus according to claim 2 wherein said means forretarding heat includes solid heat insulating material at least partiallyfilling the space between the reinforcement member and said housing.4. High voltage apparatus according to claim 2 wherein said means forrelieving pressure include cutouts in said reinforcement member connectingthe space between said housing and said reinforcement member with a gasspace which is separated from the gas space in which an accidental arcwill normally burn in case of trouble.5. High voltage apparatus according to claim 4 wherein the outer wall ofsaid housing comprises, at the double wall portion, a sleeve which isslipped over portions of the housing adjacent thereto.6. High voltage apparatus according to claim 5 wherein said sleeve iscovered on the outside with a paint which permanently changes color inresponse to a temperature rise.7. High voltage apparatus according to claim 1 wherein said innerreinforcement member is of a material which is more burn-off resistentthan said normal outer housing and wherein the housing is made of aluminumand the reinforcement member of steel.8. High voltage apparatus according to claim 7 in which a reinforcementpart against burn-off for the voltage carrying part is provided in theregion exposed to an accidental standing arc and wherein saidreinforcement part comprises a protective layer of a material having agreater burn-off resistance than the material of the voltage carryingpart.9. High voltage apparatus according to claim 8 wherein said protectivelayer is self supporting and at least partially at a distance to thevoltage carrying part.10. High voltage apparatus according to claim 8 wherein said reinforcementpart is made of steel and said voltage carrying part of aluminum.11. High voltage apparatus according to claim 1 and further including areinforcement part against burn-off for the voltage carrying part in theregion exposed to an accidental standing arc, said reinforcement partcomprising at least in part a material whose burn-off resistance isgreater than the burn-off resistance of the rest of the material for thevoltage carrying part.12. High voltage apparatus according to claim 11 wherein said reinforcementpart is made of steel and said voltage carrying part of aluminum.13. High voltage apparatus according to claim 11 wherein said reinforcementpart is made of copper and said voltage carrying part of aluminum.14. High voltage apparatus according to claim 13 wherein said copperreinforcement part is made in the form of a tube and further including analuminum disc secured at both its ends.15. High voltage apparatus according to claim 14 wherein the joint betweenthe copper tube and the aluminum disc is a friction welded joint."}
{"WKU":"039314529","Title":"Device for attachment of ceiling-supended equipment","App_Date":"1973-09-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Agne Lars Harry Nilsson","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"H02G  326","References":"3094584;3240925;3246074;3354301;3692920;3699235;3762398","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A load-carrying structure adapted for attachment to ceiling joists of amedical facility and comprising an elongate girder whose width is largerin dimension than its height and having at least two separate, isolatedchannels in its width direction, one of said channels accommodatingelectric cables and the other channel accommodating piping for supply offluid therethrough, and means for carrying equipment connected atpredetermined locations to said girder and being detachable from anddisplaceable with respect to said predetermined location to thereby permitgreater latitude in positioning of equipment carried by said means, saidgirder structure being of electrically conductive material andconstituting a common electrical earth connection for equipmenteffectively supported thereby.2. Structure according to claim 1, wherein said means for carryingequipment comprises an anchor plate connectable to lower walls in partdefining said two channels.3. Structure according to claim 2, wherein said anchor plate is attached tosaid girder by clamps, which when untightened, enable equipment on theplate to be moved relative to said girder.4. Structure according to claim 1, wherein a plurality of anchor plates areconnected in spaced apart relation to one another, to said girder, coverplates being provided for connection to said girder and locations thereofbetween said anchor plates.5. Structure according to claim 4, wherein said girder has continuous upperand bounding side surfaces which terminate in inwardly projecting, spacedapart, flanges which serve as connecting means for said anchor and coverplates.6. Structure according to claim 1, wherein equipment carried by said meanshas at least one flexible cable to enable connection of said equipment tofixed fluid or electrical supply means in the channels of said girderwhereby to permit repositioning of equipment relative to said fixed meansalong the girder.7. Structure according to claim 1, wherein said girder is a box girderwhich is opened at its lower side and having said two channels separatedby a longitudinally extending partition.8. Structure according to claim 7, wherein sealing means provide a sealbetween said channels.9. Structure according to claim 8, having a torsion resistant profile topermit laterally offset mounting of equipment from said girder withrespect to the longitudinal axis thereof."}
{"WKU":"039314537","Title":"Geophone case with improved cable anchor","App_Date":"1974-08-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ernest M. Hall, Jr.","Assignee":"Walker, Hall, Sears, Inc.","ICL_Class":"G01V  116;H01R 1358;H05K  502","References":"877383;877384;2283544;3332057","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A case having an interior chamber for housing a geophone, said chamberhaving an opening accepting therethrough an electric cable, includingconductors, in water-tight fashion,a cylindrical anchor in the chamber anchoring the cable to the case, saidanchoring having at least three substantially parallel bores therethrough,and said three bores extending between and through the top and bottomfaces of said anchor,said cable making two 180.degree. bends in passing through said bores,whereby an upward pull on said cable is resisted by said bends;one of said bores receiving at least one conductor of the cabletherethrough, and a solder ball on the tip of the received conductoranchoring the conductor to said anchor."}
{"WKU":"039314545","Title":"Printed circuit board and method of preparing it","App_Date":"1972-10-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Gerhard R. Sprengling","Assignee":"Westinghouse Electric Corporation","ICL_Class":"H05K  328;H05K  118","References":"2877544;3377699;3652333;3682698;3693252","Claims":"I claim:1. A method of preparing a printed circuit board composed of an insulatingboard having a conducting circuit bonded to at least one side comprising:1. connecting with solder electronic components to the conducting circuitof the said printed circuit board;2. coating the printed circuit board with a layer up to about 0.1 milsthick of a compound selected from the group consisting of monomers of thegeneral formula##EQU3##and prepolymers thereof containing up to about 100 polymeric units, wheren is an integer from 2 to 9, m is an integer from 1 to 9, R is --H or--CH.sub.3, Y is selected from the group consisting of H, F, Cl, and Br,and 80 to 100% of the X atoms are F and 0 to 20% of the X atoms areselected from the group consisting of H, Cl, Br, and mixtures thereof;3. removing at least one of said electronic components by melting saidsolder without first removing said layer and thermally bonding anotherelectronic component in place thereof; and4. recoating said printed circuit board around the area where said otherelectronic component was bonded with a layer of said compound up to about0.1 mils thick.2. A method according to claim 1 wherein said compound is a prepolymer ofsaid monomer having about 50 to 100 polymeric units.3. A method according to claim 1 wherein said coating is done by applyingabout a 1 to about a 10% solution of said compound to said printed circuitboard and evaporating the solvent of said solution.4. A method according to claim 3 wherein said solution is applied to saidprinted circuit board by dipping said printed circuit board into saidsolution.5. A method according to claim 3 wherein said solvent is xylenehexafluoride.6. A method according to claim 1 wherein said conducting circuit is copperand said thermal bonding is done by soldering.7. A method according to claim 1 wherein the sum of n and m is 5 to 10.8. A method according to claim 1 wherein R is --CH.sub.3.9. A method according to claim 1 wherein said insulating board isglass-reinforced epoxy.10. A method according to claim 1 wherein said C.sub.n F.sub.2n.sub.+1C.sub.m X.sub.2m chain is linear.11. A method according to claim 1 wherein said compound is C.sub.7 F.sub.15CH.sub.2 OOC -- C(CH.sub.3) = CH.sub.2.12. A method according to claim 1 wherein said printed circuit board iscleaned in the area where said other electronic component was bonded priorto said recoating to remove solder flux if present.13. A printed circuit board made according to the method of claim 1."}
{"WKU":"039314553","Title":"Breather cap with baffle","App_Date":"1974-03-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Norman Burnell","Assignee":"Lumidor Products, Corporation","ICL_Class":"H02G 1500","References":"1015955;3072284;3422982;3564119;3655905;3694566","Claims":"What is claimed as the invention is:1. A breather cap assembly for use with an electrical cable having animpervious sheath thereabout which sheath defines a space between it andsaid cable, said sheath including a threaded opening therein incommunication with said space, said breather cap assembly being arrangedfor securement to said cable sheath to enable said space to be in freecommunication with the ambient atmosphere surrounding the outside of thesheath, while serving to prevent the ingress of water into said space,said breather cap assembly comprising hollow baffle means and nipple meanssecured thereto and including one threaded end for securement within saidthreaded opening in said sheath, said nipple means including an orificeextending therethrough and in communication with the interior of thebaffle means, said baffle means having a central longitudinal axis andincluding an open free end disposed furthest from said nipple means andfirst and second baffles mounted within the interior of said baffle meansand normal to said central axis for increasing the distance along theinterior of said baffle means that water must traverse to reach saidorifice, said first baffle including an opening on said central axis andsaid second baffle including plural openings laterally offset and spacedabout said central axis, said threaded end of the nipple means includingan end face through which said orifice extends and an enlarged slot cut insaid face for substantially the full width of said face and incommunication with said orifice to ensure that free communication betweenthe space within the cable sheath and the ambient atmosphere is notblocked when said breather cap assembly is secured to said cable.2. The breather cap assembly of claim 1 wherein said first baffle is planarand wherein said second baffle is cup-shaped.3. The breather cap assembly of claim 2 wherein said plural openings areequally spaced from said central axis.4. The breather cap assembly of claim 3 wherein said cup-shaped baffle ispress fit within the interior of said baffle means.5. The breather cap assembly of claim 4 wherein the interior of said bafflemeans includes a ledge against which said planar baffle abuts, with saidplanar baffle being staked in place.6. The breather cap assembly of claim 5 wherein said cup-shaped baffle isdisposed closest to the open end of said baffle means."}
{"WKU":"039314561","Title":"High voltage distributor","App_Date":"1974-05-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James F. McChesney, Jr.","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the United STates","ICL_Class":"H01B 1700;H01R  906;H01R  300","References":"476080;970693;2314079;3414868;3585566","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An improvement in high voltage distributors which are resistant tocorona and high voltage breakdown of the type having a conductive member,insulating means supporting the conductive member and a plurality ofconductive washer-like means retained by said conductive membercomprising:having said conductive member and said plurality of washer-like meanstogether integrally defining a relatively smooth total surface area.2. The improvement of claim 1 wherein said insulating means consists of twofluorocarbon polymer insulators with elongated leakage paths.3. The improvement of claim 1 wherein said conductive member is bolt-like.4. The improvement of claim 1 wherein each of said washer-like means is awasher with at least one blind hole located at the peripheral surface ofsaid washer for a solder connection.5. The improvement of claim 1 wherein each of said washer-like means is awasher with at least one vent hole extending from the peripheral surfaceof said washer to and in communication with the central opening for pumpout.6. The improvement of claim 1 wherein each of said washerlike means is awasher with at least one blind hole located at the peripheral surface ofsaid washer and one vent hole extending from the peripheral surface ofsaid washer to and in communication with the central opening.7. The improvement of claim 1 wherein said insulating means consists of twofluorocarbon polymer insulators with elongated leakage paths, saidconductive member is bolt-like, each of said washer like means is a washerhaving a blind hole located at the peripheral surface of said washer and avent hole extending from the peripheral surface of said washer to and incommunication with the central opening."}
{"WKU":"039314570","Title":"Information carrier having addressed information tracks","App_Date":"1973-03-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Johannes Antonius Maria Mes","Assignee":"U.S. Philips Corporation","ICL_Class":"H04n  578","References":"3331053;3631421;3701130;3739086","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An information carrier in the form of a record disc for recording videoinformation of the type wherein said information is recorded in a seriesof adjacent sequential tracks as a sequence of blocks of informationoptically encoded in geometrical form along the tracks, the improvementwherein each succeeding block of information along each track comprises arecorded video frame and a unique address code, each recorded video framestarting on a radial line on the disc, and each unique address codestarting on a further line on the disc, the address codes therefore beingcontained within a sector on the disc.2. An information carrier as claimed in claim 1, wherein the address codebeing provided within the television lines which are situated between therecorded video synchronization pulses and the image information.3. An information carrier as claimed in claim 1 wherein each individualinformation track is provided with an information code.4. An information carrier as claimed in claim 3, wherein the informationcode of each track contains a sequential track number.5. A device for recording video information, comprising recording means foroptically encoding an information carrier with a sequence of blocks ofinformation as a series of geometrical forms in adjacent sequentialtracks, each succeeding block of information comprising a video frameportion and a code portion, electronic encoding means for providing aplurality of unique codes, and synchronization means connecting saidelectrical encoding means and said video information to said opticalencoding means for causing said optical encoding means to sequentiallyrecord a frame of video information starting on a radial line on the discand one record of said codes starting on a further radial line on saiddisc as optically encoded geometrically patterns followed by a furthervideo frame starting on said radial line, and a further different codestarting on said further radial line."}
{"WKU":"039314588","Title":"Method and apparatus for engraving elemental areas of controlled volume","App_Date":"1973-08-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Mamiliano Dini","Assignee":"European Rotogravure Association","ICL_Class":"G03F  700","References":"3226696;3564130;3564131;3638231;3688026","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method of engraving printing plates by means of energy beams to obtainmultisteps of degree of engravement up to a substantially continuousengraving effect, said method comprising:providing an energy beam which, with respect to its energy and frequency,is modulated at most only to small degree,focusing said beam to a fraction of the maximum dimention of an engravedcell,etching the surface of the individual engraved cells by means of saidfocused beam along a beam path, andmodulating the length and spatial distribution density of the beam path onthe cell surface in accordance with the tone intensity of a correspondingpoint of an original picture with which the respective cell of theprinting plate is associated.2. The method according to claim 1 further comprising modulating the beamfocus in addition to the modulation of the beam path.3. The method according to claim 1, including the displacing of the etchingbeam, in equal time intervals, from one cell position to another, whilecontrolling the beam to act upon each individual cell during such portionof the time interval only which is required for the beam to travel therespective path for such cell; while for the rest of the time intervalexcluding the beam from the cell.4. The method according to claim 3 further comprising selecting thedisplacement time interval to be of a magnitude equal to the duration ofetching required to produce an engraved cell of maximum volume.5. The method according to claim 1, wherein said etching step includesetching the surface of each individual engraved cell along a spiral pathoriginating from the central region of said cell.6. The method according to claim 5, further comprising etching the surfaceof the individual cells along a spiral path or track, the pitch of whichincreases in outward direction.7. The method according to claim 1, further comprising repeatedlyprocessing the surface of one and the same individual cell in at leastpartial areas thereof with the etching beam before processing the nextcell.8. The method according to claim 7, including processing the surface ofeach single cell by means of the etching beam along a beam path andcontrolling at least part of the adjacent path portions to have a spacingfrom each other which is smaller than the diameter of the etching beam.9. A method for successively engraving elemental areas on a printingsurface with an energy beam, said method comprising:providing an energy beam having its maximum cross-section dimensions smallthan the maximum dimension of an elemental area to be engraved,generating tone intensity signals representing the tone gradation of anoriginal at successive areas corresponding to said elemental areas to beengraved on said printing surface,successively scanning said energy beam from the location of one elementalarea to another on said printing surface in synchronism with said toneintensity signals representing respectively corresponding successive areason said original, andwhile said energy beam is positioned at the location of a given elementalarea, further scanning said beam within that elemental area along a pathhaving a spatial distribution density and time duration therewithin whichare controlled in accordance with the tone intensity signals therebycausing the degree of engravement within the elemental area to correspondwith the tone gradation of the respectively associated area of saidoriginal.10. A method as in claim 9, wherein said further scanning of the beamcomprises moving the beam along a spiral path originating from the centralregion of the elemental area, the pitch of said pitch of said spiral pathand hence its spatial distribution desnity being controlled in accordancewith the tone intensity signals.11. A method as in claim 9, wherein said further scanning step comprisesmodulating the cross-sectional area of said beam in addition tocontrolling the beam path.12. A method as in claim 9 wherein said further scanning of the beamcomprises moving the beam along a controlled ever widening trajectoryoriginating from the central region of the elemental area and masking outthe beam whenever it s trajectory exceeds the boundaries of the elementalarea.13. A method as in claim 12, wherein said successively scanning stepcomprises displacing the beam from the location of one elemental arealocation to another at substantially equal time intervals.14. A method as in claim 13, including the step of controlling said equaltime intervals to correspond to the duration of engravement required toproduce an engraved elemental area of maximum volume.15. Apparatus for engraving elemental areas on a printing surface with anenergy beam, said apparatus comprising:means for providing an energy beam having a maximum cross-sectionaldimension smaller than the maximum dimension of an elemental area to beengraved,means for generating tone intensity signals representing the tone gradationof an original at successive areas corresponding to said elemental areasto be engraved on said printing surface,means for successively scanning energy beam from the location of oneelemental area to another on said printing surface in synchronism withsaid tone intensity signals representing respectively correspondingsuccessive areas on said original, andmeans for further scanning said beam within an elemental area, while it ispositioned thereat, along a path having a spatial distribution density andtime duration therewithin that is controlled in accordance with the toneintensity signals thereby causing the degree of engravement within theelemental area to correspond with the tone gradation of the respectivelyassociated area of said original.16. Apparatus as in claim 15, wherein said means for further scanningcomprises means for moving the beam along a controlled ever-wideningtrajectory originating from the central region of the elemental area andmeans for masking out the beam whenever its trajectory exceeds theboundaries of the elemental area.17. Apparatus as in claim 15, wherein said means for further scanningcomprises means for modulating the cross-sectional area of said beam inaddition to controlling the beam path.18. Apparatus as in claim 15, wherein said means for further scanningcomprises means for moving the beam along a spiral path originating fromthe central region of the elemental area and means for controlling thepitch of the spiral path in accordance with the tone intensity signals.19. Apparatus as in claim 18, wherein the energy beam is a laser beam andthe means for moving comprises electrically controlled crystal deflectorsplaced in the path of said laser beam."}
{"WKU":"039314596","Title":"Video disc","App_Date":"1974-02-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Adrianus Korpel","Assignee":"Zenith Radio Corporation","ICL_Class":"G11B  724;H04N  100;H04N  302","References":"3361873;3688025","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. For use in an optical image reproducing system of the type in whichinformation stored in a record track of a carrier is derived by scanningsaid track with a beam of light, a record disc having a record trackcomposed of pits alternating with lands and in which the depth dimensionof said pits introduces a phase change of approximately (k + 1/2).pi.radians between portions of said beam which impinge upon said pits andportions of said beam which impinge upon lands adjacent said pits, where kis zero or any integer.2. The improvement in accordance with claim 1 in which said carrier istransmissive with respect to said beam of energy.3. The improvement in accordance with claim 2 in which the depth dimensionof said pits introduces a phase change between said portions of said beamsubstantially equal to .pi./2 radians.4. The improvement in accordance with claim 1 in which said carrier isreflective to said beam of energy.5. The improvement in accordance with claim 4 in which the depth dimensionof said pits introduces a phase change between said portions of said beamsubstantially equal to .pi./2 radians.6. The improvement in accordance with claim 5 in which the depth dimensionof said pits is approximately equal to one-eighth wavelength of said beamof energy in vacuum.7. The improvement in accordance with claim 3 in which the index ofrefraction of the medium of said carrier is approximately 1.5 and in whichthe depth of said pits is approximately equal to one-half wavelength ofsaid beam of energy in vacuum.8. For use in an optical image reproducing system of the type in whichinformation stored in a record track of a carrier is derived by scanningsaid track with a light beam of a predetermined wavelength, a record discwhich is transmissive of said light beam with an index of refraction ofapproximately 1.5 and having a record track composed of pits alternatingwith lands, and in which the depth dimension of said pits is at leastapproximately equal to one-half said predetermined wavelength.9. For use in an optical image reproducing system of the type in whichinformation stored in a record track of a carrier is derived by scanningsaid track with a light beam of a predetermined wavelength, a record discwhich is reflective to said light beam and has a record track composed ofpits alternating with lands, and in which the depth dimension of said pitsis substantially equal to one-eighth of said predetermined wavelength."}
{"WKU":"039314600","Title":"Video disc with multiturn undulating storage track","App_Date":"1974-02-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William H. Watson","Assignee":"Zenith Radio Corporation","ICL_Class":"G11B  724;H04N  100;H04N  302","References":"1917003;3673412;3798388","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A record disc comprised of a storage medium having information stored ina variable-depth track which comprises a series of convolutionsindividually having a generally circular mean path to be read by a beam ofenergy and characterized by the fact that each track convolution hasperiodic fixed-amplitude lateral undulations disposed symmetrically withrespect to its mean path,the undulations of said series of convolutions having such relative phasethat said convolutions are in nested concentric relation with asubstantially uniform spacing with respect to one another,and further characterized by the fact that the phase of said undulations iscorrelated with that of a component of the stored information.2. A record disc in accordance with claim 1 in which the storage track iscomprised of pits and lands in alternation, and in which the depthdimension of said pits introduces a phase change of one-half wavelengthbetween portions of the reading beam that impinge upon said pits andportions that impinge upon adjacent lands."}
{"WKU":"039314618","Title":"Telereproduction system for documents","App_Date":"1974-04-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Daniel Auchere;Jean Paul Barbier Neyret","Assignee":"Agence Nationale de Valorisation de la Recherche (ANVAR)","ICL_Class":"H04N  112","References":"2046328;2306687;2926057;3346692;3394225;3541245;3564120;3636251;3809806","Claims":"I claim:1. A system for the telereproduction of documents wherein an originaldocument is scanned in a line-by-line manner and corresponding electricalsignals are generated, and a carrier or sub-carrier wave is modulated bysaid electrical signals generated by said line-by-line scanning of theoriginal document to produce a video carrier signal which is transmitted,comprising:means for receiving and demodulating the transmitted video carrier signal;a reproduction scanning device in the receiver;means for synchronizing the operation of said reproduction scanning devicewith the scanning device of the transmitter;means for applying the demodulated video signals to said reproductionscanning device at a rate exactly proportional to the speed of scanningthereof, said applying means comprising a memory for storing the videosignals obtained from demodulation of the received video carrier signal;andsaid reproduction scanning device comprising a scanning unit including aline scanning tracer point, a rotating shaft driving said scanning unit, apaper band on which recording is to be made and which is movable in adirection perpendicular to said line scanning tracer point, and alinearizing device comprising a rotating disc driven by said rotatingshaft and provided at its edge with teeth having widths corresponding torespective equal displacements of said tracer point along the scannedline, means associated with said disc for supplying a control signalhaving a frequency proportional to the speed of movement of said tracerpoint during the scanning of each line and means responsive to saidcontrol signal and coupled to said memory for controlling the extractionof the video signals stored in said memory each time said tracer point hasadvanced by a step of constant value.2. Apparatus according to claim 1 further comprising a magnetic taperecorder adapted to record the demodulated video signals and means torecord said demodulated video signals on the paper band from the taperecord.3. Apparatus according to claim 1 wherein said means for supplying acontrol signal includes a light source emitting a light beam which isperiodically interrupted by the teeth of said rotating disc at intervalscorresponding to the length of a line occupied by a number of dots, aphotodiode actuated by said periodically interrupted light beam andgenerating the control signal, and means for multiplying the frequency ofsaid control signal so as to correspond to the total number of dots perline.4. Apparatus according to claim 3 wherein said scanning unit driven by saidrotating shaft comprises three tracer points arranged at 120.degree.intervals with respect to one another, the intervals between twosuccessive teeth of the rotating disc corresponding to the length of ascanned line occupied by 12 dots; and said multiplying means multiplyingthe frequency of the signals produced by the photodiode to correspond to1,200 dots for 800 dots per line contained in the video-signal.5. Apparatus according to claim 1 for the recording of images transmittedby a meteorological satellite on a high-frequency carrier wave in the bandof 135 to 138 mc/s modulated by a 2,400c/s sub-carrier which is itselfmodulated by the video-signals, said apparatus comprising a VHF converterprovided with a local oscillator having means for controlling itsfrequency to scan the range attributed to meteorological satellites, saidcontrol means comprising a scanning voltage controlled oscillator forautomatically tracing an emission from a satellite, and means for lockingthe local oscillator onto the received frequency, an integrating circuitequipped with a memory wherein the scanning signal is stored and which isconnected to the VHF converter whereby the frequency reached by the localoscillator during a reception is maintained throughout the periods offading of the satellite s transmission.6. Apparatus according to claim 5 comprising a filter means for sensing thereception of the 2,400 c/s sub-carrier, said device having means to lockthe scanning oscillator in the presence of said sub-carrier after a periodof time sufficient to obtain stable tuning of the receiver onto thereceived high frequency and to close the loop by which the localoscillator of the VHF converter is controlled depending upon said highfrequency by disconnecting the memory equipped integrating circuit, meansbeing provided to reestablish said connection if the sub-carrierdisappears for a period of 50 seconds, corresponding to the maximumestimated duration of a fading period.7. Apparatus according to claim 5 comprising synchronous motors for drivingthe rotating wheel of the scanning unit and the paper band on which therecord is to be made, a clock emitting pulses at a frequency of 2,400c/sdepending upon the sub-carrier of the video signal, means for successivelydividing the clock frequency by 1,000 and by 50 to supply a 48c/s pilotfrequency to said synchronous motors.8. Apparatus according to claim 7 wherein the clock comprises a transistoroscillator controlled by the sub-carrier wave of the received videocarrier signal.9. Apparatus according to claim 1, wherein said reproduction scanningdevice comprises a wheel in the form of a star having three arms and threelevers articulated on said arms respectively at points arranged at120.degree. intervals with respect to one another; three rollers carriedat the ends of the longest arms of said levers respectively; a base plateof insulating material provided with a cam forming cavity and wherein saidwheel is mounted, the edge of said cavity having a curved portion and astraight portion; tension springs connecting the ends of the shortest armsof said levers to the arms of the wheel and to press said rollers againstthe edge of the cam forming cavity; the band of paper on which the recordis made being moved below the base plate in a direction perpendicular tothe straight edge of said cam; a slot formed in the base plate oppositethe straight portion of said cam; the said rollers being provided withtracer points which come successively into contact with the paper throughsaid slot and which successively scan a line of said paper.10. Apparatus according to claim 9 wherein the axis of rotation of thewheel is offset laterally in relation to the perpendicular to the straightportion of the cam forming cavity at its center; and wherein the ratio ofthe distance between the axis of the wheel and the articulation points ofthe levers on the arms of the wheel to the distance between the axis ofthe wheel and the straight portion of the cam is substantially equal to0.87; and the ratio of the length of the longest arm of the levers to thedistance between the axis of the wheel and the straight portion of the camis substantially equal to 1.31; whereby the speed of the tracer pointsalong said straight portion of the cam is substantially constant.11. Apparatus according to claim 9 wherein said paper is anelectrosensitive paper having a white upper surface and a black sub-layer;and wherein said tracer points are in the form of ball points providedwith springs to press said ball points against said paper; saidreproduction scanning device further including means to apply to said ballpoints a voltage representing the demodulated video signal to produce aspark and a burned spot in the white surface of the paper revealing thesaid black sub-layer, the size of the burned spot being proportional tothe power of said spark; and means for rendering the power of the sparkproportional to the demodulated video signal.12. Apparatus according to claim 11 wherein said reproduction scanningdevice includes a drum from which the electrosensitive paper is wound off,means for applying to the rotating wheel the voltage representing thesignal to be recorded and to apply a high D.C. voltage of the order of 200volts to said drum.13. Apparatus according to claim 11 wherein said reproduction scanningdevice further comprises a differential amplifier of which one inputreceives the video signal voltage and of which the output voltage isapplied to the tracer ball-points; a multiplying circuit to which is fedon the one hand the intensity of the current of the circuit including thetracer ball points and on the other hand a high constant voltage reducedin value by the voltage applied to the tracer ball-points, the output ofsaid multiplying circuit being connected to the second input of saiddifferential amplifier."}
{"WKU":"039314626","Title":"Stack plume visualization system","App_Date":"1975-03-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Reginald J. Exton","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the United States","ICL_Class":"H04N  718","References":"3795812;3841763","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Apparatus for measuring at a remote location the SO.sub.2 concentrationin plume from a smokestack comprising:an ultraviolet video system means for viewing said plume from a remotelocation against the background sky at wavelengths where SO.sub.2molecules absorb a substantial amount of light and for producingelectrical signals representative of the scene viewed, andTv monitor meeans for receiving the output of said video system and forproducting a picture of the SO.sub.2 concentration in said plume.2. Apparatus according to claim 1 including waveform analyzer means forsuperimposing a horizontal cursor and a vertical cursor on said picture.3. Apparatus according to claim 2 wherein said waveform analyzer meansincludes means for producing an electrical signal representating theSO.sub.2 concentration at the point in said plume represented by theintersection of said horizontal cursor and said vertical cursor.4. Apparatus according to claim 2 wherein said waveform analyzer meansincludes means for displaying on said TV monitor a graph of the SO.sub.2concentration along a line in the plume defined by said horizontal cursor.5. Apparatus according to claim 2 including a digital timer for supplying atiming signal to said TV monitor to provide timing information on saidpicture.6. Apparatus according to claim 5 including a video tape recorder forrecording the picture displayed on said TV monitor.7. Apparatus for measuring at a remote location the SO.sub.2 velocity inplume from a smokestack comprising:an ultraviolet video system means for viewing said plume from a remotelocation against the background sky at wavelengths where SO.sub.2molecules absorb light and for producing electrical signals representativeof the secne viewed; andmeans receiving said electrical signals for measuring the velocity of thefluctuations of SO.sub.2 occurring in said plume whereby the velocity ofthe fluctuations is a measure of the velocity of the SO.sub.2 emitted fromthe smokestack.8. Apparatus according to claim 7 wherein said means for measuring thevelocity of the fluctuations of SO.sub.2 occurring in said plume includesa TV monitor and a video tape recorder.9. Apparatus according to claim 7 wherein said means for measuring thevelocity of the fluctuations of SO.sub.2 occurring in said plume includesmeans for producing a first analog signal representing the SO.sub.2concentration passing a first point in said plume, means for producing asecond analog signal representing the SO.sub.2 concentration passing asecond point in said plume said second point being in the line of flow ofsaid plume from said first point, and means receiving said first andsecond analog signals for determining the time it takes a fluctuation inthe SO.sub.2 concentration to travel from said first point to said secondpoint.10. Apparatus according to claim 9 wherein said means for determining timeis a cross-correlator receiving said first and second analog signals andan X-Y plotter for plotting the output of said cross-correlator.11. A method for measuring at a remote location the SO.sub.2 concentrationin plume from a smokestack comprising the steps of:taking an ultraviolet video picture, from said remote location, of saidplume using skylight as the background at a wavelength of approximately3,150 angstroms where there is substantial absorption of ultraviolet lightby SO.sub.2 ; andmeasuring at selected points in said picture and at selected times theamount of ultraviolet light in the background skylight absorbed by theplume.12. A method for measuring at a remote location the velocity of SO.sub.2 inplume from a smokestack comprising the steps of:taking an ultraviolet video picture, from said remote location, of saidplume using skylight as the background at a wavelength of approximately3,150 angstroms where there is substantial absorption of ultraviolet lightby SO.sub.2 ; andmeasuring the velocity of fluctuations in the concentration of SO.sub.2 inthe video picture whereby the velocity of the fluctuations is the velocityof the SO.sub.2.13. A method according to claim 12 wherein the step of measuring thevelocity of fluctuations in the concentration of SO.sub.2 includes thesteps of measuring at two separate points in the path of the flow of theplume the amount of ultraviolet light in the background skylight absorbedby the plume and cross-correlating the two measurements to obtain theaverage time that it takes for fluctuations to travel between the twopoints."}
{"WKU":"039314634","Title":"Scene brightness compensation system with charge transfer imager","App_Date":"1974-07-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Peter Alan Levine","Assignee":"RCA Corporation","ICL_Class":"H04N  314;H01L 2978;H01L 3100","References":"3715485;3771149;3777061;3826926;3845295;3851096;3863065","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In combination:a charge transfer image sensing array having a plurality of registers ofimage sensing and storage elements;a temporary storage array coupled to said image sensing array at one end ofsaid registers;a drain region coupled to said image sensing array at the other end of saidregisters;means during an initial portion of an integration period for shifting thecharge pattern being accumulated in said registers in one direction tosaid drain region; andmeans after said integration period for shifting the charge patternaccumulated in said registers during the remaining portion of saidintegration period, in the opposite direction to said temporary storagearray.2. In the combination as set forth in claim 1, said image sensing arraycomprising a semiconductor substrate and electrodes insulated from andelectrically coupled to said substrate for storing and propagating chargesignals, each register comprising a plurality of said electrodes extendingin the column direction, and said drain region comprising a region in thesubstrate of opposite conductivity than the substrate.3. The improvement, in a charge transfer imager which includes an imagesensing array comprising a plurality of registers, said registersincluding means during a field time for sensing an image projected ontothe image sensing array and storing a charge pattern correspondingthereto, a temporary storage array, an output register, means during eachvertical retrace period for shifting the charge pattern in one directionalong said registers for transferring the contents of the image sensingarray to the temporary storage array, means during each horizontal lineretrace period for shifting a row of information into the output register,and means during each horizontal line period for shifting the informationstored in the output register out of the output register, of:means during an initial portion of each field time for shifting said chargepattern in the opposite direction along said registers for removing fromthe image sensing array the charge pattern being accumulated thereon.4. The improvement as set forth in claim 3 further including meansresponsive to a parameter of the signals shifted out of said outputregister for controlling the duration of said initial portion of eachfield time.5. The improvement as set forth in claim 4 wherein said parameter comprisesaverage amplitude.6. The combination of:a CCD image sensing array adapted to produce and store a charge pattern inresponse to a radiation image projected thereon during a field time, saidarray having a plurality of channels extending in the column direction;a CCD temporary storage array having a plurality of channels also extendingin the column direction coupled at one end to one end of the respectivechannels of the imaging array;a CCD output register coupled to the temporary storage array;a drain region coupled to the other end of the channels of the CCD imagesensing array;means during each vertical retrace period for transferring the contents ofthe image sensing array in one direction along said channels to saidtemporary storage array for storage therein;means during each horizontal line retrace period for transferring a row ofinformation from said temporary storage array to said output register;means during each horizontal line period for transferring the informationstored in said output register out of said register a bit at a time; andmeans during the horizontal line retrace periods within an initial portionof each field time for transferring the contents of the image sensingarray in the opposite direction along said channels to said drain region.7. The combination as claimed in claim 6, further including meansresponsive to the brightness of the image projected onto said imagesensing array for controlling the duration of the initial portion of eachfield time.8. The improvement, in a charge transfer imager which includes an imagesensing array, said image sensing array including means during a fieldtime for sensing an image projected onto the image sensing array andstoring a charge pattern corresponding thereto, a temporary storage array,an output register, means during each vertical retrace period fortransferring the contents of the image sensing array to the temporarystorage array, means during each horizontal line retrace period forshifting a row of information into the output register, and means duringeach horizontal line period for shifting the information stored in theoutput register out of the output register of:means during solely the horizontal line retrace periods of an initialportion of each field time for removing from the image sensing array thecharge pattern concurrently being accumulated thereon."}
{"WKU":"039314642","Title":"Line skip system for facsimile device","App_Date":"1974-10-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Katsuo Murase","Assignee":"Ricoh Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"H04N  138","References":"3621130;3646257;3670099;3730988","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a method of facsimile transmission in which a document having a ruledline in a predetermined position thereon is pre-scanned in a pathsubstantially perpendicular to the ruled line to determine if the pathcontains information, an electrical signal being generated wheninformation is encountered, and scanned for transmission along the samepath only if it is determined that the path contains information, theimprovement of determining if the path contains information in such amanner that the presence of the ruled line is ignored, the improvementcomprising the steps of:a. generating gating signal in synchronism with pre-scanning the pathexcept while pre-scanning a predetermined portion of the path whichintersects the ruled line;b. simultaneously sensing for the presence of the gating signal and theelectrical signal; andc. determining that the path contains information only if the gating signaland the electrical signal are sensed simultaneously.2. In a facsimile transmission device having scanning means to pre-scan adocument having a ruled line in a predetermined position thereon in a pathsubstantially perpendicular to the ruled line to determine if the pathcontains information and generate an electrical signal when information isencountered and scan the document for transmission along the same pathonly if it is determined that the path contains information, theimprovement of a system to determine if the path contains information insuch a manner that the presence of the ruled line is ignored, said systemcomprising:gate signal generating means operative to generate a gating signal insynchronism with the pre-scanning of the path by the scanning means exceptwhile pre-scanning a predetermined portion of the path which intersectsthe ruled line; andsensing means having inputs responsive to the gating signal and theelectrical signal and an output connected to control the scanning means,the sensing means being operative to control the scanning means to scanthe path for transmission only if the gating signal and the electricalsignal are simultaneously sensed by the sensing means during thepre-scanning of the path indicating that the path contains information.3. A system according to claim 2, in which the scanning means is arrangedto generate a synchronizing signal at the beginning of pre-scanning thepath, the gate signal generating means being arranged to generate thegating signal in response to the synchronizing signal.4. In a facsimile transmission device having scanning means to pre-scan thesurface of a right quadrilateral document having two ruled lines on thesurface thereof in a path substantially perpendicular to the ruled linesto determine if the path contains information and generate an electricalsignal when information is encountered and scan the document fortransmission along the same path if it is determined that the pathcontains information, the lines being parallel to and spaced from theleading and trailing edges of the document in the path direction by afirst and second distance respectively, the improvement of a system todetermine if the path contains information in such a manner that thepresence of the two ruled lines is ignored, said system comprising:gate signal generating means operative to generate a gating signal insynchronism with the pre-scanning of the path by the scanning means, thegating signal being generated only while the scanning means sweeps theportion of the path between the ruled lines;sensing means having inputs responsive to the gating signal and theelectrical signal and an output connected to control the scanning means,the sensing means being operative to control the scanning means to scanthe path for transmission only if the gating signal and the electricalsignal are simultaneously sensed by the sensing means during thepre-scanning of the path indicating that the path contains information.5. A system according to claim 4, in which the scanning means is arrangedto generate a synchronizing signal at the beginning of pre-scanning thepath, the gate signal generating means being arranged to generate thegating signal in response to the synchronizing signal.6. A system according to claim 5, in which the gate signal generating meanscomprises:a bistable element having an output constituting the output of the gatesignal generating means;a set pulse generator having an input responsive to the synchronizingsignal and an output connected to the set input of the bistable element;a reset pulse generator having an input responsive to the synchronizingsignal and an output connected to the reset input of the bistable element;wherebythe set pulse generator is arranged to be triggered by the synchronizingsignal and generate a set pulse having a trailing edge which occurs afterthe scanning means sweeps past the ruled line spaced from the leadingedge, the trailing edge of the set pulse setting the bistable element toproduce a logically positive output constituting the gating signal; andthe reset pulse generator is arranged to be triggered by the synchronizingsignal and generate a reset pulse having a trailing edge which occursbefore the scanning means sweeps up to the ruled line spaced from thetrailing edge, the trailing edge of the reset pulse resetting the bistableelement to produce a logically negative output.7. A system according to claim 5, in which the sensing means comprises anAND gate having inputs responsive to the gating signal and the electricalsignal respectively.8. A skip control system for a facsimile device having scanning means topre-scan a document having a ruled line in a predetermined positionthereon in a raster pattern in which the main scan lines are substantiallyorthogonal to the ruled line and the side scan direction is substantiallyparallel to the ruled line along one of the main scan lines to determineif the main scan line contains information and generate an electricalsignal when information is encountered, scan the main scan line fortransmission if it is determined that the main scan line containsinformation and skip the main scan line if it is determined that the mainscan line is void of information, the skip control system being adapted toignore the presence of the ruled line and comprising:gate signal generating means operative to generate a gating signal insynchronism with the pre-scanning of the main scan line by the scanningmeans except while pre-scanning a predetermined portion of the main scanline which intersects the ruled line; andsensing means having inputs responsive to the gating signal and theelectrical signal and an output connected to control the scanning means,the sensing means being operative to control the scanning means to scanthe main scan line for transmission only if the gating signal and theelectrical signal are simultaneously sensed by the sensing means duringthe pre-scanning of the main scan line indicating that the main scan linecontains information."}
{"WKU":"039314650","Title":"Blooming control for charge coupled imager","App_Date":"1975-01-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Peter Alan Levine","Assignee":"RCA Corporation","ICL_Class":"H04N  314;H01L 2978;H01L 2714","References":"3715485;3771149;3826926;3845295;3863065;3866067","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A method of controlling blooming in a charge coupled device imagesensing array which includes a substrate and electrodes capacitivelycoupled to the substrate comprising the steps of:during the integration time, maintaining certain of the electrodes at apotential to create depletion regions in the substrate regions beneaththese electrodes within which charge can be stored and maintaining otherof the electrodes at a potential to create accumulation regions in thesubstrate between the depletion regions;at the end of the integration time and for a relatively short intervalcompared to the integration time, changing the potential on said otherelectrodes to a value to place the substrate regions formerly inaccumulation into depletion and concurrently changing the potentialapplied to said certain electrodes to a value to drive the substrateregions beneath said certain electrodes into deeper depletion; andapplying thereafter multiple phase voltages to said electrodes forpropagating any stored charge along the substrate.2. A charge coupled device imager comprising, in combination:a semiconductor substrate;a plurality of electrodes spaced from one another along a length of thesubstrate and capacitively coupled to said substrate;means, during an integration time, for maintaining certain spaced ones ofsaid electrodes, having intervening electrodes between said spacedelectrodes, at a potential to form depletion regions in the substrate andfor maintaining said intervening electrodes at a potential to formaccumulation regions in the substrate between the depletion regions; andmeans, during a relatively short interval following the integration time,compared to the integration interval, for changing the potential appliedto said intervening electrodes to a value to form depletion regions in thesubstrate and for concurrently changing the potential applied to saidcertain electrodes to a value to drive the substrate beneath said certainelectrodes into deeper depletion to thereby avoid the loss of chargesignal from the substrate regions beneath said certain electrodes duringsaid relatively short interval."}
{"WKU":"039314669","Title":"Circuit arrangement for use in a television camera tube with an","App_Date":"1974-03-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Wouter Van Den Berg","Assignee":"U.S. Philips Corporation","ICL_Class":"H04N  534","References":"3392236;3548250;3602642;3610823;3708617;3764923","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A circuit arrangement suitable for use with a television camera tubeprovided with a target plate an anti-comet tail electron gun, said gunhaving a cathode, a control electrode, anode electrodes and a lenselectrode means for generating during line scan times and line flybacktimes an electron beam having different values of beam diameter, beamcurrent intensity and potential upon impact on said target plate, a lineperiod comprising the line scan time and a line blanking time comprisingthe line flyback time and a beam blanking time, said circuit arrangementcomprising an input means for coupling to at least one of said anodeelectrodes present in the camera tube, a measuring circuit means forsampling a signal during the line flyback time coupled to said inputmeans, said measuring circuit including a comparison circuit means forstoring a sampled signal and for comparing two successively sampled andstored signals, and a control circuit coupled to the comparison circuit inthe measuring circuit and having an output means for coupling to the lenselectrode in the camera tube and for providing a changed lens adjustmentduring the line flyback times in case of unequal sampled signals in thecomparison circuit for the purpose of eliminating the inequality.2. A circuit arrangement as claimed in claim 1 wherein the control circuitcomprises a modulator means for periodically controlling the voltage of apulse applied during the line flyback time to the output means for supplyto the lens electrode for lens displacement stepwise smaller and larger orlarger and smaller relative to a voltage value which is given by thecomparison circuit.3. A circuit arrangement as claimed in claim 2, wherein the modulatorapplies said smaller or larger voltage of the pulse occurring during theline flyback time at the output means during a field scan time.4. A circuit arrangement as claimed in claim 2, wherein the control circuitcomprises a storage circuit having an input coupled to the comparisoncircuit in the measuring circuit and an output coupled to the modulator.5. A circuit arrangement as claimed in claim 4, wherein the control circuitcomprises a modulation signal generator coupled between the storagecircuit and the modulator, and further comprising a pulse generator meansfor supplying successively occurring modulation pulses coupled to themodulation signal generator and coupled to the modulator for supplying thepulses to be modulated and occurring during the line flyback time.6. A circuit arrangement as claimed in claim 5, wherein the storage circuitcomprises a limiter means coupled to the modulation signal generator forconveying a signal located between a minimum and a maximum value.7. A circuit arrangement as claimed in claim 4, further comprising a gatingcircuit coupled between said storage circuit and the output of thecomparison circuit in the measuring circuit, and a pulse generator meansfor applying gating pulses to said gating circuit.8. A circuit arrangement as claimed in claim 7, wherein the gating pulsefrom the pulse generator applied to the said gating circuit occurs duringa field blanking time.9. A circuit arrangement as claimed in claim 7, wherein the gating circuitenabled by the gating pulse and the storage circuit coupled theretojointly comprise an integrating circuit.10. A circuit arrangement as claimed in claim 1, wherein the measuringcircuit comprises a first clamping circuit coupled to the input means ofthe circuit, and further comprising a pulse generator means for supplyinga first clamping pulse occurring during a beam blanking time to saidclamping circuit.11. A circuit arrangement as claimed in claim 10, wherein said comparisoncircuit comprises a sample-and-hold circuit coupled to said clampingcircuit and to the pulse generator means for receiving a sampling pulseoccurring during a line flyback time.12. A circuit arrangement as claimed in claim 11, wherein the said pulsegenerator provides the sampling pulses occurring during the line flybacktimes during two field scan times.13. A circuit arrangement as claimed in claim 11, wherein said comparisoncircuit comprises a second clamping circuit coupled to the output of saidsample and hold circuit and to the pulse generator for supplying a secondclamping pulse, and said control circuit comprises a modulator means forproviding a smaller or larger pulse voltage occurring during the lineflyback time to the output means of the circuit arrangement, said secondclamping pulse occurring when said pulse voltage occurs.14. A circuit arrangement as claimed in claim 13, further comprising agating circuit coupled between said storage circuit and said clampingcircuit in the comparison circuit, the pulse generator means applying agating pulse to the gating circuit occurring after the modulator in thecontrol circuit has provided the said smaller and larger pulse voltagevalue.15. A circuit arrangement as claimed in claim 1, wherein the input means ofthe circuit comprises a changeover switch having a plurality of selectioncontacts and a master contact coupled to the measuring circuit, saidselection contacts being each connectable to a different camera tube, thegating circuit comprising a change-over switch having a master contact anda plurality of selection contacts, the master contact being coupled to themeasuring circuit and one of the selection contacts being coupled to thecontrol circuit, which control circuit includes a storage circuit.16. A circuit arrangement as claimed in claim 1, further comprising saidcamera tube, the input means of the circuit arrangement being coupled tothat one of said anode electrodes in the camera tube which is providednear the lens electrode in the electron gun.17. A circuit arrangement as claimed in claim 1, further comprisinsg saidcamera tube, the input means of the circuit arrangement being coupled tothat one of said anode electrodes in the camera tube which is providednear the target plate.18. A circuit arrangement as claimed in claim 1, further comprising aplurality of camera tubes, means for alternately coupling said measuringcircuit to the camera tubes, each camera tube having a control circuit anda storage circuit, and means for alternately coupling said control andstorage circuits to the measuring circuit.19. A method for eliminating the comet tail effect from a television cameratube, said method comprising periodically sampling a video signal duringline flyback times, storing a sampled signal, comparing two successivelysampled and stored signals, and changing the focus of the lens electrodeof said tube during line flyback times upon said compared signals beingunequal."}
{"WKU":"039314677","Title":"Synchronizing circuit having a variable bandpass filter","App_Date":"1974-10-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John F. Kulkens","Assignee":"Warwick Electronics Inc.","ICL_Class":"H04N  504","References":"2848537;2962666;3715499;3795762","Claims":"Having described the invention, the embodiments of the invention in whichan exclusive property or privilege is claimed are defined as follows:1. In a receiver having a variable gain amplifier stage for amplifying acomposite signal including an information component and a sync component,and an AGC circuit for generating an automatic gain control signal whichcontrols the gain of the amplifier stage in response to the receivedsignal strength, the improvement comprising:synchronizing means for generating a sync pulse which is synchronized withthe sync component includinga bandpass filter having a bandwidth variable to alter the ability of thesynchronizing means to synchronize onto the sync components; andmeans coupling the AGC circuit to the bandpass filter for varying thebandwidth under control of the automatic gain control signal.2. The improvement of claim 1 wherein the coupling means is responsive towiden the bandwidth of the bandpass filter when the automatic gain controlsignal decreases the gain of the amplifier stage in response to increasedsignal strength.3. The improvement of claim 2 wherein the bandpass filter has a first stateproviding a narrow bandwidth and a second state providing a widebandwidth, and the coupling means comprises switch means responsive whenthe automatic gain control signal exceeds in absolute value a preselectedswitching point for switching the state of the bandpass filter from thenarrow bandwidth to the wide bandwidth.4. The improvement of claim 3 wherein the AGC circuit includes a delayedAGC network for decreasing the gain of the amplifier stage only when theautomatic gain control signal exceeds a predetermined level, and theswitch means is coupled to the delayed AGC network whereby the preselectedswitching point of the bandpass filter is not less than the predeterminedlevel of the delayed AGC network.5. The improvement of claim 1 wherein the coupling means includesmodification means coupling the synchronizing means to the bandpass filterfor altering the bandwidth in synchronism with the occurrence of a synccomponent.6. The improvement of claim 5 wherein the coupling means widens thebandwidth of the bandpass filter in response to an automatic gain controlsignal which represents increasing signal strength, and the modificationmeans is responsive at the occurrence of the sync components to narrow thebandwidth of the bandpass filter when the bandwidth has been widened bythe coupling means.7. In a television receiver having a variable gain RF amplifier stage and avariable gain IF amplifier stage for amplifying a composite televisionsignal including an information component and a sync component, a syncseparator for detecting the sync component, oscillator means forgenerating scanning signals synchronized with the detected sync component,and an AGC circuit responsive to the received strength of the compositetelevision signal for generating an automatic gain control signal coupledto the amplifier stages to control the gain thereof, an automatic phasecontrol circuit comprising:a phase detector coupled to the sync separator and the oscillator means forgenerating a control voltage corresponding to the phase difference betweenthe detected sync component and the scanning signals;a controllable bandpass filter for coupling the control voltage from thephase detector to the oscillator means and having a narrow bandwidth fornoise immunity; andswitch means coupling the AGC circuit to the controllable bandpass filterfor widening the bandwidth of the bandpass filter in response to automaticgain control signals which decrease the gain of the amplifier stages inresponse to increased signal strength.8. The automatic phase control circuit of claim 7 wherein the AGC circuitincludes an IF AGC network for coupling an IF automatic gain controlsignal to the IF amplifier stage, and an RF AGC network for coupling adelayed automatic gain control signal to the RF amplifier stage todecrease the gain of the RF amplifier stage only when the received signalstrength exceeds a preselected level, and the switch means is coupled tothe RF AGC network to widen the bandwidth of the bandpass filter inresponse to the delayed automatic gain control signal.9. The automatic phase control circuit of claim 8 wherein the RF AGCnetwork includes a semiconductor switching device coupled between twosources of different DC voltage levels, bias means for maintaining thesemiconductor switching device in a preselected state until the automaticgain control signal equals the preselected level, and the switch means isresponsive only when the semiconductor switching device switches out ofits preselected state to switch the bandpass filter from the narrowbandwidth to the wide bandwidth.10. The automatic phase control circuit of claim 7 wherein the bandpassfilter includes an RC means for controlling the passband of the filter,and the switch means is responsive to a preselected level of the automaticgain control signal for altering the time constant of the RC means towiden the passband of the filter.11. The automatic phase control circuit of claim 10 wherein the switchmeans includes a diode for coupling the RC means to a source of referencepotential, a switching device coupled to the AGC circuit for switchingbetween conductive and nonconductive states in response to the level ofthe automatic gain control signal, and means coupling the switching deviceto the diode to effectively enable and disable the diode to connect the RCmeans to the source of reference potential.12. The automatic phase control circuit of claim 11 wherein the meanscoupling the switching device to the diode includes a bias source,resistor means connecting the bias source to the diode to forward bias thediode and effective to connect the RC means to the source of referencepotential, and the switching device is effective to shunt the bias sourceto cause the RC means to be coupled to the source of reference potentialthrough at least a portion of the resistor means.13. The automatic phase control circuit of claim 7 wherein the switch meanscomprises a first switching device coupled to the AGC circuit forswitching states to widen the bandwidth of the bandpass filter in responseto an automatic gain control signal corresponding to a received compositesignal of increased strength, and a second switching device coupled to thesync separator and responsive to the separated sync component forswitching states to narrow the bandwidth of the bandpass filter."}
{"WKU":"039314685","Title":"Method and a device for generating line rasters in an infra-red imaging","App_Date":"1974-03-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jan Dahlqvist;Bo Matsson;Benny Johansson","Assignee":"AGA Aktiebolag","ICL_Class":"H04L  700","References":"3328523;3617106;3688037;3691297;3708621;3717772;3731098","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A device for the generation of a signal to synchronize a frame sweepwith a mechanical frame scanning device comprising a line scanning deviceresponsive to a reference signal to maintain a speed in accordancetherewith, said line scanning device producing a line synchronizing signalin accordance with the speed thereof, a frame scanning device responsiveto said line synchronizing signal to control the speed thereof, said framescanning device producing a frame speed signal responsive to the speed ofsaid frame scanning device, and frequency dividing means responsive tosaid line scanning device, and periodically reset by said frame speedsignal, for providing a frame synchronizing signal.2. A device in accordance with claim 1, including an image representationunit responsive to said frame synchronizing signal and said linesynchronizing signal.3. A device in accordance with claim 1 wherein said line scanning deviceproduces a line speed signal responsive to the speed thereof, said dividerreceiving as an input said line speed signal.4. A device in accordance with claim 1 wherein said line scanning deviceincludes a rotational disc, sensing means for sensing rotational speed ofsaid disc, said sensing means producing said line synchronizing signal."}
{"WKU":"039314693","Title":"Crossover network for a multi-element electrostatic loudspeaker system","App_Date":"1974-06-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Douglas M. Elliott;Alpha M. Wiggins","Assignee":"Koss Corporation","ICL_Class":"H04R  314","References":"2934611","Claims":"We claim:1. In an electrostatic speaker system having a pair of input terminalsconnectable to receive an audio signal from an audio amplifier, thecombination comprising:an electrostatic driver having a pair of terminals connected to arespective pair of fixed plates which present a relatively fixed, highlycapacitive impedance across said terminals;a step-up transformer having a primary winding connected in a series branchacross said speaker input terminals to receive said audio signal, and asecondary winding magnetically coupled to said primary winding andelectrically connected to the input terminals of said electrostatic driverto form a parallel resonant circuit therewith, the inductance of saidsecondary winding being selected such that the parallel resonant circuitit tuned to a selected audio frequency, andan impedance device connected in said series branch to voltage divide theaudio signal with the primary winding of said step-up transformer.wherein the impedance of the primary winding of said step-up transformerincreases substantially for a range of frequencies about said tuned audiofrequency with the result that a majority of the audio signal within saidfrequency range is applied to said electrostatic driver and a majority ofthe audio signal outside said frequency range is applied to said impedancedevice.2. The electrostatic speaker system as recited in claim 1 in which saidimpedance device is a resistor having a value which is substantially lessthan the maximum impedance of said primary winding.3. The electrostatic speaker system as recited in claim 1 in which saidimpedance device is the primary winding of a second step-up transformerhaving a secondary winding which connects to a second electrostatic driverto form a parallel resonant circuit which is tuned to a frequency outsidesaid frequency range.4. An electrostatic speaker system for reproducing an audio signalgenerated at a pair of output terminals on an audio amplifier, thecombination comprising:a first electrostatic driver having a pair of plates connectable to receivean audio signal, said first electrostatic driver being designed to operateover a first preselected audio frequency range;a second electrostatic driver having a pair of plates connectable toreceive an audio signal, said second electrostatic driver being designedto operate over a second preselected audio frequency range;a first step-up transformer having a primary winding coupled to one of saidaudio amplifier output terminals to receive said audio signal which hasfrequencies in both of said preselected audio frequency ranges, and asecondary winding connected to the plates of said first electrostaticdriver to form a first parallel resonant circuit which is tuned to afrequency in said first preselected audio frequency range; anda second step-up transformer having a primary winding connected in serieswith the primary winding of said first step-up transformer and coupled tothe other of said output terminals on said audio amplifier to receive saidaudio signal having frequencies in both of said preselected audiofrequency ranges, and a secondary winding connected to the plates of saidsecond electrostatic driver to form a second parallel resonant circuitwhich is tuned to a frequency in said second preselected audio frequencyrange.5. The electrostatic speaker system as recited in claim 4 wherein a firstimpedance device is connected in series with the primary winding of saidfirst step-up transformer and the primary winding of said second step-uptransformer.6. A four-way electrostatic speaker system, the combination comprising:a bass unit having a bass electrostatic driver connected to the secondarywinding of a bass step-up transformer to form a parallel resonant circuittherewith which is tuned to a first audio frequency;a mid-bass unit having a mid-bass electrostatic driver connected to thesecondary winding of a mid-bass step-up transformer to form a parallelresonant circuit therewith which is tuned to a second audio frequencyhigher than said first audio frequency;a treble unit having a treble electrostatic driver connected to thesecondary winding of a treble step-up transformer to form a parallelresonant circuit therewith which is tuned to a third audio frequencyhigher than said second audio frequency; anda tweeter unit having a tweeter electrostatic driver connected to thesecondary winding of a tweeter step-up transformer to form a parallelresonant circuit therewith which is tuned to a fourth audio frequencyhigher than said third audio frequency;wherein a primary winding on said bass step-up transformer is connected inseries with a primary winding on said treble step-up transformer to form afirst series branch, and a primary winding on said mid-bass step-uptransformer is connected in series with a primary winding on said tweeterstep-up transformer to form a second series branch.7. The four-way electrostatic speaker system as recited in claim 6 in whichan impedance device is connected in series with each of said seriesbranches."}
{"WKU":"039314707","Title":"Tape marking and indicating device for remote control operation","App_Date":"1974-11-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Joseph J. Zimmermann","Assignee":"GTE Automatic Electric Laboratories Incorporated","ICL_Class":"G11B 1518","References":"3541271;3730997;3804993;3808372;3863029","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a remotely controlled telephone answering device for recordingmessages from remotely located telephones, apparatus comprising:a recording medium comprising at least a first channel having positionalinformation recorded thereon and a second channel for recording telephonemessages;playback means comprising first and second sensing means for respectivelymonitoring said first channel and said second channel and converting saidpositional information and said recorded messages into electrical signalsrepresentative thereof;means including an amplifier for amplifying and converting said electricalsignals into audio signals for conveying the content of said positionalinformation and said recorded messages to said telephones; andswitching means for selectively coupling said first sensing means and saidsecond sensing means to said amplifier during different time intervals.2. Apparatus in accordance with claim 1 including remote control meansresponsive to first and second remotely generated tone frequencies forcontrolling said switching means, said remote control means enabling saidswitching means responsive to said first tone frequency to connect saidfirst sensing means to said amplifier and enabling said switching meansresponsive to said second tone frequency to connect said second sensingmeans to said amplifier.3. Apparatus in accordance with claim 1 wherein said switching meanscomprises a relay responsive to said remote control means.4. Apparatus in accordance with claim 1 wherein said playback meanscomprises a playback head having first and second sensing inductances formonitoring said first and second channels, respectively, to generate saidelectrical signals.5. Apparatus in accordance with claim 1 wherein said recording mediumcomprises a two track magnetic recording tape.6. In a remotely controlled telephone answering device for recordingmessages from and playing back said messages to remotely locatedtelephones, apparatus comprising:a recording medium;means for recording messages from said remote telephones onto saidrecording medium;positional information means including recording indicia on said recordingmedium related to the length of said recorded messages to be played back;means for converting said recording indicia to audio information andconveying to said remote telephone said length of recorded messages onsaid recording medium; andmeans for selectively conveying said recording indicia prior to playingback said recorded messages."}
{"WKU":"039314715","Title":"Electronic metering arrangement for use in telephone and like exchanges","App_Date":"1974-04-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Leopold Laurens Coletta Geuens;Willy Francisca Van Hoeck","Assignee":"GTE International Incorporated","ICL_Class":"H04M 1510","References":"3107271;3433898;3697695;3825689","Claims":"We claim:1. In an automatic telephone system central office serving a plurality ofsubscribers lines, with each line terminated at said central office in aline circuit and having an identifying line number and said central officeincluding equipment to supply periodic metering pulses for local andinteroffice calls; a memory disc having a surface of magnetic material andincluding means for rotating said disc about its axis at a fixed rate,said disc including a first reset track and a second timing track and aplurality of meter fee recording tracks, a first counter resettable bysaid reset track and arranged to count in decimal code the output of saidtiming track, said first counter having an output corresponding to thedesignations of each said line number having a metering position on saiddisc, a pulse-plus-bias-line-gate for each said line circuitpreconditioned in response to a metering pulse, said output of said firstcounter operative to periodically scan each said line for the presence ofa preconditioned pulse-plus-bias-line-gate and to condition it to aconductive state during the interval of the counter when its countcorresponds to the pulse-plus-bias-line-gates designation, a first, asecond, a third and a fourth individual store for each said line in saidplurality of recording tracks, said individual stores for each of saidlines constituting tracks on said disc divided into sections individual tosaid lines, and said individual stores comprising a plurality of sectionsalong the radius of said disc in a plurality of tracks, means operated inresponse to the presence of a conditioned pulse-plus-bias-gate to write a one  in a said first metering store associated with said line, firstlogic means operated upon a first succeeding revolution of said disc toread said  one  for said particular line from said first individual storeand the continued presence of said conditioned pulse-plus-bias-gate towrite a  one  in said second individual store associated with said line,second logic means operated upon a second succeeding revolution of saiddisc to read said  one  for said particular line from said secondindividual store and the absence of said conditioned state of saidpulse-plus-bias-gate to write a  one  in said third individual storeassociated with said line, and third logic means operated upon a thirdsucceeding revolution of said disc to read said  one  for said particularline from said third individual store and the absence of said conditionedstate of said pulse-plus-bias-gate to write a  one  in said fourthindividual store associated with said line, other means operated inresponse to reading a  one  for a particular one of said lines in saidfourth metering store to operate a temporary storage means to register the one  for said line and subsequently into a permanent storage means toregister the cumulative metering count as read from said temporary storefor said line.2. In an automatic telephone system central office as claimed in claim 1wherein said temporary store comprises a limited plurality of tracks andincluding further logic means operated to record said  one  as read fromsaid fourth track in sequentially succeeding tracks upon finding precedingtracks having a  one  recorded therein.3. In an automatic telephone system central office as claimed in claim 2further including a priority logic means operated upon detecting saidtotal of  ones  recorded in said temporary store approaching the limit ofsaid limited plurality of tracks to effect the transfer of said count tosaid permanent storage means."}
{"WKU":"039314723","Title":"Asynchronous quadriphase communications system and method","App_Date":"1974-05-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Walter J. Gill;James A. Mellenger","Assignee":"Avantek, Inc.","ICL_Class":"H04J  306","References":"3736507;3809817","Claims":"We claim:1. In a communications system transmitting two independently timed binarydata signals on a single quadriphase modulated carrier through atransmission medium, the combination comprisingA. means receiving said two independently timed binary data signals forcontinuously uniquely identifying at least one of said signals, said meanspreserving the independent timing of said signals,B. means receiving said independently timed data signals from said lastrecited means for generating a quadriphase modulated carrier signal inaccordance with said signals, andC. means for applying said quadriphase modulated carrier signal to saidtransmission medium.2. The combination of claim 1 further comprisingA. means receiving said quadriphase modulated carrier signal from saidtransmission medium for quadriphase demodulating said carrier signal toprovide first and second demodulated signals,B. means receiving said first and second demodulated signals in either oftwo senses for removing said unique identification from at least one ofsaid signals to provide third and fourth signals corresponding to saidindependently timed binary data signals when said first and second signalsare applied in the correct sense, andC. means receiving said first and second demodulated signals forrecognizing said unique identification to control the sense in which saidfirst and second demodulated signals are applied to said removing means.3. Apparatus according to claim 1 wherein said means for continuouslyuniquely identifying at least one of said signals comprises means forchanging the data rate of one of said signals.4. Apparatus according to claim 2 wherein said means for continuouslyuniquely identifying at least one of said signals comprises means forchanging the data rate of one of said signals.5. The combination of claim 4 wherein said removing means comprises meansfor returning the data rate of said one of said signals to its originaldata rate.6. The combination of claim 5 wherein said means for recognizing saidunique identification comprises means for comparing the data rate of oneof said demodulated signals to a reference clock rate signal.7. The combination of claim 6 wherein said means for continuously uniquelyidentifying increases the data rate of said one of said signals.8. The combination of claim 7 wherein said means for continuously uniquelyidentifying includes means for periodically inserting a stuff bit in theincreased rate data stream of said one of said signals.9. The combination of claim 8 wherein said removing means includes meansfor detecting and removing said stuff bit in said one of said signals.10. The combination of claim 9 further comprising error detecting meansmonitoring the detection of said stuff bit.11. The combination of claim 1 further comprising processing meanspreceding said means for uniquely identifying, said processing meanscomprising means for scrambling each of said signals with distinctscrambling codes, said scrambling codes being independently timed.12. The combination of claim 2 further comprisinginput processing means preceding said means for uniquely identifying forscrambling each of said signals with distinct scrambling codes, saidscrambling codes being independently timed, andoutput processing means subsequent to said removing means for descramblingsaid signals, said output processing means having descrambling codescorresponding to said distinct scrambling codes of said input processingmeans.13. A method of transmitting two independently timed binary data signals ona single quadriphase modulated carrier through a transmission mediumcomprisingprocessing said signals to continuously uniquely identify at least one ofsaid signals, while preserving the independent timing of said signals,generating a quadriphase modulated carrier signal in accordance with saiduniquely identified independently timed signals, andapplying said quadriphase modulated carrier signal to said transmissionmedium.14. The method of claim 13 further comprisingreceiving said quadriphase modulated carrier signal from said transmissionmedium,quadriphase demodulating said quadriphase modulated carrier signal toprovide a pair of demodulated signals,processing said demodulated signals in either of two senses to provide saidbinary data signals when said unique identification is removed from saidpair of demodulated signals in the correct sense, andmonitoring said demodulated signals to detect said non-randomcharacteristic, and reversing the sense of said pair of demodulatedsignals when said characteristic is not recognized.15. The method of claim 13 wherein said step of processing includes thestep of changing the data rate of one of said signals.16. The method of claim 14 wherein said step of processing said signals tocontinuously identify at least one of said signals includes the step ofchanging the data rate of one of said signals."}
{"WKU":"039314731","Title":"Digital multiplexer system","App_Date":"1974-09-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Walton C. Ferris, Jr.","Assignee":"TRW Inc.","ICL_Class":"H04J  306","References":"","Claims":"I claim:1. A digital multiplexer system for multiplexing a plurality of digitaldata channels into a serial bit stream, which is divided into frames by aframe counter means, each frame being indicated by a frame pattern fortransmission to a demultiplexing receiver which also includes a framecounter means such system using a plurality of stuff words havingredundant bits in said bit stream to indicate whether or not to substituteat least one stuff bit to accommodate timing irregularities, said systemcomprising; means for sensing said stuff words and for providing an errorsignal if said bits of said stuff words are not redundant because of anerror during said transmission, means for sensing said frame pattern,counting means for counting said errors and providing a misframe signal,coincidence means responsive to said means for sensing said frame patternfor sensing a misframe signal for resetting said frame counter means ofsaid receiver.2. A system as in claim 1 which includes pseudo-random word generators inthe transmission and receiver portions of the system for respectivelyscrambling and descrambling said serial bit stream the word generator insaid receiver portion being reset by said coincidence means.3. A system as in claim 1 where said counting means provides said misframesignal after a predetermined plurality of errors have been counted.4. A system as in claim 3 where said counting means are initially reset toprovide a misframe signal after only relatively few errors are received."}
{"WKU":"039314740","Title":"Tone injection circuit","App_Date":"1974-12-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Donald W. McLaughlin;David Q. Lee","Assignee":"GTE Automatic Electric Laboratories Incorporated","ICL_Class":"H04Q  144","References":"3764753","Claims":"Now that the invention has been described, what is claimed as new anddesired to be secured by Letters Patent is:1. In a communication system including a pair of terminating circuitscoupled to a junctor via a matrix, said system being a two-wire system andeach of said terminating circuits appearing as an inlet on said matrix andsaid junctor having two ports on the outlet of said matrix, each of saidterminating circuits including a fixed resistance in one of said two wiresand said junctor including a pair of constant current sources feeding saidfixed resistances in the respective ones of said terminating circuits andthereby providing the holding current for holding up the connectionsthrough said matrix from said junctor to said terminating circuits, therelease of said connections being under control of said junctor, and asystem controller, the improvement comprising a tone signal injectioncircuit within said junctor, said tone signal injection circuit comprisinga pair of transistors operating as constant current sources and supplyinga constant current to the respective ones of said two wires; biasing meansfor biasing the respective ones of said pair of transistors to operate ina linear mode; phase splitter amplifier means for coupling tone signals tothe respective ones of said transistors to modulate the constant currentto the respective ones of said two wires, whereby the tone signals arecoupled to a terminating circuit.2. The improvement of claim 1, wherein said phase splitter amplifier meanscouples said tone signals to the base circuit of the respective ones ofsaid pair of transistors to change the current through the collector viathe emitter circuit at a rate and frequency of the tone signal at the basecircuit thereof.3. The improvement of claim 1, further including gating means normallyoperative to render said pair of transistors conductive to operate asconstant current sources and operable to couple said biasing means withsaid pair of transistors to bias said transistors to operate in a linearmode; and means for operating said gating means to couple said biasingmeans with said pair of transistors.4. The improvement of claim 3, wherein said means for operating said gatingmeans comprises control means operated by external means when a tonesignal is to be injected, said control means normally being operated tooperate said gating means to render said pair of transistors conductive tooperate as constant current sources, said control means being operated bysaid external means when a tone signal is to be injected to operate saidgating means to couple said biasing means with said pair of transistors tobias said transistors to operate in a linear mode.5. The improvement of claim 4, further including means controlled by saidcontrol means to inhibit the tone signal input to said phase splitteramplifier.6. The improvement of claim 3, wherein said control means comprises aflip-flop current."}
{"WKU":"039314758","Title":"Electronic switches and switch networks","App_Date":"1974-12-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Erich Bachle;Helmut Kliem;Bernhard Rall","Assignee":"Licentia Patent-Verwaltungs-GmbH","ICL_Class":"H04Q  352","References":"","Claims":"We claim:1. In an electronic switching device for a switching network in a telephonecentral office, the switching device having a signal input and output andpresenting a series branch constituting a switchable signal conductionpath extending between the input and the output, and presenting a shuntbranch transverse to the conduction path, the switching device including aswitching transistor having its collector-emitter path connected in theseries branch and impedance means connected in the shunt branch, thetransistor being switchable between a conductive state in which the seriesbranch has a low resistance and the shunt branch has a high resistance,and a blocking state in which the series branch has a high resistance andthe shunt branch has a low resistance, the improvement wherein:said impedance means comprisea control transistor of opposite conductivity type to said switchingtransistor and having its collector connected to the base of saidswitching transistor,a source of a control voltage connected to the base of said controltransistor,a feedback resistor connected to the emitter of said control transistor,andvoltage-dependent resistor means having one end connected to the base ofsaid switching transistor and controlled by the base voltage of saidswitching transistor to present a high resistance when said switchingtransistor is in its conductive state and to present a low resistance whensaid switching transistor is in its blocking state;and said device further comprises:first operating voltage supply means connected for supplying to the emitterof said switching transistor a first operating voltage having an absolutevalue greater than that of a control voltage capable of placing saidcontrol transistor in its conductive state;second operating voltage supply means connected to the other end of saidvoltage-dependent resistor means for supplying thereto a second operatingvoltage having an absolute value greater than that of said first operatingvoltage and sufficient to place the base of said switching transistor at apotential which causes said switching transistor to remain in its blockingstate as long as said voltage-dependent resistor means presents such lowresistance;third operating voltage supply means providing a third operating voltagehaving a value approximately equal to the voltage across said feedbackresistor when said control transistor is in its blocking state; andadditional resistor means connected between said third operating voltagesupply means and the collector of said switching transistor and presentinga high resistance, at least when said switching transistor is in itsconductive state, for causing said switching transistor to then operate inits saturation region.2. A device as defined in claim 1 wherein said voltage-dependent resistormeans includes: a bipolar transistor whose conductivity type is the sameas that of said switching transistor and whose collector is connected tothe base of said switching transistor; a further resistor connectedbetween the emitter of said bipolar transistor and said second operatingvoltage supply means to provide a defined voltage to the emitter of saidbipolar transistor; fourth operating voltage supply means connected to thebase of said bipolar transistor for supplying a fourth operating voltagewhose value is selected to maintain the base-emitter path of said bipolartransistor permanently conducting.3. A device as defined in claim 1 wherein said switching transistor is ofthe npn type, and said voltage-dependent resistor means comprises ann-channel field effect transistor whose drain is connected to the base ofsaid switching transistor and whose gate is connected to said secondoperating voltage supply means, and a further resistor connected betweenthe source of said field effect transistor and said second operatingvoltage supply means for feeding a defined current to said source.4. A device as defined in claim 3 wherein said field effect transistor isan MOS field effect transistor of the depletion mode type.5. A device as defined in claim 3 wherein said field-effect transistor isof the pn type.6. A device as defined in claim 1 wherein said additional resistor meanscomprises second voltage-dependent resistor means for supplying thecollector voltage for said switching transistor.7. A device as defined in claim 6 wherein said second voltage-dependentresistor means comprise: a further transistor whose conductivity type isopposite that of said switching transistor and whose collector isconnected to the collector of said switching transistor; a furtherresistor connected between the emitter of said further transistor and saidthird operating voltage supply means for feeding a defined emitter currentto said further transistor; and a fifth operating voltage supply meansconnected to the base of said further transistor for supplying a fifthoperating voltage whose value is selected to maintain the base-emitterpath of said further transistor permanently conducting; the emittercurrent to said further transistor having a value less than that of theemitter current of said switching transistor in its conductive state, sothat when said switching transistor is in its conductive state saidfurther transistor operates in its active region and when said switchingtransistor is in its blocking state said further transistor operates inits saturation region.8. A device as defined in claim 1 constituting a symmetrical two-wireswitching device.9. A device as defined in claim 1 which is monolithically integrated in aswitching matrix module composed of a plurality of switching devices on acommon silicon substrate.10. Switching system comprising:a plurality of electronic switching devices as defined in claim 1 connectedto form a coupling network composed of a plurality of stages with eachstage containing a plurality of said switching devices arranged in theform of a matrix having a plurality of rows and columns with a respectiveswitching device being located at each intersection of a row and a column,there being an odd number of said stages in said system;a plurality of input means providing signals to be switched, each inputmeans being connected in common to the emitters of said switchingtransistors of all of said switching devices in a respective row of thefirst of said stages;a first plurality of connecting lines each connecting the collectors ofsaid switching transistors of all of said devices in a respective columnof each odd stage to the collectors of said switching transistors of allsaid devices in a respective corresponding row of the next succeedingstage; anda second plurality of connecting lines each connecting the emitters of saidswitching transistors of all of said devices in a respective column ofeach even stage to the emitters of said switching transistors of all saiddevices in a respective corresponding row of the next succeeding stage;andwherein, for each odd stage, said additional resistor means for all of saiddevices in each column comprises a single further transistor connected forsupplying the collector voltages to said switching transistors of saidcolumn.11. A system as defined in claim 10 wherein the direct collector current ofeach said switching transistor is less than 100.mu.A in the conductivestate."}
{"WKU":"039314766","Title":"Method and system for automatically controlling the connection of","App_Date":"1974-01-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Gordon H. Matthews","Assignee":"Action Communication Systems, Inc.","ICL_Class":"H04M  714","References":"3268669;3350509;3513262;3546381;3551601;3553385;3560663;3721769;3736383;3790719;3808373","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A system for automatically controlling the connection of telephone callsbetween a plurality of input telephone lines at a facility and a pluralityof flat rate output telephone lines extending to various areas through acentral office comprising:input and output voice interface means disposed between the facility andthe central office and connected to said telephone lines,means for switching connected to said voice interface means between saidinput telephone lines and said output telephone lines,circuitry connected to said switching means for receiving dialing signalsfrom said input telephone lines,automatic digital processing means responsive to said dialing signals forselecting available ones of said flat rate output telephone linesaccording to predetermined efficiency and cost criteria stored within saidprocessing means, andmeans for operating said switching means for establishing audio connectionsbetween the calling input lines and the selected available flat rateoutput telephone lines.2. The system of claim 1 wherein one of said predetermined efficiencycriteria comprises the least expensive output line available forcompletion of a desired circuit in accordance with a predetermined rankingof output lines according to use cost.3. The system of claim 1 and further comprising:means responsive to a service request from the facility for transmitting adial tone to the facility before dialing signals may be transmitted onsaid input lines.4. The system of claim 1 and further comprising:means for determining that a user authorization code is valid prior toallowing the reception of dialing signals from said input lines.5. The system of claim 1 and further comprising:means for generating representations of said dialing signals on said inputlines and for transmitting said representations to the central office inorder to complete a circuit to the desired location.6. The system of claim 1 and further comprising:means responsive to on-hook indications for disconnecting said callinginput lines and said selected output lines.7. The system of claim 6 and further comprising:means for recording data related to the connected input and output linesincluding the time duration of the completed circuits.8. A system for automatically controlling the connection of inter-citytelephone calls at a user s branch exchange between a plurality of inputtelephone lines and a plurality of leased long distance telephone linesextending to various area zones through a central office comprising:input and output voice connecting arrangements disposed between the user sbranch exchange and a central office and connected to said telephonelines,circuitry connected to said input voice connecting arrangements forreceiving dialing signals from said user s branch exchange,a switching matrix connected between said voice connecting arrangements,andan automatic digital processing machine connected to said circuitry forreceiving said dialing signals and in response thereto selecting the mosteconomical available one of said long distance telephone lines forcompleting each dialed call in accordance with a predetermined ranking ofsaid long distance telephone lines according to economy of use, saidprocessing machine then operating said switching matrix to establish audioconnections through said voice connecting arrangements between the callinginput telephone lines and the selected most economical long distancetelephone lines.9. The system of claim 8 wherein said long distance telephone linescomprise leased wide area telephone lines.10. The system of claim 9 and further comprising:means for establishing audio connections between calling input telephonelines and nonleased long distance telephone lines when all of said leasedlong distance telephone lines are busy.11. The system of claim 8 and further comprising:tone generator means operable by said digital processing machine fortransmitting representations of said received dialing signals through saidswitching matrix to said central station over the selected long distancetelephone lines.12. The system of claim 11 wherein said digital processing machine operatessaid switching matrix to disconnect said circuitry and said tone generatormeans prior to establishing said audio connections through said voiceconnecting arrangements.13. The system of claim 8 and further comprising:means for sensing an on-hook condition on said established audioconnections and in response thereto operating said matrix to disconnectsaid user s facility from said central office.14. The system of claim 8 and further comprising:means responsive to abbreviated dialing signals for establishing desiredaudio connections.15. The system of claim 8 and further comprising:means for queuing requested telephone calls when all of said outputtelephone lines are busy, andmeans for notifying a queued caller when a desired output line isavailable.16. The system of claim 8 and further comprising:means for monitoring said input and long distance telephone lines and fordetecting malfunctions thereof.17. The system of claim 8 wherein said monitoring means detects an abnormalamount of activity on said lines.18. A system for automatically controlling the interconnection ofinter-city telephone calls at a user s branch exchange between a pluralityof input telephone lines and a plurality of flat rate long distancetelephone lines extending to various locations through a central officecomprising:input and output voice connecting arrangements disposed between the user sbranch exchange and the central office and connected to said telephonelines,a switch matrix having a plurality of switches for selectively connecting aplurality of paths between matrix inputs and matrix outputs,a progress information generator connected to said matrix,means connected for detecting a service request generated on one of saidinput telephone lines,matrix control means responsive to said detecting means for controllingsaid matrix to connect said progress information generator to said inputtelephone line requesting service,a dial tones generator connected to said matrix,means responsive to dialing signals applied on said input telephone linefor selecting one of said flat rate long distance telephone lines,means for operating said matrix to connect said dial tones generator to theselected output telephone line such that representations of said dialingsignals are transmitted from said dial tones generator to the centraloffice in order to establish connections with the dialed location, andmeans for operating said matrix to disconnect said progress informationgenerator and said dial tones generator from said telephone lines and toconnect a voice path between said input telephone line and said selectedlong distance telephone line for completion of the dialed inter-citytelephone call.19. The system of claim 18 wherein said means for operating said switchmatrix comprises:means for receiving group address signals for designating one of aplurality of groups of switches, andmeans for receiving switch address signals for operating a selected switchin the selected group.20. The system of claim 19 wherein each switch comprises:a relay coil for being energized by a predetermined switch address signal,a switch contact operable between open and closed positions in response tosaid relay coil,one of said matrix inputs connected to one side of said switch contact andone of said matrix outputs connected to the other side of said switchcontact.21. The system of claim 18 and further comprising:means for storing service requests in a queue when all output telephonelines are unavailable.22. The system of claim 21 and further comprising:means for automatically ringing the telephone set corresponding to thefirst service request in said queue when an output telephone line becomesavailable.23. A system located at a user s facility for automatically controlling theinterconnection of a plurality of input telephone lines and a plurality ofoutput telephone lines extending to a central office comprising:an input voice connecting arrangement connected to said input telephonelines,an output voice connecting arrangement connected to said output telephonelines,a switch matrix connected between said input and output voice connectingarrangements and having a plurality of switches for selectively connectinga plurality of paths between matrix inputs and matrix outputs,said switch matrix including means for receiving group address signals fordesignating one of a plurality of groups of switches,said switch matrix including means for receiving switch address signals foroperating a selected switch in the selected group in order to connect apath between a matrix input and a matrix output,an automatic digital processing machine connected between said input andoutput voice connecting arrangements for generationg said group addressand switch address signals,at least one progress information generator coupled to said switch matrix,means coupled to said input voice control connecting arrangement forreceiving a service request generated on one of said input telephone linesand for directing an indication of said service request to said automaticdigital processing machine, said automatic digital processing machine inresponse thereto generating group address signals and switch addresssignals in order to connect said progress information generator throughsaid matrix to the input telephone line requesting service,at least one dial tones generator coupled to said matrix,tone signal receiver means connected to said input voice connectingarrangement for detecting dialing signals applied on said input telephoneline and for directing said dialing signals to said automatic digitalprocessing machine, said automatic digital processing machine in responseto said dialing signals generating group address signals and switchaddress signals to said matrix in order to connect said dial tonesgenerator to a selected output telephone line, wherein said dial tonesgenerator is operated to transmit representations of said dialing signalsthrough said selected output telephone line to said central office inorder to establish connections with the dialed station,said automatic digital processing machine being responsive to theestablishment of connections with the dialed station for generating groupaddress signals and switch address signals to said switch matrix in orderto disconnect said progress information generator and said dial tonesgenerator from said input and output telephone lines and for operatingsaid matrix to connect said input telephone line to said selected outputtelephone line for completion of the dialed inter-city telephone call.24. The system of claim 23 wherein said input telephone lines comprise PBXtie trunks and said output telephone lines comprise wide area telephoneservice lines.25. The system of claim 23 wherein said input telephone lines compriseCentrex tie trunks.26. A method of controlling the connection of inter-city telephone callsbetween a plurality of input telephone lines at a user s facility and aplurality of leased long distance telephone lines extending to variousarea zones through a central office comprising:receiving a service request signal through a voice connecting arrangementfrom the user s facility on one of said input telephone lines,controlling a switch matrix in order to connect a progress tone generatorand a tone receiver to the input telephone line requesting service,detecting dialing signals from the input telephone line by the tonereceiver,selecting one of the long distance telephone lines in response to thereceived dialing signals, said telephone line being selected in accordancewith a predetermined ranking of telephone lines according to economy ofuse,controlling the switch matrix to connect a tone generator to the selectedlong distance telephone line to transmit representations of the receiveddialing signals to establish connection with the desired called locationthrough the central office,operation the switch matrix to disconnect the progress tone generator, thetone receiver and the tone generator, andoperating the switch matrix to connect the input telephone line through thevoice connecting arrangement with the selected long distance telephoneline in order to establish voice connection with the desired location.27. The method of claim 26 and comprising the further steps of:receiving valid user authorization code signals from the input telephoneline prior to receiving the dialing signals.28. The method of claim 26 wherein the least expensive one of the longdistance telephone lines is selected in response to the dialing signals.29. The method of claim 28 wherein more expensive long distance telephonelines are utilized if the least expensive long distance telephone line isin use.30. The method of claim 26 and comprising the further steps of:storing a service request when all long distance telephone lines areunavailable, andnotifying the input telephone line associated with the stored servicerequest when a long distance telephone line is available.31. The method of claim 30 and comprising the further steps of:advising a caller when all long distance telephone lines are unavailable ofthe number of calls presently stored.32. The method of claim 26 and comprising the further steps of:receiving abbreviated dialing signals,comparing said abbreviated dialing signals with stored lists of codeddialing signals, andtransmitting in response to said abbreviated dialing signalsrepresentations of said coded dialing signals to the central office."}
{"WKU":"039314774","Title":"Telephone intercommunication systems","App_Date":"1974-09-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Bloomfield James Warman","Assignee":"GTE International Incorporated","ICL_Class":"H04M  300","References":"3342944;3576397;3843845","Claims":"What I claim is:1. A telephone intercommunication system including: a plurality ofextension telephone stations, at least one supervisory means providingaccess to and warning of incoming calls from a communication line externalto the system, and at least one internal communication line; thearrangement being such that in an idle condition all of said extensiontelephone stations are normally interconnected via said internalcommunication line to provide for communication between any two or more ofsaid extension telephone stations when in a line-looped or off-hookcondition, and said supervisory means providing to all of said extensionstations, independently of said internal communication line or lines,warning of an incoming call from the corresponding external line; saidsupervisory means including means for preventing access of other telephonestations to said external exchange line while one of said stations isconnected thereto; and each extension telephone station includng manuallyoperable line coupling switch means giving access via the correspondingsupervisory means to the corresponding external communication line,independently of said internal communication line or lines; each extensiontelephone station further including a line coupling relay havingchangeover contacts for connecting a speech transmission circuit to saidinternal communication line and to said external line; an energizingcurrent path for said line coupling relay including a switch contactclosed by manually operated means; and a holding current path for saidrelay including at least one self-holding contact of said relay; and saidsupervisory means including; a first common terminal connected to saidenergizing current path of said telephone station; a second commonterminal connected to said holding current path of each telephone station;and means operated responsive to signal potentials at said first andsecond common terminals upon completion of both of said energizing andholding current paths of one telephone station, said responsive meansbeing so adapted to control the potential at said first common terminalthat energization of any line coupling relay of a further telephonestation is inhibited.2. A system as claimed in claim 1, in which each extension telephonestation includes a digital push button assembly arranged so that each pushbutton actuates contacts in each of two electrically separate groups, oneof which serves for the selective calling, independently of said internalcommunication line, of any other station of the system, and the other ofwhich serves for the initiation of dialed code signal transmission for theestablishment of an external call, the contacts of said one group beingrendered effective when the corresponding telephone station is connectedto the internal communication line and the contacts of said other groupbeing rendered effective when said line coupling switch means is operativeto establish a connection to a corresponding external communication line.3. A system as claimed in claim 2, in which a changeover contact of thesaid line coupling relay is arranged to connect a common source ofpotential alternatively to each of two circuits respectively includingsaid electrically separate groups of contacts, whereby one of said groupsof contacts is rendered effective when said relay is energized and theother is rendered effective when said relay is idle.4. A system as claimed in claim 1, including means responsive to a failureof the power supply for operation of the system, said means being adaptedto couple a single one of said telephone stations directly to saidexternal line."}
{"WKU":"039314782","Title":"Telephone intercommunication system provided with a common communication","App_Date":"1974-09-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Bloomfield James Warman","Assignee":"GTE International Incorporated","ICL_Class":"H04M  100","References":"3576397;3843845;3860763","Claims":"What I claim is:1. A telephone intercommunication system including a plurality of telephonestations, a common communication circuit accessible to each of saidtelephone stations via line coupling switch means individual to eachstation, and a common control means for operating the line coupling switchmeans of each station to establish a connection to said commoncommunication circuit in response to actuation of a corresponding manuallyoperable control means of that station, the arrangement being such thatwhen, following establishment of an initial connection to said commoncommunication circuit via said line coupling switch means, the conditionoccurs that all of said manually operable control means are inoperative,said common control means is rendered ineffective to establish any furtherconnection to the common communication circuit until the existingconnections are released; said system further including means fordetecting whether the number of connections established to said commoncommunication circuit exceeds two when said condition occurs, and meansfor providing a corresponding warning signal at each telephone station.2. The system as claimed in claim 1, in which each said line couplingswitch means comprises a self-holding relay having relay contacts forestablishing the connection to said common communication circuit, thecorresponding manually operable means each comprising a push button switcharranged in a current path including the winding of said relay andextending to said common control circuit, and said common control circuitfurther including in said current path a relay having relay contactarranged to modify a control signal applied via said current path, thearrangement being such that actuation of said push button switch firstcauses energization of the relay of the common control circuit and then,by means of said modified control signal, energization of said linecoupling relay connected via a corresponding push button switch, releaseof all push button switches serving to deenergize the relay of the commoncontrol circuit, and means, responsive to closure of said communicationcircuit, being provided for inhibiting reenergization of the commoncontrol relay until the common communication circuit is broken.3. The system as claimed in claim 2, in which the means for inhibitingenergization of the common control relay comprises a relay having awinding arranged in series in said common communication circuit and anormally closed relay contact in the current path to the winding of saidcommon control relay, the latter relay having normally closed contacts insaid common communication circuit.4. A system as claimed in claim 2, in which each of said self-holdingrelays have hold contacts connected in parallel to a common current pathfor energization of said relays, the arrangement being such that relaywindings connected in parallel by way of said hold contacts form part of apotential divider circuit, and that when more than two of said relaywindings are connected in parallel the potential at a tapping of saiddivider circuit causes a switching circuit connected thereto to respondand provide said warning signal."}
{"WKU":"039314790","Title":"Telephone intercommunication system providing common access to a","App_Date":"1974-09-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Bloomfield James Warman;Maurice Wilfrid Kingsnorth","Assignee":"GTE International Incorporated","ICL_Class":"H04M  100","References":"3342944;3576397;3703611;3843845;3860763","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A telephone communication system including a plurality of extensiontelephone stations, and a common supervisory means for controlling accessto a communication line from each of said telephone stations, saidtelephone stations and said supervisory means both including elements of acommon control circuit for influencing the condition of said supervisorymeans, and said common control circuit including a single signaling wireextending between said telephone stations and said supervisory means, thesignal potential established in said wire being dependent on the conditionof circuit means of each telephone station and at least two circuit meansof said supervisory means, and the later circuit means being controlled inaccordance with said signal potential; each of said telephone stationsalso including at least one circuit means controlled in accordance withsaid signal potential; said circuit means of each extension telephonestation comprising line switching means for establishing a connectionbetween the telephone speech transmission circuit of said station andterminal means of said station; said circuit means of said supervisorymeans comprising first switching means for effecting a connection betweenline wires of said communication line and common terminal means of saidsupervisory means connected to said terminal means of all of saidextension telephone stations, and second switching means for connecting ahold loop to said line wires; the arrangement being such that with bothsaid line switching means of any one telephone station and said firstswitching means of the supervisory means operated to establish a throughconnection from the communication line to said one telephone station, astable state exists; and each telephone station further including manuallyoperable means for varying the potential existing in said single signalwire in said stable state whereby by release of the first switching meansand operation of the second switching means of the supervisory means ahold loop is applied to the communication line wires, and including meansresponsive to hanging up of said telephone station for varying thepotential existing in said single signal wire in said stable state wherebyby rendering both of said first and second switching means inoperative thecommunication line wires are released.2. A telephone intercommunication circuit as claimed in claim 1, in whichthe said line switching means of each telephone station and the said firstswitching means of the supervisory means comprise relay switching circuitshaving self-holding current paths forming potential divider circuits, atapping on each of said potential divider circuits being connected to saidsingle signal wire.3. A telephone intercommunication circuit as claimed in claim 2, in whicheach telephone station further includes manual switching means for closinga current path of said common control circuit, independent of said singlesignal wire, to operate said relay switching circuits and establish athrough connection to said communication line wires, said independentcurrent path including a single wire extending between all of said manualswitching means and a tapping of a potential divider circuit formed by aholding current path of said relay switching circuit of the supervisorymeans, and the arrangement being such that upon completion of said holdingcurrent path the potential at said tapping is no longer sufficient foractuation of the relay switching circuit of an extension telephonestation.4. A telephone intercommunication system as claimed in claim 2, in whichthe said second switching means comprises a second relay switching circuitof the supervisory means having a self-holding current path forming apotential divider circuit of which a tapping is also connected to saidsingle signaling wire; the arrangement being such that when said relaycircuit of a telephone station is actuated the potential of said singlesignaling wire is sufficient to cause actuation of said second relayswitching circuit, while upon actuation of said second relay switchingcircuit the potential of said single signaling wire is such as to causesaid relay circuit of the telephone station to release; said first relayswitching circuit of the supervisory means having a first relay contact inthe second switching circuit whereby the latter circuit is inoperativewhen the first circuit is operative, and having a second relay contactarranged to disconnect the first relay switching circuit from said singlesignaling wire when said circuit releases; said manually operable means ofeach telephone station comprising a switch means for temporarily reducingthe potential of said single signaling wire without rendering the relayswitching circuit of the telephone station inoperative, whereby initiallysaid first relay switching circuit of the supervisory means is deenergizedand then, upon restoration of the control signal from the telephonestation, the second relay switching circuit of the supervisory means isoperated; and said means responsive to hanging up comprising a switchcontact arranged to render the relay switching circuit of the telephonestation inoperative.5. A telephone intercommunication system as claimed in claim 2, in whichthe said second switching means comprises a second, self-holding, relayswitching circuit of the supervisory means, arranged to be energizedtogether with said first relay circuit to prepare a hold loop across idlecontacts of the first relay circuit, and said supervisory means furthercomprising a third relay switching circuit having a switch contact in theholding current path of the second relay switching circuit, thearrangement being such that upon operation of said manually operable meansof a telephone station only the first switching means is deenergized,while upon hanging up of a telephone station the first relay switchingcircuit is deenergized and the third relay switching circuit is energized."}
{"WKU":"039314804","Title":"Time compression receiver","App_Date":"1974-09-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Margaret A. Poole","Assignee":"GTE Sylvania Incorporated","ICL_Class":"H04M  150","References":"3445606;3578919;3773981;3794763","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Receiver apparatus for detecting the presence of signals ofpredetermined frequencies on any of a plurality of receiver input linesincluding in combinationmultiplexing means for repeatedly sampling the receiver input lines inorder and producing at its output connection analog samples of the inputsignals present on said receiver input lines;analog-to-digital converting means coupled to the output connection of themultiplexing means for converting each of said analog samples to a digitalsample;memory means coupled to said analog-to-digital converting means for storingsaid digital samples;memory readout means for reading out of the memory means the digitalsamples associated with each of the receiver input lines, all of thesamples associated with a receiver input line being read out for eachreceiver input line in turn, the digital samples associated with areceiver input line being read out in the same order as the analog samplesassociated with that receiver input line were produced by the multiplexingmeans;digital-to-analog converting means coupled to the memory readout means forconverting each of said digital samples to an analog pulse;filter means coupled to the digital-to-analog converting means forconverting the analog pulses associated with a receiver input line to ananalog signal, the signal frequencies present in an analog signal beingequal to the predetermined frequencies present in the associated inputsignal times an integral multiple of the number of receiver input lines;detecting means coupled to the filter means for determining the presence orabsence of each of the signal frequencies in the analog signal and forproducing indications thereof which indicate the presence or absence ofeach of the predetermined frequencies in the associated input signal;receiver identifying means for producing receiver identifying signalsdesignating the particular receiver input line with which said indicationsare associated;said memory readout means being operable to readout in order from thememory means during a line readout period all the stored digital samplesassociated with a receiver input line starting with the oldest storeddigital sample, the digital samples associated with each receiver inputline in order being read out during successive line readout periods in arecurring sequence;said filter means being operable to convert the analog pulses associatedwith a receiver input line to an analog signal during a line readoutperiod;said detecting means being operable to produce indications indicating thepresence or absence of each of the predetermined frequencies in theassociated input signal during a line readout period;said receiver identifying means being operable to produce receiveridentifying signals designating the particular receiver input line withwhich said indications are associated during the line readout period whilesaid indications are being produced;said multiplexing means being operable to sample a receiver input line andproduce an analog sample during a data sampling period;said analog-to-digital converting means being operable to convert theanalog sample produced during a data sampling period to a digital sampleduring the same data sampling period;memory input control means for writing a digital sample into the memorymeans during the same data sampling period it was produced;a multiplicity of digital samples associated with each of the receiverinput lines being written into the memory means during a memory inputperiod equal to a line readout period times an integral multiple (M) ofthe number (N) of receiver input lines; andsaid memory readout means being operable to read out a multiplicity ofdigital samples associated with a receiver input line from the memorymeans during a line readout period.2. Receiver apparatus in accordance with claim 1 includingtiming means including means operable to cause said multiplexing means tosample a receiver input line during a data sampling period, a multiplicityof samples of the input signals on each of the plurality of receiver inputlines being produced during a memory input period;said timing means including means operable to cause said memory inputcontrol means to write a digital sample into the memory means during eachdata sampling period;said timing means including means operable to cause said memory readoutmeans to read out an integral number (M) of digital samples during eachdata sampling period; andsaid timing means including said receiver identifying means and beingoperable to produce a combination of signals during each line readoutperiod to designate the particular receiver input line associated with thedigital samples being read out of the memory means during the line readoutperiod.3. Receiver apparatus in accordance with claim 2 whereinsaid memory means includes a plurality of sets of storage locations, eachset of storage locations being capable of storing a digital sample, theplurality of sets of storage locations being equal to the number ofdigital samples produced during a memory input period;and includingbuffer means connected between said memory means and said digital-to-analogconverting means for storing a single digital sample;said timing means being operable during each of a number (M) of portions ofeach data sampling period to cause said memory readout means to read adigital sample out of a set of storage locations and place said digitalsample in the buffer means, the digital samples read out during a datasampling period being a number (M) of samples in order associated with thesame receiver input line; andsaid timing means being operable to cause said memory input control meansto write the digital sample being produced by the analog-to-digitalconverting means into the memory means during another portion of the datasampling period.4. Receiver apparatus in accordance with claim 3 includingmemory address control means coupled to said sets of storage locations andoperable to address a different one of said sets of storage locationsduring said another portion of each data sampling period of a memory inputperiod, the sets of storage locations being addressed in the same orderduring each memory input period;said memory address control means being operable to address a different oneof said sets of storage locations during each of said number (M) ofportions of each data sampling period of a line readout period, everyN.sup.th set of storage locations being addressed in order during a linereadout period where N is the number of receiver input lines; andsaid memory address control means being operable to address the set ofstorage locations containing the oldest digital sample associated with areceiver input line during the first of the number (M) of portions of thefirst data sampling period of each line readout period, and being operableto address the sets of storage locations containing digital samplesassociated with a different receiver input line during each of the linereadout periods of a sequence of N line readout periods.5. Receiver apparatus in accordance with claim 4 whereinsaid detecting means includes"}
{"WKU":"039314812","Title":"Plural line selector apparatus for enabling selection of one of a","App_Date":"1974-09-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Joseph Monroe Jackson","Assignee":"Litton Business Telephone Systems, Inc.","ICL_Class":"H04Q  300","References":"2971135;3150238;3296499;3469151;3541515;3560939;3597737;3691431;3757056","Claims":"What I claim is:1. A circuit selector comprising:a first plurality of controlled switch means, each of said plurality havingan input and operable from a first condition to a second condition inresponse to the application of a first signal voltage at its input forcompleting an electrical circuit during the application of said signalvoltage;a plurality of bistable electronic switch means,said plurality corresponding in number to said controlled switch means withone bistable switch means associated with a corresponding one of saidcontrolled switch means,each bistable electronic switch means having a first enable input, a seconddisable input and an output and operable to a first condition to provide afirst signal voltage at its output in response to a predetermined inputsignal applied at its first input and operable to a second condition toremove said first signal voltage at its output in response to apredetermined input signal applied at its second input;means coupling said output of each said electronic switch means to input ofa corresponding one of said controlled switch means;a plurality of momentarily operable switch means, said pluralitycorresponding in number to said bistable electronic switch means and eachone of said momentarily operable switch means being associated with acorresponding one of said bistable electronic switch means;a plurality of electronic gate means, said plurality corresponding innumber to said plurality of bistable electronic switch means, each one ofsaid gate means having its output coupled in circuit to said seconddisable input of an associated one of said bistable switch means, and eachof said momentarily operable switch means having an output coupled incircuit with the first enable input of the associated one of said bistableelectronic switch means, and additionally coupled to an input of all ofsaid gate means except that one of said gate means associated with theassociated one of said bistable electronic switch means;wherein the operation of a selected one of said momentarily operable switchmeans causes said bistable switch means associated therewith to becomeplaced in the first condition and thereby operate an associated controlledswitch means and concurrently to restore any of the remaining bistableswitch means as may be in the first condition to the second condition;an additional momentarily operable switch means having an output andoperable momentarily from a first condition to a second condition toproduce momentarily a predetermined output voltage at its output;an additional controlled switch means having an input and operable from afirst condition to a second condition in response to the application of apredetermined voltage to its input for interrupting an electrical circuitduring the presence of said predetermined input voltage;control circuit means coupled to the output of said additional momentarilyoperable switch means and responsive to the operation of said switch meansto the second condition for providing a predetermined voltage for apredetermined time to the input of said additional controlled switch meansand for providing an output to the second disable input of each of saidbistable electronic switch means upon restoration of said additionalswitch means to its first condition to reset any of said bistable switchmeans as may be in the first condition to the second condition.2. The invention as defined in claim 1 further comprising in combinationtherewith a first common circuit, a plurality of output circuitscorresponding in number with said controlled switch means, with one ofsaid plurality being associated with one of said controlled switch means;each one of said controlled switch means having contact means connectedbetween said common circuit and a corresponding one of said outputcircuits for completing a respective circuit therebetween during the timewhen the associated controlled switch means is in its second condition;andwherein said additional controlled switch means includes contacts connectedin series circuit between said common circuit and said first plurality ofcontrolled switch means for interrupting said circuit during the time whensaid additional controlled switch means is in its second condition.3. The invention as defined in claim 1 wherein said controlled switch meanscomprises:a transistor switch; anda relay, said relay having its winding coupled to the output of saidtransistor switch, and said relay further comprising a plurality of relaycontacts.4. A selector having a plurality of output circuits and a common circuitfor selectively completing a current path between said common and one ofsaid output circuits comprising:a first plurality of manually operable momentary contact switches, each ofsaid first plurality being associated with one of a correspondingplurality of circuits to be connected to a common circuit;a corresponding plurality of bistable electronic switch means, said switchmeans normally in a first condition and operable to a second condition,each of said bistable electronic switch means including:a first input for enabling said electronic switch means to a firstcondition, and a second disable input for enabling said electronic switchmeans into a second condition;a first plurality of output switch means, each of said switch meansresponsive to the associated one of said bistable switch means being inthe second condition for completing an electrical circuit between acorresponding circuit and said common circuit;a plurality of NAND gates, said plurality corresponding in number with saidplurality of bistable switch means, each said NAND gate including aplurality of inputs and an output;a plurality of voltage inverter means, each one of said inverter meansconnected in between the output of a corresponding one of said NAND gatesand said disable input of a corresponding one of said bistable electronicswitch means;a plurality of resistor means corresponding in number to said plurality ofbistable switch means;means connecting each resistor means between a source of voltage at one endand at the other end in circuit with one said contact switch means, to theinput of the bistable electronic switch means associated with said contactswitch means and to a NAND gate input of the respective ones of saidplurality of NAND gates associated with the remaining bistable electronicswitch means;bias resistor means connected between electrical ground potential and oneinput of each of said NAND gate means;hookswitch means;second resistor means having a substantially lesser resistance than saidbias resistor means;means connecting said hookswitch means and said second resistor means inseries circuit between said source of voltage and said same NAND gateinputs as said bias resistor means;said hookswitch means being in a normally open condition and operable whenclosed to complete a circuit between said source and said inputs to changethe voltage thereat;additional momentary contact switch means having a normally open positionand operable to a closed position, one contact thereof connected toelectrical ground potential;voltage inverter means;means connecting the input of said inverter to the remaining contact ofsaid additional switch;electronic switch means having an input and output and responsive to a highvoltage at its input for switching from a first to a second condition andresponsive to a low at its input for switching from the second conditionto the first condition;means responsive to said electronic switch means being in said firstcondition for interrupting the circuit between said common and a selectedone of said outputs;means connecting the output of said inverter to said input of saidelectronic switch means;a capacitor;means connecting one end of said capacitor in common circuit with said biasresistor means and said inputs of said NAND gates and means connecting theother end of said capacitor in circuit with said output of said inverter;andan electric circuit whereby operation of said additional switch meansresults in an open circuit between said common circuit and said outputcircuits and restoration thereof results in the generation of a low pulseto the input of all said NAND gates and any bistable switch means that isin the first condition is restored to the second condition.5. The invention as defined in claim 4 wherein said bistable electronicswitch means comprises a NAND gate latch circuit.6. A line selection device for coupling a telephone instrument circuitassociated with a telephone instrument of the type having a hookswitch toa selected one of a plurality of trunk telephone line circuits comprising:a first plurality of manually operable spring-return single-polesingle-throw selection switches, each of said switches containing a pairof electrical contacts in a normally open circuit for closing an electriccircuit therethrough in response to placement to the switch operatecondition, said plurality of selection switches corresponding in number tothe plurality of output telephone lines with one of the switches beingassociated with a corresponding one of said trunk line circuits;a source of high voltage and a source of low reference voltage, one sourcebeing of a higher voltage level relative to the other;means connecting one contact of each selection switch to said source of lowreference voltage;a first plurality of electromechanical relay means, said pluralitycorresponding in number to said plurality of selection switches and one ofsaid relay means associated with one of said first switch means, each ofsaid relay means including a winding, and a set of contacts normally openresponsive to energization of said winding for operating to the closedposition contact; each of said contact sets of said relays connectedbetween a common circuit in said telephone instrument and a correspondingone of said plurality of trunk telephone line circuits;a corresponding first plurality of NPN type transistors, each of saidplurality being associated with a corresponding one of said relay means insaid first plurality of relay means, each of said transistors having abase, a collector, and an emitter;means connecting each relay winding electrically in series between saidsource of high voltage and the collector of a corresponding one of saidtransistors;a plurality of NAND gate latches, said plurality corresponding in number tosaid first plurality of switches and transistors with each NAND gate latchbeing associated with a corresponding one of said transistors and saidswitches, each of said NAND gate latches including a first input, a secondinput, and a first output, each said NAND gate latch means normally in afirst condition having a low voltage at said second output and responsiveto a low voltage at its first input for switching to a second conditionhaving a high at its said second output and further responsive to a highapplied at its second input for switching back to said first condition;means connecting said first output of each one of said plurality of NANDgate latches to the base of a corresponding one of said transistors forenergizing said transistor means in response to the establishment of thecorresponding NAND gate latch means in the second condition;a first plurality of resistor means corresponding in number to the numberof NAND gate latch means, each having a first and a second end, one end ofeach resistor means being connected to said source of high voltage;a plurality of NAND gates corresponding in number to the plurality of NANDgate latches, each of said NAND gates having a plurality of separateinputs corresponding in number to said NAND gate latch means and anoutput, each of said NAND gates normally providing a low voltage at theoutput thereof and responsive to a low voltage at any one of its pluralityof inputs for providing a high voltage at the output thereof;each one of said NAND gates being associated with a corresponding one ofsaid NAND gate latch means;a first plurality of voltage inverter means, said plurality correspondingin number to said plurality of NAND gates, each of said inverter meanscontaining an input and an output for providing a low voltage or a highvoltage at the output thereof in response to the input thereof havingapplied thereto either a high voltage or low voltage, respectively, eachone of said inverter means having an input coupled to the output of acorresponding one of said NAND gates and its output connected to saidsecond input of a corresponding one of said NAND gate latch means;means coupling said remaining end of each one of said first plurality ofresistor means electrically in common with the remaining contact of acorresponding one of said selector switch means, said first input of acorresponding one of said NAND gate latch means and one input of each ofthose of said NAND gate means not associated with said respective one ofsaid NAND gate latch means, whereby operation of a selector switch meansassociated therewith applies a low voltage to said first input of saidNAND gate latch means associated therewith and to one input of each of thenon-associated NAND gates;bias resistor means connected at one end to said low source;means connecting the remaining end of said bias resistor means electricallyin common to one separate input of each of said NAND gate means;means for connecting said source of high voltage in circuit with one end ofsaid hookswitch of said telephone instrument, said hookswitch means,normally open, for closing an electrical circuit upon removal of atelephone handset from its cradle;second resistor means, said second resistor means having a substantiallylesser resistance than said bias resistor means;means for connecting the remaining end of said hookswitch means and saidsecond resistor means in an electrical series to the remaining end of saidbias resistor.7. The invention as defined in claim 6 further comprising in combinationtherewith:holding circuit means for momentarily interrupting any establishedtelephone line circuit and for causing disengagement of said selectedcircuit connection comprising electromechanical type relay means, saidrelay having a winding and a set of normally closed contacts operable tothe open condition in response to energization of said winding, meansconnecting said contact set electrically in series with said telephoneinstrument circuit;transistor means of the NPN type having a collector, an emitter and a base;means connecting said relay winding electrically in series between saidsource of high voltage and said collector and means electricallyconnecting said emitter to said source of low reference voltage;a manually-operable normally open spring-return single-pole single-throwswitch, said switch having a pair of electrical contacts for closing anelectrical circuit through said contacts in response to said switch beingin the operated condition;voltage inverter means having an input and an output for producing a highvoltage at its output in response to presence of a low voltage applied toits input;means connecting said pair of contacts of said switch means in anelectrical series circuit between said source of low voltage and saidinput of said inverter means;resistor means connected between said source of high voltage and said inputof said inverter means whereby said inverter output is normally low;diode means having an anode and a cathode;third resistor means;means connecting said third resistor means between said base and said diodeanode;fourth resistor means connected between said base and said source ofreference low voltage;first capacitor means connected between said diode cathode and said sourceof reference low voltage adapted to be charged to a positive high voltagethrough said diode and to be discharged over a predetermined integralthird and fourth resistor means;means electrically connecting said output of said inverter means in circuitwith said diode anode and second capacitor connecting said output of saidinverter means to said remaining end of said bias resistor means;whereby operation of said switch means results in operation of said relaymeans to interrupt said telephone instrument circuit for a predeterminedinterval irrespective of the operated condition of any one of said firstplurality of relays, and whereby restoration of said switch means resultsin the generation of a pulse of low voltage which is passed from theremaining end of said bias resistor means to an input of each of said NANDgates to cause any associated NAND gate latch theretofore in its secondcondition to revert to its first condition and for the one of said firstplurality of relay means associated therewith to be de-energized torestore and disengage any connection between said telephone instrumentcircuit and any telephone trunk line circuit."}
{"WKU":"039314820","Title":"Four-channel stereophonic reproducing system for reproducing discrete","App_Date":"1974-04-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Yukio Sugimoto;Makoto Okamasa;Toyoshi Fukumura","Assignee":"Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"G11B  374;H04B  500","References":"3564434;3686471;3803367;3825697","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A four-channel stereophonic reproducing system for reproducing first,second, third and fourth audio signals from a first stereophonic compositesignal consisting of a main channel signal comprised of an addition ofsaid first and second audio signals and a sub-channel signal obtained byfrequency modulating or phase modulating a difference between said firstand second audio signals, and a second stereophonic composite signalconsisting of a main channel signal comprised of an addition of said thirdand fourth audio signals and a sub-channel signal obtained by frequencymodulating or phase modulating a difference between said third and fourthaudio signals, said system comprising: first reproducing means forreproducing said first and second signals from said first stereophoniccomposite signal; and second reproducing means for reproducing said thirdand fourth audio signals from said second stereophonic composite signal,each of said first and second reproducing means including main channelsignal reproducing means having a low-pass filter for passing said mainchannel signal in said first or second stereophonic composite signal, andsub-channel signal reproducing means having a high-pass filter for passingsaid subchannel signal in said first or second stereophonic compositesignal, said sub-channel signal reproducing means including a detectorcircuit for detecting the output of said high-pass filter and a filtercircuit for eliminating higher frequencies of the output of said detectorcircuit, and said main channel signal reproducing means further includinga phase correction circuit for producing a phase lag equal to that of thesignal in said sub-channel signal reproducing means.2. A system according to claim 1, wherein said phase correction circuitcomprises a transistor, and a series circuit including a resistor and acapacitor connected across the collector and emitter of said transistor,and the junction point of said resistor and said capacitor provides anoutput terminal.3. A system according to claim 1, wherein said low-pass filter in said mainchannel signal reproducing means comprises at least one transistor, andresistors and capacitors connected to the base of said transistor, whereina series circuit of a resistor and a capacitor is connected across thecollector and emitter of said transistor, and wherein said correctioncircuit is comprised of said transistor and said resistor and capacitorconstituting said series circuit.4. A system according to claim 1, wherein said low-pass filter includes atleast one transistor, and a temperature compensating thermistor isconnected to the emitter of said transistor.5. A system according to claim 1, wherein at least one of said firstreproducing means for reproducing said first stereophonic composite signaland said second reproducing means for reproducing said second stereophoniccomposite signal is provided with phase correction means to correct for aphase difference between said first and second stereophonic compositesignals.6. A system according to claim 1, wherein the values of said resistor andsaid capacitor in one of said phase correction circuits provided in saidfirst and second reproducing means for reproducing said first and secondstereophonic composite signals, are selected to differ from those of saidresistor and said capacitor in the other of said phase correctioncircuits, whereby a phase difference between said first and secondreproducing means is corrected for by said phase correction circuits."}
{"WKU":"039314839","Title":"Multiple circuit control switch having articulated cascaded operating","App_Date":"1974-01-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Paige W. Thompson","Assignee":"General Electric Company","ICL_Class":"H01H  900;H01H 3738","References":"1414448;1867870;1877990;2064163;2200995;2427900;2510859;2586992;2754388;2792465;2848588;3235692;3482195;3483337;3701962;3713062;3731013","Claims":"What I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the UnitedStates is:1. In an electrical switch having a plurality of means adapted to bemovable generally sequentially for switching power through the electricalswitch; and a plurality of movable means adapted to be conjointly andrelatively movable and disposed in cascaded articulated relation betweenthe switching means, at least some of the movable means being conjointlymovable relative to at least some of the others thereof for effecting thesequential operation of the switching means.2. In the electrical switch as set forth in claim 1, wherein the movablemeans includes at least first and second levers drivingly engaged betweenat least first and second pairs of the switching means, respectively.3. In the electrical switch as set forth in claim 1, wherein the movablemeans include at least first and second levers drivingly engaged betweenat least first and second pairs of the switching means, respectively, oneof the first and second levers being movable for sequentially operatingthe switching means of one of the first and second pairs thereof prior tomovement of the other of the first and second levers for sequentiallyoperating the switching means of the other of the first and second pairsthereof.4. In the electrical switch as set forth in claim 2, wherein the first andsecond levers respectively include opposite end portions, the opposite endportions being respectively pivotally mounted to associated ones of theswitching means of the first and second pairs thereof.5. In the electrical switch as set forth in claim 2, wherein the first andsecond levers respectively include opposite end portions respectivelypivotally mounted with the switching means of the first and second pairsthereof, the first and second levers being initially pivotally movableabout one of their opposite end portions for operating one of theswitching means of the first and second pairs thereof and thereafter beingfurther pivotally movable about the other of their opposite end portionsfor operating the other of the switching means of the first and secondpairs thereof.6. In the electrical switch as set forth in claim 3, wherein the movablemeans further includes a third lever drivingly engaged between the firstand second levers to effect the respective switching means operatingmovements thereof.7. In the electrical switch as set forth in claim 2, wherein the movablemeans further includes third and fourth levers drivingly engaged betweenthe first and second levers and a third pair of the switching means,respectively.8. In the electrical switch as set forth in claim 2, wherein the movablemeans further includes third and fourth levers drivingly engaged betweenthe first and second levers and a third pair of the switching means,respectively, the third lever being movable for sequentially operating oneof the first lever and one of the switching means of the third pairthereof prior to movement of the fourth lever for sequentially operatingone of the second lever and the other switching means of the third pairthereof.9. In the electrical switch as set forth in claim 7, wherein the third andfourth levers respectively include opposite end portions pivotally mountedto the first and second levers and the switching means of the third pairthereof, the third and fourth levers being pivotally movable about theiropposite end portions for operating one of the first lever and the oneswitching means of the third pair thereof and one of the second lever andthe other switching means of the third pair thereof, respectively.10. In the electrical switch as set forth in claim 7, wherein the movablemeans further includes a fifth lever for driving engagement with the thirdand fourth levers.11. An electrical switch comprising a plurality of means adapted to begenerally sequentially movable for switching power through the electricalswitch, a plurality of means disposed generally in articulated cascadedrelation between the switching means and movable for actuating themgenerally sequentially, and means for applying a force of varyingmagnitude under preselected conditions onto the actuating means to effectthe switching means actuating movement thereof.12. An electrical switch as set forth in claim 11, wherein at least some ofthe actuating means include means respectively engaged with the switchingmeans for distributing at least a portion of the applied force on theactuating means to each of the switching means for effecting thesequential actuation thereof.13. An electrical switch as set forth in claim 11, wherein the actuatingmeans includes means for respectively interconnecting the actuating meansin their cascaded articulated relation so that at least some of theactuating means are conjointly movable relative to at least some of theothers thereof during the sequential operation of the switching means.14. An electrical switch as set forth in claim 11, wherein at least one ofthe actuating means is generally resilient so as to yield upon theapplication of the applied force to the actuating means.15. An electrical switch as set forth in claim 11, wherein the actuatingmeans includes a first lever drivingly engaged between a pair of theswitching means, and a second lever drivingly engaged with the first leverto transmit thereto at least a portion of the applied force for effectingthe sequential operation of the pair of the switching means.16. An electrical switch as set forth in claim 15, wherein the second leverincludes a portion drivingly engaged with the first lever at a preselecteddistance generally along the length thereof.17. An electrical switch as set forth in claim 15, wherein the second leverincludes a pair of opposite end portions disposed in operating engagementwith the first lever and a third one of the switching means to transmitthereto at least another portion of the applied force for effecting thesequential operation thereof with the pair of the switching means.18. An electrical switch as set forth in claim 17, wherein the actuatingmeans further includes a third lever drivingly engaged with the secondlever generally along the length thereof between the end portions thereof.19. An electrical switch as set forth in claim 11, further comprising meansfor preselecting the sequence of the sequential operation of the switchingmeans.20. An electrical switch as set forth in claim 11, wherein the plurality ofswitching means constitutes at least a pair of sets of the switchingmeans, and the actuating means being responsive to the applied forcethereon for sequentially actuating the switching means of one of the pairsof sets thereof generally prior to actuating the switching means of theother of the pair of sets thereof.21. A method of generally sequentially actuating a plurality of means forswitching power in an electrical switch comprising the steps of:a. disposing a plurality of means generally in cascading articulatedrelation between the switching means for actuating them; andb. applying a force established in response to a preselected condition tothe actuating means for articulating them in a manner to distribute atleast a portion of the force to each of the switching means for effectingthe generally sequential actuation thereof.22. The method as set forth in claim 21, wherein the disposing stepcomprises spanning at least one of the actuating means between a pair ofthe switching means with opposite end portions of the one actuating meansrespectively in pivoting engagement with the pair of switching means andpositioning an end portion of another of the actuating means in pivotingengagement with the one actuating means generally along the lengththereof.23. The method as set forth in claim 22, wherein the spanning and disposingstep comprises preselecting a distance generally along the length of theone actuating means for the pivoting engagement therewith of the endportion of the other actuating means.24. The method as set forth in claim 21, wherein the disposing stepcomprises spanning a pair of the actuating means in pivoting engagementbetween first and second pairs of the switching means with an end portionof at least another one of the actuating means positioned in pivotingengagement with the pair of actuating means at a preselected distancegenerally along the lengths thereof.25. The method as set forth in claim 21, comprising the additional step ofreleasing the force on the actuating means upon the occurrence of at leastanother one of the preselected conditions.26. The method as set forth in claim 21, comprising the additional step ofreleasing the force on the actuating means under another preselectedcondition and de-actuating the switching means in a sequence generallyreverse to the actuating sequence thereof.27. The method as set forth in claim 21, wherein the applying stepcomprises increasing pressure within an expansible container fordelivering the force to the actuating means by vaporizing a vaporizableliquid in the container.28. The method as set forth in claim 27, wherein the increasing stepcomprises heating the container to effect the vaporizing of the liquidtherein.29. The method as set forth in claim 21, comprising the preliminary step ofadjusting a plurality of means respectively associated with the switchingmeans for predetermining the sequence of actuation of the switching means.30. The method as set forth in claim 21, comprising the intermediate stepof adjusting a plurality of means respectively associated with theswitching means for predetermining the sequence of actuation of theswitching means.31. A method of actuating a pair of sets of a plurality of means underpreselected conditions for respectively switching power generally insequence in an electrical switch comprising the steps of:a. establishing a variable force in response to the occurrence of at leastone of the preselected conditions; andb. distributing the variable force for sequentially actuating the pluralityof switching means in one set thereof prior to sequentially actuating theplurality of switching means in the other set thereof.32. The method as set forth in claim 31, wherein the distributing stepfurther comprises applying the variable force to a plurality of means foractuating the switching means of the sets thereof, the actuating meansbeing disposed generally in cascaded articulated relation between theswitching means of the sets thereof.33. The method as set forth in claim 32, wherein the applying stepcomprises moving the actuating means in response to the variable force forsequentially actuating the switch means of one of the one and other setsthereof generally prior to the sequential actuating of the switching meansof the other of the one and other sets thereof.34. The method as set forth in claim 31, comprising the additional step ofreleasing the variable force upon the occurrence of at least another oneof the preselected conditions.35. The method as set forth in claim 31, comprising the additional step ofreleasing the variable force upon the occurrence of at least another oneof the preselected conditions and de-actuating the switching means of thesets thereof in a sequence reverse to the actuation sequence thereof.36. The method as set forth in claim 31, wherein the establishing stepcomprises vaporizing a vaporizable liquid and increasing the pressurewithin an expansible container therefor for delivering the variable force.37. The method as set forth in claim 36, wherein the vaporizing stepcomprises heating the container for effecting the vaporizing of the liquidtherein.38. In a system having a plurality of separate circuits, and a plurality ofmeans for respectively making the separate circuits to energize themgenerally sequentially; the combination therewith comprising means forestablishing a generally increasing force under preselected conditions,and a plurality of means disposed in cascaded articulated relation witheach other and driven in response to the increasing force forpredeterminately distributing at least portions thereof to preselectedones of the circuit making means thereby to effect the generallysequential energization of the circuits.39. A system as set forth in claim 38, wherein at least some of the circuitmaking means include means for imparting snap-action thereto upon themovement thereof to the power switching positions.40. A system as set forth in claim 39, wherein at least some of thedistributing means are resilient to accommodate the snap-action movementof the circuit making means.41. A system as set forth in claim 38, further comprising means adjustablyengaged with associated ones of the circuit making means for preselectingthe sequence of actuation thereof.42. A system as set forth in claim 38, wherein the distributing meanscomprises a first lever pivotally engaged between a pair of the circuitmaking means, and a second lever pivotally engaged with the first levergenerally along the length thereof for imparting thereto at least aportion of the force to effect the sequential actuation of the pair of thecircuit making means.43. A system as set forth in claim 42, wherein the second lever is alsopivotally engaged with a third one of the circuit making means for alsoimparting thereto at least a portion of the force to effect the actuationthereof in sequence with the pair of the circuit making means.44. A system as set forth in claim 43, wherein the distributing meansfurther comprises a third lever pivotally engaged with the second levergenerally along the length thereof and engaged with the force establishingmeans.45. A system as set forth in claim 38, wherein the circuit making meansinclude first and second sets thereof, and at least some of thedistributing means being driven relative to other thereof for effectingthe sequential actuation of the circuit making means in one of the firstand second sets thereof prior to the sequential actuation of the circuitmaking means in the other of the first and second sets thereof."}
{"WKU":"039314847","Title":"Lever operated limit switch having a mechanism to increase overtravel","App_Date":"1974-12-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard Lincoln Chace;John Augustine Kilcoin;William Semonchik","Assignee":"General Electric Company","ICL_Class":"H01H  316","References":"3512422;3829637","Claims":"What we claim as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the UnitedStates is:1. A rotary limit switch for indicating when a device reaches a limitingposition, comprising:a. a housing having first and second portions;b. a motion converter at least partially disposed within said first portionof said housing, said motion converter including a lever having one endadapted to engage the device, and a shaft assembly having one portionthereof attached to another end of said lever and another portion thereofproviding a switch motion upon movement of said shaft assembly and saidlever by the device, in at least a first direction from an initialposition;c. a switch assembly disposed within the interior of said second portion ofsaid housing, said switch assembly having at least a first and a secondcontact and operating means for moving said first and second contacts intoand out of engagement with one another;d. actuating means mechanically coupling the switch motion of said motionconverter to said operating means of said switch assembly;e. a first means for restoring said shaft assembly in a second directionopposite the first direction towards the initial position from a positionwithin a range defined by a first predetermined position and the initialposition of said shaft; andf. a second means for restoring said shaft assembly in the second directiontowards the initial position from a position within a range at leastdefined by a second predetermined position and the first predeterminedposition of said shaft, the first predetermined position being closer tothe initial position than is the second predetermined position as saidshaft is returning to the initial position, whereby when said shaft isreturning to the initial position from a position within the range definedby the first and second predetermined positions, said second restoringmeans moves said shaft assembly toward the initial position until saidshaft is positioned within the range defined by the first predeterminedposition and the initial position, and then said first restoring meanscontinues to move said shaft assembly toward the initial position.2. A limit switch according to claim 1, wherein said shaft assemblyincludes a cylindrical position having a flat surface within saidcylindrical portion.3. A limit switch according to claim 2, wherein said first portion of saidhousing has a recess therein extending upward from an interior wallthereof, said recess being aligned with said flat surface of said shaftassembly.4. A limit switch according to claim 3, wherein said first restoring meansis comprised of a spring loaded plunger having a surface portion pressingagainst said flat surface of said shaft assembly when shaft assembly is inthe initial position, whereby when said shaft assembly is positionedwithin the range defined by the first and second predetermined positions,said plunger is forced upward into said recess within said first portionof said housing to await movement of said shaft assembly toward theinitial position by said second restoring means, and when said shaftassembly is positioned within the range defined by the first predeterminedposition and the initial position, said spring loaded plunger imparts atorque to said flat surface of said shaft assembly to return said shaftassembly to the initial position.5. A limit switch according to claim 1, wherein said first portion of saidhousing has an alcove therein extending into an interior wall thereof, andsaid second restoring means is comprised of:a. biasing means;b. means for maintaining said biasing means within said alcove; andc. a member fixed to said shaft assembly, said member having at least onecamming section predeterminedly positioned to engage said biasing meanswhen said shaft assembly is positioned within the range defined by thefirst and second predetermined positions.6. A limit switch according to claim 5, wherein said biasing means iscomprised of at least a first spring loaded plug, and means for limitingthe movement of said first plug to prevent said shaft assembly from movingbeyond the second predetermined position.7. A limit switch according to claim 5, wherein said means for maintainingsaid biasing means within said alcove is comprised of a plate having afirst and a second portion, said first portion of said plate being fixedto an interior part of said first portion of said housing adjacent saidalcove, and said second portion of said plate extends below said alcove toblock removal of said biasing means from said alcove.8. A limit switch according to claim 6, wherein said first spring loadedplug biases said shaft assembly toward the initial position in theclockwise direction, and said means for limiting movement of said firstplug is comprised of a second spring loaded plug maintained within saidalcove.9. A limit switch according to claim 8, wherein said member is comprised ofanother camming section predeterminedly positioned to move said secondplug toward said first plug, whereby said second plug biases said shaftfor movement in the counterclockwise direction toward the initialposition, and said first plug limits the movement of said shaft assemblyand said second plug in the clockwise direction."}
{"WKU":"039314855","Title":"Fluid level float switch with sealing diaphragm","App_Date":"1975-01-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Anatole Spielfiedel;Jean Orven","Assignee":"General Motors Corporation","ICL_Class":"H01H 3518","References":"2825895;2941712;3671695;3673587","Claims":"We claim:1. A brake fluid reservoir assembly comprising:a reservoir chamber having a base and a side wall upstanding from the baseand terminating in a peripheral rim bounding an open end of said chamber;a flexible sealing diaphragm fitted over said peripheral rim and closingsaid open end;a reservoir cover fitted over said diaphragm and retaining said diaphragmon said peripheral rim;a casing depending from the underside of said reservoir cover towards saiddiaphragm;a pair of stationary electric contacts located in said casing;electric leads of a low-fluid-level warning circuit connected to saidcontacts;a guide sleeve projecting from said casing and passing sealingly throughsaid diaphragm into said chamber;a rod slidably mounted in said guide sleeve, and having a lower end with afluid float secured thereto, the rod having an upper end upon which ismounted a movable contact, the rod having a length such that at one levelof fluid in said chamber said float supports said rod with said movablecontact above and out of engagement with said stationary contacts, and ata predetermined lower level of fluid in said chamber said movable contactcomes into engagement with said stationary contacts to complete saidlow-fluid-level circuit.2. A brake fluid reservoir assembly as defined in claim 1, wherein saidelectric leads connected to said stationary contacts are led out throughsaid reservoir cover.3. A brake fluid reservoir assembly comprising:two reservoir chambers, each having a base and a side wall upstanding fromsaid base and terminating in a peripheral rim bounding an open end of arespective one of said chambers;a flexible sealing diaphragm fitted over said peripheral rims and closingsaid open ends;a reservoir cover fitted over said diaphragm and clampingly retaining saiddiaphragm on said peripheral rims;two casings depending from the underside of said reservoir cover towardssaid diaphragm,two pairs of stationary electric contacts, located one pair in each casing;electric leads of a low-fluid-level warning circuit connected to saidstationary electric contacts;a pair of guide sleeves, one of the pair projecting from one of saidcasings and passing sealingly through said diaphragm into one of saidreservoir chambers, the other of said pair projecting from the other ofsaid casings and passing sealingly through said diaphragm into the otherof said reservoir chambers;two rods, each slidably mounted in a respective one of the pair of guidesleeves, each rod having a lower end and an upper end;two floats, one in each reservoir chamber and secured respectively to saidlower ends of said rods in said chambers;two movable electric contacts each mounted on a respective one of saidupper ends of said rods;each rod having a length such that at one level of fluid in said respectivereservoir chamber said float supports said rod with said movable electriccontact above and out of engagement with said stationary electriccontacts, and at a predetermined lower level of fluid in said reservoirchamber said movable electric contact comes into engagement with saidstationary electric contacts to complete said low-fluid-level circuit.4. A brake fluid reservoir assembly as defined in claim 3, wherein saidelectric leads connected to said stationary electric contacts are led outthrough said cover."}
{"WKU":"039314863","Title":"Pendant switch assembly for hoists","App_Date":"1974-07-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Rolf Lutz Manfred Raetz","Assignee":"Eaton Corporation","ICL_Class":"H01H 2110","References":"3511951;3704355;3725624;3769480","Claims":"I now claim:1. A hoist pendant control assembly comprising:a housing having a handle portion for grasping said housing and a main bodyfor enclosing control elements therein;a rocker actuator mounted within a recess formed in the handle portion ofsaid housing to allow angular movement of the rocker by the hand of anoperator grasping the handle, said actuator having a plurality of controlpositions;a series of adjoining micro-switches mounted to a common base plate withinthe main body of said housing; anda multi-stepped shaft rotatable by rotation of said rocker actuator, thesteps of said shaft being located proximate to said micro-switches toallow different degrees of shaft rotation to actuate differentmicro-switches.2. A hoist pendant control assembly as set forth in claim 1 wherein themain body of said housing forms a pair of end located grooves forretaining said base plate.3. A hoist pendant control assembly as set forth in claim 1 including aspring assembly connected to said shaft to bias said rocker switch towarda neutral position.4. A hoist pendant control assembly as set forth in claim 3 including apressure catch assembly connected to said shaft to retain said shaft indifferent micro-switch actuating positions.5. A hand-held pendant for operator controlling a remotely located hoist bymovement of a single actuator to different positions comprising:a center divided housing forming a handle portion conforming to the hand ofthe hoist operator and also forming a body portion for enclosing controlswitches;a main actuator mounted to the handle portion of said center dividedhousing to be movable by the thumb of the operator s hand holding thehandle;a series of hoist control switches mounted within the body portion of saidcenter divided housing for controlling various hoist operations;coupling means for actuating various ones of said series of hoist controlswitches in response to different positions of said main actuator;a mounting plate having said series of hoist control switches mountedthereto and wherein said body portion of said center divided housing hasformed therein a pair of end located grooves for retaining said mountingplate therebetween; andsupport means mounted to said mounting plate to retain said main actuatorand said shaft in a proximate location to said series of control switchesto allow said support means and said mounting plate to be retained betweenthe end located grooves of said housing as a single unit.6. A hand-held pendant as set forth in claim 5 wherein said main actuatoris a rocker member having a neutral position and two other positions onone side of the neutral position and wherein said series of hoist controlswitches includes a hoist brake switch, a first hoist speed switch and asecond hoist speed switch.7. A hand-held pendant as set forth in claim 6 wherein said coupling meansincludes a shaft having three spaced step portions and being connected tosaid rocker member to rotate therewith, the step portions of said shaftbeing located proximate to said brake switch, said first switch, and saidsecond switch to actuate said brake switch in the neutral position of saidrocker member and to actuate said first switch and said second switch inthe other two positions of said rocker member.8. A hand-held pendant as set forth in claim 7 including a return springconnected to said shaft to bias said shaft toward the position actuatingsaid brake switch.9. A hand-held pendant as set forth in claim 8 including a pressure catchassembly for retaining said shaft in said first and second switchactuating positions to prevent the return of said shaft to said brakeswitch actuating position by said return spring."}
{"WKU":"039314871","Title":"Electric momentary action push-button switch","App_Date":"1974-06-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Victor Russenberger","Assignee":"Etablissements Russenberger","ICL_Class":"H01H 1352","References":"2599437;3016439;3165611;3331933;3378664;3619528;3731030","Claims":"I claim:1. Electric switch comprising a casing provided with a base through whichpass a first terminal belonging to two electric circuits outside thecasing, a second and third terminal belonging respectively to said twocircuits; said first, second and third terminals being integral with thebase of the casing and arranged such that the first terminal is locatedbetween the second and third terminals, the switch also comprising apush-button slidably mounted in an opening of the casing opposite saidbase, and a metal switching member in sliding contact with the firstterminal and able to be brought into contact either with the secondterminal or with the third terminal, prestressed resilient connectingmeans mounted between the switching member and the push-button and which,on the one hand, urges the push-button into a normally released positionand, on the other hand, pushes the switching member into contact with thefirst terminal and with the second terminal, thus normally closing thefirst electric circuit and means for rotating the switching member,integral with the push-button and able, when the latter is depressed, totilt the switching member around the first terminal such that said memberseparates from the second terminal and comes into contact with the thirdterminal, thus closing the second electric circuit, said resilientconnecting means being constituted by a rod projecting under thepush-button and passing with clearance through the first terminal and theswitching member in its region of contact with the first terminal andterminating in a flared end which prevents the separation of the rod andthe first terminal and thus the withdrawal of the push-button from thecasing, and a prestressed helical spring wound around said rod in order tokeep the switching member pressed against the first terminal and to urgethe push-button into the released position.2. Electric switch according to claim 1, in which said switching member isconstituted by an elongated metal strip having ends located opposite thesecond and third terminals and its a central portion against the firstterminal.3. Electric switch according to claim 2, in which said strip comprises, inthe vicinity of its central region, an angular portion sucn that one ofthe ends of the strip is located at a level higher than that of the otherend, the three terminals being substantially at the same level.4. Electric switch according to claim 1 in which said drive means isconstituted by a small column projecting under the push-button, above theend of the strip which is opposite the third terminal."}
{"WKU":"039314880","Title":"Multiple switch actuator","App_Date":"1950-06-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Edward T. Beyer","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the United States Energy","ICL_Class":"H01H  320;H01H 1700;F42C 1512","References":"2255927;2516163;2646487","Claims":"I claim:1. The combination of a plurality of push-button switches and a lock-outdevice comprising an elongated support, means affixing the switches to thesupport in adjacent relation, said switches each being in an on conditionwhen the push-button is in the out position, spring means urging each ofthe push-buttons in an out position, a plurality of parallel levers, oneeach for each of said switches, each lever being supported at one end onsaid elongated support and extending transversely over and beyond therespective switch push-button, an elongated groove adjacent the tops ofthe switches in said elongated support, a transverse groove in saidelongated support for each of said levers and intersecting the elongatedgroove, a lockout wire extending through said elongated groove above thelevers in their depressed position, whereby the push-buttons are likewisein depressed position, said lock-out wire adapted to be withdrawn torelease the levers and permit each push-button spring means to actuate itscorresponding switch."}
{"WKU":"039314898","Title":"Multiarc seam welding apparatus for thin metal sheet","App_Date":"1975-05-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Harold Roderburg;Gert Nordmann","Assignee":"Kabel-und Metallwerke Gutehoffnungshuette Aktiengesellschaft","ICL_Class":"B23K  902","References":"2436387;2518289;3253117;3278720;3280609;3349213;3462579;3544752;3748426","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Apparatus for welding a thin strip workpiece in motion and particularlyfor welding adjacent longitudinal edges of a moving metal strip workpiecebeing formed at a forming station into a tubular configuration, saidapparatus including a welding head and welding head bracket means, saidwelding head bracket means including pivot means for rotating said weldinghead and vertical adjustment means for selectively positioning saidwelding head with respect to said workpiece; the improvement comprising:first, second and third welding electrodes being similarly configurated andhaving their welding tips in a spaced linear arrangement along a commonaxis, said second electrode being disposed intermediate said first andthird electrodes and positioned normal to said workpiece, said first andthird electrodes being aslantly positioned with respect to said secondelectrode and inclined toward said second electrode in the direction ofsaid workpiece;first, second and third electrode holder means engaging said first, secondand third electrodes, respectively for individually displacing each ofsaid electrodes vertically toward and away from said workpiece; andfirst and second tilt adjustment means coupled to said first and thirdelectrode holder means, respectively, for individually adjusting theinclination of said first and third electrodes to permit the welding tipsof each electrode to be closely disposed to an adjacent welding tip alongsaid common axis and cause the welding baths created by said first andthird electrodes during a welding operation to overlap the welding bathcreated by said second electrode;said welding head having an exterior portion thereof proximate said firstelectrode configured to closely follow the inclination of said firstelectrode to enable said welding head to be closely positioned to saidforming station and thereby place the welding bath generated by said thirdelectrode at a position wherein said longitudinal edges of the workpieceare sufficiently constrained by said forming station.2. Apparatus in accordance with claim 1, wherein said first tilt adjustmentmeans comprises a deformable bearing means coupled to a central portion ofsaid first holder means for rotational movement of the latter.3. Apparatus in accordance with claim 2, wherein said deformable bearingmeans is comprised of polytetrafluoroethylene."}
{"WKU":"039314901","Title":"Electron beam vaporization apparatus","App_Date":"1974-08-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Wolfgang Grothe;Klaus Brill","Assignee":"Robert Bosch G.m.b.H.","ICL_Class":"B23K 1500","References":"3244855;3364296;3389210;3394217;3394678;3432335;3612859;3655902;3714416","Claims":"We claim:1. Electron beam vaporization apparatus to vaporize the vaporizationsubstance (16) and apply such substance, in a vacuum, on a work surface(21) particularly wide tapes, webs, or the like, said apparatus havingan elongated evaporation substance holding vessel, or trough or crucible(17);a magnet system (18, 19, 19a, 19b; 29) located alongside both sides of theelongated vessel (17) and generating a magnetic field (23) transverse tothe major dimension of the vessel, andthe improvement whereinat least one electron beam (12, 13, 40, 41) is provided, directed towardsthe substance (16) in the vessel (17) said beam being directed throughsaid field to interact therewith, the direction of the beam uponinteraction with the field being at an angle (.alpha.) greater than zeroand less than 90.degree. with respect to the direction of the magneticfield (23), the strength of the magnetic field and the charge of theelectron beem with respect to said angle having such relative values thatthe electron beam is deflected by interaction with the magnetic field toassume a spiral path which penetrates the surface (25) of the evaporationsubstance (16).2. Apparatus according to claim 1 wherein the angle (.alpha.) is between30.degree. and 60.degree..3. Apparatus according to claim 2 wherein the angle (.alpha.) is in theorder of about 45.degree..4. Apparatus according to claim 1 wherein at least one of the pole shoes(18, 19) is formed with an opening (26) and the electron beam (13, 40, 41)enters the magnetic field (23) through said opening.5. Apparatus according to claim 4 wherein the opening, or at least one ofthe openings, is formed as a cylindrical bore (26).6. Apparatus according to claim 4 wherein the opening, or at least one ofthe openings is formed as a slot (26a).7. Apparatus according to claim 1 wherein the pole shoes are formed in aplurality of elements (19a, 19b) spaced from each other by a gap (26a) andthe electron beam (13) enters the magnetic field through said gap.8. Apparatus according to claim 1 wherein the electron beam (12) enters themagnetic field laterally adjacent the end of the pole shoe (18).9. Apparatus according to claim 1 wherein the magnetic field strength andthe spatial distribution of the magnetic field are so dimensioned andarranged that primary electrons (32) first scattered from the vapor of thevaporizable substance, or from remaining gas traces in the vacuum arecaptured in the magnetic field and do not leave said magnetic field.10. Apparatus according to claim 1 wherein the path of the electron beam(12, 13, 40 41) and the spatial distribution of the magnetic field are sodimensioned and arranged that electrons (35) liberated at the impingementpoint of the electron beam on the surface (25) of the vaporizationsubstance (16) are deflected back to the vaporization substance (16).11. Apparatus according to claim 1 wherein the path of the electron beam(12, 13) up to the entry of the beam into the magnetic field (23) isapproximately straight.12. Apparatus according to claim 1 wherein the path of the electron beam(40, 41) up to entry of the beam into the magnetic field is curved.13. Apparatus according to claim 12 further comprising at least one beamdeflection field (M40, M41) interacting with the electron beam (40, 41)outside of said transverse magnetic field (23) to deflect the electronbeam from its source to have said direction at said angle (.alpha.) withrespect to the direction of the transverse magnetic field (23)."}
{"WKU":"039314910","Title":"Apparatus for cutting a stack of sheet material with a thermal cutting","App_Date":"1974-05-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Gunter Stumpf","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B23K 1500","References":"3629546;3649806;3735088","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A device for cutting a stack of layers of sheet material comprisingprojecting means for projecting a thermal cutting beam towards said layersof sheet material and movable relative to said layers of sheet materialthereby to cut said layers of sheet material along a line of cut, andspacing means for spacing said layers of sheet material apart in thevicinity of said thermal cutting beam so as substantially to preventfusing together of adjacent layers of sheet material, said spacing meanscomprising spaced members interspersable with said layers of sheetmaterial, said spaced members having respective pre-formed aperturesextending therethrough which are aligned with one another so as to permitpassage of said beam therethrough and supporting means securing saidspaced members relative to said projecting means at least in one directionof movement of said projecting means, said apertures being positionedrelative to said supporting means such that said beam is aligned with saidapertures.2. A device as claimed in claim 1, wherein said projecting means comprisesa beam focussing means, said spaced members being connected to said beamfocussing means.3. A device as claimed in claim 2, in which said apertures are holes, saidspaced members being pivotably supported about an axis passing throughsaid holes.4. A device as claimed in claim 3, comprising a roller bearing including afirst race secured to said projecting means and a second race to whichsaid spaced members are secured.5. A device as claimed in claim 3, in which said spaced members haveperipheral edges which are rounded-off in section planes containing saidaxis.6. A device as claimed in claim 1 comprising means supporting the beamprojecting means for movement in two coordinate directions, said spacedmembers comprising a plurality of pairs of elongate members spaced apartfor interspersion with said layers of sheet material, each pair ofelongate members bounding an elongate slit therebetween constituting onesaid aperture, the slits being in registry with one another to permitpassage of said beam through the slits, said pairs of elongate membersbeing fixed by said supporting means relative to said beam along one ofsaid two coordinates of movement of said beam, the slits extending in thedirection of the other of said two coordinates.7. A device as claimed in claim 6, further comprising support means forsupporting said layers of sheet material, first carriage means movablerelative to said support means in the direction of said one of theco-ordinates, second carriage means mounted on said first carriage meansand movable therealong in the direction of said other of the co-ordinates,said projecting means including beam focussing means mounted on saidsecond carriage means, said pairs of elongate members being secured bysaid supporting means to said first carriage means for movement therewith.8. A device as claimed in claim 6, in which said elongate members are inthe form of strips having leading and trailing edges which arerounded-off.9. A device as claimed in claim 8, in which said strips are of streamlinedsection."}
{"WKU":"039314928","Title":"Thermal print head","App_Date":"1973-06-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Rikuo Takano;Mitsushi Matsunaga;Akira Yoshida;Kiyoshi Nawata;Shigehisa Nakaya","Assignee":"Nippon Telegraph and Telephone Public Corporation","ICL_Class":"H05B  312","References":"3515850;3642528;3719797;3774170;3781825","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A thermal print head circuit provided with a plurality of heat sourcescapable of converting electrical energy into heat energy for printing on athermosensitive medium with the heat energy converted comprising:a multilayer device including a substrate member, a first member formedover said substrate member, and a plurality of second members arranged onsaid first member forming a potential barrier at the junctions betweensaid first member and said second members thereon; andpotential applying means for applying an inverse voltage across saidpotential barrier for generating heat at said junction as the sole sourceof said heat energy for printing.2. A thermal print head circuit as claimed in claim 1, in which saidjunctions are arranged in a matrix and including conductors forming therows and the columns of said matrix directly connected respectively toopposite sides of said junctions and operable to be energized to selectthe desired junction.3. A thermal print head provided with a plurality of heat sources capableof converting electrical energy into heat energy for printing on athermosensitive medium with the heat energy converted comprising:a substrate;a first member formed on said substrate;a plurality of second members formed on said first member with a potentialbarrier junction therebetween;a plurality of electrode means ohmically formed, one on each of said secondmembers;insulating means to protect and electrically insulate said first member andsaid electrode means;electrically conductive means connected to each of said electrode means toform a circuit for energizing said junction as the sole source of saidheat for printing;a short preventing member of insulating material to prevent shortcircuiting among said electrically conductive means;wherein said first member and said second members forming said potentialbarriers at the junctions therebetween have said second members arrangedcorresponding to individual dots for printing information.4. A thermal print head as claimed in claim 3, wherein said substrate iscomposed of material selected from the group of metal material of copperor aluminium, semiconductor material, insulating material of glass orceramic, the surface of which is coated with conductive layer, and thickcermet material.5. A thermal print head as claimed in claim 3, wherein said first memberand said second members are composed of semiconductor of P-N junction.6. A thermal print head as claimed in claim 3, wherein said first memberand said second members are composed of semiconductor of hetero junction.7. A thermal print head as claimed in claim 3, wherein said first memberand said second member are composed one of metal and the other ofsemiconductor.8. A thermal print head as claimed in claim 5, wherein said semiconductormaterial is selected from the group consisting of silicon (Si), galliumarsenide (GaAs), gallium phosphide (GaP), and mixture of gallium arsenideand gallium phosphide (GaAsP).9. A thermal print head as claimed in claim 7, wherein said semiconductormaterial is selected from the group consisting of silicon (Si), galliumarsenide (GaAs), gallium phosphide (GaP), and mixture of gallium arsenideand gallium phosphide (GaAsP), while said metal material is selected fromthe group consisting of platinum (Pt), tungsten (W), and titanium (Ti).10. A thermal print head provided with a plurality of heat sources capableof converting electrical energy into heat energy for printing on athermosensitive medium with the heat energy converted comprising:a conductive substrate;a wafer of gallium arsenide (GaAs) fabricated on said conductive substrate;a plurality of platinum areas fabricated over said wafer each forming ajunction, which are arranged corresponding to the arrangement of printingelements for printing information;gold electrodes formed on each said platinum layer;electric conductors connected to each of said electrodes to form a circuitfor energizing said junction as the sole source of said heat for saidprinting;an insulating layer of silicon dioxide (SiO.sub.2) located between saidelectrodes and said wafer;a short preventing layer over said electrodes to prevent short-circuitingof said electrodes;a wear protective layer of tantalum oxide (Ta.sub.2 O.sub.5) to preventabrasive wear covering said short preventing layer;wherein when an inverse current is made to flow through the junction formedbetween said platinum layers and said gallium arsenide wafer, saidjunctions function as heat elements.11. A thermal print head provided with a plurality of sources capable ofconverting electrical energy into heat energy for printing on athermosensitive medium with the heat energy converted comprising;a conductive substrate member;a first member formed over said substrate member;a plurality of second members each ohmically formed on said first members;a plurality of electrodes formed on each of said second members;an insulating member between said first member and said second members;an electrically conductive means connected to each said electrode;a short preventing member over said electrodes to prevent short-circuitingof said electrically conductive means;wherein said first member and said second members form potential barriersat the junction formed therebetween as the sole source of said heat forprinting, said second members are arranged on the said first membercorresponding to the arrangement of individual printing elements forprinting information, and further said first member is partitioned into aplurality of sections positioned corresponding to said second members andsaid electrodes members, and a thermally insulating material on said firstmember.12. A thermal print head as claimed in claim 11, wherein an electricallyconductive but thermally insulating layer and an electrode layer coatedover said layer are provided between said substrate member and said firstmember, said former layer being made to contact with said substratemember.13. A thermal print head provided with heat source capable of convertingelectrical energy into heat energy for printing on a thermosensitivemedium with the heat energy converted comprising;a conductive substrate member;a semiconductor layer fabricated over substrate member;a plurality of metal areas formed over said semiconductor layer;a thermally insulating layer arranged between adjoining metal areas;electrode layers formed over each of said metal areas;electrically conductive wires formed on said electrode layers connectedwith said electrode layers;an insulating layer positioned to protect and electrically isolate saidelectrode layers and said wires;a short preventing layer to prevent short-circuiting of said wires;wherein said semiconductor layer and said metal layer form potentialbarriers at the junctions formed therebetween as the sole source of saidheat for printing, said metal layers are arranged in accordance with thearrangement of individual printing elements, said metal layers are ofrelatively small area while said thermally insulating layers are ofrelatively large area.14. A thermal print head being provided with heat source capable ofconverting electrical energy into heat energy, which prints on thethermosensitive medium with the heat energy converted comprising of;a conductive substrate;a semiconductor layer;a plurality of metal layers formed on said semiconductor layer with such anarrangement as the individual printing elements;insulating layers coated over each of said metal layers;electrode layers formed on each of said metal layers thermally andelectrically insulating members bridging between adjoining electrodelayers;electrically conductive members which are disposed in the void spacesformed by said insulating layer and said thermally and electricallyinsulating layers;a member to enlarge a thermal conductive area, which is formed on the saidmetal layers.15. A thermal print head as claimed in claim 14, wherein an insulatingmaterial is filled in said void spaces.16. A thermal matrix print head comprising a row and column array ofconductors for energizing the selected points in said matrix and athreshold isolation junction connected between the row and columnconductors at each of said points, said threshold isolation junction beingthe sole source of heat for printing at said selected points whenenergized in the reverse direction beyond threshold."}
{"WKU":"039314936","Title":"Apparatus and method for the production of metal vapor","App_Date":"1974-10-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Carl M. Ferrar","Assignee":"United Technologies Corporation","ICL_Class":"F22B  302","References":"3506803;3607368;3654467;3723706","Claims":"Having thus described typical embodiments of my invention, that which Iclaim as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the United Statesis:1. Apparatus for continuously producing vapor from a liquid and cyclicallyalternating a metal working medium between its vapor and liquid phasescomprising:a closed vessel for the containment of the working medium in either thevapor or liquid phase wherein the vessel includes an outer wall whichdefines a vapor region in the vessel and provides a surface upon which thevapor condenses into liquid, and a reservoir which defines a liquid regionin the vessel and provides a sump into which flows the working mediumcondensed on the outer wall;a heater element internal of the vessel to provide a hot surface at atemperature sufficient to boil liquid phase working medium which isbrought into contact with the surface;a power source for supplying energy to the heater element; andliquid metal transfer means for moving the working medium in the liquidphase from the reservoir region to the surface of the heater element.2. Apparatus according to claim 1 wherein the transfer means comprisesmetal wicks.3. Apparatus according to claim 2 wherein the closed vessel issubstantially a horizontal right cylinder.4. Apparatus according to claim 3 wherein the right cylinder contains atleast one separator which extends radially from the lower horizontalsurface toward the centerline of the cylinder to form liquid retainablepockets along the lower surface of the cylinder.5. Apparatus according to claim 2 wherein the heater element is asemiconductor material."}
{"WKU":"039314944","Title":"Rechargeable battery heating unit","App_Date":"1975-04-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Barbara Fisher;George Spector","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"F27D 1102","References":"2277605;2516637;2915614;3226528;3247360;3277271;3290484;3432641;3482078;3549861","Claims":"What iss claimed is:1. In a vessel incorporating a rechargeable battery heating unit; thecombination of a vessel formed of dielectric material and an electricheating system integral therewith and comprising an electric circuitconsisting of a heating coil, thermostat, on-off switch and rechargeablebattery, said heating coil being molded in a bottom wall and in a sidewall of said vessel, said thermostat, on-off switch and battery beingcontained within a compartment formed below said bottom wall by aremovable bottom cap screwed thereon and sealed water tight by a rubbergasket, said battery being integral with plug means consisting of a pairof plug prongs, said prongs being pivotable about transverse pins, therebyallowing said prongs to be connected to a female receptacle of anextension electric cord for recharging said battery, said cap being madeof semi-flexible plastic and includes a resilient, accordian bootintegrally formed therethrough, an inner side of an end wall of said bootbearing against a push button of said on-off switch, and an outside ofsaid boot end wall having an external button bearing thereagainst.2. The combination as set forth in claim 1 wherein a lower end of saidvessel is additionally enclosed within a flexible rubber boot thatincludes a bottom wall enjoined to a relatively low side wall, said sidewall enclosing said button, and an upper edge of said boot side wallhaving a radially inwardly extending bead that snap fits in an annulargroove formed around said vessel."}
{"WKU":"039314952","Title":"Electric heating units","App_Date":"1974-12-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Walter J. Dzaack;Donald M. Cunningham;Frank T. Walton","Assignee":"Emerson Electric Co.","ICL_Class":"H05B  368","References":"2835780;3118124;3172995;3213266;3482079;3525849","Claims":"We claim:1. An electric heating unit for a stove panel and the like, comprising:a pan adapted to be supported on the stove panel, said pan having anopening in its side wall,a sheathed electric heating element having a flat active heating portionsupported crosswise of the top of said pan, said element having at leasttwo terminal portions extending downwardly from said active heatingportion and laterally thereof and extending through said pan opening forconnection to a source of electrical energy,and an elastomeric closure connected to said pan around said pan openingand around the sheath of each terminal portion, said closure closing andsealing said pan opening, said terminal portions extending through saidclosure in sealed relation and the latter cooperating with said terminalportions to provide the sole hinge about which said heating element may bepivoted to swing said active heating portion upwardly from its supportedposition on the top of said pan, said closure providing the sole supportfor the heating element in its upward position.2. The construction according to claim 1, wherein said closure is distortedduring hinging action of said active heating portion, without affectingits connections with said pan and said terminal portions.3. The construction according to claim 1, wherein said closure is apreformed molded product.4. The construction according to claim 3 wherein said closure comprises ahollow body having openings therein through which respective terminalportions closely extend, and a wall skirting said hollow body and of aperipheral size to close said pan opening.5. The construction according to claim 4 wherein said skirt wall has aperipherally extending marginal recess for closely receiving the wall ofsaid pan margining its opening.6. The construction according to claim 2 wherein said pan and said terminalportions have interengaging means to relieve said hinge of stresses whichmay be applied to tend to disconnect said closure from said pan.7. The construction according to claim 5 wherein said hollow portion has anintegral collar surrounding each opening therein to closely fit aroundrespective terminal portions.8. An electric heating unit for a stove panel and the like, comprising:a pan adapted to be supported on the stove panel, said pan having anopening in its side wall,a sheathed electric heating element having a flat active heating portionsupported crosswise of the top of said pan, said element having at leasttwo terminal portions extending downwardly from said active heatingportion and laterally thereof and extending through said pan opening forconnection to a source of electrical energy,and a closure formed of an elastomeric material, comprising a normallyrectangular hollow box-like body having opposite side and end walls and awall spanning such walls, and a skirt wall at the opening into said bodyextending laterally outwardly of said side and end walls and of aperipheral size larger than the size of said pan opening, said skirt wallbeing secured to said pan side wall to close said opening,said spanning wall having openings therein to tightly pass respectiveterminal portions, said box-like body and said terminal portionscooperating to provide a hinge about which said heating element may bepivoted to swing said active portion upwardly from its supported positionon the top of said pan, said box-like body distorting from its normalrectangular box-like formation to effect hinging action and resilientlyreturning to its normal formation when said heating element is returned tosupported position on the top of said pan.9. The construction according to claim 8 wherein said skirt wall has aperipheral recess for closely receiving the wall of said pan margining itsopening."}
{"WKU":"039314960","Title":"Electrical heating plate with terminal means for high temperature film","App_Date":"1974-11-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Bohdan Hurko","Assignee":"General Electric Company","ICL_Class":"H05B  316","References":"2628299;2748234;2882377;3067310;3067315;3266661;3296574;3336465;3757087;3811934;3813520","Claims":"I claim:1. An electrical heating plate comprising a high temperature electricalresistance heating film bonded to a dielectric substrate, said filmcomprising a narrow continuous strip of metallic film of noble metals, thefilm having terminal means in the form of a widened end portion and awidened film electrode of dissimilar noble metal that is adapted to bebonded to the dielectric substrate, the heating film end portion beingwidely separated from said electrode, and a thin metal oxide filmdiffusion barrier overlapping both the heating film end portion and thefilm electrode and bonded to the dielectric substrate so as to bridge thegap between the heating film and the electrode and retard the migrationand mass flow between the electrode and the heating film during hightemperature operations, said widened film end portion and said widenedfilm electrode reducing the electrical resistance per unit area of theterminal means and thereby reducing its heating action and operatingtemperature.2. An electrical heating plate comprising a high temperature electricalresistance heating film bonded to a dielectric substrate as recited inclaim 1 wherein the said film terminal means comprising the film endportion and the electrode has about twice the width as the width of themain heated portion of the film.3. An electrical heating plate comprising a high temperature electricalresistance heating film bonded to a dielectric substrate as recited inclaim 2, wherein the said metallic film of noble metals comprisesmulti-layers with at least one layer of platinum and one layer of gold,and the said film electrode comprises a silver layer.4. An electrical heating plate comprising a high temperature electricalresistance heating film bonded to a dielectric substrate as recited inclaim 3 wherein the said silver film electrode has a width about twice theaverage width of the multi-layer electrical film, the end of the mainheated portion of the heating film also being enlarged to about the widthof the electrode, the said diffusion barrier of metal oxide also having awidth substantially equal to the width of the electrode so as to reducethe electrical resistance per unit area and hence, the heating action ofthe electrodes.5. An electrical heating plate comprising a high temperature electricalheating film bonded to a dielectric substrate as recited in claim 4wherein the said metal oxide film diffusion barrier is a tin oxide film.6. An electrical heating plate comprising a high temperature electricalheating film bonded to a dielectric substrate as recited in claim 5 hereinand said film diffusion barrier overlies both the film heater and theelectrode.7. An electrical heating plate comprising a high temperature electricalheating film as recited in claim 5 wherein the said film diffusion barrierunderlies the electrode and overlies the edge of the film heater.8. An electrical heating plate comprising a high temperature electricalheating film bonded to a dielectric substrate as recited in claim 5wherein the said film diffusion barrier underlies the said electrode, andthe edge of the film heater overlies the adjacent edge of the filmdiffusion barrier."}
{"WKU":"039314979","Title":"Automated fuel dispenser","App_Date":"1973-10-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Fred J. Gentile;Martin D. Cothran","Assignee":"Docutel Corporation","ICL_Class":"G06K  500;G06K 1500;H04Q  500","References":"3632988;3657702;3665397;3705384;3778595;3786421","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An automatic document controlled dispensing system with remote stationsand a communication connection with a regional computer, comprising incombination:reading means at a remote station for reading verification data from acredit document inserted into a terminal console,verification means at the remote station coupled to said reading means andreceiving therefrom the verification data from the terminal console andverifying the authenticity of an inserted credit document,means responsive to the verification of a document for setting up anauthorization request message for an authenticated document,means for transmitting the authorization request message to the regionalcomputer and for transmitting a credit authorization message or a refusecredit authorization message from the regional computer to a selectedremote station, andmeans for dispensing an article selected in response to the creditauthorization message.2. An automatic document controlled dispensing system as set forth in claim1 wherein said verification means includes:first means for storing a verification code inserted into the machine, andsecond means interconnected through said first means for comparingverification data read from the presented document with the storedverification code for verification of the validity of the presenteddocument.3. An automatic document controlled dispensing system as set forth in claim1 including means for polling each of the remote stations in sequence toascertain the condition thereof to transmit an authorization requestmessage to the regional computer.4. An automatic document controlled dispensing system with remote stationsand a communication connection with a regional computer, comprising incombination:reading means at a remote station for reading verification data from acredit document inserted into a terminal console,verification means at the remote station coupled to said reading means andreceiving therefrom the verification data from the terminal console andverifying the authenticity of an inserted credit document,means responsive to the verification of a document for setting up anauthorization request message for an authenticated document,means for transmitting the authorization request message to the regionalcomputer and transmitting a credit authorization message or a refusecredit authorization message from the regional computer to a selectedremote station,means for dispensing an article selected in response to the creditauthorization message, andmeans for printing a receipt at the terminal console identifying the valueof a dispensed article.5. An automatic document controlled dispensing system as set forth in claim4 including means at a remote station for transmitting a dispensed articlevalue message to the regional computer.6. An automatic document controlled dispensing system as set forth in claim4 wherein said verification means includes means for establishing amaximum time period for transmission of the authorization request messageto the regional computer.7. An automatic document controlled dispensing system as set forth in claim6 wherein said verification means includes means actuated at the end ofthe time period when the request message has not been transmitted togenerate a credit authorization message at the remote station.8. An automatic document controlled dispensing system as set forth in claim4 including means for selecting an article to be dispensed in response tothe credit authorization message.9. An automatic document controlled dispensing system with remote stationsand a communication connection with a regional computer, comprising incombination:reading means at a remote station for reading verification data from acredit document inserted into a terminal console,verification means at the remote station coupled to said reading means andreceiving therefrom the verification data from the terminal console andverifying the authenticity of an inserted credit document,means responsive to the verification of a document for setting up anauthorization request message for an authenticated document,means for transmitting the authorization request message to the regionalcomputer and transmitting a credit authorization message from the regionalcomputer to a selected remote station,means for dispensing an article selected in response to the creditauthorization message,means at the terminal console for receiving currency and generating acurrency closure signal, andmeans responsive to the current closure signal to generate a currency totalsignal and actuate said means for dispensing.10. An automatic document controlled dispensing system as set forth inclaim 9 including means for generating a currency refund receipt when thecurrency total signal exceeds the value of the dispensed article.11. An automatic document controlled dispensing system with remote stationsand a communication connection with a regional computer, comprising incombination:reading means at a remote station for reading verification data from acredit document inserted into a terminal console,verification means at the remote station coupled to said reading means andreceiving therefrom the verification data from the terminal console andverifying the authenticity of an inserted credit document,means responsive to the verification of a document for setting up anauthorization request message for an authenticated document,means for transmitting the authorization request message to the regionalcomputer and transmitting a credit authorization message from the regionalcomputer to a selected remote station,means for dispensing an article selected in response to the creditauthorization message,means for receiving a fixed value credit document and generating a valuesignal therefor, andmeans responsive to the value signal to actuate said means for dispensing.12. An automatic document controlled dispensing system as set forth inclaim 11 including means for generating a value refund receipt when thevalue signal exceeds the value of the dispensed article.13. An automatic credit card controlled fuel dispensing system with remotestations and a communication connection with a regional computer,comprising in combination:a card reader at terminal console for a remote station, the card readerresponsive to verification data on a credit card and providing averification data signal,verification means at the remote station coupled to said card reader andreceiving therefrom the verification data signal from the terminal consoleand verifying the authenticity of an inserted credit card,means responsive to the verification of a credit card for setting up anauthorization request message for an authenticated credit card,means for transmitting the authorization message to the regional computerand transmitting a credit authorization message from the regional computerto a selected remote station,a plurality of fuel dispensing terminals connected in sets to one terminalconsole at a remote station and controlled therefrom, andmeans at said terminal console for selecting one of the fuel dispensingterminals for dispensing of a quantity of fuel in response to a creditauthorization message.14. An automatic credit card controlled fuel dispensing system as set forthin claim 13 including means at each terminal console for printing areceipt of a fuel dispensing transaction including the value thereof.15. An automatic credit card controlled fuel dispensing system as set forthin claim 13 including a currency reader at the terminal console forreceiving currency and generating a currency closure signal, and meansresponsive to the currency closure signal to generate a currency totalsignal and actuate a selected fuel dispensing terminal.16. An automatic credit card controlled fuel dispensing system as set forthin claim 15 including means for generating a currency refund receipt whenthe currency total signal exceeds the value of fuel dispensed from adispensing terminal.17. An automatic credit card controlled fuel dispensing system as set forthin claim 13 wherein said card reader includes means for receiving a fixedvalue credit card and for generating a value signal therefor, and meansresponsive to the value signal to actuate a selected fuel dispensingterminal.18. An automatic credit card controlled fuel dispensing system as set forthin claim 17 including means for generating a refund receipt when the valuesignal exceeds the value of fuel dispensed from a terminal in a dispensingtransaction.19. In an automatic document controlled dispensing system with remotestations and a communication connection with a regional computer, themethod comprising the steps of:verifying the authenticity of a credit document inserted into said systemat a terminal console,setting up an authorization request message for transmission to theregional computer in response to the verification of a credit document,transmitting the authorization request message to the regional computerupon a verification of the authenticity of the inserted credit document,transmitting a credit authorization message or a refuse credit message fromthe regional computer to a selected remote station in response to anauthorization request message,monitoring the value of a selected article dispensed from the system inresponse to a credit authorization message and generating a monitoredvalue message, andtransmitting the monitored value message to the regional computer forrecording therein.20. In an automatic document controlled dispensing system as set forth inclaim 19 including the step of generating a receipt at the terminalconsole identifying the value of an article selected and dispensed.21. In an automatic document controlled dispensing system as set forth inclaim 19 including the step of setting up a monitored value message fortransmission to the regional computer.22. In an automatic document controlled dispensing system as set forth inclaim 19 including the step of polling each of the remote stations insequence to transmit an authorization request message to the centralcomputer.23. In an automatic document controlled dispensing system as set forth inclaim 22 including the step of establishing a maximum time period forreceipt of a polling of a remote station and the transmission of theauthorization request message to the regional computer.24. In an automatic document controlled dispensing system as set forth inclaim 23 including the step of generating a credit authorization messageat the remote station at the expiration of the maximum time period andwhen the request message has not been transmitted to the regionalcomputer.25. In an automatic document controlled dispensing system as set forth inclaim 22 including the step of polling each remote station in sequence toascertain the condition thereof to accept a credit authorization messageor a refuse credit message from the regional computer.26. In an automatic document controlled dispensing system with remotestations and a communication connection with a regional computer, themethod comprising the steps of:reading coded data from the presented document,comparing the coded data with a verification code inserted and stored in aterminal console for verification of the authenticity of the presenteddocument,transmitting an authorization request message to the regional computer upona verification of the authenticity of the read presented document,transmitting a credit authorization message or a refuse credit message fromthe regional computer to a selected remote station in response to anauthorization request message,selecting an article to be dispensed from the system in response to acredit authorization message, andgenerating a dispensed article value message for transmission to theregional computer for recordal therein.27. In an automatic document controlled dispensing system as set forth inclaim 26 wherein the step of comparing the read code data with averification code includes the step of comparing read identification datawith a customer s identification code inserted into the terminal console.28. In an automatic document controlled dispensing system with remotestations and a communication connection with a regional computer, themethod comprising the steps of:verifying the authenticity of a credit document inserted into said systemat a terminal console,transmitting an authorization request message to the regional computer upona verification of the authenticity of the inserted credit document,transmitting a credit authorization message or a refuse credit message fromthe regional computer to a selected remote station in response to anauthorization request message,selecting an article to be dispensed from the system in response to acredit authorization message, andgenerating the receipt at the terminal console identifying the value of anarticle selected and dispensed.29. In an automatic document controlled dispensing system as set forth inclaim 28 including the step of releasing a credit document inserted intothe system upon receipt at a terminal console of a credit authorizationmessage.30. In an automatic credit card controlled fuel dispensing system withremote stations and a communication connection with a regional computer,the method comprising the steps of:reading coded data from a credit card presented to a terminal console at aremote station,verifying the authenticity of the credit card inserted into said system atthe terminal console from the read coded data,setting up an authorization request message for transmission to theregional computer in response to an authenticated credit card,transmitting the authorization request message to the regional computer,transmitting a credit authorization message from the regional computer to aselected terminal console,selecting a fuel dispenser from one of a plurality of said dispensersconnected in sets to one terminal console at a remote station andcontrolled therefrom, andactuating a fuel dispenser in response to a selection signal to therebyallow the dispensing of fuel.31. In an automatic credit card controlled fuel dispensing system as setforth in claim 30 including the step of timing the interval between theselection of a fuel dispenser and the commencing of a dispensingtransaction, and terminating a fuel dispensing transaction when theelapsed time exceeds a predetermined maximum limit.32. In an automatic credit card controlled fuel dispensing system as setforth in claim 30 including the step of monitoring the value of fueldispensed in a transaction in response to the actuation of a fueldispenser.33. In an automatic credit card controlled fuel dispensing system as setforth in claim 32 including the step of terminating a fuel dispensingtransaction when the monitored value exceeds a pre-established limit.34. In an automatic credit card controlled fuel dispensing system as setforth in claim 32 including the step of generating a receipt at theterminal console identifying the value of the fuel dispensed from aselected fuel dispenser."}
{"WKU":"039314987","Title":"Cutoff saw","App_Date":"1972-04-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John F. Bowker","Assignee":"The Black Clawson Company","ICL_Class":"G06M  700;G06M  302","References":"3549870;3562498;3666928;3678253","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Apparatus for converting pulses representing movement in one unit ofmeasurement to pulses representing another unit of measurement, includingmeans for generating pulses representing both distance and direction ofmovement,clock means for supplying clock pulses at a rate higher than the pulse rateof said pulse generating means,first and second adjustable counter means,means responsive to said first counter for supplying a predetermined numberof clock pulses to said second counter for each pulse supplied by saidpulse generating means, andgate means responsive to the pulse output of said pulse generating meansfor directing said predetermined number of pulses to cause said secondcounter to count either up or down, depending on the direction of movementof said pulse generating means,said second counter providing one of two outputs, depending upon thedirection of movement of said pulse generating means, whenever the numberof pulses supplied thereto obtains a predetermined value,whereby the output from said second counter means is determined by thepulses supplied from said pulse generating means as modified between ratioof the predetermined number preset into the first and second countermeans.2. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said second counter means includesan up-down counter, said counter generating an output each time it downcounts to zero,coincidence gates connected to the output of said up-down counter forgenerating an output each time said counter up counts to a predeterminednumber, andmeans for setting a preset number into said counter each time an output isgenerated by either said counter or said coincidence gates."}
{"WKU":"039314995","Title":"Bowling game counter","App_Date":"1972-05-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Claude E. Ellis","Assignee":"Brunswick Corporation","ICL_Class":"G06M  308","References":"2555405;3179790;3648026","Claims":"I claim:1. An apparatus for counting the number of frames bowled upon a pluralityof bowling lanes and calculating therefrom the equivalent number of gamesplayed upon all the lanes, comprising;a plurality of first signal generating means each associated with one of aplurality of bowling lanes for generating a first electrical signal uponthe completion of a frame on its associated lane,counting means comprising a plurality of electrical pulse shaping circuitmeans each triggered by signals from a selected one of said first signalgenerating means for generating a second electrical signal in response tosaid first signal but very substantially shorter in time duration thansaid first signal,means responsive to random signals from said plurality of second signalgenerating means for recording the number of equivalent games representedthereby, including a dividing binary counter having a single inputconnected to the outputs of said plurality of short signal generatingcircuits and operative to count frames completed on all lanes and dividethe count by 11 to determine the equivalent number of completed gamesrepresented thereby.2. An apparatus which counts the frames bowled on a plurality of bowlinglanes and calculates the number of games played from this count,comprising:a plurality of signal generators, one associated with each lane forgenerating an electrical signal representative of a completed frame onthat lane;a plurality of pulse generators for producing shortened electrical pulsesrepresentative of frames completed on any lane, each pulse generator beingdiscretely connected to one of the signal generators and triggered by thesignal generator s electrical signal;a divider binary counter for counting the electrical pulses and calculatingthe number of completed games they represent;an OR gate connecting the pulse generators  outputs to the counter, wherebythe pulses are conducted to the counter in the order generated; andan indicator connected to the counter for displaying the number of gamesbowled.3. An apparatus for counting and indicating the number of bowling gamesplayed in a bowling establishment having a plurality of lanes comprising;a. means associated with each lane for generating a first electrical signalupon the completion of a frame,b. a plurality of pulse shortening and shaping circuits, one connecteddiscretely to each of said first signal generating means to receive saidfirst signal and convert the same to a signal of relatively shortduration;c. an OR gate having its input connected to each of said pulse shorteningand shaping circuits and adapted to issue an output signal whenever asignal is received on any one of said pulse shortening and shapingcircuits;d. a binary feedback counter connected to receive the output signal fromsaid pulse shortening and shaping OR gate and for issuing a single gameoutput signal after a predetermined number of frame completed signals havebeen received from siad OR gate; ande. counter-indicator means connected to said binary counter and responsiveto said game output signals to count and indicate the total number ofgames bowled upon the plurality of lanes."}
{"WKU":"039315002","Title":"System for operating a boiling water reactor steam turbine plant with a","App_Date":"1973-11-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Gary W. Berkebile;Francesco Lardi;Leaman B. Podolsky","Assignee":"Westinghouse Electric Corporation","ICL_Class":"G06f 1556;F01b 2500","References":"3552872;3572958;3588265;3630839;3709626","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An electric power plant, comprising a steam turbine, an electricgenerator operated under the driving power of the turbine, a boiling waternuclear reactor for generating steam to drive the turbine, valve meansoperatively connecting the reactor steam outlet to the turbine steam inletto control the admission of steam to the turbine, said reactor havingcontrol rods positionable within the reactor to vary the reactor energylevel and having a fluid recirculation means to vary the rate of steamgeneration for an existing reactor energy level, an automatic reactorrecirculation control means to vary the rate of steam generation inresponse to a change in a load demand representation, said systemincluding a means to generate a desired load demand representation, ameans to generate a pressure setpoint representation, a pressure controlmeans to position the valve means to control the steam pressure betweenthe reactor outlet and the valve means to correspond to the pressuresetpoint representation, a means responsive to a change in the generatedload demand representation to change the pressure setpoint representationin anticipation of a change in the rate of steam generation, means todetect the limits of operational capability of the recirculation system,and a means responsive to one of the detected limits to render a change inthe generated load demand representation ineffective to operate thepressure control means to anticipate a change in the rate of steamgeneration beyond the limits of capability of the recirculation system.2. An electric power plant as set forth in claim 1, wherein the means tochange the pressure setpoint representation in response to a change in theload demand representation is a deriviative circuit.3. An electric power plant as set forth in claim 1, wherein the automaticcontrol means further includes a means to detect the megawatt output ofthe generator, and the change in load demand representation to operate thereactor recirculation means is an error signal determined by the generatedload demand representation and the detected megawatt output.4. An electric power plant as set forth in claim 1 wherein the automaticcontrol means includes a digital/analog system and the means responsive tothe detected recirculation limits includes a programmed digital computer.5. An electric power plant as set forth in claim 1 wherein the capabilitylimit of the recirculation system include both upper and lower limits, anda change in the load demand representation in the direction of thedetected limit is prevented in response to such detected limit. l6. A system for automatically operating a combined boiling water reactorsteam turbine power plant having a recirculation system for varying therate of steam generation between the limits of its operational capabilityat an existing reactor power level comprising means to generate anelectrical representation of load demand for the turbine, means togenerate an electrical representation of a desired pressure setpoint forsteam between the reactor and turbine, means to control the pressure ofthe steam to correspond to the setpoint representation, means responsiveto a change in the load demand representation to change the pressuresetpoint representation in anticipation of a change in the rate of steamgeneration, means responsive to a change in the load demand representationto operate the recirculation system to change the rate of steam generationwithin the limits of its capability, means to detect the operationallimits of the recirculation system, and a means responsive to a detectedoperational limit of the recirculation system to render a change in theload demand representation ineffective to operate the pressure controlmeans to anticipate a change in the rate of steam generation beyond thelimits of capability of the recirculation system.7. A system according to claim 6, further comprising means to determine themegawatt output of the power plant, and the means to operate therecirculation system responds to a load demand error representationdetermined by the generated load demand representation and the actualdetected megawatt output.8. A system according to claim 6 wherein the means to generate the loaddemand representation and the means responsive to the recirculation limitsis a programmed digital computer.9. A system according to claim 6 wherein the means responsive to thedetected limit of the recirculation system prevents a change in thegenerated load demand representation.10. A system according to claim 6 wherein the means to change the pressuresetpoint representation is a derivative circuit."}
{"WKU":"039315010","Title":"Apparatus and method for optimizing the yield of usable pieces from","App_Date":"1973-08-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Anthony J. Barr;Alexander G. Mullin","Assignee":"National Association of Furniture Manufacturers, Inc.","ICL_Class":"G06F 1546;B26D  500","References":"3242573;3274390;3329181;3410643;3490147;3490320","Claims":"We claim:1. An apparatus for optimizing the yield of pre-determined usable piecesfrom a workpiece such as a board of lumber or the like having randomlydisposed defects designated on a plane surface thereof comprising meansfor supporting a workpiece; scanning means movable relative to saidworkpiece along the length thereof for detecting unusable defectcontaining areas disposed on said plane surface of said workpiece andcorrespondingly producing output signals; means movable relative to saidworkpiece along the length thereof for marking cutting lines thereon; acomputer including means responsive to the output signals of said scanningmeans for producing and storing a primary bit matrix corresponding to apattern of scanned unusable defect containing areas, means for identifyingpredetermined combinable unusable defect containing areas andpredetermined combinable unusable non-defect containing areas, means formerging predetermined combinable unusable defect containing areas andpredetermined combinable unusable non-defect containing areas to produceinformation corresponding to a pattern consisting of one or a combinationof a group consisting of combined and uncombined unusable areas, definingusable areas, means for establishing and storing pre-determined billingrequirements, programmed means responsive to said predetermined billingrequirements and said defined usable areas for selecting a cutting patternfor said workpiece providing an optimum yield of usable pieces complyingto at least a portion of said predetermined billing requirements and meansfor transmitting command signals to said marking means corresponding tosaid selected cutting pattern; and means for inputting said predeterminedbilling requirements into said computer.2. An apparatus according to claim 1 wherein said means for storingpredetermined billing requirements is operable to store data correspondingto desired sizes, quantities and priorities of said usable pieces.3. An apparatus according to claim 1 wherein said computer includes meansfor reestablishing said billing requirements following the processing ofeach workpiece.4. An apparatus according to claim 3 wherein said means for storingpredetermined billing requirements is operable to store data correspondingto desired sizes, quantities and priorities of said usable pieces.5. An apparatus according to claim 1 wherein said workpiece supportingmeans comprises a roller conveyor, and including means for positioning aworkpiece along predetermined reference coordinates.6. An apparatus according to claim 1 wherein said scanning means includesmeans for illuminating defect designating indicia applied to the planesurface of said workpiece, a plurality of transversely disposed readingheads and means for moving said plurality of reading heads selectivelyinto and out of engagement with said plane surface, each of said readingheads having a plurality of transversely disposed photosensitive cells fordetecting said indicia and being displaceable vertically relative tosuccessive reading heads to permit the position of said reading head toadjust vertically and conform to any variations in thickness of saidworkpiece as said scanning means traverses the length thereof.7. An apparatus according to claim 6 wherein lower leading edges of saidreading heads are relieved and said photosensitive cells are disposedwithin said relieved surfaces.8. An apparatus according to claim 6 including means interengagingsuccessive reading heads for limiting vertical displacement therebetween.9. An apparatus according to claim 1 including a coded reference scaledisposed longitudinally on said support means, and wherein said scanningmeans includes means for reading said coded reference scale as saidscanning means traverses along the length of said workpiece.10. An apparatus according to claim 1 wherein said marking means comprisesat least one vertically disposed pen movable transversely.11. An apparatus according to claim 10 wherein said pen comprises an inkemitting air brush.12. An apparatus according to claim 10 wherein said pen is mountable on atransversely disposed threaded drive member.13. An apparatus according to claim 1 including a carrier assembly movablelongitudinally above said workpiece disposed on said supporting means, andwherein said scanning and marking means are mounted on said carrierassembly.14. An apparatus according to claim 13 including means for supporting andguiding said carrier assembly longitudinally and a motor driven endlesschain disposed on said support means, operatively connectable to saidcarrier assembly for displacing said carrier assembly longitudinally.15. An apparatus according to claim 13 wherein said scanning means includesmeans mounted on said carrier assembly for illuminating defect designatingindicia applied to the plane surface of said workpiece, a plurality oftransversely disposed reading heads mounted on said carrier assembly, andmeans mounted on said carrier assembly for moving said plurality ofreading heads selectively into and out of engagement with said planesurface of said workpiece, each of said reading heads having a pluralityof transversely disposed photosensitive cells for detecting said indiciaand being movable vertically relative to adjacent reading heads to permitthe position of said reading head to adjust vertically and conform to anyvariations in thickness of said workpiece as said scanning means traversesthe length thereof.16. An apparatus according to claim 15 wherein lower leading edges of saidreading heads are relieved and said photosensitive cells are disposedalong said relieved surfaces.17. An apparatus according to claim 15 including means interengagingsuccessive reading heads for limiting vertical displacement therebetween.18. An apparatus according to claim 13 wherein said marking means comprisesat least one vertically disposed pen mounted on said carrier assembly andmovable transversely thereon.19. An apparatus according to claim 18 wherein said pen comprises an inkemitting air brush.20. An apparatus according to claim 18 wherein said pen is mountable on atransversely disposed threaded member mounted on said carrier assembly.21. An apparatus according to claim 13 including a coded reference scaledisposed longitudinally on said support means, and wherein said scanningmeans includes means for scanning said coded reference scale.22. A method of optimizing the yield of predetermined usable pieces from aworkpiece such as a board of lumber or the like having randomly disposeddefects designated on a plane surface thereof comprising scanning theworkpiece to detect unusable defect containing areas on said planesurface, forming and storing a primary bit matrix corresponding to apattern of scanned unusable defect containing areas, identifyingpredetermined combinable unusable defect containing areas andpredetermined combinable unusable non-defect containing areas on saidprimary bit matrix, merging identified combinable unusable defect andnon-defect containing areas to produce information corresponding to apattern consisting of one or a combination of a group consisting ofcombined and uncombined unusable areas, defining usable areas,establishing and storing predetermined billing requirements, successivelydetermining on the basis of said usable areas and said predeterminedbilling requirements various cutting patterns for said workpiece to atleast partially satisfy said billing requirements, selecting the cuttingpattern which is determined to produce the optimum yield from saidworkpiece in accordance with said billing requirements, and dividing saidworkpiece in accordance with the selected cutting pattern.23. A method according to claim 22 including the step of reestablishing andstoring the billing requirements following the processing of eachworkpiece.24. A method according to claim 22 including designating said defects withindicia, and wherein said defect detecting includes illuminating saiddesignated indicia and sensing light from said indicia.25. A method according to claim 22 wherein said dividing comprises sprayinga jet of ink on said workpiece to provide cutting lines.26. A method according to claim 22 wherein said dividing comprises cuttingsaid workpiece."}
{"WKU":"039315029","Title":"Method and apparatus for localization of failures on electrical lines","App_Date":"1974-01-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jurg Kohlas","Assignee":"BBC Brown Boveri & Company Ltd.","ICL_Class":"G01r 3108;G06r 1520","References":"3277343;3590368;3612989;3723864;3735204;3800215","Claims":"I claim:1. Method of localizing a failure on an electrical line in which currentand voltage values are determined at a measuring point (x.sub.o) formonitoring at least one line segment and calculating therefrom conditionsat at least one appraisal point (x.sub.i) on said line segment todetermine the presence of a failure, comprising the steps of:a. carrying out a plurality of measured value determinations of the currentand voltage concurrently present at the measuring point (x.sub.o) for eachappraisal point (x.sub.i), each such measured value determinationincluding at least one set of two pairs of current and voltage valuesconcurrently observed at the measuring point (x.sub.o), each such sethaving a relative time displacement (T.sub.i) between the value pairsequal to twice the wave propagation time between the measuring point(x.sub.o) and the appraisal point (x.sub.i);b. storing the first concurrent value pair of each said set of value pairs,or a magnitude pair derived from said value pair, for at least the timeinterval (T.sub.i) corresponding to twice the wave propagation time;c. utilizing respective stored and just-measured value pairs determined atthe measuring point (x.sub.o) to calculate the time-average, over asuitable integration time (t), of a unimodal function of the voltage atthe appraisal point (x.sub.i) to provide an evaluation function (B); andd. comparing said evaluation function (B) with at least one reference valueto control the generation of a failure signal.2. A method as defined in claim 1, in which a time sequence of measuredvalue determinations, each consisting of a set of two pairs of current andvoltage measurements relatively displaced in time by twice the said wavepropagation time are made and from such sets of value pairs a timesequence of values of said evaluation function (B) is generated.3. A method as defined in claim 2, in which the generation of a timesequence of values of said evaluation function (B) is initiated inresponse to the arrival at the measuring point of a transient disturbance(F, FIG. 2).4. A method as defined in claim 2, in which the measured valuedeterminations are made by detecting and storing continuously succeedingmeasured values.5. A method as defined in claim 2, in which the measured valuedeterminations and the generation of the evaluation function (B) iscarried out at a sequence of discrete moments in time progression.6. A method as defined in claim 2, in which a plurality of values,succeeding each other in time, of a unimodal function (M) of the voltage(u) at at least one appraisal point (x.sub.i) is generated, said functionhaving one and the same sign about the zero point of its argument, and inwhich then a time average of this unimodal voltage function (M) isgenerated to serve as an evaluation function and compared with at leastone reference value.7. A method as defined in claim 6, in which for a plurality of appraisalpoints on the monitored line segment at least one value of said evaluationfunction (B) is generated and in which then by mutual comparison of atleast a portion of the values of said evaluation function (B) relating tothe different appraisal points (x.sub.i) a test for a minimum is carriedout, and in which, further, when a minimum is found for an appraisal pointwhich is spaced from both the beginning and the end of the line segmentbeing monitored, a failure signal is generated as an indication of thepresence of a failure within the monitored line segment.8. Method according to claim 7, in which a test for the presence of arelative minimum as an indication of a failure is carried out by comparingvalues of the evaluation function (B) corresponding to neighboringappraisal points.9. Method as defined in claim 7, in which a test for the presence of anabsolute minimum as an indication of failure is made by comparison ofvalues of the evaluation function (B) corresponding to all of thepredetermined appraisal points of the monitored line segment.10. Method as defined in claim 6, in which for at least one appraisal point(x.sub.i) within the monitored line segment a comparison is made betweenat least one value of the evaluation function (B) and at least onepredetermined limit value and a failure signal is produced when saidevaluation function passes through said limit value.11. Method as defined in claim 2, in which the evaluation function (B) isgenerated by calculating a time average of a gradient of a unimodalfunction (M) of a voltage (u) at at least one appraisal point on themonitored line segment, said unimodal function having one and the samesign about the zero point of its argument, and in which method, further,at least one value of this evaluation function (B) is compared with areference value to provide a failure test.12. Method as defined in claim 11, in which for at least two neighboringappraisal points a plurality of values successive in time of said unimodalvoltage function (M) is generated and for every appraisal point a timeaverage (J) of this unimodal voltage function (M) is generated and bycombination of this time average value (J) relating to neighboringappraisal points a gradient (G) is generated as the said evaluationfunction (B).13. A method as defined in claim 11, in which for at least one appraisalpoint, which may be an intermediate point or either end point of themonitored line, at least one value of the gradient (G) generated as anevaluation function (B) is compared with at least one predetermined limitvalue, and in which when said gradient (G) falls below said limit value afailure signal is produced.14. A method as defined in claim 11, in which for at least two appraisalpoints which are located in the region of the beginning and of the end ofthe monitored line segment the sign of a gradient is determined and thatthe gradient signs of the two appraisal points are subjected to aninequality test to provide a failure signal when they are unequal.15. Apparatus for detecting failures on an electrical line located atmeasuring point on said line to monitor at least one segment of said line,comprising:a. measuring means (10) connected to said line at said measuring point(x.sub.o) for determining the values of timeconcurrent voltage and currentvalue pairs in time sequence;b. information processing means (20) having as input the values of saidvalue pairs supplied by said measuring means and including"}
{"WKU":"039315037","Title":"System for operating a boiling water reactor steam turbine power plant","App_Date":"1973-11-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Gary W. Berkebile;Francesco Lardi;Leaman B. Podolsky","Assignee":"Westinghouse Electric Corporation","ICL_Class":"G06f 1556;G21c  736","References":"3552872;3572958;3588265;3630839;3709626","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A system for operating an electric power plant, comprising a boilingwater reactor and steam turbine, a plurality of inlet and bypass valvesfor controlling steam flow from the reactor to the turbine, an electricgenerator driven by said turbine, a first and second steam throttlepressure detector, means for generating a throttle pressure setpointsignal, a first and a second analog pressure controller governed by thethrottle pressure setpoint signal and an associated respective first andsecond detector to generate an output signal for controlling the valves,first circuit means including a gating means to render the operation ofthe valves responsive to the output of only the controller having a firstdistinctive condition relative to the output of the other controller,selection means to selectively cause the first and second controlleroutput to be in said first distinctive relative condition, second circuitmeans responsive to a failure of the first pressure detector to cause theoutput of the second pressure controller to be in said distinctiverelative condition, and third circuit means responsive to a failure of thesecond detector when the first detector is defective to render the firstand second controllers ineffective to control the valves.2. A system according to claim 1 wherein each of the throttle pressuredetectors are capable of becoming defective in a high pressure directionand in a low pressure direction, wherein the first distinctive relativecondition is an output signal of one controller that is of greater valuethan the output signal of the other controller, and wherein the secondcircuit means is operative to lower the signal of the first controllerbelow the signal of the second controller regardless of the direction offailure of its associated detector.3. A system according to claim 1, further comprising fourth circuit meansresponsive to a defective first controller to cause the output of thesecond controller to be in said distinctive condition.4. A system according to claim 3, wherein said distinctive relativecondition is a predetermined relative level between the output signals,said gating means being operative to conduct only one of the two relativelevels, and wherein said second circuit means is operative to change therelative level of the output of the first controller to be in the firstdistinctive condition.5. A system according to claim 1, wherein the third circuit means transferscontrol of the valves to manual control in response to a failure of boththe first and second detectors.6. A system for operating an electric power plant, comprising a boilingwater reactor and steam turbine, a plurality of inlet and bypass valvesfor controlling steam flow from the reactor to the turbine, an electricgenerator driven by said turbine, steam throttle pressure detection means,said throttle pressure detection means being capable of a defect in a highpressure direction and in a low pressure direction, means for generating athrottle pressure setpoint signal, at least a first and a second pressurecontrol means governed by the throttle pressure setpoint signal and thepressure detection means to generate an output signal to position thevalves in accordance with the throttle pressure setpoint signal, selectionmeans including a biasing means to selectively change the output of one ofthe control means relative to the output of the other of the controlmeans, gating means governed by the relative outputs of the control meansto conduct the output of one of the control means to operate the valves toa position requirement of the one control means, means responsive to afailure of the pressure detection means in either the high or lowdirections for the one control means to change the relative outputs of thefirst and second control means to govern the gating means to interruptconducting of the output signal of the one control means and, means tooperate the valves in accordance with the position requirement of thecontrol means7. A system according to claim 6, wherein at least one of the control meansis an analog controller, and the means for generating the throttlepressure setpoint signal is structured in a programmed digital computer,and further comprises circuit means responsive to a failure of thepressure detection means for both the first and second control means totransfer control of the valves to manual operation.8. A system according to claim 7 wherein said circuit means is operative totransfer control of the bypass valves only to manual operation in responseto a failure in the pressure detection means for both pressure controlmeans at times when the rate of reactor generation is greater than thesteam flow to the turbine.9. A system according to claim 7, wherein both of the control means areanalog pressure controllers further comprising means to detect failures inselected components of both controllers, means to transfer control of thegovernor valves to manual operation in response to a detected failure inboth pressure controllers at times when the steam flow to the turbine issubstantially equal to the reactor generation rate, and at times when bothbypass and governor valves are controlled by the pressure controllers."}
{"WKU":"039315045","Title":"Electronic data processing security system and method","App_Date":"1973-12-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Edward A. Jacoby","Assignee":"Basic Computing Arts, Inc.","ICL_Class":"G06F  900;G06F 1100","References":"3368207;3566362;3573855;3745316;R27251","Claims":"What is claimed and desired to be secured by United States Letters Patentis:1. An electronic system for preventing undetected alteration, destruction,removal or reproduction of data available to a central processing unit(CPU) of a computer implementing at least one problem process and anoperating process comprising:means for monitoring operating statements communicated to the CPU for theoperating process and means for monitoring problem steps to be used by theoperating process in governing the problem process, both said monitoringmeans electronically reflecting the nature of the information monitored;means for comparing the monitored information with predetermined standardscomprising representations of operating statements and problem steps; andmeans for initiating a predetermined counteraction when the comparing meanselectronically indicates that the monitored information is outside thelimits defined by the predetermined standards.2. A system as defined in claim 1 comprising control and library devicesand data channels connecting the CPU and corresponding control and librarydevices and wherein both said monitoring means comprise means forelectronically reflecting electric signal pulses transferred along thedata channels to the comparing means without altering or interrupting theflow of signal pulses between the control and library devices and the CPU.3. A system as defined in claim 1 wherein said comparing means isencompassed within a secondary computer comprising:a memory device controlled by the secondary computer, the memory devicestoring a collection of representations of statements and problem stepsrequiring special authority; andmeans comprising the comparing means and communicating with the memorydevice for electronically retrieving the representations from the memorydevice for comparison with information monitored by at least one of theoperating statement and problem step monitoring means.4. A system as defined in claim 1 wherein said initiating means comprisesmeans for recording events identifying the monitored information which isfound outside limits defined by the predetermined standards and means forenergizing a humanly discernable alarm.5. A system as defined in claim 1 wherein said initiating means comprisesmeans for suppressing unauthorized operating statements and problem stepsbefore the effect thereof inheres in the operating process of the CPU.6. A system as defined in claim 1 further comprising means for sensingphysical tampering at at least one location in the system and developingan electronic tamper signal, means communicating the tamper signal to theinitiating means and means comprising part of the initiating means forgenerating a tamper alert counteraction in response to the tamper signal.7. A method for preventing undetected alteration, removal, destruction orinspection of data available to a central processing unit (CPU) comprisingthe steps of:establishing a problem process in the CPU for processing problem data toproblem results;governing the problem process with an operating process, which operatingprocess responds to operating statements and implements program steps;sensing first electric pulse representations of the operating statements todevelop a corresponding electric pulse sequence which represents theactual operating statements used;sensing second electric pulse representations of the problem steps todevelop a corresponding electric pulse sequence which represents theactual problem steps used;comparing at least one of the corresponding electric pulse sequences with apredetermined standard comprising electric pulse representations ofcorresponding standard operating statements and standard problem steps;andelectronically initiating predetermined counteraction when any part of thepulse sequence is found outside the limits defined by the predeterminedstandard.8. A method as defined in claim 7 wherein said comparing step is precededby creating a comparative standard by developing a table of expectedstatistics comprising a collection of electronic pulse representationsindentifying permissible operating statements and problem steps andstoring the table of expected statistics in a memory which is separatefrom the CPU.9. A method as defined in claim 8 wherein said predetermined counteractioncomprises suppressing all operating statements and problem steps.10. A method as defined in claim 8 wherein said predetermined counteractioncomprises generating a humanly discernable alarm and recording theidentification of the illegitimate operating statement or problem step.11. A method for electronically monitoring operating statements to preventundetected alteration, removal, destruction, or inspection of dataavailable to a central processing unit (CPU), the steps of:preparing a vocabulary of operating statements which are permitted only byspecial authority;developing a collection of authority codes which is associated with theprepared vocabulary of operating statements and electronically storing thecollection;accompanying each authorized operating statement communicated to the CPUwith an authority code;scanning all operating statements submitted to the CPU to detect theexistence and identity of the authority code;comparing the data bit representation of the authority code with the databit representation of the collection of codes to determine if theauthority code is found accompanying the operating statement; andinitiating a predetermined electronically responsive counteraction wherethe operating statement is not accompanied by an authority code which isfound in the collection of codes.12. A method as defined in claim 11 wherein said preparing step comprisesrequiring operating statements to be accompanied by any one of a range ofauthority levels represented by a unique code corresponding to the natureof the operating statement, including no authority represented by theabsence of an authority code as a lower bound of the range.13. A method as defined in claim 11 wherein said accompanying step ispreceded by entering a plurality of enabling codes into a card punchdevice and mechanically punching a unique code in each of a plurality ofcards; concealing the punched code in an array of punches; and placing atleast one of the encoded cards so as to be associated with cards carryingoperating statements to be transferred to the CPU.14. A method as defined in claim 13 wherein said punching step comprisesomitting a selected digit from the range of authority codes to minimizepredictability of the codes.15. A method as defined in claim 11 wherein said accompanying stepcomprises entering authority codes at a keyboard terminal so as to beassociated with corresponding operating statements transmitted to the CPU.16. A method as defined in claim 11 wherein said electronically storingstep comprises accumulating authority codes in a bit register, each bitbeing specifically identified to a unique authority code; and setting thecorresponding bit in the register for each of the codes detected in thescanning step thereby preventing use of a single authority code more thanonce.17. A method as defined in claim 11 further comprising:identifying a vocabulary of operating statements, each statement in thevocabulary being restricted;collecting the vocabulary of restricted operating statements in a table andelectronically storing the table;comparing the data bit representation of each operating statement submittedto the CPU with the table prior to scanning the operating statements foran accompanying authority code; andinitiating a predetermined counteraction when the operating statementsubmitted to the CPU is found in the vocabulary of restricted operatingstatements.18. A system for electronically monitoring operating statements in adigital computer to prevent undetected alteration, removal, destruction orinspection of data available to a central processing unit (CPU)comprising:means compiling a vocabulary of data bit representations of operatingstatements permitted only by special authority;means identifying each of the data bit representations of the operatingstatements in the vocabulary with an authority code;means storing the vocabulary of data bit representations of operatingstatements and associated authority codes in an electronically retrievableform;means scanning all data bit representations of operating statementssubmitted to the CPU to detect the existence and identity of any authoritycode associated with the operating statements submitted;means comparing authority codes associated with the submittedrepresentations of operating statements with the authority code associatedwith the corresponding stored representations of operating statements; andmeans initiating a predetermined electronically responsive counteractionwhen the scanned authority code does not match the stored authority codefor corresponding operating statements.19. A system as defined in claim 18 further comprising:additional means collecting a vocabulary of data bit representations ofrestricted operating statements and means electronically storing the databit representations of the restricted operating statements in aretrievable form;means comparing the representation of each operating statement submitted tothe CPU with the stored vocabulary of representations of restrictedoperating statements; andmeans initiating a predetermined electronically responsive counteractionwhen the representations of the operating statements submitted to the CPUare found in the vocabulary of representations of restricted operatingstatements.20. A system as defined in claim 18 comprising means for mechanicallypunching authority codes in random order in card stock; means forcommunicating enabling codes to the punching means; and means forassembling the cards into a deck."}
{"WKU":"039315053","Title":"Program controlled data processor","App_Date":"1974-03-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard Walter Sevcik","Assignee":"Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated","ICL_Class":"G06F 1108;G06F 1516","References":"3303474;3471686;3509532;3557315;3651480;3651482;3770948;3810119","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A data processing arrangement comprising:a plurality of program controlled data manipulation units arranged to reactin nonidentical manners in the execution of certain classes of programorder words;a memory containing program order words and data;means for communicatiing program order words and data from said memory tosaid data manipulation units;a comparison circuit for comparing data produced by said data manipulationunits, including data produced in the execution of said certain classes ofprogram order words and for generating match and mismatch signalsindicating the identity and lack of identity of said compared data,respectively,inhibiting means, connected to said comparison circuit and to said datamanipulation units and responsive to said mismatch signals for inhibitingfurther operation of said data processing arrangement; andmeans coupled to said memory and to said inhibiting means and responsive toprogram order words obtained from said memory for generating controlsignals for precluding said inhibiting means for inhibiting the operationof said data processing arrangement.2. In a data processing arrangement which includes two program controlleddata manipulation units, a control unit comprising:a memory containing program order words and data;means for communicating program order words and data obtained from saidmemory to both of said data manipulation units;means for comparing data produced by said data manipulation units inresponse to a first program order word and for generating mismatch signalsindicating lack of identity of the compared data;inhibiting means connected to said means for comparing and to said datamanipulation units and responsive to said mismatch signals for inhibitingthe further operation of said data processing arrangement; andmeans connected to said memory and to said inhibiting and responsive to aportion of a second program order word obtained from said memory aftersaid first program order word for precluding said mismatch signals frominhibiting further operation of said data processing arrangement.3. The data processing arrangement of claim 2 wherein said datamanipulation units respond to certain of said program order words toproduce said data for comparison in a nonidentical manner.4. The data processing arrangement of claim 3 wherein said control unitfurther includes storage means for storing an address for use in obtainingprogram order words from said memory and means responsive to said mismatchsignals for modifying the address stored in said storage means.5. A data processing arrangement comprising:a first and second program controlled data manipulation unit;a memory containing program order words and data;means for communicating program order words and data from said memory toboth of said data manipulation units;a comparator for comparing information produced by said data manipulationunits and for generating comparator signals indicating the identity orlack of identity of the compared information;inhibiting means connected to said comparator and to said first and seconddata manipulation units and responsive to said comparator signalsindicating a lack of identity for inhibiting further operation by saiddata processing arrangement;means in said first data manipulation unit responsive to a first programorder word for communicating data to said comparator;means in said second data manipulation unit responsive to said firstprogram order word for communicating a preset constant to said comparator;andmeans connected to said memory and to said inhibiting means and responsiveto a portion of a second program order word, accessed from said memoryafter said first program order word for precluding said comparator signalsindicating a lack of identity from inhibiting further operation by saiddata processing arrangement.6. The data processing arrangement of claim 5 further including storagemeans for storing an address for use in obtaining program order words fromsaid memory and means responsive to said first program order word formodifying the address stored in said storage means in accordance with saidcomparator signals indicating identity.7. The data processing arrangement of claim 6 wherein said storage meansfurther stores a parity bit indicating the parity of the address stored insaid storage means, further including means responsive to said firstprogram order word for modifying said parity bit to conform to themodified address stored in said storage means.8. A data processing arrangement comprising:a first and a second program controlled data manipulation unit eachincluding a respective one of a first and a second storage resgister;a memory containing program order words and data;means for communicating program order words and data from said memory toboth of said data manipulation units;a circuit arrangement associated with said first storage register forgenerating output signals representing the Exclusive-OR of the contents ofsaid first storage register and data applied to the inputs of said circuitarrangement and for storing said output signals in said first storageregister;means responsive to a first program order word for applying a first dataword to the inputs of said circuit arrangement;means responsive to said first program order word for storing said firstdata word in said second storage register;means responsive to a second program order word occurring after said firstprogram order word for applying a second data word to the inputs of saidcircuit arrangement; andmeans responsive to a third program order word comparing the contents ofsaid first and said second storage register to determine if they areidentical."}
{"WKU":"039315061","Title":"Programmable tester","App_Date":"1974-12-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ronald N. Borrelli;Douglas W. Raymond","Assignee":"Zehntel, Inc.","ICL_Class":"G06F 1100;G01R 3128","References":"3423677;3492571;3492572;3541441;3546582;3549996;3631229;3763430","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A testing apparatus for testing electrical properties of a circuit undertest formed by a plurality of components interconnected at nodescomprising,a plurality of selectable connection switches having switch outputs forconnection to selected nodes of the circuit under test,connection switch controller means for controlling said connection switchesto connect said switch outputs to said selected nodes,controllable measurement unit means connected to receive said switchoutputs for measuring electrical properties of the circuit under test withpredetermined tests,measurement unit controller means for controlling said measurement unitmeans to perform predetermined tests,program controlled processor means for processing a program ofinstructions, including subroutines of instructions correlated topredetermined tests in said measurement unit, said processor connected tosaid connection switch controller to cause said switch outputs to beconnected to said selected nodes and said processor connected to saidmeasuring unit controller for controlling said measurement unit to performa selected one of the predetermined tests in accordance with a correlatedsubroutine.2. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said circuit under test includes Nnodes, wherein each of said connection switches includes N lines connectedto said N codes, and wherein at least two of said connection switches eachincludes means for selecting one of said N lines as one of said switchoutputs.3. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said circuit under test includes Nnodes, wherein each of said connection switches includes N lines connectedto said N nodes, wherein at least one of said connection switches includesmeans for selecting one of said N lines as one of said switch outputs andwherein at least one of said selection switches includes means forconnecting (N-1) of said N lines in common as one of said switch outputs.4. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said circuit under test includes Nnodes, wherein each of said connection switches includes N lines connectedto said N nodes, wherein at least one of said connection switches includesmeans for selecting one of said N lines as one of said switch outputs, andwherein at least one of said connection switches includes means forselecting (N-P-1) of said N lines in common as one of said switch outputswhere P is an integer less than N.5. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said circuit under test includes Nnodes, wherein each of said connection switches includes N lines connectedto said N nodes, and wherein said connection switches include,a first switch for selecting one of said N lines as one of said switchoutputs,a second switch for selecting one of said N lines as one of said switchoutputs,a third switch for selecting M of said N lines in common as one of saidswitch outputs, where M is any integer less than N.6. The apparatus of claim 1 including a functional tester connected to saidprocessor means for performing functional tests on said circuit undertest, said functional tester comprising,a plurality of program selectable signal sources for providing excitationsignals under program control,first switch means for connecting a selected one of said signal sources toone or more nodes of said circuit under test,a plurality of selectable measuring devices selectable under programcontrol for measuring signals in said circuit under test in response to anexcitation signal provided by the selected one of said signal sources,second program selectable switch means for connecting output nodes fromsaid circuit under test to said selected one of said measurement devices.7. The apparatus of claim 6 including transfer circuit means fortransferring, under program control said switch output from said measuringunit means to said functional tester.8. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said measurement unit means includesexciter circuit means having a plurality of excitation sources forproviding excitation signals for exciting said circuit under test andincludes means for selecting one of said sources under program control.9. The apparatus of claim 8 wherein said sources include an AC source forproviding an AC excitation signal and a DC source for providing a DCexcitation signal and wherein said exciter circuit means includes adigital multiplier for multiplying a selected one of said excitationsignals by a program commanded digital value.10. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said measuring unit means includes asignal source for providing an excitation signal and a multiplyingdigital-to-analog converter connected to multiply said excitation signalby a quantity specified by a digital input and wherein said measurementunit controller means includes means for providing said digital inputunder program control.11. The apparatus of claim 10 including inhibit means for selectivelyinhibiting said excitation signal from said digital-to-analog converteruntil a zero crossing of said excitation signal occurs and zero detectionmeans for detecting zero crossing of said excitation signal.12. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said measurement unit means includesan excitation means for providing excitation signals under programcontrol, includes computing circuit means connected under program controlto said circuit under test by said device connection switches andresponsive to said excitation signal to provide a measurement signal, andincludes converter means for converting said measurement signal to adigital representation under program control.13. The apparatus of claim 12 wherein said computing circuit means includesat least one computing resistor, a computing amplifier and a plurality ofselectable configuration switches for connecting under program control andcomputing resistor, said computing amplifier and said switch outputs ofsaid connection switches in a plurality of connection modes.14. The apparatus of claim 13 including a plurality of computing resistorsand a plurality of associated resistor switches selectable one at a timeunder program control for selecting the magnitude of the computation to beperformed by said computing circuit.15. The apparatus of claim 13 wherein said device connection switchesinclude a first switch, a second switch and a third switch, and whereinsaid computing circuit means includes,means for connecting said circuit under test in a first mode includingmeans to connect the switch output from said first switch in series withsaid computing resistor to connect said excitation means to said circuitunder test and including means to connect the switch outputs from saidsecond and third switches to said converter,means for connecting said circuit under test in a second mode includingmeans for connecting said computing resistor between said excitation meansand said computing amplifier, including means for connecting the switchoutput from said first and second switches to the input and output of saidcomputing amplifier, respectively, whereby a component in said circuitunder test is connected under program control across the input and outputof said computing amplifier, and including means for connecting the switchoutput from said third switch to ground whereby components in said circuitunder test are isolated,means for connecting said circuit under test in a third mode includingmeans for connecting the switch output from said first switch to saidexcitation means whereby said first switch under program control connectsa first node of a component in said circuit under test to said excitationmeans, including means for connecting the switch output from said secondswitch as an input to said computing amplifier whereby said second switchunder program control connects a second node of said component under testas an input to said computing amplifier, including means for connectingsaid computing resistor between the input and output of said computingamplifier, including means for connecting the switch output from saidthird switch to ground whereby components in said circuit under test areisolated, and including means for connecting said computing amplifier tosaid converter.16. The apparatus of claim 12 wherein said excitation means is referencedto a first ground and said converter means is referenced to a secondground so that the excitation means is floated with respect to saidmeasurement unit means and wherein said measurement unit means includesmeans, under program control, for connecting said first and second groundsin common.17. The apparatus of claim 12 wherein said converter circuit means includesscaling means operable under program control for scaling said measurementsignal, includes a fullwave rectifier for rectifying the scaledmeasurement signal and includes an analog-to-digital converter forconverting the scaled and rectified measurement signal to a digital value.18. The apparatus of claim 1 including register means, accessible underprogram control by said processor means, for storing information relatingto the current test being performed by the measurement unit means.19. The apparatus of claim 18 including selection means for selecting anoutput from either said register means or from said measurement unit meansto provide a data input to said processor means.20. The apparatus of claim 19 including flag store means accessible underprogram control by said processor means for storing a flag bit to signifywhen an output from said measurement unit means does or does not fallwithin limits stored by said processor means.21. An apparatus for the in-circuit measuring of electrical properties ofcomponents connected in an electrical circuit comprising,program commanded connection means for making electrical connection tonodes of a selected component,program commanded exciter means for providing a selected excitation signal,program commanded computing means connected to said selected component andresponsive to said excitation signal to provide a measurement signal,program commanded converter means responsive to said measurement signal toprovide an output proportional to the electrical property being measured,processor means for processing stored instructions for commanding saidconnection, exciter, computing and converter means; said processor meansoperable during the execution of said instructions to call subroutines forcommanding said computing means and said converter means as a function ofthe type of electrical property under test for said selected component.22. A tester apparatus for testing for shorts in a circuit under testformed by a plurality of components interconnected at N nodes comprising,a plurality of selectable connection switches having switch outputs forconnection to selected nodes of the circuit under test, said connectionswitches including a first connection switch having means for selectingone of said N nodes as a first one of said switch outputs, and including asecond connection switch having means for selecting (N-P-1) of said Nnodes in common as a second one of said switch outputs where P is aninteger less than N,connection switch controller means for controlling said connection switchesto connect said switch outputs to said selected nodes,controllable measurement unit means connected to receive said switchoutputs for measuring the resistance between said first one and saidsecond one of said switch outputs as shorts tests,measurement unit controller means for controlling said measurement unitmeans to perform said shorts test,program controlled processor means for processing a program ofinstructions, including a shorts subroutine for commanding a shorts tests,said processor connected to said connection switch controller to causesaid switch outputs to be connected to said selected nodes and saidprocessor connected to said measuring unit controller for controlling saidmeasurement unit to perform said shorts test in accordance with saidshorts subroutine.23. In a testing apparatus for the in-circuit measuring of electricalproperties of components connected in an electrical circuit, the methodcomprising the steps of,connecting, under program command, nodes of a selected component to ameasurement unit,exciting, under program command, said selected component and saidmeasurement unit to provide a measurement signal unique to an electricalproperty of said selected component,converting, under program command, said measurement signal to provide anoutput signal proportional to the electrical property being measured,processing stored instructions for commanding said connecting step, saidexciting step, and said converting step; said processing including theexecution of a subroutine as a function of the type of electrical propertybeing measured for said selected component,repeating said connecting step, said exciting step, said converting stepand said processing step for a number of selected components in saidelectrical circuit.24. In the method of claim 23, the additional step of connecting selectednodes of said circuit in common to isolate components from said selectedcomponent during said exciting and said converting steps.25. A testing apparatus for testing electrical properties of an electricalcircuit formed by a plurality of components interconnected at nodescomprising,a program controllable in-circuit tester including selectable connectionswitches having switch outputs for connecting selected nodes of a selectedcomponent of said circuit to a program controllable measurement unitoperable to measure electrical properties of said selected component,a program controllable functional tester including selectable signalsources for providing excitation signals to said circuit to producemeasurement signals; including selectable measuring devices for measuringsaid measurement signals and including switch means for connectingselected ones of said signal sources and said measuring devices to saidcircuit,program controllable transfer switch means for connecting selected ones ofsaid switch outputs in said in-circuit tester to said switch means in saidfunctional tester whereby said in-circuit tester and said functionaltester are interactively connected for concurrent operation,processor means for processing instructions for controlling said in-circuittester, said functional tester and said transfer switch means."}
{"WKU":"039315070","Title":"Power-up clear in an electronic digital calculator","App_Date":"1974-11-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"George L. Brantingham","Assignee":"Texas Instruments Incorporated","ICL_Class":"G06F 1502","References":"3470538;3863060","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a calculator system having data storage means, an arithmetic unit forperforming operations on data and control circuitry including addressableinstruction storage means for providing commands which define theoperation of the system, a power-up clear circuit arrangement comprising:a. bistable latch means responsive to initial power applied to said systemto be set in a first predetermined state;b. program counter means for generating addresses of said instructionstorage means, said program counter means including means responsive tothe initial application of power to said system for selectivelyincrementing said program counter means; andc. logic gate means coupled to the output of said program counter means andto said latch means for setting said latch means to a second predeterminedstate in response to a predetermined address generated by said programcounter means.2. The circuit arrangement according to claim 1 wherein said predeterminedaddress causes said control circuitry to be in an idle state waiting forkeyboard entry.3. The circuit arrangement according to claim 1 wherein said calculatorsystem is fabricated as an injection logic semiconductor circuit systemand wherein said latch means includes at least one injector relativelylarger than the other injectors whereby said latch is always set in saidfirst predetermined state when power is initially applied to said system.4. The circuit arrangement according to claim 3 including a selectedplurality of gates throughout said system having injectors relativelylarger than the other injectors whereby said selected gates are always setto a predetermined state when power is initially applied to said system.5. The circuit arrangement according to claim 1 wherein said bistable latchis comprised to two cross-coupled NAND gates.6. In a calculator system having data storage means, an arithmetic unit forperforming operations on data and control circuitry including addressableinstruction storage means for providing commands which define theoperation of the system, a power-up clear circuit arrangement comprising:a. terminal means for applying power to said system;b. a bistable latch having first and second predetermined states;c. means coupling said power terminal means to said bistable latch meansfor setting said latch means to said first predetermined state each timepower is initially applied to said terminal means;d. address generator means for generating addresses of said instructionstorage means, said address generator means including program countermeans and means responsive to the first predetermined state of saidbistable latch means for selectively incrementing said program countermeans; ande. logic gate means coupled to the output of said program counter means andto said latch means for resetting said latch means in response to apreselected address generated by said program counter means.7. The circuit arrangement according to claim 6 wherein said logic gatemeans includes a logical AND gate for detecting the first or last addressof said instruction storage means.8. The circuit arrangement according to claim 6 wherein said preselectedaddress causes said control circuitry to be in an idle state waiting forkeyboard entry.9. The circuit arrangement according to claim 6 wherein said calculatorsystem is fabricated as an injection logic semiconductor circuit systemand wherein said latch means includes at least one injector relativelylarger than the other injectors whereby said latch is always set in saidfirst predetermined state when power is initially applied to said terminalmeans.10. The circuit arrangement according to claim 6 wherein said meanscoupling said terminal means to said latch includes charge storage meansfor causing said latch means to set to said first predetermined state."}
{"WKU":"039315088","Title":"Arrangement for furnishing an indication of total fare including","App_Date":"1974-03-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Heinz Kelch","Assignee":"Kienzle Apparate GmbH","ICL_Class":"G07B 1304","References":"3764782;3818186","Claims":"What is claimed as new and desired to be protected by Letters Patent is setforth in the appended claims:1. In an electronic taximeter having input means for furnishing functionsignals under external activation, control means connected to said inputmeans for furnishing control signals corresponding to the so-furnishedfunction signals, storage means having first storage locations for storingdata required for computing the fare based on distance travelled andwaiting time, second storage locations for storing the so-computed fareand third storage locations for storing data representing additionalcharges, computer means operative under control of said control signalsfor carrying out computations on data supplied thereto, and indicatormeans having a plurality of indicator positions each connected to acorresponding one of said storage locations in said storage means undercontrol of said control signals, for furnishing a visual indication of thedata stored in said corresponding ones of said storage locations, theimprovement, comprising, in combination, switch means in said input meansfor furnishing a total tariff signal upon external activation; and controlcircuit means in said control means for furnishing control signals inresponse to said total tariff signal, for supplying data stored in saidsecond and third storage locations to said computer means, controllingsaid computer means to add said data stored in said third storagelocations to said data stored in said second storage locations and furnisha corresponding sum signal, and for transferring said sum signal to saidcorresponding ones of said storage locations connectable to said indicatorlocations, whereby visual indication of said sum signal is furnished undercontrol of said control signals.2. A taximeter as set forth in claim 1, wherein said taximeter has a keyoperable by the driver at the end of the trip for terminating the farecomputation on the basis of waiting time; and wherein said switch means insaid input means is said key.3. A taximeter as set forth in claim 1, wherein said corresponding ones ofsaid storage locations in said storage means are said third storagelocations; wherein said switch means in said input means further comprisemeans for furnishing a subtract signal; and wherein said control circuitmeans comprise bistable circuit means having a first state in response tosaid tariff signal, for controlling said computer means to add said farestored in said second storage locations to said data stored in said thirdstorage locations and a second stable state in response to said subtractsignal for causing said computer means to subtract said data stored insaid second storage locations from said data stored in said third storagelocations.4. A taximeter as set forth in claim 3, wherein said switch means comprisea first and second key, and means connecting said first and second key tosaid bistable circuit means in such a manner that operation of said firstkey switches said bistable circuit means to said first stable state andoperation of said second key switches said bistable circuit means to saidsecond stable state.5. A taximeter as set forth in claim 3, wherein said switch means comprisea single key, and means for connecting said key to said bistable circuitmeans in such a manner that depression of said key switches said bistablecircuit means to said first stable state and release of said key switchessaid bistable circuit means to said second stable state."}
{"WKU":"039315096","Title":"Apparatus for obtaining the convolution and/or correlation of signals","App_Date":"1974-03-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Oberdan W. Otto","Assignee":"The Board of Trustees of Leland Stanford Jr. University","ICL_Class":"G06G  719;H03H  730","References":"3568102;3757256;3770949;3774019;3800247","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Signal processing apparatus which comprisesa piezoelectric medium,a pair of input transducers disposed adjacent said medium in positions toenable the coupling of two electromagnetic input signals into said mediumto generate first and second acoustic wave signals which propagate atdifferent angles and overlap at a predetermined position,means for applying a switching signal to said medium so as toparametrically interact with the overlapped acoustic wave signals, andoutput transducer means on said medium at a position to couple energy fromthe parametrically interacted signals to provide an integrated outputsignal.2. Signal processing apparatus according to claim 1 whereinsaid pair of input transducers are disposed on the same side of said outputtransducer.3. Signal process apparatus according to claim 1 whereinsaid pair of input transducers are disposed on opposite sides of saidoutput transducer.4. Signal processing apparatus according to claim 1 whereinsaid input transducers are symmetrically disposed at equal angularpositions relative to the position of parametric interaction.5. Signal processing apparatus according to claim 1 whereinsaid switching signal applying means includes a transducer located at thepredetermined position of input signal overlap.6. Signal processing apparatus according to claim 1 whereinsaid switching signal applying means includes means for applying a radiofrequency pulse of predetermined frequency to establish the conditions forparametric interaction.7. Signal processing apparatus according to claim 6 whereinsaid switching signal applying means includes a tunable radio frequencypulse generator."}
{"WKU":"039315100","Title":"Equalization storage in recirculating memories","App_Date":"1974-07-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Allan R. Kmetz","Assignee":"Texas Instruments Incorporated","ICL_Class":"G11C 1140;H03K  5159","References":"3474260;3746883;3775685;3809923;3819958","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a data handling system, the combination comprising:a. a CTD analog shift register having data input means and data outputmeans,b. a CTD transversal filter section of limited length connected to theoutput of said analog shift register, said transversal filter sectioncomprising a plurality of cells and tap weight means for weighting outputsfrom said cells by weighting functions to compensate dispersion distortiondue to one pass of an analog signal through said analog shift register,c. linear amplifier means connected to sum weighted outputs from the cellsof said transversal filter section, andd. means selectively operable to connect the output of said amplifier meansto the data input means of said analog shift register.2. The combination set forth in claim 1 in which:a. means are provided periodically to apply to the data input means of saidCTD shift register a known amplitude signal, andb. means automatically to set the tap weights of said transversal filter inaccordance with the output from shift register of said known amplitudesignal.3. The combination set forth in claim 1 in which a summation means isprovided in series with said CTD and said filter and means which sensesdark current components in the output from said CTD and adjusts the D.C.level of said output through said summation means to eliminate the darkcurrent component from the output of said filter.4. The combination set forth in claim 1 in which a control means cyclessaid shift register successively through a filter weighting mode, a dataload mode and a display mode.5. The combination set forth in claim 4 in which said control meansincludes said weighting mode on selected cycles only.6. The combination set forth in claim 4 in which said control meansincludes in said display mode multiple read outs from said CTD within eachsaid cycle.7. A dispersion compensated CTD controlled data display system whichcomprises:a. a serial-parallel-serial CTD,b. means to load said CTD at a low data rate,c. clock means to shift said data from said CTD at a high data rate,d. an adaptive transversal filter connected in series with said CTD toprovide a dispersion corrected output of the data from said CTD,e. means for selectively applying said dispersion corrected output to theinput of said CTD at said high data rate,f. a data display unit,g. means for applying said dispersion corrected output to said display unitat said high data rate, andh. means for periodically reloading said CTD at said low rate.8. The combination set forth in claim 7 in which said transversal filtercomprises a terminal set of cells in said CTD shift register with means tomultiply outputs from said cells by weighting factors to compensate fordispersion of signals passing through said CTD analog shift register, andmeans to sum the results of said multiplication.9. The combination set forth in claim 8 in which the order k of correctionfor dispersion is about six.10. The method of compensating dispersion in a CTD analog shift registerwhich comprises:a. sensing the magnitudes of successive output signal samples after each ofsaid signal samples has completed one complete path through said analogshift register,b. adjusting the magnitudes of said sensed signal samples by a weightingfunction representative of the inverse of the dispersion function of saidCTD analog shift register,c. summing the outputs resulting from each said adjustment, andd. feeding back said respective summed outputs to the input of said analogshift register for recirculation through said shift register.11. In the method set forth in claim 10 the step which comprises shiftingthe D.C. level of said output signal samples to correct for dark currentproduced in said CTD analog shift register.12. In the method set forth in claim 10, the steps which compriseperiodically interrupting flow of analog input data to said CTD shiftregister, applying a reference pulse as an input to said shift registerduring such interruption and adjusting the values of said weightingfunctions in dependence on the output from said CTD of said referencepulse and of k-l trailing dispersion produced pulses.13. In a dispersion compensated CTD controlled data display system, thecombination comprising:a. a CTD analog shift register;b. clock means for selectively operating said shift register at low andhigh data rates, respectively;c. CTD adaptive transversal filter means connected in series with saidshift register and having adjustable tap weights for providing adispersion corrected output of data from said shift register;d. data input means selectively connectible to said shift register to inputdata into said shift register;e. data display means;f. summation means selectively connectible between the output of saidtransversal filter means and the output of said shift register for sensingdark current components in the output from said shift register andadjusting the D.C. level of said output from said summation means tosubstantially eliminate said dark current component from the output ofsaid shift register;g. dispersion correction means selectively connectible to said shiftregister and transversal filter means to apply to the input of said shiftregister a known amplitude pulse and means automatically to set said tapweights of said transversal filter in accordance with the output from saidshift register in response to said known amplitude input pulse; andh. switch means selectively operable to"}
{"WKU":"039315118","Title":"Vehicle headlamps","App_Date":"1974-12-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Olivier Puyplat","Assignee":"Cibie Projecteurs","ICL_Class":"F21V 1304","References":"3622778;3849642;3870876","Claims":"What we claim as our invention and desire to secure by Letters Patent is:1. A motor vehicle headlamp comprising an parabolic mirror, a lamp having adipped beam filament disposed in front of the focus of the mirror, themirror having a central part surrounding the lamp and a peripheral partsurrounding the central part, a front lens provided with relief patternsto intercept and disperse at least a part of the reflected dipped beam, anauxiliary lens positioned between the lamp and the front lens and providedwith relief patterns to intercept and disperse at least a part of thelight reflected by the central part of the mirror, the front lens beingrigidly connectable to the vehicle and the auxiliary lens being rigidlyconnected to the mirror so as to be movable therewith.2. A headlamp as claimed in claim 1 in which the lamp has in addition amain beam filament disposed near the focus of the mirror and the auxiliarylens has two lower side zones having relatively slight relief patterns forthe dipped beam range, and a central zone having more marked reliefpatterns and serving mainly to provide the major width of the dipped beamand of the main beam, and the front lens having two top lateral zonesformed with relatively slight relief patterns and serving mainly toprovide the intermediate width of the two beams.3. A headlamp as claimed in claim 1 and comprising a secondary parabolicmirror having its own lamp and disposed inside the first named mirror toform a main beam, the auxiliary lens having two lateral zones havingrelatively slight relief patterns to provide the dipped beam range and atop central zone having more marked relief patterns to provide the majorwidth of the dipped beam, and the front lens having two top lateral zonesproviding the intermediate width of the dipped beam and two lower lateralzones serving mainly to control the long-range illumination of the mainbeam, the width thereof being controlled by one of the bottom central zoneof the auxiliary lens and the bottom central zone of the front lens."}
{"WKU":"039315126","Title":"Line data and television transmission","App_Date":"1974-05-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Alan Hugh Kent;Geoffrey Frank Hennell;George Hedley Storm Rokos;Peter Howard Fell","Assignee":"Plessey Handel und Investments A.G.","ICL_Class":"H04B  900","References":"2935558;3208342;3379826;3488586;3731107","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A data transmission system comprising, in combination, a light emittingdiode for producing light signals in response to electrical signalssupplied thereto, an optical fiber transmission line having one enddisposed adjacent said diode to form a junction for receiving andtransmitting said light signals, a light detector of annular configurationsurrounding said transmission line disposed adjacent said junction forcollecting the overspill light emanating from said diode adjacent saidjunction and for converting said collected light to electrical signals andnegative feedback circuit means including an amplifier connected to theoutput of said light detector for applying said collected light electricalsignals to said diode in a predetermined phase relationship therewith tocontrol and linearize the operation of said diode.2. A data transmission system in accordance with claim 1 wherein said lightdetector is a reverse biased silicon junction detector.3. A data transmission system in accordance with claim 2 wherein saidoptical fiber transmission line is of a multimode type."}
{"WKU":"039315134","Title":"Sensing circuit for tape position markers","App_Date":"1974-09-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Lloyd Michael Germain","Assignee":"Ampex Corporation","ICL_Class":"G01J  132","References":"3436553;3566132","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A tape position marker sensor for sensing reflective markers atdifferent positions across a magnetic tape path for a magnetic tapetransport, the sensor comprising:a light source disposed to illuminate the tape path with an illuminationintensity which is dependent upon an illumination command signal;a pair of photo detectors disposed to detect the intensities ofillumination from the light source which are reflected from differentpositions across the width of the tape path and generate light intensitysignals indicative thereof; andcontrol circuit means for generating an illumination command signal inresponse to the light intensity signals to command a light sourceillumination of proper intensity to maintain the light intensity signalfrom the photo detector receiving illumination of least intensity at apredetermined level.2. The tape position marker sensor as set forth in claim 1 above furthercomprising a comparator connected to compare the light intensity signalsfrom the pair of photo detectors and indicate a significant difference inthe compared light intensity signals.3. The tape position marker sensor as set forth in claim 2 above, whereinthe photo detectors are silicon solar cells.4. The tape position marker sensor as set forth in claim 3 above, whereinthe light source includes a single light emitting diode providing all ofthe illumination which is emitted from the light source.5. A tape position marker sensor circuit for detecting the presence of amarker appearing on a length of tape at a marker sense position along atape path therefor, the marker being more reflective than the tape andextending across only a portion of the width of the tape, the tapeposition sensor comprising:an illumination source disposed to illuminate the marker sense positionwith illumination of controlled intensity;an illumination controller connected to sense the intensity of illuminationwhich is reflected from the tape from at least two positions across thewidth of the tape at the marker sense position and control theillumination source to maintain the least intense sensed illumination at apredetermined intensity of sensed illumination in response thereto; anda marker sensor disposed to sense an intensity of illumination reflectedfrom the marker sense position which is different from the intensity ofillumination which is reflected from the tape and generate a tape markeroutput signal in response thereto.6. The tape position marker sensor circuit as set forth in claim 5 abovewherein the illumination controller includes at least two illuminationsensors disposed to sense reflected illumination intensity from at leasttwo different positions across the width of the tape path and generatesensed illumination intensity signals indicative of illumination intensitysensed thereby.7. The tape position marker sensor circuit as set forth in claim 6 above,wherein at least one of the illumination sensors includes an amplificationcircuit with an adjustable gain control.8. The tape position marker sensor circuit as set forth in claim 6 above,wherein the marker sensor includes a comparator connected to compare thesensed intensity signals generated by a pair of illumination sensors andgenerate a tape marker output signal in response to a substantialdifference in the sensed signals.9. The tape position marker sensor circuit as set forth in claim 8 above,wherein each illumination sensor includes a silicon photocell disposedalong the tape path to receive illumination from the illumination sourceonly after reflection from a selected position across the width of thetape path.10. A circuit for sensing a reflective marker occupying a portion of thewidth of a tape passing along a tape path, the circuit comprising:first and second photosensors disposed to receive light reflected offdifferent first and second positions respectively across the width of atape lying in the tape path and generate light intensity signalsindicative of received light intensities;first and second amplifiers connected to receive and amplify the lightintensity signals of the first and second photosensors respectively togenerate first and second amplified light intensity signals, the amplifiedlight intensity signals becoming increasingly negative with increasinglight incident upon the respective photosensors;first and second rectifiers having their cathodes coupled together andtheir anodes coupled to the first and second amplified light intensitysignals respectively;a light source disposed to illuminate the tape path with light thatreflects off first and second positions across the width of a tape lyingin the tape path to the first and second photosensors respectively, thelight source being responsive to the coupled cathodes of the first andsecond rectifiers by increasing the intensity of emitted light as thecoupled cathodes become more positive; anda comparator coupled to compare the amplified light intensity signals andgenerate a tape marker output signal in response to a substantialdifference therebetween.11. The circuit as set forth in claim 10 above, further comprising aresistance coupled between the coupled cathodes of the first and secondrectifiers and a negative voltage source.12. The circuit as set forth in claim 11 above, wherein the light sourcecomprises a third differential amplifier having an output, positive andnegative inputs and a capacitor coupled between the output and thenegative input, the negative input being coupled through a resistance tothe coupled cathodes of the first and second rectifiers and the positiveinput being coupled to a negative reference voltage, the light sourcefurther comprising a PNP transistor having an emitter coupled through aresistance to a positive voltage source, a base coupled to the output ofthe third amplifier and a collector, and a light emitting diode coupled toconduct current from the collector to a negative voltage source.13. The circuit as set forth in claim 11 wherein at least one of said firstand second amplifiers includes circuitry for adjusting the gain thereof tocompensate for differences in positional symmetry of the light source andphotosensors and differences in circuit components.14. The circuit as set forth in claim 11 above, further comprising a third,non-inverting amplifier coupled to drive the anode of the first rectifierin response to the first amplified light intensity signal and a fourth,non-inverting amplifier coupled to drive the anode of the second rectifierin response to the second amplified light intensity signal.15. The circuit as set forth in claim 12 above, wherein the comparatorcomprises a third, differential amplifier having an output providing thetape marker output signal, a negative input coupled through a resistanceto the first amplified light intensity signal and coupled through afeedback resistance to the output and a positive input coupled through aresistance to the second amplified light intensity signal."}
{"WKU":"039315142","Title":"Optical switching system","App_Date":"1974-12-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"David Ross Patterson","Assignee":"RCA Corporation","ICL_Class":"H01J 3912","References":"3440347;3629590;3701903;3803419;3808418","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A switching system for controlling the power provided to a load from asource of power comprising:a transmitter comprising a piezoelectric device coupled to a light source,said light source emitting light in response to the operation of saidpiezoelectric device;a fiber optic light guide positioned to receive on one end thereof thelight emitted from said light source; anda receiver comprising:light detection means positioned to detect the light emitted from saidlight source from the other end of said fiber optic light guide and forproviding a switching signal in response thereto;a switching means connected in circuit with said load and said source ofpower and responsive to a given occurrence of said switching signal forenabling the flow of power to said load and responsive to the occurrenceof said switching signal following said given occurrence for preventingthe flow of power to said load.2. The switching system according to claim 1 wherein said light sourcecomprises a neon lamp.3. The switching system according to claim 1 wherein said light sourcecomprises a light emitting solid state device.4. The switching system according to claim 1 wherein said light detectionmeans comprises a solid state light responsive device.5. The system according to claim 1 wherein said switching means comprises aflip-flop circuit having first and second stable states, said flip-flopcircuit being placed in said first stable state in response to said givenoccurrence of said switching signal and being placed in said second stablestate in response to the occurrence of said switching signal followingsaid given occurrence.6. The switching system according to claim 5 further comprising a solidstate switching device having first and second main electrodes and acontrol electrode, said control electrode being connected in circuit withsaid flip-flop circuit, said main electrodes being connected in circuitwith said load, said switching device exhibiting a low impedance betweensaid main electrodes in response to said first stable state of saidflip-flop circuit and a high impedance between said main electrodes inresponse to said second stable state of said flip-flop circuit.7. A switching system for controlling the power provided to a load from asource of power, said system comprising:a transmitter comprising:"}
{"WKU":"039315150","Title":"Radiant energy detection apparatus","App_Date":"1964-09-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William J. Parkin","Assignee":"Sanders Associates, Inc.","ICL_Class":"H01j 3912;G01j  120","References":"2952779;3143650","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Radiant energy detection apparatus, comprising:radiation responsive, variable impedance detector means having a detectorelement adapted to vary in impedance in response to said radiation forproducing a composite signal representative of a plurality of parametersof said radiant energy in accordance with the variation of a detectorelement impedance with respect to another detector element impedance, saidelement having four input ohmic terminals arranged in a rhombic patternand a centrally disposed output terminal;primary biasing means coupled to said detector means for coupling a pair ofquadrature phased, alternating current primary bias signals through saidelement through said input terminals;load impedance means coupled to said detector means for developing areference signal representative of a selected one of said plurality ofparameters in accordance with the variation of said detector elementimpedance with respect to said load impedance;secondary biasing means coupled to said detector means for coupling asecondary bias signal through said load impedance and said element throughall of said terminals; andcomputer means coupled to said detector and load means for producing, inresponse to said composite and reference signals, an output signalrepresentative of the quotient between said composite and referencesignals, whereby variations in said output signal occur independently ofvariations in said selected one of said plurality of parameters.2. Radiant energy detection apparatus, comprising:radiation responsive, variable impedance detector means having a detectorelement adapted to vary in impedance in response to said radiation forproducing a composite signal representative of a plurality of parametersof said radiant energy in accordance with the variation of a detectorelement impedance with respect to another detector element impedance, saidelement having four input ohmic terminals arranged in a rhombic patternand a centrally disposed output terminal;primary biasing means coupled to said detector means for coupling a pair ofquadrature phased, alternating current primary bias signals through saidelement through said input terminals;load impedance means coupled to said detector means for developing areference signal representative of a selected one of said plurality ofparameters in accordance with the variation of said detector elementimpedance with respect to said load impedance;secondary biasing means coupled to said element and said load means forcoupling a secondary bias signal along a direct current path through saidload means and said element through each of said terminals; andcomputer means coupled to said detector and load means for producing, inresponse to said composite and reference signals, an output signalrepresentative of the quotient between said composite and referencesignals, whereby variations in said output signal occur independently ofvariations in said selected one of said plurality of parameters.3. Radiant energy detection apparatus, comprising:radiation responsive, variable impedance detector means having a detectorelement adapted to vary in impedance in response to said radiation forproducing a composite signal representative of a plurality of parametersof said radiant energy in accordance with the variation of a detectorelement impedance with respect to another detector element impedance;primary alternating current biasing means coupled to said detector meansfor coupling a primary bias signal through said element through said inputterminals;load impedance means coupled to said detector means for developing areference signal representative of a selected one of said plurality ofparameters in accordance with the variation of said detector elementimpedance with respect to said load impedance;secondary alternating current biasing means coupled to said element andsaid load means for coupling a secondary bias signal through said loadmeans and said element through all of said terminals; andcomputer means coupled to said detector and load means for producing, inresponse to said composite and reference signals, an output signalrepresentative of the quotient between said composite and referencesignals, whereby variations in said output signal occur independently ofvariations in said selected one of said plurality of parameters.4. Radiant energy detection apparatus, comprising:radiation responsive, variable impedance means having a detector elementwith four input ohmic bias terminals arranged in a peripheral equidistantpattern and an output ohmic terminal centrally disposed with respect tosaid pattern, said element being adapted to vary in impedance in responseto said radiation for producing a composite signal representative of aplurality of parameters of said radiant energy in accordance with thevariation of a detector element impedance with respect to another detectorelement impedance;primary biasing means coupled to said element through said input terminalsfor coupling a pair of alternating current primary bias signals throughsaid element, said bias signals being in phase quadrature and each saidbias signal being coupled through a pair of diagonally opposed inputterminals;load impedance means coupled to said element through said output terminalfor developing a reference signal representative of a selected one of saidplurality of parameters in accordance with the variation of said detectorelement impedance with respect to said load impedance;secondary biasing means coupled to said element through all of saidterminals, said primary biasing and said load impedance means for couplinga secondary bias signal there through;computer means coupled to said detector and load means through said outputterminal for producing, in response to said composite and referencesignals, an output signal representative of the quotient between saidcomposite and reference signals, whereby variations in said output signaloccur independently of variations in said selected one of said pluralityof parameters; andbalancing means coupled to said biasing means between said element and saidbiasing means for each said bias signal and including a variable voltagecontrol for producing a variable reference voltage level to balance saidbias and output signals with respect to said reference level.5. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein: said detector element includesquadrant sectors.6. The apparatus of claim 5 wherein: said detector element is aphotoconductor."}
{"WKU":"039315169","Title":"Moving particle composition analyzer","App_Date":"1974-08-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James C. Administrator of the National Aeronautics and Space Fletcher;Siegfried O. Auer","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"H01J 3934","References":"3715590","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Apparatus for enabling an analysis to be performed of the composition ofmicroscopic particles moving relative to the apparatus comprising acapacitor having: a front electrode upon which the particles impact, aback electrode, and a solid dielectric sandwiched between the front andback electrodes, said front electrode and the dielectric together having athickness such that an impinging particle can penetrate them; means forbiasing said front electrode negatively relative to said back electrode,whereby an impinging particle results in positive ions of the impactingparticle being ejected from the front electrode, means for providing anelectric field in front of the front electrode to draw the ejectedpositive ions derived from the front electrode away from the frontelectrode, and a positive ion detector located to be responsive to theions drawn from the front electrode.2. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said front and back electrodes and saiddielectric are arcuately shaped as concentric peripheral segments ofdifferent spheres having a common center and different radii, saiddetector being located approximately at the common center.3. The apparatus of claim 2 wherein said means for providing the electricfield includes a metal grid positioned in front of the front electrode,said grid being pervious to the particles and ions, said grid beingarcuately shaped as a peripheral segment of a further sphere having thesame center as the common center and a radius less than the radii of theelectrodes and dielectric.4. The apparatus of claim 1 further including means for analyzing thetransit time between the front electrode and detector of differentpositive ions resulting from the same impacting particles.5. The apparatus of claim 4 further including means connected to thecapacitor for deriving a start signal in response to formation of thespark, wherein said means for analyzing includes means for instigating atime base in response to the start signal.6. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said means for providing the electricfield includes a metal grid positioned in front of the electrode andpervious to the particles and ions, means for biasing the grid negativelyrelative to the front electrode, and means for biasing the ion detector sothat substantially all ions passing through the grid travel to thedetector.7. The apparatus of claim 6 wherein the means for biasing the ion detectorestablishes an ion drift region between the grid and detector.8. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein the electrodes and dielectric arefabricated from compositions other than those normally expected in theparticles to be analyzed.9. The apparatus of claim 8 wherein the particles are micrometeoroids, theback electrode is P-doped germanium and the dielectric is an oxide ofgermanium.10. The apparatus of claim 9 wherein the front electrode is a noble metalthin film.11. The apparatus of claim 1 further including means positioned between thefront electrode and detector for deflecting ejected positive ions havingdifferent masses by differing amounts.12. The apparatus of claim 11 wherein the deflecting means includes a pairof spaced, arcuate capacitor plates having a region between them throughwhich the positive ions travel.13. The apparatus of claim 11 wherein the electrodes and dielectric areflat and lie in parallel planes."}
{"WKU":"039315177","Title":"Field emission electron gun","App_Date":"1975-01-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Vincent J. Coates;Leonard M. Welter","Assignee":"American Optical Corporation","ICL_Class":"H01J 37285","References":"3141993;3191028","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a charged particle microprobe system including a housing defining avacuum chamber, a field emission tip disposed in said chamber forgenerating said charged particles, electrode means for establishingfocusing and accelerating fields for forming a beam of said chargedparticles and a shield electrode disposed such that said field emissiontip is within the region of said shield and voltage means connected tosaid electrode means, said shield electrode and said field emission tipfor supplying electrical potential to said electrode means to establishsaid focusing and accelerating field, the improvement comprising a memberdisposed generally radially about said field emission tip andsubstantially coextensive therewith intermediate said tip and said shield,means connecting said member to said voltage means to establish a fieldfor attracting stray particles in the region contiguous said fieldemission tip.2. The improvement accroding to claim 1 wherein said member issubstantially cylindrical in shape and axially aligned with said tip.3. The improvement according to claim 2 wherein said member is composed ofa material substantially penetrable by said particles.4. The improvement according to claim 3 wherein said member is screen-like.5. The improvement according to claim 1 including means disposed in saidshield region for subliming a layer of getter material on said shieldwhereby said stray particles are captured thereon.6. The improvement according to claim 5 wherein said sublimation meansincludes a filament of said getter material located within said region.7. The improvement according to claim 6 wherein said getter material istitanium."}
{"WKU":"039315185","Title":"Optical fiber power taps employing mode coupling means","App_Date":"1974-11-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Stewart Edward Miller","Assignee":"Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated","ICL_Class":"G02B  514","References":"3058021;3274392;3350654;3412255;3508589;3773289;3777149;3801389","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An arrangement for tapping optical power from an intermediate portion ofa multimode optical fiber waveguide without requiring that the fiber beterminated or broken, said fiber including a guiding region in which theoptical power is essentially confined and a cladding medium surroundingthe guiding region, said arrangement being characterized by:means disposed at a first intermediate longitudinal position along saidfiber for enhancing mode coupling from lower order modes in said fiber tohigher order modes in said fiber;a body of dielectric material disposed in a coupling relationship laterallyoffset from a second intermediate longitudinal position along said fiberspaced along the wave path from said first longitudinal position forcoupling optical power out of said guiding region of said fiber, said bodyhaving an index of refraction which is approximately equal to or greaterthan the index of refraction of the medium surrounding said guiding regionof said fiber; anda photodetector responsive to the wavelength of the optical signal to bepropagated through said fiber and disposed adjacent to said dielectricbody, said photodetector being oriented to intercept the optical powercoupled out of said guiding region of said fiber by said dielectric body.2. The tapping arrangement of claim 1 in which said mode coupling meanscomprises at least one corrugated plate which is pressed against saidfirst intermediate longitudinal position of said fiber to periodicallydeform said guiding region of said fiber, said deformation having aspatial periodicity equal to the beat wavelength between a pair of guidedmodes in said fiber.3. An arrangement for tapping optical power from an intermediate portion ofan optical fiber waveguide without requiring that the fiber be terminatedor broken, said fiber comprising an inner core formed of a low opticalloss material in which the optical power is essentially confined, saidinner core being surrounded by an outer cladding having an index ofrefraction less than that of said inner core, said arrangement beingcharacterized by:means disposed at a first intermediate longitudinal position along saidfiber for coupling a portion of the optical power in said fiber from saidinner core to said outer cladding;a body of dielectric material disposed in contact with a secondintermediate longitudinal position along said fiber spaced along the wavepath from said first longitudinal position for coupling optical power outof said outer cladding of said fiber, said body having an index ofrefraction which is approximately equal to or greater than the index ofrefraction of said outer cladding of said fiber; anda photodetector responsive to the wavelength of the optical signal to bepropagated through said fiber and disposed adjacent to said dielectricbody, said photodetector being oriented to intercept the optical powercoupled out of said outer cladding of said fiber by said dielectric body.4. The tapping arrangement of claim 3 in which mode coupling meanscomprises at least one corrugated plate which is pressed against saidfirst intermediate longitudinal position of said fiber to periodicallydeform said inner core of said fiber, said deformation having a spatialperiodicity equal to the beat wavelength between a core mode and acladding mode in said fiber."}
{"WKU":"039315193","Title":"Field emission electron gun","App_Date":"1975-01-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Vincent J. Coates;Leonard M. Welter","Assignee":"American Optical Corporation","ICL_Class":"H01J 37285","References":"3141993;3191028;3602710","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a charged particle microprobe system including a field emission gunhaving a housing defining a vacuum chamber, a field emission tip disposedin said chamber for generating said charged particles, electrode means forestablishing focusing and accelerating fields for forming a beam of saidcharged particles, voltage means connected to said electrode means andsaid field emission tip for supplying electrical potential to saidelectrode means to establish said focusing and accelerating fields, anextraction electrode in juxtaposition to said tip and voltage meansconnected to said tip and extraction electrode for developing an electricfield for generating said charged particles, the improvement comprising anelectrical insulator member disposed intermediate said extractionelectrode and said focusing and accelerating electrode means, saidinsulator member having a lateral extent at least as great as the lateralextent of at least one of said extraction electrode and said focusing andaccelerating electrode means and having a centrally located aperturealigned with said beam of charged particles whereby said vacuum chamber isdivided by said insulator substantially forming an extraction electrodechamber and a focusing and accelerating electrode chamber.2. The improvement according to claim 1 wherein said insulator is adaptedto be mounted on said electrode means for focusing and accelerating saidcharged particles.3. The improvement according to claim 2 wherein said insulator is adaptedto receive in mounting relationship said field electrode."}
{"WKU":"039315207","Title":"Sample positioning apparatus","App_Date":"1974-11-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Thomas H. Bell;Charles H. Johnson, Jr.;Robert L. Lane;Bradley E. Martin;William H. Tyree","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the United States Energy","ICL_Class":"G01T  100","References":"3270202;3487219;3725659","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Apparatus for use in alpha-particle counting by moving samples towardand away from the ends of photomultiplier tubes comprising a reciprocallymovable base member, a platform adjacent said base member, sample holdermeans carried by said platform for retaining and positioning samples to becounted; a rotatable link member interconnecting said base member and saidplatform for reciprocal movement of said platform with said base memberand for translating said platform and sample holder means generallyperpendicularly with respect to said base member concomitant withreciprocal movement of said base member to present samples into closeproximity to said ends of the photomultiplier tubes and remove themtherefrom, guide means for positioning and guiding said base member duringreciprocal movement thereof, and a stop and guide member in the path ofmovement of a portion of said platform for terminating the reciprocalmovement of said platform and effecting substantially straight movement ofsaid platform and sample holders toward and away from said photomultipliertube ends.2. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said sample holder means comprises asample holder, a threaded shaft rigidly engaged to said sample holder,said threaded shaft supported within a tapped bore on said platform toselectively set the height of said sample holder from said platform; guidemeans projecting from said platform adjacent the periphery of said sampleholder for guiding said holder and positioning said holder in coaxialalignment with one of said photomultiplier tube ends.3. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said rotatable link member comprises apair of spaced apart links, each of said links being from about 0.50 toabout 0.75 inches long, and a swivelable pin interconnecting said platformand said link at one end of each of said links and another swivelable pininterconnecting said base member and said link at an opposite end of eachof said links.4. The apparatus of claim 1 together with selectively adjustable means forpositioning said platform in spaced relation from said base.5. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said photomultiplier tubes are housedin a walled enclosure including back and front walls, said front wall hasan opening for said apparatus, said reciprocal motion of said base memberis into and out of said opening in said front wall, said stop and guidemember in the path of movement of a portion of said platform comprisessaid back wall of said enclosure, roller is rotatably mounted on saidplatform for coacting with said back wall to translate linear reciprocalmotion of said base member to generally perpendicular reciprocal motion ofsaid platform.6. The apparatus of claim 5 wherein said enclosure houses a plurality ofphotomultiplier tubes disposed along the reciprocating movement path ofsaid base and said platform.7. The apparatus of claim 1 together with a locking plate at a thickness offrom about one eighth to about one fourth inch selected from the groupconsisting of polyethylene and polypropylene disposed on the underside ofsaid platform intermediate said rotatable link members.8. The apparatus of claim 7 together with retaining means interconnectingsaid platform and said base member biasing said platform toward said basemember."}
{"WKU":"039315215","Title":"Dual spectrum infrared fire detector","App_Date":"1973-06-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert J. Cinzori","Assignee":"Hughes Aircraft Company","ICL_Class":"G01J  100","References":"2692982;3476938;3665440;3792275","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An electrical detection system responsive to a fire or explosion forgenerating an output signal, including in combination:a. long wavelength channel means responsive to radiant energy in apredetermined spectral band above about six microns of electromagneticradiation and received from a fire or explosion for generating a firstlogic signal,b. short wavelength channel means responsive to radiant energy in apredetermined spectral band less than about two microns ofelectro-magnetic radiation and received from said fire or explosion forgenerating a second logic signal, andc. output gate means coupled to receive both said first and second logicsignals and responsive thereto to generate said output control signalwhich may be further processed to control the suppression of said fire orexplosion.2. The system defined in claim 1 wherein said long wavelength channel meansis responsive to radiation in the 7-30 micron range and said shortwavelength channel means is responsive to radiation in the 0.7-1.2 micronrange.3. The system defined in claim 1 wherein said long wavelength channel meansincludes:a. a far infrared radiation detector connected at the input of said channelmeans and responsive to fire or explosion induced changes in temperaturefor generating a low level detection signal, andb. a frequency compensating amplifier coupled between said far infraredradiation detector and said output gate means and having a gain versusfrequency characteristic which substantially compensates for the roll offin the gain versus frequency characteristic of said detector, therebymaintaining a substantially constant signal gain between the input of saiddetector and the output of said compensating amplifier over apredetermined frequency range.4. The system defined in claim 1 wherein said short wavelength channelmeans includes a radiation detector sensitive only to radiation less thanabout 1.2 microns.5. The system defined in claim 1 wherein:a. said long wavelength channel means includes a thermal detectorresponsive to radiation in the far infrared region of the electromagneticfrequency spectrum, andb. said short wavelength channel means includes a silicon photodetectorresponsive to short wavelength radiation in the near infrared region ofthe electromagnetic frequency spectrum, whereby short wavelength and longwavelength radiation changes are electrically compared before an outputsignal is generated.6. The system defined in claim 1 wherein said output gate means is adigital logic gate connected to drive a monostable multivibrator or otherdriver circuit, whereby said multivibrator or other suitable drivercircuit is operative to generate an output pulse for ultimatelycontrolling a fire suppression mechanism.7. The system defined in claim 1 wherein:a. said long wavelength channel means includes a thermal detectorresponsive to radiation source temperature changes for generating anoutput detection signal,b. a frequency compensating amplifier connected to the output of saidthermal detector and having a gain versus frequency characteristic whichsubstantially compensates for the roll off in the gain versus frequencycharacteristic of said thermal detector, whereby the overall gain of saidthermal detector and said frequency compensating amplifier issubstantially constant over a predetermined frequency range, andc. said short wavelength radiation channel means includes a semiconductivephotodetector for generating an output detection signal proportional tothe photon induced carrier recombination therein, whereby both of theabove said detectors must generate an output signal in order to produce acorresponding output signal at the output of said output gate means.8. The system defined in claim 7 wherein:a. said thermal detector is a thermopile detector responsive to sourcetemperature changes induced by radiation in the far infrared region of theelectromagnetic frequency spectrum, andb. said photodetector is a silicon photodetector responsive to photonenergy from radiation in the near infrared region of the electromagneticfrequency spectrum.9. The system defined in claim 8 wherein said output gate means includesthreshold means for providing a predetermined threshold level thereinwhich must be exceeded by said first and second logic signals in order togenerate said output signal.10. An electrical system responsive to radiation generated by a fire orexplosion including, in combination:a. an optical filter for passing electromagnetic radiation in apredetermined wavelength range of the electromagnetic frequency spectrum,b. a thermopile detector optically coupled to said filter and responsive toambient temperature changes induced by infrared radiation above 6 micronsin wavelength and received from said filter for generating an outputsignal, andc. means for processing said output signal from said thermopile detectorand for utilizing same to control the suppression of said fire orexplosion/./, said signal processing means includes a frequencycompensating amplifier stage coupled to said thermopile detector and whichcompensates for the roll off in responsivity of said thermopile detector.11. The system defined in Claim 10 which further includes:a. a second optical filter for passing infrared radiation in anotherpredetermined wavelength range of the electromagnetic frequency spectrum,b. a photon detector coupled to said second optical filter for generating aphoton energy dependent output voltage, andc. gate means within said signal processing means for comparing the outputsignals of said thermopile and photon detectors and generating an outputcontrol signal upon the coincidence of said detector output signals abovea preestablished threshold.12. The system defined in claim 11 which further includes amplifier meanscoupled between said photon detector and said gate means for providingappropriate signal amplification for said photon energy.13. The system defined in claim 11 wherein said first named optical filterpasses radiation wavelengths between about 7 and 30 microns and saidsecond optical filter passes radiation wavelengths between about 0.7and1.2 microns.14. A detection system for generating an output signal in response to afire or an explosion and comprising: long wavelength channel meansincluding a thermopile detector responsive to radiant energy in apredetermined spectral band above 6 microns wavelength of electromagneticradiation and received from said fire or explosion, said long wavelengthchannel means further including a frequency compensating amplifier coupledto said detector and having a gain versus frequency characteristicselected to compensate for the roll off in responsivity of said thermopiledetector and to thereby provide a substantially constant sensitivity toradiation received in a predetermined frequency range, and said longwavelength channel means further including means coupled to said frequencycompensating amplifier for generating a logic signal capable of triggeringmeans to suppress or control said fire or explosion.15. The system defined in claim 14 wherein said long wavelength channelmeans is responsive to radiation in the 7-30 micron wavelength range.16. The system defined in Claim 15 wherein:a. said thermopile detector is a far infrared radiation detector connectedat the input of said long wavelength channel means and responsive to fireor explosion induced changes in incident radiation for generating arelatively low level frequency dependent detection voltage, andb. frequency compensating amplifier means coupled between said far infraredradiation detector and an output gate means and having again-versus-frequency characteristic which substantially compensates forthe roll off in the gain-versus-frequency characteristic of said detector,thereby maintaining a substantially constant signal gain between the inputof said detector and the output of said frequency compensating amplifiermeans over a predetermined frequency range.17. The system defined in claim 16 wherein said far infrared radiationdetector is responsive to radiation in the 7-30 micron wavelength range.18. A process for detecting fires or explosions which includes the stepsof:a. sensing changes in incident short wavelength energy in the 0.7 - 1.2micron range and resulting from said fire or explosion,b. simultaneously sensing changes in incident long wavelength energy in the7 - 30 micron range and resulting from said fire or explosion, andc. electrically comparing the changes in incident short wavelength energyand long wavelength energy to thereby generate an output fire or explosionsuppression signal once said changes simultaneously exceed a predeterminedthreshold level.19. The process defined in claim 18 which further includes:a. generating a frequency-dependent signal voltage in response to changesin signal voltage, said long wavelength energy, andb. amplifying said signal voltage in a manner to compensate forfrequency-dependent amplitude variations in said signal voltage."}
{"WKU":"039315223","Title":"Period meter for reactors","App_Date":"1974-09-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Gordon K. Rusch","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the United States Energy","ICL_Class":"G01T  300","References":"3038847","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property orprivilege is claimed are defined as follows:1. In a device for developing a reactor scram signal in response to areactor period T less than a specific value, the device including meansfor measuring the neutron flux density of the reactor and developing afirst output signal which is a function of the neutron flux density, adifferentiator coupled to the means for measuring for diffentiating thefirst output signal to develop a second output signal and a firstcomparator coupled to the differentiator and being responsive to thesecond output signal greater than a particular value to develop a firstalarm signal, an apparatus for reducing noise induced scrams comprising:a second comparator coupled to the first comparator and the means formeasuring and being responsive to first output signal greater than apredetermined value and coincidentally the first alarm signal to develop asecond alarm signal, a first gate circuit coupled to the means formeasuring, a first signal storage circuit coupled to said first gatecircuit, a timing circuit for developing periodically a first timingsignal coupled to said first gate circuit, said first gate circuit beingresponsive to said first timing signal to couple the first output signalto said first signal storage circuit, said first signal storage circuitacting to continuously develop a third output signal equal to the firstoutput signal at the instant said first output signal is coupled to saidfirst storage circuit plus a particular quantity with said third outputsignal being updated each time said first output signal is coupled to saidfirst signal storage circuit in response to said first timing signal, athird comparator coupled to the means for measuring and said first signalstorage circuit and being responsive to the first output signal greaterthan said third output signal to develop a third alarm signal, and an ORgate coupled to said second and third comparators and being responsive toan alarm signal developed thereby to develop a reactor scram signal.2. The device of claim 1 wherein said means for measuring includes meansfor developing an I signal whose value is proportional to the neutron fluxdensity of the reactor, and a log N amplifier responsive to said I signalto develop the first output signal proportional to the natural log of saidI signal, said first timing circuit developing said first timing signalperiodically every time interval t, said particular quantity being equalto t.gamma./T where .gamma. is a constant associated with said log Namplifier.3. The device of claim 2 wherein said means for developing an I signal is aneutron sensitive ionization chamber used in the current mode and whereinsaid predetermined value to which said first output signal is compared bysaid second comparator corresponds to the value of said I signal beingbetween the range of 10.sup.-.sup.7 and 10.sup.-.sup.4 amps.4. The device of claim 3 wherein said predetermined value corresponds tothe value of said I signal being about 10.sup.-.sup.5 amps.5. The device of claim 1 further including a second gate circuit coupled tothe means for measuring and said timing circuit, a second signal storagecircuit coupled to said second gate circuit, said timing circuit furtherdeveloping periodically a second timing signal in the intervals betweeneach of said first timing signals, said second gate circuit beingresponsive to said second timing signals to couple the first output signalto said second signal storage circuit, said second signal storage circuitacting to continuously develop a fourth output signal equal to the firstoutput signal at the instant said first output signal is coupled to saidsecond storage circuit plus said particular quantity with said fourthoutput signal being updated each time said first output signal is coupledto said second signal storage circuit in response to said second timingsignal, and a fourth comparator coupled to the means for measuring andsaid second storage circuit and being responsive to the first outputsignal greater than said fourth output signal to develop a fourth alarmsignal, said OR gate being coupled to said fourth comparator and beingresponsive to said fourth alarm signal to develop said reactor scramsignal."}
{"WKU":"039315231","Title":"Activation neutron detector","App_Date":"1973-11-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Tristan Silovanovich Ambardanishvili;Mikhail Alexandrovich Kolomiitsev;Tamara Yakovlevna Zakharina;Vakhtang Justinovich Dundua;Ninel Vladimirovna Chikhladze","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"G01t  300","References":"3471699;3516939","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An activation neutron detector in the form of a molded and curedcomposition, comprising a polycondensation resin inert to neutrons, and amaterial capable of being activated by neutrons to form a radioactiveisotope, and distributed over the entire volume of said resin, saidmaterial consisting of at least two chemical elements, each formingradioactive isotopes that have different radiation energies whenspontaneously disintegrating under the effect of neutrons as a result ofactivation, said elements being in the form of chemically free substances,of substances having said elements in a bound form, or a combinationthereof.2. The detector as defined in claim 1, wherein said material is in the formof oxides of neutron-sensitive elements having a melting point above300.degree.C.3. The detector as defined in claim 2, wherein said material is alumina.4. The detector as defined in claim 2, wherein said material is magnesiumoxide.5. The detector as defined in claim 1, wherein said material is a powder ofmercuric sulphide.6. The detector as defined in claim 5, wherein the content by weight of thecomponents in said composition is as follows:"}
{"WKU":"039315240","Title":"Scanning apparatus","App_Date":"1974-10-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Carlos B. Herrin","Assignee":"Monarch Marking Systems, Inc.","ICL_Class":"G06K  710","References":"3413447;3474234;3735142","Claims":"I claim:1. Apparatus for scanning a concave coded record, comprising: a rotorhaving a rotational axis, means carried by the rotor for illuminating thecoded record, a light receptor in alignment with the rotational axis,means carried by the rotor for receiving light reflected from the concaverecord inwardly toward the rotational axis and for bending the reflectedlight toward the light receptor, and means for driving the rotor to scanthe concave record.2. Apparatus as defined in claim 1, wherein the means for receiving andbending the reflected light includes a mirror, lens means disposed betweenthe mirror and the light receptor, and a mask having an aperture disposedbetween the lens means and the light receptor.3. Apparatus as defined in claim 1, wherein the means for receiving andbending the reflected light includes a mirror, a mask disposed between themirror and the light receptor and having an aperture disposed along therotational axis, lens means disposed between the mirror and the mask forimaging reflected light on the mask, and means for enabling adjustment ofthe position of the mirror to focus the image on the mask.4. Apparatus as defined in claim 1, wherein the means for receiving andbending the reflected light includes a mirror.5. Apparatus as defined in claim 1 and adapted to read the coded recordwhile on the inside surface of a tube, a converging tip for facilitatingentry of the light receiving and bending means into the tube, and meansfor rotatably mounting the tip on the rotor.6. Apparatus as defined in claim 1, wherein the light receptor isstationarily mounted.7. Apparatus as defined in claim 1, wherein the rotor comprises anelongated tube, ball bearings for rotatably mounting the tube, the lightreceiving and bending means being disposed in the tube, and an opening inthe tube through which the reflected light passes to the light receivingand bending means.8. Apparatus as defined in claim 7, wherein the light receptor isstationarily mounted.9. Hand-held apparatus for scanning a concave coded record, comprising: aframe having a handle, a rotor mounted by the frame and having arotational axis, an electric motor drivingly connected to the rotor, meanscarried by the rotor for illuminating the coded record, a stationary lightreceptor mounted by the frame in alignment with the rotational axis, andmeans carried by the rotor for receiving light reflected from the concaverecord inwardly toward the rotational axis and for bending the reflectedlight toward the light receptor.10. Hand-held apparatus as defined in claim 9, wherein the rotor comprisesan elongated tube, the light receiving and bending means comprises amirror disposed in the tube, lens means disposed in the tube between themirror and the light receptor, and a mask mounted in the tube between thelens means and the light receptor and having a light aperture disposedalong the rotational axis.11. Apparatus for scanning a concave coded record, comprising: a frame, arotor having a rotational axis, means for rotatably mounting the rotor onthe frame, an electric motor mounted on the frame, means for drivinglyconnecting the electric motor and the rotor, the rotor comprising anelongated tube, the tube having a first opening disposed radially outwardof the rotational axis and a second opening disposed in alignment with therotational axis, lens means mounted in the tube, a mirror mounted in thetube, means carried by the rotor for illuminating the coded record, alight receptor aligned with the second opening, the lens means beingdisposed between the mirror and the light receptor, the mirror and thefirst opening being in optical alignment relative to the rotational axisand the mirror being disposed to reflect the light from the coded recordalong the rotational axis onto the light receptor.12. Apparatus as defined in claim 11, wherein the light receptor is mountedon the frame.13. Apparatus as defined in claim 11, wherein the light receptor as aphotoamplifier.14. Apparatus as defined in claim 11, including means for focusing the lensmeans.15. Apparatus for scanning a concave coded record, comprising: a frame, arotor having a rotational axis, means for rotatably mounting the rotor onthe frame, an electric motor mounted on the frame, means for drivinglyconnecting the electric motor and the rotor, the rotor comprising anelongated tube, the tube having a first opening disposed radially outwardof the rotational axis and a second opening disposed in alignment with therotational axis, lens means mounted in the tube, a mirror carried by therotor, means for illuminating the coded record, a light receptor alignedwith the second opening, the lens means being disposed between the mirrorand the light receptor, the mirror and the first opening being in opticalalignment relative to the rotational axis and the mirror being disposed toreflect the light from the coded record along the rotational axis onto thelight receptor.16. Apparatus as defined in claim 15, wherein the light receptor is mountedon the frame.17. Apparatus as defined in claim 15, wherein the light receptor is aphotoamplifier.18. Apparatus as defined in claim 15, including means for focusing the lensmeans.19. Apparatus for scanning a concave coded record, comprising: a frame, arotor mounted by the frame and having a rotational axis, an electric motordrivingly connected to the rotor, means for illuminating the coded record,a stationary light receptor mounted by the frame in alignment with therotational axis, a mirror carried by the rotor for receiving lightreflected from the concave record inwardly toward the rotational axis andfor bending the reflected light toward the light receptor, and a lenscarried by the rotor and disposed between the mirror and the lightreceptor.20. Apparatus for scanning a concave coded record, comprising: a frame, arotor mounted by the frame and having a rotational axis, an electric motordrivingly connected to the rotor, means for illuminating the coded record,a stationary light receptor mounted by the frame in alignment with therotational axis, a mirror carried by the rotor for receiving lightreflected from the concave record inwardly toward the rotational axis andfor bending the reflected light toward the light receptor, a lens carriedby the rotor and disposed between the mirror and the light receptor, and amask carried by the rotor between the lens means and the light receptorand having a light aperture disposed along the rotational axis."}
{"WKU":"039315258","Title":"Detection of blemishes in surfaces","App_Date":"1973-09-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Graham Morley Clarke","Assignee":"Ferranti, Limited","ICL_Class":"G01N 2132","References":"2806401;3061731;3396281;3549264;3572947;3675016;3723747","Claims":"What I claim is:1. A detector of blemishes in a surface, the detector and surface beingmovable relative to one another, the detector including a transmittingstation comprising a source of a beam of electromagnetic radiation,focussing means operable to focus the beam to a spot at the surface, thespot having an area of the same order of magnitude as the smallest blemishto be detected, and scanning means operable to cause the beam to scan thesurface transversely to the direction of said relative motion, and areceiving station comprising radiation detection means inside a lightintegrating enclosure having an aperture extending across the width of thescan to collect light substantially only specularly reflected from saidsurface, and diffusing means mounted in, and coextensive with, saidaperture, and through which said reflected light passes, the radiationdetection means being responsive to a reduction in the level of diffusedlight in the enclosure to provide an indication of a blemish at thecorresponding position of the beam.2. A detector of blemishes as claimed in claim 1 in which the radiationdiffusing means is disposed so as to intercept that portion of the beamspecularly reflected from the surface.3. A detector of blemishes as claimed in claim 2 in which the transmittingand receiving stations are located adjacent each other.4. A detector of blemishes as claimed in claim 1 in which the source of thebeam of radiation is a laser.5. A detector of blemishes as claimed in claim 1 in which the radiation isin the visible part of the electromagnetic spectrum.6. A detector of blemishes as claimed in claim 5 in which the radiationdiffusing means comprises a sheet of translucent material arranged toextend substantially normally to the plane of the beam emanating from thesurface.7. A detector of blemishes as claimed in claim 1 in which the enclosurecontaining the detection means comprises side walls which extend alongopposite sides of said diffusing means and generally parallel to thedirection of scan of the beam, and end walls entending between said sidewalls at each end of the diffusing means and generally perpendicular tothe direction of scan of the beam, said end walls having internal surfacesarranged to reflect diffused radiation incident thereupon towards saiddetection means.8. A detector of blemishes as claimed in claim 7 in which the detectionmeans is arranged within the enclosure so as to receive only radiationreflected from said end walls.9. A detector of blemishes as claimed in claim 7 in which the enclosurecontains further radiation reflective surfaces, disposed between said endwalls and said detection means, arranged so as to direct radiationincident thereon towards the detection means.10. A detector of blemishes as claimed in claim 9 in which said furtherreflective surfaces comprise parts of a conic section, said detectionmeans being arranged substantially at the focus of the section."}
{"WKU":"039315266","Title":"Process and a device for measuring transmission factors","App_Date":"1974-04-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Aime Marie Berthon","Assignee":"Aerazur Constructions Aeronautiques","ICL_Class":"G01H 2126","References":"2427013;3091690;3233781;3447370;3629589;3698820;3720813;3745350;3746452;3788745","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A device for measuring the atmospheric transmission factor between twopoints defining a fixed measurement path of predetermined distance and fordetermining the intensity of the ambient light, comprising:an emitter of light impulses located at one end of said measurement path,a main photoreceiving cell located at the other end of said measurementpath for receiving light from said emitter through said measurement pathand producing a first electrical signal,an auxiliary photoreceiving cell for receiving light from said emitter andambient light and producing a second electrical signal, said main andauxiliary photoreceiving cells having linear and stable dynamic gaincharacteristics,a first mirror having a first focus,a second mirror having a second focus, said emitter being located at thefocus of said first mirror and directing a substantially parallel lightbeam towards said second mirror, said main photoreceiving cell beinglocated at the focus of said mirror, said auxiliary photoreceiving cellbeing located substantially at the apex of said first mirror whereby saidauxiliary photoreceiving cell receives ambient light through a largeaperture,filtering neams connected to said auxiliary photoreceiving cell for passinga d.c. signal component in said second electrical signal which isrepresentative of the ambient light and,means connected to said main and auxiliary photoreceiving cells fordividing a pulsed signal component in said first electrical signal by apulsed signal component in said second electrical signal to produce anoutput signal which is representative of said transmission factor.2. A device according to claim 1, wherein said emitter of light impulses isan electro-luminescent diode emitting in the near infrared and said mainand auxiliary photoreceiving cells are receiving diodes sensitive to thewave length emitted by said emitter.3. A device according to claim 1, wherein said means for dividingcomprises:a first ground clamping circuit connected to the output of said auxiliaryphotoreceiving cell for passing a pulsed signal component referenced toground,a hybrid multiplier connected to receive as one input the output of saidfirst ground clamping circuit and as the other input a signal representinga binary number, said hybrid multiplier generating an output signalproportional to the product of the pulsed signal component from said firstground clamping circuit and said binary number,a counter connected to receive the pulsed signal component from said firstground clamping circuit for accumulating a count,a second ground clamping circuit connected to the output of said mainphotoreceiving cell for passing a pulsed signal component reference toground,a comparator having first and second input terminals, the outputs of saidhybrid multiplier and said second ground clamping circuit being connectedto said first and second input terminals, respectively, of saidcomparator,a shift register connected to receive the count accumulated by said counterin response to an output signal of said comparator which provides atransfer order to said shift register, the output of said shift registerbeing connected to said other input of said hybrid multiplier as a resultof which at the output of said shift register a digital value is obtaineddirectly, this value representing the transmission factor between saidemitter and said main photoreceiving cell.4. A device according to claim 3, wherein said filtering means is anaverage value filter connected to the output of the auxiliaryphotoreceiving cell and providing a signal proportional to the ambientlight.5. A device according to claim 4, further comprising computing means fordetermining the digital value of the visibility as a function at least ofthe digital value of the transmission factor and the signal proportionalto the ambient light.6. A device according to claim 5, wherein said computing means comprises aplurality of memories, and a validation circuit, one of said memoriesbeing selectively validated at a given instant by a signal coming fromsaid validation circuit receiving said ambient light signal, the digitalsignal of the transmission factor being transmitted to the address inputof the memory validated which contains the value of the correspondingvisibility.7. A device according to claim 6, further comprising interface means forproviding at least the values of the transmission factor of the ambientlight and of the visibility.8. A device according to claim 5, wherein said computing means receives asanother parameter an electric signal corresponding to the lighting powerof light sources such as landing lights on a runway."}
{"WKU":"039315274","Title":"Ignition circuit for vehicle occupant protecting system","App_Date":"1974-07-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kazuo Oishi;Hideaki Sasaya;Akihiro Kobayashi;Takashi Yamada","Assignee":"Nippon Soken, Inc.","ICL_Class":"H01H 3514","References":"3622974;3720915","Claims":"We claim:1. An ignition circuit for a vehicle occupant protecting system comprising:a heating element for actuating by the action of heat generation thereof anoccupant protecting system installed in a vehicle;first normally closed switch means connected in parallel with said heatingelement and adapted to open in response to a collision of a vehicle;second normally open switch means connected in series with a parallelcircuit of said heating element and said first switch means, means forclosing said second switch means in response to a collision of saidvehicle, anda power source for supplying electric power to said heating element throughsaid second normally open switch means upon the closing thereof when acollision occurs.2. An ignition circuit according to claim 1, wherein each of said first andsecond switch means comprise contact type switch means.3. An ignition circuit according to claim 1, wherein each of said first andsecond switch means comprise contactless type switch means.4. An ignition circuit according to claim 1, wherein said heating elementis a filament.5. An ignition circuit according to claim 2, wherein said heating elementcomprises a filament.6. An ignition circuit according to claim 3, wherein said heating elementcomprises a filament.7. An ignition circuit according to claim 6, wherein said contactless typeswitch means comprises a transistor.8. An ignition circuit according to claim 1 further comprising:a fault detecting circuit for detecting a fault in at least either one ofsaid first and second switch means and for generating a fault detectionsignal, andfault warning means connected to said fault detecting circuit for giving awarning in response to said fault detection signal from said faultdetecting circuit.9. An ignition circuit according to claim 1 further comprising:a fault detecting circuit for detecting a fault in at least either one ofsaid first and second switch means and for generating a fault detectionsignal, andheating element power supply stopping means connected to said faultdetecting circuit for interrupting an igniting power supply path to saidheating element in response to said fault detection signal from said faultdetecting circuit.10. An ignition circuit according to claim 8 further comprising:heating element power supply stopping means for interrupting an ignitingpower supply path to said heating element in response to said faultdetection signal from said fault detecting circuit."}
{"WKU":"039315282","Title":"Pulse generator for reactive loads","App_Date":"1974-08-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert P. Farnsworth;Robert D. Washburn","Assignee":"Hughes Aircraft Company","ICL_Class":"H03K  300","References":"2811654;3309541;3371232;3703661","Claims":"Thus having described a new and improved pulse generator for reactiveloads, what is claimed is:1. A pulse generator adapted for providing electric pulses to a reactiveload circuit, said pulse generator comprising:first and second electric energy storage circuits;means for applying electric energy to said first energy storage circuit;first energy transfer means for providing a transfer of electric energyfrom said first energy storage circuit to said reactive load circuit uponthe application of an enabling signal to said first energy transfer means;second energy transfer means for providing a transfer of electric energyfrom said reactive load circuit to said second energy storage circuit uponthe application of an enabling signal to said second energy transfermeans;third energy transfer means for providing a transfer of electric energyfrom said second energy storage circuit to said first energy storagecircuit upon the application of an enabling signal to said third energytransfer means;switch control means for applying enabling signals to said first, second,and third energy transfer means during first, second, and third sequentialtime periods, respectively;whereby electric energy stored in said first energy storage circuit issequentially circulated to said reactive load circuit, to said secondenergy storage circuit and back to said first energy storage circuit, andwhereby the duration of the pulse supplied to said reactive load circuitis a function of the interval between said first and second sequentialtime periods.2. A pulse generator according to claim 1 and adapted for providingelectric pulses to a capacitive type load, and wherein said first andsecond energy storage circuits comprise first and second capacitors,respectively.3. A pulse generator according to claim 2 wherein the values of capacitanceof said load circuit, said first capacitor and said second capacitor aresubstantially the same.4. A pulse generator according to claim 2 wherein said first, second andthird energy transfer means include first, second and third inductors,respectively; and wherein the values of said first, second and thirdinductors are such that the transfer of energy to and from said capacitorsand the reactive load circuit is accomplished by resonant charging.5. A pulse generator according to claim 1 wherein said means for applyingelectric energy to said first energy storage circuit comprises a powersource; and fourth energy transfer means for providing a transfer ofelectric energy from said power source to said first energy storagecircuit upon the application of an enabling signal to said fourth energytransfer means; and wherein said switch control means further comprisesmeans for applying an enabling signal to said fourth energy transfer meansduring a fourth time period which follows said third time period; wherebysupplemental charge is added to said first energy storage circuit so as tocompensate for energy losses.6. A pulse generator according to claim 2 wherein said means for applyingenergy to said first energy storage circuit comprises a square wavegenerator coupled to one terminal of said first capacitor.7. A pulse generator according to claim 6 further comprising voltageclamping means coupled to one of said energy storage circuits such thatthe amount of energy stored therein is restricted to a preselected rangeof values.8. A pulse generator according to claim 1 further comprising voltageclamping means coupled to one of said energy storage circuits such thatthe amount of energy stored therein is restricted to a preselected rangeof values.9. A pulse generator according to claim 1 wherein each of said energytransfer means comprises a silicon controlled rectifier and a transformer,with the secondary winding of the transformer being electrically connectedbetween the gate and cathode terminals of the associated siliconcontrolled rectifier.10. A pulse generator according to claim 9 wherein each of said energytransfer means comprises a diode connected so as to be in series with theenergy transferred by said energy transfer means.11. A pulse generator adapted for providing electric pulses to a reactiveload circuit, said pulse generator comprising:a plurality of pulse producing sections, each section comprising first andsecond energy storage circuits, means for applying electric energy to saidfirst energy storage circuit, first energy transfer means for providing atransfer of electric energy from said first energy storage circuit to saidreactive load circuit upon the application of an enabling signal to saidfirst energy transfer means, second energy transfer means for providing atransfer of electric energy from said reactive load circuit to said secondenergy circuit upon the application of an enabling signal to said secondenergy transfer means, and third energy transfer means for providing atransfer of electric energy from second energy storage circuit to saidfirst energy storage circuit upon the application of an enabling signal tosaid third energy transfer means; andswitch control means for applying enabling signals to said energy transfermeans in each of said pulse producing sections during different sequentialtime periods such that electric energy stored in the first energy storagecircuit of a particular pulse producing section is sequentially circulatedto said reactive load circuit, then to the corresponding second energystorage circuit and back to the corresponding first energy storagecircuit, and with the timing of the control of the energy transfer meansbeing such that each of said sections provide a pulse to the reactive loadcircuit during a different time interval of each cycle of operation ofsaid pulse generator.12. A pulse generator according to claim 11 and adapted for providingelectric pulses to a capacitive type load, and wherein the first andsecond energy storage circuits in each said pulse producing sectionscomprise first and second capacitors, respectively.13. A pulse generator according to claim 12 wherein the values ofcapacitance of said load circuit, said first capacitor and said secondcapacitor are substantially the same.14. A pulse generator according to claim 12 wherein said first, second andthird energy transfer means include first, second and third inductors,respectively; and wherein the values of said first, second and thirdinductors are such that the transfer of energy to and from said capacitorsand the reactive load circuit is accomplished by resonant charging.15. A pulse generator according to claim 11 wherein said means for applyingelectric energy to said first energy storage circuit comprises a powersource and wherein each of said pulse producing sections comprises fourthenergy transfer means for providing a transfer of electric energy fromsaid power source to said first energy storage circuit upon theapplication of an enabling signal to said fourth energy transfer means;and wherein said switch control means further comprises means for applyingan enabling signal to said fourth energy transfer means during a timeperiod which follows the transfer of electric energy from said secondenergy storage circuit to said first energy storage circuit; wherebysupplemental charge is added to said first energy storage circuit so as tocompensate for energy losses.16. A pulse generator according to claim 12 wherein said means for applyingelectric energy to said first energy storage circuit comprises a squarewave generator coupled to one terminal of said first capacitor.17. A pulse generator according to claim 11 wherein each of said pulseproducing sections further comprises voltage clamping means coupled to oneof said energy storage circuits such that the amount of energy storedtherein is restricted to a preselected range of values.18. A pulse generator according to claim 11 wherein each of said energytransfer means comprises a silicon controlled rectifier and a transformer,with the secondary winding of the transformer being coupled between thegate and cathode terminals of the associated silicon controlled rectifier.19. A pulse generator according to claim 11 wherein each of said energytransfer means includes a diode connected so as to be in series with theenergy transferred by said energy transfer means."}
{"WKU":"039315290","Title":"Turn signal indicator","App_Date":"1974-06-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Lonnie C. Williamson, Jr.","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"B60Q  100","References":"2659838","Claims":"Having thus described the invention, what I claim as new and desire tosecure by Letters Patent of the United States is:1. A turn signal indicator switch assembly for use on a motor cyclecomprisinga housing fitted with clamps for fastening to a motorcycle handlebar,adjacent to a hand grip of the handlebara momentary contact push button, normally open switch mounted in saidhousing, with the switch button projecting beyond the housing, and amercury switch mounted in said housing, in the normally closed positionfor the installed position of the assembly, such that the normally openpush button switch may be connected in series with the coil of aself-latching relay that controls an electrical turn indication signal andthe mercury switch may be connected in series with the self-latchingcircuit of the said relay so thatmomentary actuation of the push button switch causes the self-latchingrelay to close and remain close, thus actuating the turn indicator signaland movement of mercury in the mercury switch, responsive to turningmotion of the handlebar, causes the said relay to open and turn off thesaid indicator signal.2. The combination as recited in claim 1, in which the mercury switch isconnected in parallel with a condensor to provide a time-delay action sothat transient momentary operation of the mercury switch will not causethe relay, in the latched position, to open."}
{"WKU":"039315304","Title":"Apparatus for controlling the supply of power to a resistive load","App_Date":"1974-07-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Rex Mountford Davis;Brian Robert Downing","Assignee":"National Research Development Corporation","ICL_Class":"H01H  956","References":"2598490;3753044","Claims":"We claim:1. Apparatus for controlling the supply of power from an alternatingcurrent electrical supply of at least three phases and a neutral to aresistive load comprising:means for connecting the load as a combined star-delta load having currentpaths both between (a) each phase connection of the load and two adjacentphase connections of the load and (b) between each phase connection of theload and a common point which is directly connected to said neutral,a plurality of switching means connected to the supply, one for each phase,for selectively connecting the phase connection of the load for that phaseto the corresponding phase of the supply, each said switching means havinga conducting and a non-conducting state, andcontrol means connected to said switching means for changing the variousswitching means from their non-conducting stages to their conductingstates and vice versa in a selected sequence and for changing the sequenceselected, said control means including means for changing each switchingmeans from its non-conducting to its conducting state only when voltageacross that switching means is substantially zero, each switching meanschanging from its conducting to its non-conducting state only when currentthrough that switching means is substantially zero.2. Apparatus as claimed in claim 1, in which the switching means for eachphase comprises a pair of oppositely poled thyristors connected inparallel.3. Apparatus as claimed in claim 1, in which the resistive load comprisesan electrode boiler including the connecting means comprising a respectiveelectrode for each phase of the supply, the electrodes being uniformlyspaced and disposed symmetrically within an electrically conductive memberwhich is connected to the neutral of the supply.4. Apparatus according to claim 1 wherein said control means includes meansfor causing each said selected sequence to have a duration of three cyclesof the supply current.5. Apparatus according to claim 1 further including said load."}
{"WKU":"039315312","Title":"Overlapped signal transition counter","App_Date":"1974-12-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Glenn P. Check;Roger F. Dimmick","Assignee":"International Business Machines Corporation","ICL_Class":"H03K 2106","References":"3466517;3671876;3697779","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A counter circuit for counting signal transitions of overlapped out ofphase bi-level signals in response to an asynchronously occurring startsignal comprisingmeans responsive to said overlapped out of phase bi-level signals forgenerating a single signal having signal transitions for every signaltransition, positive and negative, occurring within said overlappedsignals,means responsive to said start signal for storing the level of said singlesignal at the time said start signal occurs,binary counter means, andlogic means responsive to said single signal and said stored level toprovide counter advance signals to said binary counter means for eachsignal transition in said single signal.2. The counter circuit of claim 1 wherein said means for generating asingle signal having signal transitions for every signal transitionoccurring within said overlapped signals is logical exclusive ORcircuitry.3. The counter circuit of claim 2 wherein said logical exclusive ORcircuitry comprisesa first AND circuit connected to receive said overlapped out of phasebi-level signals,a second AND circuit connected to the output of said first AND circuit andconnected to receive one of said out of phase bi-level signals,a third AND circuit connected to the output of said first AND circuit andconnected to receive another of said out of phase bi-level signals, andan OR circuit connected to the outputs of said second and third ANDcircuits to provide an output at one level when the outputs of said secondand third AND circuits are at levels different from each other and toprovide an output at another level when the outputs of said second andthird AND circuits are at the same level.4. The counter circuit of claim 1 wherein said means for storing the levelof said single signal at the time said start signal occurs is a polarityhold circuit.5. The counter circuit of claim 4 wherein said polarity hold circuitcomprisesa first AND circuit connected to receive said single signal and said startsignal,inverter means for inverting said single signal,a second AND circuit connected to receive said inverted single signal andsaid start signal, anda pair of OR circuits connected to each other to form a latch and connectedto outputs of said first and second AND circuits whereby the level of saidsingle signal is stored upon the occurrence of said start signal in thelatch formed by said OR circuits.6. The counter circuit of claim 1 wherein said logic means for providingsaid counter advance signals to said binary counter means forms the firststage of said binary counter means.7. The counter circuit of claim 1 wherein said logic means for providingcounter advance signals comprisesa first AND circuit connected to receive said stored level, said singlesignal in inverted form and said start signal,a second AND circuit connected to receive said stored level, said singlesignal and said start signal, andan OR circuit connected to outputs of said first and second AND circuits toprovide counter output signals for both negative and positive transitionsoccurring in said single signal."}
{"WKU":"039315320","Title":"Thermoelectric power system","App_Date":"1974-03-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ambrose W. Byrd","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the United States","ICL_Class":"G21H  110","References":"3302042;3378449;3437847;3441752;3451641;3509386;3535562;3537515;3607631;3709781;3801446","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A thermoelectric power system comprising:a heat means having a fluid inlet and fluid outlet for receiving a fluid atsaid inlet, heating said fluid, and providing it as a heated fluid at saidoutlet;at least one thermoelectric generator assembly, each comprising:"}
{"WKU":"039315339","Title":"Ultrasonic signal generator","App_Date":"1974-05-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Frank A. Raso;John J. Saeli","Assignee":"Sybron Corporation","ICL_Class":"H01L 4110","References":"2498760;2752512;2917691;3489930;3629726;3668486;3694713;3727112","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An electrical ultrasonic signal generator for a hand tool including atransducer responsive to electrical ultrasonic signals to transmitultrasonic moments to a tool attached thereto comprising:controllable oscillator circuit means responsive to a control signalapplied thereto for controlling the frequency of oscillation;circuit means for applying the oscillator circuit means signals to saidtransducer;feedback circuit means for generating feedback signals at the frequency atwhich said transducer responds to the oscillator circuit means signals;andcontrol circuit means for comparing phase of the feedback signals with thesaid phase oscillator circuit means signals for applying a control signalto said oscillator circuit means that is a function of the phasedifference between the feedback and oscillator circuit means signals tomaintain the oscillation circuit means signals at a substantially constantpreset phase relation with the feedback signals;wherein said circuit means for applying the oscillator circuit meanssignals to said transducer includes;amplifier circuit means responsive to the oscillator circuit means signalsfor alternately switching between saturation and cut off to applysubstantially square wave signals to said transducer.2. An electrical ultrasonic generator as defined in claim 1 wherein:said circuit means for applying the oscillator circuit means to saidtransducer includes a phase shift circuit for shifting the phase of theoscillator circuit means signals applied to said transducer; andsaid control circuit means maintains the preset phase relationcorresponding to phase shift introduced by said phase shift circuit.3. An electrical ultrasonic generator as defined in claim 2 wherein:a threshold circuit is connected between said phase shift circuit and saidamplifier circuit means for applying phase shifted square wave typesignals to said amplifier circuit means for switching said amplifiercircuit means between saturation and cut off.4. An electrical ultrasonic generator as defined in claim 3 wherein:said feedback circuit means detects the current flow through saidtransducer to produce the feedback signal.5. An electrical ultrasonic generator as defined in claim 4 wherein:said oscillator circuit means is a voltage controlled oscillator forproducing substantially square wave signals, the frequency of which is afunction of the magnitude and polarity of a direct current control signalapplied thereto, andsaid control circuit means applies the direct current signals to saidvoltage controlled oscillator.6. An electrical signal generator for ultrasonic dental scalers having ahand tool with an ultrasonic transducer mounted therein, wherein saidtransducer includes a mangetostrictive element for connection to a scalertip and a coil surrounding magnetostrictive element for applyingultrasonic electromagnetic signals thereto, said electrical signalgenerator comprising:controllable oscillator circuit means responsive to a control signalapplied thereto for controlling the frequency oscillation;power amplifier circuit means for applying electrical signals to thetransducer coil;phase shift circuit means for phase shifting the oscillation circuit meanssignals;threshold circuit means connected between said phase circuit means and saidpower amplifier circuit means for applying switching signals to said poweramplifier circuit means for alternating switching said power amplifiercircuit means between saturation and cut off at the frequency of saidoscillator circuit means signal;feedback circuit means for detecting the current flow through saidtransducer coil and generating a feedback signal at the frequency at whichsaid transducer responds to the signals from said power amplifier circuitmeans, andcontrol circuit means for comparing the phase of the feedback signal withthe phase of the oscillator circuit means signal for applying a controlsignal to said oscillator circuit means that is a function of the phasedifference between the feedback and the oscillation circuit means signalsto maintain a substantially constant phase relation between the oscillatorcircuit means signals and the feedback signals, whereby the frequency ofoscillation is controlled by the resonant frequency of the transducer."}
{"WKU":"039315347","Title":"Main frame and center clamp for a vibrating motor","App_Date":"1974-04-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William R. Gray;Henry A. Kahrmann, Jr.;Ming K. Shieh","Assignee":"Dresser Industries, Inc.","ICL_Class":"H02K 3302","References":"2356961;3155853;3167670;3170078","Claims":"Having thus described and shown an embodiment of the invention, what it isdesired to secure by Letters Patent of the United States is:1. A vibrating motor comprising a main frame; a center clamp; a leaf springbetween said main frame and said center clamp for vibration of said mainframe and said center clamp relatively to each other, said main framehaving means to secure each end of said leaf spring to the main frameincluding, a seat block for each end of said leaf spring, a clamping blockspaced opposite said seat block, a spacer block between said seat blockand said clamping block, and clamping means in said clamping block toclamp said one end of the leaf spring against said seat block, whereinsaid seat block, said clamping block and said spacer block are welded toan element of the main frame and form a rigid assembly for holding saidend of the leaf spring in securely clamped position; and means to securesaid center clamp to said leaf spring intermediate the ends thereof.2. A vibrating motor as recited in claim 1 including upper and lower spacerblocks which are spaced from each other to provide an opening between thespacer blocks and between the seat block and the clamping block to receivesaid end of a leaf spring.3. A vibrating motor as recited in claim 2 in which said frame element isan upper frame element that overlies the seat block, the clamping blockand said upper spacer block, and a lower frame element opposite the upperframe element that overlies the seat block, the clamping block and saidlower spacer block.4. A vibrating motor as recited in claim 3 including a cover secured tosaid seat block, said clamping block, said upper frame element and saidlower frame element to close the main frame at the end of the leaf spring.5. A vibrating motor as recited in claim 3 in which said upper frameelement and said lower frame element each extend rearwardly from said seatblock, and means in the rearwardly extending parts of said upper and lowerframe elements to hold a stator.6. A vibrating motor as recited in claim 5 including a side wall secured tothe rearwardly extending parts of said upper and lower frame elements andan inwardly extending shelf on the side wall to hold the stator.7. A vibrating motor as recited in claim 2 in which each of said block,clamping block and upper and lower spacer blocks is formed of a plate,said frame element is formed of a plate that overlies the seat block, theclamping block and the upper spacer block, a second frame element that isopposite the first said frame element and is formed of a plate thatoverlies the seat block, the clamping block and the lower spacer block,and welding to secure each of said seat block, clamping block, upper andlower spacer blocks, first frame element and second frame element to eachother in a rigid assembly.8. A vibrating motor as recited in claim 1 in which said clamping meanscomprises a screw that is threaded through the clamping block and bearsagainst the leaf spring.9. A vibrating motor as recited in claim 1 including a plurality of leafsprings disposed in a stack, upper and lower elongated spacer blocks whichare spaced from each other to provide an elongated opening between thespacer blocks and between the seat block and the clamping block to receivethe ends of the stacked leaf springs.10. A vibrating motor as recited in claim 9 in which said leaf springsextend transversely to opposite sides of the main frame, and said seatblock, clamping block and spacer blocks are at each side of the main frameto secure the opposite ends of the leaf springs.11. A vibrating motor as recited in claim 1 in which each of said seatblock, clamping block and spacer block is formed of a plate, and saidframe element is formed of a plate that overlies the seat block, theclamping block and the spacer block, and welding to secure each of saidseat block, clamping block, spacer block and said frame element to eachother in a rigid assembly.12. A vibrating motor as recited in claim 2 in which said seat block, saidclamping block, said upper spacer block and said lower spacer block are ateach side of the main frame for the opposite ends of the leaf springs,said frame element is an upper frame element that overlies the seat block,the clamping block and the upper spacer block at opposite sides of themain frame, a lower frame element that overlies the seat block, theclamping block and the lower spacer block at opposite sides of the mainframe, said upper and lower frame elements extending rearwardly from saidseat blocks, a side wall at each side of the rearwardly extending parts ofthe upper and lower frame elements, and a shelf extending inwardly fromeach side wall to support a stator in the main frame between said sidewalls and between the rearwardly extending parts of the upper and lowerframe elements.13. A vibrating motor comprising a main frame; a center clamp, a leafspring between said main frame and said center clamp for vibration of saidmain frame and said center clamp relatively to each other; means to securesaid center clamp to said leaf spring intermediate the ends thereofincluding, a seat block for each leaf spring, a clamping block spacedopposite said seat block, a spacer block between said seat block and saidclamping block, and clamping means in said clamping block to clamp saidleaf spring against said seat block, wherein said seat block, saidclamping block and said spacer block are welded to a frame element of thecenter clamp to form a rigid assembly for holding the leaf spring insecurely clamped position; and means on said main frame to secure each endof said leaf spring to the main frame.14. A vibrating motor as recited in claim 13 including upper and lowerspacer blocks which are spaced from each other to provide an openingbetween the spacer blocks and between the seat block and the clampingblock to receive the leaf spring.15. A vibrating motor as recited in claim 14 in which each of said seatblock, clamping block and upper and lower spacer blocks is formed of aplate, said frame element is formed of a plate that overlies the seatblock, the clamping block and the upper spacer block, a second frameelement that is opposite the first said frame element and is formed of aplate that overlies the seat block, the clamping block and the lowerspacer block, and welding to secure each of said seat block, clampingblock, upper and lower spacer blocks, first frame element and second frameelement to each other in a rigid assembly.16. A vibrating motor as recited in claim 14 in which said frame element isan upper frame element that overlies the seat block, the clamping blockand said upper spacer block, and a lower frame element opposite the upperframe element that overlies the seat block, the clamping block and saidlower spacer block.17. A vibrating motor as recited in claim 16 in which said upper frameelement and said lower frame element each extend rearwardly from said seatblock, and means in the rearwardly extending parts of said upper and lowerframe elements to hold an armature.18. A vibrating motor as recited in claim 13 in which said clamping meanscomprises a screw that is threaded through the clamping block and bearsagainst the leaf spring.19. A vibrating motor as recited in claim 13 including a plurality of leafsprings disposed in a stack, upper and lower elongated spacer blocks whichare spaced from each other to provide an elongated opening between thespacer blocks and between the seat block and the clamping block to receivethe stacked leaf springs.20. A vibrating motor as recited in claim 13 in which each of said seatblock, clamping block and spacer block is formed of a plate, and saidframe element is formed of a plate that overlies the seat block, theclamping block and the spacer block, and welding to secure each of saidseat block, clamping block, spacer block and said frame element to eachother in a rigid assembly."}
{"WKU":"039315355","Title":"Constant frequency motor generator set with only one rotor","App_Date":"1973-09-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John F. Roesel, Jr.","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"H02K 1600;H02K 4704;H02K 2100","References":"2064583;2610992;3521149","Claims":"I claim:1. A single rotor, motor-generator set, providing a constant output ACgenerator frequency notwithstanding rotation at a varying speed by themotor, comprising in combination:a. a rotor and stator means, said stator means including motor andgenerator stator elements having motor and generator peripheries definedthereon, said peripheries of said motor and generator stator elementsbeing in close proximity to said rotor which is located for rotation closeto the two stator elements and so disposed that magnet lines of force cancouple between the rotor and the generator stator element;b. a first rotor periphery adjacent the periphery of the motor statorelement and a second rotor periphery facing the periphery of the generatorstator element with driven means on the motor stator element periphery anddriven means on the rotor first periphery;c. a layer of permanent magnet material on said rotor second periphery;d. at least one magnetizing station along said generator stator elementperiphery with magnet forming means thereat disposed to form permanentmagnets in said permanent magnet material as said rotor periphery turnspast said station with frequency excitation means coupled to the magnetforming means said magnet forming means being responsive to the frequencyof said frequency excitation means and forming magnets at said frequency;e. at least one set of power takeoff elements disposed at least partiallyaround the periphery of said generator stator elements angularly separatedfrom said magnetizing station; and,f. a feedback loop between the power takeoff elements and the magnetforming means for maintaining the output voltage at a desired level bycontrolling the strength of the permanent magnets formed in said permanentmagnet material.2. A motor-generator set as claimed in claim 1 wherein said motor statorelement is radially inwards and said generator stator element is radiallyoutwards of said rotor, said two elements and said rotor being coaxiallydisposed.3. A motor-generator set as claimed in claim 1 wherein said motor statorelement is radially outwards and said generator stator element is radiallyinwards of said rotor, said two elements and said rotor being coaxiallydisposed.4. A motor-generator set as claimed in claim 1 wherein said stator means isone elongated unit with the motor stator element on one side and thegenerator stator element on the other side, said rotor being coaxial withsaid unit and radially outwards of said unit.5. A motor-generator set as claimed in claim 1 wherein said stator means isone elongated unit with the motor stator element on one side and thegenerator stator element on the other side, said rotor being coaxial withsaid unit and radially inwards of said unit.6. A motor-generator set as claimed in claim 1 wherein said motor statorelement, said generator stator element and said rotor are all coaxial.7. A motor-generator set as claimed in claim 1 wherein said generatorstator element has at least first and second phase power output take-offcoils sequentially spaced thereon.8. A motor-generator set as claimed in claim 7 wherein said generatorstator element has at least two magnetizing stations along said generatorstator periphery with magnet forming means thereat disposed to formpermanent magnets in said rotor permanent magnet material.9. A motor-generator set as claimed in claim 1 including second and thirdmagnetizing heads about 120.degree. apart.10. A motor-generator set as claimed in claim 1 including a secondmagnetizing head 180.degree. from said first head, more or less.11. A motor-generator set as claimed in claim 6 wherein said generatorstator has at least first and second phase power output takeoff coilssequentially spaced thereon.12. A motor-generator set as claimed in claim 11 wherein said generatorstator has at least two magnetizing heads along said generator statorperiphery with magnet forming means thereat disposed to form permanentmagnets in said rotor permanent magnet material.13. In a motor-generator set having a drum-shaped rotor with a drive shaftand an extended core of high permeability magnetic material supported bysaid shaft with a rotor periphery of defined width on the rotor having alayer of permanent magnet material on said rotor periphery, in combinationtherewith:a. a generator-stator element with a stator periphery adjacent to saidrotor periphery and coaxial therewith, said stator element having first,second and third phase power output takeoff coils sequentially spacedthereon;b. at least one magnetizing unit housing in said stator element having anelongated magnetizing slot in said stator periphery angulary disposed withregard to said drive shaft across said rotor periphery width;c. at least one magnetizing unit in said housing with frequency excitationmeans and a magnetizing head in said magnetizing housing, said frequencyexcitation means supplying a desired frequency to said magnetizing head sothat as said rotor member rotates, permanent magnets with poles areendlessly imprinted in the permanent magnet material as said rotorperiphery passes before the magnetizing head, which permanent magnets thensequentially induce power in said first, second and third phase poweroutput takeoff coils, said permanent magnets being erased from saidpermanent magnet material as said magnets again pass before a magnetizinghead at which time new permanent magnets are imprinted in said permanentmagnet material; and,d. electrical quantity sensing means sensing electric quantity in the poweroutput takeoff coils, with a feedback loop between said power outputtakeoff coils and said electric excitation means controlling the magneticstrength of the imprinted permanent magnets in accordance with the sensedelectrical quantity.14. A motor-generator set as claimed in claim 13 including second and thirdmagnetizing units 120.degree. apart.15. A motor-generator set as claimed in claim 13 including a secondmagnetizing unit 180.degree. from said first unit.16. A motor-generator set as claimed in claim 1 wherein said driver meansand driven means are electric-magnetic driver and driven elements, saidmotor stator element being so disposed with respect to said rotor thatelectric lines of force from said motor element can likewise couple ontosaid rotor.17. In a motor-generator set, the generator being of the type wherein arotor with a high retentivity permanent magnet material on at least theperiphery thereof is disposed for rotation adjacent to a magnetizing headlocated on stator means which magnetizing head includes frequencyexcitation means coupled thereto causing said magnetizing head to printmagnets on the rotor periphery at a predetermined frequency, and wherein apower takeoff means is disposed along the circular travel path of therotor angularly displaced from the magnetizing head so that as said rotorpasses said magnetizing head, permanent magnets at said predeterminedfrequency are endlessly imprinted on said rotor periphery on the firstrotation cycle and, which permanent magnets are substantially erased asthe imprinted magnets again pass before said magnetizing head on the nextrotation cycle at which time new permanent magnets are imprinted on saidrotor periphery so as to cause to travel past said power takeoff means aquantity of permanent magnets corresponding to said predeterminedfrequency thereby inducing into said power takeoff means an alternatingfrequency corresponding to the predetermined frequency of said frequencyexcitation means, in combinationa. a first section on said rotor with driven means on said first sectiondisposed for being driven by corresponding means when coupled thereto;b. motor means disposed in close proximity to said rotor said motor meanshaving driver means disposed for coupling with said driven means so as toturn said rotor;c. a second section on said rotor including said high retentivity materialso disposed that said high retentivity material faces said generatorstator element so that magnetic lines of force emanating from saidmagnetizing head will couple into and form permanent magnets in said rotorhigh retentivity material and the permanent magnets so formed will coupleinto said power takeoff means inducing an alternating electric currentthereon as said rotor turns.18. A motor-generator set as claimed in claim 17 wherein said motor meansis radially inwards and said generator stator means is radially outwardsof said rotor, said motor means, generator stator means and said rotorbeing coaxially disposed.19. A motor-generator set as claimed in claim 17 wherein said motor meansis radially outwards and said generator stator means is radially inwardsof said rotor, said motor means, generator stator means and said rotorbeing coaxially disposed.20. A motor-generator set as claimed in claim 17 wherein said motor meansand said generator stator means is one elongated unit with the motor meanson one side and the generator stator means on the other side, said rotorbeing coaxial with said stator means and radially outwards of said unit.21. A motor-generator set as claimed in claim 17 wherein said motor meansand generator stator means is one elongated unit with the motor means onone side and the generator stator means on the other side, said rotorbeing coaxial with said unit and radially inwards of said unit.22. A motor-generator set as claimed in claim 17 wherein said motor, saidgenerator stator means and said rotor are all coaxial.23. A motor-generator set as claimed in claim 17 wherein said generatorstator means has at least first and second phase power output takeoffcoils sequentially spaced thereon.24. A motor-generator set as claimed in claim 23, wherein said generatorstator means has at least two magnetizing heads along said generatorstator means periphery with magnet forming means thereat disposed to formpermanent magnets in said rotor permanent material.25. A motor-generator set as claimed in claim 17 including second and thirdmagnetizing head 120.degree. apart.26. A motor-generator set as claimed in claim 1 including a secondmagnetizing head about 180.degree. from said first head.27. A motor-generator set as claimed in claim 22 wherein said generatorstator means has at least first and second phase power output takeoffcoils sequentially spaced thereon.28. A motor-generator set as claimed in claim 27 wherein said generatorstator means has at least two magnetizing heads along said generatorstator means periphery with magnet forming means thereat disposed to formpermanent magnets in said rotor permanent magnet material.29. A motor-generator set as claimed in claim 17 wherein said driver meansand driven means are electro-magnetic driver and driven means, said motormeans being so disposed with respect to said rotor that electric lines offorce from said motor means will couple onto said rotor."}
{"WKU":"039315363","Title":"Efficiency arc discharge lamp","App_Date":"1974-07-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Timothy Fohl;James C. Morris","Assignee":"GTE Sylvania Incorporated","ICL_Class":"H01J 6140;H01J  516","References":"2963611;3162785;3221198;3400288;3485343","Claims":"We claim:1. A high intensity arc discharge lamp comprising an arc tube containing alight emitting metal and having electrodes at its ends, the arc tubeemission including both desired and undesired radiation, and a selectivereflector surrounding said arc tube, said reflector efficientlytransmitting desired radiation and efficiently reflecting portions of theundesired radiation to which the arc tube wall is transparent and to whichthe discharge plasma is optically thick, the reflection being sufficientto substantially improve lamp efficiency, said efficienctly reflectedportions of undesired radiation including radiation at 810 and 1140nanometers.2. The lamp of claim 1 wherein said selective reflector is a dichroiccoating.3. The lamp of claim 2 wherein said coating comprises alternate layers ofTiO.sub.2 and SiO.sub.2.4. The lamp of claim 3 comprising, in addition, a light-transmitting jacketsurrounding said arc tube, said coating being deposited on said jacket.5. The lamp of claim 4 wherein said arc tube is made of alumina."}
{"WKU":"039315371","Title":"Matrix electrode gas discharge display panel having terminals spaced","App_Date":"1974-02-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kazunori Nishida;Isao Inomata","Assignee":"Nippon Electric Company Limited","ICL_Class":"H01J 61067;H01J 6130","References":"3631287;3684918;3735182;3753038","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A matrix electrode gas discharge display panel for displaying aplurality of patterns arranged in rows and columns, wherein theimprovement comprises:a first plate of an electrically insulating material having a plurality offirst electrodes formed thereon in a direction parallel to said rows, andfirst terminal areas on said plate connected to said first electrodes,contiguous ones of said first electrodes and said first terminal areasbeing divided into plural first groups, the terminal areas connected tothe first electrodes of each of said groups being spaced apart from theterminal areas connected to the first electrodes of the others of saidgroups, anda second plate of an electrically insulating material having a plurality ofsecond electrodes formed thereon in a direction parallel to said columns,and second terminal areas on said second plate connected to said secondelectrodes, contiguous ones of said second electrodes and said secondterminal areas being divided into plural second groups, the terminal areasconnected to the second electrodes of each of said second groups beingspaced apart from the terminal areas connected to the second electrodes ofthe others of said second groups, wherein said first and second electrodesspatially intersect at plural gas filled cells, at least one of saidelectrodes being transparent, wherein:said first terminal areas connected to said first electrodes are disposedalong both edge portions of said first plate disposed in a directionparallel to said columns, the terminal areas disposed along each of saidedge portions being connected to the first electrodes of alternate ones ofsaid first groups, andthe second terminal areas connected to said second electrodes are disposedalong both edge portions of said second plate disposed in a directionparallel to said rows, the terminal areas disposed along each of said rowdirection edge portions being connected to the second electrodes ofalternate ones of said second groups.2. In a matrix electrode gas discharge display panel for displaying aplurality of patterns arranged in a row, comprising a first plate of anelectrically insulating material, a plurality of first electrodes formedon said first plate parallel to said row, a second plate of anelectrically insulating material, a plurality of parallel secondelectrodes formed in groups on said second plate spatially transverse tosaid first electrodes and with a predetermined pitch, means forhermetically sealing said first and second plates to provide a gasdischarge space between said first and second electrodes with an ionizablegas sealed in said space, first terminal areas formed on said first platealong an edge portion thereof and connected to said first electrodes,groups of second terminal areas formed on said second plate along bothedge portions thereof and connected to said second electrodes, and meansfor supplying a voltage between selected ones of said first and secondterminal areas to produce gas discharges in said space in accordance withsaid patterns, at least one of said first and second plates beingsufficiently transparent to allow said gas discharges to be viewedtherethrough, the improvement wherein the second electrodes of one of saidelectrode groups are spaced on said second plate from the electrodes ofadjacent electrode groups by a distance wider than said pitch and are notinterposed between the electrodes of other electrode groups, and saidsecond terminal area groups are connected to the second electrodes ofalternate ones of said electrode groups and made wider than said electrodegroups, each of said second terminal area groups being spaced apart fromother terminal groups, each of said electrode groups being associated witha respective one of said patterns."}
{"WKU":"039315380","Title":"Signal detector for a semiconductor memory device","App_Date":"1973-10-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kiyoo Itoh;Keisuke Hashizume;Katsuhiro Shimohigashi","Assignee":"Hitachi, Ltd.","ICL_Class":"H03K  520;H03K  326","References":"3041477;3493786;3510689;3539839;3588844;3683206","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A signal detector comprising: a flip-flop formed of at least a pair ofinverters, the output of each inverter being connected to the input of theother inverter through a positive feedback loop; and means for selectivelyactuating said feedback loop of said flip-flop at a predetermined time;the input of one of said pair of inverters being connected to a signalline, and said pair of inverters being positively electrically unbalanced;said pair of inverters including first, second, third and fourthtransistors each having first, second and third terminals; said firstterminals of said first and third transistors each being connected to saidactuating means; said second terminals of said first and third transistorsbeing connected to said third terminals of said second and fourthtransistors, respectively; said third terminals of said first and thirdtransistors being connected to said first terminals of said fourth andsecond transistors, respectively; said first terminal of said fourthtransistor being connected to said signal line; and said second terminalsof said second and fourth transistors being grounded.2. A signal detector according to claim 1, in which said first, second,third, and fourth transistors comprise MOS transistors.3. A signal detector according to claim 1, wherein said actuating meanscomprises a source of control pulses.4. A signal detector according to claim 1, further comprising a memory cellconnected to said signal line for controlling the discharging thereof; andmeans for selectively applying a readout signal to said memory cell at afirst predetermined time to initiate the discharge of said signal line;wherein said actuating means, when actuated, accelerates said discharge ofsaid sense line initiated by said selectively applying means.5. A sensing circuit for a memory arrangement having at least one senseline, comprisinga flip-flop formed of at least a pair of inverter circuits, the output ofeach inverter circuit being connected to the input of the other invertercircuit through a positive feedback loop, the input of one of saidinverter circuits being connected to said sense line,means for selectively applying a voltage to the inputs of said invertercircuits at a first predetermined time,means for selectively actuating said feedback loop of said flip-flop at asecond predetermined time, anda memory cell connected to said sense line for controlling the dischargingthereof,said pair of inverter circuits being positively electrically unbalanced andincluding first, second, third and fourth transistors each having first,second and third terminals; said first terminals of said first and thirdtransistors each being connected to said actuating means; said secondterminals of said first and third transistors being connected to saidthird terminals of said second and fourth transistors, respectively; saidthird terminals of said first and third transistors being connected tosaid first terminals of said fourth and second transistors, respectively;said first terminal of said fourth transistor being connected to saidsense line; and said second terminals of said second and fourthtransistors being grounded.6. A sensing circuit according to claim 5, in which said first, second,third, and fourth transistors comprise MOS transistors.7. A sensing circuit according to claim 6, wherein said voltage applyingmeans includes fifth and sixth transistors each having first outputterminals and an input terminal connected together to a control voltagesource and having second output terminals connected to the inputs ofrespective inverter circuits.8. A sensing circuit according to claim 7, wherein said pair of invertercircuits are unbalanced by providing unequal capacitance to ground fromthe outputs of the respective inverter circuits.9. A sensing circuit for a memory arrangement including only one sense lineand at least one memory cell connected thereto, said circuit comprising:a flip-flop formed of at least one pair of inverter circuits, the output ofeach inverter circuit being connected to the input of the other invertercircuit through a positive feedback loop, only the input of one of saidinverter circuits being connected to said sense line, and said invertercircuits being positively electrically unbalanced with each other;means for selectively applying a voltage to the inputs of said invertercircuits at a first predetermined time to charge said sense line;means for selectively applying a readout signal to said memory cell at asecond predetermined time to initiate the discharge of said sense line;andmeans for selectively actuating said feedback loop of said flip-flop at athird predetermined time to accelerate said discharge of said sense line.10. A sensing circuit for a memory arrangement including at least one senseline and at least one memory cell connected thereto, said circuitcomprising:a flip-flop formed of at least one pair of inverter circuits, the output ofeach inverter circuit being connected to the input of the other invertercircuit through a positive feedback loop, only the input of one of saidinverter circuits being connected to said sense line and said invertercircuits being positively electrically unbalanced with each other;means for selectively applying a voltage to the inputs of said invertercircuits at a first predetermined time to charge said sense line;means for selectively applying a readout signal to said memory cell at asecond predetermined time to initiate the discharge of said sense line;andmeans for selectively actuating said feedback loop of said flip-flop at athird predetermined time to accelerate said discharge of said sense line;said at least one pair of inverter circuits including first, second, thirdand fourth transistors each having first, second and third terminals;said first terminals of said first and third transistors each beingconnected to said actuating means;said second terminals of said first and third transistors being connectedto said third terminals of said second and fourth transistors,respectively;said third terminals of said first and third transistors being connected tosaid first terminals of said fourth and second transistors, respectively;said first terminal of said fourth transistor being connected to said senseline; andsaid second terminals of said second and fourth transistors being grounded.11. A sensing circuit as defined in claim 10, wherein said first, second,third and fourth transistors comprise MOS transistors.12. A sensing circuit as defined in claim 10, wherein said voltagesupplying means includes fifth and sixth transistors each having firstoutput terminals and an input terminal connected together to a controlvoltage source and having second output terminals connected to therespective inputs of said inverter circuits.13. A sensing circuit as defined in claim 10, wherein said pair of invertercircuits are unbalanced by providing unequal capacitance to ground fromthe outputs of the respective inverter circuits."}
{"WKU":"039315398","Title":"Superorthicon-type television camera tube having target and fine-mesh","App_Date":"1973-06-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Pasha Lvovna Sokolova;Boris Vasilievich Krusser","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"H01J 3136;H01J 3108","References":"2518434;2922906;3001098;3179834;3437860;3509414","Claims":"We claim:1. A superorthicon-type television camera tube comprising a photoelectriccathode, a target spaced opposite the cathode, said target including afilm, said film being subject to secondary emission upon exposure to aphotoelectric image and storing a resulting charge, a fine-mesh metal gridbetween said film and said cathode, a coating on both said grid and filmof the target and of a semiconductor material having an inelastic electronreflection factor lower than that of the material of said film,semiconductor material being selected from the group comprising oxides ofmagnesium, aluminum, lithium and compounds of said oxides, said gridhaving a side facing the cathode and a side facing the target, saidcoating being on the side of the grid facing said cathode, an electron gunfor scanning said target, and an evacuated envelope in which said cathode,target and gun are located.2. A television camera tube as claimed in claim 1, wherein thesemiconductor material is a material having a secondary-emission factornot less than the secondary-emission factor of the material of said film.3. A television camera tube as claimed in claim 1, wherein thesemiconductor material is a material having resistivity not higher thanthat of the material of said film.4. A television camera tube as claimed in claim 1, wherein said grid isspaced from said film.5. A television camera tube as claimed in claim 1, wherein said target is aglass film.6. A television camera tube as claimed in claim 1, wherein the coating onthe film is spaced from the coating on the grid.7. A television camera tube as claimed in claim 1, wherein the film has aside facing the cathode and a side facing away from the cathode and thecoating on the film is on the side of the film facing the cathode.8. A television camera tube as claimed in claim 1, wherein the coating onthe grid is solely on the side facing the cathode."}
{"WKU":"039315401","Title":"Shadow mask assembly","App_Date":"1971-04-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Takao Kawamura","Assignee":"Hitachi, Ltd.","ICL_Class":"H01J 2907;H01J 2902","References":"3349272;3387159;3449612;3524096;3524972","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a shadow mask assembly of the type including a substantiallyrectangular shallow dish-shaped shadow mask, a rectangular reinforcingframe of L-shaped cross-section having an annular side surface adapted toengage the periphery of said shadow mask and a transverse flat surfaceformed by a flange bent inwardly at right angles with respect to said sidesurface, and a plurality of leaf springs for supporting said shadow maskassembly, one end of each of said leaf springs being secured to said sidesurface, the improvement in which portions of the side surface of saidframe in alignment with the free end of at least one pair of leaf springsare deformed to provide a protrusion extending toward the shadow mask anda depression in alignment with said portrusion with said transverse flatsurface following said depressions.2. The shadow mask assembly according to claim 1, wherein said depressionshave the configuration of a trapezoid.3. The shadow mask assembly according to claim 1, wherein the entire widthof the transverse flat surface of said frame is discontinuous in the areasof said deformed portions."}
{"WKU":"039315410","Title":"Connective means for a cathode ray tube mask-panel assembly","App_Date":"1975-05-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kurt H. Brenner, Jr.","Assignee":"GTE Sylvania Incorporated","ICL_Class":"H01J 2906;H01J 2902","References":"3404303;3502942;3541373;3543072;3588567;3621318","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An improvement in a color cathode ray tube mask-panel assembly whereofthe face panel includes a forwardly oriented viewing area with acathodoluminescent screen interiorly formed thereon and a perimetricalwall therearound having an interiorly disposed electrically conductivefilm thereon, and whereof the mask portion of the assembly spatiallysupported within the panel includes a peripheral frame having asubstantially planar ledge therearound wherefrom peripheral beam shieldingmeans extend to substantially contact the panel wall, said improvementbeing enhanced electrical connective means within said assemblycomprising:metallic electrical contactor means formed as a resilient conductive memberhaving an attachment portion and an integral flexural contact portion,said attachment portion being affixed to the planar ledge of said frame ina manner sandwiched between said frame and said shielding means, with saidflexural portion being flexed substantially perpendicular thereto toeffect substantially parallel positioning to the side portion of saidframe in the spacing between said mask frame and the adjacent panelsidewall extending in a forwardly directed manner toward said viewingarea, said flexed contact portion being formed as a plurality of parallelresilient fingers each making at least two areal regions of constantpressured contact with the panel sidewall to provide a plurality ofpositive areal electrical connections between the mask and the conductivefilm disposed on the wall of said panel."}
{"WKU":"039315428","Title":"Method and apparatus for energizing materials in an electric arc","App_Date":"1975-01-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Charles Sheer;Samuel Korman;Derek J. Angier","Assignee":"Sheer-Korman Associates, Inc.","ICL_Class":"H01J 1730;H05H  100","References":"3122672;3644782;3714390","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Apparatus for energizing materials in a free-burning electric arc columncomprising in combination: a cathode having a conical tip; at least threeanodes radially disposed and substantially equally spaced around anextension of the cathode axis, said anodes being inclined at an angle offrom about 45.degree. to about 135.degree. with respect to the cathodeaxis; means for individually adjusting the current to each anode; andmeans for forcefully projecting fluid material along a path parallel tothe surface of the cathode and into and through the arc column.2. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein three anodes are symmetrically arrangedin a plane perpendicular to the extension of the cathode axis.3. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said anodes are fluid transpirationanodes.4. The apparatus of claim 3 including means for adjusting the flow offluids to each of the fluid transpiration anodes.5. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said anodes are non-consumable anodes.6. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said anodes are consumable highintensity arc anodes.7. In the process of energizing materials by means of an arc dischargebetween an anode and cathode having a conical tip, the improvementcomprising providing at least three anodes radially disposed andsubstantially equally spaced around an extension of the cathode axis at anangle ranging from about 45.degree. to about 135.degree. with respect tosaid axis; individually adjusting the current to each of the anodes toprovide a conduction column which is co-linear with the cathode axis;forcefully projecting said material along a path parallel to the surfaceof the cathode into and through an arc column whereby a unidirectionaltail flame is obtained and whereby said material is immersed in hot plasmathroughout the length of the arc column and the length of theunidirectional tail flame.8. In generating a free-burning electric arc, the improvement comprising:striking an arc between a cathode having a conical tip and at least threeanodes radially disposed and substantially equally spaced around anextension of the cathode axis; thereafter individually adjusting thesupply of current to each of said anodes whereby the anode jets mergesmoothly with the cathode jet to provide an effluent column substantiallyco-linear with the cathode axis.9. The process of claim 8 wherein three fluid transpiration anodes aresymmetrically arranged in a plane perpendicular to an extension of cathodeaxis and the flow of working fluid to each of the anodes is individuallyadjusted."}
{"WKU":"039315436","Title":"Starting and operating circuit for gaseous discharge lamps","App_Date":"1974-09-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Joe A. Nuckolls","Assignee":"General Electric Company","ICL_Class":"H05B 4114","References":"2682014;2686906;2760118;3235769","Claims":"What I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the UnitedStates is:1. A starting and operating circuit for gaseous discharge lamps comprising,in combination, a source of alternating current, ballasting meansincluding an induction coil connected at its input side to saidalternating current source, said induction coil comprising an inputportion and an output portion, a first gaseous discharge lamp having highvoltage starting characteristics connected to the output side of saidinduction coil, a second gaseous discharge lamp having low voltagebreakdown characteristics connected to the input portion of said inductioncoil, and a high frequency discharge capacitor connected across saidsecond gaseous discharge lamp and said input coil portion and forming aseries discharge loop therewith for providing high frequency, highvoltage, low energy pulses for starting said first discharge lamp.2. A circuit as defined in claim 1, including a ballast capacitor connectedin series with said second gaseous discharge lamp.3. A circuit as defined in claim 1, and auxiliary inductance meansconnected to said second gaseous discharge lamp in series therewith.4. A circuit as defined in claim 1, said input and output portions of saidballast induction coil each having a predetermined number of coil turns,said ballast induction coil stepping up the voltage produced across saidinput portion by operation of said series discharge loop.5. A circuit as defined in claim 1, including a tap on said induction coildividing the same into said input and said output portions, one of saidsecond gaseous discharge lamp and said high frequency discharge capacitorbeing connected to said tap and the other being connected to the inputside of said induction coil.6. A circuit as defined in claim 5, wherein said second gaseous dischargelamp is connected to said tap.7. A circuit as defined in claim 5, wherein said high frequency dischargecapacitor is connected to said tap.8. A circuit as defined in claim 6, including a ballast capacitor connectedin series with said second gaseous discharge lamp, said high frequencydischarge capacitor being connected to the junction of said second gaseousdischarge lamp and said ballast capacitor.9. A circuit as defined in claim 2, said high frequency discharge capacitorbeing connected across said input coil portion, said second gaseousdischarge lamp and said ballast capacitor and forming a series dischargeloop therewith.10. A circuit as defined in claim 1, including an autotransformer connectedacross said alternating current source at the input side of said inductioncoil, said first gaseous discharge lamp connected to said autotransformerintermediate its ends, said second gaseous discharge lamp being connectedto opposite ends of said autotransformer.11. A circuit as defined in claim 10, including ballast capacitance meansand ballast inductance means connected in series with said second gaseousdischarge lamp.12. A circuit as defined in claim 11, said induction coil beingmagnetically coupled to said autotransformer.13. A circuit as defined in claim 12, said ballast inductance means beingmagnetically coupled to said autotransformer.14. A circuit as defined in claim 10, said second gaseous discharge lampbeing connected to the input side of said induction coil.15. A starting and operating circuit for gaseous discharge lampscomprising, in combination, a source of alternating current, ballastingmeans including an induction coil connected at its input side to saidalternating current source, said induction coil comprising an inputportion and an output portion, a first gaseous discharge lamp having highvoltage starting characteristics connected to the output side of saidinduction coil, a second gaseous discharge lamp having low voltagebreakdown characteristics connected to the input portion of said inductioncoil, and a high frequency discharge capacitor connected to said secondgaseous discharge lamp and said input coil portion and forming a seriesdischarge loop therewith for providing high frequency, high voltage, lowenergy pulses for starting said first discharge lamp, including anisolation transformer having a primary winding connected to saidalternating current source and having a secondary winding connected to theinput side of said induction coil and to said first gaseous dischargelamp.16. A circuit as defined in claim 15, said second gaseous discharge lampbeing connected to the junction of said induction coil and said secondarywinding.17. A circuit as defined in claim 16, said induction coil beingmagnetically coupled to said secondary winding.18. A starting and operating circuit for gaseous discharge lampscomprising, in combination, a source of alternating current, ballastingmeans including an induction coil connected at its input side to saidalternating current source, said induction coil comprising an inputportion and an output portion, a first gaseous discharge lamp having highvoltage starting characteristics connected to the output side of saidinduction coil, a second gaseous discharge lamp having low voltagebreakdown characteristics connected to the input portion of said inductioncoil, and a high frequency discharge capacitor connected to said secondgaseous discharge lamp and said input coil portion and forming a seriesdischarge loop therewith for providing high frequency, high voltage, lowenergy pulses for starting said first discharge lamp, including anautotransformer connected across said alternating current source at theinput side of said induction coil, said first gaseous discharge lampconnected to said autotransformer intermediate its ends, said secondgaseous discharge lamp being connected to opposite ends of saidautotransformer, and including means for alternatively connecting saidautotransformer to current sources of different voltages.19. A circuit as defined in claim 18, said connecting means comprising apair of terminals respectively connected to opposite ends of saidautotransformer and another terminal connected to said autotransformerintermediate its ends."}
{"WKU":"039315444","Title":"Fast warm up electronic ballast circuit for a high pressure discharge","App_Date":"1974-12-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ira Jay Pitel","Assignee":"GTE Sylvania Incorporated","ICL_Class":"H05B 4116","References":"3471747;3486069;3486070;3699385;3732460","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A ballast circuit for a high pressure arc lamp comprising:a potential source;oscillator means coupled to said potential source;current sampling means coupled to said oscillator means;first switching means coupled to said current sampling means and to saidoscillator means;load circuit means coupled to said potential source and to said oscillatormeans; andsecond switching means coupled to said potential source and load circuitmeans and to said first switching means, said second switching meanseffecting an abrupt shift in current flow through said load circuit meansin accordance with attainment of a threshold level of voltage of said loadcircuit means.2. The ballast circuit of claim 1 wherein said potential source includes avoltage rectifier means coupled to an AC voltage source.3. The ballast circuit of claim 1 wherein said oscillator means includes anelectron discharge device having an output electrode coupled by a firstinductive winding and a charge storage means shunted by a uni-directionalconduction device to said potential source.4. The ballast circuit of claim 1 wherein said oscillator means includes anelectron device having an electrode coupled to said first switching meansand via said current sampling means to a potential reference level.5. The ballast circuit of claim 1 wherein said first switching meansincludes a second inductive winding magnetically coupled to said firstinductive winding and electrically coupled to said oscillator means.6. The ballast circuit of claim 1 wherein said oscillator means includes afirst inductive winding coupled to a charge storage means shunted by saidload circuit means.7. The ballast circuit of claim 1 wherein said second switching meansincludes an electron device having one electrode coupled to saidoscillator means and to a charge storage means and another electrodecoupled to an impedance and to said first switching means wherebyattainment of a given threshold potential on said charge storage meansrenders said electron device non-conductive and an abrupt reduction incurrent flow through said load circuit means.8. The ballast circuit of claim 1 wherein said oscillator means includes afirst inductive winding, said first switching means includes a secondinductive winding with said first and second inductive windingsmagnetically coupled to provide a positive feedback circuit for saidoscillator means.9. The ballast circuit of claim 1 wherein said second switching meansincludes an electron device coupled by a unidirectional conduction deviceto said oscillator means whereby development of a potential above a giventhreshold level at said oscillator means effects conductivity of saiduni-directional conduction device and electron device to abruptly reducecurrent flow through said load circuit means.10. A fast warm-up electronic ballast circuit for a high intensitydischarge (HID) lamp comprising:an AC potential source;rectifier and voltage doubler means coupled to said AC potential source andproviding a DC potential source;oscillator means having a first inductive winding coupled to said rectifierand voltage doubler means;current sampling means coupling said oscillator means to a potentialreference level;load circuit means coupled to said rectifier and voltage doubler means andto said oscillator means;first switching means coupled to said oscillator and current samplingmeans; andsecond switching means coupled to said oscillator and rectifier and voltagedoubler means and to said first switching means whereby a potentialavailable at said oscillator means above a given threshold level alterssaid second switching means to cause an abrupt reduction in current flowthrough said load circuit means.11. The fast warm-up electronic ballast circuit of claim 10 including acharge storage means shunted by said load circuit means and coupling saidfirst inductive winding of said oscillator means to said DC potentialsource of said rectifier and voltage doubler means.12. The fast warm-up electronic ballast circuit of claim 10 wherein saidsecond switching means includes an electron device having one electrodecoupled via a uni-directional conduction device to said first inductivewinding of said oscillator means and to a charge storage means, a secondelectrode coupled by a second uni-directional conduction device to saidone electrode, and a third electrode coupled to an impedance and to saidfirst switching means whereby application of a potential above a giventhreshold value to said second switching means alters conductivity thereofwhich effects abrupt alteration of current flow through said load circuitmeans.13. The fast warm-up electronic ballast circuit of claim 10 wherein saidcurrent sampling means and first and second switching means form anegative feedback circuit for said oscillator means.14. The fast warm-up electronic ballast circuit of claim 10 wherein saidoscillator means includes a first inductive winding coupled to an electrondevice and via a charge storage means to said rectifier and voltagedoubler means and said first switching means includes a second inductivewinding magnetically coupled to said first inductive winding whereby apositive feedback circuit is provided.15. The fast warm-up electronic ballast circuit of claim 10 wherein saidsecond switching means includes an electron device having an outputelectrode coupled to an impedance shunted by a capacitor and to said firstswitching means whereby a change in current flow through said secondswitching means effects change in current flow through said oscillatormeans and an abrupt change in current flow through said load circuitmeans."}
{"WKU":"039315452","Title":"Horizontal deflection circuit","App_Date":"1974-12-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Francis C. Marino","Assignee":"Redactron Corporation","ICL_Class":"H01J 2952","References":"3414668;3551733","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a cathode ray tube display device having a horizontal deflection coilthrough which current flows under control of a first transistor which isswitched between a saturation state and a cut off state to establish thesweep and retrace portions of a line scan, apparatus for controlling theswitching of the first transistor between the states and for generating ablanking signal which occurs during the retrace portions of the line scanscomprising means for generating a horizontal synchronizing signal, meansfor generating a blanking signal of a given time duration and at a firstpredetermined period of time after the generation of a horizontalsynchronizing signal, said first predetermined period of time beinggreater than the maximum storage time of the first transistor, a pulsegenerator means having an input terminal and an output terminal forgenerating a pulse at said output terminal each time a signal is receivedat said input terminal, a passive delay means connected to said outputterminal for delaying at least the leading edge of a pulse generated bysaid pulse generator means for a second predetermined period of time, andapplying means for applying the pulse delayed by said passive delay meansto said first transistor to control the switching thereof, said secondpredetermined period of time being chosen so that the sum of the storagetime of said first transistor plus the said second predetermined period oftime is greater than said first predetermined period of time.2. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said pulse generator means comprises aretriggerable monostable multivibrator having an input terminal which isthe input terminal of said pulse generator means and further comprisingmeans for applying a signal associated with the leading edge of the pulsedelayed by said passive delay means to said input terminal of saidretriggerable monostable multivibrator.3. The apparatus of claim 2 wherein said passive delay means only delaysthe leading of the pulse generated by said retriggerable monostablemultivibrator.4. The apparatus of claim 3 wherein said passive delay means includes meansfor controllably varying the delay time.5. The apparatus of claim 2 wherein said passive delay means comprises afurther transistor having an emitter, a collector and a base, means forapplying operating potentials to said further transistor, a resistorconnected between said emitter and said base, a network including acapacitor and a second resistor and a diode connected between said base,and the output of said retriggerable monostable multivibrator, andconnecting means for connecting said collector to the input terminal ofsaid retriggerable monostable multivibrator.6. The apparatus of claim 5 wherein said connecting means comprises asignal differentiating means.7. The apparatus of claim 5 wherein said applying means comprises atransformer having a primary winding connected to the collector of saidfurther transistor and a secondary winding connected to the base of saidfirst transistor.8. The apparatus of claim 7 wherein said connecting means comprises acapacitor connecting the collector of said further transistor to the inputterminal of said retriggerable monostable multivibrator and a resistorconnecting the junction of said capacitor and said input terminal to avoltage source."}
{"WKU":"039315460","Title":"Over-voltage protection circuit","App_Date":"1974-05-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hans Jakobs;Charles J. Juhnke","Assignee":"C. E. Niehoff & Co.","ICL_Class":"H02H  320;H02H  706","References":"3469168;3488560;3581150;3651379;3702962","Claims":"What is claimed as new and desired to be secured by Letters Patent of theUnited States is:1. For use with an electric generating machine having an excitationwinding, a pair of power output terminals and an output windingelectrically coupled to said output terminals, an overvoltage protectionsystem comprising:energizing means for applying excitation current to said excitationwinding;thyristor means having main electrodes connected in a series circuit withsaid output winding, and a control electrode;voltage sensing means connected to said control electrode, said voltagesensing means being responsive to voltage generated by said output windingfor rendering said thyristor means electrically conductive between saidmain electrodes when said voltage reaches a predetermined level; andcurrent sensing means coupled to one of said main electrodes for sensingthe current flow through said main electrodes, said current sensing meansbeing further connected to said energizing means and including impedancemeans connected in a series circuit with said main electrodes, whereinsaid impedance means includes a semiconductor diode connected in serieswith said main electrodes, said diode being responsive to the current flowthrough said main electrode for providing a voltage thereacrossrepresentative of said current flow, said energizing means beingresponsive to said current sensing means for preventing the application ofexcitation current to said excitation winding when the current flowingthrough the main electrode reaches a predetermined level.2. For use with an electric generating machine having an excitationwinding, a pair of power output terminals and an output windingelectrically coupled to said output terminals, an overvoltage protectionsystem comprising:energizing means for applying excitation current to said excitationwinding;thyristor means having main electrodes connected in a series circuit withsaid output winding, and a control electrode;voltage sensing means connected to said control electrode, said voltagesensing means being responsive to voltage generated by said output windingfor rendering said thyristor means electrically conductive between saidmain electrodes when said voltage reaches a predetermined level; andcurrent sensing means coupled to one of said main electrodes, said currentsensing means including impedance means connected in a series circuit withsaid main electrodes for sensing the current flow through said electrodes,said current sensing means being further connected to said energizingmeans, said energizing means being responsive to said current sensingmeans for preventing the application of excitation current to saidexcitation winding when the current flowing through said main electrodereaches a predetermined level,said energizing means including switch means having a conductive and anonconductive condition of operation connected to said excitation windingand second voltage sensing means connected to said switch means and tosaid output terminals, said second voltage sensing means being responsiveto output voltage at said output terminals for altering the condition ofoperation of said switch means in response to the output voltage tomaintain said output voltage substantially constant, said switch meansbeing connected to said impedance means and operable to said nonconductivecondition of operation in response to current flow through said impedancemeans.3. A system as recited in claim 2 wherein said impedance means includes aresistor.4. A system as recited in claim 2 wherein said thyristor means includes acontrolled rectifier having gate, cathode and anode electrodes.5. A system as recited in claim 4 wherein said impedance means is connectedto one of said cathode and anode electrodes and one of said outputterminals.6. A system as recited in claim 5 wherein said voltage sensing meansincludes transistor switch means connected to said gate electrode.7. A system as recited in claim 2 wherein said switch means includes a lowpass filter.8. A system as recited in claim 7 wherein said switch means includes atransistor.9. A system as recited in claim 2 further including a second output windingelectrically coupled to said output terminals, and second thyristor meansconnected in series with said impedance means.10. A system as recited in claim 2 wherein said switch means includestransistor means having base, emitter and collector electrodes, saidemitter and collector electrodes being connected in series with said fieldcoil and said base electrode being connected to said voltage sensingmeans.11. A system as recited in claim 2 wherein said voltage sensing meansincludes breakdown means including a Zener diode connected in a seriescircuit with said output winding.12. A system as recited in claim 11 wherein said voltage sensing meansincludes transistor means connected to said Zener diode and to saidthyristor means, said transistor being responsive to a breakdown of saidZener diode for rendering said thyristor means conductive when the voltagegenerated by said output winding reaches said predetermined level."}
{"WKU":"039315479","Title":"Protection circuit","App_Date":"1974-08-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Miroslav Glogolja","Assignee":"RCA Corporation","ICL_Class":"H02H  328","References":"3102241;3200346;3585514;3711763;3754163;3805088","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A short circuit protection circuit for an audio amplifier which includesan input terminal, an output terminal, an NPN driver transistor having abase electrode, and a PNP driver transistor having a base electrode, saidcircuit comprising:first sensing means coupled to the input terminal of said audio amplifierfor producing an output voltage proportional in magnitude to the magnitudeto the signal at said input terminal;second sensing means coupled to the output terminal of said audio amplifierfor producing an output voltage proportional in magnitude to the magnitudeof the signal appearing at said output terminal;comparator means coupled to said two sensing means for comparing theiroutput voltages and for producing an output signal manifestationindicative of the sense of the difference between these voltages; andswitching means responsive to said signal manifestation for providingrelatively low impedance paths between said base electrodes and a point ofreference potential when said output voltages differ in one sense andrelatively high impedance paths when said output voltages differ in theopposite sense.2. The short protection circuit of claim 1, wherein said first sensingmeans includes a first peak signal detector, for detecting the peak signalamplitude of signals appearing at the input terminal of said audioamplifier.3. The short circuit protection circuit of claim 2, wherein said secondsensing means includes a second peak detector, for detecting the peaksignal amplitude of signals appearing at the output of said amplifier.4. A circuit for protecting an electronic device having an input terminalreceptive of an alternating signal, and output terminals, when a shortcircuit occurs between its output terminals, said device including adriver state which applies signals between said output terminals,comprising:first rectifying means coupled to said input terminal for producing arectified output signal proportional in magnitude to the signal present atsaid input terminal;second rectifying means coupled to said output terminals, for producing arectified output signal proportional in magnitude to the signal presentbetween said output terminals;comparator means responsive to the output signals produced by said firstand second rectifying means, for producing a signal manifestationindicative of the ratio between said output signals; andmeans responsive to said signal manifestation for inactivating the driverstage when said ratio reduces to lower than a given value.5. A circuit as set forth in claim 4, wherein said first and secondrectifying means each comprises a peak signal detection circuit.6. A circuit as set forth in claim 4, wherein said first rectifying meanscomprises a half-wave rectifier having an input terminal connected to saidinput terminal of said device, and an output terminal for providing a DCoutput signal proportional in magnitude to said input signal to saiddevice; andsaid second rectifying means comprises a full-wave rectifier having inputterminals connected across said output terminals of said device, and anoutput terminal for providing a DC output signal proportional in magnitudeto the output signal of said device.7. Apparatus for protecting an electronic device when a low impedanceappears across its output terminals, the electronic device having an inputterminal receptive of an alternating signal, and an output stage whichsupplies output signals to said output terminals, comprising:means for rectifying the alternating signal present at said input terminal;means for rectifying the output signal present across said outputterminals;means for comparing the amplitude of the rectified output signal with thatof the rectified input signal; andmeans for inactivating said output stage, when the ratio of the rectifiedoutput signal amplitude to the rectified input signal amplitude decreasesto lower than a predetermined value.8. Apparatus as set forth in claim 7, wherein said output stage includes aninput circuit, and wherein said means for inactivating said output stagecomprises means for placing a low impedance across said input circuit.9. Apparatus as set forth in claim 7 wherein each means for rectifyingcomprises means for peak signal detecting.10. Protection means for protecting a circuit from damage when theeffective impedance of the load driven by the circuit reduces to a valuesubstantially lower than its normal value, the circuit including inputterminals to which an alternating input signal may be applied, and anoutput driver stage receptive of a drive signal and having two outputterminals between which the load may be connected, said protection meanscomprising:means coupled to said input terminals for rectifying said input signal;means coupled to said output terminals for rectifying the signal present atsaid output terminals;means responsive to said rectified input and output signals for producing asignal manifestation indicative of the ratio between the signal presentbetween said output terminals that present between said input terminals;andmeans responsive to said signal manifestation for removing the signal fromsaid driver stage, when said manifestation indicates a ratio lower than agiven value.11. Protection means as set forth in claim 10 wherein each means forrectifying includes means for peak value detecting each signal."}
{"WKU":"039315487","Title":"Over voltage protection circuit","App_Date":"1974-04-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Donald J. Barchok","Assignee":"Admiral Corporation","ICL_Class":"H02H  710","References":"3395313;3611002;3621123;3814851;3828239","Claims":"I claim as my invention:1. An overload protection circuit for a high voltate television circuitcomprising an oscillator driver, a high voltage primary driving windingconnected to said oscillator driver, a tuning coil connected in serieswith said high voltage primary driving winding, a high voltage primaryconnected in series with said tuning coil and driving winding, ahorizontal driver connected to said high voltage primary, a B+ sourceconnected in series with said primary driving winding, said tuning coil,and said high voltage primary and connected to said oscillator driver toprovide supply voltage therefor.2. An overload protection circuit for a high voltage circuit for atelevision receiver comprising, a horizontal driver transistor, ahorizontal output transistor, a high voltage transformer connected to saidhorizontal output transistor, a tuning coil, a B+ voltage source, a highvoltage primary driving winding connected in series with said tuning coiland said high voltage transformer, said B+ source being removed from saidhorizontal driver transistor if said driving winding, said tuning coil orsaid high voltage transformer open circuit, and conductor means connectingsaid B+ voltage source to said horizontal driver transistor."}
{"WKU":"039315495","Title":"Control circuit for electromagnetic transducer","App_Date":"1974-10-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Charles Berns;Jacob Neuhof","Assignee":"General Signal Corporation","ICL_Class":"H01H 4732","References":"2843742;2854660;2866925;2920259;2977418;3117265;3161836;3440564","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A circuit for driving an electromagnetic transducer comprising:a. a transistor having base, collector and emitter electrodes:b. a direct current potential source;c. an electromagnetic transducer having first and second inductivelycoupled coils for producing opposing and unequal magnetomotive forces inresponse to a flow of direct current from said direct current potentialsource through said coils;d. said first coil being in a circuit between one terminal of saidpotential source and said collector electrode and said second coil beingin a circuit between the other terminal of said potential source and saidemitter electrode;e. first bias means for coupling a control potential derived from saidpotential source to said base electrode for biasing said base to apredetermined potential; andf. second bias means including inductive action between said first andsecond coils for biasing said transistor.2. The combination as set forth in claim 1, wherein said first coil hassubstantially more turns than said second coil so that the magnetomotiveforce generated by said first coil is significantly greater than themagnetomotive force generated by said second coil.3. The combination as set forth in claim 2, wherein the inductive couplingbetween said first and second coils induces a potential in said secondcoil in response to current changes in said first coil for biasing saidtransistor to cut off.4. The combination as set forth in claim 1, wherein a capacitor is coupledacross said first coil.5. An electromagnetic transducer having a driving circuit comprising:a. first and second windings on a common magnetic core coupled in a seriescircuit and in a sense for inducing a potential in said second windingwhich is in opposition to the potential across said first winding when acurrent flows in said series circuit;b. said first winding having a number of turns which is significantlygreater than the number of turns of said second winding;c. a potential source coupled to said series circuit for producing a flowof current in said series circuit; andd. potential sensing means coupled to said series circuit to sense when thepotential across said second winding exceeds a predetermined value and forterminating the flow of current in said series circuit in response to thepotential across said second coil exceeding said predetermined value.6. The combination as set forth in claim 5, wherein said potential sensingmeans is a transistor which is biased to cut-off when said predeterminedpotential value is exceeded.7. The combination as set forth in claim 6 and including a capacitor inparallel with said first winding."}
{"WKU":"039315509","Title":"Electronic latching relay control","App_Date":"1974-11-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Joseph A. Dalpee","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy","ICL_Class":"H03H  900","References":"3267482","Claims":"What is claimed and desired to be secured by letters patent of the UnitedStates is:1. A switching control circuit for providing, under control of a controlsignal, actuating voltages and sustaining currents for actuating a voltageactuated device comprising:conditioning means for producing an output pulse upon the occurence of saidcontrol signal;bistable means connected to the output of said conditioning means forproviding an output signal and complimentary output signal respectively toan output terminal and a complimentary output terminal, each of saidoutput signals having complimentary values at a given time, said valuesalternating upon the occurence of said output pulse;first AND decision means for generating one of said actuating voltages,having a first input terminal coupled to the output of said conditioningmeans, a second input terminal coupled to said bistable means so as toenergize said first AND-driver second input terminal with a high levelsignal only upon the occurence of said complimentary output signal, and anoutput terminal;second AND decision means for generating one of said actuating voltages,having a first input terminal coupled to the output of said conditioningmenas, a second input terminal coupled to said bistable means so as toenergize said second AND-driver second input terminal with a high levelsignal only upon the occurence of said output signal, and an outputterminal;first output means for providing one of said sustaining currents, having acontrol terminal coupled to said second AND-driver second input terminaland having output terminals connected between the circuit ground and saidfirst AND decision means output terminal;second output means for providing one of said sustaining currents, having acontrol terminal coupled to said first AND-driver second input terminaland having output terminals connected between the circuit ground and saidsecond AND decision means output terminal;means connected to said output and complimentary output signal terminalsfor indicating the state of said output and complimentary output signals;andmeans connected to the input of said conditioning means for producing acontrol signal;whereby said first AND decision means produces an actuating voltageestablishing current through said voltage actuated device in a firstdirection only upon the joint occurence of said output pulse and saidcomplimentary signal, and whereby said second output means is in aconducting state and supplies a sustaining current through said voltageactuated in said first direction only during the occurence of saidcomplimentary output signal, and further whereby said second AND decisionmeans produces an actuating voltage establishing current through saidvoltage actuated device in a second direction only upon the jointoccurence of said output pulse and said output signal, and whereby saidfirst output means is in a conducting state and supplies a sustainingcurrent in said second direction only during the occurence of said outputsignal.2. A switching control circuit for providing, under control of a controlsignal, actuating voltages and sustaining currents for a voltage actuateddevice comprising:a one-shot device generating a predetermined fixed duration output pulse atan output terminal upon the occurence of a control signal received at itsinput terminal;bistable means coupled to the output of said one-shot device producingalternate output and complimentary output signals at respective first andsecond output terminals;a first AND-driver device having a first input terminal coupled to saidone-shot device output terminal, and a second input terminal coupled tosaid bistable means so as to energize said first AND-driver second inputterminal with a high level signal only upon the occurence of saidcomplimentary output signal, and an output terminal;a second AND-driver device having a first input terminal coupled to saidone-shot device output terminal, and a second input terminal coupled tosaid bistable means so as to energize said second AND-driver device secondinput terminal with a high level signal only upon the occurence of saidoutput signal, and an output terminal:a first output transistor having a base terminal coupled through a resistorto said second AND-driver second input terminal, a collector terminalcoupled to said first AND-driver device output terminal, and an emitterterminal coupled to the circuit ground; anda second output transistor having a base terminal coupled through aresistor to said first AND-driver device second input terminal, acollector terminal coupled to said second AND-driver device outputterminal, and an emitter terminal coupled to the circuit ground;whereby said first AND-driver device produces an actuating voltageestablishing current through said voltage actuated device in a firstdirection only upon the joint occurence of said output pulse and saidbistable device complimentary signal, and whereby said second outputtransistor is in a conducting state and supplies a sustaining current insaid first direction only during the occurence of said bistable devicecomplimentary signal andfurther whereby said second AND-driver device produces an actuating voltageestablishing current through said voltage actuated device in a seconddirection only upon the joint occurence of said output pulse and saidbistable device output signal, and whereby said first output transistor isin a conducting state and supplies a sustaining current in said seconddirection only during the occurence of said bistable device output signal."}
{"WKU":"039315517","Title":"Control circuits for double acting electromagnets","App_Date":"1974-03-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William David Holt","Assignee":"The Lucas Electrical Company Limited","ICL_Class":"H01H 4700","References":"2317888;2389564;2635197;3159773;3174080;3365625","Claims":"I claim:1. In combination with a double acting electromagnet, a load circuitcontrolled by the electromagnet, and a source of electrical energy havingfirst and second terminals, the improvement comprising a control circuitfor controlling the energization of the electromagnet from the source ofelectrical energy including first switch means operable at least betweenfirst and second positions, first and second energy storage means coupledto said first switch means at one terminal thereof and to the firstterminal of the source of energy at the other terminal thereof, said firstswitch means being coupled to the second terminal of the source of energy,the electromagnet being connected to said one terminal of each said firstand second energy storage means, said first energy storage means beingconnected to directly charge from the source of energy and said secondenergy storage means being connected to charge through the electromagnetwhen said first switch means is in said first position, and said secondstorage means being connected to charge directly from the source of energyand said first storage means being connected to charge through theelectromagnet from the source of energy when said first switch means is insaid second position, a second switch means connected between the sourceand the electromagnet and said storage means for controlling the currentflow in the electromagnet, said first switch means reversing the currentthrough the electromagnet upon successive actuations of said first switchmeans, holding means for retaining said first switch means in the lastposition thereof between actuations of said second switch means, and meansforming an independent discharge path for each of said first and secondstorage means between actuations of said second switch means.2. The improvement of claim 1 wherein said first and second storage meansare capacitors.3. The improvement of claim 2 wherein said first and second capacitors areconnected in series with said first and second switch means.4. The improvement of claim 2 wherein said discharge path forming means isa resistor connected across each capacitor.5. The improvement of claim 4 wherein said electromagnet and said switchmeans controls current flowing in a load circuit connected across thesource of energy by means of a third switch connected in controllingrelation therewith.6. The improvement of claim 5 wherein said holding means is a permanentmagnet acting on said first switch means."}
{"WKU":"039315525","Title":"Capacitor electrolyte","App_Date":"1971-04-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Daniel J. Anderson;James C. Jimerson","Assignee":"P. R. Mallory & Co., Inc.","ICL_Class":"H01G  902","References":"1769228;2786165;2965817;3138746;3293506;3345544","Claims":"We claim:1. A liquid or semi-liquid electrolyte capacitor including anode electrodemeans of a valve metal, a valve metal oxide in contact with the anodeelectrode means, cathode electrode means, and electrolyte means contactingthe valve metal oxide and the cathode electrode means, the electrolytemeans comprising an organic solvent including glycol monoethers ordiethers having up to 20 carbon atoms or amides having the formula##EQU3##where R.sub.1, R.sub.2 and R.sub.3 are H or lower alkyl and mixturesthereof, the organic solvent has dissolved therein an ionizable solute of0.01 wt.% up to the solubility limit of the organic solvent, the ionizablesolute including acid at least partially neutralized and a neutralizingagent, the acid including boric acid or phosphoric acid or mono anddicarboxylic acids having up to 12 carbon atoms and mixtures thereof, theneutralizing agent including ammonia or alkyl and alkanol amines having 4to 12 carbon atoms or guanidine type compounds having the formula##EQU4##where R.sub.4 and R.sub.5 are lower alkyl or aryl or H, cyclic nitrogencompounds including pyridine or substituted pyridines and mixturesthereof, and a substance separate from the ionizable solute includingacids or non-metal salts or chromium oxygen complexes and mixturesthereof, the substance yielding in solution chromate radicals having atleast some solubility in the electrolyte to the extent of about 0.01% toabout 2.5% by weight of the electrolyte.2. The capacitor of claim 1, wherein the nonmetallic salt of theelectrolyte means includes ammonium salts or aliphatic amine salts havingup to 20 carbon atoms or aromatic amine salts having up to 20 carbon atomsand mixtures thereof.3. The capacitor of claim 2, wherein the aliphatic amine salt of theelectrolyte means includes alkyl and alkanol amine salts and mixturesthereof.4. The capacitor of claim 1, wherein the complex of the electrolyte meansis formed with a substance including ammonia or amines or the organicsolvent or the ionizable solute and mixtures thereof.5. The capacitor of claim 1, wherein the chromate radical of theelectrolyte means is present as a chromate or dichromate and mixturesthereof.6. The capacitor of claim 1, wherein the non-metal salt of the electrolytemeans is an ammonium salt.7. The capacitor of claim 1, wherein the amide of the electrolyte meansincludes dimethylformamide or diethylacetamide and mixtures thereof.8. The capacitor of claim 1, wherein the carboxylic acid of the electrolytemeans includes succinic acid or tartaric acid or picric acid or maleicacid or malonic acid and mixtures thereof.9. The capacitor of claim 1, wherein the electrolyte means consistsessentially of 95 parts diethylformamide, 6 parts boric acid, 0.5 partsmaleic acid, 0.5 parts malonic acid, 0.2 parts phosphoric acid, 0.1 partsammonium dichromate and tribulylamine in an amount sufficient to effect apH of about 5.7 in the solution.10. A method of improving the shelf life and storage life of a capacitor byusing in the capacitor the electrolyte of claim 1."}
{"WKU":"039315533","Title":"Electronic commutation system having motor stator windings in push-pull","App_Date":"1974-07-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Frederick A. Stich;Glenn W. Schwantes","Assignee":"Allis-Chalmers Corporation","ICL_Class":"H02K 2900","References":"3348109;3418550;3509438;3629675;3784888","Claims":"The embodiments of the invention in which an exclusive property orprivilege is claimed are defined as follows:1. An electronic commutation system comprising, in combination, an electricmotor having a stator and a rotor rotatable within said stator and nangularly displaced stator phase windings each of which comprises a pairof power windings, where n is an integer greater than one,means for generating magnetic poles in said rotor,an electric power source,a pair of controllable semiconductor power switches associated with eachstator phase winding each of which is connected in series with one of saidpower windings and said power source so that the magnetic fluxes generatedby said power windings of each phase are in opposite directions, wherebysaid power windings operate in push-pull,means for deriving a plurality of time-displaced rotor position signals ata frequency which is a function of rotor angular velocity during rotationof said rotor through 360 electrical degrees each of which is indicativeof a different position of said rotor within said stator, andmeans for turning on each of said power switches during a different rotorposition signal so that the magnetic field generated by said stator phasewindings rotates in synchronism with said rotor poles, the power switchesassociated with said pair of power windings of each stator phase beingturned on during rotor position signals which are complements of eachother.2. In the combination of claim 1 wherein the pair of power windings of eachstator phase winding are joined at a midtap and all of said midtaps arecommoned.3. An electronic commutation system in accordance with claim 1 andincluding means for selectively varying the portion of said rotor positionsignals during which said power switches conduct to thereby control thespeed and torque of said motor.4. An electronic commutation system in accordance with claim 1 wherin saidn stator phase windings are displaced 360/n electrical degrees apart andeach said stator phase winding has a center tap and each half thereofconstitutes one of said power windings and the center taps of all of saidstator phase windings are commoned and coupled to one side of saidelectrical power source.5. An electronic commutation system in accordance with claim 1 wherein saidelectric power source is direct current, said power switches are powertransistors, said rotor position signal deriving means generates discretesquare wave signals, and including means for varying the duty cycle ofsaid power transistors to thereby control the speed and torque of saidmotor."}
{"WKU":"039315541","Title":"Reciprocating motor-compressor system","App_Date":"1974-08-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Nikolaos E. Spentzas","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"H02K 3312","References":"1912167;2003647;2690128;3118383;3134938;3162134;3196797;3201670;3328656;3846682","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A reciprocating system comprising:an armature;means connected to opposing ends of said armature for supporting saidarmature for lateral movement over a predetermined range;first and second laterally displaced electromagnetic coils disposed aboutsaid armature, each of said first and second coils having first and secondparallel windings alternate energization of said electromagnetic coilsbeing effective to cause said armature to reciprocate;first and second unidirectional rectifying means each connected in a firstseries circuit with one of said first windings of a respective one of saidfirst and second electromagnetic coils and in a second series circuit withthe second winding of said respective one of said first and secondelectromagnetic coils for alternately energizing said first and secondcoils in response to an alternating current voltage applied thereto and;means for shifting the phase of the current through said second windingsconnected in series with each of said second windings and said first andsecond unidirectional rectifying means.2. A reciprocating system as recited in claim 1 wherein said supportingmeans includes means for pumping fluids in response to the reciprocationof said armature.3. A reciprocating system as recited in claim 1 wherein said first andsecond unidirectional rectifying means include first and second half waverectifier diodes, respectively, said first half wave rectifier diode beingconnected to supply half wave rectified current to the first and secondwindings of said first electromagnetic coil, and said second half waverectifier diode being connected to supply half wave rectified current tothe first and second windings of said second electromagnetic coil, saidfirst and second half wave rectifier diodes being poled in oppositedirections for alternately supplying half wave rectified current pulses tosaid respective windings in response to said alternating current voltage.4. A reciprocating system as recited in claim 3 wherein said phase shiftingmeans includes a capacitor, and wherein each of said first windings isconnected in one of said first series circuits with a respective one ofsaid first and second half wave rectifier diodes, and each of said secondwindings is connected in one of said second series circuits with saidcapacitor and a respective one of said first and second half waverectifier diodes.5. A reciprocating system as recited in claim 3 wherein each of said coilsis adapted for inducing magnetic flux into said armature, and said coilsare wound in opposite directions for inducing a unidirectional flux intosaid armature.6. A system as recited in claim 1 further including a conductive inductionring affixed to said reciprocating armature for reciprocation therewith,said induction ring being responsive to magnetic flux flowing therethroughfor generating a circulating current therein.7. A reciprocating system as recited in claim 1 further including:a housing having a base portion and an upper portion;a laminated magnetic structure member supported by said base portion;means for supporting said first and second laterally displaced coils withinsaid housing in proximity to said laminated magnetic structure member forinducing a magnetic flux therein;means for securing said base portion to said upper portion; andmeans for supporting said pumping means at opposite ends of said housing.8. A reciprocating system as recited in claim 7 further including a secondlaminated magnetic structure member supported within said upper portion ofsaid housing.9. A reciprocating system as recited in claim 8 wherein said pumping meansincludes a piston coupled to each opposing end of said armature, and saidsupporting means includes a tubular cylinder liner disposed over eachpiston, said cylinder liners being supported between said upper and saidbase portions of said housing at opposite ends thereof.10. A reciprocating system as recited in claim 9 further including a carbonpiston ring affixed to each of said pistons for reciprocation therewith.11. A reciprocating system as recited in claim 8 wherein said pumping meansincludes a diaphragm coupled to each opposing end of said armature and adiaphragm chamber disposed over each diaphragm, and said supporting meansincludes means for securing said diaphragms and diaphragm chambers toopposite ends of said housing.12. A reciprocating system comprising:first and second coaxially disposed and axially displaced stator coils eachhaving first and second parallel windings;a magnetic armature mounted for reciprocation relative to said statorcoils;a magnetic member cooperating with said stator coils and said armature toprovide a magnetic path between said stator coils and said armature;means coupled to said first and second stator coils for energizing thewindings in said first coil in alternation with the windings of saidsecond coil; andmeans connected in circuit with the second windings of each of said firstand second stator coils for shifting the phase of the current flowingthrough each of said second windings with respect to the current flowingthrough each of said respective first windings.13. A reciprocating system as recited in claim 12 further including meansconnected to opposite ends of said armature for pumping fluids in responseto the reciprocation of said armature.14. A reciprocating system as recited in claim 12 wherein said phaseshifting means includes a capacitor connected in two series circuits, eachof said series circuits including said capacitor and one of said secondwindings.15. A reciprocating system as recited in claim 14 wherein said alternateenergizing means includes first and second oppositely poled rectifierdiodes, said first rectifier diode being connected in a first seriescircuit with said first winding and in a second series circuit with saidsecond winding of said first stator coil and said second rectifier diodebeing connected in a third series circuit with said first winding and in afourth series circuit with said second winding of said second stator coil.16. A reciprocating system as recited in claim 1 wherein said first andsecond coils each include first and second parallel windings.17. A reciprocating system as recited in claim 16 further including firstand second bobbins for supporting said first and second electromagneticcoils, said first and second windings of said first coil being wound onsaid first bobbin and said first and second windings of said second coilbeing wound on said second bobbin.18. A reciprocating system as recited in claim 12 further including a pairof conductive induction rings disposed at opposite ends of said armature,said induction rings being responsive to the flow of magnetic fluxtherethrough for generating a circulating current therein."}
{"WKU":"039315550","Title":"Acceleration control system for a d-c motor","App_Date":"1974-05-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"George J. Dohanich, Jr.;John C. Rohde;Gary A. Trudgen","Assignee":"International Business Machines Corporation","ICL_Class":"H02P  516","References":"2692361;2913652","Claims":"We claim:1. A motor control system comprising in combinationa rotatable d-c motor, anddrive control means for said motor including means for selectivelyaccelerating said motor to various desired velocities within apredetermined angle of rotation of said motor including,an external source of digital pulses for generating a frequency analogsignal representing desired motor velocity,and acceleration control means for supplying to said motor drive controlsignals having a duty rate which varies in accordance with the square ofsaid desired motor velocity comprisingmeans for converting said frequency analog signal to first and secondcontrol signals,said first control signal being a direct voltage signal representing adesired motor velocity,said first control signal having a voltage level dependent on the frequencyof said digital pulses,said second control signal being a periodic signal having a frequencyrepresenting said desired motor velocity,said second control signal having a predetermined peak voltage level equalto at least the voltage level of the maximum desired velocity and afrequency dependent on said frequency analog signal,and means for generating said drive control signals at said duty rate inaccordance with the comparative voltage levels of said first and secondcontrol signals.2. A motor control system in accordance with claim 1 in whichsaid means for converting said frequency analog signal to said firstcontrol signal comprisesa first conversion circuit includingfirst means for changing said digital pulses from said external source torectangular control pulses of substantially uniform width, andmeans for converting said rectangular control pulses to said direct voltagesignal,said direct voltage signal having a voltage level dependent on thefrequency rate of said rectangular control pulses, and said means forconverting said frequency analog signal to said second control signalfurther comprisessecond means for changing said digital pulses from said external source torectangular control pulses of substantially uniform width, andmeans for converting said rectangular control pulses of said second meansto a sawtooth periodic control signal,said sawtooth signal having a predetermined maximum peak voltage and havinga frequency rate proportional to the frequency rate of said rectangularcontrol pulses of said second means, andsaid means for generating said drive control signals includes a comparisoncircuit means operable for generating a drive control signal having a dutyrate dependent on said voltage level of said direct voltage compared withthe voltage level of said sawtooth periodic control signal.3. A motor control system in accordance with claim 2 in which.said first means of said first conversion circuit for converting saiddigital pulses to rectangular control pulses comprises a first signalshot, andsaid means for converting said rectangular control pulses from said firstsingle shot to a direct voltage control signal comprises a low-passfilter,said low-pass filter being connected to a first input of said comparisoncircuit means.4. A motor control system in accordance with claim 3 in whichsaid second means of said second conversion circuit for converting saiddigital pulses to said rectangular control pulses comprises a secondsingle shot, andsaid means for generating said sawtooth control signal comprises acapacitor circuit and switch means therefor operable in the control ofsaid second single shot,said capacitor being connected to a second input of said comparison circuitmeans.5. A motor control system in accordance with claim 4 in whichsaid means for providing said drive control signal to said motor furthercomprisesmeans connected to said first and second inputs of said comparison circuitmeans for clamping the voltage level of said low-pass filter to saidcapacitor.6. A motor control system in accordance with claim 1 in whichsaid periodic control signal converted from said digital pulses has afrequency rate which is a submultiple of the frequency rate of saiddigital pulses.7. A motor control system in accordance with claim 2 in whichsaid second conversion circuit means includes a frequency divider forconverting the digital pulses to said periodic control signal at saidfrequency rate which is proportional to said submultiple of said frequencyrate of said digital pulses.8. A motor control system in accordance with claim 1 in which saidacceleration control means further comprisesmeans for determining the angle of rotation of said motor, andmeans responsive to said angle determining means for terminating theapplication of said motor drive control signals from said accelerationcontrol means.9. A motor control system in accordance with claim 8 in whichsaid angle determining means comprises decode means operably connected forrotation with said d-c motor for generating a termination signal to saidacceleration control means upon completion of rotation of said d-C motorthrough said predetermined angle."}
{"WKU":"039315568","Title":"System for driving a direct-current motor in synchronism with an","App_Date":"1973-10-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Itsuki Ban;Manabu Shiraki","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"H02K 2900","References":"3585474;3611081;3679953;3743902;3746941;3783357","Claims":"We claim:1. A system for driving a direct-current motor in synchronism with anexternal synchronizing signal in the form of a train of pulses, saidsystem comprising:a DC power supply for feeding said motor;means for producing said synchronizing signal;means for producing a rotor position signal in phased relationship to therotation of said motor, said rotor position signal being also in the formof a train of pulses;a first control circuit for initiating the flow of current from said DCpower supply through said motor in a forward direction thereof to causethe latter to produce driving torque in response to each pulse of saidsynchronizing signal and for terminating the flow of current from said DCpower supply to said motor in response to each pulse of said rotorposition signal;a second control circuit for modifying the operation of said first controlcircuit, said second control circuit including:"}
{"WKU":"039315576","Title":"DC Motor stall protection circuit","App_Date":"1974-11-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"David W. Osburn","Assignee":"General Motors Corporation","ICL_Class":"H02P  774","References":"3383561;3427506;3551775;3569810;3576485","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A motor stall protection circuit comprising in combination with a supplypotential source, an electric motor and a speed control circuit thereforof the type which completes an energizing circuit for the motor across thesupply potential source through the current carrying electrodes of aswitching transistor: an NPN transistor having base, collector and emitterelectrodes, said collector-emitter electrodes being connected in circuitwith said speed control circuit for extinguishing said switchingtransistor while said NPN transistor is conductive through saidcollector-emitter electrodes; means for producing a direct currentreference potential signal which increases rapidly in magnitude when thecontrolled motor has become stalled; a Zener diode; and means for applyingsaid direct current reference potential signal across the seriescombination of said Zener diode and said base-emitter electrodes of saidNPN transistor for supplying base drive current to said NPN transistorwhile the level of said direct current potential is of a magnitude equalto the inverse breakdown potential level of said Zener diode.2. A motor stall protection circuit comprising in combination with a supplypotential source, an electric motor and a speed control circuit thereforof the type which completes an energizing circuit for the motor across thesupply potential source through the current carrying electrodes of aswitching transistor while base drive current is supplied thereto; meansfor producing a series of electrical signals of a frequency directlyproportional to motor speed; an NPN transistor having base, collector andemitter electrodes, said collector-emitter electrodes being connected incircuit with said speed control circuit in such a manner that while saidNPN transistor is conductive through said collector-emitter electrodes,base drive current is removed from said switching transistor; meansresponsive to said series of electrical signals for producing a directcurrent reference potential signal which increases rapidly in magnitudewhen the controlled motor has become stalled; a Zener diode; and means forapplying said direct current reference potential signal across the seriescombination of said Zener diode and said base-emitter electrodes of saidNPN transistor while the level of said direct current potential is of amagnitude equal to the inverse breakdown potential level of said Zenerdiode.3. A motor stall protection circuit comprising in combination with a supplypotential source, an electric motor and a speed control circuit thereforof the type which completes an energizing circuit for the motor across thesupply potential source through the current carrying electrodes of aswitching transistor while base drive current is supplied thereto: meansfor producing a series of electrical signals of a frequency directlyproportional to motor speed; a first transistor having a control electrodeand two current carrying electrodes for disenabling said speed controlcircuit when conductive through said current carrying electrodes duringmotor stall conditions, said current carrying electrodes being connectedin circuit with said speed control circuit in such a manner that whilesaid first transistor is conductive, base drive current is removed fromsaid switching transistor; a resistor; a capacitor; means for connectingsaid resistor and capacitor in series across said supply potential sourcewhereby said capacitor is charged through said resistor; a Zener diode;means for connecting said Zener diode in a reverse polarity relationshipacross said control electrode of said first transistor and the junctionbetween said resistor and capacitor whereby base drive current is suppliedto said first transistor when the charge upon said capacitor reaches apotential level equal to the inverse breakdown potential level of saidZener diode; a second transistor having a control electrode and twocurrent carrying electrodes; means for applying said series of electricalsignals to said control electrode of said second transistor in the properpolarity relationship to produce base drive current therethrough; andmeans for connecting said current carrying electrodes of said secondtransistor across said capacitor for periodically providing a dischargecircuit for said capacitor at a frequency proportional to motor speed.4. A motor stall protection circuit comprising in combination with a supplypotential source having supply and return terminals, an electric motor anda speed control circuit therefor of the type which completes an energizingcircuit for the motor across the supply potential source through thecurrent carrying electrodes of an NPN switching transistor while drivecurrent is supplied to the base electrode thereof; means for producing aseries of electrical signals of a frequency directly proportional to motorspeed; a first transistor having a control electrode and two currentcarrying electrodes for disenabling said speed control circuit whenconductive through said current carrying electrodes during motor stallconditions, said current carrying electrodes being connected across saidbase electrode of said switching transistor and said return terminal ofsaid supply potential source; a resistor; a capacitor; means forconnecting said resistor and capacitor in series across said supplypotential source whereby said capacitor is charged through said resistor;a Zener diode; means for connecting said Zener diode in a reverse polarityrelationship across said control electrode of said first transistor andthe junction between said resistor and capacitor whereby base drivecurrent is supplied to said first transistor when the charge upon saidcapacitor reaches a potential level equal to the inverse breakdownpotential level of said Zener diode; a second transistor having a controlelectrode and two current carrying electrodes; means for applying saidseries of electrical signals to said control electrode of said secondtransistor in the proper polarity relationship to produce base drivecurrent therethrough; and means for connecting said current carryingelectrodes of said second transistor across said capacitor forperiodically providing aa discharge circuit for said capacitor at afrequency proportional to motor speed.5. A motor stall protection circuit comprising in combination with a supplypotential source having supply and return terminals, an electric motor anda speed control circuit therefor of the type which completes an energizingcircuit for the motor across the supply potential source through thecurrent carrying electrodes of a PNP switching transistor while base drivecurrent is supplied thereto through the current carrying electrodes of anNPN driver transistor while drive current is supplied to the baseelectrode thereof; means for producing a series of electrical signals of afrequency directly proportional to motor speed; a first transistor havinga control electrode and two current carrying electrodes for disenablingsaid speed control circuit when conductive through said current carryingelectrodes during motor stall conditions, said current carrying electrodesbeing connected across said base electrode of said driver transistor andsaid return terminal of said supply potential source; a resistor; acapacitor; means for connecting said resistor and capacitor in seriesacross said supply potential source whereby said capacitor is chargedthrough said resistor; a Zener diode; means for connecting said Zenerdiode in a reverse polarity relationship across said control electrode ofsaid first transistor and the junction between said resistor and capacitorwhereby base drive current is supplied to said first transistor when thecharge upon said capacitor reaches a potential level equal to the inversebreakdown potential level of said Zener diode; a second transistor havinga control electrode and two current carrying electrodes; means forapplying said series of electrical signals to said control electrode ofsaid second transistor in the proper polarity relationship to produce basedrive current therethrough; and means for connecting said current carryingelectrodes of said second transistor across said capacitor forperiodically providing a discharge circuit for said capacitor at afrequency proportional to motor speed.6. A motor stall protection circuit comprising in combination with a supplypotential source, an electric motor and a speed control circuit thereforof the type which completes an energizing circuit for the motor across thesupply potential source through the current carrying electrodes of aswitching transistor: a control transistor having base, collector andemitter electrodes, said collector-emitter electrodes being connected incircuit with said speed control circuit for extinguishing said switchingtransistor while said control transistor is conductive through saidcollector-emitter electrodes; means for producing a direct currentreference potential signal which increases rapidly in magnitude when thecontrolled motor has become stalled; a Zener diode; and means for applyingsaid direct current reference potential signal across the seriescombination of said Zener diode and said base and emitter electrodes ofsaid control transistor for supplying base drive current to said controltransistor while the level of said direct current potential is of amagnitude equal to the inverse breakdown potential level of said Zenerdiode.7. A motor stall protection circuit comprising in combination with a supplypotential source, an electric motor and a speed control circuit thereforof the type which completes an energizing circuit for the motor across thesupply potential source through the current carrying electrodes of aswitching transistor while base drive current is supplied thereto; meansfor producing a series of electrical signals of a frequency directlyproportional to motor speed; a control transistor having base, collectorand emitter electrodes, said collector-emitter electrodes being connectedin circuit with said speed control circuit in such a manner that whilesaid control transistor is conductive through said collector-emitterelectrodes, base drive current is removed from said switching transistor;means responsive to said series of electrical signals for producing adirect current reference potential signal which increases rapidly inmagnitude when the controlled motor has become stalled; a Zener diode; andmeans for applying said direct current reference potential signal acrossthe series combination of said Zener diode and said base and emitterelectrodes of said control transistor for supplying base drive current tosaid control transistor while the level of said direct current potentialis of a magnitude equal to the inverse breakdown potential level of saidZener diode."}
{"WKU":"039315584","Title":"SCR motor speed control system with trigger stabilization circuit","App_Date":"1974-10-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John M. Houser","Assignee":"The Singer Company","ICL_Class":"H02P  516","References":"3648151;3753077;3784890;3854076","Claims":"Having set forth the nature of this invention, what is claimed herein is:1. A system for controlling the speed of a D.C. motor fed from an A.C.voltage source using first and second silicon controlled rectifiers(SCR s) in a full-wave configuration, comprising a full-wave, unfiltered,zener-controlled reference voltage, a timing capacitor, adjustableresistor means for charging said capacitor from said reference voltage attime-controlled rates, a first trigger device operative responsively tothe attainment of a predetermined voltage on said capacitor to apply atrigger pulse to said first and second SCR s a second trigger deviceoperative responsively to a predetermined low value of the referencevoltage substantially at the end of each half cycle of the A.C. voltage toprovide a low-impedance discharge path for said capacitor to assure thatsaid capacitor is substantially discharged at the beginning of each halfcycle.2. A system in accordance with claim 1, wherein said first trigger deviceis a programmable unijunction transistor having its anode voltage suppliedby said capacitor, and its anode gate voltage supplied from asubstantially constant source of D.C. voltage.3. A system in accordance with claim 1, wherein said second trigger deviceis a programmable unijunction transistor having its anode voltage suppliedby said capacitor, and its anode gate voltage supplied from saidunfiltered reference voltage.4. A system in accordance with claim 1, including a third SCR operative toconduct responsively to said trigger pulse from said first trigger deviceto clamp the unfiltered reference voltage to a low value during itsconduction period.5. A system in accordance with claim 1, including means for applying tosaid capacitor a motor speed voltage of polarity opposed to said chargingvoltage to modify the charging rate responsively to the motor load.6. In a motor speed control system for supplying controlled D.C. voltage toa D.C. motor from an A.C. voltage, means including first and secondsilicon controlled rectifiers (SCR s) for supplying full-wave rectifiedA.C. to said motor, means supplying a full-wave, zener-controlledreference voltage, means including a timing capacitor and an adjustablespeed-control resistor for charging said capacitor from said referencevoltage at an adjustable time rate, first trigger means for alternatelytriggering said first and second SCR s into conduction during successivehalf cycles of said A.C. voltage responsively to the charging voltage onsaid capacitor and at a point in each half cycle determined by said speedcontrol resistor, a third SCR operative responsively to said first triggermeans to clamp said reference voltage to a low value each time said firstor said second SCR is triggered into conduction, and a second triggermeans operative responsively to a programmed low value of the referencevoltage near the end of each half cycle to discharge said capacitorsubstantially to zero volts so that said capacitor is always charged fromthe same initial condition in each half cycle."}
{"WKU":"039315592","Title":"Malfunction detector circuit for the use with a pump-off control circuit","App_Date":"1974-08-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Fount E. McKee","Assignee":"Delta-X Corporation","ICL_Class":"H02H  708","References":"3200392;3417290;3509824;3763397","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A malfunction detector circuit in combination with a pump-off controlcircuit which is periodically actuated by a timer and which monitors theaverage current drawn by the drive motor of a well pump and includes anoutput comprising,timer signal receiving means connected to and receiving a signal from thetimer when the pump-off control circuit is actuated by the timer,output means connected to and actuated by the timer signal receiving meansfor indicating that a malfunction has occurred,control circuit signal receiving means connected to the output of thepump-off control circuit for monitoring when the control circuit iscontrolling the drive motor instead of the timer,interlocking means connected between the timer signal receiving means andthe control circuit signal receiving means, said interlocking meansactuated by the control circuit signal receiving means and controlling theoutput of the timer signal receiving means whereby the output means willonly be actuated in the event the control circuit receiving means fails toreceive a signal.2. The combination of claim 1 including,an excessive current measuring circuit connected to and measuring thecurrent drawn by the drive motor, andmeans connected between the current measuring circuit and the output meansfor actuating the output means when the current exceeds a predeterminedamount.3. The combination of claim 1 including,counting means connected between the output means and the timer signalreceiving means, said counting means requiring a plurality of actuationsby the timer signal receiving means prior to actuating said output means.4. A malfunction detector circuit in combination with a pump-off controlcircuit which is periodically actuated by a timer and which monitors theaverage current drawn by the drive motor of a well pump and includes anoutput comprising,an R-S flip-flop including first and second NAND gates, the input of thefirst gate connected to the timer, the input of the second of the gatesconnected to the output of the pump-off control circuit,a third NAND gate having two inputs, the first input of which is connectedto the timer, and the second input of which receives the output of thesecond gate,an inverter connected between the output of the second gate and the secondinput of the third NAND gate,a counter connected to the output of the third NAND gate, the output of thecounter indicating a malfunction.5. The combination of claim 4 including, an inverter connected between thecounter and the output of the first NAND gate for resetting the counter.6. The combination of claim 4 including,an excessive current measuring circuit measuring the current drawn by thedrive motor, said current measuring circuit connected to the output of thecounter to indicate an excessive current malfunction.7. The combination of claim 4 including,a NOR gate having two inputs, the first input of which is connected to theoutput of the counter,an excessive current measuring circuit measuring the current drawn by thedrive motor, said current measuring circuit connected to the second inputof the NOR gate,a second R-S flip-flop including fourth and fifth NAND gates, the input ofthe fourth gate connected to the output of the NOR gate, and the outputfrom the fourth gate being an indication of a malfunction, anda reset switch connected to the input of the fifth NAND gate."}
{"WKU":"039315606","Title":"Motor control system and electrical switch constructions therefor or the","App_Date":"1973-11-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James R. Willson","Assignee":"Robertshaw Controls Company","ICL_Class":"H02H  508","References":"2461076;2749495;2981195;3050003;3237848;3290576;3321669","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A control system for a motor having a required oil pressure value forsafe operation thereof comprising an electrical power source, a time delayswitch means having a switch for interconnecting said source to said motorto operate the same each time said switch means is initially activated bybeing placed across said power source, said switch means having a timedelay bimetal means that is adapted to move and open said switch if saidoil pressure of said motor does not reach said required value within apredetermined time period from the initial activation of said switchmeans, and an oil pressure responsive switch operatively interconnected tosaid time delay bitmetal means and said motor to terminate the switchopening movement of said time delay bimetal means if said oil pressurereaches said predetermined value thereof during said predetermined timeperiod, said bimetal means comprising a bimetal member and an electricalheater for heating said bimetal member when said heater is operativelyinterconnected to said power source, said pressure responsive switchterminating said switch opening movement of said bimetal member bycontinuously interconnecting said power source to said heater as long assaid oil pressure is above said predetermined value, said switch meanshaving means for initially interconnecting said heater to said powersource when said switch means is initially activated by being placedacross said power source whereby the energized heater causes movement ofsaid bimetal member and, thus, the start of said predetermined timeperiod, said switch means having a first switch for interconnecting saidpower source to said motor, said bimetal member opening said first switchwhen at ambient temperature and closing said first switch when beingheated by said heater, said switch means having a second switch thatinitially interconnects said power source to said heater when closed anddisconnects said heater from said power source when opened, said bimetalmember opening said second switch when heated to a certain amount by saidheater.2. A control system as set forth in claim 1 wherein latch means is providedfor said switch means which latches said second switch in the openposition thereof when said second switch is opened by said bimetal member.3. A control system as set forth in claim 2 wherein said latch meanscomprises another bimetal member and an electrical heater therefor."}
{"WKU":"039315614","Title":"Curve milling or curve grinding machines","App_Date":"1973-12-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Alfred Schmermund","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"G05B 1924","References":"3015806;3184663;3191111;3541417;3698267","Claims":"I claim:1. A shaping machine comprising, in combination:a frame;tool support means displaceably mounted on said frame;workpiece support means rotatably mounted on said frame;first displacement means to rotatably displace said workpiece supportmeans;a control member displaceably mounted on said frame;second displacement means to displace said control member relative to saidframe;coupling means to couple said control member to said tool support means,thereby to impart displacement to said tool support means in dependenceupon the displacement of said control member;a repetitious signal generator coupled to said first displacement means togenerate a predetermined number of repetitious signals on eachpredetermined angular displacement of said workpiece support means;divider means to output a signal on the generation of each of apredeterminable number of said repetitious signals, said divider meanscomprising a plurality of divider devices each having respective inputmeans and respective output means, each said divider device providing aplurality of said output signals at said respective output meanscorresponding to the number of said repetitious signals applied to saidrespective input means divided by a respective divider ratio;selectably operable setting means to set each said divider device to saiddivider ratio and thereby to determine the numerical value of saidpredeterminable number;first storage means to store said output signals derived from said dividermeans;means to derive control signals from said first storage means in dependenceon the state thereof;first connector means responsive to said control signals to connect therespective output means of each said divider device successively to saidfirst storage means;second storage means to store a series of signals each coded to represent arespective predetermined displacement of said tool support means;extractor means;second connector means responsive to said control signals to successivelyconnect the respective output means of selected ones of said dividerdevices to said extractor means, said extractor means being responsive tosuccessive ones of said signals output from said divider means and appliedto said extractor means to serially extract respective ones of said storedsignals from said second storage means; andtranslator means connected to said extractor means to receive said signalsextracted therefrom, to translate said extracted signals into commandsignals each corresponding to the displacement represented by a respectiveone of said extracted signals, and to apply said command signals to saidsecond displacement means.2. A machine as defined in claim 1, wherein said second storage meanscomprises a plurality of serially accessible storage locations eachstoring a respective one of said coded signals, and said extractor meanscomprises read-out means displaceable relative to said locations toserially extract said stored signals in response to said signals output bysaid divider means and applied to said extractor means.3. A machine as defined in claim 2, wherein said second storage meanscomprises a loop of perforated tape.4. A machine as defined in claim 2, wherein said second storage meanscomprises a loop of magnetic tape.5. A machine as defined in claim 1, wherein said second displacement meanscomprises a stepping motor, and said command signals generated by saidtranslator means each comprise a plurality of pulsed signals correspondingin number to the incremental displacement represented by the respectiveone of said extracted signals.6. A machine as defined in claim 1, wherein said second displacement meanscomprises a rotatable disc coupled to disc position control means, saidposition control means being responsive to each said command signal toimpart an incremental angular displacement to said disc corresponding tothe displacement represented by the extracted signal corresponding to therespective command signal."}
{"WKU":"039315622","Title":"Electric driving arrangement using a stepping motor","App_Date":"1974-07-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Johannes Mattheus Visscher","Assignee":"U.S. Philips Corporation","ICL_Class":"G05B 1940","References":"3328658;3374410;3435314","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An electric controller for a stepping motor having at least three statorwindings or winding parts comprising, means for energizing said windingsthat includes a ring counter having an equal number of positions, meansfor applying a first starting pulse to the counter, the stepping motordriving a member which at each step generates a step measuring pulse,feedback means for coupling said pulse back to the input of the ringcounter in a manner such that after said first starting pulse has beenapplied to the ring counter the stepping motor is accelerated by the steppulses in an optimum manner and attains a speed at which it can no longerbe stopped with certainty within a single step, a bistable switchconnected to control the pulse transmission path through the feedbackmeans, means for applying the start pulse to the bistable switch to setsame to a running state in which it allows the transmission of the stepmeasuring pulses to the ring counter, means for actuating said bistableswitch to a second deceleration state, a pulse delay circuit coupled tosaid pulse generating member, said delay circuit having a minimum delaytime which is slightly smaller than the time interval between twosuccessive step measuring pulses at a chosen deceleration speed of thestepping motor at which it can be stopped with certainty within a singlestep, means for coupling the bistable switch to the delay circuit so thatthe delay circuit is cut off by the bistable switch in said running stateand is actuated in the deceleration state of the switch so as to be resetto an operative state by each of the step measuring pulses, and a gatecircuit connected to receive said step pulses and controlled by the pulsedelay circuit in a manner such that the gate circuit, in the operativestate of the delay circuit, allows the step measuring pulses to pass tothe ring counter so that the ring counter energizes the stator windingswith a one step delay whereby the stepping motor is decelerated to thechosen deceleration speed in an optimum manner.2. A controller as claimed in claim 1, characterized in that the pulsedelay circuit is designed so that it is reset to its operative state bythe trailing edges of the step measuring pulses.3. A controller as claimed in claim 1 characterized in that it furtherincludes an or-gate through which the trailing edge of the output signalof the pulse delay circuit is passed to the ring counter in the form of apulse of the same polarity as the step measuring pulses so that thestepping motor runs on at the chosen deceleration speed until the supplyof further pulses to the ring counter is interrupted, and means forinterrupting the pulses supplied to the ring counter.4. An electric controller for a step motor having a plurality of statorwindings comprising, means for producing driving pulses coupled to saidstator windings to energize same in sequence, a pulse generator operatedin synchronism with the motor shaft to produce step pulses as the motor isstepped along, a first feedback transmission circuit for coupling the steppulses to the input of said pulse producing means to trigger same, controlmeans for generating a start pulse and subsequently a deceleration pulse,means for supplying the start pulse to said pulse producing means, asecond feedback transmission circuit coupled between the output of thepulse generator and the input of the pulse producing means, a bistableswitch coupled to said control means to receive said start pulse andsubsequently the deceleration pulse whereby the switch is operated intofirst and second states, respectively, means for coupling said bistableswitch to said first and second feedback circuits so as to control thetransmission of pulses therein, said first and second feedback circuitsbeing open and closed, respectively, in the first state of the switch andbeing closed and open, respectively, in the second state of the switch,and said second feedback circuit includes a pulse delay circuit having adelay time which is greater than the time interval between step pulseswhen the motor is driven at its normal operating speed whereby the steppulses are passed to the pulse producing means with one step delay whenthe switch is in the second state.5. A controller as claimed in claim 4 wherein said second feedbacktransmission circuit further comprises, a first gating means connectedbetween the output of the delay circuit and the input of the pulseproducing means, and means for coupling the output of the pulse generatorto an input of said first gating means.6. A controller as claimed in claim 5 wherein said second feedbacktransmission circuit further comprises second gating means having a firstinput directly coupled to the output of the delay circuit, a second inputcoupled to the output of the first gating means, and an output coupled tothe input of the pulse producing means for supplying said delayed steppulse thereto.7. A controller as claimed in claim 4 further comprising a gate circuithaving a first input coupled to the output of the first feedback circuit,a second input coupled to the output of the second feedback circuit, athird input coupled to the control means to receive the start pulse, andan output coupled to the input of the pulse producing means to selectivelyapply thereto the start pulse, undelayed step pulses and delayed steppulses.8. A controller as claimed in claim 7 wherein said control means includesmeans for supplying a stop pulse to a fourth input of said gate circuit toclose same at the desired step position of the motor.9. A controller as claimed in claim 4 wherein said control means includes,a counter for storing a count corresponding to the desired number of stepsof the motor, means for supplying a stop pulse to the pulse producingmeans when the motor has been stepped the desired number of steps, andmeans for coupling the step pulses to an input of said control means toprovide an indication of the step position of the motor."}
{"WKU":"039315630","Title":"Force commutation static frequency changer apparatus using direct","App_Date":"1974-09-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Eric J. Stacey","Assignee":"Westinghouse Electric Corporation","ICL_Class":"H02M  545","References":"3431483;3470447;3493838;3742336;3763418;3775662","Claims":"I claim:1. An AC to AC static frequency changer apparatus for developing an ACoutput voltage across a load, comprising in combination, an AC polyphaseinput power source, a plurality of unilateral main switches cyclically andtemporarily controlled for conduction under associated phases of saidinput power source; a DC voltage source, DC chopper means coupled betweensaid DC voltage source and said plurality of main switches, said DCchopper means including cyclically controlled unilateral auxiliaryswitching means for applying a reverse voltage represented by thedifference between said DC voltage and the line to neutral input voltageto said main switches, said reverse voltage being larger than the incomingline voltage for any conducting one of said main switches and with saidauxiliary switching means being controlled for conduction at an instantsubsequent to conduction of one of said main switches to apply saidreverse voltage thereto and to establish a temporary path for the loadcurrent in derivation to said conductive one of said main switches,thereby to commutate conduction from said one main switch to the next mainswitch being controlled for conduction.2. An AC to AC static frequency changer apparatus according to claim 1wherein said chopper means includes means for naturally switching off saidauxiliary switching means in relation to said one main switch beingcommutated and said next main switch being controlled for conduction.3. An AC to AC static frequency changer apparatus according to claim 2wherein said off-switching means includes capacitor means responsive tosaid load current for charging and to said auxiliary switching means fordischarging.4. An AC to AC static frequency changer apparatus according to claim 3wherein said off-switching means includes inductive means resonantlycoupled to said capacitors for self-commutating said auxiliary switchingmeans.5. An AC to AC static frequency changer apparatus according to claim 4wherein said auxiliary switching means is unilateral and saidoff-switching means includes means responsive to said inductance means forapplying a reverse voltage to said auxiliary switching means.6. An AC to AC static frequency changer apparatus according to claim 1wherein said means for applying a reverse voltage to said auxiliaryworking means includes first diode means connected in antiparallelthereto.7. An AC to AC static frequency changer apparatus according to claim 6wherein said DC voltage source is connected in parallel to said mainswitching and in series with one of said load and AC power source.8. An AC to AC static frequency changer apparatus according to claim 7wherein second diode means is provided in series with said auxiliaryswitching means having a direction opposing current flow from said mainswitch.9. An AC to AC static frequency changer apparatus according to claim 8wherein said DC voltage source includes first and second DC means ofopposite polarity connected in voltage aiding relation with respect tosaid capacitor means, said inductance means and said capacitor meanshaving one end at a junction point, third diode means being providedbetween said second DC means and said junction point, the other end ofsaid capacitor means being connected to one end of said first DC means andof said second diode means, the other end of said inductance means beingconnected to the other end of said auxiliary switching means and of saidsecond diode means.10. An AC to AC static frequency changer apparatus according to claim 9wherein said capacitor means is recharged to a limit defined by saidsecond DC means.11. An AC to AC static frequency changer apparatus according to claim 10wherein said temporary path includes said first DC means and said seconddiode means.12. An AC to AC static frequency changer apparatus according to claim 11wherein the resonant combination of said capacitor means and saidinductance means rings back via said first diode means.13. An AC to AC static frequency changer apparatus according to claim 9wherein said unilateral main switches are associated in pairs for eachphase of said AC input power source, a first main switch of such pairbeing oriented to pass current in the direction of said load and a secondmain switch of such pair being oriented to pass current in a directionfrom said load, wherein said auxiliary switching means and said seconddiode means are applied to at least the plurality of one of said first andsecond main switches.14. An AC to AC static frequency changer apparatus according to claim 9wherein two groups of said main switches are provided one positive saidgroup being in a positive bank and one negative said group being in anegative bank, at least two of said DC chopper means being associatedrespectively with said two groups of main switches, and wherein said firstand second DC means are connected in circuit with the respective positiveand negative banks to serve as said first DC means in one bank and as saidsecond DC means in the other bank.15. An AC to AC static frequency changer apparatus according to claim 9wherein said chopper means and DC voltage source are connected between oneend of said load and a neutral connection common to said polyphase ACpower source and the other end of said load.16. An AC to AC static frequency changer apparatus according to claim 14wherein four chopper means are provided each associated with one pluralityof said main switches of one type, said DC voltage source being common tosaid four chopper means.17. An AC to AC static frequency changer apparatus according to claim 16wherein said third diode means is interposed in each of said four choppermeans and is connected to said common DC voltage source.18. An AC to AC static frequency changer apparatus according to claim 16wherein said first and second DC means within said common DC voltagesource are serving as said first DC means in one bank and said secondmeans in the other bank.19. An AC to AC static frequency changer apparatus according to claim 9wherein said neutral line is connected between said polyphase power sourceand the junction point between said first and second DC means.20. An AC to AC static frequency changer apparatus according to claim 9wherein said power source includes two three phase inputs, andcorresponding main switches being connected in wye via an interphasetransformer having a central tap, said load being connected from saidcentral tap to the junction of said first and second DC means in a commonDC voltage source and to the neutral line of said AC power source; andwherein four said chopper means are provided between said common DCvoltage source and the respective ends of said reactor.21. An AC to AC static frequency changer apparatus according to claim 20wherein two said chopper means are provided between said common DC voltagesource and the respective ends of said transformers.22. An AC to AC static frequency changer apparatus according to claim 9wherein said frequency changer apparatus has three output phases eachhaving a positive and a negative bank, at least two said chopper meansbeing associated with the main switches of the respective banks inaccordance with the polarity thereof.23. An AC to AC static frequency changer apparatus according to claim 22,wherein said first and second DC are associated respectively with said twochopper means in reciprocal fashion with respect to one and the other ofsaid two chopper means.24. An AC to AC static frequency changer apparatus according to claim 23wherein said two chopper means are operated simultaneously on all of saidmain switches for all phases.25. An AC to AC static frequency changer apparatus according to claim 22wherein four chopper means are provided selectively controlled tocommutate selected phases of said main switches.26. An AC to AC static frequency changer apparatus according to claim 25wherein said first diode means are replaced by controlled unidirectionalswitches selectively controlled in accordance with the selected phases ofsaid main switches.27. An AC to AC static frequency changer apparatus according to claim 9wherein means is provided for sensing the polarity of the load currentthrough zero crossing and wherein said unilateral auxiliary switchingmeans is responsive to said sensing means.28. An AC to AC static frequency changer apparatus having first and secondterminals for developing a polyphase AC output voltage of a predeterminedfrequency at one of said first and second terminals from a polyphase ACinput voltage of a given frequency applied at the other of said first andsecond terminals for power flow therebetween comprising a plurality ofunilateral main switching means cyclically and temporarily controlled forconduction, said main switching means being associated in pairs with therespective phases of the input terminals, and a DC voltage source, DCchopper means coupled between said DC voltage source and said plurality ofmain switches, said DC chopper means including cyclically controlledunilateral auxiliary switching means for applying a reverse voltagerepresented by the difference between said DC voltage and the line toneutral input voltage to said main switches, said reverse voltage beinglarger than the incoming line voltage for any conducting one of said mainswitches and with said auxiliary switching means being controlled forconduction at an instant subsequent to conduction of one of said mainswitches to apply said reverse voltage thereto and to establish atemporary path for the load current in derivation to said conductive oneof said main switches, thereby to commutate conduction from said one mainswitch to the next main switch being controlled for conduction."}
{"WKU":"039315649","Title":"Apparatus for the direct conversion of the kinetic energy of charged","App_Date":"1973-12-06","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"L. Stewart Mims","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"H02m  746","References":"2423614;2906938;3390320;3409818;3532960;3746967","Claims":"I claim:1. Apparatus for converting the output of a high voltage D.C. source to alower voltage and a higher current comprising a plurality of powerconversion means, each of said power conversion means including:a pair of capacitors, all of the capacitors of said plurality of powerconversion means being connected electrically in series across said D.C.source output, said D.C. source charging said capacitors, each of saidpower conversion means receiving only a portion of said high voltage;transformer means including a primary and a secondary; andmeans for alternately, periodically discharging only a small portion of thecharges on said capacitors for converting said high voltage portion to anA.C. signal, said discharging means comprising:"}
{"WKU":"039315657","Title":"Inverters","App_Date":"1974-10-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Alfred Max Hase","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"H02M  7515","References":"3259827;3317816;3340453;3349314;3365636;3366866;3378752;3379955;3412309","Claims":"I claim:1. In an inverter circuit having a direct current input and an alternatingcurrent output, the combination comprising:a. an input diode connected to said direct current source with its polarityarranged so as to be conductive under normal operating conditions of saidinverter;b. an input filter choke in series with said direct current input and saidinput diode;c. a polarized capacitor across said direct current input and said inputdiode and input choke, with the positive side of said capacitor facing thepositive side of said direct current source;d. a pair of silicon controlled rectifiers facing in the same directionwith respect to said direct current input, and an unpolarized commutationcapacitor connected so as to be facing the side of each of said siliconcontrolled rectifiers which is remote from said direct current source;e. a drive circuit connected to the gates of said silicon controlledrectifiers so as to drive said silicon controlled rectifiers in a mannerso that, at any time, one or the other of them is conductive;f. a transformer having a primary and a secondary winding, where saidprimary winding is connected so that at any instant at least a portionthereof is in series with the silicon controlled rectifier which isconductive at that instant, and where said alternating current output isfrom said secondary winding;g. a pair of de-coupling diodes, each connected to said primary winding soas to have 100% of the primary winding between their connection points,the other sides of said de-coupling diodes being connected to said siliconcontrolled rectifiers so that one de-coupling diode and one siliconcontrolled rectifier are in series at each end of said primary winding;said unpolarized commutating capacitor being connected between the commonpoints of each of said series connections of said de-coupling diodes andsaid silicon controlled rectifiers;h. a commutation choke in series with said silicon controlled rectifiersand connected so that each of said silicon controlled rectifiers is inseries with at least a portion of said commutation choke;i. and a feedback circuit comprising at least one diode arranged so as tobe in counter-polarity to said polarized capacitor and connected to theopposite polarity side of said polarized capacitor at one side of saiddiode, and facing the primary winding of said transformer at the otherside of said diode;"}
{"WKU":"039315665","Title":"Temperature compensated current sensing circuit for a power supply","App_Date":"1974-12-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Geoffrey John Pask;Anastasios Moschopoulos","Assignee":"Northern Electric Company Limited","ICL_Class":"G05F  158","References":"3172032;3388318;3462673","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a current regulator for a power supply having a current control meansconnected serially between an input terminal and a corresponding outputterminal of the power supply and a control circuit connected to thecontrol means for controlling the current therethrough, a current sensingcircuit for providing a control signal to said control circuit,comprising, an inductor connected between said control means and saidoutput terminal of the power supply, said inductor comprising a coil woundon a magnetic core, a first magnetoresistive element positioned in fluxcoupling proximity to said inductor for varying said control signal inaccordance with the current flowing through the inductor, and a secondmagnetoresistive element mounted in heat sensing contact with said corebut substantially outside the flux path thereof, said secondmagnetoresistive element being responsive to the temperature of the corefor varying said control signal thereby to compensate for thermal drift ofthe power supply."}
{"WKU":"039315673","Title":"DC power supply with load current regulation","App_Date":"1974-02-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Raymond T. Kostecki","Assignee":"Warwick Electronics Inc.","ICL_Class":"G05F  158","References":"3473049;3739274;3745444;3781653;3818306;3818318;3819986","Claims":"Having described the invention, the embodiments of the invention in whichan exclusive property or privilege is claimed are defined as follows:1. In a DC power supply having an input terminal for unregulated DC inputvoltage and an output terminal for regulated DC output voltage theimprovement comprising:a switching device for interrupting the DC input current to produce currentpulses;reactive impedance means for smoothing the current pulses produced by theswitching device to produce the DC output voltage;rectifier means connected to the reactive impedance means for maintainingcurrent flow through the impedance when the switching device isnon-conductive;current sensing means connected to the rectifier means for developing acontrol signal proportional to the current pulses through the rectifiers;control circuit means for varying the switching period of the switchingdevice to regulate said output voltage comprising;first and second transistors having the collector of the first transistorcoupled to the base of the second transistor and having their emittersconnected together,a source of reference potential connected to said emitters,oscillator means connected to the base of the second transistor,voltage sensing means connected to said output terminal for developing asignal indicative of the power supply output voltage, said voltage sensingmeans being connected to the base of the first transistor, said controlcircuit operable to generate a signal for controlling the conductionperiod of the switching device, andoverload protection means comprising semiconductor switch means connectedto said current sensing means and to the base of the second transistor andoperable to disable said control circuit and shutdown said power supplywhen said control signal exceeds a predetermined level.2. The improvement of claim 1 wherein the reactive impedance comprises aninductor coupled in series between the switching device and the outputterminal.3. The DC power supply of claim 1 wherein the source of reference potentialcomprises a potentiometer having one terminal connected to ground andhaving its adjustable contact connected to the emitter of the firsttransistor.4. The DC power supply of claim 1 wherein a resistor is connected betweenthe emitter of the first transistor and the emitter of the secondtransistor and wherein a resistor is connected between the emitter of thefirst transistor and the source of reference potential.5. The DC power supply of claim 1 wherein the switch means comprises twotransistors connected in a regenerative circuit which latches in the Oncondition when said control signal exceeds a predetermined level.6. In a DC power supply having an input terminal for unregulated DC inputvoltage and an output terminal for regulated DC output voltage theimprovement comprising:a switching device for interrupting the DC input current to produce currentpulses,reactive impedance means for smoothing the current pulses produced by theswitching device to produce the output voltage,rectifier means connected to the reactive impedance means for maintainingcurrent flow through the impedance when the switching device isnon-conductive,current sensing means connected to the rectifier means for developing acontrol signal proportional to the current pulses through the rectifiers,control circuit means for varying the switching period of the switchingdevice to regulate the power supply output voltage comprising first andsecond transistors and a source of DC reference potential wherein thecollector of the first transistor is coupled to the base of the secondtransistor and the emitter of the first transistor is coupled to thesource of reference potential and to the emitter of the second transistor,the base of the first transistor being connected to the power supplyoutput terminal to receive a signal which is indicative of the powersupply output voltage, and the base of the second transistor beingconnected to a source of control signals which vary in periodic fashion,said first and second transistors operating to generate a control signalfor the switching device, andoverload protection means comprising semiconductor switching meansconnected to the current sensing means and to the base of the secondtransistor and actuated when said control signal exceeds a predeterminedlevel to connect the control means input signal to ground to disable saidcontrol circuit and shutdown said power supply."}
{"WKU":"039315681","Title":"Efficient biasing scheme for microwave diodes","App_Date":"1974-05-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Walter R. Jost;Stuart S. Horwitz","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Army","ICL_Class":"H03K 1700","References":"3087090;3292005;3374366;3514633;3633051;3654490;3710145","Claims":"We claim:1. A circuit comprising a first transistor having emitter, collector andbase elements; supply means connected to said first transistor so as toprovide a voltage potential across its elements; switching means connectedbetween the supply means and the base element of said transistor so as tocontrol the operation of said transistor; said switching means is a secondtransistor having emitter, collector and base elements; the collector ofsaid second transistor being connected to the base of said firsttransistor; the emitter of said second transistor being connected to saidsupply means; a control voltage input connected between the base andemitter of said second transistor; said first transistor is a PNPtransistor; said second transistor is a NPN transistor; said supplyvoltage is a DC supply voltage; a third PNP transistor having emitter,collector base elements; first and second diodes; said first diode beingconnected in series with an emitter collector path of said firsttransistor; said second diode being connected in series with an emittercollector path of said third transistor; the combination of said firstdiode and said first transistor collector emitter path being connected inparallel with the combination circuit of said second diode and said thirdtransistor emitter collector path; a fourth NPN transistor having emittercollector and base elements; said fourth transistor having its emittercollector path connected in series between the base of said thirdtransistor and said supply means; said control voltage input being abinary logic control voltage input; and one side of the control voltageinput being connected to the base circuit of said second transistor andthe other side of the control voltage input being connected to the basecircuit of said fourth transistor.2. A circuit as set forth in claim 1 further comprising a plurality oftransistors and diodes connected as said forth above; each of thesecircuits being connected in series with each other between the supplyvoltage means."}
{"WKU":"039315690","Title":"Narrow cavity low cost EPR spectrometer","App_Date":"1974-02-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James S. Hyde","Assignee":"Varian Associates","ICL_Class":"G01R 3308","References":"3072890;3100280;3582778;3701959","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An EPR spectrometer comprising a microwave resonant cavity, means forexciting the cavity with RF energy, said cavity being so configured that aresonant mode is established when said cavity is excited by said RFenergy, said mode having a unidirectional electric field vector and atleast one plane parallel to said unidirectional vector where the magnitudeof said vector is zero, means for applying a polarizing, relatively steadymagnetic field to the cavity in a direction parallel to saidunidirectional vector, means for supporting a low loss sample holder insaid cavity so that the holder has a longitudinal axis alignedperpendicular to said unidirectional vector and lies in one of saidplanes, said cavity and the space for the sample within the holder havingapproximately the same dimensions in the direction of said unidirectionalvector so that there is provided a relatively high filling factor for thesample in the cavity between pole faces of the means for applying themagnetic field, said dimensions being much less than one-half of awavelength of the RF energy exciting the cavity so that the cavity has arelatively low unloaded Q.2. The apparatus fo claim 1 including an oscillator having a noise spectrumequal to or comparable to a Gunn oscillator as the RF source.3. In an EPR spectrometer including a source of RF energy, a resonantcavity, said cavity being coupled to said source of RF energy and having apair of closely spaced approximately parallel walls between which anelectric microwave field vector extends in response to excitation by theRF energy source, means for providing a high DC magnetic field and arelatively low frequency magnetic field flux extending in the cavity inthe same direction as the microwave electric field vector, said closelyspaced walls being spaced a distance of no greater than approximately0.25.lambda., where .lambda. = microwave resonant wavelength of thecavity, said cavity having a relatively low unloaded Q of the order of1000, an aqueous sample holder, said cavity including means to supportsaid sample holder, said sample holder being positioned in the cavityabout a median axis of the cavity so that high magnitude electric fieldvectors intercept the sample holder walls at right angles at substantiallyall points on the surface of said sample holder exposed to non-minimalelectric field vectors, the interior volume of said holder substantiallyfilling a volume of the cavity between the walls along the median axis,the means for providing a high DC magnetic field having pole faces inclose proximity to the walls of the cavity.4. The spectrometer of claim 3 wherein a sample holder including aplurality of sample enclosures is provided and each of said sampleenclosures has boundary surfaces defining a substantially planar body,said holder being configured so that the samples are in parallel positionsrelative to each other.5. The spectrometer of claim 3 wherein said holder is made of a selectedshaped dielectric body to compensate for the tendency of the sample todistort the direction of the electric field intercepting it, at least oneof said holder or cavity being shaped so that the electric field vectorintersects the sample surface perpendicularly at substantially all pointsexposed to non-minimal electric field vector.6. The spectrometer of claim 5 wherein said holder includes convex facesthrough which the electric field extends so that substantially parallellines of the electric field pass through the sample to remove thedistortion tendency.7. The spectrometer of claim 5, said cavity having concave faces forboundaries of the electric field so that substantially parallel lines ofthe electric field pass through the sample to remove the distortiontendency.8. The EPR spectrometer of claim 3 wherein said source of RF energy has anFM noise of the order of 20 Hz RMS in a 1 KHz bandwidth 10kHz from thecarrier of the RF energy source.9. The spectrometer of claim 8 wherein the source comprises a semiconductoroscillator.10. The spectrometer of claim 9 wherein the semiconductor oscillatorcomprises a Gunn type oscillator, and wherein said means for providing ahigh DC magnetic field has a gap dimension which is of the order of 0.25.lambda..11. The spectrometer of claim 8 further including means for detecting theelectron resonance of a sample comprising a balanced homodyne microwavedetector bridge employing a single detector diode.12. An EPR spectrometer comprising a relatively low Q microrwave resonantcavity for containing a sample to be analyzed, the unloaded Q of saidcavity being of the order of 1000, a source of RF energy for exciting thecavity, said source including a semiconductor oscillator for deriving theRF excitation energy, said oscillator having a noise spectrum equal to orcomparable to a Gunn oscillator, and means for polarizing the sample witha relatively steady magnetic field.13. The spectrometer of claim 12 further including means for detecting theelectron resonance of a sample, said detecting means including a homodynemicrowave detector bridge having a single detector diode.14. The EPR spectrometer of claim 1 wherein said cavity dimension isapproximately 0.1.lambda., where .lambda. = the wavelength of the RFenergy.15. The EPR spectrometer of claim 1 wherein said sample holder is acapillary tube.16. The EPR spectrometer of claim 15 wherein said capillary tube has innerand outer diameters of 1 millimeter and 2 millimeters resectively, the RFenergy has a frequency of the order of 10 GHz, and said dimensions are ofthe order of 0.150 inches so that the cavity has a Q on the order of 1000.17. The EPR spectrometer of claim 16 wherein an aqueous sample is locatedin the capillary tube.18. In an EPR spectrometer including a source of RF energy, a resonantcavity, said cavity being coupled to said source of RF energy and having apair of closely spaced approximately parallel walls between which anelectric mirowave field vector extends in response to excitation by the RFenergy source, means for providing a high DC magnetic field and arelatively low frequency magnetic field flux extending in the cavity inthe same direction as the microwave electric field vector, the improvementcomprising, said closely spaced walls being spaced a distance of nogreater than approximately 0.25.lambda., where .lambda. 32  microwaveresonant wavelength of the cavity, said cavity having a relatively lowunloaded Q of the order of 1000, an aqueous sample holder, said cavityincluding means to support said sample holder, said sample holder beingpositioned in the cavity about the median axis so that high magnitudeelectric field vectors intercept the sample holder walls at right anglesat substantially all points on the surface of said sample holder exposedto non-minimal electric field vectors, said holder being made of aselected shaped dielectric body to compensate for the tendency of thesample to distort the direction of the electric field intercepting it, atleast one of said holder or cavity being shaped so that the electric fieldvector intersects the sample surface perpendicularly at substantially allpoints exposed to a non-minimal electric field vector, said holdercomprising a cross-shaped interior cross section, said cross shape havingfirst and second sets of mutually orthogonal arms, the first set of armsextending in a direction parallel to the direction of the electric fieldand positioned so that a longitudinal axis of the first set of arms iscoaxial with a null plane of the electric field, the second set of armsextending on both sides of the first set of arms and being positioned inthe cavity so that oppositely polarized vectors of the electric fieldsymmetrically intercept the sample portion therein substantially at rightangles.19. The spectrometer of claim 1 wherein the cavity is configured and thefrequency of exciting means are such that only one resonant mode isestablished in the cavity in response to excitation by said RF energy."}
{"WKU":"039315703","Title":"Apparatus for measuring cell volume in a gravure printing surface","App_Date":"1974-09-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Harvey F. George;Robert H. Oppenheimer;Charles G. Marrara","Assignee":"Gravure Research Institute, Inc.","ICL_Class":"G01R 3300","References":"","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An apparatus for measuring the volume of gravure printing cells which ispositioned directly on a gravure printing surface comprising:a frame;engaging means coupled to said frame for engagement with the gravureprinting surface;a probe beam movable coupled to said frame;back end support means mounted on said probe beam for contacting thegravure printing surface;a magnetic reaction probe mounted on said probe beam;a probe positioning member coupled to said probe beam; andmeans for lowering said probe beam so that said probe positioning memberengages the gravure printing surface and said magnetic reaction probe ispositioned a predetermined distance from the gravure printing surface.2. The apparatus recited in claim 1 including:means for locking said probe beam in its lowered position.3. The apparatus recited in claim 2 including:link means pivotally coupling said frame and said probe beam and coupled tosaid locking means to release said locking means and return said probebeam to its up position upon removal of the apparatus from the gravureprinting surface.4. The apparatus recited in claim 1 wherein:said engaging means and said back end support means include plasticsurfaces for engagement with the gravure printing surface.5. The apparatus as recited in claim 1 wherein:the gravure printing surface is in the form of a cylinder.6. The apparatus recited in claim 1 wherein:said lowering means includes a cam lever, a cam, biasing means, and a shaftmechanically coupling said cam lever and said cam, said cam engaging a camfollower affixed to said probe beam.7. The apparatus recited in claim 2 wherein:said locking means includes a latch lever, a latch and a shaft mechanicallycoupling said latch lever and said latch, said latch being capable ofengaging an arm coupled to said lowering means to prevent raising of saidprobe beam when said probe positioning member is in engagement with thegravure printing surface.8. The apparatus recited in claim 7 including:a link means mechanically coupled to said latch to rotate said latch andrelease said arm from engagement with said latch when said link meanspivots upon removal of the apparatus from the gravure printing surface.9. The apparatus recited in claim 1 wherein:said magnetic reaction probe includes an excitation coil and a pair ofmagnetic reaction devices.10. The apparatus recited in claim 1 wherein:said probe positioning member is dimensioned to position said magneticreaction probe from about 0.002 to about 0.010 inches above the surface ofthe gravure printing surface when said probe positioning member engagesthe gravure printing surface.11. An apparatus for measuring the volume of gravure printing cells whichis positioned directly on a gravure cylinder, comprising:a frame;a pair of transverse members coupled to said frame for engagement with thesurface of the gravure cylinder;a probe beam movably coupled to said frame;a magnetic reaction probe mounted on one end of said probe beam, saidmagnetic reaction probe including an excitation coil and a pair of Halldevices;a probe positioning member coupled to said one end of said probe beamadjacent said magnetic reaction probe, said probe positioning member beingdimensioned to position said magnetic reaction probe from about 0.002 toabout 0.010 inches above the surface of the gravure cylinder when saidprobe positioning member engages the surface of the gravure cylinder;probe beam supporting means coupled to said probe beam for engagement withthe surface of the gravure cylinder;means for lowering said probe beam so that said probe positioning memberengates the surface of the gravure cylinder, said lowering means includinga cam lever, a cam, biasing means, and a shaft mechanically coupling saidcam lever and said cam, said cam engaging a cam follower affixed to saidprobe beam;means for locking said probe beam in its lowered position, said lockingmeans including a latch lever, a latch, and a shaft mechanically couplingsaid latch lever and said latch; andlink means pivotally mounted on said frame and said probe beam, said linkmeans being mechanically coupled to said latch of said locking means torelease said locking means and return said probe beam to its up positionupon removal of the apparatus from the surface of the gravure cylinder.12. An apparatus for measuring the volume of gravure printing cells whichis positioned directly on a gravure printing surface, comprising:a frame;engaging means coupled to said frame for engagement with the gravureprinting surface;a movable probe support coupled to said frame;a magnetic reaction probe coupled to said movable probe support;probe positioning means for contacting the gravure printing surface andmaintaining a predetermined spaced relationship between the magneticreaction probe and the gravure printing surface; andlever means coupled to said movable probe support for lowering saidmagnetic reaction probe to a fixed spaced position relative to the gravureprinting surface, which fixed spaced position is determined by contact ofsaid probe positioning means with the gravure printing surface when saidmagnetic reaction probe is lowered.13. The apparatus recited in claim 12, wherein:said magnetic reaction probe includes an excitation coil and a pair ofmagnetic reaction devices.14. The apparatus recited in claim 12, including:lock means for locking said magnetic reaction probe in its loweredposition.15. The apparatus recited in claim 12, wherein:the gravure printing surface is a gravure cylinder.16. The apparatus recited in claim 12, wherein:said probe positioning means is dimensioned to position said magneticreaction probe from about 0.002 to about 0.010 inches above the gravureprinting surface when said probe positioning member engages the gravureprinting surface."}
{"WKU":"039315711","Title":"Eddy current metal surface flaw detector","App_Date":"1974-06-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Donald Henry Hocking;John Henry Calvert;Richard Dennis","Assignee":"Hocking Associates (Electronics) Limited","ICL_Class":"G01R 3312","References":"2928043;3723861","Claims":"What we claim is:1. In a device for detecting flaws in a surface of the kind having adetector coil for responding to variations in eddy currents induced insaid surface; an oscillator circuit for establishing an oscillatoryelectromagnetic field at said coil and generating an output signal varyingwith the impedance of said coil; and means actuated by said output signalto provide an indicator signal which is substantially in linear proportionto a dimension of the flaw for the purpose of actuating indicating ormeasuring means to identify the flaw, the improvement consisting in thatthe oscillator circuit includes:a tuned detector circuit comprising said detector coil,an inductor in series with said tuned circuit,a two-stage amplifier with adjustable gain, connected to said inductor,a feedback circuit maintaining zero phase shift between the said amplifierstages, anda capacitor providing capacitive reactance between the output of theamplifier and earth, means to adjust the oscillator so that the amplitudeof the output signal decreases successively when the detector coil ismoved from free air to adjacent a flawless part of the surface and thenadjacent a flaw in the surface, said actuated means including adiscriminator circuit whose discrimination level is set to pass only thoseoscillator signals whose amplitudes are less than or about equal to theamplitude of the output signal when the detector is adjacent a flawlesspart of the surface.2. The device according to claim 1 in which the tuned circuit includes acapacitor in parallel with the detector coil.3. The device according to claim 2 in which another capacitor is inparallel with the detector coil and inductor.4. The device according to claim 3 which also comprises a convertercircuit, connected between said oscillator output and the discriminatorcircuit, including AC to DC converter means to convert the oscillatoroutput to a DC output having a voltage directly proportional to theamplitude of said oscillator output.5. The device according to claim 4 wherein said converter circuit alsoincludes inverting amplifier means to convert said DC output to a secondDC output inversely proportional to the amplitude of the oscillatoroutput.6. The device according to claim 1 wherein a probe in the form of a tubularcasing houses the components of the tuned detector circuit.7. The device according to claim 4 wherein the converter circuit includesintegrating means to integrate the variations of individual oscillationsof the oscillator output over a pre-arranged short period of time.8. A detector as claimed in claim 7 comprising an indicating or measuringdevice connected to said converter circuit and responsive to the value ofthe output signal provided by the converter circuit.9. A detector as claimed in claim 7 comprising means for providing an audiosignal controlled by and proportional to the output of said convertercircuit.10. A detector as claimed in claim 9 comprising an audio-generatorincorporating threshold control, adapted to deliver an audible signal whenthe voltage supplied to the audio-generator from the converter circuitexceeds a pre-arranged threshold value.11. A detector as claimed in claim 10 wherein the audiogenerator is adaptedto provide an output signal of frequency which varies with, and inproportion to, the value of the voltage applied thereto above thethreshold value."}
{"WKU":"039315720","Title":"Method and apparatus for measuring magnetic fields utilizing odd","App_Date":"1973-08-16","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Guy Chiron;Louis Debreuil-Monet","Assignee":"Commissariat a l Energie Atomique","ICL_Class":"G01R 3302","References":"3239754;3443213;3619772;3622873;3628132","Claims":"We claim:1. A method of measuring the component of a magnetic field comprising thesteps of:applying as an excitation to a thin ferromagnetic film having an axis ofeasy magnetization, an axis of difficult magnetization, and a field ofanisotropy, a first electrical signal for producing an alternatingmagnetic field of frequency F in the direction of difficult magnetizationsaid alternating field having an amplitude less than the said anistropyfield so that the direction of magnetization of the said film undergoes anoscillation without reversal;detecting from the easy axis of said film for analysis a second electricalsignal representing the variation in the magnetic induction B within thesaid film, said signal containing analyzable odd harmonics of theexcitation frequency F, said harmonics existing only in the presence ofsaid component under measurement; andanalyzing any of the odd harmonic frequencies of the said electrical signalwhose amplitude is representative of the component of the field undermeasurement along the axis of difficult magnetization.2. A method according to claim 1, characterized in that the said thin filmis monodomain.3. A method according to claim 1, characterized in that the said film isinitially saturated by the application of a magnetic field along the axisof easy magnetization.4. A method according to claim 1 characterized in that the said secondelectrical signal is collected from the terminals of at least oneconductive loop surrounding the said film and having its axis coincidingwith the axis of easy magnetization of said film.5. The method of claim 1 wherein the magnetic film is cylindrical, having acircumferential easy axis and wherein the said second electrical signal istaken by collecting the voltage at the terminals of at least oneconductive loop surrounding the said film and having its axis directedalong the easy axis.6. The method of claim 5 wherein the said cylindrical film is alsomonodomain.7. A method according to claim 1, characterized in that a known magneticfield is applied along the axis of difficult magnetization to reduce thefield under measurement.8. A method according to claim 7, wherein said magnetic field applied alongthe axis of difficult magnetization cancels the field under measurement,said second electrical signal becoming zero.9. A magnetometer comprising:a thin ferromagnetic film having an axis of easy magnetization and axis ofdifficult magnetization and a specific anistropy field value;a single excitation winding with an axis parallel to the direction ofdifficult magnetization;current generator means for feeding said winding with a first electricalsignal comprising an alternating current having only the single frequencyF, and having an amplitude less than that which would produce a magneticfield of amplitude equal to the said anisotropy field for varying themagnetic induction B in said film at frequencies which are harmonics of F;means for detecting from the easy axis of said film a second electricalsignal representative of said variation in said magnetic induction Bwithin the said film and containing analyzable odd harmonics of F, saidharmonics existing only in the presence of an external field componentunder measurement;means for analyzing said second electrical signal including a firstselective amplifier tuned to the frequency F and receiving said electricalsignal, and a synchronous detector connected to the output of saidamplifier and set for detecting the amplitude of the amplified voltage ofsaid electrical signal at the frequency F; andmeans for reading said amplitude, which represents the magnitude of thefield under measurement along the difficult axis.10. The magnetometer of claim 9 wherein said thin film is cylindrical witha circumferential easy axis.11. The magnetometer of claim 9 wherein said means for detecting the secondelectrical signal comprises at least one conductive loop surrounding thesaid film and having its axis directed along the said easy axis.12. The magnetometer of claim 11 wherein the said film is deposited on aninsulating wire.13. The magnetometer of claim 9 wherein said film is deposited on a hollowsupport and output wherein said means for detecting the second electricalsignal comprises a conductive loop passing inside the said support.14. The magnetometer of claim 9 further including means for saturating thefilm along its easy axis.15. The magnetometer of claim 14 wherein the said film is deposited on ahollow support and said saturating means includes a conductor wire passinginside the said support.16. The magnetometer of claim 9 characterized in that the said analysismeans also comprise the following after the first selective amplifier: anoscillator of frequency f  .noteq. F; a first mixer which receives theoutput signal from the said first selective amplifier and the outputsignal from the said second oscillator; a second selective amplifier tunedto the frequency .vertline.F - f .vertline. and connected to the output ofthe said first mixer, a second mixer which receives the output signal fromthe first oscillator at frequency F and the output signal from the secondoscillator at frequency f  and which delivers a reference signal at thefrequency .vertline.F - f .vertline., and in that the synchronous detectorreceives the output signal of the second selective amplifier at thefrequency .vertline.F - f .vertline. and the reference signal of the saidsecond mixer and delivers a d.c. signal proportional to the component ofthe field under measurement.17. The magnetometer of claim 9 further including: feedback circuit meansincluding a d.c. amplifier for amplifying the signal detected by saiddetector to produce a d.c. signal proportional to said detected signal andfeeding said amplified detected signal back into said excitation winding.18. The magnetometer of claim 9 further including a compensation windinghaving its axis parallel to the axis of difficult magnetization and fed bya controllable d.c. generator.19. The magnetometer of claim 18 further including a zero detectorinstrument connected to the terminals of the electrical signal outputmeans and an indicating instrument for the current passing through thesaid compensation winding.20. The magnetometer of claim 9 wherein said analyzing means furtherincludes a second amplifier tuned to a frequency of 3F for amplifying saidsecond electrical signal and a second synchronous detector connected tothe output of said amplifier and set for detecting the amplitude of thesignal at the said output of said amplifier at the frequency 3F, andwherein said anisotropy field is set at about 3.6 Oe.21. A magnetometer comprising:a thin ferromagnetic film having an axis of easy magnetization an axis ofdifficult magnetization and a specific anisotropy field value;a single excitation winding with an axis parallel to the direction ofdifficult magnetization;current generator means for feeding said winding with an alternatingcurrent having only the single frequency F, and having an amplitude lessthan that which would produce a magnetic field of amplitude equal to thesaid anisotropy field for varying the magnetic induction in said film atfrequencies which are harmonics of F,means for withdrawing from said film an electrical signal representative ofsaid variation in said magnetic induction;means for analyzing said electrical signal including a first selectiveamplifier tuned to the frequency 3F and receiving said electrical signal,and synchronous detector connected to the output of said amplifier and setfor detecting the amplitude of the amplified voltage of said electricalsignal at the frequency 3F; andmeans for reading said amplitude.22. A method of measuring the component of a magnetic field using anoscillatory circuit comprising a winding and a capacitance, comprising thesteps of:inserting in said winding a thin ferromagnetic film having an axis of easymagnetization, an axis of difficult magnetization, and a field ofanisotropy,withdrawing from the easy axis of said film an electrical signalrepresenting the variations per unit of time of the magnetic induction insaid film,amplifying said electrical signal,feeding said winding by said amplified electrical signal, said signalgenerating a magnetic field whose amplitude is less than the saidanisotropy field, the direction of magnetization of the film thenundergoing an oscillation without reversal;and measuring the amplitude of the electrical oscillation generated in saidoscillatory circuit by said feeding of said winding.23. A magnetometer for measuring the component of a magnetic field,comprising:an oscillatory circuit with a winding and a capacitance,a thin ferromagnetic film having an axis of easy magnetization, an axis ofdifficult magnetization, and a field of anisotropy, said film beinginserted in said winding,means for withdrawing from said film an electrical signal representing thevariations per unit of time of the magnetic induction in said film,means for amplifying said electrical signal,means for feeding said winding with said amplified electrical signal toproduce an electrical oscillation in said oscillatory circuit and togenerate, a magnetic field whose amplitude is less than the saidanisotropy field, the direction of magnetization of the film thenundergoing an oscillation without reversal,means for measuring the amplitude of said electrical oscillation.24. A method of measuring the component of a magnetic field comprising thesteps of:applying to a thin ferromagnetic film having an axis of easy magnetization,an axis of difficult magnetization, a field of anisotropy, a singlealternating magnetic excitation field of frequency F in the direction ofdifficult magnetization, said alternating field having an amplitude lessthan the said anisotropy field of said film so that the direction ofmagnetization undergoes an oscillation without reversal;withdrawing from the easy axis of said film a single, unmodulatedelectrical signal containing only harmonics of F and representing thevariations per unit of time of the magnetic induction in the said film;andanalyzing any of the odd harmonic frequencies of the said electrical signalwhose amplitude is representative of the component of the field undermeasurement along the axis of difficult magnetization."}
{"WKU":"039315738","Title":"Radiation detector","App_Date":"1972-05-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Samuel Hopfer","Assignee":"General Microwave Corporation","ICL_Class":"G01R  526;G01R 2104","References":"3147436;3535523;3641439;3794914","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An electrical circuit device for detecting free space radio frequencyradiation fields, said device including:a plurality of spaced conductive strips in the form of thin resistive filmswhose thickness is small compared to the skin depth at the radiofrequency, said strips being connected in an electrically conductive path,and a non-metallic housing for said strips including means for surroundingsaid strips with dielectric material for passing said radiation fields tosaid strips,the area of spacing between adjacent ones of said strips being greater thanthe area of said strips so that the impedance of said strips is largelyresistive over a broad band of radio frequencies.2. A radiation detecting device as recited in claim 1 wherein said stripshave thermal characteristics so that changes in temperature withabsorption of radiation can be detected.3. A radiation detecting device as recited in claim 2 wherein said stripsinclude thermoelectric materials forming thermocouples.4. A radiation detecting device as recited in claim 2 wherein each of saidstrips includes a plurality of thermocouples connected in series-aidingrelation, and said strips are connected in series-aiding relation.5. A radiation detecting device as recited in claim 4 wherein a firstplurality of said strips are parallel and are arranged to be transverse toa second plurality of said strips to be respectively responsive to twotransverse components of an electric field.6. A radiation detecting device as recited in claim 5 wherein a thirdplurality of said strips are parallel and are arranged to be transverse tothe strips of said first and second pluralities to be responsive to athird transverse component of an electric field.7. A radiation detecting device as recited in claim 5 wherein the strips ofsaid first and second pluralities cross each other at the cold junctionsthereof; and further comprising dielectric means having a high thermalconductivity and connected in thermally conductive relation to said coldjunctions to provide a substantially uniform reference temperature forsaid cold junctions.8. An electrical circuit device for detecting radio frequency radiation,said device including:a plurality of spaced conductive strips in the form of thin resistive filmswhose thickness is small compared to the skin depth at the radiofrequency, said strips having substantial resistance and being connectedin an electrically conductive path, a first group of said strips beingparallel and a second group of said strips being parallel and transverseto said first strips to form a grid,the spacing between adjacent ones of said parallel strips being greaterthan the width of said strips, so that the impedance of said grid ofstrips to free space radio frequency radiation is largely resistive over abroad band of radio frequencies,and dielectric means for mounting said strips for exposure to free spaceradiation fields.9. A radiation detecting device as recited in claim 8 wherein theresistance of each of said strips is less than 100 ohms per square, andthe equivalent resistance of said grid of strips to free space radiofrequency radiation is greater than 300 ohms per square.10. A thermoelectric device for radiation detection comprising:a plurality of conductive means forming thermocouples formed of differentthin resistive films connected in a sequence of alternatingly differentfilms connected to form a plurality of cold junctions and hot junctionstherebetween;and dielectric means spaced from said hot junctions and having a highthermal conductivity and connecting said cold junctions in thermallyconductive relation to provide a substantially uniform referencetemperature for said cold junctions.11. A radiation detecting device as recited in claim 10 wherein saidconductive means includes a thin dielectric planar substrate with saidfilms deposited thereon; said dielectric means includes a block ofdielectric material having a plurality of projecting pads for engagingsaid substrate at said cold junctions.12. A radiation detecting device as recited in claim 11 wherein saiddielectric material is boron nitride.13. A radiation detecting device as recited in claim 10, wherein saiddielectric means has a substantial bulk and forms a thermal sink for saidcold junctions.14. An electrical circuit device for detecting free space radio frequencyradiation fields, said device including:a plurality of spaced conductive strips in the form of thin resistive filmswhose thickness is small compared to the skin depth at the radiofrequency, said strips being connected in an electrically conductive path,and a non-metallic housing for said strips including means for surroundingsaid strips with dielectric material for passing said radiation fields tosaid strips,said strips being arranged to present a generally resistive impedancesubstantially greater than that of free space to said radio frequencyradiation fields and having a negligible reflective characteristic,said detecting device having the property that, for a value of ohms persquare equal to free space, power absorption from free space by saidstrips is not a maximum.15. A radiation detecting device as recited in claim 14 wherein saidtransverse strips have a transmission characteristic to transmit at leastabout half of said radiation field to which said strips are exposed.16. A radiation transformer for radiation fields at radio frequenciescomprising:a non-metallic housing containing a plurality of spaced resistive stripswith the spacing between said strips being large compared to the width ofthe strips,and means for deriving electrical signals from said strips;said transformer having the property that, for a value of ohms per squareequal to free space, power absorption from free space by the transformeris not a maximum.17. A radiation transformer as recited in claim 16, and further comprisinga second plurality of spaced resistive strips having a constructionsimilar to that of the first mentioned plurality of resistive strips andoriented transversely thereto and connected electrically to said firstplurality of strips.18. A radiation transformer as recited in claim 16, wherein said stripseach include a plurality of thermocouples.19. A device for detecting free space radio frequency radiation, saiddevice comprising:an electrically continuous resistive strip with, separate portionsextending in transverse directions over an area and having a largelyresistive impedance effective over said area to free space radio frequencyradiation and substantially greater than that of free space and having anegligible reflective characteristic,said detecting device having the property that, for a value of ohms persquare equal to free space, power absorption from free space by thedetecting device is less than a maximum.20. A free space radiation detecting device as recited in claim 19, whereinsaid separate portions extend at substantially right angles correspondingrespectively to orthogonal components of the free space radiation.21. A device for detecting free space radio frequency radiation as recitedin claim 19, wherein said strip includes an additional portion extendingtransversely to said separate portions.22. A device for detecting free space radio frequency radiation, as recitedin claim 21, wherein said separate and additional portions respectivelyextend along three orthogonal axes corresponding respectively toorthogonal components of free space radiation.23. A device for detecting free space radio frequency radiation as recitedin claim 19, wherein said resistive impedance is a plurality of times thatof free space.24. A device for detecting free space radio frequency radiation as recitedin claim 19, wherein said resistive impedance is about 1,000 ohms.25. A device for detecting free space radio frequency radiation as recitedin claim 19, and further comprising a dielectric and thermally insulatingenclosure for said strip to permit the passage of free space radiofrequency radiation and to isolate said strip from external infra-redradiation.26. A device for detecting free space radio frequency radiation as recitedin claim 19, and further comprising means for connecting said resistivestrip in a measuring circuit.27. A device for detecting free space radio frequency radiation as recitedin claim 19, wherein said resistive strip has electrical characteristicsthat vary with the amount of radiation absorbed thereby.28. A device for detecting free space radio frequency radiation as recitedin claim 27, wherein each of said separate strip portions includes athermocouple.29. A device for detecting free space radio frequency radiation as recitedin claim 28, wherein each of said separate strip portions includes aplurality of series connected thermocouples extending in the direction ofthe strip portion.30. A device for detecting free space radio frequency radiation as recitedin claim 19, wherein said separate strip portions extend along orthogonalsides of a unit square, and the width of said strip is substantially lessthan the length of a side of said unit square.31. A device for detecting free space radio frequency radiation as recitedin claim 30, wherein the length of said unit square side is many times thewidth of said strip.32. A radiation detecting device as recited in claim 10, wherein saiddielectric means includes a substantially solid member for thermallyisolating said thermocouples from external infra-red radiation.33. A free space radiation detecting device as recited in claim 32, whereinsaid dielectric means further includes a second substantially solid membersimilar to the first-mentioned solid member for enclosing saidthermocouples."}
{"WKU":"039315746","Title":"Device and method of wire wrap (or other electrical interconnection","App_Date":"1974-11-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ralph W. Curtis, Jr.;William P. Byrne;Alan G. Pezzulich","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"G01R 3102;G01R 3108","References":"2977530;3348138;3439268","Claims":"What is claimed and desired to be secured by letters patent of the UnitedStates is:1. A reuseable plug-in test module for testing wire wrap board electricallyinterconnected circuits which comprises:a base made of electrically insulating material;a pair of rows of linearly aligned equally spaced socket pins secured insaid base and insulated from each other;said pins extending above and below said base,a plurality of visual light emitting means electrically connected with oneeach of said spaced socket pins above said base;an electrical conductor common to each of said light emitting means;a resistor means electrically connected between each said light emittingmeans and said common electrical conductor;an electrical conductor post connected with each end of said commonelectrical conductor;a thin insulator board secured above the upper ends of said socket pins insaid base and supported thereby,said insulator board supporting said plurality of visual light emittingmeans, said resistor means, said common electrical conductor, and saidelectrical posts connected with each end of said common electricalconductor.2. A reusable plug-in test module as claimed in claim 1; wherein each saidlight emitting means is a diode."}
{"WKU":"039315754","Title":"Filter stabilized single oscillator transceivers","App_Date":"1974-10-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Salvatore Amoroso, Jr.","Assignee":"United Technologies Corporation","ICL_Class":"H04B  140","References":"2958768;3108158;3829778","Claims":"Having thus described a typical embodiment of my invention, that which Iclaim as new and desired to secure by Letters Patent of the United Statesis:1. A transceiver, adapted for use in a duplex transceiver system includinga pair of such transceivers settable for operation with one in a mastermode and one in a slave mode, said transceiver comprising:a single, voltage-tunable oscillator having means for providing afrequency-controlling voltage input thereto;an FM receiver having the same IF frequency in the master mode as in theslave mode and including an RF mixer that drives said FM receiver and thatprovides a frequency-determining feedback signal;antenna means for transmitting and receiving microwave energy;an RF filter, having a center frequency and having a pass band greater thansaid IF frequency, the output of said RF filter coupled to said RF mixer;means for coupling energy from said oscillator to said antenna means fortransmission thereby and for simultaneously coupling energy received atsaid antenna means and a small portion of the energy of said oscillator tothe input of said RF filter; andfrequency control means including means providing an initial frequencysweep controlling voltage to the input of said oscillator to thereby sweepthe frequency of said oscillator to a frequency within said band offrequencies, and having an input connected for response to the feedbacksignal output of said RF mixer, for providing a frequency control voltageto the frequency-controlling voltage input means of said oscillator inresponse to said feedback signal and to said initial frequency sweepcontrolling voltage to establish operation of said oscillator at afrequency separated from said center frequency by one half of said IFfrequency, and further including means settable to designate saidtransceiver for operation in the master mode or the slave mode, andoperable when set in the slave mode to provide said frequency controlvoltage to establish operation of said oscillator at one side of saidcenter frequency and operable when set in the master mode to provide saidfrequency control voltage to establish operation of said oscillator at theother side of said center frequency.2. A transceiver adapted for use in a duplex transceiver system including apair of transceivers, said transceiver comprising:a single, voltage-tunable microwave oscillator having means for providing afrequency-controlling voltage input thereto;an FM receiver having a mixer with the same design IF frequency in both ofsuch transceivers in the pair;antenna means for transmitting and receiving microwave energy;means for coupling energy from said oscillator to said antenna means fortransmission thereby, and for simultaneously coupling energy received atsaid antenna means and a small portion of the energy of said oscillator tothe input of said FM receiver;input means for receiving transmitter input modulation and providing aninput modulation signal;auxiliary modulation means for providing internally-generated modulation;combining means connected to said input means and to the output of saidauxiliary modulation means for providing a combined modulation signal asthe combination of said input modulation signal and saidinternally-generated modulation signal;means responsive to said combining means for providing a modulation controlsignal to said frequency-controlling voltage input means for controllingthe frequency of oscillation of said microwave oscillator in response tosaid combined modulation signal; andfrequency modulation stabilizer means connected for response to the outputof said FM receiver for controlling the oscillator with said auxiliarymodulated oscillator signal for providing to said frequency-controllingvoltage input means a closed loop frequency stability voltage.3. A transceiver adapted for use in a duplex transceiver system including apair of transceivers, said transceiver comprising:a single, voltage-tunable microwave oscillator having means for providing afrequency-controlling voltage input thereto;an FM receiver having a mixer with the same design IF frequency in both ofsuch transceivers in the pair;antenna means for transmitting and receiving microwave energy;means for coupling energy from said oscillator to said antenna means fortransmission thereby, and for simultaneously coupling energy received atsaid antenna means and a small portion of the energy of said oscillator tothe input of said FM receiver;input means for receiving transmitter input modulation and providing aninput modulation signal;auxiliary modulation means for providing internally-generated modulation;combine means responsive to said auxiliary modulation means and to saidinput means for providing modulation signals to said frequency-controllingvoltage input means as a function of said internally-generated modulation;a resonant filter means connected for response to the output of saidoscillator to provide a modulated signal having its phase dependent onwhether the frequency of the output of said oscillator is above or belowthe resonant frequency of said resonant means and its amplitude dependenton the amount of difference therebetween, within a band of frequencydifferences; andfrequency control means including a phase sensitive demodulator having itssignal input connected for response to the output of said resonant meansand its reference input connected to said auxiliary modulation means forproviding to said frequency-controlling voltage input means a closed loopfrequency stability voltage derived from said modulated signal.4. In a transceiver, adapted for use in a duplex transceiver systemincluding a pair of such transceivers settable for operation with one in amaster mode and one in a slave mode, said transceiver comprising:a single voltage-tunable microwave oscillator;an FM receiver;antenna means for transmitting and receiving microwave energy;means for coupling energy from said oscillator to said antenna means fortransmission thereby, and for simultaneously coupling energy received atsaid antenna means and a small portion of the energy of said oscillator tothe input of said FM receiver;transmitter input means for receiving a transmitter modulation signal andproviding a modulation input signal;auxiliary modulation means providing a low-level internal modulationsignal;control means including a combiner and a variable gain amplifier responsiveto said transmitter input means and to said auxiliary modulation means forcontrolling the frequency of oscillation of said microwave oscillator inresponse to the sum of said input modulation signal and said internalmodulation signal;cancellation means responsive to the output of said FM receiver and to saidauxiliary modulation means for cancelling similar modulation from theoutput of said FM receiver and for thereby providing a receiver outputsignal; andgain control means responsive to said cancellation means for controllingthe gain of said variable gain amplifier, in a manner to null the internalmodulation in the receiver output signal to zero.5. In a transceiver, adapted for use in a duplex transceiver systemincluding a pair of such transceivers settable for operation with one in amaster mode and one in a slave mode, said transceiver comprising:a single microwave oscillator having frequency-controlling voltage inputmeans;an FM receiver;antenna means for transmitting and receiving microwave energy;means for coupling energy from said oscillator to said antenna means fortransmission thereby, and for simultaneously coupling energy received atsaid antenna means and a small portion of the energy of said oscillator inmixed fashion to the input of said FM receiver;transmitter input means for receiving a transmitter modulation signal andproviding a modulation input signal;auxiliary modulation means providing an internal modulation signal;combining means connected to said input means and to the output of saidauxiliary modulation means to provide a combined modulation signal as thecombination of said input modulation signal and said internal modulationsignal;a variable gain amplifier having a signal input and a gain control input,said signal input being connected to said combining means, the output ofsaid variable gain amplifier being connected to said frequency-controllingvoltage input of said oscillator;delay means responsive to said combining means for providing a delayedcombined modulation signal which is delayed by a period of timesubstantially equal to the signal propagation time from the input of saidvariable gain amplifier through said FM receiver;cancellation means responsive to the output of said FM receiver and to theoutput of said delay means for selectively combining said delayed combinedmodulation signal with the output of said FM receiver in voltage combiningrelationship to provide a receiver output signal having transmitter inputmodulation and internal modulation substantially cancelled therefrom; andmeans responsive to the receiver output signal of said cancellation meansand to said delayed internal modulation signal for providing a gaincontrol signal to the gain control input of said variable gain amplifier,said gain control signal adjusting the gain of said variable gainamplifier so that the magnitude of internal modulation included in theoutput of said FM receiver is adjusted with respect to the magnitude ofdelayed internal modulation provided by said delay unit so that thecombined modulation in said receiver output signal is substantially nulledto zero.6. A transceiver adapted for use in a duplex transceiver system including apair of transceivers, said transceiver comprising:a single, voltage-tunable microwave oscillator having means for providing afrequency-controlling voltage input thereto;an FM receiver having the same design IF frequency in both of suchtransceivers in a pair;antenna means for transmitting and receiving microwave energy;means for coupling energy from said oscillator to said antenna means fortransmission thereby, and for simultaneously coupling energy received atsaid antenna means and a small portion of the energy of said oscillator tothe input of said FM receiver;input means for receiving transmitter input modulation and providing aninput modulation signal;auxiliary modulation means for providing internally-generated modulation;combining means connected to said input means and to the output of saidauxiliary modulation means for providing a combined modulation signal asthe combination of said input modulation signal and saidinternally-generated modulation signal;means including a variable gain amplifier responsive to said combiningmeans for providing a modulation control signal to saidfrequency-controlling voltage input means for controlling the frequency ofoscillation of said microwave oscillator in response to said combinedmodulation signal;cancellation means responsive to the output of said FM receiver and to saidcombining means for cancelling similar modulation from the output of saidFM receiver and for thereby providing a receiver output signal;gain control means responsive to said cancellation means and to saidauxiliary modulation means for controlling the gain of said variable gainamplifier in a manner to null the internal modulation in the receiveroutput signal to zero; andfrequency control means connected for response to the output of saidoscillator and to said auxiliary modulation means for providing to saidfrequency-controlling voltage input means a closed loop frequencystability voltage."}
{"WKU":"039315762","Title":"Automatic gain control circuit for radio receiver","App_Date":"1975-01-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Antal Csicsatka;Leslie H. String","Assignee":"General Electric Company","ICL_Class":"H04B  116;H03G  528","References":"2858423;2947859;3012137;3495031;3852522;3872387","Claims":"What is new and novel and desired to be secured by Letters Patent of theUnited States is:1. A radio receiving apparatus including an intermediate frequencyamplifier stage and a detector stage coupled to said amplifier stage andmeans for varying the gain of said intermediate frequency amplifier stageinversely respective the amplitude of a carrier wave being processedthrough said intermediate frequency amplifier stage and said detector,said intermediate frequency amplifier including a tuned circuit, and saiddetector including means for developing a voltage proportional to theamplitude of a carrier wave being processed by said detector, and saidmeans for varying the gain of said intermediate frequency amplifierincluding a first transistor in a normally saturated conductivitycondition in the absence of a processed carrier wave and coupled to saiddetector for receiving said detector developed voltage to decrease theconductivity of said first transistor in the presence of a processedcarrier wave, a second transistor connected in an emitter follower circuitconfiguration including an emitter follower output and coupled to theoutput of said first transistor, said second transistor beingnon-conductive during the saturated condition of said first transistor andbecoming increasingly conductive as the conductivity of said firsttransistor decreases, said emitter follower output being connected to saidtuned circuit of said intermediate frequency amplifier to decrease the Qof said tuned circuit and thereby reduce the gain of said intermediatefrequency amplifier as said conductivity of said second transistorincreases.2. The radio receiving apparatus as defined in claim 1 and wherein saidtuned circuit comprises a capacitor and inductor in parallel and theemitter of said second transistor is connected to said inductor wherebythe current flowing in said emitter follower output flows through saidinductor."}
{"WKU":"039315770","Title":"Radio receiver protection arrangement","App_Date":"1974-07-02","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert Leigh Barnett","Assignee":"Amalgamated Wireless (Australia) Limited","ICL_Class":"H04B  118","References":"2062691;2097272;2767309;3372336;3587017","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A radio receiver protection arrangement comprising:an aerial input terminal;an output terminal adapted to be coupled to the input of a radio receiver;an aerial lead connected between said input and output terminals;rectifier means connected to said aerial lead for providing a firstunidirectional signal representative of peak voltage on said aerial lead;rectifier means coupled to said aerial lead for providing a secondunidirectional signal representative of current through said aerial lead;means for combining said first and second signals to form a third signalrepresentative of the aggregate levels of said first and second signals;an electronic switch connected between said aerial lead and ground; andmeans responsive to said third signal for closing said electronic switch toshunt said input signal therethrough at a predetermined level of saidthird signal.2. The radio receiver protection arrangement recited in claim 1 wherein:said rectifier means for providing a first signal comprises a solid statepeak rectifier;said rectifier means for providing said second signal comprises:"}
{"WKU":"039315789","Title":"Multiple frequency band receiver tuner system using single,","App_Date":"1973-12-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Norman C. Gittinger","Assignee":"General Electric Company","ICL_Class":"H04B  116","References":"2902598;3264566","Claims":"What I claim as new and desire to secure by Letters Patent of the UnitedStates is:1. A multiple frequency band receiver tuner system comprisinga first mixer circuit having a first input adapted to be connected to afirst source of received radio frequency signals in a first frequencyband,a first radio frequency amplifier circuit tunable over a second frequencyband,a single non-bandswitched local oscillator circuit tunable over a selectedthird frequency band for generating a fixed frequency radio frequencysignal and being gangtuned with said first amplifier, said first mixerhaving a second input in communication with an output of said localoscillator so that a first intermediate frequency signal in a fourthfrequency band is developed at an output of said first mixer,first switch means connected between the output of said first mixer and aninput to said first amplifier for selectively connecting the input of saidfirst amplifier to the output of said first mixer in a first operatingmode of said first switch means, and for connecting the input of saidfirst amplifier to a second source of received radio frequency signals ina fifth frequency band which provides separate signals in at least twoseparate portions of said fifth frequency band in a second operating mode,a second mixer circuit having a first input connected to an output of saidfirst amplifier and a second input in communication with the output ofsaid local oscillator so that a second intermediate frequency signal in asixth frequency band is developed at an output of said second mixer, andmeans connected between the output of said local oscillator and at leastone of the second inputs to said first and second mixers for changing thelocal oscillator frequency applied thereto by at least a factor of two sothat the local oscillator frequency signals applied to said first andsecond mixers differ in frequency by at least a factor of two,second switch means interconnected between the output of said localoscillator and an output of said local oscillator frequency changing meansand the second input of said second mixer for selectively connecting thesecond input of said second mixer to the output of said local oscillatorin a first operating mode of said second switch means when a radiofrequency signal in a first of at least two separate portions of the fifthfrequency band is being received, and for connecting the second input ofsaid second mixer to an output of said local oscillator frequency changingmeans in a second operating mode of said second switch means when a radiofrequency signal in a second of the at least two separate portions of thefifth frequency band is being received,the second frequency band including the fourth frequency band so that saidfirst amplifier provides a dual function as a tunable radio frequencyamplifier for the received signals in the fifth frequency band in thesecond operating mode of said first switch means, and as a tunableintermediate frequency amplifier for the signals in the fourth frequencyband in the first operating mode of said switch means, and said tunersystem therefore operates in a single frequency conversion mode with saidfirst switch means in the second operating mode and in a double frequencyconversion mode with said first switch means in the first operating mode.2. The multiple frequency band receiver tuner system set forth in claim 1and further comprisinga preselector circuit gang-tuned with said local oscillator and firstamplifier and being tunable over the first frequency band, saidpreselector having an input connected to the first source of receivedradio frequency signals, and an output connected to the first input ofsaid first mixer.3. The multiple frequency band receiver tuner system set forth in claim 2and further comprisinga second radio frequency amplifier circuit having an input connected to anoutput of said preselector and an output connected to the first input ofsaid first mixer, said second amplifier having a frequency range includingthe first frequency band.4. The multiple frequency band receiver tuner system set forth in claim 3whereinsaid preselector and second amplifier form an integral circuit so that saidsecond amplifier is also tunable over the first frequency band andgang-tuned with said local oscillator and first amplifier.5. The multiple frequency band receiver tuner system set forth in claim 3whereinsaid preselector and second amplifier are separate circuits and said secondamplifier is of the broad band nontunable type.6. The multiple frequency band receiver tuner system set forth in claim 1whereinthe first of the at least two separate portions of the fifth frequency bandis an upper frequency portion thereof, and the second portion is a lowerfrequency portion thereof, andsaid second switch means having a first input connected to the output ofsaid local oscillator, a second input connected to an output of said localoscillator frequency changing means, and an output connected to the secondinput of said second mixer.7. The multiple frequency band receiver tuner system set forth in claim 6whereinsaid local oscillator frequency changing means comprisesa frequency multiplier circuit having an input connected to the output ofsaid local oscillator, and an output connected to the second input of saidfirst mixer so that with said first and second switch means each in thefirst operating mode a corresponding harmonic of the local oscillatorfrequency is applied to said first mixer and the fundamental frequency isapplied to said second mixer when the radio frequency signals in the firstfrequency band are being received,with said first and second switch means respectively in the second andfirst operating modes the fundamental frequency of the local oscillator isapplied to said second mixer when the radio frequency signals in the upperfrequency portion of the fifth frequency band are being received, anda frequency divider circuit having an input connected to the output of saidlocal oscillator, and an output connected to the second input of saidsecond switch means so that with said first and second switch means, eachin the second operating mode, a corresponding subharmonic of the localoscillator frequency is applied to said second mixer when the radiofrequency signals in the lower frequency portion of the fifth frequencyband are being received.8. The multiple frequency band receiver tuner system set forth in claim 1whereinthe second source of received radio frequency signals in the fifthfrequency band provides separate signals in at least two separate portionsof the fifth frequency band,and further comprising"}
{"WKU":"039315797","Title":"Digital signal seeking tuning system","App_Date":"1974-04-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John Ma;Akio Tanaka","Assignee":"Zenith Radio Corporation","ICL_Class":"H04B  134","References":"3818353;3845394","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a television tuning system including a voltage controllableoscillator for selectively tuning a plurality of fixed frequency bandwidthtelevision channels in a predetermined range of frequencies, channelnumber selection means for sequencing through channel numbers, comparisonmeans, voltage generating means for changing the tuning frequency of saidvoltage controllable oscillator under the control of said comparisonmeans, and signal recognition means, the method of operating said tuningsystem comprising the steps of:encoding on a sample basis the tuning frequency of said oscillator intochannel number information related to the channel number of correspondingreceivable television channels;initiating the channel number selection means to produce a change to anadjacent channel number;driving said voltage controllable oscillator from said voltage generatormeans;comparing the channel number information from said channel number selectionmeans with the encoded channel number information from said oscillator todetermine a preselected condition in said comparison means, saidpreselected condition occurring only when said oscillator tuning is withina restricted frequency range about the frequency corresponding to thechannel number from said selection means; andreinitiating the channel number selection means to produce a change toanother channel number if no television signal is recognized by saidsignal recognition means during the existence of said preselectedcondition.2. The method as recited in claim 1 wherein said driving step produces anincrementally changing oscillator output.3. The method of claim 2 wherein said driving step is performed byestablishing corresponding incremental changes in said voltage generatingmeans.4. The method of claim 3 wherein said voltage generating means drives saidvoltage controllable oscillator until said preselected condition exists insaid comparison means.5. The method as recited in claim 4 wherein said initiating andreinitiating steps are performed by changing the channel number by one.6. The method as recited in claim 5 further including the step ofdetermining coincidence between the occurrence of said predeterminedcondition and recognition of a television signal.7. The method as recited in claim 6, wherein reinitiating said channelnumber selection means is delayed until said coincidence determination isperformed.8. A television tuning system, comprising:a voltage controllable oscillator for selectively tuning a plurality offixed frequency bandwidth television channels in a predetermined range offrequencies;voltage generator means for changing the tuning frequency of said voltagecontrollable oscillator;means for encoding on a sample basis the tuning frequency of saidoscillator into channel number information related to the channel numberof the corresponding receivable television channel;channel number selection means for sequencing through channel numbers;comparison means, controlling said voltage generator means, for comparingthe channel number information from said channel number selection meanswith the encoded channel number information from said oscillator todetermine a preselected condition in said comparison means, saidpreselected condition occurring only when said oscillator tuning is withina restricted frequency range about the frequency corresponding to thechannel number from said selection means; andsignal recognition means for enabling said channel number selection meansto change to another channel number if no television signal is recognized.9. The television tuning system of claim 8 wherein the oscillator frequencyoutput is incrementally changed.10. The television tuning system of claim 9 wherein said comparison meansstops said voltage generator means upon occurrence of said preselectedcondition, said voltage generating means maintaining its last generatedvoltage.11. The television tuning system of claim 10 wherein said channel numberselection means includes a digital counter for successively sequencingthrough channel numbers.12. The television tuning system of claim 11 further including acoincidence gate having a first input coupled to said comparison means, asecond input coupled to said signal recognition means and an outputcoupled to said channel number selection means, said gate disabling saidselection means and arresting further sequencing of channel numbers uponsimultaneous occurrence of said preselected condition and recognition of atelevision signal.13. The television tuning system of claim 12 further including delay meansdelaying sequencing of said channel number selection means afteroccurrence of said preselected condition.14. The television tuning system of claim 13 wherein said delay means arecoupled between said comparison means and said coincidence gate.15. The television tuning system of claim 14 wherein said signalrecognition means is operated continuously and includes a signal levelthreshold detection means.16. A television tuning system comprising:a voltage controllable local oscillator for selectively tuning a pluralityof fixed frequency bandwidth television channels in a predetermined rangeof frequencies;clock generator means producing recurrent and distinct timing intervals;channel number selection means comprising a two digit counter forsequencing through channel numbers;oscillator frequency counting means, controlled by said clock generatormeans, producing channel number information and intrachannel spacinginformation;comparison means, controlled by said clock generator coupled between saidchannel number selection means and said oscillator frequency countingmeans for comparing respective channel number information from saidselection means and from said counting means and including means forcomparing said intrachannel spacing information with predetermined spacinginformation, said comparison means producing a first control signal onlywhen said oscillator tuning is within a restricted frequency range aboutthe frequency corresponding to the channel number from said selectionmeans;voltage generator means, controlled by said comparison means, for changingthe tuning frequency of said voltage controllable oscillator until saidfirst control signal is generated by said comparison means;signal recognition means producing a second control signal when atelevision signal is received; andcoincidence means coupled to said signal recognition means, responsive tosaid first and second control signals being simultaneously present fordisabling said channel number selection means to arrest further sequencingof channel numbers.17. The television tuning system of claim 16 wherein said coincidence meansincludes a coincidence gate, and time delay means delaying enabling ofsaid coincidence gate.18. The television tuning system of claim 17 wherein said coincidence gateand said time delay means are an integral part of said channel numberselection means.19. The television tuning system of claim 18 wherein said time delay meansinclude a binary counter coupled to said clock generator means; and saidcoincidence gate includes an AND gate.20. The television tuning system of claim 19 wherein said signalrecognition means includes means for determining the magnitude of saidreceived television signal and threshold means for establishing a minimumsignal magnitude for recognition.21. The television tuning system of claim 20 wherein said oscillatorfrequency counting means includes units and tens counters for producingchannel numbers, for producing said intrachannel spacing information and amodular scaler in the form of residues corresponding to fractionalintrachannel frequencies.22. The television tuning system of claim 21 wherein said oscillatorfrequency counting means is asynchronously gated by said clock generatormeans, said preselected condition being determined by the occurrence ofselected adjacent residues in said modular scaler.23. The television tuning system of claim 22 wherein the modulus of saidmodular scaler is a multiple of six providing residues corresponding tointrachannel frequencies of a submultiple of 1 MHz.24. The television tuning system of claim 23 wherein said adjacent residuesdefine a restricted frequency range which is non-symmetrically disposedrelative to the frequency of the picture carrier.25. The television tuning system of claim 24 wherein said restrictedfrequency range is located to discriminate against lower adjacent channelsignals, and wherein the said restricted frequency range is substantially1 MHz wide.26. The television tuning system of claim 25 wherein said signalrecognition means comprises an automatic gain control circuit.27. The television tuning system of claim 26 further including automaticfrequency control means for maintaining said voltage controlled oscillatorlocked to received television signals.28. The television tuning system of claim 27 further including illegalchannel number detection means in said channel number selection means forskipping numbers not corresponding to FCC allocated channel numbers.29. The television tuning system of claim 27 wherein said channel numberselection means further includes a flip/flop coupled to said coincidencegate for maintaining a predetermined state corresponding to therecognition of a received television signal within said restrictedfrequency range.30. The television tuning system of claim 27 wherein said channel numberselection means further include illegal channel number detection means forskipping numbers not corresponding to FCC allocated channel numbers and aflip/flop coupled to said coincidence gate for maintaining a predeterminedstate corresponding to the recognition of a received television signalwithin said restricted frequency range.31. The television tuning system of claim 30 further including keyboardmeans coupled to said channel number selection means for initiating saidchannel number selection means to produce a change to an adjacent channelnumber.32. The television tuning system of claim 31 wherein said keyboard means iscoupled to the two digit counter of said channel number selection means,said keyboard means further providing for the direct input of two digitchannel numbers to override the signal seeking operation and tune thetuner to the restricted frequency range corresponding to the direct inputchannel number.33. The television tuning system of claim 20 wherein said channel numberselection means further include illegal channel detection means forskipping numbers not corresponding to FCC allocated channel numbers.34. The television tuning system of claim 31 wherein said illegal channeldetection means comprises logic circuitry coupled to said counter forsequencing said counter to an adjacent count when numbers 00, 01, and83-99 occur.35. The television tuning system of claim 20 wherein said channel numberselection means further includes state retention means for maintaining apredetermined state corresponding to operation of said coincidence gate.36. The television tuning system of claim 33 wherein said state retentionmeans consists of a flip/flop.37. The television tuning system of claim 20 wherein said channel numberselection means further include illegal channel number detection means forskipping numbers not corresponding to FCC allocated channel numbers and aflip/flop coupled to said coincidence gate for maintaining a predeterminedstate corresponding to the recognition of a received television signalwithin said restricted frequency range.38. The television tuning system of claim 37 further including keyboardmeans coupled to said channel number selection means for initiating saidchannel number selection means to produce a change to an adjacent channelnumber.39. The television tuning system of claim 38 wherein said keyboard means iscoupled to the two digit counter of said channel number selection means,said keyboard means further providing for the direct input of two digitchannel numbers to override the signal seeking operation and tune thetuner to the restricted frequency range corresponding to the direct inputchannel number."}
{"WKU":"039315800","Title":"Digital line receiver circuit","App_Date":"1974-06-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Edward F. Hebda","Assignee":"Xerox Corporation","ICL_Class":"H04B  336","References":"3584310;3790894","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A circuit for detecting the state changes of a digital video waveformcomprising:a. a differential amplifier having a first and second input and an output,b. means for applying a digital signal to said first and second inputs, andc. said second input having connected thereto"}
{"WKU":"039315819","Title":"High-efficiency, switching, power amplifier","App_Date":"1974-09-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Louis J. Kush, Jr.;Claus P. Janota;Richard D. Koontz;Leon H. Sibul","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy","ICL_Class":"H03F  3217;H03F  3387","References":"3579132;3694764","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A switching, power amplifier comprising:signal conditioner means for receiving a signal to be transmitted andconverting said signal to a plurality of voltage logic levels;power source means;electrical load means;a plurality of switching means, arranged in a bridge configuration forswitching a current from said power source means through said electricalload means to a ground potential;a plurality of voltage-transforming means, a different,voltage-transforming means coupled to each of said switching means forswitching its respective switching means in accordance with apredetermined signal condition;driver means for receiving said plurality of voltage logic levels from saidsignal conditioner means and,energizing opposite pairs of voltage-transforming means in accordance witheach voltage logic level change by first removing the power from thepreviously energized pair of voltage-transforming means and after apredetermined time delay approximately equal to the turn-off time of saidswitching means energizing the opposite pair of voltage-transformingmeans, said energized voltage-transforming means switching theirrespective switching means when those voltage-transforming means havereached said predetermined signal condition.2. A switching power amplifier as defined by claim 1, wherein saidswitching means comprises a transistor.3. A switching power amplifier as defined by claim 1, wherein saidelectrical load means comprises:transducer means; andinductive reactance means coupled in electrical series with said transducermeans to form a series resonant circuit at a desired fundamentalfrequency.4. A switching, power amplifier as defined by claim 1, wherein said signalconditioner comprises:a buffer amplifier,a bandpass filter coupled to the output of said buffer amplifier; anda voltage limiter coupled to said bandpass filter for converting the outputfrom said bandpass filter to two voltage logic levels.5. A switching power amplifier as defined in claim 1, wherein said voltagetransforming means is a voltage transformer with at least one secondarywinding and one primary winding.6. A switching power amplifier as defined in claim 5, wherein said drivermeans comprises:a gate logic circuit including a shift register for adding a time delay tosaid voltage logic levels received from said signal conditioner means;an electrical switch connected to the output from said gate logic circuitand energized in accordance with said voltage logic levels; anda second power source coupled through the primaries of said plurality ofvoltage transformers and through said electrical switch to a groundpotential.7. A switching power amplifier as defined in claim 5, wherein the senses ofsaid primary and secondary windings of said plurality of voltagetransformers are chosen so that said switching means coupled to eachvoltage transformer is switched only when the current is collapsing in theprimary of its respective voltage transformer.8. A method for switching the switching means contained in the arms of apower amplifier bridge, each arm of said bridge being coupled to thesignal to be transmitted through a voltage transformer having at least oneprimary winding, the voltage transformers in opposite arms of said bridgebeing connected to operate simultaneously as a pair, the method comprisingthe steps of:receiving a signal to be transmitted;converting said signal to be transmitted to voltage logic levels;inserting a predetermined time delay before each voltage logic level changeto prevent a bridge short circuit due to slow switching of said switchingmeans;running a current alternately through the primaries of the pairs of voltagetransformers in accordance with said delayed, voltage logic levels; andupon the collapse of the current running through the primaries of a pair oftransformers, switching into a conductive state said switch means coupledto those transformers."}
{"WKU":"039315827","Title":"Isolated DC amplifier circuit","App_Date":"1974-08-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kazuo Kato;Yasuji Kamata","Assignee":"Hitachi, Ltd.","ICL_Class":"H03F  338","References":"3193773;3825846;3835408","Claims":"We claim:1. An isolated DC amplifier circuit comprising:a DC amplifier;an electronic switching element connected to the output terminal of said DCamplifier;a pulse generator connected to said electronic switching element;a pulse transformer having a primary winding and a secondary winding, oneterminal of the primary winding being connected to the output terminal ofsaid electronic switching element;a first rectifier, one terminal of which being connected to the oneterminal of the primary winding of said pulse transformer;a first condenser, one terminal of which is connected to the other terminalof said first rectifier, and the other terminal of said first condenserbeing connected to the other terminal of the primary winding of said pulsetransformer;feedback means connected between the junction point of said first rectifierand said first condenser, and a negative input terminal of said DCamplifier;a second rectifier, one terminal of which is connected to one terminal ofthe secondary winding of said pulse transformer, the polarity of theprimary winding and secondary winding of said pulse transformer beingdefined so that both said first and second rectifiers are simultaneouslyrendered conductive, when said pulse transformer is energized; anda second condenser one of which terminal being connected to the otherterminal of said second rectifier, and the other terminal of said secondcondenser being connected to the other terminal of the secondary windingof said pulse transformer.2. An isolated DC amplifier circuit defined in claim 1, further comprisinga resistor connected across said first condenser, the amount of resistanceof said resistor being adjusted substantially equivalent to a loadconnected across said second condenser.3. An isolated DC amplifier circuit defined in claim 1, further comprising:an input pulse transformer having a primary winding and a secondarywinding, one terminal of the primary winding of said input pulsetransformer being connected to a positive input terminal of said DCamplifier through a first resistor;a first diode connected to the other terminal of the primary winding ofsaid input pulse transformer;a third condenser connected to the other terminal of said first diode andthe other terminal of said third condenser being connected to the oneterminal of the primary winding of said input pulse transformer;a second resistor connected between the junction point of said first diodeand said third consenser and the positive input terminal of said DCamplifier;a third resistor connected between the other terminal of the primarywinding of said input pulse transformer and the one terminal of said firstrectifier;a second diode connected to one terminal of the secondary winding of saidinput pulse transformer; anda fourth condenser, one terminal of which is connected to the otherterminal of said second diode and the other terminal of said fourthcondenser being connected to the other terminal of the secondary windingof said input pulse transformer.4. An isolated DC amplifier circuit comprising:a DC amplifier;an electronic switching element connected to the output terminal of said DCamplifier;a pulse generator connected to said electronic switching element;a first and a second pulse transformer, each having a primary winding and asecond winding, both primary windings of said first and second pulsetransformers being connected in parallel and one terminal of the primarywinding of said first pulse transformer being connected to the outputterminal of said electronic switching element;a first rectifier, one terminal of which is connected to the one terminalof the primary winding of said first pulse transformer;a first condenser, one terminal of which is connected to the other terminalof said first rectifier, and the other terminal of said first condenserbeing connected to the other terminal of the primary winding of said firstpulse transformer;feedback means connected between the junction point of said first rectifierand said first condenser, and a negative input terminal of said DCamplifier;a second rectifier, one terminal of which is connected to one terminal ofthe secondary winding of said first pulse transformer;a second condenser, one terminal of which is connected to the otherterminal of said second rectifier and the other terminal of said secondcondenser being connected to the other terminal of the secondary windingof said first pulse transformer;a third rectifier, one terminal of which is connected to one terminal ofthe secondary winding of said second pulse transformer;the polarity of the respective primary windings and secondary windings ofsaid first and second pulse transformers being defined so that said first,second and third rectifiers are simultaneously rendered conductive whensaid first and second pulse transformers are energized;a third condenser, one terminal of which is connected to the other terminalof said third rectifier and the other terminal of said third condenserbeing connected to the other terminal of the secondary winding of saidsecond pulse transformer; anda resistor connected across said first condenser, the amount of resistanceof said resistor being adjusted substantially equivalent to respectiveloads connected across said second and third condenser.5. An isolated DC amplifier circuit comprising:a DC amplifier;an electronic switching element connected to the output terminal of said DCamplifier;a pulse generator connected to said electronic switching element;a first and a second pulse transformer, each having a primary winding andsecondary winding, one terminal of the primary winding of said first pulsetransformer being connected to the output terminal of said electronicswitching element through a first diode, one terminal of the primarywinding of said second pulse transformer being also connected to theoutput terminal of said electronic switching element through a seconddiode, and the other terminals of the respective primary windings of saidfirst and second pulse transformers being connected in common, either saidfirst pulse transformer or said second pulse transformer being energizeddepending upon the polarities of DC signals applied to an input terminalof said DC amplifier;a first rectifier connected to the one terminal of the primary winding ofsaid first pulse transformer;a second rectifier connected to the one terminal of the primary winding ofsaid second pulse transformer, the other terminals of said first andsecond rectifiers being connected in common;a first condenser one terminal of which is connected to the other terminalof said first rectifier and the other terminal of said first condenserbeing connected to the other terminal of the primary winding of said firstpulse transformer;feedback means connected between the junction point of said first rectifierand said first condenser and a negative input terminal of said DCamplifier;a third rectifier connected to one terminal of the secondary winding ofsaid first pulse transformer;a fourth rectifier connected to one terminal of the secondary winding ofsaid second pulse transformer, the other terminals of the respectivesecondary windings of said first and second pulse transformers beingconnected in common;a second condenser, one terminal of which is connected to the otherterminal of said third rectifier and the other terminal of said secondcondenser being connected to the other terminal of the secondary windingof said first pulse transformer; anda third condenser, one terminal of which is connected to the other terminalof said fourth rectifier and the other terminal of said third condenserbeing connected to the other terminal of the secondary winding of saidsecond pulse transformer.6. An isolated DC amplifier circuit comprising:a DC amplifier;a first bidirectional switching element connected to the output terminal ofsaid DC amplifier;a pulse generator connected to a gate of said first bidirectional switchingelement;a pulse transformer having a primary winding and secondary winding, oneterminal of the primary winding of said pulse transformer being connectedto the output terminal of said first bidirectional switching element;a second bidirectional switching element connected to the one terminal ofthe primary winding of said pulse transformer, a gate of said secondbidirectional switching element being connected to said pulse generator;a first condenser one terminal of which being connected to the otherterminal of said second bidirectional switching element and the otherterminal of said first condenser being connected to the other terminal ofthe primary winding of said pulse transformer;feedback means connected between the junction point of said secondbidirectional switching element and said first condenser and a negativeinput terminal of said DC amplifier;a driving pulse transformer having a primary winding and a secondarywinding, one terminal of the primary winding of said driving pulsetransformer being connected to said pulse generator;a third bidirectional switching element one of which terminal beingconnected to one terminal of the secondary winding of said pulsetransformer, a gate of said third bidirectional switching element beingconnected to one terminal of the secondary winding of said driving pulsetransformer;a second condenser, one terminal of which is connected to the otherterminal of said third bidirectional switching element, and the otherterminal of said second condenser being connected to the other terminal ofthe secondary winding of said pulse transformer; anda resistor connected across said first condenser, the amount of resistanceof said resistor being adjusted substantially equivalent to a loadconnected across said second condenser."}
{"WKU":"039315835","Title":"Wideband differential amplifier","App_Date":"1975-01-13","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Barrie Gilbert","Assignee":"Tektronix, Inc.","ICL_Class":"H03F  314","References":"3848139","Claims":"I claim:1. An integrated circuit wide band differential amplifier comprising:a. a pair of differentially coupled transistors having normally non-linearcurrent and voltage output characteristics as a function of an inputvoltage applied thereto, said differentially coupled transistors beingdisposed in a unitary semiconductor substrate, the emitters of which arecoupled together to a reference voltage through a suitable source ofcurrent, each transistor also having a base terminal and a collectoroutput terminal, andb. a pair of input devices receiving differential input currents, eachinput device coupled to a different one of said base terminals, said inputdevices each comprising an input transistor having a p-type region and ann-type region forming a p-n junction, one of said p and n-type regions ofsaid input transistor of said input devices being coupled to the base ofone of said differentially coupled transistors and the other of said p andn-type regions of each said input transistor being coupled to said sourceof reference voltage, said differentially coupled transistors and saidinput transistors having substantially identical current and voltageoutput characteristics as a function of input voltage applied thereto.2. An integrated circuit wide band differential amplifer as set forth inclaim 1 wherein each of said input transistors is disposed on the samesubstrate as said differentially coupled transistors.3. An integrated circuit wide band differential amplifier as set forth inclaim 1 wherein each of said input transistors includes a base-emitterjunction, the base terminal thereof being coupled to the base of theassociated differentially coupled transistor and the emitter of said inputand differentially coupled transistors being coupled together through asource of current.4. An integrated circuit wide band differential amplifier as set forth inclaim 2 wherein each of said input transistors includes a base emitterjunction, the base terminal thereof being coupled to the base of theassociate differentially coupled transistor and the emitter of each ofsaid input and differentially coupled transistors being coupled togetherthrough a source of current.5. An integrated circuit wide band differential amplifier as set forth inclaim 1 wherein each of said input transistors includes a base-emitterjunction, the emitter terminal thereof being coupled to the base of theassociated differentially coupled transistor and the base of each of saidinput transistors and the emitters of each of said differentially coupledtransistors being coupled together through a source of current.6. An integrated circuit wide band differential amplifier as set forth inclaim 2 wherein each of said input transistors includes a base-emitterjunction, the emitter terminal thereof being coupled to the base of theassociated differentially coupled transistor and the base of each of saidinput transistors and the emitters of each of said differentially coupledtransistors being coupled together through a source of current.7. An integrated circuit wide band differential amplifier as set forth inclaim 5 wherein the collector of each of said input transistors isconnected to the collector of the one of the transistors of saiddifferentially coupled transistors whose base is coupled to the other ofthe input transistors.8. An integrated circuit wide band differential amplifier as set forth inclaim 6 wherein the collector of each of said input transistors isconnected to the collector of the one of the transistors of saiddifferentially coupled transistors whose base is coupled to the other ofthe input transistors.9. An integrated circuit wide band differential amplifier on a singlesemiconductor substrate which comprises:a. a first transistor having emitter, base and collector terminals,b. a second transistor having emitter, base and collector terminals andhaving substantially identical voltage and current output characteristicsas a function of input voltage as said first transistor,c. a third transistor having emitter, base and collector terminals andhaving substantially identical voltage and current output characteristicsas a function of input voltage as said second transistor,d. a fourth transistor having emitter, base and collector terminals andhaving substantially identical voltage and current output characteristicsas a function of input voltage as said third transistor,e. the emitters of said first and second transistor each being coupledtogether,f. the base and collector of said third transistor being coupled to thebase of said first transistor,g. the base and collector of said fourth transistor being coupled to thebase of said second transistor, andh. the emitters of said third and fourth transistors each being coupled toa source of reference potential.10. An integrated circuit wide band differential amplifier on a singlesemiconductor substrate which comprises,a. a first transistor having emitter, base and collector terminals,b. a second transistor having emitter, base and collector terminals andhaving substantially identical voltage and current output characteristicsas a function of input voltage as said first transistor,c. a third transistor having emitter, base and collector terminals andhaving substantially identical voltage and current output characteristicsas a function of input voltage as said second transistor,d. a fourth transistor having emitter, base and collector terminals andhaving substantially identical voltage and current output characteristicsas a function of input voltage as said third transistor,e. the emitters of said first and second transistors each being coupledtogether,f. the emitter of said third transistor being coupled to the base of saidfirst transistor,g. the emitter of said fourth transistor being coupled to the base of saidsecond transistor, andh. each of the base and collector of said third and fourth transistorsbeing coupled to a common source of reference potential.11. An integrated circuit wide band differential amplifier on a singlesemiconductor substrate which comprises,a. a first transistor having emitter, base and collector terminals,b. a second transistor having emitter, base and collector terminals andhaving substantially identical voltage and current output characteristicsas a function of input voltage as said first transistor,c. a third transistor having emitter, base and collector terminals andhaving substantially identical voltage and current output characteristicsas a function of input voltage as said second transistor,d. a fourth transistor having emitter, base and collector terminals andhaving substantially identical voltage and current output characteristicsas a function of input voltage as said third transistors,e. the emitters of said first and second transistors each being coupledtogether,f. the emitter of said third transistor being coupled to the base of saidfirst transistor,g. the emitter of said fourth transistor being coupled to the base of saidsecond transistor,h. the base of each of said third and fourth transistors being coupled to acommon source of reference voltage;i. the collector of said third transistor being coupled to the collector ofsaid second transistor, andj. the collector of said fourth transistor being coupled to the collectorof said first transistor."}
{"WKU":"039315843","Title":"Automatic gain control","App_Date":"1974-09-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"David M. Motley;King Y. Cheng","Assignee":"Hycom Incorporated","ICL_Class":"H03G  322","References":"3525948","Claims":"We claim:1. An automatic gain control system adapted to receive a first analogsignal having a first fluctuating power level comprising:coarse automatic gain control means responsive to the first analog signalto amplify the first analog signal by a first gain to provide a secondanalog signal having a second power level which fluctuates less than saidfirst fluctuating power level;fine automatic gain control means responsive to said second analog signalto amplify the second analog signal by a variable gain to provide a thirdanalog signal having a third power level, said third power levelfluctuating less than said second power level;first means responsive to said third analog signal for providing a digitalsignal related to the power level of said third signal;said digital signal having a characteristic which statistically shouldoccur a first number of times during a predetermined interval for thepower level of the third analog signal;means for counting the actual number of times said characteristic actuallyoccurs during said interval;means for comparing said first number with said actual number and forproviding a gain control signal in response to such comparison; andsaid fine automatic gain control means being responsive to said gaincontrol signal for varying the gain of said fine automatic gain controlmeans to thereby adjust the power level of said third signal.2. A system as defined in claim 1 wherein said digital signal includes aplurality of pairs of sign bits and most significant bits and saidcharacteristic includes a pre-determined combination of values of the signbit and the most significant bit of each of said pairs of bits.3. A system as defined in claim 1 wherein said digital signal has a signbit and said characteristic includes said sign bit.4. A system as defined in claim 1 wherein said digital signal has a mostsignificant bit and said characteristic includes said most significantbit."}
{"WKU":"039315851","Title":"Phase comparison systems employing improved phaselock loop apparatus","App_Date":"1974-06-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"A. Clifford Barker;Edmund S. Zavada","Assignee":"Navidyne Corporation","ICL_Class":"H03B  304","References":"3319178;3611175;3706039","Claims":"The invention claimed is:1. Phaselock loop apparatus comprising:means for producing an error signal representative of the phase differencebetween an input signal and a reference signal;means responsive to said error signal for generating a signal having afrequency which varies in accordance with said phase difference;means for generating a pulse train signal having a pulse repetitionfrequency which is orders of magnitude higher than the frequency of saidvariable-frequency signal; andmeans for deriving said reference signal from said variable-frequencysignal and said further signal, said deriving means including a pulsedeletion circuit which deletes pulses from said pulse train signal inresponse to said variable-frequency signal.2. Apparatus as set forth in claim 1, wherein the deletion of pulses fromsaid pulse train signal produces an intermediate signal having a frequencydifferent from the frequency of said input signal and wherein saidderiving means includes means for changing the frequency of saidintermediate signal to produce said reference signal.3. Apparatus as set forth in claim 2, wherein said intermediate signal hasa frequency which is an integral multiple of the frequency of said inputsignal, and wherein said frequency-changing means comprises a frequencydivider.4. Apparatus as set forth in claim 2, wherein said means for generatingsaid pulse train signal comprises a stable oscillator.5. Apparatus as set forth in claim 2, wherein the frequency of said pulsetrain signal is substantially equal to an integral multiple of thefrequency of said input signal plus the nominal frequency of saidvariable-frequency signal, wherein said intermediate signal has afrequency which is substantially equal to said integral multiple of thefrequency of said input signal, and wherein said frequency-changing meanscomprises means for dividing the frequency of said intermediate signal toprovide said reference signal having a frequency equal to that of theinput signal.6. Apparatus as set forth in claim 2, wherein said input signal comprises a10.2 kHz Omega radionavigation signal.7. Apparatus as set forth in claim 1, wherein said deriving means includesmeans for imparting a cyclic phase dither to said reference signal.8. Apparatus as set forth in claim 1, wherein said means for generatingsaid variable-frequency signal comprises a voltage-controlled oscillator,and wherein said apparatus further comprises means for integrating saiderror signal to provide the control signal for said oscillator.9. Apparatus as set forth in claim 2, wherein the frequency of saidvariable-frequency signal is orders of magnitude below the frequency ofsaid input signal."}
{"WKU":"039315860","Title":"Scanning oscillator stabilization","App_Date":"1975-03-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ralph A. Carpenter","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy","ICL_Class":"H03B  304;H03B 2300","References":"3221266;3621450;3872406","Claims":"What is claimed and desired to be secured by letters patent of the UnitedStates is:1. In a control-system for a scanning-oscillator having a frequencyscanning-range R, said oscillator being controlled by a signal from ascanning-oscillator controller, the improvement comprising:means connected to the output of said scanning-oscillator for generating acrossing-signal upon the frequency of the scanning-oscillatoroutput-signal crossing each of a set of equally spaced in frequencycheck-frequencies within said scan range R;means connected to the output of said crossing-signal generating means fordelaying each said crossing-signal by a time, termed the desired time,between the occurrence of said crossing-signals when said output signal isfollowing a desired linear change in frequency;means connected to the output of said crossing-signal generating means andto said delaying means for determining when the time difference betweenthe occurrence of two successive ones of said crossing signals isdifferent by at least a predetermined threshold amount from said desiredtime, and for generating an error signal having a magnitude proportionalto said difference and a sign indicative of the sense of said difference;means, having a first input terminal connected to the output of said timedifference determining error signal generating means; a second inputterminal connected to the output of said scanning-oscillator controller,and an output terminal coupled to the control input of said scanningoscillator for combining said error signal and the signal from saidcontroller;whereby said signal form said controller is modified by combination witherror signal.2. The scanning oscillator control system of claim 1 wherein said delayingmeans comprising a shift register and a clock means connected thereto, andwherein the clock rate is adjusted so as to shift a value present in thefirst stage of said shift register to an uncompensated stage in a timeequal to said desired time.3. The scanning oscillator control system of claim 2 wherein said timedifference determining means comprises a plurality of coincidencedetection circuits each having one input terminal connected to the outputterminal of said crossing-signal generating means, and each having asecond input terminal connected to a corresponding stage of said shiftregister.4. The scanning oscillator control system of claim 3 wherein said crossingsignal generating means comprises:means for generating a series of equally spaced in frequency lines over thescanning range R;means, having a first input terminal connected to the output of saidscanning oscillator and a second input terminal connected to the output ofsaid frequency line generating means, for generating a signal having afrequency equal to the difference between the frequencies of the signalsapplied at its first and second input terminal; and,means connected to the output terminal of said difference frequencygenerating means for producing a pulse whenever said difference frequencypasses through zero;whereby said coincidence-means determines the position of said pulse insaid shift register as an indication of the deviation of the scanningoscillator output signal from a desired linear characteristic."}
{"WKU":"039315878","Title":"Microwave power accumulator","App_Date":"1975-02-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert S. Harp;Harry L. Stover","Assignee":"Hughes Aircraft Company","ICL_Class":"H03B  714","References":"3378789;3445778;3521194;3628171;3733560","Claims":"We claim:1. A microwave power accumulator including, in combination:a. a plurality of coaxial circuits, each having a longitudinal axis ofpredetermined length and further having at least one solid state microwavediode at one end of said axis and a lossy termination element at the otherend thereof, and conductor means connecting said diode and said element,said coaxial circuits operative to generate microwave power which issubstantially free of spurious harmonics,b. a central power combining cavity being defined in part by a peripheryenclosing a given space and having a central axis at the center of saidperiphery,c. said coaxial circuits positioned around said periphery of said cavityand having their longitudinal axes spaced an equal distance from saidcentral axis of said cavity,d. said cavity further having an output port therein centrally disposedwith respect to said coaxial circuits for receiving the combined poweroutputs from all of said coaxial circuits, ande. said diode in each coaxial circuit being electromagnetically coupled tosaid cavity, and the resonance of said cavity causing the oscillation ofsaid coaxial circuits at a predetermined frequency.2. The power accumulator defined in claim 1 wherein said diodes are impactavalanche transit time (IMPATT) diodes.3. The power accumulator defined in claim 1 wherein each of said coaxialcircuits includes a quarter wave (.lambda./4) impedance transformercoupling each diode to a central coaxial conductor in each of saidcircuits.4. The power accumulator defined in claim 1 wherein said combining cavityis spaced an odd multiple of .lambda./4 from said diodes, where .lambda.is the wavelength corresponding said predetermined frequency, said cavityproviding efficient coupling of the power output from said coaxialcircuits to an output load.5. The power accumulator defined in claim 3 wherein said terminationelement is a solid ferrite cylinder, having one end thereof spaced amultiple of .lambda./2 from said quarter wave impedance transformer, where.lambda. is the wavelength corresponding to said predetermined frequency,said termination element enhancing oscillation at the resonant frequencyof said cavity and suppressing all other harmonic modes of oscillation ineach coaxial circuit.6. The power accumulator defined in claim 1 wherein said coaxial circuitsare mounted in scalloped semi-cylindrical recesses in a housing at theperiphery of said cavity to thereby insure optimum additive coupling ofmicrowave energy from each of said coaxial circuits to said combiningcavity.7. The power accumulator defined in claim 6 wherein said combining cavityis spaced an odd multiple of .lambda./4 from diodes in each coaxialcircuit, where .lambda. is the wavelength corresponding to saidpredetermined frequency, said cavity providing efficient coupling of powerfrom the individual coaxial circuits to an output load.8. The power accumulator defined in claim 7 wherein said diodes are impactavalanche transist time (IMPATT) diodes.9. The power accumulator defined in claim 8 wherein:a. each of said coaxial circuits includes a quarter wave (.lambda./4)impedance transformer which couples said diodes in each circuit to saidcavity, andb. said termination element is a ferrite cylinder with the end thereofspaced a multiple of .lambda./2 from said quarter wave impedancetransformer, where is the wavelength corresponding to said predeterminedfrequency, said termination element enhancing oscillation at the resonantfrequency of said cavity and suppressing other harmonic modes ofoscillation in each coaxial circuit.10. A microwave power accumulator comprising:a. a plurality of negative resistance electromagnetic oscillator circuitseach capable of producing both microwave and millimeter wave power andeach tuned to couple a power output signal to an output port thereofsubstantially free of spurious harmonics,b. a central power combining cavity including spaced apart top and bottomwalls having outer edges thereof joined to said plurality of negativeresistance electromagnetic circuits at the respective output ports thereofand enclosing a region of predetermined volume which defines a centralelectromagnetic wave propagating region, andc. said top wall having a centrally disposed output port therein from whichthe combined power outputs from all of said negative resistanceelectromagnetic oscillator circuits are derived.11. The power accumulator defined in claim 10 wherein said output port insaid top wall lies on the central axis of said electromagnetic wavepropagating region, and said plurality of said negative resistanceelectromagnetic circuits all have longitudinal axis spaced an equaldistance from the central axis of said electromagnetic wave propagatingregion.12. The power accumulator defined in claim 10 wherein each of saidelectromagnetic circuits includes an impact avalanche transit time(IMPATT) diode.13. The power accumulator defined in claim 12 wherein each of saidelectromagnetic circuits includes a quarter wave (.lambda./4) impedancetransformer coupling each IMPATT diode to a central coaxial conductor ineach of said electromagnetic circuits and to an output port therefor.14. The power accumulator defined in claim 12 wherein said electromagneticwave propagating region is spaced an odd multiple of .lambda./4 from saiddiodes, where .lambda. is the length of the waves propagated in saidcentral electromagnetic wave propagating region, and said region providingefficient coupling of power output from each of said electromagneticcircuits to said output port in said top wall.15. The power accumulator defined in claim 13 which further includes atermination element comprised of a solid-ferrite cylinder at one end ofsaid electromagnetic circuits opposite to said diode therein, with the oneend of said cylinder spaced a multiple of .lambda./2 from said quarterwave impedance transformer, where .lambda. is the wavelength of wavespropagated in said central electromagnetic wave propating region, saidtermination element enhancing the oscillation of said electromagneticcircuits at the resonant frequency of said electromagnetic wavepropagating region and operative to suppress other harmonic modes ofoscillation in each electromagnetic circuit."}
{"WKU":"039315886","Title":"Voltage controlled oscillator utilizing field effect transistors","App_Date":"1974-09-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William Frederick Gehweiler","Assignee":"RCA Corporation","ICL_Class":"H03B  304;H03B  502","References":"3428913;3553484;3676801;3831112","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A voltage controlled oscillator comprising:an odd number of cascaded inverter stages connected in a ringconfiguration:means for applying operating biasing voltages to each of said stages;each of said stages comprising two semiconductor devices of oneconductivity type and two semiconductor devices of another conductivitytype, each of said devices having first and second main electrodes and acontrol electrode, each stage having a control terminal connected to acommon point adapted for connection to a source of control signals, thesignal propagation delay of a given stage being controlled by controlsignals applied to the control terminal associated therewith with eachstage of said ring configuration providing substantially the same delaywith respect to one another in response to the control signals applied tosaid common point; andan output terminal connected to a point between two of said stages forproviding an output signal having a controllable frequency.2. The voltage controlled oscillator according to claim 1 wherein in eachof said stages the main electrodes of each of said devices are connectedin a series string, the two devices of one conductivity type being thefirst two devices in said string, the two devices of the otherconductivity type being the second two devices in said string, the controlelectrodes of the first and last device in said string being connected tothe control terminal of the stage, the control electrodes of the secondand third devices being connected to a point forming the input terminal ofthe stage, a point between the connection of the main electrodes of thesecond and third devices forming the output terminal of the stage.3. The voltage controlled oscillator according to claim 2 wherein saidplurality of stages are provided on a common substrate."}
{"WKU":"039315894","Title":"Perforated wall hollow-cathode ion laser","App_Date":"1974-03-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Sol Aisenberg;Kuowei Chang","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy","ICL_Class":"H01S  322;H01S  303","References":"3586996","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A gas laser comprising:elongated laser enclosure means having a lasing axis running lengthwisethrough said enclosure, said laser enclosure being filled with a suitablegas for lasing at a predetermined pressure;hollow cathode means with perforated walls located within said laserenclosure means, said cathode means having at least two apertures axiallyaligned along said lasing axis;auxiliary anode means positioned near said cathode means and arranged so asnot to obstruct said cathode apertures;said cathode means and said auxiliary anode means each being adapted toreceive a voltage potential, the potential difference between the voltagesapplied to said cathode means and auxiliary anode means being sufficientlyhigh so that a plasma of electrons and ions is situated within theinterior of said hollow cathode means;accelerating anode means positioned within said laser enclosure meansaxially along said lasing axis and energized with a sufficient voltagepotential relative to said auxiliary anode means so that a collimated beamof high energy electrons and ions is drawn from one of said apertures insaid cathode means, the high energy electrons of said beam causing apopulation inversion sufficient to form a laser beam along said lasingaxis, said accelerating anode means having a central opening to permit thepassage therethrough of both the laser beam and said beam of electrons andions; andfeedback-output means positioned along said lasing axis for reflecting aportion of said laser beam back along said laser axis, and for allowingthe remaining portion of said laser beam to be emitted from said gaslaser.2. A laser apparatus as defined by claim 1 wherein said enclosure means isdivided into a cathode chamber enclosing a hollow cathode structure withat least one hollow cavity therein, and at least one laser dischargechamber, and means for maintaining a pressure difference between saidcavity and said discharge chamber.3. A laser apparatus in accordance with claim 2 wherein said pressuredifference is maintained by catophoresis differential pumping.4. A laser apparatus in accordance with claim 1 wherein said gas is anynoble gas.5. A gas laser as defined in claim 1, wherein said cathode means has afocusing electrode means attached to and surrounding the apertures of saidcathode means and extending outward therefrom along said lasing axis, saidfocusing electrode means being electrically connected to said cathodemeans.6. A gas laser as defined in claim 1, wherein said enclosure means furthercomprises means for introducing a flow of said suitable gas at apredetermined pressure through the interior of said enclosure means.7. A gas laser as defined in claim 1, further comprising:means for generating a magnetic field along said lasing axis in order tofurther confine said electronion beam.8. A gas laser as defined in claim 7, wherein said means for generating amagnetic field comprises:a plurality of electric coils spaced along said lasing axis about saidelectron-ion beam; andmeans for supplying an operating current to said electric coils.9. A gas laser as defined in claim 7, wherein said means for generating amagnetic field comprises:means for generating an alternating gradient magnetic field along saidlasing axis.10. A gas laser as defined in claim 1, comprising:Einzel lens means positioned about said lasing axis for further collimatingsaid electron-ion beam.11. A gas laser as defined in claim 1, further comprising:secondary anode means aligned along said lasing axis and positioned on theopposite end of said accelerating anode means from said cathode means forcollecting the electrons from said electron-ion beam passing through thecentral opening of said accelerating anode means.12. A gas laser as defined in claim 11, wherein said secondary anode meanshas a central opening for passing a laser beam therethrough and electriccoil means surrounding said secondary anode means for deflecting theelectrons away from the lasing axis.13. An electrode structure for use in a gas-ion laser apparatus including alaser enclosure and means for introducing a gas flow at a predeterminedpressure through the interior of said enclosure comprising:hollow cathode means, focusing electrode means, and auxiliary anode meanspositioned within said enclosure:"}
{"WKU":"039315908","Title":"Q-Switching device for glass lasers","App_Date":"1974-01-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Charles B. Greenberg","Assignee":"PPG Industries, Inc.","ICL_Class":"H01S  316","References":"","Claims":"I claim:1. A Q-switching device for use in combination with a laser composed of ahost body of glass containing a lasing element, said Q-switching deviceconsisting essentially of the reaction product of a mixture of glass batchmaterials, a uranium salt reactive therewith and cerium dioxide, saidcerium dioxide and uranium salt being present in amounts sufficient toprovide a product containing from 0.01 to 20 percent CeO.sub.2 based onthe weight of the glass, and a total uranium content, expressed asUO.sub.2.sup.+ .sup.2, of from 0.01 to 15 percent based on the weight ofthe glass, wherein at least 91 percent is present in the valence formUO.sub.2.sup.+ .sup.2.2. A laser containing a Q-switching device as described in claim 1 whereinthe Q-switching device is external to the host body containing the lasingelement."}
{"WKU":"039315916","Title":"Q-switching device for glass lasers","App_Date":"1974-01-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Charles B. Greenberg","Assignee":"PPG Industries, Inc.","ICL_Class":"C03C  304;C03C  310;H01S  310","References":"3365678;3471408;3473144","Claims":"I claim:1. A self Q-switching laser device including means for pumpingNd.sup..sup.+3 ions, comprising a glass article consisting essentially of:a. a conventional host glass selected from the group consisting of:soda-lime-alumina-silica glass, soda-lime-silica glass, high silicaborosilicate glass, germanate glass, flint glass, and lead silicate glass;b. from 0.01 to 30 percent by weight Nd.sub.2 O.sub.3 lasing element;c. from 0.01 to 15 percent by weight uranium expressed as UO.sub.2.sup..sup.+2, at least 91 percent of the uranium content being in theUO.sub.2 .sup..sup.+2 valence form, and serving as the Q-switcher;d. from 0.01 to 20 percent by weight CeO.sub.2 to maintain at least 91percent of the uranium ions in the UO.sub.2 .sup..sup.+2 valence state."}
{"WKU":"039315924","Title":"Surface acoustic wave tuned laser","App_Date":"1974-06-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard Swart Hughes","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy","ICL_Class":"H01S  310","References":"3633995","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A tunable laser, comprising:an optically resonant cavity bounded at one end by a partially reflectivemirror through which is provided the output beam of said laser, includinga source of laser light in said cavity; andtuning means in the optical path of said cavity for acousto-opticallytuning the laser to oscillate at selected wavelengths in response to anelectrical signal, comprising an electrical signal, a piezoelectriccrystal in the optical path of said light opposite said partiallyreflective mirror from said source having at lease one reflective surfacefor reflecting said light, and interdigitized fingers on the reflectivesurface of said crystal for receiving said electrical signals andgenerating surface acoustic waves in said surface in response to saidsignals;wherein the laser is tuned at least in part by said surface acoustic waves.2. The laser of claim 1 wherein the spacing of adjacent fingers of saidinterdigitized fingers is equal to a half-wavelength of the wavelength ofsaid acoustic wave.3. The laser of claim 2 wherein the reflective surface of said crystalacoustic waves cause said surface to act as a phased grating, deflectingsaid laser beam in accordance with,##EQU2##wherein .THETA. is the angular deflection, m is the diffraction order,.lambda. is the wavelength of the laser, and .OMEGA. is the wavelength ofthe acoustic wave.4. The laser of claim 3 wherein the grating of said reflective surface ofsaid crystal is retroreflective by said acoustic waves in accordance with"}
{"WKU":"039315932","Title":"Laser beam control device","App_Date":"1974-04-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"H. Laurance Marshall","Assignee":"GTE Sylvania Incorporated","ICL_Class":"H01S  302","References":"3392258;3416089","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In combinationa high power laser having an output beam directed along an axis,an opaque shutter extending across the beam path at an obtuse angle withrespect to the incident beam to define an operative reflecting positionand movable to an inoperative position out of the beam path,said shutter having a convexospherical surface at the point of incidence ofsaid beam when the shutter is in the operative position whereby to reflectand expand said beam,energy absorber means in the path of said reflected beam, andmeans selectively to rotate said shutter between said operative andinoperative positions."}
{"WKU":"039315940","Title":"Transverse-flow laser cell and laser arrangement including the cell","App_Date":"1975-01-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Fritz Peter Schafer","Assignee":"Max-Planck-Gesellschaft zur Forderung der Wissenschaften e.V.","ICL_Class":"H01S  302","References":"3725810","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A transverse-flow cell for a laser comprising:"}
{"WKU":"039315959","Title":"Optical waveguide modulator using single crystals of TlGaSe.sub.2","App_Date":"1974-04-23","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Thelma J. Isaacs;Milton Gottlieb;John D. Feichtner","Assignee":"Westinghouse Electric Corporation","ICL_Class":"G02F  111;H01S  310","References":"3743970","Claims":"What we claim is:1. An optical waveguide modulator comprising1. a single crystal selected from the group consisting of TlGaSe.sub.2 and.beta.-TlInS.sub.2 which is 1 to about 50 microns thick and at least about3mm in width and length;2. means for generating an acoustic wave in said crystal moving across thethickness of said crystal; and3. means for passing a monochromatic light beam from an incoming waveguidethrough said crystal along the length of said crystal, then back into anoutgoing waveguide.2. An optical waveguide modulator according to claim 1 wherein said crystalis TlGaSe.sub.2.3. An optical waveguide modulator according to claim 1 wherein said crystalis .beta.-TlInS.sub.2.4. An optical waveguide modulator according to claim 1 wherein said meansfor generating an acoustic wave is a transducer mounted on said crystal.5. An optical waveguide modulator according to claim 4 wherein saidtransducer is a shear wave generating transducer which is mounted on saidcrystal so that the shear waves generated by it are perpendicular to thepath of said light beam in said crystal.6. An optical waveguide modulator according to claim 1 wherein saidincoming waveguide is an optical fiber having a flat end which is cementedto one end of said crystal, and said outgoing waveguide is an opticalfiber having a flat end which is cemented to the opposite end of saidcrystal.7. An optical waveguide modulator according to claim 1 wherein said crystalis mounted on a flat substrate which has a lower refractive index thansaid crystal.8. A method of modulating light comprising1. passing a monochromatic light beam from an incoming waveguide throughthe length of a crystal selected from the group consisting of TlGaSe.sub.2and .beta.-TlInS.sub.2 which is 1 to about 50 microns thick and at leastabout 3mm in width and length, then coupling, said light beam to anoutgoing waveguide; and2. generating an acoustic wave in said crystal moving across the thicknessof said crystal.9. A method according to claim 8 wherein said crystal is TlGaSe.sub.2.10. A method according to claim 8 wherein said crystal .beta.-TlInS.sub.2.11. A method according to claim 8 wherein said acoustic wave is generatedby means of a transducer mounted on said crystal.12. A method according to claim 11 wherein said acoustic wave is a shearwave propagated perpendicular to the path of said light beam in saidcrystal.13. A method according to claim 8 wherein said incoming waveguide is anoptical fiber having a flat end which is cemented to one end of saidcrystal, and said outgoing waveguide is an optical fiber having a flat endwhich is cemented to the opposite end of said crystal.14. A method according to claim 8 wherein said light is coherent and has 1to about 6 modes."}
{"WKU":"039315967","Title":"Adaptive quantizer apparatus using training mode","App_Date":"1974-09-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Allen Gersho;David Joel Goodman","Assignee":"Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated","ICL_Class":"H03K 1322","References":"3699566;3806806;3815033;3857111","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Apparatus for controlling an adaptive quantizer wherein the improvementcomprises: means responsive to the output signal of said adaptivequantizer for altering the range scale of said quantizer by amultiplicative factor which is a function of the magnitude of the outputsignal of said quantizer and a function of time which is independent ofthe input signal to said quantizer.2. The improvement defined in claim 1 wherein said multiplicative factor isM.sub.i.sup.a .sbsp.kwhere M.sub.i is dependent upon the magnitude of saidadaptive quantizer output signal and a.sub.k is a sequence of timedependent exponents that converges to zero with time.3. The improvement defined in claim 2 wherein said means for altering saidquantizer range scale includes:first means responsive to said quantizer output signal for sequentiallydeveloping a signal proportional to the logarithm of M.sub.i ;second means for sequentially developing said time dependent sequencea.sub.k ;third means for sequentially multiplying each proportional logarithm signalwith a term of said time dependent sequence;fourth means for accumulating said multiplied signals; and fifth means fordeveloping a signal proportional to the inverse logarithm of saidaccumulated signals.4. Apparatus for varying the amplitude range of an adaptive quantizerwherein the improvement comprises:means responsive to the output signal of said adaptive quantizer foraltering the range scale of said quantizer by a multiplicative factordependent upon the amplitude of the most recently quantized output signalof said quantizer and upon the time elapsed since the first alteration ofsaid range scale, said multiplicative factor converging with time toward asubstantially constant value.5. The improvement defined in claim 4 wherein said multiplicative factor isM.sub.i .sup.a.sbsp.k where M.sub.i is dependent upon the amplitude of themost recently quantized output signal of said adaptive quantizer anda.sub.k is a sequence of time dependent exponents that converges to zerowith time.6. The improvement defined in claim 5 wherein said means for altering saidquantizer range scale includes:first means responsive to said quantizer output signal for developing asignal m.sub.i = log M.sub.i ;second means for sequentially developing signals representative of saidtime dependent sequence a.sub.k ;third means for multiplying each signal m.sub.i with a signalrepresentative of the sequence a.sub.k to develop a signal a.sub.k m.sub.i;fourth means for accumulating said signal a.sub.k m.sub.i to develop asignal y.sub.k.sub.+1, where y.sub.k = log x.sub.k and x.sub.k is therange scale of said quantizer; andfifth means for developing the inverse logarithm of said signaly.sub.k.sub.+1.7. Apparatus for controlling an adaptive quantizer responsive to a timedependent input signal z.sub.k, wherein the improvement comprises:means responsive to the output signal Q(z.sub.k) of said adaptive quantizerfor altering the range scale x.sub.k of said quantizer in accordance withx.sub.k.sub.+1 = M.sub.i .sup.a.sbsp.k x.sub.k if Q(z.sub.k) = .+-.x.sub.k.sigma..sub.i, where .sigma..sub.i is a predetermined constant, k = 1,2, .. . , i = 1,2, . . . N, the exponents a.sub.k comprise a non-negativesequence independent of z.sub.k which converges to zero so slowly withtime that##EQU9##is infinite but rapidly enough so that##EQU10##is finite, and the multipliers M.sub.i satisfy the inequalities 1 >M.sub.1 .ltoreq. M.sub.2 .ltoreq. . . . .ltoreq. M.sub.N > 1.8. The improvement defined in claim 7 wherein said means for altering saidrange scale x.sub.k includes:first means responsive to said quantizer output signal Q(z.sub.k) fordeveloping a signal m.sub.i = log M.sub.i ;second means for sequentially developing signals representative of saidtime dependent sequence a.sub.k ;third means for multiplying each signal m.sub.i with a sequence signala.sub.k to develop a signal a.sub.k m.sub.i ;fourth means for accumulating said signal a.sub.k m.sub.i to develop asignal y.sub.k.sub.+1, where y.sub.k = log x.sub.k ; and fifth means fortransforming said signal y.sub.k.sub.+1 to obtain said signalx.sub.k.sub.+1.9. The improvement defined in claim 8 wherein said sequence"}
{"WKU":"039315975","Title":"Apparatus and method for phase-encoded surface wave devices","App_Date":"1974-02-04","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Frederick Y. Cho;Bill J. Hunsinger","Assignee":"The Magnavox Company","ICL_Class":"H03H  902;H03H  926;H03H  930;H01L 4104","References":"3727718","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An electro-acoustic transducer for providing predetermined frequencycharacteristics, comprising:an acoustic-wave propagating medium;a first group of electrically-coupled conducting elements beingsubstantially perpendicular to a first bus bar region connecting all theconducting elements of the first group, said first element groupmechanically coupled to said medium;a second group of electrically-coupled conducting elements beingsubstantially perpendicular to a second bus bar region connecting all theconducting elements of the second group, said second element groupmechanically coupled to said medium, wherein said first group of elementsand said second group of elements are interleaved, a plurality of elementsof said first and said second group of elements includingelectrically-coupled element sections, wherein at least one of saidcoupled sections of the plurality of elements is displaced from apredetermined position so as to be in a plane parallel to the elementsection to which it is electrically-coupled; andsaid predetermined position corresponds to a local maxima of a time domaindiagram for each of said elements of said first group and wherein saidpredetermined position is related to local minima for each of saidelements of said second group.2. An electro-acoustic transducer for providing predetermined frequencycharacteristics, comprising:an acoustic-wave propagating medium;a first group of electrically-coupled conducting elements beingsubstantially perpendicular to a first bus bar region connecting all theconducting elements of the first group, said first element groupmechanically coupled to said medium;a second group of electrically-coupled conducting elements beingsubstantially perpendicular to a second bus bar region connecting all theconducting elements of the second group, said second element groupmechanically coupled to said medium, wherein said first group of elementsand said second group of elements are interleaved, a plurality of elementsof said first and said second group of elements includingelectrically-coupled element sections, wherein at least one of saidcoupled sections of the plurality of elements is displaced so as to be ina plane parallel to the element section to which it iselectrically-coupled; and wherein displacement of said at least onecoupled section results in a signal of preestablished amplitude for one ofsaid plurality of elements including said at least one coupled section,and wherein said preestablished amplitude corresponds to a local maxima ofa time domain representation for an element of said first group.3. An electro-acoustic device for providing predetermined frequencycharacteristics, comprising:an acoustic-wave propagating medium;a first transducer coupled to said medium, said first transducer includinga first and a second group of electrodes, wherein said first and saidsecond group of electrodes are interleaved;a second transducer coupled to said medium for exchanging acoustic-wavesignals with said first transducer, said second transducer including athird and a fourth group of electrodes which are substantiallyperpendicular to a first and second conducting region respectively,wherein said third and said fourth group of electrodes are interleaved, aplurality of said fourth group of electrodes having at least a coupledportion offset in alignment from another coupled portion; andwherein adjacent electrodes in said first transducer are substantiallyidentical in length, and wherein adjacent electrodes in said secondtransducer are substantially identical in length.4. The electro-acoustic device of claim 3 wherein signals relating to thesecond group of electrodes having at least an offset coupled portioncombine to produce a signal of preselected phase and amplitude.5. The electro-acoustic device of claim 3 wherein said first transducerincludes a first section and a second symmetrically located with respectto said second transducer, one electrode of said second group ofelectrodes displaced from a preselected distance toward said firstsection, a second of said group of electrodes equally displaced from adistance equal to said preselected distance away from said second section.6. In a surface wave device of the type including a transducer withinterleaved electrodes, an improved method of encoding said surface wavetransducer with preestablished frequency characteristics, the interleavedelectrodes being substantially perpendicular to a conducting bus barregion, wherein the improvement comprising the steps of:a. determining relative locations of transducer electrodes and overlapamplitudes for adjacent transducer electrodes from a time domainrepresentation of said preestablished frequency characteristics;b. dividing a plurality of said electrodes into coupled electrode sections;c. positioning said coupled electrode sections on a surfacewave propagatingmaterial about said determined electrode locations, said coupled electrodesections positioned to provide a combined signal amplitude related to anoverlap amplitude for a corresponding electrode section; andd. positioning undivided electrodes on said surface wave propagatingmaterial at said determined locations.7. In a surface wave device including transducers with interleavedelectrodes which are substantially perpendicular to a conducting bus barregion, an improved method of phase-encoding said surface wave device withpreestablishing frequency characteristics, wherein the improvementcomprises the steps of:a. determining relative location of transducer electrodes and overlapamplitudes for adjacent transducer electrodes from a time domainrepresentation of said preestablished frequency characteristics;b. positioning at least a portion of a plurality of said electrodes on asurface-wave propagating material displaced from said electrode relativelocation, said positioning of said electrodes resulting in a signaldetermined by said overlap amplitude; andc. positioning undisplaced electrodes at said determined relativelocations.8. The electro-acoustic transducer of claim 7 wherein each electrodeextends substantially a predetermined distance along an adjacentelectrode.9. An electro-acoustic transducer for providing preestablished frequencycharacteristics; comprisingan acoustic-wave propagating medium;a first group of electrodes coupled to said medium and being substantiallyperpendicular to a first conducting region;a second group of electrodes coupled to said medium and being substantiallyperpendicular to a second conducting region, wherein said second group ofelectrodes interleaves with said first group of electrodes, a portion of aplurality of electrodes from said first and said second group displacedfrom positions determined by a time domain representation of saidpreestablished frequency characteristics.10. An electro-acoustic device for providing preestablished frequencycharacteristics comprising:an acoustic-wave propagating medium;a first group of electrodes coupled to said medium;a second group of electrodes coupled to said medium wherein said first andsaid second group of electrodes are interleaved;a third group of electrodes coupled to said medium and being substantiallyperpendicular to a first conducting region;a fourth group of electrodes coupled to said medium and being substantiallyperpendicular to a second conducting region, wherein said third and saidfourth group of electrodes are interleaved, wherein said third and saidfourth group of electrodes are disposed to receive acoustic wavespropagated by said first and said second group of electrodes, wherein atleast a portion of each of a plurality of electrodes of said third andsaid fourth group are displaced from preselected positions bypredetermined amount whereby the vector addition of signals generated bythe third and fourth group of electrodes provide the preestablishedfrequency characteristics.11. The electro-acoustic device of claim 10 wherein said predeterminedamount is chosen to provide a desired amplitude.12. The electro-acoustic device of claim 10 wherein said preselectedpositions and a desired amplitude are derived from a time-domainrepresentation of said preestablished frequency characteristics.13. The electro-acoustic device of claim 11 wherein an amount of overlapbetween adjacent electrodes of said third and said fourth group issubstantially constant.14. An electro-acoustic device having encoding of preestablished frequencycharacteristic, comprising:a first group of electrodes;a second group of electrodes, wherein said second group of electrodes isinterleaved with said first group of electrodes, said first group ofelectrodes including a first plurality of sets of portions of electrodes,individual signals generated by each of said sets producing a preselectedcombined signal; said first and second group of electrodes beingsubstantially perpendicular to a first and second conducting regionrespectively;an acoustic-wave propagating medium, said first and said second group ofelectrodes being coupled to said medium; andwherein said preselected combined signal is determined by a time-domainrepresentation of said preestablished frequency characteristics.15. An electro-acoustic device having preestablished frequencycharacteristics, said preestablished frequency characteristics specifyingpreestablished signal phases and preestablished amplitudes, comprising:an acoustic wave propagating medium;a first transducer coupled to said medium, said first transducer includinga first plurality of interleaved electrodes substantially perpendicular toa first conducting region;a second transducer coupled to said medium, said second transducerincluding a second plurality of electrodes substantially perpendicular toa second conducting region, said second plurality of electrodesinterleaved with said first plurality of electrodes wherein said secondtransducer produces output electrical signals in response to acousticwaves, said acoustic wave generated by input electrical signals to saidfirst transducer, wherein electrodes in a plurality of sets of electrodeslocated in at least one of said first transducer and said secondtransducer produces signals having an amplitude intermediate to anamplitude produced by other electrodes combined intermediate signals ofeach set producing a composite signal having a phase and amplitudedetermined by said preestablished frequency characteristics.16. An electro-acoustic device for providing predetermined frequencycharacteristics, comprising:an acoustic-wave propagating medium;a first electro-acoustic transducer mechanically coupled to said medium;anda second electro-acoustic transducer mechanically coupled to said medium,said second transducer including a multiplicity of interleaved electrodessubstantially perpendicular to a conducting region, a plurality of saidelectrodes having a first portion and a second portion, wherein said firstand second portions of electrodes of each group are positioned to producea composite electrical signal of amplitude and time delay at said firsttransducer determined by said predetermined frequency characteristics uponelectrical excitation of said each group.17. The electro-acoustic device of claim 16 wherein adjacent interleavedelectrodes have a substantially constant overlap amplitude.18. An electro-acoustic device for providing predetermined frequencycharacteristics comprising:an acoustic-wave propagating medium;an electro-acoustic transducer mechanically coupled to said medium, saidtransducer including a multiplicity of interleaved electrodes, a pluralityof said electrodes having a first portion and a second portion saidelectrodes arranged to respond to passage of a selected acoustic wave bygenerating a combined electrical signal of determined amplitude and phasehaving said predetermined frequency characteristics; andwherein said combined signal of determined amplitude and phase correspondsto a time domain representation of said predetermined frequencycharacteristics."}
{"WKU":"039315983","Title":"Normal reflective array compressor and method","App_Date":"1974-12-17","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Wayne L. Bongianni","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy","ICL_Class":"H03H  926;H03H  930;H03H  922;H01L 4108","References":"3283264","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An acoustic wave device comprising:a piezoelectric substrate having oppositely disposed flat surfaces;an input transducer on one surface of said substrate for launching acousticsurface waves traveling down said surface;an output transducer on the other opposite surface of said transducer forcollecting acoustic surface waves traveling on said opposite surface in adirection opposite to the direction of travel on said one surface;said input and output transducers comprising metallic electrodes, theelectrodes of said input transducer being in line with correspondingelectrodes of said output transducer;arrays of electrode fingers on each of said surfaces, each said arrayhaving spacings between adjacent electrodes thereof which vary along thelength of the substrate over which the acoustic surface wave is adapted totravel; the widths of the electrodes and the spacings between them of botharrays being the same with corresponding electrodes and spacings of botharrays on said opposite surfaces being in line with each other.2. An acoustic wave device according to claim 1, wherein said:transducers are of the interdigital type,the spacings between the electrode fingers of both arrays similarlyincreasing with distance from said transducers.3. An acoustic wave device according to claim 1, wherein:said transducers are of the interdigital type,the spacings between the electrode fingers of both arrays similarlydecreasing with distance from said transducers.4. An acoustic wave device according to claim 1, wherein:said substrate is rectangular in shape and made of lithium niobate, saidsubstrate being 0.1cm to 10cm wide, 0.1cm to 100cm long, and 0.1cm to 2cmthick,the ends of said substrate being covered with absorbent material to reducereflections therefrom,said input and output transducers being positioned near the same end ofsaid substrate,means for applying a wide range of very high frequencies to said inputtransducer, andreceiver means coupled to said output transducer.5. An acoustic wave device according to claim 1, wherein said oppositelydisposed flat surfaces are parallel to each other."}
{"WKU":"039315991","Title":"Hybrid phase inverter","App_Date":"1975-01-30","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Edward Salzberg","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"H01P  118","References":"3423699;3559108;3571765","Claims":"1.  A hybrid junction phase inverter comprising:a. a hybrid-T junction having a first pair of branches connected asinput/output terminals and a second pair of branches connecting asswitching terminals;b. first and second switchable impedances connected to provide opposite andreversible impedance terminations of said second pair of branches; andc. switching means for reversing the impedance states of said switchableimpedances.2. A hybrid junction phase inverter according to claim 1 wherein saidswitching means is a flip-flop having first and second complementaryoutputs, said first complementary output being connected to switch saidfirst switchable impedance and said second complementary output beingconnected to switch said second switchable impedance.3. A hybrid junction phase inverter according to claim 1 wherein saidswitchable impedances are diodes and one is always biased to highconductivity while the other is biased to low conductivity.4. A hybrid junction phase inverter according to claim 3 wherein saidsecond pair of branches are symmetrical branches of said hybrid-T junctionand reversing the impedances shifts the phase of a signal at the outputterminal of said first pair of branches by 180.degree..5. A hybrid junction switching configuration comprising:a. first, second, third and fourth hybrid junctions each having first,second, third and fourth branches:b. means to connect the second and third branches of the first hybridjunction to the first branches of said second and third hybrid junctionsrespectively;c. means to connect the fourth branches of said second and third hybridjunctions to the second and third branches respectively of said fourthhybrid junction;d. first, second, third and fourth impedances connected as terminations ofthe second and third branches respectively of the second and third hybridjunctions respectively; ande. means to switch said impedances between relatively low and highimpedance states asymmetrically with respect to each of said second andthird hybrid junctions whereby one of the second and third branches ofeach of said second and third hybrid junctions is terminated in a highimpedance while the other is terminated in a relatively low impedance andswitching reverses the impedance conditions for at least one of saidsecond and third hybrid junctions.6. A hybrid junction switching configuration according to claim 5 whereinsaid first and fourth hybrid junctions are phase quadrature hybridjunctions and said second and third hybrid junctions are hybrid-Tjunctions.7. A hybrid junction switching configuration according to claim 5 whereinsaid first, second, third and fourth hybrid junctions are all hybrid-Tjunctions.8. A hybrid junction switching configuration according to claim 7 whereinsaid means to switch said impedances comprises first and second flip-flopsand a trigger logic circuit for triggering said flip-flops in a logicalsequence said first flip-flop having complementary outputs connected tothe respective impedances of said second hybrid junction and said secondflip-flop having its complementary outputs connected to the respectiveimpedances of said third hybrid junction.9. A method providing a broad band 180.degree. microwave phase shiftcomprising:a. terminating two symmetrical branches of a hybrid-T junction withsemiconductor diodes;b. connecting a signal source to a third branch of said junction;c. connecting a signal receiver to a fourth branch of said junction; and,d. switching said two semiconductor diodes asymmetrically so that a highconductivity condition in one is always matched by a low conductivitycondition in the other and the conductivity conditions are reversed uponswitching."}
{"WKU":"039316009","Title":"Mechanical filter","App_Date":"1974-05-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Toshio Nagashima;Ichiro Imaguchi;Shigeo Igarashi","Assignee":"Kokusai Electric Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"H03H  902;H03H  926;H04R 1700;H01L 4104","References":"2969511;2994047;3064213;3369200;3784936;3808563","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A mechanical filter comprising an input electromechanical transducerelement and an output electro-mechanical transducer element, each oftruncated circular cross-section and disposed in predetermined,substantially parallel, spaced relationship, and a coupler element, havinga flexural or longitudinal mode resonance characteristic, mechanicallycascade-connecting the electro-mechanical transducer elements, wherein theratio of d to D of the input electro-mechanical transducer element is madeto differ from that of the output electro-mechanical transducer element,where d represents the maximum width in the direction perpendicular to thetruncated edge of each of said transducer elements and D indicates themaximum width in the direction parallel to the truncated edge of each ofsaid transducer elements.2. A mechanical filter according to claim 1, further comprising one or moreresonator elements of circular cross-section disposed between saidelectro-mechanical transducer elements and in predetermined spacedrelationship to each other and to said transducer elements, said resonatorelements being formed with a recess and connected to each other and tosaid transducer elements through said coupler element.3. A mechanical filter according to claim 2, wherein the cross-sectionalshape of said recess taken in a plane parallel to the longitudinal axis ofsaid resonator is square.4. A mechanical filter according to claim 2, wherein the cross-sectionalshape of said recess taken in a plane parallel to the longitudinal axis ofsaid resonator is triangular.5. A mechanical filter according to claim 2, wherein the cross-sectionalshape of said recess taken in a plane parallel to the longitudinal axis ofsaid resonator is semi-circular.6. A mechanical filter according to claim 2, wherein said recess comprisesa combination of a recess whose cross-sectional shape taken in a planeparallel to the longitudinal axis of said resonator is square, and anupper pyramid-shaped recess contiguous to said square recess.7. A mechanical filter according to claim 2, wherein the cross-sectionalshape of said recess taken in a plane parallel to the longitudinal axis ofsaid resonator is rectangular.8. A mechanical filter according to claim 2, wherein said recess comprisesa combination of a recess whose cross-sectional shape taken in a planeparallel to the longitudinal axis of said resonator is rectangular, and anupper pyramid-shaped recess contiguous to said rectangular recess.9. A mechanical filter comprising an input side and an output sideelectro-mechanical transducer element parallel to each other, each of saidtransducer elements comprising a resonator of truncated circularcross-sectional capable of flexural mode resonance, each of saidtransducer elements having a piezoelectric ceramic member attachedthereto, at least one round rod-like flexural mode resonator disposedbetween said electro-mechanical transducer elements and in a predeterminedparallel, spaced relationship, and a coupler of longitudinal moderesonance property extending on and perpendicularly to the axes of saidelectro-mechanical transducer elements and said flexural mode resonatorand secured thereto, said flexural mode resonator having a recess formedin the loop portion thereof opposed to said coupler secured to saidflexural mode resonator, each of said electro-mechanical transducerelements and said flexural mode resonator being mounted on a mount baseplate by means of a bent wire-like support member having a pair of legs,at the nodal points on the side opposite to that side at which saidcoupler is secured.10. A mechanical filter according to claim 9, wherein the cross-sectionalshape of said recess taken in a plane parallel to the longitudinal axis ofsaid resonator is square or rectangular.11. A mechanical filter according to claim 9, wherein the cross-sectionalshape of said recess taken in a plane parallel to the longitudinal axis ofsaid resonator is triangular.12. A mechanical filter according to claim 9, wherein the cross-sectionalshape of said recess taken in a plane parallel to the longitudinal axis ofsaid resonator is semi-circular.13. A mechanical filter according to claim 9, wherein said recess comprisesa combination of a recess whose cross-sectional shape taken in a planeparallel to the longitudinal axis of said resonator is square rectangular,and an upper pyramid-shaped recess contiguous to said square recess.14. A mechanism for supporting a bending mode resonator for mechanicalfilter comprising support metal wires spot-welded substantially centrallythereof to said resonator at the nodal points thereof, each of saidsupport metal wires being bent about said spot-welded point so as to besubstantially perpendicular to the axis of said resonator, the free endsof said metal wires so bent being secured to a support base plate."}
{"WKU":"039316017","Title":"Receptacle device ground fault circuit interrupter","App_Date":"1974-11-27","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard W. Anderson","Assignee":"AMF Incorporated","ICL_Class":"H01H 8304","References":"1995894;2809251;3440579;3872355","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a receptacle model ground fault circuit interrupter device, whereinsaid device includes at least first and second electrical plug receptaclesand circuit breaker means for disconnecting said receptacles from anelectrical source, and further includes ground fault circuit interruptingmeans for actuating said circuit breaker means upon sensing a groundfault, improved means for electrically connecting said receptacles inparallel and connecting the parallel connected receptacles to said circuitbreaker means, said improvement comprisinga case having four side walls and a front face,first and second spaced receptacle means ins said front face for receivingprongs of at least two male electrical plugs,first and second preformed bus conductors of generally U-shapedconfiguration disposed within said case, said bus conductors beingpreformed from relatively rigid and flat stock metal,each bus conductor having two legs with a crossover portion therebetween,the crossover portion of the second bus conductor being shorter than thatof the first one,insulating partition means within said case for holding said first busconductor in a fixed position with its crossover portion adjacent one sidewall of the case,additional insulating partition means within the case for holding thesecond bus conductor in a fixed position nested at least partially withinsaid first bus conductor with the crossover portions of the two busconductors closely adjacent and substantially parallel,a pair of female clip receptacles located, respectively, adjacent the freeends of the two side legs of each bus conductor,said free ends of the two bus conductors and said clip receptacles beingconstructed and arranged to receive prongs of electrical male plugsinserted through said receptacle means in said front face.2. The combination claimed in claim 1 wherein said receptacle means in saidfront face comprises first and second sets of apertures through said frontface,said two sets of apertures being angularly oriented 180.degree. withrespect to each other.3. The combination claimed in claim 1 whereinsaid case is a molded plastic case and whereinsaid two insulating partition means are integral an unitary portions ofsaid molded case and extend normally from the back surface of said frontface.4. The combination claimed in claim 3 wherein said two insulating partitionmeans are relatively thin U-shaped partitions,the crossover portion of the first U-shaped partition being spaced fromsaid one side wall of the case to hold the crossover portion of the firstbus conductor on edge therebetween,the crossover portion of said second U-shaped insulating portion beingspaced from that of the first insulating partition to hold the crossoverportion of said second bus conductor on edge therebetween.5. The combination claimed in claim 1 and further includingfirst and second preformed branch conductors extending, respectively, fromthe crossover portions of the first and second bus conductors,contact means on said branch conductors for making and breaking withmovable contacts of said circuit breaker means.6. The combination claimed in claim 5 whereinsaid branch conductors extend transversely from the bus conductors and arebent to extend in the direction parallel to said side legs.7. The combination claimed in claim 5 whereineach of said bus conductors and its associated clip receptacles and branchconductors are preformed as an integral unit from a unitary sheet of flatstock metal.8. In a duplex receptacle model ground fault circuit interrupter device formounting in a duplex receptacle wall box, the combination comprisinga front cover member comprised of four side walls and a front wall,two sets of three apertures in said front wall defining two plug receivingmeans for receiving three-pronged electrical plugs, two apertures of eachset adapted to receive plug prongs corresponding to hot and neutralconductors, and the third aperture adapted to receive a third prongcorresponding to a ground conductor,said two sets of apertures being arranged in patterns that are angularlyoriented 180.degree. relative to each other,a first relatively rigid bus conductor preformed in a generally U-shapedconfiguration disposed within said front cover,the crossover portion of the U-shaped first bus conductor being disposedalong one of said side walls of the front cover, first and second femaleclip receptacles disposed adjacent the free ends of the two legs of thefirst bus conductor, said two clip receptacles being preformed unitary andintegral parts of said bus conductor,a branch conductor extending transversely from the crossover portion ofsaid bus conductor,said branch conductor being a performed unitary and integral part of saidfirst bus conductor,stationary contact means affixed to said branch conductor,a second relatively rigid bus conductor preformed in a generally U-shapedconfiguration and disposed within said front cover,the crossover protion of said second bus conductor being shorter in lengththan that of the first bus conductor,the second bus conductor being disposed in nested, spaced relationship withrespect to the first bus conductor and with its crossover portionsubstantially parallel to that of the first bus conductor,one side leg of the second bus conductor being shorter than the other sideleg,third and fourth female clip receptacles disposed adjacent the free ends ofthe two legs of the second bus conductor, said third and fourth clipreceptacles being preformed unitary and integral parts of said second busconductor,a second branch conductor extending transversely from the crossover portionof said second bus conductor and disposed in spaced relationship to saidfirst branch conductor,said second branch conductor being a preformed unitary and integral part ofthe second bus conductor,a second stationary contact affixed to said second branch conductor,said first and second clip receptacles being constructed and arranged to bein registration with and thereby receive the same hot or neutral prongs ofcorresponding electrical plugs inserted through the two sets of aperturesin said front wall of the front cover member,said third and fourth clip receptacles being constructed and arranged to bein registration with and thereby receive the other ones of the hot orneutral prongs of electrical plugs inserted through the two sets ofapertures in said front wall of the cover case,fifth and sixth female clip receptacles disposed in said front cover memberand each constructed and arranged to be in registration with and therebyreceive a corresponding ground prong of an electrical plug insertedthrough said front wall,circuit breaker means within said four side walls and including two movablecontacts for cooperating with said first and second contacts on saidbranch conductors to provide circuit breaker action therebetween,a back cover member adapted to mate with said front cover member,ground fault sensing circuit means within said back cover member,means coupling a ground fault signal from said sensing circuit means tosaid circuit breaker means,hot an neutral conductors extending from the exterior of said device andcoupled to the movable contacts of the circuit breaker means and to saidground fault sensing circuit means.9. The combination claimed in claim 8 and further including,insulating partition means formed as part of said front cover means anddisposed between said two bus conductors for maintaining said two busconductors on edge in fixed spaced relationship to each other.10. The combination claimed in claim 9 whereinsaid first branch conductor of the first bus conductor extends parallel toa surface of said partition means and then extends transversely acrosssaid partition means and said second bus conductor.11. The combination claimed in claim 10 wherein said first and secondpreformed bus conductors have widths considerably greater than theirthicknesses and have a U-shaped configuration looking edgewise at thethickness dimension.12. The combination claimed in claim 11 wherein said crossover portions ofthe two bus conductors are disposed closer said front wall of the frontcover member than are the side legs thereof.13. In a duplex receptacle model ground fault circuit interrupter device,the combination comprisinga plastic case having four side walls and a front face to form a five-sidedcase,said front face being characterized by having at least three adjacentregions thereon,first and second sets of apertures respectively located in two of saidregions on the front face, the apertures of each set being adapted toreceive the prongs of an electrical male plug and the pattern of aperturesof one set being angularly oriented 180  with respect to that of the otherset,an insulating partition having a U-shaped configuration extending normallyfrom the back surface of said front face,the crossover portion of the U-shaped partition being closely adjacent oneside wall of said case and the two legs of the partition extendingtransversely between two side walls,siad insulating partition defining three side-by-side sections within saidcase, the end ones of the three sections being in registration with arespective set of apertures in said front face,a second U-shaped insulating partition extending normally from the backsurface of the front face,the crossover portion of the second partition being disposed parallel toand closely spaced from the crossover portion of the first partition onthe side thereof opposite said one wall of the case,the side legs of the second partition extending in parallel spacedrelationship to the side legs of the first partition,first and second preformed bus conductors of generally U-shapedconfiguration when viewed edgewise,said bus conductors being preformed from relative rigid and flat stockmetal,each U-shaped bus conductor having one side leg shorter than the other sideleg,said second bus conductor having a shorter crossover portion than that ofthe first bus conductor,said first bus conductor being inserted edgewise within said case with itscrossover portion disposed between said one side wall and said firstinsulating partition and with each side leg in a respective end sectionwithin said case,said second bus conductor being inserted edgewise within said case with itsshorter crossover portion disposed between the crossover portions of thetwo insulating partitions and having each side leg within a respective endsection within said case,the side legs of said two bus conductors being substantially parallel,whereby the second bus conductor nests within the first bus conductor withno crossovers therebetween,a female clip receptacle disposed at the free end of each side leg of eachof said bus conductors,said clip receptacles being located in registration with a correspondingaperture in said front face."}
{"WKU":"039316025","Title":"Thermal limiter for one or more electrical circuits and method of making","App_Date":"1975-02-24","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Emil Robert Plasko","Assignee":"Micro Devices Corporation","ICL_Class":"H01H 8502","References":"1361396;2672542;3764948","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A self contained thermal limiter construction for at least oneelectrical circuit comprising a thermally responsive device; an electricalheater means disposed in a selected position relative to said device;three blade-like lead members having their narrow dimension disposed inaligned relation along a substantially straight line with one of said leadmembers being operatively interconnected to one end of each of said deviceand said heater means and the other two lead members being respectivelyoperatively interconnected to the other ends of said device and saidheater means; a cup-shaped, rectangular housing having an open endreceiving said heater means and said device therein with all of said leadmembers having at least portions thereof exposed from said housing, and aninsulating mass covering and securing said heater means without contactingsaid device, whereby said selected positioning provides a controlled timedelay between application of electrical current to said heater means andactuation of said device for opening of said electrical circuit.2. A self-contained thermal limiter construction as set forth in claim 1wherein said device is disposed intermediate and spaced from said open endof said housing and said insulating mass in said housing."}
{"WKU":"039316033","Title":"Temperature responsive electrical switch construction and method of","App_Date":"1974-09-19","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Arthur V. Vickery","Assignee":"Robertshaw Controls Company","ICL_Class":"H01H 3712","References":"2750475;2751464;2753421;3255331","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A temperature responsive electrical switch construction comprising ahousing means having a chamber therein, a pair of spaced apart contactscarried by said housing means and projecting into said chamber, a movablebridging member disposed in said chamber for bridging said contacts whendisposed against the same, a bimetal member disposed in said chamber andbeing operatively interconnected to said bridging member to controlmovement thereof relative to said contacts in relation to the sensedtemperature of said bimetal member, said housing means having adjustingmeans for initially adjusting the contact pressure between said contactsand said bridging member when said bimetal member is sensing a certaintemperature, and interconnection means interconnecting said bimetal memberto said bridging member, said interconnection means having overrun meansto prevent excessive load on said bimetal member during adjustment of saidcontact pressure, said interconnection means comprising a post carried bysaid bimetal member and projecting loosely through said bridging member toprovide lost motion therebetween in a contact closing direction.2. A temperature responsive electrical switch construction as set forth inclaim 1 wherein said housing means has a sealed bulb-like portion, saidchamber being in said bulb-like portion of said housing means.3. A temperature responsive electrical switch construction as set forth inclaim 2 wherein said bimetal member comprises a bimetal snap memberdisposed in the end of said bulb-like portion.4. A temperature responsive electrical switch construction as set forth inclaim 3 wherein said bulb-like portion is substantially cylindrical, saidbimetal snap member being a substantially circular disc disposed in saidend of said cylindrical bulb-like portion of said housing means.5. A temperature responsive electrical switch construction as set forth inclaim 1 wherein said adjusting means of said housing means comprises afirst housing part that carries said bimetal member and said bridgingmember threaded to a second housing part that carries said contacts.6. A temperature responsive electrical switch construction as set forth inclaim 5 wherein locking means locks said threaded parts of said housingmeans in the desired adjusted position thereof.7. A temperature responsive electrical switch construction as set forth inclaim 6 wherein said locking means comprises a sealing compound.8. A temperature responsive electrical switch construction as set forth inclaim 1 and including a compression spring disposed between said bridgingmember and said bimetal member to tend to urge said bridging member awayfrom said bimetal member.9. A temperature responsive electrical switch construction as set forth inclaim 8 wherein said compression spring is a coiled compression springdisposed about said post.10. A method of making a temperature responsive electrical switchconstruction comprising the steps of forming a housing means with achamber therein, disposing a pair of spaced apart contacts in said housingmeans to project into said chamber, disposing a movable bridging member insaid chamber for bridging said contacts when disposed against the same,disposing a bimetal member in said chamber to be operativelyinterconnected to said bridging member to control movement thereofrelative to said contacts in relation to the sensed temperature of saidbimetal member, forming said housing means with adjusting means forinitially adjusting the contact pressure between said contacts and saidbridging member when said bimetal member is sensing a certain temperature,interconnecting said bimetal member to said bridging member withinterconnection means that has overrun means to prevent excessive load onsaid bimetal member during adjustment of said contact pressure, andforming said interconnection means from a post carried by said bimetalmember and projecting loosely through said bridging member to provide lostmotion therebetween in a contact closing direction.11. A method of making a temperature responsive electrical switchconstruction as set forth in claim 10 and including the step of formingsaid housing means with a sealed bulb-like portion having said chambertherein.12. A method of making a temperature responsive electrical switchconstruction as set forth in claim 11 and including the steps of formingsaid bimetal member as a bimetal snap member, and disposing said bimetalmember in the end of said bulb-like portion.13. A method of making a temperature responsive electrical switchconstruction as set forth in claim 12 and including the steps of formingsaid bulb-like portion substantially cylindrical, and forming said bimetalsnap member as a substantially circular disc disposed in said end of saidcylindrical bulb-like portion of said housing means.14. A method of making a temperature responsive electrical switchconstruction as set forth in claim 10 wherein said step of forming saidadjusting means of said housing means comprises the steps of forming afirst housing part that carries said bimetal member and said bridingmember, and threading said first housing part to a second housing partthat carries said contacts.15. A method of making a temperature responsive electrical switchconstruction as set forth in claim 14 and including the step of lockingsaid threaded parts of said housing means in the desired adjusted positionthereof with locking means.16. A method of making a temperature responsive electrical switchconstruction as set forth in claim 15 and including the step of formingsaid locking means from a sealing compound.17. A method of making a temperature responsive electrical switchconstruction as set forth in claim 10 and including the step of disposinga compression spring between said bridging member and said bimetal memberto tend to urge said bridging member away from said bimetal member.18. A method of making a temperature responsive electrical switchconstruction as set forth in claim 17 and including the steps of formingsaid compression spring as a coiled compression spring, and disposing saidcoiled compression spring about said post."}
{"WKU":"039316041","Title":"Sampling automatic equalizer","App_Date":"1974-04-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Paul E. Treynor","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"H04B  314","References":"3445685;3604947;3809923","Claims":"I claim:1. An automatic tranversal equalizer including means for sampling an inputsignal, a plurality of capacitors for storing the sampled input signal insequence, a further plurality of capacitors for storing tap coefficientvoltages derived from the output of the equalizer, means for sequentiallyupdating said further plurality of capacitors, and a single multiplierhaving a first input connected to receive said data samples stored by thefirst mentioned plurality of capacitors in a predetermined sequence, and asecond input for receiving the coefficient tap voltages stored by saidfurther plurality of capacitors in a predetermined sequence and forproviding an output in accordance with the product of said data samplesand said coefficient tap voltages.2. A equalizer as claimed in claim 1 further comprising an integrator meansfor summing the outputs of said multiplier means and means for resettingsaid integrator to zero at a rate which is a multiple of the data baudrate.3. An equalizer as claimed in claim 2 further comprising a sample and holdcircuit for sampling and holding the output of said integrator means toproduce an equalizer output signal.4. An equalizer as claimed in claim 3 further comprising means forselecting said further plurality of capacitors in sequence comprisingdivide by N counter means which counts from 0 to N-1, where N is thenumber of taps of the equalizer.5. An equalizer as claimed in claim 4 which provides one data sample perbaud operation, said equalizer further comprising means for selecting thefirst mentioned plurality of capacitors in sequence comprising countermeans for counting from 0 to N-1.6. An equalizer as claimed in claim 4 which provides two sample per baudoperation, said equalizer further comprising means for selecting the firstmentioned capacitors in sequence comprising counter means for countingfrom 0 to 2N-1.7. An equalizer as claimed in claim 4 which provides four data samples perbaud, said equalizer further comprising means for selecting the firstmentioned capacitors in sequence comprising counter means for countingfrom 0 to 4N-1.8. An automatic transversal equalizer comprising means for sampling theinput signal to the equalizer, a first plurality of capacitors for storingthe sampled voltages in a predetermined sequence, a further plurality ofcapacitors for storing internally generated coefficient voltages derivedfrom the output of the equalizer, a single multiplier having first andsecond inputs for producing an output in accordance with the product ofthe voltage inputs thereto, switching means for applying said sampledvoltages and said coefficient voltages to respective ones of said firstand second inputs of said multiplier in predetermined sequence, andintegrator means for integrating the output of said multiplier.9. An automatic transversal equalizer as claimed in claim 8 furthercomprising a sample and hold circuit for sampling and holding the outputof said integrator means.10. An automatic transversal equalizer as claimed in claim 9 wherein saidswitching means comprises MOS analog switch means.11. An automatic transversal equalizer as claimed in claim 10 wherein saidMOS analog switch means comprises means comprising first counter means,responsive to the baud clock of the equalizer and a first MOS analogswitch, for controlling the switching sequence of said coefficientvoltages and means, comprising logic circuit means responsive to saidfirst counter means, second counter means responsive to said logic circuitmeans and said baud clock and a second MOS analog switch, for controllingthe switching sequence of said sampled voltages.12. An automatic transversal equalizer comprising means for sampling aninput signal, a plurality of discrete capacitors connected in parallel toform a bank of capacitors for storing the samples of said input signal,switching means for cyclically and sequentially retrieving the samplesstored by said capacitors in a predetermined sequence, the samples storedby said capacitors being retrieved during at least two successive cycles,means for deriving a series of coefficient voltages from the output of theequalizer, and multiplier means for sequentially multiplying the samplesretrieved by said switching means with said series of coefficient voltagesto produce an output in accordance with the product of said retrievedsamples and said coefficient voltages."}
{"WKU":"039316050","Title":"High-voltage resistor unit","App_Date":"1974-01-09","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Vasily Fedorovich Bolbochan;Anatoly Viktorovich Vorobiev;Ivan Fedorovich Drabenko","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"H01C  106","References":"2154685","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A high-voltage resistor unit comprising: a metal casing; a chain ofseries-connected resistors comprising hollow cylinders arranged in saidcase; microwire windings of said resistors wound on said hollow cylinders;series-connected screens separate for each of said resistors in the formof hollow cylinders with screening windings wound thereon, each of saidscreening windings enveloping the winding of each of said resistors sothat the potential at each point of the screening winding is substantiallyequal to the potential at a corresponding point of said winding of saidresistor; a liquid dielectric filling said metal casing; and the screenwindings hermetically sealing the winding of each of said resistors fromsaid liquid dielectric.2. A high-voltage resistor unit as claimed in claim 1, including electrodesfor protecting said resistors against being shunted by said dielectric,said electrodes being located inside said hollow cylinders of said chainof resistors in immediate proximity to their end faces and electricallyconnected to said screening windings."}
{"WKU":"039316068","Title":"Device for simultaneously controlling a plurality of variable resistors","App_Date":"1973-11-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Shunzo Oka;Matsuo Nishioka","Assignee":"Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"H01C 1016","References":"3321990","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A multiple-shaft simultaneous control device for controlling variableresistors comprising:an outer frame having a first pair of opposed walls;a first pair of variable resistors fixed to said first pair of opposedwalls and having rotatable control shafts coaxially projecting inwardlythrough said opposed walls;an inner frame fixed to the control shafts of said first pair of variableresistors and being provided with a second pair of opposed walls;a second pair of variable resistors fixed to said second pair of opposedwalls and having rotatable control shafts coaxially projecting inwardlythrough said second pair of opposed walls, the control shaft axes of saidfirst and second pairs of variable resistors intersecting orthagonally;a connecting member in said inner frame affixed to the control shafts ofsaid second pair of variable resistors;an operating shaft rotatably mounted on said connecting member, wherebyrocking motion of said operating shaft selectively rotates the controlshafts of either or both of said first and second pairs of variableresistors;an additional variable resistor connected to the inner frame and having acontrol shaft projecting through said inner frame;and a universal joint connecting the control shaft of the additionalvariable resistor to the operating shaft, said universal joint beinglocated at the intersection of the control shaft axes of said first andsecond pairs of variable resistors."}
{"WKU":"039316076","Title":"Array transducer angular tracking system","App_Date":"1972-01-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard D. Ingram","Assignee":"The United States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy","ICL_Class":"G01S  380","References":"3064253;3286224","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A signal processing system for determining the directional informationin a plurality of signals comprising:first and second means for receiving a first and second signal in phasequadrature to each other and phase shifting the first signal 90.degree.with respect to the second signal;third means connected to receive said first means output for phase shiftingsaid first signal -90.degree.;fourth means connected to said second means for phase shifting said secondsignal -90.degree.;a first adder connected to receive the output signals of said first meansand said fourth means for adding the first and fourth means output signalsand providing an output signal indicative of the sum;a second adder connected to receive the output signals of said second meansand said third means for adding the second and said third means outputsignals and providing an output signal indicative of the sum; anda phase sensitive detector connected to receive the output signals of saidfirst and second adder for providing an output signal indicative of thedirectional information within said first and second signals.2. A signal processing system according to claim 1 further comprising:a first limiter connected intermediate said first adder and said phasesensitive detector; anda second limiter connected intermediate said second adder and said phasesensitive detector.3. A signal processing system according to claim 2 further comprising:said first means upon receipt of said first signal phase shifting saidfirst signal +45.degree.; andsaid second means upon receipt of said second signal phase shifting saidsecond signal -45.degree..4. A signal processing system according to claim 3 further comprising:a post detection filter connected to said phase sensitive detector foreliminating spurious high frequency signals.5. An array transducer angular tracking system comprising:an array transducer providing sum and difference signals;first and second means for receiving said sum and difference signals inquadrature to each other and phase shifting said sum signal 90.degree.with respect to said difference signal;third means connected to receive the first means output for phase shiftingsaid sum signal -90.degree.;fourth means connected to the second means output for phase shifting saiddifference signal -90.degree.;a first adder connected to receive the output signals of said first meansand said fourth means for adding the first and fourth means output signalsand providing an output signal indicative of the sum;a second adder connected to receive the output signals of said second meansand said third means for adding the second and third means output signalsand providing an output signal indicative of the sum; anda phase sensitive detector connected to receive the output signals of saidfirst and second adder for providing an output signal indicative of thedirectional information within said sum and difference signals.6. An array transducer angular tracking system according to claim 5 furthercomprising:a first limiter connected intermediate said first adder and said phasesensitive detector; anda second limiter connected intermediate said second adder and said phasesensitive detector.7. An array transducer angular tracking system according to claim 6 furthercomprising:said first means upon receipt of said sum signal phase shifting said sumsignal +45.degree.; andsaid second means upon receipt of said difference signal phase shiftingsaid difference signal -45.degree..8. An array transducer angular tracking system according to claim 7 furthercomprising:a post-detection filter connected to said phase sensitive detector foreliminating spurious high frequency signals."}
{"WKU":"039316084","Title":"Cable depth control apparatus","App_Date":"1974-04-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Jimmy R. Cole","Assignee":"Syntron, Inc.","ICL_Class":"G01V  128","References":"3412704;3531762;3673556","Claims":"I claim:1. An apparatus for controlling the depth in water of a seismic cable,comprising:a. depth control means for regulating the depth of the cable, said depthcontrol means comprising:"}
{"WKU":"039316092","Title":"Three-dimensional seismic display","App_Date":"1974-02-11","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Nigel A. Anstey","Assignee":"Seiscom Delta, Inc.","ICL_Class":"G01V  100","References":"477633;2887791;3137080;3212189;3230541;3243821;3671929","Claims":"I claim:1. A method of forming a three-dimensional seismic display representingsubsurface features of the earth as indicated by reflections along linesof profile in a seismic survey, comprising the steps of:a. preparing a plurality of seismic sections containing reflections;b. forming mirror images of the sections;c. removing a portion of the sections and the images to leave exposed edgesrelated to a reflection of interest in the sections and images; andd. mounting the sections and their respective images back-to-back with eachother at spatially related positions with respect to the other sectionsand their respective images according to the location of the lines ofprofile for the sections in the survey.2. The method of claim 1, wherein the lines of profile in the seismicsurvey form a grid of intersecting lines, and wherein said step ofmounting the sections and images at spatially related positions comprises:mounting the sections and their respective images at positions intersectingthe other sections and their respective images according to theintersecting lines in the seismic survey grid.3. The method of claim 1, wherein the seismic sections are obtained byprocessing data from the seismic survey and wherein the lateral offsets ofthe sections due to cross-dip are calculated in processing data, andwherein said step of mounting the sections and images at spatially relatedpositions comprises the step of:mounting the sections and their respective images at positions offset fromthe nominal positions of their profiles with respect to each other by anamount represented by the calculated lateral offsets.4. The method of claim 1, further including the step of:making contour indications on the sections.5. The method of claim 4, wherein said step of making comprises the stepof:marking contour lines on the sections.6. The method of claim 5, wherein said step of marking comprises the stepof:marking equal depth contour lines on the sections.7. The method of claim 5, wherein said step of marking comprises the stepof:marking equal time contour lines on the sections.8. The method of claim 5, further including the step of:affixing wires between the marked contour lines.9. The method of claim 4, wherein said step of making comprises the stepsof:a. mounting a strip of material between the mounted sections; andb. cutting the edges of the strips of the material to represent the contourlines.10. The method of claim 1, wherein said step of preparing a plurality ofsections includes the steps of:a. plotting black-and-white traces representing reflected seismic signalsin the sections; andb. superimposing a color modulation, representing an auxiliary seismicvariable, on the plotted traces.11. The method of claim 1, wherein said step of mounting comprises stepsof:a. forming slots in a support base at positions spatially related withrespect to each other according to the location of the lines of profile;andb. inserting in the slots so formed the sections associated with therespective lines of profile.12. The method of claim 1, further including the step of:inserting a reinforcing sheet between the sections and their respectivemirror images prior to said step of mounting.13. A three-dimensional seismic display representing subsurface features ofthe earth as indicated by reflections in seismic sections along lines ofprofile in a seismic survey, comprising:a. a support adapted to receive the seismic sections thereon at positionsspatially interrelated to lines of profile for sections in the survey;b. a plurality of seismic sections, each of said sections indicatingthereon reflections in the seismic survey taken along the line of profilefor said section, and each of said sections further being mounted at aposition on said support spatially interrelated to the line of profile forsaid section in the survey; andc. at least one of said plurality of seismic sections comprising:"}
{"WKU":"039316106","Title":"Capacitive keyswitch sensor and method","App_Date":"1973-11-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert E. Marin;Roger K. Simonson","Assignee":"Teletype Corporation","ICL_Class":"B41J  508;G08C  900;G01R 1702","References":"2963697;3480857;3577140;3653038;3744026;3745536;3750113;3761736;3761805;3786497;3805149;3824459","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. The method of repetitively determining whether each of a plurality ofcapacitive keyswitches is actuated or deactuated during each of aplurality of keyswitch-scanning cycles, the keyswitches being of the typewhich change from a first capacitance value to a second capacitance valuewhen the keyswitch is actuated, which comprises:prior to the start of each keyswitch-scanning cycle, sampling thecapacitance of a reference capacitor having a capacitance valueapproximately midway between the first and second values of thekeyswitches, with a capacitance testing circuit, and generating a firstdata signal having a parameter which is a function of the sampledcapacitance of the reference capacitor;next, sequentially sampling the capacitance of each successive keyswitchwith the same testing circuit and under the same testing conditions, andgenerating a second data signal having a corresponding parameter whichindicates the capacitance of each individual keyswitch in the sequencerelative to the reference capacitor; and thencomparing the second data signal with the first data signal, and generatingan output control signal whenever the comparison of the second data signalwith the first data signal indicates that one of the keyswitches exhibitsthe second capacitance value thus indicating that the correspondingkeyswitch has been actuated.2. The method as recited in claim 1, wherein the sampling steps includeapplying a charging voltage to first the reference capacitor and then tothe individual keyswitches in a timed sequence, and detecting the timethat it takes for first the reference capacitor and then for eachkeyswitch in sequence to charge to a predetermined reference potential,the charge time for the reference capacitor being measurably differentfrom and approximately midway between the charge times for actuated anddeactuated keyswitches, the first and second data signals being generatedin response to the respective detected charge times.3. The method as recited in claim 2, wherein:the step of generating the first data signal comprises generating a firstbinary information signal which changes state at a time during a firsttesting interval for the reference capacitor set by the charge time of thereference capacitor;the step of generating the second data signal comprises generating a secondbinary information signal having a plurality of successive segments equalin duration to the first testing interval, where the second binary signalchanges state during each successive segment of the second signal at atime corresponding to the state of a corresponding keyswitch; andthe step of comparing the second data signal with the first comprisescomparing the first binary information signal with each segment of thesecond signal, and detecting a preset coincidence between the twoindicating that a particular keyswitch has been actuated.4. The method as recited in claim 3, wherein information representing thefirst binary information signal is stored for the entire scanning cycle,and is regenerated during each testing cycle of the keyswitches forcomparison with each successive segment of the second information signal.5. A method for determining the operative condition of a capacitivekeyswitch forming a component part of a keyboard said keyswitch beingoperable between a first condition and a second condition, comprising thesteps of:charging a reference capacitor to a predetermined level;measuring the time interval required to charge the reference capacitor tothe predetermined level,charging a keyswitch to said predetermined level;measuring the time interval required to charge the keyswitch to saidpredetermined level; andcomparing the reference capacitor charge time interval with the keyswitchcharge time interval so as to determine the relative capacitive value ofthe keyswitch with respect to the capacitive value of the referencecapacitor.6. The method of claim 5 which further comprises the steps of:discharging the reference capacitor prior to the charging thereof so as toremove any residual charge thereon which might interfere with themeasurement thereof.7. The method of claim 5 which further comprises the step of:discharging the keyswitch prior to the charging thereof so as to remove anyresidual charge thereon which might interfere with the measurementthereof.8. An apparatus for sensing the operative condition of a plurality ofcapacitive keyswitches forming a keyboard, each keyswitch being operablebetween a first condition and a second condition comprising:a reference capacitor;means for measuring the capacitive value of said reference capacitor andproviding a first informational signal related to the value of saidreference capacitor and for measuring the capacitive value of a selectedkeyswitch and providing a second information signal related to thecapacitive value of said selected keyswitch;means for storing said first informational signal related to the value ofsaid reference capacitor;means for comparing said stored first informational signal with said secondinformational signal related to the capacitive value of said selectedkeyswitch and providing a control signal in response thereto, said controlsignal serving as an indication of the operative condition of saidselected keyswitch; andsaid measuring means including means for charging said reference capacitorand said selected keyswitch, and voltage sensitive means selectivelyresponsive to the charge upon said reference capacitor and said keyswitch,said voltage sensitive means serving to determine said first and secondinformational signals in response thereto.9. The apparatus of claim 8 wherein said measuring means includes means fordetermining the time interval necessary to charge said reference capacitorand said selected keyswitch to a predetermined voltage level, said firstinformational signal being related to the time interval necessary tocharge said reference capacitor to a predetermined voltage level; andsaid second informational signal being related to the time intervalnecessary to charge said keyswitch to a predetermined voltage level.10. The apparatus of claim 9 wherein said time interval means includes aclock and a first counter driven by said clock; said storing meansincluding a storage register for storing the level of said first counteras it relates to the time interval necessary to charge said referencecapacitor to a predetermined level.11. The apparatus of claim 10 which further includes means for dischargingsaid reference capacitor prior to the charging thereof so as to remove anyresidual charge which might interfere with the measurement of saidreference capacitor.12. The apparatus of claim 11, including means for discharging saidkeyswitch prior to the charging thereof so as to remove any residualcharge which might interfere with the measurement of said keyswitchcapacitance.13. The apparatus of claim 11 which further includes switching means forsequentially connecting each of said keyswitches and said referencecapacitor to said measuring means, a second counter driven by said firstcounter upon completion of a predetermined counting cycle, said secondcounter serving to control said switching means wherein said first countersteps through an entire cycle for each position of said switching means.14. The apparatus of claim 13 which further includes gating meansresponsive to said second counter when said switching means connects saidreference capacitor to said charging means, said gating means serving todirect loading of said storage register with the level of said counterwhich is a signal level representative of the time interval for chargingsaid reference capacitor to a predetermined level.15. The apparatus of claim 14 which further includes second gating meansresponsive to the output of said comparing means, and said measuring meansserving to provide a signal representative of the capacitive value of aselected keyswitch with respect to said reference capacitor.16. The apparatus of claim 15 which further includes second switching meanssynchronized with said first switching means and providing a plurality ofoutputs corresponding to each of said keyswitches, the input of saidsecond switching means being coupled to the output of said second gatingmeans.17. The apparatus of claim 15 which further includes means for shaping theoutput of said second gating means, the output of said shaping means beingcoupled to the input of said second switching means and converting same toa desired code.18. Apparatus for repetitively determining whether each of a plurality ofcapacitive keyswitches is actuated or deactuated during each of aplurality of keyswitch-scanning cycles, the keyswitches being of the typewhich change from a first capacitance value to a second capacitance valuewhen the keyswitch is actuated, which comprises:a reference capacitor having a capacitance value approximately midwaybetween the first and second values of the keyswitches;means for sampling the capacitance of the reference capacitor prior to thestart of each keyswitch-scanning cycle during a first testing interval,and for sequentially sampling the capacitance of each successive keyswitchunder the same testing conditions during subsequent testing intervals;means for generating a first data signal having a parameter which is afunction of the sampled capacitance of the reference capacitor;means for generating a second data signal having a corresponding parameterwhich indicates the capacitance of each individual keyswitch in thesequence relative to the reference capacitor; andmeans for comparing the second data signal with the first data signal, andfor generating an output control signal whenever the comparison of thesecond data signal with the first data signal indicates that one of thekeyswitches exhibits the second capacitance value, thus indicating thatthe corresponding keyswitch has been actuated."}
{"WKU":"039316114","Title":"Program event recorder and data processing system","App_Date":"1973-12-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Glenn D. Grant;David E. Chambers","Assignee":"Amdahl Corporation","ICL_Class":"G06f 1100","References":"3264615;3340539;3573855;3585606;3742458","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a data processing system having memory and address processingcircuitry, the apparatus comprising,first means for providing a system address used in the operation of saidsystem, second means for providing a lower address and third means forproviding an upper address where said lower and said upper addressesdefine an address event range, fourth means for providing a length numberrepresenting the number of contiguous addresses, from said system addressto a high address used in the operation of said system, said length numberand said system address defining an address operation range bounded bysaid system address and said high address,first carry-lookahead adder means, connected to receive said system addressand said lower address, for providing a first signal if said systemaddress is greater than or equal to said lower address,second carry-lookahead adder means, connected to receive said systemaddress and said upper address for providing a second signal if saidsystem address is less than or equal to said upper address,third carry-lookahead adder means connected to receive said upper addressand said lower address for providing a third signal when said loweraddress is greater than said upper address,fourth carry-lookahead adder means, connected to receive said length numberand said system address for providing a fourth signal when said systemaddress is greater than said high address,logic means for detecting the presence of said first, second, third andfourth signals to provide an event record when said system address iswithin said address event range.2. In a data processing system having memory and address processingcircuitry, the apparatus comprising,first means for providing a system address used in the operation of saidsystem, second means for providing a lower address and third means forproviding an upper address where said lower and said upper addressesdefine an address event range, fourth means for providing a length numberrepresenting the number of contiguous addresses, from said system address,used in the operation of said system, said length number and said systemaddresses defining an address operation range,first carry-lookahead adder means, connected to receive said system addressand said lower address, for responsively providing propagate and carrysignals and a first carryout if said system address is greater than orequal to said lower address,second carry-lookahead adder means, connected to receive said systemaddress and said upper address for providing a second carryout if saidsystem address is less than or equal to said upper address, andlogic means including means for detecting the presence of both said firstand second carryouts to provide an event record when said system addressis within said address event range and including means connected toreceive said propagate and carry signals from said first adder andconnected to receive said length number for determining when addresseswithin said operation range are within said event range.3. In a data processing system having memory and address processingcircuitry, the apparatus comprising,first means for providing a system address used in the operation of saidsystem, second means for providing a lower address and third means forproviding an upper address where said lower and said upper addressesdefine an address event range, wherein said first means, said second meansand said third means each includes means for latching a respective addressat least by a first clock time,first carry-lookahead adder means, connected to receive said system addressand said lower address, for providing a first carryout if said systemaddress is greater than or equal to said lower address, and secondcarry-lookahead adder means, connected to receive said system address andsaid upper address for providing a second carryout if said system addressis less than or equal to said upper address, and wherein said firstcarry-lookahead adder means and said second carry-lookahead adder meanseach includes means for latching said carryouts at a second clock time,logic means for detecting the presence of both said first and secondcarryouts to provide an event record when said system address is withinsaid address event range and where said logic means includes means forlatching said event record at a third clock time, said apparatus furtherincluding clock distribution means for distributing clock pulses includingpulses at said first, second and third clock times for latching theaddresses.4. The apparatus of claim 3 wherein said first and said secondcarry-lookahead adder means each includes a first byte adder havingpositive-true logic and a second byte adder having negative-true logic,said byte adders each having a carryout and a carryin, said addersconnected in series with the carryout from one of said byte addersconnected to the carryin of the other of said byte adders.5. The apparatus of claim 3 wherein said first, said second and said thirdmeans each includes means for storing said system address, saidlower-address and said upper address as four-byte addresses, and whereinsaid first and second carry-lookahead adder means each includes twofirst-byte adders having positive-true logic and two second-byte addershaving negative-true logic, said byte adders each having a carryout and acarryin, said byte adders connected in series with the carryout from oneof the first-byte adders connected as a carryin to one of the second byteadders and a carryout from one of the second-byte adders connected as acarryin to one of the first-byte adders.6. In a data processing system having memory and address processingcircuitry, the apparatus comprising,first means for storing a system address used in the operation of saidsystem,second means for storing a lower address and third means for storing anupper address where said lower and said upper addresses define an addressevent range,fourth means for storing a length number representing the number ofcontiguous addresses, from said system address to a high address used inthe operation of said system, said length number and said system addressdefining an address operation range bounded by said system address andsaid high address,first carry-lookahead adder means, connected to receive said system addressand said lower address, for providing propagate and generate signals andproviding a first carryout signal if said system address is greater thanor equal to said lower address and including length logic means connectedto receive said propagate, generate and carryout signals and connected toreceive said length number for establishing a condition Y when addresseswithin said operation range are within said event range,second carry-lookahead adder means, connected to receive said systemaddress and said upper address, for providing a second carryout andestablishing a condition X if said system address is less than or equal tosaid upper address,third carry-lookahead adder means, connected to receive said upper addressand said lower address, to establish a condition W when said lower addressis greater than said upper address,fourth carry-lookahead adder means, connected to receive said length numberand said system address, to establish a condition Z when said systemaddress is greater than said high address, andmeans for detecting the presence of said conditions W, X, Y, and Z toprovide an event record PER when said system address is within saidaddress event range in accordance with the equation:"}
{"WKU":"039316122","Title":"Sort apparatus and data processing system","App_Date":"1974-05-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William W. Stevens;Donald J. Ruder","Assignee":"Triad Systems Corporation","ICL_Class":"G06F  702","References":"3636519;3719931;3740538;3794974;R27119","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An apparatus for sorting information items into an ordered sequence ofitems running between a lowest order item and a highest order item,comprising,memory unit means for storing the items to be sorted,a plurality of buffer stores each for storing one of said items,a plurality of comparators, each for comparing an item from one of saidbuffer stores with an item from said memory unit means to provide, foreach comparator,  greater than   and  less than   comparator outputssignifying the results of comparing said items,a plurality of address means for storing item addresses in an addresssequence where said item addresses are associated with buffered items insaid buffer stores,a plurality of selection means for connecting said buffer stores to saidcomparators, each under control of an item address in a corresponding oneof said address means,transfer means including a plurality of transfer circuits, each connectedbetween one of said address means and an adjacent one of said addressmeans and each for selectively transferring the item addresses betweensaid one and said adjacent one of said address means in response to a greater than  comparator output from one of said comparatorscorresponding to said one of said address means, said transfer meansincluding means for transferring an item address for each said item fromsaid memory unit means to any one of said address means having a  greaterthan  comparator output from a corresponding address means on one side anda  less than  comparator output from a corresponding address means on theother side of said one of said address means, said transfer means therebyestablishing said address sequence as a sorted order of said itemaddresses,output means for reading out items, from the buffer stores selected by saidselection circuits, in said sorted order of said item addresses.2. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said memory unit items each include oneor more fields and said apparatus includes reformat means for reformattingsaid memory unit items to align said fields on predetermined fieldboundaries whereby said apparatus compares corresponding fields of memoryunit items.3. The apparatus of claim 2 wherein said reformat means includes,buffer store means for storing reformatted items from said memory unitmeans,buffer address means for addressing said buffer store means to store andfetch items into an out from said buffer store means,stepping means for stepping said buffer address means to store items insaid buffer store means,field boundary means for forcing said buffer address means to predeterminedaddresses to align said fields in said buffer store means on predeterminedfield boundaries.4. The apparatus of claim 3 wherein said buffer store means includes firstand second buffer stores, wherein said buffer address means includes areformat counter and a record counter, and wherein said reformat meansincludes selection means for connecting said reformat counter to addressand store reformatted items into one of said buffer stores and forconnecting said record counter to address and fetch reformatted recorditems from the other of said buffer stores.5. The apparatus of claim 4 wherein said stepping means includes means forstepping said record counter with twice as many pulses as said reformatcounter.6. The apparatus of claim 3 wherein said field boundary means includesfield counter means, stepped by said stepping means, for producing anoutput at a predetermined count and includes preset means for presettingsaid buffer address means to a predetermined address when said fieldcounter means reaches said predetermined count.7. The apparatus of claim 6 wherein said field counter means includes meansfor producing outputs at a number of predetermined counts and wherein saidpreset means includes a number of preset circuits, one for each of saidpredetermined counts, for forcing said buffer address means to a differentpredetermined address for each predetermined count.8. The apparatus of claim 6 wherein said field counter means includes afirst field counter operative to produce an output at a first field countand a second field counter operative to produce an output at a secondfield count, and wherein said field boundary means includes a first presetmeans responsive to the output from said first field counter to force saidbuffer address means to a first predetermined address and includes secondpreset means responsive to the output from said second field counter toforce said buffer address means to a second predetermined address, saidapparatus aligning items with one field order when said first field countis reached before said second field count and aligning items with anotherfield order when said second field count is reached before said firstfield count.9. The apparatus of claim 1 including,a lower limit store and an upper limit store for storing a lower limit itemand an upper limit item, respectively, said limit items defining thelimits between which items are accepted for sorting,a lower limit comparator and an upper limit comparator for comparing itemsto be sorted from said memory unit with said lower limit item and saidupper limit item, respectively,control means responsive to said comparators for inhibiting an item frombeing included in a sort operation if an item from said memory unit is notbetween said lower limit item and said upper limit item.10. The apparatus of claim 9 wherein items from said memory unit include anitem control field and wherein said upper limit store includes means forstoring a search control field whereby said upper limit comparatorcompares said item control field and said search control field and saidcontrol means inhibits said transfer means from transferring itemaddresses in response to the output from said upper limit comparator inthe comparison of said item control field and said search control fields.11. The apparatus of claim 10 wherein said control fields include an itemflag and a search flag wherein an item is ignored in the sort operation ifa search flag is set and an item flag is not set.12. The apparatus of claim 10 wherein said control fields include itemcodes and search codes wherein an item is ignored in the sort operation ifthe search code and the item code are not identical.13. The apparatus of claim 9 including means for storing an item from oneof said buffer stores in said lower limit store after all items from saidmemory unit have been sorted to prepare for a new sort with a new lowerlimit.14. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said memory unit means stores itemcontrol fields associated with said items and wherein said apparatusincludes,means for storing search control fields,comparator means for comparing said item control fields and said searchcontrol fields, andcontrol means responsive to said comparator means for excluding an itemfrom a sort operation.15. The apparatus of claim 1 including means for sensing when an item readout from one of said buffer stores equals a predetermined value wherebythe end of the sorting operation is indicated.16. An apparatus for sorting information items into an ordered itemsequence where each item has a weighted magnitude determining the item sposition between a lowest order item and a highest order item comprising,input means for providing the items to be sorted,store means for storing a group of said items to be sorted as buffereditems,comparator means for comparing one of said items to be sorted with each ofsaid buffered items to provide comparator outputs signifying the magnitudeof said one of said items relative to said buffered items,address means for storing item addresses, one for each buffered item, in anaddress sequence where each of said item addresses defines the location ofan associated one of said buffered items,selection means for connecting said buffered items to said comparator meansunder control of said address means,transfer means for transferring the item addresses in said address means toform a new address sequence in response to said comparator outputs so asto transfer between each i th item address and its adjacent i + 1 th itemaddress having a corresponding buffer with a higher order stored itemwhere said new address sequence defines an ordered item sequence for saidbuffered items.17. An apparatus for sorting information items into an ordered sequence ofitems running between a lowest order item and a highest order item,comprising,memory unit means for storing the items to be sorted,a number (N+1) of buffer stores each for storing a different one of saiditems as a buffered item,a number (N) of comparators, each for comparing a buffered item from one ofsaid buffer stores with one of said items from said memory unit means,each including means to receive said one of said items, and each toprovide  greater than  and  less than  comparator outputs signifying theresults of comparing said items,a number (N+1) of address registers for storing item addresses in anaddress sequence, each of said address registers storing an item addressidentifying one of said buffer stores,a number N of selection circuits each for selecting one of said bufferstores under control of an item address from a corresponding one of saidaddress registers,means for connecting each buffer store selected by said selection circuitsto a different one of said comparators as determined by said itemaddresses,means for connecting said one of said items for storage in one of saidbuffer stores under control of an item address from an N.sup.th one ofsaid address registers,a number N of transfer circuits, each connected between one of said addressmeans and an adjacent one of said address means and each for selectivelytransferring the item addresses between said one and said adjacent one ofsaid address registers in response to a  greater than  comparator outputfrom one of said comparators corresponding to said one of said addressregisters, and transfer circuits including means for transferring an itemaddress for each said item from said memory unit means to any one of saidaddress registers having a  greater than  comparator output from acorresponding address register on one side and a  less than  comparatoroutput from a corresponding address register on the other side of said oneof said address registers, said transfer means thereby establishing saidaddress sequence as a sorted order of said item addresses,output means for reading out items, from the buffer stores selected by saidselection circuits, in said sorted order of said item addresses.18. The apparatus of claim 17, wherein said buffer stores include thebuffer stores 0, . . ., (N-1) and the buffer store N,wherein said comparators include the comparators 0, . . ., (N-1), each ofsaid comparators producing a  less than  or a  greater than  signal as aresult of comparing a different buffered item with said one of said items,wherein said address registers include the address registers 0, . . ., N,wherein said transfer circuits include the transfer circuits 0, . . .,(N-1); wherein the i.sup.th transfer circuit receives a  less than  signalfrom the i.sup.th comparator for all values of i equal to 0, . . ., (N-1);wherein the i.sup.th transfer circuit receives a  less than  and a greater than  signal from the (i-1).sup.th comparator for all values of iequal to 1, . . ., (N-1);wherein said i.sup.th transfer circuit transfers an item address from the(i-1).sup.th address register into the i.sup.th address register inresponse to a  less than  signal from the i.sup.th comparator, whereinsaid i.sup.th transfer circuit transfers an item address from the N.sup.thaddress register into the i.sup.th address register when both the(i-1).sup.th comparator produces a  greater than  signal and the i.sup.thcomparator produces a  less than  signal, for all values of i equal to 1,. . ., (N-1); wherein said 0.sup.th transfer circuit transfers an itemaddress from the N.sup.th address register to the 0.sup.th addressregister when the 0.sup.th comparator produces a  less than  signal; andwherein said (N-1).sup.th address register stores the (N-1).sup.th itemaddress in the N.sup.th address register when the (N-1).sup.th comparatorproduces a  less than   signal.19. The apparatus of claim 17 wherein said items each includes one or morefields and said apparatus includes reformat means comprising,random access buffer store means for storing items from said memory unit,buffer address means for addressing said buffer store means to store andfetch items into an out from said buffer means,stepping means for stepping said buffer address means to store items insaid buffer store means,field boundary means for forcing said buffer address means to predeterminedaddresses to align said fields of said items in said buffer store means onpredetermined field boundaries.20. The apparatus of claim 19 wherein said field boundary means includesfield counter means, stepped by said stepping means, for producing anoutput at a predetermined count and includes preset means for presettingsaid buffer address means to a predetermined address when said fieldcounter means reaches said predetermined count.21. The apparatus of claim 20 wherein said field counter means includes afirst field counter operative to produce an output at a first field countand a second field counter operative to produce an output at a secondfield count, and wherein said field boundary means includes a first presetmeans responsive to the output from said first field counter to force saidbuffer address means to a first predetermined address and includes secondpreset means responsive to the output from said second field counter toforce said buffer address means to a second predetermined address, saidapparatus aligning items with a first field order when said first fieldcount is reached before said second field count and aligning items with asecond field order when said second field count is reached before saidfirst field count.22. The apparatus of claim 17 including,a lower limit store and an upper limit store for storing a lower limit itemand an upper limit item, respectively, said limit items defining thelimits between which items are accepted for sorting,a lower limit comparator and an upper limit comparator for comparing itemsto be sorted from said memory unit with said lower limit item and saidupper limit item, respectively,control means responsive to said comparators for inhibiting said transfermeans from transferring item addresses if an item from said memory unit isnot between said lower limit item and said upper limit item.23. The apparatus of claim 17 wherein said memory unit means stores itemcontrol fields associated with said items and wherein said apparatusincludes,means for storing search control fields,comparator means for comparing said item control fields and said searchcontrol fields, andcontrol means responsive to said comparator means for inhibiting an itemfrom being included in a sort operation.24. The apparatus of claim 17 wherein said comparators each includes meansfor producing an  equal to  signal when the buffered item equals the newitem and wherein said apparatus includes control means responsive to each equal to  signal for inhibiting said transfer circuits from transferringitem addresses.25. In an apparatus for sorting information items into an ordered sequenceof items running between a lowest order item and a highest order item,said apparatus having a memory for storing items to be sorted; havingmeans for fetching said items from said memory where each one of saiditems, when fetched, is a new item to be sorted, having a number (N+1) ofbuffer storage locations 0, . . ., N each for storing a different one ofsaid new items as a buffered item; having comparator means for comparingeach buffered item with new items from said memory; having a number (N+1)of address storage locations 0, . . ., N, each for storing an item addressfor identifying one of said buffered storage locations; the methodcomprising the steps of,comparing each new item to be sorted with each buffered item to form the Ncomparisons 0, . . ., (N-1) each producing a  greater than  or  less than signal,transferring an item address between the (i-1).sup.th address location andthe i.sup.th address location in response to a  less than  signal from thei.sup.th comparison, for all values of i equal to 1, . . ., (N-1),transferring an item address between the N.sup.th address location and thei.sup.th address location when both the (i-1).sup.th comparison produces a greater than  signal and the i.sup.th comparison produces a  less than signal, for all values of i equal to 1, . . ., (N-1),transferring an item address between the N.sup.th address location and the0.sup.th address location when the 0.sup.th comparison produces a  lessthan  signal,transferring the item address between the (N-1).sup.th address location andthe N.sup.th address location when the (N-1).sup.th comparison produces a less than   signal whereby said item addresses are established in asequence,accessing said address storage locations sequentially in order betweenaddress storage location 0 and address storage location (N-1) to obtain asorted order sequence of item addresses,reading out said buffered storage locations in an order determined by saidsorted order sequence of item addresses to obtain said buffered items inan ordered sequence.26. In the method of claim 25, the further steps comprising,comparing each new item with predetermined limits,inhibiting said transferring if said new item is not within said limits.27. In the method of claim 25, wherein each new item includes an associateditem control field and wherein means are provided for storing a searchcontrol field, the further steps comprising,comparing the item control field for each new item with the search controlfield,inhibiting said transferring if an item control field does not compare witha search control field.28. In an apparatus for sorting information items into an ordered sequenceof items running between a lowest order item and a highest order item,said apparatus having a memory for storing items to be sorted where eachitem includes one or more fields with a field order; having means forfetching said items from said memory where each one of said items, whenfetched, is a new item to be sorted, having reformatting apparatus foraligning fields and for changing the field order to form a new reformatteditem for each new item from said memory; having a number (N+1) of  bufferstorage locations 0, . . ., N, each for storing a different reformatteditem as a buffered item; having a number (N) of comparators 0, . . .,(N-1) each for comparing a buffered item with a new reformatted item;having a number (N+1) of address storage locations, 0, . . ., N, each forstoring an item address for identifying one of said buffer storagelocations; the method comprising the steps of,reformatting each new item from said memory to form a reformatted new item,simultaneously comparing each new reformatted item with each of saidbuffered items to form the N comparisons 0, . . ., (N-1) each producing a greater than  or  less than  signal,transferring an item address between the (i-1).sup.th address location andthe i.sup.th address location in response to a  less than  signal from thei.sup.th comparison, for all values of i equal to 1, . . ., (N-1),transferring an item address between the N.sup.th address location and thei.sup.th address location when both the (i-1).sup.th comparison produces a greater than  signal and the i.sup.th comparison produces a  less than signal, for all values of i equal to 1, . . ., (N-1),transferring an item address between the N.sup.th address location and the0.sup.th address location when the 0.sup.th comparison produces a  lessthan  signal,transferring the item address between the (N-1).sup.th address location andthe N.sup.th address location when the (N-1).sup.th comparison produces a less than  signal whereby said item addresses are established in asequence,accessing said address storage locations sequentially in order betweenaddress storage location 0 and address storage location (N-1) to obtain asorted order sequence of item addresses,reading out said buffered storage locations in an order determined by saidsorted order sequence of item addresses to obtain said buffered items inan ordered sequence.29. An apparatus for sorting information items into an ordered sequence ofitems running between a lowest order item and a highest order item,comprising,memory unit means for storing items to be sorted where said items includeone or more fields, said memory unit means having means for fetching saiditems where each one of said items, when fetched, is a new item to besorted,reformatting means for reformatting each new item from said memory unitmeans as a reformatted new item where said reformatted new items havepredetermined field boundaries and field orders,a plurality of buffer stores, each for storing a different one of saidreformatted new items as a buffered item,a plurality of comparators, each for comparing a buffered item with a newreformatted item,address means for storing a different item address for each of saidbuffered stores, said address means storing item addresses in an addresssequence which defines a buffer store sequence,selection means for connecting said buffered stores to said comparatorsunder control of said address means, said item addresses determining whichbuffered stores are connected to which comparators,transfer means for transferring item addresses in said address means inresponse to outputs from said comparators so as to transfer between each ith item address and its adjacent i + 1 th item address having acorresponding buffer with a higher order stored item to establish saidaddress sequence as a sorted order of item addresses, said sorted order ofitem addresses defining said buffer store sequence in the sequence whichforms an ordered sequence of buffered items.30. An apparatus for sorting information items into an ordered sequence ofitems running between a lowest order item and a highest order item,comprising,memory unit means for storing items to be sorted where said items include aplurality of fields including at least one item control field, said memoryunit means having means for fetching said items where each one of saiditems, when fetched, is a new item to be sorted,reformatting means for reformatting each new item from said memory unitmeans as a reformatted new item where said reformatted new items havepredetermined field boundaries and field orders,a plurality of buffer stores, each for storing a different one of saidreformatted new items as a buffered item,a plurality of comparators, each for comparing a buffered item with a newreformatted item,address means for storing a different item address for each of saidbuffered stores, said address means storing item addresses in an addresssequence which defines a buffer store sequence,selection means for connecting said buffered stores to said comparatorsunder control of said address means, said item addresses determining whichbuffered stores are connected to which comparators,transfer means for transferring item addresses in said address means inresponse to outputs from said comparators so as to transfer between each ith item address and its adjacent i + 1 th item address having acorresponding buffer with a higher order stored item to establish saidaddress sequence as a sorted order of item addresses, said sorted order ofitem addresses defining said buffer store sequence which forms an orderedsequence of buffered items,means for storing search control fields,comparator means for comparing said item control fields and said searchcontrol fields, andcontrol means responsive to said comparator means for inhibiting an itemfrom being included in a sort operation when said item control fields andsaid search control fields do not compare."}
{"WKU":"039316130","Title":"Data processing system","App_Date":"1974-09-25","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ronald H. Gruner;Richard T. McAndrew","Assignee":"Data General Corporation","ICL_Class":"G06F  500","References":"3665411","Claims":"We claim:1. A data processing system for providing access to a memory unit by aplurality of central processor units, said system comprisinga plurality of central processor units;a memory unit comprising a plurality of memory modules;an address bus for transferring addresses from said central processor unitsto said memory unit;a data bus for transferring data between said central processor units andsaid memory unit;multiprocessor control means comprising means for providing a processorword cyclehaving a plurality of time phases; means for controllably providing accesstosaid address and data buses by different groupsof said central processor units during differentones of said plurality of time phases during each instruction word cycle.2. A data processing system in accordance with claim 1 wherein saidprocessor word cycle has two phases; andsaid access providing means provides access to said address and data busesby a first group of said central processor units during one of said twotimes phases and provides access to said address and data buses by asecond group of said central processor units during the other of said twotime phases.3. A data processing system in accordance with claim 2 wherein saidmultiprocessor control means includesmeans for arranging priority of access to a selected memory module of saidmemory unit among said central processor units when at least one centralprocessor of said first group and at least one central processor unit ofsaid second group require simultaneous access to the same said selectedmemory module.4. A data processing system in accordance with claim 2 wherein saidmultiprocessor control means includesmeans for arranging priority of access to a selected memory module of saidmemory unit among said central processor units when one of said centralprocessor units requires simultaneous access to the same said selectedmemory module as another of said central processor units in the same groupthereof.5. A data processing system in accordance with claim 2 wherein saidmultiprocessor control unit includesmeans for providing signals to a central processor unit which is requestingaccess to said address and data buses to obtain access to a selectedmemory module to indicate to said requesting central processor unit theaccessibility of said buses and the availability status of said selectedmemory module.6. A data processing system in accordance with claim 3 wherein saidmultiprocessor control unit further includesmeans for generating signals for said memory unit to identify the centralprocessor unit which is requesting access to said address bus and to saiddata bus.7. A data processing system in accordance with claim 2 having four centralprocessors, a first and second of said central processor units beingarranged to obtain said access during said one of said two time phases anda third and fourth of said central processor units being arranged toobtain said access during said other of said two time phases.8. A data processing system in accordance with claim 7 wherein in each ofsaid time phases one of said central processor units is given a higherpriority than the other of said central processor units, saidmultiprocessor control unit includingmeans for providing continuous access to said address and data buses by thecentral processor unit having the lower priority during its correspondingtime phase and;means for preventing access to said address and data buses by said lowerpriority unit and for providing access thereto by the central processorunit having the higher priority during said phase when said higherpriority unit requests access thereto.9. A data processing system in accordance with claim 7, said multiprocessorcontrol unit further includingmeans for preventing access to said data bus by said higher priorty centralprocessor unit if said lower priority central processor unit is in theprocess of completing its data transfer on said data bus.10. A data processing system in accordance with claim 7 wherein said firstcentral processor unit is provided with the highest priority of said fourprocessors, said third central processor unit is provided with the nexthighest priority thereof, and said second and fourth processors areprovided with substantially equal priorities below that of said first andthird priorities, said multiprocessor control unit includingpriority selection means including"}
{"WKU":"039316149","Title":"Data terminal having improved data output presentation","App_Date":"1973-06-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Suresh Laherilal Vasa;John Patrick Klosky;James Lucian Maynard","Assignee":"Addressograph Multigraph Corporation","ICL_Class":"G06F  312;G06F  100;B41J  500","References":"3064561;3242469;3296960;3377622;3517612;3533084;3596593;3596594;3622995;3701991;3796156;37311622","Claims":"We claim:1. A data terminal comprising:memory means for storing a plurality of data characters includinginformation data characters, each information data character beingrepresentative of one of S different indicia;means for entering said data characters into said memory means for storagethereby;means for outputting from said memory the said stored data characters in adata character series sequence including said information data characters;controllable presenting means for presenting said indicia and including Npresenting means each having S different sequential presenting conditionsfor respectively presenting said S different indicia;means for sequentially indexing each of said N presenting means from acommon starting condition and in sequential order toward said S condition;means for counting said indexed conditions from said starting condition tosaid S condition and sequentially providing a count signal representativeof each indexed presenting condition; andcontrol means responsive to a present command signal for concurrentlycontrolling said N presenting means to present indicia represented by amaximum of N said information data characters, each said data charactersbeing associated with one of said N presenting means for presenting theindicia represented by its associated data character, said control meansincluding means synchronized with said indexing means and operative duringeach said index count condition to sequentially compare the indiciarepresented by the respective said information data characters with theindicia represented by said index count signal and including means forproviding a first signal when the indicia represented by a saidinformation data character is the same as that represented by the indexcount signal, and circuit means responsive to said first signals forselectively holding each one of said presenting means in its indexedpresenting condition when the indicia represented by its associated datacharacter is the same as that represented by said index count signal,said first signal responsive circuit means including an N stage shiftregister with each stage being associated with one of said N presentingmeans, means for loading said shift registers so that at the end of eachsequence of comparisons for each index count each register exhibits abinary condition representative of whether the comparison for itsassociated presenting means indicated that the indicia represented by theassociated data information character is the same as that represented bythe index count.2. A data terminal as set forth in claim 1, including circuit means forresetting said shift register so that each stage exhibits a binarycondition indicative of a noncomparison before said comparing meanssequentially compares each of said information data characters with theindex count.3. A data terminal as set forth in claim 1, including means for initiallyresetting each of said presenting means to said common starting condition,shift register resetting means controlled by said means for resetting saidpresenting means for resetting said shift register so that each stageexhibits a binary condition indicative of a noncomparison.4. A data terminal as set forth in claim 3 including means controlled bysaid means for resetting said presenting means for setting said indexcounting means to provide a count signal representative of said startingcondition.5. A data terminal comprising:memory means for storing a plurality of data characters includinginformation data characters, each information data character beingrepresentative of one of S different indicia;means for entering said data characters into said memory means for storagethereby;means for outputting from said memory the said stored data characters in adata character series sequence including said information data characters;controllable presenting means for presenting said indicia and including Npresenting means each having S different sequential presenting conditionsfor respectively presenting said S different indicia;means for sequentially indexing each of said N presenting means from acommon starting condition and in sequential order toward said S condition;means for counting said indexed conditions from said starting condition tosaid S condition and sequentially providing a count signal representativeof each indexed presenting condition;control means responsive to a present command signal for concurrentlycontrolling said N presenting means to present indicia represented by amaximum of N said information data characters, each said data charactersbeing associated with one of said N presenting means for presenting theindicia represented by its associated data character, said control meansincluding means synchronized with said indexing means and operative duringeach said index count condition to sequentially compare the indiciarepresented by the respective said information data characters with theindicia represented by said index count signal and including means forproviding a first signal when the indicia represented by a saidinformation data character is the same as that represented by the indexcount signal, and circuit means responsive to said first signals forselectively holding each one of said presenting means in its indexedpresenting condition when the indicia represented by its associated datacharacter is the same as that represented by said index count signal, andmeans for monitoring said plurality of presenting means and including meansproviding a complete signal in response to all of said presenting meanseach being held in its respective said presenting condition, said completesignal being provided independently of the particular said index countwithin the sequence whereby said complete signal may be provided beforesaid S condition is reached.6. A data terminal as set forth in claim 5, wherein said monitoring meansincludes circuit means for timing a predetermined time period during eachsaid indexed condition and means for providing a said complete signal whenall of said presenting means are held in a said presenting condition for atime duration at least equal to said predetermined time period.7. A data terminal comprising:memory means for storing a plurality of data characters includinginformation data characters, each information data character beingrepresentative of one of S different indicia;means for entering said data characters into said memory means for storagethereby;means for outputting from said memory the said stored data characters in adata character series sequence including said information data characters;controllable presenting means for presenting said indicia and including Npresenting means each having S different sequential presenting conditionsfor respectively presenting said S different indicia;means for sequentially indexing each of said N presenting means from acommon starting condition and in sequential order toward said S condition;means for counting said indexed conditions from said starting condition tosaid S condition and sequentially providing a count signal representativeof each indexed presenting condition; andcontrol means responsive to a present command signal for concurrentlycontrolling said N presenting means to present indicia represented by amaximum of N said information data characters, each said data charactersbeing associated with one of said N presenting means for presenting theindicia represented by its associated data character, said control meansincluding means synchronized with said indexing means and operative duringeach said index count condition to sequentially compare the indiciarepresented by the respective said information data characters with theindicia represented by said index count signal and including means forproviding a first signal when the indicia represented by a saidinformation data character is the same as that represented by the indexcount signal, and circuit means responsive to said first signals forselectively holding each one of said presenting means in its indexedpresenting condition when the indicia represented by its associated datacharacter is the same as that represented by said index count signal,said data entry means including means for providing first and second fielddefiner data characters for entry into said memory means for each saidconcurrently controlled presentation to be made, with each said fielddefiner data character being associated with a data field comprised of aplurality of said information data characters for which indicia are to bepresented, said character providing means including means for providingsaid stored data characters such that a said data character seriessequence includes said first field definer preceding its associated datafield and then with said second field definer preceding its associateddata field.8. A data terminal as set forth in claim 7, including means for decodingsaid first and second field definer data characters and including meansfor providing first and second field control signals in accordancetherewith, said presenting control means including means responsive tosaid first and second field control signals for selecting only theinformation data characters associated with said first and second fielddefiners for comparison with said indexed counts."}
{"WKU":"039316157","Title":"Controller for digital devices","App_Date":"1974-07-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Glenn A. Oliver;Kenneth D. Krossa;Douglas B. Earl","Assignee":"Scientific Micro Systems","ICL_Class":"G06F  738","References":"3453600","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An apparatus for controlling digital devices comprising,interface buffer means for storing input signals from a digital device andfor storing output signals for a digital device where said input andoutput signals are operands,memory means for storing a program of instructions including instructionsfor specifying said buffer means as a source of and as the destination ofvariable-field operands utilized in executing said instructions,interpreter means connected to said memory means to fetch instructions fromsaid memory means and connected to said buffer means to fetch and storeoperands from and to said buffer means, said interpreter means includingmeans for sequentially fetching instructions from said memory means, meansfor executing fetched instructions, and means for fetching and storingvariable-field operands from and to said buffer means in the execution ofinstructions whereby said input signals from a digital device areinterpreted under program control to produce output signals to control adigital device.2. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said buffer means includes, a pluralityof addressable buffer stores each having a distinguishing address, acommon interpreter bus connecting said buffer stores to said interpretermeans, and where each of said buffer stores includes,address detection means for detecting when the buffer store is addressedand enable means responsive to said address detection means for enablingthe buffer store when addressed and disabling the buffer store when notaddressed.3. The apparatus of claim 2 including,working store means for storing variable-field operands accessable by saidinterpreter means,address means connected to said interpreter bus for detecting addresseswhich specify said working store,data connection means connected to said interpreter bus for connecting datainto and out from said working store over said interpreter bus whenaddressed by said address means.4. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said interpreter means includes,an instruction register for receiving instructions from said memory means,control means responsive to said instruction register for decodinginstructions in said instruction register to control said interpretermeans,variable-field length means responsive to said control means for selectingvariable-length fields of operands fetched from or stored in said buffermeans.5. The apparatus of claim 4 wherein said means for accessingvariable-length fields includes a length mask responsive to said controlmeans for forcing to predetermined states predetermined fields in fetchedor stored operands.6. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said interpreter means includes,timing means for producing clock signals which define an instruction cyclewith a read portion and a write portion,an instruction register for receiving instructions from said memory meanseach instruction cycle,variable-field means for selecting variable-fields in operands fetched fromor stored in said buffer means,control means responsive to said instruction register for decodinginstructins to control said buffer means and said variable-field means,said control means including means for reading operands from said buffermeans during the read portion of said instruction cycle and for writingaltered operands in said buffer means during said write portion of saidinstruction cycles.7. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said memory means is a read-onlymemory.8. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said buffer means includes a firstplurality of buffer stores connected by a first enable line and includes asecond plurality of buffer stores connected by a second enable line andwherein said interpreter means includes means for accessing one of saidfirst plurality of buffer stores to obtain a source operand and to accessone of said second plurality of buffer stores to store a destinationoperand during the execution of one instruction.9. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said buffer means includes a pluralityof buffer stores wherein each of said buffer stores includes,a plurality of latch circuits for storing said input and output signals,receiver means connected by a device bus to a digital device or connectedby an interpreter bus to said interpreter means for receiving signals forstorage in said latch circuits,transmitter means connected by a device bus to a digital device orconnected by said interpreter bus to said interpreter means fortransmitting signals stored in said latch circuits to a device or to saidinterpreter means,receiver enable means for enabling said receiver circuits to receivesignals from said device bus or, when conditioned, to receive signals fromsaid interpreter bus for storage in said latch circuits,means to condition said receiver enable means to receive signals from saidinterpreter bus whenever said device bus does not have signals for storagein said latch circuits,transmitter enable means for enabling said transmitter means to transfersignals stored in said latch circuits to said device bus and to saidinterpreter bus.10. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said interpreter means includes,timing means for producing clock cycles to establish instruction cycles,for timing said interpreter apparatus,an instruction register for receiving an instruction from said memory meansonce each instruction cycle under control of said timing means,control means connected to decode instructions in said instruction registerincluding means for responsively accessing said buffer means within oneinstruction cycle.11. The apparatus of claim 10 wherein said timing means includes means forgenerating a first clock signal for latching an instruction in saidinstruction register once each clock cycle whereby one instruction cycleequals one clock cycle and whereby said buffer means is accessable forreading and writing operands in one clock cycle.12. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said buffer means includes a pluralityof buffer stores wherein each of said buffer stored includes,a plurality of latch circuits for storing said input and output signals,device bus connection means for connecting a digital device to saidlatches,interpreter bus connection means for connecting said interpreter means tosaid latches,device enable means for enabling said device bus connection means toconnect information into or out from said latches,interpreter enable means, including an enable latch, for enabling saidinterpreter bus connection means to connect information into or out fromsaid latches,address detector means connected to said interpreter bus connection meansand operative to enable said enable latch in response to a unique addressand to disable said enable latch in response to all other addresses.13. The apparatus of claim 12 including priority circuit means forinhibiting said interpreter enable means whenever said device enable meansis enabled for writing information into said latches.14. The apparatus of claim 12 wherein each of said device bus connectionmeans and said interpreter bus connection means includes tri-state gatemeans connected to the output of said latches for reading out informationfrom said latches whenever said device enable means or said interpreterenable means is enabled, respectively, for reading out information.15. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said buffer means includes a firstplurality of buffer stored connected by a first enable line and whereinsaid interpreter means includes means for accessing one of said firstplurality of buffer stores to obtain a source operand and to access one ofsaid first plurality of buffer stores to store a destination operandduring the execution of one instruction.16. An apparatus for controlling one or more digital devices with digitaldevice signals in the form of operands propagated to and from said devicesover device buses, said apparatus comprising,memory means for storing a program of instructions where the programdetermines the device signals to be transmitted to one or more digitaldevices as a function of device signals from one or more digital devices,said memory means addressed by an instruction address on an address bus toproduce an instruction on an instruction bus,interpreter means for instruction and operand accessing and instructionexecution including,"}
{"WKU":"039316165","Title":"Storage device drive circuit","App_Date":"1974-10-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hendrik Klos","Assignee":"U.S. Philips Corporation","ICL_Class":"G11C  700;H03K 1920","References":"3660826;3740730","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A storage device comprisinga store having a plurality of addressable storage locations;an addressing unit for generating address of said storage locations;a drive unit, having a plurality of outputs, for sequentially generatingdrive signals on said outputs; anda combinatory logical drive element, having inputs connected to at leasttwo of said outputs, for generating an output drive signal transition forincreasing the allowable tolerance between at least two signal transitionsof said drive signals from said outputs of said drive unit.2. A storage device as defined in claim 1, wherein said combinatory logicaldevice is controlled by one of said two signal transitions.3. A storage device as defined in claim 1, wherein said combinatory logicaldevice is controlled by the first one of said two signal transitions.4. A storage device as defined in claim 1, further comprising a write driveelement having an output connected to said combinatory logical driveelement.5. A storage device as defined in claim 1, wherein said drive unit includesa write drive element and a selection drive element.6. A storage device as defined in claim 1, wherein said store is anintegrated solid-state circuit."}
{"WKU":"039316173","Title":"Collector-up dynamic memory cell","App_Date":"1974-10-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Lewis K. Russell","Assignee":"Signetics Corporation","ICL_Class":"G11C 1140","References":"3745539","Claims":"I claim:1. In a bipolar dynamic memory cell of the type utilized for storinginformation by writing and alternately reading information on a word linein response to a bit signal input, a semiconductor body of oneconductivity type having a planar surface, a first transistor formed insaid body having emitter, base and collector regions, said emitter regionbeing coupled to said word line and said base region being coupled to saidbit signal input, said collector region being of a second conductivitytype and being formed in said body and extending to said surface to form ajunction boundary of predetermined capacitance between said collectorregion and said body, a second transistor formed in said body and havingemitter, base and collector regions, the base region of said secondtransistor being coupled to said bit signal input, and the emitter andcollector regions of said second transistor being connected to thecapacitor formed by the junction and to said word line to provide acontrolled current path between the same.2. A memory cell as in claim 1 wherein said junction boundary is a PNsemiconductor junction.3. A memory cell as in claim 1 wherein said junction boundary is asemiconductor-dielectric-insulator-semiconductor junction.4. A memory cell as in claim 1 wherein said first transistor is a PNPtransistor and the body is of N-type material.5. In a method for writing information in a dynamic memory cell and readingthe information out of the cell onto a word line in response to a bitsignal input, said cell being of the type including first and secondtransistors formed in a semiconductor body of one conductivity typewherein a junction boundary of predetermined capacitance is formed betweenthe collector of said first transistor and said body, and said secondtransistor is connected between said collector and said word line toprovide a forward current path from the capacitor formed by the junctionto the word line, the steps of: applying input signals of predeterminedlevel to said word line and to said bit line to condition the firsttransistor for charging said junction capacitor from said word line,applying input signals of predetermined level to said word line and tosaid bit line to condition the second transistor for discharging saidcapacitor into said word line, and monitoring the current in said wordline to determine the level of charge stored in the capacitor."}
{"WKU":"039316181","Title":"Housing structure and magnetic biasing for bubble memories","App_Date":"1973-11-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Richard F. Lacey","Assignee":"Hewlett-Packard Company","ICL_Class":"G11C 1114;G11C  504","References":"3087131;3241126;3609611;3702991;3711841;3742471;3806903;3836896;3864671","Claims":"I claim:1. A method for providing a desired d.c. magnetic bias field within ahousing for magnetic bubble chips comprising the steps of:mounting a pair of magnetic elements within the housing with a gaptherebetween;applying a first external magnetic field to said housing in a directiondesired as the direction of said bias field, the magnitude of said firstexternal magnetic field being sufficient to magnetize said magneticelements so that a magnetic field produced by them in the gap therebetweenis of a magnitude greater than that of the desired d.c. magnetic biasfield; andapplying a second external magnetic field to said housing in a directionopposite that of said first magnetic field, the magnitude of said secondexternal field being sufficient to reduce the magnetization of saidmagnetic elements so that a magnetic field produced by them in the gaptherebetween is of the magnitude of the desired d.c. magnetic bias fieldand simultaneously magnetically saturating said housing."}
{"WKU":"039316190","Title":"Overtemperature monitor and integrator apparatus","App_Date":"1972-12-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Manuel S. Moore;Charles F. Paluka","Assignee":"Manuel S. Moore","ICL_Class":"G08B 2300","References":"2901739;3102425;3277458;3283579;3341816;3454787;3543582;3636540;3688295","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. An overtemperature monitor and integrator apparatus for monitoringovertemperature and integrating overtemperature and time in a thermallypowered engine comprising:sensing means for mounting in a thermally powered engine for sensing thetemperature of a thermally powered engine and for producing a firstelectrical signal related in value to the sensed temperature;signal generator means for producing a second electrical signal related invalue to a threshold temperature;comparator means coupled to said sensing means and said signal generatormeans for comparing the first and second electrical signals and forproducing an output signal only when the first electrical signal indicatesa sensed temperature exceeding the threshold temperature, and forproducing an output signal related in value to that temperature excess tocomprise a temperature excess signal; andmeans for integrating the product of the value of the temperature excesssignal and time and for displaying such product whereby to display thethermal stress or damage on such engine.2. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein said last mentionedmeans comprises a coulomb meter connected so that said temperature excesssignal passes therethrough so that the product of time and saidtemperature excess signal is integrated by the coulomb meter.3. The apparatus of claim 1 and further comprising:transfer network means for receiving the output signal from said comparatormeans and having the output thereof connected to the input of said lastmentioned means.4. An overtemperature monitor and integrator apparatus for monitoringovertemperature and integrating overtemperature and time in a thermallypowered engine comprising:sensing means for mounting in a thermally powered engine for sensing thetemperature of a thermally powered engine and for producing a firstelectrical signal corresponding in value to the sensed temperature;signal generating means for producing a second electrical signalcorresponding in value to a threshold temperature;comparator means coupled to said sensing means and said signal generatormeans for receiving and comparing the first and second electrical signalsand for producing an output signal only when the first electrical signalindicates a sensed temperature exceeding the threshold temperature and forproducing a first output signal corresponding in value to the amount ofsensed temperature excess over the threhold temperature to comprise atemperature excess signal;means for integrating the product of the temperature excess signal and timeand for displaying a representation of such product so that inspectionindicates the thermal stress or damage on such engine;set point means for producing a set point signal corresponding in value toa predetermined temperature;a second comparator means coupled to said sensing means and said set pointmeans for receiving and comparing the first electrical signalcorresponding in value to the sensed temperature with the set point signaland for producing a second output signal corresponding in value to theexcess of the sensed temperature signal over the set point signal; andan excess temperature indicator means connected to the output of saidsecond comparator means for indicating the instantaneous occurrence of anengine temperature exceeding the predetermined set point temperature.5. The apparatus of claim 4 wherein each said comparator means comprises anerror amplifier.6. The apparatus of claim 5 wherein saidintegrating and display means comprises a coulomb meter connected so thatsaid temperature excess signal passes therethrough so that the product oftime and said temperature excess signal is integrated by the coulombmeter.7. The apparatus of claim 6 wherein:said sensing means comprises a thermocouple; andsaid apparatus includes an electrical bridge coupled to said thermocoupleand to at least one of said comparator means, said bridge including atemperature sensitive element so that said bridge provides ambienttemperature compensation for the cold junction of said thermocouple.8. The apparatus of claim 4, wherein said set point means comprises aselectively variable set point means."}
{"WKU":"039316203","Title":"Temperature-responsive alarm control circuit","App_Date":"1974-06-26","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Carl E. Wellman, Jr.;Ronald J. Doerr","Assignee":"General Electric Company","ICL_Class":"G08B 2100;F24C 1500","References":"3594752;3778798;3815113","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A condition responsive circuit of the type having impedance means forsupplying an indication of predetermined external conditions to be sensed,the circuit comprising:a pair of input supply terminals adapted to be coupled to an electricalenergy source for supplying alternating current;a four-leg impedance bridge network having first and second commonterminals coupled across the input supply terminals and two comparisonterminals intermediate respectively the first and second legs of thebridge network and the third and fourth legs;a threshold device coupled to the comparison terminals of the bridgenetwork to function as a threshold detector;the condition sensing impedance means being coupled in circuit with one ofthe legs of the bridge network;a buzzer alarm device having a coil coupled serially with load switchingmeans across the input supply terminals, the load switching means beingresponsive to a switched-on state of the threshold device to becomeoperative for effecting operation of the buzzer alarm device when apredetermined external condition is sensed; andmeans for establishing a reference level for the load switching means andfor limiting current to the buzzer alarm device during the negativeexcursion of the AC cycle.2. The circuit of claim 1 wherein:the threshold device is a programmable unijunction transistor having acathode coupled to the first common bridge network terminal, an anodecoupled to the comparison terminal intermediate the first and second legs,and a gate coupled to the comparison terminal intermediate the third andfourth legs.3. The circuit of claim 1 wherein the condition sensing impedance means isa thermistor removably coupled in circuit with the first leg of the bridgenetwork.4. The circuit of claim 1 wherein the load switching means is an NPNtransistor-diode combination, the transistor having an emitter coupledwith the anode of the diode, a collector coupled to the buzzer coil and abase coupled to the threshold device and the means for establishing areference level and for limiting current is a resistor coupled between thetransistor base and the first common terminal of the bridge network.5. A temperature-responsive alarm control circuit of the type having probemeans, including a temperature-sensitive thermistor, to be inserted intofood being cooked for monitoring the interior temperature thereof, thecircuit comprising:a pair of input supply terminals adapted to be coupled to an electricalenergy source for supplying alternating current;a four-leg, impedance bridge network having first and second commonterminals coupled respectively to the input supply terminals and twocomparison terminals intermediate respectively the first and second legsof the bridge network and the third and fourth legs;a programmable unijunction transistor having a cathode coupled to the firstcommon bridge network terminal, an anode coupled to the comparisonterminal intermedite the first and second legs, and a gate coupled to thecomparison terminal intermediate the third and fourth legs such that theprogrammable unijunction transistor functions as a threshold detector inthe bridge network;the temperature sensitive thermistor of the probe means being removablycoupled in circuit with the first leg of the bridge network such that theself-heat of the thermistor provides a latching effect to insure thecontinued firing of the programmable unijunction transistor once started;a buzzer alarm having a coil coupled across the input terminals;an NPN transistor having a collector coupled with the alarm coil, and adiode having an anode coupled with the transistor emitter and a cathodecoupled with one of the input terminals, the transistor having a basecoupled with the cathode of the programmable unijunction transistor, theNPN transistor-diode combination serving as a load switching device, theNPN transistor being responsive to a switched-on state of the unijunctiontransistor to become operative for passing current for effecting operationof the buzzer alarm when a predetermined temperature in the food issensed; anda resistor coupled serially between the junction of the unijunctiontransistor cathode and the NPN transistor base, and the input terminal forestablishing a reference level for the transistor base, and, further, forsupplying demagnetizing current through the forward biased base-collectorjunction of the NPN transistor to the buzzer alarm coil during thenegative excursion of the AC cycle."}
{"WKU":"039316211","Title":"Variable amplitude timed alarm system","App_Date":"1973-12-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Charles Frederick Rose","Assignee":"RCA Corporation","ICL_Class":"G08B  300","References":"2930000;3356949;3544901;3559072;3825836","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A timed alarm system comprising:a. an audio signal source;b. a sound reproducing system; andc. means for coupling said signal source to said sound reproducing systemcomprising:"}
{"WKU":"039316220","Title":"Voice-modulated transponder system","App_Date":"1973-05-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Nathan Freedman","Assignee":"Raytheon Company","ICL_Class":"G01S  956;H03K  708;H03K  710","References":"2407199;2425315;2444452;2495737;2607004;2910683;3341845;3359554;3460139","Claims":"I claim:1. A system for communicating between an interrogator and a transpondercomprising:an interrogator including means for transmitting a pulse train signal, saidtransmitting means comprising means for modulating a pulse repetitionfrequency of its pulse train signal in accordance with a first voice typesignal;the transponder including means for receiving said pulse train signal andmeans responsive to said received pulse train signal for transmitting apulse train signal having the same pulse repetition frequency andmodulation thereof as said received pulse train signal, said transpondertransmitting means comprising means for modulating the pulse width of itstransmitted pulses in accordance with a second voice type signal;said interrogator further including means for receiving signals transmittedby said transponder, means coupled to said interrogator receiving meansand to said interrogator transmitting means for providing signals inresponse to the time elapsed between the transmission of a pulse signal bysaid interrogator and the reception of a pulse signal from saidtransponder, and means coupled to said interrogator receiving means fordemodulating said pulse width modulation to recover said second voice typesignal; andsaid transponder further including means coupled to said transponderreceiving means for demodulating said frequency modulation to recover saidfirst voice type signal.2. A system according to claim 1 wherein each pulse signal transmitted bysaid interrogator is a pulse of radiant energy at a first carrierfrequency, and wherein each pulse signal transmitted by said transponderis a pulse of radiant energy at a second carrier frequency different fromsaid first carrier frequency.3. A system for communicating between an interrogator and a transpondercomprising:an interrogator including means for transmitting a pulse train signal at afirst pulse repetition frequency, said transmitting means comprising meansfor modulating said pulse train signal with a first modulation inaccordance with a first voice type signal;a transponder including means for receiving said pulse train signal, andmeans responsive to said received pulse train signal for transmitting apulse train signal having the same pulse repetition frequency as saidreceived pulse train signal, said transponder transmitting meanscomprising means for modulating its transmitted pulse train signal with asecond modulation in accordance with a second voice type signal;said interrogator further including means for receiving signals transmittedby said transponder, means coupled to said interrogator receiving meansand to said interrogator transmitting means for providing signals inresponse to the time elapsed between the transmission of a pulse signal bysaid interrogator and the reception of a pulse signal from saidtransponder, and means coupled to said interrogator receiving means fordemodulating said second modulation to recover said second voice typesignal; andsaid transponder further including means coupled to said transponderreceiving means for demodulating said first modulation to recover saidfirst voice type signal.4. A system according to claim 3 wherein said elapsed time signaling meansprovides the range between said interrogator and said transponder.5. A system according to claim 4 wherein said first modulation is amodulation of the pulse repetition frequency of the pulse train signaltransmitted by said interrogator.6. A system according to claim 5 wherein said second modulation is a pulsewidth modulation, a signal pulse transmitted by said interrogator is apulse of radiant energy at a first carrier frequency, and a signal pulsetransmitted by said transponder is a pulse of radiant energy at a secondcarrier frequency.7. A system according to claim 4 wherein the bandwidth of said voice typesignal is less than one-half the pulse repetition frequency of the pulsetrain signal transmitted by the interrogator."}
{"WKU":"039316238","Title":"Reliable earth terminal for satellite communications","App_Date":"1974-05-31","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"William K. Sones;Laurence F. Gray;Louis Pollack","Assignee":"Communications Satellite Corporation","ICL_Class":"H04b  714","References":"3456191;3519945","Claims":"We claim:1. In a satellite communications system comprising a network of centralmonitoring and central facilities and a plurality of unattended, reliableearth terminals connected by communication links to each centralmonitoring and control facility, each of said reliable earth terminalsoperating with two or more satellites in synchronous orbit above the earthand comprising:a. antenna means including a fixed reflector and a separate feed for eachof said satellites,b. modular transmitter means connected to each of said separate antennafeeds and including a plurality of identical high power amplifiers equalin number to at least one more than the number of respective channels inthe corresponding satellite but less than twice the number of channels,the bandwidth of each of said high power amplifiers being equal to orslightly greater than the total satellite communication bandwidth modularfilter matrix means connected to a corresponding antenna feed and dividedinto a plurality of contiguous frequency bands equal in number to thenumber of respective satellite channels, and switch means for connecting anumber of said plurality of high power amplifiers equal in number to thenumber of respective channels to said filter matrix means, the remaininghigh power amplifiers serving as spares and said switching means beingoperative to substitute one of said spares for any high power amplifierwhich fails,c. low-noise receiver means connected to each of said separate antennafeeds and including an uncooled parametric amplifier having a plurality ofindependent identical, interchangeable parametric amplifier modulesconnected in cascade by an integrated multi-port microwave circulatormeans whereby said modules can be removed and replaced withoutinterruption to service, andd. monitor and control means connected to said modular transmitter meansand said low-noise receiver means for monitoring and providing limiteddirect control of transmitting and receiving parameters, said monitor andcontrol means also transmitting operating data of said reliable earthterminal over one of said communication links to its corresponding centralmonitoring and control facility.2. A reliable earth terminal as recited in claim 1 wherein said terminaltransmits and receives in two orthogonal polarizations to thereby doublethe maximum number of channels and said antenna means further includespolarizer and orthomode transducer means connected to each of saidseparate feeds for isolating orthogonally polarized transmit and receivesignals.3. A reliable earth terminal as recited in claim 1 wherein said monitor andcontrol means receives antenna feed position command control signals fromthe central monitoring and control facility and said antenna means furthercomprises feed position means for each of said separate feeds andresponsive to said command control signals for providing limitedpositioning of the separate feeds.4. A reliable earth terminal as recited in claim 3 wherein said fixedreflector is a non-rectangular torus reflector.5. A reliable earth terminal as recited in claim 1 wherein said low-noisereceiver means further includes a parallel redundant transistor amplifierconnected to the output of said uncooled parametric amplifier andfilter-demultiplexer means connected to the output of said transistoramplifier for frequency demultiplexing signals amplified by saidparametric and transistor amplifiers.6. A reliable earth terminal as recited in claim 5 wherein said parallelredundant transistor amplifier includes first and second identicaltransistor amplifiers, an input four-terminal hybrid having one input portconnected to the output of said parametric amplifier and the other inputport terminated in its characteristic impedance and having the two outputports connected to the inputs of said first and second transistoramplifiers, and an output four-terminal hybrid having the two input portsconnected to the outputs of said first and second transistor amplifiersand one output port connected to said filter-demultiplexer means and theother output port terminated in its characteristic impedance.7. A reliable earth terminal as recited in claim 1 wherein said modulartransmitter means additionally includes modulator, IF amplifier,upconvertor and local oscillator circuits for each channel and saidreceiver means additionally includes local oscillator, downconvertor, IFamplifier and demodulator circuits for each channel, each of said circuitsbeing broadband, fixed tuned circuits which can be interchanged with likecircuits and employing passive filter means or crystal means for channelassignment.8. A reliable earth terminal as recited in claim 1 further comprisingautomatic gain control means in said receiver means for compensating for aloss in gain due to the failure of one or more of said parametricamplifier modules."}
{"WKU":"039316246","Title":"Antenna array for aircraft guidance system","App_Date":"1974-03-21","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Warren Hundley;Michael A. Eovine","Assignee":"Tull Aviation Corporation","ICL_Class":"H01Q 1310;H01Q 1914","References":"2437281;3078463;3135959;3156917;3267472;3604010","Claims":"I claim:1. An antenna array for radiating a partern of angularly spaced microwaveradio beams which are particularly useful to provide localizer signals forinstrument guidance of aircraft comprisinga radiation reflector in the form of a sector of a concave cylinder havingsubstantially open ends,said relector being arranged facing in a substantially horizontal directionand such that the parallel cylinder generation element lines thereof aresubstantially horizontal,a plurality of slotted wave guide microwave signal radiating elementshorizontally positioned below the focal plane of the reflector and at anangle thereto and arranged to direct microwave energy directly to saidreflector for reflection thereby,said radiating elements being positioned and operable to direct radiationin serval separate narrow beams to said reflector at different azimuthangles and such that the center lines of said beams are in substantialalignment in elevation within a common plane,the reflected beams having uniform elevation patterns as determinedprimarily by the cylindrical curvature and the elevation rotationalposition of said radiation reflector and substantially independent of thedifferent azimuth angles of said beams,and the reflected beams having different azimuth angles and selectedazimuth patterns symmetrical about the respective center lines thereof asdetermined primarily by the radiation characteristics of said radiatingelements and substantially independent of the characteristics of saidradiation reflector.2. An antenna array for radiating a pattern of angularly spaced microwaveradio beams which are particularly useful to provide localizer signals forinstrument guidance of aircraft comprisinga radiation reflector in the form of a sector of a concave cylinder,said reflector being arranged facing in a substantially horizontaldirection and such that the parallel cylinder generation element linesthereof are substantially horizontal,a plurlaity of slotted wave guide microwave signal radiating elementshorizontally positioned and arranged to direct microwave energy directlyto said reflector for reflection thereby,said radiating elements being positioned and operable to direct radiationin separate beams to said reflector at different azimuth angles and suchthat the center lines of said beams are in substantial alignment inelevation within a common plane,the reflected beams having uniform elevation patterns as determinedprimarily by the cylindrical curvature and the elevation rotationalposition of said radiation reflector and substantially independent of thedifferent azimuth angles of said beams,and the reflected beams having different azimuth angles and selectedazimuth patterns determined primarily by the radiation characteristics ofsaid radiating elements and substantially independent of thecharacteristics of said radiation reflector,the upper portion of said radiation reflector generally corresponding inshape to a parabolic cylinder sector and the lower portion of saidreflector having a sharper curvature and merging into a shape moregenerally corresponding to a circular cylinder sector,said reflector being arranged such that the axis plane of the paraboliccylinder sector is substantially horizontal,the curvature of the reflector being operable to provide a reversal of thereflected beam portions such that the upper portion of said radiationreflector determines the character of the lower portions of the reflectedbeams and the lower portion of said reflector determines the character ofthe upper portions of the reflected beams.3. An antenna array as claimed in claim 2 wherein said radiating elementsare oriented to direct radiation diagonally upwardly toward said reflectorin beams that are uniform and relatively wide in elevation to illuminatesubstantially the entire reflector as viewed in elevation,said radiating elements being positioned below the paths of all of thereflected beam portions corresponding to geometrically optically reflectedbeam elements.4. An antenna array for radiating a pattern of angularly spaced microwaveradio beams which are particularly useful to provide localizer signals forinstrument guidance of aircraft comprisinga radiation reflector in the form of a sector of a concave cylinder,said reflector being arranged facing in a substantially horizontaldirection and such that the parallel cylinder generation element linesthereof are substantially horizontal,a plurality of slotted wave guide microwave signal radiating elementshorizontally positioned below the focal plane of the reflector and at anangle thereto and arranged to direct microwave energy directly to saidreflector for reflection thereby,said radiating elements being positioned and operable to direct radiationin serveral separate narrow beams to said reflector at different azimuthangles and such that the center lines of said beams are in substantialalignment in elevation within a common plane,the reflected beams having uniform elevation patterns as determinedprimarily by the cylindrical curvature and the elevation rotationalposition of said radiation reflector and substantially independent of thedifferent azimuth angles of said beams,and the reflected beams having different azimuth angles and selectedazimuth patterns symmetrical about the respective center lines thereof asdetermined primarily by the radiation characteristics of said radiatingelements and substantially independent of the characteristics of saidradiation reflector,said antenna array being a switched scanning beam array including switchingmeans connected to said radiating elements to switch microwave carrierenergy in a sequence from one beam to another to thereby produce aswitched scanning beam.5. An antenna array as claimed in claim 4 wherein said slotted wave guidemicrowave signal radiating elements each include means for separatelyintroducing signals at each end thereof,each of said wave guides being designed with the positions of the slots inthe slotted wall thereof arranged so as to provide radiation directedoutwardly at predetermined angles referred to as squint angles ofdeviation away from a direction normal to the slotted face of the waveguide.said squit angles being dependent upon the direction of progagation of thesignal through the wave guide so that oppositely disposed squint anglesare provided when the wave guide is fed from opposite ends.6. An antenna array for radiating a pattern of angularly spaced microwaveradio beams which are particularly useful to provide localizer signals forinstrument guidance of aircraft comprisinga radiation reflector in the form of a sector of a concave cylinder,said reflector being arranged facing in a substantially horizontaldirection and such that the parallel cylinder generation element linesthereof are substantially horizontal,a plurality of slotted wave guide microwave signal radiating elementshorizontally positioned and arranged to direct microwave energy directlyto said reflector for reflection thereby,said radiating elements being positioned and operable to direct radiationin separate beams to said reflector at different azimuth angles and suchthat the center lines of said beams are in substantial alignment inelevation within a common plane,the reflected beams having uniform elevation patterns as determinedprimarily by the cylindrical curvature and the elevation rotationalposition of said radiation reflector and substantially independent of thedifferent azimuth angles of said beams,the reflected beams having different azimuth angles and selected aximuthpatterns determined primarily by the radiation characteristics of saidradiating elements and substantially independent of the characteristics ofsaid radiation reflector,said antenna array being operable as a switched schanning beam antennaarray in which carrier energy is switched in a sequence from one beam toanother,said slotted wave guide microwave signal radiating elements each includingmeans for separately introducing signals at each end thereof,each of said wave guides being designed with the positions of the slots inthe slotted wall thereof arranged so as to provide radiation directedoutwardly at predetermined angles referred to as squint angles ofdeviation away from a direction normal to the slotted face of the waveguide,said squint angles being dependent upon the direction of propagation of thesignal through the wave guide so that oppositely disposed squint anglesare provided when the wave guide is fed from opposite ends,all of said wave guide radiators being in substantial alignment in parallelwith said reflector and said wave guide radiators being respectivelydesigned to provide different squint angles so that respective pairs ofbeams available from each radiating element complement the beams fromother radiating elements to provide beams having different desired angularspacings.7. An antenna array as claimed in claim 5 wherein said means for separatelyintroducing signals at each end of each slotted wave guide includes anisolator operable to pass the signal into the associated end of the waveguide but operable to act as a non-reflective load for any signalpropagated from the opposite end of the wave guide.8. An antenna array as claimed in claim 5 whereinthe slots in said slotted wave guide microwave signal radiating elementscomprise longitudinal shunt slots.9. An antenna array as claimed in claim 8 whereineach of said slotted wave guide microwave signal radiating elementsincludes a plurality of slots arranged at various interally offsetspacings from the longitudinal axis of the wave guide,the slot having the largest lateral offset spacing being located nearestthe lateral center line of the wave guide,and the slots having progressively reduced offset spacings at successivepositions progressing from the lateral center line toward each end of thewave guide.10. An antenna array as claimed in claim 9 whereinthe slots of said slotted wave guide microwave signal radiating elementsare progressively slightly longer in coordination with the spacing fromthe end of the wave guide to the lateral center line of the wave guide.11. An antenna array as claimed in claim 9 whereinthe slots of said slotted wave guide microwave signal radiating elementsare staggered on opposite sides of the longitudinal center line of theslotted face of each wave guide.12. An antenna array as claimed in claim 11 whereinthe pattern of slots is symmetrical about the transverse center line ofeach slotted wave guide.13. An antenna array as claimed in claim 12 whereinthe slots on each side of the transverse center line of each slotted waveguide are positioned and dimensioned for optimum performance in couplingenergy introduced at the end of the associated side of the wave guide.14. An antenna array as claimed in claim 2 whereinsaid common plane of the center lines of said beams is inclined upwardlyfrom said radiating elements to said radiation reflector from a positionnear said axis plane of said reflector.15. An antenna array as claimed in claim 14 whereinsaid common plane of the center lines of said beams is inclined at an anglein the neighborhood of 45.degree.."}
{"WKU":"039316254","Title":"Shortened multi-rod broadband antenna","App_Date":"1974-07-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Bernard Chiron;Jean Gelin","Assignee":"Societe Lignes Telegraphiques et Telephoniques","ICL_Class":"H01Q  932","References":"3550145;3564551","Claims":"What we claim:1. A broadband multi-rod antenna comprising a plurality of loaded shortenedmonopoles supported in parallel relation to each other spacedequidistantly around the circumference of an imaginary cylinder, theresonant frequency of adjacent ones of said monopoles being different.2. An antenna as defined by claim 1 in which said monopoles are so arrangedwith respect to each other that if in a plane normal to said monopoles,straight lines drawn to connect monopoles in the order of the value oftheir resonant frequencies, define a star within said cylinder having anumber of points equal to the number of monopoles.3. An antenna as defined by claim 1 in which the different resonantfrequencies of said monopoles are related to each other in a geometricalprogression.4. An antenna as defined by claim 1 in which the different resonantfrequencies of said monopoles are related to each other in a logarithmicprogression.5. An antenna as defined by claim 1 in which the loads of said monopolesare cylindrical sleeves made of low loss materials with at least oneelectrical characteristic varying in accordance with frequency.6. An antenna as defined by claim 1 in which said monopoles are of the samegeometrical length.7. An antenna defined by claim 1 in which a shorting sleeve is located atthe driven end of each monopole."}
{"WKU":"039316262","Title":"Staggered tuned TV receiving antenna with integrated UHF-VHF sections","App_Date":"1973-12-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Sylvan Simons","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"H01Q 2108","References":"2980912;3534369;3573841;3599217;3710337","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A multi-element VHF television receiving antenna capable of respondingto two widely separated frequencies of a frequency range of approximately3 to 1 comprising two parallel cross-arms, a plurality of cross-phasedaxially spaced dipoles secured to said cross-arms, at least one of saiddipoles having inboard conductors and electrically connected paddleshapedconductors in which the perimeter of the paddle is selected for 1/2wavelength response at the lower of said two widely spaced frequencies,and the length of the inboard conductors for the combination of theconductors being selected so that the impedance of the combination of theinboard conductors and the paddle-shaped conductors will make it resonantfor approximately 3/2 wavelength at the higher of the two frequencies.2. The antenna as claimed in claim 1 further comprising means to increasethe response of the three rearmost dipoles of the antenna array on thehigh VHF band including short 1/4 wavelength conductors connected to theinboard side of a low VHF band dipole and extending in the oppositedirection thereto, a short parasitic dipole in close proximity to a lowfrequency dipole, and a paddle-shaped conductor connected to the outboardend of a less than 1/4 wavelength conductor at the high VHF televisionband.3. The antenna as claimed in claim 2 wherein said paddle-type conductor isthe rearmost dipole, said short 1/4 wavelength conductor connected to theinboard side of the low VHF band dipole and extending in the oppositedirection thereto is the second rearmost dipole, and a short parasiticdipole in close proximity to said low frequency dipole being said thirdrearmost dipole.4. The antenna as claimed in claim 1 further comprising means for enhancingthe high band VHF TV reception, said means including a plurality ofpassive Franklin-type dipole directors mounted in front of the forwardmostelements on said conductive cross-arms.5. The antenna as claimed in claim 3 further comprising means for enhancingthe high band VHF TV reception, said means including a plurality ofFranklin-type dipole directors mounted in front of the forwardmostelements.6. The antenna as claimed in claim 1 wherein said paddle has a length ofapproximately 25 inches and said inboard conductor has a length ofapproximately 191/2 inches."}
{"WKU":"039316270","Title":"Electrographic devices and apparatus for non-electrostatically producing","App_Date":"1974-01-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Marcus Cantarano","Assignee":"","ICL_Class":"G03G 1504;G01D 1506","References":"2901374;2912586;3182591;3194674;3234904;3257222;3266046","Claims":"What I claim is:1. A device for producing electrographic images from an original providedwith a conductivity pattern ranging from a portion having a greaterconductivity to a portion having a lesser conductivity, said devicecomprising means for placing a thin layer of electrically chargeableparticles in contact with said conductivity pattern, means for generatingan alternating electric field of sufficient strength across said layer ofelectrically chargeable particles and said conductivity pattern so as totransfer electric charges from said conductivity pattern to saidelectrically chargeable particles whereby said particles receive electriccharges having different maximum values according to the differentconductivities of said portions of said conductivity pattern whereby aportion of said particles are sufficiently charged and removed from saidlayer of electrically chargeable particles and the remainder of saidparticles are insufficiently charged so that they continue to remain insaid particles layer thereby producing a stable electrographic image.2. A device as defined in claim 1 further including an insulating backingplaced against said conductivity pattern so that said conductivity patterncontacting said electrically chargeable particles is located between saidinsulating backing and said layer of electrically chargeable particles.3. A device as defined in claim 1 further including an insulating layerplaced against said conductivity pattern so that said layer ofelectrically chargeable particles contacting said conductivity pattern islocated between said insulating layer and said conductivity pattern.4. A device as defined in claim 1 further including a first and a secondinsulating layer between which said conductivity pattern contacting saidelectrically chargeable particles and said layer of electricallychargeable particles are located.5. A device as defined in claim 1 further including an insulating imagecarrier placed against said conductivity pattern so that said layer ofelectrically chargeable particles contacting said conductivity pattern islocated between said insulating image carrier and said conductivitypattern.6. A device as defined in claim 1 wherein said generating means includes agrid- shaped electrode placed in spaced relationship with saidconductivity pattern so that said layer of electrically chargeableparticles is located between said conductivity pattern and saidgrid-shaped electrode.7. A device as defined in claim 1 further including a conductive imagecarrier placed against said conductivity pattern so that said layer ofelectrically chargeable particles contacting said conductivity pattern islocated between said conductive image carrier and said conductivitypattern.8. A device as defined in claim 7 further including a first and a secondinsulating layer between which said conductive image carrier, saidparticles layer contacting said conductivity pattern and said conductivitypattern are located.9. A device for producing electrographic images from an original providedwith a conductivity pattern ranging from a portion having a greaterconductivity to a portion having a lesser conductivity, said devicecomprising an insulating backing material onto which said conductivitypattern is affixed, means for coating said conductivity pattern with athin layer of electrically chargeable particles, an insulating imagecarrier placed against said conductivity pattern so that said layer ofelectrically chargeable particles is located between said insulating imagecarrier and said conductivity pattern and so that said conductivitypattern is located between said layer of electrically chargeable particlesand said insulating backing material, means for generating an electricfield of sufficient strength across said insulating backing material, saidconductivity pattern contacting said layer of electrically chargeableparticles and said insulating image carrier so as to transfer electriccharges from said conductivity pattern to said electrically chargeableparticles whereby said particles receive electric charges having differentmaximum values according to the different conductivities of said portionsof said conductivity pattern whereby a portion of said particles aresufficiently charged and removed from said conductivity pattern and theremainder of said particles are insufficiently charged so that theycontinue to remain on said conductivity pattern thereby producing thereona first stable electrographic image and a second stable electrographicimage is formed on said insulating image carrier from said particlesremoved from said conductivity pattern.10. A device as defined in claim 9 wherein said generating means includesmeans for changing the direction of said electric field.11. A device for producing electrographic images from an original providedwith a conductivity pattern ranging from a portion having a greaterconductivity to a portion having a lesser conductivity, said devicecomprising an insulating backing material onto which said conductivitypattern is affixed, means for coating said conductivity pattern with athin layer of electrically chargeable particles, an insulating layerplaced against said conductivity pattern so that said layer ofelectrically chargeable particles is located between said insulating layerand said conductivity pattern and so that said conductivity pattern islocated between said layer of electrically chargeable particles and saidinsulating backing material, means for generating an electric field ofsufficient strength across said insulating backing material, saidconductivity pattern contacting said layer of electrically chargeableparticles and said insulating layer so as to transfer electric chargesfrom said conductivity pattern to said electrically chargeable particleswhereby said particles receive electric charges having different maximumvalues according to the different conductivities of said portions of saidconductivity pattern whereby a portion of said particles are sufficientlycharged and removed from said conductivity pattern and the remainder ofsaid particles are insufficiently charged so that they continue to remainon said conductivity pattern thereby producing thereon a stableelectrographic image.12. A device as defined in claim 11 wherein said generating means includesmeans for changing the direction of said electric field.13. A device for producing electrographic images from an original providedwith a conductivity pattern ranging from a portion having a greaterconductivity to a portion having a lesser conductivity, said devicecomprising an insulating backing material onto which said conductivitypattern is affixed, means for coating said conductivity pattern with athin layer of electrically chargeable particles, a grid-shaped firstelectrode and a second electrode between which said conductivity patternand said insulating backing material are interposed so that saidinsulating backing material is located between said conductivity patternand said second electrode, means for maintaining said grid-shaped firstelectrode in a spaced relationship with said coated conductivity pattern,means for generating an electric field between said grid-shaped firstelectrode and said second electrode of sufficient strength so as totransfer electric charges from said connductivity pattern to saidelectrically chargeable particles whereby said particles receive electriccharges having different maximum values according to the differentconductivities of said portions of said conductivity pattern whereby aportion of said particles are sufficiently charged and removed from saidconductivity pattern and through said grid shaped electrode and theremainder of said particles are insufficiently charged so that theycontinue to remain on said conductivity pattern thereby producing thereona stable electrographic image.14. A device as defined in claim 13 wherein said generating means includesmeans for alternatively modulating said electric field.15. A device for producing electrographic images from an original providedwith a conductivity pattern ranging from a portion having a greaterconductivity to a portion having a lesser conductivity, said devicecomprising an image carrier having a uniform conductivity intermediatesaid greater conductivity and said lesser conductivity of saidconductivity pattern, means for placing a thin layer of electricallychargeable particles in contact with said conductivity pattern and saidimage carrier so that said layer of electrically chargeable particles issandwiched between said image carrier and said conductivity pattern, meansfor generating an electric field of sufficient strength across thesandwich formed by said image carrier, said layer of electricallychargeable particles and said conductivity pattern so as to transferelectric charges from said conductive image carrier to said layer ofelectrically chargeable particles and opposite electric charges from saidconductivity pattern to said layer of electrically chargeable particleswhereby a portion of said particles is electrically attracted toward saidconductive image carrier to develop thereon a first stable electrographicimage and the remainder of said particles is electrically attracted towardsaid conductivity pattern to develop thereon a second stableelectrographic image.16. A device as defined in claim 15 wherein said generating means includesmeans for changing the direction of said electric field.17. A device as defined in claim 15 wherein said generating means includesmeans for alternatively modulating said electric field.18. A device as defined in claim 15 further including an insulating backingmaterial placed against said conductivity pattern so that saidconductivity pattern is located between said insulating backing materialand said layer of electrically chargeable particles contacting saidconductivity pattern.19. A device as defined in claim 15 further including an insulating layerplaced against said conductivity pattern so that said layer ofelectrically chargeable particles contacting said conductivity pattern islocated between said conductivity pattern and said insulating layer.20. An apparatus for producing electrographic images on a copy materialfrom an original provided with a conductivity pattern ranging from aportion having a greater conductivity to a portion having a lesserconductivity, said device comprising a conductive image carrier, means forcoating said conductive image carrier with a thin layer of electricallychargeable particles, means for placing said conductivity pattern incontact with said layer of electrically chargeable particles so that saidlayer of electrically chargeable particles is sandwiched between saidconductive image carrier and said conductivity pattern, means forgenerating a first electric field of sufficient strength across thesandwich formed by said conductive image carrier, said layer ofelectrically chargeable particles and said conductivity pattern so as totransfer electric charges from said conductivity pattern and from saidconductive image carrier to said electrically chargeable particles wherebya portion of said electrically charged particles are removed and anelectrographic image is formed on said conductive image carrier from theremainder of said particles, means for transporting said electrographicimage bearing conductive image carrier to a transfer station, saidtransfer station comprising means for placing a copy material against theelectrically chargeable particles of said electrographic image, and meansfor generating a second electric field of sufficient strength across saidcopy material and said conductive image carrier so as to electricallytransfer the particles of said electrographic image onto said copymaterial.21. An apparatus as defined in claim 20 wherein the generating means ofsaid first electric field includes means for changing the direction ofsaid first electric field.22. An apparatus as defined in claim 20 wherein the generating means ofsaid first electric field includes means for alternatively modulating saidfirst electric field.23. An apparatus as defined in claim 20 further including a first and asecond insulating layer between which the sandwich formed by saidconductive image carrier and said conductivity pattern contacting saidelectrically chargeable particles is interposed in said first electricfield."}
{"WKU":"039316289","Title":"Exposure time control device for an electric shutter in a single reflex","App_Date":"1972-12-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Yasuhiro Nanba;Masayoshi Sahara","Assignee":"Minolta Camera Kabushiki Kaisha","ICL_Class":"G03B  708","References":"3295424;3450016;3533348;3693518","Claims":"We claim:1. In an electric shutter control device for a single lens reflex cameraincluding a light receptive means receiving light through an objectivelens of the camera, a light detecting circuit including said lightreceptive element and an output terminal and for generating an outputvoltage indicative of the light incident on said light receptive means atsaid output terminal, means for storing said output voltage, switch meansfor selectively connecting one terminal of said means for storing to saidoutput terminal, means for timing the closing of the shutter in accordancewith said stored output voltage, and an electric power source forenergizing the electric shutter control device, the improvementcomprising:biasing means including a first and a second resistor serially connectedwith each other and the junction point therebetween connected with anotherterminal of said means for storing for applying a biasing voltage to saidanother terminal, said biasing means being connected substantially inparallel with said electric power source.2. An electric shutter control device as set forth in claim 1 wherein theimprovement further comprises a transistor for generating output currentproportional to the antilogarithm of said stored output voltage, andwherein said output voltage is proportional to the logarithm of the lightintensity on said light receptive element, and said biasing voltage is XVand determined by:##EQU21##V.sub.o is defined by:##EQU22##wherein V.sub.BE is the base-to-emitter voltage of said transistor,I.sub.c is the collector current of said transistor, V.sub.o and V.sub.1are the positive and negative temperature coefficients of said transistor.3. In a device for controlling exposure time in an automatic exposurecamera which device includes:a. a power source;b. a photoelectric converter circuit including a photoconductive elementhaving a resistance value determined by the intensity of light from anobject to be photographed, and an impedance element connected in serieswith said photoconductive element, said photoelectric converter circuitbeing connected with said power source;c. a first switch connected in series with and between said photoelectricconverter circuit and said power source to make and break the connectiontherebetween;d. a storage capacitor for storing a voltage divided by saidphotoconductive element and said impedance element when said first switchis closed;e. a second switch connected between the point of connection between saidphotoconductive element and said impedance element and one end of saidcapacitor, said second switch being adapted to open after said firstswitch is closed, the voltage stored in said storage capacitor becomingindependent of any variation in the resistance value of saidphotoconductive element after said second switch is opened;f. a magnet driving circuit including a magnet for controlling the exposuretime of the camera s shutter in accordance with the voltage stored in saidstorage capacitor, said magnet driving circuit being connected with saidpower source in parallel relationship with said photoelectric convertercircuit; andg. a third switch connected between said magnet driving circuit and saidpower source to make and break the connection therebetween, said thirdswitch being adapted to close after said second switch is opened,the improvement comprising:"}
{"WKU":"039316297","Title":"Control element for displacing components of optical systems","App_Date":"1974-04-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Paul Himmelsbach","Assignee":"Jos. Schneider & Co. Optische Werke","ICL_Class":"G03B  300;G03B 1302;G02B 1500;G02B  702","References":"1950166;3163701;3442577;3609011","Claims":"I claim:1. In an optical system comprising a plurality of members centered on anaxis which are to be jointly displaced in a coordinated manner, thecombination therewith of a common control element for said memberscomprising a substantially continuous foil of imperforate sheet materialwith spaced-apart deformations offset from the body of the foilconstituting a plurality of camming grooves, said foil being rotatableabout said axis, and projections on said members respectively received insaid camming grooves, said foil being of substantially constant thicknessthroughout said body and said deformations.2. The combination defined in claim 1, further comprising a rigid backingelement for said control element mounted coaxially therewith, said backingelement having a substantially continuous surface spaced from said bodybut contacted by said deformations.3. The combination defined in claim 2 wherein said backing element and saidcontrol element are provided with coacting formations coupling same toeach other for joint rotation about said axis.4. The combination defined in claim 3 wherein said backing element isprovided with actuating means for rotating same about said axis.5. The combination defined in claim 4 wherein said elements are generallycylindrical.6. The combination defined in claim 5 wherein said members are lens mounts,further comprising guide means for said lens mounts extending parallel tosaid axis.7. The combination defined in claim 4 wherein said elements are flat.8. The combination defined in claim 1 wherein said projections include aball lodged in a recess of a resilient extension of at least one of saidmembers.9. The combination defined in claim 1 wherein said foil consists of metal.10. The combination defined in claim 9 wherein said foil is provided with aresinous antifriction coating at least in said grooves."}
{"WKU":"039316300","Title":"Viewfinder assembly","App_Date":"1974-08-20","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"James J. Crawford","Assignee":"Frezzolini Electronics, Inc.","ICL_Class":"G03B 1302;G03B 1310","References":"1987041;2165512;2468814;2681979;2685237;2858751;3181445","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a camera of the type comprising a body, a camera lens connected tosaid body, and a side door on said camera body for access to the interiorthereof; a viewfinder assembly comprising:a. a support barrel mounted on said camera lens;b. a circular main body section adapted to support optical elementstherein;c. an eyepiece at one end of said main body section extending outwardlytherefrom;d. said main body section having a normal operating position correspondingto a first position in which said eyepiece is positioned in the path ofmovement of said door and said eyepiece is oriented in viewing position;e. and mounting means for mounting said main body section for rotationalmovement between said first position and a second position in which saideyepiece is positioned out of the path of movement of said door to permitsaid door to be opened,"}
{"WKU":"039316319","Title":"Gallium phosphide light-emitting diodes","App_Date":"1974-04-01","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Warren O. Groves;Arnold S. Epstein","Assignee":"Monsanto Company","ICL_Class":"H05h 3300","References":"3646406;3687744","Claims":"We claim:1. An article of manufacture comprising a layer of electroluminescent GaPepitaxially grown from vapor phase reactant materials, said layer having abulk region substantially free of nitrogen atoms and a surface regioncontaining nitrogen atoms in a concentration within the range of from 1.0- 3.0 .times. 10.sup. 19 cm.sup.-.sup.3, said bulk and surface regionsboth containing N-type impurity atoms in a concentration within the rangeof 2.0 .times. 10.sup.16 cm.sup.-.sup.3 to 2.0 .times. 10.sup.17cm.sup.-.sup.3 and said surface region further containing P-type impurityatoms at a surface concentration of about 1 .times. 10.sup.19cm.sup.-.sup.3 to define a P-N junction in said surface region.2. An article of manufacture according to claim 1 wherein said layer is inepitaxial relationship with a suitable substrate.3. An article of manufacture according to claim 1 further including ohmiccontacts and leads to an external circuit attached to said bulk andsurface regions.4. An article of manufacture according to claim 2 wherein said substrate isGaP.5. An article of manufacture according to claim 2 wherein said substrate isGaAs.6. An article of manufacture according to claim 4 further including ohmiccontacts and leads to an external circuit attached to said layer and saidsubstrate.7. An article of manufacture according to claim 5 further including ohmiccontacts and leads to an external circuit attached to said layer and saidsubstrate."}
{"WKU":"039316327","Title":"Switching device equipped with a semiconductor memory element","App_Date":"1974-03-28","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Kosaku Uchida;Tsutomu Kobayashi;Susumu Koike","Assignee":"Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"H01L 2978;H01L 2966;H03K  3353;G11C 1144","References":"3676717;3693003","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Switching apparatus, comprising: a semiconductor memory element having asemiconductor substrate of a first conductivity type, first and secondregions of a different conductivity type from that of said substrateformed separately in the surface of said substrate and formingcorresponding step junctions with said substrate, wherein said secondregion is highly doped, a first insulating film through which chargecarriers can pass overlying all but said first region, and a secondinsulating film having charge carrier trapping levels overlying said firstinsulating film; first, second, and third electrodes in contact,respectively, with said first region, said substrate, and said secondinsulating film; a D.C. source coupled between said first and secondelectrodes and providing a reverse bias potential between said first andsecond electrodes; first and second control circuits coupled between saidsecond and third electrodes, said control circuits including means forsupplying voltages of opposite polarity between said second and thirdelectrodes; and control terminal means for sensing the touch of a humanbody and for selectively coupling said first and second control circuitsbetween said second and third electrodes.2. Switching apparatus, comprising: a semiconductor memory element having asemiconductor substrate of a first type, a first region of differentconductivity type from said substrate and a second region of the sameconductivity type as said substrate, wherein said second region is highlydoped, said first and second regions being formed separately in thesurface of said substrate and forming corresponding step junctions withsaid substrate, a first insulating film through which carriers can passformed on the surface of said substrate between said first and secondregions, and a second insulating film having charge carrier trappinglevels formed on said first film between said first and second regions;first, second, third and fourth electrodes in contact, respectively, withsaid first region, said second region, said second insulating film andsaid substrate; A.C. power supply and load means connected in series andcoupled to said first electrode through an impedance element andrectifier, and to said second electrode to provide a D.C. reverse biasvoltage between said first and second electrodes; and further means forselectively coupling an A.C. hum voltage of opposite polarity, induced ina human body from a high impedance coupling to an A.C. line voltagethrough rectifying means, between said third and fourth electrodes whereinthe fourth electrode is connected to a reference A.C. voltage supplymeans.3. The apparatus according to claim 2, wherein said selective couplingmeans comprising: first and second control terminals, to which said A.C.hum voltage is applied, connected to said third electrode through firstand second rectifiers whose directions of current flow are opposite eachother; and said A.C. reference voltage supply means includes seriesconnected impedance elements across an A.C. supply line and the junctionof said series-connected impedance elements is connected to said fourthelectrode.4. The apparatus according to claim 2, wherein said selective couplingmeans comprises: first and second control terminals, to which said A.C.hum voltage is applied, independently connected to said third electrode; aseries-connected circuit including two rectifiers connected between saidfirst and second control terminals, wherein the junction point of said tworectifiers is connected directly to said fourth electrode; and means forsupplying said reference A.C. voltage to said fourth electrode."}
{"WKU":"039316335","Title":"Electron tube including a photocathode","App_Date":"1975-03-05","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"John Martin Shannon;John Ernest Ralph","Assignee":"U.S. Philips Corporation","ICL_Class":"H01L 2714","References":"3699404;3721839","Claims":"What we claim is:1. A semiconductor photocathode comprising a semiconductor body having ann-type portion and having a surface, a p-type zone at the body surface andforming a p-n junction located not substantially more than a diffusionlength for electrons from a free surface of said p-type zone, said freesurface of said p-type zone being coated with material producing a workfunction less than or equal to the distance between the Fermi level andthe bottom of the conduction band in said p-type semiconductor, a fieldeffect transistor having source and drain regions separated by a channelregion in the n-type portion and having a gate electrode at a surface ofthe n-type portion and separated by a barrier from the channel region,means connecting electrically in series the p-type zone, the p-n junction,and one of the transistor source and drain regions, means for electricallypulsing the gate whereby a depletion region is established in the channelsubstantially cutting off current therein, and means for applying apotential across the field effect transistor and the p-type zone and p-njunction such that that p-n junction becomes forward biased when currentis caused to flow through the channel region by contraction of thedepletion region, said transistor structure being mounted such thatelectromagnetic radiation directed at the photocathode can reach thechannel and generate charge carriers in or within a diffusion length ofsaid depletion region thereby causing contraction thereof in accordancewith the intensity of the incident radiation causing current to flowthrough the channel, whereby electrons are injected into the p-type zoneand upon reaching the coated surface will become emitted therefrom.2. A photocathode as claimed in claim 1, wherein the transistor is of then-channel type, the n-type material which forms the injecting p-n junctionwith the p-type semiconductor also forming said one of the source anddrain regions of the transistor.3. An imaging device comprising a common semiconductive n-type layer havingopposed major surfaces, an array of junction field effect transistors insaid n-type layer each having source and drain regions spaced apart by achannel region and each having a separate surface gate spaced by a barrierjunction from a channel region and capable when pulsed of establishing adepletion region in the channel, said channel regions all being located inthe said common semiconductive layer, an array of p-type semiconductorzones each forming a p-n junction with the n-type layer located not morethan a diffusion length for electrons from a free surface of the p-typezones, a low work function material coating on the free surface of thep-type zones forming an electron emissive element, each of said p-typezones being electrically connected in series with the source and drainregions of one of the transistors, said array of transistors being mountedsuch that electromagnetic radiation in the form of an image directed fromoutside the array can reach the channels and generate charge carriers inor within a diffusion length of said depletion regions thereby causingcontraction thereof in accordance with the intensity of the radiationincident thereon, and means for applying a potential across the array oftransistors and array of p-type zones such that when the depletion regionscontract, the series-connected p-n junction becomes forward biasedinjecting electrons into the adjacent p-type zone which upon reaching thecoated surface will become emitted therefrom, the magnitude of saidemission from each p-type zone being related to the radiation intensity onthe channel region connected in series with said p-type zone.4. An imaging device as claimed in claim 3, wherein each transistorstructure has a separate gate and the device includes a common addressingconductor for all said gates, said addressing conductor being coupled toeach gate via an individual barrier preventing charge leakage from thegate to the conductor.5. An imaging device as claimed in claim 4, wherein the barriers eachcomprise a capacitor.6. An imaging device as claimed in claim 3, wherein the gates all liesubstantially at the same major surface of said layer and each is of aconfiguration for producing a depletion region which surrounds a currentpath from a source region to a drain region for the correspondingtransistor structure, and a connection lying substantially at andelectrically contacting said same major surface.7. An imaging device as claimed in claim 6, wherein the said connectionwhich lies substantially at said same major surface contacts said samemajor surface via the associated emissive element.8. An imaging device as claimed in claim 6 and including a further layercontacting an oppositely-located major surface of the semiconductor layer,and means for applying a potential to said further layer for producing adepletion region extending into the semiconductor layer.9. An imaging device as claimed in claim 6, wherein a common addressingconductor is provided for all the gates and also constitutes a commonsupply conductor for said connections lying substantially at said samemajor surface.10. An imaging device as claimed in claim 6, wherein both source and drainconnections for each transistor lie substantially at and electricallycontact said same major surface.11. A photocathode as claimed in claim 6, wherein the p-type semiconductorof all the emissive elements is in the form of a single layer overlying amajor surface of said layer of semiconductor material."}
{"WKU":"039316343","Title":"Junction-isolated monolithic integrated circuit device with means for","App_Date":"1973-06-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Mark Berwyn Knight","Assignee":"RCA Corporation","ICL_Class":"H01L 2704","References":"3541357;3649887;3676714;3703669","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A monolithic integrated circuit device comprisinga substrate of semiconductor material of one type conductivity,a plurality of islands of semiconductive material of conductivity typeopposite to that of said substrate on said substrate and separated fromeach other by intermediate isolation regions of semiconductive material ofsaid one type conductivity,circuit connections within said device, said connections being such thatthe PN junction between at least one of said islands and said substrateand said isolation region is at least sometimes forward biased while thePN junctions between other islands and said substrate and isolationregions remain reverse biased,means for collecting carriers injected into said substrate and isolationregions from said at least one island at a location close to the place ofinjection, whereby said carriers do not travel to one or more of saidreverse-biased junctions,said means for collecting carriers comprising a zone of said opposite typeconductivity surrounding said at least one of said islands and separatedtherefrom by an isolation region of said one type conductivity,said device further comprising conductive means for connecting said carriercollecting zone to said isolation region, andmeans including a region of relatively high conductivity of said oppositetype conductivity in said substrate adjacent to said carrier collectingzone for reducing the effective resistance and increasing the collectionefficiency of said zone.2. A monolithic integrated circuit device as defined in claim 1, furthercomprising means for effectively reducing the injection of carriers intothe substrate 34.3. A monolithic integrated circuit device as defined in claim 2, whereinsaid means for effectively reducing the injection of carriers into thesubstrate comprises:a region of said one type conductivity, and of lower conductivity than thatof said isolation region, coupled to said isolation region and extendinginto said at least one island,said conductive means for connecting said carrier-collecting zone to saidisolation region including a highly conductive region of said oppositetype conductivity in said carrier-collecting zone, a portion of saidhighly conductive region overlapping said region of lower one typeconductivity."}
{"WKU":"039316351","Title":"Semiconductor device with a control electrode in pressure contact with","App_Date":"1974-05-07","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Dan Sundstrom","Assignee":"Allmanna Svenska Elektriska Aktiebolaget","ICL_Class":"H01L 2342;H01L 2344","References":"3437887;3536966;3599057;3673308","Claims":"I claim:1. A semiconductor device comprising a semiconductor disc, a box having abottom member and a lid member, said members being formed of a metallicmaterial and each being in electrical contact with one side of thesemiconductor disc, two rings of rigid insulating material to which saidmembers are secured, a metal ring between and secured to said rings, and acontrol electrode secured at its ends to said metal ring and extendingsubstantially diametrically thereacross, said control electrode having aprojecting contact part in engagement with one side of the semiconductordisc and of such height as to be held by the control electrode in pressurecontact with such side.2. A semiconductor as claimed in claim 1, in which said control electrodeis bent out of the plane of the metal ring on the side away from thesemiconductor disc by the engagement of said projecting contact point withthe side of the disc.3. A semiconductor device as claimed in claim 1, in which the metal ringand the control electrode are formed of an integral piece of sheet metal."}
{"WKU":"039316360","Title":"Battery conservation system for color television camera","App_Date":"1974-04-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Hans Dieter Schneider","Assignee":"Robert Bosch Fernsehanlagen G.m.b.H.","ICL_Class":"H04N  962;H04N  909","References":"2594383;3603732","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a portable color television camera designed for operation from alimited self-contained energy source and comprising three pick-up tubesfor producing video signals from different spectral components of a colorimage, three amplifier means respectively connected for amplifying videosignals from the three pick-up tubes, and auxiliary circuitry for use inconnection with the camera, the improvement comprising selectivelyoperable switch means for reducing power consumption by causing the camerato operate to produce only a black-and-white video signal when a colorvideo signal from all three pick-up tubes is not required.2. A camera according to claim 1, wherein the limited energy source is abattery.3. A camera according to claim 2, wherein the three tubes comprise a whitetube in a white channel, a red tube in a red channel, and a blue tube in ablue channel.4. A camera according to claim 3, wherein only the elements in the whitechannel and the auxiliary circuits are operated during a test mode toprovide a black-and-white video signal, and wherein the elements in thered channel and the blue channel are operated in addition during a normaloperation mode to produce a color video signal, the switch means beingselectively operable to switch between the test mode and the normaloperation mode.5. A camera according to claim 4, wherein the switch means comprises firstand second switches, each of three contact positions, ganged together, thefirst switch being connected when supplied with power to supply power fromit to the white channel and to the auxiliary circuits, the second switchbeing connected when supplied with power, to supply power from it to thered channel and to the blue channel, the two switches being ganged suchthat, when both switches are in their first contact position, no power issupplied to either switch and the camera is off, when both switches are intheir second contact position, power is supplied only to the first switch,whereby power is supplied only to the white channel and to the auxiliarycircuits to produce a black-and-white video signal, and when both switchesare in their third contact position, power is supplied to both switches,whereby power is supplied to all three channels and to the auxiliarycircuits to produce a three-channel color video signal.6. A method of operating a portable television camera including three colorchannels and auxiliary circuits in order to conserve power, comprising thesteps of:A. providing operating power to the auxiliary circuits and to only one ofthe color channels and providing no operating power to the other two colorchannels while testing the camera to generate a black-and-white videosignal from the camera, andB. providing operating power to all three color channels and to theauxiliary circuits when the camera is in ordinary operation to generate athree-channel color video signal from the camera.7. In a portable color television camera designed for operation from alimited self-contained energy source and comprising three pick-up tubesfor producing video signals from different spectral components of a colorimage, three amplifier means respectively connected for amplifying videosignals from the three pick-up tubes, and auxiliary circuitry for use inconnection with the camera, the improvement comprising selectivelyoperable switch means for selectively causing the camera to operate toproduce only a black-and-white video signal or to produce a color videosignal from all three pick-up tubes,whereby the use of power is reduced when only a black-and-white videosignal is produced, thereby reducing depletion of the energy source when acolor video signal is not required.8. In a portable color television camera designed for operation from abattery and comprising:A. three color-channel means operable by power from the battery to producethree corresponding video signals in three corresponding channelsrespectively representative of different spectral components of a colorimage, each color-channel means comprising a pick-up device andamplification means responsive to the pick-up device for producing arespective one of the three video signals, andB. auxiliary circuitry for use in connection with the camera,"}
{"WKU":"039316378","Title":"Dual channel automatic picture sharpness control","App_Date":"1974-06-14","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"David H. Carpenter","Assignee":"Matsushita Electric Corporation of America","ICL_Class":"H04N  902","References":"2514112;2584332;2717931;2910528;3706846","Claims":"What I claim is:1. In a color television receiver responsive to color television signalsand including means for receiving said color television signals, means fordemodulating said color television signals to provide video signals, meanscoupled to receive said video signals for separating said video signalsinto a luminance signal component and a chrominance signal component andmeans responsive to said video signals for providing an AGC signal havinga strength related to the strength of said video signals, the combinationof a first video shaping means, means coupling said AGC signal to saidfirst video shaping means to control the response thereof, means couplingsaid luminance signal component of said video signal to said first videoshaping means, a second video shaping means, means coupling said AGCsignal to said second video shaping means to control the response of saidsecond video shaping means, means coupling said chrominance signalcomponent to said second video shaping means, said first and second videoshaping means being responsive to the strength of said AGC signal forautomatically varying the frequency content of said luminance andchrominance signal components of said video signal.2. The invention according to claim 1 further including a chrominancedemodulator means responsive to said chrominance signal component forseparating said chrominance signal component into a plurality of colordifference signals, said second video shaping means being responsive tosaid color difference signals and said AGC signal to automatically varythe frequency content of said color difference signals in accordance withthe strength of said AGC signal.3. The invention according to claim 2 wherein said first and second videoshaping means includes a variable impedance element responsive to thestrength of said AGC signal.4. In a color television system responsive to color television signals andincluding means for receiving said color television signals, means fordemodulating said color television signals to provide video signals, meanscoupled to receive said video signals for separating said video signalsinto a luminance signal component and chrominance signal component, meansresponsive to said video signals for providing an AGC signal having astrength which varies according to the strength of said video signals, adisplay device responsive to said signals for providing a color televisionpicture display, a system for automatically varying the sharpness of thepicture displayed on the display device including a first video shapingmeans, means for coupling said AGC signal in controlling relationship tosaid first video shaping means, means for coupling said luminance signalto said first video shaping means, a second video shaping means, means forcoupling said AGC signal in controlling relationship to said second videoshaping means, means for coupling said chrominance signal component tosaid second video shaping means, said first and second video shaping meanscontrolling the luminance and chrominance signal components respectivelyin accordance with the strength of said AGC signal to increase thesharpness of the image displayed on the display device when said AGCsignal strength increases and to decrease the sharpness of the imagedisplayed on the display device when the strength of said video signaldecreases.5. An automatic sharpness control for use in a television receivercomprising means for receiving television signals, means responsive tosaid received television signals for demodulating the received signals andproviding a video signal, means responsive to said video signals forseparating said video signals into a luminance and a chrominance signalcomponent, means responsive to said video signals for providing an AGCsignal responsive to the amplitude of said received signal, a displaydevice, means for applying said luminance signal component and chrominancesignal component of said color video signal to said display deviceincluding first and second video shaping means coupled to receive said AGCsignal, means for applying said luminance signal to said first videoshaping means and means for applying said chrominance signal to saidsecond video shaping means, said AGC signal automatically varying theresponse of each of said video shaping means to independently control thefrequency content of said luminance signal component and said chrominancesignal component in response to the strength of said AGC signal forcontrolling the sharpness of the image displayed on said display device."}
{"WKU":"039316386","Title":"Apparatus for modifying the time base of signals","App_Date":"1974-01-10","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert A. Lentz;James U. Lemke","Assignee":"Eastman Technology, Inc.","ICL_Class":"H04N  579","References":"3080487;3197739;3210464;3564434;3580991;3666880;3749837;3758710;3761646;3860952","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. Apparatus for removing flutter from a train of TV line-representativesignals, comprising:a. means for comparing the phase of sync signals in said signal train withreference signals occurring at a normal sync rate, thereby to produce aphase error signal,b. means for producing a first clock signal having a predeterminedfrequency,c. means responsive to said phase error signal to produce a second clocksignal having a frequency which varies with respect to said predeterminedfrequency and in proportion to said phase error signal,d. first and second analog shift register means for storing a predeterminednumber of samples of said line-representative signals,e. means for alternately applying said first clock signal to said first andsecond analog shift register means at the line frequency of signals insaid train and, simultaneously, applying said second clock signalalternately to said second and first analog shift register means, wherebysignal samples are clocked out of one register means at said predeterminedfrequency while signal samples are clocked into the other register meansat a flutter dependent rate,f. means for counting the clocks of said first and second clock signals,andg. means responsive to sync signals in said train thereof, and to thecounts of said first and second clock signals to block all but videoinformation from being processed via said analog shift register means.2. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein said analog shift register means eachhave a corresponding number of stages greater than about 200.3. In combination with a video tape recorder, apparatus for removingflutter from a train of TV line-representative signals played back by saidrecorder, comprising:a. means for comparing the phase of sync signals in said signal train withreference signals occurring at a normal sync rate, thereby to produce aphase error signal,b. means for producing a first clock signal having a predeterminedfrequency,c. means responsive to said phase error signal to produce a second clocksignal having a frequency which varies with respect to said predeterminedfrequency and in proportion to said phase error signal,d. first and second analog shift register means for storing a predeterminednumber of samples of said line-representative signals,e. means for alternately applying said first clock signal to said first andsecond analog shift register means at the line frequency of signals insaid train and, simultaneously, applying said second clock signalalternately to said second and first analog shift register means, wherebysignal samples are clocked out of one register means at said predeterminedfrequency while signal samples are clocked into the other register meansat a flutter dependent rate,f. means for counting the clocks of said first and second clock signals,andg. means responsive to sync signals in said train thereof, and to thecounts of said first and second clock signals to block all but videoinformation from being processed via said analog shift register means."}
{"WKU":"039316394","Title":"Transverse track location device with calibrated stepper motor","App_Date":"1974-07-12","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Nelson Kay Arter;George William Brock;Howard Carl Jackson;James Warren Leggate","Assignee":"International Business Machines Corporation","ICL_Class":"G11B 2104;G11B 1546","References":"3358080;3644813;3805286;3845500","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. The method of operating a helical scan tape recorder of the incrementalstep type, including the steps of,moving the tape to a stripe a preset number of stripes ahead of a firststripe to be transduced,presetting a tachometer move control to a given number supposedlyrepresentative of a number of tach pulses between adjacent stripe centerlines,stepping the tape a stripe at a time toward said first stripe said presetnumber of stripes,sensing stripe location data, andadjusting said given number in accordance with said stripe location dataand which of said preset number of stripes said stripe location datarepresents.2. The method set forth in claim 1 further including the steps ofregistering said stripe location data as offset errors, andcounting the number of offset errors of like signs that occur in a row andadjusting said given number in accordance with the number of successiveoffset errors with like signs.3. The method set forth in claim 1 further including the steps of,counting the number of preset stripes from which stripe location data hasbeen obtained,adjusting said given number at a first frequency of stripes for subset ofsaid preset numbers,adjusting said given number at a second frequency of stripes for theremainder of said preset number of stripes, andmoving the tape from stripe to stripe for transducing operations andadjusting said given number only when a predetermined number of successiveoffsets have like signs wherein said predetermined number represents afrequency of change substantially less than the frequency of change insaid preset number of stripes.4. The method set forth in claim 1 further including,moving a head across stripe to be sensed at least twice and sensing thestripe location data only upon the last traversal of the head past thestripe whereby the tape has settled from being stepped to a new stripelocation before such stripe location data is used for several controlpurposes.5. A helical scan tape recorder having a rotating head for traversing arecord tape along parallel disposed record stripes wherein the tape has alongitudinally extending servo track to be sensed by said rotating head,including means for detecting and indicating track offsets together withdirections of offset, a position control servo for positioning the tape inincremental steps;the improvement including in combination:means detecting that a given offset is greater than a predetermined offset,means counting a successive number of such predetermined offsets that occurin a row in a given direction,average step size register means indicating the number of stripestraversed,step size control means jointly responsive to said number of stripes beingtraversed and said offset threshold indicator to alter the signal contentsof said average step size register means, andmeans for selectively transferring signal contents of said average stepsize register means to said position control servo.6. The apparatus set forth in claim 5 further including in combination:a step distance counter and adder interposed between said transferringmeans and said position servo means and responsive to tape transport todecrement to a given reference number, andjitter control means responsive to said offset register signal contentsbeing a given number and to the sign of said offset to alter signalcontents of said step distance counter adder on each receipt from saidaverager step size register means.7. Apparatus set forth in claim 5 wherein said stripe counter has a presetmodulus in having first and second output control signals respectivelyindicating that a first and second number of stripes have been stepped andthe control output signal indicating that transducing operation should beoccurring;said increment control means being responsive to said first and secondoutput signals to alter the said signal content of said average step sizeregister including first means responsive to the sign of said offset plusa number of successive offsets of a given sign in a row in said firstnumber of stripes to alter said signal content by a first amount, andsecond means responsive to a number of successive offsets in a row of agiven sign plus said second number of stripes to alter said signal contentby a second amount less than said first amount.8. Apparatus as set forth in claim 5 further including in combination:servo error detecting means responsive to an error condition to freeze thestep size of the servo."}
{"WKU":"039316408","Title":"Automatic flexible record feeding device","App_Date":"1974-03-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Ichiro Takahara;Tadahiko Yabu;Takashi Miwa","Assignee":"Sanyo Electric Company, Ltd.","ICL_Class":"G11B 1704;G11B  5012;G11B  580","References":"2946593;3158366;3506258;3836731","Claims":"What we claimed is:1. A record feeding device for use in association with a video disc recordof the type utilizing a flexible foil-type disc adapted to be driven onlyat its center at a relatively high speed and concurrently adapted to hoveron a rotation-induced air cushion above a stationary table during rotationof said disc record, said record feeding device comprising:a cylindrical transfer roll supported above and adjacent to an outerperipheral portion of the stationary table for rotation about thelongitudinal fixed axis thereof, said longitudinal axis of saidcylindrical transfer roll extending parallel to the plane of a jacketreceiving surface on which a jacket, accommodating therein said flexiblefoil-type record, is placed and also to the plane of said stationarytable, said longitudinal axis further extending at right angles to theaxis of rotation of said disc record, said cylindrical transfer rollhaving at least one escapement recess means on the outer peripheralsurface thereof, said escapement recess means being inwardly recessed fromthe outer peripheral surface of said transfer roll and extendingsubstantially over the total width of said transfer roll, said cylindricaltransfer roll being adapted to rotate in one direction to transport theflexible foil-type disc record from the jacket receiving surface onto saidstationary table in readiness for the disc record to be rotated and alsoto rotate in the opposite direction to transfer the same disc record fromthe stationary table back to said jacket receiving surface, wherein saidcylindrical transfer roll does not rotate during rotation of the flexiblefoil-type record, wherein when said disc record is to be transported fromsaid jacket receiving surface to said stationary table and from saidstationary table back to said jacket receiving surface, said escapementrecess means is positioned adjacent to and clear of an outer peripheralportion of said disc record, and wherein when said disc record is rotatingabove said stationary table, said escapement recess means is in a positionto avoid interference between said disc record and said transfer roll; andcooperative means which cooperate with said transfer roll for causing saiddisc record to move between said jacket receiving surface and saidstationary table in response to rotation of said transfer roll, saidcooperative means and said transfer roll defining a curved paththerebetween coaxial with the longitudinal axis of said transfer roll forthe passage of said disc record between said jacket receiving surface andsaid stationary table, said disc record when moved through said curvedpath during rotation of said transfer roll in any of said directionshaving the opposite surfaces frictionally and slidingly contacting saidtransfer roll and cooperative means, respectively.2. A record feeding device as claimed in claim 1, wherein said transferroll includes a friction lining lined on the outer peripheral surface ofsaid transfer roll, said friction lining being made of elastic materialhaving a relatively high frictional coefficient.3. A record feeding device as claimed in claim 2, wherein said cooperativemeans comprises a back-up guide positioned on one side of the transferroll remote from the stationary table and having an inwardly roundedsurface facing said transfer roll to define the curved path between it andsaid transfer roll.4. A record feeding device as claimed in claim 2, wherein said cooperativemeans comprises a portion of the stationary table adjacent the outerperiphery thereof, said portion being inwardly rounded to fit to thecurvature of said transfer roll to define the curved path between it andsaid transfer roll."}
{"WKU":"039316416","Title":"Transducer suspension mount apparatus","App_Date":"1974-08-22","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Robert B. Watrous","Assignee":"International Business Machines Corporation","ICL_Class":"G11B  548;G11B 2116;G11B  560","References":"3310792;3582920;3599193;3665434;3668668;3701610","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A magnetic head arm assembly defining a longitudinal axis comprising:a rigid arm section;a spring element joined to said arm section formed with a flanged channeland a rectangular type flexure at its free end, said flexure having twoouter flexible fingers parallel to said longitudinal axis joined at theirends by a relatively wider cross leg and a third inner finger extendingfrom said cross leg with a free end centrally located and parallel to saidtwo outer flexible fingers;a load beam positioned within said channel; anda load protuberance on said third finger with which said load beam makescontact.2. A magnetic head arm assembly as in claim 1, wherein said spring elementis substantially symmetrical about said longitudinal axis.3. A magnetic head arm assembly as in claim 1, including a magnetic headair bearing slider mounted to said third finger.4. A magnetic head arm assembly as in claim 3, wherein said loadprotuberance is located on said longitudinal axis, and on an intersectingaxis perpendicular to said longitudinal axis and bisecting said flexure,so that said flexure may pitch and roll about said axes in response tochanges in the air bearing applied to said slider.5. A magnetic head arm assembly as in claim 4, wherein said loadprotuberance is located at the center of gravity of said slider.6. A magnetic head arm assembly as in claim 1, including a mount segmentjoined to said arm section, for attachment to a bidirectional actuator.7. A magnetic head arm assembly as in claim 1, wherein said flanged channelis substantially triangular.8. A magnetic head arm assembly as in claim 1, wherein said rectangulartype flexure includes two crosslegs joined to said two outer flexiblefingers, said crosslegs being substantially orthogonal to saidlongitudinal axis and said flexible fingers, said crosslegs being widerthan said flexible fingers.9. A magnetic head arm assembly as in claim 1, wherein said load beam hasan offset portion for contacting said protuberance.10. Apparatus for supporting a transducer head comprising:a substantially flat and thin resilient arm element having a rectangularflexure cut-out formed at a free end, said flexure cut-out including twoouter flexible fingers extending in the plane of said element from itsfree end and joined at their ends by a less flexible cross leg, andincluding a flexible third finger in the plane of the flexure cut-outextending from said cross leg into the rectangular cut-out;a load protuberance on said third finger; anda load beam fastened to said arm and positioned into contact with said loadprotuberance.11. An apparatus as described in claim 10 further including an air bearingslider mounted to said third finger.12. An apparatus as described in claim 11 wherein said load protuberance islocated on a longitudinal axis formed by said arm element and said loadbeam, and on an intersecting orthogonal axis bisecting said flexure, sothat said flexure may pitch and roll about said axes in response tochanges in the air bearing applied to said slider.13. An apparatus as described in claim 10 wherein said spring element issubstantially triangular, with a triangular cut-out section formingchannels flanged for stiffening.14. An apparatus as described in claim 13 wherein said rectangular flexurecut-out includes cross legs substantially orthogonal to said flexiblefingers and to a longitudinal axis formed by said arm element and saidload beam, said cross legs being wider than said flexible fingers.15. A cantilever support for supporting a slider structure in a floatingfluid bearing environment comprising:a rigid arm section supported at one end;a resilient arm element fastened on one end to said rigid arm section, saidelement having a rectangular flexure cut-out formed at a free end, saidflexure cut-out including two outer flexible fingers extending in theplane of said element from its free end and joined at their ends by arelatively wider cross leg, and including a flexible third finger in theplane of the flexure cut-out extending from said cross leg into therectangular cut-out, said slider structure being mounted to said thirdfinger;a stiffening section formed on said resilient arm element extending betweensaid flexure cut-out approximately to said rigid arm section;a load protuberance on said third finger; anda load beam fastened to said stiffening section and positioned into contactwith said load protuberance;wherein said load protuberance is located on a longitudinal axis formed bysaid rigid arm section, said resilient arm element, and said load beam,and on an intersecting axis perpendicular to said longitudinal axisbisecting said flexure, such that said flexure may pitch and roll aboutsaid axes in response to changes in the air bearing applied to saidslider."}
{"WKU":"039316424","Title":"Magnetic head and method of making the same","App_Date":"1973-06-15","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Koichi Kugimiya;Eiichi Hirota","Assignee":"Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"G11B  514;G11B  5221","References":"2992474;3663767;3676610","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A magnetic head comprising a magnetic core having a winding woundthereon, said magnetic core being a ferrite body having the shape of thecore and being composed of crystallites which have the(111)-crystallographic planes thereof substantially oriented parallel witheach other.2. A magnetic head as claimed in claim 1, wherein said magnetic head has asurface adapted to be contacted by a recording medium when the head is inuse, said surface being substantially perpendicular to said substantiallyoriented (111)-planes.3. A magnetic head as claimed in claim 2, wherein said (111)-planes aresubstantially perpendicular to the direction in which the recording mediumruns across said surface.4. A magnetic head as claimed in claim 2, wherein said (111)-planes aresubstantially parallel to the direction in which the recording medium runsacross said surface.5. A magnetic head as claimed in claim 1, wherein said magnetic head has asurface adapted to be contacted by a recording medium when the head is inuse, said surface being substantially parallel to said substantiallyoriented (111)-planes.6. A magnetic head as claimed in claim 1 in which said crystallites are of.alpha.-Fe.sub.2 O.sub.3.7. A method of making a ferrite body composed of crystallites which havethe (111)-crystallographic planes thereof substantially oriented parallelwith each other and from which a magnetic core for use in a magnetic headfor recording on and reproducing from a magnetic medium can be exsected byconventional cutting, polishing, and like steps, the method comprising thesteps of mixing starting materials consisting of an .alpha.-Fe.sub.2O.sub.3 powder in an amount of at least 55% by weight the particles ofwhich have a thin disc shape and the balance conventional compounds forforming a ferrite composition, cold-pressing the mixture into acold-pressed body by a uniaxial pressure and sintering said cold-pressedbody into a solid body, whereby crystallites of the sintered body havesaid (111)-planes substantially oriented.8. A method of making a ferrite body as claimed in claim 7, wherein said.alpha.-Fe.sub.2 O.sub.3 powder has an average grain size ranging from0.1.mu. to 60.mu..9. A method of making a ferrite body as claimed in claim 7, wherein said.alpha.-Fe.sub.2 O.sub.3 powder has an average grain size ranging from0.1.mu. to 30.mu..10. A method of making a ferrite body as claimed in claim 7, wherein said.alpha.-Fe.sub.2 O.sub.3 powder has an average grain size ranging from0.5.mu. to 15.mu..11. A method of making a ferrite body as claimed in claim 7, wherein saidbalance of said starting materials include at least one compound selectedfrom the group consisting of decomposed materials of .gamma.MnOOH,.alpha.-FeOOH, Co(OH).sub.2, Mg(OH).sub.2 and Ni(OH).sub.2.12. A method of making a ferrite body as claimed in claim 7, wherein saidcold-pressed body is sintered under conditions so as to produce a sinteredbody having an average grain size at least 2-times larger than that ofsaid .alpha.-Fe.sub.2 O.sub.3 powder.13. A method of making a ferrite body as claimed in claim 7, wherein saidcold-pressed body is hot-pressed by applying a uniaxial pressure in adirection coinciding substantially with the direction of said uniaxialpressure of cold-pressing.14. A method of making a ferrite body as claimed in claim 7, wherein thestep of mixing said starting materials further comprises mixing them withwater or alcohol in a volume more than total volume of said startingmaterials.15. A method of making a ferrite body as claimed in claim 7, wherein saidcold-pressed body is further compacted into a denser body, before thesintering step, by applying high isostatic pressure.16. A method of making a ferrite body as claimed in claim 7, wherein saidbalance of said starting materials starting materials include at least onecompound selected from the group consisting of .gamma.-MnOOH,.alpha.-FeOOH, Co(OH).sub.2, Mg(OH).sub.2 and Ni(OH).sub.2.17. A method of making a ferrite body as claimed in claim 16, wherein said.alpha.-Fe.sub.2 O.sub.3 powder and said at least one compound selectedfrom the group consisting of .gamma.-MnOOH, .alpha.-FeOOH, Co(OH).sub.2,Mg(OH).sub.2 and Ni(OH).sub.2 are present in said starting materials inweight not less than 65 percent of said starting materials.18. A method of making a magnetic head, comprising making a ferrite bodycomposed of crystallites which have the (111)-crystallographic planesthereof substantially oriented parallel with each other by the steps ofmixing starting materials consisting of an .alpha.-Fe.sub.2 O.sub.3 powderthe particles of which have a thin disc shape and the balance otherconventional compounds for forming a ferrite composition in a weight ratioof a ferrite composition, cold-pressing the mixture into a cold-pressedbody by a uniaxial pressure and sintering said cold-pressed body into asolid body, whereby crystallites of the sintered body have said(111)-planes substantially oriented, and exsecting from said solid body amagnetic head having a surface adapted to be contacted by a recordingmedium when the head is in use, said surface being substantially parallelto said substantially oriented (111)-planes.19. A method of making a magnetic head, comprising making a ferrite bodycomposed of crystallites which have the (111)-crystallographic planesthereof substantially oriented parallel with each other by the steps ofmixing starting materials consisting of an .alpha.-Fe.sub.2 O.sub.3 powderthe particles of which have a thin disc shape and the balance otherconventional compounds for forming a ferrite composition in a weight ratioof a ferrite composition, cold-pressing the mixture into a cold-pressedbody by a uniaxial pressure and sintering said cold-pressed body into asolid body, whereby crystallites of the sintered body have said(111)-planes substantially oriented, and exsecting from said solid body amagnetic head having a surface adapted to be contacted by a recordingmedium when the head is in use, said surface being sutstantiallyperpendicular to said substantially oriented (111)-planes.20. A ferrite body for a magnetic core for use in a magnetic head, saidferrite body being composed of crystallites which have the(111)-crystallographic planes thereof substantially oriented parallel witheach other.21. A ferrite body as claimed in claim 20 in which said crystallites are of.alpha.-Fe.sub.2 O.sub.3."}
{"WKU":"039316432","Title":"Magnetic head cleaning tape cartridge for use in magnetic recording and","App_Date":"1974-04-08","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Akio Kuroe","Assignee":"Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.","ICL_Class":"G11B  541;B47L 2500","References":"3069815;3439922;3789452","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. In a magnetic recording-reproducing apparatus of a rotary havingautomatic threading means and automatic rewinding means in which windingof a tape is stopped before initiating the rewinding operation, a magnetichead cleaning tape cartridge, comprising:a. a leader tape of high light transmissivity;b. a cleaning tape connected to said leader tape and made of fibrousmaterial, said cleaning tape having less light transmissivity than saidleader tape;c. a polishing tape connected to said cleaning tape and including anabrasive material which is less abrasive than said fibrous material, saidpolishing tape having less light transmissivity than said leader tape;d. a trailer tape of high light transmissivity connected to said polishingtape;e. a single reel around which is wound a composite tape including saidleader, cleaning, polishing and trailer tapes; andf. a cartridge case rotatably housing said single reel therein;g. the length of said leader, cleaning, polishing, and trailer tapes beingsuch that said polishing tape is located on the rotary head when saidcomposite tape is stopped before initiating the rewinding operation.2. A magnetic head cleaning tape cartridge as defined in claim 1 whereinsaid cleaning tape further comprises a thin-film tape, made of organiccompounds, on one side of which said fibrous material is bonded.3. A magnetic head cleaning tape cartridge as defined in claim 2 whereinsaid cleaning tape further comprises an adhesive, mixed with a substanceof less light transmissivity than said leader tape, which bonds saidfibrous material to said thin-film tape.4. A magnetic head cleaning tape cartridge as defined in claim 2 whereinsaid cleaning tape further comprises a layer of less light transmissivitythan said leader tape connected to the other side of said thin-film tape.5. A magnetic head cleaning tape cartridge as defined in claim 1 whereinsaid polishing tape comprises a magnetic tape having prerecorded videosignals.6. A magnetic head cleaning tape cartridge as defined in claim 1 whereinthe fibrous material of said cleaning tape is silk.7. A magnetic head cleaning tape cartridge as defined in claim 1 whereinthe fibrous material of said cleaning tape is hemp."}
{"WKU":"039316440","Title":"Jacket for a magnetic disk recording assembly","App_Date":"1975-03-03","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Paul F. Ward","Assignee":"Information Terminals Corporation","ICL_Class":"G11B 2302;G11B 2504","References":"3416150;3662360;3668658;3678481;3770908;3815150;3845502","Claims":"I claim:1. A magnetic disk recording assembly comprising:a polygonal jacket having a pair of opposed, generally flat sidespresenting a disk-receiving space therebetween, the jacket further havinga notch at one corner thereof, the notch presenting an opening between theadjacent portions of said sides, each side having a central aperturetherethrough, one of the sides having a radial slot therein extendingbetween and spaced from the corresponding aperture and an outer margin ofthe corresponding side;a disk rotatably disposed within said space and having a central holealigned with said apertures, said disk having a surface provided with acoating of magnetic material thereon, said surface being exposed throughsaid slot;means coupling the outer margins of the sides together to retain the diskin said space; andmeans between the sides and only in the immediate vicinity of the notch forclosing the opening and for reinforcing said adjacent portions of thesides.2. An assembly as set forth in claim 1, wherein said jacket is formed froman initially flat sheet of material with the sheet being folded along aline defining one outer margin of the jacket, a first of said sides havingflap means partially overlapping the other side and being secured thereto,said flap means defining said coupling means.3. An assembly as set forth in claim 1, wherein said closing andreinforcing means comprises a relatively rigid member having an edgesubstantially complemental to the edges of the sides which define thenotch.4. An assembly as set forth in claim 3, wherein said member has an inneredge spaced from the disk, said jacket being free of rigidifyingstructure, with the exception of said member, between the outer peripheryof the disk and the outer margins of the jacket.5. A jacket for a magnetic disk recording assembly comprising:a polygonal body having a pair of opposed, generally flat sides presentinga disk-receiving space therebetween, said body further having a notch atone corner thereof, the notch presenting an opening between the adjacentportions of said sides, each side having a central aperture therethrough,one of the sides having a radial slot therein extending between and spacedfrom the corresponding aperture and an outer margin of the correspondingside, said slot being adapted to expose a portion of the surface of a diskin said space;means for coupling the outer margins of said sides together to therebyretain a disk in said space; andmeans positionable between the sides and adjacent to said notch for closingthe opening and for reinforcing said adjacent portions of said sides.6. A jacket as set forth in claim 5, wherein said body is formed from aninitially flat sheet of material with the sheet being folded along a linedefining one outer margin of the body, a first of said sides having flapmeans partially overlapping the other side and being secured thereto, saidflap means defining said coupling means.7. A jacket as set forth in claim 5, wherein said closing and reinforcingmeans comprises a relatively rigid member having an edge substantiallycomplemental to the edges which define the notch.8. A jacket as set forth in claim 7, wherein said member has an inner edgespaced from the disk, said jacket being free of rigidifying structure,with the exception of said member, between the outer periphery of the diskand the outer margins of the body.9. A jacket as set forth in claim 7, wherein said member is adhesivelybonded to the inner surfaces of said adjacent portions of the sides.10. A jacket as set forth in claim 7, wherein the member is formed ofplastic and has an inner edge spaced from the outer periphery of a diskwhen the latter is in said space."}
{"WKU":"039316459","Title":"Flexible disk storage apparatus having disks of various radii for","App_Date":"1974-08-29","Issue_Date":"1976-01-06","Inventor":"Paul D. Dodd;Donald E. Griffiths","Assignee":"International Business Machines Corporation","ICL_Class":"G11B  582;G11B 2102;G11B  5016;G11B  5012","References":"3852820","Claims":"What is claimed is:1. A flexible disk assembly, including in combination:a center support;a plurality of flexible record indicia type disk members of various radiicoaxially disposed on said support in at least one group of a plurality ofsuch disks; andsaid group having a pair of outer disk members with a maximum radius, andat least one disk member axially interleaved between said outer diskmembers and having a smaller radius than said outer disk members and apair of minimum radii disk members with radii less than the radius of saidone disk member respectively axially interleaved between said outer andsaid one disk member for enhancing axial selection of any one of saidflexible disks in said group.2. The assembly set forth in claim 1 wherein said minimum radius disks areaxially alternately disposed on said support with disks of other than saidminimum radius.3. A flexible disk assembly, including in combination:a center support;a plurality greater than three of circular record indicia type diskscoaxially disposed on said support;said disks having different radii between a maximum radius and a minimumradius and at least one disk having an intermediate radius greater thansaid minimum and less than said maximum radius; andaxially alternate ones of said disks having said minimum radius.4. The assembly set forth in claim 3 having three disks axially interleavedbetween each two of said disks with said maximum radius and which areaxially adjacent and two of said three disks having said minimum radius.5. The assembly set forth in claim 3 having a pair of axially spaced-apartones of said maximum radius disks;a first one disk having a radius next to maximum and axially spacedcentrally between said pair of maximum radius disks; anda pair of second one disks having a second next to maximum radius andaxially spaced centrally between said first one disk and said pair ofmaximum radius disks.6. The assembly set forth in claim 5 further including a plurality of saidpairs of maximum radius disks wherein said plurality less one of saidmaximum radius disks are in two axially adjacent pairs and each said diskhaving a radius either greater than or less than both axially adjacentones of said disks.7. The assembly set forth in claim 3 having a plurality greater than threedisks between any two most axially adjacent minimum radius disks, aplurality of said one disks axially interposed between said any twomaximum radius disks with differing radii and being axially symmetricallydisposed in accordance with said differing radii.8. A flexible disk assembly, including in combination:a center support;a plurality of record indicia type circular disks coaxially disposed onsaid support, different ones of said disks having at least three differentradii; anda plurality of minimum radius disks axially alternatively disposed withdisks having other than said minimum radius.9. The assembly set forth in claim 8 wherein said disks having other thansaid minimum radius have an increasing axial spacing from like radiusdisks in accordance with increasing radius for all disks axiallyintermediate and up to, but not including, disks having a maximum radiuswhereby the greater the radius, the greater the axial spacing from a diskhaving a like radius between any two of said maximum radius disks.10. The assembly set forth in claim 8 having plural sets of disks ofdifferent radii with disks in each set of disks being axially spaced anequal axial distance with some greater radii disks having a greater axialspacing than lesser radii disks and some of said greater radii disks ofdifferent sets having identical spacings and said sets each having disksthat are axially interleaved.11. A flexible disk assembly, including in combination:a center support;a plurality of record indicia type circular disks coaxially disposed onsaid center support;a plurality of first ones of said disks each having a maximum radius;a first plurality of second ones of said disks each having a minimum radiusand a smaller plurality than said first plurality of said second one disksaxially interleaved between two of said first one disks; anda plurality of third ones of said disks each having a radius intermediatesaid minimum and maximum radii and axially interleaved between said firstone disks and including at least one of said third one disks axiallydisposed between any two of said first one disks."}